If you want to learn how to create enduring engagement, avoid common pitfalls, and connect with listeners in a way that actually matters, this episode is for you.

Here’s what I cover in this week’s “Podcast Stew” styled episode (which includes chapters).

1000 True Fans

• Why a “thousand true fans” might just be your biggest business advantage (and how focusing on your core audience beats chasing the casual crowd).
• Lessons from YouTube experts (Rocks Codes, Stephen Bartlett, Mr. Beast, Marques Brownlee) on where to put your energy if you want to succeed, and the role thumbnails, titles, and discovery play in growth
• My thoughts on competing with “the big guys” - what you should (and shouldn’t) compare against, and why joy matters
• Independent vs. networked podcasting: Candid stories from the Young and Profiting team, the Midas Touch podcast, and why control is crucial
• The truth about monetization—when is the right time (and why “3% conversion” is the real number to expect)
• Behind the curtain of podcast business stats: Lessons from Goal Hanger, ad revenue, and memberships
• Platform realities: Spotify’s “walled garden,” why I recommend “anybody but Spotify” for hosting, and insights from James Cridland at Podnews
• The importance of fun and fulfillment: advice from LeBron James and Charlie Puth on why loving the work is the true engine for longevity
• How to effectively use calls-to-action: Taking lessons from an Audible ad in “Project Hail Mary” and why going “deeper” with your fans matters

Links mentioned this week:

School of Podcasting

Podpage

Podnews Report Card

How to Pitch a Podcast Show (Coming Soon!).

Creators Hub in Spotify

Apple Podcasts Hub

Whether you’re launching, growing, or just rethinking your show’s direction, this episode is packed with honest stories and actionable advice, plus a dash of inspiration to help you stay true to your voice and audience. As always, if you want to go deeper, join the free School of Podcasting

Thanks for listening! Don’t forget to share with a friend who needs a reminder that influence starts with true connection.

Mentioned in This Show

Oxford Road The Media Roundtable Episode

Sound Off Podcast (Matt Cundill interviews Doug Downs)

Why MKBHD Told Netflix: "Don't Bother on Jon Youshaei channel

What Podcasting Can Learn From YouTube Growth with Rox Codes (Podbiz with Norma Jean Belenky)

Lisa Kudrow on Vanity Fair Channel

Sounds Profitable The Download

James Cridland on Spotify's Features "Coming Soon."

Jordan Harbinger Talks YouTube on New Media Show with Rob Greenlee

Charlie Puth on Rick Beato Channel

Project Hail Mary Trailer

Big Lash Energy Interview

Audible (aff link)

Mentioned in this episode:

See Your Show On Podpage

If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

Podpage

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Live Appearances

I will be at the Empower Podcasting Conference (Year 3!) in Charlotte North Carolina. This is my favorite type of conference with a cap at 250 people, it's a great crowd without being overwhelming. Great speakers, great networking, and a great location.

Where Will I Be?

Join the School of Podcasting Today - Your Future Self Will Thank You

Stepping out of your comfort zone isn't easy, but at the School of Podcasting, we're here to make it feel like second nature. With our expertly crafted courses and an incredible community, you're never alone in your journey. From planning and launching to growing your podcast, I’ll be right by your side every step of the way. Remember, every podcast episode builds connections and opens doors to future opportunities. Take action today, and let your future self reap the rewards.

School of Podcasting

Participants

You’ll hear from Kim Newlove (The Pharmacist’s Voice, Perrysburg Podcast), Steve Stewart (podcast editor extraordinaire), Todd ‘the Gator’ (Guardian Down Roundtable, Lessons in the Rear View), and York (Welcome to Earth Stories) as they unpack the habits that drive them nuts: from bad audio and buried leads to ad overload, lazy interview questions, sloppy terminology, and more.

You’ll walk away knowing exactly what turns listeners off - and how to fix it. I’ll also share my own take on ads, monetization, and why a little creativity can still set your show apart in 2026

The Most Popular Pet Peeves

• Too many/poorly placed ads (especially mid-roll and early heavy ad blocks)
• Not getting to the point / burying the lead / unclear episode direction
• Lack of preparation (hosts winging it, talking in circles, not prepping guests)
• Sloppy language and terminology (“podcast” vs “episode,” “podcasting” vs “podcasts,” RSS vs not)
• Wasting listener time with meta-chatter, overlong intros, and “Tell me about yourself” questions

I do this question every year, and as you might imagine, this list doesn't change much. This year seems like advertisements were the top peeve.

Is Everyone Going to use the "YouTube Annoying Your Audience to Death" strategy, and use tools like Supercast and Patreon, and offer an ad-free version?

Mentioned In This Episode

School of Podcasting

Podpage - Podcast Websites

The Pharmacist's Voice

The Perrysburg Podcast

Steve Stewart

Podcast Editors Academy

Welcome to Earth Stories

Guardian Down Roundtable

Lessons in the Rear View

Ask the Podcast Coach

Podcasting Observations (Dave's Newsletter)

School of Podcasting Follow Page

Patreon

Supercast

OP3 Open Source Stats

Truefans.FM

Mentioned in this episode:

Get Some Feedback On Your Show

“Want honest, helpful feedback on your podcast? At the School of Podcasting, we host ‘Listening Parties’ where members share short clips and get constructive, encouraging critiques from fellow podcasters and myself. It’s a safe, supportive way to hear what’s working, fix what’s not, and make your show stronger fast.”

School of Podcasting

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Give Your Podcast A Home

When you look at our podcasting pieces, your media host is the engine. But your website is the home. It’s where your audience learns who you are, explores your episodes, and decides to subscribe. At Podpage, we build podcast websites that are fast, reliable, and designed to convert visitors into listeners. Every episode is automatically published, SEO-optimized, and structured for growth—so you can focus on creating, not managing your site. If your media host powers your podcast, Podpage gives it a place to live—and a place to grow. Start building your podcast’s home with Podpage by going to www.podpage.com/preview and start your 14 day free trial today.

Podpage

New Free Tier

We’re adding a free tier, more courses, and even a way for you to connect with podcasting experts. This is all about making the podcasting journey smoother and more accessible for everyone.

Brenden and I have a vision for the future, and it’s about empowering you to take your podcasting game to the next level. If you’ve ever wanted to launch a podcast, or if you’re already knee-deep in it and looking for ways to monetize, we’ve got you covered. We’re building a community where you can learn, grow, and thrive, and I’m more excited than ever to be a part of your podcasting journey.

So, let’s get to work and see what we can do together!

My Favorite CRM

I'm not making this up. My favorite CRM is call "Less Annoying CRM. Its s a simple, no-frills customer relationship management tool built specifically for small businesses, solopreneurs, and anyone who feels overwhelmed by complex CRMs. It focuses on the essentials: tracking contacts, managing leads, organizing tasks, and keeping a clear sales pipeline (although I don't use the pipleline tool)

Takeaways:

1. This week, we celebrated the acquisition of the School of Podcasting by PodPage, which is a huge deal.
2. I went from living in my brother's basement after a divorce to running a successful podcasting business, talk about an upgrade.
3. Relationships are key in podcasting; it's wild how many people you meet that can help you out.
4. We’re excited to expand the School of Podcasting, bringing more courses and experts for everyone to learn from.
5. This merger means more time and resources to create better content for our community, so stay tuned!
6. Don't worry, if you’re already a member, nothing changes except for more value coming your way!

Links referenced in this episode:

1. schoolofpodcasting.com
2. podpage.com
3. podnews.net
4. Less Annoying CRM
5. Last week's episode on Podcasting SEO
6. PodSEO
7. Heartbeat - Community and Courses Platform

Mentioned in this episode:

Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

Podcasting Observations

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

School of Podcasting

See Your Show On Podpage

If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

Podpage

Podcast Search Optimization VS Search Engine Optimization

So what is the difference? In reality not much. Tools like Podseo and PSO and Ausha show you information on how often keywords are being search in Apple and Spotify (and others). SEO tools show what people are searching for in Google and other places (YouTube, TikTok, and more).

So THE question is, do people search differently in a Podcast App vs how they search Google? For me, I don't think so. I might just type a keyword "Podcasting Best Practices" where in Google I would type "Podcasting Best Practices Podcast."

Keyword Research Boils Dow To This

Find a keyword that has a fair number of people searching for (somewhere between 20-100 searches), and see how much competition it has. Instead of trying to score for a really popular keyword, score multiple times with less popular (but still be sought after) key words with less competition. Mom said "Don't go play in traffic," but that's what you need to do - but no on the free way.

What is Your Domain Authority?

SEMRush (a great suite of tools) has a domain authority checker.

Tools To Boost Your Podcast SEO on the Web

Free Keyword Tool (That Sucks IMHO)

https://www.wordstream.com/keywords

Google Keyword Tool (Inside of Adsense Account)

https://ads.google.com

Go to Tools > Planning > Keyword Planner (Free and unlimited use)

Keywords Everywhere

Extension for Chrome and Firefox $7/month. Helps you measure traffic and competition for keywords.

https://keywordseverywhere.com/

Also Asked (see what people are asking)

1 Free search a Day or $12/month

https://alsoasked.com/

Answer Socrates

3 searches a day

$15/month gets you 100 searches a month

https://answersocrates.com

Ubsersuggest

Shows key word competition and more. It's a suite of tools to help find keywords, and write articles.$29/month.$290 Lifetime (credits thanks to AI)

https://ubersuggest.com

SERanking

A full suite of tools that helps you create content, competitor comparisons and more. $129/month

https://www.sewranking.com

SEMRUSH

Consider by many people to be "THE" suite of SEO tools (especially finding tools that your competitor is not using, and you should). $139/month

https://www.semrush.com

Page Audit Chrome Extension

A chrome extension that shows all sorts of information about a page so you can then write a similar page that will rank better.

Chrome Extension

Two Tools Dedicated For Podcast SEO

While I'm not sure there is much difference between SEO and PSO, there two tools dedicated for podcasts.

PSO from Ausha

This tool has some nice features, but it also left me frustrated. If you give me seven days to test the tool, give me access to ALL OF IT. I mean every marketer knows that you give it to the customer and let them "get hooked" so when their trial is over they will purchase.

I couldn't do that as much of the tools spotlighted required me to upgrade. Boo.

That being said it does show how much a keyword is searched for (not as specific as some tools for web seo). It also shows you how hard to competition is.

Keep in mind that you need to give your dashboard 24 hours to show some statistics in your dashboard.

Ausha PSO (affiliate)

PodSEO

This is from Andrea De Marsi (Co-founder of Spreaker) and Francesco Baschieri (Co-founder of Spreaker) and it has a similar feature set to the ausha tool.

You can save 10% using the coupon schoolofpodcasting. (affiliate)

I thought it was very cool that Podseo alerted me to the mistake that I had accidentally listed my show twice in Spotify (I moved from Libsyn to Captivate - nuff said).

It has some cool episode planners, and is cheaper than Ausha PSO. Their AI tools looks at your episodes and recommend future ideas and then helps you plan them, and has a calendar showing when the episodes were released.

They also can send you daily updates on your rankings or your competition.

Check it out at podseo.com and use the coupon schoolofpodcasting to save 10%

Because of My Podcast: Paul Colligan

Paul is a huge theater nerd, and loves the musical Chess. There was a version that was awful, but never got to see it. Then he let a library in NYC know he was a podcaster. Then he got access to videos that the public hasn't seen - because he had a podcast. Check out Paul at https://podcastpartnership.com/

Other Items Mentioned

Turn AI Into Your Personal Podcast Analyst! on Buzzcast

SEO for People Who Don't Like SEO Podcast

Podpage - Websites for Podcasters

Captivate - AI Tools Help You Choose Episode Topics

Oura Ring - Body Measurement via a Ring

Just One Tip Podcast

Big Lash Energy Episode 201

Big Lash Interview on Last Week's Episode

This content may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you purchase through these links at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services I trust and believe will provide value to you. Thank you for your support!

Mentioned in this episode:

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Want to Make Some Money with Your Podcast?

Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

Profit From Your Podcast

It's like she hit the ground running, with tons of awards, 200 episodes, and one million downloads you might say she's unstoppable.

Do You Need a Video Podcast?

The conversation kicks off with Jayna reflecting on the pressure to include video in her podcasting journey, but she confidently asserts that real connection comes from authentic storytelling, not flashy visuals. It’s refreshing to hear someone challenge the norm and embrace the art of audio storytelling.

As the episode unfolds, Jayna shares her experiences with vulnerability, especially in her first episode, where she bared her soul and laid it all on the line. She describes it as feeling like she jumped off a cliff, and honestly, who hasn’t felt that way about sharing their truth? This episode dives into the nitty-gritty of her life, tackling topics that range from relationships to personal growth, all while maintaining a sense of humor that makes you feel like you're chatting with a friend over coffee.

Always Be Entertaining

Jayna emphasizes the importance of being relatable and not shying away from difficult topics, making for a conversation that is both entertaining and enlightening. What really makes Jayna stand out is her approach to audience engagement.

She’s built a loyal following by sharing snippets of her life and encouraging conversations around her podcast episodes. Jayna is all about creating that connection with her listeners, which is a breath of fresh air in a sea of cookie-cutter AI content. And let’s not forget her unique marketing tactics; she even uses dating apps to promote her podcast, turning the world of swiping into a strategic move for gaining listeners. It’s hilarious and clever, showing us that sometimes, the best marketing is just being yourself.

The Power of Being Authentic

This episode isn’t just about podcasting; it’s about authenticity, vulnerability, and the power of storytelling. If you’re looking for inspiration in your own podcasting journey, or just want a good laugh, tune in to hear Jayna Marie's incredible story and the lessons she’s learned along the way.

So whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just curious about what it takes to create a meaningful show, Jayna's insights are golden. She proves that podcasting is more than just a hobby; it’s a way to connect, share, and inspire others through your unique voice. Join us as we delve into the world of Big Lash Energy and discover what makes Jayna Marie a standout in the podcasting community. It's a wild ride, and you won't want to miss it.

Mentioned In This Episode

Big Lash Energy Podcast

Under the Makeup: A very Messy Life (Episode 1)

Faking the "OH!" Face

8 Super Annoying Things That Men Do

I Ran Out Of Time To Say I Love You: It's My Party, I'll Cry If I Want To (her latest episode as of this recording)

Jayna's Makeup Site & Instagram

Sticker Mule (For Car Decals)

Switchy QR Maker, Link Tracker, and "Linktree" type tool

Fourth Wall Create Merch

Podpage Pretty Websites For Podcasters Who Don't Want To Learn How To Code

Tim Wohlberg's Just the Tip Podcast

Podcasting Tips From Jayna Marie:

Lead with vulnerability and authenticity

Sharing your true self and personal stories draws in listeners and forges real connections.

Serve your audience with purpose

Focus on providing value for others and fill gaps you wish someone had filled for you.

Don’t overthink—trust your gut and put your work out there

Creativity thrives when you let go of perfectionism and follow your instincts.

Make sure every episode has a clear purpose

Aim for your episodes to make listeners laugh, cry, or learn—give them a reason to engage.

Prioritize storytelling and strong writing

Compelling, well-crafted stories are at the heart of a great podcast.

Break up solo shows with production elements

Use sound effects, music, and character voices to keep solo episodes interesting and dynamic.

Collaborate closely with your editor

Build a strong partnership for creative sound design and production ideas.

Release episodes on a consistent schedule

Consistency builds trust and keeps your audience coming back.

Build and engage a community

Foster relationships with listeners to create fierce loyalty and word-of-mouth promotion.

Be intentional about monetization and ads

Consider whether monetizing with ads fits your brand and your listeners’ experience.

Leverage your podcast to support your main business

Use your show to help connect with potential clients in your field.

Save and revisit listener feedback

Keep encouraging messages for motivation during challenging times.

Create desirable merch—only sell what you’d wear

Strong branding and personal endorsement make merchandise more appealing.

Be creative with your marketing strategies:

Utilize unconventional ideas, such as:

Sharing your podcast link in dating bios

Setting up at relevant trade shows

Distributing podcast cards in swag bags with recommended episodes

Branding your car with podcast info and QR codes

Track your promotional results

Use QR codes to measure the effectiveness of your offline marketing efforts.

Encourage value-for-value support

Make it easy for loyal listeners to give back, whether buying merch or donating.

Host in-person events for your audience

Create memorable live gatherings to deepen connections and increase social media buzz.

Promote episodes long after release with social posts

Share throwbacks, listener DMs, and topical connections on your stories to boost ongoing downloads.

Show your creative process on social media

Build anticipation for new episodes and keep your audience actively engaged.

Know your target audience and stay on-brand

Be clear about who your podcast is for, and let that clarity reflect in your branding.

Prepare thoroughly before launching

Study podcasting fundamentals, plan your content, and understand your desired audience.

Don’t share every story—wait until you know the lesson

Only open up about painful moments when you’re ready to share how you grew from them.

Understand podcasting is hard work—stay motivated

Celebrate the impact you have, and let your listeners’ appreciation keep you going

Always Research Your Guest (from Dave)

The question AI gave me to interview Jayna were nothing compared to the questions that came up after I listened to her show.

Mentioned in this episode:

See Your Show On Podpage

If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

Podpage

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your]]>Welcome to the world of Big Lash Energy, where Jayna Marie takes us on a no-holds-barred journey through the ups and downs of her life and career. As a makeup artist, Jayna decided that her life was too colorful not to share, and she jumped headfirst into podcasting.

It's like she hit the ground running, with tons of awards, 200 episodes, and one million downloads you might say she's unstoppable.

Do You Need a Video Podcast?

The conversation kicks off with Jayna reflecting on the pressure to include video in her podcasting journey, but she confidently asserts that real connection comes from authentic storytelling, not flashy visuals. It’s refreshing to hear someone challenge the norm and embrace the art of audio storytelling.

As the episode unfolds, Jayna shares her experiences with vulnerability, especially in her first episode, where she bared her soul and laid it all on the line. She describes it as feeling like she jumped off a cliff, and honestly, who hasn’t felt that way about sharing their truth? This episode dives into the nitty-gritty of her life, tackling topics that range from relationships to personal growth, all while maintaining a sense of humor that makes you feel like you're chatting with a friend over coffee.

Always Be Entertaining

Jayna emphasizes the importance of being relatable and not shying away from difficult topics, making for a conversation that is both entertaining and enlightening. What really makes Jayna stand out is her approach to audience engagement.

She’s built a loyal following by sharing snippets of her life and encouraging conversations around her podcast episodes. Jayna is all about creating that connection with her listeners, which is a breath of fresh air in a sea of cookie-cutter AI content. And let’s not forget her unique marketing tactics; she even uses dating apps to promote her podcast, turning the world of swiping into a strategic move for gaining listeners. It’s hilarious and clever, showing us that sometimes, the best marketing is just being yourself.

The Power of Being Authentic

This episode isn’t just about podcasting; it’s about authenticity, vulnerability, and the power of storytelling. If you’re looking for inspiration in your own podcasting journey, or just want a good laugh, tune in to hear Jayna Marie's incredible story and the lessons she’s learned along the way.

So whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just curious about what it takes to create a meaningful show, Jayna's insights are golden. She proves that podcasting is more than just a hobby; it’s a way to connect, share, and inspire others through your unique voice. Join us as we delve into the world of Big Lash Energy and discover what makes Jayna Marie a standout in the podcasting community. It's a wild ride, and you won't want to miss it.

Mentioned In This Episode

Big Lash Energy Podcast

Under the Makeup: A very Messy Life (Episode 1)

Faking the "OH!" Face

8 Super Annoying Things That Men Do

I Ran Out Of Time To Say I Love You: It's My Party, I'll Cry If I Want To (her latest episode as of this recording)

Jayna's Makeup Site & Instagram

Sticker Mule (For Car Decals)

Switchy QR Maker, Link Tracker, and "Linktree" type tool

Fourth Wall Create Merch

Podpage Pretty Websites For Podcasters Who Don't Want To Learn How To Code

Tim Wohlberg's Just the Tip Podcast

Podcasting Tips From Jayna Marie:

Lead with vulnerability and authenticity

Sharing your true self and personal stories draws in listeners and forges real connections.

Serve your audience with purpose

Focus on providing value for others and fill gaps you wish someone had filled for you.

Don’t overthink—trust your gut and put your work out there

Creativity thrives when you let go of perfectionism and follow your instincts.

Make sure every episode has a clear purpose

Aim for your episodes to make listeners laugh, cry, or learn—give them a reason to engage.

Prioritize storytelling and strong writing

Compelling, well-crafted stories are at the heart of a great podcast.

Break up solo shows with production elements

Use sound effects, music, and character voices to keep solo episodes interesting and dynamic.

Collaborate closely with your editor

Build a strong partnership for creative sound design and production ideas.

Release episodes on a consistent schedule

Consistency builds trust and keeps your audience coming back.

Build and engage a community

Foster relationships with listeners to create fierce loyalty and word-of-mouth promotion.

Be intentional about monetization and ads

Consider whether monetizing with ads fits your brand and your listeners’ experience.

Leverage your podcast to support your main business

Use your show to help connect with potential clients in your field.

Save and revisit listener feedback

Keep encouraging messages for motivation during challenging times.

Create desirable merch—only sell what you’d wear

Strong branding and personal endorsement make merchandise more appealing.

Be creative with your marketing strategies:

Utilize unconventional ideas, such as:

Sharing your podcast link in dating bios

Setting up at relevant trade shows

Distributing podcast cards in swag bags with recommended episodes

Branding your car with podcast info and QR codes

Track your promotional results

Use QR codes to measure the effectiveness of your offline marketing efforts.

Encourage value-for-value support

Make it easy for loyal listeners to give back, whether buying merch or donating.

Host in-person events for your audience

Create memorable live gatherings to deepen connections and increase social media buzz.

Promote episodes long after release with social posts

Share throwbacks, listener DMs, and topical connections on your stories to boost ongoing downloads.

Show your creative process on social media

Build anticipation for new episodes and keep your audience actively engaged.

Know your target audience and stay on-brand

Be clear about who your podcast is for, and let that clarity reflect in your branding.

Prepare thoroughly before launching

Study podcasting fundamentals, plan your content, and understand your desired audience.

Don’t share every story—wait until you know the lesson

Only open up about painful moments when you’re ready to share how you grew from them.

Understand podcasting is hard work—stay motivated

Celebrate the impact you have, and let your listeners’ appreciation keep you going

Always Research Your Guest (from Dave)

The question AI gave me to interview Jayna were nothing compared to the questions that came up after I listened to her show.

Mentioned in this episode:

See Your Show On Podpage

If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

Podpage

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Worry Free Podcasting

Are you ready to take your podcasting dreams to the next level? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. With over 19 years of experience, I’ve helped countless individuals plan, launch, grow, and monetize their podcasts the right way. My comprehensive courses cover everything from content creation to tackling technology, ensuring you sound professional and confident. Join our supportive community of podcasters, access weekly group coaching, and receive unlimited one-on-one consulting. Don't let fear hold you back. With my 30-day money-back guarantee, you can start your podcasting journey risk-free. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join and be on your way to podcast success.

School of Podcasting

Contributors & Their URLs

1. Emily Kate :

emilykatecreative.com

1. Kim Newlove ("The Pharmacist’s Voice" & "Perrysburg Podcast")

thepharmacistsvoice.com

perrysburgpodcast.com

1. Ralph ("Ask Ralph Media Network")

askralph.com

Includes shows: Financially Confident Christian, Grit and Growth Business, Truth Unveiled with Ralph, Content Creators Accountant

1. Todd the Gator ("Guardian Down Roundtable")

guardiandowncast.com

1. Krista Lawley & Mark ("Practical Prepping Podcast")

practicalprepping.info

Resources & URLs Mentioned

1. Otter.ai – Transcription tool
2. Bitly – Link shortener/tracker/QR Code Creator
3. Switchy – Link shortener/tracker/QR code creator (one time payment)
4. Steve Stewart’s Podcast Editor Finder Form
5. Podcast Editors Academy
6. Auphonic – Audio processing & AI audio editing
7. Audacity – Audio editing software
8. OBS (Open Broadcaster Software)
9. Descript – Audio editing & AI tool
10. Resound.fm – De-um tool & audio editing
11. AppSumo – Deals platform (referenced for AI tools)
12. Castmagic – AI show notes & content creation
13. Podpage – Podcast website builder
14. Music Radio Creative – Jingles, music, and audio branding
15. Suno – AI-generated jingles/music
16. Ecamm Live – Live streaming & recording software (Mac only)
17. Alec Johnson / One Take Productions Ecamm Live Masterclass
18. Magi – AI aggregation tool
19. Voice Regen - AI Audio Clean Up Tool
20. The Audacity to Podcast
21. The Podcasters Roundtable
22. Podcasters Studio

Mentioned in this episode:

See Your Show On Podpage

If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

Podpage

Podcast Hot Seat - Now Private Podcast Audits

There are things your podcast is missing that often lead to you losing the audience you are attracting. I help make good podcasts GREAT. End the frustration with your podcast growth. Check out the Podcast Hot Seat Service Today.

Podcast Hotseat

Join the School of Podcasting

Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

School of Podcasting

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

This episode uses chapters to enable you to jump to the most important parts for you.

Key Topics Covered:

1. The difference between a podcast and a YouTube show
2. Stats on how many podcasters are actually doing "real" video
3. YouTube's change to how Shorts views are counted
4. Pros and cons of YouTube for discovery and monetization
5. Cost breakdowns of starting both audio and video podcasts
6. Completion percentages for audio vs video shows
7. Algorithm reality and how audience recommendations work
8. Major drawbacks of relying on video platforms for income
9. The new Apple HLS video announcement: what it means, who it's for, and whether you should care
10. Real examples of creators' experiences on YouTube

My Takeaways:

You don't have to do video if you don't want to. Video can help with discovery, but the audio side offers significantly more opportunity—sometimes a 15x larger audience! Also, while YouTube provides community and powerful analytics, the algorithm and monetization risks are real. The new Apple HLS video support is mostly about helping advertisers, not creators, and comes with new costs.

Resources & Links Mentioned:

1. School of Podcasting: schoolofpodcasting.com
2. Podcast Host Survey (Dr. Colin Gray): thepodcasthost.com
3. The Truth About ‘Video Podcasts’ on YouTube
4. These 5 Podcasters Added Video – Here’s What Happened
5. PodcastIndex stats: podcastindex.org
6. Hosting Recommendations:
7. Captivate: captivate.fm
8. Buzzsprout: buzzsprout.com
9. RSS.com: rss.com
10. Blubrry: blubrry.com
11. Think Media (YouTube demonetization video): thinkmedia.com
12. Truth Unveiled with Ralph (Ralph Eastep):
13. Sponsor Magnet book by Justin Moore:
14. Profit from Your Podcast (my book):
15. Streamline Solopreneur with Joe Casabona
16. Around the Layout (Ray)
17. Podpage (Podcast Website builder): podpage.com
18. Podnews details on Apple announcement on HLS
19. Jordan Harbinger on the New Media Show
20. Professor of Rock on AI Ruining YouTube.
21. Rob Walch talks about Club Random

Other Tools Mentioned:

1. Samson Q2U mic, Rode PodMic USB, Shure MV7 and SM7B, Audio-Technica AT897 Shotgun Condenser Microphone (mic options)
2. Elgato Facecam Pro, Sony ZV-E10 II (camera options)
3. Descript & Riverside (remote video recorders/editors)
4. Patreon & SuperCast (crowdfunding)
5. Ecamm Live (live streaming tool)
6. Inexpensive Lighting Rig

Final Thoughts:

If you want to do video, go ahead—but know the realities and risks. Don't let anyone (especially YouTube or Spotify) pressure you into it unless it suits your content and goals. And keep in mind, when Apple rolls out its new features, it’s likely to come with extra charges, so stay informed!

If you need help planning, launching, or growing your show, check out schoolofpodcasting.com and use coupon code LISTENER.

Please share the episode with a friend if you found it helpful!

Send people to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/1024

Mentioned in this episode:

Starting a podcast can be daunting. Fear of failure, uncertainty about where to begin, and doubts about your abilities can hold you back. But what if you had a guide? The School of Podcasting is here to help you confidently launch, grow, and monetize your podcast. With over 20 years of experience and tons of successful podcasts launched, I'll walk you through every step. From planning to promotion, you're never alone." Learn at your own pace with video courses, join a...]]>Hey, it's Dave Jackson! In this episode, Ishare my talk that I did at the National Religious Broadcasters (NRB) about video podcasting. What are the real benefits, the costs, and the drawbacks? I also tackled the recent Apple announcement about HLS video, shared my NRB event experience, and got into some real stats and stories about YouTube and podcasting.

This episode uses chapters to enable you to jump to the most important parts for you.

Key Topics Covered:

1. The difference between a podcast and a YouTube show
2. Stats on how many podcasters are actually doing "real" video
3. YouTube's change to how Shorts views are counted
4. Pros and cons of YouTube for discovery and monetization
5. Cost breakdowns of starting both audio and video podcasts
6. Completion percentages for audio vs video shows
7. Algorithm reality and how audience recommendations work
8. Major drawbacks of relying on video platforms for income
9. The new Apple HLS video announcement: what it means, who it's for, and whether you should care
10. Real examples of creators' experiences on YouTube

My Takeaways:

You don't have to do video if you don't want to. Video can help with discovery, but the audio side offers significantly more opportunity—sometimes a 15x larger audience! Also, while YouTube provides community and powerful analytics, the algorithm and monetization risks are real. The new Apple HLS video support is mostly about helping advertisers, not creators, and comes with new costs.

Resources & Links Mentioned:

1. School of Podcasting: schoolofpodcasting.com
2. Podcast Host Survey (Dr. Colin Gray): thepodcasthost.com
3. The Truth About ‘Video Podcasts’ on YouTube
4. These 5 Podcasters Added Video – Here’s What Happened
5. PodcastIndex stats: podcastindex.org
6. Hosting Recommendations:
7. Captivate: captivate.fm
8. Buzzsprout: buzzsprout.com
9. RSS.com: rss.com
10. Blubrry: blubrry.com
11. Think Media (YouTube demonetization video): thinkmedia.com
12. Truth Unveiled with Ralph (Ralph Eastep):
13. Sponsor Magnet book by Justin Moore:
14. Profit from Your Podcast (my book):
15. Streamline Solopreneur with Joe Casabona
16. Around the Layout (Ray)
17. Podpage (Podcast Website builder): podpage.com
18. Podnews details on Apple announcement on HLS
19. Jordan Harbinger on the New Media Show
20. Professor of Rock on AI Ruining YouTube.
21. Rob Walch talks about Club Random

Other Tools Mentioned:

1. Samson Q2U mic, Rode PodMic USB, Shure MV7 and SM7B, Audio-Technica AT897 Shotgun Condenser Microphone (mic options)
2. Elgato Facecam Pro, Sony ZV-E10 II (camera options)
3. Descript & Riverside (remote video recorders/editors)
4. Patreon & SuperCast (crowdfunding)
5. Ecamm Live (live streaming tool)
6. Inexpensive Lighting Rig

Final Thoughts:

If you want to do video, go ahead—but know the realities and risks. Don't let anyone (especially YouTube or Spotify) pressure you into it unless it suits your content and goals. And keep in mind, when Apple rolls out its new features, it’s likely to come with extra charges, so stay informed!

If you need help planning, launching, or growing your show, check out schoolofpodcasting.com and use coupon code LISTENER.

Please share the episode with a friend if you found it helpful!

Send people to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/1024

Mentioned in this episode:

Starting a podcast can be daunting. Fear of failure, uncertainty about where to begin, and doubts about your abilities can hold you back. But what if you had a guide? The School of Podcasting is here to help you confidently launch, grow, and monetize your podcast. With over 20 years of experience and tons of successful podcasts launched, I'll walk you through every step. From planning to promotion, you're never alone." Learn at your own pace with video courses, join a supportive community, and get unlimited coaching. Say goodbye to fear and hello to success." Start your podcasting journey today with the School of Podcasting. Join now and take the first step towards turning your passion into a reality. Visit SchoolOfPodcasting.com to get started. No fear, just success.

School of Podcasting

Want to Make Some Money with Your Podcast?

Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

Profit From Your Podcast

Editing For Content

I’ll share examples from real interviews (including Amy Poehler’s “Good Hang” and conversations with my friends Daniel J. Lewis and Katie Krimitsos) to show how to tighten up questions, trim rambling answers, and keep the pace moving so your listeners stay engaged from start to finish.

If you’ve ever listened back to your show and thought, “It’s fine…but something feels off,” this one’s for you.

---

Where To start?

Editing starts with your audience, not your software

1. Why the first question is, “Who am I talking to and what do they want?”
2. How knowing your audience’s problems, language, and attention span guides every cut.
3. The “vegetarian at dinner” analogy: if you know who’s coming, you know what not to serve.

Did they actually answer the question?

1. Using Amy Poehler’s friend and Jennifer Lawrence as an example of a non-answer answer.
2. How to spot when guests talk *around* a question instead of answering it.
3. When to follow up, when to re-ask more simply, and when to just fix it in the edit.

Cut the fluff, keep the value

1. Trimming long-winded questions where the host gives too much backstory.
2. Shortening guest answers that wander, repeat, or add no value to the listener.
3. Why you don’t need to include your guest “thinking out loud” to get to the point.

Friends, comfort, and wasted time

1. How being comfortable with guests (friends, colleagues) can lead to bloated conversations.
2. Why “fun to say” isn’t the same as “valuable to hear” for your audience.
3. The discipline of deleting entire questions and answers that just don’t land.

Content editing vs. cosmetic editing

1. Why removing bad questions is more powerful than removing ums and uhs.
2. When it makes sense to leave in human imperfections for a natural feel.
3. The mindset shift from “How do I make this cleaner?” to “How do I make this stronger?”

Basic audio cleanup that actually matters

1. A practical order of operations: repair first, then shape the sound.
2. What plosives, noise gates, compression, EQ, and de-essers do in plain English.
3. Why “listenable” beats “perfect,” especially for guest recordings.

Testing popular cleanup tools on bad audio

1. What happened when I ran intentionally bad audio through different tools.
2. How tools like Voice Regen, Auphonic, Descript Studio Sound, Adobe Enhance, and others compare in real use.
3. Why the cheap, simple option sometimes wins for everyday podcasters.

Know your audience, know your cuts

1. How hanging out where your audience hangs out (YouTube, Facebook groups, Reddit, etc.) tells you what to keep.
2. The simple question to ask of every segment: “Does this deliver value to *my* listener?”
3. How better audience understanding leads to faster editing and stronger episodes.

Key Takeaway:

Editing isn’t about showing off your software skills. It’s about respecting your listener’s time. When you know exactly who they are and what they care about, the decisions of what to cut — and what to keep — almost make themselves.

Links Mentioned In This Episode

This content may contain affiliate links, meaning I earn a small commission if you purchase through these links at no additional cost to you. I only recommend products or services I trust and believe will provide value to you. Thank you for your support!

School of Podcasting

Podpage

How to Pitch a Podcast Show (submit your show)

Good Hang Jennifer Lawrence Episode

Women's Mediation Network

Podchapters

Podgagement

Samson Q2U Microphone

Voice Regen from Waves

Auphonic

Descript Studio Sound

Adobe Enhance

Accentize Dxrevive Pro

Check Your Loudness at https://loudness.app/en

YouTube Demonetizing Shows (30K Goodbye!)

Big Lash Energy's Jayna Marie is Next Week.

Mentioned in this episode:

Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

Question of the Month

Help Us Fight Back Against Spam and Get Some Exposure

How to Pitch a Podcast is a show I'm launching that NEEDS your stories of good/bad pitches. Read your bad/good pitch (I'll remove the guilty names) and explain why it's good or bad. Then (if it's bad) explain what your perfect guest would be, tell us about your show and your website. Don't over-think it. I need your stories by 2/28 to launch. Go to pitchapodcast.com/story

Pitch a Podcast

Join the School of Podcasting

Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

School of Podcasting

1. Open Loops (Brain Gaps)

What It Is:

An open loop is an unresolved element in your content—a question, mystery, or ongoing storyline that the listener subconsciously wants resolved. This is a storytelling technique borrowed from TV and movies: cliffhangers, subplots, or even hints about future developments that drive people to keep watching (or listening) to find out what happens next.

Examples from the Episode:

1. uses TV examples like Will Trent and Tracker:

"There's a problem at the beginning of the episode… and 50 minutes later, give or take, the problem is solved. … On occasion they'll do a two-parter with a cliffhanger." (01:39)

1. In Will Trent, the ongoing subplot about the main character being disliked and saving a dog (an adaptation of the “save the cat” storytelling trope) gets the audience rooting for him, creating emotional investment through an open loop about his relationships and backstory.

"You have this underlying story that's going through the whole thing, and I believe that's why we are binging content." (13:11)

1. In podcasts, an open loop could be as simple as starting a story in one episode and promising to finish it later, or introducing a mystery or a question (“Did James ever fix his solar panels?”) that’s answered in a later episode.

How To Use:

1. Tease questions (“Next week, I’ll reveal the results…”)
2. Continue a personal story arc across episodes
3. Dangle small mysteries (“I opened the door and only saw one of the three things I was looking for…”) (
4. Share journey updates that listeners want closure or progress on

2. Teasers & Episode Structure

What It Is:

Tease content before and after episodes to contextualize your podcast for new and returning listeners. By referencing what was discussed in previous episodes and previewing what’s coming next, you build a web of episodes that feel interconnected—just like "Next Episode" buttons on streaming platforms encourage more watching.

Examples from the Episode:

1. highlights Harry Duran’s approach:

"He introduces his show… 'If you missed last week's episode, we talked to so-and-so about such and such…' On today's show, we're talking with so-and-so. … At the end of the show… he knows what the next episode is. … You now have 3 ideas of what this show is about." (08:28)

1. The benefit is, if listeners hear a recap of a past episode or a preview of the next, they’re incentivized to explore your other episodes—bingeing your back catalog.

How To Use:

1. At the start: preview what’s happening in the current episode and what listeners missed if they haven’t heard recent content
2. At the end: teaser for the next episode (e.g., “Next week, I’m talking to…”)
3. Mention popular or related episodes (“Check out our past episode on…”)
4. Structure your season thematically, so every episode contributes to a bigger picture (e.g., a season all about podcast hardware invites listeners to hear the whole set)

3. Ongoing Initiatives & Personal Journeys

What It Is:

Maintain a continuous, real-life thread running through your podcast—such as a personal project, journey, or community initiative—which encourages listeners to check back for updates and stay invested in your progress over time.

Examples from the Episode:

1. I talk about his “How to Pitch a Podcast” project:

“I've been talking about the How to Pitch a Podcast project… I'm not launching the show until I get 20 stories. … It’s an ongoing initiative that people are like, oh, you know, and you might be kind of involved with like, oh, I really want to see this show take off.” (10:23)

1. He references Joanna Penn’s podcast chronicling her journey to become an independent author—listeners followed along as she learned, failed, and eventually succeeded, creating long-term engagement and rooting interest.
2. Many shows use “journey” approaches where listeners are encouraged to follow a process or transformation over time (fitness challenges, entrepreneurial launches, etc.).

How To Use:

1. Start a project or challenge and give periodic updates (“I’m launching X, here’s what happened this week…”)
2. Share personal development arcs—what you’re learning, obstacles, and milestones
3. Invite audience participation (“I need 20 submissions from you before the project goes live!”)

In summary:

1. Open loops hook listeners by leaving threads unresolved, making them want to continue and find closure.
2. Teasers and structured episode links make every episode a gateway to others in your catalog, increasing binge potential.
3. Ongoing initiatives or journeys build sustained interest by making listeners part of your process and progress.

These strategies ensure listeners don’t just drop in for a single episode—they feel compelled to stick around, binge, and become loyal fans.

Becuase of My Podcast: Ray Arnott

Ray Arnott from the Around the Layout Show (model trains) has been on the show before, and today Ray shares how a listener from Australia is paying for Ray's tripe to come to a model train meetup in Australia!

Links referenced in this episode:

1. schoolofpodcasting.com
2. pitchapodcast.com
3. aroundthelayout.com
4. podcastjunkies.com
5. newmediashow.com
6. Pet Davidson on Jimmy Fallon
7. Joe Rogan with Matt Damon and Ben Affleck
8. Ray Arnott that’ll make you believe in the magic of podcasting. So, if you're tired of people tuning in and then bouncing faster than a bad date, stick around. We’re gonna make your podcast the one they're bingeing on next!

   1. Open Loops (Brain Gaps)

   What It Is:

   An open loop is an unresolved element in your content—a question, mystery, or ongoing storyline that the listener subconsciously wants resolved. This is a storytelling technique borrowed from TV and movies: cliffhangers, subplots, or even hints about future developments that drive people to keep watching (or listening) to find out what happens next.

   Examples from the Episode:

   1. uses TV examples like Will Trent and Tracker:
   
   

   "There's a problem at the beginning of the episode… and 50 minutes later, give or take, the problem is solved. … On occasion they'll do a two-parter with a cliffhanger." (01:39)

   1. In Will Trent, the ongoing subplot about the main character being disliked and saving a dog (an adaptation of the “save the cat” storytelling trope) gets the audience rooting for him, creating emotional investment through an open loop about his relationships and backstory.
   
   

   "You have this underlying story that's going through the whole thing, and I believe that's why we are binging content." (13:11)

   1. In podcasts, an open loop could be as simple as starting a story in one episode and promising to finish it later, or introducing a mystery or a question (“Did James ever fix his solar panels?”) that’s answered in a later episode.
   
   

   How To Use:

   1. Tease questions (“Next week, I’ll reveal the results…”)
   2. Continue a personal story arc across episodes
   3. Dangle small mysteries (“I opened the door and only saw one of the three things I was looking for…”) (
   4. Share journey updates that listeners want closure or progress on
   
   

   2. Teasers & Episode Structure

   What It Is:

   Tease content before and after episodes to contextualize your podcast for new and returning listeners. By referencing what was discussed in previous episodes and previewing what’s coming next, you build a web of episodes that feel interconnected—just like "Next Episode" buttons on streaming platforms encourage more watching.

   Examples from the Episode:

   1. highlights Harry Duran’s approach:
   
   

   "He introduces his show… 'If you missed last week's episode, we talked to so-and-so about such and such…' On today's show, we're talking with so-and-so. … At the end of the show… he knows what the next episode is. … You now have 3 ideas of what this show is about." (08:28)

   1. The benefit is, if listeners hear a recap of a past episode or a preview of the next, they’re incentivized to explore your other episodes—bingeing your back catalog.
   
   

   How To Use:

   1. At the start: preview what’s happening in the current episode and what listeners missed if they haven’t heard recent content
   2. At the end: teaser for the next episode (e.g., “Next week, I’m talking to…”)
   3. Mention popular or related episodes (“Check out our past episode on…”)
   4. Structure your season thematically, so every episode contributes to a bigger picture (e.g., a season all about podcast hardware invites listeners to hear the whole set)
   
   

   3. Ongoing Initiatives & Personal Journeys

   What It Is:

   Maintain a continuous, real-life thread running through your podcast—such as a personal project, journey, or community initiative—which encourages listeners to check back for updates and stay invested in your progress over time.

   Examples from the Episode:

   1. I talk about his “How to Pitch a Podcast” project:
   
   

   “I've been talking about the How to Pitch a Podcast project… I'm not launching the show until I get 20 stories. … It’s an ongoing initiative that people are like, oh, you know, and you might be kind of involved with like, oh, I really want to see this show take off.” (10:23)

   1. He references Joanna Penn’s podcast chronicling her journey to become an independent author—listeners followed along as she learned, failed, and eventually succeeded, creating long-term engagement and rooting interest.
   2. Many shows use “journey” approaches where listeners are encouraged to follow a process or transformation over time (fitness challenges, entrepreneurial launches, etc.).
   
   

   How To Use:

   1. Start a project or challenge and give periodic updates (“I’m launching X, here’s what happened this week…”)
   2. Share personal development arcs—what you’re learning, obstacles, and milestones
   3. Invite audience participation (“I need 20 submissions from you before the project goes live!”)
   
   

   In summary:

   1. Open loops hook listeners by leaving threads unresolved, making them want to continue and find closure.
   2. Teasers and structured episode links make every episode a gateway to others in your catalog, increasing binge potential.
   3. Ongoing initiatives or journeys build sustained interest by making listeners part of your process and progress.
   
   

   These strategies ensure listeners don’t just drop in for a single episode—they feel compelled to stick around, binge, and become loyal fans.

   Becuase of My Podcast: Ray Arnott

   Ray Arnott from the Around the Layout Show (model trains) has been on the show before, and today Ray shares how a listener from Australia is paying for Ray's tripe to come to a model train meetup in Australia!

   Links referenced in this episode:

   1. schoolofpodcasting.com
   2. pitchapodcast.com
   3. aroundthelayout.com
   4. podcastjunkies.com
   5. newmediashow.com
   6. Pet Davidson on Jimmy Fallon
   7. Joe Rogan with Matt Damon and Ben Affleck
   8. Save the Cat Book
   9. Ray Arnott on the School of Podcasting (on finding Sponsors/Partners)
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Join the School of Podcasting Today - Your Future Self Will Thank You

   Stepping out of your comfort zone isn't easy, but at the School of Podcasting, we're here to make it feel like second nature. With our expertly crafted courses and an incredible community, you're never alone in your journey. From planning and launching to growing your podcast, I’ll be right by your side every step of the way. Remember, every podcast episode builds connections and opens doors to future opportunities. Take action today, and let your future self reap the rewards.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>08383cb8-a801-4e8b-9f3a-d51de083761eMon, 09 Feb 2026 00:00:00 -040043:47falsefull10221022The Four D's of Podcasting: Novel Marketing Conference RecapI just got back from the Novel Marketing Conference. This was put on by my friend Thomas Umstattd Jr (who has a great podcast for authors). I love single track events, and this one was AMAZING. It was all about book marketing (which applies to podcasting). Only the original Podfest comes close (but that didn't feed me Schlotzky's deli Sandwiches).

   I need to give credit, the "Four D's" come from Chase Replogle who does a few podcasts including the Pastor Writer, Let's Talk Bible: Kids, and he's the Pastor at Bent Oak Church. His opening keynote was AMAZING. I have adopted it for podcasters.

   Main Points:

   1. Single Track Conferences: I explained why single-track conferences are my favorite—you don’t miss out on sessions, and the Novel Marketing Conference was one of the best I’ve attended.
   2. Opening Keynote – The Four Ds: Chase Replogle’s talk resonated with the “Four Ds”: decisiveness, discipline, discernment, and devotion—applies to both writing and podcasting. My favorite: nobody listens to what you record, they listen to what you edit (editing is magic!).
   3. Marketing Parallels: Even though this was a book conference, book marketing is a close cousin to podcast marketing. The basic principles really do translate.
   4. Serving Your Audience: I reflected on the courage to create, facing the fear of “what if nobody listens?”, and focusing on service and devotion to your listeners.
   5. Is Your Podcast a Painkiller or a Vitamin?: Thanks to Thomas Umstattd Jr.’s talk—a “painkiller” solves a direct need, while a “vitamin” is nice to have but not urgent. Think about what pain your show removes for your audience.
   6. Podcast Competition: I highlighted that we’re not just competing with other podcasts, but with all forms of entertainment—TV, games, etc. Know your unique value.
   7. Why People Listen: People consume podcasts for entertainment, education, or escape. I asked: Does your show serve one (or more) of these needs?
   8. Value of Listener’s Time: All podcasts are “free,” but listeners pay with their time. We need to make it worth it.
   9. Improving Your Show: Attending other sessions gave me ideas about making changes that truly improve the show rather than just making it different.
   10. AI & Prompts: I shared tips I learned about using AI—give ChatGPT clear instructions about who you are, what you need, and who your audience is.
   11. Book Covers = Podcast Artwork: Don’t be cheap with your cover! As much as we say not to judge by appearances, we all do. Your show art matters.
   12. Networking: The conference structure ensured everyone met and interacted with new people every day—awesome for making connections.
   13. Feedback & Iteration: Get feedback and be willing to edit and improve. Like writing, multiple drafts (and edits) make better episodes.
   14. Target Audience: Jonathan’s session hit home: don’t just market for yourself—know your actual audience, and don’t trust social media polls alone.
   15. Conferences in General: I appreciated speakers not blatantly selling from stage—a rarity!
   16. If You Want to Start a Show: Record everything (planning, editing, writing, etc.) to see how much time it takes, then set a sustainable schedule.
   17. Finding Your Listeners: Look for audiences in adjacent markets—not just podcasting-specific spaces.
   18. More Takeaways: The importance of networking, getting feedback, and attending events that put you in the room with your ideal audience.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Thomas's Patron Toolbox

   Novel Marketing Podcast

   Chase Replogle

   School of Podcastng

   Podpage

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Don't Let Your Poor Upbringing Stop Your From Starting Your Podcast

   If you grew up attempting to get the attention of your parents, friends, and others but couldn't, podcasting is THE way to get your message out to the WORLD. The School of Podcasting allows you to: Learn at your own pace Network with other brilliant podcasters Get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching with Dave Jackson

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>I just got back from the Novel Marketing Conference. This was put on by my friend Thomas Umstattd Jr (who has a great podcast for authors). I love single track events, and this one was AMAZING. It was all about book marketing (which applies to podcasting). Only the original Podfest comes close (but that didn't feed me Schlotzky's deli Sandwiches).

   I need to give credit, the "Four D's" come from Chase Replogle who does a few podcasts including the Pastor Writer, Let's Talk Bible: Kids, and he's the Pastor at Bent Oak Church. His opening keynote was AMAZING. I have adopted it for podcasters.

   Main Points:

   1. Single Track Conferences: I explained why single-track conferences are my favorite—you don’t miss out on sessions, and the Novel Marketing Conference was one of the best I’ve attended.
   2. Opening Keynote – The Four Ds: Chase Replogle’s talk resonated with the “Four Ds”: decisiveness, discipline, discernment, and devotion—applies to both writing and podcasting. My favorite: nobody listens to what you record, they listen to what you edit (editing is magic!).
   3. Marketing Parallels: Even though this was a book conference, book marketing is a close cousin to podcast marketing. The basic principles really do translate.
   4. Serving Your Audience: I reflected on the courage to create, facing the fear of “what if nobody listens?”, and focusing on service and devotion to your listeners.
   5. Is Your Podcast a Painkiller or a Vitamin?: Thanks to Thomas Umstattd Jr.’s talk—a “painkiller” solves a direct need, while a “vitamin” is nice to have but not urgent. Think about what pain your show removes for your audience.
   6. Podcast Competition: I highlighted that we’re not just competing with other podcasts, but with all forms of entertainment—TV, games, etc. Know your unique value.
   7. Why People Listen: People consume podcasts for entertainment, education, or escape. I asked: Does your show serve one (or more) of these needs?
   8. Value of Listener’s Time: All podcasts are “free,” but listeners pay with their time. We need to make it worth it.
   9. Improving Your Show: Attending other sessions gave me ideas about making changes that truly improve the show rather than just making it different.
   10. AI & Prompts: I shared tips I learned about using AI—give ChatGPT clear instructions about who you are, what you need, and who your audience is.
   11. Book Covers = Podcast Artwork: Don’t be cheap with your cover! As much as we say not to judge by appearances, we all do. Your show art matters.
   12. Networking: The conference structure ensured everyone met and interacted with new people every day—awesome for making connections.
   13. Feedback & Iteration: Get feedback and be willing to edit and improve. Like writing, multiple drafts (and edits) make better episodes.
   14. Target Audience: Jonathan’s session hit home: don’t just market for yourself—know your actual audience, and don’t trust social media polls alone.
   15. Conferences in General: I appreciated speakers not blatantly selling from stage—a rarity!
   16. If You Want to Start a Show: Record everything (planning, editing, writing, etc.) to see how much time it takes, then set a sustainable schedule.
   17. Finding Your Listeners: Look for audiences in adjacent markets—not just podcasting-specific spaces.
   18. More Takeaways: The importance of networking, getting feedback, and attending events that put you in the room with your ideal audience.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Thomas's Patron Toolbox

   Novel Marketing Podcast

   Chase Replogle

   School of Podcastng

   Podpage

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Don't Let Your Poor Upbringing Stop Your From Starting Your Podcast

   If you grew up attempting to get the attention of your parents, friends, and others but couldn't, podcasting is THE way to get your message out to the WORLD. The School of Podcasting allows you to: Learn at your own pace Network with other brilliant podcasters Get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching with Dave Jackson

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>386c880b-1e03-41be-a75c-abeaa13ab86bMon, 02 Feb 2026 00:00:00 -040051:39falsefull10211021Behind the Scenes at Podfest: Lessons, Laughs, and Cold CoffeeHey, it’s Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting, and in this episode, I’m recapping my experience at Podfest 2026, which was a whirlwind of hallway chats, memorable dinners, and some eye-opening lessons. Here’s what I cover:

   Hallway Conversations & Overheard Myths: I noticed folks were obsessing over tiny details like the exact minute a podcast should release, debating things like whether 8:01am is better than 8:00am. Honestly, I don’t think anyone is waiting by their phone for your show to drop to the minute. Being consistent matters more than timing it down to the second.

   The Role (and Cost) of AI in Podcasting: I talked to podcasters searching for AI tools that could do everything—generate ideas, write scripts, edit, publish, you name it—ideally for free. The reality is, good AI isn’t free, and companies are raising prices when they add AI features. “AI” stands for “Always Increase” when it comes to your expenses!

   Reflections on Video: Unlike previous conferences, there wasn’t as much pressure this time to dive into video podcasting. Most folks seemed to realize you don’t want AI or automation to create your whole show. Polishing? Sure, but not producing the meat.

   A Cool AI Demo: I saw a preview of Episonic AI, which analyzes your past episodes, constructs a target audience profile, and even suggests topics and guests. It was interesting in demo form, but I’d want to play with it myself before really judging.

   Conference Costs and Why They're So High: I break down just how expensive it is to put on a conference—think $10k to rent an LED screen and $8k just to plug it in. Even coffee for attendees can run $135/gallon! High ticket prices aren’t about gouging attendees; organizers are just trying to cover astronomical hotel fees.

   Networking Magic: The biggest benefit of these events is always the networking. I had a blast connecting with old friends, like Daniel J. Lewis, Rob Walsh, Rob Greenlee, and James Cridlin, and got to enjoy some great stories and camaraderie.

   Podcasting Hall of Fame: The Hall of Fame event was a highlight. Seeing so many people who’ve truly served the podcasting community—sharing knowledge, fighting legal battles, innovating—reminded me that serving your audience is the common denominator among podcasting greats.

   A Word on Programmatic Ads: I discuss my article comparing podcast CPM/programmatic ads to the historic crash of banner ad prices on websites. My worry: as more low-quality, AI-generated shows flood the market and accept pennies, ad rates may sink across the board.

   "How to Pitch a Podcast" Show Update: I’m experimenting with a new show concept where we share the worst—and best—podcast pitches. So far, the main hurdle is getting folks to submit their stories in audio form. I’ve simplified the process, and hope more people will participate. If not, it may become a segment rather than a full show.

   Final Thoughts: If you went to Podfest, don’t wait to follow up with those business cards—make the most of your new connections! I share about my next steps, including attending the Novel Marketing Conference in Austin, and remind everyone to check out schoolofpodcasting.com if you want personal help growing your show.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   School of Podcasting Community

   Podnews

   Rich Graham the Merch Drop Show

   Jeff Grief and the Sell'n Podcast.

   Electronic Frontier Foundation

   Podfest Expo

   Episonic.ai

   Capitvate Media Hosting

   Podcast Hall of Fame Replay

   Thanks for listening, please share the show if you found it valuable, and I’ll catch you next week!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hotseat Jump Start Your Podcast Growth

   When you sit in the Podcast Hot Seat, you get help finding what you're doing right (so you can do more of that) and identifying those things that might need a little help. You also get a month of access to the School of Podcasting, which includes unlimited coaching.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>Hey, it’s Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting, and in this episode, I’m recapping my experience at Podfest 2026, which was a whirlwind of hallway chats, memorable dinners, and some eye-opening lessons. Here’s what I cover:

   Hallway Conversations & Overheard Myths: I noticed folks were obsessing over tiny details like the exact minute a podcast should release, debating things like whether 8:01am is better than 8:00am. Honestly, I don’t think anyone is waiting by their phone for your show to drop to the minute. Being consistent matters more than timing it down to the second.

   The Role (and Cost) of AI in Podcasting: I talked to podcasters searching for AI tools that could do everything—generate ideas, write scripts, edit, publish, you name it—ideally for free. The reality is, good AI isn’t free, and companies are raising prices when they add AI features. “AI” stands for “Always Increase” when it comes to your expenses!

   Reflections on Video: Unlike previous conferences, there wasn’t as much pressure this time to dive into video podcasting. Most folks seemed to realize you don’t want AI or automation to create your whole show. Polishing? Sure, but not producing the meat.

   A Cool AI Demo: I saw a preview of Episonic AI, which analyzes your past episodes, constructs a target audience profile, and even suggests topics and guests. It was interesting in demo form, but I’d want to play with it myself before really judging.

   Conference Costs and Why They're So High: I break down just how expensive it is to put on a conference—think $10k to rent an LED screen and $8k just to plug it in. Even coffee for attendees can run $135/gallon! High ticket prices aren’t about gouging attendees; organizers are just trying to cover astronomical hotel fees.

   Networking Magic: The biggest benefit of these events is always the networking. I had a blast connecting with old friends, like Daniel J. Lewis, Rob Walsh, Rob Greenlee, and James Cridlin, and got to enjoy some great stories and camaraderie.

   Podcasting Hall of Fame: The Hall of Fame event was a highlight. Seeing so many people who’ve truly served the podcasting community—sharing knowledge, fighting legal battles, innovating—reminded me that serving your audience is the common denominator among podcasting greats.

   A Word on Programmatic Ads: I discuss my article comparing podcast CPM/programmatic ads to the historic crash of banner ad prices on websites. My worry: as more low-quality, AI-generated shows flood the market and accept pennies, ad rates may sink across the board.

   "How to Pitch a Podcast" Show Update: I’m experimenting with a new show concept where we share the worst—and best—podcast pitches. So far, the main hurdle is getting folks to submit their stories in audio form. I’ve simplified the process, and hope more people will participate. If not, it may become a segment rather than a full show.

   Final Thoughts: If you went to Podfest, don’t wait to follow up with those business cards—make the most of your new connections! I share about my next steps, including attending the Novel Marketing Conference in Austin, and remind everyone to check out schoolofpodcasting.com if you want personal help growing your show.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   School of Podcasting Community

   Podnews

   Rich Graham the Merch Drop Show

   Jeff Grief and the Sell'n Podcast.

   Electronic Frontier Foundation

   Podfest Expo

   Episonic.ai

   Capitvate Media Hosting

   Podcast Hall of Fame Replay

   Thanks for listening, please share the show if you found it valuable, and I’ll catch you next week!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hotseat Jump Start Your Podcast Growth

   When you sit in the Podcast Hot Seat, you get help finding what you're doing right (so you can do more of that) and identifying those things that might need a little help. You also get a month of access to the School of Podcasting, which includes unlimited coaching.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>2083295d-632f-483a-b238-d32e24e82427Mon, 26 Jan 2026 00:00:00 -040036:27falsefull10201020Behind the Scenes of My New PodcastOn today’s episode, I dig into my thought process as I consider launching a new podcast—and I walk through the essential questions I ask anyone who’s thinking about starting one. If you’ve already got a podcast, these questions might help you rethink your approach.

   Why am I starting this podcast?

   I share my background as a teacher and my desire to fight back against spammy guest pitches. I want to educate PR agencies and help fellow podcasters feel less alone in the sea of spam.

   Who is this podcast for?

   This show is for two groups: PR agencies (so they can do their job better) and podcasters (so they know they’re not alone and can improve how they handle pitches).

   How will I measure success?

   Instead of downloads, I’ll measure success by how many people utilize resources I share, like PodMatch and PodcastGuests.com. I’ll also keep tabs on affiliate signups.

   What are the hurdles?

   I reflect on a previous project, Dates from Hell, which struggled because it required audience participation but didn’t yet have an audience. For this new podcast, I’ll need a steady supply of good (and bad) pitches from listeners.

   Is this a passion project, hobby, or business?

   This is mostly a passion project and a hobby, driven by my desire to make a difference and maybe have some fun. If I can monetize it, that’s a nice bonus.

   Why will my audience listen?

   Listeners will tune in to hear entertainingly bad pitches, learn how to make their own pitches better, and find solidarity in their struggles with guest booking spam. Plus, I’ll offer educational insights that no one else seems to be sharing right now.

   How long will it take to make an episode?

   I estimate each episode will take around half an hour to produce, keeping things doable alongside my other commitments. You measure your production time and then choose your schedule.

   Do I have time and resources to make this happen?

   I’ve already got hosting, gear, and a plan for the website (PitchAPodcast.com). The biggest challenge will be getting enough listener participation to keep the show going.

   Key Takeaway

   1. I’m considering a crowd-generated podcast to tackle the problem of bad guest pitches.
   2. If you’d like to participate, send me your stories of bad (or good!) pitches, info about your podcast and website, and details on your ideal guest.
   3. I run through all the big questions to ask before launching, sharing my honest answers and experiences.
   
   

   Links Mentioned

   Pitchapodcast.com

   schoolofpodcasting.com

   podcastingobservations.com

   Captive Media Hosting

   Buzzsprout Media Hosting

   PodMatch

   PodcastGuests.com.

   Podpage.com

   ---

   If you have your own pitch stories or want to get involved, head to PitchAPodcast.com and share your experiences!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>On today’s episode, I dig into my thought process as I consider launching a new podcast—and I walk through the essential questions I ask anyone who’s thinking about starting one. If you’ve already got a podcast, these questions might help you rethink your approach.

   Why am I starting this podcast?

   I share my background as a teacher and my desire to fight back against spammy guest pitches. I want to educate PR agencies and help fellow podcasters feel less alone in the sea of spam.

   Who is this podcast for?

   This show is for two groups: PR agencies (so they can do their job better) and podcasters (so they know they’re not alone and can improve how they handle pitches).

   How will I measure success?

   Instead of downloads, I’ll measure success by how many people utilize resources I share, like PodMatch and PodcastGuests.com. I’ll also keep tabs on affiliate signups.

   What are the hurdles?

   I reflect on a previous project, Dates from Hell, which struggled because it required audience participation but didn’t yet have an audience. For this new podcast, I’ll need a steady supply of good (and bad) pitches from listeners.

   Is this a passion project, hobby, or business?

   This is mostly a passion project and a hobby, driven by my desire to make a difference and maybe have some fun. If I can monetize it, that’s a nice bonus.

   Why will my audience listen?

   Listeners will tune in to hear entertainingly bad pitches, learn how to make their own pitches better, and find solidarity in their struggles with guest booking spam. Plus, I’ll offer educational insights that no one else seems to be sharing right now.

   How long will it take to make an episode?

   I estimate each episode will take around half an hour to produce, keeping things doable alongside my other commitments. You measure your production time and then choose your schedule.

   Do I have time and resources to make this happen?

   I’ve already got hosting, gear, and a plan for the website (PitchAPodcast.com). The biggest challenge will be getting enough listener participation to keep the show going.

   Key Takeaway

   1. I’m considering a crowd-generated podcast to tackle the problem of bad guest pitches.
   2. If you’d like to participate, send me your stories of bad (or good!) pitches, info about your podcast and website, and details on your ideal guest.
   3. I run through all the big questions to ask before launching, sharing my honest answers and experiences.
   
   

   Links Mentioned

   Pitchapodcast.com

   schoolofpodcasting.com

   podcastingobservations.com

   Captive Media Hosting

   Buzzsprout Media Hosting

   PodMatch

   PodcastGuests.com.

   Podpage.com

   ---

   If you have your own pitch stories or want to get involved, head to PitchAPodcast.com and share your experiences!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>b46d7c62-dbb3-4627-89e7-0e093a4f982cMon, 19 Jan 2026 00:00:00 -040026:08falsefull10191019The Myth of Overnight Success: What Podcasting Really TakesHey, it’s Dave Jackson here! In this episode, I’m diving letting you see why patience and persistence matter more than anything else in podcasting (and, honestly, in most creative pursuits). We’ve all been spoiled by the microwave mentality (wanting quick results and instant gratification) but the real success stories are built over years, not weeks.

   I kick things off with the story of the microwave’s invention as a metaphor for how society craves instant results, then flip the script to talk about why that approach just doesn’t work in podcasting.

   What Does it Take to Be Known?

   You’ll hear me break down the journeys of big names like Morgan Freeman, Samuel L. Jackson, Harrison Ford, Bryan Cranston, Lucille Ball, and even musicians like Bonnie Raitt and Andrea Bocelli—all of whom pushed through years (sometimes decades) before their “big break.” Yes, even Adam Sandler and Jerry Seinfeld had plenty of failures, awkward moments, and years of grinding before the world knew their names. I share how their experiences relate directly to podcasting, and why embracing your own style and sticking with what you love can make all the difference.

   You Need To Be More Than "Good"

   I also talk about the importance of consistency, cross-promotion, knowing your audience, and making your content “remarkable”—the kind people just have to talk about. I share how Seinfeld didn’t become a household name overnight, and how even my own podcast journey has been about slow, steady growth, not big, sudden leaps.

   Plus, I get into listener engagement strategies, word-of-mouth tactics, and why you should appreciate the connections and opportunities podcasting brings, from new friendships to dream gigs. And yes, you’ll hear a little power rant about the NFL’s approach to consistency (or lack thereof)!

   Because of My Podcast Lou Mongello

   Finally, I wrap up with plenty of listener “because of my podcast” stories, examples of how podcasting opens doors you never imagined, and a reminder that there’s nothing stopping you from growing your show except your own willingness to put in the time and effort.

   If you want to get inspired and set the right expectations for your own podcast journey—or just need a reminder that you’re not alone in the slow grind—this episode is for you. Thanks for tuning in!

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Lou Mongello and his WDW Radio

   Lou Mongello on SOP 713

   Because of My Podcast Post on Reddit

   Because of my podcast show

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>Hey, it’s Dave Jackson here! In this episode, I’m diving letting you see why patience and persistence matter more than anything else in podcasting (and, honestly, in most creative pursuits). We’ve all been spoiled by the microwave mentality (wanting quick results and instant gratification) but the real success stories are built over years, not weeks.

   I kick things off with the story of the microwave’s invention as a metaphor for how society craves instant results, then flip the script to talk about why that approach just doesn’t work in podcasting.

   What Does it Take to Be Known?

   You’ll hear me break down the journeys of big names like Morgan Freeman, Samuel L. Jackson, Harrison Ford, Bryan Cranston, Lucille Ball, and even musicians like Bonnie Raitt and Andrea Bocelli—all of whom pushed through years (sometimes decades) before their “big break.” Yes, even Adam Sandler and Jerry Seinfeld had plenty of failures, awkward moments, and years of grinding before the world knew their names. I share how their experiences relate directly to podcasting, and why embracing your own style and sticking with what you love can make all the difference.

   You Need To Be More Than "Good"

   I also talk about the importance of consistency, cross-promotion, knowing your audience, and making your content “remarkable”—the kind people just have to talk about. I share how Seinfeld didn’t become a household name overnight, and how even my own podcast journey has been about slow, steady growth, not big, sudden leaps.

   Plus, I get into listener engagement strategies, word-of-mouth tactics, and why you should appreciate the connections and opportunities podcasting brings, from new friendships to dream gigs. And yes, you’ll hear a little power rant about the NFL’s approach to consistency (or lack thereof)!

   Because of My Podcast Lou Mongello

   Finally, I wrap up with plenty of listener “because of my podcast” stories, examples of how podcasting opens doors you never imagined, and a reminder that there’s nothing stopping you from growing your show except your own willingness to put in the time and effort.

   If you want to get inspired and set the right expectations for your own podcast journey—or just need a reminder that you’re not alone in the slow grind—this episode is for you. Thanks for tuning in!

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Lou Mongello and his WDW Radio

   Lou Mongello on SOP 713

   Because of My Podcast Post on Reddit

   Because of my podcast show

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>1338690f-b214-4718-b685-50b9f40141b5Mon, 12 Jan 2026 00:00:00 -040042:38falsefull10181018How to Start a Podcast in 2026If you want a podcast launch checklist I have one available here. This show is intended for beginners to podcasting. If you already have one, this may be one to skip (or you will hear things you should've thought about but didn't).

   Here are the steps I covered.

   1. Pick Your Topic
   2. Decide if you're podcasting solo or with cohost(s).
   3. Pick how you will podcast.
   4. Pick where will you podcast?
   5. Choose how you will measure your success
   6. Pick a name. Naming tools from Podpage and Buzzsprout.
   7. Buy the Hardware
   8. Buy/Find Software
   9. Purchase web hosting
   10. Domain Name ( Ilke Namecheap)
   11. Graphics
   12. Intro Music. (optional)
   13. Media Hosting (for your mp3 files)
   14. Record Your Content
   15. Edit Your Content
   16. Upload your media
   17. Write Your Show Notes
   18. Click Publish
   19. Make Sure your Feed is Valid
   20. Publish to Apple, Spotify, and all other directories.
   21. Tell everyone you know to follow the show on the same day
   
   

   Here’s a handy list of every website and URL I mentioned in this episode, so you can find the resources and recommendations I talked about:

   School of Podcasting:

   https://schoolofpodcasting.com

   Podpage:

   https://podpage.com

   (And check out https://trypodpage.com for a quick start!)

   Buzzsprout:

   https://buzzsprout.com

   Captivate:

   https://captivate.fm

   Blubrry:

   https://blubrry.com

   RSS.com:

   https://rss.com

   Castfeed Validator:

   https://castfeedvalidator.com

   Namecheap (my favorite for domains):

   https://namecheap.com

   CoolerWebsites (my GoDaddy reseller):

   https://coolerwebsites.com

   PodcastBranding Co (for professionally designed artwork):

   https://podcastbranding.co

   Canva (for DIY podcast artwork):

   https://canva.com

   Transistor’s artwork preview tool:

   https://transistor.fm/preview/

   TuneReel (for music licensing):

   https://tunereel.com

   Suno/Suno AI Music (for AI-generated music):

   https://supportthisshow.com/suno

   Hollyland (wireless microphones):

   https://geni.us/hollyland-larkm2s

   Rode (microphones and lavalier mics):

   Podmic USB

   Rode Wireless Mico

   Elgato (Facecam, key light, and stream deck):

   Facecam

   Keylight

   GVM (lighting kits):

   3 Light Package

   Neewer (affordable lighting):

   2 Light Kit

   Camo (turns your phone into a webcam):

   Turn Your Phone into a Web Cam

   Streamlight (monitor-to-light software):

   Turn your monitor into a light (Windows only)

   Hindenburg (audio editing software):

   https://hindenburg.com

   Audacity (free audio editor):

   https://audacityteam.org

   Adobe Podcast (audio editing):

   https://podcast.adobe.com

   Alitu (online audio editing tool):

   https://alitu.com

   Descript (audio/video editing):

   https://descript.com

   Riverside (remote recording & video editing):

   https://riverside.fm

   Squadcast (remote recording):

   https://squadcast.fm

   ECAMM Live (Mac live streaming & recording):

   https://ecamm.com

   EV Mux (live streaming):

   https://evmux.com

   Streamyard (live streaming):

   https://streamyard.com

   Camtasia (video editing):

   https://techsmith.com/video-editor.html

   Tela (online video hosting & editing):

   https://tella.com

   DaVinci Resolve (free video editor):

   https://blackmagicdesign.com/products/davinciresolve/

   Audio Outperforms Video 15 to 1 (Rob Walch Talk)

   If you want a podcast launch checklist I have one available here. This show is intended for beginners to podcasting. If you already have one, this may be one to skip (or you will hear things you should've thought about but didn't).

   Here are the steps I covered.

   1. Pick Your Topic
   2. Decide if you're podcasting solo or with cohost(s).
   3. Pick how you will podcast.
   4. Pick where will you podcast?
   5. Choose how you will measure your success
   6. Pick a name. Naming tools from Podpage and Buzzsprout.
   7. Buy the Hardware
   8. Buy/Find Software
   9. Purchase web hosting
   10. Domain Name ( Ilke Namecheap)
   11. Graphics
   12. Intro Music. (optional)
   13. Media Hosting (for your mp3 files)
   14. Record Your Content
   15. Edit Your Content
   16. Upload your media
   17. Write Your Show Notes
   18. Click Publish
   19. Make Sure your Feed is Valid
   20. Publish to Apple, Spotify, and all other directories.
   21. Tell everyone you know to follow the show on the same day
   
   

   Here’s a handy list of every website and URL I mentioned in this episode, so you can find the resources and recommendations I talked about:

   School of Podcasting:

   https://schoolofpodcasting.com

   Podpage:

   https://podpage.com

   (And check out https://trypodpage.com for a quick start!)

   Buzzsprout:

   https://buzzsprout.com

   Captivate:

   https://captivate.fm

   Blubrry:

   https://blubrry.com

   RSS.com:

   https://rss.com

   Castfeed Validator:

   https://castfeedvalidator.com

   Namecheap (my favorite for domains):

   https://namecheap.com

   CoolerWebsites (my GoDaddy reseller):

   https://coolerwebsites.com

   PodcastBranding Co (for professionally designed artwork):

   https://podcastbranding.co

   Canva (for DIY podcast artwork):

   https://canva.com

   Transistor’s artwork preview tool:

   https://transistor.fm/preview/

   TuneReel (for music licensing):

   https://tunereel.com

   Suno/Suno AI Music (for AI-generated music):

   https://supportthisshow.com/suno

   Hollyland (wireless microphones):

   https://geni.us/hollyland-larkm2s

   Rode (microphones and lavalier mics):

   Podmic USB

   Rode Wireless Mico

   Elgato (Facecam, key light, and stream deck):

   Facecam

   Keylight

   GVM (lighting kits):

   3 Light Package

   Neewer (affordable lighting):

   2 Light Kit

   Camo (turns your phone into a webcam):

   Turn Your Phone into a Web Cam

   Streamlight (monitor-to-light software):

   Turn your monitor into a light (Windows only)

   Hindenburg (audio editing software):

   https://hindenburg.com

   Audacity (free audio editor):

   https://audacityteam.org

   Adobe Podcast (audio editing):

   https://podcast.adobe.com

   Alitu (online audio editing tool):

   https://alitu.com

   Descript (audio/video editing):

   https://descript.com

   Riverside (remote recording & video editing):

   https://riverside.fm

   Squadcast (remote recording):

   https://squadcast.fm

   ECAMM Live (Mac live streaming & recording):

   https://ecamm.com

   EV Mux (live streaming):

   https://evmux.com

   Streamyard (live streaming):

   https://streamyard.com

   Camtasia (video editing):

   https://techsmith.com/video-editor.html

   Tela (online video hosting & editing):

   https://tella.com

   DaVinci Resolve (free video editor):

   https://blackmagicdesign.com/products/davinciresolve/

   Audio Outperforms Video 15 to 1 (Rob Walch Talk)

   https://youtu.be/jqWNXW0gMs4?si=ITLHr2cAqIsjTBds&t=715

   Takeaways:

   1. Starting a podcast is simple but can be a real pain in the neck.
   2. You gotta know your 'why' for podcasting, or you'll just quit when it gets tough.
   3. Finding your target audience is crucial, don't just say 'everyone' because that's not helpful.
   4. Investing in good audio equipment is key, because bad sound makes people leave fast.
   5. Audio is the most important element of video
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Want to Make Some Money with Your Podcast?

   Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

   Profit From Your Podcast

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>7747e3f9-0a9f-4d45-adba-4b616de063acMon, 05 Jan 2026 00:00:00 -040053:11falsefull10171017What's Your Favorite Podcast (AND WHY) 2025 EditionWhat makes a podcast someone's favorite? I ask this every year, and here are the shows that were mentioned:

   Here is a list of the "Favorite" shows, as well as those who submitted them. Thanks so all who were involved.

   1. Nudge

   2. No Agenda

   3.Treat Addiction Podcast

   4. Daily Devotions for Busy Lives

   5. Harry Shearer’s Show "Le Show"

   6. School of Podcasting

   7. Time Suck

   8. Too Many Tabs

   9. What Was That Like?

   10. Daily Sports History

   11. Walking is Fitness

   12. Welcome to Earth Stories

   13. The Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast

   14. The Perrysburg Podcast

   15. Content Creators Accountant

   16. Back Look Cinema

   17. POD News Weekly Review

   18. Grow The Show

   19. Podcast411

   20. Your Podcast Consultant

   Common Thread of Great Content

   The common thread is distinctive, hard-to-find content delivered by engaging hosts with real chemistry, in a well-thought-out format, that solves a listener problem and leaves them feeling something (hopeful, grounded, entertained, or relieved).

   Did You Get Value From The Show?

   If you'd like to give back some of the value you received, you can do a one-time gift, or become an awesome supporter.

   Gear Used On This Episode

   Accentize Dialogue Enhance Plugin

   Rode Podmic USB

   Rodecaster Duo

   Schepps Omni Channel Plugin

   Captivate Media Hosting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Don't Wait to Level Up Your Show

   Thinking about starting a podcast—or already 300 episodes in? Skip the rookie mistakes, save money, and level up your show with the School of Podcasting with Dave Jackson, where you get hands-on feedback, one-on-one support, and practical advice that actually improves your podcast. Not sure? Just ask Krista and Mark from practicalprepping.info Then join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join (or use the link below)

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>What makes a podcast someone's favorite? I ask this every year, and here are the shows that were mentioned:

   Here is a list of the "Favorite" shows, as well as those who submitted them. Thanks so all who were involved.

   1. Nudge

   2. No Agenda

   3.Treat Addiction Podcast

   4. Daily Devotions for Busy Lives

   5. Harry Shearer’s Show "Le Show"

   6. School of Podcasting

   7. Time Suck

   8. Too Many Tabs

   9. What Was That Like?

   10. Daily Sports History

   11. Walking is Fitness

   12. Welcome to Earth Stories

   13. The Pharmacist’s Voice Podcast

   14. The Perrysburg Podcast

   15. Content Creators Accountant

   16. Back Look Cinema

   17. POD News Weekly Review

   18. Grow The Show

   19. Podcast411

   20. Your Podcast Consultant

   Common Thread of Great Content

   The common thread is distinctive, hard-to-find content delivered by engaging hosts with real chemistry, in a well-thought-out format, that solves a listener problem and leaves them feeling something (hopeful, grounded, entertained, or relieved).

   Did You Get Value From The Show?

   If you'd like to give back some of the value you received, you can do a one-time gift, or become an awesome supporter.

   Gear Used On This Episode

   Accentize Dialogue Enhance Plugin

   Rode Podmic USB

   Rodecaster Duo

   Schepps Omni Channel Plugin

   Captivate Media Hosting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Don't Wait to Level Up Your Show

   Thinking about starting a podcast—or already 300 episodes in? Skip the rookie mistakes, save money, and level up your show with the School of Podcasting with Dave Jackson, where you get hands-on feedback, one-on-one support, and practical advice that actually improves your podcast. Not sure? Just ask Krista and Mark from practicalprepping.info Then join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join (or use the link below)

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>6daf079f-5b18-49a6-82c9-7d4a77346bd3Mon, 29 Dec 2025 00:00:00 -040046:47falsefull10161016Who is Peeing in the Podcast Pool?Hey, it's Dave! In this episode (which uses chapters FYI), I take you through a year-end wrap-up, sharing stories, rants, insights, and predictions about the world of podcasting. Here are the main points I covered:

   1. A Christmas Story with a Lesson for Podcasters

   I kicked things off with a humorous Christmas tale about the Cridland Boys Choir, and what happens when you keep loosening your standards just to hit a target—a not-so-subtle lesson for the podcasting world.

   2. Pushing Back on Changing Definitions in Podcasting

   I strongly disagreed with Steve Goldstein and Jay Nachlis' take that YouTube should be considered podcasts. (also TikTok, and Newsletters).

   I emphasized that a podcast, by definition, is audio, video, or PDF delivered via RSS—without that, it's not a podcast.

   3. Why "Everything Is a Podcast" is Dangerous

   I called out the industry for letting YouTube (and now TikTok) hijack the term "podcast," muddling data and damaging clarity around the medium.

   4. The Hazards of Exclusive Distribution Deals

   I discussed how exclusive distribution (like those seen with Netflix and Spotify) leads to loss of control and audiences for podcasters.

   5. Warning Signs of Big Companies Manipulating Podcasting

   Shared concerns about major corporations and what happens when their decisions are driven mainly by shareholder profits and not creators or audiences.

   6. AI Content Flooding the Podcast Space

   I highlighted the dangers of companies like Inception Point AI mass-producing low-value podcasts, cluttering directories, harming discoverability, and devaluing advertising rates.

   7.Common Missteps Hurting Podcast Discovery

   I warned about creating duplicate listings in Apple Podcasts and elsewhere, usually when moving hosts, and the importance of understanding how to migrate your show correctly.

   8. Show Name Collisions

   I noted the confusion caused by multiple shows using the same title (like "Thinking Outside the Box") and urged creators to do their research before naming their show.

   9. Monetization Predictions for the Coming Year

   I predicted a shift toward premium/patron-supported models as podcasters get frustrated with low ad rates.

   10. The Fight Against "AI Slop"

   I advocated for collectively pushing back against low-quality, AI-generated spam content in our medium.

   11. Upcoming Industry Mergers

   I think we'll see podcast-related companies merging or being acquired in the near future.

   12. The Reality of YouTube for Podcasters

   I expect many podcasters to try YouTube, realize it's not for them, and return to audio-first approaches—while some will succeed by mastering the video platform.

   13. A Desire for More Creativity in Podcasting

   I called for a resurgence of risk-taking and creative experimentation, rather than everyone following the same tired formats.

   Podcasts/Shows Noted:

   Pod News Weekly Review

   No Agenda Show

   Good Hang with Amy Poehler

   Things We Learn in a Bar

   Work for the Wind by Aliyah Langley

   Steve's Blog That Drives Me Nuts

   Captivate

   Transistor

   Buzzsprout

   Supercast

   For more details, behind-the-scenes commentary, and my thoughts on where the industry is headed, give this episode a listen. And as always, if you need help planning, launching, growing, or monetizing your podcast, check out schoolofpodcasting.com (coupon code: listener).

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Hey, it's Dave! In this episode (which uses chapters FYI), I take you through a year-end wrap-up, sharing stories, rants, insights, and predictions about the world of podcasting. Here are the main points I covered:

   1. A Christmas Story with a Lesson for Podcasters

   I kicked things off with a humorous Christmas tale about the Cridland Boys Choir, and what happens when you keep loosening your standards just to hit a target—a not-so-subtle lesson for the podcasting world.

   2. Pushing Back on Changing Definitions in Podcasting

   I strongly disagreed with Steve Goldstein and Jay Nachlis' take that YouTube should be considered podcasts. (also TikTok, and Newsletters).

   I emphasized that a podcast, by definition, is audio, video, or PDF delivered via RSS—without that, it's not a podcast.

   3. Why "Everything Is a Podcast" is Dangerous

   I called out the industry for letting YouTube (and now TikTok) hijack the term "podcast," muddling data and damaging clarity around the medium.

   4. The Hazards of Exclusive Distribution Deals

   I discussed how exclusive distribution (like those seen with Netflix and Spotify) leads to loss of control and audiences for podcasters.

   5. Warning Signs of Big Companies Manipulating Podcasting

   Shared concerns about major corporations and what happens when their decisions are driven mainly by shareholder profits and not creators or audiences.

   6. AI Content Flooding the Podcast Space

   I highlighted the dangers of companies like Inception Point AI mass-producing low-value podcasts, cluttering directories, harming discoverability, and devaluing advertising rates.

   7.Common Missteps Hurting Podcast Discovery

   I warned about creating duplicate listings in Apple Podcasts and elsewhere, usually when moving hosts, and the importance of understanding how to migrate your show correctly.

   8. Show Name Collisions

   I noted the confusion caused by multiple shows using the same title (like "Thinking Outside the Box") and urged creators to do their research before naming their show.

   9. Monetization Predictions for the Coming Year

   I predicted a shift toward premium/patron-supported models as podcasters get frustrated with low ad rates.

   10. The Fight Against "AI Slop"

   I advocated for collectively pushing back against low-quality, AI-generated spam content in our medium.

   11. Upcoming Industry Mergers

   I think we'll see podcast-related companies merging or being acquired in the near future.

   12. The Reality of YouTube for Podcasters

   I expect many podcasters to try YouTube, realize it's not for them, and return to audio-first approaches—while some will succeed by mastering the video platform.

   13. A Desire for More Creativity in Podcasting

   I called for a resurgence of risk-taking and creative experimentation, rather than everyone following the same tired formats.

   Podcasts/Shows Noted:

   Pod News Weekly Review

   No Agenda Show

   Good Hang with Amy Poehler

   Things We Learn in a Bar

   Work for the Wind by Aliyah Langley

   Steve's Blog That Drives Me Nuts

   Captivate

   Transistor

   Buzzsprout

   Supercast

   For more details, behind-the-scenes commentary, and my thoughts on where the industry is headed, give this episode a listen. And as always, if you need help planning, launching, growing, or monetizing your podcast, check out schoolofpodcasting.com (coupon code: listener).

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>69bc61ec-89f4-4705-8925-933cfea9a509Mon, 22 Dec 2025 00:00:00 -040052:13falsefull10151015Podcasting Build Relationships Which Leads to OpportunitiesHey, it's Dave Jackson, and I'm thrilled to bring you episode 1014 of the School of Podcasting. You’ve heard me say it before: "Podcasts lead to relationships, and those relationships lead to opportunities." Today, I brought proof! I sat down with Kim Newlove and Jan Almasey, who shared amazing stories about how starting a podcast opened doors they never anticipated.

   Kim Newlove’s Story:

   Kim hosts The Pharmacist Voice, where she shares insights on using your voice in the medical field, as well as the Perrysburg Podcast in Ohio. It’s been incredible watching Kim become a mini local celebrity—people in her town now recognize her as "the podcast woman." Whether it’s meeting city council members or audience listeners who discovered the area through her podcast, Kim sees firsthand how her show for Perrysburg builds authentic relationships. She even reached out to her local library to run seminars on "how to listen to podcasts," growing her audience one person at a time. You can check out Kim’s work at the Pharmacist Voice.

   Jan Almasey’s Journey:

   Jan started the Apex Podcast after seeing how storytelling could bring hope to his local community in Stark County, Ohio. Over three years, the show picked up momentum, leading to speaking engagements at high schools, partnerships with the local chamber of commerce, and even a sponsorship from the city that helped him set up a podcast studio in downtown Canton. Jan’s strategy? Build real relationships—sending thank-you cards or making personal follow-up calls to guests fueled organic growth. Later, those relationships directly translated to business opportunities like agency work, consulting gigs, and even a grant through Jumpstart Inc. to support the local economy. Jan’s story proves that podcasting is about more than downloads—it’s about building a network that keeps on growing. Learn more at https://www.linkedin.com/in/jan-almasy/

   My Takeaway:

   Reflecting on their experiences—and my own—I can't stress enough how starting a podcast can transform your network. Whether you’re meeting listeners at local events, helping someone discover how to use a podcast app, or forming business partnerships outside your traditional circles, these relationships turn into possibilities you never would’ve imagined. Your podcast can be the starting point for new jobs, collaborations, consulting work, or simply making a bigger impact in your community.

   If you’re thinking about starting a podcast or you’re on the verge of giving up—let these stories convince you to stick with it. The relationships you build now might lead to the next big opportunity.

   Ready to plan, launch, or grow your show? Visit schoolofpodcasting.com and use coupon code LISTENER to save on your membership (with a 30-day money-back guarantee)!

   As always, thanks for listening—and if you’ve got a "Because of My Podcast" story, I’d love to hear it!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Profit From Your Podcast

   Ready to make some money with your podcast? Check out the book Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Listeners into a Livelihood. I interviewed 70 different podcasters and share all of their insights into the seven different ways you can make money with your podcast. Available as a paperback, kindle, and audiobook. Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

   Profit From Your Podcast

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Hey, it's Dave Jackson, and I'm thrilled to bring you episode 1014 of the School of Podcasting. You’ve heard me say it before: "Podcasts lead to relationships, and those relationships lead to opportunities." Today, I brought proof! I sat down with Kim Newlove and Jan Almasey, who shared amazing stories about how starting a podcast opened doors they never anticipated.

   Kim Newlove’s Story:

   Kim hosts The Pharmacist Voice, where she shares insights on using your voice in the medical field, as well as the Perrysburg Podcast in Ohio. It’s been incredible watching Kim become a mini local celebrity—people in her town now recognize her as "the podcast woman." Whether it’s meeting city council members or audience listeners who discovered the area through her podcast, Kim sees firsthand how her show for Perrysburg builds authentic relationships. She even reached out to her local library to run seminars on "how to listen to podcasts," growing her audience one person at a time. You can check out Kim’s work at the Pharmacist Voice.

   Jan Almasey’s Journey:

   Jan started the Apex Podcast after seeing how storytelling could bring hope to his local community in Stark County, Ohio. Over three years, the show picked up momentum, leading to speaking engagements at high schools, partnerships with the local chamber of commerce, and even a sponsorship from the city that helped him set up a podcast studio in downtown Canton. Jan’s strategy? Build real relationships—sending thank-you cards or making personal follow-up calls to guests fueled organic growth. Later, those relationships directly translated to business opportunities like agency work, consulting gigs, and even a grant through Jumpstart Inc. to support the local economy. Jan’s story proves that podcasting is about more than downloads—it’s about building a network that keeps on growing. Learn more at https://www.linkedin.com/in/jan-almasy/

   My Takeaway:

   Reflecting on their experiences—and my own—I can't stress enough how starting a podcast can transform your network. Whether you’re meeting listeners at local events, helping someone discover how to use a podcast app, or forming business partnerships outside your traditional circles, these relationships turn into possibilities you never would’ve imagined. Your podcast can be the starting point for new jobs, collaborations, consulting work, or simply making a bigger impact in your community.

   If you’re thinking about starting a podcast or you’re on the verge of giving up—let these stories convince you to stick with it. The relationships you build now might lead to the next big opportunity.

   Ready to plan, launch, or grow your show? Visit schoolofpodcasting.com and use coupon code LISTENER to save on your membership (with a 30-day money-back guarantee)!

   As always, thanks for listening—and if you’ve got a "Because of My Podcast" story, I’d love to hear it!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Profit From Your Podcast

   Ready to make some money with your podcast? Check out the book Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Listeners into a Livelihood. I interviewed 70 different podcasters and share all of their insights into the seven different ways you can make money with your podcast. Available as a paperback, kindle, and audiobook. Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

   Profit From Your Podcast

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>832c6145-6ca4-42f0-8c17-f9f41545a377Mon, 15 Dec 2025 00:00:00 -040038:06falsefull10141014How to Handle Listener Feedback (Even the Awkward Bits)Welcome to the show! In this episode, I’m pulling back the curtain and sharing the feedback you’ve given me over the past year. From the things you love—like honest opinions and those behind-the-scenes bloopers—to areas where you think I could improve, I’m breaking it all down.

   I’ll share how I process both praise and criticism, respond to some thought-provoking and even challenging listener comments, and talk openly about staying authentic on the microphone, no matter what.

   If you’ve ever wondered how to handle feedback for your own podcast—or you’re just curious about what really goes on behind the scenes—this episode is for you. Let’s jump in and talk about what it really means to grow through feedback!

   Main Points Covered

   1. Shared survey results about my audience (how you found the show, preferences on episode length, etc.)
   2. The value of opinions and why I’m not afraid to voice mine—people appreciate authenticity!
   3. Blooper reel gets love for keeping the show relatable and real.
   4. Several listeners said the show’s focus has improved—thanks for noticing!
   5. Some prefer solo episodes to interviews, and I talk about why I sometimes do interviews anyway.
   6. The “same old” show approach: people tune in for consistency, just like reruns of Hallmark movies.
   7. Trust is crucial; I work hard to give value and answers you can’t find elsewhere.
   8. You can tell when I’m tired or distracted! I agree—your energy transfers to listeners.
   9. Being award-winning isn’t about ego—my goal is always helping people.
   10. Repetition helps beginners, but seasoned podcasters would like more advanced content.
   11. Technical details: I use a Rode Podmic USB microphone into a Rodecaster Duo, recording in Hindenburg.
   12. Notes on ideas and feedback: people want more “behind-the-scenes” and technical information.
   13. Reading vs. riffing: I admit sometimes I slip into “reading mode” and work to stay spontaneous.
   14. Length controversy: some want shorter shows, some longer, but the majority like the current format.
   15. Hobbyists vs. business podcasters: I explain why my content has sometimes shifted toward podcasters wanting to grow.
   16. Ads feedback: some want fewer ads, especially repeating the School of Podcasting ad too often.
   17. Religion and “blue” humor: I discuss my Christian identity, my sense of humor, and respect differing tastes—even when jokes cross lines.
   18. You can’t please everyone—sometimes what “crosses the line” for one person is just casual for another.
   19. Suggestions for more advanced content and deeper listener Q&A segments.
   20. Advanced podcasting wisdom: find out what your audience wants, deliver with value, and keep improving.
   21. On making money: it’s possible, but requires loving the journey and standing out from the crowd.
   22. I’m always open to detailed questions—consider sending in your own for future deep dives!
   
   

   Websites Mentioned

   1. School of Podcasting
   2. Podcasting Observations (my email list)
   3. Podpage
   4. AppSumo
   5. Voicemail: schoolofpodcasting.com/voicemail
   6. Biz Chicks Podcast
   7. AI Goes to College
   8. Live Well and Flourish
   9. Rode Podmic USB
   10. Rodecaster Duo Mixer Recorder
   11. Feeding My Faith Show
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Today

   Ralph Estep Jr has over 100K Subscribers on YouTube and has FOUR shows at askralph.com. Ralph credits his success to the skills and network he has has built at the School of Podcasting. Join worry free with a 30-day Money Back Guarantee. Use the coupon code "listener" on a monthly, quarterly, or yearly subscription. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Welcome to the show! In this episode, I’m pulling back the curtain and sharing the feedback you’ve given me over the past year. From the things you love—like honest opinions and those behind-the-scenes bloopers—to areas where you think I could improve, I’m breaking it all down.

   I’ll share how I process both praise and criticism, respond to some thought-provoking and even challenging listener comments, and talk openly about staying authentic on the microphone, no matter what.

   If you’ve ever wondered how to handle feedback for your own podcast—or you’re just curious about what really goes on behind the scenes—this episode is for you. Let’s jump in and talk about what it really means to grow through feedback!

   Main Points Covered

   1. Shared survey results about my audience (how you found the show, preferences on episode length, etc.)
   2. The value of opinions and why I’m not afraid to voice mine—people appreciate authenticity!
   3. Blooper reel gets love for keeping the show relatable and real.
   4. Several listeners said the show’s focus has improved—thanks for noticing!
   5. Some prefer solo episodes to interviews, and I talk about why I sometimes do interviews anyway.
   6. The “same old” show approach: people tune in for consistency, just like reruns of Hallmark movies.
   7. Trust is crucial; I work hard to give value and answers you can’t find elsewhere.
   8. You can tell when I’m tired or distracted! I agree—your energy transfers to listeners.
   9. Being award-winning isn’t about ego—my goal is always helping people.
   10. Repetition helps beginners, but seasoned podcasters would like more advanced content.
   11. Technical details: I use a Rode Podmic USB microphone into a Rodecaster Duo, recording in Hindenburg.
   12. Notes on ideas and feedback: people want more “behind-the-scenes” and technical information.
   13. Reading vs. riffing: I admit sometimes I slip into “reading mode” and work to stay spontaneous.
   14. Length controversy: some want shorter shows, some longer, but the majority like the current format.
   15. Hobbyists vs. business podcasters: I explain why my content has sometimes shifted toward podcasters wanting to grow.
   16. Ads feedback: some want fewer ads, especially repeating the School of Podcasting ad too often.
   17. Religion and “blue” humor: I discuss my Christian identity, my sense of humor, and respect differing tastes—even when jokes cross lines.
   18. You can’t please everyone—sometimes what “crosses the line” for one person is just casual for another.
   19. Suggestions for more advanced content and deeper listener Q&A segments.
   20. Advanced podcasting wisdom: find out what your audience wants, deliver with value, and keep improving.
   21. On making money: it’s possible, but requires loving the journey and standing out from the crowd.
   22. I’m always open to detailed questions—consider sending in your own for future deep dives!
   
   

   Websites Mentioned

   1. School of Podcasting
   2. Podcasting Observations (my email list)
   3. Podpage
   4. AppSumo
   5. Voicemail: schoolofpodcasting.com/voicemail
   6. Biz Chicks Podcast
   7. AI Goes to College
   8. Live Well and Flourish
   9. Rode Podmic USB
   10. Rodecaster Duo Mixer Recorder
   11. Feeding My Faith Show
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Today

   Ralph Estep Jr has over 100K Subscribers on YouTube and has FOUR shows at askralph.com. Ralph credits his success to the skills and network he has has built at the School of Podcasting. Join worry free with a 30-day Money Back Guarantee. Use the coupon code "listener" on a monthly, quarterly, or yearly subscription. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>fa962168-176b-4d91-90f2-cca0e0251d40Mon, 08 Dec 2025 00:00:00 -040045:17falsefull1013101312 Things I Wish I Knew Before Starting My PodcastIn this episode, I circle back to a classic question:

   What do you wish you’d known when you started your podcast that you know now?

   This is a question I’ve asked in the past (shout-out to episode 768 back in 2021!), and while I received close to 20 answers then, participation was a bit lighter this time around. But don’t worry—the quality makes up for the quantity!

   Featured Guests & Their Insights

   I’m joined by two long-time contributors—Kim Newlove and Steve Stewart—who share powerfully honest responses about their podcasting journeys.

   Kim Newlove:

   Kim shares 12 things she wishes she’d known when starting her podcasts, The Pharmacist’s Voice and the Perrysburg Podcast. She talks about everything from being able to change your podcast’s “why” as its mission evolves, to discovering the right gear (hello, Shure SM7B!), figuring out realistic production schedules, mastering research and writing demands, making effective use of Canva for episode artwork, choosing media hosts wisely, the importance of newsletters, the value of trailers, and more. She emphasizes learning as you go and assures new podcasters that it’s totally okay to fill in gaps as you build your parachute on the way down!

   Steve Stewart:

   Steve reflects on how much he wishes he’d known how to edit for content when he first began his show in 2010. His early episodes would benefit from a bit more polish, and he shares how improving his editing skills made a huge difference not just for his own podcast, but eventually for others through his work at the Podcast Editors Academy. Steve also offers an excellent resource for anyone looking for a podcast editor.

   My Takeaways & Thoughts:

   I share my own lessons learned—including the importance of setting aside regular time for learning new skills, asking for direct feedback from listeners, and being willing to adapt and evolve your show as needed. I also discuss the value of constructive criticism and how it helps me grow as a podcaster.

   Resources & Mentions:

   • Kim’s Podcasts: The Pharmacist’s Voice and Perrysburg Podcast
   • Steve’s Podcast Editing Resource: Find an Editor
   • School of Podcasting: schoolofpodcasting.com (use coupon code “listenr” for a discount!)
   • Media Host Recommendations: Captivate, Buzzsprout, Libsyn (coupon sopfree), Transistor, Blubrry, and now RSS.com
   • Podcast Editors Academy: Steve Stewart and Mark Deal’s community for podcast editors.
   • Newsletter Tools: ConvertKit (for marketing now Kit) and Substack (for sharing thoughts/content)
   
   

   As always, I encourage you to ask your audience for feedback, keep learning, and don’t be afraid to tweak your show or try something new. Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve been podcasting for years, there’s always something to learn.

   If you want more podcasting content, check out my other shows at powerofpodcasting.com.

   Thanks so much for listening! If you enjoyed the episode, I’d truly appreciate it if you shared it with a friend

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Ready to Get Your Podcast Moving?

   Tiger Woods, Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey all had coaches. We can help you avoid mistakes, give you constructive feedback and ensure you sound professional and make content that resonates with your audience. Join the School of Podcasting and in addition to the tutorials and community you get five hours of one-on-one coaching with me each month.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>In this episode, I circle back to a classic question:

   What do you wish you’d known when you started your podcast that you know now?

   This is a question I’ve asked in the past (shout-out to episode 768 back in 2021!), and while I received close to 20 answers then, participation was a bit lighter this time around. But don’t worry—the quality makes up for the quantity!

   Featured Guests & Their Insights

   I’m joined by two long-time contributors—Kim Newlove and Steve Stewart—who share powerfully honest responses about their podcasting journeys.

   Kim Newlove:

   Kim shares 12 things she wishes she’d known when starting her podcasts, The Pharmacist’s Voice and the Perrysburg Podcast. She talks about everything from being able to change your podcast’s “why” as its mission evolves, to discovering the right gear (hello, Shure SM7B!), figuring out realistic production schedules, mastering research and writing demands, making effective use of Canva for episode artwork, choosing media hosts wisely, the importance of newsletters, the value of trailers, and more. She emphasizes learning as you go and assures new podcasters that it’s totally okay to fill in gaps as you build your parachute on the way down!

   Steve Stewart:

   Steve reflects on how much he wishes he’d known how to edit for content when he first began his show in 2010. His early episodes would benefit from a bit more polish, and he shares how improving his editing skills made a huge difference not just for his own podcast, but eventually for others through his work at the Podcast Editors Academy. Steve also offers an excellent resource for anyone looking for a podcast editor.

   My Takeaways & Thoughts:

   I share my own lessons learned—including the importance of setting aside regular time for learning new skills, asking for direct feedback from listeners, and being willing to adapt and evolve your show as needed. I also discuss the value of constructive criticism and how it helps me grow as a podcaster.

   Resources & Mentions:

   • Kim’s Podcasts: The Pharmacist’s Voice and Perrysburg Podcast
   • Steve’s Podcast Editing Resource: Find an Editor
   • School of Podcasting: schoolofpodcasting.com (use coupon code “listenr” for a discount!)
   • Media Host Recommendations: Captivate, Buzzsprout, Libsyn (coupon sopfree), Transistor, Blubrry, and now RSS.com
   • Podcast Editors Academy: Steve Stewart and Mark Deal’s community for podcast editors.
   • Newsletter Tools: ConvertKit (for marketing now Kit) and Substack (for sharing thoughts/content)
   
   

   As always, I encourage you to ask your audience for feedback, keep learning, and don’t be afraid to tweak your show or try something new. Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve been podcasting for years, there’s always something to learn.

   If you want more podcasting content, check out my other shows at powerofpodcasting.com.

   Thanks so much for listening! If you enjoyed the episode, I’d truly appreciate it if you shared it with a friend

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Ready to Get Your Podcast Moving?

   Tiger Woods, Bill Gates, Oprah Winfrey all had coaches. We can help you avoid mistakes, give you constructive feedback and ensure you sound professional and make content that resonates with your audience. Join the School of Podcasting and in addition to the tutorials and community you get five hours of one-on-one coaching with me each month.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>f9cc81f8-60ae-4609-8534-16a0f84f82d9Mon, 01 Dec 2025 00:00:00 -040044:03falsefull1012101212 Signs Your Podcast Is Actually WorkingIn this episode, I look into the many ways you can measure the success of your podcast beyond just download numbers. Too often, new podcasters get fixated on stats that might not actually reflect their true goals, whether that’s growing their business, building a community, or simply having fun. I share 12 alternative metrics—including email list growth, audience engagement, speaking opportunities, and more—so you can assess your progress and celebrate wins that go way beyond downloads. I also mention some valuable tools, companies, and podcasts to help you along the way. This episode (as all of my recent episodes) uses chapters.

   Apple and Spotify Completion Rate

   When you go into the dashboards of Apple and Spotify, you can see how far people listened to your show. I'm an old teach so for me 70% is a C. 80% is a B, and anything above 90% is an A. The beauty of both these platforms is you can click and listen at any point that shows a drop of so you can see if it was something you said that cause the dropoff.

   Listeners: The number of unique devices that have played more than 0 seconds of an episode.

   Engaged Listeners: The number of unique devices that played at least 20 minutes or 40% of an episode within a single session. Pausing or stopping an episode does not count as starting a new session.

   Spotify shows People You reached (people who have seen your show), People who Showed Interest (they interacted with your show, which may be an indicator of episode titles o artwork), People who consumed (so they listened to your show).

   Unprovoked Audience Feedback

   This is my favorite. You put out an episode, and 24 ours later you've got emails in your inbox, DMs on social giving you feedback. For me, this is a great indication that your episode resonated with your audience.

   Email List Growth

   If the goal of your show is to monetize, this metric is KEY. I know for me, I focused on lead magnets and growing my list, and those efforts resulted in me growing my list by 39%

   Growth in Community

   You can look at your community growth, this could be Facebook, Discord, Heartbeat (my favorite), Circle, etc. School of Podcasting member Mark Lawley who does the Practical Prepping show with his wife Krista. They have 155 thousands people in their community. I do not recommend using Facebook (or any free service) for your community. Paul G shared in his interview how he lost a five figure community. I've been kicked out of my own Facebook group, and moved to Heartbeat (which now has a great AI tool that makes setting up a community a breeze).

   Business Metrics

   If the goal of your show is to grow your business, then looking at the number of customers, the revenue generated should be something to look at. I hear people all the time mentioned how they will measure the goals in downloads and later say they want to make some income. Then I believe you may want to measure your success in income.

   Attribution Stats

   If you ask people who interact with you and the answer to the question, "How did you find me?" If the answer is, "I heard your podcast" that is something you can measure and let's you know your SEO and word mouth is working.

   Being Asked to Speak

   We had unprovoked audience feedback, this is unprovoked opportunities to appear on other podcasts, speaking gigs, or other media appearances.

   Are You Being Seen as The Authority

   Have you heard yourself being quoted? You can see what websites are linking to yours (which may be someone you collaborate with). This article from SemRush explains how to see who is linking to your website?.

   Consistency in Schedule

   Consistency in schedule enables your audience to add you to their routine (which is huge). So are you better at coming up with remarkable content on a consistent basis.

   Quality of Audience

   So you're attracting people, but are you attracting the right people? Are they doing what you want them to do?

   Your List of Friends is Growing

   Every time you do an interview, you have an opportunity to make a new friend. As the saying goes, "It's not who you know, but who knows you." Do you have more friends than you did a year ago?

   The Fun and Fulfillment Factor

   Are you a better communicator/interviewer than when you started?

   Do you feel more confident explaining your topic?

   Do you enjoy the conversations you’re having?

   For a lot of podcasters, that is the real win.

   -----

   Apple Chapters: What You Need to Do

   Apple Podcasts has added automated chapters to your show. In most cases you don't have to do anything to adjust your settings.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   School of Podcasting

   Family Tree Food Stories

   Practical Prepping

   Content Creators Accountant

   Podcast Best Practices Handout

   Heartbeat Community Platfrom

   Circle Community Platform

   Skool Community Platform

   Around the Layout Podcast

   Ray Arnott Interview on Partnerships

   Podmatch find Guests, Be a Guest

   Dave's Email List

   Kit Email List

   Buzzsprout Media Hosting

   Captivate Media Hosting

   Percent Change Calculator

   who is linking to your website? article

   Like the show? Buy Dave a Coffee

   Apple Dashboard

   Spotify Dashboard

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   To Shy To Podcast? You're Perfect

   Introverts often notice things that others don't see (giving you a unique point of view). They also are good listeners (great for interviews), and you probably have an attention for detail. All of these skills are great for podcasters. Plus, you can meet lots of people without meeting lots of people. Join now with a 30 day money-back guarantee at schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>In this episode, I look into the many ways you can measure the success of your podcast beyond just download numbers. Too often, new podcasters get fixated on stats that might not actually reflect their true goals, whether that’s growing their business, building a community, or simply having fun. I share 12 alternative metrics—including email list growth, audience engagement, speaking opportunities, and more—so you can assess your progress and celebrate wins that go way beyond downloads. I also mention some valuable tools, companies, and podcasts to help you along the way. This episode (as all of my recent episodes) uses chapters.

   Apple and Spotify Completion Rate

   When you go into the dashboards of Apple and Spotify, you can see how far people listened to your show. I'm an old teach so for me 70% is a C. 80% is a B, and anything above 90% is an A. The beauty of both these platforms is you can click and listen at any point that shows a drop of so you can see if it was something you said that cause the dropoff.

   Listeners: The number of unique devices that have played more than 0 seconds of an episode.

   Engaged Listeners: The number of unique devices that played at least 20 minutes or 40% of an episode within a single session. Pausing or stopping an episode does not count as starting a new session.

   Spotify shows People You reached (people who have seen your show), People who Showed Interest (they interacted with your show, which may be an indicator of episode titles o artwork), People who consumed (so they listened to your show).

   Unprovoked Audience Feedback

   This is my favorite. You put out an episode, and 24 ours later you've got emails in your inbox, DMs on social giving you feedback. For me, this is a great indication that your episode resonated with your audience.

   Email List Growth

   If the goal of your show is to monetize, this metric is KEY. I know for me, I focused on lead magnets and growing my list, and those efforts resulted in me growing my list by 39%

   Growth in Community

   You can look at your community growth, this could be Facebook, Discord, Heartbeat (my favorite), Circle, etc. School of Podcasting member Mark Lawley who does the Practical Prepping show with his wife Krista. They have 155 thousands people in their community. I do not recommend using Facebook (or any free service) for your community. Paul G shared in his interview how he lost a five figure community. I've been kicked out of my own Facebook group, and moved to Heartbeat (which now has a great AI tool that makes setting up a community a breeze).

   Business Metrics

   If the goal of your show is to grow your business, then looking at the number of customers, the revenue generated should be something to look at. I hear people all the time mentioned how they will measure the goals in downloads and later say they want to make some income. Then I believe you may want to measure your success in income.

   Attribution Stats

   If you ask people who interact with you and the answer to the question, "How did you find me?" If the answer is, "I heard your podcast" that is something you can measure and let's you know your SEO and word mouth is working.

   Being Asked to Speak

   We had unprovoked audience feedback, this is unprovoked opportunities to appear on other podcasts, speaking gigs, or other media appearances.

   Are You Being Seen as The Authority

   Have you heard yourself being quoted? You can see what websites are linking to yours (which may be someone you collaborate with). This article from SemRush explains how to see who is linking to your website?.

   Consistency in Schedule

   Consistency in schedule enables your audience to add you to their routine (which is huge). So are you better at coming up with remarkable content on a consistent basis.

   Quality of Audience

   So you're attracting people, but are you attracting the right people? Are they doing what you want them to do?

   Your List of Friends is Growing

   Every time you do an interview, you have an opportunity to make a new friend. As the saying goes, "It's not who you know, but who knows you." Do you have more friends than you did a year ago?

   The Fun and Fulfillment Factor

   Are you a better communicator/interviewer than when you started?

   Do you feel more confident explaining your topic?

   Do you enjoy the conversations you’re having?

   For a lot of podcasters, that is the real win.

   -----

   Apple Chapters: What You Need to Do

   Apple Podcasts has added automated chapters to your show. In most cases you don't have to do anything to adjust your settings.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   School of Podcasting

   Family Tree Food Stories

   Practical Prepping

   Content Creators Accountant

   Podcast Best Practices Handout

   Heartbeat Community Platfrom

   Circle Community Platform

   Skool Community Platform

   Around the Layout Podcast

   Ray Arnott Interview on Partnerships

   Podmatch find Guests, Be a Guest

   Dave's Email List

   Kit Email List

   Buzzsprout Media Hosting

   Captivate Media Hosting

   Percent Change Calculator

   who is linking to your website? article

   Like the show? Buy Dave a Coffee

   Apple Dashboard

   Spotify Dashboard

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   To Shy To Podcast? You're Perfect

   Introverts often notice things that others don't see (giving you a unique point of view). They also are good listeners (great for interviews), and you probably have an attention for detail. All of these skills are great for podcasters. Plus, you can meet lots of people without meeting lots of people. Join now with a 30 day money-back guarantee at schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>dbc6097f-f023-4532-bf92-3da8d7da58e0Mon, 24 Nov 2025 00:00:00 -040041:29falsefull10111011Over Delivering Value: The Secret Sauce for Podcast SuccessHey, it's Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting! In this episode, I dive into what truly delivers value to your podcast audience—drawing inspiration from an episode of the Novel Marketing podcast hosted by my buddy, Thomas Umstattd Jr..

   As I was driving to PodIndy, I caught myself sharing Thomas Umstattd Jr.'s episode with friends, and it hit me: why was this episode good enough for me to recommend? Today, I'm breaking down the answer to that question and sharing snippets of what I like to call "value bombs," even if that phrase is a bit cringey.

   Here's what I cover:

   • Why knowing your audience inside and out is key to delivering value.
   • How answering your audience's burning questions (like Thomas does) keeps them tuning in.
   • The importance of overdelivering—smothering your audience in value so they want to share your show.
   • Why direct recommendations from listeners are more powerful than any algorithm.
   • Examples of how Thomas Umstattd Jr. teases upcoming content to keep listeners coming back.
   • How sharing personal stories alongside expertise can connect with your audience.
   • The role of hands-on “boots on the ground” experience versus just listing facts, and how this builds authority.
   • Why saving your audience time or money equals big value.
   • Teasing future episodes and weaving in stories to keep people engaged.
   • The impact of authenticity and showing both sides of a topic.
   • My own experiment comparing human podcasting value to AI research, and why the human touch still wins.
   • A quick review/demonstration of the new Zoom PodTrack P4 Next and my honest thoughts on whether it’s worth upgrading from the original P4.
   • Lessons from a membership site migration disaster—and the importance of always having a backup plan for your content.
   
   

   Websites Mentioned:

   • AuthorMedia.com — Home of the Novel Marketing podcast.
   • SchoolofPodcasting.com — My home base for podcasting education.
   • Perplexity AI — An AI research tool I tested for podcasting advice.
   • Sweetwater — For buying podcast and audio gear.
   • Backblaze — Backup service I use for safeguarding files.
   • Voomly — New video host for my membership site.
   • Loom and Tella — Video tools for creating support and course content.
   • Gumroad - Tool to sell digital goods.
   
   

   My big takeaway? To truly deliver value: know your audience, answer their questions, overdeliver, and don't be afraid to share your own stories and expertise. When you save them time, money, or frustration, you make your podcast not only worth listening to—but worth sharing.

   Takeaways:

   • Delivering value means understanding what your audience actually wants and needs.
   • When you smother your audience in value, they'll be much more likely to share your content.
   • The absurdity of using Shopify for authors often outweighs its perceived benefits and can lead to losses.
   • Kickstarter is surprisingly the best alternative for authors wanting to sell books without the hassle of Shopify.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Back Friday Deal on Podcast Reviews

   Host: Hey, podcast creators! Are you ready to take your podcast to the next level? We have an unbeatable deal just for you! Podcast Review Service: NEW BLACK FRIDAY DEAL For a limited time, get your podcast episode and website professionally audited. Using my 30-point checklist and uncover opportunities to improve your podcast's reach and engagement! 🔍 What's Included? Podcast Episode Audit: Pinpoint key areas for improvement. Website Audit: A thorough 30-point checklist to optimize your online presence. But wait, there’s more! When you sign up, you'll receive a free month at the School of Podcasting! That's one month of top-notch podcasting training normally at $99, absolutely free! 📚 Exclusive Offer: Your School of Podcasting membership includes 5 hours of personal consulting, a service valued at $1000 alone! 🎉 All This for Just $99! Normally, you'd pay $1278 for this incredible package. But through December 31st, it's yours for just $99! 🚀 Don’t miss this chance to elevate your podcast without breaking the bank. Secure this offer today and watch your podcast thrive! Act Now! Spots are limited! Host: Visit podcasthotseat.com to claim this unbeatable offer and get started on transforming your podcast today! podcasthotseat.com

   Podcast Hotseat

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Hey, it's Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting! In this episode, I dive into what truly delivers value to your podcast audience—drawing inspiration from an episode of the Novel Marketing podcast hosted by my buddy, Thomas Umstattd Jr..

   As I was driving to PodIndy, I caught myself sharing Thomas Umstattd Jr.'s episode with friends, and it hit me: why was this episode good enough for me to recommend? Today, I'm breaking down the answer to that question and sharing snippets of what I like to call "value bombs," even if that phrase is a bit cringey.

   Here's what I cover:

   • Why knowing your audience inside and out is key to delivering value.
   • How answering your audience's burning questions (like Thomas does) keeps them tuning in.
   • The importance of overdelivering—smothering your audience in value so they want to share your show.
   • Why direct recommendations from listeners are more powerful than any algorithm.
   • Examples of how Thomas Umstattd Jr. teases upcoming content to keep listeners coming back.
   • How sharing personal stories alongside expertise can connect with your audience.
   • The role of hands-on “boots on the ground” experience versus just listing facts, and how this builds authority.
   • Why saving your audience time or money equals big value.
   • Teasing future episodes and weaving in stories to keep people engaged.
   • The impact of authenticity and showing both sides of a topic.
   • My own experiment comparing human podcasting value to AI research, and why the human touch still wins.
   • A quick review/demonstration of the new Zoom PodTrack P4 Next and my honest thoughts on whether it’s worth upgrading from the original P4.
   • Lessons from a membership site migration disaster—and the importance of always having a backup plan for your content.
   
   

   Websites Mentioned:

   • AuthorMedia.com — Home of the Novel Marketing podcast.
   • SchoolofPodcasting.com — My home base for podcasting education.
   • Perplexity AI — An AI research tool I tested for podcasting advice.
   • Sweetwater — For buying podcast and audio gear.
   • Backblaze — Backup service I use for safeguarding files.
   • Voomly — New video host for my membership site.
   • Loom and Tella — Video tools for creating support and course content.
   • Gumroad - Tool to sell digital goods.
   
   

   My big takeaway? To truly deliver value: know your audience, answer their questions, overdeliver, and don't be afraid to share your own stories and expertise. When you save them time, money, or frustration, you make your podcast not only worth listening to—but worth sharing.

   Takeaways:

   • Delivering value means understanding what your audience actually wants and needs.
   • When you smother your audience in value, they'll be much more likely to share your content.
   • The absurdity of using Shopify for authors often outweighs its perceived benefits and can lead to losses.
   • Kickstarter is surprisingly the best alternative for authors wanting to sell books without the hassle of Shopify.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Back Friday Deal on Podcast Reviews

   Host: Hey, podcast creators! Are you ready to take your podcast to the next level? We have an unbeatable deal just for you! Podcast Review Service: NEW BLACK FRIDAY DEAL For a limited time, get your podcast episode and website professionally audited. Using my 30-point checklist and uncover opportunities to improve your podcast's reach and engagement! 🔍 What's Included? Podcast Episode Audit: Pinpoint key areas for improvement. Website Audit: A thorough 30-point checklist to optimize your online presence. But wait, there’s more! When you sign up, you'll receive a free month at the School of Podcasting! That's one month of top-notch podcasting training normally at $99, absolutely free! 📚 Exclusive Offer: Your School of Podcasting membership includes 5 hours of personal consulting, a service valued at $1000 alone! 🎉 All This for Just $99! Normally, you'd pay $1278 for this incredible package. But through December 31st, it's yours for just $99! 🚀 Don’t miss this chance to elevate your podcast without breaking the bank. Secure this offer today and watch your podcast thrive! Act Now! Spots are limited! Host: Visit podcasthotseat.com to claim this unbeatable offer and get started on transforming your podcast today! podcasthotseat.com

   Podcast Hotseat

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>f586f8a1-e1b2-4ac9-a913-b85aacf82b5cMon, 17 Nov 2025 00:00:00 -040050:12falsefull10101010Small Audience, Big Results: Making Sponsor Deals Work for Any PodcasterHey everyone, it’s Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting! In today’s episode, I sit down with Heidi Kay Begay from Red House Productions (website: redhouseproductions.net) to discuss how you don’t need a massive audience to start monetizing your podcast. She reveals practical and inspiring strategies to pitch your value and land meaningful brand relationships, even when your show is still growing.

   Key Points & Takeaways

   • You Don’t Need Huge Download Numbers:
   • Heidi Kay Begay
   • shares how she started pitching to sponsors around episode 30 of her niche show, Flute360, and landed deals despite having a small audience.
   • Mindset Shift: Treating your podcast like a business is crucial. I loved Heidi’s “corn and wheat” metaphor—don’t expect business results if you’re just planting hobby seeds!
   • Pitching Sponsors: Heidi describes reaching out directly to music-branded companies—flute makers, apparel, gadgets—and focusing on how to create a win/win relationship from day one. She didn’t let her lack of experience or nerves stop her!
   • Focus on Value Over Numbers: Rather than falling for CPM (cost per mille) models, Heidi looked at what brands spend for visibility in her industry—conference booths, event program ads, etc.—and built sponsorship packages (bronze, silver, gold) that reflected that value.
   • Partnership, Not Just Ad Reads: Heidi emphasizes listening to a sponsor’s specific goals and showing genuine interest in their needs, often including interview opportunities and co-promotions to make the partnership more meaningful.
   • Negotiation is Key: Most deals aren’t signed after one email. Expect lots of back and forth, and be ready to listen and adjust your offer. Don’t feel you need everything perfect before you start the conversation.
   • Pricing Sponsorships: Heidi recommends considering not only downloads but also your total digital presence—social media, mailing list, engagement rates, speaking appearances, etc. Sponsors look at much more than just podcast stats.
   • Campaign Tracking & Follow-Up: Not all sponsors require detailed post-campaign stats. Some are satisfied knowing their brand was featured; others want custom URLs to track results. Being organized and professional goes a long way.
   • Dealing with Rejection: Both Heidi and I agree—a “no” today could be a “yes” later. Don’t burn bridges, rejection is often just “not now.”
   • AI Music Tools: I shared my experience using Suno (suno.ai), an AI music creation platform, to generate podcast outro music. If you use paid tiers, you own the commercial rights (worth checking out, especially if you need affordable, legal music for your show).
   • Check out Heidi's Course on Monetization.
   
   

   Websites Mentioned

   • redhouseproductions.net – Heidi’s podcast production/consulting hub.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com – My site for podcast coaching, resources, and community.
   • suno.ai – AI music creation platform.
   • horseradionetwork.com – Referenced for creative sponsorship strategies.
   • aroundthelayout.com – Model train podcast, discussed influencer marketing measurement.
   • Heidi Kay Begay - Heidi's site including her Flute 360 show.
   • Dave Jackson’s Guide to Confident Podcast Launching & Marketing - Dave on Heidi's show
   
   

   Episodes About Getting Sponsors

   • From Model Trains to Money: Monetizing Your Passion Podcast
   • Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never Boring
   • Why Your Media Kit is Probably Trash: Lessons from Justin Moore
   
   

   A No Might Be a Not Now

   If you think your audience is too small to monetize, don’t let that stop you from reaching out to potential sponsors. You never know until you ask! A “no” is just a “no for now”—sometimes those decline emails turn into bigger opportunities down the road.

   Want help launching, growing, or monetizing your podcast? Head to schoolofpodcasting.com and use promo code listener for a special deal. Thanks for tuning in, and if you liked the show, please share it with a friend!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Back Friday Deal on Podcast Reviews

   Host: Hey, podcast creators! Are you ready to take your podcast to the next level? We have an unbeatable deal just for you! Podcast Review Service: NEW BLACK FRIDAY DEAL For a limited time, get your podcast episode and website professionally audited. Using my 30-point checklist and uncover opportunities to improve your podcast's reach and engagement! 🔍 What's Included? Podcast Episode Audit: Pinpoint key areas for improvement. Website Audit: A thorough 30-point checklist to optimize your online presence. But wait, there’s more! When you sign up, you'll receive a free month at the School of Podcasting! That's one month of top-notch podcasting training normally at $99, absolutely free! 📚 Exclusive Offer: Your School of Podcasting membership includes 5 hours of personal consulting, a service valued at $1000 alone! 🎉 All This for Just $99! Normally, you'd pay $1278 for this incredible package. But through December 31st, it's yours for just $99! 🚀 Don’t miss this chance to elevate your podcast without breaking the bank. Secure this offer today and watch your podcast thrive! Act Now! Spots are limited! Host: Visit podcasthotseat.com to claim this unbeatable offer and get started on transforming your podcast today! podcasthotseat.com

   Podcast Hotseat

   ]]>Hey everyone, it’s Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting! In today’s episode, I sit down with Heidi Kay Begay from Red House Productions (website: redhouseproductions.net) to discuss how you don’t need a massive audience to start monetizing your podcast. She reveals practical and inspiring strategies to pitch your value and land meaningful brand relationships, even when your show is still growing.

   Key Points & Takeaways

   • You Don’t Need Huge Download Numbers:
   • Heidi Kay Begay
   • shares how she started pitching to sponsors around episode 30 of her niche show, Flute360, and landed deals despite having a small audience.
   • Mindset Shift: Treating your podcast like a business is crucial. I loved Heidi’s “corn and wheat” metaphor—don’t expect business results if you’re just planting hobby seeds!
   • Pitching Sponsors: Heidi describes reaching out directly to music-branded companies—flute makers, apparel, gadgets—and focusing on how to create a win/win relationship from day one. She didn’t let her lack of experience or nerves stop her!
   • Focus on Value Over Numbers: Rather than falling for CPM (cost per mille) models, Heidi looked at what brands spend for visibility in her industry—conference booths, event program ads, etc.—and built sponsorship packages (bronze, silver, gold) that reflected that value.
   • Partnership, Not Just Ad Reads: Heidi emphasizes listening to a sponsor’s specific goals and showing genuine interest in their needs, often including interview opportunities and co-promotions to make the partnership more meaningful.
   • Negotiation is Key: Most deals aren’t signed after one email. Expect lots of back and forth, and be ready to listen and adjust your offer. Don’t feel you need everything perfect before you start the conversation.
   • Pricing Sponsorships: Heidi recommends considering not only downloads but also your total digital presence—social media, mailing list, engagement rates, speaking appearances, etc. Sponsors look at much more than just podcast stats.
   • Campaign Tracking & Follow-Up: Not all sponsors require detailed post-campaign stats. Some are satisfied knowing their brand was featured; others want custom URLs to track results. Being organized and professional goes a long way.
   • Dealing with Rejection: Both Heidi and I agree—a “no” today could be a “yes” later. Don’t burn bridges, rejection is often just “not now.”
   • AI Music Tools: I shared my experience using Suno (suno.ai), an AI music creation platform, to generate podcast outro music. If you use paid tiers, you own the commercial rights (worth checking out, especially if you need affordable, legal music for your show).
   • Check out Heidi's Course on Monetization.
   
   

   Websites Mentioned

   • redhouseproductions.net – Heidi’s podcast production/consulting hub.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com – My site for podcast coaching, resources, and community.
   • suno.ai – AI music creation platform.
   • horseradionetwork.com – Referenced for creative sponsorship strategies.
   • aroundthelayout.com – Model train podcast, discussed influencer marketing measurement.
   • Heidi Kay Begay - Heidi's site including her Flute 360 show.
   • Dave Jackson’s Guide to Confident Podcast Launching & Marketing - Dave on Heidi's show
   
   

   Episodes About Getting Sponsors

   • From Model Trains to Money: Monetizing Your Passion Podcast
   • Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never Boring
   • Why Your Media Kit is Probably Trash: Lessons from Justin Moore
   
   

   A No Might Be a Not Now

   If you think your audience is too small to monetize, don’t let that stop you from reaching out to potential sponsors. You never know until you ask! A “no” is just a “no for now”—sometimes those decline emails turn into bigger opportunities down the road.

   Want help launching, growing, or monetizing your podcast? Head to schoolofpodcasting.com and use promo code listener for a special deal. Thanks for tuning in, and if you liked the show, please share it with a friend!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Back Friday Deal on Podcast Reviews

   Host: Hey, podcast creators! Are you ready to take your podcast to the next level? We have an unbeatable deal just for you! Podcast Review Service: NEW BLACK FRIDAY DEAL For a limited time, get your podcast episode and website professionally audited. Using my 30-point checklist and uncover opportunities to improve your podcast's reach and engagement! 🔍 What's Included? Podcast Episode Audit: Pinpoint key areas for improvement. Website Audit: A thorough 30-point checklist to optimize your online presence. But wait, there’s more! When you sign up, you'll receive a free month at the School of Podcasting! That's one month of top-notch podcasting training normally at $99, absolutely free! 📚 Exclusive Offer: Your School of Podcasting membership includes 5 hours of personal consulting, a service valued at $1000 alone! 🎉 All This for Just $99! Normally, you'd pay $1278 for this incredible package. But through December 31st, it's yours for just $99! 🚀 Don’t miss this chance to elevate your podcast without breaking the bank. Secure this offer today and watch your podcast thrive! Act Now! Spots are limited! Host: Visit podcasthotseat.com to claim this unbeatable offer and get started on transforming your podcast today! podcasthotseat.com

   Podcast Hotseat

   ]]>caa1d4a1-62a2-494a-9aa5-7e438ba9b3bbMon, 10 Nov 2025 00:00:00 -040036:59falsefull10091009You Can Be an Influencer Without Being the Best: Lessons from Ace Frehley of KissHey, it’s Dave Jackson from School of Podcasting, and in this episode, I look into what podcasters can learn from Ace Frehley of Kiss—even though Ace wasn't the most technically brilliant guitarist, his unique approach made him a massive inspiration for millions. I share how Ace’s story relates to how we think about our own podcasting journey.

   Here are some of the takeaways we can learn from Ace:

   • Be Yourself: Just like Ace was always Ace, when you’re podcasting, lean into what makes you unique. Your “superpower” may be simply being authentic and relatable.
   • You Don’t Have to Be the Best: Ace wasn’t the most technically gifted, but millions saw themselves in him because his style was accessible and inspiring. You don’t have to be the smartest or most polished podcaster to make an impact.
   • Find What Sets You Apart: Ace created the iconic smoking guitar—a visual nobody else had. What can you do to stand out in the podcasting space? (it's a hard question)
   • Continuous Improvement: Ace’s smoking guitar started as a basic smoke bomb and was improved again and again. Tweak, pivot, and keep making your show better.
   • Know Your Role and Play for the Team: Ace knew his part in Kiss and played what was right for the song, not just what made him look good. As a podcaster, sometimes the best thing is to let your guest or co-host shine.
   • Connect with Your Audience: Ace was famous for taking time with fans, speaking their language, and connecting through his style. Make sure you’re speaking your listeners’ language and not talking “above” or “below” them.
   • Protect Your Rights: When it comes to business decisions, maintain ownership of your content whenever possible—like Ace leasing his makeup design to Kiss rather than selling it outright.
   • Have Fun and Know When to Walk Away: Ace left Kiss and walked away from millions because it wasn’t fun anymore. If your podcast isn’t bringing you joy, consider your options.
   • Overcome Setbacks: Ace faced business, creative, and personal struggles but kept moving forward. Don’t let challenges stop your podcast journey.
   • Be Innovative and Audience-Focused: Innovation drew attention to Ace, and keeping your audience in mind helps you deliver a show people remember.
   
   

   Mashed Potatoes and AI

   Today I use the analogy comparing AI-generated content to instant mashed potatoes out of a box. While it’s impressive how quickly and easily you can whip something up with AI—just like it’s convenient to make mashed potatoes from a box—the outcome usually isn’t that memorable. Most of the time, I find myself more amazed by the technology itself than by what it produces.

   Growing up, my mom tried to make instant mashed potatoes edible by mixing in milk and lots of butter, but honestly, they still couldn’t compare to homemade mashed potatoes made from real potatoes, mashed by hand. When you taste those homemade mashed potatoes, it’s something you remember—they’re just better.

   The point I wanted to make is that shortcuts like AI (or boxed potatoes) may save time, but when I put in the time to create something myself—from scratch—it always turns out more remarkable and worth sharing with my audience. That’s what I strive for in my podcasting: to create something people remember, not just something that’s quick and easy.

   Josh Liston from Sake This had me thinking how I've never shared something created by AI because of the content (maybe because it was cool).

   The "End" of Unlimited Consulting at the School of Podcasting

   Recently, I made a change at the School of Podcasting—I’ve retired the “unlimited consulting” offer and now give members up to five hours of consulting each month. Honestly, most folks never came close to hitting that limit, but this shift helps clarify expectations, so it’s easier for you to understand what you’re getting.

   Don’t worry, nothing is really lost; you’ll still get individualized help, awesome resources, and the same dedicated support I’ve always offered. If you ever need more help, just ask—I’m here to help podcasters succeed!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Help When You Don't Know Where To Start

   I get it. I talk to people looking to launch or grow their podcast. "“There’s too much gear/software — I don’t know what I need.” Microphones, mixers, hosting platforms, editing software — it’s easy to get lost. Analysis paralysis kicks in fast. I help podcasters. I've been doing it 20 years. Let me help. Dave Jackson schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Hey, it’s Dave Jackson from School of Podcasting, and in this episode, I look into what podcasters can learn from Ace Frehley of Kiss—even though Ace wasn't the most technically brilliant guitarist, his unique approach made him a massive inspiration for millions. I share how Ace’s story relates to how we think about our own podcasting journey.

   Here are some of the takeaways we can learn from Ace:

   • Be Yourself: Just like Ace was always Ace, when you’re podcasting, lean into what makes you unique. Your “superpower” may be simply being authentic and relatable.
   • You Don’t Have to Be the Best: Ace wasn’t the most technically gifted, but millions saw themselves in him because his style was accessible and inspiring. You don’t have to be the smartest or most polished podcaster to make an impact.
   • Find What Sets You Apart: Ace created the iconic smoking guitar—a visual nobody else had. What can you do to stand out in the podcasting space? (it's a hard question)
   • Continuous Improvement: Ace’s smoking guitar started as a basic smoke bomb and was improved again and again. Tweak, pivot, and keep making your show better.
   • Know Your Role and Play for the Team: Ace knew his part in Kiss and played what was right for the song, not just what made him look good. As a podcaster, sometimes the best thing is to let your guest or co-host shine.
   • Connect with Your Audience: Ace was famous for taking time with fans, speaking their language, and connecting through his style. Make sure you’re speaking your listeners’ language and not talking “above” or “below” them.
   • Protect Your Rights: When it comes to business decisions, maintain ownership of your content whenever possible—like Ace leasing his makeup design to Kiss rather than selling it outright.
   • Have Fun and Know When to Walk Away: Ace left Kiss and walked away from millions because it wasn’t fun anymore. If your podcast isn’t bringing you joy, consider your options.
   • Overcome Setbacks: Ace faced business, creative, and personal struggles but kept moving forward. Don’t let challenges stop your podcast journey.
   • Be Innovative and Audience-Focused: Innovation drew attention to Ace, and keeping your audience in mind helps you deliver a show people remember.
   
   

   Mashed Potatoes and AI

   Today I use the analogy comparing AI-generated content to instant mashed potatoes out of a box. While it’s impressive how quickly and easily you can whip something up with AI—just like it’s convenient to make mashed potatoes from a box—the outcome usually isn’t that memorable. Most of the time, I find myself more amazed by the technology itself than by what it produces.

   Growing up, my mom tried to make instant mashed potatoes edible by mixing in milk and lots of butter, but honestly, they still couldn’t compare to homemade mashed potatoes made from real potatoes, mashed by hand. When you taste those homemade mashed potatoes, it’s something you remember—they’re just better.

   The point I wanted to make is that shortcuts like AI (or boxed potatoes) may save time, but when I put in the time to create something myself—from scratch—it always turns out more remarkable and worth sharing with my audience. That’s what I strive for in my podcasting: to create something people remember, not just something that’s quick and easy.

   Josh Liston from Sake This had me thinking how I've never shared something created by AI because of the content (maybe because it was cool).

   The "End" of Unlimited Consulting at the School of Podcasting

   Recently, I made a change at the School of Podcasting—I’ve retired the “unlimited consulting” offer and now give members up to five hours of consulting each month. Honestly, most folks never came close to hitting that limit, but this shift helps clarify expectations, so it’s easier for you to understand what you’re getting.

   Don’t worry, nothing is really lost; you’ll still get individualized help, awesome resources, and the same dedicated support I’ve always offered. If you ever need more help, just ask—I’m here to help podcasters succeed!

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Help When You Don't Know Where To Start

   I get it. I talk to people looking to launch or grow their podcast. "“There’s too much gear/software — I don’t know what I need.” Microphones, mixers, hosting platforms, editing software — it’s easy to get lost. Analysis paralysis kicks in fast. I help podcasters. I've been doing it 20 years. Let me help. Dave Jackson schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>04075556-56da-43b3-9775-18342d6aefcdMon, 03 Nov 2025 00:00:00 -040037:38falsefull10081008Counting Episodes: Just How Many Do We Listen To?We're diving into the oh-so-fun world of podcast listening habits today, folks. Some people think most listeners are "Full." So how many podcasts are we actually cramming into our ears each week? And let me tell you, the answers are as varied as the podcasts themselves. From folks who binge a couple of episodes while commuting to some who claim they listen to 30-plus shows, it’s a wild ride. So grab your headphones and settle in as we break down the absurdity of our listening obsessions and peek behind the curtain of our podcasting lives.

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasting might feel saturated, but there's always room for new shows and ideas.
   • Listeners subscribe to many shows, but they often only tune into a select few episodes weekly.
   • The average podcast listener seems to juggle multiple shows, depending on their daily activities.
   • Even seasoned podcasters have varied listening habits that shift over time and circumstances.
   • Finding a good podcast is like finding a needle in a haystack, but hey, it's worth the search!
   • People are still engaging with podcasts, despite claims of saturation in the market.
   
   

   Contributors:

   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • backlookcinema.com
   • askralph.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • stevestewart.me
   • practicalprepping.info
   • theruckersedge.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/pocketcasts
   • podcasteditorsacademy.com
   
   

   Ready to Start a Podcast?

   Starting a new show? Need help growing the show you have?

   Join the School of Podcasting worry free with a 30-day money-back guarantee.

   JOIN TODAY

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>We're diving into the oh-so-fun world of podcast listening habits today, folks. Some people think most listeners are "Full." So how many podcasts are we actually cramming into our ears each week? And let me tell you, the answers are as varied as the podcasts themselves. From folks who binge a couple of episodes while commuting to some who claim they listen to 30-plus shows, it’s a wild ride. So grab your headphones and settle in as we break down the absurdity of our listening obsessions and peek behind the curtain of our podcasting lives.

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasting might feel saturated, but there's always room for new shows and ideas.
   • Listeners subscribe to many shows, but they often only tune into a select few episodes weekly.
   • The average podcast listener seems to juggle multiple shows, depending on their daily activities.
   • Even seasoned podcasters have varied listening habits that shift over time and circumstances.
   • Finding a good podcast is like finding a needle in a haystack, but hey, it's worth the search!
   • People are still engaging with podcasts, despite claims of saturation in the market.
   
   

   Contributors:

   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • backlookcinema.com
   • askralph.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • stevestewart.me
   • practicalprepping.info
   • theruckersedge.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/pocketcasts
   • podcasteditorsacademy.com
   
   

   Ready to Start a Podcast?

   Starting a new show? Need help growing the show you have?

   Join the School of Podcasting worry free with a 30-day money-back guarantee.

   JOIN TODAY

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>ea55ef61-0377-4b63-a2ff-bc4ef3b0a601Mon, 27 Oct 2025 00:00:00 -040036:53falsefull10071007Is Live Podcasting Worth it? The Pros and Cons of Live podcastingI'm diving deep into the pros and cons of doing a live podcast, inspired by a question from Ralph over at askralph.com. If you’ve ever considered going live with your show—whether with video or audio—you’ll want to hear my honest take after years of experience.

   I break down what it’s really like to start live streaming, especially if you’re new to podcasting or just thinking about expanding into video. From gear recommendations, background setups, and green screens to my latest waste-of-money purchase (ouch!), I share what works, what doesn’t, and what you should really consider before investing.

   You’ll hear why consistency in scheduling is key and how I built a loyal live audience for Ask the Podcast Coach, which now feels like the new Saturday morning cartoons for my regulars. I talk candidly about realistic audience expectations—don’t be shocked when only a handful show up at first!—and why you shouldn’t start live if you're overwhelmed by tech.

   I run through my favorite live streaming platforms, like Restream, eCamm Live, EVMux, and Streamyard, and why I personally steer clear of Riverside despite its flashy features. I talk camera options, from affordable 4K webcams to fancy DSLRs, and stress why you should practice, practice, practice before going live in front of folks.

   You’ll also get my advice on handling live chat, co-host dynamics, the need for two monitors, and the occasional awkwardness of booting guests off gracefully. I share war stories about live mishaps, from surprise guests to technical gremlins, and why your audience is nearly always rooting for you.

   If you’re weighing whether the extra expense, learning curve, and time spent prepping for live shows is worth it, I’ll walk you through how it’s brought me closer to my audience and generated great content for my main show. Spoiler: For me, the connection, fun, and instant feedback have made it worthwhile—even if those first few live shows felt like talking to a brick wall!

   Takeaways:

   • Going live can totally change your podcast game, but it comes with a whole load of tech headaches.
   • There are so many tools out there for live streaming, but honestly, they all have their quirks and bugs.
   • You really need to be consistent with your live show schedule, or folks will forget about you faster than a sneeze in a windstorm.
   • Interacting with your audience live can spark some killer ideas, so don't shy away from it!
   • Don't overthink your video background; if they care more about your messy room than your words, that's a problem.
   • Prepare like you're about to run a marathon, because going live isn't just 'turn it on and chat' - it's a whole production!
   
   

   Equipment Mentioned

   Neewer Keylight Kit

   Obsbot Meet 4k Camera

   Yolo 3 4K Camera

   Logitech MX Brio Ultra HD 4K

   Sony ZV-E10 II DSLR Camera

   Elgao Key light

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • askralph.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • mixlr.com
   • restream.io
   • ecamm.com
   • evmux.com
   • riverside.fm
   • streamyard.com
   • Captivate
   • buzzsprout.com
   • lu.ma
   • podnews.net
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

   Ready to start a podcast but feeling overwhelmed? The School of Podcasting has you covered. Created by Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson, the School provides the training and support you need to launch your show successfully. Through easy-to-understand video lessons, an amazing podcasting community, and live coaching, you'll learn how to plan, record, and publish your podcast without making common mistakes. Don't let your message go unheard. Podcasting has the power to transform your life, relationships, and business. Join the School of Podcasting today and start your podcast journey with confidence. Your audience is waiting - enroll now!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>I'm diving deep into the pros and cons of doing a live podcast, inspired by a question from Ralph over at askralph.com. If you’ve ever considered going live with your show—whether with video or audio—you’ll want to hear my honest take after years of experience.

   I break down what it’s really like to start live streaming, especially if you’re new to podcasting or just thinking about expanding into video. From gear recommendations, background setups, and green screens to my latest waste-of-money purchase (ouch!), I share what works, what doesn’t, and what you should really consider before investing.

   You’ll hear why consistency in scheduling is key and how I built a loyal live audience for Ask the Podcast Coach, which now feels like the new Saturday morning cartoons for my regulars. I talk candidly about realistic audience expectations—don’t be shocked when only a handful show up at first!—and why you shouldn’t start live if you're overwhelmed by tech.

   I run through my favorite live streaming platforms, like Restream, eCamm Live, EVMux, and Streamyard, and why I personally steer clear of Riverside despite its flashy features. I talk camera options, from affordable 4K webcams to fancy DSLRs, and stress why you should practice, practice, practice before going live in front of folks.

   You’ll also get my advice on handling live chat, co-host dynamics, the need for two monitors, and the occasional awkwardness of booting guests off gracefully. I share war stories about live mishaps, from surprise guests to technical gremlins, and why your audience is nearly always rooting for you.

   If you’re weighing whether the extra expense, learning curve, and time spent prepping for live shows is worth it, I’ll walk you through how it’s brought me closer to my audience and generated great content for my main show. Spoiler: For me, the connection, fun, and instant feedback have made it worthwhile—even if those first few live shows felt like talking to a brick wall!

   Takeaways:

   • Going live can totally change your podcast game, but it comes with a whole load of tech headaches.
   • There are so many tools out there for live streaming, but honestly, they all have their quirks and bugs.
   • You really need to be consistent with your live show schedule, or folks will forget about you faster than a sneeze in a windstorm.
   • Interacting with your audience live can spark some killer ideas, so don't shy away from it!
   • Don't overthink your video background; if they care more about your messy room than your words, that's a problem.
   • Prepare like you're about to run a marathon, because going live isn't just 'turn it on and chat' - it's a whole production!
   
   

   Equipment Mentioned

   Neewer Keylight Kit

   Obsbot Meet 4k Camera

   Yolo 3 4K Camera

   Logitech MX Brio Ultra HD 4K

   Sony ZV-E10 II DSLR Camera

   Elgao Key light

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • askralph.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • mixlr.com
   • restream.io
   • ecamm.com
   • evmux.com
   • riverside.fm
   • streamyard.com
   • Captivate
   • buzzsprout.com
   • lu.ma
   • podnews.net
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

   Ready to start a podcast but feeling overwhelmed? The School of Podcasting has you covered. Created by Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson, the School provides the training and support you need to launch your show successfully. Through easy-to-understand video lessons, an amazing podcasting community, and live coaching, you'll learn how to plan, record, and publish your podcast without making common mistakes. Don't let your message go unheard. Podcasting has the power to transform your life, relationships, and business. Join the School of Podcasting today and start your podcast journey with confidence. Your audience is waiting - enroll now!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>f6627184-2163-4939-ba6d-f5570a13eba0Mon, 20 Oct 2025 00:00:00 -040051:23falsefull10061006From Idea to Launch: How Long Does It Really Take to Start a Podcast?Welcome back! In this episode, I tackle this month’s big question: "How long did it take you to bring your podcast from an idea in your head to execution—and how long to find your audience?"

   I share stories from guest contributors and reflect on my own process after launching nearly 40 different shows over the years. Todd the Gator kicks things off describing how his gaming show “Guardian Downcast” was born, with community members pulling him into hosting after another podcast called it quits. He recalls the whirlwind of learning what a podcast actually is, how to publish it, and how long it took their show to fully find its identity—hint: half their existence!

   Steve Stewart joins in, sharing that his first podcast took a full year to go from idea to launch. Facing the usual fears and uncertainty, Steve found accountability and guidance with a coach, which made all the difference. He also talks about the slow climb to finding an audience and how connecting with similar podcasts really helped boost those early numbers.

   Chris shares a personal journey that traces 20 years of tinkering before launching his current show “Cool Cars with Chris.” After plenty of experimenting and previous podcasts, he finally returned to his passion for cars and found a format that felt true to himself.

   I reflect on my own timelines, explaining that those first launches tend to take much longer thanks to the steep learning curve. Once I got the hang of things, I could launch new shows in a day or even a weekend. That said, good planning is key. I break down a suggested six-week timeline for new podcasters—everything from concept and audience research to equipment, recording, editing, feedback, and hosting. Trust me, the more time you spend planning in the beginning, the less time you’ll be spending fixing things later.

   We also dig into the importance of feedback. Whether you’re getting listeners’ reactions or setting up listening parties to watch how your core audience responds, feedback is what helps you refine and grow your show.

   I wrap up with tips for making your podcast stand out, advice for building a website and collecting email addresses, and a reminder that your launch strategy matters as much as your content. Plus, a quick book recommendation for anyone working on their visuals—and a little movie review, just for fun!

   As Always - It Depends

   If your podcast is "just for fun" then maybe you don't need to spend so much time thinking about how your show will be different. You do need to check and make sure someone else is not using your name.

   Check out the Podcast Launch Checklist

   When It Comes to Podcast Marketing

   At it's basic form, podcast marketing strategies start with knowing who your audience is (specifically) and going to where they are. Then make friends with them, and finally tell them about your show.

   Thanks To The Contributors!

   Steve Stewart - Podcast Editors Academy

   Chris Smith - Cool Cars With Chris

   Todd the Gator - Guardian Downcast / Fifty Years Experience Required

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • guardiandowncast.com
   • 50yearsexperiencerequired.com
   • coolcarswithchris.com
   • podcasteditoracademy.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • stevestewart.com
   • podcastinghotseat.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>Welcome back! In this episode, I tackle this month’s big question: "How long did it take you to bring your podcast from an idea in your head to execution—and how long to find your audience?"

   I share stories from guest contributors and reflect on my own process after launching nearly 40 different shows over the years. Todd the Gator kicks things off describing how his gaming show “Guardian Downcast” was born, with community members pulling him into hosting after another podcast called it quits. He recalls the whirlwind of learning what a podcast actually is, how to publish it, and how long it took their show to fully find its identity—hint: half their existence!

   Steve Stewart joins in, sharing that his first podcast took a full year to go from idea to launch. Facing the usual fears and uncertainty, Steve found accountability and guidance with a coach, which made all the difference. He also talks about the slow climb to finding an audience and how connecting with similar podcasts really helped boost those early numbers.

   Chris shares a personal journey that traces 20 years of tinkering before launching his current show “Cool Cars with Chris.” After plenty of experimenting and previous podcasts, he finally returned to his passion for cars and found a format that felt true to himself.

   I reflect on my own timelines, explaining that those first launches tend to take much longer thanks to the steep learning curve. Once I got the hang of things, I could launch new shows in a day or even a weekend. That said, good planning is key. I break down a suggested six-week timeline for new podcasters—everything from concept and audience research to equipment, recording, editing, feedback, and hosting. Trust me, the more time you spend planning in the beginning, the less time you’ll be spending fixing things later.

   We also dig into the importance of feedback. Whether you’re getting listeners’ reactions or setting up listening parties to watch how your core audience responds, feedback is what helps you refine and grow your show.

   I wrap up with tips for making your podcast stand out, advice for building a website and collecting email addresses, and a reminder that your launch strategy matters as much as your content. Plus, a quick book recommendation for anyone working on their visuals—and a little movie review, just for fun!

   As Always - It Depends

   If your podcast is "just for fun" then maybe you don't need to spend so much time thinking about how your show will be different. You do need to check and make sure someone else is not using your name.

   Check out the Podcast Launch Checklist

   When It Comes to Podcast Marketing

   At it's basic form, podcast marketing strategies start with knowing who your audience is (specifically) and going to where they are. Then make friends with them, and finally tell them about your show.

   Thanks To The Contributors!

   Steve Stewart - Podcast Editors Academy

   Chris Smith - Cool Cars With Chris

   Todd the Gator - Guardian Downcast / Fifty Years Experience Required

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • guardiandowncast.com
   • 50yearsexperiencerequired.com
   • coolcarswithchris.com
   • podcasteditoracademy.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • stevestewart.com
   • podcastinghotseat.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>ad396405-dda7-423b-8365-5a017e055735Mon, 13 Oct 2025 00:00:00 -040043:03falsefull10051005Podcasting Best Practices or Myths? Let's Find Out!In today's episode, we're going to pull back that curtain on podcasting best practices. And some of these conventions are grounded in logic and proven results, and others might just be myths that we're just blindly following. I explain why I think these are legit, and explain why some of these are not accurate. As always your audience may be different than mine, but based on 20 years in podcasting, these are the just some of the best practices I teach at the School of Podcasting.

   Why is Recording a Test Episode before launch a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Authors have rough drafts
   2. Athletes have pre-season
   3. Actors have dress rehearsal
   4. When you publish the first thing you record, you are essentially publishing a "rough draft." Anytime you do something for the first time, it's not as good as the second.
   
   

   Why is Defining a Clear Topic or Niche a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. It makes it easy to create content. If I'm making dinner for a bunch of vegans, I know what I can make and what I couldn't.
   2. This makes it easier to market. Now instead of marketing to Vegans, Carnivore, or those who are Glucose Intolerant, etc.
   3. You can also lump this in with the advice of "Know your audience."
   4. What appears is a downside may be an upside: a smaller but more loyal audience.
   
   

   Why Is Getting to the Topic ASAP a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Do you have a ton of free time?
   2. Look at Netflix, when an episode is over it give you an option to skip the credits and go to the next episode. When you go to the next episode, it prompts you to skip the intro. This leads me to believe it is best to get to the content asap.
   
   

   Why is Knowing Why Your Are Podcasting a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. When a podcaster doesn't get the result they had hoped to receive, they quit (often before their 10th episode).
   2. If you were hired by a company to earn more money, and then they paid you the same (or less) would you stay?
   
   

   Why is Engaging with Audience and Creating a Community a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. The previous best practice was "Get to know your audience." This is how you get to know them.
   2. This can be on social, email, anyway you can interact with your audience you should do it.
   
   

   Why is Prioritizing Sound Quality a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You want it to be EASY to consume your content. You don't want the audience to strain to consume your content. Reverb or "room noise" can become a serious issue when the listener is in a car with the noise of the tires on the road. Think of it this way,  smear vaseline on your glasses and try to watch something. You can do it, but it takes extra effort. We need it to be EASY
   2. Even in videos, the key ingredient is not lighting but audio. If I can see you but can't hear you what's the point.
   3. You don't need to spend thousands of dollars on equipment. You can get started with a Samson Q2U microphone. If you want to do video, you can get a pair of Rode Wireless Micro microphones and use your phone as a camera.
   
   

   Why is Knowing What You're Going to Say Before Your Press Record a Best Practice?

   1. I always say, less planning equals more editing. This can lead to it taking longer to produce an episode
   2. While you want it to feel conversational like a phone call with your best friend, it is a performance for a global audience.
   3. Without focus, you again tend to ramble, repeat yourself, or fall into unrelated chit-chat.
   4. I've actually heard episode where people discuss what they are going to talk about on the episode - in the episode. The audience doesn't care how the sausage is made. They just want the sausage.
   
   

   Why is Including a Clear Call to Action a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Your audience may be driving, or some other activity where they can't push buttons and take action. Making it clear, and easy to remember can help them.
   2. When you include more than one at a time, it makes it hard to remember.
   3. If you don't get your WHY you burnout. How do you get your WHY? By asking for it.
   
   

   Why is Sticking to a Consistent Schedule a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You become part of the audience's routine. This is HUGE. You don't want to be a good podcast, you want to be someone's favorite (Jay Acunzo)
   2. You are seen as reliable. If you're podcasting for your business this is part of your brand.
   3. Keep in mind it's more important to be consistent in value than schedule. I'd rather have a "Late" show that was remarkable than an on time show that was "Meh."
   
   

   Why is Having a Consistent Brand a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. This is somewhat branding 101. When your brand is a trusted resource, people are drawn to it.
   2. Mountain Dew is a brand. It has raving fans. So when Pepsi has a new flavor, instead of creating a new brand, they use the Mountain Dew brand to introduce it.
   3. A logo can signify that something is official (like swag).
   4. For more information see the book The Visual Marketer: The Marketer's Crash Course for Creating Memorable and Effective Visuals
   
   

   Why is Having Your Best Episodes Featured On Your Website a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You only get to make a first impression once. According to The Podcast Study, 41% of your audience will NOT give you a second chance. Your latest episode may not be your best. Lead with your best stuff based on your stats.
   
   

   Why Does Having Keywords In Your Podcast Title a Podcast Best Practice

   1. Your audience needs to find you before they consume your content. If they search for "baseball" and your show is called "The dugout" it may not be found.
   2. Check out Mangools, Ubersuggest, Keywords Everywhere, SERanking,  (there are TONS of these types of tools).
   
   

   Best Practices That Are Contested

   Launching Your Podcast With Three Episodes

   1. The thought is that people will consume all of your content. It give them a chance to make a deeper connection, and if they follow the show it boosts your chances of going up the charts. This is all true. What I've not been able to prove is how many people discover shows looking at the charts. This is often more for marketing material, "A Top 20 Podcast."
   
   

   Rating and Reviews Help You Get Found

   This is a fallacy that gets repeated almost hourly on podcasts every day. Here is the quote FROM APPLE:

   What the charts measure:

   Apple Podcasts Charts reflect the most popular shows and episodes available in a given market and are designed to help people discover what to listen to next. They do not reflect all-time listening records and are not a measure of the largest podcasts by listenership.

   While the exact algorithm cannot be shared to protect their integrity, the charts measure a mix of the following:

   • Listening: When listeners are engaging with episodes, it’s an indicator of content popularity.
   • Follows: When listeners follow a show to receive new episodes, it’s an indicator of their intent to listen.
   • Completion Rate: When listeners complete episodes, it’s an indicator of content quality.
   
   

   Ratings, reviews, and shares

   Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes.

   Source: https://podcasters.apple.com/support/3146-apple-podcasts-charts

   Using Audiograms To Promote Your Show on Social

   While this first worked when it was introduced (because it was new). I've heard no less than four social media experts explain that audiograms don't really help get people to your show. This is partly due to people just wanting to scroll more and more, and it should be seen more as a branding tool. It reminds people your show is here, and if they haven't checked out the latest episode they may go listen to it later. Many people don't stop the scroll. So this is a trickle.

   YouTube

   This is a test that is currently underway. There is no definitive "guaranteed success." While YouTube will tell you you MUST DO VIDEO (and of course they do), I've heard a few podcasters who have made the trip, started doing video, and quit. Only 28% of Podcasters are doing full video on Youtube based on data from the Podcast Host. Check out...]]>In today's episode, we're going to pull back that curtain on podcasting best practices. And some of these conventions are grounded in logic and proven results, and others might just be myths that we're just blindly following. I explain why I think these are legit, and explain why some of these are not accurate. As always your audience may be different than mine, but based on 20 years in podcasting, these are the just some of the best practices I teach at the School of Podcasting.

   Why is Recording a Test Episode before launch a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Authors have rough drafts
   2. Athletes have pre-season
   3. Actors have dress rehearsal
   4. When you publish the first thing you record, you are essentially publishing a "rough draft." Anytime you do something for the first time, it's not as good as the second.
   
   

   Why is Defining a Clear Topic or Niche a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. It makes it easy to create content. If I'm making dinner for a bunch of vegans, I know what I can make and what I couldn't.
   2. This makes it easier to market. Now instead of marketing to Vegans, Carnivore, or those who are Glucose Intolerant, etc.
   3. You can also lump this in with the advice of "Know your audience."
   4. What appears is a downside may be an upside: a smaller but more loyal audience.
   
   

   Why Is Getting to the Topic ASAP a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Do you have a ton of free time?
   2. Look at Netflix, when an episode is over it give you an option to skip the credits and go to the next episode. When you go to the next episode, it prompts you to skip the intro. This leads me to believe it is best to get to the content asap.
   
   

   Why is Knowing Why Your Are Podcasting a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. When a podcaster doesn't get the result they had hoped to receive, they quit (often before their 10th episode).
   2. If you were hired by a company to earn more money, and then they paid you the same (or less) would you stay?
   
   

   Why is Engaging with Audience and Creating a Community a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. The previous best practice was "Get to know your audience." This is how you get to know them.
   2. This can be on social, email, anyway you can interact with your audience you should do it.
   
   

   Why is Prioritizing Sound Quality a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You want it to be EASY to consume your content. You don't want the audience to strain to consume your content. Reverb or "room noise" can become a serious issue when the listener is in a car with the noise of the tires on the road. Think of it this way,  smear vaseline on your glasses and try to watch something. You can do it, but it takes extra effort. We need it to be EASY
   2. Even in videos, the key ingredient is not lighting but audio. If I can see you but can't hear you what's the point.
   3. You don't need to spend thousands of dollars on equipment. You can get started with a Samson Q2U microphone. If you want to do video, you can get a pair of Rode Wireless Micro microphones and use your phone as a camera.
   
   

   Why is Knowing What You're Going to Say Before Your Press Record a Best Practice?

   1. I always say, less planning equals more editing. This can lead to it taking longer to produce an episode
   2. While you want it to feel conversational like a phone call with your best friend, it is a performance for a global audience.
   3. Without focus, you again tend to ramble, repeat yourself, or fall into unrelated chit-chat.
   4. I've actually heard episode where people discuss what they are going to talk about on the episode - in the episode. The audience doesn't care how the sausage is made. They just want the sausage.
   
   

   Why is Including a Clear Call to Action a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. Your audience may be driving, or some other activity where they can't push buttons and take action. Making it clear, and easy to remember can help them.
   2. When you include more than one at a time, it makes it hard to remember.
   3. If you don't get your WHY you burnout. How do you get your WHY? By asking for it.
   
   

   Why is Sticking to a Consistent Schedule a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You become part of the audience's routine. This is HUGE. You don't want to be a good podcast, you want to be someone's favorite (Jay Acunzo)
   2. You are seen as reliable. If you're podcasting for your business this is part of your brand.
   3. Keep in mind it's more important to be consistent in value than schedule. I'd rather have a "Late" show that was remarkable than an on time show that was "Meh."
   
   

   Why is Having a Consistent Brand a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. This is somewhat branding 101. When your brand is a trusted resource, people are drawn to it.
   2. Mountain Dew is a brand. It has raving fans. So when Pepsi has a new flavor, instead of creating a new brand, they use the Mountain Dew brand to introduce it.
   3. A logo can signify that something is official (like swag).
   4. For more information see the book The Visual Marketer: The Marketer's Crash Course for Creating Memorable and Effective Visuals
   
   

   Why is Having Your Best Episodes Featured On Your Website a Podcast Best Practice?

   1. You only get to make a first impression once. According to The Podcast Study, 41% of your audience will NOT give you a second chance. Your latest episode may not be your best. Lead with your best stuff based on your stats.
   
   

   Why Does Having Keywords In Your Podcast Title a Podcast Best Practice

   1. Your audience needs to find you before they consume your content. If they search for "baseball" and your show is called "The dugout" it may not be found.
   2. Check out Mangools, Ubersuggest, Keywords Everywhere, SERanking,  (there are TONS of these types of tools).
   
   

   Best Practices That Are Contested

   Launching Your Podcast With Three Episodes

   1. The thought is that people will consume all of your content. It give them a chance to make a deeper connection, and if they follow the show it boosts your chances of going up the charts. This is all true. What I've not been able to prove is how many people discover shows looking at the charts. This is often more for marketing material, "A Top 20 Podcast."
   
   

   Rating and Reviews Help You Get Found

   This is a fallacy that gets repeated almost hourly on podcasts every day. Here is the quote FROM APPLE:

   What the charts measure:

   Apple Podcasts Charts reflect the most popular shows and episodes available in a given market and are designed to help people discover what to listen to next. They do not reflect all-time listening records and are not a measure of the largest podcasts by listenership.

   While the exact algorithm cannot be shared to protect their integrity, the charts measure a mix of the following:

   • Listening: When listeners are engaging with episodes, it’s an indicator of content popularity.
   • Follows: When listeners follow a show to receive new episodes, it’s an indicator of their intent to listen.
   • Completion Rate: When listeners complete episodes, it’s an indicator of content quality.
   
   

   Ratings, reviews, and shares

   Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes.

   Source: https://podcasters.apple.com/support/3146-apple-podcasts-charts

   Using Audiograms To Promote Your Show on Social

   While this first worked when it was introduced (because it was new). I've heard no less than four social media experts explain that audiograms don't really help get people to your show. This is partly due to people just wanting to scroll more and more, and it should be seen more as a branding tool. It reminds people your show is here, and if they haven't checked out the latest episode they may go listen to it later. Many people don't stop the scroll. So this is a trickle.

   YouTube

   This is a test that is currently underway. There is no definitive "guaranteed success." While YouTube will tell you you MUST DO VIDEO (and of course they do), I've heard a few podcasters who have made the trip, started doing video, and quit. Only 28% of Podcasters are doing full video on Youtube based on data from the Podcast Host. Check out this post on "The truth about "video podcasts" on YouTube."

   Audio Outperforms Video 15 to 1

   When I worked at Libsyn Bill Maher launched Club Random. We had to twist Bill's arm (hard) to add audio. He only wanted to do video. When it launched Bill hired a PR agency that only promoted the video version. In the end the audio outperformed the video 15 to 1.

   In March of 2025, there were 65.3 Million creators on Youtube making content for 2.49 Trillion viewers.

   There were 358 thousand audio creators making content for 202 million listeners.

   Yes, the numbers are much bigger, but in the end for every creator there are 564 listeners / 38 viewers. When you divide 564/38 you get 15.

   But YouTube has the algorithm! I know. It knows what I like and it suggests things for me to watch. I have one of those too. His name is Doug (my brother).

   It pains me when a person comes to me to start a podcast and they won't start because they heard you HAVE to do video. "Everybody" is saying you need video is a company called YouTube (and of course they are).

   There are more opportunities to listen than watch. If you have the time to chase the algorithm, the budget, and desire to be on YouTube - be on YouTube. Just realize you don't HAVE to.

   Last point on YouTube Podcasts. I know HUNDREDS of podcasters and only one uses YouTube Music to listen to podcasts.

   The Celebrity Effect: Don't Follow In Their Footsteps

   I know celebrities start their show with large amounts of ads, and often have many more ads throughout their show. They often consist of nothing but what appears to be "podcasting chit-chat" so that means you can do the same thing, right?

   No, these people have already made their connection to their audience on another platform (you haven't). So people will sit through two minutes of ads (Conan, Mel Robbins) because they know and love these people. When you start people don't know you (yet) and so this would be a horrible way to start your show (in my opinion).

   What About Chit Chat?

   My favorite show that has a "Chit-chat" is the Podnews Weekly Review with Sam Sethi and James Cridland. Why? Because they do it at the end of their show with the "Super listeners" are still listening. The Podcast Survey shows how most people don't want any chit-chat, and it it's there it needs to be related and short (but they don't define what short is).

   Mentioned In This Episode

   School of Podcasting

   The Podcast Study

   The Truth About ‘Video Podcasts’ on YouTube

   Podnews Weekly Review

   Podchapters

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month

   How many episodes do you listen to in a week? And of those episodes how many different podcasts are there? I need your answer by October 24th. Don't forget to tell us a little about your show and your website address.

   Question of the Month

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>1835bcc5-0371-40b8-90f8-ade0d7fe54f5Mon, 06 Oct 2025 00:00:00 -040052:43falsefull10041004Why Your Attitude is More Important Than Your GearPodcasting is a wild ride, and who better to ride along with us than Cassian Bellino? She's got this killer attitude that turns failures into stepping stones. Seriously, if you think you need a perfect setup to start podcasting, think again! Cassian talks about how she built her Instagram following to over 113,000 by just being herself and sharing her journey. It's not about how many people listen or follow; it’s about the fact that you’re doing what you love. We dive into the nitty-gritty of social media strategies, like how she engages her audience and drives them from Instagram to her podcast. And let’s be real, if you’re not experimenting and embracing the cringe, are you even trying? So, whether you’re just starting out or looking to level up your podcast game, this episode is packed with gems that remind us it’s all about attitude, authenticity, and that sweet, sweet journey of learning.

   Takeaways:

   • Cass's secret weapon for success isn't her tools, but her killer attitude that keeps her going.
   • In podcasting, it's essential to embrace failure as a learning experience, not a setback.
   • Even if nobody listens, keep podcasting for yourself and the joy it brings you.
   • Automations and social media strategies can effectively funnel your audience back to your podcast.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • bibspeak.com
   • Instaclub - learn Instagram
   • Stampede Social
   • Manychat
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Podcasting is a wild ride, and who better to ride along with us than Cassian Bellino? She's got this killer attitude that turns failures into stepping stones. Seriously, if you think you need a perfect setup to start podcasting, think again! Cassian talks about how she built her Instagram following to over 113,000 by just being herself and sharing her journey. It's not about how many people listen or follow; it’s about the fact that you’re doing what you love. We dive into the nitty-gritty of social media strategies, like how she engages her audience and drives them from Instagram to her podcast. And let’s be real, if you’re not experimenting and embracing the cringe, are you even trying? So, whether you’re just starting out or looking to level up your podcast game, this episode is packed with gems that remind us it’s all about attitude, authenticity, and that sweet, sweet journey of learning.

   Takeaways:

   • Cass's secret weapon for success isn't her tools, but her killer attitude that keeps her going.
   • In podcasting, it's essential to embrace failure as a learning experience, not a setback.
   • Even if nobody listens, keep podcasting for yourself and the joy it brings you.
   • Automations and social media strategies can effectively funnel your audience back to your podcast.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • bibspeak.com
   • Instaclub - learn Instagram
   • Stampede Social
   • Manychat
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>0766a7da-244a-40b3-a49b-6e98021aa187Mon, 29 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040043:16falsefull10031003Don't Leave a Mess For Your Family - The Fate of Your Podcast After You DieThe past year we've lost some great people in the podcasting family. Neil Guilarte and Todd Cochrane both died suddenly with no warning. If you're not prepared, you leave your family in a lurch adding to the stress of your passing. I bring on The Podcast Lawyer Gordon Firemark to explain some of the ins and outs (Gordon doesn't do wills and such, but can explain the process). As law change based on location you may want to hire someone locally, or use an online tool that adjusts to your location.

   Takeaways:

   • If you don't have a will, your podcast may not end up where you want it to.
   • Dying without instructions for your podcast can lead to chaos for your family.
   • Setting up a will or a plan for your podcast is just plain smart business.
   • Don't wait until it's too late; get your podcast plans in order now.
   • Having a podcast prenup can save your loved ones from a lot of headaches later.
   • Make sure your family knows how to access your podcast info if you suddenly vanish.
   
   

   Mentioned in this Episode

   • School of Podcasting
   • Gordon Firemark
   • Gordon's YouTube Channel
   • 1password
   • Bitwarden
   • Article by James Cridland from Podnews
   • Law Depot
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>The past year we've lost some great people in the podcasting family. Neil Guilarte and Todd Cochrane both died suddenly with no warning. If you're not prepared, you leave your family in a lurch adding to the stress of your passing. I bring on The Podcast Lawyer Gordon Firemark to explain some of the ins and outs (Gordon doesn't do wills and such, but can explain the process). As law change based on location you may want to hire someone locally, or use an online tool that adjusts to your location.

   Takeaways:

   • If you don't have a will, your podcast may not end up where you want it to.
   • Dying without instructions for your podcast can lead to chaos for your family.
   • Setting up a will or a plan for your podcast is just plain smart business.
   • Don't wait until it's too late; get your podcast plans in order now.
   • Having a podcast prenup can save your loved ones from a lot of headaches later.
   • Make sure your family knows how to access your podcast info if you suddenly vanish.
   
   

   Mentioned in this Episode

   • School of Podcasting
   • Gordon Firemark
   • Gordon's YouTube Channel
   • 1password
   • Bitwarden
   • Article by James Cridland from Podnews
   • Law Depot
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>c4c1e2cc-5ece-4f07-ac9c-204cf539734aMon, 22 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040027:39falsefull10021002How Direct Conversations Boost Podcast PopularityGrowing a podcast isn’t just about hitting record and hoping for the best. If you’ve been tuning in, you know we’re all about making remarkable content that actually resonates with listeners. Last week, we dug deep into what successful shows are doing differently, and trust me, it’s not rocket science. It’s about conversation, not just broadcasting.

   Today, I’m sharing free tools and insights to help connect with your audience better and some juicy news from Spotify that might just change the way you think about your podcast. Spoiler alert: it’s not all sunshine and rainbows.

   I looked at some of the big names in the biz and guess what? Most of them have one thing in common — they interact with their listeners. They don’t just talk at you; they want to talk with you. We’re talking newsletters, voicemails, and even knowing the eye color of your audience. Because if you can relate to your listeners on that level, you’re doing something right. I even had a hilarious blunder with my email list that turned into a goldmine of feedback — the kind of feedback that makes or breaks your show. So, if you’re still wondering why your podcast isn’t growing, it might be time to roll up those sleeves and get face-to-face with your audience, even if it’s over Zoom.

   The best way to find out what your audience wants is to ask them. I’m inviting you into my podcast kitchen to help shape future episodes. Because at the end of the day, your podcast should feel like a recipe that everyone can enjoy together. Join me for a live chat on October 16th where we’ll dive into what you want to hear, and let’s make this show the best it can be. Remember, if you want to grow, you have to listen first. Now, go out there and start those conversations!

   Tools To Get In Touch With Your Audience

   You could do this via zoom for $18/month (and cancel after the first month), if you need a free email tool look at systeme (aff), which does email, communities, digital and physical goods, courses and more. You can use lu.ma to have people register (it's free if you don't charge). Lu.ma then reminds people, and makes it easy for them to add the meeting to their calendar. If you are looking for an affordable calendar tool, check out Tidycal. Unlike Calendly (that charges you a monthly fee) Tidycal is a low one time payment for a lifetime deal. I've used it for years.

   Affordable Lifetime Music Deal

   I've been using Audio Blocks for my background music, and I was aware of TuneReel (as you can buy a single song for around $15. They have a lifetime deal around $300 and this includes a license for your Podcast! They have THOUSANDS of songs to choose from and there are no "Cheap Casio Keyboard" sounding drums, etc. Check it out! (aff)

   Takeaways:

   • In episode 1000, we chatted about making remarkable content to grow your podcast, like, duh!
   • Big shows aren't just blabbing at their audience—they're having a whole conversation with them.
   • I found out almost all successful podcasts have a newsletter (or some other way to DIRECTLY communicate with their audience), so maybe get on that bandwagon.
   • If you can name your audience's eye color, you're definitely connecting. That's the goal.
   • The best feedback comes from real people, so meet them face to face if you can, it's a game changer.
   • I made a huge email blunder once, and it turned out to be the best mistake ever, trust me!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podpage.com
   • Episode 1000 on Making Remarkable Content
   • podcastmovement.com
   • buzzsprout.com
   • convertkit.com
   • mailerlite.com
   • systeme
   • podfest.com
   • Zoom Meeting Software
   • EoFire Show
   • Podcast Hot Seat (Podcast Audits)
   • How to Grow Your Podcast
   • TuneReel Music for Podcasts
   • Podnews Weekly Review (one of my Favs!)
   • Podcasting 2.0
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting...]]>Growing a podcast isn’t just about hitting record and hoping for the best. If you’ve been tuning in, you know we’re all about making remarkable content that actually resonates with listeners. Last week, we dug deep into what successful shows are doing differently, and trust me, it’s not rocket science. It’s about conversation, not just broadcasting.

   Today, I’m sharing free tools and insights to help connect with your audience better and some juicy news from Spotify that might just change the way you think about your podcast. Spoiler alert: it’s not all sunshine and rainbows.

   I looked at some of the big names in the biz and guess what? Most of them have one thing in common — they interact with their listeners. They don’t just talk at you; they want to talk with you. We’re talking newsletters, voicemails, and even knowing the eye color of your audience. Because if you can relate to your listeners on that level, you’re doing something right. I even had a hilarious blunder with my email list that turned into a goldmine of feedback — the kind of feedback that makes or breaks your show. So, if you’re still wondering why your podcast isn’t growing, it might be time to roll up those sleeves and get face-to-face with your audience, even if it’s over Zoom.

   The best way to find out what your audience wants is to ask them. I’m inviting you into my podcast kitchen to help shape future episodes. Because at the end of the day, your podcast should feel like a recipe that everyone can enjoy together. Join me for a live chat on October 16th where we’ll dive into what you want to hear, and let’s make this show the best it can be. Remember, if you want to grow, you have to listen first. Now, go out there and start those conversations!

   Tools To Get In Touch With Your Audience

   You could do this via zoom for $18/month (and cancel after the first month), if you need a free email tool look at systeme (aff), which does email, communities, digital and physical goods, courses and more. You can use lu.ma to have people register (it's free if you don't charge). Lu.ma then reminds people, and makes it easy for them to add the meeting to their calendar. If you are looking for an affordable calendar tool, check out Tidycal. Unlike Calendly (that charges you a monthly fee) Tidycal is a low one time payment for a lifetime deal. I've used it for years.

   Affordable Lifetime Music Deal

   I've been using Audio Blocks for my background music, and I was aware of TuneReel (as you can buy a single song for around $15. They have a lifetime deal around $300 and this includes a license for your Podcast! They have THOUSANDS of songs to choose from and there are no "Cheap Casio Keyboard" sounding drums, etc. Check it out! (aff)

   Takeaways:

   • In episode 1000, we chatted about making remarkable content to grow your podcast, like, duh!
   • Big shows aren't just blabbing at their audience—they're having a whole conversation with them.
   • I found out almost all successful podcasts have a newsletter (or some other way to DIRECTLY communicate with their audience), so maybe get on that bandwagon.
   • If you can name your audience's eye color, you're definitely connecting. That's the goal.
   • The best feedback comes from real people, so meet them face to face if you can, it's a game changer.
   • I made a huge email blunder once, and it turned out to be the best mistake ever, trust me!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podpage.com
   • Episode 1000 on Making Remarkable Content
   • podcastmovement.com
   • buzzsprout.com
   • convertkit.com
   • mailerlite.com
   • systeme
   • podfest.com
   • Zoom Meeting Software
   • EoFire Show
   • Podcast Hot Seat (Podcast Audits)
   • How to Grow Your Podcast
   • TuneReel Music for Podcasts
   • Podnews Weekly Review (one of my Favs!)
   • Podcasting 2.0
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Unlock Exclusive Insights: Subscribe to 'Podcasting Observations' Newsletter!

   Get a look into the world of podcasting like never before with "Podcasting Observations," your go-to source for trends, tips, and transformative insights tailored just for podcasters. You also get "behind the scenes" info from the School of Podcasting Don't miss out on staying ahead of the game—join the 1700+ people who are already reading Podcasting Observations today!

   Podcasting Observations

   Starting a podcast can be daunting. Fear of failure, uncertainty about where to begin, and doubts about your abilities can hold you back. But what if you had a guide? The School of Podcasting is here to help you confidently launch, grow, and monetize your podcast. With over 20 years of experience and tons of successful podcasts launched, I'll walk you through every step. From planning to promotion, you're never alone." Learn at your own pace with video courses, join a supportive community, and get unlimited coaching. Say goodbye to fear and hello to success." Start your podcasting journey today with the School of Podcasting. Join now and take the first step towards turning your passion into a reality. Visit SchoolOfPodcasting.com to get started. No fear, just success.

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>5d85f488-56e9-4e22-9456-5c17989127c8Mon, 15 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040031:45falsefull10011001Raising a Glass to Todd Cochran: Podcasting PioneerI am still in shock about the loss of Todd Cochrane.

   I just saw him a few weeks ago 30 lbs lighter and looking great. I've known Todd for 20+ years. The man who wrote the very first book on podcasting. In looking for pictures, I only have this one in a group. Why? Because you always think a person will be there to do it next time.

   Todd was a character. Unique. There will never be another one. At every event I would end up at a table with Todd, "The Robs" (Greenlee and Walch) and other OGs. Always great to catch up and share insights with the goal of making sure the podcast space was doing OK.

   I will remember Todd as the courageous advocate of the independent podcaster. At one point he would get deals by grouping shows together. This was a HUGE nightmare of paperwork, but he wanted to see the "indies" make some money. I was one of those indies, and it was one of the first times I made money with a podcast. That wouldn't have happened without Todd.

   On a recent show he talked about he wouldn't do a deal where the podcaster made less than 70%. Other companies are taking deals of 50%. Not Todd. The podcaster must be paid.

   I loved that he had a wider view of the podcast space as the CEO of Blubrry and was always sharing what he saw. My favorite phrase to hear Todd say was, "I probably shouldn't say this but..." because you knew what was coming was a doozy. When you hear the stat, "Most podcasters don't make it past episode seven" that was first delivered by Todd Cochran. He was always open to share so if there was a problem so we could all solve it together.

   Todd was the man behind the People's Choice Podcast Awards. When some shows didn't win, he received death threats. Did it stop him from holding the awards next year? No. Todd earned next to nothing for doing those awards, but did it for the indies (noticing a pattern yet?). Lots of work for next to no pay as long as the indie would benefit.

   One of my favorite memories of Todd was way back at the New Media Expo. There was an off site party at a bar. I was running the podcast track, and got there late. The bar was at the top of a slope, so I was walking up this slight hill as Todd exited the bar. I believe the ol' sailor had consumed some spirits.

   Todd had not made it down the two or three steps to the parking lot, so there I was gazing up at Todd who looked 10 feet tall. They had been talking about bigger companies getting into podcasting. Before I could even say hello, Todd raised his fist in the air and shouted, "There is a fox in hen house boys! VIVA LA REVOLUTION!"

   So there he was, larger than life, fist in the air, up against the dark Vegas sky fighting for the indies.

   There will never be another Todd Cochrane.

   RIP My Friend.

   Todd's Presentation from the New Media Expo 2015 - Reflections on 10 Years of Podcasting

   • Todd Cochrane shared insights from 10 years of podcasting, covering 1024 episodes
   • Spent 7,291 hours (303 days) creating content
   • Emphasized the importance of audience relationship and engagement
   
   

   Key Topics:

   Audience Relationship

   • Concept of "Ohana" (family) - treating listeners like close family
   • Building trust and personal connection with audience
   • Sharing personal stories and being authentic
   
   

   Podcasting Journey

   • Started in 2004 after a military injury
   • Grew from zero to 45,000 listeners within 60 days
   • Developed relationships with sponsors (e.g., GoDaddy for 10 years)
   
   

   Monetization

   • Showed actual earnings from podcasting
   • Discussed sponsorship models (CPM, flat rate, CPA)
   • Emphasized creating value for sponsors
   
   

   Podcasting Challenges

   • Need for accurate download statistics
   • Importance of content quality
   • Risks of inflating listener numbers
   
   

   Future of Podcasting

   • Need for more quality content
   • Importance of storytelling
   • Expanding beyond iOS platforms
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • geeknewscentral.com
   • newmediashow.com
   • blubrry.com
   • ceoawo.com
   • tweetnews.com
   
   ]]>I am still in shock about the loss of Todd Cochrane.

   I just saw him a few weeks ago 30 lbs lighter and looking great. I've known Todd for 20+ years. The man who wrote the very first book on podcasting. In looking for pictures, I only have this one in a group. Why? Because you always think a person will be there to do it next time.

   Todd was a character. Unique. There will never be another one. At every event I would end up at a table with Todd, "The Robs" (Greenlee and Walch) and other OGs. Always great to catch up and share insights with the goal of making sure the podcast space was doing OK.

   I will remember Todd as the courageous advocate of the independent podcaster. At one point he would get deals by grouping shows together. This was a HUGE nightmare of paperwork, but he wanted to see the "indies" make some money. I was one of those indies, and it was one of the first times I made money with a podcast. That wouldn't have happened without Todd.

   On a recent show he talked about he wouldn't do a deal where the podcaster made less than 70%. Other companies are taking deals of 50%. Not Todd. The podcaster must be paid.

   I loved that he had a wider view of the podcast space as the CEO of Blubrry and was always sharing what he saw. My favorite phrase to hear Todd say was, "I probably shouldn't say this but..." because you knew what was coming was a doozy. When you hear the stat, "Most podcasters don't make it past episode seven" that was first delivered by Todd Cochran. He was always open to share so if there was a problem so we could all solve it together.

   Todd was the man behind the People's Choice Podcast Awards. When some shows didn't win, he received death threats. Did it stop him from holding the awards next year? No. Todd earned next to nothing for doing those awards, but did it for the indies (noticing a pattern yet?). Lots of work for next to no pay as long as the indie would benefit.

   One of my favorite memories of Todd was way back at the New Media Expo. There was an off site party at a bar. I was running the podcast track, and got there late. The bar was at the top of a slope, so I was walking up this slight hill as Todd exited the bar. I believe the ol' sailor had consumed some spirits.

   Todd had not made it down the two or three steps to the parking lot, so there I was gazing up at Todd who looked 10 feet tall. They had been talking about bigger companies getting into podcasting. Before I could even say hello, Todd raised his fist in the air and shouted, "There is a fox in hen house boys! VIVA LA REVOLUTION!"

   So there he was, larger than life, fist in the air, up against the dark Vegas sky fighting for the indies.

   There will never be another Todd Cochrane.

   RIP My Friend.

   Todd's Presentation from the New Media Expo 2015 - Reflections on 10 Years of Podcasting

   • Todd Cochrane shared insights from 10 years of podcasting, covering 1024 episodes
   • Spent 7,291 hours (303 days) creating content
   • Emphasized the importance of audience relationship and engagement
   
   

   Key Topics:

   Audience Relationship

   • Concept of "Ohana" (family) - treating listeners like close family
   • Building trust and personal connection with audience
   • Sharing personal stories and being authentic
   
   

   Podcasting Journey

   • Started in 2004 after a military injury
   • Grew from zero to 45,000 listeners within 60 days
   • Developed relationships with sponsors (e.g., GoDaddy for 10 years)
   
   

   Monetization

   • Showed actual earnings from podcasting
   • Discussed sponsorship models (CPM, flat rate, CPA)
   • Emphasized creating value for sponsors
   
   

   Podcasting Challenges

   • Need for accurate download statistics
   • Importance of content quality
   • Risks of inflating listener numbers
   
   

   Future of Podcasting

   • Need for more quality content
   • Importance of storytelling
   • Expanding beyond iOS platforms
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • geeknewscentral.com
   • newmediashow.com
   • blubrry.com
   • ceoawo.com
   • tweetnews.com
   
   ]]>49fdd405-1cf6-4f7e-aa55-30a280624c0dTue, 09 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040001:17:41falsebonusHow Do I Grow My Podcast Audience?Over the 20 years there are certain questions that get asked over and over, and today I share my thoughts on How Do I Grow My Podcast Audience? The part that will get me in hot water, is I'm pointing my finger at your content (and delivery).

   Get the Remarkable Episode Checklist

   Who and Why

   When it comes to growing your podcast, there are two things that drive the content and the first one is who is your audience. It can’t be “everybody” and it can’t be “men 25 to 50” as there is a big difference between those two men. There is one situation that I’ll talk about in a minute that is an exception.

   The Three R’s

   Relative Content: Shows the audience, ““I understand where you are, and here’s something useful for you today.”

   Remarkable Content: Create episodes worth talking about or sharing.  A good podcast reliably informs or entertains with quality, while a remarkable podcast emotionally connects, inspires, and leaves a lasting impression through exceptional storytelling, unique content, or innovative presentation

   When you have relative, remarkable content it resonates with your audience (and they tell a friend).

   Examine Your Show

   podcastsconnect.apple.com and creators.spotify.com allow you to check your completion rate.

   Community, Community, Community

   You can use tools like Heartbeat, Systeme, and Circle (Systeme has a free version) to build a community.

   How many checks does your episode check on the Remarkable Content Checklist?

   Create a survey for your audience (to find out what they want, and how you're doing delivering value). Podpage has a built in survey based on the book The Audience is Listening by Tom Webster ( a must read).

   More Ways to Grow Than Downloads

   Your podcast leads to relationship which lead to opportunity.

   Your network grows.

   You can become THE person in your niche - if you don't quit.

   Feel Like Giving Value Back?

   Say thanks by giving back (it makes you feel wonderful)

   Mentioned In This Episode

   • Growthinreverse.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • Podcast Hot Seat
   • castahead.net
   • How Jack Rhysider’s Darknet Diaries Podcast Gets 300,000 Downloads Per Episode
   • The Audience is Listening Book
   • Mastering Social Media for Podcast Growth with Expert Katie Brinkley
   • Beyond Powerful Radio - Valerie Geller
   • The Podcast Study PDF
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • Knowing your audience is crucial; you can't just aim for everyone and expect results.
   • Establishing your 'why' helps keep your podcast on track and prevents quitting.
   • Content must solve problems or entertain; otherwise, you're just boring your listeners.
   • A website is essential; without one, you're shouting into the void, hoping to be heard.
   • Good gets you in the game, Remarkable is what makes it grow
   
   ]]>Over the 20 years there are certain questions that get asked over and over, and today I share my thoughts on How Do I Grow My Podcast Audience? The part that will get me in hot water, is I'm pointing my finger at your content (and delivery).

   Get the Remarkable Episode Checklist

   Who and Why

   When it comes to growing your podcast, there are two things that drive the content and the first one is who is your audience. It can’t be “everybody” and it can’t be “men 25 to 50” as there is a big difference between those two men. There is one situation that I’ll talk about in a minute that is an exception.

   The Three R’s

   Relative Content: Shows the audience, ““I understand where you are, and here’s something useful for you today.”

   Remarkable Content: Create episodes worth talking about or sharing.  A good podcast reliably informs or entertains with quality, while a remarkable podcast emotionally connects, inspires, and leaves a lasting impression through exceptional storytelling, unique content, or innovative presentation

   When you have relative, remarkable content it resonates with your audience (and they tell a friend).

   Examine Your Show

   podcastsconnect.apple.com and creators.spotify.com allow you to check your completion rate.

   Community, Community, Community

   You can use tools like Heartbeat, Systeme, and Circle (Systeme has a free version) to build a community.

   How many checks does your episode check on the Remarkable Content Checklist?

   Create a survey for your audience (to find out what they want, and how you're doing delivering value). Podpage has a built in survey based on the book The Audience is Listening by Tom Webster ( a must read).

   More Ways to Grow Than Downloads

   Your podcast leads to relationship which lead to opportunity.

   Your network grows.

   You can become THE person in your niche - if you don't quit.

   Feel Like Giving Value Back?

   Say thanks by giving back (it makes you feel wonderful)

   Mentioned In This Episode

   • Growthinreverse.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • Podcast Hot Seat
   • castahead.net
   • How Jack Rhysider’s Darknet Diaries Podcast Gets 300,000 Downloads Per Episode
   • The Audience is Listening Book
   • Mastering Social Media for Podcast Growth with Expert Katie Brinkley
   • Beyond Powerful Radio - Valerie Geller
   • The Podcast Study PDF
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • Knowing your audience is crucial; you can't just aim for everyone and expect results.
   • Establishing your 'why' helps keep your podcast on track and prevents quitting.
   • Content must solve problems or entertain; otherwise, you're just boring your listeners.
   • A website is essential; without one, you're shouting into the void, hoping to be heard.
   • Good gets you in the game, Remarkable is what makes it grow
   
   ]]>7d36bc61-38de-40e5-ade0-007ffbd4e237Mon, 08 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040001:03:43falsefull10001000Hiring Help for Your Podcast: Worth It or Just Burning Cash?Outsourcing for your podcast is a bit like dating—you have to kiss a lot of frogs before you find your prince (or princess). This episode gets into the nitty-gritty of hiring help for your podcast, featuring stories from our listeners who’ve been there, done that, and got the t-shirt (or the horror story).

   Kim Newlove shares her success with hiring a coach and how that investment paid off in spades. On the flip side, York's experience is a cautionary tale about the perils of hiring without doing proper research. It’s a mixed bag of outcomes, and we’re here for all of it. We also explore the broader theme of investing in your podcast and the balance between saving money and getting quality help. After all, sometimes you gotta spend a little to save a lot—like time, sanity, and the integrity of your podcast. Tune in for laughs, lessons learned, and a whole lot of real talk on the do’s and don’ts of podcast hiring.

   Need Help Finding an Editor?

   If you need help finding an editor use THIS LINK which will go to Steve Stewart who co-runs the Podcast Editor Academy and he will send your information to people in that group.

   Takeaways:

   • Hiring help for your podcast can feel like tossing cash into a bonfire, trust me on that.
   • Not every graphic designer is a wizard; sometimes they just wave a magic wand and call it a day.
   • If you think a cheap website designer will give you a Gucci site, you’re dreaming, my friend.
   • Outsourcing editing can be a lifesaver, especially if your vacation plans involve avoiding the editing cave.
   • Remember, folks, you either pay in time or in money, so choose wisely, even if it hurts.
   • Always check the credentials of the person you hire for your podcast; a fancy title doesn’t mean they won’t mess everything up.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcastbranding.co
   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • askralph.com
   • mediavoiceovers.com
   • sounddogs.com
   • tunereel.com
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasthotseat.com
   • empoweredpodcasting.com
   • marriedandloveit.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Outsourcing for your podcast is a bit like dating—you have to kiss a lot of frogs before you find your prince (or princess). This episode gets into the nitty-gritty of hiring help for your podcast, featuring stories from our listeners who’ve been there, done that, and got the t-shirt (or the horror story).

   Kim Newlove shares her success with hiring a coach and how that investment paid off in spades. On the flip side, York's experience is a cautionary tale about the perils of hiring without doing proper research. It’s a mixed bag of outcomes, and we’re here for all of it. We also explore the broader theme of investing in your podcast and the balance between saving money and getting quality help. After all, sometimes you gotta spend a little to save a lot—like time, sanity, and the integrity of your podcast. Tune in for laughs, lessons learned, and a whole lot of real talk on the do’s and don’ts of podcast hiring.

   Need Help Finding an Editor?

   If you need help finding an editor use THIS LINK which will go to Steve Stewart who co-runs the Podcast Editor Academy and he will send your information to people in that group.

   Takeaways:

   • Hiring help for your podcast can feel like tossing cash into a bonfire, trust me on that.
   • Not every graphic designer is a wizard; sometimes they just wave a magic wand and call it a day.
   • If you think a cheap website designer will give you a Gucci site, you’re dreaming, my friend.
   • Outsourcing editing can be a lifesaver, especially if your vacation plans involve avoiding the editing cave.
   • Remember, folks, you either pay in time or in money, so choose wisely, even if it hurts.
   • Always check the credentials of the person you hire for your podcast; a fancy title doesn’t mean they won’t mess everything up.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcastbranding.co
   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • askralph.com
   • mediavoiceovers.com
   • sounddogs.com
   • tunereel.com
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasthotseat.com
   • empoweredpodcasting.com
   • marriedandloveit.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>f1652d35-a7b7-44f7-8ae1-50ba173ec8cfMon, 01 Sep 2025 00:00:00 -040040:28falsefull999999Stop Wasting Your Listeners' Time - and other lessons from Podcast MovementComing back from Podcast Movement, I've got a story that really drives home the point that nothing beats face-to-face networking. I mean, sure, we can all hop on Zoom and pretend we're connecting, but when you're actually sharing a meal with someone or just hanging out, that's where the magic happens. It's like the difference between texting your buddy and grabbing a beer – one is okay, but the other is where real connections are made. And let's be honest, who doesn't want to make meaningful connections while stuffing their face with overpriced convention center food?

   Takeaways:

   • Networking in person is way better than any online stuff, seriously, just trust me.
   • Most podcasters are totally wasting their listeners' time with a simple fix in editing.
   • Chapters are a cool tool to help listeners skip to what they actually want to hear.
   • If you want your podcast to grow, you might need to jump into the Podcast Hot Seat.
   • Cutting out unnecessary parts of interviews can save time and keep listeners happy, who knew?
   • Feeling overwhelmed when starting a podcast is totally normal, like, welcome to the club.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasthotseat.com
   • tuulie.com
   • Social Media News Live with Jeff Sieh
   • Walt Disney World Radio with Lou Mongello
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Coming back from Podcast Movement, I've got a story that really drives home the point that nothing beats face-to-face networking. I mean, sure, we can all hop on Zoom and pretend we're connecting, but when you're actually sharing a meal with someone or just hanging out, that's where the magic happens. It's like the difference between texting your buddy and grabbing a beer – one is okay, but the other is where real connections are made. And let's be honest, who doesn't want to make meaningful connections while stuffing their face with overpriced convention center food?

   Takeaways:

   • Networking in person is way better than any online stuff, seriously, just trust me.
   • Most podcasters are totally wasting their listeners' time with a simple fix in editing.
   • Chapters are a cool tool to help listeners skip to what they actually want to hear.
   • If you want your podcast to grow, you might need to jump into the Podcast Hot Seat.
   • Cutting out unnecessary parts of interviews can save time and keep listeners happy, who knew?
   • Feeling overwhelmed when starting a podcast is totally normal, like, welcome to the club.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasthotseat.com
   • tuulie.com
   • Social Media News Live with Jeff Sieh
   • Walt Disney World Radio with Lou Mongello
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>684af402-7bff-450d-8308-1d7e0b272253Mon, 25 Aug 2025 00:00:00 -040029:03falsefull998998Dead Air, Depression, and Dispatch Dave: Inside Sirius Satellite RadioI've known Dave Hooper (host of Build a Big Podcast and Author of Big Podcast) since he put on the radio for the first time on Music Business Radio. When I heard that Dave had scored a job at Sirius I wanted the inside scoop on what it's like to work there, and what the heck is a "Producer."

   Dave explains that he got the job while being in "a funk" and he used that situation to introduce more "real" topics to channel 146 at 7 AM and Road Dog Trucking.

   I also share one sentence that jumped out at me from the Taylor Swift appearance on the new heights show.

   Takeaways:

   • Ever wondered what it’s like at Sirius Satellite Radio? Well, buckle up, buddy, because David Hooper is here to spill the tea on some wild stories, including a hilarious instance of dead air that’ll make you cringe. Seriously, it’s gold.
   • So, David’s job is basically a mix of five different roles. I mean, booking guests, prepping shows, running the board, cutting promos—what's next, making coffee? It’s a circus behind the scenes, folks!
   • We all know live radio can be a hot mess, right? David shares how he’s had to dust off some old skills and navigate the chaos of live broadcasting. Spoiler: mistakes happen, and dead air is just part of the fun!
   • Turns out, podcasting and satellite radio aren’t that different after all. Both have their own unique challenges, but the real magic lies in connecting with the audience and building that sweet community vibe.
   • David’s new gig at Sirius has taught him some serious life skills, like staying calm and collected under pressure. Who knew being a radio producer would be like a masterclass in Zen?
   • At the end of the day, it's all about community and connection. David’s show is like a virtual truck stop, bringing people together to chat about everything from addiction to marriage on the road. Seriously, where else can you get that kind of therapy?
   
   

   Links Mentioned

   Build a Big Podcast

   Big Podcast Book

   Channel 146

   School of Podcasting

   Power of Podcasting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Help When You Don't Know Where To Start

   I get it. I talk to people looking to launch or grow their podcast. "“There’s too much gear/software — I don’t know what I need.” Microphones, mixers, hosting platforms, editing software — it’s easy to get lost. Analysis paralysis kicks in fast. I help podcasters. I've been doing it 20 years. Let me help. Dave Jackson schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>I've known Dave Hooper (host of Build a Big Podcast and Author of Big Podcast) since he put on the radio for the first time on Music Business Radio. When I heard that Dave had scored a job at Sirius I wanted the inside scoop on what it's like to work there, and what the heck is a "Producer."

   Dave explains that he got the job while being in "a funk" and he used that situation to introduce more "real" topics to channel 146 at 7 AM and Road Dog Trucking.

   I also share one sentence that jumped out at me from the Taylor Swift appearance on the new heights show.

   Takeaways:

   • Ever wondered what it’s like at Sirius Satellite Radio? Well, buckle up, buddy, because David Hooper is here to spill the tea on some wild stories, including a hilarious instance of dead air that’ll make you cringe. Seriously, it’s gold.
   • So, David’s job is basically a mix of five different roles. I mean, booking guests, prepping shows, running the board, cutting promos—what's next, making coffee? It’s a circus behind the scenes, folks!
   • We all know live radio can be a hot mess, right? David shares how he’s had to dust off some old skills and navigate the chaos of live broadcasting. Spoiler: mistakes happen, and dead air is just part of the fun!
   • Turns out, podcasting and satellite radio aren’t that different after all. Both have their own unique challenges, but the real magic lies in connecting with the audience and building that sweet community vibe.
   • David’s new gig at Sirius has taught him some serious life skills, like staying calm and collected under pressure. Who knew being a radio producer would be like a masterclass in Zen?
   • At the end of the day, it's all about community and connection. David’s show is like a virtual truck stop, bringing people together to chat about everything from addiction to marriage on the road. Seriously, where else can you get that kind of therapy?
   
   

   Links Mentioned

   Build a Big Podcast

   Big Podcast Book

   Channel 146

   School of Podcasting

   Power of Podcasting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Help When You Don't Know Where To Start

   I get it. I talk to people looking to launch or grow their podcast. "“There’s too much gear/software — I don’t know what I need.” Microphones, mixers, hosting platforms, editing software — it’s easy to get lost. Analysis paralysis kicks in fast. I help podcasters. I've been doing it 20 years. Let me help. Dave Jackson schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>f1243445-a4f0-4961-b8c7-c0ee3d2ea231Mon, 18 Aug 2025 00:00:00 -040037:30falsefull997997Why Your Media Kit is Probably Trash: Lessons from Justin MooreJustin Moore is here to tell us how to snag sponsors like a pro. We chat about his book, Sponsor Magnet. Seriously, if you’re trying to get sponsors for your podcast, this is the book you need—like, yesterday.

   He dives into the absurdities of podcast monetization and how it’s not just about your download numbers but about your influence. Justin shares some gold nuggets on pitching strategies and why sending out a basic media kit is basically waving a white flag in the sponsorship battle. So, grab a snack, sit back, and let’s unravel the crazy world of podcast sponsorships together!

   This show is brought to you buy the School of Podcasting

   Takeaways:

   • In the world of podcasting, having a solid media kit is apparently as useful as a chocolate teapot, so maybe just don’t bother with it.
   • Justin Moore's book 'Sponsor Magnet' is the secret sauce for podcasters looking to snag sponsors without losing their minds.
   • Podcasters are taught to monetize their audience, not just their podcast, which is a revelation that could make us all rich - or at least less broke.
   • When pitching to sponsors, forget the cookie-cutter approach; make your pitch relevant to their current campaigns and watch the magic happen!
   • Video content has a distinct edge over audio when it comes to attracting sponsorships, because brands love to reuse content like it’s a favorite pair of jeans.
   • If you get feedback from your audience about a sponsored product, don’t just sweep it under the rug; share it with the brand to improve future campaigns.
   • Learn the A.R.C.H. and R.O.P.E. strategies to get more money coming your way.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • sponsormagnet.com
   • creatorwizard.com
   • Sponsor Games
   • Justin's Newsletter with Sponsors looking to partner
   • Sponsor Magnet - the Podcast
   • Justin's YouTube Channel
   • Sponsor Magnet Audio Book
   • Sponsor Magnet on Amazon
   
   

   This is episode 996 of the School of Podcasting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Justin Moore is here to tell us how to snag sponsors like a pro. We chat about his book, Sponsor Magnet. Seriously, if you’re trying to get sponsors for your podcast, this is the book you need—like, yesterday.

   He dives into the absurdities of podcast monetization and how it’s not just about your download numbers but about your influence. Justin shares some gold nuggets on pitching strategies and why sending out a basic media kit is basically waving a white flag in the sponsorship battle. So, grab a snack, sit back, and let’s unravel the crazy world of podcast sponsorships together!

   This show is brought to you buy the School of Podcasting

   Takeaways:

   • In the world of podcasting, having a solid media kit is apparently as useful as a chocolate teapot, so maybe just don’t bother with it.
   • Justin Moore's book 'Sponsor Magnet' is the secret sauce for podcasters looking to snag sponsors without losing their minds.
   • Podcasters are taught to monetize their audience, not just their podcast, which is a revelation that could make us all rich - or at least less broke.
   • When pitching to sponsors, forget the cookie-cutter approach; make your pitch relevant to their current campaigns and watch the magic happen!
   • Video content has a distinct edge over audio when it comes to attracting sponsorships, because brands love to reuse content like it’s a favorite pair of jeans.
   • If you get feedback from your audience about a sponsored product, don’t just sweep it under the rug; share it with the brand to improve future campaigns.
   • Learn the A.R.C.H. and R.O.P.E. strategies to get more money coming your way.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • sponsormagnet.com
   • creatorwizard.com
   • Sponsor Games
   • Justin's Newsletter with Sponsors looking to partner
   • Sponsor Magnet - the Podcast
   • Justin's YouTube Channel
   • Sponsor Magnet Audio Book
   • Sponsor Magnet on Amazon
   
   

   This is episode 996 of the School of Podcasting

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>5fd24832-b1a1-4015-a4f6-c0303a739493Mon, 11 Aug 2025 00:00:00 -040043:27falsefull996996No More 'Um's: Your Guide to Speaking Like a Pro!Filler words. We all know them, we all use them, and let’s be real, they’re annoying. You might think it’s just you fumbling through a sentence with a bunch of ‘uhs’ and ‘ums’, but guess what? We’re all in the same boat, paddling away from clarity and straight into the sea of confusion.

   In this episode, I dig into the strategies to kick those pesky crutch words to the curb. We chat about how you can sound smarter (yes, you heard that right) by practicing your communication skills and being more aware of what’s coming out of your mouth. With tips ranging from joining a Toastmasters club to simply taking a pause instead of filling the space with ‘you knows,’ we’re here to help you become the smooth-talking superstar you were meant to be. So let’s ditch the filler words together and find out how to express ourselves without sounding like we’re stuck in a loop of hesitation!

   What Stays and What Goes?

   For me, any time I can make myself or a guest sound smarter I will do it. For me, I go for the low hanging fruit. This is when um someone just has um a standalone um all by itself. You can easily highlight it and press delete. The ums I leave alone are those that run into another word.

   Tool like Descript and Riverside have built in tools to remover filler words. Be careful with these as they can be a bit aggressive. A good edit is one that doesn't sound like an edit was made. This is why I don't obsess over every single filler words because we all occasionally say "um." It becomes an issue when people lose sight of what you're saying because they are distracted by how you are saying it.

   Takeaways:

   • Filler words are the annoying little gremlins of speech we all battle with, and they're everywhere.
   • Practicing with Toastmasters is like getting a gym membership for your speaking skills, minus the sweat.
   • Confidence is key; the more prepared you are, the less you sound like a crutch-word factory.
   • Taking pauses instead of using filler words is like giving your brain time to catch up with your mouth, which is crucial.
   • Editing your recordings helps you become painfully aware of those pesky fillers, so you can kick them to the curb.
   • Using outlines and scripts can save you from sounding like you're making it up as you go, and trust me, that's a lifesaver!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasteditoracademy.com
   • thepharmacistvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • askralph.com
   • Descript
   • Riverside
   • Toastmasters
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Filler words. We all know them, we all use them, and let’s be real, they’re annoying. You might think it’s just you fumbling through a sentence with a bunch of ‘uhs’ and ‘ums’, but guess what? We’re all in the same boat, paddling away from clarity and straight into the sea of confusion.

   In this episode, I dig into the strategies to kick those pesky crutch words to the curb. We chat about how you can sound smarter (yes, you heard that right) by practicing your communication skills and being more aware of what’s coming out of your mouth. With tips ranging from joining a Toastmasters club to simply taking a pause instead of filling the space with ‘you knows,’ we’re here to help you become the smooth-talking superstar you were meant to be. So let’s ditch the filler words together and find out how to express ourselves without sounding like we’re stuck in a loop of hesitation!

   What Stays and What Goes?

   For me, any time I can make myself or a guest sound smarter I will do it. For me, I go for the low hanging fruit. This is when um someone just has um a standalone um all by itself. You can easily highlight it and press delete. The ums I leave alone are those that run into another word.

   Tool like Descript and Riverside have built in tools to remover filler words. Be careful with these as they can be a bit aggressive. A good edit is one that doesn't sound like an edit was made. This is why I don't obsess over every single filler words because we all occasionally say "um." It becomes an issue when people lose sight of what you're saying because they are distracted by how you are saying it.

   Takeaways:

   • Filler words are the annoying little gremlins of speech we all battle with, and they're everywhere.
   • Practicing with Toastmasters is like getting a gym membership for your speaking skills, minus the sweat.
   • Confidence is key; the more prepared you are, the less you sound like a crutch-word factory.
   • Taking pauses instead of using filler words is like giving your brain time to catch up with your mouth, which is crucial.
   • Editing your recordings helps you become painfully aware of those pesky fillers, so you can kick them to the curb.
   • Using outlines and scripts can save you from sounding like you're making it up as you go, and trust me, that's a lifesaver!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcasteditoracademy.com
   • thepharmacistvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • welcometoearthstories.com
   • askralph.com
   • Descript
   • Riverside
   • Toastmasters
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>2733f969-4317-499e-bc9d-b134f59614b8Mon, 04 Aug 2025 00:00:00 -040042:11falsefull99599515 Lessons Podcasters Can learn From Ozzy OsbourneOzzy Osbourne's recent passing has got me feeling all sorts of ways. I mean, who didn’t grow up jamming to ‘Crazy Train’ or wishing we could be half as cool as him? This isn’t just about mourning a rock legend; it’s about learning from the antics of a guy who built an empire on being unapologetically himself. So today, I’m diving deep into 15 lessons that podcasters can snag from Ozzy’s playbook. From being true to yourself (and not giving a hoot about the haters) to surrounding yourself with good people (looking at you, Sharon), I’m spilling the tea on how to keep your podcast alive and vibrant. Plus, I’ll share some wild stories about Ozzy’s crazy life that’ll make you laugh and cringe at the same time. Buckle up, because we’re about to rock this podcast world with some serious, Ozzy-inspired vibes!

   Mentioned In This Episode

   WDW Radio Podcast

   Lou Monegello's Tour

   Battery Organizer (aff)

   School of Podcasting

   Takeaways:

   • Ozzy Osbourne may have died, but his legacy of being unapologetically himself lives on forever.
   • Lessons from Ozzy include being true to yourself and ignoring the critics who just don't get it.
   • Surrounding yourself with good people is key; even Ozzy had Sharon in his corner.
   • Don't sweat perfection when creating content; just get out there and do it!
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Ozzy Osbourne's recent passing has got me feeling all sorts of ways. I mean, who didn’t grow up jamming to ‘Crazy Train’ or wishing we could be half as cool as him? This isn’t just about mourning a rock legend; it’s about learning from the antics of a guy who built an empire on being unapologetically himself. So today, I’m diving deep into 15 lessons that podcasters can snag from Ozzy’s playbook. From being true to yourself (and not giving a hoot about the haters) to surrounding yourself with good people (looking at you, Sharon), I’m spilling the tea on how to keep your podcast alive and vibrant. Plus, I’ll share some wild stories about Ozzy’s crazy life that’ll make you laugh and cringe at the same time. Buckle up, because we’re about to rock this podcast world with some serious, Ozzy-inspired vibes!

   Mentioned In This Episode

   WDW Radio Podcast

   Lou Monegello's Tour

   Battery Organizer (aff)

   School of Podcasting

   Takeaways:

   • Ozzy Osbourne may have died, but his legacy of being unapologetically himself lives on forever.
   • Lessons from Ozzy include being true to yourself and ignoring the critics who just don't get it.
   • Surrounding yourself with good people is key; even Ozzy had Sharon in his corner.
   • Don't sweat perfection when creating content; just get out there and do it!
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>3fe35fa5-c3e2-4f2f-884d-8b0e13528230Mon, 28 Jul 2025 00:00:00 -040036:40falsefull994994What's In It For The Audience? With Traci DeForgeTraci DeForge is here to her knowledge about podcasting for your business without feeling like a total salesy weirdo. She’s busting the myth that you need 10,000 downloads to make a buck—seriously, you can start monetizing with just 1,500 listeners. We talk about how to weave your podcast into your business strategy without sounding like a used car salesman. If you’ve ever felt awkward about asking for sales, Traci’s got the lowdown on how to do it without the cringe. So, grab your earbuds and get ready to learn how to turn your podcast into a money-making machine while keeping it real and relatable!

   Takeaways:

   • Most podcasters wrongly believe they need to drop $10k to start monetizing.
   • Traci DeForge busted the myth that you need 10,000 listeners; 1,500 can do it too!
   • Podcasting is all about strategy; it’s not just talking into a mic, folks!
   • You've got to view your podcast as part of your whole business model, not just a side gig.
   • Feeling salesy? Get over it! Your mindset can really change how you sell.
   • If you don't ask for what you're worth, you might be leaving money on the table!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • produceyourpodcast.com
   • podpage.com
   • Secrets of Closing the Sale - Zig Ziglar (Audible)
   
   

   Traci DeForge

   Helping business owners & brands turn their expertise into strategic podcasts that build authority, attract qualified leads & drive revenue. Full-service, 360° podcast solutions from strategy to sponsorship.

   As Founder & CEO of Produce Your Podcast, I help business owners, brands, and thought leaders transform their expertise into strategic media platforms that build authority, attract qualified leads, and generate revenue. From early-stage startups to my work with Fortune 500 companies, including Google, Hilton, Weight Watchers International, Microsoft, and British Airways, I am internationally recognized for identifying successful business development opportunities for innovative growth.

   Recognized as a Top 10 Podcasting Services Provider by Media & Entertainment Business Review (2024), we’ve launched and managed over 160 B2B and B2C podcasts, supporting startups and global brands across the technology, legal, finance, and healthcare sectors.

   With 30+ years of experience in award-winning media production, broadcast radio, and business development, I developed a full-service podcasting model delivering broadcast-quality production, strategic brand positioning, and measurable business outcomes. From concept to launch, audience growth to monetization, our proprietary workflow equips clients with a turnkey system for success, aligned with their marketing, sales, and content creation goals. READ MORE

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Traci DeForge is here to her knowledge about podcasting for your business without feeling like a total salesy weirdo. She’s busting the myth that you need 10,000 downloads to make a buck—seriously, you can start monetizing with just 1,500 listeners. We talk about how to weave your podcast into your business strategy without sounding like a used car salesman. If you’ve ever felt awkward about asking for sales, Traci’s got the lowdown on how to do it without the cringe. So, grab your earbuds and get ready to learn how to turn your podcast into a money-making machine while keeping it real and relatable!

   Takeaways:

   • Most podcasters wrongly believe they need to drop $10k to start monetizing.
   • Traci DeForge busted the myth that you need 10,000 listeners; 1,500 can do it too!
   • Podcasting is all about strategy; it’s not just talking into a mic, folks!
   • You've got to view your podcast as part of your whole business model, not just a side gig.
   • Feeling salesy? Get over it! Your mindset can really change how you sell.
   • If you don't ask for what you're worth, you might be leaving money on the table!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • produceyourpodcast.com
   • podpage.com
   • Secrets of Closing the Sale - Zig Ziglar (Audible)
   
   

   Traci DeForge

   Helping business owners & brands turn their expertise into strategic podcasts that build authority, attract qualified leads & drive revenue. Full-service, 360° podcast solutions from strategy to sponsorship.

   As Founder & CEO of Produce Your Podcast, I help business owners, brands, and thought leaders transform their expertise into strategic media platforms that build authority, attract qualified leads, and generate revenue. From early-stage startups to my work with Fortune 500 companies, including Google, Hilton, Weight Watchers International, Microsoft, and British Airways, I am internationally recognized for identifying successful business development opportunities for innovative growth.

   Recognized as a Top 10 Podcasting Services Provider by Media & Entertainment Business Review (2024), we’ve launched and managed over 160 B2B and B2C podcasts, supporting startups and global brands across the technology, legal, finance, and healthcare sectors.

   With 30+ years of experience in award-winning media production, broadcast radio, and business development, I developed a full-service podcasting model delivering broadcast-quality production, strategic brand positioning, and measurable business outcomes. From concept to launch, audience growth to monetization, our proprietary workflow equips clients with a turnkey system for success, aligned with their marketing, sales, and content creation goals. READ MORE

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>bddad638-d930-4851-a447-3b58e4279b85Mon, 21 Jul 2025 00:00:00 -040036:50falsefull993993Are Big Companies Poisoning Podcasting?Are Spotify and YouTube poisoning podcasting?

   I keep hearing how "What used to work in the past - doesn't work anymore? Well I disagree. Making great content that resonates with your audience has been around since the early days of radio, and if it make them FEEL something, you've got something that is golden.

   Giant companies always put profit over people, and with the latest AI band called the Velvet Sundown which has six figure streams. Why are AI Bands better than real musicians?

   • They don't get sick
   • They don't complain about not getting paid
   • They can provide more music, more frequently
   
   

   So if the world starts to accept AI artists, if you're Spotify, why wouldn't you introduce an AI podcaster to deliver an evergreen topic? Spotify could promote it to make it popular and then run advertising against it and not have to worry about splitting the revenue with a podcaster.

   Both YouTube and Spotify entice you in with free services, and then once you grow dependent on them, they can do whatever they want and you don't have a lot of control. If you say the wrong thing, you're kicked off the platform. Rosanne Barr (who is Jewish) for saying something deemed hate speech about Jewish people while she is herself Jewish. It was Sarcasm. Rosanne started her career as a comedian.

   Big Companies Often Put Profit Over Doing the Right Thing

   Purdue Pharma has been accused of mislabeling opioids that lead to lots of overdoses. Johnson and Johnson faced lawsuits about cancer and talcum power. Wells Fargo was fined millions for having employees open millions of account without the customer consent. I could go on and assemble a very long list. Just keep your eyes open, and watch as these companies that have come into podcasting with free offerings to interrupt the space, take control and bend it to suit their needs (not those of the host or the listener).

   Sponsor Magnet Book Review

   The Ultimate Book on Sponsorships/Partnerships, "Sponsor Magnet: How to Attract, Price, & Execute Your Dream Brand Partnerships" by Justin Moore. It is THE book for those looking to create partnerships with brand (not just a one time payment).

   The book shows you how to find out who to talk to, what to say, how to say it, and to overdeliver to they keep sponsoring the show. The audio book has bonus content that was very cool as you hear people talking about putting the strategies into practice. You can get it on Audible if you're more of a listener than reader.

   Takeaways:

   • If you're hunting for sponsors, check out the book 'Sponsor Magnet' - it's a game changer.
   • Podcasts don't need to follow trends; old-school content is still valuable and effective.
   • Big corporations could ruin podcasting, so let's just not invite them to the party.
   • YouTube is saying things that make no sense. A CD is not a cassette.
   • Spotify seems to have issue always delivering all the facts about their activities.
   • Hashtags no longer carry any clout on instagram per Brock Johnson
   • A podcast is audio, video or pdf delivered via RSS
   • Podcasting existed before people put in advertisements, and it will exist if advertising goes away. Advertising is ONE way to monetize.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • graphtreon.com (Top Podcasters using Crowd Funding)
   • profitfromyourpodcast.com
   • Corporate.fm Movie on Amazon
   • Everlong on Howard Stern
   • Kevin O’Leary on Diary of a CEO
   • Sponsor Magnet Book
   • Podcast Hosting Changes Graph
   • Build Your Tribe - Instagram SEO
   • Oxford Road What is a Podcast?
   • Attention and Trust Report from Sounds Profitable
   • Monetizing a Niche Podcast with Ray Arnott SOP 977
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Are Spotify and YouTube poisoning podcasting?

   I keep hearing how "What used to work in the past - doesn't work anymore? Well I disagree. Making great content that resonates with your audience has been around since the early days of radio, and if it make them FEEL something, you've got something that is golden.

   Giant companies always put profit over people, and with the latest AI band called the Velvet Sundown which has six figure streams. Why are AI Bands better than real musicians?

   • They don't get sick
   • They don't complain about not getting paid
   • They can provide more music, more frequently
   
   

   So if the world starts to accept AI artists, if you're Spotify, why wouldn't you introduce an AI podcaster to deliver an evergreen topic? Spotify could promote it to make it popular and then run advertising against it and not have to worry about splitting the revenue with a podcaster.

   Both YouTube and Spotify entice you in with free services, and then once you grow dependent on them, they can do whatever they want and you don't have a lot of control. If you say the wrong thing, you're kicked off the platform. Rosanne Barr (who is Jewish) for saying something deemed hate speech about Jewish people while she is herself Jewish. It was Sarcasm. Rosanne started her career as a comedian.

   Big Companies Often Put Profit Over Doing the Right Thing

   Purdue Pharma has been accused of mislabeling opioids that lead to lots of overdoses. Johnson and Johnson faced lawsuits about cancer and talcum power. Wells Fargo was fined millions for having employees open millions of account without the customer consent. I could go on and assemble a very long list. Just keep your eyes open, and watch as these companies that have come into podcasting with free offerings to interrupt the space, take control and bend it to suit their needs (not those of the host or the listener).

   Sponsor Magnet Book Review

   The Ultimate Book on Sponsorships/Partnerships, "Sponsor Magnet: How to Attract, Price, & Execute Your Dream Brand Partnerships" by Justin Moore. It is THE book for those looking to create partnerships with brand (not just a one time payment).

   The book shows you how to find out who to talk to, what to say, how to say it, and to overdeliver to they keep sponsoring the show. The audio book has bonus content that was very cool as you hear people talking about putting the strategies into practice. You can get it on Audible if you're more of a listener than reader.

   Takeaways:

   • If you're hunting for sponsors, check out the book 'Sponsor Magnet' - it's a game changer.
   • Podcasts don't need to follow trends; old-school content is still valuable and effective.
   • Big corporations could ruin podcasting, so let's just not invite them to the party.
   • YouTube is saying things that make no sense. A CD is not a cassette.
   • Spotify seems to have issue always delivering all the facts about their activities.
   • Hashtags no longer carry any clout on instagram per Brock Johnson
   • A podcast is audio, video or pdf delivered via RSS
   • Podcasting existed before people put in advertisements, and it will exist if advertising goes away. Advertising is ONE way to monetize.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • graphtreon.com (Top Podcasters using Crowd Funding)
   • profitfromyourpodcast.com
   • Corporate.fm Movie on Amazon
   • Everlong on Howard Stern
   • Kevin O’Leary on Diary of a CEO
   • Sponsor Magnet Book
   • Podcast Hosting Changes Graph
   • Build Your Tribe - Instagram SEO
   • Oxford Road What is a Podcast?
   • Attention and Trust Report from Sounds Profitable
   • Monetizing a Niche Podcast with Ray Arnott SOP 977
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>2fcb0a7b-e5b2-4486-a0da-7d2b1ec28569Mon, 14 Jul 2025 00:00:00 -040048:35falsefull992992How to Keep Your Marriage While Chasing Podcasting DreamsJuggling podcasting and personal life can feel like trying to balance on a three-legged stool while juggling flaming torches. In this episode, I look into the not-so-secret ingredients for maintaining a healthy work-life balance as a podcaster.

   We kick things off with a hard-hitting question: what happens when your love for podcasting starts to mess with your health and relationships? It's a real thing, folks, and I’ve seen it happen. I share my personal stories, including the ups and downs of my own marriages, and throw in some sarcastic wisdom learned from the school of hard knocks. I'm not claiming to be relationship experts, but we’ve been around the block a few times.

   I break down a simple yet effective framework for content creators: health, attitude, and support. Yes, I know, it sounds like a motivational poster, but stick with me.

   If you're not healthy enough to hit record, or if your attitude sounds like you just woke up on the wrong side of the bed, guess what? Your podcast is gonna suck. And don’t even get me started on the importance of having a supportive partner who doesn’t roll their eyes every time you mention your latest podcast episode.

   I share tips on how to set expectations with your spouse, maximize your time, and avoid those sneaky time-sucking distractions like binge-watching YouTube shorts at 2 AM. Trust me, your future self will thank you.

   By the end, you'll walk away with practical advice on how to keep your relationships intact while you chase your podcasting dreams. From date nights to timeouts during arguments, I’ve got you covered. It’s all about being intentional and proactive in nurturing your personal life while you’re busy building your podcast empire. And let’s be real, no one wants to end up in a messy divorce because they spent too much time talking to a mic instead of their partner. So grab your headphones and let’s get to it!

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • notejoy.com
   • todoist.com
   • vidiq.com
   • VidIQ Short Video About Thumbnails and Titles.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
   • The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People Book
   • Love and Respect: The Love She Most Desires; The Respect He Desperately Needs
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Juggling podcasting and personal life can feel like trying to balance on a three-legged stool while juggling flaming torches. In this episode, I look into the not-so-secret ingredients for maintaining a healthy work-life balance as a podcaster.

   We kick things off with a hard-hitting question: what happens when your love for podcasting starts to mess with your health and relationships? It's a real thing, folks, and I’ve seen it happen. I share my personal stories, including the ups and downs of my own marriages, and throw in some sarcastic wisdom learned from the school of hard knocks. I'm not claiming to be relationship experts, but we’ve been around the block a few times.

   I break down a simple yet effective framework for content creators: health, attitude, and support. Yes, I know, it sounds like a motivational poster, but stick with me.

   If you're not healthy enough to hit record, or if your attitude sounds like you just woke up on the wrong side of the bed, guess what? Your podcast is gonna suck. And don’t even get me started on the importance of having a supportive partner who doesn’t roll their eyes every time you mention your latest podcast episode.

   I share tips on how to set expectations with your spouse, maximize your time, and avoid those sneaky time-sucking distractions like binge-watching YouTube shorts at 2 AM. Trust me, your future self will thank you.

   By the end, you'll walk away with practical advice on how to keep your relationships intact while you chase your podcasting dreams. From date nights to timeouts during arguments, I’ve got you covered. It’s all about being intentional and proactive in nurturing your personal life while you’re busy building your podcast empire. And let’s be real, no one wants to end up in a messy divorce because they spent too much time talking to a mic instead of their partner. So grab your headphones and let’s get to it!

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • notejoy.com
   • todoist.com
   • vidiq.com
   • VidIQ Short Video About Thumbnails and Titles.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
   • The Seven Habits of Highly Effective People Book
   • Love and Respect: The Love She Most Desires; The Respect He Desperately Needs
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>fd759384-f077-44d5-932e-58d7a4ab8965Mon, 07 Jul 2025 00:00:00 -040049:23falsefull991991Is Everyone Really Using Spotify? HollyLand Lark M2S ReviewIn this month's "Question of the Month," I wanted to explore the discrepancy between Spotify's perceived dominance and the actual listening habits of podcasters. Despite frequent headlines touting Spotify as the number one streaming platform, my personal statistics and community feedback tell a different story. By surveying my audience about their platform preferences, I uncovered that Apple remains the top choice for most listeners, challenging the narrative often presented in media reports about Spotify's market leadership.

   Thanks to everyone who chimed in!

   Gear Review: HollyLand Lark M2s Wireless Lavalier System

   Quick Take:

   I was genuinely impressed by the Holly Land Lark M2s - this tiny microphone packs a surprisingly warm sound. At around $150, it's a solid investment for podcasters and content creators.

   Key Features:

   • Compact wireless lavalier microphone system
   • Versatile receiver with USB-C and headphone jack connectivity
   • Compatible with phones and recorders (I used my Rodecaster Duo)
   • Built-in noise reduction app
   • Option to record two mics on separate channels for post-production editing
   
   

   Pro Tip: Grab this from Sweetwater. They offer:

   • Extended warranties
   • Killer customer service
   • Competitive pricing
   • Free shipping (often cheaper than Amazon)
   • FREE CANDY<<<<<
   
   

   Noise Reduction: The app's built-in feature is decent - not perfect, but definitely helpful. Pro move? Set up both mics on separate channels so you can fine-tune your audio in post-production.

   Bottom Line: The Lark M2s is a compact, versatile mic system that punches above its weight. Definitely worth checking out for podcasters looking to upgrade their audio game.

   Takeaways:

   • The new Hollyland Lark M2S microphone sounds surprisingly warm, which totally blew my mind!
   • Spotify claims to be the number one podcast platform, but the real stats tell a different tale.
   • Charging guests to appear on your podcast? Brace yourself, the FTC has some rules you need to follow!
   • Using music in your podcast? Be careful, because Spotify's bots don’t care about your permissions!
   • It's always a good idea to double-check the facts you find online, especially from big companies!
   • Exercise is tough, but once you get through it, you'll feel so proud of yourself, like you just conquered a mountain!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • Hollyland Lark M2S Wireless Lavalier System
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thehoodratrecap.com
   • createartpodcast.com
   • findapodcastabout.xyz
   • passacls.com
   • tkbpodcaststudios.com
   • castahead.net
   • Deal Casters Podcast
   • Financially Confident Christian
   • Grit and Growth Business
   • Truth Unveiled with Ralph
   • Because of My Podcast
   • Akron Podcast
   • Feeding My Faith
   • Podcast Hot Seat
   • Podcast Review Show
   • Podcast Rodeo Show
   • Podcast Website Tips
   • Profit From Your Podcast
   • Future of Podcasting
   • Your Podcast Consultant
   • Heartbeat Community Tool
   • Circle Community Tool
   • Switchy (Dave's favorite marketing tool)
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>In this month's "Question of the Month," I wanted to explore the discrepancy between Spotify's perceived dominance and the actual listening habits of podcasters. Despite frequent headlines touting Spotify as the number one streaming platform, my personal statistics and community feedback tell a different story. By surveying my audience about their platform preferences, I uncovered that Apple remains the top choice for most listeners, challenging the narrative often presented in media reports about Spotify's market leadership.

   Thanks to everyone who chimed in!

   Gear Review: HollyLand Lark M2s Wireless Lavalier System

   Quick Take:

   I was genuinely impressed by the Holly Land Lark M2s - this tiny microphone packs a surprisingly warm sound. At around $150, it's a solid investment for podcasters and content creators.

   Key Features:

   • Compact wireless lavalier microphone system
   • Versatile receiver with USB-C and headphone jack connectivity
   • Compatible with phones and recorders (I used my Rodecaster Duo)
   • Built-in noise reduction app
   • Option to record two mics on separate channels for post-production editing
   
   

   Pro Tip: Grab this from Sweetwater. They offer:

   • Extended warranties
   • Killer customer service
   • Competitive pricing
   • Free shipping (often cheaper than Amazon)
   • FREE CANDY<<<<<
   
   

   Noise Reduction: The app's built-in feature is decent - not perfect, but definitely helpful. Pro move? Set up both mics on separate channels so you can fine-tune your audio in post-production.

   Bottom Line: The Lark M2s is a compact, versatile mic system that punches above its weight. Definitely worth checking out for podcasters looking to upgrade their audio game.

   Takeaways:

   • The new Hollyland Lark M2S microphone sounds surprisingly warm, which totally blew my mind!
   • Spotify claims to be the number one podcast platform, but the real stats tell a different tale.
   • Charging guests to appear on your podcast? Brace yourself, the FTC has some rules you need to follow!
   • Using music in your podcast? Be careful, because Spotify's bots don’t care about your permissions!
   • It's always a good idea to double-check the facts you find online, especially from big companies!
   • Exercise is tough, but once you get through it, you'll feel so proud of yourself, like you just conquered a mountain!
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • Hollyland Lark M2S Wireless Lavalier System
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thehoodratrecap.com
   • createartpodcast.com
   • findapodcastabout.xyz
   • passacls.com
   • tkbpodcaststudios.com
   • castahead.net
   • Deal Casters Podcast
   • Financially Confident Christian
   • Grit and Growth Business
   • Truth Unveiled with Ralph
   • Because of My Podcast
   • Akron Podcast
   • Feeding My Faith
   • Podcast Hot Seat
   • Podcast Review Show
   • Podcast Rodeo Show
   • Podcast Website Tips
   • Profit From Your Podcast
   • Future of Podcasting
   • Your Podcast Consultant
   • Heartbeat Community Tool
   • Circle Community Tool
   • Switchy (Dave's favorite marketing tool)
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>d41ca72e-03a4-4d45-8b7e-8cdce24be5c1Mon, 30 Jun 2025 00:00:00 -040045:03falsefull990990Creative Outlets or Creative Burdens? Let's Talk Podcast Burnout!So, today I'm diving into the mess that can be podcast burnout. You know, that moment when your favorite hobby morphs into a job you dread? Yeah, we’ve all been there. We're chatting about big names like Marc Maron and others who decided to call it quits and how that’s not just okay, but totally legit.

   Spoiler alert: sometimes stepping back is the best move you can make. I’ll sprinkle in some sarcasm and laughs as we explore the absurdity of it all—because let’s face it, if we can’t laugh at our struggles, what’s the point, right?

   If you've been thinking about starting a podcast but feel it's too crowded, realize all those podcasters who started back in 2005 might be being pulled in new directions that have them thinking about podcast retirement.

   Takeaways:

   • Creative projects can sometimes feel like an endless cycle of stress and burnout.
   • It's totally okay to step back from podcasting if it stops being fun for you.
   • Many successful podcasters have experienced burnout, and it's a common issue in the industry.
   • Managing expectations is crucial; don't expect overnight success when building an audience.
   • Life changes, like welcoming a new baby, can drastically affect your podcasting ability and energy.
   • Always remember: adding responsibilities means subtracting your fun, so be careful what you take on.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Show

   Marc Maron Announces He's Ending the WTF Show

   Rob Walch Talks Marc Maron on the Feed

   Erik K Johnson End Podcast Talent Coach

   YouTuber Tom Scott Says Goodbye 6.5M Subscribers

   YouTuber The Game Theorist Says Goodbye 19.6M Subscribers

   YouTuber Caylus says goodbye to 18.7M Subscribers

   What Makes This Show Ggreat? - Marc Maron Edition sop705

   My Spouse Has Dementia Show with Zita Christian

   Daniel J. Lewis is BACK!

   Clockify Free Time Tracker

   More insights at schoolofpodcasting.com/989

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>So, today I'm diving into the mess that can be podcast burnout. You know, that moment when your favorite hobby morphs into a job you dread? Yeah, we’ve all been there. We're chatting about big names like Marc Maron and others who decided to call it quits and how that’s not just okay, but totally legit.

   Spoiler alert: sometimes stepping back is the best move you can make. I’ll sprinkle in some sarcasm and laughs as we explore the absurdity of it all—because let’s face it, if we can’t laugh at our struggles, what’s the point, right?

   If you've been thinking about starting a podcast but feel it's too crowded, realize all those podcasters who started back in 2005 might be being pulled in new directions that have them thinking about podcast retirement.

   Takeaways:

   • Creative projects can sometimes feel like an endless cycle of stress and burnout.
   • It's totally okay to step back from podcasting if it stops being fun for you.
   • Many successful podcasters have experienced burnout, and it's a common issue in the industry.
   • Managing expectations is crucial; don't expect overnight success when building an audience.
   • Life changes, like welcoming a new baby, can drastically affect your podcasting ability and energy.
   • Always remember: adding responsibilities means subtracting your fun, so be careful what you take on.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Show

   Marc Maron Announces He's Ending the WTF Show

   Rob Walch Talks Marc Maron on the Feed

   Erik K Johnson End Podcast Talent Coach

   YouTuber Tom Scott Says Goodbye 6.5M Subscribers

   YouTuber The Game Theorist Says Goodbye 19.6M Subscribers

   YouTuber Caylus says goodbye to 18.7M Subscribers

   What Makes This Show Ggreat? - Marc Maron Edition sop705

   My Spouse Has Dementia Show with Zita Christian

   Daniel J. Lewis is BACK!

   Clockify Free Time Tracker

   More insights at schoolofpodcasting.com/989

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>78c44ae5-dd6a-4959-8c58-9c8408850e1dMon, 23 Jun 2025 00:00:00 -040044:19falsefull989989The Emotion Effect: How Feelings Drive SharesEver wonder why some podcasts spread like wildfire while others wither on the vine? Well, it turns out that a whopping 60 to 80% of podcasts are discovered through good old-fashioned word of mouth.

   Yeah, that means if your podcast isn’t getting shared, there’s a reason. So, what’s the secret sauce that makes people hit that share button? In this episode, I research the world of shareable content — you know, the kind that makes your friends feel like they need to hear it.

   Spoiler alert: it’s all about that emotional connection and delivering value. Plus, I’ll throw in some advice on being a better podcaster and maybe even a better dad. We also take a listen to the Zoom Podtrak P2

   Mentioned In This Show

   Zoom Podtrak P2

   Microphones Compatible with the Zoom Podtrak P2

   Samson Q2U USB Microphone

   Rode Podmic USB

   Lean Learning: How to Achieve More by Learning Less from Pat Flynn (audible)

   Voice of Greece Podcast

   Castahead.net - Podcast Producing and More

   Libsyn Ads Removes Limits (please note this IS programatic ads check the CPM)

   Ask the Podcast Coach (free podcast consulting)

   Pat Flynn on Episode 421

   What Makes People Share Question of the Month 2021

   Home Gadget Geeks

   Takeaways:

   • Around 60 to 80% of podcasts are found through sharing, so that's a big deal.
   • Good content isn't just about being decent; it has to be downright irresistible to share.
   • We often share things based on the feels—if it hits us in the feels, we share it.
   • To get people to share, your content should be emotionally engaging, practical, and visually appealing.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Ever wonder why some podcasts spread like wildfire while others wither on the vine? Well, it turns out that a whopping 60 to 80% of podcasts are discovered through good old-fashioned word of mouth.

   Yeah, that means if your podcast isn’t getting shared, there’s a reason. So, what’s the secret sauce that makes people hit that share button? In this episode, I research the world of shareable content — you know, the kind that makes your friends feel like they need to hear it.

   Spoiler alert: it’s all about that emotional connection and delivering value. Plus, I’ll throw in some advice on being a better podcaster and maybe even a better dad. We also take a listen to the Zoom Podtrak P2

   Mentioned In This Show

   Zoom Podtrak P2

   Microphones Compatible with the Zoom Podtrak P2

   Samson Q2U USB Microphone

   Rode Podmic USB

   Lean Learning: How to Achieve More by Learning Less from Pat Flynn (audible)

   Voice of Greece Podcast

   Castahead.net - Podcast Producing and More

   Libsyn Ads Removes Limits (please note this IS programatic ads check the CPM)

   Ask the Podcast Coach (free podcast consulting)

   Pat Flynn on Episode 421

   What Makes People Share Question of the Month 2021

   Home Gadget Geeks

   Takeaways:

   • Around 60 to 80% of podcasts are found through sharing, so that's a big deal.
   • Good content isn't just about being decent; it has to be downright irresistible to share.
   • We often share things based on the feels—if it hits us in the feels, we share it.
   • To get people to share, your content should be emotionally engaging, practical, and visually appealing.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>e6b62261-b59c-4fc3-9f70-6b19a1ce5b49Mon, 16 Jun 2025 00:00:00 -040039:10falsefull988988Community Building 101 with Bri LeeverToday we start with the news of Marc Maron retiring his podcast, and a possible shake up at the New Media Show (two shows with 16+ years). So who will fill their space you?

   Bri Leever is a community building strategist at Ember Consulting and host of the show "Dear Bri." I saw her present at a webinar put on by Hearbeat (my favorite community tool) and immediately joined her community (which lead to me asking her on the show).

   Full show notes at schoolodposcasting.com/987

   Mentioned in the Show:

   Ember Consulting

   Bri's Community of Community Builders

   Heartbeat Community Tool

   Circle Community Tool

   Mighty Networks

   Skool Community Tool

   Honeycomb App

   Dear Bi Podcast

   Circle vs Skool Video

   School of Podcasting Community

   Takeaways:

   • Marc Maron is hanging up his podcasting hat after 16 years, and that's a big deal.
   • Having both free and paid communities can actually mess up your growth, who knew?
   • If you want a thriving community, you gotta focus on what people actually want, duh!
   • Starting a podcast with a small team is totally doable; you don't need a squad of 20.
   • Don't be surprised if your free community outshines your paid one; it happens more than you'd think.
   • People love talking about themselves, so just ask them questions and you'll be golden.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Today we start with the news of Marc Maron retiring his podcast, and a possible shake up at the New Media Show (two shows with 16+ years). So who will fill their space you?

   Bri Leever is a community building strategist at Ember Consulting and host of the show "Dear Bri." I saw her present at a webinar put on by Hearbeat (my favorite community tool) and immediately joined her community (which lead to me asking her on the show).

   Full show notes at schoolodposcasting.com/987

   Mentioned in the Show:

   Ember Consulting

   Bri's Community of Community Builders

   Heartbeat Community Tool

   Circle Community Tool

   Mighty Networks

   Skool Community Tool

   Honeycomb App

   Dear Bi Podcast

   Circle vs Skool Video

   School of Podcasting Community

   Takeaways:

   • Marc Maron is hanging up his podcasting hat after 16 years, and that's a big deal.
   • Having both free and paid communities can actually mess up your growth, who knew?
   • If you want a thriving community, you gotta focus on what people actually want, duh!
   • Starting a podcast with a small team is totally doable; you don't need a squad of 20.
   • Don't be surprised if your free community outshines your paid one; it happens more than you'd think.
   • People love talking about themselves, so just ask them questions and you'll be golden.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>5af72cfe-14cd-43c0-a68e-7843b1f3f08fMon, 09 Jun 2025 00:00:00 -040044:47falsefull987987From Audio to Viral: The YouTube Transformation of a PodcastAdding YouTube to your podcasting game? Well, grab a seat because Thomas Umstadt Jr. is here to share what works and what doesn't. We’re talking about the nitty-gritty of taking your audio-only podcast and slapping it onto the video platform that everyone and their grandma seems to be on.

   Thomas recounts his journey from simple audiograms to full-blown video episodes, sharing the highs and lows of his transition. Spoiler alert: it turns out that just tossing your podcast audio onto YouTube won’t cut it. You need to think about titles and thumbnails—yes, those flashy little images that scream ‘click me!’ As he explains, those are your first impressions; if they’re not catchy, your content might as well be invisible.

   He dives into the technicalities too, discussing everything from gear and lighting to the importance of having a good backdrop (hello, bookshelves!). Plus, he shares some gold nuggets about audience demographics that might just make you rethink how you approach your content. So whether you’re on the fence about YouTube or just curious about what the fuss is all about, this episode is packed with insights that might just give your podcast the boost it needs.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Novel Marketing.com (Thomas's website and podcast)

   Author Update Show

   Tube Buddy (YouTube tool that coaches you)

   VidIQ (another tool to help you with YouTube)

   Elgato Prompter

   Pikzel YouTube Thumbnail Maker

   1 of 10 YouTube Thumbnail Maker

   Captivate and Buzzsprout Media Hosts with Dynamic Content Capabilities

   School of Podcasting - Plan, launch, and grow your podcast

   Takeaways:

   • Adding YouTube to your podcast can significantly boost audience engagement and visibility.
   • Titles and thumbnails are crucial for YouTube success, unlike in traditional podcasting.
   • The first 30 seconds of your video need to grab attention or viewers will bounce.
   • Using your phone as a camera can yield better results than expensive gear for video.
   • A strong opening is key for YouTube; don't dilly-dally with long intros like in podcasts.
   • Experimenting with different content formats can lead to surprising audience growth on YouTube.
   
   

   Did you get value from this show? You can give some of the value back and say thanks.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Adding YouTube to your podcasting game? Well, grab a seat because Thomas Umstadt Jr. is here to share what works and what doesn't. We’re talking about the nitty-gritty of taking your audio-only podcast and slapping it onto the video platform that everyone and their grandma seems to be on.

   Thomas recounts his journey from simple audiograms to full-blown video episodes, sharing the highs and lows of his transition. Spoiler alert: it turns out that just tossing your podcast audio onto YouTube won’t cut it. You need to think about titles and thumbnails—yes, those flashy little images that scream ‘click me!’ As he explains, those are your first impressions; if they’re not catchy, your content might as well be invisible.

   He dives into the technicalities too, discussing everything from gear and lighting to the importance of having a good backdrop (hello, bookshelves!). Plus, he shares some gold nuggets about audience demographics that might just make you rethink how you approach your content. So whether you’re on the fence about YouTube or just curious about what the fuss is all about, this episode is packed with insights that might just give your podcast the boost it needs.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Novel Marketing.com (Thomas's website and podcast)

   Author Update Show

   Tube Buddy (YouTube tool that coaches you)

   VidIQ (another tool to help you with YouTube)

   Elgato Prompter

   Pikzel YouTube Thumbnail Maker

   1 of 10 YouTube Thumbnail Maker

   Captivate and Buzzsprout Media Hosts with Dynamic Content Capabilities

   School of Podcasting - Plan, launch, and grow your podcast

   Takeaways:

   • Adding YouTube to your podcast can significantly boost audience engagement and visibility.
   • Titles and thumbnails are crucial for YouTube success, unlike in traditional podcasting.
   • The first 30 seconds of your video need to grab attention or viewers will bounce.
   • Using your phone as a camera can yield better results than expensive gear for video.
   • A strong opening is key for YouTube; don't dilly-dally with long intros like in podcasts.
   • Experimenting with different content formats can lead to surprising audience growth on YouTube.
   
   

   Did you get value from this show? You can give some of the value back and say thanks.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>9a89af1b-ca1d-46f5-84c0-dfee872bd632Mon, 02 Jun 2025 00:00:00 -040001:00:42falsefull986986Five Proven Strategies for Crafting Unforgettable Podcast HooksToday, we are talking about keeping your audience listening after they press play. This starts with an opening hook. To have hooks that grab your audience and make them want to hear your episode, there are some common characteristics:

   Relevance: A good hook connects directly to the theme or topic of your episode. It should hint at what’s to come without giving everything away.

   Emotional Impact: Evoking curiosity, excitement, or even controversy can create an emotional connection with your audience, prompting them to stay tuned.

   Clarity and Brevity: Your hook should be clear and to the point. Complexity can confuse listeners and cause them to lose interest.

   Promises Value: Whether it’s information, entertainment, or inspiration, a strong hook promises something valuable to the listener.

   All of this relies on you knowing who your target audience is. A hook that works on a business podcast may not work on your gaming show.

   Ever wondered why some podcasts just suck you in while others make you want to run for the hills? Well, let’s break it down, shall we? The opening hook of your podcast can make or break your listener retention. You could have the most riveting content planned, but if your intro is as exciting as watching paint dry, good luck keeping anyone around.

   We’re talking about how a killer hook can capture attention faster than a cat meme on social media. Dive into the psychology of why people stick around and learn five solid strategies to craft hooks that actually work. Spoiler alert: it’s not just about being clever. It’s about being relevant, emotional, and concise. So, grab your headphones, and let’s unravel the magical art of the podcast hook that’ll have your audience begging for more!

   Takeaways:

   • A killer hook can make or break your podcast's first impression, so choose wisely!
   • To keep listeners glued to your podcast, start with something that sparks curiosity and relevance.
   • Your opening should promise value; otherwise, listeners might just hit the dreaded 'stop' button.
   • Whether it's a shocking fact or a relatable story, your hook needs to resonate with your audience.
   
   

   5 Example Hook Types:

   • Engaging Questions: Drawing listeners in by voicing their struggles or curiosities
   • Personal Anecdotes: Using brief, vulnerable stories that are directly relevant
   • Shocking Facts: Leveraging surprising statistics or statements (without clickbait)
   • Intriguing Scenarios: Creating hypothetical situations that spark imagination
   • Relatable Problems: Addressing common issues faced by the audience
   
   

   Mentioned in This Episode

   School of Podcasting

   Ask the Podcast Coach

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Podcast Review Show

   Podcast Hook Example Cheat Sheet

   Audience Survey: schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Today, we are talking about keeping your audience listening after they press play. This starts with an opening hook. To have hooks that grab your audience and make them want to hear your episode, there are some common characteristics:

   Relevance: A good hook connects directly to the theme or topic of your episode. It should hint at what’s to come without giving everything away.

   Emotional Impact: Evoking curiosity, excitement, or even controversy can create an emotional connection with your audience, prompting them to stay tuned.

   Clarity and Brevity: Your hook should be clear and to the point. Complexity can confuse listeners and cause them to lose interest.

   Promises Value: Whether it’s information, entertainment, or inspiration, a strong hook promises something valuable to the listener.

   All of this relies on you knowing who your target audience is. A hook that works on a business podcast may not work on your gaming show.

   Ever wondered why some podcasts just suck you in while others make you want to run for the hills? Well, let’s break it down, shall we? The opening hook of your podcast can make or break your listener retention. You could have the most riveting content planned, but if your intro is as exciting as watching paint dry, good luck keeping anyone around.

   We’re talking about how a killer hook can capture attention faster than a cat meme on social media. Dive into the psychology of why people stick around and learn five solid strategies to craft hooks that actually work. Spoiler alert: it’s not just about being clever. It’s about being relevant, emotional, and concise. So, grab your headphones, and let’s unravel the magical art of the podcast hook that’ll have your audience begging for more!

   Takeaways:

   • A killer hook can make or break your podcast's first impression, so choose wisely!
   • To keep listeners glued to your podcast, start with something that sparks curiosity and relevance.
   • Your opening should promise value; otherwise, listeners might just hit the dreaded 'stop' button.
   • Whether it's a shocking fact or a relatable story, your hook needs to resonate with your audience.
   
   

   5 Example Hook Types:

   • Engaging Questions: Drawing listeners in by voicing their struggles or curiosities
   • Personal Anecdotes: Using brief, vulnerable stories that are directly relevant
   • Shocking Facts: Leveraging surprising statistics or statements (without clickbait)
   • Intriguing Scenarios: Creating hypothetical situations that spark imagination
   • Relatable Problems: Addressing common issues faced by the audience
   
   

   Mentioned in This Episode

   School of Podcasting

   Ask the Podcast Coach

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Podcast Review Show

   Podcast Hook Example Cheat Sheet

   Audience Survey: schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>c97530d1-1c70-489f-861d-64b553e318a4Mon, 26 May 2025 00:00:00 -040036:51falsefull985985Mic Drop Moments: How to Turn Boring Interviews into Podcast Gold with Tracy JohnsonWhat if I told you that most interviews are mind-numbingly boring, and you're probably doing them wrong? Today I interview Tracy Johnson, and after decades in radio and working with countless shows, he's written a book, Mic Drop Moments, that shares the secrets to transforming mediocre conversations into absolute "Didya Hear That?!" moments.

   In this episode, we pull back the curtain on selecting guests that will electrify your audience, ask questions that make people lean in, and tell stories that keep listeners hanging on every word. Whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, what we share will completely change how you approach interviews forever. So if you're ready to stop settling for bland, forgettable conversations and start creating audio magic, hit play right now.

   The Triple Threat Filter for Interview Guests:

   1. Familiarity

   - How well-known is the guest to your audience?

   - A familiar guest brings built-in interest and recognition

   - More famous guests typically make better interview subjects

   - Provides an immediate connection for listeners

   2. Relevance

   - Does the guest's story or background matter to your audience?

   - Must align with your podcast's theme and target listeners

   - Simply being famous isn't enough if the content doesn't resonate

   - The guest should provide value specific to your show's focus

   3. Interest/Entertainment

   - Can the guest tell a compelling story?

   - Ability to be engaging, dynamic, and captivating

   - Brings unique perspectives or unexpected narratives

   - Makes the host look good by providing memorable content

   Aim to have at least two out of three criteria met. If you lose two out of three, the interview will likely be challenging to make interesting. The ultimate goal is to leverage the guest's story to enhance your podcast's entertainment value.

   The 3E's of Entertainment:

   1. Enhance

   - Add extra details to make the story more interesting

   - Go beyond the basic facts

   - Ask questions like "What were you thinking at that moment?"

   - Create additional context that wasn't initially present

   - Make the story more vivid and engaging

   2. Exaggerate

   - Slightly amplify the story's impact

   - Turn a small moment into a bigger narrative

   - Example: A small fish becomes "the biggest catch of the season."

   - Create dramatic tension without losing the core truth

   - Make the story more memorable and exciting

   3. Embellish

   - Add creative storytelling elements

   - Stage the story for maximum entertainment value

   - Take a brief moment and turn it into a full narrative

   - Example: A simple backstage conversation becomes an epic ping pong challenge

   - Use creative license to make the story more compelling

   As audiences crave authenticity, Tracy isn't saying to lie, but you can bring in adjectives that trigger the theater of the mind.

   Resources Mention

   Mic Drop Moments Book

   Tracy Johnson Media Website

   School of Podcasting

   Episode 677 The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

   Drew Carey on Jordan Harbinger Show (start at 48:14 nsfw)

   Howie Mandel on Jordan Harbinger

   Jordan Harbinger Show

   Find "All Things Dave" at powerofpodcasting.com

   Say Thanks for a Great Show schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Join the School of Podcasting Today - Your Future Self Will Thank You

   Stepping out of your comfort zone isn't easy, but at the School of Podcasting, we're here to make it feel like second nature. With our expertly crafted courses and an incredible community, you're never alone in your journey. From planning and launching to growing your podcast, I’ll be right by your side every step of the way. Remember, every podcast episode builds connections and opens doors to future opportunities. Take action today, and let your future self reap the rewards.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>What if I told you that most interviews are mind-numbingly boring, and you're probably doing them wrong? Today I interview Tracy Johnson, and after decades in radio and working with countless shows, he's written a book, Mic Drop Moments, that shares the secrets to transforming mediocre conversations into absolute "Didya Hear That?!" moments.

   In this episode, we pull back the curtain on selecting guests that will electrify your audience, ask questions that make people lean in, and tell stories that keep listeners hanging on every word. Whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, what we share will completely change how you approach interviews forever. So if you're ready to stop settling for bland, forgettable conversations and start creating audio magic, hit play right now.

   The Triple Threat Filter for Interview Guests:

   1. Familiarity

   - How well-known is the guest to your audience?

   - A familiar guest brings built-in interest and recognition

   - More famous guests typically make better interview subjects

   - Provides an immediate connection for listeners

   2. Relevance

   - Does the guest's story or background matter to your audience?

   - Must align with your podcast's theme and target listeners

   - Simply being famous isn't enough if the content doesn't resonate

   - The guest should provide value specific to your show's focus

   3. Interest/Entertainment

   - Can the guest tell a compelling story?

   - Ability to be engaging, dynamic, and captivating

   - Brings unique perspectives or unexpected narratives

   - Makes the host look good by providing memorable content

   Aim to have at least two out of three criteria met. If you lose two out of three, the interview will likely be challenging to make interesting. The ultimate goal is to leverage the guest's story to enhance your podcast's entertainment value.

   The 3E's of Entertainment:

   1. Enhance

   - Add extra details to make the story more interesting

   - Go beyond the basic facts

   - Ask questions like "What were you thinking at that moment?"

   - Create additional context that wasn't initially present

   - Make the story more vivid and engaging

   2. Exaggerate

   - Slightly amplify the story's impact

   - Turn a small moment into a bigger narrative

   - Example: A small fish becomes "the biggest catch of the season."

   - Create dramatic tension without losing the core truth

   - Make the story more memorable and exciting

   3. Embellish

   - Add creative storytelling elements

   - Stage the story for maximum entertainment value

   - Take a brief moment and turn it into a full narrative

   - Example: A simple backstage conversation becomes an epic ping pong challenge

   - Use creative license to make the story more compelling

   As audiences crave authenticity, Tracy isn't saying to lie, but you can bring in adjectives that trigger the theater of the mind.

   Resources Mention

   Mic Drop Moments Book

   Tracy Johnson Media Website

   School of Podcasting

   Episode 677 The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

   Drew Carey on Jordan Harbinger Show (start at 48:14 nsfw)

   Howie Mandel on Jordan Harbinger

   Jordan Harbinger Show

   Find "All Things Dave" at powerofpodcasting.com

   Say Thanks for a Great Show schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Join the School of Podcasting Today - Your Future Self Will Thank You

   Stepping out of your comfort zone isn't easy, but at the School of Podcasting, we're here to make it feel like second nature. With our expertly crafted courses and an incredible community, you're never alone in your journey. From planning and launching to growing your podcast, I’ll be right by your side every step of the way. Remember, every podcast episode builds connections and opens doors to future opportunities. Take action today, and let your future self reap the rewards.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>8b75002b-7639-4026-bb6c-d0592ac6653eMon, 19 May 2025 00:00:00 -040040:45falsefull984984Running Your Podcast As a Business with Steve StewartMoney, money, money! Yeah, I know, we’re all rolling our eyes thinking, "Ugh, not another boring finance chat!" But hold onto your wallets, because this isn’t your grandpa’s finance talk.

   Our buddy Ray Edwards, a top-notch copywriter, shares a jaw-dropping story about how he made a cool million but ended up in bankruptcy—wait, what? How does that happen?

   I spill the beans on my own bankruptcy saga, sharing how emotional decisions can lead us down a slippery slope. And hey, we’re not just here to mope; we’ve got Steve Stewart from the Podcast Editors Academy joining us to sprinkle in some wisdom about putting profit first. Buckle up, because we’re throwing in some sarcastic humor while we unravel the absurdity of our financial choices!

   Takeaways:

   • Ignoring your finances is like playing with fire while blindfolded—eventually, you'll get burned.
   • Being bankrupt after making millions is the ultimate plot twist—stay alert or face the absurdity!
   • Don't let emotions rule your financial decisions; logic over feelings keeps the money in your pocket.
   • Track every penny if you want to keep your business afloat; otherwise, expect to sink!
   
   

   Companies mentioned in this episode:

   • Ray Edwards
   • Steve Stewart
   • Podcast Editor Academy (get the free download)
   • Profit First book
   • Novo (get $40 off once qualified)
   • Relay
   • Wave Apps
   • Acorns
   • Sofi
   • Gordon Firemark
   • Ralph Estepp
   • Cronometer Fitness Tracker
   • School of Podcasting
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Money, money, money! Yeah, I know, we’re all rolling our eyes thinking, "Ugh, not another boring finance chat!" But hold onto your wallets, because this isn’t your grandpa’s finance talk.

   Our buddy Ray Edwards, a top-notch copywriter, shares a jaw-dropping story about how he made a cool million but ended up in bankruptcy—wait, what? How does that happen?

   I spill the beans on my own bankruptcy saga, sharing how emotional decisions can lead us down a slippery slope. And hey, we’re not just here to mope; we’ve got Steve Stewart from the Podcast Editors Academy joining us to sprinkle in some wisdom about putting profit first. Buckle up, because we’re throwing in some sarcastic humor while we unravel the absurdity of our financial choices!

   Takeaways:

   • Ignoring your finances is like playing with fire while blindfolded—eventually, you'll get burned.
   • Being bankrupt after making millions is the ultimate plot twist—stay alert or face the absurdity!
   • Don't let emotions rule your financial decisions; logic over feelings keeps the money in your pocket.
   • Track every penny if you want to keep your business afloat; otherwise, expect to sink!
   
   

   Companies mentioned in this episode:

   • Ray Edwards
   • Steve Stewart
   • Podcast Editor Academy (get the free download)
   • Profit First book
   • Novo (get $40 off once qualified)
   • Relay
   • Wave Apps
   • Acorns
   • Sofi
   • Gordon Firemark
   • Ralph Estepp
   • Cronometer Fitness Tracker
   • School of Podcasting
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>2e114092-2df8-4d17-badd-4dec96e73e0dMon, 12 May 2025 00:00:00 -040050:23falsefull983983Throwing Shade: Exposing Podcast Get-Rich-Quick ScamsNormally, I try to stay positive and encouraging. Maybe I still am, as I encourage you not to fall for these Podcast Tools (often based on AI) that promise great success and wealth without doing any work. Here are some of the things this company (who will remain nameless) promised:
   • A chart-topping podcast in minutes
   • You don't even need a microphone (think about that)
   • Just let AI clone your voice, make an AI video version of you, and make six figures.
   • Podcasting is expensive (it's not -you can get started for $80)
   • Instant money from advertising (when big sponsors need 10-20,000 downloads per episode)
   • It quotes successful podcasts that aren't using their system (and sell their own products, not advertising).
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • You don't monetize a podcast - you monetize an audience.
   • If it were this easy, everyone would do it - and all podcasts would be the same.
   • Many podcasting scams prey on the uneducated, making it sound easy to succeed.
   • Building a podcast audience takes time, typically around three years, so be patient.
   • Don't fall for the hype that you can create a podcast in minutes without effort.
   • You can't skip the hard work of podcasting and expect to succeed; it requires consistency in schedule and consistency in quality content.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Conan O'Brien Needs Some Cash

   Podnews Weekly Review

   Podnews Daily

   Will “Verified” Downloads Ruin Podcast Advertising

   School of Podcasting

   Video of Fake Countdown Timer

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting and Get Access to Step by Step Courses

   When you join the School of Podcasting you get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching, an awesome community and courses like: Planning Your Podcast Podcasting Gear Growing Your Podcast Podcast Monetization and many more - all for one low price.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Normally, I try to stay positive and encouraging. Maybe I still am, as I encourage you not to fall for these Podcast Tools (often based on AI) that promise great success and wealth without doing any work. Here are some of the things this company (who will remain nameless) promised:
   • A chart-topping podcast in minutes
   • You don't even need a microphone (think about that)
   • Just let AI clone your voice, make an AI video version of you, and make six figures.
   • Podcasting is expensive (it's not -you can get started for $80)
   • Instant money from advertising (when big sponsors need 10-20,000 downloads per episode)
   • It quotes successful podcasts that aren't using their system (and sell their own products, not advertising).
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • You don't monetize a podcast - you monetize an audience.
   • If it were this easy, everyone would do it - and all podcasts would be the same.
   • Many podcasting scams prey on the uneducated, making it sound easy to succeed.
   • Building a podcast audience takes time, typically around three years, so be patient.
   • Don't fall for the hype that you can create a podcast in minutes without effort.
   • You can't skip the hard work of podcasting and expect to succeed; it requires consistency in schedule and consistency in quality content.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Conan O'Brien Needs Some Cash

   Podnews Weekly Review

   Podnews Daily

   Will “Verified” Downloads Ruin Podcast Advertising

   School of Podcasting

   Video of Fake Countdown Timer

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting and Get Access to Step by Step Courses

   When you join the School of Podcasting you get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching, an awesome community and courses like: Planning Your Podcast Podcasting Gear Growing Your Podcast Podcast Monetization and many more - all for one low price.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>81607c56-77c5-4e79-ab71-e0cae14c6627Mon, 05 May 2025 00:00:00 -040038:27falsefull982982Podcast Episode Ideas - What Sources Do You Use?Ever find yourself staring at a blank screen, just waiting for the podcast gods to drop some divine inspiration in your lap? Yeah, me too. But don’t worry, we’re exploring the world of podcast ideas today!

   I asked you, the wonderful listeners, how you come up with your brilliant episode topics, and trust me, some of the answers are pure gold. From scavenging through old notes to eavesdropping on pharmacy conferences, we’ve got tips and tricks to keep those creative juices flowing. So, whether you’re a newbie or a seasoned podcaster struggling for content, jump in and let’s figure this out together—because who doesn’t love a good brainstorming session, right?

   Participants

   Kim Newlove

   https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/

   https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com/

   Dan LeFebvre

   https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com

   Justin Blackett

   https://www.shipshapepodcast.co.uk/

   Takeaways:

   • When you're stuck for podcast ideas, sometimes it's easier to think about what not to discuss.
   • Finding inspiration for episodes can come from anywhere, even from the most mundane situations.
   • Engaging with your audience directly can help generate content ideas that resonate with them.
   • Using tools like feed readers can streamline how you gather information and find inspiration for your show.
   • Podcasts often draw content from current events, books, or personal experiences that resonate with the audience.
   • The key to successful podcasting is staying curious and always looking for new perspectives and stories.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • shipshapepodcast.co.uk
   • basedonatruestorypodcast.com
   • inoreader.com
   • feedly.com
   • Notejoy (affiliate link)
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Ever find yourself staring at a blank screen, just waiting for the podcast gods to drop some divine inspiration in your lap? Yeah, me too. But don’t worry, we’re exploring the world of podcast ideas today!

   I asked you, the wonderful listeners, how you come up with your brilliant episode topics, and trust me, some of the answers are pure gold. From scavenging through old notes to eavesdropping on pharmacy conferences, we’ve got tips and tricks to keep those creative juices flowing. So, whether you’re a newbie or a seasoned podcaster struggling for content, jump in and let’s figure this out together—because who doesn’t love a good brainstorming session, right?

   Participants

   Kim Newlove

   https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/

   https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com/

   Dan LeFebvre

   https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com

   Justin Blackett

   https://www.shipshapepodcast.co.uk/

   Takeaways:

   • When you're stuck for podcast ideas, sometimes it's easier to think about what not to discuss.
   • Finding inspiration for episodes can come from anywhere, even from the most mundane situations.
   • Engaging with your audience directly can help generate content ideas that resonate with them.
   • Using tools like feed readers can streamline how you gather information and find inspiration for your show.
   • Podcasts often draw content from current events, books, or personal experiences that resonate with the audience.
   • The key to successful podcasting is staying curious and always looking for new perspectives and stories.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thepharmacistsvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • shipshapepodcast.co.uk
   • basedonatruestorypodcast.com
   • inoreader.com
   • feedly.com
   • Notejoy (affiliate link)
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>28b92c61-f867-467d-b6a3-ba06f87afb66Mon, 28 Apr 2025 00:00:00 -040035:00falsefull981981Data-Driven Podcast GrowthData is like your podcasting superpower, folks! If you want to grow your show, you gotta get your hands on the right stats. Seriously, knowing what’s working and what’s not can save you from wasting your time. We dive into the nitty-gritty of how to collect and use data from places like Apple and Spotify to figure out your audience and their habits. Don’t worry, we’ll also have a laugh or two about how confusing all this can be, because who doesn’t love a good irony sandwich? So, buckle up, and let’s turn those numbers into something that actually helps your podcast shine!

   Data Sources:

   podcastsconnect.apple.com

   You can see how many Apple followers you have, and how far they are listening (and compare episodes to median and best numbers.

   podcasters.spotify.com

   You can see how many Spotify followers you have as well as demographic data of your audience. You can also see how far people listen. You can also see how often your show was shown, and how that lead to people listening.

   podcasters.amazon.com

   You can see how many people on Amazon Music are following you, how many downloads you get and how far people listen

   Your Media Host

   This could be Captivate, Buzzsprout, Blubrry, Transistor, Libsyn, etc (I do not recommend Spotify). Here you can see how many downloads you get per episode, and see the location of your audience.

   Google Analytics

   Here you can see the top pages of your website, among many other things. You can find it at analytics.google.com

   YouTube

   YouTube statistics are impressive and show you an insane amount of detail. The stat I look at is how far people watch. Keep in mind a video on a YouTube short is anything above zero

   Audience Survey

   When in doub,t ASK YOUR AUDIENCE. This is the #1 way to get direct feedback from your audience. Check out the book, "The Audience in Listening" by Tom Webster, regarding creating a survey (or use the one built into Podpage).

   Takeaways:

   • Data is your podcasting superpower; it helps you know what's working and what's not.
   • If you're seeking sponsors, understanding your audience demographics is absolutely essential.
   • Start with the end in mind; knowing your goals helps you get the right data.
   • Don't just hope for feedback; ask your audience directly with surveys for better insights.
   • Using platforms like Google Analytics can reveal hidden gems about your podcast's online performance.
   • Remember, marketing your podcast is as essential as creating it; be strategic about your approach.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • Episode 896 on UTMs
   • Book - The Mom Test: How to talk to customers & learn if your business is a good idea when everyone is lying to you
   • Book The Audience is Listening by Tom Webster
   • podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • podcasters.spotify.com
   • podcasters.amazon.com
   • analytics.google.com
   • Google Webmaster Dashboard
   • School of Podcasting
   • Google UTM Creator - Video
   
   

   DISCLAIMER: All opinions are mine. Some links are affiliate links, meaning that if you buy something through a qualifying link, we may earn a small commission at no additional cost to you. As Amazon Associates, we earn from qualifying purchases.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>Data is like your podcasting superpower, folks! If you want to grow your show, you gotta get your hands on the right stats. Seriously, knowing what’s working and what’s not can save you from wasting your time. We dive into the nitty-gritty of how to collect and use data from places like Apple and Spotify to figure out your audience and their habits. Don’t worry, we’ll also have a laugh or two about how confusing all this can be, because who doesn’t love a good irony sandwich? So, buckle up, and let’s turn those numbers into something that actually helps your podcast shine!

   Data Sources:

   podcastsconnect.apple.com

   You can see how many Apple followers you have, and how far they are listening (and compare episodes to median and best numbers.

   podcasters.spotify.com

   You can see how many Spotify followers you have as well as demographic data of your audience. You can also see how far people listen. You can also see how often your show was shown, and how that lead to people listening.

   podcasters.amazon.com

   You can see how many people on Amazon Music are following you, how many downloads you get and how far people listen

   Your Media Host

   This could be Captivate, Buzzsprout, Blubrry, Transistor, Libsyn, etc (I do not recommend Spotify). Here you can see how many downloads you get per episode, and see the location of your audience.

   Google Analytics

   Here you can see the top pages of your website, among many other things. You can find it at analytics.google.com

   YouTube

   YouTube statistics are impressive and show you an insane amount of detail. The stat I look at is how far people watch. Keep in mind a video on a YouTube short is anything above zero

   Audience Survey

   When in doub,t ASK YOUR AUDIENCE. This is the #1 way to get direct feedback from your audience. Check out the book, "The Audience in Listening" by Tom Webster, regarding creating a survey (or use the one built into Podpage).

   Takeaways:

   • Data is your podcasting superpower; it helps you know what's working and what's not.
   • If you're seeking sponsors, understanding your audience demographics is absolutely essential.
   • Start with the end in mind; knowing your goals helps you get the right data.
   • Don't just hope for feedback; ask your audience directly with surveys for better insights.
   • Using platforms like Google Analytics can reveal hidden gems about your podcast's online performance.
   • Remember, marketing your podcast is as essential as creating it; be strategic about your approach.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • Episode 896 on UTMs
   • Book - The Mom Test: How to talk to customers & learn if your business is a good idea when everyone is lying to you
   • Book The Audience is Listening by Tom Webster
   • podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • podcasters.spotify.com
   • podcasters.amazon.com
   • analytics.google.com
   • Google Webmaster Dashboard
   • School of Podcasting
   • Google UTM Creator - Video
   
   

   DISCLAIMER: All opinions are mine. Some links are affiliate links, meaning that if you buy something through a qualifying link, we may earn a small commission at no additional cost to you. As Amazon Associates, we earn from qualifying purchases.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>5fc8897e-cd9f-4a49-ab04-e1cd90853181Mon, 21 Apr 2025 00:00:00 -040050:02falsefull980980Should My Podcast Be On YouTube: Facts to HelpSo, let’s dive into the wild world of podcasts on YouTube, shall we? This episode is all about the big question: should your podcast even be on YouTube? Spoiler alert: I don’t have a definitive answer, but I’m armed with some juicy facts to help you figure it out. I tackle the age-old debate between audio and video, and you'll learn that while YouTube has a gigantic audience, audio podcasts have a much better chance of getting discovered. I mean, who wouldn’t want 564 listeners to hunt down their content instead of just 38 viewers? So, grab your favorite snack, kick back, and let’s get into the absurdity of the podcasting landscape—because why not?

   Clarify This Discussion

   We are talking about put video (actual video not a static image).

   For this discussion, a podcast is audio (even though it can be video).

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasts on YouTube? Yeah, it's a thing, but don't kid yourself into thinking it's the only way.
   • The audio side of podcasting has way more potential listeners than video. Like, a LOT more.
   • If you want to grow your podcast, focus on audio first—it's cheaper and has less competition.
   • Joe Rogan and Mr. Beast didn't just pop up overnight; they hustled for years before their success.
   • Most folks prefer to listen rather than watch, so give the people what they want—audio content!
   • YouTube's algorithm can help, but if you want real connections, audio is where it's at.
   • If you have the time, budget and desire - by all means BE ON YouTube!
   
   

   Mentioned

   How to Podcast Like Joe Rogan video.

   Samson Q2u Microphone

   Audio Tecnica ATR2100 USB Mic

   Zoom Podtrac P4

   Sonzy ZV-E10 II DSLR Camera

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>So, let’s dive into the wild world of podcasts on YouTube, shall we? This episode is all about the big question: should your podcast even be on YouTube? Spoiler alert: I don’t have a definitive answer, but I’m armed with some juicy facts to help you figure it out. I tackle the age-old debate between audio and video, and you'll learn that while YouTube has a gigantic audience, audio podcasts have a much better chance of getting discovered. I mean, who wouldn’t want 564 listeners to hunt down their content instead of just 38 viewers? So, grab your favorite snack, kick back, and let’s get into the absurdity of the podcasting landscape—because why not?

   Clarify This Discussion

   We are talking about put video (actual video not a static image).

   For this discussion, a podcast is audio (even though it can be video).

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasts on YouTube? Yeah, it's a thing, but don't kid yourself into thinking it's the only way.
   • The audio side of podcasting has way more potential listeners than video. Like, a LOT more.
   • If you want to grow your podcast, focus on audio first—it's cheaper and has less competition.
   • Joe Rogan and Mr. Beast didn't just pop up overnight; they hustled for years before their success.
   • Most folks prefer to listen rather than watch, so give the people what they want—audio content!
   • YouTube's algorithm can help, but if you want real connections, audio is where it's at.
   • If you have the time, budget and desire - by all means BE ON YouTube!
   
   

   Mentioned

   How to Podcast Like Joe Rogan video.

   Samson Q2u Microphone

   Audio Tecnica ATR2100 USB Mic

   Zoom Podtrac P4

   Sonzy ZV-E10 II DSLR Camera

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>285d5268-2c3a-4573-8da3-2529319a197fMon, 14 Apr 2025 00:00:00 -040042:29falsefull979979What AI Tools are Podcasters Using?Are you using AI? Or better yet, which AI tool are you using? That's the big question we’re tackling today! We listen to fellow podcasters to find out about their favorite tools and whether they save time or make things messier.

   Spoiler alert: Sometimes, it feels like we’re just swapping one headache for another! Plus, I just got back from Podcast Movement Evolutions, so get ready for some juicy insights.

   Participants:

   • Craig from aigostocollege.com and livewellandflourish.com
   • Ethan from dailysportshistory.com
   • Ralph from askralph.com
   • Kim from thepharmacistvoice.com and perrysburgpodcast.com
   • Tim from createartpodcast.com and findapodcastabout.xyz
   • York from welcometoearthstories.com
   • Dave from schoolofpodcasting.com
   
   

   Ai Tools for Podcasters

   Otter AI

   Elevenlabs

   Magai

   Poe

   Perplexity

   Claud

   Captive (Media Host)

   Descript

   Notebook LM

   Resound.ai

   ChatGPT

   Vista Social

   Also Mentioned

   • podcastpartnership.com
   • Castahead Media
   • Follow the show
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • I learned at Podcast Movement that most podcasters now use AI tools to boost productivity.
   • The real question is, which AI tools are actually helping us, and are they worth it?
   • Ethan from Daily Sports History uses AI to ease his writing process and save time.
   • Ralph from Ask Ralph uses AI daily to generate content for his podcast and streamline his workflow.
   • Each podcaster has unique AI tools, like Lex, Perplexity, and Descript, that help them create better content.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>Are you using AI? Or better yet, which AI tool are you using? That's the big question we’re tackling today! We listen to fellow podcasters to find out about their favorite tools and whether they save time or make things messier.

   Spoiler alert: Sometimes, it feels like we’re just swapping one headache for another! Plus, I just got back from Podcast Movement Evolutions, so get ready for some juicy insights.

   Participants:

   • Craig from aigostocollege.com and livewellandflourish.com
   • Ethan from dailysportshistory.com
   • Ralph from askralph.com
   • Kim from thepharmacistvoice.com and perrysburgpodcast.com
   • Tim from createartpodcast.com and findapodcastabout.xyz
   • York from welcometoearthstories.com
   • Dave from schoolofpodcasting.com
   
   

   Ai Tools for Podcasters

   Otter AI

   Elevenlabs

   Magai

   Poe

   Perplexity

   Claud

   Captive (Media Host)

   Descript

   Notebook LM

   Resound.ai

   ChatGPT

   Vista Social

   Also Mentioned

   • podcastpartnership.com
   • Castahead Media
   • Follow the show
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • I learned at Podcast Movement that most podcasters now use AI tools to boost productivity.
   • The real question is, which AI tools are actually helping us, and are they worth it?
   • Ethan from Daily Sports History uses AI to ease his writing process and save time.
   • Ralph from Ask Ralph uses AI daily to generate content for his podcast and streamline his workflow.
   • Each podcaster has unique AI tools, like Lex, Perplexity, and Descript, that help them create better content.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>0697606d-0c29-443e-9925-fa2aad28bb8eMon, 07 Apr 2025 00:00:00 -040041:35falsefull978978From Model Trains to Money: Monetizing Your Passion PodcastYou can totally monetize a podcast even if your audience is smaller and niche. It's like having a tiny but super passionate fan club instead of a massive crowd that’s half-asleep. Today, we’re chatting with Ray Arnett from aroundthelayout.com, who lives, eats, and breathes the world of model railroads. He’s got some wild ideas about partnerships that don’t rely on the usual sponsor route, and trust me, it’s more interesting than it sounds.

   Monetizing a Smaller Audience

   Think making money off a podcast is just for the big shots? Well, let's pop that bubble! This episode digs into how even those tucked away in the tiniest of niches can make some cash. If you're a model train enthusiast with a handful of loyal listeners, you’re in for a treat.

   Ray Arnott Shares All the Lessons

   Ray's not just talking numbers; he’s all about engagement and connections, proving that sometimes having a smaller audience means having a more dedicated one. Forget about chasing those elusive sponsorship deals; Ray's got a different game plan. He shares how forming partnerships with like-minded businesses has been the real money-maker for him. So grab your conductor's hat and hop on board as we explore the wild world of niche podcast monetization. Get ready to learn that with the right approach, even a handful of listeners can lead to big bucks!

   Takeaways:

   • Monetizing a podcast isn't just for the big names; even small niche audiences can cash in.
   • Engaged listeners are worth their weight in gold, no matter the size of your audience.
   • Finding the right marketing partners who share your vision can be a game changer.
   • Creating a community in your niche can lead to unexpected sponsorship opportunities.
   • Never take your community for granted.
   • It's not about having a large audience; it's about having the RIGHT audience.
   • Underserved communities need a safe place to connect with like-minded people.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • aroundthelayout.com
   • Heartbeat Community Tool
   • Redirect.Pizza (aff)
   • Cancer and Comedy Podcast
   • School of Podcasting Affiliate Program
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>You can totally monetize a podcast even if your audience is smaller and niche. It's like having a tiny but super passionate fan club instead of a massive crowd that’s half-asleep. Today, we’re chatting with Ray Arnett from aroundthelayout.com, who lives, eats, and breathes the world of model railroads. He’s got some wild ideas about partnerships that don’t rely on the usual sponsor route, and trust me, it’s more interesting than it sounds.

   Monetizing a Smaller Audience

   Think making money off a podcast is just for the big shots? Well, let's pop that bubble! This episode digs into how even those tucked away in the tiniest of niches can make some cash. If you're a model train enthusiast with a handful of loyal listeners, you’re in for a treat.

   Ray Arnott Shares All the Lessons

   Ray's not just talking numbers; he’s all about engagement and connections, proving that sometimes having a smaller audience means having a more dedicated one. Forget about chasing those elusive sponsorship deals; Ray's got a different game plan. He shares how forming partnerships with like-minded businesses has been the real money-maker for him. So grab your conductor's hat and hop on board as we explore the wild world of niche podcast monetization. Get ready to learn that with the right approach, even a handful of listeners can lead to big bucks!

   Takeaways:

   • Monetizing a podcast isn't just for the big names; even small niche audiences can cash in.
   • Engaged listeners are worth their weight in gold, no matter the size of your audience.
   • Finding the right marketing partners who share your vision can be a game changer.
   • Creating a community in your niche can lead to unexpected sponsorship opportunities.
   • Never take your community for granted.
   • It's not about having a large audience; it's about having the RIGHT audience.
   • Underserved communities need a safe place to connect with like-minded people.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • aroundthelayout.com
   • Heartbeat Community Tool
   • Redirect.Pizza (aff)
   • Cancer and Comedy Podcast
   • School of Podcasting Affiliate Program
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>5b254173-8d53-41a1-ba63-fde0eec0e28fMon, 31 Mar 2025 00:00:00 -040047:37falsefull977977Unlocking Podcast Growth: The Power of Partnerships with Stephanie ThompsonToday, we’re exploring the world of partnerships versus sponsorships with the fabulous Stephanie Thompson. The key takeaway? Partnerships are better at growing your show. Forget just pocketing cash for a shout-out; we’re talking about meaningful connections that can actually grow your audience.

   Stephanie explains how she snagged partners before she even had a following—zero downloads, folks! So, if you’ve been thinking about how to take your podcast game to the next level, this chat is for you. Grab your earphones and get ready to learn how to team up with brands that vibe with your message!

   Want Another Story of Someone Who Got a Sponsor Before Launching?

   Check out The Riches are in the Niches With Harry Duran episode 767

   Takeaways:

   • Partnerships are more about shared goals and values compared to one-off sponsorships.
   • Monetization through partnerships can grow your audience, not just your pocketbook.
   • It's all about the fit; the right audience and brand alignment are crucial for success.
   • Don't promote brands you don't believe in; integrity is key in partnerships.
   • Transparency with analytics and feedback helps maintain healthy brand relationships.
   • Educate your partners about your audience to foster better collaboration and understanding.
   • Stephanie did a "trial run" on her courses - BEFORE she launched.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • podcastexpertlab.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • profitfromyourpodcast.com
   • castahead.net
   • beyondbourbonstreet.com
   • Profit From Your Podcast Book
   • The Day My Vagina Broke Book
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Podcast Expert Lab

   7-step podcast partnership success: This course pays for itself after just ONE partnership. Imagine getting paid to talk about what you love with brands that align with your audience. Complete this on-demand course at your own pace, using short, bite-sized videos and actionable tasks to boost your podcast growth and income. You don’t need to be famous—you just need the drive to grow and the strategy to earn!

   Podcast Expoert Lab

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Today, we’re exploring the world of partnerships versus sponsorships with the fabulous Stephanie Thompson. The key takeaway? Partnerships are better at growing your show. Forget just pocketing cash for a shout-out; we’re talking about meaningful connections that can actually grow your audience.

   Stephanie explains how she snagged partners before she even had a following—zero downloads, folks! So, if you’ve been thinking about how to take your podcast game to the next level, this chat is for you. Grab your earphones and get ready to learn how to team up with brands that vibe with your message!

   Want Another Story of Someone Who Got a Sponsor Before Launching?

   Check out The Riches are in the Niches With Harry Duran episode 767

   Takeaways:

   • Partnerships are more about shared goals and values compared to one-off sponsorships.
   • Monetization through partnerships can grow your audience, not just your pocketbook.
   • It's all about the fit; the right audience and brand alignment are crucial for success.
   • Don't promote brands you don't believe in; integrity is key in partnerships.
   • Transparency with analytics and feedback helps maintain healthy brand relationships.
   • Educate your partners about your audience to foster better collaboration and understanding.
   • Stephanie did a "trial run" on her courses - BEFORE she launched.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • podcastexpertlab.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • profitfromyourpodcast.com
   • castahead.net
   • beyondbourbonstreet.com
   • Profit From Your Podcast Book
   • The Day My Vagina Broke Book
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   Podcast Expert Lab

   7-step podcast partnership success: This course pays for itself after just ONE partnership. Imagine getting paid to talk about what you love with brands that align with your audience. Complete this on-demand course at your own pace, using short, bite-sized videos and actionable tasks to boost your podcast growth and income. You don’t need to be famous—you just need the drive to grow and the strategy to earn!

   Podcast Expoert Lab

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>afe4ab03-be51-440c-b94c-c929aee20208Mon, 24 Mar 2025 00:00:00 -040049:37falsefull976976Building Authentic Business Relationships Through PodcastingMolly Ruland stops by to explain how she started a branded podcast that brought in so many clients from season one that she had to pause it. For Molly, it is all about starting and building relationships with her guests.

   By conducting targeted outreach, she added 500 marketing people to her LinkedIn network, improving the relevance of her feed.

   When it comes to SEO, AI is interesting, but she advises against using "podcast lingo" and emojis in podcast show notes and metadata. Instead, she recommends focusing on using relevant keywords. We should be advising AI to use relevant keywords in our descriptions and have it use the AIDA approach.

   Takeaways:

   • Molly Ruland emphasizes that authentic podcasting is about being yourself and not just a sales pitch.
   • Building relationships through your podcast can lead to business opportunities without being pushy about it.
   • SEO isn't just a buzzword; optimizing your podcast content can help increase its visibility and attract the right audience.
   • Don't just focus on the numbers; create meaningful connections with your guests and audience.
   
   

   Because of My Podcast: Ralph Estep Jr

   Ralph has been an accountant for 30 years. Because of his podcast, Intuit approached him to share and teach about the experience of moving from local copies of their software (Quickbooks and others) to the web-based version.

   Check out Ralph's show at www.askralphpodcast.com

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • askralphpodcast.com
   • heartcastmedia.com
   • Camp Content Show
   • Tom Petty and Axl Rose
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Molly Ruland stops by to explain how she started a branded podcast that brought in so many clients from season one that she had to pause it. For Molly, it is all about starting and building relationships with her guests.

   By conducting targeted outreach, she added 500 marketing people to her LinkedIn network, improving the relevance of her feed.

   When it comes to SEO, AI is interesting, but she advises against using "podcast lingo" and emojis in podcast show notes and metadata. Instead, she recommends focusing on using relevant keywords. We should be advising AI to use relevant keywords in our descriptions and have it use the AIDA approach.

   Takeaways:

   • Molly Ruland emphasizes that authentic podcasting is about being yourself and not just a sales pitch.
   • Building relationships through your podcast can lead to business opportunities without being pushy about it.
   • SEO isn't just a buzzword; optimizing your podcast content can help increase its visibility and attract the right audience.
   • Don't just focus on the numbers; create meaningful connections with your guests and audience.
   
   

   Because of My Podcast: Ralph Estep Jr

   Ralph has been an accountant for 30 years. Because of his podcast, Intuit approached him to share and teach about the experience of moving from local copies of their software (Quickbooks and others) to the web-based version.

   Check out Ralph's show at www.askralphpodcast.com

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • askralphpodcast.com
   • heartcastmedia.com
   • Camp Content Show
   • Tom Petty and Axl Rose
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>7fd0035c-6492-49f1-b72b-68889bc8bb7aMon, 17 Mar 2025 00:00:00 -040043:51falsefull975975Newsletters Part 2: How to Start a Newsletter Without Losing Your Mind with Paul GowderAfter a lot of feedback on the first episode about podcast newsletters, I wanted to answer more questions, and this time I brought Paul Gowder to help.

   We’ll discuss what tools to use and what content to include. If you really want to skip this whole newsletter thing, we've got some backup plans for you, too. Paul not only has wisdom about newsletters, but we also talk about building his community.

   Spoiler alert: You might even want to ditch social media for this! Buckle up, because we’re about to make your newsletter dreams a reality.

   Takeaways:

   • Start building your podcast newsletter today; it's like planting a seed for growth.
   • Don't overthink content; even simple updates can keep your audience engaged and informed.
   • Use email as a direct line to your audience; it's way better than shouting into the social media void.
   • If you're not asking for emails, you're missing out—it's like having a party and not inviting anyone.
   • Be cautious with Facebook. They may delete your group with 85,000 people in it.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • paulgouder.com
   • Paul's Free Strategies
   • paulgowder.com/emailtools
   • Paul's Email Jump Start
   • What to expect at your first Powow.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/972 - Part 1 about Newsletters
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/974 - This episode
   • Jef Sieh's Social Media News Live Podcast
   
   

   Tools Mentioned:

   • Sustack
   • Sendfox
   • Mailerlite
   • Kit
   • Newsletter Database
   • Liz Wilcox Templates
   • Group Leads for gathering emails from Facebook Groups.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>After a lot of feedback on the first episode about podcast newsletters, I wanted to answer more questions, and this time I brought Paul Gowder to help.

   We’ll discuss what tools to use and what content to include. If you really want to skip this whole newsletter thing, we've got some backup plans for you, too. Paul not only has wisdom about newsletters, but we also talk about building his community.

   Spoiler alert: You might even want to ditch social media for this! Buckle up, because we’re about to make your newsletter dreams a reality.

   Takeaways:

   • Start building your podcast newsletter today; it's like planting a seed for growth.
   • Don't overthink content; even simple updates can keep your audience engaged and informed.
   • Use email as a direct line to your audience; it's way better than shouting into the social media void.
   • If you're not asking for emails, you're missing out—it's like having a party and not inviting anyone.
   • Be cautious with Facebook. They may delete your group with 85,000 people in it.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • paulgouder.com
   • Paul's Free Strategies
   • paulgowder.com/emailtools
   • Paul's Email Jump Start
   • What to expect at your first Powow.
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/972 - Part 1 about Newsletters
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/974 - This episode
   • Jef Sieh's Social Media News Live Podcast
   
   

   Tools Mentioned:

   • Sustack
   • Sendfox
   • Mailerlite
   • Kit
   • Newsletter Database
   • Liz Wilcox Templates
   • Group Leads for gathering emails from Facebook Groups.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

   If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>c127cd80-83fd-4e54-a2f0-2718126c9a17Mon, 10 Mar 2025 00:05:00 -040056:08falsefull974974Podcasting Gone Wrong: The Ultimate Pet Peeves List!I ask my audience what their top pet peeves are just drive them nuts. We're spilling the beans on all the annoying things that make us want to tear our hair out while listening. We've got it all covered from podcasters who take forever to get to the good stuff to the dreaded mid-sentence ads that pop up like uninvited guests at a party. We also chat about the classic blunders that drive listeners nuts, like out-of-context clips and those cringe-worthy audio issues. So, grab your headphones and get ready to laugh and commiserate as we call out all the podcasting faux pas that need to be put to rest!

   Thanks to the Participants in This Episode

   Steve Stewart from SteveStewart.me and the Podcast Editor Academy

   Kim Newlove from the Pharmacist's Voice and the Perrysburg Podcast

   Mark Lawley from the Practical Prepping show.

   Todd the Gator from the Guardian Downcast show.

   Zo Richardson from the Back Look Cinema show.

   York from Welcome to Earth Stories Show.

   Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting.

   Niel's GoFundMe Page and his Documentary The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasters need to stop dragging out the intro and just get to the point already.
   • Volume fluctuations between hosts and guests are a major annoyance that can ruin a podcast.
   • Out-of-context clips at the start of a podcast are confusing and just plain unnecessary.
   • Too many commercials can turn a great podcast into a frustrating experience for listeners.
   • Not including show notes wastes listeners' time and makes it hard to follow up on interesting topics. Don't tell me a book and then not put the link.
   • Bad audio quality is the ultimate deal-breaker that makes me want to hit stop immediately.
   
   

   Additional Links referenced in this episode:

   • Podpage - a great tool to make amazing websites for podcasters.
   • Captivate media host (with some very cool tools built-in)
   • YouTube Billion Views
   • The Meidas Touch, which produces 15 episodes A DAY has "De-Throwned (?)" Joe Rogan.
   • Niel Guilarte go fund me page.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>I ask my audience what their top pet peeves are just drive them nuts. We're spilling the beans on all the annoying things that make us want to tear our hair out while listening. We've got it all covered from podcasters who take forever to get to the good stuff to the dreaded mid-sentence ads that pop up like uninvited guests at a party. We also chat about the classic blunders that drive listeners nuts, like out-of-context clips and those cringe-worthy audio issues. So, grab your headphones and get ready to laugh and commiserate as we call out all the podcasting faux pas that need to be put to rest!

   Thanks to the Participants in This Episode

   Steve Stewart from SteveStewart.me and the Podcast Editor Academy

   Kim Newlove from the Pharmacist's Voice and the Perrysburg Podcast

   Mark Lawley from the Practical Prepping show.

   Todd the Gator from the Guardian Downcast show.

   Zo Richardson from the Back Look Cinema show.

   York from Welcome to Earth Stories Show.

   Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting.

   Niel's GoFundMe Page and his Documentary The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

   Takeaways:

   • Podcasters need to stop dragging out the intro and just get to the point already.
   • Volume fluctuations between hosts and guests are a major annoyance that can ruin a podcast.
   • Out-of-context clips at the start of a podcast are confusing and just plain unnecessary.
   • Too many commercials can turn a great podcast into a frustrating experience for listeners.
   • Not including show notes wastes listeners' time and makes it hard to follow up on interesting topics. Don't tell me a book and then not put the link.
   • Bad audio quality is the ultimate deal-breaker that makes me want to hit stop immediately.
   
   

   Additional Links referenced in this episode:

   • Podpage - a great tool to make amazing websites for podcasters.
   • Captivate media host (with some very cool tools built-in)
   • YouTube Billion Views
   • The Meidas Touch, which produces 15 episodes A DAY has "De-Throwned (?)" Joe Rogan.
   • Niel Guilarte go fund me page.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>e6700718-7106-44b6-8a9d-3d5319643b92Mon, 03 Mar 2025 00:00:00 -040045:29falsefull973973Want More Downloads? Ditch Social Media for Newsletters!Forget social media; if you want to drive traffic, newsletters are where it’s at. Seriously, I’ve been crunching the numbers and guess what? My newsletter is pulling in way more visitors than my half-hearted attempts at tweeting or posting on Facebook. Yeah, shocking, I know.

   It’s like trying to catch a fish with a toothpick when you could just use a net, right? So, in this episode, we’ll look at why newsletters are the real MVPs of traffic generation, sharing some juicy stats and personal tales that’ll have you reconsidering your social media obsession. Buckle up, because we’re about to turn your traffic woes into wows!

   I also share some behind the scenes of a future episode.

   Takeaways:

   • A newsletter is like a Swiss Army knife for driving traffic; social media is just a flimsy butter knife.
   • Crazy thought: newsletters give you more bang for your buck than social media ever will, who knew?!
   • Social media might be fun for scrolling, but newsletters actually get people to click and engage.
   • Turns out, people prefer their marketing via email rather than social media, shocking right?
   • If you're still chasing social media likes, maybe it's time to rethink your strategy and join the newsletter revolution.
   • Newsletters allow for better audience segmentation, making it easier to deliver personalized content that actually resonates.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   School of Podcasting

   schoolofpodcasting.com

   Audience Survey

   schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25

   SOP Episode on UTM

   schoolofpodcasting.com/896

   Dave's Newsletter

   podcastingobservations.com

   schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

   schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

   Gary Arndt Everything Every Daily

   https://everything-everywhere.com/

   Gary Interviewed on the School of Podcasting

   https://schoolofpodcasting.com/how-gary-arndt-adopted-the-audience-growth-strategy-from-the-movie-industry/

   Podnews Report Card

   podnews.net/report-card

   Leave Dave a Review

   schoolofpodcasting.com/apple

   Captivate Media Hosting No Payments 'Till April

   supportthishow.com/captivate

   Podcast Marketing Trends Survey (Please Fill Out)

   https://podcastmarketingacademy.typeform.com/to/DR7WmJbF

   Paul Gowder Email Tips

   https://www.paulgowder.com/

   Liz Wilcox Email Templates

   https://lizwilcox.com/

   Jab, Jab, Jab, Right Hook Book From Gary V.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>Forget social media; if you want to drive traffic, newsletters are where it’s at. Seriously, I’ve been crunching the numbers and guess what? My newsletter is pulling in way more visitors than my half-hearted attempts at tweeting or posting on Facebook. Yeah, shocking, I know.

   It’s like trying to catch a fish with a toothpick when you could just use a net, right? So, in this episode, we’ll look at why newsletters are the real MVPs of traffic generation, sharing some juicy stats and personal tales that’ll have you reconsidering your social media obsession. Buckle up, because we’re about to turn your traffic woes into wows!

   I also share some behind the scenes of a future episode.

   Takeaways:

   • A newsletter is like a Swiss Army knife for driving traffic; social media is just a flimsy butter knife.
   • Crazy thought: newsletters give you more bang for your buck than social media ever will, who knew?!
   • Social media might be fun for scrolling, but newsletters actually get people to click and engage.
   • Turns out, people prefer their marketing via email rather than social media, shocking right?
   • If you're still chasing social media likes, maybe it's time to rethink your strategy and join the newsletter revolution.
   • Newsletters allow for better audience segmentation, making it easier to deliver personalized content that actually resonates.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   School of Podcasting

   schoolofpodcasting.com

   Audience Survey

   schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25

   SOP Episode on UTM

   schoolofpodcasting.com/896

   Dave's Newsletter

   podcastingobservations.com

   schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

   schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

   Gary Arndt Everything Every Daily

   https://everything-everywhere.com/

   Gary Interviewed on the School of Podcasting

   https://schoolofpodcasting.com/how-gary-arndt-adopted-the-audience-growth-strategy-from-the-movie-industry/

   Podnews Report Card

   podnews.net/report-card

   Leave Dave a Review

   schoolofpodcasting.com/apple

   Captivate Media Hosting No Payments 'Till April

   supportthishow.com/captivate

   Podcast Marketing Trends Survey (Please Fill Out)

   https://podcastmarketingacademy.typeform.com/to/DR7WmJbF

   Paul Gowder Email Tips

   https://www.paulgowder.com/

   Liz Wilcox Email Templates

   https://lizwilcox.com/

   Jab, Jab, Jab, Right Hook Book From Gary V.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>2068f032-df23-4c1c-9c43-52d412838251Mon, 24 Feb 2025 00:00:00 -040058:51falsefull972972Why SNL’s 50th Is a Goldmine of Podcasting Wisdom!We're diving into the wild world of podcasting and pulling some juicy lessons from the legendary Saturday Night Live as it hits the big 5-0. Seriously, SNL didn’t just survive; it thrived, and we’re here to steal some of that magic for our own shows. From knowing your audience to embracing the weirdness, there’s a treasure trove of insights that can help us all level up our podcasting game. Forget about being boring—SNL took risks, and guess what? It paid off! So, buckle up and get ready to channel your inner SNL spirit, because we’re about to get creative and maybe a little absurd.

   Takeaways:

   • SNL stands the test of time, and so should your podcast; don’t be boring!
   • Know your audience, but also create content you want to see; it's a balance!
   • Embrace weirdness in your podcast; it keeps things fresh and fun for everyone!
   • Experimentation is key; SNL’s success came from trying new things, so should you!
   • If you get bored, so will your listeners; keep it exciting or risk losing them!
   • Word of mouth matters; promote your podcast like SNL promotes its guests!
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>We're diving into the wild world of podcasting and pulling some juicy lessons from the legendary Saturday Night Live as it hits the big 5-0. Seriously, SNL didn’t just survive; it thrived, and we’re here to steal some of that magic for our own shows. From knowing your audience to embracing the weirdness, there’s a treasure trove of insights that can help us all level up our podcasting game. Forget about being boring—SNL took risks, and guess what? It paid off! So, buckle up and get ready to channel your inner SNL spirit, because we’re about to get creative and maybe a little absurd.

   Takeaways:

   • SNL stands the test of time, and so should your podcast; don’t be boring!
   • Know your audience, but also create content you want to see; it's a balance!
   • Embrace weirdness in your podcast; it keeps things fresh and fun for everyone!
   • Experimentation is key; SNL’s success came from trying new things, so should you!
   • If you get bored, so will your listeners; keep it exciting or risk losing them!
   • Word of mouth matters; promote your podcast like SNL promotes its guests!
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>c83927fb-69f4-4b2d-a62f-d9552d6153d6Mon, 17 Feb 2025 00:00:00 -040049:17falsefull971971Who Knew Podcasting Could Lead to THIS? 20 Years of Gamertag Radio with Danny PeñaDanny Pena is back on the mic, and let me tell you, he’s got stories that’ll make you believe in the power of podcasting. After 20 years of grinding with Gamertag Radio, Danny shares all the wild opportunities that have come his way, and trust me, it's not just luck; it's hustle. Danny DOES THE WORK.

   From interviewing gaming legends to landing a gig at the New York Stock Exchange, Danny shows us that if you know your audience and stay true to yourself, the sky's the limit. We dig into how he built connections that led to his success, proving that networking isn’t just a buzzword—it’s the real deal. So grab your headphones and get ready to be inspired—this is one ride you don’t want to miss!

   Takeaways:

   • Danny Pena has been podcasting for 20 years, proving that persistence pays off.
   • Building relationships through podcasting can lead to incredible opportunities and experiences.
   • Getting to know your audience is key to creating content they love and respond to.
   • Danny's success shows that focusing on impact rather than just numbers can lead to growth.
   • Networking in person is crucial; nothing beats face-to-face connections for opportunities.
   • Opportunities arise from being genuine and building a solid reputation in your field.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com - use the coupon listener
   • gamertagradio.com
   • https://www.dannyandriana.com/ <<Danny and Riana's Consulting Company
   • Danny Peña: Keep it Fun and Master Your Craft -EP827
   • Danny Peña Is On a Mission For Additional Listeners - EP633
   • Commitment to Community: How Danny Peña Grew His Podcast Audience - RP506
   • The Danny and Riana Show
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Danny Pena is back on the mic, and let me tell you, he’s got stories that’ll make you believe in the power of podcasting. After 20 years of grinding with Gamertag Radio, Danny shares all the wild opportunities that have come his way, and trust me, it's not just luck; it's hustle. Danny DOES THE WORK.

   From interviewing gaming legends to landing a gig at the New York Stock Exchange, Danny shows us that if you know your audience and stay true to yourself, the sky's the limit. We dig into how he built connections that led to his success, proving that networking isn’t just a buzzword—it’s the real deal. So grab your headphones and get ready to be inspired—this is one ride you don’t want to miss!

   Takeaways:

   • Danny Pena has been podcasting for 20 years, proving that persistence pays off.
   • Building relationships through podcasting can lead to incredible opportunities and experiences.
   • Getting to know your audience is key to creating content they love and respond to.
   • Danny's success shows that focusing on impact rather than just numbers can lead to growth.
   • Networking in person is crucial; nothing beats face-to-face connections for opportunities.
   • Opportunities arise from being genuine and building a solid reputation in your field.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com - use the coupon listener
   • gamertagradio.com
   • https://www.dannyandriana.com/ <<Danny and Riana's Consulting Company
   • Danny Peña: Keep it Fun and Master Your Craft -EP827
   • Danny Peña Is On a Mission For Additional Listeners - EP633
   • Commitment to Community: How Danny Peña Grew His Podcast Audience - RP506
   • The Danny and Riana Show
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>61ff2f0a-fc43-41f3-a44d-b8c350417a11Mon, 10 Feb 2025 00:00:00 -040053:52falsefull970970The Secret to High-Quality ContentYouTube just dropped a report on what makes content good, and spoiler alert: it’s not just about looking pretty. Turns out, folks care way more about what’s being said than how fancy the background is. If you want to create stuff that really resonates, whether it's on YouTube or just in audio, you gotta aim for emotional connection. You know, the kind that makes you laugh, cry, or think, not just scroll mindlessly. So, if you’re ready to step up your content game and stop stressing over that bowl of cereal in the background, stick around!

   YouTube just dropped a bombshell report on what makes content tick, and honestly, it's a game-changer for all of us trying to create stuff that doesn't suck. So, I dove deep into this thing, and guess what? Turns out, whether you're slinging videos or just talking into a microphone like yours truly, the core principles of good content are pretty much the same. They say good content should make you laugh, cry, or at least think a little—basically, it needs to resonate. And if you're worried about your background lighting or if your hair is on point, spoiler alert: it doesn't matter as much as you think. We're talking about a study that found less than 1% of viewers care about visuals, and really, if your audio is clear and your video isn't shot in a black hole, you're already ahead of the game.

   But let's dive into the juicy bits. The report highlighted that emotional engagement is key. If your content doesn't hit people in the feels, you're just another background noise in their lives. And I get it; we all want to be relatable. If viewers can see themselves in your stories, you're golden. Authenticity is the name of the game—be real, be you, and stop trying to copy what everyone else is doing. This isn't a high school talent show where you're just trying to impress the popular kids; it's about creating a connection. So, whether you’re crafting a podcast episode or filming a YouTube video, focus on being genuine and let your unique voice shine through.

   To wrap it up—what I gleaned from this report is that content creation isn't just about looking good or having the fanciest gear. It's about creating something that makes people feel like their time was well spent. And if you can throw in a good story or two, you’re well on your way to winning their hearts (and ears). So roll up your sleeves, get comfy with your mic or camera, and remember: it's all about the content, my friends.

   Takeaways:

   • YouTube's report shows that content is about connecting emotionally, not just visuals.
   • Good content should make people feel something, whether it's laughter or nostalgia.
   • Don't stress about backgrounds or fancy gear; clear audio is what really matters.
   • Being authentic and relatable is key to engaging your audience effectively.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode:

   School of Podcasting

   Coach Builder: How to Turn Your Expertise Into a Profitable Coaching

   School of Podcasting Audience Survey

   Joe Rogan Episode 1

   Jim Harold Paranormal Podcast

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>YouTube just dropped a report on what makes content good, and spoiler alert: it’s not just about looking pretty. Turns out, folks care way more about what’s being said than how fancy the background is. If you want to create stuff that really resonates, whether it's on YouTube or just in audio, you gotta aim for emotional connection. You know, the kind that makes you laugh, cry, or think, not just scroll mindlessly. So, if you’re ready to step up your content game and stop stressing over that bowl of cereal in the background, stick around!

   YouTube just dropped a bombshell report on what makes content tick, and honestly, it's a game-changer for all of us trying to create stuff that doesn't suck. So, I dove deep into this thing, and guess what? Turns out, whether you're slinging videos or just talking into a microphone like yours truly, the core principles of good content are pretty much the same. They say good content should make you laugh, cry, or at least think a little—basically, it needs to resonate. And if you're worried about your background lighting or if your hair is on point, spoiler alert: it doesn't matter as much as you think. We're talking about a study that found less than 1% of viewers care about visuals, and really, if your audio is clear and your video isn't shot in a black hole, you're already ahead of the game.

   But let's dive into the juicy bits. The report highlighted that emotional engagement is key. If your content doesn't hit people in the feels, you're just another background noise in their lives. And I get it; we all want to be relatable. If viewers can see themselves in your stories, you're golden. Authenticity is the name of the game—be real, be you, and stop trying to copy what everyone else is doing. This isn't a high school talent show where you're just trying to impress the popular kids; it's about creating a connection. So, whether you’re crafting a podcast episode or filming a YouTube video, focus on being genuine and let your unique voice shine through.

   To wrap it up—what I gleaned from this report is that content creation isn't just about looking good or having the fanciest gear. It's about creating something that makes people feel like their time was well spent. And if you can throw in a good story or two, you’re well on your way to winning their hearts (and ears). So roll up your sleeves, get comfy with your mic or camera, and remember: it's all about the content, my friends.

   Takeaways:

   • YouTube's report shows that content is about connecting emotionally, not just visuals.
   • Good content should make people feel something, whether it's laughter or nostalgia.
   • Don't stress about backgrounds or fancy gear; clear audio is what really matters.
   • Being authentic and relatable is key to engaging your audience effectively.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode:

   School of Podcasting

   Coach Builder: How to Turn Your Expertise Into a Profitable Coaching

   School of Podcasting Audience Survey

   Joe Rogan Episode 1

   Jim Harold Paranormal Podcast

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>9b8daea6-4b15-4aa2-82c4-43a4af3d5986Mon, 03 Feb 2025 00:15:00 -040045:11falsefull969969Keeping it Real is Keeping it Really BoringEvery podcast can benefit from editing because it enhances the listening experience by removing the boring parts and keeping the content engaging. While authenticity is important, it shouldn't come at the cost of listener engagement. Effective editing can transform a good conversation into a great podcast by honing in on valuable content and eliminating distractions. By focusing on who your audience is and what they want to hear, you can make informed decisions on what to keep and what to cut. Ultimately, I encourage podcasters to see editing as a technical task and a creative opportunity to present their best work and respect their listeners' time.

   Takeaways:

   • Editing helps improve the quality of your podcast by removing uninteresting or redundant content.
   • A podcast should be a conversation with the boring parts removed for better engagement.
   • Understanding your audience is crucial for determining what content to keep or cut.
   • Planning your episodes effectively can reduce the time needed for editing later on.
   • It's important to focus on making your podcast a favorite for listeners, not just good enough.
   • Using editing tools wisely can enhance your show's clarity without sacrificing authenticity.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • podcasters.spotify.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>Every podcast can benefit from editing because it enhances the listening experience by removing the boring parts and keeping the content engaging. While authenticity is important, it shouldn't come at the cost of listener engagement. Effective editing can transform a good conversation into a great podcast by honing in on valuable content and eliminating distractions. By focusing on who your audience is and what they want to hear, you can make informed decisions on what to keep and what to cut. Ultimately, I encourage podcasters to see editing as a technical task and a creative opportunity to present their best work and respect their listeners' time.

   Takeaways:

   • Editing helps improve the quality of your podcast by removing uninteresting or redundant content.
   • A podcast should be a conversation with the boring parts removed for better engagement.
   • Understanding your audience is crucial for determining what content to keep or cut.
   • Planning your episodes effectively can reduce the time needed for editing later on.
   • It's important to focus on making your podcast a favorite for listeners, not just good enough.
   • Using editing tools wisely can enhance your show's clarity without sacrificing authenticity.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • podcasters.spotify.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   ]]>0cc5c7ad-e2aa-4235-ac77-b4bc734b3278Mon, 27 Jan 2025 00:00:00 -040049:08falsefull968968Is Podcasting Worth It in 2025? Discover the Secrets to Success!Starting a podcast in 2025 can be a daunting decision, but the real question is whether it’s worth it for you personally. The answer often hinges on your motivations and available time, as podcasting requires commitment and passion.

   I look into the statistics and share insights about the competitive landscape of podcasting versus other platforms like YouTube, illustrating that while the odds can seem slim, the rewards can be substantial if approached with the right mindset.

   I emphasize the importance of focusing on why you're starting your podcast and what you hope to achieve rather than solely chasing fame or financial success. Ultimately, the value of podcasting lies in the enjoyment and connections it fosters, making it a worthwhile endeavor for those who genuinely love the craft.

   Takeaways:

   • Starting a podcast in 2025 can be worthwhile, depending on your personal goals and circumstances.
   • The motivations for starting a podcast should be rooted in passion rather than financial gain.
   • Podcasting leads to building relationships, which can create more opportunities for growth.
   • Evaluating your reasons for podcasting is crucial to determine its worth to you.
   • The competitive landscape for podcasting is much smaller compared to platforms like YouTube.
   • Success in podcasting often depends on consistent effort and the ability to enjoy the process.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode:

   • School of Podcasting
   • AI Goes to College
   • Ask Ralph Podcast
   • Geologic Podcast
   • Old Testament with Mom
   • Interview with Doc G
   • Purpose Code Book
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Starting a podcast in 2025 can be a daunting decision, but the real question is whether it’s worth it for you personally. The answer often hinges on your motivations and available time, as podcasting requires commitment and passion.

   I look into the statistics and share insights about the competitive landscape of podcasting versus other platforms like YouTube, illustrating that while the odds can seem slim, the rewards can be substantial if approached with the right mindset.

   I emphasize the importance of focusing on why you're starting your podcast and what you hope to achieve rather than solely chasing fame or financial success. Ultimately, the value of podcasting lies in the enjoyment and connections it fosters, making it a worthwhile endeavor for those who genuinely love the craft.

   Takeaways:

   • Starting a podcast in 2025 can be worthwhile, depending on your personal goals and circumstances.
   • The motivations for starting a podcast should be rooted in passion rather than financial gain.
   • Podcasting leads to building relationships, which can create more opportunities for growth.
   • Evaluating your reasons for podcasting is crucial to determine its worth to you.
   • The competitive landscape for podcasting is much smaller compared to platforms like YouTube.
   • Success in podcasting often depends on consistent effort and the ability to enjoy the process.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode:

   • School of Podcasting
   • AI Goes to College
   • Ask Ralph Podcast
   • Geologic Podcast
   • Old Testament with Mom
   • Interview with Doc G
   • Purpose Code Book
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>501818c8-c6d3-4f13-8345-380b2eba8aaaMon, 20 Jan 2025 00:00:00 -040024:31falsefull9679678 Tips for a Sustainable PodcastAre you worried about not just starting a podcast, but keeping it going? I dig into essential strategies for sustaining your podcasting journey, emphasizing the importance of knowing your "why." I share personal stories and actionable tips to help you identify your passion and maintain motivation.

   From brainstorming episode ideas to understanding the time commitment, I encourage you to start small and seek feedback. I also discuss the significance of focusing on the aspects of podcasting you love, ensuring the process remains enjoyable and fulfilling.

   Takeaways:

   • Understanding your 'why' is crucial for sustaining your podcast long-term and keeping you motivated.
   • Creating at least 10 episode ideas can help you maintain content flow and avoid burnout.
   • Start simple to avoid overwhelming yourself with complex setups and equipment.
   • Seek feedback from non-family members to ensure your content resonates with your target audience.
   • Recording practice episodes can help you gauge time investment and refine your skills before launching publicly.
   • Remember, not every podcast needs to last forever; it's okay to stop when your message is delivered.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25
   • buzzsprout.com/stats
   • Shure MV7i
   • Shure Move Mic Lavaliers
   • Rode Podmic USB
   • sweetwater.com
   • bhphotovideo.com
   • podpage.com
   • Dealcasters
   • Castahead
   • Babel Language Learning.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Are you worried about not just starting a podcast, but keeping it going? I dig into essential strategies for sustaining your podcasting journey, emphasizing the importance of knowing your "why." I share personal stories and actionable tips to help you identify your passion and maintain motivation.

   From brainstorming episode ideas to understanding the time commitment, I encourage you to start small and seek feedback. I also discuss the significance of focusing on the aspects of podcasting you love, ensuring the process remains enjoyable and fulfilling.

   Takeaways:

   • Understanding your 'why' is crucial for sustaining your podcast long-term and keeping you motivated.
   • Creating at least 10 episode ideas can help you maintain content flow and avoid burnout.
   • Start simple to avoid overwhelming yourself with complex setups and equipment.
   • Seek feedback from non-family members to ensure your content resonates with your target audience.
   • Recording practice episodes can help you gauge time investment and refine your skills before launching publicly.
   • Remember, not every podcast needs to last forever; it's okay to stop when your message is delivered.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey25
   • buzzsprout.com/stats
   • Shure MV7i
   • Shure Move Mic Lavaliers
   • Rode Podmic USB
   • sweetwater.com
   • bhphotovideo.com
   • podpage.com
   • Dealcasters
   • Castahead
   • Babel Language Learning.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

   Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>2abb5605-a43a-4014-a9c0-b3bf5c9a456aMon, 13 Jan 2025 00:00:00 -040034:20falsefull966966Head Trash to Headspace: Overcoming Mental Barriers in Podcasting with Doc G.In this episode, I’m joined by Doc G (Dr. Jordan Grumet), the author of The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy, to tackle one of the biggest challenges podcasters face—not the technology, not the gear,

   - but the mental game.

   Whether it's "head trash," imposter syndrome, or the overwhelming pressure to succeed, Doc G shares practical strategies to help you push past mental barriers and create a podcast you truly love.

   Doc G shares his journey from a successful medical career to finding purpose and fulfillment in podcasting and writing. Together, we explore how to shift your focus from Big P Podcasting (chasing massive downloads and unrealistic goals) to Little P Podcasting (finding joy in the process and creating meaningful content).

   You’ll also hear about:

   • The difference between "big P purpose" and "little P purpose"—and why it matters for your podcast.
   • How to identify what lights you up and makes your podcast worth doing, even if no one listens.
   • Why striving for massive success without joy often leads to burnout.
   • Practical tips for overcoming purpose anxiety and building a podcasting routine you love.
   
   

   More From Doc G

   The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy

   The Purpose Code Video Trailer

   Taking Stock: A Hospice Doctor's Advice on Financial Independence, Building Wealth, and Living a Regret-Free Life

   Earn & Invest Show

   Because of My Podcast: Zita Christan

   Zita does two podcasts: My Spouse Has Dementia and Ritual Recipes. Today, she shares how she was featured in US News and World Report because of her podcast. Paul Wynn had found her podcast (and her transcripts) and interviewed her for his article titled, Easing Holiday Isolation. US News and World Report has approximately 41 million visitors to their site per month. She was also interviewed for another newspaper.

   For all things Zita Christian see zitachristian.com

   Takeaways:

   • The mental barriers that podcasters face often overshadow technical challenges like equipment or hosting.
   • Identifying and pursuing little 'p' purposes can lead to a more fulfilling podcasting journey.
   • Creating a podcast driven by passion rather than big goals fosters genuine connections with listeners.
   • Purpose anxiety can hinder progress, making it crucial to focus on what excites you.
   • Engaging deeply with your podcast's content can attract a community that resonates with your message.
   • Building a podcast around your interests creates joy and can lead to organic audience growth.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   The School of Podcasting - Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast.

   Doc on the School of Podcasting Interesting AND Unique Doc G Mixes Hospice and Finance

   The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy

   https://jordangrumet.com/

   My Spouse Has Dementia

   Ritual Recipes

   Leaning Towards Wisdom

   Episode on Launching

   School of Podcasting Podcast Launch Checklist

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>In this episode, I’m joined by Doc G (Dr. Jordan Grumet), the author of The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy, to tackle one of the biggest challenges podcasters face—not the technology, not the gear,

   - but the mental game.

   Whether it's "head trash," imposter syndrome, or the overwhelming pressure to succeed, Doc G shares practical strategies to help you push past mental barriers and create a podcast you truly love.

   Doc G shares his journey from a successful medical career to finding purpose and fulfillment in podcasting and writing. Together, we explore how to shift your focus from Big P Podcasting (chasing massive downloads and unrealistic goals) to Little P Podcasting (finding joy in the process and creating meaningful content).

   You’ll also hear about:

   • The difference between "big P purpose" and "little P purpose"—and why it matters for your podcast.
   • How to identify what lights you up and makes your podcast worth doing, even if no one listens.
   • Why striving for massive success without joy often leads to burnout.
   • Practical tips for overcoming purpose anxiety and building a podcasting routine you love.
   
   

   More From Doc G

   The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy

   The Purpose Code Video Trailer

   Taking Stock: A Hospice Doctor's Advice on Financial Independence, Building Wealth, and Living a Regret-Free Life

   Earn & Invest Show

   Because of My Podcast: Zita Christan

   Zita does two podcasts: My Spouse Has Dementia and Ritual Recipes. Today, she shares how she was featured in US News and World Report because of her podcast. Paul Wynn had found her podcast (and her transcripts) and interviewed her for his article titled, Easing Holiday Isolation. US News and World Report has approximately 41 million visitors to their site per month. She was also interviewed for another newspaper.

   For all things Zita Christian see zitachristian.com

   Takeaways:

   • The mental barriers that podcasters face often overshadow technical challenges like equipment or hosting.
   • Identifying and pursuing little 'p' purposes can lead to a more fulfilling podcasting journey.
   • Creating a podcast driven by passion rather than big goals fosters genuine connections with listeners.
   • Purpose anxiety can hinder progress, making it crucial to focus on what excites you.
   • Engaging deeply with your podcast's content can attract a community that resonates with your message.
   • Building a podcast around your interests creates joy and can lead to organic audience growth.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   The School of Podcasting - Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast.

   Doc on the School of Podcasting Interesting AND Unique Doc G Mixes Hospice and Finance

   The Purpose Code: How to unlock meaning, maximize happiness, and leave a lasting legacy

   https://jordangrumet.com/

   My Spouse Has Dementia

   Ritual Recipes

   Leaning Towards Wisdom

   Episode on Launching

   School of Podcasting Podcast Launch Checklist

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>27738219-4698-415d-b2a8-4b9b74dd22d6Mon, 06 Jan 2025 00:00:00 -040048:16falsefull965965My Favorite Podcast - and WHY - 2024Every year, I ask my audience, "What is your favorite podcast - and WHY." When we hear what resonates with people, we can ensure we include those ingredients in our show.

   Participants

   Steve Stewart from The Podcast Editor Academy and the Podcast Editors Mastermind loves Stacking Benjamins.

   Ralph Estep Jr from the Ask Ralph Podcast (Christian Finance) loves the Ask the Podcast Coach show.

   Randy Black from Bible Bytes loves the No Agenda Show.

   Kim Newlove from The Pharmacist’s Voice and Perrysburg Podcast loves The Erectile Dysfunction Radio show.

   York from Welcome to Earth Stories loves Podtastic Audio.

   Wolfman Mike from the 70's vs 80's show loves Beach too Sandy Water too wet

   Harris from His Daughter's Podcast Loves the Founders Podcast

   Chris Nesi from House of Ed Tech AND the NEW Perpetual Syndication loves the Al and Jerry Postgame Podcast

   Louis Goodman from Love thy Lawyer loves Commentary.

   Zita Christian from Ritual Recipes and My Spouse Has Dementia loves the Build a Big Podcast.

   Craig Wealand from Aprender ingles with Reza and Craig loves The Bugle podcast.

   Ron Eastwood (not his voice) from Morning's With Brian loves the Truce podcast.

   Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting loves the No Agenda Show

   Gear Used Today

   Rode Podmic USB

   Rodecaster DUO

   Accentize Dialogue Enhance

   Accentize dx Revive Pro

   GW VoiceCentric

   Waves DeBreath

   WLM Plus Stereo 

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>Every year, I ask my audience, "What is your favorite podcast - and WHY." When we hear what resonates with people, we can ensure we include those ingredients in our show.

   Participants

   Steve Stewart from The Podcast Editor Academy and the Podcast Editors Mastermind loves Stacking Benjamins.

   Ralph Estep Jr from the Ask Ralph Podcast (Christian Finance) loves the Ask the Podcast Coach show.

   Randy Black from Bible Bytes loves the No Agenda Show.

   Kim Newlove from The Pharmacist’s Voice and Perrysburg Podcast loves The Erectile Dysfunction Radio show.

   York from Welcome to Earth Stories loves Podtastic Audio.

   Wolfman Mike from the 70's vs 80's show loves Beach too Sandy Water too wet

   Harris from His Daughter's Podcast Loves the Founders Podcast

   Chris Nesi from House of Ed Tech AND the NEW Perpetual Syndication loves the Al and Jerry Postgame Podcast

   Louis Goodman from Love thy Lawyer loves Commentary.

   Zita Christian from Ritual Recipes and My Spouse Has Dementia loves the Build a Big Podcast.

   Craig Wealand from Aprender ingles with Reza and Craig loves The Bugle podcast.

   Ron Eastwood (not his voice) from Morning's With Brian loves the Truce podcast.

   Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting loves the No Agenda Show

   Gear Used Today

   Rode Podmic USB

   Rodecaster DUO

   Accentize Dialogue Enhance

   Accentize dx Revive Pro

   GW VoiceCentric

   Waves DeBreath

   WLM Plus Stereo 

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   ]]>16bceea8-5863-4f8a-b4c6-004a01df4d27Mon, 30 Dec 2024 00:30:00 -040055:19falsefull964964Navigating Podcasting in 2025: Is Video Worth It?Video podcasting offers unique advantages and challenges, making it essential for creators to weigh the pros and cons before diving in. While video can enhance engagement through visual cues and body language, audio podcasts provide greater portability and simplicity in production. Dave Jackson explores the contrasting benefits of both formats, highlighting that audio often leads to better memory recall and a more personal connection with listeners. As the landscape of podcasting evolves, particularly with platforms like Spotify and YouTube gaining traction, understanding the implications of these choices is crucial. By the end of this discussion, you'll be equipped with insights to decide whether to integrate video into your podcasting strategy.

   Takeaways:

   • Video podcasts can enhance audience engagement through visual cues and body language, creating a more relatable experience.
   • Audio podcasts offer greater portability for multitasking, making them ideal for commuting or exercising.
   • The production of audio podcasts is simpler, requiring less equipment and allowing more casual guest appearances.
   • Completion rates for audio podcasts tend to be higher than those for video podcasts, indicating better listener retention.
   • YouTube and Spotify compete for podcasting dominance, but each has different monetization challenges.
   • While video can expand audience reach, it also incurs additional production costs and time commitments.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • askthepodcastcoach.com
   • Podnews Weekly Review
   • Podcast Index
   • Media Round Table
   • Sound Off Podcast
   • mixlr.com
   • Sweetwater (aff)
   • Sounds Profitable
   
   

   Gear Mentioned

   Viltrox 2 pack LCD with remote

   Newer 2 Light LCD with Remote

   Rode Wireless Mico lavalier Microphone

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Video podcasting offers unique advantages and challenges, making it essential for creators to weigh the pros and cons before diving in. While video can enhance engagement through visual cues and body language, audio podcasts provide greater portability and simplicity in production. Dave Jackson explores the contrasting benefits of both formats, highlighting that audio often leads to better memory recall and a more personal connection with listeners. As the landscape of podcasting evolves, particularly with platforms like Spotify and YouTube gaining traction, understanding the implications of these choices is crucial. By the end of this discussion, you'll be equipped with insights to decide whether to integrate video into your podcasting strategy.

   Takeaways:

   • Video podcasts can enhance audience engagement through visual cues and body language, creating a more relatable experience.
   • Audio podcasts offer greater portability for multitasking, making them ideal for commuting or exercising.
   • The production of audio podcasts is simpler, requiring less equipment and allowing more casual guest appearances.
   • Completion rates for audio podcasts tend to be higher than those for video podcasts, indicating better listener retention.
   • YouTube and Spotify compete for podcasting dominance, but each has different monetization challenges.
   • While video can expand audience reach, it also incurs additional production costs and time commitments.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • askthepodcastcoach.com
   • Podnews Weekly Review
   • Podcast Index
   • Media Round Table
   • Sound Off Podcast
   • mixlr.com
   • Sweetwater (aff)
   • Sounds Profitable
   
   

   Gear Mentioned

   Viltrox 2 pack LCD with remote

   Newer 2 Light LCD with Remote

   Rode Wireless Mico lavalier Microphone

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

   When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

   School of Podcasting

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>8a1d9206-c5ef-4f11-93fa-4d339088c91dMon, 23 Dec 2024 00:15:00 -040057:02falsefull963963Unlocking Audience Insights: Crafting the Perfect Survey for Your PodcastCreating an effective audience survey is essential for understanding what your listeners want and how to enhance their experience.

   This episode dives into the crucial steps for crafting survey questions that engage your audience and encourage participation. Dave Jackson emphasizes the importance of knowing your audience and keeping surveys concise, ideally under ten questions, to boost completion rates.

   He also discusses strategies for increasing responses, such as using incentives and clear communication about the benefits of participating. By the end, you'll have actionable insights to help you design a survey that not only gathers valuable feedback but also strengthens your relationship with your listeners.

   Takeaways:

   • Begin your survey with a concise opening paragraph explaining how respondents will benefit.
   • Keep your survey short, ideally under 10 questions for higher completion rates.
   • Incentives can increase survey participation but ensure they don’t skew honest feedback.
   • Use relevant questions that engage your audience and avoid demographic questions at the start.
   • Incorporate a progress bar to inform participants how far along they are in the survey.
   • Make sure to remind your audience about the survey to boost responses regularly.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/962
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/961 (last week)
   • Pointer Pro
   • Survicate
   • Edison Research Listener Survey Template
   • PodPage.com
   • Google Forms
   • Jotform
   • Tally
   • The Audience is Listening Book by Tom Webster
   
   

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

   No Surveys For You?

   If you're a person who has never done an audience survey, and don't plan on any in the future, I'd love to understand why (I'm always interested in different points of view). I'd love to hear why.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Creating an effective audience survey is essential for understanding what your listeners want and how to enhance their experience.

   This episode dives into the crucial steps for crafting survey questions that engage your audience and encourage participation. Dave Jackson emphasizes the importance of knowing your audience and keeping surveys concise, ideally under ten questions, to boost completion rates.

   He also discusses strategies for increasing responses, such as using incentives and clear communication about the benefits of participating. By the end, you'll have actionable insights to help you design a survey that not only gathers valuable feedback but also strengthens your relationship with your listeners.

   Takeaways:

   • Begin your survey with a concise opening paragraph explaining how respondents will benefit.
   • Keep your survey short, ideally under 10 questions for higher completion rates.
   • Incentives can increase survey participation but ensure they don’t skew honest feedback.
   • Use relevant questions that engage your audience and avoid demographic questions at the start.
   • Incorporate a progress bar to inform participants how far along they are in the survey.
   • Make sure to remind your audience about the survey to boost responses regularly.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/962
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/961 (last week)
   • Pointer Pro
   • Survicate
   • Edison Research Listener Survey Template
   • PodPage.com
   • Google Forms
   • Jotform
   • Tally
   • The Audience is Listening Book by Tom Webster
   
   

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

   No Surveys For You?

   If you're a person who has never done an audience survey, and don't plan on any in the future, I'd love to understand why (I'm always interested in different points of view). I'd love to hear why.

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>3042741d-65dc-4706-961d-1edce6c382e4Mon, 16 Dec 2024 00:00:00 -040034:45falsefull962962Unlock Podcast Success: How Being Open to Feedback Changes EverythingBeing open to receiving feedback is crucial for growth, especially as we head into 2025. If podcasters are unwilling to listen to their audience, they risk repeating the same mistakes and achieving the same results. This episode delves into the importance of having a receptive mindset regarding advice and input from listeners. Today, I share anecdotes and examples, including the cautionary tale of Elizabeth Holmes and the pitfalls of ignoring expert advice. He emphasizes that understanding your audience is the foundation for creating compelling content and encourages podcasters to seek feedback to enhance their shows actively.

   Takeaways:

   • Being open to audience feedback is essential for podcasters to improve their content.
   • If you ignore audience advice, you risk repeating the same mistakes year after year.
   • Feedback is critical to podcasting success; embrace it to grow your show.
   • Creating an audience survey can provide valuable insights into what your listeners want.
   • Understanding your audience's needs can lead to more engaging and resonant content.
   • Ignoring expert advice, as seen in the case of Theranos, can lead to failure.
   • With a CLEAR understanding of your WHY and your audience, you can decide which advice to accept and which to dismiss.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
   • jordanharbinger.com (on taking advice)
   • thepharmacistvoice.com (Kim Newlove's show)
   • perrysburgpodcast.com (Kim Newlove's show)
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/960 (on media hosting)
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/961 (full show notes)
   • Welcome to Earth Stories
   • Apple's Dashboard podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • Spotify's Dashboard podcasters.spotify.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>Being open to receiving feedback is crucial for growth, especially as we head into 2025. If podcasters are unwilling to listen to their audience, they risk repeating the same mistakes and achieving the same results. This episode delves into the importance of having a receptive mindset regarding advice and input from listeners. Today, I share anecdotes and examples, including the cautionary tale of Elizabeth Holmes and the pitfalls of ignoring expert advice. He emphasizes that understanding your audience is the foundation for creating compelling content and encourages podcasters to seek feedback to enhance their shows actively.

   Takeaways:

   • Being open to audience feedback is essential for podcasters to improve their content.
   • If you ignore audience advice, you risk repeating the same mistakes year after year.
   • Feedback is critical to podcasting success; embrace it to grow your show.
   • Creating an audience survey can provide valuable insights into what your listeners want.
   • Understanding your audience's needs can lead to more engaging and resonant content.
   • Ignoring expert advice, as seen in the case of Theranos, can lead to failure.
   • With a CLEAR understanding of your WHY and your audience, you can decide which advice to accept and which to dismiss.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
   • jordanharbinger.com (on taking advice)
   • thepharmacistvoice.com (Kim Newlove's show)
   • perrysburgpodcast.com (Kim Newlove's show)
   • podpage.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/960 (on media hosting)
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/961 (full show notes)
   • Welcome to Earth Stories
   • Apple's Dashboard podcastsconnect.apple.com
   • Spotify's Dashboard podcasters.spotify.com
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

   Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

   Podcasting in Six Weeks

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>f7b4328d-78bb-4c92-a7e5-c1dfd664fe02Mon, 09 Dec 2024 00:00:00 -040046:55falsefull961961Podcast Media Hosts Uncovered: Features That MatterChoosing the right media host for your podcast is crucial, and in this episode, we dive deep into the features offered by some of the top podcast media hosts. I discuss how each host brings unique capabilities, helping you determine what aligns best with your needs. Whether you’re looking for dynamic content, AI tools, or detailed analytics, understanding these features can significantly impact your podcasting journey and wallet). From the importance of an RSS feed to the nuances of pricing plans, listeners will gain valuable insights into what to consider before deciding.

   Join me as I break down the landscape of podcast media hosting, ensuring you avoid costly mistakes and find the perfect fit for your show.

   Even if you're happy with your podcast host

   Takeaways:

   • Choosing the right media host depends on your specific podcasting needs and goals.
   • It's essential to evaluate the features that media hosts offer to avoid unnecessary expenses.
   • Dynamic content and chapters can enhance listener engagement and provide a better user experience.
   • Migration between hosts can lead to a loss of statistics; choose wisely and prepare.
   • Utilizing AI tools can streamline podcast creation, but be cautious of additional costs.
   • Free podcast hosting services often come with limitations and potential risks of closure.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com/join
   • https://schoolofpodcasting.com/podcast-hosting-simplified/<< Full Show Notes
   
   

   Companies mentioned in this episode:

   • PodPage
   • Buzzsprout
   • Blubrry
   • Libsyn (use coupon sopfree for a free month)
   • Captivate
   • RSS.com
   • Descript
   • Riverside
   • Squadcast
   • Zoom
   • Auphonic
   • Transistor
   
   

   Full Show Notes

   See schoolofpodcasting.com/960

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   What Does Worry Free Podcasting Look Like?

   It means not having to worry about buying the wrong equipment. It means not worrying about wasting your money - you can cancel anytime during your first 30 days and get your money back. It means getting one-on-one coaching with a TEACHER who wants you to learn and grow and not upsell you on 20 more products. You can do this. I help podcasters. It's what I do, and I can't wait to see what we do together.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Choosing the right media host for your podcast is crucial, and in this episode, we dive deep into the features offered by some of the top podcast media hosts. I discuss how each host brings unique capabilities, helping you determine what aligns best with your needs. Whether you’re looking for dynamic content, AI tools, or detailed analytics, understanding these features can significantly impact your podcasting journey and wallet). From the importance of an RSS feed to the nuances of pricing plans, listeners will gain valuable insights into what to consider before deciding.

   Join me as I break down the landscape of podcast media hosting, ensuring you avoid costly mistakes and find the perfect fit for your show.

   Even if you're happy with your podcast host

   Takeaways:

   • Choosing the right media host depends on your specific podcasting needs and goals.
   • It's essential to evaluate the features that media hosts offer to avoid unnecessary expenses.
   • Dynamic content and chapters can enhance listener engagement and provide a better user experience.
   • Migration between hosts can lead to a loss of statistics; choose wisely and prepare.
   • Utilizing AI tools can streamline podcast creation, but be cautious of additional costs.
   • Free podcast hosting services often come with limitations and potential risks of closure.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com/join
   • https://schoolofpodcasting.com/podcast-hosting-simplified/<< Full Show Notes
   
   

   Companies mentioned in this episode:

   • PodPage
   • Buzzsprout
   • Blubrry
   • Libsyn (use coupon sopfree for a free month)
   • Captivate
   • RSS.com
   • Descript
   • Riverside
   • Squadcast
   • Zoom
   • Auphonic
   • Transistor
   
   

   Full Show Notes

   See schoolofpodcasting.com/960

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   What Does Worry Free Podcasting Look Like?

   It means not having to worry about buying the wrong equipment. It means not worrying about wasting your money - you can cancel anytime during your first 30 days and get your money back. It means getting one-on-one coaching with a TEACHER who wants you to learn and grow and not upsell you on 20 more products. You can do this. I help podcasters. It's what I do, and I can't wait to see what we do together.

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>d3609402-5055-4b0f-902a-b66f2e3dedf8Mon, 02 Dec 2024 00:00:00 -040001:06:51falsefull960960Ariana Grande's Voice and Your Podcast: What They Have in CommonDon't let past regrets or harsh words hold you back from podcasting. This episode highlights inspiring stories from podcasters like Zita Christian, who turned her struggles with Alzheimer's into a powerful platform, and Ray Arnott, whose model train podcast has garnered a passionate community. Dave Jackson emphasizes that everyone has a unique voice and experience to share, and it's essential to push through the self-doubt that might stem from past failures.

   He also discusses the phenomenon of pod fading, where many new podcasters stop before truly finding their audience. Tune in to discover how you can overcome obstacles and embrace your podcasting journey, all while ensuring your voice is heard loud and clear.

   Transitioning to the theme of persistence in podcasting, Dave discusses the phenomenon of 'pod fading,' where many new podcasters abandon their shows within months. He references a study revealing that around 30% of podcasters stop producing content shortly after launching. Jackson draws parallels between podcasting and gym memberships, highlighting how both require commitment and a clear understanding of one's goals to achieve lasting success. He encourages listeners to embrace their unique voices, reminding them that past failures or negative feedback should not deter them from sharing their stories. Instead, he advocates for a mindset shift—viewing each podcasting endeavor as an opportunity to learn and grow, regardless of the initial outcome.

   The episode crescendos with reflections on the recent insights he gained from watching the musical 'Wicked,' particularly the unexpected vocal talents of Ariana Grande. This experience serves as a metaphor for the hidden potential within each person. Jackson urges aspiring podcasters to let go of self-doubt and 'head trash,' asserting that everyone has a unique contribution to make. By embracing their individuality and the lessons learned from past experiences, podcasters can inspire others and carve out their place in the audio landscape. As the episode wraps up, Dave reiterates his commitment to supporting podcasters through his school, providing resources and guidance to help them realize their potential and achieve their podcasting dreams.

   Takeaways:

   • Zita Christian's podcast gained recognition when she was featured in U.S. News & World Report, showcasing the impact a podcast can have.
   • Ray Arnott's podcast inspired a listener to send in a special gift.
   • Many new podcasters quit because they lack clarity on their audience and goals, leading to frustration.
   • Consistency in content and focus is crucial for successful podcasting; it's not just about publishing.
   • Ariana Grande's unexpected vocal talent illustrates that preconceived notions can limit potential; podcasting is similar.
   • Pod fading affects 30% of new podcasters; understanding your audience is key to longevity.
   • YouTube's redefining the word podcast may confuse advertisers and affect the money flowing into podcasting.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/959
   • aroundthelayout.com
   • Zita's Article in US News and World Report
   • My Spouse Has Dementia
   • practicalprepping.info
   • Edison research on YouTube
   • Podnews on Podface
   • Pocket Casts
   • Notion
   • Notejoy
   • In & Around Podcasting
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Don't let past regrets or harsh words hold you back from podcasting. This episode highlights inspiring stories from podcasters like Zita Christian, who turned her struggles with Alzheimer's into a powerful platform, and Ray Arnott, whose model train podcast has garnered a passionate community. Dave Jackson emphasizes that everyone has a unique voice and experience to share, and it's essential to push through the self-doubt that might stem from past failures.

   He also discusses the phenomenon of pod fading, where many new podcasters stop before truly finding their audience. Tune in to discover how you can overcome obstacles and embrace your podcasting journey, all while ensuring your voice is heard loud and clear.

   Transitioning to the theme of persistence in podcasting, Dave discusses the phenomenon of 'pod fading,' where many new podcasters abandon their shows within months. He references a study revealing that around 30% of podcasters stop producing content shortly after launching. Jackson draws parallels between podcasting and gym memberships, highlighting how both require commitment and a clear understanding of one's goals to achieve lasting success. He encourages listeners to embrace their unique voices, reminding them that past failures or negative feedback should not deter them from sharing their stories. Instead, he advocates for a mindset shift—viewing each podcasting endeavor as an opportunity to learn and grow, regardless of the initial outcome.

   The episode crescendos with reflections on the recent insights he gained from watching the musical 'Wicked,' particularly the unexpected vocal talents of Ariana Grande. This experience serves as a metaphor for the hidden potential within each person. Jackson urges aspiring podcasters to let go of self-doubt and 'head trash,' asserting that everyone has a unique contribution to make. By embracing their individuality and the lessons learned from past experiences, podcasters can inspire others and carve out their place in the audio landscape. As the episode wraps up, Dave reiterates his commitment to supporting podcasters through his school, providing resources and guidance to help them realize their potential and achieve their podcasting dreams.

   Takeaways:

   • Zita Christian's podcast gained recognition when she was featured in U.S. News & World Report, showcasing the impact a podcast can have.
   • Ray Arnott's podcast inspired a listener to send in a special gift.
   • Many new podcasters quit because they lack clarity on their audience and goals, leading to frustration.
   • Consistency in content and focus is crucial for successful podcasting; it's not just about publishing.
   • Ariana Grande's unexpected vocal talent illustrates that preconceived notions can limit potential; podcasting is similar.
   • Pod fading affects 30% of new podcasters; understanding your audience is key to longevity.
   • YouTube's redefining the word podcast may confuse advertisers and affect the money flowing into podcasting.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • schoolofpodcasting.com/959
   • aroundthelayout.com
   • Zita's Article in US News and World Report
   • My Spouse Has Dementia
   • practicalprepping.info
   • Edison research on YouTube
   • Podnews on Podface
   • Pocket Casts
   • Notion
   • Notejoy
   • In & Around Podcasting
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Join the School of Podcasting

   Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>85383a95-0323-4e3b-8eba-fb1b0b09f937Mon, 25 Nov 2024 00:00:00 -040042:07falsefull959959The Knockout Formula: What Podcasters Can Learn from a Netflix-Breaking EventThis week, we had something that doesn't happen often outside of the Super Bowl—lots of Americans watched the same thing at the same time. Today, I thought we could look at WHY and what podcasters can learn to add those winning ingredients to their podcasts.

   Audience Survey

   Help make the show better, and you'll be entered to win a year of membership at the School of Podcasting. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/survey

   Takeaways:

   • Building anticipation for your content is crucial; promoting months in advance can lead to significant engagement.
   • Making your content easily accessible across various platforms maximizes audience reach and convenience.
   • Tying your content to emotions or nostalgia can significantly enhance audience connection and engagement.
   • Creating unique content that can't be found elsewhere is a powerful way to attract viewers.
   • Ensure the consumption process of your content is smooth; technical issues can drive audiences away.
   • Monetizing an audience, rather than just the podcast, is key to long-term success.
   
   

   Mentioned:

   School of Podcasting

   Podpage

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcast Hot Seat - Now Private Podcast Audits

   There are things your podcast is missing that often lead to you losing the audience you are attracting. I help make good podcasts GREAT. End the frustration with your podcast growth. Check out the Podcast Hot Seat Service Today.

   Podcast Hotseat

   ]]>This week, we had something that doesn't happen often outside of the Super Bowl—lots of Americans watched the same thing at the same time. Today, I thought we could look at WHY and what podcasters can learn to add those winning ingredients to their podcasts.

   Audience Survey

   Help make the show better, and you'll be entered to win a year of membership at the School of Podcasting. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/survey

   Takeaways:

   • Building anticipation for your content is crucial; promoting months in advance can lead to significant engagement.
   • Making your content easily accessible across various platforms maximizes audience reach and convenience.
   • Tying your content to emotions or nostalgia can significantly enhance audience connection and engagement.
   • Creating unique content that can't be found elsewhere is a powerful way to attract viewers.
   • Ensure the consumption process of your content is smooth; technical issues can drive audiences away.
   • Monetizing an audience, rather than just the podcast, is key to long-term success.
   
   

   Mentioned:

   School of Podcasting

   Podpage

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Podcast Hot Seat - Now Private Podcast Audits

   There are things your podcast is missing that often lead to you losing the audience you are attracting. I help make good podcasts GREAT. End the frustration with your podcast growth. Check out the Podcast Hot Seat Service Today.

   Podcast Hotseat

   ]]>cce8878d-2555-49eb-9b81-3ec3480a9137Mon, 18 Nov 2024 00:00:00 -040040:07falsefull958958Strike Up Your Podcast: Lessons from Duck Pin BowlingOK, I realize this seems a little odd, but stay with me. Bowling and podcasting share surprising similarities that can inspire you to start your own podcast. Just like in duck pin bowling, where mastering the basics and adapting your technique is crucial, podcasting requires a solid grasp of content creation and delivery. Throughout this episode, Dave Jackson draws parallels between the two, emphasizing the importance of feedback, practice, and finding your unique style. He also introduces an AI prompt that can help you generate fresh interview questions, making it easier to engage your audience. Whether you're a seasoned bowler or a curious podcaster, this episode is packed with insights to guide your journey.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   AI Goes to College

   Chat GPT

   Podindy.com

   Captivate

   Buzzsprout

   Blubrry

   Libsyn

   RSS.com

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Worfence Vulnerability Report

   PodcastsAboutPodcasting.com

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Question of the Month

   Question of the Month

   Takeaways:

   • The experience of duckpin bowling can teach valuable lessons about podcasting and content creation.
   • Instant feedback is crucial in both bowling and podcasting; learn from your mistakes quickly.
   • Practicing your podcasting skills is essential, just like warming up before bowling.
   • Understand your audience's needs to create engaging content that resonates with them.
   • Use AI tools to refine your podcasting content, enhancing clarity and engagement.
   • Adaptability in your approach to podcasting can lead to greater audience connection and enjoyment.
   
   

   Chat GPT Prompt

   Craig Can Slyke from AI Goes to College showed a cool prompt for Chat GPT. You tell it about your podcast (who your target listener is) explain who your guest is, and then ask it to come up with questions that your guest hasn't been asked. Want more? Explain how some of the questions may be used for YouTube Shorts and to put those in bold.

   It works. Watch Video

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>OK, I realize this seems a little odd, but stay with me. Bowling and podcasting share surprising similarities that can inspire you to start your own podcast. Just like in duck pin bowling, where mastering the basics and adapting your technique is crucial, podcasting requires a solid grasp of content creation and delivery. Throughout this episode, Dave Jackson draws parallels between the two, emphasizing the importance of feedback, practice, and finding your unique style. He also introduces an AI prompt that can help you generate fresh interview questions, making it easier to engage your audience. Whether you're a seasoned bowler or a curious podcaster, this episode is packed with insights to guide your journey.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   AI Goes to College

   Chat GPT

   Podindy.com

   Captivate

   Buzzsprout

   Blubrry

   Libsyn

   RSS.com

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Worfence Vulnerability Report

   PodcastsAboutPodcasting.com

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Question of the Month

   Question of the Month

   Takeaways:

   • The experience of duckpin bowling can teach valuable lessons about podcasting and content creation.
   • Instant feedback is crucial in both bowling and podcasting; learn from your mistakes quickly.
   • Practicing your podcasting skills is essential, just like warming up before bowling.
   • Understand your audience's needs to create engaging content that resonates with them.
   • Use AI tools to refine your podcasting content, enhancing clarity and engagement.
   • Adaptability in your approach to podcasting can lead to greater audience connection and enjoyment.
   
   

   Chat GPT Prompt

   Craig Can Slyke from AI Goes to College showed a cool prompt for Chat GPT. You tell it about your podcast (who your target listener is) explain who your guest is, and then ask it to come up with questions that your guest hasn't been asked. Want more? Explain how some of the questions may be used for YouTube Shorts and to put those in bold.

   It works. Watch Video

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>492caa48-e982-480f-bf22-966259acaacaMon, 11 Nov 2024 00:00:00 -040043:39falsefull957957Add More to Your Podcast? Remember to Subtract!If you want to add something new to your podcasting routine, you need to subtract something else from your schedule. Time management is crucial for podcasters; today, I'm pointing out the importance of making intentional choices about allocating our time.

   Let's examine the balance between new opportunities and existing commitments. I emphasize that every addition comes with a necessary subtraction (unless you want to lose your mind).

   This episode is filled with practical tips and personal insights on how to manage your time while avoiding burnout. Whether you want to expand your podcasting efforts or keep your sanity intact, this episode offers valuable insights to help you navigate your busy schedule.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Takeaways:

   • To succeed in podcasting, remember that adding a new task means subtracting an existing one (if you're truly "busy").
   • Effective time management in podcasting requires precise scheduling for learning new tools or platforms.
   • Evaluate your current commitments and prioritize what truly adds value to your podcasting journey (and value to your audience).
   • Being overwhelmed by podcasting tasks can be alleviated by understanding your available time.
   • Use tools to track your productivity and identify what activities yield the best results.
   • Avoid the hustle culture; prioritize your health and family while managing your podcasting goals.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • practicalprepping.info
   • toggl.com
   • Switchy in App Sumo
   • Site Behaviour
   • Motion AI Scheduling Tool
   • Mouthy Broad Media
   • Pod Page
   • Timer
   • FTC Fines
   • Spanish Newspaper Had Inflated Numbers
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>If you want to add something new to your podcasting routine, you need to subtract something else from your schedule. Time management is crucial for podcasters; today, I'm pointing out the importance of making intentional choices about allocating our time.

   Let's examine the balance between new opportunities and existing commitments. I emphasize that every addition comes with a necessary subtraction (unless you want to lose your mind).

   This episode is filled with practical tips and personal insights on how to manage your time while avoiding burnout. Whether you want to expand your podcasting efforts or keep your sanity intact, this episode offers valuable insights to help you navigate your busy schedule.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Takeaways:

   • To succeed in podcasting, remember that adding a new task means subtracting an existing one (if you're truly "busy").
   • Effective time management in podcasting requires precise scheduling for learning new tools or platforms.
   • Evaluate your current commitments and prioritize what truly adds value to your podcasting journey (and value to your audience).
   • Being overwhelmed by podcasting tasks can be alleviated by understanding your available time.
   • Use tools to track your productivity and identify what activities yield the best results.
   • Avoid the hustle culture; prioritize your health and family while managing your podcasting goals.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • practicalprepping.info
   • toggl.com
   • Switchy in App Sumo
   • Site Behaviour
   • Motion AI Scheduling Tool
   • Mouthy Broad Media
   • Pod Page
   • Timer
   • FTC Fines
   • Spanish Newspaper Had Inflated Numbers
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   ]]>e6d039c9-5035-4eaa-b410-bbb133b9ca84Mon, 04 Nov 2024 00:00:00 -040037:06falsefull956956Promote Like a Pro: Getting Your Podcast Guests to Spread the WordToday we look at how to encourage guests to promote their episodes. Host Dave Jackson opens the show by discussing the importance of reciprocity in the podcasting world, emphasizing that hosts and guests benefit from effective promotion strategies.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Contributors:

   Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice, Perrysburg Podcast

   Kris - Podtastic Audio

   Kiona Nessenbaum - Birth As We Know It

   Takeaways:

   • Building a relationship with your podcast guests before the interview can lead to better promotion later.
   • Make it easy for guests to share their episodes by providing direct links and images.
   • As a host, please don't rely solely on guests to promote their episodes; it's not guaranteed.
   • Offering your guests clear and simple promotional tools can encourage them to share your interview.
   • Please tell your guests when their episodes will be released to help them prepare to share.
   • As a guest, promise to promote the episode to increase your chances of being invited back.
   • If you want them to share, the interview should be different than previous interviews.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thepharmacistvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • podcasticaudio.com
   • birthaswenowitpodcast.com
   • smartbusinessrevolution.com
   • podnews
   • This Amercian Life
   
   

   Insider Secrets to Topp 100 Podcast

   Dave's Resources

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Podcaster Happy Hour: The Best Free Podcaster Conference

   The Podcaster Happy Hour meets once a month to check out cool podcasting tech and network with other podcasters. It's free. Check it out.

   Podcaster Happy Hour

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Today we look at how to encourage guests to promote their episodes. Host Dave Jackson opens the show by discussing the importance of reciprocity in the podcasting world, emphasizing that hosts and guests benefit from effective promotion strategies.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Contributors:

   Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice, Perrysburg Podcast

   Kris - Podtastic Audio

   Kiona Nessenbaum - Birth As We Know It

   Takeaways:

   • Building a relationship with your podcast guests before the interview can lead to better promotion later.
   • Make it easy for guests to share their episodes by providing direct links and images.
   • As a host, please don't rely solely on guests to promote their episodes; it's not guaranteed.
   • Offering your guests clear and simple promotional tools can encourage them to share your interview.
   • Please tell your guests when their episodes will be released to help them prepare to share.
   • As a guest, promise to promote the episode to increase your chances of being invited back.
   • If you want them to share, the interview should be different than previous interviews.
   
   

   Links referenced in this episode:

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • thepharmacistvoice.com
   • perrysburgpodcast.com
   • podcasticaudio.com
   • birthaswenowitpodcast.com
   • smartbusinessrevolution.com
   • podnews
   • This Amercian Life
   
   

   Insider Secrets to Topp 100 Podcast

   Dave's Resources

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   Mentioned in this episode:

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Podcaster Happy Hour: The Best Free Podcaster Conference

   The Podcaster Happy Hour meets once a month to check out cool podcasting tech and network with other podcasters. It's free. Check it out.

   Podcaster Happy Hour

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>1e3191b7-ef1e-4976-b3f8-c8bbb9902a0cMon, 28 Oct 2024 00:00:00 -040029:39falsefull955955The Future of Film and Podcasting: Avoiding the Same PitfallsThis episode serves as a guide for content creators to learn from the mistakes of the movie industry. It advocates for creativity, genuine audience engagement, and strategic marketing that resonates with today's consumers.

   The movie industry is falling fast. I share my childhood memories of the joy of watching movies and how attending a movie now has changed dramatically. We need to understand the power of audience engagement, noting that the film industry is often playing it safe with sequels and familiar franchises (a strategy that may not always yield positive results).

   As podcasters, we need to note these trends and craft our content thoughtfully, ensuring that we do not fall into the trap of repeating what has already been done. Podcasters can stand out in an increasingly crowded marketplace by fostering authentic connections with listeners and providing innovative, compelling narratives.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Takeaways:

   • The movie industry is struggling, and podcasters can learn valuable lessons from this decline.
   • Creating a strong community experience can enhance audience engagement for both movies and podcasts.
   • Making the consumption of your content easy is crucial for keeping your audience satisfied.
   • Trailers should accurately represent the film's content to avoid disappointing viewers.
   • Audience engagement and feedback are essential for improving movie and podcast content.
   • Podcasters should avoid the common pitfalls of the movie industry to ensure success.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   admanager.ncM.com

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>This episode serves as a guide for content creators to learn from the mistakes of the movie industry. It advocates for creativity, genuine audience engagement, and strategic marketing that resonates with today's consumers.

   The movie industry is falling fast. I share my childhood memories of the joy of watching movies and how attending a movie now has changed dramatically. We need to understand the power of audience engagement, noting that the film industry is often playing it safe with sequels and familiar franchises (a strategy that may not always yield positive results).

   As podcasters, we need to note these trends and craft our content thoughtfully, ensuring that we do not fall into the trap of repeating what has already been done. Podcasters can stand out in an increasingly crowded marketplace by fostering authentic connections with listeners and providing innovative, compelling narratives.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Takeaways:

   • The movie industry is struggling, and podcasters can learn valuable lessons from this decline.
   • Creating a strong community experience can enhance audience engagement for both movies and podcasts.
   • Making the consumption of your content easy is crucial for keeping your audience satisfied.
   • Trailers should accurately represent the film's content to avoid disappointing viewers.
   • Audience engagement and feedback are essential for improving movie and podcast content.
   • Podcasters should avoid the common pitfalls of the movie industry to ensure success.
   
   

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   admanager.ncM.com

   Mentioned in this episode:

   You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

   You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

   School of Podcasting

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>618ea974-5f54-4859-bcb7-0bc105498180Mon, 14 Oct 2024 00:00:00 -040048:48falsefull953953Eavesdrop on a Podcast Coaching Session: Your Path to Podcaster ClarityStarting a podcast can feel overwhelming, but understanding the essential questions to address can simplify the process significantly. Join Dave Jackson as he coaches Alex Lorre through a consulting call, highlighting crucial considerations for both aspiring and established podcasters. From identifying your target audience to defining the goals of your show, this conversation covers the fundamental aspects that every podcaster must contemplate. Dave emphasizes the importance of a clear podcast name that resonates with listeners and conveys the intended content effectively. Additionally, the episode explores monetization strategies, creative formats, and the necessary tools to help your podcast thrive in a competitive landscape.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • learnpodpage.com
   • askthepodcastcoach.com
   • podpage.com
   • canva.com
   • namecheap.com
   • coolerwebsites.com
   • buzzsprout.com
   • captivate.fm
   • libsyn.com
   • blubrry.com
   • rss.com
   • convertkit.com
   • mailerlite.com
   • heartbeat.chat
   • Elgato Webcam Pro
   • GVM Lighting Kit
   • Descript
   • Red Circle
   • Zoom Podtrak P4
   • 
     
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • Starting a podcast requires answering fundamental questions about your goals and audience.
   • Understanding your niche and how to differentiate your podcast is crucial for success.
   • Consider using a name that clearly conveys the podcast's theme to attract listeners.
   • Engaging with local businesses can provide sponsorship opportunities for your podcast.
   • Monetization strategies can include affiliate marketing, ads, and creating a community.
   • Utilizing tools like podpage can simplify the creation of a professional podcast website.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>Starting a podcast can feel overwhelming, but understanding the essential questions to address can simplify the process significantly. Join Dave Jackson as he coaches Alex Lorre through a consulting call, highlighting crucial considerations for both aspiring and established podcasters. From identifying your target audience to defining the goals of your show, this conversation covers the fundamental aspects that every podcaster must contemplate. Dave emphasizes the importance of a clear podcast name that resonates with listeners and conveys the intended content effectively. Additionally, the episode explores monetization strategies, creative formats, and the necessary tools to help your podcast thrive in a competitive landscape.

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   • schoolofpodcasting.com
   • learnpodpage.com
   • askthepodcastcoach.com
   • podpage.com
   • canva.com
   • namecheap.com
   • coolerwebsites.com
   • buzzsprout.com
   • captivate.fm
   • libsyn.com
   • blubrry.com
   • rss.com
   • convertkit.com
   • mailerlite.com
   • heartbeat.chat
   • Elgato Webcam Pro
   • GVM Lighting Kit
   • Descript
   • Red Circle
   • Zoom Podtrak P4
   • 
     
   
   

   Takeaways:

   • Starting a podcast requires answering fundamental questions about your goals and audience.
   • Understanding your niche and how to differentiate your podcast is crucial for success.
   • Consider using a name that clearly conveys the podcast's theme to attract listeners.
   • Engaging with local businesses can provide sponsorship opportunities for your podcast.
   • Monetization strategies can include affiliate marketing, ads, and creating a community.
   • Utilizing tools like podpage can simplify the creation of a professional podcast website.
   
   

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Podcast Hot Seat

   Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

   Podcast Hotseat

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   ]]>48f3569f-7ec9-46a6-889e-7bc8c2552f2cMon, 07 Oct 2024 00:00:00 -040047:26falsefull952952Maximize Listener Engagement with Podcast ChaptersChapters in podcast episodes allow listeners to easily navigate content, enhancing their listening experience by allowing them to skip to segments they find most intriguing or relevant. Dave Jackson explores the evolution and utility of chapters, reflecting on his initial disdain and eventual reliance on them. Dave invites podcasters to share their perspectives, highlighting a range of opinions from enthusiastic advocates to skeptics who worry chapters might disrupt the listener's engagement.

   Tools like Hindenburg and Descript are spotlighted for their ability to integrate chapters seamlessly, while AI-driven solutions from hosts like Buzzsprout and Captivate are emerging to automate the process. As the podcasting landscape evolves, chapters are becoming a valuable feature for both content creators and audiences, though their adoption remains a personal choice, influenced by the podcast's format and the creator's goals.

   All opinions are ours. Some links are affiliate links, meaning if you buy something through a qualifying link, we might make a small commission at no additional cost to you. As Amazon Associates, we earn from qualifying purchases.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Ethan Reese - Daily Sports Podcast

   David Hooper - Build a Big Podcast

   Paul Taylor - Pass ACLS

   John Wilkerson - Struggling For Purpose

   Ralph Estep Jr - Ask Ralph

   Stephanie Graham - NoseyAF

   York - Welcome to Earth Stories

   Zo Richardson - Back Look Cinema

   Captivate

   Buzzsprout

   Blubrry

   Transistor

   Podhome

   Pocketcasts

   Podurama

   Hindenburg

   Switchy Link Tracker

   Quick Video on Chapters

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>Chapters in podcast episodes allow listeners to easily navigate content, enhancing their listening experience by allowing them to skip to segments they find most intriguing or relevant. Dave Jackson explores the evolution and utility of chapters, reflecting on his initial disdain and eventual reliance on them. Dave invites podcasters to share their perspectives, highlighting a range of opinions from enthusiastic advocates to skeptics who worry chapters might disrupt the listener's engagement.

   Tools like Hindenburg and Descript are spotlighted for their ability to integrate chapters seamlessly, while AI-driven solutions from hosts like Buzzsprout and Captivate are emerging to automate the process. As the podcasting landscape evolves, chapters are becoming a valuable feature for both content creators and audiences, though their adoption remains a personal choice, influenced by the podcast's format and the creator's goals.

   All opinions are ours. Some links are affiliate links, meaning if you buy something through a qualifying link, we might make a small commission at no additional cost to you. As Amazon Associates, we earn from qualifying purchases.

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Ethan Reese - Daily Sports Podcast

   David Hooper - Build a Big Podcast

   Paul Taylor - Pass ACLS

   John Wilkerson - Struggling For Purpose

   Ralph Estep Jr - Ask Ralph

   Stephanie Graham - NoseyAF

   York - Welcome to Earth Stories

   Zo Richardson - Back Look Cinema

   Captivate

   Buzzsprout

   Blubrry

   Transistor

   Podhome

   Pocketcasts

   Podurama

   Hindenburg

   Switchy Link Tracker

   Quick Video on Chapters

   Mentioned in this episode:

   See Your Show On Podpage

   If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

   Podpage

   Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

   Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

   Question of the Month

   Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

   In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

   Podcasting Observations

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

   School of Podcasting

   ]]>161baa2a-e9de-4d6c-8f80-f34d768de035Mon, 30 Sep 2024 00:00:00 -040047:55falsefull951951AI For Podcasters (Part I) 26 ResourcesToday we’re unpacking a world of AI tools and their applications in podcasting. I start by asking ChatGPT what the top uses for ChatGPT (and you'll be surprised) are.

   We also discuss the crucial balance between leveraging AI for efficiency and maintaining the credibility and trust of your audience. If you lose your integrity, you may never get it back.

   Above all, NEVER have AI make content that is made public without human interaction.

   Full description at schoolofpodcasting.com/950

   Check out this video of Castmagic picking out the companies and URLS for this episode (there are quite a lot).

   Question of the Month

   Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

   Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

   Question of the Month

   Got Feedback On This Episode?

   I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

   Share Your Thoughts

   Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

   Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

   With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll easily navigate your podcasting journey, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. As a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

   Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

   
   

    

   Mentioned In This Episode

   Join the School of Podcasting Community

   Profit From Your Podcast Book

   Power of Podcasting Network

   Dave's YouTube Channel

   Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

   Buy Dave a Coffee

   Put Dave In Your Pocket

   Where Will Dave Be?

   Question of the Month

   1. School of Podcasting Website : Dave Jackson's website for podcast consultation.
   2. Music Radio Creative : Associated with Mike Russell, one of the guest experts in AI.
   3. Red Hat Media : Associated with Larry Roberts, another guest expert in AI.
   4. AI Goes To College : Associated with Craig Van Slyke, another guest expert in AI.
   5. 11 Labs : A tool for generating AI voices, used by Dave Jackson in producing content for the episode.
   6. Mike Russell Video on Free AI Plugins for Audacity
   7. Mike Russell Creator Magic YouTube Channel
   8. Creator Magic YouTube Channel : Mike Russell's channel, where he discusses tools and plugins for content creation. Here is the video.
   9. Ask the Podcast Coach : Dave Jackson’s live Q&A podcast on podcasting tips and advice.
   10. CapSho : An AI tool for creating marketing content and summaries from podcast episodes.
   11. Descript : A podcast editing tool with features like Studio Sound for audio cleanup and filler word removal.
   12. PodPage: A platform allowing users to create podcast websites.
   13. SpeakPipe : A tool that allows users to send voice messages.
   14. Otter.ai : A transcription service used for creating detailed show notes.
   15. Pod Squeeze : An AI tool providing limited free usage to analyze podcast episodes.
   16. Swell AI: Another AI tool offering limited free episodes for content analysis.
   17. Spinwriter: A tool for generating content from existing articles aimed at improving SEO.
   18. Google Notebook: Used for reading PDFs aloud using AI voices. Helen and Kyle are the AI-generated voices.
   19. OpusClip: A tool for generating multiple video clips from long content.
   20. BigVU: Another video clip generation tool.
   21. ClipGen: A clip-generation tool for creating social media content.
   22. Minvo: Another tool for generating video clips.
   23. Flexcut: Tool similar to the previous ones for video clipping.
   24. Hippo Video: Offers text-to-video tools for content creation.
   25. Wisecut: A tool for creating video clips from long recordings.
   26. Hey Gen AI Video Generator
   27. Perplexity - AI Tool that Provides Sources of Answers.
   28. Today we’re unpacking a world of AI tools and their applications in podcasting. I start by asking ChatGPT what the top uses for ChatGPT (and you'll be surprised) are.

       We also discuss the crucial balance between leveraging AI for efficiency and maintaining the credibility and trust of your audience. If you lose your integrity, you may never get it back.

       Above all, NEVER have AI make content that is made public without human interaction.

       Full description at schoolofpodcasting.com/950

       Check out this video of Castmagic picking out the companies and URLS for this episode (there are quite a lot).

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll easily navigate your podcasting journey, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. As a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       
       

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       1. School of Podcasting Website : Dave Jackson's website for podcast consultation.
       2. Music Radio Creative : Associated with Mike Russell, one of the guest experts in AI.
       3. Red Hat Media : Associated with Larry Roberts, another guest expert in AI.
       4. AI Goes To College : Associated with Craig Van Slyke, another guest expert in AI.
       5. 11 Labs : A tool for generating AI voices, used by Dave Jackson in producing content for the episode.
       6. Mike Russell Video on Free AI Plugins for Audacity
       7. Mike Russell Creator Magic YouTube Channel
       8. Creator Magic YouTube Channel : Mike Russell's channel, where he discusses tools and plugins for content creation. Here is the video.
       9. Ask the Podcast Coach : Dave Jackson’s live Q&A podcast on podcasting tips and advice.
       10. CapSho : An AI tool for creating marketing content and summaries from podcast episodes.
       11. Descript : A podcast editing tool with features like Studio Sound for audio cleanup and filler word removal.
       12. PodPage: A platform allowing users to create podcast websites.
       13. SpeakPipe : A tool that allows users to send voice messages.
       14. Otter.ai : A transcription service used for creating detailed show notes.
       15. Pod Squeeze : An AI tool providing limited free usage to analyze podcast episodes.
       16. Swell AI: Another AI tool offering limited free episodes for content analysis.
       17. Spinwriter: A tool for generating content from existing articles aimed at improving SEO.
       18. Google Notebook: Used for reading PDFs aloud using AI voices. Helen and Kyle are the AI-generated voices.
       19. OpusClip: A tool for generating multiple video clips from long content.
       20. BigVU: Another video clip generation tool.
       21. ClipGen: A clip-generation tool for creating social media content.
       22. Minvo: Another tool for generating video clips.
       23. Flexcut: Tool similar to the previous ones for video clipping.
       24. Hippo Video: Offers text-to-video tools for content creation.
       25. Wisecut: A tool for creating video clips from long recordings.
       26. Hey Gen AI Video Generator
       27. Perplexity - AI Tool that Provides Sources of Answers.
       28. Chapt GPT - One of the original AI Tools.
       
       

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Attention podcasters! Are you ready to take your show to the next level? Introducing Podcast Hot Seat, the ultimate resource for podcasters who want to elevate their game. Just like a friend who tells you you've got spinach in your teeth, we're here to give you the honest feedback you need to shine. At podcasthotseat.com, we specialize in helping good podcasts become great. Hall of Fame podcaster Dave Jackson will identify your strengths and show you how to leverage them to keep your audience hooked. Don't let small oversights hold you back from podcasting stardom. Visit podcasthotseat.com today and put your show in the hot seat. Your listeners will thank you! Order now and get a free month at the School of Podcasting included in your purchase.

       Podcast Hotseat

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       ]]>fd13c476-c3cd-4ad9-8a5f-88f0cc673f65Mon, 23 Sep 2024 00:00:00 -040054:44falsefull950950Tom Webster: The Importance of Editing Your ShowIn this episode of the School of Podcasting (episode 949), we get some great insights from media research expert Tom Webster. With a focus on optimizing podcast content and strategy, Tom and Dave explore common pitfalls that podcasters face, particularly the importance of engaging content from the outset. They discuss practical tips on improving podcast narrative and editing, handling advertiser concerns, and leveraging audience feedback to refine your podcast. Whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just starting, this episode provides valuable lessons on creating captivating content that resonates with listeners and satisfies advertisers. Don't miss the unique strategies and actionable advice that could transform your podcast into a must-listen show.

       About Tom Webster

       Tom Webster is a partner at Sounds Profitable, dedicated to setting the course for the future of audio. He has thirty years of experience in streaming, podcasting, audiobooks, terrestrial radio, and everything else that we stick in our earballs. In his previous work, with Edison Research, Webster was the co-author of the annual Infinite Dial® study, the longest-running study of consumer media habits since 1998, as well as the Share of Ear® and Edison Podcast Metrics studies. With Sounds Profitable, his body of work includes dozens of the most influential reports in podcasting, and he is one of the most widely cited audio researchers in the world.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast Book

       Tom's Webster's Website for the Book

       Sounds Profitable

       Podcast Guru App

       Podpage (website builder for Podcasters)

       Listen Notes

       Chartable

       FTC Disclosures

       Episodes.fm

       ThanksDaveJackson.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Podcast Hot Seat - Now Private Podcast Audits

       There are things your podcast is missing that often lead to you losing the audience you are attracting. I help make good podcasts GREAT. End the frustration with your podcast growth. Check out the Podcast Hot Seat Service Today.

       Podcast Hotseat

       ]]>In this episode of the School of Podcasting (episode 949), we get some great insights from media research expert Tom Webster. With a focus on optimizing podcast content and strategy, Tom and Dave explore common pitfalls that podcasters face, particularly the importance of engaging content from the outset. They discuss practical tips on improving podcast narrative and editing, handling advertiser concerns, and leveraging audience feedback to refine your podcast. Whether you're a seasoned podcaster or just starting, this episode provides valuable lessons on creating captivating content that resonates with listeners and satisfies advertisers. Don't miss the unique strategies and actionable advice that could transform your podcast into a must-listen show.

       About Tom Webster

       Tom Webster is a partner at Sounds Profitable, dedicated to setting the course for the future of audio. He has thirty years of experience in streaming, podcasting, audiobooks, terrestrial radio, and everything else that we stick in our earballs. In his previous work, with Edison Research, Webster was the co-author of the annual Infinite Dial® study, the longest-running study of consumer media habits since 1998, as well as the Share of Ear® and Edison Podcast Metrics studies. With Sounds Profitable, his body of work includes dozens of the most influential reports in podcasting, and he is one of the most widely cited audio researchers in the world.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast Book

       Tom's Webster's Website for the Book

       Sounds Profitable

       Podcast Guru App

       Podpage (website builder for Podcasters)

       Listen Notes

       Chartable

       FTC Disclosures

       Episodes.fm

       ThanksDaveJackson.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Podcast Hot Seat - Now Private Podcast Audits

       There are things your podcast is missing that often lead to you losing the audience you are attracting. I help make good podcasts GREAT. End the frustration with your podcast growth. Check out the Podcast Hot Seat Service Today.

       Podcast Hotseat

       ]]>20e8b0f1-ccd0-48f0-b405-b9090725fe89Mon, 16 Sep 2024 00:00:00 -040036:35falsefull949949When, What, and How to Outsource Some of Your Podcast ProductionIf you're thinking of outsourcing some of the tasks involved with your podcast, this episode is for you. What is involved with creating an episode? What parts should I outsource? Where do I find an editor? How much does it cost?

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Ask Ralph Podcast: Christian Finance

       The Pharmacists Voice

       Next Day Audio Editor

       Podcast Editor Academy

       Steve Stewart "Find an Editor" tutorial an form

       Descript Vide and Audio Editor with AI

       Opus Clip AI Video Clip Creation Tool

       ClipGen AI Video Clip Creation Tool

       Auphonic audio leveler and hiss removal

       Otter transcription

       Castmagic - AI Tool for Podcasters

       Capsho - AI Marketing tool for Podcasters

       Maximize Listener Engagement with Effective Podcast Interview Strategies SOP Episode

       Podcast Rewind: Insider Secrets to a Top 100 Podcast

       How to Monetize Your Podcast Even With a Small Audience | Dave Jackson

       The Steps To Create a Podcast Episode

       • Research Guest
       • Research Content
       • Guest Scheduling
       • Setup and test Equipment
       • Record Episode
       • Audio Editing
       • Audio Mastering
       • Transcription
       • Upload to Media Host
       • Write Show Notes
       • Create Episodic Artwork
       • Add to Website
       • Post to Social
       • Make Shorts
       • Write Guest Email
       
       

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

       School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>If you're thinking of outsourcing some of the tasks involved with your podcast, this episode is for you. What is involved with creating an episode? What parts should I outsource? Where do I find an editor? How much does it cost?

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Ask Ralph Podcast: Christian Finance

       The Pharmacists Voice

       Next Day Audio Editor

       Podcast Editor Academy

       Steve Stewart "Find an Editor" tutorial an form

       Descript Vide and Audio Editor with AI

       Opus Clip AI Video Clip Creation Tool

       ClipGen AI Video Clip Creation Tool

       Auphonic audio leveler and hiss removal

       Otter transcription

       Castmagic - AI Tool for Podcasters

       Capsho - AI Marketing tool for Podcasters

       Maximize Listener Engagement with Effective Podcast Interview Strategies SOP Episode

       Podcast Rewind: Insider Secrets to a Top 100 Podcast

       How to Monetize Your Podcast Even With a Small Audience | Dave Jackson

       The Steps To Create a Podcast Episode

       • Research Guest
       • Research Content
       • Guest Scheduling
       • Setup and test Equipment
       • Record Episode
       • Audio Editing
       • Audio Mastering
       • Transcription
       • Upload to Media Host
       • Write Show Notes
       • Create Episodic Artwork
       • Add to Website
       • Post to Social
       • Make Shorts
       • Write Guest Email
       
       

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

       School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>374ff134-0f06-47e7-ab90-44f8ea655347Mon, 09 Sep 2024 00:00:00 -040045:37falsefull948948Understanding Platform Fees: Best Options for Podcast Donations and Premium ContentValue for Value or (podcasting 2.0) is NOT just about streaming Satoshi's (a very small amount of bitcoin). Today, we will discuss asking for support and what tools fit best for your situation.

       I may earn a small commission for some of these as I participate in their affiliate program. This costs you nothing and supports the show.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Platforms Discussed:

       Donation Only (No RSS Tools)

       Paypal

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Fanlist

       Kofi

       Premium Content Tools

       Supercast

       Patreon

       Memberful

       Hello Audio

       Captivate

       Buzzsprout

       All of these platforms have their own strengths. If I just wanted to accept money, I'd use Buy Me a Coffee. If I wanted to sell premium content, I would use Supercast (although Captivate and Buzzsprout are very attractive if you are using them for hosting). Supercast has a super easy onboarding for new listeners with a two-click install, and their percentage is in alignment with others (if not less).

       Keep In Mind:

       A show with WOW content will likely get around 3% of its audience to engage.

       New podcasters should focus on building great content and their audience instead of monetizing, which can lead to disappointment.

       There are MANY other ways to make money with your podcast besides advertising and asking for support. See my book Profit From Your Podcast.

       Full details at schoolofpodcasting.com/947

       Because of Podcast

       Congrats to James Cridlan of Podnews who was asked to come on BBC News and discuss the new deal with Kelsie brothers podcast. Check out how this happened in his article.

       Jen Bryney of Congressional Dish got to cover both the Republican and Democratic party events via her connections with C-Span. Jenn your video from outside the DNC was touching. Keep up the great work.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

       If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

       In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

       Podcasting Observations

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>Value for Value or (podcasting 2.0) is NOT just about streaming Satoshi's (a very small amount of bitcoin). Today, we will discuss asking for support and what tools fit best for your situation.

       I may earn a small commission for some of these as I participate in their affiliate program. This costs you nothing and supports the show.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Platforms Discussed:

       Donation Only (No RSS Tools)

       Paypal

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Fanlist

       Kofi

       Premium Content Tools

       Supercast

       Patreon

       Memberful

       Hello Audio

       Captivate

       Buzzsprout

       All of these platforms have their own strengths. If I just wanted to accept money, I'd use Buy Me a Coffee. If I wanted to sell premium content, I would use Supercast (although Captivate and Buzzsprout are very attractive if you are using them for hosting). Supercast has a super easy onboarding for new listeners with a two-click install, and their percentage is in alignment with others (if not less).

       Keep In Mind:

       A show with WOW content will likely get around 3% of its audience to engage.

       New podcasters should focus on building great content and their audience instead of monetizing, which can lead to disappointment.

       There are MANY other ways to make money with your podcast besides advertising and asking for support. See my book Profit From Your Podcast.

       Full details at schoolofpodcasting.com/947

       Because of Podcast

       Congrats to James Cridlan of Podnews who was asked to come on BBC News and discuss the new deal with Kelsie brothers podcast. Check out how this happened in his article.

       Jen Bryney of Congressional Dish got to cover both the Republican and Democratic party events via her connections with C-Span. Jenn your video from outside the DNC was touching. Keep up the great work.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

       If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       Check Out Dave's Newsletter With Behind the Scenes Content

       In each issue of Podcasting Observations, I share my thoughts on what is happening in the podcasting space, my latest content, and things that have caught my eye. I also may ask for your opinion. Join the free community

       Podcasting Observations

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>b3e19733-3e14-4445-868c-dbbf172706daMon, 02 Sep 2024 00:32:00 -040047:20falsefull947947Podcast Movement Reflections 2024 from DC - Now With Plugins!Today I reflect on my trip to Washington DC to Podcast Movement 2024. We talk about the gear, some presentations, some things that could only happen at Podcast Movement in DC, and why there wasn't any carpet.

       I used the Rode Interview Pro Portable Microphone to record some interviews in the very noisy vendor hall. With this in mind, I thought I'd talk about plugins that can clean things up.

       Full show notes are on the website.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Rode Interview Pro Portable Microphone $244ish

       https://supportthisshow.com/rodeinterviewpro

       Shure Movmic Wireless Mics (small - great for video)

       https://geni.us/shure-movmic

       PodProtect

       https://podprotect.email/

       GW Centeric (Greg Wells) $36

       https://supportthisshow.com/gwcentral

       Clarity VX Noise Removal $39

       https://supportthisshow.com/calrityvx

       Accentize DX Revive Pro $299

       https://www.accentize.com/dxrevive/

       Descript Studio Sound

       https://supportthisshow.com/descript

       Scheps Omni Channel 2 $39

       https://supportthisshow.com/scheps

       Audio Sigma Podmobile $359

       https://audiosigma.com/

       10 Free Plugins for Garageband (AU not VST)

       https://www.musicianwave.com/free-garageband-plugins/

       Adobe Enhance

       https://podcast.adobe.com/enhance

       Dealcasters Chris and Jim

       https://www.podpage.com/dealcasters/about/

       Paul Colligan's Podcast Partnership

       podcastpartnership.com

       Apple Podcasts on The Web

       https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/school-of-podcasting-plan-launch-grow-and-monetize/id83653087

       Podcaster Morning Chat

       https://www.podpage.com/pmc/

       Lou Mongello - WDW Radio

       https://www.wdwradio.com

       https://www.loumongello.com

       The Audience is Listening - Tom Webster Book

       https://geni.us/tomwebsterbook

       Harry Durran - Podcast Junkies

       https://www.podcastjunkies.com

       Podnews Podcast Industry News

       https://www.podnews.net

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

       When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

       School of Podcasting

       Podcaster Happy Hour: The Best Free Podcaster Conference

       The Podcaster Happy Hour meets once a month to check out cool podcasting tech and network with other podcasters. It's free. Check it out.

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       ]]>Today I reflect on my trip to Washington DC to Podcast Movement 2024. We talk about the gear, some presentations, some things that could only happen at Podcast Movement in DC, and why there wasn't any carpet.

       I used the Rode Interview Pro Portable Microphone to record some interviews in the very noisy vendor hall. With this in mind, I thought I'd talk about plugins that can clean things up.

       Full show notes are on the website.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Rode Interview Pro Portable Microphone $244ish

       https://supportthisshow.com/rodeinterviewpro

       Shure Movmic Wireless Mics (small - great for video)

       https://geni.us/shure-movmic

       PodProtect

       https://podprotect.email/

       GW Centeric (Greg Wells) $36

       https://supportthisshow.com/gwcentral

       Clarity VX Noise Removal $39

       https://supportthisshow.com/calrityvx

       Accentize DX Revive Pro $299

       https://www.accentize.com/dxrevive/

       Descript Studio Sound

       https://supportthisshow.com/descript

       Scheps Omni Channel 2 $39

       https://supportthisshow.com/scheps

       Audio Sigma Podmobile $359

       https://audiosigma.com/

       10 Free Plugins for Garageband (AU not VST)

       https://www.musicianwave.com/free-garageband-plugins/

       Adobe Enhance

       https://podcast.adobe.com/enhance

       Dealcasters Chris and Jim

       https://www.podpage.com/dealcasters/about/

       Paul Colligan's Podcast Partnership

       podcastpartnership.com

       Apple Podcasts on The Web

       https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/school-of-podcasting-plan-launch-grow-and-monetize/id83653087

       Podcaster Morning Chat

       https://www.podpage.com/pmc/

       Lou Mongello - WDW Radio

       https://www.wdwradio.com

       https://www.loumongello.com

       The Audience is Listening - Tom Webster Book

       https://geni.us/tomwebsterbook

       Harry Durran - Podcast Junkies

       https://www.podcastjunkies.com

       Podnews Podcast Industry News

       https://www.podnews.net

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Does "It Depends" Stop You In Your Tracks? I Can Help

       When you ask any podcast question, most answer begins with "It Depends." This is where my one-on-one coaching can make sure you make the right decision for YOUR audience, and YOUR goals. We have step by step tutorials, and an amazing group to cheer you on, but with the School of Podcasting you don't have to worry about the "It Depends" moments. I've got you. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener to save.

       School of Podcasting

       Podcaster Happy Hour: The Best Free Podcaster Conference

       The Podcaster Happy Hour meets once a month to check out cool podcasting tech and network with other podcasters. It's free. Check it out.

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       ]]>fb17a3a8-33ac-4af5-985f-b10821c4f9cbMon, 26 Aug 2024 00:00:00 -040057:10falsefull946946These Two Words Cost Him Millions of DollarsDISCLAIMER: Today's show contains adult content. Maybe listen to this one when the kiddies aren't around.

       Today, I share some insights that will explain why I spent close to $400 to fly to Atlanta for one day. Then I share some stories about some strange laws in the UK that are getting people arrested for posting memes and two words that cost a comedian millions of dollars.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Without Warning Podcast

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       Gamertag Radio

       GARM

       Tom Segura Your Mom's House

       Getting Fired From McDonald's

       Libsyn to Use Barometer

       Jim and Chris from Dealcasters

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

       If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>DISCLAIMER: Today's show contains adult content. Maybe listen to this one when the kiddies aren't around.

       Today, I share some insights that will explain why I spent close to $400 to fly to Atlanta for one day. Then I share some stories about some strange laws in the UK that are getting people arrested for posting memes and two words that cost a comedian millions of dollars.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Without Warning Podcast

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       Gamertag Radio

       GARM

       Tom Segura Your Mom's House

       Getting Fired From McDonald's

       Libsyn to Use Barometer

       Jim and Chris from Dealcasters

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Quit Thinking About It and START THAT PODCAST

       If you have ever turned down the radio to hear your phone in the car, you know how to mix audio. If you have ever attached a photo to an email, you know how to upload an mp3 to a media host. Deleting text in Word is the same as delete audio in audacity. Yes, there is a learning curve but it's not as scary as you think. I'll be there the whole way, and you can join worry free with a 30 day money-back guarantee. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>a36d41bf-a61c-466b-8632-eb7872e13cfdMon, 19 Aug 2024 00:15:00 -040042:14falsefull945945Beyond Surveys How Real Conversations Grow Your PodcastAre you confident your podcast content is truly resonating with your audience? Many podcasters assume their content is "fine" without digging deeper. But there's a powerful way to gain invaluable insights directly from your listeners.

       In this episode, I share a game-changing strategy I recently used at my new job with Podpage. By conducting one-on-one Zoom calls with users, we uncovered crucial feedback that transformed our product. This approach can work wonders for your podcast too!

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast

       Podpage.com

       Joining the School of Podcasting

       Grow The Show with Chris Hutchins

       All the Hacks Episodes on Bank Accounts

       Tidycal Calendar System with Lifetime Deal

       Ask Ralph Podcast

       Miss Ileane - The Anchor Show

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

       Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

       Podcasting in Six Weeks

       ]]>Are you confident your podcast content is truly resonating with your audience? Many podcasters assume their content is "fine" without digging deeper. But there's a powerful way to gain invaluable insights directly from your listeners.

       In this episode, I share a game-changing strategy I recently used at my new job with Podpage. By conducting one-on-one Zoom calls with users, we uncovered crucial feedback that transformed our product. This approach can work wonders for your podcast too!

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast

       Podpage.com

       Joining the School of Podcasting

       Grow The Show with Chris Hutchins

       All the Hacks Episodes on Bank Accounts

       Tidycal Calendar System with Lifetime Deal

       Ask Ralph Podcast

       Miss Ileane - The Anchor Show

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Podcasting In Six Weeks - Register Today!

       Ever wanted to start your own podcast but didn't know where to begin? Imagine creating and launching your podcast in just six weeks! Join our exclusive online class 'Podcasting in Six Weeks' starting August 7th. With only six spots available, this is your chance for personalized, live group coaching at a discounted rate. Prepare to go back to school and turn your podcasting dreams into reality. Sign up today and make your voice heard! Visit podcastinginsixweeks.com

       Podcasting in Six Weeks

       ]]>184cced5-2f15-478c-97d4-76c5ba8d6fa7Mon, 12 Aug 2024 00:05:00 -040031:40falsefull944944Unraveling the Power of Word-of-Mouth in Podcast Recommendations70% of podcasts are discovered via word of mouth (Jacobs Media). So if we can understand what makes someone recommend something, we can start to do that in our show.

       We heard words like affordable, quality, and unique. Some people recommend based on a relationship that delivers value. When you deliver something you can't get any place else.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Participants

       Kim Newlove

       https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/

       https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com/

       Paul from Pass ACLS

       https://passacls.com/

       Ralph Estep Jr - Ask Ralph Podcast

       https://www.askralphpodcast.com/

       Velvet from Welcome to Earth Stories

       https://welcometoearthstories.com/

       Mark from the History of North America

       https://www.markvinet.com/

       Timothy Brien

       Create Art Podcast - https://www.createartpodcast.com/

       Find a Podcast About https://www.findapodcastabout.xyz/

       Zoe - Back Look Cinema

       https://www.backlookcinema.com/

       Dave Jackson - School of Podcasting

       https://learn.schoolofpodcasting.com

       The Wealth of Connection: A New Approach to Making Business Personal

       https://geni.us/wealth-of-connection

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast

       https://geni.us/tomwebsterbook

       Because of My Podcast - Vincent Pugliese

       Unconference - https://totallifefreedom.kartra.com/page/unconferenceVIPpricing

       Vincent on episode 862

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Don't Let Your Poor Upbringing Stop Your From Starting Your Podcast

       If you grew up attempting to get the attention of your parents, friends, and others but couldn't, podcasting is THE way to get your message out to the WORLD. The School of Podcasting allows you to: Learn at your own pace Network with other brilliant podcasters Get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching with Dave Jackson

       School of Podcasting

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>70% of podcasts are discovered via word of mouth (Jacobs Media). So if we can understand what makes someone recommend something, we can start to do that in our show.

       We heard words like affordable, quality, and unique. Some people recommend based on a relationship that delivers value. When you deliver something you can't get any place else.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Participants

       Kim Newlove

       https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/

       https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com/

       Paul from Pass ACLS

       https://passacls.com/

       Ralph Estep Jr - Ask Ralph Podcast

       https://www.askralphpodcast.com/

       Velvet from Welcome to Earth Stories

       https://welcometoearthstories.com/

       Mark from the History of North America

       https://www.markvinet.com/

       Timothy Brien

       Create Art Podcast - https://www.createartpodcast.com/

       Find a Podcast About https://www.findapodcastabout.xyz/

       Zoe - Back Look Cinema

       https://www.backlookcinema.com/

       Dave Jackson - School of Podcasting

       https://learn.schoolofpodcasting.com

       The Wealth of Connection: A New Approach to Making Business Personal

       https://geni.us/wealth-of-connection

       The Audience Is Listening: A Little Guide to Building a Big Podcast

       https://geni.us/tomwebsterbook

       Because of My Podcast - Vincent Pugliese

       Unconference - https://totallifefreedom.kartra.com/page/unconferenceVIPpricing

       Vincent on episode 862

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Don't Let Your Poor Upbringing Stop Your From Starting Your Podcast

       If you grew up attempting to get the attention of your parents, friends, and others but couldn't, podcasting is THE way to get your message out to the WORLD. The School of Podcasting allows you to: Learn at your own pace Network with other brilliant podcasters Get UNLIMITED one-on-one coaching with Dave Jackson

       School of Podcasting

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>58bce7f6-b439-4729-8b4c-b8d030a2fa49Mon, 05 Aug 2024 00:15:00 -040046:04falsefull943943Because of My Podcast: Dave EditionMy last day at Libsyn was July 12th, 2024. I'm starting a new chapter in my podcasting career, and so to announce the next chapter, I thought it might be fun (and maybe inspirational? ) for newbies to see what is possible with a podcast. Last week I talked about my journey through technology. I explained that where I am now is NOT where I started and it took years to get here. Today I'm talking about the most important benefit of podcasting (and it's not money, or fame). It's relationships.

       You will see that one teacher gave me a nudge. Once I started podcasting (because it was WAY HARDER in 2005), when I wasn't working on making GREAT content, I was working on growing my network through relationships. I am still in contact with many of those today.

       Your Podcast Leads To Opportunities

       You are seen as an expert (no matter if you want to be or not) and that positioning leads to opportunities. Those opportunities lead to relationships. Those new relationships lead to more opportunities. If you DON'T QUIT, the wheel keeps turning. It does not happen overnight, and it might take years. Some might say I have first mover advantage. Let's say that is true. So did a whole lot of other people. There is one big difference. I didn't quit. I'm still here.

       Opportunities Lead to Relationships

       I had Spreaker, Blubrry, and Libsyn representatives on my show. I would see these people at events. Your podcast can be a digital resume. When the New Media Expo needed a new head for their podcasting track, all of these hosting companies had one name they recommended: Dave Jackson.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Today in Podcasting

       Podcasters Roundtable

       More Podcast Money

       Podcasting for Profit

       Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

       Podcast Awards

       The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

       The Audience is Listening - Tom Webster

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       ]]>My last day at Libsyn was July 12th, 2024. I'm starting a new chapter in my podcasting career, and so to announce the next chapter, I thought it might be fun (and maybe inspirational? ) for newbies to see what is possible with a podcast. Last week I talked about my journey through technology. I explained that where I am now is NOT where I started and it took years to get here. Today I'm talking about the most important benefit of podcasting (and it's not money, or fame). It's relationships.

       You will see that one teacher gave me a nudge. Once I started podcasting (because it was WAY HARDER in 2005), when I wasn't working on making GREAT content, I was working on growing my network through relationships. I am still in contact with many of those today.

       Your Podcast Leads To Opportunities

       You are seen as an expert (no matter if you want to be or not) and that positioning leads to opportunities. Those opportunities lead to relationships. Those new relationships lead to more opportunities. If you DON'T QUIT, the wheel keeps turning. It does not happen overnight, and it might take years. Some might say I have first mover advantage. Let's say that is true. So did a whole lot of other people. There is one big difference. I didn't quit. I'm still here.

       Opportunities Lead to Relationships

       I had Spreaker, Blubrry, and Libsyn representatives on my show. I would see these people at events. Your podcast can be a digital resume. When the New Media Expo needed a new head for their podcasting track, all of these hosting companies had one name they recommended: Dave Jackson.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Today in Podcasting

       Podcasters Roundtable

       More Podcast Money

       Podcasting for Profit

       Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

       Podcast Awards

       The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

       The Audience is Listening - Tom Webster

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       ]]>18b13ea3-3aa6-439c-ad40-b48b7a52b0aaMon, 29 Jul 2024 07:15:00 -040058:05falsefull942942Dave Jackson’s Journey from Basic Gear to Professional PodcastingI had two people ask me about the "Behind the Scenes" operations of the School of Podcasting. I was nervous about doing this episode. If you're new to the show, I normally don't talk about myself for 47 minutes. As I had two people ask similar questions, I thought I'd share information about:

       Where I Started (start ugly - great book)

       My first podcast setup

       My first "business office"

       Why and how I upgraded (and why you probably don't need to).

       What I'm using now for the podcast and the business.

       I also mention the Podcaster Happy Hour (check out this new networking and education event).

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Ask Ralph Christian Finance Show

       NoseyAF Show

       The Pharmacists Voice

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Sendfox

       TidyCal

       Podpage

       Elgato Streamdeck

       Elgato Facecam Pro

       Logitech C920

       Elgato Key Light

       Affordable Lighting

       Ev RE320 Microphone

       Shure SM7B

       Podmic USB

       Captivate

       Buzzsprout

       Blubrry

       Libsyn

       Red Circle

       Less Annoying CRM

       Capsho

       Castmagic

       Wave Business Software (you might check out Moxie as well)

       Heartbeat Community

       Zenler Course Hosting

       Camtasia Video Editor

       Ecamm

       Descript

       EvMux

       De Room Plugin

       DxRevive Pro

       Dialogue Enhance

       Scheps Omni Channel

       Ray Edwards ClarityScribe

       Eleven Labs

       Impact Varipole

       Mentioned in this episode:

       You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

       You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       ]]>I had two people ask me about the "Behind the Scenes" operations of the School of Podcasting. I was nervous about doing this episode. If you're new to the show, I normally don't talk about myself for 47 minutes. As I had two people ask similar questions, I thought I'd share information about:

       Where I Started (start ugly - great book)

       My first podcast setup

       My first "business office"

       Why and how I upgraded (and why you probably don't need to).

       What I'm using now for the podcast and the business.

       I also mention the Podcaster Happy Hour (check out this new networking and education event).

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Ask Ralph Christian Finance Show

       NoseyAF Show

       The Pharmacists Voice

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Sendfox

       TidyCal

       Podpage

       Elgato Streamdeck

       Elgato Facecam Pro

       Logitech C920

       Elgato Key Light

       Affordable Lighting

       Ev RE320 Microphone

       Shure SM7B

       Podmic USB

       Captivate

       Buzzsprout

       Blubrry

       Libsyn

       Red Circle

       Less Annoying CRM

       Capsho

       Castmagic

       Wave Business Software (you might check out Moxie as well)

       Heartbeat Community

       Zenler Course Hosting

       Camtasia Video Editor

       Ecamm

       Descript

       EvMux

       De Room Plugin

       DxRevive Pro

       Dialogue Enhance

       Scheps Omni Channel

       Ray Edwards ClarityScribe

       Eleven Labs

       Impact Varipole

       Mentioned in this episode:

       You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

       You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       ]]>04175372-7666-446c-84f1-29e792903b59Mon, 22 Jul 2024 00:15:00 -040049:24falsefull941941How To Read Without Sounding Like You're Reading with Jodi Krangle.Some people can "riff" off the top of their heads, while others need a script. Do whatever works for you, but when it SOUNDS LIKE YOU'RE READING, it can lose listeners. Today, I bring in Professional Voiceover Artist Jodi Krangle to give us some tips on how to sound natural. She also shares some insights on the voiceover industry and her pet peeves in podcasting.

       Find Jodi at www.voiceroversandvocals.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Jodi Krangle www.voiceroversandvocals.com

       HyperX Condensor Microphone (aff)

       Sennheiser 416 (aff)

       Good, Quick, Cheap - You can only pick 2

       Jodi on Ask the Podcast Coach

       Supercast - Sell Premium Content

       Guardian Downcast

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

       You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>Some people can "riff" off the top of their heads, while others need a script. Do whatever works for you, but when it SOUNDS LIKE YOU'RE READING, it can lose listeners. Today, I bring in Professional Voiceover Artist Jodi Krangle to give us some tips on how to sound natural. She also shares some insights on the voiceover industry and her pet peeves in podcasting.

       Find Jodi at www.voiceroversandvocals.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than five questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Question of the Month

       Some podcasters spend time putting in chapters that include artwork and links. Where are you when it comes to chapters? Did you know they exist? Do you use them in your show? As a listener, do you like them? Hate them? Click the link and let me know (and don't forget the name, elevator pitch, and link to your show). I need your answer by 9/27

       Click Here to Upload/Record Your Answer

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be?

       I'll be speaking at Podcast Movement in Washington DC August 19-22.

       Ecamm Creator Camp October 15-18 in (Bostonish MA)

       I'll be speaking at Podindy.com on November 9th

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Want me to speak at your event or online meetup, contact me here.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Jodi Krangle www.voiceroversandvocals.com

       HyperX Condensor Microphone (aff)

       Sennheiser 416 (aff)

       Good, Quick, Cheap - You can only pick 2

       Jodi on Ask the Podcast Coach

       Supercast - Sell Premium Content

       Guardian Downcast

       Mentioned in this episode:

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       You Have A Message That Needs to Be Heard

       You have a message that needs to be shared. Discover the art of podcasting at the School of Podcasting. We teach you to shine a light on your stories, inspiring others one episode at a time. Let your voice be your legacy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>68111b59-2236-4013-aa5e-018b5a95c531Mon, 15 Jul 2024 00:15:00 -040045:23falsefull940940Live Podcast Makeover: Fixing Show Positioning and Hooks with Stephanie GrahamToday's episode is an exciting one as we introduce a brand-new show, "Podcasting Hot Seat." This fresh concept blends the best elements of the Podcast Review Show and the Podcast Rodeo Show. Our inaugural guest on Podcasting Hot Seat is the multi-talented Stephanie Graham. We will discuss her engaging podcast, "Nosy AF," her vibrant art practice, and the challenges and triumphs of maintaining a successful online presence.

       Want a turn in the Podcast Hot Seat? See www.podcasthotseat.com/store

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer.

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       NoseyAF Podcast

       Stephanie Graham's Website

       Follow the Nosey AF show

       Podcast Talent Coach Show 500

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Podcast Review Show

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>Today's episode is an exciting one as we introduce a brand-new show, "Podcasting Hot Seat." This fresh concept blends the best elements of the Podcast Review Show and the Podcast Rodeo Show. Our inaugural guest on Podcasting Hot Seat is the multi-talented Stephanie Graham. We will discuss her engaging podcast, "Nosy AF," her vibrant art practice, and the challenges and triumphs of maintaining a successful online presence.

       Want a turn in the Podcast Hot Seat? See www.podcasthotseat.com/store

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer.

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       NoseyAF Podcast

       Stephanie Graham's Website

       Follow the Nosey AF show

       Podcast Talent Coach Show 500

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Podcast Review Show

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>e50cd16e-7e7e-4525-805a-1898a516fc8aMon, 08 Jul 2024 21:01:00 -040047:29falsefull939939Maximize Listener Engagement with Effective Podcast Interview Strategies How to Ensure Your Podcast Guests Shine:

       Understanding your audience is non-negotiable when crafting an exceptional podcast. All good podcasters start by clearly identifying their audience. Are you catering to 24-year-old women or 59-year-old women? Knowing your audience is essential to producing content that resonates. This involves diligent research to understand your listeners' preferences and needs.

       Today, we're talking about how to do ENGAGING interviews as well as how to GET MORE INTERVIEWS.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer.

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Video Version on Libsyn's YouTube

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Your Podcast Website

       Tidycal

       Acuity Scheduling

       Calendly

       Podmatch and Podcastguests

       This is episode 938 of the School of Podcasting

       This show uses chapters making it easy for you to jump from subject to subject. If your app doesn't support chapters, try it. Apple Podcasts, Overcast, or Podcast Guru

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

       School of Podcasting

       ]]> How to Ensure Your Podcast Guests Shine:

       Understanding your audience is non-negotiable when crafting an exceptional podcast. All good podcasters start by clearly identifying their audience. Are you catering to 24-year-old women or 59-year-old women? Knowing your audience is essential to producing content that resonates. This involves diligent research to understand your listeners' preferences and needs.

       Today, we're talking about how to do ENGAGING interviews as well as how to GET MORE INTERVIEWS.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer.

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Video Version on Libsyn's YouTube

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Your Podcast Website

       Tidycal

       Acuity Scheduling

       Calendly

       Podmatch and Podcastguests

       This is episode 938 of the School of Podcasting

       This show uses chapters making it easy for you to jump from subject to subject. If your app doesn't support chapters, try it. Apple Podcasts, Overcast, or Podcast Guru

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       See Your Show On Podpage

       If you host a podcast, your website should work as hard as your episodes do. At Podpage, we automatically create a beautiful, professional site for your show — complete with episode pages, transcripts, audio players, SEO optimization, and built-in tools to grow your audience. No design work. No plugins. No ongoing maintenance. In less than a minute, you can see exactly what your podcast would look like on Podpage. Go to podpage.com/preview and generate your free preview site now. (No Credit Card Required) See your show the way it should look.

       Podpage

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Feeling overwhelmed by the world of podcasting? The School of Podcasting is your sanctuary of simplicity and support. We understand that navigating equipment choices, content planning, and audience growth can be daunting. That's why we've designed our courses to break down every aspect into manageable, clear steps, making it easy for you to focus on what truly matters: your content. With access to my twenty years of experience, you'll gain the confidence to silence the chaos and amplify your unique voice. Embrace podcasting with clarity and ease—let the School of Podcasting be your guide through the noise

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>885aee4a-723c-4d1e-8792-01d31d34466dMon, 01 Jul 2024 04:00:00 -040056:25falsefull938938Different Input - Different ShowToday we talk about if your show is feeling stale, maybe a change of input could help. One form of content that might be getting overlooked is books. In addition to libraries, there are online tools. In Ohio we have Libby and Hoopla Digital that allow you to listen audiobooks for free. Spotify has recently added audiobooks to their service and Amazon has Audible.

       When you change the information that is feeding your brain, you change the output of your show.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Contributors

       Zo from Back Look Cinema https://www.backlookcinema.com/podcast

       J from Okie Bookcast https://www.okiebookcast.com/

       John Finkelde - Grow a Healthy Church https://growahealthychurch.com/

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories https://welcometoearthstories.com/

       Mark from Practical Prepping https://practicalprepping.info/

       Mike from the 70's Vs the 80s https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-70s-vs-the-80s/id1527870389

       (mike buy a domain at coolerwebsites.com and point at something).

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish https://www.livewellandflourish.com

       Mark From PodcastBranding.co https://www.resourcefuldesigner.com/

       Ralph From Ask Ralph Show (Personal Finance from a Christian Perspective) https://www.askralphpodcast.com

       Books Mentioned

       Old Man's War https://amzn.to/3zfJ6ru

       Bird by Bird https://amzn.to/45zUB9p

       Crucial Conversations https://amzn.to/3XAGOxp

       The Giving Tree https://amzn.to/4bl2658

       Success Principles https://amzn.to/3KXKTnI

       Born to Run https://amzn.to/4cyWNjO

       Letters From a Stoic https://amzn.to/3VCfOLl

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt

       Storybrand https://amzn.to/3VEY81o

       How to Win Friends and Influence People https://amzn.to/4esKCqi

       Mastering Your Finances (Free when you sign up for newsletter) https://www.askralphpodcast.com

       Storyworthy by Mathew Dicks https://amzn.to/3E2HCxp

       Profit From Your Podcast https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

       Other Items

       00:25:39 - Quit Encouraging Fraud

       00:28:43 - Weird Spotify Video Thing

       00:31:53 - Eyes on Streamyard https://supportthisshow.com/streamyard

       00:33:30 - Podcast Rewind:

       EO Fire https://www.eofire.com/podcast/davejackson/

       00:34:16 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       00:37:14 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>Today we talk about if your show is feeling stale, maybe a change of input could help. One form of content that might be getting overlooked is books. In addition to libraries, there are online tools. In Ohio we have Libby and Hoopla Digital that allow you to listen audiobooks for free. Spotify has recently added audiobooks to their service and Amazon has Audible.

       When you change the information that is feeding your brain, you change the output of your show.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Contributors

       Zo from Back Look Cinema https://www.backlookcinema.com/podcast

       J from Okie Bookcast https://www.okiebookcast.com/

       John Finkelde - Grow a Healthy Church https://growahealthychurch.com/

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories https://welcometoearthstories.com/

       Mark from Practical Prepping https://practicalprepping.info/

       Mike from the 70's Vs the 80s https://podcasts.apple.com/us/podcast/the-70s-vs-the-80s/id1527870389

       (mike buy a domain at coolerwebsites.com and point at something).

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish https://www.livewellandflourish.com

       Mark From PodcastBranding.co https://www.resourcefuldesigner.com/

       Ralph From Ask Ralph Show (Personal Finance from a Christian Perspective) https://www.askralphpodcast.com

       Books Mentioned

       Old Man's War https://amzn.to/3zfJ6ru

       Bird by Bird https://amzn.to/45zUB9p

       Crucial Conversations https://amzn.to/3XAGOxp

       The Giving Tree https://amzn.to/4bl2658

       Success Principles https://amzn.to/3KXKTnI

       Born to Run https://amzn.to/4cyWNjO

       Letters From a Stoic https://amzn.to/3VCfOLl

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt

       Storybrand https://amzn.to/3VEY81o

       How to Win Friends and Influence People https://amzn.to/4esKCqi

       Mastering Your Finances (Free when you sign up for newsletter) https://www.askralphpodcast.com

       Storyworthy by Mathew Dicks https://amzn.to/3E2HCxp

       Profit From Your Podcast https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book

       Other Items

       00:25:39 - Quit Encouraging Fraud

       00:28:43 - Weird Spotify Video Thing

       00:31:53 - Eyes on Streamyard https://supportthisshow.com/streamyard

       00:33:30 - Podcast Rewind:

       EO Fire https://www.eofire.com/podcast/davejackson/

       00:34:16 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       00:37:14 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Mark from Practical Prepping had been podcasting for a while, but after joining the School of Podcasting, his podcast grew at a faster rate. His Facebook group has over 30,000 members! Join the School of Podcasting and get access to: Step-by-step tutorials An amazing podcast community Unlimited One-On-One Coaching Join today worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee!

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>7da76b98-35f5-4aad-bae4-519d05699f39Mon, 24 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -040038:04falsefull937937Opinions Matter and Yours Needs to Be HeardWhy are reaction videos so popular? I mean, I can watch or listen to something and have my own reaction? Today I tie this into podcasting and how sharing your opinion can help you build your community. 

       I play clips from a show I like, one that drives me nuts, and one that will potentially offend you as it deals with pronouns (which is the whole point - how does it make you feel). 

       
       

       I also talk about brand safety and how it's not working, and maybe we shouldn't worry about it.

       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       
       

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       
       

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       
       

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       
       

       Share Your Thoughts

       
       

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       In and Around Podcasting

       Media Round Table

       TalkTV Julia Hartley-Brewer

       Sounds Profitable Podcasting is the Safest Bet

       Dave and Danny Brown on Ask the Podcast Coach

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Distorted View Daily

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Geologic Podcast - George Hrab

       Stacking Benjamins Show

       AI Goes to College

       ]]>Why are reaction videos so popular? I mean, I can watch or listen to something and have my own reaction? Today I tie this into podcasting and how sharing your opinion can help you build your community. 

       I play clips from a show I like, one that drives me nuts, and one that will potentially offend you as it deals with pronouns (which is the whole point - how does it make you feel). 

       
       

       I also talk about brand safety and how it's not working, and maybe we shouldn't worry about it.

       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       
       

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       
       

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       
       

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       
       

       Share Your Thoughts

       
       

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       In and Around Podcasting

       Media Round Table

       TalkTV Julia Hartley-Brewer

       Sounds Profitable Podcasting is the Safest Bet

       Dave and Danny Brown on Ask the Podcast Coach

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Distorted View Daily

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Geologic Podcast - George Hrab

       Stacking Benjamins Show

       AI Goes to College

       ]]>7343b2cd-8348-4df4-b080-0f4882c92939Mon, 17 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -040039:57falsefull936936Growing Your Podcast Starts With WOW ContentHow do you grow your audience? I hear this every day in every Facebook group. It starts with your content. It can't be good. It can't be great. I needs to be WOW content that your audience HAS to share. Today we talk about the ingredients that make up wow content from the book Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World by Michael Hyatt. 

       I also talk about what GOOGLE thinks is good and what stops us from making WOW content. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World

       Fly on the Wall With Dana Carvey, David Spade, and Jerry Seinfeld https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pOLgAFeC9jg

       Tom Webster Podcast Movement Keynote https://youtu.be/Ggy6Bs1FsLI?si=7QD1jz4YSzq07gB7 

       Rick Beato and Jim Barner Make Good Records https://youtu.be/klxif5McurI?si=HhcofEqxzICmjGd4&t=1313

       Sting on Rock Beato https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hkrWxHEnlEs

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:01 - It's Not Just One Thing  00:01:19 - Opening  00:01:54 - How Do I Grow? 00:02:33 - Michael Hyatt Advice https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:03:26 - Characteristics of WOW Content https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:05:18 - Anticipation 00:06:17 - Surprise 00:07:57 - Transcendence 00:08:29 - Clarity 00:08:45 - Evangelism  00:10:24 - Driveway Moments 00:11:22 - Does AI Deliver WOW Content? https://supportthisshow.com/aiwriter (aff) 00:13:07 - Back to Surprises 00:13:56 - Maybe It's Not Time To Promote Your Show https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:17:23 - It All Comes Back to Word of Mouth https://youtu.be/klxif5McurI?si=HhcofEqxzICmjGd4&t=1313  00:18:01 - Master Your Craft https://youtu.be/Ggy6Bs1FsLI?si=NBnsEKEkJzKiL9Z0  00:19:09 - What Does Google Look At? 00:19:10 - Podcast Hot Seat https://www.podcasthotseat.com  00:19:25 - Experience 00:20:10 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:20:26 - Google E.E.A.T Experience  00:22:13 - Expertise  00:24:00 - Authoritativeness  00:25:07 - AI Writer https://supportthisshow.com/aiwriter  00:25:33 - Congressional Dish https://congressionaldish.com/  00:26:11 - Trustworthiness  00:26:51 - Beiding Your Morals  00:27:43 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:28:41 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 00:29:13 - Back to the Basics  00:30:36 - Tell Us A Little Bit About Yourself  00:32:17 - Other Ingredients of Good Shows  00:36:36 - If You Want To Make Money  00:37:26 - BE AUTHENTIC  00:38:45 - Artwork Counts  00:39:45 - Get Consistency Right  00:40:49 - You Can't Get This Any Place Else  00:41:35 - Overwhelmed? That's OK  00:43:01 - What is It Michael?  00:44:43 - The Mentality of Good Content  00:46:08 - Monetizing Too Early  00:47:15 - So Many Crayons!  00:49:13 - Poor Planning and Execution  00:49:55 - Lack of Authenticity  00:50:47 - Quantity Over Quality  00:51:37 - Failure to Adapt  00:52:43 - Fear of Criticism  00:53:38 - Lack of Patience  00:55:22 - AI In Future Episode  00:55:56 - Grab Your Crayons!  00:57:13 - 3 Years to Monetize 

       ]]>How do you grow your audience? I hear this every day in every Facebook group. It starts with your content. It can't be good. It can't be great. I needs to be WOW content that your audience HAS to share. Today we talk about the ingredients that make up wow content from the book Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World by Michael Hyatt. 

       I also talk about what GOOGLE thinks is good and what stops us from making WOW content. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Got Feedback On This Episode?

       I'd love to hear what you thought about this episode. If you have a minute or two, it's less than 5 questions and works great on your phone or computer. 

       Share Your Thoughts

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World

       Fly on the Wall With Dana Carvey, David Spade, and Jerry Seinfeld https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=pOLgAFeC9jg

       Tom Webster Podcast Movement Keynote https://youtu.be/Ggy6Bs1FsLI?si=7QD1jz4YSzq07gB7 

       Rick Beato and Jim Barner Make Good Records https://youtu.be/klxif5McurI?si=HhcofEqxzICmjGd4&t=1313

       Sting on Rock Beato https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=hkrWxHEnlEs

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:01 - It's Not Just One Thing  00:01:19 - Opening  00:01:54 - How Do I Grow? 00:02:33 - Michael Hyatt Advice https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:03:26 - Characteristics of WOW Content https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:05:18 - Anticipation 00:06:17 - Surprise 00:07:57 - Transcendence 00:08:29 - Clarity 00:08:45 - Evangelism  00:10:24 - Driveway Moments 00:11:22 - Does AI Deliver WOW Content? https://supportthisshow.com/aiwriter (aff) 00:13:07 - Back to Surprises 00:13:56 - Maybe It's Not Time To Promote Your Show https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:17:23 - It All Comes Back to Word of Mouth https://youtu.be/klxif5McurI?si=HhcofEqxzICmjGd4&t=1313  00:18:01 - Master Your Craft https://youtu.be/Ggy6Bs1FsLI?si=NBnsEKEkJzKiL9Z0  00:19:09 - What Does Google Look At? 00:19:10 - Podcast Hot Seat https://www.podcasthotseat.com  00:19:25 - Experience 00:20:10 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:20:26 - Google E.E.A.T Experience  00:22:13 - Expertise  00:24:00 - Authoritativeness  00:25:07 - AI Writer https://supportthisshow.com/aiwriter  00:25:33 - Congressional Dish https://congressionaldish.com/  00:26:11 - Trustworthiness  00:26:51 - Beiding Your Morals  00:27:43 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:28:41 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 00:29:13 - Back to the Basics  00:30:36 - Tell Us A Little Bit About Yourself  00:32:17 - Other Ingredients of Good Shows  00:36:36 - If You Want To Make Money  00:37:26 - BE AUTHENTIC  00:38:45 - Artwork Counts  00:39:45 - Get Consistency Right  00:40:49 - You Can't Get This Any Place Else  00:41:35 - Overwhelmed? That's OK  00:43:01 - What is It Michael?  00:44:43 - The Mentality of Good Content  00:46:08 - Monetizing Too Early  00:47:15 - So Many Crayons!  00:49:13 - Poor Planning and Execution  00:49:55 - Lack of Authenticity  00:50:47 - Quantity Over Quality  00:51:37 - Failure to Adapt  00:52:43 - Fear of Criticism  00:53:38 - Lack of Patience  00:55:22 - AI In Future Episode  00:55:56 - Grab Your Crayons!  00:57:13 - 3 Years to Monetize 

       ]]>355fd7d4-5790-43d3-b2d4-db01a0706b94Mon, 10 Jun 2024 04:05:00 -040059:28falsefull935935Podcast Lessons From 400 Episodes with Matt CundillToday, we're thrilled to have Matt Cundill of the Sound Off Podcast as our guest. With over 25 years of experience in radio and having embarked on his podcasting journey back in 2016, Matt has reached an incredible milestone with his Sound Off podcast hitting 400 episodes.

       In this conversation, we delve into his early challenges, the critical importance of consistency, and the impact of evolving podcasting technology. Matt also shares his insights on hosting platforms, scheduling tools, and the art of podcast interviews. From discussing the differences between traditional radio and podcasting to navigating sponsorships and creative content integration, this episode is packed with valuable tips for budding podcasters.

       We'll also touch on the growing role of AI in voice acting, the importance of artwork and video in engaging listeners, and the benefits of podcast transcriptions. Plus, learn about Matt’s podcast network and his unique approach to fostering a community of podcasters through cross promos and collaborative efforts.

       Check out Matt's conversation with Dave on episode 400 at https://www.soundoffpodcast.com/dave-jackson 

       Podcast Superfriends

       You May Also Like (Podcast Recommendations)

       Matt on Facebook

       Matt on Linkedin

       Matt on Twitter/X

       Matt on Instagram

       Matt's Podcasting 2.0 Voice Overs

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Podcast Rewind

       Dave on Rocky Mountain Marketing with Katie Brinkley 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Dave on Rocky Mountain Marketing with Katie Brinkley

       Podcast Superfriends

       You May Also Like (Podcast Recommendations)

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Otter Transcriptions

       TidyCal (one time lifetime offer) Schedulging tool

       Acuity Scheduling

       This is episode 934 of the School of Podcasting.

        

        

       ]]>Today, we're thrilled to have Matt Cundill of the Sound Off Podcast as our guest. With over 25 years of experience in radio and having embarked on his podcasting journey back in 2016, Matt has reached an incredible milestone with his Sound Off podcast hitting 400 episodes.

       In this conversation, we delve into his early challenges, the critical importance of consistency, and the impact of evolving podcasting technology. Matt also shares his insights on hosting platforms, scheduling tools, and the art of podcast interviews. From discussing the differences between traditional radio and podcasting to navigating sponsorships and creative content integration, this episode is packed with valuable tips for budding podcasters.

       We'll also touch on the growing role of AI in voice acting, the importance of artwork and video in engaging listeners, and the benefits of podcast transcriptions. Plus, learn about Matt’s podcast network and his unique approach to fostering a community of podcasters through cross promos and collaborative efforts.

       Check out Matt's conversation with Dave on episode 400 at https://www.soundoffpodcast.com/dave-jackson 

       Podcast Superfriends

       You May Also Like (Podcast Recommendations)

       Matt on Facebook

       Matt on Linkedin

       Matt on Twitter/X

       Matt on Instagram

       Matt's Podcasting 2.0 Voice Overs

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Podcast Rewind

       Dave on Rocky Mountain Marketing with Katie Brinkley 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Dave on Rocky Mountain Marketing with Katie Brinkley

       Podcast Superfriends

       You May Also Like (Podcast Recommendations)

       Podcast Hot Seat

       Otter Transcriptions

       TidyCal (one time lifetime offer) Schedulging tool

       Acuity Scheduling

       This is episode 934 of the School of Podcasting.

        

        

       ]]>9fc6d9a7-c585-4cb9-9c43-0f4b470835daMon, 03 Jun 2024 04:00:00 -040050:09falsefull934934Podcasters' Insights on Leveraging YouTube for Enhanced VisibilityIn this episode, we look at how podcasters use YouTube to enhance your podcast. I asked: A) Are you not using YouTube at all?

       B) Are you creating static videos?

       C) Are you creating full videos?

       I also talk about a way to find more content using YouTube even if you're not making videos. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:01:15 - Opening  00:01:15 - People HAVING to Do YouTube? 00:02:04 - How Are You Using YouTube? 00:02:30 - Dan - Based On A True Story  https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com/  00:05:17 - Max - Aviation News talk https://aviationnewstalk.com/  00:07:37 - Craig Ingles Podcast https://www.inglespodcast.com/  00:09:15 - Kim - Pharmacists Podcast / Perrysburg  https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com 

       https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com  00:11:34 - Zo - Backlook Cinema https://www.backlookcinema.com/  00:13:30 - Mark - Markvinet.com https://www.markvinet.com  00:14:49 - Ralp - Ask Ralph Podcast (Finance) https://www.askralphpodcast.com/  00:16:06 - Bryan Relaxed Male https://www.relaxedmale.com/  00:17:17 - Paul - Pass ACLS https://passacls.com/  00:18:52 - Rich - Two Grumpy Vets and a Dude https://www.twogrumpyvets.com/  00:20:36 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:21:37 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:21:55 - Ronnie - Dancing is Forbidden https://www.dancingisforbidden.com/  00:24:46 - Todd - Guardian Downcast https://www.guardiandowncast.com/  00:28:07 - Tim - Create Art Podcast https://createartpodcast.com/ 

       https://www.findapodcastabout.xyz  00:31:25 - Dave - Walking is Fitness https://walkingisfitness.com/  00:33:27 - York - Welcome to Eartch Stories  https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:36:05 - Dave's Thoughts 00:37:30 - Check Consumption Rate 00:39:55 - Using YouTube To Check What Topics are Popular 00:41:44 - Question of the Month  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:42:43 - Live Appearances  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:43:17 - Future Episodes https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow  00:44:13 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:44:13 - New Chapter 00:45:02 - Blooper

       ]]>In this episode, we look at how podcasters use YouTube to enhance your podcast. I asked: A) Are you not using YouTube at all?

       B) Are you creating static videos?

       C) Are you creating full videos?

       I also talk about a way to find more content using YouTube even if you're not making videos. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:01:15 - Opening  00:01:15 - People HAVING to Do YouTube? 00:02:04 - How Are You Using YouTube? 00:02:30 - Dan - Based On A True Story  https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com/  00:05:17 - Max - Aviation News talk https://aviationnewstalk.com/  00:07:37 - Craig Ingles Podcast https://www.inglespodcast.com/  00:09:15 - Kim - Pharmacists Podcast / Perrysburg  https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com 

       https://www.perrysburgpodcast.com  00:11:34 - Zo - Backlook Cinema https://www.backlookcinema.com/  00:13:30 - Mark - Markvinet.com https://www.markvinet.com  00:14:49 - Ralp - Ask Ralph Podcast (Finance) https://www.askralphpodcast.com/  00:16:06 - Bryan Relaxed Male https://www.relaxedmale.com/  00:17:17 - Paul - Pass ACLS https://passacls.com/  00:18:52 - Rich - Two Grumpy Vets and a Dude https://www.twogrumpyvets.com/  00:20:36 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:21:37 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:21:55 - Ronnie - Dancing is Forbidden https://www.dancingisforbidden.com/  00:24:46 - Todd - Guardian Downcast https://www.guardiandowncast.com/  00:28:07 - Tim - Create Art Podcast https://createartpodcast.com/ 

       https://www.findapodcastabout.xyz  00:31:25 - Dave - Walking is Fitness https://walkingisfitness.com/  00:33:27 - York - Welcome to Eartch Stories  https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:36:05 - Dave's Thoughts 00:37:30 - Check Consumption Rate 00:39:55 - Using YouTube To Check What Topics are Popular 00:41:44 - Question of the Month  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:42:43 - Live Appearances  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:43:17 - Future Episodes https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow  00:44:13 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:44:13 - New Chapter 00:45:02 - Blooper

       ]]>cd8da303-67da-4b60-84d0-845ae4face18Mon, 27 May 2024 04:00:00 -040045:25falsefull933933The Impact of Your Podcast Stories and StrategiesToday I talk Mark Lawley from the Practical Prepping Show. I brought Mark on as he is a "regular guy" (retired Police Officer) who started a podcast with his wife Krista and the ball has been rolling along as their show grows (they have 14000 people in their Facebook group).

       Mark shares his journey from initial struggles to unexpected success, revealing the importance of knowing your audience, having fun, and continually learning. Join us and uncover the secrets to making your podcast not just a success but a life-saving venture!

       Find Mark and Krita at https://practicalprepping.info/ and check out the free Getting Started In Prepping free PDF

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Chapters

       00:00:00 - A Letter From Morgan  00:02:04 - Opening  00:03:15 - Mark From Practical Prepping https://practicalprepping.info/  00:03:20 - Define What You WON'T Do  00:03:39 - Why Prepping?  00:05:23 - What Was It Like Starting Out?  00:06:20 - Doing the Right Things  00:08:30 - An Important Thing to Focus On  00:10:20 - Becoming More Efficient  00:11:33 - When To Remove Ums  00:12:13 - Sponsors Came Knocking  00:14:38 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:15:42 - Your Podcast Website  00:15:56 - Improving Your Website  00:17:05 - Mark Added a Facebook Group  00:22:29 - Audience Approved Content  00:24:05 - Sell a Product or Service  00:25:15 - How Are Book Sales?  00:26:12 - Advice For New Podcasters  00:30:00 - Favorite Comments  00:31:55 - You Don't Need to be THE Expert  00:33:03 - What Does Prepared Look Like?  00:33:40 - Buy Mark a Coffee  00:35:23 - My Thoughts  00:37:37 - Question of the Month  00:38:35 - Live Appearances  00:39:18 - Start Your Podcast 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Practical Prepping Show

       Practical Prepping For Everyday People: A Common Sense Guide On Preparing For Life's Emergencies

       Getting Started In Prepping free PDF

       Practical Prepping Facebook Group

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Teachable Course Platform

        

       ]]>Today I talk Mark Lawley from the Practical Prepping Show. I brought Mark on as he is a "regular guy" (retired Police Officer) who started a podcast with his wife Krista and the ball has been rolling along as their show grows (they have 14000 people in their Facebook group).

       Mark shares his journey from initial struggles to unexpected success, revealing the importance of knowing your audience, having fun, and continually learning. Join us and uncover the secrets to making your podcast not just a success but a life-saving venture!

       Find Mark and Krita at https://practicalprepping.info/ and check out the free Getting Started In Prepping free PDF

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Chapters

       00:00:00 - A Letter From Morgan  00:02:04 - Opening  00:03:15 - Mark From Practical Prepping https://practicalprepping.info/  00:03:20 - Define What You WON'T Do  00:03:39 - Why Prepping?  00:05:23 - What Was It Like Starting Out?  00:06:20 - Doing the Right Things  00:08:30 - An Important Thing to Focus On  00:10:20 - Becoming More Efficient  00:11:33 - When To Remove Ums  00:12:13 - Sponsors Came Knocking  00:14:38 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:15:42 - Your Podcast Website  00:15:56 - Improving Your Website  00:17:05 - Mark Added a Facebook Group  00:22:29 - Audience Approved Content  00:24:05 - Sell a Product or Service  00:25:15 - How Are Book Sales?  00:26:12 - Advice For New Podcasters  00:30:00 - Favorite Comments  00:31:55 - You Don't Need to be THE Expert  00:33:03 - What Does Prepared Look Like?  00:33:40 - Buy Mark a Coffee  00:35:23 - My Thoughts  00:37:37 - Question of the Month  00:38:35 - Live Appearances  00:39:18 - Start Your Podcast 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Practical Prepping Show

       Practical Prepping For Everyday People: A Common Sense Guide On Preparing For Life's Emergencies

       Getting Started In Prepping free PDF

       Practical Prepping Facebook Group

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Teachable Course Platform

        

       ]]>172a5b26-aeec-464b-bbb8-4d77a28adf59Mon, 20 May 2024 04:30:00 -040040:38falsefull932932Adjusting Attitudes: Harnessing Persistence for Podcasting SuccessToday, I dive into the essence of keeping a positive and persistent approach to podcasting. I play guitar, and one of the reasons I'm pretty good is my attitude when learning to play. Share how you can do the same in podcasting. This gets you further than launching and keeps you going.

       In this episode, I share stories from his insightful visit to the Content Entrepreneur Expo, revealing varying opinions on the use of AI in content creation. We'll explore how consistently honing your podcasting skills can lead to significant breakthroughs, as demonstrated by Jen Hardy.

       From the power of perseverance, learning new skills, and leveraging humor and storytelling to strategic content mixing and effective use of technology, this episode is packed with guidance to help you thrive in the competitive podcasting arena. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:18 - Opening  00:00:55 - Changing Your Attitude 00:03:12 - Got a Mentor 00:03:51 - Attitude Change 00:04:54 - Podcast Ingredients 00:05:27 - What About Luck? 00:06:30 - Stealing Attention 00:08:22 - Wow Content https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:08:49 - Sydnie Christmas https://youtu.be/pjyy4tYZFDc?si=w6z5SMiPpqUGCyoF&t=85  00:11:50 - Use Your Voice 00:12:31 - AI Best Practices 00:17:18 - My Podcast Needs to Be Better 00:18:58 - Take Another Swing 00:19:33 - The First Time You... 00:23:04 - The Pieces Fall Into Place https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AjPnKHG0D8w&list=PLmaSCqWWHYpd7-ouBmhwMbh7VFRxfCvgh ) 00:24:55 - BJ Novak at CEX https://cex.events  00:27:03 - HUGE OPPORTUNITY 00:29:58 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:30:58 - NEW SHOW: Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:31:15 - How Much Did My Show Grow From Last Week? https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:32:52 - 18% Came From My Newsletter https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter  00:36:18 - Leave Feedback https://podclick.me/thoughts  00:36:36 - Podcast Rewind: Soundoff Podcast https://www.soundoffpodcast.com/dave-jackson  00:37:29 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:38:31 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/where  00:39:03 - The Notes Are There... https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:40:48 - The Wallet Story 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Episode 400 of the Sound Off Podcast with Matt Cundill

       Jen Hardy on YouTube

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World Michael Hyatt

       The Compound Effect: Jumpstart Your Income, Your Life, Your Success by Darren Hardy

       Craig From Ingles Podcast

       Content Entrepreneur Expo

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Sydnie Christmas Singing Tomorrow

       This is episode 931

       ]]>Today, I dive into the essence of keeping a positive and persistent approach to podcasting. I play guitar, and one of the reasons I'm pretty good is my attitude when learning to play. Share how you can do the same in podcasting. This gets you further than launching and keeps you going.

       In this episode, I share stories from his insightful visit to the Content Entrepreneur Expo, revealing varying opinions on the use of AI in content creation. We'll explore how consistently honing your podcasting skills can lead to significant breakthroughs, as demonstrated by Jen Hardy.

       From the power of perseverance, learning new skills, and leveraging humor and storytelling to strategic content mixing and effective use of technology, this episode is packed with guidance to help you thrive in the competitive podcasting arena. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:18 - Opening  00:00:55 - Changing Your Attitude 00:03:12 - Got a Mentor 00:03:51 - Attitude Change 00:04:54 - Podcast Ingredients 00:05:27 - What About Luck? 00:06:30 - Stealing Attention 00:08:22 - Wow Content https://geni.us/platform-michael-hyatt  00:08:49 - Sydnie Christmas https://youtu.be/pjyy4tYZFDc?si=w6z5SMiPpqUGCyoF&t=85  00:11:50 - Use Your Voice 00:12:31 - AI Best Practices 00:17:18 - My Podcast Needs to Be Better 00:18:58 - Take Another Swing 00:19:33 - The First Time You... 00:23:04 - The Pieces Fall Into Place https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AjPnKHG0D8w&list=PLmaSCqWWHYpd7-ouBmhwMbh7VFRxfCvgh ) 00:24:55 - BJ Novak at CEX https://cex.events  00:27:03 - HUGE OPPORTUNITY 00:29:58 - Join the School of Podcasting https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:30:58 - NEW SHOW: Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:31:15 - How Much Did My Show Grow From Last Week? https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:32:52 - 18% Came From My Newsletter https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter  00:36:18 - Leave Feedback https://podclick.me/thoughts  00:36:36 - Podcast Rewind: Soundoff Podcast https://www.soundoffpodcast.com/dave-jackson  00:37:29 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:38:31 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/where  00:39:03 - The Notes Are There... https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener  00:40:48 - The Wallet Story 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Episode 400 of the Sound Off Podcast with Matt Cundill

       Jen Hardy on YouTube

       Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World Michael Hyatt

       The Compound Effect: Jumpstart Your Income, Your Life, Your Success by Darren Hardy

       Craig From Ingles Podcast

       Content Entrepreneur Expo

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Sydnie Christmas Singing Tomorrow

       This is episode 931

       ]]>814053ff-499c-4711-bd15-705ce6cecc5cMon, 13 May 2024 04:00:00 -040042:36falsefull931931The Truth About Podcast Growth: It's a Marathon, Not a SprintToday we do a deeper dive into why podcasters quit before getting to 10 episodes. What causes this? We also look at topics that can turn up the heat and controversies around your show.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Dave's New Show!

       Check out yourpodcastwebsite.com or Follow the Show.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:00 - People Quit Too Soon. WHY?  00:00:38 - Opening 00:01:17 - Joe Rogan Overnight Success? 00:02:39 - Subscribers After 100 Episodes 00:03:30 - Mr. Beast 00:04:50 - 5 Million Dollars an Hour 00:06:12 - Downloads With No Promotion 00:08:09 - The Phone Book 00:09:12 - Downloads Equation 00:11:12 - More Fun Podcast Math 00:12:36 - More Ways To Measure Success 00:14:36 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:15:36 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:15:55 - The Invisible Benefit  00:17:00 - No Skin in the Game  00:18:11 - Too Hit In the Podcast Kitchen  00:20:26 - Big Companies with Small Sense  00:21:57 - Tim Poll Has Videos Removed  00:23:46 - No Shirt No Shoes No Service  00:26:07 - Rallying the Troops  00:28:24 - Think Like Me  00:28:57 - Here's a Question  00:29:30 - Celebrity Personas  00:32:27 - Dave Was JD  00:33:26 - Showtime  00:34:17 - Fake It Till Ya Make It  00:36:43 - Question of the Month 

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:37:43 - Live Appearance https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:38:16 - Start Out Aiming For Fun  00:39:52 - I Help Podcasters 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Percentage Growth Calculator

       Overcast TOS

       Why Do Podcasters Quit by Episode 5?

       Mr. Beast on Joe Rogan

       Tim IRL Has Three Videos Deleted From YouTube

       ]]>Today we do a deeper dive into why podcasters quit before getting to 10 episodes. What causes this? We also look at topics that can turn up the heat and controversies around your show.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Dave's New Show!

       Check out yourpodcastwebsite.com or Follow the Show.

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:00 - People Quit Too Soon. WHY?  00:00:38 - Opening 00:01:17 - Joe Rogan Overnight Success? 00:02:39 - Subscribers After 100 Episodes 00:03:30 - Mr. Beast 00:04:50 - 5 Million Dollars an Hour 00:06:12 - Downloads With No Promotion 00:08:09 - The Phone Book 00:09:12 - Downloads Equation 00:11:12 - More Fun Podcast Math 00:12:36 - More Ways To Measure Success 00:14:36 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:15:36 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:15:55 - The Invisible Benefit  00:17:00 - No Skin in the Game  00:18:11 - Too Hit In the Podcast Kitchen  00:20:26 - Big Companies with Small Sense  00:21:57 - Tim Poll Has Videos Removed  00:23:46 - No Shirt No Shoes No Service  00:26:07 - Rallying the Troops  00:28:24 - Think Like Me  00:28:57 - Here's a Question  00:29:30 - Celebrity Personas  00:32:27 - Dave Was JD  00:33:26 - Showtime  00:34:17 - Fake It Till Ya Make It  00:36:43 - Question of the Month 

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:37:43 - Live Appearance https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:38:16 - Start Out Aiming For Fun  00:39:52 - I Help Podcasters 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Percentage Growth Calculator

       Overcast TOS

       Why Do Podcasters Quit by Episode 5?

       Mr. Beast on Joe Rogan

       Tim IRL Has Three Videos Deleted From YouTube

       ]]>8d62ee9d-4f5c-4734-a415-b54d5e498ffcMon, 06 May 2024 04:00:00 -040040:58falsefull930930Mastering Podcast Rebranding: Lessons from the Front LinesIn this episode, we'll dive deep into the "why" behind rebranding your podcast and how vital it is to know your audience intimately, as these elements profoundly influence the content and success of your show.

       I revisit the significance of knowing your WHY before changing a podcast’s identity and content approach. I also peel back the curtain on past errors to help you pave the way for smarter future changes, fostering growth and innovation.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       ParticipantsScott From What Was That Like https://whatwasthatlike.com/  Rick from Renewed Mindsets  https://www.renewedmindsets.com/  York from Welcome To Earth Stories https://welcometoearthstories.com/  Mark from History of North America https://www.markvinet.com  Tyler from Crying is Manly https://cryingismanly.com/  Ralph From Ask Ralph https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode Quick and Dirty Tips  https://www.quickanddirtytips.com/ Mike Rowe  https://www.mikerowe.com  Podcast Review Show https://www.podcasterviewshow.com  Podcast Rodeo Show: https://www.podcastrodeoshow.com  Buzzsprout https://supportthisshow.com/buzzsprout (aff) Captivate https://supportthisshow.com/captivate (aff) Libsyn https://supportthisshow.com/libsyn (use code sopfree aff)

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:00 - Rebranding  00:00:36 - Opening  00:01:17 - The Question  00:01:46 - Scott From What Was That Like https://whatwasthatlike.com/  00:03:37 - Rick from Renewed Mindsets  https://www.renewedmindsets.com/  00:05:51 - York from Welcome To Earth Stories  https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:08:27 - Mark from History of North America https://www.markvinet.com  00:09:14 - Tyler from Crying is Manly https://cryingismanly.com/  00:10:27 - Ralph From Ask Ralph https://www.askralphpodcast.com  00:12:02 - Quick and Dirty Tips  https://www.quickanddirtytips.com/  00:13:30 - Switching Out Key Players  00:15:06 - Dave on Mike Rowe  https://www.mikerowe.com  00:16:06 - The AC/DC Fact  00:17:31 - The Way To Win  00:18:48 - Scott Made Changes Based on Community Feedback  https://www.whatwasthatlike.com  00:20:59 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:22:01 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:22:20 - Why Rebrand?  00:23:30 - Why I'm rebranding One of My Shows  https://www.podcastrodeoshow.com  00:24:10 - Stupid Mistakes  00:25:08 - New Plan  00:28:25 - Podcast Review Inights https://www.podcasterviewshow.com  00:29:22 - New Show Your Podcast Website  https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:29:59 - Buzzsprout Ads New Texting https://supportthisshow.com/buzzsprout (aff) 00:31:05 - Captivate Updates Player https://supportthisshow.com/captivate (Aff) 00:31:39 - See Picture Change  00:31:51 - Back To Normal  00:32:44 - Why I Rant About YouTube  00:35:26 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:36:27 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:36:58 - Follow the Show  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow  00:38:16 - Join the Community https://learn.schoolofpodcasting.com  00:39:06 - Bloopers 

       This show originates at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/929 

        

       ]]>In this episode, we'll dive deep into the "why" behind rebranding your podcast and how vital it is to know your audience intimately, as these elements profoundly influence the content and success of your show.

       I revisit the significance of knowing your WHY before changing a podcast’s identity and content approach. I also peel back the curtain on past errors to help you pave the way for smarter future changes, fostering growth and innovation.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       ParticipantsScott From What Was That Like https://whatwasthatlike.com/  Rick from Renewed Mindsets  https://www.renewedmindsets.com/  York from Welcome To Earth Stories https://welcometoearthstories.com/  Mark from History of North America https://www.markvinet.com  Tyler from Crying is Manly https://cryingismanly.com/  Ralph From Ask Ralph https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode Quick and Dirty Tips  https://www.quickanddirtytips.com/ Mike Rowe  https://www.mikerowe.com  Podcast Review Show https://www.podcasterviewshow.com  Podcast Rodeo Show: https://www.podcastrodeoshow.com  Buzzsprout https://supportthisshow.com/buzzsprout (aff) Captivate https://supportthisshow.com/captivate (aff) Libsyn https://supportthisshow.com/libsyn (use code sopfree aff)

       Chapter Markers:

       00:00:00 - Rebranding  00:00:36 - Opening  00:01:17 - The Question  00:01:46 - Scott From What Was That Like https://whatwasthatlike.com/  00:03:37 - Rick from Renewed Mindsets  https://www.renewedmindsets.com/  00:05:51 - York from Welcome To Earth Stories  https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:08:27 - Mark from History of North America https://www.markvinet.com  00:09:14 - Tyler from Crying is Manly https://cryingismanly.com/  00:10:27 - Ralph From Ask Ralph https://www.askralphpodcast.com  00:12:02 - Quick and Dirty Tips  https://www.quickanddirtytips.com/  00:13:30 - Switching Out Key Players  00:15:06 - Dave on Mike Rowe  https://www.mikerowe.com  00:16:06 - The AC/DC Fact  00:17:31 - The Way To Win  00:18:48 - Scott Made Changes Based on Community Feedback  https://www.whatwasthatlike.com  00:20:59 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:22:01 - Your Podcast Website https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:22:20 - Why Rebrand?  00:23:30 - Why I'm rebranding One of My Shows  https://www.podcastrodeoshow.com  00:24:10 - Stupid Mistakes  00:25:08 - New Plan  00:28:25 - Podcast Review Inights https://www.podcasterviewshow.com  00:29:22 - New Show Your Podcast Website  https://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:29:59 - Buzzsprout Ads New Texting https://supportthisshow.com/buzzsprout (aff) 00:31:05 - Captivate Updates Player https://supportthisshow.com/captivate (Aff) 00:31:39 - See Picture Change  00:31:51 - Back To Normal  00:32:44 - Why I Rant About YouTube  00:35:26 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:36:27 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:36:58 - Follow the Show  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow  00:38:16 - Join the Community https://learn.schoolofpodcasting.com  00:39:06 - Bloopers 

       This show originates at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/929 

        

       ]]>36a71eb3-acaf-4303-b7f5-12b87392923cMon, 29 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -040039:41falsefull929929Podcasting's Deep Connection With Alban BrookeAlban Brooke has been at Buzzsprout for almost ten years and is the head of Marketing. Today we talk about some new features to manage your show in Buzzsprout along with the attitude and expectations to make it in the long game of podcasting. 
       Connect with Alban Brooke

       Check out Buzzcast

       Connect with Alban on Twitter @albanbrooke

       Some of the links on this page are affiliate links, I earn from qualifying purchases, but you do not pay any additional fee.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Buzzsprout Features Mention

       • New iOs App (monitoring, sharing, updates)
       • Dynamic Chapters
       • Pre and Post Rolls
       • Buzzsprout Ads (available to anyone)
       
       

       For more information see my affiliate link.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Buzzsprout

       Episode 793 on Media Hosts

       Free Podcast Courses

       Podcasting Resources Show

       Buzzsprout Ads

       Slick Text

       Dave's Appearances in a Spotify Playlist

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

        

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

        

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>Alban Brooke has been at Buzzsprout for almost ten years and is the head of Marketing. Today we talk about some new features to manage your show in Buzzsprout along with the attitude and expectations to make it in the long game of podcasting. 
       Connect with Alban Brooke

       Check out Buzzcast

       Connect with Alban on Twitter @albanbrooke

       Some of the links on this page are affiliate links, I earn from qualifying purchases, but you do not pay any additional fee.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Buzzsprout Features Mention

       • New iOs App (monitoring, sharing, updates)
       • Dynamic Chapters
       • Pre and Post Rolls
       • Buzzsprout Ads (available to anyone)
       
       

       For more information see my affiliate link.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Buzzsprout

       Episode 793 on Media Hosts

       Free Podcast Courses

       Podcasting Resources Show

       Buzzsprout Ads

       Slick Text

       Dave's Appearances in a Spotify Playlist

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

        

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

        

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>0b29a4ed-89c5-4443-ae0c-abedd7bb842fMon, 22 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -040042:46falsefull928928Mastering Social Media for Podcast Growth with Expert Katie BrinkleyWelcome to the School of Podcasting! In today's exhilarating episode, we dove deep into the art of leveraging social media to supercharge your podcast. Join me, Dave Jackson, and social media strategist Katie Brinkley as we unpack the power of the 4 pillars strategy—awareness, education, elaboration, and storytelling—to captivate your audience.

       Discover the secret sauce to building a dedicated community, why consistent posting trumps timing, and the essential tools for tracking and enhancing your social connect. 

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Connect with Katie Brinkley

       Katies Resources

       Katie on Instragram

       Katie on Facebook

       Katie's Book The Social Shift

       Rocky Mountain Marketing

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Because of My Podcast : Neil Scott Wins an Award

       Check out Neil's show Recovery Coast to Coast

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Katie's Book The Social Shift Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>Welcome to the School of Podcasting! In today's exhilarating episode, we dove deep into the art of leveraging social media to supercharge your podcast. Join me, Dave Jackson, and social media strategist Katie Brinkley as we unpack the power of the 4 pillars strategy—awareness, education, elaboration, and storytelling—to captivate your audience.

       Discover the secret sauce to building a dedicated community, why consistent posting trumps timing, and the essential tools for tracking and enhancing your social connect. 

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Connect with Katie Brinkley

       Katies Resources

       Katie on Instragram

       Katie on Facebook

       Katie's Book The Social Shift

       Rocky Mountain Marketing

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Because of My Podcast : Neil Scott Wins an Award

       Check out Neil's show Recovery Coast to Coast

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Katie's Book The Social Shift Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>f7c85d6f-929d-43ea-a957-fac01609915aMon, 15 Apr 2024 04:00:00 -040045:01falsefull927927Insights and Surprises: Podcast Movement Reflections with Dave JacksonI'm back from Podcast Movement Evolutions in LA. I learned some cool stuff, and YouTube did a presentation and I point out the good, the bad, and the confusing. 

       I also point out some people who got busted doing things that could really damage podcasting's integrity.

       My friends Harry and Kevin boil down podcast monetization to a single question.

       I've got a new giveaway, that gets you educated and promoted at the same time. 

       ]]>I'm back from Podcast Movement Evolutions in LA. I learned some cool stuff, and YouTube did a presentation and I point out the good, the bad, and the confusing. 

       I also point out some people who got busted doing things that could really damage podcasting's integrity.

       My friends Harry and Kevin boil down podcast monetization to a single question.

       I've got a new giveaway, that gets you educated and promoted at the same time. 

       ]]>047b3559-4c85-45dd-a082-79aae9f20dfeMon, 08 Apr 2024 04:05:00 -040033:54falsefull926926Crafting Engaging Content: Insights from Joe PulizziI am so excited to have Joe Pulizzi on the show today. Joe has been creating great podcasts like Content Inc., and This Old Marketing show for years to coincide with his amazing books like Content Inc., Epic Content and  The Content Entrepreneur. 

       Joe also created and sold the Content Marketing Institute and is now the man behind the Content Entrepreneur Expo (May 5-7, 2024, in Cleveland, Ohio). Use the coupon JP100 to save $100.

       In 2014, he received the "Lifetime Achievement Award" by the Content Council. He successfully exited CMI in 2016 and wrote an award-winning mystery novel, The Will to Die.

       In other words people, Joe is a "Big Shot Smarty Pants" (the highest level of coolness here at the SOP). Get your pencils ready.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Joe's books: Content Inc., Epic Content and  The Content Entrepreneur. 

       Joe's Podcasts: Content Inc., and This Old Marketing

       Joe's Website: https://www.joepulizzi.com/

       Joe's Newsletters: The Tilt, and the Orangeletter.

       Content Entrepreneur Expo (Coupon JP100)

       Book Launch Secrets Course

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

        

       Podcasting 2.0 Chapters

       00:00:01 - Why Joe is Here? 00:00:24 - Opening  00:01:23 - Joe Pullizzi Interview 00:01:48 - Joe is a Good Guy 00:02:34 - The Tilt Newsletter (https://www.thetilt.com/) 00:04:19 - What is Content Marketing? 00:06:02 - Where to Start When There is No Audience? 00:08:32 - Davus Interruptus How to Sell in a Balanced Way 00:11:37 - Joe Knows What I Want 00:12:16 - Tracking Marketing Success? 00:14:32 - The Orange Newsletter (https://www.joepulizzi.com/signup/ ) 00:17:16 - You Don't Need to Be Everywhere 00:20:50 - What is Engaging Content? 00:24:59 - How Long Does it Take to Build An Audience? 00:27:42 - Lessons Learned From Mistakes 00:29:22 - Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free  00:30:23 - Podcasting Checklist (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/checklist) 00:30:37 - What Joe Would Do Differently? 00:33:47 - Content Entrepreneur Expo (https://cex.events) 00:35:40 - Do These Tips Apply For Entertainment Shows?  00:40:39 - Networking At CEX  00:41:50 - CEX.EVENTS COUPON JP100  00:43:22 - Don't Just Take Notes  00:44:34 - My Takeaways  00:46:19 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:47:20 - Profit From Your Podcast (https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book ) 00:47:53 - Book Launch Secrets (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunchsecrets ) 00:48:32 - Can You Share the Show?  00:49:49 - Bloopers - Polishing Content  

       ]]>I am so excited to have Joe Pulizzi on the show today. Joe has been creating great podcasts like Content Inc., and This Old Marketing show for years to coincide with his amazing books like Content Inc., Epic Content and  The Content Entrepreneur. 

       Joe also created and sold the Content Marketing Institute and is now the man behind the Content Entrepreneur Expo (May 5-7, 2024, in Cleveland, Ohio). Use the coupon JP100 to save $100.

       In 2014, he received the "Lifetime Achievement Award" by the Content Council. He successfully exited CMI in 2016 and wrote an award-winning mystery novel, The Will to Die.

       In other words people, Joe is a "Big Shot Smarty Pants" (the highest level of coolness here at the SOP). Get your pencils ready.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Joe's books: Content Inc., Epic Content and  The Content Entrepreneur. 

       Joe's Podcasts: Content Inc., and This Old Marketing

       Joe's Website: https://www.joepulizzi.com/

       Joe's Newsletters: The Tilt, and the Orangeletter.

       Content Entrepreneur Expo (Coupon JP100)

       Book Launch Secrets Course

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

        

       Podcasting 2.0 Chapters

       00:00:01 - Why Joe is Here? 00:00:24 - Opening  00:01:23 - Joe Pullizzi Interview 00:01:48 - Joe is a Good Guy 00:02:34 - The Tilt Newsletter (https://www.thetilt.com/) 00:04:19 - What is Content Marketing? 00:06:02 - Where to Start When There is No Audience? 00:08:32 - Davus Interruptus How to Sell in a Balanced Way 00:11:37 - Joe Knows What I Want 00:12:16 - Tracking Marketing Success? 00:14:32 - The Orange Newsletter (https://www.joepulizzi.com/signup/ ) 00:17:16 - You Don't Need to Be Everywhere 00:20:50 - What is Engaging Content? 00:24:59 - How Long Does it Take to Build An Audience? 00:27:42 - Lessons Learned From Mistakes 00:29:22 - Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free  00:30:23 - Podcasting Checklist (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/checklist) 00:30:37 - What Joe Would Do Differently? 00:33:47 - Content Entrepreneur Expo (https://cex.events) 00:35:40 - Do These Tips Apply For Entertainment Shows?  00:40:39 - Networking At CEX  00:41:50 - CEX.EVENTS COUPON JP100  00:43:22 - Don't Just Take Notes  00:44:34 - My Takeaways  00:46:19 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:47:20 - Profit From Your Podcast (https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book ) 00:47:53 - Book Launch Secrets (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunchsecrets ) 00:48:32 - Can You Share the Show?  00:49:49 - Bloopers - Polishing Content  

       ]]>078b9f9f-16c4-4c46-aaed-5aa4f42d4d26Mon, 01 Apr 2024 04:05:00 -040051:28falsefull925925What is Podcasting 2.0? Transforming Listener Engagement and EarningsWelcome to another enlightening episode of the School of Podcasting, where your host, Dave Jackson, invites you on a deep dive into the exciting world of Podcasting 2.0. Join us as we explore the dramatic shift from traditional podcast monetization to earning directly through satoshis, capturing the real impact of this new revenue model with personal stories of enhanced earnings.

       This episode is a must-listen for all podcast enthusiasts and creators seeking to keep up with the latest trends and features reshaping the podcasting landscape. From Dave's analysis of Google shifting from Google Podcasting to YouTube Music and the quest for the ultimate podcasting app, to a candid review of options like Podorama, Podcast Guru, and truefans.fm, you’ll get an insider's perspective on navigating the changing podcasting ecosystem.

       There is a website to help at podcasting2.org, but first we need to know where to start when it comes to explaining why you should be involved.

       What did you think of this episode? LET ME KNOW

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Participants

       Ethan at https://dailysportshistory.com/ 

       Ralph from https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       Zo from https://www.backlookcinema.com 

       York from https://www.welcometoearthstories.com 

       Brandon from https://brandonreads.github.io

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - From Here to There  00:01:18 - Opening 00:02:01 - Podcasting 2.0 Initiative 00:04:32 - Ethan Resse 00:06:11 - Ralph Estep Jr. 00:07:24 - Zo Richardson 00:09:54 - Brandon Brinkley 00:14:02 - York 00:18:03 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:19:03 - Podcast Launch Checklist 00:19:20 - Understanding Podcasting 2.0 00:20:04 - Podroll 00:20:55 - Transcripts 00:21:08 - Value Options 00:28:13 - Programmatic Ads Vs Value For Value 00:32:45 - Cross App Comments 00:33:41 - Why Not? It's Free! 00:34:17 - Stats, Stats, and Stats 00:35:02 - Why Does This Exist? 00:36:52 - Total Money Received So Far 00:38:13 - My App Criteria 00:42:18 - Podurama 00:43:35 - Podcast Guru 00:44:43 - True Fans.fm 00:46:21 - Honorable Mentions 00:48:00 - Remove These Buttons 00:48:30 - Question of the Month  00:49:35 - Live Appearances  00:50:06 - Contact Support To Let them Know What You Want  00:52:40 - Podcasting 2.0 Website  00:53:34 - See You At Podcast Movement Evolutions  00:53:53 - Future Interviews  00:55:32 - Follow the Show  00:55:35 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Podcast2.org

       Get Started Video

       Truefans.fm

       Podurama Podcast App

       Podcast Guru Podcast App

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       This is episode 924

       ]]>Welcome to another enlightening episode of the School of Podcasting, where your host, Dave Jackson, invites you on a deep dive into the exciting world of Podcasting 2.0. Join us as we explore the dramatic shift from traditional podcast monetization to earning directly through satoshis, capturing the real impact of this new revenue model with personal stories of enhanced earnings.

       This episode is a must-listen for all podcast enthusiasts and creators seeking to keep up with the latest trends and features reshaping the podcasting landscape. From Dave's analysis of Google shifting from Google Podcasting to YouTube Music and the quest for the ultimate podcasting app, to a candid review of options like Podorama, Podcast Guru, and truefans.fm, you’ll get an insider's perspective on navigating the changing podcasting ecosystem.

       There is a website to help at podcasting2.org, but first we need to know where to start when it comes to explaining why you should be involved.

       What did you think of this episode? LET ME KNOW

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Participants

       Ethan at https://dailysportshistory.com/ 

       Ralph from https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       Zo from https://www.backlookcinema.com 

       York from https://www.welcometoearthstories.com 

       Brandon from https://brandonreads.github.io

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - From Here to There  00:01:18 - Opening 00:02:01 - Podcasting 2.0 Initiative 00:04:32 - Ethan Resse 00:06:11 - Ralph Estep Jr. 00:07:24 - Zo Richardson 00:09:54 - Brandon Brinkley 00:14:02 - York 00:18:03 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:19:03 - Podcast Launch Checklist 00:19:20 - Understanding Podcasting 2.0 00:20:04 - Podroll 00:20:55 - Transcripts 00:21:08 - Value Options 00:28:13 - Programmatic Ads Vs Value For Value 00:32:45 - Cross App Comments 00:33:41 - Why Not? It's Free! 00:34:17 - Stats, Stats, and Stats 00:35:02 - Why Does This Exist? 00:36:52 - Total Money Received So Far 00:38:13 - My App Criteria 00:42:18 - Podurama 00:43:35 - Podcast Guru 00:44:43 - True Fans.fm 00:46:21 - Honorable Mentions 00:48:00 - Remove These Buttons 00:48:30 - Question of the Month  00:49:35 - Live Appearances  00:50:06 - Contact Support To Let them Know What You Want  00:52:40 - Podcasting 2.0 Website  00:53:34 - See You At Podcast Movement Evolutions  00:53:53 - Future Interviews  00:55:32 - Follow the Show  00:55:35 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Podcast2.org

       Get Started Video

       Truefans.fm

       Podurama Podcast App

       Podcast Guru Podcast App

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       This is episode 924

       ]]>3229b370-9348-4fb0-aa9a-7dc4ca6c89d2Mon, 25 Mar 2024 04:00:00 -040056:37falsefull924924The Varied Faces of Video PodcastingI get the question, "Should I start a video podcast? " Should I be on YouTube? along with "I uploaded my video and it's not appearing on Spotify" daily, so this episode is to help those struggling with the idea of video. 

       I will also help you avoid a big headache and announce a new way to consume my book. 

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book (NOW AVAILABLE IN AUDIO)

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       What Apps Play Video (podcast411)

       Why Less than 1% of YouTubers Make Money

       10 Critical Facts about Video and Podcasting for Success in 2024 (Sounds Profitable)

       Steve Goldstein: The New Rules of Podcasting (Sound Off Podcast)

       Descript

       Opus Clip (AI video editor)

       All in One SEO Plugin https://supportthisshow.com/allinoneseo 

       Ubersuggest https://www.ubersuggest.com

       Soundwise - Sell Your Podcast (or in my case book)

       The New Rules of Podcasting on YouTube (Coleman Insights - HORRIBLE AUDIO WARNING)

       Million Dollar Weekend: The Surprisingly Simple Way to Launch a 7-Figure Business in 48 Hours (affiliate link)

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

       ]]>I get the question, "Should I start a video podcast? " Should I be on YouTube? along with "I uploaded my video and it's not appearing on Spotify" daily, so this episode is to help those struggling with the idea of video. 

       I will also help you avoid a big headache and announce a new way to consume my book. 

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book (NOW AVAILABLE IN AUDIO)

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       What Apps Play Video (podcast411)

       Why Less than 1% of YouTubers Make Money

       10 Critical Facts about Video and Podcasting for Success in 2024 (Sounds Profitable)

       Steve Goldstein: The New Rules of Podcasting (Sound Off Podcast)

       Descript

       Opus Clip (AI video editor)

       All in One SEO Plugin https://supportthisshow.com/allinoneseo 

       Ubersuggest https://www.ubersuggest.com

       Soundwise - Sell Your Podcast (or in my case book)

       The New Rules of Podcasting on YouTube (Coleman Insights - HORRIBLE AUDIO WARNING)

       Million Dollar Weekend: The Surprisingly Simple Way to Launch a 7-Figure Business in 48 Hours (affiliate link)

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

       ]]>102a0af7-11b5-4949-903b-3a2a4476ef9fMon, 18 Mar 2024 04:05:00 -040038:45falsefull923923Maximizing Your Podcast's Tax Deductions with Expert Ralph Estep Jr.In Episode 922, financial expert Ralph Estep Jr. joins me to discuss a topic that often trips up content creators: taxes. This episode delves into vital financial considerations for podcasters, emphasizing the importance of recognizing potential tax deductions, proactive financial tracking, and leveraging various tools.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll easily navigate your podcasting journey, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Meet Ralph Estep Jr.

       Ralph V. Estep, Jr. is a highly accomplished professional with a diverse finance, accounting, technology, and entrepreneurship background. As the principal at Saggio Management Group, Inc., he has demonstrated exceptional leadership and expertise in various roles throughout his career.

       For more information, see www.askralphpodcast.com

       Use the coupon SOP50 to save on a consultation.

       Check out his blog post about this appearance.

       Disclosure For Links Some of the links on this website are affiliate links. This means that if you click on the link and make a purchase, we may receive a commission at no additional cost to you. Please understand that we only recommend products or services that we believe will add value to our readers.

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll give great podcast services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway 

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute) courtesy of Meta Survey.

       Podcasting 2.0 Ready

       This show uses Podcasting 2.0 chapters enabling you to skip to next topic. If you're not using a new modern app check out Castamatic on the iPhone and Podcast Guru on Android.

       For more information, see www.podcasting2.org

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Toggl Time Tracker

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Podcast Review Show Ralph Episode

       Gleam Contest Tool

       Monthly Giveaway

       SOFI Banking

       Acorns App Banking

       FTC.Gov/influencers Video

       Castmagic AI Tool

       PodPage

       Fiverr Workspace (income/expense tracking)

       Wave App (income/expense tracking)

       Freshbooks

       Quickbooks

       You Need A Budget (Budget Program)

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>In Episode 922, financial expert Ralph Estep Jr. joins me to discuss a topic that often trips up content creators: taxes. This episode delves into vital financial considerations for podcasters, emphasizing the importance of recognizing potential tax deductions, proactive financial tracking, and leveraging various tools.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll easily navigate your podcasting journey, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Meet Ralph Estep Jr.

       Ralph V. Estep, Jr. is a highly accomplished professional with a diverse finance, accounting, technology, and entrepreneurship background. As the principal at Saggio Management Group, Inc., he has demonstrated exceptional leadership and expertise in various roles throughout his career.

       For more information, see www.askralphpodcast.com

       Use the coupon SOP50 to save on a consultation.

       Check out his blog post about this appearance.

       Disclosure For Links Some of the links on this website are affiliate links. This means that if you click on the link and make a purchase, we may receive a commission at no additional cost to you. Please understand that we only recommend products or services that we believe will add value to our readers.

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll give great podcast services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway 

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute) courtesy of Meta Survey.

       Podcasting 2.0 Ready

       This show uses Podcasting 2.0 chapters enabling you to skip to next topic. If you're not using a new modern app check out Castamatic on the iPhone and Podcast Guru on Android.

       For more information, see www.podcasting2.org

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Toggl Time Tracker

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Podcast Review Show Ralph Episode

       Gleam Contest Tool

       Monthly Giveaway

       SOFI Banking

       Acorns App Banking

       FTC.Gov/influencers Video

       Castmagic AI Tool

       PodPage

       Fiverr Workspace (income/expense tracking)

       Wave App (income/expense tracking)

       Freshbooks

       Quickbooks

       You Need A Budget (Budget Program)

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>6047a59b-a8af-437d-894e-548695539ddeMon, 11 Mar 2024 04:05:00 -040052:18falsefull922922Podcast Saturation: Is Your Playlist Bursting at the Seams? Today I asked my audience how full is their playlist? Are they looking for more shows? Happy with the Current Line up? Or are you already behind on the shows you follow? Is it harder to grow a podcast today than, say 5 years ago?

       I also talk about an Evernote alternative (as their price is going WAY UP) and how when things evolve, some will like it and some won't, do what is right for your show, and your sanity.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Participants/Chapters

       00:01:10 - Do People Have Room For Another Podcast? 00:01:38 - Ethan Reese https://www.dailysportshistory.com/  00:02:26 - Ralph Etep Jr https://www.askralphpodcast.com  00:02:46 - Jim Collison https://www.theaverageguy.tv  00:03:13 - Kris https://podtasticaudio.com/  00:04:25 - Mark Vinet https://www.markvinet.com/  00:05:21 - York https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:07:56 - Dave's Take 00:10:07 - Tangent: 3 Percent 00:11:20 - The Importance of Episode Titles 00:13:45 - Evernote and Changing Your Focus (https://supportthisshow.com/notejoy  00:16:15 - When You Change Your Show Changes 00:17:07 - The People Who Don'y Like You 00:17:54 - SNL Is Not For Me... 00:19:57 - TITLES, TITLES, TITLES 00:21:17 - Because of My Podcast: Live Well and Flourish  https://www.livewellandflourish.com  00:22:15 - Happy Episode 100!  https://www.livewellandflourish.com/100  00:23:39 - AI Goes to College https://www.aigoestocollege.com  00:23:50 - The Return of Michael Hyatt https://supportthisshow.com/lifefocus  00:25:29 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:26:30 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:27:02 - Podcast Rewind: Jay Franze https://jayfranze.com/episode53/  00:28:21 - Consulting Giveaway https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contest  00:28:41 - Start Your Podcast  00:29:44 - Bloopers 00:30:25 - RIP Bob Heil

       Podcast Giveaway

       How would you like to win 30 minutes of consulting?. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/contest (I'm testing a new tool).

       Podcast RewindDave appeared on the Jay Franze Show 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback, and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Today I asked my audience how full is their playlist? Are they looking for more shows? Happy with the Current Line up? Or are you already behind on the shows you follow? Is it harder to grow a podcast today than, say 5 years ago?

       I also talk about an Evernote alternative (as their price is going WAY UP) and how when things evolve, some will like it and some won't, do what is right for your show, and your sanity.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Participants/Chapters

       00:01:10 - Do People Have Room For Another Podcast? 00:01:38 - Ethan Reese https://www.dailysportshistory.com/  00:02:26 - Ralph Etep Jr https://www.askralphpodcast.com  00:02:46 - Jim Collison https://www.theaverageguy.tv  00:03:13 - Kris https://podtasticaudio.com/  00:04:25 - Mark Vinet https://www.markvinet.com/  00:05:21 - York https://welcometoearthstories.com/  00:07:56 - Dave's Take 00:10:07 - Tangent: 3 Percent 00:11:20 - The Importance of Episode Titles 00:13:45 - Evernote and Changing Your Focus (https://supportthisshow.com/notejoy  00:16:15 - When You Change Your Show Changes 00:17:07 - The People Who Don'y Like You 00:17:54 - SNL Is Not For Me... 00:19:57 - TITLES, TITLES, TITLES 00:21:17 - Because of My Podcast: Live Well and Flourish  https://www.livewellandflourish.com  00:22:15 - Happy Episode 100!  https://www.livewellandflourish.com/100  00:23:39 - AI Goes to College https://www.aigoestocollege.com  00:23:50 - The Return of Michael Hyatt https://supportthisshow.com/lifefocus  00:25:29 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question  00:26:30 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where  00:27:02 - Podcast Rewind: Jay Franze https://jayfranze.com/episode53/  00:28:21 - Consulting Giveaway https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contest  00:28:41 - Start Your Podcast  00:29:44 - Bloopers 00:30:25 - RIP Bob Heil

       Podcast Giveaway

       How would you like to win 30 minutes of consulting?. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/contest (I'm testing a new tool).

       Podcast RewindDave appeared on the Jay Franze Show 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback, and I would love your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Podurama - Spotify - Amazon- Castamatic- Podcast Guru

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>49048fb1-d9a9-49f3-875b-41f3e311b9a4Mon, 04 Mar 2024 05:05:00 -040032:31falsefull921921Overcoming Podcasting Burnout: Strategies for Staying MotivatedHey there, fellow podcasters! I'm Dave Jackson, and welcome to another episode of the School of Podcasting, where we breathe life into your podcasting journey. Today's lesson is close to my heart: "Strategies for Staying Motivated."

       We all know the drill — some days, you're on top of the world, ready to share your voice with the masses; other times, the mic might as well be a ten-ton weight. But don't fret; I'm right there with you, and together, we're going to conquer those podcasting blues.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       PodcastBranding.co

       Podcasting 2.0 Podcast

       Podcasting 2.0 Website

       Rick Beato's YouTube Channel

       Capsho AI Copywriting Tool

       Podgagement

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Growth Calculator

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Episodes About Community

       Daniel Desir

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/danielle-desir-is-building-a-deeper-engagement-in-a-facebook-group-alternative/

       Dan Miller Moved Off of Facebook https://schoolofpodcasting.com/podcast-lessons-legacy-and-love/

       Growing Valuable Podcast Content With a Facebook Group – Katie Krimitsos

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/growing-valuable-podcast-content-facebook-group-katie-krimitsos/

       Starting and Growing and ENGAGED Community That You Can Monetize with Jono Petrohilos

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/starting-and-growing-and-engaged-community-that-you-can-monetize-with-jono-petrohilos/

       Community Tools

       BetterMode ($20/month)

       Heartbeat ($49/month - I Use this)

       Circle ($99/month)

       Skool ($99/month)

       Mighty Networks ($119/month)

       Thanks Dave?

       If you found this episode helpful, consider buying me a coffee

       ]]>Hey there, fellow podcasters! I'm Dave Jackson, and welcome to another episode of the School of Podcasting, where we breathe life into your podcasting journey. Today's lesson is close to my heart: "Strategies for Staying Motivated."

       We all know the drill — some days, you're on top of the world, ready to share your voice with the masses; other times, the mic might as well be a ten-ton weight. But don't fret; I'm right there with you, and together, we're going to conquer those podcasting blues.

       Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

       Are you considering diving into the dynamic world of podcasting? Look no further! Join the School of Podcasting community today and unlock a wealth of knowledge and support tailored just for you. As someone with decades of life experience, your voice is invaluable, and podcasting offers a unique platform to share your wisdom, stories, and passions with the world.

       With our step-by-step guidance and personalized approach, you'll navigate your podcasting journey with ease, turning your ideas into captivating audio experiences. Plus, as a special bonus, use the coupon code "listener" to embark on your podcasting adventure with exclusive savings. Don't let the voice in your head hold you back – embrace the power of podcasting and join us at the School of Podcasting today!

       Go to https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       PodcastBranding.co

       Podcasting 2.0 Podcast

       Podcasting 2.0 Website

       Rick Beato's YouTube Channel

       Capsho AI Copywriting Tool

       Podgagement

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Growth Calculator

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Episodes About Community

       Daniel Desir

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/danielle-desir-is-building-a-deeper-engagement-in-a-facebook-group-alternative/

       Dan Miller Moved Off of Facebook https://schoolofpodcasting.com/podcast-lessons-legacy-and-love/

       Growing Valuable Podcast Content With a Facebook Group – Katie Krimitsos

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/growing-valuable-podcast-content-facebook-group-katie-krimitsos/

       Starting and Growing and ENGAGED Community That You Can Monetize with Jono Petrohilos

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/starting-and-growing-and-engaged-community-that-you-can-monetize-with-jono-petrohilos/

       Community Tools

       BetterMode ($20/month)

       Heartbeat ($49/month - I Use this)

       Circle ($99/month)

       Skool ($99/month)

       Mighty Networks ($119/month)

       Thanks Dave?

       If you found this episode helpful, consider buying me a coffee

       ]]>e6aec8e7-8a87-4ed0-b5df-d4e4174ca6eeMon, 26 Feb 2024 05:54:00 -040049:54falsefull920920Apple's New and Noteworthy: Behind the Scenes with Gary ArndtGary Arndt was alerted that his show was in Apple's New and Noteworthy. He didn't know how he got there, and what it meant for his show. Today he shares how being in New and Noteworthy was just the start. 

       Check out Gary's show Everything Everywhere Daily it's a daily podcast for Intellectually Curious People. Host Gary Arndt tells the stories of interesting people, places, and things from around the world and throughout history.

       Check out Gary as he prepares to bungee Jump off the Auckland Harbor Bridge ( scroll down about halfway )

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Today's Talk With Gary Arndt

       This discussion covered Gary's experience being featured on Apple's New and Noteworthy section and the significant growth it drove for his podcast. Gary saw a spike in downloads and traffic that propelled his show to the top of Apple podcast charts. While the direct impact of New and Noteworthy was small, the increased visibility helped grow his audience in a sustainable way over subsequent months.

       Is There a Clear Replacement For Google Podcasts?

       I've looked at a few apps to replace Google Podcasts. You can filter the results at https://podcasting2.org/apps to show Andoird. I talk about Truefans, Podvers, Podcast Guru, and Podcast Addict. No clear winner for me... how about you?

       Question of the Month

       Send in your answer at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Live Appearances

       See my schedule at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Everything Everywhere Daily Show

       Gary's Previous Appearance Talking Promotion

       Walking is Fitness Show

       What Podcast Strategies Are You Going to Stop in 2024, and Which Ones Will You Start? Episode

       Apple's Podcast Promotion Tools

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Simple PodcastPress Plugin

       Podcasting 2.0 Website

       TrueFans Podcast App

       Podverse Podcast App

       Podcast Guru App

       Podcast Addict App

       Fountain App

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Make Good For For Dave

       00:03:04 - Gary Arndt Has Great Info https://schoolofpodcasting.com/854 

       00:04:09 - Welcome to the Show https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:04:41 - How Do I Get Into New and Noteworthy?

       00:06:00 - Gary Arndt Interview

       00:06:50 - Gary Got Featured

       00:09:14 - Part 2 of the Story - The Charts

       00:13:02 - Month Over Month Growth

       00:14:05 - Apple Leapfrogs Over Spotify

       00:15:35 - Number 1 in History

       00:16:20 - How Do You Get Into New and Noteworthy?

       00:16:59 - Effects on Advertising

       00:18:23 - Advertising Insights

       00:20:05 - Join the Community https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:21:07 - Your Podcast Website http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:21:23 - Apple Marketing Tools

       00:25:15 - How Do You Get An Apple Player? (https://tools.applemediaservices.com/apple-podcasts)

       00:26:55 - Should I Use An Apple Player On My Website?

       00:28:36 - Android Users

       00:29:13 - Spotify Players

       00:29:36 - Put the Choice In the Listener's Hands https://supportthisshow.com/simplepodcastpress 

       00:32:20 - Google Podcast Replacement?

       00:32:56 - Two Types of Apps

       00:35:30 - My Criteria

       00:35:43 - Podcast Guru

       00:36:24 - Podverse.fm

       00:36:49 - Truefans.fm

       00:38:36 - If You Had To Pick One..

       00:39:13 - What is Podcasting 2.0?

       00:40:20 - Podcast Addict?

       00:41:02 - Top 4 Options

       00:42:32 - Podcasting 2.org https://www.podcasting2.org 

       00:42:48 - Question of the Month  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       00:43:46 - Live Appearances  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

       00:44:22 - Your Podcast Website is Coming http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:45:05 - Join the School of Podcasting  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:46:03 - Bloopers and Bonus

       00:46:33 - OMG That Image

       00:47:08 - RIP Lee Silverstein

       This show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/918 as this is episode 918. The assembly took six hours.

       ]]>Gary Arndt was alerted that his show was in Apple's New and Noteworthy. He didn't know how he got there, and what it meant for his show. Today he shares how being in New and Noteworthy was just the start. 

       Check out Gary's show Everything Everywhere Daily it's a daily podcast for Intellectually Curious People. Host Gary Arndt tells the stories of interesting people, places, and things from around the world and throughout history.

       Check out Gary as he prepares to bungee Jump off the Auckland Harbor Bridge ( scroll down about halfway )

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Today's Talk With Gary Arndt

       This discussion covered Gary's experience being featured on Apple's New and Noteworthy section and the significant growth it drove for his podcast. Gary saw a spike in downloads and traffic that propelled his show to the top of Apple podcast charts. While the direct impact of New and Noteworthy was small, the increased visibility helped grow his audience in a sustainable way over subsequent months.

       Is There a Clear Replacement For Google Podcasts?

       I've looked at a few apps to replace Google Podcasts. You can filter the results at https://podcasting2.org/apps to show Andoird. I talk about Truefans, Podvers, Podcast Guru, and Podcast Addict. No clear winner for me... how about you?

       Question of the Month

       Send in your answer at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Live Appearances

       See my schedule at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Everything Everywhere Daily Show

       Gary's Previous Appearance Talking Promotion

       Walking is Fitness Show

       What Podcast Strategies Are You Going to Stop in 2024, and Which Ones Will You Start? Episode

       Apple's Podcast Promotion Tools

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Simple PodcastPress Plugin

       Podcasting 2.0 Website

       TrueFans Podcast App

       Podverse Podcast App

       Podcast Guru App

       Podcast Addict App

       Fountain App

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Make Good For For Dave

       00:03:04 - Gary Arndt Has Great Info https://schoolofpodcasting.com/854 

       00:04:09 - Welcome to the Show https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:04:41 - How Do I Get Into New and Noteworthy?

       00:06:00 - Gary Arndt Interview

       00:06:50 - Gary Got Featured

       00:09:14 - Part 2 of the Story - The Charts

       00:13:02 - Month Over Month Growth

       00:14:05 - Apple Leapfrogs Over Spotify

       00:15:35 - Number 1 in History

       00:16:20 - How Do You Get Into New and Noteworthy?

       00:16:59 - Effects on Advertising

       00:18:23 - Advertising Insights

       00:20:05 - Join the Community https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:21:07 - Your Podcast Website http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:21:23 - Apple Marketing Tools

       00:25:15 - How Do You Get An Apple Player? (https://tools.applemediaservices.com/apple-podcasts)

       00:26:55 - Should I Use An Apple Player On My Website?

       00:28:36 - Android Users

       00:29:13 - Spotify Players

       00:29:36 - Put the Choice In the Listener's Hands https://supportthisshow.com/simplepodcastpress 

       00:32:20 - Google Podcast Replacement?

       00:32:56 - Two Types of Apps

       00:35:30 - My Criteria

       00:35:43 - Podcast Guru

       00:36:24 - Podverse.fm

       00:36:49 - Truefans.fm

       00:38:36 - If You Had To Pick One..

       00:39:13 - What is Podcasting 2.0?

       00:40:20 - Podcast Addict?

       00:41:02 - Top 4 Options

       00:42:32 - Podcasting 2.org https://www.podcasting2.org 

       00:42:48 - Question of the Month  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       00:43:46 - Live Appearances  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

       00:44:22 - Your Podcast Website is Coming http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:45:05 - Join the School of Podcasting  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       00:46:03 - Bloopers and Bonus

       00:46:33 - OMG That Image

       00:47:08 - RIP Lee Silverstein

       This show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/918 as this is episode 918. The assembly took six hours.

       ]]>dc436849-3203-4e05-81ab-1d8bf9ca78ecMon, 19 Feb 2024 05:05:00 -040047:33falsefull919919Grow Your Instagram Presence with Jeff Dwoskin's Stampede Social StrategiesIn a previous episode, Social Media was one of the top things people were NOT going to use going forward. Is it social media or are we using it wrong? Maybe by design, it's not designed to give us what we want. Enter Social Stampede a tool that lets you see how many people engaged with you, but WHO it was. Check out Stampede Social at https://www.stampede.social/ and use the coupon code dave30

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Podcasting 2.0 New Website

       Finally a website to store all things "Podcasting 2.0". Find it at  https://podcasting2.org/

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream Bitcoin to podcasters.

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Stampede Social use the coupon dave30

       Jeff's Podcast "Classic Conversations with Jeff Dwoskin"

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Switchy Link Tracker (one-time fee)

       Your Podcast Website (future podcast)

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Coming Up  00:00:33 - Opening  00:00:59 - Jeff Dwoskin Interview  00:01:56 - What Is It?  00:02:31 - What Makes It Different?  00:04:06 - Just One Link?  00:06:11 - Features and Uses  00:08:46 - Using it For Livestreams  00:09:44 - Giveaways on Stampede Social  00:12:56 - Another Cool Thing  00:15:27 - Do You Get Email Addresses  00:18:25 - Reporting  00:20:56 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:21:55 - New SHow COming http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:22:13 - What If Meta Breaks It?  00:26:12 - What Happens If I Run out of # 00:27:48 - The Power of Live  00:29:39 - Use Coupon dave30 https://www.stampede.social/  00:30:23 - Jeff's Podcast https://www.jeffisfunny.com  00:31:05 - Because of My Podcast Story 00:32:38 - Stampede Social vs Switchy 00:34:25 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:35:25 - Live Appearances (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where ) 00:36:04 - Giveaway Behind the Scenes () 00:38:45 - Podcasting 2.0 Home Page (https://www.podcasting2.org )  00:42:41 - Share This Please (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow ) 00:43:06 - Free Promotion for Your Show (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:43:55 - Join the School of Podcasting! (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener ) 00:44:24 - Bloopers

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>In a previous episode, Social Media was one of the top things people were NOT going to use going forward. Is it social media or are we using it wrong? Maybe by design, it's not designed to give us what we want. Enter Social Stampede a tool that lets you see how many people engaged with you, but WHO it was. Check out Stampede Social at https://www.stampede.social/ and use the coupon code dave30

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Podcasting 2.0 New Website

       Finally a website to store all things "Podcasting 2.0". Find it at  https://podcasting2.org/

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream Bitcoin to podcasters.

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Stampede Social use the coupon dave30

       Jeff's Podcast "Classic Conversations with Jeff Dwoskin"

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Switchy Link Tracker (one-time fee)

       Your Podcast Website (future podcast)

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Coming Up  00:00:33 - Opening  00:00:59 - Jeff Dwoskin Interview  00:01:56 - What Is It?  00:02:31 - What Makes It Different?  00:04:06 - Just One Link?  00:06:11 - Features and Uses  00:08:46 - Using it For Livestreams  00:09:44 - Giveaways on Stampede Social  00:12:56 - Another Cool Thing  00:15:27 - Do You Get Email Addresses  00:18:25 - Reporting  00:20:56 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:21:55 - New SHow COming http://www.yourpodcastwebsite.com  00:22:13 - What If Meta Breaks It?  00:26:12 - What Happens If I Run out of # 00:27:48 - The Power of Live  00:29:39 - Use Coupon dave30 https://www.stampede.social/  00:30:23 - Jeff's Podcast https://www.jeffisfunny.com  00:31:05 - Because of My Podcast Story 00:32:38 - Stampede Social vs Switchy 00:34:25 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:35:25 - Live Appearances (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where ) 00:36:04 - Giveaway Behind the Scenes () 00:38:45 - Podcasting 2.0 Home Page (https://www.podcasting2.org )  00:42:41 - Share This Please (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow ) 00:43:06 - Free Promotion for Your Show (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question ) 00:43:55 - Join the School of Podcasting! (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener ) 00:44:24 - Bloopers

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>83937a9e-7fb9-4327-8f02-0da78ff598acMon, 12 Feb 2024 05:05:00 -040045:07falsefull918918Your Podcast: What Will You Start and Stop Doing in 2024?We all know the podcasting space is an ever-changing space so I asked, What are you going to STOP doing in 2024 and will you be STARTING in 2024? The audience chimes in so we can all learn together.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Time Line and Participants

       00:00:00 - What Are You Going to Do? ()

       00:00:15 - Opening 

       00:00:51 - Recap on Emotions 

       00:01:56 - What Will You Start and Stop Doing in 2024? 

       00:02:51 - Kim Newlove https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/ 

       00:06:09 - Gary Arndt https://everything-everywhere.com/ 

       00:08:22 - Tyler Hespeler https://atravelpath.com 

       00:10:22 - Angie M Jordan https://www.angiemjordan.com/

       00:11:16 - Julie South https://www.vetstaffpodcast.com/ 

       00:13:24 - Inviting People To Your Newsletter https://podclick.me/sendfox (Aff)

       00:14:40 - Kelvin the Deaf and Blind Potter https://www.deafblindpotter.com/ 

       00:17:22 - Mark Vinet https://markvinet.com/podcast/index.html 

       00:17:56 - Affiliate Marketing Best Practices https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book 

       00:19:59 - Rick Yuhas https://www.renewedmindsets.com/ 

       00:21:26 - Ethan Resse https://www.dailysportshistory.com/ 

       00:22:53 - Ralph V. Estep, Jr https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       00:24:01 - School of Podcasting Affiliate Program  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates 

       00:24:24 - Join the School of Podcasting  https://podclick.me/listener 

       00:25:25 - Your Podcast Website Show http://yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:25:40 - Allen C. Paul https://godandgigs.com/ 

       00:28:08 - Andrea Gadsen 

       00:31:00 - Not Your Target Audience 

       00:33:40 - You CAN Press Record 

       00:34:08 - Put Your Name On Your Website 

       00:35:18 - Dave Jackson https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

       00:37:03 - Descript 101  https://supportthisshow.com/descript101 

       00:38:20 - Youtube Updates and Verbage https://www.youtube.com/@davidjackson 

       00:42:16 - Do You Know Who I Am? (Instagram influencer)

       00:43:45 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       00:44:44 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

       00:45:16 - Giveaway Update 

       00:45:53 - Follow the Show https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       00:46:22 - Save With Coupon Listener https://www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/listener

       00:46:54 - Bloopers 

       ]]>We all know the podcasting space is an ever-changing space so I asked, What are you going to STOP doing in 2024 and will you be STARTING in 2024? The audience chimes in so we can all learn together.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Time Line and Participants

       00:00:00 - What Are You Going to Do? ()

       00:00:15 - Opening 

       00:00:51 - Recap on Emotions 

       00:01:56 - What Will You Start and Stop Doing in 2024? 

       00:02:51 - Kim Newlove https://www.thepharmacistsvoice.com/ 

       00:06:09 - Gary Arndt https://everything-everywhere.com/ 

       00:08:22 - Tyler Hespeler https://atravelpath.com 

       00:10:22 - Angie M Jordan https://www.angiemjordan.com/

       00:11:16 - Julie South https://www.vetstaffpodcast.com/ 

       00:13:24 - Inviting People To Your Newsletter https://podclick.me/sendfox (Aff)

       00:14:40 - Kelvin the Deaf and Blind Potter https://www.deafblindpotter.com/ 

       00:17:22 - Mark Vinet https://markvinet.com/podcast/index.html 

       00:17:56 - Affiliate Marketing Best Practices https://www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book 

       00:19:59 - Rick Yuhas https://www.renewedmindsets.com/ 

       00:21:26 - Ethan Resse https://www.dailysportshistory.com/ 

       00:22:53 - Ralph V. Estep, Jr https://www.askralphpodcast.com 

       00:24:01 - School of Podcasting Affiliate Program  https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates 

       00:24:24 - Join the School of Podcasting  https://podclick.me/listener 

       00:25:25 - Your Podcast Website Show http://yourpodcastwebsite.com 

       00:25:40 - Allen C. Paul https://godandgigs.com/ 

       00:28:08 - Andrea Gadsen 

       00:31:00 - Not Your Target Audience 

       00:33:40 - You CAN Press Record 

       00:34:08 - Put Your Name On Your Website 

       00:35:18 - Dave Jackson https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

       00:37:03 - Descript 101  https://supportthisshow.com/descript101 

       00:38:20 - Youtube Updates and Verbage https://www.youtube.com/@davidjackson 

       00:42:16 - Do You Know Who I Am? (Instagram influencer)

       00:43:45 - Question of the Month https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       00:44:44 - Live Appearances https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

       00:45:16 - Giveaway Update 

       00:45:53 - Follow the Show https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       00:46:22 - Save With Coupon Listener https://www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/listener

       00:46:54 - Bloopers 

       ]]>e769ac29-5df6-432c-8fbc-3d84bae60f99Mon, 05 Feb 2024 05:05:00 -040047:46falsefull917917Podcast Lessons, Legacy, and LoveWe lost Dan Miller a few weeks ago, and Dan was someone who I always walked about smarter after talking to him. I had him on the first episode of the Grow Your Community show, and today I'm replaying that episode. I also learned that Lee Silversteen who appeared on episode 539 has run out of options in regards to battling his cancer. So this episode is a bit "dark" but, well, sometimes life is dark...

       The question of the month returns next week.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       About Dan Miller

       Dan is the author of the books 48 Days to the Work (and life) You Love, No More Dreaded Mondays, Wisdom Meets Passion, and more (check out his author page at Amazon).

       His podcast is always bursting with common sense and insights that are often missing in today's business leaders. Dan speaks the truth based on his decades of helping entrepreneurs meet their goals.

       About Lee Silverstein

       Lee Silverstein was diagnosed with stage 4 colon cancer 13 years ago. He started the podcast he needed to hear when the doctor said, "You have cancer." He has inspired MULTIPLE podcasts, and his legacy will live on long after Lee. From his Facebook page, Lee recently posted:

       I feel it’s time to make this official. After close to 13 years there are no more treatment options available to me.  I have begun in-home hospice service. I’m quite comfortable and not in any pain. I have far outlived any oncologist’s predictions and I'm grateful for that. I’m at peace and have no regrets.

       You give a podcast to a teach and they see it as a tool to help people learn.

       You give a podcast to a marketer and they see it as a too tool to sell.

       You give a podcast to a guy with stage 4 colon cancer, and he sees it as a tool to inspire. (and he did).

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Grow Your Community Show 

       Lee Silverstein on episode 539

       Dan Miller on Episode 1

       Community Tools

       Heartbeat

       Circle

       Group App

       Mighty Network

       Skool

       Click here more information

       This is episode 916 of the School of Podcasting

        

        

        

       ]]>We lost Dan Miller a few weeks ago, and Dan was someone who I always walked about smarter after talking to him. I had him on the first episode of the Grow Your Community show, and today I'm replaying that episode. I also learned that Lee Silversteen who appeared on episode 539 has run out of options in regards to battling his cancer. So this episode is a bit "dark" but, well, sometimes life is dark...

       The question of the month returns next week.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       About Dan Miller

       Dan is the author of the books 48 Days to the Work (and life) You Love, No More Dreaded Mondays, Wisdom Meets Passion, and more (check out his author page at Amazon).

       His podcast is always bursting with common sense and insights that are often missing in today's business leaders. Dan speaks the truth based on his decades of helping entrepreneurs meet their goals.

       About Lee Silverstein

       Lee Silverstein was diagnosed with stage 4 colon cancer 13 years ago. He started the podcast he needed to hear when the doctor said, "You have cancer." He has inspired MULTIPLE podcasts, and his legacy will live on long after Lee. From his Facebook page, Lee recently posted:

       I feel it’s time to make this official. After close to 13 years there are no more treatment options available to me.  I have begun in-home hospice service. I’m quite comfortable and not in any pain. I have far outlived any oncologist’s predictions and I'm grateful for that. I’m at peace and have no regrets.

       You give a podcast to a teach and they see it as a tool to help people learn.

       You give a podcast to a marketer and they see it as a too tool to sell.

       You give a podcast to a guy with stage 4 colon cancer, and he sees it as a tool to inspire. (and he did).

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Grow Your Community Show 

       Lee Silverstein on episode 539

       Dan Miller on Episode 1

       Community Tools

       Heartbeat

       Circle

       Group App

       Mighty Network

       Skool

       Click here more information

       This is episode 916 of the School of Podcasting

        

        

        

       ]]>48e1d39d-0954-4f97-b2a2-7bc13bba81beMon, 29 Jan 2024 05:05:00 -040047:13falsefull916916Will “Verified” Downloads Ruin Podcast Advertising?Today I share parts of a conversation I had, but as I'm saying my negative opinion of a certain practice, I'm not saying the company, and I've replaced the actual guest with an AI-Generated voice (from 11 labs). If you plan on paying for a service to promote your show, this is a MUST LISTEN. We also talk about Apple evaporating your downloads is a GOOD thing.

       Again, the voice you hear as the "Guest" is AI generated from a transcript of the conversation.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Eleven Lab AI Voice Generator

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Time Stamps

       00:01:40 - Opening

       00:02:18 - Apple Stats Evaporates 30% Of Your Downloads

       00:05:47 - Trying Not to Get Sued

       00:07:45 - How This Service Works 

       00:09:26 - Does Your Player Preload? 

       00:11:51 - The Terms You Need to Understand 

       00:12:42 - Power Rant: Do Your Job

       00:14:57 - Make Yourself Look Good By Comparing Yourself to Something Bad 

       00:16:47 - Enter Attribution 

       00:17:30 - Working on Auto Follows 

       00:18:56 - It's Not Fake? 

       00:19:54 - How Did You Get My Information? 

       00:20:12 - Admission of Preloading/Buffering 

       00:21:23 - All About the Data 

       00:22:57 - Retargeting Equals More Ad Spend 

       00:23:38 - Verified Downloads Are Not Good Enough 

       00:24:09 - The Purpose of This Company

       00:24:31 - A Specific Case 

       00:25:41 - Retention Numbers

       00:26:18 - Cost Per Listener

       00:27:07 - History Lesson: Twitterbombing

       00:28:39 - The Takeaways 

       00:32:50 - Other Bad Stats 

       00:33:57 - My YouTube Shorts Stat 

       00:34:45 - Question of the Month 

       Bloopers

       This episode originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/915 

       ]]>Today I share parts of a conversation I had, but as I'm saying my negative opinion of a certain practice, I'm not saying the company, and I've replaced the actual guest with an AI-Generated voice (from 11 labs). If you plan on paying for a service to promote your show, this is a MUST LISTEN. We also talk about Apple evaporating your downloads is a GOOD thing.

       Again, the voice you hear as the "Guest" is AI generated from a transcript of the conversation.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Eleven Lab AI Voice Generator

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Time Stamps

       00:01:40 - Opening

       00:02:18 - Apple Stats Evaporates 30% Of Your Downloads

       00:05:47 - Trying Not to Get Sued

       00:07:45 - How This Service Works 

       00:09:26 - Does Your Player Preload? 

       00:11:51 - The Terms You Need to Understand 

       00:12:42 - Power Rant: Do Your Job

       00:14:57 - Make Yourself Look Good By Comparing Yourself to Something Bad 

       00:16:47 - Enter Attribution 

       00:17:30 - Working on Auto Follows 

       00:18:56 - It's Not Fake? 

       00:19:54 - How Did You Get My Information? 

       00:20:12 - Admission of Preloading/Buffering 

       00:21:23 - All About the Data 

       00:22:57 - Retargeting Equals More Ad Spend 

       00:23:38 - Verified Downloads Are Not Good Enough 

       00:24:09 - The Purpose of This Company

       00:24:31 - A Specific Case 

       00:25:41 - Retention Numbers

       00:26:18 - Cost Per Listener

       00:27:07 - History Lesson: Twitterbombing

       00:28:39 - The Takeaways 

       00:32:50 - Other Bad Stats 

       00:33:57 - My YouTube Shorts Stat 

       00:34:45 - Question of the Month 

       Bloopers

       This episode originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/915 

       ]]>05d974e4-fe53-4278-a864-a8dc46cfe9faMon, 22 Jan 2024 05:05:00 -040040:08falsefull915915Achieve More, Faster: The Insider's Guide to the Impactful Benefits of Hiring a CoachToday I share a story where I took information I was going to publish as an episode, but put it out as a newsletter instead as I was worried it would make me look Salesy. Today I share how I found out that message really resonated with my audience, and now I'm using it here. 

       I also share how getting a GOOD coach can save you TONS of time and HEADACHES and that is often WAY MORE than the price you are paying.

       YOU:

       • Avoid common mistakes
       • Learn the shortcuts you only learn from doing
       • If you're in a community, you get to network with or creators
       
       

       All of the above can lead to less stress, and more production. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Take One Academy (Dave's live streaming coach - affiliate)

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews Episode

       The Feed Libsyn's Official Podcast

       Love Thy Lawyer (because of my podcast story) https://www.lovethylawyer.com/ 

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction 

       00:00:19 - Opening 

       00:01:17 - I Discovered a Learning Curve 

       00:02:33 - Behind the Scenes: Salesy 

       00:04:14 - Learning New Technology 

       00:06:50 - What Options Do You Have? 

       00:07:41 - The Real Value 

       00:10:19 - One More Benefit 

       00:11:52 - Research Your Coach 

       00:13:11 - A Less Stressful Environment 

       00:14:26 - I Wasn't Going to Share This... 

       00:16:06 - Edit Out the Bad Content 

       00:17:45 - Publish All The Good Stuff 

       00:19:26 - Hire ONE Coach and Avoid Facebook 

       00:20:20 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:21:20 - Giveaway! 

       00:21:36 - Because of My Podcast (https://www.lovethylawyer.com/)

       00:24:18 - I Can Save Your $180 Dollars 

       00:30:22 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question)

       00:31:21 - Live Appearances (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where)

       00:31:51 - Letting People Know What You Do - One More Tip

       00:33:01 - Follow the Show (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow)

       00:34:05 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:35:20 - Blooper 

       This is episode 914 from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/914

       ]]>Today I share a story where I took information I was going to publish as an episode, but put it out as a newsletter instead as I was worried it would make me look Salesy. Today I share how I found out that message really resonated with my audience, and now I'm using it here. 

       I also share how getting a GOOD coach can save you TONS of time and HEADACHES and that is often WAY MORE than the price you are paying.

       YOU:

       • Avoid common mistakes
       • Learn the shortcuts you only learn from doing
       • If you're in a community, you get to network with or creators
       
       

       All of the above can lead to less stress, and more production. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Take One Academy (Dave's live streaming coach - affiliate)

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews Episode

       The Feed Libsyn's Official Podcast

       Love Thy Lawyer (because of my podcast story) https://www.lovethylawyer.com/ 

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction 

       00:00:19 - Opening 

       00:01:17 - I Discovered a Learning Curve 

       00:02:33 - Behind the Scenes: Salesy 

       00:04:14 - Learning New Technology 

       00:06:50 - What Options Do You Have? 

       00:07:41 - The Real Value 

       00:10:19 - One More Benefit 

       00:11:52 - Research Your Coach 

       00:13:11 - A Less Stressful Environment 

       00:14:26 - I Wasn't Going to Share This... 

       00:16:06 - Edit Out the Bad Content 

       00:17:45 - Publish All The Good Stuff 

       00:19:26 - Hire ONE Coach and Avoid Facebook 

       00:20:20 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:21:20 - Giveaway! 

       00:21:36 - Because of My Podcast (https://www.lovethylawyer.com/)

       00:24:18 - I Can Save Your $180 Dollars 

       00:30:22 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question)

       00:31:21 - Live Appearances (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where)

       00:31:51 - Letting People Know What You Do - One More Tip

       00:33:01 - Follow the Show (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow)

       00:34:05 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:35:20 - Blooper 

       This is episode 914 from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/914

       ]]>e491806d-74eb-43e9-b362-f4d394f19bc8Mon, 15 Jan 2024 05:40:00 -040035:55falsefull914914Behind the Mic: Avoiding Podfade By Identifying Your WhyToday we have a few topics. First, its a new year! Are you ready? I go through a list of things that you might want to make sure you have. 

       We talk about asking WHY to help you find additional motivation, and to TIME yourself so you can make informed decisions. 

       Lastly, some people are making bad decisions for their podcasts as a business, and I give some advice on what to watch out for. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

        Chapters

       00:00:00 - Introduction

       00:00:19 - Opening

       00:01:03 - Neil Wants To Sponsor Your Show

       00:09:47 - Check Your Email

       00:11:24 - Keep Asking Why

       00:12:54 - Example: My Whys

       00:18:26 - Making Informed Decisions

       00:19:27 - Why Podcasting Is Hard

       00:20:34 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:21:35 - Giveaway - Enter Today 

       00:21:51 - The Uncomfortable Conversation 

       00:25:06 - Trevor Got a Recording Style Deal 

       00:26:32 - Cohosts Getting Fired 

       00:27:35 - Network Deals - Do The Work 

       00:36:13 - School of Podcasting Price Increase?

       00:37:12 - Check the Gurus Linkedin

       00:38:39 - Question of the Month

       00:39:39 - Live Appearances

       00:40:11 - Time Yourself with Toggl

       00:44:59 - Bloopers

       00:45:43 - One More Tip

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Arms Around Ukraine

       Podcast Prenup

       7 Tips Podcasters Can Use From Radio with Neil Hedley

       Gordon Firemark Entertainment Lawyer

       The Voice Inside My Hed (Neil Hedley)

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Make Noise by Eric Nuzum

       Toggl Free Timer

       Live Well and Flourish

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This episode originates from the School of Podcasting at 

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/913

       ]]>Today we have a few topics. First, its a new year! Are you ready? I go through a list of things that you might want to make sure you have. 

       We talk about asking WHY to help you find additional motivation, and to TIME yourself so you can make informed decisions. 

       Lastly, some people are making bad decisions for their podcasts as a business, and I give some advice on what to watch out for. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Podcast Giveaway

       Each month I'll be giving great podcast gear away along with other services. Check it out at schoolofpodcasting.com/giveaway

        Chapters

       00:00:00 - Introduction

       00:00:19 - Opening

       00:01:03 - Neil Wants To Sponsor Your Show

       00:09:47 - Check Your Email

       00:11:24 - Keep Asking Why

       00:12:54 - Example: My Whys

       00:18:26 - Making Informed Decisions

       00:19:27 - Why Podcasting Is Hard

       00:20:34 - Join the School of Podcasting 

       00:21:35 - Giveaway - Enter Today 

       00:21:51 - The Uncomfortable Conversation 

       00:25:06 - Trevor Got a Recording Style Deal 

       00:26:32 - Cohosts Getting Fired 

       00:27:35 - Network Deals - Do The Work 

       00:36:13 - School of Podcasting Price Increase?

       00:37:12 - Check the Gurus Linkedin

       00:38:39 - Question of the Month

       00:39:39 - Live Appearances

       00:40:11 - Time Yourself with Toggl

       00:44:59 - Bloopers

       00:45:43 - One More Tip

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Arms Around Ukraine

       Podcast Prenup

       7 Tips Podcasters Can Use From Radio with Neil Hedley

       Gordon Firemark Entertainment Lawyer

       The Voice Inside My Hed (Neil Hedley)

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Make Noise by Eric Nuzum

       Toggl Free Timer

       Live Well and Flourish

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This episode originates from the School of Podcasting at 

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/913

       ]]>31b8124e-b6b6-473c-85d4-2712c45de073Mon, 08 Jan 2024 05:00:00 -040046:38falsefull913913Launching a Podcast With Realistic Expectations in 2024The goal of this episode is to help you understand what makes a GOOD podcast, and help you decide if you should also be a video podcast. 

       As it's the beginning of the year, MANY people will be selling you on how you can quit your job with no effort, no work, and how easy it is to leave the 9 to 5. They rave at how much money you will make, after all, they are on a boat! And you will do it quickly.

       I just can't do that. I want people who are fueled by passion, and understand there is a process of 

       • Plan
       • Launch
       • Grow
       • Monetize
       
       

       So today we are going to first look at what makes a GOOD podcast, and then what is going on with the Podcasting space with places like YouTube and Spotify. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Making a Good Podcast

       Make sure you are doing two or more of the following:

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       • Educate
       • Entertain
       
       

       If you do NONE of these you are boring your audience. Some other items I mentioned today:

       Relevence - When it comes to good content another key ingredient is relevance. When I heard the phrase ‘overwhelm” at a podcast conference FOUR TIMES I created episode 871 Overcoming Podcast Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a Strategy.

       Authenticity - Be yourself. Authenticity builds a connection with your audience. Don't be afraid to show personality and vulnerability. Don’t let Chat GPT wash your personality out of your show.

       Storytelling - We love a good story. How can you make your show more entertaining? Tell a good story.

       Research - State your sources when available. We want people to trust us, and when we show the work we put into the show, it can help the listener trust what they are hearing.

       Rehearsal: Practice makes perfect. Rehearse your content to iron out any kinks and ensure smooth delivery.

       Timeliness: Stay current. If your podcast covers time-sensitive topics, make sure to provide up-to-date information. This is one of those, "it depends" topics.

       Bert Weiss Boils Podcasting Down to Two Items

       In the Book Listenable: The Content and Delivery System to Set Your Podcast Apart

       Bert Wiess (Hey Bert! Call me. I want to interview you) boils it down to this: A podcast is made up of two things:

       1. Content
       2. Delivery
       
       

       One without the other will not work.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Storyworthy Book

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Podcast Launch Checklist

       Episode on Launching a Podcast Step by Steps

       Overcoming Podcast Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a Strategy

       Listenable Book By Bert Weiss

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       The Author Inside You

       Camo App Turns Your Phone Into a Webcam

       Burned Out at 19 Video

       YouTube Advice Video

       The Feed Libsyn's Podcast

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/912

       ]]>The goal of this episode is to help you understand what makes a GOOD podcast, and help you decide if you should also be a video podcast. 

       As it's the beginning of the year, MANY people will be selling you on how you can quit your job with no effort, no work, and how easy it is to leave the 9 to 5. They rave at how much money you will make, after all, they are on a boat! And you will do it quickly.

       I just can't do that. I want people who are fueled by passion, and understand there is a process of 

       • Plan
       • Launch
       • Grow
       • Monetize
       
       

       So today we are going to first look at what makes a GOOD podcast, and then what is going on with the Podcasting space with places like YouTube and Spotify. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Making a Good Podcast

       Make sure you are doing two or more of the following:

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       • Educate
       • Entertain
       
       

       If you do NONE of these you are boring your audience. Some other items I mentioned today:

       Relevence - When it comes to good content another key ingredient is relevance. When I heard the phrase ‘overwhelm” at a podcast conference FOUR TIMES I created episode 871 Overcoming Podcast Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a Strategy.

       Authenticity - Be yourself. Authenticity builds a connection with your audience. Don't be afraid to show personality and vulnerability. Don’t let Chat GPT wash your personality out of your show.

       Storytelling - We love a good story. How can you make your show more entertaining? Tell a good story.

       Research - State your sources when available. We want people to trust us, and when we show the work we put into the show, it can help the listener trust what they are hearing.

       Rehearsal: Practice makes perfect. Rehearse your content to iron out any kinks and ensure smooth delivery.

       Timeliness: Stay current. If your podcast covers time-sensitive topics, make sure to provide up-to-date information. This is one of those, "it depends" topics.

       Bert Weiss Boils Podcasting Down to Two Items

       In the Book Listenable: The Content and Delivery System to Set Your Podcast Apart

       Bert Wiess (Hey Bert! Call me. I want to interview you) boils it down to this: A podcast is made up of two things:

       1. Content
       2. Delivery
       
       

       One without the other will not work.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Storyworthy Book

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Podcast Launch Checklist

       Episode on Launching a Podcast Step by Steps

       Overcoming Podcast Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a Strategy

       Listenable Book By Bert Weiss

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       The Author Inside You

       Camo App Turns Your Phone Into a Webcam

       Burned Out at 19 Video

       YouTube Advice Video

       The Feed Libsyn's Podcast

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/912

       ]]>a2b57377-f505-4e89-a911-46852a2494a5Mon, 01 Jan 2024 06:40:22 -040056:27falsefull912912My Favorite Podcast Is.... (and WHY) 2023I have a tradition that the last episode of the year is you answering WHY your favorite show is your FAVORITE. You know the show, you get notified in your app, and you immediately stop listening to whatever show and IMMEDIATELY go to theirs. Thanks to all who participated. I did something different and had AI summarize all the "WHYs" together.

       A special shout-out to Matt Rafferty from The Author Inside You. I assembled this at the last minute, and unfortunately Podinbox ate your reply.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       PARTICIPANTS

        Special Apology to Matt Rafferty your file was corrupt.

       Kelvin Crosby from the DeafBlind Potter and  Perseverance Podcast loves the Homesteaders of America Podcast

       Chris Lewis from the Dads with Daughters podcast loves the Real Brian Show.

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish loves the loves the Everything Everywhere show. 

       Danny Brown From One Minute Podcast Tips loves the Stuck in the 80's Podcast. 

       Kim Stewart from the Book Marketing Mania loves the Self Care Simplified show.

       Anastasia Lipske from Success Speakers Loves the Bible Recap 

       Todd the Gator from Guardian Downcast and the Destiny Helpdesk loves the School of Podcasting

       Scott from What Was That Like loves the Sound Judgment Podcast.

       Steve Stewart Loves Stacking Benjamins, but his WHY from the Retiredish Podcast

       Lousis from Love Thy Lawyer loves Sam Harris's Making Sense.

       Mark from the History of North America Podcast Loves Book Notes+ with Brian Lamb

       Paul from the Pass ACLS Tip of the day show loves Think Fast Talk Smart (but we all hate their URL).

       SP Rupert from Better Podcasting and Artie's Atic loves Main Engine Cutoff.

       York Welcome to Earth Stories from Welcome to loves the show Chaika

       Dr. Brad Miller from Cancer and Comedy loves the show Conan O'Brien Needs a Friend

       Harvis from Calm History loves James Cridland's Podnews Daily

       Tim from Create Art Podcast and Find a Podcast About podcast would listen to his show to make it better.

       Dave Jackson from Your Podcast Consultant likes Podnews Weekly Review.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Gary Arndt’s Audience Growth Strategies From the Movies

       Tara-Leigh Cobble Story on Building a Better Dave

       ...]]>I have a tradition that the last episode of the year is you answering WHY your favorite show is your FAVORITE. You know the show, you get notified in your app, and you immediately stop listening to whatever show and IMMEDIATELY go to theirs. Thanks to all who participated. I did something different and had AI summarize all the "WHYs" together.

       A special shout-out to Matt Rafferty from The Author Inside You. I assembled this at the last minute, and unfortunately Podinbox ate your reply.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       PARTICIPANTS

        Special Apology to Matt Rafferty your file was corrupt.

       Kelvin Crosby from the DeafBlind Potter and  Perseverance Podcast loves the Homesteaders of America Podcast

       Chris Lewis from the Dads with Daughters podcast loves the Real Brian Show.

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish loves the loves the Everything Everywhere show. 

       Danny Brown From One Minute Podcast Tips loves the Stuck in the 80's Podcast. 

       Kim Stewart from the Book Marketing Mania loves the Self Care Simplified show.

       Anastasia Lipske from Success Speakers Loves the Bible Recap 

       Todd the Gator from Guardian Downcast and the Destiny Helpdesk loves the School of Podcasting

       Scott from What Was That Like loves the Sound Judgment Podcast.

       Steve Stewart Loves Stacking Benjamins, but his WHY from the Retiredish Podcast

       Lousis from Love Thy Lawyer loves Sam Harris's Making Sense.

       Mark from the History of North America Podcast Loves Book Notes+ with Brian Lamb

       Paul from the Pass ACLS Tip of the day show loves Think Fast Talk Smart (but we all hate their URL).

       SP Rupert from Better Podcasting and Artie's Atic loves Main Engine Cutoff.

       York Welcome to Earth Stories from Welcome to loves the show Chaika

       Dr. Brad Miller from Cancer and Comedy loves the show Conan O'Brien Needs a Friend

       Harvis from Calm History loves James Cridland's Podnews Daily

       Tim from Create Art Podcast and Find a Podcast About podcast would listen to his show to make it better.

       Dave Jackson from Your Podcast Consultant likes Podnews Weekly Review.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Gary Arndt’s Audience Growth Strategies From the Movies

       Tara-Leigh Cobble Story on Building a Better Dave

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        

       ]]>e5bcbee8-8969-4f73-8334-e6742f280b96Mon, 25 Dec 2023 05:05:00 -040051:34falsefull911911Podgagement: Because It's All About Engaging Your AudienceToday on episode number 910, what if you took a feedback tool like SpeakPipe and you combined it with the convenience of my podcast reviews and the networking functionality of something like Refonic and then combined it with someone who is obsessed over data that will help you understand and grow your audience named Daniel j Lewis? Well, you get Podgagement, and that's what we're gonna talk about today.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What is Podgagment?

       Podgagement is ONE tool that provides a written AND audio feedback tool combined with the ability to check your reviews from ALL Apple stores AND Podchaser AND Goodpods (and more) while providing easy-to-remember links to tell your audience to go rate and review your show. 

       Check out Video of Podgagement

       Check out the "Follow Page" in action at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       Who is Daniel J. Lewis? As an award-winning podcaster, Daniel J. Lewis gives you the guts and teaches you the tools to launch and grow your own podcasts for passion and P.R.O.F.I.T. Daniel creates resources for podcasters, such as the SEO for Podcasters and Zoom H6 for Podcasters courses, the Social Subscribe & Follow Icons plugin for WordPress, a Podgagement.a tool to help you know your audience and grow your podcast. He also manages the Podcast Industry Insights statistics service. As a recognized authority and influencer in the podcasting industry, Daniel speaks on podcasting and hosts his own podcast about how to podcast, The Audacity to Podcast. The Future of Podcasting, and the Podcasters Roundtable. Daniel and his son live near Cincinnati, Ohio, in the USA.

       One Thing About Ratings and Reviews In Apple Podcasts

       (they don't help you in the algorithm). Per Apple:

       What the Apple charts measure: Apple Podcasts Charts reflect the most popular shows and episodes available in a given market and are designed to help people discover what to listen to next. They do not reflect all-time listening records and are not a measure of the largest podcasts by listenership. While the exact algorithm cannot be shared to protect their integrity, the charts measure a mix of the following:

       • Listening: When listeners are engaging with episodes, it’s an indicator of content popularity.
       • Follows: When listeners follow a show to receive new episodes, it’s an indicator of their intent to listen.
       • Completion Rate: When listeners complete episodes, it’s an indicator of content quality.
       
       

       Ratings, reviews, and shares Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes. In other words, they may not help people find a podcast on their own, but they influence whether people will listen or follow, and those factors influence the charts. Source: https://podcasters.apple.com/support/3146-apple-podcasts-charts

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Video Overview of Podgagement

       The Audacity to Podcast

       Future of Podcasting 

       Video of Value for Value

       Pretty Links

       Podpage

       Tidycal

       Supercast

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode...]]>Today on episode number 910, what if you took a feedback tool like SpeakPipe and you combined it with the convenience of my podcast reviews and the networking functionality of something like Refonic and then combined it with someone who is obsessed over data that will help you understand and grow your audience named Daniel j Lewis? Well, you get Podgagement, and that's what we're gonna talk about today.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What is Podgagment?

       Podgagement is ONE tool that provides a written AND audio feedback tool combined with the ability to check your reviews from ALL Apple stores AND Podchaser AND Goodpods (and more) while providing easy-to-remember links to tell your audience to go rate and review your show. 

       Check out Video of Podgagement

       Check out the "Follow Page" in action at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       Who is Daniel J. Lewis? As an award-winning podcaster, Daniel J. Lewis gives you the guts and teaches you the tools to launch and grow your own podcasts for passion and P.R.O.F.I.T. Daniel creates resources for podcasters, such as the SEO for Podcasters and Zoom H6 for Podcasters courses, the Social Subscribe & Follow Icons plugin for WordPress, a Podgagement.a tool to help you know your audience and grow your podcast. He also manages the Podcast Industry Insights statistics service. As a recognized authority and influencer in the podcasting industry, Daniel speaks on podcasting and hosts his own podcast about how to podcast, The Audacity to Podcast. The Future of Podcasting, and the Podcasters Roundtable. Daniel and his son live near Cincinnati, Ohio, in the USA.

       One Thing About Ratings and Reviews In Apple Podcasts

       (they don't help you in the algorithm). Per Apple:

       What the Apple charts measure: Apple Podcasts Charts reflect the most popular shows and episodes available in a given market and are designed to help people discover what to listen to next. They do not reflect all-time listening records and are not a measure of the largest podcasts by listenership. While the exact algorithm cannot be shared to protect their integrity, the charts measure a mix of the following:

       • Listening: When listeners are engaging with episodes, it’s an indicator of content popularity.
       • Follows: When listeners follow a show to receive new episodes, it’s an indicator of their intent to listen.
       • Completion Rate: When listeners complete episodes, it’s an indicator of content quality.
       
       

       Ratings, reviews, and shares Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes. In other words, they may not help people find a podcast on their own, but they influence whether people will listen or follow, and those factors influence the charts. Source: https://podcasters.apple.com/support/3146-apple-podcasts-charts

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Video Overview of Podgagement

       The Audacity to Podcast

       Future of Podcasting 

       Video of Value for Value

       Pretty Links

       Podpage

       Tidycal

       Supercast

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode 910

       ]]>c99fd874-8e35-46d2-8950-fa58ecbb1648Mon, 18 Dec 2023 06:15:17 -040048:24falsefull910910A Podcast Is Not a Waste of TimeI read an article by Leslie Thompson titled, A reflection on 5 years of podcasting, and it really moved me. It points out that even if you end up ceasing to produce your podcast, the time is not waste. It may feel that way, but Leslie shares how her time on the Rogue Ones podcast was not a wate of time and she has used her skills in other projects including her now show Niche to Meet You. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Meet Leslie Thompson

       Leslie is a podcast host, Leslie leads AncoraTN’s Someone Like Me podcast, which shares the firsthand stories of human sex trafficking survivors in the state of Tennessee.

       In addition to hosting, Leslie is a podcast and radio producer, and currently producing shows for CT Media (Christianity Today’s podcast network), and The Living Church. Leslie has worked with the Rabbit Room Podcast Network, No Small Endeavor’s podcast and radio show, and Sandra McCracken’s Steadfast podcast through Christianity Today.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Niche To Meet You Podcast

       Leslie's Music

       Leslie's Podcasts

       Episode 908 Lessons Learned from Doing Things Poorly as a Podcaster

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>I read an article by Leslie Thompson titled, A reflection on 5 years of podcasting, and it really moved me. It points out that even if you end up ceasing to produce your podcast, the time is not waste. It may feel that way, but Leslie shares how her time on the Rogue Ones podcast was not a wate of time and she has used her skills in other projects including her now show Niche to Meet You. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Meet Leslie Thompson

       Leslie is a podcast host, Leslie leads AncoraTN’s Someone Like Me podcast, which shares the firsthand stories of human sex trafficking survivors in the state of Tennessee.

       In addition to hosting, Leslie is a podcast and radio producer, and currently producing shows for CT Media (Christianity Today’s podcast network), and The Living Church. Leslie has worked with the Rabbit Room Podcast Network, No Small Endeavor’s podcast and radio show, and Sandra McCracken’s Steadfast podcast through Christianity Today.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Niche To Meet You Podcast

       Leslie's Music

       Leslie's Podcasts

       Episode 908 Lessons Learned from Doing Things Poorly as a Podcaster

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       ]]>e25e3e4a-da6e-4c5e-80dc-5840ff3da432Mon, 11 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -040038:23falsefull909909Pushing Boundaries: Lessons Learned from Doing Things Poorly as a PodcasterYou get to do something new. You've never done it before, and you are feeling uncomfortable. In some cases, that feeling will stop you from starting your podcast. Today we talk about that feeling and how to overcome it. 

       Full show notes with video of the performance at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/908

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Podcast Rewind:I appeared on episode 16 of Tell Me How You're Mighty: Infidelity Survival Stories.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Cancer and Comedy Podcast

       Start Ugly: A Timeless Tale About Innovation & Change

       Streamyard Livestreaming Tool

       Ecamm Livestreaming Tool

       Alec Johnson Take One Tech Academy

       Building a Better Dave "Was Frosty Depressed?"

       Building a Better Dave "Amish Porn"

       ]]>You get to do something new. You've never done it before, and you are feeling uncomfortable. In some cases, that feeling will stop you from starting your podcast. Today we talk about that feeling and how to overcome it. 

       Full show notes with video of the performance at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/908

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       Podcast Rewind:I appeared on episode 16 of Tell Me How You're Mighty: Infidelity Survival Stories.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Cancer and Comedy Podcast

       Start Ugly: A Timeless Tale About Innovation & Change

       Streamyard Livestreaming Tool

       Ecamm Livestreaming Tool

       Alec Johnson Take One Tech Academy

       Building a Better Dave "Was Frosty Depressed?"

       Building a Better Dave "Amish Porn"

       ]]>faf0508e-39b1-4803-945f-5750768af463Mon, 04 Dec 2023 05:00:00 -040041:57falsefull908908Thinking of Adding Ads To Your Podcast - Listen to This FirstI was listening to an episode of the Media Roundtable where people who work in the advertising space answered if they listened to ads. I know I am not a fan of bad ads, but I wondered what my audience thought. If you're considering putting advertisements into your podcast, you want to hear what NOT to do. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction / Opening 00:01:30 - Matt: The Author Inside You 00:03:26 - Scott: What Was That Like? 00:07:22 - Kim: The Pharmacist's Voice 00:11:32 - Clay: Fish Nerds 00:13:32 - York: Welcome to Earth Stories 00:16:51 - Zoe: Back Look Cinema 00:19:29 - Mark: History of North America  00:20:18 - Paul: Pass ACLS Tip of the Day  00:22:51 - Chris: Podtastic Audio  00:23:56 - Timothy: Create Art Podcast  00:30:49 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:31:50 - Daily Podcast Tips  00:32:08 - Media Roundtable Chimes In  00:33:27 - Sanborn: Best Coop Games  00:35:04 - Chris: Deal Casters  00:38:14 - Chris: Dads with Daughters  00:38:54 - Brian: Relaxed Male  00:40:44 - Skipping Ads Settings  00:42:20 - Dave: School of Podcasting 00:43:05 - What Did We Learn?  00:44:09 - Media Hosts With Dynamic Tools 00:45:14 - Programmatic Complaints 00:47:42 - Consider Your Source  00:49:38 - Question of the Month  00:50:38 - Live Appearances  00:51:39 - Next Episode 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Episode 858 on Bad Advertising

       Jordan Harbinger Show

       Libsyn.com

       Captivate.fm

       Blubrry.com

       Buzzsprout.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Heather Osgood Show

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>I was listening to an episode of the Media Roundtable where people who work in the advertising space answered if they listened to ads. I know I am not a fan of bad ads, but I wondered what my audience thought. If you're considering putting advertisements into your podcast, you want to hear what NOT to do. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction / Opening 00:01:30 - Matt: The Author Inside You 00:03:26 - Scott: What Was That Like? 00:07:22 - Kim: The Pharmacist's Voice 00:11:32 - Clay: Fish Nerds 00:13:32 - York: Welcome to Earth Stories 00:16:51 - Zoe: Back Look Cinema 00:19:29 - Mark: History of North America  00:20:18 - Paul: Pass ACLS Tip of the Day  00:22:51 - Chris: Podtastic Audio  00:23:56 - Timothy: Create Art Podcast  00:30:49 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:31:50 - Daily Podcast Tips  00:32:08 - Media Roundtable Chimes In  00:33:27 - Sanborn: Best Coop Games  00:35:04 - Chris: Deal Casters  00:38:14 - Chris: Dads with Daughters  00:38:54 - Brian: Relaxed Male  00:40:44 - Skipping Ads Settings  00:42:20 - Dave: School of Podcasting 00:43:05 - What Did We Learn?  00:44:09 - Media Hosts With Dynamic Tools 00:45:14 - Programmatic Complaints 00:47:42 - Consider Your Source  00:49:38 - Question of the Month  00:50:38 - Live Appearances  00:51:39 - Next Episode 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Episode 858 on Bad Advertising

       Jordan Harbinger Show

       Libsyn.com

       Captivate.fm

       Blubrry.com

       Buzzsprout.com

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Heather Osgood Show

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>6b106f88-4c3d-45a4-8dc2-a4b0f1881acfMon, 27 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -040052:55falsefull907907Unleash the Power of LinkedIn for Your Podcast: Insider Tips from a LinkedIn ProOne of the benefits of podcasting is your get to talk to experts. For me, LinkedIn is my weakest social platform. I know I should do more, but I don't. Well, 2024 is right around the corner, and LinkedIn is on the radio, so I brought on Daniel Alfon (who has been on Linkedin since 2004, has written a book on LinkedIn, offers courses, coaching, etc, and generally knows this stuff when it comes to LinkedIn and he answers all my questions.

       Check him out at www.danielalfon.com

       ]]>One of the benefits of podcasting is your get to talk to experts. For me, LinkedIn is my weakest social platform. I know I should do more, but I don't. Well, 2024 is right around the corner, and LinkedIn is on the radio, so I brought on Daniel Alfon (who has been on Linkedin since 2004, has written a book on LinkedIn, offers courses, coaching, etc, and generally knows this stuff when it comes to LinkedIn and he answers all my questions.

       Check him out at www.danielalfon.com

       ]]>4fee0e16-bc32-4452-88db-08d31de3f792Mon, 20 Nov 2023 05:00:00 -040032:05falsefull906906Don't Get Bitten: Identifying Predatory Practices in PodcastingToday I talk about some practices I've seen and heard about that may be designed to prey on the uninformed and/or be designed to serve the podcaster and not their audience. I also comment on a great article from Tom Webster, which ties in nicely with a documentary called "Worst to First" which shows how Z100 in New York City described their show in a way that positioned themselves as an authority.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        David Hooper's Build a Big Podcast

       Making the Case Article by Tom Website of Sounds Profitable

       ]]>Today I talk about some practices I've seen and heard about that may be designed to prey on the uninformed and/or be designed to serve the podcaster and not their audience. I also comment on a great article from Tom Webster, which ties in nicely with a documentary called "Worst to First" which shows how Z100 in New York City described their show in a way that positioned themselves as an authority.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        David Hooper's Build a Big Podcast

       Making the Case Article by Tom Website of Sounds Profitable

       ]]>b8dd453b-bb0e-4149-b20b-6ca797a86f09Mon, 13 Nov 2023 05:05:00 -040038:59falsefull905905What Makes This Great? Behind the Scenes With David HooperDavid Hooper published an episode where he gives the "behind the scenes" view of his interview with Dolly Parton on his Build a Big Podcastt show. 

       I've known Dave for years and respect his insights and snarkiness, and when I heard this episode, I felt compelled to tell everyone about it. That triggered me. Why exactly was I sharing this? Today I brought Dave on as I dissected his episode and got his comments. 

       Check Out Dave's Books

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

       Dave has a number of books on Amazon like 101 Podcast Episode Templates – Powerful, Done-for-You Episode Templates to Grow Your Podcast Audience (Big Podcast) and Big Podcast – Grow Your Podcast Audience, Build Listener Loyalty, and Get Everybody Talking About Your Show

       What I Liked About This Episode

       Dave would increase the pressure by talking about the stakes of the situation. There was also a lot of "I wonder what happens next," which is always great. 

       At one point, he launched into a story that somewhat relieved the pressure and helped establish Dave's street credibility (he has interviewed a TON of people on his Music Business Radio show).

       You will also hear Dave be vulnerable as he shares his thoughts on the interview with Dolly.  Ultimately, you can't wait to hear how the interview goes. Did it happen? Was it good? Did Dave cry? Did he blow it? You can hear the uninterrupted full version of the episode at https://podcast.bigpodcast.com/audio/9113/571115

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Big Podcast Website

       David Hooper's Books On Amazon

       Behind the Seams: My Life in Rhinestones

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode 904 of the School of Podcasting

        

       ]]>David Hooper published an episode where he gives the "behind the scenes" view of his interview with Dolly Parton on his Build a Big Podcastt show. 

       I've known Dave for years and respect his insights and snarkiness, and when I heard this episode, I felt compelled to tell everyone about it. That triggered me. Why exactly was I sharing this? Today I brought Dave on as I dissected his episode and got his comments. 

       Check Out Dave's Books

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

       Dave has a number of books on Amazon like 101 Podcast Episode Templates – Powerful, Done-for-You Episode Templates to Grow Your Podcast Audience (Big Podcast) and Big Podcast – Grow Your Podcast Audience, Build Listener Loyalty, and Get Everybody Talking About Your Show

       What I Liked About This Episode

       Dave would increase the pressure by talking about the stakes of the situation. There was also a lot of "I wonder what happens next," which is always great. 

       At one point, he launched into a story that somewhat relieved the pressure and helped establish Dave's street credibility (he has interviewed a TON of people on his Music Business Radio show).

       You will also hear Dave be vulnerable as he shares his thoughts on the interview with Dolly.  Ultimately, you can't wait to hear how the interview goes. Did it happen? Was it good? Did Dave cry? Did he blow it? You can hear the uninterrupted full version of the episode at https://podcast.bigpodcast.com/audio/9113/571115

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Big Podcast Website

       David Hooper's Books On Amazon

       Behind the Seams: My Life in Rhinestones

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode 904 of the School of Podcasting

        

       ]]>ee8310df-bc93-45b1-a372-0e3cd460e7c3Mon, 06 Nov 2023 05:05:00 -040001:13:47falsefull904904Capturing Fleeting Ideas That Your Audience Needs to HearWe all know the feeling of hearing a brilliant thought or idea during a podcast, only to have it slip away just as quickly. Well, fear not! In this episode, our host shares their struggles with capturing and remembering information, as well as some incredible insights about how to overcome this challenge. I asked my audience and they shared their strategies which range from No Tech to Multi-level tech so you can find what works for you! Click Listen!

        

       OK Boomer! It's Time To Start Your Podcast

       Hey Boomers! Ready to share your wealth of wisdom with the world? The School of Podcasting is calling YOU to become the next podcasting sensation!

        Don't let the digital age pass you by—join our Boomer-friendly podcasting community. Whether you're into travel tales, grandparenting tips, or reminiscing about the good ol' days, there's an audience eager to hear YOUR story.

        No tech headaches here! Our step-by-step courses make podcasting a breeze. From vinyl to virtual, let's turn your experiences into captivating audio adventures.

       Embrace the mic, Boomers! Enroll now at the School of Podcasting and let your voice echo through the digital era. Because your stories are timeless, and the world is ready to listen!

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Contributors

       Scott from What Was That Like sends an email to himself.

       Mark from Practical Prepping uses Evernote and a Voice Recorder and reviews all the ideas weekly to get them organized.

       Brandon from Dallas likes Joplin

       Mentioned In This Episode

       iDrive (aff)

       Joplin(video)

       Notion(video)

       Apple Notes (video)

       Evernote (video)

       Zettelkasten

       Google Keep(video)

       Matthew Perry Book: Friends, Lovers, and the Big Terrible Thing: A Memoir (aff)

        

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee and give some of that value back. 

        

       TIMELINE

       00:00:38 - Opening 00:01:22 - Capturing Fleeting Ideas 00:01:51 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:04:16 - Brandon from Dallas 00:07:22 - Mark from The North America Podcast 00:08:19 - Mark From Practical Prepping 00:09:50 - Randy From Hot Springs Village Inside Out 00:10:45 - York From Welcome to Earth Stories 00:12:21 - Join The School of Podcasting 00:13:23 - BOOST 00:13:40 - Jim From Home Gadget Geeks 00:14:47 - Dave's Screenshot 00:16:38 - Dave Note-Taking App 00:18:14 - What Do You Need It To Do? 00:19:13 - NOT One Drive iDRIVE! 00:22:12 - Get To Know Your Tools 00:23:14 - Beware FOMO Fear of Missing Out 00:24:33 - SAAS Frustrations 00:26:28 - Question of the Month 00:27:27 - Live Appearances 00:27:59 - Why Is This Good Coming Back 00:28:20 - Everything is at the School of Podcasting 00:29:00 - Bloopers 00:29:13 - RIP Matthew Perry

       ]]>We all know the feeling of hearing a brilliant thought or idea during a podcast, only to have it slip away just as quickly. Well, fear not! In this episode, our host shares their struggles with capturing and remembering information, as well as some incredible insights about how to overcome this challenge. I asked my audience and they shared their strategies which range from No Tech to Multi-level tech so you can find what works for you! Click Listen!

        

       OK Boomer! It's Time To Start Your Podcast

       Hey Boomers! Ready to share your wealth of wisdom with the world? The School of Podcasting is calling YOU to become the next podcasting sensation!

        Don't let the digital age pass you by—join our Boomer-friendly podcasting community. Whether you're into travel tales, grandparenting tips, or reminiscing about the good ol' days, there's an audience eager to hear YOUR story.

        No tech headaches here! Our step-by-step courses make podcasting a breeze. From vinyl to virtual, let's turn your experiences into captivating audio adventures.

       Embrace the mic, Boomers! Enroll now at the School of Podcasting and let your voice echo through the digital era. Because your stories are timeless, and the world is ready to listen!

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Contributors

       Scott from What Was That Like sends an email to himself.

       Mark from Practical Prepping uses Evernote and a Voice Recorder and reviews all the ideas weekly to get them organized.

       Brandon from Dallas likes Joplin

       Mentioned In This Episode

       iDrive (aff)

       Joplin(video)

       Notion(video)

       Apple Notes (video)

       Evernote (video)

       Zettelkasten

       Google Keep(video)

       Matthew Perry Book: Friends, Lovers, and the Big Terrible Thing: A Memoir (aff)

        

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month, I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell us about your show and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee and give some of that value back. 

        

       TIMELINE

       00:00:38 - Opening 00:01:22 - Capturing Fleeting Ideas 00:01:51 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:04:16 - Brandon from Dallas 00:07:22 - Mark from The North America Podcast 00:08:19 - Mark From Practical Prepping 00:09:50 - Randy From Hot Springs Village Inside Out 00:10:45 - York From Welcome to Earth Stories 00:12:21 - Join The School of Podcasting 00:13:23 - BOOST 00:13:40 - Jim From Home Gadget Geeks 00:14:47 - Dave's Screenshot 00:16:38 - Dave Note-Taking App 00:18:14 - What Do You Need It To Do? 00:19:13 - NOT One Drive iDRIVE! 00:22:12 - Get To Know Your Tools 00:23:14 - Beware FOMO Fear of Missing Out 00:24:33 - SAAS Frustrations 00:26:28 - Question of the Month 00:27:27 - Live Appearances 00:27:59 - Why Is This Good Coming Back 00:28:20 - Everything is at the School of Podcasting 00:29:00 - Bloopers 00:29:13 - RIP Matthew Perry

       ]]>66b10fc0-10af-419f-a3bd-9787c694f172Mon, 30 Oct 2023 04:00:00 -040030:31falsefull903903How to Build a Podcast that Drives Leads and CredibilityWhile there are no rules for podcasting, there are best practices, and today I'm talking with Courtney Elmer, who helps people get into the top 100 of the Apple Charts. We also discuss how podcasting can give you back your voice and help you be heard. 

       An entrepreneur can boost sales when their podcast is

       On a regular schedule (it helps you be seen as reliable).

       Makes points through personal stories (it helps them to know you, while not going on a complete tangent).

       Good. Most people do not listen to shows that need help. Seeing you as reliable, personable, and helpful makes it easy to boost sales. 

       Learn More From Courtney

       Courtney Elmer is from the AntiFragile Entrepreneurship Podcast ( www.antifragileentrepreneurship.co ) where she extracts the invaluable wisdom from business leaders who have turned their biggest failures into fuel for exponential growth. 

       She also conducts live workshops  antifragileentrepreneurship.co/workshop

       and has a private podcast at  antifragileentrepreneurship.co/access

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll quickly create high-quality, engaging content. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Courtney's Workshop antifragileentrepreneurship.co/workshop

       Dave's Blog on YouTube Music https://schoolofpodcasting.com/youtube-rss 

       Boost The Show Using a New Podcast App www.newpodcastapps.com 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This episode originates from https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/902 

       This episode required 5 hours and 25 minutes to research, record, and publish this episode. Do consider a one-time donation.

        

        

       ]]>While there are no rules for podcasting, there are best practices, and today I'm talking with Courtney Elmer, who helps people get into the top 100 of the Apple Charts. We also discuss how podcasting can give you back your voice and help you be heard. 

       An entrepreneur can boost sales when their podcast is

       On a regular schedule (it helps you be seen as reliable).

       Makes points through personal stories (it helps them to know you, while not going on a complete tangent).

       Good. Most people do not listen to shows that need help. Seeing you as reliable, personable, and helpful makes it easy to boost sales. 

       Learn More From Courtney

       Courtney Elmer is from the AntiFragile Entrepreneurship Podcast ( www.antifragileentrepreneurship.co ) where she extracts the invaluable wisdom from business leaders who have turned their biggest failures into fuel for exponential growth. 

       She also conducts live workshops  antifragileentrepreneurship.co/workshop

       and has a private podcast at  antifragileentrepreneurship.co/access

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll quickly create high-quality, engaging content. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Courtney's Workshop antifragileentrepreneurship.co/workshop

       Dave's Blog on YouTube Music https://schoolofpodcasting.com/youtube-rss 

       Boost The Show Using a New Podcast App www.newpodcastapps.com 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This episode originates from https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/902 

       This episode required 5 hours and 25 minutes to research, record, and publish this episode. Do consider a one-time donation.

        

        

       ]]>9d31cf7f-aee9-4928-9846-9940b6e1a77aMon, 23 Oct 2023 04:20:00 -040046:37falsefull902902Marketing Magic: Boosting Your Podcast's Reach with Proverbs and Catch PhrasesToday, we are talking about your episodes down to a proverb. Proverbs are crafted phrases that have successfully passed wisdom from generation to generation. Proverbs are the ultimate "long story short" that draw their power from the simplicity of their presentation. Are there things you repeat in your show often? Maybe you should embrace your proverb and turn it into swag. Boiling your content down to a proverb that is easy to remember and easy to recite helps you provide marketing materials for your audience to help them promote your show.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       DAVEISMS

       Where your WHY and your WHO overlap, you will find your WHAT to talk about.

       If the goal is monetization, get ready to do your show for FREE for a few years.

       Less than 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get a BIG sponsor

       Starring at your stats will not make your downloads grow; starring at your audience will.

       Monthly stats are crap ( the stat that people use downloads per episode after 30 days)

       Spend $100 on a microphone and 100 hours getting to know your audience.

       Creating a podcast is easy. Creating a GOOD podcast is hard but fun.

       Podcasting is a marathon, not a sprint. (again, it can take three years to build an audience )

       Thinking a GIANT podcast launch will lead to an undeniable podcast success is like saying having a BIG wedding ensures marital bliss. In both cases, the real work is just beginning.

       You must have someone NOT named Mom to listen to your show and give honest feedback. There is no sense in paying to promote a show if it is not resonating with the audience.

       Downloads are great, but not as cool as consumption rate (seeing how far people listen can let you know how engaged your audience is)

       Having an obvious name can make it easy to be found.

       Choose the one you want to click more when you have multiple titles for an episode.

       It is NOT the media host that grows the audience. It is the content

       Treat directories like a child looking for Halloween candy. BE EVERYWHERE.

       Make sure your content does one (or more) of the following: Laugh, cry, think. Grown, Educate, or Entertain. If not you're boring.

       Listennotes stats (saying you're in the top X percent) are crap. See video

       For those who have money, there is therapy. For the rest of us, there is podcasting.

       If you want to grow your network, do an interview show. If you want to grow your influence, do a solo show. Even better do BOTH.

       You don't benefit until your audience benefits.

       While being consistent in schedule is very important (as you become part of your listener's routine) I'd rather have a "Late" show that was good than an "on time" episode that was Meh.

       Record without fear and edit without mercy.

       Podcasting is like sex in high school. Everybody says they are doing it. A few are doing it. Nobody is doing it right. Then, your podcast career is over quickly. Just like sex in high school.

       Don't try to be the most downloaded show. Try to be te most talked about show. 

       There is no such thing as too long, only too boring - Valerie Geller from the book Beyond Powerful Radio. (aff)

       Podcast Networks don't make small shows big. They make big shows bigger - Eric Nuzum from the book Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling (aff)

       Don't try to be the most downloaded podcast; strive to be the most talked-about podcast. - Darrel Evans. Paraphrased from The YouTube Formula: How Anyone Can Unlock the Algorithm to Drive Views, Build an Audience, and Grow Revenue

       "Remember, customers don’t care about you; they care about themselves and their problems." - Joe Pullizi. Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less: How to Tell a Different Story, ... and Win More Customers by Marketing Less (p. 73). McGraw-Hill Education. Kindle Edition.

       This episode is based on the book The Proverb Effect: Secrets to creating tiny phrases that change the world, making it easy for your audience to share your content without memorizing your episode.

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        The Pharmacists Voice

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Additional Shows About Podcasting From Dave

       In addition to this show, I have additional shows about podcasting:

       Your Podcast Consultant: One tip per episode - 9 Minutes or Less

       Podcast Rodeo Show: I Grab a Random Podcast and See How Long I Can Hang On

       Ask the Podcast Coach: A live "call in" show every Saturday at 10:30 AM ET

       Podcast Review Show: Myself and radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your episode and website.

        

       ]]>Today, we are talking about your episodes down to a proverb. Proverbs are crafted phrases that have successfully passed wisdom from generation to generation. Proverbs are the ultimate "long story short" that draw their power from the simplicity of their presentation. Are there things you repeat in your show often? Maybe you should embrace your proverb and turn it into swag. Boiling your content down to a proverb that is easy to remember and easy to recite helps you provide marketing materials for your audience to help them promote your show.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       DAVEISMS

       Where your WHY and your WHO overlap, you will find your WHAT to talk about.

       If the goal is monetization, get ready to do your show for FREE for a few years.

       Less than 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get a BIG sponsor

       Starring at your stats will not make your downloads grow; starring at your audience will.

       Monthly stats are crap ( the stat that people use downloads per episode after 30 days)

       Spend $100 on a microphone and 100 hours getting to know your audience.

       Creating a podcast is easy. Creating a GOOD podcast is hard but fun.

       Podcasting is a marathon, not a sprint. (again, it can take three years to build an audience )

       Thinking a GIANT podcast launch will lead to an undeniable podcast success is like saying having a BIG wedding ensures marital bliss. In both cases, the real work is just beginning.

       You must have someone NOT named Mom to listen to your show and give honest feedback. There is no sense in paying to promote a show if it is not resonating with the audience.

       Downloads are great, but not as cool as consumption rate (seeing how far people listen can let you know how engaged your audience is)

       Having an obvious name can make it easy to be found.

       Choose the one you want to click more when you have multiple titles for an episode.

       It is NOT the media host that grows the audience. It is the content

       Treat directories like a child looking for Halloween candy. BE EVERYWHERE.

       Make sure your content does one (or more) of the following: Laugh, cry, think. Grown, Educate, or Entertain. If not you're boring.

       Listennotes stats (saying you're in the top X percent) are crap. See video

       For those who have money, there is therapy. For the rest of us, there is podcasting.

       If you want to grow your network, do an interview show. If you want to grow your influence, do a solo show. Even better do BOTH.

       You don't benefit until your audience benefits.

       While being consistent in schedule is very important (as you become part of your listener's routine) I'd rather have a "Late" show that was good than an "on time" episode that was Meh.

       Record without fear and edit without mercy.

       Podcasting is like sex in high school. Everybody says they are doing it. A few are doing it. Nobody is doing it right. Then, your podcast career is over quickly. Just like sex in high school.

       Don't try to be the most downloaded show. Try to be te most talked about show. 

       There is no such thing as too long, only too boring - Valerie Geller from the book Beyond Powerful Radio. (aff)

       Podcast Networks don't make small shows big. They make big shows bigger - Eric Nuzum from the book Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling (aff)

       Don't try to be the most downloaded podcast; strive to be the most talked-about podcast. - Darrel Evans. Paraphrased from The YouTube Formula: How Anyone Can Unlock the Algorithm to Drive Views, Build an Audience, and Grow Revenue

       "Remember, customers don’t care about you; they care about themselves and their problems." - Joe Pullizi. Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less: How to Tell a Different Story, ... and Win More Customers by Marketing Less (p. 73). McGraw-Hill Education. Kindle Edition.

       This episode is based on the book The Proverb Effect: Secrets to creating tiny phrases that change the world, making it easy for your audience to share your content without memorizing your episode.

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        The Pharmacists Voice

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Additional Shows About Podcasting From Dave

       In addition to this show, I have additional shows about podcasting:

       Your Podcast Consultant: One tip per episode - 9 Minutes or Less

       Podcast Rodeo Show: I Grab a Random Podcast and See How Long I Can Hang On

       Ask the Podcast Coach: A live "call in" show every Saturday at 10:30 AM ET

       Podcast Review Show: Myself and radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your episode and website.

        

       ]]>8a07100c-95e2-46d8-a2ff-ba95a7bea6b2Mon, 16 Oct 2023 04:05:00 -040032:51falsefull901901Podcast Growth Strategies From Jesus - EP900Episode 900 (as was 800, 700, etc) has me breaking format. In this episode, I share why all the not-so-great things that happened to you grow up help make you, YOU. Your uniqueness may be the EXACT thing that resonates with people who need to hear your content.

       After coming back from the Spark Ignite Christian Podcast Conference (now Defunct), I was able to book Jesus as a guest. Not to talk about the benefits of believing in him but more about his marketing practice. He started with 12 followers, and 2000 years later people are still talking about him. He is the author of the Bible, and has a new series on Amazon called "The Chosen" (highly recommended). You can also listen to the audio drama on Audible (aff) featuring Samuel L Jackson as God.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting

       Topics

       00:00:23 - Episode 900 Special Format

       00:00:24 - You Don't Know Who Listening

       00:01:08 - What Shapes You Make You Special

       00:05:31 - I Still Wonder if People Are Listening

       00:06:18 - Have I Peaked?

       00:06:57 - Top Podcaster Influencer

       00:09:41 - Join the School of Podcasting

       00:10:43 - Boost Reminder

       00:10:55 - Weather

       00:11:08 - Invisible Sky Buddy Alert: Jesus Interview

       00:12:14 - When Did Jesus Get Into Content Marketing?

       00:12:45 - Is Your Message Hard To Understand?

       00:14:13 - The Rebrand 00:14:46 - 10 To 2 Simplification

       00:16:24 - Did you start off with 12 Follows?

       00:17:21 - The Jesus Marketing Strategy

       00:18:47 - Speeding Up Growth

       00:19:32 - How Did You Get Your Audience To Share?

       00:20:34 - Get Your Audience Involved

       00:22:19 - Get Your Core Values Set

       00:22:51 - Fame Isn't Cool?

       00:23:08 - Nepotism at Your Job

       00:23:34 - Pricing Products

       00:24:16 - What's The Deal With Bono?

       00:24:52 - Anything Else From the Book?

       00:25:10 - Last Question

       00:25:30 - Take Aways From the Interview

       00:26:20 - The Proverb Effect

       00:27:28 - The Red Hat Guy

       00:29:33 - Marketing is Never Ending

       00:30:54 - Question of the Month

       00:31:55 - Live Appearances

       00:32:24 - Check out the Website

       00:33:55 - A little Guitar to Play Us Out

       Mentioned In This Episode:

       The School of Podcasting

       The Proverb Effect

       Ask the Podcast Coach: Chat GPT For Podcasters

       Bible

       The Chosen

       listen to the audio drama on Audible (aff) featuring Samuel L Jackson as God.

       ]]>Episode 900 (as was 800, 700, etc) has me breaking format. In this episode, I share why all the not-so-great things that happened to you grow up help make you, YOU. Your uniqueness may be the EXACT thing that resonates with people who need to hear your content.

       After coming back from the Spark Ignite Christian Podcast Conference (now Defunct), I was able to book Jesus as a guest. Not to talk about the benefits of believing in him but more about his marketing practice. He started with 12 followers, and 2000 years later people are still talking about him. He is the author of the Bible, and has a new series on Amazon called "The Chosen" (highly recommended). You can also listen to the audio drama on Audible (aff) featuring Samuel L Jackson as God.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting

       Topics

       00:00:23 - Episode 900 Special Format

       00:00:24 - You Don't Know Who Listening

       00:01:08 - What Shapes You Make You Special

       00:05:31 - I Still Wonder if People Are Listening

       00:06:18 - Have I Peaked?

       00:06:57 - Top Podcaster Influencer

       00:09:41 - Join the School of Podcasting

       00:10:43 - Boost Reminder

       00:10:55 - Weather

       00:11:08 - Invisible Sky Buddy Alert: Jesus Interview

       00:12:14 - When Did Jesus Get Into Content Marketing?

       00:12:45 - Is Your Message Hard To Understand?

       00:14:13 - The Rebrand 00:14:46 - 10 To 2 Simplification

       00:16:24 - Did you start off with 12 Follows?

       00:17:21 - The Jesus Marketing Strategy

       00:18:47 - Speeding Up Growth

       00:19:32 - How Did You Get Your Audience To Share?

       00:20:34 - Get Your Audience Involved

       00:22:19 - Get Your Core Values Set

       00:22:51 - Fame Isn't Cool?

       00:23:08 - Nepotism at Your Job

       00:23:34 - Pricing Products

       00:24:16 - What's The Deal With Bono?

       00:24:52 - Anything Else From the Book?

       00:25:10 - Last Question

       00:25:30 - Take Aways From the Interview

       00:26:20 - The Proverb Effect

       00:27:28 - The Red Hat Guy

       00:29:33 - Marketing is Never Ending

       00:30:54 - Question of the Month

       00:31:55 - Live Appearances

       00:32:24 - Check out the Website

       00:33:55 - A little Guitar to Play Us Out

       Mentioned In This Episode:

       The School of Podcasting

       The Proverb Effect

       Ask the Podcast Coach: Chat GPT For Podcasters

       Bible

       The Chosen

       listen to the audio drama on Audible (aff) featuring Samuel L Jackson as God.

       ]]>22bb2fd9-72cf-4502-9654-d7d942c2e4cdMon, 09 Oct 2023 04:05:00 -040035:06falsefull900900Helping Your Website Rank Better With Podpage EliteI first interviewed Brenden Mullen from Podpage back on episode 728. Today he's back as they have added Podpage Eilite a new plan that adds tools to help your podcast get found, notify guests, provide stats on links and more. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What is Podpage?

       Podpage replaces tools like WordPress, Wix, Squarespace, or any other website tool. It is NOT a media host (it works with any podcast hosting company that provides a valid RSS feed). It integrates with email tools like Mailerlite Convertkit, Speakpipe, Google Analytics, and more. 

       What is Podpage Elite?

       Podpage Elite is for the podcaster looking for tools to help them be found with SEO, see their reviews along with:

       • Advanced SEO analysis
       • Reviews from 175+ countries
       • Zapier connection
       • Automated guest alert emails
       • Episode deep linking
       • Private feed support
       • Pretty link click data
       • Host downloadable files
       • Listener episode email alerts (Early 2024)
       • Automatic transcription (Early 2024)
       
       

       Check out Podpage at www.trypodpage.com 

       Learn Podpage at www.learnpodpage.com 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Try Podpage

       Learn Podpage

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Spark Ignite Conference

       Cancer and Comedy

       No Agenda Show

       Curry and the Keeper

       Algos Explanation

       ]]>I first interviewed Brenden Mullen from Podpage back on episode 728. Today he's back as they have added Podpage Eilite a new plan that adds tools to help your podcast get found, notify guests, provide stats on links and more. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What is Podpage?

       Podpage replaces tools like WordPress, Wix, Squarespace, or any other website tool. It is NOT a media host (it works with any podcast hosting company that provides a valid RSS feed). It integrates with email tools like Mailerlite Convertkit, Speakpipe, Google Analytics, and more. 

       What is Podpage Elite?

       Podpage Elite is for the podcaster looking for tools to help them be found with SEO, see their reviews along with:

       • Advanced SEO analysis
       • Reviews from 175+ countries
       • Zapier connection
       • Automated guest alert emails
       • Episode deep linking
       • Private feed support
       • Pretty link click data
       • Host downloadable files
       • Listener episode email alerts (Early 2024)
       • Automatic transcription (Early 2024)
       
       

       Check out Podpage at www.trypodpage.com 

       Learn Podpage at www.learnpodpage.com 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Try Podpage

       Learn Podpage

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Spark Ignite Conference

       Cancer and Comedy

       No Agenda Show

       Curry and the Keeper

       Algos Explanation

       ]]>f5c1147b-b78a-4ec0-add8-980a22137714Mon, 02 Oct 2023 04:05:00 -040046:45falsefull899899Unlocking the Potential of Feed Drops: Strategies for Growing Your Podcast's AudienceToday we are diving into the strategy of "feed drops" in podcasting. Some special guests are joining us, including York Campbell, Randy Black, and Zoe Richardson.

       In this episode, we'll explore the concept of feed drops, where a show drops an episode into the feed of another show to gain new listeners. Our guests will discuss their experiences with feed drops and share their perspectives on whether it's an effective strategy.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        Feed Drops: 

       Feed drops can be a powerful strategy to gain new listeners and broaden your reach in the podcasting realm. By dropping an episode into the feed of another show, you not only introduce your content to a new audience but also establish connections with other podcasters. Just make sure the dropped episode aligns with the tone and subject matter of the host show to keep your listeners engaged.

       Participants:

       Randall Black from Work From The Weight

       Zo Richardson from Backlook Cinema

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories

       Consider Your Source:

       There are a number of different types of podcasters. Here are just a couple:

       • Fun Seekers
       • Serious Hobbyist
       • The Side Hustle-ist
       
       

       There are also many ways to monetize your show. The Value Four Value model is gaining steam, and everyone talks about podcast advertising. With the above types of podcasters they have different motivations and metrics. 

       People who work in the advertising end of podcasting focus on making sure advertisers are happy. 

       With this in mind, when you hear news, insights, and ideas about podcasting you might consider evaluating what persepctive they are coming from. There is no "wrong" perspective as there are many ways to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. 

       For example one recent written by Steve Goldstein on the Three Eras of Podcasting

       seemed to hint that podcasting started when advertising arrived. This makes sense coming from Steve who works in the advertising side of podcasting. 

       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on The Flow by Ecam, talking about how to start a podcast. I shared a story about the gear I used when I first started podcasting.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>Today we are diving into the strategy of "feed drops" in podcasting. Some special guests are joining us, including York Campbell, Randy Black, and Zoe Richardson.

       In this episode, we'll explore the concept of feed drops, where a show drops an episode into the feed of another show to gain new listeners. Our guests will discuss their experiences with feed drops and share their perspectives on whether it's an effective strategy.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        Feed Drops: 

       Feed drops can be a powerful strategy to gain new listeners and broaden your reach in the podcasting realm. By dropping an episode into the feed of another show, you not only introduce your content to a new audience but also establish connections with other podcasters. Just make sure the dropped episode aligns with the tone and subject matter of the host show to keep your listeners engaged.

       Participants:

       Randall Black from Work From The Weight

       Zo Richardson from Backlook Cinema

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories

       Consider Your Source:

       There are a number of different types of podcasters. Here are just a couple:

       • Fun Seekers
       • Serious Hobbyist
       • The Side Hustle-ist
       
       

       There are also many ways to monetize your show. The Value Four Value model is gaining steam, and everyone talks about podcast advertising. With the above types of podcasters they have different motivations and metrics. 

       People who work in the advertising end of podcasting focus on making sure advertisers are happy. 

       With this in mind, when you hear news, insights, and ideas about podcasting you might consider evaluating what persepctive they are coming from. There is no "wrong" perspective as there are many ways to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. 

       For example one recent written by Steve Goldstein on the Three Eras of Podcasting

       seemed to hint that podcasting started when advertising arrived. This makes sense coming from Steve who works in the advertising side of podcasting. 

       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on The Flow by Ecam, talking about how to start a podcast. I shared a story about the gear I used when I first started podcasting.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>0e620f5d-35ac-43b8-819d-266dfb9eb819Mon, 25 Sep 2023 04:05:00 -040028:01falsefull898898When Do I Launch Crowdfunding For My Podcast, And What Is the Best Platform?in today's episode, number 897, we'll dive into the crowdfunding world and discuss the best platforms to use. We'll discuss various crowdfunding platforms like Patreon, Glow, Supercast, Spotify and more, comparing their features and implementation.

       But crowdfunding comes with its own set of challenges and concerns. We'll address these issues, including worries about not making enough money, the time and effort required for promotion, and potential restrictions on speech.

       So, whether you're just starting out or looking to explore new opportunities for monetizing your podcast, this episode is packed with insights and strategies to help you make informed decisions. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       You can get a free PDF report that summarizes all of this information HERE.

       Tables and a much deeper dive on the website at schoolofpodcasting.com/897

       Check out Dave on Buy Me a Coffee

       Dave's Stripe Donate Option

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Keith Fong Because of My Podcast: Way to the Quality Warrior

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Glow.fm

       Supercast (aff)

       Supporting Cast

       Buzzsprout (aff)

       Captivate (aff)

       Stripe

       Paypal 

       Storyworthy Book

       Set Up Your Show to Value For Value Video Podcasting 2.0

       Eric Bennet Interview From Supporting Cast on Podglamorate

       Podcasting 2.0 Show

       ]]>in today's episode, number 897, we'll dive into the crowdfunding world and discuss the best platforms to use. We'll discuss various crowdfunding platforms like Patreon, Glow, Supercast, Spotify and more, comparing their features and implementation.

       But crowdfunding comes with its own set of challenges and concerns. We'll address these issues, including worries about not making enough money, the time and effort required for promotion, and potential restrictions on speech.

       So, whether you're just starting out or looking to explore new opportunities for monetizing your podcast, this episode is packed with insights and strategies to help you make informed decisions. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       You can get a free PDF report that summarizes all of this information HERE.

       Tables and a much deeper dive on the website at schoolofpodcasting.com/897

       Check out Dave on Buy Me a Coffee

       Dave's Stripe Donate Option

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Keith Fong Because of My Podcast: Way to the Quality Warrior

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Glow.fm

       Supercast (aff)

       Supporting Cast

       Buzzsprout (aff)

       Captivate (aff)

       Stripe

       Paypal 

       Storyworthy Book

       Set Up Your Show to Value For Value Video Podcasting 2.0

       Eric Bennet Interview From Supporting Cast on Podglamorate

       Podcasting 2.0 Show

       ]]>98bf2301-e6c8-4d7f-8f7e-071f9c8b2b4dMon, 18 Sep 2023 04:05:00 -040059:30falsefull897897Parameters, and Perspectives, to Prepare for Proven Podcast Marketing SuccessWhat works for one podcast may not work for another podcast because their audiences are different. Think of the two female singers, Adele and Pink. The are both authentic, talented singers. One tends to stand on stage, tell stories, and perform in a dress. The other does gymnastics that include floating around the entire outside stadium. Could you see Adele flying around a stadium? 

       Instead, know your "WHY" and your "WHO" so you can figure out your WHAT and deliver it authentically in a way that doesn't bore your audience. 

       Plus, we'll tackle the ever-elusive topic of measuring success. I'll reveal the strategies and tools I use to track traffic and engagement and the importance of creating engaging content that keeps listeners coming back for more.

       Tools To Use To Help You Identify What Works With Your Podcast

       Instead of just linking to your website, you can add UTM parameters (this isn't as geeky as it sounds). A UTM is Urchin Traffic Monitor (we really don't care). These parameters can be thought of as leaving a breadcrumb so that when you check Google Analytics you can see where the audience specially came from. I'm currently using Fathom Stats, which are not free but are easier to read and a bit more privacy-focused.

       Add UTMs to a Link using the Google UTM Creator

       • the Google Analytics Campaign URL Builder for generating URLs to websites
       • the Google Play URL Builder for generating URLs to apps on the Google Play Store
       • the iOS Campaign Tracking URL Builder for generating URLs to apps on the Apple App Store
       
       

       There are parameters you can add that will be seen in your Google Analytics. I have been using Fathom stats as they are easier to understand (it's not free, but I prefer checking out my stats without the frustration of digging through Google Analytics). 

       Why I Like Switchy

       Switchy is a tool that is currently available for a lifetime deal on App Summo. Not only does this create easy-to-remember links like www.supportthisshow.com/q2u (which is my affiliate link for the Samson Q2U microphone), but it creates trackable QR codes, and the ability to set UTM parameters and save them as a template. 

       When You Can See What Works, You Can QUit Doing Those Actions That Don't

       For a while I was putting videos on twitch (primarily known for gaming) and I just didn't any reaction (so I quit wasting my time for now). 

       I have videos and screenshots at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/896

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Live appearances?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Bitly

       Google Analytics

       Switchy

       Fathom Website Stats

        

        

       ]]>What works for one podcast may not work for another podcast because their audiences are different. Think of the two female singers, Adele and Pink. The are both authentic, talented singers. One tends to stand on stage, tell stories, and perform in a dress. The other does gymnastics that include floating around the entire outside stadium. Could you see Adele flying around a stadium? 

       Instead, know your "WHY" and your "WHO" so you can figure out your WHAT and deliver it authentically in a way that doesn't bore your audience. 

       Plus, we'll tackle the ever-elusive topic of measuring success. I'll reveal the strategies and tools I use to track traffic and engagement and the importance of creating engaging content that keeps listeners coming back for more.

       Tools To Use To Help You Identify What Works With Your Podcast

       Instead of just linking to your website, you can add UTM parameters (this isn't as geeky as it sounds). A UTM is Urchin Traffic Monitor (we really don't care). These parameters can be thought of as leaving a breadcrumb so that when you check Google Analytics you can see where the audience specially came from. I'm currently using Fathom Stats, which are not free but are easier to read and a bit more privacy-focused.

       Add UTMs to a Link using the Google UTM Creator

       • the Google Analytics Campaign URL Builder for generating URLs to websites
       • the Google Play URL Builder for generating URLs to apps on the Google Play Store
       • the iOS Campaign Tracking URL Builder for generating URLs to apps on the Apple App Store
       
       

       There are parameters you can add that will be seen in your Google Analytics. I have been using Fathom stats as they are easier to understand (it's not free, but I prefer checking out my stats without the frustration of digging through Google Analytics). 

       Why I Like Switchy

       Switchy is a tool that is currently available for a lifetime deal on App Summo. Not only does this create easy-to-remember links like www.supportthisshow.com/q2u (which is my affiliate link for the Samson Q2U microphone), but it creates trackable QR codes, and the ability to set UTM parameters and save them as a template. 

       When You Can See What Works, You Can QUit Doing Those Actions That Don't

       For a while I was putting videos on twitch (primarily known for gaming) and I just didn't any reaction (so I quit wasting my time for now). 

       I have videos and screenshots at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/896

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Live appearances?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you to chime in on the show so we all can learn together. Be sure to tell use about your show, and mention your website.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Bitly

       Google Analytics

       Switchy

       Fathom Website Stats

        

        

       ]]>0c3eaeb4-4212-4226-83ce-1c59cfb13810Mon, 11 Sep 2023 04:05:00 -040044:39falsefull896896What Alex Sanfilippo learned after talking to 1600 PodcastersAlex Sanfilippo has the heart of a servant and has made tools for podcasters that help them, and in some cases pay them, to be better podcasters. He is one of the co-founders of PodPros (makes of Podmatch, PodcastSop, Podlottery,Podscore) and he is the host of Podcasting Made Simple. Today, he shares 10 Factors of Podcasting Success.
       Erase Your Weaknesses

       With Podscore you take a survey, and answer a few questions, and it identifies areas which you are doing well, and those that need some work (and it's completely free). 

       Alex interviewed 1600 podcasters and summarized the following:

       10 Factors of Podcasting Success

       1. Self Discipline 

       2. Self Care

       3. Displaying the Value to the Listener - Crystal Clear

       4. Clear Strategy to Grow and Monetize Your Show

       5. Consistent Plan In Every Episode

       6. Keep Your Show Organized

       7 Have a team to Delegate 8

       8. Have Conversations with Your Audience 

       9. Consant Improve Your Podcasting Craft

       10. Have Accountability Partners and Community

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Capsho

       Podmatch

       Podscore.io

       Live Well and Flourish

       Cancer and Comedy

       Connection Therapy

       School of Podcasting

       Podcasting Three-Legged Stool

       Connect with Alex

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This is show 895 which you can find at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/895

        

        

        

        

        

       ]]>Alex Sanfilippo has the heart of a servant and has made tools for podcasters that help them, and in some cases pay them, to be better podcasters. He is one of the co-founders of PodPros (makes of Podmatch, PodcastSop, Podlottery,Podscore) and he is the host of Podcasting Made Simple. Today, he shares 10 Factors of Podcasting Success.
       Erase Your Weaknesses

       With Podscore you take a survey, and answer a few questions, and it identifies areas which you are doing well, and those that need some work (and it's completely free). 

       Alex interviewed 1600 podcasters and summarized the following:

       10 Factors of Podcasting Success

       1. Self Discipline 

       2. Self Care

       3. Displaying the Value to the Listener - Crystal Clear

       4. Clear Strategy to Grow and Monetize Your Show

       5. Consistent Plan In Every Episode

       6. Keep Your Show Organized

       7 Have a team to Delegate 8

       8. Have Conversations with Your Audience 

       9. Consant Improve Your Podcasting Craft

       10. Have Accountability Partners and Community

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Capsho

       Podmatch

       Podscore.io

       Live Well and Flourish

       Cancer and Comedy

       Connection Therapy

       School of Podcasting

       Podcasting Three-Legged Stool

       Connect with Alex

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This is show 895 which you can find at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/895

        

        

        

        

        

       ]]>83b3713a-b293-4f16-bfda-29a3901bdfb5Mon, 04 Sep 2023 04:00:00 -040044:23falsefull89589519 Amazing Tips To Speed Up Your Podcast WorkflowIn this episode of the School of Podcasting, we dive deep into time-saving tips for podcasters. I discuss my own experiences and lessons learned, along with a lineup of fantastic guests.

       We cover a wide range of strategies to improve productivity and efficiency in podcasting. From utilizing second screens and mastering keyboard shortcuts to automating tasks with templates and transcription tools, we explore ways to streamline the podcasting process.

       Throughout the episode, we highlight individual stories and hacks from our guests, showcasing their unique approaches to saving time in podcasting. Overall, this episode is a treasure trove of practical advice for podcasters looking to make the most of their time and create high-quality content.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Participants and Efficiency Tips

       Scott from What Was That Like is speeding up editing using keyboard shortcuts and a Red Dragon M908 Gaming Mouse (aff)

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish is speeding up editing by using iZotope plugins. I use Dialogue Enhance 2.

       Jill from Fit Stong Women Over 50 eliminates editing by doing more research for your interviews.

       Branden uses the sound pads on the Zoom Podtrak P4 to help identify edit marks (he assigned tones from Audacity to the pads)

       Karin from Just Grow Something uses templates where she adds all of the files she uses for her show and saves it as a template. Then opens the template and chooses "Save As," and gives it a new name (so the blank version of the episode stays blank).

       Kim from the Pharmacists Voice also uses Templates for her audio, her images (using Canva), and anything else.

       Jim from Home Gadget Geeks ensures any online tools (like auphonic) he uses take advantage of any integrations. Tools like Active Pieces and Zapier can tie two products together.

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America and Historical Jesus batch records.

       Steve Steward from the Podcast Editors Academy and his own Editing Service uses two monitors, which speed things up and make things less stressful.

       Tips To Speed Up Your Podcast From Dave

       Use the playback speed option in Audacity. It will make people sound like chipmunks, but every little bit helps.

       Use Text Expander to create templates or anything you type over and over (Libsyn.com has a snippets feature as does Captivate, which has episode defaults (templates).

       Podpage is a set-it-and-forget-it website tool. You create an episode, and it just appears on your website. You can learn Podpage for Free. Podpage also has an episode signature at the bottom of every episode on your site.

       A Transcription service like Otter or any AI Transcription tools can be used for editing.

       I use Evernote to organize my thoughts to avoid wasting time looking for things. A cheap alternative to Notedex.

       Use a calendar scheduling tool like Acuity Scheduling, Tidycal (although it's having an issue), or Calendly. Using these tools takes the stress out of scheduling guests.

       I Use Brandy to manage my Press kit.

       Use your audience, who often have time, treasure, and talent, to help you with your show.

       Pin a folder to the left navigation in Windows Explorer and the Finder on a Mac so you don't have to dig down to get to the folder.

       Pay someone to do your editing.

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you a question. This gives you a chance to promote your show and participate in the community. Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>In this episode of the School of Podcasting, we dive deep into time-saving tips for podcasters. I discuss my own experiences and lessons learned, along with a lineup of fantastic guests.

       We cover a wide range of strategies to improve productivity and efficiency in podcasting. From utilizing second screens and mastering keyboard shortcuts to automating tasks with templates and transcription tools, we explore ways to streamline the podcasting process.

       Throughout the episode, we highlight individual stories and hacks from our guests, showcasing their unique approaches to saving time in podcasting. Overall, this episode is a treasure trove of practical advice for podcasters looking to make the most of their time and create high-quality content.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Participants and Efficiency Tips

       Scott from What Was That Like is speeding up editing using keyboard shortcuts and a Red Dragon M908 Gaming Mouse (aff)

       Craig from Live Well and Flourish is speeding up editing by using iZotope plugins. I use Dialogue Enhance 2.

       Jill from Fit Stong Women Over 50 eliminates editing by doing more research for your interviews.

       Branden uses the sound pads on the Zoom Podtrak P4 to help identify edit marks (he assigned tones from Audacity to the pads)

       Karin from Just Grow Something uses templates where she adds all of the files she uses for her show and saves it as a template. Then opens the template and chooses "Save As," and gives it a new name (so the blank version of the episode stays blank).

       Kim from the Pharmacists Voice also uses Templates for her audio, her images (using Canva), and anything else.

       Jim from Home Gadget Geeks ensures any online tools (like auphonic) he uses take advantage of any integrations. Tools like Active Pieces and Zapier can tie two products together.

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America and Historical Jesus batch records.

       Steve Steward from the Podcast Editors Academy and his own Editing Service uses two monitors, which speed things up and make things less stressful.

       Tips To Speed Up Your Podcast From Dave

       Use the playback speed option in Audacity. It will make people sound like chipmunks, but every little bit helps.

       Use Text Expander to create templates or anything you type over and over (Libsyn.com has a snippets feature as does Captivate, which has episode defaults (templates).

       Podpage is a set-it-and-forget-it website tool. You create an episode, and it just appears on your website. You can learn Podpage for Free. Podpage also has an episode signature at the bottom of every episode on your site.

       A Transcription service like Otter or any AI Transcription tools can be used for editing.

       I use Evernote to organize my thoughts to avoid wasting time looking for things. A cheap alternative to Notedex.

       Use a calendar scheduling tool like Acuity Scheduling, Tidycal (although it's having an issue), or Calendly. Using these tools takes the stress out of scheduling guests.

       I Use Brandy to manage my Press kit.

       Use your audience, who often have time, treasure, and talent, to help you with your show.

       Pin a folder to the left navigation in Windows Explorer and the Finder on a Mac so you don't have to dig down to get to the folder.

       Pay someone to do your editing.

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask you a question. This gives you a chance to promote your show and participate in the community. Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>6fa2fbfe-d5c6-4873-b92f-6075781ea804Mon, 28 Aug 2023 04:05:00 -040042:54falsefull894894Never Run Out of Room Again: How to Free Up Your Hard Drive SpaceAre you running out of hard drive space due to the large files associated with your podcast, especially if you're playing with video?

       Worry not, because in this week's episode of The School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson provides a solution to this common problem. Dave discusses the benefits of using cloud storage services like Backblaze B2 Cloud Storage to free up space on your computer.

       He shares his personal experience with Backblaze, emphasizing its reliability and the peace of mind it offers when it comes to backing up your files.

       Whether you want to save your podcast episodes, old YouTube videos, or any other large files, Backblaze B2 could perfectly fit you. Even better, the first 10GB of storage is free! And the pricing is incredibly affordable, with Backblaze charging only half a cent per gigabyte. So, you can upload many files without worrying about exceeding your budget.

       See supportthisshow.com/backblaze

       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       
       

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       
       

       It's Not As Hard As You Think

       I just returned from speaking at the 40th high school reunion, where they asked me to speak. Speaking always makes me nervous, but due to this talk NOT being about podcasting, I was REALLY Nervous. 

       
       

       I followed my own advice and figured out who I was talking to, and what the goal of the talk was (point out that we survived), and then I found people to give me honest feedback before I had to deliver it. It worked. I got a fair amount of compliments. 

       
       

       The stress and hand shaking worry was not needed. I had done my homework. So I'm here to tell you from the other side, that the worry is more than likely not necessary (I know, easier said than done). 

       Spotify Video Experiment So Far 

       while I received hundreds of downloads of the audio of the ASk the Podcast show, and a decent amount of video views on YouTube. I have not received a single play on Spotify. Granted I have not promoted it (I promote my Youtube Channel) . I wanted to see what kind of organic traffic Spotify would bring. So far I haven't received any. I do have a niche show, but I wanted you to know. 

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Backblaze Backup 

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month 

       ]]>Are you running out of hard drive space due to the large files associated with your podcast, especially if you're playing with video?

       Worry not, because in this week's episode of The School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson provides a solution to this common problem. Dave discusses the benefits of using cloud storage services like Backblaze B2 Cloud Storage to free up space on your computer.

       He shares his personal experience with Backblaze, emphasizing its reliability and the peace of mind it offers when it comes to backing up your files.

       Whether you want to save your podcast episodes, old YouTube videos, or any other large files, Backblaze B2 could perfectly fit you. Even better, the first 10GB of storage is free! And the pricing is incredibly affordable, with Backblaze charging only half a cent per gigabyte. So, you can upload many files without worrying about exceeding your budget.

       See supportthisshow.com/backblaze

       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       
       

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       
       

       It's Not As Hard As You Think

       I just returned from speaking at the 40th high school reunion, where they asked me to speak. Speaking always makes me nervous, but due to this talk NOT being about podcasting, I was REALLY Nervous. 

       
       

       I followed my own advice and figured out who I was talking to, and what the goal of the talk was (point out that we survived), and then I found people to give me honest feedback before I had to deliver it. It worked. I got a fair amount of compliments. 

       
       

       The stress and hand shaking worry was not needed. I had done my homework. So I'm here to tell you from the other side, that the worry is more than likely not necessary (I know, easier said than done). 

       Spotify Video Experiment So Far 

       while I received hundreds of downloads of the audio of the ASk the Podcast show, and a decent amount of video views on YouTube. I have not received a single play on Spotify. Granted I have not promoted it (I promote my Youtube Channel) . I wanted to see what kind of organic traffic Spotify would bring. So far I haven't received any. I do have a niche show, but I wanted you to know. 

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Backblaze Backup 

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month 

       ]]>fc615413-8a22-4dd8-ae27-121b09c084a9Mon, 21 Aug 2023 16:05:00 -040031:13falsefull893893Pinterest? Really? Repurposing Content To Increase Your Reach and Exposure with Jeff Sieh Jeff Sieh, a man wearing many hats, found himself in the heart of the digital world, not by chance but by curiosity and sheer determination. His journey wasn't a straight line. Jeff kept evolving from dabbling in corporate video production and website building to exploring social media. During one of these explorations, he stumbled upon Pinterest on a podcast. Hearing about the surge of traffic it brought to a blog stirred his interest. His first foray into Pinterest was a blog post, Manly Pinterest Tips #1, that resonated among the masses. That's when he realized the potential of Pinterest, not just as another social platform but as a visual search engine.

       BUT I DIDN'T BRING JEFF ON TO JUST TALK ABOUT PINTEREST

       Jeff has been shooting video for decades and does all of his shows LIVE. If you think about it, you can take this content and repurpose it in ANY format you want, but how do you do that without losing your mind? Jeff shares that today.

       Check Out Jeff Sieh

       jeffsieh.com

       socialmedianewslive.com

       manlypinteresttips.com/

       
       

       Topics Include

       • Using Pinterest as a Visual Search Engine
       • Best Practices and Myths of Pinterest
       • Creating Eye-Catching Pins
       • How Jeff Landed Big Guests
       • How Jeff Landed a Big Sponsor
       • The Benefits of Building Relationships
       • Repurposing Content for Maximum Value
       • Why He Uses Descript
       • The Difference Between Streamyard and Ecamm Live
       • The Big Attraction of Going Live
       • Growing Your Audience Through Consistency
       
       

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jeff Sieh's Website

       Manly Pinterest Tips

       Social Media News Live

       Ecamm Live Software

       Streamyard Live Streaming Tool

       Repurpose.io

       Social Warfare Sharing Plugin

       Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       Join the School of Podcasting!

       Canva

       The YouTube Formula Book (aff)

       Dave's Appearance on Jeff's Show

       Descript

       Streamyard and Ecamm

       Tailwind Pinterest Scheduling Tool

       The School of Podcasting

       This is episode 892 and originates at schoolofpodcasting.com/892

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network changing the World One Download at a Time.

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Other links may result in me earning a small commission

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]> Jeff Sieh, a man wearing many hats, found himself in the heart of the digital world, not by chance but by curiosity and sheer determination. His journey wasn't a straight line. Jeff kept evolving from dabbling in corporate video production and website building to exploring social media. During one of these explorations, he stumbled upon Pinterest on a podcast. Hearing about the surge of traffic it brought to a blog stirred his interest. His first foray into Pinterest was a blog post, Manly Pinterest Tips #1, that resonated among the masses. That's when he realized the potential of Pinterest, not just as another social platform but as a visual search engine.

       BUT I DIDN'T BRING JEFF ON TO JUST TALK ABOUT PINTEREST

       Jeff has been shooting video for decades and does all of his shows LIVE. If you think about it, you can take this content and repurpose it in ANY format you want, but how do you do that without losing your mind? Jeff shares that today.

       Check Out Jeff Sieh

       jeffsieh.com

       socialmedianewslive.com

       manlypinteresttips.com/

       
       

       Topics Include

       • Using Pinterest as a Visual Search Engine
       • Best Practices and Myths of Pinterest
       • Creating Eye-Catching Pins
       • How Jeff Landed Big Guests
       • How Jeff Landed a Big Sponsor
       • The Benefits of Building Relationships
       • Repurposing Content for Maximum Value
       • Why He Uses Descript
       • The Difference Between Streamyard and Ecamm Live
       • The Big Attraction of Going Live
       • Growing Your Audience Through Consistency
       
       

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jeff Sieh's Website

       Manly Pinterest Tips

       Social Media News Live

       Ecamm Live Software

       Streamyard Live Streaming Tool

       Repurpose.io

       Social Warfare Sharing Plugin

       Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       Join the School of Podcasting!

       Canva

       The YouTube Formula Book (aff)

       Dave's Appearance on Jeff's Show

       Descript

       Streamyard and Ecamm

       Tailwind Pinterest Scheduling Tool

       The School of Podcasting

       This is episode 892 and originates at schoolofpodcasting.com/892

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network changing the World One Download at a Time.

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases. Other links may result in me earning a small commission

       Mentioned in this episode:

       Question of the Month: The Future of Podcasting

       Someone asked me, and I had to think about it. So now I'm asking you, How do you feel about the future of podcasting? Where do you think it's going? (etc,). Feel free to share your opinion and why. Don't forget to tell us about your show and where we can find it.

       Question of the Month

       ]]>42e7422f-5ca8-4eab-aae3-fffc2069dc1fMon, 14 Aug 2023 04:05:00 -040046:29falsefull892892[Feed Drop] Building a Better DaveToday I'm introducing you to a show with my smallest audience, but also my most vocal. If I go too long without an episode they let me know. This podcast is my audio diary. So yes:
       • I'm not trying to make money
       • I don't care about downloads
       • I'm just talking about me
       • I try to make it entertaining.
       
       

       It is the cheapest therapy I've ever paid for. In today's episode you will hear my talk about a car accident I was in this week. It was a bad day.... or was it?

       Follow Building a Better Dave  in:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Like This Episode? Consider buying me a coffee.

       ]]>Today I'm introducing you to a show with my smallest audience, but also my most vocal. If I go too long without an episode they let me know. This podcast is my audio diary. So yes:
       • I'm not trying to make money
       • I don't care about downloads
       • I'm just talking about me
       • I try to make it entertaining.
       
       

       It is the cheapest therapy I've ever paid for. In today's episode you will hear my talk about a car accident I was in this week. It was a bad day.... or was it?

       Follow Building a Better Dave  in:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Like This Episode? Consider buying me a coffee.

       ]]>af504d4f-cab3-43cf-bc8e-383b8870ec46Fri, 11 Aug 2023 12:53:00 -040020:36falsebonus892892Unleash Your True Potential: Finding Your Voice and Unlocking Inner PowerOne of the things podcasters say is “find your voice” without knowing that it’s Jargon. After all, is my voice lost? What does that mean? Today we will look at finding your voice, and I will tell you what the difference is to the listener. Because the interesting thing is your voice isn’t lost. It’s just got a lot of clutter on top of it.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What Does Finding Your Voice Mean?

       You start your podcast (congrats!), and you feel uncomfortable. You feel out of place, and people say, "You need to find your voice." That is a really vague instruction. 

       Steps to Finding Your Voice

       I mention this in almost every episode. It starts with specifically knowing your WHY and Your WHO. 

       The more information you have on each, the clearer the target. It is the blurryness and fuzziness vision of your show that leads to insecurity. 

       Who Are You and Who Aren't You? 

       What do you believe in? What are your values? By defining what you will and will NOT talk about help clear the path for your content.

       The Netflix show House of Cards had a scene where the main character kills a dog in the first scene. This was on purpose, as they knew this would upset people. They thought, "Well, we might as well draw a line in the sand and offend people upfront. If they couldn't take the first episode, they would NEVER tolerate what else was coming in the remainder episodes. 

       Get Comfortable Through Practice

       Think back to all the firsts in your life. The first step, first tricycle, bicycle, first kiss are things we weren’t good at when we started. So do it again, and again with the goal of improving with each version of your episodes getting better.

       Acknowledge That This Will be Uncomfortable

       When you feel yourself wanting to pull away or come back to it later, push through. If you’ve ever been through counseling of any sort (single, couples, etc) it is uncomfortable. However, you come out better on the other side. I dread getting on a treadmill but never regret getting off. So when you feel that uncomfortable feeling come upon you (and it will) embrace it. You're learning. You are growing. You are improving. 

       Not Everyone Will Like You, and That is OK

       Life is not a popularity contest. That is one that is easy to say, but not always easy to live. As with everything, the more you practice it, the better you will get at it. So when you get your first one star review realize that the listener was not your target audience.

       Follow Your Gut

       There is only one of you. You are 100% unique so embrace that. Every night there are multiple stations covering the same topics. There are different strokes for different folks. Being you is very easy for you. When you try to be something you're not, it's very hard to pull off and often robs you of your passion.

       Double Check the Facts In Your Head Saying Negative Things

       Brenda was trying to prove herself to an invisible audience. She had assumed they wanted her to skim over a broad topic. When she got her episode in front of ACTUAL people she found they would rather go deep into a narrow topic. 

       In The End Be Yourself

       In the end you've had an entire lifetime being you. Relax and embrace your uniqueness. Bob Dylan, Tom Petty, Stevie Nicks, and Rod Stewart have unique voices. You either love them or hate them. Their uniqueness has enabled them to have careers spanning multiple decades.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask the audience a question. This is your chance to get involved with the show. The question is inserted dynamically (so you need to go to the link below to answer). Provide your answer, and tell us about your show and provide your website. (free exposure!)

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The YouTube Formula: How Anyone Can Unlock the Algorithm to Drive Views, Build an Audience, and Grow Revenue (aff)

       Building a Better Dave "The List" Episode

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This show original at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/891

       ]]>One of the things podcasters say is “find your voice” without knowing that it’s Jargon. After all, is my voice lost? What does that mean? Today we will look at finding your voice, and I will tell you what the difference is to the listener. Because the interesting thing is your voice isn’t lost. It’s just got a lot of clutter on top of it.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

        What Does Finding Your Voice Mean?

       You start your podcast (congrats!), and you feel uncomfortable. You feel out of place, and people say, "You need to find your voice." That is a really vague instruction. 

       Steps to Finding Your Voice

       I mention this in almost every episode. It starts with specifically knowing your WHY and Your WHO. 

       The more information you have on each, the clearer the target. It is the blurryness and fuzziness vision of your show that leads to insecurity. 

       Who Are You and Who Aren't You? 

       What do you believe in? What are your values? By defining what you will and will NOT talk about help clear the path for your content.

       The Netflix show House of Cards had a scene where the main character kills a dog in the first scene. This was on purpose, as they knew this would upset people. They thought, "Well, we might as well draw a line in the sand and offend people upfront. If they couldn't take the first episode, they would NEVER tolerate what else was coming in the remainder episodes. 

       Get Comfortable Through Practice

       Think back to all the firsts in your life. The first step, first tricycle, bicycle, first kiss are things we weren’t good at when we started. So do it again, and again with the goal of improving with each version of your episodes getting better.

       Acknowledge That This Will be Uncomfortable

       When you feel yourself wanting to pull away or come back to it later, push through. If you’ve ever been through counseling of any sort (single, couples, etc) it is uncomfortable. However, you come out better on the other side. I dread getting on a treadmill but never regret getting off. So when you feel that uncomfortable feeling come upon you (and it will) embrace it. You're learning. You are growing. You are improving. 

       Not Everyone Will Like You, and That is OK

       Life is not a popularity contest. That is one that is easy to say, but not always easy to live. As with everything, the more you practice it, the better you will get at it. So when you get your first one star review realize that the listener was not your target audience.

       Follow Your Gut

       There is only one of you. You are 100% unique so embrace that. Every night there are multiple stations covering the same topics. There are different strokes for different folks. Being you is very easy for you. When you try to be something you're not, it's very hard to pull off and often robs you of your passion.

       Double Check the Facts In Your Head Saying Negative Things

       Brenda was trying to prove herself to an invisible audience. She had assumed they wanted her to skim over a broad topic. When she got her episode in front of ACTUAL people she found they would rather go deep into a narrow topic. 

       In The End Be Yourself

       In the end you've had an entire lifetime being you. Relax and embrace your uniqueness. Bob Dylan, Tom Petty, Stevie Nicks, and Rod Stewart have unique voices. You either love them or hate them. Their uniqueness has enabled them to have careers spanning multiple decades.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month I ask the audience a question. This is your chance to get involved with the show. The question is inserted dynamically (so you need to go to the link below to answer). Provide your answer, and tell us about your show and provide your website. (free exposure!)

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The YouTube Formula: How Anyone Can Unlock the Algorithm to Drive Views, Build an Audience, and Grow Revenue (aff)

       Building a Better Dave "The List" Episode

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        This show original at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/891

       ]]>508add71-6c2c-470c-ae33-8991ec9062c8Mon, 07 Aug 2023 04:05:00 -040049:06falsefull891891Are You Primarily Audio or Video? Three Ways Your Show May Be Frustrating Your AudienceAre you audio or video first? If you want to ride the "Record the video, strip out the audio, cut the video into shorts, transcribe the audio, and become a millionaire" train, there are some things to remember.
       Your Legacy

       I saw someone today that I had not seen in at least 31 years and probably more. The last time I saw him he was a little boy who acted like a little boy. He didn't pay attention; he was hyperactive and always running around and made the job of his Sunday School teacher so hard that she went home and cried. That woman was my Mom. I was probably 11 when I later pinned this you boy who was probably 8, against the wall and said, "If you make my Mom cry again, I'll kill you." Let's call him Roy.

       Well, Roy walked into my church today, and he's probably 6' 4" and toward over me. After service, he laughed and recounted the pinning on the wall story, and he said he had taken some wrong turns in life, but all those lessons my Mom had taught him got him to turn around and get on the right path. Those lessons were probably close to 50 years ago. My Mom has been gone 34 years, and today part of her legacy walked in and shook my hand. He wanted to let me know just how special my Mom was (something I was well aware of). So when you put your words out into a podcast, you don't know who or how your words will affect people. If you have a message that needs to be heard, it's not helping people sitting on your hard drive. Get it out into the world. Start building your legacy. I can help.

       With Hollywood on Strike, Is Now the Best Time To Start a Podcast?

       With both the writers and actors on strike, new content will not be coming to our screens. We have no idea how long this will go on.

       In a graph on the Podcast Business Journal's site, James Cridland has some interesting podcasting stats, and you can see that on April 12, 2023, there were 383,996 active podcasts. Fast forward to July and that number is down by 13.4% to 335,930. Meanwhile, every survey that comes out says podcast listenership is going up. A recent study on Australia has monthly listeners going up by 7% and weekly listening went up 24% (26 to 33 million).

       So if listening is going up, and content creation is going down, that means (in theory) that those who start or continue to make content have a better chance of being found due to the lack of competition while the audience continues to go. I can help.

       Also, if you do a podcast and would love to have an actor on your show, they may have some available time on their hands.

       Don't Forget The Links

       If you want your audience to get frustrated, talk about something on your show, and then don't put a link to it. I recently did this on my Ask the Podcast Coach, and luckily the person who was nice enough to contact me was very nice, but it can make it appear that you don't care about the user. Some things are perceived as basic and expected. A few episodes ago, I talked about a video service that I eventually canceled and got a refund. Why, there was something I thought was basic and should be included, and they wanted me to edit some code.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Power Dewise Lav Microphone

       Samson Q2U

       Turning Your YouTube Content Into a Podcast

       I listened to a show this morning, and the host said, "I'm talking about three products today, and for you to get the most out of this, you should hop on over to the YouTube version. It will be much more beneficial for you over there. He then went on to say phrases like, "You'll be here on the left" and "Just click on search" right here. At this point, even with the disclaimer I felt like this guy was going to waste my time (and for the most part, he did).

       So when I went to click on the link to his YouTube channel, you guessed it - no link in the show notes.

       So you might want to refer to your episode as "the show" instead of podcast or video. Keep it generic. I occasionally share my screen on a live stream I do every Saturday. When I do, I try to make a concerted effort to

       A Cool Strategy from Udemy

       Podcast Rewind: The Podcast Accelerator

       I appeared on the Podcast Accelerator with Mark Asquith where we talk about the last two decades of podcasting and what I'm worried about for the future.

       Trying to Move Forward?

       Behavioral scientists in Great Britain did another study of a couple 100 people who wanted to start exercising they divided the people into three groups.  The first group committed to exercising.  The second group committed to exercising and reading lots of material on the benefits of exercising.  The third group committed to exercising and chose the day, time, and place when they would do it.  Only 36% of the people in those first two groups kept their commitment.  But 91% of the people in the third group kept their commitment.

       Put it on your calendar! (from the book The Power to Change)

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

        

       ]]>Are you audio or video first? If you want to ride the "Record the video, strip out the audio, cut the video into shorts, transcribe the audio, and become a millionaire" train, there are some things to remember.
       Your Legacy

       I saw someone today that I had not seen in at least 31 years and probably more. The last time I saw him he was a little boy who acted like a little boy. He didn't pay attention; he was hyperactive and always running around and made the job of his Sunday School teacher so hard that she went home and cried. That woman was my Mom. I was probably 11 when I later pinned this you boy who was probably 8, against the wall and said, "If you make my Mom cry again, I'll kill you." Let's call him Roy.

       Well, Roy walked into my church today, and he's probably 6' 4" and toward over me. After service, he laughed and recounted the pinning on the wall story, and he said he had taken some wrong turns in life, but all those lessons my Mom had taught him got him to turn around and get on the right path. Those lessons were probably close to 50 years ago. My Mom has been gone 34 years, and today part of her legacy walked in and shook my hand. He wanted to let me know just how special my Mom was (something I was well aware of). So when you put your words out into a podcast, you don't know who or how your words will affect people. If you have a message that needs to be heard, it's not helping people sitting on your hard drive. Get it out into the world. Start building your legacy. I can help.

       With Hollywood on Strike, Is Now the Best Time To Start a Podcast?

       With both the writers and actors on strike, new content will not be coming to our screens. We have no idea how long this will go on.

       In a graph on the Podcast Business Journal's site, James Cridland has some interesting podcasting stats, and you can see that on April 12, 2023, there were 383,996 active podcasts. Fast forward to July and that number is down by 13.4% to 335,930. Meanwhile, every survey that comes out says podcast listenership is going up. A recent study on Australia has monthly listeners going up by 7% and weekly listening went up 24% (26 to 33 million).

       So if listening is going up, and content creation is going down, that means (in theory) that those who start or continue to make content have a better chance of being found due to the lack of competition while the audience continues to go. I can help.

       Also, if you do a podcast and would love to have an actor on your show, they may have some available time on their hands.

       Don't Forget The Links

       If you want your audience to get frustrated, talk about something on your show, and then don't put a link to it. I recently did this on my Ask the Podcast Coach, and luckily the person who was nice enough to contact me was very nice, but it can make it appear that you don't care about the user. Some things are perceived as basic and expected. A few episodes ago, I talked about a video service that I eventually canceled and got a refund. Why, there was something I thought was basic and should be included, and they wanted me to edit some code.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        Power Dewise Lav Microphone

       Samson Q2U

       Turning Your YouTube Content Into a Podcast

       I listened to a show this morning, and the host said, "I'm talking about three products today, and for you to get the most out of this, you should hop on over to the YouTube version. It will be much more beneficial for you over there. He then went on to say phrases like, "You'll be here on the left" and "Just click on search" right here. At this point, even with the disclaimer I felt like this guy was going to waste my time (and for the most part, he did).

       So when I went to click on the link to his YouTube channel, you guessed it - no link in the show notes.

       So you might want to refer to your episode as "the show" instead of podcast or video. Keep it generic. I occasionally share my screen on a live stream I do every Saturday. When I do, I try to make a concerted effort to

       A Cool Strategy from Udemy

       Podcast Rewind: The Podcast Accelerator

       I appeared on the Podcast Accelerator with Mark Asquith where we talk about the last two decades of podcasting and what I'm worried about for the future.

       Trying to Move Forward?

       Behavioral scientists in Great Britain did another study of a couple 100 people who wanted to start exercising they divided the people into three groups.  The first group committed to exercising.  The second group committed to exercising and reading lots of material on the benefits of exercising.  The third group committed to exercising and chose the day, time, and place when they would do it.  Only 36% of the people in those first two groups kept their commitment.  But 91% of the people in the third group kept their commitment.

       Put it on your calendar! (from the book The Power to Change)

       As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

        

       ]]>870cea8f-61c5-421d-a9b0-6f440073f9ddMon, 31 Jul 2023 04:05:00 -040032:28falsefull890890[Feed Drop] Your Podcast Consultant PreviewToday I share another one of my shows. It's called You Podcast Consultant. While the School of Podcasting is typically around 40 minutes, Your Podcast Consultant is always 9 minutes or less. It's a nice bit size chunk of podcasting advice based on the common questions I see in the podcasting space.

       There are 143 episodes available at podcastconsultant.com 

       You can follow the show on 

       Apple - Spotify - Google - Amazon 

       P.S. This is episode 12, so there are now 4+ Million podcasts (I mention 600K in this episode).

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

        

       ]]>Today I share another one of my shows. It's called You Podcast Consultant. While the School of Podcasting is typically around 40 minutes, Your Podcast Consultant is always 9 minutes or less. It's a nice bit size chunk of podcasting advice based on the common questions I see in the podcasting space.

       There are 143 episodes available at podcastconsultant.com 

       You can follow the show on 

       Apple - Spotify - Google - Amazon 

       P.S. This is episode 12, so there are now 4+ Million podcasts (I mention 600K in this episode).

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

        

       ]]>fbb15164-9170-4225-ad0d-a4026b21ad4dFri, 28 Jul 2023 13:22:00 -040009:25falsebonus889889The Squeeze vs. the Juice: Avoiding Podcast Rabbit HolesOne of the reasons your show may not be growing is you are wasting your time down podcasting rabbit holes. I went down one recently and I thought I would share the insights that I picked up along the way to help you spot a potential rabbit hole, and how to avoid them so you can get back to making great content that you can confidently promote.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Feedback on this Episode: CLICK HERE

        The Squeeze vs. the Juice: Weighing the Worth of Podcasting Endeavors

       1. If it seems too good to be true, it most often is.
       2. Do you need the features that have caught your eye? Will you USE them?
       3. Be sure you've taken the time to know the equipment and resources you have.
       4. Watch out for people who promote products they haven't purchased.
       5. Recognize when you've made a bad purchase and ask for the refund.
       6. Look at the About page and see who (not what) you're working with (do they have a podcast?)
       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode 889 of the School of Podcasting

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>One of the reasons your show may not be growing is you are wasting your time down podcasting rabbit holes. I went down one recently and I thought I would share the insights that I picked up along the way to help you spot a potential rabbit hole, and how to avoid them so you can get back to making great content that you can confidently promote.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save on a monthly or yearly subscription.

       Feedback on this Episode: CLICK HERE

        The Squeeze vs. the Juice: Weighing the Worth of Podcasting Endeavors

       1. If it seems too good to be true, it most often is.
       2. Do you need the features that have caught your eye? Will you USE them?
       3. Be sure you've taken the time to know the equipment and resources you have.
       4. Watch out for people who promote products they haven't purchased.
       5. Recognize when you've made a bad purchase and ask for the refund.
       6. Look at the About page and see who (not what) you're working with (do they have a podcast?)
       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       This is episode 889 of the School of Podcasting

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>e76bd890-0a80-4eb6-950e-e47454695d8cMon, 24 Jul 2023 04:05:00 -040030:47falsefull889889Podcasting Turns 20 - Why This Medium is Unstoppable!Podcasting turned 20 years old this month, and after hearing James Cridland interview the very first person to produce a podcast (Christopher Lydon) it got me thinking about the early "Middle Finger to the Radio Industry" start of podcasting (and sadly, we seem to repeat history). 

       There is a study of 1200 podcasters who shared their why and how they podcast, and I share some additional insights. Some of them are not popular, but they are true (from my desk). 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Daily Podcast Tips Newsletter

       Want more tips on planning, launching, growing and monetizing your show with cool podcasting resources? 

       Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Bandrew Says Podcast

       The Podcast on Podcasting

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/888

        

        

        

       ]]>Podcasting turned 20 years old this month, and after hearing James Cridland interview the very first person to produce a podcast (Christopher Lydon) it got me thinking about the early "Middle Finger to the Radio Industry" start of podcasting (and sadly, we seem to repeat history). 

       There is a study of 1200 podcasters who shared their why and how they podcast, and I share some additional insights. Some of them are not popular, but they are true (from my desk). 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Daily Podcast Tips Newsletter

       Want more tips on planning, launching, growing and monetizing your show with cool podcasting resources? 

       Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/daily

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Bandrew Says Podcast

       The Podcast on Podcasting

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/888

        

        

        

       ]]>9fdb6397-9e84-4e0c-bbb4-637bdbb38bb8Mon, 17 Jul 2023 04:05:00 -040040:10falsefull888888[Feed Drop] Ask the Podcast Coach PreviewI do a number of shows and over the next few weeks, I'm going to be previewing different podcast related shows I do. 

       Today is the show Ask the Podcast Coach, which I do with Jim Collison from Home Gadget Geeks, and Gallop Podcasts. We answer questions LIVE every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST at 

       www.askthepodcastcoach.com/live

       You can jump into the video at www.askthepodcastcoach.com/question 

       You can also leave a question by clicking on the microphone in the bottom right-hand corner at www.askthepodcastcoach.com 

       Mentioned: Episode 700: Fifty-Four Podcast Questions in Twenty Six Minutes 

       See you Monday!

       Dave

       ]]>I do a number of shows and over the next few weeks, I'm going to be previewing different podcast related shows I do. 

       Today is the show Ask the Podcast Coach, which I do with Jim Collison from Home Gadget Geeks, and Gallop Podcasts. We answer questions LIVE every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST at 

       www.askthepodcastcoach.com/live

       You can jump into the video at www.askthepodcastcoach.com/question 

       You can also leave a question by clicking on the microphone in the bottom right-hand corner at www.askthepodcastcoach.com 

       Mentioned: Episode 700: Fifty-Four Podcast Questions in Twenty Six Minutes 

       See you Monday!

       Dave

       ]]>963c63be-e440-4a2e-a657-6509da378f65Wed, 12 Jul 2023 17:37:00 -040013:37falsebonusA Great Microphone For Solo Podcasters and Professional Podcast GuestsToday I'm talking about how I made 35% more than a host read ad. The POWER of feedback, and I'm playing with a new microphone that really lets me dial in a great sound. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Thanks for listening to episode 887 of the School of Podcasting. Your feedback is always appreciated.

       The Knee Jerk Reaction to Podcast Ads May Be Missing Other Opportunities

       I've heard the average host-read ad in a podcast pays about $25 per 1000 downloads. Less than 10% have the needed 10,000 downloads per episode to get a "big sponsor." In some cases, they may have enough for ads that pay anywhere from $3.85 - $7 CPM (boo!). 

       On Ask the Podcast Coach, I mentioned Switchy ( A link tracker and more) from App Summo (where it's a one-time payment for life). I earned $17.20. Obviously, I'm not going to retire on that, but the show doesn't have a huge audience. When I calculated the CPM, it was $34. So, if you're getting $5 CPM with your programmatic ads, you might want to mix in an affiliate that truly fits your audience. (and buy my book Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies That Turn Listeners into a Livelihood ) 

       For People Looking to Guest On Podcasts (and not start a show), the new Rode PodMic USB is a great choice.

       The mic is both USB and XLR, so if you later want to plug it into an interface like a Rodecaster Duo, you can. 

       It comes with a sturdy pop filter (the original PodMic was east to "pop." Its all-back design is cool. 

       You can use software that has Aphex processing and tweak the sound of your microphone and then SAVE THAT SOUND into the microphone. So when you plug it in via USB, you're sound is right where you left it. 

       It works with Rode's Capture app, so if you want to record directly to your phone, you can. (I had to use a USB C to Lightning Cable). Likewise, if your computer doesn't have a USB C input, you'll need a USB to USB C Connector. 

       The bottom line is for around $200 you end up with a single-channel roadcaster. 

       The Negatives

       While this microphone is obviously meant to be on a stand, when I had it on a boom arm it was very sensitive to any kind of tapping on the desk, etc. So, don't touch the mic or anything when recording. 

       At $200, it is more than double something like a Samson Q2u or ATR2100X, but those don't have the Aphex processing. 

        Don't Fear the Feedback

       I recently created a video sales for the School of Podcasting. I went to my newsletter and asked them to "Talk about it like I wasn't in the room." As I started implementing the suggestions, more came in (so looking back, you might want to wait or give a deadline) as I ended up making seven different versions before I loaded on the final (for now) version. 

       It all was great feedback, and I see people time and time again release their first episode without getting any feedback. What is the point of releasing something that is not going to impact the audience the way you want them to?

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Rode PodMic USB

       Rode Wireless Go II

       Big Podcast with David Hooper

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream Bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>Today I'm talking about how I made 35% more than a host read ad. The POWER of feedback, and I'm playing with a new microphone that really lets me dial in a great sound. 

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Thanks for listening to episode 887 of the School of Podcasting. Your feedback is always appreciated.

       The Knee Jerk Reaction to Podcast Ads May Be Missing Other Opportunities

       I've heard the average host-read ad in a podcast pays about $25 per 1000 downloads. Less than 10% have the needed 10,000 downloads per episode to get a "big sponsor." In some cases, they may have enough for ads that pay anywhere from $3.85 - $7 CPM (boo!). 

       On Ask the Podcast Coach, I mentioned Switchy ( A link tracker and more) from App Summo (where it's a one-time payment for life). I earned $17.20. Obviously, I'm not going to retire on that, but the show doesn't have a huge audience. When I calculated the CPM, it was $34. So, if you're getting $5 CPM with your programmatic ads, you might want to mix in an affiliate that truly fits your audience. (and buy my book Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies That Turn Listeners into a Livelihood ) 

       For People Looking to Guest On Podcasts (and not start a show), the new Rode PodMic USB is a great choice.

       The mic is both USB and XLR, so if you later want to plug it into an interface like a Rodecaster Duo, you can. 

       It comes with a sturdy pop filter (the original PodMic was east to "pop." Its all-back design is cool. 

       You can use software that has Aphex processing and tweak the sound of your microphone and then SAVE THAT SOUND into the microphone. So when you plug it in via USB, you're sound is right where you left it. 

       It works with Rode's Capture app, so if you want to record directly to your phone, you can. (I had to use a USB C to Lightning Cable). Likewise, if your computer doesn't have a USB C input, you'll need a USB to USB C Connector. 

       The bottom line is for around $200 you end up with a single-channel roadcaster. 

       The Negatives

       While this microphone is obviously meant to be on a stand, when I had it on a boom arm it was very sensitive to any kind of tapping on the desk, etc. So, don't touch the mic or anything when recording. 

       At $200, it is more than double something like a Samson Q2u or ATR2100X, but those don't have the Aphex processing. 

        Don't Fear the Feedback

       I recently created a video sales for the School of Podcasting. I went to my newsletter and asked them to "Talk about it like I wasn't in the room." As I started implementing the suggestions, more came in (so looking back, you might want to wait or give a deadline) as I ended up making seven different versions before I loaded on the final (for now) version. 

       It all was great feedback, and I see people time and time again release their first episode without getting any feedback. What is the point of releasing something that is not going to impact the audience the way you want them to?

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Rode PodMic USB

       Rode Wireless Go II

       Big Podcast with David Hooper

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream Bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

       ]]>99619538-ad12-4539-97f6-f08cf669e465Mon, 10 Jul 2023 04:05:00 -040039:02falsefull887887How to Promote Your Podcast Without Feeling SalesyIn this podcast episode, Dave Jackson, host of the School of Podcasting, interviews John Ainsworth, CEO and founder of DataDrivenMarketing.co and host of The Art of Selling Online Courses. They discuss various topics related to podcasting, online courses, and marketing. John emphasizes the importance of getting feedback from your audience and shifting your mindset from selling to helping. They also talk about the discontinuation of the Stitcher app and suggest alternative podcast apps. Additionally, Dave shares information about cleared music streaming and its potential impact on the music industry. Overall, the episode provides valuable insights and recommendations for podcasters and online course creators.

       Join the School of Podcasting Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization.

       You can join risk-free with a 30-day Money Back Guarantee

       With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Connect With John Ainsworth and Data-Driven Marketing

       Check out their website

       The Art of Selling Online Courses Show

       Free Course

       Pimp Your Funnel

       YouTube

       Twitter

       Technology Recommendations

       Thinkific

       Kajabi

       Teachable

       New Zenler

       Fresh Learn

       Stitcher Replacements

       New Podcast Apps

       Castamatic.com (ios only)

       Overcast.fm (ios Only)

       Pocketcasts (ios, android)

       ClickFunnels Alternatives

       Clickfunnels ($127/month)

       Convertpages (one-time fee $49)

       Swipepages ($29/month)

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Episode 870 about Email Lists

       Should I have a Christmas Sale? (one of John's favorite episodes)

       Podpage

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       DataDrivenMarketing.co 

       The Art of Selling Online Courses

       The Future of Podcasting Show

       Google Forms

       Meta Survey

       Neil Hedley Copywriting Course

       Ray Edwards Books (aff)

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction  00:00:37 - Opening 00:01:33 - Profit From Your Podcast Book 00:02:09 - The Art of Selling Online Courses 00:03:04 - The Dangers of Focus Groups 00:04:50 - Encouraging Honest Feedback 00:07:06 - Common Mistakes 00:09:36 - Picking Your Niche 00:11:15 - Benefits of Podcasting 00:12:40 - Getting Listeners On Your Email List 00:16:12 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:17:12 - Podcasting Newsletter () 00:17:30 - How to Overcome Feeling Salesy  00:18:17 - How Dave Does His Newsletter 00:18:34 - Switch From Selling to Helping  00:19:28 - Pimpyourfunnel.com  00:20:51 - John's Favorite Episode of His Show  00:22:45 - Preferred Platforms for Courses  00:24:42 - Dave Agrees Moving is a Pain  00:25:54 - Something I Noticed   00:28:57 - Question of the Month  00:29:58 - Where I Will Be  00:30:28 - Sticher App News  00:32:44 - New Features in Podcasting  00:35:12 - Join the School of Podcasting Risk-Free 

       Thanks for checking out episode 886

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - DataDrivenMarketing.co and host of The Art of Selling Online Courses. They discuss various topics related to podcasting, online courses, and marketing. John emphasizes the importance of getting feedback from your audience and shifting your mindset from selling to helping. They also talk about the discontinuation of the Stitcher app and suggest alternative podcast apps. Additionally, Dave shares information about cleared music streaming and its potential impact on the music industry. Overall, the episode provides valuable insights and recommendations for podcasters and online course creators.

       Join the School of Podcasting Risk-Free

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization.

       You can join risk-free with a 30-day Money Back Guarantee

       With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Connect With John Ainsworth and Data-Driven Marketing

       Check out their website

       The Art of Selling Online Courses Show

       Free Course

       Pimp Your Funnel

       YouTube

       Twitter

       Technology Recommendations

       Thinkific

       Kajabi

       Teachable

       New Zenler

       Fresh Learn

       Stitcher Replacements

       New Podcast Apps

       Castamatic.com (ios only)

       Overcast.fm (ios Only)

       Pocketcasts (ios, android)

       ClickFunnels Alternatives

       Clickfunnels ($127/month)

       Convertpages (one-time fee $49)

       Swipepages ($29/month)

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Episode 870 about Email Lists

       Should I have a Christmas Sale? (one of John's favorite episodes)

       Podpage

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       DataDrivenMarketing.co 

       The Art of Selling Online Courses

       The Future of Podcasting Show

       Google Forms

       Meta Survey

       Neil Hedley Copywriting Course

       Ray Edwards Books (aff)

       Timeline

       00:00:00 - Introduction  00:00:37 - Opening 00:01:33 - Profit From Your Podcast Book 00:02:09 - The Art of Selling Online Courses 00:03:04 - The Dangers of Focus Groups 00:04:50 - Encouraging Honest Feedback 00:07:06 - Common Mistakes 00:09:36 - Picking Your Niche 00:11:15 - Benefits of Podcasting 00:12:40 - Getting Listeners On Your Email List 00:16:12 - Join the School of Podcasting 00:17:12 - Podcasting Newsletter () 00:17:30 - How to Overcome Feeling Salesy  00:18:17 - How Dave Does His Newsletter 00:18:34 - Switch From Selling to Helping  00:19:28 - Pimpyourfunnel.com  00:20:51 - John's Favorite Episode of His Show  00:22:45 - Preferred Platforms for Courses  00:24:42 - Dave Agrees Moving is a Pain  00:25:54 - Something I Noticed   00:28:57 - Question of the Month  00:29:58 - Where I Will Be  00:30:28 - Sticher App News  00:32:44 - New Features in Podcasting  00:35:12 - Join the School of Podcasting Risk-Free 

       Thanks for checking out episode 886

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>c38c1c86-c02f-4675-8313-6525aba88d91Mon, 03 Jul 2023 04:05:00 -040035:56falsefull886886Does your podcast description fit only YOUR show? - in 10 Words or lessThis episode is based on an exercise from the book, Make Noise:  A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling (also available on Audible), where you have to describe your show in a way that can't be used by other shows, and you can use any of these words. The idea is that instead of using the word "Awesome," explain WHY it's awesome. It's hard, but in the end, it leads you to ponder what makes your show. The book is from Eric Nuzum, who appears in episode 708.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Chapters

       00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:36 - Opening 00:01:32 - The 10 Magic Words 00:02:03 - Avoid These Words 00:03:44 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:05:25 - Chris From 9th Grade Experience 00:06:17 - Bryan from Relaxed Male 00:07:16 - Glenn from Coaching Kids Curling 00:09:04 - Eric From Author Blurb 00:09:31 - Harris from Calm History 00:11:00 - Paul From Passing ACLS 00:11:30 - Sean from Radio Free Pro Wrestling 00:11:54 - It's Challenging 00:13:55 - Based on A True Story is Unique (https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com) 00:15:53 - How Can My Show Be Different?  00:17:21 - Because of My Podcast Stories Were Moved Based on Feedback  00:18:33 - Join the School of Podcasting (https://schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:19:34 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter ) 00:19:49 - Craig's Because of My Podcast Story (https://www.inglespodcast.com/) 00:22:18 - Find My Podcast...  00:23:29 - Google Podcasts Issues  00:24:31 - Dig the Well Before You're Thirsty  00:25:11 - Apple Category News  00:29:00 - Podcast Discovery () 00:29:17 - Always Listen Before Publishing () 00:33:07 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:34:07 - Where Will I Be (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where ) 00:35:13 - Podcast Baby Steps (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps )

       Thanks for listening to episode 885. If you'd like to support the show, become an awesome supporter.

        

        

        

       ]]>This episode is based on an exercise from the book, Make Noise:  A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling (also available on Audible), where you have to describe your show in a way that can't be used by other shows, and you can use any of these words. The idea is that instead of using the word "Awesome," explain WHY it's awesome. It's hard, but in the end, it leads you to ponder what makes your show. The book is from Eric Nuzum, who appears in episode 708.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Chapters

       00:00:00 - Introduction 00:00:36 - Opening 00:01:32 - The 10 Magic Words 00:02:03 - Avoid These Words 00:03:44 - Scott From What Was That Like 00:05:25 - Chris From 9th Grade Experience 00:06:17 - Bryan from Relaxed Male 00:07:16 - Glenn from Coaching Kids Curling 00:09:04 - Eric From Author Blurb 00:09:31 - Harris from Calm History 00:11:00 - Paul From Passing ACLS 00:11:30 - Sean from Radio Free Pro Wrestling 00:11:54 - It's Challenging 00:13:55 - Based on A True Story is Unique (https://www.basedonatruestorypodcast.com) 00:15:53 - How Can My Show Be Different?  00:17:21 - Because of My Podcast Stories Were Moved Based on Feedback  00:18:33 - Join the School of Podcasting (https://schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:19:34 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter ) 00:19:49 - Craig's Because of My Podcast Story (https://www.inglespodcast.com/) 00:22:18 - Find My Podcast...  00:23:29 - Google Podcasts Issues  00:24:31 - Dig the Well Before You're Thirsty  00:25:11 - Apple Category News  00:29:00 - Podcast Discovery () 00:29:17 - Always Listen Before Publishing () 00:33:07 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:34:07 - Where Will I Be (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where ) 00:35:13 - Podcast Baby Steps (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps )

       Thanks for listening to episode 885. If you'd like to support the show, become an awesome supporter.

        

        

        

       ]]>86691c31-d632-4707-a04d-250831d32766Mon, 26 Jun 2023 04:05:00 -040036:21falsefull885885How to Record a Solo Podcast Without Sounding ScriptedNOTE: Today's show is NOT edited to show how much editing I do.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Everyone has their own workflow. Here is mine:

       1. Write out what I'm trying to say.
       2. Record using the Google doc as a reference. As I'm recording/talking I know what the next paragraph is so I often will expand on the paragraph as I want to tell a story or elaborate on the concept. Previously I would boil down the document to bullet points, but found I have to do less editing, If I write out the main points, and the expand on those points when I record
       
       

       Dual Voices In This Episode

       So you can hear when I go off script, when I am off script I will be louder on one side of your headphones. Some of this is good as I expand on the point off of the documents. Other times, I'm taking tangents that normally would've been deleted.

       Don't Go Back to the Beginning

       Some people when they make a mistake will go back to the very beginning of the episode. You don't need to do this. Go back slightly until you see a good spot to jump in. Talking along with yourself and press the record button. When you get to a good stopping spot, go back and make sure that it sounds natural

       Relax, It's Not Live

       I know it's weird to talk to yourself, so think of that one person who needs to hear your content. If you mess up on a solo show, it's no sweat. There are no re-interviews to schedule. Just go back and fix your mistake.

       Practice, Practice, Practice

       Even in my early days at the School of Podcasting, while there are things that could be improved for a new podcaster, I felt I had the "talk to your invisible friend" part down. This might be because I often had to entertain myself. I played with audio tools like cassette decks and reel-to-reel tape machines when I was very young. I started and still keep a journal. I'm a musician and have been on stage since I was 15, and I did daily presentations as a teacher for decades. There is no replacement for experience. This doesn't mean it will take you 40 years to sound good, but it will take more than 40 minutes. Just start recording yourself and practice getting words out of your brain, out of your mouth, and into a recording. Then delete it. 

       ]]>NOTE: Today's show is NOT edited to show how much editing I do.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Everyone has their own workflow. Here is mine:

       1. Write out what I'm trying to say.
       2. Record using the Google doc as a reference. As I'm recording/talking I know what the next paragraph is so I often will expand on the paragraph as I want to tell a story or elaborate on the concept. Previously I would boil down the document to bullet points, but found I have to do less editing, If I write out the main points, and the expand on those points when I record
       
       

       Dual Voices In This Episode

       So you can hear when I go off script, when I am off script I will be louder on one side of your headphones. Some of this is good as I expand on the point off of the documents. Other times, I'm taking tangents that normally would've been deleted.

       Don't Go Back to the Beginning

       Some people when they make a mistake will go back to the very beginning of the episode. You don't need to do this. Go back slightly until you see a good spot to jump in. Talking along with yourself and press the record button. When you get to a good stopping spot, go back and make sure that it sounds natural

       Relax, It's Not Live

       I know it's weird to talk to yourself, so think of that one person who needs to hear your content. If you mess up on a solo show, it's no sweat. There are no re-interviews to schedule. Just go back and fix your mistake.

       Practice, Practice, Practice

       Even in my early days at the School of Podcasting, while there are things that could be improved for a new podcaster, I felt I had the "talk to your invisible friend" part down. This might be because I often had to entertain myself. I played with audio tools like cassette decks and reel-to-reel tape machines when I was very young. I started and still keep a journal. I'm a musician and have been on stage since I was 15, and I did daily presentations as a teacher for decades. There is no replacement for experience. This doesn't mean it will take you 40 years to sound good, but it will take more than 40 minutes. Just start recording yourself and practice getting words out of your brain, out of your mouth, and into a recording. Then delete it. 

       ]]>eb616cee-e2e6-4d36-ad43-a26a160fb11aMon, 19 Jun 2023 04:05:00 -040042:05falsefull884884Is YouTube a Wolf in Sheep's Clothing?Today I bring my insights from working a podcasting helpdesk to help you avoid some common pitfalls. Why isn't my episode in Apple? What is the most compatible audio format? I moved my website and broke my podcast! YouTube is sniffing the idea of being an audio media host...

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20% 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Podnews Weekly Review

       Youtube Rewarding New Users

       Coolerwebsites.com (domains and hosting)

       Podpage - build a podcast website in 10 minutes! No Coding.

       Keto Mojo Blood Glucose Measuring 

       Podcast Apps That Support Video Podcast 411

        

       Topics:

       00:00:44 - Table of Contents  00:01:04 - Opening 00:01:55 - You Can't Fix What You Can't See  00:07:52 - The Most Compatible File Format  00:10:26 - Youtube a Wolf in Sheep's Clothing? () 00:16:34 - Clip From Podnews Weekly  00:17:38 - Join the School of Podcasting Community  00:18:41 - Podcasting Observations Nesletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:18:55 - Be Careful Attachnig Your Domain To Your Feed  00:26:02 - Question of the Month  00:27:02 - Where Will I Be?  00:27:33 - I Value Your Time  00:28:27 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:29:06 - Bloopers 

       Thanks for listening to episode 883. This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network. Changing the world one download at a time.

       ]]>Today I bring my insights from working a podcasting helpdesk to help you avoid some common pitfalls. Why isn't my episode in Apple? What is the most compatible audio format? I moved my website and broke my podcast! YouTube is sniffing the idea of being an audio media host...

       Join the School of Podcasting Community Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20% 

       Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Podnews Weekly Review

       Youtube Rewarding New Users

       Coolerwebsites.com (domains and hosting)

       Podpage - build a podcast website in 10 minutes! No Coding.

       Keto Mojo Blood Glucose Measuring 

       Podcast Apps That Support Video Podcast 411

        

       Topics:

       00:00:44 - Table of Contents  00:01:04 - Opening 00:01:55 - You Can't Fix What You Can't See  00:07:52 - The Most Compatible File Format  00:10:26 - Youtube a Wolf in Sheep's Clothing? () 00:16:34 - Clip From Podnews Weekly  00:17:38 - Join the School of Podcasting Community  00:18:41 - Podcasting Observations Nesletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:18:55 - Be Careful Attachnig Your Domain To Your Feed  00:26:02 - Question of the Month  00:27:02 - Where Will I Be?  00:27:33 - I Value Your Time  00:28:27 - Join the School of Podcasting  00:29:06 - Bloopers 

       Thanks for listening to episode 883. This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network. Changing the world one download at a time.

       ]]>1f71c311-fc44-4d5a-8dae-06deef188c30Mon, 12 Jun 2023 04:05:00 -040029:38falsefull883883Identify and Lean Into Your Strengths in the Face of AIOn this episode of School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson covers a range of topics, including the importance of feedback before launching a podcast, insights from the Beatles' interviews (and how they apply to podcasting), the importance of relatability in storytelling, and a challenge to describe one's podcast in 10 words without using certain words.

       Dave also reflects on how technology has advanced and the nerves that come with it. The guest in this episode is a former street kid turned rapper who shares his inspiring story and encourages people to focus on what makes them unique. Lastly, the podcast discusses the impact of robots on people's jobs and shares a tool called 11 Labs that can generate fake voices. Tune in to this episode to learn more about podcasting and get inspired by the stories shared by its guests.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This exercise is from the book Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling. Describe your podcast in no more than ten words, and do so in a way that describes nothing else in the world. The fun part is you CAN'T use any of these words. PDF

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Listenable

       Jelly Roll

       8 Days a Week

       Taylor Swift Tiny Desk Concert

        Timeline

       00:00:00 - Robo Dave 00:00:42 - Opening 00:01:39 - elevenlabs.io 00:03:03 - Robocasting 00:03:49 - Surprise Visit From Joe 00:04:29 - Things Are Going to Get Weird 00:05:09 - The One Thing Robots Can't Do 00:06:24 - People Can Relate To Your Experience 00:08:27 - Double-Down on Being Human 00:08:43 - Taylor Swift Embraces Her Strength 00:09:33 - Talk to one Person -And Give Your Audience What They Want 00:10:48 - We Like to See and Hear Ourselves in Others 00:14:03 - What Makes a Good Podcast? 00:15:36 - Join the School of Podcasting Community (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:16:37 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:16:51 - The Beatles Talked to One Person () 00:17:25 - The Beatles Play 576 in 48 Days () 00:18:28 - They See You Before They Hear You () 00:18:45 - Proof Of Concept Before Big Launch () 00:21:04 - Amazing Interviews Made People Want to Know More () 00:21:53 - Know Your Guest and Avoid Sounding Stupid () 00:22:33 - Can Your Audience Relate To Your Content? () 00:24:48 - Content and Delivery () 00:26:44 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:27:47 - Where Will I Be? () 00:28:16 - Conclusion (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:29:57 - Bloopers: Robo Dave ()

       ]]>On this episode of School of Podcasting, Dave Jackson covers a range of topics, including the importance of feedback before launching a podcast, insights from the Beatles' interviews (and how they apply to podcasting), the importance of relatability in storytelling, and a challenge to describe one's podcast in 10 words without using certain words.

       Dave also reflects on how technology has advanced and the nerves that come with it. The guest in this episode is a former street kid turned rapper who shares his inspiring story and encourages people to focus on what makes them unique. Lastly, the podcast discusses the impact of robots on people's jobs and shares a tool called 11 Labs that can generate fake voices. Tune in to this episode to learn more about podcasting and get inspired by the stories shared by its guests.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This exercise is from the book Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling. Describe your podcast in no more than ten words, and do so in a way that describes nothing else in the world. The fun part is you CAN'T use any of these words. PDF

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be?

       Question of the Month

       Listenable

       Jelly Roll

       8 Days a Week

       Taylor Swift Tiny Desk Concert

        Timeline

       00:00:00 - Robo Dave 00:00:42 - Opening 00:01:39 - elevenlabs.io 00:03:03 - Robocasting 00:03:49 - Surprise Visit From Joe 00:04:29 - Things Are Going to Get Weird 00:05:09 - The One Thing Robots Can't Do 00:06:24 - People Can Relate To Your Experience 00:08:27 - Double-Down on Being Human 00:08:43 - Taylor Swift Embraces Her Strength 00:09:33 - Talk to one Person -And Give Your Audience What They Want 00:10:48 - We Like to See and Hear Ourselves in Others 00:14:03 - What Makes a Good Podcast? 00:15:36 - Join the School of Podcasting Community (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:16:37 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:16:51 - The Beatles Talked to One Person () 00:17:25 - The Beatles Play 576 in 48 Days () 00:18:28 - They See You Before They Hear You () 00:18:45 - Proof Of Concept Before Big Launch () 00:21:04 - Amazing Interviews Made People Want to Know More () 00:21:53 - Know Your Guest and Avoid Sounding Stupid () 00:22:33 - Can Your Audience Relate To Your Content? () 00:24:48 - Content and Delivery () 00:26:44 - Question of the Month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:27:47 - Where Will I Be? () 00:28:16 - Conclusion (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:29:57 - Bloopers: Robo Dave ()

       ]]>9471a610-0185-4f78-9e6a-3d402e0a32daMon, 05 Jun 2023 04:05:00 -040031:13falsefull882882Your Favorite Podcast Tools RevealedWe all use different tools to create our episodes. I left the door WIDE OPEN for your responses and asked what was your favorite tool to create your show. The answers are very interesting.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Participants

       Scott from What Was That Like? - Pre Chat Conversations via Squadcast 

       Matt from The Author inside You loves Canva (so do I)

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer loves his Rodecaster Pro I (hard to find the new Rodecasterpro Duo is available for pre-order,

       Sarah from the Kind Leadership Challenge thinks DELEGATION is her favorite tool. She uses Descript and an outside editor. 

       Craig from InglesPodcast - values his co-host.

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories loves Izotope.

       Alison from Starzology loves Buzzsprout

       Fred from Podcast Reporter loves Audacity

       Mark from the History of North America also loves Audacity

       Steve From stevestewart.me love Text Expander (SO DO I!)

       Chris from Podtastic Audio loves Cleanfeed

       Zo From Back Look Cinema loves Audacity

       Dave Loves Switchy, which is a one-time payment on AppSumo

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       10 Words to Describe Your Show - Full description at:

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

         

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Listenable by Bert Weiss

       ]]>We all use different tools to create our episodes. I left the door WIDE OPEN for your responses and asked what was your favorite tool to create your show. The answers are very interesting.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Participants

       Scott from What Was That Like? - Pre Chat Conversations via Squadcast 

       Matt from The Author inside You loves Canva (so do I)

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer loves his Rodecaster Pro I (hard to find the new Rodecasterpro Duo is available for pre-order,

       Sarah from the Kind Leadership Challenge thinks DELEGATION is her favorite tool. She uses Descript and an outside editor. 

       Craig from InglesPodcast - values his co-host.

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories loves Izotope.

       Alison from Starzology loves Buzzsprout

       Fred from Podcast Reporter loves Audacity

       Mark from the History of North America also loves Audacity

       Steve From stevestewart.me love Text Expander (SO DO I!)

       Chris from Podtastic Audio loves Cleanfeed

       Zo From Back Look Cinema loves Audacity

       Dave Loves Switchy, which is a one-time payment on AppSumo

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       10 Words to Describe Your Show - Full description at:

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

         

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Listenable by Bert Weiss

       ]]>1bc14b45-f1ac-4777-ba63-687cf5ef4be9Mon, 29 May 2023 04:05:00 -040043:02falsefull881881Sharing Podcast Launch NumbersI get the "Is this good?" question when people first see their numbers. I'm going to share the launch numbers of two shows I did that got a "mild send off" and the shows are growing.

       Before we get into stats, we need to understand that downloads are just ONE WAY to measure your success. I know our ego is involved but the problem with comparing your podcast stats with others is: Podcasting is a lot like golf or bowling or any other sport that you do against yourself. I'm not saying there is no competition (often much less than you think) but we don't know what we are truly up against. Instead of starring at your competition and getting angry, stare at your audience to help give them what they want. 

       Know Why You're Doing Your Podcast

       For the School of Podcasting, my goals are to inspire you to start a podcast, go in the right direction with realistic expectations, and help you achieve your goals. How do we do that? By having you join my membership site and that is the biggest way I measure my show. 

       Michael O'Neil was nice enough to take a picture of my book Profit from your podcast: Proven strategies to turn your listeners into a livelihood in a Fed-ex store (picture on the website). The goal of that podcast is to inform people with monetization strategies that make them buy the book. 

       We All Go All In on the Podcast Launch

       When we launch we tell everyone we know (family friends, co-workers, email lists, etc) and we might continue that for a few weeks until we realize that growth is slow. At first, you might jump 10-20% (but that's easy when your first episode had 15 downloads and the next one had 18). 

       Full article with graphics at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/880

        

       ]]>I get the "Is this good?" question when people first see their numbers. I'm going to share the launch numbers of two shows I did that got a "mild send off" and the shows are growing.

       Before we get into stats, we need to understand that downloads are just ONE WAY to measure your success. I know our ego is involved but the problem with comparing your podcast stats with others is: Podcasting is a lot like golf or bowling or any other sport that you do against yourself. I'm not saying there is no competition (often much less than you think) but we don't know what we are truly up against. Instead of starring at your competition and getting angry, stare at your audience to help give them what they want. 

       Know Why You're Doing Your Podcast

       For the School of Podcasting, my goals are to inspire you to start a podcast, go in the right direction with realistic expectations, and help you achieve your goals. How do we do that? By having you join my membership site and that is the biggest way I measure my show. 

       Michael O'Neil was nice enough to take a picture of my book Profit from your podcast: Proven strategies to turn your listeners into a livelihood in a Fed-ex store (picture on the website). The goal of that podcast is to inform people with monetization strategies that make them buy the book. 

       We All Go All In on the Podcast Launch

       When we launch we tell everyone we know (family friends, co-workers, email lists, etc) and we might continue that for a few weeks until we realize that growth is slow. At first, you might jump 10-20% (but that's easy when your first episode had 15 downloads and the next one had 18). 

       Full article with graphics at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/880

        

       ]]>51ceec16-0893-4c21-96b0-26e5de4f3c68Mon, 22 May 2023 04:05:00 -040046:39falsefull880880Katie Krimitsos and The Power of Pivoting: Building the Women's Meditation NetworkToday we explore the factors that contribute to a successful podcast strategy, including getting featured on podcast players and paid advertising efforts. We hear the inspiring journey of Katie, Krimitsos who created the Women's Meditation Network after feeling disinterested in her previous business and finding a lacking market for women and meditation.

       We learn about the importance of just starting, experimenting, and having fun, as well as curating content for listeners. Katie shares her experience with advertising and maximizing revenue while engineering her pre-roll to not upset listeners. We dive into the uniqueness of her meditations and the focus on improving the content to create an audio experience that touches the listener's soul.

       Finally, we explore Katie's stickler for priorities and energy management, strategizing her business projects, and streamlining her energy to bring on more one-on-one clients.

       Check out her many shows at www.womensmeditationnetwork.com

       Katie's previous appearance on episode 565 about creating communities

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be? 

       ]]>Today we explore the factors that contribute to a successful podcast strategy, including getting featured on podcast players and paid advertising efforts. We hear the inspiring journey of Katie, Krimitsos who created the Women's Meditation Network after feeling disinterested in her previous business and finding a lacking market for women and meditation.

       We learn about the importance of just starting, experimenting, and having fun, as well as curating content for listeners. Katie shares her experience with advertising and maximizing revenue while engineering her pre-roll to not upset listeners. We dive into the uniqueness of her meditations and the focus on improving the content to create an audio experience that touches the listener's soul.

       Finally, we explore Katie's stickler for priorities and energy management, strategizing her business projects, and streamlining her energy to bring on more one-on-one clients.

       Check out her many shows at www.womensmeditationnetwork.com

       Katie's previous appearance on episode 565 about creating communities

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Where Will Dave Be? 

       ]]>6f895fc9-e77e-4a31-959f-5c1fa5cf9a57Mon, 15 May 2023 04:05:00 -040050:20falsefull879879Podcast Stew: Better Episode Titles, A Good Hook, Bogus Stats, YouTube MusicI have a few ideas that I have put together, as they are all short ideas. The goal is to help you grow your show, and hook your listeners. 

       Creating Better Episode Titles For Your Podcast

       NPR SITE

       NPR PDF

       More Headline Training from NPR

       LISTENNOTES INFORMATION

       What is Listennotes.com Global Rank? This podcast is one of the top 0.5% most popular shows out of 3,100,277 podcasts globally, ranked by Listen Score (the estimated popularity score).

       According to their site: * Other websites / apps may claim that they have way more than 3,100,277 podcasts in their database. This is because they inflate the number by including A LOT of 1) podcasts that were already deleted long time ago; 2) super low-quality podcasts (e.g., no episodes at all, only one 10-second episode in the RSS feed for testing, or machine-generated audio); 3) non-audio contents distributed via rss (e.g., RSS feeds with only PDF files, not audio). On the other hand, we deploy automatic scripts (24/7) and human moderators (daily) to clean up data. We try our best to minimize the number of such bad "podcasts" in our database.

       I still find it interesting that my friend's show which had its last real episode in 2015, has a ranking of 42 out of 100, and is in the top 1.5%

       So I'm still a little blurry on how those stats are calculated..

       TIMELINE

       00:00:00 - Table of Contents  00:00:26 - Opening  00:01:21 - Youtube Music - So Far, Nothing  00:02:27 - Ashley Carmen Story (https://www.bloomberg.com/news/newsletters/2023-05-04/youtube-s-podcast-deals-with-npr-slate-and-new-york-times-are-flopping) 00:03:58 - My Numbers So Far  00:06:08 - Youtube is Confusing People  00:07:28 - Confusion in the Wild (https://soundsprofitable.com/podcast/april-is-adopt-a-listener-month-a-conversation-with-lauren-passell/) 00:09:09 - Listennotes.com Still Bogus  00:11:44 -  A Very Strange Interview  00:14:44 - Join the School of Podcasting Community (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:15:45 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:15:59 - Create Engaging Episode Titles  00:16:39 - NPR Episode Title Summary  00:20:08 - A Great Hook - Daisy Jones and the Six (https://amzn.to/3Bmn1FH) 00:22:51 - She Podcasts Live (https://www.shepodcasts.com) Use coupon sop 00:23:47 - If Podcasts Were Honest | Honest Ads (https://youtu.be/FmZrAlu-j80) 00:24:33 - Question of the month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:25:34 - Where Will I Be (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where) 00:26:05 - Join the School of Podcasting (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

        

        

        

        

       ]]>I have a few ideas that I have put together, as they are all short ideas. The goal is to help you grow your show, and hook your listeners. 

       Creating Better Episode Titles For Your Podcast

       NPR SITE

       NPR PDF

       More Headline Training from NPR

       LISTENNOTES INFORMATION

       What is Listennotes.com Global Rank? This podcast is one of the top 0.5% most popular shows out of 3,100,277 podcasts globally, ranked by Listen Score (the estimated popularity score).

       According to their site: * Other websites / apps may claim that they have way more than 3,100,277 podcasts in their database. This is because they inflate the number by including A LOT of 1) podcasts that were already deleted long time ago; 2) super low-quality podcasts (e.g., no episodes at all, only one 10-second episode in the RSS feed for testing, or machine-generated audio); 3) non-audio contents distributed via rss (e.g., RSS feeds with only PDF files, not audio). On the other hand, we deploy automatic scripts (24/7) and human moderators (daily) to clean up data. We try our best to minimize the number of such bad "podcasts" in our database.

       I still find it interesting that my friend's show which had its last real episode in 2015, has a ranking of 42 out of 100, and is in the top 1.5%

       So I'm still a little blurry on how those stats are calculated..

       TIMELINE

       00:00:00 - Table of Contents  00:00:26 - Opening  00:01:21 - Youtube Music - So Far, Nothing  00:02:27 - Ashley Carmen Story (https://www.bloomberg.com/news/newsletters/2023-05-04/youtube-s-podcast-deals-with-npr-slate-and-new-york-times-are-flopping) 00:03:58 - My Numbers So Far  00:06:08 - Youtube is Confusing People  00:07:28 - Confusion in the Wild (https://soundsprofitable.com/podcast/april-is-adopt-a-listener-month-a-conversation-with-lauren-passell/) 00:09:09 - Listennotes.com Still Bogus  00:11:44 -  A Very Strange Interview  00:14:44 - Join the School of Podcasting Community (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener) 00:15:45 - Podcasting Observations Newsletter (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter) 00:15:59 - Create Engaging Episode Titles  00:16:39 - NPR Episode Title Summary  00:20:08 - A Great Hook - Daisy Jones and the Six (https://amzn.to/3Bmn1FH) 00:22:51 - She Podcasts Live (https://www.shepodcasts.com) Use coupon sop 00:23:47 - If Podcasts Were Honest | Honest Ads (https://youtu.be/FmZrAlu-j80) 00:24:33 - Question of the month (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question) 00:25:34 - Where Will I Be (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where) 00:26:05 - Join the School of Podcasting (https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

        

        

        

        

       ]]>5ea6aac3-47e6-42f1-931f-4561ded944e0Mon, 08 May 2023 04:05:00 -040027:35falsefull878878Apple's Advice for Growing Your PodcastI looked for a new podcast and never really found what I wanted (a daily motivation podcast of 5 minutes or less). What I did find as I search floored me in some cases. I thought, "Are people still doing/saying that?" I did some research on some subjects and found out some things as well.

       Ready To Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Podcasting Is "Too Crowded," and Someone Is Already Doing a Podcast Like Yours

       When you look at Podcastindex.org, you will see (today) 4,088,299 and only 253,396 have produced an episode in the last ten days (6%) and that only goes up to 13% if you include the 523,942 shows that produced an episode in the last 90 days. 

       Time and time again, I found a podcast that I thought would fit my criteria, but they either had 2 episodes (and quit) or had many episodes but quit in 2021. So if you see a large number of podcasts in the genre you are looking to be in when you launch, it may not be as crowded as you think. Many of the dead shows are from Spotify for Podcasters users (formerly Anchor) who "tried podcasting" and then quit (and being a free service, the files have not been removed). 

       Horrible Episode Titles

       This would be a horrible example of an episode title for the episode:

       Episode 878 Dave Jackson School of Podcasting 

       If you must use episode numbers, I recommend putting them at the end of the name. 

       When I look at Tim Ferris' show, he has extremely long episode titles, and when you first look at his show (where you can see all the episode titles), they seem to get cut off after 167 words. 

       I've heard other people recommend 60-80 characters for your title, and that goes against

       Unhelpful Artwork

       I see people who put a microphone on artwork about mental health. This would be like putting a camera on every movie poster. It's not needed, as is the word "Podcast" in your title. Does your artwork help people know what your show is about before they hear it?

       Rating and Reviews Nonsense

       From Apple's website:

       Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes. In other words, they may not help people find a podcast on their own, but they influence whether people will listen or follow, and those factors influence the charts. -source

       Poor Descriptions

       Again from Apple:

       Your description should tell listeners what kind of content you talk about and explain how people can benefit from listening. If you need a little help, think about how you can convey the problem you’re trying to solve in a way that convinces listeners they should care. -source

       Guests With Really Bad Audio

       I get it when it's an A-list guest, but with anybody else, you need to keep in mind it is YOUR show and YOUR brand that takes the hit. See this episode.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Previous Episode: Have I Underestimated the Power of Apple Podcast Reviews?

       Beating Podcast Burnout with Dave Jackson: Setting Real Expectations (Part 1)

        

        

        

        

        

        

       ]]>I looked for a new podcast and never really found what I wanted (a daily motivation podcast of 5 minutes or less). What I did find as I search floored me in some cases. I thought, "Are people still doing/saying that?" I did some research on some subjects and found out some things as well.

       Ready To Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Podcasting Is "Too Crowded," and Someone Is Already Doing a Podcast Like Yours

       When you look at Podcastindex.org, you will see (today) 4,088,299 and only 253,396 have produced an episode in the last ten days (6%) and that only goes up to 13% if you include the 523,942 shows that produced an episode in the last 90 days. 

       Time and time again, I found a podcast that I thought would fit my criteria, but they either had 2 episodes (and quit) or had many episodes but quit in 2021. So if you see a large number of podcasts in the genre you are looking to be in when you launch, it may not be as crowded as you think. Many of the dead shows are from Spotify for Podcasters users (formerly Anchor) who "tried podcasting" and then quit (and being a free service, the files have not been removed). 

       Horrible Episode Titles

       This would be a horrible example of an episode title for the episode:

       Episode 878 Dave Jackson School of Podcasting 

       If you must use episode numbers, I recommend putting them at the end of the name. 

       When I look at Tim Ferris' show, he has extremely long episode titles, and when you first look at his show (where you can see all the episode titles), they seem to get cut off after 167 words. 

       I've heard other people recommend 60-80 characters for your title, and that goes against

       Unhelpful Artwork

       I see people who put a microphone on artwork about mental health. This would be like putting a camera on every movie poster. It's not needed, as is the word "Podcast" in your title. Does your artwork help people know what your show is about before they hear it?

       Rating and Reviews Nonsense

       From Apple's website:

       Although ratings, reviews, and shares also help indicate a podcast’s newness, popularity, and quality, they are not factored into the algorithm that determines the rankings for Top Shows and Top Episodes. In other words, they may not help people find a podcast on their own, but they influence whether people will listen or follow, and those factors influence the charts. -source

       Poor Descriptions

       Again from Apple:

       Your description should tell listeners what kind of content you talk about and explain how people can benefit from listening. If you need a little help, think about how you can convey the problem you’re trying to solve in a way that convinces listeners they should care. -source

       Guests With Really Bad Audio

       I get it when it's an A-list guest, but with anybody else, you need to keep in mind it is YOUR show and YOUR brand that takes the hit. See this episode.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is open-ended. This could be software, hardware, etc. What is your favorite tool? What is the thing that has you saying, "Oh, I'm so glad I have this!" What is your favorite tool?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 6/26/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Dave's YouTube Channel

       Dave's Podcasting Newsletter

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Previous Episode: Have I Underestimated the Power of Apple Podcast Reviews?

       Beating Podcast Burnout with Dave Jackson: Setting Real Expectations (Part 1)

        

        

        

        

        

        

       ]]>000f2cc0-9228-4de2-9990-afdcc70dff81Mon, 01 May 2023 04:05:00 -040040:58falsefull877877Listener Preferences and Finding Your Podcast Length Sweet SpotDo you have questions about podcast length? We discuss this with various podcasters. The ideal length of a podcast depends on the type of content and the audience's needs, preferences, and routines. Our guests share their thoughts and experiences on the matter. We also preview new podcast discoveries and the creation of a weight loss accountability group. Tune in, as always, to learn more about podcasting and join our community on schoolofpodcasting.com.

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        Participants:

       Brandon B (future podcaster)

       Chris from Podcastic Audio (Prefers a 1-hour podcast)

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories (reminds podcasters to pick a consistent length)

       Paul from Pass ACLS Top of the day (prefers 20-minute episodes)

       Todd from Guardian Down Cast, The Destiny Help Desk  (expects 1-2 hours per episode).

       Kim Newlove from The Pharmacists Voice ( prefers 8-17 minute episodes)

       Eric Alton-Glenn Hilliard from White Collared and Steel Watching (doesn't have a preference)

       Sarah Clark from Kind Leadership Challenge (shares that the content fits the episode)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month we ask a question for the listeners to respond. This is a win-win. You get added exposure (sometimes called "The Dave Jackson" effect), and we all learn together. To see this month's question and to get free exposure for your show, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question now. 

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Additional Shows About Podcasting From Dave

       In addition to this show, I have additional shows about podcasting:

       Your Podcast Consultant: One tip per episode - 9 Minutes or Less

       Podcast Rodeo Show: I Grab a Random Podcast and See How Long I Can Hang On

       Ask the Podcast Coach: A live "call in" show every Saturday at 10:30 AM ET

       Podcast Review Show: Myself and radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your episode and website.

        Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com

       Addition Shows By Dave About Podcasting

       and check out my other podcasts at www.powerofpodcasting.com

        

        

        

       ]]>Do you have questions about podcast length? We discuss this with various podcasters. The ideal length of a podcast depends on the type of content and the audience's needs, preferences, and routines. Our guests share their thoughts and experiences on the matter. We also preview new podcast discoveries and the creation of a weight loss accountability group. Tune in, as always, to learn more about podcasting and join our community on schoolofpodcasting.com.

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        Participants:

       Brandon B (future podcaster)

       Chris from Podcastic Audio (Prefers a 1-hour podcast)

       York from Welcome to Earth Stories (reminds podcasters to pick a consistent length)

       Paul from Pass ACLS Top of the day (prefers 20-minute episodes)

       Todd from Guardian Down Cast, The Destiny Help Desk  (expects 1-2 hours per episode).

       Kim Newlove from The Pharmacists Voice ( prefers 8-17 minute episodes)

       Eric Alton-Glenn Hilliard from White Collared and Steel Watching (doesn't have a preference)

       Sarah Clark from Kind Leadership Challenge (shares that the content fits the episode)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Each month we ask a question for the listeners to respond. This is a win-win. You get added exposure (sometimes called "The Dave Jackson" effect), and we all learn together. To see this month's question and to get free exposure for your show, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question now. 

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Additional Shows About Podcasting From Dave

       In addition to this show, I have additional shows about podcasting:

       Your Podcast Consultant: One tip per episode - 9 Minutes or Less

       Podcast Rodeo Show: I Grab a Random Podcast and See How Long I Can Hang On

       Ask the Podcast Coach: A live "call in" show every Saturday at 10:30 AM ET

       Podcast Review Show: Myself and radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your episode and website.

        Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        Join the Newsletter For More Podcast Tips

       Want more podcast insights, tips, tricks, and strategies? Sign up for my newsletter at 

       www.podcastingobservations.com

       Addition Shows By Dave About Podcasting

       and check out my other podcasts at www.powerofpodcasting.com

        

        

        

       ]]>77c626d3-8607-4e91-a4cb-2fad73c0aaa2Mon, 24 Apr 2023 04:05:00 -040035:08falsefull876876The Pros and Cons of 6 Different Podcast FormatsSo many podcasters think there are only two formats for your podcast: solo and interview. Today I share additional formats that you may choose to use with your show. We also talk about ways to spice up your show for maximum impact. We also have a "Because of My Podcast" story.

       Formats: 1. Solo 2. Co-host 3. Panel / Roundtable 4. Narrative 5. The Hot Mess 6. Audio Drama

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/875

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 4/21/23

       Because of My Podcast: Dan Kreiness

       Dan hosts the Leader of Learning show, and because of his podcast, he was hired to create courses for a company in Dubai.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Community

       Narrative Style Episode with Deirdre Tshen of Capsho

       Time-shifted Roundtable Episode on EMail Lists

       Dealing with Overwhelm Episode

       Rumble Studio

       Squadcast

       Libsyn (www.libsyn.com - use the coupon code sopfree)

        

       ]]>So many podcasters think there are only two formats for your podcast: solo and interview. Today I share additional formats that you may choose to use with your show. We also talk about ways to spice up your show for maximum impact. We also have a "Because of My Podcast" story.

       Formats: 1. Solo 2. Co-host 3. Panel / Roundtable 4. Narrative 5. The Hot Mess 6. Audio Drama

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/875

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 4/21/23

       Because of My Podcast: Dan Kreiness

       Dan hosts the Leader of Learning show, and because of his podcast, he was hired to create courses for a company in Dubai.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Community

       Narrative Style Episode with Deirdre Tshen of Capsho

       Time-shifted Roundtable Episode on EMail Lists

       Dealing with Overwhelm Episode

       Rumble Studio

       Squadcast

       Libsyn (www.libsyn.com - use the coupon code sopfree)

        

       ]]>edac8956-73a2-4e4d-98d2-31bcfe1c1794Mon, 17 Apr 2023 04:05:00 -040037:05falsefull875875The When and How of Rebranding Your Podcast Without Shooting Yourself In the FootOn this episode of School of Podcasting, we're discussing an important topic for podcasters - rebranding. The conversation revolves around the possibility of changing the name, intro, outro, and thumbnail of a show, including updating old episodes and descriptions. Dave offers helpful tips on how to go about the process and stresses not changing your feed..This episode is filled with valuable insights and resources for both aspiring and seasoned podcasters. You won't want to miss it!
       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Mark Vinet from the History of North America Podcast. While we know the perfect length of a podcast is “As long as it needs to be and not a minute more.” What is YOUR perfect podcast length, and why?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 4/21/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Because of My Podcast: I'm Alive

       Jennifer Dragonette shares how podcasting help redefine who she is and put her back on the road to success. I recently appeared on episode 60 of her Cure for Podfade show.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       KFC Rebranding

       Weight Watchers Rebranding

       The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

        

       ]]>On this episode of School of Podcasting, we're discussing an important topic for podcasters - rebranding. The conversation revolves around the possibility of changing the name, intro, outro, and thumbnail of a show, including updating old episodes and descriptions. Dave offers helpful tips on how to go about the process and stresses not changing your feed..This episode is filled with valuable insights and resources for both aspiring and seasoned podcasters. You won't want to miss it!
       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Mark Vinet from the History of North America Podcast. While we know the perfect length of a podcast is “As long as it needs to be and not a minute more.” What is YOUR perfect podcast length, and why?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 4/21/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Because of My Podcast: I'm Alive

       Jennifer Dragonette shares how podcasting help redefine who she is and put her back on the road to success. I recently appeared on episode 60 of her Cure for Podfade show.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       KFC Rebranding

       Weight Watchers Rebranding

       The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary

        

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

        

        

       ]]>92a61583-a923-42ed-b8d1-7fdbc18b18e6Mon, 10 Apr 2023 04:05:00 -040045:31falsefull874874How to Deal with a Crowded Podcast Genre Full of CompetitionDeirdre Tshien CEO and co-founder of Capsho, recently discussed the mental process of dealing with competition. She explains that Capsho is an AI-powered podcast content writer, created to help Podcaster organically grow their show. Additionally, she talks about the new updates in CapSho 2.0, which allows users to have more control over their content, such as being able to drag and drop blocks into their descriptions.

       In Today's Discussion

       • Always double-check and ensure anything that appears to be "competition" actually is (cause it may not be.
       • Ensure you are solving a problem your audience has by keeping in touch with them and, above all, listen. 
       • How Capsho 2.0 puts the reigns of control back into the podcaster's hand through HumAIne controls
       • How pushing through the urge to quit can result in new success (notice Deirdre said it was her third time of making the other with her coaching business
       • How creating amazing content for your listeners can leave them feeling in debited to you (which inspires them to purchase your products).
       • Why every coach should have their own podcast.
       
       

       With the Closing of Volley, I'm Moving to Zip Message

       I was a big fan of the Volley app except for one thing: it s was free. Eventually, they added additional features that you had to pay for, but in my opinion, they had so many great features in their free version that there wasn't enough motivation to upgrade(although "keeping them in business" should've been motivation enough). 

       So I'm replacing Volley with Zip Message, which I feel is the closest Volley Alternative at the moment. Here is a quick video.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       ]]>Deirdre Tshien CEO and co-founder of Capsho, recently discussed the mental process of dealing with competition. She explains that Capsho is an AI-powered podcast content writer, created to help Podcaster organically grow their show. Additionally, she talks about the new updates in CapSho 2.0, which allows users to have more control over their content, such as being able to drag and drop blocks into their descriptions.

       In Today's Discussion

       • Always double-check and ensure anything that appears to be "competition" actually is (cause it may not be.
       • Ensure you are solving a problem your audience has by keeping in touch with them and, above all, listen. 
       • How Capsho 2.0 puts the reigns of control back into the podcaster's hand through HumAIne controls
       • How pushing through the urge to quit can result in new success (notice Deirdre said it was her third time of making the other with her coaching business
       • How creating amazing content for your listeners can leave them feeling in debited to you (which inspires them to purchase your products).
       • Why every coach should have their own podcast.
       
       

       With the Closing of Volley, I'm Moving to Zip Message

       I was a big fan of the Volley app except for one thing: it s was free. Eventually, they added additional features that you had to pay for, but in my opinion, they had so many great features in their free version that there wasn't enough motivation to upgrade(although "keeping them in business" should've been motivation enough). 

       So I'm replacing Volley with Zip Message, which I feel is the closest Volley Alternative at the moment. Here is a quick video.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       ]]>6df50e9b-a3be-4387-8773-2e4a6e2365e4Mon, 03 Apr 2023 04:05:00 -040032:10falsefull873873Common Causes of Bad Audio Quality In Your Podcast and How to Fix ThemThere is a giant button at the top of your listing in Apple labeled LISTEN. When someone clicks it whatever comes out is going to shape their first impression, and it will influence how long they let this play. I listened to podcasts for 14 hours in the car this weekend as I drove to a speaking gig in Nashville. Bad audio is becoming more and more apparent in this space (especially for "indies" and I thought I would help us understand what it sounds like and what tools are available to help fix it.

       In This Episode

       How to politely let potential guests know their audio is unacceptable.

       How you can sound amazing for less than $100

       The importance of microphone placement.

       Why A-List Celebrities are the only people allowed to "dial in" to your show.

       Tools you can use to get rid of reverb and level out the audio and remove noise.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Question of the Month: Do You Subscribe to Paid Podcasts?

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer sent in the question, "Do you subscribe to any premium podcasts?"

       Louis supports

       Serious Trouble, Making Sense, Storm Skiing, Real Skiers, School of Podcasting

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America asked a few people and nobody was paying for podcats.

       Dr. Sarah Clak from the Kind Leadership Show pays for a few shows because she wants more content from these shows, and wants to support people who are doing fact-based content that she can trust.

       Zo from backlookcinema.com also has not found any podcasts that deliver enough value to support financially.

       Value For Value Support

       Dave Jackson supports people via the Value For Value model, where you can stream cryptocurrency. He has streamed over $125 to many Podcasts about Podcasting, and the NO Agenda Show, and Congressional Dish. 

       You can set up your show to receive streaming crypto using the steps in this video. Then your audience can use one of the New Podcast Apps that are enabled to send you money. The key point is THEY set how valuable you are. 

       Check out the new show about Podcasting 2.0 with Dave Jackson and Daniel J. Lewis at www.futureofpodcasting.net

       Tools For Cleaning Up Audio 

       The best way to

       Studio Sound (in Descript) - Great at Removing Room Noise and More

       Adobe Enhance - Great at removing reverb/room noise and generally clean up.

       Deverberate Plugin - Removes Reverb

       Loundness.fm - Noise Reduction, Volume Leveling, Mastering (try it for free)

       Auphonic - Noise Removal, Leveling

       RX10 - Suite of Tools - Expensive - For the Serious Editor

       Not Tested (but not bad) Deverberate inside of Adobe Audition

        

       ]]>There is a giant button at the top of your listing in Apple labeled LISTEN. When someone clicks it whatever comes out is going to shape their first impression, and it will influence how long they let this play. I listened to podcasts for 14 hours in the car this weekend as I drove to a speaking gig in Nashville. Bad audio is becoming more and more apparent in this space (especially for "indies" and I thought I would help us understand what it sounds like and what tools are available to help fix it.

       In This Episode

       How to politely let potential guests know their audio is unacceptable.

       How you can sound amazing for less than $100

       The importance of microphone placement.

       Why A-List Celebrities are the only people allowed to "dial in" to your show.

       Tools you can use to get rid of reverb and level out the audio and remove noise.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll create high-quality, engaging content quickly. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Question of the Month: Do You Subscribe to Paid Podcasts?

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer sent in the question, "Do you subscribe to any premium podcasts?"

       Louis supports

       Serious Trouble, Making Sense, Storm Skiing, Real Skiers, School of Podcasting

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America asked a few people and nobody was paying for podcats.

       Dr. Sarah Clak from the Kind Leadership Show pays for a few shows because she wants more content from these shows, and wants to support people who are doing fact-based content that she can trust.

       Zo from backlookcinema.com also has not found any podcasts that deliver enough value to support financially.

       Value For Value Support

       Dave Jackson supports people via the Value For Value model, where you can stream cryptocurrency. He has streamed over $125 to many Podcasts about Podcasting, and the NO Agenda Show, and Congressional Dish. 

       You can set up your show to receive streaming crypto using the steps in this video. Then your audience can use one of the New Podcast Apps that are enabled to send you money. The key point is THEY set how valuable you are. 

       Check out the new show about Podcasting 2.0 with Dave Jackson and Daniel J. Lewis at www.futureofpodcasting.net

       Tools For Cleaning Up Audio 

       The best way to

       Studio Sound (in Descript) - Great at Removing Room Noise and More

       Adobe Enhance - Great at removing reverb/room noise and generally clean up.

       Deverberate Plugin - Removes Reverb

       Loundness.fm - Noise Reduction, Volume Leveling, Mastering (try it for free)

       Auphonic - Noise Removal, Leveling

       RX10 - Suite of Tools - Expensive - For the Serious Editor

       Not Tested (but not bad) Deverberate inside of Adobe Audition

        

       ]]>ab5be9e3-6ce2-4356-9fd8-20af73505424Mon, 27 Mar 2023 04:05:00 -040047:37falsefull872872Overcoming Overwhelm: Three Free Tools and a StrategyIt’s easy to feel overwhelmed in today’s world. With so many tasks to juggle and responsibilities to manage, staying focused and keeping up with everything can be hard. It’s important to know that you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and that there are tools and strategies to help you never feel overwhelmed again.

       Click to Tweet

       In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. What is the strategy to manage overwhelm and increase productivity? 2. What three tools are necessary to organize and increase productivity (that are free)? 3. What is the best way to decide which tasks to prioritize when feeling overwhelmed?

       What is Overwehlm?

       So, what is overwhelm? Overwhelm is when you have a feeling of being completely inundated or overburdened. It’s often accompanied by a feeling of being unable to cope or process anything that’s going on. I know I’ve felt this way before, especially when I was in my 20s and had to juggle school, work, and taking care of my family. I felt like I was running out of time and didn’t have a choice but to keep going.

       Things to Keep In Mind

       1. Your podcast doesn't have to be forever.
       2. You don't have an audience when you start.
       3. You do NOT have to do a video version of your show.
       4. You don't have to make money with your show.
       
       

       Three Free Tools to Help With Overwhelm

       Evernote - A great place to store ideas you don't want to forget. You can even forward things like email to an address and it will be added to Evernote. There is a free version and the first paid version starts at $11/month.

       Todoist - For items, you need to do. You can easily add items from Gmail, setup recurring tasks, prioritize, share with a team, and more. There is a free version with the paid version starting at $5/month.

       Google Calendar - There are many calendar tools for you to keep up and organize your appointments. If you want to book guests, Calendly has a free plan as goes Acuity Scheduling. If you want a "lifetime payment," TidyCal enables you to charge for your time (as do the other two). 

       Now when someone connects you via email or social you can decide to: Delete it - trash it. Save it - Evernote Schedule it - Add it to your calendar Decide to do it - Add it to your todo list.

       By using these tools and strategies, you can avoid feeling overwhelmed and stay focused on the tasks that are most important. Remember, you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and there are tools and strategies to help you manage your stress and never feel overwhelmed again.

       Strategy to Avoid Overwhelm

       1. Do a brain dump and write everything down so your brain doesn't need to remember everything.

       2. Get organized and direct incoming information to the proper location.

       3. Try "Not Now" instead of "No" (if it makes you feel better).

       4. Set boundaries and a "rope off time" for you to be focused and knock out the work that needs to be done."

       5. Break large projects into small, achievable chunks.

       6. Realize that creating a podcast is easy, but creating a good podcast takes time, effort, and determination. Set your podcast schedule based on your lifestyle. Don't try to squeeze your lifestyle into your podcast.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       TAKE SURVEY

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Evernote 

       Todoist

       TidyCal

        

       ]]>It’s easy to feel overwhelmed in today’s world. With so many tasks to juggle and responsibilities to manage, staying focused and keeping up with everything can be hard. It’s important to know that you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and that there are tools and strategies to help you never feel overwhelmed again.

       Click to Tweet

       In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. What is the strategy to manage overwhelm and increase productivity? 2. What three tools are necessary to organize and increase productivity (that are free)? 3. What is the best way to decide which tasks to prioritize when feeling overwhelmed?

       What is Overwehlm?

       So, what is overwhelm? Overwhelm is when you have a feeling of being completely inundated or overburdened. It’s often accompanied by a feeling of being unable to cope or process anything that’s going on. I know I’ve felt this way before, especially when I was in my 20s and had to juggle school, work, and taking care of my family. I felt like I was running out of time and didn’t have a choice but to keep going.

       Things to Keep In Mind

       1. Your podcast doesn't have to be forever.
       2. You don't have an audience when you start.
       3. You do NOT have to do a video version of your show.
       4. You don't have to make money with your show.
       
       

       Three Free Tools to Help With Overwhelm

       Evernote - A great place to store ideas you don't want to forget. You can even forward things like email to an address and it will be added to Evernote. There is a free version and the first paid version starts at $11/month.

       Todoist - For items, you need to do. You can easily add items from Gmail, setup recurring tasks, prioritize, share with a team, and more. There is a free version with the paid version starting at $5/month.

       Google Calendar - There are many calendar tools for you to keep up and organize your appointments. If you want to book guests, Calendly has a free plan as goes Acuity Scheduling. If you want a "lifetime payment," TidyCal enables you to charge for your time (as do the other two). 

       Now when someone connects you via email or social you can decide to: Delete it - trash it. Save it - Evernote Schedule it - Add it to your calendar Decide to do it - Add it to your todo list.

       By using these tools and strategies, you can avoid feeling overwhelmed and stay focused on the tasks that are most important. Remember, you’re not alone in feeling overwhelmed and there are tools and strategies to help you manage your stress and never feel overwhelmed again.

       Strategy to Avoid Overwhelm

       1. Do a brain dump and write everything down so your brain doesn't need to remember everything.

       2. Get organized and direct incoming information to the proper location.

       3. Try "Not Now" instead of "No" (if it makes you feel better).

       4. Set boundaries and a "rope off time" for you to be focused and knock out the work that needs to be done."

       5. Break large projects into small, achievable chunks.

       6. Realize that creating a podcast is easy, but creating a good podcast takes time, effort, and determination. Set your podcast schedule based on your lifestyle. Don't try to squeeze your lifestyle into your podcast.

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       How Did You Like This Episode?

       I'm always looking for feedback and I would love for your input on this episode (it takes 1 minute)

       TAKE SURVEY

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Evernote 

       Todoist

       TidyCal

        

       ]]>44e5b6a7-3b78-4e10-9657-c82290d9c8afMon, 20 Mar 2023 04:05:00 -040039:12falsefull871871Using An Email List to Grow Your PodcastEmail is a crucial part of modern marketing, with over 330 billion emails sent daily, expected to reach 376 billion by 2025. While email marketing strategies have changed, it remains a key player in any marketing strategy. It is the go-to marketing channel for the best online marketers due to its high return on investment. Email marketing outperforms strategies like SEO, PPC, and Content Marketing, making it the most cost-effective way to promote products and communicate with customers.

       Today we hear from seasoned email veterans from different viewpoints, purposes, and motivations to share their insights into running a podcast.

       In Case You Missed Last Week

       We add a new clip from John Lee Dumas who shares what he would do differently. Last week we heard from Joe from Stacking Benjamins and other veterans on launching a pocast. Check it out.

       Participants

       Ariel Nissenblatt

       James Cridland

       Jessica Kupferman

       Daniel J Lewis

       David Hooper

       A Newsletter Help Remind Your Listeners About You

       Both James and the No Agenda Show see where their newsletter reminds your audience you exist and hopefully supports you.

       You Can Use Auto Responders

       You can create a series of email called an autoresponder to release at certain time intervals. This "Set it and forget it" can help build your connection with your audience (while you sleep)

       Yes, You Can Automate Your Podcast to Email But...

       While services Like Mailerlite, Convertkit, Aweber, SendFox, and many others will make it easy to enter your podcast RSS feed, and it will take your episode description and convert it to an email. Aside from James, who works some technical voodoo (he's a programmer), none of the participants used the "RSS to Email" tools. 

       They had developed their own format, topics, etc, and wrote them from scratch or copied and pasted their content in an effort to repurpose it.

       Additional Email Topics

       What NOT to do with your Email List

       The benefits of Segmentation

       Understanding Pricing

       The Importance of Always Delivering Value

       What you get from having a newsletter

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Last Week's Episode on Veteran Podcasting Tips

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       James Cridlands Radio Newsletter

       How James Creates Podnews

       My Podcast Reviews

       Rumble Studio

       Podcasting Deals

       Newsletter Services

       Convertkit

       Mailerlite

       Send Fox (lifetime payment)

       Email Octopus

       Mailchimp

       Awber

       Curated

       Ghost

       Substack

       Medium

       Activate Campaign

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

        Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

        

       ]]>Email is a crucial part of modern marketing, with over 330 billion emails sent daily, expected to reach 376 billion by 2025. While email marketing strategies have changed, it remains a key player in any marketing strategy. It is the go-to marketing channel for the best online marketers due to its high return on investment. Email marketing outperforms strategies like SEO, PPC, and Content Marketing, making it the most cost-effective way to promote products and communicate with customers.

       Today we hear from seasoned email veterans from different viewpoints, purposes, and motivations to share their insights into running a podcast.

       In Case You Missed Last Week

       We add a new clip from John Lee Dumas who shares what he would do differently. Last week we heard from Joe from Stacking Benjamins and other veterans on launching a pocast. Check it out.

       Participants

       Ariel Nissenblatt

       James Cridland

       Jessica Kupferman

       Daniel J Lewis

       David Hooper

       A Newsletter Help Remind Your Listeners About You

       Both James and the No Agenda Show see where their newsletter reminds your audience you exist and hopefully supports you.

       You Can Use Auto Responders

       You can create a series of email called an autoresponder to release at certain time intervals. This "Set it and forget it" can help build your connection with your audience (while you sleep)

       Yes, You Can Automate Your Podcast to Email But...

       While services Like Mailerlite, Convertkit, Aweber, SendFox, and many others will make it easy to enter your podcast RSS feed, and it will take your episode description and convert it to an email. Aside from James, who works some technical voodoo (he's a programmer), none of the participants used the "RSS to Email" tools. 

       They had developed their own format, topics, etc, and wrote them from scratch or copied and pasted their content in an effort to repurpose it.

       Additional Email Topics

       What NOT to do with your Email List

       The benefits of Segmentation

       Understanding Pricing

       The Importance of Always Delivering Value

       What you get from having a newsletter

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Last Week's Episode on Veteran Podcasting Tips

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       James Cridlands Radio Newsletter

       How James Creates Podnews

       My Podcast Reviews

       Rumble Studio

       Podcasting Deals

       Newsletter Services

       Convertkit

       Mailerlite

       Send Fox (lifetime payment)

       Email Octopus

       Mailchimp

       Awber

       Curated

       Ghost

       Substack

       Medium

       Activate Campaign

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

        Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

        

       ]]>319b2b9d-674e-419d-8b29-0216de5c3078Mon, 13 Mar 2023 04:05:00 -040057:57falsefull870870Podcasting Insights from Veteran PodcastersPlanning, launching, and growing a podcast can seem daunting, but with the right guidance and advice from experienced podcasters, it is possible. Veteran podcasters like Joe Saul-Sehy from Stacking Benjamins, Kristen Meinser, and Jordan Harbinger have all successfully launched and grown their podcasts and have valuable insights to share. 

       We hear about the planning, shaping, and bumps and bruises of launching from the new host Allen Corey and Crystal Hammond of their spin-off show Stacking Deeds.

       Take Aways

       Sometimes a "No" is a Not Now.

       Your podcast can bring you opportunities.

       Diverse attitudes, experiences, and insights lead to a diverse audience.

       Ensure that your show's first five minutes inspire people to want to hear more.

       Joe truly appreciated the feedback that provided ways to improve his show.

       Listen back to your show to catch mistakes you may have missed.

       Learning to edit your show improves your relationship with a future editor.

       They didn't release the first thing they recorded.

       How they improved after a "brutal conversation."

       The Importance of incorporating listener feedback into the show. 

       Advertisers are Partners that You've already worked with.

       Start building relationships before you launch your show and build your network.

       Know a person who knows the "WHO" in the industry and reach out.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Stacking Benjamins

       Stacking Deeds

       Kristin Meinzer Interview on Episode 862

        So You Want to Start a Podcast: Finding Your Voice, Telling Your Story, and Building a Community That Will Listen (also available as an audiobook )

       Kristen Meinzer

       Convertkit email list(send your RSS to Listeners. Also, Mailerlite has this as an option)

       Jordan Harbinger Show

       WDW Radio with Lou Mongello

       The New Media Show

       Podmatch

       The Big Seance

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Studio Pro

       Libsyn.com Podcast Hosting. Get a free month with the coupon " sopfree ".

       Start Your Podcast, or Grow The One You Have at the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       ]]>Planning, launching, and growing a podcast can seem daunting, but with the right guidance and advice from experienced podcasters, it is possible. Veteran podcasters like Joe Saul-Sehy from Stacking Benjamins, Kristen Meinser, and Jordan Harbinger have all successfully launched and grown their podcasts and have valuable insights to share. 

       We hear about the planning, shaping, and bumps and bruises of launching from the new host Allen Corey and Crystal Hammond of their spin-off show Stacking Deeds.

       Take Aways

       Sometimes a "No" is a Not Now.

       Your podcast can bring you opportunities.

       Diverse attitudes, experiences, and insights lead to a diverse audience.

       Ensure that your show's first five minutes inspire people to want to hear more.

       Joe truly appreciated the feedback that provided ways to improve his show.

       Listen back to your show to catch mistakes you may have missed.

       Learning to edit your show improves your relationship with a future editor.

       They didn't release the first thing they recorded.

       How they improved after a "brutal conversation."

       The Importance of incorporating listener feedback into the show. 

       Advertisers are Partners that You've already worked with.

       Start building relationships before you launch your show and build your network.

       Know a person who knows the "WHO" in the industry and reach out.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where 

        Mentioned In This Episode

       Stacking Benjamins

       Stacking Deeds

       Kristin Meinzer Interview on Episode 862

        So You Want to Start a Podcast: Finding Your Voice, Telling Your Story, and Building a Community That Will Listen (also available as an audiobook )

       Kristen Meinzer

       Convertkit email list(send your RSS to Listeners. Also, Mailerlite has this as an option)

       Jordan Harbinger Show

       WDW Radio with Lou Mongello

       The New Media Show

       Podmatch

       The Big Seance

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Podcast Studio Pro

       Libsyn.com Podcast Hosting. Get a free month with the coupon " sopfree ".

       Start Your Podcast, or Grow The One You Have at the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       ]]>b4c6c5ff-2ce8-4590-815b-d1441b4a99a4Mon, 06 Mar 2023 05:00:00 -040054:33falsefull869869Will People Listen to Your Podcast If you Have an Accent?Recording a podcast with an accent can be both intimidating and exciting. If English is your second language (ESL), you may feel nervous about speaking in front of a microphone; however, the ability to reach a worldwide audience is exciting. Today we answer a question from Jacob from the Old Men New Games wants to know if a host has English as a second language (and might mess up a word every now and then). Is that a “No Go, Instant Tune Out” for you?

       I think this boils down to accents. My audience shares their thoughts.

       PARTICIPANTS

       Craig - Inglespodcast check out this write-up from the British Council about their show.

       Anthony - Route 66 Podcast

       Craig - Live Well and Flourish

       Sarah from Kind Leadership Challenge

       Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       Wayne - Packers Fan Podcast , and Media VoiceOvers

       Ian - English Coach Living the Language and Life is feeling

       Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       Colin and Matthew - Podcraft

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Gene Simmons  Learn a language

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

        

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

        

       ]]>Recording a podcast with an accent can be both intimidating and exciting. If English is your second language (ESL), you may feel nervous about speaking in front of a microphone; however, the ability to reach a worldwide audience is exciting. Today we answer a question from Jacob from the Old Men New Games wants to know if a host has English as a second language (and might mess up a word every now and then). Is that a “No Go, Instant Tune Out” for you?

       I think this boils down to accents. My audience shares their thoughts.

       PARTICIPANTS

       Craig - Inglespodcast check out this write-up from the British Council about their show.

       Anthony - Route 66 Podcast

       Craig - Live Well and Flourish

       Sarah from Kind Leadership Challenge

       Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       Wayne - Packers Fan Podcast , and Media VoiceOvers

       Ian - English Coach Living the Language and Life is feeling

       Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       Colin and Matthew - Podcraft

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Gene Simmons  Learn a language

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question comes from Louis Goodman of the Love Thy Lawyer Podcast, who wants to know if you are listening to any podcasts via Paid subscription. If so, what so and why. If not, please provide any insights. As always, be sure to mention your show, a little bit about it, and your website address. 

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       I need your answers by 3/24/23

        

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

        

       ]]>3bf37f29-1639-4f7c-bb96-91d83bed2d58Mon, 27 Feb 2023 05:05:00 -040035:23falsefull868868Starting and Growing and ENGAGED Community That You Can Monetize with Jono PetrohilosThe great ones make it look easy. Jono drops easy, simple, powerful tips on starting a community, growing it, keeping it engaged, and if you want to build courses based on the information you've learned from your community.

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/867

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Who is Jono Petrohilos? Jono is the co-founder and director of Fitness Education Online, one of the largest online course providers in Australia for Personal Trainers. He sells over $1,000,000 worth of online courses every year and has been awarded the Australian Fitness Industry Educator of the Year multiple times. He now also helps other professionals create and sell online courses with his free Facebook Group and Podcast - the Course Creator Community.

       Wheat you Learn Today

       When to start a community (Jono uses Facebook)

       Why No Promotions Without Permissions is the best rule for Facebook/Communities

       How to Keep Your Sanity and Nurture Engagement Using the Redirect Strategy

       How Jono's podcast Course Creator Community helped him find speakers for his event.

       How Jono made 100K from a course, he didn't create. 

       How to tell if your course will sell

       Why New Zenler is currently the best course platform that you can try for free

       Is an "All in one" platform the best to go for an online course?

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jono's Course Creator Community.

       Jono Petrohilos' Course Creator Community Podcast.

       New Zenler

       Teachable

       Thinkific

       Kajabi

       Podia

       Circle

       Heartbeat

       Grow Your Community Show (Podcast)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Thanks for listening to episode 867 of the School of Podcasting

       ]]>The great ones make it look easy. Jono drops easy, simple, powerful tips on starting a community, growing it, keeping it engaged, and if you want to build courses based on the information you've learned from your community.

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/867

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

        

       Who is Jono Petrohilos? Jono is the co-founder and director of Fitness Education Online, one of the largest online course providers in Australia for Personal Trainers. He sells over $1,000,000 worth of online courses every year and has been awarded the Australian Fitness Industry Educator of the Year multiple times. He now also helps other professionals create and sell online courses with his free Facebook Group and Podcast - the Course Creator Community.

       Wheat you Learn Today

       When to start a community (Jono uses Facebook)

       Why No Promotions Without Permissions is the best rule for Facebook/Communities

       How to Keep Your Sanity and Nurture Engagement Using the Redirect Strategy

       How Jono's podcast Course Creator Community helped him find speakers for his event.

       How Jono made 100K from a course, he didn't create. 

       How to tell if your course will sell

       Why New Zenler is currently the best course platform that you can try for free

       Is an "All in one" platform the best to go for an online course?

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jono's Course Creator Community.

       Jono Petrohilos' Course Creator Community Podcast.

       New Zenler

       Teachable

       Thinkific

       Kajabi

       Podia

       Circle

       Heartbeat

       Grow Your Community Show (Podcast)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Thanks for listening to episode 867 of the School of Podcasting

       ]]>661a597c-f85f-4037-a90a-3eaa4a02dbf9Mon, 20 Feb 2023 05:01:00 -040050:11falsefull867867Make it Easy to Say Yes: How Mark Herschberg Was Interviewed on Over 300 PodcastsMark Herschberg, a tech startup veteran, author of the book The Career Toolkit: Essential Skils for Success That No One Taught You, and MIT professor, set a goal of appearing on 150 podcasts. He pitched over 2000 shows and ended up on close to 350 shows. Mark did it through volume, which is a different strategy than Dave typically preaches. Dave and Mark get together to share their insights to discuss the pet peeves of guests and hosts to uncover the most efficient way to pitch yourself to shows. 

       "Focus on how you're delivering value to the audience. If your pitch starts out with the word 'I' too many times in the first paragraph, know what you offer and get to the point - delivering value to the audience is key!"

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

        What You Will Learn Today

       • The strategies that Mark uses to make it easy to say YES to having him on your show.
       • How letting your guest know who they are talking to always leads to a better interview.
       • Make your guest comfortable by letting them know what to expect (audio, video, both?).
       • How having example questions makes connecting your expertise to your audience easier.
       • The two questions every guest should ask at the end of the interview
       • What a guest needs to make it easy to share
       • Mark (and Dave) use Podmatch, PodcastGuest and other resources.
       
       

       For a full list, get the PDF Cheat Sheet Here.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

        Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Other Episodes Mentioned In This Episode

       20 resources to Help You Find Guests/Hosts

       Less Annoying CRM

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews.

       Editing the Boring Out of Your Podcast

       11 Steps I Took to Create a WOW Interview

       How to Get Booked on Podcasts: Figuring Out Who and How to Pirch with Kristin Molenaar

       Be A Guest Book a Guest

       Podmatch (a “Dating Service” for podcasters).

       Mark Herschberg: thecareertoolkitbook.com and the Brain Bump App

       Dave: schoolofpodcasting.com

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>Mark Herschberg, a tech startup veteran, author of the book The Career Toolkit: Essential Skils for Success That No One Taught You, and MIT professor, set a goal of appearing on 150 podcasts. He pitched over 2000 shows and ended up on close to 350 shows. Mark did it through volume, which is a different strategy than Dave typically preaches. Dave and Mark get together to share their insights to discuss the pet peeves of guests and hosts to uncover the most efficient way to pitch yourself to shows. 

       "Focus on how you're delivering value to the audience. If your pitch starts out with the word 'I' too many times in the first paragraph, know what you offer and get to the point - delivering value to the audience is key!"

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

        What You Will Learn Today

       • The strategies that Mark uses to make it easy to say YES to having him on your show.
       • How letting your guest know who they are talking to always leads to a better interview.
       • Make your guest comfortable by letting them know what to expect (audio, video, both?).
       • How having example questions makes connecting your expertise to your audience easier.
       • The two questions every guest should ask at the end of the interview
       • What a guest needs to make it easy to share
       • Mark (and Dave) use Podmatch, PodcastGuest and other resources.
       
       

       For a full list, get the PDF Cheat Sheet Here.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

        Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Other Episodes Mentioned In This Episode

       20 resources to Help You Find Guests/Hosts

       Less Annoying CRM

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews.

       Editing the Boring Out of Your Podcast

       11 Steps I Took to Create a WOW Interview

       How to Get Booked on Podcasts: Figuring Out Who and How to Pirch with Kristin Molenaar

       Be A Guest Book a Guest

       Podmatch (a “Dating Service” for podcasters).

       Mark Herschberg: thecareertoolkitbook.com and the Brain Bump App

       Dave: schoolofpodcasting.com

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

        Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>c241e19a-7fd5-4aec-83ce-2b79da7e52eaMon, 13 Feb 2023 05:05:00 -040047:37falsefull866866The Top 8 Podcasting Pet Peeves (2023) That Make People Leave Your ShowIn December, we looked at why some podcasts become part of the listener's routine (and their favorite podcast) today; we are looking at the other end.

       Share your feedback via the Survey 865

       When it comes to podcasts, the goal of any podcast creator is to captivate their audience and keep them engaged. However, there are many reasons why listeners may choose to unfollow or unsubscribe from a podcast. In this episode, we will explore what makes listeners tune out of a podcast and how podcast creators can avoid these pitfalls. We will look at common issues such as poor audio quality and how extended chit-chat at the beginning may be causing people to tune out.

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Participants:

       02:43 Paul from Fighting Through World War II Memoirs Podcast

       04: 49 Orlando from the hablando de tecnologia 06: 42 Carrie Bock from Hope for Anxiety and OCD

       08:36 Dan from the Dan Smith from the Honest Management Show 10:40 Heather from the Politics Free show 12:19 Seth from Geekville Radio and Classic Wrestling Memories 17:04 Kris from the Kris and Kristine show

       18:29 Paul from Pass ACLS

       22:09 York from Welcome to Earth Stories

       24:07 Beth from Unraveling Adoption

       25:02 Sarah from Kind Leadership Challenge    27:25 Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       28:29 Todd from Guardian Downcast 30:25 Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       35:05 Neil from Recovery Coast to Coast

       38:33 Lee from the Covert Nerd and You Choose Podcast (Lee your Squarespace expired! and there is no way to contact you)

       40:05 Steve from Steve Stewart and the Podcast Editor Academy

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Your Podcast Consultant Worst Way to Start Your Episode

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

       Duolingo

       Other Products From Dave

       Get Your Podcast Reviewed

       Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>In December, we looked at why some podcasts become part of the listener's routine (and their favorite podcast) today; we are looking at the other end.

       Share your feedback via the Survey 865

       When it comes to podcasts, the goal of any podcast creator is to captivate their audience and keep them engaged. However, there are many reasons why listeners may choose to unfollow or unsubscribe from a podcast. In this episode, we will explore what makes listeners tune out of a podcast and how podcast creators can avoid these pitfalls. We will look at common issues such as poor audio quality and how extended chit-chat at the beginning may be causing people to tune out.

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and unlimited one-on-one consulting, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting.

       Use the coupon code schoolofpodcasting.com/listener to save 20%

       Participants:

       02:43 Paul from Fighting Through World War II Memoirs Podcast

       04: 49 Orlando from the hablando de tecnologia 06: 42 Carrie Bock from Hope for Anxiety and OCD

       08:36 Dan from the Dan Smith from the Honest Management Show 10:40 Heather from the Politics Free show 12:19 Seth from Geekville Radio and Classic Wrestling Memories 17:04 Kris from the Kris and Kristine show

       18:29 Paul from Pass ACLS

       22:09 York from Welcome to Earth Stories

       24:07 Beth from Unraveling Adoption

       25:02 Sarah from Kind Leadership Challenge    27:25 Mark from The history of North America Podcast

       28:29 Todd from Guardian Downcast 30:25 Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       35:05 Neil from Recovery Coast to Coast

       38:33 Lee from the Covert Nerd and You Choose Podcast (Lee your Squarespace expired! and there is no way to contact you)

       40:05 Steve from Steve Stewart and the Podcast Editor Academy

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Your Podcast Consultant Worst Way to Start Your Episode

       The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

       Duolingo

       Other Products From Dave

       Get Your Podcast Reviewed

       Profit From Your Podcast: Proven Strategies 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>640dcf98-ea25-4191-97a7-c762c9ff2b8cMon, 06 Feb 2023 05:05:00 -040059:41falsefull865865Six Reasons Your Podcast Isn't Growing.In today's episode of The School of Podcasting, I recount my experience at Podfest which was attended by many new faces. I share my conversation with the host of The Accidental Swingers, a podcast discussing non-exclusive relationships. I also discuss Cinemaker, a Mac-only video recording program for video interviews. Lastly, podcast hosts announced updates at Podfest. I also share my presentation.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. Uncovering the secret to getting guests to share your episode. 2. Exploring the new podcast hosting technology available. 3. Examining the ingredients of a good podcast.

        

       Timeline

       00:04:05 Make your interviews unique.

       00:10:58 Get feedback before launch.

       00:17:14 Get to the point quickly.

       00:19:41 Name your podcast clearly.

       00:29:00 Grow your show by sharing.

       00:34:09 Create great content consistently.

       00:43:00 Grow with a consistent theme.

       00:46:17 Podcasting never dies.

       00:51:51 Tell someone about the podcast.

       Questions: If you're consistent and persistent in producing shows, what else is needed to continue to grow the audience?

       • Does having a seasonal podcast make for lower downloads?
       • Does podcast growth depend on the platform (media host)?
       • Could it ever be the most painful? That people don't like it?
       • Is a specific theme best or should I have a variety of topics?
       • Are there typical plateau points?
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Daniel J Lewis

       Accidental Swingers

       Podfest Expo

       Podcast Branding

       Cinamaker Video Recording/Streaming

       Free Podcast Classes

       Libsyn Media Host (use the coupon code sopfree )

       Blubrry Media Hosting

       Captivate Media Hosting

       Buzzsprout

       Canva

       ]]>In today's episode of The School of Podcasting, I recount my experience at Podfest which was attended by many new faces. I share my conversation with the host of The Accidental Swingers, a podcast discussing non-exclusive relationships. I also discuss Cinemaker, a Mac-only video recording program for video interviews. Lastly, podcast hosts announced updates at Podfest. I also share my presentation.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       In this episode, you will learn the following: 1. Uncovering the secret to getting guests to share your episode. 2. Exploring the new podcast hosting technology available. 3. Examining the ingredients of a good podcast.

        

       Timeline

       00:04:05 Make your interviews unique.

       00:10:58 Get feedback before launch.

       00:17:14 Get to the point quickly.

       00:19:41 Name your podcast clearly.

       00:29:00 Grow your show by sharing.

       00:34:09 Create great content consistently.

       00:43:00 Grow with a consistent theme.

       00:46:17 Podcasting never dies.

       00:51:51 Tell someone about the podcast.

       Questions: If you're consistent and persistent in producing shows, what else is needed to continue to grow the audience?

       • Does having a seasonal podcast make for lower downloads?
       • Does podcast growth depend on the platform (media host)?
       • Could it ever be the most painful? That people don't like it?
       • Is a specific theme best or should I have a variety of topics?
       • Are there typical plateau points?
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month's question is from Jacob from the Old Men - New Games. When a host has English as a second language and may occasionally mess up a word or two, Is that a no go? Do you listen, or immediately back out?

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 2/24/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Power of Podcasting Network

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Put Dave In Your Pocket

       Daniel J Lewis

       Accidental Swingers

       Podfest Expo

       Podcast Branding

       Cinamaker Video Recording/Streaming

       Free Podcast Classes

       Libsyn Media Host (use the coupon code sopfree )

       Blubrry Media Hosting

       Captivate Media Hosting

       Buzzsprout

       Canva

       ]]>41e37719-3608-474b-ac00-bcae775bed3dTue, 31 Jan 2023 01:00:00 -040054:52falsefull864864How to Write a Podcast Description That Grows Your Podcast DownloadsIn this episode, you will learn the secrets to writing an attention-grabbing podcast description that will captivate your listeners. Remember, you can update your show description at any time.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       YOUR PODCAST DESCRIPTION

       While every show is different, and thus, every description is different there are some items you may want to include:

       Get Them Saying Yes

       By stating an obvious truth, you show that you "Get" your audience and get them saying, "yes."

       Frequency, Format, and Facts

       This can be your schedule (Frequency). Your format (solo, interview, panel, narrative). Facts: Accomplishments of the host to establish street cred and answer, "Why should we listen to you?"

       Who is This For?

       By specifically identifying who the show is for, you better attract your target audience. 

       Why Should They Listen?What value and/or what benefit is the listener going to walk away with?

       Call to Action

       Your call to action in your description (as this will be seen in all the apps) should be to play or, even better, follow/subscribe. Regarding asking them to go to your website or other calls to action, do those in episodes AFTER they start listening. 

       YOU DON'T BENEFIT UNTIL YOUR AUDIENCE BENEFITS.

       Other Options

       Some people like to start of with a question. 

       THE FORMAT OF MY DESCRIPTION IS OFF

       This is another reason to keep your description short. The more paragraphs you want and bold, italics, etc it is going to look weird. In most apps, the description is simple text. If you do include links, they won't work. 

       All you can do it enter things the right way and hope for the best. 

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Creating a Promo For Your Show Episode 858

       Getting Your Podcast Unstuck Episode 861

       Celebrity Impostor Syndrome

       Marriage Advice from the Divorced Guy

       Podcasts So Good Your Audience Can't Unhear Them

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       10 Magic Words Exercise

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Podcasting Observations Dave's Free Newsletter

       ]]>In this episode, you will learn the secrets to writing an attention-grabbing podcast description that will captivate your listeners. Remember, you can update your show description at any time.

       JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING COMMUNITY

       Are you looking to start your own podcast but don't know where to begin? Look no further than the School of Podcasting. Our comprehensive online courses and one-on-one coaching will teach you everything you need to know, from equipment and editing to marketing and monetization. With our proven methods and expert instructors, you'll be creating high-quality, engaging content in no time. Say goodbye to the frustration and uncertainty, and hello to a successful podcasting career with the School of Podcasting. Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Save using this link www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listener 

       YOUR PODCAST DESCRIPTION

       While every show is different, and thus, every description is different there are some items you may want to include:

       Get Them Saying Yes

       By stating an obvious truth, you show that you "Get" your audience and get them saying, "yes."

       Frequency, Format, and Facts

       This can be your schedule (Frequency). Your format (solo, interview, panel, narrative). Facts: Accomplishments of the host to establish street cred and answer, "Why should we listen to you?"

       Who is This For?

       By specifically identifying who the show is for, you better attract your target audience. 

       Why Should They Listen?What value and/or what benefit is the listener going to walk away with?

       Call to Action

       Your call to action in your description (as this will be seen in all the apps) should be to play or, even better, follow/subscribe. Regarding asking them to go to your website or other calls to action, do those in episodes AFTER they start listening. 

       YOU DON'T BENEFIT UNTIL YOUR AUDIENCE BENEFITS.

       Other Options

       Some people like to start of with a question. 

       THE FORMAT OF MY DESCRIPTION IS OFF

       This is another reason to keep your description short. The more paragraphs you want and bold, italics, etc it is going to look weird. In most apps, the description is simple text. If you do include links, they won't work. 

       All you can do it enter things the right way and hope for the best. 

        

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Creating a Promo For Your Show Episode 858

       Getting Your Podcast Unstuck Episode 861

       Celebrity Impostor Syndrome

       Marriage Advice from the Divorced Guy

       Podcasts So Good Your Audience Can't Unhear Them

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       10 Magic Words Exercise

       Join the School of Podcasting Community

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Podcasting Observations Dave's Free Newsletter

       ]]>d4150f8d-d8c0-4b94-a3e3-cd03647ab854Mon, 23 Jan 2023 05:01:00 -040041:06falsefull863863How Asking Two Questions Saved Me $1500When it comes to making purchases, we are often faced with a conflict between our emotional and logical sides. How we balance these two competing forces can determine our success or failure when it comes to spending. I had my wallet out, ready to spend almost $1500, and today I share how I identified my emotional and logical sides in the conflict and used logic to save my money for something better.

       My Video Progression

       I started with a Logitech C920 and upgraded to the Elgato Facecam. The Facecam had a better picture and NO MICROPHONE (so no accidental recordings using the camera microphone).

       I later I upgraded to the Sony VZ-1. Why? Because YouTube told me that this was THE best camera for the new YouTuber/Content creator. Also, it had a button that MADE THE BACKGROUND BLURRY. I'm not making that up.

       With the press of ONE button, the background would be BLURRY. OMG!

       So I had to get it even though it was $900. I bought it on a payment plan but avoided paying any interest. 

       A little over a year the Sony ZV-10 came out, and not only did it have the one-button blurry mode, but you could also CHANGE LENSES. Again, YouTube erupted, letting me know that THIS, yes, THIS was THE camera. 

       I was THIS CLOSE to buying this camera, and then I saw another video because as I could switch lenses, I had to figure out what was the best lens. The one lens that made the Youtube host just look dreamy cost $400. 

       Wait, does that say $400? So $800 for the camera and $400 for the lens is $1200, but the other lens, and this and that. 

       QUESTION 1: Do I NEED this, or do I WANT THIS?

       I thought about it. What happens if I didn't buy this camera? Were my videos on YouTube suffering? After all, I've been making videos for years without a blurry background and I have attracted 3000 subscribers. So apparently, you do not NEED a Blurry background. 

       QUESTION 2: Who does this benefit and how?

       Does this benefit your or our audience, and if so, how? 

       Well, as I already had the ability to blur my background, there only perc was the ability to switch lenses. 

       Have I run into something where I wanted to change lenses and couldn't? No. Then why am I buying it? Is it easier to use? Slightly, but you will still need to unplug and replug in the cable, which frustrates me. 

       So I'm going to spend $1400 to pay for a feature that I will not need. With that, I put my credit card back in my wallet.

       BE CAREFUL PAYING FOR FLEXIBLE FEATURES YOU CAN GROW INTO

       I once signed a year-long contract with Vidyard. Why? Because it had TONS of features that I MIGHT use. After all, I could see how far people watched my video.

       What was I trying to do? Make video messages I could email to my students and clients. 

       It turned it this would do it, but I found their interface clunky, and when I found a way to really use it, they wanted me to upgrade. 

       After my contract was over, I found LOOM, and it does exactly what I need it to do for a FRACTION of the cost.

       Don't spend money on features you will never use.

       OTHER ITEMS THAT HELPED

       I've never had someone tell me, "You have to watch this video; the background is BLURRY." 

       HAVE YOU FALLEN INTO THE TRAP?

       Maybe instead of spending so much TIME concentrating on your background, MAYBE we should focus more on what you are saying in the microphone. 

       WHY PEOPLE UPGRADE MICROPHONES AND VIDEO ITEMS

       I understand that sometimes we don't feel confident with our voice, but in many cases upgrading from one microphone to another doesn't make that much difference (especially once you get over $100). But I understand that if you would feel more confident behind the microphone if you like your voice, it may be worth the upgrade. Just realize this:

       Unless your microphone and sound is HORRIBLE, getting a new microphone won't grow your offense. Your content will. Now, if your content is noticeably better because you are more confident, then maybe it's worth the money.

       CONCLUSION AND BONUS QUESTIONS

       1. Is this a WANT or a NEED? 2. Who benefits from this purchase? 3. (bonus) What happens if you don't make this purchase (this helps identify if you need this or want it).  4. Are the features of the product something you WILL put into practice?

       WHY I AM STILL NOT A FAN OR ANCHOR.FM

       In the past Anchor.fm would submit your show to Apple, Google, and Sticher "For you" and "Forgot" to mention that you would lose access to stats on those platforms (oops!). I could go on for hours, but why I wanted to bring this up is they don't do this anymore. Does this mean I now recommend them? No. 

       Why? Well, here are some old and new reasons. 1. They are still free, and MANY free media hosts have gone out of business (some after burning through MILLIONS of dollars). So I don't want to build my show on something that is just using a bad business model.

       2. If you upload an mp3 file and use their advertising tools, they change their file to an m4a. This makes no sense as Spotify only uses mp3 files from other hosts.

       3. They sometimes leave out details when they announce things. 

       Example: You can play money in your podcast (that they approve, and only in Spotify, and only in the app, and only to paid users).

       Example: VIdeos have come to Spotify (that you have to upload via Anchor, that only displays the video on Spotify, and only in the app).

       Example: According to the Co-creator of How to save the planet (a Gimlet show) said, "Spotify invested zero in building the show’s audience, then forced us to go exclusive to Spotify, and then canceled it b/c it didn’t build a big enough audience…” she tweeted on Saturday. source

       Example: Multiple people in an Anchor.fm user group have mentioned that even though Spotify mentions, as soon as you reach a level, you will have sponsors. These people have met the criteria and have no sponsors (one has 275,000 downloads and still has no sponsor).

       4. You have to ASK for an RSS feed.  This is like going to a restaurant and having to request food. Shouldn't you have that already?

       Spotify (who owns Anchor) wants you to stay in their "Walled garden."  When you look at their marketing material or hear any of the presentations that paint themselves as ABSOLUTE NUMBER 1, and they are THE COOL KIDS. When they are #2 to Apple by a LARGE margin, here again, they prey on the uninformed. 

       The co-founder of Anchor has said that RSS (the technology that Podcasts use and keep it open) is holding Podcasting back - while the actual spec of RSS is being updated AS YOU READ THIS. 

       PODCASTING FOR FREE MAY BE UNREALISTIC

       I get that you want to podcast without breaking the bank. I understand that. When you try to do it without spending ANY money, your expectations may be in need of an adjustment. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       FREE CLASSES

       Want to dip your toe into the podcasting pool? Check out the classes I have available for free at 

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/freeclasses

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       New Media Show

       Gimlet Issues with Spotify

       Libsyn.com (get a free month using code sopfree)

       Red Circle

       Sony ZV-10

       Sony VZ-1

       Elgato Facecam

       Elgato Facecam Pro

       HAVE YOU FALLEN INTO THE TRAP?

       Maybe instead of spending so much TIME concentrating on your background, MAYBE we should focus more on what you are saying in the microphone. 

       WHY PEOPLE UPGRADE MICROPHONES AND VIDEO ITEMS

       I understand that sometimes we don't feel confident with our voice, but in many cases upgrading from one microphone to another doesn't make that much difference (especially once you get over $100). But I understand that if you would feel more confident behind the microphone if you like your voice, it may be worth the upgrade. Just realize this:

       Unless your microphone and sound is HORRIBLE, getting a new microphone won't grow your offense. Your content will. Now, if your content is noticeably better because you are more confident, then maybe it's worth the money.

       CONCLUSION AND BONUS QUESTIONS

       1. Is this a WANT or a NEED? 2. Who benefits from this purchase? 3. (bonus) What happens if you don't make this purchase (this helps identify if you need this or want it).  4. Are the features of the product something you WILL put into practice?

       WHY I AM STILL NOT A FAN OR ANCHOR.FM

       In the past Anchor.fm would submit your show to Apple, Google, and Sticher "For you" and "Forgot" to mention that you would lose access to stats on those platforms (oops!). I could go on for hours, but why I wanted to bring this up is they don't do this anymore. Does this mean I now recommend them? No. 

       Why? Well, here are some old and new reasons. 1. They are still free, and MANY free media hosts have gone out of business (some after burning through MILLIONS of dollars). So I don't want to build my show on something that is just using a bad business model.

       2. If you upload an mp3 file and use their advertising tools, they change their file to an m4a. This makes no sense as Spotify only uses mp3 files from other hosts.

       3. They sometimes leave out details when they announce things. 

       Example: You can play money in your podcast (that they approve, and only in Spotify, and only in the app, and only to paid users).

       Example: VIdeos have come to Spotify (that you have to upload via Anchor, that only displays the video on Spotify, and only in the app).

       Example: According to the Co-creator of How to save the planet (a Gimlet show) said, "Spotify invested zero in building the show’s audience, then forced us to go exclusive to Spotify, and then canceled it b/c it didn’t build a big enough audience…” she tweeted on Saturday. source

       Example: Multiple people in an Anchor.fm user group have mentioned that even though Spotify mentions, as soon as you reach a level, you will have sponsors. These people have met the criteria and have no sponsors (one has 275,000 downloads and still has no sponsor).

       4. You have to ASK for an RSS feed.  This is like going to a restaurant and having to request food. Shouldn't you have that already?

       Spotify (who owns Anchor) wants you to stay in their "Walled garden."  When you look at their marketing material or hear any of the presentations that paint themselves as ABSOLUTE NUMBER 1, and they are THE COOL KIDS. When they are #2 to Apple by a LARGE margin, here again, they prey on the uninformed. 

       The co-founder of Anchor has said that RSS (the technology that Podcasts use and keep it open) is holding Podcasting back - while the actual spec of RSS is being updated AS YOU READ THIS. 

       PODCASTING FOR FREE MAY BE UNREALISTIC

       I get that you want to podcast without breaking the bank. I understand that. When you try to do it without spending ANY money, your expectations may be in need of an adjustment. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       FREE CLASSES

       Want to dip your toe into the podcasting pool? Check out the classes I have available for free at 

       https://schoolofpodcasting.com/freeclasses

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       New Media Show

       Gimlet Issues with Spotify

       Libsyn.com (get a free month using code sopfree)

       Red Circle

       Sony ZV-10

       Sony VZ-1

       Elgato Facecam

       Elgato Facecam Pro

       Logitech C920 

       Loom Video Tool

       *links may include affiliate links and I may receive compensation for purchasing through these links.

       ]]>6cf1858d-0057-4923-b04c-c9b63b3aa791Mon, 16 Jan 2023 04:05:00 -040047:23falsefull862862Four Easy Strategies To Get Your Podcast Unstuck and Really Get it Growing AgainAre you looking to grow your podcast? You’ve come to the right place! This episode shares how to get your podcast unstuck and find success. Whether you’re just starting out or have been podcasting for a while, the tips shared here will help you get your audience clicking with your content. We’ll provide guidance on finding and following effective strategies for growing your podcast.

       Weight Loss and Podcasting

       Instead of focusing on the goal of "I need to lose 40 lbs" focus on the actions that lead to weight loss. Starring at the scale won't make it move, and starring at your stats doesn't make them move easier. 

       What Do We Want Our Audience To Do?

       When I thought about what we want our audience to do that leads to more podcast growth, it came down to these:

       • FIND: We need our audience to find us. To be easily found we need to know what they are looking for and word it in a way they will use.
       • CLICK: We need our audience to click on our listing, click on our titles, click on play and click follow.
       • FOLLOW: When your audience follows/subscribes to your show you are becoming part of their routine. Make it EASY to follow you
       • SHARE: We want our audience to share the show with their friends. According to Jacobs media 70% of new listeners discover a podcast from their friends. 
       
       

       Your Show Is An Experiment

       Yes we would love to get our show perfect from episode one going forward. I didn't follow my own advice (and didn't get any other opinions) and named one of my shows (about the future of podcasting) "Leading the Bleeding" (as we talk about the bleeding edge of podcasting). I named another "test" show Podcast Rodeo Show (I bet you don't think its full of podcasting tips - it is). If you have to explain your show title - your might regret it later. 

       FIND MY SHOW MY NAME TEST

       When I say to someone, "I'm doing a show called ______. What do you think it's about?" and they guess correctly, I've got a good name (Especially if there are some keywords in the name). 

       I see people put the name of their show asonegiantword and I'm pretty sure your audience isn't going to type that in.

       If you want to be found by Goolge, you need a website. Check out www.trypodpage.com to make a site with Podpage, and to learn podpage, see www.learnpodpage.com 

       GET YOUR AUDIENCE  TO CLICK

       Here are some things that get people to click on your show:

       • The name of the show.
       • The name of the episodes
       • The artwork
       • An easy to find play button on your website
       
       

       FOLLOW AND SUBSCRIBE

       Search in podcast apps is getting better, but nothing beats having follow/subscribe buttons on your website. This way, when you tell people to go to your website on the special page made to follow and subscribe, it makes it easy; they don't have to "Find you," and you are reinforcing your brand.

       There is a great plugin, Social subscribe and follow, that makes it easy to add subscribe buttons to your WordPress Website.

       Here is my Follow Page, and Subscribe page.

       SHARE THE SHOW

       When your audience shares your content with their friends, you have a decent chance of getting a new listener. At Christmas, EVERYBODY was talking about the show Yellowstone. Consequently, I came home and started watching. 

       You do need to work on your pitch in a way that makes people want to go listen. You should practice this. When someone asks, "So, what is your show about?" they should hear a response that is um, well, kind like, um, you know, um.....

       There are some cool plugins for WordPress like Novashare, Social Snap, the Monarch

       USE THESE CRITERIA FOR MAKING A DECISIONS

       I worked with someone who had named their show DCBN Lifestyle. When I asked (cause they didn't explain it in the show) what it stood for it was, "Don't cook bacon naked" which made me laugh. Which one would be found easier? DCBN or Don't cook bacon naked. The audience doesn't know you've abbreviated the title and if they can't find you they will never know. 

       If you're thinking of naming your episode School of Podcasting 861 or How to get your podcast unstuck, which one are you going to click on?

       Should use create separate artwork for your episodes? She we use episode numbers in your title? Sometimes it is hard to decide (and there is nobody to ask). What do you do then? 

       Go with your gut. Your podcast is not a statue, and you can always change it later.

       GROWING YOUR PODCAST AUDIENCE

       Make it easy to find you by having a name the audience is looking for, easy to say, spell, and find. Have artwork that makes you stand out (and wasn’t done in crayon) with episode titles that make them click. Have buttons on your website so people can follow and subscribe to your show, and while they on your website they can use the share buttons as you ask your audience listening in their favorite podcast app (because your show is everywhere) to share their show with their friends. We want to grow our audiences, let’s focus on those steps that lead to our audience growth. 

       It all starts with knowing who your audience is, and what they want. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeves? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Is Chat GPT the End of Civilization?

       I've played with ChatGPT, which is somewhat like a search engine where you can ask it to write you a blog post, and it will. Remember, Google wants good words that deliver value. It does make me nervous as I can see where people could "use this for evil. I played with Revoicer (another one is Blakify is another one), which takes a script and has a robot read it. It's impressive, but almost all AI I deal with still needs a human to step in and polish the content (which, in some cases, is blatantly wrong). 

       We had a discussion on the Podcasters Roundtable about this and other things happening in 2023.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       School of Podcasting

       Blakify

       Revoicer

       Novashare,

       Social Snap

       Monarch

       Social Subscribe and Follow

       www.trypodpage.com

       Leading the Bleeding

       How to Make Episode Artwork Show in Podcast Apps (even in Apple Podcasts!) The Audacity to Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo...]]>Are you looking to grow your podcast? You’ve come to the right place! This episode shares how to get your podcast unstuck and find success. Whether you’re just starting out or have been podcasting for a while, the tips shared here will help you get your audience clicking with your content. We’ll provide guidance on finding and following effective strategies for growing your podcast.

       Weight Loss and Podcasting

       Instead of focusing on the goal of "I need to lose 40 lbs" focus on the actions that lead to weight loss. Starring at the scale won't make it move, and starring at your stats doesn't make them move easier. 

       What Do We Want Our Audience To Do?

       When I thought about what we want our audience to do that leads to more podcast growth, it came down to these:

       • FIND: We need our audience to find us. To be easily found we need to know what they are looking for and word it in a way they will use.
       • CLICK: We need our audience to click on our listing, click on our titles, click on play and click follow.
       • FOLLOW: When your audience follows/subscribes to your show you are becoming part of their routine. Make it EASY to follow you
       • SHARE: We want our audience to share the show with their friends. According to Jacobs media 70% of new listeners discover a podcast from their friends. 
       
       

       Your Show Is An Experiment

       Yes we would love to get our show perfect from episode one going forward. I didn't follow my own advice (and didn't get any other opinions) and named one of my shows (about the future of podcasting) "Leading the Bleeding" (as we talk about the bleeding edge of podcasting). I named another "test" show Podcast Rodeo Show (I bet you don't think its full of podcasting tips - it is). If you have to explain your show title - your might regret it later. 

       FIND MY SHOW MY NAME TEST

       When I say to someone, "I'm doing a show called ______. What do you think it's about?" and they guess correctly, I've got a good name (Especially if there are some keywords in the name). 

       I see people put the name of their show asonegiantword and I'm pretty sure your audience isn't going to type that in.

       If you want to be found by Goolge, you need a website. Check out www.trypodpage.com to make a site with Podpage, and to learn podpage, see www.learnpodpage.com 

       GET YOUR AUDIENCE  TO CLICK

       Here are some things that get people to click on your show:

       • The name of the show.
       • The name of the episodes
       • The artwork
       • An easy to find play button on your website
       
       

       FOLLOW AND SUBSCRIBE

       Search in podcast apps is getting better, but nothing beats having follow/subscribe buttons on your website. This way, when you tell people to go to your website on the special page made to follow and subscribe, it makes it easy; they don't have to "Find you," and you are reinforcing your brand.

       There is a great plugin, Social subscribe and follow, that makes it easy to add subscribe buttons to your WordPress Website.

       Here is my Follow Page, and Subscribe page.

       SHARE THE SHOW

       When your audience shares your content with their friends, you have a decent chance of getting a new listener. At Christmas, EVERYBODY was talking about the show Yellowstone. Consequently, I came home and started watching. 

       You do need to work on your pitch in a way that makes people want to go listen. You should practice this. When someone asks, "So, what is your show about?" they should hear a response that is um, well, kind like, um, you know, um.....

       There are some cool plugins for WordPress like Novashare, Social Snap, the Monarch

       USE THESE CRITERIA FOR MAKING A DECISIONS

       I worked with someone who had named their show DCBN Lifestyle. When I asked (cause they didn't explain it in the show) what it stood for it was, "Don't cook bacon naked" which made me laugh. Which one would be found easier? DCBN or Don't cook bacon naked. The audience doesn't know you've abbreviated the title and if they can't find you they will never know. 

       If you're thinking of naming your episode School of Podcasting 861 or How to get your podcast unstuck, which one are you going to click on?

       Should use create separate artwork for your episodes? She we use episode numbers in your title? Sometimes it is hard to decide (and there is nobody to ask). What do you do then? 

       Go with your gut. Your podcast is not a statue, and you can always change it later.

       GROWING YOUR PODCAST AUDIENCE

       Make it easy to find you by having a name the audience is looking for, easy to say, spell, and find. Have artwork that makes you stand out (and wasn’t done in crayon) with episode titles that make them click. Have buttons on your website so people can follow and subscribe to your show, and while they on your website they can use the share buttons as you ask your audience listening in their favorite podcast app (because your show is everywhere) to share their show with their friends. We want to grow our audiences, let’s focus on those steps that lead to our audience growth. 

       It all starts with knowing who your audience is, and what they want. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeves? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where Will I Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Is Chat GPT the End of Civilization?

       I've played with ChatGPT, which is somewhat like a search engine where you can ask it to write you a blog post, and it will. Remember, Google wants good words that deliver value. It does make me nervous as I can see where people could "use this for evil. I played with Revoicer (another one is Blakify is another one), which takes a script and has a robot read it. It's impressive, but almost all AI I deal with still needs a human to step in and polish the content (which, in some cases, is blatantly wrong). 

       We had a discussion on the Podcasters Roundtable about this and other things happening in 2023.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       School of Podcasting

       Blakify

       Revoicer

       Novashare,

       Social Snap

       Monarch

       Social Subscribe and Follow

       www.trypodpage.com

       Leading the Bleeding

       How to Make Episode Artwork Show in Podcast Apps (even in Apple Podcasts!) The Audacity to Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Apple Website on Charts

       Apple website - How Search Works

       Click To Tweet

       Chat GPT

       No Agenda Show

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       ]]>98f24897-80f6-49f3-9145-f3f6874ef725Mon, 09 Jan 2023 05:05:00 -040048:30falsefull861861Don't Let Your Brain (and imposter syndrome) Stop You From Podcasting (and why it's a good thing)Imposter syndrome is a feeling of self-doubt and insecurity that 70% of us experience at some point in our lives. It can be paralyzing and lead to a sense of being inadequate or undeserving of success. While it is difficult to eliminate the negative feelings associated with imposter syndrome completely, there are steps you can take to reduce its impact on your life. Today I talk about how it may be a GOOD THING to have imposter syndrome. 
       You Have Done Hard Things

       We have all done hard things in the past. One of the hardest things I had to do is let my Grandmother know she had outlived her daughter (my Mom). My last quarter in college was nuts as I was paying for myself to go to school. We all have a list of hard things, so we can do hard things. 

       It's Your Brain

       For whatever reason (probably due to things that got tattooed to our brains as children), those negative thoughts are hard to control. In researching this topic again, it turns out that most people just understand that they will have these thoughts, and in some cases, it's a good thing. Don't underestimate the power of your brain to manipulate you. David Tennant (Dr. Who) shares how his brain will try to convince him that you can remember large amounts of words and recite them AS HE IS LIVE ON STAGE DOING THAT EXACT THING.

       You Are Not Alone

       In this episode, all of these people have imposter syndrome. I share clips from David Letterman with Billie Elish from his "My next guest needs no introduction."

       Viola Davis from a 60 minutes interview.

       Jason Sudeikis from his days at SNL.

       Michelle Obama

       Tom Hanks

       Eddie and Wolfgang Van Halen

       Awkwafina

       David Tennant

       Other people I didn't mention would be Rick Springfield and Meryl Streep

       Why a little Imposter Syndrome is a Good Thing

       You are going to put content in front of an audience. There are two extreme reactions.

       1. The extreme imposter feels they are not qualified and that nobody will listen, so they are frozen and never publish anything.
       2. The obnoxious ego maniac that feels everyone will love their content and publish everything (and probably is not fun to be around). 
       
       

       As Viola Davis put it, if you think you will never work again, you will take any gig. Taking any gigs gives you the opportunity to work on your craft which results in you being a better podcaster.

       You can't improve something that doesn't exist.  

       The Goal is to Be In The Middle

       You realize that you will always have that "negative voice" with you. As one person put it, "You can let them in the car, but they can't drive." Too many podcasts ae not being created because people are letting their own negative thoughts stop them from pressing record. 

       You want to build the habit of pressing the record button to feel comfortable behind the microphone without going too far to the point where you become obnoxious. 

       The Giant Carrot of Impact

       One thing that motivates me to create my podcast is I want to help people avoid making podcasting mistakes. Recently, I've been pointing out how Listennotes shows a bogus stat that can be disproven quickly. Consequently, anyone quoting these stats is either uninformed (and setting themselves up to look silly) or is preying on the uninformed. I ran into one person who seemed to fit the "prey on the uninformed" category. This depressed me. I was shocked. I felt like I had done a bad job in this video, and that video showed how stupid this stat was. 

       Then I got an email from someone who had seen an interaction I had with this person on YouTube and basically said that THEY HAD SEEN MY VIDEOS   and now understood how stupid that stat is. So while this one podcast guru did not, this person did. My efforts had impacted this person in a positive way. I was amazed at how this made me feel (I'm sure a large amount of dopamine in my brain was released).

       If you are a person with a mission, and a passion, don't let imposter syndrome stop you from impacting the world

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeves? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       ]]>Imposter syndrome is a feeling of self-doubt and insecurity that 70% of us experience at some point in our lives. It can be paralyzing and lead to a sense of being inadequate or undeserving of success. While it is difficult to eliminate the negative feelings associated with imposter syndrome completely, there are steps you can take to reduce its impact on your life. Today I talk about how it may be a GOOD THING to have imposter syndrome. 
       You Have Done Hard Things

       We have all done hard things in the past. One of the hardest things I had to do is let my Grandmother know she had outlived her daughter (my Mom). My last quarter in college was nuts as I was paying for myself to go to school. We all have a list of hard things, so we can do hard things. 

       It's Your Brain

       For whatever reason (probably due to things that got tattooed to our brains as children), those negative thoughts are hard to control. In researching this topic again, it turns out that most people just understand that they will have these thoughts, and in some cases, it's a good thing. Don't underestimate the power of your brain to manipulate you. David Tennant (Dr. Who) shares how his brain will try to convince him that you can remember large amounts of words and recite them AS HE IS LIVE ON STAGE DOING THAT EXACT THING.

       You Are Not Alone

       In this episode, all of these people have imposter syndrome. I share clips from David Letterman with Billie Elish from his "My next guest needs no introduction."

       Viola Davis from a 60 minutes interview.

       Jason Sudeikis from his days at SNL.

       Michelle Obama

       Tom Hanks

       Eddie and Wolfgang Van Halen

       Awkwafina

       David Tennant

       Other people I didn't mention would be Rick Springfield and Meryl Streep

       Why a little Imposter Syndrome is a Good Thing

       You are going to put content in front of an audience. There are two extreme reactions.

       1. The extreme imposter feels they are not qualified and that nobody will listen, so they are frozen and never publish anything.
       2. The obnoxious ego maniac that feels everyone will love their content and publish everything (and probably is not fun to be around). 
       
       

       As Viola Davis put it, if you think you will never work again, you will take any gig. Taking any gigs gives you the opportunity to work on your craft which results in you being a better podcaster.

       You can't improve something that doesn't exist.  

       The Goal is to Be In The Middle

       You realize that you will always have that "negative voice" with you. As one person put it, "You can let them in the car, but they can't drive." Too many podcasts ae not being created because people are letting their own negative thoughts stop them from pressing record. 

       You want to build the habit of pressing the record button to feel comfortable behind the microphone without going too far to the point where you become obnoxious. 

       The Giant Carrot of Impact

       One thing that motivates me to create my podcast is I want to help people avoid making podcasting mistakes. Recently, I've been pointing out how Listennotes shows a bogus stat that can be disproven quickly. Consequently, anyone quoting these stats is either uninformed (and setting themselves up to look silly) or is preying on the uninformed. I ran into one person who seemed to fit the "prey on the uninformed" category. This depressed me. I was shocked. I felt like I had done a bad job in this video, and that video showed how stupid this stat was. 

       Then I got an email from someone who had seen an interaction I had with this person on YouTube and basically said that THEY HAD SEEN MY VIDEOS   and now understood how stupid that stat is. So while this one podcast guru did not, this person did. My efforts had impacted this person in a positive way. I was amazed at how this made me feel (I'm sure a large amount of dopamine in my brain was released).

       If you are a person with a mission, and a passion, don't let imposter syndrome stop you from impacting the world

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeves? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       ]]>21246847-c5fa-4b3d-94d6-5a2e4440e19eMon, 02 Jan 2023 05:05:00 -040038:33falsefull860860My Favorite Podcast (and WHY) 2022Every year since 2013 I end the year asking my listeners what their favorite podcast is, and WHY it is their favorite podcast. 

       This gives me insights into my audience (many more females replying than I got back in 2013) and I find out about potential shows that I may want to network with (as we are already sharing an audience). 

       Thanks to everyone who contributed, I deeply appreciate your participation. Some of you have been around since episode 1, and that boggles my mind. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       My Favorite Podcast Is

       2:11 Steve Stewart still loves the Stacking Benjamins show, but instead of mentioning that show again he mentioned the This is awkward show about finance and more. Steve is also one of the founders of the Podcast Editor Academy. It is a phenomenal resource if you want to make some money as an editor.

       05:24 Brian Goodwin from the Relaxed Male podcast loves the Life Coach School podcast.

       08:20 Brooke Smothers from the RV Outwest show loves How I Built This by Guy Rax

       09:43 Chris Lewis from the Dads with daughters loves the Real Brian Show

       10:54 Chris Nesi from the House of Ed Tech loves the Warm Up Show.

       13:53 Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast loves the Podcasting 2.0 Show.

       18:26 DR Who produces the Life After Corporate show loves the Build a  Big Podcast Show by David Hooper.

       21:44 Super Joe Pardo (organizer of the Indie Pod Conference) loves the Disney Dish Show 23:10 John Wilkerson from the Struggling for Purpose show loves the Truce Podcast. 24:23 Kim Newlove from The Pharmacist's Voice loves the School of Podcasting (this show). 28:23 Mark Vinet from The History of North America show loves the Book Notes Plus show. 29:09 Mike Dell from the Podcast Insider show loves the Lehto's Law show.

       31:00 Neil Scott of the Recovery Coast to Coast show loves the Bob Lefsetz podcast.

       34:06 Nina loves the School of Podcasting

       42:23Nyree from The Ferret Paradigm Podcast and The Fauna Paradigm shows loves a show that just split in two due to some co-host tensions. Check out Curious Freedom and The Arto f Decluttering.    45:36 Paul From the Pass ACLS Tip of the Day loves the Everything Everywhere show. Here the host of Everything Everywhere on episode 854 where he explains how he grows his show. 47:38 Richard from the Veterans Day Room loves the Build a Big Podcast show. 51:43 Rich Palmer loves the Voice Over Body Shop Show.

       54:03 Taylor Marek loves The Expert Ownership show

       55:22 York From Welcome to Earth Stories show loves the Matt Walsh show. 57:11 Scott Johnson from the What Was That Like? show loves the 7 Minute Stories show. 59:49 Jim Collison from the Home Gadget Geeks show loves One Nation Under Whiskey show. 01:01:46 Dave Jackson from the Your Podcast Consultant show loves the No Agenda Show

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are]]>Every year since 2013 I end the year asking my listeners what their favorite podcast is, and WHY it is their favorite podcast. 

       This gives me insights into my audience (many more females replying than I got back in 2013) and I find out about potential shows that I may want to network with (as we are already sharing an audience). 

       Thanks to everyone who contributed, I deeply appreciate your participation. Some of you have been around since episode 1, and that boggles my mind. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       My Favorite Podcast Is

       2:11 Steve Stewart still loves the Stacking Benjamins show, but instead of mentioning that show again he mentioned the This is awkward show about finance and more. Steve is also one of the founders of the Podcast Editor Academy. It is a phenomenal resource if you want to make some money as an editor.

       05:24 Brian Goodwin from the Relaxed Male podcast loves the Life Coach School podcast.

       08:20 Brooke Smothers from the RV Outwest show loves How I Built This by Guy Rax

       09:43 Chris Lewis from the Dads with daughters loves the Real Brian Show

       10:54 Chris Nesi from the House of Ed Tech loves the Warm Up Show.

       13:53 Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast loves the Podcasting 2.0 Show.

       18:26 DR Who produces the Life After Corporate show loves the Build a  Big Podcast Show by David Hooper.

       21:44 Super Joe Pardo (organizer of the Indie Pod Conference) loves the Disney Dish Show 23:10 John Wilkerson from the Struggling for Purpose show loves the Truce Podcast. 24:23 Kim Newlove from The Pharmacist's Voice loves the School of Podcasting (this show). 28:23 Mark Vinet from The History of North America show loves the Book Notes Plus show. 29:09 Mike Dell from the Podcast Insider show loves the Lehto's Law show.

       31:00 Neil Scott of the Recovery Coast to Coast show loves the Bob Lefsetz podcast.

       34:06 Nina loves the School of Podcasting

       42:23Nyree from The Ferret Paradigm Podcast and The Fauna Paradigm shows loves a show that just split in two due to some co-host tensions. Check out Curious Freedom and The Arto f Decluttering.    45:36 Paul From the Pass ACLS Tip of the Day loves the Everything Everywhere show. Here the host of Everything Everywhere on episode 854 where he explains how he grows his show. 47:38 Richard from the Veterans Day Room loves the Build a Big Podcast show. 51:43 Rich Palmer loves the Voice Over Body Shop Show.

       54:03 Taylor Marek loves The Expert Ownership show

       55:22 York From Welcome to Earth Stories show loves the Matt Walsh show. 57:11 Scott Johnson from the What Was That Like? show loves the 7 Minute Stories show. 59:49 Jim Collison from the Home Gadget Geeks show loves One Nation Under Whiskey show. 01:01:46 Dave Jackson from the Your Podcast Consultant show loves the No Agenda Show

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is one I often do in January. What are your top podcasting pet peeve? Those little things that drive you nuts.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 1/27/23

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>e72a1512-30a2-4c84-8ded-b76593a589a0Mon, 26 Dec 2022 05:05:00 -040001:07:38falsefull859859Neil Hedley Helps You Understand Why Your Podcast Promo Isn't Growing Your Podcast AudienceCreating a successful and engaging podcastpromo requires careful planning and dedication. Whether you are creating a podcast promo or radio ad, it is important to have a clear understanding of your target audience (hyper clear). By taking into consideration the message you want to convey, the format of your audio advertisement, you can craft an effective promo for your podcast that resonates with listeners. This episode Neil Hedley from Knopp Studios who has such a wide skillset (radio, tv, advertising, copywriting, comedian, and instructor of the copywriting 101 course - use coupon sop50).  Helps me understand there is no "cookie cutter recipe" for making a good podcast promo. 
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Creating a Good Podcast Promo

       In talking with Neil from The Voice In My Head we discover there is no "paint by numbers" path to making a great podcast promo. There are some best practices such as:

       • Niche down until you have a crystal clear picture of your audience. 
       • The message about your show is not a one size fits all situation. If you are advertising on "Joe Rogan Experience" and the "Minister Bob" show, 
       • What is missing in most ads is they are just the facts - they are not entertaining or memorable.
       • The job of the first sentence is to get you to listen to the second sentence.
       • There is a skip ad button on YouTube, but no "play ad again."
       • People don't hate ads, they hate BAD ads. 
       
       

       Connect with Neil

       Copywriting 101 Course (use coupon sop50)

       Neil's Book Copywriting 101: What Was That Number Again?: Crimes Against Advertising and How to Prevent Them

       Neil's Agency KNOPP STUDIOS

       The Voice in My Hed Show 

       Because of My Podcast I'm a Pop Up Pastor

       Because of the Speak Life Church Podcast Kenn was able to fulfill my Call to ministry.

       The speak life podcast is a church without walls.

       I am an at-large pop-up pastor to about 300 people nationally.  

       I have been able to travel to officiate Christian weddings, perform baptisms, and funerals, and answer the call to counsel ten people considering suicide.

       https://www.blanchardnetwork.com/show/speak-life-church/ speaklifechurch.net 

       Can you finish the statement "Because of my podcast _______"? Head over to our contact page and share it.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's the website and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Neil's Previous Episode  Tips Podcasters Can Use From Radio with Neil Hedley

       Seth Godin Books on Amazon (aff)

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Dave In Your Pocket - Coaching without Calendars

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       ]]>Creating a successful and engaging podcastpromo requires careful planning and dedication. Whether you are creating a podcast promo or radio ad, it is important to have a clear understanding of your target audience (hyper clear). By taking into consideration the message you want to convey, the format of your audio advertisement, you can craft an effective promo for your podcast that resonates with listeners. This episode Neil Hedley from Knopp Studios who has such a wide skillset (radio, tv, advertising, copywriting, comedian, and instructor of the copywriting 101 course - use coupon sop50).  Helps me understand there is no "cookie cutter recipe" for making a good podcast promo. 
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Creating a Good Podcast Promo

       In talking with Neil from The Voice In My Head we discover there is no "paint by numbers" path to making a great podcast promo. There are some best practices such as:

       • Niche down until you have a crystal clear picture of your audience. 
       • The message about your show is not a one size fits all situation. If you are advertising on "Joe Rogan Experience" and the "Minister Bob" show, 
       • What is missing in most ads is they are just the facts - they are not entertaining or memorable.
       • The job of the first sentence is to get you to listen to the second sentence.
       • There is a skip ad button on YouTube, but no "play ad again."
       • People don't hate ads, they hate BAD ads. 
       
       

       Connect with Neil

       Copywriting 101 Course (use coupon sop50)

       Neil's Book Copywriting 101: What Was That Number Again?: Crimes Against Advertising and How to Prevent Them

       Neil's Agency KNOPP STUDIOS

       The Voice in My Hed Show 

       Because of My Podcast I'm a Pop Up Pastor

       Because of the Speak Life Church Podcast Kenn was able to fulfill my Call to ministry.

       The speak life podcast is a church without walls.

       I am an at-large pop-up pastor to about 300 people nationally.  

       I have been able to travel to officiate Christian weddings, perform baptisms, and funerals, and answer the call to counsel ten people considering suicide.

       https://www.blanchardnetwork.com/show/speak-life-church/ speaklifechurch.net 

       Can you finish the statement "Because of my podcast _______"? Head over to our contact page and share it.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's the website and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all; please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Neil's Previous Episode  Tips Podcasters Can Use From Radio with Neil Hedley

       Seth Godin Books on Amazon (aff)

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Dave In Your Pocket - Coaching without Calendars

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       ]]>8657fc61-3bd2-416e-acb8-729b1609c435Mon, 19 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -040057:18falsefull858858Making A Living as a Successful Podcaster: Are Your Podcast Expectations Substantially Out of Line?A study has shown the results of 1700 new podcasters, and 41% saw their new podcast as an opportunity for additional income, with 29% of those wanting to be their main source of income. There are people who will charge you THOUSANDS of dollars (in three easy payments) who will GUARANTEE a top spot in podcasts apps. They quote their listennotes stats (even when they know they are bogus, see video 1 and video 2) and promote affiliate products - not because they are good - but because they have the highest commission. 

       I'm not them. Today I reveal the truth - even if it is not what you want to hear. 

       So The Plan is to Start a Podcast and Get Advertisers?

       Less than 10% of podcasters get the number of downloads per episode after 30 days to get a host ready from a "big sponsor." source

       Programmatic ads have a CPM that may be  around $12 CPM (cost per thousand downloads) source

       The median number of podcasters is around 150 (per libsyn)and the average is around 1500. The median on Buzzsprout is 30. 

       The aver CPM for Advertisecast is $24ish and they require 10,000 downloads per episode. source

       Please note, I'm not saying smaller shows with 1000 downloads an episode can't get a sponsor. With podcasting, it always "Depends" on your topic. If you DO have a hyper niche or hyper-local podcast you can charge more than the rates above. 

       Bruce Chamoff from the NYC Podcast Network

       I first ran into Bruce when he invited me to be a speaker at his Podknow 2023 Online Event. I wanted to talk to Bruce because I don't see eye to eye on some of the things he does, and I wanted to no more. One was having a network where the topics weren't related. 

       Brice started the NYC Podcast Network back in 2005 (it was the Long Island Podcast Network back then). He has slowly broadened the scope and plans on rebranding it to the Global Podcast Network. 

       Bruce is monetizing by having podcaster pay to be promoted on his site, which gets 20-25 thousand unique visitors a month. That would put him in the top 20% (Source). 

       You can join for free or pay a small monthly fee to be featured on the site. Bruce monitors all the activity on the website so you can evaluate your traffic from the site and decide if it's worth the fee, or stay with a free plan (or leave - I'm somewhat worried about having another site competing with YOUR website)

       Certain plans on the site allow you to link to our show on popular podcast platforms, as well as monetization links, and link to your website (which you can do on your own site for free).

       Bruce likens it to a social media site based around podcasting. What makes his site different is his level of categorization. 

       You can sign up for free, try it, and check your stats to see if this works for you. 

        

       My "Thanks Dave" Engagement Experiment

       For three weeks, I swapped out my typical School of Podcasting Advertisement and askws people if they felt I had given value over the years (and they had never joined the School of Podcasting) if they would give some of that value back by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

       Six people said "Thanks" and gave some value back (Ranging from $5-$25). 

       Steve at Wayword studios

       Letitia Evans

       James Cridland From Podnews

       Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast

       DR from Mouthy Broad Media

       Try Price from Front Porch Studios

       If you take 6/1500 that is .04% (not 4% POINT ZERO 4)

       I've mentioned in the past that I've heard the VERY popular show Radiolab do a "Fundraiser" type episode trying to get UP TO 1% of their audience to donate. When I've spoken to other people in the industry, a good engagement level is 2-3%. 

       If I count the people who are Patrons and Students, I'm somewhere near that ballpark.

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Building a Podcast Network

       Behind the Scenes of the Trek.fm Network

       How to Start a Podcast Network: The Good, the Bad, the Ugly

       Dave's Listener Survey

       Join the Live Focus Group For the School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be

       ]]>A study has shown the results of 1700 new podcasters, and 41% saw their new podcast as an opportunity for additional income, with 29% of those wanting to be their main source of income. There are people who will charge you THOUSANDS of dollars (in three easy payments) who will GUARANTEE a top spot in podcasts apps. They quote their listennotes stats (even when they know they are bogus, see video 1 and video 2) and promote affiliate products - not because they are good - but because they have the highest commission. 

       I'm not them. Today I reveal the truth - even if it is not what you want to hear. 

       So The Plan is to Start a Podcast and Get Advertisers?

       Less than 10% of podcasters get the number of downloads per episode after 30 days to get a host ready from a "big sponsor." source

       Programmatic ads have a CPM that may be  around $12 CPM (cost per thousand downloads) source

       The median number of podcasters is around 150 (per libsyn)and the average is around 1500. The median on Buzzsprout is 30. 

       The aver CPM for Advertisecast is $24ish and they require 10,000 downloads per episode. source

       Please note, I'm not saying smaller shows with 1000 downloads an episode can't get a sponsor. With podcasting, it always "Depends" on your topic. If you DO have a hyper niche or hyper-local podcast you can charge more than the rates above. 

       Bruce Chamoff from the NYC Podcast Network

       I first ran into Bruce when he invited me to be a speaker at his Podknow 2023 Online Event. I wanted to talk to Bruce because I don't see eye to eye on some of the things he does, and I wanted to no more. One was having a network where the topics weren't related. 

       Brice started the NYC Podcast Network back in 2005 (it was the Long Island Podcast Network back then). He has slowly broadened the scope and plans on rebranding it to the Global Podcast Network. 

       Bruce is monetizing by having podcaster pay to be promoted on his site, which gets 20-25 thousand unique visitors a month. That would put him in the top 20% (Source). 

       You can join for free or pay a small monthly fee to be featured on the site. Bruce monitors all the activity on the website so you can evaluate your traffic from the site and decide if it's worth the fee, or stay with a free plan (or leave - I'm somewhat worried about having another site competing with YOUR website)

       Certain plans on the site allow you to link to our show on popular podcast platforms, as well as monetization links, and link to your website (which you can do on your own site for free).

       Bruce likens it to a social media site based around podcasting. What makes his site different is his level of categorization. 

       You can sign up for free, try it, and check your stats to see if this works for you. 

        

       My "Thanks Dave" Engagement Experiment

       For three weeks, I swapped out my typical School of Podcasting Advertisement and askws people if they felt I had given value over the years (and they had never joined the School of Podcasting) if they would give some of that value back by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

       Six people said "Thanks" and gave some value back (Ranging from $5-$25). 

       Steve at Wayword studios

       Letitia Evans

       James Cridland From Podnews

       Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast

       DR from Mouthy Broad Media

       Try Price from Front Porch Studios

       If you take 6/1500 that is .04% (not 4% POINT ZERO 4)

       I've mentioned in the past that I've heard the VERY popular show Radiolab do a "Fundraiser" type episode trying to get UP TO 1% of their audience to donate. When I've spoken to other people in the industry, a good engagement level is 2-3%. 

       If I count the people who are Patrons and Students, I'm somewhere near that ballpark.

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Building a Podcast Network

       Behind the Scenes of the Trek.fm Network

       How to Start a Podcast Network: The Good, the Bad, the Ugly

       Dave's Listener Survey

       Join the Live Focus Group For the School of Podcasting

       Question of the Month

       Where I Will Be

       ]]>071b4923-172f-4efe-97a8-f259e9e09278Mon, 12 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -040043:52falsefull857857How Confident Are You In Your Content? Audience SurveysCreating a successful podcast takes more than just having a great idea. To ensure that the show resonates with listeners, podcasters must understand their audience and the topics they want to hear. Audience surveys are an invaluable tool to help podcasters understand their listeners and create content tailored to them. In this article, we will look at why audience surveys are so crucial for podcasters, as well as some tips on how best to use them.
       Why Have a Survey?

       1. Advertisers 2. Understanding who listening? 3. Understand what they want 4. To help you deliver more value in your show

       Creating Your Survey

       What is the goal of this survey? Why are you creating this survey? What do you hope to accomplish with this survey? How will you use the data you are collecting?

       Question Tips:

       Explain to the recipients why you are doing this survey and how it will benefit THEM.

       Start with general questions and then get specific.

       If you are doing a sliding scale, make it an even number 1-4 instead of 1-5, as it eliminates the ability to choose the items in the middle.

       If you have advertisers ask if people have purchased one of your sponsor's products.

       Much more information on the site

       Take My Survey

       I'm giving away a $25 Amazon gift card, a 30 minutes consultation, and a copy of my book Profit From Your Podcast Proven Strategies to turn Listeners into a Livelihood

       TAKE THE SURVEY

       Attend the LIVE FEEDBACK Webinar on January 4th at 6:30 PM

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's website and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       BUILD YOUR PODCAST PROFITS STRATEGY WORKSHOP

       Tired of struggling to monetize your podcast?

       December 17th 10AM-1PM Central

       This is not a webinar, it is a workshop, so come prepared to work. There are only 12 seats, so everyone walks out with their monetization strategy. The price is $97

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all. Please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Google Forms

       Edison Research Sample Podcast Listener Survey

       Horse Radio Network

       Dog Podcast Network

       What Was That Like Show

       Dave In Your Pocket (Coaching without calendars)

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Jim Harold

       Trapper Jack

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Jim Collison

       Darknet Diaries ( Jack on Episode 758 )

       More information on website

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>Creating a successful podcast takes more than just having a great idea. To ensure that the show resonates with listeners, podcasters must understand their audience and the topics they want to hear. Audience surveys are an invaluable tool to help podcasters understand their listeners and create content tailored to them. In this article, we will look at why audience surveys are so crucial for podcasters, as well as some tips on how best to use them.
       Why Have a Survey?

       1. Advertisers 2. Understanding who listening? 3. Understand what they want 4. To help you deliver more value in your show

       Creating Your Survey

       What is the goal of this survey? Why are you creating this survey? What do you hope to accomplish with this survey? How will you use the data you are collecting?

       Question Tips:

       Explain to the recipients why you are doing this survey and how it will benefit THEM.

       Start with general questions and then get specific.

       If you are doing a sliding scale, make it an even number 1-4 instead of 1-5, as it eliminates the ability to choose the items in the middle.

       If you have advertisers ask if people have purchased one of your sponsor's products.

       Much more information on the site

       Take My Survey

       I'm giving away a $25 Amazon gift card, a 30 minutes consultation, and a copy of my book Profit From Your Podcast Proven Strategies to turn Listeners into a Livelihood

       TAKE THE SURVEY

       Attend the LIVE FEEDBACK Webinar on January 4th at 6:30 PM

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do over December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022, and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL, that would be VERY helpful. Also, be sure to mention your show, it's website and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       BUILD YOUR PODCAST PROFITS STRATEGY WORKSHOP

       Tired of struggling to monetize your podcast?

       December 17th 10AM-1PM Central

       This is not a webinar, it is a workshop, so come prepared to work. There are only 12 seats, so everyone walks out with their monetization strategy. The price is $97

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all. Please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Google Forms

       Edison Research Sample Podcast Listener Survey

       Horse Radio Network

       Dog Podcast Network

       What Was That Like Show

       Dave In Your Pocket (Coaching without calendars)

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Jim Harold

       Trapper Jack

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Jim Collison

       Darknet Diaries ( Jack on Episode 758 )

       More information on website

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>bb9a0911-a94d-4531-9e21-151eef7350f1Mon, 05 Dec 2022 05:00:00 -040055:30falsefull856856The 5 Questions You Should Ask Before Starting a Podcast (and maybe a sixth)Podcasts are like Lay's potato chips (you can't have just one). Once you start one, Getting the itch to start a second is something people are thinking about. With this in mind, we look at questions you should ask before starting your first, second, third... podcast.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

        

       Podcasters Pondering a Second Show

       Kim Newlove of the Pharmacist's Voice is considering doing a local show about Perrysburg Ohio.

       Dr. Brad Miller of the Overcoming Adversity show has launched Santa Clause Says Podcast.

       Mark Vinet of the History of North America show is mixing in his historical fiction books (for me I would put these in their own show, and promote them in his first show).

       Matt Rafferty of the Author Inside You is thinking of doing a local show that interviews local businesses.

       Dave Jackson (me) is bringing back a show with a new format at MonthlyChallenge.fit

       5 Questions You Should Answer When Starting Your Podcast

       1. Why are you starting a podcast?
       2. Is this a passion project or a business?
       3. Who is your audience
       4. What do they want to hear? (Why will they listen to your podcast?)
       5. How will you gauge your success?
       
       

       (Bonus) What will you stop doing to find the time to do this show?

       My Black Friday Purchases

       I like the output of Deverberate for cleaning up bad audio that has lots of reverb. 

       I also purchased Wiser Notification (aff) to make my pop-ups on my site, and to show social proof on my site. (coupon BF2022-30 )

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do every December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022 and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL that would be VERY helpful. Also be sure to mention your show, its website, and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Put Dave In Your Pocket!

       If you are a podcaster (or future podcaster) who would like to retain Dave's services without joining the School of Podcasting, I'm not using a new system to allow us to do this with zero scheduling conflicts. Check out daveinyourpocket.com

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Northeast Ohio Podcast

       Pharmacist's Voice

       Overcoming Adversity

       Santa Clause Says

       the History of North America show

       historical fiction books

       the Author Inside You

       MonthlyChallenge.fit

       Building a Better Dave

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Your Podcast Consultant

       The History of Six Shooter

       This episode originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/855

       ]]>Podcasts are like Lay's potato chips (you can't have just one). Once you start one, Getting the itch to start a second is something people are thinking about. With this in mind, we look at questions you should ask before starting your first, second, third... podcast.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

        

       Podcasters Pondering a Second Show

       Kim Newlove of the Pharmacist's Voice is considering doing a local show about Perrysburg Ohio.

       Dr. Brad Miller of the Overcoming Adversity show has launched Santa Clause Says Podcast.

       Mark Vinet of the History of North America show is mixing in his historical fiction books (for me I would put these in their own show, and promote them in his first show).

       Matt Rafferty of the Author Inside You is thinking of doing a local show that interviews local businesses.

       Dave Jackson (me) is bringing back a show with a new format at MonthlyChallenge.fit

       5 Questions You Should Answer When Starting Your Podcast

       1. Why are you starting a podcast?
       2. Is this a passion project or a business?
       3. Who is your audience
       4. What do they want to hear? (Why will they listen to your podcast?)
       5. How will you gauge your success?
       
       

       (Bonus) What will you stop doing to find the time to do this show?

       My Black Friday Purchases

       I like the output of Deverberate for cleaning up bad audio that has lots of reverb. 

       I also purchased Wiser Notification (aff) to make my pop-ups on my site, and to show social proof on my site. (coupon BF2022-30 )

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is the one I do every December. What is your favorite podcast in 2022 and WHY? You can only choose ONE (I know it's hard). If you can get their website URL that would be VERY helpful. Also be sure to mention your show, its website, and a little bit about it.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 12/30/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Put Dave In Your Pocket!

       If you are a podcaster (or future podcaster) who would like to retain Dave's services without joining the School of Podcasting, I'm not using a new system to allow us to do this with zero scheduling conflicts. Check out daveinyourpocket.com

        

       Mentioned In This Episode

       schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Northeast Ohio Podcast

       Pharmacist's Voice

       Overcoming Adversity

       Santa Clause Says

       the History of North America show

       historical fiction books

       the Author Inside You

       MonthlyChallenge.fit

       Building a Better Dave

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Your Podcast Consultant

       The History of Six Shooter

       This episode originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/855

       ]]>767c6a8c-fc2b-40ca-92d0-27a18a6f815cSun, 27 Nov 2022 05:00:00 -040046:09falsefull855855How Gary Arndt Adopted The Audience Growth Strategy From the Movie Industry - And It's WorkingGary Arndt is an award-winning travel photographer, blogger, and podcaster who has been traveling the globe for 10 years when covid devastated the travel industry leaving Gary with nothing. Gary knows the value of promotion. He's used various strategies to grow his podcast Everything Everywhere, including partnering with other podcasts, leveraging his blog traffic, and giving listeners an incentive to subscribe. He also started paying for promotions on other podcasts. As a result, his podcast has reached a wider audience and he's been able to connect with more listeners and is approaching 1 million downloads per month.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Gary Arndt's Multiple Strategy Approach

       When Gary first launched his 7-day-a-week podcast Everything Everywhere Gary says he was getting around 6000 downloads per episode. Fast forward two and a half year and Gary is approaching getting 1 million downloads per month (a growth of 167%). How did he do it?

       Gary's Strategies:

       He never turns down an interview.

       He executes feed drops (cross-promotion) with other shows.

       His show is listed in all directories.

       He has a budget to promote his show on other podcasts.

       He is investigating advertising in magazines that match his show.

       It's Not the ONE thing he is doing. He is DOING THE WORK.

       In today's show you will hear:

       Why social media doesn’t convert that well for podcasting. How Gary chooses his subjects? What are Gary's growth strategies for your podcast? Why do you think your media property can get away with doing nothing? How to get people to buy your ads. The Spanish National Tourism Board is one of Gary's biggest supporters. Gary may turn his scripts into a book in the future. Podcast Quick Tip: Trade Each Podcast Episode Like a Blog Post On Your Website

       Make sure your podcast information in your media points to your website. Then when making a new episode, have the link in the episode point to a URL where your audience can find more information (and do all the things you want them to do on your website) This can also lead to boosting your Google SEO Score. If you need a website see Cooler Websites or Name Cheap. If you need a website check out Podcast Page, or Learnpodpage.com (Free course)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Everything Everywhere

       School of Podcasting.com/listener

       Podcast Addict Overcast Buzzsprout Ads Spotify Ads Podbean Pocketcasts Castbox Fountain.fm

       www.trypodpage.com and www.learnpodpage.com

       More info on ADvertising on other shows on Episode 843

       Say Thank You

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

       ]]>Gary Arndt is an award-winning travel photographer, blogger, and podcaster who has been traveling the globe for 10 years when covid devastated the travel industry leaving Gary with nothing. Gary knows the value of promotion. He's used various strategies to grow his podcast Everything Everywhere, including partnering with other podcasts, leveraging his blog traffic, and giving listeners an incentive to subscribe. He also started paying for promotions on other podcasts. As a result, his podcast has reached a wider audience and he's been able to connect with more listeners and is approaching 1 million downloads per month.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Gary Arndt's Multiple Strategy Approach

       When Gary first launched his 7-day-a-week podcast Everything Everywhere Gary says he was getting around 6000 downloads per episode. Fast forward two and a half year and Gary is approaching getting 1 million downloads per month (a growth of 167%). How did he do it?

       Gary's Strategies:

       He never turns down an interview.

       He executes feed drops (cross-promotion) with other shows.

       His show is listed in all directories.

       He has a budget to promote his show on other podcasts.

       He is investigating advertising in magazines that match his show.

       It's Not the ONE thing he is doing. He is DOING THE WORK.

       In today's show you will hear:

       Why social media doesn’t convert that well for podcasting. How Gary chooses his subjects? What are Gary's growth strategies for your podcast? Why do you think your media property can get away with doing nothing? How to get people to buy your ads. The Spanish National Tourism Board is one of Gary's biggest supporters. Gary may turn his scripts into a book in the future. Podcast Quick Tip: Trade Each Podcast Episode Like a Blog Post On Your Website

       Make sure your podcast information in your media points to your website. Then when making a new episode, have the link in the episode point to a URL where your audience can find more information (and do all the things you want them to do on your website) This can also lead to boosting your Google SEO Score. If you need a website see Cooler Websites or Name Cheap. If you need a website check out Podcast Page, or Learnpodpage.com (Free course)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Everything Everywhere

       School of Podcasting.com/listener

       Podcast Addict Overcast Buzzsprout Ads Spotify Ads Podbean Pocketcasts Castbox Fountain.fm

       www.trypodpage.com and www.learnpodpage.com

       More info on ADvertising on other shows on Episode 843

       Say Thank You

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/thanks

       ]]>6ae3213c-093b-454b-93f7-f2f00184f4f7Mon, 21 Nov 2022 05:28:00 -040055:50falsefull854854Is Capsho Worth it?This podcast episode discusses the pros and cons of using artificial intelligence to help with copywriting for a podcast, and whether or not it's worth it. Is the Capsho software really worth the price tag?
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Holiday Hours For Apple and Your Media Hosts

       Apple has posted their holiday hours.

       From 11/29/22 - 11/27/22 along with 12/23/22 - 1/2/23, new shows and channels or subscriptions submitted during these windows may not be available within our regular. And responses to support inquiries might be slightly delayed plan accordingly and submit any new content with this in mind, 

       According to Rob Walch at Libsyn, "If you want to have a full launch by January 1,  you should submit by November 15."

       What If I don't submit by November 15th? All is not lost, the world has waited 18 years for your podcast, it may have to wait another week. 

       Be Kind To Your Media Hosts

       No matter what the company is, your media host, email providers, etc, please remember that everyone is taking time off to be with their family and friends, etc. Lighting up a company on social isn't going to help because (more than likely) nobody is home as they are also with their friends and family (and maybe you should be too). 

       Join my New Dynamic Podcast Newsletter

       I'm "doubling down" on a podcast newsletter. This will have podcast news, spotlight podcasts, links to my episodes, what is catching my eye, and behind-the-scenes information at the School of Podcasting. If you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter you can check what you want to read. If you're already on the list you will get an email asking you to specify later in the week. For those who are curious, I'm using Mailerlite. 

       Speaking of the newsletter, I am working on an episode about using a newsletter with your podcast. I've got a few interviews lined up as I want this to be a narrative-style podcast. If you use an email list with your podcast, I'd love to interview you. Contact me

       My First Impression of Capsho the AI Copywriting Tool For Podcasters

       According to their website, Capsho claims, "The Best AI Copywriting Software for Podcasters. Create your podcast promotional copy in under 10 minutes." You upload your episode, and it spits out:

       • Episode title
       • Episode description
       • Show notes
       • Blog post
       • Promotional Email
       • Social Media Captions (for all platforms)
       • LinkedIn Article
       • Transcript
       
       Is It Worth It?

       There are lots of products with AI (Artificial Intelligence). Word Hero will help you write over 60 different types of descriptions starting at $50/month (there is also a  lifetime deal aff). Anyword is another copywriting tool for $30/month. Descript with transcribe and make it easy to edit your show (and they have that amazing studio sound tool). Headliner Studio from CoSchedule is $9/month. With Capsho plans starting at $29/month, I believe it delivers enough value (but that depends on your budget). In my world, I've decided to keep using it and see how it performs. 

       AI Will NEVER Release a Human

       I will get into this later, but while a computer can imitate a human, I feel it can't replace. We are all different with these things called opinions and personalities, and even though I can specify a tone in some AI products like Word Hero it almost always needs a tweak to match your personality. 

       So Who Is Capsho Good For?

       If you're not writing anything or struggling, this does a lot of the heavy lifting. If would love to have someone help you with your description, titles, etc but can't afford a virtual assistant, but can find $29-$90 in the monthly budget, then this might be a good fit. As always, you pay in one of two currencies, time or money. Whichever one you have the most of, use that. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Videos To Watch

       Watch Capsho Video Demo

       Up with People Special 

       Up With People Superbowl

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Capsho

       Word Hero (lifetime deal )

       Anyword

       Descript

       Headliner Studio

       Mailerlite

       Repurpose.io

       Jasper

       Surfer SEO

       Castamatic

       New Podcast Apps

       Neil Hedley Episode on Advertising

       Neil's Copywriting Course Enhanced Marketing

       Tom Webster penned two AMAZING articles on how podcasting needs to learn from radio. Part 1 and Part 2

       Book: The Copywriter's Handbook: A Step-by-Step Guide to Writing Copy That Sells

       ]]>This podcast episode discusses the pros and cons of using artificial intelligence to help with copywriting for a podcast, and whether or not it's worth it. Is the Capsho software really worth the price tag?
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Holiday Hours For Apple and Your Media Hosts

       Apple has posted their holiday hours.

       From 11/29/22 - 11/27/22 along with 12/23/22 - 1/2/23, new shows and channels or subscriptions submitted during these windows may not be available within our regular. And responses to support inquiries might be slightly delayed plan accordingly and submit any new content with this in mind, 

       According to Rob Walch at Libsyn, "If you want to have a full launch by January 1,  you should submit by November 15."

       What If I don't submit by November 15th? All is not lost, the world has waited 18 years for your podcast, it may have to wait another week. 

       Be Kind To Your Media Hosts

       No matter what the company is, your media host, email providers, etc, please remember that everyone is taking time off to be with their family and friends, etc. Lighting up a company on social isn't going to help because (more than likely) nobody is home as they are also with their friends and family (and maybe you should be too). 

       Join my New Dynamic Podcast Newsletter

       I'm "doubling down" on a podcast newsletter. This will have podcast news, spotlight podcasts, links to my episodes, what is catching my eye, and behind-the-scenes information at the School of Podcasting. If you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter you can check what you want to read. If you're already on the list you will get an email asking you to specify later in the week. For those who are curious, I'm using Mailerlite. 

       Speaking of the newsletter, I am working on an episode about using a newsletter with your podcast. I've got a few interviews lined up as I want this to be a narrative-style podcast. If you use an email list with your podcast, I'd love to interview you. Contact me

       My First Impression of Capsho the AI Copywriting Tool For Podcasters

       According to their website, Capsho claims, "The Best AI Copywriting Software for Podcasters. Create your podcast promotional copy in under 10 minutes." You upload your episode, and it spits out:

       • Episode title
       • Episode description
       • Show notes
       • Blog post
       • Promotional Email
       • Social Media Captions (for all platforms)
       • LinkedIn Article
       • Transcript
       
       Is It Worth It?

       There are lots of products with AI (Artificial Intelligence). Word Hero will help you write over 60 different types of descriptions starting at $50/month (there is also a  lifetime deal aff). Anyword is another copywriting tool for $30/month. Descript with transcribe and make it easy to edit your show (and they have that amazing studio sound tool). Headliner Studio from CoSchedule is $9/month. With Capsho plans starting at $29/month, I believe it delivers enough value (but that depends on your budget). In my world, I've decided to keep using it and see how it performs. 

       AI Will NEVER Release a Human

       I will get into this later, but while a computer can imitate a human, I feel it can't replace. We are all different with these things called opinions and personalities, and even though I can specify a tone in some AI products like Word Hero it almost always needs a tweak to match your personality. 

       So Who Is Capsho Good For?

       If you're not writing anything or struggling, this does a lot of the heavy lifting. If would love to have someone help you with your description, titles, etc but can't afford a virtual assistant, but can find $29-$90 in the monthly budget, then this might be a good fit. As always, you pay in one of two currencies, time or money. Whichever one you have the most of, use that. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Videos To Watch

       Watch Capsho Video Demo

       Up with People Special 

       Up With People Superbowl

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Capsho

       Word Hero (lifetime deal )

       Anyword

       Descript

       Headliner Studio

       Mailerlite

       Repurpose.io

       Jasper

       Surfer SEO

       Castamatic

       New Podcast Apps

       Neil Hedley Episode on Advertising

       Neil's Copywriting Course Enhanced Marketing

       Tom Webster penned two AMAZING articles on how podcasting needs to learn from radio. Part 1 and Part 2

       Book: The Copywriter's Handbook: A Step-by-Step Guide to Writing Copy That Sells

       ]]>6d5b30f4-87d4-41c1-ae1b-e50e62900b47Mon, 14 Nov 2022 05:01:00 -040038:48falsefull853853Powerful Words For Your Podcast- Don't Say This Say ThatIn a world where we are constantly bombarded with images and noise, it's easy to forget the power of words. But words are still the most powerful tool we have for communication. They can be used to connect with others, to share our stories, and to create change.

       Podcasting is one of the most intimate forms of communication. It's a way to use words to connect with others in a very personal way. When you hear someone's voice, it feels like they're speaking directly to you. And when you share your own story, you have the opportunity to really connect with your listeners.

       I was interviewed and the interviewer changed the question from "What is your favorite Books" to "What is one of your favorite books." It puts a whole different level of pressure on the guest. This got me to thinking are there any other words that we can substitute to have a larger impact on our audience. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mark Achieve More Success Quick by Changing From Whining to Winning

       Mark start a new podcast about the new Lord of the Rings show, and instead of explaining how the was costing money, and it took time, and even when the show wasn't putting out more episodes, he had to pay for hosting, etc he changed his strategy.

       Mark asked if they received any value, and if they did, would they mind giving any of it back and giving them one link (so it's one call to action). 

       In his first season, he received around $900. For this old podcast, he also received $900 but it took him between 9-0 years. 

       Don't Say This Say That

       Instead of asking "What is your favorite ____? " you can ask a quest, "What is ONE OF YOUR favorite ____? This still allows us to hear their favorites without having to make them pick their absolute favorite

       Instead of asking is someone interested in coming on your show, ask them if they are willing. When it comes to willing vs interested, willing sounds more open. 

       When the doctor asked "Are there any other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" 53% of patients responded affirmatively. Yet when the doctor asked "Are there some other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" a whopping 90% of patients responded affirmatively.    Why? Patients were primed by how each of the words is used elsewhere. Naming "some" concerns implies you have options. "Any" implies random guesswork (at best) or an exhaustive list (at worst.)  The word "some" evokes a positive response. (source)   Quick Keys to Communication Keep it simple. Is it unexpected? Be specific Say it in a way that makes your listener invokes emotions. Always use stories when possible Book: Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die  

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Rings of Power Podcast

       ringsofpowerpodcast.com

       Resourceful Designer

       resourcefuldesigner.com

       Podcast Branding

       podcastbranding.co

       Book: Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die

       The Author Inside for You show

       Jerry Seinfeld Explains the Pop Tart Joke

       https://youtu.be/itWxXyCfW5s    My Podcast Reviews https://supportthisshow.com/mpr

       Dave Jackson's YouTube Channel

       Book: Profit From Your Podcast

       Ben Locker Copywriter

       ]]>In a world where we are constantly bombarded with images and noise, it's easy to forget the power of words. But words are still the most powerful tool we have for communication. They can be used to connect with others, to share our stories, and to create change.

       Podcasting is one of the most intimate forms of communication. It's a way to use words to connect with others in a very personal way. When you hear someone's voice, it feels like they're speaking directly to you. And when you share your own story, you have the opportunity to really connect with your listeners.

       I was interviewed and the interviewer changed the question from "What is your favorite Books" to "What is one of your favorite books." It puts a whole different level of pressure on the guest. This got me to thinking are there any other words that we can substitute to have a larger impact on our audience. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mark Achieve More Success Quick by Changing From Whining to Winning

       Mark start a new podcast about the new Lord of the Rings show, and instead of explaining how the was costing money, and it took time, and even when the show wasn't putting out more episodes, he had to pay for hosting, etc he changed his strategy.

       Mark asked if they received any value, and if they did, would they mind giving any of it back and giving them one link (so it's one call to action). 

       In his first season, he received around $900. For this old podcast, he also received $900 but it took him between 9-0 years. 

       Don't Say This Say That

       Instead of asking "What is your favorite ____? " you can ask a quest, "What is ONE OF YOUR favorite ____? This still allows us to hear their favorites without having to make them pick their absolute favorite

       Instead of asking is someone interested in coming on your show, ask them if they are willing. When it comes to willing vs interested, willing sounds more open. 

       When the doctor asked "Are there any other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" 53% of patients responded affirmatively. Yet when the doctor asked "Are there some other concerns you'd like to address in this visit?" a whopping 90% of patients responded affirmatively.    Why? Patients were primed by how each of the words is used elsewhere. Naming "some" concerns implies you have options. "Any" implies random guesswork (at best) or an exhaustive list (at worst.)  The word "some" evokes a positive response. (source)   Quick Keys to Communication Keep it simple. Is it unexpected? Be specific Say it in a way that makes your listener invokes emotions. Always use stories when possible Book: Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die  

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Rings of Power Podcast

       ringsofpowerpodcast.com

       Resourceful Designer

       resourcefuldesigner.com

       Podcast Branding

       podcastbranding.co

       Book: Made to Stick: Why Some Ideas Survive and Others Die

       The Author Inside for You show

       Jerry Seinfeld Explains the Pop Tart Joke

       https://youtu.be/itWxXyCfW5s    My Podcast Reviews https://supportthisshow.com/mpr

       Dave Jackson's YouTube Channel

       Book: Profit From Your Podcast

       Ben Locker Copywriter

       ]]>e3aa86cf-912a-43ce-a570-b974cc09e866Mon, 07 Nov 2022 04:05:00 -040032:16falsefull852852Podcast Creativity: 9 People Who Are Ignoring Podcasting Best PracticesIs podcast production getting stale? It seems you either do a solo show, or an interview show. The big networks do narrative style, and next week your Granma is launching a true crime show...

       Patrick Keller from the Big Seance show wanted to know if anyone was ignoring those "Podcasting Best Practices" and if so, why? (Please note podcasting best practices are subject to a wide view of opinions). 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Participants

       Patrick from the Big Séance

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Gary from The Everything Everywhere Show

       Bill from The Strokecast

       Mark from PodcastBranding.co

       Mark from The History of North America

       Scott from What Was That Like

       Karen from Just Grow Something

       Matt from the Author Inside You

       Paul - Fighting Through Podcast WW2 History

       Todd - Guardian Downcast

       Dave - School of Podcasting

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Paypal Snuck their $2500 fine back into their TOS

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Criminal Podcast

       Film Booth YouTube Thumbnail

       School of Podcasting

       FOLLOW THE SHOW

       schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       ]]>Is podcast production getting stale? It seems you either do a solo show, or an interview show. The big networks do narrative style, and next week your Granma is launching a true crime show...

       Patrick Keller from the Big Seance show wanted to know if anyone was ignoring those "Podcasting Best Practices" and if so, why? (Please note podcasting best practices are subject to a wide view of opinions). 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Matt Rafferty  The Author Inside for You show and he wants to know:

       The question is, “What is your Next Podcast going to be about?” Not your next episode, but your next SHOW. We all know it is hard to have just one…

       If you're sticking to just one, explain that as well.

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Deadline is 11/25/22

       Participants

       Patrick from the Big Séance

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Gary from The Everything Everywhere Show

       Bill from The Strokecast

       Mark from PodcastBranding.co

       Mark from The History of North America

       Scott from What Was That Like

       Karen from Just Grow Something

       Matt from the Author Inside You

       Paul - Fighting Through Podcast WW2 History

       Todd - Guardian Downcast

       Dave - School of Podcasting

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Paypal Snuck their $2500 fine back into their TOS

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Criminal Podcast

       Film Booth YouTube Thumbnail

       School of Podcasting

       FOLLOW THE SHOW

       schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       ]]>9711120a-536d-4dfc-b83d-c0cc4576e52fMon, 31 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -040050:11falsefull851851You Can Podcast: Lessons From the Erma Bombeck Writer's WorkshopWe all know that person who is always embarking on new adventures and taking risks. It seems like they were born with an innate sense of courage - but the truth is, everyone has the potential for courage. Doubt is part of the podcasting process. Today I'm back from the Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop with some insights to help you get started and keep going. 

       I also made some mistakes that I will share and some insights on some tools and strategies. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Because of My Podcast - I'm Going to Dubai

       Harry Durran of Podcast Junkies was on episode 767 talking about his hyper-niche Vertical Farming Podcast, and Because of that Podcast, her is going to Dubai. How cool is that? Learn more about that show at schoolofpodcasting.com/767

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Zoom Podtrak Recorder/Interface

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Convertkit Email Tool

       Substack Email List Tool

       Leighann Lord (Very Funny Lady)

       Erma Bombeck on Amazon (aff)

       Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop

       Elizabeth Gilbert Big Magic book (aff)

       Katrina Little

       Harry Durran Episode 767

       Podcast Junkies

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life and Storyworthy by Matthew Dicks

       Time Table

       00-00:55 Opening 56:00 Introduction 01:43:00 Because of My Podcast 03:50 Age is a Number 11:13 Join the School of Podcasting 12:36 Follow the Show 12:55 I'll start podcasting as soon as .... 16:18 Not Everyone Will "Get you" 18:00 Creepy Dudes ENOUGH! 19:42 Book Titles 20:15 Make the Podcast You Want to Hear 20:55 Someday is Today Snippet 24:45 Creators Create 25:54 Start where you are... 26:40 What is the worst thing that could happen? 27:06 What is Stopping You? 28:38 Getting Unstuck with Katrina Kittle 35:50 Notes on My Presentation 39:48 Tools and Strategies from The Event 46:13 Question of the Month 47:42 Where will I be? 48:25 Three Magic Words 50:12 Join the School of Podcasting 51:08 Bloopers

       This podcast is value-for-value enabled which means you can send boosts and boostagrams using a new modern app. You can also Buy Me a Coffee (or 5...). This podcast took 9 hours to research, record, edit, document, and publish. 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

        

        

        

       ]]>We all know that person who is always embarking on new adventures and taking risks. It seems like they were born with an innate sense of courage - but the truth is, everyone has the potential for courage. Doubt is part of the podcasting process. Today I'm back from the Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop with some insights to help you get started and keep going. 

       I also made some mistakes that I will share and some insights on some tools and strategies. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Because of My Podcast - I'm Going to Dubai

       Harry Durran of Podcast Junkies was on episode 767 talking about his hyper-niche Vertical Farming Podcast, and Because of that Podcast, her is going to Dubai. How cool is that? Learn more about that show at schoolofpodcasting.com/767

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting

       Samson Q2U Microphone

       Zoom Podtrak Recorder/Interface

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Convertkit Email Tool

       Substack Email List Tool

       Leighann Lord (Very Funny Lady)

       Erma Bombeck on Amazon (aff)

       Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop

       Elizabeth Gilbert Big Magic book (aff)

       Katrina Little

       Harry Durran Episode 767

       Podcast Junkies

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life and Storyworthy by Matthew Dicks

       Time Table

       00-00:55 Opening 56:00 Introduction 01:43:00 Because of My Podcast 03:50 Age is a Number 11:13 Join the School of Podcasting 12:36 Follow the Show 12:55 I'll start podcasting as soon as .... 16:18 Not Everyone Will "Get you" 18:00 Creepy Dudes ENOUGH! 19:42 Book Titles 20:15 Make the Podcast You Want to Hear 20:55 Someday is Today Snippet 24:45 Creators Create 25:54 Start where you are... 26:40 What is the worst thing that could happen? 27:06 What is Stopping You? 28:38 Getting Unstuck with Katrina Kittle 35:50 Notes on My Presentation 39:48 Tools and Strategies from The Event 46:13 Question of the Month 47:42 Where will I be? 48:25 Three Magic Words 50:12 Join the School of Podcasting 51:08 Bloopers

       This podcast is value-for-value enabled which means you can send boosts and boostagrams using a new modern app. You can also Buy Me a Coffee (or 5...). This podcast took 9 hours to research, record, edit, document, and publish. 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

        

        

        

       ]]>5fda5cf8-fb9a-48d3-8400-49d8acc56984Mon, 24 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -040051:09falsefull851851Three Tools To Help You Identify What Your Audience WantsAudience analysis is a critical part of any effective communication. Without understanding what your audience wants, needs, and values, it is impossible to create a message that will resonate. Fortunately, there are a few key methods for understanding your audience so that you can better serve them. Today I share three tools you can use to better understand your audience.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Learn the secret to reading your audience's mind

       Today I show you three strategies:

       Amazon Strategy

       1. Look at 4 and 2-star reviews in Amazon. They typically are more constructive and specific than 1 and 5-star reviews.

       Search YouTube

       2. Search for your topic and YouTube and find a channel about your topic. Then go to the video and sort by popularity. Then click on the most popular video and sort the comments for the best comments.

       Search Facebook

       3. In Facebook when you see a topic you want to follow click the three dots ( ... an ellipsis) and choose "turn on notifications for this post." Also, there is a search box in Facebook groups that can help you find the answer quicker (often questions have been asked before). Lastly, read the rules of the group and follow them. 

       Search Twitter

       5. Search Hashtags on Twitter and start conversations as well as read what people are talking about. So many people only use social media to push notifications about THEM instead of going to listen and research. I found this tweet about getting more subscribers from Shawn Dill.

       Click HERE to go to Twitter Advanced Search

       4. Don't Poach Other People's Clients

       Often people in the same genre as you will have an open community, if you join this community, don't self-promote. You are a guest in this person's house and it is very tacky to try and score clients. I am in a few groups of people who do the same thing I do. I answer questions and insights, but mostly I'm there to LISTEN. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Because of My Podcast

       Got a "Because of My Podcast Story? go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/because

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Effie Parks from Once upon a Gene

       School of Podcasting

       Descript Editing Tool 

       Descript Video

       Hashtag for Likes Hashtag Tool

       App Sumo

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Podinbox

       Supapass Website Tool Lifetime Offer

       ]]>Audience analysis is a critical part of any effective communication. Without understanding what your audience wants, needs, and values, it is impossible to create a message that will resonate. Fortunately, there are a few key methods for understanding your audience so that you can better serve them. Today I share three tools you can use to better understand your audience.
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Learn the secret to reading your audience's mind

       Today I show you three strategies:

       Amazon Strategy

       1. Look at 4 and 2-star reviews in Amazon. They typically are more constructive and specific than 1 and 5-star reviews.

       Search YouTube

       2. Search for your topic and YouTube and find a channel about your topic. Then go to the video and sort by popularity. Then click on the most popular video and sort the comments for the best comments.

       Search Facebook

       3. In Facebook when you see a topic you want to follow click the three dots ( ... an ellipsis) and choose "turn on notifications for this post." Also, there is a search box in Facebook groups that can help you find the answer quicker (often questions have been asked before). Lastly, read the rules of the group and follow them. 

       Search Twitter

       5. Search Hashtags on Twitter and start conversations as well as read what people are talking about. So many people only use social media to push notifications about THEM instead of going to listen and research. I found this tweet about getting more subscribers from Shawn Dill.

       Click HERE to go to Twitter Advanced Search

       4. Don't Poach Other People's Clients

       Often people in the same genre as you will have an open community, if you join this community, don't self-promote. You are a guest in this person's house and it is very tacky to try and score clients. I am in a few groups of people who do the same thing I do. I answer questions and insights, but mostly I'm there to LISTEN. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Because of My Podcast

       Got a "Because of My Podcast Story? go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/because

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Effie Parks from Once upon a Gene

       School of Podcasting

       Descript Editing Tool 

       Descript Video

       Hashtag for Likes Hashtag Tool

       App Sumo

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Podinbox

       Supapass Website Tool Lifetime Offer

       ]]>53da268c-ab4b-4755-a9e0-9857d5f4730dMon, 17 Oct 2022 04:05:00 -040031:58falsefull84984920 Resources To Help You Find Podcast GuestsPeople talk about how hard it is to find guests for their show. I think a more accurate statement is "it's hard to find a good guest for your show." Today I have directories where you can list your show (and yourself) to help you connect with the podcasting space. 

       Dave's Fun Text Tool

       I'm testing TextMagic (aff) because there is no monthly fee. There is a $4/month fee for the phone line, and they charge you 4 cents per text I send. I'm not using this for marketing, I am using it to auto-respond when people text the words (with follow or new to 833204405) you will get a text from me. I'm using Text Magic (aff link). 

       Previous Episode on All thing Interviews

       Previously I did an episode 678 about interviews from both sides of the microphone. 

       Keeping Track of Who and When You Contact Potential Podcast Guests

       The tool is used for this is Less Annoying CRM which isn't so much about building sales funnels as it is a way to keep track of your contact with people. There is a free CRM from Hub Spot but there is a bit of a learning curve.

       Here is a List of Places Where You Can Find Guests For Your Podcast

       PodcastGuests.com

       For Podcasters: Invite relevant experts and other podcasters to be guests on your podcast. For Experts: Get booked on great podcasts to expand your reach and audience. I have received more quality interviews from this resource than any other guest booking service.

       Guest.io

       Guest.io is the world's only marketplace to find professional guests and platforms. Got some publicity as this incorporates the ability to charge to be on a show, or charge a fee to appear on a show.

       Padverb

       You can use Padverb to discover new, exciting interview guests. Our site lists more than 10,000 influencers organized by professional category, such as authors economists, journalists, etc. You can also search profiles by name and browse interviews by keyword.

       Podmatch

       Imagine Your Favorite Online Dating App, But Instead Of Using It For Finding Dates, You're Booking Podcast Interviews. We Use The Same(ish) Technology For Automated Matching!

       Anchor Guest

       Create your profile as a podcaster, guest speaker, or both!

       Getting booked as a podcast guest has never been this simple. Podcast hosts can easily browse our network of speakers and make direct contact with them for bookings

       Audry.io

       Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at Audry, we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate.

       Podbooker

       The Easiest Way To Get Booked on Podcasts

       Radio Guest List

       We help radio talk show, podcast, online radio show, satellite radio, and TV program hosts, bookers, and producers to find new talk show guests, authors, and experts to interview "on the air" – easily and for free!

       Perfect Podcast Guests

       Podcast producers, podcast hosts, & schedulers get free access to top-notch industry experts, authors, thought leaders, executives, & entrepreneurs to be guests on YOUR show

       Command Your Brand

       WE HELP VISIONARY FOUNDERS TO IMPACT THE WORLD & BETTER MANKIND THROUGH THE POWER OF APPEARING ON TOP PODCASTS.

       Guest Booking Agencies

       Interview Connections

       We will find and book the right guests on your show so you can focus on hosting your show and growing your audience.

       Interview Vallet

       We help amazing brands grow their business with Podcast Interview Marketing.

       Kitcaster

       Let us schedule your podcast interviews on the world’s top podcasts

       Expert Bookers

       We ensure you get outstanding customer service and quality bookings because we work one-on-one with you.

       Podcast Bookers

       We Deliver More SEO & Lead Generation Power Than Any Other Podcast Guesting Service. Period.

       as of 10/2022 prices start at $600/2 interviews

       Podcagent

       Podcagent is your best podcast booking agent partner to deliver you the best connections for your business. (from their website)

       Podino

       Podino is the agency that inspires and makes world a better place

       Podcasting You

       WE HELP REAL ESTATE INVESTORS & AGENTS Raise Capital, Generate More Exposure, and Increase Their Networking Opportunities By Appearing On Top-Rated Podcast

       Guest Booker

       WE FIND GUESTS FOR YOUR TV & RADIO SHOW!

       Podcast Guesting Pro

       Podcast Guesting Pro is a dedicated Podcast Booking Agency that works with B2B thought leaders. We help you reach new audiences and build your authority. We operate as your own dedicated PR Team. Based on your profile, we find and then book you on high-quality podcasts aligned to your key topics. We manage all the Podcast Pitches, follow-ups, and onboarding.

       LIST OF OPPORTUNITIES

       Help a Reporter

       HARO connects journalists seeking expertise to include in their content with sources who have that expertise.

       Response Source

       Hundreds of journalists send requests through ResponseSource each week

       Fore more resources see www.podcastingresources.com

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Leave a "Because of My Podcast" story

       Is it Time to Sell Your Podcast? Episode 847

       People talk about how hard it is to find guests for their show. I think a more accurate statement is "it's hard to find a good guest for your show." Today I have directories where you can list your show (and yourself) to help you connect with the podcasting space. 

       Dave's Fun Text Tool

       I'm testing TextMagic (aff) because there is no monthly fee. There is a $4/month fee for the phone line, and they charge you 4 cents per text I send. I'm not using this for marketing, I am using it to auto-respond when people text the words (with follow or new to 833204405) you will get a text from me. I'm using Text Magic (aff link). 

       Previous Episode on All thing Interviews

       Previously I did an episode 678 about interviews from both sides of the microphone. 

       Keeping Track of Who and When You Contact Potential Podcast Guests

       The tool is used for this is Less Annoying CRM which isn't so much about building sales funnels as it is a way to keep track of your contact with people. There is a free CRM from Hub Spot but there is a bit of a learning curve.

       Here is a List of Places Where You Can Find Guests For Your Podcast

       PodcastGuests.com

       For Podcasters: Invite relevant experts and other podcasters to be guests on your podcast. For Experts: Get booked on great podcasts to expand your reach and audience. I have received more quality interviews from this resource than any other guest booking service.

       Guest.io

       Guest.io is the world's only marketplace to find professional guests and platforms. Got some publicity as this incorporates the ability to charge to be on a show, or charge a fee to appear on a show.

       Padverb

       You can use Padverb to discover new, exciting interview guests. Our site lists more than 10,000 influencers organized by professional category, such as authors economists, journalists, etc. You can also search profiles by name and browse interviews by keyword.

       Podmatch

       Imagine Your Favorite Online Dating App, But Instead Of Using It For Finding Dates, You're Booking Podcast Interviews. We Use The Same(ish) Technology For Automated Matching!

       Anchor Guest

       Create your profile as a podcaster, guest speaker, or both!

       Getting booked as a podcast guest has never been this simple. Podcast hosts can easily browse our network of speakers and make direct contact with them for bookings

       Audry.io

       Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at Audry, we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate.

       Podbooker

       The Easiest Way To Get Booked on Podcasts

       Radio Guest List

       We help radio talk show, podcast, online radio show, satellite radio, and TV program hosts, bookers, and producers to find new talk show guests, authors, and experts to interview "on the air" – easily and for free!

       Perfect Podcast Guests

       Podcast producers, podcast hosts, & schedulers get free access to top-notch industry experts, authors, thought leaders, executives, & entrepreneurs to be guests on YOUR show

       Command Your Brand

       WE HELP VISIONARY FOUNDERS TO IMPACT THE WORLD & BETTER MANKIND THROUGH THE POWER OF APPEARING ON TOP PODCASTS.

       Guest Booking Agencies

       Interview Connections

       We will find and book the right guests on your show so you can focus on hosting your show and growing your audience.

       Interview Vallet

       We help amazing brands grow their business with Podcast Interview Marketing.

       Kitcaster

       Let us schedule your podcast interviews on the world’s top podcasts

       Expert Bookers

       We ensure you get outstanding customer service and quality bookings because we work one-on-one with you.

       Podcast Bookers

       We Deliver More SEO & Lead Generation Power Than Any Other Podcast Guesting Service. Period.

       as of 10/2022 prices start at $600/2 interviews

       Podcagent

       Podcagent is your best podcast booking agent partner to deliver you the best connections for your business. (from their website)

       Podino

       Podino is the agency that inspires and makes world a better place

       Podcasting You

       WE HELP REAL ESTATE INVESTORS & AGENTS Raise Capital, Generate More Exposure, and Increase Their Networking Opportunities By Appearing On Top-Rated Podcast

       Guest Booker

       WE FIND GUESTS FOR YOUR TV & RADIO SHOW!

       Podcast Guesting Pro

       Podcast Guesting Pro is a dedicated Podcast Booking Agency that works with B2B thought leaders. We help you reach new audiences and build your authority. We operate as your own dedicated PR Team. Based on your profile, we find and then book you on high-quality podcasts aligned to your key topics. We manage all the Podcast Pitches, follow-ups, and onboarding.

       LIST OF OPPORTUNITIES

       Help a Reporter

       HARO connects journalists seeking expertise to include in their content with sources who have that expertise.

       Response Source

       Hundreds of journalists send requests through ResponseSource each week

       Fore more resources see www.podcastingresources.com

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say hi. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Leave a "Because of My Podcast" story

       Is it Time to Sell Your Podcast? Episode 847

       Video on Review Different Services

       Hubspot CRM Article

       Less Annoying CRM

       Join the School of Podcasting

       episode 678 - All things Interviews

       Dave On YouTube

       School of Podcasting Newsletter

       Follow the School of Podcasting in Your Favorite Podcast App

       Podcast Guest Experts on Facebook

       Podcast Guest Club on Facebook

       Podcast Guest Connection (facebook)

       Need A Guest (facebook)

       Podcast Guest Collaboration Community - Find a Guest, Be a Guest (Facebook)

       Podcast Guest Connection (facebook)

       Podcast Guest Exchange (reddit)

       ]]>3e4cf596-55c1-419c-a597-8ea26d6c73c7Mon, 10 Oct 2022 04:01:00 -040044:07falsefull848848Is It Time To Sell Your Podcast?Today I share how I saw the power one person's influence can have as I went to a documentary about Kenny Lambert, and they filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. Why not you? Kenny was a homeless drug addict, and now his influence has helped a ton of people. 

       Heather Osgood is the founder of True Native Media, a podcast representation agency specializing in podcast advertising. She is also the founder of The Podcast Broker, a marketplace for buying and selling podcasts. With an extensive background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results and assist podcasters in finding sponsors. 

       She is the host of The Podcast Advertising Playbook, a show dedicated to educating anyone interested in podcast advertising. When Heather is not playing matchmaker to brands and podcasts, you will find her hiking and spending time with her family at the beach.

       I Saw What One Person Can Do

       I interview Kenny Lambert from Just a Dad From Akron, on my Akron Podcast show. Kenny explains how he was homeless and suffering from drug addiction, and now he is sober and lives to give back. His life has been turned into a documentary that filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. It was amazing to see all the people one person can touch and to see his influence all in one place. It was amazing.

       Heather Osgood Can Help You Sell Your Podcast

       Heather Osgood (along with Ben Richardson and Alberto Betella from Rss.com James Cridland From Podnews, and Gordan "The Podcast Lawyer" Firemark) have launched the Podcast Broker 

       The Podcast Broker was created to simplify the process of buying or selling an established podcast. Utilizing years of experience, we provide a roadmap to execute a well-crafted hand-off from host to host to ensure a seamless experience for both parties.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters.

       You also get unlimited one-on-one coaching.

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Click to Text " follow " and get a link to follow 

       Danny Loves Video Games: Based on the True Story of Danny Peña

       Akron Podcast

       The Podcast Broker

       The School of Podcasting

       Profit From Your Podcast

        

       ]]>Today I share how I saw the power one person's influence can have as I went to a documentary about Kenny Lambert, and they filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. Why not you? Kenny was a homeless drug addict, and now his influence has helped a ton of people. 

       Heather Osgood is the founder of True Native Media, a podcast representation agency specializing in podcast advertising. She is also the founder of The Podcast Broker, a marketplace for buying and selling podcasts. With an extensive background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results and assist podcasters in finding sponsors. 

       She is the host of The Podcast Advertising Playbook, a show dedicated to educating anyone interested in podcast advertising. When Heather is not playing matchmaker to brands and podcasts, you will find her hiking and spending time with her family at the beach.

       I Saw What One Person Can Do

       I interview Kenny Lambert from Just a Dad From Akron, on my Akron Podcast show. Kenny explains how he was homeless and suffering from drug addiction, and now he is sober and lives to give back. His life has been turned into a documentary that filled a historic theater in downtown Akron. It was amazing to see all the people one person can touch and to see his influence all in one place. It was amazing.

       Heather Osgood Can Help You Sell Your Podcast

       Heather Osgood (along with Ben Richardson and Alberto Betella from Rss.com James Cridland From Podnews, and Gordan "The Podcast Lawyer" Firemark) have launched the Podcast Broker 

       The Podcast Broker was created to simplify the process of buying or selling an established podcast. Utilizing years of experience, we provide a roadmap to execute a well-crafted hand-off from host to host to ensure a seamless experience for both parties.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       This month the question is from Patrick from the Big Seance www.bigseance.com and he wants to know:

       What standard or tradition in podcasting do you tend to ignore and why do you do it differently?

       Don't forget to say the name of your show and website, and a little bit about your show.

       I need your answer by 10/28/22

       Leave Your Answer at  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters.

       You also get unlimited one-on-one coaching.

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Click to Text " follow " and get a link to follow 

       Danny Loves Video Games: Based on the True Story of Danny Peña

       Akron Podcast

       The Podcast Broker

       The School of Podcasting

       Profit From Your Podcast

        

       ]]>4fb99764-059c-4b1b-b451-85c4bacd817dMon, 03 Oct 2022 04:00:00 -040039:32falsefull847847Do Podcast Trailers Work in Growing Your PodcastSo people are paying to have a promo/trailer of their show played in another podcast. Does this work? Today I ask, "Have you taken action on a show after hearing their trailer on a podcast?" 

       I also talk with Sunny Gault from the Podcast Network Alliance

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Participants

       Scott From What Was That Like http://www.whatwasthatlike.com 

       Mark from the History of North America

       http://www.markvinet.com/podcast/

       Spencer from the Recovery Show

       http://www.therecoveryshow.com

       Tim From the Create Art Show 

       http://www.createartpodcast.com

       Tim from the Find a Podcast About

       http://www.findapodcastabout.xyz

       Fred From Podcast Reporter http://www.podcastreporter.com

       Steve from Unknown Orbits http://www.unknownorbits.com

       While trailers do work in some cases, but the thing that seems to really work is when the host (who the audience trusts) recommends a show. 

       Heather Osgood will be on the show in the future, and she mentioned that feed drops are very effective at growing your show. 

       The Podcast Network Alliance

       I talk with Sunny Gault who is one of the people who help run the Podcast Network Alliance where podcasters who are running a podcast network get together and share strategies. 

       Currently, the network is free.

       Sunny also has the Independent Podcast Network and the New Mommy Media network.

        

       Mentioned in This Show

       Join The School of Podcasting

       Poetic Earthlings.

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Rodecaster Pro

       The Podcast Broker

       Craig from InglesPodcast.com

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Schedule a Podcast Strategy Session

        

       ]]>So people are paying to have a promo/trailer of their show played in another podcast. Does this work? Today I ask, "Have you taken action on a show after hearing their trailer on a podcast?" 

       I also talk with Sunny Gault from the Podcast Network Alliance

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Participants

       Scott From What Was That Like http://www.whatwasthatlike.com 

       Mark from the History of North America

       http://www.markvinet.com/podcast/

       Spencer from the Recovery Show

       http://www.therecoveryshow.com

       Tim From the Create Art Show 

       http://www.createartpodcast.com

       Tim from the Find a Podcast About

       http://www.findapodcastabout.xyz

       Fred From Podcast Reporter http://www.podcastreporter.com

       Steve from Unknown Orbits http://www.unknownorbits.com

       While trailers do work in some cases, but the thing that seems to really work is when the host (who the audience trusts) recommends a show. 

       Heather Osgood will be on the show in the future, and she mentioned that feed drops are very effective at growing your show. 

       The Podcast Network Alliance

       I talk with Sunny Gault who is one of the people who help run the Podcast Network Alliance where podcasters who are running a podcast network get together and share strategies. 

       Currently, the network is free.

       Sunny also has the Independent Podcast Network and the New Mommy Media network.

        

       Mentioned in This Show

       Join The School of Podcasting

       Poetic Earthlings.

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Rodecaster Pro

       The Podcast Broker

       Craig from InglesPodcast.com

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Schedule a Podcast Strategy Session

        

       ]]>95d83189-8fcf-4e76-a61d-b6b2f340fa12Mon, 26 Sep 2022 04:05:00 -040041:49falsefull846846Why is Joe Rogan So Popular? I had someone ask me, "Why do you think Joe Rogan is so popular? and I took some time to do some research. I wrote a blog post/video at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/how-to-do-a-podcast-like-joe-rogan/

       Things We Learned/Noticed

       • Joe can be a bit of a lightning rod. You either love him or hate him
       • Joe had impostor syndrome.
       • Joe only has guests he wants to talk to
       • Joe creates an environment where people don't have to worry about triggering others. They talk freely.
       • Joe actually mocks/jokes with his guests. Who do you do this with? Your closest friends. 
       • Joe is authentic and it resonates.
       • He spent years learning how to entertain audiences and eventually moved to where he could get more work.
       • While he is a celebrity, that may work to get you to press play ONCE, but you need to deliver value to get them to click AGAIN. 
       • Joe states the top skills for an interviewer are listening and thinking
       
       

       My Opinion

       I listen to Joe's show when I see a guest I know and want to no more.

       I believe Joe could use some editing. Not to make it 20 minutes, but there are times when I am asking, "How did this make it past the edit?"

       THE BOTTOM LINE

       You need to be comfortable being yourself. When you try to be someone else, it's hard and doesn't work. That added weight of being someone else leads to burnout.

       Play to your strengths. Let your humor shine if you have it. If you're more serious, then build a show around it. 

       Everyone's biggest fear is to create a show while being themselves will result in a show that's not popular. There are SO MANY reasons why a show can fail, but I can help you avoid the most common mistakes.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listen

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of 9/23/22

       Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       MENTION IN THIS SHOW

       School of Podcasting

       Based on a True Story Podcast

       Ozzy Osbourne Interview

       Joe Rogan episode 1360 with Nikki Glaser

       Joe Rogan 1679 with Adam Curry

       Joe Rogan on Podcasting and Life

       Conan Obrien Needs a friend 9/12/2022 with Leslie Jones

       Is Podcast Success Only For Celebrities?

       Leave Dave a Review

       ]]> I had someone ask me, "Why do you think Joe Rogan is so popular? and I took some time to do some research. I wrote a blog post/video at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/how-to-do-a-podcast-like-joe-rogan/

       Things We Learned/Noticed

       • Joe can be a bit of a lightning rod. You either love him or hate him
       • Joe had impostor syndrome.
       • Joe only has guests he wants to talk to
       • Joe creates an environment where people don't have to worry about triggering others. They talk freely.
       • Joe actually mocks/jokes with his guests. Who do you do this with? Your closest friends. 
       • Joe is authentic and it resonates.
       • He spent years learning how to entertain audiences and eventually moved to where he could get more work.
       • While he is a celebrity, that may work to get you to press play ONCE, but you need to deliver value to get them to click AGAIN. 
       • Joe states the top skills for an interviewer are listening and thinking
       
       

       My Opinion

       I listen to Joe's show when I see a guest I know and want to no more.

       I believe Joe could use some editing. Not to make it 20 minutes, but there are times when I am asking, "How did this make it past the edit?"

       THE BOTTOM LINE

       You need to be comfortable being yourself. When you try to be someone else, it's hard and doesn't work. That added weight of being someone else leads to burnout.

       Play to your strengths. Let your humor shine if you have it. If you're more serious, then build a show around it. 

       Everyone's biggest fear is to create a show while being themselves will result in a show that's not popular. There are SO MANY reasons why a show can fail, but I can help you avoid the most common mistakes.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listen

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of 9/23/22

       Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       MENTION IN THIS SHOW

       School of Podcasting

       Based on a True Story Podcast

       Ozzy Osbourne Interview

       Joe Rogan episode 1360 with Nikki Glaser

       Joe Rogan 1679 with Adam Curry

       Joe Rogan on Podcasting and Life

       Conan Obrien Needs a friend 9/12/2022 with Leslie Jones

       Is Podcast Success Only For Celebrities?

       Leave Dave a Review

       ]]>f45dee40-a2e7-4229-bd52-fca0b970390fMon, 19 Sep 2022 04:05:00 -040043:38falsefull845845Your Podcast Doesn't Need to Be Perfect - It Needs to Be GoodI am running into more people who say things like, "I'll start my podcast as soon as (event)," or "As soon as I get (piece of gear)." In some cases, they have been waiting for YEARS. So today I'm going to pull back the curtain a bit and show you how a podcast doesn't have to be perfect (as I leave in things I normally might remove)
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Because of my Podcast: I Won An Award

       Craig from te Live Well and Flourish started a personal show called, "Live well and Flourish" which lead to other podcasts that Craig created for Louisiana Tech University (where Craig is a Professor) and he won an innovation award for making podcasts to go along with a textbook he c-authored.

       Learn From Other's Mistakes

       I Had the Wrong Country in An Episode

       I had typos in a blog post (due to multiple tabs)

       Leave some "Margin" in your life so you can pivot.

       Have at least one episode recorded and ready to go.

       Replace your file with a new repaired file. with the exact file name.

       If you're using Dynamic content, make sure your volume levels are consistent.

       Spotify only uses mp3 files (so don't upload an m4a file). I recommend 128 kbps stereo mp3. 

       RX10 Is Released

       This software has tools to clean up audio. We play "bad" audio and their "enhanced version" and again I say, sure this audio was somewhat shrill. I'm not sure spending $800 is worth the results. If you listen, there isn't a TON of difference. 

       Check it out at  https://supportthisshow.com/rx10

       You don't need this software to create a podcast. If you record things with a decent microphone, in a quiet area, you are probably "good enough." 

       I'm not saying that you can do "whatever you want." Again, you are aiming at perfection but you land on "Very good." 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of September 23, 2022

       THE QUESTION: Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Live Well and Flourish

       WLM Plus Plugin

       Music Radio Creative

       IZotope RX 10

       Descript Software

       School of Podcasting Affiliate

       RX10 Demo Video

       How Do I Get Rid of Impostor Syndrome? Part 1 How Do I Get Rid of Impostor Syndrome? Part 2

       King's X Three Sides of One Amazon (aff) Spotify

       This is episode 844 of the School of Podcasting part of the Power of Podcasting network.

       ]]>I am running into more people who say things like, "I'll start my podcast as soon as (event)," or "As soon as I get (piece of gear)." In some cases, they have been waiting for YEARS. So today I'm going to pull back the curtain a bit and show you how a podcast doesn't have to be perfect (as I leave in things I normally might remove)
       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/listener

       Because of my Podcast: I Won An Award

       Craig from te Live Well and Flourish started a personal show called, "Live well and Flourish" which lead to other podcasts that Craig created for Louisiana Tech University (where Craig is a Professor) and he won an innovation award for making podcasts to go along with a textbook he c-authored.

       Learn From Other's Mistakes

       I Had the Wrong Country in An Episode

       I had typos in a blog post (due to multiple tabs)

       Leave some "Margin" in your life so you can pivot.

       Have at least one episode recorded and ready to go.

       Replace your file with a new repaired file. with the exact file name.

       If you're using Dynamic content, make sure your volume levels are consistent.

       Spotify only uses mp3 files (so don't upload an m4a file). I recommend 128 kbps stereo mp3. 

       RX10 Is Released

       This software has tools to clean up audio. We play "bad" audio and their "enhanced version" and again I say, sure this audio was somewhat shrill. I'm not sure spending $800 is worth the results. If you listen, there isn't a TON of difference. 

       Check it out at  https://supportthisshow.com/rx10

       You don't need this software to create a podcast. If you record things with a decent microphone, in a quiet area, you are probably "good enough." 

       I'm not saying that you can do "whatever you want." Again, you are aiming at perfection but you land on "Very good." 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of September 23, 2022

       THE QUESTION: Podcasters are starting to buy ads on other podcasts as a way to grow their audience. Have you ever taken action toward a podcast after hearing a promo for their show on another podcast? When you answer be sure to tell us a little about your show, and your website.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate

       Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

       and sign up. When someone signs up using your link, you earn a commission. That commission is paid every month they stay subscribed. Start Earning Today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Live Well and Flourish

       WLM Plus Plugin

       Music Radio Creative

       IZotope RX 10

       Descript Software

       School of Podcasting Affiliate

       RX10 Demo Video

       How Do I Get Rid of Impostor Syndrome? Part 1 How Do I Get Rid of Impostor Syndrome? Part 2

       King's X Three Sides of One Amazon (aff) Spotify

       This is episode 844 of the School of Podcasting part of the Power of Podcasting network.

       ]]>4815cf08-08f9-4792-9024-603c25a53949Mon, 12 Sep 2022 04:05:00 -040033:08falsefull844844Growing Your Podcast Using Paid Display Ads on Podcast AppsHave you been considering using display ads on podcast apps to grow your show? I've asked Tanner Campbell to join me and share his experience with experimenting.

       Advertising on Podcast Apps

       Before you go spending money Tanner and I agree that this only makes sense if your podcast is part of the marketing arm that is generating income.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Using Podcast Display Ads to Grow Your Podcast

       Spotify Ads - Minimum Spend $250

       Podbay - $5/day

       Overcast - Prices Vary by Category

       Pocketcasts - Minimum Spend $1700

       Podcast Addict - Varies

       Castro - Minimum Spend $750 for 50,000 Impressions

       Player.fm The only thing they show on their website is to contact advertising@player.fm

       Castobox

       Get Detailed Report

       Connect with Tanner

       Tannerhelps.com

       Good Morning Podcasters

       Practical Stoicism

       Dictionary of Mythology & Folklore

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Supercast

       Switchy

       School of Podcasting

       My Thoughts on Podcast Movement 22

       Podpreneurs Community

       27 Ways to Market and Monetize a Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       ]]>Have you been considering using display ads on podcast apps to grow your show? I've asked Tanner Campbell to join me and share his experience with experimenting.

       Advertising on Podcast Apps

       Before you go spending money Tanner and I agree that this only makes sense if your podcast is part of the marketing arm that is generating income.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Using Podcast Display Ads to Grow Your Podcast

       Spotify Ads - Minimum Spend $250

       Podbay - $5/day

       Overcast - Prices Vary by Category

       Pocketcasts - Minimum Spend $1700

       Podcast Addict - Varies

       Castro - Minimum Spend $750 for 50,000 Impressions

       Player.fm The only thing they show on their website is to contact advertising@player.fm

       Castobox

       Get Detailed Report

       Connect with Tanner

       Tannerhelps.com

       Good Morning Podcasters

       Practical Stoicism

       Dictionary of Mythology & Folklore

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Supercast

       Switchy

       School of Podcasting

       My Thoughts on Podcast Movement 22

       Podpreneurs Community

       27 Ways to Market and Monetize a Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       ]]>7a6c67e4-7a38-41de-b6a1-b5d41fd813ecMon, 05 Sep 2022 04:25:00 -040001:03:19falsefull843843What is the Podlation Cycle? with Toby GoodmanI met Toby at Podcast Movement Evolutions and he gave me his book Narrow Podcasting in which he gives step-by-step strategies to grow your business using podcasting. The main strategy is to interview your potential customer. I get that strategy, but what about the listener? Toby is the "Pro" behind the Pro Editing service at Blubrry, and runs his own podcasting services at narrowpodcasting.com So I brought Toby on to talk about it. 

       PLEASE NOTE: This was recorded before Podcast Movement 2022 in Dallas which had some controversies.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Narrow Podcasting With Toby Goodman

       In our discussion with Toby we learn:

       • Why did he write his book
       • What is the Podlationship Cycle?
       • The Criteria Toby Uses to Select His Guests
       • What is a good podcast?
       • Do Audiograms Work?
       • What can a person expect from the Narrow Podcasting Course?
       
       

       For more information on Toby, his book and his course. Check out

       www.narrowpodcasting.com/sop

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       You Podcast Consultant

       Narrow Podcasting Site

       Narrow Podcasting Book

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>I met Toby at Podcast Movement Evolutions and he gave me his book Narrow Podcasting in which he gives step-by-step strategies to grow your business using podcasting. The main strategy is to interview your potential customer. I get that strategy, but what about the listener? Toby is the "Pro" behind the Pro Editing service at Blubrry, and runs his own podcasting services at narrowpodcasting.com So I brought Toby on to talk about it. 

       PLEASE NOTE: This was recorded before Podcast Movement 2022 in Dallas which had some controversies.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Narrow Podcasting With Toby Goodman

       In our discussion with Toby we learn:

       • Why did he write his book
       • What is the Podlationship Cycle?
       • The Criteria Toby Uses to Select His Guests
       • What is a good podcast?
       • Do Audiograms Work?
       • What can a person expect from the Narrow Podcasting Course?
       
       

       For more information on Toby, his book and his course. Check out

       www.narrowpodcasting.com/sop

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       You Podcast Consultant

       Narrow Podcasting Site

       Narrow Podcasting Book

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>a79cd5c0-3bce-4e63-bf1c-4a36872d8f42Mon, 29 Aug 2022 04:01:00 -040041:43falsefull842842Because of My Podcast I Got to Go to KenyaI love it when someone who has listened to this show, and goes out and puts the strategies I talk about like make friends before promoting your podcast or service, or start from where you are, and they come back with a "Because of my podcast story..." Today Hilda followed her passion, and it lead to joining a great community. But she knew that if you want to monetize you have solve a problem for someone. She went to her friends at a nonprofit, and wait until you hear what happens, the adventure that unfolds

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Podcast Quick Tip

       When you mention any brand in your show, be sure to tweet out about your episode and that you mentioned them. In some cases, they may retweet you to their giant brand.

       Interview With Holistic Hilda

       In this conversation you will hear:

       • Start with where you are with what you have
       • Make friends and earn trust before doing any pitches
       • Find a community that shares your passion
       • Getting sponsors is not as easy as it looks
       • Be prepared to raise your hand when opportunity knocks
       • Finding clients is not as easy as it looks
       • Dave reads a part of his book Profit From Your Podcast about fiscal sponsors
       
       

       Find Hilda at holistichilda.com and the non-profit she helping here.

       Make Money Promoting the School of Podcasting

       The School of Podcasting recently updated the back end of the tutorials community and coaching. If you know someone who wants to start a podcast (but don't want all the work of a membership site, support, etc) you can become a School of Podcasting Affiliate and earn 20% commission for each month the person stays subscribed.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Get access to step-by-step tutorials, private podcasting mastermind, group coaching, and unlimited one-on-one time-shifted consulting. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>I love it when someone who has listened to this show, and goes out and puts the strategies I talk about like make friends before promoting your podcast or service, or start from where you are, and they come back with a "Because of my podcast story..." Today Hilda followed her passion, and it lead to joining a great community. But she knew that if you want to monetize you have solve a problem for someone. She went to her friends at a nonprofit, and wait until you hear what happens, the adventure that unfolds

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Podcast Quick Tip

       When you mention any brand in your show, be sure to tweet out about your episode and that you mentioned them. In some cases, they may retweet you to their giant brand.

       Interview With Holistic Hilda

       In this conversation you will hear:

       • Start with where you are with what you have
       • Make friends and earn trust before doing any pitches
       • Find a community that shares your passion
       • Getting sponsors is not as easy as it looks
       • Be prepared to raise your hand when opportunity knocks
       • Finding clients is not as easy as it looks
       • Dave reads a part of his book Profit From Your Podcast about fiscal sponsors
       
       

       Find Hilda at holistichilda.com and the non-profit she helping here.

       Make Money Promoting the School of Podcasting

       The School of Podcasting recently updated the back end of the tutorials community and coaching. If you know someone who wants to start a podcast (but don't want all the work of a membership site, support, etc) you can become a School of Podcasting Affiliate and earn 20% commission for each month the person stays subscribed.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Get access to step-by-step tutorials, private podcasting mastermind, group coaching, and unlimited one-on-one time-shifted consulting. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>1014517d-0d70-489f-9feb-eeafb2f8f09eMon, 22 Aug 2022 04:05:00 -040032:33falsefull841841Podcast Decisions: The Balance Between Passion and LogicIn researching successful content creators, I came across quite a few young Youtuber who have six-8 figure subscriber counts, tons of money, and are absolutely miserable.

       In looking at why someone would pressure something that was putting too much stress on their life it brought me back to passion (when emotions take over the decision making) and Logic (which only does things that make sense). I came across some new research and insights I wanted to share. 

       Please note this episode is clean, but does have some bleeped out words.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to have unlimited time-shifted consulting (and quick-fix zoom calls as you like at no extra charge).  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to courses.schoolofpodcasting.com

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       We remember negative things more than positive

       Burnt Out at 19 Elle Mills Meltdown

       YouTube's Burnout Generation

       YouTube burnout is real. Creators are struggling to cope

       Benjamin Franklin's Method of Self-Improvement (Live Well and Flourish)

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life (aff)

       Storyworthy (by Mathew Dicks)

       We Need Passion

       Passion enables us to "throw caution to the wind" which can come in handy to take those scary leaps.

       We Need Logic

       When we put our thoughts into the reality of something happening, that logic can bring us back from making too many decisions from our hearts. 

       See full notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/840

        

        

       ]]>In researching successful content creators, I came across quite a few young Youtuber who have six-8 figure subscriber counts, tons of money, and are absolutely miserable.

       In looking at why someone would pressure something that was putting too much stress on their life it brought me back to passion (when emotions take over the decision making) and Logic (which only does things that make sense). I came across some new research and insights I wanted to share. 

       Please note this episode is clean, but does have some bleeped out words.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to have unlimited time-shifted consulting (and quick-fix zoom calls as you like at no extra charge).  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to courses.schoolofpodcasting.com

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       We remember negative things more than positive

       Burnt Out at 19 Elle Mills Meltdown

       YouTube's Burnout Generation

       YouTube burnout is real. Creators are struggling to cope

       Benjamin Franklin's Method of Self-Improvement (Live Well and Flourish)

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life (aff)

       Storyworthy (by Mathew Dicks)

       We Need Passion

       Passion enables us to "throw caution to the wind" which can come in handy to take those scary leaps.

       We Need Logic

       When we put our thoughts into the reality of something happening, that logic can bring us back from making too many decisions from our hearts. 

       See full notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/840

        

        

       ]]>8acf12a8-4a1f-4e08-b73d-ee31b39581c4Mon, 15 Aug 2022 04:05:00 -040042:10falsefull840840I'm Thinking of Being a Podcast Editor (with Steve Stewart and Mark Deal)In the span of a few weeks I had THREE people say, I'm thinking of becoming a podcast editor and it had been years since I talked to Mark and Steve back on episode  752 .  That was back when they had just launched the Podcast Editor Academy which is an amazing resource with tutorials on software (Hindenburg, Reaper, etc) but it also talks about the business of being a podcaster editor. Now they have 8000 people in their Facebook group, and now are helping all podcasters at a special event at Podcast Movement before revamping the academy. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Charging Guests to Appear On Your Show

       A recent Bloomberg Article about guests paying to be on podcasts (and we mention the importance of disclosing this information). 

       The site mentions Guestio which (if you wanted) you could have people pay $5 just to pitch you (that might scale back some of the bogus pitches). 

       While I'm not a huge fan of this strategy (I feel it is a slippery slope) if you decide to charge, and always disclose that you were paid to have someone on your show, have at it. (Some people feel this makes your podcast an infomercial.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Got A Because of My Podcast Story? See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/because

       Mentioned in this Episode:

       The importance of having a niche.

       How Steve started out as a podcast editor without a website.

       Mark talks about setting expectations by having a contract with your customer.

       The difference between an editor, an engineer, a manager, and a story shaper.

       Common mistakes new podcast editors make.

       Poisonous Pet Collars - Congressional Dish

       Gary Leland had a day designated for him in his home town

       Links From Episode

       Sign up for the Podcast Editor Academy (save using coupon sop )

       Live Mastermind Workshop in Dallas Texas

       Editor Pricing Survey

       Episode 752 of the School of Podcasting

       Buy the book Profit From Your Podcast

       Gary Leland Website

       Guestio Charge your guest for appearances

       Start and Grow Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       ]]>In the span of a few weeks I had THREE people say, I'm thinking of becoming a podcast editor and it had been years since I talked to Mark and Steve back on episode  752 .  That was back when they had just launched the Podcast Editor Academy which is an amazing resource with tutorials on software (Hindenburg, Reaper, etc) but it also talks about the business of being a podcaster editor. Now they have 8000 people in their Facebook group, and now are helping all podcasters at a special event at Podcast Movement before revamping the academy. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Charging Guests to Appear On Your Show

       A recent Bloomberg Article about guests paying to be on podcasts (and we mention the importance of disclosing this information). 

       The site mentions Guestio which (if you wanted) you could have people pay $5 just to pitch you (that might scale back some of the bogus pitches). 

       While I'm not a huge fan of this strategy (I feel it is a slippery slope) if you decide to charge, and always disclose that you were paid to have someone on your show, have at it. (Some people feel this makes your podcast an infomercial.

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be?

       I look forward to seeing you all, please come up and say high. To see my full itinerary, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Got A Because of My Podcast Story? See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/because

       Mentioned in this Episode:

       The importance of having a niche.

       How Steve started out as a podcast editor without a website.

       Mark talks about setting expectations by having a contract with your customer.

       The difference between an editor, an engineer, a manager, and a story shaper.

       Common mistakes new podcast editors make.

       Poisonous Pet Collars - Congressional Dish

       Gary Leland had a day designated for him in his home town

       Links From Episode

       Sign up for the Podcast Editor Academy (save using coupon sop )

       Live Mastermind Workshop in Dallas Texas

       Editor Pricing Survey

       Episode 752 of the School of Podcasting

       Buy the book Profit From Your Podcast

       Gary Leland Website

       Guestio Charge your guest for appearances

       Start and Grow Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       ]]>9c410df1-5247-4473-b762-3a97a57a96fcMon, 08 Aug 2022 04:05:00 -040037:49falsefull839839Bored Podcasters Have Bored Audiences 101 Episode Templates to Fight Boredom With David HooperYou keep doing the same thing you've been doing and you're not seeing your podcast numbers moving up. You're not sure what to try. To this I say check out the book 101 Podcast Episode Templates by David Hooper of Build a Big Podcast. 

       All of these templates are short and to the point and for me the book provides a great tool to "brainstorm by yourself." To we cover four of the templates and Dave demonstrates a bonus template.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       David Hooper Shares 5 Templates

       Dave shares four templates from his book 101 Podcast Episode Templates. You find that Dave loves to write, but he has to focus to finish his books. (so if you are in this boat you're not alone)

       Templates Covered:

       #4 Listener voicemail (see links below for tools #5 Criticize Something with #8 a Weird Viewpoint #10 A Day in the Life #19 ______ with only $100 BONUS TEMPLATE Dave demonstrates the Sidecar template on this episode where he plays a clip of this show. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be

       For my full schedule see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       LINKS IN THIS EPISODE

       Focusrite.com/Vocaster 

       School of Podcasting

       101 Podcast Episode Templates

       Walking is Fitness

       Speakpipe 

       Podinbox

       Rumble Studio

       Voice form

       Podcastvoicemail.com

       ]]>You keep doing the same thing you've been doing and you're not seeing your podcast numbers moving up. You're not sure what to try. To this I say check out the book 101 Podcast Episode Templates by David Hooper of Build a Big Podcast. 

       All of these templates are short and to the point and for me the book provides a great tool to "brainstorm by yourself." To we cover four of the templates and Dave demonstrates a bonus template.

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain – Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance – Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute – Silence the mic with the touch of a button – don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone – Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly
       • Record to a camera – Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card
       • Loopback – Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software – Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       David Hooper Shares 5 Templates

       Dave shares four templates from his book 101 Podcast Episode Templates. You find that Dave loves to write, but he has to focus to finish his books. (so if you are in this boat you're not alone)

       Templates Covered:

       #4 Listener voicemail (see links below for tools #5 Criticize Something with #8 a Weird Viewpoint #10 A Day in the Life #19 ______ with only $100 BONUS TEMPLATE Dave demonstrates the Sidecar template on this episode where he plays a clip of this show. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Where I Will Be

       For my full schedule see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       LINKS IN THIS EPISODE

       Focusrite.com/Vocaster 

       School of Podcasting

       101 Podcast Episode Templates

       Walking is Fitness

       Speakpipe 

       Podinbox

       Rumble Studio

       Voice form

       Podcastvoicemail.com

       ]]>0fed2796-5c54-4651-9de0-36cb8bafe14cMon, 01 Aug 2022 04:05:00 -040046:58falsefull838838Interesting AND Unique Doc G Mixes Hospice and FinanceToday I interview Jordan "Doc G" Grumett who is the Hospice doctor turned Financial Guru and host of the Earn and Invest show. he has now taken his unique point of view and penned the new book Taking Stock: A Hospice Doctor's Advice on Financial Independence, Building Wealth, and Living a Regret-Free Life

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Jordan Grumet Interview Main TakeAways

       He started because wanted to have deep-dive discussions on finance and talk to experts.

       Jordan used the art of subtraction to identify what he really wanted to do.

       He found out that learning the financial spaces wasn't as hard as he thought it was going to be. 

       Because of His Podcast 

       He had people who signed up to help read different variations and help promote it.

       He landed an agent and experienced people who walked him through the job of writing a book proposal, getting an agent, and a publisher. As Jordan put it, "I had people." 

       He is also slotted and positioned to have TONS of exposure when it releases next week compared to his first two books.

       Find him at https://jordangrumet.com/and earnandinvest.com

       Get his book on Amazon (aff)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Also Mentioned In This Episode

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life

       ]]>Today I interview Jordan "Doc G" Grumett who is the Hospice doctor turned Financial Guru and host of the Earn and Invest show. he has now taken his unique point of view and penned the new book Taking Stock: A Hospice Doctor's Advice on Financial Independence, Building Wealth, and Living a Regret-Free Life

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Jordan Grumet Interview Main TakeAways

       He started because wanted to have deep-dive discussions on finance and talk to experts.

       Jordan used the art of subtraction to identify what he really wanted to do.

       He found out that learning the financial spaces wasn't as hard as he thought it was going to be. 

       Because of His Podcast 

       He had people who signed up to help read different variations and help promote it.

       He landed an agent and experienced people who walked him through the job of writing a book proposal, getting an agent, and a publisher. As Jordan put it, "I had people." 

       He is also slotted and positioned to have TONS of exposure when it releases next week compared to his first two books.

       Find him at https://jordangrumet.com/and earnandinvest.com

       Get his book on Amazon (aff)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by the end of August 2022

       This month's question comes from Dave from Walking is Fitness which is a daily 10-minute podcast designed to help listeners find a little extra motivation to get out for a fitness walk every single day. 

       THE QUESTION: Most podcast hosts have a target listener. And I would imagine like most podcasts, there are certain themes and topics that I know that are of greater interest to my target listener.

        How often do you return to these key topics?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       When you answer tell us about your show (including the WEBSITE ADDRESS).

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Also Mentioned In This Episode

       Someday Is Today: 22 Simple, Actionable Ways to Propel Your Creative Life

       ]]>724d786a-3cb8-4f74-af46-307702c66393Mon, 25 Jul 2022 04:19:13 -040056:03falsefull837837Helping You Avoid Podcasting MistakesToday I look at some things using my experience and share them with you so you can avoid those pitfalls. 
       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters
       Today I look at some things using my experience and share them with you so you can avoid those pitfalls. 
       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters
       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Kudos to Descript

       When something motivates me to tell my friends about something, I stop and look at why. Descript did a webinar and to spruce it up, they had a mock customer who kept interrupting the webinar because he couldn't remember his password. At first, it was, "Did that just happen?" By the end, we had all figured out after the third appearance that the "Customer" was a plant, but it was creative and made the webinar (that showcases new video tools) very entertaining as well as educational. 

       Give Out Website Addresses that You Control

       Instead of sending people to www.patreon.com/davejackson I send people to www.askthepodcastcoach.com/awesome this way if later I change to a different tool, I don't end up with all my past episodes with links that no longer work.

       Tool for this are: Pretty Links WordPress Plugin

       Podpage has a built-in tool for Pretty Redirects

       Rebrandly.com is a cool tracking and redirecting tool

       Go Through All The Steps of Your Second Show

       Once you start a podcast you often feel like starting an additional show. You know the process, and off you go to start podcast #2. I advise that before you do this DO ALL THE WORK. 

       In other words, don't just design it on paper, but go through all the steps of actually creating an episode (even if you don't keep it). I didn't do this with the Podcast Trailer Show and what was (on paper) going to take about 15 minutes per episode is taking me twice that. 

       How did I miss this? I did "shallow" investigations into all steps, and it seemed like everything was going work. However, I didn't actually go through and make some test episodes. I didn't do a dress rehearsal. Consequently, it is taking more time, and its cutting into my schedule and causing issues. 

       Amazon Rolls Out a Portal

       FYI, Amazon has rolled out a portal where you can see how many followers, downloads and more. Go to podcasters.amazon.com 

       Choose What To Monitor Before Paying to Promote Your Show

       If you are going to pay for a promotion, you need to identify how you will gauge success. I recently played with Buzzsprouot ads where you can advertise on other shows. Halfway through the campaign, I realized I hadn't looked at my numbers before running the campaign so I could see if they went up. 

       Portal where you can see subscriber/follower accounts

       podcastsconnect.apple.com

       podcastsmanager.google.com

       podcasters.spotify.com

       podcaters.amazon.com 

       Put All Of Your Content On Your Website

       I have a YouTube channel, and I occasionally write a blog post on Medium. When I looked at my Google Analytics, I saw that one of my top pages was a post that featured one of my YouTube Videos. 

       Your website is YOUR MAIN HUB, and it makes it easy for people who enjoy your content to find it in one place. I do spotlight it in my newsletter, but if should be on my website as well

       Leave Time On Your Calendar To Learn New Stuff

       When you purchase courses, watch webinars, or buy software (Surferseo in my case) you need to leave time on your calendar to go through the learning curve. No matter how easy it is, there WILL BE some amount of time needed to add to your arsenal of skills.

       It Doesn't Need to Be Perfect To Start

       I have gone through so many different school to manage my learning content. I've been on Thinkific, and almost moved to Teachable (and used Circle for my community), and have now decided (and am 90% moved) to Podia. 

       The maddening part is Podia was...]]>4667cd48-9796-481d-8829-ad07cebefda3Mon, 18 Jul 2022 04:00:00 -040039:38falsefull836836What Podcasters Can Learn From the Movie IndustryWe start off by hearing about a podcast that received 4,000 donations in our quick tip at the top of the show. 

       I researched what it's like to work in the movie business. Why? Because movies are meant to entertain and take up the audience's time (their most prized possession). 

       We look at the process of making a movie, and some things that podcasters have an easier road, and some steps movies take, that podcasters should seriously consider.

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Mentioned in This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

       The Messengers Documentary

       Girl in Space (not Girls, sorry Sarah)

       The Lone Ranger Movie (2013)

       The podcast Trailer Show

       Professional Grade 2 Lavalier Clip-On Microphones Set for Dual Interview - Double Lav Lapel Microphone - Use for iPhone Phone Camera - Blogging Video Recording Noise Cancelling 3.5mm Mic

       Sources:

       Selling to Netflix

       Matt Damon on Hot Ones

       What Does ‘Greenlit’ REALLY Mean? 9 Key Factors in the Script Development Process

       Top Box Offices

       ]]>We start off by hearing about a podcast that received 4,000 donations in our quick tip at the top of the show. 

       I researched what it's like to work in the movie business. Why? Because movies are meant to entertain and take up the audience's time (their most prized possession). 

       We look at the process of making a movie, and some things that podcasters have an easier road, and some steps movies take, that podcasters should seriously consider.

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Mentioned in This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

       The Messengers Documentary

       Girl in Space (not Girls, sorry Sarah)

       The Lone Ranger Movie (2013)

       The podcast Trailer Show

       Professional Grade 2 Lavalier Clip-On Microphones Set for Dual Interview - Double Lav Lapel Microphone - Use for iPhone Phone Camera - Blogging Video Recording Noise Cancelling 3.5mm Mic

       Sources:

       Selling to Netflix

       Matt Damon on Hot Ones

       What Does ‘Greenlit’ REALLY Mean? 9 Key Factors in the Script Development Process

       Top Box Offices

       ]]>ffd9fc91-2c43-430c-b5b7-b293683ed593Mon, 11 Jul 2022 06:21:54 -040048:15falsefull835835Rodecaster Pro II: 11 Things I Like About it and 6 Things I Don'tThe Rodecaster Pro II is the new device from Rode. Today I compare it to the Rodecaster Pro I along with some other devices. This device is $700 and (IMHO) not for someone who is just doing some casual interviews via zoom. Feel free to follow/subscribe, and check out any of the other 833 episodes I have. 
       SPONSOR: Focusrite The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters
       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Things I Like About the Rodcaster II
       • It is an interface, recorder, headphone amplifier, and jingle palet all on one
       • They make updating the firmware (and there WILL BE UPDATEs) INSANELY Easy.
       • Super QUiet Preamps
       • Automatic Monitor Muting
       • Smartpads now play sounds, control midi devices, and add effects
       • Only record the channels you need (FINALLY!)
       • No More Polywave
       • Ability to put the unit on a stand and get it off your desk
       • USB C Electric input which makes it easy to run on batteries.
       • Flexible input assignments and color coding
       • In addition to Aphex processing, new 3-band EQ
       
       THINGS THAT ANNOY ME
       • Multiple outputs are confusing and seem to change without me doing anything. I need the ability to turn on and off mix-minus. This is available on USB2, but if I am using (only) that option when I fire up the software on my computer, it won't connect to the unit because I'm not on USB 1. If I want to tie this into my DAW, tracks 1 and 2 are the stereo mix. This means my first slider is #3.
       • The fader features fades out for X amount of seconds and keeps everything faded out. After the X amount of time it should unfade everything. This is an easy one to trip over.
       • Set the Lights Brightness level sounds great, but I couldn't tell a channel was muted because the lights were so dim. This is (again) operator error, but frustrating.
       • Loss of count down number is replaced with a pie chart. Those with older eyesight prefer large numbers. 
       • I am required to take the cover off to turn the unit off. I use to be able to press the on off button twice and leave the cover on.
       • Loss way to have a CONNECTED phone call. ON the ROdecaster 1, I could plug in a TRRS cable and the phone did everything like usual. Now if I want to make a phone call, I HAVE to use Bluetooth. When I plugged in the SC19 cable, the Rodecaster rebooted and the sound out of my phone was unusable. I was somewhat bummed after spending $30 on a cable, that I can't use it to make phone calls on my podcast without using Bluetooth. I need to remember to turn off Bluetooth on the unit as my phone keeps connecting to it. 
       
       Comparing it to Some of the Competition Zoom Podtrak P4

       I refer to this as the swiss army of podcasting. It does everything. It is an interface and a recorder, headphone amp, and jingle player, and it comes in at $200ish. Yes the preamps won't be as steller, but as you heard today the hiss is minimal in some cases. 

       Focusrite Vocaster

       This unit is NOT a recorder, but setting it up and recording into software is super easy. You can send the main outs to a recorder, connect via blue tooth or WIRED TRRS cable. The "2" has blue tooth and output to go to your camera. This one wins the "I need something easy" conversation.

       Rodecaster Pro II

       This is for live streamers who want that audio processing to go out on the video as they record it (no post-production). They want to play sounds/music and have flexible configurations.

       Final Thoughts

       While the Rodecaster Pro II currently drives me a little nuts, I'm not worried. Rod has done a great job communicating with their users and has already made videos on future updates (to calm any fears). So while this current unit has me scratching my head, Rode has demonstrated they listen (the stand attachment on the back of the unit screams "We heard you want your desk back"). 

       Don't Buy This If
       • Nobody is telling you your podcast sounds bad
       • You think this will solve plosives (it won't that is mic technique)
       • "I don't know, it sounds cool" (unless you have $700 in your couch cushion). 
       • You think this will help you grow your audience (again unless you have REALLY bad audio, it's the CONTENT that helps grow the audience). 
       
       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability (via a free app) to text me, send me video, audio, etc. It's unlimited time-shifted one-on-one consulting. It's like having a podcast consultant in your pocket.

       Still unsure? The membership comes with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Rode Rodecaster Pro II

       Rode Rodecaster Pro I

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Focsurite Vocaster

       Sweet Water Podcast Equipment

       Rode SC-15 Cable

       School of Podcasting

       Podcast Studio Pro

       This is episode 834 which originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/834

       ]]>The Rodecaster Pro II is the new device from Rode. Today I compare it to the Rodecaster Pro I along with some other devices. This device is $700 and (IMHO) not for someone who is just doing some casual interviews via zoom. Feel free to follow/subscribe, and check out any of the other 833 episodes I have. 
       SPONSOR: Focusrite The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters
       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Things I Like About the Rodcaster II
       • It is an interface, recorder, headphone amplifier, and jingle palet all on one
       • They make updating the firmware (and there WILL BE UPDATEs) INSANELY Easy.
       • Super QUiet Preamps
       • Automatic Monitor Muting
       • Smartpads now play sounds, control midi devices, and add effects
       • Only record the channels you need (FINALLY!)
       • No More Polywave
       • Ability to put the unit on a stand and get it off your desk
       • USB C Electric input which makes it easy to run on batteries.
       • Flexible input assignments and color coding
       • In addition to Aphex processing, new 3-band EQ
       
       THINGS THAT ANNOY ME
       • Multiple outputs are confusing and seem to change without me doing anything. I need the ability to turn on and off mix-minus. This is available on USB2, but if I am using (only) that option when I fire up the software on my computer, it won't connect to the unit because I'm not on USB 1. If I want to tie this into my DAW, tracks 1 and 2 are the stereo mix. This means my first slider is #3.
       • The fader features fades out for X amount of seconds and keeps everything faded out. After the X amount of time it should unfade everything. This is an easy one to trip over.
       • Set the Lights Brightness level sounds great, but I couldn't tell a channel was muted because the lights were so dim. This is (again) operator error, but frustrating.
       • Loss of count down number is replaced with a pie chart. Those with older eyesight prefer large numbers. 
       • I am required to take the cover off to turn the unit off. I use to be able to press the on off button twice and leave the cover on.
       • Loss way to have a CONNECTED phone call. ON the ROdecaster 1, I could plug in a TRRS cable and the phone did everything like usual. Now if I want to make a phone call, I HAVE to use Bluetooth. When I plugged in the SC19 cable, the Rodecaster rebooted and the sound out of my phone was unusable. I was somewhat bummed after spending $30 on a cable, that I can't use it to make phone calls on my podcast without using Bluetooth. I need to remember to turn off Bluetooth on the unit as my phone keeps connecting to it. 
       
       Comparing it to Some of the Competition Zoom Podtrak P4

       I refer to this as the swiss army of podcasting. It does everything. It is an interface and a recorder, headphone amp, and jingle player, and it comes in at $200ish. Yes the preamps won't be as steller, but as you heard today the hiss is minimal in some cases. 

       Focusrite Vocaster

       This unit is NOT a recorder, but setting it up and recording into software is super easy. You can send the main outs to a recorder, connect via blue tooth or WIRED TRRS cable. The "2" has blue tooth and output to go to your camera. This one wins the "I need something easy" conversation.

       Rodecaster Pro II

       This is for live streamers who want that audio processing to go out on the video as they record it (no post-production). They want to play sounds/music and have flexible configurations.

       Final Thoughts

       While the Rodecaster Pro II currently drives me a little nuts, I'm not worried. Rod has done a great job communicating with their users and has already made videos on future updates (to calm any fears). So while this current unit has me scratching my head, Rode has demonstrated they listen (the stand attachment on the back of the unit screams "We heard you want your desk back"). 

       Don't Buy This If
       • Nobody is telling you your podcast sounds bad
       • You think this will solve plosives (it won't that is mic technique)
       • "I don't know, it sounds cool" (unless you have $700 in your couch cushion). 
       • You think this will help you grow your audience (again unless you have REALLY bad audio, it's the CONTENT that helps grow the audience). 
       
       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability (via a free app) to text me, send me video, audio, etc. It's unlimited time-shifted one-on-one consulting. It's like having a podcast consultant in your pocket.

       Still unsure? The membership comes with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Rode Rodecaster Pro II

       Rode Rodecaster Pro I

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Focsurite Vocaster

       Sweet Water Podcast Equipment

       Rode SC-15 Cable

       School of Podcasting

       Podcast Studio Pro

       This is episode 834 which originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/834

       ]]>691211ac-9f64-4b61-aa4e-9e828ad5c3bbMon, 04 Jul 2022 04:23:29 -040040:10falsefull834834Podcasts So Good Your Audience Can't Unhear Them w/Tamsen WebsterI LOVE people who make me think and when I started reading the book Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible, I couldn't put it down (and it's now available on Audible). It helps you understand your audience and their main goal. Then you identify how you need to describe what you want them to do in a way that they see their problem in a different way.

       Your message is the words you need to say to an audience about your idea to achieve a particular outcome. Find everything at www.tamsenwebster.com

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       Tamsenwebster.com

       School of Podcasting

       Rodecaster Pro II

       The Proverb Effect: Secrets to Creating Tiny Phrases that Change the World

       Episode 830 About Accepting Compliments

       The Freenoter Podcast

       Walking is Fitness

       Long Story Short Podcast

       ]]>I LOVE people who make me think and when I started reading the book Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible, I couldn't put it down (and it's now available on Audible). It helps you understand your audience and their main goal. Then you identify how you need to describe what you want them to do in a way that they see their problem in a different way.

       Your message is the words you need to say to an audience about your idea to achieve a particular outcome. Find everything at www.tamsenwebster.com

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       Tamsenwebster.com

       School of Podcasting

       Rodecaster Pro II

       The Proverb Effect: Secrets to Creating Tiny Phrases that Change the World

       Episode 830 About Accepting Compliments

       The Freenoter Podcast

       Walking is Fitness

       Long Story Short Podcast

       ]]>0603ec9a-7068-4525-8046-b6c2e0e9e406Sun, 26 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -040049:27falsefull833833Why Should I Care About Your Show?There are times when we need to be able to answer hard questions about our show. Today we talk about some new posts from Apple, and in addition to ABT, we look at why you keep talking yourself out of starting your podcast. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Apple post on Search

       Apple posts on Charts

       The Narrative Gym: Introducing the ABT Framework For Messaging and Communication

       Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio

       Audible

       Samson Q2U

       Episode 758

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>There are times when we need to be able to answer hard questions about our show. Today we talk about some new posts from Apple, and in addition to ABT, we look at why you keep talking yourself out of starting your podcast. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets to bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Apple post on Search

       Apple posts on Charts

       The Narrative Gym: Introducing the ABT Framework For Messaging and Communication

       Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio

       Audible

       Samson Q2U

       Episode 758

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>1c5ed5e2-100b-4ef0-97cc-dbe5ca1925adMon, 20 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -040035:02falsefull832832Should I List My Podcast on All The Directories?I see people who want MORE downloads, and yet they have not listed their show on all the different directories. Why is that? Is this some type of strategy? 

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Participants

       Kim - The Pharmacists Voice

       Bryan - The Relaxed Male

       Ronnie - Dancing is Forbidden am Aqua Teen Hunger Force Exploration

       John - You Were Made for This

       Karen - Just Grow Something

       Mark - The history of North America 

       Matt - The Author Inside You

       Steve - Whiskey Chasers Pod

       Where I Will Be? July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online August 23-26 Podcast Movement, Dallas, TX September9-10, Indie Pod Con 8 Philadelphia, PA Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up-to-date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Question of the Month

       This month's question is "What should I ask for the question of the month?"  Be sure to mention your name, the podcasts' name, and your website. Should I choose to use your question I will mention your show and website when I bring up the question. I may not use all the questions. 

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Speakpipe

       Podinbox

       Tellbee

       School of Podcasting

       Why You Shouldn't Use Free Media Hosting Video

        

       ]]>I see people who want MORE downloads, and yet they have not listed their show on all the different directories. Why is that? Is this some type of strategy? 

       SPONSOR: Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Participants

       Kim - The Pharmacists Voice

       Bryan - The Relaxed Male

       Ronnie - Dancing is Forbidden am Aqua Teen Hunger Force Exploration

       John - You Were Made for This

       Karen - Just Grow Something

       Mark - The history of North America 

       Matt - The Author Inside You

       Steve - Whiskey Chasers Pod

       Where I Will Be? July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online August 23-26 Podcast Movement, Dallas, TX September9-10, Indie Pod Con 8 Philadelphia, PA Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up-to-date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Question of the Month

       This month's question is "What should I ask for the question of the month?"  Be sure to mention your name, the podcasts' name, and your website. Should I choose to use your question I will mention your show and website when I bring up the question. I may not use all the questions. 

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Speakpipe

       Podinbox

       Tellbee

       School of Podcasting

       Why You Shouldn't Use Free Media Hosting Video

        

       ]]>a073bd2a-58c4-4f8f-9844-b317c53e1716Mon, 13 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -040056:46falsefull831831Focusing on the big picture when your audience is right in front of youToday I am back from Podfest with some insights to share, tips on meeting your audience, and thoughts on the interfaces from Focusrite. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Why We Often Get Sick at Events

       Because we get to see people we never get to see, these events take on a "one of a kind" atmosphere, and the feat of missing out (and to a certain level, that is true). When we start to "push through" we start to jeopardize our health (even without a pandemic). 

       We get up early to catch flights, do all sorts of walking through airports and hotels, consume things that may not be considered, "Healthy" under-hydrate, and repeat many of these steps for the rest of the conference. 

       Then we go home and blame the plane. 

       I've been doing almost nothing all week trying to get my health back. While I might've missed a fun story staying up later talking with friends, anything I missed would not equal the moment I lost by putting everything on hold. 

       We all love to have fun and see friends, but for me, I'm going to be a bit more responsible in the future.

       Clearing Up Some Confusion That I Heard At Podfest

       DOWNLOADS UPON FOLLOW When someone follows your show in Apple, and you have three episodes, you will NOT get three downloads if someone follows you (they only automatically download the last episode. If they want the other two episodes, they need to manually download them.

       LISTEN NOTES STATS

       While this sounds impressive to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasters on Listen notes." Until you read that this is based on people listening on Listen notes and 3rd party data. As every media host I know has asked Apple for listening data (and been turned down), that is not the information that are using. I need to reach out to them to find out exactly what they are using, but to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasts (on listen notes) is like me saying, "I'm the #1 podcast (of shows with a host named Dave who live in Akron Ohio). 

       I'm not trying to be "Dave Jackson - Dream Crusher" but to help people focus on more important things that will result in larger downloads (I call it, "their audience."). 

       How To Accept Compliments From Your Audience

       Many podcasters (including myself) are introverts. Consequently, having someone come up and give you compliments may make you feel uneasy. In the past, I would deflect, or make a joke, and my ex-wife said, "Would you just say Thank You!" and she was right. 

       Here are some tips:

       • Don't correct them
       • Don't downgrade (You're GREAT, and you answer, "It was OK).
       • Don't Brag - Yes, I AM AWESOME
       
       

       Instead, say: Thank You,

       Thank you very much.

       That means a lot to me.

       That's very nice of you to say. 

       Don't forget you have a listener in front of you, after you accept the compliment ask them for feedback so you can hear what is working, and hopefully get some feedback on how to improve.

       Lastly, don't forget to ask them if they want to take a selfie as they will be happy to share it on social. 

       Focusrite Vocaster Two Review

       If you're looking for an interface to get your microphone into your computer, this device makes it simple (there is a tool to automatically set your gain). There is some subtle built-in processing to tweak your audio.

       What you heard today is me using the Shure SM7B WITHOUT ANY KIND OF CLOUDLIFTER or FETHEAD. It has plenty of drive.

       You can plug your phone into it via a TRRS input (with built-in mix-minus).  There is also an output jack to feed the audio into your camera which eliminates the whole, "Delay issue" that comes with some video cameras. 

       ]]>Today I am back from Podfest with some insights to share, tips on meeting your audience, and thoughts on the interfaces from Focusrite. 

       Focusrite: The Vocaster Series Made For Podcasters

       • AutoGain - Easily set your levels with the click of a button, with more than enough gain on tap (70dB) – no booster is needed
       • Enhance - Four podcaster-approved voice presets bring out the best in any voice
       • Mute - Silence the mic with the touch of a button - don’t let unexpected interruptions get in the way of recording
       • Connect your phone - Record phone calls, high-quality music, or other audio from your device, seamlessly 
       • Record to a camera - Plug in your camera and record directly to its memory card 
       • Loopback - Stream calls or any other audio you can think of from your computer with two sets of stereo loopback
       • Included software - Hindenburg Lite to record, three months of SquadCast Pro + Video to bring in your guests, and six months of Acast Influencer to publish, you’re ready to get your show out there
       • Learn more at: Focusrite.com/Vocaster 
       
       Why We Often Get Sick at Events

       Because we get to see people we never get to see, these events take on a "one of a kind" atmosphere, and the feat of missing out (and to a certain level, that is true). When we start to "push through" we start to jeopardize our health (even without a pandemic). 

       We get up early to catch flights, do all sorts of walking through airports and hotels, consume things that may not be considered, "Healthy" under-hydrate, and repeat many of these steps for the rest of the conference. 

       Then we go home and blame the plane. 

       I've been doing almost nothing all week trying to get my health back. While I might've missed a fun story staying up later talking with friends, anything I missed would not equal the moment I lost by putting everything on hold. 

       We all love to have fun and see friends, but for me, I'm going to be a bit more responsible in the future.

       Clearing Up Some Confusion That I Heard At Podfest

       DOWNLOADS UPON FOLLOW When someone follows your show in Apple, and you have three episodes, you will NOT get three downloads if someone follows you (they only automatically download the last episode. If they want the other two episodes, they need to manually download them.

       LISTEN NOTES STATS

       While this sounds impressive to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasters on Listen notes." Until you read that this is based on people listening on Listen notes and 3rd party data. As every media host I know has asked Apple for listening data (and been turned down), that is not the information that are using. I need to reach out to them to find out exactly what they are using, but to say, "I'm in the top 1% of podcasts (on listen notes) is like me saying, "I'm the #1 podcast (of shows with a host named Dave who live in Akron Ohio). 

       I'm not trying to be "Dave Jackson - Dream Crusher" but to help people focus on more important things that will result in larger downloads (I call it, "their audience."). 

       How To Accept Compliments From Your Audience

       Many podcasters (including myself) are introverts. Consequently, having someone come up and give you compliments may make you feel uneasy. In the past, I would deflect, or make a joke, and my ex-wife said, "Would you just say Thank You!" and she was right. 

       Here are some tips:

       • Don't correct them
       • Don't downgrade (You're GREAT, and you answer, "It was OK).
       • Don't Brag - Yes, I AM AWESOME
       
       

       Instead, say: Thank You,

       Thank you very much.

       That means a lot to me.

       That's very nice of you to say. 

       Don't forget you have a listener in front of you, after you accept the compliment ask them for feedback so you can hear what is working, and hopefully get some feedback on how to improve.

       Lastly, don't forget to ask them if they want to take a selfie as they will be happy to share it on social. 

       Focusrite Vocaster Two Review

       If you're looking for an interface to get your microphone into your computer, this device makes it simple (there is a tool to automatically set your gain). There is some subtle built-in processing to tweak your audio.

       What you heard today is me using the Shure SM7B WITHOUT ANY KIND OF CLOUDLIFTER or FETHEAD. It has plenty of drive.

       You can plug your phone into it via a TRRS input (with built-in mix-minus).  There is also an output jack to feed the audio into your camera which eliminates the whole, "Delay issue" that comes with some video cameras. 

       ]]>85269941-c38d-4fa3-90d2-78f012d0cd0dMon, 06 Jun 2022 04:00:00 -040037:09falsefull830830How a Travel Podcast Survived Covid with Mark BolognaMark has been working on his podcast Beyond Bourbon St for years. He had 14 thousand of people in his Facebook Group. He had just gone over 1 million downloads and secure a publisher for a book on New Orleans.

       And then a pandemic stopped everything. Today you will hear how Mark pivoted without losing his audience, and how he lost 90% of his sponsors without losing his mind. 

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Everything Was Going Good Until it Wasn't

       As many of his partners relied on tourists, when there are no tourists, the result is no partners (or at least 90% less). 

       In this discussion, you will hear 

       • How Did Mark Survive Covid
       • How Mark Came Up With His Prices
       • How Does Mark Find Partners?
       • Secrets of a Good Community
       • 1 Million Downloads
       • How He Got a Book Deal
       • Podcast Growth Insights
       • Why Do We Struggle to Promote?
       • Keeping Your Sanity
       
       

       Check out Mark at beyondbourbonst.com and check out his book Beyond Bourbon St.: An Insider's Guide to New Orleans on Amazon (aff).

       New Podcast Launched From a School of Podcasting Member

       The tools and concepts of Quality are powerful instruments to make things better--products, processes, and services. This podcast explores those ideas plus concepts of psychology, social and cultural norms, strategy, and business to strengthen the capability of professionals motivated to make things better--the Quality Warriors.

       wayofthequalitywarrior.com

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

       ]]>Mark has been working on his podcast Beyond Bourbon St for years. He had 14 thousand of people in his Facebook Group. He had just gone over 1 million downloads and secure a publisher for a book on New Orleans.

       And then a pandemic stopped everything. Today you will hear how Mark pivoted without losing his audience, and how he lost 90% of his sponsors without losing his mind. 

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Everything Was Going Good Until it Wasn't

       As many of his partners relied on tourists, when there are no tourists, the result is no partners (or at least 90% less). 

       In this discussion, you will hear 

       • How Did Mark Survive Covid
       • How Mark Came Up With His Prices
       • How Does Mark Find Partners?
       • Secrets of a Good Community
       • 1 Million Downloads
       • How He Got a Book Deal
       • Podcast Growth Insights
       • Why Do We Struggle to Promote?
       • Keeping Your Sanity
       
       

       Check out Mark at beyondbourbonst.com and check out his book Beyond Bourbon St.: An Insider's Guide to New Orleans on Amazon (aff).

       New Podcast Launched From a School of Podcasting Member

       The tools and concepts of Quality are powerful instruments to make things better--products, processes, and services. This podcast explores those ideas plus concepts of psychology, social and cultural norms, strategy, and business to strengthen the capability of professionals motivated to make things better--the Quality Warriors.

       wayofthequalitywarrior.com

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

       ]]>11727cf9-5b23-4852-a6c9-2f34ab631199Mon, 30 May 2022 04:00:00 -040045:18falsefull829829It's Not the Format - It's the Connection with Vincent PuglieseI've known  Vincent a few years and we always bump into each other at podcast events. Scott Johnson had mentioned his episode "Doing It Wrong Right From The Start." So I looked into it, and I loved that Incent was having success and by some standards "breaking the rules" of podcasting. That sounded interesting, and that was just the start.
       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       The Wealth of Connection

       The Wealth of Connection is now one of my favorite books. It's filled with lessons and stories which leads to an entertaining read that leaves you thinking. 

       Ignoring Standard Practices: Vincent Pugliese

       Check out Vincent Pugliese's at totallifefreedom.com

       Vincent did a TON of DAILY podcasts and released them to a private group before doing any podcasts for the general public. 

       He has no intro or outro music. 

       His only branding is his website which is also the name of his podcast Total Life Freedom. 

       Vincent is doing what I always advise my clients to do. Focus on the reception - not the broadcast. 

       He uses the "notes" app on his phone (again, it doesn't need to be fancy).

       He focused on serving his audience, not on monetization.

       He tried doing seasons and it just about wiped him out. So he focused on creating a podcast that works FOR HIM. It makes no sense to do a podcast that drains you to the point you don't want to do it. 

       Vincent is always looking for the next challenge, and if it doesn't work, you take what you've learned and use it on the next challenge.

       When you start something, your launch timeframe is not 5 months. It's 5 YEARS, and for the next five years, you spend time moving that project forward.

       VIncent also shares hits thoughts on impostor syndrome.

       Check out Vincent at totallifefreedom.com and his book on Amazon and Audible (aff link)

       Because of My Podcast: Kamuela Kaneshiro

       Because of my podcast, I was able to improve my writing effectively monetize my podcast through books, inspire podcast listeners to embrace their heritage and not be embarrassed for who they are, and bring broken families together

       Check out his show at http://www.LegendsFromThePacific.com

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month.  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be:

       May 26-29 :Podfest Multimedia Expo   Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Vincent in the Paradise City VIdeo (do not blink, this link takes you to the 2:04)

        

       ]]>I've known  Vincent a few years and we always bump into each other at podcast events. Scott Johnson had mentioned his episode "Doing It Wrong Right From The Start." So I looked into it, and I loved that Incent was having success and by some standards "breaking the rules" of podcasting. That sounded interesting, and that was just the start.
       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       The Wealth of Connection

       The Wealth of Connection is now one of my favorite books. It's filled with lessons and stories which leads to an entertaining read that leaves you thinking. 

       Ignoring Standard Practices: Vincent Pugliese

       Check out Vincent Pugliese's at totallifefreedom.com

       Vincent did a TON of DAILY podcasts and released them to a private group before doing any podcasts for the general public. 

       He has no intro or outro music. 

       His only branding is his website which is also the name of his podcast Total Life Freedom. 

       Vincent is doing what I always advise my clients to do. Focus on the reception - not the broadcast. 

       He uses the "notes" app on his phone (again, it doesn't need to be fancy).

       He focused on serving his audience, not on monetization.

       He tried doing seasons and it just about wiped him out. So he focused on creating a podcast that works FOR HIM. It makes no sense to do a podcast that drains you to the point you don't want to do it. 

       Vincent is always looking for the next challenge, and if it doesn't work, you take what you've learned and use it on the next challenge.

       When you start something, your launch timeframe is not 5 months. It's 5 YEARS, and for the next five years, you spend time moving that project forward.

       VIncent also shares hits thoughts on impostor syndrome.

       Check out Vincent at totallifefreedom.com and his book on Amazon and Audible (aff link)

       Because of My Podcast: Kamuela Kaneshiro

       Because of my podcast, I was able to improve my writing effectively monetize my podcast through books, inspire podcast listeners to embrace their heritage and not be embarrassed for who they are, and bring broken families together

       Check out his show at http://www.LegendsFromThePacific.com

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month.  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be:

       May 26-29 :Podfest Multimedia Expo   Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Vincent in the Paradise City VIdeo (do not blink, this link takes you to the 2:04)

        

       ]]>d72490af-f43d-497b-8acf-d89566badcf6Mon, 23 May 2022 04:00:00 -040046:32falsefull828828Danny Peña: Keep it Fun and Master Your CraftDanny Peña is one of my favorite guests. We started his story on episode 506, got an update on episode 633 and now he has a ton of "Because of My Podcast" stories for episode 827.

       Danny is an award-winning, 2015 Podcaster Hall of Fame inductee and one of the hosts of Gamertag Radio. He is also the Game Editorial Lead at G4.

       Gamertag Radio (GTR) is an independent online gaming website dedicated to the gaming community that was founded in 2005, and intended to help to unite all gamers. Over the past few years, GTR has grown from a small website to one of the largest and most respected gaming information sites on the Internet. Every week GTR records and distributes new episodic content recapping the news of the past week, including discussions about what is happening in the online gaming community along with interviews and a weekly custom soundtrack highlighting up & coming Hip Hop artists.

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       In This Episode You Will Hear

       How Danny continues to take advantage of opportunities, which then lead to more opportunities.

       How Danny ended up on a billboard in Time's Square

       How he got to interview Keanu Reeves

       How his persistence lead to scoring a large guest (Reggie Fils-Aime).

       His conversational interviews based on his curiosity lead to six news outlets promoting his interview.

       Reggie insisted Danny interview him at a large event as part of the opening keynote. 

       Danny once had access to a new Microsoft product MONTHS before anyone else. Instead of enjoying the new item, he allowed one of his listeners to enjoy it and the video went viral.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Where I Will Be:

       May 26-29 :Podfest Multimedia Expo   Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Podcast Launch Checklist

       You want to start a podcast, but you're not sure where to start. This free checklist outlines which step to take first and why.

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/checklist

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Building a Better Dave - recreational Outrage

       ]]>Danny Peña is one of my favorite guests. We started his story on episode 506, got an update on episode 633 and now he has a ton of "Because of My Podcast" stories for episode 827.

       Danny is an award-winning, 2015 Podcaster Hall of Fame inductee and one of the hosts of Gamertag Radio. He is also the Game Editorial Lead at G4.

       Gamertag Radio (GTR) is an independent online gaming website dedicated to the gaming community that was founded in 2005, and intended to help to unite all gamers. Over the past few years, GTR has grown from a small website to one of the largest and most respected gaming information sites on the Internet. Every week GTR records and distributes new episodic content recapping the news of the past week, including discussions about what is happening in the online gaming community along with interviews and a weekly custom soundtrack highlighting up & coming Hip Hop artists.

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       In This Episode You Will Hear

       How Danny continues to take advantage of opportunities, which then lead to more opportunities.

       How Danny ended up on a billboard in Time's Square

       How he got to interview Keanu Reeves

       How his persistence lead to scoring a large guest (Reggie Fils-Aime).

       His conversational interviews based on his curiosity lead to six news outlets promoting his interview.

       Reggie insisted Danny interview him at a large event as part of the opening keynote. 

       Danny once had access to a new Microsoft product MONTHS before anyone else. Instead of enjoying the new item, he allowed one of his listeners to enjoy it and the video went viral.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Where I Will Be:

       May 26-29 :Podfest Multimedia Expo   Orlando, Fl. July 19-20: How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online Oct 20-22 Erma Bombeck Writers’ Workshop Dayton, Oh For the most up to date itinerary, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Podcast Launch Checklist

       You want to start a podcast, but you're not sure where to start. This free checklist outlines which step to take first and why.

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/checklist

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Building a Better Dave - recreational Outrage

       ]]>1ecc2217-7da8-4595-af81-c56ff1096b04Mon, 16 May 2022 04:00:00 -040045:58falsefull8278279 Tips to Make Your Podcast Binge worthyWe all want to grow our audience. We want to become their favorite show so they just want more. In some cases, you may actually be someone's favorite podcast and they would listen to another episode except you've made it hard to binge. So today we look at nine tips to help your show be Bingeworthy.
       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Make You Sound Amazing
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
         Making Your Podcast Binge-Worthy

       Something to think about: What are you offering your audience that they should spend their time-consuming? Not just one but several episodes. That statement is a little scary.

       1. It has to be GOOD, actually very good.

       2. Create click-attracting titles. I use a tool called Headline Studio

       3. Get your audience asking, What Happens Next??

       4. Give them multiple points of insight.

       5. Make it EASY to Binge (by making it easy to subscribe/follow). See this plugin

       6. Add an element of Fear of Missing Out (FOMO).

       7. Get Your Best Content In Front of Your Audience

       8. Teasing Your Audience 

       9. Have a Show that Walks Through a Process

       Make your content relevant. Be YOURSELF. 

       Free Zoom Reduces Amount of Time

       Check out Squadcast(my favorite). If you must use something free there is zencastr and cleanfeed. You can just upgrade your zoom account ($15)

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Use THIS LINK to get a discount   Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Mentioned In This Episode

       Siskel and Ebert

       Howard Stern Private Parts

       Link Whisperer Plugin

       Podcast Branding.co

       Jordan Harbinger Start Page

       Libsyn.com Media Hosting (use the coupon code sopfree to get up to 2 months free)

       The Messengers Podcast

       The movie "The Messengers: A Podcast Story"

       Presonus Revelator Dynamic microphone

       Why Free Media Hosts Don't Work on YouTube

       ]]>We all want to grow our audience. We want to become their favorite show so they just want more. In some cases, you may actually be someone's favorite podcast and they would listen to another episode except you've made it hard to binge. So today we look at nine tips to help your show be Bingeworthy.
       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces Make You Sound Amazing
       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
         Making Your Podcast Binge-Worthy

       Something to think about: What are you offering your audience that they should spend their time-consuming? Not just one but several episodes. That statement is a little scary.

       1. It has to be GOOD, actually very good.

       2. Create click-attracting titles. I use a tool called Headline Studio

       3. Get your audience asking, What Happens Next??

       4. Give them multiple points of insight.

       5. Make it EASY to Binge (by making it easy to subscribe/follow). See this plugin

       6. Add an element of Fear of Missing Out (FOMO).

       7. Get Your Best Content In Front of Your Audience

       8. Teasing Your Audience 

       9. Have a Show that Walks Through a Process

       Make your content relevant. Be YOURSELF. 

       Free Zoom Reduces Amount of Time

       Check out Squadcast(my favorite). If you must use something free there is zencastr and cleanfeed. You can just upgrade your zoom account ($15)

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Use THIS LINK to get a discount   Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start Mentioned In This Episode

       Siskel and Ebert

       Howard Stern Private Parts

       Link Whisperer Plugin

       Podcast Branding.co

       Jordan Harbinger Start Page

       Libsyn.com Media Hosting (use the coupon code sopfree to get up to 2 months free)

       The Messengers Podcast

       The movie "The Messengers: A Podcast Story"

       Presonus Revelator Dynamic microphone

       Why Free Media Hosts Don't Work on YouTube

       ]]>02361e4d-b327-4609-b1f3-ab8988a8c7c1Mon, 09 May 2022 12:23:53 -040038:58falsefull826826Opportunities Wait on the Other Side of Your FearsI met Connie at an event two years ago. I see her at a conference two years later and ask if she has any "Because of my podcast ____" stories. She not only has one, she has quite a few (TV, Radio, and more). So listen to what can happen when you find someone who can help you avoid the common podcasting mistakes. 

       Connect With Connie at

       conniealbers.com

       Connie's book, "Parenting Beyond the Rules: Raising Teens with Confidence and Joy."

       Connie's Podcast, "Equipped To Be."

       SPONSOR

       Focusrite Interfaces

       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Mentioned In This Episode

       Live Well and Flourish Podcast

       ATR2100 Microphone

       Rodecaster Pro

       Neweer Ring Light

       Start Ugly Book

       Nervous about podcasting? Check out Podcast Baby Steps (free course)

       Nervous about Podcast Gear check out this free webinar (no email address needed)

       Trypodpage.com (a great way to make a podcast site). You can learn podpage for free at www.learnpodpage.com

       Libsyn.com media hosting (use the coupon code sopfree) 

       #Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month.  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be: Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online July 19-20 For the most up to date list see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>I met Connie at an event two years ago. I see her at a conference two years later and ask if she has any "Because of my podcast ____" stories. She not only has one, she has quite a few (TV, Radio, and more). So listen to what can happen when you find someone who can help you avoid the common podcasting mistakes. 

       Connect With Connie at

       conniealbers.com

       Connie's book, "Parenting Beyond the Rules: Raising Teens with Confidence and Joy."

       Connie's Podcast, "Equipped To Be."

       SPONSOR

       Focusrite Interfaces

       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Mentioned In This Episode

       Live Well and Flourish Podcast

       ATR2100 Microphone

       Rodecaster Pro

       Neweer Ring Light

       Start Ugly Book

       Nervous about podcasting? Check out Podcast Baby Steps (free course)

       Nervous about Podcast Gear check out this free webinar (no email address needed)

       Trypodpage.com (a great way to make a podcast site). You can learn podpage for free at www.learnpodpage.com

       Libsyn.com media hosting (use the coupon code sopfree) 

       #Question of the Month Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month.  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be: Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando How to Make Real Money Podcasting Online July 19-20 For the most up to date list see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/where

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>017f017f-bf74-45a1-ab52-4a05f8e29497Mon, 02 May 2022 04:00:00 -040056:35falsefull825825Do You Have Time To Listen to ANOTHER Podcast?We all think, "just make good content and promote your show" but as podcasts become more mainstream and the average listener now consumes multiple episodes a week, do they have room for YOUR show? I asked my audience what their status is. If you found a really good show, would you have to "bump" one you are listening to now?

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces

       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Question of the Month Answers

       You find a show that's great. Do you have enough time to add an additional show to your listening time?

       Contributors

       Steve - Stevestewart.me and Podcast Editor Academy Jim - Home Gadget Geeks and Ask the Podcast Coach Mark - History of North America  Bill - Bill Watches Movies  Dave - Walking is Fitness  York - Poetic Earthlings  Arnie- Sports History Network 

       Summary:

       In general, we are all "out of time, " yet if something good comes along, we seem to make room. We also have different phases of life, and some of the shows we listen to take breaks and we find new shows. 

       The bottom line is there is only so much time to listen and the shows that deliver the most value will be heard. 

       I Heard it On a Podcast

       No Agenda Show 25% of People Get Their News From Podcasts

       https://www.noagendashow.net/listen/1444 (1:25:59)

       What Was That Like - {Podcasting is Therapeutic )

       Podcasting 2.0 Gets $4000 Donation

       Cleaning Up Audio With Descript

       Check out this video that shows how to clean up your audio in Descript

       Mentioned in this Show

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Episode 752 - Audio Editing as a Business

       Podcast Editor Academy

       Spotify is Now Offering Video via Anchor (kind of)

       Descript Audio Editing Tool

       Focusrite Interfaces

       ]]>We all think, "just make good content and promote your show" but as podcasts become more mainstream and the average listener now consumes multiple episodes a week, do they have room for YOUR show? I asked my audience what their status is. If you found a really good show, would you have to "bump" one you are listening to now?

       Sponsor: Focusrite Interfaces

       • Focusrite has been at the forefront of audio technology since 1985
       • Focusrite interfaces are great for all content creators
       • Scarlett is the world’s best-selling range of audio interfaces with over 4.5 million sold to date
       • Easy to use
       • Great sound quality
       • More info can be found at: www.focusrite.com/podcasters   
       
       Question of the Month Answers

       You find a show that's great. Do you have enough time to add an additional show to your listening time?

       Contributors

       Steve - Stevestewart.me and Podcast Editor Academy Jim - Home Gadget Geeks and Ask the Podcast Coach Mark - History of North America  Bill - Bill Watches Movies  Dave - Walking is Fitness  York - Poetic Earthlings  Arnie- Sports History Network 

       Summary:

       In general, we are all "out of time, " yet if something good comes along, we seem to make room. We also have different phases of life, and some of the shows we listen to take breaks and we find new shows. 

       The bottom line is there is only so much time to listen and the shows that deliver the most value will be heard. 

       I Heard it On a Podcast

       No Agenda Show 25% of People Get Their News From Podcasts

       https://www.noagendashow.net/listen/1444 (1:25:59)

       What Was That Like - {Podcasting is Therapeutic )

       Podcasting 2.0 Gets $4000 Donation

       Cleaning Up Audio With Descript

       Check out this video that shows how to clean up your audio in Descript

       Mentioned in this Show

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Episode 752 - Audio Editing as a Business

       Podcast Editor Academy

       Spotify is Now Offering Video via Anchor (kind of)

       Descript Audio Editing Tool

       Focusrite Interfaces

       ]]>4219dd7c-5bbc-444c-971b-533c8403604dMon, 25 Apr 2022 04:05:00 -040038:06falsefull824824Is Dynamic Content Right For You?After seeing the podcasting space gear up for more advertising (something I'm not thrilled with) more media hosts are developing dynamic content. So what is dynamic content, do you need it, and how do you use it?
       What is Dynamic Content?

       Dynamic content is content that your media host inserts into your mp3 file at spots you select. This is often used for ads. In some spaces, people confuse "Dynamic Ad Insertion" and "Dynamic Content" as being the same thing. They are not. While you can use Dynamic Content, it does NOT have to be ads. It can be anything that is time-sensitive. 

       Who Offers This Technology?

       Libsyn.com (LibsynPro solution - full disclosure I work there). Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month.

       Captivate has an impressive dynamic content tool that even updates your episode description when you swap out content. Podbean has pod ads https://podads.podbean.com/ Blubrry has a pro version Red Circle (500 weekly downloads) RSS.com (10,000 downloads a day)

       Pros of Dynamic Content
       • No more outdated time-based content
       • The ability to sell your back catalog*
       
       Cons of Dynamic Content
       • You really need to pay attention to volume levels (I'm using WLM Plus plugin)
       • To sell your back episodes you need to go through your whole back episodes and insert spots.
       • Updating old files might be trickier
       • You need to consider how to lead in and come out of dynamic content.
       
       Focusrite Interfaces

       Go to www.focusrite.com/podcasters

       Unlimited Time Shifted One-On-One Consulting

       I've added unlimited time-shifted consulting that can be between you and me. If you need someone to stand by you and guide you through the pitfalls of podcasting, you can join worry-free with a money-back guarantee at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       I Heard It On a Podcast

       Disney got all sorts of deals when they built the location in Florida. On the No Agenda show they explain that the reason employees are known as "Castmembers" is to get around Florida Labor laws. It's at the 2 hours and25 minute mark.

       Apple Charts Criteria

       I've said for years that ratings and reviews do NOTHING but provide social proof. You want people to ask people to follow you and share your show with a friend.

       see post from Apple

       Where I Will Be

       Where I Will Be: Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month. 

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

       ]]>After seeing the podcasting space gear up for more advertising (something I'm not thrilled with) more media hosts are developing dynamic content. So what is dynamic content, do you need it, and how do you use it?
       What is Dynamic Content?

       Dynamic content is content that your media host inserts into your mp3 file at spots you select. This is often used for ads. In some spaces, people confuse "Dynamic Ad Insertion" and "Dynamic Content" as being the same thing. They are not. While you can use Dynamic Content, it does NOT have to be ads. It can be anything that is time-sensitive. 

       Who Offers This Technology?

       Libsyn.com (LibsynPro solution - full disclosure I work there). Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month.

       Captivate has an impressive dynamic content tool that even updates your episode description when you swap out content. Podbean has pod ads https://podads.podbean.com/ Blubrry has a pro version Red Circle (500 weekly downloads) RSS.com (10,000 downloads a day)

       Pros of Dynamic Content
       • No more outdated time-based content
       • The ability to sell your back catalog*
       
       Cons of Dynamic Content
       • You really need to pay attention to volume levels (I'm using WLM Plus plugin)
       • To sell your back episodes you need to go through your whole back episodes and insert spots.
       • Updating old files might be trickier
       • You need to consider how to lead in and come out of dynamic content.
       
       Focusrite Interfaces

       Go to www.focusrite.com/podcasters

       Unlimited Time Shifted One-On-One Consulting

       I've added unlimited time-shifted consulting that can be between you and me. If you need someone to stand by you and guide you through the pitfalls of podcasting, you can join worry-free with a money-back guarantee at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       I Heard It On a Podcast

       Disney got all sorts of deals when they built the location in Florida. On the No Agenda show they explain that the reason employees are known as "Castmembers" is to get around Florida Labor laws. It's at the 2 hours and25 minute mark.

       Apple Charts Criteria

       I've said for years that ratings and reviews do NOTHING but provide social proof. You want people to ask people to follow you and share your show with a friend.

       see post from Apple

       Where I Will Be

       Where I Will Be: Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your podcast? Go to Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Check out the question and share your thoughts and insights. I assemble these for the last episode of the month. 

       This show is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

       ]]>18a50265-403a-460a-9c90-33fae8bc08e2Mon, 18 Apr 2022 04:05:00 -040028:05falsefull823823Flying Past Your Fear of Podcasting With Mark HasaraMark was a US air force Pilot, Speaker, Author, and Entrepreneur, but was hesitant to start his podcast. Today we talk about what was stopping him, and how his podcast is helping to promote his Wall Pilot business. 

       We also hear about some discouraging statistics from Chartable about podcast cross-promote (courtesy of Evo Terra). 

       Spotify may be working on a "Tik Tok meets Tinder" discovery tool. I'm not sure that is going to work. 

       I introduce a new segment "I Heard it on a podcast" this time it was the Moe Factz show with Moe and Adam Curry

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Mark Hasara Website

       Mark's Lessons From the Cockpit Show

       in Apple, Google, Spotify

       Wall PIlot

       Video of Spotify Discovery Tool

       Fountain App

       Castamatic app

       New Podcast Apps

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your show, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question and answer the question of the month and be sure to mention your show and website. Do it now!

       Join the School of Podcasting

       In addition to the step-by-step tutorials, group coaching, and podcasting mastermind group, I've now added show audits and unlimited time-shifted one-on-one coaching. 

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Mark was a US air force Pilot, Speaker, Author, and Entrepreneur, but was hesitant to start his podcast. Today we talk about what was stopping him, and how his podcast is helping to promote his Wall Pilot business. 

       We also hear about some discouraging statistics from Chartable about podcast cross-promote (courtesy of Evo Terra). 

       Spotify may be working on a "Tik Tok meets Tinder" discovery tool. I'm not sure that is going to work. 

       I introduce a new segment "I Heard it on a podcast" this time it was the Moe Factz show with Moe and Adam Curry

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Mark Hasara Website

       Mark's Lessons From the Cockpit Show

       in Apple, Google, Spotify

       Wall PIlot

       Video of Spotify Discovery Tool

       Fountain App

       Castamatic app

       New Podcast Apps

       Question of the Month

       Want some free exposure for your show, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question and answer the question of the month and be sure to mention your show and website. Do it now!

       Join the School of Podcasting

       In addition to the step-by-step tutorials, group coaching, and podcasting mastermind group, I've now added show audits and unlimited time-shifted one-on-one coaching. 

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one-on-one quick-fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>21527d89-7a09-4f9d-ba4b-f740e16fe454Mon, 11 Apr 2022 04:05:00 -040037:15falsefull822822Back From Podcast Movement with Free Stuff, Cool Apps, and a Worried MindPodcast Movement was a well-oiled machine as always where the hallway meetings were in some cases better than the sessions. I found some cool stuff, created some free resources, and have worries about the future. 
       Quicknotes From This Episode

       Don't forget the Book Launch Webinar Next Week.

       Have a conversation with me on Volley (aff link)

       Check out Dave's new FREE Classes

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible (book)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       The Three Main Players in Podcasting

       I've said in the past that a podcast needs three things to survive podcasting (support, health, and attitude). The podcast industry needs to make sure as it moves forward to take steps that benefit all three main players. Who are the main players?

       • The podcasting companies (media hosts, agencies, etc)
       • The podcaster (creators).
       • The Listener (you).
       
       

       If we don't keep all of them happy (especially the listener) we all lose. 

       A New Great App For Community and Coaching

       I discovered the Volley app (aff link) listening to a podcast on the way home from Podcast Movement. I tried it out, and it is SO COOL. Especially for those people who hate Facebook. It's like Loom, Zoom, and Slack had a baby. If you want to build a community, this makes it easy as its available on Android, iOs, Mac, and PC. You can have group discussions in public, or in private as well as private one-on-one sessions (where each member's conversations are organized together).

       You can communicate via:

       • Video
       • Screenshare
       • Audio
       • Text
       • Gif
       
       

       It's a pretty amazing app. There is only ONE FEATURE I REALLY HATE.

       It's free. I am interviewing one of the co-founders, and he insures me they will monetize eventually but are (for now) working on their feature set. I just hate to build on something free. With this in mind, I'm using it in conjunction with my Facebook group instead of replacing it.

       I look forward to having time-shifted video/audio conversations with my students.

       You can learn Volley by joining my Volley Space on learning Volley (I know how meta can you get?)

       ]]>Podcast Movement was a well-oiled machine as always where the hallway meetings were in some cases better than the sessions. I found some cool stuff, created some free resources, and have worries about the future. 
       Quicknotes From This Episode

       Don't forget the Book Launch Webinar Next Week.

       Have a conversation with me on Volley (aff link)

       Check out Dave's new FREE Classes

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible (book)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       The Three Main Players in Podcasting

       I've said in the past that a podcast needs three things to survive podcasting (support, health, and attitude). The podcast industry needs to make sure as it moves forward to take steps that benefit all three main players. Who are the main players?

       • The podcasting companies (media hosts, agencies, etc)
       • The podcaster (creators).
       • The Listener (you).
       
       

       If we don't keep all of them happy (especially the listener) we all lose. 

       A New Great App For Community and Coaching

       I discovered the Volley app (aff link) listening to a podcast on the way home from Podcast Movement. I tried it out, and it is SO COOL. Especially for those people who hate Facebook. It's like Loom, Zoom, and Slack had a baby. If you want to build a community, this makes it easy as its available on Android, iOs, Mac, and PC. You can have group discussions in public, or in private as well as private one-on-one sessions (where each member's conversations are organized together).

       You can communicate via:

       • Video
       • Screenshare
       • Audio
       • Text
       • Gif
       
       

       It's a pretty amazing app. There is only ONE FEATURE I REALLY HATE.

       It's free. I am interviewing one of the co-founders, and he insures me they will monetize eventually but are (for now) working on their feature set. I just hate to build on something free. With this in mind, I'm using it in conjunction with my Facebook group instead of replacing it.

       I look forward to having time-shifted video/audio conversations with my students.

       You can learn Volley by joining my Volley Space on learning Volley (I know how meta can you get?)

       ]]>269d97e8-a8b7-41f9-9b05-7a321417a2f2Mon, 04 Apr 2022 04:30:00 -040047:31falsefull821821What Keeps You Going When Your Podcast Isn't Growing?The excitement of starting a podcast can really fuel podcasters. You stats to start to grow, but eventually, they may level off. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing?

       Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda

       Check out Fred's shows Podcast Reporter (me on Fred's show)

       The Struggling Biz show

       March 29th is the National Day for Vietnam Veterans. Thanks for your service Fred!

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 5th April 5th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Secrets Course

        

       Thanks to Those Who Participated in This Month's Question

       Kyle - The Intergalactic BoomBox - podcasting 2.0

       Mark - History of North America - love of topic - working with son

       Colby - The Guardians Ghost Podcast going solo, passion

       Heather - Watching Netflix Without You  and the Politics free Podcast enjoys time with brother, serving audience to get into a better mood, feedback

       Dan - Coffee and Space  - Loves having conversations

       Scott - What Was That Like? https://whatwasthatlike.com/ - Zoom out and see your growth

       Timothy - Create Art Podcast  and Find a Podcast About - is leaving a legacy

       Matt - Rogue Retirement Lounge -  Loves the podcast 

       Brandon - Start 100K Podcast   Feels his information is needed and doesn’t want people to feel stupid. 

       April Question of the Month

       Listen to hear this month's question of the month and then leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcastingcom/question 

       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 6th April 6th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Secrets Course

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Bad Idea Jeans

       ]]>The excitement of starting a podcast can really fuel podcasters. You stats to start to grow, but eventually, they may level off. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing?

       Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda

       Check out Fred's shows Podcast Reporter (me on Fred's show)

       The Struggling Biz show

       March 29th is the National Day for Vietnam Veterans. Thanks for your service Fred!

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 5th April 5th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Secrets Course

        

       Thanks to Those Who Participated in This Month's Question

       Kyle - The Intergalactic BoomBox - podcasting 2.0

       Mark - History of North America - love of topic - working with son

       Colby - The Guardians Ghost Podcast going solo, passion

       Heather - Watching Netflix Without You  and the Politics free Podcast enjoys time with brother, serving audience to get into a better mood, feedback

       Dan - Coffee and Space  - Loves having conversations

       Scott - What Was That Like? https://whatwasthatlike.com/ - Zoom out and see your growth

       Timothy - Create Art Podcast  and Find a Podcast About - is leaving a legacy

       Matt - Rogue Retirement Lounge -  Loves the podcast 

       Brandon - Start 100K Podcast   Feels his information is needed and doesn’t want people to feel stupid. 

       April Question of the Month

       Listen to hear this month's question of the month and then leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcastingcom/question 

       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 6th April 6th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Secrets Course

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Bad Idea Jeans

       ]]>cd9cf631-5e7b-488e-a619-3f6a59d27b10Mon, 28 Mar 2022 09:00:00 -040056:04falsefull820820Protect Your Podcast: Never Say, I Didn't Know What I Didn't KnowI was speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters in Nashville Tennessee and kept hearing a few phrases that make me worried. Phrases like, “I had some friend, or some temp, or some web guy, or even a professional service” set up my podcast. Then in talking with them, I learned that (in many cases) everyone is setup wrong. We’ve all been in a situation where we don’t know what we don’t know. We don’t know what should be important. Today, in episode 819, I’m going to tell you.
       Things You Need to Know
       • Apple, Google, and Spotify have additional stats. If you let someone setup your show "for you" you lose access to those stats.
       • When someone orders your media hosting "For you" THEY OWN YOUR SHOW.
       • Media hosts (eventually ) delete your files if you cancel your account.
       • Make sure you have a copy of your media files.
       • You should own your show and then add your editors to YOUR account.  The bottom line is you don’t want anyone between you and your podcast and you and your audience.
       
       Question of the Month

       Share your thoughts and get some exposure for your show and answer the question of the month.

       Where I Will Be

       Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode Libsyn (use coupon code sopfree ) Blubrry Captive Buzzsprout Lastpass The Politics Free Podcast  Claim Podparity Congressional Dish

       ]]>I was speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters in Nashville Tennessee and kept hearing a few phrases that make me worried. Phrases like, “I had some friend, or some temp, or some web guy, or even a professional service” set up my podcast. Then in talking with them, I learned that (in many cases) everyone is setup wrong. We’ve all been in a situation where we don’t know what we don’t know. We don’t know what should be important. Today, in episode 819, I’m going to tell you.
       Things You Need to Know
       • Apple, Google, and Spotify have additional stats. If you let someone setup your show "for you" you lose access to those stats.
       • When someone orders your media hosting "For you" THEY OWN YOUR SHOW.
       • Media hosts (eventually ) delete your files if you cancel your account.
       • Make sure you have a copy of your media files.
       • You should own your show and then add your editors to YOUR account.  The bottom line is you don’t want anyone between you and your podcast and you and your audience.
       
       Question of the Month

       Share your thoughts and get some exposure for your show and answer the question of the month.

       Where I Will Be

       Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode Libsyn (use coupon code sopfree ) Blubrry Captive Buzzsprout Lastpass The Politics Free Podcast  Claim Podparity Congressional Dish

       ]]>b4934a68-72c9-4132-80bf-b56c8e2c36b8Mon, 21 Mar 2022 04:05:00 -040029:51falsefull819819Cross Promote Your Podcast While You Get Paid with Niklas Hildebrand of Audry.ioI'm back from speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters event with some lessons learned. I also have some tips on collaborating with other podcasters and a resource that is focused on helping you find collaborators while you earn money selling advertising spots. That resource is audry.io and today I'm talking with one of the co-founders Niklas Hildebrand.
       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 5th

       April 5th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Blueprint Course

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Audry.io More Than a Guest Finding Resource

       Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at Audry.io, we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate.

       Question of the Month

       I need your answer by 3/25/22 We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be:

       Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Connie Albers

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       What was that like? podcast

       Paul Colligan Podcast Partnership

       Spybrary Podcast

       Music Radio Creative (Jingles and Voice Over)

       Based on a True Story Podcast

       Home Gadget Geeks with Jim Collison

       Squoosh App (compress and resize images)

       Linq QR Code, Smart Business Card

       Libsyn (Liberated Syndication Podcast Hosting) Use the coupon code sopfree

       Podcasting Resources.com

       Dave's Podcast Editing Team

       ]]>I'm back from speaking at the National Religious Broadcasters event with some lessons learned. I also have some tips on collaborating with other podcasters and a resource that is focused on helping you find collaborators while you earn money selling advertising spots. That resource is audry.io and today I'm talking with one of the co-founders Niklas Hildebrand.
       Book Launch Secrets Webinar April 5th

       April 5th I'll be co-hosting a Book Launch Secrets Webinar. If you've ever thought of writing a book, sign up for this webinar (so you can get the replay). See https://schoolofpodcasting.com/booklaunch or check out the Book Launch Blueprint Course

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Audry.io More Than a Guest Finding Resource

       Whether you’re a seasoned podcaster or just starting out, collaboration is the key to reaching your goals. That’s why at Audry.io, we bring hosts together to help them grow their audiences and find new ways to communicate.

       Question of the Month

       I need your answer by 3/25/22 We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Where I Will Be:

       Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Utah Podcast Coalition April 21st Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Connie Albers

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       What was that like? podcast

       Paul Colligan Podcast Partnership

       Spybrary Podcast

       Music Radio Creative (Jingles and Voice Over)

       Based on a True Story Podcast

       Home Gadget Geeks with Jim Collison

       Squoosh App (compress and resize images)

       Linq QR Code, Smart Business Card

       Libsyn (Liberated Syndication Podcast Hosting) Use the coupon code sopfree

       Podcasting Resources.com

       Dave's Podcast Editing Team

       ]]>6d8a357d-8386-488b-af25-57d6dd00ac41Mon, 14 Mar 2022 04:05:00 -040039:16falsefull8188187 Tips Podcaster Can Use From RadioWhen Neil Hedley emailed me letting me know he would be going through my town and could he buy me dinner I jumped at the chance to hang out with a listener. I had no idea at the time that Neil:

       Had exclusively done morning shows ever since, including six #1-rated shows in different markets in the US and Canada. Sprinkled among those years is time as a stand-up comic, singer, restaurateur, bestselling author, college professor, world record holder (that's a fun story), and a pile of other goodies including running Knopp Studios and hosting the Voice Inside My Hed (get it Hedley? Voice in my Hed...)

       The more we talked, the more I thought I should have him on the show. 

       The Tips: 1 Tighten Up 2. Rules can Help 3. Ums are normal 4. Every word matters 5. Learn how to Tease 6. Set a Benchmark for your podcast 7. Talk to one person

       Check out Neil at https://knoppstudios.com/ where he has combined all of these past lives into a venture to you be a better content creator.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Descript Software

       The Author Inside You (Promo)

       Seven Habits of Highly Effective People

       What Was That Like Podcast? (Great Tease)

       Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Where I Will Be

       Spark Podcast Conference March 7-8 (Nashville) NRB Nashville 8-11 (speaking) Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando (speaking)

       This is episode 817 of the School of Podcasting you can get the back episode by subscribing/following in 

       Apple - Spotify - Google - Amazon

       This podcast is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

       ]]>When Neil Hedley emailed me letting me know he would be going through my town and could he buy me dinner I jumped at the chance to hang out with a listener. I had no idea at the time that Neil:

       Had exclusively done morning shows ever since, including six #1-rated shows in different markets in the US and Canada. Sprinkled among those years is time as a stand-up comic, singer, restaurateur, bestselling author, college professor, world record holder (that's a fun story), and a pile of other goodies including running Knopp Studios and hosting the Voice Inside My Hed (get it Hedley? Voice in my Hed...)

       The more we talked, the more I thought I should have him on the show. 

       The Tips: 1 Tighten Up 2. Rules can Help 3. Ums are normal 4. Every word matters 5. Learn how to Tease 6. Set a Benchmark for your podcast 7. Talk to one person

       Check out Neil at https://knoppstudios.com/ where he has combined all of these past lives into a venture to you be a better content creator.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:   Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).   Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)   It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).    I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).    Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Descript Software

       The Author Inside You (Promo)

       Seven Habits of Highly Effective People

       What Was That Like Podcast? (Great Tease)

       Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Where I Will Be

       Spark Podcast Conference March 7-8 (Nashville) NRB Nashville 8-11 (speaking) Podcast Movement Evolutions March 23-26 Podfest Multimedia Expo  May 26-29 Orlando (speaking)

       This is episode 817 of the School of Podcasting you can get the back episode by subscribing/following in 

       Apple - Spotify - Google - Amazon

       This podcast is part of the Power of Podcasting Network

       ]]>d1a2fb5c-37bb-4517-a69d-436256819c7cMon, 07 Mar 2022 05:05:00 -040049:25falsefull817817What Are You Doing to Grow Your Podcast (and is it working)?Every month I ask a question of the audience, and you chime in. This month I ask THE question that everyone wants to know. In January we talked about Grow your downloads 15 minutes a day (episode 812). In June of last year I gave you 30 Strategies to Grow Your Audience. (Episode 727)

       In this episode I get to hear YOUR ideas, and share some "outside the box" ideas I found on Facebook. 

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Linq "Smart Business Card" and "linktree" type service with stats. (here is an example - www.powerofpodcasting.com)

       Ingles Podcast - Promo

       Participants

       Brandon from Start 100K

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Mark from the History of North America

       Heater from Watching Netflix Without You

       Spencer from The Recovery Show

       Shane from the Tourpreneur Show

       Jedrzej from the Content Machine

       Fred from the Podcast Reporter

       Joe from the 222 Paranormal Podcast

       Dad from the Dad Joke King Podcast

       Question of the Month

       I need your answer by 3/25/22

       We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Subscribe/Follow the Show

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       Won't More Tips?

       Check out my newsletter with additional podcast insights

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

       ]]>Every month I ask a question of the audience, and you chime in. This month I ask THE question that everyone wants to know. In January we talked about Grow your downloads 15 minutes a day (episode 812). In June of last year I gave you 30 Strategies to Grow Your Audience. (Episode 727)

       In this episode I get to hear YOUR ideas, and share some "outside the box" ideas I found on Facebook. 

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Linq "Smart Business Card" and "linktree" type service with stats. (here is an example - www.powerofpodcasting.com)

       Ingles Podcast - Promo

       Participants

       Brandon from Start 100K

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Mark from the History of North America

       Heater from Watching Netflix Without You

       Spencer from The Recovery Show

       Shane from the Tourpreneur Show

       Jedrzej from the Content Machine

       Fred from the Podcast Reporter

       Joe from the 222 Paranormal Podcast

       Dad from the Dad Joke King Podcast

       Question of the Month

       I need your answer by 3/25/22

       We love podcasting, but there are peaks and valleys. What keeps you going when your podcast isn't growing? Be sure to mention your website and a little bit about your show.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Subscribe/Follow the Show

       https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       Won't More Tips?

       Check out my newsletter with additional podcast insights

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

       ]]>00b24ec8-6093-4df3-84a2-623eea89b680Mon, 28 Feb 2022 05:04:27 -040045:28falsefull816816Tuning Into Your Listeners - So You Can Fascinate Them with Focused ContentI'm excited because I found a book called Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       and even though I'm only 29% of the way through the book I am "Santa Clause is coming tonight" excited about reading the rest of it. The Red Thread represents the path back to where you first started. By remembering what it was like when you first started in your niche, you can better understand your audience who is right where you started. The red thread is your path to success. When you can explain your podcast in a way that resonates with your audience. 

       Sometimes you need to address the "wrong" questions your audience is asking so you can get their attention and provide focused content that points them in the right direction and positions you as a trusted source of content. 

        

       I'm also going to talk about focus. This is inspired by the book Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis. I feel this goes along well with the other book.

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis.

       The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People: Powerful Lessons in Personal Change

       Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio

       Transom.org

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>I'm excited because I found a book called Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       and even though I'm only 29% of the way through the book I am "Santa Clause is coming tonight" excited about reading the rest of it. The Red Thread represents the path back to where you first started. By remembering what it was like when you first started in your niche, you can better understand your audience who is right where you started. The red thread is your path to success. When you can explain your podcast in a way that resonates with your audience. 

       Sometimes you need to address the "wrong" questions your audience is asking so you can get their attention and provide focused content that points them in the right direction and positions you as a trusted source of content. 

        

       I'm also going to talk about focus. This is inspired by the book Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis. I feel this goes along well with the other book.

       Join the School of Podcasting When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving).  Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Find Your Red Thread: Make Your Big Ideas Irresistible

       Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis.

       The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People: Powerful Lessons in Personal Change

       Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio

       Transom.org

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>626f5e08-d3bd-468e-a98e-2d282723124aMon, 21 Feb 2022 05:05:00 -040027:56falsefull815815How to Record a Great Podcast Trailer That Energizes Your Audience A trailer has many pros from a creative standpoint. IT forces you to identify WHO you are talking to and what can you say to get them to listen to your podcast. 

       For me, a trailer is 30,60, 90 seconds. When you mark your episode as a trailer it is stuck at the top of your show in Amazon, Spotify, and Apple. Some podcasts do trailer episodes that are 2-5 minutes long.

       As always in podcasting, there are no set rules.

       In This Episode

       The different types of trailers

       When do you know if your trailer is good?

       What do you say in a trailer?

       Where do you post this? How do you use it?

       Mentioned in This Show

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Love Thy Lawyer

       Your Podcast Consultant

       Branden Ushio at the Geek Nerd Network

       Ask the Podcast Coach Episode 380

       Big Seance Podcast (Trailer by Music Radio Creative)

       The Trojan Horse Affair

       Question of the Month (Deadline /25/22)

       Podcast Promo Show

        Cooler Websites (Domain and Web Hosting)

       14:04: Join the School of Podcasting

        The Voice in My Head (Neil Hed)

       ]]>A trailer has many pros from a creative standpoint. IT forces you to identify WHO you are talking to and what can you say to get them to listen to your podcast. 

       For me, a trailer is 30,60, 90 seconds. When you mark your episode as a trailer it is stuck at the top of your show in Amazon, Spotify, and Apple. Some podcasts do trailer episodes that are 2-5 minutes long.

       As always in podcasting, there are no set rules.

       In This Episode

       The different types of trailers

       When do you know if your trailer is good?

       What do you say in a trailer?

       Where do you post this? How do you use it?

       Mentioned in This Show

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Love Thy Lawyer

       Your Podcast Consultant

       Branden Ushio at the Geek Nerd Network

       Ask the Podcast Coach Episode 380

       Big Seance Podcast (Trailer by Music Radio Creative)

       The Trojan Horse Affair

       Question of the Month (Deadline /25/22)

       Podcast Promo Show

        Cooler Websites (Domain and Web Hosting)

       14:04: Join the School of Podcasting

        The Voice in My Head (Neil Hed)

       ]]>d217662f-6dab-49ac-b13c-50499e79a2fcMon, 14 Feb 2022 05:05:00 -040050:43falsefull814814What Do I Do of This Horrible Audio From My Boring Podcast Guest?You are going through the file of the interview you did a week ago and you notice: 1. The audio of the audience sounds horrible.

       2. The guest is boring. 

       Today I showcase some tools that can help you save the audio, but only you can save the boring. 

       Join The School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:

       Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).

       Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)

       It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). 

       I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). 

       Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Question of the Month

       What Are You Doing to Grow Your Audience (and is it working)? Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer

       Podcasts Can't Be Cancelled

       Check out the article I published on Medium.

       Mentioned in this Episode:

       Ultimate Guide to Interviews Episode

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Podland News

       The Ultimate Guide to Podcast Interviews

       Descript software with new Studio Sounds

       Krisp (silence your noisy environment)

       Podinbox - It's like Speakpipe on Steroids.

       Hello Next and Frill Roadmap Tools (could be used by your audience to vote on episode topics)

       Podpage - New Social Sharting and Guest Tools

       Libsyn 5 - Has new Snippets tools to make show notes easier.

       Captivate has introduced dynamic show descriptions, and enhanced its dynamic content tool.

       Buy Me a Coffee - Receive payments

       Otter.ai is a transcript tool I use for editing and for finding pull quotes.

       Podcast Index Indie Podcast Directory

       Three's Company

       Clipscribe - Cool Social Videos Quickly

       Dopesick on Hulu

       Amend on Netflix

       WAP - Cardi B Lyric Video

       Waiting for the World To Change

       Tips To Grow Your Downloads

       This podcast is part of the Power of Podcasting Network.

       ]]>You are going through the file of the interview you did a week ago and you notice: 1. The audio of the audience sounds horrible.

       2. The guest is boring. 

       Today I showcase some tools that can help you save the audio, but only you can save the boring. 

       Join The School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about:

       Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want).

       Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing)

       It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks). 

       I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). 

       Get access to: Step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge.  Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Question of the Month

       What Are You Doing to Grow Your Audience (and is it working)? Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer

       Podcasts Can't Be Cancelled

       Check out the article I published on Medium.

       Mentioned in this Episode:

       Ultimate Guide to Interviews Episode

       My Spouse Has Dementia

       Podland News

       The Ultimate Guide to Podcast Interviews

       Descript software with new Studio Sounds

       Krisp (silence your noisy environment)

       Podinbox - It's like Speakpipe on Steroids.

       Hello Next and Frill Roadmap Tools (could be used by your audience to vote on episode topics)

       Podpage - New Social Sharting and Guest Tools

       Libsyn 5 - Has new Snippets tools to make show notes easier.

       Captivate has introduced dynamic show descriptions, and enhanced its dynamic content tool.

       Buy Me a Coffee - Receive payments

       Otter.ai is a transcript tool I use for editing and for finding pull quotes.

       Podcast Index Indie Podcast Directory

       Three's Company

       Clipscribe - Cool Social Videos Quickly

       Dopesick on Hulu

       Amend on Netflix

       WAP - Cardi B Lyric Video

       Waiting for the World To Change

       Tips To Grow Your Downloads

       This podcast is part of the Power of Podcasting Network.

       ]]>173d8546-3c01-43c2-97bf-ef1c452e089bMon, 07 Feb 2022 05:05:00 -040052:08falsefull813813Growing Your Downloads 15 Minutes a Day- Growing Your Show Kevin ChemidlinI first discovered Kevin when contemplating creating a new show based on podcast growth. It's well-produced and has actual steps you can take.

       Kevin started his first podcast Philly Who? Then quit his day job. So how did he turns things around to the point of making six figures? He stopped and took time to learn what works, and then give it to the audience.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Question of the Month Contributors

       When looking at a new podcast in an app, what catches your eye? The artwork and description often came into play along with the episode titles, but what really counts is the first few minutes of your show. 

       Grow the Show

       Brandon from Start 100K

       Erik from Raising Financial Freedom

       Heater from Watching Netflix Without You

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Mark from the History of North America

       February Question of the Month

       As we talked about growing your show today, what have you been doing to grow your audience, and do you think it's working? Answer it at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question. I need your answer by 2/25/22 

       Kevin's INterview Topics

       02:24 Discovering Grow the Show 03:37 What Inspired Philly Who? 04:37 Kevin Quit His Day Job 06:00 Things Got Scary 06:46 1000 Downloads Per Episode 07:22 Sharpening Your Axe 07:54 Multiple Streams of Income 10:47 Laser-Focused Criteria 11:10 Six-Figure Salary 11:45 Sponsorship Tips 13:07 Niche Down 17:12 Most Broad Success Started With a Niche 18:08 Kevin Shut Down a Profitable Show 19:19 TDE Targeted Daily Engagement 20:48 The Baked in Strategies That Don't Work 22:15 ENGAGEMENT 26:49 Get More Specific 27:38 Go To Where Your Audience Is 29:37 Build Relationships 30:59 Kevin's Program

       JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH: What triggers subscriptions? 33:28 Question of the Month 33:52 Brandon Start 100K 36:27 Heather -Watching Netflix Without You 38:47 The Lost Sheep Has Been Found! 41:11 Scott: What Was That Like 44:07 Kim: The Pharmacist's Voice 47:37 Eric: Raising Financial Freedom 48:47 Mark: The History of North America 50:16 Dave: School of Podcasting

       FEBRUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       51:43 February Question of the Month 53:18 Quick Libsyn Update

       START YOUR PODCAST TODAY

       Join the School of Podcasting and start your podcast in the right direction with access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, 1 on 1 coaching, a private mastermind, and a lack of fear of sounding unprofessional or buying the wrong equipment. 

       Need more? There is even a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>I first discovered Kevin when contemplating creating a new show based on podcast growth. It's well-produced and has actual steps you can take.

       Kevin started his first podcast Philly Who? Then quit his day job. So how did he turns things around to the point of making six figures? He stopped and took time to learn what works, and then give it to the audience.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Question of the Month Contributors

       When looking at a new podcast in an app, what catches your eye? The artwork and description often came into play along with the episode titles, but what really counts is the first few minutes of your show. 

       Grow the Show

       Brandon from Start 100K

       Erik from Raising Financial Freedom

       Heater from Watching Netflix Without You

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Mark from the History of North America

       February Question of the Month

       As we talked about growing your show today, what have you been doing to grow your audience, and do you think it's working? Answer it at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question. I need your answer by 2/25/22 

       Kevin's INterview Topics

       02:24 Discovering Grow the Show 03:37 What Inspired Philly Who? 04:37 Kevin Quit His Day Job 06:00 Things Got Scary 06:46 1000 Downloads Per Episode 07:22 Sharpening Your Axe 07:54 Multiple Streams of Income 10:47 Laser-Focused Criteria 11:10 Six-Figure Salary 11:45 Sponsorship Tips 13:07 Niche Down 17:12 Most Broad Success Started With a Niche 18:08 Kevin Shut Down a Profitable Show 19:19 TDE Targeted Daily Engagement 20:48 The Baked in Strategies That Don't Work 22:15 ENGAGEMENT 26:49 Get More Specific 27:38 Go To Where Your Audience Is 29:37 Build Relationships 30:59 Kevin's Program

       JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH: What triggers subscriptions? 33:28 Question of the Month 33:52 Brandon Start 100K 36:27 Heather -Watching Netflix Without You 38:47 The Lost Sheep Has Been Found! 41:11 Scott: What Was That Like 44:07 Kim: The Pharmacist's Voice 47:37 Eric: Raising Financial Freedom 48:47 Mark: The History of North America 50:16 Dave: School of Podcasting

       FEBRUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       51:43 February Question of the Month 53:18 Quick Libsyn Update

       START YOUR PODCAST TODAY

       Join the School of Podcasting and start your podcast in the right direction with access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, 1 on 1 coaching, a private mastermind, and a lack of fear of sounding unprofessional or buying the wrong equipment. 

       Need more? There is even a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>31594c09-a050-4b57-9f45-76942359c9abMon, 31 Jan 2022 05:05:00 -040058:29falsefull812812How to Feel More Comfortable Recording a Solo Podcast EpisodeAre you one of those people who has thought about doing a solo episode where you open the microphone and talk directly to your audience, but can't overcome how uncomfortable you feel trying it? This show is for you.

       We also talk about understanding the different roles when you are doing a solo show, an interview, appearing on a panel.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Quit worrying about sounding bad, spending too much money on equipment you don't need. At the School of Podcasting, you get access to step by step tutorials, a private mastermind group (filled with brilliant podcasting minds) and group coaching as well as one on one coaching. Sign up today at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       The Advantage of a Solo Episode

       Solo podcast episodes have their advantages:

       • You are 100% in control. You can be as creative as you want
       • You know ahead of time what the content is (instead of hoping you get good answers from your guests)
       • Less production. You won't be interrupting people or trying to match levels with your guest. There is only one level- yours.
       • No Scheduling Conflicts
       
       The Hurdles of Solo Podcasts
       • It is all on your shoulders for content
       • You need to watch voice inflection
       • It just feels weird talking to no-one
       • People think it needs to be as long as other episodes
       
       

       TIPS

       1. Embrace the Weirdness 2. You Don't Have An Audience (yet) 3. Talk to One Person 4. Answer the question from the invisible person 5. Record it with the thought of never using it. - Just a Sound test  6. Script Your Show 7. Throw Out the Grammar 8. Be yourself and just up your natural voice

       Question of the Month Submissions

       I need your answer by 1/28/22 see

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question for more information

       Full notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/811

       ]]>Are you one of those people who has thought about doing a solo episode where you open the microphone and talk directly to your audience, but can't overcome how uncomfortable you feel trying it? This show is for you.

       We also talk about understanding the different roles when you are doing a solo show, an interview, appearing on a panel.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Quit worrying about sounding bad, spending too much money on equipment you don't need. At the School of Podcasting, you get access to step by step tutorials, a private mastermind group (filled with brilliant podcasting minds) and group coaching as well as one on one coaching. Sign up today at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       The Advantage of a Solo Episode

       Solo podcast episodes have their advantages:

       • You are 100% in control. You can be as creative as you want
       • You know ahead of time what the content is (instead of hoping you get good answers from your guests)
       • Less production. You won't be interrupting people or trying to match levels with your guest. There is only one level- yours.
       • No Scheduling Conflicts
       
       The Hurdles of Solo Podcasts
       • It is all on your shoulders for content
       • You need to watch voice inflection
       • It just feels weird talking to no-one
       • People think it needs to be as long as other episodes
       
       

       TIPS

       1. Embrace the Weirdness 2. You Don't Have An Audience (yet) 3. Talk to One Person 4. Answer the question from the invisible person 5. Record it with the thought of never using it. - Just a Sound test  6. Script Your Show 7. Throw Out the Grammar 8. Be yourself and just up your natural voice

       Question of the Month Submissions

       I need your answer by 1/28/22 see

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question for more information

       Full notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/811

       ]]>a3dfc318-d88a-4d0f-8a91-5709615b1d0cMon, 24 Jan 2022 13:18:57 -040040:32falsefull811811Now Sure About Your Show? Don't Be Afraid To Ask Your Audience for AdviceI am seeing people that seem to be afraid to reach out to their audience. I get it. It's easier to have the reason of "lack of engagement" on your downloads instead of asking people for feedback on your show. 

       Today I share a story on how I was ready to make sweeping changes to the Podcast Rodeo show until I decided to open up a discussion with my audience. I was at one point thinking of shutting the podcast down. It turns out that ONE person who had ideas of changing the show was in the minority. 

       That doesn't mean their suggestion has no merit. I was reading Eric Nuzum's newsletter and he (of NPR experience) to 18 months to play with the format of their new show. With this in mind, I'm still doing my show, but I'm looking into implementing the things that my audience enjoys while aligning the show a bit more with my brand. I always say, "Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue." 

       Question of the Month Submission

       When you are in an app and see a show you probably should be listening to what inspires you to go further and potentially subscribe or follow. I need your answer by 1/28/22

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       My New Page with Affiliate Links

       Check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/support if you are a person that doesn't feel they would benefit from the School of Podcasting, but wants to support the show, I've now made it easy.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). 

       Get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Podcast Rewind

       Too Many Podcasts

       Earn and Invest

       Love Thy Lawyer

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Affiliate Link Support Page

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Eric Nuzum Newsletter

       Jordan Harbinger Deals Page

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Too Many Podcasts

       Earn and Invest

       Love Thy Lawyer

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>I am seeing people that seem to be afraid to reach out to their audience. I get it. It's easier to have the reason of "lack of engagement" on your downloads instead of asking people for feedback on your show. 

       Today I share a story on how I was ready to make sweeping changes to the Podcast Rodeo show until I decided to open up a discussion with my audience. I was at one point thinking of shutting the podcast down. It turns out that ONE person who had ideas of changing the show was in the minority. 

       That doesn't mean their suggestion has no merit. I was reading Eric Nuzum's newsletter and he (of NPR experience) to 18 months to play with the format of their new show. With this in mind, I'm still doing my show, but I'm looking into implementing the things that my audience enjoys while aligning the show a bit more with my brand. I always say, "Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue." 

       Question of the Month Submission

       When you are in an app and see a show you probably should be listening to what inspires you to go further and potentially subscribe or follow. I need your answer by 1/28/22

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       My New Page with Affiliate Links

       Check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/support if you are a person that doesn't feel they would benefit from the School of Podcasting, but wants to support the show, I've now made it easy.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join the School of Podcasting you can quit worrying about: Are people going to listen to me? (Yes, cause I'll show you how to see what they want). Am I going to sound stupid? (No, as I'll show you the magic of editing) It will cost a million dollars (No, I'll have you sounding like a million bucks without spending a million bucks).  I don't anything about this technology (You said the same thing about driving). 

       Get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, a mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasting minds,  and the ability to schedule as many one on one quick fix calls as you like at no extra charge. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Podcast Rewind

       Too Many Podcasts

       Earn and Invest

       Love Thy Lawyer

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Affiliate Link Support Page

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Eric Nuzum Newsletter

       Jordan Harbinger Deals Page

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Too Many Podcasts

       Earn and Invest

       Love Thy Lawyer

       School of Podcasting

       ]]>129be895-2a3e-4885-af52-a5642fe7609dMon, 17 Jan 2022 05:05:00 -040035:24falsefull810810The Proven Power of the Dramatic Pause: Two Ways Saying Nothing is Better Than Saying SomethingIn the microwave society that we live in, most of us are not accustomed to slowing down. As a podcaster, we may associate silence with "Dead Air" which is a phrase from the radio. However, today I'm going to show you that the best answers come after the awkward pause.
       The Power of the Dramatic Pause

       When you put a pause before or after a point it adds emphasis to that point. 

       If you put it before the point, the brain perks up waiting for the next words. 

       If you put the pause after your point, it gives the brain a chance to process what was just said. 

       Start Your Podcast and Grow Your Audience

       When you join the School of Podcasting you no longer have to worry about buying equipment you don't need. You learn how to get comfortable behind a microphone as our community helps you create your best episodes. There are step by step videos, live group coaching, private one on one coaching, and a private mastermind group. You have every tool you need to succeed as a podcast.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The Question of the Month (add your submission)

       Howard Stern on SiriusXM

       Ben Affleck Movie The Tender Bar

       David Letterman My Next Guest Needs No Introduction

       Paul Harvey

       Steve Jobs introduces iPhone in 2007

       Full Show Notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/809

       Support the Show

       Buy Dave's Book Profit From Your Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Become a Patron or Buy Me a Coffee

       Thank you for listening. I really appreciate it.

       ]]>In the microwave society that we live in, most of us are not accustomed to slowing down. As a podcaster, we may associate silence with "Dead Air" which is a phrase from the radio. However, today I'm going to show you that the best answers come after the awkward pause.
       The Power of the Dramatic Pause

       When you put a pause before or after a point it adds emphasis to that point. 

       If you put it before the point, the brain perks up waiting for the next words. 

       If you put the pause after your point, it gives the brain a chance to process what was just said. 

       Start Your Podcast and Grow Your Audience

       When you join the School of Podcasting you no longer have to worry about buying equipment you don't need. You learn how to get comfortable behind a microphone as our community helps you create your best episodes. There are step by step videos, live group coaching, private one on one coaching, and a private mastermind group. You have every tool you need to succeed as a podcast.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The Question of the Month (add your submission)

       Howard Stern on SiriusXM

       Ben Affleck Movie The Tender Bar

       David Letterman My Next Guest Needs No Introduction

       Paul Harvey

       Steve Jobs introduces iPhone in 2007

       Full Show Notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/809

       Support the Show

       Buy Dave's Book Profit From Your Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Become a Patron or Buy Me a Coffee

       Thank you for listening. I really appreciate it.

       ]]>89a67bce-7edd-4bf7-9170-0fd6dfbc568cMon, 10 Jan 2022 05:05:00 -040035:01falsefull809809Meet My Friend Evo of Podcast Pontifications - Cross PromotionToday I'm trying something new and coming to you on a WEDNESDAY to introduce you to my friend Evo Terra. 

       Evo has been podcasting since 2004 (not a typo) and has been involved in many aspects of podcasting ever since. 

       Evo was nice enough to let me host an episode of his show a while back, and today I'm repaying the favor.

       I interviewed Evo back on episode 122 when he was on a book tour for his book Expert Podcasting Practices. 

       LINKS FOR THIS EPISODE

       Find the report Evo was walking about on his site. 

       Check out more episodes of Podcast Pontifications at

       podcastpontifications.com

       ]]>Today I'm trying something new and coming to you on a WEDNESDAY to introduce you to my friend Evo Terra. 

       Evo has been podcasting since 2004 (not a typo) and has been involved in many aspects of podcasting ever since. 

       Evo was nice enough to let me host an episode of his show a while back, and today I'm repaying the favor.

       I interviewed Evo back on episode 122 when he was on a book tour for his book Expert Podcasting Practices. 

       LINKS FOR THIS EPISODE

       Find the report Evo was walking about on his site. 

       Check out more episodes of Podcast Pontifications at

       podcastpontifications.com

       ]]>26c2895a-476e-44ac-ad97-4868122abe4bWed, 05 Jan 2022 20:42:12 -040011:50falsebonus80880850 Shades of Podcasting: Be Proud Embracing Your Unique Style of PodcastingAs the first episode of 2022, I often do an episode for beginners, such as episode 756 14 Steps to Start a Successful Podcast in 2021

       One of the most dangerous things you can do in podcasting is comparing your show to others. When I was in my 20s I would play golf once a year with my brother. My golf scores look like someone who golfed once a year. I would use my Dad's old clubs and would go to one of the cheapest clubs and just a fun day of hanging out. How would I feel if I compared myself to Tiger Woods? That would be insane unless I compared myself to a four-year-old Tiger. When you have your attitude in check, it can change the way you perform moving forward.

       From the "hobbyist" to the "semi pro" you will see that if the hobbyist attempts to do everything the "semi pro" does they will burn out. Also, anyone who starts a podcast will attract people they didn't expect to attract.

       Full show notes at 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/808

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer before 1/28/22

       Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow?

       As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow?

       Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Episode 756 14 Steps to Start a Successful Podcast in 2021

       Three Different Types of Reviews to get some constructive feedback.

       Join the School of Podcasting and get started in the RIGHT direction.

       Check out my free course at www.learnpodpage.com PodPage is the best way to make a great looking website for your show without any coding.

       ]]>As the first episode of 2022, I often do an episode for beginners, such as episode 756 14 Steps to Start a Successful Podcast in 2021

       One of the most dangerous things you can do in podcasting is comparing your show to others. When I was in my 20s I would play golf once a year with my brother. My golf scores look like someone who golfed once a year. I would use my Dad's old clubs and would go to one of the cheapest clubs and just a fun day of hanging out. How would I feel if I compared myself to Tiger Woods? That would be insane unless I compared myself to a four-year-old Tiger. When you have your attitude in check, it can change the way you perform moving forward.

       From the "hobbyist" to the "semi pro" you will see that if the hobbyist attempts to do everything the "semi pro" does they will burn out. Also, anyone who starts a podcast will attract people they didn't expect to attract.

       Full show notes at 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/808

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer before 1/28/22

       Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow?

       As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow?

       Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Episode 756 14 Steps to Start a Successful Podcast in 2021

       Three Different Types of Reviews to get some constructive feedback.

       Join the School of Podcasting and get started in the RIGHT direction.

       Check out my free course at www.learnpodpage.com PodPage is the best way to make a great looking website for your show without any coding.

       ]]>791577b1-7eab-40be-9e12-793182181354Mon, 03 Jan 2022 05:05:56 -040044:27falsefull808808My Favorite Podcast (and WHY) 2021 EditionSince episode 388 2013, I've been asking my audio what is your ONE FAVORITE podcast (and yes, I know it's hard to pick just one) but more importantly WHY is it your favorite?

       Steve Stewart loves the Stacking Benjamins Show

       I interview Steve and Mark Deal on 752 about the Podcast Editor Academy

       York from Poetic Earthlings likes the Matt Walsh Show show.

       Chris Lewis from the Dads with Daughters podcast loves The Real Brian Show.

       I interview Brian back on episode 449

       Glenn from the Coaching Kids Curling Podcast loves the Dave Chang Show. 

       If you're a person of color LISTEN TO EPISODE 806

       Kim Newlove of the Pharmacists Voice loves the School of Podcasting (especially 779 on Reviews, and 792 when you die)

       Louis Goodman of Live the Lawyer loves the Trials of Frank Carson 

       Scott Johnson from What Was That Like?? loves the How Sound Podcast.

       Neil Scott  from Recovery Coast to Coast Loves the Bob Lefsetz Podcast.

       Matt Rafferty of the Author Inside You loves the Grand Scheme Snatching Sinatra

       Joe Saul Sehy from Stacking Benjamins Show loves the Xbox On

       Joe mentioned The E myth book.

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America Podcast loves the Book Note Plus show.

       Shane Whaley from Spybrary and Tourpreneur loves the "That Record Got Me High" podcast.

       Joe loves the Warrior Next Door Podcast.

       Bryan Goodwin of the Relaxed Male  loves the Alive and Free show

       Anthony Arno of the Route 66 Podcast and the Stemclass Podcast loves the Space Shot Podcast.

       Dave from Your Podcast Consultant loves I Hear Things from Tom Webster. 

       JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer before 1/28/22

       Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow?

       As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow?

       Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>Since episode 388 2013, I've been asking my audio what is your ONE FAVORITE podcast (and yes, I know it's hard to pick just one) but more importantly WHY is it your favorite?

       Steve Stewart loves the Stacking Benjamins Show

       I interview Steve and Mark Deal on 752 about the Podcast Editor Academy

       York from Poetic Earthlings likes the Matt Walsh Show show.

       Chris Lewis from the Dads with Daughters podcast loves The Real Brian Show.

       I interview Brian back on episode 449

       Glenn from the Coaching Kids Curling Podcast loves the Dave Chang Show. 

       If you're a person of color LISTEN TO EPISODE 806

       Kim Newlove of the Pharmacists Voice loves the School of Podcasting (especially 779 on Reviews, and 792 when you die)

       Louis Goodman of Live the Lawyer loves the Trials of Frank Carson 

       Scott Johnson from What Was That Like?? loves the How Sound Podcast.

       Neil Scott  from Recovery Coast to Coast Loves the Bob Lefsetz Podcast.

       Matt Rafferty of the Author Inside You loves the Grand Scheme Snatching Sinatra

       Joe Saul Sehy from Stacking Benjamins Show loves the Xbox On

       Joe mentioned The E myth book.

       Mark Vinet from the History of North America Podcast loves the Book Note Plus show.

       Shane Whaley from Spybrary and Tourpreneur loves the "That Record Got Me High" podcast.

       Joe loves the Warrior Next Door Podcast.

       Bryan Goodwin of the Relaxed Male  loves the Alive and Free show

       Anthony Arno of the Route 66 Podcast and the Stemclass Podcast loves the Space Shot Podcast.

       Dave from Your Podcast Consultant loves I Hear Things from Tom Webster. 

       JANUARY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer before 1/28/22

       Picture yourself in a podcast app in front of a podcast you might actually enjoy. Think of this experience and comment on it. What caught your eye? Is the description important? Do you subscribe? or "Cherry Pick" episodes. Do you ever subscribe/Follow?

       As we all want more followers/subscribers (and yes we know most of us find our podcasts via word of mouth), BUT when you're in an app, (I realize this is kind of vague), but what goes through your mind before you press either play or subscribe/follow?

       Don't forget to tell us a little bit about your show, and your website address.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

        

       ]]>fe871f87-a053-4ece-9131-32e84cbc4c10Mon, 27 Dec 2021 05:05:25 -040053:39falsefull807807Look What Podcasters Can Adopt from Every Horrible, Hallmark Christmas MoviesHallmark Holiday Movies get a lot of flack because they are predictable, cheesy, corny, and more or less if you've seen one - you've seen them all.  YES THERE ARE LESSONS TO BE LEARNED

       Do you know why all Hallmark Movies are the same? Well, do you know why all AC/DC songs sound the same (or Chuck Berry). Ever listen to an episode of Dave Ramsey? 

       They found a format that works, and consequently, they stay with it until that format doesn't work.

       Why are there so many Friday the 13th movies? Because they were profitable. That goes for many movie franchises.

       When you find a winning format - stick with it. Monitor how it resonates with your audience and if they love it, keep doing it. 

       TWEAKING A FORMAT WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SOUL

       My cousin said, "I know what I'm getting with a Hallmark movie. I don't worry about swearing, nudity, violence, etc. It's a trustworthy holiday movie where everyone feels good when it's over. 

       So Hallmark saw that the "formula" worked but they could grow their audience through diversity. They've added movies with people of color. 

       As a middle-aged white guy, I never knew what it was like to see a movie or TV show and not look like the people on screen. The success of the Black Panther Movie, Blackish, Hamilton, and other forms of entertainment that had a different slant found an underserved audience. 

       With this, I beg you people of color, and people of all shapes, sizes, sex, and whatever makes you - YOU. There are people who are tired of hearing about a subject from a middle-aged white guy and would love to hear about your subject from your point of view that includes your influence and heritage. 

       The Missing Piece in Your Podcast Puzzle

       I see people saying this like, "I've tried everything but my show isn't growing." To this I say, "Everything?" 

       It turns out when I reach out to the last three people who said this NONE of them had taken the steps to get an objective view of their show.

       This is like: Wondering why your restaurant isn't growing when you never got feedback on your feed.  Wondering why your clothing line isn't selling when you never did a focus group of your target buyer. 

       If you need some help, I can give you feedback. Currently, in the School of Podcasting, this is a free service. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?".  Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about

       WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want.

       Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show.

       Please answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Hallmark Holiday Movies get a lot of flack because they are predictable, cheesy, corny, and more or less if you've seen one - you've seen them all.  YES THERE ARE LESSONS TO BE LEARNED

       Do you know why all Hallmark Movies are the same? Well, do you know why all AC/DC songs sound the same (or Chuck Berry). Ever listen to an episode of Dave Ramsey? 

       They found a format that works, and consequently, they stay with it until that format doesn't work.

       Why are there so many Friday the 13th movies? Because they were profitable. That goes for many movie franchises.

       When you find a winning format - stick with it. Monitor how it resonates with your audience and if they love it, keep doing it. 

       TWEAKING A FORMAT WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SOUL

       My cousin said, "I know what I'm getting with a Hallmark movie. I don't worry about swearing, nudity, violence, etc. It's a trustworthy holiday movie where everyone feels good when it's over. 

       So Hallmark saw that the "formula" worked but they could grow their audience through diversity. They've added movies with people of color. 

       As a middle-aged white guy, I never knew what it was like to see a movie or TV show and not look like the people on screen. The success of the Black Panther Movie, Blackish, Hamilton, and other forms of entertainment that had a different slant found an underserved audience. 

       With this, I beg you people of color, and people of all shapes, sizes, sex, and whatever makes you - YOU. There are people who are tired of hearing about a subject from a middle-aged white guy and would love to hear about your subject from your point of view that includes your influence and heritage. 

       The Missing Piece in Your Podcast Puzzle

       I see people saying this like, "I've tried everything but my show isn't growing." To this I say, "Everything?" 

       It turns out when I reach out to the last three people who said this NONE of them had taken the steps to get an objective view of their show.

       This is like: Wondering why your restaurant isn't growing when you never got feedback on your feed.  Wondering why your clothing line isn't selling when you never did a focus group of your target buyer. 

       If you need some help, I can give you feedback. Currently, in the School of Podcasting, this is a free service. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?".  Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about

       WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want.

       Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show.

       Please answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>1a69afe4-4ca2-4298-b4cb-5b08b46e20b0Mon, 20 Dec 2021 05:05:24 -040046:46falsefull806806Why I Absolutely Still Distrust Anchor.fm (New Reasons)I was talking to someone who said how "Flexible" Anchor/fm was (owned by Spotify). When I hear stuff like this I often wonder "WHAT IS YOUR SOURCE?" I did a video a while ago when there were some serious issues with Anchor that most people were overlooking (hey! it's free!). 

       Today I just feel moved to let you know that YES, I do not recommend Anchor, but for NEW reasons. 

       LINKS

       Episode 805 Full Show Notes

       Podcast Quick Start

       Monthly Membership

       Learn Podpage Free Course

       Profit From Your Podcast

       NoteTracks - Music/Podcast Feedback Tool

       Recovery Coast to Coast Podcast

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Episode 793 on Media Hosts

       TOPICS COVERED: 03:01  Update on Tascam 03:49  Good Customer Service 06:28  Submit Your Favorite Podcast 07:32  learnpodpage.com 08:06  Why I Don't Recommend Anchor.fm 32:22  New Feedback Tool 35:23  Atta Boy To Neil and Scott

       ]]>I was talking to someone who said how "Flexible" Anchor/fm was (owned by Spotify). When I hear stuff like this I often wonder "WHAT IS YOUR SOURCE?" I did a video a while ago when there were some serious issues with Anchor that most people were overlooking (hey! it's free!). 

       Today I just feel moved to let you know that YES, I do not recommend Anchor, but for NEW reasons. 

       LINKS

       Episode 805 Full Show Notes

       Podcast Quick Start

       Monthly Membership

       Learn Podpage Free Course

       Profit From Your Podcast

       NoteTracks - Music/Podcast Feedback Tool

       Recovery Coast to Coast Podcast

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Episode 793 on Media Hosts

       TOPICS COVERED: 03:01  Update on Tascam 03:49  Good Customer Service 06:28  Submit Your Favorite Podcast 07:32  learnpodpage.com 08:06  Why I Don't Recommend Anchor.fm 32:22  New Feedback Tool 35:23  Atta Boy To Neil and Scott

       ]]>5bf2b5e3-fe11-4d4c-a665-96ea2a24bf55Mon, 13 Dec 2021 05:05:05 -040040:14falsefull80580515 Insightful Tips For Podcasters From Watching the Beatles Get BackGet Back I saw tip after tip that podcasters could benefit from.  Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Because of My Podcast

       Andy Driscoll of inebri-art.com shares how he is going to get to go to a tradeshow for his podcast and record live on the floor. The show is picking up his hotel expenses. Who doesn't love a trip to vegas?

       New Free Course From the School of Podcasting: Learn Podpage

       Podpage is a great tool to make a great-looking website for your podcast without knowing any coding. I've made a top to bottom course of this great tool and made it available for free.

       See www.learnpodpage.com

       15 Lessons From The Beatles

       02:09  Because of My Podcast: Andy Driscoll 06:13  Free Course learnpodpage.com 07:45  Lessons from the Beatles Opening 09:19  Practice, Practice, Practice 10:32  Get Objective Feedback 11:44  Your Environment Matters 14:48  Set Realistic Goals to Avoid Burnout 17:15  Going Live Requires Practice 18:07  Everyone Needs to Feel Heard 19:44  Chemistry is Important 21:58  Be on Time 22:43  Be Inspired By Others 24:03  Capture Your Ideas 24:56  Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone 26:13  Editing is a Good Thing 30:32  Money Changes Everything 31:26  Don't Let Yoko Sing

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?".  Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about

       WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want.

       Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show.

       Please answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Tascam Mixcast 4 Nightmare

       I bought a Mixcast 4 from Tascam, and it has some great features except it died TWICE in the middle of a live stream. I'll keep you informed as I work with their support team to identify what the issue is. 

       Yes, I'm using the latest firmware.

       I do enjoy my new Shure SM7B. 

       I used the 90 days same as cash option at Sweetwater.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       schoolofpodcasting.com/start - Start Your Podcast

       Why You Hate Your Voice

       When Is You Podcast Ready For the Public

       Shure SM7B

       Tascam Mixcast 4

       Your Podcast Consultant

       ]]>Get Back I saw tip after tip that podcasters could benefit from.  Ready To Start Your Podcast? You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Because of My Podcast

       Andy Driscoll of inebri-art.com shares how he is going to get to go to a tradeshow for his podcast and record live on the floor. The show is picking up his hotel expenses. Who doesn't love a trip to vegas?

       New Free Course From the School of Podcasting: Learn Podpage

       Podpage is a great tool to make a great-looking website for your podcast without knowing any coding. I've made a top to bottom course of this great tool and made it available for free.

       See www.learnpodpage.com

       15 Lessons From The Beatles

       02:09  Because of My Podcast: Andy Driscoll 06:13  Free Course learnpodpage.com 07:45  Lessons from the Beatles Opening 09:19  Practice, Practice, Practice 10:32  Get Objective Feedback 11:44  Your Environment Matters 14:48  Set Realistic Goals to Avoid Burnout 17:15  Going Live Requires Practice 18:07  Everyone Needs to Feel Heard 19:44  Chemistry is Important 21:58  Be on Time 22:43  Be Inspired By Others 24:03  Capture Your Ideas 24:56  Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone 26:13  Editing is a Good Thing 30:32  Money Changes Everything 31:26  Don't Let Yoko Sing

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 12/24/21. The question is "What is your favorite Podcast and why?".  Please provide: The name of the show The website (if you know it - very helpful) What the show is about

       WHY YOU LIKE IT - Go as long as you want.

       Be sure to tell us the name of your podcast, your website, and a little bit about your show.

       Please answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Tascam Mixcast 4 Nightmare

       I bought a Mixcast 4 from Tascam, and it has some great features except it died TWICE in the middle of a live stream. I'll keep you informed as I work with their support team to identify what the issue is. 

       Yes, I'm using the latest firmware.

       I do enjoy my new Shure SM7B. 

       I used the 90 days same as cash option at Sweetwater.

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       schoolofpodcasting.com/start - Start Your Podcast

       Why You Hate Your Voice

       When Is You Podcast Ready For the Public

       Shure SM7B

       Tascam Mixcast 4

       Your Podcast Consultant

       ]]>c96774b1-01db-45c3-8257-f7191a7e23bcMon, 06 Dec 2021 05:05:35 -040041:45falsefull804804Honestly, How Long Does it Take to Create an Amazing Podcast Episode?For years I've told people THE BEST ratio I've ever achieved is 4 TO 1 when it comes to making a podcast episode. In other words, a 15-minute podcast will take an hour. 

       I asked my audience how long it took them from idea to pressing publish. They shared their workflow and the amount of time spent per episode. 

       If you'd rather outsource your editing, check out my team.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Episode 

       Learn How You Can Help Others by Sharing Your Abilities with Glenn Hebert - 802

       20 Tips to Immediately Speed Up Your Podcast Production No Matter the Budget - 801

       Contributors

       Steve from Stevestewart.me and the Podcast Editors Academy (and the podcast editors club on Facebook

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Zita - Moon River Rituals

       Bruce from The Eden Podcast

       Jim From the Average Gut Network

       Mark - Repurpose Your Career

       Rich - the Daily Podcast Practice Show

       Orlando - hablandodetecnologia.com

       Brandon - Start 100K

       Dan - Based on a True Story Podcast

       Howard - AA Recovery Podcast

       Neil Recovery Coast to Coast

       Mark -History or North America Podcast

       Peter - Fat and Broke Podcast

       Bill - Strokecast

       Stefan - Studying Pixels

       The Final Answer

       For me, my average is about 6 to 1. So a 15-minute podcast will take 90 minutes.

       Based on the data from the audience, they averaged 10 minutes for 1 minute of podcast. So a 15-minute podcast will take an hour and a half. To see my flow, visit the website at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/803

        

       ]]>For years I've told people THE BEST ratio I've ever achieved is 4 TO 1 when it comes to making a podcast episode. In other words, a 15-minute podcast will take an hour. 

       I asked my audience how long it took them from idea to pressing publish. They shared their workflow and the amount of time spent per episode. 

       If you'd rather outsource your editing, check out my team.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Episode 

       Learn How You Can Help Others by Sharing Your Abilities with Glenn Hebert - 802

       20 Tips to Immediately Speed Up Your Podcast Production No Matter the Budget - 801

       Contributors

       Steve from Stevestewart.me and the Podcast Editors Academy (and the podcast editors club on Facebook

       Kim from The Pharmacist's Voice

       Zita - Moon River Rituals

       Bruce from The Eden Podcast

       Jim From the Average Gut Network

       Mark - Repurpose Your Career

       Rich - the Daily Podcast Practice Show

       Orlando - hablandodetecnologia.com

       Brandon - Start 100K

       Dan - Based on a True Story Podcast

       Howard - AA Recovery Podcast

       Neil Recovery Coast to Coast

       Mark -History or North America Podcast

       Peter - Fat and Broke Podcast

       Bill - Strokecast

       Stefan - Studying Pixels

       The Final Answer

       For me, my average is about 6 to 1. So a 15-minute podcast will take 90 minutes.

       Based on the data from the audience, they averaged 10 minutes for 1 minute of podcast. So a 15-minute podcast will take an hour and a half. To see my flow, visit the website at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/803

        

       ]]>3c811077-2573-4865-a59e-6b01f09adae9Mon, 29 Nov 2021 05:01:29 -040001:11:32falsefull803803Learn How You Can Help Others by Sharing Your Abilities with Glenn HebertToday we look at how two entertainment icons had MORE success AFTER they quit trying to be something they weren't and decided to be themselves. 

       Glenn Hebert runs the Horse Radio Network. When he started his podcast he had 12 downloads. He didn't quit, and 2800 episodes later he shares some powerful feedback from his audience. Glenn had no idea he would have this effect on people, and you can do the same thing. 

       Let me help you start a podcast. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to clicking publish on an episode? Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Horse Radio Network

       Headline Studio

       (Here is a quick Headline Studio Overview Video)

       Dave's Podcast Editing Service

       Sure SM7B on Sale!

       Shure MV7 and MV7X "Joe Rogan Video"

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dave's Newsletter With Bonus Content

       Descript Editing Software

       George Carlin Occupation Foole

       Toggle Time Tracking Software

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       The Average Guy Network

       Speak Life Church Podcast

       Grammar Girl Podcast

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       TOPICS

       01:39  Question of the Month Reminder 03:36  Headline Studio Tool 05:15  BE YOURSELF 07:07  Celebrity Pivots 15:56  Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast 17:12  What is this 800? 17:43  Glenn Got Some Feedback 18:44  Real, Raw, Don't Hold Back 19:32  Holy Cow You're In My House 20:50  Laying it Out There 21:27  Life Changing 22:08  Glenn's Prep Time 23:43  The Importance of Community 25:06  Putting YOU Intro an Interview 27:56  Glenn's Audience Gives Back 29:09  Inspiring Life Instead of Death 30:01  Did You See This Coming 30:58  Podcasting Gold 31:29  Two Types of Listeners 35:34  The Birth of Grammar Girl 37:06  Jerry Springer 39:24  Podcast Rodeo Show Promo 40:43  SM7B is ON SALE! 42:07  Join the School of Podcasting! 44:46  Bloopers 45:15  Bad Edits

       ]]>Today we look at how two entertainment icons had MORE success AFTER they quit trying to be something they weren't and decided to be themselves. 

       Glenn Hebert runs the Horse Radio Network. When he started his podcast he had 12 downloads. He didn't quit, and 2800 episodes later he shares some powerful feedback from his audience. Glenn had no idea he would have this effect on people, and you can do the same thing. 

       Let me help you start a podcast. 

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to clicking publish on an episode? Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

       Horse Radio Network

       Headline Studio

       (Here is a quick Headline Studio Overview Video)

       Dave's Podcast Editing Service

       Sure SM7B on Sale!

       Shure MV7 and MV7X "Joe Rogan Video"

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dave's Newsletter With Bonus Content

       Descript Editing Software

       George Carlin Occupation Foole

       Toggle Time Tracking Software

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       The Average Guy Network

       Speak Life Church Podcast

       Grammar Girl Podcast

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       TOPICS

       01:39  Question of the Month Reminder 03:36  Headline Studio Tool 05:15  BE YOURSELF 07:07  Celebrity Pivots 15:56  Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast 17:12  What is this 800? 17:43  Glenn Got Some Feedback 18:44  Real, Raw, Don't Hold Back 19:32  Holy Cow You're In My House 20:50  Laying it Out There 21:27  Life Changing 22:08  Glenn's Prep Time 23:43  The Importance of Community 25:06  Putting YOU Intro an Interview 27:56  Glenn's Audience Gives Back 29:09  Inspiring Life Instead of Death 30:01  Did You See This Coming 30:58  Podcasting Gold 31:29  Two Types of Listeners 35:34  The Birth of Grammar Girl 37:06  Jerry Springer 39:24  Podcast Rodeo Show Promo 40:43  SM7B is ON SALE! 42:07  Join the School of Podcasting! 44:46  Bloopers 45:15  Bad Edits

       ]]>92728bcc-4337-4efe-a659-a76dae486ba0Mon, 22 Nov 2021 05:05:40 -040046:01falsefull80280220 Tips To immediately Speed up Your Podcast ProductionIf you are looking to speed up your podcast production, then this episode is for you. I have compiled 20 tips that will help you take the stress out of producing a quality audio file in a timely manner. From planning to editing, here are some quick tricks that will make your podcast shine! 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Quick Start

       School of Podcasting Membership

       Freedom Software

       Todoist

       Evernote

       Fiverr Workspace Accounting Software

       Text Expander

       Otter.ai transcription Service

       Zapier Automation

       Will Smith Book

       First Things First book

       (Free book on Audible)

       Descript Software

       Libsyn.com Media Host (sopfree promo code)

       Captivate.fm

       TIPS

       1. Assess How Much Your Time Is Worth
       2. Take the Time to Get Your Guest Sound in Check
       3. Quit Multitasking
       4. Avoid Distractions
       5. Block out time
       6. More Planning Equals Less Editing
       7. Do the Hardest Stuff First
       8. Prioritize Better
       9. Speed up Researching
       10. Organize Your Content to It's Easy to Find
       11. Learn the Software You Are Using (Take a Class)
       12. Record it Right the First Time
       13. Listen Back Faster
       14. Learn Keyboard Shortcuts
       15. Google Vs Bang Your Head Against the Desk
       16. Know WHO your guest is and WHY You are bringing them on the show
       17. Outsource Your Editing
       18. Automate When Possible
       19. Use Transcripts to find clips for audiograms.
       20. Deep Breathing when pulled out of your zone
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 11/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to published on an episode. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       ]]>If you are looking to speed up your podcast production, then this episode is for you. I have compiled 20 tips that will help you take the stress out of producing a quality audio file in a timely manner. From planning to editing, here are some quick tricks that will make your podcast shine! 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Quick Start

       School of Podcasting Membership

       Freedom Software

       Todoist

       Evernote

       Fiverr Workspace Accounting Software

       Text Expander

       Otter.ai transcription Service

       Zapier Automation

       Will Smith Book

       First Things First book

       (Free book on Audible)

       Descript Software

       Libsyn.com Media Host (sopfree promo code)

       Captivate.fm

       TIPS

       1. Assess How Much Your Time Is Worth
       2. Take the Time to Get Your Guest Sound in Check
       3. Quit Multitasking
       4. Avoid Distractions
       5. Block out time
       6. More Planning Equals Less Editing
       7. Do the Hardest Stuff First
       8. Prioritize Better
       9. Speed up Researching
       10. Organize Your Content to It's Easy to Find
       11. Learn the Software You Are Using (Take a Class)
       12. Record it Right the First Time
       13. Listen Back Faster
       14. Learn Keyboard Shortcuts
       15. Google Vs Bang Your Head Against the Desk
       16. Know WHO your guest is and WHY You are bringing them on the show
       17. Outsource Your Editing
       18. Automate When Possible
       19. Use Transcripts to find clips for audiograms.
       20. Deep Breathing when pulled out of your zone
       
       

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 11/26/21. How long does it take you to go from idea to published on an episode. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       ]]>0b354151-c060-4341-ab83-b62f37f418afMon, 15 Nov 2021 05:05:02 -040050:35falsefull801801Revealing Secrets from 800 Episodes - Keeping Your Sanity While PodcastingWe hear of podcasters getting these big deals for big bucks, and congratulations to all. However, this is not the norm. Just because you start a podcast does not mean you will end up like Rich Uncle Pennybag from Monopoly.

       If you're a regular listener you've heard me mention how I received a 10-minute voicemail, and one of the points of that voicemail was that maybe we all have some slightly blurry expectations when it comes to podcasting (and in their case how long it takes to create one). Today is my 800th episode and like all of my milestone episodes, I'm going to break my format, and not talk so much about gear, downloads, promotion, interviews, etc and instead I want to talk about some of the more stressful sides of podcasting.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/800

       My first episode from 2005

       Book: Profit From Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting

       Besties in Bed

       Affordable Podcast Editing

       The Grief Recovery Handbook

       National Suicide Prevention Lifeline at 800-273-8255

       Question of the Month: How Long Does It Take You to Create an Episode - SURVEY

       This 60-minute podcast took 8 hours to create from idea to pressing publish. We all know podcasting can take more time than we thought. I'd love to hear how long it took to go from "Idea to Publish" for your last episode. You can answer at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Need Help With Your Podcast?

       Here is a list of ways you can work with me.

       Want to support the show, but feel you don't need the School of Podcasting? Consider becoming a Patron.

       Also, this show is equipped with the value for value model. You can stream bitcoin using the apps at www.newpodcastapps.com

       If none of those float your boat, you can always buy me a coffee.

       TOPICS

       00:58  Question of the Month 03:43  Origins of Episode 05:06  Podcasting Can Change Your Life 07:35  Everything Works for THE Dave Jackson??? 08:26  Podcasting Played a Part in My Divorce 09:29  Lesson 1: Realistic Expectations 11:40  Separating Work From Home 13:15  Tip 2:Date Night on Steroids 15:00  Relationship  Advice from the Divorced Guy 15:10  When to Argue 17:07  Tip 3: Guys - JUST LISTEN 17:31  Tip 4: Ladies Tell Them What You Want 17:55  Tip 5: Make Sure You're Giving Them What They Want 18:46  Stereotypes are Fun! 20:02  Comparison is the Thief of Joy 21:33  The RIGHT Downloads 23:14  Refocus When Comparing Yourself 25:04  So Why Does Dave Podcast? 30:44  Suicide Disclaimer 31:32  Does Being a ProPodcaster Leave You Susceptible to Thoughts of Suicide? 32:58  When Did the Word Hobby Become Derogatory? 34:29  You Are Allowed to Do This For Fun 36:15  Podcasters Can Be Impulsive 38:06  Podcasters Are Isolated 39:07  Realistic Expectations 41:25  We Might Feel Trapped 43:10  The HUSTLE Mentality 44:20  Suicide Rates in America 48:10  It's OK To Ask For Help 49:55  Dealing with Grief 53:51  The Pain of Suicide 54:22  Keep Your Good Emails

       ]]>We hear of podcasters getting these big deals for big bucks, and congratulations to all. However, this is not the norm. Just because you start a podcast does not mean you will end up like Rich Uncle Pennybag from Monopoly.

       If you're a regular listener you've heard me mention how I received a 10-minute voicemail, and one of the points of that voicemail was that maybe we all have some slightly blurry expectations when it comes to podcasting (and in their case how long it takes to create one). Today is my 800th episode and like all of my milestone episodes, I'm going to break my format, and not talk so much about gear, downloads, promotion, interviews, etc and instead I want to talk about some of the more stressful sides of podcasting.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/800

       My first episode from 2005

       Book: Profit From Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting

       Besties in Bed

       Affordable Podcast Editing

       The Grief Recovery Handbook

       National Suicide Prevention Lifeline at 800-273-8255

       Question of the Month: How Long Does It Take You to Create an Episode - SURVEY

       This 60-minute podcast took 8 hours to create from idea to pressing publish. We all know podcasting can take more time than we thought. I'd love to hear how long it took to go from "Idea to Publish" for your last episode. You can answer at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Need Help With Your Podcast?

       Here is a list of ways you can work with me.

       Want to support the show, but feel you don't need the School of Podcasting? Consider becoming a Patron.

       Also, this show is equipped with the value for value model. You can stream bitcoin using the apps at www.newpodcastapps.com

       If none of those float your boat, you can always buy me a coffee.

       TOPICS

       00:58  Question of the Month 03:43  Origins of Episode 05:06  Podcasting Can Change Your Life 07:35  Everything Works for THE Dave Jackson??? 08:26  Podcasting Played a Part in My Divorce 09:29  Lesson 1: Realistic Expectations 11:40  Separating Work From Home 13:15  Tip 2:Date Night on Steroids 15:00  Relationship  Advice from the Divorced Guy 15:10  When to Argue 17:07  Tip 3: Guys - JUST LISTEN 17:31  Tip 4: Ladies Tell Them What You Want 17:55  Tip 5: Make Sure You're Giving Them What They Want 18:46  Stereotypes are Fun! 20:02  Comparison is the Thief of Joy 21:33  The RIGHT Downloads 23:14  Refocus When Comparing Yourself 25:04  So Why Does Dave Podcast? 30:44  Suicide Disclaimer 31:32  Does Being a ProPodcaster Leave You Susceptible to Thoughts of Suicide? 32:58  When Did the Word Hobby Become Derogatory? 34:29  You Are Allowed to Do This For Fun 36:15  Podcasters Can Be Impulsive 38:06  Podcasters Are Isolated 39:07  Realistic Expectations 41:25  We Might Feel Trapped 43:10  The HUSTLE Mentality 44:20  Suicide Rates in America 48:10  It's OK To Ask For Help 49:55  Dealing with Grief 53:51  The Pain of Suicide 54:22  Keep Your Good Emails

       ]]>09a6f28b-ba07-4016-96f9-c0f4c220b341Mon, 08 Nov 2021 05:05:50 -040059:54falsefull800800They See You Before They Hear You Podcast Branding With Mark Des CotesFor entrepreneurs who want to start their own businesses and use podcasts as part of their marketing strategy, branding is important; especially when considering how unique each individual business should be in order to stand out among its competitors. If you're looking for ways on how to brand your show like a professional podcaster, keep reading at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/799

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Question of the Month 

       Many podcasters (especially new ones ) are surprised at how long it takes to create an episode. So this month's question is "How long did it take you to go from idea to published (not promotional actions just the planning, recording, editing, and publishing). Be sure to mention your website, your podcast, and a little bit about what to expect. Then let us know how long your finished episode was, how much time it took to publish, and if it was audio, video or both. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by November 26th

       If you want something to help track your time check out Rescue Time, Toggl Track, ATracker Pro, Rize(there are a ton of these)

       Again, www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Show

       podcastbranding.co (Mark's Company)

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Artwork Preview Tool

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Canva

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>For entrepreneurs who want to start their own businesses and use podcasts as part of their marketing strategy, branding is important; especially when considering how unique each individual business should be in order to stand out among its competitors. If you're looking for ways on how to brand your show like a professional podcaster, keep reading at https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/799

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Today we talk about the 10 commandments of book publishing. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Question of the Month 

       Many podcasters (especially new ones ) are surprised at how long it takes to create an episode. So this month's question is "How long did it take you to go from idea to published (not promotional actions just the planning, recording, editing, and publishing). Be sure to mention your website, your podcast, and a little bit about what to expect. Then let us know how long your finished episode was, how much time it took to publish, and if it was audio, video or both. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by November 26th

       If you want something to help track your time check out Rescue Time, Toggl Track, ATracker Pro, Rize(there are a ton of these)

       Again, www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Show

       podcastbranding.co (Mark's Company)

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Artwork Preview Tool

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Canva

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>4e269ebd-cf54-49e3-bfd6-cd0f49f3f27cMon, 01 Nov 2021 04:05:24 -040040:59falsefull799799Does the Audience Need to Hear Your Guests ENTIRE Backstory?You tell me that your guest is a master of (skill) and I'm ready to hear about (skill), but first, you make me listen to where he went to high school, and his entire backstory while all I want to talk about is how he can help me boost (skill). 

       So for me the "tell me about yourself" drives me nuts. I asked my audience, "Am I missing something? and they answered (and in some cases I am). 

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/798

       Thanks To The Contributors

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Max from Aviation New Talk

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer

       Bill From the Stroke Cast

       Mark from the History of North America

       November Question of the Month

       As you produce episodes between now and November 26th, 2021 pay attention (and even track) how long it takes you to go from Ideas to pressing "Publish" on your media host (this does NOT include promotion). As always feel free to record a message and say something like, "Hey Dave this is (name) from (name of the show) at (website) my episode was (length of the episode) and it took me (time from idea to publishing). You can find more about my show at (website).

       If you'd like, I've even made a spreadsheet where you can enter Name of Podcast (not episode - the podcast) The length of the finished episode (in minutes). The time spent (in minutes) to complete the episode If it was solo, co-host, interview. If there is video was involved.

       You can answer your question at 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       White Collared Podcast

       Affordable Audio Editing

       atracker time tracking app

       Rescue Time

       EP766 How to Get Booked on Podcasts Figuring out Who and How to Pitch with Kristin Molenaar

       Launching a Podcast in 2022?

       As you heard in today's show, it takes some time to get focused, find your voice and make content that impacts your audience Join the School of Podcasting or Order the Quick Start Plan

       ]]>You tell me that your guest is a master of (skill) and I'm ready to hear about (skill), but first, you make me listen to where he went to high school, and his entire backstory while all I want to talk about is how he can help me boost (skill). 

       So for me the "tell me about yourself" drives me nuts. I asked my audience, "Am I missing something? and they answered (and in some cases I am). 

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/798

       Thanks To The Contributors

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Max from Aviation New Talk

       Louis from Love Thy Lawyer

       Bill From the Stroke Cast

       Mark from the History of North America

       November Question of the Month

       As you produce episodes between now and November 26th, 2021 pay attention (and even track) how long it takes you to go from Ideas to pressing "Publish" on your media host (this does NOT include promotion). As always feel free to record a message and say something like, "Hey Dave this is (name) from (name of the show) at (website) my episode was (length of the episode) and it took me (time from idea to publishing). You can find more about my show at (website).

       If you'd like, I've even made a spreadsheet where you can enter Name of Podcast (not episode - the podcast) The length of the finished episode (in minutes). The time spent (in minutes) to complete the episode If it was solo, co-host, interview. If there is video was involved.

       You can answer your question at 

       schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       White Collared Podcast

       Affordable Audio Editing

       atracker time tracking app

       Rescue Time

       EP766 How to Get Booked on Podcasts Figuring out Who and How to Pitch with Kristin Molenaar

       Launching a Podcast in 2022?

       As you heard in today's show, it takes some time to get focused, find your voice and make content that impacts your audience Join the School of Podcasting or Order the Quick Start Plan

       ]]>3cd919e2-dd80-4fd9-8787-d91d19d03c00Mon, 25 Oct 2021 04:05:37 -040044:22falsefull798798What Podcasters Can Learn From Squid GameThe new series Squid Game on Netflix shot to number 1 in four days. I watched episode 1 and immediately binged the whole thing. This is a very popular show and has become Netflix's best launch.

       Let's pick it apart and see what podcasters can learn from the success of Squid Game.

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Key Points:

       • 78% of podcasters are discovered vis word of mouth ( Jacobs Media 2019)
       • It's not perfect
       • It got editing before it was released
       • The first episode really hooks you in.
       • You don't get the back story until episode 2
       • People can identify with the characters
       • What is going to happen next?
       • The audience boosted FOMO
       • Netflix took a chance
       • Sometimes The Audience Doesn’t Know What They Want Until They Get it.
       • So Don’t give up. It might take 10 years
       • It doesn’t have to be perfect
       • Start with the strongest content you have
       • Tease your next episode and leave them wanting more
       • Make materials for your audience to share on social
       • Be patient, and continue to improve your content
       • Inspire and ask for word of mouth
       
       

       WEBINAR NEXT WEEK: APPLE PODCASTS CONNECT

       Sign up HERE

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>The new series Squid Game on Netflix shot to number 1 in four days. I watched episode 1 and immediately binged the whole thing. This is a very popular show and has become Netflix's best launch.

       Let's pick it apart and see what podcasters can learn from the success of Squid Game.

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Key Points:

       • 78% of podcasters are discovered vis word of mouth ( Jacobs Media 2019)
       • It's not perfect
       • It got editing before it was released
       • The first episode really hooks you in.
       • You don't get the back story until episode 2
       • People can identify with the characters
       • What is going to happen next?
       • The audience boosted FOMO
       • Netflix took a chance
       • Sometimes The Audience Doesn’t Know What They Want Until They Get it.
       • So Don’t give up. It might take 10 years
       • It doesn’t have to be perfect
       • Start with the strongest content you have
       • Tease your next episode and leave them wanting more
       • Make materials for your audience to share on social
       • Be patient, and continue to improve your content
       • Inspire and ask for word of mouth
       
       

       WEBINAR NEXT WEEK: APPLE PODCASTS CONNECT

       Sign up HERE

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>1a7af2da-5d07-43e4-b619-1d14e266b2bfMon, 18 Oct 2021 04:05:15 -040032:39falsefull797797Common Podcast Mistakes III (and other Podcast BS)As someone who works in the podcast space, and spends hours hanging out in the community there are things I see that make me scratch my head. There are EASY things to do that will help you grow your audience. 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Check out the 10 commandments of book marketing

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Common Podcasting Mistakes That Slow Your Audience Growth

       02:28  Get a Domain at Least

       It can be through Name Cheap, or Coolerwebsites, but BUY a domain for your show. Yes, its icing on the cake, but isn't icing the best part?

       05:20  Bad Clips to Start Your Show

       Instead of spending mountains of time to have people jump into the middle of a conversation, why not just tell people why you're excited about a guest?

       10:55  The Start of Your Show

       Remember Apple has a giant LISTEN button now and people will hear the beginning of your show. Don't blow it with "Music for the sake of nothing" and let them know where they are about to go.

       15:54  Follow and Subscribe

       You want people to listen more than once. Don't make them find you. Give them links like this:

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       17:30  Impulse Actions Based on Emotions

       21:19  Your About Page

       Figure out what type of website you have, and include any combination of paragraphs about your business, your show, and your hosts. 23:47  Things That May Not Be Accurate

       25:56  The #1 Show - (People will say anything - truth be Damned!) 28:31  Congressional Dish Shows Proof 28:48  A Podcast Guru Without a Podcast

       Shouldn't your podcast coach have a podcast?

       30:04  Monthly Stats

       Monthly stats are a great barometer of how your older episodes are doing. They sound better than episode stats (but episode stats are what is used for most sponsors). 33:50  Magic Bullets I'm sorry. There aren't any.

       35:48  Question of the Month

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       37:03  Dave Grohl The Storyteller - Thumbs Up

       39:35  Bloopers

       Mentioned In This Episode

       My Podcast Reviews

       What Was That Like

       Dave Grohl The Storyteller

       School of Podcasting

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       ]]>As someone who works in the podcast space, and spends hours hanging out in the community there are things I see that make me scratch my head. There are EASY things to do that will help you grow your audience. 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Check out the 10 commandments of book marketing

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Common Podcasting Mistakes That Slow Your Audience Growth

       02:28  Get a Domain at Least

       It can be through Name Cheap, or Coolerwebsites, but BUY a domain for your show. Yes, its icing on the cake, but isn't icing the best part?

       05:20  Bad Clips to Start Your Show

       Instead of spending mountains of time to have people jump into the middle of a conversation, why not just tell people why you're excited about a guest?

       10:55  The Start of Your Show

       Remember Apple has a giant LISTEN button now and people will hear the beginning of your show. Don't blow it with "Music for the sake of nothing" and let them know where they are about to go.

       15:54  Follow and Subscribe

       You want people to listen more than once. Don't make them find you. Give them links like this:

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       17:30  Impulse Actions Based on Emotions

       21:19  Your About Page

       Figure out what type of website you have, and include any combination of paragraphs about your business, your show, and your hosts. 23:47  Things That May Not Be Accurate

       25:56  The #1 Show - (People will say anything - truth be Damned!) 28:31  Congressional Dish Shows Proof 28:48  A Podcast Guru Without a Podcast

       Shouldn't your podcast coach have a podcast?

       30:04  Monthly Stats

       Monthly stats are a great barometer of how your older episodes are doing. They sound better than episode stats (but episode stats are what is used for most sponsors). 33:50  Magic Bullets I'm sorry. There aren't any.

       35:48  Question of the Month

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       II need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       37:03  Dave Grohl The Storyteller - Thumbs Up

       39:35  Bloopers

       Mentioned In This Episode

       My Podcast Reviews

       What Was That Like

       Dave Grohl The Storyteller

       School of Podcasting

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       ]]>a0b39c52-94f3-47f8-b288-5b512354b1e9Mon, 11 Oct 2021 04:05:28 -040040:11falsefull796796Taking a Break and Coming Back From Your PodcastThere are times when I feel podcasters over-think things, and one of them is "How do I come back if I take an unplanned break?" It's not a whole lot different than starting a podcast from scratch (except it's easier).

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Eric Nuzum interview

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling Book

       FULL SHOW NOTES

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       TOPICS

       00:00  Introduction 00:27  Welcome 01:14  Taking Breaks From Your Podcast: Don't 03:34  It's Your Choice 04:10  Things You Should Consider 05:07  Using Seasons 06:34  Off Seasons May Not Be Off 07:39  How I Don't Miss Episodes 08:31  Consistency in VALUE over Schedule 09:57  I Really Need To Take a Break 10:34  The Best Way to Take a Break: PLAN IT 11:23  Figure Out When You're Coming Back 12:28  Keep Your Listener Informed 13:56  SPONSOR: Novel Marketing Podcast 15:11  Unplug If That Is the Goal 16:21  Identify Why You Need a Break 17:13  Make Your Last Episode a GREAT Episode 18:03  No Explanation Needed 20:52  Losing Listeners Is Not More Important 21:21  Relaunching Your Podcast 22:00  Is Taking a Break More Work? 22:35  Have Episodes Recorded and Ready 23:15  Quick Summary So Far 23:55  Other Things to Consider 24:50  Best of Shows 25:33  Where to Announce Your Hiatus? 26:24  Avoid Podfading 27:55  The Biggest Mistake 30:35  Resurrecting a Podfaded Show 33:54  libsyn.com promo code sopfree 34:31  Question of the Month 35:44  One Tip to Making Podcasting Easier 37:12  If You Need a Break From Life 38:13  schoolofpodcasting.com 38:56  Bloopers

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>There are times when I feel podcasters over-think things, and one of them is "How do I come back if I take an unplanned break?" It's not a whole lot different than starting a podcast from scratch (except it's easier).

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Eric Nuzum interview

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling Book

       FULL SHOW NOTES

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 10/22/21. The question is "How do you feel about hearing a guest's FULL story?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website, and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       TOPICS

       00:00  Introduction 00:27  Welcome 01:14  Taking Breaks From Your Podcast: Don't 03:34  It's Your Choice 04:10  Things You Should Consider 05:07  Using Seasons 06:34  Off Seasons May Not Be Off 07:39  How I Don't Miss Episodes 08:31  Consistency in VALUE over Schedule 09:57  I Really Need To Take a Break 10:34  The Best Way to Take a Break: PLAN IT 11:23  Figure Out When You're Coming Back 12:28  Keep Your Listener Informed 13:56  SPONSOR: Novel Marketing Podcast 15:11  Unplug If That Is the Goal 16:21  Identify Why You Need a Break 17:13  Make Your Last Episode a GREAT Episode 18:03  No Explanation Needed 20:52  Losing Listeners Is Not More Important 21:21  Relaunching Your Podcast 22:00  Is Taking a Break More Work? 22:35  Have Episodes Recorded and Ready 23:15  Quick Summary So Far 23:55  Other Things to Consider 24:50  Best of Shows 25:33  Where to Announce Your Hiatus? 26:24  Avoid Podfading 27:55  The Biggest Mistake 30:35  Resurrecting a Podfaded Show 33:54  libsyn.com promo code sopfree 34:31  Question of the Month 35:44  One Tip to Making Podcasting Easier 37:12  If You Need a Break From Life 38:13  schoolofpodcasting.com 38:56  Bloopers

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>f849e4b3-71c8-4a33-aedc-e34768629a51Mon, 04 Oct 2021 04:05:47 -040039:45falsefull795795What Inspires People To Tell a Friend?Today is a "Question of the Month" episode where we share something we recommended and WHY.

       We look at the strategy of dripping content to keep people wanting to know what happens next ( the Zeigarnik effect ).

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Participants

       Matt from The Author Inside You

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Jennifer Bourbon Barrel Podcasting

       Timothy from Podwrecked and Create Art Podcast

       Haley from Adoptees On

       Jerry from Beyond the Rut

       Mark from the History of North America

       Wayne from the Packer's Fan Podcast, and Media Voice Overs.

       Fred from Grump Old Bears

       MENTIONED IN THIS PODCAST

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Dumb People With Terrible Ideas

       Social Media Marketing Podcast

       Project Hail Mary

       Samson Q2u

       Podtrak P4

       Dave's "My Gear" page.

       Leading the Bleeding Podcast

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

       No Agenda Stream

       The Chosen

       Virgin River

       Libsyn promo code sopfree to get a full month free.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       TOPICS

       01:34  Autographed Copies of Profit From Your Podcat 02:10  The Show I Love to Hate 03:21  Zeigarnik effect 05:01  What Makes a Good Podcast? 06:39  What Happens Next? 07:48  Example of Dripping Content 09:11  Sponsor: Novel Marketing Marketing Podcast 13:19  Scott Johnson 15:54  Jennifer Longworth 17:15  Matt Rafferty 18:21  Timothy Kimo Brien 20:39  Haley Radke 23:09  Jerry Dugen 24:56  Mark Vinet 26:02  Wayne Henderson 27:13  Fred Castenada 28:35  Dave Jackson 33:10  October Question of the Month 38:20  Quick Wrap Up 39:08  Mastering Your Craft is a Goal 39:44  Libsyn Promo Code sopfree 40:38  Coming Soon

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>Today is a "Question of the Month" episode where we share something we recommended and WHY.

       We look at the strategy of dripping content to keep people wanting to know what happens next ( the Zeigarnik effect ).

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Participants

       Matt from The Author Inside You

       Scott from What Was That Like?

       Jennifer Bourbon Barrel Podcasting

       Timothy from Podwrecked and Create Art Podcast

       Haley from Adoptees On

       Jerry from Beyond the Rut

       Mark from the History of North America

       Wayne from the Packer's Fan Podcast, and Media Voice Overs.

       Fred from Grump Old Bears

       MENTIONED IN THIS PODCAST

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Dumb People With Terrible Ideas

       Social Media Marketing Podcast

       Project Hail Mary

       Samson Q2u

       Podtrak P4

       Dave's "My Gear" page.

       Leading the Bleeding Podcast

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

       No Agenda Stream

       The Chosen

       Virgin River

       Libsyn promo code sopfree to get a full month free.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       TOPICS

       01:34  Autographed Copies of Profit From Your Podcat 02:10  The Show I Love to Hate 03:21  Zeigarnik effect 05:01  What Makes a Good Podcast? 06:39  What Happens Next? 07:48  Example of Dripping Content 09:11  Sponsor: Novel Marketing Marketing Podcast 13:19  Scott Johnson 15:54  Jennifer Longworth 17:15  Matt Rafferty 18:21  Timothy Kimo Brien 20:39  Haley Radke 23:09  Jerry Dugen 24:56  Mark Vinet 26:02  Wayne Henderson 27:13  Fred Castenada 28:35  Dave Jackson 33:10  October Question of the Month 38:20  Quick Wrap Up 39:08  Mastering Your Craft is a Goal 39:44  Libsyn Promo Code sopfree 40:38  Coming Soon

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>2401fbb1-329a-4fcd-878c-43b9f8c5ea3bMon, 27 Sep 2021 04:24:25 -040042:00falsebonus794794Understanding Podcast Hosting FeaturesEvery Facebook has the question, "where should I host my podcast" about six times a day and every response gets about 17 replies. I realize that question is sometimes confused by the different features, and business plans so this episode is here to help you understand podcast hosting companies.

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Libsyn.com (use the coupon sopfree)

       Captivate.fm

       Blubrry.com

       Podbean.com

       Castos.com

       Buzzsprout.com

       Transistor.fm

       Redcircle.com

       Fireside.fm

       Anchor.fm

       IAB Guidelines

       Full Show Notes

       Topics:

       01:52  Question of the Month 02:28  Novel Marketing 03:46  Does One Media Host Deliver More Downloads? 08:58  IAB Statistics 10:37  Are IAB Stats Important? 12:22  Will Switching Hosts Bring More Downloads? 13:12  Storage 14:14  Downloads 15:22  What Kindof Stats? 16:23  Demographic Data? 17:08  Podcast Website 18:28  Private Podcasts 18:57  Dynamic Ad Insertion 20:47  Support 21:32  Transcripts 21:54  Audiograms 22:24  Media Hosting Business Models 22:40  Free Media Hosts 24:42  Why Free Media Hosts Fail 25:26  Limited Uploads - Unlimited Downloads 26:16  Unlimited Uploaded - Limited/Pricier Downloads 27:16  Unlimited Everything 27:42  Opinion My Criteria 31:18  Join the School of Podcasting 31:58  How to Choose? 35:07  Opinion on Transcripts 36:48  Opinion Audiograms 38:36  Opinion on Anchor.fm 42:00  Opinion on I Can't Afford It 42:31  Opinion- Busines Models 45:37  Opinion - All Things Unlimited 47:08  Facebook is Useless 49:17  Opinion: WordPress Feeds 51:53  be Careful Switching Hosts

        

       ]]>Every Facebook has the question, "where should I host my podcast" about six times a day and every response gets about 17 replies. I realize that question is sometimes confused by the different features, and business plans so this episode is here to help you understand podcast hosting companies.

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Libsyn.com (use the coupon sopfree)

       Captivate.fm

       Blubrry.com

       Podbean.com

       Castos.com

       Buzzsprout.com

       Transistor.fm

       Redcircle.com

       Fireside.fm

       Anchor.fm

       IAB Guidelines

       Full Show Notes

       Topics:

       01:52  Question of the Month 02:28  Novel Marketing 03:46  Does One Media Host Deliver More Downloads? 08:58  IAB Statistics 10:37  Are IAB Stats Important? 12:22  Will Switching Hosts Bring More Downloads? 13:12  Storage 14:14  Downloads 15:22  What Kindof Stats? 16:23  Demographic Data? 17:08  Podcast Website 18:28  Private Podcasts 18:57  Dynamic Ad Insertion 20:47  Support 21:32  Transcripts 21:54  Audiograms 22:24  Media Hosting Business Models 22:40  Free Media Hosts 24:42  Why Free Media Hosts Fail 25:26  Limited Uploads - Unlimited Downloads 26:16  Unlimited Uploaded - Limited/Pricier Downloads 27:16  Unlimited Everything 27:42  Opinion My Criteria 31:18  Join the School of Podcasting 31:58  How to Choose? 35:07  Opinion on Transcripts 36:48  Opinion Audiograms 38:36  Opinion on Anchor.fm 42:00  Opinion on I Can't Afford It 42:31  Opinion- Busines Models 45:37  Opinion - All Things Unlimited 47:08  Facebook is Useless 49:17  Opinion: WordPress Feeds 51:53  be Careful Switching Hosts

        

       ]]>28a27560-ae4e-4e24-9f0f-42d3b2544a87Mon, 20 Sep 2021 04:05:43 -040054:46falsefull793793What Happens To Your Podcast When You Die?This weekend was the 20th anniversary of 911 in the United States. I recently had a slight health scare, so I brought on a friend of the show Gordon Firemark to answer the question, "What happens to your podcast if you die." We also get the last report from Glenn Hebert as he winds up his tour to meet his audience. I also am trying something new with my book Profit From Your Podcast. 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       What Happens After You Publish Your First Episode

       Today I talk about School of Podcasting student Mark Hasara who has a great background as a speaker, author and pilot but was still nervous to release his first episode. 

       When he released it he was amazed at how many downloads he received. We mention "The Feed" from Libsyn which shares industry stats. Currently, 50% of podcasters get less than 131 downloads per episode, and 50% get more. 

       What Happens to Your Podcast if You Die?

       I talk with Gordon Firemark about what happens to your podcast if you die. While we all plan to be around much longer, taking the time to designate what happens to your show if you are no longer able to continue (or if you're dead). This is an awkward conversation to have with people, but you should be planning your estate as well, so don't forget your podcast (and dog) when you create directions on what to do with your show. 

       You might check out the book, "I'm dead, now what?" on Amazon

       For more information about Gordon see thepodcastlawyer.com

       Glenn's Reflections on His Tour

       Glenn "The Geek" Hebert is from the Horse Radio Network. He went on a five-week tour with thousands of miles across the east coast to meet his listeners and sponsors. 

       He loved his Zoom Podtrack P4, and thought staying three days in one place was the best. Next tour he will also plan some time to site see (as they didn't do any). He said that even though traveling in an RV is different, after some time you just get used to it (and it beats hotels, or staying in the listener's homes).

       Get A Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast

       Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book to get a personalized version of the book (US only)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Topics:

       00:00  Intro 01:48  Pushing Past Your Fears 05:36  Mark's First Episode 06:07  How Many Downloads is Considered Good? 09:37  Sponsor: Novel Marketing 11:39  Sad News About Trever Hill 12:54  What Happens To Your Podcast When You Die? 25:40  Glenn the Geek Final Tour Update 32:49  Others are Going on Tour 34:22  Questions of the Month 35:55  Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast 36:54  The Importance of Editing 39:50  Bloopers

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>This weekend was the 20th anniversary of 911 in the United States. I recently had a slight health scare, so I brought on a friend of the show Gordon Firemark to answer the question, "What happens to your podcast if you die." We also get the last report from Glenn Hebert as he winds up his tour to meet his audience. I also am trying something new with my book Profit From Your Podcast. 

       Sponsor: Novel Marketing Podcast

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction. Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       What Happens After You Publish Your First Episode

       Today I talk about School of Podcasting student Mark Hasara who has a great background as a speaker, author and pilot but was still nervous to release his first episode. 

       When he released it he was amazed at how many downloads he received. We mention "The Feed" from Libsyn which shares industry stats. Currently, 50% of podcasters get less than 131 downloads per episode, and 50% get more. 

       What Happens to Your Podcast if You Die?

       I talk with Gordon Firemark about what happens to your podcast if you die. While we all plan to be around much longer, taking the time to designate what happens to your show if you are no longer able to continue (or if you're dead). This is an awkward conversation to have with people, but you should be planning your estate as well, so don't forget your podcast (and dog) when you create directions on what to do with your show. 

       You might check out the book, "I'm dead, now what?" on Amazon

       For more information about Gordon see thepodcastlawyer.com

       Glenn's Reflections on His Tour

       Glenn "The Geek" Hebert is from the Horse Radio Network. He went on a five-week tour with thousands of miles across the east coast to meet his listeners and sponsors. 

       He loved his Zoom Podtrack P4, and thought staying three days in one place was the best. Next tour he will also plan some time to site see (as they didn't do any). He said that even though traveling in an RV is different, after some time you just get used to it (and it beats hotels, or staying in the listener's homes).

       Get A Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast

       Go to www.profitfromyourpodcast.com/book to get a personalized version of the book (US only)

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       I need your answer by 9/24/21. The question is "What was the last thing you shared and why?" Be sure to mention the name of your show, the website and a little bit about your show. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Topics:

       00:00  Intro 01:48  Pushing Past Your Fears 05:36  Mark's First Episode 06:07  How Many Downloads is Considered Good? 09:37  Sponsor: Novel Marketing 11:39  Sad News About Trever Hill 12:54  What Happens To Your Podcast When You Die? 25:40  Glenn the Geek Final Tour Update 32:49  Others are Going on Tour 34:22  Questions of the Month 35:55  Personalized Version of Profit From Your Podcast 36:54  The Importance of Editing 39:50  Bloopers

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       ]]>6b05d98c-51ad-4302-96c1-634a7afb08caMon, 13 Sep 2021 04:25:26 -040040:11falsefull792792Is It Time To Sell Your Knowledge In an Online Course?Mellisa Guller has experience as a marketing manager, a project manager, an online course designer (she worked at Teachable), as well as a podcast producer, host, and podcast teacher. We take a DEEP DIVE into planning and launching an online course.

       SPONSOR: Novel Marketing

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction.

       Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Building Digital Courses with Mellisa Guller

       Today I get all your questions answered about building and selling an online course: 

       06:04  When is the right time to build a course? 09:01  How Long Should My Course Be? 11:19  Common Mistakes 13:13  What are the Top Challenges? 20:50  Open or Closed Model? 26:23  The Underutilized Feature in Teachable 27:27  What Do I Charge For My Online Course 32:59  Should I Have Free Lessons? 35:37  What Percentage of My Audience Will Sign Up? 39:38  Why is the Number So Low? 41:04  Why Did You Choose Circle?

       Melissa's Contact Info

       Check out all of her courses and services at 

       witandwire.com

       Instagram

       Twitter

       Pinterest

       Question of the Month

       I need you to answer the question, "What was the last thing you shared, and why?" Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by 9/24/21 and be sure to tell us about your show and where we can find it (your website).

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Profit from Your Podcast Book

       Episode 787 with the Entrepreneur Survey

       The 10 Commandments of Book Marketing

       Wit and Wire Podcast Launch Accelerator

       Wit and Wire Courses

        

       ]]>Mellisa Guller has experience as a marketing manager, a project manager, an online course designer (she worked at Teachable), as well as a podcast producer, host, and podcast teacher. We take a DEEP DIVE into planning and launching an online course.

       SPONSOR: Novel Marketing

       A lot of podcasters plan to write a book but they don't know where to start. Our sponsor the Novel Marketing Podcast is here to help. Thomas Umstattd Jr is a wealth of knowledge and he can get you going in the right direction.

       Check out https://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/author

       Building Digital Courses with Mellisa Guller

       Today I get all your questions answered about building and selling an online course: 

       06:04  When is the right time to build a course? 09:01  How Long Should My Course Be? 11:19  Common Mistakes 13:13  What are the Top Challenges? 20:50  Open or Closed Model? 26:23  The Underutilized Feature in Teachable 27:27  What Do I Charge For My Online Course 32:59  Should I Have Free Lessons? 35:37  What Percentage of My Audience Will Sign Up? 39:38  Why is the Number So Low? 41:04  Why Did You Choose Circle?

       Melissa's Contact Info

       Check out all of her courses and services at 

       witandwire.com

       Instagram

       Twitter

       Pinterest

       Question of the Month

       I need you to answer the question, "What was the last thing you shared, and why?" Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by 9/24/21 and be sure to tell us about your show and where we can find it (your website).

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Profit from Your Podcast Book

       Episode 787 with the Entrepreneur Survey

       The 10 Commandments of Book Marketing

       Wit and Wire Podcast Launch Accelerator

       Wit and Wire Courses

        

       ]]>2dedc49b-e764-49e6-9789-5f43565fd78eMon, 06 Sep 2021 04:05:35 -040048:21falsefull791791How Do You Define Podcast Success?I asked my audience "Do you need to be a celebrity to achieve podcast success?" and they chimed in. You need to know your WHY, and you need to define SUCCESS. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Participants In This Episode

       The History of North America - Mark

       What Was That Like? - Scott Johnson

       Permanent Record Studios in Austin - Mike

       Film Spotting

       Childless Not By Choice - Civilia Morgan

       Dave's appearance on Childless Not by Choice

       The Author Inside You - Matt

       Dave's Appearance on The Author Inside You

       The Relaxed Dog - Robert Ober

       Tourpreneur- Shane Whaley. 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Voice Advantage Giveaway (Lots of Free Stuff)

       Podcast Review Show

       How To Niche Down Your Podcast?

       Mailerlite Email List Tool

       ]]>I asked my audience "Do you need to be a celebrity to achieve podcast success?" and they chimed in. You need to know your WHY, and you need to define SUCCESS. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Participants In This Episode

       The History of North America - Mark

       What Was That Like? - Scott Johnson

       Permanent Record Studios in Austin - Mike

       Film Spotting

       Childless Not By Choice - Civilia Morgan

       Dave's appearance on Childless Not by Choice

       The Author Inside You - Matt

       Dave's Appearance on The Author Inside You

       The Relaxed Dog - Robert Ober

       Tourpreneur- Shane Whaley. 

       Follow the Show and Never Miss an Episode on:

       Apple - Google - Spotify - Amazon

       Check out New Podcast Apps for apps to stream bitcoin to podcasters.

       Did You Get Value From This Episode?

       Enjoy the Show? Buy Dave a Coffee

       and give some of that value back. 

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Voice Advantage Giveaway (Lots of Free Stuff)

       Podcast Review Show

       How To Niche Down Your Podcast?

       Mailerlite Email List Tool

       ]]>dd6b4142-6e77-467e-853d-4ceaaa78b24dMon, 30 Aug 2021 04:05:59 -040040:59falsefull790790Danielle Desir is Building a Deeper Engagement in a Facebook Group AlternativeToday Danielle Desir built up a sizeable Facebook group and after trying multiple strategies to have the group pay for itself, SHE MOVED AWAY FROM FACEBOOK. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Danielle is the host of the Thought Card podcast and one of the founders of the Women of Color Podcasters. In addition to being a podcaster, she's also is an Author, Podcast Coach, Freelance Writer and more. 

       Today We Find Out

       The happy accident that was the start of the WOC Podcasters group.

       The multiple ways she attempted to monetize.

       Her thoughts about the "hot leads" from Facebook.

       Why she moved to Circle, and her favorite features.

       How she stayed sane running a group of 4000+ people.

       How she has expanded the group since moving off of Facebook.

       We get insight into her 17 different streams of income.

       Because of her podcast she is QUITTING HER DAY JOB!

       Glenn The Geek Road Report

       Glenn has recorded a few episodes on the road this week, and at one point was in the parking lot of a liquor store to get good wi-fi. He is getting great feedback from his audience, and seeing the products that people have purchased after hearing it on his show. 

       Glenn then has the customer record a testimonial about the product and sends it to the sponsor (this should make it easy to renew their contract as Glenn has audible proof that advertising on his show works). 

       Check out Gleen at www.horseradionetwork.com

       Question of the Month

       I need your answers by 8/27/21 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts.

       Leading the Bleeding ( A Journey Podcast)

       I start a new strictly hobby podcast that will help me understand more about earning Bitcoin with your podcast. See www.value4value.io for more information. So far I've earned 65.74 (131,866 sats) and will be joined by my friend Harry Durran from Podcast Junkies and (hopefully) many more people as we create a "Study group." In the words of the great band King's X, "Everybody knows a little bit of Something" and we hope to get a group of people into a zoom meeting and share ideas, insights, and education. 

       To check out the first episode, "You've Got to Start Somewhere" and add our first meeting by visiting leadingthebleeding.com/meeting

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned On This Episode

       Danielle Desir Website

       Thought Card podcast

       Women of Color Podcasters

       Circle.so Community Platform

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       The Dip By Seth Godin

       Fountain App (stream bitcoin to podcasters)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>Today Danielle Desir built up a sizeable Facebook group and after trying multiple strategies to have the group pay for itself, SHE MOVED AWAY FROM FACEBOOK. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Danielle is the host of the Thought Card podcast and one of the founders of the Women of Color Podcasters. In addition to being a podcaster, she's also is an Author, Podcast Coach, Freelance Writer and more. 

       Today We Find Out

       The happy accident that was the start of the WOC Podcasters group.

       The multiple ways she attempted to monetize.

       Her thoughts about the "hot leads" from Facebook.

       Why she moved to Circle, and her favorite features.

       How she stayed sane running a group of 4000+ people.

       How she has expanded the group since moving off of Facebook.

       We get insight into her 17 different streams of income.

       Because of her podcast she is QUITTING HER DAY JOB!

       Glenn The Geek Road Report

       Glenn has recorded a few episodes on the road this week, and at one point was in the parking lot of a liquor store to get good wi-fi. He is getting great feedback from his audience, and seeing the products that people have purchased after hearing it on his show. 

       Glenn then has the customer record a testimonial about the product and sends it to the sponsor (this should make it easy to renew their contract as Glenn has audible proof that advertising on his show works). 

       Check out Gleen at www.horseradionetwork.com

       Question of the Month

       I need your answers by 8/27/21 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts.

       Leading the Bleeding ( A Journey Podcast)

       I start a new strictly hobby podcast that will help me understand more about earning Bitcoin with your podcast. See www.value4value.io for more information. So far I've earned 65.74 (131,866 sats) and will be joined by my friend Harry Durran from Podcast Junkies and (hopefully) many more people as we create a "Study group." In the words of the great band King's X, "Everybody knows a little bit of Something" and we hope to get a group of people into a zoom meeting and share ideas, insights, and education. 

       To check out the first episode, "You've Got to Start Somewhere" and add our first meeting by visiting leadingthebleeding.com/meeting

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned On This Episode

       Danielle Desir Website

       Thought Card podcast

       Women of Color Podcasters

       Circle.so Community Platform

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       The Dip By Seth Godin

       Fountain App (stream bitcoin to podcasters)

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>3fdf700b-0b5b-47e4-9911-ae29c47abc3bMon, 23 Aug 2021 04:06:49 -040046:13falsefull789789Should My Podcast Be an LLC?We have many topics this week. If your app uses chapters you can jump to the next subject. We are talking about becoming an LLC

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Create an LLC

       Zoom Podtrak P4 Recorder/Interface/Mixer

       Show Notes Summit

       My Gear

       My Podcast Reviews

       QR Code Creation Video

       Podpage (create your podcast website in minutes)

       Give Back Value For the Show

       No Agenda Show

       Rich Dad Poor Dad (free book on Audible)

       Deb Shepherd Podcast

       Horse Radio Network

       New Podcast Apps

       TOPICS

       00:00  Put it Back in the Oven 01:28  Intro 02:05  Because of My Podcast: 10,000 Donation 04:49  Mailbag: Discovery Revisited 09:59  Why Did My Show Stop Growing 12:13  You Never Know Who Is Listening 14:29  SPONSOR Podpage 16:37  Should I Create an LLC? 28:05  Glen The Geek IN MY STUDIO 36:16  Podcast Yearbook 43:08  Show Notes Summit 44:27  schoolofpodcasting.com/value

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>We have many topics this week. If your app uses chapters you can jump to the next subject. We are talking about becoming an LLC

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Create an LLC

       Zoom Podtrak P4 Recorder/Interface/Mixer

       Show Notes Summit

       My Gear

       My Podcast Reviews

       QR Code Creation Video

       Podpage (create your podcast website in minutes)

       Give Back Value For the Show

       No Agenda Show

       Rich Dad Poor Dad (free book on Audible)

       Deb Shepherd Podcast

       Horse Radio Network

       New Podcast Apps

       TOPICS

       00:00  Put it Back in the Oven 01:28  Intro 02:05  Because of My Podcast: 10,000 Donation 04:49  Mailbag: Discovery Revisited 09:59  Why Did My Show Stop Growing 12:13  You Never Know Who Is Listening 14:29  SPONSOR Podpage 16:37  Should I Create an LLC? 28:05  Glen The Geek IN MY STUDIO 36:16  Podcast Yearbook 43:08  Show Notes Summit 44:27  schoolofpodcasting.com/value

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>b7f6ebdb-3709-4e08-b66a-09fcba2e28a9Mon, 16 Aug 2021 02:50:50 -040045:37falsefull788788New Survey Sheds Light on Content Creator Monetization EffortsMany entrepreneurs say they are unemployable, well Joe Pulizzi  (of Content Inc) has a new company called The Tilt (We’re Turning Content Creators into Content Entrepreneurs) just published The unconventionals. It's a report based on 1400 Content Entrepreneurs and what it takes to build a successful content business.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Lessons From the Car

       When I was driving doing 75 mph in my Toyota Camry, if you're guest is using their built-in microphone I couldn't understand what they were saying. Also, just like a GPS that is constantly looking for more efficient ways to get you to your destination, your podcast operates the same way. As you listen to your audience, you can steer your show to success.

       It Turns Out People Are Listening...

       In attending an event where my audience is (Podcast Movement 2021), I ran into a few people who listen to my show. I ran into Peter Ferioli of the Music Podcast Network, Riki Rachtman from MTV's the Headbanger Ball (who now has his own podcasts). While it feeds your ego, you also have the opportunity to get instant feedback on your show. This is always amazing to get feedback, and you actually see that people are listening to you.

       Glenn The Geek HRN Tour Report

       Glenn is going on a five-week 3200-mile tour including 14 states, 12 meetups, 1 wedding, to meet his listeners. he is staying at listener farms and campgrounds. 

       Glenn is loving the Zoom Podtrak P4 and using four Samson Q2U microphones. He is recording into the P4 and also uses Hindenburg Journalist

       Follow Glenn on the Horses in the Morning Facebook Page or check out his Horse Radio Network Website.

       Question of the Month

       Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts... I need your answer by 8/27/21 see

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       FULL PDF REPORT - The unconventionals

       Podpage

       Profit From Your Podcast Book (and Podcast)

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Samson Q2U microphones

       Podia Everything you need to sell courses, webinars, downloads, and memberships.

       Teachable - Create online courses and coaching services.

       Podcast Movement

       RocknPod Event

       Big Podcast Book

       the Music Podcast Network

       Riki Rachtman

       Tourpreneur Podcast

       Spybrary

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>Many entrepreneurs say they are unemployable, well Joe Pulizzi  (of Content Inc) has a new company called The Tilt (We’re Turning Content Creators into Content Entrepreneurs) just published The unconventionals. It's a report based on 1400 Content Entrepreneurs and what it takes to build a successful content business.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Lessons From the Car

       When I was driving doing 75 mph in my Toyota Camry, if you're guest is using their built-in microphone I couldn't understand what they were saying. Also, just like a GPS that is constantly looking for more efficient ways to get you to your destination, your podcast operates the same way. As you listen to your audience, you can steer your show to success.

       It Turns Out People Are Listening...

       In attending an event where my audience is (Podcast Movement 2021), I ran into a few people who listen to my show. I ran into Peter Ferioli of the Music Podcast Network, Riki Rachtman from MTV's the Headbanger Ball (who now has his own podcasts). While it feeds your ego, you also have the opportunity to get instant feedback on your show. This is always amazing to get feedback, and you actually see that people are listening to you.

       Glenn The Geek HRN Tour Report

       Glenn is going on a five-week 3200-mile tour including 14 states, 12 meetups, 1 wedding, to meet his listeners. he is staying at listener farms and campgrounds. 

       Glenn is loving the Zoom Podtrak P4 and using four Samson Q2U microphones. He is recording into the P4 and also uses Hindenburg Journalist

       Follow Glenn on the Horses in the Morning Facebook Page or check out his Horse Radio Network Website.

       Question of the Month

       Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  (Be sure to mention your show and website) Share your thoughts... I need your answer by 8/27/21 see

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       FULL PDF REPORT - The unconventionals

       Podpage

       Profit From Your Podcast Book (and Podcast)

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Samson Q2U microphones

       Podia Everything you need to sell courses, webinars, downloads, and memberships.

       Teachable - Create online courses and coaching services.

       Podcast Movement

       RocknPod Event

       Big Podcast Book

       the Music Podcast Network

       Riki Rachtman

       Tourpreneur Podcast

       Spybrary

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>55adb788-71d7-4c35-bb07-9d4e7f29e828Mon, 09 Aug 2021 03:33:32 -040043:19falsefull787787What Makes This Podcast Great? Jordan Harbinger EditionWhile you can learn from other people's mistakes, you can also learn from other's successes. Jordan Harbinger has been on the show multiple times. He first shared what was working for him back on episode 402 and he had left his career as a lawyer. He was uber transparent on episode 618 on starting his new show.

       When I heard episode 540 of the Jordan Harbinger Show, I had to reach out to Jordan and say how awesome it was. As I looked at the show/episode deeper (and his website) there are a ton of strategies to learn from.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Lessons Learned

       1. Jordan promotes what you missed, and let's you know what's coming.
       2. His opening tease made me want to hear more without "spoiling" the episode. His fluid transition of his guest left me (again) wanting to hear more.
       3. Jordan has created starter packs to get new listeners to the best stuff quickly.
       4. Jordan does the work. He reads the book, watches the movie, etc. He does the research for his guest, and consequently asks the best questions that lead to great stories.
       5. His guest had a great story AND could tell it. (Example, actors are skilled at reading other people's words and may not be a great interview).
       6. He makes points by sharing insights into his life.
       7. He put his sponsors in the episode AND on his "Deals" page. This (probably) results in more sales, and makes it easy to share
       8. He explains WHY you should go to his website.
       9. He has blog posts that are long (to attract Google) and are very well written. These also have links to his episodes. HE can then mention this on his episodes which is another reason to check out the website.
       10. While his primary income is sponsors, he also has a page of all the books from his guests (which use affiliate links). Remember, pennies make dollars.
       11. You get to know him based on his entertainment recommendations.
       
       

       Findability vs Discoverability

       I wrote an article 5 Ways To Get Your Podcast Discovered some people took to Twitter to say I was wrong. One person was Tanner Cambell from Real Talk Podcasting. He explained how:

       Findability: How easy it is for someone to locate known data, information, or knowledge using search or browse?

       Example: Googling "Golf Podcast."

       Discoverability: How easy is it for someone to encounter information or knowledge that was not explicitly sought out?

       Example: Pandora suggesting songs based on your feedback. Amazon suggesting products. Netflix suggesting shows based on your feedback.

       After an uncomfortable discussion, I realize I was confusing the two.

       For me, my friends are my discoverability system. They know what I would enjoy and recommend podcasts for me to listen to that I may not have heard about.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jordan Harbinger Website

       Jordan Harbinger Episode with Daryl Davis

       Daryl Davis Documentary Accidental Courtesy

       Klan-destine Relationships Book

       Podpage

       Dave's YouTube Video on Discoverability

       What Makes This Podcast Great: Marc Maron

       The War of Art Audiobook - Steven Pressfield

       Real Talk Podcasting

       Dave on Twitter

       Tourpreneur

       Spybrary

       Support This Show

       ]]>While you can learn from other people's mistakes, you can also learn from other's successes. Jordan Harbinger has been on the show multiple times. He first shared what was working for him back on episode 402 and he had left his career as a lawyer. He was uber transparent on episode 618 on starting his new show.

       When I heard episode 540 of the Jordan Harbinger Show, I had to reach out to Jordan and say how awesome it was. As I looked at the show/episode deeper (and his website) there are a ton of strategies to learn from.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Lessons Learned

       1. Jordan promotes what you missed, and let's you know what's coming.
       2. His opening tease made me want to hear more without "spoiling" the episode. His fluid transition of his guest left me (again) wanting to hear more.
       3. Jordan has created starter packs to get new listeners to the best stuff quickly.
       4. Jordan does the work. He reads the book, watches the movie, etc. He does the research for his guest, and consequently asks the best questions that lead to great stories.
       5. His guest had a great story AND could tell it. (Example, actors are skilled at reading other people's words and may not be a great interview).
       6. He makes points by sharing insights into his life.
       7. He put his sponsors in the episode AND on his "Deals" page. This (probably) results in more sales, and makes it easy to share
       8. He explains WHY you should go to his website.
       9. He has blog posts that are long (to attract Google) and are very well written. These also have links to his episodes. HE can then mention this on his episodes which is another reason to check out the website.
       10. While his primary income is sponsors, he also has a page of all the books from his guests (which use affiliate links). Remember, pennies make dollars.
       11. You get to know him based on his entertainment recommendations.
       
       

       Findability vs Discoverability

       I wrote an article 5 Ways To Get Your Podcast Discovered some people took to Twitter to say I was wrong. One person was Tanner Cambell from Real Talk Podcasting. He explained how:

       Findability: How easy it is for someone to locate known data, information, or knowledge using search or browse?

       Example: Googling "Golf Podcast."

       Discoverability: How easy is it for someone to encounter information or knowledge that was not explicitly sought out?

       Example: Pandora suggesting songs based on your feedback. Amazon suggesting products. Netflix suggesting shows based on your feedback.

       After an uncomfortable discussion, I realize I was confusing the two.

       For me, my friends are my discoverability system. They know what I would enjoy and recommend podcasts for me to listen to that I may not have heard about.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Jordan Harbinger Website

       Jordan Harbinger Episode with Daryl Davis

       Daryl Davis Documentary Accidental Courtesy

       Klan-destine Relationships Book

       Podpage

       Dave's YouTube Video on Discoverability

       What Makes This Podcast Great: Marc Maron

       The War of Art Audiobook - Steven Pressfield

       Real Talk Podcasting

       Dave on Twitter

       Tourpreneur

       Spybrary

       Support This Show

       ]]>621f93fa-b871-4e35-965c-bdb588094b9aMon, 02 Aug 2021 04:05:00 -040045:48falsefull786786What Would You Miss If You Had to Stop Podcasting?What would happen if some life event happened and you couldn't podcast anymore? What would you miss the most? 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Kris and Kristine Show

       The White Collared Podcast

       Foster Care: An Unparalleled Journey

       The Pharmacists Voice

       What Was That Like?

       History of North America

       Marriage Advice From the Divorced Guy

       Logitech C920

       Elgato Facecam

       Sone VZ-1

       Elgato Key Lights

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

        

       Podcasting Can Bring You Out Of Your Shell

       Podcasting is great for introverts as you get to meet thousands of people without meeting thousands of people. You can then meet the like-minded people you attract, and eventually, get up enough nerve to meet people you have nothing in common with.

       You Don't Need to Buy Top-Notch Uber Expensive Gear

       If you wait to start your podcast until you can spend THOUSANDS on equipment, don't. You can start a solo podcast for less than a price of an xbox. 

       Start Today

       Question of the Month

       I need the answers by August 27th, 2021. The question is: Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  I'd love to hear both yes and no answers (for the record my answer is yes, but feel free to change my mind. I'd love a good dialogue. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>What would happen if some life event happened and you couldn't podcast anymore? What would you miss the most? 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Kris and Kristine Show

       The White Collared Podcast

       Foster Care: An Unparalleled Journey

       The Pharmacists Voice

       What Was That Like?

       History of North America

       Marriage Advice From the Divorced Guy

       Logitech C920

       Elgato Facecam

       Sone VZ-1

       Elgato Key Lights

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasting 2.0

       New Podcast Apps

        

       Podcasting Can Bring You Out Of Your Shell

       Podcasting is great for introverts as you get to meet thousands of people without meeting thousands of people. You can then meet the like-minded people you attract, and eventually, get up enough nerve to meet people you have nothing in common with.

       You Don't Need to Buy Top-Notch Uber Expensive Gear

       If you wait to start your podcast until you can spend THOUSANDS on equipment, don't. You can start a solo podcast for less than a price of an xbox. 

       Start Today

       Question of the Month

       I need the answers by August 27th, 2021. The question is: Can you achieve podcasting success without being a celebrity?  I'd love to hear both yes and no answers (for the record my answer is yes, but feel free to change my mind. I'd love a good dialogue. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>4ca4a0dc-32e3-4564-86c8-91bd8fa85357Mon, 26 Jul 2021 04:05:00 -040030:00falsefull785785What Amazing Tips You Can Learn From the Beatles and Kiss To Grow Your Podcast Like a Rock StarThe formula for many successful musicians is to take their influences and mix them into something new and unique. I recently watched a few documentaries, and as a musician, I'm a bit of a nerd when it comes to music history, especially around rock and roll, and today I've got some great stories that can help your podcast.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Rockstar Lessons From the Beatles and Kiss

       • Start with your why
       • Same but different
       • Sharpen your axes
       • Make your show hard to copy
       • Sacrifices will be made
       • Friendly competition is good
       • Don't promote until your audience says its good
       • Get people talking about you
       • Money changes everything
       • Don't be bored
       
       

       I think the item that really made me go "Whoa!" was the Beatles having the option to come to the US, and they postponed it until they had a hit. Likewise, Kiss walking out on a record deal as the music wasn't right.

       Podcast Rewind

       I've been interviewed on the following podcasts:

       Monetization Nation

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Question of the Month

       What would you miss the most if you have to quit podcasting? I need your answer by 7/23/21

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       McCartney 3, 2, 1 on Hulu

       Kisstory on A & E

       Monetization Nation

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast

       Full show notes of 784

        

       ]]>The formula for many successful musicians is to take their influences and mix them into something new and unique. I recently watched a few documentaries, and as a musician, I'm a bit of a nerd when it comes to music history, especially around rock and roll, and today I've got some great stories that can help your podcast.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage is the easiest way to build a website for your podcast that looks great without having to learn a bunch of technology. It's super easy to have a website in 5 minutes. Try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 

       Rockstar Lessons From the Beatles and Kiss

       • Start with your why
       • Same but different
       • Sharpen your axes
       • Make your show hard to copy
       • Sacrifices will be made
       • Friendly competition is good
       • Don't promote until your audience says its good
       • Get people talking about you
       • Money changes everything
       • Don't be bored
       
       

       I think the item that really made me go "Whoa!" was the Beatles having the option to come to the US, and they postponed it until they had a hit. Likewise, Kiss walking out on a record deal as the music wasn't right.

       Podcast Rewind

       I've been interviewed on the following podcasts:

       Monetization Nation

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Question of the Month

       What would you miss the most if you have to quit podcasting? I need your answer by 7/23/21

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       You may think nobody would listen to you, but I'm here to tell you they will. I have proven strategies to help you identify exactly what your audience wants. You will sound professional, and won't have to spend a million dollars to sound great. Learn through our online tutorials, live group coaching and a private Facebook Group filled with brilliant podcasters. Join worry-free with a 40-day money-back guarantee. See schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       McCartney 3, 2, 1 on Hulu

       Kisstory on A & E

       Monetization Nation

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Profit From Your Podcast

       Full show notes of 784

        

       ]]>119568ea-feda-4bbe-99c8-59bd843280efMon, 19 Jul 2021 04:05:00 -040037:19falsefull784784Is Podcast Success Only For Celebrities?"Is podcast success only for celebrities?" This is a question many podcasters ask themselves after they start their podcast and find out how much work it really takes to make it successful. Listeners don't care if you're an established celebrity or not. They want good content.

       Full episode description at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/783

       Ready to Get Into the Arena With a Podcast?

       I would love to help you get a professional-sounding, super targeted, extra-engaging podcast off the ground. Let me take my 16 years of podcasting experience to help you avoid the common pitfalls. Come work with me. 

       Enjoy the Podcast But Don't Need My Services?

       I've provided value, you can provide value here.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       If you want a great-looking website for your podcast, quit trying to squeeze a podcast into a template for something that is not a podcast. Quit trying to learn Javascript. You get get a great-looking website for your podcast in 5 minutes. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podpage

       Learn Podpage (for free)

       Joe Rogan's first live stream

       Joe Rogan Interviews Adam Curry

       No Agenda Show,

       Mike Rowe - What Not How Episode

       Paris Hilton Podcast

       New Media Show

       Jerry Seinfeld Video

       Guitar Speak Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Book a Podcast Strategy Call

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Sign up for the Newsletter

       ]]>"Is podcast success only for celebrities?" This is a question many podcasters ask themselves after they start their podcast and find out how much work it really takes to make it successful. Listeners don't care if you're an established celebrity or not. They want good content.

       Full episode description at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/783

       Ready to Get Into the Arena With a Podcast?

       I would love to help you get a professional-sounding, super targeted, extra-engaging podcast off the ground. Let me take my 16 years of podcasting experience to help you avoid the common pitfalls. Come work with me. 

       Enjoy the Podcast But Don't Need My Services?

       I've provided value, you can provide value here.

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       If you want a great-looking website for your podcast, quit trying to squeeze a podcast into a template for something that is not a podcast. Quit trying to learn Javascript. You get get a great-looking website for your podcast in 5 minutes. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podpage

       Learn Podpage (for free)

       Joe Rogan's first live stream

       Joe Rogan Interviews Adam Curry

       No Agenda Show,

       Mike Rowe - What Not How Episode

       Paris Hilton Podcast

       New Media Show

       Jerry Seinfeld Video

       Guitar Speak Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Book a Podcast Strategy Call

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Sign up for the Newsletter

       ]]>972a349b-42b8-4c8e-8a4c-d5b23bb23919Mon, 12 Jul 2021 04:00:00 -040043:17falsefull783783Bob Staggenborg - Nature Guys6b03ef6e5212029b0466b7dd059f96b0Fri, 09 Jul 2021 02:56:45 -040002:58falsefullWhy Did I Get This Feedback?You can learn from your mistakes and do less of those.

       You can also look at anything that worked well and do more of that. 

       This week I talk about episode 780 with Adam Curry. I had more people connect with me to say, "Hey, I really liked that interviewed" and I started asking them WHY? What made it stick out? Today I share their answers. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast without a giant amount of technical know-how. There is no need to cram a podcast into a theme made for a restaurant on Squarespace, a personal trainer on Wix, or the nightmares that are WordPress themes and plugin conflicts. Podpage is made based on podcaster feedback for podcasters!. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Marc Maron Interviews Quentin Tarantino

       Podcasting 2.0 and the Podcast Index

       My Interview With Adam Curry

       Paul Colligan

       Glen the Geek

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       A Time For Horses

       Power of Podcasting Network (All of Dave's Podcasting Shows)

       Profit From Your Podcast (Dave's Book)

       Join The School of Podcasting

       Schedule a Podcast Strategy Meeting

       ]]>You can learn from your mistakes and do less of those.

       You can also look at anything that worked well and do more of that. 

       This week I talk about episode 780 with Adam Curry. I had more people connect with me to say, "Hey, I really liked that interviewed" and I started asking them WHY? What made it stick out? Today I share their answers. 

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Podpage makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast without a giant amount of technical know-how. There is no need to cram a podcast into a theme made for a restaurant on Squarespace, a personal trainer on Wix, or the nightmares that are WordPress themes and plugin conflicts. Podpage is made based on podcaster feedback for podcasters!. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Marc Maron Interviews Quentin Tarantino

       Podcasting 2.0 and the Podcast Index

       My Interview With Adam Curry

       Paul Colligan

       Glen the Geek

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       A Time For Horses

       Power of Podcasting Network (All of Dave's Podcasting Shows)

       Profit From Your Podcast (Dave's Book)

       Join The School of Podcasting

       Schedule a Podcast Strategy Meeting

       ]]>19323eaf-61b3-4456-a456-76b47acf2b5bMon, 05 Jul 2021 04:19:42 -040040:23falsefull782782ATTITUDE: Joe Saul-Sehy's Secret Weapon to Podcast SuccessToday we hear part 2 of my conversation with Joe from Stacking Benjamins (Hear Part 1) comes back to talk about joining Westwood One, why he has a coach and his attitude towards making his show better. 
       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Have you tried Podpage? Podpage makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast. You don't need any technical knowledge. Just put in your RSS feed from your media host, and Podpage does the rest. You can try it for free for seven days - no credit card required. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       TOPICS:

       00:00 Gordon the Guided Missile 03:00 Welcome to the Show

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH 04:38 Podcasting Pet Peeves 04:54 York from Poetic Earthlings 06:59 Seth - Geekville Radio 08:53 Dan - Based on a True Story IS YOUR PODCAST GOOD? 11:33 Most Haters Just Leave 14:41 Do You REALLY Want Advice? 16:01 Before You Buy Facebook Ads 16:44 How to Not Feel SALESY

       18:30 SPONSOR: Podpage JOE'S AMAZING ATTITUDE 20:40 Joe From Stackingbenjamins.com 21:12 Why Did Joe Join a Network? 24:20 "Messing" with his content? 25:54 Why Does Someone Successful Need a Coach? 27:27 What Innovations Did You Do? 31:04 How Joe Inspires You To Listen to the Ads 32:31 Knowledge is Powerful When Acted Upon 34:26 Being Everywhere 35:54 Great Points: recap

       GET MORE OF JOE

       Stacking Benjamins Podcast

       Pre-order his book, "Stacked: Your Super-Serious Guide to Modern Money Management" 

       YOUR ATTITUDE 36:55 It Doesn't Have to Be Perfect 38:41 2 Quick Quotes

       JULY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       40:18 July Question of the Month If you had to stop podcasting (the reason doesn't matter) what would you miss the most? Answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       INSIGHTS FROM SPARK CHRISTIAN PODCAST CONFERENCE 42:20 Example of Standing Out 47:35 In-Person Events ROCK 50:30 Coming Soon

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE ( 781 )

       The Importance of Mistakes (John Cleese)

       Podpage (learn Podpage for free)

       School of Podcasting - Plan, Launch, Grow and Monetize Your Podcast

       Poetic Earthlings

       Geekville Radio

       Based on a True Story

       Author Media ( Thomas Umstattd Jr. )

       Fantastical Truth Podcast (Zach Russell)

       Jordan Harbinger Asking Advice Episode

       Pre-order Joe's book, "Stacked: Your Super-Serious Guide to Modern Money Management" 

       Focus on the Family

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       Part 1 of My talk With Joe (About Reviews)

       The Chosen (Online Series - Interesting Crowdfunding)

       Tara-Leigh Cobble

       Author Media - Thomas Umstattdt Jr.

       Fantastical Truth - Zachary Russell

       ]]>Today we hear part 2 of my conversation with Joe from Stacking Benjamins (Hear Part 1) comes back to talk about joining Westwood One, why he has a coach and his attitude towards making his show better. 
       SPONSOR: Podpage

       Have you tried Podpage? Podpage makes it super easy to make a website for your podcast. You don't need any technical knowledge. Just put in your RSS feed from your media host, and Podpage does the rest. You can try it for free for seven days - no credit card required. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       TOPICS:

       00:00 Gordon the Guided Missile 03:00 Welcome to the Show

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH 04:38 Podcasting Pet Peeves 04:54 York from Poetic Earthlings 06:59 Seth - Geekville Radio 08:53 Dan - Based on a True Story IS YOUR PODCAST GOOD? 11:33 Most Haters Just Leave 14:41 Do You REALLY Want Advice? 16:01 Before You Buy Facebook Ads 16:44 How to Not Feel SALESY

       18:30 SPONSOR: Podpage JOE'S AMAZING ATTITUDE 20:40 Joe From Stackingbenjamins.com 21:12 Why Did Joe Join a Network? 24:20 "Messing" with his content? 25:54 Why Does Someone Successful Need a Coach? 27:27 What Innovations Did You Do? 31:04 How Joe Inspires You To Listen to the Ads 32:31 Knowledge is Powerful When Acted Upon 34:26 Being Everywhere 35:54 Great Points: recap

       GET MORE OF JOE

       Stacking Benjamins Podcast

       Pre-order his book, "Stacked: Your Super-Serious Guide to Modern Money Management" 

       YOUR ATTITUDE 36:55 It Doesn't Have to Be Perfect 38:41 2 Quick Quotes

       JULY QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       40:18 July Question of the Month If you had to stop podcasting (the reason doesn't matter) what would you miss the most? Answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       INSIGHTS FROM SPARK CHRISTIAN PODCAST CONFERENCE 42:20 Example of Standing Out 47:35 In-Person Events ROCK 50:30 Coming Soon

       MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE ( 781 )

       The Importance of Mistakes (John Cleese)

       Podpage (learn Podpage for free)

       School of Podcasting - Plan, Launch, Grow and Monetize Your Podcast

       Poetic Earthlings

       Geekville Radio

       Based on a True Story

       Author Media ( Thomas Umstattd Jr. )

       Fantastical Truth Podcast (Zach Russell)

       Jordan Harbinger Asking Advice Episode

       Pre-order Joe's book, "Stacked: Your Super-Serious Guide to Modern Money Management" 

       Focus on the Family

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       Part 1 of My talk With Joe (About Reviews)

       The Chosen (Online Series - Interesting Crowdfunding)

       Tara-Leigh Cobble

       Author Media - Thomas Umstattdt Jr.

       Fantastical Truth - Zachary Russell

       ]]>4f239af6-46cf-44bf-a47d-5ccf97480386Mon, 28 Jun 2021 04:00:00 -040051:56falsefull781781Preserving podcasting as a platform for free speech. Adam Curry and Podcasting 2.0Today I am blessed to interview the man who helped invent podcasting. Many people know him from his time as a VJ on MTV but there is so much more to Adam than his leather jacket and golden locks of hair.
       • Born in Va but moved to the Netherlands when he was 7. He built his first transistor radio when he was 15, and by 16 was a station announcer for a hospital. He later worked on Dutch Pirate Radio, and Radio Decibel in Amsterdam.
       • He's also worked part-time in a computer store where he built his own modem.
       • Yes, he was on MTV as a DJ from 1987-1994.
       • Seeing the power of the Internet he started OnRamp which turned into Think New Ideas. 1996 Adam Curry served as CTO of Think New Ideas. He built websites for Budweiser, bud light, and put together the first Live Stream of the Grammys. (the sponsor was one of the first digital cameras).
       • Podshow (a podcast network, later renamed Mevio) was launched 2004 to 2014. It focused on selling ads for a cast of podcasters.
       • In 2005  hosted a show on Sirius Satelite Radio that spotlighted podcasts.
       • In 2007 he launched the No Agenda Show with John C Divorak which uses the value for value model.
       
       

       He's part pirate, part broadcaster, part nerd, and part businessman, he's the Podfather, and today we are talking podcasting 2.0

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       If you are a person who understands that having a website for your podcast is important but doesn't have a clue how to build one. You hate WordPress, and found Squarespace confusing, you can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes (just enter your RSS feed and Podpage does the rest). See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Topics Covered With Adam:

       The problem with podcasting networks ( 7:20)

       The history of the No Agenda Show (14:50)

       What is Podcasting 2.0 and how to get started (27:05)

       Mentioned in This Episode

       www.noagendashow.com

       www.podcastindex.org

       www.coinbase.com 

       Strike Bitcoin Wallet

       James Cridland Article

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Avoid sounding unprofessional

       Learn how to connect with your audience

       Get your show listed in Apple, Spotify, Google and More

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Today I am blessed to interview the man who helped invent podcasting. Many people know him from his time as a VJ on MTV but there is so much more to Adam than his leather jacket and golden locks of hair.
       • Born in Va but moved to the Netherlands when he was 7. He built his first transistor radio when he was 15, and by 16 was a station announcer for a hospital. He later worked on Dutch Pirate Radio, and Radio Decibel in Amsterdam.
       • He's also worked part-time in a computer store where he built his own modem.
       • Yes, he was on MTV as a DJ from 1987-1994.
       • Seeing the power of the Internet he started OnRamp which turned into Think New Ideas. 1996 Adam Curry served as CTO of Think New Ideas. He built websites for Budweiser, bud light, and put together the first Live Stream of the Grammys. (the sponsor was one of the first digital cameras).
       • Podshow (a podcast network, later renamed Mevio) was launched 2004 to 2014. It focused on selling ads for a cast of podcasters.
       • In 2005  hosted a show on Sirius Satelite Radio that spotlighted podcasts.
       • In 2007 he launched the No Agenda Show with John C Divorak which uses the value for value model.
       
       

       He's part pirate, part broadcaster, part nerd, and part businessman, he's the Podfather, and today we are talking podcasting 2.0

       SPONSOR: Podpage

       If you are a person who understands that having a website for your podcast is important but doesn't have a clue how to build one. You hate WordPress, and found Squarespace confusing, you can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes (just enter your RSS feed and Podpage does the rest). See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Topics Covered With Adam:

       The problem with podcasting networks ( 7:20)

       The history of the No Agenda Show (14:50)

       What is Podcasting 2.0 and how to get started (27:05)

       Mentioned in This Episode

       www.noagendashow.com

       www.podcastindex.org

       www.coinbase.com 

       Strike Bitcoin Wallet

       James Cridland Article

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Avoid sounding unprofessional

       Learn how to connect with your audience

       Get your show listed in Apple, Spotify, Google and More

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>1fee470b-5e4c-4a34-9b9e-97ce348af78aMon, 21 Jun 2021 04:05:00 -040001:04:29falsefull780780Have I Underestimated the Power of Apple Podcast Reviews?Today I am joined by Joe Saul-Sehy from Stacking Benjamins (which was recently added to the Westwood One Network). Joe recently took a class lead by Sinan Aral (author of the book The Hype Machine) and while it's been proven over and over that Apple ratings and Reviews do not help you in the apple podcast charts, but how much influence do ratings have for those looking for new podcasts?
       Sponsor: Podpage

       If you're not a technical person, and you're looking for a "Set it and forget it" solution to your podcast's website, look no further than Podpage. You can create a beautiful website in five minutes. I use podpage on the Podcast Rodeo Show, Podcast Review Show, Ask the Podcast Coach, and others. It is being built based on the Feedback of 1000 podcasters in their Facebook group. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Check out this video to see how easy it is to setup your show.

       Mentioned In This Episode:

       Stacking Benjamins

       The Hype Machine Book

       Podpage

       Learn Podpage Free Course

       Leave a 5 Star Review For the School of Podcasting

       Take this quick three-question survey about Podcast Reviews

       Google Trends

       Jacobs Media

       My Podcast Reviews

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Topics:

       05:26 The Importance of Reviews (outside of Apple charts) 12:35 Follow Trends ( see Google Trends ) 15:48 A Faster Way To Create Audiograms 16:38 Managing a Community (want a Facebook Alternative? Check out the Circle Platform) 20:26 SPONSOR:schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 22:09 Give Your Listeners What They Want 25:13 78% of Podcast Discovery is Word of Mouth according to Jacobs Media 29:49 Looking at My Reviews via My Podcast Reviews ( 4 months free on your first yearly subscription ) 31:29 Another Strategy to Battle 1 Star Reviews 33:16 Have I Frightened You From Pressing Record? 34:05 Getting Out Of Our Own Way 37:14 You WILL Get a One Star Review 38:32 Getting Reviews Outside of Apple 39:45 Thanks To My Team 40:31 Bloopers

       ]]>Today I am joined by Joe Saul-Sehy from Stacking Benjamins (which was recently added to the Westwood One Network). Joe recently took a class lead by Sinan Aral (author of the book The Hype Machine) and while it's been proven over and over that Apple ratings and Reviews do not help you in the apple podcast charts, but how much influence do ratings have for those looking for new podcasts?
       Sponsor: Podpage

       If you're not a technical person, and you're looking for a "Set it and forget it" solution to your podcast's website, look no further than Podpage. You can create a beautiful website in five minutes. I use podpage on the Podcast Rodeo Show, Podcast Review Show, Ask the Podcast Coach, and others. It is being built based on the Feedback of 1000 podcasters in their Facebook group. You can try it for free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage

       Check out this video to see how easy it is to setup your show.

       Mentioned In This Episode:

       Stacking Benjamins

       The Hype Machine Book

       Podpage

       Learn Podpage Free Course

       Leave a 5 Star Review For the School of Podcasting

       Take this quick three-question survey about Podcast Reviews

       Google Trends

       Jacobs Media

       My Podcast Reviews

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Topics:

       05:26 The Importance of Reviews (outside of Apple charts) 12:35 Follow Trends ( see Google Trends ) 15:48 A Faster Way To Create Audiograms 16:38 Managing a Community (want a Facebook Alternative? Check out the Circle Platform) 20:26 SPONSOR:schoolofpodcasting.com/trypodpage 22:09 Give Your Listeners What They Want 25:13 78% of Podcast Discovery is Word of Mouth according to Jacobs Media 29:49 Looking at My Reviews via My Podcast Reviews ( 4 months free on your first yearly subscription ) 31:29 Another Strategy to Battle 1 Star Reviews 33:16 Have I Frightened You From Pressing Record? 34:05 Getting Out Of Our Own Way 37:14 You WILL Get a One Star Review 38:32 Getting Reviews Outside of Apple 39:45 Thanks To My Team 40:31 Bloopers

       ]]>71a58b9f-9875-4a7e-9674-2bed7aad445dMon, 14 Jun 2021 04:05:00 -040041:09falsefull779779Behind the Scenes of Podcast Movement NashvillePodcast Movement Nashville is one of the Podcast Industries' first in-person events. While I'm excited to get in my car and make my way to Nashville, there are those who are nervous about being in crowds, while others have not been cleared to travel. I ask Co-founder Dan Franks how he weathered the storm of 2020, and what he's doing to address the needs of his conference attendees in 2021. 

       Check out PodcastMovement.com for more information

       SPONSOR: Podpage.com

       Automatically create a beautiful, listener-friendly podcast site from your RSS feed. Customize the design to create a professional look you’ll be proud of in a few clicks. No coding or technical knowledge necessary. You can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes! Check out www.podpage.com 

       FREE COURSE: Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage to learn the ins and outs of Podpage.

       Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/778

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Movement

       Podpage.com

       Learn Podpage - Free Course

       John Lee Dumas Interview

       Kate Erickson Interview

       Sendfox

       Mailerlite

       Danny Elfman on Marc Maron

       David Lee Roth on Joe Rogan

       Question of the Month

       Tarzan Economics (free book on Audible)

       Wix Video

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Get instance access to tutorials, private coaching, and a Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You don't have to worry about sounding stupid, spending too much on equipment, or wonder how to get into Apple, Spotify, etc. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>Podcast Movement Nashville is one of the Podcast Industries' first in-person events. While I'm excited to get in my car and make my way to Nashville, there are those who are nervous about being in crowds, while others have not been cleared to travel. I ask Co-founder Dan Franks how he weathered the storm of 2020, and what he's doing to address the needs of his conference attendees in 2021. 

       Check out PodcastMovement.com for more information

       SPONSOR: Podpage.com

       Automatically create a beautiful, listener-friendly podcast site from your RSS feed. Customize the design to create a professional look you’ll be proud of in a few clicks. No coding or technical knowledge necessary. You can build a beautiful podcast website in five minutes! Check out www.podpage.com 

       FREE COURSE: Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage to learn the ins and outs of Podpage.

       Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/778

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Movement

       Podpage.com

       Learn Podpage - Free Course

       John Lee Dumas Interview

       Kate Erickson Interview

       Sendfox

       Mailerlite

       Danny Elfman on Marc Maron

       David Lee Roth on Joe Rogan

       Question of the Month

       Tarzan Economics (free book on Audible)

       Wix Video

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Get instance access to tutorials, private coaching, and a Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You don't have to worry about sounding stupid, spending too much on equipment, or wonder how to get into Apple, Spotify, etc. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>fa9554e1-f5e4-45ec-979b-b5b043b8e1b4Mon, 07 Jun 2021 04:00:00 -040041:51falsefull778778Editing Your Podcast Interview For ContentHow do you decide if something should stay in your podcast episode? For when I listen to the question I asked, I look for:

       1. When did their response start to actually answer the question I asked. 

       2. Is it a good answer? Does it deliver value?

       Today I play some clips of Sean Evans from Hot Ones being interviews by Drew Barrymore the actress turned talk show host. 

       SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING
       • Get the best equipment for your budget
       • Sound professional
       • Learn what your audience wants
       • Network with brilliant podcast minds
       • Private Group Coaching
       • Priority Email Support
       • 30 Day Money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Avoid the Been There Done That

       The guest provides an answer and you have a similar situation that will answer for the second time your question. Was the answer from the guest so unclear that you need to repeat what is essentially the same point? If not, remove your story. The interview is about the guest (not you). 

       Avoid the Back Story

       Sometimes we provide some back story so the guest understands the motivation behind the question. Many times the audience doesn't need to hear the back story. You can edit it out and just leave the part 

       Don't Forget to Ask a Question?

       I find it off that Drew Barrymore often does not ask a question. She says nice things about the guest and just stops. 

       June 2021 Question(s) of the Month

       1. What would the ultimate podcast community look like to you? (This will remain between you and me).

       2. What are your top pet peaves? (this will be public)

       Don't forget to provide:

       The name of your show/ The website. A brief description

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by 6/25/2021

       Need Help With Your Editing?

       Check out Affordable Audio Editing

       Where I Will Be

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference June 22-24 2021Grapevine, TX

       Podcast Movement Nashville Aug 306 20201

       Thanks for sharing this show with a friend

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Steve Carter Easy Stress Cures and EFT Tapping Junction

       Drew Barrymore Interviews Sean Evans

       Last Week Tonight on Paid Placement (with their Fake Product)

       Episodes 776 Nobody Gets On a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going – Your Podcast's Intro

       Episode 771 Podcasting Can Give Your Audience Something They Are Dying To Hear: The Truth

       Question of the Month

       ]]>How do you decide if something should stay in your podcast episode? For when I listen to the question I asked, I look for:

       1. When did their response start to actually answer the question I asked. 

       2. Is it a good answer? Does it deliver value?

       Today I play some clips of Sean Evans from Hot Ones being interviews by Drew Barrymore the actress turned talk show host. 

       SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING
       • Get the best equipment for your budget
       • Sound professional
       • Learn what your audience wants
       • Network with brilliant podcast minds
       • Private Group Coaching
       • Priority Email Support
       • 30 Day Money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Avoid the Been There Done That

       The guest provides an answer and you have a similar situation that will answer for the second time your question. Was the answer from the guest so unclear that you need to repeat what is essentially the same point? If not, remove your story. The interview is about the guest (not you). 

       Avoid the Back Story

       Sometimes we provide some back story so the guest understands the motivation behind the question. Many times the audience doesn't need to hear the back story. You can edit it out and just leave the part 

       Don't Forget to Ask a Question?

       I find it off that Drew Barrymore often does not ask a question. She says nice things about the guest and just stops. 

       June 2021 Question(s) of the Month

       1. What would the ultimate podcast community look like to you? (This will remain between you and me).

       2. What are your top pet peaves? (this will be public)

       Don't forget to provide:

       The name of your show/ The website. A brief description

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question by 6/25/2021

       Need Help With Your Editing?

       Check out Affordable Audio Editing

       Where I Will Be

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference June 22-24 2021Grapevine, TX

       Podcast Movement Nashville Aug 306 20201

       Thanks for sharing this show with a friend

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Steve Carter Easy Stress Cures and EFT Tapping Junction

       Drew Barrymore Interviews Sean Evans

       Last Week Tonight on Paid Placement (with their Fake Product)

       Episodes 776 Nobody Gets On a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going – Your Podcast's Intro

       Episode 771 Podcasting Can Give Your Audience Something They Are Dying To Hear: The Truth

       Question of the Month

       ]]>22aa1736-61be-48b4-8cd7-c89233204efbMon, 31 May 2021 04:00:00 -040034:05falsefull777777Nobody Gets On a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going - Your Podcast's IntroMy Co-host of the Podcast Review Show Eric K Johnson has a saying, "Nobody Gets on a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going." Today we talk about how it is 100% up to you on how you start your episodes. I also talk about insights from reading the book, "The Creator’s Compass" which talks about three different levels of presenting content. 
       Sponsor: School of Podcasting

       Get your podcast off the ground, sounding professional, without spending money on equipment you don't need by using the step-by-step tutorials, the private Facebook Group (filled with brilliant podcast minds) and live group coaching. There is a 30-day money-back guarantee when you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       The Generic Show Introduction

       Welcome to (show name) where we (what you do) so that you can (benefit of listening) our website is (website address). Then introduce the episode, and if you can explain why people should listen to you, throw that in as well. 

       Smooth Transactions Don't Happen By Accident

       When I do the Podcast Review Show with Erik K Johnson so we both can see the points each person wants to make. If needed we loft up a "softball" comment so the person can make their point. Consequently, when I see we have hit all the bullet points I don't have to ask, "Are you ready to move on." 

       James and Sam on Podland do a great job of organizing the many topics they cover into stories that easily transition from one to the next. They transition into interviews by providing just the information that resonates with the listener (do we really need their whole LinkedIn bio? No!) and consequently when the show is over I find myself asking, "Already?" It just flows nicely. This doesn't happen by accident. When you have multiple segments take some time to think about how you are going to transition from one to the other. If you don't do this, it's not the end of the world, but it is often the little things that separate good from great. It's the little things that other people don't take the time to do that can really set you apart. 

       I actually use transition music (SHORT music) to signal my audience that we're moving to a new topic. The bottom line is it is YOUR SHOW and you can do WHATEVER you want. Don't let this stop you from creating your show because it's not "perfect."When in doubt ask someone (not related to you) for feedback and/or do what feels right to you. 

       Three Levels of Content

       I read the ebook The Creator's Compass from Jay Acunzo and I loved it. It really made me think, and it's pretty creative. Here is one thing that made me go, "Oh yeah, that is better."

       Level 1 Content

       You have some gold. (You drop facts in their lap)

       Level 2: What Could Happen

       Here’s some gold. You have some now. And because you have some now, you can do all kinds of things: create some jewelry to feel beautiful or make someone else feel beautiful, etc

       Level 3: Your Opinion

       When you say the phrase, "I think" you take all the information, all the pros and cons and insights you have, and put them into an opinion. 

       Everyone will have their own opinion and that makes your show different than anyone else's sow. 

       Coming Soon: Dissecting Hot Ones on YouTube

       Hot Ones is an amazing show, with AMAZING questions. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Review Show 

       School of Podcasting 

       Podnews

       Podland

       The Creator's Compass from Jay Acunzo

       Uncomfortable Conversations with a Black Man Kindle and Audible

       ]]>My Co-host of the Podcast Review Show Eric K Johnson has a saying, "Nobody Gets on a Bus Without Knowing Where It's Going." Today we talk about how it is 100% up to you on how you start your episodes. I also talk about insights from reading the book, "The Creator’s Compass" which talks about three different levels of presenting content. 
       Sponsor: School of Podcasting

       Get your podcast off the ground, sounding professional, without spending money on equipment you don't need by using the step-by-step tutorials, the private Facebook Group (filled with brilliant podcast minds) and live group coaching. There is a 30-day money-back guarantee when you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       The Generic Show Introduction

       Welcome to (show name) where we (what you do) so that you can (benefit of listening) our website is (website address). Then introduce the episode, and if you can explain why people should listen to you, throw that in as well. 

       Smooth Transactions Don't Happen By Accident

       When I do the Podcast Review Show with Erik K Johnson so we both can see the points each person wants to make. If needed we loft up a "softball" comment so the person can make their point. Consequently, when I see we have hit all the bullet points I don't have to ask, "Are you ready to move on." 

       James and Sam on Podland do a great job of organizing the many topics they cover into stories that easily transition from one to the next. They transition into interviews by providing just the information that resonates with the listener (do we really need their whole LinkedIn bio? No!) and consequently when the show is over I find myself asking, "Already?" It just flows nicely. This doesn't happen by accident. When you have multiple segments take some time to think about how you are going to transition from one to the other. If you don't do this, it's not the end of the world, but it is often the little things that separate good from great. It's the little things that other people don't take the time to do that can really set you apart. 

       I actually use transition music (SHORT music) to signal my audience that we're moving to a new topic. The bottom line is it is YOUR SHOW and you can do WHATEVER you want. Don't let this stop you from creating your show because it's not "perfect."When in doubt ask someone (not related to you) for feedback and/or do what feels right to you. 

       Three Levels of Content

       I read the ebook The Creator's Compass from Jay Acunzo and I loved it. It really made me think, and it's pretty creative. Here is one thing that made me go, "Oh yeah, that is better."

       Level 1 Content

       You have some gold. (You drop facts in their lap)

       Level 2: What Could Happen

       Here’s some gold. You have some now. And because you have some now, you can do all kinds of things: create some jewelry to feel beautiful or make someone else feel beautiful, etc

       Level 3: Your Opinion

       When you say the phrase, "I think" you take all the information, all the pros and cons and insights you have, and put them into an opinion. 

       Everyone will have their own opinion and that makes your show different than anyone else's sow. 

       Coming Soon: Dissecting Hot Ones on YouTube

       Hot Ones is an amazing show, with AMAZING questions. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Review Show 

       School of Podcasting 

       Podnews

       Podland

       The Creator's Compass from Jay Acunzo

       Uncomfortable Conversations with a Black Man Kindle and Audible

       ]]>d78d97a7-509a-45a3-a3f1-17f6e829319dMon, 24 May 2021 04:00:00 -040039:48falsefull776776How to Make Key Decisions For Your PodcastThere are times when we are either planning your podcast, launching it, or you're just trying to get a larger audience. I see people in groups, websites, and meetups where they are stuck in the decision-making process. Today we are going to walk through the basic steps, and look at where and why people get stuck.

        

       Because of My Podcast: Clay Groves is Now the Host of the Morning Radio Show and a Program Director

       Clay is the man behind the Fish Nerds podcast and because of his podcast he was first selected to be the man behind the scenes who does the editing, some voice-over at a station. That lead to him filling in on the weekends which lead to him NOW being the Morning Radio Show host AND Program Director. HOW COOL? 

       Check out Clay at www.fishnerds.com 

       The Basics of Making a Decision

       In doing some research and reading a bunch of articles you can boil decision-making down to about 5-10 steps. These are: Step 1: Identify your goal Step 2: Gather information for weighing your options Step 3: Consider the Consequences Step 4. Make the Decision Step 5. Evaluation the decision

       Full episodes notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/775

       Mistakes People Make When Making A Decisions

       Zero Research

       There are some shows that have done zero research and end up naming their show the same as MANY other shows (search for outside the box in your favorite app). 

       Lack of Qualified Advice Not having an expert or someone who has done what you're doing. My ex-wife was a nurse and when I was given the decision of "How do you want your Dad to die, slow or fast?" She asked for a surgical consult. I didn't even know what a surgical consult was, but we did one and it added about five more years to my Dad's life. 

       Paralysis By Analysis

       There is a Ted Talk by Sheena Lyengar who is a blind psycho economist who specializing in decision making They had 348 different kinds of jam. We set up a little tasting booth right near the entrance of the store. We there put out six different flavors of jam or 24 different flavors of jam, and we looked at two things: First, in which case were people more likely to stop, sample some jam? More people stopped when there were 24, about 60 percent, than when there were six, about 40 percent. The next thing we looked at is in which case were people more likely to buy a jar of jam. Now we see the opposite effect. Of the people who stopped when there were 24, only three percent of them actually bought a jar of jam. Of the people who stopped when there were six, well now we saw that 30 percent of them actually bought a jar of jam.

       So when you do some research and bounce it off someone who you feel provides trustworthy advice, you're ready to move to on to looking at the consequences.

       Fear of Consequences

       You think there is an A U D I E N C E listening when you first start (there isn't). Then a few months later you have fear because people ARE listening. Remember no one will punch you in the face. You can change things later.

       TOPICS: 00:00 Decisions, Decisions, Decisions 01:13 Welcome to the Show 01:55 Clay Groves is Now the Morning Guy 05:03 Basic Steps of Making Decisions 09:00 Hobby Shows Have Easier Decisions 09:33 Hobby Shows Might Have Easier Decisions 10:17 The Perfect Podcast 11:03 Paralysis By Analysis 13:21 Facebook Groups May Be More Confusing than Helpful 14:17 What Will You NOT Do? 16:23 Emotional Decisions 17:12 Emotional Pressure 18:14 Apps to Help With Decisions 19:12 There Will Be Bad Decisions 21:03 Join The School of Podcasting 22:31 Dave Uses This Process In Real Life 31:35 Thanks to All My Well Wishers 35:36 Bloopers

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Affordable Audio Editing

       Episode 774 Will You trust Your Baby With Apple?

       Podia Education and Marketing Platform

       Teachable Online Course Management Tool

       PodPage

       Lean Podpage For Free

       Loom Video Tool

       Circle Community Tool

       Follow me on Apple or Android text " sop " to 31996

       Start Your Podcast

       When you join the school of podcast you can forget about sounding stupid, unprofessional, or spending money on gear you don't need. You get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, time-shifted one-on-one coaching (via video), and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>There are times when we are either planning your podcast, launching it, or you're just trying to get a larger audience. I see people in groups, websites, and meetups where they are stuck in the decision-making process. Today we are going to walk through the basic steps, and look at where and why people get stuck.

        

       Because of My Podcast: Clay Groves is Now the Host of the Morning Radio Show and a Program Director

       Clay is the man behind the Fish Nerds podcast and because of his podcast he was first selected to be the man behind the scenes who does the editing, some voice-over at a station. That lead to him filling in on the weekends which lead to him NOW being the Morning Radio Show host AND Program Director. HOW COOL? 

       Check out Clay at www.fishnerds.com 

       The Basics of Making a Decision

       In doing some research and reading a bunch of articles you can boil decision-making down to about 5-10 steps. These are: Step 1: Identify your goal Step 2: Gather information for weighing your options Step 3: Consider the Consequences Step 4. Make the Decision Step 5. Evaluation the decision

       Full episodes notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/775

       Mistakes People Make When Making A Decisions

       Zero Research

       There are some shows that have done zero research and end up naming their show the same as MANY other shows (search for outside the box in your favorite app). 

       Lack of Qualified Advice Not having an expert or someone who has done what you're doing. My ex-wife was a nurse and when I was given the decision of "How do you want your Dad to die, slow or fast?" She asked for a surgical consult. I didn't even know what a surgical consult was, but we did one and it added about five more years to my Dad's life. 

       Paralysis By Analysis

       There is a Ted Talk by Sheena Lyengar who is a blind psycho economist who specializing in decision making They had 348 different kinds of jam. We set up a little tasting booth right near the entrance of the store. We there put out six different flavors of jam or 24 different flavors of jam, and we looked at two things: First, in which case were people more likely to stop, sample some jam? More people stopped when there were 24, about 60 percent, than when there were six, about 40 percent. The next thing we looked at is in which case were people more likely to buy a jar of jam. Now we see the opposite effect. Of the people who stopped when there were 24, only three percent of them actually bought a jar of jam. Of the people who stopped when there were six, well now we saw that 30 percent of them actually bought a jar of jam.

       So when you do some research and bounce it off someone who you feel provides trustworthy advice, you're ready to move to on to looking at the consequences.

       Fear of Consequences

       You think there is an A U D I E N C E listening when you first start (there isn't). Then a few months later you have fear because people ARE listening. Remember no one will punch you in the face. You can change things later.

       TOPICS: 00:00 Decisions, Decisions, Decisions 01:13 Welcome to the Show 01:55 Clay Groves is Now the Morning Guy 05:03 Basic Steps of Making Decisions 09:00 Hobby Shows Have Easier Decisions 09:33 Hobby Shows Might Have Easier Decisions 10:17 The Perfect Podcast 11:03 Paralysis By Analysis 13:21 Facebook Groups May Be More Confusing than Helpful 14:17 What Will You NOT Do? 16:23 Emotional Decisions 17:12 Emotional Pressure 18:14 Apps to Help With Decisions 19:12 There Will Be Bad Decisions 21:03 Join The School of Podcasting 22:31 Dave Uses This Process In Real Life 31:35 Thanks to All My Well Wishers 35:36 Bloopers

       Mentioned In This Episode

       School of Podcasting Affordable Audio Editing

       Episode 774 Will You trust Your Baby With Apple?

       Podia Education and Marketing Platform

       Teachable Online Course Management Tool

       PodPage

       Lean Podpage For Free

       Loom Video Tool

       Circle Community Tool

       Follow me on Apple or Android text " sop " to 31996

       Start Your Podcast

       When you join the school of podcast you can forget about sounding stupid, unprofessional, or spending money on gear you don't need. You get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, time-shifted one-on-one coaching (via video), and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>28db4564-5851-4d2d-b6d4-4e59aefbc725Mon, 17 May 2021 04:05:00 -040036:24falsefull775775Will You Trust Your Baby With Apple?Today I explain the continuing issues with Apple (and Google, and Spotify). Your podcast is like a baby. It needs never-ending attention and if there is an issue you need it solved NOW. 

       I judge a company on how things are handled when they make a mistake (cause we are all human). To have a problem that is ongoing for weeks, I find it hard to believe. I get that podcasting is barely a revenue generator for Apple (as in almost none), but you have to realize that in the same way that the actions of a child reflect on the parents, the actions of an app (AND YOUR BRAND) are a reflection of the app you told people to use to listen to your show. 

       Bottom line:

       It's going to take long (for now) for new episodes to appear in Apple.

       Apple is not displaying links properly.

       There is currently (May 2021) a bug where duplicate numbers are appearing (I do see where an update is waiting to be installed - fingers crossed). To see any episode numbers you need to follow. 

       Apple (or Google, Spotify etc) don't put out any public notices. Communication is the lubrication of any relationship. It makes you feel very small and insignificant. That feeling does not make me want to use your subscription service. 

       Who is going to answer any of the customer tickets when someone can't access their subscription? or loses their password? etc. I don't want them treating my customers the way they've treated me. They owe me an apology. 

       How Do I Know If I Have An Issue? 

       You can use a tool like inoreader.com or feedly.com and input your feed. You should be able to see if your latest episode is there. If the episode is in the reader, but not the podcast app, the app just needs to catch up. See video

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Podcast Index

       Blubrry Directory

       Last Pass Password Tool

       Podfriend App

       Overcast App

       Other new podcast 2.0 Apps

       How to earn Bitcoin from your podcast

       Podcasting 2.0 Podcast

       ]]>Today I explain the continuing issues with Apple (and Google, and Spotify). Your podcast is like a baby. It needs never-ending attention and if there is an issue you need it solved NOW. 

       I judge a company on how things are handled when they make a mistake (cause we are all human). To have a problem that is ongoing for weeks, I find it hard to believe. I get that podcasting is barely a revenue generator for Apple (as in almost none), but you have to realize that in the same way that the actions of a child reflect on the parents, the actions of an app (AND YOUR BRAND) are a reflection of the app you told people to use to listen to your show. 

       Bottom line:

       It's going to take long (for now) for new episodes to appear in Apple.

       Apple is not displaying links properly.

       There is currently (May 2021) a bug where duplicate numbers are appearing (I do see where an update is waiting to be installed - fingers crossed). To see any episode numbers you need to follow. 

       Apple (or Google, Spotify etc) don't put out any public notices. Communication is the lubrication of any relationship. It makes you feel very small and insignificant. That feeling does not make me want to use your subscription service. 

       Who is going to answer any of the customer tickets when someone can't access their subscription? or loses their password? etc. I don't want them treating my customers the way they've treated me. They owe me an apology. 

       How Do I Know If I Have An Issue? 

       You can use a tool like inoreader.com or feedly.com and input your feed. You should be able to see if your latest episode is there. If the episode is in the reader, but not the podcast app, the app just needs to catch up. See video

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Podcast Index

       Blubrry Directory

       Last Pass Password Tool

       Podfriend App

       Overcast App

       Other new podcast 2.0 Apps

       How to earn Bitcoin from your podcast

       Podcasting 2.0 Podcast

       ]]>3457a9c1-3bd3-409d-b0da-5dc7db00e773Mon, 10 May 2021 04:00:00 -040038:48falsefull774774How to Find and Choose a Co-host for Your PodcastI reached out to you and asked how you found your co-host and you were nice enough to reply. 

       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting Audio Editing

       If you're stressed out about your podcast, and you're spending too much time, check out the School of Podcasting Editing service. We have different variations to meet your budget. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/edit

       Tips in Choosing a Co-Host for Your Podcast

       You want someone who has the same commitment (and support). 

       You want someone who loves your topic, but might approach it from a different angle. You don't need a clone of you. We already have one of you. 

       Make sure you all understand how things are divided up and workaround: Money coming in Podcast production Podcast Promotion Who is paying for what (money going out) How do you get fired or quit? What schedule is the show going to use (record some test shows to determine this)

       Finding a Co-host

       Today we hear how some people: Ask other podcasters they knew

       Ask family members

       Asked bloggers

       Asked their audience

       You might consider starting your show as a solo artist which makes it easier to ask someone to join something that exists than something that is just an idea in your head. see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Thanks To The Contributors:

       Wayne Henderson from the Packers Fan Podcast ( https://packersfanpodcast.com/ and www.mediavoiceovers.com)

       Andrés Brenes from Colmillo Roquero colmilloroquero.com ( a Spanish podcast about Heavy Metal)

       Brent Bergherm from Lattitude Photography Podcast - https://latitudephotographypodcast.com/

       Fred Castaneda from Podcast Reporter ( www.podcastreporter.com and www.strugglingbiz.com and http://2030podcast.com/)

       Roben Harris from Destinations Connections ( www.destinationconnections.com )

       Matt Rafferty - The Author Inside You (www.theauthorinsideyou.com )

       Josh Rivers 24 Faithful www.24faithful.com

       Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast.com ( inglespodcast.com )

       Mentioned In This Show

       Podcast Editing

       Podcast Review Show

       Text " sop " to 31996

       Join the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

        

        

       ]]>I reached out to you and asked how you found your co-host and you were nice enough to reply. 

       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting Audio Editing

       If you're stressed out about your podcast, and you're spending too much time, check out the School of Podcasting Editing service. We have different variations to meet your budget. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/edit

       Tips in Choosing a Co-Host for Your Podcast

       You want someone who has the same commitment (and support). 

       You want someone who loves your topic, but might approach it from a different angle. You don't need a clone of you. We already have one of you. 

       Make sure you all understand how things are divided up and workaround: Money coming in Podcast production Podcast Promotion Who is paying for what (money going out) How do you get fired or quit? What schedule is the show going to use (record some test shows to determine this)

       Finding a Co-host

       Today we hear how some people: Ask other podcasters they knew

       Ask family members

       Asked bloggers

       Asked their audience

       You might consider starting your show as a solo artist which makes it easier to ask someone to join something that exists than something that is just an idea in your head. see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Thanks To The Contributors:

       Wayne Henderson from the Packers Fan Podcast ( https://packersfanpodcast.com/ and www.mediavoiceovers.com)

       Andrés Brenes from Colmillo Roquero colmilloroquero.com ( a Spanish podcast about Heavy Metal)

       Brent Bergherm from Lattitude Photography Podcast - https://latitudephotographypodcast.com/

       Fred Castaneda from Podcast Reporter ( www.podcastreporter.com and www.strugglingbiz.com and http://2030podcast.com/)

       Roben Harris from Destinations Connections ( www.destinationconnections.com )

       Matt Rafferty - The Author Inside You (www.theauthorinsideyou.com )

       Josh Rivers 24 Faithful www.24faithful.com

       Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast.com ( inglespodcast.com )

       Mentioned In This Show

       Podcast Editing

       Podcast Review Show

       Text " sop " to 31996

       Join the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

        

        

       ]]>7147effc-ec1e-4fc0-81a2-7265135c4bf9Mon, 03 May 2021 04:00:00 -040037:38falsefull773773Who Will Win the Battle of Paid Podcast Subscriptions?Here is what we know:

       In the US, it's $19.99 a year to participate

       Your show is only available in the Apple podcast app but it's not exclusive.

       You can set your monthly and yearly subscription price, and signing up will be super easy.

       You can offer a free trial along with a freemium model (some free episodes and some paid).

       The first year a person subscribes Apple takes 30% of the revenue from that listener, the second year of their subscription they take 15.

       Apple will host your files and choose the output format.

       Stats on your downloads for the subscribers will come from Apple.

       When you sign up for a "regular" podcast you need to choose the one with an RSS feed.

       Apple is having MAJOR difficulties this week and as I write this my dashboard has been reading

       "We're setting up your account.

       This could take a few hours. When we're finished, you can start adding new shows" since 4/21 (it's 4/25 as I write this).

       If you're on Anchor and you let Anchor submit your show, you will need to get your show under your Apple ID.

       Check out Apple's site

       The Math of Subscriptions

       Let's look at a podcast that is getting 150 downloads on every episode (after 30 days). 

       If you have 150 downloads per episode. The typical percentage of people who will take action is 3%. This would mean 4.5 people which I will round up to 5.

       If you charge $5/month that is $25 (Five people at $5/month). Apple is going to take 30% ($7.50) and leave you with $17.50

       With this in mind when you start thinking of bonus content, and the effort it takes, you need to ask yourself is this worth $17.50.

       In the same scenario your take-home pay is: Glow.fm: $23.93 Supercast: $23.64 Patreon (8%): $22.88 Apple: $17.47

       Is It Worth It?

       All the extra work, how long is it going to take? You need to answer that question. If you spend four hours a month creating additional content, you want to take that $17.50 per month you are making from subscribers and divide by four hours to get $4.38per hour. Is missing time with your family, your sanity, your health, with it?

       What We Don't Know About Apple Subscriptions

       Are they going to release Apple podcasts on Android? This seems like something they should be doing.

       Is it $20 per year (US) or $20 per year per country? IMHO, this is $20/year (US) for all countries. When I started to sign up last night Apple wanted to charge me $20

       My Podcast Reviews Adds Follow Pages

       On episode 709 Interviewed Daniel J Lewis from My Podcast Reviews (which is ONE place to get ALL of your reviews in ONE place from ALL Countries). Now they have added an easy way to get people to subscribe/follow your podcast (which really is something you want them to d0. You can see it live in action at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       For more information check out My Podcast Reviews (aff link)

       Podpage Has Added Multiple Updates

       I interviewed Brenden from Podpage.com on episode 728. That was after Podpage first launched. If you need more than your "built in" website from your media host, but don't need all the complexity from something like WordPress, Podpage is for you. They've added features such as:

       • Free voicemail
       • Episode signatures (default text that is placed at the bottom of every episode
       • A place for transcripts
       • Multiple templates, more color options, and eCommerce
       • Better search (which s great as WordPress search is awful)
       • Email list building tool
       
       

       Check out my free course at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Tidycal Adds Zoom Integration

       If you need a tool to help schedule guests or consulting clients, Tidycal allows you to create free (or paid) appointments and now it automatically creates a zoom meeting. It also integrates with Paypal, and Google Calendar. Currently, you can purchase LIFETIME access to the tool for $20 (no monthly fees). 

       Check out Tidycal

       Get Your Podcast Audited By Two Consultants

       Want some honest feedback on your show? Check out the Podcast Review Show where I and 30 years radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your show, your website, and your goals to help you do more of what is working, and tweak anything that is not. Check it out at Podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook Group
       • Priority Email Support.
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>Here is what we know:

       In the US, it's $19.99 a year to participate

       Your show is only available in the Apple podcast app but it's not exclusive.

       You can set your monthly and yearly subscription price, and signing up will be super easy.

       You can offer a free trial along with a freemium model (some free episodes and some paid).

       The first year a person subscribes Apple takes 30% of the revenue from that listener, the second year of their subscription they take 15.

       Apple will host your files and choose the output format.

       Stats on your downloads for the subscribers will come from Apple.

       When you sign up for a "regular" podcast you need to choose the one with an RSS feed.

       Apple is having MAJOR difficulties this week and as I write this my dashboard has been reading

       "We're setting up your account.

       This could take a few hours. When we're finished, you can start adding new shows" since 4/21 (it's 4/25 as I write this).

       If you're on Anchor and you let Anchor submit your show, you will need to get your show under your Apple ID.

       Check out Apple's site

       The Math of Subscriptions

       Let's look at a podcast that is getting 150 downloads on every episode (after 30 days). 

       If you have 150 downloads per episode. The typical percentage of people who will take action is 3%. This would mean 4.5 people which I will round up to 5.

       If you charge $5/month that is $25 (Five people at $5/month). Apple is going to take 30% ($7.50) and leave you with $17.50

       With this in mind when you start thinking of bonus content, and the effort it takes, you need to ask yourself is this worth $17.50.

       In the same scenario your take-home pay is: Glow.fm: $23.93 Supercast: $23.64 Patreon (8%): $22.88 Apple: $17.47

       Is It Worth It?

       All the extra work, how long is it going to take? You need to answer that question. If you spend four hours a month creating additional content, you want to take that $17.50 per month you are making from subscribers and divide by four hours to get $4.38per hour. Is missing time with your family, your sanity, your health, with it?

       What We Don't Know About Apple Subscriptions

       Are they going to release Apple podcasts on Android? This seems like something they should be doing.

       Is it $20 per year (US) or $20 per year per country? IMHO, this is $20/year (US) for all countries. When I started to sign up last night Apple wanted to charge me $20

       My Podcast Reviews Adds Follow Pages

       On episode 709 Interviewed Daniel J Lewis from My Podcast Reviews (which is ONE place to get ALL of your reviews in ONE place from ALL Countries). Now they have added an easy way to get people to subscribe/follow your podcast (which really is something you want them to d0. You can see it live in action at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/follow

       For more information check out My Podcast Reviews (aff link)

       Podpage Has Added Multiple Updates

       I interviewed Brenden from Podpage.com on episode 728. That was after Podpage first launched. If you need more than your "built in" website from your media host, but don't need all the complexity from something like WordPress, Podpage is for you. They've added features such as:

       • Free voicemail
       • Episode signatures (default text that is placed at the bottom of every episode
       • A place for transcripts
       • Multiple templates, more color options, and eCommerce
       • Better search (which s great as WordPress search is awful)
       • Email list building tool
       
       

       Check out my free course at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Tidycal Adds Zoom Integration

       If you need a tool to help schedule guests or consulting clients, Tidycal allows you to create free (or paid) appointments and now it automatically creates a zoom meeting. It also integrates with Paypal, and Google Calendar. Currently, you can purchase LIFETIME access to the tool for $20 (no monthly fees). 

       Check out Tidycal

       Get Your Podcast Audited By Two Consultants

       Want some honest feedback on your show? Check out the Podcast Review Show where I and 30 years radio veteran Erik K Johnson go over your show, your website, and your goals to help you do more of what is working, and tweak anything that is not. Check it out at Podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook Group
       • Priority Email Support.
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>9be0c942-ce8a-42a5-8c94-3dc2d21647ffMon, 26 Apr 2021 04:00:00 -040038:40falsefull772772Podcasting Can Give Your Audience Something They Are Dying To Hear: The TruthCurrently, I think civilization has a serious problem. We are losing the ability to identify the truth. I'm not talking religion, or anything philosophical. I'm talking about doing research, looking at the evidence, and reporting what we find. Today I use the clip of then Donald Trump's "Very Fine People" press conference. That remark came at 01:07 but the 2-minute mark had him saying, "I'm not talking about the neo Nazi's or the white nationalists because they should be condemned totally." Because of hi"s "Very Fine People" clip, Joe Biden said he HAD to run for President. 

       Please note I'm not either pro or against Trump. I liked his stance on China but saw MANY stupid things come out of his mouth. This is not about politics. It's about the media not focusing on delivering the truth, but more interesting in obtaining high ratings. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Very Fine People - video

       Profit From Your Podcast - Book

       Charles Barkley Speaks Some Truth

        

       With a Podcast You Can't Be Cancelled

       While you can be removed off of platforms, as long as you have an RSS feed, people can subscribe/follow your show. It may take them a couple of extra steps to do it manually but you're not "off the air." In some cases being edited is just great exposure. People want to hear what the big deal was that you were censored. 

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       The School of Podcasting is dedicated to teaching you the right way to launch, grow and produce your podcast so that you sound great. Membership includes step-by-step videos that will walk you through planning podcasts, launching them on Apple and other top directories, growing listenership and getting more listeners coming back for more episodes. The live coaching sessions are available via zoom -with a group coaching session every month during a call with other members who are also producing professional content. You have access to me via email as well as mentoring in our private Facebook community filled with brilliant minds such as yourself. 

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

        

       ]]>Currently, I think civilization has a serious problem. We are losing the ability to identify the truth. I'm not talking religion, or anything philosophical. I'm talking about doing research, looking at the evidence, and reporting what we find. Today I use the clip of then Donald Trump's "Very Fine People" press conference. That remark came at 01:07 but the 2-minute mark had him saying, "I'm not talking about the neo Nazi's or the white nationalists because they should be condemned totally." Because of hi"s "Very Fine People" clip, Joe Biden said he HAD to run for President. 

       Please note I'm not either pro or against Trump. I liked his stance on China but saw MANY stupid things come out of his mouth. This is not about politics. It's about the media not focusing on delivering the truth, but more interesting in obtaining high ratings. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Very Fine People - video

       Profit From Your Podcast - Book

       Charles Barkley Speaks Some Truth

        

       With a Podcast You Can't Be Cancelled

       While you can be removed off of platforms, as long as you have an RSS feed, people can subscribe/follow your show. It may take them a couple of extra steps to do it manually but you're not "off the air." In some cases being edited is just great exposure. People want to hear what the big deal was that you were censored. 

        

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       The School of Podcasting is dedicated to teaching you the right way to launch, grow and produce your podcast so that you sound great. Membership includes step-by-step videos that will walk you through planning podcasts, launching them on Apple and other top directories, growing listenership and getting more listeners coming back for more episodes. The live coaching sessions are available via zoom -with a group coaching session every month during a call with other members who are also producing professional content. You have access to me via email as well as mentoring in our private Facebook community filled with brilliant minds such as yourself. 

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

        

       ]]>160531f4-f8bc-4e83-91f1-5c1e2a5d1f3fMon, 19 Apr 2021 04:00:00 -040040:53falsefull771771Impacting People From Your Bedroom: Collin From Pet Sitter ConfidentialBillie Eilish (super famous singer - especially to young teenage girls - records her music with her brother in their bedroom. She currently has 44 million followers on Spotify and 81 million followers on Instagram. She earned 25 million from Apple for the movie and her net worth is reportedly 53 million. Not too bad for two people who are having fun recording things in their bedroom.
       Pet Sitter Confidential

       Today I talk with Collin who along with his wife produce the Pet Sitter Confidential podcast. They are truly impacting their audience, and due to their uber-niche topic, it is enabling them to get sponsors (Without 20,000 downloads per episode). 

       SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting

       Podcasting can feel lonely at times and that's why I created the School of Podcasting - to give you a place where like-minded podcasters can support, guide, challenge & grow. You'll have access to all the step-by-step tutorials so that you know how to launch your podcast without wasting money on equipment or trying to guess what to do when it comes to planning.

       You get live group coaching, a network Facebook group, and priority email support so that you never go into this alone - learn from me and fellow podcasters.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       TOPICS COVERED

       04:57 Topics on Your Show? 05:33 Who is it For? 05:59 Their Niche Lead to A Sponsor 07:16 Pricing Your Ad Spot 08:27 The Lifetime Value of a Customer 14:32 Building Their Community 15:49 Sponsor Renewal 16:59 Patreon Thoughts 19:18 Did you think anyone would listen? 22:08 Who Are You? 23:24 How to Balance Life? 24:27 The importance Having a Buffer

       I loved that some of his best guests aren't people with huge followings. Also, when someone is filling up notepads with information from your show, you KNOW you are delivering value. 

       Collin has multiple streams of income. He has the sponsorship along with a Patreon account. 

       Find their show at https://www.petsitterconfessional.com/

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast. 

       ]]>Billie Eilish (super famous singer - especially to young teenage girls - records her music with her brother in their bedroom. She currently has 44 million followers on Spotify and 81 million followers on Instagram. She earned 25 million from Apple for the movie and her net worth is reportedly 53 million. Not too bad for two people who are having fun recording things in their bedroom.
       Pet Sitter Confidential

       Today I talk with Collin who along with his wife produce the Pet Sitter Confidential podcast. They are truly impacting their audience, and due to their uber-niche topic, it is enabling them to get sponsors (Without 20,000 downloads per episode). 

       SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting

       Podcasting can feel lonely at times and that's why I created the School of Podcasting - to give you a place where like-minded podcasters can support, guide, challenge & grow. You'll have access to all the step-by-step tutorials so that you know how to launch your podcast without wasting money on equipment or trying to guess what to do when it comes to planning.

       You get live group coaching, a network Facebook group, and priority email support so that you never go into this alone - learn from me and fellow podcasters.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       TOPICS COVERED

       04:57 Topics on Your Show? 05:33 Who is it For? 05:59 Their Niche Lead to A Sponsor 07:16 Pricing Your Ad Spot 08:27 The Lifetime Value of a Customer 14:32 Building Their Community 15:49 Sponsor Renewal 16:59 Patreon Thoughts 19:18 Did you think anyone would listen? 22:08 Who Are You? 23:24 How to Balance Life? 24:27 The importance Having a Buffer

       I loved that some of his best guests aren't people with huge followings. Also, when someone is filling up notepads with information from your show, you KNOW you are delivering value. 

       Collin has multiple streams of income. He has the sponsorship along with a Patreon account. 

       Find their show at https://www.petsitterconfessional.com/

       QUESTION OF THE MONTH

       If you have a co-host, I'd love to hear how you found/chose your co-host. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Be sure to mention your show, your website, and a little bit about your podcast. 

       ]]>df05fa5d-81e4-4d36-bb11-a9b04c79bf76Mon, 12 Apr 2021 04:00:00 -040033:22falsefull770770Where Will Your Podcast Take You in Five Years?So many times we identify ourselves not by our values or beliefs but by what we DO. I'm a cashier, or I work in accounts payable, the warehouse. That may be what you DO, but it may not be who you are.

       Podcasting allows you to reinvent who you are. To be your true self.

       Today we talk with Scot McCarthy of the Moving Forward Leadership Podcast.

       Scott joined the military when he was 18 and will be retiring soon, so he is using podcasting to reinvent himself and help establish himself in the space of leadership. 

       I love that Scott knows it's not easy to start a business and that why I brought him on. You need to dig the well BEFORE your thirsty. Scott doesn't have a month-week plan, he has a five YEAR plan. He constantly researching to work smarter, to better understand his audience (through Facebook groups), and hiring people for those things he needs help with. He's not talking into a phone set on speaker and looking for money to fall from heaven.

       Can I Play Music in My Podcast?

       When it comes to legal questions in the entertainment space there is one (and only one name) and that is Gordon Firemark

       Gordon helps answer that question along with a new spin on that question. What if they perform the song live on my podcast (or for those older DJ's they did on your show) can I play that recording (it's a different recording than the one on the record). 

       What about fair use? Keep in mind that fair use is the defense you use when you go to court.

       Check out Gordon's book, The Podcast, Blog & New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide: An essential resource for content creators

       For more information check out Gordon at thepodcastlawyer.com

       Do We Need Your Guests Backstory?

       Nobody asked about the Lone Ranger until after he saved the day. Read my full article on Medium

       How Did You Find Your Co-Host?

       This is the question of the month (due by April 23rd, 2021). Record your answer (and be sure to mention your podcast and website) on how you found your co-host. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

        The School of Podcasting is the best place for anyone looking to learn how to make podcasts. We have step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group for networking. Join today with our 30-day money-back guarantee!

       You'll be able to create your own show in no time at all. Our team of experts will teach you everything from A-Z so that you can get started on your first episode right away. And if it's not for you, we offer a 100% money-back guarantee on your membership fee! It doesn't matter what skill level or experience you have - we've got something for everyone here at The School of Podcasting!

       Sign up now and start making great content today!

       This is episode 769 of the School of Podcasting. You can subscribe/follow the show at schoolofpodcasting.com/follow 

       or just text  " sop " to 31996

       ]]>So many times we identify ourselves not by our values or beliefs but by what we DO. I'm a cashier, or I work in accounts payable, the warehouse. That may be what you DO, but it may not be who you are.

       Podcasting allows you to reinvent who you are. To be your true self.

       Today we talk with Scot McCarthy of the Moving Forward Leadership Podcast.

       Scott joined the military when he was 18 and will be retiring soon, so he is using podcasting to reinvent himself and help establish himself in the space of leadership. 

       I love that Scott knows it's not easy to start a business and that why I brought him on. You need to dig the well BEFORE your thirsty. Scott doesn't have a month-week plan, he has a five YEAR plan. He constantly researching to work smarter, to better understand his audience (through Facebook groups), and hiring people for those things he needs help with. He's not talking into a phone set on speaker and looking for money to fall from heaven.

       Can I Play Music in My Podcast?

       When it comes to legal questions in the entertainment space there is one (and only one name) and that is Gordon Firemark

       Gordon helps answer that question along with a new spin on that question. What if they perform the song live on my podcast (or for those older DJ's they did on your show) can I play that recording (it's a different recording than the one on the record). 

       What about fair use? Keep in mind that fair use is the defense you use when you go to court.

       Check out Gordon's book, The Podcast, Blog & New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide: An essential resource for content creators

       For more information check out Gordon at thepodcastlawyer.com

       Do We Need Your Guests Backstory?

       Nobody asked about the Lone Ranger until after he saved the day. Read my full article on Medium

       How Did You Find Your Co-Host?

       This is the question of the month (due by April 23rd, 2021). Record your answer (and be sure to mention your podcast and website) on how you found your co-host. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

        The School of Podcasting is the best place for anyone looking to learn how to make podcasts. We have step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group for networking. Join today with our 30-day money-back guarantee!

       You'll be able to create your own show in no time at all. Our team of experts will teach you everything from A-Z so that you can get started on your first episode right away. And if it's not for you, we offer a 100% money-back guarantee on your membership fee! It doesn't matter what skill level or experience you have - we've got something for everyone here at The School of Podcasting!

       Sign up now and start making great content today!

       This is episode 769 of the School of Podcasting. You can subscribe/follow the show at schoolofpodcasting.com/follow 

       or just text  " sop " to 31996

       ]]>e1e4fe26-1534-4d51-b9f6-ea2cbd1556f6Mon, 05 Apr 2021 04:00:00 -040034:37falsefull769769I Wish I Had Known This When I Started PodcastingIt's the last week of the month which means, "Question of the Month" where YOU get to be on the show. This month's question is "What do you wish you had known when you started your podcast."

       SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting

       Learn to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. You'll sound great, organized, and create GREAT content. Take advantage of our step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda

       The No Agenda streaming service found Fred's show the 2030 Podcast and added it to their schedule. 

       
       

       What I Wish I Had Known

       04:31 Steve Stewart: Audacity At Zero Crossing

       07:13 Kurt from Expats in Austin: The Importance of Editors

       08:21 James from Bros and blokes - The Amount of Time

       09:21 Kim Newlove from the Pharmacists Voice - Fitting Podcasting Into Life

       11:18 Jill Keep the Flame Alive - It Takes a LOT of Time

       12:06 Paul from Improve and Have Fun: Episode Length

       13:30 York from Poetic Earthlings: The Evil of Comparison

       15:11 Bill from Bill Watches Movies: Stats Are Useless

       17:32 Paul from Improve and Have Fun:: Do Whatever You Want

       18:47 Carrie from Hope for Anxiety and ODC It is EASY to Get Guests

       20:11 Craig from Inglespodcast - Cohosts Makes Things Better

       21:00 Arnie Sports History Network - More Networking

       22:49 Kim from Bee Keeping Today - Reaching Your Target Audience is Hard

       23:20 Seth Geekville Radio - Plugins For WordPress

       25:30 Anthony from Route 66 - Post vs Pages

       26:16 Join the School of Podcasting

       27:14 Kris from the Kris and Kristine Show - How Podcasts Work

       29:19 Joe the Morning Meditation- Writing Good Titles

       30:22 Jeff the Podcast Pizza Show - The Power of the Niche

       32:10 Glenn from Horse Radio Network - Started Side Hustles

       32:58 Dave (me) - Do ONE GOOD Podcast

       34:29 Kim from Toastmasters 101 Impostor Syndrome

       35:25 Pashup from the Warrior One - Be Yourself

       36:13 Next Months Question: Finding Co-Hosts

       37:53 Fixing a Mistake

       43:17 Bloopers

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Engineering Academy

       
       

       Smart Money Mommas

       ]]>It's the last week of the month which means, "Question of the Month" where YOU get to be on the show. This month's question is "What do you wish you had known when you started your podcast."

       SPONSOR: The School of Podcasting

       Learn to plan, launch, grow, and monetize your show. You'll sound great, organized, and create GREAT content. Take advantage of our step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Because of My Podcast: Fred Castaneda

       The No Agenda streaming service found Fred's show the 2030 Podcast and added it to their schedule. 

       
       

       What I Wish I Had Known

       04:31 Steve Stewart: Audacity At Zero Crossing

       07:13 Kurt from Expats in Austin: The Importance of Editors

       08:21 James from Bros and blokes - The Amount of Time

       09:21 Kim Newlove from the Pharmacists Voice - Fitting Podcasting Into Life

       11:18 Jill Keep the Flame Alive - It Takes a LOT of Time

       12:06 Paul from Improve and Have Fun: Episode Length

       13:30 York from Poetic Earthlings: The Evil of Comparison

       15:11 Bill from Bill Watches Movies: Stats Are Useless

       17:32 Paul from Improve and Have Fun:: Do Whatever You Want

       18:47 Carrie from Hope for Anxiety and ODC It is EASY to Get Guests

       20:11 Craig from Inglespodcast - Cohosts Makes Things Better

       21:00 Arnie Sports History Network - More Networking

       22:49 Kim from Bee Keeping Today - Reaching Your Target Audience is Hard

       23:20 Seth Geekville Radio - Plugins For WordPress

       25:30 Anthony from Route 66 - Post vs Pages

       26:16 Join the School of Podcasting

       27:14 Kris from the Kris and Kristine Show - How Podcasts Work

       29:19 Joe the Morning Meditation- Writing Good Titles

       30:22 Jeff the Podcast Pizza Show - The Power of the Niche

       32:10 Glenn from Horse Radio Network - Started Side Hustles

       32:58 Dave (me) - Do ONE GOOD Podcast

       34:29 Kim from Toastmasters 101 Impostor Syndrome

       35:25 Pashup from the Warrior One - Be Yourself

       36:13 Next Months Question: Finding Co-Hosts

       37:53 Fixing a Mistake

       43:17 Bloopers

       
       

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Podcast Engineering Academy

       
       

       Smart Money Mommas

       ]]>a6784edd-74fb-408b-b6f1-b08a0a0e64d8Mon, 29 Mar 2021 04:00:00 -040044:18falsefull768768The Riches are in the Niches With Harry DuranApple is changing the wording in their app from "Subscribe" to "Follow" so stop telling your audience to subscribe (and if you do, mention that it's free) and instead tell them to follow you. The new version of the app will be out in a few weeks.

       I was listening to the Sounds Profitable podcast and heard where my friend Harry Duran from Podcast Junkies, and Fullcast, hard obtained a sponsor for a show that had not been published. I had to hear how he did it.

       Question of the Month Deadline is This Friday

       What one thing do you wish you knew when you started your podcast? You can leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question (be sure to mention your show and your website slowly). 

       Win Rewards for Sharing the Show

       Speaking of followers/subscribers if you share the show you can win rewards when your friends subscribe/follow. See  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/share

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/767

       For More Information on Harry Duran

       Check out his "Done for you" podcast agency at www.fullcast.co

       Check out the Vertical Farming Podcast

       Check out Podcast Jukies Podcast

       Twitter: @verticalfarmpod

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and an awesome private Facebook group for networking and brainstorming. 

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Sam Kinison's "Move to where the food is." 

       Harry Durran on Treating His Guests Like an Opportunity Instead of Transactions

       Dave Jackson on Podcast Junkies: 018 Dave Jackson | The Importance Of Providing Your Own Unique Voice

       Question of the month: www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Share The Show

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/show

       Check out Fullcast Harry's "Done for you" podcast agency at www.fullcast.co

       Check out the Vertical Farming Podcast

       Check out Podcast Jukies Podcast

       Like the show? Buy Me a Coffee

       ]]>Apple is changing the wording in their app from "Subscribe" to "Follow" so stop telling your audience to subscribe (and if you do, mention that it's free) and instead tell them to follow you. The new version of the app will be out in a few weeks.

       I was listening to the Sounds Profitable podcast and heard where my friend Harry Duran from Podcast Junkies, and Fullcast, hard obtained a sponsor for a show that had not been published. I had to hear how he did it.

       Question of the Month Deadline is This Friday

       What one thing do you wish you knew when you started your podcast? You can leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question (be sure to mention your show and your website slowly). 

       Win Rewards for Sharing the Show

       Speaking of followers/subscribers if you share the show you can win rewards when your friends subscribe/follow. See  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/share

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/767

       For More Information on Harry Duran

       Check out his "Done for you" podcast agency at www.fullcast.co

       Check out the Vertical Farming Podcast

       Check out Podcast Jukies Podcast

       Twitter: @verticalfarmpod

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step-by-step tutorials, live group coaching, and an awesome private Facebook group for networking and brainstorming. 

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Sam Kinison's "Move to where the food is." 

       Harry Durran on Treating His Guests Like an Opportunity Instead of Transactions

       Dave Jackson on Podcast Junkies: 018 Dave Jackson | The Importance Of Providing Your Own Unique Voice

       Question of the month: www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       Share The Show

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/show

       Check out Fullcast Harry's "Done for you" podcast agency at www.fullcast.co

       Check out the Vertical Farming Podcast

       Check out Podcast Jukies Podcast

       Like the show? Buy Me a Coffee

       ]]>222efb14-3851-4708-86f1-3d22ea613778Mon, 22 Mar 2021 04:00:00 -040030:11falsefull767767How to Get Booked on Podcasts: Figuring out Who and How to Pitch with Kristin MolenaarKristin is an entrepreneur-enthusiast who lives by the mantra "work less + make more". She enjoys helping entrepreneurs ditch vanity metrics for true, profitable connections. She's the CEO of YesBoss, an agency that helps 2b2 entrepreneurs increase their visibility and credibility through profitable podcast guest features.
       Kristin Molenaar's Tips For Getting Booked on Podcasts

       There are almost 2 million podcasts. Where do you begin? Find someone in your niche, and use a tool like Podchaser, Podsearch, Google, or any podcast app and search for their interviews. This may lead you to podcasts that would also be interested in interviewing you. 

       Kristin likes to pitch a show with the question, "Are you open to being pitched."

       Another strategy is looking for hashtags. 

       When looking for a show to appear on, look further than the interview. Kristin looks for someone that can be a partner, and develop a long-term strategy. 

       Sending a "look how great I am" email is not a good strategy.

       The True Power of Podcasting

       One of the biggest complaints I hear from people that have been a guest on podcasts is "it has never produced any results for me." They will say,

       "I've been invited to be a guest on people's podcast. I showed up and I talked about what I knew and it didn't go anywhere. I didn't get any traffic or business from it. It felt like a waste of my time."

       This is what Kristin says that people need to remember when they're becoming a podcast guest. The biggest benefit you're going to get out of podcast guesting is the relationship with the podcast host.

       I think that there are a lot of false hopes or false narratives around what I'm calling one-hit wonders. I think people think, "If I go after the biggest podcast that I possibly can, it's going to change my business. Here's the thing about being a podcast guest just like every other marketing strategy, just like every other networking strategy, it snowballs on itself.

       But you have to treat people, like people. Your job as a podcast guest is to show up and be in service to the objective of the podcast host. You need to show the podcast host, "Hey, I appreciate you allowing me to show up in your space.  I am here to really provide as much benefit as I can to you. I want this to last beyond a recording."

       When people come in without that mentality. I think that the benefits are just severely limited.

       Being a podcast guest has tons and tons of benefits. But you're just missing out if you're not looking at this as an opportunity to meet really incredible people who are connected to other really incredible people and building a business that you can have fun together. That's what I love about podcasting and I wish more people came into it with that frame of mind because I think out of that we would get better pitches. We would get better research. We would get better conversations. We would get better results on the back end. 

        

       Want More Tips On Getting Being a Guest and Booking Guests?

       See this episode The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

        

       Podcast Rewind: The Show Business Show

       I appeared on episode 2 of the Show Business Show with Billy and Simon for a marathon session on my book Profit from Your Podcast

       Need Help With Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting?

       Are you afraid of sounding bad (or stupid)?

       Worried about buying a bunch of stuff you don't need?

       Feeling overwhelmed swimming in a sea of jargon? 

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook group filled with 
       
       

       Join worry-free with my 30-day money-back Guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>Kristin is an entrepreneur-enthusiast who lives by the mantra "work less + make more". She enjoys helping entrepreneurs ditch vanity metrics for true, profitable connections. She's the CEO of YesBoss, an agency that helps 2b2 entrepreneurs increase their visibility and credibility through profitable podcast guest features.
       Kristin Molenaar's Tips For Getting Booked on Podcasts

       There are almost 2 million podcasts. Where do you begin? Find someone in your niche, and use a tool like Podchaser, Podsearch, Google, or any podcast app and search for their interviews. This may lead you to podcasts that would also be interested in interviewing you. 

       Kristin likes to pitch a show with the question, "Are you open to being pitched."

       Another strategy is looking for hashtags. 

       When looking for a show to appear on, look further than the interview. Kristin looks for someone that can be a partner, and develop a long-term strategy. 

       Sending a "look how great I am" email is not a good strategy.

       The True Power of Podcasting

       One of the biggest complaints I hear from people that have been a guest on podcasts is "it has never produced any results for me." They will say,

       "I've been invited to be a guest on people's podcast. I showed up and I talked about what I knew and it didn't go anywhere. I didn't get any traffic or business from it. It felt like a waste of my time."

       This is what Kristin says that people need to remember when they're becoming a podcast guest. The biggest benefit you're going to get out of podcast guesting is the relationship with the podcast host.

       I think that there are a lot of false hopes or false narratives around what I'm calling one-hit wonders. I think people think, "If I go after the biggest podcast that I possibly can, it's going to change my business. Here's the thing about being a podcast guest just like every other marketing strategy, just like every other networking strategy, it snowballs on itself.

       But you have to treat people, like people. Your job as a podcast guest is to show up and be in service to the objective of the podcast host. You need to show the podcast host, "Hey, I appreciate you allowing me to show up in your space.  I am here to really provide as much benefit as I can to you. I want this to last beyond a recording."

       When people come in without that mentality. I think that the benefits are just severely limited.

       Being a podcast guest has tons and tons of benefits. But you're just missing out if you're not looking at this as an opportunity to meet really incredible people who are connected to other really incredible people and building a business that you can have fun together. That's what I love about podcasting and I wish more people came into it with that frame of mind because I think out of that we would get better pitches. We would get better research. We would get better conversations. We would get better results on the back end. 

        

       Want More Tips On Getting Being a Guest and Booking Guests?

       See this episode The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews

        

       Podcast Rewind: The Show Business Show

       I appeared on episode 2 of the Show Business Show with Billy and Simon for a marathon session on my book Profit from Your Podcast

       Need Help With Your Podcast? Join the School of Podcasting?

       Are you afraid of sounding bad (or stupid)?

       Worried about buying a bunch of stuff you don't need?

       Feeling overwhelmed swimming in a sea of jargon? 

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook group filled with 
       
       

       Join worry-free with my 30-day money-back Guarantee 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       ]]>3c71f973-2360-4845-92cc-5bc4fba19b06Mon, 15 Mar 2021 04:00:00 -040050:54falsefull766766Creating a Personal Podcast Brand That Resonates with Your AudienceYou might be thinking, "I'm not a business, what do I care about branding? Well, if you have one download, congratulations you are a brand. Today I talk with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki from the Talk About Talk Podcast about developing and implementing your personal brand (and how it can help grow your audience)

       Sponsor: The School of Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting and never worry about sounding bad, spending too much money on gear, and being all alone to be frustrated and angry. When you join the School of Podcasting you get:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • A Private Networking Group
       • Live group coaching
       • Priority email support
       
       

       Join today worry-free with my 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       What is a Personal Brand?

       Your personal brand is your identity or your reputation. A definition that Dr. Andrea loves is, “Your personal brand is what others think and say about you when you're not in the room.”

       Click Here to get the workbook to walk you through the exercises discussed in today's episode.

       Step 1: What differentiates you?

       Step 2: Email 10 People

       Step 3: Take a Personality Test

       Where Your Brand Appears in Your Podcast

       Your podcast brand includes:● What people read (show notes). Your emails (and have ONE thing in your email signature). ● What people hear (your episodes, and the quality of audio). ● What people see (artwork). Come up with a color scheme (for example two colors) and two fonts that you use consistently and it will build your brand

       How This All Works: Identifying your strengths, and a personal positive message that has deep personal meaning to you, delivered in a unique way allows you to BE YOU. It will come naturally. Leaning on your strengths can help reduce burnout as you’re not doing things that don’t come naturally.

       It can clear up situations by identifying what you can and can’t do.

       When you identify the verbiage you want to use, and how you want to appear and deliver your message, you provide your audience with the tools to tell their friends. If their friends ask, “What podcasts are you listening to, they can easily explain what your show is about, who it’s for, and what the benefit it. They also can explain the motivation of the show.

       Connect with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki

       Podcast: Check out the Communicate with CONFIDENCE – The 4Ps: Practice, Proverb, Pep talk, and Pirate episode

       Website: www.talkabouttalk.com

       Newsletter with Free Tips

       LinkedIn

       Facebook Group

       Coaching & Courses

       Online Corporate Training

       ]]>You might be thinking, "I'm not a business, what do I care about branding? Well, if you have one download, congratulations you are a brand. Today I talk with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki from the Talk About Talk Podcast about developing and implementing your personal brand (and how it can help grow your audience)

       Sponsor: The School of Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting and never worry about sounding bad, spending too much money on gear, and being all alone to be frustrated and angry. When you join the School of Podcasting you get:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • A Private Networking Group
       • Live group coaching
       • Priority email support
       
       

       Join today worry-free with my 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       What is a Personal Brand?

       Your personal brand is your identity or your reputation. A definition that Dr. Andrea loves is, “Your personal brand is what others think and say about you when you're not in the room.”

       Click Here to get the workbook to walk you through the exercises discussed in today's episode.

       Step 1: What differentiates you?

       Step 2: Email 10 People

       Step 3: Take a Personality Test

       Where Your Brand Appears in Your Podcast

       Your podcast brand includes:● What people read (show notes). Your emails (and have ONE thing in your email signature). ● What people hear (your episodes, and the quality of audio). ● What people see (artwork). Come up with a color scheme (for example two colors) and two fonts that you use consistently and it will build your brand

       How This All Works: Identifying your strengths, and a personal positive message that has deep personal meaning to you, delivered in a unique way allows you to BE YOU. It will come naturally. Leaning on your strengths can help reduce burnout as you’re not doing things that don’t come naturally.

       It can clear up situations by identifying what you can and can’t do.

       When you identify the verbiage you want to use, and how you want to appear and deliver your message, you provide your audience with the tools to tell their friends. If their friends ask, “What podcasts are you listening to, they can easily explain what your show is about, who it’s for, and what the benefit it. They also can explain the motivation of the show.

       Connect with Dr. Andrea Wojnicki

       Podcast: Check out the Communicate with CONFIDENCE – The 4Ps: Practice, Proverb, Pep talk, and Pirate episode

       Website: www.talkabouttalk.com

       Newsletter with Free Tips

       LinkedIn

       Facebook Group

       Coaching & Courses

       Online Corporate Training

       ]]>c4db980a-2095-4f9f-adab-b9f068514effMon, 08 Mar 2021 05:00:00 -040049:29falsefull765765Podcasting Consequence: Can You Break Your Podcast?In talking with new and seasoned podcasters I often hear questions that lead me to believe that people think they can "break" their podcast. 

       Today I talk about a few questions I've heard and how 99% of the time you're not going to break your show. 

       We also have a question of the month

       The Separate Track Challenge

       I have recommended Squadcast for years. The ease of use and the ability to have separate tracks of you and your guest makes it my go-to choice for remote recordings. then later I got a Rodcaster Pro which ( Along with the Zoom P4, and the Zoom P8) allow you to record separate tracks. I can be on track one, and my guest can be on a separate track. The question then is:

       Does the separate track recorded locally on the guest's computer (and uploaded to Squadcast) sound that much better than the same track that has traveled over the internet? I also had my guest join me on Zoom as I know a lot of people are using Zoom to record interviews.

       Nuts and Bolts of Remote Recording

       The zoom recording is sampled at 32 kHz where Squadcast records at 48 khz. (This is how many times per second a picture is taken of your audio - the higher the number the better the sound). For me, the zoom recording while listenable sounds "fuzzy" compared to the Squadcastrecording (which makes sense as it has a higher sample rate. Also, Squdcast provides a WAV file that is better than the m4a (variable bit rate - another "no-no" for podcasting) from Zoom. If you're going to use the m4a from Zoom, be sure to edit it, and export as an mp3 with a contact bit rate.

       When I compared the original Squadcast file to the one I recorded (after coming across the Internet) and there again was a slight degradation of the file (not quite as crisp).

       Another Benefit of Squadcast

       In my test, as my guest was talking the Internet slightly broke up the audio is it made its way to me. If I had been using the recording on the Rodecaster this "Glitch" would be in the recording. With the original Squdcast fie, the glitch is not there (as that recording goes from their microphone to their hard drive, and then uploaded to Squadcast.

       Always Have a Backup Recording Of Your Interview

       The other advantage of using a tool like Squadcast is in the event the recording has an issue with the Rodecaster I have Squadcast as a backup. If there is a glitch with Squadcast, I've got my hardware option as a backup. No matter what you are using to record your remote interviews, always have two systems recording. It's not a matter of if one will fail, but when. For me, Squadcast is the most reliable.

       School of Podcasting Moving to a New Platform

       Thinkific is charging me per student (and I'm not a fan of that) so I've looked at Kajabi, Teachable, and Podia . Currently, I feel Kajabi is cool, but I'm not a fan of their limits to the number of products, and I'm learning more about Podia as they allow you to sell digital products, membership sites, and courses. They also have an affiliate program. With Teachable if I use their affiliate program, I have to pay them 2%, and with Podia you pay your monthly fee, and that is it. No extra fees.

       Free Coaching Calls?

       I'm pondering trying something new. This would be to offer coaching calls at a deep discount that would then be used in episodes (which is why they are discounted). If you're interested, contact me and I'll send you an application.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Get access:

       Step by step tutorials

       Live group coaching

       Private brainstorming/podcasting group

       You don't have to worry about sounding bad, buying the wrong equipment and wasting your time.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode 764

       Podcast Gear Guide Webinar(free - no email address needed)

       Squadcast

       Samson Q2U

       Rodecaster Pro

       Zoom Podtrack P4

       Talk About Talk Podcast

       Podcasting Resources Podcast

       ]]>In talking with new and seasoned podcasters I often hear questions that lead me to believe that people think they can "break" their podcast. 

       Today I talk about a few questions I've heard and how 99% of the time you're not going to break your show. 

       We also have a question of the month

       The Separate Track Challenge

       I have recommended Squadcast for years. The ease of use and the ability to have separate tracks of you and your guest makes it my go-to choice for remote recordings. then later I got a Rodcaster Pro which ( Along with the Zoom P4, and the Zoom P8) allow you to record separate tracks. I can be on track one, and my guest can be on a separate track. The question then is:

       Does the separate track recorded locally on the guest's computer (and uploaded to Squadcast) sound that much better than the same track that has traveled over the internet? I also had my guest join me on Zoom as I know a lot of people are using Zoom to record interviews.

       Nuts and Bolts of Remote Recording

       The zoom recording is sampled at 32 kHz where Squadcast records at 48 khz. (This is how many times per second a picture is taken of your audio - the higher the number the better the sound). For me, the zoom recording while listenable sounds "fuzzy" compared to the Squadcastrecording (which makes sense as it has a higher sample rate. Also, Squdcast provides a WAV file that is better than the m4a (variable bit rate - another "no-no" for podcasting) from Zoom. If you're going to use the m4a from Zoom, be sure to edit it, and export as an mp3 with a contact bit rate.

       When I compared the original Squadcast file to the one I recorded (after coming across the Internet) and there again was a slight degradation of the file (not quite as crisp).

       Another Benefit of Squadcast

       In my test, as my guest was talking the Internet slightly broke up the audio is it made its way to me. If I had been using the recording on the Rodecaster this "Glitch" would be in the recording. With the original Squdcast fie, the glitch is not there (as that recording goes from their microphone to their hard drive, and then uploaded to Squadcast.

       Always Have a Backup Recording Of Your Interview

       The other advantage of using a tool like Squadcast is in the event the recording has an issue with the Rodecaster I have Squadcast as a backup. If there is a glitch with Squadcast, I've got my hardware option as a backup. No matter what you are using to record your remote interviews, always have two systems recording. It's not a matter of if one will fail, but when. For me, Squadcast is the most reliable.

       School of Podcasting Moving to a New Platform

       Thinkific is charging me per student (and I'm not a fan of that) so I've looked at Kajabi, Teachable, and Podia . Currently, I feel Kajabi is cool, but I'm not a fan of their limits to the number of products, and I'm learning more about Podia as they allow you to sell digital products, membership sites, and courses. They also have an affiliate program. With Teachable if I use their affiliate program, I have to pay them 2%, and with Podia you pay your monthly fee, and that is it. No extra fees.

       Free Coaching Calls?

       I'm pondering trying something new. This would be to offer coaching calls at a deep discount that would then be used in episodes (which is why they are discounted). If you're interested, contact me and I'll send you an application.

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Get access:

       Step by step tutorials

       Live group coaching

       Private brainstorming/podcasting group

       You don't have to worry about sounding bad, buying the wrong equipment and wasting your time.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode 764

       Podcast Gear Guide Webinar(free - no email address needed)

       Squadcast

       Samson Q2U

       Rodecaster Pro

       Zoom Podtrack P4

       Talk About Talk Podcast

       Podcasting Resources Podcast

       ]]>7f0f3b6d-1e2b-4d09-96b3-0e193f7e8bf1Mon, 01 Mar 2021 05:00:00 -040043:04falsefull764764You're Too Close to Be Your Own CoachDo you remember your first real kiss? I was with my first girlfriend. I was probably 14? I was scared to death. There was no internet, and for me, nobody to ask? So I went in for the kiss and kissed her in a very TV-friendly way. I stopped and said, "Let's try that again" and I figured out what to do. I tried everything I could to avoid falling in love with my first wife. I had told her over and over that I didn't want anything serious, but here we were a year later and a year later I was in love with her. Sitting in front of her house I said, "I need to tell you something," and then proceeded to tell her I liked her a lot. I backed it up, and then said, "I love you." These are scary things to do. You put yourself out there, and if you do it wrong you get some feedback, and you tweak yourself. 

       Over the past two weeks, I've had meeting after meeting with members of my audience (one at a time). Some of them were current or past members of the School of Podcasting, and others I had never met (but they were listeners to my show). Today I talked about what I learned and why you should seriously consider it.

       If the Words "Focus Group" Makes You Uncomfortable, then Think of It as Coaching

       So many people who are experts in their field still used coaches. Hank Haney served as Tiger Woods' coach from 2004-2010. During that span, Woods won six of his 15 career major championships. The two were very close while they worked together, and Woods credits a ton of his success to Haney's teachings. Here are some more people who even after their enormous success still have coaches:

       • Richard Branson 
       • Oprah Winfrey
       • Tony Robbins
       • Leonardo DiCaprio
       • Serena Williams
       • Metallica
       
       

       We all need people who give us feedback. That is how we improve. - Bill Gates

       Is This Just a Plug To Get Me To Hire You As A Coach?

       While I have the Podcast Rodeo Show which looks at your first impression and the Podcast Review Show that looks at your whole episode, website, and we have you fill out a form to discuss the goals of the show, if you want to know what content your audience wants and needs, the best place to go is your audience. 

       I'm Still A Shy Guy at Heart

       People don't believe it, but underneath it all I'm fairly shy. So the thought of reaching out to my email list and asking them for their input made me a little nervous. This was especially true if someone was a current or previous member of the School of Podcasting. This is where you have to change your attitude. 

       When I went to college for my first degree, I was a waiter. To be a good waiter, you listen to your customer and give them exactly what they ordered. As I got on zoom, I just said to myself it's like being a waiter again. 

       I Should've Done This Years Ago

       I sent out an email with the subject line of, "I need your help...." and explained that I was going to rebuild the School of Podcasting from the ground up and I wanted to talk to them. Here are some of the things that I gained from doing this exercise:

       1. I have a visual of what my audience looks like. 
       2. I got two people who will be future guests
       3. I got to see what was working in my show
       4. In regards to the School of Podcasting, I'm glad to say that the things people want, are often already being delivered.
       5. I learned that I might want to reorganize some of the content in the School of Podcasting.
       6. I heard some answer repeated. This is proof of concept that the tutorials I have are the right tutorials.
       7. I got a couple of great questions that I will be using for the "Question of the Month" in the future.
       8. There is nothing to be afraid of as these people are your listeners. If anything they might "fanboy" out a bit which is flattering. 
       
       When You're Too Close to the Subject

       There was one comment that came up twice that in one way surprised me, and yet upon thinking about it, it makes perfect sense.

       When I asked if there were any lessons in the School of Podcasting that they found confusing. Most people were so much confused, but wanted me to go deeper into subjects,

       The lesson? My lesson on Libsyn.com. What is this surprising? Because I've worked there for over five years. Why does this make sense? The curse of knowledge. I went too fast. 

       This was exactly the kind of feedback I was looking for. 

       Don't Do This on a Group Call

       While I could've held this as a "Town Hall" type of meeting, I enjoyed connecting one on one and giving my listener my undivided attention. I know for many of us who are introverts, podcasting is a great way to reach many people without meeting many people, but I'm here to tell you that time is too important to waste. If you were headed in the wrong direction wouldn't you want your GPS to alert you? Well, your audience is your GPS on the road to delivering value. 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       If you want to learn how to connect with your audience by creating great content that inspires them to tell a friend, JOIN the School of Podcasting. 

       Because Of My Podcast: I'm an Advisor in Hollywood

       Jerry Williams is the producer and host of the FBI retired case file review podcast. She's on a mission to show you who the FBI is and what the FBI does through her interviews with retired agents about some of the FBI biggest cases, and some investigations you've never heard about. 

       She said, "A couple of years ago, I wrote a book called FBI myths and misconceptions, a manual for armchair detectives, which uses quotes and snippets, from my podcast interviews to debunk cliches about the FBI, and books, TV and movies. Because of that book and because of my podcast, last summer I was contacted by two different Hollywood Studios. Now I am under contract with FX network, which is owned by Disney, and Warner Brothers and Bad Robot as a technical consultant on two TV shows that are going to be released later this fall.

       Now, I'm not going to name-drop, but if you look up Bad Robot, you'll get to see who I get to hang out with talking to the writers on zoom or the phone a few hours a week as a lot of fun and good pay. Now, I think this is pretty cool because of my podcast story. When I started FBI retired case file review five years ago, the purpose of the podcast was to help me sell more books. I am an author, getting ready to publish my fifth book, crime fiction and nonfiction about the FBI. However, based on my own experiences as an FBI agent, and because I've now interviewed more than 222 former colleagues, I'm pretty knowledgeable about most of the FBI violations.

       But I never thought of myself as a technical consultant. But now I am. Thanks, Dave for letting me share my because of my podcast story, love your show."

       Transcribed by https://otter.ai

       Scott Johnson's What Was That Like Connecting With His Audience

       Thanks to Scott for letting me clips from his latest episode of What Was That Like? Podcast. It showed over and over how engaged your audience is with your content. You hear everyone spreading your show via word of mouth and downloading ALL of your episodes when they find it. Glad to hear your hard work is paying off and I wish you continued success.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       What Was That Like Podcast

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasters Roundtable

       Jerri Willams Check out Jerri's Amazon Page

       Zoom Meeting Software

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show (Review Your Show)

       Podcast Review Show

       Time Table

       02:57 Because of My Podcast:: Jerri Williams 06:53 Everyone Needs a Coach 10:47 What Was That Like - Examples of Engaged Audiences 16:19 What I Gained (and you can too) 19:44 You're Too Close 23:48 THEY SAID MY NAME! 26:38 Clubhouse App Is Spying On You? 32:46 My Dad's Podcast 35:01 Bloopers

        

       ]]>Do you remember your first real kiss? I was with my first girlfriend. I was probably 14? I was scared to death. There was no internet, and for me, nobody to ask? So I went in for the kiss and kissed her in a very TV-friendly way. I stopped and said, "Let's try that again" and I figured out what to do. I tried everything I could to avoid falling in love with my first wife. I had told her over and over that I didn't want anything serious, but here we were a year later and a year later I was in love with her. Sitting in front of her house I said, "I need to tell you something," and then proceeded to tell her I liked her a lot. I backed it up, and then said, "I love you." These are scary things to do. You put yourself out there, and if you do it wrong you get some feedback, and you tweak yourself. 

       Over the past two weeks, I've had meeting after meeting with members of my audience (one at a time). Some of them were current or past members of the School of Podcasting, and others I had never met (but they were listeners to my show). Today I talked about what I learned and why you should seriously consider it.

       If the Words "Focus Group" Makes You Uncomfortable, then Think of It as Coaching

       So many people who are experts in their field still used coaches. Hank Haney served as Tiger Woods' coach from 2004-2010. During that span, Woods won six of his 15 career major championships. The two were very close while they worked together, and Woods credits a ton of his success to Haney's teachings. Here are some more people who even after their enormous success still have coaches:

       • Richard Branson 
       • Oprah Winfrey
       • Tony Robbins
       • Leonardo DiCaprio
       • Serena Williams
       • Metallica
       
       

       We all need people who give us feedback. That is how we improve. - Bill Gates

       Is This Just a Plug To Get Me To Hire You As A Coach?

       While I have the Podcast Rodeo Show which looks at your first impression and the Podcast Review Show that looks at your whole episode, website, and we have you fill out a form to discuss the goals of the show, if you want to know what content your audience wants and needs, the best place to go is your audience. 

       I'm Still A Shy Guy at Heart

       People don't believe it, but underneath it all I'm fairly shy. So the thought of reaching out to my email list and asking them for their input made me a little nervous. This was especially true if someone was a current or previous member of the School of Podcasting. This is where you have to change your attitude. 

       When I went to college for my first degree, I was a waiter. To be a good waiter, you listen to your customer and give them exactly what they ordered. As I got on zoom, I just said to myself it's like being a waiter again. 

       I Should've Done This Years Ago

       I sent out an email with the subject line of, "I need your help...." and explained that I was going to rebuild the School of Podcasting from the ground up and I wanted to talk to them. Here are some of the things that I gained from doing this exercise:

       1. I have a visual of what my audience looks like. 
       2. I got two people who will be future guests
       3. I got to see what was working in my show
       4. In regards to the School of Podcasting, I'm glad to say that the things people want, are often already being delivered.
       5. I learned that I might want to reorganize some of the content in the School of Podcasting.
       6. I heard some answer repeated. This is proof of concept that the tutorials I have are the right tutorials.
       7. I got a couple of great questions that I will be using for the "Question of the Month" in the future.
       8. There is nothing to be afraid of as these people are your listeners. If anything they might "fanboy" out a bit which is flattering. 
       
       When You're Too Close to the Subject

       There was one comment that came up twice that in one way surprised me, and yet upon thinking about it, it makes perfect sense.

       When I asked if there were any lessons in the School of Podcasting that they found confusing. Most people were so much confused, but wanted me to go deeper into subjects,

       The lesson? My lesson on Libsyn.com. What is this surprising? Because I've worked there for over five years. Why does this make sense? The curse of knowledge. I went too fast. 

       This was exactly the kind of feedback I was looking for. 

       Don't Do This on a Group Call

       While I could've held this as a "Town Hall" type of meeting, I enjoyed connecting one on one and giving my listener my undivided attention. I know for many of us who are introverts, podcasting is a great way to reach many people without meeting many people, but I'm here to tell you that time is too important to waste. If you were headed in the wrong direction wouldn't you want your GPS to alert you? Well, your audience is your GPS on the road to delivering value. 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       If you want to learn how to connect with your audience by creating great content that inspires them to tell a friend, JOIN the School of Podcasting. 

       Because Of My Podcast: I'm an Advisor in Hollywood

       Jerry Williams is the producer and host of the FBI retired case file review podcast. She's on a mission to show you who the FBI is and what the FBI does through her interviews with retired agents about some of the FBI biggest cases, and some investigations you've never heard about. 

       She said, "A couple of years ago, I wrote a book called FBI myths and misconceptions, a manual for armchair detectives, which uses quotes and snippets, from my podcast interviews to debunk cliches about the FBI, and books, TV and movies. Because of that book and because of my podcast, last summer I was contacted by two different Hollywood Studios. Now I am under contract with FX network, which is owned by Disney, and Warner Brothers and Bad Robot as a technical consultant on two TV shows that are going to be released later this fall.

       Now, I'm not going to name-drop, but if you look up Bad Robot, you'll get to see who I get to hang out with talking to the writers on zoom or the phone a few hours a week as a lot of fun and good pay. Now, I think this is pretty cool because of my podcast story. When I started FBI retired case file review five years ago, the purpose of the podcast was to help me sell more books. I am an author, getting ready to publish my fifth book, crime fiction and nonfiction about the FBI. However, based on my own experiences as an FBI agent, and because I've now interviewed more than 222 former colleagues, I'm pretty knowledgeable about most of the FBI violations.

       But I never thought of myself as a technical consultant. But now I am. Thanks, Dave for letting me share my because of my podcast story, love your show."

       Transcribed by https://otter.ai

       Scott Johnson's What Was That Like Connecting With His Audience

       Thanks to Scott for letting me clips from his latest episode of What Was That Like? Podcast. It showed over and over how engaged your audience is with your content. You hear everyone spreading your show via word of mouth and downloading ALL of your episodes when they find it. Glad to hear your hard work is paying off and I wish you continued success.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       What Was That Like Podcast

       No Agenda Show

       Podcasters Roundtable

       Jerri Willams Check out Jerri's Amazon Page

       Zoom Meeting Software

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show (Review Your Show)

       Podcast Review Show

       Time Table

       02:57 Because of My Podcast:: Jerri Williams 06:53 Everyone Needs a Coach 10:47 What Was That Like - Examples of Engaged Audiences 16:19 What I Gained (and you can too) 19:44 You're Too Close 23:48 THEY SAID MY NAME! 26:38 Clubhouse App Is Spying On You? 32:46 My Dad's Podcast 35:01 Bloopers

        

       ]]>3d9aefb6-4353-40fb-9658-1455f1860553Mon, 22 Feb 2021 05:00:00 -040036:39falsefull763763How To Be Amazing and Leave Them Wanting More - with Valerie GellerAre you looking to grow your audience? Get more engagement with your audience? Today I have Valerie Geller the author of the book Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communicator's Guide to the Internet Age—News, Talk, Information & Personality for Broadcasting, Podcasting, Internet, Radio which is also available on Audible 

       Meet Valerie Geller Valerie Geller, president of Geller Media International, a broadcast consulting firm, trains broadcasters throughout the world by Creating Powerful Radio seminars, workshops, and one-on-one coaching for news, talk, information, and personality programming for radio and television. She's worked with top stations and personalities throughout the world at more than 500 stations in 27 countries. 

       You can find Valerie's Books on her Amazon page, as well as beyondpowerfulradio.com and creatingpowerfulpodcasts.com

       Find her on twitter at @vgeller and @vgeller on the clubhouse app (iOs only).

       Thre Simple Rules To Make Your Podcast Successful
       • Tell the Truth
       • Make it Matter
       • Never Be Boring
       
       Questions to Help You Edit

       Why should you listen to this? Why would someone want to hear this?

       The Best Podcasts: Inform Entertain Inspire Persuade  Connect

       The best conversations come from listening. When doing an interview listen and make the interview more of a conversation.

       Making Engaging Content

       When you are telling the truth and being transparent, you can share your opinion on a topic and ask your audience to share theirs.

       By asking a specific question it's easier than "send me some feedback." 

       When delivering content you should be doing one of the following:

       • Inform
       • Entertain
       • Inspire
       • Persuade 
       • Connect
       
       Place Your Listener in the Movie

       Try to work visual words into your podcast. Help trigger the theater of the mind.

       There is a framework called the Story Spine from Kenn Adams that is used by many storytellers it is:

       • Once upon a time there was ___.
       • Every day, ___.
       • One day ___.
       • Because of that, ___.
       • Because of that, ___. (and so on)
       • Until finally ___.
       • And every day after that ___.
       
       

       For more on storytelling check out Episode 745.

       Growing Your Podcast

       When you are on other platforms, be amazing and leave them wanting more. 

       So many people go to other platforms (like Clubhouse) and tell them to come to the podcast. 

       If you bring amazing content to the conversation those same people will ask you where to find more of you. 

       It all starts with being Amazing.

       Ready To Start You Podcast

       If you're worried about sounding stupid, getting lost in technology, spending too much money, the School of Podcasting can help you avoid all that with:

       Step by step tutorials

       A private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcast minds willing to help

       Live group coaching sessions

       Direct access to me via email (and I often will respond with a video)

       Join worry-free with a 30-day Money-back Guarantee

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and pick the plan the works best for you.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communicator's Guide to the Internet Age—News, Talk, Information & Personality for Broadcasting, Podcasting, Internet, Radio

       The Powerful Radio Workbook: The Prep, Performance & Post Production Planning

       Kenn Adams Story Spine Synergy Theater on YouTube

       Peabody's Down Under

       See Valerie's Video from the Next Radio Event

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>Are you looking to grow your audience? Get more engagement with your audience? Today I have Valerie Geller the author of the book Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communicator's Guide to the Internet Age—News, Talk, Information & Personality for Broadcasting, Podcasting, Internet, Radio which is also available on Audible 

       Meet Valerie Geller Valerie Geller, president of Geller Media International, a broadcast consulting firm, trains broadcasters throughout the world by Creating Powerful Radio seminars, workshops, and one-on-one coaching for news, talk, information, and personality programming for radio and television. She's worked with top stations and personalities throughout the world at more than 500 stations in 27 countries. 

       You can find Valerie's Books on her Amazon page, as well as beyondpowerfulradio.com and creatingpowerfulpodcasts.com

       Find her on twitter at @vgeller and @vgeller on the clubhouse app (iOs only).

       Thre Simple Rules To Make Your Podcast Successful
       • Tell the Truth
       • Make it Matter
       • Never Be Boring
       
       Questions to Help You Edit

       Why should you listen to this? Why would someone want to hear this?

       The Best Podcasts: Inform Entertain Inspire Persuade  Connect

       The best conversations come from listening. When doing an interview listen and make the interview more of a conversation.

       Making Engaging Content

       When you are telling the truth and being transparent, you can share your opinion on a topic and ask your audience to share theirs.

       By asking a specific question it's easier than "send me some feedback." 

       When delivering content you should be doing one of the following:

       • Inform
       • Entertain
       • Inspire
       • Persuade 
       • Connect
       
       Place Your Listener in the Movie

       Try to work visual words into your podcast. Help trigger the theater of the mind.

       There is a framework called the Story Spine from Kenn Adams that is used by many storytellers it is:

       • Once upon a time there was ___.
       • Every day, ___.
       • One day ___.
       • Because of that, ___.
       • Because of that, ___. (and so on)
       • Until finally ___.
       • And every day after that ___.
       
       

       For more on storytelling check out Episode 745.

       Growing Your Podcast

       When you are on other platforms, be amazing and leave them wanting more. 

       So many people go to other platforms (like Clubhouse) and tell them to come to the podcast. 

       If you bring amazing content to the conversation those same people will ask you where to find more of you. 

       It all starts with being Amazing.

       Ready To Start You Podcast

       If you're worried about sounding stupid, getting lost in technology, spending too much money, the School of Podcasting can help you avoid all that with:

       Step by step tutorials

       A private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcast minds willing to help

       Live group coaching sessions

       Direct access to me via email (and I often will respond with a video)

       Join worry-free with a 30-day Money-back Guarantee

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and pick the plan the works best for you.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Beyond Powerful Radio: A Communicator's Guide to the Internet Age—News, Talk, Information & Personality for Broadcasting, Podcasting, Internet, Radio

       The Powerful Radio Workbook: The Prep, Performance & Post Production Planning

       Kenn Adams Story Spine Synergy Theater on YouTube

       Peabody's Down Under

       See Valerie's Video from the Next Radio Event

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>b444655d-eb56-457a-8d69-1c38ed889c0dMon, 15 Feb 2021 05:00:00 -040041:49falsefull762762Three Tools To Boost Your Podcast BrandYour brand is how your show is perceived. Perception is reality. So today I have tips on making your episode one that gets your audience coming back. I also share three tools that you can use to boost your podcast brand. 
       Don't Leave Your Audience Hungry

       Can you imagine if a new restaurant opened in your neighborhood and was serving your favorite food? You get all dressed up and bring a date and go to the new place looking forward to eating some of your favorite food. 

       You show up and the menu just mentions what will be available next week. The problem is you are there NOW and you're hungry. 

       So often I see a first episode delivers nothing more than what amounts to be a table of contents for future episodes. I've read a lot of books but I've never highlighted the table of contents. 

       Tidy Cal $20 Lifetime Deal

       Tidy Cal is a brand new scheduling tool that makes it easy to book guests or clients (your appointments can be free or you can charge). Check out this video I made giving you an overview.

       Telbee is Speakpipe on Steriods

       I've used Speakpipe for years, but the makers of Telbee listened to the wants of speakpipe users and developed a new, morse customizable platform. 

       One thing that can make your podcast better is to understand your audience. Telbee makes it easy to get feedback, and create a widget that looks great. You can even direct people to a website after they leave a message. 

       Channels are the feature that I could use when I do my "question of the month" episodes. I could have a channel where all the responses are tied and organized to that one channel. 

       Check out this quick video of me using Telbee for the first time

       Less Annoying CRM

       I've been looking for a place to organize my information where my coaching clients, my audio editing clients, my guests, or hosts where I have been on their show.  

       I can see my calendar, I see all the communication, set reminders, set up pipelines, and it's only $15/month. 

       It truly lives up to its name. "Less Annoying CRM" check out this "Drive By video" of me playing with Less Annoying CRM

       ]]>Your brand is how your show is perceived. Perception is reality. So today I have tips on making your episode one that gets your audience coming back. I also share three tools that you can use to boost your podcast brand. 
       Don't Leave Your Audience Hungry

       Can you imagine if a new restaurant opened in your neighborhood and was serving your favorite food? You get all dressed up and bring a date and go to the new place looking forward to eating some of your favorite food. 

       You show up and the menu just mentions what will be available next week. The problem is you are there NOW and you're hungry. 

       So often I see a first episode delivers nothing more than what amounts to be a table of contents for future episodes. I've read a lot of books but I've never highlighted the table of contents. 

       Tidy Cal $20 Lifetime Deal

       Tidy Cal is a brand new scheduling tool that makes it easy to book guests or clients (your appointments can be free or you can charge). Check out this video I made giving you an overview.

       Telbee is Speakpipe on Steriods

       I've used Speakpipe for years, but the makers of Telbee listened to the wants of speakpipe users and developed a new, morse customizable platform. 

       One thing that can make your podcast better is to understand your audience. Telbee makes it easy to get feedback, and create a widget that looks great. You can even direct people to a website after they leave a message. 

       Channels are the feature that I could use when I do my "question of the month" episodes. I could have a channel where all the responses are tied and organized to that one channel. 

       Check out this quick video of me using Telbee for the first time

       Less Annoying CRM

       I've been looking for a place to organize my information where my coaching clients, my audio editing clients, my guests, or hosts where I have been on their show.  

       I can see my calendar, I see all the communication, set reminders, set up pipelines, and it's only $15/month. 

       It truly lives up to its name. "Less Annoying CRM" check out this "Drive By video" of me playing with Less Annoying CRM

       ]]>81e20618-2bd3-4350-9d61-081b8e69663eMon, 08 Feb 2021 05:00:00 -040029:46falsefull761761How Shane Whaley Navigated a Travel Podcast Through a PandemicLife is going to kick you in the teeth from time to time (see 2020). Today we talk about your attitude (the only thing you have control over) and we interview Shane Whaley of the Tourpreneur podcast. Shane shares how many people in the travel space just folded up everything just going out of business. This is not the approach Shane has taken, and he not only didn't shut down in 2020, but added more sponsors to his show. 
       Your Attitude

       The Longer I live, the more I realize the impact of attitude on life. Attitude, to me, is more important than facts.

       It is more important than the past, the education, the money, than circumstances, than failure, than successes, than what other people think or say or do.

       It is more important than appearance, giftedness or skill. It will make or break a company... a church... a home.

       The remarkable thing is we have a choice every day regarding the attitude we will embrace for that day.

       We cannot change our past... we cannot change the fact that people will act in a certain way.

       We cannot change the inevitable.

       The only thing we can do is play on the one string we have, and that is our attitude.

       I am convinced that life is 10% what happens to me and 90% of how I react to it. And so it is with you... we are in charge of our Attitudes.”

       ― Charles R. Swindoll

       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on the Pharmacist's Voice  

       I also appear on the Trust cast talking why podcasting is the next big thing.

       If you'd like me to appear on your show, you can contact me here.

       Shane Whaley Tourpreneur Podcast Interview

       04:55 Shane Whaley Tourpreneur.com 07:29 Shane Decided to Start Touorpreneur 10:48 The "Glenn the Geek" Strategy with Events 15:26 Take Advantage of the Extra Time COVID Created 17:50 Choosing Sponsors 19:34 Join the School of Podcasting 20:32 Going for the Win, Win, Win 22:44 Starting a Daily Email 24:37 Dealing with being a "Thought Leader" 26:58 Advice on Interviews 28:55 Dealing with a Boring Guest 30:37 Shane's hobby Podcast Spybrary 32:34 How Long Did it Take to Monetize 33:31 Getting Proof of Concept 35:09 Why he Stayed Niche 36:10 Don't Undersell Yourself 37:19 How He Came Up With Prices 38:47 Tips on Running a Community 41:00 Policing Your Group 42:28 Shane's First Podcast 44:34 Shane the Shock jock 45:43 Shiny Object Syndrome 47:30 What HASN'T Worked? 49:26 Final Advice for the "Wanna Be" podcaster

       Connect with Shane Whaley

       Tourpreneur Podcast

       Spybrary Podcast

       East Germany Podcast

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       If you're worried about sounding bad, planning your podcast, buying the wrong equipment, and being lost in a sea of tech, DON'T. Join the school of podcasting and get access to:

       A private Facebook Group for Networking

       Step by Step Tutorials

       Live Group Coaching

       Priority Access to Dave. 

       Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Life is going to kick you in the teeth from time to time (see 2020). Today we talk about your attitude (the only thing you have control over) and we interview Shane Whaley of the Tourpreneur podcast. Shane shares how many people in the travel space just folded up everything just going out of business. This is not the approach Shane has taken, and he not only didn't shut down in 2020, but added more sponsors to his show. 
       Your Attitude

       The Longer I live, the more I realize the impact of attitude on life. Attitude, to me, is more important than facts.

       It is more important than the past, the education, the money, than circumstances, than failure, than successes, than what other people think or say or do.

       It is more important than appearance, giftedness or skill. It will make or break a company... a church... a home.

       The remarkable thing is we have a choice every day regarding the attitude we will embrace for that day.

       We cannot change our past... we cannot change the fact that people will act in a certain way.

       We cannot change the inevitable.

       The only thing we can do is play on the one string we have, and that is our attitude.

       I am convinced that life is 10% what happens to me and 90% of how I react to it. And so it is with you... we are in charge of our Attitudes.”

       ― Charles R. Swindoll

       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on the Pharmacist's Voice  

       I also appear on the Trust cast talking why podcasting is the next big thing.

       If you'd like me to appear on your show, you can contact me here.

       Shane Whaley Tourpreneur Podcast Interview

       04:55 Shane Whaley Tourpreneur.com 07:29 Shane Decided to Start Touorpreneur 10:48 The "Glenn the Geek" Strategy with Events 15:26 Take Advantage of the Extra Time COVID Created 17:50 Choosing Sponsors 19:34 Join the School of Podcasting 20:32 Going for the Win, Win, Win 22:44 Starting a Daily Email 24:37 Dealing with being a "Thought Leader" 26:58 Advice on Interviews 28:55 Dealing with a Boring Guest 30:37 Shane's hobby Podcast Spybrary 32:34 How Long Did it Take to Monetize 33:31 Getting Proof of Concept 35:09 Why he Stayed Niche 36:10 Don't Undersell Yourself 37:19 How He Came Up With Prices 38:47 Tips on Running a Community 41:00 Policing Your Group 42:28 Shane's First Podcast 44:34 Shane the Shock jock 45:43 Shiny Object Syndrome 47:30 What HASN'T Worked? 49:26 Final Advice for the "Wanna Be" podcaster

       Connect with Shane Whaley

       Tourpreneur Podcast

       Spybrary Podcast

       East Germany Podcast

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       If you're worried about sounding bad, planning your podcast, buying the wrong equipment, and being lost in a sea of tech, DON'T. Join the school of podcasting and get access to:

       A private Facebook Group for Networking

       Step by Step Tutorials

       Live Group Coaching

       Priority Access to Dave. 

       Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>0ab66fa5-ad1b-456f-9250-89348033e4a7Mon, 01 Feb 2021 05:00:00 -040057:10falsefull760760How Podcasters Can Use the Clubhouse App To Build Their AudienceI was at Social Media Marketing World in 2018 enjoying a networking event on an aircraft carrier in San Diego California. I was contacted by Michael Oneil as he and a few friends were going to go to a club called Prohibition and wanted to know if I would want to attend. Did I say it was a club? Prohibition is a speakeasy. I have never been to a speakeasy. The door that you go through shows "LAW OFFICE Eddie Onare, ESQ." 

       When we arrived there was an actual velvet rope. We had to wait. It myself, Michael O’Neal, Harry Durran, and Natalie Jennings. The anticipation was mounting. How long will I have to wait? Are we going to get in at all? Finally, the bouncer unclipped the rope and let us in. I remember walking through a door and going downstairs. It was getting darker and darker as we went on. When I finally get to the bottom and look around, I see a bar in front of me. I see a bench to the left of me. I see a few chairs to the right of me. It is dimly lit, with red lights in the ceiling. I think to myself. "Someone turned their basement into a bar." Don't get me wrong, it was cool. Michael and I ended up playing and singing that night with the saxophone player from Pink Floyd. But I can't underestimate the buzz and anticipation by the scarcity. This is a tactic called Fear of Missing Out (FOMO for short), and today we are going to talk about Clubhouse. This is an app (currently only available for iOs) and one of the things that is fueling the buzz about this app is their use of FOMO. 

       Clubhouse: Drop-in audio chat

       Don't get me wrong, this app is cool. However, it's zoom without video and better moderation. Why is it so popular? You have to be invited in (OOOOOH!). It is only on iOs (sorry android people) so here again, only certain people can get in, and for those on the outside when you hear others talking about it, you have fear of missing out. Does it work? I'm doing an episode about it knowing that 75% of my audience can't use it. 

       What Clubhouse is Good For

       Why I like clubhouse is I'm finding my target audience, and more importantly, my target audience who doesn't know me yet. 

       Then I can LISTEN, and take notes of what is being discussed and take notes as these might be future episodes. 

       I have found a few people I want to connect with due to the details in their profiles, and the value they brought if they actually spoke. 

       Mistakes in Clubhouse

       If you don't have an answer to a question and someone asks you, just say, "That's a good question that I don't have an answer to." If you don't, often the answer you spew is not helpful and makes you look like an idiot in love with their own voice. 

       Not filling out your profile with your website, your interests, and keywords to help you get found. 

       Ask ing a question that is three seconds long followed by self-promotion that is three minutes long. 

       Most of the true networking happens outside of the app so be sure to check your Twitter and Instagram for DMs.

       I'm on Android - I Feel Left Out

       If you look at what clubhouse is at its core is its a group of people (in rooms) that are joining hoping to talk about their favorite subject, meet people, and learn new insights. 

       So do it on zoom.

       Reach out to other podcasts like yours and pick a date to all get together on Zoom. Assign a moderator, and promote for weeks in advance. 

       Everyone and their brother knows how to connect to zoom. The goal here is not to get podcast ready quality (cause the quality on Clubhouse is "ok"), but more the connection. 

       There are also other tools like Slack, Discord.

       There are tools like Mastodon where you can setup your own social media network. 

       There will be Copycats - There Always Is

       Twitter Spaces is coming

       The issue with Android (from what I understand) is while all the different phones are running Android operating systems, there is enough differences between phone manufacturers to create headaches for app developers. 

       Android Apps Like Clubhouse

       Connect Club ( maybe? it shows a Google Play Version)

       Bag Chat This is either another clubhouse or something creepy

       Michael Stelzner's Awesome Clubhouse Tutorial

       Great tutorial see https://youtu.be/o7gv7U-rZl8

       How Are You Pulling Clubhouse Into Your Podcast?

       First, this is not entirely compliant with their terms of service. Their terms say I need written permission from participants. I make a notice in the show name, the show description, and when I pull someone on the stage, I ask for their permission to record them. This is still not written, but it is verbal. Please remember, I'm a teacher - not a lawyer. 

       These Devices Make It Easy

       The Zoom Podtrak P4 ($200)

       The Zoom Podtrak P8 ($499)

       The Rodecaster Pro ($599)

       How? All of these make it super easy to connect a phone. I have three things in my Ask the Podcast Coach. I have myself, clubhouse, and a co-host. 

       I plug my microphone (RE320) into the Rodecaster.

       I plug my iPhone (via a connector) into a TRRS cable that goes into the Rodecaster. 

       When I connect the Rodecaster via USB I am able to send and receive audio to my cohost who I connect with via Streamyard. Everybody can hear everyone. 

       Using Streamyard. I stream live to my YouTube Channel. I record on the Rodecaster using the separate tracks option (as the audio from clubhouse can have a wide variance). 

       See video https://youtu.be/BsG9UD6nzlE

       I Almost Lose 15 Years of My Podcast

       I had my WD 4 Terabyte crash and with it 15 years of podcasting files (all my sound effects, artwork, music, EVERYTHING). It was going to cost me between $700-$1000 to have someone rescue my Drive. Luckily I use Backblaze who walked me through. I am paying $189 to have them save all my files (which are online) to a hard drive and ship it to me. Then I will copy my files to a new hard drive and then ship their hard drive back. I will then be refunded the $189. 

       Backblaze is my hero. For more details on this story, see this video. 

       Because Of My Podcast - I'm Staying Sane

       Josh from the Saving Elephants podcast sent in a "Because of My Podcast" story and shares how during the trying times of covid, and elections, and protests, he feels podcasting to be a powerful platform for alleviating the symptoms of depression.

       It's been wonderful to be able to talk to so many like-minded people from all over the country and even the world to have important meaningful conversations. The podcast provides Josh with a platform where he feels like He's not a helpless bystander forced to do nothing more than complain about the lack of substance and civility and depth in our national political dialogue.

       Instead, through the podcast, he feels like an active participant in that conversation.  He is grateful for podcasting for providing me this platform. podcasting has been for me, a real lifesaver.

       Got a Because of My Podcast Story? Let me hear it at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

       Dog Podcast Network - Liftoff!

       Today we connect with James who shares what "Launch week" felt like and how he is feeling now that Dog Edition is officially available to the public. One thing I did was make a video of me listening to it (before it was published) James found this very useful as he could tell if jokes were landing, and the extra body language. If you're launching a podcast you might want to throw a listening party on zoom so you can watch your "focus group" as they listen. 

       James is still giving away $5000 on the Dog Podcast Network

       Work With Dave

       With 15 years in podcasting and decades helping people harness technology, I love helping people plan,...]]>I was at Social Media Marketing World in 2018 enjoying a networking event on an aircraft carrier in San Diego California. I was contacted by Michael Oneil as he and a few friends were going to go to a club called Prohibition and wanted to know if I would want to attend. Did I say it was a club? Prohibition is a speakeasy. I have never been to a speakeasy. The door that you go through shows "LAW OFFICE Eddie Onare, ESQ." 

       When we arrived there was an actual velvet rope. We had to wait. It myself, Michael O’Neal, Harry Durran, and Natalie Jennings. The anticipation was mounting. How long will I have to wait? Are we going to get in at all? Finally, the bouncer unclipped the rope and let us in. I remember walking through a door and going downstairs. It was getting darker and darker as we went on. When I finally get to the bottom and look around, I see a bar in front of me. I see a bench to the left of me. I see a few chairs to the right of me. It is dimly lit, with red lights in the ceiling. I think to myself. "Someone turned their basement into a bar." Don't get me wrong, it was cool. Michael and I ended up playing and singing that night with the saxophone player from Pink Floyd. But I can't underestimate the buzz and anticipation by the scarcity. This is a tactic called Fear of Missing Out (FOMO for short), and today we are going to talk about Clubhouse. This is an app (currently only available for iOs) and one of the things that is fueling the buzz about this app is their use of FOMO. 

       Clubhouse: Drop-in audio chat

       Don't get me wrong, this app is cool. However, it's zoom without video and better moderation. Why is it so popular? You have to be invited in (OOOOOH!). It is only on iOs (sorry android people) so here again, only certain people can get in, and for those on the outside when you hear others talking about it, you have fear of missing out. Does it work? I'm doing an episode about it knowing that 75% of my audience can't use it. 

       What Clubhouse is Good For

       Why I like clubhouse is I'm finding my target audience, and more importantly, my target audience who doesn't know me yet. 

       Then I can LISTEN, and take notes of what is being discussed and take notes as these might be future episodes. 

       I have found a few people I want to connect with due to the details in their profiles, and the value they brought if they actually spoke. 

       Mistakes in Clubhouse

       If you don't have an answer to a question and someone asks you, just say, "That's a good question that I don't have an answer to." If you don't, often the answer you spew is not helpful and makes you look like an idiot in love with their own voice. 

       Not filling out your profile with your website, your interests, and keywords to help you get found. 

       Ask ing a question that is three seconds long followed by self-promotion that is three minutes long. 

       Most of the true networking happens outside of the app so be sure to check your Twitter and Instagram for DMs.

       I'm on Android - I Feel Left Out

       If you look at what clubhouse is at its core is its a group of people (in rooms) that are joining hoping to talk about their favorite subject, meet people, and learn new insights. 

       So do it on zoom.

       Reach out to other podcasts like yours and pick a date to all get together on Zoom. Assign a moderator, and promote for weeks in advance. 

       Everyone and their brother knows how to connect to zoom. The goal here is not to get podcast ready quality (cause the quality on Clubhouse is "ok"), but more the connection. 

       There are also other tools like Slack, Discord.

       There are tools like Mastodon where you can setup your own social media network. 

       There will be Copycats - There Always Is

       Twitter Spaces is coming

       The issue with Android (from what I understand) is while all the different phones are running Android operating systems, there is enough differences between phone manufacturers to create headaches for app developers. 

       Android Apps Like Clubhouse

       Connect Club ( maybe? it shows a Google Play Version)

       Bag Chat This is either another clubhouse or something creepy

       Michael Stelzner's Awesome Clubhouse Tutorial

       Great tutorial see https://youtu.be/o7gv7U-rZl8

       How Are You Pulling Clubhouse Into Your Podcast?

       First, this is not entirely compliant with their terms of service. Their terms say I need written permission from participants. I make a notice in the show name, the show description, and when I pull someone on the stage, I ask for their permission to record them. This is still not written, but it is verbal. Please remember, I'm a teacher - not a lawyer. 

       These Devices Make It Easy

       The Zoom Podtrak P4 ($200)

       The Zoom Podtrak P8 ($499)

       The Rodecaster Pro ($599)

       How? All of these make it super easy to connect a phone. I have three things in my Ask the Podcast Coach. I have myself, clubhouse, and a co-host. 

       I plug my microphone (RE320) into the Rodecaster.

       I plug my iPhone (via a connector) into a TRRS cable that goes into the Rodecaster. 

       When I connect the Rodecaster via USB I am able to send and receive audio to my cohost who I connect with via Streamyard. Everybody can hear everyone. 

       Using Streamyard. I stream live to my YouTube Channel. I record on the Rodecaster using the separate tracks option (as the audio from clubhouse can have a wide variance). 

       See video https://youtu.be/BsG9UD6nzlE

       I Almost Lose 15 Years of My Podcast

       I had my WD 4 Terabyte crash and with it 15 years of podcasting files (all my sound effects, artwork, music, EVERYTHING). It was going to cost me between $700-$1000 to have someone rescue my Drive. Luckily I use Backblaze who walked me through. I am paying $189 to have them save all my files (which are online) to a hard drive and ship it to me. Then I will copy my files to a new hard drive and then ship their hard drive back. I will then be refunded the $189. 

       Backblaze is my hero. For more details on this story, see this video. 

       Because Of My Podcast - I'm Staying Sane

       Josh from the Saving Elephants podcast sent in a "Because of My Podcast" story and shares how during the trying times of covid, and elections, and protests, he feels podcasting to be a powerful platform for alleviating the symptoms of depression.

       It's been wonderful to be able to talk to so many like-minded people from all over the country and even the world to have important meaningful conversations. The podcast provides Josh with a platform where he feels like He's not a helpless bystander forced to do nothing more than complain about the lack of substance and civility and depth in our national political dialogue.

       Instead, through the podcast, he feels like an active participant in that conversation.  He is grateful for podcasting for providing me this platform. podcasting has been for me, a real lifesaver.

       Got a Because of My Podcast Story? Let me hear it at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

       Dog Podcast Network - Liftoff!

       Today we connect with James who shares what "Launch week" felt like and how he is feeling now that Dog Edition is officially available to the public. One thing I did was make a video of me listening to it (before it was published) James found this very useful as he could tell if jokes were landing, and the extra body language. If you're launching a podcast you might want to throw a listening party on zoom so you can watch your "focus group" as they listen. 

       James is still giving away $5000 on the Dog Podcast Network

       Work With Dave

       With 15 years in podcasting and decades helping people harness technology, I love helping people plan, launch, grow and monetize their podcast. Here are some ways I can help

       School of Podcasting - tutorials, networking group, and live group coaching.

       Podcast Quickstart -Three months of the School of Podcasting and three hours of additional consulting

       Podcast Consulting - Get your questions answered quickly in a one-on-one coaching session.

       Podcast Review Show - Get a full audit of your show, your website, your goals, by two podcast/media experts.

       Podcast Rodeo Show - Have Dave take the temperature of your first impression as he listens to the first few minutes of your show.

       ]]>ba2850ff-2f5a-471f-ba77-57682af30601Mon, 25 Jan 2021 05:00:00 -040045:38falsefull759759How Jack Rhysider's Darknet Diaries Podcast Gets 300,000 Downloads Per EpisodeWould you like 300,000 downloads per episode? Are you willing to work for three weeks to get media exposure in 2% of the outlets you contact? Are you willing to work for months on your first episodes and ask others to give you HONEST feedback on your show? Are you willing to ask questions that might potentially show you that your show is boring? Jack has, and he has created a great show. Today on episode 758 of the School of Podcasting I have the honor of looking into how Jack has grown his Darknet Diaries podcast.

       Jack was looking for a podcast about hackers/hacking and couldn't find any (especially in a narrative format). The solution? Create the podcast YOU want to hear and see if anyone else would be interested in listening to your podcast.

        

       Jack Rhysider's Favorite Marketing Books

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling Purple Cow: Transform Your Business by Being Remarkable - Seth Godin Gary Vaynerchuk Traction: How Any Startup Can Achieve Explosive Customer Growth -Gabriel Wineberg Superfans: The Easy Way to Stand Out, Grow Your Tribe, And Build a Successful Business - Pat Flynn Dave added: Will it Fly Pat Flynn

       Connect with Jack

       Darknet Diaries

       Lime.Link Podcast Blog

       Jack's Patreon Page

       Dog Podcast Network Final Week Before Launch

       The Dog Podcast Network is launching a new show on their network called "Dog Edition" and today we talk with James Jacobson about the final preparations. You can earn money sharing stories that include dogs. 

       TIMELINE

       00:03:34 How Many Downloads Does Jack Get 00:04:44 Jack's Launch 00:07:04 Jack Sent Out a Survey 00:08:03 What Part is Boring? 00:08:37 Why Did You Use a Survey? 00:10:01 Negative Feedback 00:10:30 Do have any kind of focus group? 00:10:59 How do you find these stories? 00:12:58 Your Podcast On Auto Pilot 00:15:03 How did your early listeners find you? 00:16:36 10,000 Stickers in a day 00:17:30 Reaching Out to the Media 00:20:10 How long did this strategy take? 00:21:33 How Long Had You Been Blogging? 00:22:34 Secret Weapon: Your Attitude 00:23:06 Marketing Strategies 00:23:57 Early Monetization 00:25:32 How Long Did it Take to Go Full Time 00:26:16 How Did You Grow Your Numbers 00:26:54 Don't Gloss Over Your Ask 00:27:16 How Did You Know It Was Time to Start a Patreon? 00:27:56 Deep Dive Into Patreon 00:32:20 Using Castbox as a Benchmark 00:34:29 The Curiosity Headline Approach 00:37:52 He Has Good Descriptions 00:40:03 A Deep Dive Into The Apple Charts 00:43:20 Favorite Marketing Books 00:45:49 Is there any Downside to a large audience? 00:48:57 Jack Got Tracked 00:50:53 Meeting Fans With Divulging Your Identity 00:51:51 Advice For Wanna Be Podcasters 00:56:19 Dog Podcast Network 01:02:02 Please Share The Show

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Graphtreon - See how much people are making on Patreon

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Dave's Patreon Page

       Episode on Podcast Surveys

       Castbox app

       Subscribe to the School of Podcasting Podcast (free)

       School of Podcasting Affiliate Program

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Review Show

       Podcast Consulting

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>Would you like 300,000 downloads per episode? Are you willing to work for three weeks to get media exposure in 2% of the outlets you contact? Are you willing to work for months on your first episodes and ask others to give you HONEST feedback on your show? Are you willing to ask questions that might potentially show you that your show is boring? Jack has, and he has created a great show. Today on episode 758 of the School of Podcasting I have the honor of looking into how Jack has grown his Darknet Diaries podcast.

       Jack was looking for a podcast about hackers/hacking and couldn't find any (especially in a narrative format). The solution? Create the podcast YOU want to hear and see if anyone else would be interested in listening to your podcast.

        

       Jack Rhysider's Favorite Marketing Books

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling Purple Cow: Transform Your Business by Being Remarkable - Seth Godin Gary Vaynerchuk Traction: How Any Startup Can Achieve Explosive Customer Growth -Gabriel Wineberg Superfans: The Easy Way to Stand Out, Grow Your Tribe, And Build a Successful Business - Pat Flynn Dave added: Will it Fly Pat Flynn

       Connect with Jack

       Darknet Diaries

       Lime.Link Podcast Blog

       Jack's Patreon Page

       Dog Podcast Network Final Week Before Launch

       The Dog Podcast Network is launching a new show on their network called "Dog Edition" and today we talk with James Jacobson about the final preparations. You can earn money sharing stories that include dogs. 

       TIMELINE

       00:03:34 How Many Downloads Does Jack Get 00:04:44 Jack's Launch 00:07:04 Jack Sent Out a Survey 00:08:03 What Part is Boring? 00:08:37 Why Did You Use a Survey? 00:10:01 Negative Feedback 00:10:30 Do have any kind of focus group? 00:10:59 How do you find these stories? 00:12:58 Your Podcast On Auto Pilot 00:15:03 How did your early listeners find you? 00:16:36 10,000 Stickers in a day 00:17:30 Reaching Out to the Media 00:20:10 How long did this strategy take? 00:21:33 How Long Had You Been Blogging? 00:22:34 Secret Weapon: Your Attitude 00:23:06 Marketing Strategies 00:23:57 Early Monetization 00:25:32 How Long Did it Take to Go Full Time 00:26:16 How Did You Grow Your Numbers 00:26:54 Don't Gloss Over Your Ask 00:27:16 How Did You Know It Was Time to Start a Patreon? 00:27:56 Deep Dive Into Patreon 00:32:20 Using Castbox as a Benchmark 00:34:29 The Curiosity Headline Approach 00:37:52 He Has Good Descriptions 00:40:03 A Deep Dive Into The Apple Charts 00:43:20 Favorite Marketing Books 00:45:49 Is there any Downside to a large audience? 00:48:57 Jack Got Tracked 00:50:53 Meeting Fans With Divulging Your Identity 00:51:51 Advice For Wanna Be Podcasters 00:56:19 Dog Podcast Network 01:02:02 Please Share The Show

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Graphtreon - See how much people are making on Patreon

       What Was That Like Podcast

       Dave's Patreon Page

       Episode on Podcast Surveys

       Castbox app

       Subscribe to the School of Podcasting Podcast (free)

       School of Podcasting Affiliate Program

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Podcast Review Show

       Podcast Consulting

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>97902bdf-27e9-4760-a73f-0e53e19e94c6Mon, 18 Jan 2021 05:00:00 -040001:03:13falsefull758758Fine Tuning Your Podcast Growth With Listener SurveysRon Howard has been in the entertainment industry since he was a little boy on the Andy Griffith Show, Later he was on Happy Days and since then has been making phenomenal movies. He's been nominated for 114 awards and won 39 times for a percentage of 34%, In 2002 he won with A Beautiful Mind for Best Picture and Best Director. One might say, "Not too shabby."

       Rob was on the true stories show on Satelite radio talking about always screens his movies and checks in with the audience to see how the content is connecting with his audience.

       In the interview, he said, "We did our first previews, and I was so defensive about it and against it, and I wound up learning so many important truths about our story, that to this day, even the Beatles documentary, even though I have Final Cut, I screened the movies and I know how to ask the questions and I ask people to fill out questionnaires.

       I find it very, very useful. It's difficult but I always think that it's like the playwright getting to see the show out of town before you take it to Broadway. I don't think it's really any different than that.

       I have the confidence of having done it a lot, and the power of Final Cut, so that this is about me understanding how the movie works. It's comforting on the one hand, but I think it's really important to understand how the movie is communicating with an audience.

       That's what entertainment is: Is something is communicated to you and do you enjoy it?

       Why Podcasters Skip The Focus Group

       If this is your first podcast, you probably spent much more time on their episodes than they originally planned, so the last thing you want to hear is that you need to go back and do some work.

       While understandable, if the goal is to grow your podcast, constructive feedback is something that is essential to growing your podcast. Most of us are familiar with the story of Thomas Edison doing 1000 attempts at the light bulb that didn't work. When asked about it these "failures" Edison replied, "I didn’t fail 1,000 times. The light bulb was an invention with 1,000 steps."

       In some cases, people see their episode as art. If that is you, then skip this episode. Your goal is to not grow your audience but to just put the podcast out there. The podcast is not for your audience. It's for you.

       Just Like Your Podcast, Creating Your Survey Starts With Why

       Today you will hear from Glenn the Geek who runs the Horse Radio Network. His primary income is sponsorship and a membership site. We will hear from Scott Johnson from the What Was That Like? podcast that has been steadily growing since it launched. Scott was looking for feedback on his content.

       The Process of Creating a Survey
       • Identify why you're doing your survey (and what you're trying to learn)
       • Choose your questions
       • Deliver your survey
       • Collect your feedback
       • Organize your data and look for trends
       • Implement changes based on feedback.
       • Follow up to ensure you've achieved your goal.
       
       Potential Questions Demographics:

       This is where you ask age, sex, income.

       Where they hang out:

       Where else do they get information like yours? What other podcasts, forums, magazines, etc do they consume?

       By knowing where your audience is you can go to where they are and make friends.

       Content Questions:

       How long do they listen?

       Favorite parts of the show?

       Parts they wish would be different?

       Audio quality?

       The top thing they've gained from listening?

       Advertising Questions:

       Have you purchased any products from sponsors on this show?

       Who do you think would be a good sponsor?

       Do you skip the ads?

       What was the last thing you purchased?

       If You're Just Launching

       Take the episode you feel is ready for the public and get specific. As about the audio quality, and how far people listened.

       If they say they listened to the whole thing, give them a quiz to prove it. If they didn't listen far found out why.

       There is no sense going any further until you get your content resonating with your audience.

       Special Thanks to:

       Scott Johnson from What Was That Like? (a great podcast)

       Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network

       Jack Rhysider from the Darknet Diaries (Check out  episode 27 about hacking the Apple Charts)

       James from the Dog Podcast Network

       Need Help With Your Podcast?

       If you need help with:

       Planning

       Launching

       Growing

       Monetizing

       Troubleshooting

       Gear Selection

       It is all there at the School of Podcasting

       Mentioned in this Podcast

       Video on Using Google Forms

       episode 27 of Darknet Diaries about hacking Apple Charts

       Profit From Your Podcast Book on Monetizing Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting  - Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast

       ]]>Ron Howard has been in the entertainment industry since he was a little boy on the Andy Griffith Show, Later he was on Happy Days and since then has been making phenomenal movies. He's been nominated for 114 awards and won 39 times for a percentage of 34%, In 2002 he won with A Beautiful Mind for Best Picture and Best Director. One might say, "Not too shabby."

       Rob was on the true stories show on Satelite radio talking about always screens his movies and checks in with the audience to see how the content is connecting with his audience.

       In the interview, he said, "We did our first previews, and I was so defensive about it and against it, and I wound up learning so many important truths about our story, that to this day, even the Beatles documentary, even though I have Final Cut, I screened the movies and I know how to ask the questions and I ask people to fill out questionnaires.

       I find it very, very useful. It's difficult but I always think that it's like the playwright getting to see the show out of town before you take it to Broadway. I don't think it's really any different than that.

       I have the confidence of having done it a lot, and the power of Final Cut, so that this is about me understanding how the movie works. It's comforting on the one hand, but I think it's really important to understand how the movie is communicating with an audience.

       That's what entertainment is: Is something is communicated to you and do you enjoy it?

       Why Podcasters Skip The Focus Group

       If this is your first podcast, you probably spent much more time on their episodes than they originally planned, so the last thing you want to hear is that you need to go back and do some work.

       While understandable, if the goal is to grow your podcast, constructive feedback is something that is essential to growing your podcast. Most of us are familiar with the story of Thomas Edison doing 1000 attempts at the light bulb that didn't work. When asked about it these "failures" Edison replied, "I didn’t fail 1,000 times. The light bulb was an invention with 1,000 steps."

       In some cases, people see their episode as art. If that is you, then skip this episode. Your goal is to not grow your audience but to just put the podcast out there. The podcast is not for your audience. It's for you.

       Just Like Your Podcast, Creating Your Survey Starts With Why

       Today you will hear from Glenn the Geek who runs the Horse Radio Network. His primary income is sponsorship and a membership site. We will hear from Scott Johnson from the What Was That Like? podcast that has been steadily growing since it launched. Scott was looking for feedback on his content.

       The Process of Creating a Survey
       • Identify why you're doing your survey (and what you're trying to learn)
       • Choose your questions
       • Deliver your survey
       • Collect your feedback
       • Organize your data and look for trends
       • Implement changes based on feedback.
       • Follow up to ensure you've achieved your goal.
       
       Potential Questions Demographics:

       This is where you ask age, sex, income.

       Where they hang out:

       Where else do they get information like yours? What other podcasts, forums, magazines, etc do they consume?

       By knowing where your audience is you can go to where they are and make friends.

       Content Questions:

       How long do they listen?

       Favorite parts of the show?

       Parts they wish would be different?

       Audio quality?

       The top thing they've gained from listening?

       Advertising Questions:

       Have you purchased any products from sponsors on this show?

       Who do you think would be a good sponsor?

       Do you skip the ads?

       What was the last thing you purchased?

       If You're Just Launching

       Take the episode you feel is ready for the public and get specific. As about the audio quality, and how far people listened.

       If they say they listened to the whole thing, give them a quiz to prove it. If they didn't listen far found out why.

       There is no sense going any further until you get your content resonating with your audience.

       Special Thanks to:

       Scott Johnson from What Was That Like? (a great podcast)

       Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network

       Jack Rhysider from the Darknet Diaries (Check out  episode 27 about hacking the Apple Charts)

       James from the Dog Podcast Network

       Need Help With Your Podcast?

       If you need help with:

       Planning

       Launching

       Growing

       Monetizing

       Troubleshooting

       Gear Selection

       It is all there at the School of Podcasting

       Mentioned in this Podcast

       Video on Using Google Forms

       episode 27 of Darknet Diaries about hacking Apple Charts

       Profit From Your Podcast Book on Monetizing Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting  - Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast

       ]]>8cfd839f-e106-4a86-88c0-fb35fb3ab24aMon, 11 Jan 2021 05:10:51 -040037:31falsefull75775714 Steps To Start a Successful Podcast in 2021It's the first episode of the years and in the same that I have the last episode of the year look at why people listen, today we talk about how to start. Ten Years ago I did an episode called "27 steps to launch a podcast and today I am going to update it. As you might imagine things have changed in 10 years. If you already have a podcast I have some items for you. Over the years there have been some ingredients of podcasting that we know add value, but like any recipe, if you use an ingredient in the wrong way you can ruin the final product.

       Keep it Real

       I hear the phrase, "Keep it real." This should stay authentic. You should be talking from your heart and your beliefs. Don't say what people want to hear because it's popular, if your opinion differs let's hear it. Let's also hear why you believe those thoughts. We just might learn something.

       
       

       How this phrase is abused is when "keeping it real" means I'm not going to edit my podcast at all. There are editors who work in movies, television, books, magazines, and newspapers. However, your podcast is perfect with no room for improvement. There is always room for improvement.

       
       

       I read on Facebook where someone took 26 minutes to answer ONE question. The final version of the podcast had that answer trimmed to four minutes.

       
       

       Fishing is Boring

       I haven't fished in 20 years. If you're into fishing check out the Fish Nerds show with Clay Groves. For me, half the fun was getting to play with a boat and get out on a lake. In some cases, if the boat had a motor it was even more fun. Then you bait your hook, throw your line in and wait. Then you wait some more. This part of fishing is really boring.

       
       

       Every time I hear someone start off an interview with "Tell me a little bit about yourself," the person is fishing. They are listening just like watching their bobber float on the lake, looking for a nibble.

       
       

       Reeling in a Fish is Exciting

       I don't watch fishing on TV, but if I'm clicking through the channels and a fishing show is on, they don't show two people in a boat watching their bobber. They show someone standing up with excitement as they have caught a great fish and they are bringing it into the boat.

       
       

       When you have a guest and you find something that YOU KNOW is going to RESONATE with your audience that's exciting and in the same the fisherman does everything they can to get the fish into the boat, you do everything you can to get that content into your recording.

       
       

       Stories are Great

       Half the time we ask, "tell me a little bit about yourself" we are fishing for a story. Somehow we are lead to believe that knowing someone's back story is going to help us. If I started my podcast with "Today we are going to interview Gern Blanston who has a proven strategy of growing your audience by 200%, but first, let's find out what his parents did for a living..." you would be yelling at your device to get to the good stuff.

       
       

       Stories are great when someone shares a story that we can learn from, or it makes you laugh, cry, think, groan, or educates us or entertains us.

       
       

       When I was sixteen years one night I was trying to look cool in front of a girl and climbed a sign at the front of the mall that showed the names of the movies in its three theaters. We figured out that we could change the title "Desperately Seeking Susan" to Desperately Sucking Suzan. As I was a hard rock fan, I was not a fan of Madonna and thought this would be hilarious. It took some effort to get up there, and once up there changing letters was not as easy as it looked. In the end, the sign read Desperately Seeting Susan. Is this real? Yes. Is it a story? Yes. Does it help you with your podcast? No.

       
       

       Just because something is real and it's a story, doesn't mean it's good. It might be really boring.

       
       

       The story of Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network asking to get a booth at the largest Horsing Event was a great story as it has helped many people grow their podcast.

       
       

       Fishing Takes Patience - And We Live in a Microwave Society

       People want good stuff. They want the band whose name is on the ticket (skip the warm-up act). GET TO THE GOOD STUFF.

       
       

       Tell a four-year-old kid you brought them candy and then tell them they first have to listen to you recite some Edgar Allen Poe. They will start screaming, "GIVE ME THE CANDY."

       
       

       Netflix just added the ability to speed up movies. If you are watching a series on Netflix, at the end when you click "Go to next episode" it skips the end credits of the current episode and in intro of the next episode. It gets right to the good stuff.

       
       

       Conversations Are Great

       This is another thing I hear that is taken out of context. What you want to avoid is an interrogation if you are interviewing someone. Just because something is done in a conversational style does not mean it's not boring.

       
       

       All You Need is Consistency

       People are taking the word consistency and spinning it as "If I just release a show on a consistent basis, I will have success." I see people in Facebook groups saying things like, "I've been podcasting for seven months on a weekly basis, why aren't my numbers higher?" They feel consistency in publishing is the key. It is important. When you publish on a regular, predictable basis, you become part of their routine.

       
       

       HOWEVER:

       
       

       What really matters is consistency in delivering value. I remember Jason Sudekis from Saturday Night Live. Troy Heinritz from the blacklist exposed told me the show LEd Lasso on HBO was really good (notice word of mouth) and so I check it out and Troy was right. I then saw Jason had a movie called Kodachrome on Netflix. The movie was predictable, but again the acting of Jason Sudekis was impressive. Consequently, I would watch another Jason Sudekis movies because he was in it. The same goes for the actor Paul Giamatti who I originally saw in Howard Stern's private parts. He is an amazing actor.

       
       

       I love John Cusak movies from the '80s. I loved behind John Malcovich cause it was so outside the box. Something happened and John's movies started being more and more "Meh" and while I'm still a fan, it's not automatic that I will watch a movie because John is in it.

       
       

       When it comes to with consistency it boils down to this, I would rather have a GREAT episode one day late, instead of a "Meh" episode on time.

       
       

       How To Start a Podcast in 2021

       2. Know why you're starting a podcast
       3. 
          
       5. Know your audience
       6. 
          
       8. What can you talk about to hold the attention of the WHO and get them to do your WHY.
       9. 
          
       11. Determine your format
       12. 
           
       14. Purchase your equipment
       15. 
           
       17. Practice recordings and get to know your gear
       18. 
           
       20. Identify your Intro and Outro
       21. 
           
       23. Record an episode that you feel is good enough for the public
       24. 
           
       26. Get feedback from trustworthy people
       27. 
           
       29. Get artwork
       30. 
           
       32. Order Media Hosting
       33. 
           
       35. Create Your Website
       36. 
           
       38. Submit your show to directories (all of them)
       
       

       Join The School of Podcasting

       The School of Podcasting has step-by-step tutorials that walk you through all these steps along with lessons on making great content, growing your audience, and monetizing your show. You can join worry-free. Join and if you're not happy within the first 30 days, I will refund your money. 

       
       

       JOIN TODAY

       
       

       Mentioned In This Show

       Fish Nerds Podcast

       
       

       Blacklist Exposed

       
       

       Horse Radio Network

       
       

       Glenn the Geek Episodes

       
       

       Podpage (take the free class on Podpage)

       
       

       Podcast Branding

       
       

       Second Line Themes

       
       

       Cooler Websites Web Hosting

       
       

       Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       
       

       Podcasting Resources

       
       

       Join The School of Podcasting

       
       

       Podcast...]]>It's the first episode of the years and in the same that I have the last episode of the year look at why people listen, today we talk about how to start. Ten Years ago I did an episode called "27 steps to launch a podcast and today I am going to update it. As you might imagine things have changed in 10 years. If you already have a podcast I have some items for you. Over the years there have been some ingredients of podcasting that we know add value, but like any recipe, if you use an ingredient in the wrong way you can ruin the final product.

       Keep it Real

       I hear the phrase, "Keep it real." This should stay authentic. You should be talking from your heart and your beliefs. Don't say what people want to hear because it's popular, if your opinion differs let's hear it. Let's also hear why you believe those thoughts. We just might learn something.

       
       

       How this phrase is abused is when "keeping it real" means I'm not going to edit my podcast at all. There are editors who work in movies, television, books, magazines, and newspapers. However, your podcast is perfect with no room for improvement. There is always room for improvement.

       
       

       I read on Facebook where someone took 26 minutes to answer ONE question. The final version of the podcast had that answer trimmed to four minutes.

       
       

       Fishing is Boring

       I haven't fished in 20 years. If you're into fishing check out the Fish Nerds show with Clay Groves. For me, half the fun was getting to play with a boat and get out on a lake. In some cases, if the boat had a motor it was even more fun. Then you bait your hook, throw your line in and wait. Then you wait some more. This part of fishing is really boring.

       
       

       Every time I hear someone start off an interview with "Tell me a little bit about yourself," the person is fishing. They are listening just like watching their bobber float on the lake, looking for a nibble.

       
       

       Reeling in a Fish is Exciting

       I don't watch fishing on TV, but if I'm clicking through the channels and a fishing show is on, they don't show two people in a boat watching their bobber. They show someone standing up with excitement as they have caught a great fish and they are bringing it into the boat.

       
       

       When you have a guest and you find something that YOU KNOW is going to RESONATE with your audience that's exciting and in the same the fisherman does everything they can to get the fish into the boat, you do everything you can to get that content into your recording.

       
       

       Stories are Great

       Half the time we ask, "tell me a little bit about yourself" we are fishing for a story. Somehow we are lead to believe that knowing someone's back story is going to help us. If I started my podcast with "Today we are going to interview Gern Blanston who has a proven strategy of growing your audience by 200%, but first, let's find out what his parents did for a living..." you would be yelling at your device to get to the good stuff.

       
       

       Stories are great when someone shares a story that we can learn from, or it makes you laugh, cry, think, groan, or educates us or entertains us.

       
       

       When I was sixteen years one night I was trying to look cool in front of a girl and climbed a sign at the front of the mall that showed the names of the movies in its three theaters. We figured out that we could change the title "Desperately Seeking Susan" to Desperately Sucking Suzan. As I was a hard rock fan, I was not a fan of Madonna and thought this would be hilarious. It took some effort to get up there, and once up there changing letters was not as easy as it looked. In the end, the sign read Desperately Seeting Susan. Is this real? Yes. Is it a story? Yes. Does it help you with your podcast? No.

       
       

       Just because something is real and it's a story, doesn't mean it's good. It might be really boring.

       
       

       The story of Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network asking to get a booth at the largest Horsing Event was a great story as it has helped many people grow their podcast.

       
       

       Fishing Takes Patience - And We Live in a Microwave Society

       People want good stuff. They want the band whose name is on the ticket (skip the warm-up act). GET TO THE GOOD STUFF.

       
       

       Tell a four-year-old kid you brought them candy and then tell them they first have to listen to you recite some Edgar Allen Poe. They will start screaming, "GIVE ME THE CANDY."

       
       

       Netflix just added the ability to speed up movies. If you are watching a series on Netflix, at the end when you click "Go to next episode" it skips the end credits of the current episode and in intro of the next episode. It gets right to the good stuff.

       
       

       Conversations Are Great

       This is another thing I hear that is taken out of context. What you want to avoid is an interrogation if you are interviewing someone. Just because something is done in a conversational style does not mean it's not boring.

       
       

       All You Need is Consistency

       People are taking the word consistency and spinning it as "If I just release a show on a consistent basis, I will have success." I see people in Facebook groups saying things like, "I've been podcasting for seven months on a weekly basis, why aren't my numbers higher?" They feel consistency in publishing is the key. It is important. When you publish on a regular, predictable basis, you become part of their routine.

       
       

       HOWEVER:

       
       

       What really matters is consistency in delivering value. I remember Jason Sudekis from Saturday Night Live. Troy Heinritz from the blacklist exposed told me the show LEd Lasso on HBO was really good (notice word of mouth) and so I check it out and Troy was right. I then saw Jason had a movie called Kodachrome on Netflix. The movie was predictable, but again the acting of Jason Sudekis was impressive. Consequently, I would watch another Jason Sudekis movies because he was in it. The same goes for the actor Paul Giamatti who I originally saw in Howard Stern's private parts. He is an amazing actor.

       
       

       I love John Cusak movies from the '80s. I loved behind John Malcovich cause it was so outside the box. Something happened and John's movies started being more and more "Meh" and while I'm still a fan, it's not automatic that I will watch a movie because John is in it.

       
       

       When it comes to with consistency it boils down to this, I would rather have a GREAT episode one day late, instead of a "Meh" episode on time.

       
       

       How To Start a Podcast in 2021

       2. Know why you're starting a podcast
       3. 
          
       5. Know your audience
       6. 
          
       8. What can you talk about to hold the attention of the WHO and get them to do your WHY.
       9. 
          
       11. Determine your format
       12. 
           
       14. Purchase your equipment
       15. 
           
       17. Practice recordings and get to know your gear
       18. 
           
       20. Identify your Intro and Outro
       21. 
           
       23. Record an episode that you feel is good enough for the public
       24. 
           
       26. Get feedback from trustworthy people
       27. 
           
       29. Get artwork
       30. 
           
       32. Order Media Hosting
       33. 
           
       35. Create Your Website
       36. 
           
       38. Submit your show to directories (all of them)
       
       

       Join The School of Podcasting

       The School of Podcasting has step-by-step tutorials that walk you through all these steps along with lessons on making great content, growing your audience, and monetizing your show. You can join worry-free. Join and if you're not happy within the first 30 days, I will refund your money. 

       
       

       JOIN TODAY

       
       

       Mentioned In This Show

       Fish Nerds Podcast

       
       

       Blacklist Exposed

       
       

       Horse Radio Network

       
       

       Glenn the Geek Episodes

       
       

       Podpage (take the free class on Podpage)

       
       

       Podcast Branding

       
       

       Second Line Themes

       
       

       Cooler Websites Web Hosting

       
       

       Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       
       

       Podcasting Resources

       
       

       Join The School of Podcasting

       
       

       Podcast Consulting

       
       

        

       ]]>99920931-a3fd-4fc2-84ba-3c6f8fd7a63bMon, 04 Jan 2021 05:00:00 -040050:04falsefull756756My Favorite Podcast Is.. 2020 EditionEvery year I ask my audience what their favorite podcast is and why it is their favorite. They can also plug their website. This exercise then helps us understand why people tune in, as well as hear about some great podcasts. 

       In general, I say good content will make us:

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       • Educate
       • Entertain
       
       

       So pay attention and here how most of these shows are not just doing one of those, but multiple emotions and strategies.

       Timeline

       01:26 Dave love Podnews.net

       03:16 Steve Stewart from the Money Plan SOS loves the Stacking Benjamins Show (Steve was just on Episode 752 talking about his Podcast Editor Academy)

       05:59 Joe Saul Sehy from Stacking Benjamins loves the Be Our Guest Podcast

       09:10 Shane from the Spybrary Podcast  loves the Ask the Podcast Coach  show

       11:03 Anthony from the Route 66 Podcast loves the Space Shot

       13:32 Bill watches movies - The Secret History of Hollywood

       16:10 Brandon from The Florida Focus Podcast - The Art of Manliness

       17:18 Craig from InglesPodcast lovesThe Week Unwrapped

       20:02 Glen from Caratere Books  loves the 20 thousand hz

       21:00  CG from the Rocketry Show also loves 20 thousand hz and Invisibilia with Roman Mars

       23:49 Harris from Wild Talk love Revisionist History

       25:20 Gary from the Content Gardener Loves the Disrupt Yourself from Whitney Johnson

       26:24 Kevin from Grow the Show loves Three Clips

       27:27 Patrick from the Big Seance podcast loves Straight Talk with Ross Mathews

       28:26 Letitia from Rooted and Overflowing loves the Productive Woman

       29:27 Geoge Excelsier journey's podcast loves Saturday Night Movie Sleep Over

       30:17 Effie Parks from Once Upon a Gene loves the Jordan Harbinger Show

       32:51 Louis Love Thy Lawyer loves All the President's Lawyers

       33:57 Scott from What Was That Like loves Bill Gates and Rasheda Jones Ask Big Questions

       35:52 Scott from the Amazing Maine podcast loves the Riskory podcast.

       37:31 Scott from Moving Forward Leadership loves Habs Unfiltered

       40:11 Sufeah loves the 85 South Show

       41:04 Greg from Indie Dropin Network loves Just N/A Science

       42:53 Kim from Beekeeping Today loves Revive Our Hearts

       44:30 Zita from Ritual Recipes loves the Wedding Ceremony Podcast 

       Homework: Pretend Your A Listener

       46:43 In some cases I had to go looking for these podcasts and in some of those cases it wasn't easy. My advice for you is to go to Google and search for the name of your show "podcast." 

       In many cases people sign up and their media host (because they don't know your website) will use the built in website that comes with their hosting. Look for the "website" field and make sure it points at your website. If you don't have a website (one of these shows had a .podwits address - classy) the go buy a domain at www.coolerwebsites.com and point it the site you are using (and preserve your first impression). 

       Dog Podcast Network Update

       48:55 I'm following the launch of the podcast network. In the past they have solicited stories for their contest, hired a producer. In this segment, we hear their trailer and learn about their press release. Check them out at www.dogpodcastnetwork.com

       End of Show

       52:36 Let Me Help You 53:58 Bloopers

        

       ]]>Every year I ask my audience what their favorite podcast is and why it is their favorite. They can also plug their website. This exercise then helps us understand why people tune in, as well as hear about some great podcasts. 

       In general, I say good content will make us:

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       • Educate
       • Entertain
       
       

       So pay attention and here how most of these shows are not just doing one of those, but multiple emotions and strategies.

       Timeline

       01:26 Dave love Podnews.net

       03:16 Steve Stewart from the Money Plan SOS loves the Stacking Benjamins Show (Steve was just on Episode 752 talking about his Podcast Editor Academy)

       05:59 Joe Saul Sehy from Stacking Benjamins loves the Be Our Guest Podcast

       09:10 Shane from the Spybrary Podcast  loves the Ask the Podcast Coach  show

       11:03 Anthony from the Route 66 Podcast loves the Space Shot

       13:32 Bill watches movies - The Secret History of Hollywood

       16:10 Brandon from The Florida Focus Podcast - The Art of Manliness

       17:18 Craig from InglesPodcast lovesThe Week Unwrapped

       20:02 Glen from Caratere Books  loves the 20 thousand hz

       21:00  CG from the Rocketry Show also loves 20 thousand hz and Invisibilia with Roman Mars

       23:49 Harris from Wild Talk love Revisionist History

       25:20 Gary from the Content Gardener Loves the Disrupt Yourself from Whitney Johnson

       26:24 Kevin from Grow the Show loves Three Clips

       27:27 Patrick from the Big Seance podcast loves Straight Talk with Ross Mathews

       28:26 Letitia from Rooted and Overflowing loves the Productive Woman

       29:27 Geoge Excelsier journey's podcast loves Saturday Night Movie Sleep Over

       30:17 Effie Parks from Once Upon a Gene loves the Jordan Harbinger Show

       32:51 Louis Love Thy Lawyer loves All the President's Lawyers

       33:57 Scott from What Was That Like loves Bill Gates and Rasheda Jones Ask Big Questions

       35:52 Scott from the Amazing Maine podcast loves the Riskory podcast.

       37:31 Scott from Moving Forward Leadership loves Habs Unfiltered

       40:11 Sufeah loves the 85 South Show

       41:04 Greg from Indie Dropin Network loves Just N/A Science

       42:53 Kim from Beekeeping Today loves Revive Our Hearts

       44:30 Zita from Ritual Recipes loves the Wedding Ceremony Podcast 

       Homework: Pretend Your A Listener

       46:43 In some cases I had to go looking for these podcasts and in some of those cases it wasn't easy. My advice for you is to go to Google and search for the name of your show "podcast." 

       In many cases people sign up and their media host (because they don't know your website) will use the built in website that comes with their hosting. Look for the "website" field and make sure it points at your website. If you don't have a website (one of these shows had a .podwits address - classy) the go buy a domain at www.coolerwebsites.com and point it the site you are using (and preserve your first impression). 

       Dog Podcast Network Update

       48:55 I'm following the launch of the podcast network. In the past they have solicited stories for their contest, hired a producer. In this segment, we hear their trailer and learn about their press release. Check them out at www.dogpodcastnetwork.com

       End of Show

       52:36 Let Me Help You 53:58 Bloopers

        

       ]]>de4a8e1b-91bb-45eb-bc63-aa97f791371cMon, 28 Dec 2020 05:00:00 -040054:57falsefull755755A $4000 Podcast Auditor AmbushWe know that when you give value, your audience can feel like they "owe you" and when you give them the opportunity they will return the favor. Today we hear about a covert operation pulled off to deliver a box of presents to Glenn the Geek Hebert of the Horse Radio Network as he was recovering from not one but TWO surgeries. The story is amazing.

       We also have a tool to reward your superfans for sharing your show with their friends. We also catch up with the Dog Podcast Network.

       Glenn the Geek's Audience Comes to the Rescue

       Glenn had cancer removed from his colon (and needs to kemo - get your colonoscopy), and ended up getting an infection in his body that got very, very, serious. He ended up having his gallbladder removed and was down for the count (losing thirty pounds in four weeks).

       01:32 Gleen The Geek Got Really Sick 04:05 Glenn's Supporters Came to the Rescue 06:27 How They Organized The Surprise 07:51 Let People Return the Favor 09:33 Have a Backup Plan 14:21 You Audience Feels Like They Know You

       Another Example of Building and Audience Taking Three Years

       15:37

       Erik Johnson of bumblecast.fm shares on the "Audience" podcast how his already famous client with a social following still took three years to build their audience.

       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting

       16:45

       Join today and be worry-free. Learn to sound great, create great content, and join the free mastermind with other brilliant podcasters as you go through the step by step tutorials, and get your questions answered at the Live Group Coaching calls. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       If you just have a few questions, schedule a coaching call.

       Build Your Own Ambassador Program With Refer.fm

       17:40

       Today we talk with Amira Valliani of Glow the makers of refer.fm a tool where you get to pick your own rewards, and you get a landing page where people can get their own unique link and refer.fm tracks the number of people they refer to your podcast.

       You get notified with the name and email person of the “super fan” who wants to refer their friends (they are stored in a spreadsheet making it easy to import into your system) and when they reach a goal you are notified.

       You can see my page for the School of Podcasting at

       refer.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       Dog Podcast Network Update: A Producer has been hired

       James Jacobson has hired a producer to help put his ideas into action as he is still collecting dog stories at www.dopodcastnetwork.com/101 and he hopes to have a great trailer next week to start promoting his flagship show launching in January. Keep in mind that you can always change your trailer (description, artwork, and more) any time you want with no consequences.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Carey Green gets 8600 downloads per episode

       Horse Radio Network

       School of Podcasting

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dog Podcast Network

       Earn points referring the School of Podcasting

       refer.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       There is also the School of Podcasting Affiliate program

       ]]>We know that when you give value, your audience can feel like they "owe you" and when you give them the opportunity they will return the favor. Today we hear about a covert operation pulled off to deliver a box of presents to Glenn the Geek Hebert of the Horse Radio Network as he was recovering from not one but TWO surgeries. The story is amazing.

       We also have a tool to reward your superfans for sharing your show with their friends. We also catch up with the Dog Podcast Network.

       Glenn the Geek's Audience Comes to the Rescue

       Glenn had cancer removed from his colon (and needs to kemo - get your colonoscopy), and ended up getting an infection in his body that got very, very, serious. He ended up having his gallbladder removed and was down for the count (losing thirty pounds in four weeks).

       01:32 Gleen The Geek Got Really Sick 04:05 Glenn's Supporters Came to the Rescue 06:27 How They Organized The Surprise 07:51 Let People Return the Favor 09:33 Have a Backup Plan 14:21 You Audience Feels Like They Know You

       Another Example of Building and Audience Taking Three Years

       15:37

       Erik Johnson of bumblecast.fm shares on the "Audience" podcast how his already famous client with a social following still took three years to build their audience.

       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting

       16:45

       Join today and be worry-free. Learn to sound great, create great content, and join the free mastermind with other brilliant podcasters as you go through the step by step tutorials, and get your questions answered at the Live Group Coaching calls. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       If you just have a few questions, schedule a coaching call.

       Build Your Own Ambassador Program With Refer.fm

       17:40

       Today we talk with Amira Valliani of Glow the makers of refer.fm a tool where you get to pick your own rewards, and you get a landing page where people can get their own unique link and refer.fm tracks the number of people they refer to your podcast.

       You get notified with the name and email person of the “super fan” who wants to refer their friends (they are stored in a spreadsheet making it easy to import into your system) and when they reach a goal you are notified.

       You can see my page for the School of Podcasting at

       refer.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       Dog Podcast Network Update: A Producer has been hired

       James Jacobson has hired a producer to help put his ideas into action as he is still collecting dog stories at www.dopodcastnetwork.com/101 and he hopes to have a great trailer next week to start promoting his flagship show launching in January. Keep in mind that you can always change your trailer (description, artwork, and more) any time you want with no consequences.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Carey Green gets 8600 downloads per episode

       Horse Radio Network

       School of Podcasting

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Dog Podcast Network

       Earn points referring the School of Podcasting

       refer.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       There is also the School of Podcasting Affiliate program

       ]]>47492a35-a496-48ce-a8e5-e6716ba89fe9Mon, 21 Dec 2020 05:00:00 -040039:07falsefull754754Removing Randomness Results in 8K Downloads Per EpisodeWhen I searched for the word "Random" in a podcast directory, there were over 50 shows, with many of them talking about "whatever." Today I'm going to share why I think this is a bad idea and how being focused has help Carey Green get 8000+ downloads per episode for his Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional podcast. 
       How I've Seen Random Fail

       As a teacher for decades, I can say I've seen how humans are not fans of change. They like things to stay the same and be predictable.

       As a musician, I saw establishments that had comedy on Monday, Metal on Tuesday, Country on Wednesday.... in trying to have something for everyone, they alienated everyone as you never know what night it was. 

       I had a dog for 14 years, and for many years all of my friends made up their own nickname. The dog heard random name after random name. Consequently, he wouldn't come when you called him as he had not connected with his actual name. 

       The Power of the Niche

       On the Podcast Review Show (where you can get TWO consultants' insights for the price of one), Jason Sacco from the Ankylosing Spondylitis show shared how this podcast is attracting people who have this disease. This brings HUGE relief as many people have nobody to talk to who truly understands what it's like to have this pain-causing disease. 

       Jaspon has a focused niche, but that doesn't stamp out all creativity. He has been trying some live roundtables and hopes to continue to grow his audience as he moves forward. While Jason would like to monetize his show, currently building the community and the lack of feeling alone is quite a bonus already. 

       He has also been getting some press for his show. 

       Carey Green Gets to 8600 Downloads Per Episode 

       Carey Green hosts The Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional. When I hear about people with large amounts of downloads in just a few years (Carey is just under three years), I typically wonder if they had a large social following, email list, or built-in audience. In Carey's case, he had none of those. Here are some key points we covered in our interview:

       20:10 Carey Green Getting 8600 Per Episode 21:43 Why Carey Started His Show 23:17 Daily Podcast Tips 24:34 Dealing With Haters 25:36 Polarizing People 25:59 Feedback From the Audience 26:58 Giving Your Audience What They Want 27:43 What Makes His Show Different 28:21 Starting a Premium Podcast 29:56 How is He Marketing His Show? 31:20 A Better Call To Action 32:05 Your Back Episodes in Stats 32:33 The One Different Thing 33:11 Teach Your Audience Your Slogan 35:43 Promoting the Show is Key 37:31 Carey Starts a Non-Profit 40:00 The Importance of Integrity

       What About Jordan Harbinger? Isn't His Show Filled With Random Guests?

       40:54 If you listen to Jordan Harbinger's show opening, it sounds like he's just interviewing random interesting people. He mentions, "astronauts and entrepreneurs, spies in psychologists," which sounds like many random people. However, all those people are used to cover the topic of becoming a better critical thinker. 

       You Can Have Predictable Randomness

       Both Carey and Jordan do something different on Friday. While this is a different format than other episodes, by doing it in a consistent, predictable fashion, the audience can adapt. Jordan has mentioned that his "Feedback Friday" episodes are top-rated, and Carey's longer Prayer episodes were built on his audience's requests. 

       Getting Your Audience Subscribing and Returning For More

       When you deliver a message that the audience can identify with and say, oh, wow, that person really gets me, or I can use this information to transform myself and achieve that success. They're going to connect with you, and when they hear the call of a new episode, unlike my lovable little shi-Tzu Dudley, they are going to come running back to subscribe for more.

       The Launch of the Dog Podcast Network

       12:15 I will be interviewing James Jacobson (a consulting client of mine) who is launching the Dog Podcast Network. Currently, James is running the 101 Dog Stories Contest. Submit your 5-15 minute segment to win a place in 101 Dog Stories, and you could win our grand prize of $5,000 USD. (Up to one hundred winners will take home $100 each.)

       It's pretty simple to enter the 101 Dog Stories Contest. Just record your very best dog-angle story and submit!

       Simple, not necessarily easy: your best dog-adjacent story should be polished, fully produced packages that are ready for broadcast. We're not taking pitches; we're taking up to 101 segments. Do your best work, and be proud of it before you submit!

       Check it out at www.dogpodcastnetwork.com/101 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       I would love to help you create a podcast that connects with our audience, makes you sound professional, positions yourself as an expert, and gets your message out on a global scale. You don't have to spend a million bucks to sound like a million bucks. 

       Join the School of Podcasting today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Episode 752 with Steve and Mark

       The Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional

       Dog Podcast Network

       Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

       Jordan Harbinger

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Schedule a Podcast Coaching Call

        

       ]]>When I searched for the word "Random" in a podcast directory, there were over 50 shows, with many of them talking about "whatever." Today I'm going to share why I think this is a bad idea and how being focused has help Carey Green get 8000+ downloads per episode for his Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional podcast. 
       How I've Seen Random Fail

       As a teacher for decades, I can say I've seen how humans are not fans of change. They like things to stay the same and be predictable.

       As a musician, I saw establishments that had comedy on Monday, Metal on Tuesday, Country on Wednesday.... in trying to have something for everyone, they alienated everyone as you never know what night it was. 

       I had a dog for 14 years, and for many years all of my friends made up their own nickname. The dog heard random name after random name. Consequently, he wouldn't come when you called him as he had not connected with his actual name. 

       The Power of the Niche

       On the Podcast Review Show (where you can get TWO consultants' insights for the price of one), Jason Sacco from the Ankylosing Spondylitis show shared how this podcast is attracting people who have this disease. This brings HUGE relief as many people have nobody to talk to who truly understands what it's like to have this pain-causing disease. 

       Jaspon has a focused niche, but that doesn't stamp out all creativity. He has been trying some live roundtables and hopes to continue to grow his audience as he moves forward. While Jason would like to monetize his show, currently building the community and the lack of feeling alone is quite a bonus already. 

       He has also been getting some press for his show. 

       Carey Green Gets to 8600 Downloads Per Episode 

       Carey Green hosts The Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional. When I hear about people with large amounts of downloads in just a few years (Carey is just under three years), I typically wonder if they had a large social following, email list, or built-in audience. In Carey's case, he had none of those. Here are some key points we covered in our interview:

       20:10 Carey Green Getting 8600 Per Episode 21:43 Why Carey Started His Show 23:17 Daily Podcast Tips 24:34 Dealing With Haters 25:36 Polarizing People 25:59 Feedback From the Audience 26:58 Giving Your Audience What They Want 27:43 What Makes His Show Different 28:21 Starting a Premium Podcast 29:56 How is He Marketing His Show? 31:20 A Better Call To Action 32:05 Your Back Episodes in Stats 32:33 The One Different Thing 33:11 Teach Your Audience Your Slogan 35:43 Promoting the Show is Key 37:31 Carey Starts a Non-Profit 40:00 The Importance of Integrity

       What About Jordan Harbinger? Isn't His Show Filled With Random Guests?

       40:54 If you listen to Jordan Harbinger's show opening, it sounds like he's just interviewing random interesting people. He mentions, "astronauts and entrepreneurs, spies in psychologists," which sounds like many random people. However, all those people are used to cover the topic of becoming a better critical thinker. 

       You Can Have Predictable Randomness

       Both Carey and Jordan do something different on Friday. While this is a different format than other episodes, by doing it in a consistent, predictable fashion, the audience can adapt. Jordan has mentioned that his "Feedback Friday" episodes are top-rated, and Carey's longer Prayer episodes were built on his audience's requests. 

       Getting Your Audience Subscribing and Returning For More

       When you deliver a message that the audience can identify with and say, oh, wow, that person really gets me, or I can use this information to transform myself and achieve that success. They're going to connect with you, and when they hear the call of a new episode, unlike my lovable little shi-Tzu Dudley, they are going to come running back to subscribe for more.

       The Launch of the Dog Podcast Network

       12:15 I will be interviewing James Jacobson (a consulting client of mine) who is launching the Dog Podcast Network. Currently, James is running the 101 Dog Stories Contest. Submit your 5-15 minute segment to win a place in 101 Dog Stories, and you could win our grand prize of $5,000 USD. (Up to one hundred winners will take home $100 each.)

       It's pretty simple to enter the 101 Dog Stories Contest. Just record your very best dog-angle story and submit!

       Simple, not necessarily easy: your best dog-adjacent story should be polished, fully produced packages that are ready for broadcast. We're not taking pitches; we're taking up to 101 segments. Do your best work, and be proud of it before you submit!

       Check it out at www.dogpodcastnetwork.com/101 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       I would love to help you create a podcast that connects with our audience, makes you sound professional, positions yourself as an expert, and gets your message out on a global scale. You don't have to spend a million bucks to sound like a million bucks. 

       Join the School of Podcasting today

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Episode 752 with Steve and Mark

       The Morning Mindset Daily Christian Devotional

       Dog Podcast Network

       Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

       Jordan Harbinger

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Schedule a Podcast Coaching Call

        

       ]]>bf489c6b-82fd-44a7-8d14-9a4494d93295Mon, 14 Dec 2020 05:00:00 -040043:48falsefull763763Podcast Editing as a BusinessToday we talk with Mark and Steve from the Podcast Editor Academy. While there are other resources that dive deep into audio, this website covers audio editing and goes deep into the "growing your editing business" side. If you're wondering how you get clients? They have sales scripts and insights from over 6000 editors. You don't have to know everything there is to know about audio to be an editor, and this website can help you start and grow a podcast editing service.
       My Favorite Podcast Is - DEADLINE December 14th, 2020

       02:30

       Every year the last episode of the year is made up of listeners (like you) sharing what their favorite podcast is and why (and be sure to mention your podcast as well). The deadline is December 14th, 2020 (next Monday) as it takes me some time to edit them all together.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Podcast Editor Academy Founders Steve Stewart and Mark Deal

       Mark Deal has been helping businesses (especially lawyers) out of Atlanta and is the head of Podcast Atlanta (a HUGE group of podcasters).

       Steve Stewart started a financial podcast and started editing his friend's podcasts. This lead to another friend, and another friend which lead to Steve putting his podcast on pause and doing editing full time. He wanted a Facebook group that only talked about post-production so he created one (see http://podcasteditors.club/ ).

       Please note that the power of this group is it is clearly defined what they will (and more importantly will not ) talk about in the group. This makes it stand out from other groups, and it is growing at a rapid rate.

       The Podcast Editor Academy started with a conference of editors and continues to grow with special speakers, presentations, and roundtables. When I logged in, I was impressed with the smooth transition of content and resources.

       If your not sure if you should join the Podcast Editor Academy or Podcast Engineering School. Join the Academy as there is a HUGE discount for the Podcast Engineering School that will pay for the price of the Academy. So you could start with the Academy, and then if needed take a deep dive into audio using the discount for the Engineering School (along with many other discounts).

       If you want to start small, join the Facebook group and see what the discussions are like, and then joined the Academy when you're ready and keep up to date by signing up for their newsletter.

       Audio Editing Survey

       I'm thinking of launching my own editing service (or maybe include it as part of a package). As I always talk about giving your audience what they want, I need to know what you want when it comes to an audio editor (so I can decide if I want to pursue this or not). There is a chance to win a $25 Amazon gift card. Go to www.audioeditingservice.com

       YouTube Video: Set it and Regret it?

       If you're using a "show player" from your media host, did you know you're not using blog posts for episodes you are missing a TON of Google Juice and SEO? Check out this video.

       Podpage Updates

       I interviewed Breden from Podpage back on episode 728 and since then there have been some new features added:

       • Added a "host section" that sows bios of host(s)
       • Added a guest(s) feature so you can see all the guests who have been on the show
       • Added a store to sell products from different resources
       • Added episode signature where you can add text/images/links that appear at the end of every episode. Update it in one place and it updates your website everywhere.
       
       

       SEE DEMO OF EPISODE SIGNATURES

       Want to see more tutorials on Podpage? Join my free class at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Start Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step by step tutorials, a mastermind of brilliant podcasting minds, live group coaching, and priority email access to me. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Podcast Mentorship Program

       Looking to get started quickly check out the three-month mentoring program with full access to the School of Podcasting with additional one on one consulting.

       see https://www.theschoolofpodcasting.com/bundles/podcast-quick-start

       Got Podcast Questions?

       Schedule a coaching call and get your questions answered quickly, and get going in the right direction.

       ]]>Today we talk with Mark and Steve from the Podcast Editor Academy. While there are other resources that dive deep into audio, this website covers audio editing and goes deep into the "growing your editing business" side. If you're wondering how you get clients? They have sales scripts and insights from over 6000 editors. You don't have to know everything there is to know about audio to be an editor, and this website can help you start and grow a podcast editing service.
       My Favorite Podcast Is - DEADLINE December 14th, 2020

       02:30

       Every year the last episode of the year is made up of listeners (like you) sharing what their favorite podcast is and why (and be sure to mention your podcast as well). The deadline is December 14th, 2020 (next Monday) as it takes me some time to edit them all together.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Podcast Editor Academy Founders Steve Stewart and Mark Deal

       Mark Deal has been helping businesses (especially lawyers) out of Atlanta and is the head of Podcast Atlanta (a HUGE group of podcasters).

       Steve Stewart started a financial podcast and started editing his friend's podcasts. This lead to another friend, and another friend which lead to Steve putting his podcast on pause and doing editing full time. He wanted a Facebook group that only talked about post-production so he created one (see http://podcasteditors.club/ ).

       Please note that the power of this group is it is clearly defined what they will (and more importantly will not ) talk about in the group. This makes it stand out from other groups, and it is growing at a rapid rate.

       The Podcast Editor Academy started with a conference of editors and continues to grow with special speakers, presentations, and roundtables. When I logged in, I was impressed with the smooth transition of content and resources.

       If your not sure if you should join the Podcast Editor Academy or Podcast Engineering School. Join the Academy as there is a HUGE discount for the Podcast Engineering School that will pay for the price of the Academy. So you could start with the Academy, and then if needed take a deep dive into audio using the discount for the Engineering School (along with many other discounts).

       If you want to start small, join the Facebook group and see what the discussions are like, and then joined the Academy when you're ready and keep up to date by signing up for their newsletter.

       Audio Editing Survey

       I'm thinking of launching my own editing service (or maybe include it as part of a package). As I always talk about giving your audience what they want, I need to know what you want when it comes to an audio editor (so I can decide if I want to pursue this or not). There is a chance to win a $25 Amazon gift card. Go to www.audioeditingservice.com

       YouTube Video: Set it and Regret it?

       If you're using a "show player" from your media host, did you know you're not using blog posts for episodes you are missing a TON of Google Juice and SEO? Check out this video.

       Podpage Updates

       I interviewed Breden from Podpage back on episode 728 and since then there have been some new features added:

       • Added a "host section" that sows bios of host(s)
       • Added a guest(s) feature so you can see all the guests who have been on the show
       • Added a store to sell products from different resources
       • Added episode signature where you can add text/images/links that appear at the end of every episode. Update it in one place and it updates your website everywhere.
       
       

       SEE DEMO OF EPISODE SIGNATURES

       Want to see more tutorials on Podpage? Join my free class at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Start Podcasting

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to step by step tutorials, a mastermind of brilliant podcasting minds, live group coaching, and priority email access to me. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Podcast Mentorship Program

       Looking to get started quickly check out the three-month mentoring program with full access to the School of Podcasting with additional one on one consulting.

       see https://www.theschoolofpodcasting.com/bundles/podcast-quick-start

       Got Podcast Questions?

       Schedule a coaching call and get your questions answered quickly, and get going in the right direction.

       ]]>c0b0c86f-6b94-4d59-893e-c8da3728f8b1Mon, 07 Dec 2020 05:00:00 -040032:52falsefull752752Is Your Podcast Future Proof?I was asked by one of my editing clients to go back and edit some of their episodes and remove discussions that were about specific events at a specific time. In listening to their episodes there are a couple of strategies you can do to make your show future-proof.
       Always Use the Year

       The deadline for the question of the month is December 14th, 2020. By adding the year into the discussion, a listener knows that the episode has passed. But what about outdated information? If the episode consists of nothing but information that is outdated you can always delete that episode form your host and within 24 hours it will be removed from most apps. When I watch a movie and one of the characters says, "Why didn't you page me?" I can figure out that the movie is from the 1980's. I don't hold the movie studio responsible for outdated references. (Just my opinion). As always if you are delivering value to your audience, then keep it up and available.

       Use Timeless Landing Pages

       For example, I could say, "I'll have a link to the question of the month in today's episode at schoolofpodcasting.com/XXX, or just go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question.

       Every month when I do a question of the month I always have the same landing page. This way if someone goes to answer an older question that is outdated, while they are too late to answer the question from two months ago, they are in the right place to answer the current question.

       Another example of this is from Jordan Harbinger. Jordan gets mountains of downloads and makes a living with ads on his podcast. Jordan often has pages on the manufacturer's site such as hostgator.com/jordan but he also mentions that you can find more by going to jordanharbinger.com and clicking on the deals page. Here again, if there was a time-sensitive deal in place for the sponsor it may be too late, but you are now in the right place to find a deal from another sponsor that will help Jordan.

       If you're doing webinars you can say something like, "My webinar on the perfect gear is at schoolofpodcasting.com/perfectgear or just see the schedule for all of your webinars at schoolofpodcasting.com/webinars (where you would use your website - not mine.... :)  I realize you might say, "But I only have the one webinar. While this is true TODAY, in the future you might be doing one a week." When Glenn Hebert of the Horse Radio Network started it was a network with one show, but Glenn knew there would be more so he founded the Horse Radio Network.

       Reinforce Your Band

       By using your website you reinforce your brand, and you keep control of your content. For example, I have a Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach where you can be an Awesome Supporter. Do I tell people to go to www.patreon.com/davejackson ? No. Why? Because what if something better comes along? Then I have a bunch of podcasts with mentions of a website I don't use. An example of this is web hosting. Over the years I've used Hostgator, Siteground, and Cooler Websites. Did I promote that company by mentioning their website? No, I told people to go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting, and in the early days of my show that link went to Hostgator, and for years it went to Siteground, and then Cooler Websites. I might direct that at Podpage in the future. While this might confuse someone expecting a Hostgator link, but in the end, if the person is looking for hosting and you direct them to a hosting page, I feel (again an opinion) they should trust you, and if they have questions they can always contact you.

       Tools To Make Redirects

       If you are using WordPress, you can use the PrettyLinks plugin. There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. Thirsty affiliates is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year).

       If you're using Podpage Pro, redirects are one of the many features. (Check out the free "Learn PodPage" course )

       While some people use bit.ly, I prefer Rebandly.

       Tools To Help Follow Your Money And.co

       In the past I used Freshbooks, but they charged their pricing (costing more if I had morse customer) and many of their features I didn't use (I just need to create invoices and track income and expenses). I found and.co and this does exactly what I want. There is a free version to allow you to kick the tires, and if you go with the pro plan it's $18/month (you get a discount when you purchase a year in advance). 

       I love their "shoebox" feature. When a bill comes into my email, I can forward it to an email at and.co and it adds it to my account where I can easily add it as an expense and categorize it for tax purposes. It is super easy, and I love it. 

       Check it out at https://supportthisshow.com/andco (aff link)

       You Need a Budget (YNAB)

       YNAB is a web-based tool that makes it sooo easy to track every penny you make (and more importantly every penny you spend). You can even integrate it directly with your bank so you don't have to do data entry (I import mine manually). It uses a different philosophy as you give each dollar "a job" so you can see exactly where you money is going. You can set up savings goals, and I attended a webinar to learn the software and was up and running quickly. It's $12/month of $89/year. 

       Check it out at https://supportthisshow.com/ynab

       Mentioned In This Show

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Join the School of Podcasting

       How to Fix a Mistake Episode

       My Podcast Reviews

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Dave's Patreon Account

       Jordan Harbinger's Deal Page

       Schedule a Podcast Coaching Call

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Avoid sounding unprofessional, buying the wrong equipment, and creating content that isn't good. 

       The School of Podcasting has step by step tutorials, Live Group Coaching, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>I was asked by one of my editing clients to go back and edit some of their episodes and remove discussions that were about specific events at a specific time. In listening to their episodes there are a couple of strategies you can do to make your show future-proof.
       Always Use the Year

       The deadline for the question of the month is December 14th, 2020. By adding the year into the discussion, a listener knows that the episode has passed. But what about outdated information? If the episode consists of nothing but information that is outdated you can always delete that episode form your host and within 24 hours it will be removed from most apps. When I watch a movie and one of the characters says, "Why didn't you page me?" I can figure out that the movie is from the 1980's. I don't hold the movie studio responsible for outdated references. (Just my opinion). As always if you are delivering value to your audience, then keep it up and available.

       Use Timeless Landing Pages

       For example, I could say, "I'll have a link to the question of the month in today's episode at schoolofpodcasting.com/XXX, or just go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question.

       Every month when I do a question of the month I always have the same landing page. This way if someone goes to answer an older question that is outdated, while they are too late to answer the question from two months ago, they are in the right place to answer the current question.

       Another example of this is from Jordan Harbinger. Jordan gets mountains of downloads and makes a living with ads on his podcast. Jordan often has pages on the manufacturer's site such as hostgator.com/jordan but he also mentions that you can find more by going to jordanharbinger.com and clicking on the deals page. Here again, if there was a time-sensitive deal in place for the sponsor it may be too late, but you are now in the right place to find a deal from another sponsor that will help Jordan.

       If you're doing webinars you can say something like, "My webinar on the perfect gear is at schoolofpodcasting.com/perfectgear or just see the schedule for all of your webinars at schoolofpodcasting.com/webinars (where you would use your website - not mine.... :)  I realize you might say, "But I only have the one webinar. While this is true TODAY, in the future you might be doing one a week." When Glenn Hebert of the Horse Radio Network started it was a network with one show, but Glenn knew there would be more so he founded the Horse Radio Network.

       Reinforce Your Band

       By using your website you reinforce your brand, and you keep control of your content. For example, I have a Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach where you can be an Awesome Supporter. Do I tell people to go to www.patreon.com/davejackson ? No. Why? Because what if something better comes along? Then I have a bunch of podcasts with mentions of a website I don't use. An example of this is web hosting. Over the years I've used Hostgator, Siteground, and Cooler Websites. Did I promote that company by mentioning their website? No, I told people to go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting, and in the early days of my show that link went to Hostgator, and for years it went to Siteground, and then Cooler Websites. I might direct that at Podpage in the future. While this might confuse someone expecting a Hostgator link, but in the end, if the person is looking for hosting and you direct them to a hosting page, I feel (again an opinion) they should trust you, and if they have questions they can always contact you.

       Tools To Make Redirects

       If you are using WordPress, you can use the PrettyLinks plugin. There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. Thirsty affiliates is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year).

       If you're using Podpage Pro, redirects are one of the many features. (Check out the free "Learn PodPage" course )

       While some people use bit.ly, I prefer Rebandly.

       Tools To Help Follow Your Money And.co

       In the past I used Freshbooks, but they charged their pricing (costing more if I had morse customer) and many of their features I didn't use (I just need to create invoices and track income and expenses). I found and.co and this does exactly what I want. There is a free version to allow you to kick the tires, and if you go with the pro plan it's $18/month (you get a discount when you purchase a year in advance). 

       I love their "shoebox" feature. When a bill comes into my email, I can forward it to an email at and.co and it adds it to my account where I can easily add it as an expense and categorize it for tax purposes. It is super easy, and I love it. 

       Check it out at https://supportthisshow.com/andco (aff link)

       You Need a Budget (YNAB)

       YNAB is a web-based tool that makes it sooo easy to track every penny you make (and more importantly every penny you spend). You can even integrate it directly with your bank so you don't have to do data entry (I import mine manually). It uses a different philosophy as you give each dollar "a job" so you can see exactly where you money is going. You can set up savings goals, and I attended a webinar to learn the software and was up and running quickly. It's $12/month of $89/year. 

       Check it out at https://supportthisshow.com/ynab

       Mentioned In This Show

       Profit From Your Podcast Book

       Join the School of Podcasting

       How to Fix a Mistake Episode

       My Podcast Reviews

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       Dave's Patreon Account

       Jordan Harbinger's Deal Page

       Schedule a Podcast Coaching Call

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Avoid sounding unprofessional, buying the wrong equipment, and creating content that isn't good. 

       The School of Podcasting has step by step tutorials, Live Group Coaching, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. 

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>990ccf3a-d971-4755-ba77-39b54b718f6aMon, 30 Nov 2020 05:00:00 -040032:32falsefull751751You Can't Buy An Audience If Your Podcast SucksToday we talk about the 1.7 billion dollar mistake that was Quibi and how we can learn from their mistake. We also take a look at the power of follow up questions, and the best place to buy gear. 
       Table of Contents

       01:22 Your Favorite Podcast - Send in Your Answer 02:56 Now That's A Good Question: Howard Stern and Wolfgang Van Halen 06:35 Join the School of Podcasting 07:33 Lessons From Quibi 13:24 They Blew Their Launch 16:12 Big Name Celebrities 19:02 Make It Easy To Share Your Content 21:05 It's Not the Tech 23:28 Clueless About the Competition 29:49 Who is the Audience? 33:29 The Best Place to Buy Gear: Sweetwater 36:07 Your Audience Awaits Exercise

       How to Avoid the 1.7 Billion Dollar Mistake that Was Quibi

       Quibi is an over-the-top American short-form streaming platform that generates content for viewing on mobile devices. It was founded in Los Angeles in August 2018 as NewTV by Jeffrey Katzenberg (chairman of Walt Disney Studios from 1984 to 1994) and is led by Meg Whitman ( She is a board member of Procter & Gamble and Dropbox. Whitman was previously president and CEO of Hewlett Packard Enterprise), its CEO.

       In 2019 Variety reported that Quibi had secured 100 million dollars in advertising before the service had even launched.

       On February 2, 2020, they spent $5.6 million for 30 seconds on an ad in the Super Bowl that was seen by a reported 99.9 million viewers.  That is $18 per person if you round up. This for a service where subscribers can get the service for $5 per month with ads, or $8 per month without them.  That $5.6 million was a drop in the bucket.

       The commercial was really stupid and didn't really answer or explain what the heck it was. You just knew it was less than 10 minutes. They explained what is was, but not so much why it was or how you would benefit.

       It raised $1.75 billion from investors. It had a variety of shows featuring originals with Jennifer Lopez, Chrissy Teigen, Chance the Rapper, Liam Hemsworth, Sophie Turner, Lena Waithe, Nicole Richie, Reese Witherspoon. Quibi offered a 90-day free trial to those who sign up on its website before April 6. Overall, it plans to release 175 original shows and 8,500 episodes in the first year.

       Their lineup has a ton of stars, celebrities, etc

       It launched on April 6, 2020. It is set to shut down "on or about" December 1, 2020. December 1 is 239 days. That is $7,322,175.73 a day. Here is my thoughts on why this was such an epic fail.

       They Blew Their Launch

       When you spend $5.6 million dollars on a Super Bowl ad, they should have an idea what you do and what is in it for them. In the event, the ad inspired people to check out the service (it didn't), you should be able to go check it out and not have to wait four months. Yes, you can build buzz, but for me, I never heard from quibi again.

       Putting All Their Faith in Celebrities

       Here are some of the names that appear on shows: Jennifer Lopez, Kristen Bell, Nick Jonas, Tracy Morgan, Aaron Rodgers, Yara Shahidi, Gabriel Iglesias, Anthony Davis, Kevin Hart and Karlie Kloss. Cardi B, Chance the Rapper, Dapper Dan, Jay Leno, and Wolfgang Puck (and that's just some).

       The people involved had experience Phil Abraham has directed the Sopranos, Madmen, Daredevil, Ozark.

       No Compelling Content

       Yet, there was no breakout show that inspired the people who had found Quibi to tell a friend about Quibi. Nobody was compelled to tell a friend. They did recaps of the previous days news or sports updates. WOW what revolutionary content!

       They Made it Hard To Share

       According to Media Analyst Josh Consine there was no sharing capability (no screenshots) which limited your ability to go viral. When it first launched you could only watch it on your phone. There were no apps, not Fire TV, Chromecast. They made it "hard" to consume. They took away choices from the consumer.

       They Put Their Faith in the Tech

       One thing that set them apart was a feature called Turnstyle. This meant that if you rotate the phone horizontal to verticle, you would get a different camera angle. Neat? Sure. Something so cool I had to tell my friends? Apparently not as I had never heard of it until I started researching how you blow 1.7 billion and lose. In a nutshell, Turnstyle served you two video streams simultaneously and “stitches them together” with a single audio track.

       Since we're talking about the Tech, a company sued Quibi shortly after their launch company called Eko alleged that Quibi stole the technology after Eko demoed it to employees of the company, including founder and chairman Jeffrey Katzenberg. Even when you have billions in funding, lawsuits are expensive.

       Clueless About the Competition

       They were charging $5/$8 a month for new content. Look at Disney, Netflix, Hul. While they have original content, they all have old favorites as well. They also have a way to add more than one person under your account (so when your kids login under your account your recommendations don't all turn into cartoons). This was not the case to Quibi. It figured each person was watching on their phone. One person per account. This gets expensive and now anyone who wants to see what you're talking about has to use your phone.

       It is reported that CEO Whitman repeatedly said "We're not competing with Netflix." Think about that one for a minute. That's like a radio station saying, "All of our songs are under four minutes long. We don't compete with other stations."

       Lack Of Focus Group?

       In one article that was published right after they launched it stated, "Quibi’s executives have hinted that the company will deliver on a TV experience if customer feedback and data warrant it. " Well they did add support for Apple's airplay and Chromecast, but at the expense of the Turnstyle technology. They did release an app for Roku and Fire TV - the day before they announced were closing down.

       It seemed like they didn't understand how people used their phones or consumed content.

       Did they think that because the average length of a YouTube video is 11 minutes that making "short" videos would be the key? Meanwhile, TikTok was taking off with all sorts of celebrities making their own channels. TikTok is free. Did Quibi follow the Facebook strategy and buy them or "borrow features" and add them to their platform? No. They were doing something different and nobody cared.

       They Didn't Answer the Number Question: WHO IS YOUR AUDIENCE

       The idea was people could watch these short clips while waiting in line, or on the bus. When you think of people consuming content on their phone you might think it would be younger people. Yet you're trying to attract those people with Steven Spielberg and Jay Leno? Sure Cardi B appeared in an episode, but they needed to define. If the content is for busy people, who are the busy people and what do they want to watch?

       According to an article in Forbes, Katzenberg and Whitman said, "We created a new form of mobile-first premium storytelling."

       They did. But the stories weren't any good.

       Now That's a Good Question

       02:56  Today we listen to Howard Stern ask a great follow-up question to Wolfgang Van Halen. While he started off with a yes/no question, but then asked a few follow-up questions lead to the information you can't get anyplace else, and listen to how Howard shuts up and lets Wolfgang wrestle with a potentially uncomfortable topic. 

       Sweetwater is My New Favorite Place to Order Gear

       33:29 My co-host for Ask the Podcast Coach Jim Collison ordered something from Sweetwater and told me about their INSANE customer service. I recently saw where they were one of the few people to have the new Zoom Podtrak P4 IN STOCK and I see what he means. I was called to let me know my order had shipped, and to let me know if I had any issues I could call them. So here is why I think they are the best:

       • Prices are just as good (and in some cases better) than Amazon
       • Free shipping (even on small stuff)
       • Built-in two-year warranty 
       • Free tech support 
       • Payment plans available if needed.
       
       

       My goal is to build more of a relationship with Sweetwater (as I have a dedicated rep) which should keep me in touch with podcasting technology going forward. In full disclosure, I earn a referral reward (but that's why I ordered something as I wanted to see for myself) 

       Your Audience Awaits Exercise

       I'm listening to the book Unhackable: The 30-Day Elixir for Creating Flawless Ideas, Leveraging Superhuman Focus, and Achieving Optimal Performance Through Flow its a very interesting book that you can...]]>Today we talk about the 1.7 billion dollar mistake that was Quibi and how we can learn from their mistake. We also take a look at the power of follow up questions, and the best place to buy gear. 

       Table of Contents

       01:22 Your Favorite Podcast - Send in Your Answer 02:56 Now That's A Good Question: Howard Stern and Wolfgang Van Halen 06:35 Join the School of Podcasting 07:33 Lessons From Quibi 13:24 They Blew Their Launch 16:12 Big Name Celebrities 19:02 Make It Easy To Share Your Content 21:05 It's Not the Tech 23:28 Clueless About the Competition 29:49 Who is the Audience? 33:29 The Best Place to Buy Gear: Sweetwater 36:07 Your Audience Awaits Exercise

       How to Avoid the 1.7 Billion Dollar Mistake that Was Quibi

       Quibi is an over-the-top American short-form streaming platform that generates content for viewing on mobile devices. It was founded in Los Angeles in August 2018 as NewTV by Jeffrey Katzenberg (chairman of Walt Disney Studios from 1984 to 1994) and is led by Meg Whitman ( She is a board member of Procter & Gamble and Dropbox. Whitman was previously president and CEO of Hewlett Packard Enterprise), its CEO.

       In 2019 Variety reported that Quibi had secured 100 million dollars in advertising before the service had even launched.

       On February 2, 2020, they spent $5.6 million for 30 seconds on an ad in the Super Bowl that was seen by a reported 99.9 million viewers.  That is $18 per person if you round up. This for a service where subscribers can get the service for $5 per month with ads, or $8 per month without them.  That $5.6 million was a drop in the bucket.

       The commercial was really stupid and didn't really answer or explain what the heck it was. You just knew it was less than 10 minutes. They explained what is was, but not so much why it was or how you would benefit.

       It raised $1.75 billion from investors. It had a variety of shows featuring originals with Jennifer Lopez, Chrissy Teigen, Chance the Rapper, Liam Hemsworth, Sophie Turner, Lena Waithe, Nicole Richie, Reese Witherspoon. Quibi offered a 90-day free trial to those who sign up on its website before April 6. Overall, it plans to release 175 original shows and 8,500 episodes in the first year.

       Their lineup has a ton of stars, celebrities, etc

       It launched on April 6, 2020. It is set to shut down "on or about" December 1, 2020. December 1 is 239 days. That is $7,322,175.73 a day. Here is my thoughts on why this was such an epic fail.

       They Blew Their Launch

       When you spend $5.6 million dollars on a Super Bowl ad, they should have an idea what you do and what is in it for them. In the event, the ad inspired people to check out the service (it didn't), you should be able to go check it out and not have to wait four months. Yes, you can build buzz, but for me, I never heard from quibi again.

       Putting All Their Faith in Celebrities

       Here are some of the names that appear on shows: Jennifer Lopez, Kristen Bell, Nick Jonas, Tracy Morgan, Aaron Rodgers, Yara Shahidi, Gabriel Iglesias, Anthony Davis, Kevin Hart and Karlie Kloss. Cardi B, Chance the Rapper, Dapper Dan, Jay Leno, and Wolfgang Puck (and that's just some).

       The people involved had experience Phil Abraham has directed the Sopranos, Madmen, Daredevil, Ozark.

       No Compelling Content

       Yet, there was no breakout show that inspired the people who had found Quibi to tell a friend about Quibi. Nobody was compelled to tell a friend. They did recaps of the previous days news or sports updates. WOW what revolutionary content!

       They Made it Hard To Share

       According to Media Analyst Josh Consine there was no sharing capability (no screenshots) which limited your ability to go viral. When it first launched you could only watch it on your phone. There were no apps, not Fire TV, Chromecast. They made it "hard" to consume. They took away choices from the consumer.

       They Put Their Faith in the Tech

       One thing that set them apart was a feature called Turnstyle. This meant that if you rotate the phone horizontal to verticle, you would get a different camera angle. Neat? Sure. Something so cool I had to tell my friends? Apparently not as I had never heard of it until I started researching how you blow 1.7 billion and lose. In a nutshell, Turnstyle served you two video streams simultaneously and “stitches them together” with a single audio track.

       Since we're talking about the Tech, a company sued Quibi shortly after their launch company called Eko alleged that Quibi stole the technology after Eko demoed it to employees of the company, including founder and chairman Jeffrey Katzenberg. Even when you have billions in funding, lawsuits are expensive.

       Clueless About the Competition

       They were charging $5/$8 a month for new content. Look at Disney, Netflix, Hul. While they have original content, they all have old favorites as well. They also have a way to add more than one person under your account (so when your kids login under your account your recommendations don't all turn into cartoons). This was not the case to Quibi. It figured each person was watching on their phone. One person per account. This gets expensive and now anyone who wants to see what you're talking about has to use your phone.

       It is reported that CEO Whitman repeatedly said "We're not competing with Netflix." Think about that one for a minute. That's like a radio station saying, "All of our songs are under four minutes long. We don't compete with other stations."

       Lack Of Focus Group?

       In one article that was published right after they launched it stated, "Quibi’s executives have hinted that the company will deliver on a TV experience if customer feedback and data warrant it. " Well they did add support for Apple's airplay and Chromecast, but at the expense of the Turnstyle technology. They did release an app for Roku and Fire TV - the day before they announced were closing down.

       It seemed like they didn't understand how people used their phones or consumed content.

       Did they think that because the average length of a YouTube video is 11 minutes that making "short" videos would be the key? Meanwhile, TikTok was taking off with all sorts of celebrities making their own channels. TikTok is free. Did Quibi follow the Facebook strategy and buy them or "borrow features" and add them to their platform? No. They were doing something different and nobody cared.

       They Didn't Answer the Number Question: WHO IS YOUR AUDIENCE

       The idea was people could watch these short clips while waiting in line, or on the bus. When you think of people consuming content on their phone you might think it would be younger people. Yet you're trying to attract those people with Steven Spielberg and Jay Leno? Sure Cardi B appeared in an episode, but they needed to define. If the content is for busy people, who are the busy people and what do they want to watch?

       According to an article in Forbes, Katzenberg and Whitman said, "We created a new form of mobile-first premium storytelling."

       They did. But the stories weren't any good.

       Now That's a Good Question

       02:56  Today we listen to Howard Stern ask a great follow-up question to Wolfgang Van Halen. While he started off with a yes/no question, but then asked a few follow-up questions lead to the information you can't get anyplace else, and listen to how Howard shuts up and lets Wolfgang wrestle with a potentially uncomfortable topic. 

       Sweetwater is My New Favorite Place to Order Gear

       33:29 My co-host for Ask the Podcast Coach Jim Collison ordered something from Sweetwater and told me about their INSANE customer service. I recently saw where they were one of the few people to have the new Zoom Podtrak P4 IN STOCK and I see what he means. I was called to let me know my order had shipped, and to let me know if I had any issues I could call them. So here is why I think they are the best:

       • Prices are just as good (and in some cases better) than Amazon
       • Free shipping (even on small stuff)
       • Built-in two-year warranty 
       • Free tech support 
       • Payment plans available if needed.
       
       

       My goal is to build more of a relationship with Sweetwater (as I have a dedicated rep) which should keep me in touch with podcasting technology going forward. In full disclosure, I earn a referral reward (but that's why I ordered something as I wanted to see for myself) 

       Your Audience Awaits Exercise

       I'm listening to the book Unhackable: The 30-Day Elixir for Creating Flawless Ideas, Leveraging Superhuman Focus, and Achieving Optimal Performance Through Flow its a very interesting book that you can listen/read to one chapter per day. The one exercise was to write yourself an email from your future audience as is these people who are waiting for you to start your show. SO MANY TIMES I hear people worried about having trolls or people say negative things. I say, What about ALL THE POSITIVE that could happen?

       Think of going to your inbox and see an email with the title, "Just wanted to say Thank you." You open it and it starts, "Hello, I just wanted to reach out. You may not believe this but due to your podcast.... 

       and the listener explains how you made them feel. How they no longer felt alone. How they were taken to a place where the stress of work, life, and more melted away. 

       This could happen. But your podcast can't help people if you don't start your podcast. You can't update a show that doesn't exist. Please let me help you, as your audience is waiting. 

       ]]>60616a10-07e3-4ef7-b1aa-690c063db495Mon, 23 Nov 2020 05:00:00 -040040:10falsefull750750Because of My Podcast, I Got to Work For MarvelThe show is filled with "Because of My Podcast" stories. We also have a great example of a good question, and a reminder that Apple is going on Holiday soon (very important if you wanted a podcast ready to go in January 20201).
       SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

       Ready to start your podcast? Got a podcast and you need to grow it? Join the School of podcasting and get instant access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Access to a private (spam-free) Facebook Group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Premium access to Dave.
       • Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.
       • Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
       
       Because of My Podcast, I Got a Book Published, that Inspired a Podcast

       I was contacted by a publisher to write the book Profit from Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood and it took a lot of work, but it's getting very good reviews. This lead David Hooper (author of the book Big Podcast, and host of Red Podcast and Big Podcast) along with Jeff Sanders of the 5 AM Miracle podcast (author of the book with the same name) got together to create a series called Podcast Profits which promotes my book.

       The podcast is called Podcast Profits: Make Money (and more) With Your Podcast

       Dave called me to let me know what he was planning, and to make sure it was OK to have "Because of My Podcast" stories. As they were talking about me, I was fine with that. I was really surprised that they didn't mention/plug their podcasts or their company Voxphonix until the last episode (and it was very minimal).

       Because of My Podcast, Leslie Eiler Thompson Got to Participate in the Iditarod Dog Race in Alaska

       05:39 Leslie is a Multimedia Producer & Creator in Nashville, and she shares the story of not only being able to interview one of the top champions in Sled Dog Racing, but she eventually ended up as part of his team and participated in the race.

       Rick Coste Interview: Audio Drama Podcast Leads to Bigger Things Because of His Podcast, Rick Coste Got to Work with Marvel

       Rick Coste approached me with a "Because of My Podcast" story. He's got an agent who wants to turn his podcast Evolution Talk into a book. He's been on TV and got to work with Marvel on their This Week in Marvel podcast as well as their Women of Marvel podcast. He does sound design and post-production as well as producing other shows (see https://www.rickcoste.com/podcast-production/ )

       His first crack at audio drama the Behemoth is still getting very impressive downloads. Rick shares how he creates his soundscapes, his technology, and insights into sound effects.

       17:12 Rick Coste Interview 17:54 When did Rick get into podcasting? 19:39 Getting into audio dramas 20:50 How did you find actors? 22:25 Impressive Downloads 24:10 Getting to work with Marvel 26:40 Tips for Starting an Audiodrama 28:27 What software Rick Uses 28:45 Sound effects resources 29:21 Struggling with perfection 30:53 Giving notes to actors 34:06 Passion Project?

       Check Out Rick at:

       https://www.rickcoste.com/

       https://modernaudiodrama.com/

       Now That's a Good Question

       08:53 This is a new segment I am adding today. While I hear people say "That's a good question" when IT'S JUST NOT. So now, when I hear an actual good question, I thought I would spotlight it.

       This example is from an interview by Lars Ulrich (the drummer for Metallica) who is interviewing Noel Gallagher (of Oasis) and Lars asks him how he feels about doing some of the older songs that were mammoth hits in the 90's when he has his own solo songs now. Noel starts to answer the question on how it makes his audience feel, Lars interrupts and asks, "But what do they mean to YOU."

       Lars then does something brilliant and Noel takes a deep breath. He shuts up and lets him think. The longer he lets him think - the better the answer. Eventually, Noel explains how those songs mean the world to him. Noel wasn't really answering the question, and Lars pointed him in the right direction. Catch the who interview on YouTube

       Thanks to Wayne Henderson of mediavoiceovers.com for his awesome tones.

       Podcast Rewind: Where I've Been

       13:58 I appeared on The Author Inside You Podcast talking about listening to your audience and the book Profit From Your Podcast

       16:26 I appear on Podcasting Experiments talking about the book Profit From Your Podcast

       What Is Your Favorite Podcast and Why?

       Every year the last episode is you answering the question, "What is your favorite podcast and why." Now I want to know about your show as well, so if I answered the question it would sound like this:

       Hey this is Dave Jackson and I host the School of Podcasting show where I help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast. You can find me at schoolofpodcasting.com. My favorite show is (name of show ) at (their website address) where they (what they talk about on their show) and the reason I love it is (as a detailed answer as you can provide).

       I need the answer by December 14th.

       Apple Holiday Schedule

       10:40 The door to have a show ready on all the platforms come January 2021 is closing. Dont' forget Apple goes on holiday twice between now and then. Here is their holiday schedule:

       November 22 to December 2 December 23 to January 2

       Which means you should submit your show to them almost immediately. If you have questions, let's schedule a coaching call.

       Mentioned In this Podcast

       Profit from Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       Dave on the Business of Podcasting Show Part 1, Part 2

       Leslie Eiler Thompson

       Check out Leslie on the Podcast Review Show

       Big Podcast

       5 AM Miracle podcast

       Voxphonix

       modernaudiodrama.com

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>The show is filled with "Because of My Podcast" stories. We also have a great example of a good question, and a reminder that Apple is going on Holiday soon (very important if you wanted a podcast ready to go in January 20201).
       SPONSOR: SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

       Ready to start your podcast? Got a podcast and you need to grow it? Join the School of podcasting and get instant access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Access to a private (spam-free) Facebook Group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Premium access to Dave.
       • Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee.
       • Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start
       
       Because of My Podcast, I Got a Book Published, that Inspired a Podcast

       I was contacted by a publisher to write the book Profit from Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood and it took a lot of work, but it's getting very good reviews. This lead David Hooper (author of the book Big Podcast, and host of Red Podcast and Big Podcast) along with Jeff Sanders of the 5 AM Miracle podcast (author of the book with the same name) got together to create a series called Podcast Profits which promotes my book.

       The podcast is called Podcast Profits: Make Money (and more) With Your Podcast

       Dave called me to let me know what he was planning, and to make sure it was OK to have "Because of My Podcast" stories. As they were talking about me, I was fine with that. I was really surprised that they didn't mention/plug their podcasts or their company Voxphonix until the last episode (and it was very minimal).

       Because of My Podcast, Leslie Eiler Thompson Got to Participate in the Iditarod Dog Race in Alaska

       05:39 Leslie is a Multimedia Producer & Creator in Nashville, and she shares the story of not only being able to interview one of the top champions in Sled Dog Racing, but she eventually ended up as part of his team and participated in the race.

       Rick Coste Interview: Audio Drama Podcast Leads to Bigger Things Because of His Podcast, Rick Coste Got to Work with Marvel

       Rick Coste approached me with a "Because of My Podcast" story. He's got an agent who wants to turn his podcast Evolution Talk into a book. He's been on TV and got to work with Marvel on their This Week in Marvel podcast as well as their Women of Marvel podcast. He does sound design and post-production as well as producing other shows (see https://www.rickcoste.com/podcast-production/ )

       His first crack at audio drama the Behemoth is still getting very impressive downloads. Rick shares how he creates his soundscapes, his technology, and insights into sound effects.

       17:12 Rick Coste Interview 17:54 When did Rick get into podcasting? 19:39 Getting into audio dramas 20:50 How did you find actors? 22:25 Impressive Downloads 24:10 Getting to work with Marvel 26:40 Tips for Starting an Audiodrama 28:27 What software Rick Uses 28:45 Sound effects resources 29:21 Struggling with perfection 30:53 Giving notes to actors 34:06 Passion Project?

       Check Out Rick at:

       https://www.rickcoste.com/

       https://modernaudiodrama.com/

       Now That's a Good Question

       08:53 This is a new segment I am adding today. While I hear people say "That's a good question" when IT'S JUST NOT. So now, when I hear an actual good question, I thought I would spotlight it.

       This example is from an interview by Lars Ulrich (the drummer for Metallica) who is interviewing Noel Gallagher (of Oasis) and Lars asks him how he feels about doing some of the older songs that were mammoth hits in the 90's when he has his own solo songs now. Noel starts to answer the question on how it makes his audience feel, Lars interrupts and asks, "But what do they mean to YOU."

       Lars then does something brilliant and Noel takes a deep breath. He shuts up and lets him think. The longer he lets him think - the better the answer. Eventually, Noel explains how those songs mean the world to him. Noel wasn't really answering the question, and Lars pointed him in the right direction. Catch the who interview on YouTube

       Thanks to Wayne Henderson of mediavoiceovers.com for his awesome tones.

       Podcast Rewind: Where I've Been

       13:58 I appeared on The Author Inside You Podcast talking about listening to your audience and the book Profit From Your Podcast

       16:26 I appear on Podcasting Experiments talking about the book Profit From Your Podcast

       What Is Your Favorite Podcast and Why?

       Every year the last episode is you answering the question, "What is your favorite podcast and why." Now I want to know about your show as well, so if I answered the question it would sound like this:

       Hey this is Dave Jackson and I host the School of Podcasting show where I help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast. You can find me at schoolofpodcasting.com. My favorite show is (name of show ) at (their website address) where they (what they talk about on their show) and the reason I love it is (as a detailed answer as you can provide).

       I need the answer by December 14th.

       Apple Holiday Schedule

       10:40 The door to have a show ready on all the platforms come January 2021 is closing. Dont' forget Apple goes on holiday twice between now and then. Here is their holiday schedule:

       November 22 to December 2 December 23 to January 2

       Which means you should submit your show to them almost immediately. If you have questions, let's schedule a coaching call.

       Mentioned In this Podcast

       Profit from Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       Dave on the Business of Podcasting Show Part 1, Part 2

       Leslie Eiler Thompson

       Check out Leslie on the Podcast Review Show

       Big Podcast

       5 AM Miracle podcast

       Voxphonix

       modernaudiodrama.com

       Join the School of Podcasting

       ]]>bf0073ac-8e40-446e-afc9-d62dd8dea697Mon, 16 Nov 2020 05:00:00 -040039:47falsefull749749COVID Took Natalie Kennedy's Job - Podcasting Delivered Her DreamI had someone ask me about starting a podcast. They wanted to "Stand Out" without "Niching Down." The easiest way to stand out is to Niche down. When you do a show like We Have Cancer, Adoptees On, or the Chameleon Breeder, you get providing information that people can't get anyplace else. You end up with a smaller audience size, but a more engaged audience.
       Podcasting is Closer to Cable Television Than Radio

       In this clip of "The Loudest Voice," you will hear actor Russel Crowe as Roger Ailes explains how he doesn't want a wide audience. He's is going to purposely make content for a demographic that is being underserved. Roger went on the grow Fox news which dominated cable news for decades.

       When you turn on cable, you get channels on cooking, animal sports, outdoors, and none of the channels will get anywhere near the audience of the major networks. However, you will have people like my ex-wife who watch HGTV like her life depended on it.

       COVID Took Natalie Kennedy's Job - Podcasting Delivered Her Dream

       Today I talk with Natalie Kennedy who is the host of the Anxious Love Podcast. The podcast is where Natalie covers relationship anxiety, ROCD, and upgrading love partnerships-- how to go from DOUBTING your relationship to LOVING it and gushing about your man. You can see where she already has gone from the wide topics of relationships and she niched down. Just like a cable channel. 

       The show is for women.

       The show is for women having an issue with their relationships.

       The show is for women who are doubting their relationships and worried about commitment.

       Today you will hear:

       00:58 Podcasting is Closer To Cable TV Than Radio 06:09 Natalie Kennedy Interview 07:13 Natalie Knows Her Niche 09:53 How She Picked Her Niche 11:07 Natalie's Transparency and how she describes her services 12:03 Dealing with Impostor Syndrome 13:37 Proof Of Concept - She had people asking for her services before she offered them. 15:45 Starting Her Podcast 16:41 How Many Episodes Does She Have? - This all happened really fast. 16:55 Is the Podcast Bringing in Clients? - ( spoiler - yes it is !) 17:21 Coaching Insights - How she gets people to open up. 18:45 You Don't Have to Know Everything - Just more than your clients. 19:37 How is Her Business Doing? 20:19 Pivots Don't Kill You  21:00 When Your Message Differs From Mainstream ( this is how you stand out). 

       Find Natalie at https://www.anxiouslovecoach.com/

        

       23:05 Apple Holiday Break 

       November 22 to December 2 December 23 to January 2

       Mistakes Breed Confidence

       24:20 If you wait until things are 100% perfect, you'll never launch. Mistakes (are still something we want to avoid) leave to growth. I just moved, and the house is old, and I learned how to fix holes in walls. I hired a contractor who makes a mistake. Did I freak out? No. My experience with fixing previous holes help me stay calm, and I knew what to do. When you make a mistake, realizing you are growing as a person (or you can hire a mentor to help you avoid them, and learn that way).

       How Long Does it Take To Make Money with a Podcast?

       25:22 I get this question all the time. In my travels, I started seeing an answer that start to appear, and reappear over and over. That answer is three years. Obviously Natalie today beat that record. Why do I tell people three years? I started making snippets every time I hear that answer. I forgot to write down who the first clip is. The other three are from

       Content Heroes Podcast. (Alex Nerney episode)

       The Business of Podcasting (Gert Mellak interview )

       Dave from the Cigar Authority, on Ask the Podcast Coach. 

       Dave's book David VS Goliath

       What To Do When You are Face to Face with Your Audience

       28:33 Just a quick clip showing that I practice what I preach, and when you have a listener in front of you take advantage.

       Zoom Podtrak P8 Follow Up

       30:23 I talked about the Zoom Podtrak P8 in my last episode. I had mentioned that there was an issue with a noise in the headphones. That is definitely an issue. Also, there is no timer count down for the jingle buttons. This makes "talking up" any kind of music a real challenge.

       Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

       33:20 You can try the private Facebook group, go through the step-by-step videos, and even attend one of the group coaching sessions, and any time in the first 30 days if you're not happy, you can stop and I will refund your money. Go to

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Natalie's Top Relationship Tip 33:22 I asked Natalie what she sees the most when it comes to her clients in regards to relationship issues. She has a really, really good answer.

       Coming Attractions

       36:15 I will be showing you how to convert your RSS feed into an Excel Spreadsheet on my YouTube Channel

       I will be interviewing Rob Coste who ended up working with a MAJOR company that will make you say WOA!

       ]]>I had someone ask me about starting a podcast. They wanted to "Stand Out" without "Niching Down." The easiest way to stand out is to Niche down. When you do a show like We Have Cancer, Adoptees On, or the Chameleon Breeder, you get providing information that people can't get anyplace else. You end up with a smaller audience size, but a more engaged audience.
       Podcasting is Closer to Cable Television Than Radio

       In this clip of "The Loudest Voice," you will hear actor Russel Crowe as Roger Ailes explains how he doesn't want a wide audience. He's is going to purposely make content for a demographic that is being underserved. Roger went on the grow Fox news which dominated cable news for decades.

       When you turn on cable, you get channels on cooking, animal sports, outdoors, and none of the channels will get anywhere near the audience of the major networks. However, you will have people like my ex-wife who watch HGTV like her life depended on it.

       COVID Took Natalie Kennedy's Job - Podcasting Delivered Her Dream

       Today I talk with Natalie Kennedy who is the host of the Anxious Love Podcast. The podcast is where Natalie covers relationship anxiety, ROCD, and upgrading love partnerships-- how to go from DOUBTING your relationship to LOVING it and gushing about your man. You can see where she already has gone from the wide topics of relationships and she niched down. Just like a cable channel. 

       The show is for women.

       The show is for women having an issue with their relationships.

       The show is for women who are doubting their relationships and worried about commitment.

       Today you will hear:

       00:58 Podcasting is Closer To Cable TV Than Radio 06:09 Natalie Kennedy Interview 07:13 Natalie Knows Her Niche 09:53 How She Picked Her Niche 11:07 Natalie's Transparency and how she describes her services 12:03 Dealing with Impostor Syndrome 13:37 Proof Of Concept - She had people asking for her services before she offered them. 15:45 Starting Her Podcast 16:41 How Many Episodes Does She Have? - This all happened really fast. 16:55 Is the Podcast Bringing in Clients? - ( spoiler - yes it is !) 17:21 Coaching Insights - How she gets people to open up. 18:45 You Don't Have to Know Everything - Just more than your clients. 19:37 How is Her Business Doing? 20:19 Pivots Don't Kill You  21:00 When Your Message Differs From Mainstream ( this is how you stand out). 

       Find Natalie at https://www.anxiouslovecoach.com/

        

       23:05 Apple Holiday Break 

       November 22 to December 2 December 23 to January 2

       Mistakes Breed Confidence

       24:20 If you wait until things are 100% perfect, you'll never launch. Mistakes (are still something we want to avoid) leave to growth. I just moved, and the house is old, and I learned how to fix holes in walls. I hired a contractor who makes a mistake. Did I freak out? No. My experience with fixing previous holes help me stay calm, and I knew what to do. When you make a mistake, realizing you are growing as a person (or you can hire a mentor to help you avoid them, and learn that way).

       How Long Does it Take To Make Money with a Podcast?

       25:22 I get this question all the time. In my travels, I started seeing an answer that start to appear, and reappear over and over. That answer is three years. Obviously Natalie today beat that record. Why do I tell people three years? I started making snippets every time I hear that answer. I forgot to write down who the first clip is. The other three are from

       Content Heroes Podcast. (Alex Nerney episode)

       The Business of Podcasting (Gert Mellak interview )

       Dave from the Cigar Authority, on Ask the Podcast Coach. 

       Dave's book David VS Goliath

       What To Do When You are Face to Face with Your Audience

       28:33 Just a quick clip showing that I practice what I preach, and when you have a listener in front of you take advantage.

       Zoom Podtrak P8 Follow Up

       30:23 I talked about the Zoom Podtrak P8 in my last episode. I had mentioned that there was an issue with a noise in the headphones. That is definitely an issue. Also, there is no timer count down for the jingle buttons. This makes "talking up" any kind of music a real challenge.

       Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

       33:20 You can try the private Facebook group, go through the step-by-step videos, and even attend one of the group coaching sessions, and any time in the first 30 days if you're not happy, you can stop and I will refund your money. Go to

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Natalie's Top Relationship Tip 33:22 I asked Natalie what she sees the most when it comes to her clients in regards to relationship issues. She has a really, really good answer.

       Coming Attractions

       36:15 I will be showing you how to convert your RSS feed into an Excel Spreadsheet on my YouTube Channel

       I will be interviewing Rob Coste who ended up working with a MAJOR company that will make you say WOA!

       ]]>3ecc261e-0dc1-414a-9cbe-049c5ad0a48eMon, 09 Nov 2020 05:00:00 -040038:18falsefull748748The Zoom Podtrak P8 Vs Rodecaster ProI often say that when you start out, your show is rolling slow. As it keeps moving, it gets faster and faster. It just takes time, consistency (of schedule, and value). Kim Krajci of Toastmasters 101 pointed me toward this YouTube video from Box Angeles. This video shows Mellisa Hunter who has a hilarious series of Adult Wednesday Adams and how one video in that series went viral and her back episodes starting taking off with the original video. 
       More Cool Podcast Gear For Podcasters

       One of the great things about podcasting getting more and more popular, is more and more products are coming to the marketing Specifically for podcasters. Zoom Recently came out with the Podtrak P4 (for me this is THE go-to piece of equipment). Now they've come out with the Podtrak P8 which is a direct competitor of the Rodecaster Pro from Rode.

       Neither one of these units is a bad purchase. They both make it easier to create great sounding podcasts.

       Who Is This For?

       The Zoom Podtrak P8 (and the Rodecaster Pro) allow you to:

       Record up to six people in the same room.

       Report a remote interview via SB

       Connect and record a smartphone

       Play live sounds via touch buttons.

       Comparing Different Features of the Units.

       For me, I am always connected to my computer via a USB cable. This is for zoom calls, or recording directing into software. Keep this in mind when I talk about different tests. I do one live show on Saturday morning where I record to the internal card, or if I'm doing an interview (I use it as a back up). 

       Power

       Both the Zoom and Rode can be operated via batteries (The Rodecaster has an optional DC-USB-1 cable that enables you to plug in a USB battery). The Zoom P8 uses double-A batteries or can be powered via a USB cable. So with the Rode, you will have a USB and a power cable. With the Zoom P8, you can power it with just your USB cable. Advantage Zoom P8

       Price

       The Rodecaster Pro currently lists for $599. USB Power Cable for RODECaster Pro $20 Total: $619

       The Zoom P8 is listing for $499. Zoom BTA-2 Bluetooth Adapter $49 Total: $548

       Advantage Zoom P8

       Input Channels

       ZOOM P8

       This is an interesting one, as the Zoom P8 has six XLR inputs. It has a dedicated channel to the phone input.

       This means you have a total of seven inputs. The USB interface on the zoom is used in place of one of the XLR inputs. You could have five XLR inputs, one USB, and One phone.

       Rodcaster Pro

       The rodecaster pro has four XLR inputs. Then it has a dedicated channel for a phone. It has a dedicated channel for the USB interface. It has another channel for Bluetooth.

       This means you have a total of seven inputs. You could have four XLR, one USB, One Phone and one bluetooth.

       Comments: The blue tooth is built into the Rodecaster, and the P8 has the ability to have one more XLR input. Advantage? Tie.

       Number of Outputs

       The Zoom has six headphone outputs, and a stereo output. The Rodecaster has four headphone outputs and a stereo output. The plugs are on the back of the Rodecaster where the inputs on the Zoom are on the face. Advantage: Zoom.

       Marker Feature

       Both units have the ability to add markers. Advantage? Tie

       Normalization

       While there is no normalization in the hardware of the Rodecaster, using the additional software on your computer you can have the files normalized with multiple settings with presets for Apple, Audible. The P8 has a normalizing feature built into the unit. There are no details on if this is peak normalization or loudness normalization. It appeared to be peak. Advantage Rodecaster

       Recording Mode

       Both units provide each individual tracks along with a stereo mixdown of the whole recording. The Rodecaster provides the ability to turn off the individual track recording and just provide the stereo mixdown. This enables you to not have a ton of extra tracks when you don't want them, which doesn't take up as much storage on your storage card. Advantage: Rodecaster

       Effects

       Both units provide effects for each track.

       Zoom P8: The Zoom provides bass and treble controls. It was one combination compressor/De-esser. There is also a limiter and low cut.

       Rodecaster: Each track has Aphex effects built-in. This includes a de-esser, compressor, big bottom (bass), and aurel exciter (treble), high pass filter (low cut), reverb, and what my favorite feature - a noise gate.

       Neither unit provides the full slate of effects to the USB channel (which is frustrating).

       Advantage: Rodecaster (by far much more control).

       File Management

       Zoom: The zoom uses an SD Card and allows you to delete and rename files on the unit. Both units have a card slot on the back of the unit. The Rodecaster uses a microSD card. In my case, I have to put the microSD card into an adapter to insert it into my computer.

       Advantage (due to ease of use): Zoom P8

       Sample Rate

       The Rodecaster Pro has a sample rate of 48 khz

       The Zoom P8 has a sample rate of 44.1kHz

       For me, this is no big deal, but if you're doing video it probably is (video people love a sample rate of 48 khz)

       Advantage: Rodecaster

       Transfer Speed

       I took a wave file and put it on both cards. It was 557M and then copied and pasted it to my computer. The Rodecaster tool one minute 14 seconds, the Zoom P8 took one minute two seconds so it appears to be slightly faster.

       One thing I do like more on the Zoom is when you put it into transfer mode, it doesn't make you confirm. I do not understand this on the Rodecaster as you have to somewhat hunt to get to it, so why do I have to confirm it (both on and off).

       Advantage: Zoom P8

       PreAmps

       The specs show that:

       Rodecaster: 0dB – 55dB

       Zoom P8: 0 – +70 dB

       I recorded on both units and found the difference in noise was almost nonexistent. If you have to listen that hard to see if there is noise, you're fine.

       Advantage:

       Footprint (Dimensions)

       Rodecaster Pro: 350 x 275 x 82 mm (13.8 X 10.8 X 3.2 inches)

       Zoom P8: 295 × 248  × 61 mm  MM ( 11.6 X 9.7 X 2.4 inches)

       The big difference here is the XLR inputs are on the face of the Zoom P8 and on the back of the Roadcaster. This extends the height to by 2.5" (64 mm). Likewise all the headphone/output jacks also on the back s0 the Rodecaster does take up more space on my desk.

       Sound Pads

       With the Rodecaster you have to use the free additional software to bring your files on to the Rodecaster. With the Zoom P8 you can drag them on to the card and bring them into the unit. It even converts the files if needed. The Zoom had 9 pads where the Rodecaster has 8. Both allow you to scroll through the screen to switch between multiple pages.

       Advantage: Zoom P8

       Quality of Outputs/Headphones

       In going back and forth between the two units, I did notice more noise in the headphones when using the Zoom P8. This noise wasn't on the recording, but a bit of a bummer when what you're hearing is not what you're recording.

       Advantage Rodcaster

       Noise Gate Vs Noise Reduction

       One of the KEY features of the Rodecaster is the ability to add a noise gate to channels (sadly not the USB). The Zoom has a feature called, "Noise Reduction" When multiple mics are being used to record sound, the noise reduction function of the P8 suppresses background noise to a constant level by automatically reducing the levels of the mic inputs not being used by people. Sadly, I tried to test this, but living alone, I couldn't really put the Noise Reduction into practice and Zoom doesn't talk about it much in their videos.

       Advantage: Rodecaster (as a gate is better than reduction)

       Mic Modeling

       This is a feature only available on the Rodcaster. For example, you can use presets for the Rode Podmic, EV RE20, and with a push of a button, your channel is set to your microphone (video).

       Combining Files / Editing

       You can combine files into one, you can trim files, add fade-ins and out. (Basic editing without a computer). This is only available on the Zoom P8

       Summary:

       When you look at the features I covered:

       Power: Zoom P8 Price: Zoom P8 Input Channels: Tie Number of Outputs: Zoom P8 Quality of Outputs: Rodecaster Marker: Tie Normalization: Rodecaster Recording Mode: Rodecaster Effects: Rodecaster File Management: Zoom P8 Sample Rate: Rodecaster Transfer Speed: Zoom P8 PreAmps: Zoom P8 Sound Pads: Zoom P8 Noise Gate/Reduction: Rodecaster Mic Modeling: Rodecaster Combining/Editing: Zoom P8

       There are 17 items and the Zoom Podtrak P8 had eight of these, with two ties and the Rodecaster having an advantage in seven of them. You can see that its very close, but for some, they may argue as the areas where the Rodecaster comes out on top is on boosting the sound (the Aphex Processing) and in that area, the Rodecaster is much better. HOWEVER, keep in mind that you can use something like the I often say that when you start out, your show is rolling slow. As it keeps moving, it gets faster and faster. It just takes time, consistency (of schedule, and value). Kim Krajci of Toastmasters 101 pointed me toward this YouTube video from Box Angeles. This video shows Mellisa Hunter who has a hilarious series of Adult Wednesday Adams and how one video in that series went viral and her back episodes starting taking off with the original video. 

       More Cool Podcast Gear For Podcasters

       One of the great things about podcasting getting more and more popular, is more and more products are coming to the marketing Specifically for podcasters. Zoom Recently came out with the Podtrak P4 (for me this is THE go-to piece of equipment). Now they've come out with the Podtrak P8 which is a direct competitor of the Rodecaster Pro from Rode.

       Neither one of these units is a bad purchase. They both make it easier to create great sounding podcasts.

       Who Is This For?

       The Zoom Podtrak P8 (and the Rodecaster Pro) allow you to:

       Record up to six people in the same room.

       Report a remote interview via SB

       Connect and record a smartphone

       Play live sounds via touch buttons.

       Comparing Different Features of the Units.

       For me, I am always connected to my computer via a USB cable. This is for zoom calls, or recording directing into software. Keep this in mind when I talk about different tests. I do one live show on Saturday morning where I record to the internal card, or if I'm doing an interview (I use it as a back up). 

       Power

       Both the Zoom and Rode can be operated via batteries (The Rodecaster has an optional DC-USB-1 cable that enables you to plug in a USB battery). The Zoom P8 uses double-A batteries or can be powered via a USB cable. So with the Rode, you will have a USB and a power cable. With the Zoom P8, you can power it with just your USB cable. Advantage Zoom P8

       Price

       The Rodecaster Pro currently lists for $599. USB Power Cable for RODECaster Pro $20 Total: $619

       The Zoom P8 is listing for $499. Zoom BTA-2 Bluetooth Adapter $49 Total: $548

       Advantage Zoom P8

       Input Channels

       ZOOM P8

       This is an interesting one, as the Zoom P8 has six XLR inputs. It has a dedicated channel to the phone input.

       This means you have a total of seven inputs. The USB interface on the zoom is used in place of one of the XLR inputs. You could have five XLR inputs, one USB, and One phone.

       Rodcaster Pro

       The rodecaster pro has four XLR inputs. Then it has a dedicated channel for a phone. It has a dedicated channel for the USB interface. It has another channel for Bluetooth.

       This means you have a total of seven inputs. You could have four XLR, one USB, One Phone and one bluetooth.

       Comments: The blue tooth is built into the Rodecaster, and the P8 has the ability to have one more XLR input. Advantage? Tie.

       Number of Outputs

       The Zoom has six headphone outputs, and a stereo output. The Rodecaster has four headphone outputs and a stereo output. The plugs are on the back of the Rodecaster where the inputs on the Zoom are on the face. Advantage: Zoom.

       Marker Feature

       Both units have the ability to add markers. Advantage? Tie

       Normalization

       While there is no normalization in the hardware of the Rodecaster, using the additional software on your computer you can have the files normalized with multiple settings with presets for Apple, Audible. The P8 has a normalizing feature built into the unit. There are no details on if this is peak normalization or loudness normalization. It appeared to be peak. Advantage Rodecaster

       Recording Mode

       Both units provide each individual tracks along with a stereo mixdown of the whole recording. The Rodecaster provides the ability to turn off the individual track recording and just provide the stereo mixdown. This enables you to not have a ton of extra tracks when you don't want them, which doesn't take up as much storage on your storage card. Advantage: Rodecaster

       Effects

       Both units provide effects for each track.

       Zoom P8: The Zoom provides bass and treble controls. It was one combination compressor/De-esser. There is also a limiter and low cut.

       Rodecaster: Each track has Aphex effects built-in. This includes a de-esser, compressor, big bottom (bass), and aurel exciter (treble), high pass filter (low cut), reverb, and what my favorite feature - a noise gate.

       Neither unit provides the full slate of effects to the USB channel (which is frustrating).

       Advantage: Rodecaster (by far much more control).

       File Management

       Zoom: The zoom uses an SD Card and allows you to delete and rename files on the unit. Both units have a card slot on the back of the unit. The Rodecaster uses a microSD card. In my case, I have to put the microSD card into an adapter to insert it into my computer.

       Advantage (due to ease of use): Zoom P8

       Sample Rate

       The Rodecaster Pro has a sample rate of 48 khz

       The Zoom P8 has a sample rate of 44.1kHz

       For me, this is no big deal, but if you're doing video it probably is (video people love a sample rate of 48 khz)

       Advantage: Rodecaster

       Transfer Speed

       I took a wave file and put it on both cards. It was 557M and then copied and pasted it to my computer. The Rodecaster tool one minute 14 seconds, the Zoom P8 took one minute two seconds so it appears to be slightly faster.

       One thing I do like more on the Zoom is when you put it into transfer mode, it doesn't make you confirm. I do not understand this on the Rodecaster as you have to somewhat hunt to get to it, so why do I have to confirm it (both on and off).

       Advantage: Zoom P8

       PreAmps

       The specs show that:

       Rodecaster: 0dB – 55dB

       Zoom P8: 0 – +70 dB

       I recorded on both units and found the difference in noise was almost nonexistent. If you have to listen that hard to see if there is noise, you're fine.

       Advantage:

       Footprint (Dimensions)

       Rodecaster Pro: 350 x 275 x 82 mm (13.8 X 10.8 X 3.2 inches)

       Zoom P8: 295 × 248  × 61 mm  MM ( 11.6 X 9.7 X 2.4 inches)

       The big difference here is the XLR inputs are on the face of the Zoom P8 and on the back of the Roadcaster. This extends the height to by 2.5" (64 mm). Likewise all the headphone/output jacks also on the back s0 the Rodecaster does take up more space on my desk.

       Sound Pads

       With the Rodecaster you have to use the free additional software to bring your files on to the Rodecaster. With the Zoom P8 you can drag them on to the card and bring them into the unit. It even converts the files if needed. The Zoom had 9 pads where the Rodecaster has 8. Both allow you to scroll through the screen to switch between multiple pages.

       Advantage: Zoom P8

       Quality of Outputs/Headphones

       In going back and forth between the two units, I did notice more noise in the headphones when using the Zoom P8. This noise wasn't on the recording, but a bit of a bummer when what you're hearing is not what you're recording.

       Advantage Rodcaster

       Noise Gate Vs Noise Reduction

       One of the KEY features of the Rodecaster is the ability to add a noise gate to channels (sadly not the USB). The Zoom has a feature called, "Noise Reduction" When multiple mics are being used to record sound, the noise reduction function of the P8 suppresses background noise to a constant level by automatically reducing the levels of the mic inputs not being used by people. Sadly, I tried to test this, but living alone, I couldn't really put the Noise Reduction into practice and Zoom doesn't talk about it much in their videos.

       Advantage: Rodecaster (as a gate is better than reduction)

       Mic Modeling

       This is a feature only available on the Rodcaster. For example, you can use presets for the Rode Podmic, EV RE20, and with a push of a button, your channel is set to your microphone (video).

       Combining Files / Editing

       You can combine files into one, you can trim files, add fade-ins and out. (Basic editing without a computer). This is only available on the Zoom P8

       Summary:

       When you look at the features I covered:

       Power: Zoom P8 Price: Zoom P8 Input Channels: Tie Number of Outputs: Zoom P8 Quality of Outputs: Rodecaster Marker: Tie Normalization: Rodecaster Recording Mode: Rodecaster Effects: Rodecaster File Management: Zoom P8 Sample Rate: Rodecaster Transfer Speed: Zoom P8 PreAmps: Zoom P8 Sound Pads: Zoom P8 Noise Gate/Reduction: Rodecaster Mic Modeling: Rodecaster Combining/Editing: Zoom P8

       There are 17 items and the Zoom Podtrak P8 had eight of these, with two ties and the Rodecaster having an advantage in seven of them. You can see that its very close, but for some, they may argue as the areas where the Rodecaster comes out on top is on boosting the sound (the Aphex Processing) and in that area, the Rodecaster is much better. HOWEVER, keep in mind that you can use something like the Schepps Omni Channel plugin on sale for $69 (and sometimes even less) and you can all this processing in post-production.

       So Again, It Depends

       So if you're doing a ton of live streaming, you may want the extra processing (and noise gate) to keep things sounding great as you go live. However, if you have large fingers and hate having to take out that tiny MicroSD card and having to deal with adapters and confirmation prompts, the ease of use of the Zoom Podtrack P8 may provide you a better experience than the Rodecaster.

       Conclusion:

       As I said at the beginning if you are having (Let's pretend there is no COVID) multiple people in the studio with you, both of these machines make it easy. The P8 gives you two more mic inputs (which, for me is a lot of guests for one podcast). If you like ease of use, and are not going to obsess about your sound then the Zoom P8 is a good fit for you.

       If you don't mind having to do a bit more searching through menus to find what you are looking for (to enable you to sound better) then the Rodecaster might be the way to go.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Rodcaster Pro from Rode

       Zoom Podtrak P8

       Zoom Podtrak P4

       Electrovoice RE20

       ]]>ae3f8207-5d14-42db-abfe-c9e521ea035cMon, 02 Nov 2020 05:00:00 -040025:59falsefull74774711 Steps I Took To Create a "WOW" InterviewLast week, I interview Matthew Dicks who is the author of the book Storyworthy. I am a HUGE fan of Matthew and was very excited when he agreed to come on the show. After the episode was published I get email after email. I saw comments on Facebook all stating, "WOW, That was a great interview." There will be times when you get feedback, and no matter if it's positive or negative you want to investigate why (so you can do more about it).

       I've received more than average feedback on episodes like The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews, Overcoming Impostor Syndrome,  How to Start a Podcast Network: The Good, the Bad, the Ugly, but the feedback I got about How to Tell Better Stories with Matthew Dicks was "way more than usual."

       One of the things I help people do is figure out what they are doing correctly with their podcast so they can do more of that type of content. With this in mind, I went back and looked at "Why did this connect with my audience?"

       Step 1: Start with someone interesting

       Getting entertaining stories out of Matthew Dicks is like shooting fish in a barrel.

       Step 2: Ignore the Back Story

       Matthew has an AMAZING back story. He took enormous steps to avoid telling his first story. While that's a nice story, I was looking for something my audience could take away. Ask yourself what is more helpful their backstory, or what they can do for your audience NOW?

       Step 3: Have a Goal

       Why was I bringing in Matthew Dicks? Because his book storyworthy is filled with strategies. I wanted to focus on strategies. I wanted to boost the skills of my listeners, and I wanted to sell books more Matthew.

       Step 4: Know your Guest

       I really wanted to get this interview going in the right direction. The minute I knew he was coming on the show, I was focused on coming up with the best questions. I especially wanted that first question to lead to a story, and to help people understand that words matter. Every night I would walk around my neighborhood listening to Storyworthy on Audible. I've already listened to this book, but I was now looking at topics that I would want to expand on. This would allow me to mention the book, and to get the content I was looking for my audience.

       Step 5: Don't Test Their Powers of Improv

       I had decided that the opening question would be, "When did you realize the power of words?" I really liked that question. It would lead to a story, and let my audience knowing we were going to be talking about words, and story crafting. However, I also realized that this question might need some thought on Matthew's part. Consequently, I let him know the topics we would be covering.

       That would be:

       When did realize words had power? (the actual question)

       Editing (such as where to start a story).

       Homework for life (this is Matthew's Freebird).

       Normally I don't give my guests the exact questions. I typically let them know why I'm bringing them on, and the subjects we will be covering.

       Step 6: Get the Best Audio You Can

       When we connected via Squadcast,  I was hearing Matthew through his camera's microphone. I tested this by having him tap his microphone. When he tapped it, and I didn't hear the tapping, I knew Squadcast was using the wrong microphone. When he switched away from his camera's microphone, it was like night and day.

       Step 7: Prove You've Done Your Homework

       When we first connected and got the microphones configured, I wanted to show Matthew I was a fanboy without being a fanboy. I know he is a HUGE fan of the New England Patriots football team. They recently made a quarterback change, so I asked him how they thought they would do.  My questions also showed I had actually read the book.

       Step 8: Ask and Shut Up

       When I do an interview I had my list of questions on a pad to my left and a blank pad in front of me with a pen that doesn't click. When I was would ask a question I would then shut up and listen. I didn't "um, hmm" and I listened for potential opportunities to ask a follow-up question.

       Step 9: Follow Up Questions

       When he was talking about things that had happened because of his podcast he mentioned how at one event that he was asked to tell a story, his daughter got up and told I story. While I realize that asking an athlete, "How does it feel to win the game?"I still asked what it felt like to watch your child follow in your footsteps. This question isn't in alignment with my goal (story crafting and book sales), but I know my audience has children, and I believe we call can identify with how cool it would be to see your child follow in your foto steps;

       Step 10: Remove Things That Aren't Needed

       I asked Matthew what was the first podcast that he listened to. Matthew couldn't exactly remember it and was a little blurry on the year. Does this help us craft stories? Does it sell books? No. Does it give us a glimpse inside Matthew that you can't get anyplace else? Nope. This is why you didn't hear it.

       Step 11: I Ran It Through a Transcription Service to find the Nuggets of Gold

       If you do interviews, one way to reposition yourself as the expert (and not your guest) is to do what I call the "Jerry Springer" a summarize the main points that YOU found interesting. This enables you to share a bit of yourself as well as remind the audience of the value they just received.

       For this step, I ran the edited interview through Otter.ai. This enabled me to find those great points in record time. Instead of having to listen to the episode again, I could read it much faster. Using transcripts as an editing tool is not something I hear people talk about it is typically about to create a full transcript of the show.

       I did edit the transcript into something readable and added it to the website. This is not something I normally do, but maybe I should.

       Need to Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to our easy to understand, step-by-step tutorials, our live group coaching, and access to our private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. Joined worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Go to www.schoolofpodcastibg.com/start

       ]]>Last week, I interview Matthew Dicks who is the author of the book Storyworthy. I am a HUGE fan of Matthew and was very excited when he agreed to come on the show. After the episode was published I get email after email. I saw comments on Facebook all stating, "WOW, That was a great interview." There will be times when you get feedback, and no matter if it's positive or negative you want to investigate why (so you can do more about it).

       I've received more than average feedback on episodes like The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast Interviews, Overcoming Impostor Syndrome,  How to Start a Podcast Network: The Good, the Bad, the Ugly, but the feedback I got about How to Tell Better Stories with Matthew Dicks was "way more than usual."

       One of the things I help people do is figure out what they are doing correctly with their podcast so they can do more of that type of content. With this in mind, I went back and looked at "Why did this connect with my audience?"

       Step 1: Start with someone interesting

       Getting entertaining stories out of Matthew Dicks is like shooting fish in a barrel.

       Step 2: Ignore the Back Story

       Matthew has an AMAZING back story. He took enormous steps to avoid telling his first story. While that's a nice story, I was looking for something my audience could take away. Ask yourself what is more helpful their backstory, or what they can do for your audience NOW?

       Step 3: Have a Goal

       Why was I bringing in Matthew Dicks? Because his book storyworthy is filled with strategies. I wanted to focus on strategies. I wanted to boost the skills of my listeners, and I wanted to sell books more Matthew.

       Step 4: Know your Guest

       I really wanted to get this interview going in the right direction. The minute I knew he was coming on the show, I was focused on coming up with the best questions. I especially wanted that first question to lead to a story, and to help people understand that words matter. Every night I would walk around my neighborhood listening to Storyworthy on Audible. I've already listened to this book, but I was now looking at topics that I would want to expand on. This would allow me to mention the book, and to get the content I was looking for my audience.

       Step 5: Don't Test Their Powers of Improv

       I had decided that the opening question would be, "When did you realize the power of words?" I really liked that question. It would lead to a story, and let my audience knowing we were going to be talking about words, and story crafting. However, I also realized that this question might need some thought on Matthew's part. Consequently, I let him know the topics we would be covering.

       That would be:

       When did realize words had power? (the actual question)

       Editing (such as where to start a story).

       Homework for life (this is Matthew's Freebird).

       Normally I don't give my guests the exact questions. I typically let them know why I'm bringing them on, and the subjects we will be covering.

       Step 6: Get the Best Audio You Can

       When we connected via Squadcast,  I was hearing Matthew through his camera's microphone. I tested this by having him tap his microphone. When he tapped it, and I didn't hear the tapping, I knew Squadcast was using the wrong microphone. When he switched away from his camera's microphone, it was like night and day.

       Step 7: Prove You've Done Your Homework

       When we first connected and got the microphones configured, I wanted to show Matthew I was a fanboy without being a fanboy. I know he is a HUGE fan of the New England Patriots football team. They recently made a quarterback change, so I asked him how they thought they would do.  My questions also showed I had actually read the book.

       Step 8: Ask and Shut Up

       When I do an interview I had my list of questions on a pad to my left and a blank pad in front of me with a pen that doesn't click. When I was would ask a question I would then shut up and listen. I didn't "um, hmm" and I listened for potential opportunities to ask a follow-up question.

       Step 9: Follow Up Questions

       When he was talking about things that had happened because of his podcast he mentioned how at one event that he was asked to tell a story, his daughter got up and told I story. While I realize that asking an athlete, "How does it feel to win the game?"I still asked what it felt like to watch your child follow in your footsteps. This question isn't in alignment with my goal (story crafting and book sales), but I know my audience has children, and I believe we call can identify with how cool it would be to see your child follow in your foto steps;

       Step 10: Remove Things That Aren't Needed

       I asked Matthew what was the first podcast that he listened to. Matthew couldn't exactly remember it and was a little blurry on the year. Does this help us craft stories? Does it sell books? No. Does it give us a glimpse inside Matthew that you can't get anyplace else? Nope. This is why you didn't hear it.

       Step 11: I Ran It Through a Transcription Service to find the Nuggets of Gold

       If you do interviews, one way to reposition yourself as the expert (and not your guest) is to do what I call the "Jerry Springer" a summarize the main points that YOU found interesting. This enables you to share a bit of yourself as well as remind the audience of the value they just received.

       For this step, I ran the edited interview through Otter.ai. This enabled me to find those great points in record time. Instead of having to listen to the episode again, I could read it much faster. Using transcripts as an editing tool is not something I hear people talk about it is typically about to create a full transcript of the show.

       I did edit the transcript into something readable and added it to the website. This is not something I normally do, but maybe I should.

       Need to Plan, Launch, and Grow Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to our easy to understand, step-by-step tutorials, our live group coaching, and access to our private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. Joined worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. Go to www.schoolofpodcastibg.com/start

       ]]>4510c731-d35a-441a-9e39-b2705165f9bcMon, 26 Oct 2020 04:00:00 -040029:40falsefull746746How to Tell Better Stories with Matthew DicksI have had the voice of Matthew Dicks in my head more than any other person this year. I heard him on a podcast, bought his audiobook Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life through the Power of Storytelling, and listened to it. When I was done with the book I wanted more and found his Speak Up Story Telling podcast. Unlike other books on Storytelling that have brilliant messages like "Stories are good," and "You should learn how to tell stories," I was THRILLED that I had finally found a book that explained HOW to tell better stories. It is an AMAZING book, and I feel it will benefit anyone who reads or listens to it.

       Today I am honored to have the author on my show.

       Here are some key points:

       Start with a thesis. I use to think something, and then something (the story) happened, and now I think something else.

       I would prefer to be entertaining than lengthy and boring. Always serve the story (not yourself).

       I think about what I want my audience to feel in certain parts of the story. I make those decisions before I begin crafting my story.

       "How about making the first thing you say something that's actually engaging and interesting? Because those first 30 seconds to 60 seconds of a story that is such fertile ground, that is your opportunity to either convince the audience that what is to come is worth listening to, or I don't know what the hell I'm doing. Because I've just bored you for 30 to 60 seconds, and essentially told you nothing."

       Our questions that we asked people like in a podcast, the more specific they are, the more helpful they are to our guests.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Are you worried about spending too much money on equipment? Sounding unprofessional? Not sure what software to use? How to shape your content? 

       Join the school of podcasting and enjoy the step by step tutorials along with a private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. 

       You can join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       TIME TABLE

       01:22 Matthew Dicks Introduction 03:50 When Did You realize Stories Had Power? 08:38 Do Stories HAVE to show vulnerability? 10:14 Is vulnerability Magic? 12:38 How do you know what to keep and what to delete? 15:27 The Importance of Location 19:30 Homework For Life 23:44 Can you Tell a Story "By Numbers" 26:40 The Power of But and Therefore VS And 30:16 Story Telling Peeves 33:52 3-2-1 Game 36:23 When Did Mathew Know He Wanted to Podcast? 37:58 Because of My Podcast ______ 40:58 Watching Your Daughter Tell a Story 42:13 Where to Find Matthew's Workshops 44:33 Storytelling is More Than Just Stories 45:40 How Storytelling Helps 47:36 Matthew Has Other Books

       Profit From Your Podcast is Available

       Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: 

       • How to Grow Your Audience
       • How to Set Your Pricing
       • Understanding Advertising Jargon
       • How to Find Sponsors
       • Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate
       • Master Strategies for Crowdfunding
       • Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events
       • The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy
       
       

       Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. Profit from Your Podcast gives you the tools to do it all.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Matthew Dicks Website

       Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life through the Power of Storytelling

       Get the Audiobook for free if you're new to Audible

       Speak Up Story Telling podcast

       Homework for life video

       Profit from Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting

       Podcast Consulting

       ]]>I have had the voice of Matthew Dicks in my head more than any other person this year. I heard him on a podcast, bought his audiobook Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life through the Power of Storytelling, and listened to it. When I was done with the book I wanted more and found his Speak Up Story Telling podcast. Unlike other books on Storytelling that have brilliant messages like "Stories are good," and "You should learn how to tell stories," I was THRILLED that I had finally found a book that explained HOW to tell better stories. It is an AMAZING book, and I feel it will benefit anyone who reads or listens to it.

       Today I am honored to have the author on my show.

       Here are some key points:

       Start with a thesis. I use to think something, and then something (the story) happened, and now I think something else.

       I would prefer to be entertaining than lengthy and boring. Always serve the story (not yourself).

       I think about what I want my audience to feel in certain parts of the story. I make those decisions before I begin crafting my story.

       "How about making the first thing you say something that's actually engaging and interesting? Because those first 30 seconds to 60 seconds of a story that is such fertile ground, that is your opportunity to either convince the audience that what is to come is worth listening to, or I don't know what the hell I'm doing. Because I've just bored you for 30 to 60 seconds, and essentially told you nothing."

       Our questions that we asked people like in a podcast, the more specific they are, the more helpful they are to our guests.

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Are you worried about spending too much money on equipment? Sounding unprofessional? Not sure what software to use? How to shape your content? 

       Join the school of podcasting and enjoy the step by step tutorials along with a private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds. 

       You can join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       TIME TABLE

       01:22 Matthew Dicks Introduction 03:50 When Did You realize Stories Had Power? 08:38 Do Stories HAVE to show vulnerability? 10:14 Is vulnerability Magic? 12:38 How do you know what to keep and what to delete? 15:27 The Importance of Location 19:30 Homework For Life 23:44 Can you Tell a Story "By Numbers" 26:40 The Power of But and Therefore VS And 30:16 Story Telling Peeves 33:52 3-2-1 Game 36:23 When Did Mathew Know He Wanted to Podcast? 37:58 Because of My Podcast ______ 40:58 Watching Your Daughter Tell a Story 42:13 Where to Find Matthew's Workshops 44:33 Storytelling is More Than Just Stories 45:40 How Storytelling Helps 47:36 Matthew Has Other Books

       Profit From Your Podcast is Available

       Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: 

       • How to Grow Your Audience
       • How to Set Your Pricing
       • Understanding Advertising Jargon
       • How to Find Sponsors
       • Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate
       • Master Strategies for Crowdfunding
       • Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events
       • The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy
       
       

       Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. Profit from Your Podcast gives you the tools to do it all.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Matthew Dicks Website

       Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life through the Power of Storytelling

       Get the Audiobook for free if you're new to Audible

       Speak Up Story Telling podcast

       Homework for life video

       Profit from Your Podcast

       School of Podcasting

       Podcast Consulting

       ]]>74e2c354-3a60-4b38-8a08-d7a790565259Mon, 19 Oct 2020 04:00:00 -040053:01falsefull745745What Podcasters Can Learn From Eddie Van HalenThis week rock guitar God Eddie Van Halen died after a long battle with throat cancer. As a guitar who was 13 when Van Halen's first album was released, and whose band provided the soundtrack to my adolescent years this hit me hard. With this in mind, I wanted to talk about things podcasters can learn from Eddie Van Halen.
       Sponsor -Profit from Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Listeners into a Livelihood

       Methods and Advice for Making the Most of Your Podcast—Pricing, Sponsors, Crowdfunding, and More

       Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: How to Grow Your Audience How to Set Your Pricing Understanding Advertising Jargon How to Find Sponsors Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate Master Strategies for Crowdfunding Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. Profit from Your Podcast gives you the tools to do it all.

       Order on Amazon.com

       Van Halen Took Years to Build Their Audience

       The band was formed in 1972. Some of the top songs in 1972 were Saturday in the park in Chicago, Brandy (You're a fine girl), I'll take you there (the staple singers). Not exactly a thriving time of high energy, guitar-oriented hard rock. They played clubs for years.

       In 1976 (four years later) Gene Simmons of Kiss financed a demo tape, and arranged a performance in front of Kiss's management and was told that "they had no chance of making it" and that they wouldn't take them. Gene then removed himself from further involvement.

       A year later when they were playing the famed "Starwood: club Ted Templeman of Warner Brother saw the band and they were offered a contract.

       Good Planning Leads to Less Editing

       As they had been playing clubs for years, the band was well-rehearsed and ready to go. Their first album was recorded in three weeks with almost no overdubs.

       You Don't Need to Spend a Ton of Cash

       There are two popular guitars in rock music. A Stratocaster has a thin sound and used by blues players and it had a whammy bar. A Les Paul has a thicker, chunkier sound. Eddie took the guts of a Less Paul and put them into the Stratocaster (called the Frankencaster). He made the guitar himself using a guitar body that cost fifty dollars and a guitar neck that cost eighty. He ended up with a thicker, chunkier guitar tone that had a whammy bar. The guitar that cost $130 to make has a replica that now goes for thousands of dollars.

       He stated that because he was poor he had to find ways to make the noises on the guitar.

       He Learned Through Trial And Error

       In the process of creating his own guitar, Eddie states, "I ruined a bunch of stuff." The bottom line he never stopped experimenting. In the song intruder, you hear Eddie creating bizarre sounds on his guitar. It turns out that some of those sounds were Eddie Swiping a Schlitz beer can up and down the neck. In the song poundcake, Eddie uses an electric drill. The bizarre noise on Automic Punk is Eddie running the side of his hands up and down the strings. He was always looking for ways to make different noises (like an elephant) with his guitar. The strange wooshing noise in the middle of the song Panama is Eddie's Lamborgini.

       He had an endless curiosity and was constantly experimenting.

       He Never Learned How To Read Music

       He would watch his teacher's fingers and then play whatever he just saw. His parents forced him to play the piano and won contests when he was ages 9-11. After using the Beatles and the Dave Clark Five he picked up the guitar. Because he never learned guitars lessons "by the book" he believes he wouldn't play the way he does if he had done "Traditional" guitar studies.

       Inventions Around Van Halen

       I mentioned how he created his own guitar. He holds a patent for a device that allows you to stand and hold the guitar flat. He perfected a style of playing called "tapping" where he play notes with both hands. This lead to the invention of guitar tablature as people couldn't figure out how to put down on paper what he was doing on the fretboard.

       Enjoy Your Soup

       How did Van Halen get their sound? Drummer Alex Van Halen prefers straight forward rock. Eddie liked progressive rock, and David Lee Roth like disco at the time. Eddie referred to this as ingredients in your soup.

       I like singer Gary Cherone from the band Extreme. He joined Van Halen and recorded Van Halen III. On that album bassist Michael Anthony has stated that Eddie told him what and how to play, Gary stated that Eddie was playing bass and drums, making it more or less an Eddie Van Halen Solo album. One point here is this album came out in 1998, and was not sober until 2008. This was the first album to not go platinum (it did achieve Gold status). I was also the longest studio album. 

       Embrace Who You Are

       When they were in the clubs, they were playing covers. As Eddie put it, no matter how hard I tried I couldn't play what was on the record. I could only be me. Consequently, when you hear a Van Halen record, it sounds like a Van Halen record.

       Go To Where Your Audience is and Promote Nonstop

       When they couldn't get a record deal they started throwing their own parties and concerts. They toured for 11 months straight to promote their first album including 23 shows in 25 days in the UK. When he got home Warner Brothers alerted the band that they owed the record label three million dollars and a new album. They wouldn't take no for an answer. They stuffed flyers in lockers of high schools. If you liked them or not, you were at least going to know about the band. Slowly they built an audience of 3-5000 people which attracted the attention of Warner Brothers.

       He Was Always Nervous Going On Stage

       In the early days, he asked his Dad how he dealy with stage fright. His father gave him alcohol and cigarettes (and would later die from Alcohol-related issues). After Eddie got sober, his son was in the band and Eddie said, "If my sixteen-year-old son can be out there kicking butt, then I guess I better get out there."

       You Don't Have To Release Everything

       Eddie built himself a studio and was always recording, experimenting, but it is assumed that there is quite a bit of music that was not released.

       Have Fun

       One of the things you can hear in a Van Halen record is fun. Watch Eddie play guitar and you will see one thing that never changes. He smiles. Why? Because he came to this country from Holland with his parents who brought a piano and what amounted to $50. He didn't speak the language and got bullied as he was considered a minority.

       Money Changes Everything

       In the book Runnin' wit the Devil" he states that the Van Halen brothers (along with David Lee Roth) gave Michael Anthony an ultimatum right around the time the “1984” album came out. In a nutshell, they did not believe Michael’s contributions to the band’s music entitled him to an equal 1/4 split of the profits, so they drew-up a contract that stipulated that he would no longer share in any royalties from Van Halen recordings from the “1984” album on, and I believe it also limited what he would receive from the previous records, touring, and merchandise sales as well. In effect, while Michael would technically still be in the band, he would essentially become a paid employee from that point on.

       Most die-hard fans found this offensive. We want to believe you all get along and are best buddies.

       Put Your Family First

       In 2006 Eddie Van Halen replaced Michael Anthony with his son Wolfgang. He knew this was not going to be a popular choice, but he put his family first. What father wouldn't want to play with his son?

       Communication is the Lubrication

       Eddie Van Halen wasn't on social media. The website as I write this now does not even have a notice that Eddie has died. For years his audience had no idea what he was up to. Michael Anthony found out he had been replaced via the Internet. He could have kept that connection stronger by keeping people in the loop. 

       Why? Eddie was a nice guy, but an introvert. He just wanted to make music. Upon his cancer diagnosis, he retreated even further. 

       Profit From Your Podcast Is...]]>This week rock guitar God Eddie Van Halen died after a long battle with throat cancer. As a guitar who was 13 when Van Halen's first album was released, and whose band provided the soundtrack to my adolescent years this hit me hard. With this in mind, I wanted to talk about things podcasters can learn from Eddie Van Halen.
       Sponsor -Profit from Your Podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Listeners into a Livelihood

       Methods and Advice for Making the Most of Your Podcast—Pricing, Sponsors, Crowdfunding, and More

       Pick up any book on podcast monetization, and you will find 90 percent of it only covers how to launch a podcast. If you already have a podcast, you have that information; you’re ready for the next step. Profit from Your Podcast provides top strategies and real-life examples of podcast monetization. This book is more than what to do. It also tells you how to do it. Chapters cover such topics as: How to Grow Your Audience How to Set Your Pricing Understanding Advertising Jargon How to Find Sponsors Best Strategies for Making Money as an Affiliate Master Strategies for Crowdfunding Harnessing the Power of Webinars and Events The Top Tools to Make Your Job Easy Built on the author’s fifteen years of experience in podcasting, this action-packed guide will benefit new and veteran podcasters. Get clear on who your audience is and what they want, deliver value, and build an engaged audience that wants to give you money. Leverage your relationships and the integrity you have built through your podcast to create multiple streams of income. Profit from Your Podcast gives you the tools to do it all.

       Order on Amazon.com

       Van Halen Took Years to Build Their Audience

       The band was formed in 1972. Some of the top songs in 1972 were Saturday in the park in Chicago, Brandy (You're a fine girl), I'll take you there (the staple singers). Not exactly a thriving time of high energy, guitar-oriented hard rock. They played clubs for years.

       In 1976 (four years later) Gene Simmons of Kiss financed a demo tape, and arranged a performance in front of Kiss's management and was told that "they had no chance of making it" and that they wouldn't take them. Gene then removed himself from further involvement.

       A year later when they were playing the famed "Starwood: club Ted Templeman of Warner Brother saw the band and they were offered a contract.

       Good Planning Leads to Less Editing

       As they had been playing clubs for years, the band was well-rehearsed and ready to go. Their first album was recorded in three weeks with almost no overdubs.

       You Don't Need to Spend a Ton of Cash

       There are two popular guitars in rock music. A Stratocaster has a thin sound and used by blues players and it had a whammy bar. A Les Paul has a thicker, chunkier sound. Eddie took the guts of a Less Paul and put them into the Stratocaster (called the Frankencaster). He made the guitar himself using a guitar body that cost fifty dollars and a guitar neck that cost eighty. He ended up with a thicker, chunkier guitar tone that had a whammy bar. The guitar that cost $130 to make has a replica that now goes for thousands of dollars.

       He stated that because he was poor he had to find ways to make the noises on the guitar.

       He Learned Through Trial And Error

       In the process of creating his own guitar, Eddie states, "I ruined a bunch of stuff." The bottom line he never stopped experimenting. In the song intruder, you hear Eddie creating bizarre sounds on his guitar. It turns out that some of those sounds were Eddie Swiping a Schlitz beer can up and down the neck. In the song poundcake, Eddie uses an electric drill. The bizarre noise on Automic Punk is Eddie running the side of his hands up and down the strings. He was always looking for ways to make different noises (like an elephant) with his guitar. The strange wooshing noise in the middle of the song Panama is Eddie's Lamborgini.

       He had an endless curiosity and was constantly experimenting.

       He Never Learned How To Read Music

       He would watch his teacher's fingers and then play whatever he just saw. His parents forced him to play the piano and won contests when he was ages 9-11. After using the Beatles and the Dave Clark Five he picked up the guitar. Because he never learned guitars lessons "by the book" he believes he wouldn't play the way he does if he had done "Traditional" guitar studies.

       Inventions Around Van Halen

       I mentioned how he created his own guitar. He holds a patent for a device that allows you to stand and hold the guitar flat. He perfected a style of playing called "tapping" where he play notes with both hands. This lead to the invention of guitar tablature as people couldn't figure out how to put down on paper what he was doing on the fretboard.

       Enjoy Your Soup

       How did Van Halen get their sound? Drummer Alex Van Halen prefers straight forward rock. Eddie liked progressive rock, and David Lee Roth like disco at the time. Eddie referred to this as ingredients in your soup.

       I like singer Gary Cherone from the band Extreme. He joined Van Halen and recorded Van Halen III. On that album bassist Michael Anthony has stated that Eddie told him what and how to play, Gary stated that Eddie was playing bass and drums, making it more or less an Eddie Van Halen Solo album. One point here is this album came out in 1998, and was not sober until 2008. This was the first album to not go platinum (it did achieve Gold status). I was also the longest studio album. 

       Embrace Who You Are

       When they were in the clubs, they were playing covers. As Eddie put it, no matter how hard I tried I couldn't play what was on the record. I could only be me. Consequently, when you hear a Van Halen record, it sounds like a Van Halen record.

       Go To Where Your Audience is and Promote Nonstop

       When they couldn't get a record deal they started throwing their own parties and concerts. They toured for 11 months straight to promote their first album including 23 shows in 25 days in the UK. When he got home Warner Brothers alerted the band that they owed the record label three million dollars and a new album. They wouldn't take no for an answer. They stuffed flyers in lockers of high schools. If you liked them or not, you were at least going to know about the band. Slowly they built an audience of 3-5000 people which attracted the attention of Warner Brothers.

       He Was Always Nervous Going On Stage

       In the early days, he asked his Dad how he dealy with stage fright. His father gave him alcohol and cigarettes (and would later die from Alcohol-related issues). After Eddie got sober, his son was in the band and Eddie said, "If my sixteen-year-old son can be out there kicking butt, then I guess I better get out there."

       You Don't Have To Release Everything

       Eddie built himself a studio and was always recording, experimenting, but it is assumed that there is quite a bit of music that was not released.

       Have Fun

       One of the things you can hear in a Van Halen record is fun. Watch Eddie play guitar and you will see one thing that never changes. He smiles. Why? Because he came to this country from Holland with his parents who brought a piano and what amounted to $50. He didn't speak the language and got bullied as he was considered a minority.

       Money Changes Everything

       In the book Runnin' wit the Devil" he states that the Van Halen brothers (along with David Lee Roth) gave Michael Anthony an ultimatum right around the time the “1984” album came out. In a nutshell, they did not believe Michael’s contributions to the band’s music entitled him to an equal 1/4 split of the profits, so they drew-up a contract that stipulated that he would no longer share in any royalties from Van Halen recordings from the “1984” album on, and I believe it also limited what he would receive from the previous records, touring, and merchandise sales as well. In effect, while Michael would technically still be in the band, he would essentially become a paid employee from that point on.

       Most die-hard fans found this offensive. We want to believe you all get along and are best buddies.

       Put Your Family First

       In 2006 Eddie Van Halen replaced Michael Anthony with his son Wolfgang. He knew this was not going to be a popular choice, but he put his family first. What father wouldn't want to play with his son?

       Communication is the Lubrication

       Eddie Van Halen wasn't on social media. The website as I write this now does not even have a notice that Eddie has died. For years his audience had no idea what he was up to. Michael Anthony found out he had been replaced via the Internet. He could have kept that connection stronger by keeping people in the loop. 

       Why? Eddie was a nice guy, but an introvert. He just wanted to make music. Upon his cancer diagnosis, he retreated even further. 

       Profit From Your Podcast Is Available

       Thanks to Letitia Evans who was the first to write a review of my new book Profit from your podcast: Proven Strategies to Turn Listeners into a Livelihood. She said, "Dave is one of the best in the podcasting space! This book does a great job of sharing the pieces that need to come together for podcasters to serve their listeners well without shortchanging their livelihoods. Any podcaster that wants to start right and continue well will benefit from this book.

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Audio Technica ATR2100x microphone

       Samson Q2u

       Start Your Podcast Worry-Free at the School of Podcasting

       You're worried you'll sound stupid. You won't as I show you how to know exactly what your audience wants. You're worried about the technology? Don't be as I have step by step tutorials to walk you through the whole podcasting process. Need some help along the way? I do live group coaching multiple times per month, you have priority email support, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also have a 30-day money-back guarantee so if you're not happy you can get your money back.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>a0806705-be5a-4658-96c9-233ee5fb1019Mon, 12 Oct 2020 04:00:00 -040039:26falsefull744744Profit From Your Podcast: Tales From the Book TourI am thrilled and humbled to be named the winner of People's Choice Podcast Award for best Technology podcasts (beating out seven other podcasts). Thanks to Todd Cochrane and everyone at podcastawards.com for all you do and thank YOU for voting for me.

       I had one this award back in 2017, and now I will have an awesome set of bookend for my bookcase. 

       THANK YOU!. 

       Profit From Your Podcast Is Now Available

       I spent months researching podcasters who are making money with their podcasts and assembled all the insights and strategies for you to follow. I announced that I was available for speaking on different podcasts, and I was lucky enough to have listeners who felt I would be a good fit for their show (I'm still available if you think I'm a good fit). By appearing on these different shows, the book was rated the #1 New Release in the blogging category. I was honored to be on the following shows, and look forward to appearing on yours. 

       06:02 I appeared with Ross Brand of Live Stream Universe on his Streamyard Connect Podcast which will be replaced in the future.

       08:21 I appeared on Episode 360 the Jeff Sander 5 AM Miracle show.  I mention Jeff in the book on how Jeff won't take sponsors that he wouldn't use, and how you really need to guard your integrity as a podcaster. Jeff has appeared on this show back in show 603 in Getting Focused

       12:11 I appeared on the "I Could Never Do That" podcast with Carrie Barret who is a podcast producer and talks about overcoming fears. We talk about how to find sponsors.

       18:45 I appeared on Dealcster with Jeff and Chris. This was on Amazon Live so in addition to affiliate marketing we talked about Amazon getting into the podcasting space. 

       23:34  I will be appearing the For the Love of Podcasting show with Billy Samoa Saleebey talking about you need to look at negative feedback as an opportunity to improve. 

       What To Do With the "Wrong Audience"

       In the book Profit From Your Podcast I talk about Daniel J. Lewis who designed websites for people. His show "The Audacity to Podcast" attracted people looking for information about the free software titled "Audacity." This was not who Daniel wanted to attract. What did he do? Instead of trying to talk them into a product they didn't want (a website) he listened to what they wanted, and then gave it to them. 

       He creates products like an SEO for Podcasters Course, My Podcast Reviews (to track reviews in Apple, Stitcher, and others) as well as the Subscribe and Follow Plugin. He recently added a "Love this Podcast" feature to My Podcast Reviews that provides one link to provide to your audience and helps them get to the right directories/apps for their device. 

       You can test this by going to www.lovethispodcast.com/sop Sign up for My Podcast Reviews at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr

       Table of Contents

       06:02 Dave with Ross Brand 08:21 Dave with Jeff Sanders 12:11 Dave with Carie Barrett 17:15 Join the School of Podcasting 18:45 Dave on Dealcasters 23:34 Dave on For the Love of Podcasting 26:11 What To Do With the "Wrong" Audience 31:41 Because of My Podcast: Ross Brand

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The 5 AM Miracle Book by Jeff Sanders also available on Audible

       Profit From Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       My Podcast Reviews

       Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       SEO for Podcasters Course,

       Zita Christian from Ritual Recipes

       David Hooper of Big Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Check out the Love The Podcast Link and subscribe to the show.

       This is episode 743 of the School of Podcasting which is part of the Power of Podcasting Network.

       ]]>I am thrilled and humbled to be named the winner of People's Choice Podcast Award for best Technology podcasts (beating out seven other podcasts). Thanks to Todd Cochrane and everyone at podcastawards.com for all you do and thank YOU for voting for me.

       I had one this award back in 2017, and now I will have an awesome set of bookend for my bookcase. 

       THANK YOU!. 

       Profit From Your Podcast Is Now Available

       I spent months researching podcasters who are making money with their podcasts and assembled all the insights and strategies for you to follow. I announced that I was available for speaking on different podcasts, and I was lucky enough to have listeners who felt I would be a good fit for their show (I'm still available if you think I'm a good fit). By appearing on these different shows, the book was rated the #1 New Release in the blogging category. I was honored to be on the following shows, and look forward to appearing on yours. 

       06:02 I appeared with Ross Brand of Live Stream Universe on his Streamyard Connect Podcast which will be replaced in the future.

       08:21 I appeared on Episode 360 the Jeff Sander 5 AM Miracle show.  I mention Jeff in the book on how Jeff won't take sponsors that he wouldn't use, and how you really need to guard your integrity as a podcaster. Jeff has appeared on this show back in show 603 in Getting Focused

       12:11 I appeared on the "I Could Never Do That" podcast with Carrie Barret who is a podcast producer and talks about overcoming fears. We talk about how to find sponsors.

       18:45 I appeared on Dealcster with Jeff and Chris. This was on Amazon Live so in addition to affiliate marketing we talked about Amazon getting into the podcasting space. 

       23:34  I will be appearing the For the Love of Podcasting show with Billy Samoa Saleebey talking about you need to look at negative feedback as an opportunity to improve. 

       What To Do With the "Wrong Audience"

       In the book Profit From Your Podcast I talk about Daniel J. Lewis who designed websites for people. His show "The Audacity to Podcast" attracted people looking for information about the free software titled "Audacity." This was not who Daniel wanted to attract. What did he do? Instead of trying to talk them into a product they didn't want (a website) he listened to what they wanted, and then gave it to them. 

       He creates products like an SEO for Podcasters Course, My Podcast Reviews (to track reviews in Apple, Stitcher, and others) as well as the Subscribe and Follow Plugin. He recently added a "Love this Podcast" feature to My Podcast Reviews that provides one link to provide to your audience and helps them get to the right directories/apps for their device. 

       You can test this by going to www.lovethispodcast.com/sop Sign up for My Podcast Reviews at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr

       Table of Contents

       06:02 Dave with Ross Brand 08:21 Dave with Jeff Sanders 12:11 Dave with Carie Barrett 17:15 Join the School of Podcasting 18:45 Dave on Dealcasters 23:34 Dave on For the Love of Podcasting 26:11 What To Do With the "Wrong" Audience 31:41 Because of My Podcast: Ross Brand

       Mentioned In This Episode

       The 5 AM Miracle Book by Jeff Sanders also available on Audible

       Profit From Your Podcast: Turn Your Listeners Into Livelihood

       My Podcast Reviews

       Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       SEO for Podcasters Course,

       Zita Christian from Ritual Recipes

       David Hooper of Big Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Check out the Love The Podcast Link and subscribe to the show.

       This is episode 743 of the School of Podcasting which is part of the Power of Podcasting Network.

       ]]>05274cee-005d-4b3d-a1ba-5eb679ad7a37Mon, 05 Oct 2020 04:10:00 -040036:14falsefull743743Six Strategies To Make Your Podcast InterestingIf you want to hold someone's attention you first need to know who they are and what they need. Then we hear that people's attention span keeps getting smaller. Is it? Today I look into attention spans, and what makes things interesting.

       I asked my audience what thought made things interesting. Thanks to everyone who contributed including:

       Craig From http://www.inglespodcast.com/

       Thomas from www.novelmarketing.com

       Harris from Wild Talk (XFL Podcast)

       Orlando from www.hablandodetecnologia.com/

       Carey from Podcastification

       Andres from Colmillo Roquero

       Brandon from Florida Focus Podcast

       Bill from the Stroke Cast

       Kim from the Pharmacist's Voice

       Sean Whaley from Tourpreneur, Spybrary and Radio GDR

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/742

       Conclusion

       It's not that attention spans are getting smaller (they are not) but more our ability to know what we want and identify when we are NOT going to get it has grown. Know your audience, and give them what you want. Be your honest, transparent, vulnerable self to hold their attention. Use tools like your voice, your pacing, to grab their attention. Never stop your passion from coming out. Let people hear your passion.

       Keep in mind you are somewhat doomed. If you stay 100% consistent, your audience may get bored. If you branch out and try new things, you may upset those who want the show to never change. I know... so be ready to embrace that no matter what you do - some people will leave.

       Include any of these six to be more interesting:

       • Tone of voice
       • Pacing
       • Passion
       • Stories
       • Autonomy
       • Vulnerability
       
       Start Your Podcast Today - Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join today you can immediately start taking the online courses and:

       • Enjoy step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds.
       
       

       Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Tyler Perry Episode on the School of Podcasting

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Dave's Patreon Page

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Discounted "Teacher's Pet" Podcast Consulting

       ]]>If you want to hold someone's attention you first need to know who they are and what they need. Then we hear that people's attention span keeps getting smaller. Is it? Today I look into attention spans, and what makes things interesting.

       I asked my audience what thought made things interesting. Thanks to everyone who contributed including:

       Craig From http://www.inglespodcast.com/

       Thomas from www.novelmarketing.com

       Harris from Wild Talk (XFL Podcast)

       Orlando from www.hablandodetecnologia.com/

       Carey from Podcastification

       Andres from Colmillo Roquero

       Brandon from Florida Focus Podcast

       Bill from the Stroke Cast

       Kim from the Pharmacist's Voice

       Sean Whaley from Tourpreneur, Spybrary and Radio GDR

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/742

       Conclusion

       It's not that attention spans are getting smaller (they are not) but more our ability to know what we want and identify when we are NOT going to get it has grown. Know your audience, and give them what you want. Be your honest, transparent, vulnerable self to hold their attention. Use tools like your voice, your pacing, to grab their attention. Never stop your passion from coming out. Let people hear your passion.

       Keep in mind you are somewhat doomed. If you stay 100% consistent, your audience may get bored. If you branch out and try new things, you may upset those who want the show to never change. I know... so be ready to embrace that no matter what you do - some people will leave.

       Include any of these six to be more interesting:

       • Tone of voice
       • Pacing
       • Passion
       • Stories
       • Autonomy
       • Vulnerability
       
       Start Your Podcast Today - Join the School of Podcasting

       When you join today you can immediately start taking the online courses and:

       • Enjoy step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching
       • Private Facebook group filled with other brilliant podcasting minds.
       
       

       Join worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Tyler Perry Episode on the School of Podcasting

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Podcast Review Show

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Dave's Patreon Page

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Discounted "Teacher's Pet" Podcast Consulting

       ]]>92519218-ff18-4012-8651-ba21c525789fMon, 28 Sep 2020 05:14:18 -040056:54falsefull742742How Podcasting Boosts Elizabeth Benton's  Seven Figure Business -741Elizabeth Benton is known as a health and nutrition guru, but to me, she is more of a "mindset guru." She is someone who has dug herself out of being $130,000 in debt, and has lost (and kept off )150 lbs. My audience from the Logical Weight Loss podcast told me I HAD to read her book, Chasing Cupcakes (get it for free on Audible), and once I finished her book, I checked out her Primal Potential podcast and downloaded all of her episodes. I was thrilled when she agreed to come on the show and explain how podcasting has boosted her business.
       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting

       Get access to step by step tutorials, a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and live group coaching and access to me. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Join Today

        

       Topics With Elizabeth Benton

       7:16 How Long Did You Run Your Business Without a Podcast? 8:31 Did you hesitate to start your podcast? 9:11 People have STONG Feelings about Eating Healthy 11:24 How has your podcast impacted your business? 12:53 Because of her podcast ______. 14:01 Have you interviewed your clients on your podcast? 14:32 How do you keep going? 16:29 Favorite Piece of Feedback 17:36 Elizabeth shares about expectations in relationships 20:43 Advice for a new podcaster 22:20 You attract people who are like you.

       My Favorite Takeaways
       • I want to be challenged because in that I learn.
       • If you don't want to roll an ankle don't play basketball if you don't want people to disagree with you Don't ever say anything out in public.
       • The advantage over email is people can listen to episode four. They can't read your fourth email. 
       • If you're having fun, stay in the game. Stay consistent.
       • Don't just do podcasting because podcasting is hot. It's only hot if you're really good at it.
       
       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on The Brave Files  podcast with Heather Vickery talking about some of my biggest fears and how I overcome them. The show features people living courageously.

       I also appeared on the Business of Podcasting show with Charley Valher. We talked about taking steps to make sure your podcast connects with your audience. Without a connection, you won't be able to monetize your show.

       Profit From Your Podcast Pre-Order

       30:29  Dave's book "Profit from your podcast" is being released 9/28. You can pre-order today. The book contains oroven strategies to turn listeners into a livelihood.

       I Need Your Thoughts in Interesting

       31:48 Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/queston

        

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Elizabeth Benton on the Logical Weight Loss Podcast

       Elizabeth Benton's Book "Chasing Cupcakes" on Amazon and Audible

       Elizabeth Benton's website Primal Potential and Podcast

       Primal Potential Episode on Expectations

       Question of the Month

       Start Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Amazon Music adds Podcasting on YouTube

       Got podcast questions? Schedule a Coaching Session Today

       Just want to support the show? Consider becoming a Patron.

       ]]>Elizabeth Benton is known as a health and nutrition guru, but to me, she is more of a "mindset guru." She is someone who has dug herself out of being $130,000 in debt, and has lost (and kept off )150 lbs. My audience from the Logical Weight Loss podcast told me I HAD to read her book, Chasing Cupcakes (get it for free on Audible), and once I finished her book, I checked out her Primal Potential podcast and downloaded all of her episodes. I was thrilled when she agreed to come on the show and explain how podcasting has boosted her business.
       SPONSOR: School of Podcasting

       Get access to step by step tutorials, a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds, and live group coaching and access to me. Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee. 

       Join Today

        

       Topics With Elizabeth Benton

       7:16 How Long Did You Run Your Business Without a Podcast? 8:31 Did you hesitate to start your podcast? 9:11 People have STONG Feelings about Eating Healthy 11:24 How has your podcast impacted your business? 12:53 Because of her podcast ______. 14:01 Have you interviewed your clients on your podcast? 14:32 How do you keep going? 16:29 Favorite Piece of Feedback 17:36 Elizabeth shares about expectations in relationships 20:43 Advice for a new podcaster 22:20 You attract people who are like you.

       My Favorite Takeaways
       • I want to be challenged because in that I learn.
       • If you don't want to roll an ankle don't play basketball if you don't want people to disagree with you Don't ever say anything out in public.
       • The advantage over email is people can listen to episode four. They can't read your fourth email. 
       • If you're having fun, stay in the game. Stay consistent.
       • Don't just do podcasting because podcasting is hot. It's only hot if you're really good at it.
       
       Podcast Rewind

       I appeared on The Brave Files  podcast with Heather Vickery talking about some of my biggest fears and how I overcome them. The show features people living courageously.

       I also appeared on the Business of Podcasting show with Charley Valher. We talked about taking steps to make sure your podcast connects with your audience. Without a connection, you won't be able to monetize your show.

       Profit From Your Podcast Pre-Order

       30:29  Dave's book "Profit from your podcast" is being released 9/28. You can pre-order today. The book contains oroven strategies to turn listeners into a livelihood.

       I Need Your Thoughts in Interesting

       31:48 Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/queston

        

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Elizabeth Benton on the Logical Weight Loss Podcast

       Elizabeth Benton's Book "Chasing Cupcakes" on Amazon and Audible

       Elizabeth Benton's website Primal Potential and Podcast

       Primal Potential Episode on Expectations

       Question of the Month

       Start Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Amazon Music adds Podcasting on YouTube

       Got podcast questions? Schedule a Coaching Session Today

       Just want to support the show? Consider becoming a Patron.

       ]]>a575b796-2678-494f-98b5-d7f019420511Mon, 21 Sep 2020 04:00:00 -040035:32falsefull741741How Charley Valher Changed His Podcast from a Money Taker to a Money MakerCharley Valher started a podcast and was "swinging for the fences" and after hiring a team, and putting 50,000 into a marketing budget he realized after a year that the show just wasn't producing the results he needed. Today he shares the mistakes he made, and how he came back to podcasting with new strategies and insights that resulted in his podcast (the business of podcasting) being the number one way her is driving customers to his business at Valher Media. 
       Topics Include:

       02:41 Charlie's Services

       05:14 Charlies Hired a Team for His First Podcast

       07:59 What Was Missing?

       10:44 How did you come up with the new formula?

       12:19 Position Yourself as the Expert

       14:45 Can You Niche Down Too Far?

       15:54 Three Ingredients of a Niche

       16:40 Charlie's Original Call to Action

       18:07 Having the Right Topics

       22:11 Was it Hard To Try Again?

       25:13 How Long Until You Saw Results?

       26:57 How do you pick topics?

       29:32 Interviewing Potential Clients

       33:22 Did You Make Any Technology Mistakes

       34:59 Most Memorable Feedback

       39:55 What's Working Now?

       40:41 How Do You Grow Your Podcast?

       43:04 Insights Into Charlie's Prices

       Great Takeaways

       Position yourself as an expert 

       I want to talk to my audience so they feel like I've been watching them.

       When creating a niche, consider the demographic, the service/industry, and if this is for Beginners/Intermediates/Experts

       His audience is now quoting the podcast in his approval form. They say things like, "This podcast was made for me." 

       The 5o,00 budget did not result in success. You can't buy an audience if your content doesn't connect.

       Question of the Month DeadLine 9/25

       Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Submit your answer at schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       The Business of Podcasting Show 

       Valher Media

       Rodecaster Pro and Zoom Podtrack P4

       Audio Technica ATR2100 USB Microphone.

       Join the School of Podcasting

        

       ]]>Charley Valher started a podcast and was "swinging for the fences" and after hiring a team, and putting 50,000 into a marketing budget he realized after a year that the show just wasn't producing the results he needed. Today he shares the mistakes he made, and how he came back to podcasting with new strategies and insights that resulted in his podcast (the business of podcasting) being the number one way her is driving customers to his business at Valher Media. 
       Topics Include:

       02:41 Charlie's Services

       05:14 Charlies Hired a Team for His First Podcast

       07:59 What Was Missing?

       10:44 How did you come up with the new formula?

       12:19 Position Yourself as the Expert

       14:45 Can You Niche Down Too Far?

       15:54 Three Ingredients of a Niche

       16:40 Charlie's Original Call to Action

       18:07 Having the Right Topics

       22:11 Was it Hard To Try Again?

       25:13 How Long Until You Saw Results?

       26:57 How do you pick topics?

       29:32 Interviewing Potential Clients

       33:22 Did You Make Any Technology Mistakes

       34:59 Most Memorable Feedback

       39:55 What's Working Now?

       40:41 How Do You Grow Your Podcast?

       43:04 Insights Into Charlie's Prices

       Great Takeaways

       Position yourself as an expert 

       I want to talk to my audience so they feel like I've been watching them.

       When creating a niche, consider the demographic, the service/industry, and if this is for Beginners/Intermediates/Experts

       His audience is now quoting the podcast in his approval form. They say things like, "This podcast was made for me." 

       The 5o,00 budget did not result in success. You can't buy an audience if your content doesn't connect.

       Question of the Month DeadLine 9/25

       Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind? If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to “riff” on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. Submit your answer at schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       The Business of Podcasting Show 

       Valher Media

       Rodecaster Pro and Zoom Podtrack P4

       Audio Technica ATR2100 USB Microphone.

       Join the School of Podcasting

        

       ]]>f2a0979c-daa8-445e-aff5-6d67c1ca9de8Mon, 14 Sep 2020 04:19:46 -040051:40falsefull740740Super Serve Your Niche - Lessons from Tyler PerryAs I continue (as a middle-aged white dude) to attempt to learn more about Black History, Culture, and issues, a friend of mine suggested I watch the TV show Black AF on Netflix as there is always a hidden history lesson.   (a writer and producer)  plays a television writer and producer (named Kenya Berris). In one episode the main character (who is a movie and television creator) is worried about giving feedback to a fellow black creator, and also is worried about what others might think about his films and content.

       In sone scene, Kenya meets Tyler Perry who might know from his movies feature Madea. This is a character played by Perry. She is a tough, elderly African-American woman. She 6'2" and 365 lbs.

       Diary of a Mad Black Woman—2005 Madea's Family Reunion—2006 Meet the Browns (cameo)—2008 Madea Goes to Jail—2009 I Can Do Bad All by Myself—2009 Madea's Big Happy Family—2011 Madea's Witness Protection—2012 A Madea Christmas—2013 Boo! A Madea Halloween—2016 Boo 2! A Madea Halloween—2017 A Madea Family Funeral—2019

       Transcript from Black AF Featuring Tyler Perry

       In the episode, Kenya asks about the website Rotten Tomatoes.

       ----

       Kenya Barris: Go to Rotten Tomatoes.

       Tyler Perry: But let me just tell you about the tomatoes. I don't fuck with 'em.

       Kenya Barris: No tomatoes?

       Tyler Perry: I don't give a damn about a rotten or a fresh none of that means shit to me.

       Kenya Barris: That's amazing. What about critics?

       Tyler Perry: I don't give a fuck

       Kenya Barris: I guess that's amazing.

       Tyler Perry: Can I just tell you why?

       Listen, man, I know that I'm telling stories that my folks want to see. I'm talking from our point of view. We're speaking a language. We're speaking a shorthand that we get, and that white people don't necessarily get. Nina Simone said this and I never forgot that she said, "You will use up everything you got trying to give everybody what they want."

       You got to focus man you know what I do? I super serve my niche. We speak like we're talking we know each other - we get it. There's a lot of times I see shit that wins Oscars and I be like, what is this shit? I walked out halfway through it. I don't get it.  I feel like they feel the same way about my work. They don't get it, which is all cool.

       My mother born in Jim Crow South In Louisiana, right down the street from Mississippi where Emmett Till was murdered. She told me the value of being who I am of my blackness. She said, "Don't you ever let anybody tell you who you are, you know who you are, you know where you come from." I watched her stories, I watched her struggles and that's what I'm telling.

       I'm telling the stories that I come from, and that's why they're winning. Because people are recognizing themselves in these stories, no matter how crass that people think they are, no matter what the critics are saying, Oh, I don't get this shit. I don't understand what is. I don't give a fuck because I'm talking to us. That's why millions of people are watching my shows every week. That's why people keep showing up and sending the movies to number one. I'm talking to us connecting with us. You know, I'm saying?

       Let me tell you what you're doing, you're trying to get them to approve you. That's when I don't get why niggas run around trying to get white folks, "Please tell me I'm special. Oh, give me your Oscar. Oh, let me know I'm all of these things that you want me.."

       Fuck that. Tell your story. Live in your own life in your own culture. Tell your own experience. Ain't nobody gonna tell you how to be you. You hear what I'm saying?

       Kenya Barris: I do man. I really fucking do.

       Tyler Perry: Good.

       ----

       Now keep in mind that this is Kenya Berris playing himself and the same for Tyler Perry, but the more I got into researching Tyler Perry the move I loved his message.

       It's Not How You Start - It's How you Finish

       Tyler grew up in Louisiana with his mother and an alcoholic father who would beat both he and his mother.

       His Success Didn't Come Overnight

       Tyler started with plays. His first play cost $12,000 to put on. He expected to get 1200 people, and instead he got 30.

       It Starts With Knowing Your Audience

       Tyler Perry knows white critics are not going to get his movies. He doesn't care because he got feedback from someone who saw the movie "Diary of a Mad Black Woman" and she said, "In two hours, you got my sister to do what we've been trying to do for twelve years - leave an abusive relationship." (source)

       His Attitude on Feedback

       In his book Higher is Waiting, he states, "What's more, you need some naysayers in your life. You need people to challenge your point of view. Your job is to look for the truth in their negativity. For instance, sometimes I'll get a bad review. And my first defensive reaction is to think it's completely off the mark. Once I give myself a moment and allow my initial reaction to be released, I'll read it again to see if there's anything I can learn from the review. If it's pure vitriol, well, I let it go. But if there's some truth, even a kernel, I'll use what's written to be better at what I do. I can take constructive criticism."

       It Took Seven Years to Start to Catch On

       Tyler mentions how each year he would work different jobs, saving his money so he could put his play I Know I've Been Changed on in a theater. Upon the seventh year, he started to get feedback from attendees saying how much they enjoyed the play. It would go on tour from 1998-2000.

       He Went To Where His Audience Was

       Perry continued to create new stage productions, touring with them on the so-called "Chitlin' Circuit" (now also known as the "urban theater circuit") and developing a large, devoted following among African-American audiences. In 2005, Forbes reported that he had sold "more than $100 million in tickets, $30 million in videos of his shows and an estimated $20 million in merchandise", and "the 300 live shows he produces each year are attended by an average of 35,000 people a week."

       He is Brave and Shares His Faith

       If you interview Tyler Perry he will say his success is due to one thing. The grace of God. He knows saying "Jesus" is not a popular thing to do in mainstream media. But it's not to his audience. In a survey in 2007 by the Pew Research Center's Forum on Religion & Public Life, the African-American population was found to be more religious than the U.S. population as a whole, with 87% of its members being affiliated with a religion, and 79% of them saying that "religion is very important in their life", in contrast to 83% and 56% of the whole US. population, most of which is Christian, with 83% of black Americans identifying as Christian, including 45% who identify as baptist.

       He Owns All of His Material

       While many podcasters are looking to be on a big network, Tyler Perry went direct. He rented theaters for his plays. He wrote, acted, and directed his content. Why? His father was a carpenter and he would see his father build a house and get paid $8,000 while to owner/seller of the house got $80,000. Perry's films are co-produced and distributed by Lions Gate Entertainment; he retains full copyright ownership under the corporate name Tyler Perry Films, and places his name in front of all titles. Perry's movies have seen very limited release outside North America, but in May 2010, Lionsgate announced plans to begin releasing his films in the United Kingdom.

       He Gives Back to His Community

       His dream was to own his own studio. He bought land in Atlanta Georgia that was previously a confederate fort that made plans to keep 3.9 million negros enslaved, and he put built it there so other black children could see "that the land is now owned by one negro." (source)

       Mentioned in This Episode

       www.reviewsandrandomness.com

       Question of the Month

       Indie Pod Con

       Tyler Perry Spring Tuskegee Commencement Speech

       Tyler Perry Gives Powerful Speech Of Motivation As He Accepts Ultimate Icon Award | BET Awards 2019

       Avoid Overwhelm - Start Your Podcast Today

       Get access to the private Facebook group, the step by step tutorials, and access to live group coaching, and me!

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>As I continue (as a middle-aged white dude) to attempt to learn more about Black History, Culture, and issues, a friend of mine suggested I watch the TV show Black AF on Netflix as there is always a hidden history lesson.   (a writer and producer)  plays a television writer and producer (named Kenya Berris). In one episode the main character (who is a movie and television creator) is worried about giving feedback to a fellow black creator, and also is worried about what others might think about his films and content.

       In sone scene, Kenya meets Tyler Perry who might know from his movies feature Madea. This is a character played by Perry. She is a tough, elderly African-American woman. She 6'2" and 365 lbs.

       Diary of a Mad Black Woman—2005 Madea's Family Reunion—2006 Meet the Browns (cameo)—2008 Madea Goes to Jail—2009 I Can Do Bad All by Myself—2009 Madea's Big Happy Family—2011 Madea's Witness Protection—2012 A Madea Christmas—2013 Boo! A Madea Halloween—2016 Boo 2! A Madea Halloween—2017 A Madea Family Funeral—2019

       Transcript from Black AF Featuring Tyler Perry

       In the episode, Kenya asks about the website Rotten Tomatoes.

       ----

       Kenya Barris: Go to Rotten Tomatoes.

       Tyler Perry: But let me just tell you about the tomatoes. I don't fuck with 'em.

       Kenya Barris: No tomatoes?

       Tyler Perry: I don't give a damn about a rotten or a fresh none of that means shit to me.

       Kenya Barris: That's amazing. What about critics?

       Tyler Perry: I don't give a fuck

       Kenya Barris: I guess that's amazing.

       Tyler Perry: Can I just tell you why?

       Listen, man, I know that I'm telling stories that my folks want to see. I'm talking from our point of view. We're speaking a language. We're speaking a shorthand that we get, and that white people don't necessarily get. Nina Simone said this and I never forgot that she said, "You will use up everything you got trying to give everybody what they want."

       You got to focus man you know what I do? I super serve my niche. We speak like we're talking we know each other - we get it. There's a lot of times I see shit that wins Oscars and I be like, what is this shit? I walked out halfway through it. I don't get it.  I feel like they feel the same way about my work. They don't get it, which is all cool.

       My mother born in Jim Crow South In Louisiana, right down the street from Mississippi where Emmett Till was murdered. She told me the value of being who I am of my blackness. She said, "Don't you ever let anybody tell you who you are, you know who you are, you know where you come from." I watched her stories, I watched her struggles and that's what I'm telling.

       I'm telling the stories that I come from, and that's why they're winning. Because people are recognizing themselves in these stories, no matter how crass that people think they are, no matter what the critics are saying, Oh, I don't get this shit. I don't understand what is. I don't give a fuck because I'm talking to us. That's why millions of people are watching my shows every week. That's why people keep showing up and sending the movies to number one. I'm talking to us connecting with us. You know, I'm saying?

       Let me tell you what you're doing, you're trying to get them to approve you. That's when I don't get why niggas run around trying to get white folks, "Please tell me I'm special. Oh, give me your Oscar. Oh, let me know I'm all of these things that you want me.."

       Fuck that. Tell your story. Live in your own life in your own culture. Tell your own experience. Ain't nobody gonna tell you how to be you. You hear what I'm saying?

       Kenya Barris: I do man. I really fucking do.

       Tyler Perry: Good.

       ----

       Now keep in mind that this is Kenya Berris playing himself and the same for Tyler Perry, but the more I got into researching Tyler Perry the move I loved his message.

       It's Not How You Start - It's How you Finish

       Tyler grew up in Louisiana with his mother and an alcoholic father who would beat both he and his mother.

       His Success Didn't Come Overnight

       Tyler started with plays. His first play cost $12,000 to put on. He expected to get 1200 people, and instead he got 30.

       It Starts With Knowing Your Audience

       Tyler Perry knows white critics are not going to get his movies. He doesn't care because he got feedback from someone who saw the movie "Diary of a Mad Black Woman" and she said, "In two hours, you got my sister to do what we've been trying to do for twelve years - leave an abusive relationship." (source)

       His Attitude on Feedback

       In his book Higher is Waiting, he states, "What's more, you need some naysayers in your life. You need people to challenge your point of view. Your job is to look for the truth in their negativity. For instance, sometimes I'll get a bad review. And my first defensive reaction is to think it's completely off the mark. Once I give myself a moment and allow my initial reaction to be released, I'll read it again to see if there's anything I can learn from the review. If it's pure vitriol, well, I let it go. But if there's some truth, even a kernel, I'll use what's written to be better at what I do. I can take constructive criticism."

       It Took Seven Years to Start to Catch On

       Tyler mentions how each year he would work different jobs, saving his money so he could put his play I Know I've Been Changed on in a theater. Upon the seventh year, he started to get feedback from attendees saying how much they enjoyed the play. It would go on tour from 1998-2000.

       He Went To Where His Audience Was

       Perry continued to create new stage productions, touring with them on the so-called "Chitlin' Circuit" (now also known as the "urban theater circuit") and developing a large, devoted following among African-American audiences. In 2005, Forbes reported that he had sold "more than $100 million in tickets, $30 million in videos of his shows and an estimated $20 million in merchandise", and "the 300 live shows he produces each year are attended by an average of 35,000 people a week."

       He is Brave and Shares His Faith

       If you interview Tyler Perry he will say his success is due to one thing. The grace of God. He knows saying "Jesus" is not a popular thing to do in mainstream media. But it's not to his audience. In a survey in 2007 by the Pew Research Center's Forum on Religion & Public Life, the African-American population was found to be more religious than the U.S. population as a whole, with 87% of its members being affiliated with a religion, and 79% of them saying that "religion is very important in their life", in contrast to 83% and 56% of the whole US. population, most of which is Christian, with 83% of black Americans identifying as Christian, including 45% who identify as baptist.

       He Owns All of His Material

       While many podcasters are looking to be on a big network, Tyler Perry went direct. He rented theaters for his plays. He wrote, acted, and directed his content. Why? His father was a carpenter and he would see his father build a house and get paid $8,000 while to owner/seller of the house got $80,000. Perry's films are co-produced and distributed by Lions Gate Entertainment; he retains full copyright ownership under the corporate name Tyler Perry Films, and places his name in front of all titles. Perry's movies have seen very limited release outside North America, but in May 2010, Lionsgate announced plans to begin releasing his films in the United Kingdom.

       He Gives Back to His Community

       His dream was to own his own studio. He bought land in Atlanta Georgia that was previously a confederate fort that made plans to keep 3.9 million negros enslaved, and he put built it there so other black children could see "that the land is now owned by one negro." (source)

       Mentioned in This Episode

       www.reviewsandrandomness.com

       Question of the Month

       Indie Pod Con

       Tyler Perry Spring Tuskegee Commencement Speech

       Tyler Perry Gives Powerful Speech Of Motivation As He Accepts Ultimate Icon Award | BET Awards 2019

       Avoid Overwhelm - Start Your Podcast Today

       Get access to the private Facebook group, the step by step tutorials, and access to live group coaching, and me!

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>635fd005-867b-4eb1-96ce-c51833b6dc3eMon, 07 Sep 2020 04:33:32 -040035:23falsefull739739How To Measure Your Podcast Audience EngagementIt's to know what is working for your audience. Sure you can look at your downloads but there are other ways to look at engagement. Today in episode 738 I dig deeper.
       Website Traffic

       How many website visitors are you getting? You may be surprised that your top ten pages on your website are the same as the top ten episodes of your podcast? Why, you might have more keywords in your notes that attract google. People may be linking to your episode which can boost "Google Juice" (your rankings).

       WHAT ABOUT TRANSCRIPTS?

       I was listening to The Business of Podcasting a great podcast with Charlie Valher from Valher media (Charlie will be on this show in the future), and he was interview Stephan Spencer who is one THE SEO people on the planet. While we often say, "This person wrote the book on..." Stephen actually wrote the book on SEO (Search Engine Optimization) The Art of SEO. It's 994 pages.

       Here is what he had to say about transcripts:

       But the key thing here is you're creating something in an audio format and although Google is getting better at taking that audio and doing something amazing with it, like turning that into searchable content on its own, you can't just rely on that. A lot of people don't have time to listen to podcasts and they like to just scan through articles, but nobody wants to read a transcript. Who's gonna get excited about reading a transcript with a bunch of the back and forth banter and not cutting to the chase? Having an article made out of the transcript, however, is a very powerful strategy and if you have an hour-long show or a half-hour-long show, that's a lot of textual content. -Stephen Spencer the Business of Podcasting show.

       Transcribed by https://otter.ai

       Google Analytics

       Google Analytics is a great free tool that enables you to pull insights about your website visitors. The best part is its free. It is very robust. There are ways you can flatten the learning curve with Google Analytics. One is to take the free course(s) offered by Google. One of my favorite tools that takes that data and creates easy to understand reports is Monster Insights.

       Check out the video on Monster Insights

       Tracking Clicks

       In WordPress, many people use a plugin that is free/premium called Pretty Links. There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. Thirsty affiliates is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year).

       If you want something even more powerful (especially for affiliate links) check out Lasso which can even check the stock at Amazon for your links, and much more. It starts at $19/month.

       URL Shortener Pro is only $19.

       The advantage of these plugins is they enable you to reinforce your brand's website while making an easy to remember. For example, www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe will take you to my subscription page. If someone asks me where to subscribe, I have one link with all the apps. If someone asks about the Podpage service, they can go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podpage. For my Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach show I use www.askthepodcastcoach.com/awesome

       What if you don't use WordPress? How Do You Track Clicks?

       bit.ly

       Many people use bit.ly which I did, but I found something that really changed my opinion of bit.ly. While you can setup a bit.ly link to point at a long URL that makes it easier to remember if later you want to change that link - you can't. This is why I started researching this topic. Then on August 13th, they added the feature to update a link see announcement. However, you have to pay for this feature ($35/month).

       Rebrandly

       One company called Rebrandly was started based on the pain point of "I can't change my destination URL in Bitly." With Rebrandly you can have up to 500 links and have up to 5000 clicks per month for free. You can have up to 5 custom domains. If you're looking for a free tool to track clicks this seems to be the tool. They have 550,000 happy customers.

       If You Want to Do More Track Clicks (Marketing?)

       Click.org

       Click.org allows you to do A/B Split testing, and you can have one link for people in one part of the world, and another link used for others in a different part. For marketing people it adds the tracking pixel. So now when you send someone to a website that is not yours, you can add a pixel to retarget them. This is much more of a marketing tool and may be overkill for those who want to just have a link to give to their audience.

       Pixle.me

       Pixle.me is all about retargeting. It is the primary feature you see when you go to their website. For example, you could send people to a post on Medium and then they would see your Facebook ads when they go about the Internet. They have a tool where you can send someone to an Amazon site (for example) and make YOUR email pop up box appear. While they have some fun marketing tools if you want to change the destination URL (the feature that launched this investigation) it will cost you $24 a month. I did like some of their tools, and when it comes to marketing and tracking (which somewhat keeps your brand in front of your audience) it seemed to be a clear winner.

       What You Can Learn?

       Here is a list of things you might want to track:

       A link in your email signature

       Links in your emails

       Links in your show notes.

       Your Instagram URL (instead of using some third-party service)

       Links to your subscribe buttons

       A general idea of how engaged your audience is with your content.

       Check How Far People Are Listening To Your Episode

       What do Apple, Google, Spotify, and Stitcher all have in common? They all provide extra stats that show you how far your audience is listening. Also, if you are using Anchor and allowed them to submit your show to directories "for you" you have given away this option (they don't tell you that when they offer to do you a "favor"). Here is a video from Apple

       Advertiser Practice Run

       Last week I talked about the Zoom Podtrack P4, and 84 people clicked on it (11% of my audience at the time), but nobody purchased it. As many people feel that 3-5% click rate is "great" this seems to be a very interesting product for my audience. My feeling is due to it not being available yet (and only available for pre-order) this may mess up my affiliate stats.

       By using an affiliate link, it has built-in click tracking and you can see how many units were sold. Amazon Associates is the largest affiliate program. The best thing is to find a product you like, and then see if the word "affiliates" or "partners" is at the bottom of their website. Sign up and promote it. As its a favorite product of yours, your sales pitch will be more heartfelt.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Start your podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Episode

       Zoom Podtrack P4

       Pretty Links WordPress Plugin

       Thirsty affiliates WordPress Plugin

       Lasso  WordPress Plugin (great for Affiliate marketing)

       It's to know what is working for your audience. Sure you can look at your downloads but there are other ways to look at engagement. Today in episode 738 I dig deeper.

       Website Traffic

       How many website visitors are you getting? You may be surprised that your top ten pages on your website are the same as the top ten episodes of your podcast? Why, you might have more keywords in your notes that attract google. People may be linking to your episode which can boost "Google Juice" (your rankings).

       WHAT ABOUT TRANSCRIPTS?

       I was listening to The Business of Podcasting a great podcast with Charlie Valher from Valher media (Charlie will be on this show in the future), and he was interview Stephan Spencer who is one THE SEO people on the planet. While we often say, "This person wrote the book on..." Stephen actually wrote the book on SEO (Search Engine Optimization) The Art of SEO. It's 994 pages.

       Here is what he had to say about transcripts:

       But the key thing here is you're creating something in an audio format and although Google is getting better at taking that audio and doing something amazing with it, like turning that into searchable content on its own, you can't just rely on that. A lot of people don't have time to listen to podcasts and they like to just scan through articles, but nobody wants to read a transcript. Who's gonna get excited about reading a transcript with a bunch of the back and forth banter and not cutting to the chase? Having an article made out of the transcript, however, is a very powerful strategy and if you have an hour-long show or a half-hour-long show, that's a lot of textual content. -Stephen Spencer the Business of Podcasting show.

       Transcribed by https://otter.ai

       Google Analytics

       Google Analytics is a great free tool that enables you to pull insights about your website visitors. The best part is its free. It is very robust. There are ways you can flatten the learning curve with Google Analytics. One is to take the free course(s) offered by Google. One of my favorite tools that takes that data and creates easy to understand reports is Monster Insights.

       Check out the video on Monster Insights

       Tracking Clicks

       In WordPress, many people use a plugin that is free/premium called Pretty Links. There is a free version and the premium version starts at $49/year. It's been downloaded over 2.5 million times. Thirsty affiliates is a very similar plugin for about the same price ($49/year).

       If you want something even more powerful (especially for affiliate links) check out Lasso which can even check the stock at Amazon for your links, and much more. It starts at $19/month.

       URL Shortener Pro is only $19.

       The advantage of these plugins is they enable you to reinforce your brand's website while making an easy to remember. For example, www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe will take you to my subscription page. If someone asks me where to subscribe, I have one link with all the apps. If someone asks about the Podpage service, they can go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podpage. For my Patreon account that I promote on the Ask the Podcast Coach show I use www.askthepodcastcoach.com/awesome

       What if you don't use WordPress? How Do You Track Clicks?

       bit.ly

       Many people use bit.ly which I did, but I found something that really changed my opinion of bit.ly. While you can setup a bit.ly link to point at a long URL that makes it easier to remember if later you want to change that link - you can't. This is why I started researching this topic. Then on August 13th, they added the feature to update a link see announcement. However, you have to pay for this feature ($35/month).

       Rebrandly

       One company called Rebrandly was started based on the pain point of "I can't change my destination URL in Bitly." With Rebrandly you can have up to 500 links and have up to 5000 clicks per month for free. You can have up to 5 custom domains. If you're looking for a free tool to track clicks this seems to be the tool. They have 550,000 happy customers.

       If You Want to Do More Track Clicks (Marketing?)

       Click.org

       Click.org allows you to do A/B Split testing, and you can have one link for people in one part of the world, and another link used for others in a different part. For marketing people it adds the tracking pixel. So now when you send someone to a website that is not yours, you can add a pixel to retarget them. This is much more of a marketing tool and may be overkill for those who want to just have a link to give to their audience.

       Pixle.me

       Pixle.me is all about retargeting. It is the primary feature you see when you go to their website. For example, you could send people to a post on Medium and then they would see your Facebook ads when they go about the Internet. They have a tool where you can send someone to an Amazon site (for example) and make YOUR email pop up box appear. While they have some fun marketing tools if you want to change the destination URL (the feature that launched this investigation) it will cost you $24 a month. I did like some of their tools, and when it comes to marketing and tracking (which somewhat keeps your brand in front of your audience) it seemed to be a clear winner.

       What You Can Learn?

       Here is a list of things you might want to track:

       A link in your email signature

       Links in your emails

       Links in your show notes.

       Your Instagram URL (instead of using some third-party service)

       Links to your subscribe buttons

       A general idea of how engaged your audience is with your content.

       Check How Far People Are Listening To Your Episode

       What do Apple, Google, Spotify, and Stitcher all have in common? They all provide extra stats that show you how far your audience is listening. Also, if you are using Anchor and allowed them to submit your show to directories "for you" you have given away this option (they don't tell you that when they offer to do you a "favor"). Here is a video from Apple

       Advertiser Practice Run

       Last week I talked about the Zoom Podtrack P4, and 84 people clicked on it (11% of my audience at the time), but nobody purchased it. As many people feel that 3-5% click rate is "great" this seems to be a very interesting product for my audience. My feeling is due to it not being available yet (and only available for pre-order) this may mess up my affiliate stats.

       By using an affiliate link, it has built-in click tracking and you can see how many units were sold. Amazon Associates is the largest affiliate program. The best thing is to find a product you like, and then see if the word "affiliates" or "partners" is at the bottom of their website. Sign up and promote it. As its a favorite product of yours, your sales pitch will be more heartfelt.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Start your podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Episode

       Zoom Podtrack P4

       Pretty Links WordPress Plugin

       Thirsty affiliates WordPress Plugin

       Lasso  WordPress Plugin (great for Affiliate marketing)

       Easy AZON Plugin

       Click.org

       Pixle.me

       rebrandly.com

       bitly.com

       Need Help With Your Podcast?

       I'd love to help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast.

       Need some feedback on your show? Get your show audited on the Podcast Review Show

       Looking for podcast Mentoring? Let's setup a coaching call

       ]]>1099e54a-3a34-4209-a012-b814f4d70284Mon, 31 Aug 2020 04:00:00 -040047:20falsefull738738The Zoom Podtrack P4 Portable Podcast RecorderThe Zoom Podtrack P4 is coming out next month (from what I hear) and this appears to be a game-changer for those podcasting on a budget. Here are some of the features of the Zoom Podtrack P4:

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Podcast Recorder Four mic inputs with XLR connectors Four headphone outputs with individual volume control Gain control knobs and mute buttons for each input Phantom power for all XLR inputs Automatically prevent feedback from call audio using the Mix-Minus function Easily connect your phone using the TRRS connection Trigger sound effects using four assignable Sound Pads with 11preset sounds All input sources can be recorded on separate tracks 16-bit /44.1kHz audio WAV Records directly to SD, SDHC and SDXC cards up to 512 GB 2-input, 2-output USB audio interface Class-compliant mode for iOS compatibility Up to four hours of use with just two AA batteries or a USB power supply Can be powered via 2 AA Batteries Can be powered via USB or Zoom AD-17 AC Adapter

       Comparing the Podtrack P4 to the Rodecaster Pro

       Zoom P4 VS Rodercaster Pro

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Manual (pdf),

       Price: Zoom Podtrack P4 is $199 Rodecaster is $599

       Audio Processing: The Rodecaster has built-in APHEX audio processing and mic modeling. There is a "big bottom," an aural exciter, a compressor, and noise gate. The P4 has a low cut (to cut out unnecessary frequencies) and a limiter (to make sure you don't peak and distort). ThePodtrack P4 does have very powerful preamps that are very quiet. The Rodecaster also features a built-in ducking option so if the host is in channel 1, and someone tries to talk at the same time this feature (which can be turned on and off) will ensure the host (mic 1) is heard.

       Sound Pads: The Rodecaster has 8 pads for sound effects vs the 4 on the P4. If you're doing things live and want the ability to play sounds with a press of a button. As both the Rodecaster and the P4 have the ability to plug a phone in and you could use an app like Backpack studio which enables you to have a ton of sound pads.

       Slider Vs Knobs The Rodecaster has sliders vs the knobs on the P4

       Storage: The P4 has a SD card, the Rodecaster has a micro SD Card. On their website, the Rodecaster mentions Micro SD up to 256 Gigs. The Podtrack P4 mentions card up to 512 Gigs. Both of those sizes are huge.

       Bluetooth: The Rodecaster has built-in Blue Tooth, the P4 has an optional BTA-2 Bluetooth option ($49)

       Recording Sample Rate: The Rodecaster records in 48khz/24-bit, the P4 is 44.1khz/16 bit. While I don't feel this makes that much of a difference (as in the end your podcast is listened to in earbuds, car speakers, and portable speakers). However, if you're doing anything with video, your video editor will be happy you have the ability to record in 48khz.

       Number of Tracks: The Rodecaster can record up to 8 tracks, the P4 records up to 4 Both units provide a stereo mixdown, and in addition to the mic inputs, they provide tracks for the pads. The Rodecaster has the ability to turn off the multi-track recording.

       Recording Into Your Computer Both send a stereo mix to the computer (great for live streaming), but the Rodecaster can also send map individual tracks to channels.

       Interface The Rodecaster has a touch screen. The P4 has a simple to use menu system.

       Markers The Rodecaster has the ability to add markers (which can be very useful for editing) While other room recorders have this feature the P4 does not )

       Outputs The Rodecaster has 4 headphones out in addition to a stereo out. The Zoom P4 has four headphones out.

       Footprint:The Rodecaster is 14" X 11" the P4  4.1" X6.1.' This might be important for those with smaller desktops. The P4 is  1/4th smaller than the Rodecaster.

       For my friends across the pond the Rodecaster is 350 mm x 275 mm the Podtrack P4 is 112 mm x 155 mm

       Warranty: RodecasterPro: Limited 1-Year Warranty with 1 Additional Year upon Registration. (source BNH). Podtrack P4: Limited 1-Year Warranty (source BNH).

       If you're looking for a great sounding unit, and never need to record more than four sources, this is a great unit. Audio snobs will complain about the lack of ability to record in 48khz/24hz but 44.1/16 will be fine for something that is heard in-car speakers and earbuds. Some will complain about sliders vs knobs. The knobs help cut the footprint which gives you your desk back. If you want to achieve the tone of the rodecaster you will need to invest in some plugins. If you're on a budget and want an easy way to record separate tracks including the phone, this is worth checking out. Just don't drop it.

       Check out the Zoom Podtrack P4

       The Zoom ZDM-1 Dynamic Microphone

       I must confess that the Electrovoice RE320 has been my mic for many years. It's also close to $300. The ZDM-1 comes with a pop filter, "stand" a cable, and headphones for $120. I didn't think it was fair to compare it to the RE320 so I pulled out the Rode Podmic (another microphone designed for podcasters for around $99).

       Both microphones are very well built, and when I kid about using them as a weapon, I'm not kidding. You need a sturdy stand to hold these up. The ZDM-1 has a great mount that screws into the bottom and just seems solid. The Rode Podmic also is well built.

       The Zoom ZMD-1 has 50 Hz to 18 kHz frequency response with tight bass and smooth highs enhance vocal tone for radio, podcasting, and more

       The Rode Podmic has a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. In specs, it should pick up a bit more bass and a bit more high end.

       While neither one of these microphones sound bad, I thought I heard a little more high end and sibilance on the Zoom ZMD-1.

       The one thing that Audio Technica, Zoom, and other microphone companies need to quit doing is giving us microphone stands that are 100% completely worthless. While the TPS-4 stand that comes with the ZDM-1 is sturdier than the other worthless microphone stands, They are so short that you have to do a bizarre yoga pose to lean over to use it. Either invent a new mic stand as an accessory, or just include the clip/mount and lower the price. Nobody in their right mind is using the TPS-4 microphone stand.

       The Zoom ZHP-1 Headphones were amazingly clear. The high end was crystal clear to an almost alarming point. The somewhat self-adjusting headphones fit nice and snug and really cut out the outside world. I used other "included" headphones with other microphones and they were typically uncomfortable and had the fidelity of a record cut out of a cereal box (you have to be over 50 to get that). These had a nice sound, and I love that the cable can be disconnected at the headphones (great for those of us who are always tangled in or headphone cable.

       For $199 this a good value with a solid mic, nice pop filter, study mount and comfortable headphones to boot. Just pick up a nice boom arm (are strong desk stand as it is heavy).

       August Question of the Month: What Keeps You Going?

       This month the question was, "What has kept you going with your podcast when others have stopped?"

       Kris and Kristine from the Kris and Kristine Show

       Kris and Kristine are engaged and this is just another great way of spending time together. (everyone together  - awww....). Kristine said, " I'm big on trying to constantly strengthen our relationship. And there's a lot of research that says, for a woman, when she invests in the hobbies and the interests of her partner, then it really helps to build that bond. And so Kris could have loved going to golf or you could have had all these hobbies that take you out of the house and away from me, but instead, you choose to build and grow a hobby with me. What woman wouldn't want that from her significant other that you want to spend dedicated time with me?

       These are super nice peeps and I wish them the best when they get married in November. Check out their show at www.krisandkristine.com

       Curtis Longellow from the Rerozest Podcast

       Curtis Longfellow from the Retrozest podcast needed an outlet. He wanted to talk about all things retro (70's and 80's) and by starting a podcast he attracted other people who are just like him.

       It turns out it's really paid off. Diane Franklin, the actress who portrayed Monique Juno in the classic 80s dark comedy film Better Off Dead, granted me an interview in celebration of the 30 fifth anniversary of the...]]>The Zoom Podtrack P4 is coming out next month (from what I hear) and this appears to be a game-changer for those podcasting on a budget. Here are some of the features of the Zoom Podtrack P4:

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Podcast Recorder Four mic inputs with XLR connectors Four headphone outputs with individual volume control Gain control knobs and mute buttons for each input Phantom power for all XLR inputs Automatically prevent feedback from call audio using the Mix-Minus function Easily connect your phone using the TRRS connection Trigger sound effects using four assignable Sound Pads with 11preset sounds All input sources can be recorded on separate tracks 16-bit /44.1kHz audio WAV Records directly to SD, SDHC and SDXC cards up to 512 GB 2-input, 2-output USB audio interface Class-compliant mode for iOS compatibility Up to four hours of use with just two AA batteries or a USB power supply Can be powered via 2 AA Batteries Can be powered via USB or Zoom AD-17 AC Adapter

       Comparing the Podtrack P4 to the Rodecaster Pro

       Zoom P4 VS Rodercaster Pro

       Zoom Podtrack P4 Manual (pdf),

       Price: Zoom Podtrack P4 is $199 Rodecaster is $599

       Audio Processing: The Rodecaster has built-in APHEX audio processing and mic modeling. There is a "big bottom," an aural exciter, a compressor, and noise gate. The P4 has a low cut (to cut out unnecessary frequencies) and a limiter (to make sure you don't peak and distort). ThePodtrack P4 does have very powerful preamps that are very quiet. The Rodecaster also features a built-in ducking option so if the host is in channel 1, and someone tries to talk at the same time this feature (which can be turned on and off) will ensure the host (mic 1) is heard.

       Sound Pads: The Rodecaster has 8 pads for sound effects vs the 4 on the P4. If you're doing things live and want the ability to play sounds with a press of a button. As both the Rodecaster and the P4 have the ability to plug a phone in and you could use an app like Backpack studio which enables you to have a ton of sound pads.

       Slider Vs Knobs The Rodecaster has sliders vs the knobs on the P4

       Storage: The P4 has a SD card, the Rodecaster has a micro SD Card. On their website, the Rodecaster mentions Micro SD up to 256 Gigs. The Podtrack P4 mentions card up to 512 Gigs. Both of those sizes are huge.

       Bluetooth: The Rodecaster has built-in Blue Tooth, the P4 has an optional BTA-2 Bluetooth option ($49)

       Recording Sample Rate: The Rodecaster records in 48khz/24-bit, the P4 is 44.1khz/16 bit. While I don't feel this makes that much of a difference (as in the end your podcast is listened to in earbuds, car speakers, and portable speakers). However, if you're doing anything with video, your video editor will be happy you have the ability to record in 48khz.

       Number of Tracks: The Rodecaster can record up to 8 tracks, the P4 records up to 4 Both units provide a stereo mixdown, and in addition to the mic inputs, they provide tracks for the pads. The Rodecaster has the ability to turn off the multi-track recording.

       Recording Into Your Computer Both send a stereo mix to the computer (great for live streaming), but the Rodecaster can also send map individual tracks to channels.

       Interface The Rodecaster has a touch screen. The P4 has a simple to use menu system.

       Markers The Rodecaster has the ability to add markers (which can be very useful for editing) While other room recorders have this feature the P4 does not )

       Outputs The Rodecaster has 4 headphones out in addition to a stereo out. The Zoom P4 has four headphones out.

       Footprint:The Rodecaster is 14" X 11" the P4  4.1" X6.1.' This might be important for those with smaller desktops. The P4 is  1/4th smaller than the Rodecaster.

       For my friends across the pond the Rodecaster is 350 mm x 275 mm the Podtrack P4 is 112 mm x 155 mm

       Warranty: RodecasterPro: Limited 1-Year Warranty with 1 Additional Year upon Registration. (source BNH). Podtrack P4: Limited 1-Year Warranty (source BNH).

       If you're looking for a great sounding unit, and never need to record more than four sources, this is a great unit. Audio snobs will complain about the lack of ability to record in 48khz/24hz but 44.1/16 will be fine for something that is heard in-car speakers and earbuds. Some will complain about sliders vs knobs. The knobs help cut the footprint which gives you your desk back. If you want to achieve the tone of the rodecaster you will need to invest in some plugins. If you're on a budget and want an easy way to record separate tracks including the phone, this is worth checking out. Just don't drop it.

       Check out the Zoom Podtrack P4

       The Zoom ZDM-1 Dynamic Microphone

       I must confess that the Electrovoice RE320 has been my mic for many years. It's also close to $300. The ZDM-1 comes with a pop filter, "stand" a cable, and headphones for $120. I didn't think it was fair to compare it to the RE320 so I pulled out the Rode Podmic (another microphone designed for podcasters for around $99).

       Both microphones are very well built, and when I kid about using them as a weapon, I'm not kidding. You need a sturdy stand to hold these up. The ZDM-1 has a great mount that screws into the bottom and just seems solid. The Rode Podmic also is well built.

       The Zoom ZMD-1 has 50 Hz to 18 kHz frequency response with tight bass and smooth highs enhance vocal tone for radio, podcasting, and more

       The Rode Podmic has a frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz. In specs, it should pick up a bit more bass and a bit more high end.

       While neither one of these microphones sound bad, I thought I heard a little more high end and sibilance on the Zoom ZMD-1.

       The one thing that Audio Technica, Zoom, and other microphone companies need to quit doing is giving us microphone stands that are 100% completely worthless. While the TPS-4 stand that comes with the ZDM-1 is sturdier than the other worthless microphone stands, They are so short that you have to do a bizarre yoga pose to lean over to use it. Either invent a new mic stand as an accessory, or just include the clip/mount and lower the price. Nobody in their right mind is using the TPS-4 microphone stand.

       The Zoom ZHP-1 Headphones were amazingly clear. The high end was crystal clear to an almost alarming point. The somewhat self-adjusting headphones fit nice and snug and really cut out the outside world. I used other "included" headphones with other microphones and they were typically uncomfortable and had the fidelity of a record cut out of a cereal box (you have to be over 50 to get that). These had a nice sound, and I love that the cable can be disconnected at the headphones (great for those of us who are always tangled in or headphone cable.

       For $199 this a good value with a solid mic, nice pop filter, study mount and comfortable headphones to boot. Just pick up a nice boom arm (are strong desk stand as it is heavy).

       August Question of the Month: What Keeps You Going?

       This month the question was, "What has kept you going with your podcast when others have stopped?"

       Kris and Kristine from the Kris and Kristine Show

       Kris and Kristine are engaged and this is just another great way of spending time together. (everyone together  - awww....). Kristine said, " I'm big on trying to constantly strengthen our relationship. And there's a lot of research that says, for a woman, when she invests in the hobbies and the interests of her partner, then it really helps to build that bond. And so Kris could have loved going to golf or you could have had all these hobbies that take you out of the house and away from me, but instead, you choose to build and grow a hobby with me. What woman wouldn't want that from her significant other that you want to spend dedicated time with me?

       These are super nice peeps and I wish them the best when they get married in November. Check out their show at www.krisandkristine.com

       Curtis Longellow from the Rerozest Podcast

       Curtis Longfellow from the Retrozest podcast needed an outlet. He wanted to talk about all things retro (70's and 80's) and by starting a podcast he attracted other people who are just like him.

       It turns out it's really paid off. Diane Franklin, the actress who portrayed Monique Juno in the classic 80s dark comedy film Better Off Dead, granted me an interview in celebration of the 30 fifth anniversary of the film. In fact, it just posted yesterday.

       The other thing that keeps me going is the power of podcasting network shows. In fact, via Episode Number 678 of the School of podcasting, you really prepared me for the aforementioned interview with Diane Franklin. What was supposed to only be a 45-minute interview ballooned into an hour and 15 minutes. This was largely because the tips you shared on Episode Number 678 really prepared me and helped me to frame and ask some very unique questions, which kept the stories from Diane flowing.

       Additionally, you recently did a short review of my AC DC Back in Black 40th anniversary episode on your Podcast Rodeo Show. You shared several tips which helped me to plan for future episodes. And also you pointed out a glaring typo on my podcast description to which I immediately responded and corrected. Thank you for all you do. Dave. I suspect that your contribution to teaching about podcasting is really keeping a bunch of podcasters going, keep up the good work, and check out the retros s podcasts at retro zest.com forward slash podcast.

       Civilla Morgan from the Childless, Not By Choice (and Not Just Another Religion and politics Podcast)

       Here is what Civilla from the Childless, Not by Choice had this to say, "I believe I believe in the power of podcasting, I believe podcasting is a Message carrier. And I can see the results of it because of the response that I get. I may not be at a million downloads. But I'm hearing from people whose lives are literally being changed when they listen to the Childless, not by choice podcast episodes. They're writing into me.  One woman just called me about a week ago from Holland on speakpipe on my website, and she left a message because she was so excited to find thes podcast, she couldn't believe it. And she had to tell me all about what episode she was on and how the podcast has completely absolutely helped her and that she just recently joined the Facebook group.

       I've got to keep going. I've got to keep getting the word out. Slowly but surely it can be tedious. There can be deep valley moments where you just want to throw everything across the room and just walk away from it all. And then those awesome mountain top moments where you get that awesome interview, like when I got that interview with you, Dave Jackson. And so you have to take the good with the bad when it comes to podcasting and I just love that I can get the message out whether it's the Childless, not by choice podcast, or the Not just another religion and politics podcast where I get to say my part as to how the Christian community is behaving (or misbehaving right now), in some instances. It's just a way to get the word out to get your message out. It's truly a message carrier. And that's why I'm still podcasting.

       Craig Wealand from Ingles Podcast

       Here are the reason Craig keeps podcasting:

       • I podcast with a co-host, who I've known for many years. He's a very good friend. And it's a lot of fun to get together with him. once every three weeks, batch record some episodes, then have a nice lunch together and just hang out, just be with someone who I really like. We have a laugh, we have fun together. So one big element of the fun I get from podcasting is getting together with my friend and colleague.
       • I think we're helping people with our product when I know we're helping people, we get feedback, voice messages, emails, telling us that because of the podcasts, we've helped people, get promotions, find a job pass an exam in English, so we know that we're doing some good out there and then keeps us going the feedback from our community.
       •  I really like the podcasting community. They're a great bunch of people. And I enjoy hanging out with podcasters. I feel very comfortable when I'm with podcasters. And, and over the years, I've made some really good friends in the podcasting community going to events and conferences, and meeting people online. So I really like being part of the community. And it's much easier to be part of the community if you have a podcast.
       • I think I really like creating something that wasn't in the world before. Hopefully, that's a good thing. It might be a bad thing. But I like the idea that we've put something out there that might be of use to people and it didn't exist before we turned on the microphones.  I like the idea that I've created something.
       
       

       Check out Craig at Ingles Podcast

       Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting

       I've always said that podcasting scratches every itch I have.

       • It is somewhat technical, and I'm somewhat of a geek.
       • You are in 100% control and you can do anything you want. As a creative person, I love that.
       • I get to help people. As someone with a teaching background, that puts a lot of "Gas in my tank."
       • As someone who spent myself into bankruptcy trying to have children (and failed), this is somehow my "Legacy."
       
       

       Check out all of Dave's shows at www.powerofpodcasting.com

       September Question of the Month

       Right now, I'm obsessed with the word, Interesting. When you hear the word interesting, what comes to your mind. If someone who spoke another language and asked you to explain what Interesting mean, how would you describe it. Feel free to "riff" on your thoughts of interesting, and explain any examples of content you feel is interesting. I need your answer by September 25th, 2020. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       I love helping people plan, launch, and grow their podcast. I have multiple plans and scenarios to meet any budget. Let's work together.

       ]]>17e8f3f3-e05e-498f-ba79-fb92cbf9a52dMon, 24 Aug 2020 04:36:43 -040050:15falsefull737737Charging Your Guest an "Appearance Fee" on Your PodcastHOUSEKEEPING: My book, Profit Grom Your Podcast UPDATE. If you're asked to confirm your sale, please say yes.

       Podcasts are continuing to get more and more popular with millions of listeners worldwide. In some (few from what I've seen) cases, people with very popular or very niche shows can charge what some people call a "Guest Appearance Fee." While I understand that some of us are trying to at least pay for the cost of production with our podcasts, but there are some things to think about before you go charging people to be on your show.

       SUPPLY AND DEMAND

       I know some people were charging to be on your show (in some cases four figures) to be a guest. The law of supply and demand can be summarized as the smaller the supply for something the more your can charge as long as it has value (or perceived value). Why? Because you can't get it anyplace else.

       If you show has a HUGE audience and people are banging on your door to be on your show, this might indicate a high demand for people to be on your show. If your show is super niche, it may be the only podcast on the topic. If a potential guest wants to do a deep dive on Viking history, there may not be that many podcasts to contact.

       Remember when sponsors are paying you money it is to get in front of your audience. If a guest thinks you have a large chunk of the audience they may be willing to pay to get in front of them.

       MANAGING DEMAND WITH YOUR PRICE

       When you have too much demand on a product as you can't keep up, one strategy is to raise the price. When I was a working musician some of the bars I played had a $5 cover charge. Why? Because if you were willing to pay $5 just to get in the door there was a good chance those people had disposable money to buy food and drinks. This way your bar was full of your target audience.

       If you have a TON of people BEGGING to be on your show, charging for an appearance might slow the demand. It might shorten the line to get into the guest chair, and only those who KNOW that you have their target audience will bust out the cash to sit in that seat.

       If this sounds like a good idea, lets take a second and look at this a little deeper.

       Take a Long Look in the Mirror

       If you were to go to Google is your show one of less than five other podcasts on your subject? Are you the only pigmy pony podcast? Do you have a large audience? Not many people can say they have a super-niche podcast with a large audience.

       Here are some other things to consider:

       Enjoying the Extra Money This Would Bring In

       TV Talk shows (due to the union) pay their guests to appear on the show ($726 per episode by some accounts) but that is for a show with millions of viewers. According to some reports by Marketwatch 30% of adults have no emergency savings at all (if you make 50,000 a year). If you go up to $150,000 a year 25% of people are still living paycheck to paycheck.

       My point is without some discipline, there were always be more month at the end of the money.

       What might happen is you have an extra $1000 a month and you get those braces for the kid, or even worse have a second child (and those little boogers are expensive). Now what was extra money to put into your savings, or add some breathing room, is now being spent every week. It is no longer "extra"money.

       Now You NEED Guests to Pay

       When your back is up against the wall you do things you may not be proud of. Now you start to accept any guest as long as they pay. I've been there done that. While I had a job when I graduate from college I still took a job as a janitor at my church to help pay the bills. I had student loans to pay, and I needed to save up money to move into an apartment. My Dad (who had a degree in computers) took a job as a convenient store manager working the night shift. You do what have to do not because you want to, but because you have to.

       This Could Cause a Negative Spiral

       If your guests don't fit your audience, and they don't deliver value, you might lose your audience (and remember that is what people are paying for - to get in front of your audience). If your audience goes away, so does the demand to get in front of them.

       For me (again an opinion), you don't really need to sell me your guest and provide tons of street cred when you introduce your guests. I trust you that you're not going to bring on someone who won't deliver value.

       Potential FTC Issues

       The FTC Guides, state that at their core, reflect the basic truth-in-advertising principle that endorsements must be honest and not misleading. An endorsement must reflect the honest opinion of the endorser and can’t be used to make a claim that the product’s marketer couldn’t legally make.

       255.5 states, "When there exists a connection between the endorser and the seller of the advertised product that might materially affect the weight or credibility of the endorsement (i.e., the connection is not reasonably expected by the audience), such connection must be fully disclosed. "

       For me, by having them on your show, your audience trusts you to bring people of value. If you don't disclose that they are paying to be there, and someone purchases their product or service, you might have an issue with the FTC (I'm not a lawyer, but it gets sticky).

       If you're in the UK, you might want to check out the CAP Code 2.4 "Marketers and publishers must make clear that advertorials are marketing communications." 

       Vote For The Schol of Podcasting

       We are in the final slate of the Podcast Awards. Go to www.podcastawards.com and vote for the School of Podcasting in the technology category (I also love the Newsworthy show, and the Packers Fan Podcast). 

       I Want to Help You With Your Podcast

       What is keeping you going? What has started you from starting? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer by August 28th

       I Want to Help You With Your Podcast

       I've been helping people plan, launch, and grow their podcast for 15 years. I'd love to help you.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme to find the best way I can help you.

       ]]>HOUSEKEEPING: My book, Profit Grom Your Podcast UPDATE. If you're asked to confirm your sale, please say yes.

       Podcasts are continuing to get more and more popular with millions of listeners worldwide. In some (few from what I've seen) cases, people with very popular or very niche shows can charge what some people call a "Guest Appearance Fee." While I understand that some of us are trying to at least pay for the cost of production with our podcasts, but there are some things to think about before you go charging people to be on your show.

       SUPPLY AND DEMAND

       I know some people were charging to be on your show (in some cases four figures) to be a guest. The law of supply and demand can be summarized as the smaller the supply for something the more your can charge as long as it has value (or perceived value). Why? Because you can't get it anyplace else.

       If you show has a HUGE audience and people are banging on your door to be on your show, this might indicate a high demand for people to be on your show. If your show is super niche, it may be the only podcast on the topic. If a potential guest wants to do a deep dive on Viking history, there may not be that many podcasts to contact.

       Remember when sponsors are paying you money it is to get in front of your audience. If a guest thinks you have a large chunk of the audience they may be willing to pay to get in front of them.

       MANAGING DEMAND WITH YOUR PRICE

       When you have too much demand on a product as you can't keep up, one strategy is to raise the price. When I was a working musician some of the bars I played had a $5 cover charge. Why? Because if you were willing to pay $5 just to get in the door there was a good chance those people had disposable money to buy food and drinks. This way your bar was full of your target audience.

       If you have a TON of people BEGGING to be on your show, charging for an appearance might slow the demand. It might shorten the line to get into the guest chair, and only those who KNOW that you have their target audience will bust out the cash to sit in that seat.

       If this sounds like a good idea, lets take a second and look at this a little deeper.

       Take a Long Look in the Mirror

       If you were to go to Google is your show one of less than five other podcasts on your subject? Are you the only pigmy pony podcast? Do you have a large audience? Not many people can say they have a super-niche podcast with a large audience.

       Here are some other things to consider:

       Enjoying the Extra Money This Would Bring In

       TV Talk shows (due to the union) pay their guests to appear on the show ($726 per episode by some accounts) but that is for a show with millions of viewers. According to some reports by Marketwatch 30% of adults have no emergency savings at all (if you make 50,000 a year). If you go up to $150,000 a year 25% of people are still living paycheck to paycheck.

       My point is without some discipline, there were always be more month at the end of the money.

       What might happen is you have an extra $1000 a month and you get those braces for the kid, or even worse have a second child (and those little boogers are expensive). Now what was extra money to put into your savings, or add some breathing room, is now being spent every week. It is no longer "extra"money.

       Now You NEED Guests to Pay

       When your back is up against the wall you do things you may not be proud of. Now you start to accept any guest as long as they pay. I've been there done that. While I had a job when I graduate from college I still took a job as a janitor at my church to help pay the bills. I had student loans to pay, and I needed to save up money to move into an apartment. My Dad (who had a degree in computers) took a job as a convenient store manager working the night shift. You do what have to do not because you want to, but because you have to.

       This Could Cause a Negative Spiral

       If your guests don't fit your audience, and they don't deliver value, you might lose your audience (and remember that is what people are paying for - to get in front of your audience). If your audience goes away, so does the demand to get in front of them.

       For me (again an opinion), you don't really need to sell me your guest and provide tons of street cred when you introduce your guests. I trust you that you're not going to bring on someone who won't deliver value.

       Potential FTC Issues

       The FTC Guides, state that at their core, reflect the basic truth-in-advertising principle that endorsements must be honest and not misleading. An endorsement must reflect the honest opinion of the endorser and can’t be used to make a claim that the product’s marketer couldn’t legally make.

       255.5 states, "When there exists a connection between the endorser and the seller of the advertised product that might materially affect the weight or credibility of the endorsement (i.e., the connection is not reasonably expected by the audience), such connection must be fully disclosed. "

       For me, by having them on your show, your audience trusts you to bring people of value. If you don't disclose that they are paying to be there, and someone purchases their product or service, you might have an issue with the FTC (I'm not a lawyer, but it gets sticky).

       If you're in the UK, you might want to check out the CAP Code 2.4 "Marketers and publishers must make clear that advertorials are marketing communications." 

       Vote For The Schol of Podcasting

       We are in the final slate of the Podcast Awards. Go to www.podcastawards.com and vote for the School of Podcasting in the technology category (I also love the Newsworthy show, and the Packers Fan Podcast). 

       I Want to Help You With Your Podcast

       What is keeping you going? What has started you from starting? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer by August 28th

       I Want to Help You With Your Podcast

       I've been helping people plan, launch, and grow their podcast for 15 years. I'd love to help you.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme to find the best way I can help you.

       ]]>7c6d3629-b64d-41ce-8b53-4ae7b1dafbd4Mon, 17 Aug 2020 05:05:18 -040030:34falsefull7367367 Patreon Alternatives For PodcastersPatreon is having what appears to be some serious legal issues created by a loophole in their terms of services. Today I talk about seven different options each with their own strength. 

       Patreon

       Subscribestar

       Supercast

       Memberful

       MyLibsyn

       Podbean

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Ko-Fi

       Full Details, videos, and more at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/735

       ]]>Patreon is having what appears to be some serious legal issues created by a loophole in their terms of services. Today I talk about seven different options each with their own strength. 

       Patreon

       Subscribestar

       Supercast

       Memberful

       MyLibsyn

       Podbean

       Buy Me a Coffee

       Ko-Fi

       Full Details, videos, and more at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/735

       ]]>cefd4313-154f-4cbc-9a5e-93d6d2ad0902Mon, 10 Aug 2020 05:40:55 -040050:14falsefull735735How to Avoid Flushing Your Audience AwayThere are those that are going to be surprised by today’s content. Why? Because I’m going to admit to making one of the biggest mistakes (if not THE biggest mistake) you can make in podcasting. This deals with your podcast feed. When you learn to shave, you have to learn how to hold the razor properly. 
       The Radio Analogy

       Let’s start with some analogies. Radio is broadcasted on a frequency. That frequency is then deciphered by a radio receiver, which turns it into music. 

       Podcasting is syndicated via your feed and is deciphered via an app. So you had DJ to Frequency to Radio. Now you have podcasters to feed to app. In radio, you had to make sure your radio tower was always operational. If the tower had an issue, you were no longer broadcasting, and your station went dead. With podcasting everything, I mean EVERYTHING is tied to your feed. Guard it with your life. 

       Change of Address Forms

       The other analogy I want to bring here is the change of address form. I’m going to be moving later this year, and when I am finished set up,at my apartment, I’m going to fill out a change of address form with the US Post office that says,”Any mail going to Dave Jackson at his apartment should now be delivered to his house.” 

       Here is the problem you want to avoid. 

       What if your favorite pizza place was at 123 Main Street, and they moved. They had no website, and when you dialed their phone number it said it was disconnected. You LOVED their food, but you had no idea where to get it. 

       If a radio station moved from 98.7 to 100.2 and didn’t let their audience know, you would have to scan the dial searching for your favorite station. 

       When you move from one feed to another without doing a 301 redirect you strand your audience who is still looking at your old (dead) feed. 

       How Did This Happen?

       So how did the guy who warns everyone to be careful when dealing with feeds shoot himself in the foot? 

       I did this late at night (post-midnight right before I was heading to bed). Looking back we always have 20/20 vision, but I’m pretty sure this not when I’m at my sharpest. 

       You might say I got, "Too comfortable with the knife." What I mean by this is if you do something dangerous over and over, after a while, you get comfortable, confident, and potentially end up cutting yourself. If this had been a client’s account I was working on, I would’ve shut off all distractions, double and tripled checked my steps, and things would’ve been fine. In my case, I knew the procedure, logged in, copied, and pasted and was getting ready to head to bed. I was too comfortable with the knife. 

       In looking at my stats, it appears I came away with a bruise instead of needing stitches. 

       I Appeared on the Krisk and Kristine Show

       You can check out my appearance on episode 48 of the Kris and Kristine show. Link to episode 48.

       Update on Conferences

       Podfest is doing and online conference while trying to set a Guinness World Record. I will speak at that event. 

       Podcast Movement will be in person in 2021 in Nashville, and in 2020 they have moved to an online event. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. You get access to:

       A private Facebook mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasters.

       Step by step tutorials to get you from idea to world domination.

       Live group coaching several times a month in different times zones. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>There are those that are going to be surprised by today’s content. Why? Because I’m going to admit to making one of the biggest mistakes (if not THE biggest mistake) you can make in podcasting. This deals with your podcast feed. When you learn to shave, you have to learn how to hold the razor properly. 
       The Radio Analogy

       Let’s start with some analogies. Radio is broadcasted on a frequency. That frequency is then deciphered by a radio receiver, which turns it into music. 

       Podcasting is syndicated via your feed and is deciphered via an app. So you had DJ to Frequency to Radio. Now you have podcasters to feed to app. In radio, you had to make sure your radio tower was always operational. If the tower had an issue, you were no longer broadcasting, and your station went dead. With podcasting everything, I mean EVERYTHING is tied to your feed. Guard it with your life. 

       Change of Address Forms

       The other analogy I want to bring here is the change of address form. I’m going to be moving later this year, and when I am finished set up,at my apartment, I’m going to fill out a change of address form with the US Post office that says,”Any mail going to Dave Jackson at his apartment should now be delivered to his house.” 

       Here is the problem you want to avoid. 

       What if your favorite pizza place was at 123 Main Street, and they moved. They had no website, and when you dialed their phone number it said it was disconnected. You LOVED their food, but you had no idea where to get it. 

       If a radio station moved from 98.7 to 100.2 and didn’t let their audience know, you would have to scan the dial searching for your favorite station. 

       When you move from one feed to another without doing a 301 redirect you strand your audience who is still looking at your old (dead) feed. 

       How Did This Happen?

       So how did the guy who warns everyone to be careful when dealing with feeds shoot himself in the foot? 

       I did this late at night (post-midnight right before I was heading to bed). Looking back we always have 20/20 vision, but I’m pretty sure this not when I’m at my sharpest. 

       You might say I got, "Too comfortable with the knife." What I mean by this is if you do something dangerous over and over, after a while, you get comfortable, confident, and potentially end up cutting yourself. If this had been a client’s account I was working on, I would’ve shut off all distractions, double and tripled checked my steps, and things would’ve been fine. In my case, I knew the procedure, logged in, copied, and pasted and was getting ready to head to bed. I was too comfortable with the knife. 

       In looking at my stats, it appears I came away with a bruise instead of needing stitches. 

       I Appeared on the Krisk and Kristine Show

       You can check out my appearance on episode 48 of the Kris and Kristine show. Link to episode 48.

       Update on Conferences

       Podfest is doing and online conference while trying to set a Guinness World Record. I will speak at that event. 

       Podcast Movement will be in person in 2021 in Nashville, and in 2020 they have moved to an online event. 

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee. You get access to:

       A private Facebook mastermind group filled with brilliant podcasters.

       Step by step tutorials to get you from idea to world domination.

       Live group coaching several times a month in different times zones. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>75530bc2-d61d-4ad3-877a-eda2f1d1324dMon, 03 Aug 2020 04:00:00 -040039:01falsefull734734Your Favorite Episode of Your Podcast (and why)Today we revisit the topic of Impostor Syndrome (something we talked about in episode 627), as you won't believe who has impostor syndrome (the whole, "Why would anyone listen to me???). 

       We also share what your favorite episode is and why (some pretty amazing answers thanks to all who participated). 

       Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

       Worry about sounding bad or unprofessional? Worried about buying equipment you don't need? Worried you'll make all those common mistakes that podcasters make? Then quit worrying and join the School of Podcasting. You get step by steps tutorials, live group coaching, a private mastermind group, and priority email support. You also get a 30-day money-back guarantee (so you can join worry-free). see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Because of My Podcast - I Got to Interview Tony Danza

       Willam shares the hoops he had to jump through to get Tony Danza on his podcast. Listen to the episode at 

       https://unpro.podbean.com/e/ep-23-tony-danza-part-1/

       Garth Brooks and Impostor Syndrome

       In the docuseries Garth Brooks - The Road I'm On there is a great segment where you learn Garth is the top-selling solo artist of all time, and at the same time is hiding in his hotel room afraid nobody will show up to his concert in central park (they did, almost 1 million people did - making it the largest concert in central park).

       Nothing you start ends up where you thought it would. (think about that and I believe you'll find it is true). We worry about failure. I'm listening to a book on Audible called Exactly Where To Start by Philip M Jones. He makes a great point about failure and mistakes. 

       First, understand the difference between a failure and a mistake. A mistake is incorrectly doing something that you knew specifically how you were supposed to do. A failure is trying something you've not tried before, and it working out differently than you hoped for. Seeing these differences instantly empowers a difference in your acceptance between the two and possibly helps you become more excited about your future failures.  - Philip M Jones Exactly Where to Start Get the Audio Book For Free 

       Take a second and list all of the hard things (or things you perceived as hard at the time) that you have accomplished. You've done more than you think. 

       What Is Your Favorite Episode and Why?

       While this wasn't planned, I love that many of these episodes involved people trying something new, or stepping out of their comfort zone. Thanks to all who participated:

       Veronica -Fat Loss Success Stories

       Anthony -Route 66 Podcast

       Dan  Based on a True Story

       Arnie  The Football History Dude

       Dave - Dealing With My Grief

       Curtis -Retrozest Podcast

       York - Poetic Earthlings.com

       Scott Amazing Maine Podcast

       Bill Monroe - Stroke Cast

       Matt - The Author Inside You

       Dave - The School of Podcasting 

       August Question of the Month

       With so many people answering this month's question who have been doing this a while, How do you keep going? (or why haven't you quit)? For those who have NOT started a podcast yet, What is holding you back? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer before August 28th, 2020.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

       Exactly Where To Start- Book/Audio Book

       August Question of the Month

       Work With My - Podcast Consulting

       Free Audible Book

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

        

       Table of Contents

       00:56 Because of My Podcast -  03:20 Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free 04:21 You Won't Believe Who Has impostor Syndrome 10:09 Overcoming Impostor Syndrome 13:05 Mistakes vs Failure 15:39 What is your favorite episode of your podcast 40:26 August Question of the Month 43:00 pod.events 44:09 What is coming 45:13 Bloopers

       ]]>Today we revisit the topic of Impostor Syndrome (something we talked about in episode 627), as you won't believe who has impostor syndrome (the whole, "Why would anyone listen to me???). 

       We also share what your favorite episode is and why (some pretty amazing answers thanks to all who participated). 

       Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

       Worry about sounding bad or unprofessional? Worried about buying equipment you don't need? Worried you'll make all those common mistakes that podcasters make? Then quit worrying and join the School of Podcasting. You get step by steps tutorials, live group coaching, a private mastermind group, and priority email support. You also get a 30-day money-back guarantee (so you can join worry-free). see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Because of My Podcast - I Got to Interview Tony Danza

       Willam shares the hoops he had to jump through to get Tony Danza on his podcast. Listen to the episode at 

       https://unpro.podbean.com/e/ep-23-tony-danza-part-1/

       Garth Brooks and Impostor Syndrome

       In the docuseries Garth Brooks - The Road I'm On there is a great segment where you learn Garth is the top-selling solo artist of all time, and at the same time is hiding in his hotel room afraid nobody will show up to his concert in central park (they did, almost 1 million people did - making it the largest concert in central park).

       Nothing you start ends up where you thought it would. (think about that and I believe you'll find it is true). We worry about failure. I'm listening to a book on Audible called Exactly Where To Start by Philip M Jones. He makes a great point about failure and mistakes. 

       First, understand the difference between a failure and a mistake. A mistake is incorrectly doing something that you knew specifically how you were supposed to do. A failure is trying something you've not tried before, and it working out differently than you hoped for. Seeing these differences instantly empowers a difference in your acceptance between the two and possibly helps you become more excited about your future failures.  - Philip M Jones Exactly Where to Start Get the Audio Book For Free 

       Take a second and list all of the hard things (or things you perceived as hard at the time) that you have accomplished. You've done more than you think. 

       What Is Your Favorite Episode and Why?

       While this wasn't planned, I love that many of these episodes involved people trying something new, or stepping out of their comfort zone. Thanks to all who participated:

       Veronica -Fat Loss Success Stories

       Anthony -Route 66 Podcast

       Dan  Based on a True Story

       Arnie  The Football History Dude

       Dave - Dealing With My Grief

       Curtis -Retrozest Podcast

       York - Poetic Earthlings.com

       Scott Amazing Maine Podcast

       Bill Monroe - Stroke Cast

       Matt - The Author Inside You

       Dave - The School of Podcasting 

       August Question of the Month

       With so many people answering this month's question who have been doing this a while, How do you keep going? (or why haven't you quit)? For those who have NOT started a podcast yet, What is holding you back? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer before August 28th, 2020.

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

       Exactly Where To Start- Book/Audio Book

       August Question of the Month

       Work With My - Podcast Consulting

       Free Audible Book

       Overcoming Impostor Syndrome

        

       Table of Contents

       00:56 Because of My Podcast -  03:20 Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free 04:21 You Won't Believe Who Has impostor Syndrome 10:09 Overcoming Impostor Syndrome 13:05 Mistakes vs Failure 15:39 What is your favorite episode of your podcast 40:26 August Question of the Month 43:00 pod.events 44:09 What is coming 45:13 Bloopers

       ]]>5e04da10-c673-4133-b56d-7fd43dbca7eaMon, 27 Jul 2020 04:00:00 -040046:14falsefull733733Don't Quit On a Bad Day - How Glenn and Jamie Thrive After 2500 EpisodesGlenn "The Geek" Hebert and Jamie Jennings have been doing a ninety-minute daily show Horses in the Morning since 2010. If you listened to the show 24 hours a day it would take you 150 days to listen to all the episodes. That is a HUGE amount of work along with finding sponsors, booking over 6000 guests, facilitating contents and more. Today they share their secrets to longevity while keeping their sanity. Horses in the Morning is part of the Horse Radio Network.
       Quick Housekeeping

       01:07 Answers for the Question of the Month 01:30 Vote For School of Podcasting at Podcastawards.com

       Surviving and Thriving After 2500 Episodes

       06:54 How Did You Find Each Other

       08:01 Shaping the Concept

       10:54 What have you tried that didn't work?

       12:29 6000 Guests Over the Years

       16:10 Radio vs Podcasting

       18:16 Handing Bad Days

       20:43 How do you keep finding new content?

       24:25 Because of My Podcast Story

       25:58 Interacting With Patons

       28:19 How Have You Gone This Long and Stayed Sane?

       33:43 Glenn Knows Where the Episode is Going

       34:41 Bring Your Passion

       35:38 Don't Quit on a Bad Day

       37:11 Tips for Wanna Be Podcasters

       41:25 Bloopers

       Main Take-Aways

       Glenn and Jamie only promote products that they would use. Consequently, 98.5% of their listeners buy those products. 

       They use the Patreon account to allow their listeners to get closer (and appear) on the show. 

       They put hours into show prep and know exactly where the show is going. 

       They keep trying new things to keep the show fresh. 

       Some of their best segments "just happened."

       They never talk except on the show so they don't have to recreate conversations in their episodes.

       Question of the Month

       What is your favorite episode of your podcast and why? Answer by 7/24/20 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee and get access to step by step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also get direct access to Hall of Fame podcaster, Dave Jackson via priority email support and when needed video conferencing. Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Need Some Honest Feedback on Your Show?

       Get your show reviewed by 30-year radio veteran Erik K Johnson, and 15-year podcasting veteran Dave Jackson in addition to getting exposure on the Podcast Review Show. We go over every inch of your podcast, your website, your goals, and make sure they are in alignment with your content to deliver maximum results. Get reviewed today.

       ]]>Glenn "The Geek" Hebert and Jamie Jennings have been doing a ninety-minute daily show Horses in the Morning since 2010. If you listened to the show 24 hours a day it would take you 150 days to listen to all the episodes. That is a HUGE amount of work along with finding sponsors, booking over 6000 guests, facilitating contents and more. Today they share their secrets to longevity while keeping their sanity. Horses in the Morning is part of the Horse Radio Network.
       Quick Housekeeping

       01:07 Answers for the Question of the Month 01:30 Vote For School of Podcasting at Podcastawards.com

       Surviving and Thriving After 2500 Episodes

       06:54 How Did You Find Each Other

       08:01 Shaping the Concept

       10:54 What have you tried that didn't work?

       12:29 6000 Guests Over the Years

       16:10 Radio vs Podcasting

       18:16 Handing Bad Days

       20:43 How do you keep finding new content?

       24:25 Because of My Podcast Story

       25:58 Interacting With Patons

       28:19 How Have You Gone This Long and Stayed Sane?

       33:43 Glenn Knows Where the Episode is Going

       34:41 Bring Your Passion

       35:38 Don't Quit on a Bad Day

       37:11 Tips for Wanna Be Podcasters

       41:25 Bloopers

       Main Take-Aways

       Glenn and Jamie only promote products that they would use. Consequently, 98.5% of their listeners buy those products. 

       They use the Patreon account to allow their listeners to get closer (and appear) on the show. 

       They put hours into show prep and know exactly where the show is going. 

       They keep trying new things to keep the show fresh. 

       Some of their best segments "just happened."

       They never talk except on the show so they don't have to recreate conversations in their episodes.

       Question of the Month

       What is your favorite episode of your podcast and why? Answer by 7/24/20 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Join the School of Podcasting worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee and get access to step by step tutorials, live group coaching, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also get direct access to Hall of Fame podcaster, Dave Jackson via priority email support and when needed video conferencing. Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Need Some Honest Feedback on Your Show?

       Get your show reviewed by 30-year radio veteran Erik K Johnson, and 15-year podcasting veteran Dave Jackson in addition to getting exposure on the Podcast Review Show. We go over every inch of your podcast, your website, your goals, and make sure they are in alignment with your content to deliver maximum results. Get reviewed today.

       ]]>87d63b61-fdfa-4058-a0d3-4192728a27d8Mon, 20 Jul 2020 04:00:00 -040043:07falsefull732732Podcasting Best PracticesI've been asked this questions in a few interviews. As there are no rules and you can do anything you want in a podcast, are there are any Podcasting Best Practices? Well as we all see podcasting through many different lenses I thought I would share my opinion on the best practices.
       Have a Topic You Are Passionate About, as in REALLY Passionate about. 

       Next week you will hear Jamie from Horses in the morning talk about her L O V E of horses. In the past I have said you need the passion that a sixteen year old boy has for getting his driver's license.

       WHY: Because when you first start out, it will be awkward, and you will still be getting comfortable behind the mic. You will have next to no audience and it is soul crushing to put that much work into something and have next to nobody listen to it. When you have that passion, you will talk about it even if nobody is listening. 

       Know Your Target Audience

       I know, "But Dave you just said I don't have an audience." I know, but who is the person that should love this content. Also, I don't mean "34-48 year old Women. That is identify who they are. I mean KNOW THEM. Go hang out with them, and find out what makes them tick. 

       WHY: One of the biggest fears is sounding stupid. How do you avoid this? By knowing what your audience needs (we cover this in the planning your content course, as well as "Content is King" course). 

       Know WHY You're Podcasting

       Every podcaster says "It takes more time than I thought" when you start a podcast (for the record it takes more time than you thought for many things if you think about it). Starting a podcast is easy. Start is GOOD podcast can tricky. You've identified who your audience is, and what your topic is, but the why can help shape the content. If you're trying to keep your brand in front of your potential customer you might do three five minute podcasts a week. If you want to be seen as an expert, maybe you do a weekly 20-minute show where you answer a question. If you're trying to grow your network, maybe you do interviews with other people in your field. 

       WHY: When you start to achieve your goal, it puts gas in your tank. If you are NOT achieving your goal you know you need to adjust the content or turn up the marketing. 

       Get The Best Equipment You Can Afford

       I typically say you can sound pretty good for the price of an Xbox (about $300). By the time you get a microphone and some sort of interface, etc. You're looking between $70-$300 depending on how many co-hosts you have, etc. 

       WHY: Look at the top 200 shows in Apple and see how many were recorded using their phone (although you can make "OK" recording with your phone when used correctly). 

       Have A General Idea Of How a Podcast Works

       I've been driving since I was 16. While I don't know enough about my car to work on it. I do know enough to do some basic troubleshooting. 

       WHY: By understanding the mechanics of a podcast you can avoid a lot of unnecessary panic when your episode doesn't appear in an app a few minutes after you press publish. 

       It's YOUR Show

       Aisha Tyler said at Podcast Movement one of the biggest reason she loved her podcast was because it was HERS. Don't interview people if you're not sure they are a good fit. If you don't want to talk about a topic, don't. If you do want to talk about a topic - do. It's your show. 

       Make Yourself Available Everywhere

       I talked about this in the episode about growing your downloads,

       WHY: A boss walks into the board room and says, "I just heard this (insert name) podcast on the way in it was great. Everyone pulls out their phone but some people subscribe on Apple, Google, Spotify, Overcast, Stitcher, etc. 

       Don't Pick a Release Date Until Your In All the Apps

       I had this happen to me. My new show Grow Your Community was in Apple, but NOT in Overcast (even though Overcast pulls from Apple). In the same way that bands in the 80's wouldn't pick a date for their CD release party until they had the CD in their hand, don't pick your "Launch" date until your show is available to SUBSCRIBE. 

       Be Appropriate

       but also you might consider if you're going to swear or not in your show. When you do you get pulled from India and other countries. I actually listened to the "Losing 100 Pounds" podcast and the host dropped an F-bomb in the first 15 seconds. This was followed by a flurry of other no safe for kids type of language. About 20 minutes she finally mentioned that she curses like a sailor and if you don't like that you should tune out. I'm no prude, but she sounded like a 13-year-old out behind the barn seeing how many swear words she could work into a sentence. 

       Again, it's HER show she can do whatever she wants. There were MANY 1 star reviews that just said the swearing was over the top. 

       Edit Your Podcast

       There are editors for newspapers, magazines, books, TV, movies, but you are the person on the planet that everything that comes out of your mouth is perfect. Really? Radio people can not believe people who choose to "keep it real" and just publish as-is. You have the opportunity to make yourself (your guest) sound better. If nothing else, edit one or two episodes, and if you hate it, pay someone to edit it for you. By editing a few episodes you will be willing to pay someone as it is time-consuming and you will appreciate the job they do.

       Get Honest Feedback

       I get it. It's your art. You worked hard on it. You might be afraid to get some feedback. Some really are looking for agreement on everything they've done when they ask for feedback. They don't want to change (cause as we mentioned, when you first start it takes time). However, feedback can steer your podcast in the right direction so you can help achieve your goal. Last week I talked about how I got feedback on my music and most people didn't like it. It didn't crush me. I listened to their reasons, saw their point, and changed my music. 

       I listened to a podcast today where a school had launched a podcast, got some feedback, and then changed the name, changed the intro, changed the artwork and got amazing results. 

       Be Consistent

       Pick a schedule and stick with it. Also, be consistent in quality. If you go to a McDonald's in one town and have a hamburger, fly across the country and have another one they taste the same. Sure it's unhealthy, but the taste is consistent. 

       Don't Use Unlicensed Music

       No, you can't play Taylor Swift. Nope. But what about?? No. No. No. No. What about 10 seconds? No. they are cracking down on this HARD right now. 

       You Only Need ONE Episode To Launch

       Your first recording will not be as good as your second. Consequently don't release everything you record. Some people think you record 10 episodes and release them at once so people can really connect with you.

       WHY: Rob Walch VP at Libsyn.com (the oldest, largest media host) said at a conference in Australia (online) that people lack any feedback. If someone gets feedback on episode three but has seven more episodes recorded and set to publish, the listener has to wait for eight episodes to hear any changes based on their feedback. 

       Focus On Your Audience  and Don't Compare Yourself To Others

       We talked about knowing your audience, now that you know what they want your show is about THEM, and your WHY. Don't get distracted by what other people are doing, how much money they are making, focus on your audience. If you find yourself thinking about a similar show and it upsets you, drop it and focus on your audience.

       Get Your Attitude in Check

       Podcasting is a LONG game. It is a marathon not a sprint (years not months). Also remember, you don't have to make money with your podcast.

       Be Open To New Experiences

       We mentioned being open to feedback, but also open to partnering with other podcasts, trying new segments, trying new marketing strategies. If your show isn't giving you what you want, then try something new.

       Have A Website and Control Your Show

       You control our website. If the latest social network gets canceled, people will know to find you on our website. Never let a media host (Anchor) submit your show "for you" to directories so that you maintain control of your show. 

       Google Wants Good Content

       Google wants to deliver great search results to its customers so give it something people will find valuable. Have a good description with enough words (at least 300) to attack Google. While you want to pay attention to keywords, you also want to be appropriate. Use headings to breaking up long posts. 

       It's All About Subscribers

       We mentioned "being everywhere" but that doesn't help if you make it hard (find me in Apple) to subscribe to your show. Have buttons on your site to share your show and subscribe. 

       Promote Your Show

       Use social media and any other tools that will help you get your podcast in front of your target audience. 

       WHY: There are over one million podcasts in Apple podcasts. If you think Apple will make you famous, then you should be famous from being in the phone book. 

       Pay Attention to Your Media Host

       In general, the media hosts I recommend have some sort of podcast to keep you informed of updates to their technology and news to what is going on in the podcasting space. 

       If You're Looking to Monetize - Start an Email List

       While social media may be all the buzz, when it comes to getting people to click on something, hands down Sendfox email is better. I use.  Also, if you're looking to monetize, selling your own product is the best way, but most podcasters who are looking to monetize have multiple streams of income. 

       Final Thoughts

       If you can't seem to pull the trigger, you are probably overthinking it. 

       When in doubt, ask your]]>I've been asked this questions in a few interviews. As there are no rules and you can do anything you want in a podcast, are there are any Podcasting Best Practices? Well as we all see podcasting through many different lenses I thought I would share my opinion on the best practices.

       Have a Topic You Are Passionate About, as in REALLY Passionate about. 

       Next week you will hear Jamie from Horses in the morning talk about her L O V E of horses. In the past I have said you need the passion that a sixteen year old boy has for getting his driver's license.

       WHY: Because when you first start out, it will be awkward, and you will still be getting comfortable behind the mic. You will have next to no audience and it is soul crushing to put that much work into something and have next to nobody listen to it. When you have that passion, you will talk about it even if nobody is listening. 

       Know Your Target Audience

       I know, "But Dave you just said I don't have an audience." I know, but who is the person that should love this content. Also, I don't mean "34-48 year old Women. That is identify who they are. I mean KNOW THEM. Go hang out with them, and find out what makes them tick. 

       WHY: One of the biggest fears is sounding stupid. How do you avoid this? By knowing what your audience needs (we cover this in the planning your content course, as well as "Content is King" course). 

       Know WHY You're Podcasting

       Every podcaster says "It takes more time than I thought" when you start a podcast (for the record it takes more time than you thought for many things if you think about it). Starting a podcast is easy. Start is GOOD podcast can tricky. You've identified who your audience is, and what your topic is, but the why can help shape the content. If you're trying to keep your brand in front of your potential customer you might do three five minute podcasts a week. If you want to be seen as an expert, maybe you do a weekly 20-minute show where you answer a question. If you're trying to grow your network, maybe you do interviews with other people in your field. 

       WHY: When you start to achieve your goal, it puts gas in your tank. If you are NOT achieving your goal you know you need to adjust the content or turn up the marketing. 

       Get The Best Equipment You Can Afford

       I typically say you can sound pretty good for the price of an Xbox (about $300). By the time you get a microphone and some sort of interface, etc. You're looking between $70-$300 depending on how many co-hosts you have, etc. 

       WHY: Look at the top 200 shows in Apple and see how many were recorded using their phone (although you can make "OK" recording with your phone when used correctly). 

       Have A General Idea Of How a Podcast Works

       I've been driving since I was 16. While I don't know enough about my car to work on it. I do know enough to do some basic troubleshooting. 

       WHY: By understanding the mechanics of a podcast you can avoid a lot of unnecessary panic when your episode doesn't appear in an app a few minutes after you press publish. 

       It's YOUR Show

       Aisha Tyler said at Podcast Movement one of the biggest reason she loved her podcast was because it was HERS. Don't interview people if you're not sure they are a good fit. If you don't want to talk about a topic, don't. If you do want to talk about a topic - do. It's your show. 

       Make Yourself Available Everywhere

       I talked about this in the episode about growing your downloads,

       WHY: A boss walks into the board room and says, "I just heard this (insert name) podcast on the way in it was great. Everyone pulls out their phone but some people subscribe on Apple, Google, Spotify, Overcast, Stitcher, etc. 

       Don't Pick a Release Date Until Your In All the Apps

       I had this happen to me. My new show Grow Your Community was in Apple, but NOT in Overcast (even though Overcast pulls from Apple). In the same way that bands in the 80's wouldn't pick a date for their CD release party until they had the CD in their hand, don't pick your "Launch" date until your show is available to SUBSCRIBE. 

       Be Appropriate

       but also you might consider if you're going to swear or not in your show. When you do you get pulled from India and other countries. I actually listened to the "Losing 100 Pounds" podcast and the host dropped an F-bomb in the first 15 seconds. This was followed by a flurry of other no safe for kids type of language. About 20 minutes she finally mentioned that she curses like a sailor and if you don't like that you should tune out. I'm no prude, but she sounded like a 13-year-old out behind the barn seeing how many swear words she could work into a sentence. 

       Again, it's HER show she can do whatever she wants. There were MANY 1 star reviews that just said the swearing was over the top. 

       Edit Your Podcast

       There are editors for newspapers, magazines, books, TV, movies, but you are the person on the planet that everything that comes out of your mouth is perfect. Really? Radio people can not believe people who choose to "keep it real" and just publish as-is. You have the opportunity to make yourself (your guest) sound better. If nothing else, edit one or two episodes, and if you hate it, pay someone to edit it for you. By editing a few episodes you will be willing to pay someone as it is time-consuming and you will appreciate the job they do.

       Get Honest Feedback

       I get it. It's your art. You worked hard on it. You might be afraid to get some feedback. Some really are looking for agreement on everything they've done when they ask for feedback. They don't want to change (cause as we mentioned, when you first start it takes time). However, feedback can steer your podcast in the right direction so you can help achieve your goal. Last week I talked about how I got feedback on my music and most people didn't like it. It didn't crush me. I listened to their reasons, saw their point, and changed my music. 

       I listened to a podcast today where a school had launched a podcast, got some feedback, and then changed the name, changed the intro, changed the artwork and got amazing results. 

       Be Consistent

       Pick a schedule and stick with it. Also, be consistent in quality. If you go to a McDonald's in one town and have a hamburger, fly across the country and have another one they taste the same. Sure it's unhealthy, but the taste is consistent. 

       Don't Use Unlicensed Music

       No, you can't play Taylor Swift. Nope. But what about?? No. No. No. No. What about 10 seconds? No. they are cracking down on this HARD right now. 

       You Only Need ONE Episode To Launch

       Your first recording will not be as good as your second. Consequently don't release everything you record. Some people think you record 10 episodes and release them at once so people can really connect with you.

       WHY: Rob Walch VP at Libsyn.com (the oldest, largest media host) said at a conference in Australia (online) that people lack any feedback. If someone gets feedback on episode three but has seven more episodes recorded and set to publish, the listener has to wait for eight episodes to hear any changes based on their feedback. 

       Focus On Your Audience  and Don't Compare Yourself To Others

       We talked about knowing your audience, now that you know what they want your show is about THEM, and your WHY. Don't get distracted by what other people are doing, how much money they are making, focus on your audience. If you find yourself thinking about a similar show and it upsets you, drop it and focus on your audience.

       Get Your Attitude in Check

       Podcasting is a LONG game. It is a marathon not a sprint (years not months). Also remember, you don't have to make money with your podcast.

       Be Open To New Experiences

       We mentioned being open to feedback, but also open to partnering with other podcasts, trying new segments, trying new marketing strategies. If your show isn't giving you what you want, then try something new.

       Have A Website and Control Your Show

       You control our website. If the latest social network gets canceled, people will know to find you on our website. Never let a media host (Anchor) submit your show "for you" to directories so that you maintain control of your show. 

       Google Wants Good Content

       Google wants to deliver great search results to its customers so give it something people will find valuable. Have a good description with enough words (at least 300) to attack Google. While you want to pay attention to keywords, you also want to be appropriate. Use headings to breaking up long posts. 

       It's All About Subscribers

       We mentioned "being everywhere" but that doesn't help if you make it hard (find me in Apple) to subscribe to your show. Have buttons on your site to share your show and subscribe. 

       Promote Your Show

       Use social media and any other tools that will help you get your podcast in front of your target audience. 

       WHY: There are over one million podcasts in Apple podcasts. If you think Apple will make you famous, then you should be famous from being in the phone book. 

       Pay Attention to Your Media Host

       In general, the media hosts I recommend have some sort of podcast to keep you informed of updates to their technology and news to what is going on in the podcasting space. 

       If You're Looking to Monetize - Start an Email List

       While social media may be all the buzz, when it comes to getting people to click on something, hands down Sendfox email is better. I use.  Also, if you're looking to monetize, selling your own product is the best way, but most podcasters who are looking to monetize have multiple streams of income. 

       Final Thoughts

       If you can't seem to pull the trigger, you are probably overthinking it. 

       When in doubt, ask your audience. 

       Ready To Start You Podcast?

       Get access to step by step tutorials

       A private networking group filled with other podcasters

       Live group coaching. 

       Check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/join

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Horse Radio Network

       Question of the Month

       Dave's Patreon Goup

       ]]>d1533a3e-49a3-47f4-8e76-d673f3f98a61Mon, 13 Jul 2020 04:32:59 -040041:49falsefull731731Interview Clips At the Start of Your ShowI hear so many podcasts that do interviews and they start their podcast by pulling a clip from the interview. Today we talk about why this may not be the best strategy.
       • The interview snippet should build anticipation
       • Piques the curiosity and makes them want to know more
       • Some people pull clips that make people go WHAT WAS THAT?
       
       

       Many times these clips are long (I wouldn't make then any long than 10-15 seconds if not shorter) and just leave the listener confused. 

       ROLL THE CLIP

       If you think about it movies use trailers to motivate people to come see the movie. They also send the starts on talks shows who often have a clip of the show. When the hosts ask, "Does this need setup?" the answer is almost always yes. Some back story is needed to have the clip make sense. In some cases podcasters are creating a clip, placing it at the very beginning of the episode and there is no "setup" and the clip leads to confusion. 

       SPONSOR: Start Your Podcast Worry-Free at the School of Podcasting

       You're worried you'll sound stupid. You won't as I show you how to know exactly what your audience wants. You're worried about the technology? Don't be as I have step by step tutorials to walk you through the whole podcasting process. Need some help along the way? I do live group coaching multiple times per month, you have priority email support, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also have a 30-day money-back guarantee so if you're not happy you can get your money back. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Start your podcast worry-free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       New Media Show With Adam Curry

       No Agenda Show

       Kim from Toastmasters101.net 

       Kim from thepharmacistsvoice.com 

       Come to the table podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show (get the beginning of your show reviewed).

       Podcast Review Show - Full Review

       Grow Your Community - Coming Soon

       ]]>I hear so many podcasts that do interviews and they start their podcast by pulling a clip from the interview. Today we talk about why this may not be the best strategy.
       • The interview snippet should build anticipation
       • Piques the curiosity and makes them want to know more
       • Some people pull clips that make people go WHAT WAS THAT?
       
       

       Many times these clips are long (I wouldn't make then any long than 10-15 seconds if not shorter) and just leave the listener confused. 

       ROLL THE CLIP

       If you think about it movies use trailers to motivate people to come see the movie. They also send the starts on talks shows who often have a clip of the show. When the hosts ask, "Does this need setup?" the answer is almost always yes. Some back story is needed to have the clip make sense. In some cases podcasters are creating a clip, placing it at the very beginning of the episode and there is no "setup" and the clip leads to confusion. 

       SPONSOR: Start Your Podcast Worry-Free at the School of Podcasting

       You're worried you'll sound stupid. You won't as I show you how to know exactly what your audience wants. You're worried about the technology? Don't be as I have step by step tutorials to walk you through the whole podcasting process. Need some help along the way? I do live group coaching multiple times per month, you have priority email support, and a private Facebook group filled with brilliant podcasting minds. You also have a 30-day money-back guarantee so if you're not happy you can get your money back. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Start your podcast worry-free at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       New Media Show With Adam Curry

       No Agenda Show

       Kim from Toastmasters101.net 

       Kim from thepharmacistsvoice.com 

       Come to the table podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show (get the beginning of your show reviewed).

       Podcast Review Show - Full Review

       Grow Your Community - Coming Soon

       ]]>e2d354c2-5582-46b3-ad54-0714ecf31a9dMon, 06 Jul 2020 04:00:00 -040033:38falsefull730730The Ripple Effect of PodcastingToday we hear stories of different people who have had doors open due to their podcast. Your podcast typically is not a business. It is a business card. Your podcast can be used to network with other people and companies, help you get employment, and help secure opportunities.
       Mentioned in This Episode

       Joe Rogan and he was interviewing John Stewart 

       Emly Prokop from the Story Behind Podcast getting a book deal

       Moxie LaBouche of the Your Brain on Facts got a Book Deal 

       My book comes out in August Profit From Your Podcast

       David Hooper got a radio show when he mentioned he could turn it in a podcast. Music Business Radio ( a program he still does and produces as a podcast along with Big Podcast, and Red Podcast). Dave shares this story as part of the bonus content for the audio version of this book BIG PODCAST.

       Audiolympics

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Erik's episode on Partnerships

       Podcast Review Show

       SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       You can join the School of Podcasting on a Monthly, Yearly, or a Three-Month Mentoring Program. If you need feedback on your show sign up for a Podcast Review

       Join worry-free as there is a 30-day MOney-back Guarantee.

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/729

       ]]>Today we hear stories of different people who have had doors open due to their podcast. Your podcast typically is not a business. It is a business card. Your podcast can be used to network with other people and companies, help you get employment, and help secure opportunities.
       Mentioned in This Episode

       Joe Rogan and he was interviewing John Stewart 

       Emly Prokop from the Story Behind Podcast getting a book deal

       Moxie LaBouche of the Your Brain on Facts got a Book Deal 

       My book comes out in August Profit From Your Podcast

       David Hooper got a radio show when he mentioned he could turn it in a podcast. Music Business Radio ( a program he still does and produces as a podcast along with Big Podcast, and Red Podcast). Dave shares this story as part of the bonus content for the audio version of this book BIG PODCAST.

       Audiolympics

       Podcast Talent Coach

       Erik's episode on Partnerships

       Podcast Review Show

       SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       You can join the School of Podcasting on a Monthly, Yearly, or a Three-Month Mentoring Program. If you need feedback on your show sign up for a Podcast Review

       Join worry-free as there is a 30-day MOney-back Guarantee.

       Full show notes at schoolofpodcasting.com/729

       ]]>52f2e6c6-deed-42c5-a01f-2264d9e5e861Mon, 29 Jun 2020 04:00:00 -040037:34falsefull729729Podpage: Quick and Easy Podcast WebsitesIf you hate WordPress but want something a little more powerful than the built-in website that comes with your media host then you might want to check out Podpage. Today I interview the create Brenden Mulligan
       Learn Podpage for Free

       Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Want to play with it for free? Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podpage

       Question of the Month: Who Is Your Dream Guest?

       03:10 Scott Johnson

       05:15 Jim Collison

       06:04 Jill and Chris

       07:30 Kris and Kristine

       10:03 Dave Jackson

       Profit From Your Podcast Now Available for Pre-Order

       Dave's new book "Profit from Your Podcast" is now available for Pre-Order. He is looking to get as much word out about it as possible. If you think I'd be a good guest for your show, I'd love to be on your show and help promote my appearance. 

       Sponsor: Focusrite

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       ]]>If you hate WordPress but want something a little more powerful than the built-in website that comes with your media host then you might want to check out Podpage. Today I interview the create Brenden Mulligan
       Learn Podpage for Free

       Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/learnpodpage

       Want to play with it for free? Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podpage

       Question of the Month: Who Is Your Dream Guest?

       03:10 Scott Johnson

       05:15 Jim Collison

       06:04 Jill and Chris

       07:30 Kris and Kristine

       10:03 Dave Jackson

       Profit From Your Podcast Now Available for Pre-Order

       Dave's new book "Profit from Your Podcast" is now available for Pre-Order. He is looking to get as much word out about it as possible. If you think I'd be a good guest for your show, I'd love to be on your show and help promote my appearance. 

       Sponsor: Focusrite

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       ]]>e312f3ca-a639-46dc-9317-3b303d32db07Mon, 22 Jun 2020 04:00:00 -040039:21falsefull72872830 Strategies To Grow Your Podcast AudienceI've been holding "podcast happy hours" during the pandemic. This is a place when some of us just wanted to talk to someone besides the cat. In one of those sessions, Scott Johnson from What Was That Like? shared how he ad success swapping episodes with another similar podcast. This got me thinking about strategies to grow your audience. This episode is sponsored by Focusrite
       Mentioned in This Episode

       What Was That Like? Podcast

       Horse Radio Network

       episode 677 - All about doing interviews and being interviewed

       All the episodes featuring Glenn the Geek

       TeePublic - for Shirts

       Sticker Mule for Stickers

       Mangools - Keyword Tools

       Social Warfare plugin.

       wisestamp.com - Cool Email Signatures

       Erik's Audience Amplification Course

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Full show notes at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/727

       ]]>I've been holding "podcast happy hours" during the pandemic. This is a place when some of us just wanted to talk to someone besides the cat. In one of those sessions, Scott Johnson from What Was That Like? shared how he ad success swapping episodes with another similar podcast. This got me thinking about strategies to grow your audience. This episode is sponsored by Focusrite
       Mentioned in This Episode

       What Was That Like? Podcast

       Horse Radio Network

       episode 677 - All about doing interviews and being interviewed

       All the episodes featuring Glenn the Geek

       TeePublic - for Shirts

       Sticker Mule for Stickers

       Mangools - Keyword Tools

       Social Warfare plugin.

       wisestamp.com - Cool Email Signatures

       Erik's Audience Amplification Course

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Full show notes at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/727

       ]]>0c235948-1d40-4716-a363-5a36cd698a85Mon, 15 Jun 2020 05:01:14 -040001:02:03falsefull727727Every time I podcast something good happens - Andrew Lewin InterviewAs a Marine Biologist, Andrew Lewin from Speak Up for the Ocean Blue podcast (available in directories like Apple, and Google) just wanted to talk about treating the ocean better and keeping it safe. That was less than 10 years ago, now he's a key figure at Ocean Related events, and is becoming THE podcast about ocean conservation. Today we will hear parts of Andrew's story.
       SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Andrew Lewin Opens Doors With His Podcast

       03:12 When did you get the podcast bug?

       03:56 When did he start his podcast?

       05:40 What kept him going when he first started his podcast?

       07:08 Why he didn't tell anyone he was podcasting?

       08:25 Andrew gets invited to a conference.

       10:50 Andrew was worried about negative feedback.

       12:56 Andrew's relationship with Duke University.

       14:02 Are these conferences for his job?

       17:47 Changing your publishing schedule, what did your audience think?

       20:27 Work-Life Balance?

       21:38 Did his audience comment on his schedule changes?

       23:10 How does his day job feel about his podcast?

       24:24 The Toronto Zoo Podcast opportunity.

       25:06 TV Show opportunity.

       26:19 How do you promote your show?

       29:10 Advice for new podcasters

       Andrew has even begun helping people podcasts on his own site www.speakupforblue.com

       Dave is Speaking This Weekend

       35:15 I'll be speaking at indiepodcon.com and the Utah Podcast Summit. 

       Question of the Month

       37:04 Who would you like to have on your show and why? Be sure to tell us about your show and your website at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Homework For White People

       37:51 If you are not a person of color please, its time to get educated. Watch the documentary called The 13th on Youtube. Listen to "Seeing White." You will be amazed at what you learn. Corrupt politicians have not gone away at the local, state, and federal governments. We need to pay attention and vote them out. Rent the movie Slay the Dragon an Amazon. We need to vote these corrupt people out of office who don't do what we want. We need serious prison and justice reform in this country. 

        

       ]]>As a Marine Biologist, Andrew Lewin from Speak Up for the Ocean Blue podcast (available in directories like Apple, and Google) just wanted to talk about treating the ocean better and keeping it safe. That was less than 10 years ago, now he's a key figure at Ocean Related events, and is becoming THE podcast about ocean conservation. Today we will hear parts of Andrew's story.
       SPONSOR: FOCUSRITE

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Andrew Lewin Opens Doors With His Podcast

       03:12 When did you get the podcast bug?

       03:56 When did he start his podcast?

       05:40 What kept him going when he first started his podcast?

       07:08 Why he didn't tell anyone he was podcasting?

       08:25 Andrew gets invited to a conference.

       10:50 Andrew was worried about negative feedback.

       12:56 Andrew's relationship with Duke University.

       14:02 Are these conferences for his job?

       17:47 Changing your publishing schedule, what did your audience think?

       20:27 Work-Life Balance?

       21:38 Did his audience comment on his schedule changes?

       23:10 How does his day job feel about his podcast?

       24:24 The Toronto Zoo Podcast opportunity.

       25:06 TV Show opportunity.

       26:19 How do you promote your show?

       29:10 Advice for new podcasters

       Andrew has even begun helping people podcasts on his own site www.speakupforblue.com

       Dave is Speaking This Weekend

       35:15 I'll be speaking at indiepodcon.com and the Utah Podcast Summit. 

       Question of the Month

       37:04 Who would you like to have on your show and why? Be sure to tell us about your show and your website at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Homework For White People

       37:51 If you are not a person of color please, its time to get educated. Watch the documentary called The 13th on Youtube. Listen to "Seeing White." You will be amazed at what you learn. Corrupt politicians have not gone away at the local, state, and federal governments. We need to pay attention and vote them out. Rent the movie Slay the Dragon an Amazon. We need to vote these corrupt people out of office who don't do what we want. We need serious prison and justice reform in this country. 

        

       ]]>01b50144-be5a-46c9-863b-782cca20ae77Mon, 08 Jun 2020 04:00:00 -040044:26falsefull726726Fixing a Mistake in Your Podcast EpisodeMy last episode had a typo, and a mistake in the audio ( I said the deadline for June's question of the month was in February). Today we're going to talk about how to fix things when you make a mistake in your podcast.
       SPONSOR: Focusrite

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       How to Fix a Mistake In Your Podcast

       You publish an episode, and you're listening back to it in Apple Podcasts and then OH NO! You hear a mistake. What do you do?

       Go back to the software you used to create the file and fix the mistake (re-record, eliminate silence, whatever the mistake was).

       Then export the file using the exact same file name as the original.

       Then replace the file on your media host (video below).

       How to Fix A Typo in Your Podcast Show Notes

       To fix a typo go to whatever tool you use to create your feed and remove the typo and save your changes. It will take up to 24 hours for the update to appear in the Apps.

       What Happens if You Upload a Repaired Episode with a Different File Name?

       If you upload your new "updated" file with a different file name, it will take up to 24 hours for Apple (and other apps) to update to see the new file (which means it won't work in the app).

       Learn from Your Mistakes

       Once you fix your mistake, don't just move on. Take a second and assess why this happened? Is there anything you can do to avoid this in the future.

       I always listen to the episode (speeded up) before publishing it. Every time I don't - those are the episodes with the issues.

       Do you have too much on your plate?

       Are you trying to hit a self-inflicted deadline that may not be super important to your audience?

       We all make mistakes, but smart people learn from their mistakes. REALLY SMART people learn from other people's mistakes.

       Because of My Podcast - I Got to Meet Gary V

       23:05 I've said in the past your podcast is not your business, but it can be your business card. Today Mike Simmons from Just Start Real Estate podcast explains how his podcast lead to him meeting Gary Vaynerchuck.

       If you have a "Because of my podcast " story, I'd love to hear it.

       Question of the Month

       25:11 What guest would you LOVE to get on your show? (and Why).

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer by June 26th.

       Don't forget to mention your show, and where we can find it (website).

       The Truth About Transcripts

       25:43 I've been saying that Transcripts are not the best solution for "show notes" as we don't talk like we write and we don't write like we talk. Yet some people preach how "more words equals more visitors." I was listening to the Marketing School show and Neil Patel (a SERIOUS SEO GURU) and Eric Siu (Major Marketer) explained how they paid to have really good transcriptions and it didn't do anything for their show. It's better to take the transcripts and work them into a blog.

       ID3 TAGS and SEO?

       27:23 ID3 tags are stored inside your mp3 file. People keep obsessing over them and the reason I've heard is they feel it affects their SEO. While apps are transcribing the content of the show for better search, to the best of my knowledge they are not looking at ID3 tags.

       ID3 tags are only used if someone pulls a file out of the feed (for example they download your episode off your website and listen on their computer. ID3 tags used to have a much more significant place in podcasting, but this has diminished over the years. However, I still add ID3 tags to my files as it takes all of 10 seconds.

       My Take on Joe Rogan

       Joe Rogan got $100 Million. Good for Joe?

       Joe is a content creator, and technically he's not a podcaster anymore (but the audience thinks he is...)

       The big takeaway is Joe proved that GOOD content is valuable.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee

       ]]>My last episode had a typo, and a mistake in the audio ( I said the deadline for June's question of the month was in February). Today we're going to talk about how to fix things when you make a mistake in your podcast.
       SPONSOR: Focusrite

       * Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide * Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show * Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best * Works with the recording software you’re already using * Works with any type of XLR microphone * Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds * New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       How to Fix a Mistake In Your Podcast

       You publish an episode, and you're listening back to it in Apple Podcasts and then OH NO! You hear a mistake. What do you do?

       Go back to the software you used to create the file and fix the mistake (re-record, eliminate silence, whatever the mistake was).

       Then export the file using the exact same file name as the original.

       Then replace the file on your media host (video below).

       How to Fix A Typo in Your Podcast Show Notes

       To fix a typo go to whatever tool you use to create your feed and remove the typo and save your changes. It will take up to 24 hours for the update to appear in the Apps.

       What Happens if You Upload a Repaired Episode with a Different File Name?

       If you upload your new "updated" file with a different file name, it will take up to 24 hours for Apple (and other apps) to update to see the new file (which means it won't work in the app).

       Learn from Your Mistakes

       Once you fix your mistake, don't just move on. Take a second and assess why this happened? Is there anything you can do to avoid this in the future.

       I always listen to the episode (speeded up) before publishing it. Every time I don't - those are the episodes with the issues.

       Do you have too much on your plate?

       Are you trying to hit a self-inflicted deadline that may not be super important to your audience?

       We all make mistakes, but smart people learn from their mistakes. REALLY SMART people learn from other people's mistakes.

       Because of My Podcast - I Got to Meet Gary V

       23:05 I've said in the past your podcast is not your business, but it can be your business card. Today Mike Simmons from Just Start Real Estate podcast explains how his podcast lead to him meeting Gary Vaynerchuck.

       If you have a "Because of my podcast " story, I'd love to hear it.

       Question of the Month

       25:11 What guest would you LOVE to get on your show? (and Why).

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to answer by June 26th.

       Don't forget to mention your show, and where we can find it (website).

       The Truth About Transcripts

       25:43 I've been saying that Transcripts are not the best solution for "show notes" as we don't talk like we write and we don't write like we talk. Yet some people preach how "more words equals more visitors." I was listening to the Marketing School show and Neil Patel (a SERIOUS SEO GURU) and Eric Siu (Major Marketer) explained how they paid to have really good transcriptions and it didn't do anything for their show. It's better to take the transcripts and work them into a blog.

       ID3 TAGS and SEO?

       27:23 ID3 tags are stored inside your mp3 file. People keep obsessing over them and the reason I've heard is they feel it affects their SEO. While apps are transcribing the content of the show for better search, to the best of my knowledge they are not looking at ID3 tags.

       ID3 tags are only used if someone pulls a file out of the feed (for example they download your episode off your website and listen on their computer. ID3 tags used to have a much more significant place in podcasting, but this has diminished over the years. However, I still add ID3 tags to my files as it takes all of 10 seconds.

       My Take on Joe Rogan

       Joe Rogan got $100 Million. Good for Joe?

       Joe is a content creator, and technically he's not a podcaster anymore (but the audience thinks he is...)

       The big takeaway is Joe proved that GOOD content is valuable.

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee

       ]]>37ba2087-18f6-4d78-9649-b1f7e22d10adMon, 01 Jun 2020 04:00:00 -040036:40falsefull725725The Power of a Mighty Network01:43 Currently, I'm obsessed with focus groups. Why? Because every time I hear someone talking about growing their audience the absolute last thing they mention is their content. So I asked my audience if they had ever used a focus group and Max from Aviation News Talk and Sharon from All God's Women both share how they had got some feedback and both feel they would benefit from it.

       Recently I did some market research that had me way out of my comfort zone but the information I received was worth the discomfort.

       02:26 Max from Aviation News Talk

       04:34 Sharon From All God's Women

       06:02 We All Benefit from Constructive Feedback

       Facebook Vs Mighty Networks

       On a previous episode, the hosts of the Wealth Without Wall Street were interviewed and mentioned how they had grown their overall revenue by 300%. One of its key ingredients was a Mighty Network. When I looked into this tool, I found it to be the swiss army knife of building communities (and if you want it - revenue). With Facebook losing 15 million in the last two years source and trust getting lower and lower why not move a separate mobile-friendly location where YOU are in control of your community.

       Jessica Shamora is the Head of Brand and Growth at Mighty Networks and came to answer my questions:

       Jessica Shambora and talk about Mighty Networks and how you can use them to build community. We talk about why a Mighty Network is better than Facebook and more (see chapter markers for more details).

       Check out Mighty Networks

        

       Get Some Feedback on Your Show

       Two experts with over 40 years of combined experience go over your podcast, your website, your goals, and help promote your show. Go to:

       www.podcastreviewshow.com

       June Question of the Month

       47:16 This month's question is "Who would be your #1 guest you want on your show?"

       I need your answer by June 26th.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>01:43 Currently, I'm obsessed with focus groups. Why? Because every time I hear someone talking about growing their audience the absolute last thing they mention is their content. So I asked my audience if they had ever used a focus group and Max from Aviation News Talk and Sharon from All God's Women both share how they had got some feedback and both feel they would benefit from it.

       Recently I did some market research that had me way out of my comfort zone but the information I received was worth the discomfort.

       02:26 Max from Aviation News Talk

       04:34 Sharon From All God's Women

       06:02 We All Benefit from Constructive Feedback

       Facebook Vs Mighty Networks

       On a previous episode, the hosts of the Wealth Without Wall Street were interviewed and mentioned how they had grown their overall revenue by 300%. One of its key ingredients was a Mighty Network. When I looked into this tool, I found it to be the swiss army knife of building communities (and if you want it - revenue). With Facebook losing 15 million in the last two years source and trust getting lower and lower why not move a separate mobile-friendly location where YOU are in control of your community.

       Jessica Shamora is the Head of Brand and Growth at Mighty Networks and came to answer my questions:

       Jessica Shambora and talk about Mighty Networks and how you can use them to build community. We talk about why a Mighty Network is better than Facebook and more (see chapter markers for more details).

       Check out Mighty Networks

        

       Get Some Feedback on Your Show

       Two experts with over 40 years of combined experience go over your podcast, your website, your goals, and help promote your show. Go to:

       www.podcastreviewshow.com

       June Question of the Month

       47:16 This month's question is "Who would be your #1 guest you want on your show?"

       I need your answer by June 26th.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>562e51f8-8702-4cc0-b36d-00735658198aMon, 25 May 2020 04:20:59 -040049:01falsefull724724Full Time Podcaster Daryl Grove of the Total Soccer ShowWhile many podcasters create content as a hobby, today we talk with Daryl Grove (who along with his cohost Taylor Rockwell) create the Toal Soccer Show. Today we talk with Daryl to go over how they make their show, how they interact with their audience, and how they developed the relationships with advertisers and their private membership.

       01:35 Why is This Good?

       I came across the trailer of the show Once upon a Gene and was floored by the emotions that bubbled up to the service. It makes you laugh, cry, and think. The vulnerability of the host sharing her thoughts sucks you in. Her courage to share her disappointments, I found it amazing. Check out the show at effieparks.com 

       Also, Effie was on the latest episode of the Podcast Roundtable  07:16 Introduction to Daryl Grove

       Delivering Content You Can't Get Any Place Else to a Niche Audience

       09:03 Interview with Daryl Grove

       Sponsor:

       Before you go promoting your show, shouldn't you get some honest feedback on what is and what is not working with your show? When you order a podcast review you get TWO consultants with over 40 years of combined experience in radio and podcasting. We look at your episodes, audio quality, the flow of content, alignment fo content with your goals, your website, and more. You also appear on the Podcast Review show (for added exposure).

       Get reviewed today at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       42:33 Question of the Month

       44:09Free "Ohio" Webinar Tonight at  7 PM ET

       45:18 Your Podcast Website Webinar

       Mentioned in This Episode

       effieparks.com  - Once upon a Gene

       Podcast Roundtable 

       Moonclerk Subscriptions

       Podcast Review Show

       The School of Podcasting

       Total Soccer Show

       Free "Ohio" Webinar Tonight at  7 PM ET

        Your Podcast Website Webinar

       ]]>While many podcasters create content as a hobby, today we talk with Daryl Grove (who along with his cohost Taylor Rockwell) create the Toal Soccer Show. Today we talk with Daryl to go over how they make their show, how they interact with their audience, and how they developed the relationships with advertisers and their private membership.

       01:35 Why is This Good?

       I came across the trailer of the show Once upon a Gene and was floored by the emotions that bubbled up to the service. It makes you laugh, cry, and think. The vulnerability of the host sharing her thoughts sucks you in. Her courage to share her disappointments, I found it amazing. Check out the show at effieparks.com 

       Also, Effie was on the latest episode of the Podcast Roundtable  07:16 Introduction to Daryl Grove

       Delivering Content You Can't Get Any Place Else to a Niche Audience

       09:03 Interview with Daryl Grove

       Sponsor:

       Before you go promoting your show, shouldn't you get some honest feedback on what is and what is not working with your show? When you order a podcast review you get TWO consultants with over 40 years of combined experience in radio and podcasting. We look at your episodes, audio quality, the flow of content, alignment fo content with your goals, your website, and more. You also appear on the Podcast Review show (for added exposure).

       Get reviewed today at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       42:33 Question of the Month

       44:09Free "Ohio" Webinar Tonight at  7 PM ET

       45:18 Your Podcast Website Webinar

       Mentioned in This Episode

       effieparks.com  - Once upon a Gene

       Podcast Roundtable 

       Moonclerk Subscriptions

       Podcast Review Show

       The School of Podcasting

       Total Soccer Show

       Free "Ohio" Webinar Tonight at  7 PM ET

        Your Podcast Website Webinar

       ]]>8c091bf1-c8e4-421a-a363-21d4667a73faMon, 18 May 2020 04:00:00 -040046:42falsefull723723Using LinkedIn for Your PodcastYou hear alot about LinkedIn (and other social networks) and you may be wondering, should I be using LinkedIn to help grow my podcast? Today I talk with LinkedIn Guru Karen Yankovich who is also a podcaster. If you're new to LinkedIn here are some fun facts:
       1. LinkedIn started on May 5, 2003
       2. LinkedIn has 332 million members
       3. 2 new users join every second
       4. 42 million unique mobile visitors per month. This stat is up from 29 million a year before (This is a 45% increase in just 12 months )
       5. 107 million users are in the USA alone
       6. The average time a user spends on LinkedIn is 17 minutes per month
       7. 25 million LinkedIn profiles are viewed every day
       8. One in three professionals on the planet are on LinkedIn
       9. You can increase your LinkedIn views by 11 times by including a photo
       10. 41% of users visit Linkedin via mobile
       11. 56% of members are male
       12. 44% of members are female
       13. 30,000 long-form posts are published on Linkedin every week
       14. 13% of LinkedIn users don’t have a Facebook account
       15. 59% of Linkedin users don’t visit Twitter
       16. LinkedIn users spend 26% of their time on LinkedIn using the mobile app 
       
       

       source https://www.jeffbullas.com

       Interview With Karen Yankovich

       Karen built her multiple 6-figure businesses by learning how to blend high-touch relationship-based marketing with practical business online savvy, and she brings that success to her clients as well. Her mission is to empower entrepreneurs to build highly profitable businesses doing what they love, all while making an impact.

       Connect with Karen on LinkedIn

       Check out her Good Girls Get Rich Podcast

       Check out her free training at wwwfreelinkedinworkshop.com

       07:04 Karen Yankovich Interview

       08:00 Facebook vs LinkedIn - The Difference?

       09:00 Connect or Not Connect with Everyone?

       11:01 Top LinkedIn Mistakes

       13:24 What Can Podcasters Use LinkedIn For?

       15:00 Your LinkedIn Profile

       16:55 Articles Vs Posts

       18:13 LinkedIn Sales Navigator

       20:52 What Does LinkedIn Mean By Active?

       21:25 How much time does it take to see results?

       25:03 Who is Your Audience?

       26:30 The benefits of clarity

       28:35 What was the thing that stopped you from publishing?

       29:19 Best Feedback from your podcast

       30:18 Best LinkedIn Story

       32:30 What Does Karen Offer?

       38:03 Question of the Month

       My Main Takeaways

       Here again, we hear how Karen has a clear idea of WHO she is talking to and trying to reach. 

       LinkedIn is not magic, but it helps you build relationships. Relationships can be magic

       Don't just contact people and connect to make your numbers grow. You should have a plan. Start a conversation. 

       Do your homework and know who you are contacting so that first impression is a little warmer. 

       Get Some Honest Feedback on Your Podcast

       Dave Jackson (15 years in podcasting) and Erik K. Johnson (30 Years in radio) will listen to your show, listen to the goals of your show, evaluated your website, audio quality, flow on content and let you know what you're doing right (so you can do more of that) and give you tips on how you can "polish" some parts of your podcast. 

       For more information see www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme  Check out previous shows in Apple and Google

       We Are Podcast Online Event

       www.wearepodcast.com

       Question of the Month

       I'm becoming obsessed with focus groups thanks to watching the TV Show The Profit on CNBC. I see people who are starting to market their show (or wonder why it may not be growing as fast as they want) and it always appears there has been a lack of honest feedback from people you feed would enjoy your show (your target audience). For May the question is again somewhat open-ended. The topic? Focus groups. Did you assemble any feedback? Would you be interested in getting feedback on your show? If you were to start one, do you have any ideas or insights?

       Send in your answer by May 22nd, 2020 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question be sure to mention your podcast and website. 

       Dave's Podcast Half Time Newsletter

       Get insights into new tools, podcast news and more (unsubscribe any time)

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>You hear alot about LinkedIn (and other social networks) and you may be wondering, should I be using LinkedIn to help grow my podcast? Today I talk with LinkedIn Guru Karen Yankovich who is also a podcaster. If you're new to LinkedIn here are some fun facts:
       1. LinkedIn started on May 5, 2003
       2. LinkedIn has 332 million members
       3. 2 new users join every second
       4. 42 million unique mobile visitors per month. This stat is up from 29 million a year before (This is a 45% increase in just 12 months )
       5. 107 million users are in the USA alone
       6. The average time a user spends on LinkedIn is 17 minutes per month
       7. 25 million LinkedIn profiles are viewed every day
       8. One in three professionals on the planet are on LinkedIn
       9. You can increase your LinkedIn views by 11 times by including a photo
       10. 41% of users visit Linkedin via mobile
       11. 56% of members are male
       12. 44% of members are female
       13. 30,000 long-form posts are published on Linkedin every week
       14. 13% of LinkedIn users don’t have a Facebook account
       15. 59% of Linkedin users don’t visit Twitter
       16. LinkedIn users spend 26% of their time on LinkedIn using the mobile app 
       
       

       source https://www.jeffbullas.com

       Interview With Karen Yankovich

       Karen built her multiple 6-figure businesses by learning how to blend high-touch relationship-based marketing with practical business online savvy, and she brings that success to her clients as well. Her mission is to empower entrepreneurs to build highly profitable businesses doing what they love, all while making an impact.

       Connect with Karen on LinkedIn

       Check out her Good Girls Get Rich Podcast

       Check out her free training at wwwfreelinkedinworkshop.com

       07:04 Karen Yankovich Interview

       08:00 Facebook vs LinkedIn - The Difference?

       09:00 Connect or Not Connect with Everyone?

       11:01 Top LinkedIn Mistakes

       13:24 What Can Podcasters Use LinkedIn For?

       15:00 Your LinkedIn Profile

       16:55 Articles Vs Posts

       18:13 LinkedIn Sales Navigator

       20:52 What Does LinkedIn Mean By Active?

       21:25 How much time does it take to see results?

       25:03 Who is Your Audience?

       26:30 The benefits of clarity

       28:35 What was the thing that stopped you from publishing?

       29:19 Best Feedback from your podcast

       30:18 Best LinkedIn Story

       32:30 What Does Karen Offer?

       38:03 Question of the Month

       My Main Takeaways

       Here again, we hear how Karen has a clear idea of WHO she is talking to and trying to reach. 

       LinkedIn is not magic, but it helps you build relationships. Relationships can be magic

       Don't just contact people and connect to make your numbers grow. You should have a plan. Start a conversation. 

       Do your homework and know who you are contacting so that first impression is a little warmer. 

       Get Some Honest Feedback on Your Podcast

       Dave Jackson (15 years in podcasting) and Erik K. Johnson (30 Years in radio) will listen to your show, listen to the goals of your show, evaluated your website, audio quality, flow on content and let you know what you're doing right (so you can do more of that) and give you tips on how you can "polish" some parts of your podcast. 

       For more information see www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme  Check out previous shows in Apple and Google

       We Are Podcast Online Event

       www.wearepodcast.com

       Question of the Month

       I'm becoming obsessed with focus groups thanks to watching the TV Show The Profit on CNBC. I see people who are starting to market their show (or wonder why it may not be growing as fast as they want) and it always appears there has been a lack of honest feedback from people you feed would enjoy your show (your target audience). For May the question is again somewhat open-ended. The topic? Focus groups. Did you assemble any feedback? Would you be interested in getting feedback on your show? If you were to start one, do you have any ideas or insights?

       Send in your answer by May 22nd, 2020 at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question be sure to mention your podcast and website. 

       Dave's Podcast Half Time Newsletter

       Get insights into new tools, podcast news and more (unsubscribe any time)

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?

       Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>f4046057-ec41-4a06-9a5d-481dd74a9700Mon, 11 May 2020 04:00:00 -040042:42falsefull722722Get and Manage Interviews with Poddit - an Interview with Brent BeshamLast year I met Brent Besham and She Podcast Live and hear about Poddit.  In this interview, you'll learn what Poddit is, and how you can use it. 

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/721

       Time Table

       03:03 Poddit Interview - Brent Basham

       14:43 A Guest Questionnaire

       22:11 What Podcasters Can Learn From Michael Jordan

       24:22 Focus Groups Tips

       27:47 Website Webinar May 20th

       28:13 Descript is Pretty Cool

       31:16 SOP Housekeeping

       What is Poddit?

       People are using email, they're using Google forms, and we're moving a direction to really try to solve that pain point for podcasters where they can push everything to our platform, use our platform. To coordinate and integrate, like the scheduling and all the different parts of it. It could be the central place for coordination of the interview and all the details and reminders, and there's a lot of things.

       The Goal of Poddit?

       Poddit wants to be the best way to connect for your next podcast interview. There's a lot of facets to that on each side of the mic and they are exploring and expanding on both sides. 

        

       Poddit Preview Video

       Click here to watch the Poddit Preview Video

       Your Podcast Website Webinar

       This free webinar will cover what you can do on your website, best practices, and some new tools you can use to create a great looking, highly functional website. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Question of the Month 

       Did you use any kind of focus group for your podcast? If you did what did you learn, if not why not? 

       I need your answers by May 22nd, 2020. Be sure to mention your podcast and website (slowly) 

       see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Poddit.net

       Text Expander

       The Ultimate Guide to Doing and Being Interviewed

       Other Resources For Finding Guests from podcastingresources.com

       Interview with Andrew from Podcastguests.com

       School of Podcasting Poddit Page

       Start Your Podcast

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee

       go to www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/start

       ]]>Last year I met Brent Besham and She Podcast Live and hear about Poddit.  In this interview, you'll learn what Poddit is, and how you can use it. 

       Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/721

       Time Table

       03:03 Poddit Interview - Brent Basham

       14:43 A Guest Questionnaire

       22:11 What Podcasters Can Learn From Michael Jordan

       24:22 Focus Groups Tips

       27:47 Website Webinar May 20th

       28:13 Descript is Pretty Cool

       31:16 SOP Housekeeping

       What is Poddit?

       People are using email, they're using Google forms, and we're moving a direction to really try to solve that pain point for podcasters where they can push everything to our platform, use our platform. To coordinate and integrate, like the scheduling and all the different parts of it. It could be the central place for coordination of the interview and all the details and reminders, and there's a lot of things.

       The Goal of Poddit?

       Poddit wants to be the best way to connect for your next podcast interview. There's a lot of facets to that on each side of the mic and they are exploring and expanding on both sides. 

        

       Poddit Preview Video

       Click here to watch the Poddit Preview Video

       Your Podcast Website Webinar

       This free webinar will cover what you can do on your website, best practices, and some new tools you can use to create a great looking, highly functional website. 

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Question of the Month 

       Did you use any kind of focus group for your podcast? If you did what did you learn, if not why not? 

       I need your answers by May 22nd, 2020. Be sure to mention your podcast and website (slowly) 

       see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Poddit.net

       Text Expander

       The Ultimate Guide to Doing and Being Interviewed

       Other Resources For Finding Guests from podcastingresources.com

       Interview with Andrew from Podcastguests.com

       School of Podcasting Poddit Page

       Start Your Podcast

       Join worry-free with a 30-day money-back guarantee

       go to www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/start

       ]]>4e05cb74-7920-4530-8153-915876263a72Mon, 04 May 2020 04:00:00 -040034:33falsefull721721What Do You Use To Create Your Podcast?Because of My Podcast

       Kevin from the AP Professor

       Check out Kevin's book "Pandemic Tracking: A survival Guide for College Faculty."

       Check out Kevin on the Podcast Review Show

       Contributors

       Arnie Chapman _ Football History Dude

       Joan Wheeler - Culture Rich Podcast

       Darwyn Dave - Dealing with My Grief

       David Oliver Kling Sacramental Whine, and Midgard Interactive

       Kris from Kris and Kristine

       Clay Groves From Fish Nerds

       Zoe and Sammy From the Daily Chicken Podcast

       York From Poetic Earthlings 

       Dennis Trumpy - Sleep To Healthy

       Stephen Indrisano - Stephen King Boo! Club

       Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice

       Timothy Kimo Brien - Create Art & Podwrecked

       Mike Thomas - Innopsis Podcast

       Links to All Items at the Website

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/720

       Time Table

       00:43 Because of my Podcast 05:09 What Do You Use to Make Your Podcast 06:07 Arnie Chapman Football History Dude 08:30 Joan Wheeler Culture Rich Podcast 12:09 Darwyn Dave Delling with My Grief 16:37 Dave - Sacimental Whine - MidGaurd Interactive 18:37 Kris - Kris and Kristine Show 21:04 Clay Groves - Fish Nerds 23:44 Zoe & Sammy The Daily Chicken 25:06 York - Poetic Earthlings 26:10 Dennis Trumpy - Sleep to Healthy 28:05 Steven Indrisano - Steven King Boo! Club 32:59 Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice 39:46 Tim From Create Art 42:55 Mike Thomas - Innopsis Podcasts 46:19 Dave - School of Podcasting 50:41 May Question of the Month

       Become a Paton

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/support

       ]]>Because of My Podcast

       Kevin from the AP Professor

       Check out Kevin's book "Pandemic Tracking: A survival Guide for College Faculty."

       Check out Kevin on the Podcast Review Show

       Contributors

       Arnie Chapman _ Football History Dude

       Joan Wheeler - Culture Rich Podcast

       Darwyn Dave - Dealing with My Grief

       David Oliver Kling Sacramental Whine, and Midgard Interactive

       Kris from Kris and Kristine

       Clay Groves From Fish Nerds

       Zoe and Sammy From the Daily Chicken Podcast

       York From Poetic Earthlings 

       Dennis Trumpy - Sleep To Healthy

       Stephen Indrisano - Stephen King Boo! Club

       Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice

       Timothy Kimo Brien - Create Art & Podwrecked

       Mike Thomas - Innopsis Podcast

       Links to All Items at the Website

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/720

       Time Table

       00:43 Because of my Podcast 05:09 What Do You Use to Make Your Podcast 06:07 Arnie Chapman Football History Dude 08:30 Joan Wheeler Culture Rich Podcast 12:09 Darwyn Dave Delling with My Grief 16:37 Dave - Sacimental Whine - MidGaurd Interactive 18:37 Kris - Kris and Kristine Show 21:04 Clay Groves - Fish Nerds 23:44 Zoe & Sammy The Daily Chicken 25:06 York - Poetic Earthlings 26:10 Dennis Trumpy - Sleep to Healthy 28:05 Steven Indrisano - Steven King Boo! Club 32:59 Kim Newlove - The Pharmacists Voice 39:46 Tim From Create Art 42:55 Mike Thomas - Innopsis Podcasts 46:19 Dave - School of Podcasting 50:41 May Question of the Month

       Become a Paton

       http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/support

       ]]>228a4cbf-137c-4b41-ba6d-432fb9e382d3Mon, 27 Apr 2020 04:00:00 -040056:36falsefull720720300 Percent Growth in Business Revenue - Wealth Without Wallstreet InterviewAccording to the Site My Podcast Reviews, there are now over 1 million active podcasts. They define “active” as any podcast that has published at least one episode in the last 90 days, and “inactive” as any podcast that has not published any episode in that same time." So what does this mean?
       • Podcasting is not a fad
       • Podcasting works
       • Podcasting is continuing to grow
       
       

       Does this mean you are too late. NO! Really podcasting is just getting warmed up. There is still 30% percent of the US that hasn't listened to a podcast yet.

       Wealth Without Walstreet's Russ and Joey Discuss How Podcasting Boosted Their Business

       Today we are joined by Russ Morgan and Joey Mure from Wealth Without Wallstreet. This interview was done during a pandemic, children were home from school so my guests Joey and Russ retreated to their closet and to their car to find a quiet place. You have to use what is available and if that is a phone line- that's what you use. This had some great takeaways

       07:27 Starting with no real plan

       08:44 The Original Community

       10:14 Community Tools (Mighty Networks)

       11:26 Podcasting Enhanced Their Services

       13:03 Behind the Scenes of the Community

       16:10 How their business has changed

       17:58 Their Prospects are Better Educated

       19:39 How do you know your podcast is good?

       22:15 How Do They Choose Their Topics

       25:57 Because of My Podcast

       29:31 Things That Didn't Work

       34:32 Special Deal from Russ and Joey

       38:06 Question of the Month Reminder

       39:31 Ready To Start You Podcast?

       44:04 Bloopers

       I love that they built a place for their community to find out what they needed (using Might Networks) and they invited their guests to do open Q&A and invited them into their community.

       You can join their community and take charge of your finances by going to www.wealthwithoutwallstreet.com/sop

       Podcast Quick Launch Back Open

       As I only allow so many people in the mentoring program at the same time, it was not available for a little while. Those people have gone through the program and it is not available.

       Click HERE for more information.

       This Month's Question

       For April, “What do you use to create your podcast?” This could be hardware, software, business tracking, organizational if you use it in some capacity with the creation of your podcast.” We need your answer by April 24th, 2020. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       More Detailed Notes at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/719

       ]]>According to the Site My Podcast Reviews, there are now over 1 million active podcasts. They define “active” as any podcast that has published at least one episode in the last 90 days, and “inactive” as any podcast that has not published any episode in that same time." So what does this mean?
       • Podcasting is not a fad
       • Podcasting works
       • Podcasting is continuing to grow
       
       

       Does this mean you are too late. NO! Really podcasting is just getting warmed up. There is still 30% percent of the US that hasn't listened to a podcast yet.

       Wealth Without Walstreet's Russ and Joey Discuss How Podcasting Boosted Their Business

       Today we are joined by Russ Morgan and Joey Mure from Wealth Without Wallstreet. This interview was done during a pandemic, children were home from school so my guests Joey and Russ retreated to their closet and to their car to find a quiet place. You have to use what is available and if that is a phone line- that's what you use. This had some great takeaways

       07:27 Starting with no real plan

       08:44 The Original Community

       10:14 Community Tools (Mighty Networks)

       11:26 Podcasting Enhanced Their Services

       13:03 Behind the Scenes of the Community

       16:10 How their business has changed

       17:58 Their Prospects are Better Educated

       19:39 How do you know your podcast is good?

       22:15 How Do They Choose Their Topics

       25:57 Because of My Podcast

       29:31 Things That Didn't Work

       34:32 Special Deal from Russ and Joey

       38:06 Question of the Month Reminder

       39:31 Ready To Start You Podcast?

       44:04 Bloopers

       I love that they built a place for their community to find out what they needed (using Might Networks) and they invited their guests to do open Q&A and invited them into their community.

       You can join their community and take charge of your finances by going to www.wealthwithoutwallstreet.com/sop

       Podcast Quick Launch Back Open

       As I only allow so many people in the mentoring program at the same time, it was not available for a little while. Those people have gone through the program and it is not available.

       Click HERE for more information.

       This Month's Question

       For April, “What do you use to create your podcast?” This could be hardware, software, business tracking, organizational if you use it in some capacity with the creation of your podcast.” We need your answer by April 24th, 2020. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       More Detailed Notes at

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/719

       ]]>c5b74eab-a909-46a1-a782-6e0e48ccbb82Mon, 20 Apr 2020 04:00:00 -040045:29falsefull719719They Said, "Why Not" Now Look at Them!As a podcast consultant and coach, my biggest struggle is not getting people to pick a name, or artwork, or finding the right gear. Those are all a walk in the park. My hardest part is getting people to start. First I need them to press record, and then I need them (after a few practice runs) to press publish. Then once I get them to publish, you have to be ready to pivot and tweak your podcast unless you think you got it 100% perfect on the very first try. 

       Today I share stories and insights from

       Danny Elfman

       Kevin Smith

       Jeff Dunham

       Matthew Dicks

       Bouncecast Software Review

       See the video podcast review www.schoolofpodcasting.com/bouncecastreview

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       Need a place to come hang out and chill. Looking for a place to come and just have some conversations and relax? Check out

       www.podcasterhappyhour.com

       Question of the Month

       What do you use to create your show? Answer at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast? Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Start your podcast today. Click Here

       Mentioned in this Episode

       What was that like podcast with William Hung?

       Storyworthy Book

       Speak Up Story Telling Podcast

       Jeff Dunham on WTF

       Kevin Smith Interview

       Danny Elfman Masterclass

       The Podcaster Attitude – Your Biggest Tool For Success

       Juggling the Podcaster Attitude

       Overcoming with Imposter Syndrome

       ]]>As a podcast consultant and coach, my biggest struggle is not getting people to pick a name, or artwork, or finding the right gear. Those are all a walk in the park. My hardest part is getting people to start. First I need them to press record, and then I need them (after a few practice runs) to press publish. Then once I get them to publish, you have to be ready to pivot and tweak your podcast unless you think you got it 100% perfect on the very first try. 

       Today I share stories and insights from

       Danny Elfman

       Kevin Smith

       Jeff Dunham

       Matthew Dicks

       Bouncecast Software Review

       See the video podcast review www.schoolofpodcasting.com/bouncecastreview

       Podcaster Happy Hour

       Need a place to come hang out and chill. Looking for a place to come and just have some conversations and relax? Check out

       www.podcasterhappyhour.com

       Question of the Month

       What do you use to create your show? Answer at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Ready To Start Your Podcast? Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Start your podcast today. Click Here

       Mentioned in this Episode

       What was that like podcast with William Hung?

       Storyworthy Book

       Speak Up Story Telling Podcast

       Jeff Dunham on WTF

       Kevin Smith Interview

       Danny Elfman Masterclass

       The Podcaster Attitude – Your Biggest Tool For Success

       Juggling the Podcaster Attitude

       Overcoming with Imposter Syndrome

       ]]>225467d7-9c93-43ac-92c9-899187789847Mon, 13 Apr 2020 04:00:00 -040039:36falsefull718718What podcasters can learn from the Tiger KingAfter the fourth person had asked me if I had watched the Tiger King on Netflix I decided to give it a try. It's not good. I got about halfway through and only watched the second half looking for closure. It's bad people behaving badly. I was on a Zoom call with my family and my brother had not seen it yet, and as he put it "everybody is talking about it." The whole family said the same thing, "it's awful, its a waste of time." I'm pretty sure he's going to start watching it. Why? Well here are some things podcasters can gleam from Joe Exotic (i.e. The "Tiger King").
       Table of Contents:

       01:27 I'm in Facebook Jail

       21:53 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       23:17 Misty Phillip from Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       37:23 Podcast Rodeo Show Promo

       39:00 Consulting with Dave

       39:45 Danny Pena Connects with His Audience

       42:19 Question of the Month Promo

       43:08 Get On the Podcast

       44:32 Bloopers

       Joe Exoctic is Unique

       Joe lives in the middle of nowhere Oklahoma. Even by "Florida Man" (home of bizarre behavior) standards Joe Exotic is very unique. I'm going to kind of spoil the show, so if you haven't watched and it and plan on doing so, now is the time to stop reading.

       Joe is a gun-toting, country music singing, gay, polygamist, Youtuber, who likes to blow things up at his zoo where he has tigers, alligators, and other exotic animals while he manages his campaigns for President and Governor.

       He is what some people might call "a character." I could go on, but I think I've made my point.

       Joe Had a Unique Product That Solved a Problem

       Joe would breed tigers and take the cubs on tours to small where people could pet them and get their picture taken. It's like Santa with claws and teeth. Much like Santa, Joe was taking in the cash because he was providing something you can't get anyplace else. Consequently, he was making some serious cash.

       Joe Lost Sight of His Audience

       Joe's arch-nemesis is Carol Baskins who is also "unique" in that her very rich husband disappeared a few years ago making her rich and they never found his body. Carol runs a large cat "Rescue" that looks a lot like a zoo. She has an army of volunteers who work for her. She is basically doing the same thing Joe is (has a large plot of land where people can see large Cats in cages) but Carol has a WHY. Some people become fans of what you do, other people become fans of people because of why they do it.

       Carol helped Joe's mall tour get shut down. Instead of looking for another solution, another product, or another animal, Joe got distracted. Instead of talking to his audience and asking them what else they might want, he became 100% obsessed with competition.

       Joe Started To Compare Himself to Others

       Joe did some things right. He reached out to other large cat owners (who are also living "differently" than most people) and attempted to mimic their success. However, as time goes on you see Joe simply go from hating Carol Baskins, to obsessing over her. His only "TV Show" seemed to be him talking about Carol and what a bad person she was, and how she couldn't bring him down, etc. Joe forgot he was the Tiger King, and became the Carol Baskins King.

       Comparison is the Thief of Joy

       The more Joe obsessed over what Carol was up to, the less he focused on his audience. You don't see him looking into adding creating better environments for the cats that might also get the audience closer to the cats. I once lead classes on Microsoft Office to the staff of the Akron Zoo. That is their whole purpose. Making an exhibit that made life enjoyable for the animals while getting the audience as close as possible and keeping both the animal and audience safe. Over the years their audience has grown and their prices have risen as well as you get a great experience and don't have to spend an hour driving to Cleveland.

       Surround Yourself with Good People

       The part of the story that tugged at my heart more than the Tigers, was one of Joe's husbands has lost most of his teeth due to a meth problem. He stuck around Joe because Joe bought him guns, trucks, and another thing (and he got to pet large cats). Joe treats his staff horribly, takes them for granted, and creates a revolving door of workers.

       Things Do Not End Well

       When you are deprived of joy and become frightened, angry, or any other emotion that is not calm and collected you can make bad decisions. Joe is the king of bad decisions. It turns out that Joe had actually killed some of his older cats, and if you want to watch more disturbing things on Netflix watch Don't F*ck with Cats.

       Misty Phillip From the Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       I was honored to speak at the Spark Christian Podcast Conference last year. It was an amazing event, and the mind-boggling part it was thrown together in very little time. In this interview with Misty Phillip (who also has a podcast), she gives some behind the scenes of how she pulled this off. Key points include:

       • She released control to someone who had experience (which is very hard as you only get once chance to make a first impression, and this was the first year of the event).
       • She was amazed at how many people said YES (so if you're afraid to start something - people you think will say no might say YES)
       • She did a Kickstarter to gauge the overall interest which helped her avoid getting in over her head financially
       • She has built a network over the years, and those people will want to support you.
       
       Dany Peña Still Connecting With Audience During Pandemic

       Hall of fame podcaster Danny Peña has been on the show before and is known for a man who is always building and servicing his community at Gamertag Radio. So how do you do that when everyone is ordered to stay indoors (Danny is in New York City)? You use the tools you have like Voicemail, Speakpipe, and Email. In the end, Danny said it's about the connection, not the quality of the content coming in from his listeners. Check ou Danny at www.gamertagradio.com

       I'm in Facebook Jail -How Do I Get Out?

       I haven't changed the way I've used Facebook in the many years I've used it, but now I'm in Facebook jail.

       Here is the one of the messages that I put in my own private Facebook that got flagged as Spam ( www.schoolofpodcasting.com/717 )

       If you know any tips or insights, or any connections to someone at Facebook, I'd love to hear from you. Currently, you can't link to the School of Podcasting on Facebook.

       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Start your podcast today. Click Here

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Netflix show Tiger King

       Neflix show Don't F*ck with Cats.

       ]]>After the fourth person had asked me if I had watched the Tiger King on Netflix I decided to give it a try. It's not good. I got about halfway through and only watched the second half looking for closure. It's bad people behaving badly. I was on a Zoom call with my family and my brother had not seen it yet, and as he put it "everybody is talking about it." The whole family said the same thing, "it's awful, its a waste of time." I'm pretty sure he's going to start watching it. Why? Well here are some things podcasters can gleam from Joe Exotic (i.e. The "Tiger King").
       Table of Contents:

       01:27 I'm in Facebook Jail

       21:53 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       23:17 Misty Phillip from Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       37:23 Podcast Rodeo Show Promo

       39:00 Consulting with Dave

       39:45 Danny Pena Connects with His Audience

       42:19 Question of the Month Promo

       43:08 Get On the Podcast

       44:32 Bloopers

       Joe Exoctic is Unique

       Joe lives in the middle of nowhere Oklahoma. Even by "Florida Man" (home of bizarre behavior) standards Joe Exotic is very unique. I'm going to kind of spoil the show, so if you haven't watched and it and plan on doing so, now is the time to stop reading.

       Joe is a gun-toting, country music singing, gay, polygamist, Youtuber, who likes to blow things up at his zoo where he has tigers, alligators, and other exotic animals while he manages his campaigns for President and Governor.

       He is what some people might call "a character." I could go on, but I think I've made my point.

       Joe Had a Unique Product That Solved a Problem

       Joe would breed tigers and take the cubs on tours to small where people could pet them and get their picture taken. It's like Santa with claws and teeth. Much like Santa, Joe was taking in the cash because he was providing something you can't get anyplace else. Consequently, he was making some serious cash.

       Joe Lost Sight of His Audience

       Joe's arch-nemesis is Carol Baskins who is also "unique" in that her very rich husband disappeared a few years ago making her rich and they never found his body. Carol runs a large cat "Rescue" that looks a lot like a zoo. She has an army of volunteers who work for her. She is basically doing the same thing Joe is (has a large plot of land where people can see large Cats in cages) but Carol has a WHY. Some people become fans of what you do, other people become fans of people because of why they do it.

       Carol helped Joe's mall tour get shut down. Instead of looking for another solution, another product, or another animal, Joe got distracted. Instead of talking to his audience and asking them what else they might want, he became 100% obsessed with competition.

       Joe Started To Compare Himself to Others

       Joe did some things right. He reached out to other large cat owners (who are also living "differently" than most people) and attempted to mimic their success. However, as time goes on you see Joe simply go from hating Carol Baskins, to obsessing over her. His only "TV Show" seemed to be him talking about Carol and what a bad person she was, and how she couldn't bring him down, etc. Joe forgot he was the Tiger King, and became the Carol Baskins King.

       Comparison is the Thief of Joy

       The more Joe obsessed over what Carol was up to, the less he focused on his audience. You don't see him looking into adding creating better environments for the cats that might also get the audience closer to the cats. I once lead classes on Microsoft Office to the staff of the Akron Zoo. That is their whole purpose. Making an exhibit that made life enjoyable for the animals while getting the audience as close as possible and keeping both the animal and audience safe. Over the years their audience has grown and their prices have risen as well as you get a great experience and don't have to spend an hour driving to Cleveland.

       Surround Yourself with Good People

       The part of the story that tugged at my heart more than the Tigers, was one of Joe's husbands has lost most of his teeth due to a meth problem. He stuck around Joe because Joe bought him guns, trucks, and another thing (and he got to pet large cats). Joe treats his staff horribly, takes them for granted, and creates a revolving door of workers.

       Things Do Not End Well

       When you are deprived of joy and become frightened, angry, or any other emotion that is not calm and collected you can make bad decisions. Joe is the king of bad decisions. It turns out that Joe had actually killed some of his older cats, and if you want to watch more disturbing things on Netflix watch Don't F*ck with Cats.

       Misty Phillip From the Spark Christian Podcast Conference

       I was honored to speak at the Spark Christian Podcast Conference last year. It was an amazing event, and the mind-boggling part it was thrown together in very little time. In this interview with Misty Phillip (who also has a podcast), she gives some behind the scenes of how she pulled this off. Key points include:

       • She released control to someone who had experience (which is very hard as you only get once chance to make a first impression, and this was the first year of the event).
       • She was amazed at how many people said YES (so if you're afraid to start something - people you think will say no might say YES)
       • She did a Kickstarter to gauge the overall interest which helped her avoid getting in over her head financially
       • She has built a network over the years, and those people will want to support you.
       
       Dany Peña Still Connecting With Audience During Pandemic

       Hall of fame podcaster Danny Peña has been on the show before and is known for a man who is always building and servicing his community at Gamertag Radio. So how do you do that when everyone is ordered to stay indoors (Danny is in New York City)? You use the tools you have like Voicemail, Speakpipe, and Email. In the end, Danny said it's about the connection, not the quality of the content coming in from his listeners. Check ou Danny at www.gamertagradio.com

       I'm in Facebook Jail -How Do I Get Out?

       I haven't changed the way I've used Facebook in the many years I've used it, but now I'm in Facebook jail.

       Here is the one of the messages that I put in my own private Facebook that got flagged as Spam ( www.schoolofpodcasting.com/717 )

       If you know any tips or insights, or any connections to someone at Facebook, I'd love to hear from you. Currently, you can't link to the School of Podcasting on Facebook.

       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Start your podcast today. Click Here

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Netflix show Tiger King

       Neflix show Don't F*ck with Cats.

       ]]>6f548f60-5c80-4c32-b928-ad47d879e897Mon, 06 Apr 2020 04:00:00 -040045:36falsefull717717Three Reasons Why Radio Personalities Should Be PodcastingI thought it would be a good idea for Radio Personalities (DJs) to have a podcast. I know that they often lose their jobs due to the consolidation of stations, automation, genre changes, and more. However, I only thought it was a good idea. I didn't know because I only know to podcast, Erik K. Johnson is the Podcast Talent Coach and co-host of The Podcast Review show and he's been in radio 30 years and is a program director for iHeart Media. So I asked Erik for his opinion and he gave me three reasons radio personalities should have a podcast

       Note: Most of this post was transcribed from the recording, so when you read "We" it's Erik and iHeart (not Erik and myself).

       Three Reasons Radio DJs Should Have Their Own Podcast
       • Built-in Demo
       • Freedom To Talk About Whatever You Want
       • Develop a Deeper Brand
       
       

       Be sure to read the contract and know what you're signing. 

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Thanks to:

       Arnie from www.footballhistorydude.com

       Steve Stewart from www.stevestewart.me

       Brande Ushio from https://fandompodcast.com/

       Table of Contents

       1:43 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       3:46 Revisit Bad Audio

       5:26 Three Reasons Radio Personalities Should Have a Podcast

       17:07 Say No to Puke Voice

       19:53 Question of the Month

        

       Ready to Start Your Podcast

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>I thought it would be a good idea for Radio Personalities (DJs) to have a podcast. I know that they often lose their jobs due to the consolidation of stations, automation, genre changes, and more. However, I only thought it was a good idea. I didn't know because I only know to podcast, Erik K. Johnson is the Podcast Talent Coach and co-host of The Podcast Review show and he's been in radio 30 years and is a program director for iHeart Media. So I asked Erik for his opinion and he gave me three reasons radio personalities should have a podcast

       Note: Most of this post was transcribed from the recording, so when you read "We" it's Erik and iHeart (not Erik and myself).

       Three Reasons Radio DJs Should Have Their Own Podcast
       • Built-in Demo
       • Freedom To Talk About Whatever You Want
       • Develop a Deeper Brand
       
       

       Be sure to read the contract and know what you're signing. 

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Thanks to:

       Arnie from www.footballhistorydude.com

       Steve Stewart from www.stevestewart.me

       Brande Ushio from https://fandompodcast.com/

       Table of Contents

       1:43 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       3:46 Revisit Bad Audio

       5:26 Three Reasons Radio Personalities Should Have a Podcast

       17:07 Say No to Puke Voice

       19:53 Question of the Month

        

       Ready to Start Your Podcast

       See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

        

       ]]>b79d86d5-faae-4b37-b0cc-0ac63c36d402Mon, 30 Mar 2020 04:00:00 -040041:03falsefull716716What Does Bad Audio Sound Like?What do people mean when they say "Bad Audio" well I made some. You will hear where some strategies DO create bad audio and others (using your phone may not be horrible). 
       SPONSOR: Focusrite

       Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to  http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Samson Q2u

       Childless by Choice

       Sound Off Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Start Podcasting Worry Free

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Private Facebook group filled with great podcasting minds
       • Live group coaching sessions 
       • Priority Email support
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/live

       30-Day Money-Back Guarantee 

       Table of Contents

       01:30 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       03:31 Defining what Bad Audio Sounds Like

       03:54 Built-in Camera Mic

       04:42 Built-in Laptop Mic

       05:36 Recording into Voicememo on My iPhone

       06:12 Samson Q2U in the Bathroom

       07:29 Using Blankets

       08:09 Dave in His Closet

       09:01 Blue Yeti in the Bathroom

       10:34 Blue Yeti under Blankets

       11:01 Blue Yeti in the Closet

       12:26 Blue Yeti on a Desk

       12:55 Q2U in the Closet

       14:31 Trying to Clean Bad Audio

       16:16 Do Portable Audio Booths Work?

       20:15 Noise Gate Example

       21:56 EQ Settings to Try

       24:59 EQ Examples

       26:38 Podcast Rewind

       29:44 Some Light Reading

       31:30 March Question of the Month

       32:02 schoolofpodcasting.com/725

       ]]>What do people mean when they say "Bad Audio" well I made some. You will hear where some strategies DO create bad audio and others (using your phone may not be horrible). 
       SPONSOR: Focusrite

       Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to  http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Samson Q2u

       Childless by Choice

       Sound Off Podcast

       Podcast Rodeo Show

       Start Podcasting Worry Free

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

       • Step by step tutorials
       • Private Facebook group filled with great podcasting minds
       • Live group coaching sessions 
       • Priority Email support
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/live

       30-Day Money-Back Guarantee 

       Table of Contents

       01:30 Focusrite Studio Makeover

       03:31 Defining what Bad Audio Sounds Like

       03:54 Built-in Camera Mic

       04:42 Built-in Laptop Mic

       05:36 Recording into Voicememo on My iPhone

       06:12 Samson Q2U in the Bathroom

       07:29 Using Blankets

       08:09 Dave in His Closet

       09:01 Blue Yeti in the Bathroom

       10:34 Blue Yeti under Blankets

       11:01 Blue Yeti in the Closet

       12:26 Blue Yeti on a Desk

       12:55 Q2U in the Closet

       14:31 Trying to Clean Bad Audio

       16:16 Do Portable Audio Booths Work?

       20:15 Noise Gate Example

       21:56 EQ Settings to Try

       24:59 EQ Examples

       26:38 Podcast Rewind

       29:44 Some Light Reading

       31:30 March Question of the Month

       32:02 schoolofpodcasting.com/725

       ]]>7ae3df3a-d662-4ab9-b632-9adfb5485820Mon, 23 Mar 2020 04:00:00 -040033:28falsefull715715Emergency Podcasting For TeachersAcross the US (and the world) schools are closed to try to reduce the number of people spreading the Carona Virus. This makes it very hard for teachers who still need to deliver lesson plans. With this in mind, I've made a video that shows you how to turn your lesson plans into a podcast. It's free, and the strategy uses free tools. 
       Sponsor: Focusrite

       Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to  http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Free Video Set Up Your Podcast in 20 Minutes

       Click HERE to get access to video

       Wait, am I giving away the School of Podcasting stuff? No. Starting a podcast is easy. Starting a GOOD podcast is not. There is no "define your audience," and "define or why" or "check your band alignment" here, this is simply putting content (that may or may not sound great) on the internet for people to listen.

       Tips for Working From Home

       Avoid working in a room with a television.

       I've got tips on staying focused in a previous episode.

       In some cases, close the door to "block out" the rest of your home (to avoid distractions).

       What Does The Caronoavirus Mean For Podcasting?

       In some cases, your audience may be bored. They may find themselves with "Free time."

       I believe in one of Michael Hyatt's books he says when situations like this arise look around and say "what does this enable me to do that I normally don't do."

       • Spend more time with your spouse and children.
       • Read a book (or listen to a podcast)
       • Clean your house (that's my plan this weekend)
       • See who can use the smallest amount of squares to wipe their butt.
       • Watch some cooking videos and cook from home. I made a dish last night called "Not Chipotle" that was chicken, rice, lettuce, cheese, and a bit of french salad dressing.
       • Create an online mastermind
       • Jump rope, push-ups, dust off the treadmill.
       • Watch Saturday Night Live (it's still on)
       • (or even better) Go to bed early.
       • Eat all those things in the fridge and freezer that you bought by accident (asparagus! what?). New food is exciting (and often freezer burnt).
       • There is a feature on your phone that if I understand this correctly you can "Call" (Whatever that is ) people and talk to them in real-time.

         When I was married and things would go left of center, my wife and I would look at each other and say "Well, this is going to be a fun adventure..."

         Remember where there is a shadow, there is a light. You'll be able to look back and say "I lived through that."

         Because of My Podcast: Jim Harold has Met a TON of Childhood Heroes

         Jim Harold has been on this show a few times. He is the man behind the Paranormal Podcast, and recently launch a podcast where he talks to other podcasters called "Podlords." In a recent episode he stated, "You know, I've done different podcasts over the years, some of them have, "caught on," and they are part of my business and I make money on them. There were other shows that haven't caught on as much, but we're just cool to do. Jim did a show called "The Great TV podcast" and it's still available. Jim loves classic  TV ( TV from the 60s and 70s).

         Jim did the Great TV Podcast and he got to talk to Ed Asner who Mary Tyler Moore Show. He got to talk to Marianne from Gilligan's Island. He got to talk to the late Richard Hatch from Battlestar Galactica. Oher interviews were Donnie Most from happy days ( he played Ralph M). Judy Norton from the Waltons.

         That is the power of podcasting as Jim put it, "If I had called up Ed as an agent and said, you know, I'd like to talk to Ed Asner for a half-hour about his career. I just think it would be cool. Well, that's not gonna happen. I've got a podcast. He has a new play coming out. Can I talk to him? I certainly know that is the opportunity. The people I've gotten to talk to who I would have never had a chance to get that alone aside from being my job has been a great reward. So, I mean, the opportunity, aside from money is tremendous."

         Jim has been podcasting since 2005 and podcasts full time at www.jimharold.com and does the paranormal podcast as well as other paranormal related shows. He also has many books featuring true ghost stories on Amazon.com

         Question of the Month

         For March, “If you have a podcast, have you surveyed your audience? If so what did you learn?”If you haven't surveyed your audience, why not? "

         Please (if you have one) mention the name of your show (be careful not to say it so fast I don't understand you) and your website (again, nice and clear). I need your answer by Match 27, 2020.

         Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

         Audio Technica 2100X vs Samson Q2u

         Today I test the Audio Technica against a Samson Q2u, and AT2005 USB. I didn't hear much difference. Keep in mind, you can always tweak these with EQ (equalization) in post-production. Check out my Gear guide for more information.

         New (Better) Affiliate Program For the School of Podcasting

         If you have people asking about how to make a podcast, you can refer them to the School of Podcasting and get paid if they sign up. You also get paid for every month they stay signed up.

         For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

         Mentioned In This Episode

         Jim Harold

         Happiness Lab

         Free "Just Get Me Started" Emergency Podcast Video

       
       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Across the US (and the world) schools are closed to try to reduce the number of people spreading the Carona Virus. This makes it very hard for teachers who still need to deliver lesson plans. With this in mind, I've made a video that shows you how to turn your lesson plans into a podcast. It's free, and the strategy uses free tools. 
       Sponsor: Focusrite

       Focusrite is giving away a $2300 studio makeover. This includes the Scarlett 18i8, a Heil PR40, headphones, Hindenburg software, a deep discount on Squadcast, consulting and more (I wish I could enter). To enter the contest go to  http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Free Video Set Up Your Podcast in 20 Minutes

       Click HERE to get access to video

       Wait, am I giving away the School of Podcasting stuff? No. Starting a podcast is easy. Starting a GOOD podcast is not. There is no "define your audience," and "define or why" or "check your band alignment" here, this is simply putting content (that may or may not sound great) on the internet for people to listen.

       Tips for Working From Home

       Avoid working in a room with a television.

       I've got tips on staying focused in a previous episode.

       In some cases, close the door to "block out" the rest of your home (to avoid distractions).

       What Does The Caronoavirus Mean For Podcasting?

       In some cases, your audience may be bored. They may find themselves with "Free time."

       I believe in one of Michael Hyatt's books he says when situations like this arise look around and say "what does this enable me to do that I normally don't do."

       • Spend more time with your spouse and children.
       • Read a book (or listen to a podcast)
       • Clean your house (that's my plan this weekend)
       • See who can use the smallest amount of squares to wipe their butt.
       • Watch some cooking videos and cook from home. I made a dish last night called "Not Chipotle" that was chicken, rice, lettuce, cheese, and a bit of french salad dressing.
       • Create an online mastermind
       • Jump rope, push-ups, dust off the treadmill.
       • Watch Saturday Night Live (it's still on)
       • (or even better) Go to bed early.
       • Eat all those things in the fridge and freezer that you bought by accident (asparagus! what?). New food is exciting (and often freezer burnt).
       • There is a feature on your phone that if I understand this correctly you can "Call" (Whatever that is ) people and talk to them in real-time.

         When I was married and things would go left of center, my wife and I would look at each other and say "Well, this is going to be a fun adventure..."

         Remember where there is a shadow, there is a light. You'll be able to look back and say "I lived through that."

         Because of My Podcast: Jim Harold has Met a TON of Childhood Heroes

         Jim Harold has been on this show a few times. He is the man behind the Paranormal Podcast, and recently launch a podcast where he talks to other podcasters called "Podlords." In a recent episode he stated, "You know, I've done different podcasts over the years, some of them have, "caught on," and they are part of my business and I make money on them. There were other shows that haven't caught on as much, but we're just cool to do. Jim did a show called "The Great TV podcast" and it's still available. Jim loves classic  TV ( TV from the 60s and 70s).

         Jim did the Great TV Podcast and he got to talk to Ed Asner who Mary Tyler Moore Show. He got to talk to Marianne from Gilligan's Island. He got to talk to the late Richard Hatch from Battlestar Galactica. Oher interviews were Donnie Most from happy days ( he played Ralph M). Judy Norton from the Waltons.

         That is the power of podcasting as Jim put it, "If I had called up Ed as an agent and said, you know, I'd like to talk to Ed Asner for a half-hour about his career. I just think it would be cool. Well, that's not gonna happen. I've got a podcast. He has a new play coming out. Can I talk to him? I certainly know that is the opportunity. The people I've gotten to talk to who I would have never had a chance to get that alone aside from being my job has been a great reward. So, I mean, the opportunity, aside from money is tremendous."

         Jim has been podcasting since 2005 and podcasts full time at www.jimharold.com and does the paranormal podcast as well as other paranormal related shows. He also has many books featuring true ghost stories on Amazon.com

         Question of the Month

         For March, “If you have a podcast, have you surveyed your audience? If so what did you learn?”If you haven't surveyed your audience, why not? "

         Please (if you have one) mention the name of your show (be careful not to say it so fast I don't understand you) and your website (again, nice and clear). I need your answer by Match 27, 2020.

         Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

         Audio Technica 2100X vs Samson Q2u

         Today I test the Audio Technica against a Samson Q2u, and AT2005 USB. I didn't hear much difference. Keep in mind, you can always tweak these with EQ (equalization) in post-production. Check out my Gear guide for more information.

         New (Better) Affiliate Program For the School of Podcasting

         If you have people asking about how to make a podcast, you can refer them to the School of Podcasting and get paid if they sign up. You also get paid for every month they stay signed up.

         For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

         Mentioned In This Episode

         Jim Harold

         Happiness Lab

         Free "Just Get Me Started" Emergency Podcast Video

       
       Start Your Podcast Today Join the School of Podcasting
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>59cc7640-58dd-4c3b-a8ba-ff60c3fb481dMon, 16 Mar 2020 04:00:00 -040034:54falsefull714714Give Yourself Credit With Ronsley VazToday I am recording from Podfest Multimedia Expo 2020 and I capture a conversation with Ronsley Vaz in the hallway after he shares an amazing story about listener loyalty. 

       Sometimes we are our own worst enemy. When we don't give ourselves credit, this belief limits our success.

       Focusrite Studio Makeover

       Focusrite wants to help remove any barriers to your creativity by outfitting your podcast studio with products from some of the best brands in content creation. We’ve partnered with them to award three podcasters with a complete studio makeover valued at over $2300 each and the chance for you and your podcast to be featured in a video project produced by Focusrite!

       For more information and a list of prizes see http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Enter the competition today!

       Timeline

       00:00 Focusrite Giveaway

       03:20 Table of Contents

       04:33 Because of My Podcast Ronsley Vaz

       17:22. Recorded Using an iPhone

       18:17. Give Yourself Credit

       Mentioned In this Episode

       Book: Amplify: Raise Your Voice, Boost Your Brand and Grow Your Business

       The Psychology of Entrepreneurship

       Sarah Mikatel podcasting Step by Step

       Podfest Multimedia Expo

       Lou Mongello WDW Radio (Walt Disney World)

       Storyworthy by Matthew Dicks

       Get Storyworthy for Free at Audible

       Start Your Podcast Today
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listen

       ]]>Today I am recording from Podfest Multimedia Expo 2020 and I capture a conversation with Ronsley Vaz in the hallway after he shares an amazing story about listener loyalty. 

       Sometimes we are our own worst enemy. When we don't give ourselves credit, this belief limits our success.

       Focusrite Studio Makeover

       Focusrite wants to help remove any barriers to your creativity by outfitting your podcast studio with products from some of the best brands in content creation. We’ve partnered with them to award three podcasters with a complete studio makeover valued at over $2300 each and the chance for you and your podcast to be featured in a video project produced by Focusrite!

       For more information and a list of prizes see http://bit.ly/PSM_Dave-Jackson

       Enter the competition today!

       Timeline

       00:00 Focusrite Giveaway

       03:20 Table of Contents

       04:33 Because of My Podcast Ronsley Vaz

       17:22. Recorded Using an iPhone

       18:17. Give Yourself Credit

       Mentioned In this Episode

       Book: Amplify: Raise Your Voice, Boost Your Brand and Grow Your Business

       The Psychology of Entrepreneurship

       Sarah Mikatel podcasting Step by Step

       Podfest Multimedia Expo

       Lou Mongello WDW Radio (Walt Disney World)

       Storyworthy by Matthew Dicks

       Get Storyworthy for Free at Audible

       Start Your Podcast Today
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/listen

       ]]>63070ee8-fc57-4a96-8298-3cc8cf0cac8dMon, 09 Mar 2020 06:11:54 -040041:59falsefull713713A First Look at Descript Software- Transcriptions and Audio Editor in OneDescript is software that transcribes your episode and then you can go to the transcript and when you removed it from your transcript, it removes it from the audio. You can fade in and cuts that are a little rough to smooth them out. You can mix in music, have multiple mics go into two different tracks so you can edit the "cough" out from person number two while person number one was talking. Enjoy the live demo of Descript in this episode 712 of the School of Podcasting.
       Table of Contents

       01:09 What is Descript? 08:16 Descript Demo 19:20 How Much Is It? 20:02 Descript vs Otter.ai 22:40 My Podcast Reviews Free Month Dela Extended 24:12 #podrevday March 8th 25:03 Because of My Podcast- Carey Green 29:56 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 30:29 Robin Chsitopherson loved the Glow Episode 33:07 March Podcasting Events 37:57 Bloopers

       Descript Live Demo - Transcripts are more than just words

       While many people take the lazy way to show descriptions by thinking transcripts are the golden ticket. In my opinion, transcripts are hard to read and I often click away (which means this is the opposite of what people were hoping for, and Google calls this "bouncing" coming to one page and leaving).

       A transcript can speed up editing by making it easy to see the parts that definitely need edit,  and you will be able to see your crutch words. That is where descript has a very interesting feature. In this video, you see me right-click and erase 14 "ums." Were all the edits perfect? No, but you can use additional tools like fading into a word to smooth out and roughs edit. The price is $10 a month for up to 10 hours of transcription (which is lightning fast). We have a coupon code pec2020 through the end of March 2020 you can get 10% off a yearly subscription. Thanks to Steve Stewart and the Podcast Editors Club, and the Podcast Editors Conference for allowing us to borrow their coupon.

       Watch Video

        

       My Podcast Reviews - Get A Free Month Deal Extended

       22:40

       I interviewed Daniel J Lewis back on episode 709 talking about My Podcast Reviews which scans all of the apple stores and emails you copies of your reviews (or your competitors) where you can then share them, add them to your media kit, etc. Originally the offer of a free month was to end in February but the free month offer has been extended until March 7,2020. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr to get your free month

       Podcast Review Day March 8 #podrevday

       24:12 Steph Fuccio has started a tradition of picking one day out of the month to review at least one podcast. You can join in on Twitter and Instagram by using #podrevday  -more information.

       Because of My Podcast - Carey Green

       Carey Green is a podcast editor (see podcastfasttrack.com) and does a podcast about podcasting at podcastification.com but his show Morning Mindset has been growing very quickly, and he is having meetups with listeners, and now he is frequently receiving prayer requests. Carey is now doing one episode where it is Carey praying for multiple people on one episode. Think about the comfort and closeness one must feel to ask someone "Will you pray for me?" Check out Carey's Morning Mindset podcast at https://careygreen.com/

       Robin Christopherson loved the Glow Episode

       Robin does a daily Dot to Dot show about Amazon skills. He has a large audience but was looking for a new way to monetize his show. He heard my interview with Glow.fm CEO and loved it. You can hear it at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/706

       If you want to check out my Glow page see www.glow.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       March Podcasting Events

       March 3: Podcast Portland Meetup

       March 4: The Publisher Podcast Awards

       March 6-8: Podfest Multimedia Expo

       March 6: Podcast Editors Club, Spots Podcon and others)

       March 7: Podfest Cairo

       March 9-11: New Media Summit

       March 11: Podup Virtual Summit

       March 16: Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

       March 17: California Podcasters Association (Oakland)

       March 17 Virginia Podcasters Association Meetup

       March 19-20 Become a Podcaster in One Day

       March 19: Podcast Cracking the Code

       March 19: Phoenix Podcast Club Social

       March 31: Columbus Podcasters Meetup

       For more information see www.podcastingevents.com

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Descript is software that transcribes your episode and then you can go to the transcript and when you removed it from your transcript, it removes it from the audio. You can fade in and cuts that are a little rough to smooth them out. You can mix in music, have multiple mics go into two different tracks so you can edit the "cough" out from person number two while person number one was talking. Enjoy the live demo of Descript in this episode 712 of the School of Podcasting.
       Table of Contents

       01:09 What is Descript? 08:16 Descript Demo 19:20 How Much Is It? 20:02 Descript vs Otter.ai 22:40 My Podcast Reviews Free Month Dela Extended 24:12 #podrevday March 8th 25:03 Because of My Podcast- Carey Green 29:56 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 30:29 Robin Chsitopherson loved the Glow Episode 33:07 March Podcasting Events 37:57 Bloopers

       Descript Live Demo - Transcripts are more than just words

       While many people take the lazy way to show descriptions by thinking transcripts are the golden ticket. In my opinion, transcripts are hard to read and I often click away (which means this is the opposite of what people were hoping for, and Google calls this "bouncing" coming to one page and leaving).

       A transcript can speed up editing by making it easy to see the parts that definitely need edit,  and you will be able to see your crutch words. That is where descript has a very interesting feature. In this video, you see me right-click and erase 14 "ums." Were all the edits perfect? No, but you can use additional tools like fading into a word to smooth out and roughs edit. The price is $10 a month for up to 10 hours of transcription (which is lightning fast). We have a coupon code pec2020 through the end of March 2020 you can get 10% off a yearly subscription. Thanks to Steve Stewart and the Podcast Editors Club, and the Podcast Editors Conference for allowing us to borrow their coupon.

       Watch Video

        

       My Podcast Reviews - Get A Free Month Deal Extended

       22:40

       I interviewed Daniel J Lewis back on episode 709 talking about My Podcast Reviews which scans all of the apple stores and emails you copies of your reviews (or your competitors) where you can then share them, add them to your media kit, etc. Originally the offer of a free month was to end in February but the free month offer has been extended until March 7,2020. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr to get your free month

       Podcast Review Day March 8 #podrevday

       24:12 Steph Fuccio has started a tradition of picking one day out of the month to review at least one podcast. You can join in on Twitter and Instagram by using #podrevday  -more information.

       Because of My Podcast - Carey Green

       Carey Green is a podcast editor (see podcastfasttrack.com) and does a podcast about podcasting at podcastification.com but his show Morning Mindset has been growing very quickly, and he is having meetups with listeners, and now he is frequently receiving prayer requests. Carey is now doing one episode where it is Carey praying for multiple people on one episode. Think about the comfort and closeness one must feel to ask someone "Will you pray for me?" Check out Carey's Morning Mindset podcast at https://careygreen.com/

       Robin Christopherson loved the Glow Episode

       Robin does a daily Dot to Dot show about Amazon skills. He has a large audience but was looking for a new way to monetize his show. He heard my interview with Glow.fm CEO and loved it. You can hear it at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/706

       If you want to check out my Glow page see www.glow.fm/schoolofpodcasting

       March Podcasting Events

       March 3: Podcast Portland Meetup

       March 4: The Publisher Podcast Awards

       March 6-8: Podfest Multimedia Expo

       March 6: Podcast Editors Club, Spots Podcon and others)

       March 7: Podfest Cairo

       March 9-11: New Media Summit

       March 11: Podup Virtual Summit

       March 16: Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

       March 17: California Podcasters Association (Oakland)

       March 17 Virginia Podcasters Association Meetup

       March 19-20 Become a Podcaster in One Day

       March 19: Podcast Cracking the Code

       March 19: Phoenix Podcast Club Social

       March 31: Columbus Podcasters Meetup

       For more information see www.podcastingevents.com

       Ready to Start Your Podcast?
       • Step by step tutorials
       • Live group coaching (get your questions asked)
       • Private Facebook filled with other brilliant podcasting minds
       • Priority email support with private instructional videos (ask a question expect a video answer)
       • 30-day money-back Guarantee
       
       

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>6ac12064-9c44-4f8d-a18a-e089ecfa6a35Mon, 02 Mar 2020 05:00:00 -040038:43falsefull71271215 Things Podcasters Can Learn from Joel OsteenI was in Houston for the Spark Christian Podcast Conference where I was speaking. It was a great event for the first time out of the gate and I met some really cool people. My buddy Sunny from the IPN asked me if I wanted to go see Joel Osteen who runs the largest church in America and is also an author and someone I refer to as "Happy Jesus Man." Jole is incredibly successful (his church is the building where the Houston Rockets professional basketball team played. It's a stadium that holds 16,800 people).  I have listened to Joel on and off over the years. I went to feed my spiritually, but I was also there to observe and look for the clues of his success. You don't get this big without doing something right.
       Time Codes

       01:08 Spark Christian Podcast Conference Review

       02:38 What Podcasters Can Learn from Joel Osteen

       30:52 How did you get over your self Doubt?

       41:10 Free Webinar on Equipment

       42:19 Have you surveyed your audience?

       Joel Started As A Geek

       Joel was the technical person in his church working with his father. He was the lighting tech and worked for his Dad.

       Joel Did Something Different

       There is a style of preaching in the church known as "Hellfire and brimstone." This is where you explain to your audience that if you don't accept Jesus you are going to Hell where there will be weeping and gnashing of teeth. Instead of peaching about the horrors of Hell, Joel went to the bible and found all sorts of scriptures that point out how God wants you to prosper. Some have deemed this the prosperity Gospel, and because it's different than what people previously did, this has its critics. This has not swayed Joel from his message. He is covering the bible the way he wants to.

       He Makes it Easy for First Time Visitors

       Sunny and I had walked into what appeared to be a side door, and weren't exactly sure where to go. It was easy to identify who the staff was and we just walked up and said, "Hi this is our first time here." The worker knew exactly what to do and before I could blink I was given to a person who was giving me a tour of the building and explaining that there was a book store and if I wanted to buy anything Joel would sign it at the end of the night. He then escorted us to fourth-row center stage seats. I felt lucky. I felt special. The sanctuary was beautiful. They had cool lights in the ceiling and an amazing backdrop behind the band, and a choir made of people of every shape, size, and color.

       He Honored The Heritage of the Church and What They Believed in

       He played clips of his father who started the church and acknowledged those who came before him. Oh, I'm sorry this isn't for you...

       It's for the academy of podcasters. Let's move on.

       It Was a Well Oiled Machine

       There were no lags in the presentation. You didn't see the praise band ask, "He should we move on to the missing thing" and then someone says "Yeah, let's do the missing thing. Let's roll the mission intro." When the song was over, the mission people came out, the spoke about a conference that had just wrapped up. They introduced the video about how they were helping with Ebola in Africa and the video clip came on. Everyone knows what was next.

       They Through in a Curve Ball

       Their band did two praise songs (very upbeat - very easy to sing along) that engaged the audience. Then one of the soloists on the stage snuck into the audience at the end of the song. She then launched into an old Christian classic "Nothing but the blood" from the back of the auditorium so the people in the back now get the same view as those in the front. Most music performers pull this trick in concerts. They went back to singing more songs from the front of the stage.

       Pacing and Anticipation

       This is a great tip for those narrative style storytellers. They kept the service moving with the music, but about five songs into their performance their backdrop which looked like the galaxy with millions of stars started to reveal the word JESUS in big bright letters as the band hit a crescendo. The place erupts into applause, the band plays louder, hands are raised into the air and as the final notes of the song fade out Joel Osteen takes the stage and opens his message with prayer.

       Everybody Knows and Does Their Part

       The band multiple guitar players, keyboardists, and hundreds of backup singers, they all worked together to deliver the song in the best way that connects with the audience. The security for Joel was extensive. They were very good and kept him safe while allowing people to meet and greet him after the service. If you have a show with a host and a co-host someone is driving the show and someone is color commentary.

       Know Your Point and Back It Up

       Joel's message could be boiled down to this. "When you're in a bad situation you should still help others who are having problems." All of these scripture references helped illustrate his point. This is similar to the book I recommend Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis.

       Explain Things with a Personal Story

       After sharing some examples from the bible, Joel explained a story about hos his Dad was trying to raise money for a new auditorium but heard about a smaller Spanish church had run out of money for their church and this "Half a church" was just sitting there gathering dust. Even though Joel's Dad needed the money for his project he gave it to the smaller church. Anytime you can make your point with a personal story, I recommend you do it. This gives your audience a chance to get to know you.

       Joel Was Vulnerable

       At the end of the story about Joel's father, Joel explained how he is still benefiting by the step his father took. In the middle of the sentence, he paused, tried to say the sentence again, and again he had to stop. His emotions were deep in his thought. He put his hands over his eyes and turned his back to the audience. He said, "I'm sorry yall, I cry to easy, and I cry too much. Nobody booed. Nobody shouted, "HOW UNPROFESSIONAL" and instead they cheered him on. He turned back around with his red eyes, and grabbed a tissue and wiped his eyes. I can't find another way to explain it besides saying this was a "real" moment, and instantly felt more connected with him.

       Later in the service that I watched on Sunday (where he did the same service), he started one line and said, "Did I say that right? I'm going to say it again."

       Joel Knows His Why and It Aligns with his Call To Action

       Joel's goal is to get you to know Jesus and accept him. At the end of the service, he has a call to action to accept Jesus.

       He Promotes Subscriptions and Makes it Easy

       During the service and at the end, they put a link to their website on a giant screen with mentions of their podcast.

       Joel is a Collaborator

       I see on his website he is doing a service with Kanye West.

       He SERVED His Audience

       At the end of the night, he went through hundreds of people meeting them, signing books (or not) and treating each and every person like they were his favorite person in the whole world. He had his crew borrow their phone and snap pictures so they could share it on social media. So they could easily share what a great time they had a Lakewood church. By the time he had made it to me, there was talk he might shut down the line as it was long. He made it through. He was visibly tired. He had just performed a service and was probably feeling the dip as the adrenaline of preaching in front of thousands of people had left his body, but instead of instructing his team to send us home he waved us in knowing it would just add another 30 minutes or so to his evening. Whenever you have a chance to meet your audience to do it and say thank you.

       How Did You Get Over Self- Doubt To Start Your Podcast?

       12:56

       Dan Kreiness of the Leader of Learning podcast uses himself as a target audience member. If it holds his attention, it probably holds someone else's attention as well. 

       John DeRosa of the Classical Theism podcast likes the idea of having guests. If people didn't want to listen to you (they do) they might listen to your guests. 

       Paul Cheall from Fighting through World War II change the question from nobody would listen to Would they? His downloads are getting a few downloads a day (it features memoirs from his Father). 

       Holland Webb grom The Afterword podcasts didn't care about others opinions. They did it to have fun talking to each other and if other people want to listen - fine. 

       Thomas from Novel Marketing had my favorite answer, "When you love your audience more than you care about your own pride you will take steps to publish your show."

       Free Webinar: The Right Podcast Gear

       Joing the free webinar on 2/26 at 7 PM to get all of your questions about gear answered. 

       see http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Question of the Month for March 2020

       42:25

       If you surveyed your audience, what was the biggest thing you learned? If you didn't survey your audience (or a focus group) why...]]>I was in Houston for the Spark Christian Podcast Conference where I was speaking. It was a great event for the first time out of the gate and I met some really cool people. My buddy Sunny from the IPN asked me if I wanted to go see Joel Osteen who runs the largest church in America and is also an author and someone I refer to as "Happy Jesus Man." Jole is incredibly successful (his church is the building where the Houston Rockets professional basketball team played. It's a stadium that holds 16,800 people).  I have listened to Joel on and off over the years. I went to feed my spiritually, but I was also there to observe and look for the clues of his success. You don't get this big without doing something right.

       Time Codes

       01:08 Spark Christian Podcast Conference Review

       02:38 What Podcasters Can Learn from Joel Osteen

       30:52 How did you get over your self Doubt?

       41:10 Free Webinar on Equipment

       42:19 Have you surveyed your audience?

       Joel Started As A Geek

       Joel was the technical person in his church working with his father. He was the lighting tech and worked for his Dad.

       Joel Did Something Different

       There is a style of preaching in the church known as "Hellfire and brimstone." This is where you explain to your audience that if you don't accept Jesus you are going to Hell where there will be weeping and gnashing of teeth. Instead of peaching about the horrors of Hell, Joel went to the bible and found all sorts of scriptures that point out how God wants you to prosper. Some have deemed this the prosperity Gospel, and because it's different than what people previously did, this has its critics. This has not swayed Joel from his message. He is covering the bible the way he wants to.

       He Makes it Easy for First Time Visitors

       Sunny and I had walked into what appeared to be a side door, and weren't exactly sure where to go. It was easy to identify who the staff was and we just walked up and said, "Hi this is our first time here." The worker knew exactly what to do and before I could blink I was given to a person who was giving me a tour of the building and explaining that there was a book store and if I wanted to buy anything Joel would sign it at the end of the night. He then escorted us to fourth-row center stage seats. I felt lucky. I felt special. The sanctuary was beautiful. They had cool lights in the ceiling and an amazing backdrop behind the band, and a choir made of people of every shape, size, and color.

       He Honored The Heritage of the Church and What They Believed in

       He played clips of his father who started the church and acknowledged those who came before him. Oh, I'm sorry this isn't for you...

       It's for the academy of podcasters. Let's move on.

       It Was a Well Oiled Machine

       There were no lags in the presentation. You didn't see the praise band ask, "He should we move on to the missing thing" and then someone says "Yeah, let's do the missing thing. Let's roll the mission intro." When the song was over, the mission people came out, the spoke about a conference that had just wrapped up. They introduced the video about how they were helping with Ebola in Africa and the video clip came on. Everyone knows what was next.

       They Through in a Curve Ball

       Their band did two praise songs (very upbeat - very easy to sing along) that engaged the audience. Then one of the soloists on the stage snuck into the audience at the end of the song. She then launched into an old Christian classic "Nothing but the blood" from the back of the auditorium so the people in the back now get the same view as those in the front. Most music performers pull this trick in concerts. They went back to singing more songs from the front of the stage.

       Pacing and Anticipation

       This is a great tip for those narrative style storytellers. They kept the service moving with the music, but about five songs into their performance their backdrop which looked like the galaxy with millions of stars started to reveal the word JESUS in big bright letters as the band hit a crescendo. The place erupts into applause, the band plays louder, hands are raised into the air and as the final notes of the song fade out Joel Osteen takes the stage and opens his message with prayer.

       Everybody Knows and Does Their Part

       The band multiple guitar players, keyboardists, and hundreds of backup singers, they all worked together to deliver the song in the best way that connects with the audience. The security for Joel was extensive. They were very good and kept him safe while allowing people to meet and greet him after the service. If you have a show with a host and a co-host someone is driving the show and someone is color commentary.

       Know Your Point and Back It Up

       Joel's message could be boiled down to this. "When you're in a bad situation you should still help others who are having problems." All of these scripture references helped illustrate his point. This is similar to the book I recommend Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power by Ken Davis.

       Explain Things with a Personal Story

       After sharing some examples from the bible, Joel explained a story about hos his Dad was trying to raise money for a new auditorium but heard about a smaller Spanish church had run out of money for their church and this "Half a church" was just sitting there gathering dust. Even though Joel's Dad needed the money for his project he gave it to the smaller church. Anytime you can make your point with a personal story, I recommend you do it. This gives your audience a chance to get to know you.

       Joel Was Vulnerable

       At the end of the story about Joel's father, Joel explained how he is still benefiting by the step his father took. In the middle of the sentence, he paused, tried to say the sentence again, and again he had to stop. His emotions were deep in his thought. He put his hands over his eyes and turned his back to the audience. He said, "I'm sorry yall, I cry to easy, and I cry too much. Nobody booed. Nobody shouted, "HOW UNPROFESSIONAL" and instead they cheered him on. He turned back around with his red eyes, and grabbed a tissue and wiped his eyes. I can't find another way to explain it besides saying this was a "real" moment, and instantly felt more connected with him.

       Later in the service that I watched on Sunday (where he did the same service), he started one line and said, "Did I say that right? I'm going to say it again."

       Joel Knows His Why and It Aligns with his Call To Action

       Joel's goal is to get you to know Jesus and accept him. At the end of the service, he has a call to action to accept Jesus.

       He Promotes Subscriptions and Makes it Easy

       During the service and at the end, they put a link to their website on a giant screen with mentions of their podcast.

       Joel is a Collaborator

       I see on his website he is doing a service with Kanye West.

       He SERVED His Audience

       At the end of the night, he went through hundreds of people meeting them, signing books (or not) and treating each and every person like they were his favorite person in the whole world. He had his crew borrow their phone and snap pictures so they could share it on social media. So they could easily share what a great time they had a Lakewood church. By the time he had made it to me, there was talk he might shut down the line as it was long. He made it through. He was visibly tired. He had just performed a service and was probably feeling the dip as the adrenaline of preaching in front of thousands of people had left his body, but instead of instructing his team to send us home he waved us in knowing it would just add another 30 minutes or so to his evening. Whenever you have a chance to meet your audience to do it and say thank you.

       How Did You Get Over Self- Doubt To Start Your Podcast?

       12:56

       Dan Kreiness of the Leader of Learning podcast uses himself as a target audience member. If it holds his attention, it probably holds someone else's attention as well. 

       John DeRosa of the Classical Theism podcast likes the idea of having guests. If people didn't want to listen to you (they do) they might listen to your guests. 

       Paul Cheall from Fighting through World War II change the question from nobody would listen to Would they? His downloads are getting a few downloads a day (it features memoirs from his Father). 

       Holland Webb grom The Afterword podcasts didn't care about others opinions. They did it to have fun talking to each other and if other people want to listen - fine. 

       Thomas from Novel Marketing had my favorite answer, "When you love your audience more than you care about your own pride you will take steps to publish your show."

       Free Webinar: The Right Podcast Gear

       Joing the free webinar on 2/26 at 7 PM to get all of your questions about gear answered. 

       see http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Question of the Month for March 2020

       42:25

       If you surveyed your audience, what was the biggest thing you learned? If you didn't survey your audience (or a focus group) why not?

       Answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

        

       ]]>d1202c20-18ef-4a5a-ba19-b37cd767a887Mon, 24 Feb 2020 05:00:00 -040043:50falsefull711711How Does Your Podcast Compete Against Giant Shows?01:29 How Do You Compete Against Large Networks?

       06:44 25 People Vs 1

       09:42 Two Things That Kill Podcasts

       11:52 Buying an Audience

       15:32 Life Without the School of Podcasting

       17:01 So How Do You Compete?

       19:24 Jet Ski vs Cruise Ship

       21:53 Downloads are only ONE way of measuring Success

       24:28 Free Webinar 2/26

       25:01 Golden Mic Announcement

       34:23 Where I Will Be

       34:45 Question of the Month

       I hear this question a lot:

       How am I supposed to compete?  It'll be something like I've been podcasting for three years. There are these other podcasters who I'm pretty sure are buying their audience. They're spouting their numbers, and they're gigantic. How am I supposed to compete with somebody like that?

       I totally understand that question. Here are some things to consider:

       You Can't Compete

       Because its a good visual. How would a seventeen-year-old boxer compete against the champion who has held the title for six years? You don't put that kid in the ring. He's going to get killed. The experience, the stamina, he just isn't ready. He is completely out of his league.

       But I've Been Podcasting For Three Years

       But Dave, I've been podcasting for three years. You say that in some cases, you know people who are really starting to make a difference with their podcast at three years mark. To this I say"Uh-huh," but here are some things that we need to think about. We never know what's going on behind the scenes with a podcast. You might have a job (or two) and a spouse and some kids. The other podcast may not have any of those. Can you imagine how much free time you would have to promote if you didn't have any other activities and could focus on your podcast 100% of the time?

       So if you look at podcasters from the outside, there's a person with a podcast here, and another podcaster over there and you think they are the same and they are not. We have no idea what is going on behind the scenes. They might have a background in selling and your background is in teaching.

       Radiolab thanked 25 people at the end of their show. I am an army of one. Can I compete? In 2015ish I was up for a Podcast Movement Podcast Award and one of the shows in my category was Reply All.  I was competing against them. I've also had my Logical Weight Loss podcast compete against Jillian Michaels. Can we compete? Yes. The minute you turn on the microphone you are competing. Some of the things these teams of 25 use you don't need (original music?). While great production is like icing on a cupcake, if its all icing (and no cupcake) that doesn't work (see serial season two).

       The Two Things That Kill a Podcast BABIES

       Babies are so selfish. It's all about them. All they scream is feed me, wipe my butt, I want a nap. That can really get on your nerves (kidding).

       COMPARTING YOUR PODCAST TO OTHERS

       When you say "how do I compete" at the hear you are comparing your show to others, and that can seriously do nasty things to your content. If you ever feel yourself comparing yourself - STOP.

       STOP COMPARING YOUR SHOW TO OTHERS.

       You need three things to create good content:

       Your attitude

       Your health

       The support of those around you

       (see this episode for a deep dive into this subject).

       There is no competition

       I am a co-host on the Podcasters Roundtable with Daniel J. Lewis and Ray Ortega. Technically both of these people are my "competition" but they are not. Why? Because you can listen to me on Monday,  Daniel on Tuesday, and Ray on Wednesday. As long as you deliver value, you're safe and don't have to worry.

       You Can't Buy An Audience

       You can buy an opportunity for people to hear your show, but you can't pay them to listen. Your podcast needs to provide value so they will come back because they want more.

       Holly Barey is beautiful. In 2004 they put her in a Catwoman suit, spent a million dollars to my $82 million (a loss of 18 million). On Rotten Tomatoes the movie has a ranking of 9 out of 100 with 197 people voting.

       In 2009 Disney worked on a movie called John Carter based on a popular book. According to Wikipedia is the most expensive movie ever created. It was a super popular book. It's kind of a sci-fi fantasy thing. It had a young, hot actor from Friday Night Lights, which was a very popular TV show here in the States.  Yeah, they lost $200 million on that movie

       You cannot buy an audience.

       And upon the release,  it received a mixed critical reception. In other words, it wasn't any good. There are great visuals. It had a great soundtrack. It had great action sequences. But the biggest criticism was toward the characterization and this thing called the plot that movies have, and you kind of need a good plot, you need a story.

       It's the content. It's delivering value. And apparently, this movie did not deliver value because it lost them $200 million.

       And I remember seeing all the ads for this movie, that all the promotion.

       Before You Start Spending Money to Grow Your Podcast

       I see a lot of people who say, "I'm not getting enough downloads and they turned to Facebook ads or advertising an overcast or Spotify or Castro (all podcast listening apps). They are trying to get the word out about their show. You can buy eyeballs/earholes but you can't buy an audience because an audience is someone who comes back for more.

       Do What Your Big Networks Can't

       Answer every email (in my travels big shows don't do this)

       Get your audience on the phone. In the book Superfans (and in the Colin Morgan Interview on Podcast Juinkes) Pat Flynn and Colin Morgan talk about reaching out to random members of their audience via the phone (you can get a free Google Voice number, or Podcast Voicemail to mask your real phone number). How do you provide great content? You know who your audience is. How do you know what they want? You talk to them.

       You are a Jetski, they are a cruise ship. You can change your content in record time. They can't. You are much more flexible. They are not. You need to identify your weaknesses and your strengths. You also need to identify your "competition's" strengths and weaknesses and don't try to cover the same area whey they will unquestionably squash you.

       Go to where they are. In some cases, if a show is so big they can't go out in public. You can, and while you're there you can get feedback on how to make your show better.

       Be sure to poll your audience. This can be as simple as "what do you like about the show, what do you wish I would do differently?" If you want to ask, "How did you learn about the podcast" so you can do more of that.

       There is More Than One Way To Measure Success

       Keep in mind there are more ways to measure success than downloads. These includes:

       • Is your show successful (are you achieving your "why?"
       • Comments on your website
       • Email responses
       • Social marketing interactions
       • Business metrics (new customers)
       
       The Right Podcast Equipment Webinar

       On February 26th there is a free online webinar at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar where we will go over podcast equipment and the best option for you. If buying the right equipment has been a hurdle for you this will help you get over the hurdle. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Life Without the School of Podcasting

       Today I helped someone who randomly contacted me on Facebook. They hadn't purchased enough storage space for their show. They were exporting their files in the wrong format. They didn't know how to export in the proper format. They were using the wrong format for artwork. Podcasting can be fun and fulfilling when you don't have to band your head against a wall to release a simple episode. At the School of Podcasting,   we show you in videos how to export your show in the proper format. We show you how to order the right plan for your podcast so your media host matches your strategy. We help you podcast frustrating free. Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       The New Academy of Podcasting

       Let's start off with the positive. Wondery, a company with 82 employees and revenues (according to growjo.com) of around 15 million per year organized a new "Academy of Podcasters" and will launch a Golden Mic awards in 2021. Per their website, "The Academy is professionally run by an Executive Director and an Account Manager.  These roles are overseen by a volunteer Board of Governors who set the strategic vision and goals of the organization. 17 Founding Members will establish the organization and guide its initial creation with a goal of 1) moving The Golden Mics into a key recognition position and 2) encouraging growth and networking of the Academy and the industry. Members are individuals in the podcast industry who are part of one of the Academy’s Peer Groups; each Peer Group will vote on its respective categories for The Golden Mics." 

       So it's great that big companies with big budgets are...]]>01:29 How Do You Compete Against Large Networks?

       06:44 25 People Vs 1

       09:42 Two Things That Kill Podcasts

       11:52 Buying an Audience

       15:32 Life Without the School of Podcasting

       17:01 So How Do You Compete?

       19:24 Jet Ski vs Cruise Ship

       21:53 Downloads are only ONE way of measuring Success

       24:28 Free Webinar 2/26

       25:01 Golden Mic Announcement

       34:23 Where I Will Be

       34:45 Question of the Month

       I hear this question a lot:

       How am I supposed to compete?  It'll be something like I've been podcasting for three years. There are these other podcasters who I'm pretty sure are buying their audience. They're spouting their numbers, and they're gigantic. How am I supposed to compete with somebody like that?

       I totally understand that question. Here are some things to consider:

       You Can't Compete

       Because its a good visual. How would a seventeen-year-old boxer compete against the champion who has held the title for six years? You don't put that kid in the ring. He's going to get killed. The experience, the stamina, he just isn't ready. He is completely out of his league.

       But I've Been Podcasting For Three Years

       But Dave, I've been podcasting for three years. You say that in some cases, you know people who are really starting to make a difference with their podcast at three years mark. To this I say"Uh-huh," but here are some things that we need to think about. We never know what's going on behind the scenes with a podcast. You might have a job (or two) and a spouse and some kids. The other podcast may not have any of those. Can you imagine how much free time you would have to promote if you didn't have any other activities and could focus on your podcast 100% of the time?

       So if you look at podcasters from the outside, there's a person with a podcast here, and another podcaster over there and you think they are the same and they are not. We have no idea what is going on behind the scenes. They might have a background in selling and your background is in teaching.

       Radiolab thanked 25 people at the end of their show. I am an army of one. Can I compete? In 2015ish I was up for a Podcast Movement Podcast Award and one of the shows in my category was Reply All.  I was competing against them. I've also had my Logical Weight Loss podcast compete against Jillian Michaels. Can we compete? Yes. The minute you turn on the microphone you are competing. Some of the things these teams of 25 use you don't need (original music?). While great production is like icing on a cupcake, if its all icing (and no cupcake) that doesn't work (see serial season two).

       The Two Things That Kill a Podcast BABIES

       Babies are so selfish. It's all about them. All they scream is feed me, wipe my butt, I want a nap. That can really get on your nerves (kidding).

       COMPARTING YOUR PODCAST TO OTHERS

       When you say "how do I compete" at the hear you are comparing your show to others, and that can seriously do nasty things to your content. If you ever feel yourself comparing yourself - STOP.

       STOP COMPARING YOUR SHOW TO OTHERS.

       You need three things to create good content:

       Your attitude

       Your health

       The support of those around you

       (see this episode for a deep dive into this subject).

       There is no competition

       I am a co-host on the Podcasters Roundtable with Daniel J. Lewis and Ray Ortega. Technically both of these people are my "competition" but they are not. Why? Because you can listen to me on Monday,  Daniel on Tuesday, and Ray on Wednesday. As long as you deliver value, you're safe and don't have to worry.

       You Can't Buy An Audience

       You can buy an opportunity for people to hear your show, but you can't pay them to listen. Your podcast needs to provide value so they will come back because they want more.

       Holly Barey is beautiful. In 2004 they put her in a Catwoman suit, spent a million dollars to my $82 million (a loss of 18 million). On Rotten Tomatoes the movie has a ranking of 9 out of 100 with 197 people voting.

       In 2009 Disney worked on a movie called John Carter based on a popular book. According to Wikipedia is the most expensive movie ever created. It was a super popular book. It's kind of a sci-fi fantasy thing. It had a young, hot actor from Friday Night Lights, which was a very popular TV show here in the States.  Yeah, they lost $200 million on that movie

       You cannot buy an audience.

       And upon the release,  it received a mixed critical reception. In other words, it wasn't any good. There are great visuals. It had a great soundtrack. It had great action sequences. But the biggest criticism was toward the characterization and this thing called the plot that movies have, and you kind of need a good plot, you need a story.

       It's the content. It's delivering value. And apparently, this movie did not deliver value because it lost them $200 million.

       And I remember seeing all the ads for this movie, that all the promotion.

       Before You Start Spending Money to Grow Your Podcast

       I see a lot of people who say, "I'm not getting enough downloads and they turned to Facebook ads or advertising an overcast or Spotify or Castro (all podcast listening apps). They are trying to get the word out about their show. You can buy eyeballs/earholes but you can't buy an audience because an audience is someone who comes back for more.

       Do What Your Big Networks Can't

       Answer every email (in my travels big shows don't do this)

       Get your audience on the phone. In the book Superfans (and in the Colin Morgan Interview on Podcast Juinkes) Pat Flynn and Colin Morgan talk about reaching out to random members of their audience via the phone (you can get a free Google Voice number, or Podcast Voicemail to mask your real phone number). How do you provide great content? You know who your audience is. How do you know what they want? You talk to them.

       You are a Jetski, they are a cruise ship. You can change your content in record time. They can't. You are much more flexible. They are not. You need to identify your weaknesses and your strengths. You also need to identify your "competition's" strengths and weaknesses and don't try to cover the same area whey they will unquestionably squash you.

       Go to where they are. In some cases, if a show is so big they can't go out in public. You can, and while you're there you can get feedback on how to make your show better.

       Be sure to poll your audience. This can be as simple as "what do you like about the show, what do you wish I would do differently?" If you want to ask, "How did you learn about the podcast" so you can do more of that.

       There is More Than One Way To Measure Success

       Keep in mind there are more ways to measure success than downloads. These includes:

       • Is your show successful (are you achieving your "why?"
       • Comments on your website
       • Email responses
       • Social marketing interactions
       • Business metrics (new customers)
       
       The Right Podcast Equipment Webinar

       On February 26th there is a free online webinar at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar where we will go over podcast equipment and the best option for you. If buying the right equipment has been a hurdle for you this will help you get over the hurdle. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/webinar

       Life Without the School of Podcasting

       Today I helped someone who randomly contacted me on Facebook. They hadn't purchased enough storage space for their show. They were exporting their files in the wrong format. They didn't know how to export in the proper format. They were using the wrong format for artwork. Podcasting can be fun and fulfilling when you don't have to band your head against a wall to release a simple episode. At the School of Podcasting,   we show you in videos how to export your show in the proper format. We show you how to order the right plan for your podcast so your media host matches your strategy. We help you podcast frustrating free. Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       The New Academy of Podcasting

       Let's start off with the positive. Wondery, a company with 82 employees and revenues (according to growjo.com) of around 15 million per year organized a new "Academy of Podcasters" and will launch a Golden Mic awards in 2021. Per their website, "The Academy is professionally run by an Executive Director and an Account Manager.  These roles are overseen by a volunteer Board of Governors who set the strategic vision and goals of the organization. 17 Founding Members will establish the organization and guide its initial creation with a goal of 1) moving The Golden Mics into a key recognition position and 2) encouraging growth and networking of the Academy and the industry. Members are individuals in the podcast industry who are part of one of the Academy’s Peer Groups; each Peer Group will vote on its respective categories for The Golden Mics." 

       So it's great that big companies with big budgets are going to be promoting podcasting. This is a good thing.

       Someone Needs to Learn How to Google

       The companies listed above need to learn how to do some Google searches. When you come in with a "We've arrived" mentality, you can easily offend those who have already been here working in the trenches. I mean who do you think you are the pilgrims?

       The larger media companies keep saying things that seem to just ignore history. For example, an article that came out THIS WEEK stated that " Born in the halls of public radio, podcasting has emerged as one of the fastest-growing businesses in media over the past few years." Podcasting was NOT born in the halls of public radio. It was born in a hotel room where Dave Winer and Adam Curry met. In the past, I've just let them roll off m back, but I remember someone from one of these companies who stated there weren't any women podcasters in the early years (completely erasing people like Mignon Fogerty and Murr Raferty. Who can forget Steve Jobs referring to podcasting as "Amateur Hour."

       So when I approached Hernan Lopez the founder and CEO of Wondery that there HAS BEEN a  “completely peer-based, not for profit, fully representative" awards show and I had won such an award he apologized.

       I'm Not Saying Get Off My Lawn

       Lopez was at an educational conference stating a lack of education. I'm not saying get off my lawn. I'm saying Marc Maron didn't invent podcasting (nor did Serial) and if you want me to greet you with open arms, it would be much easier if you would stop kicking me in the balls.

       To the best of my knowledge, the Adamy of podcasters which controls the Hall of Fame is still in existence. It hasn't had a ceremony since 2018 due to a lack of sponsorship. This is sad. While some may feel this is just a bunch of friends slapping each other on the back, if you do some research that it's not just old white guys but women and people of color (granted the majority of the recipients is middle-aged white guys because when podcasting first started THOSE WERE THE PEOPLE WHO WERE PODCASTING.

       So I look forward to seeing the spotlight the new academy will point at podcasting, and just ask them to quite saying things that make use feel invisible or worse, erase the past.

       Speaking of the past, here is a link to the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

       New Podcasters Academy

       Question of the Month

       How did you get past the "Nobody will listen to me?" see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Start Your Podcast Today

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and start your podcast worry-free with our 30-day money-back guarantee 

        

       ]]>097263dd-55f0-4a00-961c-9cc4203affa6Mon, 17 Feb 2020 05:00:00 -040036:06falsefull710710Podcast Reviews Automatically Delivered To Your InboxToday we introduce a new segment, "I told you so!"

       I also have a great conversation with Daniel J. Lewis from My Podcast Reviews. get a special deal at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr

       Watch Quick Demo

       ]]>Today we introduce a new segment, "I told you so!"

       I also have a great conversation with Daniel J. Lewis from My Podcast Reviews. get a special deal at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/mpr

       Watch Quick Demo

       ]]>160a1609-1071-48a3-91b1-dff3d7aca302Mon, 10 Feb 2020 05:00:00 -040035:06falsefull709709Shaping Your Unique Voice with Eric NuzumIn a previous episode about Glow.fm I talked about how hard it is to obtain an engaged audience and you might be lucky if you get 5% engagement. This week on the finale of The Good Place they mentioned the Podcast Radio Lab, and on a previous episode of Radio Lab they mentioned how 29,000 people are helping to pay for the production of the podcast. The interesting thing is due to their massive audience 29,000 is not even 1% of their audience. I bring this up not to depress you, but so we can all move forward making informed decisions.
       Eric Nuzum

       Eric Nuzum is the cofounder of Magnificent Noise and creator of iconic podcasts. Over the past 14 years, he has made podcasts that routinely top the charts, appear in yearly “best of” lists, win awards, and generate hundreds of millions of downloads. He started NPR’s podcasting efforts in 2005 and remained that effort’s chief creative and strategic force for the following decade, leading NPR to become the largest distributor of podcasts in the world. Eric developed some of NPR’s most successful podcasts, and continued that record of success during his tenure as Audible’s leader for short-form content and podcasting. In 2019, he co-founded Magnificent Noise, a podcast production and creative consulting company based in New York City. Eric’s book on audio and podcast creation, titled Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling.

       Today we talk to Eric and talk about

       03:56 Eric Nuzum Interview 15:39 How do you estimate the size of an audience 18:08 The 10 Word Challenge 25:57 How do Indies Compete with NPR? 29:32 Fixing a Flat Stats Issue 31:23 Lessons from Taylor Swift 33:22 The History of Podcasting

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Start your podcast at the School of Podcasting

       The RIGHT Podcast Gear Free Webinar

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       Magnficant Noise

       More About Eric Nuzum

       ]]>In a previous episode about Glow.fm I talked about how hard it is to obtain an engaged audience and you might be lucky if you get 5% engagement. This week on the finale of The Good Place they mentioned the Podcast Radio Lab, and on a previous episode of Radio Lab they mentioned how 29,000 people are helping to pay for the production of the podcast. The interesting thing is due to their massive audience 29,000 is not even 1% of their audience. I bring this up not to depress you, but so we can all move forward making informed decisions.
       Eric Nuzum

       Eric Nuzum is the cofounder of Magnificent Noise and creator of iconic podcasts. Over the past 14 years, he has made podcasts that routinely top the charts, appear in yearly “best of” lists, win awards, and generate hundreds of millions of downloads. He started NPR’s podcasting efforts in 2005 and remained that effort’s chief creative and strategic force for the following decade, leading NPR to become the largest distributor of podcasts in the world. Eric developed some of NPR’s most successful podcasts, and continued that record of success during his tenure as Audible’s leader for short-form content and podcasting. In 2019, he co-founded Magnificent Noise, a podcast production and creative consulting company based in New York City. Eric’s book on audio and podcast creation, titled Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling.

       Today we talk to Eric and talk about

       03:56 Eric Nuzum Interview 15:39 How do you estimate the size of an audience 18:08 The 10 Word Challenge 25:57 How do Indies Compete with NPR? 29:32 Fixing a Flat Stats Issue 31:23 Lessons from Taylor Swift 33:22 The History of Podcasting

       Mentioned in this Episode

       Start your podcast at the School of Podcasting

       The RIGHT Podcast Gear Free Webinar

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide to Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       Magnficant Noise

       More About Eric Nuzum

       ]]>a4c8c8b4-ac3e-413a-a181-fbec80d3588eMon, 03 Feb 2020 05:00:00 -040046:01falsefull708708Doing Something DifferentEvery month we have a "question of the month" and this month it's what are you going to do differently in 2020 with your podcast?
       Because of My Podcast

       Lee from the Covert Nerd podcast was trying to speak at a panel. He was sensing a little pushback until he mentioned he had a podcast ( and got the speaking gig). He also got some "street cred" from his kids who were impressed the "old guy" was doing something so hip as a podcast. 

       What Are You Going to Different?

       As 2020 is upon us what are you going to try? 

       Thanks for 

       The Author inside you

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Radiant Fire Podcast

       Gather Geeks Podcast

       Repurpose Your Career

       Uncommon Life

       Kids Health 101

       Brew Roots Podcast

       Games From Folk Tales

       What is Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast?

       Nobody wants my opinion

       Technology

       Anxiety

       Time

       Perfectionism

       Overwhelm

       Equipment

       Co-hosts

       Question of the Month

       How did you overcome thinking "Nobody would listen to me" thinking or worrying about negative feedback?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Glow Follow Up

       Some of my audience had issues (but to their credit they fixed any issues. In the end, I had 1.06% of my audience went to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glow

       So this is why I say some people get UP TO 3% of their audience engaging with their content. 

       Options. Buy me a coffee (here is my page)

       You can also use a paypal donation link. Check out www.supportthisshow.com

       Subscribe to the show at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       Full show notes at http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/707

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Start Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Buy Me A Coffee Tipping Tool

       Glow.fm

       Getting Over Imposter Syndrome

       Focus Is More Important Than Microphones

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Podcast Brand.co

       Table of Contents

       00:01:19 Because of My Podcast 00:03:22 What are you going to do differently in 2020 00:04:33 Author Inside You 00:05:25 Talk about Talk 00:06:56 Radio Fire Radio 00:10:04 Gather Geeks Podcast 00:11:28 Repurpose Your Career Podcast 00:14:53 Uncommon Life 00:15:53 Kids Health !01 00:17:02 Brew Roots Podcasts 00:18:47 Games From Folk Tales 00:22:41 What is Stopping You From Starting a Podcast 00:31:06 Feb. Question of the Month 00:32:42 Where I Will Be 00:33:46 Glow .FM Follow Up 00:40:30 Bloopers

       ]]>Every month we have a "question of the month" and this month it's what are you going to do differently in 2020 with your podcast?
       Because of My Podcast

       Lee from the Covert Nerd podcast was trying to speak at a panel. He was sensing a little pushback until he mentioned he had a podcast ( and got the speaking gig). He also got some "street cred" from his kids who were impressed the "old guy" was doing something so hip as a podcast. 

       What Are You Going to Different?

       As 2020 is upon us what are you going to try? 

       Thanks for 

       The Author inside you

       Talk about Talk Podcast

       Radiant Fire Podcast

       Gather Geeks Podcast

       Repurpose Your Career

       Uncommon Life

       Kids Health 101

       Brew Roots Podcast

       Games From Folk Tales

       What is Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast?

       Nobody wants my opinion

       Technology

       Anxiety

       Time

       Perfectionism

       Overwhelm

       Equipment

       Co-hosts

       Question of the Month

       How did you overcome thinking "Nobody would listen to me" thinking or worrying about negative feedback?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Glow Follow Up

       Some of my audience had issues (but to their credit they fixed any issues. In the end, I had 1.06% of my audience went to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glow

       So this is why I say some people get UP TO 3% of their audience engaging with their content. 

       Options. Buy me a coffee (here is my page)

       You can also use a paypal donation link. Check out www.supportthisshow.com

       Subscribe to the show at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

       Full show notes at http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/707

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Start Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

       Buy Me A Coffee Tipping Tool

       Glow.fm

       Getting Over Imposter Syndrome

       Focus Is More Important Than Microphones

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       Podcast Brand.co

       Table of Contents

       00:01:19 Because of My Podcast 00:03:22 What are you going to do differently in 2020 00:04:33 Author Inside You 00:05:25 Talk about Talk 00:06:56 Radio Fire Radio 00:10:04 Gather Geeks Podcast 00:11:28 Repurpose Your Career Podcast 00:14:53 Uncommon Life 00:15:53 Kids Health !01 00:17:02 Brew Roots Podcasts 00:18:47 Games From Folk Tales 00:22:41 What is Stopping You From Starting a Podcast 00:31:06 Feb. Question of the Month 00:32:42 Where I Will Be 00:33:46 Glow .FM Follow Up 00:40:30 Bloopers

       ]]>de35168e-2f19-416c-bf12-60510a1ad2f2Mon, 27 Jan 2020 05:00:00 -040041:20falsefull707707Glow.fm an EASY Way to Accept Money From Your Audience 00:00:58 Slow Down When You Talk About Yourself 00:03:08 Podcast Magazine 00:08:50 Glow.fm Interview 00:31:38 Fun with Math 00:42:28 Question of the Month 00:43:26 Podcasting Events 00:45:33 schoolofpodcasting.com/start
       Different Ways of Accepting Money From Your Podcast

       Today I talk with Amira Valliani the CEO of Glow.fm

       If you can make it EASY for your audience to give you money in either a one time, monthly, or yearly format. You can provide suggested amounts but they can change it (if you let them). The key is you want to make it easy for people to sign up. The easier it is to give you money, the less value that needs to be present.

       Patreon.com This is a website and app that allows you to create tiers of support. Think of it as a crowdfunding site like Kickstarter that keeps on going. You can also upload audio directly to Patreon and provide a private RSS feed for the use. If they cancel their subscription they lose access. Patreon 8% for their pro plan (does not include processing fees which are typically around 3%). This means the podcaster keeps 89%.

       MyLibsyn.com This is a website and custom app where you can have public and private information. You can set your podcast to have the latest (X amount) of episodes for free and then the older episodes you need to pay to hear. This is a "Set it and forget it" system. The podcaster keeps 70-80% based on the number of members you have.

       Glow.fm For those who just want to accept donations/payments (one time, monthly, or yearly) you only pay the processing fees (as they use stripe that would be 2.9% + 30¢). If you want to have bonus content or private content, they charge .55 per user. If someone pays you $2 that means you keep 73%. Keep in mind the more people pay, the higher the percentage. For example, if someone pays $5 a month that means you keep 89%

       Never Forget the Rule of 3%

       While it would be great to get 50% or 30% or even 10% of your audience, most people find that 3% is based in reality with 5% being a really good example.

       How is Glow Different?

       There are tools like Paypal that allow you to make branded landing pages see http://paypal.me/podcastcoach or https://cash.app/$schoolofpodcasting With the cash.app you need to download an app and create an account. With Paypal you need to provide an email address to pay with a credit card (you can pay without having a paypal account). They all seem to take the same 3%.

       With Glow after you pay a podcast it will ask you if you want to complete your setup (optional), but if you continue you choose a password and now you have a Glow.fm account. I could be missing something, but I'm not seeing a ton of difference except glow.fm gives you a little more control over your brand (although I wish companies would tell you what size of the image to use instead of letting up guess).

       Premium Plans

       If you have a listener pay you $5/month you would

       Keep $4.30 with Glow.fm (5 - (.55+.15))

       Keep $4.45 with Patreon (5 - (.4+.15)

       In doing the math, you don't make more money selling bonus/private content until you charge $13/month. In that instance, you would keep $11.36 with Glow, and $11.28 with Patreon.

       Also, keep in mind with Patreon you can upload audio (and get ZERO stats on downloads). With Glow.fm you can use most media hosts to provide private feed for your bonus content.

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       If you've like to support the show as well as see Glow in action CLICK HERE

       or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glow

       Podcast Magazine Launching in January

       I will be appearing in the inaugural edition of Podcast Magazine. In having some email back and forth with Editor in Chief Seve Olsher he said there are three reasons for starting this magazine.

       1) We are passionate about podcasting and want to do our part to support its growth.

       Podcasting has, we believe, reached an important tipping point for either attaining critical mass or returning to its roots as a compelling tool for hobbyists. We are unabashedly committed to doing whatever we can to ensure that podcasting’s current status reflects its embryonic stages rather than the maturation of the medium.

       2) We strive to serve podcast FANS, taking them ‘Beyond The Microphone’ and into the lives of today’s leading podcasters and the shows they love.

       While there are several publications that do a wonderful job of covering podcasters and the industry at large, their focus is not on serving listeners. Our goal is to create the preeminent lifestyle publication that veraciously serves podcast fans while exploring the ever-evolving world of its culture.

       3) And perhaps most importantly, we are committed to leveling the playing field for ALL podcasters.

       As a podcaster since 2009 when we launched our first episode of Reinvention Radio, and continuing with Beyond 8 Figures (and, soon, the Podcast Magazine Podcast, of course!), I have witnessed firsthand the challenges of being a “mere mortal” without a huge platform who is unable to break onto the charts simply by “bouncing” existing fans and followers toward one’s new podcast.

       Breaking into the ascending spiral of Apple’s, Spotify’s, or Stitcher’s (to name a few) charts is incredibly difficult. Podcasts that are popular rank in the charts; new listeners find these shows because they’re visible and subsequently download, rate, review, and subscribe to them. As a result, these podcasts continue their popularity ascent, making it nearly impossible for other shows to be discovered.

       To aid in addressing this issue, each month, the 19 Podcast Magazine Category Directors highlight an “Under The Radar” show that podcast fans likely haven’t heard of, but should be listening to; select a personal favorite for “Off The Charts”, which showcases Podcast Magazine’s Top Podcast Picks of the Month, and…

       Each month we release the industry’s only fan-driven chart:

       Podcast Magazine’s Hot 50!

       To make this happen, we need to hear from YOU.

       What are YOUR favorite podcasts? What shows can’t you get enough of? What podcasts do you feel should receive more recognition?

       You will be able to leave your input coming soon.

       Each month, we’ll tally the results, and a new Podcast Magazine Hot 50 chart will be released. Will some of the more popular shows appear on our charts? Odds are, they will.

       However, we also have strong confidence that a significant number of podcasts that aren’t among the current “usual suspects” will make it onto the Hot 50. And we very much look forward to introducing you to them.

       In today’s divisive times, it is easier than ever to be a critic… and hard to be a creator.

       Those who have the audacity to podcast are creators, and we will do everything we can to support them.

       Thank you for sharing our enthusiasm and accompanying us on this journey.

       Steve Olsher Founder/Editor-in-Chief

       For more information see www.podcastmagazine.com

       Slow Down When Talking About Your Podcast

       On the latest version of the Podcast Review Show, we reviewed a podcast that spoke at a very fast rate when discussing those items that were repeated every episode. The problem is new listeners can't understand what you are saying it. You can get your show reviewed at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       Podcasting Events This Week

       1/20 Northeast Ohio Podcast Meetup

       1/21 California Podcast Association – Oakland, California

       1/22-25 Brooklyn Podcast Festival

       1/23 Atlanta, "LIVE On-Stage Podcast Event with Audience and Networking"

       1/24 The Voices of Dentistry -Scottsdale Arizona

       1/24 Mass Media Podcast Online Event

       1/24  Outlier Podcast Festival - Salt Lake City

       For more events see http://podcastingevents.net/

       I Will be Appearing at the Following Events

       January 24-26 Mass Media Podcast Summit (use coupon SCHOOL )

       February 8th Bay Area Independent Publishers Assoc. Novato, CA

       February 12-15th Podcast Movement Evolutions Los Angelas, Ca

       February 21-22 Spark Christian Podcast Conference Houston, TX

       March 6-8 Podfest Multimedia Expo Orlando, Fl

       June 12-13 Utah...]]>00:00:58 Slow Down When You Talk About Yourself 00:03:08 Podcast Magazine 00:08:50 Glow.fm Interview 00:31:38 Fun with Math 00:42:28 Question of the Month 00:43:26 Podcasting Events 00:45:33 schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Different Ways of Accepting Money From Your Podcast

       Today I talk with Amira Valliani the CEO of Glow.fm

       If you can make it EASY for your audience to give you money in either a one time, monthly, or yearly format. You can provide suggested amounts but they can change it (if you let them). The key is you want to make it easy for people to sign up. The easier it is to give you money, the less value that needs to be present.

       Patreon.com This is a website and app that allows you to create tiers of support. Think of it as a crowdfunding site like Kickstarter that keeps on going. You can also upload audio directly to Patreon and provide a private RSS feed for the use. If they cancel their subscription they lose access. Patreon 8% for their pro plan (does not include processing fees which are typically around 3%). This means the podcaster keeps 89%.

       MyLibsyn.com This is a website and custom app where you can have public and private information. You can set your podcast to have the latest (X amount) of episodes for free and then the older episodes you need to pay to hear. This is a "Set it and forget it" system. The podcaster keeps 70-80% based on the number of members you have.

       Glow.fm For those who just want to accept donations/payments (one time, monthly, or yearly) you only pay the processing fees (as they use stripe that would be 2.9% + 30¢). If you want to have bonus content or private content, they charge .55 per user. If someone pays you $2 that means you keep 73%. Keep in mind the more people pay, the higher the percentage. For example, if someone pays $5 a month that means you keep 89%

       Never Forget the Rule of 3%

       While it would be great to get 50% or 30% or even 10% of your audience, most people find that 3% is based in reality with 5% being a really good example.

       How is Glow Different?

       There are tools like Paypal that allow you to make branded landing pages see http://paypal.me/podcastcoach or https://cash.app/$schoolofpodcasting With the cash.app you need to download an app and create an account. With Paypal you need to provide an email address to pay with a credit card (you can pay without having a paypal account). They all seem to take the same 3%.

       With Glow after you pay a podcast it will ask you if you want to complete your setup (optional), but if you continue you choose a password and now you have a Glow.fm account. I could be missing something, but I'm not seeing a ton of difference except glow.fm gives you a little more control over your brand (although I wish companies would tell you what size of the image to use instead of letting up guess).

       Premium Plans

       If you have a listener pay you $5/month you would

       Keep $4.30 with Glow.fm (5 - (.55+.15))

       Keep $4.45 with Patreon (5 - (.4+.15)

       In doing the math, you don't make more money selling bonus/private content until you charge $13/month. In that instance, you would keep $11.36 with Glow, and $11.28 with Patreon.

       Also, keep in mind with Patreon you can upload audio (and get ZERO stats on downloads). With Glow.fm you can use most media hosts to provide private feed for your bonus content.

       Buy Dave a Coffee

       If you've like to support the show as well as see Glow in action CLICK HERE

       or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glow

       Podcast Magazine Launching in January

       I will be appearing in the inaugural edition of Podcast Magazine. In having some email back and forth with Editor in Chief Seve Olsher he said there are three reasons for starting this magazine.

       1) We are passionate about podcasting and want to do our part to support its growth.

       Podcasting has, we believe, reached an important tipping point for either attaining critical mass or returning to its roots as a compelling tool for hobbyists. We are unabashedly committed to doing whatever we can to ensure that podcasting’s current status reflects its embryonic stages rather than the maturation of the medium.

       2) We strive to serve podcast FANS, taking them ‘Beyond The Microphone’ and into the lives of today’s leading podcasters and the shows they love.

       While there are several publications that do a wonderful job of covering podcasters and the industry at large, their focus is not on serving listeners. Our goal is to create the preeminent lifestyle publication that veraciously serves podcast fans while exploring the ever-evolving world of its culture.

       3) And perhaps most importantly, we are committed to leveling the playing field for ALL podcasters.

       As a podcaster since 2009 when we launched our first episode of Reinvention Radio, and continuing with Beyond 8 Figures (and, soon, the Podcast Magazine Podcast, of course!), I have witnessed firsthand the challenges of being a “mere mortal” without a huge platform who is unable to break onto the charts simply by “bouncing” existing fans and followers toward one’s new podcast.

       Breaking into the ascending spiral of Apple’s, Spotify’s, or Stitcher’s (to name a few) charts is incredibly difficult. Podcasts that are popular rank in the charts; new listeners find these shows because they’re visible and subsequently download, rate, review, and subscribe to them. As a result, these podcasts continue their popularity ascent, making it nearly impossible for other shows to be discovered.

       To aid in addressing this issue, each month, the 19 Podcast Magazine Category Directors highlight an “Under The Radar” show that podcast fans likely haven’t heard of, but should be listening to; select a personal favorite for “Off The Charts”, which showcases Podcast Magazine’s Top Podcast Picks of the Month, and…

       Each month we release the industry’s only fan-driven chart:

       Podcast Magazine’s Hot 50!

       To make this happen, we need to hear from YOU.

       What are YOUR favorite podcasts? What shows can’t you get enough of? What podcasts do you feel should receive more recognition?

       You will be able to leave your input coming soon.

       Each month, we’ll tally the results, and a new Podcast Magazine Hot 50 chart will be released. Will some of the more popular shows appear on our charts? Odds are, they will.

       However, we also have strong confidence that a significant number of podcasts that aren’t among the current “usual suspects” will make it onto the Hot 50. And we very much look forward to introducing you to them.

       In today’s divisive times, it is easier than ever to be a critic… and hard to be a creator.

       Those who have the audacity to podcast are creators, and we will do everything we can to support them.

       Thank you for sharing our enthusiasm and accompanying us on this journey.

       Steve Olsher Founder/Editor-in-Chief

       For more information see www.podcastmagazine.com

       Slow Down When Talking About Your Podcast

       On the latest version of the Podcast Review Show, we reviewed a podcast that spoke at a very fast rate when discussing those items that were repeated every episode. The problem is new listeners can't understand what you are saying it. You can get your show reviewed at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

       Podcasting Events This Week

       1/20 Northeast Ohio Podcast Meetup

       1/21 California Podcast Association – Oakland, California

       1/22-25 Brooklyn Podcast Festival

       1/23 Atlanta, "LIVE On-Stage Podcast Event with Audience and Networking"

       1/24 The Voices of Dentistry -Scottsdale Arizona

       1/24 Mass Media Podcast Online Event

       1/24  Outlier Podcast Festival - Salt Lake City

       For more events see http://podcastingevents.net/

       I Will be Appearing at the Following Events

       January 24-26 Mass Media Podcast Summit (use coupon SCHOOL )

       February 8th Bay Area Independent Publishers Assoc. Novato, CA

       February 12-15th Podcast Movement Evolutions Los Angelas, Ca

       February 21-22 Spark Christian Podcast Conference Houston, TX

       March 6-8 Podfest Multimedia Expo Orlando, Fl

       June 12-13 Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah

       Start Your Podcast

       Join the School of Podcasting and get access to the courses, the private group coaching, and the private Facebook group. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>a4571e3b-5590-4274-b3c9-0b5cd7d16f54Mon, 20 Jan 2020 05:08:15 -040046:16falsefull706706What Makes This Podcast Great? Marc Maron EditionToday we talk about creating great content that people will share, and take a slightly deeper dive into the topic by looking at WTF by Marc Maron.

       When I reverse engineered the content I consumed, I noticed that no matter if its a book, magazine, TV show, or movie, whatever I'm consuming:

       Made me laugh

       Made me cry

       Made me think

       Made groan

       Educated me

       Entertained me.

       Ingredients in a Good Podcast

       When I look at other elements that make a good podcast they:

       Allow you to see the vulnerable side of the host or guest.

       Have a  host with great listening skills.

       Include "Behind the Scenes" information that you can get anyplace else.

       Include great follow up questions that reflect what the listener would ask.

       Know your audience.

       Create a focus group of listeners who will provide honest feedback.

       The courage to say things that will draw them closer to their target while separating them from some.

       Make me wonder what is going to happen next?

       Table of Contents for Episode 705

       00:00:45.775 Boston Reflections 00:02:23.525 Because of My Podcast 00:07:29.325 If You Content Is Shunned By the Media 00:14:07.300 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 00:15:35.900 Question of the Month 00:16:09.500 What Made This Episode Good? 00:25:49.150 Being Vulnerable 00:29:20.175 Adding A Tease 00:29:59.475 Sharing Stories 00:31:16.225 What Was That Like? 00:32:50.800 Raw Emotion is Moving 00:34:43.875 A Great First Question 00:37:20.550 Technology Issues 00:38:28.850 Why Did They Leave it In? 00:39:17.700 Podcasting Boost Your Confidence 00:39:57.783 Great Follow Up Questions 00:40:49.291 Know Your Guest - Know The Show 00:44:33.712 Bloopers

       Because Of My Podcast: Fred Castenada

       Fred from the Podcast Reporter podcast heard about with a military background and podcast and reached out. Because Fred has a podcast they've connected and found out they both served in the 82nd airborne.

       Question Of the Month

       NOT PODCASTING YET? What do you feel is stopping you from starting your podcast?

       ALREADY PODCASTING? What are you going to do differently this year and why? I need the answers in by January 24th, 2020.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to leave your answer.

       Mentioned In this Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Erik K. Johnson's episode on creating a good tease.

       Robbie Samuels On the Schmooze Podcast ( great first question)

       Marc Maron's WTF Podcast. The episode with BRAD PITT & LEONARDO DICAPRIO

       Ed Sullivan's Sonic Cupcake Audio Editing

       The Cigar Authority Podcast. Which Dave uses to promote 2 Guys Cigars

       Check out the Studio 21 Cafe where they record the podcast. AMAZING

       ]]>Today we talk about creating great content that people will share, and take a slightly deeper dive into the topic by looking at WTF by Marc Maron.

       When I reverse engineered the content I consumed, I noticed that no matter if its a book, magazine, TV show, or movie, whatever I'm consuming:

       Made me laugh

       Made me cry

       Made me think

       Made groan

       Educated me

       Entertained me.

       Ingredients in a Good Podcast

       When I look at other elements that make a good podcast they:

       Allow you to see the vulnerable side of the host or guest.

       Have a  host with great listening skills.

       Include "Behind the Scenes" information that you can get anyplace else.

       Include great follow up questions that reflect what the listener would ask.

       Know your audience.

       Create a focus group of listeners who will provide honest feedback.

       The courage to say things that will draw them closer to their target while separating them from some.

       Make me wonder what is going to happen next?

       Table of Contents for Episode 705

       00:00:45.775 Boston Reflections 00:02:23.525 Because of My Podcast 00:07:29.325 If You Content Is Shunned By the Media 00:14:07.300 schoolofpodcasting.com/start 00:15:35.900 Question of the Month 00:16:09.500 What Made This Episode Good? 00:25:49.150 Being Vulnerable 00:29:20.175 Adding A Tease 00:29:59.475 Sharing Stories 00:31:16.225 What Was That Like? 00:32:50.800 Raw Emotion is Moving 00:34:43.875 A Great First Question 00:37:20.550 Technology Issues 00:38:28.850 Why Did They Leave it In? 00:39:17.700 Podcasting Boost Your Confidence 00:39:57.783 Great Follow Up Questions 00:40:49.291 Know Your Guest - Know The Show 00:44:33.712 Bloopers

       Because Of My Podcast: Fred Castenada

       Fred from the Podcast Reporter podcast heard about with a military background and podcast and reached out. Because Fred has a podcast they've connected and found out they both served in the 82nd airborne.

       Question Of the Month

       NOT PODCASTING YET? What do you feel is stopping you from starting your podcast?

       ALREADY PODCASTING? What are you going to do differently this year and why? I need the answers in by January 24th, 2020.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question to leave your answer.

       Mentioned In this Episode

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Erik K. Johnson's episode on creating a good tease.

       Robbie Samuels On the Schmooze Podcast ( great first question)

       Marc Maron's WTF Podcast. The episode with BRAD PITT & LEONARDO DICAPRIO

       Ed Sullivan's Sonic Cupcake Audio Editing

       The Cigar Authority Podcast. Which Dave uses to promote 2 Guys Cigars

       Check out the Studio 21 Cafe where they record the podcast. AMAZING

       ]]>b1ffc35c-6f0c-4f8f-b4a7-6bfe962a0188Mon, 13 Jan 2020 05:00:00 -040045:11falsefull705705Podcast Launch Reality CheckEvery January I get people who want to start a podcast and I am glad to help them, but there are some people who have absolutely unrealistic expectations. Today I want to talk about what to expect. 

       Every podcaster starts with the same two things: 

       A) No audience

       B) Integrity

       I Can't Make the Podcast Filled with Lies

       00:00:19.728 Podcast Piggy Bank

       Can You Answer the Question?

       00:02:52.782 The Scariest Podcast Question 00:04:51.045 Who Are You Talking To? 00:06:47.223 Targeting Your Audience

       How Many Download Should I Expect When I launch?

       I asked many different groups of podcasters and asked them how many downloads did they get for their first episode after one week. It wasn't 1000, or 500. It wasn't 100 or even 50. From what I've seen and heard very few people I talked to got more than twenty downloads to their first podcast after the first week. While you typically measure a podcast episode after a month of downloads, I wanted to let people know what to expect after a week.

       00:09:58.450 How many downloads to episode 1?

       How Can I Make the Most While Working the least?

       00:12:53.681 First of the year problems 00:15:22.916 How long does it take to be profitable? 00:17:18.811 Why Businesses Fail 00:18:27.966 Do any businesses succeed?

       If All You Can Aford is Free - You Have Other Issues That Need Your Attention

       00:21:48.925 If Free is the Only Option - Then Pause is the Solution

       Because of My Podcast

       00:28:47.815 Paul explains how he got to meet one of his podcasting heroes. 

       January Question of the Month

       00:32:12.381 This month we have two versions of the question. If you don't have a podcast, what is holding you back? If you DO have a podcast, what do you plan on doing differently in 2020? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       I need your answers by 1/24/20.

       Where I Will Be

       00:33:09.268

       January 11th National Speakers Association  Waltham, MA

       Ready to Get Your Message Out There?

       I'm ready to help you and look forward to working with you. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide To Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       How long does it take to make money

       Another example of how long it takes

       Beyond Powerful Radio: Valerie Geller

       ]]>Every January I get people who want to start a podcast and I am glad to help them, but there are some people who have absolutely unrealistic expectations. Today I want to talk about what to expect. 

       Every podcaster starts with the same two things: 

       A) No audience

       B) Integrity

       I Can't Make the Podcast Filled with Lies

       00:00:19.728 Podcast Piggy Bank

       Can You Answer the Question?

       00:02:52.782 The Scariest Podcast Question 00:04:51.045 Who Are You Talking To? 00:06:47.223 Targeting Your Audience

       How Many Download Should I Expect When I launch?

       I asked many different groups of podcasters and asked them how many downloads did they get for their first episode after one week. It wasn't 1000, or 500. It wasn't 100 or even 50. From what I've seen and heard very few people I talked to got more than twenty downloads to their first podcast after the first week. While you typically measure a podcast episode after a month of downloads, I wanted to let people know what to expect after a week.

       00:09:58.450 How many downloads to episode 1?

       How Can I Make the Most While Working the least?

       00:12:53.681 First of the year problems 00:15:22.916 How long does it take to be profitable? 00:17:18.811 Why Businesses Fail 00:18:27.966 Do any businesses succeed?

       If All You Can Aford is Free - You Have Other Issues That Need Your Attention

       00:21:48.925 If Free is the Only Option - Then Pause is the Solution

       Because of My Podcast

       00:28:47.815 Paul explains how he got to meet one of his podcasting heroes. 

       January Question of the Month

       00:32:12.381 This month we have two versions of the question. If you don't have a podcast, what is holding you back? If you DO have a podcast, what do you plan on doing differently in 2020? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question 

       I need your answers by 1/24/20.

       Where I Will Be

       00:33:09.268

       January 11th National Speakers Association  Waltham, MA

       Ready to Get Your Message Out There?

       I'm ready to help you and look forward to working with you. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Make Noise: A Creator's Guide To Podcasting and Great Audio Storytelling

       How long does it take to make money

       Another example of how long it takes

       Beyond Powerful Radio: Valerie Geller

       ]]>c6e68b57-1ee6-46d8-afb4-7aca755141ccMon, 06 Jan 2020 05:00:00 -040035:18falsefull704704My Favorite Podcast ( 2019 Edition)Every year I ask my audience:

       1. What is their favorite podcast

       2. Why is it their favorite? 

       I also want to know about their podcast if they have one, and where we can find these shows. 

       Time Table:

       This episode has been created with chapters. Your app may skip to the next chapter by clicking the right arrow button.

       00:01:13 Focusrite Scarlet Interfaces 00:05:00 Emily Prokop 00:07:23 Scott Johnson 00:10:59 Randy Cantrell 00:12:23 Joan Wheeler 00:14:00 Arnie Chapman 00:15:52 Clayton Allen 00:18:06 Charles McFall 00:20:57 Ed Sullivan 00:22:00 Chris Curran 00:23:43 Clay Groves 00:25:31 Donald Winn 00:27:21 Fred Castenda 00:28:58 Terry Nords 00:32:13 Daniel J Lewis 00:35:57 Kim Krajci 00:38:47 Wayne Henderson 00:42:13 Jennifer Longworth 00:43:28 Jason Bryant 00:46:39 The Rafferties 00:47:55 Seth 00:50:25 York 00:51:38 Shane Whaley 00:53:33 Veronica Hugger 00:54:52 Steve Stewart 00:57:01 Timothy Brien 00:58:20 Troy Price 01:00:04 Dave Jackson's Favorite 01:01:50 Where am I going? 01:02:43 January Question of the Month 01:04:14 Bloopers 01:05:20 Easter Egg

       Full links at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/703

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Visit www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Every year I ask my audience:

       1. What is their favorite podcast

       2. Why is it their favorite? 

       I also want to know about their podcast if they have one, and where we can find these shows. 

       Time Table:

       This episode has been created with chapters. Your app may skip to the next chapter by clicking the right arrow button.

       00:01:13 Focusrite Scarlet Interfaces 00:05:00 Emily Prokop 00:07:23 Scott Johnson 00:10:59 Randy Cantrell 00:12:23 Joan Wheeler 00:14:00 Arnie Chapman 00:15:52 Clayton Allen 00:18:06 Charles McFall 00:20:57 Ed Sullivan 00:22:00 Chris Curran 00:23:43 Clay Groves 00:25:31 Donald Winn 00:27:21 Fred Castenda 00:28:58 Terry Nords 00:32:13 Daniel J Lewis 00:35:57 Kim Krajci 00:38:47 Wayne Henderson 00:42:13 Jennifer Longworth 00:43:28 Jason Bryant 00:46:39 The Rafferties 00:47:55 Seth 00:50:25 York 00:51:38 Shane Whaley 00:53:33 Veronica Hugger 00:54:52 Steve Stewart 00:57:01 Timothy Brien 00:58:20 Troy Price 01:00:04 Dave Jackson's Favorite 01:01:50 Where am I going? 01:02:43 January Question of the Month 01:04:14 Bloopers 01:05:20 Easter Egg

       Full links at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/703

       Ready To Start Your Podcast?

       Visit www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>89713a75-eb94-4b0e-b691-8d697eb3c2a0Mon, 30 Dec 2019 05:00:00 -040001:05:45falsefull703703Is it Too Late To Start a Podcast?01:39 Because of My Podcast 06:33 Focusrite Scarlet USB Interfaces 08:35 Is it Too Late To Start a Podcast? 24:16 Great Podcasts Lead to Binge Listening 26:08 Question of the Month 28:09 Hindenburg Chapters Trick 30:45 The Importance of File Management 35:51 Podcastingevents.net 38:59 Bloopers

       Full show notes at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/702

       Sponsor: Focusrite

       Ready to Podcast?

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>01:39 Because of My Podcast 06:33 Focusrite Scarlet USB Interfaces 08:35 Is it Too Late To Start a Podcast? 24:16 Great Podcasts Lead to Binge Listening 26:08 Question of the Month 28:09 Hindenburg Chapters Trick 30:45 The Importance of File Management 35:51 Podcastingevents.net 38:59 Bloopers

       Full show notes at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/702

       Sponsor: Focusrite

       Ready to Podcast?

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>1dd208a0-c58c-49a9-b534-5ee376f07afcMon, 23 Dec 2019 05:00:00 -040039:55falsefull702702Cole Raven and Why You Should Use PodchaserToday I take a lesson from my nine-year-old niece who goes crazy about a Christmas toy that makes absolutely no sense at all.

       I also have a great conversation with Cole Raven of Podchaser to explain what it is, where it's going and how you can use it in your podcasting effort. See the School of Podcasting at https://www.podchaser.com/podcasts/school-of-podcasting-64937

       Here is my profile on Podchaser

       Table of Contents:

       00:01:11.850 Question of the Month 00:02:19.600 Focusrite USB Interfaces 00:04:13.957 Different is Better Than Better 00:13:13.993 Cole Raven From Podchaser.com 00:35:01.521 How I Might Use Podchaser 00:36:56.585 Apple Podcasts Now on Alexa 00:41:09.000 Blooper

       Mentioned in this Show

       Sally Hogshead author of the book Fascinate

       Your Podcast Consultant Podcast

       Squdcast for Recording Interviews

       Ready to Start and Grow Your Podcast?

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Today I take a lesson from my nine-year-old niece who goes crazy about a Christmas toy that makes absolutely no sense at all.

       I also have a great conversation with Cole Raven of Podchaser to explain what it is, where it's going and how you can use it in your podcasting effort. See the School of Podcasting at https://www.podchaser.com/podcasts/school-of-podcasting-64937

       Here is my profile on Podchaser

       Table of Contents:

       00:01:11.850 Question of the Month 00:02:19.600 Focusrite USB Interfaces 00:04:13.957 Different is Better Than Better 00:13:13.993 Cole Raven From Podchaser.com 00:35:01.521 How I Might Use Podchaser 00:36:56.585 Apple Podcasts Now on Alexa 00:41:09.000 Blooper

       Mentioned in this Show

       Sally Hogshead author of the book Fascinate

       Your Podcast Consultant Podcast

       Squdcast for Recording Interviews

       Ready to Start and Grow Your Podcast?

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>e5560fa0-c414-497c-8006-dc9f480775b1Mon, 16 Dec 2019 06:18:08 -040041:34falsefull701701The Ultimate Podcast Lightning RoundToday I spend a small amount of time remember the past 700 episodes. Then I launch into a "Lightning Round" if you're a new podcaster or seasoned veterans you should get something out of this show. 

       Full show notes at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/700

       ]]>Today I spend a small amount of time remember the past 700 episodes. Then I launch into a "Lightning Round" if you're a new podcaster or seasoned veterans you should get something out of this show. 

       Full show notes at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/700

       ]]>244de530-426b-41e5-aae9-a12580cda618Mon, 09 Dec 2019 05:00:00 -040026:45falsefull700700How Clay Groves the Fish Nerd Reeled in a Radio JobClay Groves is one of the nicest guys on the planet. I always smile when I see him at an event. I know I'm going to be smiling and laughing soon. He is the host of Fish Nerds, and over the years when I saw him in person he would tell me a "Because of My podcast" Story and when I heard his last one, I said, "I need to have you come on the show and share these stories.

       In today's interview you will hear:

       6:44 Clay sold some of these stories

       12:11 Clay has been paid to speak

       14:59 His relationships have lead to more and more opportunities

       16:09 Clay launches a business doing fishing tours

       20:28 What equipment does Clay use to record on a boat?

       22:51 Clay builds a path to radio

       28:54 Clay gets the call

       39:20 Clay quits his day job.

       43:24 Clay's 12-Year-old daughter is podcasting

       Podcasting is Like Fishing

       46:58

       Question of the Month for December

       I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following:

       Your name and the name of your podcast Your website where we can find your podcast A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who it's for, and what to expect) What is your favorite podcast from 2019? Why is it your favorite? What is the website of this podcast? I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question (I really need these in audio format)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Fish Nerds Podcast

       Clays Equipment:

       Zoom H4n

       ATR 2100 Microphone

       93.5 WMVW

       National Podcast Publishing Month

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and get access to the courses, group coaching, and private network. Put your worries about getting the wrong equipment, sounding stupid, and shaping your show behind you. Join worry-free with a 30 day money-back guarantee 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>Clay Groves is one of the nicest guys on the planet. I always smile when I see him at an event. I know I'm going to be smiling and laughing soon. He is the host of Fish Nerds, and over the years when I saw him in person he would tell me a "Because of My podcast" Story and when I heard his last one, I said, "I need to have you come on the show and share these stories.

       In today's interview you will hear:

       6:44 Clay sold some of these stories

       12:11 Clay has been paid to speak

       14:59 His relationships have lead to more and more opportunities

       16:09 Clay launches a business doing fishing tours

       20:28 What equipment does Clay use to record on a boat?

       22:51 Clay builds a path to radio

       28:54 Clay gets the call

       39:20 Clay quits his day job.

       43:24 Clay's 12-Year-old daughter is podcasting

       Podcasting is Like Fishing

       46:58

       Question of the Month for December

       I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following:

       Your name and the name of your podcast Your website where we can find your podcast A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who it's for, and what to expect) What is your favorite podcast from 2019? Why is it your favorite? What is the website of this podcast? I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th.

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question (I really need these in audio format)

       Mentioned In This Episode

       Fish Nerds Podcast

       Clays Equipment:

       Zoom H4n

       ATR 2100 Microphone

       93.5 WMVW

       National Podcast Publishing Month

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start and get access to the courses, group coaching, and private network. Put your worries about getting the wrong equipment, sounding stupid, and shaping your show behind you. Join worry-free with a 30 day money-back guarantee 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

       ]]>5e5bbe65-f8af-4e2f-888e-117985eb17b0Mon, 02 Dec 2019 05:00:00 -040052:10falsefull699699Tools To Clean Up Bad AudioToday we are talking about Plugins. Plugins are things you add to your audio editing software to make it better, more efficient, etc. The best way to avoid buying these (or using these) is to record good audio in the first place. That is not always an option (especially with interview shows with guests) so there is a company that has a bundle on sale 72% off and I put it through some tests. Please note this is an affiliate link (but also note - some of these are not great). 

       For videos and more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/era

       Videos and more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/698

       Question of the Month

       20:00

       What is bugging you?

       Brandy Henry from engaging on social media with Brandy Henry

       Karrie Bond from the Keywest Perspective Podcast 

       Jason Sacco from The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

       Libsyn and Spotify Changes

       Spotify no longers makes a copy of your file and puts it on their website (they serve it directly from Libsyn). This makes it much easier to replace a file. This also means your stats are going to shift in the Libsyn dashboard. Instead of being in a separate section, the Spotify stats will go under the "normal" Libsyn stats (so don't panic). 

       Question of the Month for December

       I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following:

       1. Your name and the name of your podcast
       2. Your website where we can find your podcast
       3. A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who its for, and what to expect)
       4. What is your favorite podcast from 2019?
       5. Why is it your favorite?
       6. What is the website of this podcast? 
       
       

       I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       First Things First (Book by Steven Covey) 

       The Stephen R. Covey Interactive Reader - 4 Books in 1 (includes audio and video)

       Audphonic Levelizing and Noise Removal Tool

       Start Your Podcast - Grow Your Influence (and numbers)

       Join the School of Podcasting and quit worrying about buying the right equipment, sounding stupid, unprofessional, etc. We take you from idea to influencer and offer a 30-day money-back guarantee. Sign up for a monthly or yearly subscription.

       ]]>Today we are talking about Plugins. Plugins are things you add to your audio editing software to make it better, more efficient, etc. The best way to avoid buying these (or using these) is to record good audio in the first place. That is not always an option (especially with interview shows with guests) so there is a company that has a bundle on sale 72% off and I put it through some tests. Please note this is an affiliate link (but also note - some of these are not great). 

       For videos and more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/era

       Videos and more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/698

       Question of the Month

       20:00

       What is bugging you?

       Brandy Henry from engaging on social media with Brandy Henry

       Karrie Bond from the Keywest Perspective Podcast 

       Jason Sacco from The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

       Libsyn and Spotify Changes

       Spotify no longers makes a copy of your file and puts it on their website (they serve it directly from Libsyn). This makes it much easier to replace a file. This also means your stats are going to shift in the Libsyn dashboard. Instead of being in a separate section, the Spotify stats will go under the "normal" Libsyn stats (so don't panic). 

       Question of the Month for December

       I do this every year. Please record your response and include the following:

       1. Your name and the name of your podcast
       2. Your website where we can find your podcast
       3. A brief synopsis of what your podcast is about (who its for, and what to expect)
       4. What is your favorite podcast from 2019?
       5. Why is it your favorite?
       6. What is the website of this podcast? 
       
       

       I need the answers in by December 27th, 2019 so it can be heard on December 30th. 

       Mentioned In This Episode

       First Things First (Book by Steven Covey) 

       The Stephen R. Covey Interactive Reader - 4 Books in 1 (includes audio and video)

       Audphonic Levelizing and Noise Removal Tool

       Start Your Podcast - Grow Your Influence (and numbers)

       Join the School of Podcasting and quit worrying about buying the right equipment, sounding stupid, unprofessional, etc. We take you from idea to influencer and offer a 30-day money-back guarantee. Sign up for a monthly or yearly subscription.

       ]]>9729a6e7-3fc9-4466-af14-f04134626da7Mon, 25 Nov 2019 05:00:00 -040043:26falsefull698698Behind the Scenes of Podcast AdvertisingSo many people jump to podcast advertising when they think of making money with their podcast. This may be partially due to listening to the radio which makes its money via advertising.
       About Heather Osgood

       She started her career in advertising sales and quickly learned the valuable lessons in what it meant to be a business owner. Additionally, she has served as a business coach to hundreds of small business owners. With a background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results as well as assist podcasters in finding sponsors. She founded True Native Media in January of 2016 with the hopes of helping everyone find a bigger piece of that advertising pie, and acquired j/k media agency in the fall of 2017 to further those goals.

       Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising show.

       Podcast Advertising Insights

       In this episode with Heather Osgood we learn:

       • What expectations both the podcaster and advertiser should have in place.
       • How many downloads advertisers are looking for in a podcast.
       • The best stat to measure your podcast in regards to advertising.
       • What the current CPM rates are.
       • The different types of advertising.
       • How long you should run an advertisement
       • Why dynamic ad insertion may be a way to get enough downloads to meet the advertiser download requirements.
       
       Key Points

       Going forward it may be more important when someone listens instead of when the show was published (especially for evergreen content).

       If you use programmatic advertising (which pays from what I've calculated .0017 cents per download) why would an advertiser agree to pay more when they know you will accept less?

       Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising

       [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" quote=" Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" theme="style3"]

       Mentioned in This Podcast

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference February 21-20, 2020 Houston Texas

       Podcast Movement Evolutions February 12-15, 2020 Los Angelas, Ca

       Book Me to Speak at Your Event. I'd love to hear from you

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>So many people jump to podcast advertising when they think of making money with their podcast. This may be partially due to listening to the radio which makes its money via advertising.
       About Heather Osgood

       She started her career in advertising sales and quickly learned the valuable lessons in what it meant to be a business owner. Additionally, she has served as a business coach to hundreds of small business owners. With a background in radio advertising and a love for podcasting, Heather was in a unique position to start an agency that could help both advertisers get better results as well as assist podcasters in finding sponsors. She founded True Native Media in January of 2016 with the hopes of helping everyone find a bigger piece of that advertising pie, and acquired j/k media agency in the fall of 2017 to further those goals.

       Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising show.

       Podcast Advertising Insights

       In this episode with Heather Osgood we learn:

       • What expectations both the podcaster and advertiser should have in place.
       • How many downloads advertisers are looking for in a podcast.
       • The best stat to measure your podcast in regards to advertising.
       • What the current CPM rates are.
       • The different types of advertising.
       • How long you should run an advertisement
       • Why dynamic ad insertion may be a way to get enough downloads to meet the advertiser download requirements.
       
       Key Points

       Going forward it may be more important when someone listens instead of when the show was published (especially for evergreen content).

       If you use programmatic advertising (which pays from what I've calculated .0017 cents per download) why would an advertiser agree to pay more when they know you will accept less?

       Check out the Market Success with Podcast Advertising

       [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" quote=" Everything you wanted to know about podcast advertising" theme="style3"]

       Mentioned in This Podcast

       Spark Christian Podcast Conference February 21-20, 2020 Houston Texas

       Podcast Movement Evolutions February 12-15, 2020 Los Angelas, Ca

       Book Me to Speak at Your Event. I'd love to hear from you

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>07b36619-3b96-4107-a32a-a2e1dc59227eMon, 18 Nov 2019 05:00:00 -040042:15falsefull697697Where Should I List My Podcast?In the same way that kids on Halloween want candy, podcasters want downloads. How much? MORE is the only answer. 

       Should your list your show in (insert directory name)? Well, will it help you potentially grow your audience? Then the answer is yes. Yes, Stitcher and Luminary both run ads in between your episodes (and you get none of that revenue), but for me the potential of more listeners outweighs it. Luminary has also burned through 100 million and has received another 30 million to burn through. 

       Links Mentioned In This Episode

       Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       Podlords

       Text Expander

       Karen Jackson A long look Slow Art

       Your Podcast Consultant

       School of Podcasting

       Podcasting Resources

       More Information

       There are tutorials, videos, and links to directories at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/696

       ]]>In the same way that kids on Halloween want candy, podcasters want downloads. How much? MORE is the only answer. 

       Should your list your show in (insert directory name)? Well, will it help you potentially grow your audience? Then the answer is yes. Yes, Stitcher and Luminary both run ads in between your episodes (and you get none of that revenue), but for me the potential of more listeners outweighs it. Luminary has also burned through 100 million and has received another 30 million to burn through. 

       Links Mentioned In This Episode

       Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

       Podlords

       Text Expander

       Karen Jackson A long look Slow Art

       Your Podcast Consultant

       School of Podcasting

       Podcasting Resources

       More Information

       There are tutorials, videos, and links to directories at 

       www.schoolofpodcasting.com/696

       ]]>59f47816cd024e7f8021be06d053bd4aMon, 11 Nov 2019 05:00:00 -040044:29falsefull6966968 Tools to Help You Generate Ideas For Your PodcastHow do I come up with an idea for episodes? This show just celebrated 14 years in podcasting, and I would be lying if I said it was easy to come up with ideas for an episode every week. I will say this. There are some episodes that I feel are great, and I get no feedback on, and others that I feel I took out of the oven a little early and maybe were not quite ready to go to the public, and I get tons of feedback. I've also had a few shows that finding new ideas for episodes took all the fun out of doing the podcast, and so I shut the showdown.
       Think Twice When Setting Your Schedule

       I always advise my clients to record a few episodes so they can make an educated decision. Once you see how long it takes to create an episode you can look at your current obligations and schedule and figure out where you are going to squeeze in your podcast. While you don't have to have a consistent schedule, I feel it really helps. Why? Because when you release on a predictable schedule, you become part of their routine.

       How To Never Run Out of Ideas For Your Episode

       You know I have to start with value. I can put out episodes every day and not have a problem if I don't care about delivering value. However, I deeply care about delivering value so it can be a struggle. Here are some ideas:

       Facebook Groups

       If there are Facebook groups around your genre, you can join these and just listen. By seeing what people are talking about you can create content that you know will resonate with your audience. How do you do this? Go to Facebook.com and in the search bar at the top of the Facebook screen type in whatever your show is about and see if there are any Facebook groups.

       Google Alerts

       Google Alerts is a tool where you put in a topic, it scours the web, and emails you links to stories with that word or phrase. It's not a bad idea to setup an alert for the name of your show so you can track if anyone is talking about you, or infringing on your trademark.

       Subscribe to Blogs on Your Topic

       You can use a tool like Feedly or InoReader so you can login to one place and see what is happening in your space.

       Following Conversations on Twitter

       Using Tweet Deck you can do a search for a topic and then take that search and add it as a column of information.

       Consuming More Content

       If you use Chrome there is an extension creatively named "Video Speed Controller" that allows you to watch videos faster.

       New Releases on Amazon

       You can go to Amazon and look at new releases in your category and then have that information sent to you in an RSS feed. (which you can use in Feedly or inoreader).

       Search Engine Keyword/Idea Suggestion

       Ubdersuggest is a free tool that has TONS of used, but it does have a Content Ideas tool where you enter a subject and it will spit out ideas, and show you how popular they are. Answer the Public is a very creative tool that you type in a subject and it gives you a list of questions that people may be searching for (that you can export as a CSV file). Both these tools are free.

       What is Popular on YouTube?

       YouTube is the second largest search engine. You may have heard of it. With this in mind, you can search for your topic at YouTube. Find a channel that primarily covers your topic and then click on videos, and on the right-hand side click on Sort by > Most Popular. 

       If you do this on my channel you will see my top videos are

       How to record Skype the easy way

       Anchor.fm Review Watch Before Using

       Why you should NOT use Soundcloud as a media host

       What is a podcast? Understanding the mechanics of podcasting.

       The idea here is not to steal someone's content. The idea is to see what is popular and then see if you have an opinion, insight, or story about that topic. Maybe there are a couple of topics you could combine to create a new look on an old subject.

       Resources For Interviews

       Check out the Guest Booking resources at https://podcastingresources.com/listing-category/podcast-guest-booking/

       What if Someone Else Has Already Talked About This Subject?

       There are times when you may notice that your "competition" may have talked about a subject you want to talk about. Go ahead and talk about it here is why:

       • In the USA every night there are at a bare minimum of six different stations reporting on politics. People want to hear what YOU think about something.
       • You are assuming people listen to BOTH you and your "competition (and that may not be the case).
       
       November Podcasting Events

        

       For links and information see www.podcastingevents.net

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       Bonus Content/Patreon

       ]]>How do I come up with an idea for episodes? This show just celebrated 14 years in podcasting, and I would be lying if I said it was easy to come up with ideas for an episode every week. I will say this. There are some episodes that I feel are great, and I get no feedback on, and others that I feel I took out of the oven a little early and maybe were not quite ready to go to the public, and I get tons of feedback. I've also had a few shows that finding new ideas for episodes took all the fun out of doing the podcast, and so I shut the showdown.
       Think Twice When Setting Your Schedule

       I always advise my clients to record a few episodes so they can make an educated decision. Once you see how long it takes to create an episode you can look at your current obligations and schedule and figure out where you are going to squeeze in your podcast. While you don't have to have a consistent schedule, I feel it really helps. Why? Because when you release on a predictable schedule, you become part of their routine.

       How To Never Run Out of Ideas For Your Episode

       You know I have to start with value. I can put out episodes every day and not have a problem if I don't care about delivering value. However, I deeply care about delivering value so it can be a struggle. Here are some ideas:

       Facebook Groups

       If there are Facebook groups around your genre, you can join these and just listen. By seeing what people are talking about you can create content that you know will resonate with your audience. How do you do this? Go to Facebook.com and in the search bar at the top of the Facebook screen type in whatever your show is about and see if there are any Facebook groups.

       Google Alerts

       Google Alerts is a tool where you put in a topic, it scours the web, and emails you links to stories with that word or phrase. It's not a bad idea to setup an alert for the name of your show so you can track if anyone is talking about you, or infringing on your trademark.

       Subscribe to Blogs on Your Topic

       You can use a tool like Feedly or InoReader so you can login to one place and see what is happening in your space.

       Following Conversations on Twitter

       Using Tweet Deck you can do a search for a topic and then take that search and add it as a column of information.

       Consuming More Content

       If you use Chrome there is an extension creatively named "Video Speed Controller" that allows you to watch videos faster.

       New Releases on Amazon

       You can go to Amazon and look at new releases in your category and then have that information sent to you in an RSS feed. (which you can use in Feedly or inoreader).

       Search Engine Keyword/Idea Suggestion

       Ubdersuggest is a free tool that has TONS of used, but it does have a Content Ideas tool where you enter a subject and it will spit out ideas, and show you how popular they are. Answer the Public is a very creative tool that you type in a subject and it gives you a list of questions that people may be searching for (that you can export as a CSV file). Both these tools are free.

       What is Popular on YouTube?

       YouTube is the second largest search engine. You may have heard of it. With this in mind, you can search for your topic at YouTube. Find a channel that primarily covers your topic and then click on videos, and on the right-hand side click on Sort by > Most Popular. 

       If you do this on my channel you will see my top videos are

       How to record Skype the easy way

       Anchor.fm Review Watch Before Using

       Why you should NOT use Soundcloud as a media host

       What is a podcast? Understanding the mechanics of podcasting.

       The idea here is not to steal someone's content. The idea is to see what is popular and then see if you have an opinion, insight, or story about that topic. Maybe there are a couple of topics you could combine to create a new look on an old subject.

       Resources For Interviews

       Check out the Guest Booking resources at https://podcastingresources.com/listing-category/podcast-guest-booking/

       What if Someone Else Has Already Talked About This Subject?

       There are times when you may notice that your "competition" may have talked about a subject you want to talk about. Go ahead and talk about it here is why:

       • In the USA every night there are at a bare minimum of six different stations reporting on politics. People want to hear what YOU think about something.
       • You are assuming people listen to BOTH you and your "competition (and that may not be the case).
       
       November Podcasting Events

        

       For links and information see www.podcastingevents.net

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       Bonus Content/Patreon

       ]]>084ede67ed5c40a89f1145a90e055916Mon, 04 Nov 2019 05:00:00 -040034:23falsefull695695The Biggest Regret From Starting a PodcastWe har about the benefits of podcasting on this show, and I attempt to get people to start their podcast and often ask, "What is the worst thing that could happen?" I wanted to hear what was the worst thing that happened to you by starting a podcast, what was the biggest regret?
       The Positive Side of Podcasting

       Here are some of the things people have reported happening "Because of my podcast:"

       I was able to get a dream trip to a Lambo field and watch my beloved Green Bay packers I improved my conversational skills I was asked to write a book People went to an event to meet me My face is on the cover of a comic book I raced in the Baja 1000 I got free bottles of wine I got a job I now work in media communications for the Federal Government I get to chat with my brothers on a weekly basis I get passes to the college world series They sent a Maserati to pick me up I've got to meet people I have no business meeting I have a new purpose in life I have more customers

       Biggest Podcast Regrets:

       People have gone from obsessing over starting their podcast to obsessing over the next episode(s).

       Dan from Podcasters Kit

       Clay from Fish Nerds

       Craig from Ingles Podcast is considering the time it takes to create a podcast

       Jonathon from Weekly Awesome is concerned about the time it takes to create episodes.

       Doug Payton from Consider This! podcast had some negative comments and a weird situation where someone sent an unpaid pizza to his house (spooky)

       Arnie from the Football History Dude

       One person is regretful about not remember the names and faces of people they meet.

       Question of the Month for November

       In honor of my first CEO that I ever worked for ( Richard Jusseaume ) who would tack on the question, "What's bugging you?" on to the employee survey, I ask you, "What's bugging you?" Leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Focus is more important than microphones

       Podcast Review Show

       Next Week:

       8 Tools to Help You Generate Ideas For Your Podcast. Subscribe to the show and get access as soon as the episodes is available.

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>We har about the benefits of podcasting on this show, and I attempt to get people to start their podcast and often ask, "What is the worst thing that could happen?" I wanted to hear what was the worst thing that happened to you by starting a podcast, what was the biggest regret?
       The Positive Side of Podcasting

       Here are some of the things people have reported happening "Because of my podcast:"

       I was able to get a dream trip to a Lambo field and watch my beloved Green Bay packers I improved my conversational skills I was asked to write a book People went to an event to meet me My face is on the cover of a comic book I raced in the Baja 1000 I got free bottles of wine I got a job I now work in media communications for the Federal Government I get to chat with my brothers on a weekly basis I get passes to the college world series They sent a Maserati to pick me up I've got to meet people I have no business meeting I have a new purpose in life I have more customers

       Biggest Podcast Regrets:

       People have gone from obsessing over starting their podcast to obsessing over the next episode(s).

       Dan from Podcasters Kit

       Clay from Fish Nerds

       Craig from Ingles Podcast is considering the time it takes to create a podcast

       Jonathon from Weekly Awesome is concerned about the time it takes to create episodes.

       Doug Payton from Consider This! podcast had some negative comments and a weird situation where someone sent an unpaid pizza to his house (spooky)

       Arnie from the Football History Dude

       One person is regretful about not remember the names and faces of people they meet.

       Question of the Month for November

       In honor of my first CEO that I ever worked for ( Richard Jusseaume ) who would tack on the question, "What's bugging you?" on to the employee survey, I ask you, "What's bugging you?" Leave your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Podcast

       Focus is more important than microphones

       Podcast Review Show

       Next Week:

       8 Tools to Help You Generate Ideas For Your Podcast. Subscribe to the show and get access as soon as the episodes is available.

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>e184b81701a74e6c982db72b1dc66f8bMon, 28 Oct 2019 04:00:00 -040034:12falsefull694694Building Your Own Value PyramidToday we are going to take the phrase "Value Proposition" which is typically used in business and apply it to podcast. In the past few months, I've attended a fair amount of conferences and I ask people about their podcast. In most cases, people explain their show and I can see if I want to listen or not (or decide if I'm their target audience). I want to identify what people feel is valuable, and then help you shape that into your message. I learned about some of this in Tim Schmoyer's Video Creators course. The one that caught my eye was the Value Pyramid.
       The Things That You Should Ensure You Are Doing Before Pressing Record On Your Podcast

       I always say if you are not going to make your audience :

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       
       

       If you are not educating or entertaining them, then don't press record. There is no value. The value pyramid from Harvard Research takes it even deeper.

       What is Value?

       Value is when the benefit of consuming your content is worth the time and effort it takes to consume it.

       This is Why It Needs to be EASY to Consume Your Content

       If you make someone dig for your play button, or only put a subscribe button for Apple Podcasts and completely ignore the Android side of life, the android users are likely to say "Never mind" and give up trying to get your content on your phone. This always means that if you make it easy to consume your content, they might give you a "pass" with your content if they didn't have to dig to get the content.

       Functional Value

       Do you help your audience by making things easier? Do you save them time? Do you save them money? Does it provide a way for people to connect?

       Emotional Value

       How does your podcast make people feel? Does your podcast reduce anxiety? Do you reward your audience? Does the design tweak their emotions? Does it boost their wellness? Is there a badge people could wear to show their loyalty?

       Life-Changing Value

       These values promise a personal transformation of some kind. If you can provide life-changing value, your audience will LOVE your show. If you have a community where they can belong. Can you make them feel like they've achieved a goal? Can you motivate them? Can you provide hope?

       Social Impact Value

       Are you impacting more than your audience?

       How Do You Tell People You Deliver Value?

       A value proposition explains how your audience benefits from your show.

       It may point out who your audience is.

       Why you are a better fit than other podcasts.

       How your podcast will help solve your audience's issues.

       Different Pieces of a Value Proposition

       Have a short but powerful headline that helps summarize a key aspect of your UVP (in less than 10 words). Have a supporting sub-headline or short paragraph to help explain or clarify your UVP. Have a short bulleted list of the benefits/advantages of using your product/service, with supporting visual imagery (for example, icons, badges, or a hero shot). Show all of the elements above the page fold (the area that visitors can see initially without having to scroll).

       Make It "No Thinking Involved" Clear

       In one article it mentions how you need to make it CLEAR to the person hearing or reading it. Here are some examples:

       Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows”

       By looking at this, I understand what each company does.

       Here are some more:

       Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers” Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Target: “Expect More, Pay Less” Skillshare: “Learn a New Skill Each Day” Evernote: “Remember Everything” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows” Bitly - shorten, share, measure. Spotify: “Music for Everyone”

       What Value Do YOU Bring

       Why should your ideal listener listen to YOU.

       What do you do differently than other podcasts on your topic?

       Not So Good Value Propositions

       Epson says, “Where there’s business, there’s Epson.” - Very generic

       HP says, “HP: everywhere you do business.” - Very generic

       Time Warner Cable says, "Enjoy Better." - Vague.

       Burger King: Be Your Way - Confusing.

       This is an example of what some like to call blandvertising. It could mean anything, and sometimes its just keywords that are thrown together.

       Confusing Podcasts

       I looked in Apple podcasts to see if there were any shows that were confusing to me. Here is one I found:

       the salvaged soul podcast: This podcast is a place for all things REAL. I want to help you live your best life by being true to yourself. I will share all the ups and downs of business, marriage, family and friends! The good, the bad, the ugly. The real way to reach happiness and financial freedom!

       It Always Comes Back to Knowing Who Your Audience Is

       When you know who your audience is, and what their pain points are you eliminate competition as fewer people will be doing what you do.

       You want to use their verbiage so its easier to connect with them. In an Apple review, someone put "The best information and experience to learn the right way to podcast from the heart of a teacher" about this podcast. Look for phrases and points that you can use to help explain your value.

       She Podcasts Live Revisited

       34:44 Jaye From The Pot Stirrer Podcast shares her insights from attending She Podcasts Live

       Question of the Month

       I have a "Because of my podcast" segment that points out the benefits of podcasting. Do you have any negative side effects of podcasting for you? Be sure to mention your show and website when you go to www.schoolofpodcating.com/question

       I need the answers by 10/25/19.

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Video Creators

       My Stuttering Life

       More on Value Propositions

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>Today we are going to take the phrase "Value Proposition" which is typically used in business and apply it to podcast. In the past few months, I've attended a fair amount of conferences and I ask people about their podcast. In most cases, people explain their show and I can see if I want to listen or not (or decide if I'm their target audience). I want to identify what people feel is valuable, and then help you shape that into your message. I learned about some of this in Tim Schmoyer's Video Creators course. The one that caught my eye was the Value Pyramid.
       The Things That You Should Ensure You Are Doing Before Pressing Record On Your Podcast

       I always say if you are not going to make your audience :

       • Laugh
       • Cry
       • Think
       • Groan
       
       

       If you are not educating or entertaining them, then don't press record. There is no value. The value pyramid from Harvard Research takes it even deeper.

       What is Value?

       Value is when the benefit of consuming your content is worth the time and effort it takes to consume it.

       This is Why It Needs to be EASY to Consume Your Content

       If you make someone dig for your play button, or only put a subscribe button for Apple Podcasts and completely ignore the Android side of life, the android users are likely to say "Never mind" and give up trying to get your content on your phone. This always means that if you make it easy to consume your content, they might give you a "pass" with your content if they didn't have to dig to get the content.

       Functional Value

       Do you help your audience by making things easier? Do you save them time? Do you save them money? Does it provide a way for people to connect?

       Emotional Value

       How does your podcast make people feel? Does your podcast reduce anxiety? Do you reward your audience? Does the design tweak their emotions? Does it boost their wellness? Is there a badge people could wear to show their loyalty?

       Life-Changing Value

       These values promise a personal transformation of some kind. If you can provide life-changing value, your audience will LOVE your show. If you have a community where they can belong. Can you make them feel like they've achieved a goal? Can you motivate them? Can you provide hope?

       Social Impact Value

       Are you impacting more than your audience?

       How Do You Tell People You Deliver Value?

       A value proposition explains how your audience benefits from your show.

       It may point out who your audience is.

       Why you are a better fit than other podcasts.

       How your podcast will help solve your audience's issues.

       Different Pieces of a Value Proposition

       Have a short but powerful headline that helps summarize a key aspect of your UVP (in less than 10 words). Have a supporting sub-headline or short paragraph to help explain or clarify your UVP. Have a short bulleted list of the benefits/advantages of using your product/service, with supporting visual imagery (for example, icons, badges, or a hero shot). Show all of the elements above the page fold (the area that visitors can see initially without having to scroll).

       Make It "No Thinking Involved" Clear

       In one article it mentions how you need to make it CLEAR to the person hearing or reading it. Here are some examples:

       Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows”

       By looking at this, I understand what each company does.

       Here are some more:

       Stripe: “Web and mobile payments, built for developers” Lyft: “Rides in Minutes” Target: “Expect More, Pay Less” Skillshare: “Learn a New Skill Each Day” Evernote: “Remember Everything” Zapier: “Connect Your Apps and Automate Workflows” Bitly - shorten, share, measure. Spotify: “Music for Everyone”

       What Value Do YOU Bring

       Why should your ideal listener listen to YOU.

       What do you do differently than other podcasts on your topic?

       Not So Good Value Propositions

       Epson says, “Where there’s business, there’s Epson.” - Very generic

       HP says, “HP: everywhere you do business.” - Very generic

       Time Warner Cable says, "Enjoy Better." - Vague.

       Burger King: Be Your Way - Confusing.

       This is an example of what some like to call blandvertising. It could mean anything, and sometimes its just keywords that are thrown together.

       Confusing Podcasts

       I looked in Apple podcasts to see if there were any shows that were confusing to me. Here is one I found:

       the salvaged soul podcast: This podcast is a place for all things REAL. I want to help you live your best life by being true to yourself. I will share all the ups and downs of business, marriage, family and friends! The good, the bad, the ugly. The real way to reach happiness and financial freedom!

       It Always Comes Back to Knowing Who Your Audience Is

       When you know who your audience is, and what their pain points are you eliminate competition as fewer people will be doing what you do.

       You want to use their verbiage so its easier to connect with them. In an Apple review, someone put "The best information and experience to learn the right way to podcast from the heart of a teacher" about this podcast. Look for phrases and points that you can use to help explain your value.

       She Podcasts Live Revisited

       34:44 Jaye From The Pot Stirrer Podcast shares her insights from attending She Podcasts Live

       Question of the Month

       I have a "Because of my podcast" segment that points out the benefits of podcasting. Do you have any negative side effects of podcasting for you? Be sure to mention your show and website when you go to www.schoolofpodcating.com/question

       I need the answers by 10/25/19.

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Video Creators

       My Stuttering Life

       More on Value Propositions

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>a6dc0dcc68474f628cee55b3997ed4b2Mon, 21 Oct 2019 04:00:00 -040040:56falsefull693693The Magic of Podcasting - She Podcasts Live 2019I'm back from She Podcasts Live 2019 with some insights from an all women's podcast conference. It was great fun, great conversations and LOTS of laughs. Elise and Jess put on a great event, and everyone walked out with lots of actionable items to put into their podcast.

       1:57 Because of My Podcast Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome

       3:00 Listeners WILL BINGE YOUR SHOW with Kimberly Sumpter from Sistahs Connect

       5:41 You are NOT alone - with Jason from

       7:59 Because of THIS podcast

       11:54 Your Voice Can Make a Difference

       16:41 Speakup Story Telling Podcast with Matthew Dicks  - Women need to speak up

       19:51 She Podcasts Live was Safe for Women

       27:05 NaPodPoMo - 30 podcasts in 30 days

       32:25 question of the Month (answer here )

       33:11 Book Update

       33:47 DC Podfest - use the coupon code DJPALS

       34:26 podcastingevents.net

       35:52 My favorite quote from She Podcasts Live

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>I'm back from She Podcasts Live 2019 with some insights from an all women's podcast conference. It was great fun, great conversations and LOTS of laughs. Elise and Jess put on a great event, and everyone walked out with lots of actionable items to put into their podcast.

       1:57 Because of My Podcast Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome

       3:00 Listeners WILL BINGE YOUR SHOW with Kimberly Sumpter from Sistahs Connect

       5:41 You are NOT alone - with Jason from

       7:59 Because of THIS podcast

       11:54 Your Voice Can Make a Difference

       16:41 Speakup Story Telling Podcast with Matthew Dicks  - Women need to speak up

       19:51 She Podcasts Live was Safe for Women

       27:05 NaPodPoMo - 30 podcasts in 30 days

       32:25 question of the Month (answer here )

       33:11 Book Update

       33:47 DC Podfest - use the coupon code DJPALS

       34:26 podcastingevents.net

       35:52 My favorite quote from She Podcasts Live

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>5730df9e38904d2aa6963acf89724bb7Tue, 15 Oct 2019 01:25:57 -040037:03falsefull692692Homework For Life - Storyworthy is a Book I Couldn't Stop ReadingI have added a new book to my "Must Read" list if you are a podcaster. The first one was Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World by Michael Hyatt. Why? Because he talks about making WOW content.

       My second must-read book is Will It Fly?: How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money by Patt Flynn. Why? Because it talks about making sure your product (or in this case a podcast) is going to connect with your audience.

       My third must-read book is Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life Through the Power of Storytelling This seems somewhat obvious, but someone who is good at storytelling wrote a book that was hard to put down. That's like saying I couldn't stop eating cupcakes from the top cupcake baking chef. It's a book I want to read over and over until the skills in the book are as natural to me as breathing.

        

       Full Show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/691

       ]]>I have added a new book to my "Must Read" list if you are a podcaster. The first one was Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World by Michael Hyatt. Why? Because he talks about making WOW content.

       My second must-read book is Will It Fly?: How to Test Your Next Business Idea So You Don't Waste Your Time and Money by Patt Flynn. Why? Because it talks about making sure your product (or in this case a podcast) is going to connect with your audience.

       My third must-read book is Storyworthy: Engage, Teach, Persuade, and Change Your Life Through the Power of Storytelling This seems somewhat obvious, but someone who is good at storytelling wrote a book that was hard to put down. That's like saying I couldn't stop eating cupcakes from the top cupcake baking chef. It's a book I want to read over and over until the skills in the book are as natural to me as breathing.

        

       Full Show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/691

       ]]>2f2c5946055448dda5853b4ef0540690Mon, 07 Oct 2019 04:00:00 -040047:50falsefull691691Help My Podcast is Stuck and Not GrowingYes, and here is why. Americans spend over 60 billion dollars a year on diet books. Now you might say that is why people write books because people buy books - because each year more and more people are getting fat. How many people move to Los Angelas to become an actor or actress or to Nashville to be Musicians. You have your talent. You have your goals. You have your unique insights and they aren't going to help or entertain anyone sitting on your computer.
       I'll Never Be Good As....

       I've spoken about impostor syndrome in the past. Today I'm going to talk a bit about Tom Brady who some consider being the best Quarterback of all time in American football. Tom Brady decided to pursue football in college (he was good in multiple sports, but LOVED football). He went to Michigan in 1999. He didn't look at the top quarterbacks in 1999 and say, "I'll never be as good as Bret Farve, Troy Aikman, or Steve Young. Instead, he pursued football and used those quarterbacks as inspiration.

       You may not be as good as someone, you may actually be better - because you can learn from their history.

       When Your Podcast Is Stuck

       Today we are going to talk about getting your show unstuck. Here is a typical podcast that I run into on a regular basis. Maybe this sounds like you:

       • Podcasting for five months
       • Averaging about 54 downloads per episode
       • Looking to grow your audience (we all area)
       • Looking to make some money with your podcast
       
       

       It's hard to monetize a show with 50 downloads per episode. Many people don't realize that you're lucky if you get 5% of your audience to take action. That means three people will take action (if we round up).

       Finding Motivation to Keep Going

       You started your podcast cause you love your subject, and you want to talk about your subject, podcasting sounded fun, and you jumped in.

       Scenario: You and your cousin love to talk about your favorite TV show. You start a weekly podcast and you talk about your favorite TV show.

       Conclusion: This podcast is successful. You wanted to talk to your cousin about your favorite TV show with your cousin and you are. Now you want to earn some income. You changed your why.

       Try this: Go to an episode from three months ago and measure how many downloads you got in the first week. Then measure how many downloads you received from one of your latest episodes. I did this for someone at Libsyn and his numbers were up 20%.

       You Changed Your Why

       Now you are stuck with a podcast about a TV show that is trying to make money. I said in my previous episode about making money with your podcast that the #1 BEST way to make money with your podcast is to have a product to sell your audience. You don't have one of those.

       The second best way is through affiliate marketing. Aside from DVD's of the show, there may not be a ton of products related to the show that you can promote and earn a commission on the sale.

       This leads you to crowdfunding with a  tool like Patreon. Patreon says you might get 5% (that's three people in your case) and the average donation is $7 so you might end up with $21 for the month. That should pay your monthly media hosting bill. At least your not losing money to enjoy your hobby. If you move to a platform that offers dynamic ad insertion (where you earn .0017 cents per download) you would earn an extra thirty four cents per month.

       Did You Make a Mistake?

       Some might say you didn't plan enough. You didn't think through your podcast enough, and I'm not sure you agree with that. You started your podcast and I run into people on a regular basis who have been planning their podcast for YEARS.

       The six quarterbacks drafted before Brady combined to start 191 games and throw 246 touchdowns. Brady has won 201 games in his career — including four Super Bowls — and thrown 450 touchdowns ... and counting.

       The Beatles were formed in 1960 (Harrison, Lennon, McCartney have been together since 1958). In 1962 they got a manager to make them a bit more professional, and a music producer to help shape their sound. They didn't have their famed appearance on the Ed Sullivan TV show until 1964. That means it took four to six years of practicing their craft, going through some lineup changes (Pete Best, Stuart Sutcliffe, Norman Chapman, Tommy Moore, and Jimmie Nicol). They were a bit like the band Spinal Tap when it came to drummers. Keep in mind that not everyone liked the Beatles Decca Records rejected the band with the comment "Guitar groups are on the way out, Mr. Epstein." So it's OK if not everyone likes you.

       Who and Why?

       I've talked about knowing who your audience is a lot of this website, as well as knowing your why. These are the two most important questions you need to answer. If someone had said I want to start a podcast about a TV show and I want to earn a living from it in five months I would've told them to not even bother. If they had told me five years, I would explain to that you need to come up with multiple streams of income.

       I would also point out, that it is 100% OK to do a podcast as a hobby and enjoy yourself.

       What Do One of a Kind People Do?

       Tom Brady is a quarterback in the NFL. For my friends across the pond, forgive me as I say "Football." He is playing his 20th season this year.

       Brady has played in nine Super Bowls, winning six of them, the most of any player in NFL history. Due to his numerous accomplishments, records, and accolades, he is considered by many sports analysts to be the greatest quarterback of all time. When you take the phrase Greatest Of All Time you get GOAT.

       I did a deep dive into Brady (shout out to Monica Rivera for turning me on to Tom vs Time on Facebook). I was not surprised that a ton of his success is his attitude.

       What Podcasters Can Learn From Tom Brady

       He started as a child attending football camps. He has a genuine, insatiable love of the game of Football.

       In high school, Brady was not good enough to start on the 0–8 JV team, which had not scored a touchdown all year.

       He created highlight tapes and sent them to schools he considered attending. This led to strong interest from many football programs around the nation.

       He joins the Michigan football team as their seventh quarterback. He had over 100 practices his first year not to mention the hundreds of hours of meetings to prepare him to play. He was a backup for two years. When he finally got to play in a game his pass was a 45-yard interception resulting in the other team getting a touchdown. He wasn't sure if the coach would ever put him in again.

       At one point, Brady hired a sports psychologist to help him cope with frustration and anxiety and even considered transferring to California. He worked closely with assistant athletic director Greg Harden, who met with Brady every week to build his confidence and to maximize his performance on the field. This aided Tom in believing in himself.

       In his first year at Michigan, he played one game with a rating of 63.7. He sought guidance on a weekly basis The next three years his rating was 137, 133, 138.

       Brady was selected by the New England Patriots with the 199th overall pick in the sixth round of 2000 NFL Draft

       Tom Brady realizes that there are many people that want his job, so he works year-round on his game. He realizes he is in a "What have you done for me? business."In investments, there is a line that states "Past performance does not guarantee future results. " He earns his position every day.

       He cares deeply and has stated that losing super bowls is something he never forgets.

       He LOVES the game. Why else with someone with an estimated $180 million dollar net worth be putting his body on the line.

       He understands how to set priorities. He will say, My family is number one, and football is "One A." When its football time, he is all football. When it's family time, he is all in on his family.

       He has evolved over the years and hires coaches and experts to help out. He is looking for any kind of improvement, even if it's only a one percent improvement.

       The six quarterbacks drafted before Brady combined to start 191 games and throw 246 touchdowns. Brady has won 201 games in his career — including four Super Bowls — and thrown 450 touchdowns ... and counting.

       Another saying from Brady is staying hungry- stay humble. He often gives back to the community.

       Getting Your Podcast Unstuck

       Tom Brady LOVES to evaluate his performance. He is looking for ANY way to improve his performance. You should do the same. I talked about evaluating your own show in the past. Go back to some old episodes and listen with fresh ears. I recently went back through some old email sequences and found some HORRIBLE mistakes. Go listen to your show with fresh ears.

       Poll your audience. I just got a poll from the show Chapo House who is making $141,042 PER MONTH and their poll amounted to "What are we doing right, and what do you wish we would do less of." Do you have the courage to send out that survey?

       If you're struggling with finding topics, then take some time and search for new blogs, youtube channels, podcasts, and other sources of information that you might want to comment on.

       Take action to DO things that you can talk about first hand. Go to where your audience is and make friends and start...]]>Yes, and here is why. Americans spend over 60 billion dollars a year on diet books. Now you might say that is why people write books because people buy books - because each year more and more people are getting fat. How many people move to Los Angelas to become an actor or actress or to Nashville to be Musicians. You have your talent. You have your goals. You have your unique insights and they aren't going to help or entertain anyone sitting on your computer.

       I'll Never Be Good As....

       I've spoken about impostor syndrome in the past. Today I'm going to talk a bit about Tom Brady who some consider being the best Quarterback of all time in American football. Tom Brady decided to pursue football in college (he was good in multiple sports, but LOVED football). He went to Michigan in 1999. He didn't look at the top quarterbacks in 1999 and say, "I'll never be as good as Bret Farve, Troy Aikman, or Steve Young. Instead, he pursued football and used those quarterbacks as inspiration.

       You may not be as good as someone, you may actually be better - because you can learn from their history.

       When Your Podcast Is Stuck

       Today we are going to talk about getting your show unstuck. Here is a typical podcast that I run into on a regular basis. Maybe this sounds like you:

       • Podcasting for five months
       • Averaging about 54 downloads per episode
       • Looking to grow your audience (we all area)
       • Looking to make some money with your podcast
       
       

       It's hard to monetize a show with 50 downloads per episode. Many people don't realize that you're lucky if you get 5% of your audience to take action. That means three people will take action (if we round up).

       Finding Motivation to Keep Going

       You started your podcast cause you love your subject, and you want to talk about your subject, podcasting sounded fun, and you jumped in.

       Scenario: You and your cousin love to talk about your favorite TV show. You start a weekly podcast and you talk about your favorite TV show.

       Conclusion: This podcast is successful. You wanted to talk to your cousin about your favorite TV show with your cousin and you are. Now you want to earn some income. You changed your why.

       Try this: Go to an episode from three months ago and measure how many downloads you got in the first week. Then measure how many downloads you received from one of your latest episodes. I did this for someone at Libsyn and his numbers were up 20%.

       You Changed Your Why

       Now you are stuck with a podcast about a TV show that is trying to make money. I said in my previous episode about making money with your podcast that the #1 BEST way to make money with your podcast is to have a product to sell your audience. You don't have one of those.

       The second best way is through affiliate marketing. Aside from DVD's of the show, there may not be a ton of products related to the show that you can promote and earn a commission on the sale.

       This leads you to crowdfunding with a  tool like Patreon. Patreon says you might get 5% (that's three people in your case) and the average donation is $7 so you might end up with $21 for the month. That should pay your monthly media hosting bill. At least your not losing money to enjoy your hobby. If you move to a platform that offers dynamic ad insertion (where you earn .0017 cents per download) you would earn an extra thirty four cents per month.

       Did You Make a Mistake?

       Some might say you didn't plan enough. You didn't think through your podcast enough, and I'm not sure you agree with that. You started your podcast and I run into people on a regular basis who have been planning their podcast for YEARS.

       The six quarterbacks drafted before Brady combined to start 191 games and throw 246 touchdowns. Brady has won 201 games in his career — including four Super Bowls — and thrown 450 touchdowns ... and counting.

       The Beatles were formed in 1960 (Harrison, Lennon, McCartney have been together since 1958). In 1962 they got a manager to make them a bit more professional, and a music producer to help shape their sound. They didn't have their famed appearance on the Ed Sullivan TV show until 1964. That means it took four to six years of practicing their craft, going through some lineup changes (Pete Best, Stuart Sutcliffe, Norman Chapman, Tommy Moore, and Jimmie Nicol). They were a bit like the band Spinal Tap when it came to drummers. Keep in mind that not everyone liked the Beatles Decca Records rejected the band with the comment "Guitar groups are on the way out, Mr. Epstein." So it's OK if not everyone likes you.

       Who and Why?

       I've talked about knowing who your audience is a lot of this website, as well as knowing your why. These are the two most important questions you need to answer. If someone had said I want to start a podcast about a TV show and I want to earn a living from it in five months I would've told them to not even bother. If they had told me five years, I would explain to that you need to come up with multiple streams of income.

       I would also point out, that it is 100% OK to do a podcast as a hobby and enjoy yourself.

       What Do One of a Kind People Do?

       Tom Brady is a quarterback in the NFL. For my friends across the pond, forgive me as I say "Football." He is playing his 20th season this year.

       Brady has played in nine Super Bowls, winning six of them, the most of any player in NFL history. Due to his numerous accomplishments, records, and accolades, he is considered by many sports analysts to be the greatest quarterback of all time. When you take the phrase Greatest Of All Time you get GOAT.

       I did a deep dive into Brady (shout out to Monica Rivera for turning me on to Tom vs Time on Facebook). I was not surprised that a ton of his success is his attitude.

       What Podcasters Can Learn From Tom Brady

       He started as a child attending football camps. He has a genuine, insatiable love of the game of Football.

       In high school, Brady was not good enough to start on the 0–8 JV team, which had not scored a touchdown all year.

       He created highlight tapes and sent them to schools he considered attending. This led to strong interest from many football programs around the nation.

       He joins the Michigan football team as their seventh quarterback. He had over 100 practices his first year not to mention the hundreds of hours of meetings to prepare him to play. He was a backup for two years. When he finally got to play in a game his pass was a 45-yard interception resulting in the other team getting a touchdown. He wasn't sure if the coach would ever put him in again.

       At one point, Brady hired a sports psychologist to help him cope with frustration and anxiety and even considered transferring to California. He worked closely with assistant athletic director Greg Harden, who met with Brady every week to build his confidence and to maximize his performance on the field. This aided Tom in believing in himself.

       In his first year at Michigan, he played one game with a rating of 63.7. He sought guidance on a weekly basis The next three years his rating was 137, 133, 138.

       Brady was selected by the New England Patriots with the 199th overall pick in the sixth round of 2000 NFL Draft

       Tom Brady realizes that there are many people that want his job, so he works year-round on his game. He realizes he is in a "What have you done for me? business."In investments, there is a line that states "Past performance does not guarantee future results. " He earns his position every day.

       He cares deeply and has stated that losing super bowls is something he never forgets.

       He LOVES the game. Why else with someone with an estimated $180 million dollar net worth be putting his body on the line.

       He understands how to set priorities. He will say, My family is number one, and football is "One A." When its football time, he is all football. When it's family time, he is all in on his family.

       He has evolved over the years and hires coaches and experts to help out. He is looking for any kind of improvement, even if it's only a one percent improvement.

       The six quarterbacks drafted before Brady combined to start 191 games and throw 246 touchdowns. Brady has won 201 games in his career — including four Super Bowls — and thrown 450 touchdowns ... and counting.

       Another saying from Brady is staying hungry- stay humble. He often gives back to the community.

       Getting Your Podcast Unstuck

       Tom Brady LOVES to evaluate his performance. He is looking for ANY way to improve his performance. You should do the same. I talked about evaluating your own show in the past. Go back to some old episodes and listen with fresh ears. I recently went back through some old email sequences and found some HORRIBLE mistakes. Go listen to your show with fresh ears.

       Poll your audience. I just got a poll from the show Chapo House who is making $141,042 PER MONTH and their poll amounted to "What are we doing right, and what do you wish we would do less of." Do you have the courage to send out that survey?

       If you're struggling with finding topics, then take some time and search for new blogs, youtube channels, podcasts, and other sources of information that you might want to comment on.

       Take action to DO things that you can talk about first hand. Go to where your audience is and make friends and start relationships with people

       Make sure your show is everywhere. I'll be talking about this on DC Podfest. I am saddened when someone signs up for the Podcast Review Show or Podcast Rodeo and I ask for a link to your show and they send a link to their episode in Apple. What if I was on android like 80% of people in Europe?

       Start a Facebook group, or join a Facebook group around your topic. This may feed you with ideas, or introduce you to people you may want to interview.

       What If I Change Direction?

       If you change direction (and first, yes you can) you need to have the stomach for it. Why? Because not everyone is going to like your new direction and leave. Are you OK with that? You need to be because you need to realize that anyone who leaves is not your target audience. Then you need to realize that it is a bit like starting over, and it may take some time to get the attention of your target audience and get them to talk about you.

       Take A Long Hard Look in the Mirror

       It may be that you've run out of gas about your topic. Maybe you've said all you need to say. Very popular shows like Game of Thrones, Seinfeld, Cheers, all came to an end, and eventually, all podcats will come to an end (unless you hand it off to a new host).

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>a459baeecc8d4e0d88d0dc29f6c4c154Mon, 30 Sep 2019 04:00:00 -040059:50falsefull690690Making the World a Better Place with Dr. Richard ShusterDr. Richard Shuster did spend thousands of dollars on his equipment when he started. He used what he had, and moved forward. Little did he know his podcast would stop someone from taking their own life. Richard has a clear goal and focus of the show, and it is that focus that ensures his show resonates with his audience. I can't wait for you to hear his story.
       Sponsor: Focusrite

       00:56

       I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy use interfact that sounds great it's a great piece of equipment.

       • Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide
       • Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show
       • Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best
       • Works with the recording software you’re already using
       • Works with any type of XLR microphone
       • Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds
       • New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice
       
       

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Dr. Richard Shuster Never Planned on This...

       3:25

       I want to thank Matthew Passey for turning me on to Dr. Richarh Shuster of the Daily Helping podcast who is a walking "Becuase of my Podcast story." He has a great background including:

       Master’s Degree in Social Work

       He's a licensed clinical psychologist

       He worked at the Cleveland Clinic and assessed NFL players as part of the league’s concussion protocol

       He has subspecialized training in forensic and neuropsychology and extensive experience working with physically and sexually abused children.

       His mission is to make the world a better place.

       His show’s growing movement strives to get a million people each day to commit acts of kindness for others and post it on their social media using #mydailyhelping®.

       Check out his podcast at https://www.thedailyhelping.com/

       Donate to his charity at http://everykidrocks.org

       Bonus Content

       34:51 Dr. Richard talks about his assessment tool is different than Myers Briggs.

       What is PULSAR and how it helps with addiction?

       Why he is putting people's lives over profits.

       The P.O.W.E.R.S. assessment.

       Check out www.seekyourpowers.com

       My Thoughts on Fincon and MICDC

       35:54 I was asked to speak at Fincon and the Military Influencers Conference. Both conferences were in DC.  I had a great time and probably got more clients out of that week than I have at any other conference. Why? Because the people at Fincon had a budget to learn how to podcast (or they just hire Steve Stewart) and the Military people are disciplined, focused, and not afraid to march into areas and situations they have never been in before.

       The interesting thing (and by that I mean hard) was these people having conversations I couldn't jump into. The financial people were talking Monte Carlo Simulations, and the military people had so many letters and numbers put together in ways I had never heard of I was always confused (when your A1 tried to get to the G7 before the protocol of WHAT?).

       At Fincon there was a speakers dinner. Everyone I was looking at was a speaker. I got my food and moved as far away from the crowd as I could. I can talk to anybody at podcast movement about podcasting, but this was different. Then I thought, "If anyone is going to benefit from a podcast in this conference it's probably a speaker." I walked over and did my best to jump into conversations. These were nice people, and they would eventually try to pull me in, but you feel awkward just watching others talk. You feel like a kid trying to jump into a double dutch jump rope. You're looking for the best time to jump in, and you're scared you're going to trip and fall.

       I say this to let you know that it's scary. I say this to let you know that it's a bit overwhelming to do something you've never done. The fear of the unknown is real. I was able to pull myself up, and I can help you to.

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>Dr. Richard Shuster did spend thousands of dollars on his equipment when he started. He used what he had, and moved forward. Little did he know his podcast would stop someone from taking their own life. Richard has a clear goal and focus of the show, and it is that focus that ensures his show resonates with his audience. I can't wait for you to hear his story.
       Sponsor: Focusrite

       00:56

       I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy use interfact that sounds great it's a great piece of equipment.

       • Scarlett, now in its 3rd Generation, is the world’s best-selling USB interface range with over 3 million units sold worldwide
       • Choose from 6 different interfaces with 1, 4, or 8 microphone inputs depending on the number of hosts and guests on your show
       • Superior sound quality makes sure you sound your best
       • Works with the recording software you’re already using
       • Works with any type of XLR microphone
       • Loopback on select units allows you to record Skype or Zoom calls directly into your recording software with no workarounds
       • New unique Air feature adds brightness and presence to your voice
       
       

       Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

       Dr. Richard Shuster Never Planned on This...

       3:25

       I want to thank Matthew Passey for turning me on to Dr. Richarh Shuster of the Daily Helping podcast who is a walking "Becuase of my Podcast story." He has a great background including:

       Master’s Degree in Social Work

       He's a licensed clinical psychologist

       He worked at the Cleveland Clinic and assessed NFL players as part of the league’s concussion protocol

       He has subspecialized training in forensic and neuropsychology and extensive experience working with physically and sexually abused children.

       His mission is to make the world a better place.

       His show’s growing movement strives to get a million people each day to commit acts of kindness for others and post it on their social media using #mydailyhelping®.

       Check out his podcast at https://www.thedailyhelping.com/

       Donate to his charity at http://everykidrocks.org

       Bonus Content

       34:51 Dr. Richard talks about his assessment tool is different than Myers Briggs.

       What is PULSAR and how it helps with addiction?

       Why he is putting people's lives over profits.

       The P.O.W.E.R.S. assessment.

       Check out www.seekyourpowers.com

       My Thoughts on Fincon and MICDC

       35:54 I was asked to speak at Fincon and the Military Influencers Conference. Both conferences were in DC.  I had a great time and probably got more clients out of that week than I have at any other conference. Why? Because the people at Fincon had a budget to learn how to podcast (or they just hire Steve Stewart) and the Military people are disciplined, focused, and not afraid to march into areas and situations they have never been in before.

       The interesting thing (and by that I mean hard) was these people having conversations I couldn't jump into. The financial people were talking Monte Carlo Simulations, and the military people had so many letters and numbers put together in ways I had never heard of I was always confused (when your A1 tried to get to the G7 before the protocol of WHAT?).

       At Fincon there was a speakers dinner. Everyone I was looking at was a speaker. I got my food and moved as far away from the crowd as I could. I can talk to anybody at podcast movement about podcasting, but this was different. Then I thought, "If anyone is going to benefit from a podcast in this conference it's probably a speaker." I walked over and did my best to jump into conversations. These were nice people, and they would eventually try to pull me in, but you feel awkward just watching others talk. You feel like a kid trying to jump into a double dutch jump rope. You're looking for the best time to jump in, and you're scared you're going to trip and fall.

       I say this to let you know that it's scary. I say this to let you know that it's a bit overwhelming to do something you've never done. The fear of the unknown is real. I was able to pull myself up, and I can help you to.

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>ade431294a9d4c59b86e8a40ca5f741cMon, 23 Sep 2019 04:00:00 -040046:26falsefull6896898 Months Later Do I Still Like the Rodecaster Pro?In a previous episode, three podcasters shared their opinion on the Rodecaster pro. We all liked it but wanted some more PRO options. Today I give you an update.
       Because of My Podcast - I Got a Sponsor

       Brandon/StudeeoB of the Beats to Inspire has received his first sponsor from a music-related software company.

       These included

       • The ability to record separate tracks (both the computer and the SD card)
       • The ability to access the micro SD card without having to pull out the card
       • The ability to add more jingles to the jingle player
       • The ability to see how much time is left when playing a jingle (great for people talking up exit music)
       
       

       I've had mine since January, and with the ability to do all the above (and more) if you want a device that will handle just about anything - this is it.

       Where the Rodecaster Pro Shines

       If you are having issues where your guest can't get to a computer and they want to connect via the phone (as in, well, the phone) this is the easiest way to do it).

       While I would never do this, but to show off its versatility, I could have my co-host on skype via my computer. Then call the guest on the phone and everyone could hear each other. If I had a panel discussion I could connect to another person on Zoom on my tablet and again, everyone could hear themselves.

       The only thing that I wish it did differently is it records a little lower than I normally would. HOWEVER, it records clean, and increasing the volume doesn't add any hiss.

       Holy Cow You're an Influencer

       I am very nervous today mentioning the Rodercaster Pro. Why? Because the last time I did someone with a Zoom H6 and a headphone amplifier bought one. While that setup does just about everything (minus the jingles and all the "Everyone hears everyone" features (the technical term is mix-minus). I say this because if you are doing any kind of reviews be careful and you might want to include to point out who this is a good fit (and when not to buy it)

       Backpack Studio Reviews

       StudeeoB shares his insights into Backpack Studio App for the iPhone that works as a jingle player, but also a full recording tool to do your podcast and upload it to your media host.

       Josh Liston now uses an RE20 Microphone into an iRig Pre HD into the Backpack Studio App for iPhone/iPad

       I use it as a jingle player, Josh is using it now for recording his comedy show.

       Check out Josh at https://www.jcaldigital.org/

       Check out StudeeoB at https://anchor.fm/studeeo-b and https://www.twine.fm/studeeob

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>In a previous episode, three podcasters shared their opinion on the Rodecaster pro. We all liked it but wanted some more PRO options. Today I give you an update.
       Because of My Podcast - I Got a Sponsor

       Brandon/StudeeoB of the Beats to Inspire has received his first sponsor from a music-related software company.

       These included

       • The ability to record separate tracks (both the computer and the SD card)
       • The ability to access the micro SD card without having to pull out the card
       • The ability to add more jingles to the jingle player
       • The ability to see how much time is left when playing a jingle (great for people talking up exit music)
       
       

       I've had mine since January, and with the ability to do all the above (and more) if you want a device that will handle just about anything - this is it.

       Where the Rodecaster Pro Shines

       If you are having issues where your guest can't get to a computer and they want to connect via the phone (as in, well, the phone) this is the easiest way to do it).

       While I would never do this, but to show off its versatility, I could have my co-host on skype via my computer. Then call the guest on the phone and everyone could hear each other. If I had a panel discussion I could connect to another person on Zoom on my tablet and again, everyone could hear themselves.

       The only thing that I wish it did differently is it records a little lower than I normally would. HOWEVER, it records clean, and increasing the volume doesn't add any hiss.

       Holy Cow You're an Influencer

       I am very nervous today mentioning the Rodercaster Pro. Why? Because the last time I did someone with a Zoom H6 and a headphone amplifier bought one. While that setup does just about everything (minus the jingles and all the "Everyone hears everyone" features (the technical term is mix-minus). I say this because if you are doing any kind of reviews be careful and you might want to include to point out who this is a good fit (and when not to buy it)

       Backpack Studio Reviews

       StudeeoB shares his insights into Backpack Studio App for the iPhone that works as a jingle player, but also a full recording tool to do your podcast and upload it to your media host.

       Josh Liston now uses an RE20 Microphone into an iRig Pre HD into the Backpack Studio App for iPhone/iPad

       I use it as a jingle player, Josh is using it now for recording his comedy show.

       Check out Josh at https://www.jcaldigital.org/

       Check out StudeeoB at https://anchor.fm/studeeo-b and https://www.twine.fm/studeeob

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>2788a83c6cf04901be55ce0268bf1b5dMon, 16 Sep 2019 04:00:00 -040027:41falsefull688688Here is Something Great, But First, THIS....You have a great guest or you have a great story, and instead of getting to the thing that will inspire your audience to share your episode, you go to something else. This may be some sort of housekeeping or minor information that could easily be moved to later in the episode. You NEED to hook your listeners at the beginning of your show.
       Because of My Podcast: I'm a Cover Girl

       01:19

       Danielle Daily from the Suddenly Single show explains how doing some creative marketing of her show caught the eye of some people who then went to her website, found her podcast, found her book Dear Self, I love you, Keep Going, and could see that Danielle had done a TEDx talk and asked her to be on the cover of her magazine.

       A Very Special Guest

       6:24

       His name is Pete and works with Law Enforcement...

       Shaping Better Podcast Questions on the Podcast Review Show

       On episode 84 of the Podcast Review Show, we took a look at the Why Influence show and helped host Jeremy takes his good questions and make them better.

       As people have asked me about creating questions in the past (which we did cover on the Ultimate Guide to Better Interviews) I thought I would bring some of the information from the podcast review show over here.

       Podcast Review Prices are Going Up in October

       If you've thought of getting your show reviewed, but had put if off the price is going up in October so move fast and go to www.podcastreviewshow.com

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>You have a great guest or you have a great story, and instead of getting to the thing that will inspire your audience to share your episode, you go to something else. This may be some sort of housekeeping or minor information that could easily be moved to later in the episode. You NEED to hook your listeners at the beginning of your show.
       Because of My Podcast: I'm a Cover Girl

       01:19

       Danielle Daily from the Suddenly Single show explains how doing some creative marketing of her show caught the eye of some people who then went to her website, found her podcast, found her book Dear Self, I love you, Keep Going, and could see that Danielle had done a TEDx talk and asked her to be on the cover of her magazine.

       A Very Special Guest

       6:24

       His name is Pete and works with Law Enforcement...

       Shaping Better Podcast Questions on the Podcast Review Show

       On episode 84 of the Podcast Review Show, we took a look at the Why Influence show and helped host Jeremy takes his good questions and make them better.

       As people have asked me about creating questions in the past (which we did cover on the Ultimate Guide to Better Interviews) I thought I would bring some of the information from the podcast review show over here.

       Podcast Review Prices are Going Up in October

       If you've thought of getting your show reviewed, but had put if off the price is going up in October so move fast and go to www.podcastreviewshow.com

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>3f2c62ce339b4013a4e1ad522d4ee683Mon, 09 Sep 2019 04:00:00 -040047:07falsefull687687What is the International Podcast Association?The International Podcast Association was launched at Podcast Movement 2019. Today I talk with two members of the executive board Liz Covart of Ben Franklin's World and Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network.
       Because of Our Podcast - We Lost 100 lbs

       1:11 Emily Prokop and John Jominzu of the Hate to Weight Podcast announced on a recent episode that together they have lost a combined weight of 100lbs. Both say the support form their private Facebook group who cheer them on when they do good, and lift them up when they have a bad week has been a determining force in their weight loss success. I love this clip for:

       • Showing the courage each week that reveals their success or failures
       • The honest tears of joy that can't be faked
       • The humble thanking of the group instead of taking credit for themselves.
       
       

       Check out their show at www.hatetoweight.com

       The International Podcast Association

       06:10

       We are joined by Liz and Glenn from the International Podcast Association who help explain:

       • What is it?
       • Why do we need it?
       • Who is shaping it?
       • What do they need from you?
       • What do you need from them?
       • How long will board members be active?
       • How much does it cost?
       • What is their first order of business?
       • Why they chose to only use board members with no corporate ties at this point.
       
       

       If you haven't already, please visit www.internatinalpodcastassociation.org/survey

       22: 55 Why podcasters are better communicators

       28:14 What about the podcast puppies?

       29:42 No Question of the month in September

       Podcast Review Show Prices are Going Up in October

       33:24

       If you want some honest feedback on every inch of your show, you need to move fast at www.podcastreviewshow.com as prices are going up in October.

       Currently, you get:

       • Two on one consulting (two consultants Dave Jackson of the School of Podcasting and Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach)
       • Review of your audio quality, your flow of content, your goals, your website, artwork, - everything
       • Exposure on the Podcast Review Show podcast
       • Exposure on the School of Podcasting YouTube Channel
       
       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>The International Podcast Association was launched at Podcast Movement 2019. Today I talk with two members of the executive board Liz Covart of Ben Franklin's World and Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network.
       Because of Our Podcast - We Lost 100 lbs

       1:11 Emily Prokop and John Jominzu of the Hate to Weight Podcast announced on a recent episode that together they have lost a combined weight of 100lbs. Both say the support form their private Facebook group who cheer them on when they do good, and lift them up when they have a bad week has been a determining force in their weight loss success. I love this clip for:

       • Showing the courage each week that reveals their success or failures
       • The honest tears of joy that can't be faked
       • The humble thanking of the group instead of taking credit for themselves.
       
       

       Check out their show at www.hatetoweight.com

       The International Podcast Association

       06:10

       We are joined by Liz and Glenn from the International Podcast Association who help explain:

       • What is it?
       • Why do we need it?
       • Who is shaping it?
       • What do they need from you?
       • What do you need from them?
       • How long will board members be active?
       • How much does it cost?
       • What is their first order of business?
       • Why they chose to only use board members with no corporate ties at this point.
       
       

       If you haven't already, please visit www.internatinalpodcastassociation.org/survey

       22: 55 Why podcasters are better communicators

       28:14 What about the podcast puppies?

       29:42 No Question of the month in September

       Podcast Review Show Prices are Going Up in October

       33:24

       If you want some honest feedback on every inch of your show, you need to move fast at www.podcastreviewshow.com as prices are going up in October.

       Currently, you get:

       • Two on one consulting (two consultants Dave Jackson of the School of Podcasting and Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach)
       • Review of your audio quality, your flow of content, your goals, your website, artwork, - everything
       • Exposure on the Podcast Review Show podcast
       • Exposure on the School of Podcasting YouTube Channel
       
       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>b3e74a233bce4d7199b357513e27fcd5Mon, 02 Sep 2019 04:00:00 -040036:06falsefull686686Why Do People Share Content?Two reasons people might share things are that they are interesting and that they are useful. Emotions also play into why people share items. When you have something in common with the host it can boost the chance of us sharing the content.

       Emotions such as laughter or anger. Marketing messages tend to focus on information. But many times information is not enough. They need something more. And that is where emotion comes in. Rather than harping on features or facts, we need to focus on feelings; the underlying emotions that motivate people to action.

       In the book Contagious: Why Things Catch On by Jonan Berger they mention six principles of social currency:

       1. Social Currency: How does it make people look to talk about a product or idea?
       2. Triggers: Peanut butter makes us think of jelly. If our content can harness trigger emotions, or tie into an environment.
       3. Emotion: Some emotions increate sharing and others decrease it. In some cases, negative emotions can be useful.
       4. Public: Making our ideas more public.
       5. Practical Value: If your podcast helps people, people love to be helpful and spread the word.
       6. Stories: People don't just share information and facts, they tell stories.
       
       

       People prefer sharing things that make them seem entertaining rather than boring, clever rather than dumb, and hip rather than dull.

       My audience member said she groups these into four categories:

       • Helpful
       • Social
       • Reciprosity
       • Ego
       
       What Was The Last Thing You Shared and Why?

       Adrea from the Talk about Talk Podcast

       Steve Stewart gives some strategies of how he using sharing to grow your social media following to promote and upcoming event.

       Steph Fuccio shared the Smarty Pants Podcast

       New Media Show had some breaking news about Pandora

       Tom Tinker Taylor Soldier Sponge Productions shared Shufflecasts cause it made him laugh

       Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast (WWII) shared a photograph of the Queen Mary to his audience that had been updated to be in color.

       Sarah Mikutel shared Food Heroes

       Erik K John shared the School of Podcasting and the Audacity to Podcast as people wanted things a bit more technical than he was comfortable talking about.

       September Question of the Month

       How do you decide what's worth spending money on for your podcast? We all obviously have different budgets and needs but what's essential vs what do we aspire to have or use?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned On This Episode

       vacuumpodcast.com

       Podcast Review Show (prices going up)

       ]]>Two reasons people might share things are that they are interesting and that they are useful. Emotions also play into why people share items. When you have something in common with the host it can boost the chance of us sharing the content.

       Emotions such as laughter or anger. Marketing messages tend to focus on information. But many times information is not enough. They need something more. And that is where emotion comes in. Rather than harping on features or facts, we need to focus on feelings; the underlying emotions that motivate people to action.

       In the book Contagious: Why Things Catch On by Jonan Berger they mention six principles of social currency:

       1. Social Currency: How does it make people look to talk about a product or idea?
       2. Triggers: Peanut butter makes us think of jelly. If our content can harness trigger emotions, or tie into an environment.
       3. Emotion: Some emotions increate sharing and others decrease it. In some cases, negative emotions can be useful.
       4. Public: Making our ideas more public.
       5. Practical Value: If your podcast helps people, people love to be helpful and spread the word.
       6. Stories: People don't just share information and facts, they tell stories.
       
       

       People prefer sharing things that make them seem entertaining rather than boring, clever rather than dumb, and hip rather than dull.

       My audience member said she groups these into four categories:

       • Helpful
       • Social
       • Reciprosity
       • Ego
       
       What Was The Last Thing You Shared and Why?

       Adrea from the Talk about Talk Podcast

       Steve Stewart gives some strategies of how he using sharing to grow your social media following to promote and upcoming event.

       Steph Fuccio shared the Smarty Pants Podcast

       New Media Show had some breaking news about Pandora

       Tom Tinker Taylor Soldier Sponge Productions shared Shufflecasts cause it made him laugh

       Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast (WWII) shared a photograph of the Queen Mary to his audience that had been updated to be in color.

       Sarah Mikutel shared Food Heroes

       Erik K John shared the School of Podcasting and the Audacity to Podcast as people wanted things a bit more technical than he was comfortable talking about.

       September Question of the Month

       How do you decide what's worth spending money on for your podcast? We all obviously have different budgets and needs but what's essential vs what do we aspire to have or use?

       Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned On This Episode

       vacuumpodcast.com

       Podcast Review Show (prices going up)

       ]]>2e30ce2d79cc41a2af9a77330b0495bdMon, 26 Aug 2019 04:51:52 -040040:49falsefull685685Podcast Movement 2019 InsightsI was at Podcast Movement last week. I've attended all six Podcast Movement eventss and it's been a blast to watch it grow. This year the venue was HUGE and it was weird as the number of people also grew so it was hard to tell just how much bigger it was compared to the previous year.

       As always this is a class act all the way around. The checking procedure, swag, were all super professional. As a speaker, I would also say I LOVE the tool they use to track my session.

       If I had one thing that I wish would change (and I say this every year) having loud, live music at a networking event doesn't work. Last year they had multiple rooms so those that wanted to dance could dance and drink. Those that wanted to drink and talk could go into another room. This year all the free beer was in the very loud room (it does seem wrong to complain about free beer).

       It was a great year, and even over the loud music the networking was great, and from what I hear Tom Webster from Edison Research had one of the best/controversial sessions which showed that listeners don't seem to care if a "podcast" has an RSS feed or not.

       Podcast Music Announcement

       While Doug and the team at podcastmusic.com have taken a step getting sound exchange into the game, you can't play your favorite music - yet. It will take some time, but we are headed  (slowly) in the right directions.

       Pandora to Pay Podcasters?

       A representative fro Pandora stated that Pandora has planned on sharing revenue with Podcasters. This was said during the live taping of the New Media Show.

       Question of the Month

       What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Show

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       The Average Guy Network

       Podcast Rodeo Show 

        

       ]]>I was at Podcast Movement last week. I've attended all six Podcast Movement eventss and it's been a blast to watch it grow. This year the venue was HUGE and it was weird as the number of people also grew so it was hard to tell just how much bigger it was compared to the previous year.

       As always this is a class act all the way around. The checking procedure, swag, were all super professional. As a speaker, I would also say I LOVE the tool they use to track my session.

       If I had one thing that I wish would change (and I say this every year) having loud, live music at a networking event doesn't work. Last year they had multiple rooms so those that wanted to dance could dance and drink. Those that wanted to drink and talk could go into another room. This year all the free beer was in the very loud room (it does seem wrong to complain about free beer).

       It was a great year, and even over the loud music the networking was great, and from what I hear Tom Webster from Edison Research had one of the best/controversial sessions which showed that listeners don't seem to care if a "podcast" has an RSS feed or not.

       Podcast Music Announcement

       While Doug and the team at podcastmusic.com have taken a step getting sound exchange into the game, you can't play your favorite music - yet. It will take some time, but we are headed  (slowly) in the right directions.

       Pandora to Pay Podcasters?

       A representative fro Pandora stated that Pandora has planned on sharing revenue with Podcasters. This was said during the live taping of the New Media Show.

       Question of the Month

       What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       Mentioned In This Show

       Join the School of Podcasting

       Ask the Podcast Coach

       The Average Guy Network

       Podcast Rodeo Show 

        

       ]]>2f80167146b04c30be476cc19e371b2cMon, 19 Aug 2019 04:00:00 -040040:27falsefull684684Google Embraces Podcasting a Little TighterLast week an announcement from Google stated that podcast episodes will now appear in Google Search Results:

       Starting today, when you’re searching for a podcast about a topic on Google, such as “podcasts about Awkwafina” or “Instant Pot recipe podcasts,” we’ll show you playable episodes in Search results alongside web pages, news, images and videos. We’ll surface these episodes based on Google’s understanding of what’s being talked about on a podcast, so you can find even more relevant information about a topic in audio form. Soon, you won’t necessarily need the term “podcast” in your search to see episodes, making podcast discovery simpler across Search.

       Where Do You Think People Search More Apple or Google?

       With Google adding episodes to search results we need to ask the question, where are people going to find my podcast?

       According to a Jacobe media report, 70% of people find shows via word of mouth and only 11% search in an app.

       Another study from Edison Research and prominent podcast producer WNYC Studios states that:

       84% of WNYC Studios listeners report having recommended a podcast to a friend, while 78% overall report having recommended a podcast to a friend. And one in three WNYC Studios listeners share podcasts on social media, at 32%. Podcast listeners also report having discovered the medium in the following ways: 17% via their smartphone, 15% via public radio programming, and 13% from an article or program.

       Getting a Grip on SEO

       The minute I heard Google was taking podcasting more seriously, (and that the Apple search was not great) I started studying SEO. Here is my limited knowledge after a few months.

       1. Always write for humans. 
       2. You need to know where your site ranks
       3. Find some keywords that fit your audience, and your website ranks high enough to show up in search results. 
       4. Showing up for less popular keywords gets you more results in Google which can lead to higher rankings. 
       5. SEO is like Bowling or Golf, LOTS of moving pieces and trying to master it us exhausting. 
       
       

       Some resources I've used:

       SEO for Podcasters from Daniel J Lewis ( $199)

       SEO Marketing from Juergen Berkesse of Polymash

       Skillshare has two classes (and intro and advanced) by Rand Fishkin who started SEO MOZ (one of the top if not THE top sites on SEO)

       Mangools is a Suite of Tools to help you determine the best keywords and track your progress (free/paid)

       Ubersuggest from Neil Patel (a free tool that gives you tons of data). WPCRafter has a tutorial that walks you through it. 

       Yoast SEO Plugin For Wordpress

       Monster Insights Plugin For Wordpress (Google Analytics)

       Because of My Podcast, I Got a Press Pass To Comicon

       Seth/ZAndrex from Geekville Radio (who I just reviewed on the Podcast Rodeo Show) explains how his podcast was enough of a credential to get him a press pass to the Comicon event in Chicago. 

       Check out his podcast at geekvilleradio.com

       For more "Because of My Podcast Stories, check out www.becauseofmypodcast.com

       Are You Making ANY Money With Your Podcast?

       I'm working on the book "More Podcast Money" and conducting more interviews for the book. If you are making ANY money with your podcast, I'm trying to interview more podcasters to better identify strategies, and what is and is not working. If you'd like to be considered for the book please contact me

       Question of the Month

       What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       ]]>Last week an announcement from Google stated that podcast episodes will now appear in Google Search Results:

       Starting today, when you’re searching for a podcast about a topic on Google, such as “podcasts about Awkwafina” or “Instant Pot recipe podcasts,” we’ll show you playable episodes in Search results alongside web pages, news, images and videos. We’ll surface these episodes based on Google’s understanding of what’s being talked about on a podcast, so you can find even more relevant information about a topic in audio form. Soon, you won’t necessarily need the term “podcast” in your search to see episodes, making podcast discovery simpler across Search.

       Where Do You Think People Search More Apple or Google?

       With Google adding episodes to search results we need to ask the question, where are people going to find my podcast?

       According to a Jacobe media report, 70% of people find shows via word of mouth and only 11% search in an app.

       Another study from Edison Research and prominent podcast producer WNYC Studios states that:

       84% of WNYC Studios listeners report having recommended a podcast to a friend, while 78% overall report having recommended a podcast to a friend. And one in three WNYC Studios listeners share podcasts on social media, at 32%. Podcast listeners also report having discovered the medium in the following ways: 17% via their smartphone, 15% via public radio programming, and 13% from an article or program.

       Getting a Grip on SEO

       The minute I heard Google was taking podcasting more seriously, (and that the Apple search was not great) I started studying SEO. Here is my limited knowledge after a few months.

       1. Always write for humans. 
       2. You need to know where your site ranks
       3. Find some keywords that fit your audience, and your website ranks high enough to show up in search results. 
       4. Showing up for less popular keywords gets you more results in Google which can lead to higher rankings. 
       5. SEO is like Bowling or Golf, LOTS of moving pieces and trying to master it us exhausting. 
       
       

       Some resources I've used:

       SEO for Podcasters from Daniel J Lewis ( $199)

       SEO Marketing from Juergen Berkesse of Polymash

       Skillshare has two classes (and intro and advanced) by Rand Fishkin who started SEO MOZ (one of the top if not THE top sites on SEO)

       Mangools is a Suite of Tools to help you determine the best keywords and track your progress (free/paid)

       Ubersuggest from Neil Patel (a free tool that gives you tons of data). WPCRafter has a tutorial that walks you through it. 

       Yoast SEO Plugin For Wordpress

       Monster Insights Plugin For Wordpress (Google Analytics)

       Because of My Podcast, I Got a Press Pass To Comicon

       Seth/ZAndrex from Geekville Radio (who I just reviewed on the Podcast Rodeo Show) explains how his podcast was enough of a credential to get him a press pass to the Comicon event in Chicago. 

       Check out his podcast at geekvilleradio.com

       For more "Because of My Podcast Stories, check out www.becauseofmypodcast.com

       Are You Making ANY Money With Your Podcast?

       I'm working on the book "More Podcast Money" and conducting more interviews for the book. If you are making ANY money with your podcast, I'm trying to interview more podcasters to better identify strategies, and what is and is not working. If you'd like to be considered for the book please contact me

       Question of the Month

       What was the last thing you shared (that wasn't yours) and why did you share it? Be sure to mention your podcast and website. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       ]]>b2dd610f5816462c9d57be8f4de527d2Mon, 12 Aug 2019 04:00:00 -040036:38falsefull683683Personality, Creativity, and Diversity - Starting a Podcast With Kristen MeinzerI was lucky enough to meet Kristen Meizner last year and the On-Air fest, and I heard her speak. I knew immediately I wanted to her come on the show. She was working on her new book So You Want to Start a Podcast: Finding Your Voice, Telling Your Story, and Building a Community That Will Listen (also available as an audiobook ). If you're new to audible you can get the book for free.
       So You Want To Start a Podcast

       When I started reading this book you might think, "Oh great, a radio person telling us how to podcast" but she even mentions in the book that we should be looking outside of radio for inspiration. We need to rev up our creativity and take advantage of the ability to make any format you want. The book is chock full of ideas to get you to think outside the box, and really fine-tune not just the first five minutes of your show but your entire show. I really liked this book a lot.

       In today's interview, Kristen talks about

       • The right reason to start a podcast
       • The two questions every podcaster needs to answer
       • What she did for four months to get her format correct
       • Why movies are a topic and not a show
       • How one format idea fell flat on its face
       • You can grab the attention of a larger audience with diversity
       • How long a podcast should be
       • Her feelings toward holiday movies
       • The top thing that makes her tune out of a podcast
       • How introverts can overcome their shyness and reveal their personality
       • How she integrated a story into her podcast Buy the Book
       • Why you need to embrace feedback for your podcast
       • Working with a network
       • The importance of focus groups
       • What she feels is a good length for podcasting
       • How she uses scripts in her show
       • The importance of being yourself
       • How to go "outside the box" with an "Inspirational story" podcast
       • How a podcast is like going to a show where you don't know anyone
       
       Contact Kristen Meinzer

       https://www.kristenmeinzer.com

       Twitter: @kristenmeinzer

       Instagram @k10meinzer

       Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast"

        

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast"

       Get the Book For Free on Audible

       Work with Me

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>I was lucky enough to meet Kristen Meizner last year and the On-Air fest, and I heard her speak. I knew immediately I wanted to her come on the show. She was working on her new book So You Want to Start a Podcast: Finding Your Voice, Telling Your Story, and Building a Community That Will Listen (also available as an audiobook ). If you're new to audible you can get the book for free.
       So You Want To Start a Podcast

       When I started reading this book you might think, "Oh great, a radio person telling us how to podcast" but she even mentions in the book that we should be looking outside of radio for inspiration. We need to rev up our creativity and take advantage of the ability to make any format you want. The book is chock full of ideas to get you to think outside the box, and really fine-tune not just the first five minutes of your show but your entire show. I really liked this book a lot.

       In today's interview, Kristen talks about

       • The right reason to start a podcast
       • The two questions every podcaster needs to answer
       • What she did for four months to get her format correct
       • Why movies are a topic and not a show
       • How one format idea fell flat on its face
       • You can grab the attention of a larger audience with diversity
       • How long a podcast should be
       • Her feelings toward holiday movies
       • The top thing that makes her tune out of a podcast
       • How introverts can overcome their shyness and reveal their personality
       • How she integrated a story into her podcast Buy the Book
       • Why you need to embrace feedback for your podcast
       • Working with a network
       • The importance of focus groups
       • What she feels is a good length for podcasting
       • How she uses scripts in her show
       • The importance of being yourself
       • How to go "outside the box" with an "Inspirational story" podcast
       • How a podcast is like going to a show where you don't know anyone
       
       Contact Kristen Meinzer

       https://www.kristenmeinzer.com

       Twitter: @kristenmeinzer

       Instagram @k10meinzer

       Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast"

        

       Mentioned in This Episode

       Buy the Book "So You Want to Start a Podcast"

       Get the Book For Free on Audible

       Work with Me

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>bc6f713cc72841d5af3c734f252a17dfMon, 05 Aug 2019 04:00:00 -040051:25falsefull682682Fine Tuning Your Content With Audience SurveysI had not "take the temperature" of my audience in a while so I put together a quick survey. I use Google Forms, and did some number crunching in Excel, and made a report using Mail Merge in Microsoft word so I could easily consume the data.
       SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

       Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

       Program Includes:
       1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
          2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
          3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
          4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
          5. Certificate of Completion
          
          
       
       

       Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

       Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

       What My Audience Let Me Know

       Audience:

       Audience 80% Male 20% Female

       Age: 31-40 41% 41-50 41% 61-70 18%

       How far they listen 7% Listen to at least 75% 93% listen to all of it

       Do You Currently Have a Podcast? Yes - 90% No - 10%

       Perfect Length of Podcast? 0-29 3% 30-45 59% 46-60 28%

       Have you ever told a friend about the School of Podcasting? Yes - 90% No - 10%

       What Do You Like About the Show:
       • Question of the month and your knowledge of podcasting
       • Learning the best ways to podcast
       • The up to date changes that would affect the day to day podcaster.
       • You consistently provide concise, actionable advice to help podcasters be successful.
       • Interviews with interesting podcasters  and how-to content
       • Multiple topics and specialized guests this way I can identify with other podcasters who’ve encountered the same trials & tribulations in connecting with their audience
       • I really like the real-world examples you cite of how people have made (or are making) their podcasts successful.
       • The high-quality production, how much you assuage my concerns about podcasting, identify speech patterns that drive me crazy, and overall the feeling that you're actually talking to me.
       • General updates on how and with what to create, manage, and grow your podcast and audience
       • I like your honesty and transparency most. The topics I enjoy are tips on creating content and marketing content.
       • Honest Information about growing audience and sponsors
       • I like the honesty, the fact you'll tell the truth and also aren't afraid to give your opinion. Specific sections, I like when you do anecdote, which is odd as I didn't when I first started listening. Just goes to show not to change your format.
       • The interviews, also gear talk when you have it.
       • Just listening to Dave talk with excitement about what's important to him.  I always enjoy the Because-Of-My-Podcast stories.
       • You think about the person who is just starting out and the people who have been at it a while. (so helps me learn as a newbie, but also stretches me to research other things). Love how you use sound effects. Think it captures attention well!
       • Expert interviews, and Last Five in Five (bring it back!)
       • The analogies, which helps anyone at any level understand the picture you are trying to paint (even the painting with peanut butter)
       • The interviews with industry personalities and gear/service reviews. But most of all, it's just your personality that keeps me listening.
       • Your humor,  varied topics, pace, transitions, and awesome ideas and content.
       • I love the end of episode bloopers.
       
       What you'd Like to Change:
       • The same podcasters on all the time, how about some variety? For example, if the horse podcasting guy is on, I turn the show-off, sorry, but it's just not my thing. Other than that, I love everything else about the show!
       • Email responses seemed to shorten then stop altogether after a while. Keep emailing/engaging consistently.
       • While it doesn't bother me, I think too often you reference "old" movies, songs etc. and go with your "back in the day" quote which may not resonate with a younger audience.
       • For example, for me, I don’t need to hear all the steps of math to get to an hourly rate for $60,000 a year.  You could just tell me you did the math and give me the bottom line number.
       • Not this show, but your Rodeo - there is too much 'snide' comments. But hey, I was born British
       • I think that Podcast Rodeo Show is a disservice to your expertise and kindness. but that's another show.
       • Sometimes the sound effects get a little too morning zoo for me.
       • All the extra sound effects you’ve been adding (more in the last year or so? Maybe 6 months?). Also, I know you’re against dates on your blog posts, but I wish you had them. Context matters & if I know it’s several years old, that might impact how I approach something.
       • Sometimes there is so much repetition between this show, ask the podcast coach, podcasters round table, the feed, and new media show. I love all of them but fell a little disappointed when there’s too much overlap in topics. 
       • A lot of assumed knowledge from previous episodes or technologies or podcasting
       • I guess the only thing I worry about is I hear you on all of your other shows & know that you have a full-time job & do all of your school of podcasting stuff. I don't want you getting burned out! Take care of yourself, Dave!
       • The only thing I could think of is the occasional repetition (Anchor sucks - it's okay to NOT make money with your show - stop checking your stats)
       • Personally, I'm tired of "beginner" topics. I understand you make money helping people start, but I can imagine even a beginner would appreciate your expertise on more of the "improve" your podcast topics (which you do, but I want more of them).
       • I’m not a big fan of the easy listening/jazz music you use under your commercials. It does not command authority.
       • The occasional crass comment or innuendo is a bit annoying. I know it doesn't happen often, but when it does it makes me cringe.
       • I get that you need to share personal stuff occasionally, as we should all do, and provided it's kept in proportion then I'm fine with it. First and foremost I want you to be a teacher, not a chat show host.
       • For instance, when you did the 5 in 5 with the podcaster talking about atheism and I had to stop and pray for him and I was bummed that there are so many podcasts about people that are fallen away from the church.  So even the stuff I cringe at in your podcast, help me grow and give me a reason to pray.  I haven’t done my show in 5-6 years and yet, I still listen every week.  Keep up the zany antics and stellar content Dave
       • Not the biggest fan of most podcast intros.  I would prefer you to start talking IMMEDIATELY about the show by possibly asking a few questions...the state that we will get into it further in the show. Example: What mics should you use when walking around outside and recording?  What is the difference between condenser blah blah blah?  We will get into it today!!  I’m Dave Jackson, and I thank you for being here at the SCHOOL OF PODCASTING! Now, let's talk mics.
       
       Contributors

       Pedro My Stuttering Life

       Brandon from Florida Focus Podcast

       Lee from We Have Cancer

       Win from A Diary of Fashionista

       Martha From Martha Runs the World

       James from Where We Buy

       Bill with the You With a Mission Podcast

       Jas from Giving Up the Ghost

       Steph from Stephfuccio.weebly.com

       Mike from Create Pod

       Alex from Spirits and Lyrics

       Lee from This is Rammy

       Jeremy from Transmissions Podcast

       Brandon from Seahawkers Podcast

       Garret from Good Patron Podcast

       Kelly Two Ewes Fiber Adventure

       Oscar from Deep Listening

       Laura from I had not "take the temperature" of my audience in a while so I put together a quick survey. I use Google Forms, and did some number crunching in Excel, and made a report using Mail Merge in Microsoft word so I could easily consume the data.

       SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

       Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

       Program Includes:
       1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
          2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
          3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
          4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
          5. Certificate of Completion
          
          
       
       

       Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

       Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

       What My Audience Let Me Know

       Audience:

       Audience 80% Male 20% Female

       Age: 31-40 41% 41-50 41% 61-70 18%

       How far they listen 7% Listen to at least 75% 93% listen to all of it

       Do You Currently Have a Podcast? Yes - 90% No - 10%

       Perfect Length of Podcast? 0-29 3% 30-45 59% 46-60 28%

       Have you ever told a friend about the School of Podcasting? Yes - 90% No - 10%

       What Do You Like About the Show:
       • Question of the month and your knowledge of podcasting
       • Learning the best ways to podcast
       • The up to date changes that would affect the day to day podcaster.
       • You consistently provide concise, actionable advice to help podcasters be successful.
       • Interviews with interesting podcasters  and how-to content
       • Multiple topics and specialized guests this way I can identify with other podcasters who’ve encountered the same trials & tribulations in connecting with their audience
       • I really like the real-world examples you cite of how people have made (or are making) their podcasts successful.
       • The high-quality production, how much you assuage my concerns about podcasting, identify speech patterns that drive me crazy, and overall the feeling that you're actually talking to me.
       • General updates on how and with what to create, manage, and grow your podcast and audience
       • I like your honesty and transparency most. The topics I enjoy are tips on creating content and marketing content.
       • Honest Information about growing audience and sponsors
       • I like the honesty, the fact you'll tell the truth and also aren't afraid to give your opinion. Specific sections, I like when you do anecdote, which is odd as I didn't when I first started listening. Just goes to show not to change your format.
       • The interviews, also gear talk when you have it.
       • Just listening to Dave talk with excitement about what's important to him.  I always enjoy the Because-Of-My-Podcast stories.
       • You think about the person who is just starting out and the people who have been at it a while. (so helps me learn as a newbie, but also stretches me to research other things). Love how you use sound effects. Think it captures attention well!
       • Expert interviews, and Last Five in Five (bring it back!)
       • The analogies, which helps anyone at any level understand the picture you are trying to paint (even the painting with peanut butter)
       • The interviews with industry personalities and gear/service reviews. But most of all, it's just your personality that keeps me listening.
       • Your humor,  varied topics, pace, transitions, and awesome ideas and content.
       • I love the end of episode bloopers.
       
       What you'd Like to Change:
       • The same podcasters on all the time, how about some variety? For example, if the horse podcasting guy is on, I turn the show-off, sorry, but it's just not my thing. Other than that, I love everything else about the show!
       • Email responses seemed to shorten then stop altogether after a while. Keep emailing/engaging consistently.
       • While it doesn't bother me, I think too often you reference "old" movies, songs etc. and go with your "back in the day" quote which may not resonate with a younger audience.
       • For example, for me, I don’t need to hear all the steps of math to get to an hourly rate for $60,000 a year.  You could just tell me you did the math and give me the bottom line number.
       • Not this show, but your Rodeo - there is too much 'snide' comments. But hey, I was born British
       • I think that Podcast Rodeo Show is a disservice to your expertise and kindness. but that's another show.
       • Sometimes the sound effects get a little too morning zoo for me.
       • All the extra sound effects you’ve been adding (more in the last year or so? Maybe 6 months?). Also, I know you’re against dates on your blog posts, but I wish you had them. Context matters & if I know it’s several years old, that might impact how I approach something.
       • Sometimes there is so much repetition between this show, ask the podcast coach, podcasters round table, the feed, and new media show. I love all of them but fell a little disappointed when there’s too much overlap in topics. 
       • A lot of assumed knowledge from previous episodes or technologies or podcasting
       • I guess the only thing I worry about is I hear you on all of your other shows & know that you have a full-time job & do all of your school of podcasting stuff. I don't want you getting burned out! Take care of yourself, Dave!
       • The only thing I could think of is the occasional repetition (Anchor sucks - it's okay to NOT make money with your show - stop checking your stats)
       • Personally, I'm tired of "beginner" topics. I understand you make money helping people start, but I can imagine even a beginner would appreciate your expertise on more of the "improve" your podcast topics (which you do, but I want more of them).
       • I’m not a big fan of the easy listening/jazz music you use under your commercials. It does not command authority.
       • The occasional crass comment or innuendo is a bit annoying. I know it doesn't happen often, but when it does it makes me cringe.
       • I get that you need to share personal stuff occasionally, as we should all do, and provided it's kept in proportion then I'm fine with it. First and foremost I want you to be a teacher, not a chat show host.
       • For instance, when you did the 5 in 5 with the podcaster talking about atheism and I had to stop and pray for him and I was bummed that there are so many podcasts about people that are fallen away from the church.  So even the stuff I cringe at in your podcast, help me grow and give me a reason to pray.  I haven’t done my show in 5-6 years and yet, I still listen every week.  Keep up the zany antics and stellar content Dave
       • Not the biggest fan of most podcast intros.  I would prefer you to start talking IMMEDIATELY about the show by possibly asking a few questions...the state that we will get into it further in the show. Example: What mics should you use when walking around outside and recording?  What is the difference between condenser blah blah blah?  We will get into it today!!  I’m Dave Jackson, and I thank you for being here at the SCHOOL OF PODCASTING! Now, let's talk mics.
       
       Contributors

       Pedro My Stuttering Life

       Brandon from Florida Focus Podcast

       Lee from We Have Cancer

       Win from A Diary of Fashionista

       Martha From Martha Runs the World

       James from Where We Buy

       Bill with the You With a Mission Podcast

       Jas from Giving Up the Ghost

       Steph from Stephfuccio.weebly.com

       Mike from Create Pod

       Alex from Spirits and Lyrics

       Lee from This is Rammy

       Jeremy from Transmissions Podcast

       Brandon from Seahawkers Podcast

       Garret from Good Patron Podcast

       Kelly Two Ewes Fiber Adventure

       Oscar from Deep Listening

       Laura from Reviews and Randomness

       Scott from What was that Like Podcast

       Steve Stewart Money Plan SOS

       Matt from The Author Inside You

       JD from Bookworm Banquet

       Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast( WWII)

       Tim from the Sled Dog Podcast

       Lee from Covert Nerd

       Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief

       Steve Work Comp Pulse

       Richard Grimshaw

       Hershy Orenstein

       Ismael

       Matt Simpson

       Paul Capps

       Conclusions:

       You need to know why you are doing a podcast, and who your audience is and what they want. If someone suggests something that doesn't' fit the audience or your goal. you need to ignore it - this show is not for them.

       You can't please everyone.

       Keep in mind the new listeners, and don't get bit by the "curse of knowledge" and leave them in the dark.

       Your audience wants you to be honest and concise. They enjoy your personality (some followed me to other shows) so let your personality out.

       Be willing to try new things if your audience wants them, and they fit your goals.

       I hope you enjoyed episode 681. 

       Question of the Month

       What was the last thing your shared (that wasn't your content)? Why did you share it? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question before August 23, 2019

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>e019ff6d436949e49a4f68702840e243Mon, 29 Jul 2019 04:00:00 -040055:13falsefull681681The Many Ways To Gauge Podcast Success - More Then Downloads And MoneyFrom time to time I see people in Facebook groups announcing "Hey I got my first 1000 download episode!" or "I just got (insane amount of money)" for my podcast. When you are just starting out, or even if you've been podcasting for a while if you're just looking at downloads or dollars, the inspiration to keep going can be hard to come by. Today we are going to examine the other ways your podcast is a success.
       SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

       Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

       Program Includes:
       1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
          2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
          3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
          4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
          5. Certificate of Completion
          
          
       
       

       Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

       Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

       Other Ways To Count Podcast Success

       If your goal was to find like-minded people (cause your spouse said they would not participate in any more conversations around Batman) and you've found some people online to have the conversations you've been longing to have - your podcast is a success.

       If you had no luck getting in touch with certain people - but the minute they said yes to being interviewed on your podcast - it was a success

       If your goal was to be seen as an expert and someone sends you an email asking you for your opinion - your podcast is a success

       If your goal was to "get the message out there" and your podcast has a number that is higher than zero - your podcast is a success.

       If your goal was to get something off your chest, you want to put your thoughts out into the universe - so you don't feel so invisible - and someone hears it - you're not invisible.

       Glenn the Geek has people write Christmas songs about his podcast at the horseradionetwork.com 

       Theracasts can be audio journals that can help you more than your audience in some cases, but they are much less expensive than therapy. Some might say you should do these in a private journal (and you can do that) but sometimes you need someone to hear you - even if its a complete stranger.

       When someone in your audience chimes in on a conversation that helps you save money or time - that is a bonus to your life.

       Binders Can Be a Good Thing

       When I asked Uncle Google what blinders are, I see that blinder "attach to a horse's bridle or hood and prevent a horse from seeing behind and beside him." I mention this alot because its important. Comparing your show to another show is one of the worst things you can do. Blinder can stop you from looking at your past (cause there may be regrets) and they help you focus on your future. Your current value is not based on your mistakes of the past.  Keep focused on your audience and answer every email, tweet, etc and keep the conversation going (don't just answer the question).

       It Might Take a Bit To Get Some Feedback

       I started a show called Your Podcast Consultant ( small lessons with big value) for those who like a shorter podcast. I've been doing it for nine months, and finally just got some feedback.

       The Power of Relationships

       Jen Briney doest the Congressional Dish podcast that every American should be subscribed to and she recently did an episode on Suprise Medical Bills in America and did a touching tribute to a listener who died. Jen monetizes the show on the "Value for Value" model (meaning it is 100% listener supported) and Jen explains how listeners are a bit like pen pals. It really shows the kind of relationships you build online. Likewise, when I heard Jen cry on her show remembering her listener I wanted to crawl through my phone and give her a giant hug. Why? Because of the relationship, I feel I have with her as a listener.

       While Jen will blow off and poke fun of herself for crying on the show, what it is - is courageous. She went 100% vulnerable on her show. This also helps build relationships with your audience.

       The No Agenda Show with John C Dvorak and Adam Curry do a show they deconstruct the media. Their audience is so engaged they are doing meetups to talk about their subject(s). Their audience loves the subject to much they want to continue on the discussion. They even set up a website at www.noagendameetups.com and there are MANY websites maintained by their audience with the goal of helping to promote the show

       Jim Collison is my cohost for Ask the Podcast Coach on Saturday mornings and host a show for his job at Gallop as well as Home Gadget Geeks. He just mentioned that he had started enjoying a cigar every now and then and he was contacted multiple times by his audience who wanted to send him their favorite cigar.

       Question of the Month

       This month I'm doing an audience survey (my first in YEARS) and I would love to know

       1. What you like about the show

       2. What you wish I'd change (I'm a big boy, be honest)

       3. What would you like to hear in the future (guests, topics)

       Please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       and leave your response (there may be a prize for a random person who takes the online version AND leaves an audio version)

       Last Five in Five

       What were the last five podcasts you listened to?

       Dan from the Thank God I'm an Atheist and the How to Heretic show

       1. God Awful Movies
       2. The Constant
       3. Scathing Atheist 
       4. Pod Save America
       5. The Allusionist
       
       Mentioned on This Show

       Dealing with My Grief

       Congressional Dish

       No Agenda Show

       Home Gadget Geeks

       Your Podcast Consultant

       Todd Cochrane New Media Show

       Zoom.us

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>From time to time I see people in Facebook groups announcing "Hey I got my first 1000 download episode!" or "I just got (insane amount of money)" for my podcast. When you are just starting out, or even if you've been podcasting for a while if you're just looking at downloads or dollars, the inspiration to keep going can be hard to come by. Today we are going to examine the other ways your podcast is a success.
       SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

       Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

       Program Includes:
       1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
          2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
          3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
          4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
          5. Certificate of Completion
          
          
       
       

       Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

       Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

       Other Ways To Count Podcast Success

       If your goal was to find like-minded people (cause your spouse said they would not participate in any more conversations around Batman) and you've found some people online to have the conversations you've been longing to have - your podcast is a success.

       If you had no luck getting in touch with certain people - but the minute they said yes to being interviewed on your podcast - it was a success

       If your goal was to be seen as an expert and someone sends you an email asking you for your opinion - your podcast is a success

       If your goal was to "get the message out there" and your podcast has a number that is higher than zero - your podcast is a success.

       If your goal was to get something off your chest, you want to put your thoughts out into the universe - so you don't feel so invisible - and someone hears it - you're not invisible.

       Glenn the Geek has people write Christmas songs about his podcast at the horseradionetwork.com 

       Theracasts can be audio journals that can help you more than your audience in some cases, but they are much less expensive than therapy. Some might say you should do these in a private journal (and you can do that) but sometimes you need someone to hear you - even if its a complete stranger.

       When someone in your audience chimes in on a conversation that helps you save money or time - that is a bonus to your life.

       Binders Can Be a Good Thing

       When I asked Uncle Google what blinders are, I see that blinder "attach to a horse's bridle or hood and prevent a horse from seeing behind and beside him." I mention this alot because its important. Comparing your show to another show is one of the worst things you can do. Blinder can stop you from looking at your past (cause there may be regrets) and they help you focus on your future. Your current value is not based on your mistakes of the past.  Keep focused on your audience and answer every email, tweet, etc and keep the conversation going (don't just answer the question).

       It Might Take a Bit To Get Some Feedback

       I started a show called Your Podcast Consultant ( small lessons with big value) for those who like a shorter podcast. I've been doing it for nine months, and finally just got some feedback.

       The Power of Relationships

       Jen Briney doest the Congressional Dish podcast that every American should be subscribed to and she recently did an episode on Suprise Medical Bills in America and did a touching tribute to a listener who died. Jen monetizes the show on the "Value for Value" model (meaning it is 100% listener supported) and Jen explains how listeners are a bit like pen pals. It really shows the kind of relationships you build online. Likewise, when I heard Jen cry on her show remembering her listener I wanted to crawl through my phone and give her a giant hug. Why? Because of the relationship, I feel I have with her as a listener.

       While Jen will blow off and poke fun of herself for crying on the show, what it is - is courageous. She went 100% vulnerable on her show. This also helps build relationships with your audience.

       The No Agenda Show with John C Dvorak and Adam Curry do a show they deconstruct the media. Their audience is so engaged they are doing meetups to talk about their subject(s). Their audience loves the subject to much they want to continue on the discussion. They even set up a website at www.noagendameetups.com and there are MANY websites maintained by their audience with the goal of helping to promote the show

       Jim Collison is my cohost for Ask the Podcast Coach on Saturday mornings and host a show for his job at Gallop as well as Home Gadget Geeks. He just mentioned that he had started enjoying a cigar every now and then and he was contacted multiple times by his audience who wanted to send him their favorite cigar.

       Question of the Month

       This month I'm doing an audience survey (my first in YEARS) and I would love to know

       1. What you like about the show

       2. What you wish I'd change (I'm a big boy, be honest)

       3. What would you like to hear in the future (guests, topics)

       Please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/question

       and leave your response (there may be a prize for a random person who takes the online version AND leaves an audio version)

       Last Five in Five

       What were the last five podcasts you listened to?

       Dan from the Thank God I'm an Atheist and the How to Heretic show

       1. God Awful Movies
       2. The Constant
       3. Scathing Atheist 
       4. Pod Save America
       5. The Allusionist
       
       Mentioned on This Show

       Dealing with My Grief

       Congressional Dish

       No Agenda Show

       Home Gadget Geeks

       Your Podcast Consultant

       Todd Cochrane New Media Show

       Zoom.us

       Work With Me

       Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

       ]]>6b7f081457284c689f8fbb2d651869eaMon, 22 Jul 2019 04:00:00 -040041:17falsefull680680Getting Past "Depends" in Podcast AnswersBe equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.
       Program Includes:
       1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
          2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
          3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
          4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
          5. Certificate of Completion
          
          
       
       

       Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

       Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

       What Do I Need To Start A Podcast?

       I recently appeared at a local meetup for a group in Alabama. The question, "what do I need to start a podcast" came up. I've talked about this in the past and hit different aspects, and I'm going to try to hit all aspects in this episode.

       Things Everyone Needs No Matter What

       A Pop filter for your microphone. This could be a foam ball to put over the end, or a mesh shield that goes between you and the microphone. I'm a fan of the Nady SSPF-3 if you're using an ATR2100 or a Samson Q2U. If you are using something like an Electrovoice RE320 you might consider a foam shield with a shock mount or this "repop" filter only available at BSW

       Your Topic

       Your topic should be something that you can't help but talk about. You would be willing to talk about it for free for HOURS (cause you are). It's a topic that needs to hold the attention of your target audience and inspire them to tell a friend. It also needs to be in alignment with your goals for the podcast.

       It Depends...

       From there you get the most used answer in podcasting, "It depends." While this is true, you often don't get the pros and cons of your options so that is what I'm going to try to do here - make you away of your options.

       What Microphone Should I Use for My Podcast?

       Why it Depends:

       Option 1: Traveling Podcaster

       If you're going to be traveling alot and need something a little more durable, you might use the Audio Technica Atr2100 as it has a lifetime warranty.

       Option 2: Stationary Podcaster

       I like the sound of the SamsonQ2U a little better than the ATR2100. It doesn't have a lifetime warranty, but you're not moving it much.

       Another option for the stationary podcaster on a semi-professional level is the mic I use the Electrovoice RE320

       What Microphone Stand Should I Get for the Microphone?

       If you are stationary (meaning you're using a room as your studio) check out the Samson MBA38 boom arm that can clamp on to a desk.

       If you need to take down your gear or if you're traveling, check out the On Stage Combo Stand

       Recording Co-Hosts or Interviews  What Do I Need?

       Why it Depends:

       If they are in the room with you

       I like the Focusrite 2i2 for two people or the Focusrite 8i8 for four people. You could also purchase a Zoom H6 (and be able to record anywhere)

       If you're on a budget, then see the Behringer U-PHORIA UMC202HD (for two people), or the UMC404HD for four people

       Another option for recording up to four people in the room with you is the Rode Rodcaster pro

       Shouldn't I Use a Mixer?

       When it comes to mixer vs interface, a mixer allows you to adjust the audio (add bass, treble) where an interface you would do this in software later. Some people prefer interfaces as they are less confusing due to a generally smaller number of knobs.

       If you want a mixer, one of the best values I feel is the Presonus AR8 USB 8 as it has up to four people, connects to your computer, AND it has a built-in recorder. If you are on a budget then you could check out Mackie PROFX8V2

       Do I Need a Portable Recorder?

       If you're traveling yes. My favorite is the Zoom H6 as it is super versatile. If all you need is a recording, you might check out the Zoom H1

       I'm Going to Do All My Episodes on the Road

       If you're traveling and only going to be recording you and a guest you might check out the Tascam DR-10X that you plug your microphone into. In this situation, you might look into the Rode Interview Microphone

       My Guests/Co-hosts Are In Another Location

       If you're on a budget you can use Skype and Ecam call recorder on the Mac, and Squadcast is my Favorite way of recording remote people no matter what the type of computer (you just have to use chrome).

       Everyone is in the Same Room, but our guest is not...

       Then you could use the Focusrite 2i2 and connect to the guest via Skype or Squadcast. If your co-host can join Squadcast as an individual (with their own computer) then make sure you and the co-host have even volume levels as you will be on the same channel.

       How Much Storage Do I Need For My Media Host?

       To figure out how much space you need, you need to know:

       1. How often you will publish 2. How long your shows will be 3. What format

       This short video tutorial helps you calculate any how much space you need https://libsyn.d.pr/XDpqmM

       I did a podcast about different formats that explains stereo vs Mono vs 64 kbps vs 128 kbps at https://overcast.fm/+IzZEC-P0/4:29

       For more information on file formats, go to https://support.libsyn.com/kb/recommended-file-formats-encoding/

       I've also created speadsheet that will calculate these for you.

       Use the coupon code sopfree  to get a free month at Libsyn.com

       What Web Hosting Should I Use?

       Here again, it depends. If all you need is a place for people to listen and subscribe to your show your media host often has a free website that will suffice.

       Right now I'm a fan of Cooler Websites (My Goaddy Reseller) for many of my sites. Siteground starts at $4/month for their Wordpress hosting (which is $12/month after the first year)

       Recording Podcasts on the Road

       In this situation, it's best to understand the gear and what it does and then mix and match to create the system that suits you best

       • • • • If you're traveling and only going to be recording you and a guest you might check out the Tascam DR-10X that you plug your microphone into. In this situation, you might look into the Rode Interview Microphone. This is great for the person who is trying to eliminate carrying around a lot of gear
             • If you want people on separate tracks, but don't want a ton of gear the Rode SC6-L Mobile Interview Kit with Interface & 2 smartLav+ Microphones is great for iOs phone users.
             • The Zoom H6 is a sweet spot of not too large, and tons of versatility to record up to six people, and mix in sounds of an iPad if needed. No computer required. You would want to consider a headphone amplifier and headphones for everyone
             • The Rode Procaster is great for performing live shows and can be stored in...]]>Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.
               Program Includes:
               1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
                  2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
                  3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
                  4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
                  5. Certificate of Completion
                  
                  
               
               

               Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

               Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

               What Do I Need To Start A Podcast?

               I recently appeared at a local meetup for a group in Alabama. The question, "what do I need to start a podcast" came up. I've talked about this in the past and hit different aspects, and I'm going to try to hit all aspects in this episode.

               Things Everyone Needs No Matter What

               A Pop filter for your microphone. This could be a foam ball to put over the end, or a mesh shield that goes between you and the microphone. I'm a fan of the Nady SSPF-3 if you're using an ATR2100 or a Samson Q2U. If you are using something like an Electrovoice RE320 you might consider a foam shield with a shock mount or this "repop" filter only available at BSW

               Your Topic

               Your topic should be something that you can't help but talk about. You would be willing to talk about it for free for HOURS (cause you are). It's a topic that needs to hold the attention of your target audience and inspire them to tell a friend. It also needs to be in alignment with your goals for the podcast.

               It Depends...

               From there you get the most used answer in podcasting, "It depends." While this is true, you often don't get the pros and cons of your options so that is what I'm going to try to do here - make you away of your options.

               What Microphone Should I Use for My Podcast?

               Why it Depends:

               Option 1: Traveling Podcaster

               If you're going to be traveling alot and need something a little more durable, you might use the Audio Technica Atr2100 as it has a lifetime warranty.

               Option 2: Stationary Podcaster

               I like the sound of the SamsonQ2U a little better than the ATR2100. It doesn't have a lifetime warranty, but you're not moving it much.

               Another option for the stationary podcaster on a semi-professional level is the mic I use the Electrovoice RE320

               What Microphone Stand Should I Get for the Microphone?

               If you are stationary (meaning you're using a room as your studio) check out the Samson MBA38 boom arm that can clamp on to a desk.

               If you need to take down your gear or if you're traveling, check out the On Stage Combo Stand

               Recording Co-Hosts or Interviews  What Do I Need?

               Why it Depends:

               If they are in the room with you

               I like the Focusrite 2i2 for two people or the Focusrite 8i8 for four people. You could also purchase a Zoom H6 (and be able to record anywhere)

               If you're on a budget, then see the Behringer U-PHORIA UMC202HD (for two people), or the UMC404HD for four people

               Another option for recording up to four people in the room with you is the Rode Rodcaster pro

               Shouldn't I Use a Mixer?

               When it comes to mixer vs interface, a mixer allows you to adjust the audio (add bass, treble) where an interface you would do this in software later. Some people prefer interfaces as they are less confusing due to a generally smaller number of knobs.

               If you want a mixer, one of the best values I feel is the Presonus AR8 USB 8 as it has up to four people, connects to your computer, AND it has a built-in recorder. If you are on a budget then you could check out Mackie PROFX8V2

               Do I Need a Portable Recorder?

               If you're traveling yes. My favorite is the Zoom H6 as it is super versatile. If all you need is a recording, you might check out the Zoom H1

               I'm Going to Do All My Episodes on the Road

               If you're traveling and only going to be recording you and a guest you might check out the Tascam DR-10X that you plug your microphone into. In this situation, you might look into the Rode Interview Microphone

               My Guests/Co-hosts Are In Another Location

               If you're on a budget you can use Skype and Ecam call recorder on the Mac, and Squadcast is my Favorite way of recording remote people no matter what the type of computer (you just have to use chrome).

               Everyone is in the Same Room, but our guest is not...

               Then you could use the Focusrite 2i2 and connect to the guest via Skype or Squadcast. If your co-host can join Squadcast as an individual (with their own computer) then make sure you and the co-host have even volume levels as you will be on the same channel.

               How Much Storage Do I Need For My Media Host?

               To figure out how much space you need, you need to know:

               1. How often you will publish 2. How long your shows will be 3. What format

               This short video tutorial helps you calculate any how much space you need https://libsyn.d.pr/XDpqmM

               I did a podcast about different formats that explains stereo vs Mono vs 64 kbps vs 128 kbps at https://overcast.fm/+IzZEC-P0/4:29

               For more information on file formats, go to https://support.libsyn.com/kb/recommended-file-formats-encoding/

               I've also created speadsheet that will calculate these for you.

               Use the coupon code sopfree  to get a free month at Libsyn.com

               What Web Hosting Should I Use?

               Here again, it depends. If all you need is a place for people to listen and subscribe to your show your media host often has a free website that will suffice.

               Right now I'm a fan of Cooler Websites (My Goaddy Reseller) for many of my sites. Siteground starts at $4/month for their Wordpress hosting (which is $12/month after the first year)

               Recording Podcasts on the Road

               In this situation, it's best to understand the gear and what it does and then mix and match to create the system that suits you best

               • • • • If you're traveling and only going to be recording you and a guest you might check out the Tascam DR-10X that you plug your microphone into. In this situation, you might look into the Rode Interview Microphone. This is great for the person who is trying to eliminate carrying around a lot of gear
                     • If you want people on separate tracks, but don't want a ton of gear the Rode SC6-L Mobile Interview Kit with Interface & 2 smartLav+ Microphones is great for iOs phone users.
                     • The Zoom H6 is a sweet spot of not too large, and tons of versatility to record up to six people, and mix in sounds of an iPad if needed. No computer required. You would want to consider a headphone amplifier and headphones for everyone
                     • The Rode Procaster is great for performing live shows and can be stored in a backpack or in one of the special cases.
                     
                     
                   
                   
                 
                 
               
               Podcast Rewind: Podwrecked

               I appeared on the Podwrecked show where I explained how I released an episode with a boo-boo, and what my options were to fix it. Podwrecked is about helping you and your podcast survive the ebb and flow of the podcast industry. Check it out at http://podwrecked.com/salvaging-your-podcast-with-dave-jackson/

               Question of the Month: Audience Survey

               Please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey19

               Then go to our Contact Page and upload your recording where you answer the questions:

               1. What do you like about this show?
               2. What do you wish I'd change?
               3. What topics would you like to see in the future?
               
               

               Please submit your audio by 7/26/19

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>6be8f82e499e40d2be99281f1c01075cMon, 15 Jul 2019 04:00:00 -040043:49falsefull679679The Ultimate Guide to Hosting and Guesting Podcast InterviewsI've performed over a hundred interviews, and I've been interviewed over 130 times on different podcasts. Today I wanted to make an episode to answer ALL the questions about podcast interviews. 
               Free Podcast Interview Guide

               There is SO MUCH information in this episode, I've combined it into a Free Interview Guide. Click Here to Get the Guide

               For Full Show Notes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/678

               Topics Include:

               3:15 Appreciating your audience

               7:29 Don't get blinded by resumes

               10:40 Connect the Dots

               16:13 How to turn down someone who wants to be on your show

               18:38 Where to find Guests

               20:20 Interviewing Celebrities

               21:20 The Ask

               25:37 Pre-Interviews

               28:08 DO THE WORK

               32:11 Be Vulnerable

               34:08 Tag Team Interviews

               41:02 Setting Guest Expectations

               44:12 Shaping the Interview Questions

               46:36 The Day of the Interview

               49:23 Introducing the Guest

               50:36 Get them to tell stories

               54:15 The NPR Formula

               56:54 the Importance of Shutting Up

               01:01:00 Gear for conducting interviews on the road face to face

               01:06:47 Proper Mic Technique

               01:07:16 Recording "in the studio"

               01:08:14  Recording podcast interviews remotely

               01:14:10 Controlling the Interview

               01:17:25 The End of the Interview

               01:18:15 Getting your guests to share your podcast

               01:23:22 Editing the Interview

               01:26:17 Being a guest on podcasts

               01:27:13 Do the work

               01:30:12 The Golden Rule Guest

               If you'd like the full show notes for this episode you can get them as a PDF

               SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

               Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

               Program Includes:
               1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
                  2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
                  3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
                  4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
                  5. Certificate of Completion
                  
                  
               
               

               Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

               Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>I've performed over a hundred interviews, and I've been interviewed over 130 times on different podcasts. Today I wanted to make an episode to answer ALL the questions about podcast interviews. 
               Free Podcast Interview Guide

               There is SO MUCH information in this episode, I've combined it into a Free Interview Guide. Click Here to Get the Guide

               For Full Show Notes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/678

               Topics Include:

               3:15 Appreciating your audience

               7:29 Don't get blinded by resumes

               10:40 Connect the Dots

               16:13 How to turn down someone who wants to be on your show

               18:38 Where to find Guests

               20:20 Interviewing Celebrities

               21:20 The Ask

               25:37 Pre-Interviews

               28:08 DO THE WORK

               32:11 Be Vulnerable

               34:08 Tag Team Interviews

               41:02 Setting Guest Expectations

               44:12 Shaping the Interview Questions

               46:36 The Day of the Interview

               49:23 Introducing the Guest

               50:36 Get them to tell stories

               54:15 The NPR Formula

               56:54 the Importance of Shutting Up

               01:01:00 Gear for conducting interviews on the road face to face

               01:06:47 Proper Mic Technique

               01:07:16 Recording "in the studio"

               01:08:14  Recording podcast interviews remotely

               01:14:10 Controlling the Interview

               01:17:25 The End of the Interview

               01:18:15 Getting your guests to share your podcast

               01:23:22 Editing the Interview

               01:26:17 Being a guest on podcasts

               01:27:13 Do the work

               01:30:12 The Golden Rule Guest

               If you'd like the full show notes for this episode you can get them as a PDF

               SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

               Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

               Program Includes:
               1. 1. LIVE Interactive Online Training
                  2. Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
                  3. Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
                  4. Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
                  5. Certificate of Completion
                  
                  
               
               

               Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

               Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>0328548c557245c081a7a132b7b1d148Mon, 08 Jul 2019 04:00:00 -040001:38:52falsefull678678Top 5 Ways to Make Money with a PodcastI keep seeing statements like, "Well, I've done this podcast for 2 years and it's time to start monetizing." With this type of mindset, I can see many podcasters getting discouraged or even burned out. I played music in local bars from the age of 16 to 50. 34 years I played music, but I never fell delusional enough to think I would make the big time playing local bars in Northeast Ohio. If I wanted a career I would've had to move to a city like Los Angelas, Nashville, or anything that wasn't Akron, Ohio.

               While it's commendable to commit to something for a long period, it's not the longevity that inspires people to share your episodes. It's the content. Nobody has ever said, "Hey Dave you have to listen to this show!" and when I ask why they say, "They've been podcasting since 2014!"

               With that said, as I write the updated version to my book More Podcast Money, here are the ways you make money with podcasting.

               SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

               Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

               Program Includes:
               • LIVE Interactive Online Training
               • Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
               • Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
               • Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
               • Certificate of Completion
               
               

               Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

               Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

               [click_to_tweet tweet="The Top Five Ways to Make Money With a Podcast @davejackson " quote=" The Top Five Ways To Make Money With a Podcast" theme="style3"]

               The Top Ways to Make Money With Your Podcast Sell Your Own Products or Services

               This is the top way to make money with your podcast. You harness the power of influence.

               As you have lived and breathed in your target audience for a while, you should know what they need or want. I was amazed at a WordCamp I attended recently that the documentation for the new Gutenberg is sparse at best. Everyone hates it. Nobody understands it. That is one learning curve that needs to be flattened and if I had time I would dive into it myself.

               Why some of your audience will buy from you is due to you bringing value on a consistent basis. This triggers the law of reciprocity. You've done something nice for them, and now your audience feels a need to do something nice for you. If you've shared a little about yourself then they probably like you (if they didn't they wouldn't be listening). If the information you provide is solid then they trust you. When you are known, liked, and trusted the buzz phrase for this is you are an "influencer."

               When you launch a product or service you can influence them to purchase your product.

               This could be a book, a course, a membership site, a crowdfunding campaign, a live webinar, etc. These products should fill a need in your space, or entertain them.

               Sell Other People's Products or Services (affiliate sales)

               Affiliate sales are when you sign up with a company to promote its products. You are given a link (or a code) that proves the traffic/customer came from you. If a sale is made, you earn a commission. When you match the right product with the right audience, you can make decent money. I once made hundreds of dollars a month promoting fitness cards on my weight loss show. The commission was $1.50 per deck. This product fit my audience.

               I later would do the same when the Fitbit first came on the scene. I bought one and loved it. This is a great place to start. Find a product that you love that your audience ( a weight loss show in this case) would love. I was able to openly and honestly talk about how I loved my Fitbit and ever since I bought it I was more active. Again, I was earning hundreds of dollars per month when the commission was $9 per sale.

               Pat Flynn makes a TON of money with Affiliate sales. He created a video tutorial showing how easy it was to install WordPress on a web hosting company. The video was short. It made building a website look super easy, and his affiliate link was right beneath the video.

               Find the right product for the right audience and affiliate sales can be a nice source of income.

               Crowdfunding / Donations

               This form of income requires an extremely engaged audience. When people donate their motivation is one of two things typically

               1. They want you to continue to create content and have the freedom to keep going. They believe in your message/content
               2. They want additional information or content.
               
               

               Adam Curry and John C Dvorak called the donation model "Value for Value" model. Their show the No Agenda Show dissects the media and helps you understand what is really going on in politics and in some cases society and culture. They produce two episodes a week that are roughly two hours long. They have a segment at the beginning thanking people who gave over $250. They have a segment in the middle to thank anyone who donated over $50, and they have a ceremony to "Knight" anyone who has donated over $1000 and welcome them to be a "Knight of the No Agenda Roundtable" and you also get a very nice ring (which of course people can wear, and have other people ask "where did you get that ring).

               The No Agenda show is so engaged they are now holding meetups without the hosts. Adam and John provide any tools to their audience that they can use to promote the show.

               Jennifer Bryney also does a show about politics called Congressional Dish. She started the show by reading every bill that went through the US Congress. Every American should listen to at least one episode of Congressional dish. Jen thanks all of her supporters at the end of the show.

               Both of these shows provide information that you (sadly) can't get any place else. Both are done in an informative and yet entertaining fashion.

               The No Agenda Show accepts checks and paypal. They have a jingle that promotes the website to go and donate ( www.divorak.com/na ). Congressional Dish will take your support using whatever payment tool you want

               The top reward people offer at Patreon (the top crowdfunding tool ) is additional content.

               When is the best time to add a Patreon campaign? When a listener asks you to start one.

               Host Read Ads

               While currently, less than 10% of podcasts get 5000 downloads per episode (the metric advertisers are looking for, although some need 20,000 per episode) this doesn't mean you can't get a sponsor. I've had sponsors on this show that fit my audience. While some advertisers use an old way of advertising held over from radio where you pay a rate based on the number of downloads ( CPM price per thousands ) this doesn't' work with podcasts who have a smaller - but more engaged - audience. I charge per episode (not CPM). This is sometimes called a "flat rate."

               When using the CPM model of (for example) $30 per thousand downloads and your show gets 200 downloads per episode that episode earned $6 (which is why CPM doesn't work for most podcasters). The more niche your audience, and the more niche the product the better the match. The better the match, the higher you can charge.

               Dynamic Ad Insertion

               While the technology behind dynamic ad insertion is not bad, currently podcasters who are using some services are getting the shaft in my opinion. For me, generic dynamic ad insertion is the equivalent of Podcast Welfare. One system I am checking is paying my .0017 (not a typo) per download. If we go back to that show that has 200 downloads per episode they are making 34 cents per episode.

               When you see companies saying "You can make money from DAY ONE" this is what they are using. Yes, you will earn money. However, you might be better checking your couch cushions.

               People That Make a Living With Podcast Have a Few Things In Common

               I've noticed a few traits with those people who make a living from the income that was generated from podcasting activities.

               1. They have MULTIPLE income streams. They sell products, affiliate sales, ads, etc. They have a combination of the above. The people that JUST have ads HAVE HUMONGOUS audiences. That take DECADES to build.
               2. They often have a spouse/partner that has a decent job with health benefits (not all but many)
               3.  Had an audience before they started podcasting (not all, but many).
               
               There are Other Ways To Measure Success

               It's not all about downloads and its not all about money. In some cases, you get paid in confidence. You get paid in speaking gigs, or maybe even a permanent job. In some cases, you get paid in friendship, and peace of mind knowing you belong.

               Quitting Your Day Job

               There are tools online you can use to see how much money you need to have a certain take-home pay. I live in Ohio and using https://us.thesalarycalculator.co.uk/salary.php

               I live in Ohio and in Ohio 60,000 will put you in a place where you don't have to worry about your bills. If I want to have a take-home pay of $60,000 a year I need to bring home $75,576.62 (as 20-30% of this is going to taxes). However, if you’re married with children you might be paying for health insurance via COSE (which can be around $1700 a month) which would mean you would need to have $98,192.92 in gross revenue...]]>I keep seeing statements like, "Well, I've done this podcast for 2 years and it's time to start monetizing." With this type of mindset, I can see many podcasters getting discouraged or even burned out. I played music in local bars from the age of 16 to 50. 34 years I played music, but I never fell delusional enough to think I would make the big time playing local bars in Northeast Ohio. If I wanted a career I would've had to move to a city like Los Angelas, Nashville, or anything that wasn't Akron, Ohio.

               While it's commendable to commit to something for a long period, it's not the longevity that inspires people to share your episodes. It's the content. Nobody has ever said, "Hey Dave you have to listen to this show!" and when I ask why they say, "They've been podcasting since 2014!"

               With that said, as I write the updated version to my book More Podcast Money, here are the ways you make money with podcasting.

               SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

               Be equipped to start their own podcast production company or be hired as an employee.

               Program Includes:
               • LIVE Interactive Online Training
               • Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran
               • Major Discounts on Software and Plugins
               • Lifetime Access to the PES closed community
               • Certificate of Completion
               
               

               Super Early Bird Specials Apply and prices WILL GO UP.

               Check it out at www.podcastengineeringschoool.com

               [click_to_tweet tweet="The Top Five Ways to Make Money With a Podcast @davejackson " quote=" The Top Five Ways To Make Money With a Podcast" theme="style3"]

               The Top Ways to Make Money With Your Podcast Sell Your Own Products or Services

               This is the top way to make money with your podcast. You harness the power of influence.

               As you have lived and breathed in your target audience for a while, you should know what they need or want. I was amazed at a WordCamp I attended recently that the documentation for the new Gutenberg is sparse at best. Everyone hates it. Nobody understands it. That is one learning curve that needs to be flattened and if I had time I would dive into it myself.

               Why some of your audience will buy from you is due to you bringing value on a consistent basis. This triggers the law of reciprocity. You've done something nice for them, and now your audience feels a need to do something nice for you. If you've shared a little about yourself then they probably like you (if they didn't they wouldn't be listening). If the information you provide is solid then they trust you. When you are known, liked, and trusted the buzz phrase for this is you are an "influencer."

               When you launch a product or service you can influence them to purchase your product.

               This could be a book, a course, a membership site, a crowdfunding campaign, a live webinar, etc. These products should fill a need in your space, or entertain them.

               Sell Other People's Products or Services (affiliate sales)

               Affiliate sales are when you sign up with a company to promote its products. You are given a link (or a code) that proves the traffic/customer came from you. If a sale is made, you earn a commission. When you match the right product with the right audience, you can make decent money. I once made hundreds of dollars a month promoting fitness cards on my weight loss show. The commission was $1.50 per deck. This product fit my audience.

               I later would do the same when the Fitbit first came on the scene. I bought one and loved it. This is a great place to start. Find a product that you love that your audience ( a weight loss show in this case) would love. I was able to openly and honestly talk about how I loved my Fitbit and ever since I bought it I was more active. Again, I was earning hundreds of dollars per month when the commission was $9 per sale.

               Pat Flynn makes a TON of money with Affiliate sales. He created a video tutorial showing how easy it was to install WordPress on a web hosting company. The video was short. It made building a website look super easy, and his affiliate link was right beneath the video.

               Find the right product for the right audience and affiliate sales can be a nice source of income.

               Crowdfunding / Donations

               This form of income requires an extremely engaged audience. When people donate their motivation is one of two things typically

               1. They want you to continue to create content and have the freedom to keep going. They believe in your message/content
               2. They want additional information or content.
               
               

               Adam Curry and John C Dvorak called the donation model "Value for Value" model. Their show the No Agenda Show dissects the media and helps you understand what is really going on in politics and in some cases society and culture. They produce two episodes a week that are roughly two hours long. They have a segment at the beginning thanking people who gave over $250. They have a segment in the middle to thank anyone who donated over $50, and they have a ceremony to "Knight" anyone who has donated over $1000 and welcome them to be a "Knight of the No Agenda Roundtable" and you also get a very nice ring (which of course people can wear, and have other people ask "where did you get that ring).

               The No Agenda show is so engaged they are now holding meetups without the hosts. Adam and John provide any tools to their audience that they can use to promote the show.

               Jennifer Bryney also does a show about politics called Congressional Dish. She started the show by reading every bill that went through the US Congress. Every American should listen to at least one episode of Congressional dish. Jen thanks all of her supporters at the end of the show.

               Both of these shows provide information that you (sadly) can't get any place else. Both are done in an informative and yet entertaining fashion.

               The No Agenda Show accepts checks and paypal. They have a jingle that promotes the website to go and donate ( www.divorak.com/na ). Congressional Dish will take your support using whatever payment tool you want

               The top reward people offer at Patreon (the top crowdfunding tool ) is additional content.

               When is the best time to add a Patreon campaign? When a listener asks you to start one.

               Host Read Ads

               While currently, less than 10% of podcasts get 5000 downloads per episode (the metric advertisers are looking for, although some need 20,000 per episode) this doesn't mean you can't get a sponsor. I've had sponsors on this show that fit my audience. While some advertisers use an old way of advertising held over from radio where you pay a rate based on the number of downloads ( CPM price per thousands ) this doesn't' work with podcasts who have a smaller - but more engaged - audience. I charge per episode (not CPM). This is sometimes called a "flat rate."

               When using the CPM model of (for example) $30 per thousand downloads and your show gets 200 downloads per episode that episode earned $6 (which is why CPM doesn't work for most podcasters). The more niche your audience, and the more niche the product the better the match. The better the match, the higher you can charge.

               Dynamic Ad Insertion

               While the technology behind dynamic ad insertion is not bad, currently podcasters who are using some services are getting the shaft in my opinion. For me, generic dynamic ad insertion is the equivalent of Podcast Welfare. One system I am checking is paying my .0017 (not a typo) per download. If we go back to that show that has 200 downloads per episode they are making 34 cents per episode.

               When you see companies saying "You can make money from DAY ONE" this is what they are using. Yes, you will earn money. However, you might be better checking your couch cushions.

               People That Make a Living With Podcast Have a Few Things In Common

               I've noticed a few traits with those people who make a living from the income that was generated from podcasting activities.

               1. They have MULTIPLE income streams. They sell products, affiliate sales, ads, etc. They have a combination of the above. The people that JUST have ads HAVE HUMONGOUS audiences. That take DECADES to build.
               2. They often have a spouse/partner that has a decent job with health benefits (not all but many)
               3.  Had an audience before they started podcasting (not all, but many).
               
               There are Other Ways To Measure Success

               It's not all about downloads and its not all about money. In some cases, you get paid in confidence. You get paid in speaking gigs, or maybe even a permanent job. In some cases, you get paid in friendship, and peace of mind knowing you belong.

               Quitting Your Day Job

               There are tools online you can use to see how much money you need to have a certain take-home pay. I live in Ohio and using https://us.thesalarycalculator.co.uk/salary.php

               I live in Ohio and in Ohio 60,000 will put you in a place where you don't have to worry about your bills. If I want to have a take-home pay of $60,000 a year I need to bring home $75,576.62 (as 20-30% of this is going to taxes). However, if you’re married with children you might be paying for health insurance via COSE (which can be around $1700 a month) which would mean you would need to have $98,192.92 in gross revenue to take home $60,000. Apparently, I'm also never going to retire (as I'm not putting any money away - just a thought).

               Now if we break that down that is $1888.33 per week. Assuming you are working 40 hours a week that is $47.21/hour. There are some things to keep in mind. This means your calendar is booked from morning to night if you are doing consulting. This also means you’re never taking a vacation. Wait, you want two weeks of vacation? Then you need to make $101,969.58 in gross revenue (as we will assume you are not making money while you are on vacation. This then means your hourly rate is $49.02/hour and you are working 40 hours a week.

               Why You Need Multiple Streams of Income

               In a post on their blog, Patreon mentions that only 1-5% of your audience will become Patrons. The average donation is $7. I checked mine, and it was $5, but we will stick with $7.

               If I use the gross number from above of that would mean I need to make $8,182.74 a month. If the average Patron donats $7, I will need 1,169 Patrons. If only 5% of my audience becomes Patrons I need a total number of downloads of 23,379 per month so 5% of them will become patrons. While you could say that 23,379 a month is 5845 downloads per week, but that 23,379 should be unique listeners.

               Question of the Month

               What do you like about the show? What do you wish I'd change? What do you want to hear in the future? Upload/Leave your answer on the contact page. 

               Please take the online survey (with a chance to win a price) at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey19

               Mentioned in this Show

               More Podcast Money Book

               More Podcast Money Podcast

               Fast Pitch Softball

               Useful Resources

               Graphtreon (shows how much people are making on Patreon)

               Patreon Crowd Funding

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>16f3af990dbf4e77910d7606472c8375Mon, 01 Jul 2019 04:51:31 -040001:00:51falsefull677677How Should You Celebrate Your Podcast Milestone?Thanks to everyone who chimed in with an answer:

               Melanie from the Beer with an Engineer show likes to throw a party for her listeners

               Brad from the Cinema Guys loves milestone shows - loves where people take small clips from past shows (or breaking format to do something special)

               Terry Noorda from the Discovering America podcast brought his family on the show

               Brian from Engaging Missions hasn't really done any kind of special episodes

               Kim from Toastmasters 101 is going to pass on anything special

               Stuart from the Great Escape is going to have a special

               Scott Johnson of the What was that like? show doesn't do anything special and prefers to focus on the audience

               Seth from Geekville Radio has done clip shows.

               Thomas from Multiverse Tonight made a special graphics and is changing his format

               Because of My Podcast

               Craig from Ingles Podcast did a study on podcasting and was able to present it at the largest event in his industry. Check out his show at https://www.inglespodcast.com/

               Question of the Month For July

               Take the full survey at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey19

               I haven't taken the temperature of my audience in a while, and you should do that. So we are going to do this in audio format

               What do you like about the show?

               What do you fast forward through (dislike - I have thick skin)

               What is your perfect length for an episode?

               What would you like to hear in the future?

               Use the tools at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>Thanks to everyone who chimed in with an answer:

               Melanie from the Beer with an Engineer show likes to throw a party for her listeners

               Brad from the Cinema Guys loves milestone shows - loves where people take small clips from past shows (or breaking format to do something special)

               Terry Noorda from the Discovering America podcast brought his family on the show

               Brian from Engaging Missions hasn't really done any kind of special episodes

               Kim from Toastmasters 101 is going to pass on anything special

               Stuart from the Great Escape is going to have a special

               Scott Johnson of the What was that like? show doesn't do anything special and prefers to focus on the audience

               Seth from Geekville Radio has done clip shows.

               Thomas from Multiverse Tonight made a special graphics and is changing his format

               Because of My Podcast

               Craig from Ingles Podcast did a study on podcasting and was able to present it at the largest event in his industry. Check out his show at https://www.inglespodcast.com/

               Question of the Month For July

               Take the full survey at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey19

               I haven't taken the temperature of my audience in a while, and you should do that. So we are going to do this in audio format

               What do you like about the show?

               What do you fast forward through (dislike - I have thick skin)

               What is your perfect length for an episode?

               What would you like to hear in the future?

               Use the tools at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>2dbfdbe8f0fe49a4be2821e624fdb6a3Mon, 24 Jun 2019 05:08:34 -040029:59falsefull676676Overcoming Your Fears So You Can Start Your PodcastI Have  A Fear of Heights True or False: Starting a Podcast is Hard Start a Podcast May Require Your To Overcome Fear Hiking in Utah is Different than Hiking in Ohio Get a Guide/Mentor To Help You Avoid Mistakes Everything Was Cool Until the Last Hike Getting Control of Your Mind The View From the Top Was Amazing The Confidence-Competence Loop
               Mentioned In This Episode

               Utah Podcast Summit

               Travel Gluten Free Podcast

               Shirts That Provide UV Protection

               TETON Sports Oasis 1100 Hydration Pack

               3 Month Podcast Quick Start Package

               Your Podcast Consultant

               Ask the Podcast Coach

               Podcast Review Show

               Podcast Rodeo Show

               Power of Podcasting Network

               Spybrary, Tourpreneur, and Radio GDR

               FULL SHOW NOTES

               Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/675

               ]]>I Have  A Fear of Heights True or False: Starting a Podcast is Hard Start a Podcast May Require Your To Overcome Fear Hiking in Utah is Different than Hiking in Ohio Get a Guide/Mentor To Help You Avoid Mistakes Everything Was Cool Until the Last Hike Getting Control of Your Mind The View From the Top Was Amazing The Confidence-Competence Loop
               Mentioned In This Episode

               Utah Podcast Summit

               Travel Gluten Free Podcast

               Shirts That Provide UV Protection

               TETON Sports Oasis 1100 Hydration Pack

               3 Month Podcast Quick Start Package

               Your Podcast Consultant

               Ask the Podcast Coach

               Podcast Review Show

               Podcast Rodeo Show

               Power of Podcasting Network

               Spybrary, Tourpreneur, and Radio GDR

               FULL SHOW NOTES

               Full Show Notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/675

               ]]>059f06295ca44700bd2c888517da2673Mon, 17 Jun 2019 04:00:00 -040045:47falsefull675675How To Rebrand Your Podcast Without Losing Your AudienceYou picked a name for your podcast (need help with picking a name, check out this episode of Your Podcast Consultant) and you've decided that maybe you went a little too "inside baseball" and you want to change the name of your podcast without losing your subscribers.
               How To Change Your Podcast Name

               Step one would be to let your audience know what is happening (you might even get them involved in voting for a new name). By letting them know ahead of time they don't freak out when they go to listen to your show and can't find it under the old name.

               4:00 Rebranding your podcast is not that hard. In its most primitive steps you:

               • Change your artwork (making sure to use a different file name for your new artwork)
               • Change your categories (if you want to)
               • Change the email address (if you want to)
               • Change your website address (if you want to)
               • Change the author name (if you want to)
               
               

               Keep in mind may take up to 24 hours for the changes to appear in the apps

               In Libsyn.com the steps are:

               Go to Settings > edit show settings and here you can update your show name, website, and artwork (as well as the description for the Libsyn directory).

               If you are uploading new artwork, make sure the file name is different than the current artwork ( for example, logo.jpg needs to be logo2.jpg ) and click save

               Then go to destinations > edit > Libsyn classic feed and adjust your categories, summaries, owner/author/email information and click Save

               With 24 hours any directories using your feed should update.

               Kentucky Fried Chicken to KFC

               Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue. So similar to the time when the Kentucky Fried Chicken Restaurants changed their name to KFC (hoping people would forget their name had the word FRIED in the middle of their name). There might be a new coat of paint on the outside. There might be a new sign out front. Inside you have the same food (an in this case they added a new menu item that still fit in with the other items)

               So when the audience went to the same location, they saw a new sign, a new menu item, but really nothing much changed

               When a podcast listener fires up their app it goes to the same location (your feed) and sees a few new things, but really nothing much has changed. They don't have to do anything.

               Because of My Podcast Kenn Blanchard

               Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun show has been asked to share 100 episodes for a new Black Podcast Project for the Society of American Archivists Journal. Check out at www.blackmanwithagun.com

               Homework: Question of the Month

               What ideas do you have for a podcaster celebrating a milestone episode (50, 100, 200, etc)?

               Watch to Watch: My Next Guest Needs No Introduction

               The new season of David Letterman's My Next Guest Needs No Introduction has two great examples of SHUTTING UP.

               When he is interviewing Ellen Degenerous he gets to the subject of her stepfather who he describes as a bad man and then SHUTS UP. Ellen is uncomfortable and not sure if she should share, and he DIDN'T SAY A PEEP.

               In a different episode, he is interviewing Tiffany Hadish who is explaining how good it felt to get her first suitcase so she didn't feel "like a piece of garbage." Here again, Dave SHUTS UP, and lets her share he insights and feelings. He doesn't chime in. He lets his guest share, and at the end, all he said was "Beautiful."

               Remember when you're interviewing someone the goal is to make your guest comfortable, and free to share anything in a judge free zone. It's about THEM not you.

               Apple Announcements: What It Means For You

               Apple announced that they will be transcribing your episodes in the future and using that transcription to boost search. There isn't anything for you to do besides make great content.

               They will be adding new categories and taking some away. This is good news, but not everyone will be happy (of course).  This will be coming "in the future" but no time frame. Once Apple announces their backend is ready then the podcast media hosts will update their backend to tap into these new categories. The bottom line is this won't be coming out for a little bit. I'm sure all the media hosts will announce when they are ready for those who want to update their category. Keep in mind that 70% of people find podcasts via word of mouth (but this might make it easier).

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/647

               ]]>You picked a name for your podcast (need help with picking a name, check out this episode of Your Podcast Consultant) and you've decided that maybe you went a little too "inside baseball" and you want to change the name of your podcast without losing your subscribers.
               How To Change Your Podcast Name

               Step one would be to let your audience know what is happening (you might even get them involved in voting for a new name). By letting them know ahead of time they don't freak out when they go to listen to your show and can't find it under the old name.

               4:00 Rebranding your podcast is not that hard. In its most primitive steps you:

               • Change your artwork (making sure to use a different file name for your new artwork)
               • Change your categories (if you want to)
               • Change the email address (if you want to)
               • Change your website address (if you want to)
               • Change the author name (if you want to)
               
               

               Keep in mind may take up to 24 hours for the changes to appear in the apps

               In Libsyn.com the steps are:

               Go to Settings > edit show settings and here you can update your show name, website, and artwork (as well as the description for the Libsyn directory).

               If you are uploading new artwork, make sure the file name is different than the current artwork ( for example, logo.jpg needs to be logo2.jpg ) and click save

               Then go to destinations > edit > Libsyn classic feed and adjust your categories, summaries, owner/author/email information and click Save

               With 24 hours any directories using your feed should update.

               Kentucky Fried Chicken to KFC

               Your podcast is a recipe - not a statue. So similar to the time when the Kentucky Fried Chicken Restaurants changed their name to KFC (hoping people would forget their name had the word FRIED in the middle of their name). There might be a new coat of paint on the outside. There might be a new sign out front. Inside you have the same food (an in this case they added a new menu item that still fit in with the other items)

               So when the audience went to the same location, they saw a new sign, a new menu item, but really nothing much changed

               When a podcast listener fires up their app it goes to the same location (your feed) and sees a few new things, but really nothing much has changed. They don't have to do anything.

               Because of My Podcast Kenn Blanchard

               Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun show has been asked to share 100 episodes for a new Black Podcast Project for the Society of American Archivists Journal. Check out at www.blackmanwithagun.com

               Homework: Question of the Month

               What ideas do you have for a podcaster celebrating a milestone episode (50, 100, 200, etc)?

               Watch to Watch: My Next Guest Needs No Introduction

               The new season of David Letterman's My Next Guest Needs No Introduction has two great examples of SHUTTING UP.

               When he is interviewing Ellen Degenerous he gets to the subject of her stepfather who he describes as a bad man and then SHUTS UP. Ellen is uncomfortable and not sure if she should share, and he DIDN'T SAY A PEEP.

               In a different episode, he is interviewing Tiffany Hadish who is explaining how good it felt to get her first suitcase so she didn't feel "like a piece of garbage." Here again, Dave SHUTS UP, and lets her share he insights and feelings. He doesn't chime in. He lets his guest share, and at the end, all he said was "Beautiful."

               Remember when you're interviewing someone the goal is to make your guest comfortable, and free to share anything in a judge free zone. It's about THEM not you.

               Apple Announcements: What It Means For You

               Apple announced that they will be transcribing your episodes in the future and using that transcription to boost search. There isn't anything for you to do besides make great content.

               They will be adding new categories and taking some away. This is good news, but not everyone will be happy (of course).  This will be coming "in the future" but no time frame. Once Apple announces their backend is ready then the podcast media hosts will update their backend to tap into these new categories. The bottom line is this won't be coming out for a little bit. I'm sure all the media hosts will announce when they are ready for those who want to update their category. Keep in mind that 70% of people find podcasts via word of mouth (but this might make it easier).

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/647

               ]]>dc993463c2da4e498b553915f87a992cMon, 10 Jun 2019 04:00:00 -040030:01falsefull647647Don't Worry About Things You Can't ControlThere are so many things that are changing in podcasting that can cause stress as you worry. Some things you have no control over. You may need to take some steps, but after that it is out of your control. 

               Being Seen in Google Podcasts

               If you've followed the directions to set up your website, or you are using a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry you are good to go. From there, you just have to wait on Google. 

               Being Found In Apps

               I have had people contact me about Apple, Spotify, iHeart and sure its only a matter of time until radio.com gets added to the list. Search in these apps is poor at best. Apple searches the name of your show, the name of your episode and the author title. If you have your target words in those areas, that is all you can do. 

               Having Google Put Play Buttons In Search Results

               At this point, I've done some research, and it sounded like if your show was in Google Podcasts, our show should appear with play buttons if someone did a search for your show. This (at this point ) only works about 50% of the time for me. As Google is still somewhat new to podcasting and this is a new feature, there isn't much for us to do. 

               Should I Change My Intro?

               As people may be clicking play on any episodes that appear in search results I don't tink ANY podcaster will have the answer they are looking for at the very beginning of the show.

               What you want your show to do is pull people in by letting people know what is coming. If they see where you are going, the audience is more likely to get on board. 

               Mentioned In This Show

               Evo Terra of Podcast Pontifications

               Podcasters Roundtable

               Giving Up the Ghost Podcast

               Get Your Podcast Started

               www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                

               ]]>There are so many things that are changing in podcasting that can cause stress as you worry. Some things you have no control over. You may need to take some steps, but after that it is out of your control. 

               Being Seen in Google Podcasts

               If you've followed the directions to set up your website, or you are using a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry you are good to go. From there, you just have to wait on Google. 

               Being Found In Apps

               I have had people contact me about Apple, Spotify, iHeart and sure its only a matter of time until radio.com gets added to the list. Search in these apps is poor at best. Apple searches the name of your show, the name of your episode and the author title. If you have your target words in those areas, that is all you can do. 

               Having Google Put Play Buttons In Search Results

               At this point, I've done some research, and it sounded like if your show was in Google Podcasts, our show should appear with play buttons if someone did a search for your show. This (at this point ) only works about 50% of the time for me. As Google is still somewhat new to podcasting and this is a new feature, there isn't much for us to do. 

               Should I Change My Intro?

               As people may be clicking play on any episodes that appear in search results I don't tink ANY podcaster will have the answer they are looking for at the very beginning of the show.

               What you want your show to do is pull people in by letting people know what is coming. If they see where you are going, the audience is more likely to get on board. 

               Mentioned In This Show

               Evo Terra of Podcast Pontifications

               Podcasters Roundtable

               Giving Up the Ghost Podcast

               Get Your Podcast Started

               www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                

               ]]>16217ebe7b95421f903056c33767f8ebMon, 03 Jun 2019 04:00:00 -040025:20falsefull673673The Biggest Pain in Creating a PodcastStarting a podcast is not hard. Starting a GOOD podcast takes time, dedication, talent, etc and today I asked my audience, "What is the biggest pain in starting and creating a podcast." Here is what they answered:
               Your Biggest Pain in Podcasting

               01:23 Thanks to everyone who contributed

               Positioning My Podcast - from Timothy of kdoipodcasting.com

               Running Out of Content - Chris Nesi from the House of Ed Tech

               Scheduling - Todd from the Trucker Dump

               The Abundance of Choice - Stephanie from the Virtual Ex-Pats

               Mouth Noises - Moxie Your Brain On Facts

               Thumbnails - Bandrew from the Bandrew Says

               Show Notes - Matt from the Author Inside You 

               Show Notes - Seth from Geekville Radio

               Running Out of Content - Dave Logical Weight Loss

               Question of the Month

               How do you celebrate a milestone episode? I need your answer by June 22, 2019. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

               Because of My Podcast I Was Hired For an Event

               33:28

               Jas from Giving Up The Ghost podcast was asked to do a live recording of Ghost Stories at an AKIA store for a private sleepover party after only four episodes!

               Here is the description of their show:

               Podcasting LIVE from one of the MOST haunted cities located DEAD center in North America - Winnipeg, MB Canada. Join us as we explore the unknown! Welcome to Giving Up The Ghost Each week we will cover, explore and share our research of unexplained paranormal phenomena in Winnipeg and surrounding areas! Join your AudioCurators Jas and Sherrie as they discover the dark side of local history, Urban legends and their haunting origins as well as everything that goes bump in the night. Are you afraid of the dark? well, you should be.

               For more information on Sherrie’s Art and Gallery please view her talent at https://www.facebook.com/ChicAndTique/ For more information on Jas’s publications and fiction writing, please visit her website www.jnflamand.com and her FB page https://www.facebook.com/jnflamand/

               The Memory of Creating a Podcast Will Be With You Forever

               35:18

               When you start a podcast it will change your life for better or worse, and you won't be able to take it away. I recently drove 12 hours in a car with my brother and sister-in-law to see my cousin's oldest child graduate from High School. Yes, 24 hours (round trip) in a car is not a great time, but it is a memory I have with my family that we will always have. To have that memory I had to say Yes to taking the trip.

               Let Me Help You Start Your Podcast

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                

               Mentioned on This Show

               Acuity Scheduling 

               Calendly Scheduling Tool

               Ivy Envy 

               Episode 624 Is Anyone Reading Show Notes?

               Episode 400 of the School of Podcasting

               Gordon Firemark episode about Podcast Trademarks

               Terry Gross book "All I Did Was Ask"

               Howard Stern Comes Again Book

                

               ]]>Starting a podcast is not hard. Starting a GOOD podcast takes time, dedication, talent, etc and today I asked my audience, "What is the biggest pain in starting and creating a podcast." Here is what they answered:
               Your Biggest Pain in Podcasting

               01:23 Thanks to everyone who contributed

               Positioning My Podcast - from Timothy of kdoipodcasting.com

               Running Out of Content - Chris Nesi from the House of Ed Tech

               Scheduling - Todd from the Trucker Dump

               The Abundance of Choice - Stephanie from the Virtual Ex-Pats

               Mouth Noises - Moxie Your Brain On Facts

               Thumbnails - Bandrew from the Bandrew Says

               Show Notes - Matt from the Author Inside You 

               Show Notes - Seth from Geekville Radio

               Running Out of Content - Dave Logical Weight Loss

               Question of the Month

               How do you celebrate a milestone episode? I need your answer by June 22, 2019. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

               Because of My Podcast I Was Hired For an Event

               33:28

               Jas from Giving Up The Ghost podcast was asked to do a live recording of Ghost Stories at an AKIA store for a private sleepover party after only four episodes!

               Here is the description of their show:

               Podcasting LIVE from one of the MOST haunted cities located DEAD center in North America - Winnipeg, MB Canada. Join us as we explore the unknown! Welcome to Giving Up The Ghost Each week we will cover, explore and share our research of unexplained paranormal phenomena in Winnipeg and surrounding areas! Join your AudioCurators Jas and Sherrie as they discover the dark side of local history, Urban legends and their haunting origins as well as everything that goes bump in the night. Are you afraid of the dark? well, you should be.

               For more information on Sherrie’s Art and Gallery please view her talent at https://www.facebook.com/ChicAndTique/ For more information on Jas’s publications and fiction writing, please visit her website www.jnflamand.com and her FB page https://www.facebook.com/jnflamand/

               The Memory of Creating a Podcast Will Be With You Forever

               35:18

               When you start a podcast it will change your life for better or worse, and you won't be able to take it away. I recently drove 12 hours in a car with my brother and sister-in-law to see my cousin's oldest child graduate from High School. Yes, 24 hours (round trip) in a car is not a great time, but it is a memory I have with my family that we will always have. To have that memory I had to say Yes to taking the trip.

               Let Me Help You Start Your Podcast

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                

               Mentioned on This Show

               Acuity Scheduling 

               Calendly Scheduling Tool

               Ivy Envy 

               Episode 624 Is Anyone Reading Show Notes?

               Episode 400 of the School of Podcasting

               Gordon Firemark episode about Podcast Trademarks

               Terry Gross book "All I Did Was Ask"

               Howard Stern Comes Again Book

                

               ]]>af27f155420546db879f21cbcd4cac90Mon, 27 May 2019 07:27:57 -040044:37falsefull672672Does Your Podcast Name Need a Trademark?Today's talk about Podcast Trademarks was inspired by a Facebook post. As a tech support person for Libsyn I see a large number of podcasts on a weekly basis (get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree ). I always find it interesting when people are launching a NEW show and when I go to look up their account, I see that there is another show with the same name. One of my favorite examples is the name "Outside the box"

               If only there was a tool where you could search the Internet to see if anyone is using the name?

               Podcast Honeymoons

               Sometimes we skip steps like this because we are so excited, and we just can't hide it, and we move forward without doing something like a quick Google Search or a search in Apple. This can also continue as you enter what I'm calling Podcast Honeymoon.

               This about when you find someone to date, and HOLY COW they just check every box. You do fun things like celebrating your one-month anniversary. You celebrate the anniversary of anything and everything (your first email, phone call, first date, first kiss). You are what my mother use to call GAGA (way before Lady Gaga). You think about the time

               Fast forward nine months later and that awesome accent that was so quaint is now like nails on a chalkboard. I recently went to watch my ex-step-son graduate from Perdue University with my ex-wife. My ex-wife is a person who must examine ALL options before making a decision and I was like, "Oh, I remember this as she tried to decide the t-shirt or hoodie, and black vs white."

               What does this have to do with podcasting?

               When you first start a podcast you may be thinking about it all the time. You may start to have issues at work. You may be working at your podcast at work (not recommended). You might be thinking about your podcast when you are with your family. I'm reading Howard Stern's new book Howard Stern Comes Again, and he talks about how he was obsessed with ratings and consequently, was not a great husband or father. I did the same thing. While both my ex-wife and I will admit "we probably shouldn't have got married in the first place" podcasting was a source of tension. I know of people who edit their podcast on the clock at their job.

               I'm here to remind you that is not an option. If it has been a while since you did a job search. Before I worked at Libsyn, the last teaching job I got took a while to get hired even though I had decades of experience and a degree. It is easier said than done, but jumping off a cliff and building the plane on the way down may not be the best choice you've ever been

               [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks #davejackson" quote="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks" theme="style3"]

               Talking Podcast Trademarks with Gordon Firemark

               Gordon is the producer and host of Entertainment Law Update., a podcast for artists and professionals in the entertainment industries. His practice also covers intellectual property, cyberspace, new media and business/corporate matters for clients in the entertainment industry. He is the author of The Podcast, Blog and New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide.

               Copyright vs Trademarks

               Do I need one for my show?

               How do they protect me?

               How much do they cost?

               Check out all things Gordon Firemark at Firemark.com

               Check out his Podcast Law Book

               Check out the Podcast Release Form

                

               Mentioned In This Episode

               Question of the Month: "What is your biggest pain in creating a podcast?" Deliver your answer via our contact page (don't forget to mention your show and website) 

               Utah Podcast Summit (use coupon code sop )

               Wordpress Kent

               Podcast Baby Steps ( Brand New To Podcasting> Start here)

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>Today's talk about Podcast Trademarks was inspired by a Facebook post. As a tech support person for Libsyn I see a large number of podcasts on a weekly basis (get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree ). I always find it interesting when people are launching a NEW show and when I go to look up their account, I see that there is another show with the same name. One of my favorite examples is the name "Outside the box"

               If only there was a tool where you could search the Internet to see if anyone is using the name?

               Podcast Honeymoons

               Sometimes we skip steps like this because we are so excited, and we just can't hide it, and we move forward without doing something like a quick Google Search or a search in Apple. This can also continue as you enter what I'm calling Podcast Honeymoon.

               This about when you find someone to date, and HOLY COW they just check every box. You do fun things like celebrating your one-month anniversary. You celebrate the anniversary of anything and everything (your first email, phone call, first date, first kiss). You are what my mother use to call GAGA (way before Lady Gaga). You think about the time

               Fast forward nine months later and that awesome accent that was so quaint is now like nails on a chalkboard. I recently went to watch my ex-step-son graduate from Perdue University with my ex-wife. My ex-wife is a person who must examine ALL options before making a decision and I was like, "Oh, I remember this as she tried to decide the t-shirt or hoodie, and black vs white."

               What does this have to do with podcasting?

               When you first start a podcast you may be thinking about it all the time. You may start to have issues at work. You may be working at your podcast at work (not recommended). You might be thinking about your podcast when you are with your family. I'm reading Howard Stern's new book Howard Stern Comes Again, and he talks about how he was obsessed with ratings and consequently, was not a great husband or father. I did the same thing. While both my ex-wife and I will admit "we probably shouldn't have got married in the first place" podcasting was a source of tension. I know of people who edit their podcast on the clock at their job.

               I'm here to remind you that is not an option. If it has been a while since you did a job search. Before I worked at Libsyn, the last teaching job I got took a while to get hired even though I had decades of experience and a degree. It is easier said than done, but jumping off a cliff and building the plane on the way down may not be the best choice you've ever been

               [click_to_tweet tweet="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks #davejackson" quote="Everything you need to know about your podcast and Trademarks" theme="style3"]

               Talking Podcast Trademarks with Gordon Firemark

               Gordon is the producer and host of Entertainment Law Update., a podcast for artists and professionals in the entertainment industries. His practice also covers intellectual property, cyberspace, new media and business/corporate matters for clients in the entertainment industry. He is the author of The Podcast, Blog and New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide.

               Copyright vs Trademarks

               Do I need one for my show?

               How do they protect me?

               How much do they cost?

               Check out all things Gordon Firemark at Firemark.com

               Check out his Podcast Law Book

               Check out the Podcast Release Form

                

               Mentioned In This Episode

               Question of the Month: "What is your biggest pain in creating a podcast?" Deliver your answer via our contact page (don't forget to mention your show and website) 

               Utah Podcast Summit (use coupon code sop )

               Wordpress Kent

               Podcast Baby Steps ( Brand New To Podcasting> Start here)

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>1f29a3ef9f4e48a0b4dba5a65286a026Mon, 20 May 2019 04:00:00 -040036:03falsefull671671Podcoin App Pays Listeners to Listen to PodcastThere is more money coming into Podcasting and Geoff and David Cook are hoping to get some of it by building a podcast app that focuses on helping you find new podcasts, integrate social ingredients (likes, etc), and pay you one podcoin (1-4 cents) for every 10 minutes.

               I wanted to find out more about this app. Podcoin was created by David Cook who credited the idea to a speech his brother Geoff Cook gave to Princeton University in April 2018. It’s not the first time they’ve been business partners. David and Geoff previously co-founded myYearbook with their sister Catherine in 2005. The trio then sold the company to Quepasa for $100 million in 2011.

               It's been around since January of 2019 and currently has 15 million users that are consuming 1,500,000+ Listening Minutes PER DAY

               For more information see https://www.podcoin.com/audience

               Find the app on Apple and Android

               Fixing Mistakes In Your Podcast

               You are listening back to your podcast and there is a mistake you HAVE to fix. Here are your options when using Libsyn

               Thank you for contacting Libsyn Support

               It gets tricky with Spotify, and Google Play Music.

               If you upload a file with the same file name, all the other directories and apps up EXCEPT the two above. There are two options

               Strategy 1

               If you go to content > previously published > edit the episode

               Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab

               You will see the destinations. Uncheck Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button).

               Then rename your episode file, go to content > add new episode

               Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab

               You will see the destinations. Make sure to UNCHECK ALL of the destinations EXCEPT Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button). 670 This will create a version of that episode just for those destinations, and the original version never goes offline.

               Strategy 2

               Go to Content > Previously Published > Edit

               Rename your original file and use the replace option and click Publish (which acts as a save button).

               The current apps will have a small amount of time when the file will not play (as the apps update they will see the new file name, but there may be people who go to play the file and it won't work (as it's still looking at the old name).

               This can take up to 24 hours.

               But the episode will update on all platforms.

               What If I'm Not Using Libsyn?

               The bottom line is if you upload the new file with the same name, then it won't update on Spotify or Google Play Music because they make

               Question of the Month

               What is your biggest pain in podcasting?

               Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and upload your file or use the speakpipe button by 5/24/19

               Start Your Podcast Today

               www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

               ]]>There is more money coming into Podcasting and Geoff and David Cook are hoping to get some of it by building a podcast app that focuses on helping you find new podcasts, integrate social ingredients (likes, etc), and pay you one podcoin (1-4 cents) for every 10 minutes.

               I wanted to find out more about this app. Podcoin was created by David Cook who credited the idea to a speech his brother Geoff Cook gave to Princeton University in April 2018. It’s not the first time they’ve been business partners. David and Geoff previously co-founded myYearbook with their sister Catherine in 2005. The trio then sold the company to Quepasa for $100 million in 2011.

               It's been around since January of 2019 and currently has 15 million users that are consuming 1,500,000+ Listening Minutes PER DAY

               For more information see https://www.podcoin.com/audience

               Find the app on Apple and Android

               Fixing Mistakes In Your Podcast

               You are listening back to your podcast and there is a mistake you HAVE to fix. Here are your options when using Libsyn

               Thank you for contacting Libsyn Support

               It gets tricky with Spotify, and Google Play Music.

               If you upload a file with the same file name, all the other directories and apps up EXCEPT the two above. There are two options

               Strategy 1

               If you go to content > previously published > edit the episode

               Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab

               You will see the destinations. Uncheck Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button).

               Then rename your episode file, go to content > add new episode

               Then click on the Scheduling Tab and go to the advanced sub-tab

               You will see the destinations. Make sure to UNCHECK ALL of the destinations EXCEPT Spotify, Google Play Music and click Publish (which acts as a save button). 670 This will create a version of that episode just for those destinations, and the original version never goes offline.

               Strategy 2

               Go to Content > Previously Published > Edit

               Rename your original file and use the replace option and click Publish (which acts as a save button).

               The current apps will have a small amount of time when the file will not play (as the apps update they will see the new file name, but there may be people who go to play the file and it won't work (as it's still looking at the old name).

               This can take up to 24 hours.

               But the episode will update on all platforms.

               What If I'm Not Using Libsyn?

               The bottom line is if you upload the new file with the same name, then it won't update on Spotify or Google Play Music because they make

               Question of the Month

               What is your biggest pain in podcasting?

               Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and upload your file or use the speakpipe button by 5/24/19

               Start Your Podcast Today

               www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

               ]]>4ea102b34f0f4af5a90e888a391aa1aeMon, 13 May 2019 04:00:00 -040040:01falsefull670670Podcast Pre-Interviews - Ensuring Valuable ConversationsI came across Kent Convington's Fast Lane Podcast University Podcast and I liked the content I was hearing. I was lucky enough to have Kent ask me to be on his show. Then he did something only one other person has done. He asked for a pre-interview.

               He started off by asking about any stories in my life and my career in podcasting. If I wasn't so long winded it would've lasted about 15 minutes, but because I rambled on a bit, it probably lasted 34. Kent was looking to craft a story. Not just have me rattle of stats. He was looking not just for facts and stories, but interesting stories.

               This also got me thinking about what my "best material" is, and a few days later when we recorded the interview I was prepared.

               Today I return the favor and ask Ken to "pull back the curtain" and explain what is going through his mind when he does a pre-interview.

               Behind My Podcast Curtain

               You will hear what little I do as a "Pre-interview" (something I may change in the future). I typically tell people who they are talking to, why I brought them on the show, and what I plan on asking them about. With Kent, there isn't much information about him online so I had to do some digging into his background to see how he got into podcasting.

               How Kent Does a Pre-Interview

               Kent is on the lookout for stories, and things to enable the audience to not only get to know the guest but to find entertaining stories.

               He is looking for items that will help paint the mental image, the vivid pictures inside the "Theater of the Mind."

               What are the biggest hurdles?

               What is the most memorable moment?

               Tell me about a time when _____ happened.

               You are looking for the challenge and conflict.

               Polishing the Stories using  The Ladder of Abstraction S. I. Hayakaw ( explanation )

               When to do a Pre-Interview

               Profile Interviews: Designed to help tell the story of the guest

               Advice Podcasts: Where an expert is on to share tips and insights.

               Across the Table Interview: You are looking for the truth. Less of a team approach.

               So Many People Have a Podcast About _____

               If you're worried about starting a podcast because "so and so" is "sooooo popular" and "owns" the niche. That is like telling the Quarterback in High School to quit because they will never be as good as Tom. Well if Tom quit because he would never be as good as Joe Montana, then we wouldn't have Tom Brady today.

               Don't obsess over what other people are doing and instead focus on your audience. Realize we all have different strengths and different passions.

               Mentioned in this Episode

               Fast Lane Podcast University

               Roy H Williams "Wizard of Ads"

               The Ladder of Abstraction

               Chris Curran Podcast Engineering School

               Natalie at Bizchix

               Dan O Day

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>I came across Kent Convington's Fast Lane Podcast University Podcast and I liked the content I was hearing. I was lucky enough to have Kent ask me to be on his show. Then he did something only one other person has done. He asked for a pre-interview.

               He started off by asking about any stories in my life and my career in podcasting. If I wasn't so long winded it would've lasted about 15 minutes, but because I rambled on a bit, it probably lasted 34. Kent was looking to craft a story. Not just have me rattle of stats. He was looking not just for facts and stories, but interesting stories.

               This also got me thinking about what my "best material" is, and a few days later when we recorded the interview I was prepared.

               Today I return the favor and ask Ken to "pull back the curtain" and explain what is going through his mind when he does a pre-interview.

               Behind My Podcast Curtain

               You will hear what little I do as a "Pre-interview" (something I may change in the future). I typically tell people who they are talking to, why I brought them on the show, and what I plan on asking them about. With Kent, there isn't much information about him online so I had to do some digging into his background to see how he got into podcasting.

               How Kent Does a Pre-Interview

               Kent is on the lookout for stories, and things to enable the audience to not only get to know the guest but to find entertaining stories.

               He is looking for items that will help paint the mental image, the vivid pictures inside the "Theater of the Mind."

               What are the biggest hurdles?

               What is the most memorable moment?

               Tell me about a time when _____ happened.

               You are looking for the challenge and conflict.

               Polishing the Stories using  The Ladder of Abstraction S. I. Hayakaw ( explanation )

               When to do a Pre-Interview

               Profile Interviews: Designed to help tell the story of the guest

               Advice Podcasts: Where an expert is on to share tips and insights.

               Across the Table Interview: You are looking for the truth. Less of a team approach.

               So Many People Have a Podcast About _____

               If you're worried about starting a podcast because "so and so" is "sooooo popular" and "owns" the niche. That is like telling the Quarterback in High School to quit because they will never be as good as Tom. Well if Tom quit because he would never be as good as Joe Montana, then we wouldn't have Tom Brady today.

               Don't obsess over what other people are doing and instead focus on your audience. Realize we all have different strengths and different passions.

               Mentioned in this Episode

               Fast Lane Podcast University

               Roy H Williams "Wizard of Ads"

               The Ladder of Abstraction

               Chris Curran Podcast Engineering School

               Natalie at Bizchix

               Dan O Day

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               ]]>5802c480f94c43cfae7cf38903f685b2Mon, 06 May 2019 04:00:00 -040049:50falsefull669669Is It Possible to Air Check My Own Show?Back on episode 655, we talked about how do you know if your show connects with your audience? That focused on making sure your content was great. Your podcast is a presentation of information. As someone who speaks at conferences, and use to teach in the corporate world there are always three presentations.

               The presentation you planned

               The presentation you delivered

               The presentation you wish you had delivered.

               The way to avoid those regrets is through planning, but also by learning from your past mistakes.

               I was asked by Ed Ryan who is the Editor of the Podcast Business Journal to write an article address how to "Air Check" yourself (and can you?). Here is the article.

               Podcast Air Check Tips:

               My buddy Erik K Johnson of the Podcast Talent Coach podcast says, "Nobody is getting on a bus without knowing where it's going." If you stop your show at the 1-minute mark do you feel like you know enough to get on the bus? Do you know where it's going? We are assuming your headline is in great shape (if not see my free guide to help you write better episode titles).

               Speaking of episode titles, does this title accurately reflect what is being covered in this episode?

               If you stop your show at the three-minute mark are you into some content (or are you still in chit chat mode).

               You know your crutch words. We all have them. How are they in his episode?

               Do you have advertising on your show? You might have a "30-second" spot. Take out your phone and time how long your 30-second spot.

               For me, I often find typos in my show notes when I read the post with a fresh set of eyes.

               If You Are Doing Interviews

               I have a cheat sheet that you can use for this. Looking back at your interview answer these questions:

               What are the strengths of the guest? Why did you bring them on?

               What did you get out of this interview? What were the takeaways?

               Then listen to the interview and take out a notepad (or open your favorite note-taking app) and use two columns. In the first column label in questions and in the second column put "Answer."

               When I listen to Harry Durran of Podcast Junkies, Harry does a great job of asking the questions I would ask if I was interviewing the guest. So as you listen to this episode, did you miss any opportunities for follow up questions?

               Did you promote the guest’s website/products/services? If so, was it enough, too much, too little?

               Did you find yourself repeating what the guest said (ME TOO!).  We heard it the first time.

               Looking at why you brought the guest on, did you achieve what you set out to do? Did you get the expected takeaways? If so, what did you do to get to those answers? If not, what do you feel you could do differently next time.

               Final Conclusions
               • What do you think you did well in this episode?
               • What was the best take away? ( maybe turn that into a social media post)
               • What lessons can be learned from this episode?
               • How was your call to action? Did you have ONE or twelve?
               
               

               While a self-evaluation is hard to do (and just not as good as getting someone else’s opinion). If you do find yourself face to face with an actual listener, THIS IS HUGE. Ask them what they like (and they will tell you). Then ask you what they dislike (and often they will say nothing). Explain that you have thick skin and can take it, and then shut up. The awkward silence might nudge them to give you a pointer or two. If you really want to give them a “Safe” environment, when they start to give you notes state, “Do you care if I write this down?” and jot it down on paper or in your phone. This shows the person their opinion is important and might lead to more feedback.

               Lastly, don’t get defensive and start explaining why you do something. JUST LISTEN and thank them for their feedback. Keep in mind, you are 100% in control and what you do with this feedback is entirely up to you.

               Here Are Some Resources to Get Your Podcast Reviewed:

               Podcast Review Show The Podcast Whisperer Podcast Rodeo show

               If you know of others leave them in the comments below. As you might imagine if you Google the words podcast and reviews you get tons of articles about how to get reviews in Apple (which do nothing but provide social proof – they do not advance you up the charts or help you be found).

               Question of the Month: Do You Pay For Any Part of Your Podcast Production?

               Are you paying for any part of your podcast production, and if you are how much does it cost?

               Thanks to Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome

               Fred from The Podcast Reporter

               Robert from Happy Diabetic Podcast 

               Steve Stewart who produces the Military Money Podcast and runs the Podcast Editors Club

               Pedro from My Stuttering Life

               John From Professor Slots

               Moxie from Your Brain on Facts (Moxie on the Podcast Rodeo show )

               Brandon  from Florida Focus Podcast

               May Question of the month: What is your biggest pain point in podcasting? Podcast Rewind

               I appeared on the Project Egg show where we talked about podcasting, where I grew up, how I grew up, and I must say this was "not your typical" Dave Jackson podcast.

               Because of My Podcast

               We lost our job on the radio, and because of our podcast, we got a job back on the radio. Check out the Brendon and Kevin Podcast 

               Where Will I Be? 

               June 8th Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah

               June 15-16 WordCamp Kent Kent, Ohio

               August 13-16 Podcast Movement  Orlando Florida

               September 4-7 Fin 2019 Washington, DC

               September 8-10 Military Influencer Conference Washington DC

               October 17 – 18 DOYO Live Youngstown Ohio.

               Mentioned in This Episode

               Episode 667 on productivity

               Podcast Review Show

               Podcast Rodeo Show

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               podcoin

               ]]>Back on episode 655, we talked about how do you know if your show connects with your audience? That focused on making sure your content was great. Your podcast is a presentation of information. As someone who speaks at conferences, and use to teach in the corporate world there are always three presentations.

               The presentation you planned

               The presentation you delivered

               The presentation you wish you had delivered.

               The way to avoid those regrets is through planning, but also by learning from your past mistakes.

               I was asked by Ed Ryan who is the Editor of the Podcast Business Journal to write an article address how to "Air Check" yourself (and can you?). Here is the article.

               Podcast Air Check Tips:

               My buddy Erik K Johnson of the Podcast Talent Coach podcast says, "Nobody is getting on a bus without knowing where it's going." If you stop your show at the 1-minute mark do you feel like you know enough to get on the bus? Do you know where it's going? We are assuming your headline is in great shape (if not see my free guide to help you write better episode titles).

               Speaking of episode titles, does this title accurately reflect what is being covered in this episode?

               If you stop your show at the three-minute mark are you into some content (or are you still in chit chat mode).

               You know your crutch words. We all have them. How are they in his episode?

               Do you have advertising on your show? You might have a "30-second" spot. Take out your phone and time how long your 30-second spot.

               For me, I often find typos in my show notes when I read the post with a fresh set of eyes.

               If You Are Doing Interviews

               I have a cheat sheet that you can use for this. Looking back at your interview answer these questions:

               What are the strengths of the guest? Why did you bring them on?

               What did you get out of this interview? What were the takeaways?

               Then listen to the interview and take out a notepad (or open your favorite note-taking app) and use two columns. In the first column label in questions and in the second column put "Answer."

               When I listen to Harry Durran of Podcast Junkies, Harry does a great job of asking the questions I would ask if I was interviewing the guest. So as you listen to this episode, did you miss any opportunities for follow up questions?

               Did you promote the guest’s website/products/services? If so, was it enough, too much, too little?

               Did you find yourself repeating what the guest said (ME TOO!).  We heard it the first time.

               Looking at why you brought the guest on, did you achieve what you set out to do? Did you get the expected takeaways? If so, what did you do to get to those answers? If not, what do you feel you could do differently next time.

               Final Conclusions
               • What do you think you did well in this episode?
               • What was the best take away? ( maybe turn that into a social media post)
               • What lessons can be learned from this episode?
               • How was your call to action? Did you have ONE or twelve?
               
               

               While a self-evaluation is hard to do (and just not as good as getting someone else’s opinion). If you do find yourself face to face with an actual listener, THIS IS HUGE. Ask them what they like (and they will tell you). Then ask you what they dislike (and often they will say nothing). Explain that you have thick skin and can take it, and then shut up. The awkward silence might nudge them to give you a pointer or two. If you really want to give them a “Safe” environment, when they start to give you notes state, “Do you care if I write this down?” and jot it down on paper or in your phone. This shows the person their opinion is important and might lead to more feedback.

               Lastly, don’t get defensive and start explaining why you do something. JUST LISTEN and thank them for their feedback. Keep in mind, you are 100% in control and what you do with this feedback is entirely up to you.

               Here Are Some Resources to Get Your Podcast Reviewed:

               Podcast Review Show The Podcast Whisperer Podcast Rodeo show

               If you know of others leave them in the comments below. As you might imagine if you Google the words podcast and reviews you get tons of articles about how to get reviews in Apple (which do nothing but provide social proof – they do not advance you up the charts or help you be found).

               Question of the Month: Do You Pay For Any Part of Your Podcast Production?

               Are you paying for any part of your podcast production, and if you are how much does it cost?

               Thanks to Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome

               Fred from The Podcast Reporter

               Robert from Happy Diabetic Podcast 

               Steve Stewart who produces the Military Money Podcast and runs the Podcast Editors Club

               Pedro from My Stuttering Life

               John From Professor Slots

               Moxie from Your Brain on Facts (Moxie on the Podcast Rodeo show )

               Brandon  from Florida Focus Podcast

               May Question of the month: What is your biggest pain point in podcasting? Podcast Rewind

               I appeared on the Project Egg show where we talked about podcasting, where I grew up, how I grew up, and I must say this was "not your typical" Dave Jackson podcast.

               Because of My Podcast

               We lost our job on the radio, and because of our podcast, we got a job back on the radio. Check out the Brendon and Kevin Podcast 

               Where Will I Be? 

               June 8th Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah

               June 15-16 WordCamp Kent Kent, Ohio

               August 13-16 Podcast Movement  Orlando Florida

               September 4-7 Fin 2019 Washington, DC

               September 8-10 Military Influencer Conference Washington DC

               October 17 – 18 DOYO Live Youngstown Ohio.

               Mentioned in This Episode

               Episode 667 on productivity

               Podcast Review Show

               Podcast Rodeo Show

               Work With Me

               Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

               podcoin

               ]]>49b1bea0b953454d813e689bf54250e1Mon, 29 Apr 2019 05:02:10 -040043:04falsefull668668Focus Is More Important Than MicrophonesEvery podcaster has one thing in common: they all have 24 hours in the day. Today I'm going to share a ton of research and strategies to get your more productive. Last week I talked about five things that you think will grow your audience but don't. This is continuing on with that theme of determining what you want to do, and then getting it done. One of my favorite quotes from Abraham Lincoln is “Give me six hours to chop down a tree and I will spend the first four sharpening the axe.”

               If you have no focus, it doesn't matter what microphone you have if you can't get it together.

               My Own Personal Struggles

               Growing up I was what some might call "A weird little boy." I remember driving my Mom nuts as I would be in the kitchen talking on the phone. We had a bunch of 16 oz coke glasses that I would fill up with water and tune and then play as I was talking on the phone. I always described myself as "Creative" but I'm sure if I was in elementary school today that would pump me with enough Ritalin to put a Rhino to sleep. As an adult, I tried going on some medication but the more focus I achieved was washed away by the energy that was sucked out of me. With this in mind when I get my creative juices flowing, I can be hyper-focused and lose all sense of time. To me I define that as "fun," but when you look up at the clock and it's 3 AM, and you have a big presentation the next day that is a problem.

               For the most part, much like many programs, admitting you have an issue is step one. I have a clear indicator and that is my desk. The more messy it is, the better the chance I need to pump the breaks.

               Pumping the Breaks

               Slowing down seems backward, but when you find yourself behind in tasks, etc and everything in your mind and body is saying "Push through" and you want to throw on your Superman or Wonder Woman outfit and start writing checks your body can cash. The result is you become more purposeful, focused, and you get more stuff done.

               What Do You Want To Be When You Grow Up?

               6:24

               Whatever the goal is, you need to know it. I would recommend writing it down (more tools later). Take some time to think about it. If you don't know where you want to go, how will you know when you get there? If you aim at nothing you will hit it every time.

               Setting Priorities

               The book First Things First by Steven Covey he talks about Important VS Urgent

               • Important activities have an outcome that leads to us achieving our goals, whether these are professional or personal.
               • Urgent activities demand immediate attention and are usually associated with achieving someone else's goals. They are often the ones we concentrate on and they demand attention because the consequences of not dealing with them are immediate.
               
               

               Something that is urgent and important is a crisis. It's pressing problems with deadlines. Something that is important but NOT urgent would be things such as exercise, relationship building, personal growth. If you ignore these important things, they later become important AND urgent.

               Some things that are urgent but NOT important might be interruptions, phone calls (some of them), some email, some meetings

               Some things that are not important and NOT urgent would be busy work, time wasters, some pleasant activities.

               How to Know When To Delegate?

               9:02

               In episode 159 of the Resourceful Designer, Mark had some great questions you can use to make this simple. First, you have to identify all the things you do in your podcast/life. He suggests using post-it notes or an index card, but you're going to need a place for two piles. Then take each task and answer the following questions

               1. Go from task to task and ask yourself, Does this bring me joy or Do I like doing this one particular task?
               2. Am I good at this particular thing?
               
               

               If you answered yes to BOTH questions, put it in pile number one. If you cannot respond yes to both questions, put it into pile number two. Separate your collection into these two piles.

               Pile Number 1: Things that I like doing, and I'm good at

               Look at the items in this pile and ask, If I continue doing this thing will it help my podcast grow? Will it help me achieve my goal?

               Start two new piles. One will have all the items that will move you forward, and the pile of things you are good at and you like doing are things you are not saying no to, but not now.

               Pile Number 2: Things that I don't like doing, or I'm not good at

               Look at the items in this pile and ask, If I continue doing this thing will it help my podcast grow? Will it help me achieve my goal?

               If the answer is yes, then these are the things you need to delegate.

               Capturing and Organizing Your Thoughts

               12:45

               Brilliant ideas come at the most inconvenient times. I get great ideas in the shower. You NEED to capture these and organize them in a way so you can use them later. Here are some tools:

               Evernote: I use this tool. It's free (there is a paid version at $7.99 a month). I have a folder called SOP Ideas. I have a folder called "Marketing Crap" that is filled with all those ebooks I get that I will read later. The thing I love about Evernote is I can use it on my phone, my tablet or computer and it all syncs together. They have a tool called "Web Clipper" that allows me to take a web page and save it in Evernote with a few clicks. They recently added a feature that makes it super easy to connect your gmail to your Evernote. See https://evernote.com/blog/introducing-evernote-gmail/

               OneNote: This is Microsoft's version of Evernote. It's not bad. It is also free. If you are paying for Microsoft Office you have it.. If you are a big Microsoft user (outlook, word, excel) you might play with this tool.

               Trello: Trello is another free (or paid) version that is much more visual as instead of folders you have cards (think index cards). Trello premium is $12.50 a month

               Common Features: Evernote, OneNote, and Trello all have the ability to have topics and subtopics. They all have the ability to share information (which is great for collaborating with co-hosts)

               Whatever tool you want to use is fine. The bottom line is you need a tool. I've got a course on organizing your information that spotlights these tools.

               Where Is Your Time Going?

               16:41

               Want to see how you spend your time?  Check out Rescue Time which helps you understand your daily habits so you can focus and be more productive.  Rescue Time is free. The Premium version is $9 a month and allows you to track your time off the computer as well.

               Another way to do this is to set your alarm on your phone to go off in an hour. When it goes off write down (maybe in Evernote?) what you were doing. I know when I did this the first time many years ago I was surprised how much time I spent watching reruns of TV shows I had already seen.

               My Favorite To Do List

               19:09

               While there are a number of Todo apps, my favorite is todoist. Much like Evernote, I can have Todoist on my phone, tablet or computer and they all sync together. Also like Evernote, I can take an email and turn it into a task.

               You can organize your task into projects. You can assign due dates and be sent reminders. There is even a reward system. You can set how many tasks you want to accomplish a day and earn points. This somewhat makes your to-do list a game. If you've been using tasks in Google, this will sync with that system. It's very powerful.

               The todist software is free and the premium is $3 a month.

               Why You're Getting Frustrated

               Studies show that every time you check email, a social feed, or respond to a notification, your mind requires 23 minutes of re-focus time to get back on task. People that multitask are actually  40% less productive.

               Finding Focus To Knock Off Your To Do List

               When it's time to record, here are some things you can do that might make things easier:

               1. Have a set time to record so your family knows not to interrupt.
               2. Put your phone on do not disturb and have it out of site.
               3. Have a distraction sheet. If...]]>Every podcaster has one thing in common: they all have 24 hours in the day. Today I'm going to share a ton of research and strategies to get your more productive. Last week I talked about five things that you think will grow your audience but don't. This is continuing on with that theme of determining what you want to do, and then getting it done. One of my favorite quotes from Abraham Lincoln is “Give me six hours to chop down a tree and I will spend the first four sharpening the axe.”

                  If you have no focus, it doesn't matter what microphone you have if you can't get it together.

                  My Own Personal Struggles

                  Growing up I was what some might call "A weird little boy." I remember driving my Mom nuts as I would be in the kitchen talking on the phone. We had a bunch of 16 oz coke glasses that I would fill up with water and tune and then play as I was talking on the phone. I always described myself as "Creative" but I'm sure if I was in elementary school today that would pump me with enough Ritalin to put a Rhino to sleep. As an adult, I tried going on some medication but the more focus I achieved was washed away by the energy that was sucked out of me. With this in mind when I get my creative juices flowing, I can be hyper-focused and lose all sense of time. To me I define that as "fun," but when you look up at the clock and it's 3 AM, and you have a big presentation the next day that is a problem.

                  For the most part, much like many programs, admitting you have an issue is step one. I have a clear indicator and that is my desk. The more messy it is, the better the chance I need to pump the breaks.

                  Pumping the Breaks

                  Slowing down seems backward, but when you find yourself behind in tasks, etc and everything in your mind and body is saying "Push through" and you want to throw on your Superman or Wonder Woman outfit and start writing checks your body can cash. The result is you become more purposeful, focused, and you get more stuff done.

                  What Do You Want To Be When You Grow Up?

                  6:24

                  Whatever the goal is, you need to know it. I would recommend writing it down (more tools later). Take some time to think about it. If you don't know where you want to go, how will you know when you get there? If you aim at nothing you will hit it every time.

                  Setting Priorities

                  The book First Things First by Steven Covey he talks about Important VS Urgent

                  • Important activities have an outcome that leads to us achieving our goals, whether these are professional or personal.
                  • Urgent activities demand immediate attention and are usually associated with achieving someone else's goals. They are often the ones we concentrate on and they demand attention because the consequences of not dealing with them are immediate.
                  
                  

                  Something that is urgent and important is a crisis. It's pressing problems with deadlines. Something that is important but NOT urgent would be things such as exercise, relationship building, personal growth. If you ignore these important things, they later become important AND urgent.

                  Some things that are urgent but NOT important might be interruptions, phone calls (some of them), some email, some meetings

                  Some things that are not important and NOT urgent would be busy work, time wasters, some pleasant activities.

                  How to Know When To Delegate?

                  9:02

                  In episode 159 of the Resourceful Designer, Mark had some great questions you can use to make this simple. First, you have to identify all the things you do in your podcast/life. He suggests using post-it notes or an index card, but you're going to need a place for two piles. Then take each task and answer the following questions

                  1. Go from task to task and ask yourself, Does this bring me joy or Do I like doing this one particular task?
                  2. Am I good at this particular thing?
                  
                  

                  If you answered yes to BOTH questions, put it in pile number one. If you cannot respond yes to both questions, put it into pile number two. Separate your collection into these two piles.

                  Pile Number 1: Things that I like doing, and I'm good at

                  Look at the items in this pile and ask, If I continue doing this thing will it help my podcast grow? Will it help me achieve my goal?

                  Start two new piles. One will have all the items that will move you forward, and the pile of things you are good at and you like doing are things you are not saying no to, but not now.

                  Pile Number 2: Things that I don't like doing, or I'm not good at

                  Look at the items in this pile and ask, If I continue doing this thing will it help my podcast grow? Will it help me achieve my goal?

                  If the answer is yes, then these are the things you need to delegate.

                  Capturing and Organizing Your Thoughts

                  12:45

                  Brilliant ideas come at the most inconvenient times. I get great ideas in the shower. You NEED to capture these and organize them in a way so you can use them later. Here are some tools:

                  Evernote: I use this tool. It's free (there is a paid version at $7.99 a month). I have a folder called SOP Ideas. I have a folder called "Marketing Crap" that is filled with all those ebooks I get that I will read later. The thing I love about Evernote is I can use it on my phone, my tablet or computer and it all syncs together. They have a tool called "Web Clipper" that allows me to take a web page and save it in Evernote with a few clicks. They recently added a feature that makes it super easy to connect your gmail to your Evernote. See https://evernote.com/blog/introducing-evernote-gmail/

                  OneNote: This is Microsoft's version of Evernote. It's not bad. It is also free. If you are paying for Microsoft Office you have it.. If you are a big Microsoft user (outlook, word, excel) you might play with this tool.

                  Trello: Trello is another free (or paid) version that is much more visual as instead of folders you have cards (think index cards). Trello premium is $12.50 a month

                  Common Features: Evernote, OneNote, and Trello all have the ability to have topics and subtopics. They all have the ability to share information (which is great for collaborating with co-hosts)

                  Whatever tool you want to use is fine. The bottom line is you need a tool. I've got a course on organizing your information that spotlights these tools.

                  Where Is Your Time Going?

                  16:41

                  Want to see how you spend your time?  Check out Rescue Time which helps you understand your daily habits so you can focus and be more productive.  Rescue Time is free. The Premium version is $9 a month and allows you to track your time off the computer as well.

                  Another way to do this is to set your alarm on your phone to go off in an hour. When it goes off write down (maybe in Evernote?) what you were doing. I know when I did this the first time many years ago I was surprised how much time I spent watching reruns of TV shows I had already seen.

                  My Favorite To Do List

                  19:09

                  While there are a number of Todo apps, my favorite is todoist. Much like Evernote, I can have Todoist on my phone, tablet or computer and they all sync together. Also like Evernote, I can take an email and turn it into a task.

                  You can organize your task into projects. You can assign due dates and be sent reminders. There is even a reward system. You can set how many tasks you want to accomplish a day and earn points. This somewhat makes your to-do list a game. If you've been using tasks in Google, this will sync with that system. It's very powerful.

                  The todist software is free and the premium is $3 a month.

                  Why You're Getting Frustrated

                  Studies show that every time you check email, a social feed, or respond to a notification, your mind requires 23 minutes of re-focus time to get back on task. People that multitask are actually  40% less productive.

                  Finding Focus To Knock Off Your To Do List

                  When it's time to record, here are some things you can do that might make things easier:

                  1. Have a set time to record so your family knows not to interrupt.
                  2. Put your phone on do not disturb and have it out of site.
                  3. Have a distraction sheet. If you're working on something, and a distraction pops in your head, write it down and get back to your task.
                  
                  You Can Stay Focused For 25 Minutes, Right?

                  25:32

                  Some times we need a boost. I've heard and tried the Pomodoro technique. Here it is in a nutshell

                  1. Pick a task you need to accomplish.
                  2. Set a timer for 25 minutes and start working
                  3. When the timer rings, take a 5-minute break
                  4. Repeat steps 1-3
                  5. Ever four cycles, take a 25-minute break.
                  
                  Handling Distractions
                  • Inform the other (distracting) party that you're working on something right now.
                  • Negotiate a time when you can get back to them about the distracting issue in a timely manner.
                  • Schedule that follow-up immediately.
                  
                  

                  Call back the other party when your pomodoro is complete and you're ready to tackle their issue.

                  If you find yourself thinking about something that just won't go away, have a sheet/note and write it down and get back to your task.

                  Why This Method is Working For Me

                  For me, it's only 25 minutes. It is not that whatever tangent I want to take is being put off forever, it's being put off for 25 minutes. By taking breaks, you keep yourself fresh. You avoid burnout. Studies show that people who work in distracting environments have more stress, a higher workload (cause you're not accomplishing as much), higher frustration, and it requires more effort. When you start to go down a rabbit hole, you can stop yourself and say, "I can do that in __ minutes."

                  No, I Can't Stay Focused For 25 Minutes

                  28:17

                  If you're having a hard time staying focused then I have some additional apps, that are really keeping on track.

                  PomoDone App

                  PomoDone is the easiest way to track your workflow using Pomodoro technique, on top of your current task management service. It ties in with just about every To Do List tool (Trello, Todoist, Evernote, Asana ) so you can track how much time you spent on a task. Once you realize how long something takes, you can better schedule it in the future. For example, I've put in 58 minutes on an article I'm working on for the Podcast Business Journal. At this point, I've got an hour and 20 minutes into this blog post (I haven't even got to press record yet).

                  By seeing how long you are spending on items, you can make much better decisions going forward.

                  Using the PomoDone Chrome extension, you can blacklist certain websites during the timer period. Once Timer is active (ticking), you will not be able to access the blocked websites. You can always turn this function on and off in the Extension's option, as well as configure the blacklist of the websites.

                  If you want to setup up times that differ from the25 standard time, you can do that ( I have times of 5, 25, 40).

                  Also if you're not using any other to do list tool, you can use this as your to-do list. The tool also works on iOs and Android.

                  As I almost exclusively use chrome, I use this app. Keep in mind if I want to jump on Firefox I can go to any site I want ( you can always turn off the blocking feature)

                  Tomato-Timer

                  https://tomato-timer.com/ is a free tool if you want to take this idea for a test spin (or you can just set two timers on your phone. One for 25 minutes and one for 5).

                  Freedom

                  33:08

                  Freedom.to is an app and website blocker for Mac, Windows, Android, and iOS. Start sessions on-the-fly or sche­dule your Freedom time in adv­ance. Plan out sess­ions that recur daily or weekly. With Freedom, you'll make produc­tivity a habit.

                  This tool is a little more "hardcore." It blocks websites on both Chrome and Firefox, as well as on your phone. If you want to go "Super Hard Core" there is an option to lock your session (meaning you can cheat).  You can test run Freedom for five session then prices start at $6.99/month

                  Get Your Brain In Tune

                  35:33

                  I had heard about brain.fm on a few podcasts. This is music that is designed to help you focus. For me (being a musician) I liked it. It was more or less musical noise that was just above really boring. The pricing starts at $6.95 a month

                  I didn't feel like another subscription so I checked out Spotify and they have a number of preset "focus" stations that more or less played the same thing.

                  Make It Easy On Yourself

                  In Adobe Audition you can make a template but I've always used the poor man's template. I would bring in my intro and outro music and save it with something like namofshow_blank. I then open that file and before I press record I rename the show to something like nameofshow_697. This has all my files in it and I don't have to look for them.

                  Listen faster when editing if possible. In Hindenburg Journalist, there is an option to listen faster as well as in Audacity. I spoke about this on Episode 327

                  One other thing to remember is more planning leads to less editing.

                  Podcast Rewind

                  42:15

                  I was on the Podcast Reporter (Live from the NAB show)

                  I was on the Launch Speed Podcast talking podcast Niches

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>fa2f0066702f435aa79225e9b340bd64Mon, 22 Apr 2019 04:00:00 -040047:00falsefull667667Five Things That WON'T Grow Your AudienceWe only have so many hours in a day, and today I'm starting a two-part series on being more productive. The first thing you need to identify is activities that take up your time and provide no benefits. Today I have five.
                  Asking For Subscriptions Before You Deliver Value

                  2:11

                  The podcast audience may see this as a commitment. In the same way that I have test driven every car I've ever purchased, I think people need more than two minutes of your show before we start begging them to subscribe. Next week I'll be talking about some new software tools to help you be more productive and all of them have a free trial. They want you to see the value before asking you to spend any money.

                  When you start off a show asking people to subscribe before they hear any content of value, you are more than likely wasting your time. Have you ever subscribed to a show because the host asked you to? Not me. I subscribe when I get really good content.

                  Sending People to the Haystack That is Apple Podcasts

                  6:15

                  As a support person for Libsyn.com ( get a free month using the coupon code sopfree ) I have people asking why their show doesn't come up in a search. Some of it is the fact that there are over (as I write this in April of 2019) 700,000 shows in Apple Podcasts. Another thing to keep in mind is that Apple appears to display somewhere between 100-300 results and if there already 300 golf podcasts, or real estate, your show may not appear for the term "Golf." In some cases, your show may not appear at all.

                  Example: The podcast "The Feed" by Libsyn doesn't show up when you type in the phrase "The feed" into Apple iTunes. The show does not appear. If you type Libsyn it does.

                  Most directories give you a link to your show on their platform. Instead of sending people to Apple (and now Spotify) send them to YOUR WEBSITE where instead of sifting through 700,000 podcasts they have one to choose from and the only choice is if they should

                  Asking for Reviews to “Help Us Be Found in Apple”

                  10:39 Reviews are social proof. That's it. They do not boost you in search results.

                  Obsessing Over Chart Position

                  11:05 One of the things that made me worry about chartable.com when it came out is it would lead to people obsessing over chart position. It did. Instead of taking time to make WOW content, you're trying to figure out why you dropped two positions in the Brazilian charts. Focus on your audience, make great content, and make it easy to share and subscribe. Then do that consistently and you will end up on the charts.

                  Upgrading Your Podcast Equipment

                  13:41 If it ain't broke don't fix it. If your audio sounds OK, and your audience doesn't have to keep grabbing the volume knob, chances are your audio is OK. While some podcasters obsess over boosting certain frequencies and talking about gear, for upgrading equipment to boost your audience would mean your audio was so bad that people tuned out. Most of us are not in that situation. Here are some examples of what can lead to really bad audio:

                  • Using the built-in microphone in your laptop
                  • Incorrectly using a blue yeti microphone (not a bad mic, it is overpriced, and without using properly can lead to really bad audio)
                  • Using one microphone to record multiple people.
                  • Audio that causes people to keep grabbing the volume knob.
                  
                  

                  Check out My Gear Page

                  Podcast Rewind

                  21:17 I appeared on Podlords with Jim Harold and My Perfect Podcast with Ryan Jackson

                  Because of My Podcast

                  23:59 Brand from Florida Focus podcast shares how he used a voicemail from his Mother into his podcast that has now been shared with family and friends

                  NAB Reflections

                  I attended NAB last week with the Libsyn.com team and podcasting has radio's attention. While I was there I picked up a Samson MBa38 boom stand. This is about half the price of a Heil PL2T and still less expensive than the Rode PSA1

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>We only have so many hours in a day, and today I'm starting a two-part series on being more productive. The first thing you need to identify is activities that take up your time and provide no benefits. Today I have five.
                  Asking For Subscriptions Before You Deliver Value

                  2:11

                  The podcast audience may see this as a commitment. In the same way that I have test driven every car I've ever purchased, I think people need more than two minutes of your show before we start begging them to subscribe. Next week I'll be talking about some new software tools to help you be more productive and all of them have a free trial. They want you to see the value before asking you to spend any money.

                  When you start off a show asking people to subscribe before they hear any content of value, you are more than likely wasting your time. Have you ever subscribed to a show because the host asked you to? Not me. I subscribe when I get really good content.

                  Sending People to the Haystack That is Apple Podcasts

                  6:15

                  As a support person for Libsyn.com ( get a free month using the coupon code sopfree ) I have people asking why their show doesn't come up in a search. Some of it is the fact that there are over (as I write this in April of 2019) 700,000 shows in Apple Podcasts. Another thing to keep in mind is that Apple appears to display somewhere between 100-300 results and if there already 300 golf podcasts, or real estate, your show may not appear for the term "Golf." In some cases, your show may not appear at all.

                  Example: The podcast "The Feed" by Libsyn doesn't show up when you type in the phrase "The feed" into Apple iTunes. The show does not appear. If you type Libsyn it does.

                  Most directories give you a link to your show on their platform. Instead of sending people to Apple (and now Spotify) send them to YOUR WEBSITE where instead of sifting through 700,000 podcasts they have one to choose from and the only choice is if they should

                  Asking for Reviews to “Help Us Be Found in Apple”

                  10:39 Reviews are social proof. That's it. They do not boost you in search results.

                  Obsessing Over Chart Position

                  11:05 One of the things that made me worry about chartable.com when it came out is it would lead to people obsessing over chart position. It did. Instead of taking time to make WOW content, you're trying to figure out why you dropped two positions in the Brazilian charts. Focus on your audience, make great content, and make it easy to share and subscribe. Then do that consistently and you will end up on the charts.

                  Upgrading Your Podcast Equipment

                  13:41 If it ain't broke don't fix it. If your audio sounds OK, and your audience doesn't have to keep grabbing the volume knob, chances are your audio is OK. While some podcasters obsess over boosting certain frequencies and talking about gear, for upgrading equipment to boost your audience would mean your audio was so bad that people tuned out. Most of us are not in that situation. Here are some examples of what can lead to really bad audio:

                  • Using the built-in microphone in your laptop
                  • Incorrectly using a blue yeti microphone (not a bad mic, it is overpriced, and without using properly can lead to really bad audio)
                  • Using one microphone to record multiple people.
                  • Audio that causes people to keep grabbing the volume knob.
                  
                  

                  Check out My Gear Page

                  Podcast Rewind

                  21:17 I appeared on Podlords with Jim Harold and My Perfect Podcast with Ryan Jackson

                  Because of My Podcast

                  23:59 Brand from Florida Focus podcast shares how he used a voicemail from his Mother into his podcast that has now been shared with family and friends

                  NAB Reflections

                  I attended NAB last week with the Libsyn.com team and podcasting has radio's attention. While I was there I picked up a Samson MBa38 boom stand. This is about half the price of a Heil PL2T and still less expensive than the Rode PSA1

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>56d40633d94641c187cda079d29d6d31Mon, 15 Apr 2019 04:00:00 -040033:16falsefull666666Saying More With Less - The Power of Editing Your PodcastSo many people fear they will sound stupid or unprofessional but this is not something you need to worry about as even a show that is recorded live can be edited before being sent to your audience. Today I share some examples of the theories I used to edit my show
                  Because of My Podcast: I'm Up For A Webby Award

                  1:49

                  Emily Prokop from The Story Behind podcast has been on the show before as she got a book deal "Because of her podcast" and how she has been nominated for a Webby award. PLEASE VOTE HERE

                  Editing Your Podcast Will Make it Better

                  3:33

                  Mount Rushmore was once a mountain built of rock. Then someone editing it, and it is now a national memorial. There are movie editors, newspaper editors, book editors, etc. For me, I believe every podcast can benefit from editing. Today I share some examples and theories behind my editing decisions.

                  Everything About Editing is An Opinion

                  Some people do no editing, and some people will "over edit." Today I talk about my philosophies which are:

                  Always remove low hanging fruit (and Um, or crutch word that isn't near any other words)

                  ALWAYS Listen through the ears of your audience and ask if whatever you are listening to delivers value.

                  Be careful about the curse of knowledge as it can leave your audience in the dark

                  Most of my editing is me shaping my rambling questions into something a bit more focused

                  In some cases, if a point is made late in the episode, you don't need it twice.

                  If I have to zoom in to a very, very, very magnified level to edit the audio ( I call this "busting out a scalpel) I let it go.

                  The goal of an interview is to make your guest sound good.

                  In some cases, a backstory is given that is not needed.

                  A pregnant pause can add additional emphasis to the communication

                  Nobody wants to know how the sausage was made

                  Editing Your Podcast Intro To Give You Clarity and Authority

                  22:30

                  Morgan Cole is a client of mine who does the Brightline Podcast. He gave me permission to let you listen to a call we did where we shaped his intro. You will hear where we shaved off quite of his into while still explaining what the show is about and who Morgan is (and why you should listen)

                  Check out his show at https://brightlinepodcast.com/

                  Are you duplicating any content?

                  Is your purpose and description clear (and jargon-free)

                  You don't have to cram all of your details in the intro.

                  Run Everything Through Your Target Audience

                  30:12

                  My church wanted to have a slogan "where the word is important." I explain how I felt this didn't connect.

                  How Long Does it Take to Edit an Hour Long Episode?

                  31:30

                  I asked the Podcast Editors Club how long it would take to "De-Um" hour-long episodes. While it obviously depends based on how much a person um, says, um, and ya know, um, is an um machine. The quickest ranged from 90 minutes to three or four hours.

                  Mentioned on the Show

                  Big Podcast Book

                  Big Podcast Website

                  Red Podcast

                  Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show 

                  Podcast Rodeo Show  (I can't believe what I heard episode)

                  Podcast Editors Club

                  She Podcast Kickstarter

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>So many people fear they will sound stupid or unprofessional but this is not something you need to worry about as even a show that is recorded live can be edited before being sent to your audience. Today I share some examples of the theories I used to edit my show
                  Because of My Podcast: I'm Up For A Webby Award

                  1:49

                  Emily Prokop from The Story Behind podcast has been on the show before as she got a book deal "Because of her podcast" and how she has been nominated for a Webby award. PLEASE VOTE HERE

                  Editing Your Podcast Will Make it Better

                  3:33

                  Mount Rushmore was once a mountain built of rock. Then someone editing it, and it is now a national memorial. There are movie editors, newspaper editors, book editors, etc. For me, I believe every podcast can benefit from editing. Today I share some examples and theories behind my editing decisions.

                  Everything About Editing is An Opinion

                  Some people do no editing, and some people will "over edit." Today I talk about my philosophies which are:

                  Always remove low hanging fruit (and Um, or crutch word that isn't near any other words)

                  ALWAYS Listen through the ears of your audience and ask if whatever you are listening to delivers value.

                  Be careful about the curse of knowledge as it can leave your audience in the dark

                  Most of my editing is me shaping my rambling questions into something a bit more focused

                  In some cases, if a point is made late in the episode, you don't need it twice.

                  If I have to zoom in to a very, very, very magnified level to edit the audio ( I call this "busting out a scalpel) I let it go.

                  The goal of an interview is to make your guest sound good.

                  In some cases, a backstory is given that is not needed.

                  A pregnant pause can add additional emphasis to the communication

                  Nobody wants to know how the sausage was made

                  Editing Your Podcast Intro To Give You Clarity and Authority

                  22:30

                  Morgan Cole is a client of mine who does the Brightline Podcast. He gave me permission to let you listen to a call we did where we shaped his intro. You will hear where we shaved off quite of his into while still explaining what the show is about and who Morgan is (and why you should listen)

                  Check out his show at https://brightlinepodcast.com/

                  Are you duplicating any content?

                  Is your purpose and description clear (and jargon-free)

                  You don't have to cram all of your details in the intro.

                  Run Everything Through Your Target Audience

                  30:12

                  My church wanted to have a slogan "where the word is important." I explain how I felt this didn't connect.

                  How Long Does it Take to Edit an Hour Long Episode?

                  31:30

                  I asked the Podcast Editors Club how long it would take to "De-Um" hour-long episodes. While it obviously depends based on how much a person um, says, um, and ya know, um, is an um machine. The quickest ranged from 90 minutes to three or four hours.

                  Mentioned on the Show

                  Big Podcast Book

                  Big Podcast Website

                  Red Podcast

                  Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show 

                  Podcast Rodeo Show  (I can't believe what I heard episode)

                  Podcast Editors Club

                  She Podcast Kickstarter

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>0cfa1c57ebf14ee5b5112d3cb4e873c4Mon, 08 Apr 2019 04:00:00 -040035:12falsefull665665Big Podcast Author David Hooper: Listening, Talking, Planning, and Adjusting David Hooper has a background in the music and entertainment business, the music business, and has spent the last four years writing the Big Podcast – Grow Your Podcast Audience, Build Listener Loyalty, and Get Everybody Talking About Your Show. It's one of the best books I've read on podcasting (and I'm only about 50% of the way through the book).

                  David and I go back to 2006 when I was doing the Musicians Cyber Cooler podcast (later renamed the Marketing Musician) and he was doing Music Business Radio (a radio show syndicated across the nation that David turned into a podcast). I've been listening to updates about his book on his marketing podcast RED Podcast, as well as his Big Podcast show. Today it was great to talk to him now that the book is published.

                  SPONSOR: NAB SHOW

                  1:27

                  Have a passion for podcasting? Attend the NAB (National Association of Broadcasters) Show April 8-11, 2019 to meet, collaborate and strategize with the world's most renowned storytellers. Learn how to grow audiences and revenue, create captivating content and meet with those who can take your vision to new heights. Register today at www.nabshow.com with code VEGAS for a Free Exhibits Pass. Your story will never be the same.

                  A Talk With David Hooper Author of the Book Big Podcast

                  2:50 A fun conversation

                  4:55 Has Dave always been this curious? (Dave and David went to a very special location in Florida at Podfest)

                  8:13 The politics of getting guests

                  11:25 The power of the pre-interview

                  15:54 How do you get guests when you are new

                  17:22 How do you handle the "Dance in your head" when you are doing an interview

                  20:45 Dave recommends launching with 25 episodes, and I disagree

                  26:20 Are podcasters open to adjusting their show?

                  32:56 How long should my podcast be?

                  36:09 What was the thinking behind the RED Podcast? It's just so different...

                  39:07 Does he get flack for being so non-judgemental, or occasionally "Pushing the envelope."

                  41:03 Jeff Christy was a horrible TOP 40 DJ (hear his aircheck)

                  43:35 Media Training that Dave does with some television shows.

                  45:33 What other media training does Dave do? How to avoid the puke voice

                  50:00 The hardest and easiest parts of the book to write

                  52:00 The incestuous nature of podcasting

                  53:50 Did Dave have any imposter syndrome?

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Building a Better Dave Podcast

                  Big Podcast

                  Music Business Radio

                  28 Day Podcast Jumpstart

                  Podcast Interviewing School

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>David Hooper has a background in the music and entertainment business, the music business, and has spent the last four years writing the Big Podcast – Grow Your Podcast Audience, Build Listener Loyalty, and Get Everybody Talking About Your Show. It's one of the best books I've read on podcasting (and I'm only about 50% of the way through the book).

                  David and I go back to 2006 when I was doing the Musicians Cyber Cooler podcast (later renamed the Marketing Musician) and he was doing Music Business Radio (a radio show syndicated across the nation that David turned into a podcast). I've been listening to updates about his book on his marketing podcast RED Podcast, as well as his Big Podcast show. Today it was great to talk to him now that the book is published.

                  SPONSOR: NAB SHOW

                  1:27

                  Have a passion for podcasting? Attend the NAB (National Association of Broadcasters) Show April 8-11, 2019 to meet, collaborate and strategize with the world's most renowned storytellers. Learn how to grow audiences and revenue, create captivating content and meet with those who can take your vision to new heights. Register today at www.nabshow.com with code VEGAS for a Free Exhibits Pass. Your story will never be the same.

                  A Talk With David Hooper Author of the Book Big Podcast

                  2:50 A fun conversation

                  4:55 Has Dave always been this curious? (Dave and David went to a very special location in Florida at Podfest)

                  8:13 The politics of getting guests

                  11:25 The power of the pre-interview

                  15:54 How do you get guests when you are new

                  17:22 How do you handle the "Dance in your head" when you are doing an interview

                  20:45 Dave recommends launching with 25 episodes, and I disagree

                  26:20 Are podcasters open to adjusting their show?

                  32:56 How long should my podcast be?

                  36:09 What was the thinking behind the RED Podcast? It's just so different...

                  39:07 Does he get flack for being so non-judgemental, or occasionally "Pushing the envelope."

                  41:03 Jeff Christy was a horrible TOP 40 DJ (hear his aircheck)

                  43:35 Media Training that Dave does with some television shows.

                  45:33 What other media training does Dave do? How to avoid the puke voice

                  50:00 The hardest and easiest parts of the book to write

                  52:00 The incestuous nature of podcasting

                  53:50 Did Dave have any imposter syndrome?

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Building a Better Dave Podcast

                  Big Podcast

                  Music Business Radio

                  28 Day Podcast Jumpstart

                  Podcast Interviewing School

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>ebcf040d02ca473fbf2be2392e0714c6Mon, 01 Apr 2019 04:00:00 -040058:29falsefull664664The Top Podcasting Crutch Words and How To Stop Saying ThemCrutch words are we words we use when our brain can't come up with something to say. They are used to fill up silence that some feel is awkward. We all have them, and they are only an issue when they are used so much that it becomes distracting/annoying. Please realize that never having a crutch word may be impossible. Often we don't even hear them. So we have to start with identifying that we have a crutch word. When I asked you about your crutch words, here are the ones you are trying to avoid:

                  Craig from Ingles Podcast is "So" and has lots of examples of what to avoid.

                  Brad from The Cinema Guys podcast is "Like" as well as "So Anway..."

                  Brenda from the My Tech Toolbelt Podcast "Is a Big Fan of..." as well as "Right"

                  Darwin Dave from the Dealing with My Grief podcast "So"

                  Tim From the He Said She Said Movie Reviews Podcast

                  Arnie at the Football History Dude Podcast says "Dude..."

                  Nina from Farm Food Health has lots of ums...

                  Mark from the Resourceful Designer and Podcast Branding had a listener let him know he was saying Basically a ton.

                  Mel From Beer with an Engineer has lots of ums, and so.... but turned it into a drinking game.

                  Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk and Podcast Help Desk News crutch words is "Anyway...." and he's just been pausing instead.

                  Stephanie from the Expat Rewind has "soooo many..."

                  Lee from This is Rammy finds himself saying "Obviously"

                  Win from Ask Win finds herself saying "Like"

                  Kim Krajci from Toastmasters 101 has some tips on how to avoid crutch words.

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too.

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love!   It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?)   Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video How To Get Rid of Crutch Words
                  1. Identify them
                  2. Monitor your use of them
                  3. Practice NOT Using them. This may include getting use to silence (that you can edit out)
                  4. Try to figure out what is going on when you use it. Try to determine why you chose to use that word at that time.
                  
                  Next Month's Question:

                  Are you paying for any part of your podcast process? If so how much, and on what? (not so much who you are using).

                  I need your answers by 4/27/19 see my contact page for more information (you can upload pre-recorded files)

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Alitu web-based podcast Creator

                  You Wanna Do What Podcast "You Can't Read the Label from the Inside of the Bottle."

                  Where I Will Be

                  April 6-11 National Association of Broadcasters Las Vegas

                  June 8th Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah

                  August 13-16 Podcast Movement  Orlando Florida

                  September 8-10 Military Influencer Conference Washington DC

                  October 17 – 18 DOYO Live Youngstown Ohio.

                  Other Events You Might Want to Check Out

                  She Podcasts Live: The Women's Podcasting Experience

                  Podcast MidAtlantic September 6-7

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>Crutch words are we words we use when our brain can't come up with something to say. They are used to fill up silence that some feel is awkward. We all have them, and they are only an issue when they are used so much that it becomes distracting/annoying. Please realize that never having a crutch word may be impossible. Often we don't even hear them. So we have to start with identifying that we have a crutch word. When I asked you about your crutch words, here are the ones you are trying to avoid:

                  Craig from Ingles Podcast is "So" and has lots of examples of what to avoid.

                  Brad from The Cinema Guys podcast is "Like" as well as "So Anway..."

                  Brenda from the My Tech Toolbelt Podcast "Is a Big Fan of..." as well as "Right"

                  Darwin Dave from the Dealing with My Grief podcast "So"

                  Tim From the He Said She Said Movie Reviews Podcast

                  Arnie at the Football History Dude Podcast says "Dude..."

                  Nina from Farm Food Health has lots of ums...

                  Mark from the Resourceful Designer and Podcast Branding had a listener let him know he was saying Basically a ton.

                  Mel From Beer with an Engineer has lots of ums, and so.... but turned it into a drinking game.

                  Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk and Podcast Help Desk News crutch words is "Anyway...." and he's just been pausing instead.

                  Stephanie from the Expat Rewind has "soooo many..."

                  Lee from This is Rammy finds himself saying "Obviously"

                  Win from Ask Win finds herself saying "Like"

                  Kim Krajci from Toastmasters 101 has some tips on how to avoid crutch words.

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too.

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love!   It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?)   Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video How To Get Rid of Crutch Words
                  1. Identify them
                  2. Monitor your use of them
                  3. Practice NOT Using them. This may include getting use to silence (that you can edit out)
                  4. Try to figure out what is going on when you use it. Try to determine why you chose to use that word at that time.
                  
                  Next Month's Question:

                  Are you paying for any part of your podcast process? If so how much, and on what? (not so much who you are using).

                  I need your answers by 4/27/19 see my contact page for more information (you can upload pre-recorded files)

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Alitu web-based podcast Creator

                  You Wanna Do What Podcast "You Can't Read the Label from the Inside of the Bottle."

                  Where I Will Be

                  April 6-11 National Association of Broadcasters Las Vegas

                  June 8th Utah Podcast Summit Sandy, Utah

                  August 13-16 Podcast Movement  Orlando Florida

                  September 8-10 Military Influencer Conference Washington DC

                  October 17 – 18 DOYO Live Youngstown Ohio.

                  Other Events You Might Want to Check Out

                  She Podcasts Live: The Women's Podcasting Experience

                  Podcast MidAtlantic September 6-7

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>c4fb734e57f248209a5be47659bab5b6Mon, 25 Mar 2019 04:00:00 -040050:50falsefull663663What Does it Feel Like to Be a Podcaster?I got an email from someone struggling to start their podcast, "The biggest issue I’m dealing with is psychological: the show is not coming together in the format that I really wanted—and at this point there seems to be nothing I can do about that— but that, combined with fear, uncertainty, and doubt, and the inevitable self-comparisons to what others are doing as well as my own personal expectations has quite frankly got me a little bit paralyzed. It’s like I’m on the firing line, I’m locked and loaded and I’ve got a good site picture, but I just can’t get myself to pull the trigger because I’m afraid of the kickback." 

                  I've mentioned in the past how to Overcoming Imposter Syndrome and the story of Monica Rivera, and today I want to talk about how it feels to podcast.

                  What Does it Feel Like to be a Podcaster?

                  Excited By the possibilities

                  Frustrated When computers decide to be, well, computers.

                  Smarter When you figure things out

                  Nervous As you are learning new things, and getting outside of your comfort zone.

                  Confident When you publish your first episode

                  Frightened When you realize everyone can hear your show.

                  Humbled / Shocked When we inspire someone or affect someone.

                  Normal When you find out you’re not the only one who thinks this way.

                  Safe Because you are surrounded by people similar to you

                  Amazed At the opportunities to that come your way, the people you get to speak

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Overcoming Imposter Syndrome Episode

                  Monica Rivera The Nudge You Need

                  Podcasting in America

                  The latest edition the Edison Research Infinite Dial was published. Here are some insights:

                  70%  are familiar with the word podcasting ( 197 Million people)

                  51% have listened to at least one podcast ( a 7% jump)

                  32% listen on a monthly basis (up from 26%)

                  22% listen on a weekly basis (up from 17%)

                  17 million more people are monthly listeners than last year.

                  14 million more podcast are listening

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>I got an email from someone struggling to start their podcast, "The biggest issue I’m dealing with is psychological: the show is not coming together in the format that I really wanted—and at this point there seems to be nothing I can do about that— but that, combined with fear, uncertainty, and doubt, and the inevitable self-comparisons to what others are doing as well as my own personal expectations has quite frankly got me a little bit paralyzed. It’s like I’m on the firing line, I’m locked and loaded and I’ve got a good site picture, but I just can’t get myself to pull the trigger because I’m afraid of the kickback." 

                  I've mentioned in the past how to Overcoming Imposter Syndrome and the story of Monica Rivera, and today I want to talk about how it feels to podcast.

                  What Does it Feel Like to be a Podcaster?

                  Excited By the possibilities

                  Frustrated When computers decide to be, well, computers.

                  Smarter When you figure things out

                  Nervous As you are learning new things, and getting outside of your comfort zone.

                  Confident When you publish your first episode

                  Frightened When you realize everyone can hear your show.

                  Humbled / Shocked When we inspire someone or affect someone.

                  Normal When you find out you’re not the only one who thinks this way.

                  Safe Because you are surrounded by people similar to you

                  Amazed At the opportunities to that come your way, the people you get to speak

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Overcoming Imposter Syndrome Episode

                  Monica Rivera The Nudge You Need

                  Podcasting in America

                  The latest edition the Edison Research Infinite Dial was published. Here are some insights:

                  70%  are familiar with the word podcasting ( 197 Million people)

                  51% have listened to at least one podcast ( a 7% jump)

                  32% listen on a monthly basis (up from 26%)

                  22% listen on a weekly basis (up from 17%)

                  17 million more people are monthly listeners than last year.

                  14 million more podcast are listening

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>7b1d1cfffb8045018a1345e426ff34e7Mon, 18 Mar 2019 04:00:00 -040031:45falsefull662662My Weekend with Procasters: Start with the StoryI attended the On Air Festival in NYC in New York City where what some might describe as "Procasters" were in attendance. When I went to talk to people instead of finding people who spoke into microphones I found:
                  • Producers
                  • Editors
                  • Writers
                  
                  

                  and I was amazed to find that:

                  • Some episodes of Radiolab take up to two years for ONE episode
                  • Missing Richards Simmons took one year to produce
                  • You can create an entire season of a podcast using 5% of the budget of a TV pilot.
                  • Advertisers want more stats even though podcasting is providing more data than they've ever received.
                  
                  Start With the Story

                  Dan from Sporkful had a great talk and explained how it took him nine years to make his podcast his full-time job.

                  Kristen Meinzer from By the Book podcast (which reviews self-help books) explained how she took a book review and worked a story into it.

                  Special thanks to Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What Podcast for being my tour guide

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too.

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love!   It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?)   Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video   Mp3 Chapter Marks

                  I mentioned how I started adding chapter marks in the mp3 file, and I wasn't sure if any apps even used these chapters. It turns out there are more software titles that recognize these than I originally thought Overcast used them (and not much else). It turns out that MP3 chapters can be displayed with Instacast, Overcast, Downcast, Podcat, Pocket Casts and iCatcher!.

                  On Android you can use Podcast Addict, which supports chapters in all file formats (MP3, M4A/MP4, Opus, Ogg, etc.), uPod to display chapter marks with URLs and images in MP3 and MP4 files, the open source AntennaPod supports chapter titles with URLs in MP3, Opus and Ogg Vorbis files and Pocket Casts supports MP3 chapters. Apple Has Too Much Power?

                  With Apple threatening (and then rescinding) to pull people from Apple podcasts some people were really upset and stated we should take steps to remove Apple of it's power.

                  I've been around long enough to remember podcasting before Apple added podcasts to iTunes, and that gave podcasting a boost in the arm. When they added the podcast app to be native to their operating system. Yahoo, Microsoft, Odeo, Google (multiple times) have created and deleted a podcast directory.

                  With Spotify spending a TON of money, I say if you want to "topple" Apple I have a two-word plan: STEP UP. Don't create software that doesn't have half the power of the current leading titles step up and provide all the current features AND THEN SOME. Create something that makes it easier for the listener (Which is what Apple did).

                  For those that think Apple has too much power, feel free to remove your show from their directory if you hate it so much. Apple is giving best practices on how to get the most out of their software and they are complaining. Back in 2012 some consultants came up with a "file for download only" strategy that was REALLY STUPID in 2012 (and just Hideous in today's terms) and Rob Walch from LIBSYN said, "This is a bad way to use LIBSYN," and some people didn't listen. Those are the people I am helping today and they say, "Wow, I didn't realize I was missing so much syndication...."

                  Apple is giving us suggestions on how to use their software, and some people are going to listen, and some people are not.

                  Question of the Month

                  What is your crutch word, and what did you do to get rid of it? Contact me and let me know (Preferably in audio format)

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>I attended the On Air Festival in NYC in New York City where what some might describe as "Procasters" were in attendance. When I went to talk to people instead of finding people who spoke into microphones I found:
                  • Producers
                  • Editors
                  • Writers
                  
                  

                  and I was amazed to find that:

                  • Some episodes of Radiolab take up to two years for ONE episode
                  • Missing Richards Simmons took one year to produce
                  • You can create an entire season of a podcast using 5% of the budget of a TV pilot.
                  • Advertisers want more stats even though podcasting is providing more data than they've ever received.
                  
                  Start With the Story

                  Dan from Sporkful had a great talk and explained how it took him nine years to make his podcast his full-time job.

                  Kristen Meinzer from By the Book podcast (which reviews self-help books) explained how she took a book review and worked a story into it.

                  Special thanks to Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What Podcast for being my tour guide

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too.

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best – talking about something you love!   It can take an interview where each person records their side of the conversation, and it will combine them together (how cool is that?)   Check it out at www.alitu.com check out this video   Mp3 Chapter Marks

                  I mentioned how I started adding chapter marks in the mp3 file, and I wasn't sure if any apps even used these chapters. It turns out there are more software titles that recognize these than I originally thought Overcast used them (and not much else). It turns out that MP3 chapters can be displayed with Instacast, Overcast, Downcast, Podcat, Pocket Casts and iCatcher!.

                  On Android you can use Podcast Addict, which supports chapters in all file formats (MP3, M4A/MP4, Opus, Ogg, etc.), uPod to display chapter marks with URLs and images in MP3 and MP4 files, the open source AntennaPod supports chapter titles with URLs in MP3, Opus and Ogg Vorbis files and Pocket Casts supports MP3 chapters. Apple Has Too Much Power?

                  With Apple threatening (and then rescinding) to pull people from Apple podcasts some people were really upset and stated we should take steps to remove Apple of it's power.

                  I've been around long enough to remember podcasting before Apple added podcasts to iTunes, and that gave podcasting a boost in the arm. When they added the podcast app to be native to their operating system. Yahoo, Microsoft, Odeo, Google (multiple times) have created and deleted a podcast directory.

                  With Spotify spending a TON of money, I say if you want to "topple" Apple I have a two-word plan: STEP UP. Don't create software that doesn't have half the power of the current leading titles step up and provide all the current features AND THEN SOME. Create something that makes it easier for the listener (Which is what Apple did).

                  For those that think Apple has too much power, feel free to remove your show from their directory if you hate it so much. Apple is giving best practices on how to get the most out of their software and they are complaining. Back in 2012 some consultants came up with a "file for download only" strategy that was REALLY STUPID in 2012 (and just Hideous in today's terms) and Rob Walch from LIBSYN said, "This is a bad way to use LIBSYN," and some people didn't listen. Those are the people I am helping today and they say, "Wow, I didn't realize I was missing so much syndication...."

                  Apple is giving us suggestions on how to use their software, and some people are going to listen, and some people are not.

                  Question of the Month

                  What is your crutch word, and what did you do to get rid of it? Contact me and let me know (Preferably in audio format)

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>82bf8b6ffd544605aba118972b8e8c9eMon, 11 Mar 2019 04:00:00 -040042:19falsefull661661Podcaster Burnout: Sources, Symptoms, SolutionsI was on the Podcasters roundtable with Ray, Bandrew talking burnout. We talk about
                  • The Signs of Burnout
                  • The Sources of Burnout
                  • Solutions to Burnout
                  
                  

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too. 

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best - talking about something you love!    Check it out at www.alitu.com    Mentioned in this Episode 660   Video of A Star is Born being filmed   Bandrew's YouTube Channel   Ray's Podcasters Studio Podcast   Podcasters Roundtable Podcast   Bandrew Says Podcast]]>I was on the Podcasters roundtable with Ray, Bandrew talking burnout. We talk about
                  • The Signs of Burnout
                  • The Sources of Burnout
                  • Solutions to Burnout
                  
                  

                  SPONSOR: Alitu Web Based Podcast Maker

                  It's a web app, where people can log in on their web browser and then use it to edit and produce their podcast episodes. Mobile app coming soon too. 

                  Podcasters record their show as normal, then upload their recordings to Alitu. Alitu then processes, levels, converts them all, pieces the clips together, adds your theme music automatically, and publishes the episode, direct to your podcast host. If you need to edit out any mistakes, then you can use Alitu's custom podcast editing tool to do just that, before creating your finished episode.   The idea behind Alitu is to make Podcasting and quick and simple as possible, removing a bunch of the tech barriers and to let you concentrate on the bit you do best - talking about something you love!    Check it out at www.alitu.com    Mentioned in this Episode 660   Video of A Star is Born being filmed   Bandrew's YouTube Channel   Ray's Podcasters Studio Podcast   Podcasters Roundtable Podcast   Bandrew Says Podcast]]>99f9f1789210456c8e2f89f4eab08e55Mon, 04 Mar 2019 05:00:00 -040049:30falsefull660660Your TOP Podcast PeevesPodcast Pet Peeves 2019 06:13 A peeve is defined as "a source of annoyance or irritation." Today we are talking Podcasting Pet peeves, but not just pet peeves but your TOP pet peeves. When you listen to a podcast and you hear this you reach for the unsubscribe button.

                  Contributors:

                  Stephanie - Ex Pat Rewind at stephfuccio.weebly.com

                  Jonathan - Weekly Awesome

                  Scott McCarthy - Moving Forward Leadership

                  Bill from Youth with a Mission

                  Trish - Honest Nurse Podcast

                  Scott - What Was That Like?

                  Issa Fears and Desires

                  Brian - Conspiracy Theoryology

                  Emmanuel Laroche - Flavors Unknown

                  Anna Seawalt - Authentic Parenting Podcast

                  Marc - Resourceful Designer

                  Justin - Optimal Living Daily

                  Laura Reviews and Randomness

                  Matt - The Author Inside You

                  Scott – Code 3 Podcast

                  Moxie – Your Brain On Facts

                  Brian - Engaging Missions

                  Ryan - My Perfect Podcast

                  Win Charles - Ask Win

                  C.L. - Plantrama

                  Your Podcast Consultant - NEW SHOW 2:00

                  I launched a new show in January for those who want to learn about podcasting in bite-sized chunks. It's called "Your Podcast Consultant" and you can find it at www.podcastconsultant.com you can subscribe to the show in Apple or Google, Spotify

                  Episodes include:

                  Why start a podcast

                  How long should my podcast be?

                  How to overcome your fear of technology

                  Starter Podcast Microphones

                  How do I pick my subject?

                  9 Strategies to get on other podcasts

                  Update on Anchor Advertisers 43:24

                  In the past when I created three test shows on Anchor, the only sponsor I was offered was Anchor (so what was described as a way for Anchor to make money, seemed to be yet another way for Anchor to lose more money). I mentioned this in an article and video I created.  When I logged into my Anchor Sucks (IMHO) show, I was surprised to see that Squarespace and the Black Tux wanted to sponsor a show that only had 70 downloads. Black Tux is .02 per downloads. Squarespace is .0175 per download and Anchor is .01 per download. If I included all three (which would mean a minute of 90 seconds of ads in my show) I would make almost .05 per download. Assuming an audience would sit through so many commercials. A show with 150 downloads would make $7.13 per episode.

                  Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>Podcast Pet Peeves 2019 06:13 A peeve is defined as "a source of annoyance or irritation." Today we are talking Podcasting Pet peeves, but not just pet peeves but your TOP pet peeves. When you listen to a podcast and you hear this you reach for the unsubscribe button.

                  Contributors:

                  Stephanie - Ex Pat Rewind at stephfuccio.weebly.com

                  Jonathan - Weekly Awesome

                  Scott McCarthy - Moving Forward Leadership

                  Bill from Youth with a Mission

                  Trish - Honest Nurse Podcast

                  Scott - What Was That Like?

                  Issa Fears and Desires

                  Brian - Conspiracy Theoryology

                  Emmanuel Laroche - Flavors Unknown

                  Anna Seawalt - Authentic Parenting Podcast

                  Marc - Resourceful Designer

                  Justin - Optimal Living Daily

                  Laura Reviews and Randomness

                  Matt - The Author Inside You

                  Scott – Code 3 Podcast

                  Moxie – Your Brain On Facts

                  Brian - Engaging Missions

                  Ryan - My Perfect Podcast

                  Win Charles - Ask Win

                  C.L. - Plantrama

                  Your Podcast Consultant - NEW SHOW 2:00

                  I launched a new show in January for those who want to learn about podcasting in bite-sized chunks. It's called "Your Podcast Consultant" and you can find it at www.podcastconsultant.com you can subscribe to the show in Apple or Google, Spotify

                  Episodes include:

                  Why start a podcast

                  How long should my podcast be?

                  How to overcome your fear of technology

                  Starter Podcast Microphones

                  How do I pick my subject?

                  9 Strategies to get on other podcasts

                  Update on Anchor Advertisers 43:24

                  In the past when I created three test shows on Anchor, the only sponsor I was offered was Anchor (so what was described as a way for Anchor to make money, seemed to be yet another way for Anchor to lose more money). I mentioned this in an article and video I created.  When I logged into my Anchor Sucks (IMHO) show, I was surprised to see that Squarespace and the Black Tux wanted to sponsor a show that only had 70 downloads. Black Tux is .02 per downloads. Squarespace is .0175 per download and Anchor is .01 per download. If I included all three (which would mean a minute of 90 seconds of ads in my show) I would make almost .05 per download. Assuming an audience would sit through so many commercials. A show with 150 downloads would make $7.13 per episode.

                  Work With Me Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>e6fcb38781664e70abc9e0c7e15318b4Mon, 25 Feb 2019 17:00:00 -040047:24falsefull659659Finding Love in Podcasting - Being Found By GoogleAs valentines was this week so we have a special edition of "Because of My Podcast," and speaking of finding things, today we talk about some tools to help you be found in Google.
                  Because of My Podcast We Found Love:

                  John Bukenas from Audio Editing Solutions is dating Samantha from I Shake My Head With Lisa and Sam

                  Chris and Krissie from I Am Salt Lake share their story of dating, marriage, and BABIES!

                  Jeremy from Podcast We Listen To and Dina Marie from the Twisted Philly podcast

                  Podcast Rewind: Podcasts We Listen To

                  I appeared on the Podcast We Listen To podcast talking about my show and the early days of podcasting. This podcast also has a great Facebook group filled with podcast listeners, but it's NOT A PLACE TO PROMOTE YOUR SHOW (this group does that).

                  I Was Wrong About M4a Files

                  13:57

                  I published an article on the Podcasting Busines Journal website and mentioned how mp3 files are more reliable then m4a when it comes to pressing play. In the past, I've seen m4a files just spin and spin and not play in Apple Podcasts. When I went back to see if this is still true, it's not.

                  Free SEO Tools To Help You Be Found in Google

                  18:11

                  As the search in the podcasts app chokes on the huge amount of shows coming into the podcasting space, there are times when it seems you just can't be found. So if you've done all there is to do, another strategy is to make sure you can be found in this other tool that helps people be found called Google.

                  I've taken SEO For Podcasting by Daniel J Lewis

                  SEO Courses from Yoast

                  Podcast SEO Marketing from Ploymash (Juergen Berkessel )

                  Tools I've Added and Started Using

                  Monster Insights Wordpress Plugin that allows you to see Google Analytics in Wordpress.

                  Neil Patel's Ubersuggest

                  Domain Authority Checker

                  Another great suite of tools is Mongools SEO Suite

                  Question of the Month: What is your TOP Pet Peeve?

                  You can only pick one. Please send them in by 2/22/19

                  Alexacast For Sale

                  31:26

                  I've come to the conclusion that I can't continue (or in this case bring back) the Alexacast. This is a show about the Amazon world, and especially what is happening with Alexa. If you'd like to take this show over, please contact me. You'll need to pay for your media hosting and web hosting. I prefer you host it at www.coolerwebsites.com 

                   

                  Podcasting For Fun

                  34:00 Just a reminder you can podcast for fun. You do NOT have to make money with a podcast.

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>As valentines was this week so we have a special edition of "Because of My Podcast," and speaking of finding things, today we talk about some tools to help you be found in Google.
                  Because of My Podcast We Found Love:

                  John Bukenas from Audio Editing Solutions is dating Samantha from I Shake My Head With Lisa and Sam

                  Chris and Krissie from I Am Salt Lake share their story of dating, marriage, and BABIES!

                  Jeremy from Podcast We Listen To and Dina Marie from the Twisted Philly podcast

                  Podcast Rewind: Podcasts We Listen To

                  I appeared on the Podcast We Listen To podcast talking about my show and the early days of podcasting. This podcast also has a great Facebook group filled with podcast listeners, but it's NOT A PLACE TO PROMOTE YOUR SHOW (this group does that).

                  I Was Wrong About M4a Files

                  13:57

                  I published an article on the Podcasting Busines Journal website and mentioned how mp3 files are more reliable then m4a when it comes to pressing play. In the past, I've seen m4a files just spin and spin and not play in Apple Podcasts. When I went back to see if this is still true, it's not.

                  Free SEO Tools To Help You Be Found in Google

                  18:11

                  As the search in the podcasts app chokes on the huge amount of shows coming into the podcasting space, there are times when it seems you just can't be found. So if you've done all there is to do, another strategy is to make sure you can be found in this other tool that helps people be found called Google.

                  I've taken SEO For Podcasting by Daniel J Lewis

                  SEO Courses from Yoast

                  Podcast SEO Marketing from Ploymash (Juergen Berkessel )

                  Tools I've Added and Started Using

                  Monster Insights Wordpress Plugin that allows you to see Google Analytics in Wordpress.

                  Neil Patel's Ubersuggest

                  Domain Authority Checker

                  Another great suite of tools is Mongools SEO Suite

                  Question of the Month: What is your TOP Pet Peeve?

                  You can only pick one. Please send them in by 2/22/19

                  Alexacast For Sale

                  31:26

                  I've come to the conclusion that I can't continue (or in this case bring back) the Alexacast. This is a show about the Amazon world, and especially what is happening with Alexa. If you'd like to take this show over, please contact me. You'll need to pay for your media hosting and web hosting. I prefer you host it at www.coolerwebsites.com 

                   

                  Podcasting For Fun

                  34:00 Just a reminder you can podcast for fun. You do NOT have to make money with a podcast.

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>a5494b8f992d4e34a696ec2bb9670cb6Mon, 18 Feb 2019 05:00:00 -040036:40falsefull658658Word of Mouth is Your ArmySpotify bought Gimlet and Anchor. Does this have any effect on "Joe Independent podcaster?" not immediately, but it is a big company, with big pockets, who will spend money to promote podcasting (and that's is a good thing). As for Anchor, I will be making a video to explain the many things wrong with that system in the future. Spotify my want their money back.
                  She Almost Quit Her Podcast

                  8:39

                  For nearly two decades, Carolyn Cole was a Fortune 100 and Fortune 200 Senior Company Trial Attorney. In that role, she worked with over 10,000 clients, witnesses, and experts, for over 25,000 collective hours. Today, Carolyn make the case on behalf of your life, business or career dreams – happiness too.

                  A while ago Carolyn contacted me for some one on one coaching. She was ready to quit. She had heard that the way to have podcast success is to launch with a boatload of episodes, ask people for rating and reviews, and get into New and Noteworthy. She had followed the "recipe" but it hadn't worked and she was ready to quit. I told her not to quit, that podcasting takes time to build up her audience. It's a marathon - not a sprint. She didn't quit.

                  Check out her show at www.boomtank.com

                  In our talk you will hear:

                  How she almost missed an opportunity with Steve Harvey How her show and tagline have changed since she started How she used her podcast to boost her business How networking with your local chamber of commerce can help you How 250 Devoted people can work. How "being small" allows you to do things "bigger" shows don't do. Behind the scenes of working with larger companies The Lessons of editing your own stuff How her audience has changed over the years Why Millenials should be podcasting There is no such thing as a "small" podcast The best and worst parts of podcasting The book "How to be a Power Connector" help to change her life

                  Rode Is Giving Away 150,000 in Podcasting Prizes

                  43:41

                  Submit a 2-minute podcast and enter a chance to win 150,000 worth of podcast equipment. Check it out at www.myrodecast.com

                  Question of the Month: What is Your TOP Podcasting Pet Peeve?

                  Record your answer and email it to dave@schoolofpodcasting.com Or go to my contact page (please put "February Question" in the subject line). I need your answer by February 22nd, 2019.

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>Spotify bought Gimlet and Anchor. Does this have any effect on "Joe Independent podcaster?" not immediately, but it is a big company, with big pockets, who will spend money to promote podcasting (and that's is a good thing). As for Anchor, I will be making a video to explain the many things wrong with that system in the future. Spotify my want their money back.
                  She Almost Quit Her Podcast

                  8:39

                  For nearly two decades, Carolyn Cole was a Fortune 100 and Fortune 200 Senior Company Trial Attorney. In that role, she worked with over 10,000 clients, witnesses, and experts, for over 25,000 collective hours. Today, Carolyn make the case on behalf of your life, business or career dreams – happiness too.

                  A while ago Carolyn contacted me for some one on one coaching. She was ready to quit. She had heard that the way to have podcast success is to launch with a boatload of episodes, ask people for rating and reviews, and get into New and Noteworthy. She had followed the "recipe" but it hadn't worked and she was ready to quit. I told her not to quit, that podcasting takes time to build up her audience. It's a marathon - not a sprint. She didn't quit.

                  Check out her show at www.boomtank.com

                  In our talk you will hear:

                  How she almost missed an opportunity with Steve Harvey How her show and tagline have changed since she started How she used her podcast to boost her business How networking with your local chamber of commerce can help you How 250 Devoted people can work. How "being small" allows you to do things "bigger" shows don't do. Behind the scenes of working with larger companies The Lessons of editing your own stuff How her audience has changed over the years Why Millenials should be podcasting There is no such thing as a "small" podcast The best and worst parts of podcasting The book "How to be a Power Connector" help to change her life

                  Rode Is Giving Away 150,000 in Podcasting Prizes

                  43:41

                  Submit a 2-minute podcast and enter a chance to win 150,000 worth of podcast equipment. Check it out at www.myrodecast.com

                  Question of the Month: What is Your TOP Podcasting Pet Peeve?

                  Record your answer and email it to dave@schoolofpodcasting.com Or go to my contact page (please put "February Question" in the subject line). I need your answer by February 22nd, 2019.

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>ac81c512215846d1bd20988c8d863cb9Mon, 11 Feb 2019 05:00:00 -040048:24falsefull657657Building Community The No BS Approach to 1000+ MembersLast week we spoke about making sure you have great content, today we have tips on building your community.
                  Because of My Podcast - I've Got press Passes to the On Air Festival

                  On-Air Fest is advancing the culture of audio. We bring together an expansive range of emerging and established voices to explore the creative possibilities of sound.

                  Across multiple spaces in Brooklyn's Wythe Hotel, over 100 talent will share innovative ideas and showcase new work. Join us for a weekend of intimate conversations, performances, art installations, listening parties and live podcasts.

                  FEB 28-MAR 3 2019 BROOKLYN, NYC

                  Building Community - Starts Slow, Takes Work, and Then You Have 1000 Members

                  Jeremy Enns is the Storyteller In Chief of podcast agency Counterweight Creative, fearless leader of the Cut The Bullshit Podcasting Community, and creator of the Podcast Power Pack. He loves the outdoors, long distance cycle touring, and will always look back on the day he finally saved up enough money to buy the Millennium Falcon Lego set as one of his proudest achievements.

                  Is there BS in the podcast Space? How do you grow your community? There hasn't been much moderation needed in his group Set rules and ensure people follow them He was working with Women's health world and noticed how well this niche networks together

                  Podcast Power Pack

                  A collection of 20_ contributors who are combining all their products and selling them at 90% off on February 25th - Friday, March 1

                  The Podcast Power Pack is a collection of some of the best online courses, eBooks, membership communities, digital products, and software.

                  The pack is designed to help you refine your process and grow your podcast in 4 key areas.

                  check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podcastpowerpack

                  Mentioned in this Episode

                  Join the Newsletter for bonus content and automatic show note delivery

                  School of Podcasting Newsletter

                  Podfest Multimedia Export in March

                  Win 150,000 worth of Podcasting Gear From Rode See https://www.rode.com/myrodecast

                  This interview was recorded using Squadcast the best way to record remote interviews

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>Last week we spoke about making sure you have great content, today we have tips on building your community.
                  Because of My Podcast - I've Got press Passes to the On Air Festival

                  On-Air Fest is advancing the culture of audio. We bring together an expansive range of emerging and established voices to explore the creative possibilities of sound.

                  Across multiple spaces in Brooklyn's Wythe Hotel, over 100 talent will share innovative ideas and showcase new work. Join us for a weekend of intimate conversations, performances, art installations, listening parties and live podcasts.

                  FEB 28-MAR 3 2019 BROOKLYN, NYC

                  Building Community - Starts Slow, Takes Work, and Then You Have 1000 Members

                  Jeremy Enns is the Storyteller In Chief of podcast agency Counterweight Creative, fearless leader of the Cut The Bullshit Podcasting Community, and creator of the Podcast Power Pack. He loves the outdoors, long distance cycle touring, and will always look back on the day he finally saved up enough money to buy the Millennium Falcon Lego set as one of his proudest achievements.

                  Is there BS in the podcast Space? How do you grow your community? There hasn't been much moderation needed in his group Set rules and ensure people follow them He was working with Women's health world and noticed how well this niche networks together

                  Podcast Power Pack

                  A collection of 20_ contributors who are combining all their products and selling them at 90% off on February 25th - Friday, March 1

                  The Podcast Power Pack is a collection of some of the best online courses, eBooks, membership communities, digital products, and software.

                  The pack is designed to help you refine your process and grow your podcast in 4 key areas.

                  check it out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podcastpowerpack

                  Mentioned in this Episode

                  Join the Newsletter for bonus content and automatic show note delivery

                  School of Podcasting Newsletter

                  Podfest Multimedia Export in March

                  Win 150,000 worth of Podcasting Gear From Rode See https://www.rode.com/myrodecast

                  This interview was recorded using Squadcast the best way to record remote interviews

                  Work With Me

                  Join the School of Podcasting or let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>214f0ee3febd4254b2c12dec6ec5affbMon, 04 Feb 2019 05:39:09 -040034:25falsefull656656How Do You Know Your Podcast is Connecting With Your Audience?Before you start promoting your show, how do you know if it's good? How do you know if it will connect with your audience?

                  Ready to Start Podcasting?

                  Imagine you want to start a lawn mowing business and the only way you know how to cut the grass is one blade at a time. That's how I felt about my podcast until the coaching session I had last night with Dave Jackson. I'm Zita Christian host of Ritual Recipes. A podcast filled with practical magic to nourish your inner life. 

                  I had a coaching session with Dave Jackson last night. He used a screen sharing technique to walk me through the problems I had with my podcast and with my gear and with my website. I am not technically savvy, and that's putting it mildly. But with Dave, that's not a problem. The man is a born teacher. His approach is clear. His attitude is always encouraging and above all, and at least for me, he's patient.

                  So I asked you do you want to start a podcast? Do you want to fix the one you have? If you answered yes to either one. Get the kind of help that will make a difference.

                  Work with Dave Jackson. Give your podcast a real chance to succeed.

                  Zita Christian Ritual Recipes moonriverrituals.com

                  How Do You Know Your Show is Good?

                  According to Jay Soderberg, great content contains the "Three E's" Entertain, Educate, and Emotional (leads to engagement). I've always said contact that you can't get any place else is always a boost (which I guess would fit in under educational)

                  I posed this question to a few people:

                  Participants

                  Jay "Podvader" Soderberg from Next Fan Up

                  Jayson Sacco: The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

                  Lee Silverstein: We Have Cancer

                  Andrea Klunder: The Creative Impostor

                  Natalie Eckdahl: Biz Chix

                  Super Joe Pardo: Business with Super Joe Pardo

                  David Steele: Steele Empire

                  Gene Monterastelli: Tapping Q and A Podcast

                  Jeremy Ends: Podcast Powerpack

                  Darwyn Dave: Dealing with My Grief

                  You NEED to connect with your audience wherever they are. Quit staring at the Apple podcast charts and focus on your audience (which leads to you moving into the charts if done consistently).

                  Realize what works for one podcast does not mean this will work for your show, so you may need the courage to try something new. Natalie uses coaching calls as part of her show. Lee changed the name of his show from The Colon Cancer Podcast to "We Have podcast." 

                  Gene and Natalie have VERY SPECIFIC ideas of who they want listening, and how they will gauge success (and it has nothing to do with rankings and reviews). Jeremy has helped clients who are happy they tried surveys. Andrea helps people define who their target audience is. 

                  When you know who your target audience is, and you understand the goal of your show, you can start to chart a path between the two. 

                  Mentioned in this podcast

                  Google Forms

                  Type Form

                   

                  ]]>Before you start promoting your show, how do you know if it's good? How do you know if it will connect with your audience?

                  Ready to Start Podcasting?

                  Imagine you want to start a lawn mowing business and the only way you know how to cut the grass is one blade at a time. That's how I felt about my podcast until the coaching session I had last night with Dave Jackson. I'm Zita Christian host of Ritual Recipes. A podcast filled with practical magic to nourish your inner life. 

                  I had a coaching session with Dave Jackson last night. He used a screen sharing technique to walk me through the problems I had with my podcast and with my gear and with my website. I am not technically savvy, and that's putting it mildly. But with Dave, that's not a problem. The man is a born teacher. His approach is clear. His attitude is always encouraging and above all, and at least for me, he's patient.

                  So I asked you do you want to start a podcast? Do you want to fix the one you have? If you answered yes to either one. Get the kind of help that will make a difference.

                  Work with Dave Jackson. Give your podcast a real chance to succeed.

                  Zita Christian Ritual Recipes moonriverrituals.com

                  How Do You Know Your Show is Good?

                  According to Jay Soderberg, great content contains the "Three E's" Entertain, Educate, and Emotional (leads to engagement). I've always said contact that you can't get any place else is always a boost (which I guess would fit in under educational)

                  I posed this question to a few people:

                  Participants

                  Jay "Podvader" Soderberg from Next Fan Up

                  Jayson Sacco: The Ankylosing Spondylitis Podcast

                  Lee Silverstein: We Have Cancer

                  Andrea Klunder: The Creative Impostor

                  Natalie Eckdahl: Biz Chix

                  Super Joe Pardo: Business with Super Joe Pardo

                  David Steele: Steele Empire

                  Gene Monterastelli: Tapping Q and A Podcast

                  Jeremy Ends: Podcast Powerpack

                  Darwyn Dave: Dealing with My Grief

                  You NEED to connect with your audience wherever they are. Quit staring at the Apple podcast charts and focus on your audience (which leads to you moving into the charts if done consistently).

                  Realize what works for one podcast does not mean this will work for your show, so you may need the courage to try something new. Natalie uses coaching calls as part of her show. Lee changed the name of his show from The Colon Cancer Podcast to "We Have podcast." 

                  Gene and Natalie have VERY SPECIFIC ideas of who they want listening, and how they will gauge success (and it has nothing to do with rankings and reviews). Jeremy has helped clients who are happy they tried surveys. Andrea helps people define who their target audience is. 

                  When you know who your target audience is, and you understand the goal of your show, you can start to chart a path between the two. 

                  Mentioned in this podcast

                  Google Forms

                  Type Form

                   

                  ]]>93eb1282aba744b08be469c14044d576Mon, 28 Jan 2019 05:00:00 -040052:19falsefull655655The Podcast Launch AttitudeI see more and more people getting into podcasting who
                  • Want to spend zero money
                  • Spend very little time on creating content
                  • Make large amounts of money - quickly
                  
                  

                  My prediction is 98% of the people who get into podcasting for the SOLE reason of making money fast will quit and say podcasting does not work. This episode is to educate you with knowledge so you can make an educated decision.

                  Keep mind, you DO NOT have to make money with your podcast. Many, many, many podcasters do it for the love of the topic.

                  Because of My Podcast: Emily Prokop Will Be on TV

                  1:50

                  Emily Prokop from The Story Behind Podcast and EPodcast Productions has had "Because of My Podcast" Stories in the past (as she got a book deal). Now because of her podcast (which brought her a book deal), she is going to be on Inside Edition. How cool is that? Congrats Emily

                  Update on Rode Rodecaster Pro

                  4:10

                  Last week we had three people share their insights into the Rode Rodecaster Pro, and I had not tied the unit into Skype yet. I agree when you use the phone, it sounds like, the phone. I had Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome and Miss Ileane Smith join me on Ask the Podcast Coach via the wired TRRS cable, using Skype and out sounded much better. Johnathan was on Skype in his phone and Ileane was using an ATR2100 and sounded awesome.

                  The Potential Harm of Launching Your Podcast With a Patreon

                  7:28

                  While I realize that starting to promote a patreon account the minute you start podcasting may seem like a great idea, my worry is this is another criteria (like your download stats) to gauge your process. I'm not saying it's wrong, but I want you to go into this with your eyes wide open.

                  How Do We Get Sucked In?

                  There are people on patreon making thousands of dollars a month. In the same way, that ice skaters, musicians, comedians, and athletes make their craft look easy, so do these podcasters. You talk into a mic, ask people for money, and watch the cash roll in.

                  Nothing could be further from the truth

                  How Do You Feel About PBS Pledge Drives?

                  Think about how you feel when watching a PBS pledge drive. You’re enjoying the smooth tones of James Taylor as you reminisce about the first time you heard this song on the radio. The memories make you feel warm and then BOOM! We need some money.

                  If you don’t have a relationship with PBS, (and found this while channel surfing) I’m going to bet these interruptions are quite annoying. Without a relationship, pledge drives make you want to change the channel (at least for me it does).

                  So does this mean that your pledge drives in the early days of your podcast is a bad idea? I guess it all depends on how entertaining and creative you are in asking for support.

                  Things To Consider As a New Podcaster

                  While launching with a Patreon campaign allows you to practice your pitch, and gets your audience used to hearing your pledge drive in episodes, there are a few things to consider:

                  • You may find yourself focusing more on your Patreon rewards instead of focusing on making great content that inspires your audience to tell a friend.
                  • You can practice your pledge drive pitch in the basement.
                  • You don’t have a relationship with these your audience and yet you're asking for a favor.
                  • Unless you organized a focus group, you may not be delivering value (and yet you are asking for value in return). Your Mom is not a focus group.
                  • If you are doing great you can expect 3% of your audience to join your campaign. If you have 100 listeners this means you MIGHT get 3.
                  • According to graphtreon.com in January of 2019: 704,041 creators received a total of $1,512,275. That's a little over $2 per patron.
                  • The lack of patrons can damage your attitude and make you want to quit your podcast. If your sole reason for starting your podcast was for quickly getting money, you should stop.
                  
                  The Pressure of Patreon

                  20:20

                  Jordan Harbinger gave up being a lawyer to do a podcast where he interviews people and talks about communications and social dynamics. On Friday he answers questions from his audience. One other thing, Jordan gets millions of downloads for this show. A listener of his was having a hard time finding the courage to launch his content. The person was already worried about the business side of his content, and he had been sitting on it for two years.

                  Jordan brings up a great point of the pressure of running your podcast as a business right out the door. That pressure could hinder your creativity, affect your attitude in a negative way and hinder you from creating a great show that will attract an audience. Keep in mind, no audience - no money.  With this added pressure, the podcast might not be fun. Also, keep in mind when you first start out you're not going to be as good as you will be in a few years.

                  He brought up a great point about how easily we can talk to people we would normally be attracted when we are in a relationship. Why? No pressure.

                  He explains that when he first started he just liked talking about it to his friends. That lead to him talking to others in bars, which lead to... being known as the Larry King of Podcasting.

                  You can't help, serve, or entertaining anyone with your files on your hard drive. Just launch.

                  Check out Jordan's Show at www.jordanharbinger.com and check out his level one FREE Human Dynamics course. Check out my interviews with Jordan here and here.

                  But Shouldn't You Treat Your Podcast Like a Business?

                  32:50

                  I've had people who have businesses that sell ads in their show who treat their podcast as a business. They have to. While you are starting out, you may not be in this situation. It may be smart to plan ahead, but it is a bit like buying a crib for your future child when you are still a virgin.

                  Most businesses the podcast is not the business. It is the part of the marketing arm of the business to promote their products. When your product is Patreon, that is fine but realize that most podcasters who are doing it for a living have multiple streams of income (products, ads, affiliate sales, live events).

                  Also, if your podcast is not a business or promoting a business - it leads me to my next point.

                  Shut Up and Have Fun With Your Podcast

                  If you are doing a podcast for fun, and meet like-minded people or friend and family - then do that. Pay no attention to the podcasters chasing a buck. There are SO MANY WAYS to benefit from podcasting (see because of my podcast) and money is just ONE of them.

                  When you compare your podcast to another it - unless it someone doing the same exact show with the exact same background, it is NEVER a fair comparison.

                  Don't worry about the money, the downloads, new and noteworthy, Apple charts, and just HAVE FUN doing your podcast and see where it leads you.

                  Canva Vs Snappa

                  Graphics can help attract attention to show notes, your episodes, etc.

                  I was working on making a new image for my YouTube channel and found Snappa. I had heard about it. I have been using Canva.com for a while. After banging my head against the wall to have my image show up correctly in YouTube, Snappa seemed to have the edge. They have more photos, and when making a YouTube channel artwork Snappa worked better. However, you typically make a YouTube Channel artwork once or twice a year. Other items I make weekly.

                  Canva has multiple folders you can create, they make copying and resizing images easier, and while you will still probably occasionally have to pay for an image even if you are paying for their $12 a month "business" package, I found it better thought out. You can crop images while you are using them. With Snappa, you had to crop it before bringing it into your graphic (how do I know how much I need to crop it if I haven't seen it with the other items?).

                  A Free Image Strategy

                  Canva.com, Snappa.com, and Adobe Spark all have free versions. If you're on a tight budget and don't mind taking more time to browse through multiple portals (along with places like pixabay) you might try signing up for a free account on all three. For me, I live Canva. The offer tutorials to help you get the most out of the service.

                  Work With Me

                  If you're ready to start your...]]>I see more and more people getting into podcasting who

                  • Want to spend zero money
                  • Spend very little time on creating content
                  • Make large amounts of money - quickly
                  
                  

                  My prediction is 98% of the people who get into podcasting for the SOLE reason of making money fast will quit and say podcasting does not work. This episode is to educate you with knowledge so you can make an educated decision.

                  Keep mind, you DO NOT have to make money with your podcast. Many, many, many podcasters do it for the love of the topic.

                  Because of My Podcast: Emily Prokop Will Be on TV

                  1:50

                  Emily Prokop from The Story Behind Podcast and EPodcast Productions has had "Because of My Podcast" Stories in the past (as she got a book deal). Now because of her podcast (which brought her a book deal), she is going to be on Inside Edition. How cool is that? Congrats Emily

                  Update on Rode Rodecaster Pro

                  4:10

                  Last week we had three people share their insights into the Rode Rodecaster Pro, and I had not tied the unit into Skype yet. I agree when you use the phone, it sounds like, the phone. I had Jonathan Bloom from Weekly Awesome and Miss Ileane Smith join me on Ask the Podcast Coach via the wired TRRS cable, using Skype and out sounded much better. Johnathan was on Skype in his phone and Ileane was using an ATR2100 and sounded awesome.

                  The Potential Harm of Launching Your Podcast With a Patreon

                  7:28

                  While I realize that starting to promote a patreon account the minute you start podcasting may seem like a great idea, my worry is this is another criteria (like your download stats) to gauge your process. I'm not saying it's wrong, but I want you to go into this with your eyes wide open.

                  How Do We Get Sucked In?

                  There are people on patreon making thousands of dollars a month. In the same way, that ice skaters, musicians, comedians, and athletes make their craft look easy, so do these podcasters. You talk into a mic, ask people for money, and watch the cash roll in.

                  Nothing could be further from the truth

                  How Do You Feel About PBS Pledge Drives?

                  Think about how you feel when watching a PBS pledge drive. You’re enjoying the smooth tones of James Taylor as you reminisce about the first time you heard this song on the radio. The memories make you feel warm and then BOOM! We need some money.

                  If you don’t have a relationship with PBS, (and found this while channel surfing) I’m going to bet these interruptions are quite annoying. Without a relationship, pledge drives make you want to change the channel (at least for me it does).

                  So does this mean that your pledge drives in the early days of your podcast is a bad idea? I guess it all depends on how entertaining and creative you are in asking for support.

                  Things To Consider As a New Podcaster

                  While launching with a Patreon campaign allows you to practice your pitch, and gets your audience used to hearing your pledge drive in episodes, there are a few things to consider:

                  • You may find yourself focusing more on your Patreon rewards instead of focusing on making great content that inspires your audience to tell a friend.
                  • You can practice your pledge drive pitch in the basement.
                  • You don’t have a relationship with these your audience and yet you're asking for a favor.
                  • Unless you organized a focus group, you may not be delivering value (and yet you are asking for value in return). Your Mom is not a focus group.
                  • If you are doing great you can expect 3% of your audience to join your campaign. If you have 100 listeners this means you MIGHT get 3.
                  • According to graphtreon.com in January of 2019: 704,041 creators received a total of $1,512,275. That's a little over $2 per patron.
                  • The lack of patrons can damage your attitude and make you want to quit your podcast. If your sole reason for starting your podcast was for quickly getting money, you should stop.
                  
                  The Pressure of Patreon

                  20:20

                  Jordan Harbinger gave up being a lawyer to do a podcast where he interviews people and talks about communications and social dynamics. On Friday he answers questions from his audience. One other thing, Jordan gets millions of downloads for this show. A listener of his was having a hard time finding the courage to launch his content. The person was already worried about the business side of his content, and he had been sitting on it for two years.

                  Jordan brings up a great point of the pressure of running your podcast as a business right out the door. That pressure could hinder your creativity, affect your attitude in a negative way and hinder you from creating a great show that will attract an audience. Keep in mind, no audience - no money.  With this added pressure, the podcast might not be fun. Also, keep in mind when you first start out you're not going to be as good as you will be in a few years.

                  He brought up a great point about how easily we can talk to people we would normally be attracted when we are in a relationship. Why? No pressure.

                  He explains that when he first started he just liked talking about it to his friends. That lead to him talking to others in bars, which lead to... being known as the Larry King of Podcasting.

                  You can't help, serve, or entertaining anyone with your files on your hard drive. Just launch.

                  Check out Jordan's Show at www.jordanharbinger.com and check out his level one FREE Human Dynamics course. Check out my interviews with Jordan here and here.

                  But Shouldn't You Treat Your Podcast Like a Business?

                  32:50

                  I've had people who have businesses that sell ads in their show who treat their podcast as a business. They have to. While you are starting out, you may not be in this situation. It may be smart to plan ahead, but it is a bit like buying a crib for your future child when you are still a virgin.

                  Most businesses the podcast is not the business. It is the part of the marketing arm of the business to promote their products. When your product is Patreon, that is fine but realize that most podcasters who are doing it for a living have multiple streams of income (products, ads, affiliate sales, live events).

                  Also, if your podcast is not a business or promoting a business - it leads me to my next point.

                  Shut Up and Have Fun With Your Podcast

                  If you are doing a podcast for fun, and meet like-minded people or friend and family - then do that. Pay no attention to the podcasters chasing a buck. There are SO MANY WAYS to benefit from podcasting (see because of my podcast) and money is just ONE of them.

                  When you compare your podcast to another it - unless it someone doing the same exact show with the exact same background, it is NEVER a fair comparison.

                  Don't worry about the money, the downloads, new and noteworthy, Apple charts, and just HAVE FUN doing your podcast and see where it leads you.

                  Canva Vs Snappa

                  Graphics can help attract attention to show notes, your episodes, etc.

                  I was working on making a new image for my YouTube channel and found Snappa. I had heard about it. I have been using Canva.com for a while. After banging my head against the wall to have my image show up correctly in YouTube, Snappa seemed to have the edge. They have more photos, and when making a YouTube channel artwork Snappa worked better. However, you typically make a YouTube Channel artwork once or twice a year. Other items I make weekly.

                  Canva has multiple folders you can create, they make copying and resizing images easier, and while you will still probably occasionally have to pay for an image even if you are paying for their $12 a month "business" package, I found it better thought out. You can crop images while you are using them. With Snappa, you had to crop it before bringing it into your graphic (how do I know how much I need to crop it if I haven't seen it with the other items?).

                  A Free Image Strategy

                  Canva.com, Snappa.com, and Adobe Spark all have free versions. If you're on a tight budget and don't mind taking more time to browse through multiple portals (along with places like pixabay) you might try signing up for a free account on all three. For me, I live Canva. The offer tutorials to help you get the most out of the service.

                  Work With Me

                  If you're ready to start your podcast, I have multiple plans for multiple budgets. I want to help you build a successful podcast. Please let me know if you have any additional questions. I also have a podcast quick start program for those who are looking to get up and running quickly and then have a brief mentorship.

                  ]]>557b7f22e36c437cb38744ed6ba7a3aaMon, 21 Jan 2019 05:00:00 -040044:50falsefull654654Three Opinions on the Rode Rodecaster ProThe Rode Rodecaster Pro has caught the attention of many podcasters, and some have pulled the trigger. Jim Harold (Paranormal podcast) and Jeff Bradury from Teachercast have purchased the unit. I want to thank Rode for shipping me a unit to play with. Their first impression was amazing.
                  Is It Worth the Money?

                  If purchased a four channel mixer a popular mixer is the Behringer Q1202USB is $119

                  A Mackie Headphone Amplifier is $40

                  A Jingle pallet can cost you $10 (Backpack Studio on iOs) but you'll need a phone or a tablet

                  A portable recorder at its cheapest is $119 for a Zoom H1N

                  The Aphex processing would cost you $345.

                  Total Price: That would be $120+40+10+120+345 = $635

                  The Rodecaster Pro clocks in at $599 and you avoid all the cabling all over the place. You don't have to learn about "Gain staging" and if you're using a half decent microphone, you're going to sound great.

                  Spec Sheet PDF

                  Quick Start Guide

                  Jeff Bradbury of Teachercast

                  9:51 Jeff Bradbury from the Teachercast loves his Rodecaster Pro

                  Jeff had a situation where he needed to interview someone over the phone and it turned out great.

                  Jeff points out that if you're using something external for mix-minus, you might hit a snag

                  He also wishes it came with a Micro SD card. He has worked with it on Skype and Zoom. Jeff is using a Mac

                  If you're a teacher, check out everything Jeff has to offer at www.teachercast.net

                  Jim Harold From the Paranormal Podcast

                  14:21 Jim Harold has been podcasting since 2005 and produces the Paranormal Podcast, Campfire, Crime Scene along with being the author of many books (all available at www.jimharold.com )

                  Jim loves the ease of use and enjoys having a noise gate to cut out room noise when he's not talking.

                  He really loves the sound the unit is producing. At the time of the recording, Jim had used it for 4-6 new episodes.

                  Jim has used a Sound Devices Mixpre-3, and a Zoom L12, but really loves the sound he is producing with the Rodecaster.

                  Jim also records a show with his wife called Soulmate Stories and it makes it super easy to pull in people who want to share their stories check it out at http://www.soulmatestoriespodcast.com

                  Jim also hopes in the future there is a way to access recording without having to take the micro SD card out.

                  Jim is also on a Mac.

                  Jim also feels that while he doesn't miss having separate tracks for each person, it would be nice to offer this option in the future.

                  Dave Jackson's Rodecaster Review

                  First of all, I was blown away by the package that was sent to me from the Rode people. This was my first interaction with this company, and I'm not sure I've experienced such a great first impression.

                  I love that you can configure this in minutes. You simply pair the unit with your phone and you're off and running. I used it on Saturday for a live show using Google Hangouts and also on a Group Coaching call using zoom.us and while Rode says it's not set up for the USB to be "mix minus" it appears to work.

                  I like that you can reset the timer if you make a flub and want to start again without stopping the recording.

                  I love the built-in headphone amplifier (don't miss the 3.5mm on the front if you are flying solo). I have my headphones plugged into one, and my studio monitors into another.

                  I am having a slight playback issue (I'm the only one of the three using a new Windows machine).

                  I also hate the MicroSD Card and would love to drag and drop the files to my computer without having to take the card out.

                  I wish there was a pause button so if something goes wrong you could pause the recording. I also wish there was a pause on the jingle buttons so if you wanted to stop and comment on something and then resume your could.

                  In my tests using the TRRS cable made myself sound better to the caller, but decreased their volume. The blue tooth option made the caller louder, but I sounded "not as good" to the caller (but still usable)

                  While  Dave doesn't miss separate tracks (but admittedly he is interviewing podcasters who have decent audio quality) he does wish there was a tad more control over the tone.

                  A Weird Playback Issue on Windows

                  46:18 I had a weird playback issue that apparently does not go into the recording. It is somewhat like a "buzz" that only I hear (not the people on the call. As I just recently got my unit and started putting it through the paces I am the only person I know having these issues. I have contacted Rode support to see if there is something on my end. I have found that whatever program I'm using if I temporarily switch what I'm using for a microphone it goes away.

                  Microphone Shootout The Rode Procaster vs the Electrovoice RE320

                  52:54 The Rode Procaster has a very warm sound to it. While I didn't have a pop filter on it, but not talking directly into it I had no popping issues. The RE320 has a nice clear sound and really there is no bad choice here. For me, I've been using the RE320 for years. I enjoy the clarity, and the tone doesn't seem to change much if I get close to the mic. The Rode Procaster is $189. The Electrovoice RE320 is $299. If you are looking for the warmth of a Heil Pr40 without the $327 price tag, you might give it a shot. There is a WS2 Windscreen for the Procaster if you want one.

                  Best Uses Of the Rodecaster Pro

                  If you are doing a podcast where up to four people are in the room, and you want a very short learning curve through the technology, this is the unit for you. You just need to:

                  • Do your best not to talk over each other (although channel one can be set as the "top dog" with a ducking feature which turns everyone down)
                  • There is no way to tell how much time is left, or how long a jingle will be playing. With this in mind, don't have music you have to "talk up" and then have the music fade in. This would take some practice, or the music you are talking over has to be OBVIOUS when it's time to fade it back in.
                  
                  

                  With the above items, with a little planning ahead you can sound like an old radio pro in minutes.

                  So if you have a co-host(s) and occasionally have a guest who wants to call...]]>The Rode Rodecaster Pro has caught the attention of many podcasters, and some have pulled the trigger. Jim Harold (Paranormal podcast) and Jeff Bradury from Teachercast have purchased the unit. I want to thank Rode for shipping me a unit to play with. Their first impression was amazing.

                  Is It Worth the Money?

                  If purchased a four channel mixer a popular mixer is the Behringer Q1202USB is $119

                  A Mackie Headphone Amplifier is $40

                  A Jingle pallet can cost you $10 (Backpack Studio on iOs) but you'll need a phone or a tablet

                  A portable recorder at its cheapest is $119 for a Zoom H1N

                  The Aphex processing would cost you $345.

                  Total Price: That would be $120+40+10+120+345 = $635

                  The Rodecaster Pro clocks in at $599 and you avoid all the cabling all over the place. You don't have to learn about "Gain staging" and if you're using a half decent microphone, you're going to sound great.

                  Spec Sheet PDF

                  Quick Start Guide

                  Jeff Bradbury of Teachercast

                  9:51 Jeff Bradbury from the Teachercast loves his Rodecaster Pro

                  Jeff had a situation where he needed to interview someone over the phone and it turned out great.

                  Jeff points out that if you're using something external for mix-minus, you might hit a snag

                  He also wishes it came with a Micro SD card. He has worked with it on Skype and Zoom. Jeff is using a Mac

                  If you're a teacher, check out everything Jeff has to offer at www.teachercast.net

                  Jim Harold From the Paranormal Podcast

                  14:21 Jim Harold has been podcasting since 2005 and produces the Paranormal Podcast, Campfire, Crime Scene along with being the author of many books (all available at www.jimharold.com )

                  Jim loves the ease of use and enjoys having a noise gate to cut out room noise when he's not talking.

                  He really loves the sound the unit is producing. At the time of the recording, Jim had used it for 4-6 new episodes.

                  Jim has used a Sound Devices Mixpre-3, and a Zoom L12, but really loves the sound he is producing with the Rodecaster.

                  Jim also records a show with his wife called Soulmate Stories and it makes it super easy to pull in people who want to share their stories check it out at http://www.soulmatestoriespodcast.com

                  Jim also hopes in the future there is a way to access recording without having to take the micro SD card out.

                  Jim is also on a Mac.

                  Jim also feels that while he doesn't miss having separate tracks for each person, it would be nice to offer this option in the future.

                  Dave Jackson's Rodecaster Review

                  First of all, I was blown away by the package that was sent to me from the Rode people. This was my first interaction with this company, and I'm not sure I've experienced such a great first impression.

                  I love that you can configure this in minutes. You simply pair the unit with your phone and you're off and running. I used it on Saturday for a live show using Google Hangouts and also on a Group Coaching call using zoom.us and while Rode says it's not set up for the USB to be "mix minus" it appears to work.

                  I like that you can reset the timer if you make a flub and want to start again without stopping the recording.

                  I love the built-in headphone amplifier (don't miss the 3.5mm on the front if you are flying solo). I have my headphones plugged into one, and my studio monitors into another.

                  I am having a slight playback issue (I'm the only one of the three using a new Windows machine).

                  I also hate the MicroSD Card and would love to drag and drop the files to my computer without having to take the card out.

                  I wish there was a pause button so if something goes wrong you could pause the recording. I also wish there was a pause on the jingle buttons so if you wanted to stop and comment on something and then resume your could.

                  In my tests using the TRRS cable made myself sound better to the caller, but decreased their volume. The blue tooth option made the caller louder, but I sounded "not as good" to the caller (but still usable)

                  While  Dave doesn't miss separate tracks (but admittedly he is interviewing podcasters who have decent audio quality) he does wish there was a tad more control over the tone.

                  A Weird Playback Issue on Windows

                  46:18 I had a weird playback issue that apparently does not go into the recording. It is somewhat like a "buzz" that only I hear (not the people on the call. As I just recently got my unit and started putting it through the paces I am the only person I know having these issues. I have contacted Rode support to see if there is something on my end. I have found that whatever program I'm using if I temporarily switch what I'm using for a microphone it goes away.

                  Microphone Shootout The Rode Procaster vs the Electrovoice RE320

                  52:54 The Rode Procaster has a very warm sound to it. While I didn't have a pop filter on it, but not talking directly into it I had no popping issues. The RE320 has a nice clear sound and really there is no bad choice here. For me, I've been using the RE320 for years. I enjoy the clarity, and the tone doesn't seem to change much if I get close to the mic. The Rode Procaster is $189. The Electrovoice RE320 is $299. If you are looking for the warmth of a Heil Pr40 without the $327 price tag, you might give it a shot. There is a WS2 Windscreen for the Procaster if you want one.

                  Best Uses Of the Rodecaster Pro

                  If you are doing a podcast where up to four people are in the room, and you want a very short learning curve through the technology, this is the unit for you. You just need to:

                  • Do your best not to talk over each other (although channel one can be set as the "top dog" with a ducking feature which turns everyone down)
                  • There is no way to tell how much time is left, or how long a jingle will be playing. With this in mind, don't have music you have to "talk up" and then have the music fade in. This would take some practice, or the music you are talking over has to be OBVIOUS when it's time to fade it back in.
                  
                  

                  With the above items, with a little planning ahead you can sound like an old radio pro in minutes.

                  So if you have a co-host(s) and occasionally have a guest who wants to call in via the phone - this is THE solution.

                  How I Managed Live Calls on the Ask the Podcast Coach Last Week

                  Last week I used the Rodcaster Pro to take phone calls on a live streaming program. I used Google Live (formerly Google Hangouts on Air) for my video. I if you just want audio you can use a tool such a mixlr.com to stream your audio to your audience, or spreaker.com which also will stream audio.

                  To create a call queue, I use callinstudio.com. I attached my phone to the Rodecaster Pro via Bluetooth, and called my host number at callinstudio.com and gave out the callinstudio.com phone number for the callers. I monitor the calls via callinstudio.com and can add them to the call, or drop them if needed. They came through and sounded great.

                  ]]>0cfe792abe954e5bb018939b3490e830Mon, 14 Jan 2019 05:00:00 -040001:00:19falsefull563563Smarter Podcasting - Avoid These 7 Time WastersThis is another episode where I share some of the "mistakes" that I see people are making in the podcasting space. We need to focus on our audience, not the technology. There are times when we focus on the technology because you are using the wrong tool. Here are things some thing that may be burning you out, wasting your time, and stopping your podcast from being successful.
                  Sometimes Obsess Over Details that Don't Effect Our Episode

                  As a tech support person, I see people obsess over details that will have little or no effect on their episode or podcast growth.

                  • I want to know how many people listened in Mongolia on December 12, 2017. Unless you're going on tour, why?
                  • The music in my add is of beat
                  • The video on Facebook that NOBODY is watching more than 2 seconds.
                  
                  Using The Wrong Software to Create Your Podcast

                  I often refer to this as painting with peanut butter. When you use the tool for the job, you make creating your podcast a hassle and you are likely to get burned out and quit.

                  If the tool you are using to create your audio doesn't allow you to create an mp3 - it's the wrong tool as you will have to use a different program.

                  I see people who use the wrong software go to Facebook groups trying, and trying to make a square peg fit in a round hole.

                  I recommend Hindenburg Journalist (I use Pro), Audacity, and Adobe Audition.

                  I'm not saying all video programs are bad, but they need to be able to export as an mp3.

                  If you need help turning a WAV or AAC file into an mp3 I've got a free tutorial for you.

                  Troubleshooting Trying to Get Something Bright and Shiny

                  For whatever reason, I could not use Belive.tv. My computer would lock up. I had tried a couple of things, but it would always lock up. Again, this was not their problem, it was a problem with my machine.

                  I could have wiped my computer clean, and reloaded all my software, backed up all my files and spent a TON of time. This is where you need to ask FOR WHAT? Lower thirds on my video, and video switching. This is where you need to ask a question, has my audience asked for the feature I'm trying to add? Is this really something that is going to help me grow my audience?

                  Missing the Off-Ramp to Happy Town

                  There are times when you want technology to work, and it doesn't. Then someone alerts to a solution, but you don't like it. Instead, you decide to go back and bang your head against a wall.

                  Different platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn change how they handle podcasts on a somewhat frequent basis. You want it to work one way, but it doesn't. You can manually post to any of these places taking the same steps. You found success - follow it.

                  Maybe you're trying to do something and it won't work with Safari, but it would work with chrome. Instead of using Chrome you decide to band your head against the wall using Safari. You just discovered a solution. You can move forward using a new tool, or troubleshoot Apple's product for free.

                  Working Outside Your Zone of Genius

                  I spent some time playing with the Divi WordPress theme on one of my sites, and I hit some issues that is probably with the Media host. It might be a problem with some plugins. I am working with the tech support team, but web design, in general, is not my best skill, and it might make more sense to let an actual web designer take over, and then let me maintain.

                  Confusing Activity with Productivity

                  I was spending hours listening to podcasts about podcasting that were not bad shows. However, I am blessed with my students, my audience, and lots of contacts in the podcasting space. With this in mind, I'm not learning anything from these show. For the investment in time, I'm not learning anything that I can share with you. Meanwhile, I'm reading books that have me thinking, and coming up with new ideas for episodes.

                  Creating Garbage Audio to be Cleaned Up Later

                  If you are doing a podcast with Interview is have the potential guest record something and send it to you. This will help separate the good from the not so good. If this is not a strategy you want to follow I would urge you to make sure the quality of the recording is the best you can get. Recently I've been having people with what we call "Popping P's" where they have the microphone positioned in the wrong place. If you have this situation,  stop the interview and have them reposition the microphone and save "Happy Peanut Butter" if they can do that without causing a pop (technically called a "Plosive") then you are good to go. It not, you or your editor has a long day in front of them.

                  Think Long Term

                  I realize that some of the things we mentioned today cost money. Everything in life will be paid for in one of two currencies: time or money. While I could take the time to brush up on the Web Design skills, it might be smarter to pay someone. It might take money (although Audacity is free) to buy the right software (or to buy a pop filter). Most of the ideas here are based on two things

                  Focus: Know the audience

                  Action: Take steps to serve them and deliver value.

                  My Favorite Podcast Is Rewind

                  I had two people Fred Castenada of the Podcast Reporter and Kim Krajci from Toastmasters 101 send in files for last week's My Favorite Podcast is.. episode that I do every year."

                  Fred loves the No Agenda show for information you can't get any place else and Kim loves Forking Bullshirt as it makes her laugh.

                  New Backpack Studio Replaces Bossjock Studio

                  Backpack Studio is a $10 app for iOs only that makes creating a podcast on your iPhone or iPad super easy. You can even add your image, and show notes and publish them to Libsyn using FTP (are you listening Anhor.fm people).

                  • A HUGE amount of slots for sounds for you to play (great for anyone looking for a jingle pallet
                  • A nice help screen when you start the app
                  • Ability to export in many formats
                  • The audio while recording still has a weird echo, but this is not on the recording
                  
                  

                  Buy it in the Apple store

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Podfest in Orlando in March

                  Podcast Movement in August

                  Logical Weight Loss Podcast

                  Let Me Be Your Podcast Guide

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>This is another episode where I share some of the "mistakes" that I see people are making in the podcasting space. We need to focus on our audience, not the technology. There are times when we focus on the technology because you are using the wrong tool. Here are things some thing that may be burning you out, wasting your time, and stopping your podcast from being successful.
                  Sometimes Obsess Over Details that Don't Effect Our Episode

                  As a tech support person, I see people obsess over details that will have little or no effect on their episode or podcast growth.

                  • I want to know how many people listened in Mongolia on December 12, 2017. Unless you're going on tour, why?
                  • The music in my add is of beat
                  • The video on Facebook that NOBODY is watching more than 2 seconds.
                  
                  Using The Wrong Software to Create Your Podcast

                  I often refer to this as painting with peanut butter. When you use the tool for the job, you make creating your podcast a hassle and you are likely to get burned out and quit.

                  If the tool you are using to create your audio doesn't allow you to create an mp3 - it's the wrong tool as you will have to use a different program.

                  I see people who use the wrong software go to Facebook groups trying, and trying to make a square peg fit in a round hole.

                  I recommend Hindenburg Journalist (I use Pro), Audacity, and Adobe Audition.

                  I'm not saying all video programs are bad, but they need to be able to export as an mp3.

                  If you need help turning a WAV or AAC file into an mp3 I've got a free tutorial for you.

                  Troubleshooting Trying to Get Something Bright and Shiny

                  For whatever reason, I could not use Belive.tv. My computer would lock up. I had tried a couple of things, but it would always lock up. Again, this was not their problem, it was a problem with my machine.

                  I could have wiped my computer clean, and reloaded all my software, backed up all my files and spent a TON of time. This is where you need to ask FOR WHAT? Lower thirds on my video, and video switching. This is where you need to ask a question, has my audience asked for the feature I'm trying to add? Is this really something that is going to help me grow my audience?

                  Missing the Off-Ramp to Happy Town

                  There are times when you want technology to work, and it doesn't. Then someone alerts to a solution, but you don't like it. Instead, you decide to go back and bang your head against a wall.

                  Different platforms like Facebook, LinkedIn change how they handle podcasts on a somewhat frequent basis. You want it to work one way, but it doesn't. You can manually post to any of these places taking the same steps. You found success - follow it.

                  Maybe you're trying to do something and it won't work with Safari, but it would work with chrome. Instead of using Chrome you decide to band your head against the wall using Safari. You just discovered a solution. You can move forward using a new tool, or troubleshoot Apple's product for free.

                  Working Outside Your Zone of Genius

                  I spent some time playing with the Divi WordPress theme on one of my sites, and I hit some issues that is probably with the Media host. It might be a problem with some plugins. I am working with the tech support team, but web design, in general, is not my best skill, and it might make more sense to let an actual web designer take over, and then let me maintain.

                  Confusing Activity with Productivity

                  I was spending hours listening to podcasts about podcasting that were not bad shows. However, I am blessed with my students, my audience, and lots of contacts in the podcasting space. With this in mind, I'm not learning anything from these show. For the investment in time, I'm not learning anything that I can share with you. Meanwhile, I'm reading books that have me thinking, and coming up with new ideas for episodes.

                  Creating Garbage Audio to be Cleaned Up Later

                  If you are doing a podcast with Interview is have the potential guest record something and send it to you. This will help separate the good from the not so good. If this is not a strategy you want to follow I would urge you to make sure the quality of the recording is the best you can get. Recently I've been having people with what we call "Popping P's" where they have the microphone positioned in the wrong place. If you have this situation,  stop the interview and have them reposition the microphone and save "Happy Peanut Butter" if they can do that without causing a pop (technically called a "Plosive") then you are good to go. It not, you or your editor has a long day in front of them.

                  Think Long Term

                  I realize that some of the things we mentioned today cost money. Everything in life will be paid for in one of two currencies: time or money. While I could take the time to brush up on the Web Design skills, it might be smarter to pay someone. It might take money (although Audacity is free) to buy the right software (or to buy a pop filter). Most of the ideas here are based on two things

                  Focus: Know the audience

                  Action: Take steps to serve them and deliver value.

                  My Favorite Podcast Is Rewind

                  I had two people Fred Castenada of the Podcast Reporter and Kim Krajci from Toastmasters 101 send in files for last week's My Favorite Podcast is.. episode that I do every year."

                  Fred loves the No Agenda show for information you can't get any place else and Kim loves Forking Bullshirt as it makes her laugh.

                  New Backpack Studio Replaces Bossjock Studio

                  Backpack Studio is a $10 app for iOs only that makes creating a podcast on your iPhone or iPad super easy. You can even add your image, and show notes and publish them to Libsyn using FTP (are you listening Anhor.fm people).

                  • A HUGE amount of slots for sounds for you to play (great for anyone looking for a jingle pallet
                  • A nice help screen when you start the app
                  • Ability to export in many formats
                  • The audio while recording still has a weird echo, but this is not on the recording
                  
                  

                  Buy it in the Apple store

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Podfest in Orlando in March

                  Podcast Movement in August

                  Logical Weight Loss Podcast

                  Let Me Be Your Podcast Guide

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>6f0ec6b164b844a7bf7f399d01dc3cf1Mon, 07 Jan 2019 05:00:00 -040040:32falsefull652652My Favorite Podcast Is 2018 Edition[1;23]

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  My Favorite Podcast Is 2018

                  CLICK HERE for a PDF featuring expanded descriptions and links to all the shows mentioned

                  Thanks to everyone who sent in their submissions. These are in no apparent order:

                  2:57 My Dad wrote a Porno - Sent in from Anna Seewald from Authentic Parenting - Parenting From the Heart

                  4:44 Assumptions Podcast (with an Atheist and Christian co-host a show ). Sent in from Alexander from Dear Subjects  (help Alexander build the new nation

                  5:32 Hardcore History Sent in from Arnie Chapman the Football History dude. Learn about the history of foot

                  6:57 Films on Trial (which has great debates, and is very unique) -Sent in from Brad of the Cinema Guys (they love movies!)

                  8:13 The Nolecast: Florida State football analysis - Sent in from of the Brandon of the Florida Focus Podcast ( A College Football Podcast)

                  9:26 The Art of Manliness - Sent in from Chris Nesi of the House of Ed Tech Podcast (changing the way teachers teach )

                  10:43 Imaginary Worlds ( Sci-fi genre narrative ) Sent in from Dave of the DC Onscreen podcast (A podcast about the DC Universe, specifically on screen) 

                  11:49 Meet the Holifields ( a great, fun, entertaining behind the scenes of a married couple) Sent in from Eliquitie of the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (Enjoy Food, Enjoy Travel, Enjoy Life )

                  13:29 The Model Health Show  (variety topics in addition to fitness)- Sent in from Ernie of the Snooks and Lovey podcast (insights into a new married couple) 

                  15:10 Crime Writers On  (cause Haley just wanted more Serial talk) - Sent in from Haley Radke of the Adoptees On Podcast (Where Adoptees Discuss the Adoption Experience )

                  17:49 Cliff Ravenscraft Show Sent in from Josh of the Corner Cutters Podcast (all about Solving the Rubik's Cube in record time

                  19:04 Dave predicts Cliff will be a life coach back in 2014

                  20:00 The Remnant with Jonah Goldberg Sent in from Josh of the Saving Elephants Podcast ( conservative values with a mercifully modern twist ) 

                  21:39 Bill Bur's Monday Morning Podcast (it makes Josh laugh, best ad reads ) - Sent in from Josh Liston of the On the Bubble Podcast

                  23:39 Jody Mayberry Sent in from Josh Rivers of the Podcast Experiments Podcast

                  25:28 The Feed the Official Libyn Podcast -Sent in from Justin of the Optimal Living Daily (The Best Blogs Narrated for You Daily)

                  26:27  The Big Story ( In Depth look on Canada, in quick chunks) Sent from Mark Des Cotes of the Resourceful Designer Podcast (helping graphic artists/ web designers)

                  27:28 Uncivil Podcast ( an amazing mix of storytelling and conversation) Sent in from Mark Shapiro MD  of the Explore the Space Podcast (Examining the interface between healthcare & society)

                  28:52 The Newsworthy (a great short podcast with the latest news) Sent in from Matt Rafferty of The Author Inside You Podcast (encourage authors to write and publish their first book). Hear Erica on Podcast Junkies

                  29:58 Reply All (a show about the Internet) Sent in by Max Prescott from of the Aviation News Talk Podcast (General aviation podcast)

                  31:11 Free Field training - Sent in from Mike Wilkerson of the What Cops Watch Podcast (Go behind the badge).  Hear the review of What Cops Watch on the Podcast Review Show. 

                  32:40 The Bill Simmons Podcast - Recorded when Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What? (giving you the nudge you need) guest hosted on the Ask the Podcast Coach.

                  35:37 Philly Who? ( Amazing Interviews from Philadelphia People ) Sent in from Miss Ileane Smith of the Ms Ileane Speaks Podcast ( great social media tips) Ms Ilean might check out Twisted Philly

                  37:54 Online Marketing Made Easy (Amy Porterfield) Sent in from Natalie of the Unreserved Wine Talk. 

                  40:00 Without Fail Sent in from Randy Cantrell of the Grow Great (short business advice delivered daily)) and Leaning Towards Wisdom Podcasts. 

                  41:20 The Jeff Ruebin Jeff Ruebin show ( unique guests with great discussions) Sent in from Sandy of the [1;23]

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  My Favorite Podcast Is 2018

                  CLICK HERE for a PDF featuring expanded descriptions and links to all the shows mentioned

                  Thanks to everyone who sent in their submissions. These are in no apparent order:

                  2:57 My Dad wrote a Porno - Sent in from Anna Seewald from Authentic Parenting - Parenting From the Heart

                  4:44 Assumptions Podcast (with an Atheist and Christian co-host a show ). Sent in from Alexander from Dear Subjects  (help Alexander build the new nation

                  5:32 Hardcore History Sent in from Arnie Chapman the Football History dude. Learn about the history of foot

                  6:57 Films on Trial (which has great debates, and is very unique) -Sent in from Brad of the Cinema Guys (they love movies!)

                  8:13 The Nolecast: Florida State football analysis - Sent in from of the Brandon of the Florida Focus Podcast ( A College Football Podcast)

                  9:26 The Art of Manliness - Sent in from Chris Nesi of the House of Ed Tech Podcast (changing the way teachers teach )

                  10:43 Imaginary Worlds ( Sci-fi genre narrative ) Sent in from Dave of the DC Onscreen podcast (A podcast about the DC Universe, specifically on screen) 

                  11:49 Meet the Holifields ( a great, fun, entertaining behind the scenes of a married couple) Sent in from Eliquitie of the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (Enjoy Food, Enjoy Travel, Enjoy Life )

                  13:29 The Model Health Show  (variety topics in addition to fitness)- Sent in from Ernie of the Snooks and Lovey podcast (insights into a new married couple) 

                  15:10 Crime Writers On  (cause Haley just wanted more Serial talk) - Sent in from Haley Radke of the Adoptees On Podcast (Where Adoptees Discuss the Adoption Experience )

                  17:49 Cliff Ravenscraft Show Sent in from Josh of the Corner Cutters Podcast (all about Solving the Rubik's Cube in record time

                  19:04 Dave predicts Cliff will be a life coach back in 2014

                  20:00 The Remnant with Jonah Goldberg Sent in from Josh of the Saving Elephants Podcast ( conservative values with a mercifully modern twist ) 

                  21:39 Bill Bur's Monday Morning Podcast (it makes Josh laugh, best ad reads ) - Sent in from Josh Liston of the On the Bubble Podcast

                  23:39 Jody Mayberry Sent in from Josh Rivers of the Podcast Experiments Podcast

                  25:28 The Feed the Official Libyn Podcast -Sent in from Justin of the Optimal Living Daily (The Best Blogs Narrated for You Daily)

                  26:27  The Big Story ( In Depth look on Canada, in quick chunks) Sent from Mark Des Cotes of the Resourceful Designer Podcast (helping graphic artists/ web designers)

                  27:28 Uncivil Podcast ( an amazing mix of storytelling and conversation) Sent in from Mark Shapiro MD  of the Explore the Space Podcast (Examining the interface between healthcare & society)

                  28:52 The Newsworthy (a great short podcast with the latest news) Sent in from Matt Rafferty of The Author Inside You Podcast (encourage authors to write and publish their first book). Hear Erica on Podcast Junkies

                  29:58 Reply All (a show about the Internet) Sent in by Max Prescott from of the Aviation News Talk Podcast (General aviation podcast)

                  31:11 Free Field training - Sent in from Mike Wilkerson of the What Cops Watch Podcast (Go behind the badge).  Hear the review of What Cops Watch on the Podcast Review Show. 

                  32:40 The Bill Simmons Podcast - Recorded when Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What? (giving you the nudge you need) guest hosted on the Ask the Podcast Coach.

                  35:37 Philly Who? ( Amazing Interviews from Philadelphia People ) Sent in from Miss Ileane Smith of the Ms Ileane Speaks Podcast ( great social media tips) Ms Ilean might check out Twisted Philly

                  37:54 Online Marketing Made Easy (Amy Porterfield) Sent in from Natalie of the Unreserved Wine Talk. 

                  40:00 Without Fail Sent in from Randy Cantrell of the Grow Great (short business advice delivered daily)) and Leaning Towards Wisdom Podcasts. 

                  41:20 The Jeff Ruebin Jeff Ruebin show ( unique guests with great discussions) Sent in from Sandy of the Made in Museums Podcast (curious museums for curious minds)

                  43:05 Security Now Sent in from Garret of the Good Patron podcast (on supporting musicians) 

                  43:43 Case File (true crime) Sent in from Scott Johnson of the What was that like? Podcast (Real people in unreal situations)

                  46:08 Podcast Rodeo Show Sent in from Scott Orr of the Code 3 Podcast ( Firefighters Podcast) 

                  47:41 On Being - Sent in from Gregory of the Collected Clan (conversational biographies of relatable people)

                  49:40 School of Podcasting (you'e looking at it) - Sent in from Stephen of the Mind Over Stress

                  50:33 Stacking Benjamins Sent in from Steve Stewart at www.stevestewart.me

                  52:00 The Thomas Jefferson Hour (history podcast)  Sent in from Terry of the Discovering America

                  54:07 School of Podcasting - Sent in from Todd of the Keto Confidential (about the Ketogenic Diet)

                  56:13 You Wanna Do What? Sent in from Zack Demopoulos of the Rasing (pa) Rents (tips for Caregivers)

                  58:38 Speaking Your Brand - Sent From Zita of the Ritual Recipes

                  59:14 School of Podcasting - Win Charles

                   Podcast Talent Coach - Sent From Dave Jackson from the School of Podcasting

                  1:01:10 Broken Record (behind the scenes of music) submitted by Eric K Johnson from the Podcast Talent Coach show (helping you create engaging content)

                  Let Me Help You With Your Podcast

                  If you want to learn at your own pace, join the School of Podcasting

                  If you have specific questions or are looking for a Podcast Mentor check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>97585b724c8448e5a9d0e0f4910ab1eeMon, 31 Dec 2018 05:29:31 -040001:13:03falsefull651651Turn Your Podcast Into a Book with Dave ChessenDave Chessen is known as the Kindlepreneur and is the host of the Book Marking Show and has turned his blog into a podcast. His show has a great format as he talks about a strategy in his show and then interviews someone who is using that strategy.
                  Where I've Been: 2 Minute Tips Podcast

                  1:40

                  I was interviewed on the 2 Minute Tips podcast where we talk about my experience as a presenter and my 20 years as a corporate trainer and any tips on making good presentations. Check it out at http://2minutetalktips.com/davewhen

                  My Favorite Podcast Question of the Month

                  2:37

                  If you'd like some exposure for your show it's super easy. Send in your answer and give the following information

                  1. You #1 favorite podcast (only 1)
                  2. Where can I find it (website)
                  3. Why is it your favorite
                  4. Your podcast (if you have one)
                  5. Where can we find your show?
                  6. What is it about?
                  
                  

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                  Deve Chessen Behind the Scenes of Launching a Book

                  4:16

                  I interviewed Dave Chessen for my More Podcast Money podcast, and in listening to the episode I felt you would appreciate it because:

                  • Many podcasters at events have mentioned writing a book
                  • There are plenty of strategies that align in both launching a podcast and launching a book
                  
                  In this interview, you will hear:
                  • Planning with the end in mind
                  • Tips on getting good artwork/book cover on a budget
                  • The importance of editing
                  • How podcasting has helped his brand
                  • How much you can expect to spend on launching a book
                  
                  

                  Check out Dave at Kindlepreneur.com  and his Book Marketing Show

                  amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS)

                  Kindle Keywords article

                  Great Podcast Starter Kit Q2U Podcast Pack

                  28:28

                  If you are looking to start a podcast, this is a great package. 

                  • Cardioid polar pattern is effective in minimizing noise and off-axis audio that can cause feedback.
                  • Frequency response of 44.1 / 48 kHz, 16-bit resolution. Low-latency headphone monitoring w/ a level control.
                  • XLR and USB outputs to record to Mac or Windows-based computer while at the same time connect to a mixer, preamplifier, or PA system.
                  • On/Off switch controls both USB and XLR audio outputs. Microphone is plug and play requiring no driver installation.
                  • Practical & necessary accessories like a mic boom arm that offers 28" of arms reach, a pop filter that softens explosive sounds, & more in the bundle.
                  
                  

                  All this for $105.

                  If you bought similar items

                  Samson Q2U Microphone $59

                  Boom Arm $54

                  Headphones $35

                  Windscreen $3

                  Pop Filter $10

                  Total would be $161 (You save $56)

                  Check it out

                  As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

                  The Software on Dave's Computer

                  32:02

                  Adobe Audition Hindenburg Journalist Pro Evernote Chrome Firefox Camtasia   Podcast I Will Be Loading On My New computer Audacity Mp3 tag Skype Zoom iTunes Droplr Izotope Media Info Backblaze MP3 Skype Recorder Reflector 3 Rescue Time Sony Sound Forge Spotify Title Analyzer Headlinr Pro Auphonic Mentioned In This Episode

                  Kindlepreneur.com 

                  amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS)

                  Long Tail Pro Software

                  Beaver Builder Software

                  Divi Theme

                  Free Baby Steps Podcast Course 

                  Jim Harold

                  Free Headline Tools

                  Work With Me

                  If you are ready to start a podcast www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  If you need a podcast mentor see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwith me

                  ]]>Dave Chessen is known as the Kindlepreneur and is the host of the Book Marking Show and has turned his blog into a podcast. His show has a great format as he talks about a strategy in his show and then interviews someone who is using that strategy.
                  Where I've Been: 2 Minute Tips Podcast

                  1:40

                  I was interviewed on the 2 Minute Tips podcast where we talk about my experience as a presenter and my 20 years as a corporate trainer and any tips on making good presentations. Check it out at http://2minutetalktips.com/davewhen

                  My Favorite Podcast Question of the Month

                  2:37

                  If you'd like some exposure for your show it's super easy. Send in your answer and give the following information

                  1. You #1 favorite podcast (only 1)
                  2. Where can I find it (website)
                  3. Why is it your favorite
                  4. Your podcast (if you have one)
                  5. Where can we find your show?
                  6. What is it about?
                  
                  

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                  Deve Chessen Behind the Scenes of Launching a Book

                  4:16

                  I interviewed Dave Chessen for my More Podcast Money podcast, and in listening to the episode I felt you would appreciate it because:

                  • Many podcasters at events have mentioned writing a book
                  • There are plenty of strategies that align in both launching a podcast and launching a book
                  
                  In this interview, you will hear:
                  • Planning with the end in mind
                  • Tips on getting good artwork/book cover on a budget
                  • The importance of editing
                  • How podcasting has helped his brand
                  • How much you can expect to spend on launching a book
                  
                  

                  Check out Dave at Kindlepreneur.com  and his Book Marketing Show

                  amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS)

                  Kindle Keywords article

                  Great Podcast Starter Kit Q2U Podcast Pack

                  28:28

                  If you are looking to start a podcast, this is a great package. 

                  • Cardioid polar pattern is effective in minimizing noise and off-axis audio that can cause feedback.
                  • Frequency response of 44.1 / 48 kHz, 16-bit resolution. Low-latency headphone monitoring w/ a level control.
                  • XLR and USB outputs to record to Mac or Windows-based computer while at the same time connect to a mixer, preamplifier, or PA system.
                  • On/Off switch controls both USB and XLR audio outputs. Microphone is plug and play requiring no driver installation.
                  • Practical & necessary accessories like a mic boom arm that offers 28" of arms reach, a pop filter that softens explosive sounds, & more in the bundle.
                  
                  

                  All this for $105.

                  If you bought similar items

                  Samson Q2U Microphone $59

                  Boom Arm $54

                  Headphones $35

                  Windscreen $3

                  Pop Filter $10

                  Total would be $161 (You save $56)

                  Check it out

                  As an Amazon Associate, I earn from qualifying purchases

                  The Software on Dave's Computer

                  32:02

                  Adobe Audition Hindenburg Journalist Pro Evernote Chrome Firefox Camtasia   Podcast I Will Be Loading On My New computer Audacity Mp3 tag Skype Zoom iTunes Droplr Izotope Media Info Backblaze MP3 Skype Recorder Reflector 3 Rescue Time Sony Sound Forge Spotify Title Analyzer Headlinr Pro Auphonic Mentioned In This Episode

                  Kindlepreneur.com 

                  amscourse.com ( SELL MORE BOOKS WITH AMAZON BOOK ADS)

                  Long Tail Pro Software

                  Beaver Builder Software

                  Divi Theme

                  Free Baby Steps Podcast Course 

                  Jim Harold

                  Free Headline Tools

                  Work With Me

                  If you are ready to start a podcast www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  If you need a podcast mentor see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwith me

                  ]]>902d8cbf1870487aa5726aa87a193fe4Mon, 24 Dec 2018 05:00:00 -040036:42falsefull650650Loyal Dax Shepard Fans Are Selling Out Theaters 

                  Today we hear from Try Heinritz of the Blacklist Exposed reveal what it was like to see Dax Shepard record his podcast in a sold-out Chicago Theater.

                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  2:53

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  Dax Shepard is Selling Out Theaters so People Can Watch Him Record His Podcast

                  Dax Shepard is the man behind the Arm Chair Expert podcast (voted best one of the best of in Apple Podcasts).  He has taken his show on the road.

                  Here is what it shows when you go to buy Dax Shepperd Tickets:

                  Hi, I'm Dax Shepard, and I love talking to people. I am endlessly fascinated by the messiness of being human, and I find people who are vulnerable and honest about their struggles and shortcomings to be incredibly sexy. I invite you to join me as I explore other people’s stories.

                  We will celebrate, above all, the challenges and setbacks that ultimately lead to growth and betterment.

                  What qualifies me for such an endeavor? More than a decade of sobriety, a degree in Anthropology and four years of improv training. I will attempt to discover human truths without any laboratory work, clinical trials or data collection. I will be, in the great tradition of 16th-century scientists, an Armchair Expert.

                  His event in Los Angelas at The Theatre at Ace Hotel (1600 capacity) in January is also sold out.

                  Tips and insights from Troy

                  4:37

                  • Start on time
                  • Maybe have some sort of playbill so people know what to expect
                  • The warm-up act was great
                  • It was cool that the band customized the music basic on the location
                  • Dax was uber-prepared and next lost control of the conversation
                  • He provided a story that he told the audience he won't include in the podcast
                  
                  You Could Do an Online Event With Two Simple Tools

                  Yes, people may not travel to come to your event, and for those people, you can do an online event using Zoom.us (up to 100 people for $15) and Eventbrite.

                  Eventbrite pricing is 2% + $0.79. If you want to be paid before your event, then the pricing is 3.5% + $1.59. If you want a free event, there are no charges (so if you wanted to sell 100 tickets you could do it for free).  Ticketleap is another option for ticketing

                  Holding a Local Event

                  17:55

                  David Hooper has a history in the music marketing business and held many events. I love both his Big Podcast and Red Podcast. He recently has stepped into the podcast world and has already held two events for podcasters (and has a 93,000-word book coming out in 2019). I've known Dave over a decade (and have appeared on his Music Business Radio show on the radio/podcast). Here are some tips from Dave

                  • Early bird sales can boost sales
                  • Make sure the event fits in with your brand especially when choosing a venue
                  • Ask your network for suggestions on a venue
                  • Some places you may get for free on off nights (like Tuesday)
                  • You need an agenda. Don't "Wing it."
                  • You will probably bring in a PA system sooner than you think.
                  • Make sure there is plenty of time to give attendees a break (food, bathroom, etc) if its a full day event
                  • People appreciate a slower pace than cramming too much content into the vent.
                  • Behind the scenes of his Nashville event.
                  
                  

                  Lots of good bloopers at the end of the show from out talk

                  The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY?

                  44:30

                  I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover new shows, and it also gives us insights into WHY people like podcasts. Please provide the following:

                  1. The name of the show (ONLY ONE)
                  2. The website of the show
                  3. What it's about
                  4. Why you like it 
                  5. Then provide the same about your show (name, location, and what it's about).
                  
                  

                  I need the answer by 12/28/18. Go to the contact page. If you want to record and email it in, please put “December question: in the title

                   

                  Work With Me

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]> 

                  Today we hear from Try Heinritz of the Blacklist Exposed reveal what it was like to see Dax Shepard record his podcast in a sold-out Chicago Theater.

                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  2:53

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  Dax Shepard is Selling Out Theaters so People Can Watch Him Record His Podcast

                  Dax Shepard is the man behind the Arm Chair Expert podcast (voted best one of the best of in Apple Podcasts).  He has taken his show on the road.

                  Here is what it shows when you go to buy Dax Shepperd Tickets:

                  Hi, I'm Dax Shepard, and I love talking to people. I am endlessly fascinated by the messiness of being human, and I find people who are vulnerable and honest about their struggles and shortcomings to be incredibly sexy. I invite you to join me as I explore other people’s stories.

                  We will celebrate, above all, the challenges and setbacks that ultimately lead to growth and betterment.

                  What qualifies me for such an endeavor? More than a decade of sobriety, a degree in Anthropology and four years of improv training. I will attempt to discover human truths without any laboratory work, clinical trials or data collection. I will be, in the great tradition of 16th-century scientists, an Armchair Expert.

                  His event in Los Angelas at The Theatre at Ace Hotel (1600 capacity) in January is also sold out.

                  Tips and insights from Troy

                  4:37

                  • Start on time
                  • Maybe have some sort of playbill so people know what to expect
                  • The warm-up act was great
                  • It was cool that the band customized the music basic on the location
                  • Dax was uber-prepared and next lost control of the conversation
                  • He provided a story that he told the audience he won't include in the podcast
                  
                  You Could Do an Online Event With Two Simple Tools

                  Yes, people may not travel to come to your event, and for those people, you can do an online event using Zoom.us (up to 100 people for $15) and Eventbrite.

                  Eventbrite pricing is 2% + $0.79. If you want to be paid before your event, then the pricing is 3.5% + $1.59. If you want a free event, there are no charges (so if you wanted to sell 100 tickets you could do it for free).  Ticketleap is another option for ticketing

                  Holding a Local Event

                  17:55

                  David Hooper has a history in the music marketing business and held many events. I love both his Big Podcast and Red Podcast. He recently has stepped into the podcast world and has already held two events for podcasters (and has a 93,000-word book coming out in 2019). I've known Dave over a decade (and have appeared on his Music Business Radio show on the radio/podcast). Here are some tips from Dave

                  • Early bird sales can boost sales
                  • Make sure the event fits in with your brand especially when choosing a venue
                  • Ask your network for suggestions on a venue
                  • Some places you may get for free on off nights (like Tuesday)
                  • You need an agenda. Don't "Wing it."
                  • You will probably bring in a PA system sooner than you think.
                  • Make sure there is plenty of time to give attendees a break (food, bathroom, etc) if its a full day event
                  • People appreciate a slower pace than cramming too much content into the vent.
                  • Behind the scenes of his Nashville event.
                  
                  

                  Lots of good bloopers at the end of the show from out talk

                  The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY?

                  44:30

                  I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover new shows, and it also gives us insights into WHY people like podcasts. Please provide the following:

                  1. The name of the show (ONLY ONE)
                  2. The website of the show
                  3. What it's about
                  4. Why you like it 
                  5. Then provide the same about your show (name, location, and what it's about).
                  
                  

                  I need the answer by 12/28/18. Go to the contact page. If you want to record and email it in, please put “December question: in the title

                   

                  Work With Me

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>03a3c10fc3ac418eb10b03d5523d762dMon, 17 Dec 2018 05:00:00 -040048:48falsefull649649Dr. Ryan Gray Prescribes Value and Consistency Above AllToday we are joined from Dr. Ryan Gray from the Medical School Headquarters and he shares his philosophy of starting and growing his podcasts.
                  The question of the Month

                  What is your ONE favorite podcast for 2018? Why is it your favorite, and where can I find it (then tell us about your show and where we can find it)

                  For more information see www.schooolofpodcastin.com/contact

                  Dr. Ryan Gray of the Medical School Headquarters Podcast

                  4:17

                  Ryan is currently publishing seven different shows

                  6:55 Start a website with a positive vibe to help medical students

                  7:55 He was nervous about starting and waiting six months to launch

                  9:30 How by starting too broad he rebranded his show

                  11:00 What enabled him to transition from Doctor to Podcaster?

                  13:45 How he sought out companies that had content that fit his audience

                  15:28 How he goes about adding a show to his network

                  17:40 How his sales pitch is not a sales pitch

                  21:34 How many shows is he planning on launching

                  23:13 How much of the day to day stuff is he doing?

                  24:58 What are his first two employees are doing?

                  26:14 How he had made lifestyle choices to make this work

                  A family that podcasts together stays together

                  28:10 Ryan also has three books and he shares how he put them together and worked with Morgan James Publishing

                  30:10 Ryan's Advice to people wanting to follow in his footsteps but in their niche

                  32:00 Ryan's Experience with NFC Chips (Dave had found some on Moo.com, there are programmable card on Amazon)

                  33:40 Promoting his podcast at events

                  35:50 His biggest success and his biggest failure

                  37:50 Biggest mistakes new podcasters make

                  How do you build an audience - one person at a time

                  39:25 Has he ever missed an episode?

                  Main Takeaways

                  He start by first providing value to his audience - not money, not downloads

                  He does things other people don't (engages people at his booth instead of staring at his phone)

                  His wife supports his plan, and now he is supporting hers. For more on this needing support see the "Three Things Every Podcaster Needs" episode  

                  My WordPress Updated to 5.0 HELP!

                  43:20  If you're website updates automatically you can install a plugin called "Classic Editor"  that makes the new version of Wordpress look like the old version of your website

                  Work With Me
                  ]]>Today we are joined from Dr. Ryan Gray from the Medical School Headquarters and he shares his philosophy of starting and growing his podcasts.
                  The question of the Month

                  What is your ONE favorite podcast for 2018? Why is it your favorite, and where can I find it (then tell us about your show and where we can find it)

                  For more information see www.schooolofpodcastin.com/contact

                  Dr. Ryan Gray of the Medical School Headquarters Podcast

                  4:17

                  Ryan is currently publishing seven different shows

                  6:55 Start a website with a positive vibe to help medical students

                  7:55 He was nervous about starting and waiting six months to launch

                  9:30 How by starting too broad he rebranded his show

                  11:00 What enabled him to transition from Doctor to Podcaster?

                  13:45 How he sought out companies that had content that fit his audience

                  15:28 How he goes about adding a show to his network

                  17:40 How his sales pitch is not a sales pitch

                  21:34 How many shows is he planning on launching

                  23:13 How much of the day to day stuff is he doing?

                  24:58 What are his first two employees are doing?

                  26:14 How he had made lifestyle choices to make this work

                  A family that podcasts together stays together

                  28:10 Ryan also has three books and he shares how he put them together and worked with Morgan James Publishing

                  30:10 Ryan's Advice to people wanting to follow in his footsteps but in their niche

                  32:00 Ryan's Experience with NFC Chips (Dave had found some on Moo.com, there are programmable card on Amazon)

                  33:40 Promoting his podcast at events

                  35:50 His biggest success and his biggest failure

                  37:50 Biggest mistakes new podcasters make

                  How do you build an audience - one person at a time

                  39:25 Has he ever missed an episode?

                  Main Takeaways

                  He start by first providing value to his audience - not money, not downloads

                  He does things other people don't (engages people at his booth instead of staring at his phone)

                  His wife supports his plan, and now he is supporting hers. For more on this needing support see the "Three Things Every Podcaster Needs" episode  

                  My WordPress Updated to 5.0 HELP!

                  43:20  If you're website updates automatically you can install a plugin called "Classic Editor"  that makes the new version of Wordpress look like the old version of your website

                  Work With Me
                  ]]>a78f13f00c984aa28ca478a2a236817aMon, 10 Dec 2018 05:00:00 -040046:39falsefull64864811 Steps To Grow Your Podcast Audience1:30

                  Chris Husby shares how his show devoted to discussing Special Teams topics and interviewing some of the biggest special teams names in the NFL and beyond! has allowed him to talk to some of his favorite NFL players. Check it out the 4th Down Experience

                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  3:34

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY?

                  I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover new shows, and it also gives us insights into WHY people like podcasts. Please provide the following:

                  1. The name of the show
                  2. The website of the show
                  3. What it's about
                  4. Why you like it 
                  5. Then provide the same about your show (name, location, and what it's about).
                  
                  

                  I need the answer by 12/28/18. Go to the contact page. If you want to record and email it in, please put "December question: in the title

                  How to Grow Your Podcast Audience 1. Give Your Audience What They Want

                  7:14

                  • Know who your target audience.
                  
                  

                  Some things you’ll want to have to create your target client avatar are:

                  Name Age Occupation Brands They Use + Purchase From What Kind Of Language They Use Where They Spend Their Time Their Pain Points What They Hope To Achieve + Accomplish

                  STALK your target audience.

                  • Participate in online groups to listen to what they are talking
                  • Use something like Google Forms to create an audience survey (see this episode on creating surveys)
                  • Get some constructive feedback from your show. This needs to come from someone who you feel is your target audience
                  • Go to Amazon and look at books and see what is in the table of contents
                  • Kindle Unlimited has access to magazines (see what the magazines are writing about)
                  • Check your stats and look for trends
                  • Have good audio quality. If you use a Yetti, make sure you are using it properly. Do not use the built-in microphone of your laptop
                  
                  2. Make Your Titles Count

                  14:03

                  • The titles of your episodes can boost the number of downloads. Do NOT name your show NAME OF PODCAST EPISODE 16
                  • Try to have at least 300 words for your show notes
                  • Make sure your listing in Apple podcasts has the proper link to your website
                  
                  3. Get Your Podcast On Their Device

                  16:55

                  • • Have subscribed buttons for Apple and Google Podcasts, Stitcher, TuneIn, Spotify
                    
                    
                  
                  
                  • Have directions with a screenshot on how to subscribe
                  • Show them how to subscribe on Facebook and YouTube
                  • Get an app if your audience isn't too technical
                  • I use the Subscribe and Follow Plugin for my Subscribe Page
                  
                  4. Make It Easy To Share Your Show

                  23:00

                  • My favorite plugin for this is Social Warfare
                  • Click to tweet (free)
                  • NFC Business Card ( from Moo $22 for 20). NFC Business Cards should work with most Android devices and newer iPhones. Digital Business Cards work with any NFC-enabled mobile device. Here is a video https://youtu.be/tn3rHz9JR5I Sadly Apple aren’t playing ball right now. That’s not to say things won’t change in the future though – and we’ll certainly keep a spot warm for them on Team NFC!
                  • Create Show notes worth Sharing
                  
                  5 Get On Other Shows

                  26:55

                  • Others shows have podcast listeners
                  • Do your research
                  • Do you bring value to their audience?
                  • Be personal - no form letters
                  • Help a Reporter Out
                  • PodcastGuests.com 
                  • Be the guest you'd want to have on your show
                  
                  6 Interview Other Similar Podcasts Hosts

                  29:47

                  • Can they bring value to your audience?
                  • Do a unique interview that inspires them to share
                  • Do all the work for them so all they have to do is copy and share
                  • Realize this may not boost downloads, but it boosts your network
                  • Podcastguests.com
                  
                  7. Use Social Media

                  32:28

                  • Ask your target audience what platforms they use
                  • Promote on those platforms
                  • Direct them to a page to listen and subscribe
                  • Automate Your Sharing (Libsyn, Blubrry, IFTT)
                  • Consider adding your show to youTube
                  • Check out Recur Post (mentioned in episode 646 with Steph Taylor )
                  
                  8 Pay For Exposure

                  36:34

                  • Facebook ads
                  • Spotify Ads
                  • Overcast.fm ads
                  • Cheapest I've heard of $2 per subscriber (and often more like $4 per subscriber)
                  • You might want to advertise on other shows
                  
                  9 Always Be Promoting

                  40:35

                  • Setup a signature in your email with a link to your website. If you use Gmail, you can set this up. For a slightly "fancy" email check out Wise Stamp
                  • Use a system like Slick Text ( text  ' sop ' to 31996 and you will get two links to subscribe on Android or Apple )
                  • You might consider giving out T-shirts or posters to put in the back seat windows of your car from Teepublic
                  • Get business cards that promote your show (with or without your contact information). Cards from Moo are roughly 30 cents each. Gotprint.com has even cheaper prices.
                  
                  10 Go To Events

                  44:12

                  • Go to Podcasting Events - not to grow your audience, but your network
                  • More importantly, go to events in your niche
                  • Check out www.meetup.com
                  
                  11. Build Your Promotion Team

                  47:07

                  • If anyone contacts you via email or other outlets, respond
                  • Check out the free course on networking at https://www.advancedhumandynamics.com/ 
                  
                  Moving Forward:

                  You need to make it interesting:

                  Everything has been said before, but it’s never been said by you. Your point of view is what makes you interesting. — Jory MacKay You might ask yourself, "how can I cover this in a way that only I can?"

                  Sean MCabe had mentioned how there is are things you feel comfortable with, and there are things that nobody is talking about. Your content is where those two intersect.

                  Be Patient

                  It took Seth Godin four years to pull away from being "just another blogger" to being, well, Seth Godin.

                  It took Jerry Seinfeld 17 years to have his show (he appeared on the Tonight Show for nine years before getting his own show, which was almost canceled)

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Emily Prokop and the Story Behind Podcast

                  10 Thousands Downloads Per Episode in Five Months Noah Tetzner Interview

                  Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

                  FNC and Regular Business Cards From 1:30

                  Chris Husby shares how his show devoted to discussing Special Teams topics and interviewing some of the biggest special teams names in the NFL and beyond! has allowed him to talk to some of his favorite NFL players. Check it out the 4th Down Experience

                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  3:34

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  The Question of the Month: What is Your (ONE) Favorite Podcast And WHY?

                  I do this every year for the last episode of the year. It's a great way to discover new shows, and it also gives us insights into WHY people like podcasts. Please provide the following:

                  1. The name of the show
                  2. The website of the show
                  3. What it's about
                  4. Why you like it 
                  5. Then provide the same about your show (name, location, and what it's about).
                  
                  

                  I need the answer by 12/28/18. Go to the contact page. If you want to record and email it in, please put "December question: in the title

                  How to Grow Your Podcast Audience 1. Give Your Audience What They Want

                  7:14

                  • Know who your target audience.
                  
                  

                  Some things you’ll want to have to create your target client avatar are:

                  Name Age Occupation Brands They Use + Purchase From What Kind Of Language They Use Where They Spend Their Time Their Pain Points What They Hope To Achieve + Accomplish

                  STALK your target audience.

                  • Participate in online groups to listen to what they are talking
                  • Use something like Google Forms to create an audience survey (see this episode on creating surveys)
                  • Get some constructive feedback from your show. This needs to come from someone who you feel is your target audience
                  • Go to Amazon and look at books and see what is in the table of contents
                  • Kindle Unlimited has access to magazines (see what the magazines are writing about)
                  • Check your stats and look for trends
                  • Have good audio quality. If you use a Yetti, make sure you are using it properly. Do not use the built-in microphone of your laptop
                  
                  2. Make Your Titles Count

                  14:03

                  • The titles of your episodes can boost the number of downloads. Do NOT name your show NAME OF PODCAST EPISODE 16
                  • Try to have at least 300 words for your show notes
                  • Make sure your listing in Apple podcasts has the proper link to your website
                  
                  3. Get Your Podcast On Their Device

                  16:55

                  • • Have subscribed buttons for Apple and Google Podcasts, Stitcher, TuneIn, Spotify
                    
                    
                  
                  
                  • Have directions with a screenshot on how to subscribe
                  • Show them how to subscribe on Facebook and YouTube
                  • Get an app if your audience isn't too technical
                  • I use the Subscribe and Follow Plugin for my Subscribe Page
                  
                  4. Make It Easy To Share Your Show

                  23:00

                  • My favorite plugin for this is Social Warfare
                  • Click to tweet (free)
                  • NFC Business Card ( from Moo $22 for 20). NFC Business Cards should work with most Android devices and newer iPhones. Digital Business Cards work with any NFC-enabled mobile device. Here is a video https://youtu.be/tn3rHz9JR5I Sadly Apple aren’t playing ball right now. That’s not to say things won’t change in the future though – and we’ll certainly keep a spot warm for them on Team NFC!
                  • Create Show notes worth Sharing
                  
                  5 Get On Other Shows

                  26:55

                  • Others shows have podcast listeners
                  • Do your research
                  • Do you bring value to their audience?
                  • Be personal - no form letters
                  • Help a Reporter Out
                  • PodcastGuests.com 
                  • Be the guest you'd want to have on your show
                  
                  6 Interview Other Similar Podcasts Hosts

                  29:47

                  • Can they bring value to your audience?
                  • Do a unique interview that inspires them to share
                  • Do all the work for them so all they have to do is copy and share
                  • Realize this may not boost downloads, but it boosts your network
                  • Podcastguests.com
                  
                  7. Use Social Media

                  32:28

                  • Ask your target audience what platforms they use
                  • Promote on those platforms
                  • Direct them to a page to listen and subscribe
                  • Automate Your Sharing (Libsyn, Blubrry, IFTT)
                  • Consider adding your show to youTube
                  • Check out Recur Post (mentioned in episode 646 with Steph Taylor )
                  
                  8 Pay For Exposure

                  36:34

                  • Facebook ads
                  • Spotify Ads
                  • Overcast.fm ads
                  • Cheapest I've heard of $2 per subscriber (and often more like $4 per subscriber)
                  • You might want to advertise on other shows
                  
                  9 Always Be Promoting

                  40:35

                  • Setup a signature in your email with a link to your website. If you use Gmail, you can set this up. For a slightly "fancy" email check out Wise Stamp
                  • Use a system like Slick Text ( text  ' sop ' to 31996 and you will get two links to subscribe on Android or Apple )
                  • You might consider giving out T-shirts or posters to put in the back seat windows of your car from Teepublic
                  • Get business cards that promote your show (with or without your contact information). Cards from Moo are roughly 30 cents each. Gotprint.com has even cheaper prices.
                  
                  10 Go To Events

                  44:12

                  • Go to Podcasting Events - not to grow your audience, but your network
                  • More importantly, go to events in your niche
                  • Check out www.meetup.com
                  
                  11. Build Your Promotion Team

                  47:07

                  • If anyone contacts you via email or other outlets, respond
                  • Check out the free course on networking at https://www.advancedhumandynamics.com/ 
                  
                  Moving Forward:

                  You need to make it interesting:

                  Everything has been said before, but it’s never been said by you. Your point of view is what makes you interesting. — Jory MacKay You might ask yourself, "how can I cover this in a way that only I can?"

                  Sean MCabe had mentioned how there is are things you feel comfortable with, and there are things that nobody is talking about. Your content is where those two intersect.

                  Be Patient

                  It took Seth Godin four years to pull away from being "just another blogger" to being, well, Seth Godin.

                  It took Jerry Seinfeld 17 years to have his show (he appeared on the Tonight Show for nine years before getting his own show, which was almost canceled)

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Emily Prokop and the Story Behind Podcast

                  10 Thousands Downloads Per Episode in Five Months Noah Tetzner Interview

                  Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup

                  FNC and Regular Business Cards From Moo

                  A Star is Born Video Clip

                  Recur Post (mentioned in episode 646 with Steph Taylor )

                  Teepublic for t-shirts

                  Moo for business cards

                  Social Warfare Plugin

                  Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

                  Let Me Help You Start Your Podcast
                  ]]>0aa3bdebc27643a780f0f5c7e23c9f06Mon, 03 Dec 2018 05:00:00 -040055:36falsefull647647Where Are All These Downloads Coming From? Steph Taylor on Tracking the Source of Your ListenersSPONSOR: Focusrite USB Interfaces

                  2:40

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  Libsyn.com Rolls Out Custom Tracking Codes

                  3:21

                  Libsyn.com recently rolled out custom tracking codes for those on their advanced stats. This allows you to enter a code(s) for an episode so you can track where your podcast comes from. Most podcast hosting platforms give you access to geographic data, and insight into what apps people are using as well as the number of downloads. The good news is anybody can share your podcast. I've known people who had giant boosts in downloads by having a popular blog link to their website. If you had a tracking code for that episode on your website, you would get more than "A player" or "A browser" you would be able to see the source of your downloads. 

                  In doing a quick test I made a link for my newsletter, and more my website so I could see that yes, both of those sources had people listening to my episode. 

                  Get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                   

                  What If I Don't Have a Libsyn Account?

                  You can use what are called UTM (Urchin Tracking Module) which is a format used by Google to track things. You can go to https://ga-dev-tools.appspot.com/campaign-url-builder/ to create a campaign. Here is a link to a video that explains it (from Google)

                  Steph Taylor From the Socialite Podcast Sheds Some Light on UTMs

                  7:48

                  I met Steph at We Are Podcast 2018 in Melbourne Australia. She is awesome, and once saved me from a giant cockroach (a long story for another time). She's only been podcasting for around six months and is having huge success (thousands of downloads). Check out her show "Socialite" at https://stephtaylor.co/

                  Much like the Libsyn Custom Link, you can use a UTM to track where your show is being heard (the source). 

                  Some other takeaways from my talk with Stephanie:

                  How to know what social media platform to use

                  The social network that you may not be using

                  She uses Recur Post to automate some of her postings

                  She uses a Pinterest template from Creative Market

                  How she uses automationagency.com to trim down her publishing stress

                  Because of her podcast, she got to speak at We Are Podcast 

                  Her strategy to maximize her launch

                  The Question of the Month: What is the Book You Refer to People the Most?

                  28:29

                  Jonathan Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- The Bible

                  Paul from the Fight Through Podcast like the Fighting Through Book (his Dad is the author)

                  Dennis Looney from the Gridlock MBA - All Marketers Are Liars By Seth Godin

                  Josh Liston On the Bubble Podcast - A Man Called Ove (Fiction), H is for Hawk (non Fiction), The Halo Effect (business)

                  Stephanie from the Virtual Ex Pat - Global Soul 

                  Todd Brant from the Why Urology podcast - Quiet the Power of Introverts 

                  Win from Ask Win - Big Magic  and her own book I, Win (about her journey with Cerebral Palsy) 

                  John Friedl (Professor Slots) - Persuasion (only 200 years old) and The Deed of Paksenarrion (fantasy literature trilogy)

                  The Question of the Month For December

                  43:32

                  For December it is time for your yearly tradition of answering the question, 

                  "What is the ONE podcast (if you can only pick one) podcast (your favorite). Where can we find it? And WHY is it your favorite. Lastly, where can we find your show and what is it about?

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact (if you record and email it, please put "December question of the month)

                   

                  Mentioned in this Episode

                  Link to Official Google Video on Google UTM and URL Builder ( https://youtu.be/pNRgUq5sDhc )

                  Google Analytics Academy from Google

                  Recur Post (Automated posting)

                  Creative Market (Graphic Templates)

                   Focusrite 2i2

                  Free Course on Google Analytics

                  Web Hosting and Domain Names

                  Get a free book at Audible

                  Sign Up To Be an Audible Affiliate

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  If you're looking for step by step self-paced tutorials go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start (and start a monthly membership)

                  If you are looking for consulting or mentorship see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>SPONSOR: Focusrite USB Interfaces

                  2:40

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                  Libsyn.com Rolls Out Custom Tracking Codes

                  3:21

                  Libsyn.com recently rolled out custom tracking codes for those on their advanced stats. This allows you to enter a code(s) for an episode so you can track where your podcast comes from. Most podcast hosting platforms give you access to geographic data, and insight into what apps people are using as well as the number of downloads. The good news is anybody can share your podcast. I've known people who had giant boosts in downloads by having a popular blog link to their website. If you had a tracking code for that episode on your website, you would get more than "A player" or "A browser" you would be able to see the source of your downloads. 

                  In doing a quick test I made a link for my newsletter, and more my website so I could see that yes, both of those sources had people listening to my episode. 

                  Get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                   

                  What If I Don't Have a Libsyn Account?

                  You can use what are called UTM (Urchin Tracking Module) which is a format used by Google to track things. You can go to https://ga-dev-tools.appspot.com/campaign-url-builder/ to create a campaign. Here is a link to a video that explains it (from Google)

                  Steph Taylor From the Socialite Podcast Sheds Some Light on UTMs

                  7:48

                  I met Steph at We Are Podcast 2018 in Melbourne Australia. She is awesome, and once saved me from a giant cockroach (a long story for another time). She's only been podcasting for around six months and is having huge success (thousands of downloads). Check out her show "Socialite" at https://stephtaylor.co/

                  Much like the Libsyn Custom Link, you can use a UTM to track where your show is being heard (the source). 

                  Some other takeaways from my talk with Stephanie:

                  How to know what social media platform to use

                  The social network that you may not be using

                  She uses Recur Post to automate some of her postings

                  She uses a Pinterest template from Creative Market

                  How she uses automationagency.com to trim down her publishing stress

                  Because of her podcast, she got to speak at We Are Podcast 

                  Her strategy to maximize her launch

                  The Question of the Month: What is the Book You Refer to People the Most?

                  28:29

                  Jonathan Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- The Bible

                  Paul from the Fight Through Podcast like the Fighting Through Book (his Dad is the author)

                  Dennis Looney from the Gridlock MBA - All Marketers Are Liars By Seth Godin

                  Josh Liston On the Bubble Podcast - A Man Called Ove (Fiction), H is for Hawk (non Fiction), The Halo Effect (business)

                  Stephanie from the Virtual Ex Pat - Global Soul 

                  Todd Brant from the Why Urology podcast - Quiet the Power of Introverts 

                  Win from Ask Win - Big Magic  and her own book I, Win (about her journey with Cerebral Palsy) 

                  John Friedl (Professor Slots) - Persuasion (only 200 years old) and The Deed of Paksenarrion (fantasy literature trilogy)

                  The Question of the Month For December

                  43:32

                  For December it is time for your yearly tradition of answering the question, 

                  "What is the ONE podcast (if you can only pick one) podcast (your favorite). Where can we find it? And WHY is it your favorite. Lastly, where can we find your show and what is it about?

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact (if you record and email it, please put "December question of the month)

                   

                  Mentioned in this Episode

                  Link to Official Google Video on Google UTM and URL Builder ( https://youtu.be/pNRgUq5sDhc )

                  Google Analytics Academy from Google

                  Recur Post (Automated posting)

                  Creative Market (Graphic Templates)

                   Focusrite 2i2

                  Free Course on Google Analytics

                  Web Hosting and Domain Names

                  Get a free book at Audible

                  Sign Up To Be an Audible Affiliate

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  If you're looking for step by step self-paced tutorials go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start (and start a monthly membership)

                  If you are looking for consulting or mentorship see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>d54235f258fb42719c9d10fe5fc7f5c5Mon, 26 Nov 2018 05:00:00 -040047:35falsefull646646The Courage to Make Mediocre Things - Cathy Heller from Don't Keep Your Day Job 

                  Cathy Heller is a talented musician. She's been signed by two major record labels, but unfortunately, she's also been dropped by two record labels. I've always told podcasters to go to their potential audience and find out what kind of content they need. That is exactly what Cathy did, and it worked. She found out what type of music was being licensed into commercials, TV, and movies. When she created the type of music her audience (producers) needed it worked to the tune of hundreds of thousands of dollars. When things were going great, how did she pour gasoline on her success? She started a podcast (Don't Keep Your Day Job).

                  A Podcast Started in the Closet Now Has Three Million Downloads

                  Here are some points from my talk with Cathy Heller:

                  People are thirsty to hear what is really going on their life as social media shows a filtered view 

                  Cathy shares how as a musician she got a record deal twice and was dropped twice - how she pushed through

                  She was making a decent amount of cash working a job that didn't fit her purpose

                  She looked into what was working in the music business and the politely persistent 

                  She created 30 mediocre songs as she worked on making the type of music that would work in commercials, movie, TV, etc and threw them away.

                  The difference between a hobby and a business is when you think of doing something for other people. 

                  Everyone has to start off being mediocre. It takes time and courage to start mediocre and then work on polishing your craft.

                  Her success was in an area that she never planned on, but people starting asking, "How do I do this?"

                  She said, "What the heck, let's see what happens with this."

                  Her music leads to licenses which lead to her agency, which lead to her course, which leads to live events and all of these item fed each other.

                  She started her podcast 21 months ago in a close and now has over 3 million downloads

                  She had to do something that made her stand out. 

                  She did what she said she would do. 

                  For more information check out her website at www.dontkeepyourdayjob.com

                  How To Go “All In” on your Dream Job

                  Tim Paige has done what many podcasters have dreamed of, he quit his day job. In a podcast on Facebook, he shared how he did it.

                  Some people feel that the one thing keeping them from “Making it” is this really inconvenient thing called their day job. Their “side hustle” is currently bringing in $34 a month, but for some reason they think that if they only quit their job the pressure of seeing your life's savings being caught on fire will inspire you to leap into action to find a way anyway to make a living “Doing what they love.” So I love this report from the front lines on how Tim actually quit his day job. Check out Tim at thevoiceoftimpaige.com or www.makemyintro.com

                  Here are some key points: Don't quit your day job until it is costing you more money than keeping your day job. So if you turned down 40,000 worth of work because it conflicted with your 30,000 jobs, then it's time to quit your day job. This was the case for Tim.

                  Tim also has a TREMENDOUSLY SUPPORTIVE Spouse. For more on this check out my last episode, The Three Things Every Podcast Needs (positioning yourself for the long haul).

                  Tim got out of debt so that his expenses were minimal after quitting his job. He had three jobs doing anything he could to get out of debt and it took him three years.

                  For the first three years of his side hustle, he reinvested in his business.

                  Be open to opportunity. He didn't turn down jobs – even if he didn't want to do it. This makes him appreciate it when “dream jobs” come along.

                  Get your mind right. When he panics, finds himself envious of others, he is not doing his best work. This hurts his business.

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Episode 100 of Cathy's show 

                  Podcast Mentorship Program

                  Monthly Membership to Start Your Podcast

                  ]]> 

                  Cathy Heller is a talented musician. She's been signed by two major record labels, but unfortunately, she's also been dropped by two record labels. I've always told podcasters to go to their potential audience and find out what kind of content they need. That is exactly what Cathy did, and it worked. She found out what type of music was being licensed into commercials, TV, and movies. When she created the type of music her audience (producers) needed it worked to the tune of hundreds of thousands of dollars. When things were going great, how did she pour gasoline on her success? She started a podcast (Don't Keep Your Day Job).

                  A Podcast Started in the Closet Now Has Three Million Downloads

                  Here are some points from my talk with Cathy Heller:

                  People are thirsty to hear what is really going on their life as social media shows a filtered view 

                  Cathy shares how as a musician she got a record deal twice and was dropped twice - how she pushed through

                  She was making a decent amount of cash working a job that didn't fit her purpose

                  She looked into what was working in the music business and the politely persistent 

                  She created 30 mediocre songs as she worked on making the type of music that would work in commercials, movie, TV, etc and threw them away.

                  The difference between a hobby and a business is when you think of doing something for other people. 

                  Everyone has to start off being mediocre. It takes time and courage to start mediocre and then work on polishing your craft.

                  Her success was in an area that she never planned on, but people starting asking, "How do I do this?"

                  She said, "What the heck, let's see what happens with this."

                  Her music leads to licenses which lead to her agency, which lead to her course, which leads to live events and all of these item fed each other.

                  She started her podcast 21 months ago in a close and now has over 3 million downloads

                  She had to do something that made her stand out. 

                  She did what she said she would do. 

                  For more information check out her website at www.dontkeepyourdayjob.com

                  How To Go “All In” on your Dream Job

                  Tim Paige has done what many podcasters have dreamed of, he quit his day job. In a podcast on Facebook, he shared how he did it.

                  Some people feel that the one thing keeping them from “Making it” is this really inconvenient thing called their day job. Their “side hustle” is currently bringing in $34 a month, but for some reason they think that if they only quit their job the pressure of seeing your life's savings being caught on fire will inspire you to leap into action to find a way anyway to make a living “Doing what they love.” So I love this report from the front lines on how Tim actually quit his day job. Check out Tim at thevoiceoftimpaige.com or www.makemyintro.com

                  Here are some key points: Don't quit your day job until it is costing you more money than keeping your day job. So if you turned down 40,000 worth of work because it conflicted with your 30,000 jobs, then it's time to quit your day job. This was the case for Tim.

                  Tim also has a TREMENDOUSLY SUPPORTIVE Spouse. For more on this check out my last episode, The Three Things Every Podcast Needs (positioning yourself for the long haul).

                  Tim got out of debt so that his expenses were minimal after quitting his job. He had three jobs doing anything he could to get out of debt and it took him three years.

                  For the first three years of his side hustle, he reinvested in his business.

                  Be open to opportunity. He didn't turn down jobs – even if he didn't want to do it. This makes him appreciate it when “dream jobs” come along.

                  Get your mind right. When he panics, finds himself envious of others, he is not doing his best work. This hurts his business.

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Episode 100 of Cathy's show 

                  Podcast Mentorship Program

                  Monthly Membership to Start Your Podcast

                  ]]>e1adf3b6c97b4397ad4b41fd165f8197Mon, 19 Nov 2018 05:00:00 -040042:40falsefull645645Positioning Your Podcast For the Long Haul How do I do so many podcasts? I get that question all the time. How do I stay consistent? How do I set my podcast up for the Long Haul? I'm fresh back from Speaking at DC Podfest, and I did a new version of the presentation called "3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting" and this is a revamped version of an episode I did years ago (with new information and new insights). 

                  2:45 How podcasting is like an iceberg, and today we are talking about the part of the iceberg that is under the water, but still important

                  Podcast Mentorship and Launching Pad

                  I have a mentoring program where I work with you, but as the new year is right around the corner I wanted to create a limited time program with limited access. Here are the details

                  We meet for six weeks to get your podcast up and running. These calls will be recorded.

                  I will help you research your topic to help ensure you contact impacts and inspires your audience

                  You will have clearly defined goals for your show 

                  You will have the best podcasting gear that fits your budget

                  You will have instant Access to me during this six weeks. With this in mind, I'm offering this to a very few people. 

                  Our coaching calls will be used to produce a new podcast spotlighting the making of your show, and giving your more promotion. 

                  You also get a year of membership at the School of Podcasting (which includes more group coaching, private Facebook group, and courses)

                  If you are interested, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/youpodcastlaunch

                  Homework: Question of the Month

                  5:55

                  At the end of the month, I like to feature a podcast with your voice in it. I ask a question, and we all learn together. 

                  This month's question is "What is the book you refer the most?" I'd love to hear your answer. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact 

                  and submit your answer (put "November Question" if you email me).  I need the answer by November 23rd, 2018

                  Also, if you have found love via podcasting, I am working on the question of the month for February. 

                  3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting (2018 Version)

                  7:52

                  The three things you need are

                  Attitude

                  This is the "I think I can, I think I can." It does take some time to get your podcast momentum going (your podcast is a bit like a Locomotive - not a race car)

                  It's not all about downloads, and think about being in front of a room of "only 200" people

                  11:55 Why monthly download stats are crap (or at least misleading)

                  14:25 What podcasters can learn from Oprah

                  16:10 How to calculate how many downloads you should be getting

                  Health

                  We are going to dig down, work longer, work harder, and go, go, go, and we end up burning ourselves out

                  21:05 Robby Tonins the great motivational speaker who loves to push you to sleep when you're dead

                  23:00 The suicide rate has risen 30% since 1999 in America. Podcasters/Entrepreneurs may be more prone to become depressed

                  25:15 There is no such thing as "multitasking."

                  26:20 Avoid the drive-through

                  26:50 Dave's new wife Alexa

                  Support

                  28:30 Relationships can cause Stress

                  30:15 Marriage Advice from the Divorced Guy

                  31:05 Be sure you know what your partner is thinking instead of guessing

                  33:30 How much time do you have a day to devote to your podcast?

                  35:15 Generalities of Men and Women

                  37:05 The Crazy Cycle

                  38:20 How to respond to Zingers

                  39:18 Handling Stalemates

                  39:50 Date Night on Steroids

                  Final Thoughts

                  41:43 Fast food is Not Fast

                  43:05 I love Evernote

                  44:05 I love Todoist

                  44:30 Do not read your email first thing in the morning

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  DC Podfest

                  Love and Respect Book

                  The Seven Habits of Highly Productive People

                  Get Free month a Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                  School of Podcasting

                  Your Podcast Launch Mentorship Program

                  ]]>How do I do so many podcasts? I get that question all the time. How do I stay consistent? How do I set my podcast up for the Long Haul? I'm fresh back from Speaking at DC Podfest, and I did a new version of the presentation called "3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting" and this is a revamped version of an episode I did years ago (with new information and new insights). 

                  2:45 How podcasting is like an iceberg, and today we are talking about the part of the iceberg that is under the water, but still important

                  Podcast Mentorship and Launching Pad

                  I have a mentoring program where I work with you, but as the new year is right around the corner I wanted to create a limited time program with limited access. Here are the details

                  We meet for six weeks to get your podcast up and running. These calls will be recorded.

                  I will help you research your topic to help ensure you contact impacts and inspires your audience

                  You will have clearly defined goals for your show 

                  You will have the best podcasting gear that fits your budget

                  You will have instant Access to me during this six weeks. With this in mind, I'm offering this to a very few people. 

                  Our coaching calls will be used to produce a new podcast spotlighting the making of your show, and giving your more promotion. 

                  You also get a year of membership at the School of Podcasting (which includes more group coaching, private Facebook group, and courses)

                  If you are interested, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/youpodcastlaunch

                  Homework: Question of the Month

                  5:55

                  At the end of the month, I like to feature a podcast with your voice in it. I ask a question, and we all learn together. 

                  This month's question is "What is the book you refer the most?" I'd love to hear your answer. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact 

                  and submit your answer (put "November Question" if you email me).  I need the answer by November 23rd, 2018

                  Also, if you have found love via podcasting, I am working on the question of the month for February. 

                  3 Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing With Microphones, Downloads, Or Hosting (2018 Version)

                  7:52

                  The three things you need are

                  Attitude

                  This is the "I think I can, I think I can." It does take some time to get your podcast momentum going (your podcast is a bit like a Locomotive - not a race car)

                  It's not all about downloads, and think about being in front of a room of "only 200" people

                  11:55 Why monthly download stats are crap (or at least misleading)

                  14:25 What podcasters can learn from Oprah

                  16:10 How to calculate how many downloads you should be getting

                  Health

                  We are going to dig down, work longer, work harder, and go, go, go, and we end up burning ourselves out

                  21:05 Robby Tonins the great motivational speaker who loves to push you to sleep when you're dead

                  23:00 The suicide rate has risen 30% since 1999 in America. Podcasters/Entrepreneurs may be more prone to become depressed

                  25:15 There is no such thing as "multitasking."

                  26:20 Avoid the drive-through

                  26:50 Dave's new wife Alexa

                  Support

                  28:30 Relationships can cause Stress

                  30:15 Marriage Advice from the Divorced Guy

                  31:05 Be sure you know what your partner is thinking instead of guessing

                  33:30 How much time do you have a day to devote to your podcast?

                  35:15 Generalities of Men and Women

                  37:05 The Crazy Cycle

                  38:20 How to respond to Zingers

                  39:18 Handling Stalemates

                  39:50 Date Night on Steroids

                  Final Thoughts

                  41:43 Fast food is Not Fast

                  43:05 I love Evernote

                  44:05 I love Todoist

                  44:30 Do not read your email first thing in the morning

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  DC Podfest

                  Love and Respect Book

                  The Seven Habits of Highly Productive People

                  Get Free month a Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                  School of Podcasting

                  Your Podcast Launch Mentorship Program

                  ]]>33f2c30c98744aa78b250b149815820cMon, 12 Nov 2018 05:00:00 -040048:56falsefull644644How to Start a Podcast Network: The Good, the Bad, the UglyWe all want more listeners. We feel we have tried everything (have we?) and one option that all the "big" shows seem to have in common is they are part of a Podcast Network. Many of these require large amounts of download that your show may not achieve. You may be thinking of starting your own Podcast Network. I've interviewed some friends of mine recently (and some over the years) about their networks and assembled all that information into this episode. If creating a podcast network is not for you (it is a lot of work) you may be thinking that joining a network is a better choice. I share some things you might consider before joining.
                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                   

                  Podcast Network Interviews:
                  • Glen Hebbert - Horse Radio Network
                  • Daniel J Lewis - Noodle.mx Network
                  • Mignon Fogarty - Quick and Dirty Tips 
                  • Christopher Brian Jones - Trek.fm
                  • Stephen Jondrew - Gonna Geek
                  • Chris Nesi - Education Podcast Network
                  
                  So You Want to Start Your Own Podcast Network

                  5:10

                  You need to be able to answer the question, "Why do you want to start a podcast"

                  There are two type of networks. One is run as a business, and the other is focused more on cross-promotion (or a mixture of both).

                  14: 40 A network where the shows are around a single niche (Horses, hiking, dancing, education, microbrews, etc) are easier to monetize, easier to optimize on the web.

                  Naming your network should be obvious. A cryptic name will slow the growth of your network.

                  16:17 Create two logos (square and rectangle) and keep it simple. Make sure it looks good small, or huge. Don't make the logo yourself unless you're a designer. Check out podcastdesigns.com (tell them the School of Podcasting sent you) and there are other services like Kappa 99, 99 Designs, where many artists create your artwork and you select the best. I recently used Kappa99 for my Six Shooter podcast and used their "one time jobs"  (under the More menu) to have my artwork done for $49.

                  20: 40 Define what your podcast network's purpose is. Define what your network will do for the members of the network.

                  23:00 How to add a show to your network. Start off with a general show, and then expand out and niche out. Have your criteria in place to help you decide if a podcast fits. For example, Daniel J Lewis only wants clean shows on his network.

                  26:58 How to add hosts to your network. Glenn and Christopher audition their hosts by bringing them on the podcasts as a guest. Most hosts don't want to work with a brand new show as you are not bringing anything to the network ( they are looking for a win-win situation).

                  34:15 Create a contract between the network and the hosts. This defines what is expected, how people get paid, what will get you fired, and every other situation you can think of that may happen.  By having these (at times) awkward conversations you avoid really awkward conversations in the future. When people know what will happen if they want to leave, they can plan accordingly, and expectations are set, and you can go through that situation without sacrificing the personal relationship because the business relationship didn't work.

                  40:36 Paying hosts a percentage of the advertisement (in some cases based on downloads) is a nightmare you want to avoid. Glenn pays his hosts a flat rate. Daniel also bills primarily using a flate rate.

                  43:26 Glenn has it in his contract that he can edit a show if they say something offensive that does not fit the network's brand.

                  44:33 Another way to pay the hosts is through a profit sharing program which allows them to keep a larger amount of advertisements that they bring to the network.

                  46:50 The more shows you add, the more work is involved chasing advertisers, doing paperwork, editing shows.

                  48:30 If you have too diverse a set of shows, you won't be able to sell ads across your entire network.

                  50:30 How do you handle the website? Does each show have its own website? Are all the shows under one website? Who is in charge of updating it and managing the backend?

                  54:54 The positive side of having a network for building community, focusing efforts, and having sponsors that keep coming back.

                  57:55 Harnessing the power of your audience.

                  59:45 The benefit to the podcast listener

                  1:02:38 A Network can be as simple as a page that shows all of your podcasts (such as powerofpodcasting.com )

                  1:03:51 The Bolden theme from Second Line themes is built for a network. Marcus Couch of the Bulls Podcast uses it for his new Bulls network see http://Bulls.fm He used the WP-all import plugin and has it automatically pulling in everyone’s show by checking the feeds every hour automated.

                  Should I Join a Podcast Network?

                  01:04:07

                  Here are Some Things to Consider When Pondering Joining a Podcast Network:
                  • Is your show a good fit. In the same way that if you want to be a guest on a show YOU NEED TO DO SOME HOMEWORK
                  • Are they taking submissions
                  • Do you have to change media hosts? You might lose your stats...
                  • Do you have to redirect your feed? Can you take your feed with you...
                  • Find someone on the network and ask them about before and after numbers?
                  • Ask them for the details if you bring a sponsor of your own.
                  • Is part of the bonus an advertisement rotated on the site? Really?
                  • Is the platform built on a non-free service?
                  • Does being on a network help? When cross-promotion is done right sure. I know personally, I've heard or pre-rolls on other shows and never been inspired to check them out. If the host says something that proves they listen, and gives it a stamp of approval, I might.
                  
                  Conclusion:

                  Podcast networks that are run like a business are a lot of work

                  When all of the shows are of the same niche, it helps the network grow faster and may be easier to monetize

                  Get all the details, all the scenarios in writing takes some planning, and strategic thinking for the future, but can save you headaches down the line.

                  If your goal is sponsorship, you better brush up on your selling skills.

                  Don't create your own logo unless you are a graphic designer.

                  Make sure you have a good fit if you are bringing on a new host, or joining a new network.

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  If this Then That

                  Divi Wordpress Theme/Plugin

                  Bolden Wordpress Podcast Network Theme

                  Focusrite 2i2 see their Website

                  Ready To Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

                  • Step by Step tutorials from idea to iTunes
                  • Private Facebook Group
                  • Live group coaching
                  • Priority email support (you are never alone
                  
                  

                  Join The School of Podcasting Today

                  or work with me and let me be your We all want more listeners. We feel we have tried everything (have we?) and one option that all the "big" shows seem to have in common is they are part of a Podcast Network. Many of these require large amounts of download that your show may not achieve. You may be thinking of starting your own Podcast Network. I've interviewed some friends of mine recently (and some over the years) about their networks and assembled all that information into this episode. If creating a podcast network is not for you (it is a lot of work) you may be thinking that joining a network is a better choice. I share some things you might consider before joining.

                  Sponsor: Focusrite

                  I got to play with a Focusrite 2i2 and if you are looking for an easy to get your microphone into your computer (and have the option to have a co-host as well) without having to look at a TON of knobs, check out the Focusrite 2i2. As I'm on a PC, I downloaded a driver, plugged in the unit, and was ready to record. If you're on a Mac computer, you just plug it in.

                  If you want a backup copy of your recording, plug a cable into the monitor out and send the signal to your portable recorder.

                  It's built like a tank and is a lovely shade of red.

                  Check out the interface selector tool that helps you pick the right model for you at their website.

                   

                  Podcast Network Interviews:
                  • Glen Hebbert - Horse Radio Network
                  • Daniel J Lewis - Noodle.mx Network
                  • Mignon Fogarty - Quick and Dirty Tips 
                  • Christopher Brian Jones - Trek.fm
                  • Stephen Jondrew - Gonna Geek
                  • Chris Nesi - Education Podcast Network
                  
                  So You Want to Start Your Own Podcast Network

                  5:10

                  You need to be able to answer the question, "Why do you want to start a podcast"

                  There are two type of networks. One is run as a business, and the other is focused more on cross-promotion (or a mixture of both).

                  14: 40 A network where the shows are around a single niche (Horses, hiking, dancing, education, microbrews, etc) are easier to monetize, easier to optimize on the web.

                  Naming your network should be obvious. A cryptic name will slow the growth of your network.

                  16:17 Create two logos (square and rectangle) and keep it simple. Make sure it looks good small, or huge. Don't make the logo yourself unless you're a designer. Check out podcastdesigns.com (tell them the School of Podcasting sent you) and there are other services like Kappa 99, 99 Designs, where many artists create your artwork and you select the best. I recently used Kappa99 for my Six Shooter podcast and used their "one time jobs"  (under the More menu) to have my artwork done for $49.

                  20: 40 Define what your podcast network's purpose is. Define what your network will do for the members of the network.

                  23:00 How to add a show to your network. Start off with a general show, and then expand out and niche out. Have your criteria in place to help you decide if a podcast fits. For example, Daniel J Lewis only wants clean shows on his network.

                  26:58 How to add hosts to your network. Glenn and Christopher audition their hosts by bringing them on the podcasts as a guest. Most hosts don't want to work with a brand new show as you are not bringing anything to the network ( they are looking for a win-win situation).

                  34:15 Create a contract between the network and the hosts. This defines what is expected, how people get paid, what will get you fired, and every other situation you can think of that may happen.  By having these (at times) awkward conversations you avoid really awkward conversations in the future. When people know what will happen if they want to leave, they can plan accordingly, and expectations are set, and you can go through that situation without sacrificing the personal relationship because the business relationship didn't work.

                  40:36 Paying hosts a percentage of the advertisement (in some cases based on downloads) is a nightmare you want to avoid. Glenn pays his hosts a flat rate. Daniel also bills primarily using a flate rate.

                  43:26 Glenn has it in his contract that he can edit a show if they say something offensive that does not fit the network's brand.

                  44:33 Another way to pay the hosts is through a profit sharing program which allows them to keep a larger amount of advertisements that they bring to the network.

                  46:50 The more shows you add, the more work is involved chasing advertisers, doing paperwork, editing shows.

                  48:30 If you have too diverse a set of shows, you won't be able to sell ads across your entire network.

                  50:30 How do you handle the website? Does each show have its own website? Are all the shows under one website? Who is in charge of updating it and managing the backend?

                  54:54 The positive side of having a network for building community, focusing efforts, and having sponsors that keep coming back.

                  57:55 Harnessing the power of your audience.

                  59:45 The benefit to the podcast listener

                  1:02:38 A Network can be as simple as a page that shows all of your podcasts (such as powerofpodcasting.com )

                  1:03:51 The Bolden theme from Second Line themes is built for a network. Marcus Couch of the Bulls Podcast uses it for his new Bulls network see http://Bulls.fm He used the WP-all import plugin and has it automatically pulling in everyone’s show by checking the feeds every hour automated.

                  Should I Join a Podcast Network?

                  01:04:07

                  Here are Some Things to Consider When Pondering Joining a Podcast Network:
                  • Is your show a good fit. In the same way that if you want to be a guest on a show YOU NEED TO DO SOME HOMEWORK
                  • Are they taking submissions
                  • Do you have to change media hosts? You might lose your stats...
                  • Do you have to redirect your feed? Can you take your feed with you...
                  • Find someone on the network and ask them about before and after numbers?
                  • Ask them for the details if you bring a sponsor of your own.
                  • Is part of the bonus an advertisement rotated on the site? Really?
                  • Is the platform built on a non-free service?
                  • Does being on a network help? When cross-promotion is done right sure. I know personally, I've heard or pre-rolls on other shows and never been inspired to check them out. If the host says something that proves they listen, and gives it a stamp of approval, I might.
                  
                  Conclusion:

                  Podcast networks that are run like a business are a lot of work

                  When all of the shows are of the same niche, it helps the network grow faster and may be easier to monetize

                  Get all the details, all the scenarios in writing takes some planning, and strategic thinking for the future, but can save you headaches down the line.

                  If your goal is sponsorship, you better brush up on your selling skills.

                  Don't create your own logo unless you are a graphic designer.

                  Make sure you have a good fit if you are bringing on a new host, or joining a new network.

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  If this Then That

                  Divi Wordpress Theme/Plugin

                  Bolden Wordpress Podcast Network Theme

                  Focusrite 2i2 see their Website

                  Ready To Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting and get access to:

                  • Step by Step tutorials from idea to iTunes
                  • Private Facebook Group
                  • Live group coaching
                  • Priority email support (you are never alone
                  
                  

                  Join The School of Podcasting Today

                  or work with me and let me be your podcast mentor

                  ]]>152cbe8a3cd44cde8bbd4948d2a8da6aMon, 05 Nov 2018 05:00:00 -040001:12:51falsefull643643Do Audiograms Boost Podcast Podcast Discovery?This week I'm going to give you some lessons I learned from Speaking at We Are Podcast 2018 in Brisbane Australia. We also talk about the effectiveness of Audiograms.
                  • Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts
                    • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                    • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                    • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                    • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop
                    
                    
                  
                  Get a Mentor - Ask For Help

                  I know a few people who love to travel. Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What? podcast gave me a great tip to download any episodes from Netflix to my iPad. George Hrab from the Geologic podcast (who gets to go to all sorts of cool stuff because of his podcast) gave me some heads up on a voltage converter.

                  It's Rarely as Bad as It Seems

                  When I heard the phrase "17 hours on a plane (along with some shorter flights for a total of 20 hours)" I thought it sounded like a horror story. I pictured some little punk behind me kicking my kidneys while their parents order another jack and coke from the flight attendant.

                  In the end, even in coach, I was able to stretch my legs. I had two seats between my fellow passenger in my row and slept off and on. There were probably 3-5 small children who would occasionally cry, but it was not the nightmare I had envisioned.

                  When I think of things that I have dreaded in the past, they are rarely as bad as you think you're going to be.

                  Erode Your Comfort Zone

                  I can be shy. When I go to a restaurant I'm not looking to think outside the box. When I was told that a large chunk of my schedule was planned for me, I got nervous. I didn't know where I was going, and except for a few people, I didn't know who I was with, what we were doing, and what I needed to be ready. We had assigned seats both days including assignments on who to go to lunch with. One day, Sean Desouza was going to cook authentic Indian food (I have never had Indian food).

                  The Know Like a Trust Factor

                  I talk about this all the time. When you create valuable content on a consistent basis, your audience trusts you and likes you. If you can share a bit of yourself, they get to know you. When people know, like, and trust you then you have influence.

                  I know Ronsley Vaz from his "Should I Start a Podcast" show. We may have bumped into each other. I finally got to talk to him at Social Media Marketing World where I was speaking. He asked me if I would speak at We Are Podcast. I said yes on the spot. Who doesn't want to go to Australia? I saved up my pennies (and busted out a charge card) and made it happen.

                  As I mentioned above, I was nervous. This was a new country, a new conference (for me), with new people. The first day was very good. I got to meet a lot of people. It was somewhat of the "warm up act" for the main event happening the next two days. Every speaker at this event was awesome.  Every person I met was super friendly and shared my love of podcasting. The hotel I stayed at was great.  By the end of day one, you could color me impressed, and I was ready for day two.

                  By the end of day two, I believe I had met about 95% of the people there including Jules from Hong Kong Confidential. By the end of day two, where I once felt uncomfortable I now felt relaxed.

                  The Speakers Retreat

                  When I realized that I was going to be living with a bunch of people I had never met, previously this would have put me way outside my comfort zone. By this point, Ronsley had not let me down and I just went with the flow. Here again, it was not as bad as it seemed and was actually kind of fun (in the end we just slept here, and all the speakers hung out at a second house).

                  I would start the day with some sort of healthy pancakes made from buckwheat and for toppings I had some sort of berries instead of maple syrup. Different? Yes. Delicious? Absolutely.

                  The conversations were awesome, and the jokes and laughing were endless.

                  More New Things

                  The following day I had Indian food for the first time. As I was told I was a "Picky Eater" growing up, I assumed I would not like this. I loved it. Sean is launching a course in the future to show people how to cook these types of meals quickly. I'm in.

                  I was scheduled for a session of Holographic Kinetics. I had no idea what it was, but I had heard that "it was a bit woo-woo." All I knew was Ronsley had selected a few people to do it, and I was one of them. I was not here to judge. I was all in.

                  Holographic Kinetics is an advanced Aboriginal healing technique based on an ancient understanding of Lore, the universal laws that govern the creation, and the knowledge that everything in nature is alive and can be communicated with.

                  Thoughts and emotions from difficult experiences in the past can become trapped in a person’s body to create realities.

                  When experienced in the past they affect the present, which in turn affects the future. Once trapped, these energies are carried through time, negatively affecting people’s lives. These trapped energies interact with the external world, and following the law of attraction, like attracts like, they will attract to themselves similar negative experiences. More Info

                  This was the first time I had ever tried it, and it did help me connect some dots from my past. If I'm a better, more confident person, I don't care how I got there.

                  My New Australian Family

                  For me, this was an experience that was truly hard to put into words. I rarely checked email, got almost no sleep, and just enjoyed the beauty of Australia, and the friendship of some truly great people.

                  Jordan Harbinger is hilarious and his wife Jen is a walking firecracker of energy. Check out Jordan's show ( I love feedback Friday) and I went through his level 1 (free) of his Human Dynamics course. Jordan is all about learning and he shares some great insights in his course.

                  Nicole Baldinu and Omar Zenhom are the team behind $100 MBA which I had heard of, and I had also heard of Webinar Ninja software. These two are the brains behind both those entities. I enjoyed talking books with them at breakfast one day and Omar's talk on building teams really opened my eyes

                  Steph Taylor creates the podcast Socialite. She is always smiling and with her accent its a bit like learning about Instagram from Mary Poppins. I LOVED her presentation on having a plan for your podcast launch.

                  Sean D'Souza - Sean is not a know it all, but yet, he seems to know everything (he is the man behind Psychotactics). His presentation on developing skills was very cool ( Energy + Confidence = Skill) and has me rethinking how I present things at the School of Podcasting. He has a podcast called Three Month Vacation. I can't wait to learn how to cook from this guy.

                  Leanne Hughes was the Co-MC of the event and has a smile that will light up the room. She was also my hero as the volunteered to take myself, Ally, and Pat to the airport at six AM. I wish I had more time to pick her brain as she is all about making great presentations. Check out her podcast First Time Facilitator

                  Byron Dempsey is another hero. I had plugged my iPad into to keep it as charged as possible and then forget to put it back in my book bag. Bryon was nice enough to ship it back to the States for me. Byron is a super talented videographer and helps people grow their brands with video.

                  Laura Peterson is someone I kind of knew as I listen to her Copy that Pops podcast. She was the trooper who had to deal with a presentation clicker that did not want to participate. She is super funny and if you are in front of her, please have her to her "California Girl" imitation. If you are thinking of writing a book, she's your gal.

                  Ange Henderson is a business consultant that is super friendly, outgoing, and was always there when we needed a food run. THANKS ANGE! She's worked with huge companies like Netflix and I could go on, but just know she's done it all.

                  Travis Chappell dropped knowledge bombs during his presentation on how to follow up without being a pest. He's one of those guys that doesn't say much, but when he does it is hilarious.

                  This week I'm going to give you some lessons I learned from Speaking at We Are Podcast 2018 in Brisbane Australia. We also talk about the effectiveness of Audiograms.

                  • Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts
                    • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                    • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                    • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                    • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop
                    
                    
                  
                  Get a Mentor - Ask For Help

                  I know a few people who love to travel. Monica Rivera from the You Wanna Do What? podcast gave me a great tip to download any episodes from Netflix to my iPad. George Hrab from the Geologic podcast (who gets to go to all sorts of cool stuff because of his podcast) gave me some heads up on a voltage converter.

                  It's Rarely as Bad as It Seems

                  When I heard the phrase "17 hours on a plane (along with some shorter flights for a total of 20 hours)" I thought it sounded like a horror story. I pictured some little punk behind me kicking my kidneys while their parents order another jack and coke from the flight attendant.

                  In the end, even in coach, I was able to stretch my legs. I had two seats between my fellow passenger in my row and slept off and on. There were probably 3-5 small children who would occasionally cry, but it was not the nightmare I had envisioned.

                  When I think of things that I have dreaded in the past, they are rarely as bad as you think you're going to be.

                  Erode Your Comfort Zone

                  I can be shy. When I go to a restaurant I'm not looking to think outside the box. When I was told that a large chunk of my schedule was planned for me, I got nervous. I didn't know where I was going, and except for a few people, I didn't know who I was with, what we were doing, and what I needed to be ready. We had assigned seats both days including assignments on who to go to lunch with. One day, Sean Desouza was going to cook authentic Indian food (I have never had Indian food).

                  The Know Like a Trust Factor

                  I talk about this all the time. When you create valuable content on a consistent basis, your audience trusts you and likes you. If you can share a bit of yourself, they get to know you. When people know, like, and trust you then you have influence.

                  I know Ronsley Vaz from his "Should I Start a Podcast" show. We may have bumped into each other. I finally got to talk to him at Social Media Marketing World where I was speaking. He asked me if I would speak at We Are Podcast. I said yes on the spot. Who doesn't want to go to Australia? I saved up my pennies (and busted out a charge card) and made it happen.

                  As I mentioned above, I was nervous. This was a new country, a new conference (for me), with new people. The first day was very good. I got to meet a lot of people. It was somewhat of the "warm up act" for the main event happening the next two days. Every speaker at this event was awesome.  Every person I met was super friendly and shared my love of podcasting. The hotel I stayed at was great.  By the end of day one, you could color me impressed, and I was ready for day two.

                  By the end of day two, I believe I had met about 95% of the people there including Jules from Hong Kong Confidential. By the end of day two, where I once felt uncomfortable I now felt relaxed.

                  The Speakers Retreat

                  When I realized that I was going to be living with a bunch of people I had never met, previously this would have put me way outside my comfort zone. By this point, Ronsley had not let me down and I just went with the flow. Here again, it was not as bad as it seemed and was actually kind of fun (in the end we just slept here, and all the speakers hung out at a second house).

                  I would start the day with some sort of healthy pancakes made from buckwheat and for toppings I had some sort of berries instead of maple syrup. Different? Yes. Delicious? Absolutely.

                  The conversations were awesome, and the jokes and laughing were endless.

                  More New Things

                  The following day I had Indian food for the first time. As I was told I was a "Picky Eater" growing up, I assumed I would not like this. I loved it. Sean is launching a course in the future to show people how to cook these types of meals quickly. I'm in.

                  I was scheduled for a session of Holographic Kinetics. I had no idea what it was, but I had heard that "it was a bit woo-woo." All I knew was Ronsley had selected a few people to do it, and I was one of them. I was not here to judge. I was all in.

                  Holographic Kinetics is an advanced Aboriginal healing technique based on an ancient understanding of Lore, the universal laws that govern the creation, and the knowledge that everything in nature is alive and can be communicated with.

                  Thoughts and emotions from difficult experiences in the past can become trapped in a person’s body to create realities.

                  When experienced in the past they affect the present, which in turn affects the future. Once trapped, these energies are carried through time, negatively affecting people’s lives. These trapped energies interact with the external world, and following the law of attraction, like attracts like, they will attract to themselves similar negative experiences. More Info

                  This was the first time I had ever tried it, and it did help me connect some dots from my past. If I'm a better, more confident person, I don't care how I got there.

                  My New Australian Family

                  For me, this was an experience that was truly hard to put into words. I rarely checked email, got almost no sleep, and just enjoyed the beauty of Australia, and the friendship of some truly great people.

                  Jordan Harbinger is hilarious and his wife Jen is a walking firecracker of energy. Check out Jordan's show ( I love feedback Friday) and I went through his level 1 (free) of his Human Dynamics course. Jordan is all about learning and he shares some great insights in his course.

                  Nicole Baldinu and Omar Zenhom are the team behind $100 MBA which I had heard of, and I had also heard of Webinar Ninja software. These two are the brains behind both those entities. I enjoyed talking books with them at breakfast one day and Omar's talk on building teams really opened my eyes

                  Steph Taylor creates the podcast Socialite. She is always smiling and with her accent its a bit like learning about Instagram from Mary Poppins. I LOVED her presentation on having a plan for your podcast launch.

                  Sean D'Souza - Sean is not a know it all, but yet, he seems to know everything (he is the man behind Psychotactics). His presentation on developing skills was very cool ( Energy + Confidence = Skill) and has me rethinking how I present things at the School of Podcasting. He has a podcast called Three Month Vacation. I can't wait to learn how to cook from this guy.

                  Leanne Hughes was the Co-MC of the event and has a smile that will light up the room. She was also my hero as the volunteered to take myself, Ally, and Pat to the airport at six AM. I wish I had more time to pick her brain as she is all about making great presentations. Check out her podcast First Time Facilitator

                  Byron Dempsey is another hero. I had plugged my iPad into to keep it as charged as possible and then forget to put it back in my book bag. Bryon was nice enough to ship it back to the States for me. Byron is a super talented videographer and helps people grow their brands with video.

                  Laura Peterson is someone I kind of knew as I listen to her Copy that Pops podcast. She was the trooper who had to deal with a presentation clicker that did not want to participate. She is super funny and if you are in front of her, please have her to her "California Girl" imitation. If you are thinking of writing a book, she's your gal.

                  Ange Henderson is a business consultant that is super friendly, outgoing, and was always there when we needed a food run. THANKS ANGE! She's worked with huge companies like Netflix and I could go on, but just know she's done it all.

                  Travis Chappell dropped knowledge bombs during his presentation on how to follow up without being a pest. He's one of those guys that doesn't say much, but when he does it is hilarious.

                  Carl Taylor seemed like a nice guy and was in a pretty good mood considering he had just had his wisdom teeth pulled. This mild-mannered guy had sold three businesses and wrote a #1 business book by the age of 25. Every time I hear the phrase Koala Bear, I will think of Carl who let me know Koala's are not bears. They are marsupials.

                  Allison Melody is someone I had met at other conferences, but just getting to chill with people builds that relationship deeper. Her presentation on monetizing you podcast had some new strategies I had not heard of. Check out her Food Heals Podcast.

                  Shannon Morrison is the head of operations at Amplify Media and the founder of Mighty Social World. A super nice guy, and always willing to help with anything and everything.

                  Jason Malouin is nuts. He has a great laugh and was the co-MC of the event. Jason was a great American to Aussie translator and stopped me from getting a sunburn that would've been on a whole new level. If you're in Australia and need a portrait photographer, he's your dude. Check out his Communicator podcast.

                  Harry Duran and Natalie Jenkins are my partners in crime at many conferences. They both make me laugh, and occasionally snort. I love them both very much. You know Harry from Podcast Junkies, and Natalie is often taking head shots at events you attend. If she can make me look good, she can make you look amazing. When I found out I was going into the Hall of Fame, Natalie was one of the first people I called to see if she would photograph it.

                  James Cridland is another person who has been on the show and his the host of the Podnews podcast (And newsletter which has more stories). James was the one who said, "I know a place where you can pet Koala's and Kangaroos" for which I will be eternally grateful. Check him out at www.podnews.net 

                  Pat Flynn - I've had Pat on my show. I bump into him all the time at events, but never really got a chance to hang. Pat Flynn (much like Harry and Natalie) makes me laugh a lot. I'm here to tell you the guy is hilarious. He is super chill, and he turned the groups on to some great games such as Psyche! and SpaceTeam. Both games are a lot of fun. He has Smart Passive Income, his book Will it Fly is a MUST READ, his Smart Podcast Player, and he is now teaching people how to podcast with his Power Up Podcasting.

                  Shayde Furlong was the "Audio Engineer" for the whole week, and was cool enough to BRING A GUITAR! I enjoyed all out talks, super nice guy.

                  Ronsley Vaz - The man behind the whole thing. The man behind Amplify media. If I am the Gandalf of podcasting, you are the Jared Easley of Australia. EVERYBODY KNOWS YOU. Check out his Content Amplifier it's amazing (and it's free) as well as his podcast "Should I start a podcast" at http://wearepodcast.com/shouldistartapodcast/

                  Rochelle Fernandes is always happy. How do you do that? Anytime we needed something, there she was. Amazing.

                  Katherine Maslen of Brisbane Natural Health - Thanks for sharing your team. Your passion for helping people lead healthy lives is amazing. You're a great Mum.

                  Quick Hits

                  Jackie Campbell of Breaking Business podcast had a great story that sometimes you have to STOP to start

                  Every author/artist has the same keyboard

                  Viral Sweep looks like a cool tool for growing your list if you have $49/month

                  UTM Links in Google Analytics allows you to track where your listeners are coming from (kind of)

                  Laura's link to her Show notes template

                  Check out his Content Amplifier

                  If you use Stripe for payment processing you won't believe the information you get from Profitwell (free)

                  Conclusion

                  Sometimes you have to stop gathering data and start with what you know

                  It's rarely going to be as bad as you think it is

                  Where I Will Be

                  November 5th Libsyn Podcasters Meetup 5-8 PM ET 

                  November 9-10 DC Podfest - Keynote Speaker

                  How Effective are Audiograms at Growing Your Audience?

                  Check out the previous episode where we discuss how to use an audiogram (Episode 616 )

                  Elikqitie from Travel Gluten Free - has not found shows through audiograms

                  Daniecae Next to Nothing Podcast (gaming Podcast) twitch.tv/danicae

                  Vanessa from Vanessa's View Podcast 

                  Garret Godfried - Good Patron

                  Emily Prokop from the Story Behind Podcast - and the Hate to Weight Podcast

                  Jonathon from Weekly Awesome 

                  Steve Stewart from Stevestewart.me mentioned Powtoons and Bobbi Rebell here is her tweet example

                  Bryan from  engagingmissions.com 

                  Mentioned: Episode 616 on Three Audio Gram Tools

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  Are you lost in a sea of noise when it comes to podcasting? Are you watching old YouTube Videos that may be outdated?

                  Do you ask a question and get 14 responses (but no answers ) when you post on Facebook? 

                  I can help eliminate the noise, and listen to what you want, and help you get what you need.

                  Join Today to take my step by step tutorials on your own schedule

                  If you are looking for a one on one podcast mentoring program, I can do that as well .

                  Testing the Payment Link for Next Week's Show http://www.patreon.com/davejackson"> Support this podcast

                  ]]>0cb4e3abc71c489db3a1391cf59aac29Mon, 29 Oct 2018 04:00:00 -040047:46falsefull64264211 Things Podcasters Can Learn From NetflixToday on episode 641, I'm in Australia at a conference but I'm still here giving you ideas and insights to help you with your podcast. I've been spending a fair amount of time on Netflix, and I've noticed something.
                  Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts

                  [1:36]

                  • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                  • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                  • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                  • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com
                  
                  

                   

                  You Should Run Your Podcast Like Netflix

                  3:45

                  130 Million Worldwide 4.2 million are still shipping DVDs Projected to pay 7 billion for content 11 Billion in Revenue in 2017 23% of Us adults stream daily 70% of users binge-watch shows A user avoid 160 hours of ads per year 6.7 days

                  6:38 They make it easy to get to the content and skip how the sausage is made

                  9:30 Many of their episodes leave you wanting more, and tease the next episode (see Making Oprah )

                  9:53 They aren't doing typical content, and they are being creative

                  11:47 They changed their format to fit their audience and their business plan

                  14:08 You should watch your industry and niche and see if there is a place for your show

                  17:35 They seems to be easy to work, they aren't jerks, with which is attracting talented people

                  18:55  They monitor what their audience is viewing and make similar content (including a teenage tangent)

                  22:41 You can get Netflix on ANY device.

                  23:10 Don't hire pedophiles and alleged rapists

                  23: 20 It doesn't always work.

                  24:14 They put out content to see if it works

                  BONUS LESSON: They charge for their service. Media hosts like anchor are doomed to fail as bandwidth is not free.

                  Ready To Launch and Grow Your Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Work with me as your podcast mentor at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  Never Miss an Episode

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe to get the next episode the minute it is released

                   

                   

                   

                   

                  ]]>Today on episode 641, I'm in Australia at a conference but I'm still here giving you ideas and insights to help you with your podcast. I've been spending a fair amount of time on Netflix, and I've noticed something.
                  Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com – Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts

                  [1:36]

                  • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                  • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                  • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                  • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com
                  
                  

                   

                  You Should Run Your Podcast Like Netflix

                  3:45

                  130 Million Worldwide 4.2 million are still shipping DVDs Projected to pay 7 billion for content 11 Billion in Revenue in 2017 23% of Us adults stream daily 70% of users binge-watch shows A user avoid 160 hours of ads per year 6.7 days

                  6:38 They make it easy to get to the content and skip how the sausage is made

                  9:30 Many of their episodes leave you wanting more, and tease the next episode (see Making Oprah )

                  9:53 They aren't doing typical content, and they are being creative

                  11:47 They changed their format to fit their audience and their business plan

                  14:08 You should watch your industry and niche and see if there is a place for your show

                  17:35 They seems to be easy to work, they aren't jerks, with which is attracting talented people

                  18:55  They monitor what their audience is viewing and make similar content (including a teenage tangent)

                  22:41 You can get Netflix on ANY device.

                  23:10 Don't hire pedophiles and alleged rapists

                  23: 20 It doesn't always work.

                  24:14 They put out content to see if it works

                  BONUS LESSON: They charge for their service. Media hosts like anchor are doomed to fail as bandwidth is not free.

                  Ready To Launch and Grow Your Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Work with me as your podcast mentor at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  Never Miss an Episode

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe to get the next episode the minute it is released

                   

                   

                   

                   

                  ]]>cb653691d0a04672aa1680c3c0c0ca99Mon, 22 Oct 2018 04:00:00 -040026:34falsefull641641Don't Dump Your Podcast For Facebook Live Just YetToday on episode 640 of the School of Podcasting we are looking at Facebook Consumption and how it stacks up against YouTube and Podcasting. Paul Colligan has a new report and it's fascinating.
                  Because of his Podcast: Troy Heinritz had his name in the Blacklist TV Show

                  Troy Heinritz has been mentioned on this show many times and today on episode 640 is another time. I was getting caught up on the Blacklist Television show on Netflix and in the "Nicholas T Moore" episode they are looking at the background of a "bad guy" and explain how at one point he had stayed at the Heinritz Psychiatric Center in Concord.  Troy also explain how they had mixed in a fan's name into an episode who had died of cancer.

                  If you have a "Because of my Podcast" Story, please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and share it.

                    

                  Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com - Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts

                  3:18

                  • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                  • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                  • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                  • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com 
                  
                  Podcast Consumption Trounces YouTube and Facebook Consumption

                  4:40

                  Today we talk about a report that Paul Colligan (of the Podcast Report) did on consumption metrics comparing Facebook Live against YouTube and Podcasting.

                  In looking at a video he did live on Facebook he found that "The average watch time of my 11 minute and 37-second broadcast was only 22 seconds — just 3% of the video. " Later he put the exact same content on YouTube and "YouTube was 36% Facebook’s 3%. On YouTube, viewers tuned in over 11 times longer on average than they did on Facebook."  He again took the exact same content and put it out as an audio podcast. He checked his stats in Appel's Podcasts Connect and found, "On Apple Podcasts, the audience listened to a whopping average of 94% of the episode … more than 31 times the percentage on Facebook and slightly less than 3 times the percent on YouTube." 

                  While Facebook consumption was much lower than the other platforms, Paul is not saying Facebook is bad. It just may be that this is not the place where people go for long-form content. It seems like it is the place consumers go for "quick hit" information while they are waiting in line or taking a quick break. 

                  He approached other people and they all had similar results. Read the full story here. 

                  What Facebook is for Me

                  I know for me, I saw where Dan Klass was going to record an episode of the Bitterest Pill live. I was excited and had planned on watching it live. I forgot to write it down and listened to the content when it came out as his latest episode. I often start a video as I'm on Facebook, but as I scroll down it becomes distracting. I'm looking for quick updates from friends, family, and colleagues. 

                  In Conclusion

                  It is hard to argue with the data. Granted this is a very small sample, but enough data to spot some trends. If you have a large following on these platforms you need to look and see what your consumption analytics show. You may be very, very surprised.

                  How do You Find Facebook Stats?

                  To access Facebook video metrics, click Insights at the top of your Facebook Page and navigate to the Videos tab. The Video Views graph shows you the number of times people viewed videos for longer than 3 seconds (as shown below).  More information on understanding Facebook stats can be found here. 

                  How Do I See My Consumption Stats on Apple Podcasts?

                  Apple has a tutorial on this topic at https://itunespartner.apple.com/en/podcasts/videos#podcast-analytics

                  Podcast Rewind

                  39:34

                  I was featured on the Computer Tutor show on a special International Podcast Day episode (great podcasting 101 stuff and some stories I've never talked about) Listen Here

                  I was featured on a two-part interview on the Get Clients Now Podcast. You can find Part 1 and Part 2 at http://getclientsnow.libsyn.com/ In part one, I talk about how having a podcast can help your business and part two is more focused on monetization strategies.

                  Podcast Mentoring Programs Available

                  If you are looking to work side by side with me, I know how programs in place to do just that. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme  

                  If you want to work at your own pace (as fast or as slow as you want) check out the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                   

                  ]]>Today on episode 640 of the School of Podcasting we are looking at Facebook Consumption and how it stacks up against YouTube and Podcasting. Paul Colligan has a new report and it's fascinating.
                  Because of his Podcast: Troy Heinritz had his name in the Blacklist TV Show

                  Troy Heinritz has been mentioned on this show many times and today on episode 640 is another time. I was getting caught up on the Blacklist Television show on Netflix and in the "Nicholas T Moore" episode they are looking at the background of a "bad guy" and explain how at one point he had stayed at the Heinritz Psychiatric Center in Concord.  Troy also explain how they had mixed in a fan's name into an episode who had died of cancer.

                  If you have a "Because of my Podcast" Story, please go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and share it.

                    

                  Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com - Get More Guests -Be Featured on More Podcasts

                  3:18

                  • PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free
                  • PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements
                  • You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory
                  • Sign up at PodcastGuests.com 
                  
                  Podcast Consumption Trounces YouTube and Facebook Consumption

                  4:40

                  Today we talk about a report that Paul Colligan (of the Podcast Report) did on consumption metrics comparing Facebook Live against YouTube and Podcasting.

                  In looking at a video he did live on Facebook he found that "The average watch time of my 11 minute and 37-second broadcast was only 22 seconds — just 3% of the video. " Later he put the exact same content on YouTube and "YouTube was 36% Facebook’s 3%. On YouTube, viewers tuned in over 11 times longer on average than they did on Facebook."  He again took the exact same content and put it out as an audio podcast. He checked his stats in Appel's Podcasts Connect and found, "On Apple Podcasts, the audience listened to a whopping average of 94% of the episode … more than 31 times the percentage on Facebook and slightly less than 3 times the percent on YouTube." 

                  While Facebook consumption was much lower than the other platforms, Paul is not saying Facebook is bad. It just may be that this is not the place where people go for long-form content. It seems like it is the place consumers go for "quick hit" information while they are waiting in line or taking a quick break. 

                  He approached other people and they all had similar results. Read the full story here. 

                  What Facebook is for Me

                  I know for me, I saw where Dan Klass was going to record an episode of the Bitterest Pill live. I was excited and had planned on watching it live. I forgot to write it down and listened to the content when it came out as his latest episode. I often start a video as I'm on Facebook, but as I scroll down it becomes distracting. I'm looking for quick updates from friends, family, and colleagues. 

                  In Conclusion

                  It is hard to argue with the data. Granted this is a very small sample, but enough data to spot some trends. If you have a large following on these platforms you need to look and see what your consumption analytics show. You may be very, very surprised.

                  How do You Find Facebook Stats?

                  To access Facebook video metrics, click Insights at the top of your Facebook Page and navigate to the Videos tab. The Video Views graph shows you the number of times people viewed videos for longer than 3 seconds (as shown below).  More information on understanding Facebook stats can be found here. 

                  How Do I See My Consumption Stats on Apple Podcasts?

                  Apple has a tutorial on this topic at https://itunespartner.apple.com/en/podcasts/videos#podcast-analytics

                  Podcast Rewind

                  39:34

                  I was featured on the Computer Tutor show on a special International Podcast Day episode (great podcasting 101 stuff and some stories I've never talked about) Listen Here

                  I was featured on a two-part interview on the Get Clients Now Podcast. You can find Part 1 and Part 2 at http://getclientsnow.libsyn.com/ In part one, I talk about how having a podcast can help your business and part two is more focused on monetization strategies.

                  Podcast Mentoring Programs Available

                  If you are looking to work side by side with me, I know how programs in place to do just that. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme  

                  If you want to work at your own pace (as fast or as slow as you want) check out the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                   

                  ]]>d4153e2fa98048eb8e2c4ccec1cfa8fdMon, 15 Oct 2018 04:00:00 -040044:10falsefull640640Vicious Listener Comments That Were 100% TrueToday I share the story of some pretty harsh criticism I received, and how I had to deal with the fact that my listener had a point. Welcome to episode 639 of the School of Podcasting
                  Sponsor: Podcastguests.com

                  3:47

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory

                  Today I'm talking about branding, and I could've invited Greg Corey  (Corey says, I love to talk to audiences about how creating better branding for themselves and their products can skyrocket their sales).  It took all of three seconds to find Greg, and we know he's looking to get on podcasts. 

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop 

                  Fat Fingers Can Cause More Them Embarrassment

                  5:06

                  In the last episode, I mentioned that I had brought up a controversial subject (Collin Kaepernick) and that people might tune out (the subject was controlling the conversation).

                  What is offending is not the episode but rather your poor grasp on basic spelling and grammar throughout many pages on this website.. By the way, if you want to sound like an authority, please learn basic spelling and grammar or hire someone (fiverr) to do it for you.. How do you have an education degree when this is how you write and communicate?

                  By the way, in the sub-title, “Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences”- The word “speach” is spelled Speech. Any sixth grader knows that and certainly a g college graduate should know that as well.. It is not that hard. At least have your written copy proof read by someone who does know how to spell and write decently before publishing it to the world. Geez! I think that is pretty basic..

                  How again can you confidently charge $200 an hour for consulting when you have such poor spelling and grammar skills in your written web copy? You are a joke sir!

                  What college granted you a degree when you consistently cannot write legibly? and you are tying to sell yourself as an expert? Please! I will say again.. Please!

                  At least hire someone to cover your mistakes and not try to promote yourself as some sort of “expert” – You look like a damn fool sir

                  So I sent Mark Doyle and Email

                  Dear Mark,

                  Thanks for the comment. My Apologies for the typos. You're right I'm a damn fool and a joke of a human being...

                  Dave

                  Mark Sent Me a Reply

                  Mr. Jackson

                  I would like to take a moment and apologize for my comments and harsh criticisms. It was unwarranted and uncalled for and not like me at all to post something like that

                  Please accept my apologies Best of luck to you sir

                  Mark Made a Really Good Point in a Really Crappy Way

                  I hold no ill will toward Mark. Mark may have had a really bad day, and I have forgiven him. He did get me to check into why these typos got through (I was using two spell checkers, and Grammarly does a GREAT job). In a nutshell, I had logged out of Grammarly and it no longer was checking everything I typed. 

                  There is Probably More Than One Way To Fix Your Issue

                  I had typed my show notes about an hour before I published them. I did this to "flush out" ideas before I pressed record. Then I thought, would this not work a day or two (or a week) in advance so I could come and look at the copy with "Fresh eyes." Yes, this could be done. 

                  Another option would be to type shorter notes. This makes sense to a certain extent. I always want to have at least 300 words. I am currently at 1591. 

                  If I pushed thing back even further than a few days, I could hire someone to look over my posts. 

                  This is not an unsolvable issue. It just means I can't keep doing what I've always been doing. 

                  Your Podcast Is Your Brand

                  In looking up different items about what makes a good brand, I kept seeing things that I saw that I had dropped the ball on.

                  Neglecting Public Perception: The public’s perception of your brand might not be the rosiest, but instead of chalking it up to bad luck or pointing fingers, it’s time to get serious about turning that frown upside down. (source). 

                  Another article mentioned this as "Not providing great brand experience." Brand experience is not only about your stuff, but also your website experience and every other touch-point where customers come in contact with your brand. Another article stated, "Many savvy consumers judge credibility by grammar and attention to detail."

                  Why Branding Matters

                  The audience might feel:

                  • You value quantity over quality when you get sloppy
                  • You appear irresponsible
                  • You appear uncaring
                  • You think the audience stupid (as they won't notice)
                  • You're not the most intelligent person on the planet. 
                  
                  The Internet Writes in Ink

                  While many blunders appear on the news and are replaced by tomorrows new headlines, don't plan on everyone's short attention span. Just ask Louis C. K (Sex offender), Chi-Fil-a (homophobic), Uber (employee Harassment), Target, Facebook, and many others (data breach), as well as other companies that have had topics that left a black eye. 

                  It's Just a Podcast

                  22:15

                  You may be tempted to think, "It's just a podcast." That kind of talk will keep us in the "Minor Leagues" of content creators. 

                  We end up with a stereotype that sounds a lot like this video or this video where we are all giant nerds. 

                  Building Your Brand

                  You need to develop a brand strategy, and understand your business objectives and shift focus to that instead of designing a beautiful logo that won’t work. Also, realize your business strategy may be "THIS IS NOT A BUSINESS." With that in mind, you may want to blow off your brand. I would recommend you don't. 

                  When you launch your podcast you are creating your brand. In looking at a TON of articles about branding, here are some things to consider:

                  22:35

                  Pat Flynn talks about the Four P's. These are: Places: You want to create your list of places where your target audience exists. This could be online or offline. I like to go to conferences, meetups, and events. My goal is to tell you the eye color of my target audience. It's not just in person, look at what publications they read (those kinds of things). 

                  People: Look at the people in your space who already have a following. You don't do this to rip them off, but to see what is working. You can see what they are covering.

                  Products: Make a list of all the products and their prices. 

                  Position: After you look at where they are, who they are following, and seeing the products, you can see if there is any place where you can take your unique perspective (where you explain things in a way that immediately obvious or cliche). 

                  I love the quote by Seth Godin, "Don’t find customers for your products, find products for your customers.” 

                  If you haven't read the book "Will it Fly" by Pat Flynn, you should. You can even listen to Pat Read it on Audible (you can get the book for free if you're a new customer) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/freebook 

                  You need to research your competitors, look for points of differentiation, then define who you are, who your customers are and how to connect with them

                  The Podcast Brand Experience

                  Some 23% of consumers say they would stop using a brand after a bad experience. (source) In that report, they were talking about dealing with rude employees, etc. However, in podcasting what is part of the experience:

                  • Your intro/outro 
                  • Your audio quality
                  • Your logo
                  • Your voice (tone, accent)
                  • Your grammar
                  • How quickly you get to your topic
                  • The relevancy of advertisements if you have them
                  • Your volume levels
                  • The quality of your content. Are you boring?
                  • Your show notes (we did a whole episode on do people look at these?)
                  
                  I'm Worried About This Post

                  As I write this in October of 2018, people are freaking out about the little things that often don't matter (what font on your artwork, what theme for their website) and while...]]>Today I share the story of some pretty harsh criticism I received, and how I had to deal with the fact that my listener had a point. Welcome to episode 639 of the School of Podcasting

                  Sponsor: Podcastguests.com

                  3:47

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its over 6,500 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements You can also find 200 expert guests anytime in the directory at podcastguests.com/directory

                  Today I'm talking about branding, and I could've invited Greg Corey  (Corey says, I love to talk to audiences about how creating better branding for themselves and their products can skyrocket their sales).  It took all of three seconds to find Greg, and we know he's looking to get on podcasts. 

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop 

                  Fat Fingers Can Cause More Them Embarrassment

                  5:06

                  In the last episode, I mentioned that I had brought up a controversial subject (Collin Kaepernick) and that people might tune out (the subject was controlling the conversation).

                  What is offending is not the episode but rather your poor grasp on basic spelling and grammar throughout many pages on this website.. By the way, if you want to sound like an authority, please learn basic spelling and grammar or hire someone (fiverr) to do it for you.. How do you have an education degree when this is how you write and communicate?

                  By the way, in the sub-title, “Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences”- The word “speach” is spelled Speech. Any sixth grader knows that and certainly a g college graduate should know that as well.. It is not that hard. At least have your written copy proof read by someone who does know how to spell and write decently before publishing it to the world. Geez! I think that is pretty basic..

                  How again can you confidently charge $200 an hour for consulting when you have such poor spelling and grammar skills in your written web copy? You are a joke sir!

                  What college granted you a degree when you consistently cannot write legibly? and you are tying to sell yourself as an expert? Please! I will say again.. Please!

                  At least hire someone to cover your mistakes and not try to promote yourself as some sort of “expert” – You look like a damn fool sir

                  So I sent Mark Doyle and Email

                  Dear Mark,

                  Thanks for the comment. My Apologies for the typos. You're right I'm a damn fool and a joke of a human being...

                  Dave

                  Mark Sent Me a Reply

                  Mr. Jackson

                  I would like to take a moment and apologize for my comments and harsh criticisms. It was unwarranted and uncalled for and not like me at all to post something like that

                  Please accept my apologies Best of luck to you sir

                  Mark Made a Really Good Point in a Really Crappy Way

                  I hold no ill will toward Mark. Mark may have had a really bad day, and I have forgiven him. He did get me to check into why these typos got through (I was using two spell checkers, and Grammarly does a GREAT job). In a nutshell, I had logged out of Grammarly and it no longer was checking everything I typed. 

                  There is Probably More Than One Way To Fix Your Issue

                  I had typed my show notes about an hour before I published them. I did this to "flush out" ideas before I pressed record. Then I thought, would this not work a day or two (or a week) in advance so I could come and look at the copy with "Fresh eyes." Yes, this could be done. 

                  Another option would be to type shorter notes. This makes sense to a certain extent. I always want to have at least 300 words. I am currently at 1591. 

                  If I pushed thing back even further than a few days, I could hire someone to look over my posts. 

                  This is not an unsolvable issue. It just means I can't keep doing what I've always been doing. 

                  Your Podcast Is Your Brand

                  In looking up different items about what makes a good brand, I kept seeing things that I saw that I had dropped the ball on.

                  Neglecting Public Perception: The public’s perception of your brand might not be the rosiest, but instead of chalking it up to bad luck or pointing fingers, it’s time to get serious about turning that frown upside down. (source). 

                  Another article mentioned this as "Not providing great brand experience." Brand experience is not only about your stuff, but also your website experience and every other touch-point where customers come in contact with your brand. Another article stated, "Many savvy consumers judge credibility by grammar and attention to detail."

                  Why Branding Matters

                  The audience might feel:

                  • You value quantity over quality when you get sloppy
                  • You appear irresponsible
                  • You appear uncaring
                  • You think the audience stupid (as they won't notice)
                  • You're not the most intelligent person on the planet. 
                  
                  The Internet Writes in Ink

                  While many blunders appear on the news and are replaced by tomorrows new headlines, don't plan on everyone's short attention span. Just ask Louis C. K (Sex offender), Chi-Fil-a (homophobic), Uber (employee Harassment), Target, Facebook, and many others (data breach), as well as other companies that have had topics that left a black eye. 

                  It's Just a Podcast

                  22:15

                  You may be tempted to think, "It's just a podcast." That kind of talk will keep us in the "Minor Leagues" of content creators. 

                  We end up with a stereotype that sounds a lot like this video or this video where we are all giant nerds. 

                  Building Your Brand

                  You need to develop a brand strategy, and understand your business objectives and shift focus to that instead of designing a beautiful logo that won’t work. Also, realize your business strategy may be "THIS IS NOT A BUSINESS." With that in mind, you may want to blow off your brand. I would recommend you don't. 

                  When you launch your podcast you are creating your brand. In looking at a TON of articles about branding, here are some things to consider:

                  22:35

                  Pat Flynn talks about the Four P's. These are: Places: You want to create your list of places where your target audience exists. This could be online or offline. I like to go to conferences, meetups, and events. My goal is to tell you the eye color of my target audience. It's not just in person, look at what publications they read (those kinds of things). 

                  People: Look at the people in your space who already have a following. You don't do this to rip them off, but to see what is working. You can see what they are covering.

                  Products: Make a list of all the products and their prices. 

                  Position: After you look at where they are, who they are following, and seeing the products, you can see if there is any place where you can take your unique perspective (where you explain things in a way that immediately obvious or cliche). 

                  I love the quote by Seth Godin, "Don’t find customers for your products, find products for your customers.” 

                  If you haven't read the book "Will it Fly" by Pat Flynn, you should. You can even listen to Pat Read it on Audible (you can get the book for free if you're a new customer) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/freebook 

                  You need to research your competitors, look for points of differentiation, then define who you are, who your customers are and how to connect with them

                  The Podcast Brand Experience

                  Some 23% of consumers say they would stop using a brand after a bad experience. (source) In that report, they were talking about dealing with rude employees, etc. However, in podcasting what is part of the experience:

                  • Your intro/outro 
                  • Your audio quality
                  • Your logo
                  • Your voice (tone, accent)
                  • Your grammar
                  • How quickly you get to your topic
                  • The relevancy of advertisements if you have them
                  • Your volume levels
                  • The quality of your content. Are you boring?
                  • Your show notes (we did a whole episode on do people look at these?)
                  
                  I'm Worried About This Post

                  As I write this in October of 2018, people are freaking out about the little things that often don't matter (what font on your artwork, what theme for their website) and while all of that is your brand, if you try to wait until everything is perfect you will NEVER start your podcast. Keep in mind you can change your brand (Dunkin Doughnuts is changing their brand to Dunkin, Starbucks used to have BOOBIES in their logo. BOOBIES!

                  What I Want You To Take Away

                  From time to time you may get some negative feedback. Some of it may be constructive, and some it may be cruel. Today my point is, no matter how feedback is provided you need to ask yourself, "Is it true? Do they have a point?" and in the case of Mark Doyle - he did and I thank him for that. 

                  Ideas For Adding Merchandise To Your Podcast

                  I have an interview with James from Tee Public from the last day of Podcast Movement (hence the lack of voice, and the loud background).

                  • Ideas on how to integrate merchandise with your show
                  • How to sell without being "salesy"
                  • There are more products - not just t-shirts
                  • Now with coverage in the UK
                  • More features coming very soon.
                  
                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  Join the School of podcasting and don't just get access to tutorials, but join a community of podcasters who all work together to help each other grow their audience

                  Join today.

                   

                  ]]>2ce87ce45c254a4ca3fae63cba6650dfMon, 08 Oct 2018 04:00:00 -040049:13falsefull639639Your Spin Free ZoneToday on episode 638 I am talking about controlling a conversation from two different angles.

                  Bonus Content

                  Why Squadcast is the Best Tool for Recording Interviews

                  I speak with Zach Moreno one of the founders of Squadcast (save 50% off using the coupon code sopfans ) who explains

                  • Why he (a programmer) and his brother (an audio engineer) started Squadcast
                  • How they had an issue, but it has been solved and they may have their solution patented
                  • What is coming in the future
                  
                  

                  Squadcast is super easy. You put in the email address, the date and time of the interview and it does everything else. The big key is your guest(s) need to use chrome to use the system. The system prompts them to use chrome if they are not. It records their side of the conversation locally to their computer and then QUICKLY uploads it when the conversation is done. If there were any glitches where the speaking was cut out during the call, the local recording does not have any of those glitches.

                  Squadcast is currently $20 a month. You get save 50% using the coupon code sopfans at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/squadcast

                  How To Ensure Everyone Knows Your Intent

                  I was watching Comedian in Cars Getting Coffe with Jerry Seinfeld and Bill Bur. Bill voiced his fear of how people are having careers taken away becomes someone took something you said as a joke seriously and they are now TELLING YOU what YOUR intent was. As Bill put it, "You don't get to decide that you're in my head and you know my intent."

                  One example of a company who ensures you understand their intent is American Airlines who has a podcast called "Tell Me Why." For example, one episode an American Airline representative explains the changes in their policy regarding support animals. I think this is an awesome job as a lazy journalist (where people just Google a subject, do no research and copy and paste an answer - even it is entirely untrue). could easily spin this as "American Airlines hates all animals." The good news is American Airlines through their podcast has a DIRECT CONNECTION with their audience (their customers). They don't have to worry about anyone from the mainstream media putting a spin on it.

                  I personally found it strange when people began burning their own shoes in protest to Colin Kaepernick is a new spokesperson for Nike. So I did something people use to do called "Journalism." I listened to Colin's first press conference. It turns out. He doesn't hate the troops the flag, or the country. What he hates is the alarming rate of police brutality that he sees and hears about, and yet it is never covered on the news, and there seems to be no justice for the victims. In fact, the news just kept repeating how it was disrespectful for the troops and the flag. Even though in his press conference later he said, "People thought it was about the flag or the troops and it's not."

                  So when you go through the mainstream media, your message has a potential to get very distorted. This is why Colin Kaepernick needs his own podcast. Then people could go directly to the source and here what his intentions are, why he is doing what he is doing, and maybe get a better understanding. For me, I urge all white people who group up around white people (you're not racist, but it just so happens there were no black people in your neighborhood to watch the documentary movie 13th on Netflix

                  Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences

                  Just because you can say it, doesn't mean there weren't be consequences. For example, I believe it is illegal to scream "FIRE" in a theater. You are free to say it, but you will go to jail. Keep this in mind that stating your intentions and opinion will exercise your right to free speech. It may also introduce you to the law of consequences. 

                  One A Side Note

                  There was a time when you were allowed to have a difference of opinion. You might actually have a "dialogue" so you and another person could examine both viewpoints to see if you agreed on anything, or might gain an new insight and expand your knowledge. It seems harder and harder to do that today. As I bring today's slight controversial topic, please note I don't support sexual predators, racists, or anyone spreading hate speech (cause racism is learned from your parents are friends - you are not born a racist). 

                  If this episode offended you I'm sorry. My goal is to show how you can get your unedited point across on your podcast and have it reach the world

                  ]]>Today on episode 638 I am talking about controlling a conversation from two different angles.

                  Bonus Content

                  Why Squadcast is the Best Tool for Recording Interviews

                  I speak with Zach Moreno one of the founders of Squadcast (save 50% off using the coupon code sopfans ) who explains

                  • Why he (a programmer) and his brother (an audio engineer) started Squadcast
                  • How they had an issue, but it has been solved and they may have their solution patented
                  • What is coming in the future
                  
                  

                  Squadcast is super easy. You put in the email address, the date and time of the interview and it does everything else. The big key is your guest(s) need to use chrome to use the system. The system prompts them to use chrome if they are not. It records their side of the conversation locally to their computer and then QUICKLY uploads it when the conversation is done. If there were any glitches where the speaking was cut out during the call, the local recording does not have any of those glitches.

                  Squadcast is currently $20 a month. You get save 50% using the coupon code sopfans at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/squadcast

                  How To Ensure Everyone Knows Your Intent

                  I was watching Comedian in Cars Getting Coffe with Jerry Seinfeld and Bill Bur. Bill voiced his fear of how people are having careers taken away becomes someone took something you said as a joke seriously and they are now TELLING YOU what YOUR intent was. As Bill put it, "You don't get to decide that you're in my head and you know my intent."

                  One example of a company who ensures you understand their intent is American Airlines who has a podcast called "Tell Me Why." For example, one episode an American Airline representative explains the changes in their policy regarding support animals. I think this is an awesome job as a lazy journalist (where people just Google a subject, do no research and copy and paste an answer - even it is entirely untrue). could easily spin this as "American Airlines hates all animals." The good news is American Airlines through their podcast has a DIRECT CONNECTION with their audience (their customers). They don't have to worry about anyone from the mainstream media putting a spin on it.

                  I personally found it strange when people began burning their own shoes in protest to Colin Kaepernick is a new spokesperson for Nike. So I did something people use to do called "Journalism." I listened to Colin's first press conference. It turns out. He doesn't hate the troops the flag, or the country. What he hates is the alarming rate of police brutality that he sees and hears about, and yet it is never covered on the news, and there seems to be no justice for the victims. In fact, the news just kept repeating how it was disrespectful for the troops and the flag. Even though in his press conference later he said, "People thought it was about the flag or the troops and it's not."

                  So when you go through the mainstream media, your message has a potential to get very distorted. This is why Colin Kaepernick needs his own podcast. Then people could go directly to the source and here what his intentions are, why he is doing what he is doing, and maybe get a better understanding. For me, I urge all white people who group up around white people (you're not racist, but it just so happens there were no black people in your neighborhood to watch the documentary movie 13th on Netflix

                  Freedom of Speach is Not Freedom from Consequences

                  Just because you can say it, doesn't mean there weren't be consequences. For example, I believe it is illegal to scream "FIRE" in a theater. You are free to say it, but you will go to jail. Keep this in mind that stating your intentions and opinion will exercise your right to free speech. It may also introduce you to the law of consequences. 

                  One A Side Note

                  There was a time when you were allowed to have a difference of opinion. You might actually have a "dialogue" so you and another person could examine both viewpoints to see if you agreed on anything, or might gain an new insight and expand your knowledge. It seems harder and harder to do that today. As I bring today's slight controversial topic, please note I don't support sexual predators, racists, or anyone spreading hate speech (cause racism is learned from your parents are friends - you are not born a racist). 

                  If this episode offended you I'm sorry. My goal is to show how you can get your unedited point across on your podcast and have it reach the world

                  ]]>1d0332a2ce4d4997a00abc16a2afce3eMon, 01 Oct 2018 04:22:53 -040036:36falsefull638638Is Podcasting Frying Your Brain?Michael,

                  He is on podcast number two, and this one is allowing him to make some money

                  http://abigpeacheyadventure.com.au/family-travel-podcast/

                  Question of the Month: Where Are you With Podcasting?

                  6:28 Clay from the Fish Nerds Podcast is a 4

                  7:30 Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast is a 1

                  8:48 Andrea from Union Podcastera is a 1

                  12:18 Darwyn Dave from Dealing with My Grief is 1

                  13:59 Brad from The Cinema Guys is a 1

                  15:23 Jared from The Fire Rescue is a 3

                  16:52 Micah and Dustin from Tales From Bedlum -5

                  17:55   Jonathon Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- 1

                  19:07 Kim from Teachers Need Teachers  is a 1

                  23:21 Josh from the Corner Cutters Podcast (about the Rubik's cube) - 1

                  25:10 Ryan Nelson - Conspiracy Theoryology is a 1

                  27:27 Master Kuldryn's from Kuldryn's Krypt is a - 1

                  28:28 Seth from Geekville Radio, www.twbpodcast.com and Classic Wrestling Memories  is a 1

                   31:01 Timothy kdoipodcasting.com was at a 5 and is now at a 3 

                  34:52 Vanessa from Vanessa's View is at a 1 (or UNO) 

                  39:41 Win Charles is a 6

                  Check Out Joe Today in Orlando

                  Tuesday (this coming Tuesday...September 25th) The Improv Orlando Florida Doors open at 6:30 - Show starts at 7:30 $10

                  LOTS of people in the cast. We EVEN have an opening act, the awesome 15-minute long Popcorn Finance podcast (up for a personal finance Plutus Award for Best New Podcast in that space) at next week's award show.

                  http://stackingbenjamins.com/tour

                   

                  Update on Michael Stelzner and Social Media Marketing World

                  In episode 635 (Logic and Emotion) I had mentioned how Social Media Marketing World has pulled their podcasting track. I wanted to clarify while Leo Laporte at one point had said "podcasting is dead" and then later took it back, Michael Stelzner never said podcasting is dead. He simply said his statistics show that his socials media crowd that attends his audience is less interested in the subject of podcasting. Michael still uses podcasting to promote Social Media Marketing world. If you can't afford the trip, some of the top experts are speaking at this event, and you can purchase a virtual ticket

                  I just got done binging on Michael's YouTube series "The Journey" as the second season has just started (so I have to binge the first episode) and this once again proves that "behind the scenes" information is often "not boring." Check it out at journey.show

                  Sue Jennett Your chat about choosing words that evoke emotion was interesting for me, as I like to choose my words carefully for both my podcasts and my blog. I hadn’t before thought about trying to evoke any emotion, but more to inform in an easy-to-listen-to manner. As often happens when I hear your podcasts, I’m at that time working on something to which I can apply your advice. I was, last night, ready to record my speaking portions and edit a podcast about the sacrament of communion for those on a ggluten-freediet. Earlier in the evening ,I chaired a meeting of our local celiac support group, and out of the blue, someone stopped me before I left to ask if I knew any solutions for this exact problem. She didn’t know I had researched it, and spoken to a guest about it. I felt good that I could impart some useful information to her, but what was more impactful on me was her emotional investment in the issue. I left the meeting and came home to “infuse” my podcast with small tugs on the emotional fabric of my listeners. I also used the same strategy to write my social media for today. Small changes, small words, strategically placed to evoke emotion, when the subject is suitable is something I now have in my arsenal of podcasting tools. Thanks Dave – BTW my social posts are getting more comments and interaction than I have ever had on any particular podcast – and guess what – they are mostly emotionally driven! PS – I started a second podcast over the summer on gluten free weight loss/management so you’ll soon see my comments on your Logical Weight Loss Podcast, as I’ve binged on it for a few months now. acanadianceliacblog.com

                  Ready to Start a Podcast? I'd Love to Help You!

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>Michael,

                  He is on podcast number two, and this one is allowing him to make some money

                  http://abigpeacheyadventure.com.au/family-travel-podcast/

                  Question of the Month: Where Are you With Podcasting?

                  6:28 Clay from the Fish Nerds Podcast is a 4

                  7:30 Paul from the Fighting Through Podcast is a 1

                  8:48 Andrea from Union Podcastera is a 1

                  12:18 Darwyn Dave from Dealing with My Grief is 1

                  13:59 Brad from The Cinema Guys is a 1

                  15:23 Jared from The Fire Rescue is a 3

                  16:52 Micah and Dustin from Tales From Bedlum -5

                  17:55   Jonathon Bloom from the Weekly Awesome Podcast- 1

                  19:07 Kim from Teachers Need Teachers  is a 1

                  23:21 Josh from the Corner Cutters Podcast (about the Rubik's cube) - 1

                  25:10 Ryan Nelson - Conspiracy Theoryology is a 1

                  27:27 Master Kuldryn's from Kuldryn's Krypt is a - 1

                  28:28 Seth from Geekville Radio, www.twbpodcast.com and Classic Wrestling Memories  is a 1

                   31:01 Timothy kdoipodcasting.com was at a 5 and is now at a 3 

                  34:52 Vanessa from Vanessa's View is at a 1 (or UNO) 

                  39:41 Win Charles is a 6

                  Check Out Joe Today in Orlando

                  Tuesday (this coming Tuesday...September 25th) The Improv Orlando Florida Doors open at 6:30 - Show starts at 7:30 $10

                  LOTS of people in the cast. We EVEN have an opening act, the awesome 15-minute long Popcorn Finance podcast (up for a personal finance Plutus Award for Best New Podcast in that space) at next week's award show.

                  http://stackingbenjamins.com/tour

                   

                  Update on Michael Stelzner and Social Media Marketing World

                  In episode 635 (Logic and Emotion) I had mentioned how Social Media Marketing World has pulled their podcasting track. I wanted to clarify while Leo Laporte at one point had said "podcasting is dead" and then later took it back, Michael Stelzner never said podcasting is dead. He simply said his statistics show that his socials media crowd that attends his audience is less interested in the subject of podcasting. Michael still uses podcasting to promote Social Media Marketing world. If you can't afford the trip, some of the top experts are speaking at this event, and you can purchase a virtual ticket

                  I just got done binging on Michael's YouTube series "The Journey" as the second season has just started (so I have to binge the first episode) and this once again proves that "behind the scenes" information is often "not boring." Check it out at journey.show

                  Sue Jennett Your chat about choosing words that evoke emotion was interesting for me, as I like to choose my words carefully for both my podcasts and my blog. I hadn’t before thought about trying to evoke any emotion, but more to inform in an easy-to-listen-to manner. As often happens when I hear your podcasts, I’m at that time working on something to which I can apply your advice. I was, last night, ready to record my speaking portions and edit a podcast about the sacrament of communion for those on a ggluten-freediet. Earlier in the evening ,I chaired a meeting of our local celiac support group, and out of the blue, someone stopped me before I left to ask if I knew any solutions for this exact problem. She didn’t know I had researched it, and spoken to a guest about it. I felt good that I could impart some useful information to her, but what was more impactful on me was her emotional investment in the issue. I left the meeting and came home to “infuse” my podcast with small tugs on the emotional fabric of my listeners. I also used the same strategy to write my social media for today. Small changes, small words, strategically placed to evoke emotion, when the subject is suitable is something I now have in my arsenal of podcasting tools. Thanks Dave – BTW my social posts are getting more comments and interaction than I have ever had on any particular podcast – and guess what – they are mostly emotionally driven! PS – I started a second podcast over the summer on gluten free weight loss/management so you’ll soon see my comments on your Logical Weight Loss Podcast, as I’ve binged on it for a few months now. acanadianceliacblog.com

                  Ready to Start a Podcast? I'd Love to Help You!

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>86663f4fe09743e1b3dc68a70dd51de9Mon, 24 Sep 2018 04:00:00 -040059:01falsefull637637The Ultimate Guide to Launching Your PodcastYou want to launch a podcast, and in the past, I've talked about how there are 27 steps to launch a podcast (you might want to read that first). Today I want to cover this episode from a new angle and address some of the mistakes I am seeing on episode 636 of the School of Podcasting. If you missed the previous list it was

                  Step 1: Pick Your Topic

                  Step 2: Decide if you're podcasting solo or with cohost(s).

                  Step 3: Pick how you will podcast.

                  Step 4: Pick where will you podcast?

                  Step 5: Pick a name.

                  Step 6. Buy the Hardware

                  Step 7. Buy Software

                  Step 8 is purchasing web hosting

                  Step 9 is installing WordPress

                  Step 10 is to get your WordPress installation ready to podcast

                  Step 11 is making your website look good.

                  12. Domain Name

                  13. Graphics

                  14. Intro Music. (optional)

                  15. Media Hosting (for your mp3 files)

                  16. Organize Your Content

                  17. Record Your Content

                  18. Edit Your Content 1

                  9. Assemble Your Episode

                  20. Add ID3 Tags

                  21. Upload your media

                  22. Write Your Show Notes

                  23. Copy the Media URL and Paste It Into Your Post (optional)

                  24. Click Publish

                  25. Set Up Tags for iTunes

                  26. Make Sure your Feed is Valid

                  27. Submit Your Podcast to Apple Podcasts

                  What is the Goal of Your Podcast?

                  You need to know this. How will know if it's successful? Is it a certain number of downloads? Is it a certain number of sales? Is it to position you as an expert?

                  Does Your Podcast Move You Toward Your Goal?

                  So if the goal of your show is to help build an email list, did you remember to tell people about your list. If it's to build your consulting clients, did you mention you are available for consulting?

                  Has Someone Who Is Your Target Audience Given You Honest Feedback?

                  Have You Checked to See If You Are Unique?

                  There are at least five shows named "outside the box", and six shows named, "The Feed." If you name your show identical to another show, not only may you be opening the door to legal action, but these people have a head start and you will have a hard time ranking for that phrase.

                  What you NEED to Launch a Podcast

                  1. Artwork: The artwork is SQUARE with a minimum dimension of 1400X1400 and a maximum dimension of 3000X3000. The FILE SIZE needs to be less than 500 kb. Failure to meet these specifications can get you rejected, and cause your show not to update, and in some cases get removed from Apple.
                  2. A Valid RSS feed. That feed will have a description of your show. Along with the author/hosts(s) of the show, categories, and an email address. This is typically entered into your media host (more on that later) or whatever tool you are using to create an RSS feed
                  3. A media host. I was a Libsyn customer for 10 years before being a customer, but I feel Libsyn.com is the best. For other thoughts on podcast media hosting see this post A quick note: Stay away from Anchor or any other free media hosts. I've seen multiple attempts at free media hosting over the years and it always ends badly
                  4. One published episode. You can't upload a bunch of episodes as drafts, submit your show to Apple and other directories, and the flip a switch. While many people will tell you to launch with 3, 4, 10, 30 episodes, I'm here to tell you that you can launch with as many as you want (please note they DO NOT automatically download when someone subscribes, your audience needs to manually download them) but you only NEED one.
                  
                  

                  The Podcast Launch Schedule

                  I see so many people picking a launch date and then trying to fit their podcast into it. This is like picking a time for Thanksgiving dinner and you've never cooked a turkey before. You need to have a knowledge of how long it takes to cook the bird, and likewise, you wouldn't call everyone to the table if the meal wasn't done. They would all come running to the table and ask, "Hey, where's the food?"

                  I spent last week with Rob Walch the VP of Podcaster Relations at Libsyn.com (the oldest, largest podcast media hosting company - get a free month using the coupon code sopfree ) and he recommended to start submitting your show to directories ONE MONTH in advance and I agree and here is why:

                  1. While it may take 3-5 days to be listed in Apple, in some cases it takes a few extra days for the artwork to show up (after you've been approved) and in some cases even more, time before you are shown in the results of a search
                  2. You want to have your show listed in as many apps as possible. Right now I recommend Apple, Spotify, Stitcher, TuneIn, Google Podcasts, and if it's still alive Google Play Music. As I write this in September of 2018, Google Play Music is on a respirator and I would worry about it last. The reason for this is people get comfortable with their apps and devices. I use Overcast on my iPhone. If someone wants me to listen to their podcast and it's only available in Stitcher, there is a very strong chance I will never hear their episode. It costs nothing but a few minutes to submit your show to these places. I've got tutorials on how to do all of this at the School of Podcasting
                  
                  

                  Once Your Ready Pick Your Date

                  Once you are listed in the directories, then you can pick your date and start building the buzz (OK, you can start building the buzz when you submit to the directories). A musician is not going to plan a CD release party (remember those), or an author won't setup a book reading and autograph session until they have their products in their hand. With this in mind, I strongly suggest you do NOT pick your date until you are listed in all the directories.

                  Teach Your Audience How To Subscribe

                  Don't just tell your audience, "I'm in Apple podcasts." SHOW THEM how to subscribe. You can take screenshots on your phone (on an iPhone hold down the button on the right side of the phone and press the home button). If you have an android phone just press the Volume Down and Power buttons at the same time, hold them for a second, and your phone will take a screenshot. You want to guide your audience into being subscribers. This is the difference between a clerk at Home Depot answer the question "Where are the plastic tarps?" by saying "Isle 8" or taking me to aisle 8 and putting one in my hand. In that scenario, the clerk knows I'm walking out of the store with a plastic tarp. You want your audience walking out with a subscription. If you want you can use a video I made that explains how to subscribe to a podcast in Apple podcasts at www.learntosubscribe.com

                  One thing I should mention here, while I'm assuming you have episode(s) recorded is I also assume you have a domain name. Do you have your own website? That's up to you ( I recommend it) but at least have a domain name so your website is

                  Did You Know Siri Can Help You Subscribe to podcasts?

                  Get on Facebook live and ask Siri on your iPhone to subscribe to your podcast. Most of the time she gets it right.

                  Get Your Social Media Ready To Go

                  Make sure you have your Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, etc ready to go with graphics, etc. There is a tool called thunderclap.it which enabled you to work with your friends so you can post a tweet on their account and so your message goes out to a huge group of people at the same time. As I write this thunderclap.it is having issues with their website (and may have gone out of business). With this in mind, supply your group of friends with a pre-written tweet that they can retweet, etc.

                  Get Your Attitude in Check

                  If you want your podcast to be a business eventually, then you better write a business plan on how you're going to be different, better, and more successful than your competition. I will say that it takes YEARS to generate a sizeable income. In the book "beyond powerful radio" by Valerie Geller she points out that it takes three years to build an audience on radio. Wil Schroter is the Founder + CEO @ Startups.co say that it takes at least 4 years just to get pointed toward a real business. According to a post on Quora.com Amazon started in July 1994. They reported their first profit in Jan. 2004 for the last quarter of 2003.

                  With this in mind, get ready for the long haul. This is not a sprint. It is a marathon.

                  How Many Downloads Should My Podcast Get?

                  I have said the equation for downloads is

                  Total Value in the Episode

                  Multiplied by

                  The total amount of intelligent promotion

                  = Total Number of Downloads

                  Also, keep in mind, it's not all downloads. You can see so many benefits of podcasting. I spotlight them in this podcast as a "Because of My Podcast" segment

                  Conclusion

                  Make sure your show is good. Get your target audience to give you feedback

                  You only need one episode to launch, but many people launch with...]]>You want to launch a podcast, and in the past, I've talked about how there are 27 steps to launch a podcast (you might want to read that first). Today I want to cover this episode from a new angle and address some of the mistakes I am seeing on episode 636 of the School of Podcasting. If you missed the previous list it was

                  Step 1: Pick Your Topic

                  Step 2: Decide if you're podcasting solo or with cohost(s).

                  Step 3: Pick how you will podcast.

                  Step 4: Pick where will you podcast?

                  Step 5: Pick a name.

                  Step 6. Buy the Hardware

                  Step 7. Buy Software

                  Step 8 is purchasing web hosting

                  Step 9 is installing WordPress

                  Step 10 is to get your WordPress installation ready to podcast

                  Step 11 is making your website look good.

                  12. Domain Name

                  13. Graphics

                  14. Intro Music. (optional)

                  15. Media Hosting (for your mp3 files)

                  16. Organize Your Content

                  17. Record Your Content

                  18. Edit Your Content 1

                  9. Assemble Your Episode

                  20. Add ID3 Tags

                  21. Upload your media

                  22. Write Your Show Notes

                  23. Copy the Media URL and Paste It Into Your Post (optional)

                  24. Click Publish

                  25. Set Up Tags for iTunes

                  26. Make Sure your Feed is Valid

                  27. Submit Your Podcast to Apple Podcasts

                  What is the Goal of Your Podcast?

                  You need to know this. How will know if it's successful? Is it a certain number of downloads? Is it a certain number of sales? Is it to position you as an expert?

                  Does Your Podcast Move You Toward Your Goal?

                  So if the goal of your show is to help build an email list, did you remember to tell people about your list. If it's to build your consulting clients, did you mention you are available for consulting?

                  Has Someone Who Is Your Target Audience Given You Honest Feedback?

                  Have You Checked to See If You Are Unique?

                  There are at least five shows named "outside the box", and six shows named, "The Feed." If you name your show identical to another show, not only may you be opening the door to legal action, but these people have a head start and you will have a hard time ranking for that phrase.

                  What you NEED to Launch a Podcast

                  1. Artwork: The artwork is SQUARE with a minimum dimension of 1400X1400 and a maximum dimension of 3000X3000. The FILE SIZE needs to be less than 500 kb. Failure to meet these specifications can get you rejected, and cause your show not to update, and in some cases get removed from Apple.
                  2. A Valid RSS feed. That feed will have a description of your show. Along with the author/hosts(s) of the show, categories, and an email address. This is typically entered into your media host (more on that later) or whatever tool you are using to create an RSS feed
                  3. A media host. I was a Libsyn customer for 10 years before being a customer, but I feel Libsyn.com is the best. For other thoughts on podcast media hosting see this post A quick note: Stay away from Anchor or any other free media hosts. I've seen multiple attempts at free media hosting over the years and it always ends badly
                  4. One published episode. You can't upload a bunch of episodes as drafts, submit your show to Apple and other directories, and the flip a switch. While many people will tell you to launch with 3, 4, 10, 30 episodes, I'm here to tell you that you can launch with as many as you want (please note they DO NOT automatically download when someone subscribes, your audience needs to manually download them) but you only NEED one.
                  
                  

                  The Podcast Launch Schedule

                  I see so many people picking a launch date and then trying to fit their podcast into it. This is like picking a time for Thanksgiving dinner and you've never cooked a turkey before. You need to have a knowledge of how long it takes to cook the bird, and likewise, you wouldn't call everyone to the table if the meal wasn't done. They would all come running to the table and ask, "Hey, where's the food?"

                  I spent last week with Rob Walch the VP of Podcaster Relations at Libsyn.com (the oldest, largest podcast media hosting company - get a free month using the coupon code sopfree ) and he recommended to start submitting your show to directories ONE MONTH in advance and I agree and here is why:

                  1. While it may take 3-5 days to be listed in Apple, in some cases it takes a few extra days for the artwork to show up (after you've been approved) and in some cases even more, time before you are shown in the results of a search
                  2. You want to have your show listed in as many apps as possible. Right now I recommend Apple, Spotify, Stitcher, TuneIn, Google Podcasts, and if it's still alive Google Play Music. As I write this in September of 2018, Google Play Music is on a respirator and I would worry about it last. The reason for this is people get comfortable with their apps and devices. I use Overcast on my iPhone. If someone wants me to listen to their podcast and it's only available in Stitcher, there is a very strong chance I will never hear their episode. It costs nothing but a few minutes to submit your show to these places. I've got tutorials on how to do all of this at the School of Podcasting
                  
                  

                  Once Your Ready Pick Your Date

                  Once you are listed in the directories, then you can pick your date and start building the buzz (OK, you can start building the buzz when you submit to the directories). A musician is not going to plan a CD release party (remember those), or an author won't setup a book reading and autograph session until they have their products in their hand. With this in mind, I strongly suggest you do NOT pick your date until you are listed in all the directories.

                  Teach Your Audience How To Subscribe

                  Don't just tell your audience, "I'm in Apple podcasts." SHOW THEM how to subscribe. You can take screenshots on your phone (on an iPhone hold down the button on the right side of the phone and press the home button). If you have an android phone just press the Volume Down and Power buttons at the same time, hold them for a second, and your phone will take a screenshot. You want to guide your audience into being subscribers. This is the difference between a clerk at Home Depot answer the question "Where are the plastic tarps?" by saying "Isle 8" or taking me to aisle 8 and putting one in my hand. In that scenario, the clerk knows I'm walking out of the store with a plastic tarp. You want your audience walking out with a subscription. If you want you can use a video I made that explains how to subscribe to a podcast in Apple podcasts at www.learntosubscribe.com

                  One thing I should mention here, while I'm assuming you have episode(s) recorded is I also assume you have a domain name. Do you have your own website? That's up to you ( I recommend it) but at least have a domain name so your website is

                  Did You Know Siri Can Help You Subscribe to podcasts?

                  Get on Facebook live and ask Siri on your iPhone to subscribe to your podcast. Most of the time she gets it right.

                  Get Your Social Media Ready To Go

                  Make sure you have your Twitter, Facebook, Instagram, etc ready to go with graphics, etc. There is a tool called thunderclap.it which enabled you to work with your friends so you can post a tweet on their account and so your message goes out to a huge group of people at the same time. As I write this thunderclap.it is having issues with their website (and may have gone out of business). With this in mind, supply your group of friends with a pre-written tweet that they can retweet, etc.

                  Get Your Attitude in Check

                  If you want your podcast to be a business eventually, then you better write a business plan on how you're going to be different, better, and more successful than your competition. I will say that it takes YEARS to generate a sizeable income. In the book "beyond powerful radio" by Valerie Geller she points out that it takes three years to build an audience on radio. Wil Schroter is the Founder + CEO @ Startups.co say that it takes at least 4 years just to get pointed toward a real business. According to a post on Quora.com Amazon started in July 1994. They reported their first profit in Jan. 2004 for the last quarter of 2003.

                  With this in mind, get ready for the long haul. This is not a sprint. It is a marathon.

                  How Many Downloads Should My Podcast Get?

                  I have said the equation for downloads is

                  Total Value in the Episode

                  Multiplied by

                  The total amount of intelligent promotion

                  = Total Number of Downloads

                  Also, keep in mind, it's not all downloads. You can see so many benefits of podcasting. I spotlight them in this podcast as a "Because of My Podcast" segment

                  Conclusion

                  Make sure your show is good. Get your target audience to give you feedback

                  You only need one episode to launch, but many people launch with three.

                  Use the right tools, and make sure you are following image guidelines.

                  Don't start promoting your show until you are listed in the top directories

                  Get everyone to SUBSCRIBE to your show when it launches

                  Realize it will take time to grow your audience

                  Common Podcast Launch Mistakes

                  Using the wrong tool for the job. Podcaster who host their media on a web host (instead of a media host), free media hosts, companies that minor in podcast (Squarespace, Soundcloud)

                  Only promoting Apple. In May 2018, 54.4 percent of U.S. smartphone subscribers were using a Google Android device. Apple was the second most popular smartphone operating system with a 44.3 percent market share. source

                  Picking a launch date a few days from today (and not knowing the time frame it takes)

                  Horrible titles of episodes ( putting the name of the show in the title along with the episode number)

                  Overthinking everything and Underthinking the process

                  Not checking to see if the podcast name is already in place.

                  Not knowing how to use their equipment (bad mic technique, and bad microphones like the Blue Yeti, Blue Snowball, that are not bad, but you need to know how to use them)

                  Thinking a "Big launch" equals a big success. This is like saying a big wedding will lead to a happy marriage.

                  Worrying about Apple charts, and new and noteworthy. Focus on your audience, and make it easier to interact with you instead. The charts do not deliver much of a boost, and their validity is under suspicion at the moment.

                  Rating and Reviews are nice to have, but SUBSCRIBERS are the better thing to cultivate (which is why you want to lead them)

                  People are spamming their name. So if I had "School of Podcasting" |make money podcasting, Pat Flynn, John Lee Dumas that would be spam. Apple hasn't given any

                  Mentioned on this show

                  Dave on the Podcasting for Radio Dummies Show

                  Slick Text

                  Podcast Review Show

                  Bond Fire Studio

                  Idea for International Podcast Day (9/30) See Video

                  Want Some Help Launching Your Podcast?

                  I would love to sit down with you and help you plan your launch strategy. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule to schedule some one on one time, or Join the School of Podcasting

                  ]]>944614a037744d9292bdef37640a19d4Mon, 17 Sep 2018 04:27:00 -040055:56falsefull636636Logic and Emotion in Your PodcastIf there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave “at” schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to avoid spam with the spelling), or go to our Contact page for more options. I need your answer by 9/21/18
                  Slick Text Update

                  3:09

                  In a previous episode, I talked about testing Slick Text. This is a texting tool that creates an autoresponder. So when you text " sop " to 31996 you get an autoresponder from me with a link to my show in Apple Podcasts as well as a link to my show on Google Podcasts. I did a presentation for an "intimate" group at Podcast Midatlantic (probably 80 people) and I had five people sign up on the spot. With a month behind me, I've had 38 people sign up. You can try their free program, or upgrade to their $29 plan and save 15% off when you sign up for a paid plan using the coupon sop15.  For more information check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext

                   

                  What is LibsynPro

                  Libsyn.com is a great solution for the independent podcasters (with pricing starting at $5 per month, with the most popular plans being $15 or $20 a month). This week I spent time at Content Marketing World (an event with 4000+ attendees) where most of the clients were companies (not individuals) who were looking for enterprise solutions (and in some cases used by marketing agencies or networks). Here are some of the features of LibsynPro.

                  1. You can have different levels of access for multiple users.
                  2. Stats per show or for your whole NetWork
                  3. A higher monthly fee and you pay for your bandwidth (see VP of Podcaster Relations at rob@libsyn.com)
                  4. Dynamic ad insertion
                  
                  Addition Podcast Configurations

                  You can also have a private podcast. This means you can set up a podcast for your company, add the users, and have an app created for your podcast. This also gives you the ability to see if your employees are listening to episodes, and in the event, you terminate an employee you can remove their access to any files. 

                  Social Media Marketing World Dumps Podcasting Due to Slow Growth

                  11:05

                  Recently Tom Webster wrote an article on Medium what podcasting needs to spur more growth. Michael Stelzner replied to the post and stated, "Great read Tom. Your data seems to backup what I have noticed over the last 6 years since I have been in podcasting. I was very excited and there was pretty nice growth about 5 or 6 years ago. Then I noticed a shift that started maybe 3 or 4 years ago. I noticed the NPR style shows coming on the scene, in force. And of course Gimlet. My first concern was that people who already listened to “other” podcasts would go over to the high production shows and slow their listening of shows “like ours.” I was concerned it would send a signal to new podcasters that “you have be like those guys if you wanna get in this space, forget about it!” I also noticed a significant number of podcasting evangelists starting to “podfade,” and no one filled the gap. I started to notice my own numbers stop growing (but still be very healthy and stay that way for years) despite my other media properties growing. I started to notice less interest in podcasting sessions at my conference, less interest in podcasting articles on my site, etc. So all the data came together and made it very clear. Podcasting was not growing. We made the strategic decision to eliminate the podcasting track from Social Media Marketing World a few months ago. So what I saw happening through my lens in my industry is also happening in the entire podcasting industry it seems. And I am not sure it’s a language issue (as you suggested towards the 52). I actually think it’s a social media issue. People spend a ton of time consuming content with audio. It’s called video. And I’m sure you have access to data that shows video consumption is way up, especially on social networks. The times, they are a changing. Just my two cents. Thoughts??"

                  While Michael has his opinion based on his stats this does bring up one question:

                  Who are the Podcast Evangelists? ( I know both Cliff Ravenscraft and John Lee Dumas pivoted their marketing to reach a wider audience) but what is a significant number of podcast evangelists?

                  Keep in mind, this is through Michael's Lens.podcasting was dead Which will be different than YOUR Lens. It reminds me a bit of when Leo Laporte had said Podcasting wasn't' growing, it was too hard, and that lead to people saying Leo Laporte said that podcasting was dead  ( see https://mashable.com/2009/10/03/leo-laporte-video/#9DEMgJjZmaqs ). If you talk to Rob Walch, Todd Cochran or Rob Greenlee, I think they will report that podcast consumption is up (it may not be up in Michael's Niche). 

                  Mentioned:

                  Trends in Newspapers https://houston.cbslocal.com/2012/10/15/study-less-than-a-quarter-of-americans-read-newspapers/

                  Trends of Radio in the Car http://www.edisonresearch.com/radios-reach-in-cars-unchanged-since-2011/

                  Insights from Podcast MidAtlantic 2018

                  23:10

                  I just came back from Podcast MidAtlantic 2018. Were around 100 podcasters got together for a few days to talk podcasting. I met some great folks who will be guests in the future. Matthew Passey did a cool presentation about promoting your show and turned me on to Blip Billboards where you can get your show on an electronic billboard for $10 a day. A blip is anywhere from 7.5 to 10 seconds on a rotating billboard. The cost depends on the locations and times you choose. Any budget is fair game.

                  Content Marketing Is Content Marketing

                  I was listening to Tim Schmoyer's Video Creator's Podcast and let me summarize some of the concepts I heard:

                  • Know who your audience is.
                  • Focus on making great content
                  • Don't focus on the YouTube Algorithm
                  • Write good titles
                  • Be yourself and don't blatantly rip off other shows
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • Connect/Engage with your audience
                  • It takes time to build and audience
                  
                  

                  I've been investigating the Twitch video platform so I listened to a few Twitch podcasts and heard

                  • Know who your audience is
                  • Focus on making a good show
                  • Follower counts don't matter
                  • Don't do spammy "follow for follow" exchanges
                  • Be Yourself and don't rip off other shows.
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • It Takes Time
                  
                  

                  Sadly almost all of the Twitch podcasters are using horrible media hosts like Soundcloud and Anchor

                  When I was at Podcast Midatlantic I heard similar themes

                  • Know who your audience is
                  • Focus on making a good show
                  • Reviews don't move you up the charts
                  • Don't do spammy review swaps
                  • Be Yourself and don't rip off other shows.
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • It Takes Time
                  
                  Combining Logic with Emotions In Your Podcast

                  26:30

                  Words are fun. Picking the right words can trigger emotions in your audience. When you combine logic with emotions, it may inspire your audience to tell their friends. Today I play with words to show how different words can trigger more emotions. 

                  If you get emotional, your audience LIKES YOU and give you grief. See this video of Vince Gill singing at the funeral of George Jones. At the end, the audience (lead by Garth Brooks) stands to show their support as Vince starts to slowly lose the ability to sing. Watch the video and see how you feel at the end of the song. 

                  Notice the audience was rooting for him, so if you share something personal your audience is pulling for you. 

                  Keep in mind, the Internet writes in Ink. While you have freedom of speech, you do not have freedom of consequences. Sometimes we say things when we are emotional that can get us in trouble ( so it's a fine dance). Here are some examples:

                  What is more likely to trigger your audience? The phrase, "the 44th President of the United States," or the phrase "Barack Obama" or even more, "The First Black President."

                  What is better, "A Unique Situation" or "You're not going to believe this." Another example is "A Historic book," or "Based on a true story?"

                  Don't forget to use images on your show notes as those can trigger emotions as well.

                  Mentioned:

                  If there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave “at” schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to avoid spam with the spelling), or go to our Contact page for more options. I need your answer by 9/21/18

                  Slick Text Update

                  3:09

                  In a previous episode, I talked about testing Slick Text. This is a texting tool that creates an autoresponder. So when you text " sop " to 31996 you get an autoresponder from me with a link to my show in Apple Podcasts as well as a link to my show on Google Podcasts. I did a presentation for an "intimate" group at Podcast Midatlantic (probably 80 people) and I had five people sign up on the spot. With a month behind me, I've had 38 people sign up. You can try their free program, or upgrade to their $29 plan and save 15% off when you sign up for a paid plan using the coupon sop15.  For more information check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext

                   

                  What is LibsynPro

                  Libsyn.com is a great solution for the independent podcasters (with pricing starting at $5 per month, with the most popular plans being $15 or $20 a month). This week I spent time at Content Marketing World (an event with 4000+ attendees) where most of the clients were companies (not individuals) who were looking for enterprise solutions (and in some cases used by marketing agencies or networks). Here are some of the features of LibsynPro.

                  1. You can have different levels of access for multiple users.
                  2. Stats per show or for your whole NetWork
                  3. A higher monthly fee and you pay for your bandwidth (see VP of Podcaster Relations at rob@libsyn.com)
                  4. Dynamic ad insertion
                  
                  Addition Podcast Configurations

                  You can also have a private podcast. This means you can set up a podcast for your company, add the users, and have an app created for your podcast. This also gives you the ability to see if your employees are listening to episodes, and in the event, you terminate an employee you can remove their access to any files. 

                  Social Media Marketing World Dumps Podcasting Due to Slow Growth

                  11:05

                  Recently Tom Webster wrote an article on Medium what podcasting needs to spur more growth. Michael Stelzner replied to the post and stated, "Great read Tom. Your data seems to backup what I have noticed over the last 6 years since I have been in podcasting. I was very excited and there was pretty nice growth about 5 or 6 years ago. Then I noticed a shift that started maybe 3 or 4 years ago. I noticed the NPR style shows coming on the scene, in force. And of course Gimlet. My first concern was that people who already listened to “other” podcasts would go over to the high production shows and slow their listening of shows “like ours.” I was concerned it would send a signal to new podcasters that “you have be like those guys if you wanna get in this space, forget about it!” I also noticed a significant number of podcasting evangelists starting to “podfade,” and no one filled the gap. I started to notice my own numbers stop growing (but still be very healthy and stay that way for years) despite my other media properties growing. I started to notice less interest in podcasting sessions at my conference, less interest in podcasting articles on my site, etc. So all the data came together and made it very clear. Podcasting was not growing. We made the strategic decision to eliminate the podcasting track from Social Media Marketing World a few months ago. So what I saw happening through my lens in my industry is also happening in the entire podcasting industry it seems. And I am not sure it’s a language issue (as you suggested towards the 52). I actually think it’s a social media issue. People spend a ton of time consuming content with audio. It’s called video. And I’m sure you have access to data that shows video consumption is way up, especially on social networks. The times, they are a changing. Just my two cents. Thoughts??"

                  While Michael has his opinion based on his stats this does bring up one question:

                  Who are the Podcast Evangelists? ( I know both Cliff Ravenscraft and John Lee Dumas pivoted their marketing to reach a wider audience) but what is a significant number of podcast evangelists?

                  Keep in mind, this is through Michael's Lens.podcasting was dead Which will be different than YOUR Lens. It reminds me a bit of when Leo Laporte had said Podcasting wasn't' growing, it was too hard, and that lead to people saying Leo Laporte said that podcasting was dead  ( see https://mashable.com/2009/10/03/leo-laporte-video/#9DEMgJjZmaqs ). If you talk to Rob Walch, Todd Cochran or Rob Greenlee, I think they will report that podcast consumption is up (it may not be up in Michael's Niche). 

                  Mentioned:

                  Trends in Newspapers https://houston.cbslocal.com/2012/10/15/study-less-than-a-quarter-of-americans-read-newspapers/

                  Trends of Radio in the Car http://www.edisonresearch.com/radios-reach-in-cars-unchanged-since-2011/

                  Insights from Podcast MidAtlantic 2018

                  23:10

                  I just came back from Podcast MidAtlantic 2018. Were around 100 podcasters got together for a few days to talk podcasting. I met some great folks who will be guests in the future. Matthew Passey did a cool presentation about promoting your show and turned me on to Blip Billboards where you can get your show on an electronic billboard for $10 a day. A blip is anywhere from 7.5 to 10 seconds on a rotating billboard. The cost depends on the locations and times you choose. Any budget is fair game.

                  Content Marketing Is Content Marketing

                  I was listening to Tim Schmoyer's Video Creator's Podcast and let me summarize some of the concepts I heard:

                  • Know who your audience is.
                  • Focus on making great content
                  • Don't focus on the YouTube Algorithm
                  • Write good titles
                  • Be yourself and don't blatantly rip off other shows
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • Connect/Engage with your audience
                  • It takes time to build and audience
                  
                  

                  I've been investigating the Twitch video platform so I listened to a few Twitch podcasts and heard

                  • Know who your audience is
                  • Focus on making a good show
                  • Follower counts don't matter
                  • Don't do spammy "follow for follow" exchanges
                  • Be Yourself and don't rip off other shows.
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • It Takes Time
                  
                  

                  Sadly almost all of the Twitch podcasters are using horrible media hosts like Soundcloud and Anchor

                  When I was at Podcast Midatlantic I heard similar themes

                  • Know who your audience is
                  • Focus on making a good show
                  • Reviews don't move you up the charts
                  • Don't do spammy review swaps
                  • Be Yourself and don't rip off other shows.
                  • Be consistent in quality and schedule
                  • It Takes Time
                  
                  Combining Logic with Emotions In Your Podcast

                  26:30

                  Words are fun. Picking the right words can trigger emotions in your audience. When you combine logic with emotions, it may inspire your audience to tell their friends. Today I play with words to show how different words can trigger more emotions. 

                  If you get emotional, your audience LIKES YOU and give you grief. See this video of Vince Gill singing at the funeral of George Jones. At the end, the audience (lead by Garth Brooks) stands to show their support as Vince starts to slowly lose the ability to sing. Watch the video and see how you feel at the end of the song. 

                  Notice the audience was rooting for him, so if you share something personal your audience is pulling for you. 

                  Keep in mind, the Internet writes in Ink. While you have freedom of speech, you do not have freedom of consequences. Sometimes we say things when we are emotional that can get us in trouble ( so it's a fine dance). Here are some examples:

                  What is more likely to trigger your audience? The phrase, "the 44th President of the United States," or the phrase "Barack Obama" or even more, "The First Black President."

                  What is better, "A Unique Situation" or "You're not going to believe this." Another example is "A Historic book," or "Based on a true story?"

                  Don't forget to use images on your show notes as those can trigger emotions as well.

                  Mentioned:

                  Pat Flynn Smart Passive Income 

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  I have multiple plans for multiple budgets see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>e52b07a73ad2496f8be7cb59fad430cdMon, 10 Sep 2018 04:00:00 -040052:16falsefull63563510 Thousands Downloads Per Episode in Five MonthsToday I talk with Noah Tetzner who starts the History of Vikings five months ago, and when the average podcaster is getting a little under 2,000 downloads per episodes, Noah is getting 10,000 downloads per episodes. I wanted to know what he's doing to grow his audience so fast. 
                  Noah Tetzner Wanted a Show About Vikings But Couldn't Fine One He Liked

                  1:58

                  Like many podcasters, Noah found some podcasts that weren't bad, but they didn't really fit 100% of what he was looking for. What did Noah do? He started one of his own. Is he a big tech nerd? No. Did he come with a pre-made audience? No. He found guests that had more than a heartbeat (like some shows) he found guests who could bring value. In this interview you will also hear how:

                  • Noah is buying ads on other history shows to promote his show
                  • How much Noah is spending per show
                  • How reviews seem to be boosting his chart position, but may not do much for downloads
                  • How he appears on shows as a guest even if they are not about history
                  • He is building relationships with fellow podcasters and his audience
                  • His strategy is to do your research and be genuine
                  • Not everything he tried worked
                  • How he overcame Imposter Syndrome to start his show
                  • How he is now pursuing monetization
                  • His main priority is growing his audience.
                  
                  

                  Check out his show at www.thehistoryofvikings.com 

                  Mentioned: www.newandnoteworthy.info

                  Podcast Rewind: Where Has Dave Been?

                  19:15 

                  Big Podcast: Podcast Longevity, Failures, And How To Know If You'll Make It In Podcasting

                  Podcast Envy: Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting, on Impostor Syndrome and Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  Unstructured Podcast: Dave Jackson

                  The Word From Mouth: SEARCH, ADOPTION, AND MOVING THE NEEDLE IN PODCASTING – WITH DAVE JACKSON

                  Want to interview me on your show? Contact Me

                  What I Learned From My Podcast Focus Group

                  24:54

                  I am in a "Mastermind" with a graphics person, a lawyer, audio editors, and more. We are all podcasters and share our opinions on how to grow each other's podcast. It's free (you don't need to spend 5,000 a day to be in a mastermind - start one today). 

                  Here are some of the things I learned:

                  • I don't expand enough on what people get so they see the value
                  • My bullet points were out of order and I put the best bullet point at the bottom of the list
                  • You're not really saying what people are getting
                  • I had too many options to choose from
                  • I need to take my testimonials and sprinkle them through the sales copy
                  
                  So What's This Have to Do With Your Show?

                  Sometimes you need an OUTSIDE opinion to find things that are RIGHT IN FRONT OF YOU. 

                  We Need To Talk: Setting Your Podcast Expectations

                  31:30

                  There are people with 10 downloads who want to monetize their show. 

                  There are people with five episodes that want to quit their day job. 

                  Here is another way to think about this and set expectations

                  A musician has written their first five songs. Can they make a living?

                  An actor has gone on five auditions and might have a lead on a commercial. Can they make a living acting?

                  An author has five manuscripts and an agent. Can they make a living as an author?

                  The answer? It depends. The odds are not in your favor, but it's going to take TIME. Many "overnight successes" took YEARS to get their big break.

                  If your sole reason is to make QUICK MONEY, and you are bringing NO AUDIENCE, the odds are stacked against you.

                  STEP ONE OF MAKING MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST

                  So many people hear crowdfunding and focus on the funding, and forget that step is one is create a crowd. They put the cart before the horse.

                  How do you build your audience?

                  In a nutshell, it boils down to this.

                  1. Identify who your audience is 2. Listen to them and determine what content they want to hear. 3. Create content that will inspire them to tell a friend (in other words, its good). I refer to this is "deliver value." 4. Go to where your target audience is 5. Make friends with them, and bring value to every conversation, listen for ideas for future episodes. 6. Then tell them about your show

                  Step 7 would be repeat steps 2-6

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  Get coached by an award-winning, Hall of Fame podcasters

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>Today I talk with Noah Tetzner who starts the History of Vikings five months ago, and when the average podcaster is getting a little under 2,000 downloads per episodes, Noah is getting 10,000 downloads per episodes. I wanted to know what he's doing to grow his audience so fast. 
                  Noah Tetzner Wanted a Show About Vikings But Couldn't Fine One He Liked

                  1:58

                  Like many podcasters, Noah found some podcasts that weren't bad, but they didn't really fit 100% of what he was looking for. What did Noah do? He started one of his own. Is he a big tech nerd? No. Did he come with a pre-made audience? No. He found guests that had more than a heartbeat (like some shows) he found guests who could bring value. In this interview you will also hear how:

                  • Noah is buying ads on other history shows to promote his show
                  • How much Noah is spending per show
                  • How reviews seem to be boosting his chart position, but may not do much for downloads
                  • How he appears on shows as a guest even if they are not about history
                  • He is building relationships with fellow podcasters and his audience
                  • His strategy is to do your research and be genuine
                  • Not everything he tried worked
                  • How he overcame Imposter Syndrome to start his show
                  • How he is now pursuing monetization
                  • His main priority is growing his audience.
                  
                  

                  Check out his show at www.thehistoryofvikings.com 

                  Mentioned: www.newandnoteworthy.info

                  Podcast Rewind: Where Has Dave Been?

                  19:15 

                  Big Podcast: Podcast Longevity, Failures, And How To Know If You'll Make It In Podcasting

                  Podcast Envy: Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting, on Impostor Syndrome and Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  Unstructured Podcast: Dave Jackson

                  The Word From Mouth: SEARCH, ADOPTION, AND MOVING THE NEEDLE IN PODCASTING – WITH DAVE JACKSON

                  Want to interview me on your show? Contact Me

                  What I Learned From My Podcast Focus Group

                  24:54

                  I am in a "Mastermind" with a graphics person, a lawyer, audio editors, and more. We are all podcasters and share our opinions on how to grow each other's podcast. It's free (you don't need to spend 5,000 a day to be in a mastermind - start one today). 

                  Here are some of the things I learned:

                  • I don't expand enough on what people get so they see the value
                  • My bullet points were out of order and I put the best bullet point at the bottom of the list
                  • You're not really saying what people are getting
                  • I had too many options to choose from
                  • I need to take my testimonials and sprinkle them through the sales copy
                  
                  So What's This Have to Do With Your Show?

                  Sometimes you need an OUTSIDE opinion to find things that are RIGHT IN FRONT OF YOU. 

                  We Need To Talk: Setting Your Podcast Expectations

                  31:30

                  There are people with 10 downloads who want to monetize their show. 

                  There are people with five episodes that want to quit their day job. 

                  Here is another way to think about this and set expectations

                  A musician has written their first five songs. Can they make a living?

                  An actor has gone on five auditions and might have a lead on a commercial. Can they make a living acting?

                  An author has five manuscripts and an agent. Can they make a living as an author?

                  The answer? It depends. The odds are not in your favor, but it's going to take TIME. Many "overnight successes" took YEARS to get their big break.

                  If your sole reason is to make QUICK MONEY, and you are bringing NO AUDIENCE, the odds are stacked against you.

                  STEP ONE OF MAKING MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST

                  So many people hear crowdfunding and focus on the funding, and forget that step is one is create a crowd. They put the cart before the horse.

                  How do you build your audience?

                  In a nutshell, it boils down to this.

                  1. Identify who your audience is 2. Listen to them and determine what content they want to hear. 3. Create content that will inspire them to tell a friend (in other words, its good). I refer to this is "deliver value." 4. Go to where your target audience is 5. Make friends with them, and bring value to every conversation, listen for ideas for future episodes. 6. Then tell them about your show

                  Step 7 would be repeat steps 2-6

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  Get coached by an award-winning, Hall of Fame podcasters

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>b69c20f2d2534161a4ffd061ffa055c4Mon, 03 Sep 2018 04:23:19 -040042:10falsefull634634Danny Peña Is On a Mission For Additional ListenersIn episode  633 of the School of Podcasting, we are looking at Podcasting Events and asking, "is it worth attending?" We also touch base with Danny Peña who has created a movie about his story and his show Gamer tag Radio (that is now winning awards at Movie Festivals) to help introduce people to podcasting and to his show. Danny can point to one thing for his success, "Community." We first spoke with Danny back on episode 506 (definitely check it out)
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  3:45

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  Danny Peña is a Walking Make a Wish Foundation for His Fans

                  5:36

                  Danny first appeared on the School of Podcasting back on episode 506 and he has ALWAYs been about his audience and building community (he still is).  I drove down to Columbus to Ohio to hang out with him (along with Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast). Danny met some of his audience and brought them backstage at the event and introduced them to some of their favorite gamers. Think about how huge that is for the audience members. Think about going backstage at the Super Bowl to meet Tom Brady. In this conversation you will hear:

                  • Danny put together an award-winning movie about his story and the rise of Gamertag Radio using iMovie.
                  • How he taking steps to embrace those who are not currently listening to podcasts and to help them understand how to start listening ( www.learntosubscribe.com is something I put together)
                  • Danny has multiple revenue streams in addition to his sponsors
                  • His relationships lead him to leave CBS Radio when things got a little shaky.
                  
                  

                  For more information see www.gamertagradio.com

                  Mentioned: Edison Research 

                  Danny's first appearance on the School of Podcasting on episode 506

                  Daniel J Lewis from www.theaudacitytopodcast.com

                   

                  Are Podcast Conferences Worth It?

                  34:53

                  I asked you, "Are podcasting conferences worth it?" and today I play answers from

                  Ed Ryan from Podcasting For Radio Dummies is starting a magazine for podcasters, was inspired to start TWO podcasts and has already received a three-figure boost of support for his Beach talk Radio show that he does with his wife

                  33:22 Emily from The Story Behind and E Podcast Productions (check out her Book)

                  40:54 Marco from marcobernard.ca got to meet all sort of people at PM18, and has been inspired to start THREE new podcasts

                  42:58 Jennifer from Podcast With Jennifer as a podcast editor she has picked up clients and boosted relationships

                  44:10 Win Charles will attend when she can finance it. She looks forward to having the loving support of the community

                  45:13 Michael Delany from Caregiving for Dementia got direction and focus for his show, and met a lot of great people. Hear his appearance on the Podcast Review Show

                  47:50 Hilda from Wise Traditions Podcast has attended two events and came away with practical tips, and relationships. It's super encouraging.

                  50:03 My thoughts on podcast events

                  51:13 I got a shout out on the Podcasting For Radio Dummies (Thanks Ed!)

                  Question of the Month

                  55:00

                  If there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to avoid spam with the spelling), or go to our Contact page for more options. I need your answer by 9/21/18

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  I've got multiple plans for multiple budgets at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>In episode  633 of the School of Podcasting, we are looking at Podcasting Events and asking, "is it worth attending?" We also touch base with Danny Peña who has created a movie about his story and his show Gamer tag Radio (that is now winning awards at Movie Festivals) to help introduce people to podcasting and to his show. Danny can point to one thing for his success, "Community." We first spoke with Danny back on episode 506 (definitely check it out)
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  3:45

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  Danny Peña is a Walking Make a Wish Foundation for His Fans

                  5:36

                  Danny first appeared on the School of Podcasting back on episode 506 and he has ALWAYs been about his audience and building community (he still is).  I drove down to Columbus to Ohio to hang out with him (along with Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast). Danny met some of his audience and brought them backstage at the event and introduced them to some of their favorite gamers. Think about how huge that is for the audience members. Think about going backstage at the Super Bowl to meet Tom Brady. In this conversation you will hear:

                  • Danny put together an award-winning movie about his story and the rise of Gamertag Radio using iMovie.
                  • How he taking steps to embrace those who are not currently listening to podcasts and to help them understand how to start listening ( www.learntosubscribe.com is something I put together)
                  • Danny has multiple revenue streams in addition to his sponsors
                  • His relationships lead him to leave CBS Radio when things got a little shaky.
                  
                  

                  For more information see www.gamertagradio.com

                  Mentioned: Edison Research 

                  Danny's first appearance on the School of Podcasting on episode 506

                  Daniel J Lewis from www.theaudacitytopodcast.com

                   

                  Are Podcast Conferences Worth It?

                  34:53

                  I asked you, "Are podcasting conferences worth it?" and today I play answers from

                  Ed Ryan from Podcasting For Radio Dummies is starting a magazine for podcasters, was inspired to start TWO podcasts and has already received a three-figure boost of support for his Beach talk Radio show that he does with his wife

                  33:22 Emily from The Story Behind and E Podcast Productions (check out her Book)

                  40:54 Marco from marcobernard.ca got to meet all sort of people at PM18, and has been inspired to start THREE new podcasts

                  42:58 Jennifer from Podcast With Jennifer as a podcast editor she has picked up clients and boosted relationships

                  44:10 Win Charles will attend when she can finance it. She looks forward to having the loving support of the community

                  45:13 Michael Delany from Caregiving for Dementia got direction and focus for his show, and met a lot of great people. Hear his appearance on the Podcast Review Show

                  47:50 Hilda from Wise Traditions Podcast has attended two events and came away with practical tips, and relationships. It's super encouraging.

                  50:03 My thoughts on podcast events

                  51:13 I got a shout out on the Podcasting For Radio Dummies (Thanks Ed!)

                  Question of the Month

                  55:00

                  If there is a slider between 1 I LOVE PODCASTING and 10 is I HATE Podcasting, where are you? Are you feeling like a three? Seven? Lets us know and WHY you are feeling the way you are. If you want to record something and attach it be sure to put September question in the subject line and send it to dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com (trying to avoid spam with the spelling), or go to our Contact page for more options. I need your answer by 9/21/18

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  I've got multiple plans for multiple budgets at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>c0cb264b3f7745a8a699d859264125b2Mon, 27 Aug 2018 04:00:00 -040056:31falsefull633633Starting a Podcast With a Sponsor - How Marcus Couch Got To YesToday we are looking at not taking no for an answer. We are looking at trying new strategies for old problems. My friend Marcus Couch heard "No" multiple times every year when he tried to start a Chicago Bulls fan cast. He didn't give up. He tried and tried again. We hear his story of asking a sponsor to help. We all want more subscribers, will using a text tool like slicktext.com help by putting your subscription one click away? Speaking of new strategies, should you put together a focus group to see if your show is headed in the right direction? All of this is covered in this episode 632 of the School of Podcasting
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  1:35

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  I'm Playing with Slick Text To Grow My Subscriber List

                  3:39

                  They even have a whole tutorial on growing your list via text

                  Pros: I can try it, or revert back to a free account (and I don't have to worry about codes in an episode years later)

                  I can capture email addresses (and birthdays)

                  I can upgrade to a paid program and my un-used messages roll over to the next month

                  You can upgrade and downgrade any time you like

                  Your listeners can unsubscribe from your message by texting " stop "

                  Cons:

                  Only works in the US and Canada (for me that is 76% of my audience based on my Libsyn stats)

                  Some people listen in the car (or other activities) can't text immediately.

                  See Slick Text In Action

                  Text  " sop " to 31996 to get links to follow me in Apple Podcasts or Google Podcasts. Then when a new episode is published it will be available in those apps. Here is a video of the backend of Slick Text

                  https://schoolofpodcasting.wistia.com/medias/u9dzehifr0

                  For more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext

                   

                  Marcus Couch Heard "NO" 20 Times But Didn't Give Up

                  This is a conversation that I had on my Ask the Podcast Coach show which I do with co-host Jim Collison of www.theaverageguy.tv 

                  11:21

                  I've known Marcus Couch since 2005 back when he lived in Chicago. He now lives in California where writes, coaches, and podcasts (see Marcus Couach.com ). Marcus wanted to do THE OFFICIAL FAN podcast for the Chicago Bulls. He's had the domain bulllspodcasts.com for years. He asked the team, and they said "No." He asked the next year and the year after that. This went on a while. Marcus reached out to one of the Bulls Sponsors. Marcus was now part of the Sponsor's package. 

                  He turned a No, into a yes. He saw where one way was blocked, and kept looking for another path. 

                  He also used the strategy that bands do when trying to find a band member, he went to YouTube and found someone who had an audience on YouTube talking about the bulls. 

                  Marcus had the podcasting knowledge, a sponsor, and a passion, and his co-host Wyse Black had an audience. The two worked out a deal and now have launched the podcast with a sponsor, fan giveaways, and an audience. 

                  Check it out at www.bullspodcast.com 

                  Check out Marcus on his other podcasts:

                  WordPress Plugins A to Z

                  WordPress Weekly

                  Industry Night

                  Question of the Month

                  22:49

                  Have you attended a podcasting event? Was it worth it? I need the answer by 8/24 Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact if you use email, please use the subject line, "August Question." 

                  Why Your Podcast Needs a Focus Group

                  24:45

                  Rob Walch often uses this story of Marketing your podcast and how marketing will not save bad content (The Lone Ranger vs The Sixth Sense movies). So I decided to dig in deeper.

                  Dave's equation for more listeners is

                  The value in an episode multiplied by the amount of smart promotion = Total Downloads In a nutshell, it boils down to this.

                  1. Identify who your audience is 2. Determine what content they want to hear. 3. Create content that will inspire them to tell a friend (in other words, its good) 4. Go to where your target audience is 5. Make friends with them, and bring value to every conversation, listen for ideas for future episodes. 6. Then tell them about your show

                  My advice before you start promoting it is to get someone who is not named Mom to listen to your show. These should be your target audience. You need people who will tell you if it’s good, or it’s not.

                  The best marketing won’t save bad content (Think American Idol winners, think The Lone Ranger movie with Johnny Depp).

                  The Lone Ranger According to Wikipedia, “The film grossed $260.5 million worldwide against an estimated $225–250 million production budget and an additional $150 million marketing costs. That means it lost approximately $10 million. On the other hand, great content will inspire word of mouth (Think the Sixth Sense).

                  The Sixth Sense - per Wikipedia The film had a production budget of approximately $40 million (plus $25 million for prints and advertising). It grossed $26.6 million in its opening weekend and spent five weeks as the No. 1 film at the U.S. box office. It earned $293,506,292 in the United States and a worldwide gross of $672,806,292, ranking it 35th on the list of box-office money earners in the U.S. as of April 2010. Box Office Mojo estimates that the film sold over 57.5 million tickets in the US. In the United Kingdom, it was given at first a limited release at 9 screens and entered at No. 8 before climbing up to No. 1 the next week with 430 theaters playing the film.

                  Why was this so successful?

                  Because everyone who saw the Sixth sense told someone about it. They said, "You Must See This move." People who saw the Lone Ranger (myself included in this one) told their friends to NOT go see that movie.

                  Before you go promoting it, you might want to make sure your content is going to resonate with your audience. Promoting a show that brings no value will only allow the world to know how your show should be avoided sooner than later.

                  Get Some Coaching

                  If you want an unbiased opinion, I have two options. I can go over your show into on the Podcast Rodeo Show, or myself and Erik K Johnson an go over your entire podcast on the Podcast Review Show. If you're looking for private mentoring, I 've got packages for that at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                   

                  ]]>Today we are looking at not taking no for an answer. We are looking at trying new strategies for old problems. My friend Marcus Couch heard "No" multiple times every year when he tried to start a Chicago Bulls fan cast. He didn't give up. He tried and tried again. We hear his story of asking a sponsor to help. We all want more subscribers, will using a text tool like slicktext.com help by putting your subscription one click away? Speaking of new strategies, should you put together a focus group to see if your show is headed in the right direction? All of this is covered in this episode 632 of the School of Podcasting
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  1:35

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  I'm Playing with Slick Text To Grow My Subscriber List

                  3:39

                  They even have a whole tutorial on growing your list via text

                  Pros: I can try it, or revert back to a free account (and I don't have to worry about codes in an episode years later)

                  I can capture email addresses (and birthdays)

                  I can upgrade to a paid program and my un-used messages roll over to the next month

                  You can upgrade and downgrade any time you like

                  Your listeners can unsubscribe from your message by texting " stop "

                  Cons:

                  Only works in the US and Canada (for me that is 76% of my audience based on my Libsyn stats)

                  Some people listen in the car (or other activities) can't text immediately.

                  See Slick Text In Action

                  Text  " sop " to 31996 to get links to follow me in Apple Podcasts or Google Podcasts. Then when a new episode is published it will be available in those apps. Here is a video of the backend of Slick Text

                  https://schoolofpodcasting.wistia.com/medias/u9dzehifr0

                  For more information see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/slicktext

                   

                  Marcus Couch Heard "NO" 20 Times But Didn't Give Up

                  This is a conversation that I had on my Ask the Podcast Coach show which I do with co-host Jim Collison of www.theaverageguy.tv 

                  11:21

                  I've known Marcus Couch since 2005 back when he lived in Chicago. He now lives in California where writes, coaches, and podcasts (see Marcus Couach.com ). Marcus wanted to do THE OFFICIAL FAN podcast for the Chicago Bulls. He's had the domain bulllspodcasts.com for years. He asked the team, and they said "No." He asked the next year and the year after that. This went on a while. Marcus reached out to one of the Bulls Sponsors. Marcus was now part of the Sponsor's package. 

                  He turned a No, into a yes. He saw where one way was blocked, and kept looking for another path. 

                  He also used the strategy that bands do when trying to find a band member, he went to YouTube and found someone who had an audience on YouTube talking about the bulls. 

                  Marcus had the podcasting knowledge, a sponsor, and a passion, and his co-host Wyse Black had an audience. The two worked out a deal and now have launched the podcast with a sponsor, fan giveaways, and an audience. 

                  Check it out at www.bullspodcast.com 

                  Check out Marcus on his other podcasts:

                  WordPress Plugins A to Z

                  WordPress Weekly

                  Industry Night

                  Question of the Month

                  22:49

                  Have you attended a podcasting event? Was it worth it? I need the answer by 8/24 Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact if you use email, please use the subject line, "August Question." 

                  Why Your Podcast Needs a Focus Group

                  24:45

                  Rob Walch often uses this story of Marketing your podcast and how marketing will not save bad content (The Lone Ranger vs The Sixth Sense movies). So I decided to dig in deeper.

                  Dave's equation for more listeners is

                  The value in an episode multiplied by the amount of smart promotion = Total Downloads In a nutshell, it boils down to this.

                  1. Identify who your audience is 2. Determine what content they want to hear. 3. Create content that will inspire them to tell a friend (in other words, its good) 4. Go to where your target audience is 5. Make friends with them, and bring value to every conversation, listen for ideas for future episodes. 6. Then tell them about your show

                  My advice before you start promoting it is to get someone who is not named Mom to listen to your show. These should be your target audience. You need people who will tell you if it’s good, or it’s not.

                  The best marketing won’t save bad content (Think American Idol winners, think The Lone Ranger movie with Johnny Depp).

                  The Lone Ranger According to Wikipedia, “The film grossed $260.5 million worldwide against an estimated $225–250 million production budget and an additional $150 million marketing costs. That means it lost approximately $10 million. On the other hand, great content will inspire word of mouth (Think the Sixth Sense).

                  The Sixth Sense - per Wikipedia The film had a production budget of approximately $40 million (plus $25 million for prints and advertising). It grossed $26.6 million in its opening weekend and spent five weeks as the No. 1 film at the U.S. box office. It earned $293,506,292 in the United States and a worldwide gross of $672,806,292, ranking it 35th on the list of box-office money earners in the U.S. as of April 2010. Box Office Mojo estimates that the film sold over 57.5 million tickets in the US. In the United Kingdom, it was given at first a limited release at 9 screens and entered at No. 8 before climbing up to No. 1 the next week with 430 theaters playing the film.

                  Why was this so successful?

                  Because everyone who saw the Sixth sense told someone about it. They said, "You Must See This move." People who saw the Lone Ranger (myself included in this one) told their friends to NOT go see that movie.

                  Before you go promoting it, you might want to make sure your content is going to resonate with your audience. Promoting a show that brings no value will only allow the world to know how your show should be avoided sooner than later.

                  Get Some Coaching

                  If you want an unbiased opinion, I have two options. I can go over your show into on the Podcast Rodeo Show, or myself and Erik K Johnson an go over your entire podcast on the Podcast Review Show. If you're looking for private mentoring, I 've got packages for that at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                   

                  ]]>d5fdcc97042e410b843b5ac87e32b4afMon, 20 Aug 2018 04:11:43 -040035:17falsefull632632How Podcasting is Like Shoe ShoppingIn the past, I've talked about transcriptions. The fun part of transcriptions is you still have to end up with something that is easy to read and brings value. I've mentioned temi.com and revs.com but the one thing I didn't think about is how you can use it as an editing tool
                  But What if Things Go Wrong?

                  I drove to Nashville this week to attend two events. One was the Nashville podcasters meetup, and the other was the launch party of Without Warning by Sheila Wysocki which had a room full of private investigators who are thinking about starting a podcast, and music business people looking to start podcasts.

                  When I first thought about it, I went to hotels.com and did a search for cheap hotels. I normally don't look at reviews, but as I was choosing the cheapest hotel I could find, I saw some reviews with words like "bed bugs," "Drug Deals," and  "Cockroaches." It made me very nervous. I thought of getting bed bugs into my luggage and bringing them home. I thought of my last trip to Nashville where I ended up hitting a dear on the way home and totaled my car.

                  But What if Things Go Right?

                  I met some great people and strengthened the relationships I already had. I was interviewed, and it turns out that the Ramada Hotel I stayed at was the same one I chose the last time I was in Franklin Tenessee.  By the time I left many more people knew who I was, what I do, and how to contact me.

                  What I Learned
                  • If you get a bunch of private investigators together they are just as talkative as podcasters. Why? Becuase much like podcasters, the only people who understand what it's like to be a Private Investigator are other private investigators.
                  • My comfort zone is 7 hours in a car, but if I'm driving home I can go 8.5 and be wide awake at 3 AM.
                  • You can use transcriptions to help with editing. The two I mentioned are temi.com and rev.com
                  • More and more people are assembling teams to create a podcast (and I'm not sure people know there is an alternative)
                  • People often follow the guidelines based on their environment (so people in Nashville think you need to go to a professional studio to record - you don't)
                  • Danny Ozment of Emerald City Productions ( speaking of studios) has a great mixing room, and David Hooper of Big Podcast and Red Podcast converted his walk-in closet into a studio
                  
                  How Podcasting Is Like Show Shopping

                  I was so excited to go to Podcast Movement I forgot my shoes and I realized this when I was about 4 hours into the 7-hour drive. I stopped and bought a new pair. There are all sorts of dress shoes with colors, materials, heals, souls, etc. Some are shiny, and some have a texture. In the end, you need shoes to protect and provide comfort for your feet. With this in mind, it doesn't matter what they look like, the texture, etc. Fashion is what dictates those types of guidelines and those are not really NEED, but more WANTS.

                  For me I needed a black pair, that didn't pinch my feet, let my feet breathe, and had a soul that wasn't' going to have me sliding. I looked around, found a few that fit the criteria, and then bought the pair that fit my budget. I could've looked a lot longer, but I found shoes that fit what I needed, and I moved on and continued driving to Philadelphia. Sometimes you just need to decide, put on the shoes and go. Usually the first day, your f00t need to kind of get used to the shoe, but over time the show adapts to the foot and all is well.

                  So Man Varieties of Show Openings

                  Jeff Brown from Lead to Read will be coming on the show in the future to discuss this further (as we did a talk on this at Podcast Movement), but we share the opinion that the show should let people know what the show is about, what the episode is about, why we should listen to you, and then get to the content. We will dive into that deeper in the future.

                  The Perfect Podcast Intro

                  I'm going to play samples of podcast intros from many shows today and let you know that you don't HAVE to do an intro like mine if you don't want to. Don't want music? Don't need it. Like shoes, podcast intros come in many shapes and sizes.

                  Mentioned in this show

                  New Media Show

                  Big Podcast

                  A Very Fatal Murder

                  Oprah Super Soul

                  This American Life

                  What Was It Like

                  Chad Michael 

                  Story Podcast

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast? Ready To Grow Your Podcast?

                  I have multiple plans for multiple budgets at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  Question of the Month

                  Have you ever attended any Podcast Event? Was it worth it?

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact (I need the answer by 8/24/18) 

                   

                  ]]>In the past, I've talked about transcriptions. The fun part of transcriptions is you still have to end up with something that is easy to read and brings value. I've mentioned temi.com and revs.com but the one thing I didn't think about is how you can use it as an editing tool
                  But What if Things Go Wrong?

                  I drove to Nashville this week to attend two events. One was the Nashville podcasters meetup, and the other was the launch party of Without Warning by Sheila Wysocki which had a room full of private investigators who are thinking about starting a podcast, and music business people looking to start podcasts.

                  When I first thought about it, I went to hotels.com and did a search for cheap hotels. I normally don't look at reviews, but as I was choosing the cheapest hotel I could find, I saw some reviews with words like "bed bugs," "Drug Deals," and  "Cockroaches." It made me very nervous. I thought of getting bed bugs into my luggage and bringing them home. I thought of my last trip to Nashville where I ended up hitting a dear on the way home and totaled my car.

                  But What if Things Go Right?

                  I met some great people and strengthened the relationships I already had. I was interviewed, and it turns out that the Ramada Hotel I stayed at was the same one I chose the last time I was in Franklin Tenessee.  By the time I left many more people knew who I was, what I do, and how to contact me.

                  What I Learned
                  • If you get a bunch of private investigators together they are just as talkative as podcasters. Why? Becuase much like podcasters, the only people who understand what it's like to be a Private Investigator are other private investigators.
                  • My comfort zone is 7 hours in a car, but if I'm driving home I can go 8.5 and be wide awake at 3 AM.
                  • You can use transcriptions to help with editing. The two I mentioned are temi.com and rev.com
                  • More and more people are assembling teams to create a podcast (and I'm not sure people know there is an alternative)
                  • People often follow the guidelines based on their environment (so people in Nashville think you need to go to a professional studio to record - you don't)
                  • Danny Ozment of Emerald City Productions ( speaking of studios) has a great mixing room, and David Hooper of Big Podcast and Red Podcast converted his walk-in closet into a studio
                  
                  How Podcasting Is Like Show Shopping

                  I was so excited to go to Podcast Movement I forgot my shoes and I realized this when I was about 4 hours into the 7-hour drive. I stopped and bought a new pair. There are all sorts of dress shoes with colors, materials, heals, souls, etc. Some are shiny, and some have a texture. In the end, you need shoes to protect and provide comfort for your feet. With this in mind, it doesn't matter what they look like, the texture, etc. Fashion is what dictates those types of guidelines and those are not really NEED, but more WANTS.

                  For me I needed a black pair, that didn't pinch my feet, let my feet breathe, and had a soul that wasn't' going to have me sliding. I looked around, found a few that fit the criteria, and then bought the pair that fit my budget. I could've looked a lot longer, but I found shoes that fit what I needed, and I moved on and continued driving to Philadelphia. Sometimes you just need to decide, put on the shoes and go. Usually the first day, your f00t need to kind of get used to the shoe, but over time the show adapts to the foot and all is well.

                  So Man Varieties of Show Openings

                  Jeff Brown from Lead to Read will be coming on the show in the future to discuss this further (as we did a talk on this at Podcast Movement), but we share the opinion that the show should let people know what the show is about, what the episode is about, why we should listen to you, and then get to the content. We will dive into that deeper in the future.

                  The Perfect Podcast Intro

                  I'm going to play samples of podcast intros from many shows today and let you know that you don't HAVE to do an intro like mine if you don't want to. Don't want music? Don't need it. Like shoes, podcast intros come in many shapes and sizes.

                  Mentioned in this show

                  New Media Show

                  Big Podcast

                  A Very Fatal Murder

                  Oprah Super Soul

                  This American Life

                  What Was It Like

                  Chad Michael 

                  Story Podcast

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast? Ready To Grow Your Podcast?

                  I have multiple plans for multiple budgets at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  Question of the Month

                  Have you ever attended any Podcast Event? Was it worth it?

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact (I need the answer by 8/24/18) 

                   

                  ]]>81bc74a7dc4a4510885bd509b5e62a57Mon, 13 Aug 2018 04:00:00 -040030:23falsefull631631Should My Podcast Have an Email List?In the age of social media is email still relvant? If so, how do you grow your list? What makes a good lead magnet? Do I need a lead magnet? This is all discussed in episode 630 of the School of Podcasting
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  [1:38]

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  What Makes a Good Lead Magnet?

                  3:23

                  Thanks to Win Charles from the Ask Win show, Matt Rafferty from the Author Inside You podcast, and Jerry Williams from the FBI Retired podcast for contributing

                  Ryan Deiss at Digital Marketer defines a lead magnet as “a small chunk of value that solves a specific problem for a specific market that is offered in exchange for an opt-in. My buddy (and co-host of the Podcast Review Show) Erik K Johnston did a whole episode about lead magnets. Today we talk about email lists and why you might want to start using one. 

                  OptinMonster (which is a great tool/plugin for capturing leads) breaks it into seven parts:

                  Solves a real problem – if your lead magnet doesn’t solve a real problem that your customer avatar has, or if it doesn’t give them something they really want, it won’t work at all. Promises one quick win – your lead magnet should promise (and deliver) one quick win for your avatar. In other words, it should help them to easily achieve something. Super specific – don’t create a lead magnet about something general. The more specific you are about the benefit of your lead magnet, the better it will convert leads. Quick to digest – PDF checklists tend to convert really well because they are so quick and easy to digest. eBooks or lengthy reports may make your prospects feel overwhelmed. High value – your lead magnet should have both high perceived value and high actual value. Instantly accessible – your lead magnet will work best if it is something that can be delivered right away. People love instant gratification. Demonstrates your expertise or Universal Value Proposition – when someone consumes your lead magnet, it should demonstrate your expertise or your unique value proposition. This helps turn leads into customers down the road.

                  Here is a list of 69 effective lead magnets (no email required)

                  Advantages of an Email List?

                  17:44

                  The biggest advantage of an email list is you are one click away from your desired call to action, and more than likely you have someone's undivided attention. Most people (hopefully) are not reading their email while driving, etc.

                  You can email your list directly and not have the information appear on your website.

                  You are in contact with your engaged audience.

                  2000 Facebook followers is not the same as 2000 email subscribers

                  According to a 2015 study, 3.57% is the average open rate. So if you have 1000 subscribers, 35 will open your email

                  Derek Halpern of Social Triggers sent his latest post to his email list and his twitter account

                  Here are the results he got:

                  • 50 people clicked on his link from Twitter
                  • 1,200 people clicked on his link from his email list
                  
                  

                  His email list might be twice as large as his Twitter following but it still generated about 24 times more clicks.

                  Even your grandma has email.

                  Where To Start?

                  21:38

                  Mailchimp is many times the place you start. Why? It' starts free (but if your list grows can be expensive).

                  There are many, many companies out there. I've used Aweber before moving to Convert kit.

                  Aweber is $19/month for 500 subscribers or .038 cents per subscribers

                  Convert kit is $29/month up to 1000 subscribers or  .029 cents per subscriber

                  MailChimp is free up to 2000 subscribers but limits the number of emails sent out in the month to 12,000. If you have 1000 subscribers and wanted unlimited emails per month it would be $15 a month at Mailchimp 

                  Do I NEED an Email List?

                  Do you need an email list when you starting a podcast, no. But, I hear time and time again that someone in year three pivots their show in a new direction and really, really wishes they had started an email list.

                  Be Very Careful With Affiliate Links

                  Both Amazon Associates (amazon's affiliate program) and Mailchimp have it in their terms of service that sending email with affiliate links is against the rules.

                  Take the Time To Learn Your Email System

                  One of the things you should do upon signing up for an email service is to take the time to go through whatever tutorials they have. For example, I use Convert kit and to make a long story short I'm not using half of the features. When I was at Podcast Movement, I went to their booth, explained my situation and the rep show the features I could be using, and show how easy it is to use. With this in mind, I still need to take the time to learn the system. There is no sense spending money on a system that sits dormant. 

                  Example of Podcast Lead Magnets

                  Erik K Johnson has 17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions

                  David Hooper of Big Podcast has 25 podcast episode templates (bottom of the page)

                  Daniel J Lewis has 20 things you should do before recording every podcast episode (right sidebar) He also has an email list devoted to pointing out great deals at Podcastingdeals.com

                  I have a resource to help you write better Podcast Episodes titles at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines

                  I also have a video series for those thinking of getting into podcasting that walks you through the first few steps at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps

                  The Question of the Month

                  28:50

                  If you've attended any podcast event, was it worth it? If so, why? If not, why not? Please send those in by 8/24/18 go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact if you are emailing them in please put "August Question" in the subject line. (and don't forget to mention your show). 

                  Also Mentioned in This Episode

                  Without warning Podcast at https://sheilawysocki.com/

                  Nashville Podcaster Meetup 

                  Get a Free Month of Media Hosting at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                  Ready to Sart Podcasting?

                  I would love to work with you. I have multiple plans for multiple budgets, see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>In the age of social media is email still relvant? If so, how do you grow your list? What makes a good lead magnet? Do I need a lead magnet? This is all discussed in episode 630 of the School of Podcasting
                  Sponsor: Podcast Engineering School

                  [1:38]

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for “podcast engineer” and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  What Makes a Good Lead Magnet?

                  3:23

                  Thanks to Win Charles from the Ask Win show, Matt Rafferty from the Author Inside You podcast, and Jerry Williams from the FBI Retired podcast for contributing

                  Ryan Deiss at Digital Marketer defines a lead magnet as “a small chunk of value that solves a specific problem for a specific market that is offered in exchange for an opt-in. My buddy (and co-host of the Podcast Review Show) Erik K Johnston did a whole episode about lead magnets. Today we talk about email lists and why you might want to start using one. 

                  OptinMonster (which is a great tool/plugin for capturing leads) breaks it into seven parts:

                  Solves a real problem – if your lead magnet doesn’t solve a real problem that your customer avatar has, or if it doesn’t give them something they really want, it won’t work at all. Promises one quick win – your lead magnet should promise (and deliver) one quick win for your avatar. In other words, it should help them to easily achieve something. Super specific – don’t create a lead magnet about something general. The more specific you are about the benefit of your lead magnet, the better it will convert leads. Quick to digest – PDF checklists tend to convert really well because they are so quick and easy to digest. eBooks or lengthy reports may make your prospects feel overwhelmed. High value – your lead magnet should have both high perceived value and high actual value. Instantly accessible – your lead magnet will work best if it is something that can be delivered right away. People love instant gratification. Demonstrates your expertise or Universal Value Proposition – when someone consumes your lead magnet, it should demonstrate your expertise or your unique value proposition. This helps turn leads into customers down the road.

                  Here is a list of 69 effective lead magnets (no email required)

                  Advantages of an Email List?

                  17:44

                  The biggest advantage of an email list is you are one click away from your desired call to action, and more than likely you have someone's undivided attention. Most people (hopefully) are not reading their email while driving, etc.

                  You can email your list directly and not have the information appear on your website.

                  You are in contact with your engaged audience.

                  2000 Facebook followers is not the same as 2000 email subscribers

                  According to a 2015 study, 3.57% is the average open rate. So if you have 1000 subscribers, 35 will open your email

                  Derek Halpern of Social Triggers sent his latest post to his email list and his twitter account

                  Here are the results he got:

                  • 50 people clicked on his link from Twitter
                  • 1,200 people clicked on his link from his email list
                  
                  

                  His email list might be twice as large as his Twitter following but it still generated about 24 times more clicks.

                  Even your grandma has email.

                  Where To Start?

                  21:38

                  Mailchimp is many times the place you start. Why? It' starts free (but if your list grows can be expensive).

                  There are many, many companies out there. I've used Aweber before moving to Convert kit.

                  Aweber is $19/month for 500 subscribers or .038 cents per subscribers

                  Convert kit is $29/month up to 1000 subscribers or  .029 cents per subscriber

                  MailChimp is free up to 2000 subscribers but limits the number of emails sent out in the month to 12,000. If you have 1000 subscribers and wanted unlimited emails per month it would be $15 a month at Mailchimp 

                  Do I NEED an Email List?

                  Do you need an email list when you starting a podcast, no. But, I hear time and time again that someone in year three pivots their show in a new direction and really, really wishes they had started an email list.

                  Be Very Careful With Affiliate Links

                  Both Amazon Associates (amazon's affiliate program) and Mailchimp have it in their terms of service that sending email with affiliate links is against the rules.

                  Take the Time To Learn Your Email System

                  One of the things you should do upon signing up for an email service is to take the time to go through whatever tutorials they have. For example, I use Convert kit and to make a long story short I'm not using half of the features. When I was at Podcast Movement, I went to their booth, explained my situation and the rep show the features I could be using, and show how easy it is to use. With this in mind, I still need to take the time to learn the system. There is no sense spending money on a system that sits dormant. 

                  Example of Podcast Lead Magnets

                  Erik K Johnson has 17 Ultimate Podcast Interview Questions

                  David Hooper of Big Podcast has 25 podcast episode templates (bottom of the page)

                  Daniel J Lewis has 20 things you should do before recording every podcast episode (right sidebar) He also has an email list devoted to pointing out great deals at Podcastingdeals.com

                  I have a resource to help you write better Podcast Episodes titles at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines

                  I also have a video series for those thinking of getting into podcasting that walks you through the first few steps at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps

                  The Question of the Month

                  28:50

                  If you've attended any podcast event, was it worth it? If so, why? If not, why not? Please send those in by 8/24/18 go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact if you are emailing them in please put "August Question" in the subject line. (and don't forget to mention your show). 

                  Also Mentioned in This Episode

                  Without warning Podcast at https://sheilawysocki.com/

                  Nashville Podcaster Meetup 

                  Get a Free Month of Media Hosting at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                  Ready to Sart Podcasting?

                  I would love to work with you. I have multiple plans for multiple budgets, see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>9e49e912b7164d3abbd0e3b7682e0983Mon, 06 Aug 2018 04:00:00 -040035:52falsefull63063013 Years of Proof That Podcasting Works2:42

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for "podcast engineer" and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  My Induction Into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  This past week I was inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am honored to be in such good company, and deeply grateful for all the kind words. In looking back at my 13 years I noticed a pattern:

                  How Podcasting Works

                  Valuable content leads to relationships that lead to opportunities. The key word is VALUABLE content. Then you have to work at relationships, and you need to take advantage of every opportunity. Look back I see how:

                  6:00 Who are Dave's influences? Dave Barry, David Letterman, and Dan Klass

                  7:59 Thank God I was bullied?

                  9:25 Hope for all the introverts

                  10:05 You learn from all your failures 

                  11:00 Content - Relationships - Opportunities

                  12:50 Dave's first podcast attracts Marcus Couch

                  14:45 Dave gets to go on the radio to explain podcasting to Music Business Radio

                  16:30 Marcus Couch invites me to get involved with Podshow. The Internet's first free podcast media hosting

                  17:25 Why it's not the tech

                  17:55 Dave tries to sound like Scott Fletcher of Podcheck Review

                  20:33 Why free media hosting drives me nuts

                  Podshow/Mevio 8/2005 – 4/2014 (116 months – 38.8 million dollars spent) Podango 9/2006 – 12/2008 (27 Months) wildvoice.com 7/2006 – 7/2009 (36 months) mypodcasts.com 2007 – 2011 (estimated 48 months) Audiometric.io 11/ 2012 – 8/2014 (21 months before being purchased by panoply and taken off the market). Opinion Podcasting 11/2015-10/2017 (23 months)

                  The average is 45 months. Take Podshow and the 38 million out of the picture and that drops to 31 (which is close to my typical answer of three years or 36 months)

                  Anchor.fm was started in August of 2015. If they make it 45 months that is May of 2019. If they go 31 months that would be May of 2018. So far Anchor has burned through 14.4 M already (see https://www.crunchbase.com/organization/anchor-fm#section-locked-charts )

                  24:00 How I got the job as the director of the New Media Expo

                  25:57 Podcasters Roundtable shows embracing your competition

                  26:30 Podcasters Roundtable leads to me interviewing Jordan Harbinger

                  27:11 My relationship with Daniel J Lewis leads to me getting involved with the Membership Guys

                  27:48 Talking to Mike Morrison leads to me speaking at Social Media Marketing World

                  30:11 Podcast Movement and Steve Stewart leads to me meeting Glenn the Geek Hebert

                  32:50 Glenn invites me to speak at Podfest

                  34:22 Jared Easley introduces me to Danny Pena

                  36:16 My second trip to Podfest leads to me being interviewed

                  37:10 My interview, leads to me being featured in the Messengers a Podcast Documentary

                  38:16 My speaking resume made it easier to get more speaking gigs

                  39:20 Podcasting is like farming. You plant, fertilize, and harvest. 

                  38:50 It's not all about downloads. How my audience helped me through tough times.

                  42:48 Are you ready to work with Dave?

                  44:45 The one memory that bugs me from PM18

                  46:50 Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and Podcasters Society inducts Dave Jackson into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame

                  53:20 Dave Jackson's acceptance speech.

                  ]]>2:42

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Today I did a quick search on Indeed.com for "podcast engineer" and saw quite a few options

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  My Induction Into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  This past week I was inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am honored to be in such good company, and deeply grateful for all the kind words. In looking back at my 13 years I noticed a pattern:

                  How Podcasting Works

                  Valuable content leads to relationships that lead to opportunities. The key word is VALUABLE content. Then you have to work at relationships, and you need to take advantage of every opportunity. Look back I see how:

                  6:00 Who are Dave's influences? Dave Barry, David Letterman, and Dan Klass

                  7:59 Thank God I was bullied?

                  9:25 Hope for all the introverts

                  10:05 You learn from all your failures 

                  11:00 Content - Relationships - Opportunities

                  12:50 Dave's first podcast attracts Marcus Couch

                  14:45 Dave gets to go on the radio to explain podcasting to Music Business Radio

                  16:30 Marcus Couch invites me to get involved with Podshow. The Internet's first free podcast media hosting

                  17:25 Why it's not the tech

                  17:55 Dave tries to sound like Scott Fletcher of Podcheck Review

                  20:33 Why free media hosting drives me nuts

                  Podshow/Mevio 8/2005 – 4/2014 (116 months – 38.8 million dollars spent) Podango 9/2006 – 12/2008 (27 Months) wildvoice.com 7/2006 – 7/2009 (36 months) mypodcasts.com 2007 – 2011 (estimated 48 months) Audiometric.io 11/ 2012 – 8/2014 (21 months before being purchased by panoply and taken off the market). Opinion Podcasting 11/2015-10/2017 (23 months)

                  The average is 45 months. Take Podshow and the 38 million out of the picture and that drops to 31 (which is close to my typical answer of three years or 36 months)

                  Anchor.fm was started in August of 2015. If they make it 45 months that is May of 2019. If they go 31 months that would be May of 2018. So far Anchor has burned through 14.4 M already (see https://www.crunchbase.com/organization/anchor-fm#section-locked-charts )

                  24:00 How I got the job as the director of the New Media Expo

                  25:57 Podcasters Roundtable shows embracing your competition

                  26:30 Podcasters Roundtable leads to me interviewing Jordan Harbinger

                  27:11 My relationship with Daniel J Lewis leads to me getting involved with the Membership Guys

                  27:48 Talking to Mike Morrison leads to me speaking at Social Media Marketing World

                  30:11 Podcast Movement and Steve Stewart leads to me meeting Glenn the Geek Hebert

                  32:50 Glenn invites me to speak at Podfest

                  34:22 Jared Easley introduces me to Danny Pena

                  36:16 My second trip to Podfest leads to me being interviewed

                  37:10 My interview, leads to me being featured in the Messengers a Podcast Documentary

                  38:16 My speaking resume made it easier to get more speaking gigs

                  39:20 Podcasting is like farming. You plant, fertilize, and harvest. 

                  38:50 It's not all about downloads. How my audience helped me through tough times.

                  42:48 Are you ready to work with Dave?

                  44:45 The one memory that bugs me from PM18

                  46:50 Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and Podcasters Society inducts Dave Jackson into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame

                  53:20 Dave Jackson's acceptance speech.

                  ]]>3aa101905922422b8c71ba28a6a966a1Mon, 30 Jul 2018 04:11:23 -040001:02:51falsefull629629Are You Making These Podcast Mistakes Part II1:30

                  Haley Radke from http://www.adopteeson.com/ shares how the only people who can understand what it's like to be adopted, and more importantly how to deal with a reunion with your biological parents. Nobody knows what that is like except those who have lived it. You might feel alone, but by creating her podcasts she is how building a community and actually had a meetup when she was traveling. People able came from out of state to come to meet her, and to be part of the community

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

                  9:22

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  If you're looking to start your own audio editing service, or just want to make your show sound better. This course is for you.

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING ENDS VERY SOON – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  Imposter Syndrom Continued

                  12:15

                  Last week we looked at what is Imposter syndrome, and how to overcome it. I was listening to the Dennis Miller Option and he shared some insights into how he feels when he is at a party with "celebrities." If you are new to Dennis Miller, here are some facts from his Wikipedia page.

                  Dennis Miller:

                  Saturday Night Live 1985 to 1991

                  Dennis Miller show (last seven month ) in 1992

                  Dennis Miller Show Live 1995- 2002 winning five Emmys for HBO

                  Hosted three-hour radio show on westwood one from 2007 to 2015

                  He also had shows on CNBC, and has done featured spots on many television shows.

                  He is listed as #21 on the great comedians of all time top 100 chart from Comedy Central

                  This is paraphrased from this show, " As far as being a celebrity, I'm complete "wobbliness." The moment I'm with some people who are famous I can do my little patter. I can make them laugh, and we can have the exchange that they want to have and I want to have. At the end (of the night), if they say, "Here is my number call me," when I get home and I'm alone, I don't tare it up, I keep them and think I'll call them someday.

                  I NEVER get to those calls. I just think they didn't mean it. I would feel like I was cold calling them to sell them encyclopedias. It's a weird thing. "

                  More Common Podcasting Mistakes

                  16:05

                  Are you ONLY putting a "jukebox" or "show player" for your podcast? 

                  This is where you have one page with all your episodes. For an example see http://becausepodcast.libsyn.com/category/Binge+Listen

                  PROS

                  1. This makes it easy to go to one page and click listen and let it play all of your episodes.
                  
                  

                  Cons

                  1. Ther are now show notes on your page. Any shows notes that appear are actually on your media hosts website (and the player is served in what is called an iframe, so technically while this appears on your site, it's like someone cut a hole in your site and you are looking through to the original site).
                  2. It makes it very hard to share the episode
                  
                  Do You Have Extra Words In Your Podcast Name That Are Not Needed in Apple?

                  In this example, I'm not talking about the title of your episodes but the title of your show. Try to avoid having people "Search for the show in Apple podcasts." If you do, you need to tell them EXACTLY what to search for.

                  EXAMPLE

                  The kookcast is a podcast with a very unique name. I would deeply doubt there are two shows with that name. If you go to Apple podcasts and search for kookcast it comes right up. However, if you enter "The kookcast" even with its SUPER UNIQUE name it does not appear in the top 300 results.

                  From what I can see when you add "The" your show is ranked against all the other shows that have the word "the" in the title and it doesn't appear. So in your case you might need to have them search for your name instead of the name of your show. This assumes you are listed as the author of your show.

                  Is Your Podcast Created by Unkown?

                  If you search for your show in Apple podcasts and it shows the author as "unknown" you can easily fix this by going to the system you use to make your show (for example in Libsyn.com you can go to destinations > edit > Libsyn classic feed and add the author information along with owner, email, categories) and enter the missing information. The listing in apple should updated in about 24 hours.

                  Do You Not Care About Your Android Audience?

                  This one confuses me, but I see it all the time. I go to a podcast website, I see the show. I can click play. When I go to subscribe there is one and only one option. Apple Podcasts. If you are on android, you are out of luck, I hope you figure something out.

                  Check out this article. It shows a map with android being one color and iOs another color. Europe is entirely android. see https://www.moontechnolabs.com/apple-vs-android-comparative-study-2017/ according to an article at statscounter, android currently has 74% of the market in Europe. see http://gs.statcounter.com/os-market-share/mobile/europe

                  ]]>1:30

                  Haley Radke from http://www.adopteeson.com/ shares how the only people who can understand what it's like to be adopted, and more importantly how to deal with a reunion with your biological parents. Nobody knows what that is like except those who have lived it. You might feel alone, but by creating her podcasts she is how building a community and actually had a meetup when she was traveling. People able came from out of state to come to meet her, and to be part of the community

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

                  9:22

                  Podcast Engineering School – next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  If you're looking to start your own audio editing service, or just want to make your show sound better. This course is for you.

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING ENDS VERY SOON – SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  Imposter Syndrom Continued

                  12:15

                  Last week we looked at what is Imposter syndrome, and how to overcome it. I was listening to the Dennis Miller Option and he shared some insights into how he feels when he is at a party with "celebrities." If you are new to Dennis Miller, here are some facts from his Wikipedia page.

                  Dennis Miller:

                  Saturday Night Live 1985 to 1991

                  Dennis Miller show (last seven month ) in 1992

                  Dennis Miller Show Live 1995- 2002 winning five Emmys for HBO

                  Hosted three-hour radio show on westwood one from 2007 to 2015

                  He also had shows on CNBC, and has done featured spots on many television shows.

                  He is listed as #21 on the great comedians of all time top 100 chart from Comedy Central

                  This is paraphrased from this show, " As far as being a celebrity, I'm complete "wobbliness." The moment I'm with some people who are famous I can do my little patter. I can make them laugh, and we can have the exchange that they want to have and I want to have. At the end (of the night), if they say, "Here is my number call me," when I get home and I'm alone, I don't tare it up, I keep them and think I'll call them someday.

                  I NEVER get to those calls. I just think they didn't mean it. I would feel like I was cold calling them to sell them encyclopedias. It's a weird thing. "

                  More Common Podcasting Mistakes

                  16:05

                  Are you ONLY putting a "jukebox" or "show player" for your podcast? 

                  This is where you have one page with all your episodes. For an example see http://becausepodcast.libsyn.com/category/Binge+Listen

                  PROS

                  1. This makes it easy to go to one page and click listen and let it play all of your episodes.
                  
                  

                  Cons

                  1. Ther are now show notes on your page. Any shows notes that appear are actually on your media hosts website (and the player is served in what is called an iframe, so technically while this appears on your site, it's like someone cut a hole in your site and you are looking through to the original site).
                  2. It makes it very hard to share the episode
                  
                  Do You Have Extra Words In Your Podcast Name That Are Not Needed in Apple?

                  In this example, I'm not talking about the title of your episodes but the title of your show. Try to avoid having people "Search for the show in Apple podcasts." If you do, you need to tell them EXACTLY what to search for.

                  EXAMPLE

                  The kookcast is a podcast with a very unique name. I would deeply doubt there are two shows with that name. If you go to Apple podcasts and search for kookcast it comes right up. However, if you enter "The kookcast" even with its SUPER UNIQUE name it does not appear in the top 300 results.

                  From what I can see when you add "The" your show is ranked against all the other shows that have the word "the" in the title and it doesn't appear. So in your case you might need to have them search for your name instead of the name of your show. This assumes you are listed as the author of your show.

                  Is Your Podcast Created by Unkown?

                  If you search for your show in Apple podcasts and it shows the author as "unknown" you can easily fix this by going to the system you use to make your show (for example in Libsyn.com you can go to destinations > edit > Libsyn classic feed and add the author information along with owner, email, categories) and enter the missing information. The listing in apple should updated in about 24 hours.

                  Do You Not Care About Your Android Audience?

                  This one confuses me, but I see it all the time. I go to a podcast website, I see the show. I can click play. When I go to subscribe there is one and only one option. Apple Podcasts. If you are on android, you are out of luck, I hope you figure something out.

                  Check out this article. It shows a map with android being one color and iOs another color. Europe is entirely android. see https://www.moontechnolabs.com/apple-vs-android-comparative-study-2017/ according to an article at statscounter, android currently has 74% of the market in Europe. see http://gs.statcounter.com/os-market-share/mobile/europe

                  ]]>37403545695d40b9a1ff1af9b231a91aMon, 23 Jul 2018 04:00:00 -040029:16falsefull628628Overcoming Impostor SyndromeSeventy percent of people have impostor syndrome. While an interesting stat, that doesn't really help people who have impostor syndrome get over it. Today I have 12 strategies to help overcome Impostor syndrome
                  Because of My Podcast: I Got A Custom Wrestling Mat

                  01:26

                  Jason Bryan of www.mattalkonline.com shares the story how one of the top manufacturers of wrestling mats made a custom wrestling mat with Jason's Logo and microphone. HOW COOL IS THAT? You can hear more about how Jason is now doing podcasting as a career at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/jason-bryant-turned-his-experience-into-a-career-in-podcasting/

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

                  Podcast Engineering School - next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW - SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  We All Feed Like Imposters

                  Seth Godin wrote in The Icarus Deception that after a dozen bestsellers he still feels like a fraud all the time

                  "The beauty of the impostor syndrome is you vacillate between extreme egomania and a complete feeling of: 'I'm a fraud! Oh God, they're on to me! I'm a fraud!' So you just try to ride the egomania when it comes and enjoy it, and then slide through the idea of fraud." – Tina Fey

                  "Sometimes I wake up in the morning before going off to a shoot, and I think, I can't do this. I'm a fraud." – Kate Winslett

                  "I have written eleven books, but each time I think, 'uh oh, they're going to find out now. I've run a game on everybody, and they're going to find me out.' " – Maya Angelou

                  Jodie Foster was interviewed for the television show ‘60 Minutes’ she revealed how she feared she'd have to give back her Oscar after being voted best actor for her role in ‘The Accused’. “I thought it was a fluke,” she said in the interview. “I thought everybody would find out and they'd take the Oscar back. They'd come to my house, knocking on the door, ‘Excuse me, we meant to give that to someone else. That was going to Meryl Streep.'”

                  Ken Burns interviewed Meryl Streep, the most frequently nominated Academy Award and Golden Globe actor in history, she revealed her own insecurities "You think, ‘Why would anyone want to see me again in a movie? And I don't know how to act anyway, so why am I doing this?’”

                  If We are All Imposters - Than None of Us Are Imposters

                  I had a niece who for a while started to dress in a "Goth" style. The idea was she didn't want to look like everyone else. The problem was, "Goth" started to be cool. Soon, everybody started dressing Goth, and the result of "standing out" no longer was a byproduct of dressing Goth. If you are sitting there thinking, "I could never be like _____," guess what? That person is sitting there thinking the same thing too.

                  The only thing that separates you from anyone else in the world is time and effort. Anything that anyone else can do, you can do. It’s impossible to feel like an impostor once you accept that everyone else is an impostor too.

                  Imposter Syndrome Cycle

                  In the book, The Imposter Syndrome Remedy Dr. Estcio talks about an Imposter Syndrom Cycle. This cycle shows often that imposter syndrome leads to two responses:

                  1. Crippling Fear
                  2. Overworking
                  
                  

                  You are either crippled by fear which leads you to procrastinate. The second possibility is you are driven by fear of failure and you overwork. When you complete the task it may bring temporary relief. However, when it is time to evaluate performance, limiting beliefs associated with Imposter Syndrome may arise: If procrastination led to a successful outcome, then success is considered a fluke (“I was lucky things worked out in the end!”). If over-preparation led to success, then it reinforces the belief that working extra hard is needed, otherwise, there is no chance of success (“I’m not good at this. I just worked really hard.”). Thus, successful outcomes do not bring satisfaction. It only increases self-doubt, worry, and anxiety, with the thought that when either “luck” or “excessive hard work” wears off, they will finally be exposed as the incompetent fraud that they really are. And then, the cycle repeats itself. See The Imposter Syndrome Remedy by Dr E V Estacio.

                  Strategies to Overcome Imposter Syndrome
                  1. You feel like a fraud because of this huge opportunity that has been put in your lap. Maybe, it's not quite as important as you think. It's important to you, but you're not curing AIDS. It doesn't have to be perfect
                  2. You have had some successes in the past. You've done hard things in the past. Think of the hardest thing you have to overcome. You did it. You're still here. Don't ignore your successes.
                  3. DO NOT compare yourself to THAT person. There are always people "better" than you and people worse. You are never as good as your best review or as bad as your worst.
                  4. You are not defined by your mistakes. The "I must not fail mentality" can be crippling.
                  5. There is one person who really needs your message
                  6. Not everyone will like you, and that is OK.
                  7. Credentials don't always mean what you think they do.
                  8. Find one person you know and trust and let them know you feel like a fraud
                  9. Instead of saying, "I don't know anything" say, "I don’t know everything...yet. I’m still learning."
                  10. Yes, there is luck and timing, but there is also talent, dedication, and charisma.
                  11. While your feelings are real, this does not mean they are accurate.
                  12. Quit focusing on you, and instead focus on your audience and how you will deliver value.
                  
                  

                   

                  I'm Not Ready

                  I do not have children, but I know many people who do and in some cases, they got pregnant before "they were ready." Some got pregnant when the thought they were ready, but found out later they were nowhere near ready. Yet, their kids are fine. You’re never going to be ready. Act anyway. Acting before you are ready is like a penicillin shot for Impostor Syndrome. It helps you build up immunity against the Syndrome. The more you act before you’re ready, the more you’ll realize that you’re never really ready for anything. But neither is anyone else.

                  I Wonder What That Tastes Like

                  Maybe you are trying the new Keto diet. You see a keto recipe for Chocolate Chip Cookies. It looks good. You see the ingredients and you have them. There is only one way to know if this recipe tastes good. You have to make the recipe.

                  The only way to really see something is to do it. You have to experience it. Reading about other people’s failures and successes only go so far. Sooner or later you have to start succeeding and failing first-first hand.

                  I'm Not That Good At It

                  So you record your first podcast and listen back and thinking, "Ugh, I'm not that good." You know what? You're not as bad as you think, but you are right there is room for improvement. There is always room for improvement.  Instead of saying to yourself, "I'm not that good. I shouldn't do this." Try, "I am not very good at this yet, but I will continue to learn and adapt as I go."

                  I Need to Know More Before I Get Started

                  You do NOT need to know everything. You probably have more than enough knowledge to get going. Instead of saying, "I don't know enough," say "I don't know everything but I will use what I know to learn more as I go." With that said, know this: Don't use soundlcoud.com, anchor.fm, squarespace.com (for a media host), or a Blue Yeti (there are better, less expensive options).

                  But I'm Scared

                  Being afraid has times when it's very handy. Fear is good when you are face to face with a bear. Fear is good when you are on the edge of a cliff. Ask yourself, "What is the worst thing that could happen?"

                  You might answer:

                  "I will be embarrassed." To this, I say nobody is listening to your show when you first start out. The odds of running into someone you are not related to that has actually heard your show are minimal. When I looked up the definition of embarrassed it said to be disconcerted. When I looked up disconcerted it said "ruffled." I hear to get don't get ruffled. I have said things in my podcasts that I'm really surprised did not have negative side effects, but they didn't.

                  I was scared my first day of JR High, of SR. High, but I walked through the doors anyway. So say to yourself "Yes, I’m scared, but I’ll get on with it anyway."

                  The Bright Side of Failure

                  Failure is fun. Think of it that way. If you’re failing, you’re doing it. You’re real. You can’t be fake and fail at the same time. And failure will eventually lead to victory. Failure is the only way to get to victory and it’s the only way to enjoy it because you can only enjoy something once you’ve tasted the opposite.

                  I leave near an amusement park called Cedar Point. It has tons of super spooky roller coasters. Some people refuse to get on them as they are often the tallest, fastest, spookiest coaster in the US if not the world. To ride these, you have to stand in line. This is often a long line. Some people get bored and leave the line....]]>Seventy percent of people have impostor syndrome. While an interesting stat, that doesn't really help people who have impostor syndrome get over it. Today I have 12 strategies to help overcome Impostor syndrome

                  Because of My Podcast: I Got A Custom Wrestling Mat

                  01:26

                  Jason Bryan of www.mattalkonline.com shares the story how one of the top manufacturers of wrestling mats made a custom wrestling mat with Jason's Logo and microphone. HOW COOL IS THAT? You can hear more about how Jason is now doing podcasting as a career at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/jason-bryant-turned-his-experience-into-a-career-in-podcasting/

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Engineering School

                  Podcast Engineering School - next semester starts September 18th and runs through October 30th. The classes are live and Chris packs the 2-hour classes with tons of information

                  Program Includes:

                  LIVE Interactive Online Training

                  Two Mentoring Sessions with Chris Curran

                  Major Discounts on Software and Plugins

                  Lifetime Access to the PES closed community

                  Certificate of Completion

                  EARLY BIRD PRICING IS NOW - SIGN UP TODAY AND SAVE BIG

                  https://podcastengineeringschool.com/

                  We All Feed Like Imposters

                  Seth Godin wrote in The Icarus Deception that after a dozen bestsellers he still feels like a fraud all the time

                  "The beauty of the impostor syndrome is you vacillate between extreme egomania and a complete feeling of: 'I'm a fraud! Oh God, they're on to me! I'm a fraud!' So you just try to ride the egomania when it comes and enjoy it, and then slide through the idea of fraud." – Tina Fey

                  "Sometimes I wake up in the morning before going off to a shoot, and I think, I can't do this. I'm a fraud." – Kate Winslett

                  "I have written eleven books, but each time I think, 'uh oh, they're going to find out now. I've run a game on everybody, and they're going to find me out.' " – Maya Angelou

                  Jodie Foster was interviewed for the television show ‘60 Minutes’ she revealed how she feared she'd have to give back her Oscar after being voted best actor for her role in ‘The Accused’. “I thought it was a fluke,” she said in the interview. “I thought everybody would find out and they'd take the Oscar back. They'd come to my house, knocking on the door, ‘Excuse me, we meant to give that to someone else. That was going to Meryl Streep.'”

                  Ken Burns interviewed Meryl Streep, the most frequently nominated Academy Award and Golden Globe actor in history, she revealed her own insecurities "You think, ‘Why would anyone want to see me again in a movie? And I don't know how to act anyway, so why am I doing this?’”

                  If We are All Imposters - Than None of Us Are Imposters

                  I had a niece who for a while started to dress in a "Goth" style. The idea was she didn't want to look like everyone else. The problem was, "Goth" started to be cool. Soon, everybody started dressing Goth, and the result of "standing out" no longer was a byproduct of dressing Goth. If you are sitting there thinking, "I could never be like _____," guess what? That person is sitting there thinking the same thing too.

                  The only thing that separates you from anyone else in the world is time and effort. Anything that anyone else can do, you can do. It’s impossible to feel like an impostor once you accept that everyone else is an impostor too.

                  Imposter Syndrome Cycle

                  In the book, The Imposter Syndrome Remedy Dr. Estcio talks about an Imposter Syndrom Cycle. This cycle shows often that imposter syndrome leads to two responses:

                  1. Crippling Fear
                  2. Overworking
                  
                  

                  You are either crippled by fear which leads you to procrastinate. The second possibility is you are driven by fear of failure and you overwork. When you complete the task it may bring temporary relief. However, when it is time to evaluate performance, limiting beliefs associated with Imposter Syndrome may arise: If procrastination led to a successful outcome, then success is considered a fluke (“I was lucky things worked out in the end!”). If over-preparation led to success, then it reinforces the belief that working extra hard is needed, otherwise, there is no chance of success (“I’m not good at this. I just worked really hard.”). Thus, successful outcomes do not bring satisfaction. It only increases self-doubt, worry, and anxiety, with the thought that when either “luck” or “excessive hard work” wears off, they will finally be exposed as the incompetent fraud that they really are. And then, the cycle repeats itself. See The Imposter Syndrome Remedy by Dr E V Estacio.

                  Strategies to Overcome Imposter Syndrome
                  1. You feel like a fraud because of this huge opportunity that has been put in your lap. Maybe, it's not quite as important as you think. It's important to you, but you're not curing AIDS. It doesn't have to be perfect
                  2. You have had some successes in the past. You've done hard things in the past. Think of the hardest thing you have to overcome. You did it. You're still here. Don't ignore your successes.
                  3. DO NOT compare yourself to THAT person. There are always people "better" than you and people worse. You are never as good as your best review or as bad as your worst.
                  4. You are not defined by your mistakes. The "I must not fail mentality" can be crippling.
                  5. There is one person who really needs your message
                  6. Not everyone will like you, and that is OK.
                  7. Credentials don't always mean what you think they do.
                  8. Find one person you know and trust and let them know you feel like a fraud
                  9. Instead of saying, "I don't know anything" say, "I don’t know everything...yet. I’m still learning."
                  10. Yes, there is luck and timing, but there is also talent, dedication, and charisma.
                  11. While your feelings are real, this does not mean they are accurate.
                  12. Quit focusing on you, and instead focus on your audience and how you will deliver value.
                  
                  

                   

                  I'm Not Ready

                  I do not have children, but I know many people who do and in some cases, they got pregnant before "they were ready." Some got pregnant when the thought they were ready, but found out later they were nowhere near ready. Yet, their kids are fine. You’re never going to be ready. Act anyway. Acting before you are ready is like a penicillin shot for Impostor Syndrome. It helps you build up immunity against the Syndrome. The more you act before you’re ready, the more you’ll realize that you’re never really ready for anything. But neither is anyone else.

                  I Wonder What That Tastes Like

                  Maybe you are trying the new Keto diet. You see a keto recipe for Chocolate Chip Cookies. It looks good. You see the ingredients and you have them. There is only one way to know if this recipe tastes good. You have to make the recipe.

                  The only way to really see something is to do it. You have to experience it. Reading about other people’s failures and successes only go so far. Sooner or later you have to start succeeding and failing first-first hand.

                  I'm Not That Good At It

                  So you record your first podcast and listen back and thinking, "Ugh, I'm not that good." You know what? You're not as bad as you think, but you are right there is room for improvement. There is always room for improvement.  Instead of saying to yourself, "I'm not that good. I shouldn't do this." Try, "I am not very good at this yet, but I will continue to learn and adapt as I go."

                  I Need to Know More Before I Get Started

                  You do NOT need to know everything. You probably have more than enough knowledge to get going. Instead of saying, "I don't know enough," say "I don't know everything but I will use what I know to learn more as I go." With that said, know this: Don't use soundlcoud.com, anchor.fm, squarespace.com (for a media host), or a Blue Yeti (there are better, less expensive options).

                  But I'm Scared

                  Being afraid has times when it's very handy. Fear is good when you are face to face with a bear. Fear is good when you are on the edge of a cliff. Ask yourself, "What is the worst thing that could happen?"

                  You might answer:

                  "I will be embarrassed." To this, I say nobody is listening to your show when you first start out. The odds of running into someone you are not related to that has actually heard your show are minimal. When I looked up the definition of embarrassed it said to be disconcerted. When I looked up disconcerted it said "ruffled." I hear to get don't get ruffled. I have said things in my podcasts that I'm really surprised did not have negative side effects, but they didn't.

                  I was scared my first day of JR High, of SR. High, but I walked through the doors anyway. So say to yourself "Yes, I’m scared, but I’ll get on with it anyway."

                  The Bright Side of Failure

                  Failure is fun. Think of it that way. If you’re failing, you’re doing it. You’re real. You can’t be fake and fail at the same time. And failure will eventually lead to victory. Failure is the only way to get to victory and it’s the only way to enjoy it because you can only enjoy something once you’ve tasted the opposite.

                  I leave near an amusement park called Cedar Point. It has tons of super spooky roller coasters. Some people refuse to get on them as they are often the tallest, fastest, spookiest coaster in the US if not the world. To ride these, you have to stand in line. This is often a long line. Some people get bored and leave the line. Other tough it out, and they get on the ride, strap themselves in and after waiting an hour (or more) in line, the ride lasts 30 seconds and you get off the ride thinking, "It was OK."  You make a mental note, and you know to the only ride that ride if the line is short.

                  With podcasting you are either going to have some positive outcomes or a story (which is also a positive outcome)

                  Just because you failed, doesn’t mean that you are a fraud. It only means that you are willing to do something, even if it means risking failure.

                  Another great book I read was Beyond Imposter Syndrome: Proven strategies for building confidence and finally feeling ‘good enough.

                  What will happen if you never change?

                  Podcasting leads to relationships which lead to opportunities. If you have a message, and a drive to reach people, you are missing at an opportunity to invest in yourself. There is NO WAY you start a podcast without learning something about yourself. Granted, one of the things you may learn is you hate podcasting, but I doubt it.

                  Update on Radio Public

                  Last week I talked about Radio Public. This is an app that pays you $20 per 1000 downloads as well as a $1 bonus for people who start to use their app. You can see what their player looks like and more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/radiopublic I received an update:

                  "Thanks for the follow-up and for highlighting RadioPublic in your latest episode.

                  That's correct, right now only listens within the RadioPublic apps count toward Paid Listens. We’ll eventually include web listens down the road. The web presents some tough fraud detection problems we aren’t yet ready to address.

                  You raised a great point on being able to combine earnings across podcasters or within networks for multiple shows. I shared this with Matt MacDonald our Chief Product Officer to see what's possible.

                  We also recently expanded the guidelines of the program for shows to have their own sponsorships and still participate. The language on the site will likely be updated in the coming weeks but for now I at least wanted to pass along the update knowing there was a concern you brought up about one of your episodes including a midroll spot.

                  Let me know if any other questions come up. Paid Listens is just the first step in our efforts to transform the podcast marketplace, making it much easier for podcasters to make money for their work. We’re currently prototyping ways for listeners to directly support the podcasters they love. Would you be interested in talking with Matt about this?

                  We’ve updated our FAQ to address some of the questions and concerns discussed during the episode. Thank you for taking such a deep dive test run and pointing these out! We don’t touch the audio files by inserting ads into an episode, rather we place the ad spot before and/or after an episode - bookending it. (Updated here in our FAQ) The Loyal Listener bonus is a part of the Paid Listens payout, so with only 24 Loyal Listeners a podcaster would be eligible for the $25 minimum threshold for payout. (We updated this FAQ with clearer language around this as well as the math to get a podcaster to that understanding.) We also updated our “How do I get paid?” FAQ with clarification on what a podcaster can expect once their show is ready for a payout.

                  Hopefully we’ll get the chance to meet in a couple weeks at Podcast Movement.

                  Cheers, Joshua Rae

                  July Question of the Month

                  Do you have an email list, if so how big is it? What do you use? What strategies? If you send an email, please record something and attach it  (And use JULY QUESTION) as the headline. You can also call in your answer 888-563-3228 (don't forget to mention your show and website) The deadline is 7/27/18

                  Mentioned In This Podcast

                  Podcast Envy

                  Food Craftsmen

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/radiopublic

                  The Imposter Syndrome Remedy

                  Beyond Imposter Syndrome: Proven strategies for building confidence and finally feeling ‘good enough

                   

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  I would love to work with you. Please visit www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>94a7c63c6cc9483cbe07ce54ab0e17f2Mon, 16 Jul 2018 04:00:00 -040050:49falsefull627627My First Impression of Radio PublicYou can get your podcast on the Radio Public platform at https://podcasters.radiopublic.com/. Once you’ve been approved at Radio Public, they send a weekly email summary to your email with details about your Paid Listens activity on RadioPublic. Once your podcast earns $25 it will be eligible for payout, and we’ll send an email with information about how to configure the payment step

                  Earnings are a combination of your Paid Listens (at a rate of $20 per 1000 listens of your episodes in the RadioPublicapp) and for every new listener that hears three episodes of your show in the RadioPublic app, you’ll earn a Loyal Listener bonus of an additional (one-time) $1 - and yes, this bonus layers on top of your Paid Listens rate.

                  What Is the Criteria For a Listen?

                  We define a Paid Listen as a listener hearing at least 60% or 30 minutes of an episode, whichever is shorter. For now, only listens in the native RadioPublic mobile apps for iOS and Android count. Multiple listens to a given episode by the same user’s device/account will count as a single listen.

                  Also, it is important to understand that a download does not necessarily equal a listen. On all podcast apps, including RadioPublic, a given episode's audio file might be downloaded multiple times: the user could have deleted it before listening; a user’s local network error can occur and the file needs to be downloaded again; a podcast hosting provider can have an issue that initiates another download, etc.RadioPublic measures when an episode is actually heard, so you should not always expect a 1:1 download to listen ratio in your hosting provider’s metrics or dashboard.

                  What to Do If Your Episode Already Has Ads?

                  Depending on your current approach to ads, you have a few options for providing ad-free episodes to RadioPublic:

                  • Remove the ads from your older episodes in your existing RSS feed by reuploading newly edited audio files to your podcast host. 
                  • Create another RSS feed that contains ad-free episodes and provide that feed to RadioPublic.
                  • Contact your ad sales team and podcast hosting company, as they may have the ability to turn off dynamically inserted ads when episodes are requested from RadioPublic.
                  
                  

                   

                  Where Do The Ads Go?

                  RadioPublic will place audio ads before and/or after episodes participating in Paid Listens, and the ads will be clearly demarcated with audio and visual cues as distinct from your show, not part of it.

                  Where's the Catch?

                  The catch is to get credit for the play it HAS to be in the Radio Public app. You will need 1250 downloads (the amount you need to make $25) to get paid on their app.  While they supply a player, it does not count that download as one to be paid for. You get $1 bonus if you get a new person to try the app and listen to three of your episodes.

                  For me, I'm not sure I can look at my audience and say, "Please go listen on this app where I can better advertise to you."

                  Patreon Vs Radio Public

                  Last month on Ask the Podcast Coach I had 3, 852 downloads. If we play in fantasy land and says EVERYBODY heard it on Radio Public, I would make $76. What I do on that show is I do an extra 30 minutes of show with my co-host Jim Collison from www.theaverageguy.tv and put it behind a paywall using Patreon. Last month I'm made $398 (as someone took the option to pay $125/month and receive an hour of one on one coaching) if we removed that (as that slot is not always full that would be $248. (or 3.2 times the amount of money from Radio Public).

                  Pennies Make Dollars

                  If you're trying to do podcasting full time, you need multiple streams of income. As with other services I've used that inserted ads paid $1.5 for 1000 listens, Radio Public is a much better solution. But as the average podcaster get around 1500 downloads per episode (source:libsyn.com) I'm not going to retire on the $30 (again that would be if EVERY SINGLE ONE of your listeners was using the Radio Public app)

                  Improvements Needed

                  With the short time I tested Radio Public, they need to be able to group podcasts together. I would get to the $25 a month payout fee if all my shows were listed under one account. From what I've seen they are not. So now every show would have to get 1250 downloads (the amount you need to make $25) instead of all of my shows working together. That would make for more payouts, and make it worth my while.

                  John Bukenas of www.audioeditingsolutions.com on the www.hatetoweight.com show that he tried to import his shows, and the app crashed. 

                  Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

                  I had gone to the Internet along with using the branding assets of some apps and went through the joy of resizing them, and then having some with a black background and some with a white background and it looked like this: (see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/627 )

                   

                  I know Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to Podcast. He is a friend of mine and I use his My Podcast Reviews service (which a great) so I decided to check out his Subscribe and Follow plugin and it just makes things so much easier. You can adjust the buttons to match your site. They are all up to date and are using the proper branding. He has everything you'd want to link to covered, and it's super easy to set it up. Check it out at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/socialsubscribeandfollow

                  $25 a year and $24 sign up  for Five Sites

                  $40.00 / year and a $39.00 sign-up fee for 10 sites

                  $75.00 / year and a $74.00 sign-up fee for unlimited sites

                   You can see my new subscribe page at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

                    

                  Pipa Billing Plans Change

                  My Criteria for Podcast Media Hosting

                  1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. 5. Give me support. 6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business 7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate. 8. Don't own my content, control my links, or block my access to distribution or stats (like Anchor).

                  Pippa Launched in October of 2017. With a goal of making it easy to start a podcast, and making it easy to monetize. They have done some questionable marketing (by scraping email addresses from the iTunes Database and accusing their competition of inflating their numbers). I've tested their service with The History of Six Shooter podcast. Their interface is simple, and they do offer free transcriptions. I tested their transcription service and it was only 70% accurate (so plan on spending a fair amount of time tweaking your transcription).

                  Originally they adopted the Soundcloud business plan which enables unlimited uploads and unlimited downloads (And lost 100 million dollars).  Recently they updated their pricing. They STILL allow you to upload as many files as you want, but they limit the size of your audience (the more expensive the package, the more downloads you are allowed). For this show that gets over 20,000 downloads a month, I would be on the $50 a month plan. I currently use the $20/month plan at Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree for a free month).

                  As they limit your number of downloads (when other companies like Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com do not) they are just not a good choice in my opinion. I know people who have received thousands of downloads by being mentioned on an influencer's blog. For me, I'd take a pass on http://pippa.io

                  For more information on media hosting, see www.podcastmediahosting.com

                  Ready to Plan, Launch or Grow Your Podcast?

                  I would LOVE to work with you. I have multiple plans (starting at $1 for bonus content, all the way up to a four-figure mentoring plan). I would love to help you with your podcast. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>You can get your podcast on the Radio Public platform at https://podcasters.radiopublic.com/. Once you’ve been approved at Radio Public, they send a weekly email summary to your email with details about your Paid Listens activity on RadioPublic. Once your podcast earns $25 it will be eligible for payout, and we’ll send an email with information about how to configure the payment step

                  Earnings are a combination of your Paid Listens (at a rate of $20 per 1000 listens of your episodes in the RadioPublicapp) and for every new listener that hears three episodes of your show in the RadioPublic app, you’ll earn a Loyal Listener bonus of an additional (one-time) $1 - and yes, this bonus layers on top of your Paid Listens rate.

                  What Is the Criteria For a Listen?

                  We define a Paid Listen as a listener hearing at least 60% or 30 minutes of an episode, whichever is shorter. For now, only listens in the native RadioPublic mobile apps for iOS and Android count. Multiple listens to a given episode by the same user’s device/account will count as a single listen.

                  Also, it is important to understand that a download does not necessarily equal a listen. On all podcast apps, including RadioPublic, a given episode's audio file might be downloaded multiple times: the user could have deleted it before listening; a user’s local network error can occur and the file needs to be downloaded again; a podcast hosting provider can have an issue that initiates another download, etc.RadioPublic measures when an episode is actually heard, so you should not always expect a 1:1 download to listen ratio in your hosting provider’s metrics or dashboard.

                  What to Do If Your Episode Already Has Ads?

                  Depending on your current approach to ads, you have a few options for providing ad-free episodes to RadioPublic:

                  • Remove the ads from your older episodes in your existing RSS feed by reuploading newly edited audio files to your podcast host. 
                  • Create another RSS feed that contains ad-free episodes and provide that feed to RadioPublic.
                  • Contact your ad sales team and podcast hosting company, as they may have the ability to turn off dynamically inserted ads when episodes are requested from RadioPublic.
                  
                  

                   

                  Where Do The Ads Go?

                  RadioPublic will place audio ads before and/or after episodes participating in Paid Listens, and the ads will be clearly demarcated with audio and visual cues as distinct from your show, not part of it.

                  Where's the Catch?

                  The catch is to get credit for the play it HAS to be in the Radio Public app. You will need 1250 downloads (the amount you need to make $25) to get paid on their app.  While they supply a player, it does not count that download as one to be paid for. You get $1 bonus if you get a new person to try the app and listen to three of your episodes.

                  For me, I'm not sure I can look at my audience and say, "Please go listen on this app where I can better advertise to you."

                  Patreon Vs Radio Public

                  Last month on Ask the Podcast Coach I had 3, 852 downloads. If we play in fantasy land and says EVERYBODY heard it on Radio Public, I would make $76. What I do on that show is I do an extra 30 minutes of show with my co-host Jim Collison from www.theaverageguy.tv and put it behind a paywall using Patreon. Last month I'm made $398 (as someone took the option to pay $125/month and receive an hour of one on one coaching) if we removed that (as that slot is not always full that would be $248. (or 3.2 times the amount of money from Radio Public).

                  Pennies Make Dollars

                  If you're trying to do podcasting full time, you need multiple streams of income. As with other services I've used that inserted ads paid $1.5 for 1000 listens, Radio Public is a much better solution. But as the average podcaster get around 1500 downloads per episode (source:libsyn.com) I'm not going to retire on the $30 (again that would be if EVERY SINGLE ONE of your listeners was using the Radio Public app)

                  Improvements Needed

                  With the short time I tested Radio Public, they need to be able to group podcasts together. I would get to the $25 a month payout fee if all my shows were listed under one account. From what I've seen they are not. So now every show would have to get 1250 downloads (the amount you need to make $25) instead of all of my shows working together. That would make for more payouts, and make it worth my while.

                  John Bukenas of www.audioeditingsolutions.com on the www.hatetoweight.com show that he tried to import his shows, and the app crashed. 

                  Social Subscribe and Follow Plugin

                  I had gone to the Internet along with using the branding assets of some apps and went through the joy of resizing them, and then having some with a black background and some with a white background and it looked like this: (see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/627 )

                   

                  I know Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to Podcast. He is a friend of mine and I use his My Podcast Reviews service (which a great) so I decided to check out his Subscribe and Follow plugin and it just makes things so much easier. You can adjust the buttons to match your site. They are all up to date and are using the proper branding. He has everything you'd want to link to covered, and it's super easy to set it up. Check it out at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/socialsubscribeandfollow

                  $25 a year and $24 sign up  for Five Sites

                  $40.00 / year and a $39.00 sign-up fee for 10 sites

                  $75.00 / year and a $74.00 sign-up fee for unlimited sites

                   You can see my new subscribe page at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/subscribe

                    

                  Pipa Billing Plans Change

                  My Criteria for Podcast Media Hosting

                  1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. 5. Give me support. 6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business 7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate. 8. Don't own my content, control my links, or block my access to distribution or stats (like Anchor).

                  Pippa Launched in October of 2017. With a goal of making it easy to start a podcast, and making it easy to monetize. They have done some questionable marketing (by scraping email addresses from the iTunes Database and accusing their competition of inflating their numbers). I've tested their service with The History of Six Shooter podcast. Their interface is simple, and they do offer free transcriptions. I tested their transcription service and it was only 70% accurate (so plan on spending a fair amount of time tweaking your transcription).

                  Originally they adopted the Soundcloud business plan which enables unlimited uploads and unlimited downloads (And lost 100 million dollars).  Recently they updated their pricing. They STILL allow you to upload as many files as you want, but they limit the size of your audience (the more expensive the package, the more downloads you are allowed). For this show that gets over 20,000 downloads a month, I would be on the $50 a month plan. I currently use the $20/month plan at Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree for a free month).

                  As they limit your number of downloads (when other companies like Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com do not) they are just not a good choice in my opinion. I know people who have received thousands of downloads by being mentioned on an influencer's blog. For me, I'd take a pass on http://pippa.io

                  For more information on media hosting, see www.podcastmediahosting.com

                  Ready to Plan, Launch or Grow Your Podcast?

                  I would LOVE to work with you. I have multiple plans (starting at $1 for bonus content, all the way up to a four-figure mentoring plan). I would love to help you with your podcast. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>1723e97520ad40b9881b617f65bbcfa6Mon, 09 Jul 2018 04:00:00 -040043:08falsefull626626Creating Actionable, Empowering Content with Kyle GrayToday we have a conversation with Kyle Gray author of the book The Story Engine: An entrepreneur's guide to content strategy and brand storytelling without spending all day writing. He has helped hundreds of startups and small businesses create scalable content marketing strategies. His book The Story Engine outlines his process for making content marketing and brand storytelling easy and effective.
                  Because Of My Podcast: I'm Working with NPR

                  1:22

                  Monica Rivera hosts the "You Wanna Do What" podcast (giving you the nudge you need) and she recently celebrated her one year anniversary and shared how she was selected to take part in an NPR program where she will go to Seattle to work side by side with NPR on a story. The best part of Monica's story is her attitude and how she took the negative of rejection and turned it around and used it for success. Check out her one-year "13 Lessons Learned" anniversary show.

                  Kyle Gray Gives You Action Steps to Make Great Content

                  3:54

                  In today's conversation, Kyles shares some of his favorite tools to create content and explains strategies to identify problems and create actionable content with lead magnets to grow your list, enhance your network, and move forward toward building your business. Kyle has worked with many well-known brands and businesses like AdEspresso, Advance Your Reach, WP Curve and Self-Publishing School.

                  5:23 What is Good Content?

                  09:08 What are realistic expectations for traffic?

                  12:50 How long does it take to make great content.

                  16:20 How important are keywords?

                  19:55 What examples can you share of covering a problem from multiple angles?

                  21:05 If you could only pick three tools to help with your content, what would you pick?

                  • The content strategy template
                  • Trello
                  • Co-Schedule
                  
                  Key Take Aways

                  You need consistency

                  He was talking about blog posts, and we are talking about podcasts but we still have nuggets. In the end, we are all content creators. So you heard in this interview where he is not winging it; there is planning. He does things other people may not be doing like finding graphics to go with the episode.

                  He said that even if you spend hours on your content, it may take months before you start seeing any measurable traffic. So if you're looking to get rich in six weeks, this is not for you.

                  I love that good content helps your audience. You may think that all of this discussion is for business, but if you're doing a comedy podcast your audience's problem may be that they just watched the news or had a bad day at work, and it's your job to find a way to make them smile.

                  He talked about identifying some key problems for your audience and making a lead magnet to give away that helps solve them. This is a great strategy that not everyone does, but that's because it takes time.

                  A cool graphic could be a picture of your guest with a quote you pulled from the interview.

                  Focus on the relationships. It is these relationships that help on the way up, and also if things go the other way. Jordan Harbinger utilized to rebuild his show with his network.

                  Check out the Story Engine on Audible at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/freebook

                  July Question of the Month

                  27:59

                  Do you have an email list, if so how big is it, and how did you grow it? I need your answers (preferably in audio) by July 27th. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and if you send email, please use "July question" as the subject line

                  Top Five Questions About the New Google Podcasts App

                  28:45 

                  How do I know if my podcast in the Google Podcast App? Go to https://search.google.com/devtools/podcast/preview and enter your RSS feed

                  What If I'm Not in the App?

                  Then see this post

                  Do I Need to Be In Both Google Podcasts and Google Play Music? Yes. I personally don't see Google Play Music makes it to 2019. I have no information, but it's just a feeling.

                  What Kind of Features are in the App?Almost none. You can speed up and slow down, and that is it for now. It doesn't even automatically download the episodes

                  Castbox.FM Makes Duplicate Feed for Shaky Reasons

                  31:32

                  I wrote a post about this on my blog at http://davidjackson.org/horrible-podcast-history-is-repeating-thanks-to-castbox-fm/

                  Ready to Start a Podcast or Grow One You've Already Launched?

                  I've got multiple resources for multiple budgets (with pricing starting as low as $5 to $1299 for a full mentorship program. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>Today we have a conversation with Kyle Gray author of the book The Story Engine: An entrepreneur's guide to content strategy and brand storytelling without spending all day writing. He has helped hundreds of startups and small businesses create scalable content marketing strategies. His book The Story Engine outlines his process for making content marketing and brand storytelling easy and effective.
                  Because Of My Podcast: I'm Working with NPR

                  1:22

                  Monica Rivera hosts the "You Wanna Do What" podcast (giving you the nudge you need) and she recently celebrated her one year anniversary and shared how she was selected to take part in an NPR program where she will go to Seattle to work side by side with NPR on a story. The best part of Monica's story is her attitude and how she took the negative of rejection and turned it around and used it for success. Check out her one-year "13 Lessons Learned" anniversary show.

                  Kyle Gray Gives You Action Steps to Make Great Content

                  3:54

                  In today's conversation, Kyles shares some of his favorite tools to create content and explains strategies to identify problems and create actionable content with lead magnets to grow your list, enhance your network, and move forward toward building your business. Kyle has worked with many well-known brands and businesses like AdEspresso, Advance Your Reach, WP Curve and Self-Publishing School.

                  5:23 What is Good Content?

                  09:08 What are realistic expectations for traffic?

                  12:50 How long does it take to make great content.

                  16:20 How important are keywords?

                  19:55 What examples can you share of covering a problem from multiple angles?

                  21:05 If you could only pick three tools to help with your content, what would you pick?

                  • The content strategy template
                  • Trello
                  • Co-Schedule
                  
                  Key Take Aways

                  You need consistency

                  He was talking about blog posts, and we are talking about podcasts but we still have nuggets. In the end, we are all content creators. So you heard in this interview where he is not winging it; there is planning. He does things other people may not be doing like finding graphics to go with the episode.

                  He said that even if you spend hours on your content, it may take months before you start seeing any measurable traffic. So if you're looking to get rich in six weeks, this is not for you.

                  I love that good content helps your audience. You may think that all of this discussion is for business, but if you're doing a comedy podcast your audience's problem may be that they just watched the news or had a bad day at work, and it's your job to find a way to make them smile.

                  He talked about identifying some key problems for your audience and making a lead magnet to give away that helps solve them. This is a great strategy that not everyone does, but that's because it takes time.

                  A cool graphic could be a picture of your guest with a quote you pulled from the interview.

                  Focus on the relationships. It is these relationships that help on the way up, and also if things go the other way. Jordan Harbinger utilized to rebuild his show with his network.

                  Check out the Story Engine on Audible at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/freebook

                  July Question of the Month

                  27:59

                  Do you have an email list, if so how big is it, and how did you grow it? I need your answers (preferably in audio) by July 27th. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and if you send email, please use "July question" as the subject line

                  Top Five Questions About the New Google Podcasts App

                  28:45 

                  How do I know if my podcast in the Google Podcast App? Go to https://search.google.com/devtools/podcast/preview and enter your RSS feed

                  What If I'm Not in the App?

                  Then see this post

                  Do I Need to Be In Both Google Podcasts and Google Play Music? Yes. I personally don't see Google Play Music makes it to 2019. I have no information, but it's just a feeling.

                  What Kind of Features are in the App?Almost none. You can speed up and slow down, and that is it for now. It doesn't even automatically download the episodes

                  Castbox.FM Makes Duplicate Feed for Shaky Reasons

                  31:32

                  I wrote a post about this on my blog at http://davidjackson.org/horrible-podcast-history-is-repeating-thanks-to-castbox-fm/

                  Ready to Start a Podcast or Grow One You've Already Launched?

                  I've got multiple resources for multiple budgets (with pricing starting as low as $5 to $1299 for a full mentorship program. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>abef5b03ed834937ab75f9d1feb55960Mon, 02 Jul 2018 04:00:00 -040039:22falsefull625625Is Anyone Reading Your Podcast Show Notes?I received 360 responses to this question, and if you do read show notes (better known as a description of what is in the podcast) what are you looking for.

                  Comments? 888-563-32228

                  Because of My Podcast I Got to Appear on TV

                  1:45  Edward Schmitz from www.vidanostrilhos.com.br was featured on a TV show in Brazil.

                  Make Money as a School of Podcasting Affiliate

                  4:30 Kim Kraji ( from www.toastmasters101.net ) explains why she became a School of Podcating Affiliate (and I set up www.schoolofpodcasting.com/kim for her to send her traffic). If someone signs up she earns a commission for every month they stay subscribed. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates and sign up today.

                  [spp-tweet tweet="Only 38 percent of people may be reading podcast show notes"]

                  Your Podcast Show Notes: What To Include, How Long, and is Anybody Reading Them?

                  6:35 I put up some polls and ask you to send in your responses to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/coontact and here is what I got

                  Out of 360 responses,  136 (38%) look at show notes, and 224 (62% fo not

                  8:33 Carey Green of podcastfasttrack.com feels show notes are important. He is surprised how many people don't put their social links in their show notes.

                  12:22 John from the Hate to Weight Show ( www.hatetoweight.com ) also wants social links and links to anything (like a video) mentioned in the episode.

                  14:38 Eliquite from the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (www.travelglutenfree.me ) is looking for resources. She hates show notes with one giant paragraph.

                  17:11 John from www.professorslots.com (a podcast about how to win at gambling) also looks at show notes and is deeply disappointed when you say you will put it in the show notes and you don't.

                  18:34 Win Charles from Ask Win hates it when you put a link to your website. She loves the show notes from www.todayinios.com

                  19:55 Shawn from Stories For Starters (www.storiesofstarters.com ) is looking for things that he wants to follow up (links, etc)

                  22:58 (Live from Books a Million ) Jill From http://becomingelli.com/ likes show notes to go back and review

                  24:49 The host of the new podcast www.cozycrib.com actually would rather read than listen

                  25:53 Kim from www.toastmasters101.net will read the show notes when they are emailed to her.

                  27:26 Tim from the www.hesaidshesaidmovies.com doesn't really look at them, but when he does he's looking links

                  28:49 Lee from www.covertnerd.net loves to use show notes for a resource.

                  30:34 James from www.podnews.not does NOT look at show notes. I interviewed James a few episodes ago.

                  James wrote a great article called How podcast show notes display in 19 different apps ( https://podnews.net/article/how-podcast-show-notes-display )

                  In that article he recommends:

                  • Always show links with the URL visible. These links will be clickable in Apple Podcasts and will be visible - if not clickable - in every app. Using word links won't always work.
                  • Formatting, like using of the strong tag, may be ignored by many podcast apps. Ensure your show notes don't require this to be faithfully shown.
                  • Be aware that accented characters may not display correctly.
                  
                  

                   

                  Recommended Things to Include in Your Show Notes
                  • The name of the person/guest
                  • Links to the guest site
                  • ANY website mentioned
                  • Links to videos or any resources mentioned
                  • Social Media Links for people to connect with you
                  • Readability (use subheadings to break up lots of texts)
                  
                  July Question of the Month: Email List and Tools

                  41:50 Do you have an email list? If so how big is it? What system/tools do you use? Any tricks on growing your list.

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use "July Question" if you want to record something and send it in via email (I do prefer audio over email)

                  The Importance of Your Episode Title / Headline

                  42:31 I read an article that said 8 out of 10 people will actually read your headline, but only two out of 10 will read the article (this was about blogs), but it goes to show you how important your headlines are. In podcasting, the title of your blog post or your episode is your headline. There is a cool tool called Fresh Title. I have video demonstration at www.davidjackson.org/titles there is also a cool plugin from Thrive themes that you put in multiple headlines and it tests and uses the best headline.

                  Where Does the Apple iTunes Summary Appear?

                  44:26 The Apple iTunes summary is just a few sentences that appear above the player. It is NOT a case where it is either the iTunes Summary or the Description BOTH appear. When making your Headline and Title for Appel Podcasts, do NOT put the episode number of the name of your show in the title (they just want the TITLE in the title). Put the episode number in the episode number field.

                  See http://libsyn.d.pr/ZzecbV

                  Pipa Transcriptions are 70% Accurate

                  47: 10 As we are talking about show notes, some of you may be thinking about transcripts. It appears that transcripts are "You get what you pay for." I recently tested the transcriptions and found that the one from the media host pipa was 70% accurate.  See https://youtu.be/N0jHY5cYBbk

                  Mentioned in This Episode # 624

                  Northeast Ohio Podcasters www.neohiopodcasters.com 

                  Podcast Rodeo Show www.podcastrodeoshow.com

                  Headline Resources at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines

                  Libsyn.com Podcast Media Hosting. Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at www.libsyn.com

                  SEO Expert Training www.yoast.com

                  Dave's Voicemail 888-563-3228 (courtesy of www.podcastvoicemail.com )

                  The School of Podcasting Newsletter www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

                  Transcription Accuracy test https://youtu.be/N0jHY5cYBbk

                  Kyle Gray book The Story Engine: An entrepreneur's guide to content strategy and brand storytelling without spending all day writing

                  Follow Dave

                  www.facebook.com/schoolofpodcasting

                  www.twitter.com/davejackson

                  www.instagram.com/schoolofpodcasting

                   

                  Ready to Podcast?

                  I have mutliple ways you can work with me. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme starting at $5

                  ]]>I received 360 responses to this question, and if you do read show notes (better known as a description of what is in the podcast) what are you looking for.

                  Comments? 888-563-32228

                  Because of My Podcast I Got to Appear on TV

                  1:45  Edward Schmitz from www.vidanostrilhos.com.br was featured on a TV show in Brazil.

                  Make Money as a School of Podcasting Affiliate

                  4:30 Kim Kraji ( from www.toastmasters101.net ) explains why she became a School of Podcating Affiliate (and I set up www.schoolofpodcasting.com/kim for her to send her traffic). If someone signs up she earns a commission for every month they stay subscribed. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates and sign up today.

                  [spp-tweet tweet="Only 38 percent of people may be reading podcast show notes"]

                  Your Podcast Show Notes: What To Include, How Long, and is Anybody Reading Them?

                  6:35 I put up some polls and ask you to send in your responses to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/coontact and here is what I got

                  Out of 360 responses,  136 (38%) look at show notes, and 224 (62% fo not

                  8:33 Carey Green of podcastfasttrack.com feels show notes are important. He is surprised how many people don't put their social links in their show notes.

                  12:22 John from the Hate to Weight Show ( www.hatetoweight.com ) also wants social links and links to anything (like a video) mentioned in the episode.

                  14:38 Eliquite from the Travel Gluten Free Podcast (www.travelglutenfree.me ) is looking for resources. She hates show notes with one giant paragraph.

                  17:11 John from www.professorslots.com (a podcast about how to win at gambling) also looks at show notes and is deeply disappointed when you say you will put it in the show notes and you don't.

                  18:34 Win Charles from Ask Win hates it when you put a link to your website. She loves the show notes from www.todayinios.com

                  19:55 Shawn from Stories For Starters (www.storiesofstarters.com ) is looking for things that he wants to follow up (links, etc)

                  22:58 (Live from Books a Million ) Jill From http://becomingelli.com/ likes show notes to go back and review

                  24:49 The host of the new podcast www.cozycrib.com actually would rather read than listen

                  25:53 Kim from www.toastmasters101.net will read the show notes when they are emailed to her.

                  27:26 Tim from the www.hesaidshesaidmovies.com doesn't really look at them, but when he does he's looking links

                  28:49 Lee from www.covertnerd.net loves to use show notes for a resource.

                  30:34 James from www.podnews.not does NOT look at show notes. I interviewed James a few episodes ago.

                  James wrote a great article called How podcast show notes display in 19 different apps ( https://podnews.net/article/how-podcast-show-notes-display )

                  In that article he recommends:

                  • Always show links with the URL visible. These links will be clickable in Apple Podcasts and will be visible - if not clickable - in every app. Using word links won't always work.
                  • Formatting, like using of the strong tag, may be ignored by many podcast apps. Ensure your show notes don't require this to be faithfully shown.
                  • Be aware that accented characters may not display correctly.
                  
                  

                   

                  Recommended Things to Include in Your Show Notes
                  • The name of the person/guest
                  • Links to the guest site
                  • ANY website mentioned
                  • Links to videos or any resources mentioned
                  • Social Media Links for people to connect with you
                  • Readability (use subheadings to break up lots of texts)
                  
                  July Question of the Month: Email List and Tools

                  41:50 Do you have an email list? If so how big is it? What system/tools do you use? Any tricks on growing your list.

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use "July Question" if you want to record something and send it in via email (I do prefer audio over email)

                  The Importance of Your Episode Title / Headline

                  42:31 I read an article that said 8 out of 10 people will actually read your headline, but only two out of 10 will read the article (this was about blogs), but it goes to show you how important your headlines are. In podcasting, the title of your blog post or your episode is your headline. There is a cool tool called Fresh Title. I have video demonstration at www.davidjackson.org/titles there is also a cool plugin from Thrive themes that you put in multiple headlines and it tests and uses the best headline.

                  Where Does the Apple iTunes Summary Appear?

                  44:26 The Apple iTunes summary is just a few sentences that appear above the player. It is NOT a case where it is either the iTunes Summary or the Description BOTH appear. When making your Headline and Title for Appel Podcasts, do NOT put the episode number of the name of your show in the title (they just want the TITLE in the title). Put the episode number in the episode number field.

                  See http://libsyn.d.pr/ZzecbV

                  Pipa Transcriptions are 70% Accurate

                  47: 10 As we are talking about show notes, some of you may be thinking about transcripts. It appears that transcripts are "You get what you pay for." I recently tested the transcriptions and found that the one from the media host pipa was 70% accurate.  See https://youtu.be/N0jHY5cYBbk

                  Mentioned in This Episode # 624

                  Northeast Ohio Podcasters www.neohiopodcasters.com 

                  Podcast Rodeo Show www.podcastrodeoshow.com

                  Headline Resources at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines

                  Libsyn.com Podcast Media Hosting. Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at www.libsyn.com

                  SEO Expert Training www.yoast.com

                  Dave's Voicemail 888-563-3228 (courtesy of www.podcastvoicemail.com )

                  The School of Podcasting Newsletter www.schoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

                  Transcription Accuracy test https://youtu.be/N0jHY5cYBbk

                  Kyle Gray book The Story Engine: An entrepreneur's guide to content strategy and brand storytelling without spending all day writing

                  Follow Dave

                  www.facebook.com/schoolofpodcasting

                  www.twitter.com/davejackson

                  www.instagram.com/schoolofpodcasting

                   

                  Ready to Podcast?

                  I have mutliple ways you can work with me. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme starting at $5

                  ]]>768184510e27414d9c5b39b49687db79Mon, 25 Jun 2018 04:00:00 -040050:17falsefull624624When in Doubt, Ask Your AudienceComments? 888-563-3228

                  Today on episode 623 we talk with Cody Gough of the Curiosity podcast. Cody had a podcast that was successful, and based on the goals of the podcast decided to make a radical change to their publishing schedule. 

                  Because of My Podcast 

                  2:20

                  Brenda from My Tech Toolbelt shares the story of being able to score media passes for one of the top educational events that would've cost her $650 but she's going for free Because of her podcast. 

                  Sponsorship Update

                  5:08

                  Every month we have one episode based on listener feedback, and somehow Todd's from the Trucker Dump podcast (www.abouttruckdriving.com ) went to spam. Todd shares an idea he may be turning into a podcast, and how he was able to get some sponsors for his podcast.

                  Perfect is the Enemy of Good

                  9:00

                  I can't think of anything that was perfect right out of the gate. Yet, people will not start a podcast because it is "not right." In a recent interview on the "My guest needs no introduction" Howard Stern talks about how he has changed over the years because he went to therapy, and isn't as insecure as he used to be. He states, "I think that bad radio is when you don't somehow change it up constantly." In another interview, Jerry Seinfeld interview David Letterman and he explained how Johnny Carson had all sorts of stipulations on how Dave could do his show, and as Dave put it, "I picked up the crumbs and try to make something out of it." That lead to Dave being super creative, and doing something you couldn't find on the TV anyplace and brought him a super loyal audience. So what can you do with your podcast if you took away some of the segments, some of the format, and had to come up with something new?

                  How Do You Know Your Audience Hates Something if You Don't Let Them Taste It

                  15:30

                  • Cody shares how he got a gig on LinkedIn to produce a podcast
                  • He inherited a huge audience from Curiosity.com
                  • How he had to set expectations with his boss on what to expect in regards to production
                  • Their show was weekly for a year before deciding to change the format
                  • His audience gave him feedback when he switched formats
                  • He lost a small amount of his audience before he downloads starting growing
                  • As his content is evergreen, his back catalog is still getting downloaded
                  • He shares some podcast promotion ideas (www.gretta.com ) and now is focusing on email and the Amazon Briefing
                  • His Amazon Briefing is different than most "standard" briefings
                  • How the assets at the company are changing with the new format
                  • How advertisers are more interested in the US audience in some cases
                  • A great story about he had a HUGE guest on his show and his audience could not have been less interested
                  
                  

                  36:40

                  • How he got a huge guest on his show (it was super easy)
                  
                  

                  40:05

                  • Tips for creating a daily show
                  
                  

                  42:55

                  • How often he checks stats, and takes the temperature of the audience
                  
                  

                  46:00

                  • The only way to know what your audience wants
                  
                  

                  48:20

                  • Who he is using for sponsors
                  
                  What If There Was No Social Media?

                  52:00

                  I was listening to the New Media Show and Todd Cohran brought up an interesting question, "What is there wasn't social media, how would you promote your show? That may be something we think about, and start doing. We can easily rely on promoting ourselves sitting in front of a computer screen, but there are other strategies that require you to get out from behind the desk.

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  I look forward to working with you

                  ]]>Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today on episode 623 we talk with Cody Gough of the Curiosity podcast. Cody had a podcast that was successful, and based on the goals of the podcast decided to make a radical change to their publishing schedule. 

                  Because of My Podcast 

                  2:20

                  Brenda from My Tech Toolbelt shares the story of being able to score media passes for one of the top educational events that would've cost her $650 but she's going for free Because of her podcast. 

                  Sponsorship Update

                  5:08

                  Every month we have one episode based on listener feedback, and somehow Todd's from the Trucker Dump podcast (www.abouttruckdriving.com ) went to spam. Todd shares an idea he may be turning into a podcast, and how he was able to get some sponsors for his podcast.

                  Perfect is the Enemy of Good

                  9:00

                  I can't think of anything that was perfect right out of the gate. Yet, people will not start a podcast because it is "not right." In a recent interview on the "My guest needs no introduction" Howard Stern talks about how he has changed over the years because he went to therapy, and isn't as insecure as he used to be. He states, "I think that bad radio is when you don't somehow change it up constantly." In another interview, Jerry Seinfeld interview David Letterman and he explained how Johnny Carson had all sorts of stipulations on how Dave could do his show, and as Dave put it, "I picked up the crumbs and try to make something out of it." That lead to Dave being super creative, and doing something you couldn't find on the TV anyplace and brought him a super loyal audience. So what can you do with your podcast if you took away some of the segments, some of the format, and had to come up with something new?

                  How Do You Know Your Audience Hates Something if You Don't Let Them Taste It

                  15:30

                  • Cody shares how he got a gig on LinkedIn to produce a podcast
                  • He inherited a huge audience from Curiosity.com
                  • How he had to set expectations with his boss on what to expect in regards to production
                  • Their show was weekly for a year before deciding to change the format
                  • His audience gave him feedback when he switched formats
                  • He lost a small amount of his audience before he downloads starting growing
                  • As his content is evergreen, his back catalog is still getting downloaded
                  • He shares some podcast promotion ideas (www.gretta.com ) and now is focusing on email and the Amazon Briefing
                  • His Amazon Briefing is different than most "standard" briefings
                  • How the assets at the company are changing with the new format
                  • How advertisers are more interested in the US audience in some cases
                  • A great story about he had a HUGE guest on his show and his audience could not have been less interested
                  
                  

                  36:40

                  • How he got a huge guest on his show (it was super easy)
                  
                  

                  40:05

                  • Tips for creating a daily show
                  
                  

                  42:55

                  • How often he checks stats, and takes the temperature of the audience
                  
                  

                  46:00

                  • The only way to know what your audience wants
                  
                  

                  48:20

                  • Who he is using for sponsors
                  
                  What If There Was No Social Media?

                  52:00

                  I was listening to the New Media Show and Todd Cohran brought up an interesting question, "What is there wasn't social media, how would you promote your show? That may be something we think about, and start doing. We can easily rely on promoting ourselves sitting in front of a computer screen, but there are other strategies that require you to get out from behind the desk.

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  I look forward to working with you

                  ]]>0110837d8acd42a59dc1a6d4d51ecb64Mon, 18 Jun 2018 04:00:00 -040056:11falsefull623623The Power of Your Knowing Your Why2:00

                  Brad from the Cinema Guys ( www.wearethecinemaguys.com ) explains how he was approached by a small local Cinema Chain who listens to his podcast. Brad worked a deal that enables him to get tickets to movies. Brad (being the cool guy he is) is using them as a give away for his audience. He has also worked to do a screening of Brad's all-time favorite horror movie, "John Carpenter's The Thing." They get to introduce the movie and then do a Q&A afterward.

                  Earn Money Referring People to the School of Podcasting

                  7:20

                  As a podcaster, people may approach you about how you started your show. You may be thinking of creating an online course, or an ebook. Instead of spending all that time and resources, you can signup to be a School of Podcasting affiliate and earn a commission when they subscribe and also for every month when they stay subscribed. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

                  Why Knowing Your Why Matters

                  8:00

                  It keeps you focused. You are no longer distracted by things that don't help you achieve your goal.

                  If you know why you're doing something, you can see the results clearer. This enables you to spot the small victories that then motivate you to keep going.

                  It is then the motivation that enables you to try again.

                  When another small victory comes along, you get another dose of motivation, and a pinch of this thing called confidence.

                  How My "Why" Gave Me Super Powers

                  I had been wanting to lose weight, and over the last year, I have been going up and down. I would get down to maybe 218 lbs, and then go up to 221 or 222. I wanted to get up and go to the gym in the morning. I knew to drink lots of water, and get plenty of sleep. I knew what to do. However, when I listed my priorities I wrote down things like rewriting my book More Podcast Money, I needed to update some tutorials at the School of Podcasting, and take a class on SEO. Nowhere in there is anything about my health. That's when I realized why I wasn't losing weight. It simply was not a priority.

                  I got a call from letting me know that I was being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. The minute I hung up the phone, I said out loud, "Well somebody's getting up early tomorrow." While it is somewhat weird, as I normally try not to care what people think of me, I knew there would be lots of pictures. I even hired a photographer to take pictures during my presentation. Suddenly,  like a light switch, I had willpower. I had focus. I had a purpose. No longer did I need to watch TV. I realized that most of the taped TV shows I use to watch rarely delivered any real value. I could take that time and use it at the gym, or walk around, or cook healthy food, and THAT would deliver value to my goal of losing weight.

                  When You Know Your Why You Can Make it Through the How

                  “He who has a why to live can bear almost any how.” -Friedrich Nietzsche

                  The two most important days of your life are the day you were born and the day you discover why you were born.– Mark Twain

                  Apple Podcasts hits 550,000 Podcasts

                  I listened to my first episode, and in it, I mention in April of 2005, there were maybe "4000" podcasts. This article says in 2005 there were 3000 podcats, now there are 550,000 and according to this TechCrunch article, there have been Fifty billion episodes have been streamed/downloaded since launch. The new numbers include 18.5 million individual episodes representing 155 countries, in more than 100 languages.

                  So in 2005 when I was explaining to people how cool podcasting was, and how awesome it was that you could "teel the software to watch this site" (better known today as a subscription) and that you didn't ' need a Mac, and you didn't need an iPod to listen. IT WAS PAINFUL as many people just didn't get it (it took a while for me to get it). But I knew the potential power of podcasting, and I had quit listening to radio, and I wanted people to experience the same joy I had found. It didn't seem hard because if I helped ONE person understand and start listening to podcasts, and I had ONE more person to talk about Dawn and Drew with, it was worth my time and effort.

                  When you know you're why the "work" doesn't seem like work. It just seems like something you do. When I first started playing the guitar it was BRUTALLY PAINFUL, but I knew I wanted to play. I wanted to be like my brother (who played) and so the pain wasn't so bad. I knew it was temporary, and I could make it through the how.

                  My "Whys"
                  1. I get to help people (my background is in training. I have a Bachelor's Degree in Education specializing in Technical Education from the University of Akron)
                  2. It's creative (my hobbies are music, writing, photography, poetry).
                  3. It's geeky (I get to play with software to build websites, track downloads, and more)
                  4. I get to leave a very small fingerprint on the planet. Neither of my marriages produced any children. The word "Legacy" seems a bit much, but you get my point.
                  5. I am meeting and creating great friends.
                  6. It's helping me to pay off my student loans
                  7. If I lost my job today, I would have a cushion of money coming to tie me over (and in reality, I would probably be able to the School of Podcasting Ful time)
                  8. I'm not sure what I would do with my free time if I didn't.
                  
                  Your Why's Might Be:
                  • Share your knowledge
                  • Get your message out out
                  • Promote a business
                  • Stay connected to friends and family
                  • Be seen as an expert
                  • Open the door to possibilities
                  • Find like-minded people
                  • Inner office company communication
                  • Educate
                  • Entertain
                  
                  Getting the Motivation To Start

                  I just listened to a great episode of the You Wanna Do What? Podcast by Monica Rivera where she interviewed Jeff Haden about motivation. It was a really good interview and had some great insights into motivation. Including:

                  You only need enough motivation to start. If you set small achievable goals, those "little wins" give you the motivation to try again and keep moving. So some examples of small achievable goals my be

                  • Buying your equipment
                  • Plugging everything in and making your first recording
                  • Getting your artwork
                  • Publishing your first episode
                  • Syndicating to Apple, Stitcher, etc
                  • Getting 10 downloads for an episode
                  • Getting 50 downloads an episode
                  
                  

                  When accomplishing these little milestones, it feeds your motivation to keep going.

                  25:10 

                  Brenda from My Tech Toolbelt explain how her kids are grown, and while she is thankful for her job, it can be kind of boring, and she is podcasting because she enjoys learning. Yes, there is a lot to learn but as she put it, "It's fun. It's exciting, and I've already got two press passes (to be continued)" 

                  27:37

                  Jim Collison from The Average Guy Network (and my Co-host for Ask the Podcast Coach) is a lot like me. We both love being around people, we both love helping people. We both like to talk and to influence people to help them do things. 

                   

                  The #1 Killer of Motivation and Why Podcasting is Like Golf

                  30;03

                  There is a reason that employees at companies are strongly urged not to share their income amount with other employees. If two people share that information, one person is leaving that meeting upset. So when people share how many downloads they get in a Facebook group, and their numbers are three times as many as you, ignore it and instead of focusing on their numbers, focus on your audience and how you can serve them.

                  If two golfers shared their scores, someone is going to think, "WHAT?! How is that person better than me? Well, there are a number of factors:

                  • Better equipment
                  • More experience
                  • Better coaching
                  • Better attitude
                  • More athletic
                  • More time to practice
                  
                  

                  So if you came to me and said, "I can't believe they are better than me! And I answered:

                  • Your sound quality is very distracting
                  • You have half as many episodes
                  • They have a completely different niche
                  • They have more time to promote their show
                  • They have a budget to market your show and you don't
                  • They have no children and you have five
                  • They went to the School of Podcasting and you watched outdated YouTube Videos
                  
                  

                  Wouldn't you be able to see why someone might be getting more downloads than you (and keep in mind, there are more ways to measure podcast success than downloads).

                  So unless you want to detail your podcast DON'T COMPARE YOUR SHOW TO OTHER PODCASTS.

                  Heli PR77D Microphone Shootout

                   

                  35:02

                  The 2:00

                  Brad from the Cinema Guys ( www.wearethecinemaguys.com ) explains how he was approached by a small local Cinema Chain who listens to his podcast. Brad worked a deal that enables him to get tickets to movies. Brad (being the cool guy he is) is using them as a give away for his audience. He has also worked to do a screening of Brad's all-time favorite horror movie, "John Carpenter's The Thing." They get to introduce the movie and then do a Q&A afterward.

                  Earn Money Referring People to the School of Podcasting

                  7:20

                  As a podcaster, people may approach you about how you started your show. You may be thinking of creating an online course, or an ebook. Instead of spending all that time and resources, you can signup to be a School of Podcasting affiliate and earn a commission when they subscribe and also for every month when they stay subscribed. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

                  Why Knowing Your Why Matters

                  8:00

                  It keeps you focused. You are no longer distracted by things that don't help you achieve your goal.

                  If you know why you're doing something, you can see the results clearer. This enables you to spot the small victories that then motivate you to keep going.

                  It is then the motivation that enables you to try again.

                  When another small victory comes along, you get another dose of motivation, and a pinch of this thing called confidence.

                  How My "Why" Gave Me Super Powers

                  I had been wanting to lose weight, and over the last year, I have been going up and down. I would get down to maybe 218 lbs, and then go up to 221 or 222. I wanted to get up and go to the gym in the morning. I knew to drink lots of water, and get plenty of sleep. I knew what to do. However, when I listed my priorities I wrote down things like rewriting my book More Podcast Money, I needed to update some tutorials at the School of Podcasting, and take a class on SEO. Nowhere in there is anything about my health. That's when I realized why I wasn't losing weight. It simply was not a priority.

                  I got a call from letting me know that I was being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. The minute I hung up the phone, I said out loud, "Well somebody's getting up early tomorrow." While it is somewhat weird, as I normally try not to care what people think of me, I knew there would be lots of pictures. I even hired a photographer to take pictures during my presentation. Suddenly,  like a light switch, I had willpower. I had focus. I had a purpose. No longer did I need to watch TV. I realized that most of the taped TV shows I use to watch rarely delivered any real value. I could take that time and use it at the gym, or walk around, or cook healthy food, and THAT would deliver value to my goal of losing weight.

                  When You Know Your Why You Can Make it Through the How

                  “He who has a why to live can bear almost any how.” -Friedrich Nietzsche

                  The two most important days of your life are the day you were born and the day you discover why you were born.– Mark Twain

                  Apple Podcasts hits 550,000 Podcasts

                  I listened to my first episode, and in it, I mention in April of 2005, there were maybe "4000" podcasts. This article says in 2005 there were 3000 podcats, now there are 550,000 and according to this TechCrunch article, there have been Fifty billion episodes have been streamed/downloaded since launch. The new numbers include 18.5 million individual episodes representing 155 countries, in more than 100 languages.

                  So in 2005 when I was explaining to people how cool podcasting was, and how awesome it was that you could "teel the software to watch this site" (better known today as a subscription) and that you didn't ' need a Mac, and you didn't need an iPod to listen. IT WAS PAINFUL as many people just didn't get it (it took a while for me to get it). But I knew the potential power of podcasting, and I had quit listening to radio, and I wanted people to experience the same joy I had found. It didn't seem hard because if I helped ONE person understand and start listening to podcasts, and I had ONE more person to talk about Dawn and Drew with, it was worth my time and effort.

                  When you know you're why the "work" doesn't seem like work. It just seems like something you do. When I first started playing the guitar it was BRUTALLY PAINFUL, but I knew I wanted to play. I wanted to be like my brother (who played) and so the pain wasn't so bad. I knew it was temporary, and I could make it through the how.

                  My "Whys"
                  1. I get to help people (my background is in training. I have a Bachelor's Degree in Education specializing in Technical Education from the University of Akron)
                  2. It's creative (my hobbies are music, writing, photography, poetry).
                  3. It's geeky (I get to play with software to build websites, track downloads, and more)
                  4. I get to leave a very small fingerprint on the planet. Neither of my marriages produced any children. The word "Legacy" seems a bit much, but you get my point.
                  5. I am meeting and creating great friends.
                  6. It's helping me to pay off my student loans
                  7. If I lost my job today, I would have a cushion of money coming to tie me over (and in reality, I would probably be able to the School of Podcasting Ful time)
                  8. I'm not sure what I would do with my free time if I didn't.
                  
                  Your Why's Might Be:
                  • Share your knowledge
                  • Get your message out out
                  • Promote a business
                  • Stay connected to friends and family
                  • Be seen as an expert
                  • Open the door to possibilities
                  • Find like-minded people
                  • Inner office company communication
                  • Educate
                  • Entertain
                  
                  Getting the Motivation To Start

                  I just listened to a great episode of the You Wanna Do What? Podcast by Monica Rivera where she interviewed Jeff Haden about motivation. It was a really good interview and had some great insights into motivation. Including:

                  You only need enough motivation to start. If you set small achievable goals, those "little wins" give you the motivation to try again and keep moving. So some examples of small achievable goals my be

                  • Buying your equipment
                  • Plugging everything in and making your first recording
                  • Getting your artwork
                  • Publishing your first episode
                  • Syndicating to Apple, Stitcher, etc
                  • Getting 10 downloads for an episode
                  • Getting 50 downloads an episode
                  
                  

                  When accomplishing these little milestones, it feeds your motivation to keep going.

                  25:10 

                  Brenda from My Tech Toolbelt explain how her kids are grown, and while she is thankful for her job, it can be kind of boring, and she is podcasting because she enjoys learning. Yes, there is a lot to learn but as she put it, "It's fun. It's exciting, and I've already got two press passes (to be continued)" 

                  27:37

                  Jim Collison from The Average Guy Network (and my Co-host for Ask the Podcast Coach) is a lot like me. We both love being around people, we both love helping people. We both like to talk and to influence people to help them do things. 

                   

                  The #1 Killer of Motivation and Why Podcasting is Like Golf

                  30;03

                  There is a reason that employees at companies are strongly urged not to share their income amount with other employees. If two people share that information, one person is leaving that meeting upset. So when people share how many downloads they get in a Facebook group, and their numbers are three times as many as you, ignore it and instead of focusing on their numbers, focus on your audience and how you can serve them.

                  If two golfers shared their scores, someone is going to think, "WHAT?! How is that person better than me? Well, there are a number of factors:

                  • Better equipment
                  • More experience
                  • Better coaching
                  • Better attitude
                  • More athletic
                  • More time to practice
                  
                  

                  So if you came to me and said, "I can't believe they are better than me! And I answered:

                  • Your sound quality is very distracting
                  • You have half as many episodes
                  • They have a completely different niche
                  • They have more time to promote their show
                  • They have a budget to market your show and you don't
                  • They have no children and you have five
                  • They went to the School of Podcasting and you watched outdated YouTube Videos
                  
                  

                  Wouldn't you be able to see why someone might be getting more downloads than you (and keep in mind, there are more ways to measure podcast success than downloads).

                  So unless you want to detail your podcast DON'T COMPARE YOUR SHOW TO OTHER PODCASTS.

                  Heli PR77D Microphone Shootout

                   

                  35:02

                  The Heil PR77D is basically a Heil PR40 with a bass roll-off switch, and something that will look very cool in any videos. It comes in black and purple and retails for $249 where the Heil PR40 is $308. You will hear these with my mic preamp the DBX 286 $199 off during the shootout.

                  In today's shootout, I compare it to an

                  Electrovoice RE320 $299  

                  Audio Technica AT2005 $79,

                  Audio Technica BP40 $349,

                  Blue Yeti $129

                  The Heil PR77D has that traditional warm Heil Sound. When I switched it voice mode (which cuts out frequencies below 120Hz) it seems a little too clear for my voice). It comes with a nice black velvet bag to keep it in. It's a very sturdy microphone, and I love the retro look.

                  Of the microphones above, the only one I steer people away from is the Blue Yeti unless you PROMISE to read the manual, buy an over-priced pop filter, and use it on a boom arm. I personally use the Electrovoice RE320, but I liked the warmth of all the Heil Microphones and I need to play with it a little more to see how the proximity effect is (if it has more bass when you get close to it). The rear rejection seemed about as good as the other microphones.

                  Where Will I Be?

                  42:07

                  Catch me speaking at Podcast Movement July 23-26 in Philadelphia PA (and being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame ) 

                  I will also be speaking at Podcast Midatlantic in September in Philadelphia PA

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?
                  • One on one consulting
                  • Podcast Reviews
                  • Online Courses
                  • Mentoring Programs
                  
                  

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  The Question of the Month

                  As a podcast listener, do you look at Show notes? If so, what do you want to see in show notes? I need your answers by 6/22 go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact 

                  if you email me from that page, please put "June Question" in the title of the email. You can also call 888-563-3228 (be sure to mention your podcast)

                  ]]>c5346e932fd04353b63da94566b118b7Mon, 11 Jun 2018 04:00:00 -040045:19falsefull622622Consistently Creating a Great ShowHave you ever thought, "Oh someone is already doing a podcast about my subject." If so you need to listen to today's show with James Cridland of podnews.net who saw there were other sites and newsletters featuring podcast news, but he thought they were missing something. He had been doing newsletters and working in the radio industry for years, so he decided to start a newsletter (that became a podcast, and an Amazon Flash Briefing) and has really come out ahead of the pack. Today James peels back the curtain on what planning went into the show, and what tools he's using to pull off a daily show.
                  Because of My Podcast: I'm Going to be Inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  1:34

                  I got a call last week from Gary Leland was surprised to hear that my peers have selected me to be inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am humbled, honored, and a whole lot of other emotions that I can't quite digest yet.

                  Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate and Earn Money Referring People

                  3:57 

                  You can earn money referring people to the School of podcasting and earn commissions each month they stay subscribed Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

                  James Cridland Shares What it Takes to Make A Daily Show That Knocks it Out of the Park

                  5:41

                  I brought James on as he is just crushing it with his newsletter on Podcasting. He seemed to just appear and is just crushing it. So in this interview, we hear:

                  • His planning and how he practiced first before launching
                  • He realized his environment changes as he travels and he needed to be able to produce it from any computer
                  • How he emersed himself in his niche as step one, and he uses https://www.inoreader.com/ as his freed reader (tutorial on inoreader)
                  • How does he choose which stories to spotlight
                  • How he uses newsletter analytics to understand his audience
                  • What stories are the most popular
                  • He codes his own website and uses Sendy to manage the email list
                  • What advice does he have for someone wanting to be an expert in their field
                  • As a person with a radio background, what do you think radio feels about podcasting?
                  • His thoughts on people buying their way up the Apple Rankings
                  • Marketing your podcast, and explaining it to future listeners
                  • What percentage of his downloads come from his Amazon Daily Briefing
                  • His thoughts on editing and the optimum length of a podcast
                  • He loves to listen to Death in Ice Valley, Hamish, and Andy, Reasons to be Cheerful
                  
                  

                  Check out James Daily Podcast News Show at www.podnews.net

                  [click_to_tweet tweet="I knew consistency would win in the end" quote="I knew consistency would win in the end"]

                  Isn't Email Dead?

                  42:40

                  But wait, isn't email dead? According to some studies, email is four times more effective at reaching your audience than Facebook. (source) If you are looking for outreach, that may be social, if you're looking to boost sales, or get your audience to click on Something than email is still the king. An article that just came out a few days ago explains how 58% of people "check their email first in the morning vs 11% Facebook and 2% Twitter. 2.6 billion people have email vs 1.7 billion for Facebook. The article states that "It turns out that 77% of consumers prefer email over social media for permission-based promotional messages." (source). The only problem I have with the article is that it's from option monster who helps you get email sign-ups.

                  What Makes a Good Lead Magnet?

                  44:16

                  The best lead magnet ideas typically come from your audience. It's a question someone asks, and it's a really good question. What problems can you help them solve? What would lessen their stress, save them time, or help them reach a goal?

                  Here are some Lead Magnet ideas

                  • Poll results (you can use a free tool like Google Forms to create a poll)
                  • Reviews of Services see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines
                  • Question and Answers
                  • Ebooks
                  • Webinars
                  • Mini-Courses www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps
                  • Checklists
                  • Spreadsheets
                  • Toolkits
                  • Planners
                  • Guides
                  
                  

                  You could make many of these with free tools such a Google Docs and then Save it as a PDF.

                  What Email Service to Use?

                  47:05

                  Many people start out with Mailchimp as it's free. As James said in this episode, if things start taking off it can get expensive quickly. Keep an eye on your subscribers. I'm currently using Convertkit, but to be honest I never used any of the cool marketing tools they have. I should have stuck with Aweber. With that said, as I look into using marketing tools, I've heard a lot of good things about Active Campaign which seems powerful.

                  Ready To Get Your Podcast Going?

                  51:25

                  I would love to work with you to get your podcast going. If it's already going, I'd love to help you grow your audience. I have many ways I can help you

                  go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme and let's start moving your forward today

                  ]]>Have you ever thought, "Oh someone is already doing a podcast about my subject." If so you need to listen to today's show with James Cridland of podnews.net who saw there were other sites and newsletters featuring podcast news, but he thought they were missing something. He had been doing newsletters and working in the radio industry for years, so he decided to start a newsletter (that became a podcast, and an Amazon Flash Briefing) and has really come out ahead of the pack. Today James peels back the curtain on what planning went into the show, and what tools he's using to pull off a daily show.
                  Because of My Podcast: I'm Going to be Inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame

                  1:34

                  I got a call last week from Gary Leland was surprised to hear that my peers have selected me to be inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I am humbled, honored, and a whole lot of other emotions that I can't quite digest yet.

                  Become a School of Podcasting Affiliate and Earn Money Referring People

                  3:57 

                  You can earn money referring people to the School of podcasting and earn commissions each month they stay subscribed Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates

                  James Cridland Shares What it Takes to Make A Daily Show That Knocks it Out of the Park

                  5:41

                  I brought James on as he is just crushing it with his newsletter on Podcasting. He seemed to just appear and is just crushing it. So in this interview, we hear:

                  • His planning and how he practiced first before launching
                  • He realized his environment changes as he travels and he needed to be able to produce it from any computer
                  • How he emersed himself in his niche as step one, and he uses https://www.inoreader.com/ as his freed reader (tutorial on inoreader)
                  • How does he choose which stories to spotlight
                  • How he uses newsletter analytics to understand his audience
                  • What stories are the most popular
                  • He codes his own website and uses Sendy to manage the email list
                  • What advice does he have for someone wanting to be an expert in their field
                  • As a person with a radio background, what do you think radio feels about podcasting?
                  • His thoughts on people buying their way up the Apple Rankings
                  • Marketing your podcast, and explaining it to future listeners
                  • What percentage of his downloads come from his Amazon Daily Briefing
                  • His thoughts on editing and the optimum length of a podcast
                  • He loves to listen to Death in Ice Valley, Hamish, and Andy, Reasons to be Cheerful
                  
                  

                  Check out James Daily Podcast News Show at www.podnews.net

                  [click_to_tweet tweet="I knew consistency would win in the end" quote="I knew consistency would win in the end"]

                  Isn't Email Dead?

                  42:40

                  But wait, isn't email dead? According to some studies, email is four times more effective at reaching your audience than Facebook. (source) If you are looking for outreach, that may be social, if you're looking to boost sales, or get your audience to click on Something than email is still the king. An article that just came out a few days ago explains how 58% of people "check their email first in the morning vs 11% Facebook and 2% Twitter. 2.6 billion people have email vs 1.7 billion for Facebook. The article states that "It turns out that 77% of consumers prefer email over social media for permission-based promotional messages." (source). The only problem I have with the article is that it's from option monster who helps you get email sign-ups.

                  What Makes a Good Lead Magnet?

                  44:16

                  The best lead magnet ideas typically come from your audience. It's a question someone asks, and it's a really good question. What problems can you help them solve? What would lessen their stress, save them time, or help them reach a goal?

                  Here are some Lead Magnet ideas

                  • Poll results (you can use a free tool like Google Forms to create a poll)
                  • Reviews of Services see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines
                  • Question and Answers
                  • Ebooks
                  • Webinars
                  • Mini-Courses www.schoolofpodcasting.com/babysteps
                  • Checklists
                  • Spreadsheets
                  • Toolkits
                  • Planners
                  • Guides
                  
                  

                  You could make many of these with free tools such a Google Docs and then Save it as a PDF.

                  What Email Service to Use?

                  47:05

                  Many people start out with Mailchimp as it's free. As James said in this episode, if things start taking off it can get expensive quickly. Keep an eye on your subscribers. I'm currently using Convertkit, but to be honest I never used any of the cool marketing tools they have. I should have stuck with Aweber. With that said, as I look into using marketing tools, I've heard a lot of good things about Active Campaign which seems powerful.

                  Ready To Get Your Podcast Going?

                  51:25

                  I would love to work with you to get your podcast going. If it's already going, I'd love to help you grow your audience. I have many ways I can help you

                  go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme and let's start moving your forward today

                  ]]>04e267159d234b55b74a99fafc89f592Mon, 04 Jun 2018 04:00:00 -040053:07falsefull621621How Did You Get Your Podcast Sponsor?Today in episode 620 you will learn two strategies to grow your audience and your subscriptions and you will learn how other podcasters got podcast sponsor. Keep in mind, if you are doing a show for fun, you can do a podcast with no intention of making money and that is 100% fine. I see podcasters who are now choosing media hosts based on their host's ability to get them paid. New media hosts are popping up selling Dynamic Ad Insertion. This is not where you do a host read advertisement. This is where you have ads that that sponsor often had recorded, and then insert them into your show (you pick where they appear). In my example, the recorded ad was at a much lower volume.
                  Growing Your Podcast Through Print

                  1:50 Mark Miller from the Repurpose Your Career shares how his podcast was featured in an actual paper Magazine, but not only a Magazine AARP. Now one might think that podcast listeners are not reading AARP but it turns out some of them are and now his numbers have taken a sizable jump. So the lesson here is you never know what will bring you more listeners.

                  Today's Podcast Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com

                  3:49 

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com

                  Growing Your Podcast with Face to Face Meetings

                  5:15 Way back on episode 474 of the School of Podcasting Glenn "the Geek" Hebert (of the Horse Radio Network ) made his first appearance and explained how he had gone to trade shows.

                  Elikqitie from the Travel Gluten Free podcast tried this, and while she didn't get the booth for free (she did get it at a reduced rate). She had tons of interviews and grew her network. One company emailed her after the conference and reached out to be interviewed.

                  Another boost came when someone she met at the event shared an image of them on Instagram and she could see where this was adding to the number of downloads for that episode.

                  Then another contact from the event asked her to host a webinar they are running.

                  Siri Can Subscribe You Audience to Your Podcast

                  16: 02 Did you know if you have an iPhone you can say, "Hey Siri, Subscribe to the (name of your show ) podcast" and she will ask you to confirm your decision and the subscribe to your show in the Apple Podcasts app. You can do this on Facebook live and share it with your audience.

                  Question(s) of the Month

                  16:58 This month I asked, If you got a sponsor how did you get it? I also asked, Do you planned on launching a new show this year?" Here are the answers"

                  Win Charles from "Ask Win" does plan on starting a podcast after she graduates from College in 2019.

                  20:47 She did have a sponsor who found her.

                  21:50 Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men podcast had a sponsor for his Ham Radio 360 show before he even had one episode published. He got a second sponsor who approached him. He does plan on launching two new shows both involving members of his family (Sistercast, and Our Podcast )

                  25:34 Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com will plan on releasing a new show Gray Heroes soon (July)

                  2734 Luke from the Triangle Tactical Podcast (about competitive shooting). His first sponsor fit his niche and sells bullets for competitive shooting. He got them as a sponsor by reaching out and asking, "Would you like to be a sponsor of my show?" and they did. The second sponsor came to Luke and asked to be a sponsor. They have a competitive shooting related business.

                  29:55 Matt Rafferty from the Author Inside You podcast (where he interviews first-time authors) and he kept getting approached by a book agent who wanted to have his clients interviewed. Matt worked with the agent to sponsor the show, and now interviews his authors.

                  31:14 Hilda from the  Wise Traditions podcast a podcast for the Weston A. Price Foundation and its Wise Traditions diet and principles. Hilda is looking to create a health-related show in Spanish. She needs a Spanish speaking editor (I suggest Niel Guilarte from Wildstyle Media) . She thought she had a slam dunk as the Wise Foundation already has a publication and Hilda thought the sponsors of the print version would be an easy slam dunk for the digital version, and so far that has not been the case.

                  35:23 I don't plan on adding more shows (I just added the History of Six SHooter), and I may be retiring the Alexacast (as Amazon fired me from the associate's program). If you are looking for sponsorship and you aren't getting the 5,000 download per episode, try contacting True Native Media who found a few sponsors for me. My latest sponsor approached me directly. I've been taking sponsors as I'm working up an updated version of the Book More Podcast Money.

                  Beware of Moving to a Media Host who Promises Your Podcast Sponsors

                  36:48

                  Most sponsors want at least 5000 downloads per episode after 30 days (monthly stats are worthless). Only about 10% of most podcasters get these kinds of numbers. A new trend is Dynamic Advertisement or Dynamic Ad Insertion. This is where you can go in and have ads inserted at the beginning of your show (pre-roll) at the end of your show (post-roll) and somewhere in the episode (midroll). When I take to people who had non-dynamic ads, they are getting paid somewhere between $20-$50 for one thousand downloads (known as CPM).

                  With Dynamic Ad Insertion, it is much muss less. With one company I had 53 ads shown and made .0164 that means I'm making .000309 per download or .31 per 1000 downloads.

                  I tried a new service and I had 1824 ads and earned $.280 that is .00154 per download or $1.54 per thousand downloads. While $1.54 is much better than .31, it is still hideous. In past, I had a podcast that had a flat rate of $90 per episode. I would have to have 58,441 downloads to equal $90. So while people that sell dynamic ad insertion will tell you that you make money selling you back catalog forever, it might just take forever to make the same amount of money that you do where you are paid for your value.

                  While some people may think that getting some pay (no matter how little) is better than no pay. I understand that, but I think there are other ways to get paid for your show (I cover other strategies in my book More Podcast Money, and I'm working on a new revision which will walk about Patreon )

                  Start Your Podcast Today

                  I would love to work with you to help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast.

                  For the available options and pricing see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>Today in episode 620 you will learn two strategies to grow your audience and your subscriptions and you will learn how other podcasters got podcast sponsor. Keep in mind, if you are doing a show for fun, you can do a podcast with no intention of making money and that is 100% fine. I see podcasters who are now choosing media hosts based on their host's ability to get them paid. New media hosts are popping up selling Dynamic Ad Insertion. This is not where you do a host read advertisement. This is where you have ads that that sponsor often had recorded, and then insert them into your show (you pick where they appear). In my example, the recorded ad was at a much lower volume.
                  Growing Your Podcast Through Print

                  1:50 Mark Miller from the Repurpose Your Career shares how his podcast was featured in an actual paper Magazine, but not only a Magazine AARP. Now one might think that podcast listeners are not reading AARP but it turns out some of them are and now his numbers have taken a sizable jump. So the lesson here is you never know what will bring you more listeners.

                  Today's Podcast Sponsor: PodcastGuests.com

                  3:49 

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com

                  Growing Your Podcast with Face to Face Meetings

                  5:15 Way back on episode 474 of the School of Podcasting Glenn "the Geek" Hebert (of the Horse Radio Network ) made his first appearance and explained how he had gone to trade shows.

                  Elikqitie from the Travel Gluten Free podcast tried this, and while she didn't get the booth for free (she did get it at a reduced rate). She had tons of interviews and grew her network. One company emailed her after the conference and reached out to be interviewed.

                  Another boost came when someone she met at the event shared an image of them on Instagram and she could see where this was adding to the number of downloads for that episode.

                  Then another contact from the event asked her to host a webinar they are running.

                  Siri Can Subscribe You Audience to Your Podcast

                  16: 02 Did you know if you have an iPhone you can say, "Hey Siri, Subscribe to the (name of your show ) podcast" and she will ask you to confirm your decision and the subscribe to your show in the Apple Podcasts app. You can do this on Facebook live and share it with your audience.

                  Question(s) of the Month

                  16:58 This month I asked, If you got a sponsor how did you get it? I also asked, Do you planned on launching a new show this year?" Here are the answers"

                  Win Charles from "Ask Win" does plan on starting a podcast after she graduates from College in 2019.

                  20:47 She did have a sponsor who found her.

                  21:50 Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men podcast had a sponsor for his Ham Radio 360 show before he even had one episode published. He got a second sponsor who approached him. He does plan on launching two new shows both involving members of his family (Sistercast, and Our Podcast )

                  25:34 Tim “Kimo” Brien from http://kdoipodcasting.com will plan on releasing a new show Gray Heroes soon (July)

                  2734 Luke from the Triangle Tactical Podcast (about competitive shooting). His first sponsor fit his niche and sells bullets for competitive shooting. He got them as a sponsor by reaching out and asking, "Would you like to be a sponsor of my show?" and they did. The second sponsor came to Luke and asked to be a sponsor. They have a competitive shooting related business.

                  29:55 Matt Rafferty from the Author Inside You podcast (where he interviews first-time authors) and he kept getting approached by a book agent who wanted to have his clients interviewed. Matt worked with the agent to sponsor the show, and now interviews his authors.

                  31:14 Hilda from the  Wise Traditions podcast a podcast for the Weston A. Price Foundation and its Wise Traditions diet and principles. Hilda is looking to create a health-related show in Spanish. She needs a Spanish speaking editor (I suggest Niel Guilarte from Wildstyle Media) . She thought she had a slam dunk as the Wise Foundation already has a publication and Hilda thought the sponsors of the print version would be an easy slam dunk for the digital version, and so far that has not been the case.

                  35:23 I don't plan on adding more shows (I just added the History of Six SHooter), and I may be retiring the Alexacast (as Amazon fired me from the associate's program). If you are looking for sponsorship and you aren't getting the 5,000 download per episode, try contacting True Native Media who found a few sponsors for me. My latest sponsor approached me directly. I've been taking sponsors as I'm working up an updated version of the Book More Podcast Money.

                  Beware of Moving to a Media Host who Promises Your Podcast Sponsors

                  36:48

                  Most sponsors want at least 5000 downloads per episode after 30 days (monthly stats are worthless). Only about 10% of most podcasters get these kinds of numbers. A new trend is Dynamic Advertisement or Dynamic Ad Insertion. This is where you can go in and have ads inserted at the beginning of your show (pre-roll) at the end of your show (post-roll) and somewhere in the episode (midroll). When I take to people who had non-dynamic ads, they are getting paid somewhere between $20-$50 for one thousand downloads (known as CPM).

                  With Dynamic Ad Insertion, it is much muss less. With one company I had 53 ads shown and made .0164 that means I'm making .000309 per download or .31 per 1000 downloads.

                  I tried a new service and I had 1824 ads and earned $.280 that is .00154 per download or $1.54 per thousand downloads. While $1.54 is much better than .31, it is still hideous. In past, I had a podcast that had a flat rate of $90 per episode. I would have to have 58,441 downloads to equal $90. So while people that sell dynamic ad insertion will tell you that you make money selling you back catalog forever, it might just take forever to make the same amount of money that you do where you are paid for your value.

                  While some people may think that getting some pay (no matter how little) is better than no pay. I understand that, but I think there are other ways to get paid for your show (I cover other strategies in my book More Podcast Money, and I'm working on a new revision which will walk about Patreon )

                  Start Your Podcast Today

                  I would love to work with you to help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast.

                  For the available options and pricing see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>eb63b6e65edd4ddaad9d22fe3d0e15b6Mon, 28 May 2018 04:00:00 -040048:38falsefull620620Treating His Guests Like an Opportunity Instead of TransactionsToday I talk with Harry Duran of Podcast Junkies. I've known Harry for quite some time (hear my interview on his show). He has a great sense of humor and makes me laugh. I love to be around people who make me laugh. At last years Podfest, myself Harry, Michael Oneil, and Natalie Jenkins had a blast. Throw in Dr. Ryan Gray and Jennifer Briney, and Master Kuldrin, and you've got memories to last a lifetime. I started listening to Podcast Junkies thinking it was going to be yet another  "Podcast About Podcasting" but Harry is Different. He talks a little about the guests' show and then peels down the layers to find their best stories.

                  Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Sponsor: Podcast Guests

                   

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  The First Ever School of Podcasting LIGHTNING ROUND

                  4:10 I'm going to play questions from Harry interview with Travis Chappel and you figure out what do all these questions do?

                  Behind the Scenes of a how the lead Podcast Junky Harry Duran Performs an Interview

                  6:40

                  I interviewed Harry a few months ago, but I hadn't cracked the code. I kept asking myself, "Why do I listen to Harry's show?" Here are some reasons

                  • I know most of his guests (and learn things about them I didn't know)
                  • He always asks the questions I would ask
                  • He gets great stories out of his guests.
                  
                  

                  So then I wanted to know HOW does Harry do this? How does he shape his show? So I was listening to Harry interview Travis Chappell. Now I don't know Travis, but I still listened to the whole interview. So again, I reversed engineered it. I went about halfway through the episode and shifted my focus from Travis to Harry. Then the light bulb came on. It's not really earth-shattering, but Harry asked questions that left the door WIDE OPEN for a story. He also LISTENS and asks great follow up questions.

                  One great example, the first question to Travis was, to sum up, his podcast experience in three words. Travis answered, "Amazing, Hard, Unexpected." To this Harry then asked him to dig in deeper into what is hard. It's not rocket science. But losing weight is simple as well. You eat less and exercise more. Simple it is. Easy it is not, and doing interviews is very similar. It's simple but not easy. Today we find out

                  • How he selected his guests
                  • How he prepares for the interview
                  • How he chooses his next question
                  • As a podcaster and listener, what are some of the common mistakes podcaster make?
                  • How nervous he was interviewing Marc Maron's producer
                  • How the same "recipe" for good content is the same recipe he used to launch Fullcast his podcast production company
                  • His philosophy on handling guests
                  • Behind the scenes of his retention hashtag
                  • Why he now outsources his editing
                  • His history of making a six-figure income in the "corporate world" and why he left.
                  • What are the common mistakes podcasters make?
                  
                  

                  You can check out Harry's show Podcast Junkies at www.podcastjunkies.com and his production company at www.fullcast.co

                   

                  Podcasting News

                  In an article by Insideradio.com Audio Boom may be having serious financial issues as they had to call off their acquisition of Triton Digital. In the article, it states, “In announcing the withdrawal, Audioboom said it only has enough working capital to continue operations for four weeks. Shares in Audioboom remain suspended on the London Stock Exchange (AIM) pending further fundraising.”

                  If you are looking for a new media host, check out my favorite media host Libsyn.com use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month (and we will import your files from Audioboom for free). I like Libsyn so much I became an employee two years ago.

                  Latest School of Podcasting Affiliate

                  Thanks to Arnie Chapman from thefootballhistorydude.com for becoming a School of Podcasting Affiliate. This means Arnie can now earn a commission by referring people to use the School of Podcasting to Plan, Launch, and Grow their podcast. If you'd like to earn money referring people see www.schoolfopodcasting.com/affiliates

                  Ready to Start Your Podcast? Work With Dave

                  I can help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast. Do you need a single one on one coaching session? Want a three-month podcast launch mentorship? It's all in one place www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>Today I talk with Harry Duran of Podcast Junkies. I've known Harry for quite some time (hear my interview on his show). He has a great sense of humor and makes me laugh. I love to be around people who make me laugh. At last years Podfest, myself Harry, Michael Oneil, and Natalie Jenkins had a blast. Throw in Dr. Ryan Gray and Jennifer Briney, and Master Kuldrin, and you've got memories to last a lifetime. I started listening to Podcast Junkies thinking it was going to be yet another  "Podcast About Podcasting" but Harry is Different. He talks a little about the guests' show and then peels down the layers to find their best stories.

                  Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Sponsor: Podcast Guests

                   

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  The First Ever School of Podcasting LIGHTNING ROUND

                  4:10 I'm going to play questions from Harry interview with Travis Chappel and you figure out what do all these questions do?

                  Behind the Scenes of a how the lead Podcast Junky Harry Duran Performs an Interview

                  6:40

                  I interviewed Harry a few months ago, but I hadn't cracked the code. I kept asking myself, "Why do I listen to Harry's show?" Here are some reasons

                  • I know most of his guests (and learn things about them I didn't know)
                  • He always asks the questions I would ask
                  • He gets great stories out of his guests.
                  
                  

                  So then I wanted to know HOW does Harry do this? How does he shape his show? So I was listening to Harry interview Travis Chappell. Now I don't know Travis, but I still listened to the whole interview. So again, I reversed engineered it. I went about halfway through the episode and shifted my focus from Travis to Harry. Then the light bulb came on. It's not really earth-shattering, but Harry asked questions that left the door WIDE OPEN for a story. He also LISTENS and asks great follow up questions.

                  One great example, the first question to Travis was, to sum up, his podcast experience in three words. Travis answered, "Amazing, Hard, Unexpected." To this Harry then asked him to dig in deeper into what is hard. It's not rocket science. But losing weight is simple as well. You eat less and exercise more. Simple it is. Easy it is not, and doing interviews is very similar. It's simple but not easy. Today we find out

                  • How he selected his guests
                  • How he prepares for the interview
                  • How he chooses his next question
                  • As a podcaster and listener, what are some of the common mistakes podcaster make?
                  • How nervous he was interviewing Marc Maron's producer
                  • How the same "recipe" for good content is the same recipe he used to launch Fullcast his podcast production company
                  • His philosophy on handling guests
                  • Behind the scenes of his retention hashtag
                  • Why he now outsources his editing
                  • His history of making a six-figure income in the "corporate world" and why he left.
                  • What are the common mistakes podcasters make?
                  
                  

                  You can check out Harry's show Podcast Junkies at www.podcastjunkies.com and his production company at www.fullcast.co

                   

                  Podcasting News

                  In an article by Insideradio.com Audio Boom may be having serious financial issues as they had to call off their acquisition of Triton Digital. In the article, it states, “In announcing the withdrawal, Audioboom said it only has enough working capital to continue operations for four weeks. Shares in Audioboom remain suspended on the London Stock Exchange (AIM) pending further fundraising.”

                  If you are looking for a new media host, check out my favorite media host Libsyn.com use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month (and we will import your files from Audioboom for free). I like Libsyn so much I became an employee two years ago.

                  Latest School of Podcasting Affiliate

                  Thanks to Arnie Chapman from thefootballhistorydude.com for becoming a School of Podcasting Affiliate. This means Arnie can now earn a commission by referring people to use the School of Podcasting to Plan, Launch, and Grow their podcast. If you'd like to earn money referring people see www.schoolfopodcasting.com/affiliates

                  Ready to Start Your Podcast? Work With Dave

                  I can help you plan, launch, and grow your podcast. Do you need a single one on one coaching session? Want a three-month podcast launch mentorship? It's all in one place www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                   

                  ]]>ab51ffe16c2c4f259be250ed3486bd83Mon, 21 May 2018 04:00:00 -040053:50falsefull619619Jordan Harbinger - How to Avoid Being Fired From Your Own Podcast888-563-3228
                  Becuase of My Podcast, I'm Married

                  1:26 Jordan Harbinger explains how his podcast lead to him meeting his wife.

                  Sponsor: Podcast Guests

                  2:23

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop  Who is Jordan Harbinger?

                  4:08

                  He is the host of the Jordan Harbinger show. He is a podcast veteran (been around more than 11 years) and I like Jordan because of the "three I's"

                  Interesting

                  A former Wall Street attorney, Jordan speaks five languages and spent several years abroad in Europe and the developing world, including South America, Eastern Europe, and the Middle East. He has also worked for various governments and NGOs overseas, traveled through war zones, and been kidnapped -- twice. He'll tell you the only reason he's still alive and kicking is because of his ability to talk his way into (and out of) just about any type of situation.

                  Integrity

                  Jordan will call BS on anybody. I once saw him correct a person who was introducing him at an event, and I've heard him ask some tough questions on his podcast The Jordan Harbinger Show

                  Influence

                  At Social Media Marketing World I saw Jordan speak (I HIGHLY recommend seeing him if you get a chance) and when he got done and greeting some people (like most people do) about 90% of the room followed him into the hall. I don't see this with other speakers.

                  I originally interviewed Jordan back in 2014 when things were going great (he had his podcast and was also on Satelite radio) fast forward to 2018, and Jordan was removed from a podcast he co-founded. What impressed me the most when I met Jordan in San Diego was his attitude. He was looking at the bright side. Instead of "why did this happen to me?" he had a "What does this all me to do differently that I couldn't do before" attitude. He is a guy that puts in the work, and when the rug was pulled out from under him, it was his network of friends that he had built for 11 years that have come to help the world know he is back and better than ever at www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics

                  In this episode we learn:

                  6:38 What happened - a deeper explanation. 8:55 An example of how his old brand was holding him back 11:08 How his new events will differ from the past 12:16 Who his target audience is for the events 14:24How he handles tough questions from his audience 16:35 Why its worth "Doing the work." 19:45 How he finds the time to do all his research. 22:08 How did he find out he was fired? 24:16 How his wife and listeners helped him cope with the situation. 25:25 What's the difference between the "old" and "new" Jordan Harbinger? 26:45 How do you balancing work/life/wife? 28:33 How do you avoid this scenario in the future for new podcasters? 35:10 Do you consider your podcast topic broad or niche? 36:35 How do I attend your event?

                  For more information about Jordan check out www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics or email Jordan at jodran@jordanharbinger.com

                  Check out his show in Apple Podcasts or on Castbox on Android (other options available at his website)

                  Grading Your Own Interview

                  37:58

                  As my background is in training (20 years as a corporate trainer). Here is an exercise you can do to grade your interview. Go back and write down all the questions you asked (see above). Then look for:

                  • Yes/No Questions (and see if there is a way to ask them in a more open format that would lead to a story).
                  • Are these the questions your audience would ask?
                  • Are there any questions and answers that can be deleted.
                  
                  Welcome New Supporters

                  43:28

                  I'd like to welcome the newest Affiliate for the School of Podcasting Shawn Washburn of the Stories for Starters podcast http://www.washburnwriter.com/podcast/

                  If you would like to earn money by referring people the school of podcasting go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates 

                  Also, welcome to Wayne Henderson of http://mediavoiceovers.com/ and the Packers Fan Podcast as the newest Patron.

                  The History of Six Shooter

                  44:04

                  I have launched a new podcast to play with some different podcasting tools. The podcast is at www.historyofsixshooter.com where you can hear the stories and drama of being in a Country band in 1995. Subscribe in Apple Podcasts and other apps, or Binge listen at www.historyofsixshooter.com/binge

                  Question of the Month for May

                  45:45  We need your answers by 5/25/18

                  1. Are you planning on starting a new show, if so what is it?

                  2. If you've had sponsors on your show, how did you get it? Did they approach you? Did you approach them? Did they come from your media host?

                  Please put May 2018 Question when you answer using your favorite method on our contact page

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  You Wanna Do What Podcast?

                  Getting Your Podcast Ready for Google

                  Transcript of Jordan Harbinger Interview School of Podcasting Episode 618

                  ]]>888-563-3228
                  Becuase of My Podcast, I'm Married

                  1:26 Jordan Harbinger explains how his podcast lead to him meeting his wife.

                  Sponsor: Podcast Guests

                  2:23

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners).

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastguests.com helps you become featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop  Who is Jordan Harbinger?

                  4:08

                  He is the host of the Jordan Harbinger show. He is a podcast veteran (been around more than 11 years) and I like Jordan because of the "three I's"

                  Interesting

                  A former Wall Street attorney, Jordan speaks five languages and spent several years abroad in Europe and the developing world, including South America, Eastern Europe, and the Middle East. He has also worked for various governments and NGOs overseas, traveled through war zones, and been kidnapped -- twice. He'll tell you the only reason he's still alive and kicking is because of his ability to talk his way into (and out of) just about any type of situation.

                  Integrity

                  Jordan will call BS on anybody. I once saw him correct a person who was introducing him at an event, and I've heard him ask some tough questions on his podcast The Jordan Harbinger Show

                  Influence

                  At Social Media Marketing World I saw Jordan speak (I HIGHLY recommend seeing him if you get a chance) and when he got done and greeting some people (like most people do) about 90% of the room followed him into the hall. I don't see this with other speakers.

                  I originally interviewed Jordan back in 2014 when things were going great (he had his podcast and was also on Satelite radio) fast forward to 2018, and Jordan was removed from a podcast he co-founded. What impressed me the most when I met Jordan in San Diego was his attitude. He was looking at the bright side. Instead of "why did this happen to me?" he had a "What does this all me to do differently that I couldn't do before" attitude. He is a guy that puts in the work, and when the rug was pulled out from under him, it was his network of friends that he had built for 11 years that have come to help the world know he is back and better than ever at www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics

                  In this episode we learn:

                  6:38 What happened - a deeper explanation. 8:55 An example of how his old brand was holding him back 11:08 How his new events will differ from the past 12:16 Who his target audience is for the events 14:24How he handles tough questions from his audience 16:35 Why its worth "Doing the work." 19:45 How he finds the time to do all his research. 22:08 How did he find out he was fired? 24:16 How his wife and listeners helped him cope with the situation. 25:25 What's the difference between the "old" and "new" Jordan Harbinger? 26:45 How do you balancing work/life/wife? 28:33 How do you avoid this scenario in the future for new podcasters? 35:10 Do you consider your podcast topic broad or niche? 36:35 How do I attend your event?

                  For more information about Jordan check out www.jordanharbinger.com and Advanced Human Dynamics or email Jordan at jodran@jordanharbinger.com

                  Check out his show in Apple Podcasts or on Castbox on Android (other options available at his website)

                  Grading Your Own Interview

                  37:58

                  As my background is in training (20 years as a corporate trainer). Here is an exercise you can do to grade your interview. Go back and write down all the questions you asked (see above). Then look for:

                  • Yes/No Questions (and see if there is a way to ask them in a more open format that would lead to a story).
                  • Are these the questions your audience would ask?
                  • Are there any questions and answers that can be deleted.
                  
                  Welcome New Supporters

                  43:28

                  I'd like to welcome the newest Affiliate for the School of Podcasting Shawn Washburn of the Stories for Starters podcast http://www.washburnwriter.com/podcast/

                  If you would like to earn money by referring people the school of podcasting go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/affiliates 

                  Also, welcome to Wayne Henderson of http://mediavoiceovers.com/ and the Packers Fan Podcast as the newest Patron.

                  The History of Six Shooter

                  44:04

                  I have launched a new podcast to play with some different podcasting tools. The podcast is at www.historyofsixshooter.com where you can hear the stories and drama of being in a Country band in 1995. Subscribe in Apple Podcasts and other apps, or Binge listen at www.historyofsixshooter.com/binge

                  Question of the Month for May

                  45:45  We need your answers by 5/25/18

                  1. Are you planning on starting a new show, if so what is it?

                  2. If you've had sponsors on your show, how did you get it? Did they approach you? Did you approach them? Did they come from your media host?

                  Please put May 2018 Question when you answer using your favorite method on our contact page

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  You Wanna Do What Podcast?

                  Getting Your Podcast Ready for Google

                  Transcript of Jordan Harbinger Interview School of Podcasting Episode 618

                  ]]>fb56c317c5cfbb056514495a035a6246Mon, 14 May 2018 04:00:00 -040048:46falsefull618618Transcribing Your Podcast Is Better Than What?Randal Black is an educator and heard our episode where we revealed some things that didn't go quite right. Randall has a saying that he learned from a Fortune Cookie, "Failure is feedback, and feedback is the breakfast of champions."Check out Randall at www.randallblack.com
                  Sponsor: Podcasts Guests

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). 

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastsguests.com helps you be featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop  Podcast SEO with Transcripts

                  Many people feel that if they put a transcript of your show as your blog you have found the easy way to create "show notes." This is often spurred on by a John Mueller (John Mueller - Senior Webmaster Trends Analyst - Google ) stating, "So having some kind of textual information on that page helps us as well, so that we can actually rank that page appropriately. Then when someone brought up transcripts he said, "If you have a transcription of the podcast, that’s even better, because then all of that information is available for us to actually index." Source.

                  An article on Seach Engine People's website stated that "After transcribing all their audio content, the radio show This American Life (TAL) found that 6.68% of search traffic is attributable to transcripts"

                  So who do they do this? Each transcript is published on a separate web page that is linked to the main episode page (see example). Read full report

                  • Two more studies found that pages that added transcripts earned on average 16% more revenue than those without; meanwhile, Youtube videos that added captions gained 7.32% more views overall.
                  
                  

                  If transcripts are hard to read, then this can increase your bounce rate. A bounce rate is when someone comes to one page on your site and then leaves. Google can see this and (it was thought) to hurt your Google Rankings. However, in an article from Search Engine Journal from Gillam Hunter, it stated, "Don’t worry, despite the “professional opinion” of many SEO cowboys, bounce rate isn’t part of Google’s algorithm.No, having a low bounce rate won’t give you “ranking benefits.” In that same article, it stats that one way to boost your rankings is through better copywriting. So the question is a transcript better copywriting? I guess it depends on your current copy.

                  For me, we don't write like we talk and we don't talk like we write so when I start to read a word for word transcription my mind gets stressed and I leave. What do you do in that situation? I've love to hear 888-563-3228

                  If you want to have transcriptions on your site, but somewhat put that "backstage" there is a cool plugin called Simple Podcast Press that allows you to copy and paste your transcripts and yet have then only appear when a website visitors clicks on them. He refers to them as Clutter-Free Transcripts, and if I was going to implement the transcripts, I would probably use this plugin. I already use it on my Ask the Podcast Coach website

                  Transcriptions Tools

                  Rev.com

                  If you don't mind paying $1/monute rev.com has great quality (a human is doing the transcription service)

                  Temi.com

                  Temi is $6 an hour (or 10 cents a minute) and for a robot, not half bad. I've used it, and if you have the time to proof it a bit it's cool. I liked that you can enter the name of the speakers, and export as a word doc. You can also listen back at faster speeds.

                  Reportex.io

                  Reportext.io is an interesting twist. They sync the transcript and the audio. When you delete the word out the transcript it deletes it out of the audio. This works for REALLY obvious mistakes, but not for micro edits that need a surgeon's hands. For four hours of work, you are looking at over $53. You can test it for free. When I downloaded the text file, the formatting was pretty bad for time stamps.

                  For me (as you can see) I write a blog post for my podcast (So I don't really need a transcript). But I had zero show notes and wanted a way to make them, Temi would be an economical way (assuming I had the time to tweak it) to get show notes.

                  News

                  There is a podcast even in Utah Next Month (Utah Podcast Summit)

                  Google's "NEW" podcast feature is old.  You may need to add some code to your site to make sure you're ready Read this post from Libsyn

                  Need Help With Your Podcast?
                  • One on one consulting
                  • Technical Questions
                  • Equipment Suggestions
                  • Growing Your Audience
                  • Choosing a topic
                  • Your Podcast Launch
                  
                  

                  I can help you with all of this

                  Click here and choose the best way to get on track

                  ]]>Randal Black is an educator and heard our episode where we revealed some things that didn't go quite right. Randall has a saying that he learned from a Fortune Cookie, "Failure is feedback, and feedback is the breakfast of champions."Check out Randall at www.randallblack.com
                  Sponsor: Podcasts Guests

                  A great way to grow your audience is to be interviewed on other podcasts (as they have podcast listeners). 

                  Many podcasters love to boost their network by doing an interview show, but maybe you're having a hard time finding guests.

                  PodcastGuests.com helps you find guests for your podcasts for free

                  PodcastGuests.com will feature your podcast to its more than 4,000 users to find qualified guests that meet your requirements

                  Podcastsguests.com helps you be featured on other shows and helps you find guests for your show.

                  Sign up at PodcastGuests.com/sop  Podcast SEO with Transcripts

                  Many people feel that if they put a transcript of your show as your blog you have found the easy way to create "show notes." This is often spurred on by a John Mueller (John Mueller - Senior Webmaster Trends Analyst - Google ) stating, "So having some kind of textual information on that page helps us as well, so that we can actually rank that page appropriately. Then when someone brought up transcripts he said, "If you have a transcription of the podcast, that’s even better, because then all of that information is available for us to actually index." Source.

                  An article on Seach Engine People's website stated that "After transcribing all their audio content, the radio show This American Life (TAL) found that 6.68% of search traffic is attributable to transcripts"

                  So who do they do this? Each transcript is published on a separate web page that is linked to the main episode page (see example). Read full report

                  • Two more studies found that pages that added transcripts earned on average 16% more revenue than those without; meanwhile, Youtube videos that added captions gained 7.32% more views overall.
                  
                  

                  If transcripts are hard to read, then this can increase your bounce rate. A bounce rate is when someone comes to one page on your site and then leaves. Google can see this and (it was thought) to hurt your Google Rankings. However, in an article from Search Engine Journal from Gillam Hunter, it stated, "Don’t worry, despite the “professional opinion” of many SEO cowboys, bounce rate isn’t part of Google’s algorithm.No, having a low bounce rate won’t give you “ranking benefits.” In that same article, it stats that one way to boost your rankings is through better copywriting. So the question is a transcript better copywriting? I guess it depends on your current copy.

                  For me, we don't write like we talk and we don't talk like we write so when I start to read a word for word transcription my mind gets stressed and I leave. What do you do in that situation? I've love to hear 888-563-3228

                  If you want to have transcriptions on your site, but somewhat put that "backstage" there is a cool plugin called Simple Podcast Press that allows you to copy and paste your transcripts and yet have then only appear when a website visitors clicks on them. He refers to them as Clutter-Free Transcripts, and if I was going to implement the transcripts, I would probably use this plugin. I already use it on my Ask the Podcast Coach website

                  Transcriptions Tools

                  Rev.com

                  If you don't mind paying $1/monute rev.com has great quality (a human is doing the transcription service)

                  Temi.com

                  Temi is $6 an hour (or 10 cents a minute) and for a robot, not half bad. I've used it, and if you have the time to proof it a bit it's cool. I liked that you can enter the name of the speakers, and export as a word doc. You can also listen back at faster speeds.

                  Reportex.io

                  Reportext.io is an interesting twist. They sync the transcript and the audio. When you delete the word out the transcript it deletes it out of the audio. This works for REALLY obvious mistakes, but not for micro edits that need a surgeon's hands. For four hours of work, you are looking at over $53. You can test it for free. When I downloaded the text file, the formatting was pretty bad for time stamps.

                  For me (as you can see) I write a blog post for my podcast (So I don't really need a transcript). But I had zero show notes and wanted a way to make them, Temi would be an economical way (assuming I had the time to tweak it) to get show notes.

                  News

                  There is a podcast even in Utah Next Month (Utah Podcast Summit)

                  Google's "NEW" podcast feature is old.  You may need to add some code to your site to make sure you're ready Read this post from Libsyn

                  Need Help With Your Podcast?
                  • One on one consulting
                  • Technical Questions
                  • Equipment Suggestions
                  • Growing Your Audience
                  • Choosing a topic
                  • Your Podcast Launch
                  
                  

                  I can help you with all of this

                  Click here and choose the best way to get on track

                  ]]>54b0766f6c878ac5bca6ee0d346f7d87Mon, 07 May 2018 04:00:00 -040034:01falsefull617617Three Audio Sharing Tools Reviewed1:04 

                  Aaron does a number of podcast including the Blacklist Exposed, Remake the Movie Right, Smirk, and the Hollywood Outsider

                  Becuase of his podcast(s) Aaron was asked to Officiate the wedding of two listeners who met through the Hollywood Outsider podcast. 

                  3:45

                  Aaron and his co-host Troy Heinritz (from the Black List Exposed) were one of six media companies asked to attend the 100th episode of the Black List Exposed. 

                  Wavve, Audiogram and Sparemin Reviewed

                  6:33

                  There are tools that you can use to make a snippet of your podcast. These tools turn them into a video file to paste on social sites like Twiter, Facebook, and Instagram. This is not the first tool to be based on sharing audio snippets. Clammr was a tool intended for you to be able to easily create a clip and those clips were then easy to share. Clammr lasted about three years (2014-2017).  I had a lot of great press,  and was mentioned on a regular basis. Now a year later, other companies have come to fill the void.

                  My scenario: I looked at the services for what I would use. I want four episode each with a different design. 

                   Click Here to get a free video on how to use these tools   Headliner (Sparemin)   This is a free tool that allows you to make a video out of audio. In theory it can transcribe your audio. The few times I tried the transcription, it was pretty awful. It does give you the ability to have more than one image, as well as text. You can easily make a copy of a project and edit it to be new. There is an image search tool so you can find images to use in your video. BE SURE to read the terms of service as one of the services is Getty Images (who will take you to court for using their images if you didn't obtain a license. You can't beat the price (free). There are videos along the way to help you through the learning curve.

                   

                  Audiogram  I liked that Audiogram actually gives you a live animated preview of your finished file. You didn't have to compile it and think, "Oh wait, I don't like that." You can see it before you turn it into a video. They have a bunch of premade designs. You have much more control over things like titles and positions of animations. You can even load an existing design from a previous movie to save time. Audiogram also shows your social sites (if you want) at the end of the video. These are not clickable. When you are done creating your video. you can download it or email it to your phone for easy sharing on Instagram. For me to do four videos a month would be $19. I can do two videos for free.     Wavve  Wavve the most set of elaborate tools. You can drag and drop exactly where you want things to appear. You have more fonts, etc. When you are done you can post your video to Facebook and Twitter right from your account (and like the others send the video to your phone for Instagram). Wavve does give the ability to do a few free videos per month (depending on the length). They have some video tutorials to walk you through the system. If you are looking to make super cool looking graphics, this is the tool. For my scenerio, it would cost $18/month       BUDGET CHOICE If you're looking for free, Sparemin/Headliner is free. While not as versatilscenarioll give you something to share.   Again for my scenario (4 shows a month, each video with a new design), Audiogram is $19 a month, and Wavve is $18   Different Features Audiogram has the ability to save your design choices and use them over and over.   Wavve has the ability to post to Facebook and Twitter right from your Wavve account   Sparemin has an image search capability (again, check their TOS)   You will see that you can turn these into a giant time suck choosing the right font, the right etc. If you have access to something that makes trackable links (pretty Link for Wordpress) you may want to use a special link with your Audiogram to see if it generates more clicks. The one thing missing (in my opinion) is stats on how many times the file was played.   What You Should Do Even If You Don't Use These Services

                  What I like about these services is it makes you think. It makes you ask yourself, "What is THEY key clip that will make people want to hear more? What clip can I create to motivate people to come and listen."

                  What I Didn't Get To Accomplish In Q1 of 2018

                  18:28

                  19:36 Bill Hutchison from YWAM podcast (and ywampodcast.net ) wanted to be a bit more consistent (but did get some things done)

                  21:49 Brad from We Are the Cinema Guys wanted to work on his calls to action

                  24:25 Sarah from the Podcastcard Academy wants to be a bit more organized (and now is using Asana, Dave loves todoist.com)

                  26:08 Max from Aviation News Talk meant to contact a conference but hasn't gotten around to it yet (but he will NOW)

                  27:42 Win Charles from Ask the Win meant to start a new podcast, but she did find an editor.

                  31:32 Zach from Rasing Rents (as in PArents) needs to get season two going.

                  35:29 Dave needs to get his inbox under control, and started off the year super focused, but has slid back to old habits.

                  Question of the Month for May

                  39:15 We need your answers by 5/25/18 

                  1. Are you planning on starting a new show, if so what is it? 

                  2. If you've had sponsors on your show, how did you get it. Did they approach you? Did you approach them? Did they come from your media host?

                  Please put May 2018 Question when you answer using your favorite method on our contact page

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Secrets of Dynamic Communication

                  http://todoist.com

                  Emily Prokop Podcast Editing

                  Drew from Sleep with Me on Podcast Junkies

                  Chris from Kid Friendly Joke of the Day

                  The Head of Marvel on WDW Radio

                  Computer Tutor Florida 

                  Work With Dave

                  I'd love to work with you. You can join my patreon group for additional tutorials, one on one consulting, join the School of Podcasting, or sign up for my podcast mentorship program.

                  It's all at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>1:04 

                  Aaron does a number of podcast including the Blacklist Exposed, Remake the Movie Right, Smirk, and the Hollywood Outsider

                  Becuase of his podcast(s) Aaron was asked to Officiate the wedding of two listeners who met through the Hollywood Outsider podcast. 

                  3:45

                  Aaron and his co-host Troy Heinritz (from the Black List Exposed) were one of six media companies asked to attend the 100th episode of the Black List Exposed. 

                  Wavve, Audiogram and Sparemin Reviewed

                  6:33

                  There are tools that you can use to make a snippet of your podcast. These tools turn them into a video file to paste on social sites like Twiter, Facebook, and Instagram. This is not the first tool to be based on sharing audio snippets. Clammr was a tool intended for you to be able to easily create a clip and those clips were then easy to share. Clammr lasted about three years (2014-2017).  I had a lot of great press,  and was mentioned on a regular basis. Now a year later, other companies have come to fill the void.

                  My scenario: I looked at the services for what I would use. I want four episode each with a different design. 

                   Click Here to get a free video on how to use these tools   Headliner (Sparemin)   This is a free tool that allows you to make a video out of audio. In theory it can transcribe your audio. The few times I tried the transcription, it was pretty awful. It does give you the ability to have more than one image, as well as text. You can easily make a copy of a project and edit it to be new. There is an image search tool so you can find images to use in your video. BE SURE to read the terms of service as one of the services is Getty Images (who will take you to court for using their images if you didn't obtain a license. You can't beat the price (free). There are videos along the way to help you through the learning curve.

                   

                  Audiogram  I liked that Audiogram actually gives you a live animated preview of your finished file. You didn't have to compile it and think, "Oh wait, I don't like that." You can see it before you turn it into a video. They have a bunch of premade designs. You have much more control over things like titles and positions of animations. You can even load an existing design from a previous movie to save time. Audiogram also shows your social sites (if you want) at the end of the video. These are not clickable. When you are done creating your video. you can download it or email it to your phone for easy sharing on Instagram. For me to do four videos a month would be $19. I can do two videos for free.     Wavve  Wavve the most set of elaborate tools. You can drag and drop exactly where you want things to appear. You have more fonts, etc. When you are done you can post your video to Facebook and Twitter right from your account (and like the others send the video to your phone for Instagram). Wavve does give the ability to do a few free videos per month (depending on the length). They have some video tutorials to walk you through the system. If you are looking to make super cool looking graphics, this is the tool. For my scenerio, it would cost $18/month       BUDGET CHOICE If you're looking for free, Sparemin/Headliner is free. While not as versatilscenarioll give you something to share.   Again for my scenario (4 shows a month, each video with a new design), Audiogram is $19 a month, and Wavve is $18   Different Features Audiogram has the ability to save your design choices and use them over and over.   Wavve has the ability to post to Facebook and Twitter right from your Wavve account   Sparemin has an image search capability (again, check their TOS)   You will see that you can turn these into a giant time suck choosing the right font, the right etc. If you have access to something that makes trackable links (pretty Link for Wordpress) you may want to use a special link with your Audiogram to see if it generates more clicks. The one thing missing (in my opinion) is stats on how many times the file was played.   What You Should Do Even If You Don't Use These Services

                  What I like about these services is it makes you think. It makes you ask yourself, "What is THEY key clip that will make people want to hear more? What clip can I create to motivate people to come and listen."

                  What I Didn't Get To Accomplish In Q1 of 2018

                  18:28

                  19:36 Bill Hutchison from YWAM podcast (and ywampodcast.net ) wanted to be a bit more consistent (but did get some things done)

                  21:49 Brad from We Are the Cinema Guys wanted to work on his calls to action

                  24:25 Sarah from the Podcastcard Academy wants to be a bit more organized (and now is using Asana, Dave loves todoist.com)

                  26:08 Max from Aviation News Talk meant to contact a conference but hasn't gotten around to it yet (but he will NOW)

                  27:42 Win Charles from Ask the Win meant to start a new podcast, but she did find an editor.

                  31:32 Zach from Rasing Rents (as in PArents) needs to get season two going.

                  35:29 Dave needs to get his inbox under control, and started off the year super focused, but has slid back to old habits.

                  Question of the Month for May

                  39:15 We need your answers by 5/25/18 

                  1. Are you planning on starting a new show, if so what is it? 

                  2. If you've had sponsors on your show, how did you get it. Did they approach you? Did you approach them? Did they come from your media host?

                  Please put May 2018 Question when you answer using your favorite method on our contact page

                  Mentioned in This Episode

                  Secrets of Dynamic Communication

                  http://todoist.com

                  Emily Prokop Podcast Editing

                  Drew from Sleep with Me on Podcast Junkies

                  Chris from Kid Friendly Joke of the Day

                  The Head of Marvel on WDW Radio

                  Computer Tutor Florida 

                  Work With Dave

                  I'd love to work with you. You can join my patreon group for additional tutorials, one on one consulting, join the School of Podcasting, or sign up for my podcast mentorship program.

                  It's all at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>7ea5021efc1ab2ed2f9c1e3df5e1ca4dMon, 30 Apr 2018 04:31:52 -040046:02falsefull616616Don't Quit Your Day Job to Start a Podcast888-563-3228
                  My Week On The Road

                  I spent Wednesday with the Cincinnati Podcasters meetup which was a great time of sharing information about what is and isn't working in podcasting. If you are in the Cincinnati area, you should make the trip. From there I went to Nashville for the first ever Podfecta event which was organized by my friend David Hooper. This event used my favorite format which is one track, one room, so all participants get the same information. It's a great way to build community. Then I went to Craft Content Nashville which was an "unconference" (much like the old days of Podcamps). This had over 50 speakers with TONS of tracks. while not all the sessions I attended were stellar, I did walk away with some great info, and got to network and answer some questions. Both events brought in food which made networking very easy.

                  What is a Valuable Show?

                  Jennifer Briney does the congressional dish podcast and did a presentation and the put up a slide that asked, "What is a Valuable Show?" and for Jennifer, it is "An Impressive display of public Entertainment that is useful or important.

                  So Good They Can't Ignore You

                  I listened to the Book "So Good They Can't Ignore Your (Why Skills Trump Passion in the Quest for Work You Love) and he goes hard against the strategy of "Following your passion and the money will come." It's a very interesting book and I agree with some of it. He talks about to move forward you need to develop skills that are rare and valuable. This leads to more jobs where you start to control more of your destiny. He also points out and gives many different illustrations on how few (if any) people can say exactly what they want to be when they grow up. Most people talk small steps (doing rare and valuable work) which leads to more opportunities that lead to you having more control over your life (when you are rare and valuable, you control and call more of the shots).

                  The Law of Remarkability:

                  The law of an idea remarkability. Your podcast inspires people to remark about it and if it has the ability to be spread in a venue that supports these remarks. He also talks about having a goal of acquiring skills that are rare and valuable. I want to take this idea and use it as criteria for your podcast. Jennifer Brinery read a bill going through Congress that was over 2000 pages. I'm pretty sure it's rare that anybody would read that (the Senators receive a summary that was four pages) and in regards to really getting a good picture of what is going on in Congress, Jennifer provides a ton of value.

                  Podcast Monetization

                  I got to meet in person Jeff Sanders who is the author of the 5 AM Miracle and The Free-Time Formula (Hear my interview with Jeff Here) did a great job of giving some great insights into having advertising on your show (for the 10% that have enough downloads to support CPM models) and Jennifer Briney of Congressional Dish (hear my interview with Jen)provided a stellar presentation on creating a podcast that is 100% listener supported. In both presentations, Jeff and Jennifer pointed out that it took YEARS to build the audience big enough to be able to do this full time.

                  Don't Quit Your Day Job

                  We have seen people who are super successful. Their pitch goes something like this, "I can show you how to make a million dollars and not pay taxes. Step one, give me a million dollars." In his book So Good They Can't Ignore You author Cal Newport tells the story of a young blogger who was "fed up with living the conventional life working nine to five for the man with little or no time and little money to pursue my true passions so I've embarked on a crusade to show you and the rest of the world how an avergae Joe can build a business from scratch to support a life devoted to living the dream. The business he referenced (as is the case with most Lifestyle designers) is his blog about being a lifestyle designer. In other words, his only product is his enthusiasm for not having a normal life. "

                  Enthusiasm alone is not rare or valuable and therefore is not worth much.

                  I Couldn't Believe My Ears

                  In talking with a brand new podcaster, I was shocked to hear they had QUIT THE MARKETING JOB that they had been doing for years to start a podcast that didn't scream "EASY TO MONETIZE." Jennifer mentioned how she had taken a part-time job as a waitress so she could still do Congressional Dish and pay the bills until the show was built up enough to jump to full time.

                  We think it's courageous, we think if we don't jump now we never will, and so we jump.

                  When we see people jump from building to building we can't believe what we see

                  https://youtu.be/f0xyzj545tc?t=1m9s

                  It's one thing to jump over a mud puddle. It's a totally different story to jump over a lake.

                  As my mother used to say, "just because Johny Johnson jumps off a bridge doesn't mean you should"

                  https://youtu.be/5wOiYjN2_gA?t=2m1s (disturbing)

                  A Reporter Hears Your Latest Episode, What Is Your Headline?

                  In Nashville, I did a live version of the Podcast Rodeo show. I pointed out that most of the content I consume does one of the following:

                  • Makes me Laugh
                  • Makes me Cry
                  • Makes me Think
                  • Makes me Groan
                  • Educates me
                  • Entertains me
                  
                  

                  If the episode you are going to record does none of the above.

                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Because Of My Podcast - I Can't Believe I Got to Meet....

                  Leslie Eiler Thompson produces The Rogue Ones podcast and explains how she got to me at a super cool person in her niche 

                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  Tim Hanson -  http://www.manontheseat.com/

                  Joe Taylor - www.onfaithsedge.com

                  Trapper Jack - www.touchedbyheaven.net

                  Glenn Hebert Interview (on getting sponsors)

                  The Rogue Ones https://www.rogueonespodcast.com/

                  Jon from www.professorslots.com

                  Podcast Rodeo Show

                  ]]>888-563-3228
                  My Week On The Road

                  I spent Wednesday with the Cincinnati Podcasters meetup which was a great time of sharing information about what is and isn't working in podcasting. If you are in the Cincinnati area, you should make the trip. From there I went to Nashville for the first ever Podfecta event which was organized by my friend David Hooper. This event used my favorite format which is one track, one room, so all participants get the same information. It's a great way to build community. Then I went to Craft Content Nashville which was an "unconference" (much like the old days of Podcamps). This had over 50 speakers with TONS of tracks. while not all the sessions I attended were stellar, I did walk away with some great info, and got to network and answer some questions. Both events brought in food which made networking very easy.

                  What is a Valuable Show?

                  Jennifer Briney does the congressional dish podcast and did a presentation and the put up a slide that asked, "What is a Valuable Show?" and for Jennifer, it is "An Impressive display of public Entertainment that is useful or important.

                  So Good They Can't Ignore You

                  I listened to the Book "So Good They Can't Ignore Your (Why Skills Trump Passion in the Quest for Work You Love) and he goes hard against the strategy of "Following your passion and the money will come." It's a very interesting book and I agree with some of it. He talks about to move forward you need to develop skills that are rare and valuable. This leads to more jobs where you start to control more of your destiny. He also points out and gives many different illustrations on how few (if any) people can say exactly what they want to be when they grow up. Most people talk small steps (doing rare and valuable work) which leads to more opportunities that lead to you having more control over your life (when you are rare and valuable, you control and call more of the shots).

                  The Law of Remarkability:

                  The law of an idea remarkability. Your podcast inspires people to remark about it and if it has the ability to be spread in a venue that supports these remarks. He also talks about having a goal of acquiring skills that are rare and valuable. I want to take this idea and use it as criteria for your podcast. Jennifer Brinery read a bill going through Congress that was over 2000 pages. I'm pretty sure it's rare that anybody would read that (the Senators receive a summary that was four pages) and in regards to really getting a good picture of what is going on in Congress, Jennifer provides a ton of value.

                  Podcast Monetization

                  I got to meet in person Jeff Sanders who is the author of the 5 AM Miracle and The Free-Time Formula (Hear my interview with Jeff Here) did a great job of giving some great insights into having advertising on your show (for the 10% that have enough downloads to support CPM models) and Jennifer Briney of Congressional Dish (hear my interview with Jen)provided a stellar presentation on creating a podcast that is 100% listener supported. In both presentations, Jeff and Jennifer pointed out that it took YEARS to build the audience big enough to be able to do this full time.

                  Don't Quit Your Day Job

                  We have seen people who are super successful. Their pitch goes something like this, "I can show you how to make a million dollars and not pay taxes. Step one, give me a million dollars." In his book So Good They Can't Ignore You author Cal Newport tells the story of a young blogger who was "fed up with living the conventional life working nine to five for the man with little or no time and little money to pursue my true passions so I've embarked on a crusade to show you and the rest of the world how an avergae Joe can build a business from scratch to support a life devoted to living the dream. The business he referenced (as is the case with most Lifestyle designers) is his blog about being a lifestyle designer. In other words, his only product is his enthusiasm for not having a normal life. "

                  Enthusiasm alone is not rare or valuable and therefore is not worth much.

                  I Couldn't Believe My Ears

                  In talking with a brand new podcaster, I was shocked to hear they had QUIT THE MARKETING JOB that they had been doing for years to start a podcast that didn't scream "EASY TO MONETIZE." Jennifer mentioned how she had taken a part-time job as a waitress so she could still do Congressional Dish and pay the bills until the show was built up enough to jump to full time.

                  We think it's courageous, we think if we don't jump now we never will, and so we jump.

                  When we see people jump from building to building we can't believe what we see

                  https://youtu.be/f0xyzj545tc?t=1m9s

                  It's one thing to jump over a mud puddle. It's a totally different story to jump over a lake.

                  As my mother used to say, "just because Johny Johnson jumps off a bridge doesn't mean you should"

                  https://youtu.be/5wOiYjN2_gA?t=2m1s (disturbing)

                  A Reporter Hears Your Latest Episode, What Is Your Headline?

                  In Nashville, I did a live version of the Podcast Rodeo show. I pointed out that most of the content I consume does one of the following:

                  • Makes me Laugh
                  • Makes me Cry
                  • Makes me Think
                  • Makes me Groan
                  • Educates me
                  • Entertains me
                  
                  

                  If the episode you are going to record does none of the above.

                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Because Of My Podcast - I Can't Believe I Got to Meet....

                  Leslie Eiler Thompson produces The Rogue Ones podcast and explains how she got to me at a super cool person in her niche 

                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  Tim Hanson -  http://www.manontheseat.com/

                  Joe Taylor - www.onfaithsedge.com

                  Trapper Jack - www.touchedbyheaven.net

                  Glenn Hebert Interview (on getting sponsors)

                  The Rogue Ones https://www.rogueonespodcast.com/

                  Jon from www.professorslots.com

                  Podcast Rodeo Show

                  ]]>50802b3426da0019040803626fa15415Mon, 23 Apr 2018 04:43:37 -040031:54falsefull615615What Will You Quit To Start Podcasting?Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today is episode 614 of the School of podcasting and we are talking about the most important question a new podcaster should answer before they start. We also have a cool resource for royalty free music. I also share my thought in podcast sponsor markets. 

                  The Three Questions I Ask Every Podcast Client

                  2:29

                  Tyler Primavera asked me, "I discovered your SOP and ATPC shows and I really appreciate them! I'm slowly working my way through them, sorry to hear about Bernie the cat.

                  I really want to start a podcast in veterinary school (starting in the fall), but I'm afraid of the time commitment. I really think podcasting is a great idea (I wrote in depth about it here at my blog https://wp.me/p9MJTj-1U), but I'm afraid of the commitment.

                  How do I decide to podcast or not?

                  Thank you for your time, Tyler"

                  1. Why Do You Want to Podcast?

                  If you can't answer this, then don't spend a dime on any equipment. To this Tyler says

                  Through my podcast, I hope to speak (and live) the message that personal well-being is an absolute must during veterinary school, and that no vet student is ever truly alone.

                  He also says:

                  I want my podcast to improve the lives of veterinary students first, and the veterinary field second. I want to do my little part in tackling the big problem of veterinary mental maladies.

                  2. How Will You Know if It is Successful?

                  While I realize this can change. By answering this question as a consultant I can steer the podcast in the right direction. I can shape the call to action, etc. I can also see if the topic is in alignment with the goal of the show (cause that is not always the case).

                  3. What are You Going to Quit Doing to Make Time For Your Podcast?

                  This is my main point of this episode. Unless you have a large budget and are farming this out, your podcast s going take more time than you think. While I normally say use a four to one rule (a one hour podcast will take four hours to create start to finish), that number could easily be five to one when you're new. With this in mind, unless you have a time machine there are still only 24 hours in a day. Most of us do not start a podcast because we are sitting around watching Dr. Phil and being bored. It is typically quite the opposite.

                  In the article Tyler says this, "Right now, I have plenty of time to make a podcast, because I am not in veterinary school. How will I be able to attend school for 40 hours a week, study, workout, maintain a long distance relationship, and do a podcast? I have no idea. But supposedly, if there is a will, there is a way."

                  This is not always true

                  Chances are you are going to be likely giving up something.  Will it be:   TV Video games Sleep Family time Exercise Work other hobbies   If you have no margin in your life, then you are going to have to stop doing something to make time for podcasting. This is not an opinion, it is a fact that there are only 24 hours in a day.   The Three Things You Need to Podcast I've mentioned this before. You need your attitude, your health, and support of your family. When you stop sleeping, you health fails which may lead to a bad attitude. If you don't have the support of your family, then that also kills your attitude (and the stress can lead to health issues). If you don't have the right attitude, it may come across the microphone, and overall kill the motivation to put out great content.   With this in mind, what are you going to give up to podcast? When I was in my 20's I was on a few bowling leagues. I gave up time watching TV (but I was with my family). When I was in a band, I gave up time with my family to go to practice. Being in a band also made me give up sleep as I often didn't get home until 3 am. Podcasting is no different, so when you are excited to start a podcast you need to look at the amount of margin in your life and see if you have the time to create a podcast, or the budget to farm it out. Where I Will Be This Week

                  16:03

                  Cincinnati Podcasters Meetup on 4/18

                  Podfecta Podcasting Event 4/20 - Nashville Tennessee 

                  Craft Content  4/21 Nashville Tennessee 

                  Cool Resource For Royalty Free Music

                  16:52

                  Thanks to Steve Stewart for turning me on to this in his Podcast Editors Club Facebook Group who told me about MelodyLoops.com  where the music is about $10 a track and you can go back into the track you purchased and have it generate a longer/shorter version of the music. 

                  Dave What Do You Think of Podmosphere?

                  20:39

                  Caine Dorr asked me about my thoughts on Podmosphere. So here it is

                  I've never heard of podmosphere, and when I look at their site it looks like the same site I've seen over and over again. Here is the concept.

                  You sign up your show and list your approximate downloads per episode. You list what your fee in CPM which stands for Price Per Thousand Downloads. Most of these sites have an example like this (straight from the podomosphere website)

                  "Podcasters sign up their account. They type in info about their podcast as genre, language the podcast is in, what country the podcast has a majority of their listeners from, CPM($/1000 listener), amount of listeners(last 3 episodes amount of listeners added up and divided by 3. Example podcast A has 1500 listeners on their last episode and 2000, and 1000 on the two episodes before. This means that 1500+2000+1000=4500/3=1500 is their average amount of listeners), upload a image with their statistics of amount of listeners(a photo of the statistics page that clearly shows how many listeners the podcast had on their last 3 episodes). When Podmosphere then verifies the podcast if the numbers are correct, the podcast shows up in the search engine."

                  When I pasted that paragraph, my Grammarly went nuts (upload a image....). Podmosphere takes 25% of if you are charging $30 per episode, and you get 300 downloads here is the math

                  $30*.75 is $22.5 for your CPM after Podmosphere takes their cut. That calculates to $22.5/1000 = .0225 per download

                  .0225 X 300 downloads = $6.75 per episode.

                  I've seen some of these before, if you go to sponsororama you will see a message:

                  "Thanks for visiting The Sponsorama sponsorship marketplace shutdown in September 2017"

                  Cast.Market is a Ghost to Me

                  This is a company that spends money on branding (I often see their items in a swag bad, but I've never met them in person at ANY podcasting events). On their website (and I'm not making this up) it states:

                  cast.market is a free service. We don't charge podcasters anything. Through the campaign, creator businesses can pay podcasters directly to sponsor their show. Our credit card processor charges 2.9% + .30 cents for this. cast.market adds an additional 7.1%

                  So its free except for the 7.1% of the income you are taking.

                  Here is What is Wrong With These Podcast Advertising Marketplaces
                  1. They are based on CPM, and the more niche your show is the more you should charge. However, so far it doesn't seem to be working.
                  2. There is one BIG thing missing from these marketplaces: sponsors.
                  
                  

                  Sure it sounds like a good idea, but in the end, if there are no sponsors it doesn't work. Why is there no email saying, "He this month we paid out X amount of money to podcasters? Also be sure to notice things when you go to cast.market and look at their news section and see the latest update is from April 14 of 2017. So there has been nothing newsworthy for a year?

                  For the most part CPM pricing does not work for 92% of podcasters (unless you're happy making $27 a month and adding another hour of time for the paperwork). I have not looked into Podbean's offerings and marketplace yet.

                  As the one thing these services are missing are advertisers, if the rules of supply and demand are in effect it may be worth looking into advertising your show on another show.  It's an idea.

                  Question of the Month

                  28:14

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Podcast Rewind: Should I Start a Podcast Episode 97

                  29:45

                  I appeared on episode 97 of should I start a podcast talking about THE COMMON PODCASTING MISTAKES YOU NEED TO AVOID

                  Podcast Rodeo

                  30:33

                  The podcast rodeo show is where we grab a random podcast and see how long we can hang on. If you're looking for an honest first impression of your show, it's only $5 at www.podcastrodeoshow.com for a full review of your entire show see Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today is episode 614 of the School of podcasting and we are talking about the most important question a new podcaster should answer before they start. We also have a cool resource for royalty free music. I also share my thought in podcast sponsor markets. 

                  The Three Questions I Ask Every Podcast Client

                  2:29

                  Tyler Primavera asked me, "I discovered your SOP and ATPC shows and I really appreciate them! I'm slowly working my way through them, sorry to hear about Bernie the cat.

                  I really want to start a podcast in veterinary school (starting in the fall), but I'm afraid of the time commitment. I really think podcasting is a great idea (I wrote in depth about it here at my blog https://wp.me/p9MJTj-1U), but I'm afraid of the commitment.

                  How do I decide to podcast or not?

                  Thank you for your time, Tyler"

                  1. Why Do You Want to Podcast?

                  If you can't answer this, then don't spend a dime on any equipment. To this Tyler says

                  Through my podcast, I hope to speak (and live) the message that personal well-being is an absolute must during veterinary school, and that no vet student is ever truly alone.

                  He also says:

                  I want my podcast to improve the lives of veterinary students first, and the veterinary field second. I want to do my little part in tackling the big problem of veterinary mental maladies.

                  2. How Will You Know if It is Successful?

                  While I realize this can change. By answering this question as a consultant I can steer the podcast in the right direction. I can shape the call to action, etc. I can also see if the topic is in alignment with the goal of the show (cause that is not always the case).

                  3. What are You Going to Quit Doing to Make Time For Your Podcast?

                  This is my main point of this episode. Unless you have a large budget and are farming this out, your podcast s going take more time than you think. While I normally say use a four to one rule (a one hour podcast will take four hours to create start to finish), that number could easily be five to one when you're new. With this in mind, unless you have a time machine there are still only 24 hours in a day. Most of us do not start a podcast because we are sitting around watching Dr. Phil and being bored. It is typically quite the opposite.

                  In the article Tyler says this, "Right now, I have plenty of time to make a podcast, because I am not in veterinary school. How will I be able to attend school for 40 hours a week, study, workout, maintain a long distance relationship, and do a podcast? I have no idea. But supposedly, if there is a will, there is a way."

                  This is not always true

                  Chances are you are going to be likely giving up something.  Will it be:   TV Video games Sleep Family time Exercise Work other hobbies   If you have no margin in your life, then you are going to have to stop doing something to make time for podcasting. This is not an opinion, it is a fact that there are only 24 hours in a day.   The Three Things You Need to Podcast I've mentioned this before. You need your attitude, your health, and support of your family. When you stop sleeping, you health fails which may lead to a bad attitude. If you don't have the support of your family, then that also kills your attitude (and the stress can lead to health issues). If you don't have the right attitude, it may come across the microphone, and overall kill the motivation to put out great content.   With this in mind, what are you going to give up to podcast? When I was in my 20's I was on a few bowling leagues. I gave up time watching TV (but I was with my family). When I was in a band, I gave up time with my family to go to practice. Being in a band also made me give up sleep as I often didn't get home until 3 am. Podcasting is no different, so when you are excited to start a podcast you need to look at the amount of margin in your life and see if you have the time to create a podcast, or the budget to farm it out. Where I Will Be This Week

                  16:03

                  Cincinnati Podcasters Meetup on 4/18

                  Podfecta Podcasting Event 4/20 - Nashville Tennessee 

                  Craft Content  4/21 Nashville Tennessee 

                  Cool Resource For Royalty Free Music

                  16:52

                  Thanks to Steve Stewart for turning me on to this in his Podcast Editors Club Facebook Group who told me about MelodyLoops.com  where the music is about $10 a track and you can go back into the track you purchased and have it generate a longer/shorter version of the music. 

                  Dave What Do You Think of Podmosphere?

                  20:39

                  Caine Dorr asked me about my thoughts on Podmosphere. So here it is

                  I've never heard of podmosphere, and when I look at their site it looks like the same site I've seen over and over again. Here is the concept.

                  You sign up your show and list your approximate downloads per episode. You list what your fee in CPM which stands for Price Per Thousand Downloads. Most of these sites have an example like this (straight from the podomosphere website)

                  "Podcasters sign up their account. They type in info about their podcast as genre, language the podcast is in, what country the podcast has a majority of their listeners from, CPM($/1000 listener), amount of listeners(last 3 episodes amount of listeners added up and divided by 3. Example podcast A has 1500 listeners on their last episode and 2000, and 1000 on the two episodes before. This means that 1500+2000+1000=4500/3=1500 is their average amount of listeners), upload a image with their statistics of amount of listeners(a photo of the statistics page that clearly shows how many listeners the podcast had on their last 3 episodes). When Podmosphere then verifies the podcast if the numbers are correct, the podcast shows up in the search engine."

                  When I pasted that paragraph, my Grammarly went nuts (upload a image....). Podmosphere takes 25% of if you are charging $30 per episode, and you get 300 downloads here is the math

                  $30*.75 is $22.5 for your CPM after Podmosphere takes their cut. That calculates to $22.5/1000 = .0225 per download

                  .0225 X 300 downloads = $6.75 per episode.

                  I've seen some of these before, if you go to sponsororama you will see a message:

                  "Thanks for visiting The Sponsorama sponsorship marketplace shutdown in September 2017"

                  Cast.Market is a Ghost to Me

                  This is a company that spends money on branding (I often see their items in a swag bad, but I've never met them in person at ANY podcasting events). On their website (and I'm not making this up) it states:

                  cast.market is a free service. We don't charge podcasters anything. Through the campaign, creator businesses can pay podcasters directly to sponsor their show. Our credit card processor charges 2.9% + .30 cents for this. cast.market adds an additional 7.1%

                  So its free except for the 7.1% of the income you are taking.

                  Here is What is Wrong With These Podcast Advertising Marketplaces
                  1. They are based on CPM, and the more niche your show is the more you should charge. However, so far it doesn't seem to be working.
                  2. There is one BIG thing missing from these marketplaces: sponsors.
                  
                  

                  Sure it sounds like a good idea, but in the end, if there are no sponsors it doesn't work. Why is there no email saying, "He this month we paid out X amount of money to podcasters? Also be sure to notice things when you go to cast.market and look at their news section and see the latest update is from April 14 of 2017. So there has been nothing newsworthy for a year?

                  For the most part CPM pricing does not work for 92% of podcasters (unless you're happy making $27 a month and adding another hour of time for the paperwork). I have not looked into Podbean's offerings and marketplace yet.

                  As the one thing these services are missing are advertisers, if the rules of supply and demand are in effect it may be worth looking into advertising your show on another show.  It's an idea.

                  Question of the Month

                  28:14

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th

                  Podcast Rewind: Should I Start a Podcast Episode 97

                  29:45

                  I appeared on episode 97 of should I start a podcast talking about THE COMMON PODCASTING MISTAKES YOU NEED TO AVOID

                  Podcast Rodeo

                  30:33

                  The podcast rodeo show is where we grab a random podcast and see how long we can hang on. If you're looking for an honest first impression of your show, it's only $5 at www.podcastrodeoshow.com for a full review of your entire show see www.podcastreviewshow.com 

                  What Should I Use -14 or 16 Lufs? 

                  Spotify and Amazon want your files to be exported at 14 lufs. Many podcasters were exporting at -16. Apparently -14 is louder. How much louder? Is it a big deal? When I took a wave file and exported the same original file in the different formats, it was about 2 db louder (here is a screenshot where you can see the -14 lufs is louder. 

                   

                  For me, I was riding my bike this week and some podcasts I had to strain to hear over the traffic. I'm going with the louder setting.

                  Power Podcast Interviews Workshop

                  This is something my co-host from the Podcast Review Show is doing (Erik is the host of the Podcast Talent Coach and has 30+ years in radio, and this is a STEAL for a five-week (every Thursday night). Check it out. It is limited to 24 people so hurry before it's completely sold out. The first session is 4/19. MORE INFO

                  Work With Me

                  I would love to help you with your podcast. I have different options for different budgets starting at $1 a month go to 

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  Mentioned in this Show 

                  Free Guide to Better Headlines

                   

                   

                  ]]>58a3c8042a3b4801a52e4c70944777e6Mon, 16 Apr 2018 04:00:00 -040038:26falsefull614614Giving You The Nudge You Need to Create Your First Podcast With Monica RiveraAs I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page
                  Because of My Podcast: I've overcome the fear of failure, perfection, and I'm Growing a Community - Brodie Sharpe

                  Brodie Sharp from Everyday  Running Legends interviews everyday average runners to inspire other runners. Becuase of his podcast he has overcome the fear of failure. He read in the book The Success  Principles by Jack Canfield and in it, he quotes Oliver Wendell Holmes who said, "Many people die with their music still in them. Too often it is because they are always getting ready to live. Before they know it time runs out." Brodie said his podcast has helped him overcome the fear of perfection. His brother (who is a life coach) said, "All you need to start is produce B minus content. If you strive for A+ it will never be good enough and it will never be done." Also, because of my podcast, I've been able to build a community. Check out Brodie at https://everydayrunninglegends.com/

                  Before they know it time runs out

                  Today I want to dedicate this effort to my Aunt Shirley Steinmetz. She died of lung Cancer on 4/7/18. What is weird about this is my Dad died on April 5th, 2014. Hist sister Sandra died on April 6th 2016. Then yesterday on April 7th, another sister (Aunt Shirley) joined them. I say this not to bring you down or look for sympathy, but to just remind you that our time here is limited, and our time here is short. Don't die with a great podcast inside of you.

                  Speaking of time running out...

                  I was on Episode 105 of the Dealing with My Grief Podcast with Darwyn Dave talking about Unresolved Grief. Check it out at http://www.dealingwithmygrief.com/podcast/episode-105

                  You Don't Have to Worry About These Things in Your Podcast

                  I might sound bad. Podcasting is not live. You only release it when you're done with it.

                  I'm afraid of technology. You said that about the fax machine and the VCR, and your smartphone. If you've ever attached a picture to Facebook or email, then you can upload a file to Libsyn.com (using coupon code sopfree). If you ever pressed record on a VCR then you can press record on Audacity. If you've ever lowered the radio in the car so you can talk on the phone, then you know how to mix volume levels.

                  I'm afraid of buying the wrong equipment. - Join the School of podcasting or set up a consulting call.

                  I'm worried nobody will listen. I recently interviewed JJ virgin who is a hall of fame fitness trainer and nutritionist. In her book The Miracle Mindset, she explains her insecurities. Yet she has been on Dr. Phil, Dr. Oz. Rachel Ray, the Doctors and been a New York Times bestselling author feels the same way. As a tech support person at Libsyn.com, I often get people who send in a support ticket because their podcast is having a surge in downloads, and they can't believe it when people actually do listen.

                  I Don't Have Two Thousand Dollars to Spend on Equipment - Most people can launch a podcast for around $300, and then a monthly fee of around $30. Please don't spend two thousand dollars on equipment.

                  I'm Afraid Of Negative Reviews - Most podcasters don't get a lot of bad reviews. You will get them eventually, but many podcasters don't feel you are a real podcaster until you get your first one-star review in Apple Podcasts. You can't please everyone, and people who do make very bland content.

                   

                  Monica Rivera Helps Give You The Nudge You Need

                  Monica River is the host of the You Wanna Do What? Podcast.  I've met her at two events, and started listening to her show. Like we've heard over and over on this show, when someone finds a show they like they often download the entire back catalog and that is exactly what I did. the further back into her catalog I got I could then understand the growth that she has gone through in seven months of podcasting. She is wise beyond her years, and her podcast is filled with interesting stories. She still hasn't figured out if she wants to monetize, and if she does how she will do it, but she knew the first step was starting and so she did. In this interview you will hear:

                  • Her "hot mess" that is episode one
                  • How she got rid of the reverb in her recordings
                  • The different microphones she has used (she now uses an ATR2100 )
                  • The feedback she is getting from her listeners
                  • How her approached has changed
                  • How long it takes her to create an episode.
                  • What she has learned going to different events. 
                  
                  

                  Check out her show at www.youwannadowhat.com as well as Apple Podcasts, Stitcher, and Spotify

                  Work With Dave Jackson

                  Do you need help starting a podcast? Growing your podcast? Choosing Equipment? Troubleshooting? Check out

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page
                  Because of My Podcast: I've overcome the fear of failure, perfection, and I'm Growing a Community - Brodie Sharpe

                  Brodie Sharp from Everyday  Running Legends interviews everyday average runners to inspire other runners. Becuase of his podcast he has overcome the fear of failure. He read in the book The Success  Principles by Jack Canfield and in it, he quotes Oliver Wendell Holmes who said, "Many people die with their music still in them. Too often it is because they are always getting ready to live. Before they know it time runs out." Brodie said his podcast has helped him overcome the fear of perfection. His brother (who is a life coach) said, "All you need to start is produce B minus content. If you strive for A+ it will never be good enough and it will never be done." Also, because of my podcast, I've been able to build a community. Check out Brodie at https://everydayrunninglegends.com/

                  Before they know it time runs out

                  Today I want to dedicate this effort to my Aunt Shirley Steinmetz. She died of lung Cancer on 4/7/18. What is weird about this is my Dad died on April 5th, 2014. Hist sister Sandra died on April 6th 2016. Then yesterday on April 7th, another sister (Aunt Shirley) joined them. I say this not to bring you down or look for sympathy, but to just remind you that our time here is limited, and our time here is short. Don't die with a great podcast inside of you.

                  Speaking of time running out...

                  I was on Episode 105 of the Dealing with My Grief Podcast with Darwyn Dave talking about Unresolved Grief. Check it out at http://www.dealingwithmygrief.com/podcast/episode-105

                  You Don't Have to Worry About These Things in Your Podcast

                  I might sound bad. Podcasting is not live. You only release it when you're done with it.

                  I'm afraid of technology. You said that about the fax machine and the VCR, and your smartphone. If you've ever attached a picture to Facebook or email, then you can upload a file to Libsyn.com (using coupon code sopfree). If you ever pressed record on a VCR then you can press record on Audacity. If you've ever lowered the radio in the car so you can talk on the phone, then you know how to mix volume levels.

                  I'm afraid of buying the wrong equipment. - Join the School of podcasting or set up a consulting call.

                  I'm worried nobody will listen. I recently interviewed JJ virgin who is a hall of fame fitness trainer and nutritionist. In her book The Miracle Mindset, she explains her insecurities. Yet she has been on Dr. Phil, Dr. Oz. Rachel Ray, the Doctors and been a New York Times bestselling author feels the same way. As a tech support person at Libsyn.com, I often get people who send in a support ticket because their podcast is having a surge in downloads, and they can't believe it when people actually do listen.

                  I Don't Have Two Thousand Dollars to Spend on Equipment - Most people can launch a podcast for around $300, and then a monthly fee of around $30. Please don't spend two thousand dollars on equipment.

                  I'm Afraid Of Negative Reviews - Most podcasters don't get a lot of bad reviews. You will get them eventually, but many podcasters don't feel you are a real podcaster until you get your first one-star review in Apple Podcasts. You can't please everyone, and people who do make very bland content.

                   

                  Monica Rivera Helps Give You The Nudge You Need

                  Monica River is the host of the You Wanna Do What? Podcast.  I've met her at two events, and started listening to her show. Like we've heard over and over on this show, when someone finds a show they like they often download the entire back catalog and that is exactly what I did. the further back into her catalog I got I could then understand the growth that she has gone through in seven months of podcasting. She is wise beyond her years, and her podcast is filled with interesting stories. She still hasn't figured out if she wants to monetize, and if she does how she will do it, but she knew the first step was starting and so she did. In this interview you will hear:

                  • Her "hot mess" that is episode one
                  • How she got rid of the reverb in her recordings
                  • The different microphones she has used (she now uses an ATR2100 )
                  • The feedback she is getting from her listeners
                  • How her approached has changed
                  • How long it takes her to create an episode.
                  • What she has learned going to different events. 
                  
                  

                  Check out her show at www.youwannadowhat.com as well as Apple Podcasts, Stitcher, and Spotify

                  Work With Dave Jackson

                  Do you need help starting a podcast? Growing your podcast? Choosing Equipment? Troubleshooting? Check out

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>e8cdbfd88654b99e219405078eb6ecf7Mon, 09 Apr 2018 04:00:00 -040047:44falsefull613613Dealing With Your Ego - How to Stay In Your LaneComments? 888-563-3228
                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th.

                  Defining Ego: The Good Side of Ego

                  The Freudian definition of “ego” is simply, according to Wiktionary, “the most central part of the mind, which mediates with one’s surroundings.” So many people think that if you have an Ego, you're a narcissist. If you have an ego than you are conceited. You think you are better than others.  Ego literally means a person’s sense of self-esteem or self-worth. Doing anything new, like starting a podcast, or going against the norm, is directly proportional to how confident you are of yourselves and your abilities. As long as you are in control of your ego, it will work for you. But as soon as your ego starts controlling you, it will hurt you. When ego controls you, it can make the truth look false and the false look true.

                  How To Identify Negative Sides of Your Ego

                  When you are overwhelmed by your ego, you will say words you will regret, take actions you will repent later on, and hurt the people you love most. Your inflated ego can also make people lose trust and respect for you

                  There is a quote by Deepak Chopra to sum it up –

                  “If you want to reach a state of bliss, then go beyond your ego and the internal dialogue. Make a decision to relinquish the need to control, the need to be approved, and the need to judge. Those are the three things the ego is doing all the time. It’s very important to be aware of them every time they come up.”

                  If you find yourself defending yourself, this may be due to a couple of reasons. You may actually be right (and you're trying to educate someone about your point of view) or your wrong and you are defending yourself as you are afraid of the ramifications if it is found out you are wrong.

                  There is the old saying, you can be right or you can be married. I found this to be true. My ex-wife (note the ex) here are and I would battle for days because one wouldn't drop it, and the other wouldn't admit when they were wrong. The opposite of defensiveness is openness, and that means being open to new ideas. When you're not willing to even ponder another point of view, you may want to check yourself.

                  If you do a solo show, you may want to take all of the adulations but that's just not true. Case in point, I record, edit, and post this show. I am the producer, host, editor, web designer, graphic designer. I do this show by myself. That appears true (it is), but I get feedback in the form of emails, speakpipe messages, Facebook likes, etc that help me steer this podcast in a direction that allows it to connect DEEPER with the people who find it. Thanks to my audience who when they hear someone talking podcasting say, "You need to listen to the School of Podcasting, " or "You need to join the School of Podcasting." I would be a fool to say the success of this show is 100% because of me.

                  What Can Happen When You Put Your Ego Aside

                  This episode was inspired by my going to a Michael Schenker concert. Who is Michael Shenker? Well, unless you are a guitar player of 30 you've probably never heard the name. To give you something to frame this in you probably have heard of Metallica (one of the most popular Heavy Metal bands of all time) their guitar player went 100% "Fanboy" upon meeting him and pulled strings (no pun intended) to play with him (see video).  

                  Michael is touring under the name Michael Schenker Fest. Why? Because he is touring with four different singers. To all of you nonmusicians, there is a disease in music called LSD. It stands for Lead Singers Disease. As I look back at my 30 years of playing in (I started when I was 15) I can say the best singers also has the largest egos. Not sure if those are connected, but that's what I saw. The singers are Gary Barden (age 62), Graham Bonnet (age 70) Robin MCauley (age 65) Doogie White (age 50). Michael himself is 63 years old (so maybe some wisdom has come with the age). 

                  Gary Barden was on the first three Michael Schenker albums and as you age (if you haven't taken care of yourself the best you can) you just can't reach some of those high notes. On one song (Attack of the Max Axe Man for those of you keep track at home) I didn't think Gary sounded great when he was young, and now has no hope of hitting these notes. I about fell over as they did this song as Robin came out to sing the high parts as Gary sang a lower harmony. When you can't get Eddie Van Halen and Sammy Hagar in the same room, this is like seeing a unicorn on stage. Later all four singers would assume different roles as they all ended up singing backup singer to each other. I'm not sure how I can express how rare this is. It would be like Donald Trump giving Hilary Clinton a compliment. 

                  So by leaving their egos at the door, I got to see a one of a kind show. It was amazing (seeing Graham Bonnet at age 70 gives me hope in my 50's). They didn't let their egos get the best of them, and in return are probably making more money than they would if they stayed separate. In an even more mind-boggling twist, they even recorded some songs together on his latest record. This is like seeing a mermaid ride a unicorn into the land of Oz. 

                  The Dick, the Doll, and the Dork

                  In morning radio, there's a philosophy called the Dick, the Doll in the Dork. It's a three-person morning show and everybody has their role. So the Dork is typically the main leader of the show. The dork is the affable one who is a little bit quirky and he's the guy everybody loves and he's the AW shucks guy. And then there's the Dick, he's just the jackass who says stuff he shouldn't be saying. He rubs people a little bit the wrong way. You want to like him, but he's just a little irritating. And the Dork usually says, "oh, don't say that," and kind of puts him in his place. Those two roles kind of bounce off each other. They're the opposites. And then the doll, she's usually the brains of the organization.

                  The Doll is the smart one that comes in and kind of puts everybody in their place. And she's the voice of reason. So everybody kind of has their lane. So if we're talking about, oh, we got this letter today from a listener named Kim. And she found another woman's number into her man's cell phone and she wants to know what she should do about it. And the dick is going to go, "What's the big deal? You know, it's just another chick." The Dorks is going to go, "No, you know what you need to hold on a second. You don't know what it's all about." He's going to be kind of in the middle. The doll is going to say, "Kick that guy to the curb. There's plenty more fish out there, right?" 

                  So that sort of triangle and everybody has their role. You have to know your role and you have to stay in your role because that's what people expect of you. If they change their roles it messes with their chemistry. If the Dork starts saying everything the Dick does, well then we have one too many people sharing that opinion and someone is not needed. 

                  Doogie White Won't Stay In His Lane

                  This was evident in my concert. When Doogie White came out to sing he was annoying. The event is called MICHAEL SHENKER FEST, and it's MICHAEL'S picture on the backdrop. Yes everytime Michel went to play a guitar solo Doogie decided it was time for him to get the audience to clap along, or try to get them to sing "HEY, HEY, HEY" together. Meanwhile, ALL EYES are on Michael, and his vocals were walking over the guitar solo that everyone came to hear. Doogie kept getting out of his lane and messing up the chemistry and the experience.

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Erik K Johnson - Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show - Get Your Podcast Reviewed

                  7 Habits of Highly Effective People

                  Want More Podcasting Insights?

                  Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/more and become an awesome Patron.

                  I Would Love to Help You

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>Comments? 888-563-3228
                  Question of the Month

                  As I record this it is April 1. The first quarter of 2018 is over. What had you planned on doing in that first quarter that didn't, and what are you going to do differently to make it happen in this quarter. You can leave your answer using the options on the contact page

                  I need your answer by April 26th.

                  Defining Ego: The Good Side of Ego

                  The Freudian definition of “ego” is simply, according to Wiktionary, “the most central part of the mind, which mediates with one’s surroundings.” So many people think that if you have an Ego, you're a narcissist. If you have an ego than you are conceited. You think you are better than others.  Ego literally means a person’s sense of self-esteem or self-worth. Doing anything new, like starting a podcast, or going against the norm, is directly proportional to how confident you are of yourselves and your abilities. As long as you are in control of your ego, it will work for you. But as soon as your ego starts controlling you, it will hurt you. When ego controls you, it can make the truth look false and the false look true.

                  How To Identify Negative Sides of Your Ego

                  When you are overwhelmed by your ego, you will say words you will regret, take actions you will repent later on, and hurt the people you love most. Your inflated ego can also make people lose trust and respect for you

                  There is a quote by Deepak Chopra to sum it up –

                  “If you want to reach a state of bliss, then go beyond your ego and the internal dialogue. Make a decision to relinquish the need to control, the need to be approved, and the need to judge. Those are the three things the ego is doing all the time. It’s very important to be aware of them every time they come up.”

                  If you find yourself defending yourself, this may be due to a couple of reasons. You may actually be right (and you're trying to educate someone about your point of view) or your wrong and you are defending yourself as you are afraid of the ramifications if it is found out you are wrong.

                  There is the old saying, you can be right or you can be married. I found this to be true. My ex-wife (note the ex) here are and I would battle for days because one wouldn't drop it, and the other wouldn't admit when they were wrong. The opposite of defensiveness is openness, and that means being open to new ideas. When you're not willing to even ponder another point of view, you may want to check yourself.

                  If you do a solo show, you may want to take all of the adulations but that's just not true. Case in point, I record, edit, and post this show. I am the producer, host, editor, web designer, graphic designer. I do this show by myself. That appears true (it is), but I get feedback in the form of emails, speakpipe messages, Facebook likes, etc that help me steer this podcast in a direction that allows it to connect DEEPER with the people who find it. Thanks to my audience who when they hear someone talking podcasting say, "You need to listen to the School of Podcasting, " or "You need to join the School of Podcasting." I would be a fool to say the success of this show is 100% because of me.

                  What Can Happen When You Put Your Ego Aside

                  This episode was inspired by my going to a Michael Schenker concert. Who is Michael Shenker? Well, unless you are a guitar player of 30 you've probably never heard the name. To give you something to frame this in you probably have heard of Metallica (one of the most popular Heavy Metal bands of all time) their guitar player went 100% "Fanboy" upon meeting him and pulled strings (no pun intended) to play with him (see video).  

                  Michael is touring under the name Michael Schenker Fest. Why? Because he is touring with four different singers. To all of you nonmusicians, there is a disease in music called LSD. It stands for Lead Singers Disease. As I look back at my 30 years of playing in (I started when I was 15) I can say the best singers also has the largest egos. Not sure if those are connected, but that's what I saw. The singers are Gary Barden (age 62), Graham Bonnet (age 70) Robin MCauley (age 65) Doogie White (age 50). Michael himself is 63 years old (so maybe some wisdom has come with the age). 

                  Gary Barden was on the first three Michael Schenker albums and as you age (if you haven't taken care of yourself the best you can) you just can't reach some of those high notes. On one song (Attack of the Max Axe Man for those of you keep track at home) I didn't think Gary sounded great when he was young, and now has no hope of hitting these notes. I about fell over as they did this song as Robin came out to sing the high parts as Gary sang a lower harmony. When you can't get Eddie Van Halen and Sammy Hagar in the same room, this is like seeing a unicorn on stage. Later all four singers would assume different roles as they all ended up singing backup singer to each other. I'm not sure how I can express how rare this is. It would be like Donald Trump giving Hilary Clinton a compliment. 

                  So by leaving their egos at the door, I got to see a one of a kind show. It was amazing (seeing Graham Bonnet at age 70 gives me hope in my 50's). They didn't let their egos get the best of them, and in return are probably making more money than they would if they stayed separate. In an even more mind-boggling twist, they even recorded some songs together on his latest record. This is like seeing a mermaid ride a unicorn into the land of Oz. 

                  The Dick, the Doll, and the Dork

                  In morning radio, there's a philosophy called the Dick, the Doll in the Dork. It's a three-person morning show and everybody has their role. So the Dork is typically the main leader of the show. The dork is the affable one who is a little bit quirky and he's the guy everybody loves and he's the AW shucks guy. And then there's the Dick, he's just the jackass who says stuff he shouldn't be saying. He rubs people a little bit the wrong way. You want to like him, but he's just a little irritating. And the Dork usually says, "oh, don't say that," and kind of puts him in his place. Those two roles kind of bounce off each other. They're the opposites. And then the doll, she's usually the brains of the organization.

                  The Doll is the smart one that comes in and kind of puts everybody in their place. And she's the voice of reason. So everybody kind of has their lane. So if we're talking about, oh, we got this letter today from a listener named Kim. And she found another woman's number into her man's cell phone and she wants to know what she should do about it. And the dick is going to go, "What's the big deal? You know, it's just another chick." The Dorks is going to go, "No, you know what you need to hold on a second. You don't know what it's all about." He's going to be kind of in the middle. The doll is going to say, "Kick that guy to the curb. There's plenty more fish out there, right?" 

                  So that sort of triangle and everybody has their role. You have to know your role and you have to stay in your role because that's what people expect of you. If they change their roles it messes with their chemistry. If the Dork starts saying everything the Dick does, well then we have one too many people sharing that opinion and someone is not needed. 

                  Doogie White Won't Stay In His Lane

                  This was evident in my concert. When Doogie White came out to sing he was annoying. The event is called MICHAEL SHENKER FEST, and it's MICHAEL'S picture on the backdrop. Yes everytime Michel went to play a guitar solo Doogie decided it was time for him to get the audience to clap along, or try to get them to sing "HEY, HEY, HEY" together. Meanwhile, ALL EYES are on Michael, and his vocals were walking over the guitar solo that everyone came to hear. Doogie kept getting out of his lane and messing up the chemistry and the experience.

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Erik K Johnson - Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show - Get Your Podcast Reviewed

                  7 Habits of Highly Effective People

                  Want More Podcasting Insights?

                  Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/more and become an awesome Patron.

                  I Would Love to Help You

                  See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/workwithme

                  ]]>374fc3c0818548a2118ff423ef482213Mon, 02 Apr 2018 04:00:00 -040040:51falsefull612612The Best Sounding Audio For Your BudgetComments? 888-563-3228

                  Today we talk about file formats. We also talk about getting good skype recordings.

                  Becuase Of My Podcast: Jim Harold

                  1:15  Jim Harold has been on one of the top syndicated radio shows (Coast to Coast AM) in America 8 times. This show is syndicated to over 600 radio stations. Check out Jim's shows at www.jimarold.com he's THE GUY for paranormal podcasting (listen with the lights on) check out his podcasts and books at www.jimharlold.com

                  Understanding Audio Formats

                  What is stereo? What is Mono. What is kbps mean? What bitrate should I use? Here are some things to know

                  To figure out how much space you need, you need to know:

                  1. How often you will publish 2. How long your shows will be 3. What format

                  The formats have some general numbers you can use. For example:

                  If you publish at 128 kbps stereo, your file will take up (roughly) 1M minute If you publish at 64 kbps mono, your file will take up (roughly) .5 M a minute (and sound the "same" but won't have stereo separation).

                  So if you do a weekly show that is 30 minutes long that is 30 minutes multiplied by four weeks. So monthly you create 120 minutes of content.

                  At 128 kbps Stereo, you would need 120 Megabytes per month. If you went 64 kbps mono you would need 64 megabytes per month (roughly on all of these estimates).

                  In today's show, we listen to files encoded both ways as well as mp3 files encoded using the LAME encoder and the Fraunhofer and see if there truly is a difference?

                  Need a Media Host? Check out Libsyn.com and get a free month using the coupon code sopfree

                  Don't Buy a Bette Skype Recorder - Upgrade Your Internet

                  Thanks to Tory from www.theblacklistexposed.com and www.packersfanpodcast.com

                  Skype Requirements

                  Your processor (on a PC) needs to be at least 1 Ghz with 512 MB (so double both of those at least) See More

                  Your process on a Mac needs to be at least 1 Ghz (core 2 duo) and at least 1 GB of Ram

                  How much Bandwidth does Skype need?

                   

                  I currently use Spectrum and I have 162 Mbps down, and 23.78 Mbps Up. I rarely have a serious skype issue. It' is typically myself and one other person, but I have been on chats with five people and no issues.

                  What About Squadcast.fm, Zencastr.com, and all the other options?

                  While it's true these devices record local, so if there is a weird audio glitch, in theory, they don't record the glitch. Something

                  Zencastr states you need at least 1.5 Down, but recommend 5 mbps see more

                  For the record, I've use Zencasr and Squadcast and never had an issue with either. I've also used Ringr which is a cool app for your phone

                  Free Tips For Making Your Guests Sound Good On Skype

                  This comes from Kim from www.toastmasters101.net who explains if someone is going to use their built-in microphone on a laptop, she will have them download skype to their phone and use it over wi-fi. I like this idea, and here is a twist to make it easier. All it takes to create a free Skype account is an email address. You can create a free Gmail account, sign up at skype.com and make a second account. You provide the login and password to your guest, now they don't have to create a skype account. You don't have to ask for their skype ID (as it's yours). Afte the conversation have your guest

                  I Need to Move if I Want Free TV

                  I tried using a digital over the air antenna to receive free channels. I've tried three different versions of these. Most of them you sparking pictures of TV stations that are involved with shopping and/or Jesus. Couldn't I get NBC? Why because I live in Akron (about 50-60 miles from the nearest NBC signal). So any solution that starts with, "get an HDTV Antanea isn't going to work because of where I live. So Skype may not work for you because you Internet blows. Swapping to a new system (much like switch antennas for me) didn't help.

                  Michael Delaney from Baby Mountain Radio (Care Giving for Dementia)  let me know about Silicon Dust about the HD Home Run ($66) but it requires an  HDTV Antanea and then allows you to stream that signal to any device. It's cool, and inexpensive (you can have a DVR for something like $35/year) at least from what I've seen I still need an HDTV Antanea. Stargate Pioneer told me about Tablo DUAL OTA DVR for Cord Cutters - 64 GB with WiFi - For use with HDTV Antennas that again requires an HDTV Antanea (they do make Outdoor HDTV Antenna), but living in an apartment, I didn't want to go there)

                  How I Saved MySelf $44 and Got Faster Internet

                  Want to see a popular topic? Start talking about cutting off your cable television, or "cord cutting." Oofah! I just mentioned it on a live podcast that hasn't been released and I got two replies (with really good information.

                  I was spending at one point over $200 on cable but got it down to around $176, but I don't watch a ton of TV. So I contacted my Cable Company (Formerly Time Warner Cable - Now Spectrum) and found out that while I was on TWC fastest internet there was faster Cable available. So I downgraded my cable to $109 which now includes a much faster Internet. But I lose the ability to record anything (and you know us podcasters we love to time shift). After some comparisons of YouTube Live, Sling, and Hulu, I went with Hulu with the Live TV streaming for $44. So my now faster cable and channels is $153. This week I'm going to shut off my basic channels (and cut the cable tv completely) which should make my total expense $133. So I went from $176 to $133. I come down and ask Alexa to play Hulu which fires up my TV and tunes it to Hulu.

                  This is going to be a fun space to watch as different companies (Googe is now rolling out YouTube Live).

                  ]]>Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today we talk about file formats. We also talk about getting good skype recordings.

                  Becuase Of My Podcast: Jim Harold

                  1:15  Jim Harold has been on one of the top syndicated radio shows (Coast to Coast AM) in America 8 times. This show is syndicated to over 600 radio stations. Check out Jim's shows at www.jimarold.com he's THE GUY for paranormal podcasting (listen with the lights on) check out his podcasts and books at www.jimharlold.com

                  Understanding Audio Formats

                  What is stereo? What is Mono. What is kbps mean? What bitrate should I use? Here are some things to know

                  To figure out how much space you need, you need to know:

                  1. How often you will publish 2. How long your shows will be 3. What format

                  The formats have some general numbers you can use. For example:

                  If you publish at 128 kbps stereo, your file will take up (roughly) 1M minute If you publish at 64 kbps mono, your file will take up (roughly) .5 M a minute (and sound the "same" but won't have stereo separation).

                  So if you do a weekly show that is 30 minutes long that is 30 minutes multiplied by four weeks. So monthly you create 120 minutes of content.

                  At 128 kbps Stereo, you would need 120 Megabytes per month. If you went 64 kbps mono you would need 64 megabytes per month (roughly on all of these estimates).

                  In today's show, we listen to files encoded both ways as well as mp3 files encoded using the LAME encoder and the Fraunhofer and see if there truly is a difference?

                  Need a Media Host? Check out Libsyn.com and get a free month using the coupon code sopfree

                  Don't Buy a Bette Skype Recorder - Upgrade Your Internet

                  Thanks to Tory from www.theblacklistexposed.com and www.packersfanpodcast.com

                  Skype Requirements

                  Your processor (on a PC) needs to be at least 1 Ghz with 512 MB (so double both of those at least) See More

                  Your process on a Mac needs to be at least 1 Ghz (core 2 duo) and at least 1 GB of Ram

                  How much Bandwidth does Skype need?

                   

                  I currently use Spectrum and I have 162 Mbps down, and 23.78 Mbps Up. I rarely have a serious skype issue. It' is typically myself and one other person, but I have been on chats with five people and no issues.

                  What About Squadcast.fm, Zencastr.com, and all the other options?

                  While it's true these devices record local, so if there is a weird audio glitch, in theory, they don't record the glitch. Something

                  Zencastr states you need at least 1.5 Down, but recommend 5 mbps see more

                  For the record, I've use Zencasr and Squadcast and never had an issue with either. I've also used Ringr which is a cool app for your phone

                  Free Tips For Making Your Guests Sound Good On Skype

                  This comes from Kim from www.toastmasters101.net who explains if someone is going to use their built-in microphone on a laptop, she will have them download skype to their phone and use it over wi-fi. I like this idea, and here is a twist to make it easier. All it takes to create a free Skype account is an email address. You can create a free Gmail account, sign up at skype.com and make a second account. You provide the login and password to your guest, now they don't have to create a skype account. You don't have to ask for their skype ID (as it's yours). Afte the conversation have your guest

                  I Need to Move if I Want Free TV

                  I tried using a digital over the air antenna to receive free channels. I've tried three different versions of these. Most of them you sparking pictures of TV stations that are involved with shopping and/or Jesus. Couldn't I get NBC? Why because I live in Akron (about 50-60 miles from the nearest NBC signal). So any solution that starts with, "get an HDTV Antanea isn't going to work because of where I live. So Skype may not work for you because you Internet blows. Swapping to a new system (much like switch antennas for me) didn't help.

                  Michael Delaney from Baby Mountain Radio (Care Giving for Dementia)  let me know about Silicon Dust about the HD Home Run ($66) but it requires an  HDTV Antanea and then allows you to stream that signal to any device. It's cool, and inexpensive (you can have a DVR for something like $35/year) at least from what I've seen I still need an HDTV Antanea. Stargate Pioneer told me about Tablo DUAL OTA DVR for Cord Cutters - 64 GB with WiFi - For use with HDTV Antennas that again requires an HDTV Antanea (they do make Outdoor HDTV Antenna), but living in an apartment, I didn't want to go there)

                  How I Saved MySelf $44 and Got Faster Internet

                  Want to see a popular topic? Start talking about cutting off your cable television, or "cord cutting." Oofah! I just mentioned it on a live podcast that hasn't been released and I got two replies (with really good information.

                  I was spending at one point over $200 on cable but got it down to around $176, but I don't watch a ton of TV. So I contacted my Cable Company (Formerly Time Warner Cable - Now Spectrum) and found out that while I was on TWC fastest internet there was faster Cable available. So I downgraded my cable to $109 which now includes a much faster Internet. But I lose the ability to record anything (and you know us podcasters we love to time shift). After some comparisons of YouTube Live, Sling, and Hulu, I went with Hulu with the Live TV streaming for $44. So my now faster cable and channels is $153. This week I'm going to shut off my basic channels (and cut the cable tv completely) which should make my total expense $133. So I went from $176 to $133. I come down and ask Alexa to play Hulu which fires up my TV and tunes it to Hulu.

                  This is going to be a fun space to watch as different companies (Googe is now rolling out YouTube Live).

                  ]]>ae67844346799220b0482a4dc94c90aaMon, 26 Mar 2018 05:00:21 -040051:02falsefull611611Strategies For Creating a T-Shirt That SellsGot Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today we have insights from Diana McCallum from the Talk From Super Heroes show, Lou Mongello from WDW Radio and Gordo from Those Conspiracy Guys on how they are designing T-Shirts that actually sell. Neil then shares some insights into what he's doing to create a show that allows him to do podcasting full time, and how insights into his Patreon Account.

                  Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast has a "Just a Podcaster" T-shirt on Amazon

                  Marc from the Resourceful Designer podcast has quite a few cool shirts for sale on Amazon

                  I created a store and a t-shirt in about 10 minutes at https://www.teepublic.com/stores/podcast-clothes

                  You can hire a designer at the site

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Access and Exclusivity: The Power of Patreon

                  Neil Rochford explains how he is working with his audience using Patreon to go deeper with his Super Fans. This includes:

                  Live video chats

                  Extra content

                  Early content

                  Behind the scenes "What is happening in my life" content.

                  Patreon has the ability to have an RSS feed for each person (so if they leave they lose access)

                  Butt Stuff

                  Neil is working on a trip to the US via a Crowdfunding Goal

                  He wants to come to the US to interview the people instead of using Google.

                  The goal is to film the trip and turn the trip into a dozen documentary type segments

                  See https://www.gofundme.com/tcgtv

                  Where I'm Heading

                  I'll be at Podfecta in Nashville on April 20th

                  Nashville Craft Content Event on April 21st

                  Ready To Start Podcasting?

                  Work with me, I have multiple options to support many budgets

                   

                  ]]>Got Comments? 888-563-3228

                  Today we have insights from Diana McCallum from the Talk From Super Heroes show, Lou Mongello from WDW Radio and Gordo from Those Conspiracy Guys on how they are designing T-Shirts that actually sell. Neil then shares some insights into what he's doing to create a show that allows him to do podcasting full time, and how insights into his Patreon Account.

                  Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast has a "Just a Podcaster" T-shirt on Amazon

                  Marc from the Resourceful Designer podcast has quite a few cool shirts for sale on Amazon

                  I created a store and a t-shirt in about 10 minutes at https://www.teepublic.com/stores/podcast-clothes

                  You can hire a designer at the site

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Access and Exclusivity: The Power of Patreon

                  Neil Rochford explains how he is working with his audience using Patreon to go deeper with his Super Fans. This includes:

                  Live video chats

                  Extra content

                  Early content

                  Behind the scenes "What is happening in my life" content.

                  Patreon has the ability to have an RSS feed for each person (so if they leave they lose access)

                  Butt Stuff

                  Neil is working on a trip to the US via a Crowdfunding Goal

                  He wants to come to the US to interview the people instead of using Google.

                  The goal is to film the trip and turn the trip into a dozen documentary type segments

                  See https://www.gofundme.com/tcgtv

                  Where I'm Heading

                  I'll be at Podfecta in Nashville on April 20th

                  Nashville Craft Content Event on April 21st

                  Ready To Start Podcasting?

                  Work with me, I have multiple options to support many budgets

                   

                  ]]>53c7b5990d6998f071ed1be5fcf582e5Mon, 19 Mar 2018 04:00:00 -040048:10falsefull610610Podcast Icing To Bring Your Audience Back888-563-3228
                  Social Media Marketing World Reflections

                  Looking back on social media marketing world, I wanted to share my thoughts as this was the first time I was there and there are some things we can learn from this mammoth event.

                  The first impression was WOA. I walked in and got my badge and as they started to hand me a swag bag (you know the thing you throw on your bed, leaf through once and then ditch) and they asked what gift I would like. One was a cool cable organizer, and the other was a battery backup pack to charge my phone or tablet. This wasn't a cheap bottom of the food chain device. For me, this was awesome as I was going to buy one at Best Buy before leaving and ran out of time. To me, this shows they know their audience. Either gift was valuable.

                  Becuase Of My Podcast

                  Becuase of my podcast, I know Paul Colligan, and Paul Colligan knows JJ Virgin who is now coming on my weight loss show (and I got to sample some cool stuff)

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Look at All The Icing

                  At first glance, one might say that the major draw of SMMW is icing. For example, the opening night you have a networking event on an aircraft carrier. This is not something I had ever done. It made the event unique. Now, you might say, but in the end, you still have a bunch of people talking, drinking, and networking.  I see that point of view, but every corner had a sense of adventure. I toured the top of the ship with Ray Ortega and Lou Mongello. If this had been in a restaurant back room, I was still hanging out with Ray and Lou. If I was doing this at another conference, it would be an event. I great event, but throw in that we are talking to a veteran about planes and now this is not only an event - it's an experience. It is a stronger memory than hanging out in the hotel bar.

                  The second networking event was at a club that had a live band playing Karaoke. It was very loud, but I was walking in with somewhat of a "What am I walking into? experience." I was with Ray so we ventured further into the club and found ourselves on what looked like an outdoor patio except we were inside. This again brought on kind of a "What is this place?" feeling. We then walked through a hallway of white Chrismas lights into a room with booths lit up with neon green. We picked up some awesome cake in a cup and enjoyed our sugar rush. We walked over to one station where they were making some sort of dessert that was part ice cream cone meets cinnamon roll, meets strawberries and chocolate, meets, WHAT THE HECK IS THAT THING. You could even walk into the giant vault. Did we need an exotic building? No, but did it add to the experience? Sure, as now Ray and I felt like we were in a live dungeons and dragons game waiting to see what the next room would bring.

                  Their networking room was categorized by subject. There were three tables for podcasters, more tables for YouTubers, etc. It made it very easy to meet your tribe, and then introduce yourself to a new one. The one that was really above an beyond, I was in the speaker's room (a lovely quiet place to go with refreshments and snacks). When the crew I was sitting with mentioned walking over to the place where you could pick up your lunch, a staff member took our order and brought it over to us. This wasn't necessary, but as this was day two anyone had put a few miles in their shoes and this was a super nice touch.

                  Don't Write Off Icing - It's Important.

                  According to Betty Crocker's Website, 2 tablespoons of chocolate icing is 130 calories and 95 grams ug sugar. According to the Fat Secret website, a cupcake without icing has 105 calories. With this in mind, 55% of the calories come from the icing, but I'm pretty sure the part of the cupcake that gets people drolling is 100% the icing. This got me thinking about the phrase, "Icing on the cake" and I did some googling as to items that draw people's attention. Here is what I found.

                  • Physical need. When we’re hungry and we see food, we pay attention. We wake up in the night when we need to go to the bathroom.
                  • Self-made choice. We decided to buy a new BMW 325 and suddenly see them everywhere. This effect is also called priming.
                  • Your name. We notice the name dearest to us.
                  • Emotion. If something evokes an emotion in us, they have our attention. Ask anyone about the show this is us.
                  • Contrast. We pay more attention to things that are in contrast to other things.
                  • Novelty. The brain pays more attention to things in the environment that are new to a person’s experience. (see)
                  
                  
                  • Another website stated:
                  • 3) You can't understand it: Do you remember the last time you were searching for some information online? Do you remember when you stopped? Most probably you stopped when you got your answers. The things that we don't understand quickly grab our attention and force us to think about them even more.
                  • 4) Because you want to run away: Sometimes things catch our attention because we want to run away from the current moment. Nostalgia is a great example where something pleasant that happened from the past quickly grabs our attention and forces us to indulge in thoughts about the beautiful past
                  • 5) Because it's cute: You might wonder what does cuteness have to do with attention-grabbing but in fact, studies have shown that we are wired to get distracted by cute little things. Whether it's a small cat or a beautiful baby the algorithm in our brains gets us hooked quickly when we encounter cuteness (See also 7 psychological reasons cats are so popular on the internet)
                  
                  A Cupcake Without Icing is a Muffin

                  Although cupcakes and muffins are strikingly similar in appearance, the taste and texture of the two are quite different. Cupcakes are a small, individual cake. They are lighter, cake-like and sweeter. Muffins are defined as a quick bread, usually denser. Another difference between cupcakes and muffins is that cupcakes are almost always topped with frosting and muffins are not.

                  What Kind of Icing Can Podcasters Provide to Their Show? Keep them Informed

                  One of the things at SMMW is I never wondered what was going on. They had an app for your phone and an army of volunteers. I knew when buses were leaving and coming back. I knew where to go, etc. I listen toa lott of podcasts and many of them are like a bus. My friend Erik K Johnson from podcast talent coach says it's like getting on a bus with no name on the front. You have no idea where it's going (so you probably wouldn't get on), and if it took off with you on it you might be a little nervous. At SMMW I felt taken care of. When Emily Prokop of the Story Behind to a Hiatus to have a baby, it was well planned out, and here audience was aware of what was happening. She has some shows in the can to carry us over, and we knew there would be a small break.

                  Get Your Audience Involved

                  I know you are probably saying, "I would love to get my audience involved but I haven't got a single bit of feedback." End your show with a question, and ask them to respond. MAKE SURE you have an EASY way to leave feedback. Did you know that in some apps if you put your voicemail number (say from www.podcastvoicemail.com ) your audience can often click it and it will dial your number? If you do get feedback, RESPOND. If possible play it on the show. For the person that hear's their name on a show, it is a mountain of icing. I was listening to Podcast Junkies with Harry Durran and they ended up saying my name three times before the show was over. Did you notice I counted? Do you know why? Icing. Did you notice what else happened? I just mentioned his show.

                  How is the Subscription Experience?

                  Contrary to popular belief, rating and reviews are great social proof, but don't do much for really building your show or boosting you up the rankings of Apple. The muffin, in this case, is "Find me in Apple Podcasts." The icing is having an EASY TO FIND subscribe page with step by step instructions on how to subscribe or do it live on Facebook and embed the video....]]>888-563-3228

                  Social Media Marketing World Reflections

                  Looking back on social media marketing world, I wanted to share my thoughts as this was the first time I was there and there are some things we can learn from this mammoth event.

                  The first impression was WOA. I walked in and got my badge and as they started to hand me a swag bag (you know the thing you throw on your bed, leaf through once and then ditch) and they asked what gift I would like. One was a cool cable organizer, and the other was a battery backup pack to charge my phone or tablet. This wasn't a cheap bottom of the food chain device. For me, this was awesome as I was going to buy one at Best Buy before leaving and ran out of time. To me, this shows they know their audience. Either gift was valuable.

                  Becuase Of My Podcast

                  Becuase of my podcast, I know Paul Colligan, and Paul Colligan knows JJ Virgin who is now coming on my weight loss show (and I got to sample some cool stuff)

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Look at All The Icing

                  At first glance, one might say that the major draw of SMMW is icing. For example, the opening night you have a networking event on an aircraft carrier. This is not something I had ever done. It made the event unique. Now, you might say, but in the end, you still have a bunch of people talking, drinking, and networking.  I see that point of view, but every corner had a sense of adventure. I toured the top of the ship with Ray Ortega and Lou Mongello. If this had been in a restaurant back room, I was still hanging out with Ray and Lou. If I was doing this at another conference, it would be an event. I great event, but throw in that we are talking to a veteran about planes and now this is not only an event - it's an experience. It is a stronger memory than hanging out in the hotel bar.

                  The second networking event was at a club that had a live band playing Karaoke. It was very loud, but I was walking in with somewhat of a "What am I walking into? experience." I was with Ray so we ventured further into the club and found ourselves on what looked like an outdoor patio except we were inside. This again brought on kind of a "What is this place?" feeling. We then walked through a hallway of white Chrismas lights into a room with booths lit up with neon green. We picked up some awesome cake in a cup and enjoyed our sugar rush. We walked over to one station where they were making some sort of dessert that was part ice cream cone meets cinnamon roll, meets strawberries and chocolate, meets, WHAT THE HECK IS THAT THING. You could even walk into the giant vault. Did we need an exotic building? No, but did it add to the experience? Sure, as now Ray and I felt like we were in a live dungeons and dragons game waiting to see what the next room would bring.

                  Their networking room was categorized by subject. There were three tables for podcasters, more tables for YouTubers, etc. It made it very easy to meet your tribe, and then introduce yourself to a new one. The one that was really above an beyond, I was in the speaker's room (a lovely quiet place to go with refreshments and snacks). When the crew I was sitting with mentioned walking over to the place where you could pick up your lunch, a staff member took our order and brought it over to us. This wasn't necessary, but as this was day two anyone had put a few miles in their shoes and this was a super nice touch.

                  Don't Write Off Icing - It's Important.

                  According to Betty Crocker's Website, 2 tablespoons of chocolate icing is 130 calories and 95 grams ug sugar. According to the Fat Secret website, a cupcake without icing has 105 calories. With this in mind, 55% of the calories come from the icing, but I'm pretty sure the part of the cupcake that gets people drolling is 100% the icing. This got me thinking about the phrase, "Icing on the cake" and I did some googling as to items that draw people's attention. Here is what I found.

                  • Physical need. When we’re hungry and we see food, we pay attention. We wake up in the night when we need to go to the bathroom.
                  • Self-made choice. We decided to buy a new BMW 325 and suddenly see them everywhere. This effect is also called priming.
                  • Your name. We notice the name dearest to us.
                  • Emotion. If something evokes an emotion in us, they have our attention. Ask anyone about the show this is us.
                  • Contrast. We pay more attention to things that are in contrast to other things.
                  • Novelty. The brain pays more attention to things in the environment that are new to a person’s experience. (see)
                  
                  
                  • Another website stated:
                  • 3) You can't understand it: Do you remember the last time you were searching for some information online? Do you remember when you stopped? Most probably you stopped when you got your answers. The things that we don't understand quickly grab our attention and force us to think about them even more.
                  • 4) Because you want to run away: Sometimes things catch our attention because we want to run away from the current moment. Nostalgia is a great example where something pleasant that happened from the past quickly grabs our attention and forces us to indulge in thoughts about the beautiful past
                  • 5) Because it's cute: You might wonder what does cuteness have to do with attention-grabbing but in fact, studies have shown that we are wired to get distracted by cute little things. Whether it's a small cat or a beautiful baby the algorithm in our brains gets us hooked quickly when we encounter cuteness (See also 7 psychological reasons cats are so popular on the internet)
                  
                  A Cupcake Without Icing is a Muffin

                  Although cupcakes and muffins are strikingly similar in appearance, the taste and texture of the two are quite different. Cupcakes are a small, individual cake. They are lighter, cake-like and sweeter. Muffins are defined as a quick bread, usually denser. Another difference between cupcakes and muffins is that cupcakes are almost always topped with frosting and muffins are not.

                  What Kind of Icing Can Podcasters Provide to Their Show? Keep them Informed

                  One of the things at SMMW is I never wondered what was going on. They had an app for your phone and an army of volunteers. I knew when buses were leaving and coming back. I knew where to go, etc. I listen toa lott of podcasts and many of them are like a bus. My friend Erik K Johnson from podcast talent coach says it's like getting on a bus with no name on the front. You have no idea where it's going (so you probably wouldn't get on), and if it took off with you on it you might be a little nervous. At SMMW I felt taken care of. When Emily Prokop of the Story Behind to a Hiatus to have a baby, it was well planned out, and here audience was aware of what was happening. She has some shows in the can to carry us over, and we knew there would be a small break.

                  Get Your Audience Involved

                  I know you are probably saying, "I would love to get my audience involved but I haven't got a single bit of feedback." End your show with a question, and ask them to respond. MAKE SURE you have an EASY way to leave feedback. Did you know that in some apps if you put your voicemail number (say from www.podcastvoicemail.com ) your audience can often click it and it will dial your number? If you do get feedback, RESPOND. If possible play it on the show. For the person that hear's their name on a show, it is a mountain of icing. I was listening to Podcast Junkies with Harry Durran and they ended up saying my name three times before the show was over. Did you notice I counted? Do you know why? Icing. Did you notice what else happened? I just mentioned his show.

                  How is the Subscription Experience?

                  Contrary to popular belief, rating and reviews are great social proof, but don't do much for really building your show or boosting you up the rankings of Apple. The muffin, in this case, is "Find me in Apple Podcasts." The icing is having an EASY TO FIND subscribe page with step by step instructions on how to subscribe or do it live on Facebook and embed the video. Guide your audience by the hand.

                  Give Them What They Need

                  My gift from SMMW was something I needed. It was so cool, and it made a great first impression. How did this happen? This was their sixth year doing this conference. I have a few conversations with Michael Stelzner and he's no dummy. He doesn't rest on his reputation and tries to make each year better than the last. Keep in mind this means when you first start your podcast it may not be hitting a home run, but work with your audience and you can create a podcast they start telling their friends about.

                  Do What Other People Don't

                  Jordan Harbinger has a popular show. His interviews are great. Jordon does something that most people don't. Some call it, "the work." For example, if Jordan is interviewing an author, he may put the episode out of few weeks so he can read the author's book. What does this do? First, it is going to be OBVIOUS to the author that Jordan read the book. This will make Jordan stand out in a sea of podcasts hosts who want to do as little as possible in hopes that said author will share their show on twitter. This also leads to better questions and a better interview. Now put yourself in the author's shoes. Which podcast do you want to promote to your audience the one where the host read the book, or the other guy? Who has a better chance of building a relationship with that author? When the author has a new book out in a few years, which podcast is he going to want to appear on. Why? Icing.

                  Go One More Level Deeper

                  I sat in Jason Van Orden's session on how to grow your email list. Jason used a word that really hit home for me. The word resonates. You want your content to resonate with your audience. How do I know his talk resonated with me? Well, I'm telling you aren't I? Exactly. He said when it comes to your content you need to know the following

                  • Why does it matter to you
                  • Why does it matter to your audience?
                  • Why does it matter to the world?
                  
                  

                  When you know WHY it matters to your audience it shows you really know your audience.

                  Mentioned In Episode 609

                  Alive Inside Documentary Official Website

                  Jason Van Orden

                  Jordan Harbinger

                  Emily Prokop

                  Podcast Talent Coach

                  The Feed Libsyn Podcast

                  Podfecta Nashville Conference

                  Craft Content Nashville

                  Paul Colligan - the Podcast Report

                  Gary Leland

                  ]]>da009cab6a5e7aee88a3cfc5cb470dfcMon, 12 Mar 2018 04:00:00 -040046:46falsefull609609Tips on Choosing and Working with Co-HostsWe are joined by Glenn "The Geek" Hebert from the Horse Radio Network. Glenn has appeared on the show many times and always brings gold. Today he is sharing insights into choosing and working with co-hosts. He also talks about a new podcast he is working on and how he is getting to do TONS of free adventures for free - because of his podcast.
                  Because of His Podcast - He Went on a Cruise

                  Glenn was able to get enough of his audience to join him on a cruise. He thought it would be hard with everyone trying to talk to him, but they had a great time networking together. He used one of his guests to help others who had never gone on a cruise (and she got a free ticket). In addition to that free ticket, Glenn had two additional free tickets.

                  Glenn shares some tips on having a cruise with your audience.

                  5:00 Glenn also was also asked to do a presentation for media people

                  They Never Asked About His Downloads and He Got Free Hotels and Passes

                  7:50 Gleen is doing a new show called Finding Florida 

                  • 9:30 They asked for press passes and got a whole lot more.
                  • Tourist bureaus are arranging everything - he just needs to show up
                  • They use a Tascam DR-40 to record and use an app on their Android phone called hi-q recorder for his android phone
                  
                  Choosing and Working With Co-Hosts
                  • 15:30 Glenn had a co-host leave for a better job
                  • 17:45 You have to like each other
                  • Get someone better than you
                  • 23:40 Prepare, Prepare, Prepare
                  • But don't prepare too much
                  • 26:25 Compromise is not a dirty word
                  • 27:00 Don't be afraid to try new things
                  • 28:30 If you're not excited to work with them, it's time for them to go. The Wake-Up Test...
                  • 31:30 Glenn's most targeted audience is also his most profitable
                  
                  Why You Shouldn't Always Put a Ton of Emphasis on Stats

                  Danica Patrick did not finish (wreck?) in 16% of her races

                  She was in 191 races and won 0

                  She only lead any of her races .12 percent of the time

                  Best finish was 24th in 2016 Monster Energy NASCAR Cup Series

                  She has a strong fan base and has been voted the IndyCar Series Most Popular Driver from 2005 to 2010, and the NASCAR Nationwide Series Most Popular Driver in 2012

                  Patrick was voted the Favorite Female Athlete at the Kids Choice Award in 2008, 2012 and 2013.

                  One more thing....

                  #3 Top earning female athletes in 2017 coming in at 9.2 million

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Harry Durran Podcast Junkies

                  Michael O’Neal's Solopreneur hour

                  Natalie Jennings Photography

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  John Lee Dumas - eofire.com

                  Kare Erickson

                  Finding Florida 

                  Horse Radio Network

                   

                  ]]>We are joined by Glenn "The Geek" Hebert from the Horse Radio Network. Glenn has appeared on the show many times and always brings gold. Today he is sharing insights into choosing and working with co-hosts. He also talks about a new podcast he is working on and how he is getting to do TONS of free adventures for free - because of his podcast.
                  Because of His Podcast - He Went on a Cruise

                  Glenn was able to get enough of his audience to join him on a cruise. He thought it would be hard with everyone trying to talk to him, but they had a great time networking together. He used one of his guests to help others who had never gone on a cruise (and she got a free ticket). In addition to that free ticket, Glenn had two additional free tickets.

                  Glenn shares some tips on having a cruise with your audience.

                  5:00 Glenn also was also asked to do a presentation for media people

                  They Never Asked About His Downloads and He Got Free Hotels and Passes

                  7:50 Gleen is doing a new show called Finding Florida 

                  • 9:30 They asked for press passes and got a whole lot more.
                  • Tourist bureaus are arranging everything - he just needs to show up
                  • They use a Tascam DR-40 to record and use an app on their Android phone called hi-q recorder for his android phone
                  
                  Choosing and Working With Co-Hosts
                  • 15:30 Glenn had a co-host leave for a better job
                  • 17:45 You have to like each other
                  • Get someone better than you
                  • 23:40 Prepare, Prepare, Prepare
                  • But don't prepare too much
                  • 26:25 Compromise is not a dirty word
                  • 27:00 Don't be afraid to try new things
                  • 28:30 If you're not excited to work with them, it's time for them to go. The Wake-Up Test...
                  • 31:30 Glenn's most targeted audience is also his most profitable
                  
                  Why You Shouldn't Always Put a Ton of Emphasis on Stats

                  Danica Patrick did not finish (wreck?) in 16% of her races

                  She was in 191 races and won 0

                  She only lead any of her races .12 percent of the time

                  Best finish was 24th in 2016 Monster Energy NASCAR Cup Series

                  She has a strong fan base and has been voted the IndyCar Series Most Popular Driver from 2005 to 2010, and the NASCAR Nationwide Series Most Popular Driver in 2012

                  Patrick was voted the Favorite Female Athlete at the Kids Choice Award in 2008, 2012 and 2013.

                  One more thing....

                  #3 Top earning female athletes in 2017 coming in at 9.2 million

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Harry Durran Podcast Junkies

                  Michael O’Neal's Solopreneur hour

                  Natalie Jennings Photography

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  John Lee Dumas - eofire.com

                  Kare Erickson

                  Finding Florida 

                  Horse Radio Network

                   

                  ]]>1c5b8e869b0a4cf735cdcd3ae80582d5Mon, 05 Mar 2018 05:00:00 -040044:37falsefull608608Chris Grimmett and Steven Pappas Create a Safe Space for Their Community Got comments? Call them in at 888-563-3228
                  The School of Podcasting is Now Available as an Amazon Skill

                  Just ask Alexa "Enable School of Podcasting." I got this through Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month). To hear what you need to do to get your own Amazon Skill listen to this episode of the feed (go to this post - it starts at the 48:00 mark)

                  My Opinion On The New Anchor.fm

                  Yes they are adding more features

                  Yes, they still make it way too easy to add your show to Apple under their login and password (BOO+++!!!)

                  Their business model is not a business model. It's free 100% unlimited hosting.

                  There is a name for companies that use that business model: CLOSED - stay away using this for your "main" podcast.

                  See my full insights into this

                  Is This Adulting? My Interview with Chris and Steven

                  I love that this show is unlike any other show. they combine discussion on mental illness with comedy. I love that they put some time and effort into the show and both come to the microphones with ideas (and not just "turn on the microphone and wing it). Today we talk about:

                  • Their struggles with mental illness and why they started a podcast to debunk the stigma's
                  • What goes into an episode - combining  mental illness and comedy
                  • Why they call their listener base is "Best Friends"
                  • Who is Karen?
                  • How starting a podcast has affected their life
                  • How the podcast has affected their listener's lives.
                  • How their podcast enables them to see their progress
                  • Their podcast is saving lives
                  • How being vulnerable is powerful to the audience
                  • What are the biggest stigmas?
                  • Have they ever gone too far?
                  • Why Steve walked away from his job to do the podcast
                  • Who they use for merch (teepublic.com)
                  • Advice for new podcasters
                  • Dealing with Haters
                  
                  

                   

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                   Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                   

                  ]]>Got comments? Call them in at 888-563-3228
                  The School of Podcasting is Now Available as an Amazon Skill

                  Just ask Alexa "Enable School of Podcasting." I got this through Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month). To hear what you need to do to get your own Amazon Skill listen to this episode of the feed (go to this post - it starts at the 48:00 mark)

                  My Opinion On The New Anchor.fm

                  Yes they are adding more features

                  Yes, they still make it way too easy to add your show to Apple under their login and password (BOO+++!!!)

                  Their business model is not a business model. It's free 100% unlimited hosting.

                  There is a name for companies that use that business model: CLOSED - stay away using this for your "main" podcast.

                  See my full insights into this

                  Is This Adulting? My Interview with Chris and Steven

                  I love that this show is unlike any other show. they combine discussion on mental illness with comedy. I love that they put some time and effort into the show and both come to the microphones with ideas (and not just "turn on the microphone and wing it). Today we talk about:

                  • Their struggles with mental illness and why they started a podcast to debunk the stigma's
                  • What goes into an episode - combining  mental illness and comedy
                  • Why they call their listener base is "Best Friends"
                  • Who is Karen?
                  • How starting a podcast has affected their life
                  • How the podcast has affected their listener's lives.
                  • How their podcast enables them to see their progress
                  • Their podcast is saving lives
                  • How being vulnerable is powerful to the audience
                  • What are the biggest stigmas?
                  • Have they ever gone too far?
                  • Why Steve walked away from his job to do the podcast
                  • Who they use for merch (teepublic.com)
                  • Advice for new podcasters
                  • Dealing with Haters
                  
                  

                   

                  SPONSOR: Podcast Movement

                   Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's July 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                   

                  ]]>a1c711e0068de683f55f49dcb8537714Mon, 26 Feb 2018 05:00:00 -040051:08falsefull607607Should I Talk About My Personal Life?Do you have comments on this episode? Call them in and we will play them on the show (unless you specify not to).

                  Call 888-563-3228 (courtesy of podcastvoicemail.com )

                  Great Content To Consume

                  Capturing the ears and hearts of hundreds of thousands of monthly podcast listeners doesn't happen overnight. But once you know Danny Peña's story, you'll understand it was inevitable. Sunday, 2/25 is going to be an important day for the Gamertag Team. Gamertag Radio turns 13 years old AND Twitch is going to feature my first film on the front page for the world premiere. The first event of its kind on Twitch's front page. Watch it live and help them make history. http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio

                  If you listened to the podcast Startup, the first season was all About Alex Blumberg and quest to start a podcast company. That has now been made into a TV show on ABC called, "Alex Inc.  It stars Zach Braff who you might know from the scrubs TV show. He is also the executive producer. WEDNESDAY, MARCH 28th at 8:30|7:30c on ABC! Set you DVRs as hopefully, this will get more people asking, "What is this thing called podcasting?"

                  Podcasting Is Grooming People For the Big Time

                  In a recent article on mediapost, it stated that "Oxygen sourced Missing Maura Murray, the true crime podcast, for a six-episode television series, which featured the podcast’s hosts. In Britain, No Such Thing As A Fish, a fun talk-show podcast, was made into a BBC Television show. Lore, the podcast that explores frightening history folklore, became an Amazon original series, and Gimlet media’s Homecoming is also being developed into an Amazon TV show for Amazon. This trend isn’t just exclusive to television, says the report. Blink Publishing in the UK turned Untold: The Daniel Morgan Murder podcast into a book. Los Angeles talent management agencies are getting involved in podcasting, and are helping podcasters break into TV and publishing, says the report." I've already reported on Emily Prokop wh does the story behind podcast getting a book deal.

                  Quick Lesson on Apple Earbuds

                  I had an audio technica plugged into a Zoom H1 using a special cable and it sounded fine. To make a long story short, I ran it through auphonic.com which always seems to fix everything, but it still sounded bad. The issue? I was plugging my Apple earbuds into the laptop and Apple earbuds should not cause an issue, but either the laptop didn't like the earbuds or vice versa, but in my ears the audio was unreleasable. It turns out it was fine. The bottom line is you need to use the right tool for the job and monitor through a "regular" set of headphones.

                  Squadcast.fm - Recording Great Sounding Interviews

                  This is a tool that records you and your guest (up to three people total) and gives you a recording of each person that you can then stitch together in your software (which makes it easy to mute the dog barking on one track). It's $20/month for unlimited recording (it's BETA - brand new so use at your own risk). 

                  The interface is super simple, and it records in WAV Format (Sample rage 48 khz 32 bt). 

                  When someone joins your call they are prompted to pick their microphone to connect the service to the microphone they have plugged in, and then connect the system to their headphones. It's super simple. 

                  They have a calendar that you can choose to pick a time (although I was bummed I couldn't manually pick a time like 10:45, I only had 10:00 or 10:30). At first, I had a hard time to getting back into a previous session, but when you first login it prompts you to start a new session, and you can choose to go back to an older session from that screen (and then get access to the previous session)

                  Squadcast can dominate this area by doing one very simple thing: JUST WORK. Tools like tryca.st and zencastr.com have had some issues over time. Podcasters are not very forgiving, so all you have to do is make a system that we count on and it just works. 

                  This system is in beta, so you might need an extra amount of patience. I had zero problems with the small amount time I spent testing it. 

                  Check it out at www.squadcast.fm

                  Special Thanks to My Podcast Buddies

                  David Hooper from redpodcast.com and the new Podcast event in April in Nashville podfecta.com 

                  John is from Audio Editing Solutions

                  How Much Should I Share About My Personal Life?

                  I got an email from a listener who recently had a spouse die. He needs to take care of his child who has special needs. He can't go back to his old job working 50 hours a week. 

                  How do I turn it into a business so I can take care of my child?

                  When it comes to making money with a podcast you

                  1. Sell your stuff
                  2. Sell other people's stuff (affiliates)
                  3. Donations
                  4. Crowdfunding (Patreon)
                  5. Sponsors
                  
                  

                  The bad news is to build an audience that can truly support a full time takes years (typically, your mileage may very). 

                  "If I mention this on the show I'm afraid people will feel I am cashing in on my tragedy..." Your audience wants to help you as there is no spam in podcasting, and they know you and will know you are NOT trying to capitalize on your situation (there may be someone who feels you are, ignore that person, they know you, and probably have a negative disposition). 

                  Using Personal Stories

                  I like to use personal stories to make a point. It allows my audience to get to know me while making a point to help educate them on a point. 

                  It's Your Podcast - Not Your Family's

                  A person I met at Podfest is starting a show about sex. I told her she better check with her husband as if she talks about her own sex life, she is (I'm assuming) talking about her husband as well. Be careful with what you share as the Internet writes in ink. I've pulled some episodes in the past, but someone has those episodes. 

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Podcast Engineering School

                  Building a Better Dave - Grief is Like a Website

                  Is This Adulting

                  You Wanna Do What?

                  Audio Editing Solutions

                  redpodcast.com

                  podfecta.com 

                  ]]>Do you have comments on this episode? Call them in and we will play them on the show (unless you specify not to).

                  Call 888-563-3228 (courtesy of podcastvoicemail.com )

                  Great Content To Consume

                  Capturing the ears and hearts of hundreds of thousands of monthly podcast listeners doesn't happen overnight. But once you know Danny Peña's story, you'll understand it was inevitable. Sunday, 2/25 is going to be an important day for the Gamertag Team. Gamertag Radio turns 13 years old AND Twitch is going to feature my first film on the front page for the world premiere. The first event of its kind on Twitch's front page. Watch it live and help them make history. http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio

                  If you listened to the podcast Startup, the first season was all About Alex Blumberg and quest to start a podcast company. That has now been made into a TV show on ABC called, "Alex Inc.  It stars Zach Braff who you might know from the scrubs TV show. He is also the executive producer. WEDNESDAY, MARCH 28th at 8:30|7:30c on ABC! Set you DVRs as hopefully, this will get more people asking, "What is this thing called podcasting?"

                  Podcasting Is Grooming People For the Big Time

                  In a recent article on mediapost, it stated that "Oxygen sourced Missing Maura Murray, the true crime podcast, for a six-episode television series, which featured the podcast’s hosts. In Britain, No Such Thing As A Fish, a fun talk-show podcast, was made into a BBC Television show. Lore, the podcast that explores frightening history folklore, became an Amazon original series, and Gimlet media’s Homecoming is also being developed into an Amazon TV show for Amazon. This trend isn’t just exclusive to television, says the report. Blink Publishing in the UK turned Untold: The Daniel Morgan Murder podcast into a book. Los Angeles talent management agencies are getting involved in podcasting, and are helping podcasters break into TV and publishing, says the report." I've already reported on Emily Prokop wh does the story behind podcast getting a book deal.

                  Quick Lesson on Apple Earbuds

                  I had an audio technica plugged into a Zoom H1 using a special cable and it sounded fine. To make a long story short, I ran it through auphonic.com which always seems to fix everything, but it still sounded bad. The issue? I was plugging my Apple earbuds into the laptop and Apple earbuds should not cause an issue, but either the laptop didn't like the earbuds or vice versa, but in my ears the audio was unreleasable. It turns out it was fine. The bottom line is you need to use the right tool for the job and monitor through a "regular" set of headphones.

                  Squadcast.fm - Recording Great Sounding Interviews

                  This is a tool that records you and your guest (up to three people total) and gives you a recording of each person that you can then stitch together in your software (which makes it easy to mute the dog barking on one track). It's $20/month for unlimited recording (it's BETA - brand new so use at your own risk). 

                  The interface is super simple, and it records in WAV Format (Sample rage 48 khz 32 bt). 

                  When someone joins your call they are prompted to pick their microphone to connect the service to the microphone they have plugged in, and then connect the system to their headphones. It's super simple. 

                  They have a calendar that you can choose to pick a time (although I was bummed I couldn't manually pick a time like 10:45, I only had 10:00 or 10:30). At first, I had a hard time to getting back into a previous session, but when you first login it prompts you to start a new session, and you can choose to go back to an older session from that screen (and then get access to the previous session)

                  Squadcast can dominate this area by doing one very simple thing: JUST WORK. Tools like tryca.st and zencastr.com have had some issues over time. Podcasters are not very forgiving, so all you have to do is make a system that we count on and it just works. 

                  This system is in beta, so you might need an extra amount of patience. I had zero problems with the small amount time I spent testing it. 

                  Check it out at www.squadcast.fm

                  Special Thanks to My Podcast Buddies

                  David Hooper from redpodcast.com and the new Podcast event in April in Nashville podfecta.com 

                  John is from Audio Editing Solutions

                  How Much Should I Share About My Personal Life?

                  I got an email from a listener who recently had a spouse die. He needs to take care of his child who has special needs. He can't go back to his old job working 50 hours a week. 

                  How do I turn it into a business so I can take care of my child?

                  When it comes to making money with a podcast you

                  1. Sell your stuff
                  2. Sell other people's stuff (affiliates)
                  3. Donations
                  4. Crowdfunding (Patreon)
                  5. Sponsors
                  
                  

                  The bad news is to build an audience that can truly support a full time takes years (typically, your mileage may very). 

                  "If I mention this on the show I'm afraid people will feel I am cashing in on my tragedy..." Your audience wants to help you as there is no spam in podcasting, and they know you and will know you are NOT trying to capitalize on your situation (there may be someone who feels you are, ignore that person, they know you, and probably have a negative disposition). 

                  Using Personal Stories

                  I like to use personal stories to make a point. It allows my audience to get to know me while making a point to help educate them on a point. 

                  It's Your Podcast - Not Your Family's

                  A person I met at Podfest is starting a show about sex. I told her she better check with her husband as if she talks about her own sex life, she is (I'm assuming) talking about her husband as well. Be careful with what you share as the Internet writes in ink. I've pulled some episodes in the past, but someone has those episodes. 

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Podcast Engineering School

                  Building a Better Dave - Grief is Like a Website

                  Is This Adulting

                  You Wanna Do What?

                  Audio Editing Solutions

                  redpodcast.com

                  podfecta.com 

                  ]]>a4ad8c92616a8b8d4deaa8a4d863def7Mon, 19 Feb 2018 06:17:28 -040053:43falsefull606606Live From the Floor of PodfestSo this week I spent some time this week at the Podfest Multimedia expo in Orlando Florida. This was a fantastic event. Today we hear:
                  A Podcast One Year After Launch

                  Carol from speakingyourbrand.com explains what life has been like after starting her podcast at last years Podfest 2017.

                  The first 6-12 months are really tough due to lack of feedback.

                  While the podcast numbers are growing slowly, the engagement in her community is going up

                  Because of my Podcast: Kyle from Merchants of Dirt and Gagglepod explained how he landed as a speaker at Podfest.

                  Rent Before Your Buy Podcast Microphones

                  Dave interviews Stephen Arruda from MicRentals.com

                  This is an interesting service that could be used to help you test a microphone for less than $100 and avoid making a $300-$500 mistake.

                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  50% of what you paid to rent the mic will be used if you decide to buy one.

                  Use the coupon code rent15 to save on your rental

                   Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Podcasters Survivor Guide

                  ]]>So this week I spent some time this week at the Podfest Multimedia expo in Orlando Florida. This was a fantastic event. Today we hear:
                  A Podcast One Year After Launch

                  Carol from speakingyourbrand.com explains what life has been like after starting her podcast at last years Podfest 2017.

                  The first 6-12 months are really tough due to lack of feedback.

                  While the podcast numbers are growing slowly, the engagement in her community is going up

                  Because of my Podcast: Kyle from Merchants of Dirt and Gagglepod explained how he landed as a speaker at Podfest.

                  Rent Before Your Buy Podcast Microphones

                  Dave interviews Stephen Arruda from MicRentals.com

                  This is an interesting service that could be used to help you test a microphone for less than $100 and avoid making a $300-$500 mistake.

                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  50% of what you paid to rent the mic will be used if you decide to buy one.

                  Use the coupon code rent15 to save on your rental

                   Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  – Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  – The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  – The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 – 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Podcasters Survivor Guide

                  ]]>5a10166cc704469aaabe3a58ed13344bTue, 13 Feb 2018 08:33:10 -040028:14falsefull605605Getting Your Podcast Focused with Jeff SandersWelcome to episode 604 of the School of Podcasting Listen here
                  Update on the PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer

                  The last episode I explained how I had purchased at PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer. It's not cheap ($499) but there is an AR8 that is $150 ($350) less. The problem I had was when I record to the built-in SD card, there was a very faint (but noticeable) high pitch whine. In working with tech support that has been resolved and after updating the driver, it seems to have quit freezing up the audio on my computer. All in all, I'm happy with it. This is partially due to me having a DBX 286 which adds extra gain. I am using an Electrovice RE320, and it just seemed odd that I needed to really turn every (almost) all the way up to get things to peak. The fact that these units have built-in SD records can save you from buying a Zoom H1 (or any portable recorder) to get the recording off the computer. The Zoom H1 is typically around $100. Look for the price of the Zoom H1 to go down (more on that later) as they just announced a new Zoom H1n which will be available soon (that unit is geared a bit more towards musicians)

                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office.

                  - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Getting Productive With Jess Sanders

                  I've been listening to The 5 AM Miracle by Jeff Sanders and I'm already taking steps to get more things done. Jeff is been nominated five times for a podcast award and comes highly recommended by some friends. I started listening to his podcast and soon bought his book the 5 AM Miracle on Audible (also available on Amazon)

                  • How long did it take him to get his sponsor
                  • The difference between his blog audience vs his podcast audience
                  • What goes into making an episode
                  • How does he pick his subjects
                  • Does he make more money selling his own products or sponsorship?
                  • Jeff shares how his podcast brought him a book publisher - TWICE
                  • Does Jeff have any radio experience?
                  • How Jeff inspired his mail carrier who is now a giant fan of his show
                  • Why he decided to kill his first podcast
                  • What got him hooked on his subject
                  • Does he really get up at 5 AM?
                  • Jeff's Tips on Getting Focused
                  • A simple tip for starting your day in the right direction
                  • What is the difference between his first book the 5 AM Miracle and his new Book The Free Time Formula
                  • How does he achieve work/life balance?
                  • What if you don't have time to write all this stuff down?
                  • How do you make yourself go to bed?
                  • Jeff has been using wavve to share his podcast, but that's not the thing that's been delivering more listeners
                  • How did he approach popular websites to get his show mentioned?
                  • Jeff has a TON of bonus content for those that pre-order his book at his website
                  • His membership portal is built in Digital Access Pass and Learn Dash
                  • What is his favorite Todo List Task Manage?
                  
                  Why Getting Organized is Important

                  It only makes sense to go fast when you are headed in the right direction. For me, being somewhat A.D.D. I get new ideas all the time. If you walk into my kitchen, you will find the cabinets open as I have moved on to my next task (eating ) without completing the last 1% of the previous project (closing) so I'm taking some of this year to get more focused, identify what is important to me, and then put the gas pedal down so I'm going fast, in the right direction.

                  My favorite tools are Todist and Evernote. I'm currently taking a class on getting the most out of Todoist and Evernote. Check out Carl Pullein's channel on YouTube For learning how to use these tools. How did I learn about his channel and content? I told someone I was listening to Jeff's book, and he had been watching Carl's videos. Tell people what you are up to, they may have some great insights.

                  My favorite example of Todoist is I can read an email and turn it into a to an item. For example, we previously had an episode with Clay Groves from Fishnerds.com on the show and he was talking about doing appearances. Another listener (who asked to be nameless) wrote in that "When I was in radio, the standard appearance rate was $250 an hour and you couldn't book talent for less than 2 hours. When I got my first speaking contract (for a very large health company) it was $750 for a half day, $1350 for a full day, with expenses and transportation covered. These rates are about 5 years old and may not apply to everyone.. but in case you were wondering.. that's one perspective." I've had that as a "to do" item and when I went into Todoist, I clicked a link and it took me to the actual email in Gmail. 

                  Great Advice on Growing Your Podcast Audience and Community

                  Danny Pena has been on this show (amazing interview). He has a documentary coming out in February as he celebrates 13 years in podcast. He appeared on one my favorite shows about podcasting called the New Media Show with Todd Cochrane and Rob Greenlee. It's definitely worth a listen

                  Mentioned In this Podcast

                  Jeff Sanders Website

                  Red Podcast

                  The 5 AM Miracle Book and 5 AM Miracle Podcast

                  Free Time Formula

                  wavve  audio sharing tool

                  Todist and Evernote

                  New Media Show

                   

                  ]]>Welcome to episode 604 of the School of Podcasting Listen here
                  Update on the PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer

                  The last episode I explained how I had purchased at PreSonus StudioLive AR12 USB Mixer. It's not cheap ($499) but there is an AR8 that is $150 ($350) less. The problem I had was when I record to the built-in SD card, there was a very faint (but noticeable) high pitch whine. In working with tech support that has been resolved and after updating the driver, it seems to have quit freezing up the audio on my computer. All in all, I'm happy with it. This is partially due to me having a DBX 286 which adds extra gain. I am using an Electrovice RE320, and it just seemed odd that I needed to really turn every (almost) all the way up to get things to peak. The fact that these units have built-in SD records can save you from buying a Zoom H1 (or any portable recorder) to get the recording off the computer. The Zoom H1 is typically around $100. Look for the price of the Zoom H1 to go down (more on that later) as they just announced a new Zoom H1n which will be available soon (that unit is geared a bit more towards musicians)

                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office.

                  - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com and get $50 off any level of registration

                  Getting Productive With Jess Sanders

                  I've been listening to The 5 AM Miracle by Jeff Sanders and I'm already taking steps to get more things done. Jeff is been nominated five times for a podcast award and comes highly recommended by some friends. I started listening to his podcast and soon bought his book the 5 AM Miracle on Audible (also available on Amazon)

                  • How long did it take him to get his sponsor
                  • The difference between his blog audience vs his podcast audience
                  • What goes into making an episode
                  • How does he pick his subjects
                  • Does he make more money selling his own products or sponsorship?
                  • Jeff shares how his podcast brought him a book publisher - TWICE
                  • Does Jeff have any radio experience?
                  • How Jeff inspired his mail carrier who is now a giant fan of his show
                  • Why he decided to kill his first podcast
                  • What got him hooked on his subject
                  • Does he really get up at 5 AM?
                  • Jeff's Tips on Getting Focused
                  • A simple tip for starting your day in the right direction
                  • What is the difference between his first book the 5 AM Miracle and his new Book The Free Time Formula
                  • How does he achieve work/life balance?
                  • What if you don't have time to write all this stuff down?
                  • How do you make yourself go to bed?
                  • Jeff has been using wavve to share his podcast, but that's not the thing that's been delivering more listeners
                  • How did he approach popular websites to get his show mentioned?
                  • Jeff has a TON of bonus content for those that pre-order his book at his website
                  • His membership portal is built in Digital Access Pass and Learn Dash
                  • What is his favorite Todo List Task Manage?
                  
                  Why Getting Organized is Important

                  It only makes sense to go fast when you are headed in the right direction. For me, being somewhat A.D.D. I get new ideas all the time. If you walk into my kitchen, you will find the cabinets open as I have moved on to my next task (eating ) without completing the last 1% of the previous project (closing) so I'm taking some of this year to get more focused, identify what is important to me, and then put the gas pedal down so I'm going fast, in the right direction.

                  My favorite tools are Todist and Evernote. I'm currently taking a class on getting the most out of Todoist and Evernote. Check out Carl Pullein's channel on YouTube For learning how to use these tools. How did I learn about his channel and content? I told someone I was listening to Jeff's book, and he had been watching Carl's videos. Tell people what you are up to, they may have some great insights.

                  My favorite example of Todoist is I can read an email and turn it into a to an item. For example, we previously had an episode with Clay Groves from Fishnerds.com on the show and he was talking about doing appearances. Another listener (who asked to be nameless) wrote in that "When I was in radio, the standard appearance rate was $250 an hour and you couldn't book talent for less than 2 hours. When I got my first speaking contract (for a very large health company) it was $750 for a half day, $1350 for a full day, with expenses and transportation covered. These rates are about 5 years old and may not apply to everyone.. but in case you were wondering.. that's one perspective." I've had that as a "to do" item and when I went into Todoist, I clicked a link and it took me to the actual email in Gmail. 

                  Great Advice on Growing Your Podcast Audience and Community

                  Danny Pena has been on this show (amazing interview). He has a documentary coming out in February as he celebrates 13 years in podcast. He appeared on one my favorite shows about podcasting called the New Media Show with Todd Cochrane and Rob Greenlee. It's definitely worth a listen

                  Mentioned In this Podcast

                  Jeff Sanders Website

                  Red Podcast

                  The 5 AM Miracle Book and 5 AM Miracle Podcast

                  Free Time Formula

                  wavve  audio sharing tool

                  Todist and Evernote

                  New Media Show

                   

                  ]]>94ef43008e3a278aac80b02d074b135bMon, 05 Feb 2018 05:00:00 -040045:02falsefull604604Your Podcast WebsiteLast week we talk about media hosts, this week we are talking about your Web Host, and what to do if you hate yours.
                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office.

                  - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com

                  Do You Need a Podcast Website?

                  After all, can't I just use a media host and a Facebook page? To this I say, would you buy a car from a person selling them out of a tent? If you ever plan on telling people where to find something, you NEED a website. Case in point, if you do a real estate podcast and say "Find me in Apple Podcasts" you have a very good chance of not being found. Not because the search tools bad (it could be improved) but because there are so many real estate shows. The same goes for Entrepreneur shows.  The solution is instead of saying "Find me in (whatever) app" is to say go to mywebsite.com/subscribe and I've got a tutorial that will walk you through the process.

                  You Can Get A Website For Free

                  Of the media hosts I recommend (Libsyn.com, Blubrry.com, Podbean.com) they all have a basic website that comes with your plan. How basic is basic? You can listen and have people subscribe to your show. If you're looking to add products, newsletters, scripts to see what they click on, etc, then you need your own website. You can do some of that with their basic site. For example, while you can't put a MailChimp sign up form on a site that doesn't' allows javascript, you can use the link they provide to link to your sign up form that mailchimp provides. With this in mind, there are ways to work around some of the things that are out of bounds.

                  What Do You Need On Your Podcast Website?
                  1. A Play button.
                  2. An About page
                  3. A Contact page
                  4. A subscribe page
                  
                  

                  A Play Button

                  You need a play button because asking someone to subscribe to a show they've never heard is like asking someone to pay for a sandwich they've never eaten. Your play button is like the person at the mall who gives out samples of chicken at the food court. They give you a sample and hope your purchase. With podcasts, you make it easy to play and hope they subscribe. One other note, there are still some people who do not have smartphones.

                  An About Page

                  Your About page should explain how your audience is going to benefit from listening to your show. Think of your target listener looking at your listing. What are you going to say to convince them? I recently look at my description of the School of Podcasting and it needs work. In the first sentence, I mention that I've been podcasting since 2005. I often introduce myself that way is it speaks to my experience, but I'm not sure that is the first thing to lead with. In general, most people don't' care how the sausage is made. Explain what they are going to get, how they are going to benefit or fell upon listening to your show.  The beauty of this is you can always change it late

                  The tough part is some consultants have a website for their consulting, and then add a podcast. Do you have a paragraph for the show or for the host? The answer is both. The harder question is which one is first? If your goal is to get hired as a consultant, then put your paragraph first. If you are hoping to use your podcast to build that relationship that leads to more consulting, then maybe you put the podcast paragraph first.

                  Your Contact Page

                  I put every way you can contact me on my contact page. Email, voicemail, social media, etc. This way if someone wants to contact me, they only need to look in one place. If you are using some sort of form, be sure to use the form yourself and make sure you get the message.

                  A Subscribe Page

                  As more and more podcasts are added to different directories, telling people to find you is becoming less and less of a good thing to say. As more NEW podcast listeners get involved with podcasting telling them to subscribe may fall on deaf ears. Instead, make a page that shows people how to subscribe to your show with links directly to your show on the top platforms. Currently, in 2018 I recommend Apple Podcasts/iTunes, TuneIn, Stitcher, and Google Play Music (I have tutorials for all of these inside the School of Podcasting)

                  Web Hosting Has a New Breed

                  In past, I've used Hostgator (and was even a reseller), and BlueHost (I've never had great luck with them), Godaddy (I am a reseller at www.coolerwebsites.com). Recently I new breed of websites came on board and these were geared to host sites built on Wordpress. I tried a few using Godaddy as a platform and thought I saw some increase in speed. Then I put a Wordpress website on what I will now call "Traditional" hosting, and can say the difference is notable. The fees are typically a little higher (A few dollars more a month), but the speed is higher. That's the good news. The bad news is most of these Wordpress Hosting Packages come with email addresses. This was the case when I hosted a WP Engine. I solved this by getting email through Google at the price of $5 a month per email. WP Engine is a fine company, but to make a long story short, if you get any kind of traffic you pay through the nose (At one point I was paying between 50-70 a month). This is why I liked Godaddy's Wordpress Hosting as it was around $10 a month for 400,000 visitors. I've been using them (again my reseller is www.coolwerwebsites.com) but then I heard about Siteground.

                  Siteground has Wordpress Designed packages, and they offer your email addresses as well. I moved some sites to their platform to test, and again noticed a speed increase with my pages loading. I finally chose to move the School of Podcasting to their platform (from WP Engine) and again saw an increase, plus I got as many email addresses as I want. Their support is AWESOME And I couldn't be happier. Oh yea, the price? $11.95 a month.  I am very happy to be saving some cash each month and getting more services.

                  How Do You Move Your Site?

                  The good news is most web hosts will move your site for free. Siteground did the School of Podcasting for free. However, I wanted to move more sites. They charge $30 to move your site over. So here is how I did it. I used ManageWP. I love this service. I installed a free plugin to my site, and paid $2 to back it up. I then installed WordPress with a few click on Siteground and updated my domain name to point at my blank site.

                  Here is a video that shows the power of Managewp

                  I know, there are all sort of ways to do this without having your site go offline, but this is a way to do it without having to go into a cpanel, use ftp, etc

                  I put a message on the front of the website saying we are moving and we would be going temporarily offline. I would refresh my screen every five minutes, and the minute I saw the deal Wordpress screen, I went into ManageWP and had them restore website from my backup. It worked flawlessly. So instead of paying $30, I paid $2. If I had used their service, they probably could do it without the site going offline, but you can choose your own path.

                  How Many Sites Can You Have on One Site Ground Plan?

                  (images at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/603 )

                  Currently, on their biggest plan I loaded the following sites: http://podcastreviewshow.com http://betterdave.com http://davesblanksite.com http://feedingmyfaith.com http://podcastingresources.com http://powerofpodcasting.com

                  As you can see on the left, I've got some room to grow. Most of these sites are fairly dead. You can see this information by going into the cpanel and looking on the left-hand side of the screen.

                  Wherever you host your website, be sure to have a backup, keep your themes and plugins up to date, and remove any plugins and themes you are not using (don't just deactivate them).

                   

                   

                  Adding Apple Podcasts Episode Numbers How

                  Last year Apple added the ability to add episode numbers to your show. These may come in handy later with different apps. Currently, you can now ask Siri to subscribe to your show. That makes it easy. In the future, there is speculation that you will be able to request an episode number if it is in place. There is also speculation that this field may be used by Amazon in skills for your podcast.

                  What if you already have a bunch of...]]>Last week we talk about media hosts, this week we are talking about your Web Host, and what to do if you hate yours.

                  Sponsor: Podcast Movement

                  I am so looking forward to Podcast Movement. This is the largest Podcast Event that is solely geared toward podcasting. Being face to face with people is the best way to grow your network, and take advantage of all the opportunities. Starting a podcast is a great way to build your network, and coming to an event is like building your network on steroids. I got to talk to Marc Maron a couple of years ago. He just showed up to one of the networking parties, and I said hello and started talking. I can't do that sitting in my chair in my office.

                  - Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 23 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  It's Jule 23 - 26th in Philadelphia PA.

                  Use the code SOP when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com

                  Do You Need a Podcast Website?

                  After all, can't I just use a media host and a Facebook page? To this I say, would you buy a car from a person selling them out of a tent? If you ever plan on telling people where to find something, you NEED a website. Case in point, if you do a real estate podcast and say "Find me in Apple Podcasts" you have a very good chance of not being found. Not because the search tools bad (it could be improved) but because there are so many real estate shows. The same goes for Entrepreneur shows.  The solution is instead of saying "Find me in (whatever) app" is to say go to mywebsite.com/subscribe and I've got a tutorial that will walk you through the process.

                  You Can Get A Website For Free

                  Of the media hosts I recommend (Libsyn.com, Blubrry.com, Podbean.com) they all have a basic website that comes with your plan. How basic is basic? You can listen and have people subscribe to your show. If you're looking to add products, newsletters, scripts to see what they click on, etc, then you need your own website. You can do some of that with their basic site. For example, while you can't put a MailChimp sign up form on a site that doesn't' allows javascript, you can use the link they provide to link to your sign up form that mailchimp provides. With this in mind, there are ways to work around some of the things that are out of bounds.

                  What Do You Need On Your Podcast Website?
                  1. A Play button.
                  2. An About page
                  3. A Contact page
                  4. A subscribe page
                  
                  

                  A Play Button

                  You need a play button because asking someone to subscribe to a show they've never heard is like asking someone to pay for a sandwich they've never eaten. Your play button is like the person at the mall who gives out samples of chicken at the food court. They give you a sample and hope your purchase. With podcasts, you make it easy to play and hope they subscribe. One other note, there are still some people who do not have smartphones.

                  An About Page

                  Your About page should explain how your audience is going to benefit from listening to your show. Think of your target listener looking at your listing. What are you going to say to convince them? I recently look at my description of the School of Podcasting and it needs work. In the first sentence, I mention that I've been podcasting since 2005. I often introduce myself that way is it speaks to my experience, but I'm not sure that is the first thing to lead with. In general, most people don't' care how the sausage is made. Explain what they are going to get, how they are going to benefit or fell upon listening to your show.  The beauty of this is you can always change it late

                  The tough part is some consultants have a website for their consulting, and then add a podcast. Do you have a paragraph for the show or for the host? The answer is both. The harder question is which one is first? If your goal is to get hired as a consultant, then put your paragraph first. If you are hoping to use your podcast to build that relationship that leads to more consulting, then maybe you put the podcast paragraph first.

                  Your Contact Page

                  I put every way you can contact me on my contact page. Email, voicemail, social media, etc. This way if someone wants to contact me, they only need to look in one place. If you are using some sort of form, be sure to use the form yourself and make sure you get the message.

                  A Subscribe Page

                  As more and more podcasts are added to different directories, telling people to find you is becoming less and less of a good thing to say. As more NEW podcast listeners get involved with podcasting telling them to subscribe may fall on deaf ears. Instead, make a page that shows people how to subscribe to your show with links directly to your show on the top platforms. Currently, in 2018 I recommend Apple Podcasts/iTunes, TuneIn, Stitcher, and Google Play Music (I have tutorials for all of these inside the School of Podcasting)

                  Web Hosting Has a New Breed

                  In past, I've used Hostgator (and was even a reseller), and BlueHost (I've never had great luck with them), Godaddy (I am a reseller at www.coolerwebsites.com). Recently I new breed of websites came on board and these were geared to host sites built on Wordpress. I tried a few using Godaddy as a platform and thought I saw some increase in speed. Then I put a Wordpress website on what I will now call "Traditional" hosting, and can say the difference is notable. The fees are typically a little higher (A few dollars more a month), but the speed is higher. That's the good news. The bad news is most of these Wordpress Hosting Packages come with email addresses. This was the case when I hosted a WP Engine. I solved this by getting email through Google at the price of $5 a month per email. WP Engine is a fine company, but to make a long story short, if you get any kind of traffic you pay through the nose (At one point I was paying between 50-70 a month). This is why I liked Godaddy's Wordpress Hosting as it was around $10 a month for 400,000 visitors. I've been using them (again my reseller is www.coolwerwebsites.com) but then I heard about Siteground.

                  Siteground has Wordpress Designed packages, and they offer your email addresses as well. I moved some sites to their platform to test, and again noticed a speed increase with my pages loading. I finally chose to move the School of Podcasting to their platform (from WP Engine) and again saw an increase, plus I got as many email addresses as I want. Their support is AWESOME And I couldn't be happier. Oh yea, the price? $11.95 a month.  I am very happy to be saving some cash each month and getting more services.

                  How Do You Move Your Site?

                  The good news is most web hosts will move your site for free. Siteground did the School of Podcasting for free. However, I wanted to move more sites. They charge $30 to move your site over. So here is how I did it. I used ManageWP. I love this service. I installed a free plugin to my site, and paid $2 to back it up. I then installed WordPress with a few click on Siteground and updated my domain name to point at my blank site.

                  Here is a video that shows the power of Managewp

                  I know, there are all sort of ways to do this without having your site go offline, but this is a way to do it without having to go into a cpanel, use ftp, etc

                  I put a message on the front of the website saying we are moving and we would be going temporarily offline. I would refresh my screen every five minutes, and the minute I saw the deal Wordpress screen, I went into ManageWP and had them restore website from my backup. It worked flawlessly. So instead of paying $30, I paid $2. If I had used their service, they probably could do it without the site going offline, but you can choose your own path.

                  How Many Sites Can You Have on One Site Ground Plan?

                  (images at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/603 )

                  Currently, on their biggest plan I loaded the following sites: http://podcastreviewshow.com http://betterdave.com http://davesblanksite.com http://feedingmyfaith.com http://podcastingresources.com http://powerofpodcasting.com

                  As you can see on the left, I've got some room to grow. Most of these sites are fairly dead. You can see this information by going into the cpanel and looking on the left-hand side of the screen.

                  Wherever you host your website, be sure to have a backup, keep your themes and plugins up to date, and remove any plugins and themes you are not using (don't just deactivate them).

                   

                   

                  Adding Apple Podcasts Episode Numbers How

                  Last year Apple added the ability to add episode numbers to your show. These may come in handy later with different apps. Currently, you can now ask Siri to subscribe to your show. That makes it easy. In the future, there is speculation that you will be able to request an episode number if it is in place. There is also speculation that this field may be used by Amazon in skills for your podcast.

                  What if you already have a bunch of episodes?

                  If you're on Libsyn, currently ask Rob Walch (rob@libsyn.com ) to send you the secret link (as it's not public) and he will send you a link that makes it super easy to add your episodes to your entire back catalog in minutes.

                  If you're using Blubrry, you can edit your episode to enter the information

                   

                  In terms of where do you start? I would start with the latest episode and work backward. It's not as easy to count that way, but for me, I feel your latest episodes are getting the most attention. If you are using Wordpress, you can right-click on the edit link and open in a window. This keeps you in the same location.

                   

                   Start Your Podcast at 

                  www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Got a Comment?

                  888-563-3228

                  ]]>d281a54bb2f5c9e17cc9ca3766410e90Mon, 29 Jan 2018 05:00:00 -040050:22falsefullSwitching Podcast Hosting CompaniesAs a podcast consultant, I like to try all sorts of technology to stay informed with what is going in the space. Today I'm going to talk about things to keep in mind when you move, how to move, and why or why not you should move. I also have a resource if you're moving your entire website without learning any code. 

                  First the disclosure. I was a customer of Libsyn.com for 10 years before becoming an employee almost two years ago. So when I talk about Libsyn competition, I do my best to keep my Libsyn employee hat off, and keep the Dave Jackson School of Podcasting hat on. I also have taken extra effort to base my comments on what happens. Now what I think should happen. I will be sure to tell you when something is an opinion and when something is a fact (as I know it). 

                  Here are my Updated Criteria for Podcast Media Hosting

                  1.  Don't mess with my file name*
                  2. Don't mess with my file format (bit rate, ID3 tags)
                  3. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage)
                  4. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth)
                  5. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in a 301 redirect.
                  6. Give me support. Preferably within 24 hours.
                  7. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business
                  8. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate.
                  9. Support the iTunes Serial, Episodic, Season, and Episode Numbers
                  10. Be IAB Compliant (please note as of 1/2017 certification is not in place, when it is, I want me Podcast Media Host Certified)
                  
                  

                  *Some media hosts offer to inject your mp3 file with an advertisement and in those instances, they get a pass on this criteria.

                  So if I look at the following media hosts

                  Amazon S3  Buzzsprout.com  Podomatic.com Libsyn.com Blubrry.com Podbean.com Spreaker.com Soundcloud.com Simplecast.com Podmio.com Pinecast.com Whooska.com 

                  Here are the ones who made the cut

                  Libsyn.com

                  Blubrry.com

                  Podbean.com

                  Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at any of these services.

                  Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/602

                  ]]>As a podcast consultant, I like to try all sorts of technology to stay informed with what is going in the space. Today I'm going to talk about things to keep in mind when you move, how to move, and why or why not you should move. I also have a resource if you're moving your entire website without learning any code. 

                  First the disclosure. I was a customer of Libsyn.com for 10 years before becoming an employee almost two years ago. So when I talk about Libsyn competition, I do my best to keep my Libsyn employee hat off, and keep the Dave Jackson School of Podcasting hat on. I also have taken extra effort to base my comments on what happens. Now what I think should happen. I will be sure to tell you when something is an opinion and when something is a fact (as I know it). 

                  Here are my Updated Criteria for Podcast Media Hosting

                  1.  Don't mess with my file name*
                  2. Don't mess with my file format (bit rate, ID3 tags)
                  3. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage)
                  4. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth)
                  5. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in a 301 redirect.
                  6. Give me support. Preferably within 24 hours.
                  7. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business
                  8. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate.
                  9. Support the iTunes Serial, Episodic, Season, and Episode Numbers
                  10. Be IAB Compliant (please note as of 1/2017 certification is not in place, when it is, I want me Podcast Media Host Certified)
                  
                  

                  *Some media hosts offer to inject your mp3 file with an advertisement and in those instances, they get a pass on this criteria.

                  So if I look at the following media hosts

                  Amazon S3  Buzzsprout.com  Podomatic.com Libsyn.com Blubrry.com Podbean.com Spreaker.com Soundcloud.com Simplecast.com Podmio.com Pinecast.com Whooska.com 

                  Here are the ones who made the cut

                  Libsyn.com

                  Blubrry.com

                  Podbean.com

                  Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at any of these services.

                  Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/602

                  ]]>e4ead97da1a5fdd2ee7d5a4507cd9dccMon, 22 Jan 2018 05:00:00 -040047:58falsefull602602Get Booked - Find GuestsPaul Colligan has a client who invited him to comes to a charity event run by Alic Cooper where he got to meet Ace Frehley (Kiss) Slash (Guns and Rose) Edgar Winter, Rob Halford (Judas Priest), Alice Cooper and his wife Cheryl (WHO COOL IS THAT???!!!)

                  Find Paul at paulcolligan.com and check out The Podcast Report podcast.

                  BONUS

                  We previously reported how Emily form the Story Behind Podcast got a book offer, we can now say she has a book DEAL (the offer was approved). 

                  Check out Emily at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com

                   

                  SPONSOR: 

                  Are you going to Podcast Movement? 

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 24 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  Use the code sop when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com

                  Find a Guest - Be a Guest at Podcastguests.com 

                  I signed up at podcastsguests.com and I've already been asked to be a guest on a podcast after signing up as an expert. Today we talk with Andrew Alleman the creator of Podcastguests.com

                  I love this story as Andrew started it using free services, and has grown with a lot of blood, sweat, and money to build up the email list. 

                  • Sign up for free and get a list of potential guests who are available to be on your show
                  • Sign up as an expert and be featured in their email list that goes out to thousands of people (currently only $29)
                  • Some people are getting 20-30 responses to your call for guests (depending on how niche your show is)
                  
                  

                  The beauty of this story is Andrew did wait until he had everything in place. He started it an improved it over time based on user feedback. Your podcasts can do the same. Within two years Andrew now has 3000 people on his email list. 

                  Andrew's wife (Stacey Higginbotham)  also has a very popular podcast Internet of Things Podcast and Andrew handles the sponsorships for that show. Andrew explains how the typical podcaster should avoid using the CPM (price per thousands downloads) model as their pricing model as it doesn't work for the average podcast.

                  Andrew also do a show about the domain world at DomainNameWire.com

                  How Being a Guest Can Help Your Show

                  One of the things we need as podcast producers is more podcast listeners. When you appear on a podcast you are in front of people who already know how to listen to a podcast. Most podcast listeners say they hear about other podcasts on other shows. 

                  Go listen to the show you're going to be on. This way you can have a better understanding of their audience. 

                  Make sure your bio is up to date and provide a headshot for them to use and your podcast artwork.

                  Always confirm the day of the interview the data, time etc of the interview

                  When you are a guest, be a good guest and help promote the show you appeared on. 

                  How Using Guests Can Help Your Show

                  When you have guests that appear on your show (that bring value) you get insights and experiences that you may not have. They have stories to share, and strategies to help your audience. 

                  While many people feel a guest will tell their audience to listen. That is not always the case (so don't count on it), but as a podcaster you need to make sure the guest has everything they need to share your show (give them a pre-written tweet with an image, give them the link, make it a no-brainer to share).

                  Make sure to take the time to make your guest sound great (that might mean editing out ums, ya-knows, etc). Guests won't share shows where the interview was crap and the audio is worse.

                  Always confirm the day of the interview the data, time etc of the interview 

                  Ready To Start A Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Have a Podcast That Needs Tweaking?

                  Order a one on one consultation with Dave. Schedule it now at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                  ]]>Paul Colligan has a client who invited him to comes to a charity event run by Alic Cooper where he got to meet Ace Frehley (Kiss) Slash (Guns and Rose) Edgar Winter, Rob Halford (Judas Priest), Alice Cooper and his wife Cheryl (WHO COOL IS THAT???!!!)

                  Find Paul at paulcolligan.com and check out The Podcast Report podcast.

                  BONUS

                  We previously reported how Emily form the Story Behind Podcast got a book offer, we can now say she has a book DEAL (the offer was approved). 

                  Check out Emily at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com

                   

                  SPONSOR: 

                  Are you going to Podcast Movement? 

                  Podcast Movement is the world's largest gathering of new and veteran podcasters, or anyone looking to start their own podcast the right way

                  - Join over 2,000 podcasters from around the world in Philadelphia this July 24 through 26 for three days of workshops, panels, parties and more

                  - The conference offers over 100 sessions on topics ranging from the technical aspects of setting up your equipment and the audio production to marketing and monetizing your current or future show.

                  - The expo hall features over 60 podcast service and equipment providers, so whether you're in the market for a microphone, or trying to figure out where to host your podcast, anyone who matters will be on site to help you out

                  Use the code sop when you sign up at www.podcastmovement.com

                  Find a Guest - Be a Guest at Podcastguests.com 

                  I signed up at podcastsguests.com and I've already been asked to be a guest on a podcast after signing up as an expert. Today we talk with Andrew Alleman the creator of Podcastguests.com

                  I love this story as Andrew started it using free services, and has grown with a lot of blood, sweat, and money to build up the email list. 

                  • Sign up for free and get a list of potential guests who are available to be on your show
                  • Sign up as an expert and be featured in their email list that goes out to thousands of people (currently only $29)
                  • Some people are getting 20-30 responses to your call for guests (depending on how niche your show is)
                  
                  

                  The beauty of this story is Andrew did wait until he had everything in place. He started it an improved it over time based on user feedback. Your podcasts can do the same. Within two years Andrew now has 3000 people on his email list. 

                  Andrew's wife (Stacey Higginbotham)  also has a very popular podcast Internet of Things Podcast and Andrew handles the sponsorships for that show. Andrew explains how the typical podcaster should avoid using the CPM (price per thousands downloads) model as their pricing model as it doesn't work for the average podcast.

                  Andrew also do a show about the domain world at DomainNameWire.com

                  How Being a Guest Can Help Your Show

                  One of the things we need as podcast producers is more podcast listeners. When you appear on a podcast you are in front of people who already know how to listen to a podcast. Most podcast listeners say they hear about other podcasts on other shows. 

                  Go listen to the show you're going to be on. This way you can have a better understanding of their audience. 

                  Make sure your bio is up to date and provide a headshot for them to use and your podcast artwork.

                  Always confirm the day of the interview the data, time etc of the interview

                  When you are a guest, be a good guest and help promote the show you appeared on. 

                  How Using Guests Can Help Your Show

                  When you have guests that appear on your show (that bring value) you get insights and experiences that you may not have. They have stories to share, and strategies to help your audience. 

                  While many people feel a guest will tell their audience to listen. That is not always the case (so don't count on it), but as a podcaster you need to make sure the guest has everything they need to share your show (give them a pre-written tweet with an image, give them the link, make it a no-brainer to share).

                  Make sure to take the time to make your guest sound great (that might mean editing out ums, ya-knows, etc). Guests won't share shows where the interview was crap and the audio is worse.

                  Always confirm the day of the interview the data, time etc of the interview 

                  Ready To Start A Podcast?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Have a Podcast That Needs Tweaking?

                  Order a one on one consultation with Dave. Schedule it now at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                  ]]>0edd7790cd25468cadf98d0c2c008ac7Mon, 15 Jan 2018 05:00:00 -040041:16falsefull601601Ask Dave AnythingEvery 100 episodes, I break my format. Today I completely broke it and decided to try something I've heard others do and that is an "Ask Me Anything" episode. It was hard as people sent in some questions that were very hard. If you're a new listener looking for podcast help - this is not the episode for you, please go listen to any of the other episodes (Except episode 400, and 500).

                  Here are the questions:

                  00:38 A Quick Look Back

                  2:06 Binky and the Whiz

                  03:10 Craig from Ingles podcast and Kim From http://activetraveladventures.com/ want to know where I would travel too if money was not an issue.

                  06:16 Zack from Rasing Rents (pa Rents that is) want to know if I have Any Regrets in Life?

                  8:38 How Do I Win At Slot Machines? - Easy go to www.professorslots.com (I told Jon to Send this in so I could Plug his show).

                  09:21 Bobby from Live Nude Puppets wants to know if I believe in Bigfoot, If I have a Favorite Old Testament Character and my thoughts on a handmade guitar pick

                  13:25 Worst and First Concerts I've attended from Jason Bryant from Mat Talk Online (college wrestling shows)

                  17:56 Lee From the Covert Nerd Podcast wants to know what video games I played back in the day

                  20:31 Chris Hache (Noshing Nova Scotians) if I could put a billboard anywhere in the world, where would you put it, and what would it say?

                  22:14 Dave Got Shot at, at Point Blank Rank and Lived. Scott From the Computer Tutor Show (great computer tips) and Ron want the details.

                  31:04 Johnathon from Weekly Awesome wants to know if my childhood fueled a passion for podcasting?

                  34:32 Brad from the Cinema Guys wants to know my top three movies and bottom three?

                  37:47 Marc from the Talk Star Wars Toybox Daily Show wants to know if I have any Star Wars collectibles?

                  38:55 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom wants to know the Origins of Bernie the Cat and How I ended up with him?

                  42:48 Binky wants to know what its like to whack your cat.

                  43:47 The Ghost of Bernie

                  44:05 Darren from www.donkeytells.com wants to know about my Favorite High School Moment.

                  Where I Will Be

                  Pofest Multimedia Expo Feb 8-1

                  Social Media Marketing World Feb 28- March 2

                   

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast

                  I can help you with One on One Coaching, or you can join the School of Podcasting

                  Subscribe to the School of Podcasting on iTunes

                  ]]>Every 100 episodes, I break my format. Today I completely broke it and decided to try something I've heard others do and that is an "Ask Me Anything" episode. It was hard as people sent in some questions that were very hard. If you're a new listener looking for podcast help - this is not the episode for you, please go listen to any of the other episodes (Except episode 400, and 500).

                  Here are the questions:

                  00:38 A Quick Look Back

                  2:06 Binky and the Whiz

                  03:10 Craig from Ingles podcast and Kim From http://activetraveladventures.com/ want to know where I would travel too if money was not an issue.

                  06:16 Zack from Rasing Rents (pa Rents that is) want to know if I have Any Regrets in Life?

                  8:38 How Do I Win At Slot Machines? - Easy go to www.professorslots.com (I told Jon to Send this in so I could Plug his show).

                  09:21 Bobby from Live Nude Puppets wants to know if I believe in Bigfoot, If I have a Favorite Old Testament Character and my thoughts on a handmade guitar pick

                  13:25 Worst and First Concerts I've attended from Jason Bryant from Mat Talk Online (college wrestling shows)

                  17:56 Lee From the Covert Nerd Podcast wants to know what video games I played back in the day

                  20:31 Chris Hache (Noshing Nova Scotians) if I could put a billboard anywhere in the world, where would you put it, and what would it say?

                  22:14 Dave Got Shot at, at Point Blank Rank and Lived. Scott From the Computer Tutor Show (great computer tips) and Ron want the details.

                  31:04 Johnathon from Weekly Awesome wants to know if my childhood fueled a passion for podcasting?

                  34:32 Brad from the Cinema Guys wants to know my top three movies and bottom three?

                  37:47 Marc from the Talk Star Wars Toybox Daily Show wants to know if I have any Star Wars collectibles?

                  38:55 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom wants to know the Origins of Bernie the Cat and How I ended up with him?

                  42:48 Binky wants to know what its like to whack your cat.

                  43:47 The Ghost of Bernie

                  44:05 Darren from www.donkeytells.com wants to know about my Favorite High School Moment.

                  Where I Will Be

                  Pofest Multimedia Expo Feb 8-1

                  Social Media Marketing World Feb 28- March 2

                   

                  Ready To Start Your Podcast

                  I can help you with One on One Coaching, or you can join the School of Podcasting

                  Subscribe to the School of Podcasting on iTunes

                  ]]>967330489c68425600519cf60586048dMon, 08 Jan 2018 05:00:00 -040057:23falsefull600600How to Make Your Audience Go WOWEvery year I read/listen to the book Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World. For me, this is the same as a football go saying, We need to get back to the basics. It reminds me of what my goals are as a content creator. In the book, Michael talks about making good content isn't really good enough anymore if you really want to get noticed. You need to make content that makes people go WOW. Then this response is followed by them telling a friend.
                  Two Podcasts Episodes That Made Me Go WOW!

                  Episode 100 of the Story Behind Podcast - Emily Create this Episode as a Musical. I had numerous people ask me if I had heard it. This episode too more than four days to assemble.

                  Carey Green on episode 81 of Podcastification did an episode comparing Skype, Ringr, Zencastr, Zoom, and Cleenfeed. Carey said that including research, recording, setup, editing, show notes, probably 8 to 12-ish hours, all done in chunks over the course of a month. Carey also runs Podcast Fast Track (audio editing and show notes)

                  Seth Resler who works for Jabs Media did an article on if there is or isn't a discovery problem in podcasting (read it here). While he had to do a little work to take all the answers and put them into an article that was easily read, he also pointed out, "It took years, because the only reason that the podcasting leaders that are quoted in that article responded to me at all is because I've invested years in the podcasting space, not just learning about the craft, but also building relationships at conferences and trade shows, and establishing my own credibility by writing, speaking, and hosting webinars about podcasting.

                  This Doesn't Mean Your Next Episode Should Take 14 hours

                  Please dont read this and think, "I need to spend at least 10 hours per episode. That's not my point. My point is that it takes some planning, it takes some strategy, it takes knowing your audience, and it takes some practice to create WOW content. 

                  Here are the ingredients to wow content ( Adapted for podcasting from Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World).

                  1. Surprise. Wow content should exceed expectations.  - The Stacking Benjamins has great information but also is pretty funny.
                  2. Anticipation.  Anticipating a wow experience is almost as good as the experience. David Hooper's latest episode of the Red podcast had a huge teaser at the end. 
                  3. Resonance. A wow experience touches the heart. It resonates at a deep level. It might even cause goosebumps or tears. Dictionary.com shows resonate as "to produce a positive feeling, emotional response, or opinion."
                  4. Transcendence. A wow experience connects you to something transcendent. Michael states, "You experience purpose, meaning, or even God. " Dictionary.com shows, "to rise above or go beyond; overpass; exceed," and "to outdo or exceed in excellence, elevation, extent, degree, etc. ; surpass; excel."
                  5. Clarity. A wow experience creates a moment when you see things with more clarity than ever before. I've had people tell me I do a really good job of explaining things.
                  6. Presence.  A wow experience has you experiencing the NOW. You are fully present.
                  7. Universality. A wow experience is experienced by everyone in the same way. 
                  8. Evangelism. A wow experience has to be shared. The minutes the content is done, you're already thinking of the people you need to tell.
                  9. Longevity. You can experience it time and time again without growing tired of it. 
                  10. Privilege. You're glad to be associated with it.
                  
                  I wanted to add a few things of my own.
                  1. Scarcity/Uniqueness. You can't get it any place else
                  2. Bravery. People that have the courage to stand up and tell the truth
                  3. Intimacy. When someone shares intimate details of their life, this somewhat ties into Michaels surprise, but it makes people uncomfortable.
                  
                  Other Things To Consider With Your Content

                  Managing your audience expectations. If you set the bar too high, you might leave the door open to disappointing your audience.

                  What about Passion? Audio Quality? Microphones? 

                   

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 6th Join Now

                  Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World.

                  Jim Collison From the Average Gut Network

                  Ask the Podcast Coach

                  Jonathon Oaks Trival Warfare

                  Ravi from Subscribeme.fm and Coolcastplayer.com

                  Darwin Dave Dealing with My Grief

                  Master Kuldrin from Kuldrin's Krypt

                  SP from Better Podcasting

                  Alan Two Chairs No Waiting

                  Epodcast Productions (edit and show notes )

                  The Audacity to Podcast

                  David Hooper Red Podcast

                  Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show

                  Harry Durran - Podcast Junkies

                  Pat Flynn Smart Passive Income

                  Episode 598 Because of My Podcast Segment

                  Gallon Smashing Pranks on YouTube

                  Brother Love

                  Congressional Dish

                  John Lee Dumas

                  The Heroes Journey

                  Podfest.us Podfest Multimedia Expo in Florida 

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Bernie The Cat Show

                  Let Me Help Start Your Podcast

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 6th

                  School of Podcasting Self Paced Online Classes

                  One on One Consulting

                  ]]>Every year I read/listen to the book Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World. For me, this is the same as a football go saying, We need to get back to the basics. It reminds me of what my goals are as a content creator. In the book, Michael talks about making good content isn't really good enough anymore if you really want to get noticed. You need to make content that makes people go WOW. Then this response is followed by them telling a friend.
                  Two Podcasts Episodes That Made Me Go WOW!

                  Episode 100 of the Story Behind Podcast - Emily Create this Episode as a Musical. I had numerous people ask me if I had heard it. This episode too more than four days to assemble.

                  Carey Green on episode 81 of Podcastification did an episode comparing Skype, Ringr, Zencastr, Zoom, and Cleenfeed. Carey said that including research, recording, setup, editing, show notes, probably 8 to 12-ish hours, all done in chunks over the course of a month. Carey also runs Podcast Fast Track (audio editing and show notes)

                  Seth Resler who works for Jabs Media did an article on if there is or isn't a discovery problem in podcasting (read it here). While he had to do a little work to take all the answers and put them into an article that was easily read, he also pointed out, "It took years, because the only reason that the podcasting leaders that are quoted in that article responded to me at all is because I've invested years in the podcasting space, not just learning about the craft, but also building relationships at conferences and trade shows, and establishing my own credibility by writing, speaking, and hosting webinars about podcasting.

                  This Doesn't Mean Your Next Episode Should Take 14 hours

                  Please dont read this and think, "I need to spend at least 10 hours per episode. That's not my point. My point is that it takes some planning, it takes some strategy, it takes knowing your audience, and it takes some practice to create WOW content. 

                  Here are the ingredients to wow content ( Adapted for podcasting from Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World).

                  1. Surprise. Wow content should exceed expectations.  - The Stacking Benjamins has great information but also is pretty funny.
                  2. Anticipation.  Anticipating a wow experience is almost as good as the experience. David Hooper's latest episode of the Red podcast had a huge teaser at the end. 
                  3. Resonance. A wow experience touches the heart. It resonates at a deep level. It might even cause goosebumps or tears. Dictionary.com shows resonate as "to produce a positive feeling, emotional response, or opinion."
                  4. Transcendence. A wow experience connects you to something transcendent. Michael states, "You experience purpose, meaning, or even God. " Dictionary.com shows, "to rise above or go beyond; overpass; exceed," and "to outdo or exceed in excellence, elevation, extent, degree, etc. ; surpass; excel."
                  5. Clarity. A wow experience creates a moment when you see things with more clarity than ever before. I've had people tell me I do a really good job of explaining things.
                  6. Presence.  A wow experience has you experiencing the NOW. You are fully present.
                  7. Universality. A wow experience is experienced by everyone in the same way. 
                  8. Evangelism. A wow experience has to be shared. The minutes the content is done, you're already thinking of the people you need to tell.
                  9. Longevity. You can experience it time and time again without growing tired of it. 
                  10. Privilege. You're glad to be associated with it.
                  
                  I wanted to add a few things of my own.
                  1. Scarcity/Uniqueness. You can't get it any place else
                  2. Bravery. People that have the courage to stand up and tell the truth
                  3. Intimacy. When someone shares intimate details of their life, this somewhat ties into Michaels surprise, but it makes people uncomfortable.
                  
                  Other Things To Consider With Your Content

                  Managing your audience expectations. If you set the bar too high, you might leave the door open to disappointing your audience.

                  What about Passion? Audio Quality? Microphones? 

                   

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 6th Join Now

                  Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World.

                  Jim Collison From the Average Gut Network

                  Ask the Podcast Coach

                  Jonathon Oaks Trival Warfare

                  Ravi from Subscribeme.fm and Coolcastplayer.com

                  Darwin Dave Dealing with My Grief

                  Master Kuldrin from Kuldrin's Krypt

                  SP from Better Podcasting

                  Alan Two Chairs No Waiting

                  Epodcast Productions (edit and show notes )

                  The Audacity to Podcast

                  David Hooper Red Podcast

                  Podcast Talent Coach

                  Podcast Review Show

                  Harry Durran - Podcast Junkies

                  Pat Flynn Smart Passive Income

                  Episode 598 Because of My Podcast Segment

                  Gallon Smashing Pranks on YouTube

                  Brother Love

                  Congressional Dish

                  John Lee Dumas

                  The Heroes Journey

                  Podfest.us Podfest Multimedia Expo in Florida 

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Bernie The Cat Show

                  Let Me Help Start Your Podcast

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 6th

                  School of Podcasting Self Paced Online Classes

                  One on One Consulting

                  ]]>7088c5c3868785e58ac9350e832e3862Mon, 01 Jan 2018 06:12:02 -040051:42falsefull599599Top Podcasts Of 2017Every year I wind up the year by asking you what your favorite podcast is (if you could only listen to one sh0w) and more importantly why is it your favorite show. Here are the responses:

                  2:53 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast - She Loves StoryBrand as she learns things she can use in every show

                  3:36 Adam from Dark Knight Minute loves Digital Dads. He loves the inspiring message.

                  4:43 Anna Authentic Moments loves The Good Life Project by Jonathan Fields for the in-depth conversations

                  5:46 Darwyn Dave -Dealing with My Grief podcast enjoys the Grief Dreams  as it has similar views on the subject. Dave and Josh have bonded over the subject.

                  8:21 Ben from Modern Self Protection likes the Survival Podcast with Jack Spirko. He enjoys to tips to help you in your life every day (not just end of the world stuff)

                  9:42 Abby  from A time for Horses  loves the  Wooden Overcoats podcast because it's  really Really Funny

                  10:47 Brian from Engaging Missions likes The School of Podcasting for the interviews and engaging stories wrap up in a professional production

                  11:56 Clay from Fishnerds loves the Beyond Data podcast due to the  Uber geeky information about Fish

                  13:14 Daniel Everybody's National Parks loves the Wow in the World podcast as she can listen with the kids

                  14:28 Paul - Fighting Through Podcast (Great unpublished History) love Dan Carlin's  Hardcore History - The Storyteller's Storyteller, Content is just Awesome

                  18:32 Justin from Optimal Living Daily loves the Feed from Libsyn. They answer his questions and he gets information that is so good he needs to write it down.

                  19:28 Kim from Toastmasters 101  she loves the  Clifton Strengths Coaching Blog Theme Thursdays. They even have notes and worksheets you can print out

                  21:34 Matt from The Author Inside You Podcast really enjoys Ask Drone U  Matt has recently got into Drones and the info is informative and fun. They are also the perfect length.

                  22:19 Steve Stewart is still listening to Stacking Benjamins (for the fourth year in a row). It's informative, super creative, and very helpful for managing your finances

                  23:05 Randy Cantrell  from the Peer Advantage - His favorite podcast is the last one he listened to as he changes topics all the time.

                  24:09 Patrick and Aaron from the  Broken Line Podcast  loves the in-depth information provided by the Meat Eater Podcast

                  25:03 Scott From the Computer Tutor Podcast loves the  Podcast Rodeo Show for its honest, entertaining reviews of different podcasts.

                  28:30 Seth From geekvillradio.com and classicwrestingmemories.com loves the Rebel Force Radio and considers it the best Stars Wars podcast for its great production.

                  29:29 Cheri from the Creation Science 4 Kids Podcast just found and loves  The Story Grid podcast. It's great for helping people who write non-fiction write fiction. She feels deeply connected to the hosts and has purchased Shawn Coyne's book The Story Grid Book

                  31:59 Win Charles Butterflies of Wisdom like the Dreams in Drive podcast

                  32:38 Zack Raising Rents (as in paRENTS) love the  Based on a True Story Its where History meets Hollywood. I love history books, but don't have alot of time. He educates while he entertains me.

                  35:30 Erik K Johnson from the Podcast Talent Coach show likes Flippedlifestyle.com as they provide real-life strategies for making and selling products. They are real people, and they deliver more than theory.

                  39:09 I've created the ultimate Because of My Podcast Mega Mix spotlighting the many ways people have benefitted from launching their podcast.

                  This includes:

                  • Attending a taping of a TV show
                  • Speaking to celebrities, athletes, supreme justices, and others people we have no business speaking to..
                  • Getting paid to travel to different places (in some cases by 220%)
                  • Getting millions in sales from billion-dollar clients
                  • Getting Free Stuff
                  • Organizing Charity Events
                  • Building a network of resources and people
                  • Be contacted to write a book, to create videos
                  • Have their face on the cover of a comic book
                  • Getting free wine
                  • Getting numerous jobs
                  • Quit their job as a Doctor to do podcasting full time.
                  • Have boosted time with their family and now feel they have a purpose
                  
                  Make 2018 the Year You Start Your Successful Podcast

                  Please let me help you in any of these ways

                  One on one podcast consulting I can help with any podcast situation

                  School of Podcasting Self Paced Tutorials (and Facebook Group, Live Coaching, Priority Email Support)

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks - Live Group Coaching starts January 6th (includes a year at the School of Podcasting). Be in iTunes by February. (A $5299 Value for $1499). Price goes up January 1st.

                  ]]>Every year I wind up the year by asking you what your favorite podcast is (if you could only listen to one sh0w) and more importantly why is it your favorite show. Here are the responses:

                  2:53 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast - She Loves StoryBrand as she learns things she can use in every show

                  3:36 Adam from Dark Knight Minute loves Digital Dads. He loves the inspiring message.

                  4:43 Anna Authentic Moments loves The Good Life Project by Jonathan Fields for the in-depth conversations

                  5:46 Darwyn Dave -Dealing with My Grief podcast enjoys the Grief Dreams  as it has similar views on the subject. Dave and Josh have bonded over the subject.

                  8:21 Ben from Modern Self Protection likes the Survival Podcast with Jack Spirko. He enjoys to tips to help you in your life every day (not just end of the world stuff)

                  9:42 Abby  from A time for Horses  loves the  Wooden Overcoats podcast because it's  really Really Funny

                  10:47 Brian from Engaging Missions likes The School of Podcasting for the interviews and engaging stories wrap up in a professional production

                  11:56 Clay from Fishnerds loves the Beyond Data podcast due to the  Uber geeky information about Fish

                  13:14 Daniel Everybody's National Parks loves the Wow in the World podcast as she can listen with the kids

                  14:28 Paul - Fighting Through Podcast (Great unpublished History) love Dan Carlin's  Hardcore History - The Storyteller's Storyteller, Content is just Awesome

                  18:32 Justin from Optimal Living Daily loves the Feed from Libsyn. They answer his questions and he gets information that is so good he needs to write it down.

                  19:28 Kim from Toastmasters 101  she loves the  Clifton Strengths Coaching Blog Theme Thursdays. They even have notes and worksheets you can print out

                  21:34 Matt from The Author Inside You Podcast really enjoys Ask Drone U  Matt has recently got into Drones and the info is informative and fun. They are also the perfect length.

                  22:19 Steve Stewart is still listening to Stacking Benjamins (for the fourth year in a row). It's informative, super creative, and very helpful for managing your finances

                  23:05 Randy Cantrell  from the Peer Advantage - His favorite podcast is the last one he listened to as he changes topics all the time.

                  24:09 Patrick and Aaron from the  Broken Line Podcast  loves the in-depth information provided by the Meat Eater Podcast

                  25:03 Scott From the Computer Tutor Podcast loves the  Podcast Rodeo Show for its honest, entertaining reviews of different podcasts.

                  28:30 Seth From geekvillradio.com and classicwrestingmemories.com loves the Rebel Force Radio and considers it the best Stars Wars podcast for its great production.

                  29:29 Cheri from the Creation Science 4 Kids Podcast just found and loves  The Story Grid podcast. It's great for helping people who write non-fiction write fiction. She feels deeply connected to the hosts and has purchased Shawn Coyne's book The Story Grid Book

                  31:59 Win Charles Butterflies of Wisdom like the Dreams in Drive podcast

                  32:38 Zack Raising Rents (as in paRENTS) love the  Based on a True Story Its where History meets Hollywood. I love history books, but don't have alot of time. He educates while he entertains me.

                  35:30 Erik K Johnson from the Podcast Talent Coach show likes Flippedlifestyle.com as they provide real-life strategies for making and selling products. They are real people, and they deliver more than theory.

                  39:09 I've created the ultimate Because of My Podcast Mega Mix spotlighting the many ways people have benefitted from launching their podcast.

                  This includes:

                  • Attending a taping of a TV show
                  • Speaking to celebrities, athletes, supreme justices, and others people we have no business speaking to..
                  • Getting paid to travel to different places (in some cases by 220%)
                  • Getting millions in sales from billion-dollar clients
                  • Getting Free Stuff
                  • Organizing Charity Events
                  • Building a network of resources and people
                  • Be contacted to write a book, to create videos
                  • Have their face on the cover of a comic book
                  • Getting free wine
                  • Getting numerous jobs
                  • Quit their job as a Doctor to do podcasting full time.
                  • Have boosted time with their family and now feel they have a purpose
                  
                  Make 2018 the Year You Start Your Successful Podcast

                  Please let me help you in any of these ways

                  One on one podcast consulting I can help with any podcast situation

                  School of Podcasting Self Paced Tutorials (and Facebook Group, Live Coaching, Priority Email Support)

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks - Live Group Coaching starts January 6th (includes a year at the School of Podcasting). Be in iTunes by February. (A $5299 Value for $1499). Price goes up January 1st.

                  ]]>bba75df2358a3ea02e582ade11fac9bdMon, 25 Dec 2017 05:00:00 -040051:02falsefull598598Keeping Things Simple - Stats Updates From Apple, Libsyn, and BlubrryThis weekend I had "Christmas" with most of my family as my brother goes to Florida for Christmas with his in-laws. We bought my nieces and nephews who are ages 8 and under some of the toys we grew up playing. I noticed that these games are often very simplistic.  What does this have to do with podcasting? Becuase sometimes we make things harder than they need to be.

                   

                  Because Of My Podcast - I'm Getting to Talk to Some Very Cool People Darryl E. McCullough

                  Darryl hosts the Full Circle Podcast and helped launch National Podcast Power conference. Daryl has met actors, authors, politicians, YouTube Stars and more. If you want to get doors opened, start a podcast today.

                  Keeping Simple Is Sometimes All You Need

                  I spent the weekend playing with my great-nieces and nephew. We brought out some classc board games.

                  Battling Tops

                  My entire family ended up playing this game by the end of the day.  What makes it a great game is that it is easy to learn and the action is fast and furious. The tops come out the gate very fast and often one or two of the tops go flying out of the arena. You pull a "string" (now a plastic tie with teeth) and the tops go into what amounts to a bowl and bounce off each other. The last one in the bowl spinning wins. Simple.

                  Checkers

                  This is another game that takes very little skill, and you get to the action fairly quickly. It takes some thought and strategy.

                  Hide and Go Seek

                  This game requires the ability to count to ten Mississippi. There is suspense, and tension as you wait to see if you can get home without being caught. Here again, it requires a good hiding spot and strategy to determine when you would try to "go home."

                  I love helping people understand the best path to get to your podcast going in the right direction. There are times when people ask a question and they expect a simple answer, but the absolute truth about podcasting is there are very few absolute truths. The other thing I want to talk about today is letting your personality shine.

                  So many people make podcasting harder than it is. Don't get me wrong there is still a learning curve, but some time we make the curve much higher than it needs to be.

                  Sometimes Too Much Technology Can Take the Fun Out of Things

                  I do a show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" and at one point I had a cohost located in another state, a phone line coming in (with a screen where I could put people on hold and see my callers), and I had a chat room. I streamed it live on Google Hangouts (now YouTube live), as well as mixlr.com and spreaker.com When I started the show I needed eight arms to start everything.

                  My co-host and I Jim Collison (from theaverageguy.tv) noticed that most of our questions come in via chat. We still offer the ability to join the Google Hangout, but I would say 98% of our questions come in via chat. We also stream the show via Google Hangout and based on audience feedback, only stream via mixlr.com (for those who want an audio only).

                  Simple Can Work and Sound Great

                  My friend Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men show (and previously Ham Radio 360) got an email from a listener. In it, they said, " You have always sounded great! Better than some national broadcasts/podcasts."

                  So what equipment does Cale Use? Did he spend thousands of dollars?

                  He is using an  ATR2100 Microphone, Yamaha MG12XU Mixer, Zoom H2n Digital Recorder. Record Locally to Zoom, then Edit in Audacity.

                  Bernie The Cat Wishes Everyone Happy Holidays

                  13:44 Bernie from the Bernie the Cat Show stops by to wish everyone Happy Holidays.

                  New Statistics From Apple inside PodcastsConnect. Apple.com

                  14:45 See Video 

                  https://youtu.be/VmSDwb3iU9s

                  New Stats From Blubrry and Libsyn

                  20:28 Libsyn.com  launched a new stats interface that works on your phone. The backend of the stats system now provides IAB compliant (once the IAB launches their certification) stats.

                  Blubrry Statistics just got better, with the introduction of regional reporting for Canada, UK, and Brazil. More Information

                  Get a free month of Service at Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com using the coupon code sopfree.

                  Where You Can Find Me In Person

                  22:41

                  February 8 -10 Orlando Florida  Podfest.us I will be speaking on AI and Podcasting and I will be Roasted.

                  February 28 - March 2 in San Diego California Social Media Marketing World Speaking on Podcast Monetization

                   

                  What Podcast is the Easiest Show To Create?

                  26:48

                  There are a number of formats you can choose from when creating a podcast.

                  You can do a show with just you (a monologue)

                  You can do a show with a co-host

                  You can do a show with a panel

                  Looking at the above list, one might think a solo show would be the easiest. Why? No scheduling conflicts, no arguments over the direction of the show. You have total control. So what is the problem? You need to be comfortable talking to the wall. It takes a little confidence to pull this off. Michael Hyatt is one of my favorite authors. I read his book Platform every January to kick of my year. Michael has publicly stated that he is not comfortable doing a solo show.

                  So then doing a show with a co-host is easier? This sounds true up front. You don't have to do all the work, and there is another person to help promote the show.

                  But you now have the occasional challenge of scheduling conflicts. The more people you have, the harder it is to get everyone together. The solution is to pick a time when everyone knows you will be recording and make a commitment to that time. This is easier said than done, especially when multiple time zones are included, and multiple life configurations are included (kids, jobs, etc).

                  So again, it depends.

                  Taking Phone Calls

                  I think we all grew up listening to radio shows who take phone calls and we want to recreate that scenario. So how do you take phone calls. The answer? It depends. If you are doing a solo show, you can get a Google Voice Number or a Toll-Free Number at Podcastvoicemail.com and plug the phone into a mixer using your headphone jack. Then you can talk into your microphone that goes into the mixer, you plug the phone into the mixer, and send the mix of you and the phone out to a service like Mixlr.com Send the same output into a portable recorder like a Zoom H1.

                  But what if you have a co-host? What if you want a phone screener? Then things get way more complicated including two mix-minus setups that I won't even attempt to explain it here (it would be something we could do some consulting on).

                  The bottom line is, "It depends"

                  Sometimes You Have to Jump In

                  I bought myself a new 55" TV for Christmas. I brought it home, and went to put it on my old TV stand, and it was too big. I had to buy a bigger stand. Then I went to plug it into my sound bar, and you guessed it. Even though both the TV and the soundbar were from the same company, I needed to go buy a new cable to plug in.

                  Some things you only learn things by doing them.

                  If you want to avoid making the common podcast mistakes when it comes to planning your show, purchasing gear, promoting your show, I urge you to sign up for the School of Podcasting or join the Podcasting in Six Weeks Course which is starting on January 6th.

                   

                  How Can Help You?

                  One-on-one Podcast Consulting. Schedule a Session Today

                  Learn At Your Own Pace at the School of Podcasting

                  Group Coaching "Podcasting in Six Weeks" Course (includes 1 year at the School of Podcasting)

                  ]]>This weekend I had "Christmas" with most of my family as my brother goes to Florida for Christmas with his in-laws. We bought my nieces and nephews who are ages 8 and under some of the toys we grew up playing. I noticed that these games are often very simplistic.  What does this have to do with podcasting? Becuase sometimes we make things harder than they need to be.

                   

                  Because Of My Podcast - I'm Getting to Talk to Some Very Cool People Darryl E. McCullough

                  Darryl hosts the Full Circle Podcast and helped launch National Podcast Power conference. Daryl has met actors, authors, politicians, YouTube Stars and more. If you want to get doors opened, start a podcast today.

                  Keeping Simple Is Sometimes All You Need

                  I spent the weekend playing with my great-nieces and nephew. We brought out some classc board games.

                  Battling Tops

                  My entire family ended up playing this game by the end of the day.  What makes it a great game is that it is easy to learn and the action is fast and furious. The tops come out the gate very fast and often one or two of the tops go flying out of the arena. You pull a "string" (now a plastic tie with teeth) and the tops go into what amounts to a bowl and bounce off each other. The last one in the bowl spinning wins. Simple.

                  Checkers

                  This is another game that takes very little skill, and you get to the action fairly quickly. It takes some thought and strategy.

                  Hide and Go Seek

                  This game requires the ability to count to ten Mississippi. There is suspense, and tension as you wait to see if you can get home without being caught. Here again, it requires a good hiding spot and strategy to determine when you would try to "go home."

                  I love helping people understand the best path to get to your podcast going in the right direction. There are times when people ask a question and they expect a simple answer, but the absolute truth about podcasting is there are very few absolute truths. The other thing I want to talk about today is letting your personality shine.

                  So many people make podcasting harder than it is. Don't get me wrong there is still a learning curve, but some time we make the curve much higher than it needs to be.

                  Sometimes Too Much Technology Can Take the Fun Out of Things

                  I do a show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" and at one point I had a cohost located in another state, a phone line coming in (with a screen where I could put people on hold and see my callers), and I had a chat room. I streamed it live on Google Hangouts (now YouTube live), as well as mixlr.com and spreaker.com When I started the show I needed eight arms to start everything.

                  My co-host and I Jim Collison (from theaverageguy.tv) noticed that most of our questions come in via chat. We still offer the ability to join the Google Hangout, but I would say 98% of our questions come in via chat. We also stream the show via Google Hangout and based on audience feedback, only stream via mixlr.com (for those who want an audio only).

                  Simple Can Work and Sound Great

                  My friend Cale Nelson from the Modern Christian Men show (and previously Ham Radio 360) got an email from a listener. In it, they said, " You have always sounded great! Better than some national broadcasts/podcasts."

                  So what equipment does Cale Use? Did he spend thousands of dollars?

                  He is using an  ATR2100 Microphone, Yamaha MG12XU Mixer, Zoom H2n Digital Recorder. Record Locally to Zoom, then Edit in Audacity.

                  Bernie The Cat Wishes Everyone Happy Holidays

                  13:44 Bernie from the Bernie the Cat Show stops by to wish everyone Happy Holidays.

                  New Statistics From Apple inside PodcastsConnect. Apple.com

                  14:45 See Video 

                  https://youtu.be/VmSDwb3iU9s

                  New Stats From Blubrry and Libsyn

                  20:28 Libsyn.com  launched a new stats interface that works on your phone. The backend of the stats system now provides IAB compliant (once the IAB launches their certification) stats.

                  Blubrry Statistics just got better, with the introduction of regional reporting for Canada, UK, and Brazil. More Information

                  Get a free month of Service at Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com using the coupon code sopfree.

                  Where You Can Find Me In Person

                  22:41

                  February 8 -10 Orlando Florida  Podfest.us I will be speaking on AI and Podcasting and I will be Roasted.

                  February 28 - March 2 in San Diego California Social Media Marketing World Speaking on Podcast Monetization

                   

                  What Podcast is the Easiest Show To Create?

                  26:48

                  There are a number of formats you can choose from when creating a podcast.

                  You can do a show with just you (a monologue)

                  You can do a show with a co-host

                  You can do a show with a panel

                  Looking at the above list, one might think a solo show would be the easiest. Why? No scheduling conflicts, no arguments over the direction of the show. You have total control. So what is the problem? You need to be comfortable talking to the wall. It takes a little confidence to pull this off. Michael Hyatt is one of my favorite authors. I read his book Platform every January to kick of my year. Michael has publicly stated that he is not comfortable doing a solo show.

                  So then doing a show with a co-host is easier? This sounds true up front. You don't have to do all the work, and there is another person to help promote the show.

                  But you now have the occasional challenge of scheduling conflicts. The more people you have, the harder it is to get everyone together. The solution is to pick a time when everyone knows you will be recording and make a commitment to that time. This is easier said than done, especially when multiple time zones are included, and multiple life configurations are included (kids, jobs, etc).

                  So again, it depends.

                  Taking Phone Calls

                  I think we all grew up listening to radio shows who take phone calls and we want to recreate that scenario. So how do you take phone calls. The answer? It depends. If you are doing a solo show, you can get a Google Voice Number or a Toll-Free Number at Podcastvoicemail.com and plug the phone into a mixer using your headphone jack. Then you can talk into your microphone that goes into the mixer, you plug the phone into the mixer, and send the mix of you and the phone out to a service like Mixlr.com Send the same output into a portable recorder like a Zoom H1.

                  But what if you have a co-host? What if you want a phone screener? Then things get way more complicated including two mix-minus setups that I won't even attempt to explain it here (it would be something we could do some consulting on).

                  The bottom line is, "It depends"

                  Sometimes You Have to Jump In

                  I bought myself a new 55" TV for Christmas. I brought it home, and went to put it on my old TV stand, and it was too big. I had to buy a bigger stand. Then I went to plug it into my sound bar, and you guessed it. Even though both the TV and the soundbar were from the same company, I needed to go buy a new cable to plug in.

                  Some things you only learn things by doing them.

                  If you want to avoid making the common podcast mistakes when it comes to planning your show, purchasing gear, promoting your show, I urge you to sign up for the School of Podcasting or join the Podcasting in Six Weeks Course which is starting on January 6th.

                   

                  How Can Help You?

                  One-on-one Podcast Consulting. Schedule a Session Today

                  Learn At Your Own Pace at the School of Podcasting

                  Group Coaching "Podcasting in Six Weeks" Course (includes 1 year at the School of Podcasting)

                  ]]>4d0c29d858dfcdb85b61d2c156d6c1b9Mon, 18 Dec 2017 05:00:00 -040036:11falsefull597597Lessons and Observations from PodConI attended the first ever PodCon in Seattle this weekend. It was cofounder by Hank and John Green who are You tubers who have a successful Dear Hank and John show, Joseph Fink from Welcome to Nightvale, Justin and Travis McElroy (My brother, My brother and Me).

                  I went to the opening ceremonies with close to 1000 people in the room that reported any of these people came on the stage. They had other podcasters as well. They were asked questions and were all very witty. When asked about any weird jobs they had done in the past one person answered “Youth Pastor” and the audiences erupted into laughter with people falling out of their seats.

                  I stood there grinning. I realized that there was an inside joke but I was not inside to get it. The only way to get inside is to talk to as many people as I could.

                  Lollapalooza for Podcasting As the music business is having a hard time, many bands now tour together as a festival. These bands may not bring enough people out to support a solo show, but combine them together you have enough people to warrant the expense of the tour. You then get the added cross-promotion benefits.

                  Cosplay? I found out that ar events like ComicCon and DragonCon people dress up like their favorite characters. This was happening at PodcCon. What some might call “Weird,” is actually called cosplay as many people dressed as characters (especially from the Adventure Zone show, and Welcome to Nightvale ).

                  Community One of the great things about a podcast event like podcast movement or Podfest multi media nations expo is everyone there wants to learn podcasting. When I attend these, I am with my people. When the people with elf ears walked in, I’m sure they felt the same.

                  Speakers The sessions I attended were not awful, except one. I was surprised at the lack of experience on some of the panels. The panel on monetization announced they had a combined level of 2.5 years. This probably explains why the only two ways they listed to make money from your podcast was sponsors and Patreon. There are also affiliates, selling your own products, donations.

                  Because Of My Podcast - I'm Talking To People Who I Thought Would Never Talk to Me

                  17:17 Kira and Kenza are on episode four and have had their podcast open doors to people they never thought would talk to them. Check them out at https://www.tellmeeverythingpodcast.com

                  A Quick Tip To Grow Your Audience from Drew Ackerman of the Sleep With My Podcast

                  32:40 When you reply to an email, tweet, comment, thank everyone for listening, and then ask them how they found your show. If it was from another person (word of mouth) find that person and thank them and ask them how they found your show. Check out Drew at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com and check out Drew's interview with Dave.

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  tellemeeverythingpodcast.com

                  My brother, My brother and Me

                  Dear Hank and John show

                  Welcome to Nightvale

                  Adventure Zone show

                  Sleep With My Podcast

                  Podfest Portable Media Expo (in Florida)

                  Blue Yeti Microphones (Best Podcasting Gear)

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Ready to Start Your Podcast?

                  Check out Podcasting in Six Weeks or

                  Join the School of Podcasting and learn at your own pace.

                   

                  ]]>I attended the first ever PodCon in Seattle this weekend. It was cofounder by Hank and John Green who are You tubers who have a successful Dear Hank and John show, Joseph Fink from Welcome to Nightvale, Justin and Travis McElroy (My brother, My brother and Me).

                  I went to the opening ceremonies with close to 1000 people in the room that reported any of these people came on the stage. They had other podcasters as well. They were asked questions and were all very witty. When asked about any weird jobs they had done in the past one person answered “Youth Pastor” and the audiences erupted into laughter with people falling out of their seats.

                  I stood there grinning. I realized that there was an inside joke but I was not inside to get it. The only way to get inside is to talk to as many people as I could.

                  Lollapalooza for Podcasting As the music business is having a hard time, many bands now tour together as a festival. These bands may not bring enough people out to support a solo show, but combine them together you have enough people to warrant the expense of the tour. You then get the added cross-promotion benefits.

                  Cosplay? I found out that ar events like ComicCon and DragonCon people dress up like their favorite characters. This was happening at PodcCon. What some might call “Weird,” is actually called cosplay as many people dressed as characters (especially from the Adventure Zone show, and Welcome to Nightvale ).

                  Community One of the great things about a podcast event like podcast movement or Podfest multi media nations expo is everyone there wants to learn podcasting. When I attend these, I am with my people. When the people with elf ears walked in, I’m sure they felt the same.

                  Speakers The sessions I attended were not awful, except one. I was surprised at the lack of experience on some of the panels. The panel on monetization announced they had a combined level of 2.5 years. This probably explains why the only two ways they listed to make money from your podcast was sponsors and Patreon. There are also affiliates, selling your own products, donations.

                  Because Of My Podcast - I'm Talking To People Who I Thought Would Never Talk to Me

                  17:17 Kira and Kenza are on episode four and have had their podcast open doors to people they never thought would talk to them. Check them out at https://www.tellmeeverythingpodcast.com

                  A Quick Tip To Grow Your Audience from Drew Ackerman of the Sleep With My Podcast

                  32:40 When you reply to an email, tweet, comment, thank everyone for listening, and then ask them how they found your show. If it was from another person (word of mouth) find that person and thank them and ask them how they found your show. Check out Drew at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com and check out Drew's interview with Dave.

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  tellemeeverythingpodcast.com

                  My brother, My brother and Me

                  Dear Hank and John show

                  Welcome to Nightvale

                  Adventure Zone show

                  Sleep With My Podcast

                  Podfest Portable Media Expo (in Florida)

                  Blue Yeti Microphones (Best Podcasting Gear)

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Ready to Start Your Podcast?

                  Check out Podcasting in Six Weeks or

                  Join the School of Podcasting and learn at your own pace.

                   

                  ]]>ef49ce41779d9e1fca7413d630cab1a1Mon, 11 Dec 2017 05:00:00 -040039:41falsefull596596Flattening the Podcast Learning Curve1:30

                  Matt from the band EleventySeven tells how his band had "taken a break" for the better part of four years. They decided to get the band back together, but how are we going to get the word out about the band reforming, and reconnecting with their audience? By starting a podcast! They connected with their audience and reached their Kickstarter goal in just a few days

                  Check out the band's music and podcast at http://www.eleventysevenisalive.com/

                  How To Flatten Your Podcast Learning Curve

                  14:07

                  As someone with 20+ years in the education field, one of the things I do when I learn a new subject was to take a ton of notes on ANY question that came across my mind as I consumed content as a student. This week, I got into a subject that I had not dabbled in the early 1990's. To go from playing techmo bowl on the first nintendo to playing Madden 2018 on an Xbox One is a bit of a culture shock. This is a good thing. I'm WAAAY out of my comfort zone with a huge learning curve in front of me. So here are some tips on overcoming and managing learning curves.

                  Define Your Goal

                  It's not enough to join the School of Podcasting, your goal is to launch your podcast. I'm going to through in here that you need to Define Your Why. For example, if you're doing a solo show with no guests. There is no need to read up on creating a mix minus. Some might even say you don't even need to read up on a mixer. 

                  When you are first starting out, keep things simple.

                  The problem is you don't know what you don't know. This leads me to point number two.

                  2.  Talk to someone who is doing what you are doing.

                  As you don't know what you don't know, you need to find someone who can help you define the area you need to investigate and those you don't. There is one statement that I have seen from my chair and I believe to be very true. You will pay for your podcast in one of two currencies. You will pay with time searching for your answers, or you will pay with money paying someone to help you get to where you want to go. 

                  3. Make Sure You're Using Good Resource Material

                  There is a ton of GREAT material for FREE on YouTube. There is also a TON of outdated material that can steer you in the wrong direction. So when you do a search on YouTube currently there is a filter option in the upper right-hand corner that allows you to sort by upload date to have the latest videos at the top. There are tons of Facebook Groups, and other resources (meetup.com) where you can find a community of people who can answer some questions. However, be sure to check out who is answering your question. Every week I see tons of articles on the subject of podcasting written by people who apparently have no podcast. Check out this video

                  Also when you do find a good resource, use it. I've worked in different tech support departments,  and I know we are in a hurry to get going but ask anyone and they will tell you that most companies put a tremendous amount of effort into the "on-boarding" process (getting your customer setup). This typically includes some sort of welcome email, and in many cases a video. You need to read more than the email title, and if you are given resources, use them.

                  4. Break Your Goals into Tasks

                  As the old saying goes, "How do you eat an elephant?" The answer is one bit at a time. So once you understand where you want to go, you break your goal into smaller tasks. So you can take the goal of identifying your podcast and break it into the tasks of creating a list of five potential names, check domain availability, and perform a Google search to see if the name is in use. 

                  5. Don't Try to Learn it All In One Sitting

                  While you may be excited, when you try to do too much in too little a time, you can burn yourself out

                  6. Give Yourself a Timeline, but Don't Bite Off Your Face

                  Timelines can help you see the plan, and give you an idea of when your goal will be met. However, I've seen people make really bad decisions because they are way behind based on their self-made deadline. 

                  7. Set a Time to Work On Your Goal in a Focused Fashion

                  Set a specific time when you will work on your goal. When you are working on your podcast, turn off distractions (Facebook, Notifications on the Phone, YouTube). 

                  8. Track Your Progress

                  There is something that happens in the brain when you write something down. By writing down your goals, and your steps, you can then go back and check these off as you accomplish them

                  Help The Smith Girls

                  35:50

                  I only met Scott Smith once on the Podcasters Roundtable. I was deeply saddened that Scott shot and killed his wife, then turned the gun on himself leaving his two daughters. If you'd like to help these two children (every little helps) see https://www.gofundme.com/helpthesmithgirls

                  Spotify Now Available in Libsyn Dashboard to All Libsyn Customers

                  38:00

                  You can now get your show listed in Spotify if you are a Libsyn customer. Previously they were only approving a small percentage of the shows that were submitted. They say that once you add Spotify to your destinations, you should be able to see the show in the Spotify app in two weeks (I wouldn't be surprised if this doesn't get pushed back to four weeks as they are going to get a ton of podcast submissions. See https://support.libsyn.com/kb/spotify/

                  Libsyn has also launched their new stats interface which is completely mobile friendly

                  Be Part of the Ask Me Anything Episode 600

                  40:33

                  Episode 600 will be in January 2018. I'm looking for you to send in questions for me about anything but podcasting. I need them by January 1, 2018. See my contact page

                  Where Can You See Me

                  Podcon in Seatle December 9-10

                  February 8-10 Podfest.us in Florida

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Mentioned On This Show

                  Speakpipe

                  Cale Nelson from Ham Radio 360

                  Music Radio Creative Jingles

                  Better Podcasting - Thanks for the Twinkies

                  Glenn The Geek at Horseradionetwork.com

                  Casey Kaen Loses it about Doing a Dog Death Dedication

                   

                  Let Me Help You Launch a Your Successful Podcast

                  Would you like One on One Consulting? Schedule a session

                  Want to learn at your own pace, and network with other podcasters. Join the School of Podcasting

                  Want to get started quickly? Check out Podcasting in Six Weeks

                  ]]>1:30

                  Matt from the band EleventySeven tells how his band had "taken a break" for the better part of four years. They decided to get the band back together, but how are we going to get the word out about the band reforming, and reconnecting with their audience? By starting a podcast! They connected with their audience and reached their Kickstarter goal in just a few days

                  Check out the band's music and podcast at http://www.eleventysevenisalive.com/

                  How To Flatten Your Podcast Learning Curve

                  14:07

                  As someone with 20+ years in the education field, one of the things I do when I learn a new subject was to take a ton of notes on ANY question that came across my mind as I consumed content as a student. This week, I got into a subject that I had not dabbled in the early 1990's. To go from playing techmo bowl on the first nintendo to playing Madden 2018 on an Xbox One is a bit of a culture shock. This is a good thing. I'm WAAAY out of my comfort zone with a huge learning curve in front of me. So here are some tips on overcoming and managing learning curves.

                  Define Your Goal

                  It's not enough to join the School of Podcasting, your goal is to launch your podcast. I'm going to through in here that you need to Define Your Why. For example, if you're doing a solo show with no guests. There is no need to read up on creating a mix minus. Some might even say you don't even need to read up on a mixer. 

                  When you are first starting out, keep things simple.

                  The problem is you don't know what you don't know. This leads me to point number two.

                  2.  Talk to someone who is doing what you are doing.

                  As you don't know what you don't know, you need to find someone who can help you define the area you need to investigate and those you don't. There is one statement that I have seen from my chair and I believe to be very true. You will pay for your podcast in one of two currencies. You will pay with time searching for your answers, or you will pay with money paying someone to help you get to where you want to go. 

                  3. Make Sure You're Using Good Resource Material

                  There is a ton of GREAT material for FREE on YouTube. There is also a TON of outdated material that can steer you in the wrong direction. So when you do a search on YouTube currently there is a filter option in the upper right-hand corner that allows you to sort by upload date to have the latest videos at the top. There are tons of Facebook Groups, and other resources (meetup.com) where you can find a community of people who can answer some questions. However, be sure to check out who is answering your question. Every week I see tons of articles on the subject of podcasting written by people who apparently have no podcast. Check out this video

                  Also when you do find a good resource, use it. I've worked in different tech support departments,  and I know we are in a hurry to get going but ask anyone and they will tell you that most companies put a tremendous amount of effort into the "on-boarding" process (getting your customer setup). This typically includes some sort of welcome email, and in many cases a video. You need to read more than the email title, and if you are given resources, use them.

                  4. Break Your Goals into Tasks

                  As the old saying goes, "How do you eat an elephant?" The answer is one bit at a time. So once you understand where you want to go, you break your goal into smaller tasks. So you can take the goal of identifying your podcast and break it into the tasks of creating a list of five potential names, check domain availability, and perform a Google search to see if the name is in use. 

                  5. Don't Try to Learn it All In One Sitting

                  While you may be excited, when you try to do too much in too little a time, you can burn yourself out

                  6. Give Yourself a Timeline, but Don't Bite Off Your Face

                  Timelines can help you see the plan, and give you an idea of when your goal will be met. However, I've seen people make really bad decisions because they are way behind based on their self-made deadline. 

                  7. Set a Time to Work On Your Goal in a Focused Fashion

                  Set a specific time when you will work on your goal. When you are working on your podcast, turn off distractions (Facebook, Notifications on the Phone, YouTube). 

                  8. Track Your Progress

                  There is something that happens in the brain when you write something down. By writing down your goals, and your steps, you can then go back and check these off as you accomplish them

                  Help The Smith Girls

                  35:50

                  I only met Scott Smith once on the Podcasters Roundtable. I was deeply saddened that Scott shot and killed his wife, then turned the gun on himself leaving his two daughters. If you'd like to help these two children (every little helps) see https://www.gofundme.com/helpthesmithgirls

                  Spotify Now Available in Libsyn Dashboard to All Libsyn Customers

                  38:00

                  You can now get your show listed in Spotify if you are a Libsyn customer. Previously they were only approving a small percentage of the shows that were submitted. They say that once you add Spotify to your destinations, you should be able to see the show in the Spotify app in two weeks (I wouldn't be surprised if this doesn't get pushed back to four weeks as they are going to get a ton of podcast submissions. See https://support.libsyn.com/kb/spotify/

                  Libsyn has also launched their new stats interface which is completely mobile friendly

                  Be Part of the Ask Me Anything Episode 600

                  40:33

                  Episode 600 will be in January 2018. I'm looking for you to send in questions for me about anything but podcasting. I need them by January 1, 2018. See my contact page

                  Where Can You See Me

                  Podcon in Seatle December 9-10

                  February 8-10 Podfest.us in Florida

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Mentioned On This Show

                  Speakpipe

                  Cale Nelson from Ham Radio 360

                  Music Radio Creative Jingles

                  Better Podcasting - Thanks for the Twinkies

                  Glenn The Geek at Horseradionetwork.com

                  Casey Kaen Loses it about Doing a Dog Death Dedication

                   

                  Let Me Help You Launch a Your Successful Podcast

                  Would you like One on One Consulting? Schedule a session

                  Want to learn at your own pace, and network with other podcasters. Join the School of Podcasting

                  Want to get started quickly? Check out Podcasting in Six Weeks

                  ]]>3383d6cf0bd8cf2721d4bac807f8be04Mon, 04 Dec 2017 05:00:00 -040043:51falsefull595595What Will You Do Differently For Your Podcast in 2018?Every now and then I do an episode where you provide an answer to a question and we all learn together. This episode we asked the question, "What will you be doing differently in 2018?" Here are the people and their answers (in Alphabetical order)
                  Here is Who Contributed to the Episode

                  1:50 Abby From atimeforhorses.com - is going to keep podcasting because she is having fun.

                  3:22 Anna from Authentic Parenting has planned her entire 2018, is going to do deep dives based on audience feedback, and create a form for potential guests.

                  6:18 Ben from http://modernselfprotection.com/ will be more consistent and is adding a blog to his site, and create some online courses to deliver this content. Dave uses Thinkific to manage the School of Podcasting membership area.

                  8:50 Brad- wearethecinemaguys.com

                  11:04 Bryan - engagingmissions.com

                  13:45 Clay - Fishnerds.com

                  16:24 Daniel Everybody's National Parks

                  18:22 Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show

                  20:06 Kim from Toastmasters 101

                  21:34 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast

                  22:57 Landen from Calling All Platforms

                  25:08 Randy Cantrel from Peer Advantage Groups

                  26:18 Scott from the Computer Tutor podcast (plus a big announcement about Podfest.us)

                  29:16 Seth from Geekville Radio

                  31:17 Todd From Trucker Dump Podcast

                  35:29 Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief Podcast

                  37:59 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom

                  39:38 Zack from Rasing (pa)Rents

                  Summary

                  Some people are adjusting their schedules (wanting to be more consistent, most are planning on doing fewer episodes to avoid burnout, and to provide more time to promote

                  Some listeners are planning on focusing on running their show like a business and attempt to bring in some income with their podcast

                  Some are updating their platform by trying interviews (if they were solo) and vice versa (doing solo shows if they were doing primarily interviews)

                  Some are looking to find ways to engage their audience more by attending events, creating Facebook Groups, and ramping up their social media presence.

                  Some are having fun doing their show, and because of that, they aren't going to change a thing

                  The bottom line is your show is just that YOUR SHOW and you can do whatever you want. If things are going great, then don't change a thing. If you want to try something, then you can. There is only one way to know if it will work. That is to get it in front of your audience. This can be in the form of an email or Facebook looking for feedback, or by just trying something in your show and seeing what kind of feedback you get.

                  Next Question Episode

                  For episode 600 I am breaking format. I am doing what is called an "Ask Me Anything" episode (AMA). I am throwing in one more bit of criteria. You can ask me about anything EXCEPT podcasting. 

                  So if you've ever wanted to know the person behind the microphone, now is the time. This feels a little narcissistic, but the people I passed this idea by thought it would be a good way to let people get to know me (just this one time). I need your questions by January 1st, 2018 (preferably in audio format). Episode 600 is January 8th, 2018. There are different formats you can contact me on my contact page

                  How Can I Help You With Your Podcast?

                  One on One Consulting?

                  Self Paced Tutorials and Membership at the School of Podcasting?

                  Six Week Group Coaching Podcast Course

                  I've been podcasting since 2005, and my background is in Technical Education. I'm an award-winning podcaster ( and trainer) and would love to help you with your podcast.

                  ]]>Every now and then I do an episode where you provide an answer to a question and we all learn together. This episode we asked the question, "What will you be doing differently in 2018?" Here are the people and their answers (in Alphabetical order)
                  Here is Who Contributed to the Episode

                  1:50 Abby From atimeforhorses.com - is going to keep podcasting because she is having fun.

                  3:22 Anna from Authentic Parenting has planned her entire 2018, is going to do deep dives based on audience feedback, and create a form for potential guests.

                  6:18 Ben from http://modernselfprotection.com/ will be more consistent and is adding a blog to his site, and create some online courses to deliver this content. Dave uses Thinkific to manage the School of Podcasting membership area.

                  8:50 Brad- wearethecinemaguys.com

                  11:04 Bryan - engagingmissions.com

                  13:45 Clay - Fishnerds.com

                  16:24 Daniel Everybody's National Parks

                  18:22 Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show

                  20:06 Kim from Toastmasters 101

                  21:34 Kit from Active Travel Adventures Podcast

                  22:57 Landen from Calling All Platforms

                  25:08 Randy Cantrel from Peer Advantage Groups

                  26:18 Scott from the Computer Tutor podcast (plus a big announcement about Podfest.us)

                  29:16 Seth from Geekville Radio

                  31:17 Todd From Trucker Dump Podcast

                  35:29 Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief Podcast

                  37:59 Win from Butterflies of Wisdom

                  39:38 Zack from Rasing (pa)Rents

                  Summary

                  Some people are adjusting their schedules (wanting to be more consistent, most are planning on doing fewer episodes to avoid burnout, and to provide more time to promote

                  Some listeners are planning on focusing on running their show like a business and attempt to bring in some income with their podcast

                  Some are updating their platform by trying interviews (if they were solo) and vice versa (doing solo shows if they were doing primarily interviews)

                  Some are looking to find ways to engage their audience more by attending events, creating Facebook Groups, and ramping up their social media presence.

                  Some are having fun doing their show, and because of that, they aren't going to change a thing

                  The bottom line is your show is just that YOUR SHOW and you can do whatever you want. If things are going great, then don't change a thing. If you want to try something, then you can. There is only one way to know if it will work. That is to get it in front of your audience. This can be in the form of an email or Facebook looking for feedback, or by just trying something in your show and seeing what kind of feedback you get.

                  Next Question Episode

                  For episode 600 I am breaking format. I am doing what is called an "Ask Me Anything" episode (AMA). I am throwing in one more bit of criteria. You can ask me about anything EXCEPT podcasting. 

                  So if you've ever wanted to know the person behind the microphone, now is the time. This feels a little narcissistic, but the people I passed this idea by thought it would be a good way to let people get to know me (just this one time). I need your questions by January 1st, 2018 (preferably in audio format). Episode 600 is January 8th, 2018. There are different formats you can contact me on my contact page

                  How Can I Help You With Your Podcast?

                  One on One Consulting?

                  Self Paced Tutorials and Membership at the School of Podcasting?

                  Six Week Group Coaching Podcast Course

                  I've been podcasting since 2005, and my background is in Technical Education. I'm an award-winning podcaster ( and trainer) and would love to help you with your podcast.

                  ]]>23b66fd2faa52b8c0085b97188ccdc84Mon, 27 Nov 2017 05:00:00 -040055:26falsefull594594Should You Make Your Guests Jump Through Hoops?Last week I explained how I learned of a strategy from Doug Sandler of the Nice Guys on Business show where the goal is to bring on guests who would be a good client for you (assuming you're podcasting as part of your business). Doug's business is Turnkey Podcast. There is little focus on your audience and more emphasis on your guest. The presenter also requires that their potential guest subscribes, to their podcast and gives them a five-star review to be considered. This was the part that I thought was a little "black hat."  I wanted to reserve my judgment until I spoke with Doug. Today I have Doug Sandler on the show to share his insights into his strategy.
                  Because Of My Podcast I'm Much Better at Public Speaking: Bill Huchison

                  1:45

                  Bill Hutchison is a full-time missionary and has a podcast  every now and then Bill is asked to speak in churches. Today Bill shares how he had to think on the fly when he hit a technical snag, anbecausese of his podcast he was able to pull it off. 

                  Preparing for Episode 600

                  4:55

                  I'm doing an "Ask Dave Anything (except podcasting questions)" will be the topic for episode 600. Send in your questions (with the title Episode 600) by January 1st, 2018

                  Your Target Customer as Your Guest Part II Doug Sandler Interview

                  7:00 Feedback from last week's show

                  In today's discussion you hear:

                  9:23

                  Doug did his podcast for 16 months without making a dime.

                  He went from 20,000 downloads to 1.2 million in the second 16 months.

                  His guests are his target clients

                  How does his stop his guests from being boring?

                  Why his potential guests MUST give him a five-star review and subscribe to the show

                  Does having guests on your show ensure 1.2 million downloads?

                  Doug didn't get into podcasting to make friends

                  Summary:

                  There are no rules in podcasting? Will I look into using my podcast to get clients? I already do. The whole point of the School of Podcasting is to exhibit my expertise, and show you I know how to create a show that engages your audience. I might try this strategy in the future and do something like Natalie Ectal from BizChix.com where she records coaching calls and uses them as episodes. While I force potential guests to subscribe, rate, and provide a five-star review? No.

                  Where Is Dave Going?

                  35:09

                  Podcon in Seatle Dec 9-10

                  Podfest in Florida Feb 8-10

                  Social Media Marketing World  2/28- 3 /2 San Diego

                  Fixing a Podcast Episode After Your Published It

                  36:07

                  There is nothing worse than waking up to an inbox full of emails from listeners letting you know there is a mistake in your latest episode. This could be silence, or an edit point that you thought you took out (but didn't). You panick. Oh No! What do I do? Here is what you do.

                  Do NOT Create a New Episode

                  If you're using Libsyn.com go to Content > Previously Published and edit the Episode. There you can use the replace option to upload the repaired version of the episode. I strongly suggest you use the exact same file name. This way you don't have to wait for your episode to propagate across the Internet. Your feed has the name of the file, and when someone who didn't download the episode with the mistake presses download, they get the repaired version.

                  If you're using Blubrry, you can go into PowerPress and upload your repaired file (and it will replace the old file). Again, I strongly urge you to use the exact same file name.

                  Who Gets the File?

                  When someone gets the first (wrong) version of your file, the app they use doesn't know there is an issue. Consequently, the app won't download the new version (because to the app, it's the same file).

                  But I Want Everyone to Get the New Version!

                  The only way to have all of your audience to get new version is to create a completely new episode (and delete the old episode). This might annoy your subscribers (who typically are the people who get your episode first as it's automated). They may have already listened to and delete the episode, and then all the sudden here it comes again.

                  What's the Best Solution?

                  The best solution is to ALWAYS listen to the ENTIRE episode before uploading it to your media host. In other words, the best way to fix the mistake is to not make it in the first place. With that in mind, we are all human and it will happen. I personally just replace the old version and if someone tells me about the mistake I apologize to them and explain they now have a collectors edition.

                  How Can I Help You

                  Need one on one conslting? Schedule Some Time

                  Learn at your own pace at the School of Podcasting

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Group Coaching

                  Mentioned in Today's Show

                  Scott Johnson From the Computer Tutor Show

                  Podcast Review Show

                  Podcast Rodeo Show

                   

                  ]]>Last week I explained how I learned of a strategy from Doug Sandler of the Nice Guys on Business show where the goal is to bring on guests who would be a good client for you (assuming you're podcasting as part of your business). Doug's business is Turnkey Podcast. There is little focus on your audience and more emphasis on your guest. The presenter also requires that their potential guest subscribes, to their podcast and gives them a five-star review to be considered. This was the part that I thought was a little "black hat."  I wanted to reserve my judgment until I spoke with Doug. Today I have Doug Sandler on the show to share his insights into his strategy.
                  Because Of My Podcast I'm Much Better at Public Speaking: Bill Huchison

                  1:45

                  Bill Hutchison is a full-time missionary and has a podcast  every now and then Bill is asked to speak in churches. Today Bill shares how he had to think on the fly when he hit a technical snag, anbecausese of his podcast he was able to pull it off. 

                  Preparing for Episode 600

                  4:55

                  I'm doing an "Ask Dave Anything (except podcasting questions)" will be the topic for episode 600. Send in your questions (with the title Episode 600) by January 1st, 2018

                  Your Target Customer as Your Guest Part II Doug Sandler Interview

                  7:00 Feedback from last week's show

                  In today's discussion you hear:

                  9:23

                  Doug did his podcast for 16 months without making a dime.

                  He went from 20,000 downloads to 1.2 million in the second 16 months.

                  His guests are his target clients

                  How does his stop his guests from being boring?

                  Why his potential guests MUST give him a five-star review and subscribe to the show

                  Does having guests on your show ensure 1.2 million downloads?

                  Doug didn't get into podcasting to make friends

                  Summary:

                  There are no rules in podcasting? Will I look into using my podcast to get clients? I already do. The whole point of the School of Podcasting is to exhibit my expertise, and show you I know how to create a show that engages your audience. I might try this strategy in the future and do something like Natalie Ectal from BizChix.com where she records coaching calls and uses them as episodes. While I force potential guests to subscribe, rate, and provide a five-star review? No.

                  Where Is Dave Going?

                  35:09

                  Podcon in Seatle Dec 9-10

                  Podfest in Florida Feb 8-10

                  Social Media Marketing World  2/28- 3 /2 San Diego

                  Fixing a Podcast Episode After Your Published It

                  36:07

                  There is nothing worse than waking up to an inbox full of emails from listeners letting you know there is a mistake in your latest episode. This could be silence, or an edit point that you thought you took out (but didn't). You panick. Oh No! What do I do? Here is what you do.

                  Do NOT Create a New Episode

                  If you're using Libsyn.com go to Content > Previously Published and edit the Episode. There you can use the replace option to upload the repaired version of the episode. I strongly suggest you use the exact same file name. This way you don't have to wait for your episode to propagate across the Internet. Your feed has the name of the file, and when someone who didn't download the episode with the mistake presses download, they get the repaired version.

                  If you're using Blubrry, you can go into PowerPress and upload your repaired file (and it will replace the old file). Again, I strongly urge you to use the exact same file name.

                  Who Gets the File?

                  When someone gets the first (wrong) version of your file, the app they use doesn't know there is an issue. Consequently, the app won't download the new version (because to the app, it's the same file).

                  But I Want Everyone to Get the New Version!

                  The only way to have all of your audience to get new version is to create a completely new episode (and delete the old episode). This might annoy your subscribers (who typically are the people who get your episode first as it's automated). They may have already listened to and delete the episode, and then all the sudden here it comes again.

                  What's the Best Solution?

                  The best solution is to ALWAYS listen to the ENTIRE episode before uploading it to your media host. In other words, the best way to fix the mistake is to not make it in the first place. With that in mind, we are all human and it will happen. I personally just replace the old version and if someone tells me about the mistake I apologize to them and explain they now have a collectors edition.

                  How Can I Help You

                  Need one on one conslting? Schedule Some Time

                  Learn at your own pace at the School of Podcasting

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Group Coaching

                  Mentioned in Today's Show

                  Scott Johnson From the Computer Tutor Show

                  Podcast Review Show

                  Podcast Rodeo Show

                   

                  ]]>edb783ff53da87235358233994f5545fMon, 20 Nov 2017 04:45:34 -040046:13falsefull593593Your Customer Is Your GuestToday I'm back from Speaking at DC Podfest (what a great event) and I went to a session that had some interesting points that I wanted to share. 

                  The session was titled, "Size Doesn’t Matter: Build a Monetization Program with Any Size Audience with Doug Sandler and Strickland Bonner. Doung and Strickland host the Nice Guys on Business show. Their website states they have over 1 million downloads, and they showed proof in their session, and I can verify they are not lying. They explained a new strategy to grow your customers using your podcast.

                  Because Of My Podcast: Stephanie Logan

                  8:35

                  Stephanie does the DC Diary show (sharing stories of DC Professionals) and she explains how Because of her podcast she was able to transition from a job that was more policy to now working in Media and communications

                  Interviewing Your Potential Customers - The Power Of Podcasting

                  11:05

                  I have said one of the benefits of starting a podcast is people who would normally not give you the time of day, now will sit down to talk with you on a podcast. We've seen people use the power of being part of the media to partner with events and get access to vendors.  Interviewing people that you want to start a partnership with is a solid way of breaking the ice. 

                  Doug repeated his main point, You have to reverse your thinking and focus on the guest, and identify people who would be a good client for your business. This was an interesting idea. 

                  One example in the session was someone who did a show about visiting the national parks. This is a hard show to monetize outside of a guidebook, or maybe mosquito spray. Doug said you should find the person who is in charge of the national parks budget, and have them on as a guest. They would know alot about the National Parks. When the interview is done you could mention that the show takes a lot of effort, and to keep going needs to find a sponsor and see if they would be interested in sponsoring the show (I would twist that and ask them if they knew anybody who would be interested in sponsoring the show). Again, interesting.

                  I know consultants Natalie Echtal and Katie Krimitsos who have offered discounted coaching calls with the knowledge that the call may be used on the podcast. This provides content for the audience (as you help to solve the problems of your target audience) and shows off your expertise. 

                  So Doug pointed out that if you were a coach, you might interview people who need a coach. This does get a little confusing. If someone needs a coach, then one might think they aren't that successful (cause they need a coach), and with that in mind,  if it's not a live coaching call, what kind of content does that create? This is where this idea goes a little south for me. It's the part where you have to put your brain on backward. 

                  What if you target customer is a prime prospect, but a horrible guest? If you've listened to my show (or Moondog Marketing) I am all about content, content, content. This is not focused on the audience, or the downloads, it is focused on getting in front of your target customer. They said their conversion rate was around 20%. For every 10 guests, they would get two new clients. This really goes against my main ideas, and I asked, "What if you guest/future client is boring?" They answered that they did their best to create good content. 

                  They then also stated there was a vetting process. They don't let "just anyone" get on the microphone. 

                  I left the session scratching my head a bit and realized I would need to listen to an episode to maybe complete my opinion. Their show is well produced and has a fair amount of comedy built in. Maybe a bit too much for my taste as I was five minutes in and they were still having a "how the sausage is made" discussion about the show's publishing schedule (which for me was boring as watching paint dry) and I never made it to their interview. Maybe I'll go back later.

                  There is more to their strategy, and in my opinion, it's slightly sketchy. I've invited Doug Sandler to come on so we could have a dialogue about. We'll save that for a future episode.

                  Questions of the Month

                  22:09

                  I need your answers to:

                  What will you be doing differently in 2018?

                  If you could only listen to one show, what would it be, where and what is it, and WHY is it your favorite (be sure to tell us about you too)

                  Deadline is 11/20/17

                  How to NOT Make Money with Podcasting

                  24:34

                  Jessica Kupferman from JKM Agency (which recently merged with a new agency) comes with a story of how to NOT MAKE MONEY with a podcast.

                  In this example, a podcaster knew they were going to start a campaign for a product. The campaign was going to start in the next episode. The podcaster covered ALL the competition of the sponsor in the current episode. 

                  The sponsor saw the post and asked, "Are they sponsoring the show?" As you might imagine they might wonder why they have to PAY for exposure while their competition did not. While you're always in control of your content, when sponsors get involved you may want to tread lightly around certain topics. 

                  Start Podcasting With Any of the Three Resources

                  28:00

                  One on one Podcast Consulting (Quick and specific to your podcast questions)

                  Join the School of Podcasting (Step by step tutorials, private Facebook group, priority email support, and live group coaching)

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks - Live Group Coaching for Six Weeks starting in January 2018, plus a year membership at the School of Podcasting

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Moondog Marketing episode discussing the importance of content

                  Good Grief Podcast

                  The Story Behind podcast

                  Epodcast Productions

                   

                  ]]>Today I'm back from Speaking at DC Podfest (what a great event) and I went to a session that had some interesting points that I wanted to share. 

                  The session was titled, "Size Doesn’t Matter: Build a Monetization Program with Any Size Audience with Doug Sandler and Strickland Bonner. Doung and Strickland host the Nice Guys on Business show. Their website states they have over 1 million downloads, and they showed proof in their session, and I can verify they are not lying. They explained a new strategy to grow your customers using your podcast.

                  Because Of My Podcast: Stephanie Logan

                  8:35

                  Stephanie does the DC Diary show (sharing stories of DC Professionals) and she explains how Because of her podcast she was able to transition from a job that was more policy to now working in Media and communications

                  Interviewing Your Potential Customers - The Power Of Podcasting

                  11:05

                  I have said one of the benefits of starting a podcast is people who would normally not give you the time of day, now will sit down to talk with you on a podcast. We've seen people use the power of being part of the media to partner with events and get access to vendors.  Interviewing people that you want to start a partnership with is a solid way of breaking the ice. 

                  Doug repeated his main point, You have to reverse your thinking and focus on the guest, and identify people who would be a good client for your business. This was an interesting idea. 

                  One example in the session was someone who did a show about visiting the national parks. This is a hard show to monetize outside of a guidebook, or maybe mosquito spray. Doug said you should find the person who is in charge of the national parks budget, and have them on as a guest. They would know alot about the National Parks. When the interview is done you could mention that the show takes a lot of effort, and to keep going needs to find a sponsor and see if they would be interested in sponsoring the show (I would twist that and ask them if they knew anybody who would be interested in sponsoring the show). Again, interesting.

                  I know consultants Natalie Echtal and Katie Krimitsos who have offered discounted coaching calls with the knowledge that the call may be used on the podcast. This provides content for the audience (as you help to solve the problems of your target audience) and shows off your expertise. 

                  So Doug pointed out that if you were a coach, you might interview people who need a coach. This does get a little confusing. If someone needs a coach, then one might think they aren't that successful (cause they need a coach), and with that in mind,  if it's not a live coaching call, what kind of content does that create? This is where this idea goes a little south for me. It's the part where you have to put your brain on backward. 

                  What if you target customer is a prime prospect, but a horrible guest? If you've listened to my show (or Moondog Marketing) I am all about content, content, content. This is not focused on the audience, or the downloads, it is focused on getting in front of your target customer. They said their conversion rate was around 20%. For every 10 guests, they would get two new clients. This really goes against my main ideas, and I asked, "What if you guest/future client is boring?" They answered that they did their best to create good content. 

                  They then also stated there was a vetting process. They don't let "just anyone" get on the microphone. 

                  I left the session scratching my head a bit and realized I would need to listen to an episode to maybe complete my opinion. Their show is well produced and has a fair amount of comedy built in. Maybe a bit too much for my taste as I was five minutes in and they were still having a "how the sausage is made" discussion about the show's publishing schedule (which for me was boring as watching paint dry) and I never made it to their interview. Maybe I'll go back later.

                  There is more to their strategy, and in my opinion, it's slightly sketchy. I've invited Doug Sandler to come on so we could have a dialogue about. We'll save that for a future episode.

                  Questions of the Month

                  22:09

                  I need your answers to:

                  What will you be doing differently in 2018?

                  If you could only listen to one show, what would it be, where and what is it, and WHY is it your favorite (be sure to tell us about you too)

                  Deadline is 11/20/17

                  How to NOT Make Money with Podcasting

                  24:34

                  Jessica Kupferman from JKM Agency (which recently merged with a new agency) comes with a story of how to NOT MAKE MONEY with a podcast.

                  In this example, a podcaster knew they were going to start a campaign for a product. The campaign was going to start in the next episode. The podcaster covered ALL the competition of the sponsor in the current episode. 

                  The sponsor saw the post and asked, "Are they sponsoring the show?" As you might imagine they might wonder why they have to PAY for exposure while their competition did not. While you're always in control of your content, when sponsors get involved you may want to tread lightly around certain topics. 

                  Start Podcasting With Any of the Three Resources

                  28:00

                  One on one Podcast Consulting (Quick and specific to your podcast questions)

                  Join the School of Podcasting (Step by step tutorials, private Facebook group, priority email support, and live group coaching)

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks - Live Group Coaching for Six Weeks starting in January 2018, plus a year membership at the School of Podcasting

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Moondog Marketing episode discussing the importance of content

                  Good Grief Podcast

                  The Story Behind podcast

                  Epodcast Productions

                   

                  ]]>0d14beab92871f81d2a5a138e93a5985Mon, 13 Nov 2017 05:00:00 -040030:27falsefull592592Creating Events For Your Audience Part 2 - Mark DealToday we are talking with Mark Deal who has grown Podcast Atlanta to over 500 members (www.podatl.com). We get great tips on growing a local meetup, tips, and resources for better interviews, and how is creating podcasts for a living. 
                  How Long Does it Take Until Your Show Catches On?

                  George Hrab answered this question on his Geologic podcast, and George told me a long time ago that if I ever want to use a clip I could. George's show spotlights his life as the drummer of the Philadelphia Funk Authority, but also features George's Skeptic point of view with highlights on Science as well as the "Religious Moron of the Week."

                  George mentions that you shouldn't start a podcast to "be something" but instead make it because you can make something cool, interesting and fun. Make a podcast because you have a different point of view and it needs to be heard. It took him two years before an absolute stranger mentioned they listened to the show. As George says, "You're making something and that is more than most people."

                  Growing Your Local Meetup Group

                  Mark Deal runs podcast Atlanta and in 18 months his group has grown to 500+ members. In today's discussion you hear:

                  • Not all 500 show up at the same time
                  • The different formats of meeting he uses
                  • What he's doing to grow the group
                  • What didn't work in regards to growing the group
                  • How a meetup group is not exactly the same a growing a podcast
                  • How to pick a location
                  • How he offsets the price of running the meetup group
                  • How he got Gordon Firemark to come to a meetup
                  • The typical breakdown of a meeting
                  • How often they meet, and how they stay connected between meetings.
                  • The pros and cons of Meetup vs a Facebook Group
                  • The kind of "Special Events" they have
                  • Podcast Guest Experts and the Podcast Editors Facebook Groups
                  • What has happened because of hosting a podcaster's meetup (18:00)
                  • Podcast Studio Certifications, and what he feels every studio should have
                  • How he is making a living with podcasting
                  • Having Alcohol at events
                  • Other platforms he uses in addition to Faceboook, and Meetup. (Eventbrite.com )
                  • He makes money from Podcasting not Podcasters
                  • Why he uses Steve Stewart to edit his show
                  
                  

                  Check out Mark at www.podatl.com

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 2018
                  • Six weeks of group coaching and personalized attention
                  • 1 Year Subscription to the School of Podcasting
                  • Private Facebook Group
                  • Be in the relevant Podcasting Directories by February
                  • Direct access to me / Priority Email Support
                  • Focus Group to Help Shape Your Idea
                  • Your Podcast will Sound Great 
                  • Erase Your Fear of "Sounding Stupid"
                  
                  

                  Go to www.podcastinginsixweeks.com for more information. Class Size is limited.

                  Want a more leisurely pace, check out the School of Podcasting.

                  Mentioned on This Show

                  Gordon Firemark (Entertainment Lawyer)

                  Author Inside You Podcast

                  Eventbrite.com (ticketing for evens)

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Podfest.us

                  DC Podfest

                  ]]>Today we are talking with Mark Deal who has grown Podcast Atlanta to over 500 members (www.podatl.com). We get great tips on growing a local meetup, tips, and resources for better interviews, and how is creating podcasts for a living. 
                  How Long Does it Take Until Your Show Catches On?

                  George Hrab answered this question on his Geologic podcast, and George told me a long time ago that if I ever want to use a clip I could. George's show spotlights his life as the drummer of the Philadelphia Funk Authority, but also features George's Skeptic point of view with highlights on Science as well as the "Religious Moron of the Week."

                  George mentions that you shouldn't start a podcast to "be something" but instead make it because you can make something cool, interesting and fun. Make a podcast because you have a different point of view and it needs to be heard. It took him two years before an absolute stranger mentioned they listened to the show. As George says, "You're making something and that is more than most people."

                  Growing Your Local Meetup Group

                  Mark Deal runs podcast Atlanta and in 18 months his group has grown to 500+ members. In today's discussion you hear:

                  • Not all 500 show up at the same time
                  • The different formats of meeting he uses
                  • What he's doing to grow the group
                  • What didn't work in regards to growing the group
                  • How a meetup group is not exactly the same a growing a podcast
                  • How to pick a location
                  • How he offsets the price of running the meetup group
                  • How he got Gordon Firemark to come to a meetup
                  • The typical breakdown of a meeting
                  • How often they meet, and how they stay connected between meetings.
                  • The pros and cons of Meetup vs a Facebook Group
                  • The kind of "Special Events" they have
                  • Podcast Guest Experts and the Podcast Editors Facebook Groups
                  • What has happened because of hosting a podcaster's meetup (18:00)
                  • Podcast Studio Certifications, and what he feels every studio should have
                  • How he is making a living with podcasting
                  • Having Alcohol at events
                  • Other platforms he uses in addition to Faceboook, and Meetup. (Eventbrite.com )
                  • He makes money from Podcasting not Podcasters
                  • Why he uses Steve Stewart to edit his show
                  
                  

                  Check out Mark at www.podatl.com

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts January 2018
                  • Six weeks of group coaching and personalized attention
                  • 1 Year Subscription to the School of Podcasting
                  • Private Facebook Group
                  • Be in the relevant Podcasting Directories by February
                  • Direct access to me / Priority Email Support
                  • Focus Group to Help Shape Your Idea
                  • Your Podcast will Sound Great 
                  • Erase Your Fear of "Sounding Stupid"
                  
                  

                  Go to www.podcastinginsixweeks.com for more information. Class Size is limited.

                  Want a more leisurely pace, check out the School of Podcasting.

                  Mentioned on This Show

                  Gordon Firemark (Entertainment Lawyer)

                  Author Inside You Podcast

                  Eventbrite.com (ticketing for evens)

                  Social Media Marketing World

                  Podfest.us

                  DC Podfest

                  ]]>97821e2cfb754281df4645ea25d200f2Mon, 06 Nov 2017 05:01:00 -040049:03falsefull591591Lessons From Steven Spielberg - Podcast Woodshed1:58

                  Troy Heinritz has had story after story when it comes to his Black List Exposed show. He recently won a podcast award, and now was called by Sony to attend the taping of the 100th episode the Black List. Troy was on the Ask the Podcast Coach show and talked about he when he gets these opportunities, he prepares and delivers, and consequently keeps getting more opportunities.

                  Check out his show at www.goldensprialmedia.com

                  Questions of the Month

                  3:00

                  I need the answer to two questions by November 13th 2017.

                  1. What will you be doing differently in 2018 with your podcast?
                  2. What is your favorite podcast (if you could only pick 1)? What is it, what is it about? where is it? and most importantly WHY is your favorite? (be sure to mention your show as well).
                  
                  

                  I need your answers by November 13th, 2017. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact 

                  Embracing the Experience Gap

                  4:52

                  When podcasters first start, they put a lot of thought into their launch (sometimes too much), and they get their show out and into Apple Podcasts and the other directories. 

                  Then they do one thing that can really knock the passion out of them: they compare themselves to others. 

                  They want to know how many downloads other shows get, and start to focus on other podcasters instead of focusing on their audience. 

                  Back to the Woodshed

                  I've played the guitar since I was 11. When I got done with school I would deliver my papers to my paper route, eat dinner, and my friend would come over and we would play guitar for hours. We weren't very good. We weren't taking lessons, and I was learning to play lead by trying to recreate the sounds I heard on albums. 

                  In other words, I would study music, and then practice, practice, practice, until I could play it. The music that was produced on the path to "getting it" was not pretty. I have hours of tapes of us playing Ted Nugent's Stranglehold for hours. Each of us would take turns soloing over the top of it. 

                  I recorded these so I could evaluate my process. I never intended to release them to the public. You can do the same with your podcast. Record a couple test shows for evaluation.

                  How Can Podcasters Get Better?

                  Podcasters get better by podcasting. I know that sounds stupid, but there is no way to know if you're content is good unless you get it in front of your target audience. 

                  You can also study other podcasts and entertainment. You see podcasting is part of the entertainment industry. Sure some of it is educational. Then again so is Sesame Street, and it's pretty entertaining. 

                  I recently watched a documentary on Steven Spielberg. Spielberg got turned down to be in the USC film school due to grades.

                  He would take a tour of Universal Studios, and when the bus stopped for a bathroom break he would sneak away and watch people like Alfred Hitchcock direct. 

                  One of his first films  (Amblin 1968 ) was geared toward studio executives to show he was not a normal independent filmmaker. - he knew his audience, and it worked it got him hired.

                  As the youngest director under contract, he was a bit of a novelty item, so he had to prove himself over and over.

                  One famous director pulled Steven aside and said, "There are days you will go on the set and have no idea what you're doing. Your job is to make sure the cast doesn't know that. The film interviewed Richard Dreyfuss who sais he was hired on the third day of the Movie Jaws. He said they didn't have a script, and they didn't have a shark.

                  Steven decided to the movie on the ocean instead of a back lot of a movie studio. 

                  In fact, the first shark doesn’t appear until one hour and 21 minutes into the two-hour film. This was partly due to the mechanical sharks they built didn't work. The cost was 225,000. So you'll notice the use of barrels moving instead of the shark. You didn't need to see the shark. Just the music and the thought of the shark made it scary.

                  The sharks were smaller than expected so they hired shorter actors to be next to the shark.

                  The line, "“You’re going to need a bigger boat" was improvised.

                  Jaws became the first motion picture to gross more than $100 million and won three Academy Awards (for Best Sound, Best Film Editing, and Best Original Dramatic Score).

                  So how did Steven Spielberg get getter? Jaws had come in way over budget, and instead of taking 55 days, it took 159. His next two films also came in way over budget. This actually stopped from studios from working with him. Yes, he was making a lot of money at the box office, but his integrity was on the line and he improved. 

                  As podcasters we are storytellers. The only way we can get better is to keep podcasting.

                  Final Lessons

                  In the same way that Steven Spielberg didn't have all the equipment he wanted, you can make great content without having the top of the line equipment. 

                  Your next episode should be better than your previous one. You will get more confident, and your skills will improve. 

                  The only way to get better at any skill is to do it. 

                  Don't be distracted by other podcaster's success. Keep working to improve your own skills (keep woodshedding).

                  The Best Compliment a Podcaster Can Receive

                  24:20

                  For me, to have someone say that I am the same off the mic as I am off the mix is a huge compliment. This happened to me when Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv was a guest on the Podcast Junkies Show. They talk about Jim's background, a bit about his network, working with me, and how Jim balances his podcast and his life.  Its a great interview, and Harry Durran is a great interviewer. 

                  My First Impression with Squarespace

                  28:42

                  I was under the assumption that the Squarespace platform for building a website was so easy that the site almost built itself. I've head a million commercials about it. I decided to try it for my Podcasting in Six Weeks Course. 

                  While it is flexible, it is more or less a "page builder" tool. I've seen these on WordPress like Divi From Elegant Themes. The Second Line theme I mentioned comes with a page builder. Squarespace is not that different. You add an element to a page and edjust the properties of that item. I was surprised there weren't more elements. While they had enough elements to make most websites, you can look at it two ways, "hooray I'm not overwhelmed with the choices," or "Hey where is the FAQ template?" 

                  I was surprised that I couldn't change the background color of different elements. The biggest complaint is they have an e-commerce tool. This ties in with Paypal and Stripe. Both of those tools take about three percent plus a transaction fee. This is normal. What is not normal is Squarespace takes an additional three percent. When you are talking about products that are four figures, that can be a chunk of change you are paying to keep people on your website (instead of sending them to another page to check out). 

                  The bottom line is everyone says this is super drag and drop easy, and while it is easy to drag and drop, to really adjust customize items, there are lots of little boxes that pop up based on where you click. While I didn't expect zero learning curve, the onboarding process was not as easy as expected. 

                  Speed up Podcast Production

                  36:20

                  If you're on a pc, you can add a folder to the quick access area (left column) of the File Explorer Window. Go to the folder you want to access all the time, and right-click and choose Pin To Quick Access." Now you will see it on the left-hand side. You can remove it by right-clicking on it and choose "unpin from quick access." This avoids you having to "Drill down" by double-clicking on folder after folder to get to that folder.

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  The School of Podcasting

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks (Early Bird Special Ends December 1st)

                  Podcast Junkies Show

                  Squarespace

                  Elegant Themes Divi

                  Second Line Podcast Themes

                  ]]>1:58

                  Troy Heinritz has had story after story when it comes to his Black List Exposed show. He recently won a podcast award, and now was called by Sony to attend the taping of the 100th episode the Black List. Troy was on the Ask the Podcast Coach show and talked about he when he gets these opportunities, he prepares and delivers, and consequently keeps getting more opportunities.

                  Check out his show at www.goldensprialmedia.com

                  Questions of the Month

                  3:00

                  I need the answer to two questions by November 13th 2017.

                  1. What will you be doing differently in 2018 with your podcast?
                  2. What is your favorite podcast (if you could only pick 1)? What is it, what is it about? where is it? and most importantly WHY is your favorite? (be sure to mention your show as well).
                  
                  

                  I need your answers by November 13th, 2017. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact 

                  Embracing the Experience Gap

                  4:52

                  When podcasters first start, they put a lot of thought into their launch (sometimes too much), and they get their show out and into Apple Podcasts and the other directories. 

                  Then they do one thing that can really knock the passion out of them: they compare themselves to others. 

                  They want to know how many downloads other shows get, and start to focus on other podcasters instead of focusing on their audience. 

                  Back to the Woodshed

                  I've played the guitar since I was 11. When I got done with school I would deliver my papers to my paper route, eat dinner, and my friend would come over and we would play guitar for hours. We weren't very good. We weren't taking lessons, and I was learning to play lead by trying to recreate the sounds I heard on albums. 

                  In other words, I would study music, and then practice, practice, practice, until I could play it. The music that was produced on the path to "getting it" was not pretty. I have hours of tapes of us playing Ted Nugent's Stranglehold for hours. Each of us would take turns soloing over the top of it. 

                  I recorded these so I could evaluate my process. I never intended to release them to the public. You can do the same with your podcast. Record a couple test shows for evaluation.

                  How Can Podcasters Get Better?

                  Podcasters get better by podcasting. I know that sounds stupid, but there is no way to know if you're content is good unless you get it in front of your target audience. 

                  You can also study other podcasts and entertainment. You see podcasting is part of the entertainment industry. Sure some of it is educational. Then again so is Sesame Street, and it's pretty entertaining. 

                  I recently watched a documentary on Steven Spielberg. Spielberg got turned down to be in the USC film school due to grades.

                  He would take a tour of Universal Studios, and when the bus stopped for a bathroom break he would sneak away and watch people like Alfred Hitchcock direct. 

                  One of his first films  (Amblin 1968 ) was geared toward studio executives to show he was not a normal independent filmmaker. - he knew his audience, and it worked it got him hired.

                  As the youngest director under contract, he was a bit of a novelty item, so he had to prove himself over and over.

                  One famous director pulled Steven aside and said, "There are days you will go on the set and have no idea what you're doing. Your job is to make sure the cast doesn't know that. The film interviewed Richard Dreyfuss who sais he was hired on the third day of the Movie Jaws. He said they didn't have a script, and they didn't have a shark.

                  Steven decided to the movie on the ocean instead of a back lot of a movie studio. 

                  In fact, the first shark doesn’t appear until one hour and 21 minutes into the two-hour film. This was partly due to the mechanical sharks they built didn't work. The cost was 225,000. So you'll notice the use of barrels moving instead of the shark. You didn't need to see the shark. Just the music and the thought of the shark made it scary.

                  The sharks were smaller than expected so they hired shorter actors to be next to the shark.

                  The line, "“You’re going to need a bigger boat" was improvised.

                  Jaws became the first motion picture to gross more than $100 million and won three Academy Awards (for Best Sound, Best Film Editing, and Best Original Dramatic Score).

                  So how did Steven Spielberg get getter? Jaws had come in way over budget, and instead of taking 55 days, it took 159. His next two films also came in way over budget. This actually stopped from studios from working with him. Yes, he was making a lot of money at the box office, but his integrity was on the line and he improved. 

                  As podcasters we are storytellers. The only way we can get better is to keep podcasting.

                  Final Lessons

                  In the same way that Steven Spielberg didn't have all the equipment he wanted, you can make great content without having the top of the line equipment. 

                  Your next episode should be better than your previous one. You will get more confident, and your skills will improve. 

                  The only way to get better at any skill is to do it. 

                  Don't be distracted by other podcaster's success. Keep working to improve your own skills (keep woodshedding).

                  The Best Compliment a Podcaster Can Receive

                  24:20

                  For me, to have someone say that I am the same off the mic as I am off the mix is a huge compliment. This happened to me when Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv was a guest on the Podcast Junkies Show. They talk about Jim's background, a bit about his network, working with me, and how Jim balances his podcast and his life.  Its a great interview, and Harry Durran is a great interviewer. 

                  My First Impression with Squarespace

                  28:42

                  I was under the assumption that the Squarespace platform for building a website was so easy that the site almost built itself. I've head a million commercials about it. I decided to try it for my Podcasting in Six Weeks Course. 

                  While it is flexible, it is more or less a "page builder" tool. I've seen these on WordPress like Divi From Elegant Themes. The Second Line theme I mentioned comes with a page builder. Squarespace is not that different. You add an element to a page and edjust the properties of that item. I was surprised there weren't more elements. While they had enough elements to make most websites, you can look at it two ways, "hooray I'm not overwhelmed with the choices," or "Hey where is the FAQ template?" 

                  I was surprised that I couldn't change the background color of different elements. The biggest complaint is they have an e-commerce tool. This ties in with Paypal and Stripe. Both of those tools take about three percent plus a transaction fee. This is normal. What is not normal is Squarespace takes an additional three percent. When you are talking about products that are four figures, that can be a chunk of change you are paying to keep people on your website (instead of sending them to another page to check out). 

                  The bottom line is everyone says this is super drag and drop easy, and while it is easy to drag and drop, to really adjust customize items, there are lots of little boxes that pop up based on where you click. While I didn't expect zero learning curve, the onboarding process was not as easy as expected. 

                  Speed up Podcast Production

                  36:20

                  If you're on a pc, you can add a folder to the quick access area (left column) of the File Explorer Window. Go to the folder you want to access all the time, and right-click and choose Pin To Quick Access." Now you will see it on the left-hand side. You can remove it by right-clicking on it and choose "unpin from quick access." This avoids you having to "Drill down" by double-clicking on folder after folder to get to that folder.

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  The School of Podcasting

                  Podcasting in Six Weeks (Early Bird Special Ends December 1st)

                  Podcast Junkies Show

                  Squarespace

                  Elegant Themes Divi

                  Second Line Podcast Themes

                  ]]>656593de4cf5595e46bcaf4589f6014dMon, 30 Oct 2017 04:00:00 -040041:04falsefull590590The Essential Items Needed On Your Podcast PageLet me state, that this has nothing to do with Wordpress vs Wix vs Squarespace. These are the items that I feel should be on your website (and why)
                  A Play Button

                  Think of this as a free sample. If someone is going to subscribe to your show, they need to hear it first. This is why there is a guy with the chicken on a toothpick at the mall. It is the teaser, the free sample of your podcast with no commitment to buy.

                  A Contact Button/Page

                  I'm not making this up. I just read an article in Pod to Pod, and I read a story about a podcaster that might have a good "Because of My Podcast" story. There wasn't any contact button at the top, bottom, left, or right side of the screen. It wasn't on the about page, it wasn't there. The only way to contact the person was via twitter. Being somewhat of a geek, I pulled up his RSS feed and dug through the code to find it. Realize, nobody is going to dig through your RSS feed to get your email address. Make your contact button easy to find, and don't get cute and name it something like "Let's get coffee." Be sure to test your button/page to make sure you get the messages from your website.

                  Your About Page

                  There are two answers here. If your website is primarily the home of your podcast then the first paragraph should be about the show. If your website is the home of your brand (products, press, etc) then the first paragraph should be about the host. Then a second paragraph about the show. In my travels, the about page is one of the pages that receive the most traffic. If you've been podcasting for a bit and have some reviews, take some of the phrases used by your audience and use it in your about page (use the native tongue of your audience).

                  Subscribe Buttons

                  We all love to talk about iTunes/Apple Podcasts, as we should. They have a huge amount of the market. There are android phones as well and it's a bit of a chicken or the egg. More podcasts are consumed on Apple products than Android. Well, most podcasters talk about subscribing on Apple products (and leave the android people out to dry). If Google would get off their butt and make a native app for podcast listeners that would be great (they did just purchase the 60 db app). So make sure people can subscribe to your show. You REALLY want to avoid telling people to "Find me in iTunes."

                  Extra Credit

                  Don't just make a subscribe page, but add directions with screenshots. You could even do a quick presentation on YouTube Live on how to subscribe to your show, and then send people to the video on YouTube.

                  There is more power in subscriptions than reviews.

                  Because Of My Podcast Scott Orr  is Going to the Movies for Free

                  Scott Orr does the Code 3 Podcast and was approached by the people behind the new movie Only the Brave. Check out Scott's podcast for Firemen at code3podcast.com

                  Not sure what is up with Scott's voice? Check out the first 30 seconds of his show at code3podcast.com

                  Always Be Open For New Input

                  I've heard reports from one person or another. Anything on the internet that is repeated enough becomes an undeniable fact. With this in mind, I always stay open to new feedback. I always consider the source and always allow new ideas to challenge my beliefs. If I'm going to believe something, it is typically based on things I believe to be facts. Beliefs are based on input and your ideas and feelings (your feelings can skew the input).

                  Actions are based on beliefs. Beliefs are based on perceived facts. Facts are based on input into your brain. For example, I don't like coconut. Any candy bar with coconut, I'm not a fan. The one day someone handed me a drink. I wasn't sure what it was, it was supposed to some drink better than soda. It was white. It turned out it was some sort of vanilla coconut mix. I have input. I now can say, I don't like something that is predominantly coconut, but I don't mind it mixed with vanilla. You have to be open to someone challenging a belief (I don't like coconut) and taking a look at the other side of the story (having a sip). Then allowing that information to influence your beliefs, which then influence your actions.

                  I co-host a show called the "Podcast Review Show" where you can get your show reviewed, and in the past we've had people who were NOT open to ANY feedback

                  New and Noteworthy Insights

                  I've been begging people to share their before and after numbers if they got into New and Noteworthy and that is just what Matthew McClain did on this post about downloads from Apple

                  He states before being on the Front Page of New and Noteworthy, "In this period we had an average of 71 downloads per day." This is with two episodes (36 downloads per episode - DPE)

                  On their first day, the traffic went, "from 26 total downloads the day before (our lowest day ever) to 241." (122 DPE)

                  He does say, "We released episode two on the 8th which pretty much doubled the recent total downloads to 1,447" (so he now had three episodes counting his trailer) (482DPE)

                  One day they reached 1,928 downloads for the day (1928/3 = 642 DPE)

                  He states, " At the time of writing, episode one has 6,978 downloads, episode two 6,161, and episode three 2,295. So 37% of listeners followed the podcast from episode two to episode three.

                  According to VP of Podcast Relations Rob Walch when it comes to iTunes/Apple Podcasts rankings, "“100% about the total number of new subscribers in the past 7 days, with a weighted average for the last 24, 48, and 72 hours”

                  Things to Consider

                  This was on the FRONT PAGE of iTunes/Apple Podcasts  New and Noteworthy (not a category)

                  Their genre may fit a wider audience than yours.

                  If you don't make New and Noteworthy, your life is not over. iTunes/Apple Podcasts is a directory, a phone book if you will. It is a central location where people can put in the full name of your show and do a search.

                  Plays From Your Website Add Up

                  Ravi Jayagopal (the man behind Digital Access Pass, and the Cool Cast Player along with being the host of the Subscribe Me show sent a link to a post. Last week I mentioned how there are a ton of players out there, but the majority of downloads come via mobile devices. In his post, he pointed out that:

                  A player on a website is more suitable for "introducing" someone to your podcast - not necessarily for long-term consumption. Introduce on your site, lead them to subscribe on a mobile app on your actual show. Promote your website to cold and luke-warm traffic, like ad traffic and social-spraying content marketing, so you can cookie/pixel them for later retargeting, promote your brand, show them your face, maybe connect with them with a personable video, offer them your lead-magnet and get them to maybe give your their email id, etc etc. But once they're on your list, promote Apple Podcast and Stitcher and Google Play links to those already on your "list", because they don't need to be "convinced" or "converted" anymore about the value that you provide.

                  Here is a link to the Facebook Post.

                  He shows how he is getting thousands of new plays on different websites.

                  Launching Your Podcast With a Massive Amounts of Downloads

                  Most good ideas are not a single thought. A single idea comes up, and someone says, "You know what else, you might try this..." I always want people to know that:

                  1. When you launch with more than one episode, the additional episodes do not download automatically.
                  2. New and Noteworthy will not deliver you 10,0000 downloads per episode (if that is the goal)
                  3. While you should focus on generating buzz when you launch, a podcast is a marathon and not a sprint.
                  
                  Some Reasons Why You Might Not Want to Launch with a Ton (25) New Episodes
                  1. If you record 25 episodes and find out at episode two that people hate your super jumbo deluxe lightning round, they have to sit through 23 episodes (unless you go back and edit them) until you put out a "new" episode with the changes.
                  2. You might pre-fade. What I mean by this is you never make it to episode 25 because you aren't seeing the downloads, getting any feedback, and so you quit before you ever launch.
                  3. People will need to go and download your earlier episodes. By default, they will download your latest episode, and then manually download 1-24.
                  
                  Some Reasons Why Might Want to Launch with 25
                  1. You maybe have found your voice by episode 25, and with episode 26 you sound more confident, organized and professional. Maybe it's not such a bad idea.
                  2. If you can't come up with 25 episodes, maybe you shouldn't be podcasting?
                  
                  A Compromise on Launching Your Podcast with 25 Episodes

                  Instead of putting all your 25 episodes out at the same time, release your episodes (one at a time) to your website, and to your feed. However, don't submit your show to any directories like iTunes/Apple Podcasts, Stitcher, TuneIn, Google Play music just yet. You can tell your friends if you want, but any traffic will come from people searching for your content via search engines. You might also use Facebook to assemble a "Focus Group" and ask people for feed.

                  ...]]>Let me state, that this has nothing to do with Wordpress vs Wix vs Squarespace. These are the items that I feel should be on your website (and why)
                  A Play Button

                  Think of this as a free sample. If someone is going to subscribe to your show, they need to hear it first. This is why there is a guy with the chicken on a toothpick at the mall. It is the teaser, the free sample of your podcast with no commitment to buy.

                  A Contact Button/Page

                  I'm not making this up. I just read an article in Pod to Pod, and I read a story about a podcaster that might have a good "Because of My Podcast" story. There wasn't any contact button at the top, bottom, left, or right side of the screen. It wasn't on the about page, it wasn't there. The only way to contact the person was via twitter. Being somewhat of a geek, I pulled up his RSS feed and dug through the code to find it. Realize, nobody is going to dig through your RSS feed to get your email address. Make your contact button easy to find, and don't get cute and name it something like "Let's get coffee." Be sure to test your button/page to make sure you get the messages from your website.

                  Your About Page

                  There are two answers here. If your website is primarily the home of your podcast then the first paragraph should be about the show. If your website is the home of your brand (products, press, etc) then the first paragraph should be about the host. Then a second paragraph about the show. In my travels, the about page is one of the pages that receive the most traffic. If you've been podcasting for a bit and have some reviews, take some of the phrases used by your audience and use it in your about page (use the native tongue of your audience).

                  Subscribe Buttons

                  We all love to talk about iTunes/Apple Podcasts, as we should. They have a huge amount of the market. There are android phones as well and it's a bit of a chicken or the egg. More podcasts are consumed on Apple products than Android. Well, most podcasters talk about subscribing on Apple products (and leave the android people out to dry). If Google would get off their butt and make a native app for podcast listeners that would be great (they did just purchase the 60 db app). So make sure people can subscribe to your show. You REALLY want to avoid telling people to "Find me in iTunes."

                  Extra Credit

                  Don't just make a subscribe page, but add directions with screenshots. You could even do a quick presentation on YouTube Live on how to subscribe to your show, and then send people to the video on YouTube.

                  There is more power in subscriptions than reviews.

                  Because Of My Podcast Scott Orr  is Going to the Movies for Free

                  Scott Orr does the Code 3 Podcast and was approached by the people behind the new movie Only the Brave. Check out Scott's podcast for Firemen at code3podcast.com

                  Not sure what is up with Scott's voice? Check out the first 30 seconds of his show at code3podcast.com

                  Always Be Open For New Input

                  I've heard reports from one person or another. Anything on the internet that is repeated enough becomes an undeniable fact. With this in mind, I always stay open to new feedback. I always consider the source and always allow new ideas to challenge my beliefs. If I'm going to believe something, it is typically based on things I believe to be facts. Beliefs are based on input and your ideas and feelings (your feelings can skew the input).

                  Actions are based on beliefs. Beliefs are based on perceived facts. Facts are based on input into your brain. For example, I don't like coconut. Any candy bar with coconut, I'm not a fan. The one day someone handed me a drink. I wasn't sure what it was, it was supposed to some drink better than soda. It was white. It turned out it was some sort of vanilla coconut mix. I have input. I now can say, I don't like something that is predominantly coconut, but I don't mind it mixed with vanilla. You have to be open to someone challenging a belief (I don't like coconut) and taking a look at the other side of the story (having a sip). Then allowing that information to influence your beliefs, which then influence your actions.

                  I co-host a show called the "Podcast Review Show" where you can get your show reviewed, and in the past we've had people who were NOT open to ANY feedback

                  New and Noteworthy Insights

                  I've been begging people to share their before and after numbers if they got into New and Noteworthy and that is just what Matthew McClain did on this post about downloads from Apple

                  He states before being on the Front Page of New and Noteworthy, "In this period we had an average of 71 downloads per day." This is with two episodes (36 downloads per episode - DPE)

                  On their first day, the traffic went, "from 26 total downloads the day before (our lowest day ever) to 241." (122 DPE)

                  He does say, "We released episode two on the 8th which pretty much doubled the recent total downloads to 1,447" (so he now had three episodes counting his trailer) (482DPE)

                  One day they reached 1,928 downloads for the day (1928/3 = 642 DPE)

                  He states, " At the time of writing, episode one has 6,978 downloads, episode two 6,161, and episode three 2,295. So 37% of listeners followed the podcast from episode two to episode three.

                  According to VP of Podcast Relations Rob Walch when it comes to iTunes/Apple Podcasts rankings, "“100% about the total number of new subscribers in the past 7 days, with a weighted average for the last 24, 48, and 72 hours”

                  Things to Consider

                  This was on the FRONT PAGE of iTunes/Apple Podcasts  New and Noteworthy (not a category)

                  Their genre may fit a wider audience than yours.

                  If you don't make New and Noteworthy, your life is not over. iTunes/Apple Podcasts is a directory, a phone book if you will. It is a central location where people can put in the full name of your show and do a search.

                  Plays From Your Website Add Up

                  Ravi Jayagopal (the man behind Digital Access Pass, and the Cool Cast Player along with being the host of the Subscribe Me show sent a link to a post. Last week I mentioned how there are a ton of players out there, but the majority of downloads come via mobile devices. In his post, he pointed out that:

                  A player on a website is more suitable for "introducing" someone to your podcast - not necessarily for long-term consumption. Introduce on your site, lead them to subscribe on a mobile app on your actual show. Promote your website to cold and luke-warm traffic, like ad traffic and social-spraying content marketing, so you can cookie/pixel them for later retargeting, promote your brand, show them your face, maybe connect with them with a personable video, offer them your lead-magnet and get them to maybe give your their email id, etc etc. But once they're on your list, promote Apple Podcast and Stitcher and Google Play links to those already on your "list", because they don't need to be "convinced" or "converted" anymore about the value that you provide.

                  Here is a link to the Facebook Post.

                  He shows how he is getting thousands of new plays on different websites.

                  Launching Your Podcast With a Massive Amounts of Downloads

                  Most good ideas are not a single thought. A single idea comes up, and someone says, "You know what else, you might try this..." I always want people to know that:

                  1. When you launch with more than one episode, the additional episodes do not download automatically.
                  2. New and Noteworthy will not deliver you 10,0000 downloads per episode (if that is the goal)
                  3. While you should focus on generating buzz when you launch, a podcast is a marathon and not a sprint.
                  
                  Some Reasons Why You Might Not Want to Launch with a Ton (25) New Episodes
                  1. If you record 25 episodes and find out at episode two that people hate your super jumbo deluxe lightning round, they have to sit through 23 episodes (unless you go back and edit them) until you put out a "new" episode with the changes.
                  2. You might pre-fade. What I mean by this is you never make it to episode 25 because you aren't seeing the downloads, getting any feedback, and so you quit before you ever launch.
                  3. People will need to go and download your earlier episodes. By default, they will download your latest episode, and then manually download 1-24.
                  
                  Some Reasons Why Might Want to Launch with 25
                  1. You maybe have found your voice by episode 25, and with episode 26 you sound more confident, organized and professional. Maybe it's not such a bad idea.
                  2. If you can't come up with 25 episodes, maybe you shouldn't be podcasting?
                  
                  A Compromise on Launching Your Podcast with 25 Episodes

                  Instead of putting all your 25 episodes out at the same time, release your episodes (one at a time) to your website, and to your feed. However, don't submit your show to any directories like iTunes/Apple Podcasts, Stitcher, TuneIn, Google Play music just yet. You can tell your friends if you want, but any traffic will come from people searching for your content via search engines. You might also use Facebook to assemble a "Focus Group" and ask people for feed.

                  This way you can get feedback as you are creating it. When you get to a certain number where you feel confident your show will have a positive impact on your target audience, submit it to the directories, sound out an email blast, tell your friends, family, and neighbors, and do your "launch."

                  Questions Of The Month

                  I have two questions for you to chime in on.

                  1. What will you be doing differently in 2018 with your podcast? (please answer by 11/20 put "2018" in the subject line to  email dave"at" schoolofpodcasting.com). This will be used the last week of November
                  2. What is your ONE favorite podcast and WHY? (please email that by 11/20 with the email subject line "my favorite podcast is 2017").This will be used in our Year End "My favorite Podcast is" episode. 
                  
                  Podcasting in Six Weeks Starts in January 2018

                  This will be a live group coaching session. If you're interested (more information next week) get on the waiting list at startapodcastinsixweeks.com 

                  Ready To Plan, Launch and Grow Your Podcast Now?

                  Join the School of Podcasting risk-free with a 30-day money back guarantee

                  Get Immediate Access:

                  16 courses you help you plan, launch and grow your podcast

                  Private Facebook Grou

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live Group Coaching Calls (Twice a month) 

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                   

                  ]]>d090e83be214bac1f9978b22202b0d3bMon, 23 Oct 2017 04:00:00 -040058:08falsefull589589Are You Doing Everything To Grow My Podcast Audience?I was listening to the Book Feed the Muscle Burn the Fat and he relayed the story of a man at a Tony Robbins event (Tony is a major Business Guru). He told Tony that he had done EVERYTHING to grow his audience. Since he had tried everything Tony asked him, "Tell me the last 100 things you've tried." To this, the man answered, "Well I haven't tried 100 things." Tony then stated, "Then tell me the last 50 things." The man replied, "I haven't tried 50 things" Tony replied, "Then tell me the last 10 things you've tried." It turned out the man had tried about four things.

                  We think we've tried everything, but there are more ways to connect with your audience, many of them that require just a little bit of time to setup up some technology. Today we need to look at ourselves in the mirror and ask, "Have I really done everything I can to promote my show, connect with my audience, and increase my reach? I think if we look deep into our hearts we know there is more.

                  Here Is The Low Hanging Fruit

                  Social media: You should be promoting your show on the social media channels. There are plugins such as social warfare. There are automation tools like Social Jukebox. Media hosts like Spreaker and Blubrry will publish your audio file as a video on YouTube. Spreaker will tweet out about your episode. Blubrry will create a sample of your show to tweet out and paste on Facebook. Libsyn will post to Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, iHeart Radio, LinkedIn, Blogger, Tumblr.

                  Podcast Directories: There are four main directories you should be listed in. Apple Podcasts (formerly iTunes), Stitcher, TuneIn, and Google Play Music.

                  Do You Have Subscribe Buttons On Your Site? One way to keep your numbers going up is to get people to subscribe. This includes buttons for ANDROID. Subscribeonandroid.com is a free site from blubrry where you can point people to that site (using your RSS feed) and if they don't have any apps to subscribe they will be prompted to download one. My friend Daniel J Lewis has a great plugin call Social Subscribe and Follow that creates amazing looking subscribe buttons

                  Do You Have Share Buttons on Your Website? There are plugins (again I love social Warfare) that make it easy for your audience to tweet out your show. There are players like the coolcast player, the Smart Podcast Player, the Simple Podcast Press player. Don't get hung up too much on players as 80% of people are listening on on portable devices. With that said, can people share your episodes from their phone?

                  Local Meetups I've had three people sign up for the School of Podcasting and I got to be on TV all from meeting local podcasters in Ohio. If you don't have a local meetup, do what I did. I created one. In the words of my friend Glenn "the Geek" Hebert, it's not who you know, it's who knows you. Check it out at www.meetup.com I run a local podcasters group for Northeast Ohio www.neohiopodcasters.com

                  Reach Out to Other Similar Podcasts

                  Some of my best friends are my "Competition." Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast, Ray Ortega who does the Podcasters Studio, Mike Dell works for Blubrry and does the Podcast Help Desk, there are others as well. Reach out to them and see if they'd like to co-host an episode or a segment, or be interviewed, or... or ... or.. Remember there really isn't any competition in podcasting. They can listen to you on Monday and your competition on another day of the week. It's not like radio where you are both on at the exact same time.

                  Reach out to Businesses?

                  If I did a show about weddings, I would reach out to every dress shop in the area and see if I could put some CDs at the check out for exchange for a link to their site, or a mention in the show.

                  Go Record People at Events

                  You can get a portable recorder for as little as $99 for the Zoom H1 or just use your phone. Then give these people your business card, and tell them they will be on a future episode. You do have business cards right?

                  There are TONS of ideas

                  Speaking of Daniel and Ray, we do a show together called the Podcasters Roundtable and we did an episode pointing out ways to promote your show (how to grow your audience from 100s to 1000s). The point here is you can't think about these ideas, you have to do them.

                  In a recent (not safe for work) video Gary Vaynerchuck explained that he would Google his topic and connect every blog/podcast about his topic. He said 1 in every 347 will write your back, and that is better than zero.

                  You Need to Quit Reading, Quit Watching, Quit Listening, and Start Doing

                  If you're thinking of getting into podcasting, you can read articles, get confused cause some say to launch with 15 episodes, and some say (like me) it doesn't matter. Some say New and Noteworthy is the goal, and others (like me) say it's not that great. You can't improve what you don't start.

                  How NOT to Make Money In Podcasting

                  She's back! Jessica Kupferman runs the JKM Agency has a fun story today. In the same way that you learn new skills when you start podcasting, you will learn new skills when you take on a sponsor. You will need to learn how to read an advertisement. It's not as easy at it sounds. If you just read the bullet points, you can be boring. If you stray too far from the bullet points, you may forget to hit all the talking points. Today she talks about someone who had to redo an advertisement three times.

                  The lesson is, read all the paperwork that comes with the sponsor. Know what you HAVE To say, know what you are ALLOWED to say, and then try to say it in an entertaining fashion. If you mess up, you don't get paid for that sponsor.

                  For more information about getting a sponsor for your show check out Jessica at http://www.jkmagency.com

                  Because of My Podcast Story

                  Jessica Rhodes of Internet Connections had a live panel on her latest episodes. The people on the panel had been interviewed on other shows, as well as some have their own podcast. Becuase of their podcast:

                  1. Getting interviewed has helped his public speaking ability 100 fold
                  2. It has brought clarity about his message from telling his story so many times
                  3. One guest was very nervous in the beginning, but in ten years he can trace back all his clients to podcasts and many of his best relationships
                  
                  

                  Check out the episode at http://www.jessicarhodes.biz/ic023/

                  Where I Will Be

                  October 21 I will be attending the Big Podcast Event in Nashville Tennessee. Use the coupon code SOP to save $50 on your ticket.

                  November 10-11 I will be speaking at DC Podfest. My presentation will be "Is your podcast making these mistakes?"

                  February 28 - March 2, 2018, I will be speaking at Social Media Marketing World

                  February 8-10 2018, I will be at podfest.us 

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Danny Pena Interview

                  Jessica Kupferman Interview

                   Start a Podcast in Six Weeks (Starts 2018)

                  Start Podcasting NOW Join the School of Podcasting

                  ]]>I was listening to the Book Feed the Muscle Burn the Fat and he relayed the story of a man at a Tony Robbins event (Tony is a major Business Guru). He told Tony that he had done EVERYTHING to grow his audience. Since he had tried everything Tony asked him, "Tell me the last 100 things you've tried." To this, the man answered, "Well I haven't tried 100 things." Tony then stated, "Then tell me the last 50 things." The man replied, "I haven't tried 50 things" Tony replied, "Then tell me the last 10 things you've tried." It turned out the man had tried about four things.

                  We think we've tried everything, but there are more ways to connect with your audience, many of them that require just a little bit of time to setup up some technology. Today we need to look at ourselves in the mirror and ask, "Have I really done everything I can to promote my show, connect with my audience, and increase my reach? I think if we look deep into our hearts we know there is more.

                  Here Is The Low Hanging Fruit

                  Social media: You should be promoting your show on the social media channels. There are plugins such as social warfare. There are automation tools like Social Jukebox. Media hosts like Spreaker and Blubrry will publish your audio file as a video on YouTube. Spreaker will tweet out about your episode. Blubrry will create a sample of your show to tweet out and paste on Facebook. Libsyn will post to Twitter, Facebook, YouTube, iHeart Radio, LinkedIn, Blogger, Tumblr.

                  Podcast Directories: There are four main directories you should be listed in. Apple Podcasts (formerly iTunes), Stitcher, TuneIn, and Google Play Music.

                  Do You Have Subscribe Buttons On Your Site? One way to keep your numbers going up is to get people to subscribe. This includes buttons for ANDROID. Subscribeonandroid.com is a free site from blubrry where you can point people to that site (using your RSS feed) and if they don't have any apps to subscribe they will be prompted to download one. My friend Daniel J Lewis has a great plugin call Social Subscribe and Follow that creates amazing looking subscribe buttons

                  Do You Have Share Buttons on Your Website? There are plugins (again I love social Warfare) that make it easy for your audience to tweet out your show. There are players like the coolcast player, the Smart Podcast Player, the Simple Podcast Press player. Don't get hung up too much on players as 80% of people are listening on on portable devices. With that said, can people share your episodes from their phone?

                  Local Meetups I've had three people sign up for the School of Podcasting and I got to be on TV all from meeting local podcasters in Ohio. If you don't have a local meetup, do what I did. I created one. In the words of my friend Glenn "the Geek" Hebert, it's not who you know, it's who knows you. Check it out at www.meetup.com I run a local podcasters group for Northeast Ohio www.neohiopodcasters.com

                  Reach Out to Other Similar Podcasts

                  Some of my best friends are my "Competition." Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast, Ray Ortega who does the Podcasters Studio, Mike Dell works for Blubrry and does the Podcast Help Desk, there are others as well. Reach out to them and see if they'd like to co-host an episode or a segment, or be interviewed, or... or ... or.. Remember there really isn't any competition in podcasting. They can listen to you on Monday and your competition on another day of the week. It's not like radio where you are both on at the exact same time.

                  Reach out to Businesses?

                  If I did a show about weddings, I would reach out to every dress shop in the area and see if I could put some CDs at the check out for exchange for a link to their site, or a mention in the show.

                  Go Record People at Events

                  You can get a portable recorder for as little as $99 for the Zoom H1 or just use your phone. Then give these people your business card, and tell them they will be on a future episode. You do have business cards right?

                  There are TONS of ideas

                  Speaking of Daniel and Ray, we do a show together called the Podcasters Roundtable and we did an episode pointing out ways to promote your show (how to grow your audience from 100s to 1000s). The point here is you can't think about these ideas, you have to do them.

                  In a recent (not safe for work) video Gary Vaynerchuck explained that he would Google his topic and connect every blog/podcast about his topic. He said 1 in every 347 will write your back, and that is better than zero.

                  You Need to Quit Reading, Quit Watching, Quit Listening, and Start Doing

                  If you're thinking of getting into podcasting, you can read articles, get confused cause some say to launch with 15 episodes, and some say (like me) it doesn't matter. Some say New and Noteworthy is the goal, and others (like me) say it's not that great. You can't improve what you don't start.

                  How NOT to Make Money In Podcasting

                  She's back! Jessica Kupferman runs the JKM Agency has a fun story today. In the same way that you learn new skills when you start podcasting, you will learn new skills when you take on a sponsor. You will need to learn how to read an advertisement. It's not as easy at it sounds. If you just read the bullet points, you can be boring. If you stray too far from the bullet points, you may forget to hit all the talking points. Today she talks about someone who had to redo an advertisement three times.

                  The lesson is, read all the paperwork that comes with the sponsor. Know what you HAVE To say, know what you are ALLOWED to say, and then try to say it in an entertaining fashion. If you mess up, you don't get paid for that sponsor.

                  For more information about getting a sponsor for your show check out Jessica at http://www.jkmagency.com

                  Because of My Podcast Story

                  Jessica Rhodes of Internet Connections had a live panel on her latest episodes. The people on the panel had been interviewed on other shows, as well as some have their own podcast. Becuase of their podcast:

                  1. Getting interviewed has helped his public speaking ability 100 fold
                  2. It has brought clarity about his message from telling his story so many times
                  3. One guest was very nervous in the beginning, but in ten years he can trace back all his clients to podcasts and many of his best relationships
                  
                  

                  Check out the episode at http://www.jessicarhodes.biz/ic023/

                  Where I Will Be

                  October 21 I will be attending the Big Podcast Event in Nashville Tennessee. Use the coupon code SOP to save $50 on your ticket.

                  November 10-11 I will be speaking at DC Podfest. My presentation will be "Is your podcast making these mistakes?"

                  February 28 - March 2, 2018, I will be speaking at Social Media Marketing World

                  February 8-10 2018, I will be at podfest.us 

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Danny Pena Interview

                  Jessica Kupferman Interview

                   Start a Podcast in Six Weeks (Starts 2018)

                  Start Podcasting NOW Join the School of Podcasting

                  ]]>451d7152ddd3924bda41683a6c90f79dMon, 16 Oct 2017 04:00:00 -040040:26falsefull588588Simply Sonic SS1 and Second Line Dix WordPress Theme ReviewsWhile I've never used any preamps like the Triton Audio Fethead Microphone Preamp or the Cloudlifter CL-1, I was really impressed with the amazing amount of boost to the sound.

                  The large dose of extra gain can make help a budget microphone/preamp combination sound clean and more professional. Some microphones such as the Heil Pr-40 and the Sure SM7B are known for really low outputs. This creates a situation where you have to turn the gain up on your mixer or recording device. This can leave the door open for added hiss depending on your mixer or recording device.

                  The Simply Sound SS1 is designed for dynamic microphones only.

                  More Clean Gain

                  Triton Audio Fethead provides 27 db of clean gain with a price for $89

                  Cloudlifter CL-1 provides 25 db of clean gain for $149

                  The Simply Sound SS1 - provide 27 db of gain for $99

                  The Simply Sound website shows the Fethead at a $149 price tag, but at BNH, I show a price of $89

                  My Opinion

                  As I had said, never using any preamp (besides the one in my mixer, and I've also used the DBX 286,  and the Aphex 230) even without a preamp, I never thought I sounded bad.

                  With that said, the concept makes sense. I know that when I turn the gain up on any mixer there comes a point where noise is introduced. Using the SS1, I basically turned my gain all the way down.

                  The construction is super rugged and resembles the Cloudlifeter all-metal casing (but cooler looking in black) you're not going to break this. You do need some phantom power (so a typical route might be to plug your microphone into the SS1. Then plug the ss1 into your mixer. The mixer would need to have the Phantom Power Turned on.

                  For my recording today I had my EV Re320 going into the SS1 and that went directly into the Zoom H5. It was an amazing amount of boost.

                  How I did the test. I set my levels using the H5 recorded some audio, removed the SS1 from the chain, and plugged it back into my Zoom H5 without touching any knobs.

                  Do you NEED this? As with all things podcasting, it depends. If you're happy with your audio, no. If you struggle to get enough signal into your recorder, or the sound has a fair amount of noise, then this is well worth the money.

                  Check it out at simplysound.co

                  Second Line Podcasting WordPress Theme

                  I no longer recommend Appendipity themes. This is a theme I loved and have on most of my websites. The face of the company Joey Kissimmee was last seen online in late 2016, and they are no longer replying to any support emails that I send. Unfortunately, this is not the first time I've done this. Semiologic was a cool theme until Thesis came out. Then they went from needing no knowledge of code to having to know a ton of code.

                  I really like Appendipity themes as there was a lot of flexibility (and no need for knowledge of code). I love the Divi theme, but they come close to having too much flexibility and people can get overwhelmed because it does everything (and the learning curve can be a bit large). Divi is a well-managed theme, with a huge community and awesome support. You can join Elegant Themes (the creators of Divi) for $89 a year. I did the one time fee of $249 for lifetime access. In addition to their themes, they have some cool plugins.

                  One thing I just discovered is when you purchase a Second Line Theme, you can only use it on one website. This puts it int the "Depends" situation. The good news there is a one time fee. On the Evanto market, it shows six months of support with extended support for $17.63 a year. If you have multiple sites (for me I have at least four) that can add up ($59 X 4 = $236).

                  Second Line Theme Support

                  So far Second Line support has been great answering all my questions. The theme I'm using (Dixie) is skewing my featured image. When I informed this of the problem, they told me exactly what to do if I wanted to edit some files. The means you're going to need to understand FTP, and not be afraid to edit some code (always make a backup of any files you are editing when it comes to theme code). I was surprised that the theme allowed a featured image to be skewed disproportional as I don't know ANY designer that would allow an image to be reshaped (and if you have any text on your image it makes it blurry).

                  The Power Of Elementor

                  While the Second Line theme makes it easy to set colors, headers, and the theme seems to make it possible to adjust everything (except a skewing featured image...) what I also found amazing was a free plugin that they recommend you use (and they have some built-in features for it ) called Elementor. This is an open source page builder (That looks a lot like, Divi). This will work with most themes, and its a super easy drag and drop page builder. The cool thing is you can use that plugin on any theme. 

                  Always Consider Your Source

                  I hear people that advise new podcasters and they try to sell people packages and strategies that work for them. The problem is they are not you. For example, as I have multiple websites, I might lean toward Divi over Second Line. If you had one website, then a like Dixie or Satchmo might be just the trick if you only have one website. It might be a better fit for you.

                  What Is Up With Libsyn Stats?

                  Libsyn rolled out new stats back on September 18th. Here are our blog posts that go over the stats changes: https://blog.libsyn.com/2017/09/18/stats-overhaul-iab-compliance-podcasts-stats-libsyn-company-announcement/ https://blog.libsyn.com/2017/09/18/libsyn-stats-overhaul-need-know/ NOTE:  Libsyn sent out an email to all Libsyn users on September 18th - if you did not see that email - you might want to check your spam folder.  It would have gone to the email registered to your Libsyn account.

                  Rob Walch  also talked about it more on our latest episode of the Libsyn Podcast: http://thefeed.libsyn.com/105-stats-follow-up-and-apple-podcasts-feed-tags The conversation starts right after the promo at the 52 Minute mark.

                  My Poker Game Analogy

                  Picture yourself at a poker game (a really, really big table)

                  • Ben Robins, Audible.com
                  • Lindsay Lawrence, WideOrbit
                  • Ilwira Marciszek, AdLarge Media
                  • Eurry Kim, New York Public Radio
                  • Earl Swigert, WideOrbit
                  • Yukifumi Touya, Digital Advertising Consortium Inc.
                  • Hirofumi Kanda, Cyber Communications Inc.
                  • Dan Misener, Pacific Content
                  • Mohammad Al-Abdullah, RhythmOne
                  • Jose Alvarez Muguerza, BlogTalkRadio
                  • John Zoephel, Pandora
                  • Kevin McCaul, Acast Stories USA
                  • John Rosenius, Acast Stories USA
                  • Ilham Elkatani, DoubleVerify
                  • Steve Mulder, National Public Media
                  • Stephen Haptonstahl, National Public Media
                  • Candace Williams, BlogTalkRadio
                  • David Marple, Triton Digital
                  • Conrad Trautmann, Westwood One
                  • Robert Peterson, Westwood One
                  • Bob Charish, BlogTalkRadio
                  • Jason Cox, Slate
                  • Bosko Milekic, AdGear Technologies, Inc.
                  • Francois Fortin, AdGear Technologies, Inc.
                  • Andy Toh, BlogTalkRadio
                  • Bruno Nieuwenhuys, Adswizz Inc
                  • Rob Walch, Libsyn
                  • Joel Withrow, Slate
                  • Erik Barraud, Adswizz Inc
                  • Erik Diehn, Midroll Media
                  • Robert Freeland, Podtrac
                  • Dan Jeselsohn, New York Public Radio
                  • Angelo Mandato, RawVoice
                  • Hugo Martel, Triton Digital
                  • Tim Clarke, Cox Media Group
                  • Greg Batusic, PodcastOne
                  • Hernan Lopez, Wondery LLC
                  • Allan Bressler, CBS Local
                  • Norm Pattiz, PodcastOne
                  • Kit Gray, PodcastOne
                  • Jim Kott, WideOrbit
                  • Rob Kass, Nielsen
                  • Millie Mrvica, Westwood One
                  • Jaime Singson, Sizmek
                  • Kelli Hurley, Westwood One
                  • Brian Lynch, Westwood One
                  • Ryan Granner, ESPN.com
                  • Joe Mead, ESPN.com
                  • Skyler Tobey, ESPN.com
                  • Jennifer Susalis, CBS Local
                  • Silvia Mihailescu, Adswizz Inc
                  • Stefan Olson, Minnesota Public Radio
                  • Karim Rayes, RhythmOne
                  • Todd Cochrane, RawVoice
                  • Jean-Luc Wasmer, Triton Digital
                  • Peter deVroede, Midroll Media
                  • Todd Pringle, Midroll Media
                  • Yi Huang, Condé Nast
                  • Gregg Rogers, Sizmek
                  • Alixandra Liner, New York Public Radio
                  • Brett Robinson, National Public Media
                  
                  

                  The Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) empowers the media and marketing industries to thrive in the digital economy. Its membership is...]]>While I've never used any preamps like the Triton Audio Fethead Microphone Preamp or the Cloudlifter CL-1, I was really impressed with the amazing amount of boost to the sound.

                  The large dose of extra gain can make help a budget microphone/preamp combination sound clean and more professional. Some microphones such as the Heil Pr-40 and the Sure SM7B are known for really low outputs. This creates a situation where you have to turn the gain up on your mixer or recording device. This can leave the door open for added hiss depending on your mixer or recording device.

                  The Simply Sound SS1 is designed for dynamic microphones only.

                  More Clean Gain

                  Triton Audio Fethead provides 27 db of clean gain with a price for $89

                  Cloudlifter CL-1 provides 25 db of clean gain for $149

                  The Simply Sound SS1 - provide 27 db of gain for $99

                  The Simply Sound website shows the Fethead at a $149 price tag, but at BNH, I show a price of $89

                  My Opinion

                  As I had said, never using any preamp (besides the one in my mixer, and I've also used the DBX 286,  and the Aphex 230) even without a preamp, I never thought I sounded bad.

                  With that said, the concept makes sense. I know that when I turn the gain up on any mixer there comes a point where noise is introduced. Using the SS1, I basically turned my gain all the way down.

                  The construction is super rugged and resembles the Cloudlifeter all-metal casing (but cooler looking in black) you're not going to break this. You do need some phantom power (so a typical route might be to plug your microphone into the SS1. Then plug the ss1 into your mixer. The mixer would need to have the Phantom Power Turned on.

                  For my recording today I had my EV Re320 going into the SS1 and that went directly into the Zoom H5. It was an amazing amount of boost.

                  How I did the test. I set my levels using the H5 recorded some audio, removed the SS1 from the chain, and plugged it back into my Zoom H5 without touching any knobs.

                  Do you NEED this? As with all things podcasting, it depends. If you're happy with your audio, no. If you struggle to get enough signal into your recorder, or the sound has a fair amount of noise, then this is well worth the money.

                  Check it out at simplysound.co

                  Second Line Podcasting WordPress Theme

                  I no longer recommend Appendipity themes. This is a theme I loved and have on most of my websites. The face of the company Joey Kissimmee was last seen online in late 2016, and they are no longer replying to any support emails that I send. Unfortunately, this is not the first time I've done this. Semiologic was a cool theme until Thesis came out. Then they went from needing no knowledge of code to having to know a ton of code.

                  I really like Appendipity themes as there was a lot of flexibility (and no need for knowledge of code). I love the Divi theme, but they come close to having too much flexibility and people can get overwhelmed because it does everything (and the learning curve can be a bit large). Divi is a well-managed theme, with a huge community and awesome support. You can join Elegant Themes (the creators of Divi) for $89 a year. I did the one time fee of $249 for lifetime access. In addition to their themes, they have some cool plugins.

                  One thing I just discovered is when you purchase a Second Line Theme, you can only use it on one website. This puts it int the "Depends" situation. The good news there is a one time fee. On the Evanto market, it shows six months of support with extended support for $17.63 a year. If you have multiple sites (for me I have at least four) that can add up ($59 X 4 = $236).

                  Second Line Theme Support

                  So far Second Line support has been great answering all my questions. The theme I'm using (Dixie) is skewing my featured image. When I informed this of the problem, they told me exactly what to do if I wanted to edit some files. The means you're going to need to understand FTP, and not be afraid to edit some code (always make a backup of any files you are editing when it comes to theme code). I was surprised that the theme allowed a featured image to be skewed disproportional as I don't know ANY designer that would allow an image to be reshaped (and if you have any text on your image it makes it blurry).

                  The Power Of Elementor

                  While the Second Line theme makes it easy to set colors, headers, and the theme seems to make it possible to adjust everything (except a skewing featured image...) what I also found amazing was a free plugin that they recommend you use (and they have some built-in features for it ) called Elementor. This is an open source page builder (That looks a lot like, Divi). This will work with most themes, and its a super easy drag and drop page builder. The cool thing is you can use that plugin on any theme. 

                  Always Consider Your Source

                  I hear people that advise new podcasters and they try to sell people packages and strategies that work for them. The problem is they are not you. For example, as I have multiple websites, I might lean toward Divi over Second Line. If you had one website, then a like Dixie or Satchmo might be just the trick if you only have one website. It might be a better fit for you.

                  What Is Up With Libsyn Stats?

                  Libsyn rolled out new stats back on September 18th. Here are our blog posts that go over the stats changes: https://blog.libsyn.com/2017/09/18/stats-overhaul-iab-compliance-podcasts-stats-libsyn-company-announcement/ https://blog.libsyn.com/2017/09/18/libsyn-stats-overhaul-need-know/ NOTE:  Libsyn sent out an email to all Libsyn users on September 18th - if you did not see that email - you might want to check your spam folder.  It would have gone to the email registered to your Libsyn account.

                  Rob Walch  also talked about it more on our latest episode of the Libsyn Podcast: http://thefeed.libsyn.com/105-stats-follow-up-and-apple-podcasts-feed-tags The conversation starts right after the promo at the 52 Minute mark.

                  My Poker Game Analogy

                  Picture yourself at a poker game (a really, really big table)

                  • Ben Robins, Audible.com
                  • Lindsay Lawrence, WideOrbit
                  • Ilwira Marciszek, AdLarge Media
                  • Eurry Kim, New York Public Radio
                  • Earl Swigert, WideOrbit
                  • Yukifumi Touya, Digital Advertising Consortium Inc.
                  • Hirofumi Kanda, Cyber Communications Inc.
                  • Dan Misener, Pacific Content
                  • Mohammad Al-Abdullah, RhythmOne
                  • Jose Alvarez Muguerza, BlogTalkRadio
                  • John Zoephel, Pandora
                  • Kevin McCaul, Acast Stories USA
                  • John Rosenius, Acast Stories USA
                  • Ilham Elkatani, DoubleVerify
                  • Steve Mulder, National Public Media
                  • Stephen Haptonstahl, National Public Media
                  • Candace Williams, BlogTalkRadio
                  • David Marple, Triton Digital
                  • Conrad Trautmann, Westwood One
                  • Robert Peterson, Westwood One
                  • Bob Charish, BlogTalkRadio
                  • Jason Cox, Slate
                  • Bosko Milekic, AdGear Technologies, Inc.
                  • Francois Fortin, AdGear Technologies, Inc.
                  • Andy Toh, BlogTalkRadio
                  • Bruno Nieuwenhuys, Adswizz Inc
                  • Rob Walch, Libsyn
                  • Joel Withrow, Slate
                  • Erik Barraud, Adswizz Inc
                  • Erik Diehn, Midroll Media
                  • Robert Freeland, Podtrac
                  • Dan Jeselsohn, New York Public Radio
                  • Angelo Mandato, RawVoice
                  • Hugo Martel, Triton Digital
                  • Tim Clarke, Cox Media Group
                  • Greg Batusic, PodcastOne
                  • Hernan Lopez, Wondery LLC
                  • Allan Bressler, CBS Local
                  • Norm Pattiz, PodcastOne
                  • Kit Gray, PodcastOne
                  • Jim Kott, WideOrbit
                  • Rob Kass, Nielsen
                  • Millie Mrvica, Westwood One
                  • Jaime Singson, Sizmek
                  • Kelli Hurley, Westwood One
                  • Brian Lynch, Westwood One
                  • Ryan Granner, ESPN.com
                  • Joe Mead, ESPN.com
                  • Skyler Tobey, ESPN.com
                  • Jennifer Susalis, CBS Local
                  • Silvia Mihailescu, Adswizz Inc
                  • Stefan Olson, Minnesota Public Radio
                  • Karim Rayes, RhythmOne
                  • Todd Cochrane, RawVoice
                  • Jean-Luc Wasmer, Triton Digital
                  • Peter deVroede, Midroll Media
                  • Todd Pringle, Midroll Media
                  • Yi Huang, Condé Nast
                  • Gregg Rogers, Sizmek
                  • Alixandra Liner, New York Public Radio
                  • Brett Robinson, National Public Media
                  
                  

                  The Interactive Advertising Bureau (IAB) empowers the media and marketing industries to thrive in the digital economy. Its membership is comprised of more than 650 leading media and technology companies that are responsible for selling, delivering, and optimizing digital advertising or marketing campaigns. They were up to deal the next hand and they stated that "downloads are wild" and everyone went "WHAT?" at the table and they didn't want downloads to be wild.

                  For the industry to be able to move forward, the table had to come together and decide on what would constitute a download. Their answer can be seen in this report. They are currently working on a second version.  If you were going to "Sit at the table" you had to agree to the terms and they all did.

                  Much like when the music industry went from Cassettes to CD's it was a pain. This meant we had to buy all of our favorite music again. But the audio was better. As a music listener, I had no choice but to buy a CD player. It's the way the industry went.

                  Could Libsyn communicate better? I guess so, there is always room for improvement. It gets tough as no podcast company is going to peel back the curtain 100% as if they tell you how they do their stats, you open the door for people to game the system. I personally don't know the formula (I just help you "drive the car" as a Libsyn support person, I don't build it). This is similar to the guy who throws the chicken in the Fryer at KFC. He knows hows to cook the chicken but has no idea what the 11 herbs and spices are.

                  The numbers are lower as the INDUSTRY (remember to poker table above) decided to move toward a number closer to the unique downloads

                  This is an Industry-Wide Situation

                  I did a test over the last few weeks, and I released an episode that had tracking from Libsyn, Podtrac, and Blubrry. In a recent episode of Podcast Ninja, Todd Cochrane explained how years ago Podtrac, Blubrry, and Libsyn came up with specs for an organization for the Association of Downloadable Media (it starts at the 11:44  mark ). So for years, Podtarac, Blubrry, and Libsyn were close in numbers. Fast forward to today and due to how apps are now consuming media it appears that the larger the file size, the greater your numbers were being inflated. So last week I sent out a file that I encoded at 320 kbps (DO NOT DO THIS) and here are my numbers after 24 hours.

                  Libsyn: 1193 Podtrac: 991 Blubrry 1748

                  If you click into the episode on Blubrry you will see the number of 1247 unique downloads which is closer to the IAB standard that Libsyn and Blubrry are using.

                  You Didn't Lose Your Audience

                  I know it is quite a blow to your ego to have the total number of downloads decline, in some cases, people are losing large amounts of their audience. The truth is the same people that listened to your last episode are listening to your current episode. The way it is reported is different. In a way, it's like if we all told time in minutes. There were 1440 minutes in a day, and then everyone decided to tell time in hours and agreed there are 60 minutes in an hour. So now there are 24 hours in a day. That sounds like a lot less than 1440, but I didn't lose any time. I just changed the way I report it.

                  Obviously, those who have CPM deals with advertisers are in a completely different situation. Remember that some of the people on the IAB technical board were from companies like Midroll, Adswizz and other advertising companies. It doesn't make it any better, but they should have an idea of why this is happening as they were they during the planning.

                  Yes it Sucks

                  As I said, any time your numbers go down, it hurts. Hang in there, they will go back up (if you look at the Edison research on podcast listenership on the graph there is one year where it shows the numbers went down - why? They changed the criteria). In the long run, the podcast industry will benefit from this move.

                  It Will Get Better

                  I was recently in the Libsyn headquarters in Pittsburgh PA, and I got a brief tour of the new stats. It looked very impressive as libsyn continues to bring you the best media hosting in the industry. Use the coupon code sopfree.

                  Start Podcasting in Six Weeks 

                  I'm bringing back the six-week group coaching class where we meet live on Saturdays and we walk through the whole process. You can start with zero, and by the end of February have a well researched, properly planned, properly executed podcast. To be first in line go to www.startpodcastinginsixweeks.com

                  Where Will I Be?

                  Big Podcasts - Nashville, TN

                  October 21st I will be attending the Big Podcast Event put on by David Hooper and Rik Roberts about growing your audience in Nashville Tennessee see bigpodcasts.com

                  DC Pofest - Washing DC

                  November 10-11, 2017 I will be in DC at DCPodfest speaking on "Is Your Podcast Making These Mistakes?"

                  Podfest Multimedia Expo - Orlando Fl

                  February 8-10 I will be presenting at the Podfest Multimedia Expo in Orlando Florida see podfest.us

                  Social Media Marketing World - San Diego, CA

                  The ultimate event on Social Media. I will be leading a panel on Podcast Monetization See Social Media Marketing World

                  Ready to Start Podcasting Now?

                  Step by step tutorials

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live Group Coaching

                  $49/month or get two free months when you sign up for a year.

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>027f0e3072006cdeaa0dae1701b15bcaMon, 09 Oct 2017 04:00:00 -040040:29falsefull587587Finding Podcast Listeners At the Mall? - Weird Audio Issues SolvedIn honor of International Podcast Day, I went to the local mall (that's still open) and asked people, "Have you have of podcasting?" If they said yes I would ask, "Have you actually heard a podcast?" Many people said NO. The people who had been listening to podcasts were really into podcasting.

                  This show originated from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/586

                  School of Podcasting Wins The People's Choice Podcast Award in the Technology 

                  I've been nominated NUMEROUS times for the different shows I create such a the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, Feeding My Faith, and others, but I've never won an award. The School of Podcasting won this year in the technology category. Thanks so all of my listeners. It is DEEPLY Appreciated.

                  Because of My Podcast - Douglas 

                  3:45

                  Douglas from Zerobooks.com got a job, and is now podcasting as part of this job! Check him out at www.zerobooks.com His podcast is called Zero Squared.

                  Looking For Podcast Listeners at the Mall

                  5:28

                  I went to the mall to ask random people if they knew about podcasts? 

                  Most people had not heard of podcasting, those who had listened to a podcast, really loved them.

                  There are some people who need some help in understanding what a podcast is. 

                  You can always send your audience to www.learntosubscribe.com

                  Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone

                  If took me 40 minutes to get up the nerve to talk to complete strangers. I may appear outgoing, but underneath I can be pretty shy. 

                  As I moved along, it got easier. It was funny watching people put up their guard when I would ask, "Can I talk to you for a few minutes?" You can see their defenses go up.

                  If I do this next year I need to find people who are bored (laundromats, or maybe set up a table at an Apple store). I'm not sure if Apple would allow this, but all they can say is no. 

                  Podcasting Does Not Waste Your Time

                  10:45

                  I had a talk this week with a potential podcaster who wants to build an audience and monetize his podcast. He wanted a step by step approach that would ensure that he was making a full-time living in the future. While there are people out there who are happy to charge you $4000 to tell you to believe in yourself, get into New and Noteworthy, and your dreams can come true, I prefer a more realistic approach. That is to say Gimlet Media producers super popular shows, and yet not every show they launch makes the cut a few months later. There are great shows like Action that was on a major network with A-list celebrities making appearances and yet the show was canceled. 

                  You can follow their footsteps and do a pilot episode, get feedback and shape your content accordingly. In the same way, you can't practice comedy in a basement (you have to tell your jokes in public to know if they are funny) you need to publish your episodes to the audience to get feedback. 

                  Even if your show doesn't end up doing as well as you had hoped, you will gain new friends, you will learn new skills, and you will benefit from the experience (I've had people say they are better speakers due to creating a podcast).

                  You can get started with a small investment of $100 - $300 for equipment. See http://www.bestpodcastinggear.com/kits/

                  Common Audio Issues

                  15:02

                  The podcast sounds weird on a phone or single speaker (mono) - your recording may be stereo and out of phase. The solution is to copy one of the channels and copy and paste it into a new file and save it as mono. Check out this video to better understand

                  My podcast is not displaying properly - This is almost always a case where you are exporting your podcast using a Variable Bit Rate (VBR). This will cause the episode to not display properly, and in some cases, if you press pause, and the podcast goes back to the beginning when you press play again. 

                  My podcast doesn't display the artwork in iTunes/Apple Podcasts - iTunes/Apple Podcasts does NOT display episodic artwork. It only displays the artwork for your show

                  Growing An Entertainment Based Podcast

                  23:30

                  One strategy is to go to imdb.com and use their 30-day free trial to get the information on actors, directors, producers, for your show.

                  Free Media Host Opinion Podcasting Goes Out of Business

                  26:30 

                  I wrote an article about free media hosting on my blog and in it I look at six different podcast media hosting that have gone out of business. It turns out that the average lifespan of a podcast media hosting company that does not charge is 31 months. I do not recommend free media hosting for your podcast. It is building your podcast on very thin ice. 

                  Free Podcast Tutorials

                  How Much Storage Space Do I Need For My Podcast?

                  Busting Podcasting Myths

                  The Truth about New and Noteworthy

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Check out the 19 courses, live group coaching, private facebook group at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/live

                  ]]>In honor of International Podcast Day, I went to the local mall (that's still open) and asked people, "Have you have of podcasting?" If they said yes I would ask, "Have you actually heard a podcast?" Many people said NO. The people who had been listening to podcasts were really into podcasting.

                  This show originated from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/586

                  School of Podcasting Wins The People's Choice Podcast Award in the Technology 

                  I've been nominated NUMEROUS times for the different shows I create such a the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, Feeding My Faith, and others, but I've never won an award. The School of Podcasting won this year in the technology category. Thanks so all of my listeners. It is DEEPLY Appreciated.

                  Because of My Podcast - Douglas 

                  3:45

                  Douglas from Zerobooks.com got a job, and is now podcasting as part of this job! Check him out at www.zerobooks.com His podcast is called Zero Squared.

                  Looking For Podcast Listeners at the Mall

                  5:28

                  I went to the mall to ask random people if they knew about podcasts? 

                  Most people had not heard of podcasting, those who had listened to a podcast, really loved them.

                  There are some people who need some help in understanding what a podcast is. 

                  You can always send your audience to www.learntosubscribe.com

                  Get Out Of Your Comfort Zone

                  If took me 40 minutes to get up the nerve to talk to complete strangers. I may appear outgoing, but underneath I can be pretty shy. 

                  As I moved along, it got easier. It was funny watching people put up their guard when I would ask, "Can I talk to you for a few minutes?" You can see their defenses go up.

                  If I do this next year I need to find people who are bored (laundromats, or maybe set up a table at an Apple store). I'm not sure if Apple would allow this, but all they can say is no. 

                  Podcasting Does Not Waste Your Time

                  10:45

                  I had a talk this week with a potential podcaster who wants to build an audience and monetize his podcast. He wanted a step by step approach that would ensure that he was making a full-time living in the future. While there are people out there who are happy to charge you $4000 to tell you to believe in yourself, get into New and Noteworthy, and your dreams can come true, I prefer a more realistic approach. That is to say Gimlet Media producers super popular shows, and yet not every show they launch makes the cut a few months later. There are great shows like Action that was on a major network with A-list celebrities making appearances and yet the show was canceled. 

                  You can follow their footsteps and do a pilot episode, get feedback and shape your content accordingly. In the same way, you can't practice comedy in a basement (you have to tell your jokes in public to know if they are funny) you need to publish your episodes to the audience to get feedback. 

                  Even if your show doesn't end up doing as well as you had hoped, you will gain new friends, you will learn new skills, and you will benefit from the experience (I've had people say they are better speakers due to creating a podcast).

                  You can get started with a small investment of $100 - $300 for equipment. See http://www.bestpodcastinggear.com/kits/

                  Common Audio Issues

                  15:02

                  The podcast sounds weird on a phone or single speaker (mono) - your recording may be stereo and out of phase. The solution is to copy one of the channels and copy and paste it into a new file and save it as mono. Check out this video to better understand

                  My podcast is not displaying properly - This is almost always a case where you are exporting your podcast using a Variable Bit Rate (VBR). This will cause the episode to not display properly, and in some cases, if you press pause, and the podcast goes back to the beginning when you press play again. 

                  My podcast doesn't display the artwork in iTunes/Apple Podcasts - iTunes/Apple Podcasts does NOT display episodic artwork. It only displays the artwork for your show

                  Growing An Entertainment Based Podcast

                  23:30

                  One strategy is to go to imdb.com and use their 30-day free trial to get the information on actors, directors, producers, for your show.

                  Free Media Host Opinion Podcasting Goes Out of Business

                  26:30 

                  I wrote an article about free media hosting on my blog and in it I look at six different podcast media hosting that have gone out of business. It turns out that the average lifespan of a podcast media hosting company that does not charge is 31 months. I do not recommend free media hosting for your podcast. It is building your podcast on very thin ice. 

                  Free Podcast Tutorials

                  How Much Storage Space Do I Need For My Podcast?

                  Busting Podcasting Myths

                  The Truth about New and Noteworthy

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Check out the 19 courses, live group coaching, private facebook group at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/live

                  ]]>53b0812a15e9b60f42c89c79236bda89Mon, 02 Oct 2017 04:05:27 -040044:05falsefull586586International Podcast Day (Subscribers Only)Hello, everyone, I realized in my last episode I didn't talk about International Podcast Day. If you haven't checked out their site it is

                  www.internationalpodcastday.com

                  They have cool tools to help you promote the power of podcasting check them out at https://internationalpodcastday.com/promotion/

                  Check out the Podcast Success Summit as well

                  ]]>Hello, everyone, I realized in my last episode I didn't talk about International Podcast Day. If you haven't checked out their site it is

                  www.internationalpodcastday.com

                  They have cool tools to help you promote the power of podcasting check them out at https://internationalpodcastday.com/promotion/

                  Check out the Podcast Success Summit as well

                  ]]>60f63f240d392d45bf9893f18a01ad1eWed, 27 Sep 2017 19:16:06 -040004:54falsefull585585Creating Events For Your Audience Part 1The fastest way to connect with your audience is face to face. You may be thinking of creating a meetup, or a workshop, or yearly event around your topic/show. How do you go about doing it?

                  Today we have Chris Krimitsos who is the organizer of  Podest.us, Nick Seuberling of Cincinnati Soccer Talk, and Darryl E. McCullough who just organized his first event National Podcast Power.  Darryl also hosts the Full Circle Podcast.

                  In today's episode you will hear:

                  About Nick taking his audience on a four-hour bus trip to Pittsburgh

                  Darry'ls reflections the day after National Podcast Power conference

                  Chris shares his insights as someone who has organized thousands of events. 

                  The risks and deposits that may be involved with an event.

                  How to negotiate with hotels. 

                  How to choose speakers for your event. 

                  The dangers of food around your event. 

                  How to shop for a bus.

                  Free places for a casual meetup.

                  What was Chris's biggest trainwreck and how he handled it

                  What to do with negative feedback

                  Building Routines

                  When you create an event for your audience, you are making memories with your audience. With the right event, people can start building their schedule around your events, and you become part of their routine. 

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Acuity Scheduling

                  National Podcast Power

                  Cincinnati Soccer Talk

                  Full Circle Podcast

                  Ivy Envy Podcast

                  Podfest.us

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Sign up for a Coaching Call

                   

                  ]]>The fastest way to connect with your audience is face to face. You may be thinking of creating a meetup, or a workshop, or yearly event around your topic/show. How do you go about doing it?

                  Today we have Chris Krimitsos who is the organizer of  Podest.us, Nick Seuberling of Cincinnati Soccer Talk, and Darryl E. McCullough who just organized his first event National Podcast Power.  Darryl also hosts the Full Circle Podcast.

                  In today's episode you will hear:

                  About Nick taking his audience on a four-hour bus trip to Pittsburgh

                  Darry'ls reflections the day after National Podcast Power conference

                  Chris shares his insights as someone who has organized thousands of events. 

                  The risks and deposits that may be involved with an event.

                  How to negotiate with hotels. 

                  How to choose speakers for your event. 

                  The dangers of food around your event. 

                  How to shop for a bus.

                  Free places for a casual meetup.

                  What was Chris's biggest trainwreck and how he handled it

                  What to do with negative feedback

                  Building Routines

                  When you create an event for your audience, you are making memories with your audience. With the right event, people can start building their schedule around your events, and you become part of their routine. 

                  Mentioned In This Episode

                  Acuity Scheduling

                  National Podcast Power

                  Cincinnati Soccer Talk

                  Full Circle Podcast

                  Ivy Envy Podcast

                  Podfest.us

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Sign up for a Coaching Call

                   

                  ]]>458ff3a92c918d509360c9760048a8f3Mon, 25 Sep 2017 04:01:54 -040044:15falsefull585585To Care Or Not To CareThe podcaster attitude can be a tricky one to juggle. You care about your content, you care about your audience, but at times you might want to try something new, and that means your audience may not like it. If you like it, should you do it? Amy Pohler says yes. Success is achieved through Ambivalence

                  This episode originate at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/584

                  Because of My Podcast - Dave Jackson

                  My podcast has opened many doors over the 12 years I've been podcast. When I got home from Podcast Movement, I got an email from Michael Stelzner from Social Media Examiner stating he wanted to talk to me about the Social Media Marketing World 2018. In talking with Michael (and I so wish I had a copy of this ) he stated that he had people involved with his conference like John Lee Dumas, Daniel J. Lewis, and he's good friends with Cliff Ravenscraft. Michael said he turned to his crew and asked "Who is missing on the podcasting end, and they all said, "Dave Jackson." So here again, it's not who you know, but who knows you. So because of my podcast, I will be speaking at Social Media Marketing World 2018. The event is February 28th - March 2nd in San Diego. Shortly after talking with Michael, I received a call from Chris Krimitsos, and I will be involved again with Podfest.us in Flordia February 8-10 in Orlando Bay.

                  This weekend, September 23rd I will be the closing keynote of the first-ever National Podcast Power in Perrysburg Ohio. 

                  While I'm talking about speaking today (9/18) I will be running the gathering of Northeast Ohio Podcasters where we meet, talk podcasting, gear, and whatever you would like to talk about. Check it out at www.neohiopodcasters.com

                  Podcast Gear Yellowtec iXm Microphone Recorder

                  At Podcast Movement Shawn Park from The Be Your Own Nerd show let me play with his Yellowtex iXm microphone/recorder. Here is a little about the microphone/recorder: "iXM was designed to become the finest reporter microphone ever. One of the most challenging requirements was a perfect auto leveling. Our engineers managed to develop an excitingly innovative procedure: the LEA engine. Whether whisper or cry, you will always enjoy a perfect level. LEA lets you do amazing recordings even under stressful conditions. No AGC and no artifacts. Try it out, you will be amazed." 

                  The price is $761. (so this may not be for the hobbyist, but it's always interesting to see pro gear like this as a more affordable version is probably in the works that will hit the shelves in a few years.

                  Check out Shawn at beyourownnerd.com

                  Ambivalence Is the Key To Success -Amy Pohler

                  In the past I've mentioned there are three things a podcaster needs that have nothing to do with the tech.

                  Support of your family - without it, there is stress and pressure

                  Your health - without it you don't function well, if at all

                  Your attitude - You actions follow your attitude. As the old Henry Ford saying goes, whether you think you can or you think you can't, you're right.

                  If you look at the above three, that if one is removed, the other two suffer.

                  Today I Want to Focus On The Attitude

                  I've mentioned in previous episodes how Jerry Seinfeld had to wait four years to get on the Tonight Show. He then kept killing it on every appearance for the next nine years before he got his own show. The television show Seinfeld did awful for the first four years of its existence.

                  I've been reading alot of autobiographies lately (or to be honest listening to them). My most Recent were Martin Short and Amy Pohler. In both cases, they kind of knew what they wanted to do (entertain people and be in "Show Business"). They started with small theater groups and immersed themselves in their local scene. They worked with people who were better then they were, and learned. They performed in theaters that were housed under a supermarket. They were in buildings where you put things over the bathroom drains to keep the rats out. They suffered through these horrible situations because they loved their craft, and they knew that these experiences would only help them get better. 

                  In Martin Shorts book he explained how he was doing a live TV show in Canada. Tony Bennet (one of his heroes was on the show, but due to a snowstorm was very late - again live TV). Martin was supposed to sing near the front of the show with Tony closing the show. With the staff scrambling to fit pieces into the live TV show puzzle, they finally heard that Tony was going to make it. As soon as he arrived, they put him on and in true Tony Bennet fashion, he was awesome. There was only one problem, this meant Martin had to follow  Tony Bennet.

                  Here is an excerpt from his book, "So I started singing: “Here we are, on earth together… . It’s you and me!” Already, I was wrong. The lyrics are “It’s you and I.” That’s because the song I was singing, by Stevie Wonder, is called … “You and I.”

                  This little slip was enough to knock me completely out of orbit. I suddenly forgot the rest of the lyrics—and worse, for reasons I still cannot fathom, I started to impersonate Tony Bennett while improvising new lyrics. "

                  Later Martin would bump into Tony in the bathroom, to which Tony looked him square in the eye and said, "“You froze good, kid."

                  Both Martin and Amy knew, especially as they were often in groups doing improvisation that some nights you are the bug and other nights your windshield. You don't get better without practicing your craft.

                  Martin Short who only did one season of Saturday Night Live (and yet Ed Grimly lives on forever) had (and has) serious imposter syndrome as about every seven years thinks his career is over, then he gets a new job.

                  Amy said something that I think we all need to strive for, "Ambivalence is key to success. This means you have to care about your work. But not about the result. You have to care about how good you are and how good you feel, but not about how good people think you are. Or how good people think you look. I realize this is extremely difficult.

                  How I take this is we have to care about our content, and deeply care about our audience, but in the event, we try something to better our show and it fails, we need to able to learn from it, and move on. As I've heard many shows (including some of mine) lead off with an apology (a pet peeve of mine) this is easier sad than done.

                  If you are driving and accidentally cut someone off, they may wave at you in a particular fashion using one finger. Does this stop you from driving the next day? No, we go out, learn from our experience, and move on.

                  30/30/30

                  Thirty percent of your audience will LOVE you

                  Thirty percent will like you

                  Thirty percent won't be "your target audience"

                  Ten Percent are still trying to figure out what a podcast is...

                  To Care or Not To Care

                  You will always care about your podcast content, but there may be times when you don't care about the result. You need to do what is best for you, and for the show, and if you're audience doesn't like it, they will have to deal with it, until your new target audience catches up with your show. 

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Start the School of Podcasting

                  Northeasy Ohio Podcasters

                  Building a Better Dave

                  International Podcast Day

                  Logical Weight Loss Podcast

                  National Podcast Power

                  Social Media Marketing World 2018

                  ]]>The podcaster attitude can be a tricky one to juggle. You care about your content, you care about your audience, but at times you might want to try something new, and that means your audience may not like it. If you like it, should you do it? Amy Pohler says yes. Success is achieved through Ambivalence

                  This episode originate at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/584

                  Because of My Podcast - Dave Jackson

                  My podcast has opened many doors over the 12 years I've been podcast. When I got home from Podcast Movement, I got an email from Michael Stelzner from Social Media Examiner stating he wanted to talk to me about the Social Media Marketing World 2018. In talking with Michael (and I so wish I had a copy of this ) he stated that he had people involved with his conference like John Lee Dumas, Daniel J. Lewis, and he's good friends with Cliff Ravenscraft. Michael said he turned to his crew and asked "Who is missing on the podcasting end, and they all said, "Dave Jackson." So here again, it's not who you know, but who knows you. So because of my podcast, I will be speaking at Social Media Marketing World 2018. The event is February 28th - March 2nd in San Diego. Shortly after talking with Michael, I received a call from Chris Krimitsos, and I will be involved again with Podfest.us in Flordia February 8-10 in Orlando Bay.

                  This weekend, September 23rd I will be the closing keynote of the first-ever National Podcast Power in Perrysburg Ohio. 

                  While I'm talking about speaking today (9/18) I will be running the gathering of Northeast Ohio Podcasters where we meet, talk podcasting, gear, and whatever you would like to talk about. Check it out at www.neohiopodcasters.com

                  Podcast Gear Yellowtec iXm Microphone Recorder

                  At Podcast Movement Shawn Park from The Be Your Own Nerd show let me play with his Yellowtex iXm microphone/recorder. Here is a little about the microphone/recorder: "iXM was designed to become the finest reporter microphone ever. One of the most challenging requirements was a perfect auto leveling. Our engineers managed to develop an excitingly innovative procedure: the LEA engine. Whether whisper or cry, you will always enjoy a perfect level. LEA lets you do amazing recordings even under stressful conditions. No AGC and no artifacts. Try it out, you will be amazed." 

                  The price is $761. (so this may not be for the hobbyist, but it's always interesting to see pro gear like this as a more affordable version is probably in the works that will hit the shelves in a few years.

                  Check out Shawn at beyourownnerd.com

                  Ambivalence Is the Key To Success -Amy Pohler

                  In the past I've mentioned there are three things a podcaster needs that have nothing to do with the tech.

                  Support of your family - without it, there is stress and pressure

                  Your health - without it you don't function well, if at all

                  Your attitude - You actions follow your attitude. As the old Henry Ford saying goes, whether you think you can or you think you can't, you're right.

                  If you look at the above three, that if one is removed, the other two suffer.

                  Today I Want to Focus On The Attitude

                  I've mentioned in previous episodes how Jerry Seinfeld had to wait four years to get on the Tonight Show. He then kept killing it on every appearance for the next nine years before he got his own show. The television show Seinfeld did awful for the first four years of its existence.

                  I've been reading alot of autobiographies lately (or to be honest listening to them). My most Recent were Martin Short and Amy Pohler. In both cases, they kind of knew what they wanted to do (entertain people and be in "Show Business"). They started with small theater groups and immersed themselves in their local scene. They worked with people who were better then they were, and learned. They performed in theaters that were housed under a supermarket. They were in buildings where you put things over the bathroom drains to keep the rats out. They suffered through these horrible situations because they loved their craft, and they knew that these experiences would only help them get better. 

                  In Martin Shorts book he explained how he was doing a live TV show in Canada. Tony Bennet (one of his heroes was on the show, but due to a snowstorm was very late - again live TV). Martin was supposed to sing near the front of the show with Tony closing the show. With the staff scrambling to fit pieces into the live TV show puzzle, they finally heard that Tony was going to make it. As soon as he arrived, they put him on and in true Tony Bennet fashion, he was awesome. There was only one problem, this meant Martin had to follow  Tony Bennet.

                  Here is an excerpt from his book, "So I started singing: “Here we are, on earth together… . It’s you and me!” Already, I was wrong. The lyrics are “It’s you and I.” That’s because the song I was singing, by Stevie Wonder, is called … “You and I.”

                  This little slip was enough to knock me completely out of orbit. I suddenly forgot the rest of the lyrics—and worse, for reasons I still cannot fathom, I started to impersonate Tony Bennett while improvising new lyrics. "

                  Later Martin would bump into Tony in the bathroom, to which Tony looked him square in the eye and said, "“You froze good, kid."

                  Both Martin and Amy knew, especially as they were often in groups doing improvisation that some nights you are the bug and other nights your windshield. You don't get better without practicing your craft.

                  Martin Short who only did one season of Saturday Night Live (and yet Ed Grimly lives on forever) had (and has) serious imposter syndrome as about every seven years thinks his career is over, then he gets a new job.

                  Amy said something that I think we all need to strive for, "Ambivalence is key to success. This means you have to care about your work. But not about the result. You have to care about how good you are and how good you feel, but not about how good people think you are. Or how good people think you look. I realize this is extremely difficult.

                  How I take this is we have to care about our content, and deeply care about our audience, but in the event, we try something to better our show and it fails, we need to able to learn from it, and move on. As I've heard many shows (including some of mine) lead off with an apology (a pet peeve of mine) this is easier sad than done.

                  If you are driving and accidentally cut someone off, they may wave at you in a particular fashion using one finger. Does this stop you from driving the next day? No, we go out, learn from our experience, and move on.

                  30/30/30

                  Thirty percent of your audience will LOVE you

                  Thirty percent will like you

                  Thirty percent won't be "your target audience"

                  Ten Percent are still trying to figure out what a podcast is...

                  To Care or Not To Care

                  You will always care about your podcast content, but there may be times when you don't care about the result. You need to do what is best for you, and for the show, and if you're audience doesn't like it, they will have to deal with it, until your new target audience catches up with your show. 

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Start the School of Podcasting

                  Northeasy Ohio Podcasters

                  Building a Better Dave

                  International Podcast Day

                  Logical Weight Loss Podcast

                  National Podcast Power

                  Social Media Marketing World 2018

                  ]]>32f0294ff4a941b433bdb5beb3516de3Mon, 18 Sep 2017 04:23:54 -040035:30falsefull584584How To Compete with the Big NetworksGlenn the Geek Hebert (from horseradionetwork.com )shares what he learns from talking to "Radio People" from Podcast Movement. We discuss being more focused with our podcast, so I bring on Addy Saucedo who is the author of The Podcast Planner ($37.99 on Amazon) and we talk about how you have less stress and more downloads by having a better plan for your podcast.

                  This is episode 583 of the School of Podcasting and originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/583

                  Dr. Ryan Gray Stops Practicing Medicine to Do Podcasting Full Time

                  Dr. Ryan Gray shares how he has left his medical career after his website and podcasting that has grown over and over the years, and he is now doing consulting full time on helping people survive medical school, and he published his first book, "The Premed Playbook: Guide to the Medical School Interview: Be Prepared, Perform Well, Get Accepted." 

                  His goal is to change the culture around medical school so it's not so competitive.

                  Check out his podcast at www.mededmedia.com and medicalschoolhw.com

                  Glenn Hebert on What He Learned from Radio Veterans at Podcast Movement

                  5:44 In today's discussion with Glenn we hear how:

                  • Radio veterans are jumping into the podcast pool
                  • The current issues with automated advertising
                  • How podcasters who want to podcast for profit need to learn from radio people and be ready, be prepared before pressing record.
                  • How Glenn keeps his integrity with sponsors
                  • How Glenn uses his audience to make decisions on what happens and is featured on his show.
                  
                  Podcasting With Laser Sharp Focus with The Podcast Planner - Addu Saucedo Interview

                  22:25 Here is the description of the Podcast Planner from Amazon: The Podcast Planner: Podcasting Guide With Templates To Help Podcasters Consistently Plan, Record and Publish Finally, a planner for Podcasters! It provides everything a Podcaster needs to be organized, motivated and happily podcasting. Successful Podcasters know how to consistently plan, record, and publish their podcast, and with The Podcast Planner, you can too! Buy it at Amazon

                  Check out Addy's website at www.thepodcastplanner.com 

                  In today's chat we learn:

                  • Addy was helping people start and edit podcasts, but they keep podfading (quitting)
                  • How podcast planning can help you ensure your content resonates with your audience.
                  • How podcasting is hard, but it can be less stressful with a plan.
                  • A podcast compass guides you to your goals and purpose
                  • What to do if you're not sure who your audience is
                  • How the podcast planner can help with an Interview show
                  • How using a podcast to promote her book has brought more sales, and more email subscribers, and more speaking gigs.
                  • The importance of reviewing past episodes
                  • Why paper may boost brainstorming activities
                  
                  

                  Find her show in iTunes or on Stitcher

                   

                  Start Your Podcast Today

                  The School of Podcasting Offers:

                  Step by step tutorials that will help plan, launch, and grow your podcast.

                  Live group coaching

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Priority Email Support

                  Join Today

                  ]]>Glenn the Geek Hebert (from horseradionetwork.com )shares what he learns from talking to "Radio People" from Podcast Movement. We discuss being more focused with our podcast, so I bring on Addy Saucedo who is the author of The Podcast Planner ($37.99 on Amazon) and we talk about how you have less stress and more downloads by having a better plan for your podcast.

                  This is episode 583 of the School of Podcasting and originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/583

                  Dr. Ryan Gray Stops Practicing Medicine to Do Podcasting Full Time

                  Dr. Ryan Gray shares how he has left his medical career after his website and podcasting that has grown over and over the years, and he is now doing consulting full time on helping people survive medical school, and he published his first book, "The Premed Playbook: Guide to the Medical School Interview: Be Prepared, Perform Well, Get Accepted." 

                  His goal is to change the culture around medical school so it's not so competitive.

                  Check out his podcast at www.mededmedia.com and medicalschoolhw.com

                  Glenn Hebert on What He Learned from Radio Veterans at Podcast Movement

                  5:44 In today's discussion with Glenn we hear how:

                  • Radio veterans are jumping into the podcast pool
                  • The current issues with automated advertising
                  • How podcasters who want to podcast for profit need to learn from radio people and be ready, be prepared before pressing record.
                  • How Glenn keeps his integrity with sponsors
                  • How Glenn uses his audience to make decisions on what happens and is featured on his show.
                  
                  Podcasting With Laser Sharp Focus with The Podcast Planner - Addu Saucedo Interview

                  22:25 Here is the description of the Podcast Planner from Amazon: The Podcast Planner: Podcasting Guide With Templates To Help Podcasters Consistently Plan, Record and Publish Finally, a planner for Podcasters! It provides everything a Podcaster needs to be organized, motivated and happily podcasting. Successful Podcasters know how to consistently plan, record, and publish their podcast, and with The Podcast Planner, you can too! Buy it at Amazon

                  Check out Addy's website at www.thepodcastplanner.com 

                  In today's chat we learn:

                  • Addy was helping people start and edit podcasts, but they keep podfading (quitting)
                  • How podcast planning can help you ensure your content resonates with your audience.
                  • How podcasting is hard, but it can be less stressful with a plan.
                  • A podcast compass guides you to your goals and purpose
                  • What to do if you're not sure who your audience is
                  • How the podcast planner can help with an Interview show
                  • How using a podcast to promote her book has brought more sales, and more email subscribers, and more speaking gigs.
                  • The importance of reviewing past episodes
                  • Why paper may boost brainstorming activities
                  
                  

                  Find her show in iTunes or on Stitcher

                   

                  Start Your Podcast Today

                  The School of Podcasting Offers:

                  Step by step tutorials that will help plan, launch, and grow your podcast.

                  Live group coaching

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Priority Email Support

                  Join Today

                  ]]>d8b3fe81e82e5f9cca6a7300582c52e7Mon, 11 Sep 2017 04:00:00 -040049:59falsefull583583Um, Yeah, NO! - Keeping Bad Content Away From Your AudienceEvery month I ask my audience a question. This month is have you ever been approached by someone who OBVIOUSLY has NO CLUE about your show?

                  Special Thanks To: 

                  Bernie from Bernie the Cat Show

                  Lee Silverstein from the Colon Cancer Podcast has people wanting to talk about Cancer conspiracies.

                  Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network had someone ask for a donation if he didn't want to be on the show.

                  Matthew McClain does an audio drama (obviously no guests) but still gets solicited to have guests be on his show. His show is "A Scottish Podcast"

                  I had someone contact me about the Healing Our Marriage show (which is defunct) and I "Played" with them, and asked why they loved my show

                  Jason Bryant from Matt Talk Online

                  Podcast Booking Resources

                  Interview Valet - Find and/or be a guest

                  Interview Connections - Rock both sides of the microphone (one of the oldest podcast booking agents)

                  PodcastGuests.com - A free resource for finding guests

                  Help a Reporter - Reports looking for Experts

                  How to Get Radio Interviews (Course) 

                  More Resources at PodcastingResources.com

                  I'll Be Speaking at:

                  Podcast Midatlantic September 8-9 in the greater Philadelphia Area

                  National Podcast Power September 23rd in Perrysburg, Ohio

                  Start Podcasting Today!

                  Get immediate access to our online courses covering Podcasting from A to Z, start to finish.

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live groups coaching twice a month)

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>Every month I ask my audience a question. This month is have you ever been approached by someone who OBVIOUSLY has NO CLUE about your show?

                  Special Thanks To: 

                  Bernie from Bernie the Cat Show

                  Lee Silverstein from the Colon Cancer Podcast has people wanting to talk about Cancer conspiracies.

                  Glenn Hebert from the Horse Radio Network had someone ask for a donation if he didn't want to be on the show.

                  Matthew McClain does an audio drama (obviously no guests) but still gets solicited to have guests be on his show. His show is "A Scottish Podcast"

                  I had someone contact me about the Healing Our Marriage show (which is defunct) and I "Played" with them, and asked why they loved my show

                  Jason Bryant from Matt Talk Online

                  Podcast Booking Resources

                  Interview Valet - Find and/or be a guest

                  Interview Connections - Rock both sides of the microphone (one of the oldest podcast booking agents)

                  PodcastGuests.com - A free resource for finding guests

                  Help a Reporter - Reports looking for Experts

                  How to Get Radio Interviews (Course) 

                  More Resources at PodcastingResources.com

                  I'll Be Speaking at:

                  Podcast Midatlantic September 8-9 in the greater Philadelphia Area

                  National Podcast Power September 23rd in Perrysburg, Ohio

                  Start Podcasting Today!

                  Get immediate access to our online courses covering Podcasting from A to Z, start to finish.

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live groups coaching twice a month)

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Join today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>d86f4a25e7be182df63113053236ac23Mon, 04 Sep 2017 04:00:00 -040039:19falsefull582582Podcast Movement 2017 RefrelectionsI'm back from podcast movement, and I had a blast. I also have insights from one of the hardest assignments I've done in a long time.
                  My Impression of Podcast Movement 2017

                  Nothing cooler than being picked up at that airport by fellow podcasters Marcus Couch from WordPress Plugins A to Z. We haven't seen each other face to face in about 10 years. We cranked some cool metal on the way to the Marriot and it was like old times.

                  Then I get the then Marriot and I get to meet my co-host Jim Collison from the Average Guy network, and I go over to his table and there sits the one and only Steve Stewart and Mike Dell. So for me, the Summar Camp aspect of Podcast Movement is in full effect.

                  The coolest line I heard all week was relayed by Paul Colligan (another person' I've known for 10+ years) and it came from a Dan Klass session. Dan (who is a former comedian) shared how often at comedy clubs you will have multiple comedians perform in an evening - and yet they all use the same microphone. The point? It's not about the tech.

                  I roomed with Erik K Johnson from podcasttalentcoach.com, and he had stated that it would be awesome if he could meet a web developer who needed help with his podcast, as he was a podcast consultant who needed help with his website. I get into the elevator, introduce myself to everyone in the elevator and it turns out that one of the people is a web designer thinking of starting a podcast. When we get out of the elevator, on of the first people who see is Erik. I felt like I was in a Christmas movie and it was going to start to snow.

                  I saw Harry Durran from Podcast Junkies and Dr. Ryan Gray who has given up his practice to do podcasting full time and Harry introduces me to Natalie Jennings who happens to be taking head shots at a reasonable price. She shows me a few samples of people, and I'm hooked. I can't wait to see how they turn out. The few peaks I saw of what she did was amazing. See her at http://www.nataliechampajennings.com/

                  I found out in Paul Colligan's session that if you are in Google Play Music, you are also on the Google Home portable audio speaker.

                  I also know of a cool double secret project that is going to make recording double-enders via a browser very cool.

                  I was on a panel with Ray Ortega, Daniel J. Lewis, and Addy Saucedo on what is inside an RSS. This was an insanely nerdy topic, but due to the recent Apple announcements we had some interested parties and I thought we pulled it off well. The bonus is I got to hang out with some cool friends.

                  The Coolest Thing I Saw At Podcast Movement 2017

                  While there were tons of great sessions at PM17, as a vendor (I work for Libsyn.com - use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) I don't get to attend any sessions. I did see something that was way cool. I met Alissa Daire of the Maximize Your Strengths show. I see her the first night, and she is in a group of people and we get talking about Strengths Finder, and she becomes a ping pong ball bouncing off the ceiling with energy. She's super nice, and it was great to catch up with her as I had met her last year. The next night, I'm standing at the Luau event, and here she comes. She explains how "I'm done." She's tired (as many people are), and she is considerably less energetic. Pat Flynn walks over, he's very witty and a super nice guy. Then the subject changes to strengths finder results, and it was like watching a time release video of a flower blooming. Her energy came back, her smile came back, her body language completely changed. It was amazing to watch.

                  I saw this a few more times. It's late, and people have had a few adult beverages, then I ask them about their show, and BOOM, the body language picks up, the eyes are open a bit wider, the voice is a little louder.

                  Later, Paris from Gamertag Radio got star struck when Cara Santa Maria from the Skeptics Guide to the Universe walks by. I offered to go bring her over. He got shy, so I did my best Steve Austin (the six million dollar man, not the wrestler) imitation across the showroom floor. I had no idea she was an Emmy Award winning journalist. I bring her over and embarrass Paris. Danny Peña is there, Jim Collison is there, and the minute Paris explained that he really did listen to her show the body language changed.  For me, I think of it as being in your "first impression" mode and then finding out that you're among family.

                  For the Best Content - Put a Time Frame On it

                  I spoke about how I got lucky to be able to induct Dan Klass from the Bitterest Pill into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. The presentation should last three minutes. I had hoped that three minutes would be longer than I thought. I wrote out my first draft. It had some bits about history and podcasting in 2005. It had examples of how the show made me feel. I made a joke about how the more I talk about his show, the more I sound like a stalker. I listed his accomplishments.

                  I started the stopwatch and went into the presentation, about half what through I glanced at my phone and I was already at 5 and a half minutes. Oh boy......

                  What Was the Purpose of This Presentation?

                  I had to go back and ask myself, what was the purpose of this presentation? The purpose was for the person sitting in row 7 who had been podcasting since 2015 and had no idea who Dan Klass was. It wasn't about me. It wasn't about being funny. I was about answering the question, "Why is Dan Klass in the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame." For me, this was a big opportunity, on a big stage, and I didn't want to mess it up for myself, or Dan. It was time to edit.

                  Anything about me went out the door. The history lesson of iriver portable players and synchronization cables went up in smoke. Most of the stories I had about Dan might not go over if you didn't listen to his show.

                  Only the things that HAD to be said would stay.

                  I listed his accomplishments. I thought of the funniest thing I had heard on his show (he referred to his two-year-old daughter as Princess Tirade for quite some time), and the most memorable episode (of ALL podcasting) is episode 102 Mass Murder where he talks about what it's like when your Uncle is murdered, and you're walking past TV cameras escorting your mother to the funeral. It's at the end, I highly suggest you listen to it.

                  I had pointed out that Dan was one of the first to try premium podcasting (this was YEARS before Patreon) and it didn't work well. That was negative, so I just pointed out that he was a pioneer and not afraid to try new things.

                  I HAD TO POINT OUT, that Dan had been sharing stories a DECADE before Serial was on the scene. Dan was creating engaging stories in a box in his garage, and he did it without a team of 19 people. That had to stay.

                  To make it entertaining, I thought of throwing in some old Baptist preacher tricks of getting people to repeat words. This came to me in the shower. It would make me stand out, but I was deeply worried about being too entertaining (again, this was all about Dan). Looking back, that was a dumb thought (you're not going to outshine Dan Klass).

                  Just Because There Are No Time Limits in Podcasting Doesn't Mean There Shouldn't Be

                  To fine tune my presentation I had to:

                  1. Identify my audience
                  2. Identify the purpose
                  3. Make it entertaining
                  
                  

                  I know some of us want to record it and publish it. I truly, always believe a podcast can benefit from editing. This is especially true if you are doing interviews.

                  Because of My Podcast Devin Caroll

                  Devin from the Big Picture Retirement podcast shares how he didn't' want to start a podcast but sure is glad he did. He just released episode 34, and his co-host has already billed $10,000, and Devin has billed $6,000 and has a client who will bring in $20,000. I bet you might think, they have a huge audience, right? Nope, according to Devin, they are averaging 534 downloads an episode.

                  Podcast Rewind

                  I appeared on Podcast Ninja talking about the pros and cons of the different podcast media hosting companies. Check it out at podcastninja.com

                  Where I am Speaking Next

                  National Podcast Power - Keynote

                  Podcast Mid Atlantic - Podcast Artwork - September 8th in Philadelphia Area

                  DC Podfest November 10-11

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Podcast Gear Group

                  I'm back from podcast movement, and I had a blast. I also have insights from one of the hardest assignments I've done in a long time.

                  My Impression of Podcast Movement 2017

                  Nothing cooler than being picked up at that airport by fellow podcasters Marcus Couch from WordPress Plugins A to Z. We haven't seen each other face to face in about 10 years. We cranked some cool metal on the way to the Marriot and it was like old times.

                  Then I get the then Marriot and I get to meet my co-host Jim Collison from the Average Guy network, and I go over to his table and there sits the one and only Steve Stewart and Mike Dell. So for me, the Summar Camp aspect of Podcast Movement is in full effect.

                  The coolest line I heard all week was relayed by Paul Colligan (another person' I've known for 10+ years) and it came from a Dan Klass session. Dan (who is a former comedian) shared how often at comedy clubs you will have multiple comedians perform in an evening - and yet they all use the same microphone. The point? It's not about the tech.

                  I roomed with Erik K Johnson from podcasttalentcoach.com, and he had stated that it would be awesome if he could meet a web developer who needed help with his podcast, as he was a podcast consultant who needed help with his website. I get into the elevator, introduce myself to everyone in the elevator and it turns out that one of the people is a web designer thinking of starting a podcast. When we get out of the elevator, on of the first people who see is Erik. I felt like I was in a Christmas movie and it was going to start to snow.

                  I saw Harry Durran from Podcast Junkies and Dr. Ryan Gray who has given up his practice to do podcasting full time and Harry introduces me to Natalie Jennings who happens to be taking head shots at a reasonable price. She shows me a few samples of people, and I'm hooked. I can't wait to see how they turn out. The few peaks I saw of what she did was amazing. See her at http://www.nataliechampajennings.com/

                  I found out in Paul Colligan's session that if you are in Google Play Music, you are also on the Google Home portable audio speaker.

                  I also know of a cool double secret project that is going to make recording double-enders via a browser very cool.

                  I was on a panel with Ray Ortega, Daniel J. Lewis, and Addy Saucedo on what is inside an RSS. This was an insanely nerdy topic, but due to the recent Apple announcements we had some interested parties and I thought we pulled it off well. The bonus is I got to hang out with some cool friends.

                  The Coolest Thing I Saw At Podcast Movement 2017

                  While there were tons of great sessions at PM17, as a vendor (I work for Libsyn.com - use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) I don't get to attend any sessions. I did see something that was way cool. I met Alissa Daire of the Maximize Your Strengths show. I see her the first night, and she is in a group of people and we get talking about Strengths Finder, and she becomes a ping pong ball bouncing off the ceiling with energy. She's super nice, and it was great to catch up with her as I had met her last year. The next night, I'm standing at the Luau event, and here she comes. She explains how "I'm done." She's tired (as many people are), and she is considerably less energetic. Pat Flynn walks over, he's very witty and a super nice guy. Then the subject changes to strengths finder results, and it was like watching a time release video of a flower blooming. Her energy came back, her smile came back, her body language completely changed. It was amazing to watch.

                  I saw this a few more times. It's late, and people have had a few adult beverages, then I ask them about their show, and BOOM, the body language picks up, the eyes are open a bit wider, the voice is a little louder.

                  Later, Paris from Gamertag Radio got star struck when Cara Santa Maria from the Skeptics Guide to the Universe walks by. I offered to go bring her over. He got shy, so I did my best Steve Austin (the six million dollar man, not the wrestler) imitation across the showroom floor. I had no idea she was an Emmy Award winning journalist. I bring her over and embarrass Paris. Danny Peña is there, Jim Collison is there, and the minute Paris explained that he really did listen to her show the body language changed.  For me, I think of it as being in your "first impression" mode and then finding out that you're among family.

                  For the Best Content - Put a Time Frame On it

                  I spoke about how I got lucky to be able to induct Dan Klass from the Bitterest Pill into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. The presentation should last three minutes. I had hoped that three minutes would be longer than I thought. I wrote out my first draft. It had some bits about history and podcasting in 2005. It had examples of how the show made me feel. I made a joke about how the more I talk about his show, the more I sound like a stalker. I listed his accomplishments.

                  I started the stopwatch and went into the presentation, about half what through I glanced at my phone and I was already at 5 and a half minutes. Oh boy......

                  What Was the Purpose of This Presentation?

                  I had to go back and ask myself, what was the purpose of this presentation? The purpose was for the person sitting in row 7 who had been podcasting since 2015 and had no idea who Dan Klass was. It wasn't about me. It wasn't about being funny. I was about answering the question, "Why is Dan Klass in the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame." For me, this was a big opportunity, on a big stage, and I didn't want to mess it up for myself, or Dan. It was time to edit.

                  Anything about me went out the door. The history lesson of iriver portable players and synchronization cables went up in smoke. Most of the stories I had about Dan might not go over if you didn't listen to his show.

                  Only the things that HAD to be said would stay.

                  I listed his accomplishments. I thought of the funniest thing I had heard on his show (he referred to his two-year-old daughter as Princess Tirade for quite some time), and the most memorable episode (of ALL podcasting) is episode 102 Mass Murder where he talks about what it's like when your Uncle is murdered, and you're walking past TV cameras escorting your mother to the funeral. It's at the end, I highly suggest you listen to it.

                  I had pointed out that Dan was one of the first to try premium podcasting (this was YEARS before Patreon) and it didn't work well. That was negative, so I just pointed out that he was a pioneer and not afraid to try new things.

                  I HAD TO POINT OUT, that Dan had been sharing stories a DECADE before Serial was on the scene. Dan was creating engaging stories in a box in his garage, and he did it without a team of 19 people. That had to stay.

                  To make it entertaining, I thought of throwing in some old Baptist preacher tricks of getting people to repeat words. This came to me in the shower. It would make me stand out, but I was deeply worried about being too entertaining (again, this was all about Dan). Looking back, that was a dumb thought (you're not going to outshine Dan Klass).

                  Just Because There Are No Time Limits in Podcasting Doesn't Mean There Shouldn't Be

                  To fine tune my presentation I had to:

                  1. Identify my audience
                  2. Identify the purpose
                  3. Make it entertaining
                  
                  

                  I know some of us want to record it and publish it. I truly, always believe a podcast can benefit from editing. This is especially true if you are doing interviews.

                  Because of My Podcast Devin Caroll

                  Devin from the Big Picture Retirement podcast shares how he didn't' want to start a podcast but sure is glad he did. He just released episode 34, and his co-host has already billed $10,000, and Devin has billed $6,000 and has a client who will bring in $20,000. I bet you might think, they have a huge audience, right? Nope, according to Devin, they are averaging 534 downloads an episode.

                  Podcast Rewind

                  I appeared on Podcast Ninja talking about the pros and cons of the different podcast media hosting companies. Check it out at podcastninja.com

                  Where I am Speaking Next

                  National Podcast Power - Keynote

                  Podcast Mid Atlantic - Podcast Artwork - September 8th in Philadelphia Area

                  DC Podfest November 10-11

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Podcast Gear Group

                  Steve Stewart

                  Go Tell Somebody - King's X

                  Podcast Talent Coach (Get Your Podcast Reviewed at www.podcastreviewshow.com )

                  Natalie Jennings Photography

                  Alissa Daire of the Maximize Your Strengths

                  Harry Durran Podcast Junkies

                  Ray Ortega, Daniel J. Lewis, and Addy Saucedo

                  Alissa Daire of the Maximize Your Strengths

                  Devin from the Big Picture Retirement

                  Episode 102 Mass Murder - the Bitterest Pill

                  Marcus Couch from WordPress Plugins A to Z.

                  JOIN THE SCHOOL OF PODCASTING

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>08292e474a954d1a2e47edb8587490b4Mon, 28 Aug 2017 03:50:24 -040043:57falsefull581581Sound Devices MixPre-3 ReviewFull show notes can be seen at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/580
                  Why Keeping It Simple is a Good idea

                  I do a show every Saturday call Ask the Podcast Coach with Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv and at one point I decided to connect with Jim over Google hangouts, as well as have a Call In Number for the phone. I had to send a mix to Jim that had myself and the caller (but not Jim) while sending a mix to the caller than had myself and Jim (but not the caller). For those up on the lingo, I had to configure two mix minuses. I needed a mixer with two auxiliary outs. I found the Behringer X1832.  It did the job well. I had a ton of extra channels, and effects that I never used.

                  Then we switched and instead of using a phone (using CallinStudio.com) we went to a chat window to take questions. This was simple and free (using chatwing.com) . So now I have a giant mixer taking up half my desk, and I was looking for an alternative. I have a Yamaha MG102c Mixer (which has been replaced by the MG10XU) that would do the job. For whatever reason, I just didn't like it. It seemed like I had to crank everything up to the max. It still had a clean sound, but it seemed like I really had to push everything. I realize this is stupid (cause you should vote with your ears, not your eyes) but I've been hesitant to go back to it.

                  The Other Problem with Recording Levels

                  I use a Zoom H5. A great device with a giant screen. However, due to the way the studio is setup with the majority of the light coming in from Behind the Zoom H5 I cant' really get a clear reading. While there are lights to let me know when things are peaking, I tend to feel those are too sensitive.

                  Then I heard about the Sound Devices MixPre-3. This might solve all my problems.

                  Bad Time for a Product Review

                  I received the Sound Devices MixPre-3 this week. It's horrible timing as I'm getting ready to run off to Podcast Movement, and I'm busy packing, buying Dramamine, recording podcasts and won't have time to do a super deep dive. So here is what I want it to do:

                  1. Power my Electrovocie RE320 without a ton of his
                  2. I want to do a mix minus for when I do shows with a co-host via skype or Google hangouts
                  3. I want to plugin my ipad to play sound effects.
                  
                  First Impressions Of the Mix Pre-3

                  WOW IS THIS THING SMALL. I have an iPhone 6s, and it might be an inch wider, but it is the size of an iPhone on steroids. VERY COOL.

                  At first, I was worried about the touchscreen display. But the display is super clear, and you can adjust the brightness. I had no problems reading it. I was worried about the touchscreen is small. That didn't seem to be an issue (I'm a guitar player with long fingers and not very fat).

                  I almost didn't need the manual. I plugged in a microphone, hit record and was up and running.

                  Using it as an Interface - WHY AM I DRUNK?

                  I went into Hindenburg Journalist and did a recording. it was nice and clear, but I sounded slightly drunk as my voice was lower (as if the sound had been slowed down). I launched Adobe Audition and got the same issue. Hmmm.

                  As I'm on a PC, I right-clicked on the Speaker in the bottom right-hand corner of my screen and went to the Properties of the Mix Pre-3. I had to set the recording and playback to 2 channel 24 bit, 48K. This solved the issue, and everything sounded fine.

                  How Do I Setup a Mix Minus?

                  I was able to set the input of Channel 2 to USB-1, and I could now hear my Skype caller. I was on Channel 3, and life was good. How do I go about making sure that the sound of the caller does not go back to the caller? I look at the output, and all the output routing is for the stereo out mix. Where do I adjust what goes back to the caller? I looked, and looked, and headed to YouTube. They have a video on the Sound Devices website, but they just said, "Set the input and out to the MixPre-3. My thought was, Yeah, but then what.

                  Finally, I saw a video that explained you can't route what is going back to the USB output, and that you don't need to setup a mix minus, as IT JUST DOES IT. Well, that's cool. I'm definitely stopping by their booth at Podcast Movement and asking some questions about this as (and this is important) I'm not sure I'm 100% right on that.

                  If I wanted to use the Stereo Output jack into another USB device (in my case I use a Griffin imic) than I could get into more advanced setups.

                  What Would I Fix About it?

                  The On/Off switch is placed in a not so great spot, but then again because this thing is so tiny, any place you put the switch it's going to be right on top of something.

                  It seems like having the SD card behind the battery pack is a bad idea. However, when I push a button and turn on file transfer, it was super fast to copy the files from the device to my computer.

                  I originally was somewhat bummed that it doesn't have a "Marker" feature, but using the wingman app (free) I can lookup and see what time the boo-boo happened and make a mental note. Not as cool as a marker (especially if you wanted to pass your audio to someone else), but it's a hack for the lack of marker.

                  While I would almost always be using USB to power the unit, I think charging $40 for an AC power adapter (not included) is BS.

                  If they didn't have the wingman app (which is very cool) trying to rename something would be a joke. I love that I downloaded the app, and it just connected.

                  So the short answer of what would I change? - Not almost nothing.

                  What About the Price?

                  The price for the unit Pre-3 Unit is $699, the Pre-6 is $899, and the price of the adapter (AC) is $40.

                  • Sound Devices MixPre-3 Audio Recorder/Mixer and USB Audio Interface
                  • Sound Devices MixPre-6 Audio Recorder/Mixer and USB Audio Interface
                  • Sound Devices MX-Charge AC Power Supply for MixPre-3 and MixPre-6
                  
                  Who Should Buy This?

                  Someone who is going to be traveling alot, and wants to create great audio without having to worry (too much) about breaking the unit.

                  The person wouldn't use the built-in microphones of a Zoom H5, and will always be traveling with a mic to record, and headphones to listen.

                  Someone who has a small space, and they don't want their kids messing with a mixer. These units allow you to create presets, so you can fire up the unit press a button and everything is set. Also, it is super easy to plug stuff in.

                  The person who understands that any tweaking of sound (more bass, treble,) will be done later in post production (where a mixer allows you to add it while you record)

                  Fun Things To Check Out

                  Mike Russel's YouTube Channel (AMAZING ADOBE AUDITION TUTORIALS

                  Answer the Public - Interesting keyword/question tool (don't use the visualization view)

                  Zoom H6 Course - Want to get the most out of your H6? Check out this course from my friend Daniel J. Lewis

                  This video show an insane test on which device has the best preamps

                  ]]>Full show notes can be seen at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/580
                  Why Keeping It Simple is a Good idea

                  I do a show every Saturday call Ask the Podcast Coach with Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv and at one point I decided to connect with Jim over Google hangouts, as well as have a Call In Number for the phone. I had to send a mix to Jim that had myself and the caller (but not Jim) while sending a mix to the caller than had myself and Jim (but not the caller). For those up on the lingo, I had to configure two mix minuses. I needed a mixer with two auxiliary outs. I found the Behringer X1832.  It did the job well. I had a ton of extra channels, and effects that I never used.

                  Then we switched and instead of using a phone (using CallinStudio.com) we went to a chat window to take questions. This was simple and free (using chatwing.com) . So now I have a giant mixer taking up half my desk, and I was looking for an alternative. I have a Yamaha MG102c Mixer (which has been replaced by the MG10XU) that would do the job. For whatever reason, I just didn't like it. It seemed like I had to crank everything up to the max. It still had a clean sound, but it seemed like I really had to push everything. I realize this is stupid (cause you should vote with your ears, not your eyes) but I've been hesitant to go back to it.

                  The Other Problem with Recording Levels

                  I use a Zoom H5. A great device with a giant screen. However, due to the way the studio is setup with the majority of the light coming in from Behind the Zoom H5 I cant' really get a clear reading. While there are lights to let me know when things are peaking, I tend to feel those are too sensitive.

                  Then I heard about the Sound Devices MixPre-3. This might solve all my problems.

                  Bad Time for a Product Review

                  I received the Sound Devices MixPre-3 this week. It's horrible timing as I'm getting ready to run off to Podcast Movement, and I'm busy packing, buying Dramamine, recording podcasts and won't have time to do a super deep dive. So here is what I want it to do:

                  1. Power my Electrovocie RE320 without a ton of his
                  2. I want to do a mix minus for when I do shows with a co-host via skype or Google hangouts
                  3. I want to plugin my ipad to play sound effects.
                  
                  First Impressions Of the Mix Pre-3

                  WOW IS THIS THING SMALL. I have an iPhone 6s, and it might be an inch wider, but it is the size of an iPhone on steroids. VERY COOL.

                  At first, I was worried about the touchscreen display. But the display is super clear, and you can adjust the brightness. I had no problems reading it. I was worried about the touchscreen is small. That didn't seem to be an issue (I'm a guitar player with long fingers and not very fat).

                  I almost didn't need the manual. I plugged in a microphone, hit record and was up and running.

                  Using it as an Interface - WHY AM I DRUNK?

                  I went into Hindenburg Journalist and did a recording. it was nice and clear, but I sounded slightly drunk as my voice was lower (as if the sound had been slowed down). I launched Adobe Audition and got the same issue. Hmmm.

                  As I'm on a PC, I right-clicked on the Speaker in the bottom right-hand corner of my screen and went to the Properties of the Mix Pre-3. I had to set the recording and playback to 2 channel 24 bit, 48K. This solved the issue, and everything sounded fine.

                  How Do I Setup a Mix Minus?

                  I was able to set the input of Channel 2 to USB-1, and I could now hear my Skype caller. I was on Channel 3, and life was good. How do I go about making sure that the sound of the caller does not go back to the caller? I look at the output, and all the output routing is for the stereo out mix. Where do I adjust what goes back to the caller? I looked, and looked, and headed to YouTube. They have a video on the Sound Devices website, but they just said, "Set the input and out to the MixPre-3. My thought was, Yeah, but then what.

                  Finally, I saw a video that explained you can't route what is going back to the USB output, and that you don't need to setup a mix minus, as IT JUST DOES IT. Well, that's cool. I'm definitely stopping by their booth at Podcast Movement and asking some questions about this as (and this is important) I'm not sure I'm 100% right on that.

                  If I wanted to use the Stereo Output jack into another USB device (in my case I use a Griffin imic) than I could get into more advanced setups.

                  What Would I Fix About it?

                  The On/Off switch is placed in a not so great spot, but then again because this thing is so tiny, any place you put the switch it's going to be right on top of something.

                  It seems like having the SD card behind the battery pack is a bad idea. However, when I push a button and turn on file transfer, it was super fast to copy the files from the device to my computer.

                  I originally was somewhat bummed that it doesn't have a "Marker" feature, but using the wingman app (free) I can lookup and see what time the boo-boo happened and make a mental note. Not as cool as a marker (especially if you wanted to pass your audio to someone else), but it's a hack for the lack of marker.

                  While I would almost always be using USB to power the unit, I think charging $40 for an AC power adapter (not included) is BS.

                  If they didn't have the wingman app (which is very cool) trying to rename something would be a joke. I love that I downloaded the app, and it just connected.

                  So the short answer of what would I change? - Not almost nothing.

                  What About the Price?

                  The price for the unit Pre-3 Unit is $699, the Pre-6 is $899, and the price of the adapter (AC) is $40.

                  • Sound Devices MixPre-3 Audio Recorder/Mixer and USB Audio Interface
                  • Sound Devices MixPre-6 Audio Recorder/Mixer and USB Audio Interface
                  • Sound Devices MX-Charge AC Power Supply for MixPre-3 and MixPre-6
                  
                  Who Should Buy This?

                  Someone who is going to be traveling alot, and wants to create great audio without having to worry (too much) about breaking the unit.

                  The person wouldn't use the built-in microphones of a Zoom H5, and will always be traveling with a mic to record, and headphones to listen.

                  Someone who has a small space, and they don't want their kids messing with a mixer. These units allow you to create presets, so you can fire up the unit press a button and everything is set. Also, it is super easy to plug stuff in.

                  The person who understands that any tweaking of sound (more bass, treble,) will be done later in post production (where a mixer allows you to add it while you record)

                  Fun Things To Check Out

                  Mike Russel's YouTube Channel (AMAZING ADOBE AUDITION TUTORIALS

                  Answer the Public - Interesting keyword/question tool (don't use the visualization view)

                  Zoom H6 Course - Want to get the most out of your H6? Check out this course from my friend Daniel J. Lewis

                  This video show an insane test on which device has the best preamps

                  ]]>f551a988d3753f72a89ff7d99e2481eaMon, 21 Aug 2017 04:00:00 -040038:14falsefull580580Three Years After Starting a Podcast He Has a Six Figure IncomeDarren Dake of the Coroner Talk podcast started a podcast in 2013, and started a podcast, but it didn't last. He really  loves being a death scene investigator so he started the Coroner Talk podcast 2014. This lead to numerous opportunities:

                  He started to make connections with people

                  He now gets around 15,000 download a month

                  He was asked the be the trainer supervisor for his state.

                  He wrote a few books that has lead him to speak at conferences multiple times

                  He includes going to different states to talk

                  He created online courses for his "Coroner School" and is now taking off and now he is on track to make a six figure income from his speaking and his online courses.

                  Please Notice:

                  This wasn't overnight

                  This wasn't easy.

                  Your audience must always come first.

                  Some Thoughts On Opportunities

                  “A pessimist sees the difficulty in every opportunity; an optimist sees the opportunity in every difficulty.” ― Winston S. Churchill

                  “We often miss opportunity because it's dressed in overalls and looks like work” ― Thomas A. Edison

                  “Failure is only the opportunity more intelligently to begin again.” ― Henry Ford

                  “I believe that every single event in life happens in an opportunity to choose love over fear.” ― Oprah Winfrey

                  Unfortunately, there seems to be far more opportunity out there than ability.... We should remember that good fortune often happens when opportunity meets with preparation.

                  Thomas A. Edison

                  There comes a moment in every life when the Universe presents you with an opportunity to rise to your potential. An open door that only requires the heart to walk through, seize it and hang on. The choice is never simple. It's never easy. It's not supposed to be. But those who travel this path have always looked back and realized that the test was always about the heart. ...The rest is just practice.

                  Jaime Buckley

                  Spend eighty percent of your time focusing on the opportunities of tomorrow rather than the problems of yesterday.

                  Brian Tracy

                  Missed Opportunities

                  I do a show called the Alexacast that is all about getting the most out of your Amazon Echo, Dot, etc. So I have an audience that is tied to Amazon. One might say they are Amazon "Super Users." Yet then Amazon Prime day came, and I have an audience that is tied to Amazon, and I barely promoted it. I should've made a big deal about this, and made it an event. 

                  Know What Opportunities Are Coming Up

                  I found two sites that show special days. These are:

                  https://www.daysoftheyear.com

                  https://nationaldaycalendar.com

                  By knowing when all these special days that come up, you might be able to make a special event to encourage your audience to interact with the show. 

                  Sometimes You Need To Ask

                  I heard Dan Klass from the Bitterest Pill is being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I'm a HUGE Dan Klass fan. So I asked if I could do the induction speech to introduce Dan to an audience that may not know Dan like I feel I do. 

                  Sometimes Opportunity Are Based on Previous Actions

                  Because Jared and Dan from Podcast Movement had called on me in the past and I delivered "the Goods," and I had acted professionally in the past when I worked with them, I was given the opportunity to induct Dan. This puts me on a big stage. If I show people that I can handle the big stage (I've been a keynote speaker at some conferences) I can show the world that I can bring value to your event. 

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  Podcasters Roundtable

                  Grammar Girl Podcast

                  Philip Keller from Blind Faith Live (here Phillip on last week's show)

                  Podcast Awards

                  Order the Messengers Documentary on iTunes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers then send me an email with the subject link "I have a message - your name " (dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com) I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first six months (this offer expired 8/24/17)

                   

                  ]]>Darren Dake of the Coroner Talk podcast started a podcast in 2013, and started a podcast, but it didn't last. He really  loves being a death scene investigator so he started the Coroner Talk podcast 2014. This lead to numerous opportunities:

                  He started to make connections with people

                  He now gets around 15,000 download a month

                  He was asked the be the trainer supervisor for his state.

                  He wrote a few books that has lead him to speak at conferences multiple times

                  He includes going to different states to talk

                  He created online courses for his "Coroner School" and is now taking off and now he is on track to make a six figure income from his speaking and his online courses.

                  Please Notice:

                  This wasn't overnight

                  This wasn't easy.

                  Your audience must always come first.

                  Some Thoughts On Opportunities

                  “A pessimist sees the difficulty in every opportunity; an optimist sees the opportunity in every difficulty.” ― Winston S. Churchill

                  “We often miss opportunity because it's dressed in overalls and looks like work” ― Thomas A. Edison

                  “Failure is only the opportunity more intelligently to begin again.” ― Henry Ford

                  “I believe that every single event in life happens in an opportunity to choose love over fear.” ― Oprah Winfrey

                  Unfortunately, there seems to be far more opportunity out there than ability.... We should remember that good fortune often happens when opportunity meets with preparation.

                  Thomas A. Edison

                  There comes a moment in every life when the Universe presents you with an opportunity to rise to your potential. An open door that only requires the heart to walk through, seize it and hang on. The choice is never simple. It's never easy. It's not supposed to be. But those who travel this path have always looked back and realized that the test was always about the heart. ...The rest is just practice.

                  Jaime Buckley

                  Spend eighty percent of your time focusing on the opportunities of tomorrow rather than the problems of yesterday.

                  Brian Tracy

                  Missed Opportunities

                  I do a show called the Alexacast that is all about getting the most out of your Amazon Echo, Dot, etc. So I have an audience that is tied to Amazon. One might say they are Amazon "Super Users." Yet then Amazon Prime day came, and I have an audience that is tied to Amazon, and I barely promoted it. I should've made a big deal about this, and made it an event. 

                  Know What Opportunities Are Coming Up

                  I found two sites that show special days. These are:

                  https://www.daysoftheyear.com

                  https://nationaldaycalendar.com

                  By knowing when all these special days that come up, you might be able to make a special event to encourage your audience to interact with the show. 

                  Sometimes You Need To Ask

                  I heard Dan Klass from the Bitterest Pill is being inducted into the Academy of Podcasters Hall of Fame. I'm a HUGE Dan Klass fan. So I asked if I could do the induction speech to introduce Dan to an audience that may not know Dan like I feel I do. 

                  Sometimes Opportunity Are Based on Previous Actions

                  Because Jared and Dan from Podcast Movement had called on me in the past and I delivered "the Goods," and I had acted professionally in the past when I worked with them, I was given the opportunity to induct Dan. This puts me on a big stage. If I show people that I can handle the big stage (I've been a keynote speaker at some conferences) I can show the world that I can bring value to your event. 

                  Mentioned in This Podcast

                  Podcasters Roundtable

                  Grammar Girl Podcast

                  Philip Keller from Blind Faith Live (here Phillip on last week's show)

                  Podcast Awards

                  Order the Messengers Documentary on iTunes go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers then send me an email with the subject link "I have a message - your name " (dave "at" schoolofpodcasting.com) I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first six months (this offer expired 8/24/17)

                   

                  ]]>875582fad820917dc8f3f0b001306a6bMon, 14 Aug 2017 04:00:00 -040044:19falsefull579579No Longer Trapped in Radio, Phillip Keller Turns His Spotlight on Real People with Real MiraclesWhen you start a podcast you are seen as a digital influencer and today's example of something that wouldn't have happened if it wasn't because of their podcast is from Randy Goers who produces the Drone Radio Show. He explains how he is able to make great connections, and be able to attend Drone events with a press pass. He recently was able to interview one of the senior vice presidents of Intel who is in charge of directing their drone policy and program. That all happens Because of my Podcast.
                  How to NOT Make Money with a Podcast

                  Today I start a new segment that will appear from time to time with Jessica Kupferman who runs the www.JKMAgency.com and helps podcasters find sponsors. This segment is to help podcasters looking to monetize their podcast by helping them avoid the mistakes other are making. Keep in mind, you do not have to monetize your show.

                  In this first initial segment, Jessica explains that when quoting numbers to a potential sponsor the number people are interested is your episode downloads after 30 days of being available. Monthly stats don't count because in that monthly downloads are episodes in your back catalog (and the sponsor is not going to be in those episodes). While most podcasters are not crazy about the CPM Model (where you are paid a certain amount of money for a thousand downloads, such as 30 CPM would mean when your episode goes over 1000 downloads you would be paid $30).

                  If you're creating a media kit, you need to have a dollar value in mind so that when people ask for it, you're ready. Being secretive about your pricing is not going to help you. Yes, everything is up for negotiation but you have to have a starting price.

                  Phillip Keller (Formerly Trapper Jack on Cleveland Radio) Spotlighting a Living Saint

                  Phillip Keller spent 25 years in Cleveland Radio. He took not one, but TWO stations to number one. His show might be seen as controversial as he interviews people who have been healed by a local Dr. Issam Nemeh. This has lead to national attention. The miracle stories became so commonplace that programs as varying as Dr. Oz and 700 club feature Dr. Nemeh. Phillip does all of his own production and editing even though he is legally blind. In today's interview he talks about:

                  The difference between radio and podcasting and the different broadcast muscles you need to flex

                  What kind of prep he was doing when he was on a #1 Radio Station (and going to work at 3 AM)

                  How he was treated when he got to #1 is amazing.

                  Why he doesn't miss radio.

                  Besides radio, what other things have gone away in his life?

                  How long should your podcast be?

                  How being featured got his numbers to jump

                  How his first podcast was awful.

                  Where did the name Trapper Jack come from?

                  How he turning his podcast into a book using rev.com

                  What is his favorite miracle story (Episode 210)

                  Check out Phillips show at www.blindfatihlive.com and subscribe to them in Apple iTunes 

                  Support his show on Patreon

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Ham Radio 360

                  The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Preorder in iTunes

                  after pre-ordering the documentary (see the trailer) and you can get 40% off the School of Podcasting for the first 6 months (send an email with the subject line "I have a message - your name)

                  I will show you how you can also get entered into drawing to get free items like a Heil Pro 40 Microphone, digital recorder and more

                  I will be speaking at the National Podcasting Power Event in Perrysburg Ohio on September 23, 2017. See http://www.nationalpodcastpower.com/

                  I will also be speaking at Podcast Movement (use the coupon code sop10) in August. I will also be  at Podcast MidAtlantic in September

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Join worry free with a 30-day Money-back-guarantee

                  Private Facebook Group For Networking

                  Live Group Coaching ($400 value)

                  16 Online Podcast Courses Covering All Aspects of Podcasting

                  Join Today

                  ]]>When you start a podcast you are seen as a digital influencer and today's example of something that wouldn't have happened if it wasn't because of their podcast is from Randy Goers who produces the Drone Radio Show. He explains how he is able to make great connections, and be able to attend Drone events with a press pass. He recently was able to interview one of the senior vice presidents of Intel who is in charge of directing their drone policy and program. That all happens Because of my Podcast.
                  How to NOT Make Money with a Podcast

                  Today I start a new segment that will appear from time to time with Jessica Kupferman who runs the www.JKMAgency.com and helps podcasters find sponsors. This segment is to help podcasters looking to monetize their podcast by helping them avoid the mistakes other are making. Keep in mind, you do not have to monetize your show.

                  In this first initial segment, Jessica explains that when quoting numbers to a potential sponsor the number people are interested is your episode downloads after 30 days of being available. Monthly stats don't count because in that monthly downloads are episodes in your back catalog (and the sponsor is not going to be in those episodes). While most podcasters are not crazy about the CPM Model (where you are paid a certain amount of money for a thousand downloads, such as 30 CPM would mean when your episode goes over 1000 downloads you would be paid $30).

                  If you're creating a media kit, you need to have a dollar value in mind so that when people ask for it, you're ready. Being secretive about your pricing is not going to help you. Yes, everything is up for negotiation but you have to have a starting price.

                  Phillip Keller (Formerly Trapper Jack on Cleveland Radio) Spotlighting a Living Saint

                  Phillip Keller spent 25 years in Cleveland Radio. He took not one, but TWO stations to number one. His show might be seen as controversial as he interviews people who have been healed by a local Dr. Issam Nemeh. This has lead to national attention. The miracle stories became so commonplace that programs as varying as Dr. Oz and 700 club feature Dr. Nemeh. Phillip does all of his own production and editing even though he is legally blind. In today's interview he talks about:

                  The difference between radio and podcasting and the different broadcast muscles you need to flex

                  What kind of prep he was doing when he was on a #1 Radio Station (and going to work at 3 AM)

                  How he was treated when he got to #1 is amazing.

                  Why he doesn't miss radio.

                  Besides radio, what other things have gone away in his life?

                  How long should your podcast be?

                  How being featured got his numbers to jump

                  How his first podcast was awful.

                  Where did the name Trapper Jack come from?

                  How he turning his podcast into a book using rev.com

                  What is his favorite miracle story (Episode 210)

                  Check out Phillips show at www.blindfatihlive.com and subscribe to them in Apple iTunes 

                  Support his show on Patreon

                  Mentioned In This Show

                  Ham Radio 360

                  The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Preorder in iTunes

                  after pre-ordering the documentary (see the trailer) and you can get 40% off the School of Podcasting for the first 6 months (send an email with the subject line "I have a message - your name)

                  I will show you how you can also get entered into drawing to get free items like a Heil Pro 40 Microphone, digital recorder and more

                  I will be speaking at the National Podcasting Power Event in Perrysburg Ohio on September 23, 2017. See http://www.nationalpodcastpower.com/

                  I will also be speaking at Podcast Movement (use the coupon code sop10) in August. I will also be  at Podcast MidAtlantic in September

                  Join the School of Podcasting

                  Join worry free with a 30-day Money-back-guarantee

                  Private Facebook Group For Networking

                  Live Group Coaching ($400 value)

                  16 Online Podcast Courses Covering All Aspects of Podcasting

                  Join Today

                  ]]>d2938b2455b22a3ed9b1ef471a0b1e9cMon, 07 Aug 2017 04:55:19 -040044:49falsefull578578What Did You Change In Your Podcast and WhyEach month I ask my audience a question and they answer and we all learn together. This month I asked, "What have you changed about your show and why?"

                  Some people added/removed co-hosts. Some people updated artwork and intro music. Others start/stopped writing out their podcasts. Some adjusted their attitude, or cut back on some of the podcast promotion. 

                  The following people contributed

                  Win from buterfliesofwisdom.weebly.comBrad from wearethecinemaguys.com Anna From Authentic Moments authenticparenting.com Cheri from www.christianscienceforkids.com Dads Spotlight Lawschool Insider Emily from thestorybehindpodcast.com Craig from Inglespodcast Gabe Guys and food podcast Gary and Margaret from Kiwi Mana - Bee Keeping PodcastJenny K From Studio ChaoticJohn The Wired home SchoolKim from toastmaters101.net and onthetablepodcasts.comMark King (Venture Captial)  http://markwking.com/Paul from http://www.trinitydigitalmedia.com/Scott from the Computer Tutor Podcast  Sean from Slept in Government ClassBryan From Engaging MissionsRandy Cantrel From  Pear Advisory GroupZack from Raising Rents (as in Parents) 

                  In the end, this shows you can change your podcast. Your podcast is not a statue, it's a recipe. If you want to change it you can. If you're happy with it, keep doing it, but there is nothing stopping you from throwing something out there, seeing the feedback, and go from there.

                  Buy the Messengers and Save 40% on the School of Podcasting

                  You can get 40% the first six months at the School of Podcasting. Just preorder the Messengers on iTunes, take a screenshot, or a selfie with the screen in the background (you know, prove to me you bought it, I trust you) and I will send you a coupon for 40% off your monthly subscription. Just email me and in the subject line put "I have a message - your name" and I will send you the coupon. To preorder go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers

                  The Power Of Distraction

                  I had an awkward moment this weekend. My ex-father-in-law passed away. I wanted to be there for my ex-wife and my ex-step-children. I remember when my Mom died how weird it is to be in a room with your loved one in a box. My goal was to distract them from their Grandfather in the casket. I wanted to make them laugh (if possible) and get them talking about anything. While people alway say, "Thank you so much for coming.." when my oldest step daughter came up and gave me a hug and said, "I'm so glad you came" it seemed a little more heartfelt. It made me feel so good to be there for people in need. 

                  WHAT DOES THIS HAVE TO DO WITH PODCASTING?

                  There are times when people have bad days, weeks, maybe bad months, and YOUR SHOW can be the distraction that helps them get through the day. Your show's ability to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, educated, or entertain, can take them away from whatever is bugging them. I saw that today face to face, and it can be huge. 

                  So if you're not getting feedback, or you're not selling a course, realize you can be doing a ton of service to people and never know it.

                  ]]>Each month I ask my audience a question and they answer and we all learn together. This month I asked, "What have you changed about your show and why?"

                  Some people added/removed co-hosts. Some people updated artwork and intro music. Others start/stopped writing out their podcasts. Some adjusted their attitude, or cut back on some of the podcast promotion. 

                  The following people contributed

                  Win from buterfliesofwisdom.weebly.comBrad from wearethecinemaguys.com Anna From Authentic Moments authenticparenting.com Cheri from www.christianscienceforkids.com Dads Spotlight Lawschool Insider Emily from thestorybehindpodcast.com Craig from Inglespodcast Gabe Guys and food podcast Gary and Margaret from Kiwi Mana - Bee Keeping PodcastJenny K From Studio ChaoticJohn The Wired home SchoolKim from toastmaters101.net and onthetablepodcasts.comMark King (Venture Captial)  http://markwking.com/Paul from http://www.trinitydigitalmedia.com/Scott from the Computer Tutor Podcast  Sean from Slept in Government ClassBryan From Engaging MissionsRandy Cantrel From  Pear Advisory GroupZack from Raising Rents (as in Parents) 

                  In the end, this shows you can change your podcast. Your podcast is not a statue, it's a recipe. If you want to change it you can. If you're happy with it, keep doing it, but there is nothing stopping you from throwing something out there, seeing the feedback, and go from there.

                  Buy the Messengers and Save 40% on the School of Podcasting

                  You can get 40% the first six months at the School of Podcasting. Just preorder the Messengers on iTunes, take a screenshot, or a selfie with the screen in the background (you know, prove to me you bought it, I trust you) and I will send you a coupon for 40% off your monthly subscription. Just email me and in the subject line put "I have a message - your name" and I will send you the coupon. To preorder go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/themessengers

                  The Power Of Distraction

                  I had an awkward moment this weekend. My ex-father-in-law passed away. I wanted to be there for my ex-wife and my ex-step-children. I remember when my Mom died how weird it is to be in a room with your loved one in a box. My goal was to distract them from their Grandfather in the casket. I wanted to make them laugh (if possible) and get them talking about anything. While people alway say, "Thank you so much for coming.." when my oldest step daughter came up and gave me a hug and said, "I'm so glad you came" it seemed a little more heartfelt. It made me feel so good to be there for people in need. 

                  WHAT DOES THIS HAVE TO DO WITH PODCASTING?

                  There are times when people have bad days, weeks, maybe bad months, and YOUR SHOW can be the distraction that helps them get through the day. Your show's ability to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, educated, or entertain, can take them away from whatever is bugging them. I saw that today face to face, and it can be huge. 

                  So if you're not getting feedback, or you're not selling a course, realize you can be doing a ton of service to people and never know it.

                  ]]>920a455a91faafe8f8f8d070b10750b9Mon, 31 Jul 2017 04:00:00 -040001:05:23falsefull577577She Does a Podcast About What?! Alexandra Harbushka interviewDanny is a Hall of Fame podcaster who shared his story about how he started off with a cassette deck (see episode 506), and ended up playing video games with Bill Gates, and getting a spot on CBS Radio. Well, he has some more good news. He is not partnered with Twitch.tv Twitch.tv has evolved its reputation as the world’s leading social video platform and community for video game culture to now encompass an array of emerging content surfaced by its users. As a result, 10 million visitors gather each day to watch and talk about video games, music, the creative arts, themselves, and other beyond gaming topics with more than 2 million streamers.

                  So in other words, Danny is going to get to record his podcast live in front of millions of people who happen to be his target audience. You will see when you go to http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio that there is a way for people to tip Danny as his crew, and Danny also gets a piece of the $5.99 subscription fee (which gives you more access, and the ability to watch the video on demand).

                  Check out Danny's Show at www.gamertagradio.com

                  The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Now Available for Pre Order - Very Special Deal

                  I was asked to work with the crew that created the movie, The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary. I created a podcast to give you the behind the scenes view of making the documentary. Well, the movie is now available for Pre-Order. We want it to be #1 when it is released. If you've ever wanted to support the show now is the time. This is a time when independent podcasters can ban together to show the true power of podcasting. It will be released August 23rd. From now until then I'm doing a special deal. I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first 6 months at the School of Podcasting. Just send forward the email of your purchase, take a self with your confirmation, in general, prove to me you purchased the film, and I'll send you a coupon. Make the subject line, "I have a message - Your Name" so in my case it would be "I have a message - Dave Jackson". The price is only $5.99, and you'll save $20 a month or $120 over the six months (before it goes back to your regular price of $49/month) Purchase the movie and get inspired when it comes out and start your podcast today. Here is the link

                  Congrats to Niel, Willie, Ralph, Chris, and John for a job well done. Order the Movie Here

                  Nominate the School of Podcasting for the People's Choice Podcast Awards

                  I've been so busy working on finding good content for you each week, I have failed to announce that you can now nominate the School of Podcasting for a Podcast Award. I would deeply appreciate it www.podcastawards.com as the voting is different this year (no more having the vote every day). So if you ever got any value out of the School of Podcasting or this podcast, please go to and nominate the School of Podcasting in the Technology category

                  Alexandra Harbushka May Be the Most Courageous Woman in Podcasting

                  While all podcasters have to deal with hating their voice the first time they hear it, as well as worry about if anyone would listen or like the show. Alexandra had all those and one more BIG distinction. Her show is about Herpes, and yes Alexandra has Herpes. Her show is called Life With Herpes, and her first episode was one of the most insanely personal podcasts I've ever heard. She reveals how she found out, how she felt, and how scared she was. I couldn't believe what I was hearing. I wanted to have her on the show for a few reasons:

                  1. If someone can do a podcast and stand up and say, "Hi I'm Alexandra and I have herpes" surely you can find the courage to start your podcast about your hobby or business
                  2. She is building a community that is super connected because only people with this disease can truly understand what it is like to deal with this disease.
                  3.  As much as there is a stigma around this disease, she hasn't received any negative comments or name calling. Instead, she receives emails from people thanking her for her courage, and support as they struggle with understanding what is the "new normal."
                  
                  

                  In today's interview we hear:

                  a) What inspired her to start a podcast?

                  b) What it's like to talk about a controversial subject.

                  c) How having a super niche show is enabling her to be found, and her downloads are growing (not a ton of competition)

                  d) How a change in philosophy helps her embrace the day, and inspire her to podcast.

                  e) We hear some of the biggest misconceptions about Herpes (Grandma you gave me herpes!)

                  Check out Alexandra and the Living With Herpes show at www.lifewithherpes.com

                  Dave's Jackson Podcast Experience

                  Ready to start a podcast? I have as of 7/23/17 Dave Jackson has produced over 2988 episodes of 31 podcasts with a total number of 3,182,220 downloads. Some were super niche (Alexacast) other were experiments (Worst Podcast Ever) but through my experience, I have seen what works and what does not. I can help you avoid the common pitfalls of podcast and would love to work with you.

                  You can watch old out dated YouTube videos, or join the School of Podcasting and get access to 16 difference courses on building a podcast that will completely WOW your audience, as well as a private Facebook group, and twice a month there are live Q&A calls with Dave 

                  Join today by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>Danny is a Hall of Fame podcaster who shared his story about how he started off with a cassette deck (see episode 506), and ended up playing video games with Bill Gates, and getting a spot on CBS Radio. Well, he has some more good news. He is not partnered with Twitch.tv Twitch.tv has evolved its reputation as the world’s leading social video platform and community for video game culture to now encompass an array of emerging content surfaced by its users. As a result, 10 million visitors gather each day to watch and talk about video games, music, the creative arts, themselves, and other beyond gaming topics with more than 2 million streamers.

                  So in other words, Danny is going to get to record his podcast live in front of millions of people who happen to be his target audience. You will see when you go to http://twitch.tv/gamertagradio that there is a way for people to tip Danny as his crew, and Danny also gets a piece of the $5.99 subscription fee (which gives you more access, and the ability to watch the video on demand).

                  Check out Danny's Show at www.gamertagradio.com

                  The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary Now Available for Pre Order - Very Special Deal

                  I was asked to work with the crew that created the movie, The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary. I created a podcast to give you the behind the scenes view of making the documentary. Well, the movie is now available for Pre-Order. We want it to be #1 when it is released. If you've ever wanted to support the show now is the time. This is a time when independent podcasters can ban together to show the true power of podcasting. It will be released August 23rd. From now until then I'm doing a special deal. I will give you a coupon for 40% off your first 6 months at the School of Podcasting. Just send forward the email of your purchase, take a self with your confirmation, in general, prove to me you purchased the film, and I'll send you a coupon. Make the subject line, "I have a message - Your Name" so in my case it would be "I have a message - Dave Jackson". The price is only $5.99, and you'll save $20 a month or $120 over the six months (before it goes back to your regular price of $49/month) Purchase the movie and get inspired when it comes out and start your podcast today. Here is the link

                  Congrats to Niel, Willie, Ralph, Chris, and John for a job well done. Order the Movie Here

                  Nominate the School of Podcasting for the People's Choice Podcast Awards

                  I've been so busy working on finding good content for you each week, I have failed to announce that you can now nominate the School of Podcasting for a Podcast Award. I would deeply appreciate it www.podcastawards.com as the voting is different this year (no more having the vote every day). So if you ever got any value out of the School of Podcasting or this podcast, please go to and nominate the School of Podcasting in the Technology category

                  Alexandra Harbushka May Be the Most Courageous Woman in Podcasting

                  While all podcasters have to deal with hating their voice the first time they hear it, as well as worry about if anyone would listen or like the show. Alexandra had all those and one more BIG distinction. Her show is about Herpes, and yes Alexandra has Herpes. Her show is called Life With Herpes, and her first episode was one of the most insanely personal podcasts I've ever heard. She reveals how she found out, how she felt, and how scared she was. I couldn't believe what I was hearing. I wanted to have her on the show for a few reasons:

                  1. If someone can do a podcast and stand up and say, "Hi I'm Alexandra and I have herpes" surely you can find the courage to start your podcast about your hobby or business
                  2. She is building a community that is super connected because only people with this disease can truly understand what it is like to deal with this disease.
                  3.  As much as there is a stigma around this disease, she hasn't received any negative comments or name calling. Instead, she receives emails from people thanking her for her courage, and support as they struggle with understanding what is the "new normal."
                  
                  

                  In today's interview we hear:

                  a) What inspired her to start a podcast?

                  b) What it's like to talk about a controversial subject.

                  c) How having a super niche show is enabling her to be found, and her downloads are growing (not a ton of competition)

                  d) How a change in philosophy helps her embrace the day, and inspire her to podcast.

                  e) We hear some of the biggest misconceptions about Herpes (Grandma you gave me herpes!)

                  Check out Alexandra and the Living With Herpes show at www.lifewithherpes.com

                  Dave's Jackson Podcast Experience

                  Ready to start a podcast? I have as of 7/23/17 Dave Jackson has produced over 2988 episodes of 31 podcasts with a total number of 3,182,220 downloads. Some were super niche (Alexacast) other were experiments (Worst Podcast Ever) but through my experience, I have seen what works and what does not. I can help you avoid the common pitfalls of podcast and would love to work with you.

                  You can watch old out dated YouTube videos, or join the School of Podcasting and get access to 16 difference courses on building a podcast that will completely WOW your audience, as well as a private Facebook group, and twice a month there are live Q&A calls with Dave 

                  Join today by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>c24967885b7e303c674fb2c432cfdeccMon, 24 Jul 2017 04:00:00 -040044:04falsefull576576His Podcast Brought Him So Much Business His Supplier Can't Keep Up - Bill Strand of Chameleon BreederIn this 20 minute interview we hear how:

                  Bill has been involved with Chameleon's For Over 40 Years

                  His Podcast Has Lead His Audience to Trust Him and Engage with him on Social Media

                  This trust has to lead to more sales than when he produced an Ezine (back in the day)

                  His supplier can't keep up with the orders and Bill no longer mentions his Chameleon Cages on his show

                  How Bill keeps his family supporting his show

                  His audience loyalty results in them freely paying more for his products so they can support him.

                  Bill is nice enough to share his numbers, and he is getting WAY MORE than the median 200 downloads (he had more than that in one day)

                  Bill's commitment is to delivering value.

                  2017 Is More Than Half Way Done, How Are Your Goals?

                  It's July, last month the year was 50% 0ver. My plans for this year had two big projects.

                  1. Revamp the School of Podcasting
                  2. Update my book, "More Podcast Money."
                  
                  

                  I have not made any serious strides in either of these. Let's not panic. What did I do instead?

                  1. I launched a few shows testing different hosting platforms (including a show for my cat).
                  2. I started a Patreon group my weight loss show.
                  3. I added a "Baby Steps" free video course to drive leads to the School of Podcasting.
                  
                  

                  While learning about more platforms keep me well rounded in what is available for podcasters, it's kind of like knowing about Coke, Pepsi, and DR. Pepper. Do you really need more cola choices? OK, fine, we'll add RC cola.

                  The Patreon experiment is for the book as was having a sponsor earlier in the year.

                  Free Resources You Might Want to Check Out

                  If you're looking for a way to get the word out (and you somewhat have an audience of friends, etc) there is a free tool called thunderclap.it where you pick a day when you send out a tweet (that you create) and it goes out everyone's twitter at the same time (and Facebook, and Tumblr) . You need a minimum of 100 people (according to their video) or it won't go out (the free version let's you choose how many people you need to share. The smallest paid plan is $55 per campaign.  I've added this to the Podcasting Resources area.

                  Sometimes reading books will give you an idea for a new episode. While there are resources like Audibible.com (where you can get a free book for joining), you may have heard of this thing called the Library (which I recently got to visit when we had a thunderstorm, and I had no power or the Internet and they did). On a recent taping of the Ask the Podcast Coach show, Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast informed me of Overdrive.com which works with your library card to enable you to download audiobooks and ebooks for free. Kim Krachi from Toastmasters 101 also mentioned Hoopla Digital which is a similar service.

                  Becuase of My Podcast I'm Going All over the World Talking About a Subject I Love

                  Hilda from the Wise Traditions Podcast and her own site holistichilda.com started this podcast by contacting a company where she enjoyed their newsletter but thought it needed a kick in the pants (and she loves the topic). She get involved and now hosts their podcasts. She is doing such a great job they are now sending her all over the globe to talk about the show and be an ambassador. Check out at holistichilda.com and the podcast is at http://westonaprice.org/

                  Libsyn and Blubrry ready for New iTunes Tags

                  As Soundcloud continues to plummet (and they hope Chance the wrapper saves them the way Justin Timberlake save Myspace?), Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have already stated (and demonstrated in some cases) how the new iTunes Tags are in place. You can see Libsyn's new layout and demonstration here

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Happy 100th Episode to The Feed (the official podcast from Libsyn.com Hero of the week Jessica Kupferman from the jkmagency.com for telling advertisers to stick their $6 per episode offers where the sun doesn't shine.

                  Jimmy Iovine says it takes 6 years for great musicians to break into the music business (from the Howard Stern show on Siriusxm.com )

                  School of Podcasting Provides

                  Direct Access to my twelve years of experience

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Access to all 16 courses

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live Group Coaching

                  30-Day Moneyback -Guarantee 

                  JOIN TODAY

                   

                   

                  ]]>In this 20 minute interview we hear how:

                  Bill has been involved with Chameleon's For Over 40 Years

                  His Podcast Has Lead His Audience to Trust Him and Engage with him on Social Media

                  This trust has to lead to more sales than when he produced an Ezine (back in the day)

                  His supplier can't keep up with the orders and Bill no longer mentions his Chameleon Cages on his show

                  How Bill keeps his family supporting his show

                  His audience loyalty results in them freely paying more for his products so they can support him.

                  Bill is nice enough to share his numbers, and he is getting WAY MORE than the median 200 downloads (he had more than that in one day)

                  Bill's commitment is to delivering value.

                  2017 Is More Than Half Way Done, How Are Your Goals?

                  It's July, last month the year was 50% 0ver. My plans for this year had two big projects.

                  1. Revamp the School of Podcasting
                  2. Update my book, "More Podcast Money."
                  
                  

                  I have not made any serious strides in either of these. Let's not panic. What did I do instead?

                  1. I launched a few shows testing different hosting platforms (including a show for my cat).
                  2. I started a Patreon group my weight loss show.
                  3. I added a "Baby Steps" free video course to drive leads to the School of Podcasting.
                  
                  

                  While learning about more platforms keep me well rounded in what is available for podcasters, it's kind of like knowing about Coke, Pepsi, and DR. Pepper. Do you really need more cola choices? OK, fine, we'll add RC cola.

                  The Patreon experiment is for the book as was having a sponsor earlier in the year.

                  Free Resources You Might Want to Check Out

                  If you're looking for a way to get the word out (and you somewhat have an audience of friends, etc) there is a free tool called thunderclap.it where you pick a day when you send out a tweet (that you create) and it goes out everyone's twitter at the same time (and Facebook, and Tumblr) . You need a minimum of 100 people (according to their video) or it won't go out (the free version let's you choose how many people you need to share. The smallest paid plan is $55 per campaign.  I've added this to the Podcasting Resources area.

                  Sometimes reading books will give you an idea for a new episode. While there are resources like Audibible.com (where you can get a free book for joining), you may have heard of this thing called the Library (which I recently got to visit when we had a thunderstorm, and I had no power or the Internet and they did). On a recent taping of the Ask the Podcast Coach show, Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast informed me of Overdrive.com which works with your library card to enable you to download audiobooks and ebooks for free. Kim Krachi from Toastmasters 101 also mentioned Hoopla Digital which is a similar service.

                  Becuase of My Podcast I'm Going All over the World Talking About a Subject I Love

                  Hilda from the Wise Traditions Podcast and her own site holistichilda.com started this podcast by contacting a company where she enjoyed their newsletter but thought it needed a kick in the pants (and she loves the topic). She get involved and now hosts their podcasts. She is doing such a great job they are now sending her all over the globe to talk about the show and be an ambassador. Check out at holistichilda.com and the podcast is at http://westonaprice.org/

                  Libsyn and Blubrry ready for New iTunes Tags

                  As Soundcloud continues to plummet (and they hope Chance the wrapper saves them the way Justin Timberlake save Myspace?), Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have already stated (and demonstrated in some cases) how the new iTunes Tags are in place. You can see Libsyn's new layout and demonstration here

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Happy 100th Episode to The Feed (the official podcast from Libsyn.com Hero of the week Jessica Kupferman from the jkmagency.com for telling advertisers to stick their $6 per episode offers where the sun doesn't shine.

                  Jimmy Iovine says it takes 6 years for great musicians to break into the music business (from the Howard Stern show on Siriusxm.com )

                  School of Podcasting Provides

                  Direct Access to my twelve years of experience

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Access to all 16 courses

                  Priority Email Support

                  Live Group Coaching

                  30-Day Moneyback -Guarantee 

                  JOIN TODAY

                   

                   

                  ]]>4dcca082be59a4c4c4abbdd9ed62fdecMon, 17 Jul 2017 04:00:00 -040040:29falsefull575575Are Podcasters Entertainers?I went to two concerts this weekend and underneath all the education and information, podcasters are entertainers.  If you're not entertaining your audience, you're losing them. Dictionary.com defines entertain as, "to hold the attention of pleasantly or agreeably; divert; amuse." We need to hold people's attention. The concerts I saw this weekend were Jonny Lang and King's X. Two Concerts by musicians with track records going all the way back to 1980 (King's X) and 1995 (Lang). Jonny Lang released his major label debut when he was 15 years old. Both bands had music in the rotation on MTV (for those that remember MTV) 

                  So what does this have to do with Podcasting? Well as both of these bands are now "Indie" we can learn from them. 

                  Have a Crappy Opening Act

                  In both instances, the promoters of these shows picked HORRENDOUS opening acts. While the bands have little if nothing at all to do with this, it does make them sound better.

                  Know what you're going to say

                  Both of these bands have what are called set lists. This lists the songs in the order. It's only game plan and can be changed, but when they hit the stage they have a pretty idea of what is going to happen in the next 60-90 minutes. 

                  As a podcaster you should have a pretty good idea of where you are going when you press record. I know this seems common sense, but I often here shows start with what should be pregame chatter, "Did you want to talk about _____?" This should've been decided before the microphone was turned on. It's not like the guys in King's X have a big "LADIES AND GENTLEMEN KING'S X" and then Doug and Ty look at each other and ask, "Should we do Groove Machine?"

                  I recently read a book about Van Halen, and bands of this caliber practice the same set for months to make sure everything is smooth. 

                  For the Love of God put the good stuff first

                  There is a reason the news often starts with the phrase "Our top story tonight." Both bands came out with great up-tempo songs to get the crowd engaged.

                  3. Be Original

                  Jonny Lang sounded like he was 15 going on 48 when he came out of the gate. He has a voice that is very distinct, and you know its him.

                  Kings X has a very distinct sound. Did they do something way outside the box? Yes and No. They tune their guitars lower than what is considered standard, and they use a slightly different tuning (for the musicians they tune to C instead of E, and they use Drop D (not C) tuning). So while a little outside the box, all they did was twist a few knobs. These small twists (combined with awesome musicianship) makes them very identifiable. 

                  4. Listen to Your Audience

                  During one song Jonny was playing and singing with his guitar. This is called "Scat singing" and it was pretty cool (and I hate scat singing). The crowd really came alive. Sure enough later in the evening he brought it back. 

                  All night King's X fans were shouting requests (they have quite a few albums). One song is called, "King" and one person kept screaming, "Are you going to play King?" Well, they weren't because I was in the front row leaning on the stage and could read their set list (and I took after the convert). Before their first encore, they swapped added it. 

                  5. You Can't Make Everyone Happy

                  One dufas at the Kings X show wrote a note with a song request and was very persistent. Eventually, the lead singer stated they had a set list, and they are prepared to play and some they are not. 

                  6. Have a Cool Logo if You Want to Sell Merchandise

                  Jonny Lang's t-shirt was boring. They pictured his latest album cover which has his picture on it. With the music business in a mess, musicians make a fair amount of money from merchandise sales. For those who want to keepsake from the concert, the traditional "Album cover" t-shirt will do. King's X has a cool logo, with the phrase "First Church of Rock and Roll" with the saying "May the Groove be With you" You want to wear this shirt BECAUSE IT'S A COOL SHIRT.

                  The other thing about having a cool logo shirt, is you can sell it no matter what tour you're on. 

                  This also means knowing your audience, so if your audience is a bunch if middle aged dudes, you better keep the extra large in stock. 

                  7. Do No Underestimate the Power Of You, and the Value of Direct Access

                  With Jonny Lang you can purchase a VIP package with gives you access to the soundcheck, selfie, posters, guitar picks, commemorative laminate, etc for $100. Most of this has very little to do with Jonny. 

                  8. Don't Lose Your Cool, or Panic

                  During the first few songs, the lead singer was having an issue with a microphone stand. Eventually, he threw it to the ground. Was he upset? I don't think so. I think he was trying to get the attention of the sound crew. Some "Rock stars" might've walked off the stage.  Doug kept his cool.

                  King's X Did Something Brilliant

                  At Disney at end of the every ride you exit through the gift shop. At the end of their show, the lead singer from King's X explained how they were going to towel off, and head over to the merchandise table where you can get pictures, selfies, merchandise, etc. In other words, exit through the gift shop. The AMAZING thing is you didn't have to purchase anything to meet the band. The lead singer explained this as he was leaving the stage, "After all, it's all about you.' 

                  I was at the very end of the line. I was worried that they would cut the line, but I was told by one of their staff, "No, they stay till everyone has been served." WOW. 

                  What Was The Result?

                  Most of the people there got a lot of time to look at the merchandise. To see other buying the merchandise. This was the law of reciprocity in action. They were doing something nice for you (free selfies) in hopes that you would do something nice for them (I bought a $25 t-shirt). Doug did a quick soundbyte for the show. They were awesome. 

                  Jonny Lang put on a great show. I love his voice, and can't wait for the new album. I do want to comment on something I noticed.

                  I talked to people at the Jonny Lang show and for the most part people were from the Akron/Canton/Cleveland Area (within an hour of the location). There were a lot of fans of the venue (the Kent Stage), and alot of fans of Jonny. 

                  Within the first five minutes of standing in line at the Kings X show, I met people who came from New York (7 hours away), Indiana (4 hours away), Columbus (4 hours away). People who had seen them 10, 12, 13 times.With any prodding of the band, the King's X fans bellowed out the song with the singer. This often lead him to back away from the microphone. I was in the front row, I had probably 400 people behind me. To hear a room of people drowning out the amplifiers a few feet from me was a very cool thing. It obviously touched the singer as he was amazed at the enthusiasm of the crowd. So is this enhanced engagement with their audience the result of their "Free" Meet and Greets?" I don't have any facts to prove this, but if I was a betting man, I would guess that to be true. 

                  Check out both bands (both were great concerts) at www.jonnylang.com and kingsxrocks.com 

                   

                  Other Topic

                  Nominate the School of Podcasting in the technology category at www.podcastawards.com 

                  Soundcloud laid of 40% of their employees see http://www.spin.com/2017/07/soundcloud-lays-off-40-of-staff/

                   

                   

                  ]]>I went to two concerts this weekend and underneath all the education and information, podcasters are entertainers.  If you're not entertaining your audience, you're losing them. Dictionary.com defines entertain as, "to hold the attention of pleasantly or agreeably; divert; amuse." We need to hold people's attention. The concerts I saw this weekend were Jonny Lang and King's X. Two Concerts by musicians with track records going all the way back to 1980 (King's X) and 1995 (Lang). Jonny Lang released his major label debut when he was 15 years old. Both bands had music in the rotation on MTV (for those that remember MTV) 

                  So what does this have to do with Podcasting? Well as both of these bands are now "Indie" we can learn from them. 

                  Have a Crappy Opening Act

                  In both instances, the promoters of these shows picked HORRENDOUS opening acts. While the bands have little if nothing at all to do with this, it does make them sound better.

                  Know what you're going to say

                  Both of these bands have what are called set lists. This lists the songs in the order. It's only game plan and can be changed, but when they hit the stage they have a pretty idea of what is going to happen in the next 60-90 minutes. 

                  As a podcaster you should have a pretty good idea of where you are going when you press record. I know this seems common sense, but I often here shows start with what should be pregame chatter, "Did you want to talk about _____?" This should've been decided before the microphone was turned on. It's not like the guys in King's X have a big "LADIES AND GENTLEMEN KING'S X" and then Doug and Ty look at each other and ask, "Should we do Groove Machine?"

                  I recently read a book about Van Halen, and bands of this caliber practice the same set for months to make sure everything is smooth. 

                  For the Love of God put the good stuff first

                  There is a reason the news often starts with the phrase "Our top story tonight." Both bands came out with great up-tempo songs to get the crowd engaged.

                  3. Be Original

                  Jonny Lang sounded like he was 15 going on 48 when he came out of the gate. He has a voice that is very distinct, and you know its him.

                  Kings X has a very distinct sound. Did they do something way outside the box? Yes and No. They tune their guitars lower than what is considered standard, and they use a slightly different tuning (for the musicians they tune to C instead of E, and they use Drop D (not C) tuning). So while a little outside the box, all they did was twist a few knobs. These small twists (combined with awesome musicianship) makes them very identifiable. 

                  4. Listen to Your Audience

                  During one song Jonny was playing and singing with his guitar. This is called "Scat singing" and it was pretty cool (and I hate scat singing). The crowd really came alive. Sure enough later in the evening he brought it back. 

                  All night King's X fans were shouting requests (they have quite a few albums). One song is called, "King" and one person kept screaming, "Are you going to play King?" Well, they weren't because I was in the front row leaning on the stage and could read their set list (and I took after the convert). Before their first encore, they swapped added it. 

                  5. You Can't Make Everyone Happy

                  One dufas at the Kings X show wrote a note with a song request and was very persistent. Eventually, the lead singer stated they had a set list, and they are prepared to play and some they are not. 

                  6. Have a Cool Logo if You Want to Sell Merchandise

                  Jonny Lang's t-shirt was boring. They pictured his latest album cover which has his picture on it. With the music business in a mess, musicians make a fair amount of money from merchandise sales. For those who want to keepsake from the concert, the traditional "Album cover" t-shirt will do. King's X has a cool logo, with the phrase "First Church of Rock and Roll" with the saying "May the Groove be With you" You want to wear this shirt BECAUSE IT'S A COOL SHIRT.

                  The other thing about having a cool logo shirt, is you can sell it no matter what tour you're on. 

                  This also means knowing your audience, so if your audience is a bunch if middle aged dudes, you better keep the extra large in stock. 

                  7. Do No Underestimate the Power Of You, and the Value of Direct Access

                  With Jonny Lang you can purchase a VIP package with gives you access to the soundcheck, selfie, posters, guitar picks, commemorative laminate, etc for $100. Most of this has very little to do with Jonny. 

                  8. Don't Lose Your Cool, or Panic

                  During the first few songs, the lead singer was having an issue with a microphone stand. Eventually, he threw it to the ground. Was he upset? I don't think so. I think he was trying to get the attention of the sound crew. Some "Rock stars" might've walked off the stage.  Doug kept his cool.

                  King's X Did Something Brilliant

                  At Disney at end of the every ride you exit through the gift shop. At the end of their show, the lead singer from King's X explained how they were going to towel off, and head over to the merchandise table where you can get pictures, selfies, merchandise, etc. In other words, exit through the gift shop. The AMAZING thing is you didn't have to purchase anything to meet the band. The lead singer explained this as he was leaving the stage, "After all, it's all about you.' 

                  I was at the very end of the line. I was worried that they would cut the line, but I was told by one of their staff, "No, they stay till everyone has been served." WOW. 

                  What Was The Result?

                  Most of the people there got a lot of time to look at the merchandise. To see other buying the merchandise. This was the law of reciprocity in action. They were doing something nice for you (free selfies) in hopes that you would do something nice for them (I bought a $25 t-shirt). Doug did a quick soundbyte for the show. They were awesome. 

                  Jonny Lang put on a great show. I love his voice, and can't wait for the new album. I do want to comment on something I noticed.

                  I talked to people at the Jonny Lang show and for the most part people were from the Akron/Canton/Cleveland Area (within an hour of the location). There were a lot of fans of the venue (the Kent Stage), and alot of fans of Jonny. 

                  Within the first five minutes of standing in line at the Kings X show, I met people who came from New York (7 hours away), Indiana (4 hours away), Columbus (4 hours away). People who had seen them 10, 12, 13 times.With any prodding of the band, the King's X fans bellowed out the song with the singer. This often lead him to back away from the microphone. I was in the front row, I had probably 400 people behind me. To hear a room of people drowning out the amplifiers a few feet from me was a very cool thing. It obviously touched the singer as he was amazed at the enthusiasm of the crowd. So is this enhanced engagement with their audience the result of their "Free" Meet and Greets?" I don't have any facts to prove this, but if I was a betting man, I would guess that to be true. 

                  Check out both bands (both were great concerts) at www.jonnylang.com and kingsxrocks.com 

                   

                  Other Topic

                  Nominate the School of Podcasting in the technology category at www.podcastawards.com 

                  Soundcloud laid of 40% of their employees see http://www.spin.com/2017/07/soundcloud-lays-off-40-of-staff/

                   

                   

                  ]]>e4c5fafd383c33fe4ab7e7398e829a2aMon, 10 Jul 2017 04:46:45 -040036:24falsefull574574It's a Lot of Work To Sound This Boring - Drew Ackerman of Sleep with Me PodcastToday I talk with Drew Ackerman of the Sleep with Me Podcast. I met him at Podfest.us and I was amazed at the amount of detail he puts into a show that has a singular goal of putting you to sleep. In the interview you will hear:
                  • How Drew started his show with not the best of equipment
                  • His "Let's See What Happens" attitude
                  • How he picks the not too boring, not too entertaining topics.
                  • How he pushed through when he thought about quitting
                  • What inspired him to start the podcast
                  • How he takes it seriously, but not too seriously.
                  • What countries just don't get his show. 
                  • The listener email that left him humbled.
                  • His massive amount of downloads reported in the Washington Post
                  
                  

                  Check out Drew's Sleep With Me Podcast at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com

                  Anchor.fm Trying Hard to Be Everything and Succeeding at....

                  I took another look at Anchor.fm now that you can create a podcast for free. This is another great example of a company knowing NOTHING about podcasting and jumping into the space. Leading people who are uninformed into situations that they are going to hate in a few months. 

                  They are going to control your feed if you let them submit your podcast feed "for you" which means later you won't be able to see your Apple stats. 

                  As a feedback mechanism, it's easy to receive feedback, but impossible to get it off your phone (and if they knew anything about podcasting they would know this). 

                  For now, I'm going to play with it for a week, but getting these files into a podcast (not using their horrible system) is not easy. 

                  Ready To Start a Podcast? 

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  You get step by step tutorials on 16 courses

                  Private Facebook group to pick the brains of other podcasters

                  Priority email support and Live Group Coaching

                  30 Day Money Back Guarantee 

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>Today I talk with Drew Ackerman of the Sleep with Me Podcast. I met him at Podfest.us and I was amazed at the amount of detail he puts into a show that has a singular goal of putting you to sleep. In the interview you will hear:
                  • How Drew started his show with not the best of equipment
                  • His "Let's See What Happens" attitude
                  • How he picks the not too boring, not too entertaining topics.
                  • How he pushed through when he thought about quitting
                  • What inspired him to start the podcast
                  • How he takes it seriously, but not too seriously.
                  • What countries just don't get his show. 
                  • The listener email that left him humbled.
                  • His massive amount of downloads reported in the Washington Post
                  
                  

                  Check out Drew's Sleep With Me Podcast at www.sleepwithmepodcast.com

                  Anchor.fm Trying Hard to Be Everything and Succeeding at....

                  I took another look at Anchor.fm now that you can create a podcast for free. This is another great example of a company knowing NOTHING about podcasting and jumping into the space. Leading people who are uninformed into situations that they are going to hate in a few months. 

                  They are going to control your feed if you let them submit your podcast feed "for you" which means later you won't be able to see your Apple stats. 

                  As a feedback mechanism, it's easy to receive feedback, but impossible to get it off your phone (and if they knew anything about podcasting they would know this). 

                  For now, I'm going to play with it for a week, but getting these files into a podcast (not using their horrible system) is not easy. 

                  Ready To Start a Podcast? 

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  You get step by step tutorials on 16 courses

                  Private Facebook group to pick the brains of other podcasters

                  Priority email support and Live Group Coaching

                  30 Day Money Back Guarantee 

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>444b7aa9fb435cda0d8f5ad2d9f1ecddMon, 03 Jul 2017 04:07:24 -040049:39falsefull573573How Many Strikes Do Podcasters Get?Even though I asked, "How many strikes do you give a podcast before turning out?" nobody answered with a number. Instead, the answers were "it depends." It sounds that you are going to get more strikes if you are delivering

                  Contributors to the show

                  Cliff from www.podcastanswerman.com

                  Tim From the Sled Dog Podcast

                  Jenny from Studiochaotic.com (personal journal podcast)

                  Kyle from Reckoneer.com Reckoneer is your #1 resource for the race promoter who didn't major in business.

                  Darren from coronertalk.com (thanks for the shirt!)

                  Haley from Adopteeson.com a podcast where Adoptees talk about the adoption experience

                  Larry from goinglinux.com

                  Sean from Slept in Government Class

                  Dennis from Evil Podcast

                  The CUB Approach to Podcast Reviews

                  CUB stands for is it Confusing, Unbelievable, or Boring. If you have any of these, it's time to edit the show.

                  Because of My Podcast: Ray Edwards

                  I attend Ray's copywriting Academy and Ray mentioned how he had a client hire him for a $10,000 job from a podcast Ray puts out for free.

                  This was part two of episode 572, and originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/572

                  July's Question

                  What has changed about your show since you started, and why did you make the change? Contact me, and be sure to mention 577

                  Ready to start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting.com using the coupon listener

                  ]]>Even though I asked, "How many strikes do you give a podcast before turning out?" nobody answered with a number. Instead, the answers were "it depends." It sounds that you are going to get more strikes if you are delivering

                  Contributors to the show

                  Cliff from www.podcastanswerman.com

                  Tim From the Sled Dog Podcast

                  Jenny from Studiochaotic.com (personal journal podcast)

                  Kyle from Reckoneer.com Reckoneer is your #1 resource for the race promoter who didn't major in business.

                  Darren from coronertalk.com (thanks for the shirt!)

                  Haley from Adopteeson.com a podcast where Adoptees talk about the adoption experience

                  Larry from goinglinux.com

                  Sean from Slept in Government Class

                  Dennis from Evil Podcast

                  The CUB Approach to Podcast Reviews

                  CUB stands for is it Confusing, Unbelievable, or Boring. If you have any of these, it's time to edit the show.

                  Because of My Podcast: Ray Edwards

                  I attend Ray's copywriting Academy and Ray mentioned how he had a client hire him for a $10,000 job from a podcast Ray puts out for free.

                  This was part two of episode 572, and originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/572

                  July's Question

                  What has changed about your show since you started, and why did you make the change? Contact me, and be sure to mention 577

                  Ready to start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting.com using the coupon listener

                  ]]>f49a7e78c5fc41c8c5e2a8e58324ad20Wed, 28 Jun 2017 04:00:00 -040050:06falsefull572572Bumper Sticker ReflectionsWe seem to think we don't know what to do, when in truth we don't do what we know. This week I attended Ray Edwards copyrighting academy, and it was pretty cool. I went there as I will be updating the School of Podcasting's website later this year. Also, people that are learning to write copy, probably have a product. People who have a product need customers, a great way to attract customers is via a podcast. So when you hear me say go to where your target audience is, make friends with them, then tell them about your show, I did that repeatedly this weekend. 

                  Success is sequential, not simultaneous. 

                  Your calendar shows your priorities or your distractions?

                  Everyone has a excuse as to way they didn't succeed.

                  If everything you do is an experiment, then nothing is a failure

                  If it does everything, it does nothing well. 

                  Part 2 coming later this week after I take care of my car.

                  ]]>We seem to think we don't know what to do, when in truth we don't do what we know. This week I attended Ray Edwards copyrighting academy, and it was pretty cool. I went there as I will be updating the School of Podcasting's website later this year. Also, people that are learning to write copy, probably have a product. People who have a product need customers, a great way to attract customers is via a podcast. So when you hear me say go to where your target audience is, make friends with them, then tell them about your show, I did that repeatedly this weekend. 

                  Success is sequential, not simultaneous. 

                  Your calendar shows your priorities or your distractions?

                  Everyone has a excuse as to way they didn't succeed.

                  If everything you do is an experiment, then nothing is a failure

                  If it does everything, it does nothing well. 

                  Part 2 coming later this week after I take care of my car.

                  ]]>93b0874f79371fafa93b157597417c6fMon, 26 Jun 2017 06:11:33 -040018:32falsefull572572How Improv Skills Can Boost Your Podcasting AttitudeClay has had some very cool things happen on his Fish Nerds Show including having a touring opera singer invite clay to do a show at a theater. Check out Clay at www.fishnerds.com
                  The Sometimes Condescending Nature of Radio People Towards Podcasting

                  There are some really cool people from the radio industry that get podcasting. People like Eric K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show, Michael Sharkey from the Talent Show, Jeff Brown From Read to Lead, Tim Sinclair from Ringr and My Worst Interview Ever, and Phillip Keller from Blind Faith live GET PODCASTING. I don't want to lump all radio people together. There are times when someone comes across with a condescending tone of voice. It comes across like "Podcasting is a fad, or not "Real Broadcasting." They seem to think that now that the "Real" broadcasters are here and it's time to step aside and let the "real" broadcasters take over.

                  I recently listened to The Sound Off Show with Matt Cundill. In the episode, he was talking about how a recent professional survey company had polled listeners in Canda.Matt asks, "Is the hype on podcasting just a lot of noise and it takes a study like this one to figure out where it really ranks?" What a douchebag. AS if study after study showing podcasting's slow but steady growth, and radio's slow and steady decline aren't enough.

                  This is what I say "Radio People" with a negative slant. This is what I'm basing my opinion on, and when I say "Some radio people have a bias," this is why.

                  How Improv Skills Can Help Your Podcast

                  Today I have Chad Elliot from the Off the Cuff Comedy Improv Podcast, and http://seattleimprovclasses.com/ I appeared on episode 7 and was SUPER nervous as I didn't get this I would be doing improv on his show. I have never done improv. Luckily Chad sent me his book Improv Manifesto: 7 Easy Steps to Confidence, Creativity, and Charisma - Even If You're Shy! (Think On Your Feet Under Pressure with Tools of Improvisational Theater & Improv Comedy.) which helped me get ready. Here are some things I learned.

                  1. Talk with confidence, even when you're not confident about your answer.
                  2. You will be amazed at how your brain "Fills in the blank" when you start talking.
                  3. The key to improv is listening to every word of the person you are working with.
                  4. If things horrible, it is a learning experience and you will handle it better next time, and will build skills to help get through it better.
                  5. You can see results when you start doing one improve exercise
                  
                  What Does This Do With Podcasting?

                  When you are 100% focused on what your guest/co-host is saying you are better prepared to ask a better follow up question (than if you had a premade lit of questions).

                  If you have a bad interview, living through this experience shows you that you will survive and equips you to handle it better in the future

                  You can contemplate different stories to pull from an idea (see The Story Factor: Inspiration, Influence, and Persuasion through the Art of Storytelling by Annette Simmons)

                  It builds confidence and can get you our of your comfort zone. This way when podcasting opens the doors to new relationships, you will have the confidence to walk through

                  Face Your Podcasting Fears

                  Chad had a client who said, "You know what I want to do this because I'm scared of it, but I don't want to do it because I'm scared of it." The pros of podcasting outweigh any negatives and if you can make it through the learning curve, you will be so happy you made it through (see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start to start your podcast today)

                  This Month's Podcast Question

                  How many "strikes" do you give a podcast before you unsubscribe (if you have subscribed) or if you don't subscribe how many strikes do they get before you quit streaming their show. Got to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use the information there. You can send an email with an audio attachment and put 572 in the subject line. Be sure to mention your show and website so I can put a link in the show notes

                  Start Your Podcast Today - Risk-Free

                  The School of Podcasting has a 30-day Money-back Guarantee, so if you sign up and decide podcasting is not for you. Contact me anytime within the first 30 days and get a full refund. Sign up today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                   

                   

                  ]]>Clay has had some very cool things happen on his Fish Nerds Show including having a touring opera singer invite clay to do a show at a theater. Check out Clay at www.fishnerds.com
                  The Sometimes Condescending Nature of Radio People Towards Podcasting

                  There are some really cool people from the radio industry that get podcasting. People like Eric K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach and the Podcast Review Show, Michael Sharkey from the Talent Show, Jeff Brown From Read to Lead, Tim Sinclair from Ringr and My Worst Interview Ever, and Phillip Keller from Blind Faith live GET PODCASTING. I don't want to lump all radio people together. There are times when someone comes across with a condescending tone of voice. It comes across like "Podcasting is a fad, or not "Real Broadcasting." They seem to think that now that the "Real" broadcasters are here and it's time to step aside and let the "real" broadcasters take over.

                  I recently listened to The Sound Off Show with Matt Cundill. In the episode, he was talking about how a recent professional survey company had polled listeners in Canda.Matt asks, "Is the hype on podcasting just a lot of noise and it takes a study like this one to figure out where it really ranks?" What a douchebag. AS if study after study showing podcasting's slow but steady growth, and radio's slow and steady decline aren't enough.

                  This is what I say "Radio People" with a negative slant. This is what I'm basing my opinion on, and when I say "Some radio people have a bias," this is why.

                  How Improv Skills Can Help Your Podcast

                  Today I have Chad Elliot from the Off the Cuff Comedy Improv Podcast, and http://seattleimprovclasses.com/ I appeared on episode 7 and was SUPER nervous as I didn't get this I would be doing improv on his show. I have never done improv. Luckily Chad sent me his book Improv Manifesto: 7 Easy Steps to Confidence, Creativity, and Charisma - Even If You're Shy! (Think On Your Feet Under Pressure with Tools of Improvisational Theater & Improv Comedy.) which helped me get ready. Here are some things I learned.

                  1. Talk with confidence, even when you're not confident about your answer.
                  2. You will be amazed at how your brain "Fills in the blank" when you start talking.
                  3. The key to improv is listening to every word of the person you are working with.
                  4. If things horrible, it is a learning experience and you will handle it better next time, and will build skills to help get through it better.
                  5. You can see results when you start doing one improve exercise
                  
                  What Does This Do With Podcasting?

                  When you are 100% focused on what your guest/co-host is saying you are better prepared to ask a better follow up question (than if you had a premade lit of questions).

                  If you have a bad interview, living through this experience shows you that you will survive and equips you to handle it better in the future

                  You can contemplate different stories to pull from an idea (see The Story Factor: Inspiration, Influence, and Persuasion through the Art of Storytelling by Annette Simmons)

                  It builds confidence and can get you our of your comfort zone. This way when podcasting opens the doors to new relationships, you will have the confidence to walk through

                  Face Your Podcasting Fears

                  Chad had a client who said, "You know what I want to do this because I'm scared of it, but I don't want to do it because I'm scared of it." The pros of podcasting outweigh any negatives and if you can make it through the learning curve, you will be so happy you made it through (see www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start to start your podcast today)

                  This Month's Podcast Question

                  How many "strikes" do you give a podcast before you unsubscribe (if you have subscribed) or if you don't subscribe how many strikes do they get before you quit streaming their show. Got to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and use the information there. You can send an email with an audio attachment and put 572 in the subject line. Be sure to mention your show and website so I can put a link in the show notes

                  Start Your Podcast Today - Risk-Free

                  The School of Podcasting has a 30-day Money-back Guarantee, so if you sign up and decide podcasting is not for you. Contact me anytime within the first 30 days and get a full refund. Sign up today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                   

                   

                  ]]>1bf11a2573ebe88ced101f40be235a0fMon, 19 Jun 2017 16:00:00 -040049:32falsefull571571What Podcasters Can Learn From Kevin HartIn the future, Apple Podcasts app will support some new features including:

                  One the podcast level you will have Seasons Serial and Episodic podcast types

                  On the Episode level  Title, episode number, and season number Summary and episode notes Trailers and bonus content GUID (don’t change it!)

                  I am worried when I read the text, "New subscribers will receive the first episode in their Library, or the current season if using seasons. " As we don't know what "will receive" means. Does this mean it will automatically download an entire season? We don't know. If it does, I can see people abusing this to get more downloads. There are already people sending old content back to their audience just to juice their download numbers.

                  They also mention not to change the GUID. The GUID is a unique number that identifies your episode. Changing this number will have the app seeing the episode as new. You should never change this number. Apple is saying "Don't change this." This is kind of like saying "Don't stick that knife in the outlet" to a two-year-old. In my opinion, this is a bad idea to even give people access to this.

                  New Listener Stats Apple will provide statistics on how many listeners you have, minutes per listener, Abandonment Point, and Average Completion. The statistics are "Launching this year."

                  The other thing I'm worried about is currently people OBSESS over their podcast numbers. They release an episode, FREAK OUT that it's not in their iTunes listing, and want to know why they don't have download number immediately. This will give podcasters more stats to obsess over. Also, you may not be ready for the shock when you find out that only 48% of your audience is listening to the entire of your episode.

                  None of This Matters Yet

                  If I told you there was a new audio format and it was going to sound great and do all sorts of new fun stuff, but there aren't any players that can play it yet the news wouldn't mean anything. You can't experience any of the new stuff until players are available. These new features won't come into play until iOS11 is available (that will have the new Podcasts App). So it's exciting, but the time to celebrate and figure out how to get these new tags into our RSS feeds should be something we worry about later. I'm sure Libsyn, Blubrry, and Speaker (and any other Podcast Media hosts worth anything) will have systems in place shortly.

                  I know patience is not a characteristic of some podcasters, but for now, know things are going to get better later this year.

                  Here are the details from Apple.

                  Becuase of My Podcast: I Got a Gig as an Audio Editor

                  Jeff Perry has had multiple version of shows about podcasting. He has really enjoyed editing them into different forms. He recently landed a job working for Emerald City Productions as an audio editor. Check out Jeff's show at https://podcastingspark.com/

                  Great Follow Up Questions Make Great Podcasts

                  Your homework for today is to reach out to a podcast you listen to, and let them know you enjoy their show (I call this "putting gas in their tank). For me I did this after listening to Lee Silverstein on Podcast Junkies

                  What Podcasters Can Learn From Kevin Hart

                  I remember watching the comedy special I'm a Grown Little Man and he was hilarious as he shared stories about his family. At the end, he said, "I want to show you why I do this," and brought out his two little children. It was touching, and transparent. I've seen copier salesmen drag their kids around as a gimmick. This just seemed genuine. I've seen every one of his specials since then, and when his book came out, I instantly got the audio version (read by Kevin) on Audible. (you can get it for free if you're new to audible).

                  I always if you can make me laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain me I'm in. This book did all of that, but the things that podcasters can take away from this story is Kevin's relentless pursuit of getting better at his craft. You also see how those "hard times" that we have often come back to life in a way that you are thankful that you had them. Here are some of the things that jumped out of the book:

                  Kevin's Father is crazy. He did things to his children that were cruel. One time he stole a bike and tried to give it to Kevin as a present. His Mom knew it was stolen, and instantly made Kevin give it back. He "borrowed" a neighborhood dog and gave it to his children, only to have the neighbor come back and get the dog. Kevin soon realized, his father wasn't going to win any medals for "Father of the year."He accepted it, but instead of hating his father, he forgave him.

                  Kevin got a mentor after making it "big" in Philidelphia and wanted to takes grow his career. He drove from Philidelphia to New York City (according to Google Maps that is one hour and forty-five minutes one way). He would then sit and watch his mentor perform a numerous clubs. He wouldn't get to sit at the table with all the comedians. He was building a relationship with his mentor, and eventually would be able to do five minutes of stand-up. To boil this down, he spent three hours in a car, three or four times a week, to perform for five minutes.

                  His career starting taking off. He started getting some acting roles. He was in a movie called Fools Gold (it tanked) and later was in Soul Plane. Soul plane has historical relevance as one of the most bootlegged movies in history. People were watching a DVD of the movie before post-production was finished. Consequently, when it came out nobody went to see it. Kevin had worked so hard to get this point, but with two flops under his belt, nobody would cast him in any movies. So what did he do? Sink into oblivion? Instead, he decided to build his career up so much, that they HAD to put him in a film. So once again, he went back to working on his craft. He wanted to be good. He did this for seven years.

                  Seven years. 

                  There is no practice in comedy. This is why big comedians play smaller venues. They want to test their material. The only way to get better is to do it. The only way to get better is to increase you stage time. It is the same with podcasting. You can read all about it. You can watch videos, record episodes, but you don't know if it's any good until you let someone not named Mom listen to it.

                  Kevin got deals that lead to nothing. He figured out that the reason why things weren't working with TV is other people were writing for him. So he creates a sitcom. Then it got turned into a pilot, and YES, it got picked up. They filmed the show, and he was flown to New York to this big event to meet all the people at the networks and he is ready to walk on stage and tell the world who he is and tell them about his show. He is on the side of the stage when the stage manager tells him NOT to go on stage. Instead, they send the cast of another show onto the stage to promote their stuff. Wait, what? What was going on? Seconds before Kevin was to go on to a stage and introduce himself to a nationwide audience, he is informed his show was dropped. Can you imagine?

                  Growing up Kevin's mother was BEYOND strict. There was a lot of "NO" in Kevin's childhood. There was a fair amount of embarrassment in his childhood. In all case, Kevin would shrug his shoulders, say, "OK" and go back to making his stand up better. To quote a famous comedy manager Barry Katz, "If you are undeniable, you won't be denied."

                  Kevin as a Brand

                  Kevin had some people helping him. One person was threatening people when it came time to pay Kevin. He was very assertive and people didn't' want to work with him. Kevin always focused not on just his jokes, but what was the experience like. He wanted a nice theater. He wanted people to have fun, and not worry about getting into fights, etc.

                  Kevin Listened

                  When Kevin was a child his mother was strict. He didn't agree with the rules, but he followed them. All those "No's" from his Mother help prepare Kevin for the movie business where you go on audition after audition.

                  His jokes, in the beginning, were funny, but any comic could have told those jokes. There was very little about Kevin in the act. Some of his stories were made up. His mentor kept saying, your life is funny. Talk about you.

                  Kevin had a stage name. George Carlin, Richard Pryor, none of the great comedians had a stage name (Kevin's names was Lil' Kev the Bastard). He changed his name. He Listened.

                  His name is his brand. At one point he was offered to play a very large comedy event in Canada. This is a launching pad for many comedians. His manager told him he wasn't ready. He wasn't happy, but he listened. When he was invited back the next year, he was ready. It worked, and it began his come back."

                  The bottom line is Kevin's attitude is AMAZING, and we can learn a lot about how to handle adversity in your life based on his attitude.

                  Summary

                  Being told no over and over build endurance

                  When you have "Downtime" use it to work on your craft

                  It's better to forgive than to hold a grudge

                  Make sure people have a good experience consuming your content

                  Always strive to do more, but have an attitude of gratitude for the things you have.

                  Get the book at Amazon

                  In the future, Apple Podcasts app will support some new features including:

                  One the podcast level you will have Seasons Serial and Episodic podcast types

                  On the Episode level  Title, episode number, and season number Summary and episode notes Trailers and bonus content GUID (don’t change it!)

                  I am worried when I read the text, "New subscribers will receive the first episode in their Library, or the current season if using seasons. " As we don't know what "will receive" means. Does this mean it will automatically download an entire season? We don't know. If it does, I can see people abusing this to get more downloads. There are already people sending old content back to their audience just to juice their download numbers.

                  They also mention not to change the GUID. The GUID is a unique number that identifies your episode. Changing this number will have the app seeing the episode as new. You should never change this number. Apple is saying "Don't change this." This is kind of like saying "Don't stick that knife in the outlet" to a two-year-old. In my opinion, this is a bad idea to even give people access to this.

                  New Listener Stats Apple will provide statistics on how many listeners you have, minutes per listener, Abandonment Point, and Average Completion. The statistics are "Launching this year."

                  The other thing I'm worried about is currently people OBSESS over their podcast numbers. They release an episode, FREAK OUT that it's not in their iTunes listing, and want to know why they don't have download number immediately. This will give podcasters more stats to obsess over. Also, you may not be ready for the shock when you find out that only 48% of your audience is listening to the entire of your episode.

                  None of This Matters Yet

                  If I told you there was a new audio format and it was going to sound great and do all sorts of new fun stuff, but there aren't any players that can play it yet the news wouldn't mean anything. You can't experience any of the new stuff until players are available. These new features won't come into play until iOS11 is available (that will have the new Podcasts App). So it's exciting, but the time to celebrate and figure out how to get these new tags into our RSS feeds should be something we worry about later. I'm sure Libsyn, Blubrry, and Speaker (and any other Podcast Media hosts worth anything) will have systems in place shortly.

                  I know patience is not a characteristic of some podcasters, but for now, know things are going to get better later this year.

                  Here are the details from Apple.

                  Becuase of My Podcast: I Got a Gig as an Audio Editor

                  Jeff Perry has had multiple version of shows about podcasting. He has really enjoyed editing them into different forms. He recently landed a job working for Emerald City Productions as an audio editor. Check out Jeff's show at https://podcastingspark.com/

                  Great Follow Up Questions Make Great Podcasts

                  Your homework for today is to reach out to a podcast you listen to, and let them know you enjoy their show (I call this "putting gas in their tank). For me I did this after listening to Lee Silverstein on Podcast Junkies

                  What Podcasters Can Learn From Kevin Hart

                  I remember watching the comedy special I'm a Grown Little Man and he was hilarious as he shared stories about his family. At the end, he said, "I want to show you why I do this," and brought out his two little children. It was touching, and transparent. I've seen copier salesmen drag their kids around as a gimmick. This just seemed genuine. I've seen every one of his specials since then, and when his book came out, I instantly got the audio version (read by Kevin) on Audible. (you can get it for free if you're new to audible).

                  I always if you can make me laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain me I'm in. This book did all of that, but the things that podcasters can take away from this story is Kevin's relentless pursuit of getting better at his craft. You also see how those "hard times" that we have often come back to life in a way that you are thankful that you had them. Here are some of the things that jumped out of the book:

                  Kevin's Father is crazy. He did things to his children that were cruel. One time he stole a bike and tried to give it to Kevin as a present. His Mom knew it was stolen, and instantly made Kevin give it back. He "borrowed" a neighborhood dog and gave it to his children, only to have the neighbor come back and get the dog. Kevin soon realized, his father wasn't going to win any medals for "Father of the year."He accepted it, but instead of hating his father, he forgave him.

                  Kevin got a mentor after making it "big" in Philidelphia and wanted to takes grow his career. He drove from Philidelphia to New York City (according to Google Maps that is one hour and forty-five minutes one way). He would then sit and watch his mentor perform a numerous clubs. He wouldn't get to sit at the table with all the comedians. He was building a relationship with his mentor, and eventually would be able to do five minutes of stand-up. To boil this down, he spent three hours in a car, three or four times a week, to perform for five minutes.

                  His career starting taking off. He started getting some acting roles. He was in a movie called Fools Gold (it tanked) and later was in Soul Plane. Soul plane has historical relevance as one of the most bootlegged movies in history. People were watching a DVD of the movie before post-production was finished. Consequently, when it came out nobody went to see it. Kevin had worked so hard to get this point, but with two flops under his belt, nobody would cast him in any movies. So what did he do? Sink into oblivion? Instead, he decided to build his career up so much, that they HAD to put him in a film. So once again, he went back to working on his craft. He wanted to be good. He did this for seven years.

                  Seven years. 

                  There is no practice in comedy. This is why big comedians play smaller venues. They want to test their material. The only way to get better is to do it. The only way to get better is to increase you stage time. It is the same with podcasting. You can read all about it. You can watch videos, record episodes, but you don't know if it's any good until you let someone not named Mom listen to it.

                  Kevin got deals that lead to nothing. He figured out that the reason why things weren't working with TV is other people were writing for him. So he creates a sitcom. Then it got turned into a pilot, and YES, it got picked up. They filmed the show, and he was flown to New York to this big event to meet all the people at the networks and he is ready to walk on stage and tell the world who he is and tell them about his show. He is on the side of the stage when the stage manager tells him NOT to go on stage. Instead, they send the cast of another show onto the stage to promote their stuff. Wait, what? What was going on? Seconds before Kevin was to go on to a stage and introduce himself to a nationwide audience, he is informed his show was dropped. Can you imagine?

                  Growing up Kevin's mother was BEYOND strict. There was a lot of "NO" in Kevin's childhood. There was a fair amount of embarrassment in his childhood. In all case, Kevin would shrug his shoulders, say, "OK" and go back to making his stand up better. To quote a famous comedy manager Barry Katz, "If you are undeniable, you won't be denied."

                  Kevin as a Brand

                  Kevin had some people helping him. One person was threatening people when it came time to pay Kevin. He was very assertive and people didn't' want to work with him. Kevin always focused not on just his jokes, but what was the experience like. He wanted a nice theater. He wanted people to have fun, and not worry about getting into fights, etc.

                  Kevin Listened

                  When Kevin was a child his mother was strict. He didn't agree with the rules, but he followed them. All those "No's" from his Mother help prepare Kevin for the movie business where you go on audition after audition.

                  His jokes, in the beginning, were funny, but any comic could have told those jokes. There was very little about Kevin in the act. Some of his stories were made up. His mentor kept saying, your life is funny. Talk about you.

                  Kevin had a stage name. George Carlin, Richard Pryor, none of the great comedians had a stage name (Kevin's names was Lil' Kev the Bastard). He changed his name. He Listened.

                  His name is his brand. At one point he was offered to play a very large comedy event in Canada. This is a launching pad for many comedians. His manager told him he wasn't ready. He wasn't happy, but he listened. When he was invited back the next year, he was ready. It worked, and it began his come back."

                  The bottom line is Kevin's attitude is AMAZING, and we can learn a lot about how to handle adversity in your life based on his attitude.

                  Summary

                  Being told no over and over build endurance

                  When you have "Downtime" use it to work on your craft

                  It's better to forgive than to hold a grudge

                  Make sure people have a good experience consuming your content

                  Always strive to do more, but have an attitude of gratitude for the things you have.

                  Get the book at Amazon

                  Get the Audio Book for Free

                  Get a Free Month of Hosting a Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree

                  Start your podcast today, join the School of Podcasting risk free

                   

                  ]]>684080f6ce2fc35bdd3623e799f4f35aMon, 12 Jun 2017 04:00:00 -040048:20falsefull570570Marketing Your Podcast - How Long Does it Take?About a month ago I left a comment on the Spreaker Live show, and this comment resulted in a response from the host that in a conversation he had with me was "Disproportional." So after we both hissed at each I set up a time when we could talk about this and see how we pushed each other's buttons. We did and it was a great interview. The bad news is my SD Card ran out of room, and my backup (mp3 skype recorder) didn't get it either. I could call Alex back on, but at this point, so much water is under the bridge, I thought I would just paraphrase what really happened.
                  1. In my comment, there were times when I used ALL CAPS to make a point.
                  2. Alex is used to dealing with comments from YouTube which are much crueler, and personal that the average podcast comment
                  3. This was the first time he had been challenged on the podcast side of this content (vs the YouTube side) and it caught him off guard.
                  
                  

                  He apologized for calling me a schmuck, and I explained that when he made a joke about me not having any listeners (because I don't use Spreaker), and that I wasn't up front with people about the fact that I work for Libsyn, and we chatted about that. I explained how I wasn't trying to push his buttons, and then we did something that most people miss out on.

                  We had some cool conversation about topics we have in common. For example, Chris Cornell had just died. Neither one of use quite gets while World Trade Center Tower Number 7 went down.

                  In the end, I look forward to meeting Alex at Podcast Movement. If I had not taken a second to step back, and wonder if there was something I DID to create such a reaction (instead of just condemning the other person) then I would've lost out on an opportunity to learn something (be careful using caps in comments), and Alex wouldn't have been able to see his reaction. Lastly, I think we both gained a new friend. So instead of being so set on proving somebody wrong, instead maybe ask, "Why did you say that?" or "What were you feeling when you said that?" and try to understand before being understood (Which is a lesson I learned from the 7 Habits of Highly Effective People)

                  Seriously, How Do I Grow My Audience?

                  Devlin Wilder posted in a Facebook Group, "Please, for the love of all that's good and pure, someone please help me WITH REAL INFO on how I get the numbers. I don't want to hear I need to have my show out for years or I need to get to 200 episodes or what not. And I've had no luck with Fiverr. I need to know the real deal"

                  This is like saying, "I want to know about making a baby, but I don't want to hear about ovaries, sperm, or having to wait 9 months."

                  THERE ARE NO SHORTCUTS 

                  In her book Beyond Powerful Radio Radio Consultant Vallerie Geller states, "in my experience, with few exceptions it takes about three years to build a talk station." She points out that the original Star Trek Series was canceled after three seasons and it was re-runs where the audience found the show. Jerry Seinfeld has framed a memo stating that his show has a poor supporting cast, and most people who saw the test pilot would not watch it again.

                  Gary Vaynrchuck says nobody watched his show for the first 19 months

                  Rand Fishkin tells about his wife, Geraldine, and her travel blog, Everywhereist. For two years she never broke 100 visitors a day (she does a blog). Five years later she gets 1000,000 visitors a month. Source

                  Success comes from feedback, and the ability to look at yourself and ask "Can I Improve This?"

                  Growing up I had a basketball hoop in my backyard. Every time I shot a basket and it bounced off the rim and back at me.... that was feedback.  I watched Kareem Abdul Jabar and his sky hooks shot. It was unblockable. I practiced my skyhook over and over and over. Eventually, I could shoot it with my eyes shut. That took time.

                  If you want to quit your job in six weeks, I would recommend that you not even start podcasting. This is like someone wanting to lose 40 pounds in six weeks. You soon learn that six weeks is not that long, and 40 pound is not that small.

                  The Answer is There is No Answer

                  There are so many factors that play into this

                  Are you working full time? What market are you in and how crowded is it? How unique are you? Your Web Design

                  It's Not Who You Know, It's Who Knows You

                  Podcast Movement is coming up in August, and DC Podfest is coming up in November. I will be at Podcast Movement, and I plan on being in DC Podfest. Do these cost lots of money? Just the travel alone can be expensive based on your budget. That is the key, what is your budget? If you don't have the budget, don't be stupid, don't go. I'm saving money as we speak for Social Media marketing world. I have to plan. I have to put money in my budget. If you have a family with a spouse and kids, don't be stupid.

                  Is It Worth Going to An Event?

                  I have a podcast group for people in Northeast Ohio. I rarely get more than five people in attendance. One of those people (Matt from theauthorinsideyou.com) helped get me on a local TV show.

                  I met Gary Leland, Paul Colligan, and Rob Walch at one of the fire New Media Expos. Rob was the person I called when I found myself out of a job and looking to work in the podcasting industry (I now work for Libsyn).

                  I met Ken Blanchard at an event and I haven't stopped laughing yet.

                  I met Jared Easley and Dan Franks at the New Media Show. Later they would start Podcast Movement and I've been blessed to say I've spoken at every single one in one capacity or another.

                  I met Eri kK Johnson and came up with the idea of adding him to the Podcast Review show at an event.

                  I met Mike Russel of Music Radio Creative at the New Media Show

                  I met Glenn The Geek At Podcast Movement. Glen got me involved with Chris Krimitsos and I was able to speak at Podfest.us That lead to me helping with the Messengers Podcast about their documentary. That lead to me being the closing keynote at podfest.us this year. One person, one contact.

                  Last year I met a whole bunch of people at DC Podfest including Matthew from Podtopod.com.

                  Most of those I paid for (events post-2016 I typically can expense out).

                  When I was a musician, I once drove four hours after getting off work at 8 PM to drive to Cincinnati and hangout with a bunch of indie musicians for three hours before turning around and driving home (I was probably 20). One of the relationships I start at that meeting was a guy who went to another event and learned about podcasting.

                  Whooshkaa Free Media Hosting

                  For those who are new to me reviewing media hosting, I have some criteria.

                  1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. 5. Give me support. 6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business 7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate

                  Whooshkaa is doing something that has been tried by audiometric.io and before them podango.com. This is where you give free hosting so you can see advertising on the podcast. Do Whooshkaa meet my criteria? No, but there is an asterisk.

                  They mess with your file (as they put code into the mp3 file to alert when to play an advertisement), so they keep most of your ID3 tags, but they ditch you image (so if someone downloads your show to their computer and plays it, the dreaded gray music note of death appears on a windows machine). They also change your file name. They don't change your file format, but by nature, they HAVE to change your file to stay in business.

                  Their support was quick and very helpful. Their stats are very similar to what everyone else provides (number of downloads, geographic, operating system, the technology used, etc). They do offer how long someone has listened. Unless they have cracked a new code, this is typically a wasted stat. The only way they can get that information is if you are using their player. To this, I point out that over 80% of podcasts are listened to on a mobile device (so this stat is kind of a "Corinthian leather" feature, sounds good, but in the end not that accurate).

                  They have a built in "Clammr" feature, called highlights. Clammr.com is the first service that allows you to make snippets of a show and share it on social media. With Clammr you can share a snippet of the show and when they click on the snippet they are taken to a place where they can listen to the rest of the episode. You can see how many people listened to your "Highlight." For me, I thought the design could be adjusted to make it go from easy to SUPER EASY to hear the rest of the podcast.

                  They do have a weird "Sign up for our newsletter" when you send people to an episode on Whooshkaa. The problem is that for the Whooshkaa email list (not yours).

                  Getting Paid

                  As the code in the mp3 file has the word "Triton" I'm guessing that they are using Triton for their advertisements. This means that podcasters can probably expect 1 to 2 cents per download. So if I had my Weekly Web Tools on their platform I might make $12 for the month (at 1200 downloads a month). That is if you are lucky enough to have advertising.

                  When I enquired about their...]]>About a month ago I left a comment on the Spreaker Live show, and this comment resulted in a response from the host that in a conversation he had with me was "Disproportional." So after we both hissed at each I set up a time when we could talk about this and see how we pushed each other's buttons. We did and it was a great interview. The bad news is my SD Card ran out of room, and my backup (mp3 skype recorder) didn't get it either. I could call Alex back on, but at this point, so much water is under the bridge, I thought I would just paraphrase what really happened.

                  1. In my comment, there were times when I used ALL CAPS to make a point.
                  2. Alex is used to dealing with comments from YouTube which are much crueler, and personal that the average podcast comment
                  3. This was the first time he had been challenged on the podcast side of this content (vs the YouTube side) and it caught him off guard.
                  
                  

                  He apologized for calling me a schmuck, and I explained that when he made a joke about me not having any listeners (because I don't use Spreaker), and that I wasn't up front with people about the fact that I work for Libsyn, and we chatted about that. I explained how I wasn't trying to push his buttons, and then we did something that most people miss out on.

                  We had some cool conversation about topics we have in common. For example, Chris Cornell had just died. Neither one of use quite gets while World Trade Center Tower Number 7 went down.

                  In the end, I look forward to meeting Alex at Podcast Movement. If I had not taken a second to step back, and wonder if there was something I DID to create such a reaction (instead of just condemning the other person) then I would've lost out on an opportunity to learn something (be careful using caps in comments), and Alex wouldn't have been able to see his reaction. Lastly, I think we both gained a new friend. So instead of being so set on proving somebody wrong, instead maybe ask, "Why did you say that?" or "What were you feeling when you said that?" and try to understand before being understood (Which is a lesson I learned from the 7 Habits of Highly Effective People)

                  Seriously, How Do I Grow My Audience?

                  Devlin Wilder posted in a Facebook Group, "Please, for the love of all that's good and pure, someone please help me WITH REAL INFO on how I get the numbers. I don't want to hear I need to have my show out for years or I need to get to 200 episodes or what not. And I've had no luck with Fiverr. I need to know the real deal"

                  This is like saying, "I want to know about making a baby, but I don't want to hear about ovaries, sperm, or having to wait 9 months."

                  THERE ARE NO SHORTCUTS 

                  In her book Beyond Powerful Radio Radio Consultant Vallerie Geller states, "in my experience, with few exceptions it takes about three years to build a talk station." She points out that the original Star Trek Series was canceled after three seasons and it was re-runs where the audience found the show. Jerry Seinfeld has framed a memo stating that his show has a poor supporting cast, and most people who saw the test pilot would not watch it again.

                  Gary Vaynrchuck says nobody watched his show for the first 19 months

                  Rand Fishkin tells about his wife, Geraldine, and her travel blog, Everywhereist. For two years she never broke 100 visitors a day (she does a blog). Five years later she gets 1000,000 visitors a month. Source

                  Success comes from feedback, and the ability to look at yourself and ask "Can I Improve This?"

                  Growing up I had a basketball hoop in my backyard. Every time I shot a basket and it bounced off the rim and back at me.... that was feedback.  I watched Kareem Abdul Jabar and his sky hooks shot. It was unblockable. I practiced my skyhook over and over and over. Eventually, I could shoot it with my eyes shut. That took time.

                  If you want to quit your job in six weeks, I would recommend that you not even start podcasting. This is like someone wanting to lose 40 pounds in six weeks. You soon learn that six weeks is not that long, and 40 pound is not that small.

                  The Answer is There is No Answer

                  There are so many factors that play into this

                  Are you working full time? What market are you in and how crowded is it? How unique are you? Your Web Design

                  It's Not Who You Know, It's Who Knows You

                  Podcast Movement is coming up in August, and DC Podfest is coming up in November. I will be at Podcast Movement, and I plan on being in DC Podfest. Do these cost lots of money? Just the travel alone can be expensive based on your budget. That is the key, what is your budget? If you don't have the budget, don't be stupid, don't go. I'm saving money as we speak for Social Media marketing world. I have to plan. I have to put money in my budget. If you have a family with a spouse and kids, don't be stupid.

                  Is It Worth Going to An Event?

                  I have a podcast group for people in Northeast Ohio. I rarely get more than five people in attendance. One of those people (Matt from theauthorinsideyou.com) helped get me on a local TV show.

                  I met Gary Leland, Paul Colligan, and Rob Walch at one of the fire New Media Expos. Rob was the person I called when I found myself out of a job and looking to work in the podcasting industry (I now work for Libsyn).

                  I met Ken Blanchard at an event and I haven't stopped laughing yet.

                  I met Jared Easley and Dan Franks at the New Media Show. Later they would start Podcast Movement and I've been blessed to say I've spoken at every single one in one capacity or another.

                  I met Eri kK Johnson and came up with the idea of adding him to the Podcast Review show at an event.

                  I met Mike Russel of Music Radio Creative at the New Media Show

                  I met Glenn The Geek At Podcast Movement. Glen got me involved with Chris Krimitsos and I was able to speak at Podfest.us That lead to me helping with the Messengers Podcast about their documentary. That lead to me being the closing keynote at podfest.us this year. One person, one contact.

                  Last year I met a whole bunch of people at DC Podfest including Matthew from Podtopod.com.

                  Most of those I paid for (events post-2016 I typically can expense out).

                  When I was a musician, I once drove four hours after getting off work at 8 PM to drive to Cincinnati and hangout with a bunch of indie musicians for three hours before turning around and driving home (I was probably 20). One of the relationships I start at that meeting was a guy who went to another event and learned about podcasting.

                  Whooshkaa Free Media Hosting

                  For those who are new to me reviewing media hosting, I have some criteria.

                  1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. 5. Give me support. 6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business 7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate

                  Whooshkaa is doing something that has been tried by audiometric.io and before them podango.com. This is where you give free hosting so you can see advertising on the podcast. Do Whooshkaa meet my criteria? No, but there is an asterisk.

                  They mess with your file (as they put code into the mp3 file to alert when to play an advertisement), so they keep most of your ID3 tags, but they ditch you image (so if someone downloads your show to their computer and plays it, the dreaded gray music note of death appears on a windows machine). They also change your file name. They don't change your file format, but by nature, they HAVE to change your file to stay in business.

                  Their support was quick and very helpful. Their stats are very similar to what everyone else provides (number of downloads, geographic, operating system, the technology used, etc). They do offer how long someone has listened. Unless they have cracked a new code, this is typically a wasted stat. The only way they can get that information is if you are using their player. To this, I point out that over 80% of podcasts are listened to on a mobile device (so this stat is kind of a "Corinthian leather" feature, sounds good, but in the end not that accurate).

                  They have a built in "Clammr" feature, called highlights. Clammr.com is the first service that allows you to make snippets of a show and share it on social media. With Clammr you can share a snippet of the show and when they click on the snippet they are taken to a place where they can listen to the rest of the episode. You can see how many people listened to your "Highlight." For me, I thought the design could be adjusted to make it go from easy to SUPER EASY to hear the rest of the podcast.

                  They do have a weird "Sign up for our newsletter" when you send people to an episode on Whooshkaa. The problem is that for the Whooshkaa email list (not yours).

                  Getting Paid

                  As the code in the mp3 file has the word "Triton" I'm guessing that they are using Triton for their advertisements. This means that podcasters can probably expect 1 to 2 cents per download. So if I had my Weekly Web Tools on their platform I might make $12 for the month (at 1200 downloads a month). That is if you are lucky enough to have advertising.

                  When I enquired about their CPA, they responded, "We don't have any information on the CPA for ads.  We generally only work with our larger podcasters/media companies for ad injection." When I wanted to know how many downloads you need to get a sponsor, a support person lets me know, "Generally more than 10k per month before we approach a podcaster for ads. Some of our current partners monetising include News Corp, Fox Sports, Sky News, Bauer and a few large Australian Sporting organizations.

                  When I pointed out to them that others had tried this model, they responded, "We support the podcast ecosystem with free hosting, while making ad revenue from the top 5%.  At the end of the day, the cost of hosting a podcast with small downloads is negligible.  We hope that some of the smaller podcasters turn out to be the next Ira Glass or Alex Blumberg :)

                  It's super easy to pick a spot where you want your advertising to be placed. By default, they want to add three advertisers (I chose one). I believe you will be contacted when you reach certain milestones for advertising as there is nothing in the dashboard (that I can find, and nothing in their help section) about getting paid (i.e paypal, direct deposit).

                  Conclusion

                  Call me weird, but building your podcast on a host that doesn't charge is risky business (again, podango, audiometric.io) but if you're in a boat and have zero budget (they do redirect feeds if you want to leave) then I would recommend Whooshkaa over another free service Pinecast if you're looking for a free service with all the trimmings. If you asked me which one will be in business in five years between Pinecast and Whooshkaa, I would put my money on Pinecast as their free service motivates you to upgrade to their paid service. With Whooshkaa they are hoping that people with 10,000 downloads per episode take their advertising, and don't leave for another host. I notice in their terms of service it states, "If you are a Commercial User/Channel Partner, this may be altered by any specific agreements we hold with you."

                  Podcast Rewind

                  Podcraft on New and Noteworthy

                  Podcaster's Roundtable on Finding Your Audience

                  Start Your Podcast Today

                  Step by Step Tutorials

                  Twice a month Live Coaching

                  Private Facebook Group

                  Priority Email Support

                  JOIN TODAY

                  ]]>9a1862676ba10750d402f7b6de1bfd76Mon, 05 Jun 2017 04:00:00 -040053:30falsefull569569Why are You Podcasting? The Other F-WordI asked the question:

                  Are you podcasting? If so where and why?

                  If you quit podcasting, why?

                  If you haven't started yet, why?

                  Matt from the Author Inside You

                  Sleep Whispers Podcast

                  Simple Money Solutions

                  Steve Stewart Podcast Editor 

                  Jeff had a blog that didn't get traction (for every 2000 blogs there is ONE podcast), he wants his show to be perfect (if you miss perfect you land on really good), is it viable to spend more money (we spend money on bowling, golfing), and what about Web Hosting? I like Site Ground and Cooler Websites. For media hosting use Libsyn and use the coupon sopfree to get a free month

                  Jenny from Studio Chaotic

                  Derek From Life after Sight Loss

                  Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief

                  David from the Magic and Steele (he's the guy taking all the missing E's)

                  Chris from Dad Spotlight

                  Gabe from Guys and Food

                  Brad from Cinema Guys

                  Sean Slept in Government Class

                  Hilda From Wise Traditions 

                  Cheri From Creation Science for Kids

                  Jonathan from Trivial Warfare

                  Bill from the Chameleon Breeder

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  What do you get at the School of Podcasting?

                  Step by step tutorials to guide yo through ever aspect of planning, launching and growing your podcast

                  Priority email support

                  Access to the School of Podcasting Private Facebook Group

                  a 30-Day Money-Back Guarantee

                  Just go to Schoolofpodcasting.com/start and sign up today 

                  ]]>I asked the question:

                  Are you podcasting? If so where and why?

                  If you quit podcasting, why?

                  If you haven't started yet, why?

                  Matt from the Author Inside You

                  Sleep Whispers Podcast

                  Simple Money Solutions

                  Steve Stewart Podcast Editor 

                  Jeff had a blog that didn't get traction (for every 2000 blogs there is ONE podcast), he wants his show to be perfect (if you miss perfect you land on really good), is it viable to spend more money (we spend money on bowling, golfing), and what about Web Hosting? I like Site Ground and Cooler Websites. For media hosting use Libsyn and use the coupon sopfree to get a free month

                  Jenny from Studio Chaotic

                  Derek From Life after Sight Loss

                  Darwyn from Dealing with My Grief

                  David from the Magic and Steele (he's the guy taking all the missing E's)

                  Chris from Dad Spotlight

                  Gabe from Guys and Food

                  Brad from Cinema Guys

                  Sean Slept in Government Class

                  Hilda From Wise Traditions 

                  Cheri From Creation Science for Kids

                  Jonathan from Trivial Warfare

                  Bill from the Chameleon Breeder

                  Ready to Start a Podcast?

                  What do you get at the School of Podcasting?

                  Step by step tutorials to guide yo through ever aspect of planning, launching and growing your podcast

                  Priority email support

                  Access to the School of Podcasting Private Facebook Group

                  a 30-Day Money-Back Guarantee

                  Just go to Schoolofpodcasting.com/start and sign up today 

                  ]]>7542c1fec610f56fc3330c9862358211Mon, 29 May 2017 04:30:55 -040051:52falsefull568568Great Podcasting Begins with Listening to Your Audience -Jonathan Oakes Interview888-56-33228
                  Podcasting Microphone Shootout

                  Microphone 1 - Audio Technica ATR2100 $59 (Here is Bundle with Boom arm) Microphone 2 - Audio Technica ATR2005 $79 Microphone 3 - Samson Q2U $54 (with headphones) Microphone 4 - Knox Dynamic USB Microphone $39 (here is a bundle with boom arm) Microphone 5 - Audi Technica 3035 $179 Microphone 6 - Heil Pr40 $327

                  Engage, Listen, and Grow Your Audience with Jonathan Oakes

                  Jonathan Oakes has been producing the Trivial Warfare for two years he has had some great adventures with his audience including participating in some really big trivia contests. Jonathan has always had a love for trivia. He participated in those TV shows where high school teams go against each other. He has taken on entries bars of people (AND WON). Jonathan's audience loves to learn, and love the ability to show their memory skills. You can find his show at www.trivialwarfare.com Today in episode 567 we hear:

                  How Jonathan worked with his co-hosts to set expectations when it comes to dividing any money.

                  He brought on co-hosts that brought in different viewpoints

                  He listened to what his audience wanted (to be on the show) and found a way so that both the show and the listener benefit.

                  He has incorporated giveaways into his Patreon to increase patron in the higher support tiers

                  He uses a Facebook Group to gather feedback on ideas to

                  Check out Jonathan's Show at www.trivialwarfare.com and check out his Patreon Account at https://www.patreon.com/TWA

                  Ready To Start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start 

                  30-Day Money-back Guarantee

                  Access to all of our courses

                  Live group coaching sessions

                  Priority Email Support

                  Find out more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Next Week is the Audience Poll Episode

                  Are you podcasting? If so why?  Did you post and quit? If so why? Have you never launched a podcast but want to? What's stopping you? 

                  Call 888-563-3228 or use any of the contact options at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                  answer the question by 5/26/17 (be sure to mention your show if you have one)

                   

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Jonathan's Appearance on "Harry's Show" Podcast Junkies

                  Jessica Kupferman's JKM Agency helps podcasters get sponsors

                  Podcasting 101

                  ]]>888-56-33228
                  Podcasting Microphone Shootout

                  Microphone 1 - Audio Technica ATR2100 $59 (Here is Bundle with Boom arm) Microphone 2 - Audio Technica ATR2005 $79 Microphone 3 - Samson Q2U $54 (with headphones) Microphone 4 - Knox Dynamic USB Microphone $39 (here is a bundle with boom arm) Microphone 5 - Audi Technica 3035 $179 Microphone 6 - Heil Pr40 $327

                  Engage, Listen, and Grow Your Audience with Jonathan Oakes

                  Jonathan Oakes has been producing the Trivial Warfare for two years he has had some great adventures with his audience including participating in some really big trivia contests. Jonathan has always had a love for trivia. He participated in those TV shows where high school teams go against each other. He has taken on entries bars of people (AND WON). Jonathan's audience loves to learn, and love the ability to show their memory skills. You can find his show at www.trivialwarfare.com Today in episode 567 we hear:

                  How Jonathan worked with his co-hosts to set expectations when it comes to dividing any money.

                  He brought on co-hosts that brought in different viewpoints

                  He listened to what his audience wanted (to be on the show) and found a way so that both the show and the listener benefit.

                  He has incorporated giveaways into his Patreon to increase patron in the higher support tiers

                  He uses a Facebook Group to gather feedback on ideas to

                  Check out Jonathan's Show at www.trivialwarfare.com and check out his Patreon Account at https://www.patreon.com/TWA

                  Ready To Start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start 

                  30-Day Money-back Guarantee

                  Access to all of our courses

                  Live group coaching sessions

                  Priority Email Support

                  Find out more at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  Next Week is the Audience Poll Episode

                  Are you podcasting? If so why?  Did you post and quit? If so why? Have you never launched a podcast but want to? What's stopping you? 

                  Call 888-563-3228 or use any of the contact options at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                  answer the question by 5/26/17 (be sure to mention your show if you have one)

                   

                  Mentioned in This Show

                  Jonathan's Appearance on "Harry's Show" Podcast Junkies

                  Jessica Kupferman's JKM Agency helps podcasters get sponsors

                  Podcasting 101

                  ]]>9de15aa8a7f84ecffb9d189ae3f999c6Mon, 22 May 2017 03:29:43 -040057:45falsefull567567Stepping On Your Listeners ToesLee Silverstein is the man behind the Colon Cancer Podcast and the Color Cancer Network was able to get press passes to a very cool event in his area.
                  Cool Image Tools For Your Podcast

                  I've been working on rebuilding PodcastingResources.com and in the process finding that some resources are gone, and other have been updated. Also in the process of moving items, I've had podcaster inform me of new sources. Today I want to talk about some resources you might know and a few might not when it comes to creating graphics and images.

                  Canva.com

                  Canva.com was my favorite tool for a simple but powerful tool. It included photographs you could include for free, or in some cases $1. It has a set of tutorials to get you up to speed and you can create some great looking images for free (or next to fo free)

                  Pixlr.com

                  Pixlr.com is another graphic program in the cloud. It doesn't have access to photos and such, but it can edit the photos you have, and it's a great tool if you need to resize an image, especially if your artwork for Apple Podcasts is the right dimensions, but the file size is too big as you can have pixlr.com compress it.

                  Vectr.com

                  Vectr.com is a new program to me, and from I've seen is the most powerful graphics program that is 100% free. It works on any platform, and it also has a cloud version. As it is super powerful there is a bit of a learning curve, but if you took the time to go through the tutorials (and they have quite a few) you could make some great looking graphics.

                  Adobe Spark

                  Adobe Spark is my new favorite tool. It has one drawback that I will hit on in a minute. You simply click on what you are trying to make (twitter, facebook, Instagram, etc) and pick a design, choose some colors, spin a wheel to scroll through some fonts, and share your image. So what is the one drawback? Most of these other tools allow you specify custom sizes, but from what I've seen there is no way to specify a file size. So what I do is if I need a square image, I go into adobe spark, create an Instagram image, and then resize it using Pixlr.com

                    New Twists on Old Tools

                  Ecamm Call Recorder is a great tool for Recording Skype, they recently launched Ecamm Live which is meant to record Facebook Live broadcasts that costs $29.95 and has some of the same features as wirecast (but that costs $500). This cost $29.95. Here is a tutorial.

                  A New Podcasting Microphone For Half the Price

                  I've been a huge fan of the Audio Technica ATR2100 microphone. It sounds great. It has both USB and XLR inputs (so it can plug directly into the computer or into a mixer) and it has a lifetime warranty. As I write this, that microphone is $67 the ATR2005 is a slightly more stylish version for $79

                  Well SP on the Better Podcasting Show found the Knox Cardoid USB Microphone for $40. This microphone looks and sounds very much like the 2100/2005 (it looks like a 2005 with the 2100 switch). There is even a bundle where you get the microphone and a boom arm for $69.

                  When You Step on A Listener's Toes

                  In my twelve years of podcasting, I may have had someone send a nastygram once or twice. This is why I was so surprised to get a nasty email calling me a piece of garbage, and another podcaster resorting to name calling and saying how I had no listeners and other false statements.

                  So what do you do?

                  1. Well, you could load up your anger and hurt and go out attitude a blazin'. From my experience, this typically does not end well.  or
                  2. Reach out to them and attempt to get an understanding of how your words offended them.
                  
                  

                  Realize this is NOT saying they were wrong for feeling hurt or offended. Everyone is allowed to feel what they feel. Many times when two people are involved in a conversation and someone gets offended chances are the person who did the offended didn't know what they said was so lethal.

                  My Offensive Words

                  On my Logical Weight Loss podcast, I was reading a story about how Americans are giving up on trying to lose weight and accepting being fat. In the article, it mentioned how American Doctors feel they can tell their patients about the dangers of being overweight as they might be accused of "Fat Shaming." This to me makes no sense and stated that if your doctor can't talk about your weight than who can say anything negative. I asked, "What is there no Slut Shaming, no Thief Shaming? What if you have relations with a goat? Is that OK?  To this, I got an email. The subject of the email was F*CK YOU. Here was the message:

                  In your latest podcast, your comment about "slut shaming" and comparing it to "thief shaming" was absolutely disgusting. FUCK YOU, go to hell you piece of garbage. To this I replied:

                  Thank you so much for your feedback. My point was if we don't allow anyone to say a negative thing about anything, isn't that the doorway to anarchy? I would love to have a dialogue about this with you. Can we get on skype? The response I received was simply:

                  GO TO HELL

                  To that, I replied, "Too bad. As a former teacher, I always feel there is room for improvement, and obviously, there is room for me to improve. Good luck with your weight loss journey."

                  If You Stay Open - You Leave the Door Open to Knowledge

                  I appeared on the Podcast Survival Guide podcast with Josh Liston (who is from Austalia) and he explained that while "Slut" is not a great word in America, it is a really, really bad word in Australia ( on the same level as C*NT in the US).

                  In both cases, my remarks on the Logical Weight Loss podcast were somewhat based on my frustration with political correctness (fat people are now horizontally challenged) and what I said was off the cuff, in a slightly over the top manner to make a point. One might guess that Alex's comments were in the same manner.

                  Conclusion

                  In the end with different countries, cultures, languages, etc we are going to inadvertently step on each other's toes. All you can do is apologize that someone feels a certain way, and pursue a dialogue to learn from the experience.

                  Podcast Rewind

                  I appeared on the Podcaster's Survival Guide Podcasters Roundtable Talking Podcast Consumptiontalking a bit more in depth about upsetting your listeners, and I also appeared on the in 2017

                  Ready to Start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting get access to all of your 16 courses on podcasting

                  Live group coaching

                  Private facebook group

                  Priority Email Support

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>Lee Silverstein is the man behind the Colon Cancer Podcast and the Color Cancer Network was able to get press passes to a very cool event in his area.
                  Cool Image Tools For Your Podcast

                  I've been working on rebuilding PodcastingResources.com and in the process finding that some resources are gone, and other have been updated. Also in the process of moving items, I've had podcaster inform me of new sources. Today I want to talk about some resources you might know and a few might not when it comes to creating graphics and images.

                  Canva.com

                  Canva.com was my favorite tool for a simple but powerful tool. It included photographs you could include for free, or in some cases $1. It has a set of tutorials to get you up to speed and you can create some great looking images for free (or next to fo free)

                  Pixlr.com

                  Pixlr.com is another graphic program in the cloud. It doesn't have access to photos and such, but it can edit the photos you have, and it's a great tool if you need to resize an image, especially if your artwork for Apple Podcasts is the right dimensions, but the file size is too big as you can have pixlr.com compress it.

                  Vectr.com

                  Vectr.com is a new program to me, and from I've seen is the most powerful graphics program that is 100% free. It works on any platform, and it also has a cloud version. As it is super powerful there is a bit of a learning curve, but if you took the time to go through the tutorials (and they have quite a few) you could make some great looking graphics.

                  Adobe Spark

                  Adobe Spark is my new favorite tool. It has one drawback that I will hit on in a minute. You simply click on what you are trying to make (twitter, facebook, Instagram, etc) and pick a design, choose some colors, spin a wheel to scroll through some fonts, and share your image. So what is the one drawback? Most of these other tools allow you specify custom sizes, but from what I've seen there is no way to specify a file size. So what I do is if I need a square image, I go into adobe spark, create an Instagram image, and then resize it using Pixlr.com

                    New Twists on Old Tools

                  Ecamm Call Recorder is a great tool for Recording Skype, they recently launched Ecamm Live which is meant to record Facebook Live broadcasts that costs $29.95 and has some of the same features as wirecast (but that costs $500). This cost $29.95. Here is a tutorial.

                  A New Podcasting Microphone For Half the Price

                  I've been a huge fan of the Audio Technica ATR2100 microphone. It sounds great. It has both USB and XLR inputs (so it can plug directly into the computer or into a mixer) and it has a lifetime warranty. As I write this, that microphone is $67 the ATR2005 is a slightly more stylish version for $79

                  Well SP on the Better Podcasting Show found the Knox Cardoid USB Microphone for $40. This microphone looks and sounds very much like the 2100/2005 (it looks like a 2005 with the 2100 switch). There is even a bundle where you get the microphone and a boom arm for $69.

                  When You Step on A Listener's Toes

                  In my twelve years of podcasting, I may have had someone send a nastygram once or twice. This is why I was so surprised to get a nasty email calling me a piece of garbage, and another podcaster resorting to name calling and saying how I had no listeners and other false statements.

                  So what do you do?

                  1. Well, you could load up your anger and hurt and go out attitude a blazin'. From my experience, this typically does not end well.  or
                  2. Reach out to them and attempt to get an understanding of how your words offended them.
                  
                  

                  Realize this is NOT saying they were wrong for feeling hurt or offended. Everyone is allowed to feel what they feel. Many times when two people are involved in a conversation and someone gets offended chances are the person who did the offended didn't know what they said was so lethal.

                  My Offensive Words

                  On my Logical Weight Loss podcast, I was reading a story about how Americans are giving up on trying to lose weight and accepting being fat. In the article, it mentioned how American Doctors feel they can tell their patients about the dangers of being overweight as they might be accused of "Fat Shaming." This to me makes no sense and stated that if your doctor can't talk about your weight than who can say anything negative. I asked, "What is there no Slut Shaming, no Thief Shaming? What if you have relations with a goat? Is that OK?  To this, I got an email. The subject of the email was F*CK YOU. Here was the message:

                  In your latest podcast, your comment about "slut shaming" and comparing it to "thief shaming" was absolutely disgusting. FUCK YOU, go to hell you piece of garbage. To this I replied:

                  Thank you so much for your feedback. My point was if we don't allow anyone to say a negative thing about anything, isn't that the doorway to anarchy? I would love to have a dialogue about this with you. Can we get on skype? The response I received was simply:

                  GO TO HELL

                  To that, I replied, "Too bad. As a former teacher, I always feel there is room for improvement, and obviously, there is room for me to improve. Good luck with your weight loss journey."

                  If You Stay Open - You Leave the Door Open to Knowledge

                  I appeared on the Podcast Survival Guide podcast with Josh Liston (who is from Austalia) and he explained that while "Slut" is not a great word in America, it is a really, really bad word in Australia ( on the same level as C*NT in the US).

                  In both cases, my remarks on the Logical Weight Loss podcast were somewhat based on my frustration with political correctness (fat people are now horizontally challenged) and what I said was off the cuff, in a slightly over the top manner to make a point. One might guess that Alex's comments were in the same manner.

                  Conclusion

                  In the end with different countries, cultures, languages, etc we are going to inadvertently step on each other's toes. All you can do is apologize that someone feels a certain way, and pursue a dialogue to learn from the experience.

                  Podcast Rewind

                  I appeared on the Podcaster's Survival Guide Podcasters Roundtable Talking Podcast Consumptiontalking a bit more in depth about upsetting your listeners, and I also appeared on the in 2017

                  Ready to Start Podcasting?

                  Join the School of Podcasting get access to all of your 16 courses on podcasting

                  Live group coaching

                  Private facebook group

                  Priority Email Support

                  Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                  ]]>757a7ec5bc1b61dcc8b58354d0f6a0cfMon, 15 May 2017 11:30:10 -040040:14falsefull566566Growing Valuable Podcast Content With a Facebook GroupI Just Launched My Podcast, How Many Downloads Should I Have?

                  This question has no "Set" answer. It depends on a couple of things:

                  1. How much value do your episodes bring to your audience? (is it any good)
                  2. How much promotion do you do?
                  3. What is your niche (a podcast like this - about podcasting - will never have 5000 downloads)
                  
                  

                  Right no 50% of podcasts get less than 200 downloads per episode after 30 days (and 50% get more) with the average being around 2000 (listen to The Feed Podcast for updated stats)

                  Think of Your Podcast Like A Train

                  A steam locomotive has an engine. The engine has to go to where the other boxcars are an connect. So do you. You need to go to where your audience is, and connect. A train announces where it is via the whistle, you need to promote your show to let people know you exist.

                  A train starts off slow, very slow, and build momentum over TIME. So they are slow to start, but once started, hard to stop.

                  My Dad drove a truck, and once had a wreck where the momentum of a couple of tons on his trailer went off the road (he blew a tire) and he was knocking over giant tree's like they were toothpicks, so momentum can do great things. However, it takes time. Today we have Katie Krimitsos on the show, and he is doing great with her show that she has been producing three years. 

                  So when you start your podcast, the more you focus on your audience (not the tech, not the stats on an hourly basis) you will build up momentum in your show.

                  Katie Krimistsos on Building a Community With a Facebook Group

                  Katie has been running the Tampa Bay Business Owners group for five years. Together with her husband Chris Krimitsos, they help business owners grow their businesses and connect with the right people. Katie has been podcasting for three years at http://bizwomenrock.com

                  In today's interview, we learn the following with Katie:

                  How to avoid the common mistakes of creating a Facebook Group

                  The Different types of groups and what each type offers.

                  How she makes her Facebook group feel special

                  How she maintains control of her group and keeps them engaged.

                  Why she had a successful relationship with a sponsor, and quit using them.

                  How she grew her coaching business with a strategy that anyone can use.

                  How her podcast fuels her Facebook Group, the Facebook group fuels the podcast, and they both fuel her coaching.

                  Why she almost quit, and what stopped her from walking away from podcasting.

                  Check out Katie's tools for growing your community with a Facebook group, taking that group on a retreat, as well as her private coaching to help you grow your business by going to www.bizwomenrock.com and check out her podcast on iTunes (as well as on her site)

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Banner Poll - Are you Interested in a Banner Exchange for Podcasters?

                  Ready to Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting

                  Podcast Movement - Use the Coupon Code sop10 to save 10%

                  ]]>I Just Launched My Podcast, How Many Downloads Should I Have?

                  This question has no "Set" answer. It depends on a couple of things:

                  1. How much value do your episodes bring to your audience? (is it any good)
                  2. How much promotion do you do?
                  3. What is your niche (a podcast like this - about podcasting - will never have 5000 downloads)
                  
                  

                  Right no 50% of podcasts get less than 200 downloads per episode after 30 days (and 50% get more) with the average being around 2000 (listen to The Feed Podcast for updated stats)

                  Think of Your Podcast Like A Train

                  A steam locomotive has an engine. The engine has to go to where the other boxcars are an connect. So do you. You need to go to where your audience is, and connect. A train announces where it is via the whistle, you need to promote your show to let people know you exist.

                  A train starts off slow, very slow, and build momentum over TIME. So they are slow to start, but once started, hard to stop.

                  My Dad drove a truck, and once had a wreck where the momentum of a couple of tons on his trailer went off the road (he blew a tire) and he was knocking over giant tree's like they were toothpicks, so momentum can do great things. However, it takes time. Today we have Katie Krimitsos on the show, and he is doing great with her show that she has been producing three years. 

                  So when you start your podcast, the more you focus on your audience (not the tech, not the stats on an hourly basis) you will build up momentum in your show.

                  Katie Krimistsos on Building a Community With a Facebook Group

                  Katie has been running the Tampa Bay Business Owners group for five years. Together with her husband Chris Krimitsos, they help business owners grow their businesses and connect with the right people. Katie has been podcasting for three years at http://bizwomenrock.com

                  In today's interview, we learn the following with Katie:

                  How to avoid the common mistakes of creating a Facebook Group

                  The Different types of groups and what each type offers.

                  How she makes her Facebook group feel special

                  How she maintains control of her group and keeps them engaged.

                  Why she had a successful relationship with a sponsor, and quit using them.

                  How she grew her coaching business with a strategy that anyone can use.

                  How her podcast fuels her Facebook Group, the Facebook group fuels the podcast, and they both fuel her coaching.

                  Why she almost quit, and what stopped her from walking away from podcasting.

                  Check out Katie's tools for growing your community with a Facebook group, taking that group on a retreat, as well as her private coaching to help you grow your business by going to www.bizwomenrock.com and check out her podcast on iTunes (as well as on her site)

                  Mentioned in this Show

                  Banner Poll - Are you Interested in a Banner Exchange for Podcasters?

                  Ready to Start Podcasting? Join the School of Podcasting

                  Podcast Movement - Use the Coupon Code sop10 to save 10%

                  ]]>fff7be95af821b696aed48d2bd894307Mon, 08 May 2017 04:36:47 -040001:00:02falsefull565565Best Podcasting Practices - Per Bridge RatingsKatie is the host of the Biz Women Rock show, and when I asked her how she would finish the "Becuase of my podcast ____" she answered, "Everything" She feels her business, her consulting, courses, and coaching are all based on the relationships she has fostered through her podcast.
                  Bridge Ratings Podcast Report is a Bit Hit or Miss

                  Bridge Ratings continues its coverage of the podcasting space with this latest update which provides never before insight and best practices learned from a three-month study conducted between January 23, 2017 and April 10, 2017.

                  A panel of 2000 persons ages 13 and older were contacted by random digit dialing phone method to both landlines (45%)  and mobile phones (55%) in the continental U.S. Phone interviews, on-line questionnaires, and daily diaries were utilized to gauge the consumption behavior of current podcast listeners and potential listeners. The margin of Error for this study is +/- 2.2%.

                  Here are some items I wanted to address

                  Trends in time-spent-listening shown in the following chart reflect a significant reduction in the average time spent per listening session falling by a third between August 2015 and April 2017.  "Listening Session" is defined as the portion of each podcast listened to during individual sessions. 56% of our panelists listened to podcasts in multiple sessions.

                  When they mentioned how people find podcasts, their answer was

                  What are the most popular methods of discovering podcasts of interest?

                  1. Social Media 2. Search 3. Word of Mouth 4. Other Podcasts 5. Streaming Channels 6. Radio Hosts

                  In their conclusion they stated, "“For broadcasters seeking to increase listenership to podcasts by their talent, a significant increase in promotion - both on-air and through social media - would be the primary strategy.”" 

                  In their Best Practices Section, they listed the following

                  1. Producers of podcasts should have a clear idea of the prospect or audience - the target market. Knowing who is the target will help producers stay focused on the topics covered. Audience knowledge lays the foundation for all of the other items on this list.

                  To this I say AMEN. I'm doing a show right now as a test called "Podcast Rodeo Show" where I pick random podcasts and give my first impressions.

                  2. Be organized and know where the podcast is going. Be considerate of your audience's time and don't ramble. Get to the point. The average time spent with podcasts is 22 minutes with listeners who commit beyond the first five minutes. Podcast abandonment continues to plague non-focused hosts with no clear understanding of how to capture their listeners' attention. The “session” average of 22 minutes also reflects partial podcast consumption, i.e. podcasts of longer length are often listened to in 2 or more “sessions”.  

                  This is the point that I want to make sure people don't get wrong. THIS DOES NOT MEAN YOUR PODCAST NEEDS TO BE 22 MINUTES. Libsyn.com (a podcast media hosting company) reports that 84% of the podcasts with more than 100,000 downloads per episode are longer than 51 minutes.

                  Listening to a podcast “in its entirety” often means listening to it in multiple sessions.

                  No Kidding. Really? In a world where both parents are working, taking kids to school, soccer practice before going to their second job, you mean they don't have multiple unlimited hours to sit and listen to a show uninterrupted?

                  I've quoted her before Valerie Geller in her book Beyond Powerful Radio has said, "There is no such thing as too long, only too boring." I recently listened to episode 301 from Daniel J Lewis. It was 3.5 hours long. In spans of 10-20 minutes, I listened to that show over two days. Why? Because I find it interesting.

                  3. Edit. Edit. Edit. It is easy to start a podcast recording only to find the host and/or guests have rambled for 45 minutes or an hour. Before posting podcasts on-line, producers would be best served to listen to the entire recording with a critical ear and edit out content that doesn't serve the "vision" of informative, engaging and entertaining content that listeners can't get from other media.

                  Again, I totally agree here. Mount Rushmore was just a mountain, and then Doane Robinson decided to have some editing done to it.

                  4. Establish a publishing schedule. Bridge Ratings' analysis found that weekly podcasts are most popular followed by twice per week and daily. Tuesday was the best day to post podcasts followed by Friday. based on our panel's responses.

                  I don't think it matters what day as long as your consistent. A podcast about entertaining might make more sense to put out on Thursday or Friday as people prepare for the weekend. When it comes to picking a schedule, keep the following in mind:

                  Podcasts app for iOS pauses downloads of episodes from podcasts which the user hasn't listened to. Episode auto-downloading stops 15 days after a user last views that podcast or plays an episode on any device the user is signed into and after 5 new episodes are unplayed on a single device.

                  After 45 days of a user not viewing or playing episodes from a podcast on any device and after 5 new episodes are unplayed on any device, Podcasts app for iOS and tvOS stops updating the podcast metadata altogether.

                  iTunes desktop also has protections against unwanted downloads. After 15 days and 5 unplayed new episodes, new podcast episodes stop auto-downloading. After 45 days, the podcast metadata stops updating. (source)

                  so before you go launching a daily show....

                  5. Tagging metadata. Search is the second most-popular way consumers find podcasts of interest. Producers should be cognizant of search engine requirements including software that consumers use and directories. Metadata is that additional information embedded in an object which provides information to software platforms about that object. Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is a function of these tags and allows a podcast to be found. The more refined and focused the tagging data, the higher the chance of the podcast appearing on the first page of search results.

                  While it makes sense to have keywords in your websites, the best advice I can give is to use the title of your podcast and the title of your episodes to the maximum. Use words that peak people's curiosity or inspires them to click. If you're going to put any kind of episode numbers in your titles, put them at the end (as the information at the beginning of a title cut off in some apps. Here again, don't go crazy and remember that people create word of mouth, and when you ignore the people, you lose a key source when you right strictly for robots.

                  6. For broadcasters seeking to increase listenership to podcasts hosted by their talent, a significant increase in promotion - both on air and through social media - would be the primary strategy.

                  Yes, you need to tell people about our podcast. My formulas for podcast downloads is TOTAL VALUE IN EPISODE multiple by INTELLIGENT PROMOTION equals TOTAL NUMBER OF PODCAST DOWNLOADS. Even in their own study, they state, "Awareness through word-of-mouth from friends and family, increasing publicity of podcasting in general and high-interest topics are motivating more people to try podcasting."

                  The article quotes an article from Mumbrella, saying,"The understanding of podcasting in media agencies trails that of streaming, the research revealed. On a scale of 1-to-10, media agencies ranked their understanding of podcast advertising at 5.1 on average and 7.2 for streaming digital audio, with just 6% classifying themselves as having little understanding." It's this kind of information that leads people to say "We need to get podcasters abandon downloads and start streaming." This would be liked saying, "We need to get people to quit emailing people and go back to letter writing because people are confused by email." We need to educate people on podcasting.  Grab your neighbors phone as ask them what their hobbies are. Go the Apple Podcasts app (on an iPhone) and type that in and click search. Then click play. It doesn't take long.

                  With the exception of Spreaker (which streams via Shoutcast on their live technology), a podcast that is played on a website or app or tablet that has not been previously downloaded is a progressive download. It looks and smells like a stream, but it's a file that is being downloaded in chunks and is going to show up as one download in your stats.

                  In their final thoughts, they state:

                  • Podcasting continues to have great potential to drive a broader trend toward on-demand audio that is reshaping the $75B+ global audio market
                  • Podcasting still has an issue with discovery and needs to become more social in order to drive audience growth in addition to simplified search mechanisms.
                  
                  

                  I don't think the problem is finding a podcast on a topic, the problem is finding a GOOD podcast on your favorite subject.

                  • 75% of podcasters are concerned with generating new listeners and]]>Katie is the host of the Biz Women Rock show, and when I asked her how she would finish the "Becuase of my podcast ____" she answered, "Everything" She feels her business, her consulting, courses, and coaching are all based on the relationships she has fostered through her podcast.
                    Bridge Ratings Podcast Report is a Bit Hit or Miss

                    Bridge Ratings continues its coverage of the podcasting space with this latest update which provides never before insight and best practices learned from a three-month study conducted between January 23, 2017 and April 10, 2017.

                    A panel of 2000 persons ages 13 and older were contacted by random digit dialing phone method to both landlines (45%)  and mobile phones (55%) in the continental U.S. Phone interviews, on-line questionnaires, and daily diaries were utilized to gauge the consumption behavior of current podcast listeners and potential listeners. The margin of Error for this study is +/- 2.2%.

                    Here are some items I wanted to address

                    Trends in time-spent-listening shown in the following chart reflect a significant reduction in the average time spent per listening session falling by a third between August 2015 and April 2017.  "Listening Session" is defined as the portion of each podcast listened to during individual sessions. 56% of our panelists listened to podcasts in multiple sessions.

                    When they mentioned how people find podcasts, their answer was

                    What are the most popular methods of discovering podcasts of interest?

                    1. Social Media 2. Search 3. Word of Mouth 4. Other Podcasts 5. Streaming Channels 6. Radio Hosts

                    In their conclusion they stated, "“For broadcasters seeking to increase listenership to podcasts by their talent, a significant increase in promotion - both on-air and through social media - would be the primary strategy.”" 

                    In their Best Practices Section, they listed the following

                    1. Producers of podcasts should have a clear idea of the prospect or audience - the target market. Knowing who is the target will help producers stay focused on the topics covered. Audience knowledge lays the foundation for all of the other items on this list.

                    To this I say AMEN. I'm doing a show right now as a test called "Podcast Rodeo Show" where I pick random podcasts and give my first impressions.

                    2. Be organized and know where the podcast is going. Be considerate of your audience's time and don't ramble. Get to the point. The average time spent with podcasts is 22 minutes with listeners who commit beyond the first five minutes. Podcast abandonment continues to plague non-focused hosts with no clear understanding of how to capture their listeners' attention. The “session” average of 22 minutes also reflects partial podcast consumption, i.e. podcasts of longer length are often listened to in 2 or more “sessions”.  

                    This is the point that I want to make sure people don't get wrong. THIS DOES NOT MEAN YOUR PODCAST NEEDS TO BE 22 MINUTES. Libsyn.com (a podcast media hosting company) reports that 84% of the podcasts with more than 100,000 downloads per episode are longer than 51 minutes.

                    Listening to a podcast “in its entirety” often means listening to it in multiple sessions.

                    No Kidding. Really? In a world where both parents are working, taking kids to school, soccer practice before going to their second job, you mean they don't have multiple unlimited hours to sit and listen to a show uninterrupted?

                    I've quoted her before Valerie Geller in her book Beyond Powerful Radio has said, "There is no such thing as too long, only too boring." I recently listened to episode 301 from Daniel J Lewis. It was 3.5 hours long. In spans of 10-20 minutes, I listened to that show over two days. Why? Because I find it interesting.

                    3. Edit. Edit. Edit. It is easy to start a podcast recording only to find the host and/or guests have rambled for 45 minutes or an hour. Before posting podcasts on-line, producers would be best served to listen to the entire recording with a critical ear and edit out content that doesn't serve the "vision" of informative, engaging and entertaining content that listeners can't get from other media.

                    Again, I totally agree here. Mount Rushmore was just a mountain, and then Doane Robinson decided to have some editing done to it.

                    4. Establish a publishing schedule. Bridge Ratings' analysis found that weekly podcasts are most popular followed by twice per week and daily. Tuesday was the best day to post podcasts followed by Friday. based on our panel's responses.

                    I don't think it matters what day as long as your consistent. A podcast about entertaining might make more sense to put out on Thursday or Friday as people prepare for the weekend. When it comes to picking a schedule, keep the following in mind:

                    Podcasts app for iOS pauses downloads of episodes from podcasts which the user hasn't listened to. Episode auto-downloading stops 15 days after a user last views that podcast or plays an episode on any device the user is signed into and after 5 new episodes are unplayed on a single device.

                    After 45 days of a user not viewing or playing episodes from a podcast on any device and after 5 new episodes are unplayed on any device, Podcasts app for iOS and tvOS stops updating the podcast metadata altogether.

                    iTunes desktop also has protections against unwanted downloads. After 15 days and 5 unplayed new episodes, new podcast episodes stop auto-downloading. After 45 days, the podcast metadata stops updating. (source)

                    so before you go launching a daily show....

                    5. Tagging metadata. Search is the second most-popular way consumers find podcasts of interest. Producers should be cognizant of search engine requirements including software that consumers use and directories. Metadata is that additional information embedded in an object which provides information to software platforms about that object. Search Engine Optimization (SEO) is a function of these tags and allows a podcast to be found. The more refined and focused the tagging data, the higher the chance of the podcast appearing on the first page of search results.

                    While it makes sense to have keywords in your websites, the best advice I can give is to use the title of your podcast and the title of your episodes to the maximum. Use words that peak people's curiosity or inspires them to click. If you're going to put any kind of episode numbers in your titles, put them at the end (as the information at the beginning of a title cut off in some apps. Here again, don't go crazy and remember that people create word of mouth, and when you ignore the people, you lose a key source when you right strictly for robots.

                    6. For broadcasters seeking to increase listenership to podcasts hosted by their talent, a significant increase in promotion - both on air and through social media - would be the primary strategy.

                    Yes, you need to tell people about our podcast. My formulas for podcast downloads is TOTAL VALUE IN EPISODE multiple by INTELLIGENT PROMOTION equals TOTAL NUMBER OF PODCAST DOWNLOADS. Even in their own study, they state, "Awareness through word-of-mouth from friends and family, increasing publicity of podcasting in general and high-interest topics are motivating more people to try podcasting."

                    The article quotes an article from Mumbrella, saying,"The understanding of podcasting in media agencies trails that of streaming, the research revealed. On a scale of 1-to-10, media agencies ranked their understanding of podcast advertising at 5.1 on average and 7.2 for streaming digital audio, with just 6% classifying themselves as having little understanding." It's this kind of information that leads people to say "We need to get podcasters abandon downloads and start streaming." This would be liked saying, "We need to get people to quit emailing people and go back to letter writing because people are confused by email." We need to educate people on podcasting.  Grab your neighbors phone as ask them what their hobbies are. Go the Apple Podcasts app (on an iPhone) and type that in and click search. Then click play. It doesn't take long.

                    With the exception of Spreaker (which streams via Shoutcast on their live technology), a podcast that is played on a website or app or tablet that has not been previously downloaded is a progressive download. It looks and smells like a stream, but it's a file that is being downloaded in chunks and is going to show up as one download in your stats.

                    In their final thoughts, they state:

                    • Podcasting continues to have great potential to drive a broader trend toward on-demand audio that is reshaping the $75B+ global audio market
                    • Podcasting still has an issue with discovery and needs to become more social in order to drive audience growth in addition to simplified search mechanisms.
                    
                    

                    I don't think the problem is finding a podcast on a topic, the problem is finding a GOOD podcast on your favorite subject.

                    • 75% of podcasters are concerned with generating new listeners and app presence, monetization (70% dissatisfied) and social media presence (58% dissatisfied.
                    
                    

                    Wait, are you saying podcasters want more listeners? This is truly the most insightful report I HAVE EVER READ. Really?

                    • Social media, search and word of mouth are the most popular channels for audience growth.
                    
                    

                    So make a podcast that inspires other people to talk about it.

                    • Barriers to faster growth: 1) "Finding Podcasts I'm interested in", 2) "Programs are too long or have uninteresting hosts".
                    
                    

                    Again, finding GOOD podcasts is a struggle, and the length of the podcast is not a problem. This is put forth by people who want to stick to a "Closer to radio" model and convince everyone to stream their show.

                    Who are Bridge Ratings?

                    They are located in Irvine, CA. They were founded in 2001 and is a media analysis corporation providing behavioral analysis of media consumers in the US, Canada, Mexico and Europe. Company clients include Emmis, Microsoft, Yahoo!, Amazon.com, CBS Radio, Cumulus Broadcasting and Clear Channel Communications as well as finance and media investment firms around the world.

                    Founded by broadcast executive Dave Van Dyke, Bridge Ratings had its roots as a radio ratings company positioned as an alternative to other services in medium and small markets. Bridge Ratings surveys were utilized as a bridge between the one or two annual surveys offered by other research companies.

                    The company transitioned to a media consumer analysis firm in 2003 when its study focusing on the impact of commercial interruptions on radio listeners revealed that stations lost as much as 25% of their listeners with every commercial beyond two in a row. This study became a template for future analyses of listener behavior.

                    Who is David Van Dyke?

                    Bridge Ratings Founder and President Dave Van Dyke’s extensive and varied experience in media has captured every facet of radio and Internet audience engagement.  In radio, he has worked in a diverse array of positions including programming, management, sales, on-air, marketing and research for CBS, Infinity, ABC, Nokia and Westinghouse.  Through his work with Bridge Ratings Dave is widely recognized for his ability to forecast and gauge media consumption across multiple platforms and to utilize field data to advise his clients. He is also known for his management of radio station rebuilding successes, taking underperforming radio properties and turning them into high cash-flowing corporate contributors.

                    Nobody Can Do A Show Like You

                    My Buddy Steve Stewart sent in a very cool piece of audio feedback that got me thinking.

                    1. He shares why he listens to this show, and he explains how everyone who does a show stamps their own style on it. Your show will be your show. 
                    2. I point out how we ALL face imposter syndrome. We feel we're "not worthy" or we are worried about being "big headed." 
                    3. Podcasting puts you into a place of leadership simply by creating a podcast. A leader should appear confident and accept their role. For me, I would downplay my role, and my jokes about "little old me" and didn't realize that this type of humor could be damaging my brand. People don't want to follow "little old whoever.."
                    4. Steve shares that he is now making a full time living doing podcast editing.
                    
                    Mentioned In This Episode 564

                    Randy Cantrell and the Grow Great Show

                    Bridge Ratings Report

                    Podcast Review Show (Get Your Podcast Reviewed)

                    Podcast Rodeo Show 

                    Libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                     

                     

                    ]]>110d062efd162887c38bd171fe87f915Mon, 01 May 2017 04:00:00 -040055:39falsefull564564Shaping Your Content for Maximum Impact - Niel J. GuilarteWelcome to episode 563 of the School of Podcasting

                    Have you ever had a problem with something, and then when you stated your problem out loud the answer came to you as you were saying it? You can use that exercise to help your podcast. I recently read about 80% of the book Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio by Jessica Abel. Jessica went DEEP INSIDE NPR and the creators of This American Life and took lots of notes and shared them. One strategy they use to shape a story is to say out loud, "I'm doing a story about X, and what is interesting about it is Y. They say it's important to do this out loud to a real person.

                    Then to shape your story you use this tool, Somebody does something because of ____(their motivation) but _____(a challenge). If you can't answer the but, then ask yourself, "What do I have?"

                    They have another exercise where their focus setting may be something like. "This happened _______, then this ____, then this ____, and you would #$%&! believe it but ____. And the reason that is interesting to every single person walking on the face of the earth is ______.

                    This is where I draw the line. Sure we want everyone to like our episode, but that is NOT going to happen. If you try to make a podcast that is interesting to every single person, you will go crazy. Keep in mind these people are telling stories, and stories are powerful, but in certain circumstances, they don't really fit.

                    For example, Many podcasters want to make money with their podcast (motivation) but only 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get big named sponsors. Then this guy start a podcast about horses, and you won't believe it but he got a sponsor when he had less than 100 downloads per episode. He added more and more shows and called it a network, and ignored the CPM model brought over by radio, and now he is making a full-time living with his podcast. The reason this is important is dynamic ad insertion is paying very low rates and uninformed podcasters may take those fees because they feel they can't get a sponsor without huge downloads.

                    If I'm interviewing technology, it may be a piece of technology that eliminates the challenge. Some podcasters have a hard time sharing promotional material with their guests, but podhero.io makes it easy.

                    Your intro Can Make or Break Your Podcast

                    This is from the Book Ted Talk by Chris Anderson

                    Zak Ebrahim did a TED Talk, and he originally was going to start his talk with this paragraph:

                    I was born in Pittsburgh Pennsylvania in 1983 to a loving American Mother and an Egyptian Father who tried their best to create a happy childhood for me. It wasn't until I was seven years old that our family dynamic started to change. My father exposed me to a side if Islam that few people (including the majority of Muslims) get to see but in fact when people take the time to interact with one another it doesn't take long to realize that for the most part, we all want the same things out of life

                    The folks at TED brainstormed and help him come up with this opening Paragraph:

                    On November 5th 1990 a man named El Sayyid Nosair walked into a hotel in Manhattan and assassinated Rabbi Meir Kahanethe leader of the Jewish Defense league. Nosair was found not guilty of the murder, but while serving time on lesser charges he and other men started planning attacks on a dozen New York City landmarks including tunnels, synagogues, and the united Nations Headquarters. Thankfully those plans were foiled by an FBI informant. Sadly the 1993 bombing of the World Trade Center was not. Nosair would eventually be convicted for his involvement in the plot. El Sayyid Nosair is my father.

                    The audience was riveted See video https://youtu.be/lyR-K2CZIHQ

                    Leave Out Stuff That You Don't Need

                    Here is an example from the TED Talks book byChris Anderson(also available on Audible)

                    Once, when I was eight years old, my father took me fishing. We were in a tiny boat, five miles from shore, when a massive storm blew in. Dad put a life jacket on me and whispered in my ear, "Do you trust me, son?" I nodded. He threw me overboard. [pause] I kid you not. Just tossed me over! I hit the water and bobbed up to the surface, gasping for breath. It was shockingly cold. The waves were terrifying. Monstrous. Then . . . Dad dived in after me. We watched in horror as our little boat flipped and sank. But he was holding me the whole time, telling me it was going to be OK. Fifteen minutes later, the Coast Guard helicopter arrived. It turned out that Dad knew the boat was damaged and was going to sink, and he had called them with our exact location. He guessed it was better to chuck me in the open sea than risk getting trapped when the boat flipped. And that is how I learned the true meaning of the word trust.

                    EXAMPLE 2: SAME STORY WITH TOO MUCH DETAIL AND NO EMOTION

                    I learned trust from my father when I was eight years old and we got caught in a storm while out fishing for mackerel. We failed to catch a single one before the storm hit. Dad knew the boat was going to sink, because it was one of those Saturn brand inflatable boats, which are usually pretty strong, but this one had been punctured once and Dad thought it might happen again. In any case, the storm was too big for an inflatable boat and it was already leaking. So he called the Coast Guard rescue service, who, back then, were available 24/7, unlike today. He told them our location, and then, to avoid the risk of getting trapped underwater, he put a life jacket on me and threw me overboard before jumping in himself. We then waited for the Coast Guard to come and, sure enough, 15 minutes later the helicopter showed up—I think it was a Sikorsky MH-60 Jayhawk— and we were fine.

                    The first version is a story of trust and emotion. The second version has tangents left and right and is filled with information that doesn't back up the main story. If we "X Y" this,  My Dad and I went fishing, but he threw me overboard. And this is interesting as we all need to learn how to trust people. The second version doesn't even bring up the key sentence for me, "Do you trust me son?"

                    In the book Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power author Ken Davis states, "To make it as clear and powerful as possible, it is necessary to know exactly what you want to accomplish and then keep only material that will contribute to the objective." He also states, If you aim at nothing, you will hit it every time. Another strategy is that if you just throw enough things at your audience, one of them is bound to have an impact.

                    Niel J. Guilarte Editor of The Messengers: a Podcast Documentary

                    Niel who is the editor the The Messengers: a Podcast Documentary as well as the host of All Things Post, and the owner of Wildstyle Media, and star of his YouTube Channel shares some of the non-traditional items he has shot video to get experience and talk about the steps of assembling your story.

                    1. Know who your audience is
                    2. Take inventory of what you have
                    3. Come up with the story, the message you want to share
                    4. Follow your gut
                    5. Don't be afraid to start over, or get a different set of ear/eyes
                    
                    

                    In the same way that you don't take your car to the dentist to get it fixed, Niel thinks business people should stop editing their show and pass that off to editors to help them tell their story. Niel uses Dropbox to swap files back and forth with his clients as well as Frame.io

                    One of the common mistakes that podcasters make that Niel has to edit out is letting their guest go on weird tangents in the interview that end up on the chopping floor.

                    Check out Niels awesome videos (his wedding videos are awesome) at www.wildstylemedia.net and his podcast All Things Post (about Post Production) at www.allthingspost.net

                    What is the Smallest Amount You Would Take From a Sponsor for One Episode?

                    If I could do this again I would. I was looking for a number like "16" not a range of an EPISODE (not a month) after 30 days. So look at an episode from 30 days ago and tell me how many downloads it has. Then when I asked what was the least amount, I'm not sure I was clear enough to say PER EPISODE. So I would call this survey a wash. I thank all 37 people who replied.

                    Are you interested in making money from your podcast?

                    89.2% Said Yes. 10.8% said no.

                    How Many Downloads Do You Get Per Episode After 30 days, and what is the smallest amount of money you would take from an Advertiser.

                    7 Respondents had 100 downloads or less, and they said they would take anywhere from $5-$500. The people close to 100 downloads per episode were looking for $25-35.

                    3 Respondents got between 101-200 downloads. Two were not]]>Welcome to episode 563 of the School of Podcasting

                    Have you ever had a problem with something, and then when you stated your problem out loud the answer came to you as you were saying it? You can use that exercise to help your podcast. I recently read about 80% of the book Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio by Jessica Abel. Jessica went DEEP INSIDE NPR and the creators of This American Life and took lots of notes and shared them. One strategy they use to shape a story is to say out loud, "I'm doing a story about X, and what is interesting about it is Y. They say it's important to do this out loud to a real person.

                    Then to shape your story you use this tool, Somebody does something because of ____(their motivation) but _____(a challenge). If you can't answer the but, then ask yourself, "What do I have?"

                    They have another exercise where their focus setting may be something like. "This happened _______, then this ____, then this ____, and you would #$%&! believe it but ____. And the reason that is interesting to every single person walking on the face of the earth is ______.

                    This is where I draw the line. Sure we want everyone to like our episode, but that is NOT going to happen. If you try to make a podcast that is interesting to every single person, you will go crazy. Keep in mind these people are telling stories, and stories are powerful, but in certain circumstances, they don't really fit.

                    For example, Many podcasters want to make money with their podcast (motivation) but only 10% of podcasters get enough downloads to get big named sponsors. Then this guy start a podcast about horses, and you won't believe it but he got a sponsor when he had less than 100 downloads per episode. He added more and more shows and called it a network, and ignored the CPM model brought over by radio, and now he is making a full-time living with his podcast. The reason this is important is dynamic ad insertion is paying very low rates and uninformed podcasters may take those fees because they feel they can't get a sponsor without huge downloads.

                    If I'm interviewing technology, it may be a piece of technology that eliminates the challenge. Some podcasters have a hard time sharing promotional material with their guests, but podhero.io makes it easy.

                    Your intro Can Make or Break Your Podcast

                    This is from the Book Ted Talk by Chris Anderson

                    Zak Ebrahim did a TED Talk, and he originally was going to start his talk with this paragraph:

                    I was born in Pittsburgh Pennsylvania in 1983 to a loving American Mother and an Egyptian Father who tried their best to create a happy childhood for me. It wasn't until I was seven years old that our family dynamic started to change. My father exposed me to a side if Islam that few people (including the majority of Muslims) get to see but in fact when people take the time to interact with one another it doesn't take long to realize that for the most part, we all want the same things out of life

                    The folks at TED brainstormed and help him come up with this opening Paragraph:

                    On November 5th 1990 a man named El Sayyid Nosair walked into a hotel in Manhattan and assassinated Rabbi Meir Kahanethe leader of the Jewish Defense league. Nosair was found not guilty of the murder, but while serving time on lesser charges he and other men started planning attacks on a dozen New York City landmarks including tunnels, synagogues, and the united Nations Headquarters. Thankfully those plans were foiled by an FBI informant. Sadly the 1993 bombing of the World Trade Center was not. Nosair would eventually be convicted for his involvement in the plot. El Sayyid Nosair is my father.

                    The audience was riveted See video https://youtu.be/lyR-K2CZIHQ

                    Leave Out Stuff That You Don't Need

                    Here is an example from the TED Talks book byChris Anderson(also available on Audible)

                    Once, when I was eight years old, my father took me fishing. We were in a tiny boat, five miles from shore, when a massive storm blew in. Dad put a life jacket on me and whispered in my ear, "Do you trust me, son?" I nodded. He threw me overboard. [pause] I kid you not. Just tossed me over! I hit the water and bobbed up to the surface, gasping for breath. It was shockingly cold. The waves were terrifying. Monstrous. Then . . . Dad dived in after me. We watched in horror as our little boat flipped and sank. But he was holding me the whole time, telling me it was going to be OK. Fifteen minutes later, the Coast Guard helicopter arrived. It turned out that Dad knew the boat was damaged and was going to sink, and he had called them with our exact location. He guessed it was better to chuck me in the open sea than risk getting trapped when the boat flipped. And that is how I learned the true meaning of the word trust.

                    EXAMPLE 2: SAME STORY WITH TOO MUCH DETAIL AND NO EMOTION

                    I learned trust from my father when I was eight years old and we got caught in a storm while out fishing for mackerel. We failed to catch a single one before the storm hit. Dad knew the boat was going to sink, because it was one of those Saturn brand inflatable boats, which are usually pretty strong, but this one had been punctured once and Dad thought it might happen again. In any case, the storm was too big for an inflatable boat and it was already leaking. So he called the Coast Guard rescue service, who, back then, were available 24/7, unlike today. He told them our location, and then, to avoid the risk of getting trapped underwater, he put a life jacket on me and threw me overboard before jumping in himself. We then waited for the Coast Guard to come and, sure enough, 15 minutes later the helicopter showed up—I think it was a Sikorsky MH-60 Jayhawk— and we were fine.

                    The first version is a story of trust and emotion. The second version has tangents left and right and is filled with information that doesn't back up the main story. If we "X Y" this,  My Dad and I went fishing, but he threw me overboard. And this is interesting as we all need to learn how to trust people. The second version doesn't even bring up the key sentence for me, "Do you trust me son?"

                    In the book Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power author Ken Davis states, "To make it as clear and powerful as possible, it is necessary to know exactly what you want to accomplish and then keep only material that will contribute to the objective." He also states, If you aim at nothing, you will hit it every time. Another strategy is that if you just throw enough things at your audience, one of them is bound to have an impact.

                    Niel J. Guilarte Editor of The Messengers: a Podcast Documentary

                    Niel who is the editor the The Messengers: a Podcast Documentary as well as the host of All Things Post, and the owner of Wildstyle Media, and star of his YouTube Channel shares some of the non-traditional items he has shot video to get experience and talk about the steps of assembling your story.

                    1. Know who your audience is
                    2. Take inventory of what you have
                    3. Come up with the story, the message you want to share
                    4. Follow your gut
                    5. Don't be afraid to start over, or get a different set of ear/eyes
                    
                    

                    In the same way that you don't take your car to the dentist to get it fixed, Niel thinks business people should stop editing their show and pass that off to editors to help them tell their story. Niel uses Dropbox to swap files back and forth with his clients as well as Frame.io

                    One of the common mistakes that podcasters make that Niel has to edit out is letting their guest go on weird tangents in the interview that end up on the chopping floor.

                    Check out Niels awesome videos (his wedding videos are awesome) at www.wildstylemedia.net and his podcast All Things Post (about Post Production) at www.allthingspost.net

                    What is the Smallest Amount You Would Take From a Sponsor for One Episode?

                    If I could do this again I would. I was looking for a number like "16" not a range of an EPISODE (not a month) after 30 days. So look at an episode from 30 days ago and tell me how many downloads it has. Then when I asked what was the least amount, I'm not sure I was clear enough to say PER EPISODE. So I would call this survey a wash. I thank all 37 people who replied.

                    Are you interested in making money from your podcast?

                    89.2% Said Yes. 10.8% said no.

                    How Many Downloads Do You Get Per Episode After 30 days, and what is the smallest amount of money you would take from an Advertiser.

                    7 Respondents had 100 downloads or less, and they said they would take anywhere from $5-$500. The people close to 100 downloads per episode were looking for $25-35.

                    3 Respondents got between 101-200 downloads. Two were not interested in making money, and the third wants at least $10.

                    3 Respondents had between 201-300 downloads and said they would take $5, $10.

                    1 Respondent had between 300-400 downloads said they were highly relevant and would take $500.

                    1 Respondent had between 401 -500 downloads said they would take $200

                    1 Respondent said they had 600 downloads per episode and would take a minimum of $10

                    1 Respondent said they had 800 downloads per episode and would take a minimum of $150

                    1 Respondent said they had 900 downloads per episode and would take a minimum of $50 for advertisers but on Patreon I will mention a fans business for $25

                    1 Respondent said they had 1000 downloads per episode and are getting (currently) $50

                    1 Respondent said they had 1000 downloads per episode and would take $225

                    1 Respondent said they had 1250 downloads per episode and would take $50

                    1 Respondent said they had 2000 downloads per episode and would take $50

                    1 Respondent said they had 2400 downloads per episode and would take $20

                    2 Respondents said they had 2500 downloads per episode and would take $25. The other is getting $100

                    1 Respondent said they had 3000 downloads per episode and would take $50

                    2 Respondent said they had 4000 downloads per episode and one is  getting $250, the other wants $300

                    1 Respondent said they had 4673 downloads per episode and will take $1 per second (30-second ad, $30)

                    People Who Said They Have Sponsor

                    1 Person had 50 downloads an episode and is getting $250 ( I would think this has to be a month or a typo) 1 Person had 1000 downloads an episode and is getting $50 ($50/cpm) 1 Person had 2500 downloads an episode and is getting $1o0 ($40/cpm) 1 Person had 4000 downloads an episode and is getting $250 ($62.5/cpm) 1 Person had 4763 downloads an episode and is getting $1/sec (one spot $30) ($6.29/cpm) 1 Person had 10000 downloads an episode and is getting $55  ($5.5/cpm) 1 Person had 50000 downloads an episode and is getting $125  ($2.5/cpm)

                    Next Month's Poll:

                    Have you ever started a podcast? (Yes or No) If no, what is holding you back?

                    Are you still producing that show? (Yes or No)

                    If Yes: What are the name of the show and the web address? Why do you podcast?

                    If No: What was the name of your show? Why did you walk away from podcasting?

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact. If you use email, please put 468 in the subject line.

                    Join the Podcasting Community at The School of Podcasting

                    Educate - Collaborate - Meet Your Fate

                    Tutorials, Live Coaching, Private FaceBook Group, Priority Email Support

                    30-Day Money-back Guarantee

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    Mentioned in This Episode

                    Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New Masters of Radio

                    TED Talks: The Official TED Guide to Public Speaking (available on Audible)

                    Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power

                    The Messengers Documentary DVD

                    www.wildstylemedia.net

                    www.allthingspost.net

                    Dropbox

                    Frame.io

                    Glenn the Geek Episode 1 of (Horse Radio Network)

                    Son of a Terrorist  TED Talk

                    Start Your Podcast at the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>360c22628898cdd7d8bae6050ab23443Mon, 24 Apr 2017 04:00:00 -040054:45falsefull563563He Changed His Format and Grew His Audience -Joe Saul-Sehy of Stacking BenjaminsToday on episode 562 Joe Saul Sehy of the Stacking Benjamins podcast explains how he changed his podcast format, and lost 30% of his audience but now is working on his fifth sponsor.

                    Joe Saul-Sehy is the creator and co-host of the Stacking Benjamins podcast. Kiplinger magazine listed it as Best Podcast 2016 and The Art of Manliness listed it in their list of their top podcasts for 2016 (although the show isn't specifically aimed at men). Stacking Benjamins is a light, magazine-style podcast about money, where the goal isn't to teach as much as it's about entertaining people enough that they learn. Over the last four years Joe had to rebrand the podcast twice and after Podcast Movement 2015 completely blew up his format and changed everything. He has five different sponsors and the show comes out three times a week. Today on episode 562 we have a long talk with Joe with some great nuggets.

                    Lessons From Steve Martin (so Far)

                    You're probably going to hear more about this in the future, but I purchased the Steve Martin master class and it is CHOCK FULL of great content (and we haven't' even got to the comedy part yet). Here are some takeaways:

                    Steve went from being on the end of an old movement to the front of a new movement. instead of talking about the same old stuff, he asked, "What hasn't  been talked about?"

                    All movies are cult movies.

                    Steve wanted to be funny without telling jokes.

                    When you decide on a bit, you are defining your taste, and your audience is waiting for your taste as you are the authority. They want to know what YOU think.

                    Apple Updates Their Brand - What it Means To You

                    Apple has updated their branding and to change the name of the podcast directory from Podcasts to Apple Podcasts (which ties in with the Apple Watch, Apple iPad, etc)

                    What I'm seeing as a support person from Libsyn is a more than average amount of people where there show does not update (it takes 24 hours to update anyway, and your subscribers get the episode almost instantly). So if it's been longer than 24 hours and your show is still not showing in your Apple Podcasts listing then you might want to check your artwork (I know it seems unrelated, but out of spec artwork causes all sorts of issues). Here are the specifications:

                    1400x1400px (minimum)

                    3000x3000px (maximum)

                    Under 500kb

                    Use rGB color space

                    Be a JPG, JPEG, or a PNG file

                     

                    If you need an online tool to help resize or compress your file check out pixlr.com

                    Get 10% off Podcast Movement with the Discount Code SOP10

                    Podcast Movement is in August and it's going to be a great time. Use the coupon code sop10 to get 10% off your ticket.

                    Staying True to Your Format

                    Joe knows he doesn't want to be another "talking head" about finance talking 401ks. He wanted to be entertaining and also talk about finance.  When Joe gets  a review that says he's not funny, instead of changing his format, Joe takes that as a cue to work on being funny. Here are some other topics we talk about:

                    Instead of choosing a solo show or an interview show, Joe does both.

                    Joe knew the first version of the show was going to be a test, and purposely made 13 episodes

                    The second version of his show made it 69 episodes before Joe changed his format again.

                    Joe makes sure his intro lets his audience know that this is NOT The typical finance show.

                    He starts working on a show five weeks in advance using the Promo Republic service

                    You have the ranking that you deserve.

                    How he decided to bleep out or leave in swearing

                    How he handles negative reviews

                    How he drew a "line in the sand" with his intro to let people know if this is for them or not.

                    How he used affiliate links as a "sponsor"

                    How he gave his first sponsor a sweet deal to have a big company sponsor his show (which made him look bigger than he was at the time)

                    How he chooses sponsors and the criteria he uses.

                    How he keeps people tuned in during midroll advertisements.

                    Book Mentioned: Steel Like an Artist and the Steel Like an Artist Journal

                    How he gets big guests using tools like netgalley.com

                    Why he takes one week off every 8 weeks and what he does to fill in the gap.

                    How one woman sent hate mail, only the be one of the first people to sign up for his Facebook

                    What drives him nuts as a podcast listener.

                    Next Week's Poll: What is the Least Amount You Would Take from a Sponsor?

                    Every month I do a show based on listener feedback, and the deadline is 4/21/

                    it is a super easy survey at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/poll564

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Stacking Benjamins Podcast

                    Book: Steel Like an Artist and the Steel Like an Artist Journal

                    netgalley.com

                    Promo Republic

                    Be a Podcaster

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>Today on episode 562 Joe Saul Sehy of the Stacking Benjamins podcast explains how he changed his podcast format, and lost 30% of his audience but now is working on his fifth sponsor.

                    Joe Saul-Sehy is the creator and co-host of the Stacking Benjamins podcast. Kiplinger magazine listed it as Best Podcast 2016 and The Art of Manliness listed it in their list of their top podcasts for 2016 (although the show isn't specifically aimed at men). Stacking Benjamins is a light, magazine-style podcast about money, where the goal isn't to teach as much as it's about entertaining people enough that they learn. Over the last four years Joe had to rebrand the podcast twice and after Podcast Movement 2015 completely blew up his format and changed everything. He has five different sponsors and the show comes out three times a week. Today on episode 562 we have a long talk with Joe with some great nuggets.

                    Lessons From Steve Martin (so Far)

                    You're probably going to hear more about this in the future, but I purchased the Steve Martin master class and it is CHOCK FULL of great content (and we haven't' even got to the comedy part yet). Here are some takeaways:

                    Steve went from being on the end of an old movement to the front of a new movement. instead of talking about the same old stuff, he asked, "What hasn't  been talked about?"

                    All movies are cult movies.

                    Steve wanted to be funny without telling jokes.

                    When you decide on a bit, you are defining your taste, and your audience is waiting for your taste as you are the authority. They want to know what YOU think.

                    Apple Updates Their Brand - What it Means To You

                    Apple has updated their branding and to change the name of the podcast directory from Podcasts to Apple Podcasts (which ties in with the Apple Watch, Apple iPad, etc)

                    What I'm seeing as a support person from Libsyn is a more than average amount of people where there show does not update (it takes 24 hours to update anyway, and your subscribers get the episode almost instantly). So if it's been longer than 24 hours and your show is still not showing in your Apple Podcasts listing then you might want to check your artwork (I know it seems unrelated, but out of spec artwork causes all sorts of issues). Here are the specifications:

                    1400x1400px (minimum)

                    3000x3000px (maximum)

                    Under 500kb

                    Use rGB color space

                    Be a JPG, JPEG, or a PNG file

                     

                    If you need an online tool to help resize or compress your file check out pixlr.com

                    Get 10% off Podcast Movement with the Discount Code SOP10

                    Podcast Movement is in August and it's going to be a great time. Use the coupon code sop10 to get 10% off your ticket.

                    Staying True to Your Format

                    Joe knows he doesn't want to be another "talking head" about finance talking 401ks. He wanted to be entertaining and also talk about finance.  When Joe gets  a review that says he's not funny, instead of changing his format, Joe takes that as a cue to work on being funny. Here are some other topics we talk about:

                    Instead of choosing a solo show or an interview show, Joe does both.

                    Joe knew the first version of the show was going to be a test, and purposely made 13 episodes

                    The second version of his show made it 69 episodes before Joe changed his format again.

                    Joe makes sure his intro lets his audience know that this is NOT The typical finance show.

                    He starts working on a show five weeks in advance using the Promo Republic service

                    You have the ranking that you deserve.

                    How he decided to bleep out or leave in swearing

                    How he handles negative reviews

                    How he drew a "line in the sand" with his intro to let people know if this is for them or not.

                    How he used affiliate links as a "sponsor"

                    How he gave his first sponsor a sweet deal to have a big company sponsor his show (which made him look bigger than he was at the time)

                    How he chooses sponsors and the criteria he uses.

                    How he keeps people tuned in during midroll advertisements.

                    Book Mentioned: Steel Like an Artist and the Steel Like an Artist Journal

                    How he gets big guests using tools like netgalley.com

                    Why he takes one week off every 8 weeks and what he does to fill in the gap.

                    How one woman sent hate mail, only the be one of the first people to sign up for his Facebook

                    What drives him nuts as a podcast listener.

                    Next Week's Poll: What is the Least Amount You Would Take from a Sponsor?

                    Every month I do a show based on listener feedback, and the deadline is 4/21/

                    it is a super easy survey at https://schoolofpodcasting.com/poll564

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Stacking Benjamins Podcast

                    Book: Steel Like an Artist and the Steel Like an Artist Journal

                    netgalley.com

                    Promo Republic

                    Be a Podcaster

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>9f02aa4b3f580f58e1a4ad34688ef161Mon, 17 Apr 2017 04:00:00 -040059:28falsefull562562Podcast Expectations vs Reality: How Natalie Eckdal Shifted Her Podcast To Be SuccessfulPodcasting in the Media: Teen Titans

                    I want to thank Caine Door of the Adventure Frequency for letting me know that: "In the newly released animated film: Teen Titans the Judas contract (Warner Brothers) Kevin Smith is in the movie as himself interviewing a member of the team on his podcast and it's good.

                    He's a known fanboy so he has great questions and brings some levity to the end of the movie after the big final battle scene. I think it says something that they make time for podcasting in the movie." This is just another example of podcasting being more and more mainstream. Thanks to Caine for the heads up. Thress Years Into Podcasting, She's Not Where She Thought's She's Be, She's in an Event Better Place Natalie Echdahl Almost Quit Podcasting - She's Glad She Didn't

                    Natalie Eckdahl, MBA, is a business coach, professional facilitator, keynote speaker and the host of the Biz Chix Podcast which iTunes featured as a top New Business Podcast in March 2014. Three years ago she went to social media marketing world, she joined John Lee Dumas' Podcaster's Paradise and started following "the formula" that everyone at the time did. However, it didn't reap the results that she expected. At one point Natalie launched a mastermind group, and not a single listener signed up. As she unfolds her story today, you will hear how Natalie handles disappointments and turns them into learning experiences. You will learn: I love Natalie's opening. In less than a minute you understand what the show is about, where it's going, and who it's for. My guess is she used Music Radio Creative I also love her closing call to action which uses her two young sons. It makes it memorable and makes her even more human. When to do an interview show, and when to do a solo show How breaking away from "podcasting best practices" had her numbers go through the roof How to get your audience involved with your show. The importance of timing with your podcast Is your podcast in a Blue Ocean, or Red Ocean (see the book Blue Ocean Strategy, Expanded Edition: How to Create Uncontested Market Space and Make the Competition Irrelevant) Personal connections lead to her sponsorship with Aweber How she went from being an attendee to a speaker at Social Media Marketing World How she is promoting her show on social media Starting a business? Work with Natalie by going to www.bizchix.com/workwithme

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Bizchix.com

                    She Podcasts

                    Biz Women Rock

                    Stop Chasing Influencers book by Jared Easley

                    Music Radio Creative

                    Aweber

                    Need Some One on One Podcast Consulting?

                    Book a coaching call with Dave (as short as 15 minutes) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Tap into Dave's 12 Years of Podcast experience and enjoy:

                    Step by Step Tutorials Private Facebook Group Live Group Coaching Priority Email Support 30 Money Back Guarantee

                    Start podcasting today by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>Podcasting in the Media: Teen Titans

                    I want to thank Caine Door of the Adventure Frequency for letting me know that: "In the newly released animated film: Teen Titans the Judas contract (Warner Brothers) Kevin Smith is in the movie as himself interviewing a member of the team on his podcast and it's good.

                    He's a known fanboy so he has great questions and brings some levity to the end of the movie after the big final battle scene. I think it says something that they make time for podcasting in the movie." This is just another example of podcasting being more and more mainstream. Thanks to Caine for the heads up. Thress Years Into Podcasting, She's Not Where She Thought's She's Be, She's in an Event Better Place Natalie Echdahl Almost Quit Podcasting - She's Glad She Didn't

                    Natalie Eckdahl, MBA, is a business coach, professional facilitator, keynote speaker and the host of the Biz Chix Podcast which iTunes featured as a top New Business Podcast in March 2014. Three years ago she went to social media marketing world, she joined John Lee Dumas' Podcaster's Paradise and started following "the formula" that everyone at the time did. However, it didn't reap the results that she expected. At one point Natalie launched a mastermind group, and not a single listener signed up. As she unfolds her story today, you will hear how Natalie handles disappointments and turns them into learning experiences. You will learn: I love Natalie's opening. In less than a minute you understand what the show is about, where it's going, and who it's for. My guess is she used Music Radio Creative I also love her closing call to action which uses her two young sons. It makes it memorable and makes her even more human. When to do an interview show, and when to do a solo show How breaking away from "podcasting best practices" had her numbers go through the roof How to get your audience involved with your show. The importance of timing with your podcast Is your podcast in a Blue Ocean, or Red Ocean (see the book Blue Ocean Strategy, Expanded Edition: How to Create Uncontested Market Space and Make the Competition Irrelevant) Personal connections lead to her sponsorship with Aweber How she went from being an attendee to a speaker at Social Media Marketing World How she is promoting her show on social media Starting a business? Work with Natalie by going to www.bizchix.com/workwithme

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Bizchix.com

                    She Podcasts

                    Biz Women Rock

                    Stop Chasing Influencers book by Jared Easley

                    Music Radio Creative

                    Aweber

                    Need Some One on One Podcast Consulting?

                    Book a coaching call with Dave (as short as 15 minutes) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Tap into Dave's 12 Years of Podcast experience and enjoy:

                    Step by Step Tutorials Private Facebook Group Live Group Coaching Priority Email Support 30 Money Back Guarantee

                    Start podcasting today by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>a23e2f28e46306c1ec571f96a5a2c823Mon, 10 Apr 2017 04:00:00 -040056:12falsefull561561What Podcasters Can Learn From Chuck BerryChuck Berry died last month at the age of 90. I saw him four years ago at a special event that honored him with tons of musicians (Merle Haggard, Ronnie Hawkins, Darryl "DMC" McDaniels, Joe Bonamassa and Lemmy Kilmister) coming to play his music and honor him. At the end of the night, Berry accepted the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame's American Masters of Music Award, wrapping the Hall of Fame's weeklong celebration of Berry's life.  In the end, they brought Chuck out with a band consisting of a lot of his children who knew how to follow their father's (at times) unpredictable behavior (Chuck got confused in the middle of song two, and restarted it). Chuck got us smiling from the very first moment. He said, "It's great to be here. Then again, I'm 86; I'm glad to be anywhere." So here are some things, on Episode 560, that podcasters can learn from Chuck Berry.

                    Now as a guitar player myself, you start playing the guitar hoping to play Stairway to Heaven, Iron Man, Smoke on the Water, you want to be Van Halen, but you don't start there. You start with Chuck Berry, and you start with Johnny B Goode. In the same way that every band has to learn Mustang Sally and Brown Eyed Girl, every guitar player has to learn how to play Johnny B Good. I am no exception.

                    1. It's not about the tech. Keep it Simple
                    
                    

                    Other musicians had pedalboard were made of technology on top of technology. They could do the river dance as they changed the tone of their guitar with each tap of their foot. Chuck came out with his trusty guitar and plugged into a single amplifier. He hit the opening riff of Roll Over Beethoven, and you could not help but smile. Chuck had one tone, it was Chuck Berry. This was not a drill, this was not a test, right there in front of my was Chuck Berry. He had a smile on his face, and by the third beat, the whole place was clapping along to the music, dancing, or both.

                    2. Give the People What They Want.

                    Chuck Berry had many styles. Some of his songs had remnants of country music. He played slow blues., You probably don't know most of those songs. If you wanted airplay, you had to play something kids (teenagers) wanted, and could dance to.  One other thing, the teenagers were the ones buying the music. Rock and Roll music was new. It was a great way for being rebellious, and the fact that this was Rock and Roll from a BLACK MAN, made it even more revolutionary (this was the 1950s). You will notice that Roll Over Beethoven, Johnny B Goode, Rock and Roll Music and many other Berry titles are pretty much the same song. When he appeared on the Johnny Carson show, he said to the band leader, "It's the same as the last song" as they prepared to play another song.  However, those songs like Sweet Little Sixteen, School Days, and others were instantly relatable to his audience.

                    He also had suggestive lyrics which probably made parents offended. Here is a verse from Roll Over Beethoven:

                    Well, if you feel and like it Go get your lover, then reel and rock it Roll it over and move on up just A trifle further and reel and rock with one another, Roll over Beethoven dig these rhythm and blues.

                    3. Chuck Was Engaging

                    Chuck made sure you were looking at him. in the early days of his career he usually wore black or white suits, but his eyes, mouth, and hands, and especially his legs demanded attention. He would strum his guitar in a way that has hand moved from the back to guitar toward to top. As a guitar player, I can tell you it makes almost no difference where you strum an electric guitar, but it looks cool (and yes, I've borrowed that move). His "Duck Walk" he said in a CBS interview was a mistake. He had slipped and fallen and the "Duck Walk" happened as he was trying to get back up. He noticed the ovation and worked it into his act. Chuck paid attention to what made the audience go wild.

                    4. Charge What Your Worth

                    There is only one Chuck Berry. Sure everyone from the Beatles, Stones, Elvis, Duan Alman, The Kinks, John Lennon, Simon and Garfunkle, Bruce Springsteen, and David Bowie, they all have covered his music. There is only ONE Chuck Berry. Consequently, Chuck knew this and after being ripped off in the early part of his career, he started demanding that he get paid up front, in cash.

                    5. Chuck Got the Audience Involved

                    Most of his big hits made it super easy to make them "sing-alongs." All Chuck had to say was "Go!" and put his hand up to his ear and the audience would sing "Go Johny Go, Go.."

                    6. A Little Planning Up Front Saves Some Editing Time Later

                    Post-1970 Chuck didn't tour with a band. He brought his guitar and whoever was promoting his concert was in charge of putting together a band. On a tonight show appearance, he said, "well everybody knows my music." This was true, but they all sounded the same. While they are not obvious, when you see Chuck perform with these acts, the intros are a little sloppy, and the endings were often train wrecks as the band didn't know that when Chuck kicks his leg up that meant stop.

                    7. Don't Break The Law

                    Chuck had issues with the law about every 15-20 years. One involved him putting cameras in the women's bathroom. While he was never convicted of wrongdoing, he did settle out of court, and it cost him 1.2 million dollars.

                    8. Take Care of Your Team / Get Things in Writing

                    One of the reasons Chuck insisted on being paid in cash is he had been swindled out of money by promoters and clubs in the past. One key player in Berry's band was Johnnie Johnson (his piano player). In November 2000, Johnson sued Berry, alleging he deserved co-composer credits (and royalties) for dozens of songs, including "No Particular Place to Go," "Sweet Little Sixteen," and "Roll Over Beethoven," which credit Berry alone. The case was dismissed in less than a year because too many years had passed since the songs in dispute were written.

                    9. Don't Spend all Your Money on Gear

                    A recent report estimated Chuck's estate is worth 50 million. While some of this is from record royalties, Chuck invested in Real Estate. When you start making money with your podcast (if that is something you choose to do) spend some on your family, put some in the bank (and avoid the stress of worrying about money).

                    10. While You Can Give Them Something Similar, it Still Has to Be Good

                    Did you know there was a sequel to Johnny B Good? Me neither. According to Wikipedia it never charted in any country. So in the same what that creating a song about Johnny B Good isn't going to equal chart success, creating a podcast with the phrase "On Fire" (or whatever is hot at the moment ) does not mean you will get chart success.

                    Why People Remember Chuck Berry

                    There is a famous quote by Maya Angelou, “I've learned that people will forget what you said, people will forget what you did, but people will never forget how you made them feel.” Chuck Berry's music made people smile, it made them want to dance, and they lead to them having fun, and in some cases there was realin' and rockin'.

                    Podhero Review

                    What is Podheri.io?

                    Podhero is described as a swiss army knife for podcasters with a goal of making podcast creation and promotion easier.

                    Audio Processing

                    The site describes it as "Automate the technical hurdles to make your vocals sound amazing." So I compared it to Auphonic.com as they both level out the volume, and remove noise (hiss and hum). If I were to judge the output, I would say it's very close (if not a tie). In looking at the wav forms, it appears auphonic might have an ever so slight edge, but keep in mind, my ears didn't' notice anything. The only true advantage (depending on your attitude) is Auphonic has more configuration options (so you can set loudness levels if you want to just level volume and not remove noise).  But I was impressed with the audio processing. This opinion is based upon testing one file.

                    Podcast To Video

                    If can take your audio podcast and send it to YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram. It also gives you a basic tool to create a custom artwork. You can do this if you are using Libsyn and Spreaker. Blubrry does some distribution (but they only do the first few minutes of your show).  The tool for creating an image is really basic and is better than nothing. When there are tools such as canva.com as a free option, I could see using Canva to create the image, and then use the "upload your own" option here to make your video. Is video worth it? My last episode from the School of Podcasting had 26 views, and I was surprised that the analytics show people were watching a majority. My advice would be to open this tool in a new window as the processing of audio to video is going to take some time.  Currently, you can have the tool automatically post to YouTube (with plan of Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Medium)

                    Website Widget Review

                    This tool will put a small pop-up on your website. You just copy and paste some code. For me, I find this tool "meh" because ratings in iTunes are great social proof, they don't help you advance up the charts (I thnk people put too much emphasis on them as a "must do").

                    My Podcast Reviews

                    This tool brings you all of your reviews from all of the stores. This is a free tool. This does have a feature that I found interesting. It shows you your reviews across a period. I found that interesting. They attempt to show you (on a map) where the reviews come from, but besides getting the country correct, I wouldn't count it...]]>Chuck Berry died last month at the age of 90. I saw him four years ago at a special event that honored him with tons of musicians (Merle Haggard, Ronnie Hawkins, Darryl "DMC" McDaniels, Joe Bonamassa and Lemmy Kilmister) coming to play his music and honor him. At the end of the night, Berry accepted the Rock and Roll Hall of Fame's American Masters of Music Award, wrapping the Hall of Fame's weeklong celebration of Berry's life.  In the end, they brought Chuck out with a band consisting of a lot of his children who knew how to follow their father's (at times) unpredictable behavior (Chuck got confused in the middle of song two, and restarted it). Chuck got us smiling from the very first moment. He said, "It's great to be here. Then again, I'm 86; I'm glad to be anywhere." So here are some things, on Episode 560, that podcasters can learn from Chuck Berry.

                    Now as a guitar player myself, you start playing the guitar hoping to play Stairway to Heaven, Iron Man, Smoke on the Water, you want to be Van Halen, but you don't start there. You start with Chuck Berry, and you start with Johnny B Goode. In the same way that every band has to learn Mustang Sally and Brown Eyed Girl, every guitar player has to learn how to play Johnny B Good. I am no exception.

                    1. It's not about the tech. Keep it Simple
                    
                    

                    Other musicians had pedalboard were made of technology on top of technology. They could do the river dance as they changed the tone of their guitar with each tap of their foot. Chuck came out with his trusty guitar and plugged into a single amplifier. He hit the opening riff of Roll Over Beethoven, and you could not help but smile. Chuck had one tone, it was Chuck Berry. This was not a drill, this was not a test, right there in front of my was Chuck Berry. He had a smile on his face, and by the third beat, the whole place was clapping along to the music, dancing, or both.

                    2. Give the People What They Want.

                    Chuck Berry had many styles. Some of his songs had remnants of country music. He played slow blues., You probably don't know most of those songs. If you wanted airplay, you had to play something kids (teenagers) wanted, and could dance to.  One other thing, the teenagers were the ones buying the music. Rock and Roll music was new. It was a great way for being rebellious, and the fact that this was Rock and Roll from a BLACK MAN, made it even more revolutionary (this was the 1950s). You will notice that Roll Over Beethoven, Johnny B Goode, Rock and Roll Music and many other Berry titles are pretty much the same song. When he appeared on the Johnny Carson show, he said to the band leader, "It's the same as the last song" as they prepared to play another song.  However, those songs like Sweet Little Sixteen, School Days, and others were instantly relatable to his audience.

                    He also had suggestive lyrics which probably made parents offended. Here is a verse from Roll Over Beethoven:

                    Well, if you feel and like it Go get your lover, then reel and rock it Roll it over and move on up just A trifle further and reel and rock with one another, Roll over Beethoven dig these rhythm and blues.

                    3. Chuck Was Engaging

                    Chuck made sure you were looking at him. in the early days of his career he usually wore black or white suits, but his eyes, mouth, and hands, and especially his legs demanded attention. He would strum his guitar in a way that has hand moved from the back to guitar toward to top. As a guitar player, I can tell you it makes almost no difference where you strum an electric guitar, but it looks cool (and yes, I've borrowed that move). His "Duck Walk" he said in a CBS interview was a mistake. He had slipped and fallen and the "Duck Walk" happened as he was trying to get back up. He noticed the ovation and worked it into his act. Chuck paid attention to what made the audience go wild.

                    4. Charge What Your Worth

                    There is only one Chuck Berry. Sure everyone from the Beatles, Stones, Elvis, Duan Alman, The Kinks, John Lennon, Simon and Garfunkle, Bruce Springsteen, and David Bowie, they all have covered his music. There is only ONE Chuck Berry. Consequently, Chuck knew this and after being ripped off in the early part of his career, he started demanding that he get paid up front, in cash.

                    5. Chuck Got the Audience Involved

                    Most of his big hits made it super easy to make them "sing-alongs." All Chuck had to say was "Go!" and put his hand up to his ear and the audience would sing "Go Johny Go, Go.."

                    6. A Little Planning Up Front Saves Some Editing Time Later

                    Post-1970 Chuck didn't tour with a band. He brought his guitar and whoever was promoting his concert was in charge of putting together a band. On a tonight show appearance, he said, "well everybody knows my music." This was true, but they all sounded the same. While they are not obvious, when you see Chuck perform with these acts, the intros are a little sloppy, and the endings were often train wrecks as the band didn't know that when Chuck kicks his leg up that meant stop.

                    7. Don't Break The Law

                    Chuck had issues with the law about every 15-20 years. One involved him putting cameras in the women's bathroom. While he was never convicted of wrongdoing, he did settle out of court, and it cost him 1.2 million dollars.

                    8. Take Care of Your Team / Get Things in Writing

                    One of the reasons Chuck insisted on being paid in cash is he had been swindled out of money by promoters and clubs in the past. One key player in Berry's band was Johnnie Johnson (his piano player). In November 2000, Johnson sued Berry, alleging he deserved co-composer credits (and royalties) for dozens of songs, including "No Particular Place to Go," "Sweet Little Sixteen," and "Roll Over Beethoven," which credit Berry alone. The case was dismissed in less than a year because too many years had passed since the songs in dispute were written.

                    9. Don't Spend all Your Money on Gear

                    A recent report estimated Chuck's estate is worth 50 million. While some of this is from record royalties, Chuck invested in Real Estate. When you start making money with your podcast (if that is something you choose to do) spend some on your family, put some in the bank (and avoid the stress of worrying about money).

                    10. While You Can Give Them Something Similar, it Still Has to Be Good

                    Did you know there was a sequel to Johnny B Good? Me neither. According to Wikipedia it never charted in any country. So in the same what that creating a song about Johnny B Good isn't going to equal chart success, creating a podcast with the phrase "On Fire" (or whatever is hot at the moment ) does not mean you will get chart success.

                    Why People Remember Chuck Berry

                    There is a famous quote by Maya Angelou, “I've learned that people will forget what you said, people will forget what you did, but people will never forget how you made them feel.” Chuck Berry's music made people smile, it made them want to dance, and they lead to them having fun, and in some cases there was realin' and rockin'.

                    Podhero Review

                    What is Podheri.io?

                    Podhero is described as a swiss army knife for podcasters with a goal of making podcast creation and promotion easier.

                    Audio Processing

                    The site describes it as "Automate the technical hurdles to make your vocals sound amazing." So I compared it to Auphonic.com as they both level out the volume, and remove noise (hiss and hum). If I were to judge the output, I would say it's very close (if not a tie). In looking at the wav forms, it appears auphonic might have an ever so slight edge, but keep in mind, my ears didn't' notice anything. The only true advantage (depending on your attitude) is Auphonic has more configuration options (so you can set loudness levels if you want to just level volume and not remove noise).  But I was impressed with the audio processing. This opinion is based upon testing one file.

                    Podcast To Video

                    If can take your audio podcast and send it to YouTube, Facebook, Twitter, Instagram. It also gives you a basic tool to create a custom artwork. You can do this if you are using Libsyn and Spreaker. Blubrry does some distribution (but they only do the first few minutes of your show).  The tool for creating an image is really basic and is better than nothing. When there are tools such as canva.com as a free option, I could see using Canva to create the image, and then use the "upload your own" option here to make your video. Is video worth it? My last episode from the School of Podcasting had 26 views, and I was surprised that the analytics show people were watching a majority. My advice would be to open this tool in a new window as the processing of audio to video is going to take some time.  Currently, you can have the tool automatically post to YouTube (with plan of Facebook, Twitter, LinkedIn, Medium)

                    Website Widget Review

                    This tool will put a small pop-up on your website. You just copy and paste some code. For me, I find this tool "meh" because ratings in iTunes are great social proof, they don't help you advance up the charts (I thnk people put too much emphasis on them as a "must do").

                    My Podcast Reviews

                    This tool brings you all of your reviews from all of the stores. This is a free tool. This does have a feature that I found interesting. It shows you your reviews across a period. I found that interesting. They attempt to show you (on a map) where the reviews come from, but besides getting the country correct, I wouldn't count it accurate from a geographic standpoint.

                    iTunes Keyword Tracking

                    This allows you to put in your (or your "Competition's") iTunes link and enter a keyword. So I can see where The Audacity to Podcast Ranks higher than my show, but I rank higher than the Podcast Report. That's interesting. There is no way to say "who is #1?" I'm just not sure what I'm supposed to with this information. Many moons ago I had a program called Webmaster Gold, and it would track your website and let you know where you ranked. This lead to people writing articles more for the Google Web crawler instead of the humans who were reading it. Also, when I was a teacher in the corporate world, I would do my best every day. Every day I got scored by my students. While I always feel there is room for improvement, I'm not sure there was anything I would change (in most cases) if someone gave me an average score. So for me, I see this as a set of interesting statistics, that people can obsess over, but in the end, may not lead to any value being delivered to your audience.

                    Episode Media Kits

                    If you do a lot of interviews, this could be your favorite feature. Here you upload promotional images, create messages to go to Twitter, Facebook Google+, and LinkedIn. You upload pictures, create your tweets, and copy and link and send that to your guest. They can send a message with a single click. For me, this is the most useful tool (again, if you're doing interviews, but don't limit your thinking, why not put the link in your post and give your audience access to promote your episode.

                    Do You Need This?

                    Much of this you can get for free for example:

                    Canva.com - free image creation tool Podcast Rankings - have them emailed to you see Regan Star If you're using Libsyn, you can automatically have your show syndicated to Twitter, Facebook, YouTube (with video, and you can add a custom image), iHeart Radio, LinkedIn, Tumblr, Blogger, and more. Podcast Reviews - You can get this feature free in Podhero, as well as My Podcast Reviews Audio Processing - You can get 2 hours free each month at auphonic.

                    Things Unique To Podhero

                    If you're not using Libsyn or Spreaker, it will create a video for you It shows you your podcast reviews over time. The podcast review widget. The podcast media kit.

                    How Much Does it Cost?

                    There is a free version that includes: Worldwide iTunes Review Tracking (2 podcasts) iTunes Keyword Tracker (1 keyword) Measures how visible your podcast is on iTunes for any search term over time. iTunes Review Website Widget (1 website)

                    The paid version is $20/month Audio Enhancer Tool Social Video Creator Episode Media Kits Podcast to Youtube iTunes Keyword Researcher iTunes Keyword Tracker (15 keywords) Measures how visible your podcast is on iTunes for any search term over time. Worldwide iTunes Review Tracking (5 podcasts) When you get a new review on iTunes, from any country, you will be notified. New & NoteworthyAlerts iTunes Review Website Widget (unlimited)

                    Mentioned In This Podcast

                    What is the smallest amount you would take for advertising? (POLL)

                    Chuck Berry on the Johnny Carson Show (YouTube Video) Podhero.io

                    Libsyn.com (Liberated Syndication) Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month

                    Canva.com - free image creation tool Podcast Rankings - have them emailed to you see Regan Star

                    Dave's Patreon Accounts  see http://supportthisshow.com/

                    Start your podcast by joining the School of Podcasting go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>b09a14b40c07534b5098cabb033f56a8Mon, 03 Apr 2017 04:00:00 -040055:49falsefull560560Asking Your Audience For FeedbackWhen you create a recipe for food, you serve it to someone and ask them "What do you think?' They might say, "it needs more salt" or some other suggestion. It is then up to you like the chef to decide if you want to implement that recommendation or not. It's not any different in podcasting, but I feel we don't take the time to ask out audience, "What do you think?"

                    So I decided to do this, and bring you along. I asked two simple questions (thanks to Lee Silverstein of the Colon Cancer Podcast who did this first) and saw what kind of feedback I got.

                    You Think You're Going to Get Butchered, But You're Not

                    If you are asking your audience, if they are your audience - they like you. If they have any negative comments, they will probably attempt to deliver them with kid gloves. 

                    By Know What Works, You Can Do More

                    I feel like a bit of an egomaniac today, as much of the show it telling me how much people like my show, but I was more interested in WHY they like my show, and I learned:

                    • I make things easy to understand (which is my #1 priority)
                    • I am a likable guy
                    • I make people laugh
                    • I get to the point
                    • I'm willing to speak my mind
                    • People understand my intentions to help people 
                    • I'm not judgemental
                    • I'm encouraging
                    • I share insights into my life and do a great job of relating those stories to podcasting
                    
                    Here are some great ideas on how I can improve my show (from listener feedback):
                    • Put episode numbers in your posts for easier searching
                    • Try not to repeat the same content on the School of Podcasting as I do on my Ask the Podcast Coach show. (some people listen to both)
                    • Mention that I have a newsletter more often
                    • Be more confident in my sales pitch.
                    • Maybe not so many appearances of my cat.
                    
                    Here are some suggestions from my audience that I'm not going to implement

                    One person said that the phrase "Tackle the technology" was not entirely correct. I like the "Theater of the mind of that phrase, so it's staying.

                    One person doesn't like the "Ladies" that sing my jingle. For now, I love my jingle in the same way I loved the theme music for Johnny Carson. I know much more people who LOVE the ladies. 

                    You're Not Going to Please Everyone

                    Some people like my cat and other could live without the "Bernie blooper real." Some people like my intro and other do not. With this in mind, you're not going to please everyone. Follow your heart, and remember a few things:

                    • It's your show
                    • There is a fast forward button
                    
                    Making An Audience Survey

                    There are all sorts of tools for feedback. You can use speakpipe, voicemail, email, and forms. 

                    Here is a quick tutorial to show you how you can use a free tool that allows unlimited forms, unlimited questions, and unlimited responses.

                    https://youtu.be/BvYihe3tah4

                    Don't Be Afraid To Look in the Mirror

                    Somewhere in your life, you had someone give you feedback, or maybe you made a mistake, but it leads to you becoming better at that task. Constant improvement has been a mantra of mine for many years. You just spent all that time in the kitchen slaving over your podcast. Shouldn't you take the time to ask people what they think?

                    Are You Ready To Launch a Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting and: Get step by step tutorials A private Facebook group for networking Live group coaching (a $400 value) Priority Email support A 30-day money back guarantee 

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    Episode 559 first appeared at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/559

                     

                    Contributors to this Episode

                    J Cleveland Payne - Theinternettoolbox.net Darwin -dealingwithmygrief.com Amanda greatbeetadventure.com Anna - authenticparenting.com Cale- hamradio360.com Randy growgreat.com Carolyn carbonbasedpodcast.com Chris podcastengineeringschool.com themysticshow.net Connie positivelylifeafterfifty.com Craig from ingleaspodcast.com Daniel- theaudacitytopodcast.com Jessica -interviewconnections.com Jeff -http://genealogypodcast.com/ Geoff - dealtalkpodcast.com Jessica -shepodcasts.com - jkmagency.com Juan thegentlemensbrotherhood.com Kim toastmasters101.net Less thecancerradionetwork.com Matt- theauthorinsideyou.com  Scott -computertutorflorida.com   Nick Cincinnatisoccertalk.com  Terry - itprovidernetwork.com Tina - thestartsomethingshow.com Tyler - CashFlowGuys.com

                    ]]>When you create a recipe for food, you serve it to someone and ask them "What do you think?' They might say, "it needs more salt" or some other suggestion. It is then up to you like the chef to decide if you want to implement that recommendation or not. It's not any different in podcasting, but I feel we don't take the time to ask out audience, "What do you think?"

                    So I decided to do this, and bring you along. I asked two simple questions (thanks to Lee Silverstein of the Colon Cancer Podcast who did this first) and saw what kind of feedback I got.

                    You Think You're Going to Get Butchered, But You're Not

                    If you are asking your audience, if they are your audience - they like you. If they have any negative comments, they will probably attempt to deliver them with kid gloves. 

                    By Know What Works, You Can Do More

                    I feel like a bit of an egomaniac today, as much of the show it telling me how much people like my show, but I was more interested in WHY they like my show, and I learned:

                    • I make things easy to understand (which is my #1 priority)
                    • I am a likable guy
                    • I make people laugh
                    • I get to the point
                    • I'm willing to speak my mind
                    • People understand my intentions to help people 
                    • I'm not judgemental
                    • I'm encouraging
                    • I share insights into my life and do a great job of relating those stories to podcasting
                    
                    Here are some great ideas on how I can improve my show (from listener feedback):
                    • Put episode numbers in your posts for easier searching
                    • Try not to repeat the same content on the School of Podcasting as I do on my Ask the Podcast Coach show. (some people listen to both)
                    • Mention that I have a newsletter more often
                    • Be more confident in my sales pitch.
                    • Maybe not so many appearances of my cat.
                    
                    Here are some suggestions from my audience that I'm not going to implement

                    One person said that the phrase "Tackle the technology" was not entirely correct. I like the "Theater of the mind of that phrase, so it's staying.

                    One person doesn't like the "Ladies" that sing my jingle. For now, I love my jingle in the same way I loved the theme music for Johnny Carson. I know much more people who LOVE the ladies. 

                    You're Not Going to Please Everyone

                    Some people like my cat and other could live without the "Bernie blooper real." Some people like my intro and other do not. With this in mind, you're not going to please everyone. Follow your heart, and remember a few things:

                    • It's your show
                    • There is a fast forward button
                    
                    Making An Audience Survey

                    There are all sorts of tools for feedback. You can use speakpipe, voicemail, email, and forms. 

                    Here is a quick tutorial to show you how you can use a free tool that allows unlimited forms, unlimited questions, and unlimited responses.

                    https://youtu.be/BvYihe3tah4

                    Don't Be Afraid To Look in the Mirror

                    Somewhere in your life, you had someone give you feedback, or maybe you made a mistake, but it leads to you becoming better at that task. Constant improvement has been a mantra of mine for many years. You just spent all that time in the kitchen slaving over your podcast. Shouldn't you take the time to ask people what they think?

                    Are You Ready To Launch a Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting and: Get step by step tutorials A private Facebook group for networking Live group coaching (a $400 value) Priority Email support A 30-day money back guarantee 

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    Episode 559 first appeared at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/559

                     

                    Contributors to this Episode

                    J Cleveland Payne - Theinternettoolbox.net Darwin -dealingwithmygrief.com Amanda greatbeetadventure.com Anna - authenticparenting.com Cale- hamradio360.com Randy growgreat.com Carolyn carbonbasedpodcast.com Chris podcastengineeringschool.com themysticshow.net Connie positivelylifeafterfifty.com Craig from ingleaspodcast.com Daniel- theaudacitytopodcast.com Jessica -interviewconnections.com Jeff -http://genealogypodcast.com/ Geoff - dealtalkpodcast.com Jessica -shepodcasts.com - jkmagency.com Juan thegentlemensbrotherhood.com Kim toastmasters101.net Less thecancerradionetwork.com Matt- theauthorinsideyou.com  Scott -computertutorflorida.com   Nick Cincinnatisoccertalk.com  Terry - itprovidernetwork.com Tina - thestartsomethingshow.com Tyler - CashFlowGuys.com

                    ]]>e3b54d1f0b9aef2eab10173dd3f1dbcbMon, 27 Mar 2017 04:00:00 -040001:05:41falsefull559559Podcasting Continues to Grow 22% in Two YearsJeremy Dennis explains how he was able to commission a custom comic book cover thanks to his supporters. 
                    New Edison Research on Podcasting

                    Edison Research did a telephone survey of 2000 people ages 12 and older. Here are some of the results related to podcasting:

                    81% of the respondents own a smartphone (up from 76%). It's actually gone up 22% in two years.

                    50% of people have a Netflix account (more on that later)

                    60% of people (168 million) are familiar with podcasting (up from 55% last year)

                    40% have ever listened to a podcast (up from 35% last year). 10 Years ago is was 13%

                    24% listen to a podcast in the last month (up from 21%)

                    15% listen weekly (up from 13%)

                    The people who listened weekly average five episodes per week. 

                    Their data shows 65% is mobile (Libsyn says this is closer to 80%)

                    40% listen to the whole thing. 45% listen to most of it. 10% listen to less than half. 5% listen to just the beginning.

                    77% Click on and listen immediately (stream). 41% download and listen later. 2&% subscribe and listen later

                    People that subscribe, are subscribed to an average of six podcasts.

                    Each year since 2004 these numbers have gone up every single year. 

                    Get the slides and see the presentation at http://www.edisonresearch.com/infinite-dial-2017/

                    One More Thing..

                    50% of people have a Netflix account, and 43% of them use it on a weekly basis

                    60% of people are familiar with a podcast. 40% have listened to one, but 24% listen monthly, and 15% listen weekly. Why? In my opinion, you have a better chance at finding quality programming in Netflix than you do in iTunes. I'm going to do some random experiments on this going forward. 

                    Pinecast is a new "Free" media hosting service.

                    It is founded by Matt Basta who is an engineer for Uber.  It was founded in August of 2015 (per his LinkedIn profile). 

                    Their free hosting has the following features:

                    • Demo accounts are limited to three podcasts per account.
                    • The podcast import tool is not available for demo accounts.
                    • An unlimited number of episodes may be added, but only the most recent ten episodes will be available to view in the podcast dashboard and the podcast RSS feed.* 
                    • Episode audio is limited to 48MB (per episode). You are free, however, to split episodes into smaller episodes.
                    • Only a small subset of the basic analytics will be available. This includes subscriber and listener counts.
                    • Episode descriptions will contain a link to Pinecast.
                    
                    

                    Episodes older than the most recent ten are not deleted, but they are not available to view or edit. Upgrading your plan will make them available again.

                    Upgrading to a plan will remove the link to Pinecast from the show's episode descriptions.

                    All analytics data that is collected for higher-tier plans will always be collected for all podcasts (even ones owned by demo accounts), meaning analytics data will retroactively be provided if the account is upgraded.

                    Unavailable Features

                    The following features are not available to demo accounts:
                    • Feedback
                    • Geo analytics
                    • Import tool
                    • Ability to create networks
                    • Embeddable (HTML5) player
                    • Bittorrent downloads
                    • Podcast website or blog
                    
                    

                    They have a demo (free) account, Starter ($5/month) and Pro ($50) a month. 

                    The pro plans allow you to create a network, and allow you to receive comments on your page, as well as have multiple users on your account. 

                    Their free (known as "Community" plans meet the following requirements:

                    These plans may not be used exclusively for marketing, evangelical, or other promotional purposes of any sort. The user's content must provide unique creative or informational value. 

                    Things that seem cool but aren't

                    Subscriber counts are pointless. If I subscribe on my phone, my tablet and iTunes it's going to potentially show me as three separate subscribers. I do give them credit for being blatantly honest. On their website it states, "Pinecast will only mark a subscriber a single time in any 24-hour window. Note that this is not a great metric for measuring podcast success; there is no foolproof means of tracking the number of subscribers."

                    There is a tip jar where you put in your bank account information, and when someone leaves you a tip, it goes to your bank. This is done securely through Stripe, but Pinecast is also going to take another 5%.  As this is not available on the free plan, I'm not sure why they feel the need to take a cut. Keep in mind that you can make your PayPal donation button in about 2 minutes. 

                    Their podcast site needs work, and you have one shot to get it right. I uploaded artwork that was made to the spec they suggested. It looked horrible when I went to go back and upload a new version that was not an option. 

                    So here is my checklist

                    1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. - Pass 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) - Pass 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) - Pass 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. - Yes, but you have to ask 5. Give me support. - Yes, Matt answered my email about redirection fairly promptly.  6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business - Yes. But there is a chance he may get overloaded with free customers.  7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate. - Very basic stats

                    What About the Almighty Stats?

                    Listens by Source: This is a breakdown of how your audience is consuming your episodes. "Subscription" means that the listener heard an episode by using the feed for your podcast. "Direct" means the listener clicked a link and downloaded the audio file directly. "Embed" means the listener used the embeddable player to play the episode from a web page. Subscriber History: Whenever your feed is downloaded, Pinecast remembers the fingerprint of that user. Pinecast will only mark a subscriber a single time in any 24-hour window. Note that this is not a great metric for measuring podcast success; there is no foolproof means of tracking the number of subscribers. Listens by Device: When Pinecast can determine what type of device an episode was listened to on, it will break that down here. Note that some podcast software does not reveal this information. Listens by Browser: If Pinecrest can determine the software used to listen to the podcast, it will break that down here. Note that some podcast software will identify itself as other applications (e.g., some applications will identify themselves as iTunes, even though they are not). Listens by OS: If Pinecast can determine the operating system of the listener, it will be broken down in this section.

                    In general, they remind me of podbean stats. So, yes, they have stats. 

                    Why You Can't Rely on iTunes

                    I started a podcast called the Podcast New Flash. It's a daily show m-f with quick headlines, reviews, etc. I made it for the Amazon Echo (you can add it to your daily news). I late added it to Twitter and Facebook. I average about 30 downloads. I kept it this way for a month. Then I added it to iTunes. I didn't tell a soul that it was now on iTunes. This way I could see the effect of "being in iTunes." What was the effect of being in iTunes? Almost nothing. Previously I would get around 30 downloads an episode (all twitter and facebook). Now I get 35. I might have 10% of my downloads coming from my RSS feed (meaning subscribers). 

                    So what this means is that you need to go to where your audience is, make friends, listen to them, and then tell them about your podcast. Being in iTunes is not the holy grail. It's a convenient place to tell your audience where to go. A better solution is to have a subscribe button on your website. 

                    Now granted this is a hyper-niche podcast about podcasting, but I still think you need to realize that it may not bring you a ton of listens. 

                    Update on the Messengers a Podcast Documentary

                    BIG NEWS: The Historic Tampa Theatre has confirmed to play our Movie The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary as one of its selection. The tickets will be $11 for anyone that would want to attend.

                    Here is the info: Messengers Premiere: Wed March 22nd @Tampa Theatre Ticket price for family and friends $11 per person Theatre opens@ 6:30pm 

                    Soundcloud Is Still Losing LOTS of Money

                    $51.22 million last year. That's $140,329 A DAY see http://www.musicbusinessworldwide.com/soundcloud-may-run-out-of-cash-this-year-as-it-posts-e51m-loss/

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Avoid the headaches, avoid spending too much on equipment, avoid website issues, join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>Jeremy Dennis explains how he was able to commission a custom comic book cover thanks to his supporters. 
                    New Edison Research on Podcasting

                    Edison Research did a telephone survey of 2000 people ages 12 and older. Here are some of the results related to podcasting:

                    81% of the respondents own a smartphone (up from 76%). It's actually gone up 22% in two years.

                    50% of people have a Netflix account (more on that later)

                    60% of people (168 million) are familiar with podcasting (up from 55% last year)

                    40% have ever listened to a podcast (up from 35% last year). 10 Years ago is was 13%

                    24% listen to a podcast in the last month (up from 21%)

                    15% listen weekly (up from 13%)

                    The people who listened weekly average five episodes per week. 

                    Their data shows 65% is mobile (Libsyn says this is closer to 80%)

                    40% listen to the whole thing. 45% listen to most of it. 10% listen to less than half. 5% listen to just the beginning.

                    77% Click on and listen immediately (stream). 41% download and listen later. 2&% subscribe and listen later

                    People that subscribe, are subscribed to an average of six podcasts.

                    Each year since 2004 these numbers have gone up every single year. 

                    Get the slides and see the presentation at http://www.edisonresearch.com/infinite-dial-2017/

                    One More Thing..

                    50% of people have a Netflix account, and 43% of them use it on a weekly basis

                    60% of people are familiar with a podcast. 40% have listened to one, but 24% listen monthly, and 15% listen weekly. Why? In my opinion, you have a better chance at finding quality programming in Netflix than you do in iTunes. I'm going to do some random experiments on this going forward. 

                    Pinecast is a new "Free" media hosting service.

                    It is founded by Matt Basta who is an engineer for Uber.  It was founded in August of 2015 (per his LinkedIn profile). 

                    Their free hosting has the following features:

                    • Demo accounts are limited to three podcasts per account.
                    • The podcast import tool is not available for demo accounts.
                    • An unlimited number of episodes may be added, but only the most recent ten episodes will be available to view in the podcast dashboard and the podcast RSS feed.* 
                    • Episode audio is limited to 48MB (per episode). You are free, however, to split episodes into smaller episodes.
                    • Only a small subset of the basic analytics will be available. This includes subscriber and listener counts.
                    • Episode descriptions will contain a link to Pinecast.
                    
                    

                    Episodes older than the most recent ten are not deleted, but they are not available to view or edit. Upgrading your plan will make them available again.

                    Upgrading to a plan will remove the link to Pinecast from the show's episode descriptions.

                    All analytics data that is collected for higher-tier plans will always be collected for all podcasts (even ones owned by demo accounts), meaning analytics data will retroactively be provided if the account is upgraded.

                    Unavailable Features

                    The following features are not available to demo accounts:
                    • Feedback
                    • Geo analytics
                    • Import tool
                    • Ability to create networks
                    • Embeddable (HTML5) player
                    • Bittorrent downloads
                    • Podcast website or blog
                    
                    

                    They have a demo (free) account, Starter ($5/month) and Pro ($50) a month. 

                    The pro plans allow you to create a network, and allow you to receive comments on your page, as well as have multiple users on your account. 

                    Their free (known as "Community" plans meet the following requirements:

                    These plans may not be used exclusively for marketing, evangelical, or other promotional purposes of any sort. The user's content must provide unique creative or informational value. 

                    Things that seem cool but aren't

                    Subscriber counts are pointless. If I subscribe on my phone, my tablet and iTunes it's going to potentially show me as three separate subscribers. I do give them credit for being blatantly honest. On their website it states, "Pinecast will only mark a subscriber a single time in any 24-hour window. Note that this is not a great metric for measuring podcast success; there is no foolproof means of tracking the number of subscribers."

                    There is a tip jar where you put in your bank account information, and when someone leaves you a tip, it goes to your bank. This is done securely through Stripe, but Pinecast is also going to take another 5%.  As this is not available on the free plan, I'm not sure why they feel the need to take a cut. Keep in mind that you can make your PayPal donation button in about 2 minutes. 

                    Their podcast site needs work, and you have one shot to get it right. I uploaded artwork that was made to the spec they suggested. It looked horrible when I went to go back and upload a new version that was not an option. 

                    So here is my checklist

                    1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download. - Pass 2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage) - Pass 3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth) - Pass 4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script. - Yes, but you have to ask 5. Give me support. - Yes, Matt answered my email about redirection fairly promptly.  6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business - Yes. But there is a chance he may get overloaded with free customers.  7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate. - Very basic stats

                    What About the Almighty Stats?

                    Listens by Source: This is a breakdown of how your audience is consuming your episodes. "Subscription" means that the listener heard an episode by using the feed for your podcast. "Direct" means the listener clicked a link and downloaded the audio file directly. "Embed" means the listener used the embeddable player to play the episode from a web page. Subscriber History: Whenever your feed is downloaded, Pinecast remembers the fingerprint of that user. Pinecast will only mark a subscriber a single time in any 24-hour window. Note that this is not a great metric for measuring podcast success; there is no foolproof means of tracking the number of subscribers. Listens by Device: When Pinecast can determine what type of device an episode was listened to on, it will break that down here. Note that some podcast software does not reveal this information. Listens by Browser: If Pinecrest can determine the software used to listen to the podcast, it will break that down here. Note that some podcast software will identify itself as other applications (e.g., some applications will identify themselves as iTunes, even though they are not). Listens by OS: If Pinecast can determine the operating system of the listener, it will be broken down in this section.

                    In general, they remind me of podbean stats. So, yes, they have stats. 

                    Why You Can't Rely on iTunes

                    I started a podcast called the Podcast New Flash. It's a daily show m-f with quick headlines, reviews, etc. I made it for the Amazon Echo (you can add it to your daily news). I late added it to Twitter and Facebook. I average about 30 downloads. I kept it this way for a month. Then I added it to iTunes. I didn't tell a soul that it was now on iTunes. This way I could see the effect of "being in iTunes." What was the effect of being in iTunes? Almost nothing. Previously I would get around 30 downloads an episode (all twitter and facebook). Now I get 35. I might have 10% of my downloads coming from my RSS feed (meaning subscribers). 

                    So what this means is that you need to go to where your audience is, make friends, listen to them, and then tell them about your podcast. Being in iTunes is not the holy grail. It's a convenient place to tell your audience where to go. A better solution is to have a subscribe button on your website. 

                    Now granted this is a hyper-niche podcast about podcasting, but I still think you need to realize that it may not bring you a ton of listens. 

                    Update on the Messengers a Podcast Documentary

                    BIG NEWS: The Historic Tampa Theatre has confirmed to play our Movie The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary as one of its selection. The tickets will be $11 for anyone that would want to attend.

                    Here is the info: Messengers Premiere: Wed March 22nd @Tampa Theatre Ticket price for family and friends $11 per person Theatre opens@ 6:30pm 

                    Soundcloud Is Still Losing LOTS of Money

                    $51.22 million last year. That's $140,329 A DAY see http://www.musicbusinessworldwide.com/soundcloud-may-run-out-of-cash-this-year-as-it-posts-e51m-loss/

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Avoid the headaches, avoid spending too much on equipment, avoid website issues, join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>bda6243d9930a63a2bdd0eadd93176f0Mon, 13 Mar 2017 04:22:04 -040040:07falsefull557557Journalism 101 For PodcastersYou can be the media. In a world where what is and is not true, you have the power and distribution to be your own media outlet. I have known Emily Prokop (of the Story Behind Podcast) as we run in the same circles, but I was unaware of her background in Journalism. So when I heard she had a degree in Journalism, I asked to come on and share some Journalism 101 insights. These include:
                    1. The importance of headlines
                    2. Getting to the point.
                    3. How to structure your podcast using the Inverted Pyramid
                    4. Give people an idea of where they are going
                    5. Show notes broken into small sections using Subheadings are more informative than giant blocks of text.
                    6. How she got over "going solo."
                    7. How to write out your show script that won't results in tons of editing
                    8. What websites are good resources.
                    9. Extra steps you can take to make sure your source is trustworthy.
                    10. Her thoughts on using a Libsyn Podcast Page
                    11. #podernfamily hashtag
                    12. The importance of not inflating your numbers
                    13. Interview tips, and making sure you get the most out of your guest.
                    14. Talking about sensitive subjects.
                    15. How long does it take to produce a well researched 10 minute podcast?
                    16. Her early days of podcasting with a microphone from the Rock band video game.
                    
                    Behind the Scenes of Podfading

                    Emily's first show didn't end well, so she shares some insights into how they didn't set expectations, and in the end it didn't end well. So if you are starting a podcast with a co-host, be sure to make sure everyone knows what is and is not expected. This way you can get back to making content, and not worry about what happens if..... with your podcast as you've already set your expectations.

                    About the Story Behind

                    The extraordinary history of the ordinary. Do you like trivia and fun facts? Have you lost hours to Wikipedia rabbit holes? Do you ever wonder about the history of everyday things in your world? The Story Behind ... is the show for you!. Check it out on iTunes, TuneIn, Stitcher, Google Play Music or on her website at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com

                    Final Thoughts

                    Unlike newspapers and radio, we don't have those MUST HIT deadlines. While you want to publish on a regular basis, we can make sure that the episode is right before we publish it. You can get the best resources (see podcastingresources.com), whip up a great headline, and come out of the gate with great content.

                    Mentioned In This Podcast

                    The Story Behind Podcast

                    How to Male Great Headlines

                    Podcasting Resources

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    ]]>You can be the media. In a world where what is and is not true, you have the power and distribution to be your own media outlet. I have known Emily Prokop (of the Story Behind Podcast) as we run in the same circles, but I was unaware of her background in Journalism. So when I heard she had a degree in Journalism, I asked to come on and share some Journalism 101 insights. These include:
                    1. The importance of headlines
                    2. Getting to the point.
                    3. How to structure your podcast using the Inverted Pyramid
                    4. Give people an idea of where they are going
                    5. Show notes broken into small sections using Subheadings are more informative than giant blocks of text.
                    6. How she got over "going solo."
                    7. How to write out your show script that won't results in tons of editing
                    8. What websites are good resources.
                    9. Extra steps you can take to make sure your source is trustworthy.
                    10. Her thoughts on using a Libsyn Podcast Page
                    11. #podernfamily hashtag
                    12. The importance of not inflating your numbers
                    13. Interview tips, and making sure you get the most out of your guest.
                    14. Talking about sensitive subjects.
                    15. How long does it take to produce a well researched 10 minute podcast?
                    16. Her early days of podcasting with a microphone from the Rock band video game.
                    
                    Behind the Scenes of Podfading

                    Emily's first show didn't end well, so she shares some insights into how they didn't set expectations, and in the end it didn't end well. So if you are starting a podcast with a co-host, be sure to make sure everyone knows what is and is not expected. This way you can get back to making content, and not worry about what happens if..... with your podcast as you've already set your expectations.

                    About the Story Behind

                    The extraordinary history of the ordinary. Do you like trivia and fun facts? Have you lost hours to Wikipedia rabbit holes? Do you ever wonder about the history of everyday things in your world? The Story Behind ... is the show for you!. Check it out on iTunes, TuneIn, Stitcher, Google Play Music or on her website at www.thestorybehindpodcast.com

                    Final Thoughts

                    Unlike newspapers and radio, we don't have those MUST HIT deadlines. While you want to publish on a regular basis, we can make sure that the episode is right before we publish it. You can get the best resources (see podcastingresources.com), whip up a great headline, and come out of the gate with great content.

                    Mentioned In This Podcast

                    The Story Behind Podcast

                    How to Male Great Headlines

                    Podcasting Resources

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    ]]>329180c7843f22700257cfd58fe3c67bMon, 06 Mar 2017 05:01:27 -040057:55falsefull556556My Favorite Episode Is - Podfest ReflectionsToday I'm back from Podfest in Orlando Florida. What a great show, there were tons of brand new podcasters looking to jump into the space. This week we share if you had one podcast episode that sticks in your brain, if so why.
                    Joining the Podcast Family

                    4:28 I share how the Podcast Family came to my rescue when I had a device fail when I got to Florida. Special thanks to Marc Johanssen of the Podcast Gear Facebook Group, and Michael O'Neal of the Solopreneur Hour who let me borrow gear to make my session happen when things broke during travel.

                    My Favorite Episode Is

                    09:35  Gabe from Guys and Food said his favorite episode(s) were from The Sporkful http://www.sporkful.com/calls-a-root-beer-float-to-cure-the-cancer-blues/ and http://www.sporkful.com/margaret-chos-eating-disorder-advice-to-a-teenage-girl/

                    Both were poignant and heartfelt depictions of people who are going through pain and the ways that they try to handle it. Their stories are told in an authentic and human way. These episodes stand on their own because of that. However, they especially stand out when juxtaposed to the other, more lighthearted episodes. It reminds me of the TV show MASH in this way.

                    11:42 Lee From This is Rammy loved and episode of the Social Media Examiner and one of the things he does't is recommend it to his friends.

                    14:12 Zack Demopoulos of the Rasing Rants Podcast loved the Story of Monty Roberts on the Relaunch Show with Joel Boggess 

                    18:12 Kuldryn from Kuldrin's Krypt loved the emotion behind episode three of the Messengers Podcast

                    21:30 Emily from the Story Behind Podcast loved the story of Charles Manson's Hollywood.

                    The Dave Jackson Two Question Challenge

                    25:36 The first question is what do you like about my show, the second question is what you wish I would change. Write and email with the title of "559" and send in a voicemail, or audio by 3/24

                    Behind the Scenes of My Podfest Presentation

                    My presentation got off to a rocky start, this lead to many voice in my head filled with panic. Things weren't turning out the way I wanted. When I was done, as things had not gone the way I wanted, I assumed it was awful. Yet I was approached by people who told me it was a great presentation. I've said this before, if you aim at perfect and miss, you'll land on really, really good.

                    Quit Obsessing Over Things That Don't Matter

                    People are failing to launch their podcast because they are obsessed over things that don't really matter (color of website, the player your are using). I don't recommend a podcast based on the player or color of the website.

                     

                    Mentioned in the Show

                    Grow Great Podcast

                    Lee Silverstein's Colon Cancer Podcast

                    Horse Radio Network

                    Ham Radio 360 Podcast

                    Kenn Blanchard - Black Man with a Gun

                    Kenn Blanchard Show

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>Today I'm back from Podfest in Orlando Florida. What a great show, there were tons of brand new podcasters looking to jump into the space. This week we share if you had one podcast episode that sticks in your brain, if so why.
                    Joining the Podcast Family

                    4:28 I share how the Podcast Family came to my rescue when I had a device fail when I got to Florida. Special thanks to Marc Johanssen of the Podcast Gear Facebook Group, and Michael O'Neal of the Solopreneur Hour who let me borrow gear to make my session happen when things broke during travel.

                    My Favorite Episode Is

                    09:35  Gabe from Guys and Food said his favorite episode(s) were from The Sporkful http://www.sporkful.com/calls-a-root-beer-float-to-cure-the-cancer-blues/ and http://www.sporkful.com/margaret-chos-eating-disorder-advice-to-a-teenage-girl/

                    Both were poignant and heartfelt depictions of people who are going through pain and the ways that they try to handle it. Their stories are told in an authentic and human way. These episodes stand on their own because of that. However, they especially stand out when juxtaposed to the other, more lighthearted episodes. It reminds me of the TV show MASH in this way.

                    11:42 Lee From This is Rammy loved and episode of the Social Media Examiner and one of the things he does't is recommend it to his friends.

                    14:12 Zack Demopoulos of the Rasing Rants Podcast loved the Story of Monty Roberts on the Relaunch Show with Joel Boggess 

                    18:12 Kuldryn from Kuldrin's Krypt loved the emotion behind episode three of the Messengers Podcast

                    21:30 Emily from the Story Behind Podcast loved the story of Charles Manson's Hollywood.

                    The Dave Jackson Two Question Challenge

                    25:36 The first question is what do you like about my show, the second question is what you wish I would change. Write and email with the title of "559" and send in a voicemail, or audio by 3/24

                    Behind the Scenes of My Podfest Presentation

                    My presentation got off to a rocky start, this lead to many voice in my head filled with panic. Things weren't turning out the way I wanted. When I was done, as things had not gone the way I wanted, I assumed it was awful. Yet I was approached by people who told me it was a great presentation. I've said this before, if you aim at perfect and miss, you'll land on really, really good.

                    Quit Obsessing Over Things That Don't Matter

                    People are failing to launch their podcast because they are obsessed over things that don't really matter (color of website, the player your are using). I don't recommend a podcast based on the player or color of the website.

                     

                    Mentioned in the Show

                    Grow Great Podcast

                    Lee Silverstein's Colon Cancer Podcast

                    Horse Radio Network

                    Ham Radio 360 Podcast

                    Kenn Blanchard - Black Man with a Gun

                    Kenn Blanchard Show

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>4248487742cf5747dcb4d85a2c683b91Mon, 27 Feb 2017 05:00:00 -040045:48falsefull555555Behind The Scenes of Creating a Local PodcastToday I share some insights after talking with 

                    Jason Norris of Podcast Logical

                    Chris Holifield of I Am Salt Lake

                    Lee of This is Rammy

                    Ken Blannchard from Upper Marlboro (and black man with a gun)

                    We hear what it is like to start a local podcast including:

                    The struggles to interview local "Mom an Pop" businesses

                    Is it easier/harder to get a local sponsor?

                    How they developed their format

                    How they are promoting the show.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    The School of Podcasting features:

                    Step by Step tutorials

                    Live group coaching

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>Today I share some insights after talking with 

                    Jason Norris of Podcast Logical

                    Chris Holifield of I Am Salt Lake

                    Lee of This is Rammy

                    Ken Blannchard from Upper Marlboro (and black man with a gun)

                    We hear what it is like to start a local podcast including:

                    The struggles to interview local "Mom an Pop" businesses

                    Is it easier/harder to get a local sponsor?

                    How they developed their format

                    How they are promoting the show.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    The School of Podcasting features:

                    Step by Step tutorials

                    Live group coaching

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>639ea41d785d71ceedfd9bf7b9b861ecMon, 20 Feb 2017 05:57:49 -040053:42falsefull554554Glenn Rubenstein - Podcast Advertising WorksComments? Call them in 888-563-3228

                    Today we talk with Glenn Rubenstein who is the author of the book Podcast Advertising Works. Glenn worked at the TWIT podcast network in both ad sales and as the company’s Director of Marketing. He is also the founder of Adopter Media (https://adopter.media/)

                    World Radio Day Get Hindenburgh Journalist For $1.90

                    You can purchase Hindenburg Journalist for $1.90 (Not a typo, typically $95) and help fight hunger. You can upgrade to their pro version for $215 (usually over $300). Need help learning the software? Check out the School of Podcasting's  Hindenburgh Journalist for Podcasting Course

                    Because of My Podcast - I'm Going to Spring Training for Free

                    Corey Fineran hosts the Ivy Envy Podcast, and shares how his audience is paying for him, his co-host (and their families) to go to the Chicago Cubs spring training in Arizona (in addition to making some great keepsakes for their studio).

                    Podcast Advertising Works - Glenn Rubenstein Interview

                    Glenn has been working in Ad Sales in podcasting for many years and today he shares some insights into:

                    What mistakes podcasters are making

                    What a future of dynamic advertising could look like

                    How to overcome common objections when trying to sell advertising

                    The book Podcast Advertising Works is great for someone who is trying to sell advertisements on their show.

                    If you want more about advertising and monetizing your show. Check out the Episodes with Jessica Kupferman, and Glenn The Geek Hebert

                    What Do You Mean When You Say Edit Your Podcast?

                    Today I'm going to play some clips of a podcast (friend of mine, who has come and said he should've edited) to help demonstrate things you should consider editing out of your show.

                    Michael Butler knows his episode was going down a dark path (he has spoken about this on his show). Luckily for those who know Michael and the Rock and Roll Geek show, we found it funny.

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Podcast Advertising Works 

                    Rock and Roll Geek show

                    The Bitterest Pill  Check out Dan Klass' book Podcasting Solutions

                    Adopter Media

                    Hindenburg Journalist Radio Day Promotion

                    Join the School of Podcasting Risk Free

                    www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/start

                    ]]>Comments? Call them in 888-563-3228

                    Today we talk with Glenn Rubenstein who is the author of the book Podcast Advertising Works. Glenn worked at the TWIT podcast network in both ad sales and as the company’s Director of Marketing. He is also the founder of Adopter Media (https://adopter.media/)

                    World Radio Day Get Hindenburgh Journalist For $1.90

                    You can purchase Hindenburg Journalist for $1.90 (Not a typo, typically $95) and help fight hunger. You can upgrade to their pro version for $215 (usually over $300). Need help learning the software? Check out the School of Podcasting's  Hindenburgh Journalist for Podcasting Course

                    Because of My Podcast - I'm Going to Spring Training for Free

                    Corey Fineran hosts the Ivy Envy Podcast, and shares how his audience is paying for him, his co-host (and their families) to go to the Chicago Cubs spring training in Arizona (in addition to making some great keepsakes for their studio).

                    Podcast Advertising Works - Glenn Rubenstein Interview

                    Glenn has been working in Ad Sales in podcasting for many years and today he shares some insights into:

                    What mistakes podcasters are making

                    What a future of dynamic advertising could look like

                    How to overcome common objections when trying to sell advertising

                    The book Podcast Advertising Works is great for someone who is trying to sell advertisements on their show.

                    If you want more about advertising and monetizing your show. Check out the Episodes with Jessica Kupferman, and Glenn The Geek Hebert

                    What Do You Mean When You Say Edit Your Podcast?

                    Today I'm going to play some clips of a podcast (friend of mine, who has come and said he should've edited) to help demonstrate things you should consider editing out of your show.

                    Michael Butler knows his episode was going down a dark path (he has spoken about this on his show). Luckily for those who know Michael and the Rock and Roll Geek show, we found it funny.

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Podcast Advertising Works 

                    Rock and Roll Geek show

                    The Bitterest Pill  Check out Dan Klass' book Podcasting Solutions

                    Adopter Media

                    Hindenburg Journalist Radio Day Promotion

                    Join the School of Podcasting Risk Free

                    www.schoolofpodcasitng.com/start

                    ]]>b25e09cafea784637e5a6587789495eaMon, 13 Feb 2017 05:00:00 -040051:22falsefull553553Podcasting Gives a Listener a Reason To LiveToday we have a serious subject that isn't so much about getting more downloads, and new cool gear, but the fact that your podcast can make a difference. I've helped people save money on fear, and help them launch podcasts. I've helped them find ways to grow their audience, and give them insights into creating better content on the Podcast Review Show. I've helped a listener of my Logical Weight Loss podcast lose 100 lbs. None of those compare to the email I received from the producer of Kuldryn's Krypt podcast.

                    Honestly, in September of last year, 2016, I had resolved get my affairs in order and to end my life on Halloween night, the greatest day of the year. I was introduced by complete chance to you. I was on Spreaker, did a search for podcasting and you came up. I chose to listen to you because my birth name is Ryan Jackson and I have a brother name David. Keep in mind I had never heard a podcast prior to this and I have no idea how I or why I was even on Spreaker's website...but I was and there was you were. I am a Patron because you gave me the tools to start my own podcast but more importantly you, YES! YOU! "The Dave Jackson, provided me with something to live for. My podcast isn't great, it isn't even good, BUT IT IS MINE and it provides me with the outlet I need to help other's and once again have a purpose in this world. It is just a very simple fact-if I had not found YOUR podcast when I did, on October 31st, 2017 11:55p.m. a bullet from a Taurus .38 Special would be ending my life. Thank you for never giving up and fighting through...I'm sure through your divorce and the issues with your family it hasn't been easy but Dave, I am will continue to be literal living proof that it's been worth it. Thank you!

                    So today we are going to talk about setting expectations, and crushing it, etc.

                    Suicide Among Entrepreneurs is a Problem We Should Talk About

                    30% of all entrepreneurs experience depression, according to a study by Dr. Michael Freeman, a clinical professor at the University of California, San Francisco. Depression among entrepreneurs is way higher than depression among Americans in general, which is estimated at about 7% — although that number could be even higher because of the stigma associated with talking about it.

                    Of the 242 entrepreneurs surveyed, 49% reported having a mental-health condition. Depression was the No. 1 reported condition among them and was present in 30% of all entrepreneurs, followed by ADHD (29%) and anxiety problems (27%). That's a much higher percentage than the US population at large, where only about 7% identify as depressed.

                     

                    Here are just some examples In May 2015, 31 year old Austen Heinz, CEO of Cambrian Genomics took his own life. In July, 29 year old Faigy Mayer, CEO of Appton jumped off a New York rooftop. 26 year old Aaron Schwartz, a partner at Reddit, hung himself in 2013. 47 year old Jody Sherman, founder of Ecomom shot himself that year. One of his colleagues, 24 year old Ovik Banerjee, followed a year later. 22 year old Ilya Zhitomirskiy, CEO of Diaspora, took his life in 2011.

                    In Las Vegas one project had three suicides. In an article The Downtown Project Suicides: Can the Pursuit of Happiness Kill You?  they mention Jody Sherman (4/13), Ovik Banerjee (1/14), and Matt Berman (4/14) – all people involved in the Vegas Tech phenomenon.

                    Some people are smart enough to see the writing on the wall. Rand Fishkin stepped down as CEO of Moz in part because of his depression.Rand Fishkin

                    In 2010, suicide was the highest cause of death for people aged 15-49, in the developed world. That’s way above death from lung cancer and murder. In 2013 Newsweek pointed out that the suicide rate in America had been increasing since 1999.

                    Why Is This Happening?

                    We get caught up in the should philosophy. I should have more downloads, more sponsors, more whatever. The bad news is your comparing yourself to someone's numbers who are potentially altered. We look at all the people "Crushing It" on Facebook, Twitter, and nobody sees the struggle. Should is fraught with guilt and remorse. It implies that you can’t change things.

                    So when we feel we are "falling Behind" we start to put poison in our bodies in the form of fast food, and other items that have no nutrition. We then cut back on our sleep to prove we are committed. In this instance when you need to be at the top of your game, you are filling it with junk, and robbing it of sleep. This is like buying cheap gas and punching a hole in your gas tank. Eventually the car is going to come to a quick stop.

                    We are told to DREAM BIG, and if we just focus on our dreams they will become a reality. This puts us into an anxious state, and that is NOT the time to be making decisions. Then we all get INSANELY Focused on our launch, and how we are going to come out of the gate at this breakneck speed, but then we are supposed to KEEP this pace. Anything less than a sprint is a lack of dedication. Think of joining a marathon an hour after it started. There is no way to catch up, but if you run the marathon that is still an undeniable feat. It is still something amazing that takes months of preparation, dedication, and is something a small percentage of people could accomplish. Yet you feel bad, because you're comparing yourself to others.

                     

                    How to Get Help

                    None of this is intended as medical advice. If you need help, there are people waiting for your call, both friends and professionals:1-800-SUICIDE (1-800-784-2433)1-800-273-TALK (1-800-273-8255)

                    A new Y Combinator-backed startup, 7 Cups of Tea, is trying to tackle one common problem: the affordability of help. When founders are running out of money for their company, that's rarely when they can shell out for a visit to a psychologist or other mental-health professionals.

                    Tim Ferris talks about this in his latest book and he's mentioned it on his podcast that he has struggled with depression. His advice is to adopt of attitude of gratitude.

                    Sources: http://feld.com/archives/2014/10/founder-suicides.html

                    http://www.businessinsider.com/austen-heinzs-suicide-and-depression-in-startups-2015-7

                    http://thehustle.co/depression-among-entrepreneurs-is-an-epidemic-nobody-is-talking-about

                    http://www.inc.com/magazine/201309/jessica-bruder/psychological-price-of-entrepreneurship.html

                    Ready To Start Podcasting? Don't Just Start a Podcast, Start a Podcast Right

                    Join the School of Podcasting and enjoy these valuable assets

                    Step by step tutorials that work on all platforms (Windows, Mac, iPad, etc)

                    Live Group Coaching - Get Your Questions Answered Live

                    Priority Email Support - Get your questions answered quickly

                    Private Facebook Group - Network, and brainstorm ideas.

                    30 Day Money Back Guarantee

                    Click Here to Join today

                    ]]>Today we have a serious subject that isn't so much about getting more downloads, and new cool gear, but the fact that your podcast can make a difference. I've helped people save money on fear, and help them launch podcasts. I've helped them find ways to grow their audience, and give them insights into creating better content on the Podcast Review Show. I've helped a listener of my Logical Weight Loss podcast lose 100 lbs. None of those compare to the email I received from the producer of Kuldryn's Krypt podcast.

                    Honestly, in September of last year, 2016, I had resolved get my affairs in order and to end my life on Halloween night, the greatest day of the year. I was introduced by complete chance to you. I was on Spreaker, did a search for podcasting and you came up. I chose to listen to you because my birth name is Ryan Jackson and I have a brother name David. Keep in mind I had never heard a podcast prior to this and I have no idea how I or why I was even on Spreaker's website...but I was and there was you were. I am a Patron because you gave me the tools to start my own podcast but more importantly you, YES! YOU! "The Dave Jackson, provided me with something to live for. My podcast isn't great, it isn't even good, BUT IT IS MINE and it provides me with the outlet I need to help other's and once again have a purpose in this world. It is just a very simple fact-if I had not found YOUR podcast when I did, on October 31st, 2017 11:55p.m. a bullet from a Taurus .38 Special would be ending my life. Thank you for never giving up and fighting through...I'm sure through your divorce and the issues with your family it hasn't been easy but Dave, I am will continue to be literal living proof that it's been worth it. Thank you!

                    So today we are going to talk about setting expectations, and crushing it, etc.

                    Suicide Among Entrepreneurs is a Problem We Should Talk About

                    30% of all entrepreneurs experience depression, according to a study by Dr. Michael Freeman, a clinical professor at the University of California, San Francisco. Depression among entrepreneurs is way higher than depression among Americans in general, which is estimated at about 7% — although that number could be even higher because of the stigma associated with talking about it.

                    Of the 242 entrepreneurs surveyed, 49% reported having a mental-health condition. Depression was the No. 1 reported condition among them and was present in 30% of all entrepreneurs, followed by ADHD (29%) and anxiety problems (27%). That's a much higher percentage than the US population at large, where only about 7% identify as depressed.

                     

                    Here are just some examples In May 2015, 31 year old Austen Heinz, CEO of Cambrian Genomics took his own life. In July, 29 year old Faigy Mayer, CEO of Appton jumped off a New York rooftop. 26 year old Aaron Schwartz, a partner at Reddit, hung himself in 2013. 47 year old Jody Sherman, founder of Ecomom shot himself that year. One of his colleagues, 24 year old Ovik Banerjee, followed a year later. 22 year old Ilya Zhitomirskiy, CEO of Diaspora, took his life in 2011.

                    In Las Vegas one project had three suicides. In an article The Downtown Project Suicides: Can the Pursuit of Happiness Kill You?  they mention Jody Sherman (4/13), Ovik Banerjee (1/14), and Matt Berman (4/14) – all people involved in the Vegas Tech phenomenon.

                    Some people are smart enough to see the writing on the wall. Rand Fishkin stepped down as CEO of Moz in part because of his depression.Rand Fishkin

                    In 2010, suicide was the highest cause of death for people aged 15-49, in the developed world. That’s way above death from lung cancer and murder. In 2013 Newsweek pointed out that the suicide rate in America had been increasing since 1999.

                    Why Is This Happening?

                    We get caught up in the should philosophy. I should have more downloads, more sponsors, more whatever. The bad news is your comparing yourself to someone's numbers who are potentially altered. We look at all the people "Crushing It" on Facebook, Twitter, and nobody sees the struggle. Should is fraught with guilt and remorse. It implies that you can’t change things.

                    So when we feel we are "falling Behind" we start to put poison in our bodies in the form of fast food, and other items that have no nutrition. We then cut back on our sleep to prove we are committed. In this instance when you need to be at the top of your game, you are filling it with junk, and robbing it of sleep. This is like buying cheap gas and punching a hole in your gas tank. Eventually the car is going to come to a quick stop.

                    We are told to DREAM BIG, and if we just focus on our dreams they will become a reality. This puts us into an anxious state, and that is NOT the time to be making decisions. Then we all get INSANELY Focused on our launch, and how we are going to come out of the gate at this breakneck speed, but then we are supposed to KEEP this pace. Anything less than a sprint is a lack of dedication. Think of joining a marathon an hour after it started. There is no way to catch up, but if you run the marathon that is still an undeniable feat. It is still something amazing that takes months of preparation, dedication, and is something a small percentage of people could accomplish. Yet you feel bad, because you're comparing yourself to others.

                     

                    How to Get Help

                    None of this is intended as medical advice. If you need help, there are people waiting for your call, both friends and professionals:1-800-SUICIDE (1-800-784-2433)1-800-273-TALK (1-800-273-8255)

                    A new Y Combinator-backed startup, 7 Cups of Tea, is trying to tackle one common problem: the affordability of help. When founders are running out of money for their company, that's rarely when they can shell out for a visit to a psychologist or other mental-health professionals.

                    Tim Ferris talks about this in his latest book and he's mentioned it on his podcast that he has struggled with depression. His advice is to adopt of attitude of gratitude.

                    Sources: http://feld.com/archives/2014/10/founder-suicides.html

                    http://www.businessinsider.com/austen-heinzs-suicide-and-depression-in-startups-2015-7

                    http://thehustle.co/depression-among-entrepreneurs-is-an-epidemic-nobody-is-talking-about

                    http://www.inc.com/magazine/201309/jessica-bruder/psychological-price-of-entrepreneurship.html

                    Ready To Start Podcasting? Don't Just Start a Podcast, Start a Podcast Right

                    Join the School of Podcasting and enjoy these valuable assets

                    Step by step tutorials that work on all platforms (Windows, Mac, iPad, etc)

                    Live Group Coaching - Get Your Questions Answered Live

                    Priority Email Support - Get your questions answered quickly

                    Private Facebook Group - Network, and brainstorm ideas.

                    30 Day Money Back Guarantee

                    Click Here to Join today

                    ]]>318f398a77ebef4ff29fc8c8453a00ffMon, 06 Feb 2017 05:00:00 -040051:48falsefull552552Podcasting Pet Peeves of My ListenersOnce a month this year, I'm going ask you a question and use those answers for an episode. I want to get to under you more, and in general get a better understand of what you like and dislike. This month I asked, "What are those things that make your go "Uggh" when listening to a podcast. They might make your even unsubscribe. SPONSOR: Emerald City Productions Get your first four episodes edited for $15 each (and only $40 after that – for shows up to 30 minutes). Just go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop(other companies are charging $99 an episode)
                    What Makes You Unsubscribe From a Podcast? Failure to Get to the Point

                    4:10 Haley Redke (Adopteeson.com) is not a fan of not getting to the point, and people that interrupt their guests. 5:33 Tracie Bonnick also hates when the podcast hosts hates it when the host of the podcast doesn't let the guest talk 6:05 Glenn the Geek Hebert of Horse Radio Network was on Podcast Junkies and said he hates it when the podcast hosts just runs down a list of questions 6:39 Brian Weber (bartenderjourney.net) hates it when people don't get to the point 7:15 Ishamael Colderon - Hates long intro 7:43 John Wilkerson (www.strugglingforpurpose.com ) hates a super long intro 10:00 Daryl hates a ton of ads at the beginning (Joe Rogan?) as in three minutes of nothing but ads. 11:00 James Aaron of https://2middleageddudes.wordpress.com/ hates people talking to hear themselves talk. 11:53 From new Father Daniel J Lewis (YEAH NOODLE BABY) from the Audacity to Podcast said, "I go "ugh" when a conversation with a guest starts with "getting to know you" stuff. I don't care about the guest's background until after I care about their message."

                    12:40 Riding the Volume Knob

                    13:10 Kathe Kline from Rock Your Retirement goes nuts when she has to keep adjusting the volume 14:30 John Hilman hates it when the hosts and guest have WAY different volume levels. 15:50 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast - Four People Around One Microphone makes her turn off the show immediately. 17:20 Kuldrin Fire (kuldrinskrypt.com ) hates the word, "Right" and having to ride the volume knob, and he hates when hosts put down other hosts.

                    19:50 Inside Jokes

                    20:15 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast when they forget they have new listeners and talk about things from past episodes 20:53 Mark Des Cotes from the Resourceful Designer  (and http://solotalkmedia.com/)hates it when TV Show podcasts refer to the actress name only (and not the character) 22:23 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast hates people who are note authentic and giant commercials.

                    Experts Who Don't Know What They're Talking About

                    24:00 Connie From the Small Business 101 Podcast couldn't believe the advice she heard about starting a business 27:00 Hall of Fame Podcaster Danny Peña from Gamer Tag Radio hates it when Podcasts about Podcasting promote the importance of New and Noteworthy (see newandnoteworthy.info ) 27:30 Cedric Green hates it when people Curse.(cookingwithceddy.ws - coming soon). It unprofessional and you can't listen to it with kids in the car. 28:35 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast judges harshly when easy to remove ums are not removed. 30.17 Michael Blakston (Road Noises Podcast) hates mouth noises

                     

                    32:00 Boomy Room Noise

                    33:14 Cheri Fields (Christian Science 4 Kids) had some show that were so boomy she couldn't understand the podcasters due to the room noise 35:07 Nivek Thompson of Real Democracy Now Podcast - hates when the host sounds like they are in a barn. 35:50 Chris Hache (chrishache.com) - If your podcast is not pleasing to my ears you are gone!

                    36:25 Things You Say That Drive Me Crazy

                    Try Price (Completely Comics) hates when a podcaster will "be right back." 37:12 Rob Kerns from Living the Vet Life - When a podcast is filled with complaints, but there are no solutions proposed. 38:55 Steve Stewart - hates it when people don't edit, and when people kinda, sort of, maybe, think about, taking action. 41:27 Cheri Fields (Christian Science 4 Kids) the ultimate pet peeve is when people can't listen to your show cause it doesn't work.

                    Start Your Podcast Today

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start 

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Live Group Coaching

                    ]]>Once a month this year, I'm going ask you a question and use those answers for an episode. I want to get to under you more, and in general get a better understand of what you like and dislike. This month I asked, "What are those things that make your go "Uggh" when listening to a podcast. They might make your even unsubscribe. SPONSOR: Emerald City Productions Get your first four episodes edited for $15 each (and only $40 after that – for shows up to 30 minutes). Just go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop(other companies are charging $99 an episode)
                    What Makes You Unsubscribe From a Podcast? Failure to Get to the Point

                    4:10 Haley Redke (Adopteeson.com) is not a fan of not getting to the point, and people that interrupt their guests. 5:33 Tracie Bonnick also hates when the podcast hosts hates it when the host of the podcast doesn't let the guest talk 6:05 Glenn the Geek Hebert of Horse Radio Network was on Podcast Junkies and said he hates it when the podcast hosts just runs down a list of questions 6:39 Brian Weber (bartenderjourney.net) hates it when people don't get to the point 7:15 Ishamael Colderon - Hates long intro 7:43 John Wilkerson (www.strugglingforpurpose.com ) hates a super long intro 10:00 Daryl hates a ton of ads at the beginning (Joe Rogan?) as in three minutes of nothing but ads. 11:00 James Aaron of https://2middleageddudes.wordpress.com/ hates people talking to hear themselves talk. 11:53 From new Father Daniel J Lewis (YEAH NOODLE BABY) from the Audacity to Podcast said, "I go "ugh" when a conversation with a guest starts with "getting to know you" stuff. I don't care about the guest's background until after I care about their message."

                    12:40 Riding the Volume Knob

                    13:10 Kathe Kline from Rock Your Retirement goes nuts when she has to keep adjusting the volume 14:30 John Hilman hates it when the hosts and guest have WAY different volume levels. 15:50 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast - Four People Around One Microphone makes her turn off the show immediately. 17:20 Kuldrin Fire (kuldrinskrypt.com ) hates the word, "Right" and having to ride the volume knob, and he hates when hosts put down other hosts.

                    19:50 Inside Jokes

                    20:15 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast when they forget they have new listeners and talk about things from past episodes 20:53 Mark Des Cotes from the Resourceful Designer  (and http://solotalkmedia.com/)hates it when TV Show podcasts refer to the actress name only (and not the character) 22:23 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast hates people who are note authentic and giant commercials.

                    Experts Who Don't Know What They're Talking About

                    24:00 Connie From the Small Business 101 Podcast couldn't believe the advice she heard about starting a business 27:00 Hall of Fame Podcaster Danny Peña from Gamer Tag Radio hates it when Podcasts about Podcasting promote the importance of New and Noteworthy (see newandnoteworthy.info ) 27:30 Cedric Green hates it when people Curse.(cookingwithceddy.ws - coming soon). It unprofessional and you can't listen to it with kids in the car. 28:35 Emily from The Story Behind Podcast judges harshly when easy to remove ums are not removed. 30.17 Michael Blakston (Road Noises Podcast) hates mouth noises

                     

                    32:00 Boomy Room Noise

                    33:14 Cheri Fields (Christian Science 4 Kids) had some show that were so boomy she couldn't understand the podcasters due to the room noise 35:07 Nivek Thompson of Real Democracy Now Podcast - hates when the host sounds like they are in a barn. 35:50 Chris Hache (chrishache.com) - If your podcast is not pleasing to my ears you are gone!

                    36:25 Things You Say That Drive Me Crazy

                    Try Price (Completely Comics) hates when a podcaster will "be right back." 37:12 Rob Kerns from Living the Vet Life - When a podcast is filled with complaints, but there are no solutions proposed. 38:55 Steve Stewart - hates it when people don't edit, and when people kinda, sort of, maybe, think about, taking action. 41:27 Cheri Fields (Christian Science 4 Kids) the ultimate pet peeve is when people can't listen to your show cause it doesn't work.

                    Start Your Podcast Today

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start 

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Live Group Coaching

                    ]]>780ce91af79455c703d1dd2a996e4c3aMon, 30 Jan 2017 05:00:00 -040051:50falsefull551551Behind the Scenes of the Horse Radio NetworkToday we go deep into running the business that is The Horse Radio Network. We talk with America's Horse Husband Glenn "the Geek" Hebert

                    SPONSOR: Emerald City Productions

                    Get your first four episodes edited for $15 each (and only $40 after that - for shows up to 30 minutes). Just go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop (other companies are charging $99 an episode)

                    Because of my Podcast: Ravi Jayagopal

                    Ravi is the man behind Digital Access Pass which is a great membership script if you're looking to turn your Wordpress Website into a Membership site.

                    Ravi shares how starting his Subscribe Me and Cut to the Chase Podcasts has boosted sales, introduced him to new friends and resources, got consulting clients, and created doors where none existed.

                    Check out Ravi's "Subscribe Me" Book, His Subscribe Me podcast, and his Wordpress Player "Cool Cast" Player

                    Glenn The Geek Takes Us Behind The Operations of The Horse Radio Podcast Network.

                    What a typical day looks like

                    The rules of setting up additional shows

                    What media group is RIPE to start their own podcast

                    What Glenn does with his advertisers to keep them engaged

                    Check out Glenn at www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Glenn was on the SOP talking about Sponsorships

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Dealing With My Grief Podcast

                    Podfest.us February in Florida

                    Podcast Engineering School (Chris was on a previous show)

                    Digital Access Pass

                    My Podcast Reviews

                    Confessions of a Wannabe PodcaSTAR: The Biggest Podcasting Myths Busted

                    Honestly: My Life and Stryper Revealed

                    Divi Wordpress Theme

                    Not Sure Where To Start With Podcasting?

                    Free video course "Podcast baby steps" will show you in bite size chunks what to do.

                     

                    ]]>Today we go deep into running the business that is The Horse Radio Network. We talk with America's Horse Husband Glenn "the Geek" Hebert

                    SPONSOR: Emerald City Productions

                    Get your first four episodes edited for $15 each (and only $40 after that - for shows up to 30 minutes). Just go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop (other companies are charging $99 an episode)

                    Because of my Podcast: Ravi Jayagopal

                    Ravi is the man behind Digital Access Pass which is a great membership script if you're looking to turn your Wordpress Website into a Membership site.

                    Ravi shares how starting his Subscribe Me and Cut to the Chase Podcasts has boosted sales, introduced him to new friends and resources, got consulting clients, and created doors where none existed.

                    Check out Ravi's "Subscribe Me" Book, His Subscribe Me podcast, and his Wordpress Player "Cool Cast" Player

                    Glenn The Geek Takes Us Behind The Operations of The Horse Radio Podcast Network.

                    What a typical day looks like

                    The rules of setting up additional shows

                    What media group is RIPE to start their own podcast

                    What Glenn does with his advertisers to keep them engaged

                    Check out Glenn at www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Glenn was on the SOP talking about Sponsorships

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Dealing With My Grief Podcast

                    Podfest.us February in Florida

                    Podcast Engineering School (Chris was on a previous show)

                    Digital Access Pass

                    My Podcast Reviews

                    Confessions of a Wannabe PodcaSTAR: The Biggest Podcasting Myths Busted

                    Honestly: My Life and Stryper Revealed

                    Divi Wordpress Theme

                    Not Sure Where To Start With Podcasting?

                    Free video course "Podcast baby steps" will show you in bite size chunks what to do.

                     

                    ]]>c24c063c7f6e53af5ac12d364d177c01Mon, 23 Jan 2017 05:00:00 -040058:11falsefull550550Spreaker Introduces Ad Revenue SystemI was reading an article where West Word was interviewing Dana Gould (Who I find hilarious) and they asked him he still does his podcast (the Dana Gould Hour) while now running/writing the show Stan Against Evil. Here is what Dana said,

                    “I cite the podcast as the things that literally made everything else possible. It keeps my name out there and connects my audience. I think the reason that I’m still allowed to work in clubs is because my podcast has nurtured and cultivated my fan base to the point that people show up. Because if people don’t show up, you don’t get hired. And I think the podcast is very much responsible for that.

                    – Full article

                    Dana Gould Hour on iTunes

                    Dana Gould Hour on Stitcher

                    Spreaker Unveils Beta Ad Revenue Share Program

                    Spreaker.com is a podcast media hosting company that has the added bonus of being ale to stream your podcast live. The recently rolled out an ad revenue program. The program right now is beta, and only for US users. It allows you to have a 30 second preroll ad (meaning it is the first thing that starts your show, it goes before the show - pre-roll). There is some new terminology

                    Requests - The number of times your episode is called (most of us would refer to this as a download, but in this case Spreaker is streaming the file) Impressions - This is how many times an ad was in your request

                    Currently impressions will only appear if you're using the spreaker player on your website (again, this is beta, more features coming)

                    You won't have ads through your RSS feed

                    Some advertisers have a geographic specification so that they only run ads in certain area. I had an ad for a college in Cleveland Ohio (I live on Akron)

                    Podcast Glossary "L"

                    Levelator

                    Levelator is a free program (mac and PC) and allows you to drag a file into the software and it will adjust the volume level to be consistent. For example if you have an interview and you are louder than the guest, the Levelator software will adjust the audio of your guest to match your volume. You can find it at http://www.conversationsnetwork.org/levelator

                    Libsyn

                    Liberated Syndication (libsyn) pioneered the system to host and publish podcasts in 2004. And since then has grown to the largest leading podcast network with over 2.6 billion downloads in 2014. Libsyn hosts over 25,000 shows with 44 million monthly audience member. Find it at www.libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    My Podcast Launch Kit

                    I had someone said to me, I don't want to think about it, I trust you. Tell me what to do.

                    Well, there is no one size fits all, but here are some things that I recommend:

                    I say use a self hosted Wordpress Website. I do not like Blue host, or dreamhost, I am moving my things to Coolerwebsites.com which is my reseller account for Godaddy. I've also used Hostgator.

                    I use Libsyn for my media hosting and distribution. I used them 10 years before I started working for them in 2016.

                    For my Wordpress theme I use Appendipty themes which run on the Genesis platform, or if your situation is a website that has a podcast, I like the Elegant themes Divi (which I will be using on this website later this year)

                    The Actual "Launch"

                    I would record a few episodes. This lets me see how much it takes to get create an episode, and then it lets me decide what my publishing scheduling.

                    I would ask some people who are my target audience to listen, and get feedback. The goal is to ensure you are delivering value that makes people do one (or more ) of the following:

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Groan
                    • Educate
                    • Entertain
                    
                    

                    I would have a few "in the can" (which means recorded but not released) if possible so that if life happens you can still publish without missing your schedule.

                    Publish an episode or two (I don't believe you need  3, 5, 8 episodes - unless you have content coming out of your ears) and then list them in the following directories

                    • iTunes
                    • Stitcher
                    • Google Play Music
                    • TuneIn
                    
                    

                    Most apps like pocketcasts and overcast pull from iTunes.

                    Then you tell everyone you know, use email, social media, etc. You might try creating a Thunderclap campaign, and then use social jukebox or Buffer.com to promote your episodes as they go out

                    Sponsored By Emerald City Productions

                    Get your first four episodes (up to 30 minutes per episode) edited for $15 each. From head to toe you will sound great. Go to www.emeraldcitpro.com/sop

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Mark Neslon Show

                    Thunderclap campaign

                    Coolerwebsites.com

                    Dana Gould Hour on iTunes

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    School of Podcasting - Podcasting Courses

                    ]]>I was reading an article where West Word was interviewing Dana Gould (Who I find hilarious) and they asked him he still does his podcast (the Dana Gould Hour) while now running/writing the show Stan Against Evil. Here is what Dana said,

                    “I cite the podcast as the things that literally made everything else possible. It keeps my name out there and connects my audience. I think the reason that I’m still allowed to work in clubs is because my podcast has nurtured and cultivated my fan base to the point that people show up. Because if people don’t show up, you don’t get hired. And I think the podcast is very much responsible for that.

                    – Full article

                    Dana Gould Hour on iTunes

                    Dana Gould Hour on Stitcher

                    Spreaker Unveils Beta Ad Revenue Share Program

                    Spreaker.com is a podcast media hosting company that has the added bonus of being ale to stream your podcast live. The recently rolled out an ad revenue program. The program right now is beta, and only for US users. It allows you to have a 30 second preroll ad (meaning it is the first thing that starts your show, it goes before the show - pre-roll). There is some new terminology

                    Requests - The number of times your episode is called (most of us would refer to this as a download, but in this case Spreaker is streaming the file) Impressions - This is how many times an ad was in your request

                    Currently impressions will only appear if you're using the spreaker player on your website (again, this is beta, more features coming)

                    You won't have ads through your RSS feed

                    Some advertisers have a geographic specification so that they only run ads in certain area. I had an ad for a college in Cleveland Ohio (I live on Akron)

                    Podcast Glossary "L"

                    Levelator

                    Levelator is a free program (mac and PC) and allows you to drag a file into the software and it will adjust the volume level to be consistent. For example if you have an interview and you are louder than the guest, the Levelator software will adjust the audio of your guest to match your volume. You can find it at http://www.conversationsnetwork.org/levelator

                    Libsyn

                    Liberated Syndication (libsyn) pioneered the system to host and publish podcasts in 2004. And since then has grown to the largest leading podcast network with over 2.6 billion downloads in 2014. Libsyn hosts over 25,000 shows with 44 million monthly audience member. Find it at www.libsyn.com (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    My Podcast Launch Kit

                    I had someone said to me, I don't want to think about it, I trust you. Tell me what to do.

                    Well, there is no one size fits all, but here are some things that I recommend:

                    I say use a self hosted Wordpress Website. I do not like Blue host, or dreamhost, I am moving my things to Coolerwebsites.com which is my reseller account for Godaddy. I've also used Hostgator.

                    I use Libsyn for my media hosting and distribution. I used them 10 years before I started working for them in 2016.

                    For my Wordpress theme I use Appendipty themes which run on the Genesis platform, or if your situation is a website that has a podcast, I like the Elegant themes Divi (which I will be using on this website later this year)

                    The Actual "Launch"

                    I would record a few episodes. This lets me see how much it takes to get create an episode, and then it lets me decide what my publishing scheduling.

                    I would ask some people who are my target audience to listen, and get feedback. The goal is to ensure you are delivering value that makes people do one (or more ) of the following:

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Groan
                    • Educate
                    • Entertain
                    
                    

                    I would have a few "in the can" (which means recorded but not released) if possible so that if life happens you can still publish without missing your schedule.

                    Publish an episode or two (I don't believe you need  3, 5, 8 episodes - unless you have content coming out of your ears) and then list them in the following directories

                    • iTunes
                    • Stitcher
                    • Google Play Music
                    • TuneIn
                    
                    

                    Most apps like pocketcasts and overcast pull from iTunes.

                    Then you tell everyone you know, use email, social media, etc. You might try creating a Thunderclap campaign, and then use social jukebox or Buffer.com to promote your episodes as they go out

                    Sponsored By Emerald City Productions

                    Get your first four episodes (up to 30 minutes per episode) edited for $15 each. From head to toe you will sound great. Go to www.emeraldcitpro.com/sop

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Mark Neslon Show

                    Thunderclap campaign

                    Coolerwebsites.com

                    Dana Gould Hour on iTunes

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    School of Podcasting - Podcasting Courses

                    ]]>24816f3e0ef17b29e2be5c429281b579Mon, 16 Jan 2017 05:00:00 -040036:57falsefull549549A Great Example of Podcasting For Your BusinessCale Nelson of Ham Radio 360 sent in a great story where a listener told him NOTt to make dinner the Thursday before Christmas. Then sent Cale a giant box of Barbecue. When you've got a houseful of kids, and your wife is happy because the food is excellent, and she didn't have to cook it - it's a big win.

                    Check out Cale's show at HamRadio360.com

                    Starting a Podcast Your Customer Wants To Hear

                    Should your business have a podcast? Probably. It's a great way to get in front of your target audience no matter where they are. I was asked to be on a new podcast coming out today (my episode is in the future) and its from Tim Sinclair. You may or may not know that name, but I'll reveal who his is in a second. I just checked out his site and then it hit me. This is a great example of using a podcast for your business.

                    Tim Sinclair is the CEO of Ringr . This is an app and service that allows you to record both sides of an interview. If you're worried about doing a "mix minus" then you may want to check out this service. Plans start at $7.99 a month for the basic, and $18.99 for the premium. For more information go to http://ringr.com/podcastcoach

                    The people that use Tim's technology interview people and want a good recording. There are two ways to learn things. You can be shown how to do it right, or your can bring in those two famous trainers that seem to help everyone. You may know them as Trial and Error. They are not very efficient, but their lessons cut deep. You want your podcast to do one of these things

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Groan
                    • Educate
                    • Entertain
                    
                    

                    If you have your show do more than one of the above, you're headed in the right direction.

                    So what Tim did is launch a podcast filled with fun, entertaining stories that can be educational as well. The podcast is called My Worst Interview Ever.  He has interviewed people like Cliff Ravenscraft, The Mobile Pro Shawn Smith, The App Guy Paul Kemp, XM Radio’s Doug Hannah, Blubrry’s Todd Cochrane, Libsyn’s Rob Walch, syndicated radio host Brant Hansen, Dave Jackson, Dan Franks, Jeff Brown, Daniel J. Lewis. The stories I understand are hilarious. The first episode is John Lee Dumas talking about his worst interview ( a rock icon famous for selling coffins).

                    So when creating a podcast, one strategy is to create a podcast that your target audience wants to hear. Tim identified his audience and has come up with a fun and entertaining way to produce good content without making his show a giant infomercial. Remember, nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose.

                    The next thing I like is Tim is already in iTunes and Stitcher. He doesn't seem too worried about the magical happy place of New and Noteworthy and his first eight weeks. With content like this, I bet he'll get listed because he didn't name his show wtf this week in cold cases on fire.

                    He also made sure  NOT to make it giant Ringr commercial. He does a quick mention in the middle. He understands the idea is to build an audience first.

                    Check out his show at worstinterviews.com and check out his service at ringr.com

                    A Not Great Example

                    The Penzu podcast is meant to help promote their company (penzu.com which I love and use)

                    Nobody is looking for "Penzu" that doesn't know then) so how is this supposed to bring in new people?

                    They are using Soundcloud as their platform (who are leaking money). Switch to Libsyn.com and your back catalog comes for free during the first quarter of 2017, and get a free month using the coupon code sopfree 

                    Their titles look awful. 

                    There is no description. 

                    They only have seven episodes (which is fine), but they have the podcast in their software (so their customers have had "episode 7 in their platform all year)

                    Back to the Basics Of Your Website

                    I recently did the "Favorite Podcast Ever" show where you sent in your favorite podcasts and explained why they were your favorite. I always then go to the website of those show and share that someone thinks you're the best. I am amazed at some of the things I find. Before we get into those, you do need to decide what your website is for. By this mean I mean if your podcast is to drive leads to your business, then you might have a giant sign up form. If you're trying to grow your community, you might really be sending people to your Facebook group. So in the end, there is no one size fits all. However, there are two things I hear over and over and over. I hear, "I want more downloads, and I want more interaction." When I go to the websites of these people, there are no links to subscribe to their show. There is no easy way to contact you. One person I had to tweet at (and their twitter account was waaaay at the bottom of their screen). 

                    I had someone who was going to hire me to help him get more subscribers. I went to their website, and said you don't need to pay me for this, but there isn't a single subscriber button on your website. 

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting or Schedule some One on One Consulting

                    ]]>Cale Nelson of Ham Radio 360 sent in a great story where a listener told him NOTt to make dinner the Thursday before Christmas. Then sent Cale a giant box of Barbecue. When you've got a houseful of kids, and your wife is happy because the food is excellent, and she didn't have to cook it - it's a big win.

                    Check out Cale's show at HamRadio360.com

                    Starting a Podcast Your Customer Wants To Hear

                    Should your business have a podcast? Probably. It's a great way to get in front of your target audience no matter where they are. I was asked to be on a new podcast coming out today (my episode is in the future) and its from Tim Sinclair. You may or may not know that name, but I'll reveal who his is in a second. I just checked out his site and then it hit me. This is a great example of using a podcast for your business.

                    Tim Sinclair is the CEO of Ringr . This is an app and service that allows you to record both sides of an interview. If you're worried about doing a "mix minus" then you may want to check out this service. Plans start at $7.99 a month for the basic, and $18.99 for the premium. For more information go to http://ringr.com/podcastcoach

                    The people that use Tim's technology interview people and want a good recording. There are two ways to learn things. You can be shown how to do it right, or your can bring in those two famous trainers that seem to help everyone. You may know them as Trial and Error. They are not very efficient, but their lessons cut deep. You want your podcast to do one of these things

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Groan
                    • Educate
                    • Entertain
                    
                    

                    If you have your show do more than one of the above, you're headed in the right direction.

                    So what Tim did is launch a podcast filled with fun, entertaining stories that can be educational as well. The podcast is called My Worst Interview Ever.  He has interviewed people like Cliff Ravenscraft, The Mobile Pro Shawn Smith, The App Guy Paul Kemp, XM Radio’s Doug Hannah, Blubrry’s Todd Cochrane, Libsyn’s Rob Walch, syndicated radio host Brant Hansen, Dave Jackson, Dan Franks, Jeff Brown, Daniel J. Lewis. The stories I understand are hilarious. The first episode is John Lee Dumas talking about his worst interview ( a rock icon famous for selling coffins).

                    So when creating a podcast, one strategy is to create a podcast that your target audience wants to hear. Tim identified his audience and has come up with a fun and entertaining way to produce good content without making his show a giant infomercial. Remember, nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose.

                    The next thing I like is Tim is already in iTunes and Stitcher. He doesn't seem too worried about the magical happy place of New and Noteworthy and his first eight weeks. With content like this, I bet he'll get listed because he didn't name his show wtf this week in cold cases on fire.

                    He also made sure  NOT to make it giant Ringr commercial. He does a quick mention in the middle. He understands the idea is to build an audience first.

                    Check out his show at worstinterviews.com and check out his service at ringr.com

                    A Not Great Example

                    The Penzu podcast is meant to help promote their company (penzu.com which I love and use)

                    Nobody is looking for "Penzu" that doesn't know then) so how is this supposed to bring in new people?

                    They are using Soundcloud as their platform (who are leaking money). Switch to Libsyn.com and your back catalog comes for free during the first quarter of 2017, and get a free month using the coupon code sopfree 

                    Their titles look awful. 

                    There is no description. 

                    They only have seven episodes (which is fine), but they have the podcast in their software (so their customers have had "episode 7 in their platform all year)

                    Back to the Basics Of Your Website

                    I recently did the "Favorite Podcast Ever" show where you sent in your favorite podcasts and explained why they were your favorite. I always then go to the website of those show and share that someone thinks you're the best. I am amazed at some of the things I find. Before we get into those, you do need to decide what your website is for. By this mean I mean if your podcast is to drive leads to your business, then you might have a giant sign up form. If you're trying to grow your community, you might really be sending people to your Facebook group. So in the end, there is no one size fits all. However, there are two things I hear over and over and over. I hear, "I want more downloads, and I want more interaction." When I go to the websites of these people, there are no links to subscribe to their show. There is no easy way to contact you. One person I had to tweet at (and their twitter account was waaaay at the bottom of their screen). 

                    I had someone who was going to hire me to help him get more subscribers. I went to their website, and said you don't need to pay me for this, but there isn't a single subscriber button on your website. 

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting or Schedule some One on One Consulting

                    ]]>68b082547240b831bad0aa522783d216Mon, 09 Jan 2017 05:00:00 -040049:27falsefull548548This is Your Podcast Wake Up CallHere it is 2017. Congratulations you made it through another year. Some of you were going to start podcasting last year, some of you go back to 2015. Some of you, are going back even further. Today I want to give you some ideas and strategies to launching your first podcast.
                    What Do You Need To Start Your Podcast
                    1. An idea
                    2. A microphone
                    3. A media host
                    4. A website (optional, but STRONGLY encouraged)
                    5. Some artwork for iTunes
                    6. A description
                    7. To get into itunes you need one live episode.
                    
                    Take A Mulligan

                    So here is a strategy that some people on accident, and you can do on purpose. I call it "The Mulligan." This comes from golf. When you hit a bad shot, you call that shot your mulligan, and you throw down your new ball and swing again. It is basically a do over. Some very popular podcasters like Hall of Fame Podcaster Mignon Fogherty, Lauria Petruci, even Adam Curry (who helped invent podcasting) didn't hit pay dirt till he was on his THIRD podcast. So start a podcast about anything, it doesn't. You could do a podcast about the weather in your city, just to go through the motions and learn the tech. Once you've got it down, cancel everything, delete all the files, and go back and do one for real. Take a mulligan on purpose.

                    When I played in bands, often the best recordings were the one where the engineer told us he wasn't recording. There was no pressure we were just doing a sound check. With no pressure we often would come up with a great "take" and end the song and say "I wish we would've recorded that" (and luckily in some cases they did). If you start out with a show you don't care about you can get a show up and see it really doesn't take that much to record and publish a show. (Getting people to listen is really the hard part).

                    What About The Expense?

                    I graduated from the University of Akron with a Bachelor's Degree in Education specializing in Technical Education. Just the books for a semester are an estimated $450. The actual classes are $5473 semester (typically three months) if you're going full time (Source). When you sink $100-$300 into a podcast (FOR A LIFETIME), that is a small investment. Moving forward your will be spending $30 a month (typically). Cut out a few sodas and snicker's bars and you've got your money. Keep in mind, The money you are spending is an investment in you.

                    But What If You Want To Actually Take a Real Swing?

                    You've probably heard about S.M.A.R.T. Goals. This stands for

                    Specific Measurable Actionable Realistic Time Bound

                    So instead of "I want to start a podcast." You need to get more specific.

                    I want to start a podcast about Raising Llamas . This is more specific, but I'd like a little more specifics and some time.

                    I will Google other Llama podcasts to see what names might be available by January 15th.

                    Michael Hyatt (one of my favorite Authors - I read Platform every January) has a "Best Year Ever" course and he throws in two more items.

                    Exciting - You wouldn't set a goal that bores you.

                    Relevant - I'm going to do a daily show, even though I have two jobs, a wife, and a set of twins.

                    By adding these two, you are creating smarter goals.

                    Why Should I Podcast?

                    You have something to say: You're yelling at the dashboard in the car, or swearing outloud in the super market as you think, "ugh I could do this better.." Here are some more.

                    • You want to be seen as an expert
                    • You want to reach a global audience
                    • You want to build a community
                    • You want to sharpen your presentation skills
                    • You want to build your brand
                    • You want to promote your products
                    • You want to boost your speaking career
                    • You want to have fun with like minded people
                    • You want to make some additional income.
                    
                    But, But, But, But......

                    I'm not sure exactly what format. - - Your Podcast is a recipe - not a statue

                    I hate my voice - This is normal as your are hearing your voice for the first time through your ears (only) with no vibrations from your skull.

                    I'm not a nerd - Yet you attach files to emails, turn down the volume in the car, press record on the DVR (so you know file management, audio mixing, and recording)

                    I might look stupid - It's not radio. It's not live. The only way you will sound stupid is if you release something that sounds stupid.

                    People might say negative things - Every day people say negative things about your driving, etc. Yet you still drive. Don't let your fear stop you from doing the thing you love.

                    Did you give out presents this year at Christmas? We are not always 100% sure they were going to be loved? Yet, we give them anyway.

                    Here is a little truth, when you first start, nobody is listening anyway.

                    Don't think about the thousands of people listening (cause it's not ) think about talking to ONE person. While helping one person may not change the world, it could change the world for that one person.

                    Some of My Favorite Quotes on Starting

                    You don't have to be great to start, but you do have to start to be great. -Zig Ziglar

                    When you want something you've never had, you have to do something you've never done. -Thomas Jefferson

                    The distance between dreams and reality is called action -Anonymous

                    Don't wait until you are ready to take action. Instead take action to be ready. -Jensen Siaw

                    Don't talk, just act. Don't Say, just show. Don't promise just prove. -Unknown

                    Winners are not people who never fail, but people who never quit. -Edwin Louis Cole

                    An inch of movement will bring you closer to your goals than a mile of intention. - Dr. Steve Marraboli

                    The best way to get started is to quit talking & begin doing - Walt Disney

                    Take Some Action

                    Notice something about the following words

                    Attraction Satisfaction Interaction Reaction Traction

                    If want to get a reaction, that is satisfying, and gets some traction towards your goals, you have to TAKE ACTION.

                    The start is what stops most people. Week after week I get people who are telling stories of things they couldn't have done if they hadn't started podcasting. So today I urge you to start something right now that your future self will thank you for. Stop worrying about what could go wrong, and start focusing on what could go right. Don't let your fear decide your future.

                    What you do is not who you are. If you say, "But I'm just a (insert your job)." That's WHAT you do, but WHO YOU ARE is a MESSENGER with something to say because you know there are people who could benefit from it.

                    Sometimes the worst place you can be is in your own head. Life begins at the end of your comfort zone.

                    Because of My Podcast: Edward O'Donnell

                    Ed is the host of In The Past Lane http://apple.co/1UBr3yD which is a podcast about history.

                    Because of my podcast - 1. I've been able to interview Pulitzer Prize winning historians about their latest work. History Nerdapaloosa. 2. my college (the real job) just built me a new state of the art podcast studio! It's not just for me, of course, but because I was up and running as a podcaster it spurred them to do it. 3. I've been invited by Chris K to be part of PodFest 2017 (day 1). 4. I snared an audition for a new program on The History Channel - in part because they checked out my podcast and seemed convinced that I'd be funny and free spirited and not just knowledgeable about history. If anything comes of this, it will certainly be my big time "because of my podcast" story!

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Start podcasting at the School of Podcasting

                    Speakermatch (service to help speakers find events to speak at )

                    Gleason Documentary on Amazon

                    Podfest Podcast Podcasting Event in Orlando Florida (coupon code Dave)

                    Podcast Movement podcasting event (use coupon code sop10)

                    Podcast Baby Steps Free Video Podcasting Course

                    ]]>Here it is 2017. Congratulations you made it through another year. Some of you were going to start podcasting last year, some of you go back to 2015. Some of you, are going back even further. Today I want to give you some ideas and strategies to launching your first podcast.
                    What Do You Need To Start Your Podcast
                    1. An idea
                    2. A microphone
                    3. A media host
                    4. A website (optional, but STRONGLY encouraged)
                    5. Some artwork for iTunes
                    6. A description
                    7. To get into itunes you need one live episode.
                    
                    Take A Mulligan

                    So here is a strategy that some people on accident, and you can do on purpose. I call it "The Mulligan." This comes from golf. When you hit a bad shot, you call that shot your mulligan, and you throw down your new ball and swing again. It is basically a do over. Some very popular podcasters like Hall of Fame Podcaster Mignon Fogherty, Lauria Petruci, even Adam Curry (who helped invent podcasting) didn't hit pay dirt till he was on his THIRD podcast. So start a podcast about anything, it doesn't. You could do a podcast about the weather in your city, just to go through the motions and learn the tech. Once you've got it down, cancel everything, delete all the files, and go back and do one for real. Take a mulligan on purpose.

                    When I played in bands, often the best recordings were the one where the engineer told us he wasn't recording. There was no pressure we were just doing a sound check. With no pressure we often would come up with a great "take" and end the song and say "I wish we would've recorded that" (and luckily in some cases they did). If you start out with a show you don't care about you can get a show up and see it really doesn't take that much to record and publish a show. (Getting people to listen is really the hard part).

                    What About The Expense?

                    I graduated from the University of Akron with a Bachelor's Degree in Education specializing in Technical Education. Just the books for a semester are an estimated $450. The actual classes are $5473 semester (typically three months) if you're going full time (Source). When you sink $100-$300 into a podcast (FOR A LIFETIME), that is a small investment. Moving forward your will be spending $30 a month (typically). Cut out a few sodas and snicker's bars and you've got your money. Keep in mind, The money you are spending is an investment in you.

                    But What If You Want To Actually Take a Real Swing?

                    You've probably heard about S.M.A.R.T. Goals. This stands for

                    Specific Measurable Actionable Realistic Time Bound

                    So instead of "I want to start a podcast." You need to get more specific.

                    I want to start a podcast about Raising Llamas . This is more specific, but I'd like a little more specifics and some time.

                    I will Google other Llama podcasts to see what names might be available by January 15th.

                    Michael Hyatt (one of my favorite Authors - I read Platform every January) has a "Best Year Ever" course and he throws in two more items.

                    Exciting - You wouldn't set a goal that bores you.

                    Relevant - I'm going to do a daily show, even though I have two jobs, a wife, and a set of twins.

                    By adding these two, you are creating smarter goals.

                    Why Should I Podcast?

                    You have something to say: You're yelling at the dashboard in the car, or swearing outloud in the super market as you think, "ugh I could do this better.." Here are some more.

                    • You want to be seen as an expert
                    • You want to reach a global audience
                    • You want to build a community
                    • You want to sharpen your presentation skills
                    • You want to build your brand
                    • You want to promote your products
                    • You want to boost your speaking career
                    • You want to have fun with like minded people
                    • You want to make some additional income.
                    
                    But, But, But, But......

                    I'm not sure exactly what format. - - Your Podcast is a recipe - not a statue

                    I hate my voice - This is normal as your are hearing your voice for the first time through your ears (only) with no vibrations from your skull.

                    I'm not a nerd - Yet you attach files to emails, turn down the volume in the car, press record on the DVR (so you know file management, audio mixing, and recording)

                    I might look stupid - It's not radio. It's not live. The only way you will sound stupid is if you release something that sounds stupid.

                    People might say negative things - Every day people say negative things about your driving, etc. Yet you still drive. Don't let your fear stop you from doing the thing you love.

                    Did you give out presents this year at Christmas? We are not always 100% sure they were going to be loved? Yet, we give them anyway.

                    Here is a little truth, when you first start, nobody is listening anyway.

                    Don't think about the thousands of people listening (cause it's not ) think about talking to ONE person. While helping one person may not change the world, it could change the world for that one person.

                    Some of My Favorite Quotes on Starting

                    You don't have to be great to start, but you do have to start to be great. -Zig Ziglar

                    When you want something you've never had, you have to do something you've never done. -Thomas Jefferson

                    The distance between dreams and reality is called action -Anonymous

                    Don't wait until you are ready to take action. Instead take action to be ready. -Jensen Siaw

                    Don't talk, just act. Don't Say, just show. Don't promise just prove. -Unknown

                    Winners are not people who never fail, but people who never quit. -Edwin Louis Cole

                    An inch of movement will bring you closer to your goals than a mile of intention. - Dr. Steve Marraboli

                    The best way to get started is to quit talking & begin doing - Walt Disney

                    Take Some Action

                    Notice something about the following words

                    Attraction Satisfaction Interaction Reaction Traction

                    If want to get a reaction, that is satisfying, and gets some traction towards your goals, you have to TAKE ACTION.

                    The start is what stops most people. Week after week I get people who are telling stories of things they couldn't have done if they hadn't started podcasting. So today I urge you to start something right now that your future self will thank you for. Stop worrying about what could go wrong, and start focusing on what could go right. Don't let your fear decide your future.

                    What you do is not who you are. If you say, "But I'm just a (insert your job)." That's WHAT you do, but WHO YOU ARE is a MESSENGER with something to say because you know there are people who could benefit from it.

                    Sometimes the worst place you can be is in your own head. Life begins at the end of your comfort zone.

                    Because of My Podcast: Edward O'Donnell

                    Ed is the host of In The Past Lane http://apple.co/1UBr3yD which is a podcast about history.

                    Because of my podcast - 1. I've been able to interview Pulitzer Prize winning historians about their latest work. History Nerdapaloosa. 2. my college (the real job) just built me a new state of the art podcast studio! It's not just for me, of course, but because I was up and running as a podcaster it spurred them to do it. 3. I've been invited by Chris K to be part of PodFest 2017 (day 1). 4. I snared an audition for a new program on The History Channel - in part because they checked out my podcast and seemed convinced that I'd be funny and free spirited and not just knowledgeable about history. If anything comes of this, it will certainly be my big time "because of my podcast" story!

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Start podcasting at the School of Podcasting

                    Speakermatch (service to help speakers find events to speak at )

                    Gleason Documentary on Amazon

                    Podfest Podcast Podcasting Event in Orlando Florida (coupon code Dave)

                    Podcast Movement podcasting event (use coupon code sop10)

                    Podcast Baby Steps Free Video Podcasting Course

                    ]]>904f0d73032e4e11227bd8070000a7bbMon, 02 Jan 2017 05:00:00 -040051:01falsefull547547My Favorite Podcast is 2016 EditionThis means if they could only listen to ONE, this would be the show. Here they are in alphabetical order

                    4:00 Adam Carolla Show - http://adamcarolla.com/

                    4:42 Bloodround - http://www.bloodround.com

                    6:58  Freakonomincs - http://www.freakonomics.com

                    9:18 Hollywood Bable On - http://www.smodcast.com/channel/hollywoodbabbleon

                    11:35 Kate’s Take - http://www.eofire.com/audio-blog/

                    12:34 Medication Oasis - http://www.meditationoasis.com/podcast/

                    13:25 Mighty Blue on the Appalachian Trail - http://mightyblueontheat.com/

                    14:23 Mike Row’s The Way I Heard It - http://mikerowe.com/podcast/

                    15:54 Mixergy - https://mixergy.com

                    17:00   Mysterious Universe - mysteriousuniverse.org

                    17:54 Mystery Show - https://gimletmedia.com/mystery-show/

                    20:11 Old Pre-Meds - http://www.oldpremeds.org/

                    22:10 Radio Labyrinth - https://audioboom.com/channel/radio-labyrinth

                    23:12 RED Podcast - http://www.redpodcast.com

                    24:25 Retired Exited - http://www.retiredexcited.com

                    25:30 Rock Your Retirement - http://www.rockyourretirement.com

                    27:25 She Podcasts - http://www.shepdocasts.com

                    29:20 Spawn On Me - http://spawnon.me/

                    30:47 Stacking Benjamins - http://www.stackingbenjamins.com

                    35:42 Stuff You Missed in History - http://www.missedinhistory.com/

                    39:05 Ted Radio Hour - http://www.npr.org/programs/ted-radio-hour/

                    40:17 The Audacity to Podcast - http://www.theaudacitytopodcast.com

                    41:25 The School of Podcasting - http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    42:50 Trecks in Sci -Fi - http://treksinscifi.com/podcast_notes/

                    46:55 Tumble - http://www.sciencepodcastforkids.com/

                     

                    Contribtuors

                    Amanda from the Great Beer Adventure greatbeeradventure.com

                    Brian Entzminger, host of the Engaging Missions Shows at http://www.engagingmissions.com

                    Bryan Goodwin with http://www.goodwinsocialmedia.com

                    Cale Nelson from www.hamradio360.com

                    Chris Hache of the Noshing Nova Scotians podcast http://www.chrishache.com

                    Glenn “The Geek” Hebert of the Horse Radio Network http:/www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Hall of Fame Podcaster Danny Pena, founder and co-host of Gamertag Radio (http://www.gamertagradio.com

                    Henry Shapiro of the Retired Excited podcast http://www.retiredexcited.com

                    Jason Bryant from Mat Talk Online http://www.MatTalkOnline.com

                    Jason Norris of Podcast Local from On the Go FM. http://www.podcastlocal.com

                    Jayson Sacco of the Outdoor Adventures with Jason http://www.oawjs.com

                    Jen is one of the founding co-hosts of the Anomaly Podcast, anomalypodcast.com

                    Jonathan Christopher, host of the Career Eden Podcast http://careereden.libsyn.com/podcast

                    Jonathan Messenger of The Alien Adventure of Finn Caspian show FinnCaspian.com

                    Kathe Kline of the “Rock Your Retirement" podcast. rockyourretirement.com

                    Katie Krimitsos of Biz Women Rock http://www.bizwomenrock.com

                    Kim Krajci of Toast Masters 101, http://www.toastmasters101.net

                    Lee Silverstein of the Colon Cancer Podcast http://thecoloncancerpodcast.com/)

                    Randy Cantrell who is the host of the Grow Great podcast http://www.GrowGreat.com

                    Rob Kerns of Living the Vet Life podcast http://www.livingthevetlife.com

                    Stargate Pioneer of the Gonna Geek Network gonnageek.com

                    Steve Stewart at You can find Steve at SteveStewart.me.

                    Tyler Sheff of the Cash Flow Guys podcast http://www.cashflowguys.com

                    Zen Runner of www.slowrunnersclub.com

                    HOMEWORK

                    What are you top podcasting pet peeves? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and let me know

                    READY TO START PODCASTING

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>This means if they could only listen to ONE, this would be the show. Here they are in alphabetical order

                    4:00 Adam Carolla Show - http://adamcarolla.com/

                    4:42 Bloodround - http://www.bloodround.com

                    6:58  Freakonomincs - http://www.freakonomics.com

                    9:18 Hollywood Bable On - http://www.smodcast.com/channel/hollywoodbabbleon

                    11:35 Kate’s Take - http://www.eofire.com/audio-blog/

                    12:34 Medication Oasis - http://www.meditationoasis.com/podcast/

                    13:25 Mighty Blue on the Appalachian Trail - http://mightyblueontheat.com/

                    14:23 Mike Row’s The Way I Heard It - http://mikerowe.com/podcast/

                    15:54 Mixergy - https://mixergy.com

                    17:00   Mysterious Universe - mysteriousuniverse.org

                    17:54 Mystery Show - https://gimletmedia.com/mystery-show/

                    20:11 Old Pre-Meds - http://www.oldpremeds.org/

                    22:10 Radio Labyrinth - https://audioboom.com/channel/radio-labyrinth

                    23:12 RED Podcast - http://www.redpodcast.com

                    24:25 Retired Exited - http://www.retiredexcited.com

                    25:30 Rock Your Retirement - http://www.rockyourretirement.com

                    27:25 She Podcasts - http://www.shepdocasts.com

                    29:20 Spawn On Me - http://spawnon.me/

                    30:47 Stacking Benjamins - http://www.stackingbenjamins.com

                    35:42 Stuff You Missed in History - http://www.missedinhistory.com/

                    39:05 Ted Radio Hour - http://www.npr.org/programs/ted-radio-hour/

                    40:17 The Audacity to Podcast - http://www.theaudacitytopodcast.com

                    41:25 The School of Podcasting - http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    42:50 Trecks in Sci -Fi - http://treksinscifi.com/podcast_notes/

                    46:55 Tumble - http://www.sciencepodcastforkids.com/

                     

                    Contribtuors

                    Amanda from the Great Beer Adventure greatbeeradventure.com

                    Brian Entzminger, host of the Engaging Missions Shows at http://www.engagingmissions.com

                    Bryan Goodwin with http://www.goodwinsocialmedia.com

                    Cale Nelson from www.hamradio360.com

                    Chris Hache of the Noshing Nova Scotians podcast http://www.chrishache.com

                    Glenn “The Geek” Hebert of the Horse Radio Network http:/www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Hall of Fame Podcaster Danny Pena, founder and co-host of Gamertag Radio (http://www.gamertagradio.com

                    Henry Shapiro of the Retired Excited podcast http://www.retiredexcited.com

                    Jason Bryant from Mat Talk Online http://www.MatTalkOnline.com

                    Jason Norris of Podcast Local from On the Go FM. http://www.podcastlocal.com

                    Jayson Sacco of the Outdoor Adventures with Jason http://www.oawjs.com

                    Jen is one of the founding co-hosts of the Anomaly Podcast, anomalypodcast.com

                    Jonathan Christopher, host of the Career Eden Podcast http://careereden.libsyn.com/podcast

                    Jonathan Messenger of The Alien Adventure of Finn Caspian show FinnCaspian.com

                    Kathe Kline of the “Rock Your Retirement" podcast. rockyourretirement.com

                    Katie Krimitsos of Biz Women Rock http://www.bizwomenrock.com

                    Kim Krajci of Toast Masters 101, http://www.toastmasters101.net

                    Lee Silverstein of the Colon Cancer Podcast http://thecoloncancerpodcast.com/)

                    Randy Cantrell who is the host of the Grow Great podcast http://www.GrowGreat.com

                    Rob Kerns of Living the Vet Life podcast http://www.livingthevetlife.com

                    Stargate Pioneer of the Gonna Geek Network gonnageek.com

                    Steve Stewart at You can find Steve at SteveStewart.me.

                    Tyler Sheff of the Cash Flow Guys podcast http://www.cashflowguys.com

                    Zen Runner of www.slowrunnersclub.com

                    HOMEWORK

                    What are you top podcasting pet peeves? Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact and let me know

                    READY TO START PODCASTING

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>eba8aa6d43f0d124d2aff3b930e2f8a2Mon, 26 Dec 2016 05:00:00 -040054:48falsefull546546What Can Podcasters Learn From Amazon.comCheri Fields has at least 7 children, and produces the Creation Science for Kids Podcast http://creationscience4kids.com/
                    What Podcaster's Can Learn From Amazon.com

                    Amazon is an amazing company. Recently I purchased an Amazon Echo, and Later and Amazon Dot. These devices allow me to do things through voice activation system known as Alexa. You can control Alexa with an Amazon Echo, an Amazon Dot, and Amazon Tap, and now you can control your Amazon Fire TV.  If you're interested, check out my Buyer's Guide.

                    The item that made me purchase the Echo? The ability to say “Alexa, add eggs to the grocery list.” The more I examine the Amazon company, the more I believe there are tips we podcasters can learn from them.

                    Amazon Makes It Easy To Find Stuff

                    Their search is at the top of their page. You don’t have to search for the search. Amazon understands their customer may want a number of things, so they make it easy to find.

                    Podcasters you need a search button that is easy to find, if you provide topics that are more of a reference. Podcasters you could use categories to create filter to only show those episodes that are categorized a certain way.

                    Customer First Mentality

                    Any research into amazon and you will read how they make all decisions based on serving the customer. They are spending money on items that will better serve the customer. So when you are thinking about purchasing some equipment for your podcast you need to ask yourself who the purchase is serving, you or your audience?

                    Amazon project lead Ian McAllister has described a sort of reverse engineering that happens frequently at company HQ. “We try to work backwards from the customer, rather than starting with an idea for a product and trying to bolt customers onto it,” he wrote on Quora.com.

                    When someone approaches you to to be a guest on your show, you need think, “Will my audience want to hear this content?”

                    Personalized Recommendations

                    There are plugins that can add related links to other episodes on your site. So when someone listens to an episode about Topic A there could be links to more Topic A shows at the bottom of the post. There are plugins such as Yet Another Related Wordpress Post Plugin (which has lots of features, but can be a bit of a resource hog), and Related Wordpress Posts is a lighter weight plugin with an easy setup. If you’re using Appendipity themes, this is a built in feature

                    They Don’t Always Win, but They Try

                    I completely forgot that Amazon launched a “Fire Phone.” That tells you how much of an impact it had on the phone space. They’ve done quite a few things that didn’t land well.

                    It wants to infiltrate people’s lives to such an extent that they can’t imagine living without it — that they don’t even try to imagine living without it.

                    We always joke that "No one will punch you in the face," here at the School of Podcasting. Your podcast is a recipe, not a statue.

                    One of the cool things about being cloud based, is they are constantly adding new features to the Alexa system

                    Keep Your Pages Loading Fast

                    After analyzing the ratio of sales to website performance, Amazon discovered that for every 100ms of page load time there was a 1% decrease in sales. So how fast does your website need to be? Many usability experts propose that the ideal page load time is 2 seconds or less. You can easily test the page load time of your own website by using free tools such as WebPageTest.org

                    So podcasters be careful loading tons of plugins if you're using WordPress. Some of those may slow down your site.

                    Make it Fun

                    Google the phrase "Alexa Easter Eggs" and you will find a giant list of goof things you can get Alexa to say. There are

                    Make it Easy

                    The one thing the Amazon Echo and Dot do is they make it super easy to ORDER STUFF. With a few phrases, "Alexa order Angel Soft Toilet paper" it is pretty much on the way. She will state what size the package is and the price and ask me if I want to order it. There are safeguard can put in so your kids do order every thing under the sun.

                    Podcasters who are saying thins like, "Find me in iTunes" are missing a golden opportunity to lead their customers by the hand and show them exactly how to subscribe to their show. One of the things I did as a young grocery clerk was if someone asked where something was, I would take them to it, and make sure they could reach it. I wanted to see that product go into their cart. I would also ask if there was anything else they were looking for before I returned to whatever I was doing before. Make it easy.

                    You can do this by finding your show in iTunes, and right clicking on your art work and copying the link then add a button to your site and attach that link to the button (there is a tutorial for this at the School of Podcasting

                    Amazon's Ultimate Goal - Routine

                    Amazon wants to be your right arm. They want to be integrated into your life. When I recently traveled without my Amazon Dot, it was weird not to wake up, check my to do list, get the weather, and hear my custom news.

                    If you can podcast on a regular schedule, you become part of your audience's routine.

                    Podcast Glossary "K"

                    I couldn't think of any "I's, or J's" so we are moving o the the K's.

                    kbps - This is stands for kilo bits per second. This is a measurement that you use when you are exporting your files. Typical settings are

                    128 kbps - Stereo (if your primarily music) 96 kbps - mono (for those doing speech, and want a slightly better sound than 64 ) 64 - kbps mono (same as 128 stereo, but mono)

                    When exporting you do not want to use VBR (variable bit rate) as you mp3 file may not play on all players.

                    Podcast Rewind - I Was On the SoloPreneur Hour with Michael O'Neal

                    I appeared on episode 509 of the Solopreneur Hour with Michael O'Neil. We talked a little music, we talk about my early days of training people on office equipment, getting fired after busting your butt, and how I ended up in Podcasting. Check it out HERE

                    You can hear Michael on this show sharing how he stands out from other podcast when I interviewed him on episode 542

                    Podcast Launch the Mark Nelson Show

                    Mark is going to help you with your negotiating skills. Check out his show at http://www.marknelsonshow.com/ or Subscribe in iTunes

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Computer Tutor Podcast

                    Solopreneur Hour

                    Podfest.Us (use the code Dave to save)

                    Alexa Cast

                    Amazon Alexa Buyers Guide

                    Building a Better Dave

                    Quora.com (questions website)

                    Horse Radio Network

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting. You get

                    16 courses

                    Priority Email Support

                    Group Coaching

                    Private FaceBook Group

                    30 Day Guarantee 

                    Join Today

                    ]]>Cheri Fields has at least 7 children, and produces the Creation Science for Kids Podcast http://creationscience4kids.com/
                    What Podcaster's Can Learn From Amazon.com

                    Amazon is an amazing company. Recently I purchased an Amazon Echo, and Later and Amazon Dot. These devices allow me to do things through voice activation system known as Alexa. You can control Alexa with an Amazon Echo, an Amazon Dot, and Amazon Tap, and now you can control your Amazon Fire TV.  If you're interested, check out my Buyer's Guide.

                    The item that made me purchase the Echo? The ability to say “Alexa, add eggs to the grocery list.” The more I examine the Amazon company, the more I believe there are tips we podcasters can learn from them.

                    Amazon Makes It Easy To Find Stuff

                    Their search is at the top of their page. You don’t have to search for the search. Amazon understands their customer may want a number of things, so they make it easy to find.

                    Podcasters you need a search button that is easy to find, if you provide topics that are more of a reference. Podcasters you could use categories to create filter to only show those episodes that are categorized a certain way.

                    Customer First Mentality

                    Any research into amazon and you will read how they make all decisions based on serving the customer. They are spending money on items that will better serve the customer. So when you are thinking about purchasing some equipment for your podcast you need to ask yourself who the purchase is serving, you or your audience?

                    Amazon project lead Ian McAllister has described a sort of reverse engineering that happens frequently at company HQ. “We try to work backwards from the customer, rather than starting with an idea for a product and trying to bolt customers onto it,” he wrote on Quora.com.

                    When someone approaches you to to be a guest on your show, you need think, “Will my audience want to hear this content?”

                    Personalized Recommendations

                    There are plugins that can add related links to other episodes on your site. So when someone listens to an episode about Topic A there could be links to more Topic A shows at the bottom of the post. There are plugins such as Yet Another Related Wordpress Post Plugin (which has lots of features, but can be a bit of a resource hog), and Related Wordpress Posts is a lighter weight plugin with an easy setup. If you’re using Appendipity themes, this is a built in feature

                    They Don’t Always Win, but They Try

                    I completely forgot that Amazon launched a “Fire Phone.” That tells you how much of an impact it had on the phone space. They’ve done quite a few things that didn’t land well.

                    It wants to infiltrate people’s lives to such an extent that they can’t imagine living without it — that they don’t even try to imagine living without it.

                    We always joke that "No one will punch you in the face," here at the School of Podcasting. Your podcast is a recipe, not a statue.

                    One of the cool things about being cloud based, is they are constantly adding new features to the Alexa system

                    Keep Your Pages Loading Fast

                    After analyzing the ratio of sales to website performance, Amazon discovered that for every 100ms of page load time there was a 1% decrease in sales. So how fast does your website need to be? Many usability experts propose that the ideal page load time is 2 seconds or less. You can easily test the page load time of your own website by using free tools such as WebPageTest.org

                    So podcasters be careful loading tons of plugins if you're using WordPress. Some of those may slow down your site.

                    Make it Fun

                    Google the phrase "Alexa Easter Eggs" and you will find a giant list of goof things you can get Alexa to say. There are

                    Make it Easy

                    The one thing the Amazon Echo and Dot do is they make it super easy to ORDER STUFF. With a few phrases, "Alexa order Angel Soft Toilet paper" it is pretty much on the way. She will state what size the package is and the price and ask me if I want to order it. There are safeguard can put in so your kids do order every thing under the sun.

                    Podcasters who are saying thins like, "Find me in iTunes" are missing a golden opportunity to lead their customers by the hand and show them exactly how to subscribe to their show. One of the things I did as a young grocery clerk was if someone asked where something was, I would take them to it, and make sure they could reach it. I wanted to see that product go into their cart. I would also ask if there was anything else they were looking for before I returned to whatever I was doing before. Make it easy.

                    You can do this by finding your show in iTunes, and right clicking on your art work and copying the link then add a button to your site and attach that link to the button (there is a tutorial for this at the School of Podcasting

                    Amazon's Ultimate Goal - Routine

                    Amazon wants to be your right arm. They want to be integrated into your life. When I recently traveled without my Amazon Dot, it was weird not to wake up, check my to do list, get the weather, and hear my custom news.

                    If you can podcast on a regular schedule, you become part of your audience's routine.

                    Podcast Glossary "K"

                    I couldn't think of any "I's, or J's" so we are moving o the the K's.

                    kbps - This is stands for kilo bits per second. This is a measurement that you use when you are exporting your files. Typical settings are

                    128 kbps - Stereo (if your primarily music) 96 kbps - mono (for those doing speech, and want a slightly better sound than 64 ) 64 - kbps mono (same as 128 stereo, but mono)

                    When exporting you do not want to use VBR (variable bit rate) as you mp3 file may not play on all players.

                    Podcast Rewind - I Was On the SoloPreneur Hour with Michael O'Neal

                    I appeared on episode 509 of the Solopreneur Hour with Michael O'Neil. We talked a little music, we talk about my early days of training people on office equipment, getting fired after busting your butt, and how I ended up in Podcasting. Check it out HERE

                    You can hear Michael on this show sharing how he stands out from other podcast when I interviewed him on episode 542

                    Podcast Launch the Mark Nelson Show

                    Mark is going to help you with your negotiating skills. Check out his show at http://www.marknelsonshow.com/ or Subscribe in iTunes

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Computer Tutor Podcast

                    Solopreneur Hour

                    Podfest.Us (use the code Dave to save)

                    Alexa Cast

                    Amazon Alexa Buyers Guide

                    Building a Better Dave

                    Quora.com (questions website)

                    Horse Radio Network

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting. You get

                    16 courses

                    Priority Email Support

                    Group Coaching

                    Private FaceBook Group

                    30 Day Guarantee 

                    Join Today

                    ]]>35064e6d14d6b46d1267fb6d1937874dMon, 19 Dec 2016 05:00:00 -040033:04falsefull545545Podcast Guest and Hosting DutiesLast week, a listener contacted me via email. He is one of my Pateron Supporters. He said he noticed on my Pateron page the goal for buying a new Mixer.

                    He went on to inquire about which mixer I was interested in. I sent him a note back telling him about the 12 ch Behringer mixer I had been saving for (which was the lowest cost mixer with Faders I could find on Amazon-I'm a FM Radio Throw-back and prefer faders).

                    In his subsequent email, he stated he wanted to purchase a Mixer for me-and he'd buy the Behringer if that is what I had to have, otherwise he preferred to buy me a Yamaha MG12.

                    After picking myself up from the floor, and maybe or maybe not drying one or both of my eyes; I said the Yamaha would be a fine choice.

                    The board arrived today, I'm still flabbergasted, and completely humbled. I have the best listener(s) on the planet!

                    Cale Nelson www.hamradio360.com

                    Be the Best Podcast Guest Be the Best Podcast Host

                    Maybe it's Friday and I am just tired after so many hours of programming this week but if you send me an interview request that includes the following I will not even respond to you.

                    1: you must have a hour for the interview

                    2: you must have headphones

                    3: you must have a quiet space

                    4: We request all guest to share our podcast on social media

                    I must? I must? You are asking me for an interview and you say I must? Plus, if in your initial email request you say I should share it to my social media, I will never respond to you. I will share it to my social media if I think it is valuable to my friends, family and audience. Show some respect when you are asking for interviews. Wow. Whew, ok now I am going take a break this weekend! Have a good one everybody!

                    Stop Chasing Influencers

                    Jared Easley is one of my My Favorite People on the Planet. I do't interact with him much, but when I do, I'm always glad I did. His Book Stop Chasing Influencers: The True Path to Building Your Business and Living Your Dream had a TON of useful advice that came from the real world. Here is a quick excerpt.

                    A majority of the influencers and A-listers on his guest wish-list did not have time or interest in being on his new show, which had zero listeners. The guests who were gracious enough to give him the time for an interview were not inclined to share it with their audiences. Finally, the guests who did give him their time, and who also shared the show with their networks on social media, did not translate into a large Starve the Doubts audience that listened to the guest interviews and subscribed or stuck around as well.

                    So if you're looking for GIANT numbers by having GIANT names, that is not going to happen.

                     

                    Host Tips

                    If you of alot of interviews, you're going to lose your mind without a scheduling tool I love Acuity Scheduling. If you're looking for a free (scaled down) tool I've heard good things about Calendly.com

                    Let the guest know WHY they are there. WHO they are talking to, WHAT they will be talking about and HOW long the interview will be.

                    Go to their website and get the bio, headshot, etc. Then ask for what is missing.

                    Do some research (if you want, listen to other interviews, check out their Facebook page, twitter), and come up with some questions. This list of questions (for me) will be used as "game plan" but not as an interrogation

                    Email the day off (if not before, or better BOTH) the interview to remind them of your appointment.

                    Make sure they know to get the best microphone available, and to have headphones on.

                    Find out what website your want to promote. Where are we sending people?

                    If they don't sound good (meaning their sound is distracting from the content), stop and ask them to get a different microphone, different position, etc. TRUST ME, you will not want to release this to you audience. Who do you want to upset, your legions of followers or ONE guest. You will spend a lot of time trying to clean up bad audio, and some times you just can't.

                    When the guest arrives let them know its not live (unless it is) and that if they mess up you can do it over. Let them know that if you pause, you may be looking for the next question (and you're not looking for a longer answer).

                    Erik K Johnson has a great tip and says to come up with a great first question to get the interview pointed in the right direction.

                    Make sure you know how to say their name (sometimes you find them on YouTube and learn how to pronounce their name)

                    Michael O'Neal has a great tip in his Art of the Interview Course. If you know a guest loves to tell the same story over and over, use it in the intro, and now they can't repeat it.

                    Don't make them sit through the whole show if it's done live. If it's a live call, then bring them on 5 minutes before they go on the air.

                    Michael O'Neal said (when he was on this show) to promote the guests stuff first, then they are happier to be on the show, promote the episode, and they aren't looking for opportunities to promote because you already did.

                    After the interview is over -before you it stop - ask them if there is anything they'd like to change.

                    When the interview goes live, make it INSANELY Easy to share your stuff. Give them links to the mp3 file, to your episode on your website, and a graphic. Realize they may not share it at all, and that's OK. They did their job, they provided content. You can use tools like Click to Tweet so you give them one link and it sends the tweet.

                    Podcast Guest Tips

                    Don't give one word answers.

                    Listen to an episode to understand a bit about the show, the vibe, the audience.

                    Get the best microphone available in your house (I suggest the Audio Technica atr2100) and wear headphones (even if it's earbuds)

                    Email the host the day of the show

                    Show up on time.

                    Have one sheet that explains you, your bio, websites, social media, and attache a headshot.

                    If you're promoting something, see if you can give people access to your product before the interview.

                    Try to customize your answers to their audience.

                    Don't go crazy with the hosts name, and compliments on "That's a good question" (unless it was an actual good question).

                    Nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose. Bring Value.

                    If the episode would bring value to your audience, promote it on twitter, and any other venues you feel comfortable.

                    Podcast Glossary "H"

                    htaccess file

                    A file on your website that dictates how your website functions, and what files are accessible

                    Hindenburg Journalist

                    This is one of my favorite tools to edit audio with. It doesn’t have all the bells and whistle of Adobe Audition, but it also has much less confusion.

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Erik K Johnson

                    Jessica Rhodes

                    Michael O'Neal

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener

                    ]]>Last week, a listener contacted me via email. He is one of my Pateron Supporters. He said he noticed on my Pateron page the goal for buying a new Mixer.

                    He went on to inquire about which mixer I was interested in. I sent him a note back telling him about the 12 ch Behringer mixer I had been saving for (which was the lowest cost mixer with Faders I could find on Amazon-I'm a FM Radio Throw-back and prefer faders).

                    In his subsequent email, he stated he wanted to purchase a Mixer for me-and he'd buy the Behringer if that is what I had to have, otherwise he preferred to buy me a Yamaha MG12.

                    After picking myself up from the floor, and maybe or maybe not drying one or both of my eyes; I said the Yamaha would be a fine choice.

                    The board arrived today, I'm still flabbergasted, and completely humbled. I have the best listener(s) on the planet!

                    Cale Nelson www.hamradio360.com

                    Be the Best Podcast Guest Be the Best Podcast Host

                    Maybe it's Friday and I am just tired after so many hours of programming this week but if you send me an interview request that includes the following I will not even respond to you.

                    1: you must have a hour for the interview

                    2: you must have headphones

                    3: you must have a quiet space

                    4: We request all guest to share our podcast on social media

                    I must? I must? You are asking me for an interview and you say I must? Plus, if in your initial email request you say I should share it to my social media, I will never respond to you. I will share it to my social media if I think it is valuable to my friends, family and audience. Show some respect when you are asking for interviews. Wow. Whew, ok now I am going take a break this weekend! Have a good one everybody!

                    Stop Chasing Influencers

                    Jared Easley is one of my My Favorite People on the Planet. I do't interact with him much, but when I do, I'm always glad I did. His Book Stop Chasing Influencers: The True Path to Building Your Business and Living Your Dream had a TON of useful advice that came from the real world. Here is a quick excerpt.

                    A majority of the influencers and A-listers on his guest wish-list did not have time or interest in being on his new show, which had zero listeners. The guests who were gracious enough to give him the time for an interview were not inclined to share it with their audiences. Finally, the guests who did give him their time, and who also shared the show with their networks on social media, did not translate into a large Starve the Doubts audience that listened to the guest interviews and subscribed or stuck around as well.

                    So if you're looking for GIANT numbers by having GIANT names, that is not going to happen.

                     

                    Host Tips

                    If you of alot of interviews, you're going to lose your mind without a scheduling tool I love Acuity Scheduling. If you're looking for a free (scaled down) tool I've heard good things about Calendly.com

                    Let the guest know WHY they are there. WHO they are talking to, WHAT they will be talking about and HOW long the interview will be.

                    Go to their website and get the bio, headshot, etc. Then ask for what is missing.

                    Do some research (if you want, listen to other interviews, check out their Facebook page, twitter), and come up with some questions. This list of questions (for me) will be used as "game plan" but not as an interrogation

                    Email the day off (if not before, or better BOTH) the interview to remind them of your appointment.

                    Make sure they know to get the best microphone available, and to have headphones on.

                    Find out what website your want to promote. Where are we sending people?

                    If they don't sound good (meaning their sound is distracting from the content), stop and ask them to get a different microphone, different position, etc. TRUST ME, you will not want to release this to you audience. Who do you want to upset, your legions of followers or ONE guest. You will spend a lot of time trying to clean up bad audio, and some times you just can't.

                    When the guest arrives let them know its not live (unless it is) and that if they mess up you can do it over. Let them know that if you pause, you may be looking for the next question (and you're not looking for a longer answer).

                    Erik K Johnson has a great tip and says to come up with a great first question to get the interview pointed in the right direction.

                    Make sure you know how to say their name (sometimes you find them on YouTube and learn how to pronounce their name)

                    Michael O'Neal has a great tip in his Art of the Interview Course. If you know a guest loves to tell the same story over and over, use it in the intro, and now they can't repeat it.

                    Don't make them sit through the whole show if it's done live. If it's a live call, then bring them on 5 minutes before they go on the air.

                    Michael O'Neal said (when he was on this show) to promote the guests stuff first, then they are happier to be on the show, promote the episode, and they aren't looking for opportunities to promote because you already did.

                    After the interview is over -before you it stop - ask them if there is anything they'd like to change.

                    When the interview goes live, make it INSANELY Easy to share your stuff. Give them links to the mp3 file, to your episode on your website, and a graphic. Realize they may not share it at all, and that's OK. They did their job, they provided content. You can use tools like Click to Tweet so you give them one link and it sends the tweet.

                    Podcast Guest Tips

                    Don't give one word answers.

                    Listen to an episode to understand a bit about the show, the vibe, the audience.

                    Get the best microphone available in your house (I suggest the Audio Technica atr2100) and wear headphones (even if it's earbuds)

                    Email the host the day of the show

                    Show up on time.

                    Have one sheet that explains you, your bio, websites, social media, and attache a headshot.

                    If you're promoting something, see if you can give people access to your product before the interview.

                    Try to customize your answers to their audience.

                    Don't go crazy with the hosts name, and compliments on "That's a good question" (unless it was an actual good question).

                    Nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose. Bring Value.

                    If the episode would bring value to your audience, promote it on twitter, and any other venues you feel comfortable.

                    Podcast Glossary "H"

                    htaccess file

                    A file on your website that dictates how your website functions, and what files are accessible

                    Hindenburg Journalist

                    This is one of my favorite tools to edit audio with. It doesn’t have all the bells and whistle of Adobe Audition, but it also has much less confusion.

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Erik K Johnson

                    Jessica Rhodes

                    Michael O'Neal

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com and use the coupon code listener

                    ]]>f260c5ef352c431d4617c14296b38cbaMon, 12 Dec 2016 05:22:31 -040045:26falsefull544544Growing Your Podcast Brand with Marketing Manager Lauren NelsonToday on episode 543 we talk with fellow podcast Lauren Nelson who is the Marketing Manager for Crowdspring.com She produce the audio drama podcast "The Box" and share her insights on how podcasts ban boost their marketing efforts to stand out.

                    Realize there are no rules to podcast. For Lauren she takes as much as she needs to tell her story, and that's it.

                    Your iTunes artwork is your first impression, have someone who is a graphic person create yours.

                    Consistency can boost your brand by never missing an episode, or by announcing (if you take a break) your planned absence.

                    People may want t-shirts, mugs and other "Swag" items, so keep this in mind when making your artwork.

                    The Apple company broke the rules in their advertisements (so have companies like All Spice)

                    Don't be afraid to think outside the box. Thin about how "a show about nothing" is one of the top televisions shows of all time.

                    Lauren's Favorite Marketing Podcasts Startup Smart Passive Income Marketing Over Coffee Duct Tape Marketing

                    Special Podcast Marketing Guide

                    Go to  www.crowdspring.com/sop free guide promoting your show, and your design needs.

                    Blue Yeti - A Hands On Review

                    The Blue Yeti is quoted WAY TOO MUCH as a great podcast microphone. It is a condensor microphone, and if not used properly can make really bad sounding recordings. It can pick up what is right in front of it, what is behind it, or everything around it. You want to "Cardoid" setting for your best  recording of a solo podcaster.

                    To avoid sounding like you’re in a tunnel you need to turn the gain down, and get close the the microphone. When you do this, you will have what most people call “popping p’s” when you say worse that start with P’s, B’s, H’s, etc as the from your mouth goes into the microphone. The solution is to purchase a pop filter. Due to it’s unique size you need a specialized pop filter. You can purchase the Blue Pop Filter for $59, or you can grab a perfectly good one for $22 from Auphonix . The other thing you need is a shock mount. The reason for this is ANY touching of the desk that the Yeti is sitting on will pick up the vibrations. So you can purchase the shock mount from Blue for $56, or this one from for Auphonix for $30. So the price of a Yeti goes from $89 to somewhere between to $$141 to 204. The shock mount is going to need a stand so I recommend either the Rode PSA1 ($99) or the Heil PL-2T ($130)

                    This is why the Audio Technica ATR2100 is the Best Podcasting Microphone NOT the Blue yeti.

                    The Audio Technica us a dynamic microphone (which means it will pick up less noise than the yet)

                    While the stand that comes with the ATR2100 is very simple, it will pick up less thumping (but I would still recommend a shock mount. This unit is a shock mount and pop filter in one for $9.

                    Because its more of a “traditional” microphone you are a little more open to pop filters and shock mounts.

                    The ATR2100 works via USB and XLR ( can work with a mixer) so if you’re flying solo, or need to plug into a mixer you’re good to go.

                    So to get the same features you would need a Blue Yeti ($199), Pop Filter ($22), Shock Mount ($30), so would be out $251. Where is the ATR2100 is $77, the pop filter shock mount is $9, so you would be out around $86.

                    Podcast Glossary "G"

                    Garageband Grageband is a free software on the Macintosh platform that can be used to create a podcast. While great looking and equipped with some powerful tools, I feel its great for assembling podcasts, but not the best for editing out “Ums, and ya knows.”

                    "Glenn the Geek'd it" Glenn "the Geek" Hebert runs horseradionetwork.com and is doing a great job getting advertisers on his show. He gets sponsors to help promote his show and other actions. An example Jim Collison got a sponsor to pay for a custom app and said, "I Glenn the Geek'd it." To hear Glenn talk about his techniques check out http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glenn1

                    Podcast Rewind

                    Podcast Roundtable "Getting Your Show Out To Your Audience"

                    The Pub "Investigative reporting costs thousands of dollars"

                    Because of My Podcast - My Network Has Grown

                    Nick Snapp of the  The “Make it Snappy” Productivity Show has had his network of resources and friends grown since starting his podcast. He even got to Puerto Rico with a film documentary and film John Lee Dumas of eofire.com Check out Nick's Show at www.makeitsnappyshow.com

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Alexacast - Get the most out of your Amazon Echo

                    Best Podcasting Gear - Find out the best podcasting gear

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>Today on episode 543 we talk with fellow podcast Lauren Nelson who is the Marketing Manager for Crowdspring.com She produce the audio drama podcast "The Box" and share her insights on how podcasts ban boost their marketing efforts to stand out.

                    Realize there are no rules to podcast. For Lauren she takes as much as she needs to tell her story, and that's it.

                    Your iTunes artwork is your first impression, have someone who is a graphic person create yours.

                    Consistency can boost your brand by never missing an episode, or by announcing (if you take a break) your planned absence.

                    People may want t-shirts, mugs and other "Swag" items, so keep this in mind when making your artwork.

                    The Apple company broke the rules in their advertisements (so have companies like All Spice)

                    Don't be afraid to think outside the box. Thin about how "a show about nothing" is one of the top televisions shows of all time.

                    Lauren's Favorite Marketing Podcasts Startup Smart Passive Income Marketing Over Coffee Duct Tape Marketing

                    Special Podcast Marketing Guide

                    Go to  www.crowdspring.com/sop free guide promoting your show, and your design needs.

                    Blue Yeti - A Hands On Review

                    The Blue Yeti is quoted WAY TOO MUCH as a great podcast microphone. It is a condensor microphone, and if not used properly can make really bad sounding recordings. It can pick up what is right in front of it, what is behind it, or everything around it. You want to "Cardoid" setting for your best  recording of a solo podcaster.

                    To avoid sounding like you’re in a tunnel you need to turn the gain down, and get close the the microphone. When you do this, you will have what most people call “popping p’s” when you say worse that start with P’s, B’s, H’s, etc as the from your mouth goes into the microphone. The solution is to purchase a pop filter. Due to it’s unique size you need a specialized pop filter. You can purchase the Blue Pop Filter for $59, or you can grab a perfectly good one for $22 from Auphonix . The other thing you need is a shock mount. The reason for this is ANY touching of the desk that the Yeti is sitting on will pick up the vibrations. So you can purchase the shock mount from Blue for $56, or this one from for Auphonix for $30. So the price of a Yeti goes from $89 to somewhere between to $$141 to 204. The shock mount is going to need a stand so I recommend either the Rode PSA1 ($99) or the Heil PL-2T ($130)

                    This is why the Audio Technica ATR2100 is the Best Podcasting Microphone NOT the Blue yeti.

                    The Audio Technica us a dynamic microphone (which means it will pick up less noise than the yet)

                    While the stand that comes with the ATR2100 is very simple, it will pick up less thumping (but I would still recommend a shock mount. This unit is a shock mount and pop filter in one for $9.

                    Because its more of a “traditional” microphone you are a little more open to pop filters and shock mounts.

                    The ATR2100 works via USB and XLR ( can work with a mixer) so if you’re flying solo, or need to plug into a mixer you’re good to go.

                    So to get the same features you would need a Blue Yeti ($199), Pop Filter ($22), Shock Mount ($30), so would be out $251. Where is the ATR2100 is $77, the pop filter shock mount is $9, so you would be out around $86.

                    Podcast Glossary "G"

                    Garageband Grageband is a free software on the Macintosh platform that can be used to create a podcast. While great looking and equipped with some powerful tools, I feel its great for assembling podcasts, but not the best for editing out “Ums, and ya knows.”

                    "Glenn the Geek'd it" Glenn "the Geek" Hebert runs horseradionetwork.com and is doing a great job getting advertisers on his show. He gets sponsors to help promote his show and other actions. An example Jim Collison got a sponsor to pay for a custom app and said, "I Glenn the Geek'd it." To hear Glenn talk about his techniques check out http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/glenn1

                    Podcast Rewind

                    Podcast Roundtable "Getting Your Show Out To Your Audience"

                    The Pub "Investigative reporting costs thousands of dollars"

                    Because of My Podcast - My Network Has Grown

                    Nick Snapp of the  The “Make it Snappy” Productivity Show has had his network of resources and friends grown since starting his podcast. He even got to Puerto Rico with a film documentary and film John Lee Dumas of eofire.com Check out Nick's Show at www.makeitsnappyshow.com

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Alexacast - Get the most out of your Amazon Echo

                    Best Podcasting Gear - Find out the best podcasting gear

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>71dee0b6e02eaa2d47e3c1077660fd04Mon, 05 Dec 2016 05:06:45 -040051:07falsefull543543A Six Figure Podcast Income: Michael O’Neal InterviewToday we talk with Michael Oneal. Michael has over 500 episodes of his Solopreneur Hour, and also a co-host/producer of the Hines Ward show. Michael talks about how standing out leads to better relationships which lead to better opportunities. He also talks about his new "Art of the Interview" course.
                    Sponsor: Emerald City Productions

                    Your first four episodes edited for $15 each, and after that, it's only $40. Think of the time your will save, and think about how good you will sound. All the ums, and yaknows will be gone. All of your volumes will be even, and the equalization will be just right (not too much bass, not too thin) Check them out at www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Because of my Podcast: Jim Collison Caught the Attention of the Department of Labor

                    3:06 Jim Collison does a podcast for his job. Also at his job he works with high school students in an intern program. The country needs more programmers. Gallup is making it happen. He got interviewed on the program (see the video at http://gallupgethip.com/info, but what caught the ears of the State of Nebraska Department of Labor? The Audio podcast.

                    So because of Jim’s Podcast, he got a meeting with the Department of Labor for the State of Nebraska.

                    See Jim’s podcast for Gallup at http://coaching.gallup.com

                    Jim also does his podcast which you can find at www.theavaergeguy.tv

                    Michael Oneal Stand Outs Above the Rest

                    9:51 Michael Oneal comes up with stuff that is awesome, and the beauty of his information is that it is stuff you can put into action immediately. Here is an example. If you are doing an interview with someone and you don't want them to use the "same old stories" in this interview. What do you do? Use those stories in your introduction, and they can't use them in their answers. They are forced to come up with NEW answers. BRILLIANT.

                    He has a new course called the Art of the Interview which you can find at www.artoftheinterview.co

                    Michael started out as a web designer who has lived all over the country and has had some great experiences. He is a professional drummer and has acquired skills in all sorts of areas.

                    He filled in on the David Wood Show, started his own show and within a year was making a six figure income. Today we want to know how he did it. 

                    Michael stood out by giving Pat Flynn an iTunes gift card, and late taking him to lunch (after slowly building the relationship) then DIDN'T grill him about business (he zagged when everyone else zigged). This "non-grilling" talk then stood out from every conversation that Pat usually has at lunch. So Michael turned that into the Solopreneur Hour Show and how he has over 8 million downloads.

                    Michael produces/hosts a show with Hines Ward Show from the Pittsburgh Steelers. Today you hear how relationships got Michael in the door that had been closed.

                    Michael spent 90% of his bank account to buy flowers for John Lee Dumas, and it resulted in a great friendship that has lead to Michael partnering with John with different projects.

                    Michael turned down coaching because he didn't feel he was a coach. His audience showed him he was missing an opportunity.

                    He didn't launch with giant platforms. He got to know his audience by talking directly with his community and launched with a private Facebook group. This private Facebook Group has now evolved to Michael's Solo Lab. 

                    28:02 Michael is launching a new show about Hi End Stereo Equipment because he likes talking about it. He's not thinking about sponsors. He's not thinking about downloads. He's thinking he enjoys super high-end audio equipment and wants to talk about it. Now think about that. THIS AUDIENCE (hi-end stereo equipment) HAS MONEY, AND they don't have a problem spending it. He didn't over think it. He didn't do months of research. He wants to talk about it, so he did. As he said on his Solorpreneur show, "I'll figure the rest out later."

                    Most shows are awful because they are started not on passion, but on the idea of monetization and making big bucks. So when life happens, and you run out of steam, your episodes suffer.

                    The Art of the Interview

                    30:00 Michael trains people that "Patterns Become Products" and that is what inspired the Art of the Interview Course that Michael recently launched. People kept asking him for it (a pattern) so he turned it into a product;

                    Here again, Michael took steps to stand out. He made three separate courses in one.

                    He recorded the course in a video format

                    For the audio version, he didn't just strip the audio from the video. He recorded different audio to maximize the audio format.

                    He had some take transcripts of the audio, and then tweak it into a Kindle book.

                    He does a "directors cut" version of one of his toughest interviews. You get to hear Michael "Armchair Quarterback" the interview.

                    More Ways To Stand Out

                    38:01 Michael shared the stories of gift cards and flowers, but Michael shares GREAT tips on making sure your guest will promote your show

                    People don't take the word "host" serious enough.

                    As many podcast listeners don't listen to the end of the show, don't wait to plug the guest at the end of the show (please note that is why I plugged Michael's courses at the beginning of the interview).

                    Michaels Resources

                    Solo Media Ninja Course

                    Michael's Coaching Program

                    Michael's Free Course on Attending Contentions

                    Michaels Solo Lab

                    Art of the interview course

                    Solopreneur Hour Podcast

                    Dynamic Ad Insertion Is Awful

                    45:20 Dynamic ads allow you to populate our back catalog with advertisements. I play a clip from a show, and the transition from content to ad back to content is mind boggling.

                    Advertisecast.com has announced that they partnered with Podomatic. While this is interesting, what we need is not more podcasts. For those that want to monetize, we need MORE SPONSORS.

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    New Media Show

                    JKM Agency (Podcast Advertising)

                    Ryan K Parker from the Food Craftsmen

                    Alexa Cast (New Test Podcast From Dave Jackson about the Amazon Echo)

                    Podcast Consulting Sale (ENDS SOON)

                    Use the coupon code backfriday now through the end of the month on one on one consulting

                    Purchase 60 minutes of consulting and get a free month at the School of Podcasting

                    ]]>Today we talk with Michael Oneal. Michael has over 500 episodes of his Solopreneur Hour, and also a co-host/producer of the Hines Ward show. Michael talks about how standing out leads to better relationships which lead to better opportunities. He also talks about his new "Art of the Interview" course.
                    Sponsor: Emerald City Productions

                    Your first four episodes edited for $15 each, and after that, it's only $40. Think of the time your will save, and think about how good you will sound. All the ums, and yaknows will be gone. All of your volumes will be even, and the equalization will be just right (not too much bass, not too thin) Check them out at www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Because of my Podcast: Jim Collison Caught the Attention of the Department of Labor

                    3:06 Jim Collison does a podcast for his job. Also at his job he works with high school students in an intern program. The country needs more programmers. Gallup is making it happen. He got interviewed on the program (see the video at http://gallupgethip.com/info, but what caught the ears of the State of Nebraska Department of Labor? The Audio podcast.

                    So because of Jim’s Podcast, he got a meeting with the Department of Labor for the State of Nebraska.

                    See Jim’s podcast for Gallup at http://coaching.gallup.com

                    Jim also does his podcast which you can find at www.theavaergeguy.tv

                    Michael Oneal Stand Outs Above the Rest

                    9:51 Michael Oneal comes up with stuff that is awesome, and the beauty of his information is that it is stuff you can put into action immediately. Here is an example. If you are doing an interview with someone and you don't want them to use the "same old stories" in this interview. What do you do? Use those stories in your introduction, and they can't use them in their answers. They are forced to come up with NEW answers. BRILLIANT.

                    He has a new course called the Art of the Interview which you can find at www.artoftheinterview.co

                    Michael started out as a web designer who has lived all over the country and has had some great experiences. He is a professional drummer and has acquired skills in all sorts of areas.

                    He filled in on the David Wood Show, started his own show and within a year was making a six figure income. Today we want to know how he did it. 

                    Michael stood out by giving Pat Flynn an iTunes gift card, and late taking him to lunch (after slowly building the relationship) then DIDN'T grill him about business (he zagged when everyone else zigged). This "non-grilling" talk then stood out from every conversation that Pat usually has at lunch. So Michael turned that into the Solopreneur Hour Show and how he has over 8 million downloads.

                    Michael produces/hosts a show with Hines Ward Show from the Pittsburgh Steelers. Today you hear how relationships got Michael in the door that had been closed.

                    Michael spent 90% of his bank account to buy flowers for John Lee Dumas, and it resulted in a great friendship that has lead to Michael partnering with John with different projects.

                    Michael turned down coaching because he didn't feel he was a coach. His audience showed him he was missing an opportunity.

                    He didn't launch with giant platforms. He got to know his audience by talking directly with his community and launched with a private Facebook group. This private Facebook Group has now evolved to Michael's Solo Lab. 

                    28:02 Michael is launching a new show about Hi End Stereo Equipment because he likes talking about it. He's not thinking about sponsors. He's not thinking about downloads. He's thinking he enjoys super high-end audio equipment and wants to talk about it. Now think about that. THIS AUDIENCE (hi-end stereo equipment) HAS MONEY, AND they don't have a problem spending it. He didn't over think it. He didn't do months of research. He wants to talk about it, so he did. As he said on his Solorpreneur show, "I'll figure the rest out later."

                    Most shows are awful because they are started not on passion, but on the idea of monetization and making big bucks. So when life happens, and you run out of steam, your episodes suffer.

                    The Art of the Interview

                    30:00 Michael trains people that "Patterns Become Products" and that is what inspired the Art of the Interview Course that Michael recently launched. People kept asking him for it (a pattern) so he turned it into a product;

                    Here again, Michael took steps to stand out. He made three separate courses in one.

                    He recorded the course in a video format

                    For the audio version, he didn't just strip the audio from the video. He recorded different audio to maximize the audio format.

                    He had some take transcripts of the audio, and then tweak it into a Kindle book.

                    He does a "directors cut" version of one of his toughest interviews. You get to hear Michael "Armchair Quarterback" the interview.

                    More Ways To Stand Out

                    38:01 Michael shared the stories of gift cards and flowers, but Michael shares GREAT tips on making sure your guest will promote your show

                    People don't take the word "host" serious enough.

                    As many podcast listeners don't listen to the end of the show, don't wait to plug the guest at the end of the show (please note that is why I plugged Michael's courses at the beginning of the interview).

                    Michaels Resources

                    Solo Media Ninja Course

                    Michael's Coaching Program

                    Michael's Free Course on Attending Contentions

                    Michaels Solo Lab

                    Art of the interview course

                    Solopreneur Hour Podcast

                    Dynamic Ad Insertion Is Awful

                    45:20 Dynamic ads allow you to populate our back catalog with advertisements. I play a clip from a show, and the transition from content to ad back to content is mind boggling.

                    Advertisecast.com has announced that they partnered with Podomatic. While this is interesting, what we need is not more podcasts. For those that want to monetize, we need MORE SPONSORS.

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    New Media Show

                    JKM Agency (Podcast Advertising)

                    Ryan K Parker from the Food Craftsmen

                    Alexa Cast (New Test Podcast From Dave Jackson about the Amazon Echo)

                    Podcast Consulting Sale (ENDS SOON)

                    Use the coupon code backfriday now through the end of the month on one on one consulting

                    Purchase 60 minutes of consulting and get a free month at the School of Podcasting

                    ]]>588cebaee89d1c177b3630cc3aee09d3Mon, 28 Nov 2016 06:17:06 -040057:41falsefull542542What Goes Into Making a Podcast Episode?Today I want to share what I do to put together an episode.  My example will be the the latest episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast. I also do a podcast microphone shootout with microphones in the $300 range (last week we did a shootout with microphones that are under $100)
                    This Week's Sponsor: Emerald City Productions

                    This week's show is sponsored by Emerald City Productions. Get your podcast edited and sounding great with this awesome special. Your first four episodes will be $15 each (after that they go to the regular price of $40). Check them out at www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Because of My Podcast I Got A New Job: Super Joe Pardo

                    Joe Pardo is the man behind the Dreamers Podcast, and also the organizer of Podcast MidAtlantic. Today Joe shares how his podcast got him invited to an event. At that event he got to meet some influencial people. Those people got to know Joe, and through his podcast they knew what his credentials were, and offered him a job. Find Joe at SuperJoePardo.com

                    Being the Scenes Of Making a Podcast Episode

                    So I had someone who was surprised at the amount of work that might go into a podcast. So this week as I prepared to publish an episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, I took notes. There is one key point here.

                    Length of time spent on and episode does NOT equal more downloads. You can spend all day working on content that doesn't connect with you audience. So here is what I did.

                    First based on the ideas in the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] I came up with my main idea. Which is, "Based on mainstream media, it is easy to feel out of place if you are alone for the holidays. This along with the numerous activities of the holidays can lead to stress, and stress can lead to emotional eating."  That is where I started.

                    Here is a little confession. Last year I was "Alone" for the holidays. It turned out it wasn't that bad. Different? Sure. Bad? Nope. I wanted to help anyone who might be feeling down for the holidays. So I set out for strategies and insights for those who are alone on the holidays.

                    I started with Google. I looked through about 10 articles, and ended up reading five.

                    I pulled from my own experiences.

                    I looked into resources for people who really were in a bad place and then made sure they were legit.

                    I then went down a rabbit hole, when I found iPrevail. A pretty cool website that offers live chat for those who need to talk, and for those who want to go deeper, the offer some online courses. Intrigued, I signed up and took one. Note: This wasn't needed to complete the episode, but I always go with the thought "If it interests me, it probably interests my audience."

                    I then looked at the holidays, and tried to find things that might be entertaining. I injected some humor to stop the episode from being so dark. I found examples I thought people could relate to (overly gushy Jewelry commercials), decorating a Christmas Tree, and weird family members. All of these to point out that the holidays are not a world of splendor filled with Rainbows and Lollipops.

                    I took some time to figure out what topics I wanted to hit first. In other words,  I tried to take the smattering of ideas and organize them into a stream of ideas that flowed nicely.

                    I also through in a quick segment on an egg cooker I recently purchased.

                    Finally I recorded it. My show notes were pretty done as I now make my show notes first to organize my thoughts.

                    I recorded directly into my [easyazon_link identifier="B00KCXMBES" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Zoom H5 Four-Track Portable Recorder[/easyazon_link] , and then took that recording and put it into Hindenburg Journalist ,and added the intro and outro music along with some transition music. If you need music check out podcastingresources.com. I uploaded the file to Libsyn.com and copied and pasted the file into my Wordpress (as this is an old site, I'm still using the PowerPress plugin, if this was a new show I would use the Libsyn plugin). Use the coupon sopfree when signing up at Libsyn.com to get a free month (in addition to the current month) .

                    Podcast Microphone Shootout $300 Range

                    All prices are based on Amazon.

                    Audio Techncia BP40 (Full Loaded $547)

                    Microphone #1 Was [easyazon_link identifier="B00VXSVF6G" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Audio Technica BP40 Large-Diaphragm Dynamic Broadcast Microphone[/easyazon_link] is $349. The [easyazon_link identifier="B011VJOU8Q" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Audio-Technica AT8484 Shockmount for BP40[/easyazon_link] is an additional $99. I would recommend the Rode PSA1 Arm ($99)

                    Heil PR40 ( Fully Loaded $495)

                    Microphone #2 Was the [easyazon_link identifier="B000SOYOTQ" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Heil PR-40 Dynamic Studio Recording Microphone[/easyazon_link]. There is a nice bundle with a boom arm and shock mount [easyazon_link identifier="B00T6JBAUA" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Heil Sound PR 40 Dynamic Cardioid Studio Microphone Bundle with PRSM Shock Mount, PL2T Overhead Studio and Broadcast Boom Mount and Microphone Cable[/easyazon_link] for $479. You would still need a pop filter or Wind Screen

                    I had set the volume the same for all microphones and found them all were about the same. You might want to pick up a Fet head to boost the signal of the PR40

                    Electrovoice RE320 ( fully Loaded $507)

                    Microphone #3 is the [easyazon_link identifier="B00KCN83VI" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]EV RE320 Variable-D Dynamic Vocal and Instrument Microphone[/easyazon_link] which costs $294. The [easyazon_link identifier="B003BQ2DKK" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Electro-Voice 309A Suspension Shockmount (for RE20 or RE27ND)[/easyazon_link] is $99. Here again you need a pop filter, or a Windscreen and a  Rode PSA1 boom arm.

                    Why Did We Hear Microphone #3 Twice? (the RE320) because it has a bass roll off switch, and for me (my opinion) I thought that was the best of the tree. The first two (to my ear) sounded almost identical. I love the shock mount for the BP40 (it is specially made fpr the microphone and makes getting the mic in and out super easy.

                    According to my kitchen food scale, the RE320 was the heaviest at 1.7 lbs, the BP40 was 1.66 lbs, and the PR40 was only 13.7 oz.

                    Here again, there is no bad choice. I use the Eletrovoice RE320, and none of the other microphones moved me to lose this mic. In the end the difference between the three was minimal in my non "audio snob" ears.

                    How Podcasting Helped My First TV Appearance

                    I was interviewed on the Golden Opportunities show this week (it will air at 11:30 AM EST on Channel 3 in Cleveland on December 11). Here was the process:

                    The goal was to explain podcasting to people over 55.

                    I had a phone call with the show runner and we talked for 10 minutes.

                    From that the show runner picked the parts that she liked, and explained the answers that I provided that fit their audience.

                    I didn't have to memorize the answers (but I more or less did). The segment would be four questions.

                    I practiced the night before, and I practiced the morning before. On the way up to Cleveland, I kept botching at least one answer. I wasn't blowing it, but it wasn't smooth.

                    I came up with words that would trigger a response that would help me remember the answers. I had a feeling I might "mess up" a little bit.

                    In the end I did slightly have a flub, but because of podcasting I caught it, clarified and continue. I didn't freak out.

                    All those "Ask the Podcast Coach" live sessions on Saturday helped me keep my cool.

                    Podcast Glossary "F"

                    Feed A feed is a file that contains all the details of a podcast. The feed is often generated by your media host, or plugin, and is read by apps that then use that details to show the details on a screen (computer, phone, or tablet).

                    FeedburnerFeed burner is tool from Google that can take an RSS feed and add additional items to the feed. You also get stats on how many people are subscribed. Feedburner is deemed by many experts to be out of date and a prime cause for many trouble tickets for podcasting hosting providers (it often stops updating your feed and has been shown to scramble the show description and the episode descriptions). While it was once recommended in 2006, most podcast consultants tell their customers to steer clear of this now outdated tool.

                    FetHead Fethead is a microphone amplifier that delivers 22 DB of clean gain to your microphone. So if you are using a microphone that needs a “push” to be louder, then you might try plugging your microphone into the Fethead.

                    FTP FTP stands for file transfer protocol. In a nutshell, there are two ways to upload files. Http stands for hypertext transfer protocol. Of those...]]>Today I want to share what I do to put together an episode.  My example will be the the latest episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast. I also do a podcast microphone shootout with microphones in the $300 range (last week we did a shootout with microphones that are under $100)

                    This Week's Sponsor: Emerald City Productions

                    This week's show is sponsored by Emerald City Productions. Get your podcast edited and sounding great with this awesome special. Your first four episodes will be $15 each (after that they go to the regular price of $40). Check them out at www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Because of My Podcast I Got A New Job: Super Joe Pardo

                    Joe Pardo is the man behind the Dreamers Podcast, and also the organizer of Podcast MidAtlantic. Today Joe shares how his podcast got him invited to an event. At that event he got to meet some influencial people. Those people got to know Joe, and through his podcast they knew what his credentials were, and offered him a job. Find Joe at SuperJoePardo.com

                    Being the Scenes Of Making a Podcast Episode

                    So I had someone who was surprised at the amount of work that might go into a podcast. So this week as I prepared to publish an episode of the Logical Weight Loss Podcast, I took notes. There is one key point here.

                    Length of time spent on and episode does NOT equal more downloads. You can spend all day working on content that doesn't connect with you audience. So here is what I did.

                    First based on the ideas in the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] I came up with my main idea. Which is, "Based on mainstream media, it is easy to feel out of place if you are alone for the holidays. This along with the numerous activities of the holidays can lead to stress, and stress can lead to emotional eating."  That is where I started.

                    Here is a little confession. Last year I was "Alone" for the holidays. It turned out it wasn't that bad. Different? Sure. Bad? Nope. I wanted to help anyone who might be feeling down for the holidays. So I set out for strategies and insights for those who are alone on the holidays.

                    I started with Google. I looked through about 10 articles, and ended up reading five.

                    I pulled from my own experiences.

                    I looked into resources for people who really were in a bad place and then made sure they were legit.

                    I then went down a rabbit hole, when I found iPrevail. A pretty cool website that offers live chat for those who need to talk, and for those who want to go deeper, the offer some online courses. Intrigued, I signed up and took one. Note: This wasn't needed to complete the episode, but I always go with the thought "If it interests me, it probably interests my audience."

                    I then looked at the holidays, and tried to find things that might be entertaining. I injected some humor to stop the episode from being so dark. I found examples I thought people could relate to (overly gushy Jewelry commercials), decorating a Christmas Tree, and weird family members. All of these to point out that the holidays are not a world of splendor filled with Rainbows and Lollipops.

                    I took some time to figure out what topics I wanted to hit first. In other words,  I tried to take the smattering of ideas and organize them into a stream of ideas that flowed nicely.

                    I also through in a quick segment on an egg cooker I recently purchased.

                    Finally I recorded it. My show notes were pretty done as I now make my show notes first to organize my thoughts.

                    I recorded directly into my [easyazon_link identifier="B00KCXMBES" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Zoom H5 Four-Track Portable Recorder[/easyazon_link] , and then took that recording and put it into Hindenburg Journalist ,and added the intro and outro music along with some transition music. If you need music check out podcastingresources.com. I uploaded the file to Libsyn.com and copied and pasted the file into my Wordpress (as this is an old site, I'm still using the PowerPress plugin, if this was a new show I would use the Libsyn plugin). Use the coupon sopfree when signing up at Libsyn.com to get a free month (in addition to the current month) .

                    Podcast Microphone Shootout $300 Range

                    All prices are based on Amazon.

                    Audio Techncia BP40 (Full Loaded $547)

                    Microphone #1 Was [easyazon_link identifier="B00VXSVF6G" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Audio Technica BP40 Large-Diaphragm Dynamic Broadcast Microphone[/easyazon_link] is $349. The [easyazon_link identifier="B011VJOU8Q" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Audio-Technica AT8484 Shockmount for BP40[/easyazon_link] is an additional $99. I would recommend the Rode PSA1 Arm ($99)

                    Heil PR40 ( Fully Loaded $495)

                    Microphone #2 Was the [easyazon_link identifier="B000SOYOTQ" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Heil PR-40 Dynamic Studio Recording Microphone[/easyazon_link]. There is a nice bundle with a boom arm and shock mount [easyazon_link identifier="B00T6JBAUA" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Heil Sound PR 40 Dynamic Cardioid Studio Microphone Bundle with PRSM Shock Mount, PL2T Overhead Studio and Broadcast Boom Mount and Microphone Cable[/easyazon_link] for $479. You would still need a pop filter or Wind Screen

                    I had set the volume the same for all microphones and found them all were about the same. You might want to pick up a Fet head to boost the signal of the PR40

                    Electrovoice RE320 ( fully Loaded $507)

                    Microphone #3 is the [easyazon_link identifier="B00KCN83VI" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]EV RE320 Variable-D Dynamic Vocal and Instrument Microphone[/easyazon_link] which costs $294. The [easyazon_link identifier="B003BQ2DKK" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Electro-Voice 309A Suspension Shockmount (for RE20 or RE27ND)[/easyazon_link] is $99. Here again you need a pop filter, or a Windscreen and a  Rode PSA1 boom arm.

                    Why Did We Hear Microphone #3 Twice? (the RE320) because it has a bass roll off switch, and for me (my opinion) I thought that was the best of the tree. The first two (to my ear) sounded almost identical. I love the shock mount for the BP40 (it is specially made fpr the microphone and makes getting the mic in and out super easy.

                    According to my kitchen food scale, the RE320 was the heaviest at 1.7 lbs, the BP40 was 1.66 lbs, and the PR40 was only 13.7 oz.

                    Here again, there is no bad choice. I use the Eletrovoice RE320, and none of the other microphones moved me to lose this mic. In the end the difference between the three was minimal in my non "audio snob" ears.

                    How Podcasting Helped My First TV Appearance

                    I was interviewed on the Golden Opportunities show this week (it will air at 11:30 AM EST on Channel 3 in Cleveland on December 11). Here was the process:

                    The goal was to explain podcasting to people over 55.

                    I had a phone call with the show runner and we talked for 10 minutes.

                    From that the show runner picked the parts that she liked, and explained the answers that I provided that fit their audience.

                    I didn't have to memorize the answers (but I more or less did). The segment would be four questions.

                    I practiced the night before, and I practiced the morning before. On the way up to Cleveland, I kept botching at least one answer. I wasn't blowing it, but it wasn't smooth.

                    I came up with words that would trigger a response that would help me remember the answers. I had a feeling I might "mess up" a little bit.

                    In the end I did slightly have a flub, but because of podcasting I caught it, clarified and continue. I didn't freak out.

                    All those "Ask the Podcast Coach" live sessions on Saturday helped me keep my cool.

                    Podcast Glossary "F"

                    Feed A feed is a file that contains all the details of a podcast. The feed is often generated by your media host, or plugin, and is read by apps that then use that details to show the details on a screen (computer, phone, or tablet).

                    FeedburnerFeed burner is tool from Google that can take an RSS feed and add additional items to the feed. You also get stats on how many people are subscribed. Feedburner is deemed by many experts to be out of date and a prime cause for many trouble tickets for podcasting hosting providers (it often stops updating your feed and has been shown to scramble the show description and the episode descriptions). While it was once recommended in 2006, most podcast consultants tell their customers to steer clear of this now outdated tool.

                    FetHead Fethead is a microphone amplifier that delivers 22 DB of clean gain to your microphone. So if you are using a microphone that needs a “push” to be louder, then you might try plugging your microphone into the Fethead.

                    FTP FTP stands for file transfer protocol. In a nutshell, there are two ways to upload files. Http stands for hypertext transfer protocol. Of those two ftp is faster. It requires a separate program to upload files.

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    30 Day Guarantee Step by Step Tutorials Priority Email Support Private Facebook Group Live Group Coaching Calls Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>1ca468cf1db117d899ec7b3dd5d170b6Mon, 21 Nov 2016 04:54:00 -040037:24falsefull541541Is The Audio Technica ATR2100 Still the Best Podcasting Microphone?Today we are going to get our gear on. All you gear heads are going to love this. We are going to talk about some of the best places to purchase gear, we are going to talk about mixers, and we are going to compare three microphones that are under $100
                    Because of My Podcast - I Had to Quit My Podcast

                    John Dennis is the co-organizer of the Thrive Make Money Matter conference, and the moderator of the Podcasters hangout Facebook group. He is also a podcaster with with smart time online, or he was until his podcast brought him so much business he had to stop podcasting to take care of his customers. AMAZING!

                    Best Places To Shop For Podcast Gear

                    Isn't the quick answer, "Amazon, DUH"? Not always. Here are some places to check out.

                    Amazon

                    When it comes to shopping for selection and price, it is hard to beat Amazon.com

                    Now for the record, I am an affiliate for Amazon. However, you will hear where this may not always be the best place to purchase your gear. If you want to shop via Amazon, please use our affiliate shop at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/shop The other advantage Amazon has is if you are an Amazon Prime member, you can get free two day shipping

                    Same Day Music

                    If you were going to purchase an Electrovoice RE320 Microphone you might be tempted to go to Amazon where the price is $279. Did you know that Same Day Musichas the Electrovoice RE320 microphone for $299 and they have non-new versions for $269 AND you don’t have to pay tax on your purchased unless you live in New Jersey.

                    BSW

                    BSW (www.bswusa.com ) is all about audio and broadcasting so they have some niche items that you may not find in some places. They also run specials and have bundles that you won’t find at some places. For example if you wanted to go totally pro and buy an Elecrovoice RE20 Mic, 309A Shockmount, BSW Broadcast Microphone cable & REPop Filter Package it would be $479. If you bought the equivalent at Amazon.

                    B & H Photo

                    Their prices are typically about the same as others (occasionally more expensive), but if you can’t find it in another place, chances are you find it at BNH. For example they have a package for the RE2o that has a cloud lifter.. The other thing you will find at BNH (and you will have this at BSW) is a knowledgeable staff. For example one package with the RE20 comes with a cloud lifter which boosts your signal (which is a pretty good idea). They have another package that has the RE20 and the DBX 286 preamp (a totally pro setup)

                    Podcast Stock Test

                    If you were using a microphone like the Heil Pro40, or a Sure SM7B, these need a lot of gain to work properly. One Solution is a piece of equipment called a "Fethead" so I went to the above mentioned place.

                    BNH – Yes $89

                    Same Day Music – No

                    Amazon – No (suggested a cloud lifter)

                    BSWUSA – No

                    So like I said, it helps to know where to shop based on what you are looking for.

                    Do I Need a Mixer What is an Audio Mixer?

                    If you and your co-host are in the same room, and you are playing music in your podcast the purpose of the mixer is to allow you to adjust (mix) the audio levels of you, your guest(s), and the music so the listener does not have to ride the volume knob and make constant adjustments.

                    Key Word Here is NEED

                    When I say NEED here, I mean “Can’t do it without it.” You can always find a use for a mixer, but I’ll explain when you NEED one, and when you WANT one (there is a big difference). Keep in mind that the simpler you keep it, the less headaches. The more you add, the more things that can go wrong.

                    When You Need a Mixer?

                    If you have multiple people in the same room. Everyone should have their own microphone, and that should go into a mixer.

                    If you are mixing in live music and sound effects.

                    When You DON’T NEED an Audio Mixer

                    If you are recording a solo podcast and you are going to add any music or sounds in later.

                    When You DON’T NEED a Mixer, but Probably Could Use One

                    If you are doing a show with a co-host or guests who are remote. You could record this with an ATr2100 microphone and a portable recorder (and use Skype as the mixer)

                    Best Podcast Microphones For Less Than $100

                    Today I test the following microphones:

                    Samson Q2U

                    Audio Technica AT 2005

                    Audio Technica ATR2100

                    Overview: For the most part, if you look at the specs of these microphones they should sound very close. They all are dynamic (pick up less room noise), and you can plug them into a mixer, or directly into the computer using USB.

                    Out of the three the AT2005 looks the best. In regards to which one sounds better I rank them in the following order

                    1. ATR2100 - TOP
                    2. Samson Q2u - a little warmer
                    3. AT 2005 - Still sounded good
                    
                    

                    Realize sound is subjective and some microphones sound good with one voice, and not so good with another. This is where a mixer can be handy (even if you're flying solo).

                    BOTTOM LINE: These are all fine choices, and you won't regret purchasing any of them. The big take away, is you don't need to spend $1600 to start a podcast.

                    Great content can save poor audio, but great gear will not save horrible content. Once you get your microphone, focus on the your audience and the content.

                    One Final Note: So many podcasters recommend the Blue Yeti. Is it a bad microphone? NO. Is it a good choice? NO WAY!. Why? It is a condensor microphone and condensor microphones pick up a ton of room noise (I know I have not one, but TWO in a drawer). It's always interesting when I hear someone recomend the Blule Yeti, it is often with the phrase, "I use that one when I started out." One other point, the  [easyazon_link identifier="B002VA464S" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Blue Yeti USB Microphone - Silver[/easyazon_link] is $149. It would be great for gamers who don't want to wear a headset.

                    Podcast Glossary "E" Part Two

                    Mark from the Resourceful Designer had a comment stating I skipped a bunch of "E's" in last week's show, so here they are. Let it never be said that Dave Jackson is not up for some constructive feedback. You can find out more about Marc at http://marksmandesign.ca/ Episode zero Episode zero is a podcast episode that is often a simple introduction episode used as a placeholder as you need one live podcast in iTunes.

                    Effects Effects are things you can add to your audio such as reverb, echo, compression.

                    Equalization Equalization is a fancy word for adding bass, treble, etc that affects the tone of your audio.

                    Enunciate Enunciation is talking in a way that everyone can clearly understand what you are saying. So instead of saying “I’m doin’ allrigh….” you would say I’m doing allright.”

                    Ecamm Call Recorder Ecamm Call Recorder is software for the Mac platform that allows you to record skype conversations. Some people refer to the software with just the phrase “ecamm.”

                    Evernote Evernote is a free software that allows you to organize…. Well anything you want. You can have text,pdf, images, these all then sync to all of your devices. As you can share information with other people, this is a great tool for collaborating on show notes. You can learn how to use Evernote quickly in the Today we are going to get our gear on. All you gear heads are going to love this. We are going to talk about some of the best places to purchase gear, we are going to talk about mixers, and we are going to compare three microphones that are under $100

                    Because of My Podcast - I Had to Quit My Podcast

                    John Dennis is the co-organizer of the Thrive Make Money Matter conference, and the moderator of the Podcasters hangout Facebook group. He is also a podcaster with with smart time online, or he was until his podcast brought him so much business he had to stop podcasting to take care of his customers. AMAZING!

                    Best Places To Shop For Podcast Gear

                    Isn't the quick answer, "Amazon, DUH"? Not always. Here are some places to check out.

                    Amazon

                    When it comes to shopping for selection and price, it is hard to beat Amazon.com

                    Now for the record, I am an affiliate for Amazon. However, you will hear where this may not always be the best place to purchase your gear. If you want to shop via Amazon, please use our affiliate shop at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/shop The other advantage Amazon has is if you are an Amazon Prime member, you can get free two day shipping

                    Same Day Music

                    If you were going to purchase an Electrovoice RE320 Microphone you might be tempted to go to Amazon where the price is $279. Did you know that Same Day Musichas the Electrovoice RE320 microphone for $299 and they have non-new versions for $269 AND you don’t have to pay tax on your purchased unless you live in New Jersey.

                    BSW

                    BSW (www.bswusa.com ) is all about audio and broadcasting so they have some niche items that you may not find in some places. They also run specials and have bundles that you won’t find at some places. For example if you wanted to go totally pro and buy an Elecrovoice RE20 Mic, 309A Shockmount, BSW Broadcast Microphone cable & REPop Filter Package it would be $479. If you bought the equivalent at Amazon.

                    B & H Photo

                    Their prices are typically about the same as others (occasionally more expensive), but if you can’t find it in another place, chances are you find it at BNH. For example they have a package for the RE2o that has a cloud lifter.. The other thing you will find at BNH (and you will have this at BSW) is a knowledgeable staff. For example one package with the RE20 comes with a cloud lifter which boosts your signal (which is a pretty good idea). They have another package that has the RE20 and the DBX 286 preamp (a totally pro setup)

                    Podcast Stock Test

                    If you were using a microphone like the Heil Pro40, or a Sure SM7B, these need a lot of gain to work properly. One Solution is a piece of equipment called a "Fethead" so I went to the above mentioned place.

                    BNH – Yes $89

                    Same Day Music – No

                    Amazon – No (suggested a cloud lifter)

                    BSWUSA – No

                    So like I said, it helps to know where to shop based on what you are looking for.

                    Do I Need a Mixer What is an Audio Mixer?

                    If you and your co-host are in the same room, and you are playing music in your podcast the purpose of the mixer is to allow you to adjust (mix) the audio levels of you, your guest(s), and the music so the listener does not have to ride the volume knob and make constant adjustments.

                    Key Word Here is NEED

                    When I say NEED here, I mean “Can’t do it without it.” You can always find a use for a mixer, but I’ll explain when you NEED one, and when you WANT one (there is a big difference). Keep in mind that the simpler you keep it, the less headaches. The more you add, the more things that can go wrong.

                    When You Need a Mixer?

                    If you have multiple people in the same room. Everyone should have their own microphone, and that should go into a mixer.

                    If you are mixing in live music and sound effects.

                    When You DON’T NEED an Audio Mixer

                    If you are recording a solo podcast and you are going to add any music or sounds in later.

                    When You DON’T NEED a Mixer, but Probably Could Use One

                    If you are doing a show with a co-host or guests who are remote. You could record this with an ATr2100 microphone and a portable recorder (and use Skype as the mixer)

                    Best Podcast Microphones For Less Than $100

                    Today I test the following microphones:

                    Samson Q2U

                    Audio Technica AT 2005

                    Audio Technica ATR2100

                    Overview: For the most part, if you look at the specs of these microphones they should sound very close. They all are dynamic (pick up less room noise), and you can plug them into a mixer, or directly into the computer using USB.

                    Out of the three the AT2005 looks the best. In regards to which one sounds better I rank them in the following order

                    1. ATR2100 - TOP
                    2. Samson Q2u - a little warmer
                    3. AT 2005 - Still sounded good
                    
                    

                    Realize sound is subjective and some microphones sound good with one voice, and not so good with another. This is where a mixer can be handy (even if you're flying solo).

                    BOTTOM LINE: These are all fine choices, and you won't regret purchasing any of them. The big take away, is you don't need to spend $1600 to start a podcast.

                    Great content can save poor audio, but great gear will not save horrible content. Once you get your microphone, focus on the your audience and the content.

                    One Final Note: So many podcasters recommend the Blue Yeti. Is it a bad microphone? NO. Is it a good choice? NO WAY!. Why? It is a condensor microphone and condensor microphones pick up a ton of room noise (I know I have not one, but TWO in a drawer). It's always interesting when I hear someone recomend the Blule Yeti, it is often with the phrase, "I use that one when I started out." One other point, the  [easyazon_link identifier="B002VA464S" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Blue Yeti USB Microphone - Silver[/easyazon_link] is $149. It would be great for gamers who don't want to wear a headset.

                    Podcast Glossary "E" Part Two

                    Mark from the Resourceful Designer had a comment stating I skipped a bunch of "E's" in last week's show, so here they are. Let it never be said that Dave Jackson is not up for some constructive feedback. You can find out more about Marc at http://marksmandesign.ca/ Episode zero Episode zero is a podcast episode that is often a simple introduction episode used as a placeholder as you need one live podcast in iTunes.

                    Effects Effects are things you can add to your audio such as reverb, echo, compression.

                    Equalization Equalization is a fancy word for adding bass, treble, etc that affects the tone of your audio.

                    Enunciate Enunciation is talking in a way that everyone can clearly understand what you are saying. So instead of saying “I’m doin’ allrigh….” you would say I’m doing allright.”

                    Ecamm Call Recorder Ecamm Call Recorder is software for the Mac platform that allows you to record skype conversations. Some people refer to the software with just the phrase “ecamm.”

                    Evernote Evernote is a free software that allows you to organize…. Well anything you want. You can have text,pdf, images, these all then sync to all of your devices. As you can share information with other people, this is a great tool for collaborating on show notes. You can learn how to use Evernote quickly in the Organizing Your Podast Course.

                    Email List An email list is a software (typically a web based company such as MailChimp, Aweber, Convert Kit and many, many others) that enable you to put a form on your website. Your listeners can sign up to get updates via email. You then can go in and right one email that goes to all of your subscribers.

                    It's a Boy - Derek Daniels Launches a New Podcast

                    One thing I don't do enough of on this show is spotlight new podcast from members of the School of Podcasting. So this week I'm spotlighting the Derek Daniel Podcast. Find it at thederekdaniel.com real people doing real life.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    30 Day Money Back Guarantee Live Coaching Calls Private Facebook Group Priority Email Support

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>68e6b63a5d3e98cd8d6d091a824cc89dMon, 14 Nov 2016 05:00:00 -040044:31falsefull540540Lee Silverstein is a MessengerLee Silverstein got a call on New years Eve to let him know he had cancer and needed Chemotherapy. Lee is the man that gave "The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary" film it's name. He is a messenger for his audience. He delivers stories that provide hope, information, and inspiration. Check him at out www.thecolorcancerpoddcast.com

                    Today's Show it brought to you buy Emerald City Productions

                    SPECIAL DEAL: Four episodes edited for $15/each. Then after that, it's only $40. They will edit out ums, etc. remove noise, adjust volumes, and make you sound fantastic. For more information go to http://www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Lee Silverstein Delivers Hope With His Podcast

                    Lee Silverstein started a podcast that he wish he had when he was told he had stage four colon cancer. Lee has been battling cancer since he was five years old, and he considers himself more than "A podcaster," but a messenger. He delivers hope, information, and inspiration. Today we hear:

                    • Feedback from his audience that brought Lee to tears
                    • How Lee has secured three sponsors by finding products that fits his niche perfectly
                    • How Lee had strict criteria for his sponsors
                    • What pitch Lee uses to get sponsors.
                    • A "Because of my podcast" story that you HAVE to hear.
                    
                    

                    Mentioned in this interview

                    Lee's Colon Cancer Podcast

                    Glenn the Geek from Horse Radio Network

                    Hear Glenn be interviewed on the Sop

                    Pofest in Orlando go to www.podfest.us

                    Podcast Glossary "E"

                    Episode zero

                    Episode zero is a podcast episode that is often a simple introduction episode used as a placeholder as you need one live podcast in iTunes. 

                    In my opinion, I would do more than introduce yourself. We always want to deliver value in our podcast episodes, and right now your audience doesn't know you, and probably (to be honest) doesn't care who are what you are. They are asking, "What is in it for me?" Be sure to give them something that makes them wish there were more episodes.

                    Why My Eleven Years of Podcasting Sets Me Apart

                    I recently discovered another "Podcast About Podcasting," and was checking it out. I'm sure the host is a fine person that loves their family and wants to help their audience. Some people come into the space, and only repeat the favorite memes at the time and never go about checking if they are true. So I threw up in my mouth a bit when I heard them perpetuating the same old podcasting tips that are just wrong. This included

                    The Blue Yetis is a great microphone (it is if you are in a very, very, very, quiet room - which 99.9% of podcasters are not - so it's NOT a great microphone)

                    You only get 8 weeks to be in new and noteworthy (TV show podcasts go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time)

                    You should launch with at least three episodes so when people subscribe you get three downloads (this is false. It does not happen automatically. Your listen would have to choose to download the back catalog)

                    My friend Ravi from Digital Access Pass as well as two podcasts (subscribeme.fm about membership websites, and Cut to the Chase )has a new book out called Confessions of a Wanna Be Podcast Star that goes over many of the myths that a puked out over and over.

                    In the book he covers these myths and much more. Now for the record, Ravi uses a Blu Yeti, but thankfully in his book explains how you need a really quiet room (which he has). I was quoted quite a bit in the book, as well as other podcast consultants. In some cases, Ravi did his own investigation and provided screenshots to show the results of his research. I read it over two nights and found it an easy read, will be pointing people to it in the future when I see they have been sucked into the bad advice train that comes through the Internet on a regular basis.

                    Take Aways From DC Podfest

                    This was a great event for me. I met so many people who I had never met and were brand new to podcasting. The event was run very professional, and all the speakers were great in keeping to their time slots.

                    One of the coolest phrases to describe what we do as podcasters. We are digital influencers. Put that on your business card.

                    I heard about Amolto from Mathew Passy from podtopod.com which is a skype recording software for the PC (that I will need to check out).

                    Keep your interactions from Social Media. So for me, I had some people say some very nice things about my presentation on twitter. Take a screen shot and put those on your website.

                    http://www.gratisography.com/ a cool site for Royalty Free images which I have added to podcastingresources.com. This site has Free high-resolution pictures you can use on your personal and commercial projects. All pictures were photographed by Ryan McGuire and free of copyright restrictions.

                    Need Podcast Coaching?

                    Sign up for a session today. Sessions can be as short as 15 minutes.

                    Schedule yours today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>Lee Silverstein got a call on New years Eve to let him know he had cancer and needed Chemotherapy. Lee is the man that gave "The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary" film it's name. He is a messenger for his audience. He delivers stories that provide hope, information, and inspiration. Check him at out www.thecolorcancerpoddcast.com

                    Today's Show it brought to you buy Emerald City Productions

                    SPECIAL DEAL: Four episodes edited for $15/each. Then after that, it's only $40. They will edit out ums, etc. remove noise, adjust volumes, and make you sound fantastic. For more information go to http://www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop

                    Lee Silverstein Delivers Hope With His Podcast

                    Lee Silverstein started a podcast that he wish he had when he was told he had stage four colon cancer. Lee has been battling cancer since he was five years old, and he considers himself more than "A podcaster," but a messenger. He delivers hope, information, and inspiration. Today we hear:

                    • Feedback from his audience that brought Lee to tears
                    • How Lee has secured three sponsors by finding products that fits his niche perfectly
                    • How Lee had strict criteria for his sponsors
                    • What pitch Lee uses to get sponsors.
                    • A "Because of my podcast" story that you HAVE to hear.
                    
                    

                    Mentioned in this interview

                    Lee's Colon Cancer Podcast

                    Glenn the Geek from Horse Radio Network

                    Hear Glenn be interviewed on the Sop

                    Pofest in Orlando go to www.podfest.us

                    Podcast Glossary "E"

                    Episode zero

                    Episode zero is a podcast episode that is often a simple introduction episode used as a placeholder as you need one live podcast in iTunes. 

                    In my opinion, I would do more than introduce yourself. We always want to deliver value in our podcast episodes, and right now your audience doesn't know you, and probably (to be honest) doesn't care who are what you are. They are asking, "What is in it for me?" Be sure to give them something that makes them wish there were more episodes.

                    Why My Eleven Years of Podcasting Sets Me Apart

                    I recently discovered another "Podcast About Podcasting," and was checking it out. I'm sure the host is a fine person that loves their family and wants to help their audience. Some people come into the space, and only repeat the favorite memes at the time and never go about checking if they are true. So I threw up in my mouth a bit when I heard them perpetuating the same old podcasting tips that are just wrong. This included

                    The Blue Yetis is a great microphone (it is if you are in a very, very, very, quiet room - which 99.9% of podcasters are not - so it's NOT a great microphone)

                    You only get 8 weeks to be in new and noteworthy (TV show podcasts go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time)

                    You should launch with at least three episodes so when people subscribe you get three downloads (this is false. It does not happen automatically. Your listen would have to choose to download the back catalog)

                    My friend Ravi from Digital Access Pass as well as two podcasts (subscribeme.fm about membership websites, and Cut to the Chase )has a new book out called Confessions of a Wanna Be Podcast Star that goes over many of the myths that a puked out over and over.

                    In the book he covers these myths and much more. Now for the record, Ravi uses a Blu Yeti, but thankfully in his book explains how you need a really quiet room (which he has). I was quoted quite a bit in the book, as well as other podcast consultants. In some cases, Ravi did his own investigation and provided screenshots to show the results of his research. I read it over two nights and found it an easy read, will be pointing people to it in the future when I see they have been sucked into the bad advice train that comes through the Internet on a regular basis.

                    Take Aways From DC Podfest

                    This was a great event for me. I met so many people who I had never met and were brand new to podcasting. The event was run very professional, and all the speakers were great in keeping to their time slots.

                    One of the coolest phrases to describe what we do as podcasters. We are digital influencers. Put that on your business card.

                    I heard about Amolto from Mathew Passy from podtopod.com which is a skype recording software for the PC (that I will need to check out).

                    Keep your interactions from Social Media. So for me, I had some people say some very nice things about my presentation on twitter. Take a screen shot and put those on your website.

                    http://www.gratisography.com/ a cool site for Royalty Free images which I have added to podcastingresources.com. This site has Free high-resolution pictures you can use on your personal and commercial projects. All pictures were photographed by Ryan McGuire and free of copyright restrictions.

                    Need Podcast Coaching?

                    Sign up for a session today. Sessions can be as short as 15 minutes.

                    Schedule yours today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    ]]>01a11e04d9bc57fa5d3c75765b4778dfMon, 07 Nov 2016 05:00:00 -040001:04:04falsefull539539Grow Your Audience Using the KFC ApproachThe latest version of Hindenburg Journalist Software (slowly becoming one of my favorites for people who "Aren't too technical"). They have a new noise reduction feature that is super easy to use, and actually not bad. 

                    Here is a video of it in action

                    Grow Your Audience Using the  KFC Approach

                    If you live in the US, and maybe outside you are familiar with a certain Colonel Sanders who started Kentucky Fried Chicken. You also notice that over the years they have introduced grilled chicken and changed their name to KFC. This name change provides less emphasis on the word FRIED which in the world that is becoming somewhat more educated on better food choices might serve their sales better.

                    Today I'm going to share what KFC stands for based on a book I'm listening to How to Make People Like You in 90 Seconds or Less by Nicholas Boothman. You can get the audiobook for free by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audibletrial (If you want to be an affiliate for audible, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible )

                    The part is Know what you want out of podcasting. I've said before that you need to know WHY you're getting into podcasting. If you don't, you'll never make it through the how. Are you looking to be seen as an expert? Then maybe you should do some Q & A. Are you looking to get people to know and like you, then maybe it's time to ditch the interview format and talk directly to your audience. If you're trying to get a message out, then come up with a hashtag so you can track your progress. The other thing this does is it helps you know if you're being successful or not, or if you're even on track.

                    The F in this instance stands for find what you are getting. When I get feedback from people, they seem to like my style. They say I seem laid back, and I break things down into easy bite size chunks. They appreciate the fact that I occasionally try to get your to laugh. In the past, I've told you about surveymonkey.com and polldaddy.com and how I've used those services for surveys. My favorite tool for this now is Google Sheets (sheets.google.com). You can easily take this spreadsheet tool, and with a few mouse clicks turn it into a survey for your audience. Unlike the previous tools I mentioned, it is free, and there are unlimited questions and unlimited responses.

                    But what if the feedback you're getting isn't what you were expecting. What if things are going in the wrong direction.

                    You've heard me quote Ryan K Parker of Foodcrafstmen.com for years. I quote it because it's true. No one will punch you in the face if you change your podcast. In fact, look at any long running series on TV, and you will see how things evolved. Many times that was because what they found out was that their ratings were going the wrong way.

                    Not it takes courage to be able to have people leave your feedback. If you go back to the beginning, when you KNOW what you want out of podcasting, you will be willing to tweak it to get what you want, as you give your audience what they want.

                    Many Streams Make Up  A River

                    Launching my New Godaddy Reseller Account

                    Recently we've been talking a fair amount of about sponsorship, so I want to restate something. YOU DO NOT HAVE TO MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. If you are looking to have some income one of the things you might consider is instead of  trying to get a big giant paycheck, get a lot of small checks.

                    Earlier this year I added some features to the School of Podcasting and raised the prices quite a bit. It turned out those features weren't exactly what people were looking for. So, I tweaked some things, and adjusted the pricing. I also looked at the financials of the SOP. Part of the expenses for the School of Podcasting is my ongoing addiction to buying domain names. Yes they are only $9.99 a year at www.coolerwebsites.com (more on that in a second), but when you have over 100 domains, that adds up. My solution was to eliminate the middle man. I became a reseller for Godaddy. So if you need web hosting, domains, SSL certificates, or any other web related services, you can go to www.coolerwebsites.com and support me, and have the power of Godadddy.

                    I Was Won Over With Support

                    It wasn't just the domains that got me to put my eggs in the godaddy basket. I helped a friend setup a website using Bluehost. Now for the record I have a few websites on Bluehost. This is because I always try to use what I recommend. He hit a bit of a snag, so I told him how they had good service. He got on the phone, and I got on the live chat. As a person who works in support, I may be a bit more critical, but it was not fast at all. He finally got someone on the phone who was sticking with their script. We got our problem solved, but it took the better part of 90 minutes.

                    I've been promoting Host Gator for years. I've used them for over 15 years. I've always thought their support was better than Bluehost, and still do. Over the last year, what use to take 3-5 minutes to get a live chat person to answer a question was turning into 5-20 minutes, and then I often felt like they were holding 5 different chats at the same time. Not horrible, but not great.

                    When I tried out Godaddy, I was floored by their support. Over the years they called me to show me how I could save money with their company. No really catch when they called. They just saw my current situation and wanted to let me know if I did things a certain way I could save a few hundred dollars a year. When I get on their chat, I usually have someone within a few minutes and I get my questions answered. So I have a website I'm hosting on them, I didn't have any problems, so I became a reseller. I'm sure they are not perfect, no host is, but their support won me over.

                    Currently if you want to order web hosting specifically designed to be lighting quick with Wordpress, I have a special going where you get

                    • 2 websites
                    • 30GB SSD storage
                    • 400,000 monthly visitors
                    • One-click staging site
                    • SSH / sFTP
                    • Search engine optimization plugin
                    • Malware scan & removal
                    • Standard SSL Certificate - 1 year free ( renewed annually)
                    
                    

                    For $11.99 for more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting

                    Why Mystery Show Was Cancelled by Gimlet

                    When this show first aired I stated that this show was well produced, but in the end the content was stupid. 

                    That's why the show got cancelled. See my original review.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    The School of Podcasting offers:

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Purchase a single course or a bundle

                    30 day Guarantee

                    Live Group Coaching

                    Priority Email Support

                    Sign Up Today

                    One on One Consulting

                    Need one on one consulting? Sessions start at 15 minutes

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    ]]>The latest version of Hindenburg Journalist Software (slowly becoming one of my favorites for people who "Aren't too technical"). They have a new noise reduction feature that is super easy to use, and actually not bad. 

                    Here is a video of it in action

                    Grow Your Audience Using the  KFC Approach

                    If you live in the US, and maybe outside you are familiar with a certain Colonel Sanders who started Kentucky Fried Chicken. You also notice that over the years they have introduced grilled chicken and changed their name to KFC. This name change provides less emphasis on the word FRIED which in the world that is becoming somewhat more educated on better food choices might serve their sales better.

                    Today I'm going to share what KFC stands for based on a book I'm listening to How to Make People Like You in 90 Seconds or Less by Nicholas Boothman. You can get the audiobook for free by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audibletrial (If you want to be an affiliate for audible, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible )

                    The part is Know what you want out of podcasting. I've said before that you need to know WHY you're getting into podcasting. If you don't, you'll never make it through the how. Are you looking to be seen as an expert? Then maybe you should do some Q & A. Are you looking to get people to know and like you, then maybe it's time to ditch the interview format and talk directly to your audience. If you're trying to get a message out, then come up with a hashtag so you can track your progress. The other thing this does is it helps you know if you're being successful or not, or if you're even on track.

                    The F in this instance stands for find what you are getting. When I get feedback from people, they seem to like my style. They say I seem laid back, and I break things down into easy bite size chunks. They appreciate the fact that I occasionally try to get your to laugh. In the past, I've told you about surveymonkey.com and polldaddy.com and how I've used those services for surveys. My favorite tool for this now is Google Sheets (sheets.google.com). You can easily take this spreadsheet tool, and with a few mouse clicks turn it into a survey for your audience. Unlike the previous tools I mentioned, it is free, and there are unlimited questions and unlimited responses.

                    But what if the feedback you're getting isn't what you were expecting. What if things are going in the wrong direction.

                    You've heard me quote Ryan K Parker of Foodcrafstmen.com for years. I quote it because it's true. No one will punch you in the face if you change your podcast. In fact, look at any long running series on TV, and you will see how things evolved. Many times that was because what they found out was that their ratings were going the wrong way.

                    Not it takes courage to be able to have people leave your feedback. If you go back to the beginning, when you KNOW what you want out of podcasting, you will be willing to tweak it to get what you want, as you give your audience what they want.

                    Many Streams Make Up  A River

                    Launching my New Godaddy Reseller Account

                    Recently we've been talking a fair amount of about sponsorship, so I want to restate something. YOU DO NOT HAVE TO MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. If you are looking to have some income one of the things you might consider is instead of  trying to get a big giant paycheck, get a lot of small checks.

                    Earlier this year I added some features to the School of Podcasting and raised the prices quite a bit. It turned out those features weren't exactly what people were looking for. So, I tweaked some things, and adjusted the pricing. I also looked at the financials of the SOP. Part of the expenses for the School of Podcasting is my ongoing addiction to buying domain names. Yes they are only $9.99 a year at www.coolerwebsites.com (more on that in a second), but when you have over 100 domains, that adds up. My solution was to eliminate the middle man. I became a reseller for Godaddy. So if you need web hosting, domains, SSL certificates, or any other web related services, you can go to www.coolerwebsites.com and support me, and have the power of Godadddy.

                    I Was Won Over With Support

                    It wasn't just the domains that got me to put my eggs in the godaddy basket. I helped a friend setup a website using Bluehost. Now for the record I have a few websites on Bluehost. This is because I always try to use what I recommend. He hit a bit of a snag, so I told him how they had good service. He got on the phone, and I got on the live chat. As a person who works in support, I may be a bit more critical, but it was not fast at all. He finally got someone on the phone who was sticking with their script. We got our problem solved, but it took the better part of 90 minutes.

                    I've been promoting Host Gator for years. I've used them for over 15 years. I've always thought their support was better than Bluehost, and still do. Over the last year, what use to take 3-5 minutes to get a live chat person to answer a question was turning into 5-20 minutes, and then I often felt like they were holding 5 different chats at the same time. Not horrible, but not great.

                    When I tried out Godaddy, I was floored by their support. Over the years they called me to show me how I could save money with their company. No really catch when they called. They just saw my current situation and wanted to let me know if I did things a certain way I could save a few hundred dollars a year. When I get on their chat, I usually have someone within a few minutes and I get my questions answered. So I have a website I'm hosting on them, I didn't have any problems, so I became a reseller. I'm sure they are not perfect, no host is, but their support won me over.

                    Currently if you want to order web hosting specifically designed to be lighting quick with Wordpress, I have a special going where you get

                    • 2 websites
                    • 30GB SSD storage
                    • 400,000 monthly visitors
                    • One-click staging site
                    • SSH / sFTP
                    • Search engine optimization plugin
                    • Malware scan & removal
                    • Standard SSL Certificate - 1 year free ( renewed annually)
                    
                    

                    For $11.99 for more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting

                    Why Mystery Show Was Cancelled by Gimlet

                    When this show first aired I stated that this show was well produced, but in the end the content was stupid. 

                    That's why the show got cancelled. See my original review.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    The School of Podcasting offers:

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Purchase a single course or a bundle

                    30 day Guarantee

                    Live Group Coaching

                    Priority Email Support

                    Sign Up Today

                    One on One Consulting

                    Need one on one consulting? Sessions start at 15 minutes

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    ]]>2d8101f8b027230e7d49293284ebf305Mon, 31 Oct 2016 03:02:09 -040043:39falsefull538538How I Got a Sponsor On My PodcastToday I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally.
                    Emerald City Productions - Our Sponsor

                    1:15 Emerald City is running a special go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop and tell them you are from the School of Podcasting and have your first four podcasts done for $15 an episode.

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    2:50 I'm working on the last episode of the year where we all share what our favorite podcast is (you can only pick one, and no, it can't be yours). Then be sure to tells us a little about it, and WHY you like it. Also, be sure to tell us a little bit about your show and where we can find it. So its free promotion for your show, and later I get these transcribed and turn them into a book. The deadline is October 31. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16

                    Getting A Sponsor For Your Show

                    4:30 Today I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally.

                    Getting A Sponsor For Your Show Today I talk with Jessica Kupferman who has been selling advertising for a very long time (back in the day on banner advertising) and has been podcasting since 2013. I know her best for her Shepodcasts.com show which she does with Elsie Escobar (it's a fascinating take on podcasting from a Women's point of view).

                    Jessica just launched jkmagency.com an add agency that helps sponsors find podcasters, and podcasters find sponsors. Here are some of the insights from today's discussion

                    You need to know how many downloads you get per month

                    If you don't have a ton of downloads, but you have an active community, that may enable you to secure a sponsor

                    You don't need a media kit if you don't have one. Jessica can create one for you.

                    If you're pricing per episode, you might as well flush your money down the toilet.

                    The smallest contract/campaign she sells is three months. She will go two months if there are no other options.

                    Podcasters should be open to having the sponsor on the show to help create content.

                    In regards to platforms, sponsors are looking at Twitter and Instagram followers.

                    You just need to create a report once a month

                    Never lie about your stats. Not only does it make you look bad, but it also makes podcasting, in general, look bad.

                    How do you figure out what to charge for your podcast?

                    The current standards for CPM is $15-$100 which is why it doesn't work for most podcasters and is the worst way to sell your show

                    Can unique genres get a sponsor? (i.e. Science Fiction movie reviews)

                    To be considered for adds go to jkmagency.com/considerme

                    She also is a co-host for She Podcasts

                    The Mental Side of Podcast Advertising

                    34:00 When you take on an advertiser, you have a couple of things to consider.

                    You need to make sure your sponsor fits your audience and is something you can talk about honestly. When you promote something that you don't believe in, that is (in my opinion) the definition of selling out.

                    Make sure you are aware what you will be delivering, and then deliver it.

                    Remember who your TRUE audience is. Having multiple audiences can be a struggle. My audience is you. You've been with me for almost 12 years. If I pay too much attention to promoting the sponsor, I lose the true audience (again, you). If I don't pay enough attention to the sponsor, I lose the sponsor. The problem is I'm being paid for a 15-second spot. I recorded the spot four times last night, and the first one went over two minutes long. I figured out what I needed to say, and figured out how to see it as quickly as possible. This first ad was a bit longer as I needed to introduce you to the sponsor. I've always liked he way Gimlet media does their advertisements, and I plan on borrowing as much as I can. If you are a regular listener, you know I like to think outside the box. Just know, this can mess with your brain. Remember you worked hard to get an audience, and advertisers will come and go. I have never heard one, but I've heard stories about Leo Laporte going on for what seems days when he does a spot for Audible. If you don't pay attention to your listeners, then there will be nobody to hear your advertisements.

                    What if you have a Patreon account? Well if you are delivering extra value to your patrons, then this shouldn't be a problem. They are getting what they pay for. Also, Patrons are people who want to support you. When they hear, you are benefiting from an advertiser they may be all for it. Just don't be surprised if someone stops being a patron because "You don't need us."

                    Speaking of that, realize that someone will not like the fact that you have advertisements. There is nothing you can do about that. Focus on the one who stays.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    38:18 I appeared on the Rock Your Retirement show talking about Alzheimer's disease

                    I appear on the new Cut to the Chase from the friend Ravi from Digital Access Pass. This is business advice with not fluff (hence cut to the chase ) so it is some of my best podcast advice in one quick blast.

                    While I have appeared on Podcast Junkies, I wanted to point you to the episode with Jonathan Oakes of Triva Warfare (who I've been on his show). It was just a great show where you hear Jonathon talk about how he shaped his show over time, and ever has a cool because of my podcast story. Check it out

                    Podcast Glossary

                    43:08

                    BlubrryBlubrry is a media hosting company (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month). They are also the people who make the PowerPress plugin. The PowerPress plugin will work with any media host (although it does full integration with blubrry) such as Podbean, Libsyn, Soundcloud. We will talk about PowerPress later when we get to the P's, so for now Blubrry is a media hosting company.

                    Compressor A compressor is an effect you can add to your audio. In its simplest form, it makes louder things softer, and softer things louder to ensure a level audio output. These can be applied in software, or they can be physical pieces of hardware such a DBX 286

                    CPM CPM is a pricing model used by the Radio industry. With CPM you get paid a certain amount for 1000 listeners. So if you have a CPM rate of $6, and you have 20,000 listeners you would pay the radio station 6 X 20 = $120. CPM rates in Podcasting typically start at $20 and go up. Some reporting as high as $60 or more. For most podcasters (without thousands of downloads) CPM is not a viable model to making money with your podcast

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Cast Interview Recording Service

                    Ready To Start a Podcast?

                    Join www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Today I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally.
                    Emerald City Productions - Our Sponsor

                    1:15 Emerald City is running a special go to www.emeraldcitypro.com/sop and tell them you are from the School of Podcasting and have your first four podcasts done for $15 an episode.

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    2:50 I'm working on the last episode of the year where we all share what our favorite podcast is (you can only pick one, and no, it can't be yours). Then be sure to tells us a little about it, and WHY you like it. Also, be sure to tell us a little bit about your show and where we can find it. So its free promotion for your show, and later I get these transcribed and turn them into a book. The deadline is October 31. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16

                    Getting A Sponsor For Your Show

                    4:30 Today I share my story on how I secured a sponsor for my show. I'm doing this as an experiment as I prepare to update my book More Podcast Money Next year. I also share the behind the scenes of what it was like to take on a sponsor. There are some things that I have to tackle mentally.

                    Getting A Sponsor For Your Show Today I talk with Jessica Kupferman who has been selling advertising for a very long time (back in the day on banner advertising) and has been podcasting since 2013. I know her best for her Shepodcasts.com show which she does with Elsie Escobar (it's a fascinating take on podcasting from a Women's point of view).

                    Jessica just launched jkmagency.com an add agency that helps sponsors find podcasters, and podcasters find sponsors. Here are some of the insights from today's discussion

                    You need to know how many downloads you get per month

                    If you don't have a ton of downloads, but you have an active community, that may enable you to secure a sponsor

                    You don't need a media kit if you don't have one. Jessica can create one for you.

                    If you're pricing per episode, you might as well flush your money down the toilet.

                    The smallest contract/campaign she sells is three months. She will go two months if there are no other options.

                    Podcasters should be open to having the sponsor on the show to help create content.

                    In regards to platforms, sponsors are looking at Twitter and Instagram followers.

                    You just need to create a report once a month

                    Never lie about your stats. Not only does it make you look bad, but it also makes podcasting, in general, look bad.

                    How do you figure out what to charge for your podcast?

                    The current standards for CPM is $15-$100 which is why it doesn't work for most podcasters and is the worst way to sell your show

                    Can unique genres get a sponsor? (i.e. Science Fiction movie reviews)

                    To be considered for adds go to jkmagency.com/considerme

                    She also is a co-host for She Podcasts

                    The Mental Side of Podcast Advertising

                    34:00 When you take on an advertiser, you have a couple of things to consider.

                    You need to make sure your sponsor fits your audience and is something you can talk about honestly. When you promote something that you don't believe in, that is (in my opinion) the definition of selling out.

                    Make sure you are aware what you will be delivering, and then deliver it.

                    Remember who your TRUE audience is. Having multiple audiences can be a struggle. My audience is you. You've been with me for almost 12 years. If I pay too much attention to promoting the sponsor, I lose the true audience (again, you). If I don't pay enough attention to the sponsor, I lose the sponsor. The problem is I'm being paid for a 15-second spot. I recorded the spot four times last night, and the first one went over two minutes long. I figured out what I needed to say, and figured out how to see it as quickly as possible. This first ad was a bit longer as I needed to introduce you to the sponsor. I've always liked he way Gimlet media does their advertisements, and I plan on borrowing as much as I can. If you are a regular listener, you know I like to think outside the box. Just know, this can mess with your brain. Remember you worked hard to get an audience, and advertisers will come and go. I have never heard one, but I've heard stories about Leo Laporte going on for what seems days when he does a spot for Audible. If you don't pay attention to your listeners, then there will be nobody to hear your advertisements.

                    What if you have a Patreon account? Well if you are delivering extra value to your patrons, then this shouldn't be a problem. They are getting what they pay for. Also, Patrons are people who want to support you. When they hear, you are benefiting from an advertiser they may be all for it. Just don't be surprised if someone stops being a patron because "You don't need us."

                    Speaking of that, realize that someone will not like the fact that you have advertisements. There is nothing you can do about that. Focus on the one who stays.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    38:18 I appeared on the Rock Your Retirement show talking about Alzheimer's disease

                    I appear on the new Cut to the Chase from the friend Ravi from Digital Access Pass. This is business advice with not fluff (hence cut to the chase ) so it is some of my best podcast advice in one quick blast.

                    While I have appeared on Podcast Junkies, I wanted to point you to the episode with Jonathan Oakes of Triva Warfare (who I've been on his show). It was just a great show where you hear Jonathon talk about how he shaped his show over time, and ever has a cool because of my podcast story. Check it out

                    Podcast Glossary

                    43:08

                    BlubrryBlubrry is a media hosting company (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month). They are also the people who make the PowerPress plugin. The PowerPress plugin will work with any media host (although it does full integration with blubrry) such as Podbean, Libsyn, Soundcloud. We will talk about PowerPress later when we get to the P's, so for now Blubrry is a media hosting company.

                    Compressor A compressor is an effect you can add to your audio. In its simplest form, it makes louder things softer, and softer things louder to ensure a level audio output. These can be applied in software, or they can be physical pieces of hardware such a DBX 286

                    CPM CPM is a pricing model used by the Radio industry. With CPM you get paid a certain amount for 1000 listeners. So if you have a CPM rate of $6, and you have 20,000 listeners you would pay the radio station 6 X 20 = $120. CPM rates in Podcasting typically start at $20 and go up. Some reporting as high as $60 or more. For most podcasters (without thousands of downloads) CPM is not a viable model to making money with your podcast

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Cast Interview Recording Service

                    Ready To Start a Podcast?

                    Join www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>46e61063aac7bb8a0983dfba24933795Mon, 24 Oct 2016 04:00:00 -040050:33falsefull537537Corey Fineran's Podcast Lead Him To Start His Own BusinessComments" Call 888-563-3228

                    I've spoken about Corey Fineran before and how his Chicago Cubs podcast Ivy Envy helped get a rule changed in Major League Baseball. Corey's boss saw the impact podcasting creates and talked Corey into starting a podcast for his job.

                    Corey's podcast helps high school students with special needs transition into the workplace. It went over well. It lead to him starting Next Up (His own business) Here are some key points:

                    They tried it to see if it would work.

                    They got feedback from their audience, and listened to it, and acted on it.

                    They updated their equipment after they proved the concept.

                    Corey's goal is to help as many students as possible. His niche (students with special needs) is often overlooked, or has no budget. So he created the content that was needed. One night it was speaking with his brother in law (who is well versed in running a business) and they realized that he could reach more students and have a larger impact if he did this on his own, and start his own company. So Corey:

                    Used his brother as a resource to launch the business

                    Converted his current employer into his first customer

                    Used his mother (an accountant) to help with taxes

                    Growing His Business

                    Corey found that educators are not used to being "pitched." The tried and true strategies of mass emails, cold calling, etc were not going to work. So he did what any good podcaster would do:

                    He went to where his audience was.

                    He started attending events where he could talk face to face about his products and services.

                    Common Podcast Lessons and Truths Translate to Business

                    Listen to your audience and be open to suggestions

                    When you have a great podcast people will spread the word about your show

                    When you can, the best way to get feedback from your audience is face to face. It is also the best way to start building those relationships.

                    While your audience can become your brand advocates, so can your family (so make sure they know what you are up to).

                    Save at Podfest

                    Us the coupon code earlybird at www.podfest.us

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    www.dcpodfest.com

                    Submit Your My Favorite Podcast Is

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16

                     

                    MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

                    Membership Guys Podcast 

                    Marketing School Podcast 

                    Audio Technica 2100 (Dave's Preferred Microphone)

                      Launch Your Own Podcast

                    30 day Money Back Gaurentee

                    go to http://www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Comments" Call 888-563-3228

                    I've spoken about Corey Fineran before and how his Chicago Cubs podcast Ivy Envy helped get a rule changed in Major League Baseball. Corey's boss saw the impact podcasting creates and talked Corey into starting a podcast for his job.

                    Corey's podcast helps high school students with special needs transition into the workplace. It went over well. It lead to him starting Next Up (His own business) Here are some key points:

                    They tried it to see if it would work.

                    They got feedback from their audience, and listened to it, and acted on it.

                    They updated their equipment after they proved the concept.

                    Corey's goal is to help as many students as possible. His niche (students with special needs) is often overlooked, or has no budget. So he created the content that was needed. One night it was speaking with his brother in law (who is well versed in running a business) and they realized that he could reach more students and have a larger impact if he did this on his own, and start his own company. So Corey:

                    Used his brother as a resource to launch the business

                    Converted his current employer into his first customer

                    Used his mother (an accountant) to help with taxes

                    Growing His Business

                    Corey found that educators are not used to being "pitched." The tried and true strategies of mass emails, cold calling, etc were not going to work. So he did what any good podcaster would do:

                    He went to where his audience was.

                    He started attending events where he could talk face to face about his products and services.

                    Common Podcast Lessons and Truths Translate to Business

                    Listen to your audience and be open to suggestions

                    When you have a great podcast people will spread the word about your show

                    When you can, the best way to get feedback from your audience is face to face. It is also the best way to start building those relationships.

                    While your audience can become your brand advocates, so can your family (so make sure they know what you are up to).

                    Save at Podfest

                    Us the coupon code earlybird at www.podfest.us

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    www.dcpodfest.com

                    Submit Your My Favorite Podcast Is

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite16

                     

                    MENTIONED IN THIS EPISODE

                    Membership Guys Podcast 

                    Marketing School Podcast 

                    Audio Technica 2100 (Dave's Preferred Microphone)

                      Launch Your Own Podcast

                    30 day Money Back Gaurentee

                    go to http://www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>643cf02da6c565dbbdc912a26ade26f9Mon, 17 Oct 2016 05:06:50 -040047:27falsefull536536Is It Time for You To Zag?Today we have some lessons from fast food that apply to podcasting, and I talk about zagging when everyone is zigging,
                    Bernie's Greatest Hits

                    1:58 My cat is pretty popular on this show as he chimes in all the time. When I went to Pittsburgh last week apparently he got a record deal. He's releasing "Bernie sings the hits"

                    Someone Is Doing a Show Like Mine - So I Didn't Start my Show

                    3:07

                    One of the most frustrating parts of being a consultant is seeing someone who has the right stuff to create a podcast, but they are more skilled at finding reasons not to press record than actually pressing record. Today I have two points I want to make

                    Someone will come to me and say, “I want to do a podcast about ______” but someone is already doing a show like that. The first thing I say is to go to iTunes and see when their last episode was published. Many times the person has already hung up their microphone.

                    But what if they haven’t?

                    Let’s look at McDonald’s. Here are some interesting facts (well facts according to Wikipedia). McDonald’s was not the first hamburger chain. A&W was first in 1919 followed by White Castle in 1921. McDonald’s didn’t come about until 1940.

                    Fun facts:

                    McDonald’s started as a barbecue joint. They found that hamburgers were more profitable. So they started in one direction, and then followed what their audience wanted. I always say your podcast is a recipe not a statue. You can change it any time you want.

                    White Castle developed the supply chain and automation to have a nationwide food chain way before McDonald’s did. But when McDonald’s did, they didn’t recreate the wheel. They looked at what others were doing, and borrowed the best, and tweaked the rest.

                    Now when burger king came along in 1953 did they say, “I would open a restaurant but someone else is doing “Assembly line” hamburgers? No. They didn’t recreate the wheel, and they tweaked it (adding flame broiling and “have it your way” at Burger King).

                    What is the one thing that is common here? Well in the US apparently we can’t get enough of hamburgers. If you throw some meat on a bun and squirt some ketchup on it, we will eat it. In America I think if you put enough ketchup on anything we will eat it.

                    They saw their competition and looked at ways to innovate. Breakfast was introduced. Bigger hamburgers like the Big Mac were introduced in 1967. Later the innovation of the drive through window.

                    So if someone is doing a show like yours, WHO CARES! If you think it will be fun, if you think people will enjoy it, DO IT. The WORST thing you can do for yourself in podcasting is COMPARE YOURSELF TO OTHERS.

                    Podcasting is like golf, while there is competition, you are really only competing against yourself.

                    Now to my second point, and this builds on innovation. Todd Cochrane recently launched a new Podcast Legends show and it is interviewing podcast pioneers (people from 2004 - sorry Chris Hardwick is not a Pioneer) and one of the things I forgot about (I started in 2005) was the WHACKY shows that just made you go WHOA!?!

                    Yeast Radio was by Madge Weinstein and was one of the most subscribed to podcast in 2005. Madge would say outrageous things about the government, about her hygiene (she was often bloated), and in general said things often people only think. She was an angry, jewish, fat, Lesbian. There was one other small twist.

                    Madge was a dude (Richard Bluestein ).

                    One other thing, if you could handle the language, Madge was pretty darn funny. Madge was the queen of tuning in because you didn’t know what to expect.

                    The really cool thing was there was NO WAY that this would EVER be on radio or TV. It’s kind of what made podcasting special, unique, and intimate. Madge is still going strong at yeastradio.com

                    One person did a show called the daily download where he recorded his thoughts while using the bathroom...

                    Dave Slusher from the Evil Genius Chronicles mentioned how one podcaster had a show called Podcat where he would play clips of other shows intermingled with clips of his cat.

                    Why did people do this?

                    Because THEY COULD. There was no radio, no FCC, no program directors, and it was YOURS. If people didn’t like it, WHO CARES. Podcasting was much more of an art form. People grabbed their stick microphone and press record, because they had something to say, and they could be creative.

                    I think we’ve gone too far from those days. Now we over-think podcasting as if our lives depended on it. We are all preparing as if this is going to be a full time job some day because it might be. That is true.

                    Maybe We Should Zag?

                    I was listening to the Start Up Podcast where they have a team of 18 people per podcast (roughly), and when they launch a show it sounds painful. It sounds like there so up tight about it. I guess they should be as they are doing this as a business. But let's look at women singers. Back in the day Madonna stood out for singing in her underwear. No EVERYBODY sings in their underwear. So now there is  someone sings with a bit more passion, keeps her clothes on, and has oodles of talent that lead to her selling 31 million records (Adele). She stands out because she's not doing what everybody else is doing. Maybe, just maybe it's time to stop doing a "This week in," or "On Fire", or "Three guys one brain" shows. Maybe, just maybe we should all spend that extra time figuring  out if there is something we can do that might make us stand out (realizing that there is no way to do something 100% original)

                    Fun Fact: According to a CNBC story 60% of restaurants fail in their first year. This is a company that is serving FOOD. That is something every single person on the planet NEEDS (not wants).

                    Now we have podcasting that only roughly 30% of the planet even knows we exist, and people think they are going to make six figures talking about their love of Barbarella and other fun movies. I hate to be skeptical, but that might be a tough road. This is what is bothering me.

                    Just because you can’t make a living with your podcast shouldn’t stop you from starting it. If you would have fun with it, then start it and have fun.

                    When you look at the people making big bucks in podcasting, and you stress our about it you take the fun out of, well, FUN.

                    That my friends is a crime

                    My Favorite Podcast Is (2016 Version)

                    22:52 It's that time where I ask you to answer a very hard question. What is your favorite podcast? You can only pick ONE (no ties). Then (more importantly) WHY IS IT YOUR FAVORITE? You can CLICK HERE, and let me know (and be included in the last episode of the year, and in the 2016 version of the book).

                    Podcast Glossary "B"

                    26:25

                    Bit Depth, Sample Rate, Export or Encoding Rate I want to use the analogy of a camera here. Let's say you are taking pictures at a Nascar Race, and there is a wreck. One person has a camera that takes 10 pictures per second, and the other person takes 5 pictures per second. Who has the better representation of the wreck? The sample rate is how many times your recording device (computer or portable recorder) "takes a picture" of your voice. The standard is 44.1 which means it takes a picture 44,000 times per second. Can you go higher? Sure, but there is a minor problem. Most everything is created at 44.1, and when you mix with other sample rates, those will need to be re-sampled. Not the end of the world, but in the end remember most people are going to listen to this in their car or ear buds. The details you gain are not really worth the hassle (in my opinion).

                    So what is Bit Depth? If we stick with the analogy of the camera, the Sample Rate is how many times per second the recording device "takes a picture" of your voice, the Bit Depth is the megapixels on the camera. Most people record in 16 bit. Can you record in 24? Sure. Is it needed? Not in my opinion, but if you ask engineers who do music they will disagree.  In photography bit rate it is how many colors are used to make up a picture, so more bits would be a better reproduction of your audio (but again, we are getting into overkill).

                    You want to record in a "lossless" format. Lossless means the sound you record is what you hear back. It does not lose any quality. That's the good news. The bad news is these files are HUGE. So when you record you want to record in WAV on a PC or AAC on a Mac. This keeps the best quality. But you don't want to force your audience to use these big giant files that destroy data plans. So we encode them as MP3 files which are much smaller and still sound good.

                    So I want to use the analogy of painting a house now to explain encoding. The sample rate is how much pain it on your brush. The encoding rate is how fast you move the brush across the house. If you go too fast no paint gets on the house. If you go to slow, you get too much paint, and it may run. There are three formats that are used frequently.

                    128 Kbps Stereo. This is sometimes referred to as "CD" quality. That is debatable, but it is the highest acceptable rate (IMHO). Meaning anything above this is too much, and you are just wasting storage space, bandwidth, and the difference in audio is almost unnoticeable. (So anything above 128 is too much paint on the brush)

                    64 Kbps mono. This file is half the size of the 128 kbps but has no stereo separation (which if your show is mainly talk, is not a big deal).

                    96 kbps mono. This is used for people who feel the extra bits make the files sound better.

                    You could also say that 64 mono / 128 stereo "Cover with one coat" of paint. Anything below 64 (32 kbps ) you don't have enough paint on the brush (and you get hiss, and bad...]]>Today we have some lessons from fast food that apply to podcasting, and I talk about zagging when everyone is zigging,

                    Bernie's Greatest Hits

                    1:58 My cat is pretty popular on this show as he chimes in all the time. When I went to Pittsburgh last week apparently he got a record deal. He's releasing "Bernie sings the hits"

                    Someone Is Doing a Show Like Mine - So I Didn't Start my Show

                    3:07

                    One of the most frustrating parts of being a consultant is seeing someone who has the right stuff to create a podcast, but they are more skilled at finding reasons not to press record than actually pressing record. Today I have two points I want to make

                    Someone will come to me and say, “I want to do a podcast about ______” but someone is already doing a show like that. The first thing I say is to go to iTunes and see when their last episode was published. Many times the person has already hung up their microphone.

                    But what if they haven’t?

                    Let’s look at McDonald’s. Here are some interesting facts (well facts according to Wikipedia). McDonald’s was not the first hamburger chain. A&W was first in 1919 followed by White Castle in 1921. McDonald’s didn’t come about until 1940.

                    Fun facts:

                    McDonald’s started as a barbecue joint. They found that hamburgers were more profitable. So they started in one direction, and then followed what their audience wanted. I always say your podcast is a recipe not a statue. You can change it any time you want.

                    White Castle developed the supply chain and automation to have a nationwide food chain way before McDonald’s did. But when McDonald’s did, they didn’t recreate the wheel. They looked at what others were doing, and borrowed the best, and tweaked the rest.

                    Now when burger king came along in 1953 did they say, “I would open a restaurant but someone else is doing “Assembly line” hamburgers? No. They didn’t recreate the wheel, and they tweaked it (adding flame broiling and “have it your way” at Burger King).

                    What is the one thing that is common here? Well in the US apparently we can’t get enough of hamburgers. If you throw some meat on a bun and squirt some ketchup on it, we will eat it. In America I think if you put enough ketchup on anything we will eat it.

                    They saw their competition and looked at ways to innovate. Breakfast was introduced. Bigger hamburgers like the Big Mac were introduced in 1967. Later the innovation of the drive through window.

                    So if someone is doing a show like yours, WHO CARES! If you think it will be fun, if you think people will enjoy it, DO IT. The WORST thing you can do for yourself in podcasting is COMPARE YOURSELF TO OTHERS.

                    Podcasting is like golf, while there is competition, you are really only competing against yourself.

                    Now to my second point, and this builds on innovation. Todd Cochrane recently launched a new Podcast Legends show and it is interviewing podcast pioneers (people from 2004 - sorry Chris Hardwick is not a Pioneer) and one of the things I forgot about (I started in 2005) was the WHACKY shows that just made you go WHOA!?!

                    Yeast Radio was by Madge Weinstein and was one of the most subscribed to podcast in 2005. Madge would say outrageous things about the government, about her hygiene (she was often bloated), and in general said things often people only think. She was an angry, jewish, fat, Lesbian. There was one other small twist.

                    Madge was a dude (Richard Bluestein ).

                    One other thing, if you could handle the language, Madge was pretty darn funny. Madge was the queen of tuning in because you didn’t know what to expect.

                    The really cool thing was there was NO WAY that this would EVER be on radio or TV. It’s kind of what made podcasting special, unique, and intimate. Madge is still going strong at yeastradio.com

                    One person did a show called the daily download where he recorded his thoughts while using the bathroom...

                    Dave Slusher from the Evil Genius Chronicles mentioned how one podcaster had a show called Podcat where he would play clips of other shows intermingled with clips of his cat.

                    Why did people do this?

                    Because THEY COULD. There was no radio, no FCC, no program directors, and it was YOURS. If people didn’t like it, WHO CARES. Podcasting was much more of an art form. People grabbed their stick microphone and press record, because they had something to say, and they could be creative.

                    I think we’ve gone too far from those days. Now we over-think podcasting as if our lives depended on it. We are all preparing as if this is going to be a full time job some day because it might be. That is true.

                    Maybe We Should Zag?

                    I was listening to the Start Up Podcast where they have a team of 18 people per podcast (roughly), and when they launch a show it sounds painful. It sounds like there so up tight about it. I guess they should be as they are doing this as a business. But let's look at women singers. Back in the day Madonna stood out for singing in her underwear. No EVERYBODY sings in their underwear. So now there is  someone sings with a bit more passion, keeps her clothes on, and has oodles of talent that lead to her selling 31 million records (Adele). She stands out because she's not doing what everybody else is doing. Maybe, just maybe it's time to stop doing a "This week in," or "On Fire", or "Three guys one brain" shows. Maybe, just maybe we should all spend that extra time figuring  out if there is something we can do that might make us stand out (realizing that there is no way to do something 100% original)

                    Fun Fact: According to a CNBC story 60% of restaurants fail in their first year. This is a company that is serving FOOD. That is something every single person on the planet NEEDS (not wants).

                    Now we have podcasting that only roughly 30% of the planet even knows we exist, and people think they are going to make six figures talking about their love of Barbarella and other fun movies. I hate to be skeptical, but that might be a tough road. This is what is bothering me.

                    Just because you can’t make a living with your podcast shouldn’t stop you from starting it. If you would have fun with it, then start it and have fun.

                    When you look at the people making big bucks in podcasting, and you stress our about it you take the fun out of, well, FUN.

                    That my friends is a crime

                    My Favorite Podcast Is (2016 Version)

                    22:52 It's that time where I ask you to answer a very hard question. What is your favorite podcast? You can only pick ONE (no ties). Then (more importantly) WHY IS IT YOUR FAVORITE? You can CLICK HERE, and let me know (and be included in the last episode of the year, and in the 2016 version of the book).

                    Podcast Glossary "B"

                    26:25

                    Bit Depth, Sample Rate, Export or Encoding Rate I want to use the analogy of a camera here. Let's say you are taking pictures at a Nascar Race, and there is a wreck. One person has a camera that takes 10 pictures per second, and the other person takes 5 pictures per second. Who has the better representation of the wreck? The sample rate is how many times your recording device (computer or portable recorder) "takes a picture" of your voice. The standard is 44.1 which means it takes a picture 44,000 times per second. Can you go higher? Sure, but there is a minor problem. Most everything is created at 44.1, and when you mix with other sample rates, those will need to be re-sampled. Not the end of the world, but in the end remember most people are going to listen to this in their car or ear buds. The details you gain are not really worth the hassle (in my opinion).

                    So what is Bit Depth? If we stick with the analogy of the camera, the Sample Rate is how many times per second the recording device "takes a picture" of your voice, the Bit Depth is the megapixels on the camera. Most people record in 16 bit. Can you record in 24? Sure. Is it needed? Not in my opinion, but if you ask engineers who do music they will disagree.  In photography bit rate it is how many colors are used to make up a picture, so more bits would be a better reproduction of your audio (but again, we are getting into overkill).

                    You want to record in a "lossless" format. Lossless means the sound you record is what you hear back. It does not lose any quality. That's the good news. The bad news is these files are HUGE. So when you record you want to record in WAV on a PC or AAC on a Mac. This keeps the best quality. But you don't want to force your audience to use these big giant files that destroy data plans. So we encode them as MP3 files which are much smaller and still sound good.

                    So I want to use the analogy of painting a house now to explain encoding. The sample rate is how much pain it on your brush. The encoding rate is how fast you move the brush across the house. If you go too fast no paint gets on the house. If you go to slow, you get too much paint, and it may run. There are three formats that are used frequently.

                    128 Kbps Stereo. This is sometimes referred to as "CD" quality. That is debatable, but it is the highest acceptable rate (IMHO). Meaning anything above this is too much, and you are just wasting storage space, bandwidth, and the difference in audio is almost unnoticeable. (So anything above 128 is too much paint on the brush)

                    64 Kbps mono. This file is half the size of the 128 kbps but has no stereo separation (which if your show is mainly talk, is not a big deal).

                    96 kbps mono. This is used for people who feel the extra bits make the files sound better.

                    You could also say that 64 mono / 128 stereo "Cover with one coat" of paint. Anything below 64 (32 kbps ) you don't have enough paint on the brush (and you get hiss, and bad audio).

                    Podcast Rewind

                    Ham Radio 360 had a listener download his back catalog and listened to him for two weeks.

                    Mike Murphy Unplugged - Has the Adobe Audition listening to his show (last week we mentioned that you never know who is listening)

                    Glenn Hebert from Horse Radio Network

                    Podcaster's Roundtable -Listeners to Subscribers

                    Join the School of Podcasting Worry Free

                    Click here to join

                     

                    Need One on One Consulting?

                    Book at session at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    ]]>49a145e7070cfcd286f7b5ce1b769830Mon, 10 Oct 2016 04:00:00 -040042:43falsefull535535You Never Know Who Is ListeningToday we in this episode:

                    We have a great because of my podcast story that has someone getting paid to do something they would do for free

                    We tackle some of the podcast jargon starting with the A's

                    We revisit the File For Download debate in a podcast smack down!

                    A tale of sleazy guests

                    And we remind you that you never know who is listening.

                    Because of My Podcast Lucas Apps

                    Podcast leads to relationships, and those relationships lead to opportunities. Those opportunities can lead to more relationships (you get the idea). Lucas ended up getting paid to do something that he loves - because of his podcast. Check out Lucas’s show at triangletactical.com

                    Can I Podcast With a Built-in Microphone?

                    8: 53 If someone invites you to go golfing. The host shows up with their golf club, and another friend shows up with a pool stick, and you show up with a hockey stick. Sure you can attempt to golf with a hockey stick and a pool stick, but compared to the other people who are using the proper equipment it is going to be obvious that you are not using the right equipment. This doesn't mean you need to spend $1600 on equipment. You can start with an Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter and mic stand for $93 (full disclosure bestpodcastinggear.com is my amazon affiliate site).

                    The Wrong Podcast Gear Can Mess With Your Head

                    I did an hour session for International Podcast Day and to make a long story short, I brought along a microphone (as I was on the road) and then locked it in an office. I HAD to use my built in microphone. I was embarrassed. While I think most of my presentation was OK, I would be the first to admit that this was not my best presentation. I had notes in front of my, but in my head, I just kept hearing a voice in my head shouting that I sounded like a hack using a built-in microphone. Had I had access to the Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter, I would've been relaxed and more focused.

                    I Can't Believe ____ Is Listening to my Podcast!

                    14:20 Try not to use the word "only" when talking about your audience. I "only have" 20 downloads.

                    Check out Podcast Legends by Todd Cochrane Here is the Episode where he talks about his phone call with Steve Jobs.

                    I share a story about talking with Michael Hyatt at the New Media Expo and finding out Michael Hyatt listens to my show. Check out Michael's Book Platform

                    Sting explained on the Tonight Show how he had three people in the audience of a "the Police" show. He interacted with them and made it very intimate. It turns out two of them were DJs who started playing their music.

                    Cal Nelson of Ham Radio 360 had Adam Curry (one of the people who helped invent podcasting) listens to his show.

                    The Libsyn File For Download "Discussion"

                    24: 15 A few episodes ago Mike Dell (a friend of mine who I've known for years) stated my advice about when and when not to use "File for Download" on the Libysn platform was "bad advice." Mike is a great guy, and we are going to have to agree to disagree on this. The fact that I work for Libsyn as a support person and he works in support for blubrry.com is probably not a coincidence.

                    Two years ago (roughly) I had severe problems with my Wordpress install. One of the things I did was move my RSS feed (which was getting pounded at the time). Luckily at the time I had been publishing my episodes on Libsyn (and copying and pasting the link) into Powepress. Now because I set these episodes up using the "Add New Episodes" in Libsyn, when I switched my feed from PowerPress to Libsyn, my Libsyn feed looked just like my PowerPress feed.

                    Last week I talked about how using File For Download option in PowerPress is not a great idea. People Like Pat Flynn and Cliff Ravenscraft have recommended that strategy. That makes sense for them as they have multiple podcasts and they are using ONE libsyn account and using their Powerpress. But they are missing out on some automation that would not hurt their WordPress install.

                    So here is my point, if you go to Libsyn and create an episode as an episode (not a file for download) you are not hurting your podcast at all. Some might argue that you are creating a second feed and that could be confusing. To this I say, for 11 years I've been having to hand hold people to subscribe to ONE feed, let alone two. Some might say that this might damage my SEO. To this I say, I've been using the Internet almost since it was invented, and I have NEVER pulled up an RSS feed in a search result. Google Chrome doesn't display RSS feeds in a way that makes then readable, so why would Google pull up something you can't read?

                    A file for download is meant for people who want to restrict access to a file. A classic example is someone who has a podcast, and they also have a membership site. They only want members to have access to this file. In this case, they can upload the files as a "File for download only" and only the people who have the direct link can access that file.

                    So when you upload a file in Libsyn, you CAN use the Add New Episode option and have it do zero harm to your Wordpress feed. You can copy the direct link into PowerPress. Much a like driving around with a spare tire doesn't harm your car, having a second feed available doesn't hurt your Wordpress install (you'll only use it if you need it). PLUS you can also have that episode go to Twitter, Facebook, LikedIn, YouTube, iHeart Radio, Spotify, Tumblr, and more. When you make a file for download, you now have to promote to those sites using another tool. So you are missing out on a TON of automation.

                    To those who think, "Who would watch an audio file on YouTube?" according to Tory Heinritz of the Black List Exposed podcast people who are deaf. Because YouTube attempts to transcribe the audio in the video,  deaf people can now read your podcast (with some noticeable imperfections).

                    Get a free month of hosting at Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com using the coupon code sopfree

                    Podcast Glossary

                    36: 46 Today we will tackle the terminology beginning with A

                    Audio Interface (XLR to USB/FireWire) You will hear phrases like XLR and quarter inch, 3.5 MM USB, and Firewire. So let's cut off the fat. Firewire was a connector used on old Macintosh computers and no longer is used on new equipment. XLR and Quarter inch are typically ways to plug things into a mixer. An XLR has three holes in it to line up the plug. A quarter inch is a thick plug about the size of your pinky finger. A 3.5 MM connector is better known as a headphone jack. If you are looking to purchase a mixer you want an XLR input jack for every person. USB is another way of connecting things primarily with computers. To use these in a sentence, the Sure SM58 microphone plugs into your mixer via an XLR jack. You can connect the Audio Technica ATR2100 microphone using its XLR jack or via its USB jack. If you think of extension cords, some have two prongs and others have a third prong.

                    Audition/Audacity Audacity is a free software that runs on Mac or PC that is used by many podcasters to create podcasts. It has many, many options. Most of them you will never use.

                    Audition is a software from Adobe that runs on a Mac or PC that you rent to use each month. It has some features that make it easier to use than Audacity, and it is considered by some to be "More Professional" but that is up for debate as both are very powerful. Audition has many, many options. Most of them you will never use.

                    Auphonic/Levelator Auphonic is free software (for PC or Mac) with premium options that you can run your audio through, and it will remove noise and adjust audio levels. Auphonic is great for interviews where one person is louder than the other, or you recorded yourself, and you were too quiet. Find it at www.auphonic.com

                    The Levelator software is free (for PC or Mac) that adjusts the volume of your file to be equal. So if you have two people and one is quieter, it will boost the quiet person to match the volume of the other person. You can find it at http://www.conversationsnetwork.org/levelator

                    Sleazy Guest Who Hijack Your Website

                    44:27 Jon Buscall shared a story on episode 48 titled "Integrity" of his Online Marketing and Communications podcast about a guest who kind of used a special link to overly promote themselves on Jon's website. It was so intrusive that Jon eventually pulled his episode. It's a very fascinating story. Maybe in the future we will have to spell out the common sense details to guests who come on our show and explain how they are allowed to link to our websites.

                    School of Podcasting is Now Open with New Options to Meet Any Need

                    You can purchase courses separately, or you can order a Today we in this episode:

                    We have a great because of my podcast story that has someone getting paid to do something they would do for free

                    We tackle some of the podcast jargon starting with the A's

                    We revisit the File For Download debate in a podcast smack down!

                    A tale of sleazy guests

                    And we remind you that you never know who is listening.

                    Because of My Podcast Lucas Apps

                    Podcast leads to relationships, and those relationships lead to opportunities. Those opportunities can lead to more relationships (you get the idea). Lucas ended up getting paid to do something that he loves - because of his podcast. Check out Lucas’s show at triangletactical.com

                    Can I Podcast With a Built-in Microphone?

                    8: 53 If someone invites you to go golfing. The host shows up with their golf club, and another friend shows up with a pool stick, and you show up with a hockey stick. Sure you can attempt to golf with a hockey stick and a pool stick, but compared to the other people who are using the proper equipment it is going to be obvious that you are not using the right equipment. This doesn't mean you need to spend $1600 on equipment. You can start with an Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter and mic stand for $93 (full disclosure bestpodcastinggear.com is my amazon affiliate site).

                    The Wrong Podcast Gear Can Mess With Your Head

                    I did an hour session for International Podcast Day and to make a long story short, I brought along a microphone (as I was on the road) and then locked it in an office. I HAD to use my built in microphone. I was embarrassed. While I think most of my presentation was OK, I would be the first to admit that this was not my best presentation. I had notes in front of my, but in my head, I just kept hearing a voice in my head shouting that I sounded like a hack using a built-in microphone. Had I had access to the Audio Technica 2100 with a pop filter, I would've been relaxed and more focused.

                    I Can't Believe ____ Is Listening to my Podcast!

                    14:20 Try not to use the word "only" when talking about your audience. I "only have" 20 downloads.

                    Check out Podcast Legends by Todd Cochrane Here is the Episode where he talks about his phone call with Steve Jobs.

                    I share a story about talking with Michael Hyatt at the New Media Expo and finding out Michael Hyatt listens to my show. Check out Michael's Book Platform

                    Sting explained on the Tonight Show how he had three people in the audience of a "the Police" show. He interacted with them and made it very intimate. It turns out two of them were DJs who started playing their music.

                    Cal Nelson of Ham Radio 360 had Adam Curry (one of the people who helped invent podcasting) listens to his show.

                    The Libsyn File For Download "Discussion"

                    24: 15 A few episodes ago Mike Dell (a friend of mine who I've known for years) stated my advice about when and when not to use "File for Download" on the Libysn platform was "bad advice." Mike is a great guy, and we are going to have to agree to disagree on this. The fact that I work for Libsyn as a support person and he works in support for blubrry.com is probably not a coincidence.

                    Two years ago (roughly) I had severe problems with my Wordpress install. One of the things I did was move my RSS feed (which was getting pounded at the time). Luckily at the time I had been publishing my episodes on Libsyn (and copying and pasting the link) into Powepress. Now because I set these episodes up using the "Add New Episodes" in Libsyn, when I switched my feed from PowerPress to Libsyn, my Libsyn feed looked just like my PowerPress feed.

                    Last week I talked about how using File For Download option in PowerPress is not a great idea. People Like Pat Flynn and Cliff Ravenscraft have recommended that strategy. That makes sense for them as they have multiple podcasts and they are using ONE libsyn account and using their Powerpress. But they are missing out on some automation that would not hurt their WordPress install.

                    So here is my point, if you go to Libsyn and create an episode as an episode (not a file for download) you are not hurting your podcast at all. Some might argue that you are creating a second feed and that could be confusing. To this I say, for 11 years I've been having to hand hold people to subscribe to ONE feed, let alone two. Some might say that this might damage my SEO. To this I say, I've been using the Internet almost since it was invented, and I have NEVER pulled up an RSS feed in a search result. Google Chrome doesn't display RSS feeds in a way that makes then readable, so why would Google pull up something you can't read?

                    A file for download is meant for people who want to restrict access to a file. A classic example is someone who has a podcast, and they also have a membership site. They only want members to have access to this file. In this case, they can upload the files as a "File for download only" and only the people who have the direct link can access that file.

                    So when you upload a file in Libsyn, you CAN use the Add New Episode option and have it do zero harm to your Wordpress feed. You can copy the direct link into PowerPress. Much a like driving around with a spare tire doesn't harm your car, having a second feed available doesn't hurt your Wordpress install (you'll only use it if you need it). PLUS you can also have that episode go to Twitter, Facebook, LikedIn, YouTube, iHeart Radio, Spotify, Tumblr, and more. When you make a file for download, you now have to promote to those sites using another tool. So you are missing out on a TON of automation.

                    To those who think, "Who would watch an audio file on YouTube?" according to Tory Heinritz of the Black List Exposed podcast people who are deaf. Because YouTube attempts to transcribe the audio in the video,  deaf people can now read your podcast (with some noticeable imperfections).

                    Get a free month of hosting at Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com using the coupon code sopfree

                    Podcast Glossary

                    36: 46 Today we will tackle the terminology beginning with A

                    Audio Interface (XLR to USB/FireWire) You will hear phrases like XLR and quarter inch, 3.5 MM USB, and Firewire. So let's cut off the fat. Firewire was a connector used on old Macintosh computers and no longer is used on new equipment. XLR and Quarter inch are typically ways to plug things into a mixer. An XLR has three holes in it to line up the plug. A quarter inch is a thick plug about the size of your pinky finger. A 3.5 MM connector is better known as a headphone jack. If you are looking to purchase a mixer you want an XLR input jack for every person. USB is another way of connecting things primarily with computers. To use these in a sentence, the Sure SM58 microphone plugs into your mixer via an XLR jack. You can connect the Audio Technica ATR2100 microphone using its XLR jack or via its USB jack. If you think of extension cords, some have two prongs and others have a third prong.

                    Audition/Audacity Audacity is a free software that runs on Mac or PC that is used by many podcasters to create podcasts. It has many, many options. Most of them you will never use.

                    Audition is a software from Adobe that runs on a Mac or PC that you rent to use each month. It has some features that make it easier to use than Audacity, and it is considered by some to be "More Professional" but that is up for debate as both are very powerful. Audition has many, many options. Most of them you will never use.

                    Auphonic/Levelator Auphonic is free software (for PC or Mac) with premium options that you can run your audio through, and it will remove noise and adjust audio levels. Auphonic is great for interviews where one person is louder than the other, or you recorded yourself, and you were too quiet. Find it at www.auphonic.com

                    The Levelator software is free (for PC or Mac) that adjusts the volume of your file to be equal. So if you have two people and one is quieter, it will boost the quiet person to match the volume of the other person. You can find it at http://www.conversationsnetwork.org/levelator

                    Sleazy Guest Who Hijack Your Website

                    44:27 Jon Buscall shared a story on episode 48 titled "Integrity" of his Online Marketing and Communications podcast about a guest who kind of used a special link to overly promote themselves on Jon's website. It was so intrusive that Jon eventually pulled his episode. It's a very fascinating story. Maybe in the future we will have to spell out the common sense details to guests who come on our show and explain how they are allowed to link to our websites.

                    School of Podcasting is Now Open with New Options to Meet Any Need

                    You can purchase courses separately, or you can order a monthly membership

                    You can also purchase a yearly subscription (and it's like getting two months free)

                    Mentioned in This Episode

                    Platform by Michael Hyatt

                    Podcast Legends by Todd Cochran

                    Podcast Junkies Podcast

                    XV - King's X

                    ]]>11fb5835d74098d4ebeb2dd9ad0146d7Mon, 03 Oct 2016 04:03:07 -040054:34falsefull534534Are You Ready To Give Up on Podcasting?VRStudio Workforce  Rick Seizemore from VRStudio Workforce shares how your podcast will help you land guests, and those guests can then point people to your website. Your site then becomes an audio business card that can capture people’s attention. This is what the VR Workforce Studio Podcast Does   Is Podcasting A Ponzi Scheme?

                    I got an email from a friend of mine who has kind of "had it" with podcasting.

                    He said, " I have recently done some calculations and have come to the conclusion that the hours spent podcasting would be better spent doing other things, like narrating audio books and maybe even some work around the house. I am doing a weekly video show via Skype, being streamed live on YouTube. I use Wirecast to make it look professional, and I have been releasing the audio as a podcast. I stopped the podcast side this week.

                    I said when I started podcasting a couple of years ago, I would do a serious review at the two-year mark, and have concluded that while I have learned much I will be using for audiobooks, and am glad I did it, to continue would be a waste of time. Here's the part you probably won't agree with:   In the 80's Amway came through this area, and a lot of people joined and got hyped up (me included). After a while, it became clear that a lot of people at the top were making money, but it depended on a constant supply of fresh "believers" to fuel their incomes. People who started early were making money, but the thousands below were being Nickle and dimed and were doing nothing but financing those above. It worked as long as everyone believed they could make it.   Podcasting today is a similar type of pyramid structure, where everyone who started before 2007 or 2008 are making an income off of the believers below. (I find your motives pure, and I appreciate that.) It is VERY important for those below the median numbers (Around 120 according to Rob), to believe there is no discovery problem. That way they keep paying their $20 a month to Libsyn, buying books, Wordpress plugins, and tools for podcasting and going to conferences.   No matter how good your content is, the average basement independent has about 0% chance of ever being heard the first time by hardly anyone who doesn't know them already or is only 1 or 2 degrees separated. This is simply due to saturation.   The main people who make it now either are famous already, are starting a full-time business that happens to involve podcasting and has 6 figures to invest, like JLD, or are part of the corporate invasion. There may be an isolated incident here and there where it happens, but it so rare it doesn't bear mentioning. It is simply too late for the average independent show by a person working a full-time job to make an impact beyond a few niche listeners.   I was also dismayed to find the same "entrepreneurs," using many of the same books, and the same hype milking the same types of people. There is a sucker born every minute. They find them, use them, discard them, and move one since there are always more suckers on the internet. An example: a well-known personality in podcasting who was putting out yet another book solicited all of us to submit articles for it. We of course, had to buy the book to see if were in it. We weren't. Not one of us. The book had already been written and included older interviews that happened long before he solicited for articles. He simply lied to get us to buy the book. It worked, and we were the suckers. Well, fool me once, shame on you, fool me twice, shame on me.   I calculated how many listeners I would have if gained one new one each month, and how many hours I would spend editing and putting out the content I already have from the video show. My conclusion: I hope to retire in 3 years or so.  36 new listeners. Over 600 hours of podcast editing during that time.  BTW, I am not getting 1 new listener a month.   Contrast this with the one audio book I have narrated so far. It didn't sell. Only 11 copies so far. I have made $50 from that. What would happen if I spent those 600 hours over the next 3 years doing audio books that don't sell, and get royalties for the next 7 years on each?   Allow me to soften this by saying I have always found you and your efforts on behalf of the little guy podcasters to be the most honest and trustworthy of all. Your human-ness and transparency is wonderful, and I would love to spend time with you in person but neither of us have that time to devote to it. Thank you for all you have done and you continue to do for us bottom feeders. POWER TO THE SHRIMP!!   My Response   In looking at your stuff here would be my comment.   I'm not I would've put everything into one stream. I understand the extra cost, but I wouldn't have done it that way. I knew the name of your show and couldn't find it because all of your shows were under the name of the network in iTunes. That is a recipe for failure. It's hard enough to find a show when the name is correct.   I'm sure you found putting out so many episodes was a LOT of work. Anyone who starts out and gets no money in return (if that is the goal) means, "lots of work with $0 = burnout."   The bottom line (boiling it down) is the same reason I do podcasting over playing in a band. The band is days (months) of work for $50 if I'm lucky. If I practice two hours a week for six months to learn enough songs and do that for year that is 104 hours of practice. But wait, each gig is 4 hours. If we play every other weekend for ten months that is twenty gigs so another eighty hours (184 hours total). Those twenty gigs pay $50 each (20X50 )= 1000.   1000/184 =$5.34 an hour. If I say I "play for free" and remove the 80 hours of performing (and loading gear) that is still $9.64 an hour.   I'd rather stay home, not put up with drunks, and save my back and make more (or less) the same kind of money.   Some reports that 80%, 90% of businesses don't make it, others say 33% don't make it.   When I look at someone like John Lee Dumas he is the poster child for "Yes you can make money with a podcast." In the same way that the Beatles are the "Yes you can make money in music," not everyone with a guitar and long hair is the Beatles.   I don't believe there is a discovery problem. There wasn't a discovery problem for the Serial Podcast. Liz Covert at Ben Franklin's World has over 1 million downloads and she only has 100 episodes.  She doesn't have a team.   I agree that a ton of podcasts are coming out each week, but when a horse race starts, there are tons of horses coming out of the gate. Someone is going to win.   The Recipe of a Successful Podcast 1. Know who your audience is and what they want. 2. Give it to them on a consistent basis 3. Go to where they are (get out from behind the microphone) 4. Make friends with them. 5. Tell them about your podcast.   You said, "It is simply too late for the average independent show by a person working a full-time job to make an impact beyond a few niche listeners. " Podcast is only consumed by 30% of the planet. We are just getting warmed up.     Used in this Episode (in no order ) Hall of Fame Podcaster Godfree from Gamertagradio.com Jessica Rhodes of Interviewconnections.com Harry from podcastjunkies.com Daniel J Lewis from theaudacitytopodcast.com Ray Ortega from the Podcaster's Studio (courtesy of the Podcast Engineering School) Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach Paul Colligan from the Podcast Industry Report John Lee Dumas from Eofire.com Glenn "the Geek" Hebert from Horse Radio Network Brian from Profitcastuniverse.com Adam Ragusea from The Pub podcast Jordan Harbinger from the Art of Charm Dan Benjamin from http://5by5.tv/podcastmethod The Wolf's Den Podcast Eric Fisher from Beyond the ToDo List Mark from Late Night Internet Marketing Rob Walch from The Feed Podcast and Today in iOs Elsie Escobar from She Podcasts Jessica Kupferman from She Podcasts Michael Sharky from VRStudio Workforce  Rick Seizemore from VRStudio Workforce shares how your podcast will help you land guests, and those guests can then point people to your website. Your site then becomes an audio business card that can capture people’s attention. This is what the VR Workforce Studio Podcast Does   Is Podcasting A Ponzi Scheme?

                    I got an email from a friend of mine who has kind of "had it" with podcasting.

                    He said, " I have recently done some calculations and have come to the conclusion that the hours spent podcasting would be better spent doing other things, like narrating audio books and maybe even some work around the house. I am doing a weekly video show via Skype, being streamed live on YouTube. I use Wirecast to make it look professional, and I have been releasing the audio as a podcast. I stopped the podcast side this week.

                    I said when I started podcasting a couple of years ago, I would do a serious review at the two-year mark, and have concluded that while I have learned much I will be using for audiobooks, and am glad I did it, to continue would be a waste of time. Here's the part you probably won't agree with:   In the 80's Amway came through this area, and a lot of people joined and got hyped up (me included). After a while, it became clear that a lot of people at the top were making money, but it depended on a constant supply of fresh "believers" to fuel their incomes. People who started early were making money, but the thousands below were being Nickle and dimed and were doing nothing but financing those above. It worked as long as everyone believed they could make it.   Podcasting today is a similar type of pyramid structure, where everyone who started before 2007 or 2008 are making an income off of the believers below. (I find your motives pure, and I appreciate that.) It is VERY important for those below the median numbers (Around 120 according to Rob), to believe there is no discovery problem. That way they keep paying their $20 a month to Libsyn, buying books, Wordpress plugins, and tools for podcasting and going to conferences.   No matter how good your content is, the average basement independent has about 0% chance of ever being heard the first time by hardly anyone who doesn't know them already or is only 1 or 2 degrees separated. This is simply due to saturation.   The main people who make it now either are famous already, are starting a full-time business that happens to involve podcasting and has 6 figures to invest, like JLD, or are part of the corporate invasion. There may be an isolated incident here and there where it happens, but it so rare it doesn't bear mentioning. It is simply too late for the average independent show by a person working a full-time job to make an impact beyond a few niche listeners.   I was also dismayed to find the same "entrepreneurs," using many of the same books, and the same hype milking the same types of people. There is a sucker born every minute. They find them, use them, discard them, and move one since there are always more suckers on the internet. An example: a well-known personality in podcasting who was putting out yet another book solicited all of us to submit articles for it. We of course, had to buy the book to see if were in it. We weren't. Not one of us. The book had already been written and included older interviews that happened long before he solicited for articles. He simply lied to get us to buy the book. It worked, and we were the suckers. Well, fool me once, shame on you, fool me twice, shame on me.   I calculated how many listeners I would have if gained one new one each month, and how many hours I would spend editing and putting out the content I already have from the video show. My conclusion: I hope to retire in 3 years or so.  36 new listeners. Over 600 hours of podcast editing during that time.  BTW, I am not getting 1 new listener a month.   Contrast this with the one audio book I have narrated so far. It didn't sell. Only 11 copies so far. I have made $50 from that. What would happen if I spent those 600 hours over the next 3 years doing audio books that don't sell, and get royalties for the next 7 years on each?   Allow me to soften this by saying I have always found you and your efforts on behalf of the little guy podcasters to be the most honest and trustworthy of all. Your human-ness and transparency is wonderful, and I would love to spend time with you in person but neither of us have that time to devote to it. Thank you for all you have done and you continue to do for us bottom feeders. POWER TO THE SHRIMP!!   My Response   In looking at your stuff here would be my comment.   I'm not I would've put everything into one stream. I understand the extra cost, but I wouldn't have done it that way. I knew the name of your show and couldn't find it because all of your shows were under the name of the network in iTunes. That is a recipe for failure. It's hard enough to find a show when the name is correct.   I'm sure you found putting out so many episodes was a LOT of work. Anyone who starts out and gets no money in return (if that is the goal) means, "lots of work with $0 = burnout."   The bottom line (boiling it down) is the same reason I do podcasting over playing in a band. The band is days (months) of work for $50 if I'm lucky. If I practice two hours a week for six months to learn enough songs and do that for year that is 104 hours of practice. But wait, each gig is 4 hours. If we play every other weekend for ten months that is twenty gigs so another eighty hours (184 hours total). Those twenty gigs pay $50 each (20X50 )= 1000.   1000/184 =$5.34 an hour. If I say I "play for free" and remove the 80 hours of performing (and loading gear) that is still $9.64 an hour.   I'd rather stay home, not put up with drunks, and save my back and make more (or less) the same kind of money.   Some reports that 80%, 90% of businesses don't make it, others say 33% don't make it.   When I look at someone like John Lee Dumas he is the poster child for "Yes you can make money with a podcast." In the same way that the Beatles are the "Yes you can make money in music," not everyone with a guitar and long hair is the Beatles.   I don't believe there is a discovery problem. There wasn't a discovery problem for the Serial Podcast. Liz Covert at Ben Franklin's World has over 1 million downloads and she only has 100 episodes.  She doesn't have a team.   I agree that a ton of podcasts are coming out each week, but when a horse race starts, there are tons of horses coming out of the gate. Someone is going to win.   The Recipe of a Successful Podcast 1. Know who your audience is and what they want. 2. Give it to them on a consistent basis 3. Go to where they are (get out from behind the microphone) 4. Make friends with them. 5. Tell them about your podcast.   You said, "It is simply too late for the average independent show by a person working a full-time job to make an impact beyond a few niche listeners. " Podcast is only consumed by 30% of the planet. We are just getting warmed up.     Used in this Episode (in no order ) Hall of Fame Podcaster Godfree from Gamertagradio.com Jessica Rhodes of Interviewconnections.com Harry from podcastjunkies.com Daniel J Lewis from theaudacitytopodcast.com Ray Ortega from the Podcaster's Studio (courtesy of the Podcast Engineering School) Erik K Johnson from Podcast Talent Coach Paul Colligan from the Podcast Industry Report John Lee Dumas from Eofire.com Glenn "the Geek" Hebert from Horse Radio Network Brian from Profitcastuniverse.com Adam Ragusea from The Pub podcast Jordan Harbinger from the Art of Charm Dan Benjamin from http://5by5.tv/podcastmethod The Wolf's Den Podcast Eric Fisher from Beyond the ToDo List Mark from Late Night Internet Marketing Rob Walch from The Feed Podcast and Today in iOs Elsie Escobar from She Podcasts Jessica Kupferman from She Podcasts Michael Sharky from The Talent Show   Nick Seuberling http://spnt.tv/  Jared Easley and Starve the Doubts ( Check out Stop Chasing Influencers) George Hrab of the Geologic Podcast   See Me Speak

                    I will appear at the following events

                    CD Podfest Novmber 5-6 Washing DC http://www.dcpodfest.com/ 

                    Pofest in Tampa Florida February 2017 See www.podfest.us

                    Northeast Ohio Podcaster's Meeting see www.neohiopodcasters.com

                    Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    ]]>c621d1cc389437d946f99cae21c66faeMon, 26 Sep 2016 04:44:04 -040053:02falsefull533533Awaken Your Confidence - Rachel SmetsRachel Smets is the author of Awaken Your Confidence and stops by to share some insights into building your confidence. You can find her at Racehsmets.com as well as @rachelsmets and Facebook. and YouTube

                    We talk about overcoming imposter syndrome, and how telling someone "just start" doesn't work. Here are three things you can do to help boost your confidence:

                    1. Don't compare yourself to others.
                    2. Start Small
                    3. Failure is Feedback
                    
                    

                    On this Week's taping of the Ask the Podcast Coach show Carlos asked, "how do i become a popular podcaster when i was the most unpopular kid in high school?" to this point to the following people who were not popular in school:

                    Steven Spielberg says, " “I was a nerd in those days. Outsider, like the kid that played the clarinet in the band and in orchestra, which I did.”"

                    Taylor Switft says, " I remember when I was in school, the whole reason I started writing songs was because I was alone a lot of the time. I’d sit there in school and I’d be hearing people like, ‘Oh my god, this party that we’re going to is gonna be so awesome on Friday. Everyone’s invited except for Taylor

                    Charlize Theron - “I didn’t have any boyfriends in high school. I had a massive, massive crush on this one guy. He was a couple of years older than me and I did not exist in his world.

                    Selena Gomez " “I was bullied every second of every day in elementary and middle school.”

                    Lady Gaga " “Being teased for being ugly, having a big nose, being annoying. ‘Your laugh is funny, you’re weird, why do you always sing, why are you so into theater, why do you do your make-up like that?’"

                    Jessica Alba " “I’d eat my lunch in the nurses’ office so I didn’t have to sit with the other girls. Apart from my being mixed race, my parents didn’t have money so I never had the cute clothes or the cool back pack.”"

                    Cameron Diaz " “I’m a dork! When I was high school, I was a total goon! All the kids used to make fun of me. I was like all skinny and gangly and guys were like no thank you.”

                    Jennifer Garner - I was a real nerd. I wasn’t the popular one, I was one of those girls on the edge of the group. I never wore the right clothes and I had a kind of natural geekiness. I was in the school band and I think that has a bit of a stigma at the age of 13. If you’d asked me what I wanted to be, I would have said something like a librarian.

                    Kate Winslet - Winslet was bullied and teased for being chubby. Her nickname at school was Blubber, and she was once even locked in the art cupboard

                    Miley Cyrus - At school, there was an “Anti-Miley Club” full of “big, tough girls” who were “fully capable of doing [her] bodily harm” and went above and beyond in their bullying pursuit. Cyrus was once locked in a bathroom during class: “They shoved me in. I was trapped. I banged on the door until my fists hurt. Nobody came.” Other incidents included challenging Cyrus to a fight, which only ended when the principal stepped in. And when Cyrus wasn’t being physically abused, she was being teased, with classmates telling her, “Your dad’s a one-hit wonder. You’ll never amount to anything — just like him

                    President Bill Clinton - As a junior high schooler, he was picked on relentlessly for being a “fat band boy” with bad taste in clothes. He was also known as a band geek.

                    Michael Phelps - He was taunted for his “sticky-out ears” and lisp, as well as his long arms, which ultimately took him to greatness.

                    Tom Cruise - His Dad had the family moving a lot to find work. Tom says, " I was always the new kid with the wrong shoes, the wrong accent. I didn’t have the friend to share things with and confide in.” And at each school, he faced the fresh experience over and over again. He was small for his age and easily pushed around."

                    Walt Disney He was fired by a newspaper editor because, "he lacked imagination and had no good ideas." After that, Disney started a number of businesses that didn't last too long and ended with bankruptcy and failure. He kept plugging along, however, and eventually found a recipe for success that worked.

                    COMMENTS: 888-563-3228   A Podcast Can Be A New Start

                    When you start a podcast all of the stupid people who didn't know the "true" you are gone, and you can start from scratch. Don't let your past dictate you future. Podcasting has boosted the confidence of many leaders in their field who say the practice of talking into a microphone. It has helped people be better speakers as they are familiar with coming up with presentations.

                    So jump into the podcasting pool. The water is warm and friendly.

                    File For Download Only and Other Mistakes Others are Making

                    If you are using Libsyn.com (if you're not use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) there is an optoin called "File For Download Only." This is useful for people who have membership sites, or VIP groups and they don't want the general public to have access to the file. The only want certain people to have access. The problem is two very popular consultants are telling their clients to use this all the time, and that is just bad advice. While this works for them (where they have multiple shows, and other outside circumstances) its not a good idea for most. Here is why:

                    1. If you want to use any of the automation at libsyn, you've somewhat shot your self in the foot
                    2. If you go back later and want to add this feature it's not easy.
                    
                    

                    So as you Mom use to say "If Johnny Johnson jumps off a bridge are you?" I ask, "Just because Cliff Ravenscraft uses file for downloads only, doesn't mean you should as well). 

                    Keep Your Wordpress Website and Plugins Updated

                    I had a handful of people contact me this week when the name of their podcast changed to "No Title" in iTunes. The reason? They were running an older version of the PowerPress plugin. Now the PowerPress plugin is not bad, but you HAVE TO keep it up to date alone with your Wordpress install. If you don't you are asking, no, BEGGING people to hack you and give you headaches. Then always have a backup of your website. I use Backup creator. I've used Backup Buddy.  I'm looking into ManageWP which just joined Godaddy.

                    Why I'm Changing the School of Podcasting

                    I recently changed the School of Podcasting to try a "Scarcity" strategy. To make a long story short, it didn't work for me. I apprecaite all those who wanted to help my business, but as a teacher the one thing I want is eager students. Now when I get them I have to tell them to wait 9in some cases months) until the site reopens. For more details, read this post on my blog

                    International Podcast Day is September 30th

                    Check out the Gratitude Award we you can get an award for having a wide variety of Review (Via My Podcast Reviews - free). For more information check out https://internationalpodcastday.com

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Visit www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Rachel Smets is the author of Awaken Your Confidence and stops by to share some insights into building your confidence. You can find her at Racehsmets.com as well as @rachelsmets and Facebook. and YouTube

                    We talk about overcoming imposter syndrome, and how telling someone "just start" doesn't work. Here are three things you can do to help boost your confidence:

                    1. Don't compare yourself to others.
                    2. Start Small
                    3. Failure is Feedback
                    
                    

                    On this Week's taping of the Ask the Podcast Coach show Carlos asked, "how do i become a popular podcaster when i was the most unpopular kid in high school?" to this point to the following people who were not popular in school:

                    Steven Spielberg says, " “I was a nerd in those days. Outsider, like the kid that played the clarinet in the band and in orchestra, which I did.”"

                    Taylor Switft says, " I remember when I was in school, the whole reason I started writing songs was because I was alone a lot of the time. I’d sit there in school and I’d be hearing people like, ‘Oh my god, this party that we’re going to is gonna be so awesome on Friday. Everyone’s invited except for Taylor

                    Charlize Theron - “I didn’t have any boyfriends in high school. I had a massive, massive crush on this one guy. He was a couple of years older than me and I did not exist in his world.

                    Selena Gomez " “I was bullied every second of every day in elementary and middle school.”

                    Lady Gaga " “Being teased for being ugly, having a big nose, being annoying. ‘Your laugh is funny, you’re weird, why do you always sing, why are you so into theater, why do you do your make-up like that?’"

                    Jessica Alba " “I’d eat my lunch in the nurses’ office so I didn’t have to sit with the other girls. Apart from my being mixed race, my parents didn’t have money so I never had the cute clothes or the cool back pack.”"

                    Cameron Diaz " “I’m a dork! When I was high school, I was a total goon! All the kids used to make fun of me. I was like all skinny and gangly and guys were like no thank you.”

                    Jennifer Garner - I was a real nerd. I wasn’t the popular one, I was one of those girls on the edge of the group. I never wore the right clothes and I had a kind of natural geekiness. I was in the school band and I think that has a bit of a stigma at the age of 13. If you’d asked me what I wanted to be, I would have said something like a librarian.

                    Kate Winslet - Winslet was bullied and teased for being chubby. Her nickname at school was Blubber, and she was once even locked in the art cupboard

                    Miley Cyrus - At school, there was an “Anti-Miley Club” full of “big, tough girls” who were “fully capable of doing [her] bodily harm” and went above and beyond in their bullying pursuit. Cyrus was once locked in a bathroom during class: “They shoved me in. I was trapped. I banged on the door until my fists hurt. Nobody came.” Other incidents included challenging Cyrus to a fight, which only ended when the principal stepped in. And when Cyrus wasn’t being physically abused, she was being teased, with classmates telling her, “Your dad’s a one-hit wonder. You’ll never amount to anything — just like him

                    President Bill Clinton - As a junior high schooler, he was picked on relentlessly for being a “fat band boy” with bad taste in clothes. He was also known as a band geek.

                    Michael Phelps - He was taunted for his “sticky-out ears” and lisp, as well as his long arms, which ultimately took him to greatness.

                    Tom Cruise - His Dad had the family moving a lot to find work. Tom says, " I was always the new kid with the wrong shoes, the wrong accent. I didn’t have the friend to share things with and confide in.” And at each school, he faced the fresh experience over and over again. He was small for his age and easily pushed around."

                    Walt Disney He was fired by a newspaper editor because, "he lacked imagination and had no good ideas." After that, Disney started a number of businesses that didn't last too long and ended with bankruptcy and failure. He kept plugging along, however, and eventually found a recipe for success that worked.

                    COMMENTS: 888-563-3228   A Podcast Can Be A New Start

                    When you start a podcast all of the stupid people who didn't know the "true" you are gone, and you can start from scratch. Don't let your past dictate you future. Podcasting has boosted the confidence of many leaders in their field who say the practice of talking into a microphone. It has helped people be better speakers as they are familiar with coming up with presentations.

                    So jump into the podcasting pool. The water is warm and friendly.

                    File For Download Only and Other Mistakes Others are Making

                    If you are using Libsyn.com (if you're not use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month) there is an optoin called "File For Download Only." This is useful for people who have membership sites, or VIP groups and they don't want the general public to have access to the file. The only want certain people to have access. The problem is two very popular consultants are telling their clients to use this all the time, and that is just bad advice. While this works for them (where they have multiple shows, and other outside circumstances) its not a good idea for most. Here is why:

                    1. If you want to use any of the automation at libsyn, you've somewhat shot your self in the foot
                    2. If you go back later and want to add this feature it's not easy.
                    
                    

                    So as you Mom use to say "If Johnny Johnson jumps off a bridge are you?" I ask, "Just because Cliff Ravenscraft uses file for downloads only, doesn't mean you should as well). 

                    Keep Your Wordpress Website and Plugins Updated

                    I had a handful of people contact me this week when the name of their podcast changed to "No Title" in iTunes. The reason? They were running an older version of the PowerPress plugin. Now the PowerPress plugin is not bad, but you HAVE TO keep it up to date alone with your Wordpress install. If you don't you are asking, no, BEGGING people to hack you and give you headaches. Then always have a backup of your website. I use Backup creator. I've used Backup Buddy.  I'm looking into ManageWP which just joined Godaddy.

                    Why I'm Changing the School of Podcasting

                    I recently changed the School of Podcasting to try a "Scarcity" strategy. To make a long story short, it didn't work for me. I apprecaite all those who wanted to help my business, but as a teacher the one thing I want is eager students. Now when I get them I have to tell them to wait 9in some cases months) until the site reopens. For more details, read this post on my blog

                    International Podcast Day is September 30th

                    Check out the Gratitude Award we you can get an award for having a wide variety of Review (Via My Podcast Reviews - free). For more information check out https://internationalpodcastday.com

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Visit www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>a2f6e4342eaa61777cb5aac9227f2a98Mon, 19 Sep 2016 04:00:00 -040055:40falsefull532532Podcast Mid-Atlantic RelfectionsToday I'm fresh back from a trip to Podcast Midatlantic where I spoke on a panel about podcasting. On Sunday I had some time before I flew home so Rob Greenlee and I Went to see the Liberty Bell in Independence Hall in Philadelphia. There are some things that learned in this visit that I thought we could apply to podcast.

                    - When there is no great entertainment, people will flock to ANYTHING. Case in point the Liberty Bell, an old large bell with a giant crack use to go on tour and people would FLOCK to see it. In today's society, the bar is set pretty low in regards to content so you can stand out pretty easy - The Liberty Bell was flawed. Yet, people came out in droves to see it Did it sound impressive? No, I watched a video, and no it didn't but what it did do was stand for something. People came to the event, but more importantly, wanted to pay tribute to it's ideals. The ideals of the liberty bell is what is strong and stirs emotions. It's not the technology.

                    The creators of the Liberty Bell has never made a bell so large. It shows, x-rays show how there are cracks throughout the bell (and that's why you won't here it ring) when you ring the bell you only make it worse. The lack of knowledge didn't stop the creators from doing their best. In the end, I'm sure they felt they failed, but by creating something, they gave their audience a gift.

                    - After a tour of independence hall (where a large amount of the early forming of America occurred), I learned how they all collaborated together to put together the declaration of independence. Article Five of the United States Constitution detailed the two-step process for amending the nation's frame of government. The constitution was put into place on March 4, 1789. If they had waited until it was perfect, the Constitution wouldn't have been adopted t until May 7 1992 (the date of the last amendments). As of 12/2014 approximately 11,539 proposals to amend the Constitution have been introduced in Congress since 1789. The point being you can "Amend" your podcastwhenever you want.

                    - The bell first cracked when rung after its arrival in Philadelphia, and was twice recast by local workmen John Pass and John Stow, whose last names appear on the bell.  When I was there on 9/11/16 reflecting on 9/11 there were people there all over the world. There are probably millions of bells across the world. Some of them are bigger, sound better, and yet here people flock to see an old broken bell because of what itstood for Liberty.

                    More Great Take Aways From Podcast Mid Atlantic

                    I was greeted by Heather from Craflit who presented me with a custom t-shirt that has *psbs and my logo. What does PSBS stand for? Podcasting since before serial. Heather was just as cool in person as she is online. The fact that someone would go out of their way to make me a custom t-shirt was amazing. It these tings that leave me speechless. Heather is a truly amazing person. A mind like hers you don't find often in this world.

                    Mich O'Neil from the solopreneur hour had a great top for interviewing people. How do you avoid having a seasoned guest come on your show and NOT spew the same lame answers? You put their answers in your introduction. You disarm them. Now they can't reference those "traditional answers" and they have to dig deeper into their bag of answers for something new.

                    Mark Asquith from podcastwebsites.com took what I've been saying, "Ask your audience what that want" and sharpened it. Ask them what they NEED. Awesome.

                    Jessica Kupfeman of She Podcasts who help people get sponsors through her www.jkmagency.com showed that people love an underdog. Poor Jess had lost her voice, but we were all pulling for her as she tried to present with her lack of pipes. Her content made up for the lack of tone and quality of voice. This works in person, I'm not sure it would work as a podcast.

                    Your might have a perspective that nobody else has. On Sunday 9/11/16 I had breakfast with Rob Greenlee from Spreaker, and Heather Ordover from Craftlit. We kind of shared some thoughts on 9/11 as it was the 15 year anniversary. Heather's perspective was like no other I had ever heard in 15 years. Why? Because she lived it. The plane engine from the second plane fell on the roof of her school. At one point, she turned to see the second dust cloud as it covered her. Her husband knew she was in the cloud. He was watching it on TV. You are a unique person. Only you have your history, perspective, and experiences. It gave me goosbumps.

                    Christian Lee and CJ - What My Son is Learning From Podcasting

                    Chrisian Lee does a podcast with his 10-year-old son. It's called What are we watching. Chrisitan (a standup comic) was very entertaining and dropped some great knowledge including:

                    His son is learning how to push on when technology lets your down.

                    He is getting to talk to celebrities.

                    Their podcast has lead to some conversations that were needed. They opened the doors to some much-needed conversations.

                    He is comfortable with technology, and working in his school.

                    He is building his confidence.

                    Because of My Podcast: Jim Collison

                    (Starts at 1:56 )Jim Collison does show for his job (how cool is that). Jim was recently given an award for his work on the podcast (demonstrating that his podcast is making him a more valuable employee), and when Jim goes out to meet his audience he is somewhat swarmed. Congrats to Jim. Dave and Jim do the Ask the Podcast Coach show every Saturday Morning at 10:30 AM EST at www.askthepodcastcoach.com/live

                    Jim's show for his job are at Http://coaching.gallup.com

                    Jim also is the man behind the Average Guy Network

                    Dave Jackson Talking Podcast Success

                    I appeared on episode 19 of the Podcast Fiend show talking podcast success

                    Check it out at http://podcastfiend.com/show/19

                    Podcast Questions?

                    Call them in 888-563-3228

                    Get Podcast Consulting

                    Find an available time at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Get the Show Notes Delivered To You

                    www.scoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

                    ]]>Today I'm fresh back from a trip to Podcast Midatlantic where I spoke on a panel about podcasting. On Sunday I had some time before I flew home so Rob Greenlee and I Went to see the Liberty Bell in Independence Hall in Philadelphia. There are some things that learned in this visit that I thought we could apply to podcast.

                    - When there is no great entertainment, people will flock to ANYTHING. Case in point the Liberty Bell, an old large bell with a giant crack use to go on tour and people would FLOCK to see it. In today's society, the bar is set pretty low in regards to content so you can stand out pretty easy - The Liberty Bell was flawed. Yet, people came out in droves to see it Did it sound impressive? No, I watched a video, and no it didn't but what it did do was stand for something. People came to the event, but more importantly, wanted to pay tribute to it's ideals. The ideals of the liberty bell is what is strong and stirs emotions. It's not the technology.

                    The creators of the Liberty Bell has never made a bell so large. It shows, x-rays show how there are cracks throughout the bell (and that's why you won't here it ring) when you ring the bell you only make it worse. The lack of knowledge didn't stop the creators from doing their best. In the end, I'm sure they felt they failed, but by creating something, they gave their audience a gift.

                    - After a tour of independence hall (where a large amount of the early forming of America occurred), I learned how they all collaborated together to put together the declaration of independence. Article Five of the United States Constitution detailed the two-step process for amending the nation's frame of government. The constitution was put into place on March 4, 1789. If they had waited until it was perfect, the Constitution wouldn't have been adopted t until May 7 1992 (the date of the last amendments). As of 12/2014 approximately 11,539 proposals to amend the Constitution have been introduced in Congress since 1789. The point being you can "Amend" your podcastwhenever you want.

                    - The bell first cracked when rung after its arrival in Philadelphia, and was twice recast by local workmen John Pass and John Stow, whose last names appear on the bell.  When I was there on 9/11/16 reflecting on 9/11 there were people there all over the world. There are probably millions of bells across the world. Some of them are bigger, sound better, and yet here people flock to see an old broken bell because of what itstood for Liberty.

                    More Great Take Aways From Podcast Mid Atlantic

                    I was greeted by Heather from Craflit who presented me with a custom t-shirt that has *psbs and my logo. What does PSBS stand for? Podcasting since before serial. Heather was just as cool in person as she is online. The fact that someone would go out of their way to make me a custom t-shirt was amazing. It these tings that leave me speechless. Heather is a truly amazing person. A mind like hers you don't find often in this world.

                    Mich O'Neil from the solopreneur hour had a great top for interviewing people. How do you avoid having a seasoned guest come on your show and NOT spew the same lame answers? You put their answers in your introduction. You disarm them. Now they can't reference those "traditional answers" and they have to dig deeper into their bag of answers for something new.

                    Mark Asquith from podcastwebsites.com took what I've been saying, "Ask your audience what that want" and sharpened it. Ask them what they NEED. Awesome.

                    Jessica Kupfeman of She Podcasts who help people get sponsors through her www.jkmagency.com showed that people love an underdog. Poor Jess had lost her voice, but we were all pulling for her as she tried to present with her lack of pipes. Her content made up for the lack of tone and quality of voice. This works in person, I'm not sure it would work as a podcast.

                    Your might have a perspective that nobody else has. On Sunday 9/11/16 I had breakfast with Rob Greenlee from Spreaker, and Heather Ordover from Craftlit. We kind of shared some thoughts on 9/11 as it was the 15 year anniversary. Heather's perspective was like no other I had ever heard in 15 years. Why? Because she lived it. The plane engine from the second plane fell on the roof of her school. At one point, she turned to see the second dust cloud as it covered her. Her husband knew she was in the cloud. He was watching it on TV. You are a unique person. Only you have your history, perspective, and experiences. It gave me goosbumps.

                    Christian Lee and CJ - What My Son is Learning From Podcasting

                    Chrisian Lee does a podcast with his 10-year-old son. It's called What are we watching. Chrisitan (a standup comic) was very entertaining and dropped some great knowledge including:

                    His son is learning how to push on when technology lets your down.

                    He is getting to talk to celebrities.

                    Their podcast has lead to some conversations that were needed. They opened the doors to some much-needed conversations.

                    He is comfortable with technology, and working in his school.

                    He is building his confidence.

                    Because of My Podcast: Jim Collison

                    (Starts at 1:56 )Jim Collison does show for his job (how cool is that). Jim was recently given an award for his work on the podcast (demonstrating that his podcast is making him a more valuable employee), and when Jim goes out to meet his audience he is somewhat swarmed. Congrats to Jim. Dave and Jim do the Ask the Podcast Coach show every Saturday Morning at 10:30 AM EST at www.askthepodcastcoach.com/live

                    Jim's show for his job are at Http://coaching.gallup.com

                    Jim also is the man behind the Average Guy Network

                    Dave Jackson Talking Podcast Success

                    I appeared on episode 19 of the Podcast Fiend show talking podcast success

                    Check it out at http://podcastfiend.com/show/19

                    Podcast Questions?

                    Call them in 888-563-3228

                    Get Podcast Consulting

                    Find an available time at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Get the Show Notes Delivered To You

                    www.scoolofpodcasting.com/newsletter

                    ]]>11bdf01caf271fe1ce741a5c9ed040e1Mon, 12 Sep 2016 12:31:18 -040039:46falsefull531531Content You Can't Get Any Place Else with Jennifer BrineyToday I am excited to have Jen Briney of the Congressional Dish podcast on my show. Jen reads legislation that is going through the house of representatives. She then reports back to you with no slant on democratic or republican slant but more of a intelligence vs moron slant. Her passion to help people understand what is happening right under our noses oozes out of her. Any conversation about politics will make it obvious.

                    Congressional Dish is so good that at times I have to turn it off. It makes me upset and I need to punch something. Yes, it's that good. Jen also makes it entertaining. While she tries to restrain herself she does have any cursing replaced with the sound of a golf club. This stops her show from being explicit, and adds just a pinch of comedy to the show to keep it light.

                    Her goal is to have the people use the control we have as American voters and vote these losers out of office. Here are some of the reasons why I wanted Jen on the show.

                    1. Her success didn't happen over night. She's been doing this for four years.
                    2. She hasn't been afraid to try new things and new formats
                    3. She realized that she could do a great show, or go crazy. This meant no reading EVERYTHING. She realizes that if there is no Jen, there is no show. Consequently, the show is better, Jen is better, and we all win.
                    4. She started with horrible equipment, and later upgraded. She didn't let equipment stop her from launching her podcast
                    5. She is a great example of taking control of her show, and doing it the way she wants to do it.
                    6. She shares today that dealing with haters takes long term vision. It's also easier said than done.
                    7. She wants to have a paywall where she can do more experimental episodes for her die hard fans without potentially costing her new listeners.
                    8. Her content has lead to getting almost 10,000 downloads per episode - and she's just now starting to promote the show.
                    
                    

                    We talk a little politics and play a clip that Dave found very funny. As Jen explained it, we all have buttons that can be pushed. A listener wrote to the show and began telling Jen how she could grow the show to a much bigger audience if she would work on "her tone." Well this is something she heard growing up and set her off. She grabbed a microphone and off she went. She liked the raw emotion of the clip and got a lot of support from her audience (When Dave did this he almost got sued).

                    Check out Congressional Dish at www.congressionaldish.com as we as in iTunes, or download the Congressional Dish iOs App as well as Android App

                    Because of Her Podcast

                    Jen has been on the Jessie Ventura show on TV, and she has been asked to speak at Podcast Movement. 

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Please support The Messengers Podcast Documentary. They are sooo close to reaching their crowdfunding goal. Goal chip in a few bucks, and then tell a friend to go to www.supportthemessengers.com

                    Podcast Consulting

                    Need some podcast consulting? Book a session at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule sessions start at 15 minutes.

                    This is show #530 of the School of Podcasting and originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Today I am excited to have Jen Briney of the Congressional Dish podcast on my show. Jen reads legislation that is going through the house of representatives. She then reports back to you with no slant on democratic or republican slant but more of a intelligence vs moron slant. Her passion to help people understand what is happening right under our noses oozes out of her. Any conversation about politics will make it obvious.

                    Congressional Dish is so good that at times I have to turn it off. It makes me upset and I need to punch something. Yes, it's that good. Jen also makes it entertaining. While she tries to restrain herself she does have any cursing replaced with the sound of a golf club. This stops her show from being explicit, and adds just a pinch of comedy to the show to keep it light.

                    Her goal is to have the people use the control we have as American voters and vote these losers out of office. Here are some of the reasons why I wanted Jen on the show.

                    1. Her success didn't happen over night. She's been doing this for four years.
                    2. She hasn't been afraid to try new things and new formats
                    3. She realized that she could do a great show, or go crazy. This meant no reading EVERYTHING. She realizes that if there is no Jen, there is no show. Consequently, the show is better, Jen is better, and we all win.
                    4. She started with horrible equipment, and later upgraded. She didn't let equipment stop her from launching her podcast
                    5. She is a great example of taking control of her show, and doing it the way she wants to do it.
                    6. She shares today that dealing with haters takes long term vision. It's also easier said than done.
                    7. She wants to have a paywall where she can do more experimental episodes for her die hard fans without potentially costing her new listeners.
                    8. Her content has lead to getting almost 10,000 downloads per episode - and she's just now starting to promote the show.
                    
                    

                    We talk a little politics and play a clip that Dave found very funny. As Jen explained it, we all have buttons that can be pushed. A listener wrote to the show and began telling Jen how she could grow the show to a much bigger audience if she would work on "her tone." Well this is something she heard growing up and set her off. She grabbed a microphone and off she went. She liked the raw emotion of the clip and got a lot of support from her audience (When Dave did this he almost got sued).

                    Check out Congressional Dish at www.congressionaldish.com as we as in iTunes, or download the Congressional Dish iOs App as well as Android App

                    Because of Her Podcast

                    Jen has been on the Jessie Ventura show on TV, and she has been asked to speak at Podcast Movement. 

                    Mentioned In This Show

                    Please support The Messengers Podcast Documentary. They are sooo close to reaching their crowdfunding goal. Goal chip in a few bucks, and then tell a friend to go to www.supportthemessengers.com

                    Podcast Consulting

                    Need some podcast consulting? Book a session at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule sessions start at 15 minutes.

                    This is show #530 of the School of Podcasting and originated at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>3f1ec2d60dcf5c621e8b608a9bac38a9Mon, 05 Sep 2016 04:00:00 -040055:35falsefull530530Keep Your Audience By Losing the JargonI can handle some people explaining their strategies of launching a podcast, but there are some things that are just blatantly WRONG. Here are a couple that get my goat.

                    Episodes Get Downloaded When People Subscribe

                    If you simply launch with only one episode on your first day, and someone subscribes to your podcast, then you only get one download. BUT, if you launch with five episodes and they subscribe, then you get five downloads, which will help to raise your rankings within iTunes.

                    This is not true, and easy to test. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe and see if my back catalog automatically downloads.

                    You Only Get 8 Weeks to be in New and Noteworthy

                    Podcasts based on TV shows go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time

                    50+ Honest Reviews Will Get You Into New and Noteworthy

                    Nope. It's subscribers that really count. Not that reviews don't mean anything, but subscribers appear to carry more weight. Also boosting people to the top of the charts before they have found their own voice doesn't work.

                    Case in point Philip Phillips.

                    Who?

                    Exactly (season 11 winner of American Idol).

                    They talk about generating buzz, and getting people to talk about your show. You want to do this every week you are podcasting. You want to bring value on a consistent basis.

                    Here is a video that explains why I know these are not true

                    https://youtu.be/gp1T4aj3ucw

                    Rob Walch at Podcast Movement said the following things about New and Noteworthy
                    • His KC Startup podcast was featured (front page) of iTunes and saw a bump of about 300
                    • His son's podcast Porter's podcast saw a bump of about 1000
                    • He said a front page listing will get a bump of anywhere from 200-a couple thousand.
                    • Podcasters who game the system to be #2 in the Education category and rarely got over 200 downloads per episode (most were around 100ish).
                    
                    

                    The sad thing is people are never launching because they can't get the recommended number of podcasts (3,5,8, 30) ready to launch. Just launch.

                    Losing Your Audience in Jargon and Inside Jokes

                    We are all too close to the trees to see the forest and depending on who you audience is, we need to remember that we get new listeners all the time. When we start using jargon (words that only people with experience in you field, or potentially an inside joke ) you can leave them confused. This makes them feel like an outsider, and potentially tune out. Recently on an episode of the Podcast Review show both myself and my co-host Erik K. Johnson were lost in the hosts use of big words and inside jargon. Now, maybe we aren't their target audience but it really took away from the experience. 

                    Being a person who grew up in the church Christian people who are trying to reach the world when they start spouting things like "Lion of Judah, Bathed in Blood, Alpha and Omega, evangelical, Holy Ghost, born again, unspoken prayer requests (which just means someone in my family messed up again). Be a "Proverbs 31 woman". The list goes on. 

                    I asked my buddy Cale Nelson from HamRadio360 to come in and share some jargon. 

                    Tascam US-32 

                    Tascam MiNiSTUDIO Personal US-32 Audio Interface for Online Broadcasts is a brand new interface for podcasters who are looking to broadcast live and have the ability to mix in (up to) three sounds. There is also the ability to add effects. Most of the effects are pointless (make your voice deeper, higher, reverb, echo, distortion). 

                    This is kind of exciting as this particular 

                    https://www.bhphotovideo.com/c/product/1263856-REG/tascam_ministudio_personal_us_32.html/BI/5223/KBID/5977

                    Mentioned On This Episode

                    Podcasters Roundtable Round 76 State of Live Streaming

                    Hamradio360.com

                    Black List Exposed

                    Milaminthemiddle.com

                    Book a Podcast Coaching Call With Dave Jackson

                    Sessions start at 15 minutes and go up. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule for availability

                     

                    ]]>I can handle some people explaining their strategies of launching a podcast, but there are some things that are just blatantly WRONG. Here are a couple that get my goat.

                    Episodes Get Downloaded When People Subscribe

                    If you simply launch with only one episode on your first day, and someone subscribes to your podcast, then you only get one download. BUT, if you launch with five episodes and they subscribe, then you get five downloads, which will help to raise your rankings within iTunes.

                    This is not true, and easy to test. Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe and see if my back catalog automatically downloads.

                    You Only Get 8 Weeks to be in New and Noteworthy

                    Podcasts based on TV shows go in and out of New and Noteworthy all the time

                    50+ Honest Reviews Will Get You Into New and Noteworthy

                    Nope. It's subscribers that really count. Not that reviews don't mean anything, but subscribers appear to carry more weight. Also boosting people to the top of the charts before they have found their own voice doesn't work.

                    Case in point Philip Phillips.

                    Who?

                    Exactly (season 11 winner of American Idol).

                    They talk about generating buzz, and getting people to talk about your show. You want to do this every week you are podcasting. You want to bring value on a consistent basis.

                    Here is a video that explains why I know these are not true

                    https://youtu.be/gp1T4aj3ucw

                    Rob Walch at Podcast Movement said the following things about New and Noteworthy
                    • His KC Startup podcast was featured (front page) of iTunes and saw a bump of about 300
                    • His son's podcast Porter's podcast saw a bump of about 1000
                    • He said a front page listing will get a bump of anywhere from 200-a couple thousand.
                    • Podcasters who game the system to be #2 in the Education category and rarely got over 200 downloads per episode (most were around 100ish).
                    
                    

                    The sad thing is people are never launching because they can't get the recommended number of podcasts (3,5,8, 30) ready to launch. Just launch.

                    Losing Your Audience in Jargon and Inside Jokes

                    We are all too close to the trees to see the forest and depending on who you audience is, we need to remember that we get new listeners all the time. When we start using jargon (words that only people with experience in you field, or potentially an inside joke ) you can leave them confused. This makes them feel like an outsider, and potentially tune out. Recently on an episode of the Podcast Review show both myself and my co-host Erik K. Johnson were lost in the hosts use of big words and inside jargon. Now, maybe we aren't their target audience but it really took away from the experience. 

                    Being a person who grew up in the church Christian people who are trying to reach the world when they start spouting things like "Lion of Judah, Bathed in Blood, Alpha and Omega, evangelical, Holy Ghost, born again, unspoken prayer requests (which just means someone in my family messed up again). Be a "Proverbs 31 woman". The list goes on. 

                    I asked my buddy Cale Nelson from HamRadio360 to come in and share some jargon. 

                    Tascam US-32 

                    Tascam MiNiSTUDIO Personal US-32 Audio Interface for Online Broadcasts is a brand new interface for podcasters who are looking to broadcast live and have the ability to mix in (up to) three sounds. There is also the ability to add effects. Most of the effects are pointless (make your voice deeper, higher, reverb, echo, distortion). 

                    This is kind of exciting as this particular 

                    https://www.bhphotovideo.com/c/product/1263856-REG/tascam_ministudio_personal_us_32.html/BI/5223/KBID/5977

                    Mentioned On This Episode

                    Podcasters Roundtable Round 76 State of Live Streaming

                    Hamradio360.com

                    Black List Exposed

                    Milaminthemiddle.com

                    Book a Podcast Coaching Call With Dave Jackson

                    Sessions start at 15 minutes and go up. See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule for availability

                     

                    ]]>8c18c441f8547929ab045583b1b7ac9aMon, 29 Aug 2016 04:00:00 -040039:17falsefull529529Podcast Q & A From Podcast MovementHow Do I Grow My Audience?
                    • Know Who Your Audience Is
                    • Know What They Want
                    • Go Where They Are
                    • Make Friends With Them and Bring Value to Your Conversations
                    • Tell them About Your Show
                    • Make it Is To Find, Share, and Remember
                    
                    

                    How Long Should My Podcast Be?

                    • Don't do the "Dave Jackson Power Hour" if you only have 18 minutes of content.
                    • There is no such thing as too long , only too boring (Valeria Geller - Beyond Powerful Radio)
                    
                    

                    How Do You Handle Headlines When You Have Multiple Topics in a Show?

                    • For me, I've just been taking the topic that I think reached my audience the best and use that as the "Main" Headline
                    
                    

                    Do I Have Any Tips For Doing a Live Show?

                    • If you're worried about looking stupid don't go live
                    • I use firetalk.com to stream live.
                    • Realize you will have people who want to ruin you show.
                    • You MIGHT get 5% of your audience live.
                    • Live is addicting because it's instant feedback
                    • If you are looking for your audience to provide the content, remember when you start you don't have an audience.
                    
                    

                    Should I put My Face Out There?

                    • If you are the brand it might be a good idea
                    • I might think twice if I was a woman as guys are creepy
                    
                    

                    What Do You Think About Regional Podcast?

                    • I would love to start a local podcast
                    • I think getting local advertisers would be easy
                    
                    

                    What is the Biggest Mistake When it Comes to Making Content?

                    • Guessing What Your Audience Wants
                    • Including personal family details
                    • You need to know WHY you are doing your podcast. You can talk about what your audience, but if that topic doesn't line up with your goal it could cause issues.
                    
                    

                    What Are the Beginning Stages of Podcasting Like - What Can I expect?

                    • You can answer every email, every comment, every tweet
                    • You are "the host" and that carries weight when you reach out to your audience
                    • 50% of people get more than 150ish downloads and 50% get more.
                    • The average is around 2000.
                    • Mentioned The 27 Steps to start a Podcast
                    
                    

                    What I Started a Podcast About Topic A, and Your Audience Wants to Hear About Topic B?

                    • If you want to talk about that subject, and that topic aligns with your goal then follow your audience
                    • If the topic is something you DON'T Want to talk about then don't. It will come through to your audience, and if you're not excited about the subject it will come through.
                    • When you try to do something that is not yourself it is hard, and you will start dreading creating your podcast.
                    
                    

                    I'm an Accountant, and sometimes People Don't Want To Hear What They Need to Hear...

                    • Not everyone can handle the truth.
                    • Those people who like you will like you, and those that don't won't.
                    • When delivering not so great information back it up with your research,  and facts that you are using to shape your opinion.
                    
                    

                    How Do I Come Back After a Long Hiatus?

                    • The same way you started. Know what your audience wants, and press record.
                    • Don't start off your show with an apology.
                    
                    Troubleshooting Your Podcast Sound - Separate Your Gear Into Pieces

                    I have not been happy with my sound for the last few months. I seemed to pick up some hiss along the way. I went direct into my Zoom H5 recorder and the his was reduced. I then knew it was something in the mixer. From there tried using a different channel (it didn't fix it). I then switched the cabled from going to the 1/4" out of my Behringer Xeynx 1832 mixer (into the line in of the recorder) to the XLR out of the mixer into the xlr in of m mixer.

                    I'm going to be slimming down my mixer as I don't need anything that beefy anymore (I used a big chunk of it when I have the live phone call in show).

                    What is it Like To Have a Film Crew Come to Your House

                    The crew from the Messengers Documentary came to my apartment to interview me. It was pretty crazy. The crew is so professional. They hit a snag when their flight got delayed, but they came through running on fumes. These guys have full time jobs and are fitting this movie into their schedule by (more or less) not sleeping at all. They got done filming here and drove to Kansas City to do more filming before flying back home to Florida. Amazing group of guys.

                    Support the documentary at www.supportthemessengers.com

                    I also go to hang out with Angelo from blubrry.com and Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to podcast. At the North East Ohio Podcasters Meetup the crew showed off some footage and I got to me Scott Sykora from the Beardcaster. Scott does a podcast about professional competitive "bearding". I have got to go checkout a competition they sound fascinating.

                    Upcoming Speaking Gigs

                    I will be speaking at Podcast Mid Atlantic (go to www.podcastmidatlantic.com/sop to save $10).

                    DC Podfest in November 4-5

                    I will also be speaking at Podfest in Florida in February 2017.  I will be having a meetup at Podfest.

                    Need Podcast Consulting?

                    Hire Dave for podcast consulting by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule sessions lengths can be as short as 15 minutes (great if you have just a few questions). 

                    This episode 528 appeared first at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/528

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    www.podcastgeargroup.org

                    Beyond Powerful Radio Book by Valerie Geller

                    Free Book at Audible.com

                     

                     

                     

                    ]]>How Do I Grow My Audience?
                    • Know Who Your Audience Is
                    • Know What They Want
                    • Go Where They Are
                    • Make Friends With Them and Bring Value to Your Conversations
                    • Tell them About Your Show
                    • Make it Is To Find, Share, and Remember
                    
                    

                    How Long Should My Podcast Be?

                    • Don't do the "Dave Jackson Power Hour" if you only have 18 minutes of content.
                    • There is no such thing as too long , only too boring (Valeria Geller - Beyond Powerful Radio)
                    
                    

                    How Do You Handle Headlines When You Have Multiple Topics in a Show?

                    • For me, I've just been taking the topic that I think reached my audience the best and use that as the "Main" Headline
                    
                    

                    Do I Have Any Tips For Doing a Live Show?

                    • If you're worried about looking stupid don't go live
                    • I use firetalk.com to stream live.
                    • Realize you will have people who want to ruin you show.
                    • You MIGHT get 5% of your audience live.
                    • Live is addicting because it's instant feedback
                    • If you are looking for your audience to provide the content, remember when you start you don't have an audience.
                    
                    

                    Should I put My Face Out There?

                    • If you are the brand it might be a good idea
                    • I might think twice if I was a woman as guys are creepy
                    
                    

                    What Do You Think About Regional Podcast?

                    • I would love to start a local podcast
                    • I think getting local advertisers would be easy
                    
                    

                    What is the Biggest Mistake When it Comes to Making Content?

                    • Guessing What Your Audience Wants
                    • Including personal family details
                    • You need to know WHY you are doing your podcast. You can talk about what your audience, but if that topic doesn't line up with your goal it could cause issues.
                    
                    

                    What Are the Beginning Stages of Podcasting Like - What Can I expect?

                    • You can answer every email, every comment, every tweet
                    • You are "the host" and that carries weight when you reach out to your audience
                    • 50% of people get more than 150ish downloads and 50% get more.
                    • The average is around 2000.
                    • Mentioned The 27 Steps to start a Podcast
                    
                    

                    What I Started a Podcast About Topic A, and Your Audience Wants to Hear About Topic B?

                    • If you want to talk about that subject, and that topic aligns with your goal then follow your audience
                    • If the topic is something you DON'T Want to talk about then don't. It will come through to your audience, and if you're not excited about the subject it will come through.
                    • When you try to do something that is not yourself it is hard, and you will start dreading creating your podcast.
                    
                    

                    I'm an Accountant, and sometimes People Don't Want To Hear What They Need to Hear...

                    • Not everyone can handle the truth.
                    • Those people who like you will like you, and those that don't won't.
                    • When delivering not so great information back it up with your research,  and facts that you are using to shape your opinion.
                    
                    

                    How Do I Come Back After a Long Hiatus?

                    • The same way you started. Know what your audience wants, and press record.
                    • Don't start off your show with an apology.
                    
                    Troubleshooting Your Podcast Sound - Separate Your Gear Into Pieces

                    I have not been happy with my sound for the last few months. I seemed to pick up some hiss along the way. I went direct into my Zoom H5 recorder and the his was reduced. I then knew it was something in the mixer. From there tried using a different channel (it didn't fix it). I then switched the cabled from going to the 1/4" out of my Behringer Xeynx 1832 mixer (into the line in of the recorder) to the XLR out of the mixer into the xlr in of m mixer.

                    I'm going to be slimming down my mixer as I don't need anything that beefy anymore (I used a big chunk of it when I have the live phone call in show).

                    What is it Like To Have a Film Crew Come to Your House

                    The crew from the Messengers Documentary came to my apartment to interview me. It was pretty crazy. The crew is so professional. They hit a snag when their flight got delayed, but they came through running on fumes. These guys have full time jobs and are fitting this movie into their schedule by (more or less) not sleeping at all. They got done filming here and drove to Kansas City to do more filming before flying back home to Florida. Amazing group of guys.

                    Support the documentary at www.supportthemessengers.com

                    I also go to hang out with Angelo from blubrry.com and Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to podcast. At the North East Ohio Podcasters Meetup the crew showed off some footage and I got to me Scott Sykora from the Beardcaster. Scott does a podcast about professional competitive "bearding". I have got to go checkout a competition they sound fascinating.

                    Upcoming Speaking Gigs

                    I will be speaking at Podcast Mid Atlantic (go to www.podcastmidatlantic.com/sop to save $10).

                    DC Podfest in November 4-5

                    I will also be speaking at Podfest in Florida in February 2017.  I will be having a meetup at Podfest.

                    Need Podcast Consulting?

                    Hire Dave for podcast consulting by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule sessions lengths can be as short as 15 minutes (great if you have just a few questions). 

                    This episode 528 appeared first at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/528

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    www.podcastgeargroup.org

                    Beyond Powerful Radio Book by Valerie Geller

                    Free Book at Audible.com

                     

                     

                     

                    ]]>1ee48fc463c50cf8a0200f4494edef2fMon, 22 Aug 2016 04:00:00 -040043:13falsefull528528What Podcasters Can Learn From Geese, Ringo Star, and Michael PhelpsToday shares his thought on Podcamp Pittsburgh, the death of blab.im, and what geese, Ringo Star, and Michael Phelps can teach podcasters.

                    Comments 888-563-3228

                    The Messengers Are Coming!

                    If you live within driving distance of Akron, Ohio you might want to make a trip this Saturday the 20th of August as the Film Crew of The Messengers (a documentary about podcasting) will be joining our Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup group from 3-4:30. They are going to share their story, some cool footage, and film out meeting as well. For more information go to www.neohiopodcasters.com If you haven't heard the behind the scenes podcast about the making of the movie, check out www.themessengersdoc.com/podcast

                    Here is a recent write up about the podcast and movie (and it's not done yet).

                    Attention Podcasters' Hangout Family...

                    I'd like to take a moment and recognize Dave Jackson from The School of Podcasting for spending what has to be an ENORMOUS amount of time editing and producing a podcast that highlights "behind the scenes" for an upcoming film called The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary.

                    The film is the brainchild of Executive Producer Chris Krimitsos and I also serve as Executive Producer myself. This film has taken us and the crew - Director , D.P. Willie L. Harper, and Lead Film Editor Saulo Zayas - literally into other countries to highlight the stories of how podcasters have used this medium to make a MAJOR impact in their communities and/or through their audience.

                    This episode chronicles the back-story of our experience flying down to Guatemala to support and film mobile podcaster Shawn Smith's Now Is The Time Mission, where the organization serves villages living in extreme poverty through building and installing high efficiency stoves, laying down concrete floors inside homes, donating *tremendous* amounts of clothing, school supplies and other goods as well as lead a daily VBS program for all the kids of the villages they serve in... Shawn has been doing this every single year for over TEN years.

                    At the end of each day, Shawn sits down to interview the volunteers about their experience and as you can imagine, these conversations get raw and emotional. These podcast episodes are then uploaded and shared with loved ones back home.

                    This episode of our podcast for The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary highlights this trip and some our own experiences -- and emotions.

                    I hope you take the time to listen to it and enjoy it, and also enjoy the level of production podcasting PRO Dave Jackson has poured into this. Thanks Dave, you are freaking amazingly talented.

                    Join the email list and get access to behind the scenes footage by going to www.themessengersdoc.com

                    Podcamp Pittsburgh

                    In a slide show of the previous 11 years of Podcamp Pittsburgh, you could see where this event was well attended in the past. This year they had approximately 50 people. NOW HOLD ON, before you judging things just by numbers. For me, my goal is to find individuals who want to launch a podcast. I started off my opening keynote speech asking the intimate crowd how many of them already had podcasts. Very few hands went up. When I asked how many people didn't have a podcast yet, TONS of hands went up. So while this was an intimate group, it was a perfect group for me.

                    So judging things by numbers only goes back to people looking at producers who love to share their huge numbers. They might think, "I wish I had those numbers" but what you don't know is how engaged that audience is. While there is no spam in podcasting, some people may not be that engaged with the host. For example, I get very little interaction from my Weekly Web Tools podcast. I love the show, and I love my listeners, but it's a fact that my School of Podcasting Audience is more engaged than the Weekly Web Tools audience.

                    As always I go to events to network with some folks, Saturday night I got to meet some very cool people. I also got to hang out with some of my awesome Libsyn people (Elsie Escobar from Shepodcasts.com and Krystal O'Connor the mind and voice behind all the libsyn tutorials.

                    Sometimes Different is Better Than Better

                    In talking with someone at Podcamp Pittsburgh, they asked how not to sound monotonous. The person explained how they did a show where they asked the same questions to each guest. Now I could be wrong, but my knee-jerk reaction was to think that this person might be trying to follow in the steps of John Lee Dumas (who wouldn't? He makes millions of dollars with his podcast), but (and I've said this before) you will never out "John Lee Dumas the actual John Lee Dumas." You see, it comes to him naturally.

                    I live in an apartment complex with a few lakes. Because of the lakes and the lovely surroundings, we have hundreds of geese. I see them all the time as I walk around my neighborhood getting some exercise. Last week I saw a goose where it looked like they ran out of black paint when they were painting his head. Typically a goose's head is black, with some white coming up from their neck. This goose looked like his head was white, and someone had sprinkled some black on his head (instead of the other way around). I don't know if the geese do this on purpose, but this goose is also separated from the rest of the geese by about 10 feet. When I ran into tonight, they were all by the lake; he was 30 feet away walking down the sidewalk.

                    Now I see these geese every day. They all look identical. I could see the same goose day after day, and I wouldn't know it because they all look the same.

                    That goose with the different paint job may be thinking to itself, "I wish I had more black on my head. I don't look like the other geese. I'm ugly. I stand out. "

                    My point is because this goose is different and it DOES stand out. Embrace your uniqueness. There may another goose in that flock that can fly better, honk louder, and swim faster and I would never know because it looks like all the other geese. I do not notice them. Sure they may be "better" geese, but I don't remember them. The goose with the different paint job I will remember.

                    I have one more example. Ringo Starr is probably one of the most famous drummers of all time. He has a specific style. These are due to a couple of things. One, he was born left handed but his Grandmother "made him" right handed. He still plays the drums with his primarily with his left hand. Meanwhile he plays drums that are designed for a right handed person. He also plays (as he describes it) with his "shoulders" and this often causes his snare drum to be just a shade late on hitting the beat. Many people say they can tell when he is behind the drums because his "wrong" style of playing delivers a unique style. In Ringo's case, different is better.

                    So you may be thinking, I'm not like the other podcasters. I can't publish a daily show, I don't have a Heil PR40, I can't, I don't, etc. To this I say, It's not the tech. If you have nothing to say but have a great microphone, it won't matter.

                    For the record, when John started HE looked DIFFERENT. Nobody had done a daily show for entrepreneurs.

                    Michael Phelps Competition

                    I didn't watch much of the Rio Olympics, but what I saw was very inspirational. Michael Phelps is the best swimmer of all time. The media was preparing for his final swim meets, and they were talking about who he would be up against. Different athletes were coming from different countries with different ages and speeds. These were Michael's competition. This was when I thought about swimming. It's not like his competition is in his lane blocking him from swimming. They weren't going to be grabbing his arms, or legs. The only person Michael Phelps had to beat was Michael Phelps.

                    Podcasting is very much the same way. You are only as good as you last episode (for the most part), and we shouldn't shouldn't measure ourselves against other podcasters. We never have the full story, of what is going on behind the scenes of someone's podcast success. Obsessing over other podcaster's success takes your focus off your audience.

                    Blab.im is Dead

                    Here are some comments from their farewell letter

                    We took a hackathon project that we built in 3 weeks and grew it from 0 users to → 3.9 million users in less than one year.

                    The average daily user spent over 65 minutes per day on Blab

                    The problem? According to their farewell letter, "Of the 3.9 million total users, only 10% (~400,000) came back on a regular basis." This is really stupid part of this statement is they provided a download link to the audio and video. People then took these files and put them on YouTube, and their Media hosts like Libsyn (use the promo code sopfree to get a free month).

                    They also said, "Because the off-the-cuff, unpredictable nature of live streams make for terrible replays." You mean average untrained people are not masters of improv entertainment?

                    They said, "But the majority of usage came from everyday people “just hanging out”. They weren’t making content; they were making friends." The best ‘content creators’ used it ~once a week, for ~2 hours. The people who were hanging out with friends used it 5–6 hours per day, every day. My team is here...]]>Today shares his thought on Podcamp Pittsburgh, the death of blab.im, and what geese, Ringo Star, and Michael Phelps can teach podcasters.

                    Comments 888-563-3228

                    The Messengers Are Coming!

                    If you live within driving distance of Akron, Ohio you might want to make a trip this Saturday the 20th of August as the Film Crew of The Messengers (a documentary about podcasting) will be joining our Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup group from 3-4:30. They are going to share their story, some cool footage, and film out meeting as well. For more information go to www.neohiopodcasters.com If you haven't heard the behind the scenes podcast about the making of the movie, check out www.themessengersdoc.com/podcast

                    Here is a recent write up about the podcast and movie (and it's not done yet).

                    Attention Podcasters' Hangout Family...

                    I'd like to take a moment and recognize Dave Jackson from The School of Podcasting for spending what has to be an ENORMOUS amount of time editing and producing a podcast that highlights "behind the scenes" for an upcoming film called The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary.

                    The film is the brainchild of Executive Producer Chris Krimitsos and I also serve as Executive Producer myself. This film has taken us and the crew - Director , D.P. Willie L. Harper, and Lead Film Editor Saulo Zayas - literally into other countries to highlight the stories of how podcasters have used this medium to make a MAJOR impact in their communities and/or through their audience.

                    This episode chronicles the back-story of our experience flying down to Guatemala to support and film mobile podcaster Shawn Smith's Now Is The Time Mission, where the organization serves villages living in extreme poverty through building and installing high efficiency stoves, laying down concrete floors inside homes, donating *tremendous* amounts of clothing, school supplies and other goods as well as lead a daily VBS program for all the kids of the villages they serve in... Shawn has been doing this every single year for over TEN years.

                    At the end of each day, Shawn sits down to interview the volunteers about their experience and as you can imagine, these conversations get raw and emotional. These podcast episodes are then uploaded and shared with loved ones back home.

                    This episode of our podcast for The Messengers: A Podcast Documentary highlights this trip and some our own experiences -- and emotions.

                    I hope you take the time to listen to it and enjoy it, and also enjoy the level of production podcasting PRO Dave Jackson has poured into this. Thanks Dave, you are freaking amazingly talented.

                    Join the email list and get access to behind the scenes footage by going to www.themessengersdoc.com

                    Podcamp Pittsburgh

                    In a slide show of the previous 11 years of Podcamp Pittsburgh, you could see where this event was well attended in the past. This year they had approximately 50 people. NOW HOLD ON, before you judging things just by numbers. For me, my goal is to find individuals who want to launch a podcast. I started off my opening keynote speech asking the intimate crowd how many of them already had podcasts. Very few hands went up. When I asked how many people didn't have a podcast yet, TONS of hands went up. So while this was an intimate group, it was a perfect group for me.

                    So judging things by numbers only goes back to people looking at producers who love to share their huge numbers. They might think, "I wish I had those numbers" but what you don't know is how engaged that audience is. While there is no spam in podcasting, some people may not be that engaged with the host. For example, I get very little interaction from my Weekly Web Tools podcast. I love the show, and I love my listeners, but it's a fact that my School of Podcasting Audience is more engaged than the Weekly Web Tools audience.

                    As always I go to events to network with some folks, Saturday night I got to meet some very cool people. I also got to hang out with some of my awesome Libsyn people (Elsie Escobar from Shepodcasts.com and Krystal O'Connor the mind and voice behind all the libsyn tutorials.

                    Sometimes Different is Better Than Better

                    In talking with someone at Podcamp Pittsburgh, they asked how not to sound monotonous. The person explained how they did a show where they asked the same questions to each guest. Now I could be wrong, but my knee-jerk reaction was to think that this person might be trying to follow in the steps of John Lee Dumas (who wouldn't? He makes millions of dollars with his podcast), but (and I've said this before) you will never out "John Lee Dumas the actual John Lee Dumas." You see, it comes to him naturally.

                    I live in an apartment complex with a few lakes. Because of the lakes and the lovely surroundings, we have hundreds of geese. I see them all the time as I walk around my neighborhood getting some exercise. Last week I saw a goose where it looked like they ran out of black paint when they were painting his head. Typically a goose's head is black, with some white coming up from their neck. This goose looked like his head was white, and someone had sprinkled some black on his head (instead of the other way around). I don't know if the geese do this on purpose, but this goose is also separated from the rest of the geese by about 10 feet. When I ran into tonight, they were all by the lake; he was 30 feet away walking down the sidewalk.

                    Now I see these geese every day. They all look identical. I could see the same goose day after day, and I wouldn't know it because they all look the same.

                    That goose with the different paint job may be thinking to itself, "I wish I had more black on my head. I don't look like the other geese. I'm ugly. I stand out. "

                    My point is because this goose is different and it DOES stand out. Embrace your uniqueness. There may another goose in that flock that can fly better, honk louder, and swim faster and I would never know because it looks like all the other geese. I do not notice them. Sure they may be "better" geese, but I don't remember them. The goose with the different paint job I will remember.

                    I have one more example. Ringo Starr is probably one of the most famous drummers of all time. He has a specific style. These are due to a couple of things. One, he was born left handed but his Grandmother "made him" right handed. He still plays the drums with his primarily with his left hand. Meanwhile he plays drums that are designed for a right handed person. He also plays (as he describes it) with his "shoulders" and this often causes his snare drum to be just a shade late on hitting the beat. Many people say they can tell when he is behind the drums because his "wrong" style of playing delivers a unique style. In Ringo's case, different is better.

                    So you may be thinking, I'm not like the other podcasters. I can't publish a daily show, I don't have a Heil PR40, I can't, I don't, etc. To this I say, It's not the tech. If you have nothing to say but have a great microphone, it won't matter.

                    For the record, when John started HE looked DIFFERENT. Nobody had done a daily show for entrepreneurs.

                    Michael Phelps Competition

                    I didn't watch much of the Rio Olympics, but what I saw was very inspirational. Michael Phelps is the best swimmer of all time. The media was preparing for his final swim meets, and they were talking about who he would be up against. Different athletes were coming from different countries with different ages and speeds. These were Michael's competition. This was when I thought about swimming. It's not like his competition is in his lane blocking him from swimming. They weren't going to be grabbing his arms, or legs. The only person Michael Phelps had to beat was Michael Phelps.

                    Podcasting is very much the same way. You are only as good as you last episode (for the most part), and we shouldn't shouldn't measure ourselves against other podcasters. We never have the full story, of what is going on behind the scenes of someone's podcast success. Obsessing over other podcaster's success takes your focus off your audience.

                    Blab.im is Dead

                    Here are some comments from their farewell letter

                    We took a hackathon project that we built in 3 weeks and grew it from 0 users to → 3.9 million users in less than one year.

                    The average daily user spent over 65 minutes per day on Blab

                    The problem? According to their farewell letter, "Of the 3.9 million total users, only 10% (~400,000) came back on a regular basis." This is really stupid part of this statement is they provided a download link to the audio and video. People then took these files and put them on YouTube, and their Media hosts like Libsyn (use the promo code sopfree to get a free month).

                    They also said, "Because the off-the-cuff, unpredictable nature of live streams make for terrible replays." You mean average untrained people are not masters of improv entertainment?

                    They said, "But the majority of usage came from everyday people “just hanging out”. They weren’t making content; they were making friends." The best ‘content creators’ used it ~once a week, for ~2 hours. The people who were hanging out with friends used it 5–6 hours per day, every day. My team is here for one reason. To build a product that millions of people will use everyday. Another classic line which I respect is "For us; we would rather fail to try to achieve our mission than succeed at someone else’s mission."

                    Here is another example of someone shooting for perfection (a life changing social network like Facebook), they missed the mark, and ended up on pretty good. Well, that wasn't their goal. To that, I can say I understand, but people hanging out and making friends will be much harder to monetize. In the meantime, I've moved over to firetalk.com and will be playing with Huzza.io

                    Need Some Help With Your Podcast?

                    I'm available for one on one consulting. Check my schedule at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Get Future Episodes the Minute They Are Released

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe today

                    ]]>7ed45ab7afe0ff93d969d62f38b5a330Mon, 15 Aug 2016 04:07:06 -040041:35falsefull527527The Three Things Your Podcast NeedsToday I'm going to share three things your podcast needs to be successful, I'm also going to share some podcasting news, and a product review on a blab.im replacement.

                     

                    Call the Show at 888-563-3228

                    Blubrry Launches Adverting Partner Plan

                    If you are looking for an advertiser for your show, Blubrry was one of the first companies to try to pool a bunch of smaller shows together to attract sponsors. They recently launched a partner plan. Here are a couple of things about the plan

                    It's for someone who is serious about getting a sponsor

                    It's for someone who check's their email and values communication

                    In the past Todd and crew would setup an advertising campaign only to have podcasters pull out at the last minute, or they forgot to let Todd known they had already sold their own spots.

                    For more information go to https://create.blubrry.com/resources/blubrry-podcast-advertising/blubrry-advertising-priority-list/

                    Ask the Podcast Coach Moves to a New Platform

                    After blab.im waved it's middle finger at podcasters, this week we waved back (after last week it just stopped working). The platform I am using is firetalk.com which has the same functionality (give or take) as blab, and its free. You don't get the audio file (just the video). You can always "rip" the audio out of the video file. So far I like it, and will continue to use it going forward.

                    Because of His Podcast Michael O'Connell Got a Book Deal.

                    I was interviewed for a future episode of It's All Journalism by Michael O'Connell and he shared that due to his podcast he now has a book deal about podcasting.

                    The Messengers Documentary Team will be in Akron Ohio on August 2oth

                    The Messengers Documentary team (doing a film on podcasting) will be in Akron Ohio (Cuyahoga Falls to be exact) on August 20th to film me, and to share some video and film the Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup (normally the third Monday of the month, but moved to Saturday this month). The exact location and time will be announced later (more than likely 2-5ish in Cuyahoga Falls - location to be determined very soon). For more information go to www.themessengersdoc.com to check out Dave's podcast about the project go to www.themessengerspodcast.com/podcast

                    Podcast Rewind

                    The Biz Chix Podcast episode 26 had a super frank talk about sex after children. Gentlemen if you want to know what women think and feel about sex, now is you chance it starts at the 27 minute mark. http://bizchix.com/226/

                    Another new show I've been listening to is the Rhoades to Success Podcast with Jessica Rhoades who has great tips on getting and being interviewed.

                    The Three Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing to Do With Microphones, Downloads, or Hosting

                    Today I want to talk about podcast success and the things you need to achieve. Here is the fun part I’m not talking about microphones, downloads, or hosting. While those are ingredients that you need to podcast, without these you are doomed. They are attitude, health, and support.

                    The first thing is your expectations and/or attitude.

                    I have people contact me weekly with dreams of getting into Apple’s New and Noteworthy and “making it big” (whatever that means). Per Rob Walch of Libsyn, fifty percent of podcasters get less than 160 downloads, and fifty percent get above. I feel this is mainly due to the thousand plus podcasts launching every week. They are just starting to build their audience.

                    I come from a training background where if I had twenty students in my class, my hands were going to be full. When you have 160 listeners, that would equal eight classrooms. In the last building I worked in, that would be an entire floor of classrooms filled with people who want to listen to you. People who could consume AM, FM, CD, Sirius, Local and Cable channels, HBO, Netflix, Hulu, Audible, etc. They choose to listen to you.

                    So how do you get your attitude straight?

                    You have to be able to answer the question, “Why are you starting a podcast?” For me, I love to help people. That’s what I worked in training departments for 20+ years. Now, let’s not fool ourselves. I like making money as well. However, when I have someone come to me too scared to launch a podcast, and I later I hear them cry over the phone as they see their podcast in iTunes, it is hard to put a price on that. The other reason you need to know you “Why” is so you can create content that fits in with your goal. If the purpose of your podcast is to position yourself as a leader in your field, then maybe you should use a Q&A format.

                    What if you’re in just to make money. You’re in it to boost sales. Remember when you first start out you don’t have an audience, so if the goal is to convert your audience to sales, the first thing you need to do is focus on getting an audience, and second how to convert them. The length of time it takes to achieve this is why Podcasting is often said to have a slow burn. You have to have an audience before you can sell to your audience.

                    Also, you better be willing to podcast for free, because when you start out, you are. In fact, you’re losing around $30 a month in expenses.

                    The second thing is your health.

                    Certain gurus love to tell you to stay up until three in the morning, get up at 6 and go to work. If you really want it, you will do this. If you don’t do this, well then (LOSER) you don’t really want it right? You just need to dig down deeper. After all, it’s not going to come to you; you have to HUSSLE DOWN and GO GET IT TIGER! No for the record, you do have to do the work, but killing yourself to live is not a great option.

                    I did this for a while. Here is what it produced.

                    A crappy attitude because I constantly felt “behind.” That I wasn’t working hard enough, and that was I was doing wasn’t good enough, and that I need to sacrifice more.

                    A crappy product. I make enough typos when I’m awake, let alone when I’m sleep deprived. I was struggling with energy, and creativity because my body wanted something. It was called sleep. I recently lost 30 lbs. You know one of the key ingredients? Sleep. I now get at least 6, typically 7 hours of sleep a night. WHAT? THAT IS INSANE. No, what it is, is a strategy to be more productive because you’re not doing rookie mistakes because you can’t keep your eyes open. I can focus. You have the attention span of a puppy hopped up on red bull. The other thing it did was mess up my back. Countless time I would wake up at my desk with my head pointing down in some weird position as my body was in some strange position sleeping in a chair. Great, my hustle would now slow me down cause I can’t stand up straight. I gained weight. Why? Because I was BUSY, I had THINGS TO DO, so I would go get some “fast food” and slam my Double Mystery Meat, Fries, and a Coke. Never realizing by the time I drove to the Burger Hut, waited in the drive through, and got home to eat my luke-warm home slop, I could’ve cooked something much more healthy at home. Eating fast food is like pouring the cheapest gas you can find in your car. It doesn’t burn well, and it leaves a residue in your engine. Well, in this case, you body doesn’t know what to do with strange chemistry abortion called fast food that tricks your mind into thinking it’s not full so it can dump enough sugar down you face to light you up like a Christmas tree. You will notice on ingredient labels they don’t put the percentage of sugar contained in that Starbucks (because your morning Late probably has your over your daily limit already). Poor nutrition leads to you getting sick, and tired. Which eventually leads you to be sick and tired of being sick and tired. Now instead of being upbeat, creative, and inspired you are tired, unmotivated, potentially cranky, and/or depressed.

                    Now because you’re tired and cranky (and maybe depressed), you will probably notice your family and friends don’t want to be around you.

                    Being tired, sick, and cranky leads to:

                    The third thing you need to have a successful podcast: Support.

                    When your friends and family (going forward let’s just say family) don’t support your podcasting efforts, it will suck whatever energy you have left in your body. It is often the final nail in the coffin. You can’t demand support. Demanding support often can lead to resentment on the person waiting in the wings. When you FORCE someone to support you, they aren’t supporting you because they believe in you, or they want to. They are supporting you because they HAVE to. If someone puts a gun to my head forces me to say “Soundcloud is the best podcasting platform on the planet” I would do it because I like breathing, but would that really be support?

                    When your family is complaining about the time, money and effort you are putting into your show it creates stress. Stress is not a great fertilizer for creativity. Some people strive under pressure, but many have a hard time concentrating. They can’t “be in the now” because they are too busy waiting for the shoe to drop.

                    So those are the problems. How do you solve them?

                    For Health Do the Following:

                    Batch cook food. For me, I buy a family pack of chicken thighs and dump them into a pressure cooker. I then package them up and put them in the...]]>Today I'm going to share three things your podcast needs to be successful, I'm also going to share some podcasting news, and a product review on a blab.im replacement.

                     

                    Call the Show at 888-563-3228

                    Blubrry Launches Adverting Partner Plan

                    If you are looking for an advertiser for your show, Blubrry was one of the first companies to try to pool a bunch of smaller shows together to attract sponsors. They recently launched a partner plan. Here are a couple of things about the plan

                    It's for someone who is serious about getting a sponsor

                    It's for someone who check's their email and values communication

                    In the past Todd and crew would setup an advertising campaign only to have podcasters pull out at the last minute, or they forgot to let Todd known they had already sold their own spots.

                    For more information go to https://create.blubrry.com/resources/blubrry-podcast-advertising/blubrry-advertising-priority-list/

                    Ask the Podcast Coach Moves to a New Platform

                    After blab.im waved it's middle finger at podcasters, this week we waved back (after last week it just stopped working). The platform I am using is firetalk.com which has the same functionality (give or take) as blab, and its free. You don't get the audio file (just the video). You can always "rip" the audio out of the video file. So far I like it, and will continue to use it going forward.

                    Because of His Podcast Michael O'Connell Got a Book Deal.

                    I was interviewed for a future episode of It's All Journalism by Michael O'Connell and he shared that due to his podcast he now has a book deal about podcasting.

                    The Messengers Documentary Team will be in Akron Ohio on August 2oth

                    The Messengers Documentary team (doing a film on podcasting) will be in Akron Ohio (Cuyahoga Falls to be exact) on August 20th to film me, and to share some video and film the Northeast Ohio Podcasters Meetup (normally the third Monday of the month, but moved to Saturday this month). The exact location and time will be announced later (more than likely 2-5ish in Cuyahoga Falls - location to be determined very soon). For more information go to www.themessengersdoc.com to check out Dave's podcast about the project go to www.themessengerspodcast.com/podcast

                    Podcast Rewind

                    The Biz Chix Podcast episode 26 had a super frank talk about sex after children. Gentlemen if you want to know what women think and feel about sex, now is you chance it starts at the 27 minute mark. http://bizchix.com/226/

                    Another new show I've been listening to is the Rhoades to Success Podcast with Jessica Rhoades who has great tips on getting and being interviewed.

                    The Three Things Your Podcast Needs That Have Nothing to Do With Microphones, Downloads, or Hosting

                    Today I want to talk about podcast success and the things you need to achieve. Here is the fun part I’m not talking about microphones, downloads, or hosting. While those are ingredients that you need to podcast, without these you are doomed. They are attitude, health, and support.

                    The first thing is your expectations and/or attitude.

                    I have people contact me weekly with dreams of getting into Apple’s New and Noteworthy and “making it big” (whatever that means). Per Rob Walch of Libsyn, fifty percent of podcasters get less than 160 downloads, and fifty percent get above. I feel this is mainly due to the thousand plus podcasts launching every week. They are just starting to build their audience.

                    I come from a training background where if I had twenty students in my class, my hands were going to be full. When you have 160 listeners, that would equal eight classrooms. In the last building I worked in, that would be an entire floor of classrooms filled with people who want to listen to you. People who could consume AM, FM, CD, Sirius, Local and Cable channels, HBO, Netflix, Hulu, Audible, etc. They choose to listen to you.

                    So how do you get your attitude straight?

                    You have to be able to answer the question, “Why are you starting a podcast?” For me, I love to help people. That’s what I worked in training departments for 20+ years. Now, let’s not fool ourselves. I like making money as well. However, when I have someone come to me too scared to launch a podcast, and I later I hear them cry over the phone as they see their podcast in iTunes, it is hard to put a price on that. The other reason you need to know you “Why” is so you can create content that fits in with your goal. If the purpose of your podcast is to position yourself as a leader in your field, then maybe you should use a Q&A format.

                    What if you’re in just to make money. You’re in it to boost sales. Remember when you first start out you don’t have an audience, so if the goal is to convert your audience to sales, the first thing you need to do is focus on getting an audience, and second how to convert them. The length of time it takes to achieve this is why Podcasting is often said to have a slow burn. You have to have an audience before you can sell to your audience.

                    Also, you better be willing to podcast for free, because when you start out, you are. In fact, you’re losing around $30 a month in expenses.

                    The second thing is your health.

                    Certain gurus love to tell you to stay up until three in the morning, get up at 6 and go to work. If you really want it, you will do this. If you don’t do this, well then (LOSER) you don’t really want it right? You just need to dig down deeper. After all, it’s not going to come to you; you have to HUSSLE DOWN and GO GET IT TIGER! No for the record, you do have to do the work, but killing yourself to live is not a great option.

                    I did this for a while. Here is what it produced.

                    A crappy attitude because I constantly felt “behind.” That I wasn’t working hard enough, and that was I was doing wasn’t good enough, and that I need to sacrifice more.

                    A crappy product. I make enough typos when I’m awake, let alone when I’m sleep deprived. I was struggling with energy, and creativity because my body wanted something. It was called sleep. I recently lost 30 lbs. You know one of the key ingredients? Sleep. I now get at least 6, typically 7 hours of sleep a night. WHAT? THAT IS INSANE. No, what it is, is a strategy to be more productive because you’re not doing rookie mistakes because you can’t keep your eyes open. I can focus. You have the attention span of a puppy hopped up on red bull. The other thing it did was mess up my back. Countless time I would wake up at my desk with my head pointing down in some weird position as my body was in some strange position sleeping in a chair. Great, my hustle would now slow me down cause I can’t stand up straight. I gained weight. Why? Because I was BUSY, I had THINGS TO DO, so I would go get some “fast food” and slam my Double Mystery Meat, Fries, and a Coke. Never realizing by the time I drove to the Burger Hut, waited in the drive through, and got home to eat my luke-warm home slop, I could’ve cooked something much more healthy at home. Eating fast food is like pouring the cheapest gas you can find in your car. It doesn’t burn well, and it leaves a residue in your engine. Well, in this case, you body doesn’t know what to do with strange chemistry abortion called fast food that tricks your mind into thinking it’s not full so it can dump enough sugar down you face to light you up like a Christmas tree. You will notice on ingredient labels they don’t put the percentage of sugar contained in that Starbucks (because your morning Late probably has your over your daily limit already). Poor nutrition leads to you getting sick, and tired. Which eventually leads you to be sick and tired of being sick and tired. Now instead of being upbeat, creative, and inspired you are tired, unmotivated, potentially cranky, and/or depressed.

                    Now because you’re tired and cranky (and maybe depressed), you will probably notice your family and friends don’t want to be around you.

                    Being tired, sick, and cranky leads to:

                    The third thing you need to have a successful podcast: Support.

                    When your friends and family (going forward let’s just say family) don’t support your podcasting efforts, it will suck whatever energy you have left in your body. It is often the final nail in the coffin. You can’t demand support. Demanding support often can lead to resentment on the person waiting in the wings. When you FORCE someone to support you, they aren’t supporting you because they believe in you, or they want to. They are supporting you because they HAVE to. If someone puts a gun to my head forces me to say “Soundcloud is the best podcasting platform on the planet” I would do it because I like breathing, but would that really be support?

                    When your family is complaining about the time, money and effort you are putting into your show it creates stress. Stress is not a great fertilizer for creativity. Some people strive under pressure, but many have a hard time concentrating. They can’t “be in the now” because they are too busy waiting for the shoe to drop.

                    So those are the problems. How do you solve them?

                    For Health Do the Following:

                    Batch cook food. For me, I buy a family pack of chicken thighs and dump them into a pressure cooker. I then package them up and put them in the refrigerator. When I need a quick snack, I throw them into the microwave, and while I’m eating the chicken I microwave a vegetable, and I’m done in 10 minutes. It’s true fast food. The pressure cooker requires no overseeing.

                    For me, I look at what time I’m getting up in the morning. For me, that is 7:30 AM as I have to be at work by 8:30. If I want seven hours sleep, I have to be in bed by 12:30.

                    I know I need to exercise for at least 30 minutes that means takes me back to 12:00.

                    Now Let’s Take This Thought into the Support Area

                    I need to eat and spend some time with my family. Let’s call that two hours. That would be 10 PM. If I arrive home at 6 PM, I would have FOUR FREE HOURS. Now my family isn’t going to want to eat at 10 PM. So from 6-8PM I enjoy my family. I then spend 30 minutes exercising. It’s not 8:30. I have three hours and thirty minutes to work on my podcast, 30 minutes to brush my teeth and say goodnight.

                    Realize something in this scenario. Your family gets 2.5 hours; your podcast got three hours and thirty minutes. If you did this every day, your family is going to feel short-changed.

                    Setting a schedule is also where you need to go back and set expectations with your family. Can you pull this plan off two times a week (giving you potentially 6 hours of podcasting time)? Are they willing to support this? If not, what ar they willing to support? It may turn out that you might want to consider doing a shorter show instead of an hour long show.

                    In the event you make some money with your podcast, give some to your spouse to do whatever they want. Now not only are you benefiting from your podcast but so are they.

                    Make family time just that. Turn your phone off and concentrate. What happens if you run out of time? For me, I have found (unless it’s a deadline of a customer) most items in podcasting don’t have a time limit. The research you wanted to do tonight, can probably wait until tomorrow. That new tool you wanted to play with, can probably wait until tomorrow. 99.9% of whatever you wanted to do will still be there in the morning. I didn’t believe it, but I now can say 100% it is true.

                    Quit the following actions to boost your attitude: Quit looking at other podcasters income and downloads. Much like golf or bowling, in podcasting, you compare yourself to your last game. Realize the gear you have will probably do just fine. Microphone envy leads to people spending money on things they don’t need which leads to spouses resentment. Avoiding resentment leads to people sneaking things into the house. You are developing bad habits. Obsessing over stats. Looking at them does not make them grow. Reach out and network with similar podcasts. They know exactly how you feel. Having someone “In the trenches” with you can help.

                    Here are some tips to help with productivity

                    Used web-based services like Evernote, Onenote, Google Docs, etc. This way if you find yourself trapped somewhere, you can do that research on your phone or tablet. You can spend your lunch hour doing research instead of reading the outdated magazines in the break room.

                    I love todoist.com for keeping track of things with deadlines, and you can easily make items directly from websites (thanks to a browser extension) and from within Gmail.

                    So set your expectations for your podcast, and set the expectations of your family.

                    Protect your health by getting enough sleep, eating the right things, and exercising.

                    Protect your family by giving them the time they need.

                    If you have lots of energy and support, but your attitude is crap, it will hurt you creatively, and you may lose your motivation.

                    If you are motivated but are sick all the time, then don’t have the energy to get behind the mic - even if your family supports you.

                    If you have a great attitude, feel great, but have to deal with an upset family, your podcast may be okay, but your life is spiraling down the drain.

                    Attitude, Health, and Support. Simple, but not easy.

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Planning Your Podcast Course

                    The Podcast Producers Podcast

                    Blubrry Advertiser Partner Program

                    Biz Chix

                    Biz Women Rock

                    Rhoades to Success

                    Shepodcasts.com

                    It's All Journalism

                    The Messengers Documentary

                    The Messengers Podcast

                    Need Help? Schedule A Session Today

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    ]]>b66e0f6c0c7a0150a033da32cd73f38eMon, 08 Aug 2016 04:00:00 -040044:29falsefull526526Reverse Engineering a Driveway MomentDriveway moments are podcasts that have you so captivated that when you get to home instead of going in to be with your family, you sit in the driveway to finish the episode. This week I had such a moment with episode 206 of the RED podcast hosted by David Hooper. I wanted to get Dave on the line to see what went on behind the scenes of this episode.
                    Follow Upon on Troy Heinritz - The Story Isn't Over

                    Troy called me this week (you'll hear the call) to let me know that he has been asked to fly to LA to host a show where he gets to interview the two creators of the television show The Blacklist (Troy does the blacklist exposed). They wanted a "super fan" to interview "the Two Johns" (the creators) about season four. So Troy gets to fly to LA, stay in a hotel, and feel the promotion power Sony Pictures as they promote him on a global level. If you missed Troy's story, you could click here to listen (or subscribe and never miss another show).

                    Great Content Has These Ingredients

                    I tell people that you want your podcast to make people laugh, cry, think, or groan. You want it to educate or entertain (or both). Today we are looking at some of the ingredients that you can use to inspire those results in your audience.

                    Great content:

                    Is content you can't get in other places Is unpredictable - not sure what you’re going to get (as long as its relevant). Is a dialogue, an open discussion. Is educational Is entertaining It’s often well thought out Has relevant personal stories Has a tease to get you engaged to stay or come back. Always Brings Value

                    Beware of Inside Jokes

                    The hurdle I have to get over with this episode is Dave has heard this episode (obviously) and I have heard it, but you haven't (maybe). So I need to give you enough information, so you don't feel left out, but not too much information to be a spoiler.

                    Dave had an automated phone call that pretends to be from the IRS and threatens to throw him in jail. Dave knew this was a scam and turned on his skype recorder and called them back to investigate the situation (you can hear this at www.redpodcast.com/scam) his first attempt kept the person on the line for more than an hour (and he was not happy when he figured out that Dave was playing with him).

                    Eventually, Dave was able to get someone to "put their guard down" and explain their operation (at the risk of getting in trouble). This intimacy was fascinating. Dave wasn't yelling at the worker but just wanted information. It made for a very intriguing episode.

                    Then in true David Hooper fashion, he used the experience as a lesson to learn about growing your business.

                    Episode 206 of the RED Podcast

                    David Hooper has a very wide skill set. He spent many years doing marketing for musicians (at one point managed his own event for musicians). Dave is the author of NUMEROUS books on Amazon. He has been doing his Music Business Radio program on Lightning 100 WRLT in Nashville (and subsequent podcast) where he has interviewed some pretty big names. He recently started shifting his focus to include other types of marketing outside of music. His RED Podcast is NOT another podcast that interviews entrepreneurs about escaping their dreadful lives into the world of six-figure incomes etc., etc. It's not named RED Podcast On Fire. Instead, Dave has a solo show where he uses his life's travels and ties them to lessons you can use to grow your business.

                    Just to make it easy, here is the link to Episode 206 to hear the whole "Scam" call go to www.redpodcast.com/scam

                    In this interview you will hear:

                    How it took multiple calls to get this hard to believe interview.

                    Dave ended up with lots of content, but it would need editing before putting it before his audience.

                    By not judging his guest, the person felt safe to open up and reveal inside information.

                    Dave stuck to his guns and didn't take advertisers that didn't fit his show, or advertisers that wanted to pay him peanuts to get in front of his audience.

                    Dave puts thought into his episode, so there is a theme that lends itself to transitioning from one part of his show to the other.

                    Dave realizes there is a skip button and starts of his show with a tease to keep people tuned in, and includes one at the end to make them come back.

                    The Power of Editing

                    I've been called to produce The Messengers Podcast. The Messengers is a documentary about podcasting. I'm making a podcast about the movie about podcasting (yeah, I know). The difference is it's up to me to stitch together the story of what has been going on (with help from executive producer Chris Krimitsos). When I'm done, I submit the rough draft to Chris. At this point, I've put in lots of hours, and I want it to be done. Chris has always come back with ideas. You know what? They are always good insights. I'm too close to the trees to see the forest.

                    Editing can make a good thing great if you're open to feedback. 

                    Some people do the, "I just hit record and post it. I'm keeping it real." It's podcasting, and you can do what you want. I'm keeping it real by knowing that every word out of my mouth is not gold, and everything can ALWAYS have room for improvement. So I took an hour today and edit this interview. Here is what got cut:

                    A bunch of UMs from me.

                    A tangent that Dave and I took about playing music backward.

                    Dave was explaining how he is starting a new podcast. His new podcast is not out yet.

                    I cut out many things I said that were giving a second example of something that Dave had just said (thus I was creating duplicate content).

                    What Did I Learn From Editing?

                    I did very little prep for this interview. I knew I was just going talk to Dave about his episode and pull the best. In the end, I don't think I did a good job of letting Dave know why I asked him to come on the show.

                    I OFTEN take a very roundabout way to a question. This action happens as I've started talking before fully forming the question in my head.

                    As always, more preparation up front leads to less editing.

                    Mentioned on This Episode

                    Pro Coach Podcast - How to Get More Clients

                    Building a Better Dave - Dave's"Say whatever I want" podcast

                    Support The Messengers Documentary at www.supportthemessengers.com

                    Schedule a Podcast Consultation at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Toastmasters 101

                    School of Laughs

                    Glenn The Geek Episode

                    ]]>Driveway moments are podcasts that have you so captivated that when you get to home instead of going in to be with your family, you sit in the driveway to finish the episode. This week I had such a moment with episode 206 of the RED podcast hosted by David Hooper. I wanted to get Dave on the line to see what went on behind the scenes of this episode.
                    Follow Upon on Troy Heinritz - The Story Isn't Over

                    Troy called me this week (you'll hear the call) to let me know that he has been asked to fly to LA to host a show where he gets to interview the two creators of the television show The Blacklist (Troy does the blacklist exposed). They wanted a "super fan" to interview "the Two Johns" (the creators) about season four. So Troy gets to fly to LA, stay in a hotel, and feel the promotion power Sony Pictures as they promote him on a global level. If you missed Troy's story, you could click here to listen (or subscribe and never miss another show).

                    Great Content Has These Ingredients

                    I tell people that you want your podcast to make people laugh, cry, think, or groan. You want it to educate or entertain (or both). Today we are looking at some of the ingredients that you can use to inspire those results in your audience.

                    Great content:

                    Is content you can't get in other places Is unpredictable - not sure what you’re going to get (as long as its relevant). Is a dialogue, an open discussion. Is educational Is entertaining It’s often well thought out Has relevant personal stories Has a tease to get you engaged to stay or come back. Always Brings Value

                    Beware of Inside Jokes

                    The hurdle I have to get over with this episode is Dave has heard this episode (obviously) and I have heard it, but you haven't (maybe). So I need to give you enough information, so you don't feel left out, but not too much information to be a spoiler.

                    Dave had an automated phone call that pretends to be from the IRS and threatens to throw him in jail. Dave knew this was a scam and turned on his skype recorder and called them back to investigate the situation (you can hear this at www.redpodcast.com/scam) his first attempt kept the person on the line for more than an hour (and he was not happy when he figured out that Dave was playing with him).

                    Eventually, Dave was able to get someone to "put their guard down" and explain their operation (at the risk of getting in trouble). This intimacy was fascinating. Dave wasn't yelling at the worker but just wanted information. It made for a very intriguing episode.

                    Then in true David Hooper fashion, he used the experience as a lesson to learn about growing your business.

                    Episode 206 of the RED Podcast

                    David Hooper has a very wide skill set. He spent many years doing marketing for musicians (at one point managed his own event for musicians). Dave is the author of NUMEROUS books on Amazon. He has been doing his Music Business Radio program on Lightning 100 WRLT in Nashville (and subsequent podcast) where he has interviewed some pretty big names. He recently started shifting his focus to include other types of marketing outside of music. His RED Podcast is NOT another podcast that interviews entrepreneurs about escaping their dreadful lives into the world of six-figure incomes etc., etc. It's not named RED Podcast On Fire. Instead, Dave has a solo show where he uses his life's travels and ties them to lessons you can use to grow your business.

                    Just to make it easy, here is the link to Episode 206 to hear the whole "Scam" call go to www.redpodcast.com/scam

                    In this interview you will hear:

                    How it took multiple calls to get this hard to believe interview.

                    Dave ended up with lots of content, but it would need editing before putting it before his audience.

                    By not judging his guest, the person felt safe to open up and reveal inside information.

                    Dave stuck to his guns and didn't take advertisers that didn't fit his show, or advertisers that wanted to pay him peanuts to get in front of his audience.

                    Dave puts thought into his episode, so there is a theme that lends itself to transitioning from one part of his show to the other.

                    Dave realizes there is a skip button and starts of his show with a tease to keep people tuned in, and includes one at the end to make them come back.

                    The Power of Editing

                    I've been called to produce The Messengers Podcast. The Messengers is a documentary about podcasting. I'm making a podcast about the movie about podcasting (yeah, I know). The difference is it's up to me to stitch together the story of what has been going on (with help from executive producer Chris Krimitsos). When I'm done, I submit the rough draft to Chris. At this point, I've put in lots of hours, and I want it to be done. Chris has always come back with ideas. You know what? They are always good insights. I'm too close to the trees to see the forest.

                    Editing can make a good thing great if you're open to feedback. 

                    Some people do the, "I just hit record and post it. I'm keeping it real." It's podcasting, and you can do what you want. I'm keeping it real by knowing that every word out of my mouth is not gold, and everything can ALWAYS have room for improvement. So I took an hour today and edit this interview. Here is what got cut:

                    A bunch of UMs from me.

                    A tangent that Dave and I took about playing music backward.

                    Dave was explaining how he is starting a new podcast. His new podcast is not out yet.

                    I cut out many things I said that were giving a second example of something that Dave had just said (thus I was creating duplicate content).

                    What Did I Learn From Editing?

                    I did very little prep for this interview. I knew I was just going talk to Dave about his episode and pull the best. In the end, I don't think I did a good job of letting Dave know why I asked him to come on the show.

                    I OFTEN take a very roundabout way to a question. This action happens as I've started talking before fully forming the question in my head.

                    As always, more preparation up front leads to less editing.

                    Mentioned on This Episode

                    Pro Coach Podcast - How to Get More Clients

                    Building a Better Dave - Dave's"Say whatever I want" podcast

                    Support The Messengers Documentary at www.supportthemessengers.com

                    Schedule a Podcast Consultation at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                    Toastmasters 101

                    School of Laughs

                    Glenn The Geek Episode

                    ]]>ca8655b9302aa7c8cece901055fb6698Mon, 01 Aug 2016 04:00:00 -040001:01:20falsefull525525It Started With a Tweet - The Amazing Troy Heinritz StoryComments about the show? Call 888-563-3228

                    At Podcast Movement Kevin Smith said to forget hanging around people who would answer, "Why?" when you said you wanted to try something, and instead hang around people who said, "Why not!" Troy Heinritz is a why not kind of guy. He had spent some time in radio, and start a podcast. In today's episode you will hear how his story has grown and grown, but it started with a single tweet.

                    It started by reaching out to someone on twitter because the guy had a bible verse

                    That lead to ABC PR calling to see how they could help the new podcast

                    Get an IMDB pro account and get all the contact info for people you want to talk down.

                    Through building a relationship with his audience. someone in his audience knew one of the writers.

                    Relationships with PR people lead to interviews with more writers

                    Troy is now seen as the "voice of the audience"

                    He has received free "Shwag" from companies to promote

                    He is having a blast.

                    How he balances Marriage, Children, Work, and Podcasting

                    He co-hosts the Packer's Fan Podcast and just got a sponsor for the show.

                    Check out Troy's Podcasts at:

                    www.theblacklistexposed.com

                    www.packersfanpodcast.com

                    112263

                    Golden Spiral Media

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    www.clammr.com

                    The Blacklist, Season 1 - The Blacklist

                    Wordswag App

                    Spreaker.com (use the coupon sopfree)

                    Noodle.mx Network

                    Podcast Player Survey (two questions - take the survey)

                     

                    Ready to Start a Podcast? 

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Comments about the show? Call 888-563-3228

                    At Podcast Movement Kevin Smith said to forget hanging around people who would answer, "Why?" when you said you wanted to try something, and instead hang around people who said, "Why not!" Troy Heinritz is a why not kind of guy. He had spent some time in radio, and start a podcast. In today's episode you will hear how his story has grown and grown, but it started with a single tweet.

                    It started by reaching out to someone on twitter because the guy had a bible verse

                    That lead to ABC PR calling to see how they could help the new podcast

                    Get an IMDB pro account and get all the contact info for people you want to talk down.

                    Through building a relationship with his audience. someone in his audience knew one of the writers.

                    Relationships with PR people lead to interviews with more writers

                    Troy is now seen as the "voice of the audience"

                    He has received free "Shwag" from companies to promote

                    He is having a blast.

                    How he balances Marriage, Children, Work, and Podcasting

                    He co-hosts the Packer's Fan Podcast and just got a sponsor for the show.

                    Check out Troy's Podcasts at:

                    www.theblacklistexposed.com

                    www.packersfanpodcast.com

                    112263

                    Golden Spiral Media

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    www.clammr.com

                    The Blacklist, Season 1 - The Blacklist

                    Wordswag App

                    Spreaker.com (use the coupon sopfree)

                    Noodle.mx Network

                    Podcast Player Survey (two questions - take the survey)

                     

                    Ready to Start a Podcast? 

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>9d7c70d04d5e798fb410b40a2681f13dMon, 25 Jul 2016 04:00:00 -040001:08:56falsefull524524My First Crack at a Narrative Podcast I recently started a podcast in a narrative fashion about a documentary called the Messengers, as I've never done this style of podcasting before. Here is what I've learned.

                    You have to know what story you are going to tell so you can add some intrigue, inspiration, comedy, etc.

                    You need to catalog everything. The Sooner the better. So if I make a phone call, get audio from a video, I catalog everything.

                    Identify your plot. For my first episode I wanted to tell the story of how and why everyone got involved, with a subplot of some behind the scenes. Then I wanted to build interest in future episodes. Looking back, it might've been better to keep it short and precise.

                    It takes A LOT of time. This is why shows like Reply All have a team of 15 working on their show. Right now, I'm a team of one. The first 20 minute episode took around 4 hours. That is roughly a 12:1 ratio.

                    My tool of choice here is the software Hindenburg Journalist. It's $99, and works on both Mac or PC, and you can drag in a bunch of files, cut them into pieces and then drag and drop them into the order you want them. It also auto levels the audio, and in this case I have all sorts of audio.

                    Get the best audio you can. This is true for every podcast. In my case I had some phone conversations that sounded horrendous next to a skype call. I always judge if a clip is helping the story.

                    Beware of the creep. What I mean by this is as I'm creating an episode about things that have already happened, there are things happening NOW. You have to think through the ears of your audience. They only know what you have given them.

                    I'm reading Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New masters of Radio which I realize is a bit backwards. I should've read it before I started, but sometimes you just got to jump into the pool.

                    When is a Remake Better Than the Original

                    15:15 I saw Ghostbuster this week, and found it very "Meh." It didn't scare me, or make me laugh. It was a shame as there are some really talented people in it. When we try to recreate someone else's magic, it typically doesn't work. I'm sure if we said some old show from the 1920's compared to a show in 1983, I'm not sure of movies that were better than the original. Typically a copy/remake of something isn't as good. With this in mind, don't try to copy someone else's show. Be yourself. Your audience will thank you for it

                    The Only Thing Stopping You - is You

                    18:03 Is this you? You know you're a nice person. You're a good person. You're not perfect, but you always do your best. You have things you are proud of, and things you might wish to forget. Does this sound familiar?

                    I'm going to share something I did this week. I talked at the beginning of the year how 2016 was going to be me getting out of my comfort zone. So I'm going to share a bit about my life, what goes in my head, and how I pushed through, and how you can too. In the end I'm glad I did, and you will be too.

                    Here is some back story.

                    1. I was in training to be a Pastor of a small church. I was brought in to bring in a younger crowd. The church was about 15 years old and over the last 10 years had completely lost touch with their youth at the church. After filling in for the Pastor I was approached to be an assistant pastor with the end goal of becoming the pastor when he retired. I thought about it. Prayed about it, and came on board. To keep this brief, they wanted me to attract younger people doing the exact same thing they had been doing that drove them away. Every idea I had was shot down. They were stuck in the "that's not how we do it" mode, and eventually I got frustrated and I could see how this wasn't going to work. I love those people and rather than lose those relationships, I stepped down. The bottom line was my ego took a hit. My self esteem got a quick uppercut to the jaw.
                    2. When my first wife and I had accepted the fact that we would never have children, she became an alcoholic. Have you ever tried to reason with an alcoholic? It's not fun. Bottom line, I couldn't get her to listen to me. I'm glad to hear that years later after almost driving into someone's home, she is now sober. But here again, I was in a situation where I couldn't get someone's attention, and my words seemed worthless. I'm not looking for a pity party. Hang with me.
                    3. My second wife was a smart, intelligent, funny person, who I later found out, disagreed with about 90% of everything I said. I could see where she wanted out marriage to go.  I could see the path on how to get there, but I couldn't get her to follow me. When I tried to follow her, well, it just didn't work. Here again, I just couldn't get her attention. As this was marriage number two, and I was right back where I started, this really did a number on me. After all the only constant in my marriages is me.
                    
                    

                    We all have these. We all have something to say. But it is the past that often steps in to stop us from doing really good things in the future. Sometimes when these wounds are still fresh, they can really set you back.

                    For me, I now work from home. It's weird. I go days where the only person I talk to is the check out girl at the grocery store. I might go to Bob Evans just to have chit chat with a waitress. It's weird. So I went to meetup.com and signed up for all these groups where people that are around my ago go out and explore the city. I could use some friends. It sounds like a good idea. But I had multiple opportunities to go. I always found other things to go. Here I would love the opportunity to have conversations, and yet I now had all this self doubt in my head. They say the older you get, it takes longer to heal, and that may be the case here.

                    Sometimes you have to baby step it. Sometimes those babies steps can lead to huge outcomes. I am going to relate this to podcasting in just a second. So I decided to go to a restaurant/bar to hear some old friends band. This was an area in Akron, Ohio called Portage lakes. It was a beautiful night to hang by the lake, listen to some friends, and do this thing called relaxing that I hear people talk about.

                    Did I mention that there is a female lead singer in the band?

                    I've known her for years. We always joked how I was married when she was single. She was in a relationship when I was single. Now we are both single.

                    I walked up behind her and said, "I remember you." Well, the reaction I received was amazing. One would've thought I was a returning soldier coming home from the war (inert divorce joke here). She almost cried. It created somewhat of a scene. Her guitar player (another long time friend) had not seen me in years (all of my friends from my home town have not seen me in about 8 years). I turn around and there was another musician that I had actually played with in one of my old bands. Here is the point. There were people there waiting to connect with me (I did get her phone number by the way). They were all glad to see me. All I had to do was push through and make a little effort. As we often say on this show, "Nobody will punch you in the face" (thank you Ryan Parker of foodcraftsmen.com ) and nobody did. So when you push through and you start your podcast, there will be people there glad to meet you.

                    So why did it take so long? Because I would over think it. What if I met a woman? Where would that go? Etc, I would WAY over think it. I made it way super complicated in my mind. I think we do this in podcasting. We start thinking about our HUGE audience that we are going to have, and we focus on all the technology, etc. We make it super complicated in our head, when in reality its not. You don't have an audience, and by the time you get some numbers you will have had some time to work out the kinks. Instead we focus on the people who may not like us. You know what? There may have been people who didn't like me at this bar because I was drinking water? You know what I didn't notice because I was busy spending time with the people who enjoyed my company, and that's what you can do with your podcast.

                    Here is one of the coolest things about podasting. In some cases, you are the team. You are the committee. You are the program director. You don't need to ask for permission. When I was at Podcast Movement, it was kind of weird as I had to check in and see what my boss wanted me to do. When you are recording your podcast, no check in is required. You are 100% completely in control. It is YOURS. The only person who can stop you (for the most part) is YOU.

                    Jump in the Pool

                    29:02 I'm full of stories this week. I also attended a birthday party for my brother. Also in attendance was my niece and her three children (my great nieces and nephews). I showed up just in time to see my 8 year old great nephew (who had started the day in a life vest) jump off the diving board into the deep end, tread water and swim to the side. Now his first attempt he didn't jump straight, and aimed toward the side of the pool. There is where the experience swimmers (his Mom, and the adults) advised him to NOT jump towards the side because you might do too good a job and bang you head on the side of the pool, which happens to be concrete.

                    Shortly thereafter his five year old sister did the same. She needed a bit of help to get to the side of the pool, but it was amazing to see someone jump off a diving board when there is a chance of drowning.

                    Later my Great-nephew said, "I'm proud of myself." Here again, someone had faced their fears only to come out the other end feeling good.

                    Catching Up With My Listeners

                    36:02 I...]]>I recently started a podcast in a narrative fashion about a documentary called the Messengers, as I've never done this style of podcasting before. Here is what I've learned.

                    You have to know what story you are going to tell so you can add some intrigue, inspiration, comedy, etc.

                    You need to catalog everything. The Sooner the better. So if I make a phone call, get audio from a video, I catalog everything.

                    Identify your plot. For my first episode I wanted to tell the story of how and why everyone got involved, with a subplot of some behind the scenes. Then I wanted to build interest in future episodes. Looking back, it might've been better to keep it short and precise.

                    It takes A LOT of time. This is why shows like Reply All have a team of 15 working on their show. Right now, I'm a team of one. The first 20 minute episode took around 4 hours. That is roughly a 12:1 ratio.

                    My tool of choice here is the software Hindenburg Journalist. It's $99, and works on both Mac or PC, and you can drag in a bunch of files, cut them into pieces and then drag and drop them into the order you want them. It also auto levels the audio, and in this case I have all sorts of audio.

                    Get the best audio you can. This is true for every podcast. In my case I had some phone conversations that sounded horrendous next to a skype call. I always judge if a clip is helping the story.

                    Beware of the creep. What I mean by this is as I'm creating an episode about things that have already happened, there are things happening NOW. You have to think through the ears of your audience. They only know what you have given them.

                    I'm reading Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New masters of Radio which I realize is a bit backwards. I should've read it before I started, but sometimes you just got to jump into the pool.

                    When is a Remake Better Than the Original

                    15:15 I saw Ghostbuster this week, and found it very "Meh." It didn't scare me, or make me laugh. It was a shame as there are some really talented people in it. When we try to recreate someone else's magic, it typically doesn't work. I'm sure if we said some old show from the 1920's compared to a show in 1983, I'm not sure of movies that were better than the original. Typically a copy/remake of something isn't as good. With this in mind, don't try to copy someone else's show. Be yourself. Your audience will thank you for it

                    The Only Thing Stopping You - is You

                    18:03 Is this you? You know you're a nice person. You're a good person. You're not perfect, but you always do your best. You have things you are proud of, and things you might wish to forget. Does this sound familiar?

                    I'm going to share something I did this week. I talked at the beginning of the year how 2016 was going to be me getting out of my comfort zone. So I'm going to share a bit about my life, what goes in my head, and how I pushed through, and how you can too. In the end I'm glad I did, and you will be too.

                    Here is some back story.

                    1. I was in training to be a Pastor of a small church. I was brought in to bring in a younger crowd. The church was about 15 years old and over the last 10 years had completely lost touch with their youth at the church. After filling in for the Pastor I was approached to be an assistant pastor with the end goal of becoming the pastor when he retired. I thought about it. Prayed about it, and came on board. To keep this brief, they wanted me to attract younger people doing the exact same thing they had been doing that drove them away. Every idea I had was shot down. They were stuck in the "that's not how we do it" mode, and eventually I got frustrated and I could see how this wasn't going to work. I love those people and rather than lose those relationships, I stepped down. The bottom line was my ego took a hit. My self esteem got a quick uppercut to the jaw.
                    2. When my first wife and I had accepted the fact that we would never have children, she became an alcoholic. Have you ever tried to reason with an alcoholic? It's not fun. Bottom line, I couldn't get her to listen to me. I'm glad to hear that years later after almost driving into someone's home, she is now sober. But here again, I was in a situation where I couldn't get someone's attention, and my words seemed worthless. I'm not looking for a pity party. Hang with me.
                    3. My second wife was a smart, intelligent, funny person, who I later found out, disagreed with about 90% of everything I said. I could see where she wanted out marriage to go.  I could see the path on how to get there, but I couldn't get her to follow me. When I tried to follow her, well, it just didn't work. Here again, I just couldn't get her attention. As this was marriage number two, and I was right back where I started, this really did a number on me. After all the only constant in my marriages is me.
                    
                    

                    We all have these. We all have something to say. But it is the past that often steps in to stop us from doing really good things in the future. Sometimes when these wounds are still fresh, they can really set you back.

                    For me, I now work from home. It's weird. I go days where the only person I talk to is the check out girl at the grocery store. I might go to Bob Evans just to have chit chat with a waitress. It's weird. So I went to meetup.com and signed up for all these groups where people that are around my ago go out and explore the city. I could use some friends. It sounds like a good idea. But I had multiple opportunities to go. I always found other things to go. Here I would love the opportunity to have conversations, and yet I now had all this self doubt in my head. They say the older you get, it takes longer to heal, and that may be the case here.

                    Sometimes you have to baby step it. Sometimes those babies steps can lead to huge outcomes. I am going to relate this to podcasting in just a second. So I decided to go to a restaurant/bar to hear some old friends band. This was an area in Akron, Ohio called Portage lakes. It was a beautiful night to hang by the lake, listen to some friends, and do this thing called relaxing that I hear people talk about.

                    Did I mention that there is a female lead singer in the band?

                    I've known her for years. We always joked how I was married when she was single. She was in a relationship when I was single. Now we are both single.

                    I walked up behind her and said, "I remember you." Well, the reaction I received was amazing. One would've thought I was a returning soldier coming home from the war (inert divorce joke here). She almost cried. It created somewhat of a scene. Her guitar player (another long time friend) had not seen me in years (all of my friends from my home town have not seen me in about 8 years). I turn around and there was another musician that I had actually played with in one of my old bands. Here is the point. There were people there waiting to connect with me (I did get her phone number by the way). They were all glad to see me. All I had to do was push through and make a little effort. As we often say on this show, "Nobody will punch you in the face" (thank you Ryan Parker of foodcraftsmen.com ) and nobody did. So when you push through and you start your podcast, there will be people there glad to meet you.

                    So why did it take so long? Because I would over think it. What if I met a woman? Where would that go? Etc, I would WAY over think it. I made it way super complicated in my mind. I think we do this in podcasting. We start thinking about our HUGE audience that we are going to have, and we focus on all the technology, etc. We make it super complicated in our head, when in reality its not. You don't have an audience, and by the time you get some numbers you will have had some time to work out the kinks. Instead we focus on the people who may not like us. You know what? There may have been people who didn't like me at this bar because I was drinking water? You know what I didn't notice because I was busy spending time with the people who enjoyed my company, and that's what you can do with your podcast.

                    Here is one of the coolest things about podasting. In some cases, you are the team. You are the committee. You are the program director. You don't need to ask for permission. When I was at Podcast Movement, it was kind of weird as I had to check in and see what my boss wanted me to do. When you are recording your podcast, no check in is required. You are 100% completely in control. It is YOURS. The only person who can stop you (for the most part) is YOU.

                    Jump in the Pool

                    29:02 I'm full of stories this week. I also attended a birthday party for my brother. Also in attendance was my niece and her three children (my great nieces and nephews). I showed up just in time to see my 8 year old great nephew (who had started the day in a life vest) jump off the diving board into the deep end, tread water and swim to the side. Now his first attempt he didn't jump straight, and aimed toward the side of the pool. There is where the experience swimmers (his Mom, and the adults) advised him to NOT jump towards the side because you might do too good a job and bang you head on the side of the pool, which happens to be concrete.

                    Shortly thereafter his five year old sister did the same. She needed a bit of help to get to the side of the pool, but it was amazing to see someone jump off a diving board when there is a chance of drowning.

                    Later my Great-nephew said, "I'm proud of myself." Here again, someone had faced their fears only to come out the other end feeling good.

                    Catching Up With My Listeners

                    36:02 I got email talking from Orlando about other countries "Catching up" with the USA, and Heather From Craftlit recommendation to go listen to the Voice Acting  Mastering.

                    Poll of the Week - Podcast Players

                    43:31 Take the two question survey

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Planning Your Podcast Course

                    Creative Studio Academy

                    Hablando De Tecnología

                    Hindenburg Journalist

                    Book: Out on the Wire: The Storytelling Secrets of the New masters of Radio

                    Food Craftsmen

                    Podcast Fiend

                    ]]>da943cc4bd9677c2f3a5490dd5ffc7e9Mon, 18 Jul 2016 04:00:00 -040046:38falsefull523523Lessons From the Pizza ParlorPodcast Movement was a great success as all of the previous events. WOW. The one thing different this year was I was working for Libsyn. I spent pretty much three days talking from about 7 in the morning to somewhere between midnight and 2 AM talking loudly. Consequently, my voice is still kind of raspy today. I had originally planned on playing the talk I did, but to be honest the audio has so much room noise it's unusable. Instead I want to share some quick insights from Podcast Movement. 
                    1. Bring a back pack. - I was using a laptop case and my shoulders still hurting. 
                    2. If you want to meet someone, you need to set this up in advance. 
                    3. Don't be afraid to try things. I did a Q&A. This was new at PM16, and it was in response to customer feedback. I thought my session went well, and I enjoyed not having to working on a bunch of slides. 
                    
                    Be Careful Extending Your Launch

                    I love Giordono's Pizza. Every time I go to Chicago I have to get some. It's super-duper thick, and it's quite yummy. They look small, but one piece will fill you up. 

                    We went one night, as did apparently the entire event. There was a 90 minute wait. We found out that we could order out pizza and they could start making it, and then (hopefully) by the time we got to our table, the pizza could be ready. 

                    That sounded like a great plan. The problem is what we were told and what was reality were very different. We got to our table and instead of having the pizza soon, we waited another 90 minutes. So all in all we waited three hours for food. Was the pizza good? Absolutely, but did it make me roll my eyes back into my head and make me go "oooooh this is soooooo good..." like the other times I've enjoy ed their pizza? No. Why?

                    I had been telling people how good it was. That is half the fun of going there is to take someone who has never had their pizza, and watch their face. But after three hours of waiting, unless they threw in a Heil PR40, I don't think the pizza would've lived up to the hype. 

                    So if you are a person who is getting ready and setting up your auto responder, your squeeze page, your sales funnel, etc. meanwhile you had already told your audience that you would be launching a podcast "soon," by the time it arrives the wait may take away from the over-all experience. With this in mind, be careful when you announce your podcast is coming. You might want to wait until you have a finished episode ready to go. You might want to wait until your show is approved in iTunes, Google Play Music, Stitcher, etc. 

                    New and Noteworthy Update

                    I ran into Nicole of the BBRshow.com (Business Building Rock Stars). If you count from the top she is currently #81 in "New and Noteworthy" and said she doesn't seem to be getting any major push from this position. She said she is seeing slow steady growth. This segment was recorded using nothing but my phone. 

                    What it Would've Sounded Like if I had Won an Award

                    I was honored to be nominated in the Technology category and then the PEOPLE'S CHOICE! (but didn't win either). I had a speech in case I won. It went a little something like this:

                    Look, I don’t win very often, so I’m going all out on this. OK? I would like to thank:

                    GOD

                    My listeners. Without you I am nothing. To the members of the School of Podcasting. Thanks for picking me as your coach. It has been a pleasure serving you. A special shout out to the Ask the Podcast Coach chat room. You folks truly are neat.

                    Thanks to the academy, and to my fellow nominees. It was great to be nominated with you (I’ve been nominated for 8 different awards, and I gotta say it is nice to win).

                    To my co-hosts I’ve have over the years. Rob Walch, Paul Colligan, Gary Lealand, Erik K Johnson, Jim Collison, and of course my tripod brothers Daniel J Lewis and Ray Ortega. Gentlemen thanks for being great co-host and in some cases competition, but thanks for being even better friends.

                    To libsyn for hosting all of my files without a glitch, and thanks for the job while I’m at it. Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month. Cmon, you know I had to go there.

                    This is really overwhelming. Ask my ex-wife and she will tell you I don’t handle compliments well.

                    I do want to thank some people, Daniel J Lewis, Marcus Couch, Erik K Johnson, and Steve Stewart who called me during my divorce just to make sure I was OK. As I got divorced 10 days before Christmas, Steve took time out his family time, and called me on Christmas day. I know we like to talk CPM advertising, and income reports, but when you’re spending Christmas with your cat that phone call was worth a million dollars.

                    Two more quick points. If you’re almost ready to launch your podcast, but you’re waiting on that one thing LAUNCH. An almost perfect podcast will impact 100% more people than the one that never makes off your hard drive.

                    Lastly, people ask me why I have Jeremiah 29:11 on my website. Well in 2015 I got divorced. Shortly thereafter I was laid off. I was estranged from my family due to some things my ex-wife had said. It was a dark place. I moved back to my home city of Akron where I now have a peaceful house. I called some friends and got a job at Libsyn. After 7 years of not talking to my brother, that bridge has been restored. So when things get dark, remember Jeremiah 29:11 it goes a little something like this. “For I know the plans I have for you,” declares the Lord, “plans to prosper you and not to harm you, plans to give you hope and a future.” Tonight I stand here with a trophy in my hand and say this is why I have Jeremiah 29:11 on my website because it's true.

                    Thank you all

                    Mentioned In this Episode

                     www.inglespodcast.com

                    www.shepodcasts.com

                    www.bizchix.com

                    bizwomenrock.com

                    Podcamp Pittsburgh

                    Podcast Mid Atlantic

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    Doors close in a week. Hurry to reserve your spot. Join Today

                    ]]>Podcast Movement was a great success as all of the previous events. WOW. The one thing different this year was I was working for Libsyn. I spent pretty much three days talking from about 7 in the morning to somewhere between midnight and 2 AM talking loudly. Consequently, my voice is still kind of raspy today. I had originally planned on playing the talk I did, but to be honest the audio has so much room noise it's unusable. Instead I want to share some quick insights from Podcast Movement. 
                    1. Bring a back pack. - I was using a laptop case and my shoulders still hurting. 
                    2. If you want to meet someone, you need to set this up in advance. 
                    3. Don't be afraid to try things. I did a Q&A. This was new at PM16, and it was in response to customer feedback. I thought my session went well, and I enjoyed not having to working on a bunch of slides. 
                    
                    Be Careful Extending Your Launch

                    I love Giordono's Pizza. Every time I go to Chicago I have to get some. It's super-duper thick, and it's quite yummy. They look small, but one piece will fill you up. 

                    We went one night, as did apparently the entire event. There was a 90 minute wait. We found out that we could order out pizza and they could start making it, and then (hopefully) by the time we got to our table, the pizza could be ready. 

                    That sounded like a great plan. The problem is what we were told and what was reality were very different. We got to our table and instead of having the pizza soon, we waited another 90 minutes. So all in all we waited three hours for food. Was the pizza good? Absolutely, but did it make me roll my eyes back into my head and make me go "oooooh this is soooooo good..." like the other times I've enjoy ed their pizza? No. Why?

                    I had been telling people how good it was. That is half the fun of going there is to take someone who has never had their pizza, and watch their face. But after three hours of waiting, unless they threw in a Heil PR40, I don't think the pizza would've lived up to the hype. 

                    So if you are a person who is getting ready and setting up your auto responder, your squeeze page, your sales funnel, etc. meanwhile you had already told your audience that you would be launching a podcast "soon," by the time it arrives the wait may take away from the over-all experience. With this in mind, be careful when you announce your podcast is coming. You might want to wait until you have a finished episode ready to go. You might want to wait until your show is approved in iTunes, Google Play Music, Stitcher, etc. 

                    New and Noteworthy Update

                    I ran into Nicole of the BBRshow.com (Business Building Rock Stars). If you count from the top she is currently #81 in "New and Noteworthy" and said she doesn't seem to be getting any major push from this position. She said she is seeing slow steady growth. This segment was recorded using nothing but my phone. 

                    What it Would've Sounded Like if I had Won an Award

                    I was honored to be nominated in the Technology category and then the PEOPLE'S CHOICE! (but didn't win either). I had a speech in case I won. It went a little something like this:

                    Look, I don’t win very often, so I’m going all out on this. OK? I would like to thank:

                    GOD

                    My listeners. Without you I am nothing. To the members of the School of Podcasting. Thanks for picking me as your coach. It has been a pleasure serving you. A special shout out to the Ask the Podcast Coach chat room. You folks truly are neat.

                    Thanks to the academy, and to my fellow nominees. It was great to be nominated with you (I’ve been nominated for 8 different awards, and I gotta say it is nice to win).

                    To my co-hosts I’ve have over the years. Rob Walch, Paul Colligan, Gary Lealand, Erik K Johnson, Jim Collison, and of course my tripod brothers Daniel J Lewis and Ray Ortega. Gentlemen thanks for being great co-host and in some cases competition, but thanks for being even better friends.

                    To libsyn for hosting all of my files without a glitch, and thanks for the job while I’m at it. Use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month. Cmon, you know I had to go there.

                    This is really overwhelming. Ask my ex-wife and she will tell you I don’t handle compliments well.

                    I do want to thank some people, Daniel J Lewis, Marcus Couch, Erik K Johnson, and Steve Stewart who called me during my divorce just to make sure I was OK. As I got divorced 10 days before Christmas, Steve took time out his family time, and called me on Christmas day. I know we like to talk CPM advertising, and income reports, but when you’re spending Christmas with your cat that phone call was worth a million dollars.

                    Two more quick points. If you’re almost ready to launch your podcast, but you’re waiting on that one thing LAUNCH. An almost perfect podcast will impact 100% more people than the one that never makes off your hard drive.

                    Lastly, people ask me why I have Jeremiah 29:11 on my website. Well in 2015 I got divorced. Shortly thereafter I was laid off. I was estranged from my family due to some things my ex-wife had said. It was a dark place. I moved back to my home city of Akron where I now have a peaceful house. I called some friends and got a job at Libsyn. After 7 years of not talking to my brother, that bridge has been restored. So when things get dark, remember Jeremiah 29:11 it goes a little something like this. “For I know the plans I have for you,” declares the Lord, “plans to prosper you and not to harm you, plans to give you hope and a future.” Tonight I stand here with a trophy in my hand and say this is why I have Jeremiah 29:11 on my website because it's true.

                    Thank you all

                    Mentioned In this Episode

                     www.inglespodcast.com

                    www.shepodcasts.com

                    www.bizchix.com

                    bizwomenrock.com

                    Podcamp Pittsburgh

                    Podcast Mid Atlantic

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    Doors close in a week. Hurry to reserve your spot. Join Today

                    ]]>b1d4fd451579dce014c393e9968ac960Mon, 11 Jul 2016 06:00:17 -040044:28falsefull522522How Glenn Hebert Does Morning Radio From His HouseComments? Call 888-563-3228

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    Podcast Movement is Next Week

                    I will be working Libsyn booth all week except for my Q & A Season on Friday at 10:15-11:00 on the Solutions Stage.  Please find me and say hello. I would love to meet you.

                    Have fresh batteries in your portable recorder

                    Have your business cards

                    Clean of the SD card

                    Comfy shoes and breathe mints are a must.

                    If you have a conflict between a session and a discussion, stay in the hallway and continue the discussion and listen to the recording.

                     

                    Glenn Hebert likes to Hang Out With Journalists

                    8:13 Today is this third appearance of "Glenn the Geek" from the horse radio network. Glenn is making a living through his podcast, and a lot of hard work. Today we find out.

                    What mistake Glenn feels he has done, and wishes he could go back and change it

                    What equipment he is using the create his live show including callers.

                    He gives some insights into selling ads on your show.

                    His insights from Magazines, and how Glenn is now helping magazines in his niche get into podcasting. Not only does the magazine bring over their audience, but they also bring over their sponsors.

                    His biggest hurdle is booking guests

                    Why you should look at every problem as an opportunity.

                    Glenn is using Mixlr, Call in Studio, Google Sites, Audio Hijack Pro, Auphonic, and he uses three separate computers. You can see when you add "live" to your podcast, your technical skills need to go up.

                    Glenn embraces the pressure that live brings, and he likes the feel.

                    Check out Glenn's Network at www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Couch Cushion Experiment

                    43:50 An easy way to cut down on "room noise" grab the cushion from your couch.

                    You could purchase Milk Crate, Egg Carton Foam or you can just order one already built and save the time and effort.

                    New and Noteworthy Experiment

                    51:42 If you go to www.becauseofmypodcast.com/itunes

                    Please rate, review, and most improbably subscribe to the Because of my podcast show.

                    I now have 65 ratings. I have a total of 559 downloads over six episodes with the highest episode being 171 and the lowest being 58

                    I'm on row 91 of the Technology > Podcasting category. I am still not listed in the "main" new and noteworthy. But I'm noticing a trend on who is.

                    Jim Norton - comedian

                    Kathy Smith - "famous" health expert

                    Chris Hardwick

                    The Dallas Morning News

                    Gimlet Media - Ebay podcast that's not about eBay

                    Michael Kosta- Comedian E! Network.

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    The Messengers Documentary

                    ]]>Comments? Call 888-563-3228

                    Join the School of Podcasting today

                    Podcast Movement is Next Week

                    I will be working Libsyn booth all week except for my Q & A Season on Friday at 10:15-11:00 on the Solutions Stage.  Please find me and say hello. I would love to meet you.

                    Have fresh batteries in your portable recorder

                    Have your business cards

                    Clean of the SD card

                    Comfy shoes and breathe mints are a must.

                    If you have a conflict between a session and a discussion, stay in the hallway and continue the discussion and listen to the recording.

                     

                    Glenn Hebert likes to Hang Out With Journalists

                    8:13 Today is this third appearance of "Glenn the Geek" from the horse radio network. Glenn is making a living through his podcast, and a lot of hard work. Today we find out.

                    What mistake Glenn feels he has done, and wishes he could go back and change it

                    What equipment he is using the create his live show including callers.

                    He gives some insights into selling ads on your show.

                    His insights from Magazines, and how Glenn is now helping magazines in his niche get into podcasting. Not only does the magazine bring over their audience, but they also bring over their sponsors.

                    His biggest hurdle is booking guests

                    Why you should look at every problem as an opportunity.

                    Glenn is using Mixlr, Call in Studio, Google Sites, Audio Hijack Pro, Auphonic, and he uses three separate computers. You can see when you add "live" to your podcast, your technical skills need to go up.

                    Glenn embraces the pressure that live brings, and he likes the feel.

                    Check out Glenn's Network at www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Couch Cushion Experiment

                    43:50 An easy way to cut down on "room noise" grab the cushion from your couch.

                    You could purchase Milk Crate, Egg Carton Foam or you can just order one already built and save the time and effort.

                    New and Noteworthy Experiment

                    51:42 If you go to www.becauseofmypodcast.com/itunes

                    Please rate, review, and most improbably subscribe to the Because of my podcast show.

                    I now have 65 ratings. I have a total of 559 downloads over six episodes with the highest episode being 171 and the lowest being 58

                    I'm on row 91 of the Technology > Podcasting category. I am still not listed in the "main" new and noteworthy. But I'm noticing a trend on who is.

                    Jim Norton - comedian

                    Kathy Smith - "famous" health expert

                    Chris Hardwick

                    The Dallas Morning News

                    Gimlet Media - Ebay podcast that's not about eBay

                    Michael Kosta- Comedian E! Network.

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    The Messengers Documentary

                    ]]>e9c4302c5c58cd0efba75f8dcb68bfdeMon, 04 Jul 2016 04:00:00 -040001:00:33falsefull521521The Podcast MindsetI was born in Akron, Ohio. I lived in Cleveland, Ohio for 8 years and now moved back to Akron. So when LeBron James join the Cleveland Cavaliers we were all excited. Last year we came close, but we lost (there is a long history of Cleveland Sports teams coming "this close" to winning only to lose). This year our team was down three games to one. No team had ever come back from that deficit. We were up against the team that had the most winningest season. Again, we all started think about coming "this close," and we started thinking about what we could improve and try again next year. There was one person who didn't that way. His name is LeBron James and that's what I want to talk about today. Because there is a part of podcasting that is mental.

                    When asked what he did when he was down 3-1 and how he maintained, LeBron couldn't answer specifically, but he talked about previous championship he had been in as a High School Player, and it all came back to preparation, and looking for ways to improve. So he watch film from the gems where his team lost. He looked for things he could do better. One of my montra's is "Constant Improvement." Maybe it is the teacher in me, but I always feel there is room for improvement.

                    He listened to the right people. While his Instagram would show he didn't 100% tune out social media, during the playoffs he turned off sports radio, TV, newspapers, and anyone else that had an opinion. The opinion he was interested in was his coaches. So if you get a negative comment, or someone shoots you a negative email, put it aside. Get a group of people to be your focus group. Ask them how you're doing. Get a Facebook group going.

                    He gets his team involved, in some cases telling them what to do. So if you want people to contact you, give them options (email, voicemail, speakpipe) and then tell them. In some cases, show them.

                    He didn't quit. There was a time in the game when it was tied. The other team got the ball and was running down the court. It was two player against one, this was going to be some easy points. Except for one thing. LeBron James didn't quit. He had been  running down the court with one of the players as hard he he could. He had one goal, and that was to block the shot. If you see the replay you will see where the other player started to take it easy as he went to lay the ball into the hoop. This again, was going to be two easy points. Instead as one player left off the gas Lebron leaped into the air and blocked it. Many feel this was a turning point. He didn't quit. Have you ever had something you thought was hard, but you pushed through? If you want to watch your audience get smaller, quit. That is guaranteed.

                    My favorite quote of Lebron's from his press conference was "The games always gives back to those who are true to the game." To me, I'd like to tweak that to say, "You audience always gives back to those who are giving value to the audience." Notice I got specific. It's not just giving; it is giving value.

                    What Happens When You Don't Know Your Audience

                    Sometimes we think we are giving value but we are missing the mark. When I was married I used to do things for my wife. I thought these were wonderful, romantic, and would be sure to score me points. I found out later in therapy, that they accomplished none of my goal. Instead I found a other items that WOULD. How? By talking with my wife. You need to find out what your audience needs (Facebook groups, email lists, surveys) and give them what they want.

                    What would you do if your boss said you had to do a presentation in 14 different countries?

                    If you didn't learn the language, it wouldn't make sense

                    If you didn't' learn about their culture you could offend someone without even knowing it.

                    What if instead of rushing in you took the time to know the language and customs?

                    In this instance your podcast is your boss, and the 14 countries are different social media outlets.

                    Pick a platform, learn it. Learn the type of information that works on that platform.

                    Check out Brandi at Big Active Audience for more great information

                    Survey of the Week

                    What is your favorite Social Media Platform.  I would love to hear about it in this week's survey. Take this one question Poll

                    Because of My Podcast: I'm Helping Myself and Others Deal With Grief

                    Darwyn Dave shares the story about how his father was murdered when he was a young boy. After listening to this show, Darwyn has started working through his own grief via a podcast. His goal, not to make money, not to get 10,000 downloads, but to help himself and others work through grief. Now, barbecue of his podcast he's been asked to create some videos and share his experience. Check out his show at www.dealingwithmygrief.com

                    New and Noteworthy Investigation

                    People are obsessed with iTunes New and Noteworthy. What is the effect? Well I wanted to find out. I don't think it's much, but I wanted to KNOW. So I started a podcast called "Because of my Podcast." I started tracking items. It seemed so easy to get into New and Noteworthy in the past, so here is what I've found. Maybe not.

                    The show has 357 downloads (ranging from 43-120 per episode), and 51 reviews. While I'm line 90 of the New and Noteworthy in my category, I am not New and Noteworthy from the main page. Some clients of mine are and here are there numbers:

                    I do have some clients in N&N. Client 1 is on line 110, they have 4000 downloads (ranging from 166 to 740 per episode). They have 15 episodes and zero reviews. Another is on line 135. They have 3500 total downloads (ranging from 80-400 downloads per episode). They have 20 episodes, and zero reviews.

                    Other things I've found have been that shows that need to be pulled are not. Rumor Girls Uncut has not had and episode since 2011, and none of their files will download. I will keep my eye open for more shows that might show that Apple needs to prune the tree.

                    If you'd like to help with the experiment, go to www.becauseofmypodcast.com/itunes and subscriber, rate, and review. I'll report on the standings as the show goes forward.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    Step by Step Tutorials

                    Live Podcast Consulting

                    Priority Email Support

                    Private Facebook Group

                    ]]>I was born in Akron, Ohio. I lived in Cleveland, Ohio for 8 years and now moved back to Akron. So when LeBron James join the Cleveland Cavaliers we were all excited. Last year we came close, but we lost (there is a long history of Cleveland Sports teams coming "this close" to winning only to lose). This year our team was down three games to one. No team had ever come back from that deficit. We were up against the team that had the most winningest season. Again, we all started think about coming "this close," and we started thinking about what we could improve and try again next year. There was one person who didn't that way. His name is LeBron James and that's what I want to talk about today. Because there is a part of podcasting that is mental.

                    When asked what he did when he was down 3-1 and how he maintained, LeBron couldn't answer specifically, but he talked about previous championship he had been in as a High School Player, and it all came back to preparation, and looking for ways to improve. So he watch film from the gems where his team lost. He looked for things he could do better. One of my montra's is "Constant Improvement." Maybe it is the teacher in me, but I always feel there is room for improvement.

                    He listened to the right people. While his Instagram would show he didn't 100% tune out social media, during the playoffs he turned off sports radio, TV, newspapers, and anyone else that had an opinion. The opinion he was interested in was his coaches. So if you get a negative comment, or someone shoots you a negative email, put it aside. Get a group of people to be your focus group. Ask them how you're doing. Get a Facebook group going.

                    He gets his team involved, in some cases telling them what to do. So if you want people to contact you, give them options (email, voicemail, speakpipe) and then tell them. In some cases, show them.

                    He didn't quit. There was a time in the game when it was tied. The other team got the ball and was running down the court. It was two player against one, this was going to be some easy points. Except for one thing. LeBron James didn't quit. He had been  running down the court with one of the players as hard he he could. He had one goal, and that was to block the shot. If you see the replay you will see where the other player started to take it easy as he went to lay the ball into the hoop. This again, was going to be two easy points. Instead as one player left off the gas Lebron leaped into the air and blocked it. Many feel this was a turning point. He didn't quit. Have you ever had something you thought was hard, but you pushed through? If you want to watch your audience get smaller, quit. That is guaranteed.

                    My favorite quote of Lebron's from his press conference was "The games always gives back to those who are true to the game." To me, I'd like to tweak that to say, "You audience always gives back to those who are giving value to the audience." Notice I got specific. It's not just giving; it is giving value.

                    What Happens When You Don't Know Your Audience

                    Sometimes we think we are giving value but we are missing the mark. When I was married I used to do things for my wife. I thought these were wonderful, romantic, and would be sure to score me points. I found out later in therapy, that they accomplished none of my goal. Instead I found a other items that WOULD. How? By talking with my wife. You need to find out what your audience needs (Facebook groups, email lists, surveys) and give them what they want.

                    What would you do if your boss said you had to do a presentation in 14 different countries?

                    If you didn't learn the language, it wouldn't make sense

                    If you didn't' learn about their culture you could offend someone without even knowing it.

                    What if instead of rushing in you took the time to know the language and customs?

                    In this instance your podcast is your boss, and the 14 countries are different social media outlets.

                    Pick a platform, learn it. Learn the type of information that works on that platform.

                    Check out Brandi at Big Active Audience for more great information

                    Survey of the Week

                    What is your favorite Social Media Platform.  I would love to hear about it in this week's survey. Take this one question Poll

                    Because of My Podcast: I'm Helping Myself and Others Deal With Grief

                    Darwyn Dave shares the story about how his father was murdered when he was a young boy. After listening to this show, Darwyn has started working through his own grief via a podcast. His goal, not to make money, not to get 10,000 downloads, but to help himself and others work through grief. Now, barbecue of his podcast he's been asked to create some videos and share his experience. Check out his show at www.dealingwithmygrief.com

                    New and Noteworthy Investigation

                    People are obsessed with iTunes New and Noteworthy. What is the effect? Well I wanted to find out. I don't think it's much, but I wanted to KNOW. So I started a podcast called "Because of my Podcast." I started tracking items. It seemed so easy to get into New and Noteworthy in the past, so here is what I've found. Maybe not.

                    The show has 357 downloads (ranging from 43-120 per episode), and 51 reviews. While I'm line 90 of the New and Noteworthy in my category, I am not New and Noteworthy from the main page. Some clients of mine are and here are there numbers:

                    I do have some clients in N&N. Client 1 is on line 110, they have 4000 downloads (ranging from 166 to 740 per episode). They have 15 episodes and zero reviews. Another is on line 135. They have 3500 total downloads (ranging from 80-400 downloads per episode). They have 20 episodes, and zero reviews.

                    Other things I've found have been that shows that need to be pulled are not. Rumor Girls Uncut has not had and episode since 2011, and none of their files will download. I will keep my eye open for more shows that might show that Apple needs to prune the tree.

                    If you'd like to help with the experiment, go to www.becauseofmypodcast.com/itunes and subscriber, rate, and review. I'll report on the standings as the show goes forward.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    Step by Step Tutorials

                    Live Podcast Consulting

                    Priority Email Support

                    Private Facebook Group

                    ]]>18b882e60ec85172768d7bdcb47fcab7Mon, 27 Jun 2016 04:00:00 -040053:13falsefull520520Podcasting With Your Kids Is a podcast a good way to promote a multi-level marketing (MLM) business?

                    If your sole goal of a podcast is to generate income, you need to realize a few things:

                    1. Nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose (usually it's that there is nothing else on)
                    2. You make money from your podcast by delivering value. This helps people like you because you're helpful.
                    3. When people trust you, they may purchase something you recommend or provide.
                    4. It takes time to develop the relationship between you and your audience.
                    
                    

                    So whatever your product is, your industry, if you have tips on running that business, using that product, news about that industry, then it might be helpful. Figure out who your target audience is and make the information that they want to consume.

                    Starting a Podcast With My Child

                    Dave,

                    On the second leg of a trip home from VT to TN, I spent 8 hours in the car listening to your voice yesterday. And enjoyed it thoroughly. Thanks for the great content!

                    I've been listening to podcasts for years and am thinking of starting one with my 11 year old son. We have a concept and I'm going to put him through the paces of evaluating and starting a business (I've had an online business for 20 years) with the intention that he'd be doing this for the next 8 years at least until he leaves home. So, it's a long term strategy for us (we're doing the project whether we broadcast it or not, so we may as well). And I'm sort of tagging on the biz training for him and see if we can develop it into a part time job for him (I'm launching on another biz that this coincides with as well).

                    My question for you is this...there's plenty of info out there on the tech side of the equation and plenty of courses like SOP on getting started (which we may do in a few months) and marketing info, etc., but either I'm not seeing or just not looking in the right places for resources on the broadcasting skills side.

                    Obviously, just doing it is a huge bit of it. But, I'd like to be able to talk him through the skills needed and how to get them in a general way. We're interviewing a radio friend about interviewing next week, but I thought I would ask you...Do you have any resources that you could point us to on developing the broadcast skills needed to make a great show (assuming the content is great and the tech is listenable)?

                    Thanks for any direction you could give, I appreciate your time!

                    Michelle - cornerstonepromos.com

                    Marketing Minutes - Brandi Young

                    Brandi Young is a software developer who has been working with podcasters on some software. Though interviews she has found that many podcasters are relying too much on iTunes when there is a whole other world of tools to Market your Podcast. Check out her website at www.bigactiveaudience.com

                    slideshare.net

                    meetup.com

                    Pinterest.com

                    New Features Coming to Podcasting

                    Blubrry will be launching Podcast Sites. This is a free website based on Wordpress.

                    Libsyn has destination stats, audio files to YouTube, Episode Defaults, Entranced ID3 tags

                    Spreaker is coming out with a new CMS

                    Use the coupon sopfree at any of these companies to get a free month (full discloser I work for Libsyn).

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on round 73 of the Podcasters Rountable talking about branding your podcast

                    I appeared on Episode two of the Membership Coach show with Marcus Couch talking about the Burden and the Benefit of Membership sites.

                    Check out Paul Colligan's Look back at 10 years of Video with Lauria Petrucci (Cali Lewis)

                    Last 5 in 5 Cale Nelson

                    Cale Neslon from the Ham Radio 360 Show shares the last 5 podcasts he listened to.

                    Everything Ham Radio

                    Linux in the Ham Shack

                    School of Podcasting (this show)

                    Black Man with a Gun

                    Kenn Blanchard Show

                    Wealth Steading (howto invest)

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Feeding My Faith - Does God Have Brain Damage?

                    Podcast Movement Almost Sold Out. Use the coupon code sop40

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    Step by Step tutorials

                    Priority Email Support

                    Live Podcast Consulting

                    Private Facebook Group for Networking

                    Join the School of Podcasting Today

                    ]]>Is a podcast a good way to promote a multi-level marketing (MLM) business?

                    If your sole goal of a podcast is to generate income, you need to realize a few things:

                    1. Nobody tunes into an infomercial on purpose (usually it's that there is nothing else on)
                    2. You make money from your podcast by delivering value. This helps people like you because you're helpful.
                    3. When people trust you, they may purchase something you recommend or provide.
                    4. It takes time to develop the relationship between you and your audience.
                    
                    

                    So whatever your product is, your industry, if you have tips on running that business, using that product, news about that industry, then it might be helpful. Figure out who your target audience is and make the information that they want to consume.

                    Starting a Podcast With My Child

                    Dave,

                    On the second leg of a trip home from VT to TN, I spent 8 hours in the car listening to your voice yesterday. And enjoyed it thoroughly. Thanks for the great content!

                    I've been listening to podcasts for years and am thinking of starting one with my 11 year old son. We have a concept and I'm going to put him through the paces of evaluating and starting a business (I've had an online business for 20 years) with the intention that he'd be doing this for the next 8 years at least until he leaves home. So, it's a long term strategy for us (we're doing the project whether we broadcast it or not, so we may as well). And I'm sort of tagging on the biz training for him and see if we can develop it into a part time job for him (I'm launching on another biz that this coincides with as well).

                    My question for you is this...there's plenty of info out there on the tech side of the equation and plenty of courses like SOP on getting started (which we may do in a few months) and marketing info, etc., but either I'm not seeing or just not looking in the right places for resources on the broadcasting skills side.

                    Obviously, just doing it is a huge bit of it. But, I'd like to be able to talk him through the skills needed and how to get them in a general way. We're interviewing a radio friend about interviewing next week, but I thought I would ask you...Do you have any resources that you could point us to on developing the broadcast skills needed to make a great show (assuming the content is great and the tech is listenable)?

                    Thanks for any direction you could give, I appreciate your time!

                    Michelle - cornerstonepromos.com

                    Marketing Minutes - Brandi Young

                    Brandi Young is a software developer who has been working with podcasters on some software. Though interviews she has found that many podcasters are relying too much on iTunes when there is a whole other world of tools to Market your Podcast. Check out her website at www.bigactiveaudience.com

                    slideshare.net

                    meetup.com

                    Pinterest.com

                    New Features Coming to Podcasting

                    Blubrry will be launching Podcast Sites. This is a free website based on Wordpress.

                    Libsyn has destination stats, audio files to YouTube, Episode Defaults, Entranced ID3 tags

                    Spreaker is coming out with a new CMS

                    Use the coupon sopfree at any of these companies to get a free month (full discloser I work for Libsyn).

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on round 73 of the Podcasters Rountable talking about branding your podcast

                    I appeared on Episode two of the Membership Coach show with Marcus Couch talking about the Burden and the Benefit of Membership sites.

                    Check out Paul Colligan's Look back at 10 years of Video with Lauria Petrucci (Cali Lewis)

                    Last 5 in 5 Cale Nelson

                    Cale Neslon from the Ham Radio 360 Show shares the last 5 podcasts he listened to.

                    Everything Ham Radio

                    Linux in the Ham Shack

                    School of Podcasting (this show)

                    Black Man with a Gun

                    Kenn Blanchard Show

                    Wealth Steading (howto invest)

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Feeding My Faith - Does God Have Brain Damage?

                    Podcast Movement Almost Sold Out. Use the coupon code sop40

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    Step by Step tutorials

                    Priority Email Support

                    Live Podcast Consulting

                    Private Facebook Group for Networking

                    Join the School of Podcasting Today

                    ]]>e3f5b83ef80eb880257c662744b4540aMon, 20 Jun 2016 04:51:02 -040045:00falsefull519519The Power of Meeting Your Podcast Audience Face to Face2:05 Cale Nelson from hamradio360.com wanted to go to world's largest Ham Radio event. He wanted to go, but had these pesky things called kids that need silly things like food, clothes, and shelter. So this didn't leave Cale with money to spend on his hobby of podcasting. Well a few listeners said he should try putting together a funding campaign, and so he did. Did he get the money he needed?

                    Well he didn't get the 100% needed.

                    He got 220% he needed!

                    He did this providing VALUE for shirts, hats, shipping, etc.

                    The cool thing is Cale had the courage to try a crowd funding. It could've blown up in his face. Instead his audience came through and he got to attend with all of his expenses paid. 

                    Why You Should Attend Events

                    I went to Podcast Movement last year. I went to a session to support my friend Steve Stewart. After his session some guy named Glenn Hebert got up to speak. You may heave heard me mention Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network (Glenn has 20+ advertisers on his network). I saw Glenn do an impromptu speach. That lead to me asking him to come on the show. That lead to a relationship where Glenn asked me to speak at Podfest last year. That lead to me being interviewed for a documentary about podcasting. Which has now lead me to being asked to help with the film. The film is going to be AWESOME.

                    I will be setting creating relationships with people who you will hear on this show. I have found co-hosts. Here are come cool places to go

                    Podcast Movement - July 5-6 Chicago, (use the coupon sop40)

                    Podcast MidAtlantic  September 9-10 NJ

                    New Media Europe - June 18, 19

                    Podcast Success Summit - Online 89 Speakers

                    Podfest February 23-25 Orlando

                    Podcast Bingeing

                    22:54 The Moose Falulence Podcast (joke)

                     I found a new podcast that I'm really loving. It does the two things that I really like. As a teacher, I love to learn. As a human, I love to laugh. When you can have me doing both, I'm a fan for life. I discovered a show called the Pub from "the Current" (itunes). The host is Adam Ragusea and he takes current news, and dissects it uses it as a learning tool. The latest episode had him picking apart an interview of Donald Trump. This wasn't for the content, but to look at the strategy of how the interviewer approached the subject.

                    He is not afraid to bite the hands that feed him (the media) and backs up his opinion with great insights. He's a Journalist in Residence and Visiting Assistant Professor of Journalism at the Center for Collaborative Journalism at Mercer University in Macon, Ga. He’s also reported for public radio shows including Morning Edition, All Things Considered, Here & Now, Marketplace and The Takeaway. Before becoming a journalist, Adam studied music composition, and he creates all the music for The Pub.

                    If you want to keep up with the media, or if you're tired of all the "Podcasts about podcasting" (but still want to improve your show), you might give this a listen.

                    Finding Your Audience - Tools

                    27:10 Don't just Google, go and advanced Google search where you can exclude things you don't want at https://www.google.com/advanced_search Check out barndi Youn'gs article on advanced Google Searches

                    Find People on twitter, but use the advanced twitter. https://twitter.com/search-advanced?lang=en

                    You can use a tool like http://buzzsumo.com/ You type in keywords and it'll show you what's being read in your space in the last year, two years, etc.

                    30Cast.com Helps Podcasters 

                    30Cast is a new service launching next month to help podcasters find music to use in your podcast. :30cast offers fully produced tracks that fit any theme, topic, vibe, or feel.Each piece of music is 30 seconds long (not my favorite part of this idea). This is not for a person who wants to be a DJ and play the entire song. Pricing will be

                    9.99 for a one time use

                    24.99 for a month

                    49.99 for three months

                    89.99 for six months

                    $129 for a full year. 

                    During the time your license is active, you can use that piece of music in as many podcasts as you want.

                    This is not for major label music. This is indie musicians that make professional sounding music. 

                     

                    From the Audience As if 35 podcasts weren't enough to keep up with, you gave me a 36th to listen to. Now I'm binge-listening to The Podcast Engineering Show.   As a compulsive gear-head and self-confessed audio snob, it's the kind of show I've been hoping for. Having been podcasting myself since 2008, I'm well beyond "how do you set up a mix-minus?" and "what is gain-staging?"   And because the tea leaves were pretty clear to me 3-4 years ago, I knew that serious podcasters were going to have to step up their audio engineering game. Plus, I love this kind of crap.   So Dave, thanks for adding yet another podcast to my life. I'll have to look through the list of shows and unsubscribe from one of them to restore balance to my life. But don't worry, it won't be yours!   Best,   Max www.airplanegeeks.com   Muhhamad Ali Follow Up 44:07 Last week I did a segment on what Podcasters could learn from Muhammad Ali. I wasn't sure how this would go over. I was a little worried, but it interested me so I went with it. Apparently, it interested you as well as I had a few people email me to say that they enjoyed the episode.   One last thing I have also learned about Ali since last week. One movie I watched explained how he was somewhere with Jim Brown who was basically a Super Hero who played for the Cleveland Browns. He went to Jim and said, "Let's go for a walk and talk to some people." He was always above serving and connecting with his audience.   The Naked Episode46:23 I had a few people comment on the Naked Episode. This was an episode I did with just the Audio technica ATR2100 microphone and Audacity. This was to show you that you don't need to spend $1600 on equipment. I've had a few people say to me, "I don't hear a difference." This proves my point that we can sit in a room with our headphones squished into our head, but for the person on the bus, subway, walking the dog, etc. Nobody hears these subtle differences that the extra hardware creates. I actually had one person that thought it sounded better Latest Podcast Reviews

                    47:49 I subscribed to Dave's School of Podcasting after listening to several episodes of his show. There are other people out there who teach podcasting with a bit more hype, pomp and circumstance, but I don't believe that those methods will produce long term results. What I like about Dave is he seems to actually care not only about people individually, but about the podcasting field in general. Dave will never tell you to exchange reviews. I know this practice exists, and yes, of course I've been tempted to go this route myself, but think about it.... why should you get someone to review your show who will never listen to it? Don't you want REAL listeners to review your show? You will only gain listeners by producing great content and marketing your show to actual potential listeners. Also don't be fooled by Dave's humility. He really knows his stuff and if you spend a few shows listening to him, you'll start to learn it too. I've greatly improved my podcasting skills by listening to his show, and being a member of his School of Podcasting hasn't hurt either because he always answers my questions, usually within an hour of my emailing him. If you are going to pay for a podcasting coach, the value you get from the School of Podcasting can't be beat. - BirdBrain 99

                    It's not boring and you do learn new things on each episode. - VeronicaMoreno010308

                    Courtesy of My Podcast Reviews

                    Your reviews are deeply appreciated. Leave you review today.

                    Don't Compare Yourself to Others

                    There is always someone better, and someone worse than you. Today we heard from Cale Nelson, and how he is impacting people (and how he is being impacted). We never mentioned his numbers. Know WHY you want to podcast, and realize that after three months you're not going to have 1000 downloads per episode (unless you name is recognizable). 

                    Join The School of Podcasting

                    You get:

                    Step by step tutorials Priority Email support Private Facebook Group Free "office hours" Consulting

                     

                    ...]]>2:05 Cale Nelson from hamradio360.com wanted to go to world's largest Ham Radio event. He wanted to go, but had these pesky things called kids that need silly things like food, clothes, and shelter. So this didn't leave Cale with money to spend on his hobby of podcasting. Well a few listeners said he should try putting together a funding campaign, and so he did. Did he get the money he needed?

                    Well he didn't get the 100% needed.

                    He got 220% he needed!

                    He did this providing VALUE for shirts, hats, shipping, etc.

                    The cool thing is Cale had the courage to try a crowd funding. It could've blown up in his face. Instead his audience came through and he got to attend with all of his expenses paid. 

                    Why You Should Attend Events

                    I went to Podcast Movement last year. I went to a session to support my friend Steve Stewart. After his session some guy named Glenn Hebert got up to speak. You may heave heard me mention Glenn the Geek from the Horse Radio Network (Glenn has 20+ advertisers on his network). I saw Glenn do an impromptu speach. That lead to me asking him to come on the show. That lead to a relationship where Glenn asked me to speak at Podfest last year. That lead to me being interviewed for a documentary about podcasting. Which has now lead me to being asked to help with the film. The film is going to be AWESOME.

                    I will be setting creating relationships with people who you will hear on this show. I have found co-hosts. Here are come cool places to go

                    Podcast Movement - July 5-6 Chicago, (use the coupon sop40)

                    Podcast MidAtlantic  September 9-10 NJ

                    New Media Europe - June 18, 19

                    Podcast Success Summit - Online 89 Speakers

                    Podfest February 23-25 Orlando

                    Podcast Bingeing

                    22:54 The Moose Falulence Podcast (joke)

                     I found a new podcast that I'm really loving. It does the two things that I really like. As a teacher, I love to learn. As a human, I love to laugh. When you can have me doing both, I'm a fan for life. I discovered a show called the Pub from "the Current" (itunes). The host is Adam Ragusea and he takes current news, and dissects it uses it as a learning tool. The latest episode had him picking apart an interview of Donald Trump. This wasn't for the content, but to look at the strategy of how the interviewer approached the subject.

                    He is not afraid to bite the hands that feed him (the media) and backs up his opinion with great insights. He's a Journalist in Residence and Visiting Assistant Professor of Journalism at the Center for Collaborative Journalism at Mercer University in Macon, Ga. He’s also reported for public radio shows including Morning Edition, All Things Considered, Here & Now, Marketplace and The Takeaway. Before becoming a journalist, Adam studied music composition, and he creates all the music for The Pub.

                    If you want to keep up with the media, or if you're tired of all the "Podcasts about podcasting" (but still want to improve your show), you might give this a listen.

                    Finding Your Audience - Tools

                    27:10 Don't just Google, go and advanced Google search where you can exclude things you don't want at https://www.google.com/advanced_search Check out barndi Youn'gs article on advanced Google Searches

                    Find People on twitter, but use the advanced twitter. https://twitter.com/search-advanced?lang=en

                    You can use a tool like http://buzzsumo.com/ You type in keywords and it'll show you what's being read in your space in the last year, two years, etc.

                    30Cast.com Helps Podcasters 

                    30Cast is a new service launching next month to help podcasters find music to use in your podcast. :30cast offers fully produced tracks that fit any theme, topic, vibe, or feel.Each piece of music is 30 seconds long (not my favorite part of this idea). This is not for a person who wants to be a DJ and play the entire song. Pricing will be

                    9.99 for a one time use

                    24.99 for a month

                    49.99 for three months

                    89.99 for six months

                    $129 for a full year. 

                    During the time your license is active, you can use that piece of music in as many podcasts as you want.

                    This is not for major label music. This is indie musicians that make professional sounding music. 

                     

                    From the Audience As if 35 podcasts weren't enough to keep up with, you gave me a 36th to listen to. Now I'm binge-listening to The Podcast Engineering Show.   As a compulsive gear-head and self-confessed audio snob, it's the kind of show I've been hoping for. Having been podcasting myself since 2008, I'm well beyond "how do you set up a mix-minus?" and "what is gain-staging?"   And because the tea leaves were pretty clear to me 3-4 years ago, I knew that serious podcasters were going to have to step up their audio engineering game. Plus, I love this kind of crap.   So Dave, thanks for adding yet another podcast to my life. I'll have to look through the list of shows and unsubscribe from one of them to restore balance to my life. But don't worry, it won't be yours!   Best,   Max www.airplanegeeks.com   Muhhamad Ali Follow Up 44:07 Last week I did a segment on what Podcasters could learn from Muhammad Ali. I wasn't sure how this would go over. I was a little worried, but it interested me so I went with it. Apparently, it interested you as well as I had a few people email me to say that they enjoyed the episode.   One last thing I have also learned about Ali since last week. One movie I watched explained how he was somewhere with Jim Brown who was basically a Super Hero who played for the Cleveland Browns. He went to Jim and said, "Let's go for a walk and talk to some people." He was always above serving and connecting with his audience.   The Naked Episode46:23 I had a few people comment on the Naked Episode. This was an episode I did with just the Audio technica ATR2100 microphone and Audacity. This was to show you that you don't need to spend $1600 on equipment. I've had a few people say to me, "I don't hear a difference." This proves my point that we can sit in a room with our headphones squished into our head, but for the person on the bus, subway, walking the dog, etc. Nobody hears these subtle differences that the extra hardware creates. I actually had one person that thought it sounded better Latest Podcast Reviews

                    47:49 I subscribed to Dave's School of Podcasting after listening to several episodes of his show. There are other people out there who teach podcasting with a bit more hype, pomp and circumstance, but I don't believe that those methods will produce long term results. What I like about Dave is he seems to actually care not only about people individually, but about the podcasting field in general. Dave will never tell you to exchange reviews. I know this practice exists, and yes, of course I've been tempted to go this route myself, but think about it.... why should you get someone to review your show who will never listen to it? Don't you want REAL listeners to review your show? You will only gain listeners by producing great content and marketing your show to actual potential listeners. Also don't be fooled by Dave's humility. He really knows his stuff and if you spend a few shows listening to him, you'll start to learn it too. I've greatly improved my podcasting skills by listening to his show, and being a member of his School of Podcasting hasn't hurt either because he always answers my questions, usually within an hour of my emailing him. If you are going to pay for a podcasting coach, the value you get from the School of Podcasting can't be beat. - BirdBrain 99

                    It's not boring and you do learn new things on each episode. - VeronicaMoreno010308

                    Courtesy of My Podcast Reviews

                    Your reviews are deeply appreciated. Leave you review today.

                    Don't Compare Yourself to Others

                    There is always someone better, and someone worse than you. Today we heard from Cale Nelson, and how he is impacting people (and how he is being impacted). We never mentioned his numbers. Know WHY you want to podcast, and realize that after three months you're not going to have 1000 downloads per episode (unless you name is recognizable). 

                    Join The School of Podcasting

                    You get:

                    Step by step tutorials Priority Email support Private Facebook Group Free "office hours" Consulting

                     

                     

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    56:39 Bernie the Cat and his thoughts on Bernie Sander's losing.

                    Late Night Internet Podcast

                    New Media Show

                    The Feed Podcast

                    Classy Little Podcast

                    Audio Jungle

                    Best Podcasting Gear

                    Learn to Subscribe to a Podcast

                    Ask Gary Vee show

                    Yngwie Malmsteen

                    Podcast Review Show

                    ]]>40410eb71c268509233aedc7edf0b28fMon, 13 Jun 2016 04:00:00 -040058:35falsefull518518The Ultimate New and Noteworthy - Muhammad Ali This week I am saddened by the lost of my champ Muhammad Ali. When I was growing up there were two things that were constant in my life.
                    1. Richard Nixon was President
                    2. Muhammad Ali was the Greatest Boxer of All Time
                    
                    

                    Today there are lesson I feel we can learn from Muhmmad Ali as podcasters.  When I hear name Muhammad Ali there is so much more to a guy that was good in the ring.

                    He Know Both Sides of Boxing

                    There are two ways to win in boxing

                    1. Don't get hit. He ounce dodged 21 punches in 10 seconds.
                    2. Hit the other guy.
                    
                    

                    As a child Muhammad would have his brother throw rocks at his head. As I was watching old clips of his fights today, one of his strengths was the ability to not get hit. He also had incredibly fast hands. He punched before you even saw it coming.

                    The Two Ways to Win in Podcasting

                    1. Create content that positively impacts your audience
                    2. Intelligently promote it to that audience
                    
                    

                    My equation for downloads is: Value in the episode multiplied by the amount of effort put into promotion = Total Downloads.

                    He Never Stopped Moving

                    As I mentioned her was very hard to hit. Especially early in his career he never stopped dancing around the ring. If he did, it meant you were about to get hit with a ton of punches.

                    Podcasters Need to Keep Moving If we are to keep up with all the other forms of entertainment that are fighting for the attention of our audience, we need to keep moving, and always looking to be better.

                    He Was New

                    Muhammad Ali won the gold medal in the 1964 Olympics (known then as Cassius Clay). He then did something most boxers didn't do. He spoke. He not only spoke, he made poems and boasted about how he was going to to beat his opponent. When most boxers didn't have the intelligent to put together a full sentence, here was one that was fighting to get a microphone in his fave.

                    He Was Noteworthy

                    He won his fist championship fighting Sunny Liston. Sunny Liston was a huge favorite with of 8 to 1. Nobody thought Ali had a chance. When he beat the champ, that was truly noteworthy, and people did indeed take note. By the way, Ali later admitted that he feared Liston, but acted so crazy to intimidate him (and he did).

                    Podcasters: If you truly want to be New and Noteworthy, you need to come up with something new (it's not easy) and create content that is noteworthy. Something that will get your audience. If you want to be New and Noteworthy, be, um, New and Truly Noteworthy.

                    He Was A Man of Integrity

                    When he was drafted he refused. It went against his religious beliefs. The consequences, they stripped him of his title, banned him from boxing for three years (during the prime of his career). Later it was overturned by a unanimous decision by the Supreme Court.

                    Integrity as a podcaster: 

                    We need to stand up for what we believe in. Can you imagine if someone said "Do this, or we are removing you from iTunes, and every other directory, we are disabling your RSS feed, and we're taking your microphone? We can't sell out to bad sponsors that don't fit our show, and to strategies that are less than transparent. You have integrity when you start podcasting, once you lose it, it is very hard, if not impossible, to get back.

                    He Used His Authority For Good

                    He could've taken his money, and retired. Instead he had one of his biggest fights in Africa? Why because he wanted to boost the economy. When he was banned from boxing her was a speaker at colleges. He embraced diversity.

                    Giving Back as a Podcaster

                    We can give back by supporting causes like the Podcast Awards, New Media Europe (which are currently struggling). We can use our microphone to help people, and to spotlight those things that need to be in the spotlight.

                    He Apologized For Crossing the Line

                    Ali was famous for calling his opponents names. Leading up to one fight he called Joe Frazier a Gorilla. While Ali did this to rile up his appointment and increase ticket sales (and it worked in both cases) he later would apologize to Joe's son, and eventually to Joe and the two became friends before Joe passed away.

                    Podcasters can take back words. I know I've said things about Audello, and I once made some remarks about an article online that crossed the line of fact related, and got personal. I have since apologized for my words, removed the comments from their blog, and we have patched things up.

                    Help These Podcast Resources

                    New Media Europe

                    Podcastawards.com (and while you're there, vote for the school of podcasting in the education category :)

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    Podcasters Roundtable Discuss the Importance of New and Noteworthy with Ray Ortega, +Daniel J. Lewis +Dave Jackson, +George Whittam and +Ian Robinson

                    I appeared on the Super Joe Pardo Dreamer's Podcast

                    PodcastGuests.com Review

                    I recently heard and used PodcastsGuests.com and wasn't sure what to expect. Within a week I had over 15 people who had replied. What was I looking for?  I wanted people who could answer the question, "Because of my podcast _____." I've definitely got some people who I will be contacting in the future.

                    It is a tool to find guests, and also to be found as a potential guest on other shows.

                    For more resources check out podcastingresources.com

                    The School of Podcasting is Open!

                    Save time, save your money (by not buying stuff you don't need). If you think you don't have the budget, look at your other hobbies. I looked at a gold course in Kent, Ohio it was $15 for 9 holes. If you did 18 holes twice a month that would be $60. A local bowling leagues was $15 a week. That is another $60 a month. A local bike shop had a clearance sale and the cheapest bike was $410. The School of Podcasting has step by step tutorials, a private Facebook Group (for networking), Live "Office Hours" where you can come and get free consulting, and priority email support. Sign up Today

                     

                    ]]>This week I am saddened by the lost of my champ Muhammad Ali. When I was growing up there were two things that were constant in my life.
                    1. Richard Nixon was President
                    2. Muhammad Ali was the Greatest Boxer of All Time
                    
                    

                    Today there are lesson I feel we can learn from Muhmmad Ali as podcasters.  When I hear name Muhammad Ali there is so much more to a guy that was good in the ring.

                    He Know Both Sides of Boxing

                    There are two ways to win in boxing

                    1. Don't get hit. He ounce dodged 21 punches in 10 seconds.
                    2. Hit the other guy.
                    
                    

                    As a child Muhammad would have his brother throw rocks at his head. As I was watching old clips of his fights today, one of his strengths was the ability to not get hit. He also had incredibly fast hands. He punched before you even saw it coming.

                    The Two Ways to Win in Podcasting

                    1. Create content that positively impacts your audience
                    2. Intelligently promote it to that audience
                    
                    

                    My equation for downloads is: Value in the episode multiplied by the amount of effort put into promotion = Total Downloads.

                    He Never Stopped Moving

                    As I mentioned her was very hard to hit. Especially early in his career he never stopped dancing around the ring. If he did, it meant you were about to get hit with a ton of punches.

                    Podcasters Need to Keep Moving If we are to keep up with all the other forms of entertainment that are fighting for the attention of our audience, we need to keep moving, and always looking to be better.

                    He Was New

                    Muhammad Ali won the gold medal in the 1964 Olympics (known then as Cassius Clay). He then did something most boxers didn't do. He spoke. He not only spoke, he made poems and boasted about how he was going to to beat his opponent. When most boxers didn't have the intelligent to put together a full sentence, here was one that was fighting to get a microphone in his fave.

                    He Was Noteworthy

                    He won his fist championship fighting Sunny Liston. Sunny Liston was a huge favorite with of 8 to 1. Nobody thought Ali had a chance. When he beat the champ, that was truly noteworthy, and people did indeed take note. By the way, Ali later admitted that he feared Liston, but acted so crazy to intimidate him (and he did).

                    Podcasters: If you truly want to be New and Noteworthy, you need to come up with something new (it's not easy) and create content that is noteworthy. Something that will get your audience. If you want to be New and Noteworthy, be, um, New and Truly Noteworthy.

                    He Was A Man of Integrity

                    When he was drafted he refused. It went against his religious beliefs. The consequences, they stripped him of his title, banned him from boxing for three years (during the prime of his career). Later it was overturned by a unanimous decision by the Supreme Court.

                    Integrity as a podcaster: 

                    We need to stand up for what we believe in. Can you imagine if someone said "Do this, or we are removing you from iTunes, and every other directory, we are disabling your RSS feed, and we're taking your microphone? We can't sell out to bad sponsors that don't fit our show, and to strategies that are less than transparent. You have integrity when you start podcasting, once you lose it, it is very hard, if not impossible, to get back.

                    He Used His Authority For Good

                    He could've taken his money, and retired. Instead he had one of his biggest fights in Africa? Why because he wanted to boost the economy. When he was banned from boxing her was a speaker at colleges. He embraced diversity.

                    Giving Back as a Podcaster

                    We can give back by supporting causes like the Podcast Awards, New Media Europe (which are currently struggling). We can use our microphone to help people, and to spotlight those things that need to be in the spotlight.

                    He Apologized For Crossing the Line

                    Ali was famous for calling his opponents names. Leading up to one fight he called Joe Frazier a Gorilla. While Ali did this to rile up his appointment and increase ticket sales (and it worked in both cases) he later would apologize to Joe's son, and eventually to Joe and the two became friends before Joe passed away.

                    Podcasters can take back words. I know I've said things about Audello, and I once made some remarks about an article online that crossed the line of fact related, and got personal. I have since apologized for my words, removed the comments from their blog, and we have patched things up.

                    Help These Podcast Resources

                    New Media Europe

                    Podcastawards.com (and while you're there, vote for the school of podcasting in the education category :)

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    Podcasters Roundtable Discuss the Importance of New and Noteworthy with Ray Ortega, +Daniel J. Lewis +Dave Jackson, +George Whittam and +Ian Robinson

                    I appeared on the Super Joe Pardo Dreamer's Podcast

                    PodcastGuests.com Review

                    I recently heard and used PodcastsGuests.com and wasn't sure what to expect. Within a week I had over 15 people who had replied. What was I looking for?  I wanted people who could answer the question, "Because of my podcast _____." I've definitely got some people who I will be contacting in the future.

                    It is a tool to find guests, and also to be found as a potential guest on other shows.

                    For more resources check out podcastingresources.com

                    The School of Podcasting is Open!

                    Save time, save your money (by not buying stuff you don't need). If you think you don't have the budget, look at your other hobbies. I looked at a gold course in Kent, Ohio it was $15 for 9 holes. If you did 18 holes twice a month that would be $60. A local bowling leagues was $15 a week. That is another $60 a month. A local bike shop had a clearance sale and the cheapest bike was $410. The School of Podcasting has step by step tutorials, a private Facebook Group (for networking), Live "Office Hours" where you can come and get free consulting, and priority email support. Sign up Today

                     

                    ]]>d0eddda3b5aabfe7ded48c0bbe9a1802Mon, 06 Jun 2016 04:57:31 -040036:53falsefull517517Yes, You Can Change Your PodcastThis week PODCASTS was a category on Jeopardy. This again shows how podcasting is growing and becoming more and more main stream.Awareness over the last year has gone from 48% to 49 % now it jumped to 55%. The percentage of people who have listened to a podcast is up to 36% (90 million people in the US) up from 33% the previous year and 30% the previous year. 
                      It's OK, You'll Be Fine

                    So I've been holding these "Podcasting Puzzle" webinars that feature podcasting 101 information. I love talking to people about why they haven't started. You know all the reason why you should start, all the ways you can benefit from a podcast, and yet here you are... no podcast. 

                    Well I know how you feel. Now you might be thinking, "Dave you have been podcasting for 11 years, no you don't." Well, I'm here to tell you I do. Here is why. I've been planning on using Facebook Ads to promote the School of Podcasting. I watched countless videos. I know all the pros. I know not to promote a post and to use the Power Editor. I have videos that pretty much walk me through the process and yet here I am ... no Ads.

                    Why? 

                    It's new, and I don't want to waste my money. I don't want to waste my time. I don't know what I'm doing. 

                    There have been things I've waste money on (exercise equipment over the years, guitars, etc), there have been things that I've wasted my time on (marriage, diet), but when I look back on those items they aren't really a waste. Here is why:

                    1. I came out a better person with a better understanding of my strengths and weaknesses.
                    2. I learned that some things that work for others won't work for me. 
                    3. It got my toe in the water of a new thing, that allowed me to carry on. It was the price of a launch
                    
                    Rebranding Your Podcast

                    Today we talk with Kathy Kelly of the Special Mouse Podcast. She's been doing it for years, and feels she has said all there is to say on the subject, and is having a hard time recommending Disney due to the rising cost of just attending the park, and they seem to care less and less about people with special needs (way to have integrity!), but she didn't want to quit podcasting. She enjoys her Facebook group, and the relationships she has built with her audience. So what is she going to do?

                    She is going to create a show for mothers of autistic children. She will keep enjoying the relationships she has built, and quick talking about things she doesn't want to talk about (Disney). 

                    Because her new podcast is very similar to her old podcast she can rebrand (change the name and artwork) and keep her old audience, reviews, and subscribers. She will make a new feed for her old show (Special mouse) and keep her audience with the new show. 

                    Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement July 6-8 in Chicago (use the coupon code sop40 to save)

                    Podcast Mid Atlantic Septemeber 9-10 in New Jersey use  http://podcastmidatlantic.com/sop to save 10%

                    Because of His Podcast: Michael Butler Gets a New Computer!

                    When Michael Butler found out his old computer needed $600 worth of parts, he turned to his audience who had someone who was able to get him a computer for free. Michael was down to recording his show on his Phone using the Bossjock app. 

                    ]]>This week PODCASTS was a category on Jeopardy. This again shows how podcasting is growing and becoming more and more main stream.Awareness over the last year has gone from 48% to 49 % now it jumped to 55%. The percentage of people who have listened to a podcast is up to 36% (90 million people in the US) up from 33% the previous year and 30% the previous year. 
                      It's OK, You'll Be Fine

                    So I've been holding these "Podcasting Puzzle" webinars that feature podcasting 101 information. I love talking to people about why they haven't started. You know all the reason why you should start, all the ways you can benefit from a podcast, and yet here you are... no podcast. 

                    Well I know how you feel. Now you might be thinking, "Dave you have been podcasting for 11 years, no you don't." Well, I'm here to tell you I do. Here is why. I've been planning on using Facebook Ads to promote the School of Podcasting. I watched countless videos. I know all the pros. I know not to promote a post and to use the Power Editor. I have videos that pretty much walk me through the process and yet here I am ... no Ads.

                    Why? 

                    It's new, and I don't want to waste my money. I don't want to waste my time. I don't know what I'm doing. 

                    There have been things I've waste money on (exercise equipment over the years, guitars, etc), there have been things that I've wasted my time on (marriage, diet), but when I look back on those items they aren't really a waste. Here is why:

                    1. I came out a better person with a better understanding of my strengths and weaknesses.
                    2. I learned that some things that work for others won't work for me. 
                    3. It got my toe in the water of a new thing, that allowed me to carry on. It was the price of a launch
                    
                    Rebranding Your Podcast

                    Today we talk with Kathy Kelly of the Special Mouse Podcast. She's been doing it for years, and feels she has said all there is to say on the subject, and is having a hard time recommending Disney due to the rising cost of just attending the park, and they seem to care less and less about people with special needs (way to have integrity!), but she didn't want to quit podcasting. She enjoys her Facebook group, and the relationships she has built with her audience. So what is she going to do?

                    She is going to create a show for mothers of autistic children. She will keep enjoying the relationships she has built, and quick talking about things she doesn't want to talk about (Disney). 

                    Because her new podcast is very similar to her old podcast she can rebrand (change the name and artwork) and keep her old audience, reviews, and subscribers. She will make a new feed for her old show (Special mouse) and keep her audience with the new show. 

                    Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement July 6-8 in Chicago (use the coupon code sop40 to save)

                    Podcast Mid Atlantic Septemeber 9-10 in New Jersey use  http://podcastmidatlantic.com/sop to save 10%

                    Because of His Podcast: Michael Butler Gets a New Computer!

                    When Michael Butler found out his old computer needed $600 worth of parts, he turned to his audience who had someone who was able to get him a computer for free. Michael was down to recording his show on his Phone using the Bossjock app. 

                    ]]>9f6de7ab76b81ffd21ac404522216561Mon, 30 May 2016 04:07:45 -040049:06falsefull516516Compressor, Noise Gates, De Essers in Plain EnglishGot a note from Corey Fineran

                    I just handed my boss my resignation letter! This podcasting journey started 7 1/2 years ago and it's now allowed me to leave my job and start my own business! You've probably heard me talk about Ivy Envy (my podcast on the Chicago Cubs) more than the one I did for my employer. Since 2012, I've been able to call myself a "professional podcast producer" as my employer created a new position for me to do video podcasts for teachers to play in their classrooms to help high school students with disabilities in their transition from high school to life after high school (primarily through work/employment). Well, there is a huge need for this type of curriculum and schools all over the state of Illinois have started using that podcast. I saw a need and last summer, I started working on starting my own business, creating innovative and interactive online transition curriculum and marketing it to schools all over the country. After receiving contracts from school districts and cooperatives, I'm able to leave my job at the end of this school year. Many of the people in this group have influenced me (whether they know it or not) to take this scary jump. +Bob Zerull +Ray Ortega +Daniel Hayes +Nick Seuberling  +David Jackson  and of course, +Tawny Fineran who has been insanely supportive over the last year as I've worked on building this. If you're curious to check out what I've been working on, you can find it here: http://transitioncurriculum.com

                    Another Problem with Your Show's Title Headline

                    As I now work for Libsyn (where you can get a free month using the coupon code sopfree), and I get to see some mistakes that people are making. Now I'm doing a bit of a repeat, and that is people make horrible headlines. In the past I've talked about starting off a headline with the date. What I am seeing now is people putting the name of their show at the beginning of the headline. Why this makes no sens, is any place you can see the headline (your website, a listing in iTunes) you already see the name of the show. Also here is another thing to keep in mind, on the podcasts app from Apple, you can only see 45 characters of the headline if you're not subscribed to it. Once you subscribe you see the entire headline. However, would you subscribe if every headline was: 

                    School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w  School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w  School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w 

                    You're wasting really, really valuable space. 

                    Why do we care? I had a client who had a respected media outlet that wanted to put their RSS feed on their site. They tested it and the headlines were horrible, and they wanted the producer to change all of their headlines. 

                    Want to make great Headlines, check out my Free Headlines Resources

                    Multiple Websites Question Revisited

                    Paul said, "

                    Heard your comments about updating multiple websites. I have 7 x WordPress sites, have used ManageWP for a couple of years now, love it!

                    VERY easy to update all sites at once, gives you immediate admin access to all sites without login and very simple to add and take new WP installations, with dynamic pricing. 

                    Daniel said, " I use iThemes Sync. ]But you should also check out JetPack’s built-in module for plugin updates. Then, you can login to wordpress.com/plugins (I think) and update all your plugins from there. It’s not as thorough as Sync or others. But it’s free with no limit on sites.

                    Is Blab.Im Going Away?

                    The quick answer is no. However, the CEO stated this week "Blab is not doubling down on broadcaster tools.” They want to focus more on equipping people to hang out. We talked about this on the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST and here are some theories of what this might really mean.

                    1. They can't make it reliable
                    2. Podcasters are perfectionists
                    3. They are working on other projects (an app for teens)
                    4. This is as good as it gets. 
                    
                    

                    For me it means, I'm not leaving the platform until it doesn't work for me. I will be scouting other options. 

                    Thanks For the Review

                    "What a fantastic resource this show has been for me. As a 51 year old professional in the entertainment industry, I knew nothing about podcasting when I decided to have my own show. The School of Podcasting has and will continue to be my GPS (great podcasting source). Thanks Dave for doing your homework! Alan Bruess, Tailgate Entertainer" from AlanB-Tractor Guy. This review was sent to me automatically from My Podcast Reviews (have all reviews from all countries, as well as sticher be sent to your email )

                    Advanced Podcasting Recording Tools in Plain English

                    Today I'm joined by Chris Curran of the podcastengineeringschool.com and http://fractalrecording.com/ who has spent years as an audio engineer in the music business, and is now turning his skills on podcasting. 

                    Now keep in mind, you do NOT need these items to get started. Next week I'm doing a podcast with just a microphone and audacity. No effects at all. 

                    Today we talk through 

                    What is a compressor? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    What is a noise gate? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    What is a De-Esser? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

                    Check out www.podcastingpuzzle.com and

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com 

                    ]]>Got a note from Corey Fineran

                    I just handed my boss my resignation letter! This podcasting journey started 7 1/2 years ago and it's now allowed me to leave my job and start my own business! You've probably heard me talk about Ivy Envy (my podcast on the Chicago Cubs) more than the one I did for my employer. Since 2012, I've been able to call myself a "professional podcast producer" as my employer created a new position for me to do video podcasts for teachers to play in their classrooms to help high school students with disabilities in their transition from high school to life after high school (primarily through work/employment). Well, there is a huge need for this type of curriculum and schools all over the state of Illinois have started using that podcast. I saw a need and last summer, I started working on starting my own business, creating innovative and interactive online transition curriculum and marketing it to schools all over the country. After receiving contracts from school districts and cooperatives, I'm able to leave my job at the end of this school year. Many of the people in this group have influenced me (whether they know it or not) to take this scary jump. +Bob Zerull +Ray Ortega +Daniel Hayes +Nick Seuberling  +David Jackson  and of course, +Tawny Fineran who has been insanely supportive over the last year as I've worked on building this. If you're curious to check out what I've been working on, you can find it here: http://transitioncurriculum.com

                    Another Problem with Your Show's Title Headline

                    As I now work for Libsyn (where you can get a free month using the coupon code sopfree), and I get to see some mistakes that people are making. Now I'm doing a bit of a repeat, and that is people make horrible headlines. In the past I've talked about starting off a headline with the date. What I am seeing now is people putting the name of their show at the beginning of the headline. Why this makes no sens, is any place you can see the headline (your website, a listing in iTunes) you already see the name of the show. Also here is another thing to keep in mind, on the podcasts app from Apple, you can only see 45 characters of the headline if you're not subscribed to it. Once you subscribe you see the entire headline. However, would you subscribe if every headline was: 

                    School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w  School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w  School of Podcasting - How to Podcast Today w 

                    You're wasting really, really valuable space. 

                    Why do we care? I had a client who had a respected media outlet that wanted to put their RSS feed on their site. They tested it and the headlines were horrible, and they wanted the producer to change all of their headlines. 

                    Want to make great Headlines, check out my Free Headlines Resources

                    Multiple Websites Question Revisited

                    Paul said, "

                    Heard your comments about updating multiple websites. I have 7 x WordPress sites, have used ManageWP for a couple of years now, love it!

                    VERY easy to update all sites at once, gives you immediate admin access to all sites without login and very simple to add and take new WP installations, with dynamic pricing. 

                    Daniel said, " I use iThemes Sync. ]But you should also check out JetPack’s built-in module for plugin updates. Then, you can login to wordpress.com/plugins (I think) and update all your plugins from there. It’s not as thorough as Sync or others. But it’s free with no limit on sites.

                    Is Blab.Im Going Away?

                    The quick answer is no. However, the CEO stated this week "Blab is not doubling down on broadcaster tools.” They want to focus more on equipping people to hang out. We talked about this on the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do every Saturday at 10:30 AM EST and here are some theories of what this might really mean.

                    1. They can't make it reliable
                    2. Podcasters are perfectionists
                    3. They are working on other projects (an app for teens)
                    4. This is as good as it gets. 
                    
                    

                    For me it means, I'm not leaving the platform until it doesn't work for me. I will be scouting other options. 

                    Thanks For the Review

                    "What a fantastic resource this show has been for me. As a 51 year old professional in the entertainment industry, I knew nothing about podcasting when I decided to have my own show. The School of Podcasting has and will continue to be my GPS (great podcasting source). Thanks Dave for doing your homework! Alan Bruess, Tailgate Entertainer" from AlanB-Tractor Guy. This review was sent to me automatically from My Podcast Reviews (have all reviews from all countries, as well as sticher be sent to your email )

                    Advanced Podcasting Recording Tools in Plain English

                    Today I'm joined by Chris Curran of the podcastengineeringschool.com and http://fractalrecording.com/ who has spent years as an audio engineer in the music business, and is now turning his skills on podcasting. 

                    Now keep in mind, you do NOT need these items to get started. Next week I'm doing a podcast with just a microphone and audacity. No effects at all. 

                    Today we talk through 

                    What is a compressor? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    What is a noise gate? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    What is a De-Esser? What do the knobs do? What does it sound like if I messed up?

                    Thinking of Starting a Podcast?

                    Check out www.podcastingpuzzle.com and

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com 

                    ]]>8b5e4c43306844e83d3699749931591cMon, 23 May 2016 04:00:00 -040058:17falsefull515515Podcasting Brings More CustomersToday on the School of Podcasting we talk content marketing, why podcasting is a perfect tool for this strategy, and how to overcome one of the biggest hurdles for those needing interaction on their website.
                    Podcast Rewind

                    2:15 I appeared on the Maximize Excellence show with Joe Hicks. Joe walks you through an Ideology of the four pillars of excellence. I really liked the show, and Joe (a graduate of the School of Podcasting) is doing a great job. Check it out at www.maximizeexcellence.com  or subscribe in iTunes.

                    Because of Podcasting

                    5:20 I have read the book, Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less: How to Tell a Different Story, ... and Win More Customers by Marketing Less and it had some great stories of content marketing.

                    There was a blacksmith that worked with farmers. He would listen to them complain about how mud would get stuck on their plow. He later invented a plow made of steel that the mud didn't stick to. He listened to his audience and gave them what they needed.

                    In 1885, he started a magazine called The Furrow. The purpose of the magazine was to  educate farmers on new technology and how they could be more successful business owners and farmers (thus, content marketing).

                    The Furrow was not filled with promotional messages and self-serving content. It was developed by thoughtful journalists, storytellers, and designers, and covered topics that farmers cared about deeply. The goal of the content was to help farmers become more prosperous and, of course, profitable. Now, 120 years later, The Furrow is still going strong. It is the largest circulated farming magazine in the world, delivered monthly to over 1.5 million farmers, in 12 languages to 40 different countries.

                    Who was this blacksmith? John Deere, he was quite an inventor. You may have heard of his tractors.

                    1900: Michelin develops The Michelin Guide. This 400-page guide, now with its iconic red cover, helps drivers maintain their cars and find decent lodging. In its first edition, 35,000 copies were distributed for free.

                    1904: Jell-O recipe book pays off. Jell-O distributes free copies of a recipe book that contributes to sales of over $ 1 million by 1906.

                    1913: Burns & McDonnell Engineering launch BenchMark. This Kansas City engineering and consulting firm still produces its award-winning BenchMark magazine to this day.

                    1930's Proctor and Gamble started making radio dramas. This was an extremely successful strategy. It often would feature ads for Duz and Oxydol detergents. Later these would move to Television. Many people refer to them as Soap Operas.

                    Your podcast could be the next Furrow. You use your podcast to build your brand. You use it to gain the trust of your audience. You build a relationship with your audience. Then later you can capitalize on that relationship. So content marketing is not new, but it can be tricky

                      Podcasting Boosts Grades

                    12: 52 Craig from Ingleaspodcast.com shared a story on the Ask the Podcast Coach on how he had students do extra homework by listening to podcasts. The other in the class did not. Those who reinforced their learning with podcasting had better grades.  He did have one student who originally did not listen to the podcasts (but his grades had improved). Later, he confessed he had been listening to the podcasts.

                    Using Content Upgrades In Your Podcast

                    19:08 A content upgrade offers extra value on the initial article or content. It typically is a downloadable, email-gated piece that strikes while the proverbial iron is hot. For podcasters maybe the price of admission is not an email address, but simply a click to get back to your site, where you can then get them to subscribe, click, etc.

                    Great Example

                    Scott Johnson does the Computer Tutor Podcast. It is one of my favorites. It's around 5 minutes, and Scott brings cool tips that even as someone who was teaching software for a living for 20+ years, I learned things. Well in his last episode he did something that appears similar to a content upgrade.

                    He explained that if you type in http://netflix.com/browse/genre/xxxxx  that XXX can be a category number that can range from Action & Adventure: 1365 to  Zombie Horror Movies: 75405  while this is helpful, if you don't have the category numbers you're stuck. So where do you go to get those category numbers? You guessed it Scott's Computer Florida Website

                    So what does this do. You only get people on your website who really want this information. Casual Netflix users may not care. Me? I do a lot of Netflix, so I was all over it. So I went over, and I checked out some music-related categories, and then I went to documentaries. There it was. The documentary Alive Inside. Have you seen it? IT'S AMAZING. Check this out.

                    So I find this MIND BLOWING MOVIE, and who gets credit? Scott Johnson from the Computer Tutor Podcast.

                    I challenge you. Yes, you. I challenge you Netflix users to watch the movie Alive Inside and NOT tell someone about it.

                    When I talk about creating content that makes people talk about your show, that's the kind of information I'm talking about.

                    Being Real Can Inspire Real Results

                    33:00 In some cases, just being real can catch people off guard. Our world is one where lies are the native tongue of our politicians. When we hear someone be brutally honest, it can really catch us off guard. On Episode 701 of the WTF podcast with Marc Maron, he talks about dealing with grief as he prepares to go to a funeral and reflects on the death of Prince. He explained how he deals with his feelings, and how it's easy to ignore your feelings. He explained how it's better to deal with your feelings. It sounded as if he was at times fighting back tears. Then on episode 702 he reads a letter on how Marc sharing his feelings, and being honest, allowed someone to better deal with his grief, and to deal with a situation he is going through.

                    It's not always about downloads and CPM rates. Sometimes, it's about connecting with people and leaving the world a better place.

                      Money Making Strategy for Those Promoting Kickstarter Campaigns

                    37:38 If you are ever promoting kickstart campaigns on your show (like Rob Today in iOs) you might want to check out kickbooster.me

                    Here is how it works.

                    Become a Booster to get immediate access of hundreds of crowdfunding campaigns in the Kickbooster Marketplace that are offering a reward for helping spread the word about their campaign. Choose the ones you want to promote, blog, post, and tweet about them, and get paid for your efforts. You earn 10% on all successful referrals. You can even earn 10% cashback on your own pledge

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Podcast Review Show

                    More Podcast Money Kindle Book

                    Sign up for the Newsletter

                    Podcasting Puzzle (Podcasting 101 Webinar)

                     

                    ]]>Today on the School of Podcasting we talk content marketing, why podcasting is a perfect tool for this strategy, and how to overcome one of the biggest hurdles for those needing interaction on their website.
                    Podcast Rewind

                    2:15 I appeared on the Maximize Excellence show with Joe Hicks. Joe walks you through an Ideology of the four pillars of excellence. I really liked the show, and Joe (a graduate of the School of Podcasting) is doing a great job. Check it out at www.maximizeexcellence.com  or subscribe in iTunes.

                    Because of Podcasting

                    5:20 I have read the book, Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less: How to Tell a Different Story, ... and Win More Customers by Marketing Less and it had some great stories of content marketing.

                    There was a blacksmith that worked with farmers. He would listen to them complain about how mud would get stuck on their plow. He later invented a plow made of steel that the mud didn't stick to. He listened to his audience and gave them what they needed.

                    In 1885, he started a magazine called The Furrow. The purpose of the magazine was to  educate farmers on new technology and how they could be more successful business owners and farmers (thus, content marketing).

                    The Furrow was not filled with promotional messages and self-serving content. It was developed by thoughtful journalists, storytellers, and designers, and covered topics that farmers cared about deeply. The goal of the content was to help farmers become more prosperous and, of course, profitable. Now, 120 years later, The Furrow is still going strong. It is the largest circulated farming magazine in the world, delivered monthly to over 1.5 million farmers, in 12 languages to 40 different countries.

                    Who was this blacksmith? John Deere, he was quite an inventor. You may have heard of his tractors.

                    1900: Michelin develops The Michelin Guide. This 400-page guide, now with its iconic red cover, helps drivers maintain their cars and find decent lodging. In its first edition, 35,000 copies were distributed for free.

                    1904: Jell-O recipe book pays off. Jell-O distributes free copies of a recipe book that contributes to sales of over $ 1 million by 1906.

                    1913: Burns & McDonnell Engineering launch BenchMark. This Kansas City engineering and consulting firm still produces its award-winning BenchMark magazine to this day.

                    1930's Proctor and Gamble started making radio dramas. This was an extremely successful strategy. It often would feature ads for Duz and Oxydol detergents. Later these would move to Television. Many people refer to them as Soap Operas.

                    Your podcast could be the next Furrow. You use your podcast to build your brand. You use it to gain the trust of your audience. You build a relationship with your audience. Then later you can capitalize on that relationship. So content marketing is not new, but it can be tricky

                      Podcasting Boosts Grades

                    12: 52 Craig from Ingleaspodcast.com shared a story on the Ask the Podcast Coach on how he had students do extra homework by listening to podcasts. The other in the class did not. Those who reinforced their learning with podcasting had better grades.  He did have one student who originally did not listen to the podcasts (but his grades had improved). Later, he confessed he had been listening to the podcasts.

                    Using Content Upgrades In Your Podcast

                    19:08 A content upgrade offers extra value on the initial article or content. It typically is a downloadable, email-gated piece that strikes while the proverbial iron is hot. For podcasters maybe the price of admission is not an email address, but simply a click to get back to your site, where you can then get them to subscribe, click, etc.

                    Great Example

                    Scott Johnson does the Computer Tutor Podcast. It is one of my favorites. It's around 5 minutes, and Scott brings cool tips that even as someone who was teaching software for a living for 20+ years, I learned things. Well in his last episode he did something that appears similar to a content upgrade.

                    He explained that if you type in http://netflix.com/browse/genre/xxxxx  that XXX can be a category number that can range from Action & Adventure: 1365 to  Zombie Horror Movies: 75405  while this is helpful, if you don't have the category numbers you're stuck. So where do you go to get those category numbers? You guessed it Scott's Computer Florida Website

                    So what does this do. You only get people on your website who really want this information. Casual Netflix users may not care. Me? I do a lot of Netflix, so I was all over it. So I went over, and I checked out some music-related categories, and then I went to documentaries. There it was. The documentary Alive Inside. Have you seen it? IT'S AMAZING. Check this out.

                    So I find this MIND BLOWING MOVIE, and who gets credit? Scott Johnson from the Computer Tutor Podcast.

                    I challenge you. Yes, you. I challenge you Netflix users to watch the movie Alive Inside and NOT tell someone about it.

                    When I talk about creating content that makes people talk about your show, that's the kind of information I'm talking about.

                    Being Real Can Inspire Real Results

                    33:00 In some cases, just being real can catch people off guard. Our world is one where lies are the native tongue of our politicians. When we hear someone be brutally honest, it can really catch us off guard. On Episode 701 of the WTF podcast with Marc Maron, he talks about dealing with grief as he prepares to go to a funeral and reflects on the death of Prince. He explained how he deals with his feelings, and how it's easy to ignore your feelings. He explained how it's better to deal with your feelings. It sounded as if he was at times fighting back tears. Then on episode 702 he reads a letter on how Marc sharing his feelings, and being honest, allowed someone to better deal with his grief, and to deal with a situation he is going through.

                    It's not always about downloads and CPM rates. Sometimes, it's about connecting with people and leaving the world a better place.

                      Money Making Strategy for Those Promoting Kickstarter Campaigns

                    37:38 If you are ever promoting kickstart campaigns on your show (like Rob Today in iOs) you might want to check out kickbooster.me

                    Here is how it works.

                    Become a Booster to get immediate access of hundreds of crowdfunding campaigns in the Kickbooster Marketplace that are offering a reward for helping spread the word about their campaign. Choose the ones you want to promote, blog, post, and tweet about them, and get paid for your efforts. You earn 10% on all successful referrals. You can even earn 10% cashback on your own pledge

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Podcast Review Show

                    More Podcast Money Kindle Book

                    Sign up for the Newsletter

                    Podcasting Puzzle (Podcasting 101 Webinar)

                     

                    ]]>699af3ad7047458efc6097229f8cc866Mon, 16 May 2016 04:00:00 -040041:29falsefull514514Keeping Your Podcast Legal - Gordon FiremarkIn this episode we are joined by Lawyer Gordon Firemark who produces multiple podcasts that include, Entertainment Industry Insights, Entertainment Law Update, and  The Law Podcasting as well as his own course that teachers lawyers how to podcast at Lawpodcasting.com.

                    He is the author of the book The Podcast, Blog & New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide: An essential resource for content creators (amazon) or if you want the pdf of the book go to http://www.podcastlawbook.com/

                    Today we talk about:

                    How Gordon got into entertainment law

                    How to register a trademark. How a trademark is your brand. Here is the US Patent and Trademark Office Website  www.uspto.gov

                    Understanding Copyright

                    When is it OK to play music in your podcast?

                    How do you avoid being sued for slander?

                    Fair Use (Gordan has a great video about this on YouTube)

                    Tips on Negotiating contacts

                    Dave explains how he got fined for using an image from images.google.com (so yes, you can get busted)

                    How to avoid "Defaming" someone.

                    Release forms. podcastrelease.com is a free example (email address required).

                    How he found his co-host.

                    How lawyers are using podcasting to get more clients.

                    Affiliate links.

                    copyright.gov dmca agent

                    Gordon (like Dave) recommends the Audio Technica 2100  microphone

                     

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Dave Hooper of Red Podcast- I am Much Smoother on the Microphone when I'm doing promos for my radio show

                    Ryan K park of Foodcraftsmen.com was much more confident when he appeared on the local news

                     

                    Question For the Audience

                    I've heard about Manage WP and CMS Commander, InfiniteWP,  WPRemote, iContrlWP,  iThemes Sync, but I've never used any. If you have any insights I would love to hear them. If you have any insights that would allow you to update multiple sites from one location (and I'm not looking to get into WordPress Multi-site ).

                    Free Podcasting Puzzle Webinars

                    The  Ultimate Podcasting 101 Live Webinar

                    I will be holding three webinars as we prepare for registration to open at the School of Podcasting June 1. It's call "Understanding the Podcasting Puzzle" and you can sign up to get the links to the LIVE not pre-recorded) webinars. Here are the dates to attend:

                    Saturday May 21 1 - 2 PM EST

                    Wednesday May 25th 8-9 PM EST

                    Saturday May 28th 1 -2 PM EST

                    Go to podcastingpuzzle.com for more information on attending.

                     

                     

                    ]]>In this episode we are joined by Lawyer Gordon Firemark who produces multiple podcasts that include, Entertainment Industry Insights, Entertainment Law Update, and  The Law Podcasting as well as his own course that teachers lawyers how to podcast at Lawpodcasting.com.

                    He is the author of the book The Podcast, Blog & New Media Producer's Legal Survival Guide: An essential resource for content creators (amazon) or if you want the pdf of the book go to http://www.podcastlawbook.com/

                    Today we talk about:

                    How Gordon got into entertainment law

                    How to register a trademark. How a trademark is your brand. Here is the US Patent and Trademark Office Website  www.uspto.gov

                    Understanding Copyright

                    When is it OK to play music in your podcast?

                    How do you avoid being sued for slander?

                    Fair Use (Gordan has a great video about this on YouTube)

                    Tips on Negotiating contacts

                    Dave explains how he got fined for using an image from images.google.com (so yes, you can get busted)

                    How to avoid "Defaming" someone.

                    Release forms. podcastrelease.com is a free example (email address required).

                    How he found his co-host.

                    How lawyers are using podcasting to get more clients.

                    Affiliate links.

                    copyright.gov dmca agent

                    Gordon (like Dave) recommends the Audio Technica 2100  microphone

                     

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Dave Hooper of Red Podcast- I am Much Smoother on the Microphone when I'm doing promos for my radio show

                    Ryan K park of Foodcraftsmen.com was much more confident when he appeared on the local news

                     

                    Question For the Audience

                    I've heard about Manage WP and CMS Commander, InfiniteWP,  WPRemote, iContrlWP,  iThemes Sync, but I've never used any. If you have any insights I would love to hear them. If you have any insights that would allow you to update multiple sites from one location (and I'm not looking to get into WordPress Multi-site ).

                    Free Podcasting Puzzle Webinars

                    The  Ultimate Podcasting 101 Live Webinar

                    I will be holding three webinars as we prepare for registration to open at the School of Podcasting June 1. It's call "Understanding the Podcasting Puzzle" and you can sign up to get the links to the LIVE not pre-recorded) webinars. Here are the dates to attend:

                    Saturday May 21 1 - 2 PM EST

                    Wednesday May 25th 8-9 PM EST

                    Saturday May 28th 1 -2 PM EST

                    Go to podcastingpuzzle.com for more information on attending.

                     

                     

                    ]]>8c6057913f61fc8dca66d37a6ca63d30Mon, 09 May 2016 04:00:00 -040057:24falsefull513513What If Podcasting Was A Sport?Because of My Podcast: A Veteran Got a Home

                    Robert Kerns produces the Living the Vet life. He had a mortgage specialist on his show. He was contacted by someone in another state (again, podcasting is global) and the mortgage specialist was able to get the listener in contact with another specialist and the veteran was able to get his loan with a special VA Home Loan rate. None of this would have happened, but it did because of hist podcast. Check out Rob at livingthevetlife.com

                    If Podcasting Was A Sport.

                    I live in Cleveland. A fairly famous sports town. Famous, for not quite being good enough.

                    We were 1 pitch away from winning the world series.

                    Two yards away from going to the Super Bowl.

                    Over the years the Cleveland Browns Football team has taken over leading the pack of bad sports teams in Cleveland. Every few years we fire our coaches and their staffs. Our players get suspended. Our coaches stink when they are here, we fire them, and they win mutliple super bowls.

                    What does this have to do with podcasting? Stick with me.

                    In 2014 after having a miserable year the owners of the Cleveland Browns decided to work on the stadium. They installed:

                    Massive, uniquely shaped video boards,

                    Escalators that helped eliminate congestion

                    and a cranked-up audio system

                    The quote was they hoped these items "Improved the fan experience."

                    The next year they added more concessions and better lighting. The cost over two years? $125 million

                    Again they stated they wanted an "improved fan experience."

                    The best way to improve the fan experience is to put a WINNING FOOTBALL TEAM TOGETHER. The last two years our combined record is 11-21.

                    HOW DOES THIS APPLY TO PODCASTING?

                    At the core of the stadium is the team. A team we come to root for, and a team we expect to win. When they win, the fans brave insane temperatures to pack the stadium in the winter. Everyone is talking about the game on Monday morning. When the team stinks, they don't. I don't care if I can take an escalator to my seat. If the team has no shot at winning, I'm not going. I'm not watching from home, and nobody is talking about it at work, because it is horrible.

                    Well, we see people investing in a better microphone (when their original microphone was fine). They invest in a new theme for their website (that most of their audience never visits). They switch email list providers. They switch media hosting companies. They get a new player for their website. In a sense they are sprucing up the stadium of a losing team.

                    They need to put a winning team on the field. They need to create content that will impact their audience. We need to focus on our audience, that leads to great content, and the finally we need to promote that content (and hopefully get our audience to promote it as well).

                    How Do Sports Teams Get Better?

                    They prepare.

                    They watch film of both their opponent as well as watch tapes of their own games and look for mistakes they made to help avoid them.

                    They Listen

                    Good players are open to feedback. They listen to their coaches. They listen to their fellow players. They have a mindset of constant improvement. They might take a week off when the season is over, but then it is back to the gym to prepare for next season

                    They Trade Players That Didn't Work

                    When a player doesn't meet expectations (Johnny Manzel in my case) and you gave him a chance, you cut your losses.

                    They Bring in A New Set of Eyes

                    Tiger Woods has had numerous coaches over the years. The Browns hired a guy from BASEBALL who has a completely new perspective and strategy on choosing players.

                    How Do Podcasters Get Better?

                    They Prepare

                    They Prepare. They think about what they want to say before they hit record. I am writing these notes way before I press record (it's the way I do it, and I find I get better content). They listen to other podcasts. Not to rip off the content, examine why a show works (and what they can learn from it) and what doesn't work (and how they can avoid it). Realize this is all subjective, but if you don't improve, and your show's content does not inspire people to come back and listen again, your show will die.

                    They Listen

                    They form a "Focus group" of listeners who are not afraid to give constructive feedback, or they take the time to think through a negative comment to see if there is any Merritt to it.

                    They Lose Segments That Don't Resonate. I once had a segment where I would ask the audience to listen to three episodes before unsubscribing. Not a bad idea (I borrowed it from radio talk show host Jim Rome). I made a jingle for it, and it really annoyed a listener. I also started branding myself as an "Acquired taste." In the end, I didn't want to be someone you had to force down to consume. I dropped the segment. I also at one point started spotlighting my back catalog with a "This day in School of Podcasting History." There was only one problem. It bored me.

                    You Bring in a New Set of Ears

                    I get hired by people to consult on their show. Why? Because I have a fresh set of ears, and I also have an experienced set of ears. I also want you help to bring out the best parts of your show, and tweak those parts that aren't working. Now there are times when I'm not your target audience, but I can still spot things that you are missing because you're too close to see it. See podcastreviewshow.com

                    Focus and Dedication is Key to a Long Career in Podcasting

                    Johnny Manzel had talent, but no focus or discipline> Johnny focused on the money. Not serving his audience (the fans).

                    Josh Gordon was suspended in his College Days for Marijuana, and that continues as a pro. He's been suspended three times (at least) He doesn't get the big picture.

                    Wide Receiver for the Pittsburgh Steelers was suspended without pay because of a failed drug test. His second suspension for the same problem.

                    You have to stay focused making great content, and looking for smart opportunities to promote your show and create strategic partners.

                    A Key Point About Making it Into the Pros

                    According to a Google search:

                    NCAA senior players drafted by an NFL team: About one in 50, or 2.0 percent. High school senior players eventually drafted by an NFL team: About nine in 10,000, or 0.09 percent.

                    NCAA senior players drafted by an NBA team: Less than one in 75, or 1.3 percent. -- High school senior players eventually drafted by an NBA team: About three in 10,000, or 0.03 percent

                    Less than eleven in 100, or about 10.5 percent, of NCAA senior male baseball players will get drafted by a Major League Baseball (MLB) team. Approximately one in 200, or approximately 0.5 percent of high school senior boys playing interscholastic baseball will eventually be drafted by an MLB team.

                    only 132 out of those 22,000 made it into the top feeder leagues for the NHL (.6%). Of those 132 players, only 7 played in the NHL. .0312%

                    Those are astonishing numbers.

                    These are people who have been playing the game all their life.

                    Number of podcasters who get enough downloads to get a "big" advertiser: 8% (source Rob from Libsyn.com). (You can make a good living with smaller sponsors see Glenn Hebert Interview)

                    Special Thanks

                    Thanks to Kim for playing the part of the female reporter in the skit today. Kim does the Toastmasters 101 podcast at toastmasters101.net

                    Podcast Conferences Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement – Chicago – July 6-8 Use coupon (sop40)

                    Podcast Success Summit – Online May 16th June 9th

                    Podcast MidAtltantic – NJ – September 9 -10th

                    Great Notes From Tim Ferris

                    His goal is to not make money, but build his relationship with his audience. In this article he says:

                    "I want to convert casual listeners into die-hard, fervent listeners, and I want to convert casual sponsors into die-hard, fervent sponsors. This requires two things: 1) Playing the long game, and 2) Strategically leaving some chips on the table. As a mentor once told me, “You can shear a sheep many times, but you can skin him only once.”"

                    Later he added:

                    Novice podcasters (which I was) and bloggers get too distracted in nascent stages with monetization. In the first 3-9 months, you should be honing your craft and putting out increasingly better work.

                    The recording gear is better and cheaper every year. It’s extremely easy for me to travel with a small recording studio in my backpack. If you’re on a budget, even an iPhone will do, but–bang for the buck–the ATR-2100 is hard to beat.

                    My mantra for gear is borrowed from my podcast with Morgan Spurlock: “Once you get fancy, fancy gets broken.” Keep it simple.

                    Simple Can be Astounding

                    Here are some songs that are incredibly simple.

                    Who Made Who by AC/DC The first 15 seconds are one note, and one chord.

                    Lick it Up by Kiss- Most of this consists of two chords and one note on the bass.

                    Turn Me Loose - Loverboy - The beginning of this song is one chord and some hi-hat hits

                    And yet, when I was a young boy, people would...]]>Because of My Podcast: A Veteran Got a Home

                    Robert Kerns produces the Living the Vet life. He had a mortgage specialist on his show. He was contacted by someone in another state (again, podcasting is global) and the mortgage specialist was able to get the listener in contact with another specialist and the veteran was able to get his loan with a special VA Home Loan rate. None of this would have happened, but it did because of hist podcast. Check out Rob at livingthevetlife.com

                    If Podcasting Was A Sport.

                    I live in Cleveland. A fairly famous sports town. Famous, for not quite being good enough.

                    We were 1 pitch away from winning the world series.

                    Two yards away from going to the Super Bowl.

                    Over the years the Cleveland Browns Football team has taken over leading the pack of bad sports teams in Cleveland. Every few years we fire our coaches and their staffs. Our players get suspended. Our coaches stink when they are here, we fire them, and they win mutliple super bowls.

                    What does this have to do with podcasting? Stick with me.

                    In 2014 after having a miserable year the owners of the Cleveland Browns decided to work on the stadium. They installed:

                    Massive, uniquely shaped video boards,

                    Escalators that helped eliminate congestion

                    and a cranked-up audio system

                    The quote was they hoped these items "Improved the fan experience."

                    The next year they added more concessions and better lighting. The cost over two years? $125 million

                    Again they stated they wanted an "improved fan experience."

                    The best way to improve the fan experience is to put a WINNING FOOTBALL TEAM TOGETHER. The last two years our combined record is 11-21.

                    HOW DOES THIS APPLY TO PODCASTING?

                    At the core of the stadium is the team. A team we come to root for, and a team we expect to win. When they win, the fans brave insane temperatures to pack the stadium in the winter. Everyone is talking about the game on Monday morning. When the team stinks, they don't. I don't care if I can take an escalator to my seat. If the team has no shot at winning, I'm not going. I'm not watching from home, and nobody is talking about it at work, because it is horrible.

                    Well, we see people investing in a better microphone (when their original microphone was fine). They invest in a new theme for their website (that most of their audience never visits). They switch email list providers. They switch media hosting companies. They get a new player for their website. In a sense they are sprucing up the stadium of a losing team.

                    They need to put a winning team on the field. They need to create content that will impact their audience. We need to focus on our audience, that leads to great content, and the finally we need to promote that content (and hopefully get our audience to promote it as well).

                    How Do Sports Teams Get Better?

                    They prepare.

                    They watch film of both their opponent as well as watch tapes of their own games and look for mistakes they made to help avoid them.

                    They Listen

                    Good players are open to feedback. They listen to their coaches. They listen to their fellow players. They have a mindset of constant improvement. They might take a week off when the season is over, but then it is back to the gym to prepare for next season

                    They Trade Players That Didn't Work

                    When a player doesn't meet expectations (Johnny Manzel in my case) and you gave him a chance, you cut your losses.

                    They Bring in A New Set of Eyes

                    Tiger Woods has had numerous coaches over the years. The Browns hired a guy from BASEBALL who has a completely new perspective and strategy on choosing players.

                    How Do Podcasters Get Better?

                    They Prepare

                    They Prepare. They think about what they want to say before they hit record. I am writing these notes way before I press record (it's the way I do it, and I find I get better content). They listen to other podcasts. Not to rip off the content, examine why a show works (and what they can learn from it) and what doesn't work (and how they can avoid it). Realize this is all subjective, but if you don't improve, and your show's content does not inspire people to come back and listen again, your show will die.

                    They Listen

                    They form a "Focus group" of listeners who are not afraid to give constructive feedback, or they take the time to think through a negative comment to see if there is any Merritt to it.

                    They Lose Segments That Don't Resonate. I once had a segment where I would ask the audience to listen to three episodes before unsubscribing. Not a bad idea (I borrowed it from radio talk show host Jim Rome). I made a jingle for it, and it really annoyed a listener. I also started branding myself as an "Acquired taste." In the end, I didn't want to be someone you had to force down to consume. I dropped the segment. I also at one point started spotlighting my back catalog with a "This day in School of Podcasting History." There was only one problem. It bored me.

                    You Bring in a New Set of Ears

                    I get hired by people to consult on their show. Why? Because I have a fresh set of ears, and I also have an experienced set of ears. I also want you help to bring out the best parts of your show, and tweak those parts that aren't working. Now there are times when I'm not your target audience, but I can still spot things that you are missing because you're too close to see it. See podcastreviewshow.com

                    Focus and Dedication is Key to a Long Career in Podcasting

                    Johnny Manzel had talent, but no focus or discipline> Johnny focused on the money. Not serving his audience (the fans).

                    Josh Gordon was suspended in his College Days for Marijuana, and that continues as a pro. He's been suspended three times (at least) He doesn't get the big picture.

                    Wide Receiver for the Pittsburgh Steelers was suspended without pay because of a failed drug test. His second suspension for the same problem.

                    You have to stay focused making great content, and looking for smart opportunities to promote your show and create strategic partners.

                    A Key Point About Making it Into the Pros

                    According to a Google search:

                    NCAA senior players drafted by an NFL team: About one in 50, or 2.0 percent. High school senior players eventually drafted by an NFL team: About nine in 10,000, or 0.09 percent.

                    NCAA senior players drafted by an NBA team: Less than one in 75, or 1.3 percent. -- High school senior players eventually drafted by an NBA team: About three in 10,000, or 0.03 percent

                    Less than eleven in 100, or about 10.5 percent, of NCAA senior male baseball players will get drafted by a Major League Baseball (MLB) team. Approximately one in 200, or approximately 0.5 percent of high school senior boys playing interscholastic baseball will eventually be drafted by an MLB team.

                    only 132 out of those 22,000 made it into the top feeder leagues for the NHL (.6%). Of those 132 players, only 7 played in the NHL. .0312%

                    Those are astonishing numbers.

                    These are people who have been playing the game all their life.

                    Number of podcasters who get enough downloads to get a "big" advertiser: 8% (source Rob from Libsyn.com). (You can make a good living with smaller sponsors see Glenn Hebert Interview)

                    Special Thanks

                    Thanks to Kim for playing the part of the female reporter in the skit today. Kim does the Toastmasters 101 podcast at toastmasters101.net

                    Podcast Conferences Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement – Chicago – July 6-8 Use coupon (sop40)

                    Podcast Success Summit – Online May 16th June 9th

                    Podcast MidAtltantic – NJ – September 9 -10th

                    Great Notes From Tim Ferris

                    His goal is to not make money, but build his relationship with his audience. In this article he says:

                    "I want to convert casual listeners into die-hard, fervent listeners, and I want to convert casual sponsors into die-hard, fervent sponsors. This requires two things: 1) Playing the long game, and 2) Strategically leaving some chips on the table. As a mentor once told me, “You can shear a sheep many times, but you can skin him only once.”"

                    Later he added:

                    Novice podcasters (which I was) and bloggers get too distracted in nascent stages with monetization. In the first 3-9 months, you should be honing your craft and putting out increasingly better work.

                    The recording gear is better and cheaper every year. It’s extremely easy for me to travel with a small recording studio in my backpack. If you’re on a budget, even an iPhone will do, but–bang for the buck–the ATR-2100 is hard to beat.

                    My mantra for gear is borrowed from my podcast with Morgan Spurlock: “Once you get fancy, fancy gets broken.” Keep it simple.

                    Simple Can be Astounding

                    Here are some songs that are incredibly simple.

                    Who Made Who by AC/DC The first 15 seconds are one note, and one chord.

                    Lick it Up by Kiss- Most of this consists of two chords and one note on the bass.

                    Turn Me Loose - Loverboy - The beginning of this song is one chord and some hi-hat hits

                    And yet, when I was a young boy, people would run -not walk - to the dance floor to "get their jam on."

                    Ready to Start Podcasting? 

                    Check out www.planningyourpodcast.com

                    ]]>f03658f9b57311ed0f00c911262bbb5bMon, 02 May 2016 04:00:00 -040046:11falsefull512512You Can't Change - What You Won't StartToday Matthew Cox from Brunch with the Brits explains how he went to a podcast event who eventually became his wife.
                    Why I Turned Down My First Podcast Sponsor

                    I had been contacted by a sponsor at advertisecast.com. I decided to low ball my pricing ($10 an episode) just to see if anyone would jump. An advertiser did. They wanted 10 episodes of my Weekly Web Tools podcast. That would be almost three months and the advertising would pay for my hosting (minus the 20% that advertisecast take). I would take home $96. My hosting will cost me $45 for three months. I might have some gas money. Here are some of the bullet points:

                    To get started and receive a $50 signup bonus

                    You’ll earn $1 for every new email lead and up to $200 for every new member you refer from your computer

                    Has already generated millions of dollars for over 200,000 happy entrepreneurs

                    My audience is predominant male, and I know I have some entrepreneurs in my audience. So far this sounds like a great fit. Then I went to see what I was promoting.

                    It turns out the product was a video chat and dating service. Hmmm, that doesn't really fit, but maybe I would do this as an experiment. Then I dug a little deeper. You see this wasn't some ordinary video chat/dating service. It was porn, oh I wait I mean adult chat. Can we just call it what it is? Porn.

                    Beside my religious beliefs there are lots of non-religious reasons that porn is a cancer that most people feel is "not a problem." Well I disagree. It's an opinion, and we're not here to talk about that. Let's get back to podcasting.

                    I will not have a sponsor on my show that I can't go to bed at night feeling I served my audience by sending them toward a product I fully endorse. So I turned them down. I also contacted advertisecasts.com and suggested they put in a way for podcasters to save people time so I can say, "No porn, cigarette, alcohol, etc)

                    Every podcasters starts with two things in common. Zero listeners, and they have integrity. When you lose your integrity, you may not ever get it back.

                    Don't Be Afraid To Start Your Podcast and Find Your Voice

                    When I started college I thought I wanted to "Fix stuff" so I went to an electronics school and got a degree in electronic engineering. The other thing I got was a clear understanding that I wasn't very good at fixing stuff. I fixed copiers, but luckily got an opportunity (based on relationships I had formed in the company) to go out and set up the equipment and train the users. I was a customer service rep. Had I not gone to college to be a technician, I never would've ended up in training.

                    I later would go back to School to get a Bachelor's Degree in Education. My dream job was to get back to training people on Microsoft Products. I had the most fun doing that in the past, and I was good at it. I could be funny and educational. Because of my knowledge of computers I start to dabble in building websites, and the Internet. That lead to me a guy who had come back from a conference who told me about podcasting.

                    I started podcasting, and got to know people in the industry. Using my strongest skills of serving and teaching, I created value. I developed relationships with all of the podcasting companies. I remember one day about a year and a half ago when a student asked me a question about combining two features in Microsoft Excel. I explained I had never tried those two features together, to which he pulled out his iPhone and asked Siri. Right in front of my eyes, the phone solved my customers problem. I thought, I'm going to be replaced by a phone. A year and a half later what was once a staff of five trainers, what cut down to one (and it wasn't me). However, because I had been playing with computers, and playing with the Internet, that lead me to podcasting. Those relationships I built over ten years lead me to being employed by Libsyn.com (A podcast media company).

                    Now I would never have though my life would turn out the way it has. Anything that put me into position to help me later began by starting something. Knowledge is only power when you act on it.

                    Richard Prior is considered by some to the THE best comedian ever. Richard launched his career being very safe, and incorporating a lot of physical comedy in his routines. He was basically trying to be Bill Cosby. There was only one problem. He was Richard Prior and being Bill Cosby-ish was not easy, and eventually Richard walked off the stage mid-performance cause he couldn't do it anymore. But he wouldn't have known that if he hadn't started stand up. You can manage, pivot, adjust, something that you never start.

                    I Want My Podcast to Be Original

                    It's hard to really come up with something completely original. Why? Because talking and entertainment and education have been around for a long time. In the movies most plots can be summarized by one of seven plot lines.

                    Overcoming Monsters - Dracula

                    Rags to Riches - Cinderella

                    The Quest - Lord of the Rings

                    Voyage and Return - Alice in Wonderland, The Wizard of Oz

                    Comedy - Four Weddings and A Funeral

                    Tragedy - Breaking bad

                    Rebirth - The Grinch who stole Christmas

                    Source

                    Create an Original Combination

                    As I write this, the musician Prince died last Thursday. Some might say there was nobody like Prince, and that is true. What was original about Prince was his mixing of Genres and styles. If you ever saw him live, he borrowed a lot from James Brown. If you watched him play the guitar, he reminded you a lot if Jimi Hendrix. There was a hint of gospel an blues. What Prince had that was unique to him was his vocal range. He took that range and surrounded with the stylings of James, Jimi, and his own influences. So the way he paired these genres was original. 

                    Learn From Others Who Are Doing it Well

                    I've spoken in the past about grabbing people's attention right up front. One of the longest running shows on television does this the best: 60 minutes. They pull at your heart making it near impossible to turn off the channel. Can you incorporate this into your podcast? You sure can.

                    Podcast News: Google (Yawn) Play

                    What should have been a tidal wave of opportunity was a drop of technology as Google Play Music was "Launched" kind of. Here is what's missing:

                    70% of podcasts are listened on a portable device but Google is using Flash technology which dosn't work on mobile devices.

                    You can't download the podcasts.

                    It's not really available anywhere except on the web

                    The good news is starting today (28th) you will be able to have more stats to obsess over. HOORAY!

                    Music MTV Is Getting into Podcasting

                    MTV announced five new podcasts focused on film, politics, pop culture and, obviously, music that will roll out over the next week. The shows will be hosted by a mix of current MTV News journalists including Anna Marie Cox and several new hires.

                    For MTV, the move into podcasting shows how it’s targeting young people who are staring at their phones, rather than the television. Dan Fierman, MTV News’ editorial director, told Digiday that of its young target audience, 80 percent of all content they consume is on their phones and that the audience has been underserved with podcast options.

                    Customer FeedBack Multiple Feeds of a Podcast

                    How do you handle more than one feed with Libsyn or Blubrry?

                    WordPress as a Free Website Option

                    John Wilkerson comments on last week’s show and wondered why I didn’t mention WordPress.

                    BTW, I have a new favorite podcast because of your “favorite podcast” episode at year end.  Never heard of No Agenda until I heard someone mention it on your end year end show, actually it was last years show i listened to after downloading the transcript.  I know shame on me for being a podcaster and not knowing of Adam Curry’s show until recently, but I have not missed an episode since hearing about it earlier this year and have also sent a few dollars their way. ? it’s exceptionally good given the upcoming presidential election.

                    Hope all is well and I’m sending money your way too via Amazon shopping.  ? Thanks, Richard Warfield, Jr. RDubStudios.com LoudPipes.net

                    Podcast Conferences Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement - Chicago - July 6-8 Use coupon (sop40)

                    Podcast Success Summit - Online May 16th June 9th 

                    Podcast MidAtltantic - NJ - September 9 -10th

                     

                    Check out Dave's Course 

                    Planning Your Podcast

                     

                    ]]>Today Matthew Cox from Brunch with the Brits explains how he went to a podcast event who eventually became his wife.
                    Why I Turned Down My First Podcast Sponsor

                    I had been contacted by a sponsor at advertisecast.com. I decided to low ball my pricing ($10 an episode) just to see if anyone would jump. An advertiser did. They wanted 10 episodes of my Weekly Web Tools podcast. That would be almost three months and the advertising would pay for my hosting (minus the 20% that advertisecast take). I would take home $96. My hosting will cost me $45 for three months. I might have some gas money. Here are some of the bullet points:

                    To get started and receive a $50 signup bonus

                    You’ll earn $1 for every new email lead and up to $200 for every new member you refer from your computer

                    Has already generated millions of dollars for over 200,000 happy entrepreneurs

                    My audience is predominant male, and I know I have some entrepreneurs in my audience. So far this sounds like a great fit. Then I went to see what I was promoting.

                    It turns out the product was a video chat and dating service. Hmmm, that doesn't really fit, but maybe I would do this as an experiment. Then I dug a little deeper. You see this wasn't some ordinary video chat/dating service. It was porn, oh I wait I mean adult chat. Can we just call it what it is? Porn.

                    Beside my religious beliefs there are lots of non-religious reasons that porn is a cancer that most people feel is "not a problem." Well I disagree. It's an opinion, and we're not here to talk about that. Let's get back to podcasting.

                    I will not have a sponsor on my show that I can't go to bed at night feeling I served my audience by sending them toward a product I fully endorse. So I turned them down. I also contacted advertisecasts.com and suggested they put in a way for podcasters to save people time so I can say, "No porn, cigarette, alcohol, etc)

                    Every podcasters starts with two things in common. Zero listeners, and they have integrity. When you lose your integrity, you may not ever get it back.

                    Don't Be Afraid To Start Your Podcast and Find Your Voice

                    When I started college I thought I wanted to "Fix stuff" so I went to an electronics school and got a degree in electronic engineering. The other thing I got was a clear understanding that I wasn't very good at fixing stuff. I fixed copiers, but luckily got an opportunity (based on relationships I had formed in the company) to go out and set up the equipment and train the users. I was a customer service rep. Had I not gone to college to be a technician, I never would've ended up in training.

                    I later would go back to School to get a Bachelor's Degree in Education. My dream job was to get back to training people on Microsoft Products. I had the most fun doing that in the past, and I was good at it. I could be funny and educational. Because of my knowledge of computers I start to dabble in building websites, and the Internet. That lead to me a guy who had come back from a conference who told me about podcasting.

                    I started podcasting, and got to know people in the industry. Using my strongest skills of serving and teaching, I created value. I developed relationships with all of the podcasting companies. I remember one day about a year and a half ago when a student asked me a question about combining two features in Microsoft Excel. I explained I had never tried those two features together, to which he pulled out his iPhone and asked Siri. Right in front of my eyes, the phone solved my customers problem. I thought, I'm going to be replaced by a phone. A year and a half later what was once a staff of five trainers, what cut down to one (and it wasn't me). However, because I had been playing with computers, and playing with the Internet, that lead me to podcasting. Those relationships I built over ten years lead me to being employed by Libsyn.com (A podcast media company).

                    Now I would never have though my life would turn out the way it has. Anything that put me into position to help me later began by starting something. Knowledge is only power when you act on it.

                    Richard Prior is considered by some to the THE best comedian ever. Richard launched his career being very safe, and incorporating a lot of physical comedy in his routines. He was basically trying to be Bill Cosby. There was only one problem. He was Richard Prior and being Bill Cosby-ish was not easy, and eventually Richard walked off the stage mid-performance cause he couldn't do it anymore. But he wouldn't have known that if he hadn't started stand up. You can manage, pivot, adjust, something that you never start.

                    I Want My Podcast to Be Original

                    It's hard to really come up with something completely original. Why? Because talking and entertainment and education have been around for a long time. In the movies most plots can be summarized by one of seven plot lines.

                    Overcoming Monsters - Dracula

                    Rags to Riches - Cinderella

                    The Quest - Lord of the Rings

                    Voyage and Return - Alice in Wonderland, The Wizard of Oz

                    Comedy - Four Weddings and A Funeral

                    Tragedy - Breaking bad

                    Rebirth - The Grinch who stole Christmas

                    Source

                    Create an Original Combination

                    As I write this, the musician Prince died last Thursday. Some might say there was nobody like Prince, and that is true. What was original about Prince was his mixing of Genres and styles. If you ever saw him live, he borrowed a lot from James Brown. If you watched him play the guitar, he reminded you a lot if Jimi Hendrix. There was a hint of gospel an blues. What Prince had that was unique to him was his vocal range. He took that range and surrounded with the stylings of James, Jimi, and his own influences. So the way he paired these genres was original. 

                    Learn From Others Who Are Doing it Well

                    I've spoken in the past about grabbing people's attention right up front. One of the longest running shows on television does this the best: 60 minutes. They pull at your heart making it near impossible to turn off the channel. Can you incorporate this into your podcast? You sure can.

                    Podcast News: Google (Yawn) Play

                    What should have been a tidal wave of opportunity was a drop of technology as Google Play Music was "Launched" kind of. Here is what's missing:

                    70% of podcasts are listened on a portable device but Google is using Flash technology which dosn't work on mobile devices.

                    You can't download the podcasts.

                    It's not really available anywhere except on the web

                    The good news is starting today (28th) you will be able to have more stats to obsess over. HOORAY!

                    Music MTV Is Getting into Podcasting

                    MTV announced five new podcasts focused on film, politics, pop culture and, obviously, music that will roll out over the next week. The shows will be hosted by a mix of current MTV News journalists including Anna Marie Cox and several new hires.

                    For MTV, the move into podcasting shows how it’s targeting young people who are staring at their phones, rather than the television. Dan Fierman, MTV News’ editorial director, told Digiday that of its young target audience, 80 percent of all content they consume is on their phones and that the audience has been underserved with podcast options.

                    Customer FeedBack Multiple Feeds of a Podcast

                    How do you handle more than one feed with Libsyn or Blubrry?

                    WordPress as a Free Website Option

                    John Wilkerson comments on last week’s show and wondered why I didn’t mention WordPress.

                    BTW, I have a new favorite podcast because of your “favorite podcast” episode at year end.  Never heard of No Agenda until I heard someone mention it on your end year end show, actually it was last years show i listened to after downloading the transcript.  I know shame on me for being a podcaster and not knowing of Adam Curry’s show until recently, but I have not missed an episode since hearing about it earlier this year and have also sent a few dollars their way. ? it’s exceptionally good given the upcoming presidential election.

                    Hope all is well and I’m sending money your way too via Amazon shopping.  ? Thanks, Richard Warfield, Jr. RDubStudios.com LoudPipes.net

                    Podcast Conferences Where I Will Be Speaking

                    Podcast Movement - Chicago - July 6-8 Use coupon (sop40)

                    Podcast Success Summit - Online May 16th June 9th 

                    Podcast MidAtltantic - NJ - September 9 -10th

                     

                    Check out Dave's Course 

                    Planning Your Podcast

                     

                    ]]>526a376705ce9f957adcaf6b94690ff2Mon, 25 Apr 2016 04:00:00 -040047:20falsefull511511The Two Most Important Parts Of Your PodcastIf you've ever benefitted from this podcast, do please take the time and nominate the show (school of podcasting) in the EDUCATION category.
                    The Two Most Important Parts of Your Podcast

                    I was watching an episode of Live From Daryl's House (Daryl Hall of Hall and Oats Fame). He has all sorts of musicians of different styles and genres. There is always a small segment where you hear them getting ready. They have had time to prepare. They know the music, but there are two things you always need to figure out and this is no different in podcasting.

                    How to start a segment.

                    How to end a segment. 

                    Why because the first part is your first impression. A bad first impression can really lose your audience for the rest of the song (podcast in our case). A bad last impression and we've just blown all the positive mojo we just created. 

                    We talked a couple of weeks ago about the Podcast Interview Wizard software and how it helps you get to the point quicker. It gets you focused on the meat of the interview. 

                    One strategy is to pick your main point, the one that really inspires people to laugh, cry, think, or groan and come back to that with a tone that signals to the audience that we're moving on, we are done, this is the final thought. Unless you're Jerry Springer, you don't need to announce "here are my final thoughts," you can just say them. 

                    Likewise if you are transitioning to another segment, just transition. Get yourself some royalty free music, fade it, etc, (or just leave a pause of silence). There was only one person who could get away with announcing a transition and his name was James Brown. Why did he do this? Because his band would launch into a groove, and just repeat it over James's singing. So James would be in the middle of the song and ask "Can we take it to the bridge?" and eventually they would take it to the bridge. In other cases James would "hit it and quit it." 

                    Announcing a transition is about as stupid as someone asking, "Can I ask you a question?" (cause they just did). At least that is my opinion. 

                    Because of My Podcast Troy Henritz & Nick Seuberling

                    Troy does the blacklist exposed (theblacklistexposed.com), and recently he's been getting flooded with swag. He got an album (as in an LP) and a Blacklist encyclopedia.

                    Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/510 to see swag Nick Seuberling - First Advertiser Check for Minor League Soccer Podcast I was able to seal my first podcast/website sponsor. I've been podcasting for 11 years now and this is my very first sponsor. On a podcast that only has 8 episodes produced. I recently launched a new podcast that covers FC Cincinnati (http://cincinnatisoccertalk.com ), the newest soccer team in Cincy and I approached them about marketing their team store and ticket sales on my podcast. They immediately jumped at it. Today I received my first check in the mail, and I don't even have a signed agreement yet with the team. I'd say they're eager. Just goes to show, if you're in the right niche, you can sell it to anyone no matter how many episodes you've produced - Nick Seuberling   New and Noteworthy Update - Corey Finneran

                    Corey did a push for iTunes reviews for Ivy Envy. He gained 56 reviews this week. He now has 226 ratings and 191 reviews. He did not budge from #3 when you search "Chicago Cubs" in iTunes. The two that rank ahead of us?#1 - 150 ratings, 128 reviews and the last published episode was 11/11/2010.#2 - 7 ratings, 4 reviews.

                    Promote your show like iTunes doesn't exist. Use it. It's a tool. But I wouldn't put all my eggs in that basket.   Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on Creative Studio podcast on narrative podcasting

                    Glenn the Geek and Jared Easley on Starve the Doubts check out Jared Easley Books on Amazon

                    Wordpress as a Free Website Option

                    John Wilkerson comments on last week's show and wondered why I didn't mention Wordpress.

                    BTW, I have a new favorite podcast because of your "favorite podcast" episode at year end.  Never heard of No Agenda until I heard someone mention it on your end year end show, actually it was last years show i listened to after downloading the transcript.  I know shame on me for being a podcaster and not knowing of Adam Curry's show until recently, but I have not missed an episode since hearing about it earlier this year and have also sent a few dollars their way. :) it's exceptionally good given the upcoming presidential election.Hope all is well and I'm sending money your way too via Amazon shopping.  😎Thanks,

                    Richard Warfield, Jr.  RDubStudios.com  LoudPipes.net

                    My Podcast Episode is Not Appearing in iTunes!?!?

                    Here are some things to keep in mind.

                    1. It takes up to 24 hours for your show to show up in iTunes
                    2. Your subscribers get it instantly
                    3. If you have the file on your website, your visitors have instant access
                    4. Is your feed valid? Check it at feedvalidator.org
                    5. Is your artwork in spec? 
                    
                    

                    1400x1400px (minimum)3000x3000px (maximum, anything in between as long as it’s square)Under 500kbUse sRGB color spaceBe a JPG, JPEG, or a PNG file

                     If so, you can go to podcastsconnect.apple.com and click on your artwork, click Refresh (and then leave immediately - this is a very dangerous place).  There is a video on Libsyn's support page to explain more    Check out    planningyourpodcast.com for Dave's COurse ]]>If you've ever benefitted from this podcast, do please take the time and nominate the show (school of podcasting) in the EDUCATION category.
                    The Two Most Important Parts of Your Podcast

                    I was watching an episode of Live From Daryl's House (Daryl Hall of Hall and Oats Fame). He has all sorts of musicians of different styles and genres. There is always a small segment where you hear them getting ready. They have had time to prepare. They know the music, but there are two things you always need to figure out and this is no different in podcasting.

                    How to start a segment.

                    How to end a segment. 

                    Why because the first part is your first impression. A bad first impression can really lose your audience for the rest of the song (podcast in our case). A bad last impression and we've just blown all the positive mojo we just created. 

                    We talked a couple of weeks ago about the Podcast Interview Wizard software and how it helps you get to the point quicker. It gets you focused on the meat of the interview. 

                    One strategy is to pick your main point, the one that really inspires people to laugh, cry, think, or groan and come back to that with a tone that signals to the audience that we're moving on, we are done, this is the final thought. Unless you're Jerry Springer, you don't need to announce "here are my final thoughts," you can just say them. 

                    Likewise if you are transitioning to another segment, just transition. Get yourself some royalty free music, fade it, etc, (or just leave a pause of silence). There was only one person who could get away with announcing a transition and his name was James Brown. Why did he do this? Because his band would launch into a groove, and just repeat it over James's singing. So James would be in the middle of the song and ask "Can we take it to the bridge?" and eventually they would take it to the bridge. In other cases James would "hit it and quit it." 

                    Announcing a transition is about as stupid as someone asking, "Can I ask you a question?" (cause they just did). At least that is my opinion. 

                    Because of My Podcast Troy Henritz & Nick Seuberling

                    Troy does the blacklist exposed (theblacklistexposed.com), and recently he's been getting flooded with swag. He got an album (as in an LP) and a Blacklist encyclopedia.

                    Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/510 to see swag Nick Seuberling - First Advertiser Check for Minor League Soccer Podcast I was able to seal my first podcast/website sponsor. I've been podcasting for 11 years now and this is my very first sponsor. On a podcast that only has 8 episodes produced. I recently launched a new podcast that covers FC Cincinnati (http://cincinnatisoccertalk.com ), the newest soccer team in Cincy and I approached them about marketing their team store and ticket sales on my podcast. They immediately jumped at it. Today I received my first check in the mail, and I don't even have a signed agreement yet with the team. I'd say they're eager. Just goes to show, if you're in the right niche, you can sell it to anyone no matter how many episodes you've produced - Nick Seuberling   New and Noteworthy Update - Corey Finneran

                    Corey did a push for iTunes reviews for Ivy Envy. He gained 56 reviews this week. He now has 226 ratings and 191 reviews. He did not budge from #3 when you search "Chicago Cubs" in iTunes. The two that rank ahead of us?#1 - 150 ratings, 128 reviews and the last published episode was 11/11/2010.#2 - 7 ratings, 4 reviews.

                    Promote your show like iTunes doesn't exist. Use it. It's a tool. But I wouldn't put all my eggs in that basket.   Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on Creative Studio podcast on narrative podcasting

                    Glenn the Geek and Jared Easley on Starve the Doubts check out Jared Easley Books on Amazon

                    Wordpress as a Free Website Option

                    John Wilkerson comments on last week's show and wondered why I didn't mention Wordpress.

                    BTW, I have a new favorite podcast because of your "favorite podcast" episode at year end.  Never heard of No Agenda until I heard someone mention it on your end year end show, actually it was last years show i listened to after downloading the transcript.  I know shame on me for being a podcaster and not knowing of Adam Curry's show until recently, but I have not missed an episode since hearing about it earlier this year and have also sent a few dollars their way. :) it's exceptionally good given the upcoming presidential election.Hope all is well and I'm sending money your way too via Amazon shopping.  😎Thanks,

                    Richard Warfield, Jr.  RDubStudios.com  LoudPipes.net

                    My Podcast Episode is Not Appearing in iTunes!?!?

                    Here are some things to keep in mind.

                    1. It takes up to 24 hours for your show to show up in iTunes
                    2. Your subscribers get it instantly
                    3. If you have the file on your website, your visitors have instant access
                    4. Is your feed valid? Check it at feedvalidator.org
                    5. Is your artwork in spec? 
                    
                    

                    1400x1400px (minimum)3000x3000px (maximum, anything in between as long as it’s square)Under 500kbUse sRGB color spaceBe a JPG, JPEG, or a PNG file

                     If so, you can go to podcastsconnect.apple.com and click on your artwork, click Refresh (and then leave immediately - this is a very dangerous place).  There is a video on Libsyn's support page to explain more    Check out    planningyourpodcast.com for Dave's COurse ]]>e3a0d4640c75c06805cfba84463c7662Mon, 18 Apr 2016 04:03:30 -040031:21falsefull510510Create a Podcast Website For FreeI checked out your podcast today where you spoke about video podcasting. I think the way you explained it makes perfect sense. I  was actually looking for a way to upload videos faster to YouTube and found a specific way to do it where you compress the file.   There is free software called Handbrake that people suggest. (I think it has been used in the past to rip DVDs illegally, but that is not what I am using it for.) Basically, once you create the HD file (which is usually about 1GB for videos I have made that are about 5-7 minutes at 1080p) and then use Handbrake to compress the file. I can usually get it down to around around 100-150mb (yes...MB) and less if the file is smaller.   I was wondering if you thought this was a good option so you can have HD on all platforms. It doesn't seem to lose in quality especially with simple "blog" type videos.   Anyway, just thought I would check in on that. Thanks for all the hard work!   -Derek Daniel   Free Websites For Those Podcasting on a Budget

                    I had someone contact me this week. They were on SoundCloud, they didn't have a website, and yet, they wanted to end up making a living from their podcast. Their topic was "talking about movies and video games with my friends." Not to say that you it is impossible to do this, but without hearing your show it I would say it is highly unlikely.  Why do you need a website to do a podcast?

                    1. Easy Clicks If you are going to force people to search for the item that will bring your revenue, you're making it too hard. It has to be easy - peasy.

                    2. Email List Growth IF you want to build an email list (and as they say the money is in the list, why? Easy Clicks) you have to have a sign up form. No website- no form.

                    3. Reputation It's $10 a month if you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting and go with the cheapest plans it's around $9. If you drink 5 20 oz bottle of Mountain Dew a month, you have spend close to $10 on soda. Switch to water, and you have the money. Would you buy a car from someone selling it out of a tent (and it looked like they were going to bolt the minute they got your money). You don't date someone who is going to leave it two weeks. You get the point. In a nutshell If you don't have $10 a month (.03 a day) then don't start a podcast expecting it to pay your mortgage. Seriously. In the immortal words of Mick Jagger, "You can't always get what you want."

                    4. Ease of Listener Subscriptions When you have a website, you can put a link to your iTunes listing, and make it easier for people to subscribe in iTunes, Stitcher, etc. Without a website, you're saying things like "Find my show in iTunes." Have you tried the iTunes search? I've typed in the exact name of someone's show and still had zero results.

                    5. Easy Contact The one page you need on a website is a contact page and and about page. We all want interaction with our audience. While you can say your phone number and email address in your podcast, when it is a clickable link on your websites, it's super easy and requires no memorization.

                    I Am Always Open To Other Points of View

                    So when a client told me they were using Tumblr as their website I thought, "Really?" Then I looked at the website notold-better.com and yeah, that's a free tumblr website.  Now to be honest, he had his graphics made by a graphic designer, and that graphic matches the artwork of his podcast. So if you have 2-3 hours to learn how to adjust a tumblr site, check out their themes, and go from there. Keep in mind, you won't have all the flexibility of a Wordpress site, but you will be saving $9 a month. You can even put Google Analytics code into a tumblr site for stats. So if someone is really pushed for a budget, or they just wanted to test the waters, I would Tumblr is a platform I would recommend.

                    Time Saving Tip Using Libsyn

                    If you decide that you are going to use Tumblr as your website, you could use Libsyn as your media host (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com) and Libsyn will automatically publish your content to Tumblr.

                    One More Thing about $9 a Month

                    Just so I know we're on the same page, you say you don't have 30 cents a day to spend on your podcast. Thirteen dollars a year on a domain (another .03 a day), and you'll use Canva to make your artwork for free, and you want the product and art you provide enough income to generate enough money to live on. Can you please enlighten me of anyone who has put out no money, and generate a business that provided enough income to live on? Even a lottery player has to buy a ticket, and the chances of you spending no money and generating a podcast that will generate enough income to live on is about the same odds as winning the lottery.

                    Not Updating My WordPress Cost Me $200

                    I've always said to keep things simple. Remove any plugins or themes you are not using on a WordPress website. I thought I had done that, but I forgot to do it on one website. I do a show about Jillian Michaels. She has raving fans, and they love to buy her stuff. The best part is most of that is sold through places that have an affiliate program. When her book came out on Audible, I made a four figure affiliate check. You can be an audible affiliate by clicking here. Well on my website for Jillian Michaels I had been using the Thesis theme years ago. I now use themes from Appendipity which runs on the Genesis Framework. I never removed the Thesis theme, and my site got infected with Malware. I got blacklisted by Google. I went to my hosting company who in 2013 DID remove the malware for free, only to find out they no longer offer that. I went to a few different places, and could not find anyone who did a one time cleaning. I ended up going with sucuri.net who (like everyone else) charges $200 for the year. It's a great system, and they keep me more than updated on the status of my site. They even have a security tool to help block hackers. If you're website is healthy now you might look into the plugin Wordfence. It can help keep you safe (and it's free).

                    Podcasting Pulling in Some Big Names

                    Tony Robbins (famed motivational speaker and New York times best Selling Author) now has The Tony Robbins Podcast.

                    Jeffrey Glaser who has quite the TV resume.  He oversaw such hit shows as “Glee,” “Empire,” “Arrested Development,” “Modern Family,” “New Girl” and “American Horror Story” at the network’s production arm, and guided more than 25 shows to syndication. He has been named president of content at podcasting network Wondery, spent 19 years at 20th Century Fox Television, where he oversaw many hits and guided more than 25 shows to syndication. More info

                    The New York Times has launched a podcast team. Full Report. They launched a Modern Love show that is getting 300,000 downloads a week.  

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about Show Prep I appeared on the first episode of the Podcast Producers  Jessica Rhodes is the person behind interview connections, and she has her own Rhodes to Success podcast, Corey is the man behind Podfly.net a podcast editing service.

                      Thanks for the iTunes Reviews

                    I was turned on to SOP by Daniel J. Lewis, Cliff Ravenscraft, & Ray Ortega. Dave's content is solidly produced from a technical POV. Great audio as one would expect from a podcast about podcasting. The flow of the show is superior and feels like radio but no commercials :-) As I've made my way through the back catalog I am picking up so much information as I look to take my own podcast, House of #EdTech to a higher level! ~ Chris Nesi Host, House of #EdTech Podcast chrisnesi.com To leave a review go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes (view in iTunes, and then rate and review). Want yuor reviews from all countries and stitcher coming to your inbox? Check out My Podcast Reviews

                     

                    START YOUR PODCAST

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>I checked out your podcast today where you spoke about video podcasting. I think the way you explained it makes perfect sense. I  was actually looking for a way to upload videos faster to YouTube and found a specific way to do it where you compress the file.   There is free software called Handbrake that people suggest. (I think it has been used in the past to rip DVDs illegally, but that is not what I am using it for.) Basically, once you create the HD file (which is usually about 1GB for videos I have made that are about 5-7 minutes at 1080p) and then use Handbrake to compress the file. I can usually get it down to around around 100-150mb (yes...MB) and less if the file is smaller.   I was wondering if you thought this was a good option so you can have HD on all platforms. It doesn't seem to lose in quality especially with simple "blog" type videos.   Anyway, just thought I would check in on that. Thanks for all the hard work!   -Derek Daniel   Free Websites For Those Podcasting on a Budget

                    I had someone contact me this week. They were on SoundCloud, they didn't have a website, and yet, they wanted to end up making a living from their podcast. Their topic was "talking about movies and video games with my friends." Not to say that you it is impossible to do this, but without hearing your show it I would say it is highly unlikely.  Why do you need a website to do a podcast?

                    1. Easy Clicks If you are going to force people to search for the item that will bring your revenue, you're making it too hard. It has to be easy - peasy.

                    2. Email List Growth IF you want to build an email list (and as they say the money is in the list, why? Easy Clicks) you have to have a sign up form. No website- no form.

                    3. Reputation It's $10 a month if you go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/hosting and go with the cheapest plans it's around $9. If you drink 5 20 oz bottle of Mountain Dew a month, you have spend close to $10 on soda. Switch to water, and you have the money. Would you buy a car from someone selling it out of a tent (and it looked like they were going to bolt the minute they got your money). You don't date someone who is going to leave it two weeks. You get the point. In a nutshell If you don't have $10 a month (.03 a day) then don't start a podcast expecting it to pay your mortgage. Seriously. In the immortal words of Mick Jagger, "You can't always get what you want."

                    4. Ease of Listener Subscriptions When you have a website, you can put a link to your iTunes listing, and make it easier for people to subscribe in iTunes, Stitcher, etc. Without a website, you're saying things like "Find my show in iTunes." Have you tried the iTunes search? I've typed in the exact name of someone's show and still had zero results.

                    5. Easy Contact The one page you need on a website is a contact page and and about page. We all want interaction with our audience. While you can say your phone number and email address in your podcast, when it is a clickable link on your websites, it's super easy and requires no memorization.

                    I Am Always Open To Other Points of View

                    So when a client told me they were using Tumblr as their website I thought, "Really?" Then I looked at the website notold-better.com and yeah, that's a free tumblr website.  Now to be honest, he had his graphics made by a graphic designer, and that graphic matches the artwork of his podcast. So if you have 2-3 hours to learn how to adjust a tumblr site, check out their themes, and go from there. Keep in mind, you won't have all the flexibility of a Wordpress site, but you will be saving $9 a month. You can even put Google Analytics code into a tumblr site for stats. So if someone is really pushed for a budget, or they just wanted to test the waters, I would Tumblr is a platform I would recommend.

                    Time Saving Tip Using Libsyn

                    If you decide that you are going to use Tumblr as your website, you could use Libsyn as your media host (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com) and Libsyn will automatically publish your content to Tumblr.

                    One More Thing about $9 a Month

                    Just so I know we're on the same page, you say you don't have 30 cents a day to spend on your podcast. Thirteen dollars a year on a domain (another .03 a day), and you'll use Canva to make your artwork for free, and you want the product and art you provide enough income to generate enough money to live on. Can you please enlighten me of anyone who has put out no money, and generate a business that provided enough income to live on? Even a lottery player has to buy a ticket, and the chances of you spending no money and generating a podcast that will generate enough income to live on is about the same odds as winning the lottery.

                    Not Updating My WordPress Cost Me $200

                    I've always said to keep things simple. Remove any plugins or themes you are not using on a WordPress website. I thought I had done that, but I forgot to do it on one website. I do a show about Jillian Michaels. She has raving fans, and they love to buy her stuff. The best part is most of that is sold through places that have an affiliate program. When her book came out on Audible, I made a four figure affiliate check. You can be an audible affiliate by clicking here. Well on my website for Jillian Michaels I had been using the Thesis theme years ago. I now use themes from Appendipity which runs on the Genesis Framework. I never removed the Thesis theme, and my site got infected with Malware. I got blacklisted by Google. I went to my hosting company who in 2013 DID remove the malware for free, only to find out they no longer offer that. I went to a few different places, and could not find anyone who did a one time cleaning. I ended up going with sucuri.net who (like everyone else) charges $200 for the year. It's a great system, and they keep me more than updated on the status of my site. They even have a security tool to help block hackers. If you're website is healthy now you might look into the plugin Wordfence. It can help keep you safe (and it's free).

                    Podcasting Pulling in Some Big Names

                    Tony Robbins (famed motivational speaker and New York times best Selling Author) now has The Tony Robbins Podcast.

                    Jeffrey Glaser who has quite the TV resume.  He oversaw such hit shows as “Glee,” “Empire,” “Arrested Development,” “Modern Family,” “New Girl” and “American Horror Story” at the network’s production arm, and guided more than 25 shows to syndication. He has been named president of content at podcasting network Wondery, spent 19 years at 20th Century Fox Television, where he oversaw many hits and guided more than 25 shows to syndication. More info

                    The New York Times has launched a podcast team. Full Report. They launched a Modern Love show that is getting 300,000 downloads a week.  

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about Show Prep I appeared on the first episode of the Podcast Producers  Jessica Rhodes is the person behind interview connections, and she has her own Rhodes to Success podcast, Corey is the man behind Podfly.net a podcast editing service.

                      Thanks for the iTunes Reviews

                    I was turned on to SOP by Daniel J. Lewis, Cliff Ravenscraft, & Ray Ortega. Dave's content is solidly produced from a technical POV. Great audio as one would expect from a podcast about podcasting. The flow of the show is superior and feels like radio but no commercials :-) As I've made my way through the back catalog I am picking up so much information as I look to take my own podcast, House of #EdTech to a higher level! ~ Chris Nesi Host, House of #EdTech Podcast chrisnesi.com To leave a review go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes (view in iTunes, and then rate and review). Want yuor reviews from all countries and stitcher coming to your inbox? Check out My Podcast Reviews

                     

                    START YOUR PODCAST

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    ]]>795bc17f7121dcdc625ee2d8484821c0Sun, 10 Apr 2016 04:00:00 -040040:21falsefull509509DBS 286 Vs Aphex Channel Master Cale from Fotimepodcast.com was having a problem with his website (using Wordpress) when an audience member offered to help out. It turns out the audience member works for the creators of Wordpress.
                    The DBS 286X vs Aphex 230 Master Channel

                    Before I even start, you do NOT need either one of these to start podcast. It's a nice piece of icing on the cake. It makes you sound better, but you will not gain a single subscriber by using these. If you have poor content, great sounding garbage is still garbage.

                    I've got the older version of the DBX 286 (I have a 286A which has now been replaced by the 286S). Likewise I recently picked up a used Aphex 230 Master Voice Channel (which is now replaced by the Aphex Channel Master

                    What's the difference?

                    Cost: The Aphex is 999, the DBX is 199. So you are looking at $800 in difference.

                    The Aphex's gives you more options in regards to inverting polarity, changing the phase polarity. It also offers a low cut filter.

                    The Aphex noise gate is super easy to set and sounds great. You simply talk and turn the dial until a red light illuminates, and then turn the other knob to scale back any background noise. I love the sound of the gate more than the DBX. Anytime I set the DBX to be aggressive, the cutting in and out was a bit more noticeable. Yes you can hear the Aphex's gate, but to me it's less noticeable.

                    With the DBX you have low and high enhancers. You have the same thing on the Aphex, but you can choose what frequency to boost. You also have a parametrix equalizer so you can find a frequency that you either want to boost or cut from your voice and the determine how much you want to cut/boost. This is the same for the Aural Exciter on the Aphex. It does what the DBX does with more control. You can "tune" what frequencies you want to boost on the high end.

                    I never will get de-essers. I know what they are supposed to do, I don't hear any difference on either unit. I swear this is a feature that manufacturers build into units so they can charge more.

                    While appreciate what the unit does, for the money, I would recommend the 286 for most people unless you really, really want total control. 

                    Video Podcasting? How Would I Go About Doing This?

                    I currently don't do any video podcasts, but that doesn't mean I don't think they are worth doing. I just know they take more time. So how would I do it if I did?

                    Video Podcasting Software

                    If you're on a mac, try Screenflow or even iMovie.

                    If you're on a PC check out Sony Vegas or Camtasia.

                    What Format?

                    I would create my video for my podcast (downloads)  you are exporting a "LD" version for phones, so you could go 640X480. You can do this in QuickTime if you want to as there are tons of presets. I would try to stick with mp4 if possible as it seems to have less conflicts. You take this format and put it in your RSS feed, so it goes to subscribers. You might put at the begining of the video that to see ah HD version go to your website (and provide a pretty link so they don't have to search for it)

                    The Format For Your Website

                    Now you create an HD version (1280X720) that you can upload it to YouTube (it's free, let them eat the bandwidth) and put that video on your website. Now your subscribers don't hate you for sending a 5 gig file to their phone, and your visitors get an HD version that also happens to be on the #4 search engine.

                    Podcasting Lessons I've Learned From My Cat

                    I'm a dog person. Always have been. I inherited a cat in my recent divorce, and I love Bernie, but I do hate cleaning the litter box. I actually hurt my back cause I was leaning over so much, and for an extended period of time. I just hate, hate, hate, cleaning the litter box. I did it about once every 5-7 days. I thought to myself, "Dogs are so much easier as I don't have to deal with this." Then it came to me.

                    What a pain it would be if my dog only got to "do his business" once every 5-7 days. In thinking about it, I would take my dog out three to 4 times a day. So I started treating my cat like a dog, and checking his litter box in the morning, when I got home, after dinner, and once before bed. Now it takes me seconds to clean his cat box and it's not a big deal.

                    So what does this have to do with Podcasting?

                    If you wait until the last second to record your show, you're going to have to do all the prep, recording, editing, promotion, at the same time. It's a lot of work, and it can be overwhelming. So instead, start planning it earlier in the week. Start writing show notes during the week and flushing out the best parts of your topic. Then later record it, and edit it. Then publish on another day. By doing a little every day, it's not that big a deal, and it's not so cumbersome of a job. It will avoid burning out and quitting your podcast.

                    Advertising Platforms

                    Advertisecast.com is rolling out this week.

                    Cast.market has been our for a bit.

                    Blubrry.com has been around since 2006.

                    Libsyn.com has been around since 2004 (you need at least 5K downloads per episode with Libsyn)

                    Audible Trial

                    Get the new Gary V Book #AskGaryVee

                    http://schoolofpodcasting.com/audibletrial

                    Earn Money With Audible on Your Podcast

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible

                      Schedule One on One Coaching

                    Have a question you need answered? You can purchase coaching in 15 minute increments. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                     

                     

                    ]]>Cale from Fotimepodcast.com was having a problem with his website (using Wordpress) when an audience member offered to help out. It turns out the audience member works for the creators of Wordpress.
                    The DBS 286X vs Aphex 230 Master Channel

                    Before I even start, you do NOT need either one of these to start podcast. It's a nice piece of icing on the cake. It makes you sound better, but you will not gain a single subscriber by using these. If you have poor content, great sounding garbage is still garbage.

                    I've got the older version of the DBX 286 (I have a 286A which has now been replaced by the 286S). Likewise I recently picked up a used Aphex 230 Master Voice Channel (which is now replaced by the Aphex Channel Master

                    What's the difference?

                    Cost: The Aphex is 999, the DBX is 199. So you are looking at $800 in difference.

                    The Aphex's gives you more options in regards to inverting polarity, changing the phase polarity. It also offers a low cut filter.

                    The Aphex noise gate is super easy to set and sounds great. You simply talk and turn the dial until a red light illuminates, and then turn the other knob to scale back any background noise. I love the sound of the gate more than the DBX. Anytime I set the DBX to be aggressive, the cutting in and out was a bit more noticeable. Yes you can hear the Aphex's gate, but to me it's less noticeable.

                    With the DBX you have low and high enhancers. You have the same thing on the Aphex, but you can choose what frequency to boost. You also have a parametrix equalizer so you can find a frequency that you either want to boost or cut from your voice and the determine how much you want to cut/boost. This is the same for the Aural Exciter on the Aphex. It does what the DBX does with more control. You can "tune" what frequencies you want to boost on the high end.

                    I never will get de-essers. I know what they are supposed to do, I don't hear any difference on either unit. I swear this is a feature that manufacturers build into units so they can charge more.

                    While appreciate what the unit does, for the money, I would recommend the 286 for most people unless you really, really want total control. 

                    Video Podcasting? How Would I Go About Doing This?

                    I currently don't do any video podcasts, but that doesn't mean I don't think they are worth doing. I just know they take more time. So how would I do it if I did?

                    Video Podcasting Software

                    If you're on a mac, try Screenflow or even iMovie.

                    If you're on a PC check out Sony Vegas or Camtasia.

                    What Format?

                    I would create my video for my podcast (downloads)  you are exporting a "LD" version for phones, so you could go 640X480. You can do this in QuickTime if you want to as there are tons of presets. I would try to stick with mp4 if possible as it seems to have less conflicts. You take this format and put it in your RSS feed, so it goes to subscribers. You might put at the begining of the video that to see ah HD version go to your website (and provide a pretty link so they don't have to search for it)

                    The Format For Your Website

                    Now you create an HD version (1280X720) that you can upload it to YouTube (it's free, let them eat the bandwidth) and put that video on your website. Now your subscribers don't hate you for sending a 5 gig file to their phone, and your visitors get an HD version that also happens to be on the #4 search engine.

                    Podcasting Lessons I've Learned From My Cat

                    I'm a dog person. Always have been. I inherited a cat in my recent divorce, and I love Bernie, but I do hate cleaning the litter box. I actually hurt my back cause I was leaning over so much, and for an extended period of time. I just hate, hate, hate, cleaning the litter box. I did it about once every 5-7 days. I thought to myself, "Dogs are so much easier as I don't have to deal with this." Then it came to me.

                    What a pain it would be if my dog only got to "do his business" once every 5-7 days. In thinking about it, I would take my dog out three to 4 times a day. So I started treating my cat like a dog, and checking his litter box in the morning, when I got home, after dinner, and once before bed. Now it takes me seconds to clean his cat box and it's not a big deal.

                    So what does this have to do with Podcasting?

                    If you wait until the last second to record your show, you're going to have to do all the prep, recording, editing, promotion, at the same time. It's a lot of work, and it can be overwhelming. So instead, start planning it earlier in the week. Start writing show notes during the week and flushing out the best parts of your topic. Then later record it, and edit it. Then publish on another day. By doing a little every day, it's not that big a deal, and it's not so cumbersome of a job. It will avoid burning out and quitting your podcast.

                    Advertising Platforms

                    Advertisecast.com is rolling out this week.

                    Cast.market has been our for a bit.

                    Blubrry.com has been around since 2006.

                    Libsyn.com has been around since 2004 (you need at least 5K downloads per episode with Libsyn)

                    Audible Trial

                    Get the new Gary V Book #AskGaryVee

                    http://schoolofpodcasting.com/audibletrial

                    Earn Money With Audible on Your Podcast

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible

                      Schedule One on One Coaching

                    Have a question you need answered? You can purchase coaching in 15 minute increments. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/schedule

                     

                     

                    ]]>a3171dad1f857acbe701067bf577e3c0Mon, 04 Apr 2016 04:00:00 -040049:07falsefull508508Podcast Interview WizardToday I look at tools available for podcasters to help them produce a better show.
                    Podcast Interview Wizard and Who is Jim Edwards

                    Jim Edwards is a guy I've known online for years. I loved his "I Gotta Tell you" email list. We are talking back in the day when I was teaching people how to make websites with Microsoft Front page, and making videos with camcorder. I bought one of Jim's products he made with Mike Stewart and I thought they delivered value. I had bought some stuff from other "Internet Marketers" at the time, and thought this was better than some. I've always liked Jim's style as he takes his topic seriously, but always dishes it with a good helping of sarcasm. In a nutshell, Jim has been writing ebooks and making products for over 20+ years.  According to his bio:

                    Jim Edwards, founder of Guaranteed Response Marketing, LLC, is an Internet expert, marketing entrepreneur, newspaper columnist, author, motivational speaker and elite mentor and coach.Having gained personal and financial freedom, he shares his proven strategies with self-motivated, hard-working people to help them attain personal and financial independence.

                    He has written and published dozens of ebooks, several print books and hundreds of articles.

                    Through his company, Jim has produced some 40 informational products on DVD and many more available in the latest electronic formats downloadable from the Internet. Jim produces and hosts webinars on a weekly basis and has been a frequent guest speaker at numerous international Internet marketing seminars.

                    What is the podcast interview wizard?

                    It's a software that works on mac or PC that walks you through planning your interview. It does this by having you figure out what you want to talk about before the interview. It walks you through 16 questions .These questions are then used in  a series of tools used by the software. These include:

                    Email templates to help get the interview

                    Email messages to setup and remind the guest for the interview. Later you can use it to create an email that you can send to the guest post interview as well.

                    Email templates for Referrals

                    Email Templates to say Thank You

                    Quick or Full Show Templates (complete with intro / outro ext and questions)

                    Audience Handouts - A worksheet for people to fill out as they listen to your episode.

                    Show Bullets - Custom Sales Copy for Each Interview

                    There are 12 different types of interview types

                    It will generate show notes for your episode

                    It will generate multiple Titles for your show and let you pick the best one.

                    Build Ads to help promote the show on Facebook, Twitter, etc.

                    Putting it Through It's Paces

                    So I took the interview from last week and added the information about my guest Danny Peña to see if I had used the software last week would the interview had been different. The closest interview style would be the "How the Expert Got Started" style.  Now last week's show was different. I already knew the answers to the questions. I knew Danny's story and I wanted to walk him through the parts that focused on building his audience. Using the PIW I did some interesting questions that I could've asked but didn't:

                    • What roadblocks did you face early on and how did you overcome them?
                    • Did you have any early mentors or did you have to figure it all out on your own?
                    • If you had to start all over again with audience growth in today's world, with today's tools, time constraints and other factors, what would you do:a. Differently?b. More of?c. Less of?d. Faster?e. Not at all?
                    
                    

                    Under the "Myths and Misconceptions" style of interview I saw "Where are the big opportunities in audience growth that many podcasters might be missing?" or "What are the best audience growth tools every podcaster needs to use and know about?"

                    Brainstorming By Yourself

                    Now I realize that the software is meant for you to use ONE style of interview, but if you're looking to come up with good questions, I can see where spitting out multiple versions of the interview might help you spotlight questions that really spur other questions that aren't in the software. Now I realize the "Show notes" and other templates are meant to come from one template not multiple ones. So if you mix and match questions, you are somewhat shooting yourself in the foot, and will have to mix and match to make the additional messages.

                    On the other hand if one style of questions gives you everything you need, you are golden. In watching a webinar for the software they made a great point. In some cases (for the person who hates to write) it's easier to edit than create.

                    Going Down the List Of Tools

                    Podcast show notes - Yes I could see using this in many places (G+, Facebook)

                    Email announce - Yes, this could be cool and it even says to copy and paste your bullet points

                    iTunes Episode Descriptions  - YES this gave me 7 different descriptions and slew of titles

                    Show Title Templates - Yes. Again, a great way to brainstorm with yourself.

                    Ads - Very Similar to Titles and Descriptions - Useful again.

                    Email templates - ALL of the templates are great starting points. I ALWAYS would recommend personalizing these but they are focused and to the point. A good starting point.

                    Beginners Guide Interview Style _ At first this one was "meh" what is the first thing, second thing, but then it had this question, "What is the perfect mindset for a beginner podcaster at this point that would virtually guarantee their success?" and I went, "That's a good question."

                    Book Review Non-Fiction - Kind of a who, what, why, when and where. Nothing earth shattering, but useful for the absolutely newbie.

                    Critical Skills Interview - This is a cool template cause it has built in follow up questions. Yes its what's the first, second, third, but it also has you dig deeper. Thumbs up.

                    Faq - Probably my favorite style. Lots of good questions

                    Getting Started - A good set of questions. It does what it says it would do (there is a focus here)

                    Mistakes Style interview - I do plan on having Gordon Firemark ( a Lawyer) on the show eventually, and this would be a good template for Gordon

                    Myths and Misunderstandings - Here again, at first glance this seems too simple, but it has good follow up questions.

                    New Idea Interview - Here again, it would work for that type of interview, but this one isn't my typical interview so it didn't hit me as hard.

                    New Products - Again kind of the who, what, why, When, and how, but more to it. Great for beginners.

                    Rules of the Road - Probably the worst of all the template it was the same set of questions, but it fits the subject. What is rule 1, rule 2, etc.

                    State of union - I could see using these. I can see this tool helping you to never say "Oh how could I have forgotten to ask.."

                    Ste by Step Roadmap - This is a distant cousin of the Rules of the Road. Not my favorite.

                    Tips and Tricks - Here again pretty basic, and not earth shattering. I do like on some of these that kind of have repeat questions, there are additional questions at the bottom of the list.

                    How Much Does it Cost?

                    Right now as I write this Podcast Interview Wizard is $197 at www.podcastinterviewwizard.com/sop (and yes that is an affiliate link). In addition to the software you get something called the Podcast interview wizard Blueprint which just walks you through using the software. There is some additional training on conducting interviews and I've only watched one of the videos, but was pleasantly surprised at how in depth Jim Edwards gets in this.

                    While anything more than a cup of coffee sound too expensive for software, there are people charging $85 per episode to write your show notes. So the software would pay for iteself with three episodes.

                    Key Tips On How I'm Going to Use This

                    Make sure your podcast is a conversation and an not an interrogation. Just because you have your next question ready, don't forget to listen, listen, listen, because the best question to ask MAY NOT BE ON THE PAGE. Use these questions as a game plan, but be ready to call an audible. I've been interviewed where I'm pretty sure the host isn't paying attention to what I'm saying because they have their 7 questions, and they are just waiting for me to be quiet so they can ask the next questions.

                    DON'T DO THAT!

                    Don't forget to be you. You can use this tool to help you come up with an angle to help you QUICKLY get to the meat of the interview that is going to connect with your audience. There are going to be things that won't fit into a template, and that's where YOU come into play. This software doesn't know your audience. Last week I asked my audience what they wanted to know from Danny and they asked about how he works with his crew. That would not be in any of these templates.

                    Because of My Podcast - I've Met People From All Over the Globe

                    Becuase of their podcast Gary and Margaret of the Kiwi Mana Podcast (all about bees) have met people from all over the globe.

                    Check them out at http://kiwimana.co.nz/

                    Congrats to all the New  Hall of Fame Inductees

                    Dawn and Drew 

                    Gary Leland   (hear Gary on a previous episode)

                    Today I look at tools available for podcasters to help them produce a better show.

                    Podcast Interview Wizard and Who is Jim Edwards

                    Jim Edwards is a guy I've known online for years. I loved his "I Gotta Tell you" email list. We are talking back in the day when I was teaching people how to make websites with Microsoft Front page, and making videos with camcorder. I bought one of Jim's products he made with Mike Stewart and I thought they delivered value. I had bought some stuff from other "Internet Marketers" at the time, and thought this was better than some. I've always liked Jim's style as he takes his topic seriously, but always dishes it with a good helping of sarcasm. In a nutshell, Jim has been writing ebooks and making products for over 20+ years.  According to his bio:

                    Jim Edwards, founder of Guaranteed Response Marketing, LLC, is an Internet expert, marketing entrepreneur, newspaper columnist, author, motivational speaker and elite mentor and coach.Having gained personal and financial freedom, he shares his proven strategies with self-motivated, hard-working people to help them attain personal and financial independence.

                    He has written and published dozens of ebooks, several print books and hundreds of articles.

                    Through his company, Jim has produced some 40 informational products on DVD and many more available in the latest electronic formats downloadable from the Internet. Jim produces and hosts webinars on a weekly basis and has been a frequent guest speaker at numerous international Internet marketing seminars.

                    What is the podcast interview wizard?

                    It's a software that works on mac or PC that walks you through planning your interview. It does this by having you figure out what you want to talk about before the interview. It walks you through 16 questions .These questions are then used in  a series of tools used by the software. These include:

                    Email templates to help get the interview

                    Email messages to setup and remind the guest for the interview. Later you can use it to create an email that you can send to the guest post interview as well.

                    Email templates for Referrals

                    Email Templates to say Thank You

                    Quick or Full Show Templates (complete with intro / outro ext and questions)

                    Audience Handouts - A worksheet for people to fill out as they listen to your episode.

                    Show Bullets - Custom Sales Copy for Each Interview

                    There are 12 different types of interview types

                    It will generate show notes for your episode

                    It will generate multiple Titles for your show and let you pick the best one.

                    Build Ads to help promote the show on Facebook, Twitter, etc.

                    Putting it Through It's Paces

                    So I took the interview from last week and added the information about my guest Danny Peña to see if I had used the software last week would the interview had been different. The closest interview style would be the "How the Expert Got Started" style.  Now last week's show was different. I already knew the answers to the questions. I knew Danny's story and I wanted to walk him through the parts that focused on building his audience. Using the PIW I did some interesting questions that I could've asked but didn't:

                    • What roadblocks did you face early on and how did you overcome them?
                    • Did you have any early mentors or did you have to figure it all out on your own?
                    • If you had to start all over again with audience growth in today's world, with today's tools, time constraints and other factors, what would you do:a. Differently?b. More of?c. Less of?d. Faster?e. Not at all?
                    
                    

                    Under the "Myths and Misconceptions" style of interview I saw "Where are the big opportunities in audience growth that many podcasters might be missing?" or "What are the best audience growth tools every podcaster needs to use and know about?"

                    Brainstorming By Yourself

                    Now I realize that the software is meant for you to use ONE style of interview, but if you're looking to come up with good questions, I can see where spitting out multiple versions of the interview might help you spotlight questions that really spur other questions that aren't in the software. Now I realize the "Show notes" and other templates are meant to come from one template not multiple ones. So if you mix and match questions, you are somewhat shooting yourself in the foot, and will have to mix and match to make the additional messages.

                    On the other hand if one style of questions gives you everything you need, you are golden. In watching a webinar for the software they made a great point. In some cases (for the person who hates to write) it's easier to edit than create.

                    Going Down the List Of Tools

                    Podcast show notes - Yes I could see using this in many places (G+, Facebook)

                    Email announce - Yes, this could be cool and it even says to copy and paste your bullet points

                    iTunes Episode Descriptions  - YES this gave me 7 different descriptions and slew of titles

                    Show Title Templates - Yes. Again, a great way to brainstorm with yourself.

                    Ads - Very Similar to Titles and Descriptions - Useful again.

                    Email templates - ALL of the templates are great starting points. I ALWAYS would recommend personalizing these but they are focused and to the point. A good starting point.

                    Beginners Guide Interview Style _ At first this one was "meh" what is the first thing, second thing, but then it had this question, "What is the perfect mindset for a beginner podcaster at this point that would virtually guarantee their success?" and I went, "That's a good question."

                    Book Review Non-Fiction - Kind of a who, what, why, when and where. Nothing earth shattering, but useful for the absolutely newbie.

                    Critical Skills Interview - This is a cool template cause it has built in follow up questions. Yes its what's the first, second, third, but it also has you dig deeper. Thumbs up.

                    Faq - Probably my favorite style. Lots of good questions

                    Getting Started - A good set of questions. It does what it says it would do (there is a focus here)

                    Mistakes Style interview - I do plan on having Gordon Firemark ( a Lawyer) on the show eventually, and this would be a good template for Gordon

                    Myths and Misunderstandings - Here again, at first glance this seems too simple, but it has good follow up questions.

                    New Idea Interview - Here again, it would work for that type of interview, but this one isn't my typical interview so it didn't hit me as hard.

                    New Products - Again kind of the who, what, why, When, and how, but more to it. Great for beginners.

                    Rules of the Road - Probably the worst of all the template it was the same set of questions, but it fits the subject. What is rule 1, rule 2, etc.

                    State of union - I could see using these. I can see this tool helping you to never say "Oh how could I have forgotten to ask.."

                    Ste by Step Roadmap - This is a distant cousin of the Rules of the Road. Not my favorite.

                    Tips and Tricks - Here again pretty basic, and not earth shattering. I do like on some of these that kind of have repeat questions, there are additional questions at the bottom of the list.

                    How Much Does it Cost?

                    Right now as I write this Podcast Interview Wizard is $197 at www.podcastinterviewwizard.com/sop (and yes that is an affiliate link). In addition to the software you get something called the Podcast interview wizard Blueprint which just walks you through using the software. There is some additional training on conducting interviews and I've only watched one of the videos, but was pleasantly surprised at how in depth Jim Edwards gets in this.

                    While anything more than a cup of coffee sound too expensive for software, there are people charging $85 per episode to write your show notes. So the software would pay for iteself with three episodes.

                    Key Tips On How I'm Going to Use This

                    Make sure your podcast is a conversation and an not an interrogation. Just because you have your next question ready, don't forget to listen, listen, listen, because the best question to ask MAY NOT BE ON THE PAGE. Use these questions as a game plan, but be ready to call an audible. I've been interviewed where I'm pretty sure the host isn't paying attention to what I'm saying because they have their 7 questions, and they are just waiting for me to be quiet so they can ask the next questions.

                    DON'T DO THAT!

                    Don't forget to be you. You can use this tool to help you come up with an angle to help you QUICKLY get to the meat of the interview that is going to connect with your audience. There are going to be things that won't fit into a template, and that's where YOU come into play. This software doesn't know your audience. Last week I asked my audience what they wanted to know from Danny and they asked about how he works with his crew. That would not be in any of these templates.

                    Because of My Podcast - I've Met People From All Over the Globe

                    Becuase of their podcast Gary and Margaret of the Kiwi Mana Podcast (all about bees) have met people from all over the globe.

                    Check them out at http://kiwimana.co.nz/

                    Congrats to all the New  Hall of Fame Inductees

                    Dawn and Drew 

                    Gary Leland   (hear Gary on a previous episode)

                    Mignon Fogharty (Hear Mignon on this show)

                    Rob Walch  (Hear Walch on a previous episode)

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on round 63 of the Podcasters Round Table where we were talking Podcasting hacks (great episode)

                    I appeared on Business Mistakes Episode 35  talking about mistakes I've made.

                    Eric K Johnson did a great episode on critiquing your own show, and he mentioned last's week's episode.

                    Don't Be Afraid to Try Something New

                    So last week I was in a bit of a pickle. I knew Danny Peña had a great story. I had known it for a long time, but I never made the effort to have Danny on the show. I always known I would get around to it. Well in my laziness he appeared on the New Media Show, and Podcast Junkies. Now this is not a big deal, but I wanted to really bring Danny's story before anyone had really heard his story (that wasn't in the gaming world that is). So now I was going to have Danny on the show.

                    What could I do to make my interview stand out?

                    Danny's story needs no help. It's awesome, but still I wanted to stand out. 

                    So listened to those interviews and tried to figure out what I wanted to have on this show, as well as anything that could make it stand out. There are no "bad" parts of Danny's story. This made it tough. So again, what could I do to be different. I never want to be like everyone else. So I added sound effects.

                    How did I know these would work? Because I had not heard the sound of a 56 K modem in a very long time and when I did it made me smile. When I heard the sound effect of pacman, the MTV theme, or the others sound effects I used they made me smile. I realized anyone under 30 wouldn't get the subtle joke, but those who did, would hopefully have the same reaction I did. They smiled. 

                    School of Podcasting Closes For This Session 3/31 

                    If you are looking to start a podcat, want personalize attention, then the School of Podcasting is for you.

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Email support.

                    Live webinars

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Check it out at www,schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                     

                     

                    ]]>c0a25856ea462fb68ae9df78d788f0e8Mon, 28 Mar 2016 04:00:00 -040051:55falsefull507507How Danny Peña Grew His Podcast AudienceDanny Peña got his first video game console from his Grandmother and his life was forever changed. Little did Danny know (who goes by the name of Godfree on his show) that he would someday be getting paid to fly around the world and play video games on his podcast Gamertag Radio. Did he think he would end up working for CBS and be featured next to podcasts like 60 minutes on play.it? Probably not. Today you will learn how Danny started building his audience before there was podcasting. Danny continued building his audience before there was iTunes. Through everything he does, Danny cares about one thing: the audience.

                    There are sooooooo many lessons to be learned today.

                    Interview starts at 3:38

                    Free Doesn't Last: Danny got his first check from mp3.com a site that was "Too big to fail" just like MySpace (and who knows some day Facebook?).

                    The party of the year took a year of planning: You don't get these kind of results by "winging it." Check out this video of the party and you can read how the Miami New Times  called it the Best Super Bowl party in South FL.

                    Know more about your audience than their age and sex: Danny brought in musicians who his audience liked. The musicians brought in their audience who probably liked to play games.

                    Be straight with your audience: Any perks Danny and his crew have received has always been communicated to their audience.

                    TRUST is everything: It takes a long time to earn it. It's very powerful, and can be lost with one bad decision.

                    Let your audience be part of your journey: Anywhere Danny goes he invites his audience to come along.

                    Ten years to get on CBS Radio: Patience ins a virtue, and it took Danny 10 years to get to where he is. He took advantage of every opportunity he saw.

                    Time Management Tips: Set a schedule and stick to it. Danny has a full time job, a girlfriend, and his podcast.

                    Having the right people on your team is essential and keep everything transparent so you are all on the same page. 

                    Danny is real. When Danny says, that's a good question, that's because its a good question. Some people on my show do it just to stroke my ego.

                    Danny's Community Created Events That Drew the Attention of Main Stream Media

                    Check out Danny's Commercial on the Discovery Channel

                    https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l5oKqp-sZA0

                    Watch his acceptance speech as he is inducted into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame

                    ttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K64TXMuYNlY

                    Here, Danny made the news by accidentally spilling the beans on the Microsoft release.

                    In this article, Gamertag radio is mentioned in Forbes magazine.

                     

                    Save $40 Off Podcast Movement

                    If you plan on attending Podcast Movement, you can save $40 off your ticket when you use the coupon code sop40.

                    This is THE podcast event. I will be holding a Q& A session and I am really looking forward to it.

                    Coming Next Week

                    I have a on of people ask me about Podcast Interview Wizard from Jim Edwards. Well I'm going to buy it and play with and let you know what I think. If you want to check it out, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/piw (affiliate link)

                    I will also be talking about the Cool Cast Player which makes really pretty players for your website

                    Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                    The School of Podcasting is OPEN NOW. Get in before 4/1 (doors close ).

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    Step by Step tutorials (that are not outdated like the one on the Internet)

                    BONUSES

                    Private Facebook group for Networking

                    Email support for all your podcast questions.

                    Live Q & A Webinars - ask whatever you want. 

                    Sign up before we close the doors 4/1

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                     

                    ]]>Danny Peña got his first video game console from his Grandmother and his life was forever changed. Little did Danny know (who goes by the name of Godfree on his show) that he would someday be getting paid to fly around the world and play video games on his podcast Gamertag Radio. Did he think he would end up working for CBS and be featured next to podcasts like 60 minutes on play.it? Probably not. Today you will learn how Danny started building his audience before there was podcasting. Danny continued building his audience before there was iTunes. Through everything he does, Danny cares about one thing: the audience.

                    There are sooooooo many lessons to be learned today.

                    Interview starts at 3:38

                    Free Doesn't Last: Danny got his first check from mp3.com a site that was "Too big to fail" just like MySpace (and who knows some day Facebook?).

                    The party of the year took a year of planning: You don't get these kind of results by "winging it." Check out this video of the party and you can read how the Miami New Times  called it the Best Super Bowl party in South FL.

                    Know more about your audience than their age and sex: Danny brought in musicians who his audience liked. The musicians brought in their audience who probably liked to play games.

                    Be straight with your audience: Any perks Danny and his crew have received has always been communicated to their audience.

                    TRUST is everything: It takes a long time to earn it. It's very powerful, and can be lost with one bad decision.

                    Let your audience be part of your journey: Anywhere Danny goes he invites his audience to come along.

                    Ten years to get on CBS Radio: Patience ins a virtue, and it took Danny 10 years to get to where he is. He took advantage of every opportunity he saw.

                    Time Management Tips: Set a schedule and stick to it. Danny has a full time job, a girlfriend, and his podcast.

                    Having the right people on your team is essential and keep everything transparent so you are all on the same page. 

                    Danny is real. When Danny says, that's a good question, that's because its a good question. Some people on my show do it just to stroke my ego.

                    Danny's Community Created Events That Drew the Attention of Main Stream Media

                    Check out Danny's Commercial on the Discovery Channel

                    https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l5oKqp-sZA0

                    Watch his acceptance speech as he is inducted into the Podcaster's Hall of Fame

                    ttps://www.youtube.com/watch?v=K64TXMuYNlY

                    Here, Danny made the news by accidentally spilling the beans on the Microsoft release.

                    In this article, Gamertag radio is mentioned in Forbes magazine.

                     

                    Save $40 Off Podcast Movement

                    If you plan on attending Podcast Movement, you can save $40 off your ticket when you use the coupon code sop40.

                    This is THE podcast event. I will be holding a Q& A session and I am really looking forward to it.

                    Coming Next Week

                    I have a on of people ask me about Podcast Interview Wizard from Jim Edwards. Well I'm going to buy it and play with and let you know what I think. If you want to check it out, go to schoolofpodcasting.com/piw (affiliate link)

                    I will also be talking about the Cool Cast Player which makes really pretty players for your website

                    Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                    The School of Podcasting is OPEN NOW. Get in before 4/1 (doors close ).

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                    Step by Step tutorials (that are not outdated like the one on the Internet)

                    BONUSES

                    Private Facebook group for Networking

                    Email support for all your podcast questions.

                    Live Q & A Webinars - ask whatever you want. 

                    Sign up before we close the doors 4/1

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/start

                     

                    ]]>a274274f336e0a9ffd7504563db1a2ceMon, 21 Mar 2016 04:00:00 -040001:00:24falsefull506506Are Review Swaps Hurting Podcasting?I went to Podfest.us a couple of weeks ago and I saw a person do a presentation that offered to help people launch their podcast for $8999. Just for that weekend there was a sale and they would only charge you $3990. This is America and if you can get people to pay for $4,000 for your advice, then GO CAPITALISM. I feel bad for your customers, because without an intimate knowledge of your product, my gut instinct says they over-paid. A couple of episode ago I said the snake-oil sales people are coming, and now I'm here to tell you they are here. So get your boots on cause the poop is getting deep.
                    Podcast Review Swap - Trying to Cut in Line in the Apple Charts is Bad For Podcasting

                    I was in a private Facebook group when the owner of the group (the same guy selling a $9,000 podcast course) places this post:

                    RATE AND REVIEW SWAP - POST YOUR SHOW BELOW (LET'S GET A LONG THREAD GOING)Is it ok to post your show via iTunes link? and ask for rate and review swaps?I HIGHLY ENCOURAGE TO DO THISsomething like hey everyone, wanna do rate and review swap? Here's my show --show link removed by Dave--Let me know when you've done it and I'll go do the same. Extra points for screenshots or copy paste of review smile emoticonWHAT I DON'T ENCOURAGE'Hey guys check out the most bomb, amazing spectacular show on the planet - insert link. and subscribe please...NOPE!example #2Hey guys this week we talk about how we are the real deal, and we discuss it in such an amazing way. ARen't we awesome! - link to youtube. **Please don't F'ing do this! I am considering kicking you out if you do this more than 1x. and I won't tell you, so don't do it at all.BEST PRACTICE FOR ASKING FOR RATE AND REVIEWS"Anyone opne for rate and review swap: here's my show""Just left review for TAG PERSON - great show, here's what I wrote - insert message - THEN say - here's my show can you hit me back too"

                    The people lined up DROVES. The post was growing like a weed. This was like a unicorn. I had heard of them, but had never seen one, and it was depressing. After no less than 20 people I had put in their link I chimed in as asked why we were asking people who had never heard your show to give us a give star review. As always, I'm open to other sides of the story so I asked, "Why are you doing this? If you can't get your audience (who has heard your show) to review it, that is a red flag that your content is not resonating with your audience. Please shed some light on this. He repled:

                    The idea here is that people can listen, rate, and review and not be stranger. As artists we need a place to be ale to get feedback to share on our show, and this is a thread for people to be able to do that.  We are not encouraging people to be strangers here and in a podcasting group it only makes sense to have a place where people can openly asks for reviews and feedback. 

                    There is a place for podcasters to get feedback and share it on your show. It's called your audience. It's called comments on your website, facebook, email, voicemail from people who can help shape your content for the better. They are called YOUR AUDIENCE.

                    The answer is a lie. They are trying to game the system, jump up the charts, and boost their downloads. I get that. Who doesn't want a bigger audience? Do you remember William Hung from American Idol. This poor kid couldn't sing or dance, but he was so bad we shot him on the charts. William produced an album, and that's the last I heard of him. He doesn't have the talent to remain on that stage.

                    More and more professional content creators are getting into podcasting (radio people). They have paid their dues, and they have had lots of practice. They have found their voice, and they know what their audience wants. So now when we shoot your inexperienced probably not great  podcast to the top of the charts, you look like William Hung. Your audience doesn't stay, and your career is over.

                    Don't be a Flash in the Pan

                    Never week Danny Peña will be on the show. He is a hall of fame podcaster who started out on caseete tapes. His main focus is on his audience, and he now works for CBS. He gets paid to play video games because he did the work, listened to his audience, and promoted his show endlessly. He didn't cheat, he didn't cut in line, he didn't spam anyone, and the guy is a rock star in the gaming world.  Back in 2005ish Dr. Joe Vitale start podcasting. His first episode was all about him, and how great he was and why you should listen. It did nothing for the listener. he had a huge email list, and he must've sent out an email for people to vote for him on Podcast Alley (this was pre iTunes). They did. Joe went from 0 to the top of the charts. His episode was awful, and the next week he was completely off the charts.

                    Apple is Not Going to be Happy That Your are Negative Effecting Their Product

                    By "gaming" the iTunes charts the results are not entirely accurate. Apple went to a lot of work to build the system, and I'm pretty sure they are not going to be happy that you are playing it for the fool.

                    More "Bad" Advice Coming Out Daily

                    A recent article focusing on how to get to the to of iTunes New and Noteworthy came out and suggested this:

                    The article (which I'm purposely not linking to) states, "Fact: Once your show is approved by iTunes, they (Apple) give you an 8-week window to rise to the top in the "New and Noteworthy" categories. This is your best opportunity to strike podcast launch gold." To this I BEG you SHARE YOUR NUMBERS.

                    I've asked my audience to share their pre, during and post "New and Noteworthy Numbers" and the only people who have had shown that with over 1000 podcasts being added to iTunes each week (www.newmediashow.com) that the impact of New and Noteworthy is not thousands of downloads like it was in the past. If you can show me differently, I would love, love, love to see it.

                    Set a Date for Your Podcast Launch

                    I have seen so many people make really bad mistakes because they don't know what's involved with a podcast and they will pick a date. Even if it is six weeks out there is so much that go wrong with:

                    ArtworkMusicTechnologyThe InternetRecording GearApple

                    That to pick a date that you will launch is a pretty risky move. It is better to pick a day that you plan on having everything you need to pick the actual launch day. To this people freak out and state the 8 week rule. This is BS. You have 8 weeks to be NEW, you can be NOTEWORTHY any time.

                    Use Template to Contact People

                    The article states to use a personal approach and then states that he uses templates (that you can get if you give him your email list)

                    Be Ready For Your New and Noteworthy Screen Shot

                    It then states to be ready to take your screen shot (after bugging everyone you know, and as we have seen above - people you don't know) so you can climb the charts. If you're going to game the system, do it smart. PHOTOSHOP. Now I'm not saying this is a legit strategy, but it takes a lot less time, and nobody can check the history of New and Noteworthy. So if you're going to cheat, cheat smart.

                    The author states, Back when I launched my show in the summer of 2014, I set my alarm clock for middle-of-the-night and early morning hours. I didn't want to run the risk of missing my moment in the number one spot.

                    The more I work with podcasters, the more I see a trend. The people who spend hours OBSESSING over stats, don't have impressive numbers. Why? Because instead of obsessing over their audience, they are obsessing over download numbers.

                    If you obsess over the audience, the stats will come.

                    The article states ,"The more frequently you release your shows, the more likely you are to stack up downloads, increase your visibility, and maintain your number-one spot in the "New and Noteworthy."  The author forgot one important FACT. The Podcasts app STOPS DOWNLOADING your show if you have not listened to the episodes. Most people will not be able to keep up with you firehouse of information and thus the downloads will stop. How often should you publish? Don't ask me, ask your target audience!

                    The Bottom Line

                    the more we align ourselves with Scammers, Gamers, Liars, the more we - podcasters as a whole - risk losing our integrity. If our stats are rendered meaningless by the twitter bombers and the Review Swappers, nobody will sponsor our shows. Really? Ever heard of an endorsement deal getting pulled when the celebrity behaves poorly? Exactly, so knock it off.

                    Why Dave Believes What He Believes

                    Scott Johnson Computer Tutor Florida - People WILL download your back catalog

                    Henry Jasper Turned into a Fan Boy

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Henry Jasper is now starting to make money by helping companies with their social media using skills he learned from the School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Rewind : Starve the Doubts

                    I appeared on the Starve the Doubts Show with Jared Easley and Dan Franks. Check out Jared's new book. Quit Chasing Influencers

                    What were the last 5 that Clive from the I went to Podfest.us a couple of weeks ago and I saw a person do a presentation that offered to help people launch their podcast for $8999. Just for that weekend there was a sale and they would only charge you $3990. This is America and if you can get people to pay for $4,000 for your advice, then GO CAPITALISM. I feel bad for your customers, because without an intimate knowledge of your product, my gut instinct says they over-paid. A couple of episode ago I said the snake-oil sales people are coming, and now I'm here to tell you they are here. So get your boots on cause the poop is getting deep.

                    Podcast Review Swap - Trying to Cut in Line in the Apple Charts is Bad For Podcasting

                    I was in a private Facebook group when the owner of the group (the same guy selling a $9,000 podcast course) places this post:

                    RATE AND REVIEW SWAP - POST YOUR SHOW BELOW (LET'S GET A LONG THREAD GOING)Is it ok to post your show via iTunes link? and ask for rate and review swaps?I HIGHLY ENCOURAGE TO DO THISsomething like hey everyone, wanna do rate and review swap? Here's my show --show link removed by Dave--Let me know when you've done it and I'll go do the same. Extra points for screenshots or copy paste of review smile emoticonWHAT I DON'T ENCOURAGE'Hey guys check out the most bomb, amazing spectacular show on the planet - insert link. and subscribe please...NOPE!example #2Hey guys this week we talk about how we are the real deal, and we discuss it in such an amazing way. ARen't we awesome! - link to youtube. **Please don't F'ing do this! I am considering kicking you out if you do this more than 1x. and I won't tell you, so don't do it at all.BEST PRACTICE FOR ASKING FOR RATE AND REVIEWS"Anyone opne for rate and review swap: here's my show""Just left review for TAG PERSON - great show, here's what I wrote - insert message - THEN say - here's my show can you hit me back too"

                    The people lined up DROVES. The post was growing like a weed. This was like a unicorn. I had heard of them, but had never seen one, and it was depressing. After no less than 20 people I had put in their link I chimed in as asked why we were asking people who had never heard your show to give us a give star review. As always, I'm open to other sides of the story so I asked, "Why are you doing this? If you can't get your audience (who has heard your show) to review it, that is a red flag that your content is not resonating with your audience. Please shed some light on this. He repled:

                    The idea here is that people can listen, rate, and review and not be stranger. As artists we need a place to be ale to get feedback to share on our show, and this is a thread for people to be able to do that.  We are not encouraging people to be strangers here and in a podcasting group it only makes sense to have a place where people can openly asks for reviews and feedback. 

                    There is a place for podcasters to get feedback and share it on your show. It's called your audience. It's called comments on your website, facebook, email, voicemail from people who can help shape your content for the better. They are called YOUR AUDIENCE.

                    The answer is a lie. They are trying to game the system, jump up the charts, and boost their downloads. I get that. Who doesn't want a bigger audience? Do you remember William Hung from American Idol. This poor kid couldn't sing or dance, but he was so bad we shot him on the charts. William produced an album, and that's the last I heard of him. He doesn't have the talent to remain on that stage.

                    More and more professional content creators are getting into podcasting (radio people). They have paid their dues, and they have had lots of practice. They have found their voice, and they know what their audience wants. So now when we shoot your inexperienced probably not great  podcast to the top of the charts, you look like William Hung. Your audience doesn't stay, and your career is over.

                    Don't be a Flash in the Pan

                    Never week Danny Peña will be on the show. He is a hall of fame podcaster who started out on caseete tapes. His main focus is on his audience, and he now works for CBS. He gets paid to play video games because he did the work, listened to his audience, and promoted his show endlessly. He didn't cheat, he didn't cut in line, he didn't spam anyone, and the guy is a rock star in the gaming world.  Back in 2005ish Dr. Joe Vitale start podcasting. His first episode was all about him, and how great he was and why you should listen. It did nothing for the listener. he had a huge email list, and he must've sent out an email for people to vote for him on Podcast Alley (this was pre iTunes). They did. Joe went from 0 to the top of the charts. His episode was awful, and the next week he was completely off the charts.

                    Apple is Not Going to be Happy That Your are Negative Effecting Their Product

                    By "gaming" the iTunes charts the results are not entirely accurate. Apple went to a lot of work to build the system, and I'm pretty sure they are not going to be happy that you are playing it for the fool.

                    More "Bad" Advice Coming Out Daily

                    A recent article focusing on how to get to the to of iTunes New and Noteworthy came out and suggested this:

                    The article (which I'm purposely not linking to) states, "Fact: Once your show is approved by iTunes, they (Apple) give you an 8-week window to rise to the top in the "New and Noteworthy" categories. This is your best opportunity to strike podcast launch gold." To this I BEG you SHARE YOUR NUMBERS.

                    I've asked my audience to share their pre, during and post "New and Noteworthy Numbers" and the only people who have had shown that with over 1000 podcasts being added to iTunes each week (www.newmediashow.com) that the impact of New and Noteworthy is not thousands of downloads like it was in the past. If you can show me differently, I would love, love, love to see it.

                    Set a Date for Your Podcast Launch

                    I have seen so many people make really bad mistakes because they don't know what's involved with a podcast and they will pick a date. Even if it is six weeks out there is so much that go wrong with:

                    ArtworkMusicTechnologyThe InternetRecording GearApple

                    That to pick a date that you will launch is a pretty risky move. It is better to pick a day that you plan on having everything you need to pick the actual launch day. To this people freak out and state the 8 week rule. This is BS. You have 8 weeks to be NEW, you can be NOTEWORTHY any time.

                    Use Template to Contact People

                    The article states to use a personal approach and then states that he uses templates (that you can get if you give him your email list)

                    Be Ready For Your New and Noteworthy Screen Shot

                    It then states to be ready to take your screen shot (after bugging everyone you know, and as we have seen above - people you don't know) so you can climb the charts. If you're going to game the system, do it smart. PHOTOSHOP. Now I'm not saying this is a legit strategy, but it takes a lot less time, and nobody can check the history of New and Noteworthy. So if you're going to cheat, cheat smart.

                    The author states, Back when I launched my show in the summer of 2014, I set my alarm clock for middle-of-the-night and early morning hours. I didn't want to run the risk of missing my moment in the number one spot.

                    The more I work with podcasters, the more I see a trend. The people who spend hours OBSESSING over stats, don't have impressive numbers. Why? Because instead of obsessing over their audience, they are obsessing over download numbers.

                    If you obsess over the audience, the stats will come.

                    The article states ,"The more frequently you release your shows, the more likely you are to stack up downloads, increase your visibility, and maintain your number-one spot in the "New and Noteworthy."  The author forgot one important FACT. The Podcasts app STOPS DOWNLOADING your show if you have not listened to the episodes. Most people will not be able to keep up with you firehouse of information and thus the downloads will stop. How often should you publish? Don't ask me, ask your target audience!

                    The Bottom Line

                    the more we align ourselves with Scammers, Gamers, Liars, the more we - podcasters as a whole - risk losing our integrity. If our stats are rendered meaningless by the twitter bombers and the Review Swappers, nobody will sponsor our shows. Really? Ever heard of an endorsement deal getting pulled when the celebrity behaves poorly? Exactly, so knock it off.

                    Why Dave Believes What He Believes

                    Scott Johnson Computer Tutor Florida - People WILL download your back catalog

                    Henry Jasper Turned into a Fan Boy

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Henry Jasper is now starting to make money by helping companies with their social media using skills he learned from the School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Rewind : Starve the Doubts

                    I appeared on the Starve the Doubts Show with Jared Easley and Dan Franks. Check out Jared's new book. Quit Chasing Influencers

                    What were the last 5 that Clive from the Future Past Podcast listened to?

                    Six figure side gig

                    Profitcast

                    Unmistakable creative

                    the Robcast

                    The Ray Edwards Show Ray Edwards New Book How to Write Copy That Sells

                    Mentioned on This Show

                    Glen The Geek from Horse Radio Network

                    Ready to Join the School of Podcasting?

                    Open enrollment is now through March 31. Get in while the School of Podcasting is open.

                    Get step by step tutorials, live webinars, a Private Facebook Group, and priority email support.

                    Join Today

                     Subscribe in iTunes

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes

                    This episode first appeared at http://schoolofpodcasting.com/review-swaps-hurting-podcasting/

                     

                    ]]>c824874724dcb085e8aba4df81cc9ee3Mon, 14 Mar 2016 04:00:00 -040047:52falsefull505505Jim Harold Makes A Living Talking about GhostsYou will notice that I am in pursuit of people who have been able to make a living with their podcast. Today we interview Jim Harold who does the Paranormal Podcastt and the Campfire Podcast.
                    Podcasting News

                    In a nutshell, use podcastsconnect.apple.com to submit your podcast to iTunes, but don't mess with anything else in that platform for now (you can really shoot yourself in the foot).

                    Understanding iTunes and Podcasting

                    iTunes is somewhat confusing. You submit an iTunes RSS feed to iTunes and in return, they give you a link to your listing in iTunes. iTunes is like a giant phone book of podcasts.

                    The interesting thing is when someone goes to iTunes and subscribes to your show, iTunes sets the original feed you submitted in their software. This can create confusing.

                    When you publish a new show it will not show up in the iTunes Store immediately because they have to refreshed your listing. However, anyone who is subscribed to your show gets that show because they are looking at your original feed.

                    My advice here is to subscribe to your own show. This way when you think there is a problem because your show is not "showing up" in iTunes, check your show using whatever app you use. If the show appears, then it just means the iTunes store has not refreshed your listing yet. Wait at least 24 hours.

                    Jim Harold's Paranormal Podcast is Paying the Bills

                    (interview starts at 9:51 - recorded with a Zoom H5 recorder and two Audio Technica ATR2005usb microphones )

                    Here are some bullet points from our conversation with Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast

                    Jim wanted to be on the radio, but ended up in radio sales.

                    Jim loved reading about the Paranormal growing up.

                    He sputtered at the beginning of his show, but his fans wanted more. Why? Because nobody was talking about this like Jim was, and he delivered value.

                    After 6 months , Jim was offered a sponsorship from Audible, and that helped him get more serious about his show.

                    Jim has multiple streams of income. He has a plus club (membership site), he has multiple books, and he has advertisers. Jim uses Wishlist member to manage his membership site

                    Jim's first book was "traditionally" published. It was cool to see it in Barns and Noble, but Jim later purchased the rights to that book and sold it on his own. Check out Jim's books at Amazon.com

                    Podcasting has opened door for Jim

                    His podcast grows about 10% every year.

                    His podcast is named well. It's called the "paranormal podcast." He went with the obvious name for his show. When people Google "Paranormal Podcast' his show comes up.

                    There is a difference between radio ads and podcast ads.

                    Jim explains how he feels like he knows me because he listens to my show.

                    Podcasting advertising has great impact because we care about your audience. Jim has rejected ads that didn't fit his audience, or that he couldn't endorse.

                    Jim is currently using a Heil Pr40, a Mackie Mixer, and a Behringer Processor.

                    Check out Jim's shows at Jimharold.com as well as his TV You Grew Up With podcast.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast

                    Steve Stewart from SteveStewart.me

                    Stargate Pioneer from the Gonna Geek Network

                    Danny Pena from Gamer Tag Radio

                    Auphonic Audio Tool

                    Show 503 on Compelling Podcasts

                    School of Podcasting Newsletter

                    ]]>You will notice that I am in pursuit of people who have been able to make a living with their podcast. Today we interview Jim Harold who does the Paranormal Podcastt and the Campfire Podcast.
                    Podcasting News

                    In a nutshell, use podcastsconnect.apple.com to submit your podcast to iTunes, but don't mess with anything else in that platform for now (you can really shoot yourself in the foot).

                    Understanding iTunes and Podcasting

                    iTunes is somewhat confusing. You submit an iTunes RSS feed to iTunes and in return, they give you a link to your listing in iTunes. iTunes is like a giant phone book of podcasts.

                    The interesting thing is when someone goes to iTunes and subscribes to your show, iTunes sets the original feed you submitted in their software. This can create confusing.

                    When you publish a new show it will not show up in the iTunes Store immediately because they have to refreshed your listing. However, anyone who is subscribed to your show gets that show because they are looking at your original feed.

                    My advice here is to subscribe to your own show. This way when you think there is a problem because your show is not "showing up" in iTunes, check your show using whatever app you use. If the show appears, then it just means the iTunes store has not refreshed your listing yet. Wait at least 24 hours.

                    Jim Harold's Paranormal Podcast is Paying the Bills

                    (interview starts at 9:51 - recorded with a Zoom H5 recorder and two Audio Technica ATR2005usb microphones )

                    Here are some bullet points from our conversation with Jim Harold from the Paranormal Podcast

                    Jim wanted to be on the radio, but ended up in radio sales.

                    Jim loved reading about the Paranormal growing up.

                    He sputtered at the beginning of his show, but his fans wanted more. Why? Because nobody was talking about this like Jim was, and he delivered value.

                    After 6 months , Jim was offered a sponsorship from Audible, and that helped him get more serious about his show.

                    Jim has multiple streams of income. He has a plus club (membership site), he has multiple books, and he has advertisers. Jim uses Wishlist member to manage his membership site

                    Jim's first book was "traditionally" published. It was cool to see it in Barns and Noble, but Jim later purchased the rights to that book and sold it on his own. Check out Jim's books at Amazon.com

                    Podcasting has opened door for Jim

                    His podcast grows about 10% every year.

                    His podcast is named well. It's called the "paranormal podcast." He went with the obvious name for his show. When people Google "Paranormal Podcast' his show comes up.

                    There is a difference between radio ads and podcast ads.

                    Jim explains how he feels like he knows me because he listens to my show.

                    Podcasting advertising has great impact because we care about your audience. Jim has rejected ads that didn't fit his audience, or that he couldn't endorse.

                    Jim is currently using a Heil Pr40, a Mackie Mixer, and a Behringer Processor.

                    Check out Jim's shows at Jimharold.com as well as his TV You Grew Up With podcast.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Daniel J Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast

                    Steve Stewart from SteveStewart.me

                    Stargate Pioneer from the Gonna Geek Network

                    Danny Pena from Gamer Tag Radio

                    Auphonic Audio Tool

                    Show 503 on Compelling Podcasts

                    School of Podcasting Newsletter

                    ]]>90576fce201183d427314427925e0c5dMon, 07 Mar 2016 05:00:00 -040001:02:00falsefull504504Creating Compelling PodcastsPodfest hapned this weekend in tamp Florida. Wow was it fun. I got to hang out with Hall of Fame podcasters like Danny Pena, and meet some people who are trying to get their podcast off the ground. I love, love, love, the podcast community. It's filled with helpful, loving ,caring people. I got to catch up with Dan and Jared from Podcast Movement, Glenn the Geek, some members of the School of Podcasting. I'd write more names, but I'm still in a coma from the Dramamine.
                    Cool Things About Podfest

                    Being a new event (this was year two) they had one track. This meant that all the attendees sat in the same room and the speakers would rotate in and out. We were strongly encouraged to network on breaks and sit in new locations. It was cool. I ran out of business cards, an luckily had a box of "stand by" business cards.

                    One of the coolest things were did was like Speed Networking. You had a time keeper at the table, and each person had 90 seconds to share their name, their podcast, and their target audience. Then each round you would go to a new table and meet more people. By the end of the session, you had pretty much met everyone in the room. This was one of the coolest things I've ever seen.

                    They had a schedule flowed nicely together. This lead to speakers often referring to something mentioned previously in the conference.

                    Great speakers. Simple. All brought value.

                    Relative sponsors: Audio editing services, marketing, interviewing, trademark, conferences, hosting, all were relevant to the audience.

                    I saw, felt, and participated in Content Marketing. I met Katie Krimitsos the night before. I saw her presentation on Facebook Goups, and she showed me how much more I could be doing. I will be a customer. 

                    When Will The School of Podcasting Open?

                    As God as my witness, ready or not, it will open next weekend 3/5

                    What am I doing? I'm reshot many of the videos. I've added quite a few videos, and I'm restructuring how I will do business. At this point (subject to change) I want to let a certain amount of people in at one point, and the close the doors so we can all kind of be "on the same page." Then I can help, encourage, and guide you through your process, while still providing value to current members through additional videos and live office hour webinars.

                    Creating Compelling Podcasts

                    Adjective: having a powerful and irresistible effect; requiring acute admiration, attention, or respect

                    How Podcasts are like Potatoes

                    You have instant potatoes out of a box. These are quick, easy, and cheap. The end result? Bland. You can make mashed potatoes from scratch. They take longer, it takes more effort, and they are more expensive to create. The result? They are delicious and your recipients want more.

                    It's Not About the Audio Quality

                    If you record with your laptop microphone, that's bad. I think we all can recognize audio that is distracting (if you make me adjust the volume during your podcast, we have a problem). You can purchase an Audio Technica 2100 for around $60 and have great audio. Be sure to get a pop filter (check out this package with a swing arm). Once you have that, MOVE ON.

                    I would listen to an 8-track tape of the Beatles because the content is good. My friend Paul Colligan from the Podcast Report records in all sorts of fun locations. Some are better than others. One time it sounded like Paul was recording fro ma submarine. I listened to every minute. Why? Because Paul makes me think.

                    On the other hand, Metallica put out and album with Lou Reed. Van Halen Put out an album with Gary Cherone.

                    One of more of the following need to happen:

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Grown
                    • Entertain
                    • Educate
                    
                    

                    If none of the above is happening then don't press record.

                    Identify Your Audience

                    If you have a "Secret Santa" at your job and you get someone's name that you don't know you have two choices:

                    1. Gift Card (quick, easy, fast - bland)
                    2. Go ask someone who knows the person and get them a gift they want
                    
                    

                    Which one gets the best response?

                    This is why you have to know who your audience is, so you can go to where they are and listen to what they are talking about. Start of listening when you find your audience. Ask them what they might want to hear. Be sure to take notes using tools like Evernote or OneNote

                    The ADDIE Approach

                    Anaylize - Go research your audienceDesign - Decide how you'r going to cover your topicDevelop - Buy the podcasting equipment, figure out what segments you will use.Implement - Let a member of your target audience listen to the show.Evaluate - Did they like it? Get feedback

                    Feedback is just that - feedback. It leads to failure if the feedback causes you to quit. Don't quit. Instead Analyze the feedback, design a new approach, develop a new version of your podcast, and have a target listener evaluate it. This goes on and on, forever.

                    How Many Downloads Should My Podcast Get?

                    Here is the equation:

                    Total Number of Downloads

                    X

                    Effective Production

                    =

                    Total Number of Downloads

                    If you have no value (bit focused, horrendous audio quality) then it doesn't matter how much you promote it. If you have great value, but don't tell anyone about it, that won't work either. This is why you need to record a couple of shows so you know how much time it takes to create an episode. THEN you can choose your publishing schedule.

                    Check out the Slides at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/503

                    Creating Compelling Podcasts from podcastcoach]]>Podfest hapned this weekend in tamp Florida. Wow was it fun. I got to hang out with Hall of Fame podcasters like Danny Pena, and meet some people who are trying to get their podcast off the ground. I love, love, love, the podcast community. It's filled with helpful, loving ,caring people. I got to catch up with Dan and Jared from Podcast Movement, Glenn the Geek, some members of the School of Podcasting. I'd write more names, but I'm still in a coma from the Dramamine.
                    Cool Things About Podfest

                    Being a new event (this was year two) they had one track. This meant that all the attendees sat in the same room and the speakers would rotate in and out. We were strongly encouraged to network on breaks and sit in new locations. It was cool. I ran out of business cards, an luckily had a box of "stand by" business cards.

                    One of the coolest things were did was like Speed Networking. You had a time keeper at the table, and each person had 90 seconds to share their name, their podcast, and their target audience. Then each round you would go to a new table and meet more people. By the end of the session, you had pretty much met everyone in the room. This was one of the coolest things I've ever seen.

                    They had a schedule flowed nicely together. This lead to speakers often referring to something mentioned previously in the conference.

                    Great speakers. Simple. All brought value.

                    Relative sponsors: Audio editing services, marketing, interviewing, trademark, conferences, hosting, all were relevant to the audience.

                    I saw, felt, and participated in Content Marketing. I met Katie Krimitsos the night before. I saw her presentation on Facebook Goups, and she showed me how much more I could be doing. I will be a customer. 

                    When Will The School of Podcasting Open?

                    As God as my witness, ready or not, it will open next weekend 3/5

                    What am I doing? I'm reshot many of the videos. I've added quite a few videos, and I'm restructuring how I will do business. At this point (subject to change) I want to let a certain amount of people in at one point, and the close the doors so we can all kind of be "on the same page." Then I can help, encourage, and guide you through your process, while still providing value to current members through additional videos and live office hour webinars.

                    Creating Compelling Podcasts

                    Adjective: having a powerful and irresistible effect; requiring acute admiration, attention, or respect

                    How Podcasts are like Potatoes

                    You have instant potatoes out of a box. These are quick, easy, and cheap. The end result? Bland. You can make mashed potatoes from scratch. They take longer, it takes more effort, and they are more expensive to create. The result? They are delicious and your recipients want more.

                    It's Not About the Audio Quality

                    If you record with your laptop microphone, that's bad. I think we all can recognize audio that is distracting (if you make me adjust the volume during your podcast, we have a problem). You can purchase an Audio Technica 2100 for around $60 and have great audio. Be sure to get a pop filter (check out this package with a swing arm). Once you have that, MOVE ON.

                    I would listen to an 8-track tape of the Beatles because the content is good. My friend Paul Colligan from the Podcast Report records in all sorts of fun locations. Some are better than others. One time it sounded like Paul was recording fro ma submarine. I listened to every minute. Why? Because Paul makes me think.

                    On the other hand, Metallica put out and album with Lou Reed. Van Halen Put out an album with Gary Cherone.

                    One of more of the following need to happen:

                    • Laugh
                    • Cry
                    • Think
                    • Grown
                    • Entertain
                    • Educate
                    
                    

                    If none of the above is happening then don't press record.

                    Identify Your Audience

                    If you have a "Secret Santa" at your job and you get someone's name that you don't know you have two choices:

                    1. Gift Card (quick, easy, fast - bland)
                    2. Go ask someone who knows the person and get them a gift they want
                    
                    

                    Which one gets the best response?

                    This is why you have to know who your audience is, so you can go to where they are and listen to what they are talking about. Start of listening when you find your audience. Ask them what they might want to hear. Be sure to take notes using tools like Evernote or OneNote

                    The ADDIE Approach

                    Anaylize - Go research your audienceDesign - Decide how you'r going to cover your topicDevelop - Buy the podcasting equipment, figure out what segments you will use.Implement - Let a member of your target audience listen to the show.Evaluate - Did they like it? Get feedback

                    Feedback is just that - feedback. It leads to failure if the feedback causes you to quit. Don't quit. Instead Analyze the feedback, design a new approach, develop a new version of your podcast, and have a target listener evaluate it. This goes on and on, forever.

                    How Many Downloads Should My Podcast Get?

                    Here is the equation:

                    Total Number of Downloads

                    X

                    Effective Production

                    =

                    Total Number of Downloads

                    If you have no value (bit focused, horrendous audio quality) then it doesn't matter how much you promote it. If you have great value, but don't tell anyone about it, that won't work either. This is why you need to record a couple of shows so you know how much time it takes to create an episode. THEN you can choose your publishing schedule.

                    Check out the Slides at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/503

                    Creating Compelling Podcasts from podcastcoach]]>fcf89947ec41c0f48e3b93b03f462d49Mon, 29 Feb 2016 05:00:00 -040051:35falsefull5035035 Voice Related Tools for EngagementA couple of weeks ago I let you know that my "Day job" had gone away. A little update on the story, I reached out to the head of HR only to find she no longer works there, and I got an email stating that payroll would be postponed two days.  So there I was, thinking about getting into training and support. So I asked myself. What do I want to do for a living? I love podcasting. So in a nutshell.

                    I want to help people in the podcasting space.

                    Who is the biggest player in the podcast space?

                    Libsyn.com

                    I reached out to a person I knew (remember how it's all about relationships) and just let them know I was available if they needed someone. A little over two weeks later I was given a proposal to join their team.

                    I gladly accepted.

                    I can still do consulting, but you will now hear me give out a disclaimer that I am an employee of Libsyn. You will hear me give out my promo code of sopfree for Libsyn on this show, but not at a trade show where I'm acting as a Libsyn employee. For those who are new to my show, I've been a big fan of Libsyn as well as Blubrry, and Spreaker for years. I think the insights I get from working in support will help me created better content for you on this show, as well as additional documentation for Libsyn.

                    I've always wanted to make a living around podcasting, and now I can. I can do podcasting as my full-time gig, and my night time hobby. Wait, that's Ray's line.

                    Because of My Podcast I Quit My Day Job - Jim Harold

                    Every Saturday at 10:30 AM I do a live call-in show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" at www.askthepdocastcoach.com/live and this week Jim asked a question about the controversy over measuring podcasts (see this episode of the Podcasters Roundtable ) and once he came on I got to talk to him and found out.

                    • Jim previously a sales guy for radio
                    • Jim now does a podcasting full time at jimharold.com
                    
                    

                    I've already reached out to Jim and we will be doing a deep dive on next week's show.

                    Anchor.fm Vs Voxer Vs Clammr Vs Speakpipe Vs Voicemail

                    Today we are joined by Chris Nesi  (www.chrisnesi.com) from the House of Ed Tech podcast. Chris is well versed in Voxer. As a member of the School of Podcasting Chris has shown me he really enjoys voxer. So when this new tool (Anchor) came on the scene and everyone was going nuts over it, I wanted to get Chris's opinion. In the end, they are different tools for different audiences who are looking for different results.

                    The world is all a flutter over the Anchor app for iOs. This is an app that allows you to sign in via your twitter account and create audio. People can follow you, and you can follow them. You can record a "wave" and people can reply. This is all public. You can them embed your wav on your website, like this.

                    See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/502

                    Speakpipe.com

                    Originally I wasn't going to include Speakpipe in this discussion, but if we are talking about getting feedback from your audience, I would look like a fool not to include it. Speakpipe is a way for you to put a button on your website for people to click on it, and using their microphone leave a message. When you get the message you can listen to it, download it, or click reply and send a message back to the audience member. It's free, with a premium version for more storage. Check out speakpipe.com

                    Anchor.fm

                    I can see this being used to get feedback from your audience. While this is already easy with tools like speakpipe, when someone leaves a message with speakpipe, you can reply to them as well. This is all public. With Anchor, the conversation is public so everyone can hear the conversation and bring their point of view. The bad news for podcasters is once you get the audio, there is no download option. Now you are stuck with hitting play on your phone and recording it with another device. For me, I shared a link to myself, played the wave on the web, and recorded it using Hindenburg journalist (you can go into settings and tell it to record "other applications." Anchor - True public radio - Anchor FM Inc.

                    Voxer.com

                    Voxer is also a free app (with a paid pro version with additional perks) that turns your phone into a walkie talkie. It is cool, and you can invite people into groups. This again creates a community feeling. You can share audio, video, text, and images. With a group it is only public to the group. You can private message each individual if you'd like. The nice thing about voxer is it works on all platforms. You can even just use their website. I do love the fact that you can listen to messages at up 3X speed. With Voxer, you have a public forum if you want it (with only invited guests) or private message that are easy to listen to and easy to download. Every time I play with Voxer I feel I should create a group for the School of Podcasting. Check out the app at Voxer Walkie Talkie Messenger - Voxer LLC

                    Clammr.com

                    Clammr is a fun tool to help spread the word about your show. You can use the free app (or their website) to create clips up to 24 seconds. When Clammr was first launched, creating a clammr was a bit cumbersome. They have improved this since the launch, and they've added the ability to use their website (for those not using an iOs device). If someone likes a clammr when they hear it, they are emailed a link to the rest of the episode. You can create widgets to show your favorite clammrs. They look like this. see schoolofpodcasting.com/502

                    I can also share a playlist via a text link So where clammr is for the audience to help spread the podcast to their friends, tools like Anchor are for getting their opinion or feedback from the show. Check out the clammr at here Clammr Radio – Discover Podcasts, Music, & News Headlines - Clammr, Inc.

                    Voicemail

                    I have a number through PodcastVoicemail.com (Kall8) that costs me $2 a month plus .06 a minute. I've never had a bill over $4, and the audio is "meh" but it's simple and it works for those who are not too technically gifted.

                    What Does My New Position Mean For the School of Podcasting?

                    As I'm working for Libsyn.com there are a few that will happen, but very little will change. When I write and talk on my podcast, I am writing as Dave Jackson the Professional Podcast Mentor. I have been delivering objective facts about podcasting, technology, and content for almost 11 years. On this blog I can tell you to use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com, or Blubrry.com or Spreaker.com. If i'm at a trade show as an "Official Libsyn Employee" I won't be giving out promo codes (if I want to keep my job), and I won't be giving out promo codes to my competition. You will now hear me use a disclaimer when I talk about hosting companies and explain that I work for Libsyn. But in the end, I've always tried to deliver the facts, and let you make informed decisions. For anyone who has listened to my show from 2005, I've been a big fan of Libsyn before they had an affiliate program, and before I was an employee. So in the end, not much is going to change for the podcast.

                    What I hope to gain is a better understanding of the podcasting community, the industry, and bring that information to the podcast, and to my tutorials. Some of those tutorials may end up here, or at Libsyn.com or both.

                    When I lost my job on February 5th, I asked myself, "What do you want to do with your life." I've been a teacher for 20+ years. I've worked in customer support, and tech support. My goal was to make a living around podcasting. My first thought was I could do it on my own by doing consulting full time, or I could go work for a company like Libsyn, Blubrry, or Spreaker. While like all of these companies, I've always been the biggest fan of Libsyn. I also love chocolate ice cream and it will win over any other flavor until Oreo Cookie ice cream is available. There is no bad choice there. I reached out to Rob Walch the VP of Podcasting Relations (and someone I've known for 11 years) and just let him know I was available. If something happened I would do Libsyn full time and do consulting in the evenings and weekends. If something didn't happen, I would go full time consulting,  and maybe get a part time job doing something...]]>A couple of weeks ago I let you know that my "Day job" had gone away. A little update on the story, I reached out to the head of HR only to find she no longer works there, and I got an email stating that payroll would be postponed two days.  So there I was, thinking about getting into training and support. So I asked myself. What do I want to do for a living? I love podcasting. So in a nutshell.

                    I want to help people in the podcasting space.

                    Who is the biggest player in the podcast space?

                    Libsyn.com

                    I reached out to a person I knew (remember how it's all about relationships) and just let them know I was available if they needed someone. A little over two weeks later I was given a proposal to join their team.

                    I gladly accepted.

                    I can still do consulting, but you will now hear me give out a disclaimer that I am an employee of Libsyn. You will hear me give out my promo code of sopfree for Libsyn on this show, but not at a trade show where I'm acting as a Libsyn employee. For those who are new to my show, I've been a big fan of Libsyn as well as Blubrry, and Spreaker for years. I think the insights I get from working in support will help me created better content for you on this show, as well as additional documentation for Libsyn.

                    I've always wanted to make a living around podcasting, and now I can. I can do podcasting as my full-time gig, and my night time hobby. Wait, that's Ray's line.

                    Because of My Podcast I Quit My Day Job - Jim Harold

                    Every Saturday at 10:30 AM I do a live call-in show called "Ask the Podcast Coach" at www.askthepdocastcoach.com/live and this week Jim asked a question about the controversy over measuring podcasts (see this episode of the Podcasters Roundtable ) and once he came on I got to talk to him and found out.

                    • Jim previously a sales guy for radio
                    • Jim now does a podcasting full time at jimharold.com
                    
                    

                    I've already reached out to Jim and we will be doing a deep dive on next week's show.

                    Anchor.fm Vs Voxer Vs Clammr Vs Speakpipe Vs Voicemail

                    Today we are joined by Chris Nesi  (www.chrisnesi.com) from the House of Ed Tech podcast. Chris is well versed in Voxer. As a member of the School of Podcasting Chris has shown me he really enjoys voxer. So when this new tool (Anchor) came on the scene and everyone was going nuts over it, I wanted to get Chris's opinion. In the end, they are different tools for different audiences who are looking for different results.

                    The world is all a flutter over the Anchor app for iOs. This is an app that allows you to sign in via your twitter account and create audio. People can follow you, and you can follow them. You can record a "wave" and people can reply. This is all public. You can them embed your wav on your website, like this.

                    See www.schoolofpodcasting.com/502

                    Speakpipe.com

                    Originally I wasn't going to include Speakpipe in this discussion, but if we are talking about getting feedback from your audience, I would look like a fool not to include it. Speakpipe is a way for you to put a button on your website for people to click on it, and using their microphone leave a message. When you get the message you can listen to it, download it, or click reply and send a message back to the audience member. It's free, with a premium version for more storage. Check out speakpipe.com

                    Anchor.fm

                    I can see this being used to get feedback from your audience. While this is already easy with tools like speakpipe, when someone leaves a message with speakpipe, you can reply to them as well. This is all public. With Anchor, the conversation is public so everyone can hear the conversation and bring their point of view. The bad news for podcasters is once you get the audio, there is no download option. Now you are stuck with hitting play on your phone and recording it with another device. For me, I shared a link to myself, played the wave on the web, and recorded it using Hindenburg journalist (you can go into settings and tell it to record "other applications." Anchor - True public radio - Anchor FM Inc.

                    Voxer.com

                    Voxer is also a free app (with a paid pro version with additional perks) that turns your phone into a walkie talkie. It is cool, and you can invite people into groups. This again creates a community feeling. You can share audio, video, text, and images. With a group it is only public to the group. You can private message each individual if you'd like. The nice thing about voxer is it works on all platforms. You can even just use their website. I do love the fact that you can listen to messages at up 3X speed. With Voxer, you have a public forum if you want it (with only invited guests) or private message that are easy to listen to and easy to download. Every time I play with Voxer I feel I should create a group for the School of Podcasting. Check out the app at Voxer Walkie Talkie Messenger - Voxer LLC

                    Clammr.com

                    Clammr is a fun tool to help spread the word about your show. You can use the free app (or their website) to create clips up to 24 seconds. When Clammr was first launched, creating a clammr was a bit cumbersome. They have improved this since the launch, and they've added the ability to use their website (for those not using an iOs device). If someone likes a clammr when they hear it, they are emailed a link to the rest of the episode. You can create widgets to show your favorite clammrs. They look like this. see schoolofpodcasting.com/502

                    I can also share a playlist via a text link So where clammr is for the audience to help spread the podcast to their friends, tools like Anchor are for getting their opinion or feedback from the show. Check out the clammr at here Clammr Radio – Discover Podcasts, Music, & News Headlines - Clammr, Inc.

                    Voicemail

                    I have a number through PodcastVoicemail.com (Kall8) that costs me $2 a month plus .06 a minute. I've never had a bill over $4, and the audio is "meh" but it's simple and it works for those who are not too technically gifted.

                    What Does My New Position Mean For the School of Podcasting?

                    As I'm working for Libsyn.com there are a few that will happen, but very little will change. When I write and talk on my podcast, I am writing as Dave Jackson the Professional Podcast Mentor. I have been delivering objective facts about podcasting, technology, and content for almost 11 years. On this blog I can tell you to use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com, or Blubrry.com or Spreaker.com. If i'm at a trade show as an "Official Libsyn Employee" I won't be giving out promo codes (if I want to keep my job), and I won't be giving out promo codes to my competition. You will now hear me use a disclaimer when I talk about hosting companies and explain that I work for Libsyn. But in the end, I've always tried to deliver the facts, and let you make informed decisions. For anyone who has listened to my show from 2005, I've been a big fan of Libsyn before they had an affiliate program, and before I was an employee. So in the end, not much is going to change for the podcast.

                    What I hope to gain is a better understanding of the podcasting community, the industry, and bring that information to the podcast, and to my tutorials. Some of those tutorials may end up here, or at Libsyn.com or both.

                    When I lost my job on February 5th, I asked myself, "What do you want to do with your life." I've been a teacher for 20+ years. I've worked in customer support, and tech support. My goal was to make a living around podcasting. My first thought was I could do it on my own by doing consulting full time, or I could go work for a company like Libsyn, Blubrry, or Spreaker. While like all of these companies, I've always been the biggest fan of Libsyn. I also love chocolate ice cream and it will win over any other flavor until Oreo Cookie ice cream is available. There is no bad choice there. I reached out to Rob Walch the VP of Podcasting Relations (and someone I've known for 11 years) and just let him know I was available. If something happened I would do Libsyn full time and do consulting in the evenings and weekends. If something didn't happen, I would go full time consulting,  and maybe get a part time job doing something else.

                    When I took the job as the Director of the New Media Expo, what I ended up getting were relationships. I believe this job will get me more in touch with potential guests, insights, and a view I wouldn't have if I didn't accept the position.

                    I said before, I wanted to make a living helping people podcast and now I will. I will bring my knowledge right back to this microphone.

                    No Matter What System you Use..

                    No matter what tool you use, you will still need to ask for communication. You will need to make it super easy to use. Also keep in mind the more tools you use, the more tools you need to check. The worst thing you can do is ask for interaction and then ignore it.

                    Hot of the Presses: A New Podcast From the School of Podcasting

                    Rob Kerns new Living the Vet Life Podcast is for a podcast dedicated to making sure Veterans are getting all of their benefits. Check it out at http://livingthevetlife.com/ check it out in iTunes

                    Rob's got two episodes out and it displays lots of promise to help veterans get what they deserve.

                     

                     

                    Podcast Mentorship 1 Yr Subscription Starts March 5th

                    If you are looking to take a serious stab at podcasting, join Dave for a YEAR as he works side by side with you. For more information, go to www.podcastmentorship.com

                    Mentioned in this show

                    Jeff Bradburry Teachercast.net

                    Ray Ortega PodcastersStudio.com

                    Chris Nesi

                    Speakpipe

                    Clammr 

                    PodcastVoicemail.com

                    Voxer LLC

                    Anchor

                    Libsyn.com

                    Blubrry

                    livingthevetlife.com

                    Hindenburg Journalist

                    Podcast MentorShip

                    ]]>657a9dcf82cbde92f1b4ab4810909aa4Mon, 22 Feb 2016 05:00:00 -040001:05:54falsefull502502Book Guest Spots On Other PodcastsWith so many people focusing on New and Noteworthy, I wanted to see how many people use New and Noteworthy. So I asked people how they found new podcasts and here is what they said.

                    The number one way was hearing the podcaster being interviewed on another podcast. This data is from 100 respondents from my email list, and from social media. So it order with the number one answer first it was

                    I heard them interviewed on another podcast

                    I searched the app for my topic

                    I heard about it from a friend (word of mouth)

                    Other

                    The Internet (Google, Bing) Search

                    The "other" responses were (and I'm summarizing) more or less "Word of mouth." Meaning the podcast host they were listening to mentioned them, or they heard about it on Twitter, Pinterest, etc.

                    So if one of the top ways to grow your audience is to appear on other podcasts, how do you get booked on other shows? Well, we are going to dig into a smart way of setting yourself up to be booked on other podcasts.

                    How To Get Booked as A Guest On a Podcast?

                    OK, there must be some new course, or guru telling people how to contact people to be potential guests. Here is the format

                    1. Tell people how much you love the show
                    2. Tell them your story
                    3. Tell them what topic you can talk about and how much my audience is going to benefit.
                    4. Kiss the butt of the host and tell them what an honor it would be on the show.
                    5. Drop a hint about the book or course you have, and how my audience would benefit.
                    6. Promise to promote.
                    
                    

                    They are missing one key ingredient

                    GO AND LISTEN TO THE SHOW

                    When you start off the email with “I have heard some fantastic things about your radio show, congratulations on your success!”

                    Again, do some homework, or better yet, go by the book Stop Chasing Influencers: The True Path To Building Your Business and Living Your Dream

                    Strategies For Securing a Guest Spot on Other Podcasts

                    Search for your topic in iTunes, Google, etc. the idea is to see who is in the space. Who is the leader in your space? Search for their name in iTunes and see what podcasts they have appeared.  You could search for New and Noteworthy as these people are probably more New than Noteworthy (and hungry for guests) Realize your interview will be evergreen. So if someone goes back to get the back catalog, you will be included.

                    Find influencers in your niche: Look for books on your topic in Amazon, and in Amazon there is a "Customers also bought these items" area. You should probably see other authors names who are also involved with your topic.

                    Make a list and check it twice

                    When you find a podcast, look and see the date of their last episode. If they have podfaded, you might consider contacting them to see if you could take over the show. In general, people who haven't put out a show in months, are more than likely not coming back.

                    Start a spreadsheet with the following information

                    • Website Address
                    • Twitter Handle
                    • e-mail address
                    
                    

                    The average Twitter followers per user is 208. According to an article on Sumome you can look at Twitter followers using the following scale:

                    • H = Huge = 100k+ Followers
                    • L = Large = 10K+ Followers
                    • M = Medium = 1k+ Followers
                    • S = Getting Started = less than 1k followers
                    
                    

                    Add these people to your list and make how you found them (they will want to know). Obviously, put if they have a podcast or not. If they don't, you may still want to develop a relationship with them so they can appear on YOUR podcast.

                    Getting Ready For the Initial Contact

                    So to determine if you are a good fit for their show, you need to listen to it. There is no way around this if you want to do it right.  Does this podcast focus on people who would enjoy your topic? If yes, then we need to get ready to contact them. If not, then we won't focus on them now.

                    Don't Try to Close the Deal

                    Instead of sending an email, and asking to come on the show. Why not follow them on Twitter and retweet one of their tweets? Why not leave a comment on the blog. The beginning of every relationship begins with a conversation. This way when you do contact them, you won't be quite the stranger.

                    Honesty is Refreshing

                    See if you can get an introduction. See who is following this person on twitter or LinkedIn and see if you can get an introduction.

                    Instead of telling me great my show is, why not be honest? Tell me you just discovered the show, and tell me why - specifically - in a way that proves you listened - you would be a good fit for my show. Realize the podcaster is going to have to figure out if you're going to bring value, and if you're a good fit. If you've done your homework, you can answer that question for them (and save them time).

                    You could send an email with something along the lines of "Hey (name), I just got done listening to (episode name) and I have to tell you (specific item that proves you listened) I wanted to let you know as someone who has been involved with (the topic of the podcast) I'm really enjoying the show. "

                    If you want them to take a look at you, write about their episode on your blog and link to it. Then send them a link to the post. Now you're not just a listener, you're a content creator, and I'm pretty sure they are going to click the "ABOUT" button when they visit.

                    Think of this as "Courting" your potential future interview.

                    Why Should I Take This Much Effort For One Interview?

                    You can “Spray and Pray” that someone will respond. Spend time talking to people who (apparently) will have anybody on their show. Waste their audience time, and your time as well. The good news it didn’t take any effort to pull this off. The bad news is it isn’t very effective. You’re busy, but not productive. There is a difference. Don’t confuse the two.

                    The other way of doing this is to find a show with the topics you want to talk about, and listen to them and see if you might be a good fit. If you think there is, then leave a comment on the post you listened to and bring value. See if the host replies (you want a host who is connected with his/her audience). Then later, after you listen to a second episode you might consider sending them another email. Talk about some details to prove you listened and bring some value to the conversation. Maybe you have details that they didn’t share in the episode. Maybe you have a resource that could be of value. Bring something to the table that will benefit the host. When the host benefits, you benefit. Why? Because as a podcast host, we serve our audience. We want our audience to benefit. When you deliver value, the host will want you to do the same thing with their audience.

                    Why don’t people do this? Because contacting people on a personal basis takes TIME. Time is something most of us don’t have. Why don’t we have more time? Because we’re BUSY talking to people that aren’t a good fit. Because we’re drafting the perfect form letter to blast to hundreds of potential podcasters.

                    Stand Out in the Crowd

                    If you want to stand out and have people BEGGING YOU to come on the show, do your homework. Write an email that shows you took the time to listen, and you’ve already done the work for the host. They don’t have to figure out if you’re a good guest for the show; you’ve already done it for them. You will STAND OUT.

                    It’s Not Spray and Pray.

                    It’s all about Relationships.

                    Relationships take time. If you’re too “busy”, stop using Spray and Pray, and start working smarter. Start standing out from the crowd by doing your homework and find podcasts that fit your topic, and success will come your way.

                    Podcast Mentorship Year Long Podcast Course

                    Is this you?

                    You don’t know where to start or what steps are required to turn that idea into a reality.

                    You have a lot of ideas to choose from and you don’t want to choose the wrong one.

                    Your fear of failure outweighs your fear of not getting started.

                    You’re not sure if you’re qualified.

                    You don’t want to let others down.

                    You’ve discovered others who have executed a similar idea.

                    You don’t have the resources you need to get started.

                    You’re just not sure if it’s going to work.

                    Podcast Mentorship will meet twice a week for the first six weeks, and twice a month for the next 10 months. You will communicate via a private slack group, and you will full access to the School of Podcasting so you are never alone.

                    Podcast Mentorship is where I work side by side with you as we (together) identify your target audience, and the problems they need solved, and the information they are starving to hear. When we launch your podcast it will be a like breath of fresh air to your audience. It will be like delivering the perfect gift who has been waiting years for it.

                    For more information go to With so many people focusing on New and Noteworthy, I wanted to see how many people use New and Noteworthy. So I asked people how they found new podcasts and here is what they said.

                    The number one way was hearing the podcaster being interviewed on another podcast. This data is from 100 respondents from my email list, and from social media. So it order with the number one answer first it was

                    I heard them interviewed on another podcast

                    I searched the app for my topic

                    I heard about it from a friend (word of mouth)

                    Other

                    The Internet (Google, Bing) Search

                    The "other" responses were (and I'm summarizing) more or less "Word of mouth." Meaning the podcast host they were listening to mentioned them, or they heard about it on Twitter, Pinterest, etc.

                    So if one of the top ways to grow your audience is to appear on other podcasts, how do you get booked on other shows? Well, we are going to dig into a smart way of setting yourself up to be booked on other podcasts.

                    How To Get Booked as A Guest On a Podcast?

                    OK, there must be some new course, or guru telling people how to contact people to be potential guests. Here is the format

                    1. Tell people how much you love the show
                    2. Tell them your story
                    3. Tell them what topic you can talk about and how much my audience is going to benefit.
                    4. Kiss the butt of the host and tell them what an honor it would be on the show.
                    5. Drop a hint about the book or course you have, and how my audience would benefit.
                    6. Promise to promote.
                    
                    

                    They are missing one key ingredient

                    GO AND LISTEN TO THE SHOW

                    When you start off the email with “I have heard some fantastic things about your radio show, congratulations on your success!”

                    Again, do some homework, or better yet, go by the book Stop Chasing Influencers: The True Path To Building Your Business and Living Your Dream

                    Strategies For Securing a Guest Spot on Other Podcasts

                    Search for your topic in iTunes, Google, etc. the idea is to see who is in the space. Who is the leader in your space? Search for their name in iTunes and see what podcasts they have appeared.  You could search for New and Noteworthy as these people are probably more New than Noteworthy (and hungry for guests) Realize your interview will be evergreen. So if someone goes back to get the back catalog, you will be included.

                    Find influencers in your niche: Look for books on your topic in Amazon, and in Amazon there is a "Customers also bought these items" area. You should probably see other authors names who are also involved with your topic.

                    Make a list and check it twice

                    When you find a podcast, look and see the date of their last episode. If they have podfaded, you might consider contacting them to see if you could take over the show. In general, people who haven't put out a show in months, are more than likely not coming back.

                    Start a spreadsheet with the following information

                    • Website Address
                    • Twitter Handle
                    • e-mail address
                    
                    

                    The average Twitter followers per user is 208. According to an article on Sumome you can look at Twitter followers using the following scale:

                    • H = Huge = 100k+ Followers
                    • L = Large = 10K+ Followers
                    • M = Medium = 1k+ Followers
                    • S = Getting Started = less than 1k followers
                    
                    

                    Add these people to your list and make how you found them (they will want to know). Obviously, put if they have a podcast or not. If they don't, you may still want to develop a relationship with them so they can appear on YOUR podcast.

                    Getting Ready For the Initial Contact

                    So to determine if you are a good fit for their show, you need to listen to it. There is no way around this if you want to do it right.  Does this podcast focus on people who would enjoy your topic? If yes, then we need to get ready to contact them. If not, then we won't focus on them now.

                    Don't Try to Close the Deal

                    Instead of sending an email, and asking to come on the show. Why not follow them on Twitter and retweet one of their tweets? Why not leave a comment on the blog. The beginning of every relationship begins with a conversation. This way when you do contact them, you won't be quite the stranger.

                    Honesty is Refreshing

                    See if you can get an introduction. See who is following this person on twitter or LinkedIn and see if you can get an introduction.

                    Instead of telling me great my show is, why not be honest? Tell me you just discovered the show, and tell me why - specifically - in a way that proves you listened - you would be a good fit for my show. Realize the podcaster is going to have to figure out if you're going to bring value, and if you're a good fit. If you've done your homework, you can answer that question for them (and save them time).

                    You could send an email with something along the lines of "Hey (name), I just got done listening to (episode name) and I have to tell you (specific item that proves you listened) I wanted to let you know as someone who has been involved with (the topic of the podcast) I'm really enjoying the show. "

                    If you want them to take a look at you, write about their episode on your blog and link to it. Then send them a link to the post. Now you're not just a listener, you're a content creator, and I'm pretty sure they are going to click the "ABOUT" button when they visit.

                    Think of this as "Courting" your potential future interview.

                    Why Should I Take This Much Effort For One Interview?

                    You can “Spray and Pray” that someone will respond. Spend time talking to people who (apparently) will have anybody on their show. Waste their audience time, and your time as well. The good news it didn’t take any effort to pull this off. The bad news is it isn’t very effective. You’re busy, but not productive. There is a difference. Don’t confuse the two.

                    The other way of doing this is to find a show with the topics you want to talk about, and listen to them and see if you might be a good fit. If you think there is, then leave a comment on the post you listened to and bring value. See if the host replies (you want a host who is connected with his/her audience). Then later, after you listen to a second episode you might consider sending them another email. Talk about some details to prove you listened and bring some value to the conversation. Maybe you have details that they didn’t share in the episode. Maybe you have a resource that could be of value. Bring something to the table that will benefit the host. When the host benefits, you benefit. Why? Because as a podcast host, we serve our audience. We want our audience to benefit. When you deliver value, the host will want you to do the same thing with their audience.

                    Why don’t people do this? Because contacting people on a personal basis takes TIME. Time is something most of us don’t have. Why don’t we have more time? Because we’re BUSY talking to people that aren’t a good fit. Because we’re drafting the perfect form letter to blast to hundreds of potential podcasters.

                    Stand Out in the Crowd

                    If you want to stand out and have people BEGGING YOU to come on the show, do your homework. Write an email that shows you took the time to listen, and you’ve already done the work for the host. They don’t have to figure out if you’re a good guest for the show; you’ve already done it for them. You will STAND OUT.

                    It’s Not Spray and Pray.

                    It’s all about Relationships.

                    Relationships take time. If you’re too “busy”, stop using Spray and Pray, and start working smarter. Start standing out from the crowd by doing your homework and find podcasts that fit your topic, and success will come your way.

                    Podcast Mentorship Year Long Podcast Course

                    Is this you?

                    You don’t know where to start or what steps are required to turn that idea into a reality.

                    You have a lot of ideas to choose from and you don’t want to choose the wrong one.

                    Your fear of failure outweighs your fear of not getting started.

                    You’re not sure if you’re qualified.

                    You don’t want to let others down.

                    You’ve discovered others who have executed a similar idea.

                    You don’t have the resources you need to get started.

                    You’re just not sure if it’s going to work.

                    Podcast Mentorship will meet twice a week for the first six weeks, and twice a month for the next 10 months. You will communicate via a private slack group, and you will full access to the School of Podcasting so you are never alone.

                    Podcast Mentorship is where I work side by side with you as we (together) identify your target audience, and the problems they need solved, and the information they are starving to hear. When we launch your podcast it will be a like breath of fresh air to your audience. It will be like delivering the perfect gift who has been waiting years for it.

                    For more information go to www.podcastmentorship.com

                    Ready to start now? Order Today

                    Mentioned in this show

                    http://www.jobsearchthatworks.com/

                    www.askthepodcastcoach.com

                    ]]>32d3bdd125c4549bf764b4321b14003fMon, 15 Feb 2016 05:00:00 -040054:54falsefull501501Groundhog Birthday - A Podcast Launch StoryIf you're new to the School of Podcasting, when Dave hits a milestone like 100, 200, 300, 400, he breaks format and tries to do something that is educational, entertaining, and slightly weird. Today being that it is both my 500th episode of the School of Podcasting, and my 51st birthday, (and the fact that last week was Groundhog's Day), I am taking my creativity and love of the movie Groundhog's Day (the story is a guy has to relive the same day over and over, rent it here) and joining it with the story of Jack Davidson and his friend Scooter as they try to launch a podcast.

                    We also here snippets of past shows at the start of the show.

                    Special thanks to Adam Curry of the No Agenda Show for loaning me their birthday jingle. Check out their awesome podcast at www.noagendashow.com

                    Also thanks to Steve Stewart of the No Debt, No Credit, No Problems podcast for kicking off the show, and to Kim Kracji of the onthetablepodcasts.com for being my female voice in the "podcasting commercial". I knew I could count on you both.

                    Look Back Memory Lane 00:38

                    Episode 500 Begins 2:00

                    We cover a story about a man named Jack Davidson. It’s his birthday, he’s gone through some life changes, and he’s thinking of starting a business. He is realizing that you only have so much time on the planet, and he wants to make a difference. His biggest fear in life is being insignificant, or leaving no legacy behind. His mind is whirling today about his future. This has been spurred on by the fact that he is turning 51 today

                    Morning Burger hit :4:00

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 1 5:01

                    Podcasting Commercial 5:34

                    First Jack tries using a free media host that limits your bandwidth - Bad idea

                    Binky and the Whiz take over the No Agenda Show 8:44

                    Jack purchases blue snowball microphones only to find out these don't work good in a non-silent environment and its hard to have two usb microphone plugged into one computer.

                    Whet Bread the Big Lie 11:55

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 2 15:15

                    Jack and Scooter learn that you should setup an agreement to identify who does what, and if there is any money who gets paid, etc

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 3 18:50

                    Jack and Scooter lose their friendship after arguing over the money with their podcast.

                    Jack goes solo, and tries multiple hosts, platforms, and equipment.

                    Jack and Scooter come to an agreement

                    Final Thoughts on Episode 500 23:20

                    What did we learn today?

                    1. Blue snowball microphones are not a great choice even though 1000 websites say so. They are not a great fit for podcasters. There are better options
                    2. Copying a company that you may be talking about on twitter is a strategy you might want to try
                    3. Be sure to have expectation regarding money and responsibilities in place if you have a co-host.
                    4. We learned that the only thing more annoying than Binky and the Whiz is hearing the same clip of Binky and the Whiz over and over is quite annoying.
                    5. We learned that the more tied Dave gets, the less he stays in character
                    6. And lastly if your your episode last longer than four hours, you should always call your doctor.
                    
                    The Not Ready For FM Players

                    Podcast Sally 34:10

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Sign up for the newsletter

                    Steve Stewart 

                    On the Table Podcast (for toastmasters)

                    No Agenda Show

                    More Podcast Money Book

                    Support This Show

                    ]]>If you're new to the School of Podcasting, when Dave hits a milestone like 100, 200, 300, 400, he breaks format and tries to do something that is educational, entertaining, and slightly weird. Today being that it is both my 500th episode of the School of Podcasting, and my 51st birthday, (and the fact that last week was Groundhog's Day), I am taking my creativity and love of the movie Groundhog's Day (the story is a guy has to relive the same day over and over, rent it here) and joining it with the story of Jack Davidson and his friend Scooter as they try to launch a podcast.

                    We also here snippets of past shows at the start of the show.

                    Special thanks to Adam Curry of the No Agenda Show for loaning me their birthday jingle. Check out their awesome podcast at www.noagendashow.com

                    Also thanks to Steve Stewart of the No Debt, No Credit, No Problems podcast for kicking off the show, and to Kim Kracji of the onthetablepodcasts.com for being my female voice in the "podcasting commercial". I knew I could count on you both.

                    Look Back Memory Lane 00:38

                    Episode 500 Begins 2:00

                    We cover a story about a man named Jack Davidson. It’s his birthday, he’s gone through some life changes, and he’s thinking of starting a business. He is realizing that you only have so much time on the planet, and he wants to make a difference. His biggest fear in life is being insignificant, or leaving no legacy behind. His mind is whirling today about his future. This has been spurred on by the fact that he is turning 51 today

                    Morning Burger hit :4:00

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 1 5:01

                    Podcasting Commercial 5:34

                    First Jack tries using a free media host that limits your bandwidth - Bad idea

                    Binky and the Whiz take over the No Agenda Show 8:44

                    Jack purchases blue snowball microphones only to find out these don't work good in a non-silent environment and its hard to have two usb microphone plugged into one computer.

                    Whet Bread the Big Lie 11:55

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 2 15:15

                    Jack and Scooter learn that you should setup an agreement to identify who does what, and if there is any money who gets paid, etc

                    Hey It's Your Birthday Version 3 18:50

                    Jack and Scooter lose their friendship after arguing over the money with their podcast.

                    Jack goes solo, and tries multiple hosts, platforms, and equipment.

                    Jack and Scooter come to an agreement

                    Final Thoughts on Episode 500 23:20

                    What did we learn today?

                    1. Blue snowball microphones are not a great choice even though 1000 websites say so. They are not a great fit for podcasters. There are better options
                    2. Copying a company that you may be talking about on twitter is a strategy you might want to try
                    3. Be sure to have expectation regarding money and responsibilities in place if you have a co-host.
                    4. We learned that the only thing more annoying than Binky and the Whiz is hearing the same clip of Binky and the Whiz over and over is quite annoying.
                    5. We learned that the more tied Dave gets, the less he stays in character
                    6. And lastly if your your episode last longer than four hours, you should always call your doctor.
                    
                    The Not Ready For FM Players

                    Podcast Sally 34:10

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Sign up for the newsletter

                    Steve Stewart 

                    On the Table Podcast (for toastmasters)

                    No Agenda Show

                    More Podcast Money Book

                    Support This Show

                    ]]>e0ca786ff60e429ef0682cc258461ec3Mon, 08 Feb 2016 05:00:00 -040038:52falsefull500500Monetizing with Membership Sites: Ravi JayagopalLast week we talk about being a "hobby podcast" and that you can be a hero to someone. We mentioned that you do NOT have to make money with your podcast. Today we are going the other way and looking at making money with your podcast. So let's start right there.

                    YOU DON'T MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. YOU MAKE MONEY WITH THE RELATIONSHIP YOU BUILD WITH YOUR PODCAST

                    This is why it takes time. In the same way that it takes time to develop a relationship, it takes time to build an audience that will like and trust you. Things that can speed up this process:

                    1. Create content that is valuable.
                    2. Come across in a way that build confidence.
                    3. Deliver it on a regular basis (so people depend on you).
                    4. Let them know you.
                    
                    

                    Strategies for Making Money with Your Podcast

                    1. Sell your own product

                    This is by far the most lucrative because people know, like and trust you. This can be a book, a course, consulting, etc.

                    2. Refer to other products through affiliate links

                    Pick a product that matches the audience. Preferably one that you actually like so you can talk open and honestly about the product. Many people use Amazon. or Audible as well.

                    3. Donations

                    You can put a paypal button on your site, or websites like Patreon make it easy to build a community by rewarding them for different levels of support. Be careful with the reward and make sure you don't spread yourself too thin.

                    4. Sponsorship

                    When you get over 5,000 download per episode, you can start thinking about getting a "big" sponsor (squarespace). As 92% of podcasters are nowhere near that number you are not out of luck. You can find smaller businesses that may be looking for more of a branding play. Check out my interview with Glenn The Geek who is making a living with sponsors by making sure his sponsors fit his audience and he gets them involved.

                    Selling Digital Downloads

                    Check out this super powerful shopping cart plugin that allows you to safely sell digital downloads

                    Gumroad is a handy website that make's it easy to sell digital downloads if you're not using Wordpress. Selz.com is another great looking shopping cart.

                    Monetizing With Membership Sites

                    The School of Podcasting was founded in 2005 and I used Digital Access Pass to to make sure the general public could not access my material. I also used it to manage my affiliate program, and e-mail m members. It created coupons for discounts, and generated reports. Is is the cheapest platform? No. But the money you save using different plugins is wasted in the time you spend trying to get them all to work together.

                    Today I interview Ravi Jayagopal from Digital Access Pass and the author of the book Subscribe Me: Making, Marketing & Monetizing Online Digital Content with Membership Sites, Online Courses and Recurring Subscriptions

                    The biggest advantage of a membership site is you can build it once, and then sell it many times. Digital Access Pass even has a "drip" feature (now copied by many, but Ravi was the inventor) that allows you to provide your members content over a period of time (instead of giving it to them all at once ).

                    Today we learn this about membership sites:

                    1. There is more than just putting up content and protecting it.2. You still have to bring value to your audience.3. You still need to promote it. It's not a "build it and they will come" world.4. You still need to provide new content to get them to stick around.

                    Check out Ravi's podcast at www.subscribeme.fm

                    Where Monetization Stumbles

                    You start out not caring about money, and you turn on the microphone and just wing it. Then later you want to make money with your podcast.

                    You topic doesn't lend itself to sponsors (too hot of a topic). This doesn't mean you can't get a sponsor, it means it may be tougher.

                    A podcaster wants to start monetizing after 4 weeks and they haven't developed that know like and trust, or an audience.

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Shepodcasts.com

                    Podcaster's Studio

                    Snider Comments

                    ]]>Last week we talk about being a "hobby podcast" and that you can be a hero to someone. We mentioned that you do NOT have to make money with your podcast. Today we are going the other way and looking at making money with your podcast. So let's start right there.

                    YOU DON'T MAKE MONEY WITH YOUR PODCAST. YOU MAKE MONEY WITH THE RELATIONSHIP YOU BUILD WITH YOUR PODCAST

                    This is why it takes time. In the same way that it takes time to develop a relationship, it takes time to build an audience that will like and trust you. Things that can speed up this process:

                    1. Create content that is valuable.
                    2. Come across in a way that build confidence.
                    3. Deliver it on a regular basis (so people depend on you).
                    4. Let them know you.
                    
                    

                    Strategies for Making Money with Your Podcast

                    1. Sell your own product

                    This is by far the most lucrative because people know, like and trust you. This can be a book, a course, consulting, etc.

                    2. Refer to other products through affiliate links

                    Pick a product that matches the audience. Preferably one that you actually like so you can talk open and honestly about the product. Many people use Amazon. or Audible as well.

                    3. Donations

                    You can put a paypal button on your site, or websites like Patreon make it easy to build a community by rewarding them for different levels of support. Be careful with the reward and make sure you don't spread yourself too thin.

                    4. Sponsorship

                    When you get over 5,000 download per episode, you can start thinking about getting a "big" sponsor (squarespace). As 92% of podcasters are nowhere near that number you are not out of luck. You can find smaller businesses that may be looking for more of a branding play. Check out my interview with Glenn The Geek who is making a living with sponsors by making sure his sponsors fit his audience and he gets them involved.

                    Selling Digital Downloads

                    Check out this super powerful shopping cart plugin that allows you to safely sell digital downloads

                    Gumroad is a handy website that make's it easy to sell digital downloads if you're not using Wordpress. Selz.com is another great looking shopping cart.

                    Monetizing With Membership Sites

                    The School of Podcasting was founded in 2005 and I used Digital Access Pass to to make sure the general public could not access my material. I also used it to manage my affiliate program, and e-mail m members. It created coupons for discounts, and generated reports. Is is the cheapest platform? No. But the money you save using different plugins is wasted in the time you spend trying to get them all to work together.

                    Today I interview Ravi Jayagopal from Digital Access Pass and the author of the book Subscribe Me: Making, Marketing & Monetizing Online Digital Content with Membership Sites, Online Courses and Recurring Subscriptions

                    The biggest advantage of a membership site is you can build it once, and then sell it many times. Digital Access Pass even has a "drip" feature (now copied by many, but Ravi was the inventor) that allows you to provide your members content over a period of time (instead of giving it to them all at once ).

                    Today we learn this about membership sites:

                    1. There is more than just putting up content and protecting it.2. You still have to bring value to your audience.3. You still need to promote it. It's not a "build it and they will come" world.4. You still need to provide new content to get them to stick around.

                    Check out Ravi's podcast at www.subscribeme.fm

                    Where Monetization Stumbles

                    You start out not caring about money, and you turn on the microphone and just wing it. Then later you want to make money with your podcast.

                    You topic doesn't lend itself to sponsors (too hot of a topic). This doesn't mean you can't get a sponsor, it means it may be tougher.

                    A podcaster wants to start monetizing after 4 weeks and they haven't developed that know like and trust, or an audience.

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Shepodcasts.com

                    Podcaster's Studio

                    Snider Comments

                    ]]>6c1b63819ac8a4da92694f290bd7bfa8Mon, 01 Feb 2016 05:00:00 -040058:30falsefull499499Unleash the Hero in You Darren Dake from the Coroner talk podcast has told us (about a year ago) where he was asked to do some state wide training in Missouri). Well Darren is back because now - because of his podcast - which is now over 100,000 downloads (think about how niche his topic is). Darren is using his podcast as a calling card, and now Darren has been asked to do some teaching on a NATIONAL level as the LEAD INSTRUCTOR for a course. He has made great contacts all over the world and has been asked to speak at numerous conventions. His next goal is to be asked to speak outside of the US. Check out his show at www.coronertalk.com 

                    One more point: Coroner talk was Darren's second podcast. So you don't always hit it out of the park the first time. Darren started, tweaked, learned along the way and now is seeing success.

                    Podcast Rewind: Podcaster's Roundtable

                    In the recent episode of the Podcaster's Roundtbale we ask, "Is your podcast paying for itself?" Check it out at podcastersroundtable.com/64 

                    We talk about networks, patreon, and wondering if people making money with their podcast is ruining podcasting for the hobby podcast.

                    Unleash Your Inner Hero: Defining Podcast Success

                    A post in a Facebook Group Asked: "What is your idea or definition of a successful podcast, the one that has specific number of downloads, or subscriptions or sponsorship or something else that I might not know??"

                    Does it make you happy? Do you love doing it every day/week? Do you have a positive impact on the lives of others? is it something you'd love to do every day as your career? You're successful. It's not about dollars and cents or downloads - it's about levels of happiness - Lou Mongello wdwradio.com All I can say is Amen.

                    Look, I love what money can do for me. I'm up to my eyeballs in student loans, but if you OBSESS over downloads numbers, and OBSESS over New and Noteworthy you are focusing on the wrong thing. You need to focus on your audience and impacting them in a positive fashion.

                    Example of Podcast Success

                    12:59 Mark Dowding from the Oh Beep Geocaching Show

                    Not writing this to boast, or brag, just as a heads up to anyone who is getting a little jaded with their podcast. We've struggled the last few shows and have only recorded one episode in January. We've been questioning our value in our niche and what we bring to the table. Then a listener sent this e mail, which told us we've been achieving what we set out to do every episode.:

                    "I just wanted to tell you how much I enjoy the show. I listen on my way to work and on my way home from work. My drive is around 1 1/2 hours. I have never laughed so much listening to a podcast. I sometimes have tears in my eyes from laughing so hard. An awesome father and son podcast.

                    So thank you"

                    Thats all we want to do, entertain people. There are plenty of deep dive podcasts in our niche and plenty of interview podcasts. We wanted to do something different and it seems we hit the spot - no one before that listener has told us we've done that.

                    Its worth keeping in mind that someone listening is getting value from your show, so don't give up.

                    People Are Listening

                    Glenn The Geek of Horse Radio Network has appeared twice on this show (cause he's that good) and check this out. He posted something in the School of Podcasting's Private Facebook Club. "I need to brag a bit, with the help of Dave Jackson getting the word out I have had four podcasters contact me this week who heard me speak on sponsorship and they all got their first sponsors this week! Rates ranged from $50 to $1500 an episode, congrats everyone. Learn more about this model in my Keynote at Podfest.us

                    Silencing the Imposter

                    It is amazing how if we are asked for our favorite childhood memory we may have to think about it. If someone asks for our worst memory, it comes to us without hesitation. These are the thoughts that stop us from reaching out to the world. These are the thoughts that whisper in our head that nobody would listen to a podcast from you. We today we provided three examples of people who are being heard, and who are making a difference.

                    Learning From My Mistakes

                    29:25 I left Jeff Hollbrook from wvpodcast.com out of the My Favorite Podcast Is project - for the second year in a row. I've learned to make a more streamlined submission process.

                    I forgot to press record on a recording - I notice this happens more when the person I'm interviewing is a friend and I'm feeling more comfortable, and more likely to "jump into the conversation."

                    I blew off the setting for my backup recording. You need to treat this as the file you will be using- because that may be the case.

                    I forgot to mention that I also sent the Ask the Podcast Coach show down the feed for the School of Podcasting. Lesson? Slow down when publishing. 

                    Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Private facebook group

                    Personalized e-mail support

                    "Office hours" live webinars

                    30 day money back guarentee

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Ryan K Parker of Foodcraftsmen.com

                    Jim Collison of The Average Guy Network

                    Digital Access Pass

                    Subscribe Me: Making, Marketing & Monetizing Online Digital Content with Membership Sites, Online Courses and Subscriptions

                    The Total Money Makeover: Classic Edition: A Proven Plan for Financial Fitness (Dave Ramsey)

                    My Favorite Podcast Is...2015: Understanding Audience Loyalty

                    ]]>Darren Dake from the Coroner talk podcast has told us (about a year ago) where he was asked to do some state wide training in Missouri). Well Darren is back because now - because of his podcast - which is now over 100,000 downloads (think about how niche his topic is). Darren is using his podcast as a calling card, and now Darren has been asked to do some teaching on a NATIONAL level as the LEAD INSTRUCTOR for a course. He has made great contacts all over the world and has been asked to speak at numerous conventions. His next goal is to be asked to speak outside of the US. Check out his show at www.coronertalk.com 

                    One more point: Coroner talk was Darren's second podcast. So you don't always hit it out of the park the first time. Darren started, tweaked, learned along the way and now is seeing success.

                    Podcast Rewind: Podcaster's Roundtable

                    In the recent episode of the Podcaster's Roundtbale we ask, "Is your podcast paying for itself?" Check it out at podcastersroundtable.com/64 

                    We talk about networks, patreon, and wondering if people making money with their podcast is ruining podcasting for the hobby podcast.

                    Unleash Your Inner Hero: Defining Podcast Success

                    A post in a Facebook Group Asked: "What is your idea or definition of a successful podcast, the one that has specific number of downloads, or subscriptions or sponsorship or something else that I might not know??"

                    Does it make you happy? Do you love doing it every day/week? Do you have a positive impact on the lives of others? is it something you'd love to do every day as your career? You're successful. It's not about dollars and cents or downloads - it's about levels of happiness - Lou Mongello wdwradio.com All I can say is Amen.

                    Look, I love what money can do for me. I'm up to my eyeballs in student loans, but if you OBSESS over downloads numbers, and OBSESS over New and Noteworthy you are focusing on the wrong thing. You need to focus on your audience and impacting them in a positive fashion.

                    Example of Podcast Success

                    12:59 Mark Dowding from the Oh Beep Geocaching Show

                    Not writing this to boast, or brag, just as a heads up to anyone who is getting a little jaded with their podcast. We've struggled the last few shows and have only recorded one episode in January. We've been questioning our value in our niche and what we bring to the table. Then a listener sent this e mail, which told us we've been achieving what we set out to do every episode.:

                    "I just wanted to tell you how much I enjoy the show. I listen on my way to work and on my way home from work. My drive is around 1 1/2 hours. I have never laughed so much listening to a podcast. I sometimes have tears in my eyes from laughing so hard. An awesome father and son podcast.

                    So thank you"

                    Thats all we want to do, entertain people. There are plenty of deep dive podcasts in our niche and plenty of interview podcasts. We wanted to do something different and it seems we hit the spot - no one before that listener has told us we've done that.

                    Its worth keeping in mind that someone listening is getting value from your show, so don't give up.

                    People Are Listening

                    Glenn The Geek of Horse Radio Network has appeared twice on this show (cause he's that good) and check this out. He posted something in the School of Podcasting's Private Facebook Club. "I need to brag a bit, with the help of Dave Jackson getting the word out I have had four podcasters contact me this week who heard me speak on sponsorship and they all got their first sponsors this week! Rates ranged from $50 to $1500 an episode, congrats everyone. Learn more about this model in my Keynote at Podfest.us

                    Silencing the Imposter

                    It is amazing how if we are asked for our favorite childhood memory we may have to think about it. If someone asks for our worst memory, it comes to us without hesitation. These are the thoughts that stop us from reaching out to the world. These are the thoughts that whisper in our head that nobody would listen to a podcast from you. We today we provided three examples of people who are being heard, and who are making a difference.

                    Learning From My Mistakes

                    29:25 I left Jeff Hollbrook from wvpodcast.com out of the My Favorite Podcast Is project - for the second year in a row. I've learned to make a more streamlined submission process.

                    I forgot to press record on a recording - I notice this happens more when the person I'm interviewing is a friend and I'm feeling more comfortable, and more likely to "jump into the conversation."

                    I blew off the setting for my backup recording. You need to treat this as the file you will be using- because that may be the case.

                    I forgot to mention that I also sent the Ask the Podcast Coach show down the feed for the School of Podcasting. Lesson? Slow down when publishing. 

                    Ready To Start Your Podcast?

                    Step by step tutorials

                    Private facebook group

                    Personalized e-mail support

                    "Office hours" live webinars

                    30 day money back guarentee

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Ryan K Parker of Foodcraftsmen.com

                    Jim Collison of The Average Guy Network

                    Digital Access Pass

                    Subscribe Me: Making, Marketing & Monetizing Online Digital Content with Membership Sites, Online Courses and Subscriptions

                    The Total Money Makeover: Classic Edition: A Proven Plan for Financial Fitness (Dave Ramsey)

                    My Favorite Podcast Is...2015: Understanding Audience Loyalty

                    ]]>bcf53a175c9de5cdd7d57b3842278a95Mon, 25 Jan 2016 05:00:00 -040047:14falsefull498498Avoiding Burnout on the RoadThere are a number of things you need to be successful in podcasting.
                    1. Great Content
                    2. Great Sound
                    3. Great Promotion
                    4. Great Attitude
                    
                    

                    No matter how great your show sound, and how much you promote it, without great content, it won't succeed.

                    No matter how great your content is, if it is painful to listen to, or you have to constantly adjust the volume, nobody is going to listen.

                    No matter how great you sound, and how great your content is, if you don't promote it, your growth will be slow.

                    Without a great attitude, you won't be able to handle it when things don't go according to plan. You have to be able to roll with the punches, dodge the trolls, embrace constructive feedback, celebrate other's success, and remember to always serve your audience. It is easier said than done.

                    Jump Starting Your Year

                    There are a number of people who can help you launch a great year. Michael Hyatt has your best year ever. John Lee Dumas can get you where you want to go in 100 days with his Freedom Journal (and yet I bought a copy).  Today we have Tarun Stevenson of  leadcommunicategrow.com is hear to help us keep our attitude in check, and to make sure we set realistic goals.

                    Avoiding Burnout

                    When you lose hope its a very dark place to be and want to quit. Business without purpose can lead to you throwing in the towel. We look at where we want to be, and then look at where we are, and instead of feeling gratitude for what you have, you get discouraged. You have to value your current situation so your attitude can stay positive and allow you to make it to the next step. An App that Dave has been using is Gratitude Journal .

                    Take A Look At Yourself

                    Look at last year and figure out what worked, and what could be done better. What experiences help you grow more? When we develop small habits they can lead to giant success.

                    Goals

                    Be sure to have specific goals, and make sure the goals push you out of your comfort zone. Make sure they are realistic. Instead of focusing on the goal, focus on the actions that will lead to achieving the successful goal.

                    Instead of focusing on our stats, focus on the actions that will lead to more downloads.

                    Anything of value takes time and effort. A garden of weeds takes no time or effort. Your successful podcast will require time and effort, but it will be worth it.

                    Becoming a Person of Influence
                    1. Operate with integrity
                    2. Help other people, and deliver value.
                    3. Listen to people, and be interested in other people.
                    
                    

                    Follow Tarun on twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn

                    Details Goal Setting & Free Audio Teaching on the 15 Laws of Growth

                    www.leadcommunicategrow.com/growme

                     

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    How to Influence People: Make a Difference in Your World (John Maxwell)

                    John Maxwell Books at Amazon

                    You can also get a free John Maxwell Audio Book when you sign up at Audible.

                    Alternatives to Recording Skype

                    On the Ask the Podcast Coach show this week we were joined by Josh of Zencastr.com and this is a great tool that allows you to record NUMEROUS guests and all your guest has to do is click a link to join. When the call is done, their file is uploaded to Zencastr. You get a copy of each person's file, and a combined version.

                    There are popping out of the woodwork. I also just heard about www.epishow.com/ which is basically the same thing.

                    Both are free, with Zencastr almost ready to come out of beta and start charging.

                    Omny Studio Media Hosting

                    I want to upload a file and have it come down the way I uploaded it. I want a media host to support me, and provide stats. Omny studio is different as they have some of the features are radio specific. They do have some unique features as you can edit in the cloud. You can upload your intro and outro and record your podcast with your phone and it will splice the intro, your content, and your outro together. The bad news is there are no ID3 tags. While 70% of podcast listeners may not notice they are missing, anyone listening to your podcast in iTunes on the desktop will notice the lack of information (and you look like a hack). If you care, they also rename your file. They charge $9 a month for unlimited uploads and downloads (which is a disastrous business plan), and provide basic stats. There is a free plan if you want to kick the tires. I did an in depth review on my blog with a video.

                    Ready to Launch Your Podcast and Get into iTunes?]]>There are a number of things you need to be successful in podcasting.
                    1. Great Content
                    2. Great Sound
                    3. Great Promotion
                    4. Great Attitude
                    
                    

                    No matter how great your show sound, and how much you promote it, without great content, it won't succeed.

                    No matter how great your content is, if it is painful to listen to, or you have to constantly adjust the volume, nobody is going to listen.

                    No matter how great you sound, and how great your content is, if you don't promote it, your growth will be slow.

                    Without a great attitude, you won't be able to handle it when things don't go according to plan. You have to be able to roll with the punches, dodge the trolls, embrace constructive feedback, celebrate other's success, and remember to always serve your audience. It is easier said than done.

                    Jump Starting Your Year

                    There are a number of people who can help you launch a great year. Michael Hyatt has your best year ever. John Lee Dumas can get you where you want to go in 100 days with his Freedom Journal (and yet I bought a copy).  Today we have Tarun Stevenson of  leadcommunicategrow.com is hear to help us keep our attitude in check, and to make sure we set realistic goals.

                    Avoiding Burnout

                    When you lose hope its a very dark place to be and want to quit. Business without purpose can lead to you throwing in the towel. We look at where we want to be, and then look at where we are, and instead of feeling gratitude for what you have, you get discouraged. You have to value your current situation so your attitude can stay positive and allow you to make it to the next step. An App that Dave has been using is Gratitude Journal .

                    Take A Look At Yourself

                    Look at last year and figure out what worked, and what could be done better. What experiences help you grow more? When we develop small habits they can lead to giant success.

                    Goals

                    Be sure to have specific goals, and make sure the goals push you out of your comfort zone. Make sure they are realistic. Instead of focusing on the goal, focus on the actions that will lead to achieving the successful goal.

                    Instead of focusing on our stats, focus on the actions that will lead to more downloads.

                    Anything of value takes time and effort. A garden of weeds takes no time or effort. Your successful podcast will require time and effort, but it will be worth it.

                    Becoming a Person of Influence
                    1. Operate with integrity
                    2. Help other people, and deliver value.
                    3. Listen to people, and be interested in other people.
                    
                    

                    Follow Tarun on twitter, Facebook, and LinkedIn

                    Details Goal Setting & Free Audio Teaching on the 15 Laws of Growth

                    www.leadcommunicategrow.com/growme

                     

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    How to Influence People: Make a Difference in Your World (John Maxwell)

                    John Maxwell Books at Amazon

                    You can also get a free John Maxwell Audio Book when you sign up at Audible.

                    Alternatives to Recording Skype

                    On the Ask the Podcast Coach show this week we were joined by Josh of Zencastr.com and this is a great tool that allows you to record NUMEROUS guests and all your guest has to do is click a link to join. When the call is done, their file is uploaded to Zencastr. You get a copy of each person's file, and a combined version.

                    There are popping out of the woodwork. I also just heard about www.epishow.com/ which is basically the same thing.

                    Both are free, with Zencastr almost ready to come out of beta and start charging.

                    Omny Studio Media Hosting

                    I want to upload a file and have it come down the way I uploaded it. I want a media host to support me, and provide stats. Omny studio is different as they have some of the features are radio specific. They do have some unique features as you can edit in the cloud. You can upload your intro and outro and record your podcast with your phone and it will splice the intro, your content, and your outro together. The bad news is there are no ID3 tags. While 70% of podcast listeners may not notice they are missing, anyone listening to your podcast in iTunes on the desktop will notice the lack of information (and you look like a hack). If you care, they also rename your file. They charge $9 a month for unlimited uploads and downloads (which is a disastrous business plan), and provide basic stats. There is a free plan if you want to kick the tires. I did an in depth review on my blog with a video.

                    Ready to Launch Your Podcast and Get into iTunes?]]>4ed10713ff688663ea4afdf3e71822c1Mon, 18 Jan 2016 05:00:00 -040041:05falsefull4974973 Things You Need To Make Money With Your PodcastToday's episode is a special "Dual Episode" as Dave and "The Real Brian" from Profitcast take on the subject of what is needed to make money with your podcast. We got together to talk about three bullet points:
                    1. Abundant vs Poverty Mindset 8:10
                    2. Identifying the type of client or listener you want 23:50
                    3. Invest in yourself and value yourself. 29:31
                    
                    

                    In the process of going into these bullet points, I expanded the talk to include a discussion of looking at our podcast. There are two sides of podcasting

                    1. Podcast is the wild, wild West - and you can do WHATEVER you want.
                    2. You need to focus on delivering value to your audience.
                    
                    

                    So this leads us into uncomfortable places as we love to be encouraging, but we need to be honest and let people know that podcasting does require work (especially if you're trying to deliver value for your audience). 

                    If your show fails to deliver value, then nobody will buy your service either.

                    How to Overcome Negative Podcast Mindsets

                    If you take the time so that you KNOW you are delivering value, then you are confident in your content. If you are "guessing" that your audience will enjoy/grow your content, then your confidence is not as solid.

                    How to Identify Your Listener

                    There is no easy way around this, and it will probably get tweaked over time. You need to go out and meet your audience. This can be online, or in person, but you need to go meet your audience and make sure they exist. When you talk to people and you hear what they need, then you can deliver the best content.

                    How To Invest in Yourself

                    My first piece of advice would be to turn off the television. Television delivers very little value when it comes to helping your podcast earn money (unless you're watching Shark Tank, or The Profit). There are many ways to do this that require no money:

                    Taking time to read blogs

                    Going to Meetup

                    Getting books from the library

                    Watching relevant video on YouTube

                    All those things can benefit you in your understanding of your content, your market, and help keep you focused. There are tons of different courses. If you find one that you feel fits your needs, then take the course, and throw yourself 100% into it. Don't purchase another course, book, CDs, DVDs, until you finish that course and put those strategies into action.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Today's episode is a special "Dual Episode" as Dave and "The Real Brian" from Profitcast take on the subject of what is needed to make money with your podcast. We got together to talk about three bullet points:
                    1. Abundant vs Poverty Mindset 8:10
                    2. Identifying the type of client or listener you want 23:50
                    3. Invest in yourself and value yourself. 29:31
                    
                    

                    In the process of going into these bullet points, I expanded the talk to include a discussion of looking at our podcast. There are two sides of podcasting

                    1. Podcast is the wild, wild West - and you can do WHATEVER you want.
                    2. You need to focus on delivering value to your audience.
                    
                    

                    So this leads us into uncomfortable places as we love to be encouraging, but we need to be honest and let people know that podcasting does require work (especially if you're trying to deliver value for your audience). 

                    If your show fails to deliver value, then nobody will buy your service either.

                    How to Overcome Negative Podcast Mindsets

                    If you take the time so that you KNOW you are delivering value, then you are confident in your content. If you are "guessing" that your audience will enjoy/grow your content, then your confidence is not as solid.

                    How to Identify Your Listener

                    There is no easy way around this, and it will probably get tweaked over time. You need to go out and meet your audience. This can be online, or in person, but you need to go meet your audience and make sure they exist. When you talk to people and you hear what they need, then you can deliver the best content.

                    How To Invest in Yourself

                    My first piece of advice would be to turn off the television. Television delivers very little value when it comes to helping your podcast earn money (unless you're watching Shark Tank, or The Profit). There are many ways to do this that require no money:

                    Taking time to read blogs

                    Going to Meetup

                    Getting books from the library

                    Watching relevant video on YouTube

                    All those things can benefit you in your understanding of your content, your market, and help keep you focused. There are tons of different courses. If you find one that you feel fits your needs, then take the course, and throw yourself 100% into it. Don't purchase another course, book, CDs, DVDs, until you finish that course and put those strategies into action.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>e1812817c5562726669ba13239d10819Mon, 11 Jan 2016 05:00:00 -040001:03:32falsefull496496Getting the Other Side of the StoryI recently was very concerned when I saw a video from a company call Glycast.com It stated, "“It’s a new approach to podcast advertising. This is how it works. You give us your podcast feed, and we give you a new one to distribute to your audience. ”"

                    I could tell by the video that the person was more of a podcast listener and not an actual podcaster. I didn't think he was out to hurt podcasters. But I could see where there was a chance for people to get their RSS feed hijacked with now way to get it back if Glycast went out of business. This video explains it all.

                    So my first reaction was to tell everyone the house was on fire, and to be careful. My second reaction was to contact the company and get their side of the story. I was BLOWN AWAY when I got this response.

                    My name is José Pablo Fernández, I live in London, I started coding when I was 7 years old, I also started my first business around that time. I worked for Google some years ago. For the past 4 years I been running a startup I co-founded, first as CTO and then as CEO: Carousel Apps. This company is launching Glycast. I co-founded Hear a Blog, a podcasting-related product, some years ago, and we got selected and Seedcamp Paris finalists. In my video for investors I talk more about my background: https://carouselapps.wistia.com/medias/pv06qw6ap5

                    We have the core tech for Glycast but not everything, so, we'll build whatever is required for both parties to be happy. We want both parties to be happy, so, if you are not and you want to leave us, we won't stop you. If you require us setting up a redirect of your feed to another system, we'll implement that feature and everybody will have it.

                    I'm thinking of actually recommending people of using Feedburner, so as to have a setup such as this:

                    main rss -> glycast -> feedburner -> audience

                    You give the feedburner RSS to your audience and while Glycast is there, then you have ads, if one day you want to move away, then you just switch your Feedburner account to read directly from your main rss like this:

                    main rss -> feedburner -> audience

                    and voila. You don't even need the redirect. Nobody will notice any difference at all.

                    Depending on what systems people are using we may also develop plug ins. For example, we can have a WordPress plug in that makes your feed look like if it was serve from Glycast, with the ads, but on your feed on your own server. That shouldn't be that hard to implement.

                    About who is on your show? Do you mean about which ads are played and which ones aren't? I'd love to implement something like that. It'll probably be something like this: if you don't approve any ads, then all ads are approved, if you approve enough ads to take care of your inventory, then only those ads will appear. If there are not enough ads, we'll send an email with an alert. Those ads pay for our hosting and bandwidth so we can't run without ads for long periods of time, but I don't want any podcaster ever to be unhappy about the ads they are getting.

                    About how much money, I don't know yet. The market will define this over time. I could look at the current expenditure in podcasts but since our model is quite different, it doesn't really apply. When you buy ads in a podcast today you are most likely buying that spot forever, while with Glycast, the spot keeps passing around from advertiser to advertiser over time. Eventually, I think we'll have a bidding system, similar to Google's Adsense, so that the pricing adjusts over time automatically.

                    About the video. I'm not here to harm anyone. I'm here to make a product to help podcasters and advertisers connect, be more efficient. I'm building whatever podcasters will need to be happy. I understand your worry and your desire to warn your audience that might not understand RSS distribution and make a bad decision now that will cost them a chunk of their audience later on. That's not something I want to do and I wouldn't be happy with any company holding an audience hostage like that. I do want to work with you, and other podcasters, to make sure I meet your needs of an excellent platform that will help monetize your podcast, whatever your size is, whatever your topic is, and focus on your craft, on what you love, on podcasting.

                    I'm an avid podcast listener, consuming more than 20hs per week of podcasts and every time someone announces they are going off the air because they need to focus on other things to pay the bills it makes me sad... and whenever I look at my feed and I see all the podcasts that silently stopped putting out updates it makes me even sadder. If the problem is funding, I want to help.

                    What amazed me was why this information was not on their website. José has a great resume, and with some insights into who and what I'm looking at, my fears are much less.

                    Future Podcast Related Companies: Listen Up
                    1. We've all worked hard to build our audience, and the last thing we want to do is create something that will make them jump through hoops, or damage the quality of our content. It's is ALL about the content. I don't want to put a Home Depot commercial in my "Teen Mom" podcast.
                    2. I want to know who you are and why I should do business with you.
                    3. I want to know WHERE you are, as they may effect support.
                    4. If you anything that adds to my process, I want the ability to leave your service with zero effect to my audience.
                    5. Don't try to charge me $30 for something that takes 5 minutes. We are not stupid. We all talk to each other. You mess with one podcaster, you mess with the community.
                    6. If you mess up, admit it, say your sorry, and explain the steps you've taken so that it won't happen again.
                    7. Lastly, if you are designing a product for podcasters - you might want to talk to us to see if we even want your product.
                    
                    The $57 Dollar Interview Guy Shares His Story

                    17:10

                    When I first heard that Aaron Janx was charging $57 to be interviewed on his show. If you have him on your show then he charges nothing. I thought, "Wait, a guest is bringing their content to YOUR show, if anybody is getting paid it should be the guest. After all, no guests - no show right? Well not completely, but my original reaction was this was a bunch of crap. If you've never read it, there is a great book called The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, and Habit 5 is Seek to Understand before being Understood. You can get the book for free when you sign up at Audible.

                    Aaron got flack for having the word "War" in his title. No his show is the Aaron Jax show.

                    Aaron's show is about how to win the War of Success. Winning those little battles in your life to be successful. Some people don't want to answer the questions as we get into the nitty gritty. There are some motivational talks on the show as well. Check it out at www.socialspurs.com as well as in iTunes

                    Here is a Screen Shot From Aaron's Listing on RadioGuestList.com

                    In the interview we hear that:

                    Aaron has done hundreds of interviews and had a large amount of people who would not show up (no call, no notification).

                    He asks people that approach him (people he doesn't have a relationship with) to pay $57. This way they are more than likely to show up. Some might say they have "Some skin in the game."

                    He found that people offer to come on the show, and then disappear. This is a tremendous waste of time.

                    Aaron is not trying to earn a living from his guests, but basically trying to weed out "the men from the boys."

                    Aaron shared where John Lee Dumas is charging $700 to appear on his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast, so this is not a "new idea."

                    The person who sent out the $57 to be on the show (the ad above) has been sacked.

                    Cancellations ranged from 30 - 50% of the time

                    Aaron was also assuming his guests would promote their appearance (and they often don't - Check out Jared Easley's new book Stop Chasing Influencers which explains how Jared had tons of "big" guests - but it didn't turn into subscribers.

                    Scheduling Tools

                    Schedule once starts at $5 (but you probably want $9)

                    Calendaly.com is $8/month

                    Appointlet is $15 a month and allows you to charge

                    Bookly is $46 (once) it's a Wordpress Plugin

                    Live365 Has Left the Buidling

                    Live365 (a streaming provider - traditionally for music) tried to get into Podcasting, and stories have now surfaced that they are all but done. This is partly due to fees going up on Licensing music. I recently was very concerned when I saw a video from a company call Glycast.com It stated, "“It’s a new approach to podcast advertising. This is how it works. You give us your podcast feed, and we give you a new one to distribute to your audience. ”"

                    I could tell by the video that the person was more of a podcast listener and not an actual podcaster. I didn't think he was out to hurt podcasters. But I could see where there was a chance for people to get their RSS feed hijacked with now way to get it back if Glycast went out of business. This video explains it all.

                    So my first reaction was to tell everyone the house was on fire, and to be careful. My second reaction was to contact the company and get their side of the story. I was BLOWN AWAY when I got this response.

                    My name is José Pablo Fernández, I live in London, I started coding when I was 7 years old, I also started my first business around that time. I worked for Google some years ago. For the past 4 years I been running a startup I co-founded, first as CTO and then as CEO: Carousel Apps. This company is launching Glycast. I co-founded Hear a Blog, a podcasting-related product, some years ago, and we got selected and Seedcamp Paris finalists. In my video for investors I talk more about my background: https://carouselapps.wistia.com/medias/pv06qw6ap5

                    We have the core tech for Glycast but not everything, so, we'll build whatever is required for both parties to be happy. We want both parties to be happy, so, if you are not and you want to leave us, we won't stop you. If you require us setting up a redirect of your feed to another system, we'll implement that feature and everybody will have it.

                    I'm thinking of actually recommending people of using Feedburner, so as to have a setup such as this:

                    main rss -> glycast -> feedburner -> audience

                    You give the feedburner RSS to your audience and while Glycast is there, then you have ads, if one day you want to move away, then you just switch your Feedburner account to read directly from your main rss like this:

                    main rss -> feedburner -> audience

                    and voila. You don't even need the redirect. Nobody will notice any difference at all.

                    Depending on what systems people are using we may also develop plug ins. For example, we can have a WordPress plug in that makes your feed look like if it was serve from Glycast, with the ads, but on your feed on your own server. That shouldn't be that hard to implement.

                    About who is on your show? Do you mean about which ads are played and which ones aren't? I'd love to implement something like that. It'll probably be something like this: if you don't approve any ads, then all ads are approved, if you approve enough ads to take care of your inventory, then only those ads will appear. If there are not enough ads, we'll send an email with an alert. Those ads pay for our hosting and bandwidth so we can't run without ads for long periods of time, but I don't want any podcaster ever to be unhappy about the ads they are getting.

                    About how much money, I don't know yet. The market will define this over time. I could look at the current expenditure in podcasts but since our model is quite different, it doesn't really apply. When you buy ads in a podcast today you are most likely buying that spot forever, while with Glycast, the spot keeps passing around from advertiser to advertiser over time. Eventually, I think we'll have a bidding system, similar to Google's Adsense, so that the pricing adjusts over time automatically.

                    About the video. I'm not here to harm anyone. I'm here to make a product to help podcasters and advertisers connect, be more efficient. I'm building whatever podcasters will need to be happy. I understand your worry and your desire to warn your audience that might not understand RSS distribution and make a bad decision now that will cost them a chunk of their audience later on. That's not something I want to do and I wouldn't be happy with any company holding an audience hostage like that. I do want to work with you, and other podcasters, to make sure I meet your needs of an excellent platform that will help monetize your podcast, whatever your size is, whatever your topic is, and focus on your craft, on what you love, on podcasting.

                    I'm an avid podcast listener, consuming more than 20hs per week of podcasts and every time someone announces they are going off the air because they need to focus on other things to pay the bills it makes me sad... and whenever I look at my feed and I see all the podcasts that silently stopped putting out updates it makes me even sadder. If the problem is funding, I want to help.

                    What amazed me was why this information was not on their website. José has a great resume, and with some insights into who and what I'm looking at, my fears are much less.

                    Future Podcast Related Companies: Listen Up
                    1. We've all worked hard to build our audience, and the last thing we want to do is create something that will make them jump through hoops, or damage the quality of our content. It's is ALL about the content. I don't want to put a Home Depot commercial in my "Teen Mom" podcast.
                    2. I want to know who you are and why I should do business with you.
                    3. I want to know WHERE you are, as they may effect support.
                    4. If you anything that adds to my process, I want the ability to leave your service with zero effect to my audience.
                    5. Don't try to charge me $30 for something that takes 5 minutes. We are not stupid. We all talk to each other. You mess with one podcaster, you mess with the community.
                    6. If you mess up, admit it, say your sorry, and explain the steps you've taken so that it won't happen again.
                    7. Lastly, if you are designing a product for podcasters - you might want to talk to us to see if we even want your product.
                    
                    The $57 Dollar Interview Guy Shares His Story

                    17:10

                    When I first heard that Aaron Janx was charging $57 to be interviewed on his show. If you have him on your show then he charges nothing. I thought, "Wait, a guest is bringing their content to YOUR show, if anybody is getting paid it should be the guest. After all, no guests - no show right? Well not completely, but my original reaction was this was a bunch of crap. If you've never read it, there is a great book called The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, and Habit 5 is Seek to Understand before being Understood. You can get the book for free when you sign up at Audible.

                    Aaron got flack for having the word "War" in his title. No his show is the Aaron Jax show.

                    Aaron's show is about how to win the War of Success. Winning those little battles in your life to be successful. Some people don't want to answer the questions as we get into the nitty gritty. There are some motivational talks on the show as well. Check it out at www.socialspurs.com as well as in iTunes

                    Here is a Screen Shot From Aaron's Listing on RadioGuestList.com

                    In the interview we hear that:

                    Aaron has done hundreds of interviews and had a large amount of people who would not show up (no call, no notification).

                    He asks people that approach him (people he doesn't have a relationship with) to pay $57. This way they are more than likely to show up. Some might say they have "Some skin in the game."

                    He found that people offer to come on the show, and then disappear. This is a tremendous waste of time.

                    Aaron is not trying to earn a living from his guests, but basically trying to weed out "the men from the boys."

                    Aaron shared where John Lee Dumas is charging $700 to appear on his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast, so this is not a "new idea."

                    The person who sent out the $57 to be on the show (the ad above) has been sacked.

                    Cancellations ranged from 30 - 50% of the time

                    Aaron was also assuming his guests would promote their appearance (and they often don't - Check out Jared Easley's new book Stop Chasing Influencers which explains how Jared had tons of "big" guests - but it didn't turn into subscribers.

                    Scheduling Tools

                    Schedule once starts at $5 (but you probably want $9)

                    Calendaly.com is $8/month

                    Appointlet is $15 a month and allows you to charge

                    Bookly is $46 (once) it's a Wordpress Plugin

                    Live365 Has Left the Buidling

                    Live365 (a streaming provider - traditionally for music) tried to get into Podcasting, and stories have now surfaced that they are all but done. This is partly due to fees going up on Licensing music. Full story is here. If you want to create a streaming version of your show, I use Abovecast. I have found people don't listen as long (about 5 minutes) so I make snippets and point people to my website. Much like a podcast has to be listed in directories (iTunes, Stitcher, TuneIn) so do streaming channels. Here is a default (boring) default page.

                    Free Poddcast Editing

                    If you are done with cutting out "ums" and want to just create content and let someoone else handle the editing, check out www.podcastmechanic.com I'm ready to take on a few clients.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    In today's show you hear how Marcy Rosenbaum had an idea went out and bought some equipment (bought the wrong microphone) and was just lost. She purchased some one-on-one consulting and her show was in iTunes in a few weeks. Schedule your coaching call today. If you'd rather go "Self-paced" check out the School of Podcasting. Join risk free with out 30 day guarantee.

                    ]]>dd75e11c11eef65ddd99bddfe238753bMon, 04 Jan 2016 05:00:00 -040048:19falsefull495495My Favorite Podcast 2015in no particular order)

                    01:25 Exponent - the nuances of tech strategy - Submitted by Max Flight of AirplaneGeeks.com, TheUAVDigest.com, and PaxExPodcast.com

                    2:48 Up In Your Business - brings in inspiration to help you to create a business - Submitted by Chris Lewis of www.dadspotlight.com

                    4:33 School of Podcasting - All Things Podcasting - Submitted by Craig from inglespodcast.com and 08:06 Kenn from blackmanwithagun.com

                    09:53 Ask the Podcast Coach - Your Podcast Questions Answered - Submitted by Dan Lovallo from http://headlinehistory.libsyn.com/podcast

                    11:18 We Choose Respect - Teaches kids to be respectful - Submitted by Erik K Johnson from www.podcasttalencoach.com

                    13:35 You Must Remember This - Golden Age of Hollywood - Submitted by Emily and James of www.classylittlepodcast.com

                    16:40 Canada Land - A deep dive into the media world in Canada - Submitted by Francis McGrogan from www.standcurious.com

                    19:10 The Mentee - surround yourself with heavy hitting mentors - Submitted by Gretchen from www.alwaysalesson.com

                    20:10 Learning Leader - focuses on leadership in every field - Submitted by Gretchen (Schultek) Bridgers from www.alwaysalesson.com

                    20:40 Duncan Trussell Family Hour - have a good laugh every once in a while - Submitted by Harry Duran of www.podcastjunkies.com

                    21:56 Mat Men - I love wrestling and this network - Jeff Bradburry from www.teachercast.net

                    22:30 The Morning Stream - a great mix of humor, news, music, pop culture - Submitted by Jeremy Denise of transmissionspodcast.com

                    23:33 Bowery Boys - New York City history - Submitted by Jessica Bailey of www.funkyfitnessnow.com

                    24:34 Art of Manliness - Great advice for Men - Submitted by John Overall of Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                    26:18 Finding Christ in Cinema - tease out the bits of movies that relate to Christ - John Wilkerson of www.thewiredhomeschool.com

                    28:10 Grit and Hustle - full of interviews with startups who've had overcome all kinds of obstacles - Submitted by John Livesay of www.sellingsecretsforfunding.com

                    28:47 The Ferderalist Radio Hour - They talk politics. They talk policy. The host is is absolutely brilliant - Submitted by John Tsarpalas of www.commonwealthy.com

                    30:38 48 Days to the Work You Love - shows tough love to his listeners and doesn't sugar coat things for them - Submitted by Judy Graph of www.farmandranchcountry.com

                    32:04 Snap Judgement - great stories, music behind it, the history, and other off the wall stuff - Submitted by Ken Kastler -of www.bountifulproductions.com

                    32:55 Steal the Show - the most unorthodox marketing program - Submitted by Kim Kracji of www.onthetablepodcasts.com

                    33:53 Mac Power Users - their recommendations have never steered me wrong - Laura McClellan of www.theproductivewoman.com

                    36:30 Mad at Dad - If you're married and if you have kids, you probably go through the same thing - Chiaki Hinohara of www.metalmoment.com

                    40:19 $100 MBA - - the perfect combination of book smarts and street smarts - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com

                    41:35 Art of Likability - educational podcasts that are also entertaining - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com

                    42:45 Stacking Benjamins - interesting stories around the finances - Submited by Steve Stewart of No Debt, No Credit, No Problems

                    44:44 Writing Excuses - really gets deep into the craft - Submitted by Maya Good of www.literaryroadhouse.com

                    45:50 Podcast Talent Coach - amazing information that has really helped me improve my show - Submitted by Steave Stearns of  www.outsidehealthandfitness.com

                    47:43 Security Now! - information that comes out is very timely and relevant to my day job - Submitted by Rich Warfield of www.loudpipes.net

                    50:05 Tim Ferris Show -  He interviews top performing people from all different categories - Submitted by Scott Johnson -of Computer Tutor and Ultrafinishers

                    52:03 99% Invisible - Talks about all the obscure, unique things - Submitted by Sharon Marrel of www.uuperspective.com

                    53:25 Daily Tech News - excellent technology information that I find extremely interesting - Submitted by Al Holtz of thelastshippodcast.com & learntoselfpub.com

                    55:01 Thomas Jefferson Hour - life through the eyes of Thomas Jefferson - Submitted by Terry Noorda of discoveringamerica-history.com

                    56:05 New Media Show - Great Content You Can't Get Anywhere Else - Submitted by Dave Jackson (me)

                    Have a Great 2016

                    Thanks to everyone for a great 2015. I look forward to watching the growth of podcasting in the future. If you'd like to have episodes of the School of Podcasting show up on your iPhone go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe today. If you're on an Android you can Subscribe on Android. If you'd like to get the show notes delivered to you for free, sign up for our newsletter.

                    Check out Dave's Books

                    More Podcast Money

                    My Favorite Podcast 2014

                    ...]]>in no particular order)

                    01:25 Exponent - the nuances of tech strategy - Submitted by Max Flight of AirplaneGeeks.com, TheUAVDigest.com, and PaxExPodcast.com

                    2:48 Up In Your Business - brings in inspiration to help you to create a business - Submitted by Chris Lewis of www.dadspotlight.com

                    4:33 School of Podcasting - All Things Podcasting - Submitted by Craig from inglespodcast.com and 08:06 Kenn from blackmanwithagun.com

                    09:53 Ask the Podcast Coach - Your Podcast Questions Answered - Submitted by Dan Lovallo from http://headlinehistory.libsyn.com/podcast

                    11:18 We Choose Respect - Teaches kids to be respectful - Submitted by Erik K Johnson from www.podcasttalencoach.com

                    13:35 You Must Remember This - Golden Age of Hollywood - Submitted by Emily and James of www.classylittlepodcast.com

                    16:40 Canada Land - A deep dive into the media world in Canada - Submitted by Francis McGrogan from www.standcurious.com

                    19:10 The Mentee - surround yourself with heavy hitting mentors - Submitted by Gretchen from www.alwaysalesson.com

                    20:10 Learning Leader - focuses on leadership in every field - Submitted by Gretchen (Schultek) Bridgers from www.alwaysalesson.com

                    20:40 Duncan Trussell Family Hour - have a good laugh every once in a while - Submitted by Harry Duran of www.podcastjunkies.com

                    21:56 Mat Men - I love wrestling and this network - Jeff Bradburry from www.teachercast.net

                    22:30 The Morning Stream - a great mix of humor, news, music, pop culture - Submitted by Jeremy Denise of transmissionspodcast.com

                    23:33 Bowery Boys - New York City history - Submitted by Jessica Bailey of www.funkyfitnessnow.com

                    24:34 Art of Manliness - Great advice for Men - Submitted by John Overall of Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                    26:18 Finding Christ in Cinema - tease out the bits of movies that relate to Christ - John Wilkerson of www.thewiredhomeschool.com

                    28:10 Grit and Hustle - full of interviews with startups who've had overcome all kinds of obstacles - Submitted by John Livesay of www.sellingsecretsforfunding.com

                    28:47 The Ferderalist Radio Hour - They talk politics. They talk policy. The host is is absolutely brilliant - Submitted by John Tsarpalas of www.commonwealthy.com

                    30:38 48 Days to the Work You Love - shows tough love to his listeners and doesn't sugar coat things for them - Submitted by Judy Graph of www.farmandranchcountry.com

                    32:04 Snap Judgement - great stories, music behind it, the history, and other off the wall stuff - Submitted by Ken Kastler -of www.bountifulproductions.com

                    32:55 Steal the Show - the most unorthodox marketing program - Submitted by Kim Kracji of www.onthetablepodcasts.com

                    33:53 Mac Power Users - their recommendations have never steered me wrong - Laura McClellan of www.theproductivewoman.com

                    36:30 Mad at Dad - If you're married and if you have kids, you probably go through the same thing - Chiaki Hinohara of www.metalmoment.com

                    40:19 $100 MBA - - the perfect combination of book smarts and street smarts - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com

                    41:35 Art of Likability - educational podcasts that are also entertaining - Submitted by Michel Nelson 0f www.byhyu.com

                    42:45 Stacking Benjamins - interesting stories around the finances - Submited by Steve Stewart of No Debt, No Credit, No Problems

                    44:44 Writing Excuses - really gets deep into the craft - Submitted by Maya Good of www.literaryroadhouse.com

                    45:50 Podcast Talent Coach - amazing information that has really helped me improve my show - Submitted by Steave Stearns of  www.outsidehealthandfitness.com

                    47:43 Security Now! - information that comes out is very timely and relevant to my day job - Submitted by Rich Warfield of www.loudpipes.net

                    50:05 Tim Ferris Show -  He interviews top performing people from all different categories - Submitted by Scott Johnson -of Computer Tutor and Ultrafinishers

                    52:03 99% Invisible - Talks about all the obscure, unique things - Submitted by Sharon Marrel of www.uuperspective.com

                    53:25 Daily Tech News - excellent technology information that I find extremely interesting - Submitted by Al Holtz of thelastshippodcast.com & learntoselfpub.com

                    55:01 Thomas Jefferson Hour - life through the eyes of Thomas Jefferson - Submitted by Terry Noorda of discoveringamerica-history.com

                    56:05 New Media Show - Great Content You Can't Get Anywhere Else - Submitted by Dave Jackson (me)

                    Have a Great 2016

                    Thanks to everyone for a great 2015. I look forward to watching the growth of podcasting in the future. If you'd like to have episodes of the School of Podcasting show up on your iPhone go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes and subscribe today. If you're on an Android you can Subscribe on Android. If you'd like to get the show notes delivered to you for free, sign up for our newsletter.

                    Check out Dave's Books

                    More Podcast Money

                    My Favorite Podcast 2014

                    My Favorite Podcast 2015

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                    www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>1781568add4ab123bfbe428bafa5740cMon, 28 Dec 2015 05:00:00 -040001:02:01falsefull494494Evaluating Your Podcast YearTroy produces numerous podcast, but today he is talking about the Blacklist Exposed podcast he had the creator of the hit NBC show contact Troy on twitter and ask to come on the show. While he was on the show he made announcements that were then used in Press Releases that had all the press releases pointing at Ttoy's site theblacklistexposed.com Tory point out that:
                    1. The Creator of the Show Called THEM.
                    2. It took three seasons (it didn't happen over night).
                    3. Make great headlines.
                    
                    Evaluating Your Podcast Year

                    My stats are basically flat from the start of the year to the end of the year. I had a bit of an upswing in the middle of the year, and I'm up a bit from last year (kind of following the trends of podcasting up about 3%). Here are some things you can look at:

                    1. See what episodes were downloaded the most
                    2. See what episodes had the most comments
                    3. See what pages had the most visit (check your Google Analytics)
                    4. See what got shared the most ( I use Social Warfare for this)
                    5. Then look at what didn't do well.
                    
                    

                    You want to do more of what seemed to resonate with your audience and less of what didn't. Seems obvious, but without a time to evaluate what is working you could be going deeper into the wrong direction.

                     

                    Top Ten Episodes of 2015

                    The Journey of Podcasting Starts with a Single Episode- Profitcast's The Real Brian

                    Taking Phone Calls On Your Podcast

                    What to Do If You Can't Pick a Podcast Topic

                    What Podcasters Can Learn From David Letterman

                    Podcasting's Most Frequently Asked Questions

                    Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never Boring

                    Audio Technica BP40 - Electrovoice RE320 - Audio Technica ATR2100 USB Microphone Shootout

                    Jeff Brown Shares 26 Years Of Experience Behind the Microphone

                    8 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your Audience

                     

                    Honorable Mentions

                    The Most Addicting Social Platform Ever

                    What Every Podcaster Should Know About Stalkers

                    Is Soundcloud A Legitimate Option for Podcasting?

                     

                    New Tools I Started Using this Year

                    Intelliplayer is a great tool that allows you to add calls to action to YouTube Videos, as well as get more stats than you get in Youtube.

                    Convert Kit  - A great email marketing tool that gives great insights into your email subscribers

                    Nimble - This is the tool I use to keep in touch with the members at the School of Podcasting and Consulting Clients

                    Social Warfare - Sharing buttons on steroids for Wordpress.

                    Simple Podcast Press - For me, the best "Advanced Player" out there. The ability to add an email sign up form AND any button I want, makes it a no brainer.

                    Cover Genie Pro - Makes great covers, ebooks, and a whole lot more.

                    *Note some of those links are affiliate links.

                    Tools I Will Stop Using

                    Soundcloud.com It may be cheap, but I'm getting zero return for my money.

                    Lead Pages - Great tool, but the tools I'm using it for (squeeze pages) I can do with Convert Kit. I was going to use their lead digits, but I then realized that I would be marrying myself to the service as my phone number would be in my old episodes.

                    The One Thing

                    Other things I've noticed looking back at this year is a pile of training materials that I never went through. I bought them to "watch later" and then went on my ways doing things in a manner that I'm sure could be more efficient. I've used Asana for years. It's a great free project management tool. I've never really mastered the software and its capabilities. This will be the first thing I work on in 2016. Get organized and then identify the ONE THING that I will do next. I've heard about the book The ONE Thing: The Surprisingly Simple Truth Behind Extraordinary Results on how you should pick the NEXT thing that you will be working on and do it. Then the next, then the next. All the while making sure yo are only working on ONE THING.

                    Don't Forget to Celebrate the Accomplishments

                    While I could look at the things that didn't work this year (podcasting for free proved -as I thought - to be a bad experiment), don't forget to look at the things you tried that worked (using blab.im for Ask the Podcast Coach has really made that show fun). By focusing on my next meal, I've lost over 20 lbs in the last three months. Check out apps like the Gratitude app, or the Way of Life apps to help keep you focused and engaged.

                    In Between The Stats

                    While we can focus on the download numbers, and the amount of revenue we generate, this week showed me my greatest asset. My audience. After many years of therapy and making each other miserable, my wife and I dissolved our marriage. I wasn't looking for a pitty party when I announced it on Facebook, but the support that flooded in via email, voicemail, etc was baffling. I felt like George Bailey in It's a Wonderful Life." I've had numerous pep talks, and some great conversations. I'm as fine as one can be in this situation. I'm waiting for the dust to settle, but I'm looking forward to a much more quiet future.

                    While I've now been married twice (and for all purposely, my last), I have no children. I have ex-step children who I do miss, but nobody will be carrying my genes. Again, not looking for a pitty party, but just stating the facts. I have always felt like podcasting was a calling. It just fits me like a glove. It allows me to be creative, to teach, to help, and to use technology. It scratches every itch there is to scratch for me.

                    So I look forward to creating deeper connections with my audience in 2016. I look forward to being focused, and finding more effective ways of getting the word out about the School of Podcasting. I look forward to serving you as we move forward.

                    Ready To Launch Your Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting and get instant access to step by step tutorials, a private Facebook group, and "office hours" webinars where you can get your question answered live in addition to email support. If you're not happy within the first 30 days, I'll refund your money. Sign up at www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Troy produces numerous podcast, but today he is talking about the Blacklist Exposed podcast he had the creator of the hit NBC show contact Troy on twitter and ask to come on the show. While he was on the show he made announcements that were then used in Press Releases that had all the press releases pointing at Ttoy's site theblacklistexposed.com Tory point out that:
                    1. The Creator of the Show Called THEM.
                    2. It took three seasons (it didn't happen over night).
                    3. Make great headlines.
                    
                    Evaluating Your Podcast Year

                    My stats are basically flat from the start of the year to the end of the year. I had a bit of an upswing in the middle of the year, and I'm up a bit from last year (kind of following the trends of podcasting up about 3%). Here are some things you can look at:

                    1. See what episodes were downloaded the most
                    2. See what episodes had the most comments
                    3. See what pages had the most visit (check your Google Analytics)
                    4. See what got shared the most ( I use Social Warfare for this)
                    5. Then look at what didn't do well.
                    
                    

                    You want to do more of what seemed to resonate with your audience and less of what didn't. Seems obvious, but without a time to evaluate what is working you could be going deeper into the wrong direction.

                     

                    Top Ten Episodes of 2015

                    The Journey of Podcasting Starts with a Single Episode- Profitcast's The Real Brian

                    Taking Phone Calls On Your Podcast

                    What to Do If You Can't Pick a Podcast Topic

                    What Podcasters Can Learn From David Letterman

                    Podcasting's Most Frequently Asked Questions

                    Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never Boring

                    Audio Technica BP40 - Electrovoice RE320 - Audio Technica ATR2100 USB Microphone Shootout

                    Jeff Brown Shares 26 Years Of Experience Behind the Microphone

                    8 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your Audience

                     

                    Honorable Mentions

                    The Most Addicting Social Platform Ever

                    What Every Podcaster Should Know About Stalkers

                    Is Soundcloud A Legitimate Option for Podcasting?

                     

                    New Tools I Started Using this Year

                    Intelliplayer is a great tool that allows you to add calls to action to YouTube Videos, as well as get more stats than you get in Youtube.

                    Convert Kit  - A great email marketing tool that gives great insights into your email subscribers

                    Nimble - This is the tool I use to keep in touch with the members at the School of Podcasting and Consulting Clients

                    Social Warfare - Sharing buttons on steroids for Wordpress.

                    Simple Podcast Press - For me, the best "Advanced Player" out there. The ability to add an email sign up form AND any button I want, makes it a no brainer.

                    Cover Genie Pro - Makes great covers, ebooks, and a whole lot more.

                    *Note some of those links are affiliate links.

                    Tools I Will Stop Using

                    Soundcloud.com It may be cheap, but I'm getting zero return for my money.

                    Lead Pages - Great tool, but the tools I'm using it for (squeeze pages) I can do with Convert Kit. I was going to use their lead digits, but I then realized that I would be marrying myself to the service as my phone number would be in my old episodes.

                    The One Thing

                    Other things I've noticed looking back at this year is a pile of training materials that I never went through. I bought them to "watch later" and then went on my ways doing things in a manner that I'm sure could be more efficient. I've used Asana for years. It's a great free project management tool. I've never really mastered the software and its capabilities. This will be the first thing I work on in 2016. Get organized and then identify the ONE THING that I will do next. I've heard about the book The ONE Thing: The Surprisingly Simple Truth Behind Extraordinary Results on how you should pick the NEXT thing that you will be working on and do it. Then the next, then the next. All the while making sure yo are only working on ONE THING.

                    Don't Forget to Celebrate the Accomplishments

                    While I could look at the things that didn't work this year (podcasting for free proved -as I thought - to be a bad experiment), don't forget to look at the things you tried that worked (using blab.im for Ask the Podcast Coach has really made that show fun). By focusing on my next meal, I've lost over 20 lbs in the last three months. Check out apps like the Gratitude app, or the Way of Life apps to help keep you focused and engaged.

                    In Between The Stats

                    While we can focus on the download numbers, and the amount of revenue we generate, this week showed me my greatest asset. My audience. After many years of therapy and making each other miserable, my wife and I dissolved our marriage. I wasn't looking for a pitty party when I announced it on Facebook, but the support that flooded in via email, voicemail, etc was baffling. I felt like George Bailey in It's a Wonderful Life." I've had numerous pep talks, and some great conversations. I'm as fine as one can be in this situation. I'm waiting for the dust to settle, but I'm looking forward to a much more quiet future.

                    While I've now been married twice (and for all purposely, my last), I have no children. I have ex-step children who I do miss, but nobody will be carrying my genes. Again, not looking for a pitty party, but just stating the facts. I have always felt like podcasting was a calling. It just fits me like a glove. It allows me to be creative, to teach, to help, and to use technology. It scratches every itch there is to scratch for me.

                    So I look forward to creating deeper connections with my audience in 2016. I look forward to being focused, and finding more effective ways of getting the word out about the School of Podcasting. I look forward to serving you as we move forward.

                    Ready To Launch Your Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting and get instant access to step by step tutorials, a private Facebook group, and "office hours" webinars where you can get your question answered live in addition to email support. If you're not happy within the first 30 days, I'll refund your money. Sign up at www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>700ba2eea0cd97a9de2e330f21fbae64Mon, 21 Dec 2015 05:00:00 -040048:04falsefull493493You Don't Need Thousands of Downloads To Sell AdsGlenn made quite a splash when he was on the show earlier this year (it's the most shared episode on the site).

                    7:02 "Glenn the Geek" is America's Horse Husband and founder of the Horse Radio Network recently had a special holiday program where they streamed live for 12 hours. Here are some stats:

                    12 Hours Live20+ Hosts30 Scheduled Guests including Charlie Daniels, Robin from Disney World, Monty Roberts and American Pharoah Trainer Bob BaffertCrashed live feed during Bob Baffert, everything else worked all dayOver 100 listener voicemails with songs, poems and holiday greetings.200 calls during the day (Not all got on air)Gave away $3,000 in prizes including $1000 Grand Prize17 Sponsors

                    Strategies For Doing a Radiothon

                    He started planning months in advance when he was face to face with the sponsors.

                    Sponsors who won't sponsor on a weekly basis, may be interested in doing a "one off." (who later turn into a weekly sponsor).

                    Glenn uses Callinstudio.com to take phone calls and streams via mixlr.com

                    He put it in the contract that the sponsors had to publish the radiothon on their Facebook page.

                    He utilized relationships to get great guests. Glen says "It's not who you know, it's who knows YOU."

                    He got his audience involved who sent in songs, poems, shout outs and more (it took 20 hours to edit together).

                    They got Charlie Daniels by using the contact form on their website.

                    They had a title sponsor who was mentioned every hour. Another advertiser sponsored the email section. Other advertisers were tied into give aways.

                    Results of Horse Radio Holiday Radiothon

                    He mad 50% of what he makes in a month in ONE day. It was a lot of work.

                    He picked up new sponsor who decided to sponsor this one day, are now sponsor weekly.

                    Proof You don't have to have huge numbers to sell advertising. You have to have huge numbers to sell to Ford and Chevy.

                    For more information about the Horse Radio Network check out www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Podfest Event

                    29:55 Podfest is in February at Tampa Florida at podfest.us

                    For the 2nd year in a row, Podfest is the gathering place for long time podcasters, new podcasters and those who are thinking about starting podcasts.  It's a special forum that brings you actionable and strategic education, unique opportunities to connect and collaborate with your fellow podcasters and speakers and access to the best podcasting resources out there!

                    Use the coupon code earlybird before the end of the year and get $100 off.

                    Because of my Podcast: Glenn The Geek

                    2:10 Glen mentioned a kickstarter program for a product that fit his audience. Glenn mentioned them on his show, and they were able to meet their funding target (with one audience member giving them $1000) and now that product is sponsoring Glenn's show.

                    Brian From Profitcast

                    Brian was asked to moderate a panel and interviewing the actors of his favorite TV show.

                    I'm a Verb!

                    38:27 On Profitcast Brian has now made my name a Verb. As in "I'm going to Dave Jackson this..." (meaning I'm going to interrupt a voicemail to talk to the person).

                    Streaming Radio Stations

                    Live365 has a new tool for Podcasters to Create a streaming radio station. They are charging $89 but you get unlimited listeners. Their system is easy to use and more complex than a system using the Centova system (I currently use Listen2myradio). I do like the way you can drill down and see where people are coming from, and they have a system in place for you to make money with your stream (at the rate of $2 for every thousand ads that are played on your station). You can also make money with having people sign up to be a VIP. It's interesting, but I'm not sure the average podcaster will chip in $89 for all the bells and whistles when you can $37.50 for 50 listeners. On my live streaming station,  over the last 30 days I've had 66 listeners with the highest number listening at the same time of 10.

                    Mentioned on this Show

                    thepodcastdigest.info

                    Callburner

                    Hindenburg Journalist Software

                    Launch Your Podcast

                    Check out http://schoolofpodcasting.com/become-a-member/

                    ]]>Glenn made quite a splash when he was on the show earlier this year (it's the most shared episode on the site).

                    7:02 "Glenn the Geek" is America's Horse Husband and founder of the Horse Radio Network recently had a special holiday program where they streamed live for 12 hours. Here are some stats:

                    12 Hours Live20+ Hosts30 Scheduled Guests including Charlie Daniels, Robin from Disney World, Monty Roberts and American Pharoah Trainer Bob BaffertCrashed live feed during Bob Baffert, everything else worked all dayOver 100 listener voicemails with songs, poems and holiday greetings.200 calls during the day (Not all got on air)Gave away $3,000 in prizes including $1000 Grand Prize17 Sponsors

                    Strategies For Doing a Radiothon

                    He started planning months in advance when he was face to face with the sponsors.

                    Sponsors who won't sponsor on a weekly basis, may be interested in doing a "one off." (who later turn into a weekly sponsor).

                    Glenn uses Callinstudio.com to take phone calls and streams via mixlr.com

                    He put it in the contract that the sponsors had to publish the radiothon on their Facebook page.

                    He utilized relationships to get great guests. Glen says "It's not who you know, it's who knows YOU."

                    He got his audience involved who sent in songs, poems, shout outs and more (it took 20 hours to edit together).

                    They got Charlie Daniels by using the contact form on their website.

                    They had a title sponsor who was mentioned every hour. Another advertiser sponsored the email section. Other advertisers were tied into give aways.

                    Results of Horse Radio Holiday Radiothon

                    He mad 50% of what he makes in a month in ONE day. It was a lot of work.

                    He picked up new sponsor who decided to sponsor this one day, are now sponsor weekly.

                    Proof You don't have to have huge numbers to sell advertising. You have to have huge numbers to sell to Ford and Chevy.

                    For more information about the Horse Radio Network check out www.horseradionetwork.com

                    Podfest Event

                    29:55 Podfest is in February at Tampa Florida at podfest.us

                    For the 2nd year in a row, Podfest is the gathering place for long time podcasters, new podcasters and those who are thinking about starting podcasts.  It's a special forum that brings you actionable and strategic education, unique opportunities to connect and collaborate with your fellow podcasters and speakers and access to the best podcasting resources out there!

                    Use the coupon code earlybird before the end of the year and get $100 off.

                    Because of my Podcast: Glenn The Geek

                    2:10 Glen mentioned a kickstarter program for a product that fit his audience. Glenn mentioned them on his show, and they were able to meet their funding target (with one audience member giving them $1000) and now that product is sponsoring Glenn's show.

                    Brian From Profitcast

                    Brian was asked to moderate a panel and interviewing the actors of his favorite TV show.

                    I'm a Verb!

                    38:27 On Profitcast Brian has now made my name a Verb. As in "I'm going to Dave Jackson this..." (meaning I'm going to interrupt a voicemail to talk to the person).

                    Streaming Radio Stations

                    Live365 has a new tool for Podcasters to Create a streaming radio station. They are charging $89 but you get unlimited listeners. Their system is easy to use and more complex than a system using the Centova system (I currently use Listen2myradio). I do like the way you can drill down and see where people are coming from, and they have a system in place for you to make money with your stream (at the rate of $2 for every thousand ads that are played on your station). You can also make money with having people sign up to be a VIP. It's interesting, but I'm not sure the average podcaster will chip in $89 for all the bells and whistles when you can $37.50 for 50 listeners. On my live streaming station,  over the last 30 days I've had 66 listeners with the highest number listening at the same time of 10.

                    Mentioned on this Show

                    thepodcastdigest.info

                    Callburner

                    Hindenburg Journalist Software

                    Launch Your Podcast

                    Check out http://schoolofpodcasting.com/become-a-member/

                    ]]>a48fe95f747195ad1a540859e7e894d6Mon, 14 Dec 2015 05:00:00 -040044:24falsefull492492Audience Participation Blue PrintRob Walch is the VP of Podcast relations, but he started off 11 years ago as the host of Podcast411. In 2007 he started the then Today in iPhone (later changed to Today in iOs to include the iPad) and Rob has more audience interaction than any podcast I've ever heard. Here are some things I noticed about his show.
                    1. Rob mentions and ASKS for feedback and provides his email address and phone number many times through the episode. He states it, and moves on.
                    2. He gets his community involved by asking them to contribute original music and artwork
                    3. He offers them free apps from developers looking to promote their app to their target audience.
                    4. He offers objective viewpoints (he's a fan boy, but realizes integrity easy to lose, and hard to come by) about Apple products.
                    5. He uses his sponsors so he can talk about them first hand.
                    6. When someone sends in feedback he religiously refers to this person by name.
                    7. He reminds his audience that he is "going back to the mail bag" to remind them to e-mail in their comments/questions
                    8. He doesn't pretend to know it all. If he doesn't know it, he throws it out to the audience to answer (and they do).
                    9. He uses a Google community (with 2500+ members) to community outside the podcast
                    10. He uses the same segments for each show, and yet every show is different due to news, apps, and upgrades. So you know what to expect, and still have no idea what to expect.
                    11. Every episode is served with a side of snarkiness. Rob is sarcastic and that is the part that I love about the show. His segment "How wrong were they" is always good for a chuckle.
                    
                    

                    I play a small "behind the scenes" conversation I had with Rob back in January of this year when we were talking "Twitter bombing"

                    1:10 Because of My Podcast I'm on FM Radio - Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk

                    Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk explains how his podcast lead to him getting a job as a regular on a local Radio show. Find Mike at podcasthelpdesk.com

                    ]]>Rob Walch is the VP of Podcast relations, but he started off 11 years ago as the host of Podcast411. In 2007 he started the then Today in iPhone (later changed to Today in iOs to include the iPad) and Rob has more audience interaction than any podcast I've ever heard. Here are some things I noticed about his show.
                    1. Rob mentions and ASKS for feedback and provides his email address and phone number many times through the episode. He states it, and moves on.
                    2. He gets his community involved by asking them to contribute original music and artwork
                    3. He offers them free apps from developers looking to promote their app to their target audience.
                    4. He offers objective viewpoints (he's a fan boy, but realizes integrity easy to lose, and hard to come by) about Apple products.
                    5. He uses his sponsors so he can talk about them first hand.
                    6. When someone sends in feedback he religiously refers to this person by name.
                    7. He reminds his audience that he is "going back to the mail bag" to remind them to e-mail in their comments/questions
                    8. He doesn't pretend to know it all. If he doesn't know it, he throws it out to the audience to answer (and they do).
                    9. He uses a Google community (with 2500+ members) to community outside the podcast
                    10. He uses the same segments for each show, and yet every show is different due to news, apps, and upgrades. So you know what to expect, and still have no idea what to expect.
                    11. Every episode is served with a side of snarkiness. Rob is sarcastic and that is the part that I love about the show. His segment "How wrong were they" is always good for a chuckle.
                    
                    

                    I play a small "behind the scenes" conversation I had with Rob back in January of this year when we were talking "Twitter bombing"

                    1:10 Because of My Podcast I'm on FM Radio - Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk

                    Mike Dell from Podcast Help Desk explains how his podcast lead to him getting a job as a regular on a local Radio show. Find Mike at podcasthelpdesk.com

                    ]]>a1dc855b56ebc1de006b3793a5557fe2Mon, 07 Dec 2015 05:00:00 -040040:02falsefull49149111 Tips for Better EngagementWe love our audience, and we want to connect. We want them to take steps to deepen their level of engagement. We want them to take actions. These often include:

                    Subscribe, Rate & Review in iTunes

                    Follow us on Social Media

                    Join our Email List

                    Buy products

                    Shop At Amazon

                    and that's just a few.

                    Determining Your ONE Call To Action

                    Your call to action will be unique to you. We all have different needs, and different motives. There is no one size fits all, but in the end you need to STOP and THINK, WHAT IS THE GOAL OF THIS PODCAST. Them figure out the roadmap to get your audience from point A to point B. If you are in podcasting "Just for fun" you probably still want people to tell their friends. That is a call to action.

                    Now if I was to honest here, I would say I want everyone to join the School of Podcasting. I need to look at this realistically. This may be the first time you've been on my website, or heard my show. That seems a bit forward don't you think? You don't ask someone to marry you on the first date, so you might not want to close the deal on the first contact with you audience. The cool thing is it is YOUR call. You want to ask someone to marry you on the first date, you can do that.  But you might be less intimidating to have them sign up for your email list. From there you have another opportunity to provide value. Notice what I said here, you have an opportunity to serve your audience.

                    Figure out where you want to go, and the figure out how you're going to get there. It sounds easy, but you might find it difficult. The bottom line is you need a plan.

                    Tips For Creating a Call To Action
                    1. As I said before, you need to figure out what you want your audience to do
                    2. Be clear and concise
                    3. Be repetitive if necessary
                    4. Tell them HOW (sure you know how, but they may not)
                    5. Make it E A S Y (don't make them hunt for buttons, or type insane website addresses)
                    6. Eliminate competitive calls to action
                    7. Explain how they will benefit (not how you will benefit)
                    8. Explain exactly what will happen
                    9. Explain why they need to do this now
                    10. Remove the Fear. Try to avoid words that might seem much of a commitment. BUY NOW vs Add to Cart. Maybe we should be asking people "Get the back catalog" instead of "Subscribe." Explain how they can cancel at any time, and it is free.
                    11. Place it in two places on your post. One near the top of the page ("above the fold" and once near the bottom).
                    
                    

                    In the end, a call to action should convey value, and provide a sense of urgency.

                    Because of my Podcast - Jeff Steinman

                    Jeff explains that how launching a podcast boosted his book sales, brought him more traffic, and boosted his interview skills. You can find Jeff at howtoquitworking.com

                    How To Quit Working: A Simple Plan to Leave Your Job for a Life of Freedom

                    Podbean's CrowdFunding Platform

                    For the sake of this argument, let's say that the bar is set at Patreon.com They are the first at an ongoing crowdfunding platform. Others have come and gone, and they are still here. Podbean (a media host) recently launched the ability to have crowdfunding. I went over to check it out. Here is what I found.

                    1. It's easy to setup, but in some cases impossible to edit.
                    2. With Patreon it's super easy to create a post (think of it like a Facebook Wall) and choose who can and can't see that post. I don't see that option. With Podbean you have a comments section that doesn't seem as robust.
                    
                    

                    When I watched their video on this, I did notice that their example video shows that all the rewards are outside of the crowdfunding area (bonus content, newsletters). I have an email into Podbean for clarification. I noticed on their demo video someone asked the same question (how do I create a piece of content for a certain support level) and it hasn't been answered.

                    Podbean does have some badges (something I wish Patreon would provide) that make it super easy to copy and paste and have them appear on your website. the one feature that Patreon has that Podbean didn't event mention is scarcity. In other words you could setup a reward amount and say "Only 5 people can be VIPs." I didn't see this as an option in Podbean.

                    One of the issues I had with Podbean is not their fault. I was using Feedburner for the Podcast I setup. Feedburner (shocking) had a problem with the artwork. Podbean pulled this artwork (or lack thereof) and uses that in your listing. There is no place in Podbean to change that. With a properly working feed, I wouldn't have had this issues, but I had no way to edit it. After I updated the feed, the image never appeared.

                    Like Most Humans - I Stuck With the Comfortable

                    I have a Patreon account for the School of Podcasting and another one for the Ask the Podcast Coach show and I understand the Patreon platform. They also seem to be working on adding more features to the Patreon platform.

                    Create Clammrs From Just About Anywhere

                    Clammr has been adding features. Clammr is a tool that allows you to share up to 18 seconds of audio and put it on twitter, Facebook, email, etc. Anyone can listen to the whole episode, or like it and receive the details of the audio clip via email. Recently they announced the ability to integrate with the PowerPress player (something I will report on in the future), but they also had it easy to create clammrs by sharing an audio clip and sending it to clammr. In my testing it seemed to work a bit more reliably if Clammr was open already and then you went to your podcast player and clicked the share button.

                    From there you will record your audio and be taken to the clammr app where you can fine tune it before publishing it to your clammr account. For more information go to clamrr.com and to here what people are clammring, check out the clammrcast top 20 countdown.

                    Ready To Start Your Own Podcast?

                     

                    ]]>We love our audience, and we want to connect. We want them to take steps to deepen their level of engagement. We want them to take actions. These often include:

                    Subscribe, Rate & Review in iTunes

                    Follow us on Social Media

                    Join our Email List

                    Buy products

                    Shop At Amazon

                    and that's just a few.

                    Determining Your ONE Call To Action

                    Your call to action will be unique to you. We all have different needs, and different motives. There is no one size fits all, but in the end you need to STOP and THINK, WHAT IS THE GOAL OF THIS PODCAST. Them figure out the roadmap to get your audience from point A to point B. If you are in podcasting "Just for fun" you probably still want people to tell their friends. That is a call to action.

                    Now if I was to honest here, I would say I want everyone to join the School of Podcasting. I need to look at this realistically. This may be the first time you've been on my website, or heard my show. That seems a bit forward don't you think? You don't ask someone to marry you on the first date, so you might not want to close the deal on the first contact with you audience. The cool thing is it is YOUR call. You want to ask someone to marry you on the first date, you can do that.  But you might be less intimidating to have them sign up for your email list. From there you have another opportunity to provide value. Notice what I said here, you have an opportunity to serve your audience.

                    Figure out where you want to go, and the figure out how you're going to get there. It sounds easy, but you might find it difficult. The bottom line is you need a plan.

                    Tips For Creating a Call To Action
                    1. As I said before, you need to figure out what you want your audience to do
                    2. Be clear and concise
                    3. Be repetitive if necessary
                    4. Tell them HOW (sure you know how, but they may not)
                    5. Make it E A S Y (don't make them hunt for buttons, or type insane website addresses)
                    6. Eliminate competitive calls to action
                    7. Explain how they will benefit (not how you will benefit)
                    8. Explain exactly what will happen
                    9. Explain why they need to do this now
                    10. Remove the Fear. Try to avoid words that might seem much of a commitment. BUY NOW vs Add to Cart. Maybe we should be asking people "Get the back catalog" instead of "Subscribe." Explain how they can cancel at any time, and it is free.
                    11. Place it in two places on your post. One near the top of the page ("above the fold" and once near the bottom).
                    
                    

                    In the end, a call to action should convey value, and provide a sense of urgency.

                    Because of my Podcast - Jeff Steinman

                    Jeff explains that how launching a podcast boosted his book sales, brought him more traffic, and boosted his interview skills. You can find Jeff at howtoquitworking.com

                    How To Quit Working: A Simple Plan to Leave Your Job for a Life of Freedom

                    Podbean's CrowdFunding Platform

                    For the sake of this argument, let's say that the bar is set at Patreon.com They are the first at an ongoing crowdfunding platform. Others have come and gone, and they are still here. Podbean (a media host) recently launched the ability to have crowdfunding. I went over to check it out. Here is what I found.

                    1. It's easy to setup, but in some cases impossible to edit.
                    2. With Patreon it's super easy to create a post (think of it like a Facebook Wall) and choose who can and can't see that post. I don't see that option. With Podbean you have a comments section that doesn't seem as robust.
                    
                    

                    When I watched their video on this, I did notice that their example video shows that all the rewards are outside of the crowdfunding area (bonus content, newsletters). I have an email into Podbean for clarification. I noticed on their demo video someone asked the same question (how do I create a piece of content for a certain support level) and it hasn't been answered.

                    Podbean does have some badges (something I wish Patreon would provide) that make it super easy to copy and paste and have them appear on your website. the one feature that Patreon has that Podbean didn't event mention is scarcity. In other words you could setup a reward amount and say "Only 5 people can be VIPs." I didn't see this as an option in Podbean.

                    One of the issues I had with Podbean is not their fault. I was using Feedburner for the Podcast I setup. Feedburner (shocking) had a problem with the artwork. Podbean pulled this artwork (or lack thereof) and uses that in your listing. There is no place in Podbean to change that. With a properly working feed, I wouldn't have had this issues, but I had no way to edit it. After I updated the feed, the image never appeared.

                    Like Most Humans - I Stuck With the Comfortable

                    I have a Patreon account for the School of Podcasting and another one for the Ask the Podcast Coach show and I understand the Patreon platform. They also seem to be working on adding more features to the Patreon platform.

                    Create Clammrs From Just About Anywhere

                    Clammr has been adding features. Clammr is a tool that allows you to share up to 18 seconds of audio and put it on twitter, Facebook, email, etc. Anyone can listen to the whole episode, or like it and receive the details of the audio clip via email. Recently they announced the ability to integrate with the PowerPress player (something I will report on in the future), but they also had it easy to create clammrs by sharing an audio clip and sending it to clammr. In my testing it seemed to work a bit more reliably if Clammr was open already and then you went to your podcast player and clicked the share button.

                    From there you will record your audio and be taken to the clammr app where you can fine tune it before publishing it to your clammr account. For more information go to clamrr.com and to here what people are clammring, check out the clammrcast top 20 countdown.

                    Ready To Start Your Own Podcast?

                     

                    ]]>3c2b80a7fffa0aef4fffa82bb043600cMon, 30 Nov 2015 05:00:00 -040040:12falsefull490490Don't Keep Your Audience WaitingI've been talking about your podcast from TOP to Bottom over the last couple of weeks. Sometimes its good to go back to the basics and reexamine our shows. The first week we talked about Headlines (the title of your show notes), and I provided a free guide with tools to help you write better Blog Post Titles. Last week we talk about the importance of your introduction and how it is your first impression. This week we are talking about the meat and potatoes of the meal. Your content.
                    Because of my Podcast Jason Marshall

                    Jason from the We Don't have Cookies podcast  tells a story that has lead him to get a job on radio, as well as appearances on television all because of his podcast.

                    Be Part of Our Last episode of the Year

                    Answer the question, "My favorite podcast is.." and explain WHY leave your answers HERE (deadline 11/31)

                    I've mentioned the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] available at Amazon which is a great book for shaping your content. I've always said that before you press record you should ask yourself, "What about this topic is going impact my listener enough to want them to tell a friend?" If you can't answer that, then maybe you shouldn't press record.

                    Here are some questions to ask yourself:

                    Do I have a crystal clear objective about this topic. How do you get crystal clear about a subject? By knowing your audience and what they need or want to hear.

                    What points do I need to make to obtain my objective?

                    Don't worry about what they think about YOU, instead think about THEM.

                    Get To the Point

                    With Thanksgiving right around the corner when I to my Grandmother's house it was great seeing all my cousins, it was great smelling all the food, it was great eating crackers or whatever little munchies they had out out, but for the most part I wanted the TURKEY and HOME MADE MASHED POTATOES. It was the same at Christmas. My Grandfather would read the Christmas story before we opened presents (a tradition my brother continues). Then we had to sing some Carols. THEN, FINALLY we would open presents.

                    Your audience is here for the presents.

                    What do you have a hard time waiting for?

                    ]]>I've been talking about your podcast from TOP to Bottom over the last couple of weeks. Sometimes its good to go back to the basics and reexamine our shows. The first week we talked about Headlines (the title of your show notes), and I provided a free guide with tools to help you write better Blog Post Titles. Last week we talk about the importance of your introduction and how it is your first impression. This week we are talking about the meat and potatoes of the meal. Your content.
                    Because of my Podcast Jason Marshall

                    Jason from the We Don't have Cookies podcast  tells a story that has lead him to get a job on radio, as well as appearances on television all because of his podcast.

                    Be Part of Our Last episode of the Year

                    Answer the question, "My favorite podcast is.." and explain WHY leave your answers HERE (deadline 11/31)

                    I've mentioned the book [easyazon_link identifier="0849921902" locale="US" tag="sop2-20"]Secrets of Dynamic Communications: Prepare with Focus, Deliver with Clarity, Speak with Power[/easyazon_link] available at Amazon which is a great book for shaping your content. I've always said that before you press record you should ask yourself, "What about this topic is going impact my listener enough to want them to tell a friend?" If you can't answer that, then maybe you shouldn't press record.

                    Here are some questions to ask yourself:

                    Do I have a crystal clear objective about this topic. How do you get crystal clear about a subject? By knowing your audience and what they need or want to hear.

                    What points do I need to make to obtain my objective?

                    Don't worry about what they think about YOU, instead think about THEM.

                    Get To the Point

                    With Thanksgiving right around the corner when I to my Grandmother's house it was great seeing all my cousins, it was great smelling all the food, it was great eating crackers or whatever little munchies they had out out, but for the most part I wanted the TURKEY and HOME MADE MASHED POTATOES. It was the same at Christmas. My Grandfather would read the Christmas story before we opened presents (a tradition my brother continues). Then we had to sing some Carols. THEN, FINALLY we would open presents.

                    Your audience is here for the presents.

                    What do you have a hard time waiting for?

                    ]]>aec96e68cb17793d1c525b8715a78796Mon, 23 Nov 2015 05:00:00 -040022:42falsefull489489Does Your Intro Make them Push STOP?Last week we talked about the importance of headlines, and I gave you a free resource to help you make better headlines. Now in Podcasting you headline is your "Show Notes" title. You can get the free resources at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines
                    Your Podcast Introduction

                    People are busy. We hear activity like a badge of honor. How are you ding Bob? BUSY! I'm backed up. I don't get to take lunch. I'M SWAMPED! So with this in mind it is my opinion that your intro should get to the point quickly and answer the following questions:

                    Who am I listening to?

                    What is this?

                    Why do I need to listen to this now?

                    Get to the Punch Line?
                    Put Yourself in the Shoes Of Your Listener

                    When they do a search in Google, or iTunes, etc they see your information and they are asking:

                    1. Should I listen to this podcast.
                    2. Should I keep listening to this podcast?
                    3. Will I come back to listen to this podcast
                    
                    

                    Today I play intros from the following Shows

                    The Podcast Report

                    Podcast Producer

                    5 Minutes in Church History

                    317 Podcast

                    Your Intro is Important

                    Mark Ramsey said at the new Media Expo that unlike radio, every podcast listener starts at the beginning. Make yours count, hit them hard, hit them quick, and let them know what they are going to get.

                    [clickToTweet tweet="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP" quote="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP"]

                    Get Exposure For Your Show

                    26:45 November is almost over. Each year I ask you to answer one question. What is your favorite podcast and WHY. Be sure to tell us where we can find your podcast (and what it's about). I'm really interested to see WHY. You can record/upload your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite. There may be a prize involved......

                    Andrew Hellmich Refused to Podcast For Free - And it's Paying Off

                    27:48 Andrew Hellmich is from the Photo Bizz Exposed podcast (http://photobizx.com/) and does a podcast about boosting your wedding Photography business. Andrew launched a premium version of his show - when he launched. He knew the podcast would take time away from his business, and with a family to feed he couldn't podcast for free. The other thing Andrew does well, is provide value. He knows people will not pay for horrible content.

                    In this interview you will hear:

                    Andrew has hundreds of people paying for his membership

                    He didn't start in the direction where he landed. He didn't wait to get it perfect. He launched and tweaked.

                    His current strategy is to have 5 episodes available for free, and if you want access to the back catalog you need to pay Andrew $20 a month.

                    Passive income is not always passive.

                    Andrew has been podcasting for three years (this didn't happen overnight)

                    You will hear how Andrew is not afraid to try new things.

                    Andrew loves using Hindenburg Software to edit his podcast.

                    Do You Need a Good Podcast Introduction?

                    If you ever wonder where I got the female singers, or who did the intro to Andrew's show check out Music Radio Creative you get the top voices from all over the world, and years of experience. They can help you shape your message (for those who are marketing challenged). It's a great service.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the school of podcasting and avoid the common pitfalls of podcasting. You will learn

                    • How to shape your topic
                    • What is the best equipment to choose (Without blowing a fortune)
                    • How to build your website (or resources to have someone else do it)
                    • How to record your show and get it into directories like Apple iTunes
                    • How to promote your show and get exposure
                    
                    

                    You also get access to our private facebook group, and monthly  "office hour" sessions where you can get free consulting.

                    There is a 30 day money back guarantee. If you join and are not satisfied, I will refund your money.

                    ]]>Last week we talked about the importance of headlines, and I gave you a free resource to help you make better headlines. Now in Podcasting you headline is your "Show Notes" title. You can get the free resources at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/headlines
                    Your Podcast Introduction

                    People are busy. We hear activity like a badge of honor. How are you ding Bob? BUSY! I'm backed up. I don't get to take lunch. I'M SWAMPED! So with this in mind it is my opinion that your intro should get to the point quickly and answer the following questions:

                    Who am I listening to?

                    What is this?

                    Why do I need to listen to this now?

                    Get to the Punch Line?
                    Put Yourself in the Shoes Of Your Listener

                    When they do a search in Google, or iTunes, etc they see your information and they are asking:

                    1. Should I listen to this podcast.
                    2. Should I keep listening to this podcast?
                    3. Will I come back to listen to this podcast
                    
                    

                    Today I play intros from the following Shows

                    The Podcast Report

                    Podcast Producer

                    5 Minutes in Church History

                    317 Podcast

                    Your Intro is Important

                    Mark Ramsey said at the new Media Expo that unlike radio, every podcast listener starts at the beginning. Make yours count, hit them hard, hit them quick, and let them know what they are going to get.

                    [clickToTweet tweet="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP" quote="Does your podcast intro move people to push STOP"]

                    Get Exposure For Your Show

                    26:45 November is almost over. Each year I ask you to answer one question. What is your favorite podcast and WHY. Be sure to tell us where we can find your podcast (and what it's about). I'm really interested to see WHY. You can record/upload your answer at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite. There may be a prize involved......

                    Andrew Hellmich Refused to Podcast For Free - And it's Paying Off

                    27:48 Andrew Hellmich is from the Photo Bizz Exposed podcast (http://photobizx.com/) and does a podcast about boosting your wedding Photography business. Andrew launched a premium version of his show - when he launched. He knew the podcast would take time away from his business, and with a family to feed he couldn't podcast for free. The other thing Andrew does well, is provide value. He knows people will not pay for horrible content.

                    In this interview you will hear:

                    Andrew has hundreds of people paying for his membership

                    He didn't start in the direction where he landed. He didn't wait to get it perfect. He launched and tweaked.

                    His current strategy is to have 5 episodes available for free, and if you want access to the back catalog you need to pay Andrew $20 a month.

                    Passive income is not always passive.

                    Andrew has been podcasting for three years (this didn't happen overnight)

                    You will hear how Andrew is not afraid to try new things.

                    Andrew loves using Hindenburg Software to edit his podcast.

                    Do You Need a Good Podcast Introduction?

                    If you ever wonder where I got the female singers, or who did the intro to Andrew's show check out Music Radio Creative you get the top voices from all over the world, and years of experience. They can help you shape your message (for those who are marketing challenged). It's a great service.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the school of podcasting and avoid the common pitfalls of podcasting. You will learn

                    • How to shape your topic
                    • What is the best equipment to choose (Without blowing a fortune)
                    • How to build your website (or resources to have someone else do it)
                    • How to record your show and get it into directories like Apple iTunes
                    • How to promote your show and get exposure
                    
                    

                    You also get access to our private facebook group, and monthly  "office hour" sessions where you can get free consulting.

                    There is a 30 day money back guarantee. If you join and are not satisfied, I will refund your money.

                    ]]>3f8115ba8d259a4f4fc1f6fa4d34aa4aMon, 16 Nov 2015 05:00:00 -040001:01:54falsefull488488How to Create Better Episode Titles Quickly and EasilyThis is an abbreviated list of headline samples from the book "Writing Riches" by one of my favorite authors and podcaster's Ray Edwards. If you buy his book, buy some paper and pencil along with it.

                    This topic starts at 6:35

                    1. The How To Headline (how to write headlines that will bring you more downloads)
                    2. The Testimonial headline (I wish I had found Dave Jackson sooner - I could've save a lot of money)
                    3. The Give Me headline (Give me 10 days, and I'll get your podcast into iTunes)
                    4. The Reason Why Headline (The to 3 reasons people fail at launching a podcast - and how to over come them)
                    5. The Probing Question Headline (Do you know the five things that cause people to unsubscribe podcasts?)
                    6. The Dominant Emotion (Are you tired of putting out an episode and getting ZERO feedback?)
                    7. The Command headline (Be the influencer that leads change in the world)
                    8. The If-Then Headline (If you can upload a picture on Faceboook, then you can upload a media file your hosting).
                    9. The Warning Headline (Is Soundcloud Going Out of Business?)
                    
                    

                    A headline grabs attention, draws listeners to press play, communicates the big idea, establishes credibility and joins the conversion that is already happening in your audience's head.

                    Common Mistakes That Podcaster's Make With Episode Titles

                    They put the phrase "Episode 123" at the BEGINNING of the headline. 

                    Nobody cares if you're on episode 6, 60, 600, or 6000. What they care about is how you are going to make them laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain them.

                    If you MUST do this (I understand it makes it easy to search on your website) put it at the end. You can see in the image to the left that you don't get to see what the title is because half of it is EPISODE XXX.

                    The worst offender of this is (unfortunately) the web based version of iTunes. It gives you very little room for your headline.

                    They Put Very Little Thought Into the Podcast Episode Title

                    This is the SECOND/THIRD thing people see when they find your listing (the first being your show artwork/Title of the Show). I know I am super guilty of waiting till I'd done recording the episode, editing, tagging it, listening to it "one more time," and writing the blog post. You're tired, you're excited (maybe), but you are "this close" to being done and you just "throw anything in there" just so you can press publish.

                    If you think about it, from the 1890 to the 1940's they had paperboys who would shout out the headlines to entice people to purchase a paper and get the rest of the story. They weren't scream edition #417!

                    If the podcast title is bad, the podcast will not be heard. Unheard audio impacts no one. (a twist on a John Caples quote).

                    How To Write Good Podcast Episode Titles

                    Typically Headlines do one of the following:

                    • Making a promise.
                    • Drawing a picture.
                    • Stating a fact.
                    • Asking a question.
                    
                    

                    Try these steps

                    1. Start with your audience. Cosmopolitan magazine knows their audience.
                    2. Write your show notes first. Then write the title. Prime the pump that is your brain.
                    3. Write several headlines. If you want to read them out loud.
                    4. Pick the most important benefit and include that benefit in the headlines.
                    5. Include the product or problem, or guest in the headlines
                    6. Often email program like Mail Chimp have A/B testing tools so use two headlines and see which one gets more clicks.
                    
                    Automate the Process

                    There are tools such as Headlinr and Freshtitle ($37) are two tools where you enter a subject and they spit out numerous examples of potential headlines/Episode titles. Freshtitle comes with Title Analyzer that rates your headlines and critiques this for you. The Yoast SEO plugin does something similar (and it's free). Headlinr is a browser extension (chrome only), and Fresh Title is software for the Mac or PC. If you're interested in knowing more about Headlines, sign up for my headline resource kit that has videos of these software titles as well as free ebooks and more.

                    Free Headline Guide

                    I've created guide to some of the best resources to help you create great headlines. These include free ebooks, Demos of headline automation tools, and some of the best blog posts by Headline experts (I did all the Google for you).

                    Click here to get the guide.

                    Because of My Podcast: Jim Collison is a Microsoft MVP

                    2:30 I host Ask the Podcast Coach every Saturday at 10:30 AM with Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv. It's quite a hoot! We both love to talk  podcasting. Last week Jim shared the story of how he became a Microsoft MVP, and it turns out it's because of his podcast.

                    Do you have something that wouldn't have happened except for your podcast? Share your story and get some added exposure and be heard on this show (I might turn these into a book next year). Contact me.

                    Google Play Discussion Continues

                    This topic begins at 22:50

                    Steve Stewart chimes in on last week's episode about Google play. He is SUPER HAPPY that the #1 search tool is going to promote his show FOR FREE. As for the terms of service, they are there to cover Google's butt in the event someone gets stupid.

                    Libsyn Launches New Plugin

                    Podcast Rewind

                    This topic begins at 30:05

                    Ideas for Podcasting Episode 5

                    Podcastonomics Episode 5

                    Libsyn Launches new Wordpress Plugin

                    32:25

                    If you are someone who has been usingPowerPress for a while, then do NOT switch

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Jin the school of podcasting and if you're not happy any time within the first 30 days, you can cancel your subcription and get a full refund.

                    ]]>This is an abbreviated list of headline samples from the book "Writing Riches" by one of my favorite authors and podcaster's Ray Edwards. If you buy his book, buy some paper and pencil along with it.

                    This topic starts at 6:35

                    1. The How To Headline (how to write headlines that will bring you more downloads)
                    2. The Testimonial headline (I wish I had found Dave Jackson sooner - I could've save a lot of money)
                    3. The Give Me headline (Give me 10 days, and I'll get your podcast into iTunes)
                    4. The Reason Why Headline (The to 3 reasons people fail at launching a podcast - and how to over come them)
                    5. The Probing Question Headline (Do you know the five things that cause people to unsubscribe podcasts?)
                    6. The Dominant Emotion (Are you tired of putting out an episode and getting ZERO feedback?)
                    7. The Command headline (Be the influencer that leads change in the world)
                    8. The If-Then Headline (If you can upload a picture on Faceboook, then you can upload a media file your hosting).
                    9. The Warning Headline (Is Soundcloud Going Out of Business?)
                    
                    

                    A headline grabs attention, draws listeners to press play, communicates the big idea, establishes credibility and joins the conversion that is already happening in your audience's head.

                    Common Mistakes That Podcaster's Make With Episode Titles

                    They put the phrase "Episode 123" at the BEGINNING of the headline. 

                    Nobody cares if you're on episode 6, 60, 600, or 6000. What they care about is how you are going to make them laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertain them.

                    If you MUST do this (I understand it makes it easy to search on your website) put it at the end. You can see in the image to the left that you don't get to see what the title is because half of it is EPISODE XXX.

                    The worst offender of this is (unfortunately) the web based version of iTunes. It gives you very little room for your headline.

                    They Put Very Little Thought Into the Podcast Episode Title

                    This is the SECOND/THIRD thing people see when they find your listing (the first being your show artwork/Title of the Show). I know I am super guilty of waiting till I'd done recording the episode, editing, tagging it, listening to it "one more time," and writing the blog post. You're tired, you're excited (maybe), but you are "this close" to being done and you just "throw anything in there" just so you can press publish.

                    If you think about it, from the 1890 to the 1940's they had paperboys who would shout out the headlines to entice people to purchase a paper and get the rest of the story. They weren't scream edition #417!

                    If the podcast title is bad, the podcast will not be heard. Unheard audio impacts no one. (a twist on a John Caples quote).

                    How To Write Good Podcast Episode Titles

                    Typically Headlines do one of the following:

                    • Making a promise.
                    • Drawing a picture.
                    • Stating a fact.
                    • Asking a question.
                    
                    

                    Try these steps

                    1. Start with your audience. Cosmopolitan magazine knows their audience.
                    2. Write your show notes first. Then write the title. Prime the pump that is your brain.
                    3. Write several headlines. If you want to read them out loud.
                    4. Pick the most important benefit and include that benefit in the headlines.
                    5. Include the product or problem, or guest in the headlines
                    6. Often email program like Mail Chimp have A/B testing tools so use two headlines and see which one gets more clicks.
                    
                    Automate the Process

                    There are tools such as Headlinr and Freshtitle ($37) are two tools where you enter a subject and they spit out numerous examples of potential headlines/Episode titles. Freshtitle comes with Title Analyzer that rates your headlines and critiques this for you. The Yoast SEO plugin does something similar (and it's free). Headlinr is a browser extension (chrome only), and Fresh Title is software for the Mac or PC. If you're interested in knowing more about Headlines, sign up for my headline resource kit that has videos of these software titles as well as free ebooks and more.

                    Free Headline Guide

                    I've created guide to some of the best resources to help you create great headlines. These include free ebooks, Demos of headline automation tools, and some of the best blog posts by Headline experts (I did all the Google for you).

                    Click here to get the guide.

                    Because of My Podcast: Jim Collison is a Microsoft MVP

                    2:30 I host Ask the Podcast Coach every Saturday at 10:30 AM with Jim Collison from theaverageguy.tv. It's quite a hoot! We both love to talk  podcasting. Last week Jim shared the story of how he became a Microsoft MVP, and it turns out it's because of his podcast.

                    Do you have something that wouldn't have happened except for your podcast? Share your story and get some added exposure and be heard on this show (I might turn these into a book next year). Contact me.

                    Google Play Discussion Continues

                    This topic begins at 22:50

                    Steve Stewart chimes in on last week's episode about Google play. He is SUPER HAPPY that the #1 search tool is going to promote his show FOR FREE. As for the terms of service, they are there to cover Google's butt in the event someone gets stupid.

                    Libsyn Launches New Plugin

                    Podcast Rewind

                    This topic begins at 30:05

                    Ideas for Podcasting Episode 5

                    Podcastonomics Episode 5

                    Libsyn Launches new Wordpress Plugin

                    32:25

                    If you are someone who has been usingPowerPress for a while, then do NOT switch

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Jin the school of podcasting and if you're not happy any time within the first 30 days, you can cancel your subcription and get a full refund.

                    ]]>790f467d2ff137b3678ff9e7b062e6cbMon, 09 Nov 2015 05:00:00 -040045:57falsefull487487Patreon is Paying $3.5 Million a Month To CreatorsAny time my podcast can get in front of more people I'm happy. From what I've heard on the Feed Podcast where a Google Rep was interviewed here is what is what we think is going to happen. 

                    Google will pull an episode and host it on their servers (but they won't be a media host) The reason for this is they have control and reliability (come some people do stupid things like put their files on a website host instead of a media host).

                    They reserve the right to put ads after your show, and you will get nothing an like it.

                    There will be a directory, you will be able to direct people to a location

                    There is no set date besides "as soon as possible"

                    It is just in the USA for starting.

                    There are specific Google tags (just like iTunes Tags), but you can submit a feed and it will use the iTunes tags.

                    There will be stats.

                    They are not splitting your file into bits.

                    They hope to feature your show when people search for it. They want to give you what you want - when you want it. This is probably why they paid $35 million for Songza (a company that generated custom playlists) back in 2014.

                    Their artwork spec is from small to HUGE, so for now use your 1400X 1400 artwork that you use for iTunes.

                    You can add your podcast at http://g.co/podcastprotal

                    Here are the Terms of Service for Google Play

                    Check out No Agenda Show for more in depth Media Analysis

                    So How Do I Feel About Google Coming Into Podcasting?

                    Anytime my podcast can get in front of more people, I'm very happy.

                    As I've been online for a while, I've seen Google products come and go (Remember Google Buzz?). So while I'm excited, there is nothing for me to hold, touch, smell, and critique. Am I upset that they are going to host my files? No.

                    Do I wish they would just pass through my files from Libsyn? Yes, but I understand why they are not. We all have our fingers crossed that they use better encoding that Stitcher (which makes you sound barely listenable).

                    Am I upset that an advertising company is going to play ads after my show and I get none of that? No. (and I'm not surprised). As long as I can say what I want in my show and use it to direct people back to www.schoolofpodcasting.com I'm fine. Even Google has to pay the bills.

                    So at this point, I'm "Hooray! - um, I think..."

                    Terms of Service For Other Hosting Platforms

                    Blubrry (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month )Content Producers agree that the content in you shows are free from speech that advocates violence or speech that promotes hate. The Company reserves the right to immediately remove any media content from its Websites that in its sole discretion is deemed to violate the restrictions of this paragraph.

                    Libsyn.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month)

                    MonetizationAny attempt to directly monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn without written approval from Libsyn is prohibited. If you choose to monetize, Your Content, you agree to utilize Libsyn Service to enable monetization including but not limited to in-content advertising, iPhone applications or sale of Your Content which may include additional requirements for revenue sharing or fees for use depending on the Service.. To request permission to monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn, please email contact@libsyn.com

                    Spreaker (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    In connection with your User Submissions, you further agree that you will not: (i) publish misrepresentations that could damage Spreaker or any third party; (ii) submit material that is unlawful, defamatory, libellous, slanderous, threatening, pornographic, obscene, vulgar, harassing, harmful, hateful, abusive, racially or ethnically offensive or is otherwise inappropriate; (iii) post advertisements or solicitations of business; (v) impersonate another person or entity or falsely state or otherwise misrepresent your affiliation with a person or entity; or (v) post User Submissions that would be harmful to minors in any manner.

                    In any case of violation of any of the above user submission rules and requirements or as required by law or regulation, Spreaker reserves the right to take court action and/or report users to the relevant authorities, for instance but not limited to when a user submission becomes subject of a copyright infringement note.

                    Podbean (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    Podbean service makes it possible to post audios, videos, photos hosted on Podbean.com to outside websites. This use is accepted. However, pages on other websites which embed audios, videos, photos that hosted on podbean.com must provide a link back to Podbean.com from each embeded content to its Post page on Podbean.com. Free Account is intended for personal use ONLY. Professional or corporate users please use one of our paid services.

                    99% of the time the terms are there for the provider to cover their rear end. 

                    Patreon Best Practices

                    22:01 Today we are joined by Taryn Arnold the community happiness representative of Patreon.com to take another look at Patreon ( spoke about Patreon in March of 2014 on Episode 399). They are "THE" platform when it comes to reoccurring crowd funding. When Joyride went out of business they directed their customer to Patreon.

                    Patreon is like a virtual tip jar for your audience to support you. Unlike Paypal (which can have issues when your listener's credit card changes or gets updated, and also may not notify you when a donation happens).

                    Patreon is working to add discovery to their already vast set of tools.

                    Patreon is a community building tool - not just a paywall. People who are succeeding at Patreon are treating it as a community tool to interact with their audience (make it two way - not just you putting stuff behind a pay wall).

                    $3.5 Million is being processed a month to creators.

                    There are roughly 25,000 active creators on Patreon.com.

                    Let me do the math for you 3,500,000 / 25,000 - $140 per active user (roughly...)

                    Be sure to add a link to your Patreon account in you email template so you never forget to mention it.

                    Most people are doing a monthly setup (instead of a per post item). If you are doing items less frequently, it may be better to set up your account as a "per post."

                    39:52 Some people like are putting the content they give away for free in Patreon. This makes a singular place for your community to find your content and interact with you.  Pete Hollans makes 7,767.05 per video

                    It costs zero to start using Patreon.com they take somewhere between 4% - 6%

                    The $5 and $10 pledges are used the most (the average is $7).

                    You might want to make a few posts that anyone can see so that people who are browsing your items can get a free sample of your content.

                    [clickToTweet tweet="Patreon is paying 3.5 million a month to creators" quote="Tweet This: Patreon is paying 3.5 million a month to creators"]

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    I am accepting submissions for my annual "My Favorite Podcast Is" episode. This is where you can get extra exposure for your show. Here is what you do:

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite (you can upload a recording, you can record your message using the Speakpipe button, or call the toll free number).

                    Let me know the name of your show, where we can find it, and what it's about. Then let me know what your favorite podcast is AND WHY. If you know their website that would be awesome as well. This will be used in the last episode of the year, and turned into a book on Amazon (so more exposure).

                    Castermind Is Now Accepting Applications

                    If you want some personalized podcast coaching, with the benefit of a mastermind/accountability group, submit an application to part of my Castermind podcast group.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting risk free for 30 days. If you're not 100% satisfied I will refund your money - no questions asked. Prices will be increasing in 2016.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Podcaster's Studio & Podcaster's Roundtable

                    No Agenda Show

                    Congressional Dish

                    ]]>Any time my podcast can get in front of more people I'm happy. From what I've heard on the Feed Podcast where a Google Rep was interviewed here is what is what we think is going to happen. 

                    Google will pull an episode and host it on their servers (but they won't be a media host) The reason for this is they have control and reliability (come some people do stupid things like put their files on a website host instead of a media host).

                    They reserve the right to put ads after your show, and you will get nothing an like it.

                    There will be a directory, you will be able to direct people to a location

                    There is no set date besides "as soon as possible"

                    It is just in the USA for starting.

                    There are specific Google tags (just like iTunes Tags), but you can submit a feed and it will use the iTunes tags.

                    There will be stats.

                    They are not splitting your file into bits.

                    They hope to feature your show when people search for it. They want to give you what you want - when you want it. This is probably why they paid $35 million for Songza (a company that generated custom playlists) back in 2014.

                    Their artwork spec is from small to HUGE, so for now use your 1400X 1400 artwork that you use for iTunes.

                    You can add your podcast at http://g.co/podcastprotal

                    Here are the Terms of Service for Google Play

                    Check out No Agenda Show for more in depth Media Analysis

                    So How Do I Feel About Google Coming Into Podcasting?

                    Anytime my podcast can get in front of more people, I'm very happy.

                    As I've been online for a while, I've seen Google products come and go (Remember Google Buzz?). So while I'm excited, there is nothing for me to hold, touch, smell, and critique. Am I upset that they are going to host my files? No.

                    Do I wish they would just pass through my files from Libsyn? Yes, but I understand why they are not. We all have our fingers crossed that they use better encoding that Stitcher (which makes you sound barely listenable).

                    Am I upset that an advertising company is going to play ads after my show and I get none of that? No. (and I'm not surprised). As long as I can say what I want in my show and use it to direct people back to www.schoolofpodcasting.com I'm fine. Even Google has to pay the bills.

                    So at this point, I'm "Hooray! - um, I think..."

                    Terms of Service For Other Hosting Platforms

                    Blubrry (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month )Content Producers agree that the content in you shows are free from speech that advocates violence or speech that promotes hate. The Company reserves the right to immediately remove any media content from its Websites that in its sole discretion is deemed to violate the restrictions of this paragraph.

                    Libsyn.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month)

                    MonetizationAny attempt to directly monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn without written approval from Libsyn is prohibited. If you choose to monetize, Your Content, you agree to utilize Libsyn Service to enable monetization including but not limited to in-content advertising, iPhone applications or sale of Your Content which may include additional requirements for revenue sharing or fees for use depending on the Service.. To request permission to monetize Your Content via third-party ad networks or other outside business agreements at the expense of Libsyn, please email contact@libsyn.com

                    Spreaker (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    In connection with your User Submissions, you further agree that you will not: (i) publish misrepresentations that could damage Spreaker or any third party; (ii) submit material that is unlawful, defamatory, libellous, slanderous, threatening, pornographic, obscene, vulgar, harassing, harmful, hateful, abusive, racially or ethnically offensive or is otherwise inappropriate; (iii) post advertisements or solicitations of business; (v) impersonate another person or entity or falsely state or otherwise misrepresent your affiliation with a person or entity; or (v) post User Submissions that would be harmful to minors in any manner.

                    In any case of violation of any of the above user submission rules and requirements or as required by law or regulation, Spreaker reserves the right to take court action and/or report users to the relevant authorities, for instance but not limited to when a user submission becomes subject of a copyright infringement note.

                    Podbean (use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month)

                    Podbean service makes it possible to post audios, videos, photos hosted on Podbean.com to outside websites. This use is accepted. However, pages on other websites which embed audios, videos, photos that hosted on podbean.com must provide a link back to Podbean.com from each embeded content to its Post page on Podbean.com. Free Account is intended for personal use ONLY. Professional or corporate users please use one of our paid services.

                    99% of the time the terms are there for the provider to cover their rear end. 

                    Patreon Best Practices

                    22:01 Today we are joined by Taryn Arnold the community happiness representative of Patreon.com to take another look at Patreon ( spoke about Patreon in March of 2014 on Episode 399). They are "THE" platform when it comes to reoccurring crowd funding. When Joyride went out of business they directed their customer to Patreon.

                    Patreon is like a virtual tip jar for your audience to support you. Unlike Paypal (which can have issues when your listener's credit card changes or gets updated, and also may not notify you when a donation happens).

                    Patreon is working to add discovery to their already vast set of tools.

                    Patreon is a community building tool - not just a paywall. People who are succeeding at Patreon are treating it as a community tool to interact with their audience (make it two way - not just you putting stuff behind a pay wall).

                    $3.5 Million is being processed a month to creators.

                    There are roughly 25,000 active creators on Patreon.com.

                    Let me do the math for you 3,500,000 / 25,000 - $140 per active user (roughly...)

                    Be sure to add a link to your Patreon account in you email template so you never forget to mention it.

                    Most people are doing a monthly setup (instead of a per post item). If you are doing items less frequently, it may be better to set up your account as a "per post."

                    39:52 Some people like are putting the content they give away for free in Patreon. This makes a singular place for your community to find your content and interact with you.  Pete Hollans makes 7,767.05 per video

                    It costs zero to start using Patreon.com they take somewhere between 4% - 6%

                    The $5 and $10 pledges are used the most (the average is $7).

                    You might want to make a few posts that anyone can see so that people who are browsing your items can get a free sample of your content.

                    [clickToTweet tweet="Patreon is paying 3.5 million a month to creators" quote="Tweet This: Patreon is paying 3.5 million a month to creators"]

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    I am accepting submissions for my annual "My Favorite Podcast Is" episode. This is where you can get extra exposure for your show. Here is what you do:

                    Go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite (you can upload a recording, you can record your message using the Speakpipe button, or call the toll free number).

                    Let me know the name of your show, where we can find it, and what it's about. Then let me know what your favorite podcast is AND WHY. If you know their website that would be awesome as well. This will be used in the last episode of the year, and turned into a book on Amazon (so more exposure).

                    Castermind Is Now Accepting Applications

                    If you want some personalized podcast coaching, with the benefit of a mastermind/accountability group, submit an application to part of my Castermind podcast group.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting risk free for 30 days. If you're not 100% satisfied I will refund your money - no questions asked. Prices will be increasing in 2016.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Podcaster's Studio & Podcaster's Roundtable

                    No Agenda Show

                    Congressional Dish

                    ]]>ab2b1fd5f85ba58ff295e3e49ec3f651Mon, 02 Nov 2015 05:00:00 -040001:05:00falsefull486486How to Podcast Step 1: Your Podcast IdeaI'm going to be going over podcasting in the next few episodes. So many people think it starts with a microphone (which is a logical start), but it doesn't. It starts with an idea. It might be an idea that is fueled by a need. That need may be to help people. It may be to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, or inspire them. You want to connect with impact. This is where your podcast starts. It starts with an idea.
                    Taking Your Podcast Inventory

                    This topics starts at 14:21

                    • What do you like?
                    • What are you good at?
                    • What do other people say you're good at?
                    • What do you not like?
                    
                    

                    According to the Book Secrets of Dynamic Communication you are either intending to persuade or enable people.

                    Persuading People

                    Everyone _______ should _____  (i.e. Every coach should podcast).

                    Enabling People

                    Every ____ can ______. (i.e. very coach can podcast).

                    Even sports shows are insinuating that everyone can/should cheer for their team. A comedy show might be getting you to think about something in a different (funny) way.

                    Why Would People Listen to Me?

                    This is a common response. After all it's easy to focus on ourselves. We are our favorite subject after all (right?). So instead of focusing on what people will think about you, think about what you are giving them? It's usually not scary to give someone a gift they know they will love, so why should delivering content that will positively impact them be scary.

                    Communication is about the person (singular) who you will be helping, persuading, instructing, entertaining them.

                    So How Do You Know If Your Podcast Will Impact Your Audience?

                    You need to live in your niche. You need to hangout where your audience hangs out. This could be Facebook groups, Google Groups, Linkedin Groups, Meetup.com, etc. You need to go to where they are, and see what they are talking about. You can read books about our subject, and read blogs as well. You can watch movies about your subject. This is one of those "simple but not always easy" kind of things. There are no shortcuts.

                    Once you know who your podcast is for, you know WHAT to talk about.

                    Why Are You Getting Into Podcasting?

                    There are many reasons:

                    1. Be Seen as an Expert
                    2. Reach a Global Audience
                    3. Find Like Minded People
                    4. Boost Sales of Your Own Products
                    5. Boost speaking confidence
                    6. Engage Your Community
                    7. Make additional income
                    8. Fun with friends and family.
                    
                    

                    The WHY is the rudder of your podcast boat. It helps direct the content in the direction that will help you achieve your goal. It your message and your goal are out of sync then you will find it harder to achieve success.

                    The Main Hurdles of Podcasting

                    There are many things that stop people from podcasting. Here are what are feel are the top 10 excuses.

                    1. Nobody will listen to me
                    2. I hate my voice
                    3. I just need "one more thing"
                    4. People might say negative things
                    5. I'm not a geek
                    6. I don't have time
                    
                    

                    We all know that speaking in public is the #1 fear among humans. This means at a funeral, you'd rather be the person in the casket then the person delivering the eulogy.

                    A Podcast Is A Recipe

                    My wife makes a kick butt spaghetti sauce. To watch her make it, one might think she has no idea what she is doing. She doesn't measure anything. She has some core ingredients, but at some point she starts adding a little of this, and a little of that. She samples the sauce, and tweaks some more. In the end, it's awesome. It took her years to perfect it.

                    Every now and then, we will be eating at the table and she will announce that it still needs _____. To her it's missing something. Meanwhile the rest of us are on our second helping as we loosen the buttons on our pants.

                    When you aim for perfection and miss, you land on really, really good.

                    If you never serve your sauce until it is perfect, people will starve. In a world of Kardashians and Celebrity Wife Swapping, MY GOD ARE WE STARVING FOR GOOD CONTENT.

                    Don't Fuel The Stupidity Fire

                    Podcasting starts with an idea - not a microphone. If you've not figured out WHAT you are going to podcast about and take the step to purchase equipment, you are fueling the stupidity fire. Why? Because it becomes a reminder that you still haven't launched. It puts pressure on you. Now that you've spent money, you NEED to podcast so you don't look stupid purchasing a microphone.

                    Why you don't want to feed the stupidity fire is you will have enough voices in your head that fuel your lack of self-confidence. This is natural. Unless you have a background in talking in public, you're not going to be confident in your decision to start a podcast - AND THAT'S OK.

                    With this in mind, don't purchase your Podcast Equipment just yet.

                    Write Down Three Ideas For Your Podcast Episodes

                    Do a quick exercise and write down what your first three episodes will be about. Don't worry about the length, format, artwork, etc. What will you talk about. You don't need to script it out, we are just brainstorming. What would your audience like to hear?

                    When you get that done, do it again. Turn off the TV, NetFlix, YouTube and brainstorm potential ideas for your show.

                    Once you get that done. You have planted the seed of a podcast. Choosing a name, a website, etc will be in the future, but you have identified that you have something to say, and can create content. Don't over-think this. You can start a podcast.

                    Other Topics in This Episode

                    2:23 Learn to Subscribe - Website to send people to learn how to subscribe to your podcast. You can copy the code and put the tutorial on your website. www.learntopodcast.com

                    3:55 Soundcloud is breaking their customer's podcasts. Thanks to Mike Dell of Podcast Help Desk for chiming in on the Ask the Podcast Coach show. Want to support the show? Become and Awesome Supporter 

                    9:14 New Media Expo apologies for the lack of Virtual Ticket.

                    36:26 Cleanfeed.net Web based recorder for Google Chrome ( I will be testing this in the future ). I will also go back and look at Squarespace to see what's been updated.. Podbean has crowdfunding. I will be checking this out. (get a free month at Podbean.com using the coupon code sopfree).

                    40:23 Castermind.com my podcast mastermind group is now accepting applications. If you are looking for an accountability partner, constructive feebdack, then check out castermind.com and fill out an applications (for people who have a podcast). If you are looking for feedback on your show check out the Podcast Review Show

                    43:08 What is your favorite Podcast and WHY? I do this every year. I want you to tell me about your show, and where I can find it. Then I want you to tell me what your favorite podcast is, where I can find it, and WHY. I will transcribe this and put it into a book (so exposure for you), and then play your message on the last show of the year more exposure for you). If you're interested, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite

                    Ready To Start Podcasting? 

                    Start Ricks Free at www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>I'm going to be going over podcasting in the next few episodes. So many people think it starts with a microphone (which is a logical start), but it doesn't. It starts with an idea. It might be an idea that is fueled by a need. That need may be to help people. It may be to make them laugh, cry, think, grown, or inspire them. You want to connect with impact. This is where your podcast starts. It starts with an idea.
                    Taking Your Podcast Inventory

                    This topics starts at 14:21

                    • What do you like?
                    • What are you good at?
                    • What do other people say you're good at?
                    • What do you not like?
                    
                    

                    According to the Book Secrets of Dynamic Communication you are either intending to persuade or enable people.

                    Persuading People

                    Everyone _______ should _____  (i.e. Every coach should podcast).

                    Enabling People

                    Every ____ can ______. (i.e. very coach can podcast).

                    Even sports shows are insinuating that everyone can/should cheer for their team. A comedy show might be getting you to think about something in a different (funny) way.

                    Why Would People Listen to Me?

                    This is a common response. After all it's easy to focus on ourselves. We are our favorite subject after all (right?). So instead of focusing on what people will think about you, think about what you are giving them? It's usually not scary to give someone a gift they know they will love, so why should delivering content that will positively impact them be scary.

                    Communication is about the person (singular) who you will be helping, persuading, instructing, entertaining them.

                    So How Do You Know If Your Podcast Will Impact Your Audience?

                    You need to live in your niche. You need to hangout where your audience hangs out. This could be Facebook groups, Google Groups, Linkedin Groups, Meetup.com, etc. You need to go to where they are, and see what they are talking about. You can read books about our subject, and read blogs as well. You can watch movies about your subject. This is one of those "simple but not always easy" kind of things. There are no shortcuts.

                    Once you know who your podcast is for, you know WHAT to talk about.

                    Why Are You Getting Into Podcasting?

                    There are many reasons:

                    1. Be Seen as an Expert
                    2. Reach a Global Audience
                    3. Find Like Minded People
                    4. Boost Sales of Your Own Products
                    5. Boost speaking confidence
                    6. Engage Your Community
                    7. Make additional income
                    8. Fun with friends and family.
                    
                    

                    The WHY is the rudder of your podcast boat. It helps direct the content in the direction that will help you achieve your goal. It your message and your goal are out of sync then you will find it harder to achieve success.

                    The Main Hurdles of Podcasting

                    There are many things that stop people from podcasting. Here are what are feel are the top 10 excuses.

                    1. Nobody will listen to me
                    2. I hate my voice
                    3. I just need "one more thing"
                    4. People might say negative things
                    5. I'm not a geek
                    6. I don't have time
                    
                    

                    We all know that speaking in public is the #1 fear among humans. This means at a funeral, you'd rather be the person in the casket then the person delivering the eulogy.

                    A Podcast Is A Recipe

                    My wife makes a kick butt spaghetti sauce. To watch her make it, one might think she has no idea what she is doing. She doesn't measure anything. She has some core ingredients, but at some point she starts adding a little of this, and a little of that. She samples the sauce, and tweaks some more. In the end, it's awesome. It took her years to perfect it.

                    Every now and then, we will be eating at the table and she will announce that it still needs _____. To her it's missing something. Meanwhile the rest of us are on our second helping as we loosen the buttons on our pants.

                    When you aim for perfection and miss, you land on really, really good.

                    If you never serve your sauce until it is perfect, people will starve. In a world of Kardashians and Celebrity Wife Swapping, MY GOD ARE WE STARVING FOR GOOD CONTENT.

                    Don't Fuel The Stupidity Fire

                    Podcasting starts with an idea - not a microphone. If you've not figured out WHAT you are going to podcast about and take the step to purchase equipment, you are fueling the stupidity fire. Why? Because it becomes a reminder that you still haven't launched. It puts pressure on you. Now that you've spent money, you NEED to podcast so you don't look stupid purchasing a microphone.

                    Why you don't want to feed the stupidity fire is you will have enough voices in your head that fuel your lack of self-confidence. This is natural. Unless you have a background in talking in public, you're not going to be confident in your decision to start a podcast - AND THAT'S OK.

                    With this in mind, don't purchase your Podcast Equipment just yet.

                    Write Down Three Ideas For Your Podcast Episodes

                    Do a quick exercise and write down what your first three episodes will be about. Don't worry about the length, format, artwork, etc. What will you talk about. You don't need to script it out, we are just brainstorming. What would your audience like to hear?

                    When you get that done, do it again. Turn off the TV, NetFlix, YouTube and brainstorm potential ideas for your show.

                    Once you get that done. You have planted the seed of a podcast. Choosing a name, a website, etc will be in the future, but you have identified that you have something to say, and can create content. Don't over-think this. You can start a podcast.

                    Other Topics in This Episode

                    2:23 Learn to Subscribe - Website to send people to learn how to subscribe to your podcast. You can copy the code and put the tutorial on your website. www.learntopodcast.com

                    3:55 Soundcloud is breaking their customer's podcasts. Thanks to Mike Dell of Podcast Help Desk for chiming in on the Ask the Podcast Coach show. Want to support the show? Become and Awesome Supporter 

                    9:14 New Media Expo apologies for the lack of Virtual Ticket.

                    36:26 Cleanfeed.net Web based recorder for Google Chrome ( I will be testing this in the future ). I will also go back and look at Squarespace to see what's been updated.. Podbean has crowdfunding. I will be checking this out. (get a free month at Podbean.com using the coupon code sopfree).

                    40:23 Castermind.com my podcast mastermind group is now accepting applications. If you are looking for an accountability partner, constructive feebdack, then check out castermind.com and fill out an applications (for people who have a podcast). If you are looking for feedback on your show check out the Podcast Review Show

                    43:08 What is your favorite Podcast and WHY? I do this every year. I want you to tell me about your show, and where I can find it. Then I want you to tell me what your favorite podcast is, where I can find it, and WHY. I will transcribe this and put it into a book (so exposure for you), and then play your message on the last show of the year more exposure for you). If you're interested, go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/favorite

                    Ready To Start Podcasting? 

                    Start Ricks Free at www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>0eae94a9bee6f0eebae798716e4c6104Mon, 26 Oct 2015 04:00:00 -040048:52falsefull485485Four Podcasting Tools ReviewedToday we have a few tools to peak at. One allows you to record your podcast or go live, the other allows you to add your Blab.im sessions to your Wordpress website, Ray Edwards will teach you how to write better pages, and the last one allows you to book guests.
                    Spreaker Studio For Windows and Mac

                    Spreaker has been around a while, and if you are looking to do live streaming this is a great platform. They also are great if you don't want to go live. Their new Spreaker Studio software enables them to move away from the Web Based version they had before that relied on flash technology (which was not compatible with iPads, iPhones, etc). They have had Spreaker Studio apps for a while (also impressive) and now there are desktop versions to go along.

                    Connect More Than One USB Microphone With EASE.

                    This has been a problem that wasn't easy to solve in the past. Now if you have multiple hosts with two USB microphones you can easily connect up to three USB microphones into ONE computer. It's pretty amazing and easy to setup.

                    It also integrates with Skype. This takes adding some additional software, but it takes just a few minutes and it worked like a charm. The best part is there is plenty of documentation so you don't have to guess what to do.

                    You can create playlists (great for people doing podcasts of music), you can fade from one song to the next, there are buttons that you can assign sound effects to (again with plenty of documentation and tutorials).

                    If you are person who does their show live, you also have a chat system right in the software.

                    The only thing you need is a Spreaker account to get it to fly.You can get a free month of spreaker media hosting using the coupon code sopfree.

                    Simple Live Press Blab Automation Tool

                    Right now Blab.im is HOT. This is a FREE platform that makes it super easy to create a live show and have guests pop in and out. It's new and in beta, but it has promise. Hani from Simple Podcast Press (a great plugin for podcasters looking to build their e-mail list) has come up with an easy way to have your videos from Blab.im import into your Wordpress site.

                    You can set it so you have to approve them before they are put on your website or have them automatically posted. You can add buttons again to grow your email list, your followers on blab, and more. The best thing is Hani. He is open to suggestions as the plugin has been out less than a week. My request would be to allow me to replace the blab.im video with a YouTube version later (to build my views on YouTube).For more information go to www.simplelivepress.com Here is a quick video I created showing off how easy it is.

                    Bookly Appointlet Plugin

                    There are tons of services like Appointlet, and Schedule Once for managing bookings. Most of these have a monthly fee (around $10). I discovered the Bookly plugin and it is super powerful. It ties in with you Google Calendar, and you can control every. This includes the color, your services, your staff, you payment options, your hours of availability, holidays and more. Here is a quick video

                    Ray Edward Copyrighting Course

                    I'm a HUGE Ray Edwards fan, and he is giving away a ton of free content on how to write better text on your blog. This could be to grow your business, or to grow your audience. He is a MASTER, and I always walk away feeling smarter after listening to him. To check out Ray's free tutorials go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/rayedwards

                    Launching With Multiple Episodes Does Not Automatically Equal Downloads

                    There are people on the Internet who are saying "If you launch with 8 episodes (or 3, or 5) you get 8 downloads when someone subscribes. This is absolutely false. Once a person is subscribed, they need to go into the Podcasts App (or iTunes or Overcast.fm) and manually download you back catalog. As podcasting gets hotter and hotter, there will be more people jumping into the space that may not giving great advice.

                    Interview With Hanah From PodClear/Blab.im

                    Speaking of Blab, they recently purchased Podclear.com and today we get some behind the scenes insight into Blab from Hanah. For more information go to www.blab.im

                     

                     

                    ]]>Today we have a few tools to peak at. One allows you to record your podcast or go live, the other allows you to add your Blab.im sessions to your Wordpress website, Ray Edwards will teach you how to write better pages, and the last one allows you to book guests.
                    Spreaker Studio For Windows and Mac

                    Spreaker has been around a while, and if you are looking to do live streaming this is a great platform. They also are great if you don't want to go live. Their new Spreaker Studio software enables them to move away from the Web Based version they had before that relied on flash technology (which was not compatible with iPads, iPhones, etc). They have had Spreaker Studio apps for a while (also impressive) and now there are desktop versions to go along.

                    Connect More Than One USB Microphone With EASE.

                    This has been a problem that wasn't easy to solve in the past. Now if you have multiple hosts with two USB microphones you can easily connect up to three USB microphones into ONE computer. It's pretty amazing and easy to setup.

                    It also integrates with Skype. This takes adding some additional software, but it takes just a few minutes and it worked like a charm. The best part is there is plenty of documentation so you don't have to guess what to do.

                    You can create playlists (great for people doing podcasts of music), you can fade from one song to the next, there are buttons that you can assign sound effects to (again with plenty of documentation and tutorials).

                    If you are person who does their show live, you also have a chat system right in the software.

                    The only thing you need is a Spreaker account to get it to fly.You can get a free month of spreaker media hosting using the coupon code sopfree.

                    Simple Live Press Blab Automation Tool

                    Right now Blab.im is HOT. This is a FREE platform that makes it super easy to create a live show and have guests pop in and out. It's new and in beta, but it has promise. Hani from Simple Podcast Press (a great plugin for podcasters looking to build their e-mail list) has come up with an easy way to have your videos from Blab.im import into your Wordpress site.

                    You can set it so you have to approve them before they are put on your website or have them automatically posted. You can add buttons again to grow your email list, your followers on blab, and more. The best thing is Hani. He is open to suggestions as the plugin has been out less than a week. My request would be to allow me to replace the blab.im video with a YouTube version later (to build my views on YouTube).For more information go to www.simplelivepress.com Here is a quick video I created showing off how easy it is.

                    Bookly Appointlet Plugin

                    There are tons of services like Appointlet, and Schedule Once for managing bookings. Most of these have a monthly fee (around $10). I discovered the Bookly plugin and it is super powerful. It ties in with you Google Calendar, and you can control every. This includes the color, your services, your staff, you payment options, your hours of availability, holidays and more. Here is a quick video

                    Ray Edward Copyrighting Course

                    I'm a HUGE Ray Edwards fan, and he is giving away a ton of free content on how to write better text on your blog. This could be to grow your business, or to grow your audience. He is a MASTER, and I always walk away feeling smarter after listening to him. To check out Ray's free tutorials go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/rayedwards

                    Launching With Multiple Episodes Does Not Automatically Equal Downloads

                    There are people on the Internet who are saying "If you launch with 8 episodes (or 3, or 5) you get 8 downloads when someone subscribes. This is absolutely false. Once a person is subscribed, they need to go into the Podcasts App (or iTunes or Overcast.fm) and manually download you back catalog. As podcasting gets hotter and hotter, there will be more people jumping into the space that may not giving great advice.

                    Interview With Hanah From PodClear/Blab.im

                    Speaking of Blab, they recently purchased Podclear.com and today we get some behind the scenes insight into Blab from Hanah. For more information go to www.blab.im

                     

                     

                    ]]>e657e2a10cafe085116bcad6026a2f9aMon, 19 Oct 2015 04:00:00 -040043:17falsefull484484Jason Bryant Turned His Experience Into a Career in PodcastingThe last update from Apple broke their own software, and it left it there for at least a week. Never give your customers a chance to find an (alternative because they will). The creator of Overcast recently made it availabel for free (you can donate to help cover the cost $1 a month). Here are the features I love about it.
                    1. If I share something I can not only share the episode, but send people to the location I am currently at.
                    2. I can listen at surprisingly fast speeds and still understand the content
                    3. A 60 second skip button that when I click on it repeatedly takes giant jumps to skip through bad content.
                    4. It syncs via the internet so you can listen on your iPhone, switch over to your iPad and pick right up where you left off. You can even listen on their website (overcast.fm).
                    5. I can see how much storage each podcast is taking up.
                    
                    

                    In the end I love it, and according to the app I've saved 2 hours using the Smart Speed feature.

                    VoiceStak is SpeakPipe on Steroids Let's You Capture Video Testimonials and Feedback

                    8:20 I love Speakpipe and I've been using it for years. This is a great tool to allow you to capture audio from your audience. You can then use it to build your email list, and you get notified via email when a new message arrives. there is a free plan for Speakpipe, and then plans start at $7/month.

                    VoiceStak is a similar product that does everything Speakpipe does AND it allows people to send VIDEO messages (up to 5 minutes). You can integrate it to send videos straight to YouTube. It also has no limits on the number of messages you can receive a month, or how many you can store. The pricing starts at $17/month, but there is a very interesting option to purchase a lifetime option for $197 (so after 11 months you are basically using it for free). This might be handy if you have a business and you're looking to create a testimonials page. You could easily send people over to your site and using their computer, phone or tablet, they can leave a video message.

                    You can use this on any number of sites, and you can place the widget anywhere you want. For more information check out www.schooolofpodcasting.com/voicestak

                    Jason Bryant Turns His Passion and Expertise Into a Career with Podcasting

                    Jason Bryant has had a goal of working as a sport commentator his whole life. Starting as a teenager in his high school he has slowly been given opportunities and taken advantage of each one. His hard work, dedication, and passion created impactful results. What results? He was asked to participate in other events. As the old saying goes, "Lather, rinse, repeat." After getting caught in the crossfire of media politics again, Jason decided he would strike out on his own. He was listening to Satelite radio and heard one coaches show, and another, and another. He thought to himself, "I could do a show like this for wrestling."

                    Jason contacted me, and hearing of Jason's experience and history, I asked, "What's the worst that could happen?" So Jason went to his school and got his first client. Fast forward and you see Jason doing 12 shows and running at Wrestling network at www.mattalkonline.com Here are some things we learned today.

                    1. Jason knows his audience, so he had an idea of what to charge. However, it took him a year of tweaking to get it to where he is today. He didn't wait until everything was perfect.
                    2. By getting his first client (going to those people you have a relationship with) it became easier to get his second and third.
                    3. Jason who states, "I'm not a salesmen," has been helping potential clients see how they could run sponsors on their show and that money would pay for their podcast (and go right into his pocket). So the "non-salesmen" is helping his clients sell their podcast. So when you say, "I'm not ___" you may have those skills but no know it.
                    4. Jason realized that its better to provide good content less frequently then a daily show that sucks.
                    
                    

                    For more information about Jason check him out at www.mattalkonline.com

                    Are You Thinking of Starting A Podcast?

                    There is so much information out there about podcasting, some of it is great. Some of the information about podcasting is painfully outdated. Don't be one of those people with a drawer full of microphones they never use. Start your podcast in the right direction, with the right tools, and much less stress. Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com today.

                    ]]>The last update from Apple broke their own software, and it left it there for at least a week. Never give your customers a chance to find an (alternative because they will). The creator of Overcast recently made it availabel for free (you can donate to help cover the cost $1 a month). Here are the features I love about it.
                    1. If I share something I can not only share the episode, but send people to the location I am currently at.
                    2. I can listen at surprisingly fast speeds and still understand the content
                    3. A 60 second skip button that when I click on it repeatedly takes giant jumps to skip through bad content.
                    4. It syncs via the internet so you can listen on your iPhone, switch over to your iPad and pick right up where you left off. You can even listen on their website (overcast.fm).
                    5. I can see how much storage each podcast is taking up.
                    
                    

                    In the end I love it, and according to the app I've saved 2 hours using the Smart Speed feature.

                    VoiceStak is SpeakPipe on Steroids Let's You Capture Video Testimonials and Feedback

                    8:20 I love Speakpipe and I've been using it for years. This is a great tool to allow you to capture audio from your audience. You can then use it to build your email list, and you get notified via email when a new message arrives. there is a free plan for Speakpipe, and then plans start at $7/month.

                    VoiceStak is a similar product that does everything Speakpipe does AND it allows people to send VIDEO messages (up to 5 minutes). You can integrate it to send videos straight to YouTube. It also has no limits on the number of messages you can receive a month, or how many you can store. The pricing starts at $17/month, but there is a very interesting option to purchase a lifetime option for $197 (so after 11 months you are basically using it for free). This might be handy if you have a business and you're looking to create a testimonials page. You could easily send people over to your site and using their computer, phone or tablet, they can leave a video message.

                    You can use this on any number of sites, and you can place the widget anywhere you want. For more information check out www.schooolofpodcasting.com/voicestak

                    Jason Bryant Turns His Passion and Expertise Into a Career with Podcasting

                    Jason Bryant has had a goal of working as a sport commentator his whole life. Starting as a teenager in his high school he has slowly been given opportunities and taken advantage of each one. His hard work, dedication, and passion created impactful results. What results? He was asked to participate in other events. As the old saying goes, "Lather, rinse, repeat." After getting caught in the crossfire of media politics again, Jason decided he would strike out on his own. He was listening to Satelite radio and heard one coaches show, and another, and another. He thought to himself, "I could do a show like this for wrestling."

                    Jason contacted me, and hearing of Jason's experience and history, I asked, "What's the worst that could happen?" So Jason went to his school and got his first client. Fast forward and you see Jason doing 12 shows and running at Wrestling network at www.mattalkonline.com Here are some things we learned today.

                    1. Jason knows his audience, so he had an idea of what to charge. However, it took him a year of tweaking to get it to where he is today. He didn't wait until everything was perfect.
                    2. By getting his first client (going to those people you have a relationship with) it became easier to get his second and third.
                    3. Jason who states, "I'm not a salesmen," has been helping potential clients see how they could run sponsors on their show and that money would pay for their podcast (and go right into his pocket). So the "non-salesmen" is helping his clients sell their podcast. So when you say, "I'm not ___" you may have those skills but no know it.
                    4. Jason realized that its better to provide good content less frequently then a daily show that sucks.
                    
                    

                    For more information about Jason check him out at www.mattalkonline.com

                    Are You Thinking of Starting A Podcast?

                    There is so much information out there about podcasting, some of it is great. Some of the information about podcasting is painfully outdated. Don't be one of those people with a drawer full of microphones they never use. Start your podcast in the right direction, with the right tools, and much less stress. Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com today.

                    ]]>9dc46d35e40828d7e4086057f76832aaMon, 12 Oct 2015 04:00:00 -040001:09:46falsefull483483Are You Missing the Low Hanging FruitGot Feedback? Call 888-563-3228 and get your voice on the show.

                    The top two things I heard from clients consists of:

                    1. How do I increase interaction
                    2. How do I grow my audience
                    
                    Increasing Interaction With Your Podcast Audience
                    1. Show up. Do you best to create a consistent schedule. If you show up, then they will make you part of their routine. This isn't mandatory (Dan Carlin is awesome and put out an episode every few months), but I would consider it best practice.
                    2. Have someone who has never been to your website try and contact you. I AM AMAZED and people who do not have a page with a CONTACT link. Don't get cute and make it "buy me a cup of coffee" or "Interact" make the button/menu item say CONTACT. Why? Because it is what people are looking for.
                    3. Let them choose the method of interaction. You can see if you go to my contact page that you can email me, call me (using podcastvoicemail.com ), or use the speakpipe button. You're choice. I've eliminated any reasons that you might have to contact me.
                    4. One way to increase interaction is to ask for some. That's right, ask. If you want to know what they think, make it the last line of your show notes and ask them to leave a comment on your website or you can do what Michael Hyatt does and point them to his Facebook page. He who doesn't ask, doesn't get.
                    
                    How Do I Grow My Podcast Audience?

                    I've spoken about this in numerous episodes: see here, here, here , and here . You need to Make contact that impacts your audience, GO to where they are, make friends, tell them about your podcast). Today I want to throw in something I am again not seeing on websites.

                    1. A play button. If you want people to listen to your show give them a play button. This is one of the reasons I like Appendipity themes. If you want it, you can have a GIANT play button at the top of your page (see www.logicalloss.com for an example). People are not going to get hooked on your content if they can't find it.
                    2. When you create content that impacts your audience, they are going to want to tell their friends. Make sure you have buttons that make it easy to do it RIGHT NOW. There are tons of plugins that can add share buttons (they are built in to the Appendipity themes). One of the best plugins is Social Warfare. This plugin is super functional and SMART. You can specify exactly how things get shared on the Internet. Another feature rich sharing plugin is Monarch from Elegant Themes if you are looking for a free tool, check out sharaholic in the Wordpress directory.
                    
                    International Podcast Day Recap

                    Today we talk with Steve Lee of Modern Life Media and the co-founder of International Podcast day (Dave Lee, Steve's son is the other co-founder). Today we hear from Steve how:

                    We had a much more global audience with people from around the world joining in on a live 30 hour live streaming podcast.

                    Apple was involved and was tweeting out items this year

                    Many communities were "doing their own thing" to promote International Podcast Day.

                    Thanks to Steve and Dave for giving us a central spot to "start the conversation"

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I recently appeared on the PodupPod Podcast

                    I appeared on the Moneycast talking about my different revenue streams and my book More Podcast Money

                    Podcast News

                    According to a new report released by comScore, almost one-third (29%) of adults with smartphones listen to a podcast at least once a month.

                    In the 18-34 year-old range, the figure rises to 41%.

                    The data indicates that 18-34-year-olds are more likely than the average smartphone-owning adult to listen to podcasts on their device at least once a week, 26% vs. 18%.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Got Feedback? Call 888-563-3228 and get your voice on the show.

                    The top two things I heard from clients consists of:

                    1. How do I increase interaction
                    2. How do I grow my audience
                    
                    Increasing Interaction With Your Podcast Audience
                    1. Show up. Do you best to create a consistent schedule. If you show up, then they will make you part of their routine. This isn't mandatory (Dan Carlin is awesome and put out an episode every few months), but I would consider it best practice.
                    2. Have someone who has never been to your website try and contact you. I AM AMAZED and people who do not have a page with a CONTACT link. Don't get cute and make it "buy me a cup of coffee" or "Interact" make the button/menu item say CONTACT. Why? Because it is what people are looking for.
                    3. Let them choose the method of interaction. You can see if you go to my contact page that you can email me, call me (using podcastvoicemail.com ), or use the speakpipe button. You're choice. I've eliminated any reasons that you might have to contact me.
                    4. One way to increase interaction is to ask for some. That's right, ask. If you want to know what they think, make it the last line of your show notes and ask them to leave a comment on your website or you can do what Michael Hyatt does and point them to his Facebook page. He who doesn't ask, doesn't get.
                    
                    How Do I Grow My Podcast Audience?

                    I've spoken about this in numerous episodes: see here, here, here , and here . You need to Make contact that impacts your audience, GO to where they are, make friends, tell them about your podcast). Today I want to throw in something I am again not seeing on websites.

                    1. A play button. If you want people to listen to your show give them a play button. This is one of the reasons I like Appendipity themes. If you want it, you can have a GIANT play button at the top of your page (see www.logicalloss.com for an example). People are not going to get hooked on your content if they can't find it.
                    2. When you create content that impacts your audience, they are going to want to tell their friends. Make sure you have buttons that make it easy to do it RIGHT NOW. There are tons of plugins that can add share buttons (they are built in to the Appendipity themes). One of the best plugins is Social Warfare. This plugin is super functional and SMART. You can specify exactly how things get shared on the Internet. Another feature rich sharing plugin is Monarch from Elegant Themes if you are looking for a free tool, check out sharaholic in the Wordpress directory.
                    
                    International Podcast Day Recap

                    Today we talk with Steve Lee of Modern Life Media and the co-founder of International Podcast day (Dave Lee, Steve's son is the other co-founder). Today we hear from Steve how:

                    We had a much more global audience with people from around the world joining in on a live 30 hour live streaming podcast.

                    Apple was involved and was tweeting out items this year

                    Many communities were "doing their own thing" to promote International Podcast Day.

                    Thanks to Steve and Dave for giving us a central spot to "start the conversation"

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I recently appeared on the PodupPod Podcast

                    I appeared on the Moneycast talking about my different revenue streams and my book More Podcast Money

                    Podcast News

                    According to a new report released by comScore, almost one-third (29%) of adults with smartphones listen to a podcast at least once a month.

                    In the 18-34 year-old range, the figure rises to 41%.

                    The data indicates that 18-34-year-olds are more likely than the average smartphone-owning adult to listen to podcasts on their device at least once a week, 26% vs. 18%.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>69cf3801a398e362cf24d941d333b9bdMon, 05 Oct 2015 04:00:00 -040045:21falsefull48248226 Ingredients to Mix Into your PodcastAre you trying to start a podcast but you can't seem to come up with something that is entirely new? Today we talk about how there are very few items that are entirely new. The iPod was just an upgrade of the Discman. The Discman was just an upgrade of the Walkman. The Walkman was just an upgrade of the 8-track tape. Typical something original is really  a few items that are old that have been combined with something of yourself to make it appear original. 
                    Because of My Podcast I Was Asked to Appear on TV: Wayne Henderson

                    Wayne Henderson deos a podcast about the Green Bay Packers, and he and his co-host were recently asked to appear on a TV show to talk some smack with some fans of the Seattle Seahawks.

                    International Podcast Day September 30th: Get Planning Your Podcast For Free

                    I have a fwe things going on to celebrate International Podcast Day:

                    1. My "Planning Your Podcast" course at Udemy is free from now until 10/31/15. Use the coupon code ipd15
                    2. I will be hosting an hour of live podcasting sharing "because of my podcast" stories and taking your questions
                    
                    Castermind Group Podcast Coaching Now Accepting Applications

                    If you are looking for an accountability partner/mastermind, my "Castermind" is now accepting more podcasters. Here is who this is for and what to expect

                    1. This is for the person who already has a podcast launched (if you need to launch your podcast, Join the School of Podcasting)
                    2. This is a group coaching, so some of it will be answering questions, but it will also have a short lesson to help you build your audience.
                    3. Each Castermind will consist of three people and myself.
                    
                    

                    If you are interested in applying, go to Castermind.com

                    The Courage to Be Creative Keynote Session from Podcast Midatlantic

                    I also appeared on the Podcaster's Rountable where we asked the question, "Why haven't you started podcasting?" This is similar to the talk I gave at Podcast Movement with a bit more emphasis on being creative. There are so many options when it comes to making a podcast. I look at them as ingredients. These are things you can mix together to come up with a unique show.

                    Live/Recorded

                    Short Term / Evergreen

                    Solo / Co-host

                    Mobile / Studio

                    Short / Long

                    Schedule

                    Scripted / Imrov

                    Interviews or monologue

                    Your Delivery

                    Stereo / Mono

                    Fact / Fiction

                    Gender

                    Comedy / Serious

                    Expert / Journey

                    Local / Global

                    With all these ingredients I find it frustrating when people decide to name their show Librarian's On Fire? It seems an easy way out. What's next, the On Fire Answerman? Look, that's just my onion but I think we can do better.

                    "It is better to fail in originality, than to succeed in imitation. He who has never failed somewhere, that man can not be great. Failure is the true test of greatness. - Herman Melville

                    Originality does not mean thinking something that was never thought before; it means putting old ideas together in new ways.

                    The Only Way to Know How to Do a Podcast - Is To Do a Podcast!

                    There are some truths:

                    1. It's harder than you think
                    2. You will hate your own voice
                    3. You will get more positive feedback than negative
                    4. You will attract like minded people
                    5. You will inspire, educate, and entertain people
                    
                    

                    But you can't do it without pressing record. Here is a tip I learned as amusician to take the pressure off.

                    Record your first episode, but realize that you will NEVER release it. This takes the pressure off, and you may find that without the pressure you are aren't half bad...

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Are you trying to start a podcast but you can't seem to come up with something that is entirely new? Today we talk about how there are very few items that are entirely new. The iPod was just an upgrade of the Discman. The Discman was just an upgrade of the Walkman. The Walkman was just an upgrade of the 8-track tape. Typical something original is really  a few items that are old that have been combined with something of yourself to make it appear original. 
                    Because of My Podcast I Was Asked to Appear on TV: Wayne Henderson

                    Wayne Henderson deos a podcast about the Green Bay Packers, and he and his co-host were recently asked to appear on a TV show to talk some smack with some fans of the Seattle Seahawks.

                    International Podcast Day September 30th: Get Planning Your Podcast For Free

                    I have a fwe things going on to celebrate International Podcast Day:

                    1. My "Planning Your Podcast" course at Udemy is free from now until 10/31/15. Use the coupon code ipd15
                    2. I will be hosting an hour of live podcasting sharing "because of my podcast" stories and taking your questions
                    
                    Castermind Group Podcast Coaching Now Accepting Applications

                    If you are looking for an accountability partner/mastermind, my "Castermind" is now accepting more podcasters. Here is who this is for and what to expect

                    1. This is for the person who already has a podcast launched (if you need to launch your podcast, Join the School of Podcasting)
                    2. This is a group coaching, so some of it will be answering questions, but it will also have a short lesson to help you build your audience.
                    3. Each Castermind will consist of three people and myself.
                    
                    

                    If you are interested in applying, go to Castermind.com

                    The Courage to Be Creative Keynote Session from Podcast Midatlantic

                    I also appeared on the Podcaster's Rountable where we asked the question, "Why haven't you started podcasting?" This is similar to the talk I gave at Podcast Movement with a bit more emphasis on being creative. There are so many options when it comes to making a podcast. I look at them as ingredients. These are things you can mix together to come up with a unique show.

                    Live/Recorded

                    Short Term / Evergreen

                    Solo / Co-host

                    Mobile / Studio

                    Short / Long

                    Schedule

                    Scripted / Imrov

                    Interviews or monologue

                    Your Delivery

                    Stereo / Mono

                    Fact / Fiction

                    Gender

                    Comedy / Serious

                    Expert / Journey

                    Local / Global

                    With all these ingredients I find it frustrating when people decide to name their show Librarian's On Fire? It seems an easy way out. What's next, the On Fire Answerman? Look, that's just my onion but I think we can do better.

                    "It is better to fail in originality, than to succeed in imitation. He who has never failed somewhere, that man can not be great. Failure is the true test of greatness. - Herman Melville

                    Originality does not mean thinking something that was never thought before; it means putting old ideas together in new ways.

                    The Only Way to Know How to Do a Podcast - Is To Do a Podcast!

                    There are some truths:

                    1. It's harder than you think
                    2. You will hate your own voice
                    3. You will get more positive feedback than negative
                    4. You will attract like minded people
                    5. You will inspire, educate, and entertain people
                    
                    

                    But you can't do it without pressing record. Here is a tip I learned as amusician to take the pressure off.

                    Record your first episode, but realize that you will NEVER release it. This takes the pressure off, and you may find that without the pressure you are aren't half bad...

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>b4ca27aa0f7852a6e1463b70db9115f0Mon, 28 Sep 2015 04:00:00 -040001:00:32falsefull481481Jeff Bradburry is Changing Lives With His PodcastI was lucky enough to get to hang out with Jeff Bradburry of the Teachercast network at Podcast MidAtlantic. Jeff is helping teachers utilize technology (like Podcasting) in the classroom. I first met Jeff on a Podcaster's Roundtable and was amazed as he is doing everything LIVE. The one thing that impresses me with Jeff is he truly understands his audience. These (in some cases) are people who have struggled with technology, and are now looking to embrace it and improve the lives of students. Jeff understands that a teacher may call "audio on a podcast (no RSS feed" a "podcast" (when by definition it's not) but instead of splitting hairs, he stays focused on the goal (inspiring learning in the classroom with technology). 
                    Go Have a Baby or Three

                    Jeff was at an event when his wife went into labor. She was three months early, and Jeff had his hold booth setup. As you can see to the right. Jeff's booth is first class (GO BIG OR GO HOME). So you might be just a little nervous about running out the door and leaving all your equipment behind. His audience knew Jeff's situation (pregnant with triplets) and told him over and over "Go, we've got you covered" (and they did). His audience trusts Jeff, and in this case he trusted his equipment to his audience. 

                    Go Inspire a Conference: Your Show Started THIS...

                    Jeff had gone to a conference and spoke about it, and it turns out his audience was listening. They were so inspired by the idea they started an edcamp in their city. So there was no event, Jeff starts a podcast and BOOM now there is an event where there was none. Not only was their an event but a group of people enjoying it, and improving their lives. Why? Because Jeff started a podcast. 

                    Being Seen as an Expert

                    Jeff has worked with some major brands (Microsoft, Pearson) and Jeff always bring his "A game" and takes advantage of every opportunity that comes his way and that has lead to him getting a new job and allowing him to move to a better location for his new (larger) family. 

                    I love it when the good guys win. 

                    Go check out Jeff at www.teachercast.net

                    Voxer App Turn Your Phone Into a Walkie Talkie

                    Jeff did a quick demo for me at Podcast Midatlantic and I was surprised how addicting Voxer is a free app that allows you to create a group "chat" where you can share audio, video, and text. It's pretty cool and I could see people making private chats for their listeners. For more information go to www.voxer.com Here is a quick video overview:

                     

                     

                     

                    International Podcast Day Gratitude Award

                    You have until the end of the week to nominate yourself. This is not based on voting or audience size, but how much your audience is thankful, by how much their life has been changed by YOUR show. Nominate yourself at http://internationalpodcastday.com/gratitude/

                    Clammr Are Super Easy to Create with Simple Podcast Press

                    Clammr is a free app that makes it super easy to share short clips of audio (with links to your full episode). Now users of the Simple Podcast Press plugin (which already add subscribe buttons, email subscriptions and more has a clammr button which makes it SUPER easy to create a clammr from your website. This makes it super easy for your audience to share your content on the clammr. For more information check out Simple Podcast Press. 

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Appendipity Themes for Podcasters

                     

                    Ready to Start Podcasting? 

                    See www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>I was lucky enough to get to hang out with Jeff Bradburry of the Teachercast network at Podcast MidAtlantic. Jeff is helping teachers utilize technology (like Podcasting) in the classroom. I first met Jeff on a Podcaster's Roundtable and was amazed as he is doing everything LIVE. The one thing that impresses me with Jeff is he truly understands his audience. These (in some cases) are people who have struggled with technology, and are now looking to embrace it and improve the lives of students. Jeff understands that a teacher may call "audio on a podcast (no RSS feed" a "podcast" (when by definition it's not) but instead of splitting hairs, he stays focused on the goal (inspiring learning in the classroom with technology). 
                    Go Have a Baby or Three

                    Jeff was at an event when his wife went into labor. She was three months early, and Jeff had his hold booth setup. As you can see to the right. Jeff's booth is first class (GO BIG OR GO HOME). So you might be just a little nervous about running out the door and leaving all your equipment behind. His audience knew Jeff's situation (pregnant with triplets) and told him over and over "Go, we've got you covered" (and they did). His audience trusts Jeff, and in this case he trusted his equipment to his audience. 

                    Go Inspire a Conference: Your Show Started THIS...

                    Jeff had gone to a conference and spoke about it, and it turns out his audience was listening. They were so inspired by the idea they started an edcamp in their city. So there was no event, Jeff starts a podcast and BOOM now there is an event where there was none. Not only was their an event but a group of people enjoying it, and improving their lives. Why? Because Jeff started a podcast. 

                    Being Seen as an Expert

                    Jeff has worked with some major brands (Microsoft, Pearson) and Jeff always bring his "A game" and takes advantage of every opportunity that comes his way and that has lead to him getting a new job and allowing him to move to a better location for his new (larger) family. 

                    I love it when the good guys win. 

                    Go check out Jeff at www.teachercast.net

                    Voxer App Turn Your Phone Into a Walkie Talkie

                    Jeff did a quick demo for me at Podcast Midatlantic and I was surprised how addicting Voxer is a free app that allows you to create a group "chat" where you can share audio, video, and text. It's pretty cool and I could see people making private chats for their listeners. For more information go to www.voxer.com Here is a quick video overview:

                     

                     

                     

                    International Podcast Day Gratitude Award

                    You have until the end of the week to nominate yourself. This is not based on voting or audience size, but how much your audience is thankful, by how much their life has been changed by YOUR show. Nominate yourself at http://internationalpodcastday.com/gratitude/

                    Clammr Are Super Easy to Create with Simple Podcast Press

                    Clammr is a free app that makes it super easy to share short clips of audio (with links to your full episode). Now users of the Simple Podcast Press plugin (which already add subscribe buttons, email subscriptions and more has a clammr button which makes it SUPER easy to create a clammr from your website. This makes it super easy for your audience to share your content on the clammr. For more information check out Simple Podcast Press. 

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Appendipity Themes for Podcasters

                     

                    Ready to Start Podcasting? 

                    See www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>2af52b33830f9df5337f7fe0418c925cMon, 21 Sep 2015 04:00:00 -040001:02:00falsefull480480Legal Podcast Music ReviewPatience is a gentle version of courage - Kathy Kelly Special Mouse Podcast

                    Podcasting Changes Live - Jeff Bradburry and Scott Swanson

                    Watch other Media Types - Jeff Bradburry and Anythony Minaya

                    Tell great stories - everyone

                    Being Creative is fun.

                    Podcasting Changes Lives

                    I'm definitely having Jeff on my show in the future. The great thing that happened this weekend is person after person would share a "because of my podcast" story and I need to have them on the show. Jeff does the teachercast, and he helps educators (as a teacher himself) utilize technology in the classroom. He was great to hang out with, and he mentioned that if you help a student that's great (1 person), if you help a teacher that might impact 20 students, if you help a superintendent, that could impact thousands.

                    Scott from Muppetcast shared a story (I need to have him on the show) where a Jr High boy was getting beat up at school because he loved the Muppets. Scott's show showed him that he's not a freak, and it's OK to like the Muppets.

                    What Podcaster's Can Learn from Johnny Manzel

                    I live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl.

                    Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack.

                    Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that.

                    The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy

                    In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential).

                    You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse.

                    Legal Podcast Music

                    I was told about a new service from Mike Stewart that features a large group of music cleared to be used on your podcast. I play some clips on my show today, and you can find out more at their website. The package contains 150 – 60 second royalty free music themes with license to prove to YouTube or anyone you have my permission to use my music for your videos and podcasts. All the music tracks organized by tempo, feeling and emotion to make underscoring a breeze and easy to fit the them to your video. The music is the product of Mike Stewart (the Internet Audio Guy). he is also a musician with a Gold Record to prove it.

                    I purchased this package as I am familiar with Mike who had a service for a while where you would get 5 themes a month. I've used Mike's music in my podcast for years. There are lots of different genres from Country, Easy Listening, Rock, Holiday, etc. Most of the tracks I enjoyed. The rock themes (not all, but some), are a bit dated sounding to me (like they could be on the Beverly Hills Cop soundtrack). When you purchase a package, you know they aren't all going to be winners.

                    Doing the math on this, by just breezing through the different genres I would say I would use 70% of these. There are 150 tracks so that means I would use 105 tracks. The music is $37 for all 150 tracks so that would be ($27/105) 35 cents a track which is much less expensive than the .99 you will pay at Amazon.com (aff link). If you used all 150 track the price would drop to 25 cents a track.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Chris Rock and Martin Luther King Jr Blvd.

                    Appendippity Themes

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Patience is a gentle version of courage - Kathy Kelly Special Mouse Podcast

                    Podcasting Changes Live - Jeff Bradburry and Scott Swanson

                    Watch other Media Types - Jeff Bradburry and Anythony Minaya

                    Tell great stories - everyone

                    Being Creative is fun.

                    Podcasting Changes Lives

                    I'm definitely having Jeff on my show in the future. The great thing that happened this weekend is person after person would share a "because of my podcast" story and I need to have them on the show. Jeff does the teachercast, and he helps educators (as a teacher himself) utilize technology in the classroom. He was great to hang out with, and he mentioned that if you help a student that's great (1 person), if you help a teacher that might impact 20 students, if you help a superintendent, that could impact thousands.

                    Scott from Muppetcast shared a story (I need to have him on the show) where a Jr High boy was getting beat up at school because he loved the Muppets. Scott's show showed him that he's not a freak, and it's OK to like the Muppets.

                    What Podcaster's Can Learn from Johnny Manzel

                    I live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl.

                    Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack.

                    Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that.

                    The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy

                    In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential).

                    You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse.

                    Legal Podcast Music

                    I was told about a new service from Mike Stewart that features a large group of music cleared to be used on your podcast. I play some clips on my show today, and you can find out more at their website. The package contains 150 – 60 second royalty free music themes with license to prove to YouTube or anyone you have my permission to use my music for your videos and podcasts. All the music tracks organized by tempo, feeling and emotion to make underscoring a breeze and easy to fit the them to your video. The music is the product of Mike Stewart (the Internet Audio Guy). he is also a musician with a Gold Record to prove it.

                    I purchased this package as I am familiar with Mike who had a service for a while where you would get 5 themes a month. I've used Mike's music in my podcast for years. There are lots of different genres from Country, Easy Listening, Rock, Holiday, etc. Most of the tracks I enjoyed. The rock themes (not all, but some), are a bit dated sounding to me (like they could be on the Beverly Hills Cop soundtrack). When you purchase a package, you know they aren't all going to be winners.

                    Doing the math on this, by just breezing through the different genres I would say I would use 70% of these. There are 150 tracks so that means I would use 105 tracks. The music is $37 for all 150 tracks so that would be ($27/105) 35 cents a track which is much less expensive than the .99 you will pay at Amazon.com (aff link). If you used all 150 track the price would drop to 25 cents a track.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Chris Rock and Martin Luther King Jr Blvd.

                    Appendippity Themes

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>f385b39629ac295432aa99d951d58940Mon, 14 Sep 2015 04:00:00 -040030:07falsefull479479What Every Podcaster Should Know About StalkersI live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl.

                    Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack.

                    Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that.

                    The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy

                    In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential).

                    You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse.

                    Podcasting and Stalkers

                    When I was growing up my sister gave too much information to a guy she met on the bus. The next thing I know, is she is getting really creepy phone calls. We eventually had to work with the phone company and the local police (and his mother) to get him to stop calling. It was creepy

                    Talking in Generalizations Today

                    Let's not get to tied up in being 100% accurate today? What I mean by this is most stalking situations are men stalking women. In some cases it's men who are creepy. In many cases it's the women who are being too polite. Men are from Marz and Women are from Venus is not entirely accurate. There are always exceptions to the rule. Today, let's generalize and be OK with it.

                    Dr. Steve Albrecht

                    Dr. Steve Albrecht has worked with the San Diego police for years where he spent six years in the Domestic Violence Unit, and he handled over 1,500 cases. He is internationally recognized for his expertise in high-risk HR issues. he has authored many books on the subject of work place violence. Check out  Dr. Steve Albrecht's Books and Amazon.com

                    The bad news about the Internet is when you put information out there, it's out there (pretty much forever). If you don't want naked pictures of yourself (celebrities) on the Internet, then don't post them. For me, I have a Facebook profile for my podcast, and one for my family and fiends. I share different items with different profiles.

                    Some questions we answer:

                    When is sharing personal information too much information?

                    What should I do if someone is crossing the line?

                    When do you get the police involved?

                    All I said was I liked her Steaks...

                    It was the first day of a new job. My boss introduced my to Angie Salsbury. I said, "I like your steaks" (making a silly joke). The next day I was told I would have to apologize. At first I thought my boss was joking, but he wasn't. So I walked over and stated I didn't mean to disrespect her and moved on. She actually was a great person, but I had no idea where she drew her line and I crossed it.

                    The bottom line is (Gentlemen if I can have your attention please), we don't know where the ladies draw the line. I've worked with women who said things that were so over the top sexually explicit that it would make a prostitute blush. We all have our limits. The bottom line is we have to respect each other's boundaries.

                    Don't Be Polite

                    Ladies, I love that you are so loving an caring. This is not one of those times when you need to worry about hurting someone's feelings. You don't have to be mean and call names, but you need to say in clear and precise words that you do not want any further interaction with this person. Do not leave any room for doubts.

                    Don't Let This Episode Stop You From Starting A Podcast

                    There are weird and creepy people who need help every day. You stand next to them at the grocery checkout. You sit next to them at the movies. This is not a huge problem in podcasting, but as more women get into podcasting I wanted to make sure we were all on the same page. I wanted to let you know what to do, and how to act, and who to call if you think you might be having an issue.

                    Mentioned on this Episode

                    New Media Europe

                    Podcast Midatlantic

                    International Podcast Day

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>I live in Cleveland, Ohio. Out sports teams are not good. We have tremendously talented people like LeBron James and Johnny Manzel, but still we can't win. Last year out football team the Cleveland Browns draft Johnny Manzel with their first round pick. Johnny rubbed his fingers together in a way to say, "I'm going to get paid." It became his signature. It appeared in Johnny's mind that he had achieved his goal. He had maid it to the NFL. The bad news is that is not THE goal of a football player. THE GOAL is to win the Super Bowl.

                    Johnny had a reputation as being a person who was more interested in parties than play books. He always seemed a bit unprepared. This was his first year, but Johnny was now a professional football player. In this league you either carry your weight, or you are traded. As more and more stories of Johnny (more or less) goofing off came to the surface (welcome to being famous), it really appeared that this kid had his priorities out of whack.

                    Paul Colligan has an episode where he said, "Starting A Podcast To Hit iTunes “New And Notable” Is Like Launching A Business To Get Into The Phone Book." This is a classic, and it ties into this analogy. The goal of a podcaster is not to be in New Noteworthy, the goal is to impact your audience. Your goal is to bring value. For some, the goal is to create revenue streams that help supplement their income. When I wrote my book "More Podcast Money" getting it into Amazon was not the goal, the goal was to help people set realistic financial goals with their podcast. Amazon is a tool to help me do that.

                    The 8 Week Myth About iTunes New and Noteworthy

                    In the book Podcast Launch (by John Lee Dumas) a very unfortunate paragraph states that you "Have a mere 8 weeks to be featured within the best podcast advertising real estate on the planet." This needs tweaked. It should read, "You can only be considered NEW for 8 weeks, you can be considered Noteworthy any time." Because of this unfortunate paragraph people are spending all their and effort focusing on getting into New and Noteworthy. This is very much like Johnny Manzel focusing on getting into the NFL. It's not the goal, it's a milestone. In the same way that being drafted into the NFL equals success (as many people get cut, and many first round draft picks never measure up to their potential).

                    You can get into iTunes (I outline the 27 steps here), and to get into New and Noteworthy you pretty much need a pulse.

                    Podcasting and Stalkers

                    When I was growing up my sister gave too much information to a guy she met on the bus. The next thing I know, is she is getting really creepy phone calls. We eventually had to work with the phone company and the local police (and his mother) to get him to stop calling. It was creepy

                    Talking in Generalizations Today

                    Let's not get to tied up in being 100% accurate today? What I mean by this is most stalking situations are men stalking women. In some cases it's men who are creepy. In many cases it's the women who are being too polite. Men are from Marz and Women are from Venus is not entirely accurate. There are always exceptions to the rule. Today, let's generalize and be OK with it.

                    Dr. Steve Albrecht

                    Dr. Steve Albrecht has worked with the San Diego police for years where he spent six years in the Domestic Violence Unit, and he handled over 1,500 cases. He is internationally recognized for his expertise in high-risk HR issues. he has authored many books on the subject of work place violence. Check out  Dr. Steve Albrecht's Books and Amazon.com

                    The bad news about the Internet is when you put information out there, it's out there (pretty much forever). If you don't want naked pictures of yourself (celebrities) on the Internet, then don't post them. For me, I have a Facebook profile for my podcast, and one for my family and fiends. I share different items with different profiles.

                    Some questions we answer:

                    When is sharing personal information too much information?

                    What should I do if someone is crossing the line?

                    When do you get the police involved?

                    All I said was I liked her Steaks...

                    It was the first day of a new job. My boss introduced my to Angie Salsbury. I said, "I like your steaks" (making a silly joke). The next day I was told I would have to apologize. At first I thought my boss was joking, but he wasn't. So I walked over and stated I didn't mean to disrespect her and moved on. She actually was a great person, but I had no idea where she drew her line and I crossed it.

                    The bottom line is (Gentlemen if I can have your attention please), we don't know where the ladies draw the line. I've worked with women who said things that were so over the top sexually explicit that it would make a prostitute blush. We all have our limits. The bottom line is we have to respect each other's boundaries.

                    Don't Be Polite

                    Ladies, I love that you are so loving an caring. This is not one of those times when you need to worry about hurting someone's feelings. You don't have to be mean and call names, but you need to say in clear and precise words that you do not want any further interaction with this person. Do not leave any room for doubts.

                    Don't Let This Episode Stop You From Starting A Podcast

                    There are weird and creepy people who need help every day. You stand next to them at the grocery checkout. You sit next to them at the movies. This is not a huge problem in podcasting, but as more women get into podcasting I wanted to make sure we were all on the same page. I wanted to let you know what to do, and how to act, and who to call if you think you might be having an issue.

                    Mentioned on this Episode

                    New Media Europe

                    Podcast Midatlantic

                    International Podcast Day

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>4d75760c7a9665e236ad6157cb2e8272Mon, 07 Sep 2015 15:36:50 -040040:59falsefull478478The Most Addicting Social Platform EverPeriscope is a live streaming service from Twitter. It's pretty cool. My step-son is at Perdue and last week we got to see his first performance with the band via periscope. I had 36 people watching my cat in a baby's sleeping shirt. During the week I would open it up and just talk about whatever hit me. It's an interesting way to connect with your audience. In general, the video is recorded and can be viewed for 24 hours. You can download the file and upload it to YouTube or whatever service you would like to use.
                    How Do I Get My Mixer Into Periscope?

                    I used an iRig device originally meant for guitar players to plug their guitar into their iOs device but it works for me. You will need a 1/4" to 1/4" patch cable to go from the mixer to the iRig, and then the iRig into the phone.

                    There is an iRig2, but it is overkill. Also when it comes to patch cables, as you will be doing this near your mixer, this is probably a case where a shorter cable is better.

                    Like most podcast equipment questions, there are about a billion different tools you can use to do this. The bottom line is, have something to say. If you don't bring value, you won't have people coming back to hear what you have to say.  It's one thing to just hop on and test it out, be sure to mention that. For me, I like firing it up and having one topic, saying it, and get out. In the immortal word of James Brown, "hit it and quit it."

                    Blab.im - The Crack Cocaine of Social Media

                    Blab.im is completely addicting. It also is a streaming service like Periscope except you can (if you choose) to let up to four people join you. There is a chat room where people can chime in and ask questions. They can also request to be part of the stream. I tried this last Saturday on Ask the Podcast Coach. Typically this is a call in show where my co-host and I talk and occasionally take a phone call. It's awesome as you are never sure what you are going to get .  I think in the year that I've done that show we've had one caller, and one waiting twice. Last Saturday I had four people in the cue wanting to come on. 

                    You still have control over who is and is not on the stream. You can mute people, or band them from the blab. You can start a blab on your computer (so it's easy to connect your mixer or microphone)or on your mobile device. It's best to use Chrome when you are on the computer. You can choose to record it (or not). If you record it, when your blab is over, you get a link to the audio file  (mp3 file - 320 kbps stereo) or the video. When I compared the audio from Blab the to the WAV file I recorded on my portable recorder, the WAV file didn't win by much. 

                    Blab.im vs Blog Talk Radio

                    It's also not fair to judge at this time because Blab.im is free. They have tons of video and audio on their servers, and trust me, they will eventually have to charge to keep this engine rolling. 

                    Blog Talk Radio has really step up their game. Their audio is now 128 KBPS stereo. You (and your gusts) can connect directly to their system. It creates AWESOME sounding audio. You can have your audience call in via the phone. They have a chat system, and you can direct people to your show on Blog Talk Radio, you can also implement their system on your site. It is super easy for people to connect with you. With that said, the buzz on Blab.im completely smokes Blog Talk Radio. The interaction, the exposure of people tweeting, for me - in my experience - with my audience, it was like the difference between college football and the pros. Both are great, but blab.im was just a much faster pace. 

                    Blog Talk Radio has the ability to have a call screener, and that you do not have at blab.im so be ready to eject the first person who comes in screams Bobba Booee! 

                    For me, I do love being able to see the person's name, and have links to their profile on Twitter (so I may end up following you). 

                    They plan on adding the feature to allow you to embed the blab on your site. 

                    Currently blab is lacking in the stats category. You can see how many people attended your blab, but you can go back later and see how many people watched the relay. 

                    Blog talk radio will win if your audience is not technical. If they are looking for businesses in the yellow pages. If you have a computer with a microphone, a smartphone, it's just too easy to join a blab. As the platform gets more popular it will be harder to find a blab, but for those people relying on the phone Blog Talk Radio is still the answer. 

                    SoundCloud is Being Sued

                    I spent some time investigating Soundcloud a few weeks ago. I would strongly urge you NOT to put any eggs in the basket. Their "Super cool player" no longer works on Facebook. They lost 29 million dollars last year, DJ's are puling their music, Sony music is pulling their music, and now they are being sued.  In my opinion, it's dead site walking. 

                    Because of My Podcast: I Met Burt Reynold and Made Him Cry

                    Bobby from Live Nude Puppets loves Dom DeLuise, and because of his podcast he has an agent that is looking to help launch a live nude puppets animated show. This lead to Bobby being in the same room as Burt Reynolds. Bobby is a HUGE Dom fan, and went and spoke to Burt about it, and both got choked up thinking about Mr. DeLuise. Thanks for sharing Bobby, and congrats on topping the charts on the Clammrcast Top 20 Coundtown.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    Gary Vaynerchuck on Chase Jarvis Show

                    Podcasters Roundtable on Tough Decsions

                    Red Podcast Podcasting and Your Business How to Do it Right

                    Podcasts Are Like Dogs

                    Saturday my wife called to let me know our German Sheppard Koda needed to be put to sleep. His health had been going downhill quickly, and now he could barely walk. He was 110 lbs. He was my gentle giant. It was a very sad day. I was thinking this morning as I walked into the kitchen where Koda used to sleep. The kitchen looks so much bigger with him gone. Dogs are a lot like podcasts. 

                    You Never Know What You're Going to Get 

                    You can read up on breeds, but until you bring the puppy home you never know what you actually have. My...]]>Periscope is a live streaming service from Twitter. It's pretty cool. My step-son is at Perdue and last week we got to see his first performance with the band via periscope. I had 36 people watching my cat in a baby's sleeping shirt. During the week I would open it up and just talk about whatever hit me. It's an interesting way to connect with your audience. In general, the video is recorded and can be viewed for 24 hours. You can download the file and upload it to YouTube or whatever service you would like to use.

                    How Do I Get My Mixer Into Periscope?

                    I used an iRig device originally meant for guitar players to plug their guitar into their iOs device but it works for me. You will need a 1/4" to 1/4" patch cable to go from the mixer to the iRig, and then the iRig into the phone.

                    There is an iRig2, but it is overkill. Also when it comes to patch cables, as you will be doing this near your mixer, this is probably a case where a shorter cable is better.

                    Like most podcast equipment questions, there are about a billion different tools you can use to do this. The bottom line is, have something to say. If you don't bring value, you won't have people coming back to hear what you have to say.  It's one thing to just hop on and test it out, be sure to mention that. For me, I like firing it up and having one topic, saying it, and get out. In the immortal word of James Brown, "hit it and quit it."

                    Blab.im - The Crack Cocaine of Social Media

                    Blab.im is completely addicting. It also is a streaming service like Periscope except you can (if you choose) to let up to four people join you. There is a chat room where people can chime in and ask questions. They can also request to be part of the stream. I tried this last Saturday on Ask the Podcast Coach. Typically this is a call in show where my co-host and I talk and occasionally take a phone call. It's awesome as you are never sure what you are going to get .  I think in the year that I've done that show we've had one caller, and one waiting twice. Last Saturday I had four people in the cue wanting to come on. 

                    You still have control over who is and is not on the stream. You can mute people, or band them from the blab. You can start a blab on your computer (so it's easy to connect your mixer or microphone)or on your mobile device. It's best to use Chrome when you are on the computer. You can choose to record it (or not). If you record it, when your blab is over, you get a link to the audio file  (mp3 file - 320 kbps stereo) or the video. When I compared the audio from Blab the to the WAV file I recorded on my portable recorder, the WAV file didn't win by much. 

                    Blab.im vs Blog Talk Radio

                    It's also not fair to judge at this time because Blab.im is free. They have tons of video and audio on their servers, and trust me, they will eventually have to charge to keep this engine rolling. 

                    Blog Talk Radio has really step up their game. Their audio is now 128 KBPS stereo. You (and your gusts) can connect directly to their system. It creates AWESOME sounding audio. You can have your audience call in via the phone. They have a chat system, and you can direct people to your show on Blog Talk Radio, you can also implement their system on your site. It is super easy for people to connect with you. With that said, the buzz on Blab.im completely smokes Blog Talk Radio. The interaction, the exposure of people tweeting, for me - in my experience - with my audience, it was like the difference between college football and the pros. Both are great, but blab.im was just a much faster pace. 

                    Blog Talk Radio has the ability to have a call screener, and that you do not have at blab.im so be ready to eject the first person who comes in screams Bobba Booee! 

                    For me, I do love being able to see the person's name, and have links to their profile on Twitter (so I may end up following you). 

                    They plan on adding the feature to allow you to embed the blab on your site. 

                    Currently blab is lacking in the stats category. You can see how many people attended your blab, but you can go back later and see how many people watched the relay. 

                    Blog talk radio will win if your audience is not technical. If they are looking for businesses in the yellow pages. If you have a computer with a microphone, a smartphone, it's just too easy to join a blab. As the platform gets more popular it will be harder to find a blab, but for those people relying on the phone Blog Talk Radio is still the answer. 

                    SoundCloud is Being Sued

                    I spent some time investigating Soundcloud a few weeks ago. I would strongly urge you NOT to put any eggs in the basket. Their "Super cool player" no longer works on Facebook. They lost 29 million dollars last year, DJ's are puling their music, Sony music is pulling their music, and now they are being sued.  In my opinion, it's dead site walking. 

                    Because of My Podcast: I Met Burt Reynold and Made Him Cry

                    Bobby from Live Nude Puppets loves Dom DeLuise, and because of his podcast he has an agent that is looking to help launch a live nude puppets animated show. This lead to Bobby being in the same room as Burt Reynolds. Bobby is a HUGE Dom fan, and went and spoke to Burt about it, and both got choked up thinking about Mr. DeLuise. Thanks for sharing Bobby, and congrats on topping the charts on the Clammrcast Top 20 Coundtown.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    Gary Vaynerchuck on Chase Jarvis Show

                    Podcasters Roundtable on Tough Decsions

                    Red Podcast Podcasting and Your Business How to Do it Right

                    Podcasts Are Like Dogs

                    Saturday my wife called to let me know our German Sheppard Koda needed to be put to sleep. His health had been going downhill quickly, and now he could barely walk. He was 110 lbs. He was my gentle giant. It was a very sad day. I was thinking this morning as I walked into the kitchen where Koda used to sleep. The kitchen looks so much bigger with him gone. Dogs are a lot like podcasts. 

                    You Never Know What You're Going to Get 

                    You can read up on breeds, but until you bring the puppy home you never know what you actually have. My step-daughter has two rescue dogs. The one would eat the house. By that I mean she would leave to go to work, and come home and part of the door frames were torn to shreds. 

                    There is More to Getting It Off The Ground Than Expected

                    When you get a dog, you think you need food. Oh yeah, and bowl. Wait, I better pick up a leash. Oops, almost forgot the brush. Oh, the little guy should have some sort of bed or blanket. I should also pick up a chew toy or 20. 

                    I've mentioned how there are 27 steps to list your podcast up and into iTunes. The good news is once it's in iTunes the other episodes only require about 8 steps. 

                    You Learn Lessons The Hard Way

                    When I had a shi-tzu I learned that if you don't shave their butt their hair grows over their there is nowhere for the poo to go. Likewise that time you had the best interview ever only to see that you forgot to press record on your recorder is a lesson most of us learn the hard way. 

                    Once You've Got The Routine Down - The Relationship Begins

                    Once the dog is trained, and you have them on somewhat of a routine you start to get to know their personality. You start to build that relationship. With podcasts, the launch can be a bit overwhelming but once its up and you can focus on content you get into a rhythm. You start to get that trickle of feedback, and you start to build that relationship. In the same way that you trust that your dog isn't going to eat your house, you audience trusts you to bring good content. 

                    You Will More Than Likely Try More Gear

                    Sure the dog loves his nylon bone, but when you put him in the backyard and through a frisbee and he caught it a new passion was unveiled. With podcasting you may want to take a stab at blab.im, or adding a co-host, or recording mobile, you will try different things. Somethings are awesome. Sometimes the dog looks at you after you through the frisbee with a face that reads, "Do you expect me to go get that?" 

                    Your Health Will Start To Fail

                    Am I saying a year in podcasting is like seven years? Maybe. Maybe that's why most podcasters don't make it past 7 because it's really episode 49. The passion you had for your subject starts to fade. Maybe you've said all there is to say on that subject. Maybe your are not in the same place you were when you started. The only thing that says the same is change. 

                    You Will Know When It's Time

                    Last week we spoke with Donovan Adkisson who said, "It just wasn't fun." That is why he is taking a hiatus from Podcasting. His life changed. His priorities changed. He is not in the same place.

                    When It's Gone You Look at the Bright Side and the Memories 

                    I use to live next to a golf course. I would get up and watch people tee-off while eating my cereal. Koda was always trying to escape and because of his size people would scream and run at the sight of him. He looked like a wolf. One day he gout out the sliding door and took off down the golf course. I believe I was in my pajamas running down the fairway trying to catch this dog dazes in disbelief that the dog was faster than I was, and depressed at how out of shape I was. Luckily, Koda stopped to water a bush. If he hadn't I still would probably be chasing that dog. Looking back, I should've called up Glen the Geek (America's Horse husband) and got some information on getting a saddle for the dog. 

                    I've pretty much laid down the microphone for some of my shows. I got to interview some of my music idols on that show, and I had bands email me how my tips help them sell their music. I'm just not into that scene like I was 10 years ago. 

                    I've had Partial, Butch, Gonzo, Sarah, Dudley, Teddy, Max, and Koda in my life depending on where I was staying. I never knew what I was going to get, and I am so glad I had the courage to invite a dog into my life, and I urge you to find the courage to start a podcast and build relationships with like minded people. You never know where the road may lead you.

                    Mentioned On This Episode 

                    International Podcast Day

                    New Media Europe

                    Podcast Mid Atlantic

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>9c1f3b87325866fb3331ff38006c3238Mon, 31 Aug 2015 04:00:00 -040048:01falsefull477477Tips to Revive Your Dead PodcastAs a podcast consultant I should be telling everyone to start a podcast. I do. I believe there is a lot to be learned from starting a podcast. You learn to:
                    1. Organize your thoughts
                    2. Prioritize your goals
                    3. Speak with confidence
                    4. Work with people from different cultures
                    5. As much as podcasting is about talking, I think the top podcasters are at the top because they learned how to listen.
                    
                    We Predicated Disgruntled Podcasters in December 2013

                    There was a time when it seemed every podcast had the term "on fire" tacked on at the end. In December of 2012 myself, Daniel J Lewis, Ray Ortega, Steve Stewart, and John Lee Dumas had a roundtable to discuss what Steve coined "The John Lee Dumas effect." People were starting a podcast, following a formula, and expecting the same six figure result as John. Part of that roundtbale was to point out the hard work, dedication, and insane work ethics that John has (and they being John Lee Dumas comes very naturally to him).  John has always been super transparent about his life, his business, and his workflow, and how long his runway was when he jump into the unknown waters of podcasting (that's why I like the guy). John is an original. Here is the income from the eofire.com website

                      Here Comes the Next Wave of "Podcasting is Dead."

                    Comedian Brock Wilbur made a post and said, "“Podcasts are pointless. Anyone who tells you otherwise is the literal devil. No one is going to get rich or famous or gain any level of following from this medium ever again, because it is hilariously dead. Your idea to share caustic observations about an ongoing TV show? Pointless. Your idea to interview interesting people? Laughably misguided. Your idea to discuss each individual episode of a decade-old CW show? Well… shockingly successful.”

                    I went and listened to his podcast.

                    Brock has around 125 downloads per episode (13,767 downloads divided by 110 episodes). If you were a teacher, that would be 5 classrooms of 20.

                    I’m three minutes into it, and I am now finally getting into the content. You played a song with no teaser. You are hoping that people sit through some song hoping that they make it to the content. As a first time listener, I have no idea who you are, or your guests.

                    Your audio is right on the edge of distracting. I get it. One microphone with four people, you’re going to get room noise. It's YOUR show. You can record it any way you want.

                    At 5 minutes you finally introduce your guests. Nobody waits for 5 minutes for someone to get to the point. You then had one of your guests introduce themselves. The average attention span is around 8 seconds now (or something ridiculous like that).

                    In my opinion 97% of the time improv blows.

                    Brock typed a whopping 32 words that is not a huge target for Google to find. The Yoast SEO plugin recommends 300 words per post. It's YOUR show, do what you want.

                    Nothing screams “great content” like four people talking over each other. Who am I to judge, it works for THE VIEW.

                    In the article you say, “two years ago we started setting aside Thursday nights to have fun people get drunk around microphones in my living room.” It sounds like you’ve achieved your goal.

                    The one thing that really confused me, is Brock has a great looking website, but instead of adding the podcast to YOUR WEBSITE, you send people to a bad Podbean site that looks like a throw back to bad MySpace page.

                    A Farewell To Podcasting

                    Donovan Adkisson was on my show a while ago after completing his first year. He had written a book about it, and was excited about podcasting. Three years later he had created Adkisson Digital, four podcasts and a fair amount of frustration. If you listen to his episode titled "My Farewell to Podcasting" he states the following:

                    I'm not saying I'm ceasing my podcasting endeavors because I don't get any feedback, but its part of it.

                    I've realized that it's not interesting. I don't really bring anything of value to the listener. All I do is rant about the things that are happening in the world. I have nothing of value to provide because that is already being done by more higher profile and more successful people than myself.

                    Podcast consultants make money on selling courses on how to do what they are doing. It's almost like a weird pyramid scheme (but it's not).

                    It's absolutely not fun.

                    I Needed to Speak to Him in Person

                    Donovan was SUPER HONEST and admits that he never really defined his target audience, he had an idea - but it was super precise. He also knows maybe he didn't promote his podcast as much as he should have. In listening to Donovan you can tell he tried everything he did to make his show fly.

                    While its obvious that Donovan loves podcasting. He especially loves creating lives shows, but to get HUGE sponsors you need huge numbers and Donovan (and about 90% of most podcasters) didn't have that. (To hear about making money outside of the CPM model of podcasting, check out my interview with Glen the Geek)

                    No Apology Needed

                    Donovan also explained how he has some legal battles going on in his life, and he has some expensive health issues. In other words, his life's priorities have shifted.

                    If You Like it - Do it

                    As a podcast consultant I should be telling everyone to start a podcast. I do. I believe there is a lot to be learned from starting a podcast. You learn to:

                    1. Organize your thoughts
                    2. Prioritize your goals
                    3. Speak with confidence
                    4. Work with people from different cultures
                    5. As much as podcasting is about talking, I think the top podcasters are at the top because they learned how to listen.
                    
                    We Predicated Disgruntled Podcasters in December 2013

                    There was a time when it seemed every podcast had the term "on fire" tacked on at the end. In December of 2012 myself, Daniel J Lewis, Ray Ortega, Steve Stewart, and John Lee Dumas had a roundtable to discuss what Steve coined "The John Lee Dumas effect." People were starting a podcast, following a formula, and expecting the same six figure result as John. Part of that roundtbale was to point out the hard work, dedication, and insane work ethics that John has (and they being John Lee Dumas comes very naturally to him).  John has always been super transparent about his life, his business, and his workflow, and how long his runway was when he jump into the unknown waters of podcasting (that's why I like the guy). John is an original. Here is the income from the eofire.com website

                      Here Comes the Next Wave of "Podcasting is Dead."

                    Comedian Brock Wilbur made a post and said, "“Podcasts are pointless. Anyone who tells you otherwise is the literal devil. No one is going to get rich or famous or gain any level of following from this medium ever again, because it is hilariously dead. Your idea to share caustic observations about an ongoing TV show? Pointless. Your idea to interview interesting people? Laughably misguided. Your idea to discuss each individual episode of a decade-old CW show? Well… shockingly successful.”

                    I went and listened to his podcast.

                    Brock has around 125 downloads per episode (13,767 downloads divided by 110 episodes). If you were a teacher, that would be 5 classrooms of 20.

                    I’m three minutes into it, and I am now finally getting into the content. You played a song with no teaser. You are hoping that people sit through some song hoping that they make it to the content. As a first time listener, I have no idea who you are, or your guests.

                    Your audio is right on the edge of distracting. I get it. One microphone with four people, you’re going to get room noise. It's YOUR show. You can record it any way you want.

                    At 5 minutes you finally introduce your guests. Nobody waits for 5 minutes for someone to get to the point. You then had one of your guests introduce themselves. The average attention span is around 8 seconds now (or something ridiculous like that).

                    In my opinion 97% of the time improv blows.

                    Brock typed a whopping 32 words that is not a huge target for Google to find. The Yoast SEO plugin recommends 300 words per post. It's YOUR show, do what you want.

                    Nothing screams “great content” like four people talking over each other. Who am I to judge, it works for THE VIEW.

                    In the article you say, “two years ago we started setting aside Thursday nights to have fun people get drunk around microphones in my living room.” It sounds like you’ve achieved your goal.

                    The one thing that really confused me, is Brock has a great looking website, but instead of adding the podcast to YOUR WEBSITE, you send people to a bad Podbean site that looks like a throw back to bad MySpace page.

                    A Farewell To Podcasting

                    Donovan Adkisson was on my show a while ago after completing his first year. He had written a book about it, and was excited about podcasting. Three years later he had created Adkisson Digital, four podcasts and a fair amount of frustration. If you listen to his episode titled "My Farewell to Podcasting" he states the following:

                    I'm not saying I'm ceasing my podcasting endeavors because I don't get any feedback, but its part of it.

                    I've realized that it's not interesting. I don't really bring anything of value to the listener. All I do is rant about the things that are happening in the world. I have nothing of value to provide because that is already being done by more higher profile and more successful people than myself.

                    Podcast consultants make money on selling courses on how to do what they are doing. It's almost like a weird pyramid scheme (but it's not).

                    It's absolutely not fun.

                    I Needed to Speak to Him in Person

                    Donovan was SUPER HONEST and admits that he never really defined his target audience, he had an idea - but it was super precise. He also knows maybe he didn't promote his podcast as much as he should have. In listening to Donovan you can tell he tried everything he did to make his show fly.

                    While its obvious that Donovan loves podcasting. He especially loves creating lives shows, but to get HUGE sponsors you need huge numbers and Donovan (and about 90% of most podcasters) didn't have that. (To hear about making money outside of the CPM model of podcasting, check out my interview with Glen the Geek)

                    No Apology Needed

                    Donovan also explained how he has some legal battles going on in his life, and he has some expensive health issues. In other words, his life's priorities have shifted.

                    If You Like it - Do it

                    At one point Donovan admits he loves podcasting. My advice is then do it. If it makes you happy, then do it. Do it for the art and creativity. Do it for the people who listen (Donovan said he got more feedback on his "Farewell" episode than he did on any other episode), but don't do it for the approval of others. Do your best to make a show that impacts your audience (makes them laugh, cry, think, groan, educates, inspires).

                    Your Life Changes - And So May Your Podcast

                    My first podcast was started 10 years ago when I was playing in bands. I loved music marketing. I loved playing music live. I'm not in the place anymore in my life, and consequently, I rarely do that podcast. It's a hobby in that case, and I do it because I can. I still have a smaller group that patiently waits for the next episode.

                    It Takes a Lot of Work, and a lot of Time

                    I've have mentioned in the past how the TV Seinfeld didn't take off the first season and was almost cancelled. There are plenty of shows that get popular because of this thing called timing.

                    There was a TV show in 1999 called Action on Fox. It got rave reviews. It stared Actor/Comedian (now podcaster) Jay Mohr. You probably never heard of the show. I bet you have heard of Chicago Hope, Charmed, or Who Wants to Be a Millionaire. Those are the shows Action was up against. It lasted one season.

                    Tips to Revive Your Dead Podcast
                    1. Always start with your audience. Get their opinion. (see creating surveys episode)
                    2. Look at the amount of time you have to create a podcast, and create a realistic schedule that you can keep
                    3. Announce when you are taking a leave of absence
                    4. Search for your topic. There may be new resources that could help you with show topics
                    5. Potentially add a co-host if you are flying solo. Don't be afraid to mess with the format if the only alternative is closing it down.
                    
                    

                    Lastly, if you are just sick and tired of the podcast, announce your final show, and let go. Seinfeld, M*A*S*H, Cheers, etc all came to an end.

                    Mentioned in This Episode

                    On Faith's Edge Podcast

                    John Lee Dumas

                    Steve Stewart

                    Daniel J Lewis

                    Ray Ortega

                    Donovan Adkisson

                    Podcaster's Roundtable John Lee Dumas Effect

                    Ryan K Parker's Food Craftsmen

                    Ready to Start Podcasting in the Right Direction?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>b1c01e6d74086785f720430770d3c7cdMon, 24 Aug 2015 04:00:00 -040059:13falsefull476476Getting Outside Your Comfort ZoneToday I share a story about getting outside of your comfort zone, and we talk with the Real Brian about how his podcast has lead to him getting paid to host two more.
                    Donnie Pushed Publish On His Podcast.

                    I got this email in my inbox: Hello Sir, I am writing this to simply introduce myself and say a big Thank You! Not long ago I was inspired to begin a daunting task of creating a podcast. I have listened to numerous ones over a varied topic span ever since the beginnings of the podcast. So I decided to bite the bullet and give this a go. With thoughts of what fun this could be and eager to learn some new skills I ventured forth into the "glamorous" world of podcasting. Your show has been a go-to for every topic I can imagine. I glean over past episodes for the struggles I am currently facing and words of encouragement along the way. Simply put, it has been indispensable in this process. With that said, I do need to mention that I already belong to JLD's Podcaster's Paradise and the information there has been helpful also, albeit a little pie in the sky- esque. I am a loyal listener now of your show along with the Podcasters Studio and Roundtable. This week I listened to the Glen the Geek almost everyday on the long drives between day job customers. All I can say is WOW. That episode really hit home. The show I have created focuses on the Craft Beer community. I am based out of Knoxville, TN so my main goal was to break into the local scene. I am around 5 episodes deep in the editing process and have just released my first show to my website and submitted to ITunes this week. I have broken the procrastination mold of not releasing due to trying to 'make it perfect'. I realize we all have to start somewhere and I have finally made that big step. Now to grow and promote, along with get much better every time I am behind the mic. -Donnie InebriatedWisdom.com

                    My Reply

                    Donnie, Awesome. You have done what so many people have failed to do, you hit publish. No matter what people say from this point forward, you put it out there, for better or for worse, you hit publish. I'm so glad I inspired you because this email may have just inspired me for my next episode. Do you mind if I read you e-mail on the show? Some steps you can take are to go find your beer peeps. See if there are local brewers (guessing here, not my niche), etc. Be sure to make friends before you start pimping your show (or they won't care). Congrats, and do everyone a favor and put a link to your in your signature. Dave

                    Keeping My Integrity at Podcamp Pittsburgh.

                    So I attended a session on basic audio editing. I could see that the audience at this event were brand new to Podcasting. At the end of day one, I asked if there were any open slots (as they just filled one) and they stated they didn't At dinner that night with Krystal, Nick, and Kim, they said I should do a session. It turns out at Podcamps, anyone can speak anywhere. I resisted. As the former director of podcasting for the new media expo, I know what goes into planning and running a show. I just pictured some guy coming up and saying I'm speaking tomorrow at 11 and my brain exploding. Chris Brogan (one the creators of PodCamps) and I asked him if adding sessions was allowed, and sure enough it was. In fact, it was encouraged. But still I resisted. There I was standing on the edge of my comfort zone. I mean that seems like such an ego move. "Hey, I'm here and I'm going to speak!." This is the wrong attitude. It's valid, based on my experience, but I needed to be open for new information. I had just seen with my own eyes how this group desperately needed a podcasting 101 type of talk. Nick continued to nudge, and I thought of my email to Donnie. This meant believing in myself (I've been doing this 10 years, and as a computer instructor I have to be light on my feet and go with the flow on a regular basis), and of course... Nobody was going to punch me in the face.  (thank you Ryan K Parker of foodcraftsmen.com ) So I did it I had a group of 7ish, and Krstal from Libsyn parascoped it to another 50ish. I had 9 words on a piece of paper and just used my knowledge. Was I nervous? Sure. I did zero rehearsal. At the end of day two I was thanked by the founders for doing that session.

                    The Real Brian - Podcasting Has Put Me Where I Am

                    Brian is the host of Profitcast and he was doing some research

                    Upcoming Events

                    Saturday Septemeber 12 Podcast Mid Atlantic  ( I will be doing a Keynote at this event) Saturday Septemeber 12th, New Media Europe

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting (30 day money back guarentee)

                    ]]>Today I share a story about getting outside of your comfort zone, and we talk with the Real Brian about how his podcast has lead to him getting paid to host two more.
                    Donnie Pushed Publish On His Podcast.

                    I got this email in my inbox: Hello Sir, I am writing this to simply introduce myself and say a big Thank You! Not long ago I was inspired to begin a daunting task of creating a podcast. I have listened to numerous ones over a varied topic span ever since the beginnings of the podcast. So I decided to bite the bullet and give this a go. With thoughts of what fun this could be and eager to learn some new skills I ventured forth into the "glamorous" world of podcasting. Your show has been a go-to for every topic I can imagine. I glean over past episodes for the struggles I am currently facing and words of encouragement along the way. Simply put, it has been indispensable in this process. With that said, I do need to mention that I already belong to JLD's Podcaster's Paradise and the information there has been helpful also, albeit a little pie in the sky- esque. I am a loyal listener now of your show along with the Podcasters Studio and Roundtable. This week I listened to the Glen the Geek almost everyday on the long drives between day job customers. All I can say is WOW. That episode really hit home. The show I have created focuses on the Craft Beer community. I am based out of Knoxville, TN so my main goal was to break into the local scene. I am around 5 episodes deep in the editing process and have just released my first show to my website and submitted to ITunes this week. I have broken the procrastination mold of not releasing due to trying to 'make it perfect'. I realize we all have to start somewhere and I have finally made that big step. Now to grow and promote, along with get much better every time I am behind the mic. -Donnie InebriatedWisdom.com

                    My Reply

                    Donnie, Awesome. You have done what so many people have failed to do, you hit publish. No matter what people say from this point forward, you put it out there, for better or for worse, you hit publish. I'm so glad I inspired you because this email may have just inspired me for my next episode. Do you mind if I read you e-mail on the show? Some steps you can take are to go find your beer peeps. See if there are local brewers (guessing here, not my niche), etc. Be sure to make friends before you start pimping your show (or they won't care). Congrats, and do everyone a favor and put a link to your in your signature. Dave

                    Keeping My Integrity at Podcamp Pittsburgh.

                    So I attended a session on basic audio editing. I could see that the audience at this event were brand new to Podcasting. At the end of day one, I asked if there were any open slots (as they just filled one) and they stated they didn't At dinner that night with Krystal, Nick, and Kim, they said I should do a session. It turns out at Podcamps, anyone can speak anywhere. I resisted. As the former director of podcasting for the new media expo, I know what goes into planning and running a show. I just pictured some guy coming up and saying I'm speaking tomorrow at 11 and my brain exploding. Chris Brogan (one the creators of PodCamps) and I asked him if adding sessions was allowed, and sure enough it was. In fact, it was encouraged. But still I resisted. There I was standing on the edge of my comfort zone. I mean that seems like such an ego move. "Hey, I'm here and I'm going to speak!." This is the wrong attitude. It's valid, based on my experience, but I needed to be open for new information. I had just seen with my own eyes how this group desperately needed a podcasting 101 type of talk. Nick continued to nudge, and I thought of my email to Donnie. This meant believing in myself (I've been doing this 10 years, and as a computer instructor I have to be light on my feet and go with the flow on a regular basis), and of course... Nobody was going to punch me in the face.  (thank you Ryan K Parker of foodcraftsmen.com ) So I did it I had a group of 7ish, and Krstal from Libsyn parascoped it to another 50ish. I had 9 words on a piece of paper and just used my knowledge. Was I nervous? Sure. I did zero rehearsal. At the end of day two I was thanked by the founders for doing that session.

                    The Real Brian - Podcasting Has Put Me Where I Am

                    Brian is the host of Profitcast and he was doing some research

                    Upcoming Events

                    Saturday Septemeber 12 Podcast Mid Atlantic  ( I will be doing a Keynote at this event) Saturday Septemeber 12th, New Media Europe

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting (30 day money back guarentee)

                    ]]>0abd1b34931f99aead4bc12a3e669ac7Mon, 17 Aug 2015 16:02:12 -040054:50falsefull475475Making a Living Talking about Horses - Glen the Geek is Never BoringGlenn the geek has been podcasting since 2008. He does it full time. He grew his audience by reaching out to leaders in his field and partnering with them. He has a background in sales, and found the right sponsors for his shows. He embraces his audience, and knows that if you want people to listen you have to be entertaining. You might be thinking that if he is making a living from his podcast he must've had some huge podcast launching and rocked the top of the iTunes charts, and lived in New and Noteworthy. While that may be true, Glenn wouldn't know. You see, Glenn focuses on his audience. He focuses on making great content that entertains and educates. It wasn't until recently that he even knew to ask for reviews. He did it the old fashioned way. He earned their trust, and never lets his audience down. Consequently, they don't let him down. As a salesmen, he has made more money in the past. However, he is now making a living and having more fun talking about a topic he is addicted to (horses) and loving every minute of it. Today get a pencil ready as we interview America's Favorite Horse Husband Glenn the Geek from Horse Radio Network.
                    Podcast Rewind (2:43)

                    Paul Colligan lays it on the line in the Episode title The Weird Thing About Podcasting For Money

                    Rob Walch was interviewed on Podcast Junkies on the Truth about Podcast Numbers (the stats start at the 52 minute mark).

                    Glenn the Geek America's Horse Husband (5:47)

                    Here are some of the top takeaways

                    Glenn started with ONE podcast. Glenn put all his efforts into this show. He started with ONE.

                    He got a sponsor early even though he didn't have thousands of listeners. How? By finding an advertiser who was more interested in promoting their brand than delivering a coupon.

                    Glenn gets his sponsors involved in his show. He uses them to answer questions from his listeners. This is a great way to promote the brand, make the brand look like an expert, without having a giant commercial.

                    Glenn KNOWS HIS AUDIENCE. They are addicted to horses and aren't the most technical bunch. You will see on horseradionetwork.com that Glenn has step by step tutorials to help his audience learn how to listen (on every single type of device).

                    If you know you're going to have a network, promote from episode 1 (even if the network doesn't exist). This way when it DOES exist people who catch your early shows will have the same branding (Glenn was following the model of Twit.tv).

                    Glenn is not a horse expert, but he shares a passion for horses and he plays the role of "Average Horsemen" on the show. You don't need to be an expert to start a podcast.

                    He used Blog Talk Radio but left due to poor audio quality (Blog Talk Radio just unveiled their upgraded service which now delivers CD quality and allows you to connect directly to the service without using a phone or skype). He now uses Call In Studio, and Mixlr to stream live.

                    Glenn does use CPM for selling ads. He sells a flat rate per episode. He advises his sponsors to purchase three months of ads to start out (he prefers 6 months).

                    Glenn used Big Contact to make a player that can be shared on other websites. Big Contact is no longer accepting submissions. You can do this using the Libsyn Player, the Player from Blubrry.com (under conntect), Podtrac.com, or you can make your own using Wimpy Player.

                    Glenn only lets products he uses sponsor his show. The only thing you have is your integrity, and he knows his audience trusts him and he never loses sight of how he will lose in the long run if he sells out. Find companies that are already advertising in your space (like a magazine), find out how much they are spending (call to see how much it costs to advertise) and explain how you have their target audience, and that you can put their brand in front of them for less money. 

                    Become the Official Radio Station of  Your Industry (29:42)

                    Glenn went to an exclusive trade show for horses and told them he wanted to be the official radio station for their conference. All he wanted was a booth. The first year he had to explain what a podcast was. Eight years later he has sponsors begging to be on his show. He get's great content. He gets access to places others don't (this is not an open conference), and he starts building relationships with future sponsors of his show. This is absolutely brilliant.  The trade show gets free publicity, and Glenn gets access to sponsors and great content. 

                    Finding The Right Products

                    Glenn has a $250 pitch fork that the manufacturer was potentially having a hard time getting the word out about his product. Glenn's audience is using a manure fork while they listen. The Manure fork manufacturer now sponsors the show on his most popular segment on Fridays. He has been sponsoring for years (so it's working) 

                    Making His Advertisers Human

                    By using his sponsors as experts, Glenn's audience gets to know the sponsor on a more personal level. It makes them human and increases sales. This is why 70% of Glenn's sponsors continue to advertise with him. Glenn built his podcast audience by connecting to people who shared his passion - not through gaming iTunes, or Spamming Twitter. (Amen brother!). 

                    Make It Easy To Promote Your Show

                    Glenn sends a note to all of his guests with a pre-written note and a link to the show notes and a link to the mp3 file. 

                    Good Shows Aren't an Accident

                    Glenn spends around six hours on an episode from start to finish. The more your prepare the less you have to edit. While only a small portion of his audience listens live, he wants the show to feel live. To do live, you need to be prepared when the recording light goes on. 

                    The Best Interviews Come From Your Listeners

                    While you may land a "big/famous" person on your show, often the best interviews and segments come from your audience. A "big" name may not have a ton of time to promote your show, and your audience is often at the places/events where your audience is - and deliver great content. In addition, your audience gets excited to be on their show and they tell other people about their appearance. I did a whole show on getting your audience involved. 

                    ...]]>Glenn the geek has been podcasting since 2008. He does it full time. He grew his audience by reaching out to leaders in his field and partnering with them. He has a background in sales, and found the right sponsors for his shows. He embraces his audience, and knows that if you want people to listen you have to be entertaining. You might be thinking that if he is making a living from his podcast he must've had some huge podcast launching and rocked the top of the iTunes charts, and lived in New and Noteworthy. While that may be true, Glenn wouldn't know. You see, Glenn focuses on his audience. He focuses on making great content that entertains and educates. It wasn't until recently that he even knew to ask for reviews. He did it the old fashioned way. He earned their trust, and never lets his audience down. Consequently, they don't let him down. As a salesmen, he has made more money in the past. However, he is now making a living and having more fun talking about a topic he is addicted to (horses) and loving every minute of it. Today get a pencil ready as we interview America's Favorite Horse Husband Glenn the Geek from Horse Radio Network.
                    Podcast Rewind (2:43)

                    Paul Colligan lays it on the line in the Episode title The Weird Thing About Podcasting For Money

                    Rob Walch was interviewed on Podcast Junkies on the Truth about Podcast Numbers (the stats start at the 52 minute mark).

                    Glenn the Geek America's Horse Husband (5:47)

                    Here are some of the top takeaways

                    Glenn started with ONE podcast. Glenn put all his efforts into this show. He started with ONE.

                    He got a sponsor early even though he didn't have thousands of listeners. How? By finding an advertiser who was more interested in promoting their brand than delivering a coupon.

                    Glenn gets his sponsors involved in his show. He uses them to answer questions from his listeners. This is a great way to promote the brand, make the brand look like an expert, without having a giant commercial.

                    Glenn KNOWS HIS AUDIENCE. They are addicted to horses and aren't the most technical bunch. You will see on horseradionetwork.com that Glenn has step by step tutorials to help his audience learn how to listen (on every single type of device).

                    If you know you're going to have a network, promote from episode 1 (even if the network doesn't exist). This way when it DOES exist people who catch your early shows will have the same branding (Glenn was following the model of Twit.tv).

                    Glenn is not a horse expert, but he shares a passion for horses and he plays the role of "Average Horsemen" on the show. You don't need to be an expert to start a podcast.

                    He used Blog Talk Radio but left due to poor audio quality (Blog Talk Radio just unveiled their upgraded service which now delivers CD quality and allows you to connect directly to the service without using a phone or skype). He now uses Call In Studio, and Mixlr to stream live.

                    Glenn does use CPM for selling ads. He sells a flat rate per episode. He advises his sponsors to purchase three months of ads to start out (he prefers 6 months).

                    Glenn used Big Contact to make a player that can be shared on other websites. Big Contact is no longer accepting submissions. You can do this using the Libsyn Player, the Player from Blubrry.com (under conntect), Podtrac.com, or you can make your own using Wimpy Player.

                    Glenn only lets products he uses sponsor his show. The only thing you have is your integrity, and he knows his audience trusts him and he never loses sight of how he will lose in the long run if he sells out. Find companies that are already advertising in your space (like a magazine), find out how much they are spending (call to see how much it costs to advertise) and explain how you have their target audience, and that you can put their brand in front of them for less money. 

                    Become the Official Radio Station of  Your Industry (29:42)

                    Glenn went to an exclusive trade show for horses and told them he wanted to be the official radio station for their conference. All he wanted was a booth. The first year he had to explain what a podcast was. Eight years later he has sponsors begging to be on his show. He get's great content. He gets access to places others don't (this is not an open conference), and he starts building relationships with future sponsors of his show. This is absolutely brilliant.  The trade show gets free publicity, and Glenn gets access to sponsors and great content. 

                    Finding The Right Products

                    Glenn has a $250 pitch fork that the manufacturer was potentially having a hard time getting the word out about his product. Glenn's audience is using a manure fork while they listen. The Manure fork manufacturer now sponsors the show on his most popular segment on Fridays. He has been sponsoring for years (so it's working) 

                    Making His Advertisers Human

                    By using his sponsors as experts, Glenn's audience gets to know the sponsor on a more personal level. It makes them human and increases sales. This is why 70% of Glenn's sponsors continue to advertise with him. Glenn built his podcast audience by connecting to people who shared his passion - not through gaming iTunes, or Spamming Twitter. (Amen brother!). 

                    Make It Easy To Promote Your Show

                    Glenn sends a note to all of his guests with a pre-written note and a link to the show notes and a link to the mp3 file. 

                    Good Shows Aren't an Accident

                    Glenn spends around six hours on an episode from start to finish. The more your prepare the less you have to edit. While only a small portion of his audience listens live, he wants the show to feel live. To do live, you need to be prepared when the recording light goes on. 

                    The Best Interviews Come From Your Listeners

                    While you may land a "big/famous" person on your show, often the best interviews and segments come from your audience. A "big" name may not have a ton of time to promote your show, and your audience is often at the places/events where your audience is - and deliver great content. In addition, your audience gets excited to be on their show and they tell other people about their appearance. I did a whole show on getting your audience involved. 

                    Don't Be Boring (59:30)

                    While anyone can make a podcast, not everyone should. There may be people who want "just the facts" but Glenn feels you should entertain first, and educate second. By being entertaining you keep them listening. By providing value, you keep them coming back. He wants peopel going away from their show smiling and saying, "Hey I learned something." 

                    Check out all of Glenn's shows at horseradionetwork.com Podcasting News

                    John Lee Dumas of Entrepreneur on Fire has an article in Forbes Magazine

                    U2 appeared on the You talking U2 to me? 

                    Ready to start Podcasting

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>c22d198fcac38bfc8ac882710f0ca938Mon, 10 Aug 2015 04:00:00 -040001:07:54falsefull474474Word of Mouth Moments From Podcast MovementI attended Podcast Movement last week, and I am busting at the seems to tell you about it. To keep this short, here are my top memories and take always from Podcast movement.

                    1. The Door Key Was Branded

                    Yeah, you know the magnetic door key. It had their logo on it. I often lose hotel keys and have to ask for another one. I didn't this week. What a HUGE first impression. I told Dan and Jared that there was so much icing on the Podcast Movement cake that you could not get a bad piece of cake.

                    2. The Michelangelo Line from Lou Mongello

                    Lou Mongello is one of my favorite people. Lou is so authentic (you will see a theme here). In his keynote he just kept saying things that made me want to stand up and go "Preach On Lou!" (his talks was on Sunday). He said a line like,  "When people came in to look at a new painting from Michelangelo they didn't go, "Great Painting - What brush did you use?"

                    3. Ejecting Bad Guests - Jordan Harbinger

                    Jordan is like a Lioness guarding her cubs when it comes to his show. It's HIS show, and if you try to mess with HIS show he will kick you to the curb. Try to keep pimping your stuff on his show when he explained up front that the pimping (if any) would be done at the show and he will shut down the recorder and send you home. It's HIS show.

                    4. Aisha Tyler - It's MINE.

                    This one really hit home with me. How many things are truly 100% YOURS. Aisha has like 37 roles on TV, movies, etc. Yet, she records, edits, tags, uploads, and writes notes for her podcast. Why? She admitted she is an workaholic (transparent), and she said with all of her roles, her podcast is the only thing that is 100% hers. When a listener said she talked too much when interviewing a guest she advised him to get his own show (where he could be a mime for an hour).

                    5. Great Content - Different Angles

                    The combination of Lou Mongello (The Dean of Disney) and Aisea Tyler (a fanatic of the F word) was a bit of a whiplash, but it was AWESOME. Why? Because they both were hitting the same topics. Why? Because they are best practices. Don't get in it for the money. Be unique. Follow your heart. Make and learn from your mistakes.

                    6. Nice Flip Flops - Marc Maron

                    I'm standing in the Stockyards restaurant and in walks Marc Maron. I felt like I was on his TV show. There he was in cut off jean shorts and flip flops. Marc is Marc. He's authentically Maron. What you see is what you get. What you get is funny. I apologized for him having to be interviewed in Cleveland where the DJ had his staff vomit in the studio (Marc refused to go in the room). He laughed.

                    7. Embrace Your Audience - Marc Maron

                    There were tons of podcast "Celebrities" at this event. When Marc walked in, celebrity went to a new level. I felt honored to shake his hand. Later I saw where he took photo after photo with people who know like and trust him.

                    8. No Recording Devices  - Really Sarah Koenig?

                    You come to a podcast event and tell us to NOT record you? This left a bad taste in my mouth. It just seemed out of place. It seemed so ....RADIO. Afraid someone might post it to YouTube and you can't do the same presentation over and over? WOW.

                    9. Pat Flynn - How To Top A Delorean

                    Pat Flynn did got me. At one point I actually thought the mighty Pat Flynn had lost his place in his presentation. Then an English accent came out of the speakers. I found out later that each time the English voice (inside Pat's head) was created by Pat pressing a button. This was hugely entertaining. Once it was over, and you just realized what you saw, the magnitude of preparation had to be insane.  I once saw the band Genesis. Phil Collins and Chester Thompson did a 15 minute drum solo. Both men were completely 100% in sync. The longer it went on (with the beats getting more complex) the more mind boggling it became. Once it was over, you just kept asking, "How did they do that?" Pat, how did you do that? Pat entered the room with a movie and a Delorean at the New Media Expo.

                    10. I'm Getting Your Banner - Gary LeLeand

                    I've always needed a backdrop for my office. Part of the icing of PM15 was the banners outside the doors. They looked awesome. Call me weird, but I really like the one with my name on it. So I asked after the last presentation if I could have the banner with my name on it.  I asked different folks and they had to check some things. Later I was walking down the hallway and there was one of the creators of Podcast movement Gary LeLeand working with the banner. I asked him was he was up to and he said, "Getting your banner, do you have a screw driver on you?" I expected some hired hand to do this, not one of the co-founders. It was important to me, so it was important to them.

                    Listening to what your audience wants, and giving it to them. That's good old Podcasting 101.

                    11. A Quick Handshake out the Door - John Lee Dumas

                    I was watching a keynote on Sunday when I felt a hand on my shoulder, I turned around and there was John Lee Dumas extending his hand. He said, "I'm taking off it was great to see you." I am a big fan of JLD. He is the energizer bunny of podcasting. His combination of talent, charisma, dedication, and delivery have served him well. He is the poster child of, "It is possible to make money with podcasting." If I had a nickle for every time someone said the words "John Lee Dumas" at this convention I would be rich as well, John Lee Dumas. I had wanted to hang out with him at the Stockyards, but silly me, there were two additional rooms that I never discovered (and all of my friends apparently were in those rooms). When I was an award winning customer service representative I discovered that its the little things that mean alot - like a handshake out the door.

                    12. Life is Like a Box of Chocolates - Glenn the Geek

                    I will be interviewing Glenn next week. Glenn is the man behind www.horseradionetwork.com and while Glenn was not even supposed to talk, he did an impromtu speech on Friday that blew me away. I can't wait to interviewing him, and share his story. He has been podcasting for 8 years, and it is his full time gig. I can't wait for you to meet him.

                    I attended Podcast Movement last week, and I am busting at the seems to tell you about it. To keep this short, here are my top memories and take always from Podcast movement.

                    1. The Door Key Was Branded

                    Yeah, you know the magnetic door key. It had their logo on it. I often lose hotel keys and have to ask for another one. I didn't this week. What a HUGE first impression. I told Dan and Jared that there was so much icing on the Podcast Movement cake that you could not get a bad piece of cake.

                    2. The Michelangelo Line from Lou Mongello

                    Lou Mongello is one of my favorite people. Lou is so authentic (you will see a theme here). In his keynote he just kept saying things that made me want to stand up and go "Preach On Lou!" (his talks was on Sunday). He said a line like,  "When people came in to look at a new painting from Michelangelo they didn't go, "Great Painting - What brush did you use?"

                    3. Ejecting Bad Guests - Jordan Harbinger

                    Jordan is like a Lioness guarding her cubs when it comes to his show. It's HIS show, and if you try to mess with HIS show he will kick you to the curb. Try to keep pimping your stuff on his show when he explained up front that the pimping (if any) would be done at the show and he will shut down the recorder and send you home. It's HIS show.

                    4. Aisha Tyler - It's MINE.

                    This one really hit home with me. How many things are truly 100% YOURS. Aisha has like 37 roles on TV, movies, etc. Yet, she records, edits, tags, uploads, and writes notes for her podcast. Why? She admitted she is an workaholic (transparent), and she said with all of her roles, her podcast is the only thing that is 100% hers. When a listener said she talked too much when interviewing a guest she advised him to get his own show (where he could be a mime for an hour).

                    5. Great Content - Different Angles

                    The combination of Lou Mongello (The Dean of Disney) and Aisea Tyler (a fanatic of the F word) was a bit of a whiplash, but it was AWESOME. Why? Because they both were hitting the same topics. Why? Because they are best practices. Don't get in it for the money. Be unique. Follow your heart. Make and learn from your mistakes.

                    6. Nice Flip Flops - Marc Maron

                    I'm standing in the Stockyards restaurant and in walks Marc Maron. I felt like I was on his TV show. There he was in cut off jean shorts and flip flops. Marc is Marc. He's authentically Maron. What you see is what you get. What you get is funny. I apologized for him having to be interviewed in Cleveland where the DJ had his staff vomit in the studio (Marc refused to go in the room). He laughed.

                    7. Embrace Your Audience - Marc Maron

                    There were tons of podcast "Celebrities" at this event. When Marc walked in, celebrity went to a new level. I felt honored to shake his hand. Later I saw where he took photo after photo with people who know like and trust him.

                    8. No Recording Devices  - Really Sarah Koenig?

                    You come to a podcast event and tell us to NOT record you? This left a bad taste in my mouth. It just seemed out of place. It seemed so ....RADIO. Afraid someone might post it to YouTube and you can't do the same presentation over and over? WOW.

                    9. Pat Flynn - How To Top A Delorean

                    Pat Flynn did got me. At one point I actually thought the mighty Pat Flynn had lost his place in his presentation. Then an English accent came out of the speakers. I found out later that each time the English voice (inside Pat's head) was created by Pat pressing a button. This was hugely entertaining. Once it was over, and you just realized what you saw, the magnitude of preparation had to be insane.  I once saw the band Genesis. Phil Collins and Chester Thompson did a 15 minute drum solo. Both men were completely 100% in sync. The longer it went on (with the beats getting more complex) the more mind boggling it became. Once it was over, you just kept asking, "How did they do that?" Pat, how did you do that? Pat entered the room with a movie and a Delorean at the New Media Expo.

                    10. I'm Getting Your Banner - Gary LeLeand

                    I've always needed a backdrop for my office. Part of the icing of PM15 was the banners outside the doors. They looked awesome. Call me weird, but I really like the one with my name on it. So I asked after the last presentation if I could have the banner with my name on it.  I asked different folks and they had to check some things. Later I was walking down the hallway and there was one of the creators of Podcast movement Gary LeLeand working with the banner. I asked him was he was up to and he said, "Getting your banner, do you have a screw driver on you?" I expected some hired hand to do this, not one of the co-founders. It was important to me, so it was important to them.

                    Listening to what your audience wants, and giving it to them. That's good old Podcasting 101.

                    11. A Quick Handshake out the Door - John Lee Dumas

                    I was watching a keynote on Sunday when I felt a hand on my shoulder, I turned around and there was John Lee Dumas extending his hand. He said, "I'm taking off it was great to see you." I am a big fan of JLD. He is the energizer bunny of podcasting. His combination of talent, charisma, dedication, and delivery have served him well. He is the poster child of, "It is possible to make money with podcasting." If I had a nickle for every time someone said the words "John Lee Dumas" at this convention I would be rich as well, John Lee Dumas. I had wanted to hang out with him at the Stockyards, but silly me, there were two additional rooms that I never discovered (and all of my friends apparently were in those rooms). When I was an award winning customer service representative I discovered that its the little things that mean alot - like a handshake out the door.

                    12. Life is Like a Box of Chocolates - Glenn the Geek

                    I will be interviewing Glenn next week. Glenn is the man behind www.horseradionetwork.com and while Glenn was not even supposed to talk, he did an impromtu speech on Friday that blew me away. I can't wait to interviewing him, and share his story. He has been podcasting for 8 years, and it is his full time gig. I can't wait for you to meet him.

                    13. UBER

                    I went to lunch with David Hooper and Mark Johansen. I was courageous enough to take up Dave's offer to get an uber for us. It was a great experience. Paul Colligan heard me tell him about it, so he sent me a link to get me $20 off my first ride. This proved again that you pay with things in two currencies money or time. It would've cost me an extra 20 to take Uber to the airport, but Paul's coupon took that away and instead of waiting for the shuttle, to then wait for the shuttle to fill up, I got to sleep more.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Ceck out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>4c8f2d7f102a5ac4da6550b54eccc10aWed, 05 Aug 2015 17:15:02 -040038:09falsefull473473USB Microphone ShoooutMidroll Purchased by Scripps - Another shot of legitimacy for podcasting? Ask the Double Rainbow Guy The article mentions CPM (the amount you make per 1000 downloads) of $100. This seems unrealistic to what I typically hear ($15 - $30 CPM).

                    Honda's 2016 Accord will have the ability to have Apple Car Play, and Android Auto. Full Story

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I recently was asked back on the Coachzing Show  talking why podcasting is here to stay.

                    I did a webinar with Steve Stewart on Podcast Workflow for his Audacity Workshop its only available for a limited time

                    I started listening to the Tim Ferriss show, and the one thing that he us just AWESOME at is follow up questions. When he interviewed Rick Rubin he asked how Rick got into the 99 Problems video by Jay Z. At the end of the answer Rick says, "He is one of my favorite people." To this Tim instantly asks, "Why do you say that?". Later when he interviews Glenn Beck he asks about Glenn's dilema of having to hire a large amount of people to build his Blaze network. Glen explains who he hired first. He said he knew within the first three minutes of their initial meeting that this woman was going to be hired. To this Tim instantly asked, "What did she say to make such an impression on you." It's an interesting show, and he has interviewed so many big names, that you can "cherry pick" episodes of just those people you like.

                    Podcast Microphone Shoot Out

                    Audio Technica 2020 (condensor XLR/USB $99)

                    Audio Technica 2100 (Dynamic XLR/USB $59)

                    Audio Technica BP40 (Dynamic XLR $349)

                    Electrovoice RE320 (Dynamic XLR $299).

                    You will hear that all these microphones sound great. I recommend podcasters NOT use a condensor microphone (2020). In listening to the 2005 vs the BP40. The 2100 seemed to carry more bass (odd as they have the same bass frequency). There is a low cut switch on the BP40 if you want to cut frequencies below 100 (these are so low, these are almost frequencies you feel more than hear).

                    The one thing that hit me right out of the gate is this microphone can double as a weapon. Its super solid, looks good, and just seem heavy duty. I really liked the AT8484 shock mount that is designed to be used with the microphone. It has a super slick lock that allows you to slide it in and out with ease (not that most of us will be switching microphones, but it is cool). As the shock mount is designed for the unit, it holds it well. I have a "off the shelf" shock mount for the RE320 and it seems a little strained to hold it (so here again sticking with factory stuff, even though slightly more expensive might be the way to go).

                    Test One: Gain

                    How much gain is coming out of the microphone?

                    All of the microphones seemed to need the same amount of gain. It seemed like the BP40 did provide a little more (and needed less gain).

                    Test Two: Tone

                    The ATR2100 (for me) had the most pleasing tone. Plenty of low and high end. The RE320 was the clearest, and the BP40 had a smooth sound (but didn't have the hi end of the RE20)

                    What is my first impression?

                    I love the look of the BP40. It's super rugged. It's super solid. I LOVE the shock mount that is an accessory as it is SUPER EASY to snap the microphone in and out.

                    Test Three: How much room noise does it pick up?

                    I put a fan on in the background and turned the radio on lightly. None of the microphones (accept the 2020) would pick up a noticeable amount of room noise. Can you hear it? Yes, but only if you are in a quiet room listening through headphones. Of the 2100, the bp40, and the RE320, it seemed the BP40 seemed to pick up the most room noise (but again, the amount of noise was something you would really have to strain to hear).

                    For me, for the money and the flexibility I still like the Audio Technica 2100. Now, the ATR2100 is not as durable as the BP40 or the RE320. These are microphones designed to be in a broadcast booth. They (the BP40 and the RE320) definitely have different tones (the RE320 is more clear). Keep mind you want your voice to not be abrasive or distracting. So having too much high end, or too much low end can ruin your tone.  The more I use the BP40, it's really growing on me especially when I run it through my DBX 286 microphone preamp.

                    Bottom Line:

                    I couldn't really pick one that was miles above the others. I liked all the microphones, and when run through a mixer where you can boost and cut the EQ I was able to pull out any tone I wanted. None of them had any major proximity effect issues.  I like the look for the BP40 more then the RE320. As always tone is a very subjective, and in the end it depends on how the microphone works with your voice.

                    Which one did you like?

                    Ready to Podcast check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Midroll Purchased by Scripps - Another shot of legitimacy for podcasting? Ask the Double Rainbow Guy The article mentions CPM (the amount you make per 1000 downloads) of $100. This seems unrealistic to what I typically hear ($15 - $30 CPM).

                    Honda's 2016 Accord will have the ability to have Apple Car Play, and Android Auto. Full Story

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I recently was asked back on the Coachzing Show  talking why podcasting is here to stay.

                    I did a webinar with Steve Stewart on Podcast Workflow for his Audacity Workshop its only available for a limited time

                    I started listening to the Tim Ferriss show, and the one thing that he us just AWESOME at is follow up questions. When he interviewed Rick Rubin he asked how Rick got into the 99 Problems video by Jay Z. At the end of the answer Rick says, "He is one of my favorite people." To this Tim instantly asks, "Why do you say that?". Later when he interviews Glenn Beck he asks about Glenn's dilema of having to hire a large amount of people to build his Blaze network. Glen explains who he hired first. He said he knew within the first three minutes of their initial meeting that this woman was going to be hired. To this Tim instantly asked, "What did she say to make such an impression on you." It's an interesting show, and he has interviewed so many big names, that you can "cherry pick" episodes of just those people you like.

                    Podcast Microphone Shoot Out

                    Audio Technica 2020 (condensor XLR/USB $99)

                    Audio Technica 2100 (Dynamic XLR/USB $59)

                    Audio Technica BP40 (Dynamic XLR $349)

                    Electrovoice RE320 (Dynamic XLR $299).

                    You will hear that all these microphones sound great. I recommend podcasters NOT use a condensor microphone (2020). In listening to the 2005 vs the BP40. The 2100 seemed to carry more bass (odd as they have the same bass frequency). There is a low cut switch on the BP40 if you want to cut frequencies below 100 (these are so low, these are almost frequencies you feel more than hear).

                    The one thing that hit me right out of the gate is this microphone can double as a weapon. Its super solid, looks good, and just seem heavy duty. I really liked the AT8484 shock mount that is designed to be used with the microphone. It has a super slick lock that allows you to slide it in and out with ease (not that most of us will be switching microphones, but it is cool). As the shock mount is designed for the unit, it holds it well. I have a "off the shelf" shock mount for the RE320 and it seems a little strained to hold it (so here again sticking with factory stuff, even though slightly more expensive might be the way to go).

                    Test One: Gain

                    How much gain is coming out of the microphone?

                    All of the microphones seemed to need the same amount of gain. It seemed like the BP40 did provide a little more (and needed less gain).

                    Test Two: Tone

                    The ATR2100 (for me) had the most pleasing tone. Plenty of low and high end. The RE320 was the clearest, and the BP40 had a smooth sound (but didn't have the hi end of the RE20)

                    What is my first impression?

                    I love the look of the BP40. It's super rugged. It's super solid. I LOVE the shock mount that is an accessory as it is SUPER EASY to snap the microphone in and out.

                    Test Three: How much room noise does it pick up?

                    I put a fan on in the background and turned the radio on lightly. None of the microphones (accept the 2020) would pick up a noticeable amount of room noise. Can you hear it? Yes, but only if you are in a quiet room listening through headphones. Of the 2100, the bp40, and the RE320, it seemed the BP40 seemed to pick up the most room noise (but again, the amount of noise was something you would really have to strain to hear).

                    For me, for the money and the flexibility I still like the Audio Technica 2100. Now, the ATR2100 is not as durable as the BP40 or the RE320. These are microphones designed to be in a broadcast booth. They (the BP40 and the RE320) definitely have different tones (the RE320 is more clear). Keep mind you want your voice to not be abrasive or distracting. So having too much high end, or too much low end can ruin your tone.  The more I use the BP40, it's really growing on me especially when I run it through my DBX 286 microphone preamp.

                    Bottom Line:

                    I couldn't really pick one that was miles above the others. I liked all the microphones, and when run through a mixer where you can boost and cut the EQ I was able to pull out any tone I wanted. None of them had any major proximity effect issues.  I like the look for the BP40 more then the RE320. As always tone is a very subjective, and in the end it depends on how the microphone works with your voice.

                    Which one did you like?

                    Ready to Podcast check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>3b56c0c4a7ee63ee4e006bee9ad24d59Mon, 27 Jul 2015 04:00:00 -040058:31falsefull472472Podcasting's Most Frequently Asked QuestionsToday I will answer the questions that I receive on a regualr basis. 

                     

                    Podcasting News:

                    Popular Science has launched a Podcast caled Futuropolis

                    Salary.com listed "On Air DJ" as one of the the top 12th jobs on the brink. Speaking of that, CBS Radio eliminated more than 200 positions in companywide layoffs this week, including an unconfirmed number in Chicago

                    Ira Glass now owns This American Life. The interesting thing is this artcile mentions that he has 22 employees.  In March 2014, This American Life ended its relationship with PRI, who had served as the show’s distributor since 1997, flexing its muscles in a way that suggested long-running intent towards independence. Speaking of employees on the latest "But wait theres more" episode of Startup, Alex Blumberg states that he has a staff of 19 people to produce three pdocasts and they are making 2 milloin dollars this year (and spending 2 million).  

                    FREQUNETLY ASKED QUESTIONS

                    How much does it cost to start one?

                    $91 Mic, Stand, Pop filter

                    $60 Mixer

                    $20 Libsyn (use the coupon sopfree)

                    $8 Hostgator

                    $60 Artwork

                    $24 Intro MRC

                    $263

                    Xbox One, 500GB Hard Drive $342

                    What Microphone

                    The Audio technica 2100, 2005, or a Electrovoice RE320. I hear good things about the Heil PR40 as well. I like the EV RE320 as no matter where my mouth is, the tone doesn’t change (with other microphones the close you get the bassier it gets).

                    How Long Should it Be?

                    As long as it should be, and not a minute more. Vallery Geller in the book Beyond Powerful Radio says, “There is no such thing as too long, only too boring.” This is proven by Dan Carlin’s Hardcore history which can run around 3 or 4 hours and published irregularly.

                    How Often Should I Publish

                    As I previously mentioned Dan Carlin’s show, you should publish a podcast that consistently delivers value, and impacts your audience. However, if you can establish a schedule that your audience can count on, they will make you part of their routine. My advice is record a few test shows so you can fully understand the work it takes to create a podcast, THEN pick your publishing schedule. While you will hear people talk about doing multiple episodes a week, keep in mind these are multiple shows that deliver value.

                    Where do I get Music For My Show?

                    Podcasting-Resource.com

                    I like Audio Jungle

                    Can I play Music in My Podcast?

                    No. Not Legally?

                    Do People do it? Yes

                    Will it get you banned from iHeart Radio? Yes

                    What’s the Best Media Hosting?

                    Libsyn Great stats, ease of mutli location publishing.

                    Blubrry - Great Stats, Ease of Publishing your podcast

                    Spreaker - Good stats, built in audience.

                    Podbean - OK Stats,

                    Can I Use my Web Host as My Media Host?

                    You can, but should you? No.

                    Listen to SDR Show. It took him 6 weeks to get shut down.

                    How Many Downloads Should I Have?

                    Take the value the value you provide and multiply it by the effort your put forth to promote it, and there is your number. For the average Joe, it should be between 10 and 200 downloads per episode.

                    Here are my download numbers:

                    Ask the Podcast Coach 250

                    Jillian Michaels Fan Cast 2000

                    Building a Better Dave around 300

                    Marketing Musician 600

                    Weekly Web Tools 325

                    SOP 1600

                    Feeding My Fatih 150

                    Wost Podcast Ever 10

                    How Do I Grow My Audience?

                    Figure out who your audience is

                    Make content people want to talk about that impact them

                    Go to where they

                    Make friends

                    Tell them about your Podcast

                    Make it easy to share

                    Sounds like a lot of work.

                    Simple, not easy.

                    If I Write a Review for you in iTunes will you Review Me?

                    Why are you asking a stranger to review your show, why not ask your audience?

                    No, I mean I want you to Review my podcast?

                    See podcastreviewshow.com

                    Should I Buy?

                    A Mixer?

                    Do you have more than one person in the...]]>Today I will answer the questions that I receive on a regualr basis. 

                     

                    Podcasting News:

                    Popular Science has launched a Podcast caled Futuropolis

                    Salary.com listed "On Air DJ" as one of the the top 12th jobs on the brink. Speaking of that, CBS Radio eliminated more than 200 positions in companywide layoffs this week, including an unconfirmed number in Chicago

                    Ira Glass now owns This American Life. The interesting thing is this artcile mentions that he has 22 employees.  In March 2014, This American Life ended its relationship with PRI, who had served as the show’s distributor since 1997, flexing its muscles in a way that suggested long-running intent towards independence. Speaking of employees on the latest "But wait theres more" episode of Startup, Alex Blumberg states that he has a staff of 19 people to produce three pdocasts and they are making 2 milloin dollars this year (and spending 2 million).  

                    FREQUNETLY ASKED QUESTIONS

                    How much does it cost to start one?

                    $91 Mic, Stand, Pop filter

                    $60 Mixer

                    $20 Libsyn (use the coupon sopfree)

                    $8 Hostgator

                    $60 Artwork

                    $24 Intro MRC

                    $263

                    Xbox One, 500GB Hard Drive $342

                    What Microphone

                    The Audio technica 2100, 2005, or a Electrovoice RE320. I hear good things about the Heil PR40 as well. I like the EV RE320 as no matter where my mouth is, the tone doesn’t change (with other microphones the close you get the bassier it gets).

                    How Long Should it Be?

                    As long as it should be, and not a minute more. Vallery Geller in the book Beyond Powerful Radio says, “There is no such thing as too long, only too boring.” This is proven by Dan Carlin’s Hardcore history which can run around 3 or 4 hours and published irregularly.

                    How Often Should I Publish

                    As I previously mentioned Dan Carlin’s show, you should publish a podcast that consistently delivers value, and impacts your audience. However, if you can establish a schedule that your audience can count on, they will make you part of their routine. My advice is record a few test shows so you can fully understand the work it takes to create a podcast, THEN pick your publishing schedule. While you will hear people talk about doing multiple episodes a week, keep in mind these are multiple shows that deliver value.

                    Where do I get Music For My Show?

                    Podcasting-Resource.com

                    I like Audio Jungle

                    Can I play Music in My Podcast?

                    No. Not Legally?

                    Do People do it? Yes

                    Will it get you banned from iHeart Radio? Yes

                    What’s the Best Media Hosting?

                    Libsyn Great stats, ease of mutli location publishing.

                    Blubrry - Great Stats, Ease of Publishing your podcast

                    Spreaker - Good stats, built in audience.

                    Podbean - OK Stats,

                    Can I Use my Web Host as My Media Host?

                    You can, but should you? No.

                    Listen to SDR Show. It took him 6 weeks to get shut down.

                    How Many Downloads Should I Have?

                    Take the value the value you provide and multiply it by the effort your put forth to promote it, and there is your number. For the average Joe, it should be between 10 and 200 downloads per episode.

                    Here are my download numbers:

                    Ask the Podcast Coach 250

                    Jillian Michaels Fan Cast 2000

                    Building a Better Dave around 300

                    Marketing Musician 600

                    Weekly Web Tools 325

                    SOP 1600

                    Feeding My Fatih 150

                    Wost Podcast Ever 10

                    How Do I Grow My Audience?

                    Figure out who your audience is

                    Make content people want to talk about that impact them

                    Go to where they

                    Make friends

                    Tell them about your Podcast

                    Make it easy to share

                    Sounds like a lot of work.

                    Simple, not easy.

                    If I Write a Review for you in iTunes will you Review Me?

                    Why are you asking a stranger to review your show, why not ask your audience?

                    No, I mean I want you to Review my podcast?

                    See podcastreviewshow.com

                    Should I Buy?

                    A Mixer?

                    Do you have more than one person in the room with you?

                    Are you adding music and sounds live?

                    Are you interviewing people over skype?

                    YES

                    How Do I Record Skype or Interviews without getting too Technical

                    Ecamm Call Recorder schoolofpodcasting.com/callrecorder

                    Callburner on the PC. schoolofpodcasting.com/callburner

                    Ringr.us

                    If you understand Skype on a PC, have your guest use Skype on their smartphone.

                    Worst Case Scenari, uberconference.com (but it will sound like the phone).

                    How do I find guests for my show

                    Help a Reporter .com

                    Radio Guest List.com

                    Ask your guest.

                    Amazon.com New Releases

                    How Do Make Money With My Podcast

                    Create a show that delivers Value

                    Attract and audience.

                    1. Sponsors

                    2. Sell Products

                    3. Sell Other peoples products (affiliates)

                    4. Speaking Gigs

                    5. Membership Sites

                    6. Donations

                    7. Better insights into your audience.

                    
                    

                    How Do I Get Sponsors For My Show

                    Provide content a sponsor would want to put their name on.

                    Get 5,000 downloads (preferably 20,000) per episode

                    Create a Media kit explaining who is listening, how many there are, and explain how engaged they are.

                    8% of people have this number

                    Look into Affiliate marketing, or smaller companies.

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>af04c448d3b057ce6c374cc523a4a5d8Mon, 20 Jul 2015 04:00:00 -040001:07:39falsefull471471Behind the Scenes of the Worst Podcast EverIn today's episode, (not safe for work) I share clips from a podcast I set out (as an experiment) to be the Worst Podcast Ever. It would:

                    1. Have F-bombs.

                    2. Insult the audience.

                    3. Deliver no value

                    4. Use Potty humor and be overtly immature

                    The reason? I had two:

                    1. I wanted to test podbean.com (who during the test had a technical issue, and my files quit downloading).

                    2. I wanted to see what kind of downloads a horrible podcast would get. I've heard from Libsyn that many podcasters get around 200 downloads per episode. (get a free month at Libsyn using the coupon code sopfree )

                    The worst podcast ever gets about 10.

                    Rules for Experiment:

                    1. I could not use my real voice. I didn't want anyone to know it was me. 

                    2. I could not promote it at all. Not a single tweet.

                    Doing a Podcast as a Character:

                    This is not new. "Madge Weinstein" has been doing yeast Radio since 2004. There are people who do not use their names such as School of Podcasting student Stargate Pioneer who does the Legends of Shield podcast. Cali Lewis has always been Luria Petrucci behind the scenese of Geekslife.com

                    You may feel more confident behind the microphone as your character then in your own skin. I say "Fake it till you make it" (you will get comfortable as yourself) but being a character is an option. People like Seth McFarland get away with tons of things on their TV show The Family Guy as the characters are cartoons. The Simpsons is another example of characters getting away with things a real person would not. 

                    But in the end Seth still takes flack for his characters. 

                    The down side of being a character is connecting with your audience. I met Paul David Peterson of Entrepreneur Explosion. Paul's show is a parody of all the Entrepreneur shows. Paul is not his real name. If I want to meet Paul at Podcast Movement or New Media Expo, I can't if he is completely incognito. In my case my character on the Worst Podcast Ever was simply named "Grumpy Old Man." What if AARP wants Grumpy to come speak at a convention? These characters don't exist in reality. 

                    The Stylizer 3000

                    Today I play a bit that I included in today's show to get you to think about all the different styles that you can use to create your podcast. There are SO MANY ingredients that you can use to create a completely unique podcast. I worry that people will not take me seriously as a podcast consultant if I'm too goofy on the microphone. I guess we will see.

                    Podcast Rewind: Formats on the Podcasters Roundtable

                    I participated on the Podcasters Roundtbale Episode 53 with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Colin Gray +Paul Peterson and+Doug Payton to discuss the various types of formats you can chose for your podcast. Check it out 

                    Ready To Start a Podcast?

                    If you're ready to start a podcast SIGN UP TODAY, and rest assured you will have everything you need to learn how to launch a successful podcast. 

                    ]]>In today's episode, (not safe for work) I share clips from a podcast I set out (as an experiment) to be the Worst Podcast Ever. It would:

                    1. Have F-bombs.

                    2. Insult the audience.

                    3. Deliver no value

                    4. Use Potty humor and be overtly immature

                    The reason? I had two:

                    1. I wanted to test podbean.com (who during the test had a technical issue, and my files quit downloading).

                    2. I wanted to see what kind of downloads a horrible podcast would get. I've heard from Libsyn that many podcasters get around 200 downloads per episode. (get a free month at Libsyn using the coupon code sopfree )

                    The worst podcast ever gets about 10.

                    Rules for Experiment:

                    1. I could not use my real voice. I didn't want anyone to know it was me. 

                    2. I could not promote it at all. Not a single tweet.

                    Doing a Podcast as a Character:

                    This is not new. "Madge Weinstein" has been doing yeast Radio since 2004. There are people who do not use their names such as School of Podcasting student Stargate Pioneer who does the Legends of Shield podcast. Cali Lewis has always been Luria Petrucci behind the scenese of Geekslife.com

                    You may feel more confident behind the microphone as your character then in your own skin. I say "Fake it till you make it" (you will get comfortable as yourself) but being a character is an option. People like Seth McFarland get away with tons of things on their TV show The Family Guy as the characters are cartoons. The Simpsons is another example of characters getting away with things a real person would not. 

                    But in the end Seth still takes flack for his characters. 

                    The down side of being a character is connecting with your audience. I met Paul David Peterson of Entrepreneur Explosion. Paul's show is a parody of all the Entrepreneur shows. Paul is not his real name. If I want to meet Paul at Podcast Movement or New Media Expo, I can't if he is completely incognito. In my case my character on the Worst Podcast Ever was simply named "Grumpy Old Man." What if AARP wants Grumpy to come speak at a convention? These characters don't exist in reality. 

                    The Stylizer 3000

                    Today I play a bit that I included in today's show to get you to think about all the different styles that you can use to create your podcast. There are SO MANY ingredients that you can use to create a completely unique podcast. I worry that people will not take me seriously as a podcast consultant if I'm too goofy on the microphone. I guess we will see.

                    Podcast Rewind: Formats on the Podcasters Roundtable

                    I participated on the Podcasters Roundtbale Episode 53 with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Colin Gray +Paul Peterson and+Doug Payton to discuss the various types of formats you can chose for your podcast. Check it out 

                    Ready To Start a Podcast?

                    If you're ready to start a podcast SIGN UP TODAY, and rest assured you will have everything you need to learn how to launch a successful podcast. 

                    ]]>e8e252781fbef7a22a0e2b7a5f9d7196Mon, 13 Jul 2015 04:00:00 -040041:55falsefull470470Get in Line to Grow Your Podcasting AudienceSpreaker Live show with Rob Greenlee - My Appearance 

                    Darren Rowse from ProBlogger (now a podcast) on the New Rainmaker - Dareen started getting new listeners to his content less than 24 hours of launching his podcast.

                    Startup Podcast stated that 50% of customers at Dating Ring (the company they spotlighted this season) came from the Podcast

                    Serial Brought 341,000 New Listeners to Podcasting

                    6:00  Serial posted a report on their effect on podcasting

                    Serial had a 4.6 % of their audience respond to a survey

                    23% of their subscribers said this was their first podcast.

                    90% changed their viewpoint of podcasting.

                    137,000 Newsletter Subscribers

                    According to CNN (and these numbers are probably bigger by now) 3.4 million is the average number of downloads per episode (as of 12/2214)

                    If we take the percentages from the survey results and apply it to the download numbers you get this

                    23% (782,00) Serial was their first podcast

                    90% (703,800) said it changed the way they viewed podcasting.

                    89% (695980) of the first time listeners tried out more podcasts.

                    49% (341,030) of those who tried out more podcasts are listening on a weekly basis.

                    FULL REPORT

                    Free Subscribe By Email Service

                    12:18 Blubrry Launches Subscribe By Email service. This is a free way your audience to be notified (by email) of your latest episode. So if your audience is not super tech savvy, you can give them an option (for free) to subscribe and be notified when a new episode is available. It doesn't cost you or your audience any more and there are no ads in the emails to your customer. If you are looking for a free service that will always be free, this might be an option for you.

                    For me, if a listener of mine is giving out their e-mail that should go to ME. I can get an email list for free with a service like Mail Chimp. Eventually if you get a large list you do eventually have to pay for it.

                    Here is what it looks like

                    or you can just have a text link that reads Subscribe by Email

                    Finding Your (Captive) Target Audience

                    16:55 Promoting your podcast is simple, but not easy.

                    Here are the steps:

                    1. Identify who your audience is.

                    2. Make content that impacts and inspires them.

                    3. Go to where they are.

                    4. Make friends and build relationships with them.

                    5. Tell them about your podcast.

                    When you make content that impacts and/or inspires your audience they will talk about your podcast

                    I am working on an article for Podertainment Magazine about growing your audience. This month's article will be based on some stories in the book Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth in the book he mentions how the Bissell swepper company had a sweeper that was quiet (no motor ) and powerful (able to suck up small toys). They needed to get this in front of their target audience (Moms with small children).

                    They went to the mall and through pine tree needles on the group and swept them up - right in front of the line for Santa where their target audience was. The great thing is the kids got involved and took turns using the sweeper. Mom's took pictures and shared them. They told their friends about it and word of mouth marketing boosted sales by 15% the first year and 25% the second.

                    Musicians Playing Laundromats

                    Back in 2008 Dave interviewed a musician who had started playing gigs in Laundromats. The idea was the audience couldn't leave. He built a rapport with them, sold CDs, and eventually the audience started coming to gigs the musician did with his band.

                    Demo CD

                    Dave used the service Kunaki.com to make sample CDs. This was...]]>Spreaker Live show with Rob Greenlee - My Appearance 

                    Darren Rowse from ProBlogger (now a podcast) on the New Rainmaker - Dareen started getting new listeners to his content less than 24 hours of launching his podcast.

                    Startup Podcast stated that 50% of customers at Dating Ring (the company they spotlighted this season) came from the Podcast

                    Serial Brought 341,000 New Listeners to Podcasting

                    6:00  Serial posted a report on their effect on podcasting

                    Serial had a 4.6 % of their audience respond to a survey

                    23% of their subscribers said this was their first podcast.

                    90% changed their viewpoint of podcasting.

                    137,000 Newsletter Subscribers

                    According to CNN (and these numbers are probably bigger by now) 3.4 million is the average number of downloads per episode (as of 12/2214)

                    If we take the percentages from the survey results and apply it to the download numbers you get this

                    23% (782,00) Serial was their first podcast

                    90% (703,800) said it changed the way they viewed podcasting.

                    89% (695980) of the first time listeners tried out more podcasts.

                    49% (341,030) of those who tried out more podcasts are listening on a weekly basis.

                    FULL REPORT

                    Free Subscribe By Email Service

                    12:18 Blubrry Launches Subscribe By Email service. This is a free way your audience to be notified (by email) of your latest episode. So if your audience is not super tech savvy, you can give them an option (for free) to subscribe and be notified when a new episode is available. It doesn't cost you or your audience any more and there are no ads in the emails to your customer. If you are looking for a free service that will always be free, this might be an option for you.

                    For me, if a listener of mine is giving out their e-mail that should go to ME. I can get an email list for free with a service like Mail Chimp. Eventually if you get a large list you do eventually have to pay for it.

                    Here is what it looks like

                    or you can just have a text link that reads Subscribe by Email

                    Finding Your (Captive) Target Audience

                    16:55 Promoting your podcast is simple, but not easy.

                    Here are the steps:

                    1. Identify who your audience is.

                    2. Make content that impacts and inspires them.

                    3. Go to where they are.

                    4. Make friends and build relationships with them.

                    5. Tell them about your podcast.

                    When you make content that impacts and/or inspires your audience they will talk about your podcast

                    I am working on an article for Podertainment Magazine about growing your audience. This month's article will be based on some stories in the book Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth in the book he mentions how the Bissell swepper company had a sweeper that was quiet (no motor ) and powerful (able to suck up small toys). They needed to get this in front of their target audience (Moms with small children).

                    They went to the mall and through pine tree needles on the group and swept them up - right in front of the line for Santa where their target audience was. The great thing is the kids got involved and took turns using the sweeper. Mom's took pictures and shared them. They told their friends about it and word of mouth marketing boosted sales by 15% the first year and 25% the second.

                    Musicians Playing Laundromats

                    Back in 2008 Dave interviewed a musician who had started playing gigs in Laundromats. The idea was the audience couldn't leave. He built a rapport with them, sold CDs, and eventually the audience started coming to gigs the musician did with his band.

                    Demo CD

                    Dave used the service Kunaki.com to make sample CDs. This was filled with small clips of audio that secured credibility of the show, and gave great tips that would impact the audience. Dave delivered these to the local Gutiar Center (where his target audience - independent musicians shopped). Not the best use of this idea. The audience is not captive, and there is no way of tracking it (if I ever do this in the future, I will have a special address like schoolofpodcasting.com/cd  to track the effectiveness).

                    If you make a demo CD be sure to start off by telling people what to expect, and how they will benefit.

                    Catermind Sold Out - Waiting List Open

                    Last week Dave announced a new "group coaching" class called "Castermind" where people who already have launched a podcast could get personalized coaching at a discontented rate (three people in a group).  We will meet once a month and get access to a private group on slack.com If you missed it, you can sign up for the waiting list at www.castermind.com 

                    Mentioned on this Show

                    SDR Show

                    Podcast Review Show

                    Get Reviewed

                    Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World

                    Ready to Start Podcasting

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>b93d8ff30a40c43e564f5103060f64daMon, 06 Jul 2015 04:00:00 -040046:57falsefull469469Cale Nelson Had a Sponsor Before He Had His First Podcast RecordedI'm starting something new and I have room for three people. I may expand this in the future, but for now as I test this out there will be three people (four including me). We will meet once a month on a Tuesday night. We will talk about where we we are, and where we want to be. We will talk strategies, measuring our progress, and sharing what works and what does not. I am running this promotion via Joyride, so you can sign up here. Seating is limited.
                    Podcast Advertising Works

                    In a recent article about the popular podcast Serial, "81 percent of “Serial” listeners between October and December correctly recalled a season one sponsor. And almost all of them knew it was Mailchimp and what the email-marketing service does."

                    Podcast Advertising Pays - If You have the Numbers

                    An article on theawl.com stated this about podcast advertising (using Midroll). The company’s ads—“integrated, native, often host-read spots”—are hugely effective compared to most internet advertising, so businesses pay good money for them. Podcasts, which tend to run one or two ads before the show and two or three ads during the show, can earn around three hundred dollars per ad if they average at least ten thousand listeners. For the elite circle of shows with over four hundred thousand listeners—generally the iTunes Top 50—a single ad spot can net over ten thousand dollars.

                    Podcast Idol? WNYC Launches Podcast Accelerator

                    WYNC has launched what they are calling a Podcast Accelerator.

                    What is it?

                    The WNYC Podcast Accelerator will give both established talent and up-and-coming storytellers the opportunity to pitch their big podcast idea and potentially win the chance to produce a pilot.

                    The application period will run from June 25 until July 15. Five finalists will be paired with producers from top WNYC podcasts who will mentor and train the candidates, helping them hone their pitches. The winner gets the chance to produce a pilot episode with a WNYC producer. The Podcast Accelerator is open to anyone able to attend ONA and who is NOT a current employee of NYPR. The conference is $769.

                    Finalists get one complimentary ONA badge apiece, and benefit from a six-week virtual mentoring and training period, in which leading audio producers will help you hone your pitch, including story lines, character development, sound, texture, voice. In addition, you’ll have two virtual meetups with fellow finalists, ONA’s digital director and a WNYC producer to share ideas and progress. The winner will have a chance to create one pilot episode with a WNYC producer

                    The President Was Interviewed on Marc Maron's WTF Podcast

                    This episode set a new record for the most downloads in a 24 hour period ( 735,063 or 30,628 and hour, or 510 downloads a minute). The previous record holder was Dan Carlin with his Hardcore History podcast that had 351,000 downloads in 24 hours)

                    CarPlay and Android Auto Going into 14 Chevy Models.

                    While we've heard about Apple CarPlay and Android Auto a while back, they are starting to be installed that normal people can afford. For the 2016 model year, Chevrolet will offer Android Auto and Apple CarPlay compatibility in more models than any automotive brand. The 14 Chevrolet models include the all-new 2016 Cruze compact car, which will debut on June 24. Cruze is Chevrolet’s best-selling passenger car, with more than 3 million sold since launch. Additional models are listed in a chart below.

                    New Podcast Stats From Edison Research

                    A new Edison research report has come out on who is listening to podcast showing how podcasting is continuing to grow.

                    49% have now heard of podcasting

                    33% have listened to podcast

                    17% Have listened to a podcast in the last month.

                    Listeners are now 50/50 Men/Women

                    The Smartphone has had a HUGE impact on podcast growth.

                    Biggest Age Groups Listening to Podcasts:

                    20% 25 - 34

                    17% 35 - 44

                    15% 45 - 54

                    15% 18 -24

                    15% 12-17

                    12% 55 - 64

                    6%  65+

                    10% of Americans have listened to a podcast in the last week.

                    Podcast Listeners Have a Profile on 

                    77% FaceBook

                    66% Google +

                    36% Instagram

                    35% LinkedIn

                    33% Twitter

                    28% Snapchat

                    27% Pinterest

                    17% Vine

                    14% Tumblr

                    I'm starting something new and I have room for three people. I may expand this in the future, but for now as I test this out there will be three people (four including me). We will meet once a month on a Tuesday night. We will talk about where we we are, and where we want to be. We will talk strategies, measuring our progress, and sharing what works and what does not. I am running this promotion via Joyride, so you can sign up here. Seating is limited.
                    Podcast Advertising Works

                    In a recent article about the popular podcast Serial, "81 percent of “Serial” listeners between October and December correctly recalled a season one sponsor. And almost all of them knew it was Mailchimp and what the email-marketing service does."

                    Podcast Advertising Pays - If You have the Numbers

                    An article on theawl.com stated this about podcast advertising (using Midroll). The company’s ads—“integrated, native, often host-read spots”—are hugely effective compared to most internet advertising, so businesses pay good money for them. Podcasts, which tend to run one or two ads before the show and two or three ads during the show, can earn around three hundred dollars per ad if they average at least ten thousand listeners. For the elite circle of shows with over four hundred thousand listeners—generally the iTunes Top 50—a single ad spot can net over ten thousand dollars.

                    Podcast Idol? WNYC Launches Podcast Accelerator

                    WYNC has launched what they are calling a Podcast Accelerator.

                    What is it?

                    The WNYC Podcast Accelerator will give both established talent and up-and-coming storytellers the opportunity to pitch their big podcast idea and potentially win the chance to produce a pilot.

                    The application period will run from June 25 until July 15. Five finalists will be paired with producers from top WNYC podcasts who will mentor and train the candidates, helping them hone their pitches. The winner gets the chance to produce a pilot episode with a WNYC producer. The Podcast Accelerator is open to anyone able to attend ONA and who is NOT a current employee of NYPR. The conference is $769.

                    Finalists get one complimentary ONA badge apiece, and benefit from a six-week virtual mentoring and training period, in which leading audio producers will help you hone your pitch, including story lines, character development, sound, texture, voice. In addition, you’ll have two virtual meetups with fellow finalists, ONA’s digital director and a WNYC producer to share ideas and progress. The winner will have a chance to create one pilot episode with a WNYC producer

                    The President Was Interviewed on Marc Maron's WTF Podcast

                    This episode set a new record for the most downloads in a 24 hour period ( 735,063 or 30,628 and hour, or 510 downloads a minute). The previous record holder was Dan Carlin with his Hardcore History podcast that had 351,000 downloads in 24 hours)

                    CarPlay and Android Auto Going into 14 Chevy Models.

                    While we've heard about Apple CarPlay and Android Auto a while back, they are starting to be installed that normal people can afford. For the 2016 model year, Chevrolet will offer Android Auto and Apple CarPlay compatibility in more models than any automotive brand. The 14 Chevrolet models include the all-new 2016 Cruze compact car, which will debut on June 24. Cruze is Chevrolet’s best-selling passenger car, with more than 3 million sold since launch. Additional models are listed in a chart below.

                    New Podcast Stats From Edison Research

                    A new Edison research report has come out on who is listening to podcast showing how podcasting is continuing to grow.

                    49% have now heard of podcasting

                    33% have listened to podcast

                    17% Have listened to a podcast in the last month.

                    Listeners are now 50/50 Men/Women

                    The Smartphone has had a HUGE impact on podcast growth.

                    Biggest Age Groups Listening to Podcasts:

                    20% 25 - 34

                    17% 35 - 44

                    15% 45 - 54

                    15% 18 -24

                    15% 12-17

                    12% 55 - 64

                    6%  65+

                    10% of Americans have listened to a podcast in the last week.

                    Podcast Listeners Have a Profile on 

                    77% FaceBook

                    66% Google +

                    36% Instagram

                    35% LinkedIn

                    33% Twitter

                    28% Snapchat

                    27% Pinterest

                    17% Vine

                    14% Tumblr

                    60% use social media several times a day.

                    Cale Nelson Had a Sponsor Before He Started His Podcast

                    Cale Nelson is an awesome guy living on a farm in South Carolina with his five kids (who are home schooled). He spent a decade in Christian Radio, but with five kids switched jobs to devote more time at home. He missed the microphone. In 2014 he started the the Fo Time podcast (an inside joke for anyone in the Amateur/Ham Radio world). He approached a small "Mom and Pops" vendor of Amateur radio called MTC Radio about sponsoring a show he wanted to do.

                    As he had never met these people, all he waned for payment was the "Mom" of the shop to do his voice over work. In exchange for the Voice Over, he would mention their website. This would allow everyone to see if this was a good fit. Once this original "trial" portion was over they could meet and examine moving forward.

                    MTC Radio came on board. Things were going smooth, and the podcast grew fast. Cale states that in a few months his podcast numbers were 7 times what they were when he started. He went back to MTC radio to see if there was a way he could be paid more for the sponsorship. It turns out that MTC gets paid to promote certain products from companies like Kenwood. They took that money, and gave it to Cale to promote those products on his show. Now not only did he get the added funds he was looking for, he got MORE than he asked for.

                    The manufacturer benefits. MRC Radio benefits (because Cale sends his audio to their website to purchase the equipment). Cale benefits by making some spending cash.

                    LESSON LEARNED:
                    • You Don't Need Giant Sponsors For Your Show
                    • To get a sponsor you have to ask
                    • Treating your advertiser like a partner can lead to bigger payouts.
                    • Don't underestimate the power of the niche
                    
                    

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Ken Blanchard

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    See www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>55b4ae9e18262d1fe2c55b14c792634fMon, 29 Jun 2015 04:00:00 -040049:38falsefull468468Fanning The Fan Boys and Girls to Grow Your AudienceThere is a great saying, that those who learn from their mistakes are smart. Those who learn from other people's mistakes are wise. Marc Johansen sent in a voicemail stating how another podcasters who has been on the scene for almost to years stated that Apple created podcasting (they didn't) and many other obvious "untruths." It seems everyone who can press record has now dubbed themselves a podcast consultant. What is a person to do?
                    Because of My Podcast: Marc Maron

                    Marc Maron has already interviewed two of his childhood heroes in Mick Jagger and Keith Richards of the Rolling Stones and today he is releasing an episode where he go to interview The President of the United states. The President of the United States was on a podcast called WTF. Which makes me ask, WTF?

                    Why Good Podcast Consulting is Expensive

                    I occasionally get caught up with watching other consultants.  I was listening to a Duo who just launched their podcast course explain how they had to record their episode four times due to a strange white noise they get when using Skype, I want to shout "Turn off the setting to let Skype adjust your volume." Now if they had hired me to troubleshoot their problem that call would have taken 5 minutes (and the way I work, they would billed for minutes - not 15). Currently a five minute call with me would be around $12.50. You might say, "How can that be it only took you a few minutes!" The truth is it's taken me 10 years of playing with technology and working with hundreds of people and their podcasts.

                    My Podcast Dilemma

                    If I start calling people out, I look like an egotistical jerk. If I say nothing, there is a chance you might fall prey to their crap. When in doubt, focus on making content that will inspire and impact your audience and let the chips fall. If you truly impact your audience, they will tell others about your show.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on the Podcasters Roundtable with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Jerod Morris +Tawny Fineran and+Pilar Orti to discuss the ins and outs, ups and downs of having a podcast with co-hosts. You can hear it here.

                    If you do interviews you HAVE To go listen to Erik K Johnson Podcast Talent Coach podcast. OMG! He has been doing a four part series on Interviewing that is just super cool and really gets me thinking. Check him out at www.podcasttalentcoach.com

                    Follow Up On the Haters Episode: Last week we talked about dealing with negative comments and Max Flight had a great comment. He stated when someone sends you an email, tweet, etc that is negative. Ask them for their phone number of skype ID and ask them to have a live conversation. It will truly separate the men from the boys. In the end you may end up with a friend (who knows).

                    Daniel J Lewis celebrated five years with his Noodle Mix network. He did an episode where he shared what he has learned in the past five years.

                    A Strategy To Help Grow Your Audience: Say My Name

                    I was driving to Michigan and my GPS had taken my the same way it always does. I looked up to see the see that the road I was supposed to take was closed. Oh no. I started following detour signs, but I was supposed to be going north, and instead I was going south. The sun would be going down, and I was getting stressed. Luckily, one of my favorite podcast from Moondog Marketing came across my playlist. John Buscal has been on this show, and I've been on his. I love the way John breaks down marketing concepts into wording that anyone can grasp. The bonus he was interviewing Andy "Dr. Pod" White. Both these guys rock, and to have them on the same show was like Ted Nugent doing a duet with Eddie Van Halen. The best part, was the stress of being almost lost subsided. I wasn't alone with just me and the woman in my GPS. My buddies John and Andy where with me and I didn't care if I was late getting to the hotel.

                    Then it happened, they started talking about American Podcasters and before I knew it they were talking about ME. Later on the phone with my wife, I had to tell how stoked I was that my two buddies had said such kind words. I've shared the story before that when I was in Jr. High I had called a radio station and requested a song. They wouldn't play the song I wanted but instead asked me to ask them to play some Journey (or other non-metal band). Later, I heard myself on the radio. While the lack of authenticity some what ruined the moment, I WAS STILL ON THE RADIO!

                    So I asked the members of the School of Podcasting if they had this type of experience. It's not a huge surprise, but many of us had had similar experiences. When you hear your name of a podcast its a rush. In one case John Bukenas from  lets reverse obesity said he almost crashed his car. Nick Seuberling from spnt.tv told his wife who also got excited. My co-host Jim Collison from the Average Guy TV says he gets a holt every time I mention him on the show. I heard an episode of Ask Pat where the person who sent in the question stated he would "lose it" if he heard his voice on the show. Pat said that "losing it happens alot."

                    Make it Authentic

                    Does this mean you next podcast will just be you reading names? No. It's when someone mentions you, and they didn't have to that it maximizes the effect. I donate $10 to the Rock and Roll Geek show and every month Michael Butler reads me name. I am proud to support my friend, but its not the same jolt because he is supposed to read my name.

                    TANGENT: Let's take a tangent shall we? It has been said that the favorite word people like to hear is their name. I get that, and this episode helps illustrate that. But I do hate the fake use of names when I'm interviewing someone. I ask the question, and they say, "You know Dave that's a good question (no it's not), and Dave when I ...." It's like keyword stuffing. You're saying my name over and over trying to stimulate me. It is a strategy used by telemarketers. Podcating is about being real, and trying to butter me up with my name? I can smell that a mile away.

                    Contributors:

                    Doris Smith of the Knit and Pearl Podcast

                    Jason Bryant of Mat Talk Online

                    Mike Dell of Podcast Help Desk

                    Daniel J. Lewis of There is a great saying, that those who learn from their mistakes are smart. Those who learn from other people's mistakes are wise. Marc Johansen sent in a voicemail stating how another podcasters who has been on the scene for almost to years stated that Apple created podcasting (they didn't) and many other obvious "untruths." It seems everyone who can press record has now dubbed themselves a podcast consultant. What is a person to do?

                    Because of My Podcast: Marc Maron

                    Marc Maron has already interviewed two of his childhood heroes in Mick Jagger and Keith Richards of the Rolling Stones and today he is releasing an episode where he go to interview The President of the United states. The President of the United States was on a podcast called WTF. Which makes me ask, WTF?

                    Why Good Podcast Consulting is Expensive

                    I occasionally get caught up with watching other consultants.  I was listening to a Duo who just launched their podcast course explain how they had to record their episode four times due to a strange white noise they get when using Skype, I want to shout "Turn off the setting to let Skype adjust your volume." Now if they had hired me to troubleshoot their problem that call would have taken 5 minutes (and the way I work, they would billed for minutes - not 15). Currently a five minute call with me would be around $12.50. You might say, "How can that be it only took you a few minutes!" The truth is it's taken me 10 years of playing with technology and working with hundreds of people and their podcasts.

                    My Podcast Dilemma

                    If I start calling people out, I look like an egotistical jerk. If I say nothing, there is a chance you might fall prey to their crap. When in doubt, focus on making content that will inspire and impact your audience and let the chips fall. If you truly impact your audience, they will tell others about your show.

                    Podcast Rewind

                    I appeared on the Podcasters Roundtable with +Ray Ortega,+Daniel J. Lewis +David Jackson +Jerod Morris +Tawny Fineran and+Pilar Orti to discuss the ins and outs, ups and downs of having a podcast with co-hosts. You can hear it here.

                    If you do interviews you HAVE To go listen to Erik K Johnson Podcast Talent Coach podcast. OMG! He has been doing a four part series on Interviewing that is just super cool and really gets me thinking. Check him out at www.podcasttalentcoach.com

                    Follow Up On the Haters Episode: Last week we talked about dealing with negative comments and Max Flight had a great comment. He stated when someone sends you an email, tweet, etc that is negative. Ask them for their phone number of skype ID and ask them to have a live conversation. It will truly separate the men from the boys. In the end you may end up with a friend (who knows).

                    Daniel J Lewis celebrated five years with his Noodle Mix network. He did an episode where he shared what he has learned in the past five years.

                    A Strategy To Help Grow Your Audience: Say My Name

                    I was driving to Michigan and my GPS had taken my the same way it always does. I looked up to see the see that the road I was supposed to take was closed. Oh no. I started following detour signs, but I was supposed to be going north, and instead I was going south. The sun would be going down, and I was getting stressed. Luckily, one of my favorite podcast from Moondog Marketing came across my playlist. John Buscal has been on this show, and I've been on his. I love the way John breaks down marketing concepts into wording that anyone can grasp. The bonus he was interviewing Andy "Dr. Pod" White. Both these guys rock, and to have them on the same show was like Ted Nugent doing a duet with Eddie Van Halen. The best part, was the stress of being almost lost subsided. I wasn't alone with just me and the woman in my GPS. My buddies John and Andy where with me and I didn't care if I was late getting to the hotel.

                    Then it happened, they started talking about American Podcasters and before I knew it they were talking about ME. Later on the phone with my wife, I had to tell how stoked I was that my two buddies had said such kind words. I've shared the story before that when I was in Jr. High I had called a radio station and requested a song. They wouldn't play the song I wanted but instead asked me to ask them to play some Journey (or other non-metal band). Later, I heard myself on the radio. While the lack of authenticity some what ruined the moment, I WAS STILL ON THE RADIO!

                    So I asked the members of the School of Podcasting if they had this type of experience. It's not a huge surprise, but many of us had had similar experiences. When you hear your name of a podcast its a rush. In one case John Bukenas from  lets reverse obesity said he almost crashed his car. Nick Seuberling from spnt.tv told his wife who also got excited. My co-host Jim Collison from the Average Guy TV says he gets a holt every time I mention him on the show. I heard an episode of Ask Pat where the person who sent in the question stated he would "lose it" if he heard his voice on the show. Pat said that "losing it happens alot."

                    Make it Authentic

                    Does this mean you next podcast will just be you reading names? No. It's when someone mentions you, and they didn't have to that it maximizes the effect. I donate $10 to the Rock and Roll Geek show and every month Michael Butler reads me name. I am proud to support my friend, but its not the same jolt because he is supposed to read my name.

                    TANGENT: Let's take a tangent shall we? It has been said that the favorite word people like to hear is their name. I get that, and this episode helps illustrate that. But I do hate the fake use of names when I'm interviewing someone. I ask the question, and they say, "You know Dave that's a good question (no it's not), and Dave when I ...." It's like keyword stuffing. You're saying my name over and over trying to stimulate me. It is a strategy used by telemarketers. Podcating is about being real, and trying to butter me up with my name? I can smell that a mile away.

                    Contributors:

                    Doris Smith of the Knit and Pearl Podcast

                    Jason Bryant of Mat Talk Online

                    Mike Dell of Podcast Help Desk

                    Daniel J. Lewis of The Audacity to Podcast

                    Jim Collison of the Average Guy Network

                    Nick Seuberling of Podcasters Group Therapy (and others)

                    John Bukenas of Let's Reverse Obesity

                    Henry Jasper of Voices That Carry

                    John Buscal of Moondog Marketing

                    Andy White from the Podcasting Advisor

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting and get step by step tutorials on topics such as planning your podcast, choosing the right equipment, plugging all your podcast equipment in, creating your podcast website, understanding Wordpress, Understanding RSS, Publishing Your Podcast, Growing Your Audience and so much more. You have 30 days to try it, and if you're not satisfied, you can get your money refunded.

                    Sign up at www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>84865d6ef3509e108eec75065caa909aMon, 22 Jun 2015 04:00:00 -040047:53falsefull467467Do the Best You Can and Realize Some People Will Think You SuckQuick Tip for Crowdfunding

                    When you find a tool to help your fund your audience (Patreon, JoyRide, etc) instead of sending those people to their website, use a pretty link and direct them to the page. Why? Because what if a better system comes along? You will have all these past episodes pointing them to a website that no longer is relevant. I lucked out once and I have a link to Audible. Audible change their company that handles their affiliate program so my link changed. By controlling your link, you can simply update what that link points to and your back catalog stays intact.

                    For Example: My Patreon page is schoolofpodcasitng.com/patron and my Joy Ride page is www.askthepodcastcoach.com/joyride

                    They Said I Was Nothing

                    Today I answer a question I originally Answered on Ask the Podcast Coach. It's from Elsie and Jessica from shepodcasts.com and they are wondering how to handle haters.

                    Here are some things to consider.

                    1. The Source.

                    Is this person a regular listener? If not, then let them go their way. They are not your target audience.

                    2. Do they Have a Point?

                    Is what they are criticizing you about have any validity?

                    3. Can you implement the changes without changing who you are, and the goal of the show.

                    If implementing these changes is very unnatural for you, or if it would change the dynamic of the show, then it may not be in the best interest of the show to put them in place. If you try to act a way that is not you, it makes podcasting a chore.

                    Do the Best You Can Do, and Sleep Well At Night

                    In my job as an instructor I get put into positions that were not made to conduct training.

                    Recently I was asked to teach a class on Excel 2010 where some of my students have had Excel 2007, and some has Excel 2013. Some had mouse skills, some didn't. Some could see, and others could not.

                    I did the best I could.

                    I try to live without regrets, but that can be a tall order.

                    Be Yourself

                    I crack jokes during my class to try and keep it entertaining. I teach a large amount of Microsoft Excel. It's primarily  number crunching program. Not exactly the most exciting. So by interweaving stories, jokes, and insights, it gives my students a "brain break" and makes the class go faster.

                    When my niece was growing up she was spooky smart. Why? Because she started learning playing computer games when she was 2. She graduate High School with 1/2 a degree from Kent State University. Why? Because she didn't realize she was learning. She was just having fun while Roger Rabbit taught her how to read on the computer.

                    Consequently, I try to do what I have dubbed "Edutainment." It's educational and it's entertaining (or at least not boring).

                    Someone Won't Like Your Jokes

                    Every now and then I will get a review from my students, and someone will comment that they didn't like something about my style. I'm ok with that, because in every class, in every situation, I try to the best I can with what I have at that time. I can sleep at night.

                    This week on Ask the Podcast Coach's post show, my co-host explained how he had a co-worker explain how they had found podcasts and were listening to Entrepreneur on Fire. She didn't care for John Lee Dumas (Blasphemy!) . Jim told her to try Pat Flynn's Smart Passive Income. She enjoy Pat's style more. Is John's style wrong? No. It's different.

                    Want to Start a Podcast?

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Quick Tip for Crowdfunding

                    When you find a tool to help your fund your audience (Patreon, JoyRide, etc) instead of sending those people to their website, use a pretty link and direct them to the page. Why? Because what if a better system comes along? You will have all these past episodes pointing them to a website that no longer is relevant. I lucked out once and I have a link to Audible. Audible change their company that handles their affiliate program so my link changed. By controlling your link, you can simply update what that link points to and your back catalog stays intact.

                    For Example: My Patreon page is schoolofpodcasitng.com/patron and my Joy Ride page is www.askthepodcastcoach.com/joyride

                    They Said I Was Nothing

                    Today I answer a question I originally Answered on Ask the Podcast Coach. It's from Elsie and Jessica from shepodcasts.com and they are wondering how to handle haters.

                    Here are some things to consider.

                    1. The Source.

                    Is this person a regular listener? If not, then let them go their way. They are not your target audience.

                    2. Do they Have a Point?

                    Is what they are criticizing you about have any validity?

                    3. Can you implement the changes without changing who you are, and the goal of the show.

                    If implementing these changes is very unnatural for you, or if it would change the dynamic of the show, then it may not be in the best interest of the show to put them in place. If you try to act a way that is not you, it makes podcasting a chore.

                    Do the Best You Can Do, and Sleep Well At Night

                    In my job as an instructor I get put into positions that were not made to conduct training.

                    Recently I was asked to teach a class on Excel 2010 where some of my students have had Excel 2007, and some has Excel 2013. Some had mouse skills, some didn't. Some could see, and others could not.

                    I did the best I could.

                    I try to live without regrets, but that can be a tall order.

                    Be Yourself

                    I crack jokes during my class to try and keep it entertaining. I teach a large amount of Microsoft Excel. It's primarily  number crunching program. Not exactly the most exciting. So by interweaving stories, jokes, and insights, it gives my students a "brain break" and makes the class go faster.

                    When my niece was growing up she was spooky smart. Why? Because she started learning playing computer games when she was 2. She graduate High School with 1/2 a degree from Kent State University. Why? Because she didn't realize she was learning. She was just having fun while Roger Rabbit taught her how to read on the computer.

                    Consequently, I try to do what I have dubbed "Edutainment." It's educational and it's entertaining (or at least not boring).

                    Someone Won't Like Your Jokes

                    Every now and then I will get a review from my students, and someone will comment that they didn't like something about my style. I'm ok with that, because in every class, in every situation, I try to the best I can with what I have at that time. I can sleep at night.

                    This week on Ask the Podcast Coach's post show, my co-host explained how he had a co-worker explain how they had found podcasts and were listening to Entrepreneur on Fire. She didn't care for John Lee Dumas (Blasphemy!) . Jim told her to try Pat Flynn's Smart Passive Income. She enjoy Pat's style more. Is John's style wrong? No. It's different.

                    Want to Start a Podcast?

                    Go to www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>8602e0cda895b36bf2ed928007f0dd70Mon, 15 Jun 2015 04:00:00 -040050:43falsefull466466Are You Aware of the Women in Podcasting?Today I have the joy of interviewing Jessica Kupferman and Elsie Escobar from the Podcast called She Podcasts and now they have launched a specific Podcasting School of Women ($997). This segregated approach lead some men going, "Do we need a special school of Women?" and the answer (according to Jessica and Elsie is yes.
                    Podcast Rewind - Dee Snider on Radio

                    2:21 Today I play a small clip from Dee Snider's Snider's Comments podcast (iTunes) who explains how radio is so bad, that people PAID MONEY to NOT listen to it. Satellite radio requires more hardware in a time when everything was going to the phone. My favorite part is Dee asks, "Name me three people in their 20's that are listening to Satellite Radio."Dee's show is on Podcast One, and is available at DeeSnider.com and iTunes

                    Why a School of Women?

                    You may not be aware of this, but Men and Women are different. Men like to get to the point, and Women love details. In today's episode Jessica reveals a story where she asked a man about her show and his answer was to shorten the episode length and do more of them.  When she shared this with her female audience, they told her "NO! Don't DO THAT!"

                    In some cases Men "getting to the point" with their answer may come across as "salty." It may come across as impatient, and short. When a man answers a question he has good intentions (we love to fix stuff) and yet the delivery of the answer may not connect with everyone.

                    For the record, there are plenty of women podcasters (the women who are listening need to get their friends listening to BOOST the AWARENESS of women podcasters, as well as shows geared towards women.

                    Never Forget It's Your Show

                    Does this mean you need to be more politically correct when you speak into the microphone? One should never knowingly, intently say things to hurt people. However, in a world that is getting more and more sensitive - you're going to offend someone. You are the best at being YOU, and if speaking a certain way doesn't come naturally it may hurt your performance. It may cause you to over think topics.

                    One of the things I LOVE about She Podcasts is that I AM SO NOT THEIR TARGET AUDIENCE. Case in point, in one episode Elise admits she has a crush on someone. I don't think you'll hear that between Ray, Daniel, and myself on the next episode of the Podcasters Round table. And you know what? That is ABSOLUTELY OK!. You are NOT going to please everyone, and if you try your show will lose in the end.

                    Elise and Jessica were contemplating letting dudes into their private Facebook for women only. I APPLAUD them for NOT letting men in. It's THEIR group, and they can handle it any way they want. You can always make your own group.

                    How Did They Start?

                    Jessica and Elsie met at a business school and often crossed each other past. When Jessica heard that Elsie was podcasting she immediately connect with her. It wasn't long until they noticed there was no "female - podcast about podcasting." So they thought, "We should make one," and they did.

                    One Passion Different Approaches

                    When I listen to the show, Elsie (who has a background in Yoga) and Jessica (who may across as "Feisty") compliment each other well. Jessica is always ready with a joke, and Elise has an completely infectious laugh. According to their website, "Jessica Kupferman is an online business consultant who helps small business owners and solopreneurs find their voice, create irresistible  online products and design their business by their own rules. Elsie Escobar is a digital Jedi, working in the mystical paradox between tech and holistic living choosing podcasting and the magic of audio as her weapon of choice." It's a great mix.

                    What To Expect at the Podcasting School For Women?

                    Jessica is using her branding and marketing experience, and uses it to tie into Podcasting. Instead of "how to use Facebook" it is now "How to use Facebook for podcasting."

                    Elise can help with the Technical end as well as getting the confidence to press record.

                    Thee are insights into how to handle guests.

                    Elsie set up the course so that you examine yourself first. This way you can understand who you are, how you will react, and prepare accordingly.

                    They also go back, and explain what is a podcast so they can explain it to their audience.

                    The lessons are live, but recorded so you can listen later.

                    Other Podcasting Resources

                    If you don't' currently have the budget ($997) for the school, you can join their Private She Podcasts Facebook Group for free.

                    They will also be doing a full day session at Podcast Movement (save on your ticket to Podcast Movement - the event - using the code sop)

                    You can also list your show in their She Podcasts Directory

                    Ready to Join the School of Podcasting?

                    Get step by step tutorials

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Networking/Q&A "office hours" webinars

                    30 Day Money Back Guarantee

                    Go to 

                    www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Today I have the joy of interviewing Jessica Kupferman and Elsie Escobar from the Podcast called She Podcasts and now they have launched a specific Podcasting School of Women ($997). This segregated approach lead some men going, "Do we need a special school of Women?" and the answer (according to Jessica and Elsie is yes.
                    Podcast Rewind - Dee Snider on Radio

                    2:21 Today I play a small clip from Dee Snider's Snider's Comments podcast (iTunes) who explains how radio is so bad, that people PAID MONEY to NOT listen to it. Satellite radio requires more hardware in a time when everything was going to the phone. My favorite part is Dee asks, "Name me three people in their 20's that are listening to Satellite Radio."Dee's show is on Podcast One, and is available at DeeSnider.com and iTunes

                    Why a School of Women?

                    You may not be aware of this, but Men and Women are different. Men like to get to the point, and Women love details. In today's episode Jessica reveals a story where she asked a man about her show and his answer was to shorten the episode length and do more of them.  When she shared this with her female audience, they told her "NO! Don't DO THAT!"

                    In some cases Men "getting to the point" with their answer may come across as "salty." It may come across as impatient, and short. When a man answers a question he has good intentions (we love to fix stuff) and yet the delivery of the answer may not connect with everyone.

                    For the record, there are plenty of women podcasters (the women who are listening need to get their friends listening to BOOST the AWARENESS of women podcasters, as well as shows geared towards women.

                    Never Forget It's Your Show

                    Does this mean you need to be more politically correct when you speak into the microphone? One should never knowingly, intently say things to hurt people. However, in a world that is getting more and more sensitive - you're going to offend someone. You are the best at being YOU, and if speaking a certain way doesn't come naturally it may hurt your performance. It may cause you to over think topics.

                    One of the things I LOVE about She Podcasts is that I AM SO NOT THEIR TARGET AUDIENCE. Case in point, in one episode Elise admits she has a crush on someone. I don't think you'll hear that between Ray, Daniel, and myself on the next episode of the Podcasters Round table. And you know what? That is ABSOLUTELY OK!. You are NOT going to please everyone, and if you try your show will lose in the end.

                    Elise and Jessica were contemplating letting dudes into their private Facebook for women only. I APPLAUD them for NOT letting men in. It's THEIR group, and they can handle it any way they want. You can always make your own group.

                    How Did They Start?

                    Jessica and Elsie met at a business school and often crossed each other past. When Jessica heard that Elsie was podcasting she immediately connect with her. It wasn't long until they noticed there was no "female - podcast about podcasting." So they thought, "We should make one," and they did.

                    One Passion Different Approaches

                    When I listen to the show, Elsie (who has a background in Yoga) and Jessica (who may across as "Feisty") compliment each other well. Jessica is always ready with a joke, and Elise has an completely infectious laugh. According to their website, "Jessica Kupferman is an online business consultant who helps small business owners and solopreneurs find their voice, create irresistible  online products and design their business by their own rules. Elsie Escobar is a digital Jedi, working in the mystical paradox between tech and holistic living choosing podcasting and the magic of audio as her weapon of choice." It's a great mix.

                    What To Expect at the Podcasting School For Women?

                    Jessica is using her branding and marketing experience, and uses it to tie into Podcasting. Instead of "how to use Facebook" it is now "How to use Facebook for podcasting."

                    Elise can help with the Technical end as well as getting the confidence to press record.

                    Thee are insights into how to handle guests.

                    Elsie set up the course so that you examine yourself first. This way you can understand who you are, how you will react, and prepare accordingly.

                    They also go back, and explain what is a podcast so they can explain it to their audience.

                    The lessons are live, but recorded so you can listen later.

                    Other Podcasting Resources

                    If you don't' currently have the budget ($997) for the school, you can join their Private She Podcasts Facebook Group for free.

                    They will also be doing a full day session at Podcast Movement (save on your ticket to Podcast Movement - the event - using the code sop)

                    You can also list your show in their She Podcasts Directory

                    Ready to Join the School of Podcasting?

                    Get step by step tutorials

                    Private Facebook Group

                    Networking/Q&A "office hours" webinars

                    30 Day Money Back Guarantee

                    Go to 

                    www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>de9c1cb797e034b3cf902a4709d2c0c3Mon, 08 Jun 2015 04:00:00 -040001:02:10falsefull465465Anatomy of a Story - Podcast Listening PartyToday we look at what are the key ingrediants to stories that are used in books, movies, plays, and how some podcasters have used these elements to make engaging content for their audience. If you want to dive deeper into engaging content check out my friend Erik K Johnson at www.podcasttalentcoach.com who really know the ins and out of content shaping. 
                    Last 5 in 5 from Josh Rivers

                    Read to Lead Podcast with Jeff Brown (business books)

                    Wordpress Plugins A to Z  (learn about plugins )

                    Weekly Web Tools (tools for web designers)

                    Happened to Your Career

                    Chris Locurto Show

                    Thanks to Josh for the opening, and for the last five in five. Find Josh at creativestudio.academy

                    Stitcher Now in Deezer

                    Stitcher was purchased a while ago, and now those shows are starting to appear in Deezer. Full story

                    No Longer Impressed With Joy Ride

                    (8:35) I interviewed the head of Joy Ride a little while back, and I love their interface and other items. It was nice to see an alternative to Patreon. Well I've been trying to setup a campaign, and you have to jump through hoops. I've email their support twice (will try again, one more time). It just seems (in my opinion) the only way I get any help is to e-mail the head of the company. I will keep you posted.

                    If you want to see Dave's Patreon page, go here.

                    Patreon Podcasts Popping Up

                    (10:45) Official Patreon Podcast (itunes)

                    Unofficial Patreon Podcast. (itunes)

                    Podcast Listening Party - Dee Snider Launches Podcast on Podcast One

                    Dee Snider is the singer for Twister Sister, he has many successful radio programs and now is launching a podcast on podcast one. It's call Snider Comments. It has a super long intro, but Dee comes in attitude a blazin'. It should be fun.

                    Anatomy of a Story

                    A great book that looks at some of the best presentations and breaks them down and examines WHY they worked. Why they connected with their audience. The book is called Resonate: Present Visual Stories that Transform Audiences

                    Stories are often the same layout

                    1. A relatable likable hero

                    2. The Hero encounters a roadblock(s)

                    3. The Hero emerges transformed.

                    In some cases the hero was reluctant to take on the responsibility. They finally decide to take on the roadblock, you think they may not make it (but they do). Then you see them after they have made it through the storm/roadblock.

                    Entrepreneur On Fire Questions Use Many Of These Elements

                    I was on the Entrepreneur on Fire Podcast on episode 263, and looking at John Lee Dumas's questions they use elements of story telling

                    1. Intro

                    I will give a brief intro about you and your business, and then turn it over to you to elaborate. - introduce the hero.

                    2. Success Quote

                    Here you will share a success quote/mantra you enjoy & how you have applied it to your life. - transformation

                    3. Failure / Challenge / Obstacle

                    What failure/challenge/obstacle have you overcome and what were the lessons learned? - roadblock.

                    4. The “AHA” moment

                    Discuss an “AHA” moment you have had and how you turned that AHA into success. - transformed

                    Have you had an “I’ve made it moment?” - transformed

                    5. Current Business

                    What is one thing that is really exciting you in your business right now? - transformation

                    6. Lightning Round:

                    What was holding you back from becoming an Entrepreneur? - roadblocks

                    What is the best business advice you have ever received? - transformation

                    Today we look at what are the key ingrediants to stories that are used in books, movies, plays, and how some podcasters have used these elements to make engaging content for their audience. If you want to dive deeper into engaging content check out my friend Erik K Johnson at www.podcasttalentcoach.com who really know the ins and out of content shaping. 

                    Last 5 in 5 from Josh Rivers

                    Read to Lead Podcast with Jeff Brown (business books)

                    Wordpress Plugins A to Z  (learn about plugins )

                    Weekly Web Tools (tools for web designers)

                    Happened to Your Career

                    Chris Locurto Show

                    Thanks to Josh for the opening, and for the last five in five. Find Josh at creativestudio.academy

                    Stitcher Now in Deezer

                    Stitcher was purchased a while ago, and now those shows are starting to appear in Deezer. Full story

                    No Longer Impressed With Joy Ride

                    (8:35) I interviewed the head of Joy Ride a little while back, and I love their interface and other items. It was nice to see an alternative to Patreon. Well I've been trying to setup a campaign, and you have to jump through hoops. I've email their support twice (will try again, one more time). It just seems (in my opinion) the only way I get any help is to e-mail the head of the company. I will keep you posted.

                    If you want to see Dave's Patreon page, go here.

                    Patreon Podcasts Popping Up

                    (10:45) Official Patreon Podcast (itunes)

                    Unofficial Patreon Podcast. (itunes)

                    Podcast Listening Party - Dee Snider Launches Podcast on Podcast One

                    Dee Snider is the singer for Twister Sister, he has many successful radio programs and now is launching a podcast on podcast one. It's call Snider Comments. It has a super long intro, but Dee comes in attitude a blazin'. It should be fun.

                    Anatomy of a Story

                    A great book that looks at some of the best presentations and breaks them down and examines WHY they worked. Why they connected with their audience. The book is called Resonate: Present Visual Stories that Transform Audiences

                    Stories are often the same layout

                    1. A relatable likable hero

                    2. The Hero encounters a roadblock(s)

                    3. The Hero emerges transformed.

                    In some cases the hero was reluctant to take on the responsibility. They finally decide to take on the roadblock, you think they may not make it (but they do). Then you see them after they have made it through the storm/roadblock.

                    Entrepreneur On Fire Questions Use Many Of These Elements

                    I was on the Entrepreneur on Fire Podcast on episode 263, and looking at John Lee Dumas's questions they use elements of story telling

                    1. Intro

                    I will give a brief intro about you and your business, and then turn it over to you to elaborate. - introduce the hero.

                    2. Success Quote

                    Here you will share a success quote/mantra you enjoy & how you have applied it to your life. - transformation

                    3. Failure / Challenge / Obstacle

                    What failure/challenge/obstacle have you overcome and what were the lessons learned? - roadblock.

                    4. The “AHA” moment

                    Discuss an “AHA” moment you have had and how you turned that AHA into success. - transformed

                    Have you had an “I’ve made it moment?” - transformed

                    5. Current Business

                    What is one thing that is really exciting you in your business right now? - transformation

                    6. Lightning Round:

                    What was holding you back from becoming an Entrepreneur? - roadblocks

                    What is the best business advice you have ever received? - transformation

                    What is something that is working for you right now? - roadblock

                    Do you have an Internet resource, like Evernote, that you can share with our listeners? - insights..

                    What book would you recommend to Fire Nation? - insights into you, and great monetization strategy

                    Imagine you woke up tomorrow morning in a brand new world, identical to earth, but you knew no one. You still have all the experience & knowledge you currently have, your food

                    and shelter is taken care of, but all you have the next 7 days? - more insights into you.

                    Behind the Scenes of a Podcast Launch - Clammrcast is Now in iTunes463

                    After recording a few episode I've now released Clammrcast into the public and into iTunes and Stitcher.

                    I didn't think people would download the back catalog (three episodes) but they did.

                    This did land me at the rank of 1150 in New and Noteworthy (subscribe, rate and review to help bump us up)

                    You don't need to have multiple episodes to be in New and Noteworthy. You can be new only for 8 weeks, you can be noteworthy ANY TIME. (so you don't only have 8 weeks)

                    I got 47 downloads of the first episodes, 31 downloads of episode 2, and episode 1 got 27 downloads.

                    I will be launching a new podcast that will not be an ongoing show. I will use it answer common questions (best microphone).

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Best Podcasting Gear - Dave's Amazon Store of Podcasting Gear

                    More Podcast Money: Turn Your Passion into Profits - Book about making money with your podcast

                    Thanks to Henry from the Voices that Carry Podcast for the Review in iTunes.

                    ]]>ff03a48fe2f562aba90e3c923a90b83fMon, 01 Jun 2015 04:00:00 -040048:21falsefull464464What Podcasters Can Learn From David LettermanToday I talk about David Letterman and what we can learn from his retirement. We also talk a little Podcast Movement (use the coupon sop to save at podcastmovement.com). Some people are NOT going to Podcast Movement because they invited Glenn Beck. How cool is it to be so hated that people will bite of their nose to spite their face?
                    Because of My Podcast I'm Reconnecting With My Brothers

                    Daniel Herrick creates the five lights podcast. 5lightspodcast.com Due to his podcast he is connecting with his brothers.

                    Last 5 in 5

                    What were the last five podcasts you listened to? (from Daniel Herrick) Flat out Fever Podcast (formula 1) On the Limit Podcast (formula 1) UK Podcasters (podcast conference) Judge 13 Podcast (F1 podcast) Around the NFL (NFL Podcast) School of Podcasting (Podcast about podcasting)

                    Punch You In The Face T-shirts

                    I had dinner with Ryan K Parker of Foodcraftmen.com who is now famous for his line "No one will punch you in the face" (about your podcast schedule). He had said people had told him to put it on a shirt. So he did. I ordered mine. How about you? Orders are printed and shipped when the time expires (May 31st). You can expect your package to arrive around 7 days after printing starts. Domestic orders are mailed via first-class or priority mail (USPS). Shipping costs $3.99 for the first item and $2.00 for each additional item. If you want to make your own shirt, Ryan is using TeeSpring. I spoke about TeeSpring on the More Podcast Money show.  

                    New Businesses Pop Up Around Podcasting

                    We have seen people jump into the podcasting world to help podcasters. We are seeing people who will create your shows for around $50 a show, and now there are people who will help you make a media kit. Hank at http://www.channelhank.com is creating a single page media kit for $25.  I am talking with Hank about getting a coupon code (I'll keep you posted) Ben Kruger has a service for small businesses where all you do is record the content and they do everything else. The cost is $697 a month. The Show Notes Guy charges $200/month for a 30 minute weekly show. Podcasting Press will assemble your weekly show for $97 a month. There are new classes, courses, coming out on a daily (almost hourly) basis. Be sure to check the About page. In some cases, there isn't one (just a form to give your email address).

                    Earn Commissions Directing People to the School of Podcasting

                    With so many people coming into podcasting, you may be thinking of launching a course on podcasting yourself. Let me tell you its a lot of work. You need a lot of passion. Here is what you have to look forward to. Recreating videos every time a new update comes out. Helping people retrieve their password again One word: Paypal Phone calls from people who are blind to the idea of time zones (if you supply a phone number). The joy of working with computers (meaning it works on my computer, but for some reason not on yours...) You can earn recurring income by partnering with the School of Podcasting. When you refer a person to the School of Podcasting and they join you earn commission for every month they stay subscribed.

                    JVZOO - One of the Top of the Line Affiliate Management Tools

                    I recently switched to JVZOO as my affiliate tool. They put a few steps into becoming an affiliate (including having a code sent to your phone). This ensures that you are a real person (and not a bot). I want real people, with a real understanding of podcasting to promote the website. Here is a video that show how to sign up at JVZOO.

                    UPDATE: I've moved to http://www.podcastingaffiliatescom

                    Spotify Embraces Podcasting

                    This is good news for the future. Right now Spotify is doing a very limited beta. According to The Feed podcast, This is only the initial launch, available to about 1% of Spotify customers in only a few countries. While we are all enjoying the good news, I know some are bummed that its not a wide open door to entry into Spotify. I understand this point, but I also understand that there are a lot of podcasters, and that is a big door. By limiting the amount of podcasters, Spotify can ensure that their system can handle the traffic. Spotify will be handling the bandwidth. This does mean you will need to check your stats in multiple places. If you are using Libsyn, there will be a special section to check your stats. Spotify is a growth opportunity. Will they run advertising on my show? Probably. I don't care. My show points people to my website. A website that helps me get more consulting and members for my website. You can share any of my free material anywhere you want, as long as you point back to the School of Podcasting. In the same way that I didn't mind Stitcher and iHeart Media spreading my message, I don't have a problem being on the Spotify platform.

                    Spotify Facts

                    The average listener on spotify listens 148 minutes every day We're the talk of the town. Our listeners share tracks, artists, albums and playlists. 2/3 of that sharing extends beyond Spotify, spreading out into social networks. Our mobile audience has grown dramatically in the last year. So more people take us more places. And you have more ways to reach them

                    • Paying subscribers: Over 15 million
                    • Active users: Over 60 million*
                    • Ratio of paying subscribers to active free users: Over 20%
                    • Revenue paid to rights holders since launch: $2bn
                    • Number of songs: Over 30 million
                    • Number of songs added per day: Over 20,000
                    • Number of playlists: Over 1.5 billion created so far
                    • Available in 58 markets – Andorra, Argentina, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Guatemala, Honduras, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Monaco, New Zealand, Netherlands, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Turkey, UK, Uruguay and USA.
                    
                    Lessons Learned From David Letterman

                    I remember growing up and hearing my older brother talk about David Letterman. This was when he came on at 12:30 in the morning after Johnny Carson. Later when I moved into my brother's house, we would stay up late and watch (I worked 1-9 at a grocery store). It was a fun time, and a special time with my brother. When I watched the last Letterman show, I watched a chapter of my life close and realized I would never see it again (except for reruns). While Letterman will always point to other people, it was the adlibs from his desk that made me laugh. Here are some interesting (to me ) stats.

                    Letterman facts

                    In the 1970's Letterman was a weatherman in He received some attention for his unpredictable on-air behavior, which included congratulating a tropical storm for being upgraded to a hurricane and predicting hail stones "the size of canned hams." That line is classic Letterman.

                    His first show was in 1980 and won two Emmys, but failed in the ratings and was cancelled in October 1980.  NBC kept him under contract and then in 1982 his Late Night with David Letterman show was launched. He did things like mounted cameras to his dog, a monkey, a rail over the audience.

                    He once used a bullhorn to interrupt a live interview on The Today Show, announcing that he was the NBC News president while not wearing any pants.

                    His show moved to CBS in 1993. The bad news his show wasn't just like his old one and it was geared to be just like his old show. Letterman eschewed his trademark blazer with khaki pants and white wrestling shoes wardrobe combination in favor of expensive shoes, tailored suits and light-colored socks. The monologue was lengthened. Paul Shaffer and the "World's Most Dangerous Band" followed Letterman to CBS, but they added a brass section and were rebranded the "CBS Orchestra" as a short monologue and a small band were mandated by Carson while Letterman occupied the 12:30 slot. Additionally, because of intellectual property disagreements, Letterman was unable to import many of his Late Night segments...]]>Today I talk about David Letterman and what we can learn from his retirement. We also talk a little Podcast Movement (use the coupon sop to save at podcastmovement.com). Some people are NOT going to Podcast Movement because they invited Glenn Beck. How cool is it to be so hated that people will bite of their nose to spite their face?

                    Because of My Podcast I'm Reconnecting With My Brothers

                    Daniel Herrick creates the five lights podcast. 5lightspodcast.com Due to his podcast he is connecting with his brothers.

                    Last 5 in 5

                    What were the last five podcasts you listened to? (from Daniel Herrick) Flat out Fever Podcast (formula 1) On the Limit Podcast (formula 1) UK Podcasters (podcast conference) Judge 13 Podcast (F1 podcast) Around the NFL (NFL Podcast) School of Podcasting (Podcast about podcasting)

                    Punch You In The Face T-shirts

                    I had dinner with Ryan K Parker of Foodcraftmen.com who is now famous for his line "No one will punch you in the face" (about your podcast schedule). He had said people had told him to put it on a shirt. So he did. I ordered mine. How about you? Orders are printed and shipped when the time expires (May 31st). You can expect your package to arrive around 7 days after printing starts. Domestic orders are mailed via first-class or priority mail (USPS). Shipping costs $3.99 for the first item and $2.00 for each additional item. If you want to make your own shirt, Ryan is using TeeSpring. I spoke about TeeSpring on the More Podcast Money show.  

                    New Businesses Pop Up Around Podcasting

                    We have seen people jump into the podcasting world to help podcasters. We are seeing people who will create your shows for around $50 a show, and now there are people who will help you make a media kit. Hank at http://www.channelhank.com is creating a single page media kit for $25.  I am talking with Hank about getting a coupon code (I'll keep you posted) Ben Kruger has a service for small businesses where all you do is record the content and they do everything else. The cost is $697 a month. The Show Notes Guy charges $200/month for a 30 minute weekly show. Podcasting Press will assemble your weekly show for $97 a month. There are new classes, courses, coming out on a daily (almost hourly) basis. Be sure to check the About page. In some cases, there isn't one (just a form to give your email address).

                    Earn Commissions Directing People to the School of Podcasting

                    With so many people coming into podcasting, you may be thinking of launching a course on podcasting yourself. Let me tell you its a lot of work. You need a lot of passion. Here is what you have to look forward to. Recreating videos every time a new update comes out. Helping people retrieve their password again One word: Paypal Phone calls from people who are blind to the idea of time zones (if you supply a phone number). The joy of working with computers (meaning it works on my computer, but for some reason not on yours...) You can earn recurring income by partnering with the School of Podcasting. When you refer a person to the School of Podcasting and they join you earn commission for every month they stay subscribed.

                    JVZOO - One of the Top of the Line Affiliate Management Tools

                    I recently switched to JVZOO as my affiliate tool. They put a few steps into becoming an affiliate (including having a code sent to your phone). This ensures that you are a real person (and not a bot). I want real people, with a real understanding of podcasting to promote the website. Here is a video that show how to sign up at JVZOO.

                    UPDATE: I've moved to http://www.podcastingaffiliatescom

                    Spotify Embraces Podcasting

                    This is good news for the future. Right now Spotify is doing a very limited beta. According to The Feed podcast, This is only the initial launch, available to about 1% of Spotify customers in only a few countries. While we are all enjoying the good news, I know some are bummed that its not a wide open door to entry into Spotify. I understand this point, but I also understand that there are a lot of podcasters, and that is a big door. By limiting the amount of podcasters, Spotify can ensure that their system can handle the traffic. Spotify will be handling the bandwidth. This does mean you will need to check your stats in multiple places. If you are using Libsyn, there will be a special section to check your stats. Spotify is a growth opportunity. Will they run advertising on my show? Probably. I don't care. My show points people to my website. A website that helps me get more consulting and members for my website. You can share any of my free material anywhere you want, as long as you point back to the School of Podcasting. In the same way that I didn't mind Stitcher and iHeart Media spreading my message, I don't have a problem being on the Spotify platform.

                    Spotify Facts

                    The average listener on spotify listens 148 minutes every day We're the talk of the town. Our listeners share tracks, artists, albums and playlists. 2/3 of that sharing extends beyond Spotify, spreading out into social networks. Our mobile audience has grown dramatically in the last year. So more people take us more places. And you have more ways to reach them

                    • Paying subscribers: Over 15 million
                    • Active users: Over 60 million*
                    • Ratio of paying subscribers to active free users: Over 20%
                    • Revenue paid to rights holders since launch: $2bn
                    • Number of songs: Over 30 million
                    • Number of songs added per day: Over 20,000
                    • Number of playlists: Over 1.5 billion created so far
                    • Available in 58 markets – Andorra, Argentina, Austria, Australia, Belgium, Bolivia, Brazil, Bulgaria, Canada, Chile, Colombia, Costa Rica, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Dominican Republic, Ecuador, El Salvador, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Guatemala, Honduras, Hong Kong, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malaysia, Malta, Mexico, Monaco, New Zealand, Netherlands, Nicaragua, Norway, Panama, Paraguay, Peru, Philippines, Poland, Portugal, Singapore, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Taiwan, Turkey, UK, Uruguay and USA.
                    
                    Lessons Learned From David Letterman

                    I remember growing up and hearing my older brother talk about David Letterman. This was when he came on at 12:30 in the morning after Johnny Carson. Later when I moved into my brother's house, we would stay up late and watch (I worked 1-9 at a grocery store). It was a fun time, and a special time with my brother. When I watched the last Letterman show, I watched a chapter of my life close and realized I would never see it again (except for reruns). While Letterman will always point to other people, it was the adlibs from his desk that made me laugh. Here are some interesting (to me ) stats.

                    Letterman facts

                    In the 1970's Letterman was a weatherman in He received some attention for his unpredictable on-air behavior, which included congratulating a tropical storm for being upgraded to a hurricane and predicting hail stones "the size of canned hams." That line is classic Letterman.

                    His first show was in 1980 and won two Emmys, but failed in the ratings and was cancelled in October 1980.  NBC kept him under contract and then in 1982 his Late Night with David Letterman show was launched. He did things like mounted cameras to his dog, a monkey, a rail over the audience.

                    He once used a bullhorn to interrupt a live interview on The Today Show, announcing that he was the NBC News president while not wearing any pants.

                    His show moved to CBS in 1993. The bad news his show wasn't just like his old one and it was geared to be just like his old show. Letterman eschewed his trademark blazer with khaki pants and white wrestling shoes wardrobe combination in favor of expensive shoes, tailored suits and light-colored socks. The monologue was lengthened. Paul Shaffer and the "World's Most Dangerous Band" followed Letterman to CBS, but they added a brass section and were rebranded the "CBS Orchestra" as a short monologue and a small band were mandated by Carson while Letterman occupied the 12:30 slot. Additionally, because of intellectual property disagreements, Letterman was unable to import many of his Late Night segments verbatim,[59] but he sidestepped this problem by simply renaming them (the "Top Ten List" became the "Late Show Top Ten", "Viewer Mail" became the "CBS Mailbag", etc.) The Late Show lost nearly half its audience during its competition with Jay Leno.

                    In 2000 Letterman had quintuple bypass surgery and had to step away from the show an allow others to guest-host. In interviews on Howard Stern, I've heard it mentioned that he was more personal to work with (where before it sounded as if he was a tyrant to work for). The final episode of The Late Show with David Letterman was watched by 13.76 million viewers. In it Letterman spent most of his final talk to thanking his staff.

                    What Can Podcasters Learn From David Letterman?
                    1. He was humble. He didn't handle compliments well.
                    2. His irrelevance for the "Same ol' Same ol" made him stand out. Nobody else was make a suit of velco. We all watched and thought, "I can't believe he is doing this on network television."
                    3. If it ain't broke don't fix it. I knew when I tuned in to hear the World's most dangerous band and found the CBS orchestra that we were in trouble.
                    4. If you provide good content consistently, you become part of people's routines. People don't like to interrupt their routine.
                    5. Comparing yourself to others is not a great use of your time. BE YOU.
                    6. Its all about relationships. When you provide good content, people will go to bat for you. The Foo Fighters cancelled a South American tour to be on Dave's first show coming back from surgery. That cost them money, but that act got them called back again, and again. The last time in front of 13.8 million people. They provided the soundtrack to the last minutes of his show. When Howard Stern was on, he complained to Letterman that Dave had been talking with Jay Leno (Dave and Jay go way back). Why lose a friend because of entertainment shows? Move on, and apparently he did. For a guy that did some pretty immature stunts, that a pretty mature gesture.
                    
                    

                    Thanks Dave.

                     

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of Podcasting Today

                    30 Day Money Back Guarentee

                    ]]>1e974308085ebf1b2ee1e28b1212c2c6Mon, 25 May 2015 04:00:00 -040050:14falsefull4634638 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your AudienceI appeared on the Podcasting Success Secrets podcast talking Podcasting for Authors I also appeared on the Podcasters Roundtable talking rebranding your show.
                    What Appears to be Another Great Book on Word of Mouth Marketing

                    I heard about Ted Wright and his book Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth  on the Social Media Examiner podcast I'm only through chapter one, but here are some gems. The Power of word of mouth marketing is that it is a targeted message from a trusted source, every single time. 10 Percent of the population decides what to buy, and the other 90 percent goes along with it. 50 percent of all purchasing decisions are based on primarily on a friends recommendation Bissell sweepers went to RVs with Dogs. GO to where your audience is. Because its important to you, doesn't mean its important to your audience.

                    8 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your Audience

                    I get hired for consulting and one of the reasons is people want a set of eyes on their website that hasn't been looking at it non-stop for 2 weeks. You need a fresh perspective. While it is my pasion to help people with their podcast (and you can get great feedback from myself AND Eric K. Johnson at www.podcastreviewshow.com) some people may not have that in the budget. Here are some things you can get your family to do at your next picnic. 1. Give you feedback on your elevator pitch. 2. Comment on your business card Then have them go to your website and without coaching them, have them 3. Play your show 4. Subscribe to your podcast in iTunes or Android 5. Contact you 6. Share your post. 7. Subscribe to Your Newsletter 8. Repeat steps 3-7 on their phone

                    Podcast Launch Update

                    I am pondering launching a show spotlighting some of the top liked clips on clammr. I did one episode and sent it to some folks. I got some great feedback, and some good insight. What's changed? The show was going to be a top 50. I'm experimenting, and I did a new episode with just 20 clammrs (clips) and it was received much better. I was also told to inject myself more into the clips, in essence, "Be Dave" and have fun. Please notice, I haven't made these tests completely public, the first "top 50" episode will be a collector's item. I'm also not in iTunes. You don't have to release everything you record. PodBean Crowd Funding Podbean takes 5% and there are additional Stripe credit card fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per transaction. We bulk process all patron pledges to decrease fees. That means if I’m supporting two podcasters my credit card will only be charged one time for all of my pledges. Those fees will then be split among the podcasters. We don’t charge your patrons until the 1st of every month. It  takes 24 to 72 hours to process all payments. The processed money will then show in your account balance. You can withdraw the balance of your account at any time by clicking “pay out total balance.”  The money will be sent to your Paypal account.

                    Comparing that to Patreon or Joyride

                    Patreon takes 5% and there are additional credit card fees that range from 2-4%. There are transfer fees with Patreon. These include: US creators receiving payment via Stripe - $0.25 fee for every deposit. US creators receiving payment via PayPal - 2% of the amount transferred capped at $1 per deposit Joyride charges 5% in fees plus credit card processing fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per contribution.

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    The Audacity to podcast Scott Sigler interview    

                     

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>I appeared on the Podcasting Success Secrets podcast talking Podcasting for Authors I also appeared on the Podcasters Roundtable talking rebranding your show.
                    What Appears to be Another Great Book on Word of Mouth Marketing

                    I heard about Ted Wright and his book Fizz: Harness the Power of Word of Mouth Marketing to Drive Brand Growth  on the Social Media Examiner podcast I'm only through chapter one, but here are some gems. The Power of word of mouth marketing is that it is a targeted message from a trusted source, every single time. 10 Percent of the population decides what to buy, and the other 90 percent goes along with it. 50 percent of all purchasing decisions are based on primarily on a friends recommendation Bissell sweepers went to RVs with Dogs. GO to where your audience is. Because its important to you, doesn't mean its important to your audience.

                    8 Ways a Stranger Can Help You Grow Your Audience

                    I get hired for consulting and one of the reasons is people want a set of eyes on their website that hasn't been looking at it non-stop for 2 weeks. You need a fresh perspective. While it is my pasion to help people with their podcast (and you can get great feedback from myself AND Eric K. Johnson at www.podcastreviewshow.com) some people may not have that in the budget. Here are some things you can get your family to do at your next picnic. 1. Give you feedback on your elevator pitch. 2. Comment on your business card Then have them go to your website and without coaching them, have them 3. Play your show 4. Subscribe to your podcast in iTunes or Android 5. Contact you 6. Share your post. 7. Subscribe to Your Newsletter 8. Repeat steps 3-7 on their phone

                    Podcast Launch Update

                    I am pondering launching a show spotlighting some of the top liked clips on clammr. I did one episode and sent it to some folks. I got some great feedback, and some good insight. What's changed? The show was going to be a top 50. I'm experimenting, and I did a new episode with just 20 clammrs (clips) and it was received much better. I was also told to inject myself more into the clips, in essence, "Be Dave" and have fun. Please notice, I haven't made these tests completely public, the first "top 50" episode will be a collector's item. I'm also not in iTunes. You don't have to release everything you record. PodBean Crowd Funding Podbean takes 5% and there are additional Stripe credit card fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per transaction. We bulk process all patron pledges to decrease fees. That means if I’m supporting two podcasters my credit card will only be charged one time for all of my pledges. Those fees will then be split among the podcasters. We don’t charge your patrons until the 1st of every month. It  takes 24 to 72 hours to process all payments. The processed money will then show in your account balance. You can withdraw the balance of your account at any time by clicking “pay out total balance.”  The money will be sent to your Paypal account.

                    Comparing that to Patreon or Joyride

                    Patreon takes 5% and there are additional credit card fees that range from 2-4%. There are transfer fees with Patreon. These include: US creators receiving payment via Stripe - $0.25 fee for every deposit. US creators receiving payment via PayPal - 2% of the amount transferred capped at $1 per deposit Joyride charges 5% in fees plus credit card processing fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per contribution.

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    The Audacity to podcast Scott Sigler interview    

                     

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>1400766a7616be55b2999d3847162e82Mon, 18 May 2015 04:00:00 -040055:01falsefull462462Your Words Can Can Change the WorldAccording to an article, "Spotify was reported to be coming out with its own podcasting platform soon as well to corner a slice of the market. It is yet to be known whether this platform could deliver, but it only goes to show that podcasting has exerted a tremendous influence on the business models of such audio streaming platforms."

                    Because of my Podcast: Nick Seuberling

                    Nick form spnt.tv talks about his first time do a live stream from a location on the fist night of the NFL draft. Nick got to meet Nick Lache from 98 Degrees as he did a live broadcast from his bar in downtown Cincinnati.

                    Check out the Ben and Nick show where Nick co-hosts a podcast with his young son. 

                    Behind the Scenes of a Podcast Launch.

                    Clammr is a free app for iOs that enables you to share 18 second clips. You can find out more at www.clammr.com

                    I'm testing some things, and I'm preparing to launch the Clammrcast. Here are some things I'm looking into.

                    Questions To Answer:

                    Why?: Exposure to the School of Podcasting who are looking for exposureHow Often?: To Determine how often, I have to figure out how long it takes to create an episode. Episodes are going to be around 20 minutes, so I should plan on 2 hours.Ease of Content: The content is created for me, I just read the listHow Will I Know if It's Successful: By people using a special coupon for the SOP

                    Pros:The show took about 45 minutes. I get the list, and using my insane amount of knowledge of Microsoft Office (I've been teaching it for 20+ years) I take the Excel sheet I get from Clammr and turn it into a pdf and show notes. All I do is open the pdf and click the links. I record it live and comment on it.

                    Cons:I have no control over the content.

                    How Does This Apply to My Overall Goal?

                    My over all goal is to pay off my student loans and do podcast consulting full time. Does this podcast tie into that? Well it's cost me $32 to buy a font, and it will cost $10 a month for media hosting. That doesn't seem to tie into getting out of debt. So I will watch to see if the coupon gets used, I will wait to see what kind of relationships are formed by doing this podcast. This podcast is outside of the podcast about podcasting and might expose me to a different audience that is unaware of the School of Podcasting

                    22:30 Podcasting Tips From My Mom

                    My Mom once pulls me aside, she was in the hospital, and there was a very good chance that she was going to die. She pulled me into her room, and started doing a "Death Bed" speech. When I realized what was happening I almost passed out. In the middle of the talk my Mom said, "You're.....so........

                    and then there was an awkward pause

                    and finally said....

                    "Neat."

                    We both laughed (this was a discussion where the seriousness of it was very heavy). It just seemed funny to use such a light funny word. 

                    I am painfully shy at times. This past weekend I was at Wordcamp North Canton, there was a meetup in the morning to mingle and get breakfast. I walked in, didn't recognize anyone, and sat at a table by myself. Some habits die hard. My Mom was telling me I was neat to give me the confidence to go out and share with people. To go out and connect with people. I talk in front of people every day for my job. Yet some days, I revert back to my old shy ways. 

                    So in honor of Mother's Day I am sharing these words with you. YOU ARE NEAT. You are special. You are unique. Nobody is like you. It's time to start your podcast. You can start it, experiment, and try something. If it doesn't work, then scratch it off you bucket list and try another one. 

                    On Fire Podcasts?

                    I recently did a search in iTunes (working on an article for Podertainment magazine) and saw that there were 25 shows with the phrase "On Fire". This has been spawned by the success of John Lee Dumas and his Entrepreneur On Fire Podcast. My question for you is, do you think using "On Fire" in your name is marketing genious, or do you feel it's lazy and tired (would it turn you off). Leave me a comment below. 

                    Mentioned in This Episode

                    Michael Hyatt

                    Finding Time to Podcast

                    Profitcast

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    ]]>According to an article, "Spotify was reported to be coming out with its own podcasting platform soon as well to corner a slice of the market. It is yet to be known whether this platform could deliver, but it only goes to show that podcasting has exerted a tremendous influence on the business models of such audio streaming platforms."

                    Because of my Podcast: Nick Seuberling

                    Nick form spnt.tv talks about his first time do a live stream from a location on the fist night of the NFL draft. Nick got to meet Nick Lache from 98 Degrees as he did a live broadcast from his bar in downtown Cincinnati.

                    Check out the Ben and Nick show where Nick co-hosts a podcast with his young son. 

                    Behind the Scenes of a Podcast Launch.

                    Clammr is a free app for iOs that enables you to share 18 second clips. You can find out more at www.clammr.com

                    I'm testing some things, and I'm preparing to launch the Clammrcast. Here are some things I'm looking into.

                    Questions To Answer:

                    Why?: Exposure to the School of Podcasting who are looking for exposureHow Often?: To Determine how often, I have to figure out how long it takes to create an episode. Episodes are going to be around 20 minutes, so I should plan on 2 hours.Ease of Content: The content is created for me, I just read the listHow Will I Know if It's Successful: By people using a special coupon for the SOP

                    Pros:The show took about 45 minutes. I get the list, and using my insane amount of knowledge of Microsoft Office (I've been teaching it for 20+ years) I take the Excel sheet I get from Clammr and turn it into a pdf and show notes. All I do is open the pdf and click the links. I record it live and comment on it.

                    Cons:I have no control over the content.

                    How Does This Apply to My Overall Goal?

                    My over all goal is to pay off my student loans and do podcast consulting full time. Does this podcast tie into that? Well it's cost me $32 to buy a font, and it will cost $10 a month for media hosting. That doesn't seem to tie into getting out of debt. So I will watch to see if the coupon gets used, I will wait to see what kind of relationships are formed by doing this podcast. This podcast is outside of the podcast about podcasting and might expose me to a different audience that is unaware of the School of Podcasting

                    22:30 Podcasting Tips From My Mom

                    My Mom once pulls me aside, she was in the hospital, and there was a very good chance that she was going to die. She pulled me into her room, and started doing a "Death Bed" speech. When I realized what was happening I almost passed out. In the middle of the talk my Mom said, "You're.....so........

                    and then there was an awkward pause

                    and finally said....

                    "Neat."

                    We both laughed (this was a discussion where the seriousness of it was very heavy). It just seemed funny to use such a light funny word. 

                    I am painfully shy at times. This past weekend I was at Wordcamp North Canton, there was a meetup in the morning to mingle and get breakfast. I walked in, didn't recognize anyone, and sat at a table by myself. Some habits die hard. My Mom was telling me I was neat to give me the confidence to go out and share with people. To go out and connect with people. I talk in front of people every day for my job. Yet some days, I revert back to my old shy ways. 

                    So in honor of Mother's Day I am sharing these words with you. YOU ARE NEAT. You are special. You are unique. Nobody is like you. It's time to start your podcast. You can start it, experiment, and try something. If it doesn't work, then scratch it off you bucket list and try another one. 

                    On Fire Podcasts?

                    I recently did a search in iTunes (working on an article for Podertainment magazine) and saw that there were 25 shows with the phrase "On Fire". This has been spawned by the success of John Lee Dumas and his Entrepreneur On Fire Podcast. My question for you is, do you think using "On Fire" in your name is marketing genious, or do you feel it's lazy and tired (would it turn you off). Leave me a comment below. 

                    Mentioned in This Episode

                    Michael Hyatt

                    Finding Time to Podcast

                    Profitcast

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    ]]>994c23e485320fa7f195a92570b9158eMon, 11 May 2015 04:00:00 -040038:19falsefull461461Do You Have Five Number One Priorities?I was listening to the Podcasters Roundtable that they recorded live on the NMX floor (I was so bummed that I couldn't attend). They were doing a show with the topic of "podcasting issues" In other words, what were the hurdles you are having. One kept coming up over and over, and that was the issue of not having enough time.
                    How To Avoid The Time Trap - Pick Your Schedule LAST

                    I am working with a company right now where I will be recording their podcast. I like the topic, and I like the people. It should be fun. We were starting to talk about how many episodes a week, and how long the episodes should be. The podcast will be based on information that the company provides. Its will be arranged in a fashion that they are not used to doing. In the end, the company is not sure how long or hard it will be to give me the information. I also don't know how long it will take to record and edit that information. The answer? Do a test show. Then do another and another. I suggested we wait to pick a schedule LAST, so we can make an informed decision. Ray Ortega produces the Podcasters Roundtable twice a week. Why? Because he has a smile daughter, a wife, and a job. He know how long it takes to create a show, and picked a schedule he can consistently hit. When you publish on a consistent schedule, your audience makes them part of their routine. If you can't publish on a consistent schedule, ALWAYS provide consistent value (and your audience will forgive you). Every time I track how long it takes to create a podcast (audio) I arrive at a four to one ratio. A one minute podcast takes four minutes. A fifteen minute podcast takes an hour.

                    Time Management 101

                    You can control time, you can only control you. If you want to control time, you will need to learn the word NO. You will need to have a clear objective of what and where you want to end up in life. You can't control time, you can only control you. Yes, life will bring surprises. How you react to those surprises can dictate what future surprises come you way.

                    Time Management Insights

                    You may have heard the tale from Steven Covey about the teacher with the Jar. The teacher had boulders, rocks, pebbles and sand. The teacher put a few boulders into the giant jar, and the class agreed it was full. Then the teacher put rocks around the boulders. The class agreed they couldn't put anything else into the jar. Then the teacher put in pebbles that fell around the boulders and rocks. Finally the teacher put in sand. The bottom line is you need to put the boulders in first. If you put the sand in first, nothing else would fit.

                    A New Dimension in Time Management

                    We often operate on the importance of a task, and the timeline. In his book Procrastinate on Purpose: 5 Permissions to Multiply Your Time Rory Vaden adds one other dimension to time management and that is the dimension of significance.

                    • Importance is how much this matters.
                    • Urgency is how soon this matters.
                    • Significance is how long this is going to matter.
                    
                    

                    So now its not only what is important now, but what will you do that will make more time tomorrow. That may have a deeper impact on your over-all goal.

                      Create An Environment of Success

                    I recently binge watched a show called "Sons of Anarchy." This is another television show that has you cheering the good guys who happen to be pretty bad. I did the math and more or less a season (consisting of 13 shows) take about 10 hours to consume. I've watched all 7 seasons that is 70 hours of sitting and watching the show. You know and I know there are other shows as well. Just think what you could have done with those 70 hours! Does this mean you can't watch TV? I enjoy television and movies. I enjoy food. I enjoy lots of things. The problem is you can't have five umber one priorities. Right now my friend Cliff Ravenscraft is exercising like a madman and dropping weight. How? He has ONE number one priority. I wish Cliff well. I will be interested to see how he finds balance when he hits his target goal. I'm sure some of that balance will be achieved by using the word NO. Turning off the TV (or netflix) is just part of creating an environment of success. There are studies that show Americans spend an HOUR a day LOOKING FOR STUFF. One way to avoid wasting this time is to come up with a plan (any plan) to create your show. I use tools like voice memo on my iphone to capture ideas. I use tools like Evernote, Workflowy, and Asana to management my tasks. I use the clock on my iPhone to remind me to go home if I'm working in my office. Technology can be a boost to your productivity as long as your productivity isn't just entering taks into the new system. You eventually have to do the tasks. But what about that show you really like? Well watch it online (where you can fast forward through the commercials) and if you really want to take your binge watching to a new level use MySpeed. Its a great tool that lets you speed up (or slow down) online videos (including netflix). Organize all of the files you use in every episode into a folder. This way if you ever need to do a show on the road, it's all right there to throw on a jump drive. I use the folder structure of Podcast Name > Episode >Raw/Finished. This means I store voicemails, and any other materials in the raw folder. I use those to create the finished episode. Family issues? Work with your family to come to an agreement on when you will be podcasting. If the family knows Mondays & Thursdays are your podcast days they will be less likely to interrupt you (and if they do, you know its important). A mantra I used in high school and Jr. High School was if I didn't start (drinking, etc) I didn't have to worry about stopping. When it comes to binge watching, if you don't start a show, you don't have to worrying about how it ends. When you get into your studio, with the TV, Twitter, facebook off, you can turn to your task list and start working on those important items that will impact your dream the most.

                    The Other Thing You Have Control Over: Your Attitude

                    “The longer I love, the more I realize the impact of attitude on life. Attitude, to me, is more important than facts. It is more important than the past, than education, than money, than circumstances, than failures, than successes, than what other people think or say or do. It is more important than appearance, giftedness or skill. It will make or break a company...a church....a home. The remarkable thing is we have a choice every day regarding the attitude we will embrace for that day. We cannot change our past...we cannot change the fact that people will act in a certain way. We cannot change the inevitable. The only thing we can do is play on the one string we have, and that is our attitude...I am convinced that life is 10% what happens to me and 90% how I react to it. And so it is with you...we are in charge of our attitudes.” ? Charles R. Swindoll  

                    Smart Podcast Press Update

                    This Simple Podcast Press player is the player I use on the Ask the Podcast Coach website. It puts buttons beneath the player for subscriptions (like itunes), and ways for people to join your mailing list. I caught up with Hani to find out what is new. Here are the new exciting features: 1. The ability to have a link right the time in an episode. 2. The ability to easily show your positive reviews on your website (inspiring people to create more reviews). 3. Create a table of past episode with a link to your audio. The best part is it's only $49 for a single use license. For more information go to simplepodcastpress.com

                    Update on Podcasts.com

                    I did get a reply from podcasts.com I wrote about it on my blog. In the end, they do not offer a redirect from their site (which is really bad) so you do not want to make this your primary distribution channel.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting

                    ]]>I was listening to the Podcasters Roundtable that they recorded live on the NMX floor (I was so bummed that I couldn't attend). They were doing a show with the topic of "podcasting issues" In other words, what were the hurdles you are having. One kept coming up over and over, and that was the issue of not having enough time.
                    How To Avoid The Time Trap - Pick Your Schedule LAST

                    I am working with a company right now where I will be recording their podcast. I like the topic, and I like the people. It should be fun. We were starting to talk about how many episodes a week, and how long the episodes should be. The podcast will be based on information that the company provides. Its will be arranged in a fashion that they are not used to doing. In the end, the company is not sure how long or hard it will be to give me the information. I also don't know how long it will take to record and edit that information. The answer? Do a test show. Then do another and another. I suggested we wait to pick a schedule LAST, so we can make an informed decision. Ray Ortega produces the Podcasters Roundtable twice a week. Why? Because he has a smile daughter, a wife, and a job. He know how long it takes to create a show, and picked a schedule he can consistently hit. When you publish on a consistent schedule, your audience makes them part of their routine. If you can't publish on a consistent schedule, ALWAYS provide consistent value (and your audience will forgive you). Every time I track how long it takes to create a podcast (audio) I arrive at a four to one ratio. A one minute podcast takes four minutes. A fifteen minute podcast takes an hour.

                    Time Management 101

                    You can control time, you can only control you. If you want to control time, you will need to learn the word NO. You will need to have a clear objective of what and where you want to end up in life. You can't control time, you can only control you. Yes, life will bring surprises. How you react to those surprises can dictate what future surprises come you way.

                    Time Management Insights

                    You may have heard the tale from Steven Covey about the teacher with the Jar. The teacher had boulders, rocks, pebbles and sand. The teacher put a few boulders into the giant jar, and the class agreed it was full. Then the teacher put rocks around the boulders. The class agreed they couldn't put anything else into the jar. Then the teacher put in pebbles that fell around the boulders and rocks. Finally the teacher put in sand. The bottom line is you need to put the boulders in first. If you put the sand in first, nothing else would fit.

                    A New Dimension in Time Management

                    We often operate on the importance of a task, and the timeline. In his book Procrastinate on Purpose: 5 Permissions to Multiply Your Time Rory Vaden adds one other dimension to time management and that is the dimension of significance.

                    • Importance is how much this matters.
                    • Urgency is how soon this matters.
                    • Significance is how long this is going to matter.
                    
                    

                    So now its not only what is important now, but what will you do that will make more time tomorrow. That may have a deeper impact on your over-all goal.

                      Create An Environment of Success

                    I recently binge watched a show called "Sons of Anarchy." This is another television show that has you cheering the good guys who happen to be pretty bad. I did the math and more or less a season (consisting of 13 shows) take about 10 hours to consume. I've watched all 7 seasons that is 70 hours of sitting and watching the show. You know and I know there are other shows as well. Just think what you could have done with those 70 hours! Does this mean you can't watch TV? I enjoy television and movies. I enjoy food. I enjoy lots of things. The problem is you can't have five umber one priorities. Right now my friend Cliff Ravenscraft is exercising like a madman and dropping weight. How? He has ONE number one priority. I wish Cliff well. I will be interested to see how he finds balance when he hits his target goal. I'm sure some of that balance will be achieved by using the word NO. Turning off the TV (or netflix) is just part of creating an environment of success. There are studies that show Americans spend an HOUR a day LOOKING FOR STUFF. One way to avoid wasting this time is to come up with a plan (any plan) to create your show. I use tools like voice memo on my iphone to capture ideas. I use tools like Evernote, Workflowy, and Asana to management my tasks. I use the clock on my iPhone to remind me to go home if I'm working in my office. Technology can be a boost to your productivity as long as your productivity isn't just entering taks into the new system. You eventually have to do the tasks. But what about that show you really like? Well watch it online (where you can fast forward through the commercials) and if you really want to take your binge watching to a new level use MySpeed. Its a great tool that lets you speed up (or slow down) online videos (including netflix). Organize all of the files you use in every episode into a folder. This way if you ever need to do a show on the road, it's all right there to throw on a jump drive. I use the folder structure of Podcast Name > Episode >Raw/Finished. This means I store voicemails, and any other materials in the raw folder. I use those to create the finished episode. Family issues? Work with your family to come to an agreement on when you will be podcasting. If the family knows Mondays & Thursdays are your podcast days they will be less likely to interrupt you (and if they do, you know its important). A mantra I used in high school and Jr. High School was if I didn't start (drinking, etc) I didn't have to worry about stopping. When it comes to binge watching, if you don't start a show, you don't have to worrying about how it ends. When you get into your studio, with the TV, Twitter, facebook off, you can turn to your task list and start working on those important items that will impact your dream the most.

                    The Other Thing You Have Control Over: Your Attitude

                    “The longer I love, the more I realize the impact of attitude on life. Attitude, to me, is more important than facts. It is more important than the past, than education, than money, than circumstances, than failures, than successes, than what other people think or say or do. It is more important than appearance, giftedness or skill. It will make or break a company...a church....a home. The remarkable thing is we have a choice every day regarding the attitude we will embrace for that day. We cannot change our past...we cannot change the fact that people will act in a certain way. We cannot change the inevitable. The only thing we can do is play on the one string we have, and that is our attitude...I am convinced that life is 10% what happens to me and 90% how I react to it. And so it is with you...we are in charge of our attitudes.” ? Charles R. Swindoll  

                    Smart Podcast Press Update

                    This Simple Podcast Press player is the player I use on the Ask the Podcast Coach website. It puts buttons beneath the player for subscriptions (like itunes), and ways for people to join your mailing list. I caught up with Hani to find out what is new. Here are the new exciting features: 1. The ability to have a link right the time in an episode. 2. The ability to easily show your positive reviews on your website (inspiring people to create more reviews). 3. Create a table of past episode with a link to your audio. The best part is it's only $49 for a single use license. For more information go to simplepodcastpress.com

                    Update on Podcasts.com

                    I did get a reply from podcasts.com I wrote about it on my blog. In the end, they do not offer a redirect from their site (which is really bad) so you do not want to make this your primary distribution channel.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting

                    ]]>8231856f42a1d135b9d5d809f933372bMon, 04 May 2015 04:00:00 -040046:35falsefull460460Another Free Media Host? Is Podcasts.com a Good Idea?Today I take a look at Podcasts.com a new free media hosting company. I've seen a few services like this come and go along the last 10 years. So many people get excited because its free media hosting. Here are some of the things that I have experienced.
                    • They show Adam Carolla on their front page along with people like the Twit.tv network. I would be VERY surprised if these people were using their service.
                    • I sent a support request over 48 hours ago and have received no response.
                    • There is no way to put the audio on YOUR website. Their system is all about pointing people to THEIR website.
                    • They create a secondary RSS feed for your show, and they offer NO redirect. In other words, they get between you and your audience. This is really bad
                    • Their stats are beyond basic
                    • There isn't much documentation for some of their features
                    
                    

                    On the other hand

                    • They offer android and iOs apps to listen to podcasts
                    • They offer private subscription only podcasts
                    • They offer the ability to sell merchandise
                    
                    

                    The site is owned by Emerge Media who state that "We're grateful to help 50+ million people communicate in 190 countries, find information and entertain when you need it most." They own person.com, directions.com, womens-health.com, information.com, muchgames.com, bands.com,translate.com and now podcasts.com Their mission statement is, "Taking on the essential roots of everyday tasks and breathing real life into the technology behind them. Empowering humanity in supporting each other and giving them the tools to create a meaningful society surrounded by technology." My Opinion As it doesn't cost you anything, if you've got the time I could see uploading files on to this service as a secondary distribution channel. Realize this may not bring

                    We've Seen This Before

                    Podbean is still showing twit on their front page (again, doubtful as they have sponsored bandwdith). Around 2006 Podshow (later Mevio) invested a TON of resources to make a web based system that made podcast subscriptions easy. It also duplicated your feed and people got REALLY mad. There is an article in the latest edition of Podertainment magazine explaining how people who use Podomatic are somewhat slave to them (as they control your feed, you have to upgrade to be able to put in the iTunes redirect to tell iTunes to listen to your new feed).

                    The Average Life Span of Free Media Hosting

                    How long Does free last? Podango 2. Mypodcast.com 4. Years Justin.tv 7 years Podshow/Mevio 9 years (they spent over 30 million in funds) Average? 5.5 year  

                    Because of My Podcast - I Interviewed a Supreme Court Justice

                    Eivind Arntsen shares how his podcast about the (loosely translated) "Legal ABCs" in Norway lead to him interviewing a Supreme Court Justice. You can find his podcast at www.dalan.no More Free Hosting Woes: Mark From Geocaching Podcast Marc explains how he saw a podcast in New and Noteworthy that played a prerecorded message from Podomatic because the host had burned through their bandwidth limit. It's a shames as you can pay somewhere between $5 and $20 to have unlimited bandwidth with companies like Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com (and you can get a FREE month using the coupon code sopfree at either provider). Check out Mark at ohbeep.com

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    ]]>Today I take a look at Podcasts.com a new free media hosting company. I've seen a few services like this come and go along the last 10 years. So many people get excited because its free media hosting. Here are some of the things that I have experienced.
                    • They show Adam Carolla on their front page along with people like the Twit.tv network. I would be VERY surprised if these people were using their service.
                    • I sent a support request over 48 hours ago and have received no response.
                    • There is no way to put the audio on YOUR website. Their system is all about pointing people to THEIR website.
                    • They create a secondary RSS feed for your show, and they offer NO redirect. In other words, they get between you and your audience. This is really bad
                    • Their stats are beyond basic
                    • There isn't much documentation for some of their features
                    
                    

                    On the other hand

                    • They offer android and iOs apps to listen to podcasts
                    • They offer private subscription only podcasts
                    • They offer the ability to sell merchandise
                    
                    

                    The site is owned by Emerge Media who state that "We're grateful to help 50+ million people communicate in 190 countries, find information and entertain when you need it most." They own person.com, directions.com, womens-health.com, information.com, muchgames.com, bands.com,translate.com and now podcasts.com Their mission statement is, "Taking on the essential roots of everyday tasks and breathing real life into the technology behind them. Empowering humanity in supporting each other and giving them the tools to create a meaningful society surrounded by technology." My Opinion As it doesn't cost you anything, if you've got the time I could see uploading files on to this service as a secondary distribution channel. Realize this may not bring

                    We've Seen This Before

                    Podbean is still showing twit on their front page (again, doubtful as they have sponsored bandwdith). Around 2006 Podshow (later Mevio) invested a TON of resources to make a web based system that made podcast subscriptions easy. It also duplicated your feed and people got REALLY mad. There is an article in the latest edition of Podertainment magazine explaining how people who use Podomatic are somewhat slave to them (as they control your feed, you have to upgrade to be able to put in the iTunes redirect to tell iTunes to listen to your new feed).

                    The Average Life Span of Free Media Hosting

                    How long Does free last? Podango 2. Mypodcast.com 4. Years Justin.tv 7 years Podshow/Mevio 9 years (they spent over 30 million in funds) Average? 5.5 year  

                    Because of My Podcast - I Interviewed a Supreme Court Justice

                    Eivind Arntsen shares how his podcast about the (loosely translated) "Legal ABCs" in Norway lead to him interviewing a Supreme Court Justice. You can find his podcast at www.dalan.no More Free Hosting Woes: Mark From Geocaching Podcast Marc explains how he saw a podcast in New and Noteworthy that played a prerecorded message from Podomatic because the host had burned through their bandwidth limit. It's a shames as you can pay somewhere between $5 and $20 to have unlimited bandwidth with companies like Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com (and you can get a FREE month using the coupon code sopfree at either provider). Check out Mark at ohbeep.com

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    ]]>da067ea4537ede6fcd7b13fb09b2263dMon, 27 Apr 2015 04:00:00 -040039:15falsefull459459Behind the Scenes of NMX 2015 - Clammr Tool is AddictingToday I give some behind the scenes of NMX. This was a job 7 months ago I wasn't sure how to handle it. I did it, The show had some great moments, and some moments that we could not control (Podcast Awards). We answer the following questions: Why was the opening keynote on day 2? What happened to the Podcast Awards? Will we be co-located with NAB Show next year?

                    Last 5 in 5

                    Mordant from www.successfreaks.com share the last give podcast he listened to. These included:

                    The Tools Podcast

                    The Nerdist

                    Stuff You MIssed in History

                    Grammar Girl

                     

                    Clammr is Completely Addicting

                    When I was at the show I asked Jason Bryant what booth to visit and he said, "Check out Clammr." So I did and I interviewed the guys. Later on my way home I had an extra-extended layover in Houston and began to play with it. It's really cool. In the few days I've used it, my clammrs have been seen hundreds of times. What is a clammr? It's an 18 second clip of your show, or you just recording from your phone (I did an update from the houston airport). You can pull from all sorts of sources for audio, and then you can go in an pick the best 18 seconds (or less). You can even do your own multi-channel recording. You could record yourself saying, Here is a clip from this week's show, and then mix in the clip all from your phone.

                     Podcast Advertising CPM Getting Weird

                    During Norm Pattiz keynote, he said two things that confused people. One was that no matter what we thought about the Podcast Awards (which podcastone.com sponsored) he made money. That turned a few people (myself included) off (nobody likes to be sold to). The other one was that PodcastOne.com was using "impressions" instead of download numbers. I had heard rumblings about this and thought, "I need to have Norm explain this to me." Half way through my question, he let me know that there will ALWAYS be gray areas in whatever system of measurement you use. He was very passionate about it. Later I went up to him and explained I didn't mean to upset him. I then learned that Norm wasn't upset. He is just passionate. As we spoke, I could see two very different sides of a fence. Norm with his mammoth sized history in radio, and my 10 years in podcasting. Norm didn't seem to want to apply any filters to his numbers. This makes sense coming from radio. You supply the biggest number you can to the advertiser who then pays you a low CPM (cost per thousand listeners/downloads). In podcasting, we thrive for hyper accurate numbers (which means smaller) and then charge a higher CPM. In the end getting both sides to meet in the middle may be impossible. What we do agree upon is that we want to give our customer (advertisers) a product in the format they want, that delivers value. At this point both sides of the download/impression discussion are saying THEY have THE way to measure. At any rate, with only 8% of podcasters getting 5,000 downloads or more it is not something that most podcasters even think about. However, with services like Blubrry (which spreads one advertiser over many multiple shows) a smaller CPM makes it pointless for the samller shows (which Norm does not deal with).

                    Subscribe on Android

                    Blubrry has put together technology enabling listeners on Adnroid to have a one click Subscribe. Currently this is supported by the Podcast Addict app, but Todd Cochrane and the Blubrry team how to get mass implementation over the next moth. It's super easy to use. Take your RSS feed URL and paste it into the box at subscribeonandroid.com, and it will spit out code for a button that when an android users clicks on will have their app of choice open and subscribe to your podcast. As this is BRAND NEW, currently only Podcast Adict supports this, but we are hoping for more adoption going forward. Here is what the button looks like Blubrry also has a new feature where you can replace any file that you have previously publish without it counting against your monthly allotment. They also allow you to go over your plan by 25% (once a month) with no penalties. This means their 100 megabyte plan would allow you to go up to 125 megs. Full story. If you want to use Blubrry hosting, or their stats, use the coupon code sopfree.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?
                    Join The Conversation ]]>Today I give some behind the scenes of NMX. This was a job 7 months ago I wasn't sure how to handle it. I did it, The show had some great moments, and some moments that we could not control (Podcast Awards). We answer the following questions: Why was the opening keynote on day 2? What happened to the Podcast Awards? Will we be co-located with NAB Show next year?

                    Last 5 in 5

                    Mordant from www.successfreaks.com share the last give podcast he listened to. These included:

                    The Tools Podcast

                    The Nerdist

                    Stuff You MIssed in History

                    Grammar Girl

                     

                    Clammr is Completely Addicting

                    When I was at the show I asked Jason Bryant what booth to visit and he said, "Check out Clammr." So I did and I interviewed the guys. Later on my way home I had an extra-extended layover in Houston and began to play with it. It's really cool. In the few days I've used it, my clammrs have been seen hundreds of times. What is a clammr? It's an 18 second clip of your show, or you just recording from your phone (I did an update from the houston airport). You can pull from all sorts of sources for audio, and then you can go in an pick the best 18 seconds (or less). You can even do your own multi-channel recording. You could record yourself saying, Here is a clip from this week's show, and then mix in the clip all from your phone.

                     Podcast Advertising CPM Getting Weird

                    During Norm Pattiz keynote, he said two things that confused people. One was that no matter what we thought about the Podcast Awards (which podcastone.com sponsored) he made money. That turned a few people (myself included) off (nobody likes to be sold to). The other one was that PodcastOne.com was using "impressions" instead of download numbers. I had heard rumblings about this and thought, "I need to have Norm explain this to me." Half way through my question, he let me know that there will ALWAYS be gray areas in whatever system of measurement you use. He was very passionate about it. Later I went up to him and explained I didn't mean to upset him. I then learned that Norm wasn't upset. He is just passionate. As we spoke, I could see two very different sides of a fence. Norm with his mammoth sized history in radio, and my 10 years in podcasting. Norm didn't seem to want to apply any filters to his numbers. This makes sense coming from radio. You supply the biggest number you can to the advertiser who then pays you a low CPM (cost per thousand listeners/downloads). In podcasting, we thrive for hyper accurate numbers (which means smaller) and then charge a higher CPM. In the end getting both sides to meet in the middle may be impossible. What we do agree upon is that we want to give our customer (advertisers) a product in the format they want, that delivers value. At this point both sides of the download/impression discussion are saying THEY have THE way to measure. At any rate, with only 8% of podcasters getting 5,000 downloads or more it is not something that most podcasters even think about. However, with services like Blubrry (which spreads one advertiser over many multiple shows) a smaller CPM makes it pointless for the samller shows (which Norm does not deal with).

                    Subscribe on Android

                    Blubrry has put together technology enabling listeners on Adnroid to have a one click Subscribe. Currently this is supported by the Podcast Addict app, but Todd Cochrane and the Blubrry team how to get mass implementation over the next moth. It's super easy to use. Take your RSS feed URL and paste it into the box at subscribeonandroid.com, and it will spit out code for a button that when an android users clicks on will have their app of choice open and subscribe to your podcast. As this is BRAND NEW, currently only Podcast Adict supports this, but we are hoping for more adoption going forward. Here is what the button looks like Blubrry also has a new feature where you can replace any file that you have previously publish without it counting against your monthly allotment. They also allow you to go over your plan by 25% (once a month) with no penalties. This means their 100 megabyte plan would allow you to go up to 125 megs. Full story. If you want to use Blubrry hosting, or their stats, use the coupon code sopfree.

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?
                    Join The Conversation ]]>54df432e3e9a4912e8b61467d54a17c2Mon, 20 Apr 2015 04:00:00 -040001:02:32falsefull458458Podcasting Adds Personality To Your Blog and BusinessToday we have great new! The Podcast Troll has been stripped of their patent. We alos have a lovely story of a father and son creating a podcast together at oowrestlingreview.com

                    Brandon Turner Adds Personality to His Website 

                    Brandon has an article on Entrepreneur Magazine's website. It's title 5 Ways Podcasting Help Your Business. 

                    His podcast helps him:

                    1. Generate traffic

                    2. Build relationships with his audience

                    3. Increased Conversations

                    4. Better publicspeaking skills

                    5. Direct learning from influencers

                    You will hear how 70% of the people who join his membership program are podcast listeners. 

                     

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Run Click Webinar Software 

                    ]]>Today we have great new! The Podcast Troll has been stripped of their patent. We alos have a lovely story of a father and son creating a podcast together at oowrestlingreview.com

                    Brandon Turner Adds Personality to His Website 

                    Brandon has an article on Entrepreneur Magazine's website. It's title 5 Ways Podcasting Help Your Business. 

                    His podcast helps him:

                    1. Generate traffic

                    2. Build relationships with his audience

                    3. Increased Conversations

                    4. Better publicspeaking skills

                    5. Direct learning from influencers

                    You will hear how 70% of the people who join his membership program are podcast listeners. 

                     

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Run Click Webinar Software 

                    ]]>7096af5811b39d241e2b54d275e9a12bMon, 13 Apr 2015 04:00:00 -040043:46falsefull457457Taking Phone Calls On Your PodcastWhile one of the coolest features of the podcasts is the ability to time shift. I can record this on 4/2 and you can listen to it years later. There is one element missing in this and this is live feedback. You get feedback, but it is later when your audience consumes it. Like most things, the more features you add to a product, the more complex it gets. Taking (and recording) phone calls is one of those things that its hard to do without adding more mixers, cables, etc.

                    Join in on the conversation by dialing 888-563-3228

                    First Words of Wisdom: Don't Do This

                    Unless you REALLY want to do this, don't. You will need to (more than likely) pick a time when your audience knows you will be there. Keep in mind when you first start out, you DON'T HAVE AN AUDIENCE YET. So you will be adding extra complexities that will burn you out as a new podcaster and make you want to quit.

                    How The Stars Take Phone Calls on Their Podcast: You Call Them

                    I know Jillian Michaels will announce on her Facebook page when she will be in the studio recording her calls. If you are free during that time you send her staff and email with your name and your question. They call you, and get you on the show. I believe Ice T does the same thing.

                    A Free Way To Take Calls: Google Voice

                    You can get a free phone number from Google (better known as Google Voice) and route that number to your smart phone (thus saving you from giving out your cell phone to the public). You then talk into your microphone and your phone at the same time. The microphone sends your voice into your mixer, and the phone sends your voice to the caller. To get the caller into your mixer,  you can use an 1/8" to a dual  1/4" cable (like this one - affiliate link). You then send the mix of you and your phone into your computer or portable recorder. The Good News: It's free and its easy to control. The Bad News: There is no cue (a line of callers visible to you). Also, as this is your cell phone your wife may call into the show. Reality: Not a bad option. The lack of cue is not an issue as you may not have any callers at first.

                    Skype in Numbers: $60 a Year

                    It's very hard to find pricing on the skype site. A forum post showed the price as $60 a year. Here again, you have no call "cue" and it is first come first serve. If someone has called in, the other callers will just here the phone ringing and ringing. The Good News: If you have a co-host this is an easy way to get everyone to hear everyone The Bad News: Adjust sound levels is very limited. You will more than likely become acquainted with The Levelator software (free) and Auphonic.com

                    Call in Studio: An Inexpensive Call Cue Callinstudio.com charges .03 cents per minute for every caller (you can limit the number of people who can call in at the same time). The phone number is $6 a month. My most expensive show was around $8.00 for the episode (meaning $2 worth of callers). If you do an hour long show it will cost you $1.80 (.03 * 60 minutes).  In a nutshell it would take a LOT of calls to get close to the $40 that Blog Talk Radio charges. Connecting you to the caller. Here again, you can use you smart phone to call into the callinstudiocom. You can use Skype (free) to call into Callinstudio.com. You then take that sound and send it into your mixer. From your mixer into a recording device. You may have issues if you only have one computer. Sending sound (the caller) out of a computer and back into the same computer to record is the definition of feedback. You are feeding the sound of the caller back into the computer. This is where you need a mix minus. This means you send the sound of the mix (you and the caller) back into the computer minus the sound of the caller (this is where a portable recorder comes in nicely - you can have the main out go to the recorder and use an auxialry send to send the sound of just you to the caller.

                    The Good News: You have a call cue. You can have a screener. You can call guest.

                    The Bad News: You need an auxiliary send for everything you tie to the mixer. If its you and callers. You need an auxilary send on your mixer. If it is you, a co-host, and callers, you need two auxiliary sends. In other words, its getting complicated. its not impossible. But it gets complicated.

                    Blog Talk Radio: A Pretty Call Cue Blog Talk Radio is working hard on updating their system. They have a beta system that produces CD quality sound. In a few months this will come out of beta. This is great. According to their website you can use their free account and have up to five callers. This may be the best solution for using their phone technology.  While they have made great strides, I would not use them as my primary platform at this point. My biggest issue is if you use them as a primary platform (per their terms) you HAVE To use their RSS feed (and there is on way to redirect it). Also when I played with  their free account I can't schedule a show between 7 and 10:30 PM. The shows are limited to 30 minutes. Blog Talk Radio DOES make recording easy, but it sounds like a phone. When they get their beta finished you will be able to connect directly from your computer. When you spend $40 a month you can do 2 hours of show a day. Most people don't need that much time. You also get advertising impressions. In general, it is my opinion that you are paying for lots of stuff you don't need.

                    Tools To Stream Live

                    Spreaker.com: Spreaker is a great media hosting provider that allows you to stream your show live. Their free service lets you do a 40 minute show whenever you want. You can store 10 hours of media. Their chat system is pretty cool. For $20 a month you can do a three hour show, and store up to 500 hours (basically 9.6 years if you do an hour a week). When you reach your limit you have to pull some shows (I'm assuming older) off. They provide stats on your downloads. You can record via browser, or smartphone app, tablets, etc.

                    Mixlr.com Mixlr is not meant to be a media host. They make it super easy to stream stuff. Whatever you send at it, it steams. You can use a browser, a smartphone, etc. There are no real stats that you can check. They provide an email with stats, but in general, I would say they don't have stats. For free you can stream up to an hour any time you want. The quality is not as good as the premium plan  which is $10 a month. I really like their chat.

                    Keep it As Simple As You Can

                    While you may think adding a certain element is cool, you REALLY need to ask yourself, "Do I need this?" The more you add the better the chance you will be purcashing things to play and record on. On my Ask the Podcast Coach show (Live Saturdays at 10:30 am or catch the back episodes ) I was using my cellphone to connect to the phone system (I've used both Blog Talk Radio and Call in Studio) and I played my intro outro using my iPad that went into a my Behringer X1832 USB mixer (lots of auxilary sends) that went into my Mac Mini where I sent it to both Spreaker and Mixlr (I would not recommend that I do that as I'm always testing).

                    Because of my Podcast: Jeff Steinman

                    Jeff is the author of How To Quit Working: A Simple Plan to Leave Your Job for a Life of Freedom and shares how over 60% of his customers have read his book. His book and podcast have now become a business. The one thing that the podcast has really delivered is key relationships. Find out more about Jeff at howtoquitworking.com/

                    Marc Maron of wtfpod.com got to interview one of his idols Mick Jagger on his podcast. Speaking of Marc Maron, if you have netflix check out his TV show "Maron" and go to season two and look for the episode titles Radio Cowboy. Marc goes off on a morning zoo team and its hilarious.

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I appeared on episode 8 of Podcaster's Group Therapy

                    I also appeared on the Timelines of Success show.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting? ]]>While one of the coolest features of the podcasts is the ability to time shift. I can record this on 4/2 and you can listen to it years later. There is one element missing in this and this is live feedback. You get feedback, but it is later when your audience consumes it. Like most things, the more features you add to a product, the more complex it gets. Taking (and recording) phone calls is one of those things that its hard to do without adding more mixers, cables, etc.

                    Join in on the conversation by dialing 888-563-3228

                    First Words of Wisdom: Don't Do This

                    Unless you REALLY want to do this, don't. You will need to (more than likely) pick a time when your audience knows you will be there. Keep in mind when you first start out, you DON'T HAVE AN AUDIENCE YET. So you will be adding extra complexities that will burn you out as a new podcaster and make you want to quit.

                    How The Stars Take Phone Calls on Their Podcast: You Call Them

                    I know Jillian Michaels will announce on her Facebook page when she will be in the studio recording her calls. If you are free during that time you send her staff and email with your name and your question. They call you, and get you on the show. I believe Ice T does the same thing.

                    A Free Way To Take Calls: Google Voice

                    You can get a free phone number from Google (better known as Google Voice) and route that number to your smart phone (thus saving you from giving out your cell phone to the public). You then talk into your microphone and your phone at the same time. The microphone sends your voice into your mixer, and the phone sends your voice to the caller. To get the caller into your mixer,  you can use an 1/8" to a dual  1/4" cable (like this one - affiliate link). You then send the mix of you and your phone into your computer or portable recorder. The Good News: It's free and its easy to control. The Bad News: There is no cue (a line of callers visible to you). Also, as this is your cell phone your wife may call into the show. Reality: Not a bad option. The lack of cue is not an issue as you may not have any callers at first.

                    Skype in Numbers: $60 a Year

                    It's very hard to find pricing on the skype site. A forum post showed the price as $60 a year. Here again, you have no call "cue" and it is first come first serve. If someone has called in, the other callers will just here the phone ringing and ringing. The Good News: If you have a co-host this is an easy way to get everyone to hear everyone The Bad News: Adjust sound levels is very limited. You will more than likely become acquainted with The Levelator software (free) and Auphonic.com

                    Call in Studio: An Inexpensive Call Cue Callinstudio.com charges .03 cents per minute for every caller (you can limit the number of people who can call in at the same time). The phone number is $6 a month. My most expensive show was around $8.00 for the episode (meaning $2 worth of callers). If you do an hour long show it will cost you $1.80 (.03 * 60 minutes).  In a nutshell it would take a LOT of calls to get close to the $40 that Blog Talk Radio charges. Connecting you to the caller. Here again, you can use you smart phone to call into the callinstudiocom. You can use Skype (free) to call into Callinstudio.com. You then take that sound and send it into your mixer. From your mixer into a recording device. You may have issues if you only have one computer. Sending sound (the caller) out of a computer and back into the same computer to record is the definition of feedback. You are feeding the sound of the caller back into the computer. This is where you need a mix minus. This means you send the sound of the mix (you and the caller) back into the computer minus the sound of the caller (this is where a portable recorder comes in nicely - you can have the main out go to the recorder and use an auxialry send to send the sound of just you to the caller.

                    The Good News: You have a call cue. You can have a screener. You can call guest.

                    The Bad News: You need an auxiliary send for everything you tie to the mixer. If its you and callers. You need an auxilary send on your mixer. If it is you, a co-host, and callers, you need two auxiliary sends. In other words, its getting complicated. its not impossible. But it gets complicated.

                    Blog Talk Radio: A Pretty Call Cue Blog Talk Radio is working hard on updating their system. They have a beta system that produces CD quality sound. In a few months this will come out of beta. This is great. According to their website you can use their free account and have up to five callers. This may be the best solution for using their phone technology.  While they have made great strides, I would not use them as my primary platform at this point. My biggest issue is if you use them as a primary platform (per their terms) you HAVE To use their RSS feed (and there is on way to redirect it). Also when I played with  their free account I can't schedule a show between 7 and 10:30 PM. The shows are limited to 30 minutes. Blog Talk Radio DOES make recording easy, but it sounds like a phone. When they get their beta finished you will be able to connect directly from your computer. When you spend $40 a month you can do 2 hours of show a day. Most people don't need that much time. You also get advertising impressions. In general, it is my opinion that you are paying for lots of stuff you don't need.

                    Tools To Stream Live

                    Spreaker.com: Spreaker is a great media hosting provider that allows you to stream your show live. Their free service lets you do a 40 minute show whenever you want. You can store 10 hours of media. Their chat system is pretty cool. For $20 a month you can do a three hour show, and store up to 500 hours (basically 9.6 years if you do an hour a week). When you reach your limit you have to pull some shows (I'm assuming older) off. They provide stats on your downloads. You can record via browser, or smartphone app, tablets, etc.

                    Mixlr.com Mixlr is not meant to be a media host. They make it super easy to stream stuff. Whatever you send at it, it steams. You can use a browser, a smartphone, etc. There are no real stats that you can check. They provide an email with stats, but in general, I would say they don't have stats. For free you can stream up to an hour any time you want. The quality is not as good as the premium plan  which is $10 a month. I really like their chat.

                    Keep it As Simple As You Can

                    While you may think adding a certain element is cool, you REALLY need to ask yourself, "Do I need this?" The more you add the better the chance you will be purcashing things to play and record on. On my Ask the Podcast Coach show (Live Saturdays at 10:30 am or catch the back episodes ) I was using my cellphone to connect to the phone system (I've used both Blog Talk Radio and Call in Studio) and I played my intro outro using my iPad that went into a my Behringer X1832 USB mixer (lots of auxilary sends) that went into my Mac Mini where I sent it to both Spreaker and Mixlr (I would not recommend that I do that as I'm always testing).

                    Because of my Podcast: Jeff Steinman

                    Jeff is the author of How To Quit Working: A Simple Plan to Leave Your Job for a Life of Freedom and shares how over 60% of his customers have read his book. His book and podcast have now become a business. The one thing that the podcast has really delivered is key relationships. Find out more about Jeff at howtoquitworking.com/

                    Marc Maron of wtfpod.com got to interview one of his idols Mick Jagger on his podcast. Speaking of Marc Maron, if you have netflix check out his TV show "Maron" and go to season two and look for the episode titles Radio Cowboy. Marc goes off on a morning zoo team and its hilarious.

                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I appeared on episode 8 of Podcaster's Group Therapy

                    I also appeared on the Timelines of Success show.

                    Ready to Start Podcasting? ]]>33272a6ad925b87b0a4bc21b84a07543Mon, 06 Apr 2015 04:00:00 -040057:19falsefull456456David Hooper's Big Bold ImpactAdam Carolla and Dennis Miller Go on Hiatus after 6 Episodes Buzzfeed Starts Podcasting NPR is Building a Discovery Tool Podcast Monetizatrion Cash.me is a new way to accept donations. Want to test it check out www.cash.me/$podcastcoach the fee is 1.5% Teespring is a cool mix of crowd funding and podcast promotion. Basic no logo t-shirts are 7.30 (just text), 14.75.  You can't order less than 5 (so a minimum order is roughly $75.00). Shipping made my order $18 for a t-shirt with my logo. Want to Support the School of Podcasting? Buy a Shirt
                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I was on episode 31 of the Podcast Digest talking podcasting equipment, because of my podcast stories, podcast websites and more.

                    Join in on the Conversation: Call 888-563-3228 or go to the Contact Page

                    David Hooper Shares Behind the Scenes of the RED podcast (real entrepreneur development)

                    David Hooper produced the RED Podcast with his wife Laurel. RED stands for Real Entrepreneur Development. We help you build an audience, sell more products, and make more money. We show you how to find the “hidden money” in your business. In this interview we talk about how: He recorded a bunch of episode before episodes before adding their show to iTunes He purposely set out to be different than any other "entrepreneur podcasts" When you have a business but you're not in the phone book are you not in business? You can wait and work out the kinks of your podcast before listing it in iTunes He is using the podcast to expand out past his Music Business Audience He created a studio in his home without spending thousands of dollars by using ATR2100 microphones, and a Noise Gate. We talk about his interview process and how he prepares a guest before the interview. Check out the RED podcast in iTunes, or on their website.  

                    Ready to start podcasting? Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>Adam Carolla and Dennis Miller Go on Hiatus after 6 Episodes Buzzfeed Starts Podcasting NPR is Building a Discovery Tool Podcast Monetizatrion Cash.me is a new way to accept donations. Want to test it check out www.cash.me/$podcastcoach the fee is 1.5% Teespring is a cool mix of crowd funding and podcast promotion. Basic no logo t-shirts are 7.30 (just text), 14.75.  You can't order less than 5 (so a minimum order is roughly $75.00). Shipping made my order $18 for a t-shirt with my logo. Want to Support the School of Podcasting? Buy a Shirt
                    Podcast Rewind:

                    I was on episode 31 of the Podcast Digest talking podcasting equipment, because of my podcast stories, podcast websites and more.

                    Join in on the Conversation: Call 888-563-3228 or go to the Contact Page

                    David Hooper Shares Behind the Scenes of the RED podcast (real entrepreneur development)

                    David Hooper produced the RED Podcast with his wife Laurel. RED stands for Real Entrepreneur Development. We help you build an audience, sell more products, and make more money. We show you how to find the “hidden money” in your business. In this interview we talk about how: He recorded a bunch of episode before episodes before adding their show to iTunes He purposely set out to be different than any other "entrepreneur podcasts" When you have a business but you're not in the phone book are you not in business? You can wait and work out the kinks of your podcast before listing it in iTunes He is using the podcast to expand out past his Music Business Audience He created a studio in his home without spending thousands of dollars by using ATR2100 microphones, and a Noise Gate. We talk about his interview process and how he prepares a guest before the interview. Check out the RED podcast in iTunes, or on their website.  

                    Ready to start podcasting? Check out www.theschoolofpodcasting.com

                    ]]>e64f71f9d97ddfe36f29fc26e9b6abffMon, 30 Mar 2015 04:00:00 -040056:26falsefull454454Let's Give Them Something To Talk AboutWant to join in on the conversation? CONTACT ME

                    I read the book Word of Mouth Marketing: How Smart Companies Get People Talking and while the book didn't do a ton for me, it did provide me with one question that can help me build my audience. It provided a question that can help inspire word of mouth. Here it is:

                    What is the topic you are covering in your podcast that will inspire your audience to tell one of their friends?

                    So I paid attention to myself this week to see what information I told friends about. I had two. One from episode 39 of Profitcast (a podcast dedicated to examining ways to monetize your podcast), and the MoneyPlan Show (help you pay attention - not interest).

                    This week was walking around a Holiday Inn in Lavonia Michigan listening to Profitcast. Brian came on and explained how a podcast can be

                    • Good
                    • Quick
                    • Cheap
                    
                    

                    The kicker is you can only pick two. It can be good and quick, but it won't be cheap. John Lee Dumas had sponsors six months after launching his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast (6 months is quick). His show is great (I'm a fan). It wasn't cheap. He spent $3000 on a mentor, and John had six figures in the bank when he started (hear about this on the MoneyPlan SOS podcast). So it was expensive to start. If you want your show to be quick and cheap, it's probably not going to be good. If your show is going to be good and cheap, it's going to take a while to build that audience (but maybe not using the question above). You can hear Brian dig deeper into the good, quick, cheap discussion on Profitcastuniverse.com I like Brian. I've had him on this show and he co-hosted one week on Ask the Podcast Coach. He's a good guy. So there I was walking around the hotel and his episode just made me think, and then I wanted to shout AMEN! That was such a cool way of explaining a person's podcast. I IMMEDIATELY stopped what I was doing, clicked on the image in the podcasts app and prayed he put contact information in his show notes (he did). He had a link to speakpipe, which then launched the app on my phone and there I was telling Brian how his content just blew me out of the water. WOW. Later that week (now in Toled0) I had the pleasure of meeting Nick Sueberling from the Podcasters Group Therapy podcast (and inside the jungle) and I told him about this "Good, Quick, Cheap" theory. Nick had heard it used in business. This is a great example of things you know that you think EVERYBODY KNOWS THAT (but obviously not - as I didn't). Later I posted it in School of Podcasting Private Facebook group (that you get access to when you are a member). Bill Conrad checked it out and later reposted about the show. He called his "Binge of the week." Later in the week I was listening to Steve Stewart talk about Bitcoin on episode 179 of the MoneyPlan Sos show, and then he throws in this BOMB of a subject that just blew me away. It tells the story (stories ALWAYS work) of Joe Legal, Jose Illegal. As Steve explains both of these men do construction. Joe Legal makes quite a bit more money than Hosea Illegal. Steve continues on and you hear that Joe pays taxes, insurance, health care, and other costs that in the end leave him having to get a part time gig to make ends meet. Hosea Illegal doesn't pay taxes or for school lunches, health benefits, and other items. It was VERY interesting and done in a "Just the facts" fashion (not really taking sides). The minute my wife got in the car, I had to play it for her. It was a great conversation starter. What topics are you tossing to your audience? Are the conversation starters? The #1 way people find about about podcasts is through word of mouth. Sure we all use Twitter, facebook, etc, but a TON of the word of mouth about podcasts happens face to face. In the immortal words of Bonnie Raitt "Let's give them something to talk about."

                    How Are You Standing Out?

                    I was thinking about the news. Every day (sadly) someone gets shot, a politician lies, a new business opens, and a beloved institution closes. A sports guy screams into the camera about a bunch of millionaires who run around and sweat for our amusement. You have a cuddly friendly weather person who secretly knows that they are being replaced by an app on your phone. The news anchor who went to school to be a journalist now gets to read headlines about B list celebrities on reality shows. The sky traffic report from a helicopter doesn't really matter because by the time you get in the car they will have that wreck cleared. This too is being replaced by an app (Waze app) To me its all the same thing. I rarely tell someone about anything I heard about on your typical newscast. I do talk about things on the New Agenda Show (that should be on the evening news). Every Newscast in America Parody (18:30)

                    Word of Mouth Book

                    I listened to this book as an Audio book (from Audible - Get a Free Book When You Sign Up). I found it "meh." If you are absolutely brand new to marketing it would be great (tips like "Be nice to people" and "start a blog" I think I have down).

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?
                    ]]>Want to join in on the conversation? CONTACT ME

                    I read the book Word of Mouth Marketing: How Smart Companies Get People Talking and while the book didn't do a ton for me, it did provide me with one question that can help me build my audience. It provided a question that can help inspire word of mouth. Here it is:

                    What is the topic you are covering in your podcast that will inspire your audience to tell one of their friends?

                    So I paid attention to myself this week to see what information I told friends about. I had two. One from episode 39 of Profitcast (a podcast dedicated to examining ways to monetize your podcast), and the MoneyPlan Show (help you pay attention - not interest).

                    This week was walking around a Holiday Inn in Lavonia Michigan listening to Profitcast. Brian came on and explained how a podcast can be

                    • Good
                    • Quick
                    • Cheap
                    
                    

                    The kicker is you can only pick two. It can be good and quick, but it won't be cheap. John Lee Dumas had sponsors six months after launching his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast (6 months is quick). His show is great (I'm a fan). It wasn't cheap. He spent $3000 on a mentor, and John had six figures in the bank when he started (hear about this on the MoneyPlan SOS podcast). So it was expensive to start. If you want your show to be quick and cheap, it's probably not going to be good. If your show is going to be good and cheap, it's going to take a while to build that audience (but maybe not using the question above). You can hear Brian dig deeper into the good, quick, cheap discussion on Profitcastuniverse.com I like Brian. I've had him on this show and he co-hosted one week on Ask the Podcast Coach. He's a good guy. So there I was walking around the hotel and his episode just made me think, and then I wanted to shout AMEN! That was such a cool way of explaining a person's podcast. I IMMEDIATELY stopped what I was doing, clicked on the image in the podcasts app and prayed he put contact information in his show notes (he did). He had a link to speakpipe, which then launched the app on my phone and there I was telling Brian how his content just blew me out of the water. WOW. Later that week (now in Toled0) I had the pleasure of meeting Nick Sueberling from the Podcasters Group Therapy podcast (and inside the jungle) and I told him about this "Good, Quick, Cheap" theory. Nick had heard it used in business. This is a great example of things you know that you think EVERYBODY KNOWS THAT (but obviously not - as I didn't). Later I posted it in School of Podcasting Private Facebook group (that you get access to when you are a member). Bill Conrad checked it out and later reposted about the show. He called his "Binge of the week." Later in the week I was listening to Steve Stewart talk about Bitcoin on episode 179 of the MoneyPlan Sos show, and then he throws in this BOMB of a subject that just blew me away. It tells the story (stories ALWAYS work) of Joe Legal, Jose Illegal. As Steve explains both of these men do construction. Joe Legal makes quite a bit more money than Hosea Illegal. Steve continues on and you hear that Joe pays taxes, insurance, health care, and other costs that in the end leave him having to get a part time gig to make ends meet. Hosea Illegal doesn't pay taxes or for school lunches, health benefits, and other items. It was VERY interesting and done in a "Just the facts" fashion (not really taking sides). The minute my wife got in the car, I had to play it for her. It was a great conversation starter. What topics are you tossing to your audience? Are the conversation starters? The #1 way people find about about podcasts is through word of mouth. Sure we all use Twitter, facebook, etc, but a TON of the word of mouth about podcasts happens face to face. In the immortal words of Bonnie Raitt "Let's give them something to talk about."

                    How Are You Standing Out?

                    I was thinking about the news. Every day (sadly) someone gets shot, a politician lies, a new business opens, and a beloved institution closes. A sports guy screams into the camera about a bunch of millionaires who run around and sweat for our amusement. You have a cuddly friendly weather person who secretly knows that they are being replaced by an app on your phone. The news anchor who went to school to be a journalist now gets to read headlines about B list celebrities on reality shows. The sky traffic report from a helicopter doesn't really matter because by the time you get in the car they will have that wreck cleared. This too is being replaced by an app (Waze app) To me its all the same thing. I rarely tell someone about anything I heard about on your typical newscast. I do talk about things on the New Agenda Show (that should be on the evening news). Every Newscast in America Parody (18:30)

                    Word of Mouth Book

                    I listened to this book as an Audio book (from Audible - Get a Free Book When You Sign Up). I found it "meh." If you are absolutely brand new to marketing it would be great (tips like "Be nice to people" and "start a blog" I think I have down).

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?
                    ]]>3dd7e3b8888bc761d48567b4e8b21ea7Mon, 23 Mar 2015 04:00:00 -040042:27falsefull454454Amy Schmittauer - Does the Work in a Savvy, Sexy, Social WayDoes it matter  where you host your media if it's an actual media host? What is Amy Schmittaur behind the camera? What kind of downloads can I expect from my first pdocast episode? If my show is really bad, what can I expect? All of these questions are answered in today's School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements episode 453.
                    Dave's Thoughts on Spreaker

                    Colin from Canada asks, "What are your thoughts on Spreaker? Is it too crowded, what do you think of their sound quality?" I've spoken about podcast media hosts in the past, and a few years ago I was not a huge fan of Spreaker. I was contacted by the head of Spreaker, we got on Skype and since then they have continued to add more and more features to their platform. They use to rename your file, tweak your ID3 tags, and there was no way to redirect your feed. Those objections have been solved. Do I have any objections to Spreaker now? Only one (and it's a small one). Both Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have the ability to have an unlimited back catalog. Spreaker allows you to have a HUGE back catalog, but in the end, there IS a limit (510 hours - thats a lot of episodes - for $20 a month).

                    Your Host Won't Get Your More Listeners

                    So many people thought that having their podcast on SoundCloud would bring them more audience (in my circles it brought in an additional 3%). While Spreaker does have a thriving community, in the end don't look to your media host to bring you an audience - you need to do that on your own.

                    What Kind of Numbers Does a New Podcast Get?

                    Last week I released an experiment of mind call Podcasting For Free. Episode 4 got 33 downloads in a week. Another experiment I did was trying to make the absolutely worst podcast. I think I succeeded as the first episode released in 2013 still only has 8 downloads. Downloads will always be based on your topic, genre, and background. We have tools to help you shape your content at the School of Podcasting.

                    Amy Schmittauer Jumps Into the Podcasting Pool (With No Makeup)

                    Amy Schmittaur is the force behind Savvy Social Sexy. I found Amy on YouTube and I love her sarcasm, and her content. For me, that's an unbeatable combination. In today's interview we discover: 1. Amy is actually shy when the camera is turned off 2. People give you 8 seconds on YouTube to make your first impression 3. In the end, you have to do the work. You have to at least try. 4. Amy is out on her Sexy Savvy Social LIVE tour (see info). 5. The things Amy can do in a podcast that she can't do in a YouTube video. Here is Amy explaining the name of her brand. It makes me laugh every time I watch it (#imjustsayin') https://youtu.be/_oDGxqzO2z8

                    School of Podcasting Members and Affiliates

                    If you are a members of the School of Podcasting and School of Podcasting Affiliates we have MOVED platforms (I am now using Value Addon for my membership site). If you have not received your new login information, please visit the Help Desk, and let me know. If you are an affiliate, you need to sign up to continue to be an affiliate (it's free, and easy), and your old affiliate links won't work after the end of the month.

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    Serial dowload numbers

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?
                    ]]>Does it matter  where you host your media if it's an actual media host? What is Amy Schmittaur behind the camera? What kind of downloads can I expect from my first pdocast episode? If my show is really bad, what can I expect? All of these questions are answered in today's School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements episode 453.
                    Dave's Thoughts on Spreaker

                    Colin from Canada asks, "What are your thoughts on Spreaker? Is it too crowded, what do you think of their sound quality?" I've spoken about podcast media hosts in the past, and a few years ago I was not a huge fan of Spreaker. I was contacted by the head of Spreaker, we got on Skype and since then they have continued to add more and more features to their platform. They use to rename your file, tweak your ID3 tags, and there was no way to redirect your feed. Those objections have been solved. Do I have any objections to Spreaker now? Only one (and it's a small one). Both Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com have the ability to have an unlimited back catalog. Spreaker allows you to have a HUGE back catalog, but in the end, there IS a limit (510 hours - thats a lot of episodes - for $20 a month).

                    Your Host Won't Get Your More Listeners

                    So many people thought that having their podcast on SoundCloud would bring them more audience (in my circles it brought in an additional 3%). While Spreaker does have a thriving community, in the end don't look to your media host to bring you an audience - you need to do that on your own.

                    What Kind of Numbers Does a New Podcast Get?

                    Last week I released an experiment of mind call Podcasting For Free. Episode 4 got 33 downloads in a week. Another experiment I did was trying to make the absolutely worst podcast. I think I succeeded as the first episode released in 2013 still only has 8 downloads. Downloads will always be based on your topic, genre, and background. We have tools to help you shape your content at the School of Podcasting.

                    Amy Schmittauer Jumps Into the Podcasting Pool (With No Makeup)

                    Amy Schmittaur is the force behind Savvy Social Sexy. I found Amy on YouTube and I love her sarcasm, and her content. For me, that's an unbeatable combination. In today's interview we discover: 1. Amy is actually shy when the camera is turned off 2. People give you 8 seconds on YouTube to make your first impression 3. In the end, you have to do the work. You have to at least try. 4. Amy is out on her Sexy Savvy Social LIVE tour (see info). 5. The things Amy can do in a podcast that she can't do in a YouTube video. Here is Amy explaining the name of her brand. It makes me laugh every time I watch it (#imjustsayin') https://youtu.be/_oDGxqzO2z8

                    School of Podcasting Members and Affiliates

                    If you are a members of the School of Podcasting and School of Podcasting Affiliates we have MOVED platforms (I am now using Value Addon for my membership site). If you have not received your new login information, please visit the Help Desk, and let me know. If you are an affiliate, you need to sign up to continue to be an affiliate (it's free, and easy), and your old affiliate links won't work after the end of the month.

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    Serial dowload numbers

                    Ready to Start Podcasting?
                    ]]>34ac6c4b337ba15b2952bb1e165ecd2dMon, 16 Mar 2015 04:00:00 -040055:09falsefull453453Podcasting Stats - Lots and Lots of Podcasting Stats1.9 Billion in 2013

                    2.5 Billion in 2014

                    8 Million daily audience requests for podcast during the fourth quarter of 2014

                    Unique monthly audience members continued to grow to 41 million individuals in 2014 versus 25 million at the beginning of 2013, marking another milestone achievement

                    That represents a 37% increase in annual download requests.

                    The accelerated growth for podcast audience engagement continues with more podcasts being distributed to Mobile devices.  Of the 2.6 billion downloads, over 1.6 billion (63%) were requested from Mobile devices, with a 5.4 to 1 ratio for iOS versus Android.  At the end of 2014 the WTF with Marc Maron app for iOS, Android and Windows Phone 8 had been downloaded by over 225,000 unique user accounts.

                    New Podcasters

                    Over 22,000 podcast shows use the Libsyn Network for distribution and monetization services for over 2.1 million unique, active episodes.  New account sign-ups are also at an all-time high with the addition of over 2,300 new shows already in 2015.

                    Edison Podcasting Stats

                    35% of Cell Phone Users have connected it to their car to listen

                    33% of people (approximately 89 Million) have listened to a podcast

                    55% of people consume podcasts on their smart phone

                    17% of the US listen to podcasts on a monthly basis (46 million Americans)

                    10% of people 12+ have listened to podcast in a last week. (27 million Americans)

                    Of the 10% who listen to podcasts, 23% listen to three, 22% listen to 2, 17% listen to four or five, and 15% listen to eleven or more (averaged 6 per week)

                    45% percent of podcast listeners have a college degree (compared to 33% of the total population)

                    52% of podcast listeners make more than $10o,000 a year

                    NBC won their evening with a 3% rating. The serial podcast was listened to by #5 of the population.

                    71% (192 million) of Americans have a smart phone

                    81% of people 25-54 own a smart phone

                    AM/FM Radio being used in the car dropped 5% from 2014 to 2015

                    Edison research

                    Podcast Awards Website Stats

                    32.8% of nominees had no email address or form to contact them (twitter, facebook, Google+ do not count)

                    26.3% had no iTunes icon on their website.

                    and yet what do people want most? Comments and interaction from their audience, and more subscribers/downloads……

                    25.3% had no way to download the file

                    23.5% of podcasters nominted for a podcast award did NOT have an RSS icon/link on their website (on the front page)

                    there is more to podcasting than itunes. Give people and RSS so they can subscribe on whatever they want to use.

                    22.8% of the nominees had an RSS feed that was invalid

                    it doesn’t do any good to have a feed if it doesn’t work (case in point soundcloud)

                    17.2% had no visible player to click play when you land on their website (many you had to dig to find one)

                    14.4% Had no social media to share you content

                    One other things that were interesting. Some of the top podcasts of 2014 (Serial, Startup, and Reply All) have no iTunes buttons on their website. Yet they dominate.

                    When People Find Your Podcast They Will Binge Listen

                    Today I play a clip from Elsie Escobar who (along with Jessice Kupferman) produce the She Podcasts podcast (she is also the co-host of The Feed). The clip is Elsie talking about how she discovered the "What I Wore When" Glamore podcast through word of mouth (the co-host of the Feed Rob Walch's wife liked the show), and when she found it - she downloaded all the episodes.

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Michael from the Recovered Podcast talks about how his podcast is helping people get off drugs. For more information go to www.recoveredcast.com

                    ]]>1.9 Billion in 2013

                    2.5 Billion in 2014

                    8 Million daily audience requests for podcast during the fourth quarter of 2014

                    Unique monthly audience members continued to grow to 41 million individuals in 2014 versus 25 million at the beginning of 2013, marking another milestone achievement

                    That represents a 37% increase in annual download requests.

                    The accelerated growth for podcast audience engagement continues with more podcasts being distributed to Mobile devices.  Of the 2.6 billion downloads, over 1.6 billion (63%) were requested from Mobile devices, with a 5.4 to 1 ratio for iOS versus Android.  At the end of 2014 the WTF with Marc Maron app for iOS, Android and Windows Phone 8 had been downloaded by over 225,000 unique user accounts.

                    New Podcasters

                    Over 22,000 podcast shows use the Libsyn Network for distribution and monetization services for over 2.1 million unique, active episodes.  New account sign-ups are also at an all-time high with the addition of over 2,300 new shows already in 2015.

                    Edison Podcasting Stats

                    35% of Cell Phone Users have connected it to their car to listen

                    33% of people (approximately 89 Million) have listened to a podcast

                    55% of people consume podcasts on their smart phone

                    17% of the US listen to podcasts on a monthly basis (46 million Americans)

                    10% of people 12+ have listened to podcast in a last week. (27 million Americans)

                    Of the 10% who listen to podcasts, 23% listen to three, 22% listen to 2, 17% listen to four or five, and 15% listen to eleven or more (averaged 6 per week)

                    45% percent of podcast listeners have a college degree (compared to 33% of the total population)

                    52% of podcast listeners make more than $10o,000 a year

                    NBC won their evening with a 3% rating. The serial podcast was listened to by #5 of the population.

                    71% (192 million) of Americans have a smart phone

                    81% of people 25-54 own a smart phone

                    AM/FM Radio being used in the car dropped 5% from 2014 to 2015

                    Edison research

                    Podcast Awards Website Stats

                    32.8% of nominees had no email address or form to contact them (twitter, facebook, Google+ do not count)

                    26.3% had no iTunes icon on their website.

                    and yet what do people want most? Comments and interaction from their audience, and more subscribers/downloads……

                    25.3% had no way to download the file

                    23.5% of podcasters nominted for a podcast award did NOT have an RSS icon/link on their website (on the front page)

                    there is more to podcasting than itunes. Give people and RSS so they can subscribe on whatever they want to use.

                    22.8% of the nominees had an RSS feed that was invalid

                    it doesn’t do any good to have a feed if it doesn’t work (case in point soundcloud)

                    17.2% had no visible player to click play when you land on their website (many you had to dig to find one)

                    14.4% Had no social media to share you content

                    One other things that were interesting. Some of the top podcasts of 2014 (Serial, Startup, and Reply All) have no iTunes buttons on their website. Yet they dominate.

                    When People Find Your Podcast They Will Binge Listen

                    Today I play a clip from Elsie Escobar who (along with Jessice Kupferman) produce the She Podcasts podcast (she is also the co-host of The Feed). The clip is Elsie talking about how she discovered the "What I Wore When" Glamore podcast through word of mouth (the co-host of the Feed Rob Walch's wife liked the show), and when she found it - she downloaded all the episodes.

                    Because of My Podcast

                    Michael from the Recovered Podcast talks about how his podcast is helping people get off drugs. For more information go to www.recoveredcast.com

                    ]]>17ea590b1be68abc32c9c40ae309e2afMon, 09 Mar 2015 04:00:00 -040049:51falsefull452452Jeff Brown Shares 26 Years Of Experience Behind the MicrophoneI am working on an episode that will have clips of people who have been on radio, and I'm still working on it. When I interviewed Jeff Brown from podcasteracademy.com and the Lead to Read Podcast (readtoleadpodcast.com) he just kept bring gold and I just couldn't wait to share it. We talk about
                    • Tips on conducting good interviews
                    • Keep a level of intimacy with your audience
                    • How Taco Bell Almost got Jeff Fired
                    • How do you get guests for your show (when they say no the first time)
                    • We also hear the last five podcasts Jeff listened to.
                    
                    Behind the Scenes of the Podcast Awards: I looked Stupid and Lived to Tell

                    This was the first year that the Podcast Awards were owned by the New Media Expo. I am the Director of Podcasting for the New Media Expo and (much like a new podcaster) we found ourselves saying, "This takes longer than we thought." It took so much time that we were copying and pasting stats into PowerPoint Presentations right before we went live (crunching and assembling the numbers took longer than expected).

                    So there I was rolling out the finalists, and when I went to a slide the information wasn't there. I had checked and re-checked my slides. I mean, I TEACH POWERPOINT AS PART OF MY DAY GIG! On another slide I had pasted the wrong information. As the old saying goes...

                    Haste makes waste.

                    This was live in front of about 150 people.

                    Egg meet face.

                    As I write this, that was about 2.5 hours ago and you know what?

                    I'm alive.

                    I will live to see another day.

                    I/We learned a valuable lesson (after all they're not mistakes - they are learning opportunities!).

                    So if you are worried about starting a podcast and you're afraid you'll look stupid, keep this in mind:

                    1. When you first start out you don't have a very big audience (so nobody will really know).

                    2. You can cross that mistake off the bucket list and get back to making even better content.

                    3. You will live. Very few people actually die from embarrassment.

                    ]]>I am working on an episode that will have clips of people who have been on radio, and I'm still working on it. When I interviewed Jeff Brown from podcasteracademy.com and the Lead to Read Podcast (readtoleadpodcast.com) he just kept bring gold and I just couldn't wait to share it. We talk about
                    • Tips on conducting good interviews
                    • Keep a level of intimacy with your audience
                    • How Taco Bell Almost got Jeff Fired
                    • How do you get guests for your show (when they say no the first time)
                    • We also hear the last five podcasts Jeff listened to.
                    
                    Behind the Scenes of the Podcast Awards: I looked Stupid and Lived to Tell

                    This was the first year that the Podcast Awards were owned by the New Media Expo. I am the Director of Podcasting for the New Media Expo and (much like a new podcaster) we found ourselves saying, "This takes longer than we thought." It took so much time that we were copying and pasting stats into PowerPoint Presentations right before we went live (crunching and assembling the numbers took longer than expected).

                    So there I was rolling out the finalists, and when I went to a slide the information wasn't there. I had checked and re-checked my slides. I mean, I TEACH POWERPOINT AS PART OF MY DAY GIG! On another slide I had pasted the wrong information. As the old saying goes...

                    Haste makes waste.

                    This was live in front of about 150 people.

                    Egg meet face.

                    As I write this, that was about 2.5 hours ago and you know what?

                    I'm alive.

                    I will live to see another day.

                    I/We learned a valuable lesson (after all they're not mistakes - they are learning opportunities!).

                    So if you are worried about starting a podcast and you're afraid you'll look stupid, keep this in mind:

                    1. When you first start out you don't have a very big audience (so nobody will really know).

                    2. You can cross that mistake off the bucket list and get back to making even better content.

                    3. You will live. Very few people actually die from embarrassment.

                    ]]>d5664f81601589f59a2534060e1bb030Mon, 02 Mar 2015 04:35:50 -040053:44falsefull451451How Do You Define Value?In today's show we talk about a new  Podcast Award, some weird stuff at Fiverr.com, and I answer what I feel is value, the big question how do YOU define value. What value do you get from the podcasts you listen to?
                    New Media Expo is Right Around the Corner
                    Academy of Podcasters

                    A new award has been created from Stitcher and the folks at podcast movement. For more information go to http://academyofpodcasters.com/voting-criteria/

                    Daniel J. Lewis Has His Artwork and Copy Stolen on Fiverr.com

                    I wrote about this on a previous post, on a post on how Daniel J. Lewis from podcastcoverart.com had his artwork AND ADVERTISING COPY being used (illegally) by a person on fiverr.com so I talk about what I would use Fiverr for at THIS POST. I do mention Music Radio Creative on the show today and play a clip

                    How Do YOU Define Value?

                    On the Feed podcast a called had called in stated he was tired of Podcasting Gurus telling other people how to podcast. I agree. There is no one size fits all. I use the anology of Football. There are: Teams that run the ball well Teams that pass the ball well Teams with tremendous defense Teams with great special teams In the end, it doesn't matter how you get there as long as you end up in the end zone for a touchdown.

                    How I define Value

                    I looked at what I consume and found that most of the content I watch, listen, or read: Makes me laugh Makes me cry Makes me Think Makes me Groan Or it entertains and educates me.

                    Social Value

                    If you want people to talk about your show, it needs to provide social value. When I reviewed the Sci-Fi Movie podcast I was amazed at the level of trivia they had discovered about the movie they were talking about. If I was at a party full of people talking about Sci-fi, I would be armed with some seriously cool information. I would look good, and when people ask how I know so much I would say, "I listen to the Sc-fi Movie Podcast." This according to the book contagious, by Jonah Berger.

                    ]]>In today's show we talk about a new  Podcast Award, some weird stuff at Fiverr.com, and I answer what I feel is value, the big question how do YOU define value. What value do you get from the podcasts you listen to?
                    New Media Expo is Right Around the Corner
                    Academy of Podcasters

                    A new award has been created from Stitcher and the folks at podcast movement. For more information go to http://academyofpodcasters.com/voting-criteria/

                    Daniel J. Lewis Has His Artwork and Copy Stolen on Fiverr.com

                    I wrote about this on a previous post, on a post on how Daniel J. Lewis from podcastcoverart.com had his artwork AND ADVERTISING COPY being used (illegally) by a person on fiverr.com so I talk about what I would use Fiverr for at THIS POST. I do mention Music Radio Creative on the show today and play a clip

                    How Do YOU Define Value?

                    On the Feed podcast a called had called in stated he was tired of Podcasting Gurus telling other people how to podcast. I agree. There is no one size fits all. I use the anology of Football. There are: Teams that run the ball well Teams that pass the ball well Teams with tremendous defense Teams with great special teams In the end, it doesn't matter how you get there as long as you end up in the end zone for a touchdown.

                    How I define Value

                    I looked at what I consume and found that most of the content I watch, listen, or read: Makes me laugh Makes me cry Makes me Think Makes me Groan Or it entertains and educates me.

                    Social Value

                    If you want people to talk about your show, it needs to provide social value. When I reviewed the Sci-Fi Movie podcast I was amazed at the level of trivia they had discovered about the movie they were talking about. If I was at a party full of people talking about Sci-fi, I would be armed with some seriously cool information. I would look good, and when people ask how I know so much I would say, "I listen to the Sc-fi Movie Podcast." This according to the book contagious, by Jonah Berger.

                    ]]>f2356ba290ec0dae7816828df49a7d2eMon, 23 Feb 2015 05:00:00 -040042:03falsefull450450The Journey of Podcasting Starts with a Single Episode- Profitcast's The Real BrianJOIN IN ON THE CONVERSATION 888-563-3228 

                    Use the coupon code sop2015 to save $100 off at the New Media Expo go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                     

                    There are those who get into podcasting for the sole reason of making some quick cash. I typically FEEL this is bad idea (cash? maybe, quick? hardly). There seems to be a few different schools of thought on how to get into podcasting. We have all see the "On Fire" clonification of podcasting (I think I just made up a word) where everyone thought if they just did what John Lee Dumas does, they will make $2 million per year like John does. It didn't work. There are others who just do it for fun. This is fine. I recently purchased some items for the kitchen, and nobody is approaching me asking, "Hey you spend $99 on that Power Pressure Cooker XL how much are you making from it." We all have different dreams, insights, desires. Podcasting has many motivations. These include:

                    • To be seen as an expert
                    • To boost your exposure
                    • To build your community
                    • To understand your community
                    • To reach a global audience
                    • To increase awareness of your products and services
                    • To interview your favorite people
                    • To document your process of understanding a subject (I call this the "journey" podcast).
                    
                    The Journey Podcast

                    Joanna Penn of the Creative Penn started a podcast because she wanted to know more about self publishing. She did. She interviewed experts and now, years later, she IS an expert on Self-publishing. She didn't wait until she knew it all, she started and did what she could along the way.

                    You Don't Have to Be Great To Start - But You Do Have to Start to Be Great

                    Today we hear from Crag from inglespodcast.com who mentions how he started with just putting audio on his website, and gradually over time built up his skills, his gear, and now has a top notch podcast. John from Lets Talk Metal and Treasure Hunting who mentions that the podcast How Sound mentions that they feel people should always map out their show. John feel that being an "independent" means you don't have to record like they do. This is true, you can record however you want. In the end it will be the listener who helps you shape your content. As John mentions he didn't care for one podcast because he wasn't interested in the topic. There was nothing wrong with the topic, but he is not the intended audience.

                    Starting Somewhere My Nomad Guitar

                    When I was in my early teens I had a paper route. I used the money from the paper route to buy a guitar of my own. It wasn't much, but it was mine. It was what I could afford at the time. You see the paper route wasn't mine. I was a helper for my friend who had his own paper route. Later, when I had my own route I saved up $300 to purchase a Gibson SG. In 1981 (and having a paper route) this was a huge amount of cash. I had developed my taste for guitar playing on the SG knock off, and now was ready to migrate to a REAL SG.

                    Brian From ProfitCast - On His Way to Being an Expert

                    Profitcast is a great show where the host "The Real Brian" interviews experts, but it also is where Brian reveals what he is trying (and if it is working or not). He looked at the podcasting community and saw that one of the biggest things that EVERY podcaster wants is to grow their audience, and in some cases to monetize it. Brian start Profitcast to investigate strategies and tools to help podcasters grow their audience. In the interview we discuss What inspired Profitcast The Episode where Brian pealed back the curtain and asked if people were getting anything (and how that impacted his audience) How working with the "competition" lead to more leads. How he setup a dual appearance on the Audacity to Podcast. Brian is a great guy, and his podcast can be found at Profitcastuniverse.com

                    Can I Podcast For Free?

                    Can you? Yes. Should You? Oh wait, there is that should word again. I FEEL that its not the best practice, but then again, so was buying a Nomad guitar. With this in mind, I'm doing something strange. I going to teach something I don't believe in (how to podcast for free). I had to step back, and realize that some of these students will take the course (a one time fee) dip their feet in the pool and later decide they are ready to podcast "For Real" Sometimes you want to test the water, and this is an inexpensive way to do it without any monthly costs. Order it today for $29 before the price goes up in March

                     

                    Are Your Going To the New Media Expo?

                    Use the coupon code sop2015 to save $100 off at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    New Podcast Launched: Missional Man Podcast

                    Jonathan started this podcast because he wants to help other Christian men. Yes that assumes that these other Christian men need or even want help. He thinks they do. No, in fact he knows they do. Why? Because he's one of them. So actually, he started this podcast mostly for himself. He says, "I need help being both a Christian and a man." Check it out at MissionalMan.com

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Edison Research "Share of Ear" update

                    Ready to Launch a Podcast?
                    ]]>JOIN IN ON THE CONVERSATION 888-563-3228 

                    Use the coupon code sop2015 to save $100 off at the New Media Expo go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                     

                    There are those who get into podcasting for the sole reason of making some quick cash. I typically FEEL this is bad idea (cash? maybe, quick? hardly). There seems to be a few different schools of thought on how to get into podcasting. We have all see the "On Fire" clonification of podcasting (I think I just made up a word) where everyone thought if they just did what John Lee Dumas does, they will make $2 million per year like John does. It didn't work. There are others who just do it for fun. This is fine. I recently purchased some items for the kitchen, and nobody is approaching me asking, "Hey you spend $99 on that Power Pressure Cooker XL how much are you making from it." We all have different dreams, insights, desires. Podcasting has many motivations. These include:

                    • To be seen as an expert
                    • To boost your exposure
                    • To build your community
                    • To understand your community
                    • To reach a global audience
                    • To increase awareness of your products and services
                    • To interview your favorite people
                    • To document your process of understanding a subject (I call this the "journey" podcast).
                    
                    The Journey Podcast

                    Joanna Penn of the Creative Penn started a podcast because she wanted to know more about self publishing. She did. She interviewed experts and now, years later, she IS an expert on Self-publishing. She didn't wait until she knew it all, she started and did what she could along the way.

                    You Don't Have to Be Great To Start - But You Do Have to Start to Be Great

                    Today we hear from Crag from inglespodcast.com who mentions how he started with just putting audio on his website, and gradually over time built up his skills, his gear, and now has a top notch podcast. John from Lets Talk Metal and Treasure Hunting who mentions that the podcast How Sound mentions that they feel people should always map out their show. John feel that being an "independent" means you don't have to record like they do. This is true, you can record however you want. In the end it will be the listener who helps you shape your content. As John mentions he didn't care for one podcast because he wasn't interested in the topic. There was nothing wrong with the topic, but he is not the intended audience.

                    Starting Somewhere My Nomad Guitar

                    When I was in my early teens I had a paper route. I used the money from the paper route to buy a guitar of my own. It wasn't much, but it was mine. It was what I could afford at the time. You see the paper route wasn't mine. I was a helper for my friend who had his own paper route. Later, when I had my own route I saved up $300 to purchase a Gibson SG. In 1981 (and having a paper route) this was a huge amount of cash. I had developed my taste for guitar playing on the SG knock off, and now was ready to migrate to a REAL SG.

                    Brian From ProfitCast - On His Way to Being an Expert

                    Profitcast is a great show where the host "The Real Brian" interviews experts, but it also is where Brian reveals what he is trying (and if it is working or not). He looked at the podcasting community and saw that one of the biggest things that EVERY podcaster wants is to grow their audience, and in some cases to monetize it. Brian start Profitcast to investigate strategies and tools to help podcasters grow their audience. In the interview we discuss What inspired Profitcast The Episode where Brian pealed back the curtain and asked if people were getting anything (and how that impacted his audience) How working with the "competition" lead to more leads. How he setup a dual appearance on the Audacity to Podcast. Brian is a great guy, and his podcast can be found at Profitcastuniverse.com

                    Can I Podcast For Free?

                    Can you? Yes. Should You? Oh wait, there is that should word again. I FEEL that its not the best practice, but then again, so was buying a Nomad guitar. With this in mind, I'm doing something strange. I going to teach something I don't believe in (how to podcast for free). I had to step back, and realize that some of these students will take the course (a one time fee) dip their feet in the pool and later decide they are ready to podcast "For Real" Sometimes you want to test the water, and this is an inexpensive way to do it without any monthly costs. Order it today for $29 before the price goes up in March

                     

                    Are Your Going To the New Media Expo?

                    Use the coupon code sop2015 to save $100 off at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    New Podcast Launched: Missional Man Podcast

                    Jonathan started this podcast because he wants to help other Christian men. Yes that assumes that these other Christian men need or even want help. He thinks they do. No, in fact he knows they do. Why? Because he's one of them. So actually, he started this podcast mostly for himself. He says, "I need help being both a Christian and a man." Check it out at MissionalMan.com

                    Mentioned in this Podcast

                    Edison Research "Share of Ear" update

                    Ready to Launch a Podcast?
                    ]]>9070e72db1b0066ec2b383e3c8f301d4Mon, 16 Feb 2015 05:00:00 -040053:52falsefull449449CEO of Podcast Funding Platform Joyride Jeff ChenWant to join in on the conversation call 888-563-3228 or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                    Today I interview Jeff Chen of the new Podcast Monetization Platform JoyRide. I also share some podcasting news, and my community comes out (thanks to the kind heart of Steve Stewart) and wishes me a happy birthday as I turn 50!.

                    Joyride has been mentioned in Forbes, Market Watch and many other publications as they just launched in December of 2014.  According to one article, "JOYRIDE allows users to search over 100,000 different podcast shows in a variety of categories, and is seeking to convince podcast listeners to donate a monthly fee to their favorite programs. JOYRIDE is one of several companies GOOGLE is using for its developer program for ANDROID AUDIO, a version of the operating system developed for smart cars.

                    How Much Does Joyride Cost?

                    It's free to sign up, and their website states, "Joyride charges 5% in fees plus credit card processing fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per contribution." When I asked Jeff if there was a fee for removing your he replied via e-mail, "Hi Dave. Nope! Those are the only fees we charge!"

                    With this in mind,  when a listener donates $1 to you take home 62 cents and joy ride takes 38. If someone donates $3 you receive $2.46 and Joyride keeps .54 (that 30 cents per transaction really seems heft when you are only receiving one dollar - so make your rewards good enough to inspire people to pay more).

                    How Does Joyride Differ from Patreon?

                    The biggest difference is JoyRide can work on YOUR Site (so you don't have to send people to joyride.com/yourcampaign). Patreon currently takes fess on the money coming in, and they also charge a fee when you remove the money. They go into great detail on their website, and as some people pay with paypal, and other use a service called stripe, it is somewhat difficult to understand. I appreciate Patreon trying to give as much as possible, but it seems to add a certain level complication into understand exactly how much you're going to make. I am testing patreon if you want to see my current efforts.

                    How I Plan on Testing Joyride

                    On Saturdays (10:30 am) I host the "Ask the Podcast Coach" we do an hour long show, and then typically another 30 minutes "off the air." We are going to start a JoyRide campaign for those who want to hear the additional 30 minutes. I realize, that podcasting is a small niche, but it should be interesting to see how this works. I will be documenting the process along the way.

                    For more information go to www.getjoyride.com

                    Happy Birthday Dave Jackson

                    Thanks to Steve Stewart who rounded up a bunch of my friends to send in birthday wishes. These included:

                    Steve Stewart from Money Plan SOS

                    Darren Dake from the Coroner Podcast

                    Vernon from the Events Supremecy

                    Dr. Nina Savelle Rocklin from the Win the Diet War

                    Addie from the Do it Podcast

                    Hani from the Simple Podcast Press

                    Jeff Brown from the Read to Lead podcast.

                    Jonathan Chambers from the just luanched Missional Man podcast

                    Mark from the Oh Beep Podcast

                    Mike, Izzabella and Zara from Music Radio Creative and the Audio Production Podcast

                    Ralph Scott from the Sex, Drugs, and Rock and Roll podcast

                    Ryan Park from Food Crafstmen

                    Steve Stearns from Outside Health and Fitness

                    Wayne Henderson from Media Voiceovers

                    Ken Castler from Thinking Outside the Box

                    Elsie Escobar from She Podcasts, and The Feed

                     Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>Want to join in on the conversation call 888-563-3228 or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact

                    Today I interview Jeff Chen of the new Podcast Monetization Platform JoyRide. I also share some podcasting news, and my community comes out (thanks to the kind heart of Steve Stewart) and wishes me a happy birthday as I turn 50!.

                    Joyride has been mentioned in Forbes, Market Watch and many other publications as they just launched in December of 2014.  According to one article, "JOYRIDE allows users to search over 100,000 different podcast shows in a variety of categories, and is seeking to convince podcast listeners to donate a monthly fee to their favorite programs. JOYRIDE is one of several companies GOOGLE is using for its developer program for ANDROID AUDIO, a version of the operating system developed for smart cars.

                    How Much Does Joyride Cost?

                    It's free to sign up, and their website states, "Joyride charges 5% in fees plus credit card processing fees of 2.9% + $0.30 per contribution." When I asked Jeff if there was a fee for removing your he replied via e-mail, "Hi Dave. Nope! Those are the only fees we charge!"

                    With this in mind,  when a listener donates $1 to you take home 62 cents and joy ride takes 38. If someone donates $3 you receive $2.46 and Joyride keeps .54 (that 30 cents per transaction really seems heft when you are only receiving one dollar - so make your rewards good enough to inspire people to pay more).

                    How Does Joyride Differ from Patreon?

                    The biggest difference is JoyRide can work on YOUR Site (so you don't have to send people to joyride.com/yourcampaign). Patreon currently takes fess on the money coming in, and they also charge a fee when you remove the money. They go into great detail on their website, and as some people pay with paypal, and other use a service called stripe, it is somewhat difficult to understand. I appreciate Patreon trying to give as much as possible, but it seems to add a certain level complication into understand exactly how much you're going to make. I am testing patreon if you want to see my current efforts.

                    How I Plan on Testing Joyride

                    On Saturdays (10:30 am) I host the "Ask the Podcast Coach" we do an hour long show, and then typically another 30 minutes "off the air." We are going to start a JoyRide campaign for those who want to hear the additional 30 minutes. I realize, that podcasting is a small niche, but it should be interesting to see how this works. I will be documenting the process along the way.

                    For more information go to www.getjoyride.com

                    Happy Birthday Dave Jackson

                    Thanks to Steve Stewart who rounded up a bunch of my friends to send in birthday wishes. These included:

                    Steve Stewart from Money Plan SOS

                    Darren Dake from the Coroner Podcast

                    Vernon from the Events Supremecy

                    Dr. Nina Savelle Rocklin from the Win the Diet War

                    Addie from the Do it Podcast

                    Hani from the Simple Podcast Press

                    Jeff Brown from the Read to Lead podcast.

                    Jonathan Chambers from the just luanched Missional Man podcast

                    Mark from the Oh Beep Podcast

                    Mike, Izzabella and Zara from Music Radio Creative and the Audio Production Podcast

                    Ralph Scott from the Sex, Drugs, and Rock and Roll podcast

                    Ryan Park from Food Crafstmen

                    Steve Stearns from Outside Health and Fitness

                    Wayne Henderson from Media Voiceovers

                    Ken Castler from Thinking Outside the Box

                    Elsie Escobar from She Podcasts, and The Feed

                     Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Join the School of Podcasting

                     

                    ]]>f6d5bcc08e87195a3cd6910b06210dd9Mon, 09 Feb 2015 05:00:00 -040057:15falsefull448448What to Do If You Can't Pick a Podcast TopicWant to join in on the conversation? Call 888-563-3228

                    There are a few times in your life when you can say, "I don't know," and yet you still have to move forward. One is when you are in college. If you're not ready to declare a major what do you do? When you are having a baby, but you don't know the sex, what do you do when your honest answer is, "I don't know."

                    Podcast on the New Media Expo Floor on "Podcast Alley"

                    If you are going to the New Media Expo, we are accepting submissions for people who want to record live "from the floor" if you're going (and you know you should be) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podcastalley and submit your show today.

                    Because of My Podcast: I Am Being More Effective At My Job

                    Biagio and Joke are the hosts of the Producing Unscripted where they are now training their clients who are now producing better content - and thus they are helping people launch televisions show. Check them out at producingunscripted.com

                    I'm Not Sure What To Podcast About: What To Do When You Can't Find a Topic [8:48]

                    In those situations you take general classes (in the situation of college), and you go buy diapers, lots and lots of diapers, if you have a baby on the way. These are all skills you will need moving forward. No matter what your podcast is going to be about you will need to know the following:

                    1. How to plug a microphone in, and how to talk into it without having "popping P's"

                    2. You need to get proper recording levels

                    3. You could go to Wordpress.com (as a temporary play ground - not a permanent solution) and start tinkering around with understanding websites.

                    4. You can learn how to move files around to position them where you want them.

                    All of these skills will be used no matter what type of podcast you launch.

                    What happens if you never launch a podcast? You sell your microphone on ebay. What if your DO launch a podcast, and then later change your mind? There are very popular podcast hosts Mignon Fogherty (known as Grammar Girl) and Cali Lewis of geekbeat.tv who didn't find their current success on their first attempt at podcasting. Both of their show are their SECOND podcast.

                    I've had a few podcasts that I tried that didn't work. Do I consider these failures? NO. I learned something from every show. They aren't mistakes, they are learning opportunities.

                    In music, you can learn three chords (G,C, and D) and play a ton of songs using those basic chords.

                    Episode Zero Strategy 19:41

                    You need ONE episode to submit your podcast to iTunes (many people wait till they have at least three to listen to before submitting their show. In the past I've said to tell people about you and to tell them what to expect. That was back in 2005. I've changed since then. Its best to bring the best content you have. To have them going WOW. This will bring you instant credibility. Then they will care about who you are because you help you. Part of this is based on the book Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less that I've spoken about on other episodes. If I tell you my story (unless its a really good story) most people won't care. Move them with your content, then tell them your story.

                    How to be part of Your Audience's Routine [27:51]

                    While there are podcasters who are doing well without having a consistent schedule (like Joe Rogan), if you want to be part of your listeners routine, you need to come up with a consistent schedule. Darren Dake from The Coroner Podcast explained how he starts his Mondays with some quiet time with his Bible, and then he starts my podcast (that is a very humbling experience). But I am part of his routine because he can count on my show being there every Monday. 

                    Are Your Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of podcasting today

                     

                    ]]>Want to join in on the conversation? Call 888-563-3228

                    There are a few times in your life when you can say, "I don't know," and yet you still have to move forward. One is when you are in college. If you're not ready to declare a major what do you do? When you are having a baby, but you don't know the sex, what do you do when your honest answer is, "I don't know."

                    Podcast on the New Media Expo Floor on "Podcast Alley"

                    If you are going to the New Media Expo, we are accepting submissions for people who want to record live "from the floor" if you're going (and you know you should be) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podcastalley and submit your show today.

                    Because of My Podcast: I Am Being More Effective At My Job

                    Biagio and Joke are the hosts of the Producing Unscripted where they are now training their clients who are now producing better content - and thus they are helping people launch televisions show. Check them out at producingunscripted.com

                    I'm Not Sure What To Podcast About: What To Do When You Can't Find a Topic [8:48]

                    In those situations you take general classes (in the situation of college), and you go buy diapers, lots and lots of diapers, if you have a baby on the way. These are all skills you will need moving forward. No matter what your podcast is going to be about you will need to know the following:

                    1. How to plug a microphone in, and how to talk into it without having "popping P's"

                    2. You need to get proper recording levels

                    3. You could go to Wordpress.com (as a temporary play ground - not a permanent solution) and start tinkering around with understanding websites.

                    4. You can learn how to move files around to position them where you want them.

                    All of these skills will be used no matter what type of podcast you launch.

                    What happens if you never launch a podcast? You sell your microphone on ebay. What if your DO launch a podcast, and then later change your mind? There are very popular podcast hosts Mignon Fogherty (known as Grammar Girl) and Cali Lewis of geekbeat.tv who didn't find their current success on their first attempt at podcasting. Both of their show are their SECOND podcast.

                    I've had a few podcasts that I tried that didn't work. Do I consider these failures? NO. I learned something from every show. They aren't mistakes, they are learning opportunities.

                    In music, you can learn three chords (G,C, and D) and play a ton of songs using those basic chords.

                    Episode Zero Strategy 19:41

                    You need ONE episode to submit your podcast to iTunes (many people wait till they have at least three to listen to before submitting their show. In the past I've said to tell people about you and to tell them what to expect. That was back in 2005. I've changed since then. Its best to bring the best content you have. To have them going WOW. This will bring you instant credibility. Then they will care about who you are because you help you. Part of this is based on the book Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less that I've spoken about on other episodes. If I tell you my story (unless its a really good story) most people won't care. Move them with your content, then tell them your story.

                    How to be part of Your Audience's Routine [27:51]

                    While there are podcasters who are doing well without having a consistent schedule (like Joe Rogan), if you want to be part of your listeners routine, you need to come up with a consistent schedule. Darren Dake from The Coroner Podcast explained how he starts his Mondays with some quiet time with his Bible, and then he starts my podcast (that is a very humbling experience). But I am part of his routine because he can count on my show being there every Monday. 

                    Are Your Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    Join the School of podcasting today

                     

                    ]]>e61dd623845d0e21ba9e13023a5ecddfMon, 02 Feb 2015 05:00:00 -040042:00falsefull446446Twitter Bombing: What Is It - Is It Harmful - Does it WorkToday we talk to Rob Walch the VP of Podcaster Relations from Libsyn.com (and co-host of the Feed)and Bryan Orr (from the Wow Small Business podcast ) who did a month long "twitter bomb" test and shares his findings.

                    Join in on the conversation call 888-5633-3228

                    Ready to start Podcasting? JOIN TODAY

                    Staying Focused in the New Year - Avoid Casturbation Casturbation Defined:

                    1. Verb: Producing content with no real value for your audience. To record for the sake of hearing one’s own voice. To record for the sake of keeping with a self-inflicted schedule. When asked to answer the question, “That episode moved you to ….” your audience will not be able to answer (or answer, “It moved me to go to another podcast). When Jimmy started the podcast with “Well, I’m not really sure what I’m going to talk about today but I wanted to get an episode out,” I knew I was going to get an earful of casturbation. When Jimmy spent 25 minutes to get to the point, one could say there was a large amount of casturbation in that 30 minute episode. 2. Verb: Participating in activities that provide no real value to your podcast. Jimmy’s stack of 3 microphones, 4 mixers, 6 portable recorders, and three hosting account leads me to believe he has a serious casturbation problem.  Read the full blog post here

                    Dennis Miller and Emily Morse Hosting the 10th Annual Podcast Awards

                    New Media Expo just announced that comedian, actor, radio host Dennis Miller and (radio, podcasters, TV) Emily Morse will be hosting the Podcast Awards. With the New Media Expo being held along side of the National Association of Broadcasting, this event is THE event to attend this year. Podcast nominations are now open for the Podcast Awards. You can submit your favorite podcasts at www.podcastawards.com You can save on your New Media Expo tickets by using the coupon sop2015

                    Twitter Bombing Defined

                    Twitter bombing is the act of sending out multiple (in some cases hundreds) of tweets per hour (in some cases from multiple twitter accounts) with the sole purpose of getting people to click on the audio file and drive up "download" numbers. In some cases people will go the extra mile and research popular (related and unrelated) hashtags and use them in their tweets.

                    What Bryan's Numbers Show

                    Bryan's numbers increased by a factor of 12X. He went from 150 to 1800 downloads per day. Does it increase downloads? Yes. As we said, in the case of Bryan it multiplied them by 12. Brian's downloads went up immediately and the minute his test was over, the downloads went away. The bottom line his numbers per day pre and post test did not change. Yes he got downloads (more than likely from robots) Check out Bryan's full post on the subject.

                    So Your Spamming Twitter - What is the Big Deal?

                    The BIG PROBLEM that this causes is when someone takes these artificially inflated numbers and use them for securing advertisers. When the advertiser doesn't get a good return on their investment they not only quit advertising on your show, but they tell other potential sponsors, "Podcast Advertising doesn't work." When your actions move podcast advertisers (and their friends) away from sponsoring more podcasts, you are hurting the podcasting in general.

                    Ringr.us Trial

                    Rignr.us launched this week and this service is an iOs app that allows you to record yoru phone calls. Here are the steps: 1. Install the Ringr app 2. Click the " + " to schedule a call 3. Add the email to the person you want to call. 4. When you recipient gets the email (assuming they have installed the app). They click on a link in the email they recieve that launches the app and takes them to your appointment. It's super easy. When I tested it, I did have a technical hiccup. When my phone went to sleep the call dropped. When I got back on the phone with Rob, we had no problems. When the show was over, the file is processed and it uploads it to ringr.us where it ties your side of the conversation with your guests side of the conversation and sends you a link to the mp3 file. It does some processing to level the volume levels. There is no Android version at this time.

                    ]]>Today we talk to Rob Walch the VP of Podcaster Relations from Libsyn.com (and co-host of the Feed)and Bryan Orr (from the Wow Small Business podcast ) who did a month long "twitter bomb" test and shares his findings.

                    Join in on the conversation call 888-5633-3228

                    Ready to start Podcasting? JOIN TODAY

                    Staying Focused in the New Year - Avoid Casturbation Casturbation Defined:

                    1. Verb: Producing content with no real value for your audience. To record for the sake of hearing one’s own voice. To record for the sake of keeping with a self-inflicted schedule. When asked to answer the question, “That episode moved you to ….” your audience will not be able to answer (or answer, “It moved me to go to another podcast). When Jimmy started the podcast with “Well, I’m not really sure what I’m going to talk about today but I wanted to get an episode out,” I knew I was going to get an earful of casturbation. When Jimmy spent 25 minutes to get to the point, one could say there was a large amount of casturbation in that 30 minute episode. 2. Verb: Participating in activities that provide no real value to your podcast. Jimmy’s stack of 3 microphones, 4 mixers, 6 portable recorders, and three hosting account leads me to believe he has a serious casturbation problem.  Read the full blog post here

                    Dennis Miller and Emily Morse Hosting the 10th Annual Podcast Awards

                    New Media Expo just announced that comedian, actor, radio host Dennis Miller and (radio, podcasters, TV) Emily Morse will be hosting the Podcast Awards. With the New Media Expo being held along side of the National Association of Broadcasting, this event is THE event to attend this year. Podcast nominations are now open for the Podcast Awards. You can submit your favorite podcasts at www.podcastawards.com You can save on your New Media Expo tickets by using the coupon sop2015

                    Twitter Bombing Defined

                    Twitter bombing is the act of sending out multiple (in some cases hundreds) of tweets per hour (in some cases from multiple twitter accounts) with the sole purpose of getting people to click on the audio file and drive up "download" numbers. In some cases people will go the extra mile and research popular (related and unrelated) hashtags and use them in their tweets.

                    What Bryan's Numbers Show

                    Bryan's numbers increased by a factor of 12X. He went from 150 to 1800 downloads per day. Does it increase downloads? Yes. As we said, in the case of Bryan it multiplied them by 12. Brian's downloads went up immediately and the minute his test was over, the downloads went away. The bottom line his numbers per day pre and post test did not change. Yes he got downloads (more than likely from robots) Check out Bryan's full post on the subject.

                    So Your Spamming Twitter - What is the Big Deal?

                    The BIG PROBLEM that this causes is when someone takes these artificially inflated numbers and use them for securing advertisers. When the advertiser doesn't get a good return on their investment they not only quit advertising on your show, but they tell other potential sponsors, "Podcast Advertising doesn't work." When your actions move podcast advertisers (and their friends) away from sponsoring more podcasts, you are hurting the podcasting in general.

                    Ringr.us Trial

                    Rignr.us launched this week and this service is an iOs app that allows you to record yoru phone calls. Here are the steps: 1. Install the Ringr app 2. Click the " + " to schedule a call 3. Add the email to the person you want to call. 4. When you recipient gets the email (assuming they have installed the app). They click on a link in the email they recieve that launches the app and takes them to your appointment. It's super easy. When I tested it, I did have a technical hiccup. When my phone went to sleep the call dropped. When I got back on the phone with Rob, we had no problems. When the show was over, the file is processed and it uploads it to ringr.us where it ties your side of the conversation with your guests side of the conversation and sends you a link to the mp3 file. It does some processing to level the volume levels. There is no Android version at this time.

                    ]]>a3319331945c1a23993387767ab8c027Sun, 25 Jan 2015 05:00:00 -040057:56falsefull445445Podcast Helps You Be Seen As an Expert - Darren Dake's New JobPodcasting can help you be seen as an expert. You will hear about how it helped Darren Dake of the Coroner Talk Podcast land a dream job. If you want to join in on the conversation use the options on our Contact Page, or call 888-563-3228. Also don't forget you can be entered to win a free year at the School of Podcasting by taking our Audience Survey. (Contest ends 1/30/15 with the winner being announced on the Ask the Podcast Coach show).
                    Podcast Award Nominations Open January 19th

                    If you want to nominate your show, and have your audience nominate your show, go to www.podcastawards.com

                    Win a Trip To New Media Expo

                    We are looking for people who will take all the shows that are nominated for a podcast award and score their show. There is a base set of criteria, and we will have a webinar to show you how to go about it. If you review four categories (about 16 hours of work) you will receive a pass to the new media expo (travel is not covered). You can review less than  categories (it is not mandatory).  If you are interested,  go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/par If you thinking of going to New Media Expo then use the coupon sop2015 to save 20% For more information go to schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    Because of His Podcast Darren Dake [8:50]

                    Darren has been involved in death scene investigating. After podcasting on a separate topic for a year, he decided to podcast about what he knew. He started coronertalk.com and his podcast was designed to help others who didn't have access to training to their job better. Being so niche, when people in this field find this show they love it. Consequently, his podcast positioned him as a trainer, a leader, and someone who knows what he is talking about and now he is the director of training for the Association of Deputy Sheriffs for the  state of Missouri. Darren feels his podcast put him in a position to be seen as an authority, as someone who obviously has a passion for teaching, and who knew what he was talking about. He will be developing training tracks and managing the whole training program. He had always eyed this job, but not pursued it. Now, because of his podcast the job pursued him. Darren had a previous show title Engaging Life and Leadership. Because of that show he was a panelist at Podcast Movement. He decided to cease production of that show. They produced 65 episodes, and they "podfaded." When I asked him why, he explained how it just wasn't fun anymore. He and his co-host had said about all there was to say on the subject. He took his experience from Engaging Life and Leadership and used it to create Coroner Talk.

                    Last 5 in 5 - Darren Dake

                    Here are the last 5 podcasts that Darrn listened to. If you want to send in your Last 5 in 5, visit our contact page. Be sure to tell us a little about your show and where we can find you. Tech News Weekly This American Life Ask the Podcast Coach Ray Edwards Show True Murder

                    Get Involved With The Show

                    Do you have a "Because of my Podcast" story? Want to send in the last 5 podcasts you listened to? Use the button below to record it right now.

                    Ready to Launch Your Podcast? ]]>Podcasting can help you be seen as an expert. You will hear about how it helped Darren Dake of the Coroner Talk Podcast land a dream job. If you want to join in on the conversation use the options on our Contact Page, or call 888-563-3228. Also don't forget you can be entered to win a free year at the School of Podcasting by taking our Audience Survey. (Contest ends 1/30/15 with the winner being announced on the Ask the Podcast Coach show).
                    Podcast Award Nominations Open January 19th

                    If you want to nominate your show, and have your audience nominate your show, go to www.podcastawards.com

                    Win a Trip To New Media Expo

                    We are looking for people who will take all the shows that are nominated for a podcast award and score their show. There is a base set of criteria, and we will have a webinar to show you how to go about it. If you review four categories (about 16 hours of work) you will receive a pass to the new media expo (travel is not covered). You can review less than  categories (it is not mandatory).  If you are interested,  go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/par If you thinking of going to New Media Expo then use the coupon sop2015 to save 20% For more information go to schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    Because of His Podcast Darren Dake [8:50]

                    Darren has been involved in death scene investigating. After podcasting on a separate topic for a year, he decided to podcast about what he knew. He started coronertalk.com and his podcast was designed to help others who didn't have access to training to their job better. Being so niche, when people in this field find this show they love it. Consequently, his podcast positioned him as a trainer, a leader, and someone who knows what he is talking about and now he is the director of training for the Association of Deputy Sheriffs for the  state of Missouri. Darren feels his podcast put him in a position to be seen as an authority, as someone who obviously has a passion for teaching, and who knew what he was talking about. He will be developing training tracks and managing the whole training program. He had always eyed this job, but not pursued it. Now, because of his podcast the job pursued him. Darren had a previous show title Engaging Life and Leadership. Because of that show he was a panelist at Podcast Movement. He decided to cease production of that show. They produced 65 episodes, and they "podfaded." When I asked him why, he explained how it just wasn't fun anymore. He and his co-host had said about all there was to say on the subject. He took his experience from Engaging Life and Leadership and used it to create Coroner Talk.

                    Last 5 in 5 - Darren Dake

                    Here are the last 5 podcasts that Darrn listened to. If you want to send in your Last 5 in 5, visit our contact page. Be sure to tell us a little about your show and where we can find you. Tech News Weekly This American Life Ask the Podcast Coach Ray Edwards Show True Murder

                    Get Involved With The Show

                    Do you have a "Because of my Podcast" story? Want to send in the last 5 podcasts you listened to? Use the button below to record it right now.

                    Ready to Launch Your Podcast? ]]>324c7e9473388fa5743b1be17835a217Mon, 19 Jan 2015 05:00:00 -040033:20falsefull444444Train Your Guests and Audience To Promote Your ShowWant to get better guests, want to grow your audience? Today's guest Joel Boggess has two words for you to get you going in the right direction.
                    New Media Expo Coupon

                    If you thinking of going to New Media Expo then use the coupon sop2015 to save 20% For more information go to schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    CBS Launches Play.it

                    CBS launched a website to promote all of their content that they are providing as a podcast. The more main stream media starts to embrace podcasting, the more listeners will get comfortable consuming podcasts. That increases the chances of you being found.

                    Creative Commons Licensing

                    I am under the thought that any kind of exposure is good exposure. With this in mind, the only restriction I have is you can sell my podcast or materials to other people. You can quote me, etc (the "normal" stuff) but I go with a common sense kind of strategy. That works fine for me, if you are worried about people using your content you may want to investigate Creative Common Licensing. For more information go to https://creativecommons.org/licenses/ This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.

                    Joel Boggess of Relaunch Show Interview

                    I was introduced I was on the Relaunch Show a while and back and had the pleasure of meeting Joel and his wife Pei. I also saw a post that Joel ahd put in a Facebook group showing some pretty impressive numbers. I asked him to come on the show, and he shared some great insights. Approach people when they have something to promote (they will be in "promotion mode" and be looking to get the word out). It may take more than one attempt to get our guest to say yes. (Joel asked someone every day for a full year to get to a "yes"). Joel shares how he almost died at an early age, and this experience has given him the strength to overcome his obstacles How do you get good guests? Joel's advice is ASK. You do need to be diligent. How do you grow your audience? By producing consistent content on a consistent schedule. Joel makes it super easy to promote you appearance on his show. Here is the email I got from his assistant. Clarity + Confidence = Direction (Read more about this in his book). Goal's word for the year is engagement.   Check out Joel's Book Finding Your Voice. Check out his podcast at ReLaunchShow.com Check out his community of Ninja Podcasters.  

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Jim Carrey Commencement Speech  

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    ]]>Want to get better guests, want to grow your audience? Today's guest Joel Boggess has two words for you to get you going in the right direction.
                    New Media Expo Coupon

                    If you thinking of going to New Media Expo then use the coupon sop2015 to save 20% For more information go to schoolofpodcasting.com/nmx

                    CBS Launches Play.it

                    CBS launched a website to promote all of their content that they are providing as a podcast. The more main stream media starts to embrace podcasting, the more listeners will get comfortable consuming podcasts. That increases the chances of you being found.

                    Creative Commons Licensing

                    I am under the thought that any kind of exposure is good exposure. With this in mind, the only restriction I have is you can sell my podcast or materials to other people. You can quote me, etc (the "normal" stuff) but I go with a common sense kind of strategy. That works fine for me, if you are worried about people using your content you may want to investigate Creative Common Licensing. For more information go to https://creativecommons.org/licenses/ This work is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.

                    Joel Boggess of Relaunch Show Interview

                    I was introduced I was on the Relaunch Show a while and back and had the pleasure of meeting Joel and his wife Pei. I also saw a post that Joel ahd put in a Facebook group showing some pretty impressive numbers. I asked him to come on the show, and he shared some great insights. Approach people when they have something to promote (they will be in "promotion mode" and be looking to get the word out). It may take more than one attempt to get our guest to say yes. (Joel asked someone every day for a full year to get to a "yes"). Joel shares how he almost died at an early age, and this experience has given him the strength to overcome his obstacles How do you get good guests? Joel's advice is ASK. You do need to be diligent. How do you grow your audience? By producing consistent content on a consistent schedule. Joel makes it super easy to promote you appearance on his show. Here is the email I got from his assistant. Clarity + Confidence = Direction (Read more about this in his book). Goal's word for the year is engagement.   Check out Joel's Book Finding Your Voice. Check out his podcast at ReLaunchShow.com Check out his community of Ninja Podcasters.  

                    Mentioned in This Show

                    Jim Carrey Commencement Speech  

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today

                    ]]>8ec881c176d8e17aae5c3506e1e078f0Mon, 12 Jan 2015 05:00:00 -040042:56falsefull443443Creating an Audience SurveyJohn Wilkerson of thewiredhomeschool.com/ was on episode 440 discussing podcasting with seven kids in the house. Today he shares with us the last five podcasts he listened to:

                    Spirit Blade Podcast - Geek Entertainment and Faith

                    The Sci -Fi Christian - Sci Fi Topics from a Christian perspective.

                    Scott Sigler's Books - Sci -Fi Author

                    School of Podcasting's Morning Annoucements _ This Podcast

                    Homeschooling in Real Life - Telling it like it is in the world of homeschooling

                     

                    Podcast Rewind: [8:32]

                    I recently appeared on the Coachzing Show talking about how to Create a Compelling Podcast. on the Relaunch Show I talk about Overcoming Personal and Financial Bankrupcy with with Joel and Pei. The Coachzing show is dedicated to helping coaches, therapists, speakers and authors work less, earn more, and help more people through creative content marketing strategies. The ReLaunch show is a Daily Radio Show for Career Changers, Difference Makers and Those with a Dream. Features interviews of today’s most in-demand experts, thought leaders, and ReLaunch! artists.

                    When in Doubt - Ask Your Audience [14:04]

                    You can win a free year at the School of Podcasting by taking our Audience Survey.

                    It would be interesting to see how many times I provide the answer, "Ask your audience." It is what appears to be an obvious choice, but I'm not sure if we don't want to bother them, but we often use an audience poll as a last resort. We might feel that we are bugging them. In the end the people who take part in your survey (1 - 5 % of your audience) are the most engaged in your audience and are doing it to support you . As your audience is made up of adults, it not a bad idea to explain why you are doing the poll, but we will get into that later.

                    What Can I Learn From An Audience Poll

                    Demographics (age, sex, income, location)

                    Expectations (Tell your potential audience the topic of your podcast and see what they would expect to hear).

                    Find a gap (What is the most common frustration when listening to podcasts).

                    Help you choose a name or logo when you are launching your podcast.

                    What language they use to describe your show (this is valuable in marketing material - it is the native tongue of your audience).

                    Have them rank your segments (you may find there are segments that nobody consumes)

                    Psychographics (lifestyle, interests, dreams, pain points).

                    Behaviors (How do they consume your show, how often, how long).

                    Before You Design Your Survey

                    What is the objective of the poll? What are you looking for? Write down the objective? (future content, sponsors)

                    What is the goal of this survey?Why are you creating this survey?What do you hope to accomplish with this survey?How will you use the data you are collecting?

                    You will use your objectives to help create the questions

                    Short and To the Point

                    Survey Monkey research (along with Gallup and others) has shown that the survey should take 5 minutes or less to complete. 6 – 10 minutes is acceptable but we see significant abandonment rates occurring after 11 minutes.

                    When Surveys are Too Long

                    People drop out: They simply quit taking the survey.  Having a reward for completion can reduce drop-outs, but you can’t stop it completely.People stop paying attention: Remember your Jr. High School friend who just filled in random bubbles during a test? He grew up. If it takes too long to take your survey, he might do it again.

                    Keep it Clear

                    To ensure that you collect valid survey results, make sure you include instructions on how to answer the survey.

                    Each question should be clearly stated so that there is no misunderstanding about what is being asked.

                    When developing your survey questionnaire, you want to make certain that you are asking the questions in a neutral way, ie that you are not leading them toward a particular answer. This may seem simple, but when you are writing questions you will often find that the way you phrase the question may reflect your underlying opinion. Here is an example of a leading question:

                    Instead of doing you think this microphone sounds better than the old one? Instead it might be “What do you think about the sound of this microphone?”

                    Survey Flow

                    There are some rules of thumb:

                    1) Questions about behavior (factual information) should be...]]>John Wilkerson of thewiredhomeschool.com/ was on episode 440 discussing podcasting with seven kids in the house. Today he shares with us the last five podcasts he listened to:

                    Spirit Blade Podcast - Geek Entertainment and Faith

                    The Sci -Fi Christian - Sci Fi Topics from a Christian perspective.

                    Scott Sigler's Books - Sci -Fi Author

                    School of Podcasting's Morning Annoucements _ This Podcast

                    Homeschooling in Real Life - Telling it like it is in the world of homeschooling

                     

                    Podcast Rewind: [8:32]

                    I recently appeared on the Coachzing Show talking about how to Create a Compelling Podcast. on the Relaunch Show I talk about Overcoming Personal and Financial Bankrupcy with with Joel and Pei. The Coachzing show is dedicated to helping coaches, therapists, speakers and authors work less, earn more, and help more people through creative content marketing strategies. The ReLaunch show is a Daily Radio Show for Career Changers, Difference Makers and Those with a Dream. Features interviews of today’s most in-demand experts, thought leaders, and ReLaunch! artists.

                    When in Doubt - Ask Your Audience [14:04]

                    You can win a free year at the School of Podcasting by taking our Audience Survey.

                    It would be interesting to see how many times I provide the answer, "Ask your audience." It is what appears to be an obvious choice, but I'm not sure if we don't want to bother them, but we often use an audience poll as a last resort. We might feel that we are bugging them. In the end the people who take part in your survey (1 - 5 % of your audience) are the most engaged in your audience and are doing it to support you . As your audience is made up of adults, it not a bad idea to explain why you are doing the poll, but we will get into that later.

                    What Can I Learn From An Audience Poll

                    Demographics (age, sex, income, location)

                    Expectations (Tell your potential audience the topic of your podcast and see what they would expect to hear).

                    Find a gap (What is the most common frustration when listening to podcasts).

                    Help you choose a name or logo when you are launching your podcast.

                    What language they use to describe your show (this is valuable in marketing material - it is the native tongue of your audience).

                    Have them rank your segments (you may find there are segments that nobody consumes)

                    Psychographics (lifestyle, interests, dreams, pain points).

                    Behaviors (How do they consume your show, how often, how long).

                    Before You Design Your Survey

                    What is the objective of the poll? What are you looking for? Write down the objective? (future content, sponsors)

                    What is the goal of this survey?Why are you creating this survey?What do you hope to accomplish with this survey?How will you use the data you are collecting?

                    You will use your objectives to help create the questions

                    Short and To the Point

                    Survey Monkey research (along with Gallup and others) has shown that the survey should take 5 minutes or less to complete. 6 – 10 minutes is acceptable but we see significant abandonment rates occurring after 11 minutes.

                    When Surveys are Too Long

                    People drop out: They simply quit taking the survey.  Having a reward for completion can reduce drop-outs, but you can’t stop it completely.People stop paying attention: Remember your Jr. High School friend who just filled in random bubbles during a test? He grew up. If it takes too long to take your survey, he might do it again.

                    Keep it Clear

                    To ensure that you collect valid survey results, make sure you include instructions on how to answer the survey.

                    Each question should be clearly stated so that there is no misunderstanding about what is being asked.

                    When developing your survey questionnaire, you want to make certain that you are asking the questions in a neutral way, ie that you are not leading them toward a particular answer. This may seem simple, but when you are writing questions you will often find that the way you phrase the question may reflect your underlying opinion. Here is an example of a leading question:

                    Instead of doing you think this microphone sounds better than the old one? Instead it might be “What do you think about the sound of this microphone?”

                    Survey Flow

                    There are some rules of thumb:

                    1) Questions about behavior (factual information) should be before those about attitude (opinions, emotions, preferences)

                    2) General questions should be before those that are more specific

                    3) Potentially sensitive questions should be asked later in the survey, once rapport has been established

                    Question Strategies

                    It is best to use non-structured questions when you are exploring new ideas and you don't really know what to expect from the respondents.

                    Any easy way to get insights is to use a scale. Always use an even number of choices. If I say rank this 1 - 5, people can go right down the middle and choose 3. If they have to rank 1-4, they have to choose 2, or 3. One is a little better then the other.

                    One key ingredient when dealing with adults is to include the "Why." As easy as it is to click a few buttons, in the end knowing "why" will help them push through to the end of the survey. If they understand that they may receive better content, a better schedule, etc. it may inspire them to answer.

                    Keep your answers private.

                    When In Doubt Bribe Them

                    Even if your survey is short, you might have to provide some incentive to get more people to participate. Amazon gift cards, lottery tickets (is that legal), a free product can be used. The good news is the more you get to know your audience, the better bribes you will be able to come up with.

                    Free Tools For Creating Surveys

                    There are tons of plugin (see here and here). There are websites like Surveymonkey.com that allow you to do a free survey (up to 100 respondents with 10 questions).]

                    The tool I use is Polldaddy. it is owned by the people behind Wordpress and their free service is almost unlimited (1000 responses per month).

                    Take Our Poll and Win a Free Year at the School of Podcasting

                    http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/2015s

                    Mentioned In This Episode

                    Podcasting Good to Great: How to Grow Your Audience Through Collaboration

                    ]]>409fd3cca1d3f76005875bbdd98b5d2fMon, 05 Jan 2015 05:00:00 -040048:51falsefull442442My Favorite Podcast Is... 2014 VersionCOMMENTS? Call 888-563-3228

                     I started this last year and I want this to be an annual event. I ask my audience, "If you could only listen to one podcast what would it be, where is it, and WHY do you listen to it. Thanks to everyone who sent in their answers. I want to thank Ray Ortega for alerting me to a post from Seth Godin that sates, “There’s no such thing as a niche that’s too small if the people care enough. If you think you need a bigger market, you’re actually saying that the market you already have doesn’t need you/depend on you/talk about you enough.You might not need a bigger niche. You might only need to produce more value for those you already serve.”

                    With people choosing the following podcasts over all others, one can assume they are delivering tons of value.

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    Nick Seuberling from "Inside the Jungle" who love the 606 Podcast. Its information he can't get in the US.

                    Ben From Modern Self Protection loves the Survival Podcast podcast because its energy, and inspiring.

                    Bill from the Media Fiasco  I would definitely pick the Mike O’Meara Show,  it always puts a smile on his face.

                    Cain from the Adventure Frequency podcast Adam Carolla show consistent, funny.

                    Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and My Podcast Reviews likes the Business of Marriage because the topics fits Daniel like a glove.

                    Dr. Dave from Shrink Wrap Radio Psychology Podcast loves Mac Break Weekly to get up to date tips and news from experts.

                    Al from Whats Up On Earth loves the Podcast because its funny, and appealing and keeps him up on pop culture.

                    Erik from Podcast Talent Coach loves the Solopreneur Hour for their unique interviews that aren't like everybody else.

                    Fred from Skills in Screencasts and Podcast still loves the No Agenda show for its behind the scenes look at the Media

                    James loves the PFW in Progress is where James gets in depth information about New England Patriots football.

                    Jennifer from the Delightful Life podcast loves Live Your List Show because the hosts are entertaining, and its inspires you to be a better person.

                    John from  Writers Authors on Fire from Loves Entrepreneur on Fire because it keeps him positive and motivated.

                    Johnathon loves the Moment with Brian Koppelman. He loves in the in depth interviews that make him think.

                    Ken Casler of the Thinking Outside The Box podcast loves the Spark podcast. It entertains him and keeps him up on technology and he loves the hosts voice.

                    Kim from On the Table podcast loves Get it Done Guy (she also loves Starve the Doubts) for the entertaining stories.

                    Matt McWilliams from the World Changers Show loves Ray Edwards because its unique slant on business, faith, productivity, and family.

                    Randy Cantrell of Leaning Towards Wisdom loves Serial for the excellently produced masterful story telling. (recently parodied on Saturday Night Live)

                    Remi from the Sci-fi Movie Podcast loves the hosts from Bald Move Network who talk about numerous topics, and he follows their shows....]]>COMMENTS? Call 888-563-3228

                     I started this last year and I want this to be an annual event. I ask my audience, "If you could only listen to one podcast what would it be, where is it, and WHY do you listen to it. Thanks to everyone who sent in their answers. I want to thank Ray Ortega for alerting me to a post from Seth Godin that sates, “There’s no such thing as a niche that’s too small if the people care enough. If you think you need a bigger market, you’re actually saying that the market you already have doesn’t need you/depend on you/talk about you enough.You might not need a bigger niche. You might only need to produce more value for those you already serve.”

                    With people choosing the following podcasts over all others, one can assume they are delivering tons of value.

                    My Favorite Podcast Is

                    Nick Seuberling from "Inside the Jungle" who love the 606 Podcast. Its information he can't get in the US.

                    Ben From Modern Self Protection loves the Survival Podcast podcast because its energy, and inspiring.

                    Bill from the Media Fiasco  I would definitely pick the Mike O’Meara Show,  it always puts a smile on his face.

                    Cain from the Adventure Frequency podcast Adam Carolla show consistent, funny.

                    Daniel J. Lewis from the Audacity to Podcast and My Podcast Reviews likes the Business of Marriage because the topics fits Daniel like a glove.

                    Dr. Dave from Shrink Wrap Radio Psychology Podcast loves Mac Break Weekly to get up to date tips and news from experts.

                    Al from Whats Up On Earth loves the Podcast because its funny, and appealing and keeps him up on pop culture.

                    Erik from Podcast Talent Coach loves the Solopreneur Hour for their unique interviews that aren't like everybody else.

                    Fred from Skills in Screencasts and Podcast still loves the No Agenda show for its behind the scenes look at the Media

                    James loves the PFW in Progress is where James gets in depth information about New England Patriots football.

                    Jennifer from the Delightful Life podcast loves Live Your List Show because the hosts are entertaining, and its inspires you to be a better person.

                    John from  Writers Authors on Fire from Loves Entrepreneur on Fire because it keeps him positive and motivated.

                    Johnathon loves the Moment with Brian Koppelman. He loves in the in depth interviews that make him think.

                    Ken Casler of the Thinking Outside The Box podcast loves the Spark podcast. It entertains him and keeps him up on technology and he loves the hosts voice.

                    Kim from On the Table podcast loves Get it Done Guy (she also loves Starve the Doubts) for the entertaining stories.

                    Matt McWilliams from the World Changers Show loves Ray Edwards because its unique slant on business, faith, productivity, and family.

                    Randy Cantrell of Leaning Towards Wisdom loves Serial for the excellently produced masterful story telling. (recently parodied on Saturday Night Live)

                    Remi from the Sci-fi Movie Podcast loves the hosts from Bald Move Network who talk about numerous topics, and he follows their shows. They are fun, honest, and objective.

                    Rick from the Evolution Talk podcast loves Mysterious Universe podcast (he pays for their premium content) it allows him to escape and relax.

                    Scott from Karate Tournament Tips and Tricks loves The Unexplained with Howard Hughes its really interesting without being over the top.

                    Scott from Computer Tutor Podcast loves Dave Ramsey because he knows what he is going to get, and yet you never know what you're going to get. It's entertaining.

                    Stargate from the Legends of Shield podcast loves the Star Wars Minute for the behind the scenes, entertaining stories,

                    Terry from Discovering America loves the Jefferson Hour

                     Summary

                    As I listened to theses clips, I listened and made notes. When I put it all together, here is how it broke down. These are the qualities that people mentioned most. These numbers indicate (according to the 50ish people who replied) how important the following topics are.

                    If you combined funny and entertaining, that would be 47% (for me if I'm laughing I'm entertained). That would mean

                    49% Value (things I can use, easy to understand)47% Entertaining/Funny 32% Personality (objective, chemistry, authentic, objective)32% "Deep Dive" (in depth information)15% Behind the Scenes (info you can’t get anywhere else)11% Inspiring (encouraging, kept me positive)11% Stories (people love stories) 9% Voice ("I love their voice").

                    I have said (since 2005) your podcast is not about you, it’s about the audience. If you are a radio station, your call letters are WIFT (what’s in it for them). Find out what they want and deliver it in an entertaining and encouraging fashion, and you will connect with your audience.

                    A HUGE thank you to all my listeners, but a special thank you to everyone who called in with their responses

                    ]]>3103ef45f6e22727e8acd18c39cb6303Mon, 29 Dec 2014 05:00:00 -040001:08:32falsefull441441How To Podcast with Seven Kids in the House - 9 Years Of ExperienceToday we talk with John Wilkerson who has SEVEN children about HOW THE HECK DO YOU PODCAST WITH SEVEN KIDS IN THE HOUSE? John has been podcasting since 2005 and has lots of tips. We talk about the following topics: When do you know its time to podfade? What kind of gear do you use? Using your web host for a media host (I was surprised).
                    Tips for Podcasting With Children in the House
                    1. Lots and lots of prep so you are ready to take advantage of every opportunity
                    2. Get out of the house if possible (maybe the car?)/
                    3. Go early or late (record while they are sleeping).
                    4. Give yourself a limit (be focused)
                    5. Reward your kids for being quiet (get them involved).
                    
                    

                    John has a full blog post at http://jesusgeek.info/5-tips-for-podcasting-when-you-have-little-kids/ John's current project is the Wired Homeschool. You can find it at http://thewiredhomeschool.com/ The Wired Homeschool provides practical advice for homeschooling parents who use technology as part of their homeschool curriculum. Topics include Internet safety, responsible computer use, smartphones, tablets, e-readers, educational apps, social media, and more. Johns podcast has lead him being asked to speak at some conventions for homeschooling. How cool is that? In the interview he explains how he has had other podcasts and as life and interests changed, John no longer had the same passion for those shows, but is very excited to be doing the Wired Homeschool podcast.

                    Last 5 in 5 From Mark from obeep.com (a GeoCaching Podcast)

                    Geo Gearheads - technical side of geo caching Nerd Church - Geek News Hollywood Babylon - Kevin Smith Humor The Walk -  podcast about health, fitness, weight loss and physical and spiritual well-being. Conquer Depression, Anxiety and Stress

                    Podcast Rewind

                    A new episode of Building a Better Dave is out called "the Other Side of Christmas". Beyond iTunes on Podcasters' Roundtable 

                    Podsafe for Peace

                    Hear the Behind the Scenes Recording of this if Every Day Were Christmas. Original Podsafe for Peach recording website. New version by Slau at CdBaby, and iTunes Check out his podcast Sessions With Slau

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    rev.com a great - super fast turn around on transcriptions. Michael Butler Rock and Roll Geek Geek News Central Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    ]]>Today we talk with John Wilkerson who has SEVEN children about HOW THE HECK DO YOU PODCAST WITH SEVEN KIDS IN THE HOUSE? John has been podcasting since 2005 and has lots of tips. We talk about the following topics: When do you know its time to podfade? What kind of gear do you use? Using your web host for a media host (I was surprised).
                    Tips for Podcasting With Children in the House
                    1. Lots and lots of prep so you are ready to take advantage of every opportunity
                    2. Get out of the house if possible (maybe the car?)/
                    3. Go early or late (record while they are sleeping).
                    4. Give yourself a limit (be focused)
                    5. Reward your kids for being quiet (get them involved).
                    
                    

                    John has a full blog post at http://jesusgeek.info/5-tips-for-podcasting-when-you-have-little-kids/ John's current project is the Wired Homeschool. You can find it at http://thewiredhomeschool.com/ The Wired Homeschool provides practical advice for homeschooling parents who use technology as part of their homeschool curriculum. Topics include Internet safety, responsible computer use, smartphones, tablets, e-readers, educational apps, social media, and more. Johns podcast has lead him being asked to speak at some conventions for homeschooling. How cool is that? In the interview he explains how he has had other podcasts and as life and interests changed, John no longer had the same passion for those shows, but is very excited to be doing the Wired Homeschool podcast.

                    Last 5 in 5 From Mark from obeep.com (a GeoCaching Podcast)

                    Geo Gearheads - technical side of geo caching Nerd Church - Geek News Hollywood Babylon - Kevin Smith Humor The Walk -  podcast about health, fitness, weight loss and physical and spiritual well-being. Conquer Depression, Anxiety and Stress

                    Podcast Rewind

                    A new episode of Building a Better Dave is out called "the Other Side of Christmas". Beyond iTunes on Podcasters' Roundtable 

                    Podsafe for Peace

                    Hear the Behind the Scenes Recording of this if Every Day Were Christmas. Original Podsafe for Peach recording website. New version by Slau at CdBaby, and iTunes Check out his podcast Sessions With Slau

                    Mentioned on the Show

                    rev.com a great - super fast turn around on transcriptions. Michael Butler Rock and Roll Geek Geek News Central Ready to Start Podcasting?

                    ]]>9592b51497a0a489ed3bb55f2887a2ffMon, 22 Dec 2014 05:00:00 -040059:12falsefull440440Leveraging the Relationship You Build With Your AudienceToday we are talking about the most efficient and effective way to make money from the influence you build with your podcast. That method is selling your own product or service. We also talk about how to shut down a podcast.
                    How Do I Shut Down My Show?

                    Mark Wade has decided to shut down a1blues.com after 6 years. He had the following questions.

                    1. When I cancel Libsyn will my past shows still be available for people to still listen at my website or through iTunes or does Libsyn delete your past shows (mp3’s)?
                    
                    

                    No. So if you want to keep it up you can downgrade to the $5 a month plan ($7 if you want basic download stats)

                    2. Is there anything I need to do to keeping the website up and running
                    
                    

                    Pay your hosting bills, and every now and then login and make sure there are no plugins/themes that need updated on your website (if you're using Wordpress). Also be sure to pay the bill on the domain name.

                    3. If I decided to start the show up a few years from now is there anything I should do now to make that come back easier?
                    
                    

                    Like keeping the website address renewed every year. Just keep paying the web bill, and your domain. To make that cheaper buy hosting by the year instead of month to month. Some people do a "Farewell" show and let people know the show is coming to an end. Others just say you're going on hiatus (and then never come back). Some people say nothing and the audience figures it out later that no new episodes are coming. In the end of you don't keep the domains and the hosting paid for, the system will break.

                    Opportunity Knocks When Your Audience Asks the Same Question Multiple Times

                    My friend Erik K. Johnson who produces the Podcast Talent coach, and on his show he has spoken about doing interviews and a listener of his asked if there was a definitive book on being and interviewer. Erik states that he has looked and while there are books on Radio that have pieces about interviewing but there is no book that people can say that is THE BOOK on interviewing. For me, I think "Erik needs to write this." Erik has 25+ years in radio and has interviewed some great musicians and entertainers and has some great insights. Erik also does a show with me called the Podcast Review show. If you want some constructive feedback on your show, sign up today at www.podcastreviewshow.com Writing a book is not easy, but it is simple. All you need to do is 1. Pick a topic 2. Outline the topic into sub topics 3. Expand those topics 4. Find an editor 5. Get a cover designed.

                    The Most Effective and Profitable Way to Make Money With Your Podcast

                    Through you podcast your audience: 1. Adds you to their routine when you publish at the same time. They rely on you to be there. This establishes trust. 2. When you bring value, they enjoy having you around. They like you. 3. When you share a bit about yourself they get to know you. Let your personality seep into your show. This allows them to know you. When they know, like, and trust you and you come out with a product that fits a need they have, you can leverage that relationship into dollars. Dave's book is More Podcast Money.

                    Systems You Can Use To Sell Digit Products

                    Sellz.com charges 5% of the sale +.25 cents. Great customizable buttons. They don't allow you to take paypal without paying $5 a month (but you can take credit cards). Sellfy.com - 5% and you can take a number of payments. I'm not a huge fan of their buttons (not very customizable). Gumroad.com - 5% + .25 Allow you to do a "you name the price" product. They do not accept paypal (but you can take credit cards).

                    Spotlight Artist Raymond Good Job Search that Works [24:49]

                    Ray's sight looks pretty cool. If you want to know what Wordpress theme someone is using check out wpthemedetector.com Ray is using Elegant Themes on this website. Ray is someone who can help people be more effective at finding a job. His free podcast provides great insights into helping you find a job, switch jobs, etc. We listen to Ray's first episode and its very polished. I played his first and last episode. Its very subtle but Ray had some reverb on his voice on the first show and now he doesn't. I'm on show 438 and I know show 500 will have improvements over 438. Keep in mind you don't have to be great to start, but you do have to start to be great. Check out Ray's show at www.jobsearchthatworks.com  

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Wrapid Right Method Self Publishing For Virgins

                    Ready to Start Podcasting
                    ]]>Today we are talking about the most efficient and effective way to make money from the influence you build with your podcast. That method is selling your own product or service. We also talk about how to shut down a podcast.
                    How Do I Shut Down My Show?

                    Mark Wade has decided to shut down a1blues.com after 6 years. He had the following questions.

                    1. When I cancel Libsyn will my past shows still be available for people to still listen at my website or through iTunes or does Libsyn delete your past shows (mp3’s)?
                    
                    

                    No. So if you want to keep it up you can downgrade to the $5 a month plan ($7 if you want basic download stats)

                    2. Is there anything I need to do to keeping the website up and running
                    
                    

                    Pay your hosting bills, and every now and then login and make sure there are no plugins/themes that need updated on your website (if you're using Wordpress). Also be sure to pay the bill on the domain name.

                    3. If I decided to start the show up a few years from now is there anything I should do now to make that come back easier?
                    
                    

                    Like keeping the website address renewed every year. Just keep paying the web bill, and your domain. To make that cheaper buy hosting by the year instead of month to month. Some people do a "Farewell" show and let people know the show is coming to an end. Others just say you're going on hiatus (and then never come back). Some people say nothing and the audience figures it out later that no new episodes are coming. In the end of you don't keep the domains and the hosting paid for, the system will break.

                    Opportunity Knocks When Your Audience Asks the Same Question Multiple Times

                    My friend Erik K. Johnson who produces the Podcast Talent coach, and on his show he has spoken about doing interviews and a listener of his asked if there was a definitive book on being and interviewer. Erik states that he has looked and while there are books on Radio that have pieces about interviewing but there is no book that people can say that is THE BOOK on interviewing. For me, I think "Erik needs to write this." Erik has 25+ years in radio and has interviewed some great musicians and entertainers and has some great insights. Erik also does a show with me called the Podcast Review show. If you want some constructive feedback on your show, sign up today at www.podcastreviewshow.com Writing a book is not easy, but it is simple. All you need to do is 1. Pick a topic 2. Outline the topic into sub topics 3. Expand those topics 4. Find an editor 5. Get a cover designed.

                    The Most Effective and Profitable Way to Make Money With Your Podcast

                    Through you podcast your audience: 1. Adds you to their routine when you publish at the same time. They rely on you to be there. This establishes trust. 2. When you bring value, they enjoy having you around. They like you. 3. When you share a bit about yourself they get to know you. Let your personality seep into your show. This allows them to know you. When they know, like, and trust you and you come out with a product that fits a need they have, you can leverage that relationship into dollars. Dave's book is More Podcast Money.

                    Systems You Can Use To Sell Digit Products

                    Sellz.com charges 5% of the sale +.25 cents. Great customizable buttons. They don't allow you to take paypal without paying $5 a month (but you can take credit cards). Sellfy.com - 5% and you can take a number of payments. I'm not a huge fan of their buttons (not very customizable). Gumroad.com - 5% + .25 Allow you to do a "you name the price" product. They do not accept paypal (but you can take credit cards).

                    Spotlight Artist Raymond Good Job Search that Works [24:49]

                    Ray's sight looks pretty cool. If you want to know what Wordpress theme someone is using check out wpthemedetector.com Ray is using Elegant Themes on this website. Ray is someone who can help people be more effective at finding a job. His free podcast provides great insights into helping you find a job, switch jobs, etc. We listen to Ray's first episode and its very polished. I played his first and last episode. Its very subtle but Ray had some reverb on his voice on the first show and now he doesn't. I'm on show 438 and I know show 500 will have improvements over 438. Keep in mind you don't have to be great to start, but you do have to start to be great. Check out Ray's show at www.jobsearchthatworks.com  

                    Mentioned in this Episode

                    Wrapid Right Method Self Publishing For Virgins

                    Ready to Start Podcasting
                    ]]>9476c8e82d9a9878115f47a952867f65Mon, 15 Dec 2014 05:00:00 -040037:14falsefull439439Premium Podcast RSS Feeds - HipCast Podcast Media Hosting ReviewBen from Modern Self Defense where he was asked to teach a class, meet a mentor, and then he had 20 peopel fly in to meet HIM. This great event gets better, they have already asked him back to do another class. Ben is doing his podcast as he wants people to be safe. Fin him at modernselfprotection.com and in iTunes.
                    How to Create a Protected / Premium RSS Podcast Feed 6:37

                    I've had a few people ask me this question so thanks to Nick at spnt.tv, Jason from matttalkonline.com and Randy from Leaning Towards Wisdom (itunes) I use Digital Access Pass to accomplish this through some short codes. Then anyone who is subscribed can access their special version of the RSS feed (and other can't). If they cancel their account their RSS goes dead. I ave a video on my Patreon page that shows how this works (sign up for $1 and get access to bonus videos). Here are some tips and insight into having premium content. 1. If you are creating premium content for your launch, remember you don't have an audience yet and you may be doing "double the work" for an audience that doesn't exist. 2. When you get into ecommerce, you enter the world of paypal. Some people love paypal, and others refuse to us it. 3. You will need to be able to support your members. Its not a set it up and watch the money come in. They will occasionally need some help. 4. If you can keep the free items completely separate than the premium your life will be easy. I'm in the process of moving the premium content from the School of Podcasting to a completely different website. This makes keeping things "straight" a WHOLE lot easier. If you mix the premium and free content together, it can be quite the headache keeping everything separate (the easiest way to to just keep them separate). 5. If you are trying to make it so that there is NO WAY To steal your content, then you will have a long day. If your product is digital, people can steal it. That's a fact and in the end you have to end up trusting your customers. Don't get hung up on that. People will pay for items in money or time. There are those people who have more time than money and can go to great lengths to get your content (and there are some customers who will share it with others - welcome to 2014).

                    Post Rewind [17:45]

                    I appeared on the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about platforms for podcasting. Listen/Watch it here. Izzabela and Mike Russel produce the Branding Cow podcast where you can have Izzabela go over your website from top to bottom. In one episode the podcaster was using the Website host to host their media and Izzabela mentions how it took almost 10 minutes to download the episode. You can find the Branding Cow podcast at www.brandingcow.com Mike and Izzabela run Music Radio Creative and recommend using Spreaker as your media host. Music Radio Creative are responsible for the "Podcast Rewind" voice over as well as the "Ladies" who sing "The School of Podcasting with Dave Jackson." Speaking of using your Web Hoist as a Media host I interview Ralph from thesdrshow.com on episode 419 where he talks about the horror of having to move to a "real" media host after launching his podcast (his web host even told him it would be fine - then it wasn't). You can hear that episode HERE (if you want a free month of hosting at Libsyn.com or blubrry.com use the coupon sopfree ).

                    Spotlight Podcast: Adopting and Fostering in Faith [22:56]

                    Today we spotlight a new podcast "Adopting and Fostering in Faith from a new member of the School of Podcasting Robert Gelinas. This podcast is all about inspiration, information and resources for Christians who desire to care for orphans in their own backyard (and beyond). I love it as Robert is an expert (he has five adopted children) and he is using the podcast to help others with questions about fostering and adopting children. Check out his website at http://fosteringandadoptinginfaith.com/ and find his podcast in itunes

                    Last 5 in 5 from Ben Branam [29:46]

                    Ben Branam from Modern Self Protection (No One SHould Live in Fear) shares the last five podcasts you listened to: 1. Daily Audio Bible 2. Get it Done Guy 3. The Survival Podcast 4. Handgun World 5. Black Man With a Gun

                    HipCast Podcast Media Hosting Review [34:15]

                    I've am getting a bit tired of reviewing media hosts as there are new ones every day (hour?) I was asked to look at Hipcast.com. My criteria includes: 1. Don't mess with my file (they do) - although you are allowed to rename your file once you upload it. They transcode your file as well. 2. Give me a way to redirect my feed (they don't). 3. Dont limit my bandwidth (they pass) 4. Give me stats (their stats get a D+ - very, very basic) 5. Give me unlimited storage (they pass) They list features on their website that aren't really features ("We back up you files" - really? I hope so). Their online recording tools didn't work with my machine (they didn't recognize my microphone). The recording from your phone produced a quality that I feel is poor at best. You can read my review of other media hosts here. I recommend Libsyn.com and Blubrry.om (who meet all my criteria) get a free month at either site using the coupon sopfree As Tim is doing a video podcast and he wants to put out an hour long video, I ask "Does it really need to be video. There are people who do videos for YouTube and then put the audio out as a podcast. Cali Lewis use to do this (and might still be doing it) for geekbeat.tv What some people will do is create a smaller version to be downloaded 640 x 360 (16:9) Or 640 x 480 (4:3) Then upload the HD version to Youtube and put the Youtube version on your website and put the smaller version into your feed and let people watch YouTube on your website. This reduces how much space you need for hosting. If your show is NOT visual (talking head) I would recommend this.  

                    Mentioned on this Show

                    Skywalking Through Neverland

                     

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Become a member

                    ]]>Ben from Modern Self Defense where he was asked to teach a class, meet a mentor, and then he had 20 peopel fly in to meet HIM. This great event gets better, they have already asked him back to do another class. Ben is doing his podcast as he wants people to be safe. Fin him at modernselfprotection.com and in iTunes.
                    How to Create a Protected / Premium RSS Podcast Feed 6:37

                    I've had a few people ask me this question so thanks to Nick at spnt.tv, Jason from matttalkonline.com and Randy from Leaning Towards Wisdom (itunes) I use Digital Access Pass to accomplish this through some short codes. Then anyone who is subscribed can access their special version of the RSS feed (and other can't). If they cancel their account their RSS goes dead. I ave a video on my Patreon page that shows how this works (sign up for $1 and get access to bonus videos). Here are some tips and insight into having premium content. 1. If you are creating premium content for your launch, remember you don't have an audience yet and you may be doing "double the work" for an audience that doesn't exist. 2. When you get into ecommerce, you enter the world of paypal. Some people love paypal, and others refuse to us it. 3. You will need to be able to support your members. Its not a set it up and watch the money come in. They will occasionally need some help. 4. If you can keep the free items completely separate than the premium your life will be easy. I'm in the process of moving the premium content from the School of Podcasting to a completely different website. This makes keeping things "straight" a WHOLE lot easier. If you mix the premium and free content together, it can be quite the headache keeping everything separate (the easiest way to to just keep them separate). 5. If you are trying to make it so that there is NO WAY To steal your content, then you will have a long day. If your product is digital, people can steal it. That's a fact and in the end you have to end up trusting your customers. Don't get hung up on that. People will pay for items in money or time. There are those people who have more time than money and can go to great lengths to get your content (and there are some customers who will share it with others - welcome to 2014).

                    Post Rewind [17:45]

                    I appeared on the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about platforms for podcasting. Listen/Watch it here. Izzabela and Mike Russel produce the Branding Cow podcast where you can have Izzabela go over your website from top to bottom. In one episode the podcaster was using the Website host to host their media and Izzabela mentions how it took almost 10 minutes to download the episode. You can find the Branding Cow podcast at www.brandingcow.com Mike and Izzabela run Music Radio Creative and recommend using Spreaker as your media host. Music Radio Creative are responsible for the "Podcast Rewind" voice over as well as the "Ladies" who sing "The School of Podcasting with Dave Jackson." Speaking of using your Web Hoist as a Media host I interview Ralph from thesdrshow.com on episode 419 where he talks about the horror of having to move to a "real" media host after launching his podcast (his web host even told him it would be fine - then it wasn't). You can hear that episode HERE (if you want a free month of hosting at Libsyn.com or blubrry.com use the coupon sopfree ).

                    Spotlight Podcast: Adopting and Fostering in Faith [22:56]

                    Today we spotlight a new podcast "Adopting and Fostering in Faith from a new member of the School of Podcasting Robert Gelinas. This podcast is all about inspiration, information and resources for Christians who desire to care for orphans in their own backyard (and beyond). I love it as Robert is an expert (he has five adopted children) and he is using the podcast to help others with questions about fostering and adopting children. Check out his website at http://fosteringandadoptinginfaith.com/ and find his podcast in itunes

                    Last 5 in 5 from Ben Branam [29:46]

                    Ben Branam from Modern Self Protection (No One SHould Live in Fear) shares the last five podcasts you listened to: 1. Daily Audio Bible 2. Get it Done Guy 3. The Survival Podcast 4. Handgun World 5. Black Man With a Gun

                    HipCast Podcast Media Hosting Review [34:15]

                    I've am getting a bit tired of reviewing media hosts as there are new ones every day (hour?) I was asked to look at Hipcast.com. My criteria includes: 1. Don't mess with my file (they do) - although you are allowed to rename your file once you upload it. They transcode your file as well. 2. Give me a way to redirect my feed (they don't). 3. Dont limit my bandwidth (they pass) 4. Give me stats (their stats get a D+ - very, very basic) 5. Give me unlimited storage (they pass) They list features on their website that aren't really features ("We back up you files" - really? I hope so). Their online recording tools didn't work with my machine (they didn't recognize my microphone). The recording from your phone produced a quality that I feel is poor at best. You can read my review of other media hosts here. I recommend Libsyn.com and Blubrry.om (who meet all my criteria) get a free month at either site using the coupon sopfree As Tim is doing a video podcast and he wants to put out an hour long video, I ask "Does it really need to be video. There are people who do videos for YouTube and then put the audio out as a podcast. Cali Lewis use to do this (and might still be doing it) for geekbeat.tv What some people will do is create a smaller version to be downloaded 640 x 360 (16:9) Or 640 x 480 (4:3) Then upload the HD version to Youtube and put the Youtube version on your website and put the smaller version into your feed and let people watch YouTube on your website. This reduces how much space you need for hosting. If your show is NOT visual (talking head) I would recommend this.  

                    Mentioned on this Show

                    Skywalking Through Neverland

                     

                    Ready to Start a Podcast?

                    Become a member

                    ]]>2d5f964b264d9c9cbbfefc16345693a8Mon, 08 Dec 2014 05:00:00 -040048:16falsefull438438Behind The Scene Stories Always Work - Voice mail Options - Story Podcast Wave?Today we talk about how adding a podcast to your blog can help you gain a larger audience. We talk with Kate Erickson of Kate's Take Pocast and the Entrepreneur on Fire podcast
                    Because of My Podcast - My Audience Gave Me a Laptop [1:35]

                    Ken Blanchard produces the Black Man with a Gun podcast among other podcasts that you can find at Blanchard Media. Recently he announced that he was having technical issues with his equipment, and that production of new episodes might come to a temporary halt. Instead of letting this happen, an audience member sent him a new Mac Book. I've said before that you can build a relationship with your audience, and that influence can be leveraged in many ways.

                    Best VoiceMail For Podcasters [8:36]

                    MagicJack Plus + Free 6 Months Subscription to Magic Jack Service $37 (a year of service is $35)

                    Google Voice - It's Free. The Sound is OK. Just realize if Google ever decides to charge or cancel this service you will have a back catalog of shows with this number. (deliver mp3 file)

                    Kall8 - This is the service I have used since 2005. An 800 number is $5 a month and approximately 7 cents a minute. My apologies to my friends across the pond. There isn't much international information on their site. I've never had a bill more than $10. The bad news is the sound quality of these calls is not great.

                    Kall8 captures at 8 bit, while Google Voice and Magic Jack capture at 16 bit (which is why Kall8 sounds so much worse).

                    With Google Voice being free, they seem like the obvious choice. I'm not sure I'm willing to trust Google with a voice mail that I give out for episode upon episode and then yank the tool away from me.

                    Magic Jack for me will be the recommended (more affordable) option. The ONE downside is people have to wait 5 seconds to go to voicemail (which is a bit long).

                    Another tool (that's not phone based) to get audio on yoru website is via Speakpipe.

                    Reality in Podcast Advertising

                    In a recent article in Podertainment magazine (a really great issue) Rob Walch VP of Podcasters relations a Libsyn.com  states in an article titled "A Rope in the Garage" that about 8% of all the episodes released that reach the 5,000 download threshold." What's so special about 5,000 downloads? This is the minimum number that many advertisers need to look at your show. Even if you reach that number you're still not talking about quitting your day job. Rob states, "Realistically less than 5% of podcasters even make enough from their podcast to even cover their costs. An less than 1% can call podcasting their main career or in the case above - an alternative better than the rope in the garage. "

                    I bring this up today because we have Kate Erickson of Entrepreneur on Fire on the show. John Lee Dumas has created an empire. An empire I stand and applaud. John has proven (over and over) that you CAN make money using your podcast. Notice I didn't say from your podcast (although John does that as well). Most of John's money comes from additional products he sell. Most podcasters who make money podcating (myself included) use the free podcast to promote other non-free services.

                    Paul Colligan in his recent episode states Podcast Monetization breaks down to: Market + Message + Money + Media = The Only Formula For Podcast Monetization

                     

                    Behind the Scenes of Kate's Take - a behind the scenes look at Entrepreneur on Fire and the Fire Path.

                    Kate Erickson is one of the guiding forces of the wildly successful Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. This has launched other spin of shows like Quotes on Fire, Webinar on Fire, and today we talk to Kate about why she launched Kate's Take along with "the Fire Path" which are the first 17 episodes of her show and are assembled into an ebook (no email required) at www.eofire.com/tfpbook

                    You will hear how Kate has boosted her confidence by doing more and more episodes. She started by re-recording her first shows (so remember you don't HAVE to publish the episodes you record).

                    She has put great content intermixed with stories and her audience is loving it.

                    She has a discipline to to focus on certain tasks that help propel her podcast and website further toward her goals. 

                    Kate states that they don't make subscribing to their podcast a primary call to action. She advises the call to action be go to the website where they can then subscribe to your podcast and/or your email list. 

                    Kate has taken her blog posts and turned them into a audioblog/podcast. So if you are a blogger you will hear how she is getting more feedback and reaching a large audience as a podcast. Another thing to consider is if you are a blogger that for every one podcast there are roughly 1950 blogs so having a podcast makes it easier to be found. (source Rob Walch)

                    Are Story Telling Podcasts the Next Podcasting Wave? [47:00]

                    With the success of shows like Radio Lab, Startup, and Serial, more people are discovering podcasts. These stories pull us in, and keep us captivated. Well the people behind startup have launched another new show call Reply All. I was stoked as (so far) every "Story" podcast was a giant home run in my book. Reply All has left me in a "meh" state of mind. With this in mind, you still need to prove value to your audience. If your information is not how to, it needs to entertain them, or make them think. 

                    I jokingly made a podcast called "Dinner" where for 5:48 you hear me try to decide what I want for dinner, and then go to Target to buy it. 

                    The fun part is this 5:48 clip took an HOUR to produce (finding music, sound effects, etc, editing the audio). It sounds great when you have a great...]]>Today we talk about how adding a podcast to your blog can help you gain a larger audience. We talk with Kate Erickson of Kate's Take Pocast and the Entrepreneur on Fire podcast

                    Because of My Podcast - My Audience Gave Me a Laptop [1:35]

                    Ken Blanchard produces the Black Man with a Gun podcast among other podcasts that you can find at Blanchard Media. Recently he announced that he was having technical issues with his equipment, and that production of new episodes might come to a temporary halt. Instead of letting this happen, an audience member sent him a new Mac Book. I've said before that you can build a relationship with your audience, and that influence can be leveraged in many ways.

                    Best VoiceMail For Podcasters [8:36]

                    MagicJack Plus + Free 6 Months Subscription to Magic Jack Service $37 (a year of service is $35)

                    Google Voice - It's Free. The Sound is OK. Just realize if Google ever decides to charge or cancel this service you will have a back catalog of shows with this number. (deliver mp3 file)

                    Kall8 - This is the service I have used since 2005. An 800 number is $5 a month and approximately 7 cents a minute. My apologies to my friends across the pond. There isn't much international information on their site. I've never had a bill more than $10. The bad news is the sound quality of these calls is not great.

                    Kall8 captures at 8 bit, while Google Voice and Magic Jack capture at 16 bit (which is why Kall8 sounds so much worse).

                    With Google Voice being free, they seem like the obvious choice. I'm not sure I'm willing to trust Google with a voice mail that I give out for episode upon episode and then yank the tool away from me.

                    Magic Jack for me will be the recommended (more affordable) option. The ONE downside is people have to wait 5 seconds to go to voicemail (which is a bit long).

                    Another tool (that's not phone based) to get audio on yoru website is via Speakpipe.

                    Reality in Podcast Advertising

                    In a recent article in Podertainment magazine (a really great issue) Rob Walch VP of Podcasters relations a Libsyn.com  states in an article titled "A Rope in the Garage" that about 8% of all the episodes released that reach the 5,000 download threshold." What's so special about 5,000 downloads? This is the minimum number that many advertisers need to look at your show. Even if you reach that number you're still not talking about quitting your day job. Rob states, "Realistically less than 5% of podcasters even make enough from their podcast to even cover their costs. An less than 1% can call podcasting their main career or in the case above - an alternative better than the rope in the garage. "

                    I bring this up today because we have Kate Erickson of Entrepreneur on Fire on the show. John Lee Dumas has created an empire. An empire I stand and applaud. John has proven (over and over) that you CAN make money using your podcast. Notice I didn't say from your podcast (although John does that as well). Most of John's money comes from additional products he sell. Most podcasters who make money podcating (myself included) use the free podcast to promote other non-free services.

                    Paul Colligan in his recent episode states Podcast Monetization breaks down to: Market + Message + Money + Media = The Only Formula For Podcast Monetization

                     

                    Behind the Scenes of Kate's Take - a behind the scenes look at Entrepreneur on Fire and the Fire Path.

                    Kate Erickson is one of the guiding forces of the wildly successful Entrepreneur on Fire podcast. This has launched other spin of shows like Quotes on Fire, Webinar on Fire, and today we talk to Kate about why she launched Kate's Take along with "the Fire Path" which are the first 17 episodes of her show and are assembled into an ebook (no email required) at www.eofire.com/tfpbook

                    You will hear how Kate has boosted her confidence by doing more and more episodes. She started by re-recording her first shows (so remember you don't HAVE to publish the episodes you record).

                    She has put great content intermixed with stories and her audience is loving it.

                    She has a discipline to to focus on certain tasks that help propel her podcast and website further toward her goals. 

                    Kate states that they don't make subscribing to their podcast a primary call to action. She advises the call to action be go to the website where they can then subscribe to your podcast and/or your email list. 

                    Kate has taken her blog posts and turned them into a audioblog/podcast. So if you are a blogger you will hear how she is getting more feedback and reaching a large audience as a podcast. Another thing to consider is if you are a blogger that for every one podcast there are roughly 1950 blogs so having a podcast makes it easier to be found. (source Rob Walch)

                    Are Story Telling Podcasts the Next Podcasting Wave? [47:00]

                    With the success of shows like Radio Lab, Startup, and Serial, more people are discovering podcasts. These stories pull us in, and keep us captivated. Well the people behind startup have launched another new show call Reply All. I was stoked as (so far) every "Story" podcast was a giant home run in my book. Reply All has left me in a "meh" state of mind. With this in mind, you still need to prove value to your audience. If your information is not how to, it needs to entertain them, or make them think. 

                    I jokingly made a podcast called "Dinner" where for 5:48 you hear me try to decide what I want for dinner, and then go to Target to buy it. 

                    The fun part is this 5:48 clip took an HOUR to produce (finding music, sound effects, etc, editing the audio). It sounds great when you have a great story (and you should start there), but it takes a lot of time to add that icing on top of the cake. 

                     START YOUR OWN PODCAST]]>1993a3c280c3bdbf75860fbcccbbe946Mon, 01 Dec 2014 05:00:00 -040058:18falsefull437437How to Be Negative Without Getting The Attention of Lawyers (Hopefully)First things first, I'm not a lawyer and do not take this as legal advice. Always speak to a lawyer. A few weeks ago I made a video about the service Audello. At the end of the video I saw something that really upset me. I was already somewhat upset as I can see where people are going to spend $300 for a product that is unnecessary. I took to the video camera, and the blog post with smoke coming out of my ears. My title warned people to stay away from this product and I called it a scam. That is over line. These as Yosemite Sam would say, "Are fighting words" and you know what? He's right. I went looking for what words could get you sued and I found a great post from Deb McCalister. She has some great advice (deb has worked in PR for a long time).
                    Don't Be a Warning Bell

                    Avoid comments like WARNING: Beware of… (or the variations: Stay away from…Don’t do business with…DO not  hire…Do not buy…Do not waste money…) SCAM ALERT: (Company or individual’s name) is a con artist… (or the variations: I got  taken in by…These scammers took my money…Don’t trust…) (Company or individual’s name) lied (or the variations: misrepresented…promised but did  not deliver…ruined my property description by doing shoddy work…did shoddy work…is the  worst company description…) She also stated that you want to keep things personal: Focus on your own experience, and don’t tell other people what to do. Keep your language in the first person. “I hired…” “I found…” “I paid…” “I thought…” “I feel… You should try to avoid telling people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them make a decision.

                    Don't Threaten

                    Tactics to avoid saying I’m going to make it my business to tell everyone I meet what a crook you are. I am going to tell everyone not to do business with you. If you don’t fix the problem you caused, I am going to ruin your reputation online. So what did I say that was so bad? I called it a scam (it's not a scam is where you give people money and get nothing in return - you do get something in return with Audello). I told people not to buy it. Like I said, don't tell people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them decide.

                    Be Ready to Prove Your Claims

                     

                    What Would My Updated Review Be?

                    I downloaded and installed Audello last week. On my computer I could never get it to launch. I didn't contact their tech support as my goal was to get an overview of the program so I could talk about it. Their web interface was really all I needed. I do my recording in other software (so I didn't need it). Here are some of their features Playlists Future Dating of Shows The Ability to see where people stop listening Split Testing Audio bars Of all the features the one I feel is unique is split testing. This is geared toward having a selling proposition on a page. So if you have a page setup to collect email addresses, you could see what audio message worked best at getting people to sign up for your email list. Playlists can be done with the free plugin powerpress. Future dating of shows can be done in Wordpress. The ability to see how long people are listening is available if you are on the Stitcher platform. All of those features are free. This is where Audello will say that the main advantage of Audello is that all these features are under one platform (and that would be true). It is also true that Audello is around $197 - $294. When I imported my feed, not all the details came across. If you have multiple shows on Libsyn, when you upload a show through Audello it will randomly pick which show to assign the file (that is not acceptable in my opinion). So the software has bugs (most new software does), but for $297 I expected more. Mentioned in this segment: EFF ONline Defamation Law and Deb Mcalisiter Article Here is the message I received

                    Brute Protect Plugin

                    Last Saturday the School of Podcasting and Ask the Podcast Coach had Brute Force attacks that made it hard for my website to stay online. It was a horrible feeling. Working with the tech support at Host gator they determined that I was under a brute force attack. I searched for a plugin to help and found the Brute Force attack plugin. This free plugin was recently purchased by Automatic (the people who make Wordpress). The idea is they are creating a giant database of attackers that it is blocking. It also will email you when your site is down (and when it comes back up). Over the last 19 hours it has blocked 20 attempts to login to my site. If your site is having an issues, this seems to be helping. You can learn more about it at https://bruteprotect.com/

                    My Podcast Reviews Now Includes Stitcher Reviews

                    I want to thank everyone who has written a review in iTunes or Stitcher. I've been using My Podcast Reviews to track these (and all the reviews I've had over the years). It's definitely worth the money as I don't have to go in and dig through all the international stores to see my reviews (i.e.e the ones from Australia, Canada, etc). It's a great way to keep up to date with what people are saying about you.

                    Appendipity Podcaster Pro Now Compatible with PowerPress

                    You can use this theme and leave Powerpress enabled, but turn of the ability for PowerPress to place a player in your post (or use both and have Appendipity at the top of the post and PowerPress on the bottom).

                     

                    Ready To Podcast?

                    Become a member today

                    ]]>First things first, I'm not a lawyer and do not take this as legal advice. Always speak to a lawyer. A few weeks ago I made a video about the service Audello. At the end of the video I saw something that really upset me. I was already somewhat upset as I can see where people are going to spend $300 for a product that is unnecessary. I took to the video camera, and the blog post with smoke coming out of my ears. My title warned people to stay away from this product and I called it a scam. That is over line. These as Yosemite Sam would say, "Are fighting words" and you know what? He's right. I went looking for what words could get you sued and I found a great post from Deb McCalister. She has some great advice (deb has worked in PR for a long time).
                    Don't Be a Warning Bell

                    Avoid comments like WARNING: Beware of… (or the variations: Stay away from…Don’t do business with…DO not  hire…Do not buy…Do not waste money…) SCAM ALERT: (Company or individual’s name) is a con artist… (or the variations: I got  taken in by…These scammers took my money…Don’t trust…) (Company or individual’s name) lied (or the variations: misrepresented…promised but did  not deliver…ruined my property description by doing shoddy work…did shoddy work…is the  worst company description…) She also stated that you want to keep things personal: Focus on your own experience, and don’t tell other people what to do. Keep your language in the first person. “I hired…” “I found…” “I paid…” “I thought…” “I feel… You should try to avoid telling people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them make a decision.

                    Don't Threaten

                    Tactics to avoid saying I’m going to make it my business to tell everyone I meet what a crook you are. I am going to tell everyone not to do business with you. If you don’t fix the problem you caused, I am going to ruin your reputation online. So what did I say that was so bad? I called it a scam (it's not a scam is where you give people money and get nothing in return - you do get something in return with Audello). I told people not to buy it. Like I said, don't tell people what to do. Give them the facts that you found, and let them decide.

                    Be Ready to Prove Your Claims

                     

                    What Would My Updated Review Be?

                    I downloaded and installed Audello last week. On my computer I could never get it to launch. I didn't contact their tech support as my goal was to get an overview of the program so I could talk about it. Their web interface was really all I needed. I do my recording in other software (so I didn't need it). Here are some of their features Playlists Future Dating of Shows The Ability to see where people stop listening Split Testing Audio bars Of all the features the one I feel is unique is split testing. This is geared toward having a selling proposition on a page. So if you have a page setup to collect email addresses, you could see what audio message worked best at getting people to sign up for your email list. Playlists can be done with the free plugin powerpress. Future dating of shows can be done in Wordpress. The ability to see how long people are listening is available if you are on the Stitcher platform. All of those features are free. This is where Audello will say that the main advantage of Audello is that all these features are under one platform (and that would be true). It is also true that Audello is around $197 - $294. When I imported my feed, not all the details came across. If you have multiple shows on Libsyn, when you upload a show through Audello it will randomly pick which show to assign the file (that is not acceptable in my opinion). So the software has bugs (most new software does), but for $297 I expected more. Mentioned in this segment: EFF ONline Defamation Law and Deb Mcalisiter Article Here is the message I received

                    Brute Protect Plugin

                    Last Saturday the School of Podcasting and Ask the Podcast Coach had Brute Force attacks that made it hard for my website to stay online. It was a horrible feeling. Working with the tech support at Host gator they determined that I was under a brute force attack. I searched for a plugin to help and found the Brute Force attack plugin. This free plugin was recently purchased by Automatic (the people who make Wordpress). The idea is they are creating a giant database of attackers that it is blocking. It also will email you when your site is down (and when it comes back up). Over the last 19 hours it has blocked 20 attempts to login to my site. If your site is having an issues, this seems to be helping. You can learn more about it at https://bruteprotect.com/

                    My Podcast Reviews Now Includes Stitcher Reviews

                    I want to thank everyone who has written a review in iTunes or Stitcher. I've been using My Podcast Reviews to track these (and all the reviews I've had over the years). It's definitely worth the money as I don't have to go in and dig through all the international stores to see my reviews (i.e.e the ones from Australia, Canada, etc). It's a great way to keep up to date with what people are saying about you.

                    Appendipity Podcaster Pro Now Compatible with PowerPress

                    You can use this theme and leave Powerpress enabled, but turn of the ability for PowerPress to place a player in your post (or use both and have Appendipity at the top of the post and PowerPress on the bottom).

                     

                    Ready To Podcast?

                    Become a member today

                    ]]>a4efd57c0d9812b1fa6f7f0087f9ef25Mon, 24 Nov 2014 05:00:00 -040046:02falsefull436436Great Content Criteria - Simplecast.fm Review - Solo Podcast PracticeToday we talk about your favorite podcast, what does it take to feel comfortable talking to yourself, and  
                    Last 5 in 5 With David Hooper

                    David Hooper hosts the RED Podcast (Real Entrepreneur Development) and he phoned in the last five podcasts he listened to: Funding the Dream on Kickstarter Serial The Dr. Drew Podcast Building A Better Dave School Of Laughs Additional Mentions Dr. Drew on Marc Maron show  Kate's Take: The EntrepreneurOnFire Audio Blog The Bitterest Pill(this inspired me to do Building a Better Dave) Win the Diet War

                     Podcast Rewind: Podcaster's Roundtable Episode 38 on the LAW [18:00]

                    Check out episode 38 where we had two different lawyers on and we talked to them about using music in podcasting as well as the patent lawsuits, etc. It's a great show. Check it out at http://podcastersroundtable.com/pr038-podcasting-and-the-law/ Check out Ya's other show Podcasters Studio and Daniel J. Lewis on the Audacity to podcast

                    Simplecast.fm  Podcast Media Host Review [21:00]

                    I have seven piece of criteria when I look at media hosts. These include: 1. Don't change my file (period). 2. Don't limit my storage 3. Don't limit the bandwidth 4. Give me Stats 5. Give me support 6. Don't control my feed. 7. Charge me for it. Simplecast.fm stats $12 a month for unlimited storage and bandwidth. The weird thing is they don't state ANY limits (that's a business plan that opens themselves up for lots of abuse). Their player is interesting as it allows you to speed things up and rewind. They have an interesting "Managers" feature where you can allow multiple people to manage your hosting. They make it easy to add advertising banners on your website. However, they changed my file name, they changed format (they changed it to mono), they also didn't copy over all my ID3 tags. When I sent them an email, 7 days later I still didn't have an answer. This leads me to saying I can't recommend them as a solution. I recommend Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com (you can get a free month using the coupon sopfree at either service). http://youtu.be/blunoEc_Oag

                    Is Your Podcast Useful and Interesting? [31:30]

                    I was reading an article from the Consent Marketing Institute and it said “Great content meets two criteria: It’s useful and it’s interesting.” This got me to thinking and I believe this to be true. I will listen to things that aren't useful (Like the Serial podcast) because it's really interesting. I will listen to boring stuff (like webinars) because they provide useful information. When you are trying to come up with ideas from your show ask yourself is what I'm about to share useful or interesting (preferably both). When its not interesting or useful, I call is "kah-kah, poo-poo." This is why I don't recommend an "episode 0" which is what people would put into their feed to test their iTunes feed. While this was seful in testing your feed, it was not very useful as a first impression. Now I recommend people come out with their best content in episode 1 (and don't be in such a hurry.

                    Congrats to the Forever Fan Podcast [37:13]

                    Troy contact me about doing a quick start, and in a few days he had his podcast launched. (see foreverfanpodcast.com ) If you don't have a website, send me an email with the phrase (quick start) in the title (if you have a podcast just join the School of Podcasting) I send you a link to order your hosting (I earn a commission), and it runs you around $8 a month. You send me the welcome email, and I install Wordpress for you (and some plugins to get you going - you need the graphics and the content) I also give you a free month at the School of Podcasting

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    I would love to help you launch you podcast.  

                    ]]>Today we talk about your favorite podcast, what does it take to feel comfortable talking to yourself, and  
                    Last 5 in 5 With David Hooper

                    David Hooper hosts the RED Podcast (Real Entrepreneur Development) and he phoned in the last five podcasts he listened to: Funding the Dream on Kickstarter Serial The Dr. Drew Podcast Building A Better Dave School Of Laughs Additional Mentions Dr. Drew on Marc Maron show  Kate's Take: The EntrepreneurOnFire Audio Blog The Bitterest Pill(this inspired me to do Building a Better Dave) Win the Diet War

                     Podcast Rewind: Podcaster's Roundtable Episode 38 on the LAW [18:00]

                    Check out episode 38 where we had two different lawyers on and we talked to them about using music in podcasting as well as the patent lawsuits, etc. It's a great show. Check it out at http://podcastersroundtable.com/pr038-podcasting-and-the-law/ Check out Ya's other show Podcasters Studio and Daniel J. Lewis on the Audacity to podcast

                    Simplecast.fm  Podcast Media Host Review [21:00]

                    I have seven piece of criteria when I look at media hosts. These include: 1. Don't change my file (period). 2. Don't limit my storage 3. Don't limit the bandwidth 4. Give me Stats 5. Give me support 6. Don't control my feed. 7. Charge me for it. Simplecast.fm stats $12 a month for unlimited storage and bandwidth. The weird thing is they don't state ANY limits (that's a business plan that opens themselves up for lots of abuse). Their player is interesting as it allows you to speed things up and rewind. They have an interesting "Managers" feature where you can allow multiple people to manage your hosting. They make it easy to add advertising banners on your website. However, they changed my file name, they changed format (they changed it to mono), they also didn't copy over all my ID3 tags. When I sent them an email, 7 days later I still didn't have an answer. This leads me to saying I can't recommend them as a solution. I recommend Libsyn.com and Blubrry.com (you can get a free month using the coupon sopfree at either service). http://youtu.be/blunoEc_Oag

                    Is Your Podcast Useful and Interesting? [31:30]

                    I was reading an article from the Consent Marketing Institute and it said “Great content meets two criteria: It’s useful and it’s interesting.” This got me to thinking and I believe this to be true. I will listen to things that aren't useful (Like the Serial podcast) because it's really interesting. I will listen to boring stuff (like webinars) because they provide useful information. When you are trying to come up with ideas from your show ask yourself is what I'm about to share useful or interesting (preferably both). When its not interesting or useful, I call is "kah-kah, poo-poo." This is why I don't recommend an "episode 0" which is what people would put into their feed to test their iTunes feed. While this was seful in testing your feed, it was not very useful as a first impression. Now I recommend people come out with their best content in episode 1 (and don't be in such a hurry.

                    Congrats to the Forever Fan Podcast [37:13]

                    Troy contact me about doing a quick start, and in a few days he had his podcast launched. (see foreverfanpodcast.com ) If you don't have a website, send me an email with the phrase (quick start) in the title (if you have a podcast just join the School of Podcasting) I send you a link to order your hosting (I earn a commission), and it runs you around $8 a month. You send me the welcome email, and I install Wordpress for you (and some plugins to get you going - you need the graphics and the content) I also give you a free month at the School of Podcasting

                    Ready To Start Podcasting?

                    I would love to help you launch you podcast.  

                    ]]>626766260653beb4877e01b6ed7f4a5eMon, 17 Nov 2014 05:00:00 -040041:29falsefull435435What Did Making My Podcast App Free Do For Me? & Podcast Promotion TipsLooking for some things to help grow your audience? Today we have a few ideas to make it easier for people to find and consume your content. Join in on the conversation at 888-563-3228
                    Check Your Volumes Levels

                    I listened to a bunch of podcasts in the car this week, and I was surprised by the very large difference in volumes levels and equalization. In some cases people are getting out of hand with the "adding bass to sound like the radio" tools. I would advised you to listen to a few other podcasts and then listen to yours and see how they stack up.

                    Because of my Podcast - I'm Going Global [5:00]

                    Tony from thestillman.com explains how his podcast is going global now that it is a podcast. He started it as a way for people who were visually impaired to consume the content and now his podcast is being heard all over the place. Tony was also said some very nice words about being reviewed on the Podcast Review Show. In looking at my stats, the School of Podcasting is now heard in 175 countries with the US being first, and CHINA being second (followed by Canada and Australia and many others).

                    Last 5 in 5 [11:45]

                    Gary Leland from Garyleleand.com and Podertainment magazine. Scott Sigler's The Rookie No Agenda Show (media Assassinations) Podcast Talent Coach (podcasting tips) Today in iOs (all things iPhone/iPad) The Podcast Report (podcasting news) The Starter's Club

                    Help Your Audience Consume Your Content [17:30]

                    I wanted to share some promotion that I did to get folks into podcast consumption. We host a haunted house in our garage each Halloween, so I took advantage of a captive audience and gave the parents a card that had the details of my podcast on the front and some "how to listen" info on the back (images attached). Most folks were familiar with podcasts, but not real sure how to find them, so hopefully this will pull in a few more converts. I also created a page on my site with a video showing additional info on how to listen (ran of out time to voice it over, so need to go back and do that): http://whatsuponearth.com/listen Thanks for all the great tutoring on the shows, and best of luck with NMX. Big Fan, Al Holtz What's Up On Earth? whatsuponearth.com/listen

                    Providing Embed Codes to Guests Can Greatly Improve Your Downloads [22:55]

                    Jason Bryant produces On the Mat Podcast Network and interviewed some top guests. He has his Powerpress Plugin set to enable people to grab the embed link and put the player on their website (as they may not want to point their audience to YOUR website. In doing this his downloads went from three digits downloads to FIVE digit downloads. Let your guests and your audience freely promote your show and then make sure to mention your website in every episode. If you are using the PowerPress Wordpress plugin, go to the settings

                    Making My Libsyn.com App Free [26:45]

                    In July I sold 2 apps. I made it free and in September I had 102 download it. Is having 100% more people listen to your show worth the extra $10 a month? To get your app (free to have it created) go to Libsyn.com and get the $20 a month plan (it will be $30 a month once the app is launched). You can use the code sopfree to get a free month of hosting at the Libsyn.com July app sales ($1.99): 2 September App Sales (free): 102

                    Mentioned on This Episode

                    Trapper Jack (Phillip Keller Now) www.blindfaithlive.com New Media Show  the Audacity to Podcast (Daniel J Lewis)

                      Ready to Podcast?    
                    ]]>Looking for some things to help grow your audience? Today we have a few ideas to make it easier for people to find and consume your content. Join in on the conversation at 888-563-3228
                    Check Your Volumes Levels

                    I listened to a bunch of podcasts in the car this week, and I was surprised by the very large difference in volumes levels and equalization. In some cases people are getting out of hand with the "adding bass to sound like the radio" tools. I would advised you to listen to a few other podcasts and then listen to yours and see how they stack up.

                    Because of my Podcast - I'm Going Global [5:00]

                    Tony from thestillman.com explains how his podcast is going global now that it is a podcast. He started it as a way for people who were visually impaired to consume the content and now his podcast is being heard all over the place. Tony was also said some very nice words about being reviewed on the Podcast Review Show. In looking at my stats, the School of Podcasting is now heard in 175 countries with the US being first, and CHINA being second (followed by Canada and Australia and many others).

                    Last 5 in 5 [11:45]

                    Gary Leland from Garyleleand.com and Podertainment magazine. Scott Sigler's The Rookie No Agenda Show (media Assassinations) Podcast Talent Coach (podcasting tips) Today in iOs (all things iPhone/iPad) The Podcast Report (podcasting news) The Starter's Club

                    Help Your Audience Consume Your Content [17:30]

                    I wanted to share some promotion that I did to get folks into podcast consumption. We host a haunted house in our garage each Halloween, so I took advantage of a captive audience and gave the parents a card that had the details of my podcast on the front and some "how to listen" info on the back (images attached). Most folks were familiar with podcasts, but not real sure how to find them, so hopefully this will pull in a few more converts. I also created a page on my site with a video showing additional info on how to listen (ran of out time to voice it over, so need to go back and do that): http://whatsuponearth.com/listen Thanks for all the great tutoring on the shows, and best of luck with NMX. Big Fan, Al Holtz What's Up On Earth? whatsuponearth.com/listen

                    Providing Embed Codes to Guests Can Greatly Improve Your Downloads [22:55]

                    Jason Bryant produces On the Mat Podcast Network and interviewed some top guests. He has his Powerpress Plugin set to enable people to grab the embed link and put the player on their website (as they may not want to point their audience to YOUR website. In doing this his downloads went from three digits downloads to FIVE digit downloads. Let your guests and your audience freely promote your show and then make sure to mention your website in every episode. If you are using the PowerPress Wordpress plugin, go to the settings

                    Making My Libsyn.com App Free [26:45]

                    In July I sold 2 apps. I made it free and in September I had 102 download it. Is having 100% more people listen to your show worth the extra $10 a month? To get your app (free to have it created) go to Libsyn.com and get the $20 a month plan (it will be $30 a month once the app is launched). You can use the code sopfree to get a free month of hosting at the Libsyn.com July app sales ($1.99): 2 September App Sales (free): 102

                    Mentioned on This Episode

                    Trapper Jack (Phillip Keller Now) www.blindfaithlive.com New Media Show  the Audacity to Podcast (Daniel J Lewis)

                      Ready to Podcast?    
                    ]]>6001c764761721bd048a57284b022f7eMon, 10 Nov 2014 05:00:00 -040040:52falsefull434434More Audello Worries - Updating Feed questionsToday we have a fun toy from my audience, we discover new podcasts with Ben Kruger, as talk about more things to worry about when it comes to Audello, and I answer your questions about the School of Podcasting and changing your podcast information in iTunes. Call into the show at 888-563-3228

                     

                      Because of my podcast - I can listen to podcasts in the Shower

                    A listener from CHINA sent me a bluetooth speaker that allows me to listen to podcasts in the show. Thank you Kevin Deng for the cool gift. I plug it into a usb device (like my computer) to charge it, then there is a suction cop on the back and I can stick it to the shower wall. My iphone can connect to the show via bluetooth. I can pause, skip, and stop the podcasts right on the player. If someone calls the device turns into a speaker phone. That would be weird to take a call in the shower. When the power is getting low, the device tells you to charge it.

                    Thanks so much to Kevin. I am really loving it.

                     

                    Reverse Engineering Podcast Listeners [4:15]

                    I was curious how people FIND podcasts. We all obsess about iTunes, Stitcher, and other directories. In many cases the podcasts I listen to did not get on my phone by me doing a search. Colin Gray from Podcraft (podcraft.net) who does a show about podcasting says that word of mouth seems to be the main way he has found podcasts. Colin is the 6th person to tell me about the Startup podcast which is a story of a person starting a podcast network to create shows that tell stories. It's very interesting, and the producer used to produce This American Life (one of the top rated podcasts in iTunes).

                    What was your Absolutely Favorite Podcast in 2005?

                    I did this last year. If you could only listen to ONE podcast, what would it be. Please give me:

                    1. The name of the show

                    2. The website address

                    3. A brief description of the show

                    4. WHY you listen (this is the biggie)

                    5. Then tell us briefly about your show. Be sure to include your website address.

                    My plan (like last year) is to have these transcribed and turned into a PDF. I'm also going to take last year's submissions and combine them in with this years submissions and turn them into a book for sale on Amazon. So you will get your voice played on my podcast, you will be in the PDF and in the Kindle book. I am taking submissions in November 2014. This way I can assemble it in December with the episode being played at the end of the year (12/28/14).

                    You can call them in 888-563-3228, record an email them to me (128 mp3), or using the speakpipe button below.

                     

                    Last 5 in 5 with Ben Kruger [10:15]

                    1. Time Ferris Show

                    2. Marketing In Your Car

                    3. Tropical MBA

                    4. Authority Alchemy

                    5. Authority Engine (Ben's show as we couldn't count)

                    Dave Jackson on New Media Show [17:15]

                    A podcast host will not bring you more listeners. A new mixer will not bring your more listeners (unless you sound is really bad).

                    I appeared on the New Media Show with Rob Greenlee and Todd Cochrane talking about the New Media Expo (as I'm the Director of Podcasting) but we also started to talk about Soundcloud. Rob shared that their RSS feeds are oftn not compliant and missing itunes specs. You can subscribe to the New Media Show in itunes using this link.

                    Podcast Review Show [22:10]

                    We review the Gospel Light and Truth Hour on the latest episode of the Podcast Review Show. If you are looking to have two experts with a combine experience of 30 years give you unbiased feeback on your show, get your podcast reviewed.

                     

                    Is Audello False Advertising? [25:10]

                    I spoke last week about Audello and how their claims are exaggerated and that you can do a lot of what they are doing with free software. It was released this week to the tune of $297. That is crazy. I signed up as an Affiliate so I could hopefully get a closer look. Once approved, I saw videos where they have you submitting a feed created by Audello to iTunes. This makes me worried. I asked their support if there was a way to redirect their feed in the event you want to stop using their service. The support response wasn't certain of what I was talking about, and they said if it didn't exist they could always create it. Then a listener sent me a screenshot of John Lee Dumas commenting on Audello as they are using his image on their site. The bad new is John is NOT USING THEIR SYSTEM.

                    When I see a company do this (in the same way that podbean.com puts people on their front page that aren't using their...]]>Today we have a fun toy from my audience, we discover new podcasts with Ben Kruger, as talk about more things to worry about when it comes to Audello, and I answer your questions about the School of Podcasting and changing your podcast information in iTunes. Call into the show at 888-563-3228

                     

                      Because of my podcast - I can listen to podcasts in the Shower

                    A listener from CHINA sent me a bluetooth speaker that allows me to listen to podcasts in the show. Thank you Kevin Deng for the cool gift. I plug it into a usb device (like my computer) to charge it, then there is a suction cop on the back and I can stick it to the shower wall. My iphone can connect to the show via bluetooth. I can pause, skip, and stop the podcasts right on the player. If someone calls the device turns into a speaker phone. That would be weird to take a call in the shower. When the power is getting low, the device tells you to charge it.

                    Thanks so much to Kevin. I am really loving it.

                     

                    Reverse Engineering Podcast Listeners [4:15]

                    I was curious how people FIND podcasts. We all obsess about iTunes, Stitcher, and other directories. In many cases the podcasts I listen to did not get on my phone by me doing a search. Colin Gray from Podcraft (podcraft.net) who does a show about podcasting says that word of mouth seems to be the main way he has found podcasts. Colin is the 6th person to tell me about the Startup podcast which is a story of a person starting a podcast network to create shows that tell stories. It's very interesting, and the producer used to produce This American Life (one of the top rated podcasts in iTunes).

                    What was your Absolutely Favorite Podcast in 2005?

                    I did this last year. If you could only listen to ONE podcast, what would it be. Please give me:

                    1. The name of the show

                    2. The website address

                    3. A brief description of the show

                    4. WHY you listen (this is the biggie)

                    5. Then tell us briefly about your show. Be sure to include your website address.

                    My plan (like last year) is to have these transcribed and turned into a PDF. I'm also going to take last year's submissions and combine them in with this years submissions and turn them into a book for sale on Amazon. So you will get your voice played on my podcast, you will be in the PDF and in the Kindle book. I am taking submissions in November 2014. This way I can assemble it in December with the episode being played at the end of the year (12/28/14).

                    You can call them in 888-563-3228, record an email them to me (128 mp3), or using the speakpipe button below.

                     

                    Last 5 in 5 with Ben Kruger [10:15]

                    1. Time Ferris Show

                    2. Marketing In Your Car

                    3. Tropical MBA

                    4. Authority Alchemy

                    5. Authority Engine (Ben's show as we couldn't count)

                    Dave Jackson on New Media Show [17:15]

                    A podcast host will not bring you more listeners. A new mixer will not bring your more listeners (unless you sound is really bad).

                    I appeared on the New Media Show with Rob Greenlee and Todd Cochrane talking about the New Media Expo (as I'm the Director of Podcasting) but we also started to talk about Soundcloud. Rob shared that their RSS feeds are oftn not compliant and missing itunes specs. You can subscribe to the New Media Show in itunes using this link.

                    Podcast Review Show [22:10]

                    We review the Gospel Light and Truth Hour on the latest episode of the Podcast Review Show. If you are looking to have two experts with a combine experience of 30 years give you unbiased feeback on your show, get your podcast reviewed.

                     

                    Is Audello False Advertising? [25:10]

                    I spoke last week about Audello and how their claims are exaggerated and that you can do a lot of what they are doing with free software. It was released this week to the tune of $297. That is crazy. I signed up as an Affiliate so I could hopefully get a closer look. Once approved, I saw videos where they have you submitting a feed created by Audello to iTunes. This makes me worried. I asked their support if there was a way to redirect their feed in the event you want to stop using their service. The support response wasn't certain of what I was talking about, and they said if it didn't exist they could always create it. Then a listener sent me a screenshot of John Lee Dumas commenting on Audello as they are using his image on their site. The bad new is John is NOT USING THEIR SYSTEM.

                    When I see a company do this (in the same way that podbean.com puts people on their front page that aren't using their service it's to make them look better than they are. This is false advertising.

                    Audello has a generous affiliate program so be careful as everyone is going to be saying this is the best thing since sliced bread (because they want that affiliate commission). If you go in, go in with your eyes wide open.

                    Changing Your Information in iTunes [25:00]

                    Every Saturday I do a live call in show called Asked the Podcast Coach. This week we took a week off to work on the New Media Expo. So I'm answering some question here.

                    Your show titles are the headline of your episodes. They are very important. Write them with words that entice people to click and listen. If you're going to put numbers in your show title, I highly recommend you put them at the end of the title.

                    If you swap out the image, it won't cause an issue. Make it s 2048X2048 jpg image. I would not use the exact same name as the file you are replacing.

                    You should be subscribed to your show so you can make sure your feed is working.

                    Questions About the School of Podcasting

                    Is this meant for people who are absolutely new to podcasting?  Yes. Absolutely. Also while books and youtube videos are great. If you have any questions you have email support with fast responses to any questions you might have.

                    What is covered? The main courses are planning your podcast, recording your podcast (software, microphones, mixers), building your website, publishing your podcast, promoting your podcast, and monetizing your podcast. There are a lot of tutorials. You have access to all of them the minute your sign up.

                    Do you have any information about using your iPhone as a recording device? If you find any information missing from the School of Podcasting I will create it. In this case I usually will discuss what you need via email to make sure you're getting the right items.

                    What is up with the Pricing? The first month is more because you can come in and consume everything and leave. If you stick around you can enjoy the great things like our private Facebook Group, and participate in our live "office hour" phone calls where we all share with each other and ask and answer questions.

                     

                    Dave Jackson is a participant in the Amazon Services LLC Associates Program, an affiliate advertising program designed to provide a means for sites to earn advertising fees by advertising and linking to amazon.com

                    ]]>01427490e7aadb60b45aca030e72908fMon, 03 Nov 2014 05:00:00 -040001:00:33falsefull433433Two Questions You Need to Ask Every Audience Member - Snake Oil Shipments on the WayToday we have LOTS of podcasting news and new products on the horizons (some good, some seem kind of slimy). I explain what two questions I ask every time I meet a listener, and I think I found the Wordpress theme of my dreams. 

                     

                     

                    Today we have LOTS of podcasting news and new products on the horizons (some good, some seem kind of slimy). I explain what two questions I ask every time I meet a listener, and I think I found the Wordpress theme of my dreams. Got a comment? Call it in 888-563-3228 or visit the contact page for more options to get involved. 

                    New Car Dashboard

                    I now own a Toyota Prius (2012). When You connect to a iPhone it shows this:

                     

                    Podcast Listening Myths

                    You don't have to stream them them. You can download them when you on wi-fi (only) and then listen to them on your car. The Podcasts app from Apple also deletes the file as soon as you are through the whole episode. 

                    Stitcher is Purchased by Deezer

                    Stitcher is a great podcast consumption app (free) for both Ios and Android. Do I care? At this point Deezer is a music subscription service not available in the USA. They have been around since 2007. It's interesting. Stitcher says they are not going away. I will file this under, "Wait and see."

                    SoundCloud Discussion on New Media Show

                    Per Rob of the New Media Show Soundcloud has gone through most of their funding. Does this mean they are going out of business? No. Does it mean they need to be profitable soon? Yes. 

                     

                    Appendpity Podcaster Pro (and other themes) will soon integrate with PowerPress

                    I've used Appendipty themes in the past, but I wanted a little more flexibility. They just released the Podcast Pro theme, and it is WOW. The one thing it didn't do is integrate with the PowerPress plugin. I introduce Joey from Appendity to Todd Cohcrane from Blubrry who introduced Joey to Angelo (the main developer of PowerPress). The bottom line is the theme and plugin will work together very soon (probably a month or so). This way people who have started their podcast  and have a number of past episodes they won't have to copy and paste the location of the mp3 file into Appendpity part of your post (very cool). The Podcast Pro is $59 and need the Genesis framework $59. The good new is you can use it on more than one site for that $59. 

                    Two Questions You Should Always Ask Your Audience[20:15]

                    When you find yourself in direct contact with your audience be sure to ask them two questions:

                    How did you find my show? 

                    This way you can see what is working, and do more of that. 

                    What would you like to hear on my show?

                    This will bring you ideas for future shows. If they have no ideas, they will tell you what you are doing right. In my example my listener told me he was glad that I don't interview the "same old people."

                    What was the last podcast you listened to? How did you find that show? Call it in 888-563-3228

                    Snake Oil is on the Way (Audello) 26:15

                    A very successful Internet Marketer will be releasing a podcast publishing platform at the end of this week. My guess is this is going to be on the expensive side (if it's like previous product releases - I owned Easy Video Suite 2). There are tons of items in their video that just play on people who don't know better. PLUS they have contacted all the other Internet Marketers to promote it with affiliate programs (which is also why these are often over-priced as they have to pay 50% to an affiliate). 

                    I'm not saying this is a bad product. It could be very good, but it did show the system using feedburner (a really bad idea) and other tools that will make it look super easy. Many of these tools like WP Bakery allow you to drag and drop things on your Wordpress Page. 

                    Making Money with your podcast is not bad. People open restaurants every day and many of these don't make it through the first year. Podcasters who are looking to make a living quickly need to know their chances of success are not great. They are not impossible, but it takes a lot of work. a lot of hustle, and some luck. Please go in with your eyes open. If you're not sure, reach out to me and I will help you.

                    ]]>Today we have LOTS of podcasting news and new products on the horizons (some good, some seem kind of slimy). I explain what two questions I ask every time I meet a listener, and I think I found the Wordpress theme of my dreams. 

                     

                     

                    Today we have LOTS of podcasting news and new products on the horizons (some good, some seem kind of slimy). I explain what two questions I ask every time I meet a listener, and I think I found the Wordpress theme of my dreams. Got a comment? Call it in 888-563-3228 or visit the contact page for more options to get involved. 

                    New Car Dashboard

                    I now own a Toyota Prius (2012). When You connect to a iPhone it shows this:

                     

                    Podcast Listening Myths

                    You don't have to stream them them. You can download them when you on wi-fi (only) and then listen to them on your car. The Podcasts app from Apple also deletes the file as soon as you are through the whole episode. 

                    Stitcher is Purchased by Deezer

                    Stitcher is a great podcast consumption app (free) for both Ios and Android. Do I care? At this point Deezer is a music subscription service not available in the USA. They have been around since 2007. It's interesting. Stitcher says they are not going away. I will file this under, "Wait and see."

                    SoundCloud Discussion on New Media Show

                    Per Rob of the New Media Show Soundcloud has gone through most of their funding. Does this mean they are going out of business? No. Does it mean they need to be profitable soon? Yes. 

                     

                    Appendpity Podcaster Pro (and other themes) will soon integrate with PowerPress

                    I've used Appendipty themes in the past, but I wanted a little more flexibility. They just released the Podcast Pro theme, and it is WOW. The one thing it didn't do is integrate with the PowerPress plugin. I introduce Joey from Appendity to Todd Cohcrane from Blubrry who introduced Joey to Angelo (the main developer of PowerPress). The bottom line is the theme and plugin will work together very soon (probably a month or so). This way people who have started their podcast  and have a number of past episodes they won't have to copy and paste the location of the mp3 file into Appendpity part of your post (very cool). The Podcast Pro is $59 and need the Genesis framework $59. The good new is you can use it on more than one site for that $59. 

                    Two Questions You Should Always Ask Your Audience[20:15]

                    When you find yourself in direct contact with your audience be sure to ask them two questions:

                    How did you find my show? 

                    This way you can see what is working, and do more of that. 

                    What would you like to hear on my show?

                    This will bring you ideas for future shows. If they have no ideas, they will tell you what you are doing right. In my example my listener told me he was glad that I don't interview the "same old people."

                    What was the last podcast you listened to? How did you find that show? Call it in 888-563-3228

                    Snake Oil is on the Way (Audello) 26:15

                    A very successful Internet Marketer will be releasing a podcast publishing platform at the end of this week. My guess is this is going to be on the expensive side (if it's like previous product releases - I owned Easy Video Suite 2). There are tons of items in their video that just play on people who don't know better. PLUS they have contacted all the other Internet Marketers to promote it with affiliate programs (which is also why these are often over-priced as they have to pay 50% to an affiliate). 

                    I'm not saying this is a bad product. It could be very good, but it did show the system using feedburner (a really bad idea) and other tools that will make it look super easy. Many of these tools like WP Bakery allow you to drag and drop things on your Wordpress Page. 

                    Making Money with your podcast is not bad. People open restaurants every day and many of these don't make it through the first year. Podcasters who are looking to make a living quickly need to know their chances of success are not great. They are not impossible, but it takes a lot of work. a lot of hustle, and some luck. Please go in with your eyes open. If you're not sure, reach out to me and I will help you.

                    ]]>5f317e62903c9906c346404ef393cbeaMon, 27 Oct 2014 04:00:00 -040045:55falsefull432432GO, GO, GO Promote Your Show - You Can't Please EveryoneThe step of every journey starts with a single step. You've gone to great lengths to make a good episode. Now you're ready to promote your show, and everyone says "find your audience," but how? Today I do a couple quick Google searches and show you what I came up with for a friend who has a podcast that is a book of fiction (super niche). We also talk about dealing with "trolls" who leave negative comments on your blog posts, etc.

                    If you are thinking about speaking at New Media Expo, you need to get your submission in BEFORE 10/24. I give some tips on what I'm looking for at my blog.

                    Interview With an Internet Troll [3:40]

                    There will be people who hate  everything you do. They have nothing nice to say, and in some cases will use very offensive words. But keep in mind:

                    1. They don't have the courage to do what you do (create content). They only tell you how bad your content is.

                    2. Many times they do it in an anonymous fashion (again, lack of courage).

                    3. They DID leave a comment. You MOVED someone to hate you. That's a plus. It doesn't seem like a plus, but it is.

                    Check out Daniel J Lewis's episode on handling complaints.

                    Check out Erik K. Johnson's Podast Talent Coach.

                    Ray Ortega's Podaster's Studio and Podcaster's Rountable (which often has myself and Daniel J Lewis)

                    Last 5 in 5 [10:50]

                    Todd from the conformity hazard podcast (recorded live at Podcast Movement) tells us the last 5 podcasts he listened to.

                    48 Days to the Work you love (Dan Miller)

                    School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Answer Man

                    Family From the Heart (audio journal of the host)

                    Smart Passive Income (Pat Flynn).

                    Podcast Rewind [12:38]

                    UK Podcasters are now New Media Europe. Thanks to Kevin Cox for the shout out.

                    I appeared on the Profitcast Podcast. This is a cool show that talks about growing your audience and monetizing your show. Brian is an awesome dude.

                    How Do I Grow My Audience When I'm Not Doing an Interview Show? [16:15]

                    I got an email from Caine Door who asked, "

                    "what kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus?It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do.  My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes. "   My first bit of advice was to get his website address into his signature. Don't make it hard to find your show. I am the person who may not read all of your email, but I will click a link to help me determine if I should read all of your email. Then do the four steps of podcast promotion   1. Figure out who the audience is 2. Make content that will impact and move them. 3. GO to where they are and make friends with them. Bring value with every conversation. 4. Tell them about your podcast   So Caine's audience would be people looking for fiction. I typed in phrases like "Fiction Book Fans" and "Fiction Book Clubs" and I went to Google+ communities and Facebook Groups, and between a few(less than 5 searches) I had a list of places to investigate including.   http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.   http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs   http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)   Here is another search results for Google Groups https://plus.google.com/s/fiction%20books/communities   Be Careful in the Forums

                    The reason you have to do step three (make friends with your potential audience) is if you just show up and go "LISTEN TO MY PODCAST" people who ask, "Who is this person?' Then they will flag your for spam. I know because in 2006 this happened to me. It takes time. It's hard to do (because you know THIS is MY AUDIENCE) but be patient.

                    Kevin Costner is the Anti-Christ

                    In the movie Field of Dreams Kevin Costner says that "If you build it they will come." This is a GIANT LIE. You need to GO and find your audience. Will having a podcast being people to your site? Yes, but if you want to grow your audience faster you have to go find your audience and lead them to your show.

                    How Do You Define Your Success

                    In my book More Podcast Money, I talk about how Jeremy and Jason from Internet Business Mastery had more influence than people with email lists that were huge. Jason and Jeremy had more influence. Your success may not be measured in numbers.

                    ...]]>The step of every journey starts with a single step. You've gone to great lengths to make a good episode. Now you're ready to promote your show, and everyone says "find your audience," but how? Today I do a couple quick Google searches and show you what I came up with for a friend who has a podcast that is a book of fiction (super niche). We also talk about dealing with "trolls" who leave negative comments on your blog posts, etc.

                    If you are thinking about speaking at New Media Expo, you need to get your submission in BEFORE 10/24. I give some tips on what I'm looking for at my blog.

                    Interview With an Internet Troll [3:40]

                    There will be people who hate  everything you do. They have nothing nice to say, and in some cases will use very offensive words. But keep in mind:

                    1. They don't have the courage to do what you do (create content). They only tell you how bad your content is.

                    2. Many times they do it in an anonymous fashion (again, lack of courage).

                    3. They DID leave a comment. You MOVED someone to hate you. That's a plus. It doesn't seem like a plus, but it is.

                    Check out Daniel J Lewis's episode on handling complaints.

                    Check out Erik K. Johnson's Podast Talent Coach.

                    Ray Ortega's Podaster's Studio and Podcaster's Rountable (which often has myself and Daniel J Lewis)

                    Last 5 in 5 [10:50]

                    Todd from the conformity hazard podcast (recorded live at Podcast Movement) tells us the last 5 podcasts he listened to.

                    48 Days to the Work you love (Dan Miller)

                    School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Answer Man

                    Family From the Heart (audio journal of the host)

                    Smart Passive Income (Pat Flynn).

                    Podcast Rewind [12:38]

                    UK Podcasters are now New Media Europe. Thanks to Kevin Cox for the shout out.

                    I appeared on the Profitcast Podcast. This is a cool show that talks about growing your audience and monetizing your show. Brian is an awesome dude.

                    How Do I Grow My Audience When I'm Not Doing an Interview Show? [16:15]

                    I got an email from Caine Door who asked, "

                    "what kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus?It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do.  My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes. "   My first bit of advice was to get his website address into his signature. Don't make it hard to find your show. I am the person who may not read all of your email, but I will click a link to help me determine if I should read all of your email. Then do the four steps of podcast promotion   1. Figure out who the audience is 2. Make content that will impact and move them. 3. GO to where they are and make friends with them. Bring value with every conversation. 4. Tell them about your podcast   So Caine's audience would be people looking for fiction. I typed in phrases like "Fiction Book Fans" and "Fiction Book Clubs" and I went to Google+ communities and Facebook Groups, and between a few(less than 5 searches) I had a list of places to investigate including.   http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.   http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs   http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)   Here is another search results for Google Groups https://plus.google.com/s/fiction%20books/communities   Be Careful in the Forums

                    The reason you have to do step three (make friends with your potential audience) is if you just show up and go "LISTEN TO MY PODCAST" people who ask, "Who is this person?' Then they will flag your for spam. I know because in 2006 this happened to me. It takes time. It's hard to do (because you know THIS is MY AUDIENCE) but be patient.

                    Kevin Costner is the Anti-Christ

                    In the movie Field of Dreams Kevin Costner says that "If you build it they will come." This is a GIANT LIE. You need to GO and find your audience. Will having a podcast being people to your site? Yes, but if you want to grow your audience faster you have to go find your audience and lead them to your show.

                    How Do You Define Your Success

                    In my book More Podcast Money, I talk about how Jeremy and Jason from Internet Business Mastery had more influence than people with email lists that were huge. Jason and Jeremy had more influence. Your success may not be measured in numbers.

                    Get Your Podcast Reviewed

                    If you have a podcast and want some unbiased feedback check out getting a podcast review. You can appear live on the show and ask questions as we go over your content and website. We also have an option to have us review your show without you being present. To have your show reviewed, go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Become a Member of the School of Podcasting

                    If you're looking to start a podcast, the School of Podcasting has everything you need. I have tutorials that will walk you through every step of the process. I can help shape your content during the planning process. We can make sure you don't spend too much money on equipment you don't need. I can help you build your website with free tools, and get your show listed in iTunes (and all the other popular directories). Best of all, I offer a 30 day guarantee. If you're not happy with the School of Podasting I will refund your payment with no questions asked. You can join Risk Free.

                    ]]>6a764d7a5fb8c3a150f2df442ab4588bMon, 20 Oct 2014 04:00:00 -040037:13falsefull431431Zoom iQ5B - Podcasting is the Media - Podcast UniquenessChris Christensen is a winner in the 2014 Lowell Thomas Travel Journalism Competition, taking an Honorable Mention in the Travel Broadcast — Audio category for “Amateur Traveler: Travel to Flanders in Belgium” (http://europe.amateurtraveler.com/travel-flanders-belgium-travel- podcast/) on AmateurTraveler.com. The awards are named for Lowell Thomas, acclaimed broadcast journalist, prolific author and world explorer during five decades in journalism.

                    This is the 30th annual competition sponsored by the Society of American Travel Writers Foundation. Winners of the awards, the most prestigious in the field of travel journalism, were announced Sept. 16 at the SATW convention, held in Iceland. The competition drew 1,177 entries and was judged by members of the faculty at the University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill School of Journalism and Mass Communication. This year, the SATW Foundation presented 90 awards in 25 categories and nearly $20,000 in prize money to journalists. Since the first competition for work in 1984, the SATW Foundation has presented more than 2,100 awards and $420,000-plus in recognition of outstanding travel journalism.

                    In honoring work, the judges said:

                    "The Amateur Traveler podcast by Chris Christensen was well done. The first episode only featured narration by Christensen, which is challenging to produce. His incorporation of natural sound was a great addition to keep the show interesting and engaging. It offered both great historical context as well as important tips for travel to Flanders. The show was well produced and interesting".

                    Among other winners, Jill Schensul, senior writer for The Record of northern New Jersey, earned the title of Lowell Thomas Travel Journalist of the Year for a portfolio of her work in the past year. It is the third top title for Schensul, who over the years has won 29 Lowell Thomas awards for herself, and The Record travel section has taken 39 in total. National Geographic Traveler, Islands, Travel + Leisure and AFAR magazines are top media winners in 2014.

                    The Foundation distributes nearly $20,000 annually in prize money to individual winners. Donations by this year’s Underwriter, the Tourist Office for Flanders-Brussels, and many other supporters helped make the prizes possible. For more information about the awards, including a full list of winners and judges’ comments, and SATW, visit www.satwf.com andwww.satw.org.

                    Money Plan SOS Wins Plutus Award

                    Steve Stewart was nominated in the Best personal finance blog, and best debt reduction blog categories. Joe Saul-Sehy won for best financial blog (Joe was on the show this year talking co-hosts), and Steve won for the best debt reduction blog. The interesting thing is Steve's blog is just his "show notes" for his podcast. Congrats to both!

                    Portable Recording With Zoom iQ5B

                    I was Podcast Movement when I met Shawn Smith who had a bunch of microphones set up and was interviewing him. I went over and introduced myself. Shawn has gone out to help people answer the question, "What is the best way to record on the road." His is actively positioning himself as THE mobile recording person at http://www.themobilepro.net/

                    This was recorded on my iPhone using Boss Jock Studio and using Shawn's Zoom iQ5B microphone. It is a condenser microphone so it does pick up background noise. It has adjustable settings so you can pick how wide the stereo separation is. You will here Shawn and I go through some of the  settings on the microphone. It sounds good (and would work in a quiet place like any quiet place).

                    The FREE Ebook From Shwn:

                    28 pages of high-rez photos and links to all the road-tested apps and gear in each of the 5 Mobile Pro Podcast Set-Ups, pros & cons of each, best-use guide, and Mobile Pro tips plus 3 bonus set-ups. TheMobilePro.net

                    Question from Listeners

                    In a previous episode we spoke about Dragon Naturally Speaking and Ryan Parker

                    I just wanted to let you know that the Mac does have a dictation function and you can find that function in the system preferences file. It works pretty much just like Siri does. And yes you have to enunciate your punctuation.(It works really great!)

                    In fact I am voice typing this comment to you directly with no corrections. It actually works really fast. The only thing is you have to get used to using the program just like anything else. Okay I lied I did correct a few things. And you have to correct manually if you speak an incorrect word or it picks up punctuation incorrectly.

                    Here’s a great tutorial from YouTube for you and your audience: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lU7oiTTAxNkIt does not allow you to correct by voice which is one of the advantages of dragon speaking naturally. They have a Mac version called Dragon dictate that seems to work pretty well I have use that in the past.

                    Have a great day keep podcasting because we I’ll love you so much ha ha!

                    - -

                    Q: What kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus?

                    It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do.  My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes.

                    Thank you for your time I love your show. Caine Dorr   A: Caine Who likes Fiction books?. I did a quick search for "fiction book lovers" and came up with a few sites.   http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.   http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs   http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)   Figure out who your audience is, go there and make friends. then tell them about or mention your book. Podcast Reviews

                     by Filopastry88 from Australia on October 8, 2014

                    Dave gives amazing value every episode . so many great action things to do. Last 5 of 5 is top idea

                    Thanks so much for the reivews! You can add your review at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    Leave a review at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes

                    Join the Shcool of Podcasting

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/become-a-member

                    ]]>Chris Christensen is a winner in the 2014 Lowell Thomas Travel Journalism Competition, taking an Honorable Mention in the Travel Broadcast — Audio category for “Amateur Traveler: Travel to Flanders in Belgium” (http://europe.amateurtraveler.com/travel-flanders-belgium-travel- podcast/) on AmateurTraveler.com. The awards are named for Lowell Thomas, acclaimed broadcast journalist, prolific author and world explorer during five decades in journalism.

                    This is the 30th annual competition sponsored by the Society of American Travel Writers Foundation. Winners of the awards, the most prestigious in the field of travel journalism, were announced Sept. 16 at the SATW convention, held in Iceland. The competition drew 1,177 entries and was judged by members of the faculty at the University of North Carolina-Chapel Hill School of Journalism and Mass Communication. This year, the SATW Foundation presented 90 awards in 25 categories and nearly $20,000 in prize money to journalists. Since the first competition for work in 1984, the SATW Foundation has presented more than 2,100 awards and $420,000-plus in recognition of outstanding travel journalism.

                    In honoring work, the judges said:

                    "The Amateur Traveler podcast by Chris Christensen was well done. The first episode only featured narration by Christensen, which is challenging to produce. His incorporation of natural sound was a great addition to keep the show interesting and engaging. It offered both great historical context as well as important tips for travel to Flanders. The show was well produced and interesting".

                    Among other winners, Jill Schensul, senior writer for The Record of northern New Jersey, earned the title of Lowell Thomas Travel Journalist of the Year for a portfolio of her work in the past year. It is the third top title for Schensul, who over the years has won 29 Lowell Thomas awards for herself, and The Record travel section has taken 39 in total. National Geographic Traveler, Islands, Travel + Leisure and AFAR magazines are top media winners in 2014.

                    The Foundation distributes nearly $20,000 annually in prize money to individual winners. Donations by this year’s Underwriter, the Tourist Office for Flanders-Brussels, and many other supporters helped make the prizes possible. For more information about the awards, including a full list of winners and judges’ comments, and SATW, visit www.satwf.com andwww.satw.org.

                    Money Plan SOS Wins Plutus Award

                    Steve Stewart was nominated in the Best personal finance blog, and best debt reduction blog categories. Joe Saul-Sehy won for best financial blog (Joe was on the show this year talking co-hosts), and Steve won for the best debt reduction blog. The interesting thing is Steve's blog is just his "show notes" for his podcast. Congrats to both!

                    Portable Recording With Zoom iQ5B

                    I was Podcast Movement when I met Shawn Smith who had a bunch of microphones set up and was interviewing him. I went over and introduced myself. Shawn has gone out to help people answer the question, "What is the best way to record on the road." His is actively positioning himself as THE mobile recording person at http://www.themobilepro.net/

                    This was recorded on my iPhone using Boss Jock Studio and using Shawn's Zoom iQ5B microphone. It is a condenser microphone so it does pick up background noise. It has adjustable settings so you can pick how wide the stereo separation is. You will here Shawn and I go through some of the  settings on the microphone. It sounds good (and would work in a quiet place like any quiet place).

                    The FREE Ebook From Shwn:

                    28 pages of high-rez photos and links to all the road-tested apps and gear in each of the 5 Mobile Pro Podcast Set-Ups, pros & cons of each, best-use guide, and Mobile Pro tips plus 3 bonus set-ups. TheMobilePro.net

                    Question from Listeners

                    In a previous episode we spoke about Dragon Naturally Speaking and Ryan Parker

                    I just wanted to let you know that the Mac does have a dictation function and you can find that function in the system preferences file. It works pretty much just like Siri does. And yes you have to enunciate your punctuation.(It works really great!)

                    In fact I am voice typing this comment to you directly with no corrections. It actually works really fast. The only thing is you have to get used to using the program just like anything else. Okay I lied I did correct a few things. And you have to correct manually if you speak an incorrect word or it picks up punctuation incorrectly.

                    Here’s a great tutorial from YouTube for you and your audience: https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=lU7oiTTAxNkIt does not allow you to correct by voice which is one of the advantages of dragon speaking naturally. They have a Mac version called Dragon dictate that seems to work pretty well I have use that in the past.

                    Have a great day keep podcasting because we I’ll love you so much ha ha!

                    - -

                    Q: What kind of advice would you give to someone who's podcast was driven by fiction content (a bit like Scott Sigler but with no where near such an outgoing personality) and not interviews, or helping people, or a professional focus?

                    It seems that a lot of advice about podcasting is more geared toward all of those things that I mentioned above that I don't really do.  My latest episode has the most conversation I've done with the audience....ever and its only like seven minutes.

                    Thank you for your time I love your show. Caine Dorr   A: Caine Who likes Fiction books?. I did a quick search for "fiction book lovers" and came up with a few sites.   http://themindofafictionbooklover.tumblr.com/me is in the top 5 of Google for this search. Go read his blog, and leave comments. When somethng strikes you send him an email and start a conversation. Later ask him if he'd like to listen to your book. Be sure to have your signature with a link to your website so when you send him an email he will see your website.   http://www.thrall.org/booklovers/ Has all sorts of things about book clubs   http://www.booktalk.org/online-reading-group.html This is a huge forum (be careful not to spam here and read the rules of posting)   Figure out who your audience is, go there and make friends. then tell them about or mention your book. Podcast Reviews

                     by Filopastry88 from Australia on October 8, 2014

                    Dave gives amazing value every episode . so many great action things to do. Last 5 of 5 is top idea

                    Thanks so much for the reivews! You can add your review at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                    Leave a review at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/itunes

                    Join the Shcool of Podcasting

                    www.schoolofpodcasting.com/become-a-member

                    ]]>24fd10417135cfbfcf6fdab7bf9b4ed5Mon, 13 Oct 2014 04:00:00 -040053:25falsefull430430Because of my Podcast - I'm the Director of PodcastingDo you feel that you podcasting may be too hard, or complicated? Do you feel that nobody would listen? Are you nervous? Maybe a little scared? Well today we are going to talk you off the ledge.
                    It's Time To Get Uncomfortable

                    I've been appointed as the Director of Podcasting at the new media expo. This means I will help choose who speaks at the New Media Expo in April of 2015. This is a huge opportunity. It's also kind of scary. This means someone who really wants to speak won't get to, and I'm going to disappoint them. It also means I will get to meet a whole bunch of people, and get additional insights into podcasting, blogging, video, and more. It's a huge opportunity for me, and I'm blessed to be chosen. Today I walk you through stepping out the boat of comfort and why its a good thing to be scared and uncomfortable. We don't like to move when we are comfortable, but life is moving fast, and if we don't move we are actually going backwards in some instances. So I share some things that I was scared and had to work through. As a teenager I was very shy around strangers. My mother died when I was 24 and I had to go tell my Grandma she had outlived her child I had to work my way though college. It took twice as long, but I got my degree. I spent myself into bankruptcy trying to have a child with my first wife. Later we divorced. These are hard things to push through, but you come out better on the other side. Sometimes we need to ask, "What is the worst thing that could happen? When you get a dog, you're not tihnking, "Hey someday in the future we are all going to be sad," but its true. The pros outweigh the cons. Do I dread telling people they didn't get accepted? Sure. You have to take the good with the bad. For me, the benefits of podcasting outweigh the negative. Special thanks to Rob Walch (libsyn.com), Todd Cochrane (Blubrry.com) Rob Greenlee (podcastone.com) for recommending me to Rick Calvert of the New Media Expo. 

                      Last 5 in 5 With Lou Mongello [15:47]

                    Today we get some podcast recommendations from Lou Mongello who produces the WDW Radio podcast (A great podcast about Walt Disney World). I interviewed Lou back on the Power of Podcasting podcast that told his story about how he left his job as a lawyer and now does podcasting full time. Here are the last five podcast Lou listened to.   The Podcast Report From Paul Colligan Starve the Doubts by Jared Easley Podcast Answer Man - Cliff Ravenscraft Smart Passive Income - Pat Flynn Social Media Examiner - Michael Stelzner

                    Saving For Events

                    Going to events is a great way to fast forward your networking and knowledge. It can add up when you start thinking about travel expenses in addition to the price of attendance. One way is to look at your bank and see if they have a savings plan that will automatically move money into an account for you. I Use CaptialOne 360 (which actually lets you earn interest) and once a month it transfers money from my "normal" checking account into the online account. By using an account that you don't look at you are less likely to spend it.

                    Mike Russel Launches Audio Producter Masters [20:34]

                    Mike Russel of Music Radio Creative (the people behind my intro singers), has released a book on Adobe Audition in addition to an online community. The community has great tutorials as well as each month you get cool sound files for music beds, swishes, zaps, etc. Check it out at www.audioproductionmasters.com/sop If you're more of a reader he has also released a new kindle book filled with his massive knowledge of Adobe Audition.  

                    Over Coffee Podcast Appearance [24:00]

                    I was interviewed by Dott on the Over Coffee podcast. Check it out

                    Cleveland Podcasters Meetup [26:32]

                    If you plan on doing your own meetup, be sure to provide food, and have an agenda. The good news is there is no better way to connect then face to face. It was awesome to see everyone.

                    FREE PIZZA (Because of My Podcast Part Two)

                    Steve Stewart was in town so we went out for Pizza, and how weird was it that Philip Keller of the Blind Faith Live podcast. We had our own little meetup, and Phillip left. When we went to pay for our bill Phillip had already taken care of or bill. How cool is that? It was great to have two of my favorite people meet each other. Check out Phillip's show at www.blindfaithlive.com (real people, real miracles) also check out Steve at www.moneyplansos.com

                    ]]>Do you feel that you podcasting may be too hard, or complicated? Do you feel that nobody would listen? Are you nervous? Maybe a little scared? Well today we are going to talk you off the ledge.
                    It's Time To Get Uncomfortable

                    I've been appointed as the Director of Podcasting at the new media expo. This means I will help choose who speaks at the New Media Expo in April of 2015. This is a huge opportunity. It's also kind of scary. This means someone who really wants to speak won't get to, and I'm going to disappoint them. It also means I will get to meet a whole bunch of people, and get additional insights into podcasting, blogging, video, and more. It's a huge opportunity for me, and I'm blessed to be chosen. Today I walk you through stepping out the boat of comfort and why its a good thing to be scared and uncomfortable. We don't like to move when we are comfortable, but life is moving fast, and if we don't move we are actually going backwards in some instances. So I share some things that I was scared and had to work through. As a teenager I was very shy around strangers. My mother died when I was 24 and I had to go tell my Grandma she had outlived her child I had to work my way though college. It took twice as long, but I got my degree. I spent myself into bankruptcy trying to have a child with my first wife. Later we divorced. These are hard things to push through, but you come out better on the other side. Sometimes we need to ask, "What is the worst thing that could happen? When you get a dog, you're not tihnking, "Hey someday in the future we are all going to be sad," but its true. The pros outweigh the cons. Do I dread telling people they didn't get accepted? Sure. You have to take the good with the bad. For me, the benefits of podcasting outweigh the negative. Special thanks to Rob Walch (libsyn.com), Todd Cochrane (Blubrry.com) Rob Greenlee (podcastone.com) for recommending me to Rick Calvert of the New Media Expo. 

                      Last 5 in 5 With Lou Mongello [15:47]

                    Today we get some podcast recommendations from Lou Mongello who produces the WDW Radio podcast (A great podcast about Walt Disney World). I interviewed Lou back on the Power of Podcasting podcast that told his story about how he left his job as a lawyer and now does podcasting full time. Here are the last five podcast Lou listened to.   The Podcast Report From Paul Colligan Starve the Doubts by Jared Easley Podcast Answer Man - Cliff Ravenscraft Smart Passive Income - Pat Flynn Social Media Examiner - Michael Stelzner

                    Saving For Events

                    Going to events is a great way to fast forward your networking and knowledge. It can add up when you start thinking about travel expenses in addition to the price of attendance. One way is to look at your bank and see if they have a savings plan that will automatically move money into an account for you. I Use CaptialOne 360 (which actually lets you earn interest) and once a month it transfers money from my "normal" checking account into the online account. By using an account that you don't look at you are less likely to spend it.

                    Mike Russel Launches Audio Producter Masters [20:34]

                    Mike Russel of Music Radio Creative (the people behind my intro singers), has released a book on Adobe Audition in addition to an online community. The community has great tutorials as well as each month you get cool sound files for music beds, swishes, zaps, etc. Check it out at www.audioproductionmasters.com/sop If you're more of a reader he has also released a new kindle book filled with his massive knowledge of Adobe Audition.  

                    Over Coffee Podcast Appearance [24:00]

                    I was interviewed by Dott on the Over Coffee podcast. Check it out

                    Cleveland Podcasters Meetup [26:32]

                    If you plan on doing your own meetup, be sure to provide food, and have an agenda. The good news is there is no better way to connect then face to face. It was awesome to see everyone.

                    FREE PIZZA (Because of My Podcast Part Two)

                    Steve Stewart was in town so we went out for Pizza, and how weird was it that Philip Keller of the Blind Faith Live podcast. We had our own little meetup, and Phillip left. When we went to pay for our bill Phillip had already taken care of or bill. How cool is that? It was great to have two of my favorite people meet each other. Check out Phillip's show at www.blindfaithlive.com (real people, real miracles) also check out Steve at www.moneyplansos.com

                    ]]>4e05406d6895199fd2eed52306291c7aMon, 06 Oct 2014 04:00:00 -040036:54falsefull429429Tackling Show Notes - How Long Should My Notes Be?One of the most hated steps of podcasting is writing show notes. They are a necessary evil and they help search engines like Google and Bing find you. So how long should my show notes be? We will take a look at that question today.

                     

                    Podcasting is up to 13 Million Listeners a Day

                     

                    5% of Americans (so this number is bigger in reality) listen to podcasts every day. That would be 13 million people. This video explains more.

                     

                    Dragon Naturally Speaking Review

                     

                    I tried Dragon Naturally Speaking back when they were on version 6. It was impressive. I received some questions about creating show notes, and more and more people are having them transcribed. That can get a little costly at $1 a minute. So would something like Dragon Naturally speaking solve this issue for those who don't like to type? My answer is maybe. I used a transcribe feature where I put an audio file into the software and it typed out over 10,000 words (13 pages). From my test, this software is around 90% accurate. The more you use it the better it gets as it learns your voice. The bad news is it doesn't do a bit of punctuation. How could it? It doesn't understand what it is transcribing. So the time you save by not having to type is now used by going in and adding punctuation.

                     

                    Now if you are a "hunt and pack" kind of typist, this might be for you. It took me 10 minutes to go through an interactive tutorial and I was ready to go full force with the software. You can use it not only to type what you are saying, but to open programs, click buttons and more. Can I get up to speed this fast learning the keyboard? I don't think so. I will say, talking your punctuation is not something that comes naturally, but it does force you to finalize your thought before speaking (which I think we all can use).

                     

                    The software is smart as if you say something and it types if wrong, you can say "Select (whatever the word is) and then go through a number of choices to edit it. Then there are more commands to tell it to go back to where you were. It's pretty slick. If you are in a chat room you could easily just speak your words and have them show up.

                     

                    What does it cost? The premium version (that allows you to transcribe prerecorded files is $199 at amazon (affiliate link). The basic version is $49 that does the live transcription.

                     

                    Do I Need Show Notes?

                     

                    In a quick word yes. At its core, a podcast is media in a blog post. The question then becomes:

                     

                    How Many Words Do I Need in My Podcast Show Notes?

                     

                    The Wordpress Plugin Wordpress SEO Recommend at least 300.

                     

                    Some reports who that you need 2000 words. WOA! What is this based on? A report that show that most of the top ranking pages had over 2000 words. It makes perfect sense. Google indexes every part of your site. The more it finds, the more of a trail you leave behind to be found.

                     

                    You can also point at Seth Godin who has one of the most popular blogs on the planet is short and to the point. His post None of this makes sense was 125 words.

                     

                    When I interviewed Pat Flynn, we spoke about his writing style. He often writes posts that can be seen as a definitive source on that subject. His original posts helped people pass an architecture exam. They were that detailed.

                     

                    Things to Consider When Writing Show Notes

                     

                    Your audience. It always starts with your audience. Some of your audience may want the full story. Some of them may just want the bullet points.

                    What is the purpose of your show notes? Pat's original posts were his notes on passing the exam. Maybe your notes are just a summary with links to resources.

                    What is the subject? If you hate typing show notes, then one thing you can do to save time is identify your subject and stick to it.

                    Most people skim when they read. Break it up in to bite sized chunks and using different heading tags. These can carry more Google juice.

                    Use images to break up the intimidating screen of non-stop text.

                    How to Speed Things Up

                     

                    1. Type it once.

                     

                    Use tools like Google Docs, Evernote, OneNote, etc to capture your ideas. Then later when you put together your show notes you can copy and paste from your resources.

                     

                    2. If you are pasting, paste as plain text.

                     

                    Programs like Microsoft Word can put weird characters into your site that can cause issues and headaches.

                     

                    3. Listen to your show at 2X

                     

                    If you are a person who creates their show notes after they record, listen to your show at 2X. If you are listening on a Windows machine, Windows media player can speed the audio/video. While you are listening in windows media player, you can right click on the image and choose Enhancements > Play Speed and adjust it up to 2X.

                     

                    4. Check to See if Your Recorder Can Create Marks

                     

                    Dragon Naturally SpeakingIf you are recording into a portable recorder, some of them like the Zoom H5 allow you to press a button and "Mark" your audio. This allows you later to go in and jump to a specific section. This can make it easier for you to remember what you spoke about (although you should have things identified before you press record).

                     

                    5. If You Can't Type - Speak

                     

                    There are tools such as Dragon Naturally Speaking that have come a long way in their accuracy. If you can type, it is probably easier to type. When you use a voice to text converter you have to speak your punctuation. You would say something like, "This is my sentence period." The screen would should "This is my sentence." (where the word period has been turned into a period).

                     

                    6. Farm It Out - Transcriptions 

                     

                    The typical rate for having your podcast subscribed is around $1 a minute. This means a 60 minute podcast costs $60. Keep in mind you then have to edit the text as you typically don't write the way you speak. Keep this in mind when you see services like Show Notes Made Easy. I interviewed Lara and she quoted me $60 an episode (her prices may change). While it may be tempting to use someone overseas for transcription you may want someone how has your language (English in my case) as their primary language. You can find transcription services in our resource section

                     

                    Here are some resources I used

                     

                    Quick Sprout

                     

                    Forbes

                     

                    How Many Words Are In Your Show Notes?

                     

                    Do you have any tips on writing show notes? How many words do you typically put in your posts? (leave a comment below).

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today JOIN HERE

                     

                     

                    ]]>One of the most hated steps of podcasting is writing show notes. They are a necessary evil and they help search engines like Google and Bing find you. So how long should my show notes be? We will take a look at that question today.

                     

                    Podcasting is up to 13 Million Listeners a Day

                     

                    5% of Americans (so this number is bigger in reality) listen to podcasts every day. That would be 13 million people. This video explains more.

                     

                    Dragon Naturally Speaking Review

                     

                    I tried Dragon Naturally Speaking back when they were on version 6. It was impressive. I received some questions about creating show notes, and more and more people are having them transcribed. That can get a little costly at $1 a minute. So would something like Dragon Naturally speaking solve this issue for those who don't like to type? My answer is maybe. I used a transcribe feature where I put an audio file into the software and it typed out over 10,000 words (13 pages). From my test, this software is around 90% accurate. The more you use it the better it gets as it learns your voice. The bad news is it doesn't do a bit of punctuation. How could it? It doesn't understand what it is transcribing. So the time you save by not having to type is now used by going in and adding punctuation.

                     

                    Now if you are a "hunt and pack" kind of typist, this might be for you. It took me 10 minutes to go through an interactive tutorial and I was ready to go full force with the software. You can use it not only to type what you are saying, but to open programs, click buttons and more. Can I get up to speed this fast learning the keyboard? I don't think so. I will say, talking your punctuation is not something that comes naturally, but it does force you to finalize your thought before speaking (which I think we all can use).

                     

                    The software is smart as if you say something and it types if wrong, you can say "Select (whatever the word is) and then go through a number of choices to edit it. Then there are more commands to tell it to go back to where you were. It's pretty slick. If you are in a chat room you could easily just speak your words and have them show up.

                     

                    What does it cost? The premium version (that allows you to transcribe prerecorded files is $199 at amazon (affiliate link). The basic version is $49 that does the live transcription.

                     

                    Do I Need Show Notes?

                     

                    In a quick word yes. At its core, a podcast is media in a blog post. The question then becomes:

                     

                    How Many Words Do I Need in My Podcast Show Notes?

                     

                    The Wordpress Plugin Wordpress SEO Recommend at least 300.

                     

                    Some reports who that you need 2000 words. WOA! What is this based on? A report that show that most of the top ranking pages had over 2000 words. It makes perfect sense. Google indexes every part of your site. The more it finds, the more of a trail you leave behind to be found.

                     

                    You can also point at Seth Godin who has one of the most popular blogs on the planet is short and to the point. His post None of this makes sense was 125 words.

                     

                    When I interviewed Pat Flynn, we spoke about his writing style. He often writes posts that can be seen as a definitive source on that subject. His original posts helped people pass an architecture exam. They were that detailed.

                     

                    Things to Consider When Writing Show Notes

                     

                    Your audience. It always starts with your audience. Some of your audience may want the full story. Some of them may just want the bullet points.

                    What is the purpose of your show notes? Pat's original posts were his notes on passing the exam. Maybe your notes are just a summary with links to resources.

                    What is the subject? If you hate typing show notes, then one thing you can do to save time is identify your subject and stick to it.

                    Most people skim when they read. Break it up in to bite sized chunks and using different heading tags. These can carry more Google juice.

                    Use images to break up the intimidating screen of non-stop text.

                    How to Speed Things Up

                     

                    1. Type it once.

                     

                    Use tools like Google Docs, Evernote, OneNote, etc to capture your ideas. Then later when you put together your show notes you can copy and paste from your resources.

                     

                    2. If you are pasting, paste as plain text.

                     

                    Programs like Microsoft Word can put weird characters into your site that can cause issues and headaches.

                     

                    3. Listen to your show at 2X

                     

                    If you are a person who creates their show notes after they record, listen to your show at 2X. If you are listening on a Windows machine, Windows media player can speed the audio/video. While you are listening in windows media player, you can right click on the image and choose Enhancements > Play Speed and adjust it up to 2X.

                     

                    4. Check to See if Your Recorder Can Create Marks

                     

                    Dragon Naturally SpeakingIf you are recording into a portable recorder, some of them like the Zoom H5 allow you to press a button and "Mark" your audio. This allows you later to go in and jump to a specific section. This can make it easier for you to remember what you spoke about (although you should have things identified before you press record).

                     

                    5. If You Can't Type - Speak

                     

                    There are tools such as Dragon Naturally Speaking that have come a long way in their accuracy. If you can type, it is probably easier to type. When you use a voice to text converter you have to speak your punctuation. You would say something like, "This is my sentence period." The screen would should "This is my sentence." (where the word period has been turned into a period).

                     

                    6. Farm It Out - Transcriptions 

                     

                    The typical rate for having your podcast subscribed is around $1 a minute. This means a 60 minute podcast costs $60. Keep in mind you then have to edit the text as you typically don't write the way you speak. Keep this in mind when you see services like Show Notes Made Easy. I interviewed Lara and she quoted me $60 an episode (her prices may change). While it may be tempting to use someone overseas for transcription you may want someone how has your language (English in my case) as their primary language. You can find transcription services in our resource section

                     

                    Here are some resources I used

                     

                    Quick Sprout

                     

                    Forbes

                     

                    How Many Words Are In Your Show Notes?

                     

                    Do you have any tips on writing show notes? How many words do you typically put in your posts? (leave a comment below).

                     

                    Start Podcasting Today JOIN HERE

                     

                     

                    ]]>24b61131979d0232004c9507696ea258Mon, 29 Sep 2014 04:00:00 -040052:02falsefull428428Tools To Connect With and Grow Your Audience / Gaming The SystemCall in with your comment 888-563-3228
                    Podcast Album Art is Now The Size of Your Head [2:00]

                    Apple has released a new spec for album artwork is now can be a minimum of 1400X1400 the recommended size is now 2048X2048 jpg Apple is “not” recommending you save your image art in .png (portable network graphics) format, but if you can’t resist .png needs to be RGB (red, green and blue color model) only.  There are sties like pixlr.com that you can use to try and resize your current album artwork.

                    Podcast Rewind [4:05]

                    I appeared on the Internet Marketing show (By Site Visibility) one of the longest running and top rated Internet Marketing Podcasts. Check it out here I also appeared on the Gary Leland Show where we talk about using Podcasting with your business. Check it out here

                    Simple Podcast Press - Grow Your List and Subscriptions [7:25]

                    Today we interview Hani Mourra the man behind the Simple Podcast Press plugin for Wordpress. We all want podcasting to be easy, we want to grow our audience, we want subscribers, we want promotion, and this tool does all of that with a 2 minute install. You can add links to itunes, stitcher, soundcloud, as well as a download button. You can also have button for people to subscribe to your email list (so if you're using someone like Aweber or Mail Chimp). With these tools you can boost your subscribers and your email list. Another great feature is the ability to make clickable tweets with a few mouse clicks. This can make it super easy for your audience to share your show. The plugin will also help create easy to remember links like www.schoolofpodcasting.com/427 that link to the episode (again making it simple to share) Lastly if provides the latest reviews from iTunes right in your dashboard. I was worried as I am already using PowerPress (for my player) and Pretty link (for my easy to remember links). The plugin does not have any conflicts with these plugins and in the case of PowerPress can easily switch the player on your website and all the back catalog. This means by installing this plugin you can an email sign up on every episode. That's pretty cool when you are someone like me who has over 400 episodes. The best part is if you're not happy with it, you can get a refund as there is a 30 day money back guarantee

                    Want a Coupon For the School of Podcasting? [16:24]

                    I am testing a new system called Callloop.com which is a tool to build a list of people you can text (or you can deliver automated marketing information - like a coupon over their phone). All you have to do is text the word podcast to 38470 and you will receive a coupon for the School of Podcasting. You can start with a free program and only pay .05 for the messages you send. If you want a keyword (podcast in my case) it's $10 a month. There are other plans available at callloop.com If you'd rather have people sign up for your email list check out joinbytext.com which is $19 a month but people can send a keyword (in my case podcast ) to 66866 and they will be asked to subscribe to my email list. If you like these kind of tools and fun way to grow your audience, check out my Weekly Web Tools Podcast

                      Last 5 in 5 [20:05]

                    Today we have a last 5 in 5 from a regular person in the chat room of the Ask the Podcast Show Tommy G Kendrick who runs the Actors Talk Podcast The Unmistakable Creative Podcast411 School of Podcasting Podcaster's Roundtable This is Your Life

                    Podcast Review Swapping [ 22:05]

                    I published an article on Podcaster News I made a couple of points:

                    1. You only have one change to make a first impression
                    2. When you start, your publish may need some polishing
                    3. Sometimes getting to the front of the line before your ready is a bad thing in the long run - see American Idol
                    4. Good marketing only allows people to find out you have a poor product faster
                    5. Remember word of mouth works both ways
                    6. When you do things SOLEY in the name of profit< it"s typically not good for the consumer.
                    7. Review Swapping Damages the reputation of New and Noteworth
                    
                    ]]>Call in with your comment 888-563-3228
                    Podcast Album Art is Now The Size of Your Head [2:00]

                    Apple has released a new spec for album artwork is now can be a minimum of 1400X1400 the recommended size is now 2048X2048 jpg Apple is “not” recommending you save your image art in .png (portable network graphics) format, but if you can’t resist .png needs to be RGB (red, green and blue color model) only.  There are sties like pixlr.com that you can use to try and resize your current album artwork.

                    Podcast Rewind [4:05]

                    I appeared on the Internet Marketing show (By Site Visibility) one of the longest running and top rated Internet Marketing Podcasts. Check it out here I also appeared on the Gary Leland Show where we talk about using Podcasting with your business. Check it out here

                    Simple Podcast Press - Grow Your List and Subscriptions [7:25]

                    Today we interview Hani Mourra the man behind the Simple Podcast Press plugin for Wordpress. We all want podcasting to be easy, we want to grow our audience, we want subscribers, we want promotion, and this tool does all of that with a 2 minute install. You can add links to itunes, stitcher, soundcloud, as well as a download button. You can also have button for people to subscribe to your email list (so if you're using someone like Aweber or Mail Chimp). With these tools you can boost your subscribers and your email list. Another great feature is the ability to make clickable tweets with a few mouse clicks. This can make it super easy for your audience to share your show. The plugin will also help create easy to remember links like www.schoolofpodcasting.com/427 that link to the episode (again making it simple to share) Lastly if provides the latest reviews from iTunes right in your dashboard. I was worried as I am already using PowerPress (for my player) and Pretty link (for my easy to remember links). The plugin does not have any conflicts with these plugins and in the case of PowerPress can easily switch the player on your website and all the back catalog. This means by installing this plugin you can an email sign up on every episode. That's pretty cool when you are someone like me who has over 400 episodes. The best part is if you're not happy with it, you can get a refund as there is a 30 day money back guarantee

                    Want a Coupon For the School of Podcasting? [16:24]

                    I am testing a new system called Callloop.com which is a tool to build a list of people you can text (or you can deliver automated marketing information - like a coupon over their phone). All you have to do is text the word podcast to 38470 and you will receive a coupon for the School of Podcasting. You can start with a free program and only pay .05 for the messages you send. If you want a keyword (podcast in my case) it's $10 a month. There are other plans available at callloop.com If you'd rather have people sign up for your email list check out joinbytext.com which is $19 a month but people can send a keyword (in my case podcast ) to 66866 and they will be asked to subscribe to my email list. If you like these kind of tools and fun way to grow your audience, check out my Weekly Web Tools Podcast

                      Last 5 in 5 [20:05]

                    Today we have a last 5 in 5 from a regular person in the chat room of the Ask the Podcast Show Tommy G Kendrick who runs the Actors Talk Podcast The Unmistakable Creative Podcast411 School of Podcasting Podcaster's Roundtable This is Your Life

                    Podcast Review Swapping [ 22:05]

                    I published an article on Podcaster News I made a couple of points:

                    1. You only have one change to make a first impression
                    2. When you start, your publish may need some polishing
                    3. Sometimes getting to the front of the line before your ready is a bad thing in the long run - see American Idol
                    4. Good marketing only allows people to find out you have a poor product faster
                    5. Remember word of mouth works both ways
                    6. When you do things SOLEY in the name of profit< it"s typically not good for the consumer.
                    7. Review Swapping Damages the reputation of New and Noteworth
                    
                    ]]>7cfb1f2cf4a374053942de2e2d79d49dMon, 22 Sep 2014 04:00:00 -040049:47falsefull4274274 Years Later His Podcast Pays The Bill - Rob Cesternino Interview4c7e0ea91dc9848c96f74713d37f6621Mon, 15 Sep 2014 04:00:00 -040055:16falsefull425425The Power of a Connection - Jared Easley On Growing Your Podcast AudienceSeptember 30th 2104 is National Podcast Day where we all put the spotlight on Podcast Movement and help turn more people on to listening to podcast, creating new podcasts, and general helping podcast awareness raise up a few notches.
                    Using the Roland R-05

                    John from http://www.letstalkmetaldetectingandtreasurehunting.com/ wants to know how I use this device? When I recorded at Podcast Movement. When I use the built in microphone I try to use my guests as sound shields (putting them between the mic and the sounds). I kept the microphone about chest level. I always listen so I can hear what is being recorded.

                    Promo For Podcast Review Show

                    Dave Jackson and Erik K Johnson will go over your show from top to bottom and use their 30 cobined years of creating content to help you spotlight what you are doing right, and help you tweak those things that need help. You can get reviewed by going to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration [7:55]

                    To we focus on one thing: growing your audience. We have Jared Easley author of the book Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration. You might also recognize that name as we was one of the organizers of the HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL Podcast movement and also has a really good podcast called Starve the Doubts. Today we hear how Jared stared out by noticing others and seeing how they could help them (looking for nothing in return). He didn't know what he was doing all the time, but that didn't stop him. When he doubt, he could always find someone and ask some questions.   I first started listening to his podcast before Podcast Movement. I liked this show. I met Matt Lovell at the event, and he mentioned how he was going to be in Cleveland soon. I toll him to look me up. He did. We did and he sat in on a recording o the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do live on Saturday Mornings. On the way to breakfast he told me a story of how he had reached out to a podcast host, and the host had called him on the phone. The podcaster? Jared Easley. Does this mean that you have to call all of your listeners to grow your audience? No. If you have the time, you could. We talk about using teleconferencing to connect live with your audience (especially helpful if they are not up to speed on webinars). Jared mentioned FreeConferencing.com and Dave like uberconference.com. Its not doing LARGE things that will grow your audience. In many cases its the little things you do that have the most impact. What if you impacted 5 people a week. What would that do over the span of a year? You could have 60 people who have true connection with you and enjoy telling people about your show. As the old commercial goes, "And they told two friends, and they told two friends.."

                    Matt's Story - Permission To Chat? [31:00]

                    Matt Lovel had just found Jared's podcast, he tweeted about it to his friends. He asked what their favorite episode of Starve the Doubts was. People came out of the woodwork with suggestions and one person was the host Jared Easley. Jared asked (via twitter) if they would like to move to the phone, and 2.5 hours later their phone call ended. One of the cool things about podcasting is people who like your show are more than likely LIKE YOU. This means you will probably connect with people who listen to your show. In this instance Matt and Jared talked about life goals, etc and Matt explained how he was moving between jobs. Jared new someone who was looking for Matt's skills. When I say you can have an impact on your listener's lives, I don't mean that you will find them work that pays them more and changes your quality of living, but we ca now say, "It could happen." Find Matt's Podcast at www.mindingthegap.com

                    Start Your Podcast Today - Join the School of Podcasting

                    Start Podcasting Today

                     ]]>September 30th 2104 is National Podcast Day where we all put the spotlight on Podcast Movement and help turn more people on to listening to podcast, creating new podcasts, and general helping podcast awareness raise up a few notches.
                    Using the Roland R-05

                    John from http://www.letstalkmetaldetectingandtreasurehunting.com/ wants to know how I use this device? When I recorded at Podcast Movement. When I use the built in microphone I try to use my guests as sound shields (putting them between the mic and the sounds). I kept the microphone about chest level. I always listen so I can hear what is being recorded.

                    Promo For Podcast Review Show

                    Dave Jackson and Erik K Johnson will go over your show from top to bottom and use their 30 cobined years of creating content to help you spotlight what you are doing right, and help you tweak those things that need help. You can get reviewed by going to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration [7:55]

                    To we focus on one thing: growing your audience. We have Jared Easley author of the book Podcasting Good To Great How to Grow your Audience through Collaboration. You might also recognize that name as we was one of the organizers of the HIGHLY SUCCESSFUL Podcast movement and also has a really good podcast called Starve the Doubts. Today we hear how Jared stared out by noticing others and seeing how they could help them (looking for nothing in return). He didn't know what he was doing all the time, but that didn't stop him. When he doubt, he could always find someone and ask some questions.   I first started listening to his podcast before Podcast Movement. I liked this show. I met Matt Lovell at the event, and he mentioned how he was going to be in Cleveland soon. I toll him to look me up. He did. We did and he sat in on a recording o the Ask the Podcast Coach show that I do live on Saturday Mornings. On the way to breakfast he told me a story of how he had reached out to a podcast host, and the host had called him on the phone. The podcaster? Jared Easley. Does this mean that you have to call all of your listeners to grow your audience? No. If you have the time, you could. We talk about using teleconferencing to connect live with your audience (especially helpful if they are not up to speed on webinars). Jared mentioned FreeConferencing.com and Dave like uberconference.com. Its not doing LARGE things that will grow your audience. In many cases its the little things you do that have the most impact. What if you impacted 5 people a week. What would that do over the span of a year? You could have 60 people who have true connection with you and enjoy telling people about your show. As the old commercial goes, "And they told two friends, and they told two friends.."

                    Matt's Story - Permission To Chat? [31:00]

                    Matt Lovel had just found Jared's podcast, he tweeted about it to his friends. He asked what their favorite episode of Starve the Doubts was. People came out of the woodwork with suggestions and one person was the host Jared Easley. Jared asked (via twitter) if they would like to move to the phone, and 2.5 hours later their phone call ended. One of the cool things about podcasting is people who like your show are more than likely LIKE YOU. This means you will probably connect with people who listen to your show. In this instance Matt and Jared talked about life goals, etc and Matt explained how he was moving between jobs. Jared new someone who was looking for Matt's skills. When I say you can have an impact on your listener's lives, I don't mean that you will find them work that pays them more and changes your quality of living, but we ca now say, "It could happen." Find Matt's Podcast at www.mindingthegap.com

                    Start Your Podcast Today - Join the School of Podcasting

                    Start Podcasting Today

                     ]]>370ae73d1684958a8fab34004b71fafdMon, 08 Sep 2014 04:00:00 -040057:16falsefull426426The One Thing That's Stopping You From PodcastingI have people who want to start podcasting and they have an idea of what to talk about, they have the money to buy equipment, but still they won't start podcasting. Today we talk about why, and what you can do to get over it.
                    Because of My Podcast I  Spoke in Front of 20,000 People [2:30]

                    Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun podcast and the Motor Cycle Radio got to speak at an event in New York and got to share the stage with non other than Donald Trump. How cool is that? Check out Kenn's book, "Black Man with a Gun." We have spoken with Kenn before. He once helped a listener who was thinking of committing suicide. He got to speak about the rights of people and have dinner with some millionaires. Shalom Baby! You can find all of Kenn's podcasts at www.blanchardmediagroup.com 

                    Last 5 in 5 [4:50]

                    This was recorded on the floor of Podcast Movement with Jeremy and Taylor from Final Clock Out podcast. They show that there are more ways to make money besides the 9-5. Taylor's Chae Jarvis Audio Podcast Bullet Proof Radio Smart Passive Income  London Real Super Fast Business Jeremy's Ask Pat Kick Ass Life Achieve Your Goals Podcast Answer Man  Marketing Lifestyle Tim Perris 

                    Podcast Rewind [11:45]

                    I appeared on The Podcast Report Talking Podcasting stats with Paul Colligan Personal Branding show with Bernard Kelvin Clive (from Ghana ) Thanks to : by Garrettent44614 from USA on August 28, 2014 So far I've listened to every episode in the last 4 weeks and I have to say that this podcast has it all, Audio Quality, Content Quality, and Dave Jackson definitely brings the perfect personality to the table when it comes to how the podcast is produced. Thanks a ton Dave, Keep up the good work!!! Learn podcasting and have fun doing so! by SteveW928 from Canada on August 23, 2014 Dave not only has the heart of a teacher, but he brings his great sense of humor in to keep it fun as well. School of Podcasting is a one-of-a-kind educational experience where you'll not only learn great details about podcasting and the industry, but you'll also learn about hosting, equipment, software, hardware gadgets, etc. as Dave loves to try a bit of everything and give you his opinion on how well it really works. And, as mentioned above, he's a hoot to listen to. For the latest iTunes Reviews. By reviewing the show and rating it, you help us get more exposure. WRITE A REVIEW I learned of these reviews by using My Podcast reviews

                    The School of Podcasting Went over 1,000,000 Downloads This Month! [18:50]

                    Thanks to everyone who has listened over the year. I am humbled by this number. http://youtu.be/4BUXd2y1wEc You can still here my first episode.

                    Is Fear Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast?

                    The answer I'm hearing more and more is how people are trying to get over their "jitters" to start recording your podcast. When we launch a podcast we go into areas that we have never gone before, and that will make us nervous. It's normal. You're going to hate your voice. That's normal. I know that fear can really become a factor so here are some thought to help you face the fears of starting a podcast.

                    1. Its not live.

                    You can record it once, twice, three times before releasing it. Just because you record it doesn't mean you have to release it to the public.

                    2. Editing is your friend

                    If it's not perfect, you can edit out the part that need help. And you can always record it again.

                    3. Why Would people listen to me?

                    Remember you don't have to know everything, you just have to know more than your listener. Or if you don't know anything make it a journey podcast. I'm sure President Obama feels this way when he puts on his tie. I have never felt I could sing. Mainly because my brother told me at an early age. It stung. I sing in most of the bands I play in, but its usually the really high stuff and I have to wear a size smaller underwear to hit the high notes. But I was shocked when my friend asked me to play and sing at his wedding. I did, and I got huge compliments. Everyone had heard me scream on stage, but they had never heard me sing. It turns out I'm not half bad.

                    4. What's the worst that could happen?

                    If it's really bad, you can always pull it off the Internet. Remember, when you first start there won't be much of an audience (so there isn't much to be embarrassed about ). Try this: instead of convincing yourself to believe the worst about something you fear, try imagining the best. You might make someone's day. You might inspire to change their life for the better. You might inspire a future customer .  When a podcast show fails, there are always lessons to be learned. Many very successful podcasters are on their second (third) show because the first one tanked.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Joe Hicks and the Above Average Show  The Creative Penn Podcast Canva Image Editor

                    ]]>I have people who want to start podcasting and they have an idea of what to talk about, they have the money to buy equipment, but still they won't start podcasting. Today we talk about why, and what you can do to get over it.
                    Because of My Podcast I  Spoke in Front of 20,000 People [2:30]

                    Kenn Blanchard of the Black Man with a Gun podcast and the Motor Cycle Radio got to speak at an event in New York and got to share the stage with non other than Donald Trump. How cool is that? Check out Kenn's book, "Black Man with a Gun." We have spoken with Kenn before. He once helped a listener who was thinking of committing suicide. He got to speak about the rights of people and have dinner with some millionaires. Shalom Baby! You can find all of Kenn's podcasts at www.blanchardmediagroup.com 

                    Last 5 in 5 [4:50]

                    This was recorded on the floor of Podcast Movement with Jeremy and Taylor from Final Clock Out podcast. They show that there are more ways to make money besides the 9-5. Taylor's Chae Jarvis Audio Podcast Bullet Proof Radio Smart Passive Income  London Real Super Fast Business Jeremy's Ask Pat Kick Ass Life Achieve Your Goals Podcast Answer Man  Marketing Lifestyle Tim Perris 

                    Podcast Rewind [11:45]

                    I appeared on The Podcast Report Talking Podcasting stats with Paul Colligan Personal Branding show with Bernard Kelvin Clive (from Ghana ) Thanks to : by Garrettent44614 from USA on August 28, 2014 So far I've listened to every episode in the last 4 weeks and I have to say that this podcast has it all, Audio Quality, Content Quality, and Dave Jackson definitely brings the perfect personality to the table when it comes to how the podcast is produced. Thanks a ton Dave, Keep up the good work!!! Learn podcasting and have fun doing so! by SteveW928 from Canada on August 23, 2014 Dave not only has the heart of a teacher, but he brings his great sense of humor in to keep it fun as well. School of Podcasting is a one-of-a-kind educational experience where you'll not only learn great details about podcasting and the industry, but you'll also learn about hosting, equipment, software, hardware gadgets, etc. as Dave loves to try a bit of everything and give you his opinion on how well it really works. And, as mentioned above, he's a hoot to listen to. For the latest iTunes Reviews. By reviewing the show and rating it, you help us get more exposure. WRITE A REVIEW I learned of these reviews by using My Podcast reviews

                    The School of Podcasting Went over 1,000,000 Downloads This Month! [18:50]

                    Thanks to everyone who has listened over the year. I am humbled by this number. http://youtu.be/4BUXd2y1wEc You can still here my first episode.

                    Is Fear Stopping You From Starting Your Podcast?

                    The answer I'm hearing more and more is how people are trying to get over their "jitters" to start recording your podcast. When we launch a podcast we go into areas that we have never gone before, and that will make us nervous. It's normal. You're going to hate your voice. That's normal. I know that fear can really become a factor so here are some thought to help you face the fears of starting a podcast.

                    1. Its not live.

                    You can record it once, twice, three times before releasing it. Just because you record it doesn't mean you have to release it to the public.

                    2. Editing is your friend

                    If it's not perfect, you can edit out the part that need help. And you can always record it again.

                    3. Why Would people listen to me?

                    Remember you don't have to know everything, you just have to know more than your listener. Or if you don't know anything make it a journey podcast. I'm sure President Obama feels this way when he puts on his tie. I have never felt I could sing. Mainly because my brother told me at an early age. It stung. I sing in most of the bands I play in, but its usually the really high stuff and I have to wear a size smaller underwear to hit the high notes. But I was shocked when my friend asked me to play and sing at his wedding. I did, and I got huge compliments. Everyone had heard me scream on stage, but they had never heard me sing. It turns out I'm not half bad.

                    4. What's the worst that could happen?

                    If it's really bad, you can always pull it off the Internet. Remember, when you first start there won't be much of an audience (so there isn't much to be embarrassed about ). Try this: instead of convincing yourself to believe the worst about something you fear, try imagining the best. You might make someone's day. You might inspire to change their life for the better. You might inspire a future customer .  When a podcast show fails, there are always lessons to be learned. Many very successful podcasters are on their second (third) show because the first one tanked.

                    Mentioned in this Show

                    Joe Hicks and the Above Average Show  The Creative Penn Podcast Canva Image Editor

                    ]]>687178ea6b304b64f56d21c8a0b529aaMon, 01 Sep 2014 04:00:00 -040041:24falsefull424424Every Podcast Episode is an OpportunityI spent money on plane tickets to go to Podcast Movement. I worked for weeks on my presentation. Then when I went to deliver my presentation, the original attendance was not what I had hoped for. Today I share how I had two thought paths I could've followed. Half of the podcasting game is mental. Being mentally prepared for criticism. Being mentally always looking for insights into your audience. This is why you need to determine WHY you are getting into podcasting. There will be those times when things are not going as planned, and you want to quit. The WHY will carry you through. For me, a momentary lapse of purpose had me thinking of going down a dark place. I decided to go a different route. At the end of my presentation, the room was not entirely full, but it had tripled the few people who were originally there. 

                    I had given it everything I had. I was sweaty, and tired. I had left what I had on the stage (more on that next week when I hare a story behind an interview). When people choose to listen to your podcast, it is an opportunity to connect with them. It is an opportunity to impact their life. Don't take your audience for granted, and always deliver your best performance. I'm glad I did. 

                    For more information on the presentation go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/pm14 (slides, videos, etc). 

                    ]]>I spent money on plane tickets to go to Podcast Movement. I worked for weeks on my presentation. Then when I went to deliver my presentation, the original attendance was not what I had hoped for. Today I share how I had two thought paths I could've followed. Half of the podcasting game is mental. Being mentally prepared for criticism. Being mentally always looking for insights into your audience. This is why you need to determine WHY you are getting into podcasting. There will be those times when things are not going as planned, and you want to quit. The WHY will carry you through. For me, a momentary lapse of purpose had me thinking of going down a dark place. I decided to go a different route. At the end of my presentation, the room was not entirely full, but it had tripled the few people who were originally there. 

                    I had given it everything I had. I was sweaty, and tired. I had left what I had on the stage (more on that next week when I hare a story behind an interview). When people choose to listen to your podcast, it is an opportunity to connect with them. It is an opportunity to impact their life. Don't take your audience for granted, and always deliver your best performance. I'm glad I did. 

                    For more information on the presentation go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/pm14 (slides, videos, etc). 

                    ]]>8aab76bca45d892e58540f4aa06c2e42Mon, 25 Aug 2014 04:00:00 -040059:03falsefull423423Who Wants to Make a Difference?Fresh back from my trip to the Podcast Movement event, I share two stories of how podcasters are making a difference. We are being seen as the voice of customers; we are being seen as people who can influence others.
                    Corey Fineran of Ivy Envy Helps MLB Change a Rule

                    Corey shares how a contest for free Chicago Cubs tickets seemed unfair. He wrote a blog post and spoke honestly on his podcast. He was nervous when an official from the Cubs reached out to him. Then he found out his podcast and blog had been used to help change the rule for contests run by Major League baseball. 

                    Blog Talk Radio Working on Updating Their Audio Quality

                    I have not been of Blog Talk Radio for a long time (their audio and other issues were pointed out in this post) so you can imagine when I was attending Podcast Movement 2014 and a Blog Talk Radio representative approached me. Then he started off his remarks with the phrase, "About your post..."

                    I was amazed when General Manager Andy Toh said he had taken my post, and was using it to help rebuild Blog talk Radio from the inside out. He explained how the new beta version will be able to export audio at 128kbps (CD Quality). Andy know there there will be a lot of improvements needed to get my official seal of approval, but the fact that Blog Talk Radio was even attending the vent, and that they are planning on making changes to their service shows their dedication to the community (where hosting companies like Podbean.com and Podomatic.com where not in attendance). As always my two favorite providers Libsyn.com abnd Blubrry.com had booths and I will be talking about Libsyn.com's redesigned app in a future episode. 

                    ]]>Fresh back from my trip to the Podcast Movement event, I share two stories of how podcasters are making a difference. We are being seen as the voice of customers; we are being seen as people who can influence others.
                    Corey Fineran of Ivy Envy Helps MLB Change a Rule

                    Corey shares how a contest for free Chicago Cubs tickets seemed unfair. He wrote a blog post and spoke honestly on his podcast. He was nervous when an official from the Cubs reached out to him. Then he found out his podcast and blog had been used to help change the rule for contests run by Major League baseball. 

                    Blog Talk Radio Working on Updating Their Audio Quality

                    I have not been of Blog Talk Radio for a long time (their audio and other issues were pointed out in this post) so you can imagine when I was attending Podcast Movement 2014 and a Blog Talk Radio representative approached me. Then he started off his remarks with the phrase, "About your post..."

                    I was amazed when General Manager Andy Toh said he had taken my post, and was using it to help rebuild Blog talk Radio from the inside out. He explained how the new beta version will be able to export audio at 128kbps (CD Quality). Andy know there there will be a lot of improvements needed to get my official seal of approval, but the fact that Blog Talk Radio was even attending the vent, and that they are planning on making changes to their service shows their dedication to the community (where hosting companies like Podbean.com and Podomatic.com where not in attendance). As always my two favorite providers Libsyn.com abnd Blubrry.com had booths and I will be talking about Libsyn.com's redesigned app in a future episode. 

                    ]]>13a22d26b8a4b13a63e1a9e9ba4ecda6Tue, 19 Aug 2014 02:35:08 -040039:31falsefull422422What Does it Take To Be Pat Flynn? - Smart Podcast PlayerPat Flynn made 89,903.53 last month. This is down from the 89,000 he made in April. This doesn't happen by chance. Pat has always been a hard worker. If you haven't check out his book Let Go, then you should. You read how he did all the things you were supposed to do (go to college, work insane hours to get up the corporate ladder)  only to be let go. Pat had been studying for a certification and was using the web to store his notes. Later when he passed the exam he uncovered that his notes were very, VERY popular. So he took the notes and repackaged them as an ebook, and put it up for sale. He never considered himself an author, but why not. It made (and continues to make ) a LOT of cash. Along the way Pat shares the good the bad and the ugly of his journey. Today he shares some insights into what it takes to create content that truly resonates with your audience, and how he is taking podcast players to a new level with his Smart Podcast Player.
                    Here are some key points from the interview

                    Pat spends HOURS writing a single blog post. When you read his posts at smartpassiveincome.com you will see the insane amounts of detail that he puts into his posts. The goal is always to inform his audience in an unbiased way. The goal is to help his audience make an informed decision. By not selling out to the top bidder, and only talking about products he has first hand knowledge of, Pat is not only a resource, but a trusted resource. Pat knows when he is most productive (he's a night owl) and that's when he does his work. He has a dedicated office. He admits that its hard to separate work and family, but in the same way that a employee clocks out to go home Pat knows that when he leaves his office he has "clocked out" and it's time for his family. When I read the book Let Go you get to see bonus videos of Pat with his family. It's very cool, and his passion and love for his kids is beyond evident. Pat learned that you need to let others who can do things better take over. He tried to turn his book into an audio book, but later hired someone to read it for him. It was a lot of money ($1400) but that money came back to him. Many people are envious of Pat's bank account. I envy the time and influence Pat has with his children. Pat took his successful blog and grew his audience using a podcast. When Pat meets people at conferences, they all mention the podcast. It took Pat a year and a half to build his audience

                    Smart Podcast Player

                    When Pat launched the Ask the Pat podcast ( a quick daily show where he answers one listener question) . He had a custom player created. You can find it at www.smartpodcastplayer.com or at www.askpat.com it has built in share buttons and if you have a large catalog (like a daily show will produce) it makes it easy to browse through the episodes and listen to the one you want. How Does it Work? It doesn't matter what media host you use. You input the location of your RSS feed and it pulls the information from that and creates the payer. This way when you release a new episode it automatically is added to the player. If you use soundcoud as your media host (for the record I would only use soundcloud as a secondary host - see my thought on this) you can add additional tags which may help you be found, and help people discover your content.

                    When In Doubt Ask Your Audience

                    Pat rolled it out to a limited beta group knowing there would be growing pains. Pat knew there were features he would want to add, and by rolling it out to a select few, he had a built in focus group to help him identify and prioritize new features that will be added to the player. When it first rolled out there were limited choices to the colors you could use. Now you can use any color for your player.

                    Great Support

                    As expected there were a few bugs when it rolled out. I worked with his group and they were very responsive and a great group of guys. With my recent moving of my website to a new host, I have had other priorities and have not activated the player on the new host (not that it takes a lot to put it into place - you know podcast movement, etc,  first things first). Flexible The Smart Podcast Player allows you to put a full page of your podcasts in one spot ( see screenshot) or you can put a single episode on your site. It will be exciting to see what features are added in the future. Pat talked about wanting the player to prompt you to join a mailing list (or other call to action). He realizes that while you could throw in a bunch of features, its best to roll them out slowly and make sure you are adding features that are wanted.

                    Protecting Your Brand

                    Pat talks about he is asked on a daily basis to promote products. Many of these have huge payouts, but Pat knows that if he were to endorse a product that turned out to be awful, his trust would be ruined. He has the intelligence to know that the most valuable thing you have is the trust of your audience. He could have a list of hundreds of thousands of subscribers, but if they don't trust your content - it's worthless. If you're in it for the long haul, guard your audience and protect from the people who are looking to make a quick buck. Find all things Pat at www.smartpassiveincome.com www.smartpodcastplayer.com www.askpat.com www.nichesiteduel.com    

                    ]]>Pat Flynn made 89,903.53 last month. This is down from the 89,000 he made in April. This doesn't happen by chance. Pat has always been a hard worker. If you haven't check out his book Let Go, then you should. You read how he did all the things you were supposed to do (go to college, work insane hours to get up the corporate ladder)  only to be let go. Pat had been studying for a certification and was using the web to store his notes. Later when he passed the exam he uncovered that his notes were very, VERY popular. So he took the notes and repackaged them as an ebook, and put it up for sale. He never considered himself an author, but why not. It made (and continues to make ) a LOT of cash. Along the way Pat shares the good the bad and the ugly of his journey. Today he shares some insights into what it takes to create content that truly resonates with your audience, and how he is taking podcast players to a new level with his Smart Podcast Player.
                    Here are some key points from the interview

                    Pat spends HOURS writing a single blog post. When you read his posts at smartpassiveincome.com you will see the insane amounts of detail that he puts into his posts. The goal is always to inform his audience in an unbiased way. The goal is to help his audience make an informed decision. By not selling out to the top bidder, and only talking about products he has first hand knowledge of, Pat is not only a resource, but a trusted resource. Pat knows when he is most productive (he's a night owl) and that's when he does his work. He has a dedicated office. He admits that its hard to separate work and family, but in the same way that a employee clocks out to go home Pat knows that when he leaves his office he has "clocked out" and it's time for his family. When I read the book Let Go you get to see bonus videos of Pat with his family. It's very cool, and his passion and love for his kids is beyond evident. Pat learned that you need to let others who can do things better take over. He tried to turn his book into an audio book, but later hired someone to read it for him. It was a lot of money ($1400) but that money came back to him. Many people are envious of Pat's bank account. I envy the time and influence Pat has with his children. Pat took his successful blog and grew his audience using a podcast. When Pat meets people at conferences, they all mention the podcast. It took Pat a year and a half to build his audience

                    Smart Podcast Player

                    When Pat launched the Ask the Pat podcast ( a quick daily show where he answers one listener question) . He had a custom player created. You can find it at www.smartpodcastplayer.com or at www.askpat.com it has built in share buttons and if you have a large catalog (like a daily show will produce) it makes it easy to browse through the episodes and listen to the one you want. How Does it Work? It doesn't matter what media host you use. You input the location of your RSS feed and it pulls the information from that and creates the payer. This way when you release a new episode it automatically is added to the player. If you use soundcoud as your media host (for the record I would only use soundcloud as a secondary host - see my thought on this) you can add additional tags which may help you be found, and help people discover your content.

                    When In Doubt Ask Your Audience

                    Pat rolled it out to a limited beta group knowing there would be growing pains. Pat knew there were features he would want to add, and by rolling it out to a select few, he had a built in focus group to help him identify and prioritize new features that will be added to the player. When it first rolled out there were limited choices to the colors you could use. Now you can use any color for your player.

                    Great Support

                    As expected there were a few bugs when it rolled out. I worked with his group and they were very responsive and a great group of guys. With my recent moving of my website to a new host, I have had other priorities and have not activated the player on the new host (not that it takes a lot to put it into place - you know podcast movement, etc,  first things first). Flexible The Smart Podcast Player allows you to put a full page of your podcasts in one spot ( see screenshot) or you can put a single episode on your site. It will be exciting to see what features are added in the future. Pat talked about wanting the player to prompt you to join a mailing list (or other call to action). He realizes that while you could throw in a bunch of features, its best to roll them out slowly and make sure you are adding features that are wanted.

                    Protecting Your Brand

                    Pat talks about he is asked on a daily basis to promote products. Many of these have huge payouts, but Pat knows that if he were to endorse a product that turned out to be awful, his trust would be ruined. He has the intelligence to know that the most valuable thing you have is the trust of your audience. He could have a list of hundreds of thousands of subscribers, but if they don't trust your content - it's worthless. If you're in it for the long haul, guard your audience and protect from the people who are looking to make a quick buck. Find all things Pat at www.smartpassiveincome.com www.smartpodcastplayer.com www.askpat.com www.nichesiteduel.com    

                    ]]>dd6256ae67404b65c98cde6e73ea09ffMon, 11 Aug 2014 04:00:00 -040059:24falsefull421421Targeting Your Audience with Ben Krueger the Podcast Marketing GuyToday we talk about identifying your perfect customer and then making a podcast for them . We also hear a story of courage from a young 14 year old boy. We get an update on the patent troll case, and a book review
                    Because of His Attitude [5:00]

                    Today I get feedback from a 14 year old Australian boy who had the courage to ask to speak at a Wordcamp. Sure enough he passed, and was able to speak in front of 500 people. His attitude, "What the heck, let's try and see." I think we all can learn from William and see that while we may not think we have the credentials, WE DO. For those above the age of 14, you have a bit more history under our belt.

                    Get Reviewed on the Podcast Review Show [9:43]

                    Recently we reviewed Dan Hansen's Coffee Couch (hear the review). Dan shares his thoughts on the experience. You can get the most affordable private coaching with two coaches for $99

                    Marketing Your Business With Your Podcast - Ben Kruger Interview [11:20]

                    Ben Kruger produces the Authority Engine podcast and is known as the "Podcast Marketing Guy" who took his passion for marketing and incorporated it into a podcast that helps people use podcasting to bring in new clients. He offers services for small business who just want to create content (and let Ben and his team do the rest) Some topics we talk about are: Does your show need to be daily? How many downloads do you need to be successful? The key is targeting your audience. Find the top leaders in your niche and help them deliver the best content to their audience. Don't do a giant commercial. Start building your email list with tools like Aweber and ]]>Today we talk about identifying your perfect customer and then making a podcast for them . We also hear a story of courage from a young 14 year old boy. We get an update on the patent troll case, and a book review

                    Because of His Attitude [5:00]

                    Today I get feedback from a 14 year old Australian boy who had the courage to ask to speak at a Wordcamp. Sure enough he passed, and was able to speak in front of 500 people. His attitude, "What the heck, let's try and see." I think we all can learn from William and see that while we may not think we have the credentials, WE DO. For those above the age of 14, you have a bit more history under our belt.

                    Get Reviewed on the Podcast Review Show [9:43]

                    Recently we reviewed Dan Hansen's Coffee Couch (hear the review). Dan shares his thoughts on the experience. You can get the most affordable private coaching with two coaches for $99

                    Marketing Your Business With Your Podcast - Ben Kruger Interview [11:20]

                    Ben Kruger produces the Authority Engine podcast and is known as the "Podcast Marketing Guy" who took his passion for marketing and incorporated it into a podcast that helps people use podcasting to bring in new clients. He offers services for small business who just want to create content (and let Ben and his team do the rest) Some topics we talk about are: Does your show need to be daily? How many downloads do you need to be successful? The key is targeting your audience. Find the top leaders in your niche and help them deliver the best content to their audience. Don't do a giant commercial. Start building your email list with tools like Aweber and ]]>be500223f4b546abd5a0747c534cd65fMon, 04 Aug 2014 16:00:00 -040046:29falsefull420420How Many Downloads Does it Take to Get You Booted off Your Web Host?In today's episode we talk about how I often revisit some concepts about podcasting. Today I get an email from a listener that points out that I repeat myself over and over. Looking back, I see his point, but I also know that new podcasters make the same mistakes over and over and over (hence causing me to repeat myself). Here are some basic podcasting truths that will never go out of style:

                    1. Build your website using a Web hosting company (use the coupon podcastcoach at Host Gator to save).

                    2. Put your media on a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month at both places).

                    3. Have a great looking album artwork.

                    4. Don't use another platform (blog Talk Radio, Tumblr, etc) as your "main" website

                    5. There is a huge difference between a $8 microphone and a $99 microphone. There is NOT a huge difference between a $99 microphone and a $300 microphone (in my opinion).

                    6. When in doubt ask your audience.

                    7. Don't get into podcasting to make some quick cash

                    8. When you connect with your audience, they will download your back catalog.

                    9. Podcasting takes time. A 15 minute audio podcast takes about an hour from start to finish to create (roughly speaking).

                    10. Some times you get what you pay for when the prices is free.

                    Because of My Podcast - I Exchanged e-Mails With Jay Mohr [2:00]

                    Brainstorm from the Cannabis Community Project explained how he got free tickets from Jay Mohr by just reaching out to the comedian/movie actors/radio host and to his surprise he got a direct response from Jay himself. Now he can truthfully say that Jay Mohr has been involved with his podcast. 

                    Does Dave Repeat Himself Too Much? [6:15]

                    In response to the listener who emailed and said I repeat myself too much, thank you so much for the feedback. I will try not to do that in the future. There are some topics I will repeat (see the list above for a short list) but I will try to not stretch 15 minute topics into 45 minutes. I was unaware of this. I would love any additional constructive feedback in the comments (below) or just send them directly to me.

                    What I've done in the past and will continue doing in the future is I find other people to share their experience that reinforces the opinions and facts that I shares on each episode.

                    I Have An Idea - The Next Step of Podcasting [13:50]

                    I had a caller on the Ask the Podcast Coach show who was very excited about starting a podcast (we've all been there) but couldn't really say WHAT his podcast was going to be about. Many of us have been in Michael's shoes and we focus on the tools of podcasting. We ask about microphones, and wordpress themes. We ask about promotional tools like twitter and facebook. The problem is we don't have a podcast yet. We have nothing to record. We have nothing to upload .Podcasting starts with content. So if you are in this boat ( I want to podcast, but I'm not sure about what). I would recommend listening to the episode where I talk about getting your podcast in sync with your goals, and then write down 10 topics for 10 episodes. This will help you identify if you are really ready to start a podcast.

                    Don't get distracted by the tools. The tools you will use to distribute your content. They are worthless without the content. Make the content first, then start working toward how to distribute the podcast. Don't look at distribution, and then figure out what you're going to create.

                    Podcast Rewind [21:10]

                    I appeared on the Timelines of Success Podcast with Bill Conrad.

                    Podcasters Roundtable - Best Practices

                     

                    Why You Don't Use Your Web Host as a Media Host [30:00]

                    I have been saying how its a bad idea to use your web host (a website that provides a service to build a WEBSITE on) as a MEDIA HOST (a service designed to deliver and track the delivery of audio or video). I was contacted by Ralph Sutton of The SDR Show (Sex, Drugs, & Rock and Roll) because Ralph was using Dreamhost as his website host, and as his media host. H e even asked them if it was ok, and they said "Sure." One month later and his dreamhost had turned into a nightmare. He was getting thousands of downloads per episode and his server was taking a beating. Consequently, his host wanted him to upgrade. The upgrade would be $150 a month to be on a private server because he was getting too much traffic.

                    Luckily, Ralph contacted myself and a representative from Libsyn and we switched his media to a media server and now instead of spending $150 a month, Ralph is spending $20. Had this continued, there is a good chance his website company would shut him down. At that point you've developed a nice audience only to have your reputation tarnished by trying to save a few bucks.

                    Ralph Did The Work of Podcast Promotion

                    Ralph didn't look for the giant switch that would turn on one thousand listeners. He flipped those switches that turned on one new listener one thousand times. He crafted an email message and then customized it and sent it to everyone he knew on facebook. He then asked his friends who work in the rock industry if they would tell their audience about the show.

                    Stating the Obvious: Ralph has a radio background and a syndicated show across the US. he also has access to guests who are/were famous. This helps, but none the less these people would now have known if Ralph had not told them about his podcast. He did it in a personal way, and utilized the  relationship he had built up over years of being in radio.

                    Ralph had some stickers printed up and went to places where his target audience hangs out and]]>In today's episode we talk about how I often revisit some concepts about podcasting. Today I get an email from a listener that points out that I repeat myself over and over. Looking back, I see his point, but I also know that new podcasters make the same mistakes over and over and over (hence causing me to repeat myself). Here are some basic podcasting truths that will never go out of style:

                    1. Build your website using a Web hosting company (use the coupon podcastcoach at Host Gator to save).

                    2. Put your media on a media host like Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month at both places).

                    3. Have a great looking album artwork.

                    4. Don't use another platform (blog Talk Radio, Tumblr, etc) as your "main" website

                    5. There is a huge difference between a $8 microphone and a $99 microphone. There is NOT a huge difference between a $99 microphone and a $300 microphone (in my opinion).

                    6. When in doubt ask your audience.

                    7. Don't get into podcasting to make some quick cash

                    8. When you connect with your audience, they will download your back catalog.

                    9. Podcasting takes time. A 15 minute audio podcast takes about an hour from start to finish to create (roughly speaking).

                    10. Some times you get what you pay for when the prices is free.

                    Because of My Podcast - I Exchanged e-Mails With Jay Mohr [2:00]

                    Brainstorm from the Cannabis Community Project explained how he got free tickets from Jay Mohr by just reaching out to the comedian/movie actors/radio host and to his surprise he got a direct response from Jay himself. Now he can truthfully say that Jay Mohr has been involved with his podcast. 

                    Does Dave Repeat Himself Too Much? [6:15]

                    In response to the listener who emailed and said I repeat myself too much, thank you so much for the feedback. I will try not to do that in the future. There are some topics I will repeat (see the list above for a short list) but I will try to not stretch 15 minute topics into 45 minutes. I was unaware of this. I would love any additional constructive feedback in the comments (below) or just send them directly to me.

                    What I've done in the past and will continue doing in the future is I find other people to share their experience that reinforces the opinions and facts that I shares on each episode.

                    I Have An Idea - The Next Step of Podcasting [13:50]

                    I had a caller on the Ask the Podcast Coach show who was very excited about starting a podcast (we've all been there) but couldn't really say WHAT his podcast was going to be about. Many of us have been in Michael's shoes and we focus on the tools of podcasting. We ask about microphones, and wordpress themes. We ask about promotional tools like twitter and facebook. The problem is we don't have a podcast yet. We have nothing to record. We have nothing to upload .Podcasting starts with content. So if you are in this boat ( I want to podcast, but I'm not sure about what). I would recommend listening to the episode where I talk about getting your podcast in sync with your goals, and then write down 10 topics for 10 episodes. This will help you identify if you are really ready to start a podcast.

                    Don't get distracted by the tools. The tools you will use to distribute your content. They are worthless without the content. Make the content first, then start working toward how to distribute the podcast. Don't look at distribution, and then figure out what you're going to create.

                    Podcast Rewind [21:10]

                    I appeared on the Timelines of Success Podcast with Bill Conrad.

                    Podcasters Roundtable - Best Practices

                     

                    Why You Don't Use Your Web Host as a Media Host [30:00]

                    I have been saying how its a bad idea to use your web host (a website that provides a service to build a WEBSITE on) as a MEDIA HOST (a service designed to deliver and track the delivery of audio or video). I was contacted by Ralph Sutton of The SDR Show (Sex, Drugs, & Rock and Roll) because Ralph was using Dreamhost as his website host, and as his media host. H e even asked them if it was ok, and they said "Sure." One month later and his dreamhost had turned into a nightmare. He was getting thousands of downloads per episode and his server was taking a beating. Consequently, his host wanted him to upgrade. The upgrade would be $150 a month to be on a private server because he was getting too much traffic.

                    Luckily, Ralph contacted myself and a representative from Libsyn and we switched his media to a media server and now instead of spending $150 a month, Ralph is spending $20. Had this continued, there is a good chance his website company would shut him down. At that point you've developed a nice audience only to have your reputation tarnished by trying to save a few bucks.

                    Ralph Did The Work of Podcast Promotion

                    Ralph didn't look for the giant switch that would turn on one thousand listeners. He flipped those switches that turned on one new listener one thousand times. He crafted an email message and then customized it and sent it to everyone he knew on facebook. He then asked his friends who work in the rock industry if they would tell their audience about the show.

                    Stating the Obvious: Ralph has a radio background and a syndicated show across the US. he also has access to guests who are/were famous. This helps, but none the less these people would now have known if Ralph had not told them about his podcast. He did it in a personal way, and utilized the  relationship he had built up over years of being in radio.

                    Ralph had some stickers printed up and went to places where his target audience hangs out and passed out stickers. He went to where his audience was, made some contacts, and told them about his podcast. He use fiverr.com to have someone paint his logo on her back. He used this image to announce t-shirts.

                    Advice to Doing Podcast Interviews

                    Ralph does not write out questions, but topic he wants to know about. He wants to avoid the interview being an interrogation. He wants it to be a conversion. He plans how he will start the podcast, and from there he tries to have a conversation.

                    Be Ready For Traffic

                    Ralph switch to Libsyn.com for his media and his problems went away. (use the coupon sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn). He then hired Dave to move his feed from one website to another.

                    What Caused the Problem With the School of Podcasting Website Last Week

                    Just because you can add domain after domain after domain on your shared web host doesn't mean you should. It is OK to do this as long as you don't use up more than 25% of the server's resources. I had 18 add on domains, and I was taking up 87% of the server's resources and consequently, my media host emailed me that they were shutting me down, and before I could upgrade it was too late. Does this mean every podcaster should NOT use shared hosting? No. Shared hosting should be fine for 95% of the podcasting community. When you do see yourself getting close to exceeding your resources, don't wait to upgrade.

                    In the end, I took a huge hit for two days as my websites were down. What did I save? $50-ish

                     

                    ]]>50d77942d7849ebb35a2127c6c0d2b8dSun, 27 Jul 2014 21:15:11 -040001:00:57falsefull419419Bring Your Passion and Patience - Nick Loper's One Year ReportToday we talk about different successful people who took years to make it to the top. We also interview Nick Loper as he reflects on one year of podcasting and how its changed his business. We have an awesome Because of my podcast story that you will love about the yes music podcast. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/418 for details

                    ]]>Today we talk about different successful people who took years to make it to the top. We also interview Nick Loper as he reflects on one year of podcasting and how its changed his business. We have an awesome Because of my podcast story that you will love about the yes music podcast. Go to schoolofpodcasting.com/418 for details
                    ]]>fb29d767b8f24feb18c7270124897f5bSun, 20 Jul 2014 16:00:00 -040056:37falsefull418418Picking Your Podcast Topic - Age Limits in Podcasting?I've heard it over and over, I want to podcast - I'm just not sure what I'm going to talk about. I recently went through Ray Edwards Rapid Writing Method(a great value) and if you've listened to the show you know I'm a big Michael Hyatt fan and today I pull a page out of the Ray playbook and some insights from Michael Hyatt's New Media Expo presentation to help you pick a topic that works for you. If you have a comment you can chime in on the show by using the information on our contact page, or call 888-563-3228. If you're looking to start podcast join today.
                    Because of My Podcast They Lost 300 Lbs [1:52]

                    Today we get a second story from Cliff Ravenscraft (we interviewed him last week) and he shares how his podcast helped inspire someone to lose 300 lbs. How cool it that? Last 5 in 5 from J.D. Stutter Happy Camper Radio - Skip & Daniel - happycamperradio.com The Classic Tales - BJ Harrison - thebestaudiobooks.com Useless Information - Steve Silverman - uselessinformation.org 99% Invisible - Roman Mars - 99pi.org The Mic & Denny Show - Denny Brownlee - dennybrownlee.com

                    Podcast Rewind [9:22]

                    Dave Appeared on the Podcast Report Dave appears on the Audience Hacker Great Example of the Power of Podcasting on Podcast Junkies

                    Picking Your Podcast Topic

                    I'm using two things I've learned from two people I respect. Ray Edwards is a master copywriter, and Michael Hyatt is a king in content creation that connects. Choosing Your Topic - Idea Matrix What are things you like? What are some things you are good at? What are things other people say you are good at? What are things you hate? What Will Your Podcast Do? I am ________ . (what do you do?) I help _(target audience)_______ do or understand ________ so that __(how they benefit)_____ for me it might be: Dave Jackson I am a teacher I help intimidated adults overcome their fear of technology so they can impact a global audience in a positive way for both parties. If you would like more free content about this topic check out the show about making sure your podcast goals are aligned with your goals  

                    Mentioned in the Show

                    Porter's Podcast Action Coaching Airplane Geeks Oh Beep Food Craftsmen (Ryan Parker) She Podcasts Podcast Junkies

                    ]]>I've heard it over and over, I want to podcast - I'm just not sure what I'm going to talk about. I recently went through Ray Edwards Rapid Writing Method(a great value) and if you've listened to the show you know I'm a big Michael Hyatt fan and today I pull a page out of the Ray playbook and some insights from Michael Hyatt's New Media Expo presentation to help you pick a topic that works for you. If you have a comment you can chime in on the show by using the information on our contact page, or call 888-563-3228. If you're looking to start podcast join today.
                    Because of My Podcast They Lost 300 Lbs [1:52]

                    Today we get a second story from Cliff Ravenscraft (we interviewed him last week) and he shares how his podcast helped inspire someone to lose 300 lbs. How cool it that? Last 5 in 5 from J.D. Stutter Happy Camper Radio - Skip & Daniel - happycamperradio.com The Classic Tales - BJ Harrison - thebestaudiobooks.com Useless Information - Steve Silverman - uselessinformation.org 99% Invisible - Roman Mars - 99pi.org The Mic & Denny Show - Denny Brownlee - dennybrownlee.com

                    Podcast Rewind [9:22]

                    Dave Appeared on the Podcast Report Dave appears on the Audience Hacker Great Example of the Power of Podcasting on Podcast Junkies

                    Picking Your Podcast Topic

                    I'm using two things I've learned from two people I respect. Ray Edwards is a master copywriter, and Michael Hyatt is a king in content creation that connects. Choosing Your Topic - Idea Matrix What are things you like? What are some things you are good at? What are things other people say you are good at? What are things you hate? What Will Your Podcast Do? I am ________ . (what do you do?) I help _(target audience)_______ do or understand ________ so that __(how they benefit)_____ for me it might be: Dave Jackson I am a teacher I help intimidated adults overcome their fear of technology so they can impact a global audience in a positive way for both parties. If you would like more free content about this topic check out the show about making sure your podcast goals are aligned with your goals  

                    Mentioned in the Show

                    Porter's Podcast Action Coaching Airplane Geeks Oh Beep Food Craftsmen (Ryan Parker) She Podcasts Podcast Junkies

                    ]]>915aad3847668b9d0a12d64fc099f0cdSun, 13 Jul 2014 13:31:10 -040045:46falsefull417417Are You Breaking the Podcast Rules? - Cliff Ravenscraft InterviewWhile there are no rules to podcasting, most would agree that there are best practices. Most experts believe it starts with your audience, and providing content that they want ton consume. So today we showcase how you CAN do whatever show YOU want to do.  

                    Learn how to podcast by Joining the School of Podcasting

                    Are there boundaries for "Best Practices?" - Interview with Cliff Ravenscraft [5:20]

                    I approached Cliff this week to come on the show after voicing my opinion about "chit chit" in a previous episode (where I answered a listener question). I've known Cliff for years, and I thought it was stupid to talk about his show  (not the person) without actually stating his name. As I said last week, I'm not judging Cliff. We do have a difference of opinions on personal stories in podcasts, so I asked him to come on and share his insights. I want to see if there is anything I can learn. So I ask him why he would share personal stories in a show that many might expect to be all about podcasting. The beauty of podcasting is you can do you show however you want.

                    Last week without naming him, I commented on how I thought Cliff's latest podcast about relaunching a podcast had about 60% content and 40% non podcasting commentary. In the interview Cliff explains that he felt the 12 minute story about having the cabling redone in his house was not chit chat and done for specific reasons (thus the percentages would be different).

                    Here are some of the topics we discussed

                    Who made these rules? [7:30]

                    Cliff's story about rewiring his house [11:05]

                    Cliff's show prep [13:30 ish]

                    In some cases the content exists on a website and listeners are too lazy to find it [16:10]

                    Don't "should" on me, and providing an audio table of contest [17:00]

                    Don't take away Cliff's Voice [18:15]

                    How to Handle Negative Review [19:30]

                    Cliff's Half a Million Dollar Income [20:00]

                    Why Do I Share Stories? [24:30]

                    Allowing Your "Not so Great" Side to be seen [26:20]

                    Can't Live Without Content [28:20]

                    Cliff Shares Everything [30:28]

                    It's your Show - It's Your Format [31:25]

                    Cliff Ravenscraft - Life Coach? [32:00]

                     

                    Main Points:

                    Don't get too worried if ONE person complains, this is ONE person. Focus on the people who are enjoying your content. 

                    Cliff does put an audio "table of contents" at the beginning of his show so people know what to expect.

                    Cliff knows his audience well and gets lots of feedback

                    Check out Cliff's Podcasting A to Z Class and use the coupon code " jackson " to save $500 off. 

                     

                    Last 5 in 5 from Mike Dell [41:50]

                    What were the last five podcasts you listened to from Mike Dell who produces the Podcast Help Desk show

                    Penn's Sunday School

                    Thomas jefferson hour

                    New Media Show

                    Podcast Answer Man

                    Airline Pilot Guy

                     

                    Listener Feedback [48:20 ]

                    Elsie and Jessica from the new She Podcasts Show chime in the on the episode where we talked about charisma.

                    Elise and Jessica really enjoyed the episode about personality and Charisma. 

                     

                    Short on Podcast...]]>While there are no rules to podcasting, most would agree that there are best practices. Most experts believe it starts with your audience, and providing content that they want ton consume. So today we showcase how you CAN do whatever show YOU want to do.  

                    Learn how to podcast by Joining the School of Podcasting

                    Are there boundaries for "Best Practices?" - Interview with Cliff Ravenscraft [5:20]

                    I approached Cliff this week to come on the show after voicing my opinion about "chit chit" in a previous episode (where I answered a listener question). I've known Cliff for years, and I thought it was stupid to talk about his show  (not the person) without actually stating his name. As I said last week, I'm not judging Cliff. We do have a difference of opinions on personal stories in podcasts, so I asked him to come on and share his insights. I want to see if there is anything I can learn. So I ask him why he would share personal stories in a show that many might expect to be all about podcasting. The beauty of podcasting is you can do you show however you want.

                    Last week without naming him, I commented on how I thought Cliff's latest podcast about relaunching a podcast had about 60% content and 40% non podcasting commentary. In the interview Cliff explains that he felt the 12 minute story about having the cabling redone in his house was not chit chat and done for specific reasons (thus the percentages would be different).

                    Here are some of the topics we discussed

                    Who made these rules? [7:30]

                    Cliff's story about rewiring his house [11:05]

                    Cliff's show prep [13:30 ish]

                    In some cases the content exists on a website and listeners are too lazy to find it [16:10]

                    Don't "should" on me, and providing an audio table of contest [17:00]

                    Don't take away Cliff's Voice [18:15]

                    How to Handle Negative Review [19:30]

                    Cliff's Half a Million Dollar Income [20:00]

                    Why Do I Share Stories? [24:30]

                    Allowing Your "Not so Great" Side to be seen [26:20]

                    Can't Live Without Content [28:20]

                    Cliff Shares Everything [30:28]

                    It's your Show - It's Your Format [31:25]

                    Cliff Ravenscraft - Life Coach? [32:00]

                     

                    Main Points:

                    Don't get too worried if ONE person complains, this is ONE person. Focus on the people who are enjoying your content. 

                    Cliff does put an audio "table of contents" at the beginning of his show so people know what to expect.

                    Cliff knows his audience well and gets lots of feedback

                    Check out Cliff's Podcasting A to Z Class and use the coupon code " jackson " to save $500 off. 

                     

                    Last 5 in 5 from Mike Dell [41:50]

                    What were the last five podcasts you listened to from Mike Dell who produces the Podcast Help Desk show

                    Penn's Sunday School

                    Thomas jefferson hour

                    New Media Show

                    Podcast Answer Man

                    Airline Pilot Guy

                     

                    Listener Feedback [48:20 ]

                    Elsie and Jessica from the new She Podcasts Show chime in the on the episode where we talked about charisma.

                    Elise and Jessica really enjoyed the episode about personality and Charisma. 

                     

                    Short on Podcast Ideas - Use Amazon?

                    If you're not sure what the next episode should be about, try using Amazon as a search engine. Go to Amazon.com and search for your show's topic (for me it would be podcasting). Then use the "peak inside" option and look at the table of contents for these books. You might find some of these chapters make good podcast episodes. Once you have an idea, do you research, inject YOU into the episode, and make it your own (don't just steal an idea, put your slant on it). Another strategy would be to have the author on your show. 

                     

                    ]]>ca8feb930c277eb9d7cde229998a365aSun, 06 Jul 2014 17:20:07 -040057:30falsefull416416Your Podcast: Same Ingredients - Different RecipeThis podcast is the sharing of my opinion as well as what has shaped that opinion. I would love your feedback you can use my contact page, or call in your comments at 888-563-3228

                     

                    If you're looking to start a podcast, join fear free (as we offer a 30 day money back guarantee), and mix together your podcast recipe today. JOIN TODAY

                     

                    When you start a podcast, there are a couple of things that will dictate how it sounds, looks, and what topics are covered.

                    Breaking the "Rules of Podcasting

                    In the past I've given tips on how you should get to the point when starting your podcast, and try to avoid too much unrelated chit - chat. For me the best recipe of podasting is:

                    1. Provide content that moves your audience by making them laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertains them.2. Use personal stories to help explain the topic at hand.

                    Example:

                    I learned about audio running the sound system when I was 13 at my church. You would learn that I grew up in a church and I've been around audio for many years. That is a relevant personal story. The story that my sister stubbed her toe is not.

                    Email From Tina Smith

                    I received an email from Tina from the Savvy Home School Moms Podcast

                    Question for ya....Have you ever listened to this show? www.manicmommies.com

                    They are HUGE. No seriously, HUGE. Two moms host a weekly show about the craziness of being a working mom...been publishing episodes since the youngest was newly born....I believe she's 8 or 9 now?   They do a retreat every year called "The Escape" and hundreds of women converge on a hotel somewhere in the country (it changes annually) to relax and get away from their hectic, "Manic" lives as mommies. Chevrolet sponsors this for them every year, and sponsors their show regularly as well! They've also had Sleep Number as a sponsor. I'm sure they've had many other sponsors over the years. I've only been listening the past 3 years or so.    They are actually the show that spurred me to start our own show, because it's so casual and made me feel like podcasting seemed very doable. And almost every show is JUST chitchat. They don't even always plan things, as far as I can tell from some of their jabs at themselves. I suspect there is SOME prep, notes taken on topics they want to cover....but in general, it sounds pretty off the cuff.   But they are funny, and they always have stories to tell and their audience ADORES them, judging by all the voicemail they regularly play on the show.    I totally love what you teach and have learned SO MUCH from you, and will continue to be a huge fan....just wanted to share a show that really breaks many of the rules you and your guests set out for a good show format. :)  Just proof that there are always exceptions to every rule!   I was just listening to them, and then to your show where you were talking about how someone's show was talking about the weather, and how chitchat like that is not a good idea... and was thinking about how we repeatedly get listeners writing in and telling us how their favorite part of our show is the beginning chitchat...how they feel like they are sitting having coffee with friends. They tell us it's like taking a peek into our lives, and they like that. I imagine some like to commiserate with similar ups and downs, and other find it interesting to peek at a life unfamiliar to them.   I suppose it really depends on how it's presented. I find the Manic Mommies show really interesting and amusing...even though I'm not a work-out-of-the-home-mom, and don't send my kids to public school and we don't do any sports (those 3 things are the main content of the Manic Mommies' show)...I always look forward to listening to their show, and I know many people say the same thing about our show.  But if it were presented in a boring way, I can totally see that not working. But shared by people that have a chemistry and share things in a fun way, it can actually work. And work well!   Liked Minded People

                    I am not manic, or a mom. Consequently, this podcast didn't do a whole lot for. I am excited to hear that Chevy is sponsoring podcasts (so obviously they are doing something right). In the bots of the podcast I listened to the Mommies talked about Sunburn children, baseball playoffs, and more. They talk about trying to juggle working, family, relationships. Can any women identify? When their audience hears their podcast, they soon realize, "I'm not the only person who feels this way." They can identify with these people. Since they deliver stories in really interesting and amusing ways, this is the same ingredients but a different recipe.

                    Question One: Who Is Listening?

                    As the manic mommies podcast is gear (primarily) toward women, the communicate in a way what I call their "natural tongue." From a male standpoint (and pahleese I'm doing generalizations here) that means LOTS of details. It connects with their audience, and makes them feel at ease. I once traveled outside the US. I loved the places I traveled, but there was a sense of "Ahhhhhh" when I touched down in the USA. I was home. I was comfortable. I'm assuming Mommies may have this feeling when they listen to this podcast.

                    Podcasting is Not One Size Fits All

                    Tina is correct, this podcast does sound different than the podcast I talk about. It should. I'm not their target audience.

                    What is My Beef With Chit Chat?

                    Here is what I'm basing my belief on:

                    1. We are all busy.2. Radio is awful primarily due to the MAMMOTH amounts of commercials (38% here in Cleveland).3. Other Experts Say they are not about talking about yourself, and wasting time with chit chat.

                    a) Epic Content Marketing - Joe Pulizzi - "Your audience doesn't care about you."b) Everyone Communicates, Few Connect: What the Most Effective People Do Differently - By John Maxwell "Get to the point".c) Chris Brogan (create of Podcamps) "What doesn’t work well is when people misunderstand the tools and aren’t really producing something; instead they are just having a chit-chat.]]>This podcast is the sharing of my opinion as well as what has shaped that opinion. I would love your feedback you can use my contact page, or call in your comments at 888-563-3228

                     

                    If you're looking to start a podcast, join fear free (as we offer a 30 day money back guarantee), and mix together your podcast recipe today. JOIN TODAY

                     

                    When you start a podcast, there are a couple of things that will dictate how it sounds, looks, and what topics are covered.

                    Breaking the "Rules of Podcasting

                    In the past I've given tips on how you should get to the point when starting your podcast, and try to avoid too much unrelated chit - chat. For me the best recipe of podasting is:

                    1. Provide content that moves your audience by making them laugh, cry, think, groan, educate, or entertains them.2. Use personal stories to help explain the topic at hand.

                    Example:

                    I learned about audio running the sound system when I was 13 at my church. You would learn that I grew up in a church and I've been around audio for many years. That is a relevant personal story. The story that my sister stubbed her toe is not.

                    Email From Tina Smith

                    I received an email from Tina from the Savvy Home School Moms Podcast

                    Question for ya....Have you ever listened to this show? www.manicmommies.com

                    They are HUGE. No seriously, HUGE. Two moms host a weekly show about the craziness of being a working mom...been publishing episodes since the youngest was newly born....I believe she's 8 or 9 now?   They do a retreat every year called "The Escape" and hundreds of women converge on a hotel somewhere in the country (it changes annually) to relax and get away from their hectic, "Manic" lives as mommies. Chevrolet sponsors this for them every year, and sponsors their show regularly as well! They've also had Sleep Number as a sponsor. I'm sure they've had many other sponsors over the years. I've only been listening the past 3 years or so.    They are actually the show that spurred me to start our own show, because it's so casual and made me feel like podcasting seemed very doable. And almost every show is JUST chitchat. They don't even always plan things, as far as I can tell from some of their jabs at themselves. I suspect there is SOME prep, notes taken on topics they want to cover....but in general, it sounds pretty off the cuff.   But they are funny, and they always have stories to tell and their audience ADORES them, judging by all the voicemail they regularly play on the show.    I totally love what you teach and have learned SO MUCH from you, and will continue to be a huge fan....just wanted to share a show that really breaks many of the rules you and your guests set out for a good show format. :)  Just proof that there are always exceptions to every rule!   I was just listening to them, and then to your show where you were talking about how someone's show was talking about the weather, and how chitchat like that is not a good idea... and was thinking about how we repeatedly get listeners writing in and telling us how their favorite part of our show is the beginning chitchat...how they feel like they are sitting having coffee with friends. They tell us it's like taking a peek into our lives, and they like that. I imagine some like to commiserate with similar ups and downs, and other find it interesting to peek at a life unfamiliar to them.   I suppose it really depends on how it's presented. I find the Manic Mommies show really interesting and amusing...even though I'm not a work-out-of-the-home-mom, and don't send my kids to public school and we don't do any sports (those 3 things are the main content of the Manic Mommies' show)...I always look forward to listening to their show, and I know many people say the same thing about our show.  But if it were presented in a boring way, I can totally see that not working. But shared by people that have a chemistry and share things in a fun way, it can actually work. And work well!   Liked Minded People

                    I am not manic, or a mom. Consequently, this podcast didn't do a whole lot for. I am excited to hear that Chevy is sponsoring podcasts (so obviously they are doing something right). In the bots of the podcast I listened to the Mommies talked about Sunburn children, baseball playoffs, and more. They talk about trying to juggle working, family, relationships. Can any women identify? When their audience hears their podcast, they soon realize, "I'm not the only person who feels this way." They can identify with these people. Since they deliver stories in really interesting and amusing ways, this is the same ingredients but a different recipe.

                    Question One: Who Is Listening?

                    As the manic mommies podcast is gear (primarily) toward women, the communicate in a way what I call their "natural tongue." From a male standpoint (and pahleese I'm doing generalizations here) that means LOTS of details. It connects with their audience, and makes them feel at ease. I once traveled outside the US. I loved the places I traveled, but there was a sense of "Ahhhhhh" when I touched down in the USA. I was home. I was comfortable. I'm assuming Mommies may have this feeling when they listen to this podcast.

                    Podcasting is Not One Size Fits All

                    Tina is correct, this podcast does sound different than the podcast I talk about. It should. I'm not their target audience.

                    What is My Beef With Chit Chat?

                    Here is what I'm basing my belief on:

                    1. We are all busy.2. Radio is awful primarily due to the MAMMOTH amounts of commercials (38% here in Cleveland).3. Other Experts Say they are not about talking about yourself, and wasting time with chit chat.

                    a) Epic Content Marketing - Joe Pulizzi - "Your audience doesn't care about you."b) Everyone Communicates, Few Connect: What the Most Effective People Do Differently - By John Maxwell "Get to the point".c) Chris Brogan (create of Podcamps) "What doesn’t work well is when people misunderstand the tools and aren’t really producing something; instead they are just having a chit-chat. There are a lot of people who think pressing record is the same as creating content. I always tell people just press record and get started, but somewhere along the way you’ve got to try and up your game, and make something worthwhile. (source)d) Platform: Get Noticed in a Noisy World - "The point is it's not about you. It's about your audience, what would THEY find compelling." Michael Hyatt.3) Pete Peaves - Podcaster's Roundtable - The #1 overwhelming  pet peave was not getting to the point. (see video)

                    So to calrify, my beef is not with "chit chat" it's with unrelated chit chat. I once listened through a 17 minute monologue about how the host hated the musician Bob Seger before they ever got to the actual topic.

                    Talking About Yourself IS working for some people

                    There is a popular podcast consultant who recently admitted they had not done their usual show prep. They had very legitimate reasons, and in my opinion should've skipped two episodes that were (in my opinion) 100% all about the host (I found very little take away). I really like this host as a person (super nice person), their show was not meeting my expectation of delivering content about podcasting.  This week they stated they were returning  to their typical 60 minute show which included:

                    A "short" 13:24 monologue about their life

                    A short 11:27 comment not related to their topic.

                    That means their show is 24 minutes of "off topic" content or 40% (meaning 60% he was on topic). This technically is worse than the 38% here on Cleveland radio during "drive time" in the evening.

                    This person's business makes a six figures. How does they promote his business? Podcasting. According to the host, he apparently has an audience who is interested in hearing his personal life details.

                    And you know what? That's OK. Its HIS SHOW.

                    Different Strokes for Different Folks

                    I play the guitar. B.B. King can put a ton of soul into one note. Yngwie Malmsteen plays so fast your ears can't keep up.

                    Yet, its the same guitar.

                    You may talk and talk, and talk, and talk, about your personal life.

                    I choose to refrain.

                    Yet its the same mp3 format.

                    What you provide to your audience is based on your unique characteristics that make you - YOU. Based on the unique characteristics of your AUDIENCE, you may be surprised what they want to hear/see.

                     The Key Ingredients of a Podcast

                     In the book Platform by Michael Hyatt he talks about making "Wow" content. For me, I recognize "WOW" content when I don't want to turn off the podcast and come in the house. I choose to sit in the car and listen until the end of the story. He says this in the book

                    "It Exceeds the audience's expectations

                    It touches the heart on a deep level

                    It captures your attention to where you tune everything out (I'm paraphrasing on this one).

                    The information HAS to be shared. You can't contain it. "

                    How you package that material will be based on your experience, personality, and insights. If you're having success, my guess will be you have elements of these and you're probably delivering it in an entertaining fashion.

                    I Prefer Not To Stiff Arm My Audience

                    When I go to Wal-Mart, the door greeter doesn't say "Welcome to Wal-Mart" and then stop me from entering.

                    They let me on in. They don't give me a bunch of information I'm not interested in.

                    I know what I need, and that's why I'm at Wal-Mart.

                    Please let me get to what I need.

                     "It's All About Me????"

                    If you're new to the show, Dave was attempting to be entertaining this morning. He neither thinks he is a myth or a legend. He typically gets right to the point. Today he did this to prove a point. If this was your first show, please come back next week.

                     

                    ]]>d1ad25162177f9cc25b71d8171c954a0Sun, 29 Jun 2014 19:12:09 -040046:54falsefull415415Keeping Your Brand In Front of Your Future Customers75301bff25d68a0afd98f201fa48e62dSun, 22 Jun 2014 18:05:37 -040056:03falsefull414414Content, Charisma & ConnectionToday Joe Saul-Sehy of Stacking Benjamins Podcast (www.stackingbenjamins.com). Who read the book Top of the Morning: Inside the Cutthroat World of Morning TV and thought, "This could apply to podcasting." We also get a "Power of podcating" story on how I heard about a book called Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less that was recommended by fellow podcaster Jon Buscall of the Online Marketing and Communications podcast at jontusmedia.com
                    Looking to Start a Podcast? - Join the School of Podcasting Come for the education, and stay for the community. You will get step by step tutorial about every aspect of podcasting. You get support from Dave Jackson as well as out awesome School of Podcasting community. Order worry free with our 30 day money back guarantee.

                     

                    Because of a Podcast - I bought a Book

                    I head Jon Buscall interview Joe Pulizi about his new book Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less. Jon said that he liked the book so much that when he got done listening to it, he instantly went back and listened a second time. This made me stop what I was doing, and order the book on Audible immediately. (You can get a free book by signing up for a trial at www.audibletrial.com/dave if you don't like the book you can exchange it for another one).  I look at Jon as a trusted friend. So what happened here. Jon got a content expert on his show. Jon made what Michael Hyatt calls "Wow" content. Jon looks great. I tell you about this great interview and book. I help you find great content. You are grateful. Joe the author, Jon the interviewer, Dave the podcaster, all benefit as do you the listener. Why? because it is quality content. Because of episode after episode that Jon has produced. Trust is built. That trust can be leverage for monetary gain as long as you always protect your listener. It is always about them (not you).

                    How to Use Audible as A Sponsor

                    One you have 10 episodes on your website (as they are looking for serious podcasters) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible and you can promote audio books on your website and earn a commission when someone signs up.

                    What Podcasters Can Learn From Television Morning Programs

                    Today we talk with Joe Saul-Sehy about the book Top of the Morning: Inside the Cutthroat World of Morning TV about what podcasters can learn from television. Joe was on the morning television show before Good Morning America. Joe asks podcasters to think about the setup of the show to match their audience. Chemistry is discussed in this book on how Good Morning America beat the today show after they had been #1 for 16 years. People really connect with the hosts. Joe and his co-host O.G. and their relationship. You hear how Joe and O.G. had their podcast through a few different formats and name - they didn't quit. Joe prefers to get to the point and makes thing "snappy" on the Stacking Benjamins Show People want to be entertained while they are consuming content about the topic they came to learn about. The Today show got "cocky" while Good Morning America started asking the questions the audience wanted to ask. CBS has been growing faster by any other network by ignoring what the other networks are doing and doing what they want to do (longer interviews, no weather person). They are doing their own thing. You can out Good Morning America the actual Good Morning America. In the same way, you can't John Lee Dumis the actual John Lee Dumis. He will always better better and being John than you are. Instead focus on being you. If you have a big guest on your show, go listen to other interviews of that person and make sure to ask different questions. Don't be afraid to ask for bigger guests once you have some interviews under your belt. This can lead to publicists helping you find guests.

                    Podcast Reviews 50% Off Ends June 30th

                    If you are looking to get your podcast reviewed by Dave Jackson (me) and Erik K. Johnson the podcast talent coach. Use the coupon sop50 at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Mentioned On This Show

                    School of Podcasting Episode on Editing My Podcast Reviews Stacking Benjamins on iTunes

                    ]]>Today Joe Saul-Sehy of Stacking Benjamins Podcast (www.stackingbenjamins.com). Who read the book Top of the Morning: Inside the Cutthroat World of Morning TV and thought, "This could apply to podcasting." We also get a "Power of podcating" story on how I heard about a book called Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less that was recommended by fellow podcaster Jon Buscall of the Online Marketing and Communications podcast at jontusmedia.com
                    Looking to Start a Podcast? - Join the School of Podcasting Come for the education, and stay for the community. You will get step by step tutorial about every aspect of podcasting. You get support from Dave Jackson as well as out awesome School of Podcasting community. Order worry free with our 30 day money back guarantee.

                     

                    Because of a Podcast - I bought a Book

                    I head Jon Buscall interview Joe Pulizi about his new book Epic Content Marketing: How to Tell a Different Story, Break through the Clutter, and Win More Customers by Marketing Less. Jon said that he liked the book so much that when he got done listening to it, he instantly went back and listened a second time. This made me stop what I was doing, and order the book on Audible immediately. (You can get a free book by signing up for a trial at www.audibletrial.com/dave if you don't like the book you can exchange it for another one).  I look at Jon as a trusted friend. So what happened here. Jon got a content expert on his show. Jon made what Michael Hyatt calls "Wow" content. Jon looks great. I tell you about this great interview and book. I help you find great content. You are grateful. Joe the author, Jon the interviewer, Dave the podcaster, all benefit as do you the listener. Why? because it is quality content. Because of episode after episode that Jon has produced. Trust is built. That trust can be leverage for monetary gain as long as you always protect your listener. It is always about them (not you).

                    How to Use Audible as A Sponsor

                    One you have 10 episodes on your website (as they are looking for serious podcasters) go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/audible and you can promote audio books on your website and earn a commission when someone signs up.

                    What Podcasters Can Learn From Television Morning Programs

                    Today we talk with Joe Saul-Sehy about the book Top of the Morning: Inside the Cutthroat World of Morning TV about what podcasters can learn from television. Joe was on the morning television show before Good Morning America. Joe asks podcasters to think about the setup of the show to match their audience. Chemistry is discussed in this book on how Good Morning America beat the today show after they had been #1 for 16 years. People really connect with the hosts. Joe and his co-host O.G. and their relationship. You hear how Joe and O.G. had their podcast through a few different formats and name - they didn't quit. Joe prefers to get to the point and makes thing "snappy" on the Stacking Benjamins Show People want to be entertained while they are consuming content about the topic they came to learn about. The Today show got "cocky" while Good Morning America started asking the questions the audience wanted to ask. CBS has been growing faster by any other network by ignoring what the other networks are doing and doing what they want to do (longer interviews, no weather person). They are doing their own thing. You can out Good Morning America the actual Good Morning America. In the same way, you can't John Lee Dumis the actual John Lee Dumis. He will always better better and being John than you are. Instead focus on being you. If you have a big guest on your show, go listen to other interviews of that person and make sure to ask different questions. Don't be afraid to ask for bigger guests once you have some interviews under your belt. This can lead to publicists helping you find guests.

                    Podcast Reviews 50% Off Ends June 30th

                    If you are looking to get your podcast reviewed by Dave Jackson (me) and Erik K. Johnson the podcast talent coach. Use the coupon sop50 at www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Mentioned On This Show

                    School of Podcasting Episode on Editing My Podcast Reviews Stacking Benjamins on iTunes

                    ]]>8393e7d76d4849f562e747cf053f0d2fSun, 15 Jun 2014 19:27:39 -040054:39falsefull413413Behind the Scenes of the Trek.fm NetworkToday we talk with Christopher Brian Jones of trek.fm about what its like to run a podcast network. We learn about some of the struggles he has had along the way, how he builds a relationship with the hosts on the network, abd creates a shared vision and brand. You will be amazed at how focused some of his shows are. If you are a fan of Star Trek, you definitely want to check out trek.fm or if you are an iTunes user check out http://www.itunes.com/trek.fm. Want to comment on the show call in your comments at 888-563-3228
                    Because of My Podcast - Bill Hutchison

                    Bill Hutchison is a missionary living in Australia. He produces the YWAM Podcast. Due to his wife having some medical issues, Bill can't leave her alone for long periods of time. However, because of podcasting, Bill can still reach a global audience. He is able to share his relationship with Jesus Christ. Here is a map that shows how many countries that listen to the School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Rewind: Your Elevator Pitch [6:20]

                    I will be interviewed on a future Episode of the Purpose Rockstar podcast because my friend Kenn Blanchard was on an episode. When Derek (the host) ask Kenn to explain his three podcasts he had a quick pitch for each one. It was cocked and loaded and ready at a moments notice. I thought, "Wow that was cool" so I'm sharing it with you and asking the question, If someone asked you about your podcast do you have a short description (sometimes called an elevator pitch) of your show ready to go? Check out Kenn's Book "Black Man with a Gun" at Amazon.com

                    Insights into the Trek.fm Podcast Network [

                    Today we talk with Christopher Jones of the trek.fm network. Christopher has a background in media (magazines), media (he was a media buyer), design (he built his own website) and more. He shares his insights on how he started out wanting to do video podcasts, but took his one video show and turned it into 16+ audio shows including: The Ready Room Trek News and Views To the Journey (Voyager) The Orb Warp Five Literary Treks Matter Stream Hyperchannel Deck Eight Captain's Log Commentary Trek Stars

                    Media Issues

                    At first Christopher used his website host as a media host. When he got popular, that host told him he had four days to move over 700 episodes. He later moved to Amazon S3 (which always sounds inexpensive, but as you get billed for every single download - and you have a lot of episodes - it adds up to three (possible four) figure hosting bills). Christopher recommend Libsyn.com as he now pays one price for his hosting - no matter how many downloads he gets. You can get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree. Choosing Hosts Christopher goes through a detailed planning process when launching a new show. He makes sure there is enough content to support an ongoing show (if not it may just be a segment on another show). He uses his "round table" podcast to get to know potential hosts. Getting the right people is a large part of being a successful network. Leave Your Ego At the Door Chris treats all of the shows at trek.fm as equal. They all get the same exposure by being in the "all inclusive" feed. When he chooses a host, he is looking for someone who is all about: 1. Representing Star Trek in a professional manner 2. Boosting the network - not their specific downloads (not all about them) 3. Is open to other opinions, and can discuss different opinions in an open and honest discussion (without getting personal). Connect With Christopher @cbryanjones

                    ]]>Today we talk with Christopher Brian Jones of trek.fm about what its like to run a podcast network. We learn about some of the struggles he has had along the way, how he builds a relationship with the hosts on the network, abd creates a shared vision and brand. You will be amazed at how focused some of his shows are. If you are a fan of Star Trek, you definitely want to check out trek.fm or if you are an iTunes user check out http://www.itunes.com/trek.fm. Want to comment on the show call in your comments at 888-563-3228
                    Because of My Podcast - Bill Hutchison

                    Bill Hutchison is a missionary living in Australia. He produces the YWAM Podcast. Due to his wife having some medical issues, Bill can't leave her alone for long periods of time. However, because of podcasting, Bill can still reach a global audience. He is able to share his relationship with Jesus Christ. Here is a map that shows how many countries that listen to the School of Podcasting

                    Podcast Rewind: Your Elevator Pitch [6:20]

                    I will be interviewed on a future Episode of the Purpose Rockstar podcast because my friend Kenn Blanchard was on an episode. When Derek (the host) ask Kenn to explain his three podcasts he had a quick pitch for each one. It was cocked and loaded and ready at a moments notice. I thought, "Wow that was cool" so I'm sharing it with you and asking the question, If someone asked you about your podcast do you have a short description (sometimes called an elevator pitch) of your show ready to go? Check out Kenn's Book "Black Man with a Gun" at Amazon.com

                    Insights into the Trek.fm Podcast Network [

                    Today we talk with Christopher Jones of the trek.fm network. Christopher has a background in media (magazines), media (he was a media buyer), design (he built his own website) and more. He shares his insights on how he started out wanting to do video podcasts, but took his one video show and turned it into 16+ audio shows including: The Ready Room Trek News and Views To the Journey (Voyager) The Orb Warp Five Literary Treks Matter Stream Hyperchannel Deck Eight Captain's Log Commentary Trek Stars

                    Media Issues

                    At first Christopher used his website host as a media host. When he got popular, that host told him he had four days to move over 700 episodes. He later moved to Amazon S3 (which always sounds inexpensive, but as you get billed for every single download - and you have a lot of episodes - it adds up to three (possible four) figure hosting bills). Christopher recommend Libsyn.com as he now pays one price for his hosting - no matter how many downloads he gets. You can get a free month at Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree. Choosing Hosts Christopher goes through a detailed planning process when launching a new show. He makes sure there is enough content to support an ongoing show (if not it may just be a segment on another show). He uses his "round table" podcast to get to know potential hosts. Getting the right people is a large part of being a successful network. Leave Your Ego At the Door Chris treats all of the shows at trek.fm as equal. They all get the same exposure by being in the "all inclusive" feed. When he chooses a host, he is looking for someone who is all about: 1. Representing Star Trek in a professional manner 2. Boosting the network - not their specific downloads (not all about them) 3. Is open to other opinions, and can discuss different opinions in an open and honest discussion (without getting personal). Connect With Christopher @cbryanjones

                    ]]>5d2e2fd9b00b3c6ff6a82ee451caac5eSun, 08 Jun 2014 14:41:50 -040055:34falsefull412412How To Tell If Your Podcast Is On TargetAre you dreading your podcast? Are you not happy with the results you're getting. Today we ask some questions to help you get your ducks in a row. We help you see if the goals for your podcast are aligned with the content that you readers want to hear. We also look to see if the goal of your podcast is in alignment with your life. This is episode 411 and I deeply apprecaite you taking the time to listen. I would love to hear from you. You can reach me at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
                    Cedric the Entertainer Launches a Podcast "Whole Damn World"

                    Cedric the entertainer has launched his own podcast to talk about "this crazy world." He is a farily well known name (he's appeared in movies, does stand up, and recently hosted "Who wants to be a millionaire.").

                    Updates On Last Week's Show About Podcast Media Hosting (4:00)

                    I email soundcloud.com as I could no longer find the direct link to the mp3 file to put on my website. Their response was dig it out of the RSS feed and sent me a link to my RSS feed, and a screenshot of where the file was. This is not convenient, and furthers my thoughts that this is just not ready for prime time. They have been in beta for THREE YEARS. Also I said that a media host should NOT mess with my file. What I upload is what I want to download. If a visitor uses the download link they get your file (great). However, the file that is included in the RSS feed has it's name changed to a rather lengthy name. I was testing this on my Jillian Michaels Fan cast and the original file was titled, "jmp43_052914.mp3 "  and the file available for download is "152162769-podcastcoach-podcast-review-show-ask-the.mp3" which to me is messing with my brand. Mike Phillips of Computer2know.com let me know that if you Google the address to podbean it comes up as a virtual office. Lawyers often will use these to look more official than they might be at the time. I'm not saying that this is what podbean.com is doing, but I do find it odd. If you missed it, you can check out last week's episode.

                    How Do I Update My Wordpress Theme? [7:08]

                    Justin from braverbytheday.com is using Opimizepress and is thinking of leaving this file and wants to know how to move to a new theme. In some cases you can simply switch themes in the wordpress dashboard. A wordpress theme is like, "Clothes" for your website. The content is the same, but the look is different. One way to test things before publishing them is to use software like WPSimulator (affiliate link) that allows you to run Wordpress on your PC computer. Once you get it finished, you can upload it to the web. Another (cheaper) alternative is to buy a domain name, and create what others call a "Staging" site. Then once it's done here, you simply move it to the "real" site. In some cases you web host will allow you to have more than one domain under the same account.

                    Live Training Classes - Podcast Equipment and Podcast Reviews[11:25]

                    The next live class in the "how to podcast" line is How to choose the right podcast equipment. It is going to be Saturday June 7th at Noon EST (if you can't make that time you can get the recording). For more information go to www.howtopodcast.com Erik K Johnson and I do a Podcast Review Show, and we are looking to stockpile a bunch of reviews so we are offering 50% off with the coupon sop50 when you go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Backblaze Saved My Podcast[14:26]

                    As a computer instructor I know how to manage the files. I'm here to tell you I had a folder just disappear. It was weird. I didn't accidnetally drag it into another folder. I didn't accidentally delete it (it was not in the trash can). Luckily I use backblaze.com and I was able to go get all the files (transition music, artwork) for my podcast and restore the files. It was very weird, but by far the best $5 a month I will ever spend. I know Scott Johnson of computertutorflorida.com (a future guest) uses MyPCBackup

                    Connect with Other Podcasters UK Podcasters August 6th

                    Saturday, August 16, 2014 from 9:00 AM to 11:00 PM (BST)

                    Birmingham, United Kingdom Tickets are £12.00 Podcast Movement August 16-17 in Dallas Texas (I'll be speaking at this one). Tickets: $129 Is Your Podcast Out of Alignment? [19:04]

                    Why Do You Want to Get Into Podcasting? To Reach a Global Audience To promote your product or service To Network with like minded people To be seen as an expert To Educate To Inspire To Entertain To make money What Do You Want To Talk about? This should be something you want to talk about all the time, you think about all the time. Who Do you want to listen? The more detailed a picture you have, the better your content will. What do I hear about the why? People were missing something, I wanted to add to the conversation I had a background in radio. –This is why you are capable, but not why you should start. This is why if you start, you’ll be slightly ahead of the game. A person has experience as a public speaker. They decide to “nice down” and do a podcast an interview small business owners. They want companies that are between 1 and 20 employees, and do less than 1 million a year. They want to hear about the trials that the small business person went through to build their business. They might even focus on business local to their area. What does your content do for your audience? How does it make them feel? What do you want people to do with your content? What does your content do for your audience? Do You Have the Time to Do it RIGHT? Plan on spending four minutes for every minute of podcast. That’s to create the show. How much time is left in your life to promote the show you just created? Does this mean you don't podcast? NO! It means you make shorter episodes (or publish less frequently). What – Your topic, your passion, Who – Your audience. What do they want to hear? What do you want them to DO with your content? Why – Position the topics that your audience wants to hear so that they are aligned with your goals. How – Does the format (interviews?), length, and publishing schedule align with your life and goals for the podcast.

                    Is your Podcast In Alignment?

                    I would love to hear your thoughts on the matter? If not, what needs tweaked? Let me know here

                    Join the School of Podcasting
                    ]]>Are you dreading your podcast? Are you not happy with the results you're getting. Today we ask some questions to help you get your ducks in a row. We help you see if the goals for your podcast are aligned with the content that you readers want to hear. We also look to see if the goal of your podcast is in alignment with your life. This is episode 411 and I deeply apprecaite you taking the time to listen. I would love to hear from you. You can reach me at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact
                    Cedric the Entertainer Launches a Podcast "Whole Damn World"

                    Cedric the entertainer has launched his own podcast to talk about "this crazy world." He is a farily well known name (he's appeared in movies, does stand up, and recently hosted "Who wants to be a millionaire.").

                    Updates On Last Week's Show About Podcast Media Hosting (4:00)

                    I email soundcloud.com as I could no longer find the direct link to the mp3 file to put on my website. Their response was dig it out of the RSS feed and sent me a link to my RSS feed, and a screenshot of where the file was. This is not convenient, and furthers my thoughts that this is just not ready for prime time. They have been in beta for THREE YEARS. Also I said that a media host should NOT mess with my file. What I upload is what I want to download. If a visitor uses the download link they get your file (great). However, the file that is included in the RSS feed has it's name changed to a rather lengthy name. I was testing this on my Jillian Michaels Fan cast and the original file was titled, "jmp43_052914.mp3 "  and the file available for download is "152162769-podcastcoach-podcast-review-show-ask-the.mp3" which to me is messing with my brand. Mike Phillips of Computer2know.com let me know that if you Google the address to podbean it comes up as a virtual office. Lawyers often will use these to look more official than they might be at the time. I'm not saying that this is what podbean.com is doing, but I do find it odd. If you missed it, you can check out last week's episode.

                    How Do I Update My Wordpress Theme? [7:08]

                    Justin from braverbytheday.com is using Opimizepress and is thinking of leaving this file and wants to know how to move to a new theme. In some cases you can simply switch themes in the wordpress dashboard. A wordpress theme is like, "Clothes" for your website. The content is the same, but the look is different. One way to test things before publishing them is to use software like WPSimulator (affiliate link) that allows you to run Wordpress on your PC computer. Once you get it finished, you can upload it to the web. Another (cheaper) alternative is to buy a domain name, and create what others call a "Staging" site. Then once it's done here, you simply move it to the "real" site. In some cases you web host will allow you to have more than one domain under the same account.

                    Live Training Classes - Podcast Equipment and Podcast Reviews[11:25]

                    The next live class in the "how to podcast" line is How to choose the right podcast equipment. It is going to be Saturday June 7th at Noon EST (if you can't make that time you can get the recording). For more information go to www.howtopodcast.com Erik K Johnson and I do a Podcast Review Show, and we are looking to stockpile a bunch of reviews so we are offering 50% off with the coupon sop50 when you go to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                    Backblaze Saved My Podcast[14:26]

                    As a computer instructor I know how to manage the files. I'm here to tell you I had a folder just disappear. It was weird. I didn't accidnetally drag it into another folder. I didn't accidentally delete it (it was not in the trash can). Luckily I use backblaze.com and I was able to go get all the files (transition music, artwork) for my podcast and restore the files. It was very weird, but by far the best $5 a month I will ever spend. I know Scott Johnson of computertutorflorida.com (a future guest) uses MyPCBackup

                    Connect with Other Podcasters UK Podcasters August 6th

                    Saturday, August 16, 2014 from 9:00 AM to 11:00 PM (BST)

                    Birmingham, United Kingdom Tickets are £12.00 Podcast Movement August 16-17 in Dallas Texas (I'll be speaking at this one). Tickets: $129 Is Your Podcast Out of Alignment? [19:04]

                    Why Do You Want to Get Into Podcasting? To Reach a Global Audience To promote your product or service To Network with like minded people To be seen as an expert To Educate To Inspire To Entertain To make money What Do You Want To Talk about? This should be something you want to talk about all the time, you think about all the time. Who Do you want to listen? The more detailed a picture you have, the better your content will. What do I hear about the why? People were missing something, I wanted to add to the conversation I had a background in radio. –This is why you are capable, but not why you should start. This is why if you start, you’ll be slightly ahead of the game. A person has experience as a public speaker. They decide to “nice down” and do a podcast an interview small business owners. They want companies that are between 1 and 20 employees, and do less than 1 million a year. They want to hear about the trials that the small business person went through to build their business. They might even focus on business local to their area. What does your content do for your audience? How does it make them feel? What do you want people to do with your content? What does your content do for your audience? Do You Have the Time to Do it RIGHT? Plan on spending four minutes for every minute of podcast. That’s to create the show. How much time is left in your life to promote the show you just created? Does this mean you don't podcast? NO! It means you make shorter episodes (or publish less frequently). What – Your topic, your passion, Who – Your audience. What do they want to hear? What do you want them to DO with your content? Why – Position the topics that your audience wants to hear so that they are aligned with your goals. How – Does the format (interviews?), length, and publishing schedule align with your life and goals for the podcast.

                    Is your Podcast In Alignment?

                    I would love to hear your thoughts on the matter? If not, what needs tweaked? Let me know here

                    Join the School of Podcasting
                    ]]>97fbf5c63bd63008f25a0f948d81d792Sun, 01 Jun 2014 13:36:33 -040045:00falsefull411411Is Soundcloud A Legitimate Option for Podcasting?Today we tackle the hype around soundcloud.com as a podcasting solution and compare it to some of the other top podcast media solutions that have been around. I apply my criteria, and see who makes it, and share my opinion on why some of them still make me nervous. 

                    Note: For the record you can get a free month at blubrry.com or Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree you will see that even though using those codes benefits me financially, those companies don't always finish on top. 

                    The Opening Players

                    Amazon S3Buzzsprout.comPodomatic.comLibsyn.comBlubrry.comPodbean.comSpreaker.comSoundcloud.com

                    My Criteria

                    1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download.2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage)3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth)4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script.5. Give me support.6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate.

                    This kills the following:

                    Amazon S3. No stats, and your start cheap, but get really expensive if I get popular. (my last bill was over $40).Podmatic - Limited bandwidth, limited storage, and no way to leave (you hijack my feed)Buzzsprout.com - You change my file, and I have to ask to leave.Spreaker.com - You mess with my ID3 tags, and there is no way to leave.

                    That leaves:Soundcloud.comLibsyn.comBlubrry.comPodbean.com

                    Pricing

                    I tried to get the hosts to line up in a fashion that we could compare apples to apples. It's not easy. For the most part I chose the price point closest to $20.  Here is what I found.

                    Soundcloud is the cheapest coming in at .0021 per meg (that's almost free)Podbean comes in at .03 per meg of storage  (300 megs per month)Libsyn.com comes in at .05 per meg (400 megs per month)Blubrry.com comes in at .08 per meg (250 Megs per month)

                    Note: If you want stats that provide details of where your downloads are coming from (countries) you need to have the $79 a month plan for 1.5 gigabytes of storage (which is overkill in 99% of the cases). With this in mind, I am taking podbean out of most of this discussion.

                    For me, I typically recommend the Libsyn.com account for $20. You get more than enough space and the ability to get a smart phone app. You also get deluxe stats.

                    Player

                    1. Soundcloud wins this one hands down. Reason? It's just cool. Does everything but play in a new window.2. Blubrry Powerpress plugin provides the ability to stream, play in new window, or download.3. Libsyn's player can do the same as the Powerpress player with some tweaking

                    My choice: I use the blubrry powerpress plugin to put a player on my site (you can use this even if you're not using Blubrry for hosting). Why not Soundcloud? Because soundcloud stats are not integrated with Libsyn or blubrry like Stitcher stats (hello Soundcloud if you're going to be in this space you better meet your neighbors). This means using soundcloud and another host will require you to check your stats in more than one place. At this point I'm getting negligible plays from the soundcloud website.

                    My favorite player for putting in a sidebar is the one from the Blubrry network (free).

                    Stats

                    Blubrry and Libsyn stats are very simliar with a slight edge to Blubrry for being more user friendly. Libsyn actually gives you more information (cities). Soundcloud can give you some of this information but not the platform (iphone, windows, etc) that Blubrry.com and Libsyn.com

                    1. Blubrry.com - great content, pretty, and easy to understand and exportable. Blubrry.com offers free stats that show downloads and a few other items.2. Libsyn.com - very similar to blubrry.com (each shows some items the other does not) and exportable. If you're not using the $20 a month plan you get a download numbers only stats.3. Soundcloud - Basic stats with some geographic location.4. Podean.com - as mentioned earlier their stats are pitiful (download only, and can only be viewed one episode at a time) unless you 're using the $79/month.

                    Unique Capabilities

                    Soudcloud

                    Soundcloud's player is one of the coolest things on the planet. It makes your content easy to share, it works everywhere you can add a button to the player (for purchasing something, itunes, etc). The one thing it doesn't do is offer the ability to play in a new window.

                    Blubrry.com

                    Blubrry's key is ease of publishing. Once your audio file is done, you can enter your show notes (blog post) and when you upload the file it will take the title of your post and add it to the mp3 file in the ID3 tags. It will also "tag" the other fields in your file.

                    You do all of this from within the blubrry interface.

                    Blubrry.com has a distribution on the following:

                    • Roku TV Box
                    • Boxee TV Box
                    • GoogleTV
                    • Android
                    • LookeeTV
                    • Samsung SmartTV
                    • And More!
                    
                    

                    Libsyn.com

                    Libsyn has a quick publish feature where you can enter your ID3 tags, and upload the file using an FTP software to a specific folder. The information from within your media file is then used to create an episode post on Libsyn.com This posting can then be replicated on your WordPress site, facebook page, tumblr.com, blogger.com, Linkedincom, youtube.com

                    If you have $20 a month plan or higher, you can get a smartphone app for your podcast for free. You can charge people for this, or you can spend a little money to get an Apple developer's license and give it away for free (you do need to pay an $10 a month to libsyn as they will provide the customer support for the app).

                    Libsyn also offers the ability to sell your back catalog. Top podcasters Marc Maron, Adam Corolla and others use this tool which you can find here.

                    Podbean

                    ]]>Today we tackle the hype around soundcloud.com as a podcasting solution and compare it to some of the other top podcast media solutions that have been around. I apply my criteria, and see who makes it, and share my opinion on why some of them still make me nervous. 

                    Note: For the record you can get a free month at blubrry.com or Libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree you will see that even though using those codes benefits me financially, those companies don't always finish on top. 

                    The Opening Players

                    Amazon S3Buzzsprout.comPodomatic.comLibsyn.comBlubrry.comPodbean.comSpreaker.comSoundcloud.com

                    My Criteria

                    1. Don't mess with my file. What I upload is what I want people to download.2. Give me the ability to have an unlimited back catalog (unlimited storage)3. Don't limit my audience size (unlimited bandwidth)4. Don't control my feed, and make it easy to leave if I choose to do so. I need to be able to put in an iTunes redirect script.5. Give me support.6. Charge me for your service so you can stay in business7. Give me stats so I can see what's working. It would be nice if they were accurate.

                    This kills the following:

                    Amazon S3. No stats, and your start cheap, but get really expensive if I get popular. (my last bill was over $40).Podmatic - Limited bandwidth, limited storage, and no way to leave (you hijack my feed)Buzzsprout.com - You change my file, and I have to ask to leave.Spreaker.com - You mess with my ID3 tags, and there is no way to leave.

                    That leaves:Soundcloud.comLibsyn.comBlubrry.comPodbean.com

                    Pricing

                    I tried to get the hosts to line up in a fashion that we could compare apples to apples. It's not easy. For the most part I chose the price point closest to $20.  Here is what I found.

                    Soundcloud is the cheapest coming in at .0021 per meg (that's almost free)Podbean comes in at .03 per meg of storage  (300 megs per month)Libsyn.com comes in at .05 per meg (400 megs per month)Blubrry.com comes in at .08 per meg (250 Megs per month)

                    Note: If you want stats that provide details of where your downloads are coming from (countries) you need to have the $79 a month plan for 1.5 gigabytes of storage (which is overkill in 99% of the cases). With this in mind, I am taking podbean out of most of this discussion.

                    For me, I typically recommend the Libsyn.com account for $20. You get more than enough space and the ability to get a smart phone app. You also get deluxe stats.

                    Player

                    1. Soundcloud wins this one hands down. Reason? It's just cool. Does everything but play in a new window.2. Blubrry Powerpress plugin provides the ability to stream, play in new window, or download.3. Libsyn's player can do the same as the Powerpress player with some tweaking

                    My choice: I use the blubrry powerpress plugin to put a player on my site (you can use this even if you're not using Blubrry for hosting). Why not Soundcloud? Because soundcloud stats are not integrated with Libsyn or blubrry like Stitcher stats (hello Soundcloud if you're going to be in this space you better meet your neighbors). This means using soundcloud and another host will require you to check your stats in more than one place. At this point I'm getting negligible plays from the soundcloud website.

                    My favorite player for putting in a sidebar is the one from the Blubrry network (free).

                    Stats

                    Blubrry and Libsyn stats are very simliar with a slight edge to Blubrry for being more user friendly. Libsyn actually gives you more information (cities). Soundcloud can give you some of this information but not the platform (iphone, windows, etc) that Blubrry.com and Libsyn.com

                    1. Blubrry.com - great content, pretty, and easy to understand and exportable. Blubrry.com offers free stats that show downloads and a few other items.2. Libsyn.com - very similar to blubrry.com (each shows some items the other does not) and exportable. If you're not using the $20 a month plan you get a download numbers only stats.3. Soundcloud - Basic stats with some geographic location.4. Podean.com - as mentioned earlier their stats are pitiful (download only, and can only be viewed one episode at a time) unless you 're using the $79/month.

                    Unique Capabilities

                    Soudcloud

                    Soundcloud's player is one of the coolest things on the planet. It makes your content easy to share, it works everywhere you can add a button to the player (for purchasing something, itunes, etc). The one thing it doesn't do is offer the ability to play in a new window.

                    Blubrry.com

                    Blubrry's key is ease of publishing. Once your audio file is done, you can enter your show notes (blog post) and when you upload the file it will take the title of your post and add it to the mp3 file in the ID3 tags. It will also "tag" the other fields in your file.

                    You do all of this from within the blubrry interface.

                    Blubrry.com has a distribution on the following:

                    • Roku TV Box
                    • Boxee TV Box
                    • GoogleTV
                    • Android
                    • LookeeTV
                    • Samsung SmartTV
                    • And More!
                    
                    

                    Libsyn.com

                    Libsyn has a quick publish feature where you can enter your ID3 tags, and upload the file using an FTP software to a specific folder. The information from within your media file is then used to create an episode post on Libsyn.com This posting can then be replicated on your WordPress site, facebook page, tumblr.com, blogger.com, Linkedincom, youtube.com

                    If you have $20 a month plan or higher, you can get a smartphone app for your podcast for free. You can charge people for this, or you can spend a little money to get an Apple developer's license and give it away for free (you do need to pay an $10 a month to libsyn as they will provide the customer support for the app).

                    Libsyn also offers the ability to sell your back catalog. Top podcasters Marc Maron, Adam Corolla and others use this tool which you can find here.

                    Podbean

                    For $79 a month, you can manage your mailing list through podbean (or you can use a tool like Awber designed to handle mailing lists).

                    Frequently Asked Podcast Questions on Soundcloud

                    Can I have more than one podcast on Soundcloud? Kind of. I have all my old outdated (out if print if you will) shows on there as a test. There is only one RSS feed. If you are using your own website and rss feed you could use them as "just a media host."

                    What's the limitation of their free account? You can only upload a certain amount of files. When I first played with them, I would have to delete a file to upload a new one.

                    Fishy Things About Podbean and SoundCloud

                    While Libsyn and Blubrry have representatives in all of the podcasting communities. They are at our conventions. We know them by name. Todd, Mike, Angelo, Rob, Elsie, Krystal. Podbean and Soundcloud have no presence that I've seen. They have their websites and pretty much that's it.

                    Pobean does not list their address on their website. If you want it its:

                    501 Silverside Road, Suite 105 , Wilmington , DE , 19809 , United StatesPhone: +1 514 969 1917

                    Why would you not list your address unless you don't want to be found?

                    Soundcloud has been around since 2008

                    5 million official SoundCloud apps have been downloaded. In 20012 they celebrated 10 million sound creators.

                    according to crunch base they've receive 123 million. In 2014 they received 60 million. Yet their podcasting tools are in beta, and you have to request to be in it.

                    Why is this still in beta after three years (it launched in January of 2011)?

                     Summary

                    So is Soundcloud a legitimate podcast solution? They do pass all of my criteria, so with that I could say yes. For me, I am still a little nervous about a system that's been in development for THREE YEARS and has not come out of beta. I think their interfaceS (remember they are in the middle up upgrading heir interface) makes their system unfriendly, and their stats are not on par with the two companies I recommend which are Blubrry.com and Libsyn.com

                    I am using them as an additional distribution point to see if I get any traction over there. In reality, like any other platform, you get out of it what you put into it.

                    Shout Outs!

                    Thanks to Neil, "You were wrong Dave" Smith of undercountryradio.com for sharing his pain.

                    Check out the UK Podcasters event if you're in the UK

                    Joing the School of Podcasting today and avoid the pains of podcasting, or take a live coaching class

                    ]]>e0c4bc7c1b2ce93e4ca04fb0b59539e4Mon, 26 May 2014 03:22:55 -040001:05:42falsefull410410Polishing Your Content - The Joys of Podcast Editing“So the writer who breeds more words than he needs, is making a chore for the reader who reads.” - Dr. Seuss “I've found the best way to revise your own work is to pretend that somebody else wrote it and then to rip the living shit out of it.” ? Don Roff “You write to communicate to the hearts and minds of others what’s burning inside you, and we edit to let the fire show through the smoke.” - Arthur Plotnik I love editing. It's one of my favorite parts about filmmaking. Steven Spielberg. When I was in California for a new Media Expo, one my my friends scored ticket to the Tonight Show and my wife and I were able to Go. Jay Leno came out and I'm still not sure what happened (it might've been a cue card issue) but he stopped, and he went back behind the curtain and they did the whole intro again. Obviously, the first intro never made it to air. They do a thing called editing that takes the hard work that you've put into finding a topic, and it makes sure you don't get in your own way. I know improve can be electrifying, but in my travels (see Second City in Chicago and a couple improv groups here in Cleveland) most improv sucks. It could be funny, buy it needs this thing called editing. There are movies where people are paid lots of money to read words into a camera. We've all been in a movie that would've been better had it moved quicker. It woud've been better if they left a part out. It would've been better if they had done this thing called editing. The Gold Rules of Content Editing - Listen Through the Ears Of Your Audience 1. When I edit my show, I'm listening through the ears of my target audience. I listen to see if we are on topic. If I'm not if I should cut something, I always ask WWMAD (what would my audience do). 2. It should never sound edited. There will be times when Skype burbs, and you have almost nothing to piece together - I get that. But if you go to cut out an "Um" and the person said, "UuuuuumI think that.." and it's to hard to get the Um out without it sounding weird then leave it it. 3. If you want someone to promote it, they better sound good. These are my opinion/rules do with them what you will.
                    Podcasting Is All About Being Real Right - Why Edit?

                    When podcasting first came on the scene in 2004 you could use your built in microphone and just talk. Much like Milton Berle was the king of TV in the 50's you could be the king of podcasting. Looking back you had a choice of watching Milton Bele or a test pattern. In 2004 you had about 50 podcasts to compete with. Guess what? TEN YEARS later podcasters are spending hundreds of dollars on microphones and using dedicated media hosts and interviewing A list celebrities. You can't just wing it. Wait, I take that back. YOU CAN. The question is should you. I'm here to throw my vote as a yes. I edit my podcast. I love this quote: "“You write to communicate to the hearts and minds of others what’s burning inside you, and we edit to let the fire show through the smoke.” - Arthur Plotnik." 

                    The Real Reason People Don't Edit Their Podcast

                    It takes time, and from my days of being a public speaker - it's harder to do a 15 minute presentation than a 30 minute presentation as you have to pick out the key points and hit them well.

                    Editing (and Podcasting) Can Be a Lot of Work - How to Fix That

                    Be Prepared - One of the reasons we have "ums" is our brain is trying to figure out what to say next. SLOW DOWN, and you will have less ums to worry about.  If you're doing an interview, have some questions planned to use as a "game plan" that you can refer to if the conversation needs a poke. Don't Mess With Your Stuff -  If possible set your equipment up and leave it. This eliminates technical issues in the future.

                    Give Your Guest a Target

                    Here again, the more you "Wing it" the more you will be editing later. If you are doing interviews, it is your responsibility to give your guest a target. Let them know you might pause between questions, this helps to avoid the "over answer" (more on that later). Let them know what to expect. Let Your Guest Know Who They are Talking To I do a number of podcasts. I was asked what my favorite book. I had a very vague idea who the audience was for this audience. I want to deliver great content. I want to provide life changing answers. So I gave a book that I like to read, and hoped his audience might find if useful. Let Your Guests Know How Long the Interview Should Approximately Be I was recently interviewed for the Boomer Business Owner podcast. The host of the show sent me to a link that help me understand who I was talking to, and what they were looking for in regards to answer length. If you ask me how I got into podcasting I have a 30 second answer and a 5 minute answer. Which one would you like? Here is another great site from Jim Collison that helps him prep his guests. Politely Cutting People Off My buddy Erik K Johnson of Podcast Talent Coach (and one of the co-hosts of the Podcast Review show) he had mentioned that when someone starts to take a tangent you can politely interrupt them and ask them for more details on whatever they just mentioned (and to get them back on track). It seems rude, but you're guiding them back to the information that you know your audience will enjoy. (see Erik and I talk about this)

                    What To Listen For When it Comes to Editing Audio

                    Train Wrecks - These are obvious. You hit the wrong button, your guest starts dropping F bombs, you have 30 seconds of silence in the middle of your show etc. You don't have to look for these they hit you in the face Low Hanging Fruit - These are the "ums" and "ya knows" that stand alone. If the idea is to make you (or you guest) sound smart you can easily highlight them and press delete. If Your Guest Answers "No" to a Question - In most cases finding out that someone is NOT doing something is not helpful. Over Answer - This is where your guest answers your question and then there is a pause (maybe you're looking for the next question) however they think you are wanting more information so they start to answer the question with more unnecessary details. Listen for the Answer to the question - In many cases the guest may give you details that are not needed (off topic etc). My favorite is when you ask a guest a question and they say,  "Well first I want to tell you about..." TMI - In some cases a guest will give you too much information. You asked them what they had for lunch, and they tell you how they cooked it, what they used to eat it, etc. Tangents - Look we all love to take a tangent. The problem is in the middle of the tanget you take a tangent. This is followed by another tangent. You get so far off topic that its not longer useful information.

                    ]]>“So the writer who breeds more words than he needs, is making a chore for the reader who reads.” - Dr. Seuss “I've found the best way to revise your own work is to pretend that somebody else wrote it and then to rip the living shit out of it.” ? Don Roff “You write to communicate to the hearts and minds of others what’s burning inside you, and we edit to let the fire show through the smoke.” - Arthur Plotnik I love editing. It's one of my favorite parts about filmmaking. Steven Spielberg. When I was in California for a new Media Expo, one my my friends scored ticket to the Tonight Show and my wife and I were able to Go. Jay Leno came out and I'm still not sure what happened (it might've been a cue card issue) but he stopped, and he went back behind the curtain and they did the whole intro again. Obviously, the first intro never made it to air. They do a thing called editing that takes the hard work that you've put into finding a topic, and it makes sure you don't get in your own way. I know improve can be electrifying, but in my travels (see Second City in Chicago and a couple improv groups here in Cleveland) most improv sucks. It could be funny, buy it needs this thing called editing. There are movies where people are paid lots of money to read words into a camera. We've all been in a movie that would've been better had it moved quicker. It woud've been better if they left a part out. It would've been better if they had done this thing called editing. The Gold Rules of Content Editing - Listen Through the Ears Of Your Audience 1. When I edit my show, I'm listening through the ears of my target audience. I listen to see if we are on topic. If I'm not if I should cut something, I always ask WWMAD (what would my audience do). 2. It should never sound edited. There will be times when Skype burbs, and you have almost nothing to piece together - I get that. But if you go to cut out an "Um" and the person said, "UuuuuumI think that.." and it's to hard to get the Um out without it sounding weird then leave it it. 3. If you want someone to promote it, they better sound good. These are my opinion/rules do with them what you will.
                    Podcasting Is All About Being Real Right - Why Edit?

                    When podcasting first came on the scene in 2004 you could use your built in microphone and just talk. Much like Milton Berle was the king of TV in the 50's you could be the king of podcasting. Looking back you had a choice of watching Milton Bele or a test pattern. In 2004 you had about 50 podcasts to compete with. Guess what? TEN YEARS later podcasters are spending hundreds of dollars on microphones and using dedicated media hosts and interviewing A list celebrities. You can't just wing it. Wait, I take that back. YOU CAN. The question is should you. I'm here to throw my vote as a yes. I edit my podcast. I love this quote: "“You write to communicate to the hearts and minds of others what’s burning inside you, and we edit to let the fire show through the smoke.” - Arthur Plotnik." 

                    The Real Reason People Don't Edit Their Podcast

                    It takes time, and from my days of being a public speaker - it's harder to do a 15 minute presentation than a 30 minute presentation as you have to pick out the key points and hit them well.

                    Editing (and Podcasting) Can Be a Lot of Work - How to Fix That

                    Be Prepared - One of the reasons we have "ums" is our brain is trying to figure out what to say next. SLOW DOWN, and you will have less ums to worry about.  If you're doing an interview, have some questions planned to use as a "game plan" that you can refer to if the conversation needs a poke. Don't Mess With Your Stuff -  If possible set your equipment up and leave it. This eliminates technical issues in the future.

                    Give Your Guest a Target

                    Here again, the more you "Wing it" the more you will be editing later. If you are doing interviews, it is your responsibility to give your guest a target. Let them know you might pause between questions, this helps to avoid the "over answer" (more on that later). Let them know what to expect. Let Your Guest Know Who They are Talking To I do a number of podcasts. I was asked what my favorite book. I had a very vague idea who the audience was for this audience. I want to deliver great content. I want to provide life changing answers. So I gave a book that I like to read, and hoped his audience might find if useful. Let Your Guests Know How Long the Interview Should Approximately Be I was recently interviewed for the Boomer Business Owner podcast. The host of the show sent me to a link that help me understand who I was talking to, and what they were looking for in regards to answer length. If you ask me how I got into podcasting I have a 30 second answer and a 5 minute answer. Which one would you like? Here is another great site from Jim Collison that helps him prep his guests. Politely Cutting People Off My buddy Erik K Johnson of Podcast Talent Coach (and one of the co-hosts of the Podcast Review show) he had mentioned that when someone starts to take a tangent you can politely interrupt them and ask them for more details on whatever they just mentioned (and to get them back on track). It seems rude, but you're guiding them back to the information that you know your audience will enjoy. (see Erik and I talk about this)

                    What To Listen For When it Comes to Editing Audio

                    Train Wrecks - These are obvious. You hit the wrong button, your guest starts dropping F bombs, you have 30 seconds of silence in the middle of your show etc. You don't have to look for these they hit you in the face Low Hanging Fruit - These are the "ums" and "ya knows" that stand alone. If the idea is to make you (or you guest) sound smart you can easily highlight them and press delete. If Your Guest Answers "No" to a Question - In most cases finding out that someone is NOT doing something is not helpful. Over Answer - This is where your guest answers your question and then there is a pause (maybe you're looking for the next question) however they think you are wanting more information so they start to answer the question with more unnecessary details. Listen for the Answer to the question - In many cases the guest may give you details that are not needed (off topic etc). My favorite is when you ask a guest a question and they say,  "Well first I want to tell you about..." TMI - In some cases a guest will give you too much information. You asked them what they had for lunch, and they tell you how they cooked it, what they used to eat it, etc. Tangents - Look we all love to take a tangent. The problem is in the middle of the tanget you take a tangent. This is followed by another tangent. You get so far off topic that its not longer useful information.

                    ]]>5e0aeac5c9d379980908ef9b4ebf65d1Wed, 21 May 2014 03:55:35 -040001:00:06falsefull409409Business Podcasting Success Stories with Jon Buscall358528a8e087e5049b97a00e6f538e1bSun, 11 May 2014 22:41:28 -040056:26falsefull408408Podfading - What Is it? What Causes It? How to Avoid it Today we look at the topic of podfading. We are going to examine what it is, what are the top causes, and how to avoid - and ask if you should? We get help from Jim Collison, Ryan Parker, and Rev. Kenn Blanchard.
                    Your Audience Will Binge Listen When They Find You

                    Steve Steward produces the Moneyplan SOS podast (learn to pay attention instead of interest), and he had a listener who found his show and downloaded a ton of episodes and listened to them all as he went on a long trip in the car. Today we talk about making great content that connects with people, and obviously Steve is doing a great job.

                    What is Podfading?

                    Podfaing is when your show just stops producting content. There is no "final show" it just stops. The term was invented by Scott Fletcher of the now podfaded show Podcheck Review. According to the Urban Dictionary "A podcast that after a while becomes less and less frequently updated and then blinks out altogether."

                    The Top Six Reason People Podfade

                    According the the Book Tricks of the Podcasting Masters from Rob Walch and Murr Laferty (A great book from 2006) they list the top five reasons people podfade. Lack of time Lack of interest Lack of material Lack of listeners Lack of funds I add to this: Lack of FUN.

                    Lack of Time

                    If you TURN OFF YOUR TV, you will have time to podcast. But realize there is a 4 to 1 ration. This means that for every one minute of finished podcast it will take you four minutes to produce it. You need to know this up front so you don't say I'm going to do a 30 minute podcast 5 days a week. That's 150 minutes of total episode, so multiply that by 4 and you get 600 minutes of time to create those episodes (10 HOURS). Do you have an extra 10 hours PER WEEK (40 hours per month) to produce a show that will more than likely generate zero income for the first few months?

                    Lack of Interest

                    I once started a "Customer Service Show" where I spotlighted my experience as an award winning customer service representative. It turned out that I just reported on the bad customer service I received everywhere I went. I sounded like a grump old man. After a few shows, I just lost interest. I wasn't really that passionate about that topic. I thought I should podcast about what I know. You should podcast about what you are passionate about. If you are not interested in your topic, maybe bring in a co-host or mix up the format.

                    Lack of Materials

                    My wife and I did a "Dates from Hell Show" where we told stories of horrible dates we had experienced. We thought our audience would chime in with their stories. The bad news is we didn't have an audience, and nobody chimed in. I have a tutorial at the School of Podcasting that shows how to use the Website Feedly.com to have all sort of content come to you. Lack of material can change a podcast from Fun to "Feeling like work." That always leads to podfading.

                    Lack of Listeners

                    Never use the word "Only" when describing your download numbers. Last week I had 18 people in a classroom. If I "Only" had 70 downloads, that would be 3.5 classrooms of people. Currently according to Rob Walch the VP of Podcast relations at Libsyn.com the median download of a typical podcast is around 170 (as of May 2014). So 50% of podcasters have over 170, and the other 50% don't. With the right content, you can find yourself in the hundreds of downloads, and eventually the thousand of downloads. It takes time. It takes good content. It also takes you GOING to where your target audience is and networking with them.

                    Lack of Funds

                    Once you have purchased your equipment, the ongoing price of a podcast is around $30 a month (less if your shows are shorter). I've spoken about finding money to podcast in the past. If you want it, you can find it. Some of the things you can do is podcast in mono (it cuts your file size in half - which lowers your media hosting bill). Also if you "take a break" then you can lower your storage space on your media host to the lowest level (just to keep your account active) and then raise it back up when you return.

                    Lack of Fun

                    When you have no time, interest, or money for your podcast it becomes work. When you have to struggle to find content - GOOD content - it becomes a burden.

                    Consistently GOOD Content

                    While I'm not saying its OK to podcast "whenever you want," I would recommend keeping a schedule if you want to be seen as reliable. With this in mind 2 of the top 5 podcasts produce shows on varied lengths on various schedules. What they DO deliver on is great content when they do. These podcasts are the Joe Rogan experience and Dan Carlin's Hardcore History

                    Life Changing Events Lead To Podfading

                    Babies are wonderful bundles of joy, but they take over your life. Their schedule dictates YOUR schedule. When you move to a new location, or get a new job, or grow a spouse, etc. All of these can lead you to shifting your life's priorities. I'm here to say, "It's OK." Ryan Parker of the Food Craftsmen Podcast stated, "Nobody is going to punch you in the face."

                    Would You Punch Fonzie For Jumping the Shark?

                    Unless you're the Simpson's television show, most shows eventually stop production. Growing up I loved Happy Days, Cheers, Friends, Seinfeld, M*A*S*H, Family Ties, and more. They all eventually stopped. Do I hate the actors? No. I would love to shake Henry Winkler's hand. I think he is a phenomenal human being. Consequently, if you're no longer enjoying producing your podcast maybe you should shut it down. Let your audience know you're taking a break. If after the break is over, you still don't want to produce it - record one more episode and explain that you're done. Nobody will punch you in the face.

                    How to Avoid Permanently Podfading?

                    The first question to ask is should you avoid podfading. Ryan Park mentions that we well thought out podcast that has 15 episodes could be planned and produced with that in mind. You could say, "This is episode 1 of 15" and let the audience know that this is intentional. There is no rule that says you have to go on forever. One of the key steps to avoid podfading is to put some thought into it when you start. A properly planned podcast may help you avoid the starting - stopping - starting syndrome.

                    Obsessing on Stats and Your Competition Will Not Create Good Content

                    One of the things that STOP US from making great content is obsessing over stats. If we aren't looking at our download numbers, we are looking at our "Competition" and seeing how many sponsors they have. This (often) makes us envious and frustrated. Ken Blanchard speaks how he was one of the first Gun Shows on the Internet. Others have moved in over time and they have the magic touch and are getting sponsors. This leads many of use to think, "Hey what about me?" I know I think we all fall into this trap from time to time.

                    Get A Large Amount of Episodes Recorded Before You Launch

                    We all know that "Life happens" so if you have a life changing event, its nice to have a stockpile of podcast episodes to feed to your audience. If you don't you can always repurpose older shows that many not be so easy to find on your website, or are available in your feed anymore. Go in With Your Eyes Wide Open - Have Realistic Expectations If we just do the opposite of the above Set aside time Pick a topic we are uber-interested in Something we have a great stream of material We understand that growing an audience takes time. We shouldn't focus on "growing our audience fast" but instead, "What content would touch our audience the deepest?" We need to know that any hobby or small business costs money to maintain. $30 to reach a global audience is the best value on the internet. Lack of funds

                    How to Properly Podfade

                    If you know you are taking a hiatus (permanent or otherwise) it is always wise to keep you audience in the loop. Let them know when to expect you back. In the event you decide to call it quits, thank them for listening, and let them know where to find you. If you might come back, you may want to create a email list to alert people where they can sign up for future updates. Ryan Parker took a three month hiatus. He still created blog posts, and sent out email blasts, and in the end didn't see much of a dip in numbers. He was still communicating with his audience. He was just communicating in a different matter. Remember to lower your media hosting package to save money.

                    You Can Always Come Back

                    Rock bands like KISS, the Eagles, Cher, and others have done a "Last tour ever" tour. This is usually followed by the "We're out of money already" tour about four years later. There is no rule that says you can't come back. Just don't be surprised if you've lost some of your audience (possibly).

                    Looking To Start a Podcast?

                    If you'd like to avoid the headaches of podcasting, joing the School of Podcasting. Quit doing Google searches that result in bad advice from outdated websites, avoid the headaches, and avoid paying too much for podcast equipment and advice today. JOIN TODAY

                    ]]>Today we look at the topic of podfading. We are going to examine what it is, what are the top causes, and how to avoid - and ask if you should? We get help from Jim Collison, Ryan Parker, and Rev. Kenn Blanchard.
                    Your Audience Will Binge Listen When They Find You

                    Steve Steward produces the Moneyplan SOS podast (learn to pay attention instead of interest), and he had a listener who found his show and downloaded a ton of episodes and listened to them all as he went on a long trip in the car. Today we talk about making great content that connects with people, and obviously Steve is doing a great job.

                    What is Podfading?

                    Podfaing is when your show just stops producting content. There is no "final show" it just stops. The term was invented by Scott Fletcher of the now podfaded show Podcheck Review. According to the Urban Dictionary "A podcast that after a while becomes less and less frequently updated and then blinks out altogether."

                    The Top Six Reason People Podfade

                    According the the Book Tricks of the Podcasting Masters from Rob Walch and Murr Laferty (A great book from 2006) they list the top five reasons people podfade. Lack of time Lack of interest Lack of material Lack of listeners Lack of funds I add to this: Lack of FUN.

                    Lack of Time

                    If you TURN OFF YOUR TV, you will have time to podcast. But realize there is a 4 to 1 ration. This means that for every one minute of finished podcast it will take you four minutes to produce it. You need to know this up front so you don't say I'm going to do a 30 minute podcast 5 days a week. That's 150 minutes of total episode, so multiply that by 4 and you get 600 minutes of time to create those episodes (10 HOURS). Do you have an extra 10 hours PER WEEK (40 hours per month) to produce a show that will more than likely generate zero income for the first few months?

                    Lack of Interest

                    I once started a "Customer Service Show" where I spotlighted my experience as an award winning customer service representative. It turned out that I just reported on the bad customer service I received everywhere I went. I sounded like a grump old man. After a few shows, I just lost interest. I wasn't really that passionate about that topic. I thought I should podcast about what I know. You should podcast about what you are passionate about. If you are not interested in your topic, maybe bring in a co-host or mix up the format.

                    Lack of Materials

                    My wife and I did a "Dates from Hell Show" where we told stories of horrible dates we had experienced. We thought our audience would chime in with their stories. The bad news is we didn't have an audience, and nobody chimed in. I have a tutorial at the School of Podcasting that shows how to use the Website Feedly.com to have all sort of content come to you. Lack of material can change a podcast from Fun to "Feeling like work." That always leads to podfading.

                    Lack of Listeners

                    Never use the word "Only" when describing your download numbers. Last week I had 18 people in a classroom. If I "Only" had 70 downloads, that would be 3.5 classrooms of people. Currently according to Rob Walch the VP of Podcast relations at Libsyn.com the median download of a typical podcast is around 170 (as of May 2014). So 50% of podcasters have over 170, and the other 50% don't. With the right content, you can find yourself in the hundreds of downloads, and eventually the thousand of downloads. It takes time. It takes good content. It also takes you GOING to where your target audience is and networking with them.

                    Lack of Funds

                    Once you have purchased your equipment, the ongoing price of a podcast is around $30 a month (less if your shows are shorter). I've spoken about finding money to podcast in the past. If you want it, you can find it. Some of the things you can do is podcast in mono (it cuts your file size in half - which lowers your media hosting bill). Also if you "take a break" then you can lower your storage space on your media host to the lowest level (just to keep your account active) and then raise it back up when you return.

                    Lack of Fun

                    When you have no time, interest, or money for your podcast it becomes work. When you have to struggle to find content - GOOD content - it becomes a burden.

                    Consistently GOOD Content

                    While I'm not saying its OK to podcast "whenever you want," I would recommend keeping a schedule if you want to be seen as reliable. With this in mind 2 of the top 5 podcasts produce shows on varied lengths on various schedules. What they DO deliver on is great content when they do. These podcasts are the Joe Rogan experience and Dan Carlin's Hardcore History

                    Life Changing Events Lead To Podfading

                    Babies are wonderful bundles of joy, but they take over your life. Their schedule dictates YOUR schedule. When you move to a new location, or get a new job, or grow a spouse, etc. All of these can lead you to shifting your life's priorities. I'm here to say, "It's OK." Ryan Parker of the Food Craftsmen Podcast stated, "Nobody is going to punch you in the face."

                    Would You Punch Fonzie For Jumping the Shark?

                    Unless you're the Simpson's television show, most shows eventually stop production. Growing up I loved Happy Days, Cheers, Friends, Seinfeld, M*A*S*H, Family Ties, and more. They all eventually stopped. Do I hate the actors? No. I would love to shake Henry Winkler's hand. I think he is a phenomenal human being. Consequently, if you're no longer enjoying producing your podcast maybe you should shut it down. Let your audience know you're taking a break. If after the break is over, you still don't want to produce it - record one more episode and explain that you're done. Nobody will punch you in the face.

                    How to Avoid Permanently Podfading?

                    The first question to ask is should you avoid podfading. Ryan Park mentions that we well thought out podcast that has 15 episodes could be planned and produced with that in mind. You could say, "This is episode 1 of 15" and let the audience know that this is intentional. There is no rule that says you have to go on forever. One of the key steps to avoid podfading is to put some thought into it when you start. A properly planned podcast may help you avoid the starting - stopping - starting syndrome.

                    Obsessing on Stats and Your Competition Will Not Create Good Content

                    One of the things that STOP US from making great content is obsessing over stats. If we aren't looking at our download numbers, we are looking at our "Competition" and seeing how many sponsors they have. This (often) makes us envious and frustrated. Ken Blanchard speaks how he was one of the first Gun Shows on the Internet. Others have moved in over time and they have the magic touch and are getting sponsors. This leads many of use to think, "Hey what about me?" I know I think we all fall into this trap from time to time.

                    Get A Large Amount of Episodes Recorded Before You Launch

                    We all know that "Life happens" so if you have a life changing event, its nice to have a stockpile of podcast episodes to feed to your audience. If you don't you can always repurpose older shows that many not be so easy to find on your website, or are available in your feed anymore. Go in With Your Eyes Wide Open - Have Realistic Expectations If we just do the opposite of the above Set aside time Pick a topic we are uber-interested in Something we have a great stream of material We understand that growing an audience takes time. We shouldn't focus on "growing our audience fast" but instead, "What content would touch our audience the deepest?" We need to know that any hobby or small business costs money to maintain. $30 to reach a global audience is the best value on the internet. Lack of funds

                    How to Properly Podfade

                    If you know you are taking a hiatus (permanent or otherwise) it is always wise to keep you audience in the loop. Let them know when to expect you back. In the event you decide to call it quits, thank them for listening, and let them know where to find you. If you might come back, you may want to create a email list to alert people where they can sign up for future updates. Ryan Parker took a three month hiatus. He still created blog posts, and sent out email blasts, and in the end didn't see much of a dip in numbers. He was still communicating with his audience. He was just communicating in a different matter. Remember to lower your media hosting package to save money.

                    You Can Always Come Back

                    Rock bands like KISS, the Eagles, Cher, and others have done a "Last tour ever" tour. This is usually followed by the "We're out of money already" tour about four years later. There is no rule that says you can't come back. Just don't be surprised if you've lost some of your audience (possibly).

                    Looking To Start a Podcast?

                    If you'd like to avoid the headaches of podcasting, joing the School of Podcasting. Quit doing Google searches that result in bad advice from outdated websites, avoid the headaches, and avoid paying too much for podcast equipment and advice today. JOIN TODAY

                    ]]>99e7709574839af3ac1908910fade83bSun, 04 May 2014 16:59:51 -040001:01:09falsefull407407SEO Benefits of Podcasting - Podcasting 101 Jason Parsons - iTunes Myths DEBUNKEDToday on episode 406 we get a great because of my podcast story, we debunk the "8 week myth" in iTunes (thanks to Rob Walch from Libsyn.com), we hear about a new Wordpress feature that might be good for podcasters, we hear how podcasting boosts SEO, and boosts leads. If you're thinking of starting a podcast, check out www.howtopodcast.com our next live class starts 5/3

                     

                    Quick start Vs Planning Your Podcast Class - 1.26

                    The quick start program is where all you have is an idea, but you're ready to get into podcast. I send you an affiliate link and your order your web hosting through me. To say "Thank you" I give you a 30 day pass to the School of Podcasting (with access to all of the videos). I also will install Wordpress for you, and all the plugins you need to start podcasting (you will need to supply graphics and content). The planning your podcast class starting 5/3/2014 is a LIVE class (via webinar) where you can ask me live questions as I go through all the things you need to consider before launching a podcast. For more information about the Plannign Your Podcast webinar go to www.howtopodcast.com

                    Remove Noise From your Podcast - 6:02

                    I let you hear how you can remove unwanted noise from your audio. This is available both in Audacity and Adobe Audition.

                    Because of my podcast my leads are doubling 8:00 Chiropratic Lawyer Spotlight - 9:10

                    Today we spotlight Guy Dimartino and the Chiropractic Lawyer podcast check it out in iTunes, or on his website.

                    Podcasting Boost SEO - 11:00

                    According to CBS most people stay on their site for 33 seconds. I went in and looked at my stats on my saw where I had people (11%) staying over an hour in some cases. There is a mass amount of people who DO stay for 2-5 minutes. That is still much longer than 33 seconds. When people stay on yoru site longer Google figures that your content is good and then boosts your ratings in Google searches.

                    Wordpress 3.9 Playlists - 15:30

                    The new version of Wordpress allows you to create playlists. This is great for podcasters who want to have a "start here" section. You can upload a few audio files and put them on a page and insert them as a playlist. The "cool" thing is it works on a phone, and the files are NOT downloadable - which means they have to sit and listen - keeping you on your site longer.

                    Be sure to put subcsribe buttons, and newsletter sign ups under the playlist

                    Should I Produce Version of This show is Segments

                    Podcasting's 101 Jason Parsons - 20:00

                    Jason is working two jobs and has five children and still has time to podcast. Today he shares his insights into working with co-hosts, have a podcast implode, learning from your mistakes, and following your passion.

                    Jason was blessed to have a job where he could do podcast editing while he worked.

                    He not only gets "big names" for guests, but also people he feels would deliver great content.

                    He has a number of audience members help him deliver his show.

                    Jason's Last 5 in 5

                    Smodcast by Kevin Smith

                    Tell ‘Em Steve-Dave!

                    Edumcation

                    Welcome to Nightvale

                    School of Podcasting

                    Busting iTunes Myths!

                    Rob Walch the VP of Podcasting Relations at Libsyn.com stated in the last episode of The Feed Rob debunks the "You have 8 weeks to get into New and Noteworthy" in iTunes myth. 

                    Another one is "You need at least three episodes to be featured in iTunes" (not true - my Client Dr. Nina of Win the Diet War did it with one episode). 

                    One podcast in New and Noteworthy was from 2008, and another one was from 2 years ago. If someone tells you different (typically charging you a lot of money) they are WRONG. 

                    Check out the feed in iTunes and check out their blog

                    If you want a free month of Podcast Media Hosting use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com

                    ]]>Today on episode 406 we get a great because of my podcast story, we debunk the "8 week myth" in iTunes (thanks to Rob Walch from Libsyn.com), we hear about a new Wordpress feature that might be good for podcasters, we hear how podcasting boosts SEO, and boosts leads. If you're thinking of starting a podcast, check out www.howtopodcast.com our next live class starts 5/3

                     

                    Quick start Vs Planning Your Podcast Class - 1.26

                    The quick start program is where all you have is an idea, but you're ready to get into podcast. I send you an affiliate link and your order your web hosting through me. To say "Thank you" I give you a 30 day pass to the School of Podcasting (with access to all of the videos). I also will install Wordpress for you, and all the plugins you need to start podcasting (you will need to supply graphics and content). The planning your podcast class starting 5/3/2014 is a LIVE class (via webinar) where you can ask me live questions as I go through all the things you need to consider before launching a podcast. For more information about the Plannign Your Podcast webinar go to www.howtopodcast.com

                    Remove Noise From your Podcast - 6:02

                    I let you hear how you can remove unwanted noise from your audio. This is available both in Audacity and Adobe Audition.

                    Because of my podcast my leads are doubling 8:00 Chiropratic Lawyer Spotlight - 9:10

                    Today we spotlight Guy Dimartino and the Chiropractic Lawyer podcast check it out in iTunes, or on his website.

                    Podcasting Boost SEO - 11:00

                    According to CBS most people stay on their site for 33 seconds. I went in and looked at my stats on my saw where I had people (11%) staying over an hour in some cases. There is a mass amount of people who DO stay for 2-5 minutes. That is still much longer than 33 seconds. When people stay on yoru site longer Google figures that your content is good and then boosts your ratings in Google searches.

                    Wordpress 3.9 Playlists - 15:30

                    The new version of Wordpress allows you to create playlists. This is great for podcasters who want to have a "start here" section. You can upload a few audio files and put them on a page and insert them as a playlist. The "cool" thing is it works on a phone, and the files are NOT downloadable - which means they have to sit and listen - keeping you on your site longer.

                    Be sure to put subcsribe buttons, and newsletter sign ups under the playlist

                    Should I Produce Version of This show is Segments

                    Podcasting's 101 Jason Parsons - 20:00

                    Jason is working two jobs and has five children and still has time to podcast. Today he shares his insights into working with co-hosts, have a podcast implode, learning from your mistakes, and following your passion.

                    Jason was blessed to have a job where he could do podcast editing while he worked.

                    He not only gets "big names" for guests, but also people he feels would deliver great content.

                    He has a number of audience members help him deliver his show.

                    Jason's Last 5 in 5

                    Smodcast by Kevin Smith

                    Tell ‘Em Steve-Dave!

                    Edumcation

                    Welcome to Nightvale

                    School of Podcasting

                    Busting iTunes Myths!

                    Rob Walch the VP of Podcasting Relations at Libsyn.com stated in the last episode of The Feed Rob debunks the "You have 8 weeks to get into New and Noteworthy" in iTunes myth. 

                    Another one is "You need at least three episodes to be featured in iTunes" (not true - my Client Dr. Nina of Win the Diet War did it with one episode). 

                    One podcast in New and Noteworthy was from 2008, and another one was from 2 years ago. If someone tells you different (typically charging you a lot of money) they are WRONG. 

                    Check out the feed in iTunes and check out their blog

                    If you want a free month of Podcast Media Hosting use the coupon code sopfree to get a free month at Libsyn.com

                    ]]>a4df4ae0fce86844cd9fae2f51c08778Sun, 27 Apr 2014 18:34:17 -040001:01:04falsefull406406Podcast Deadlines - Friend or Foe?

                    Andrew Ferebee stated that his Knowledge for men podcast launched November 2013 and surpassed the 400,000 download mark this week.

                    Podcast Spotlight The Small Business IT Show [2:49]

                    Dexter was a student in my Podcasting in Six Weeks Class, and we take a listen to his Small Business IT Show (smallbusinessitshow.com). Find it in iTunes.

                    Last 5 in 5 [6:10]

                    Today we get the last five podcasts that Chris from Voices of Candaian Leadership vocl.ca

                    Nurition Diva

                    Get it Done Guy

                    I M Talk

                    Phedippidations

                    Your Website Engineer (hear my interview with Dustin )

                    Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                     

                    You Audience Feels Giddy When You Put them On Your Show [12:00]

                    I've mentioned that you should always reply to every email and comment, and when appropriate put them on your show. Well last we I played a "Because of my podcast" story from Craig, and as Craig puts it, "I almost fell off the treadmill." That also points out that people listen to podcasts everywhere. 

                    Fining Places to Network [16:20]

                    If there are other podcasters who do similar podcasts, you might try searching for their name in iTunes. See if they have been interviewed on other podcasts. If they have, DO NOT go over and say, "I should be on your show." Instead take the time to listen to their show, or leave a VALUABLE comment on their blog as a way to break the ice. 

                    New Issue of Podertainment Magazine is Out [21:00]

                    In the new episode of Podertainment magazine, we have more great content from people like Rob Walch, Todd Cochran, Daniel J. Lewis, Jeffery Powers, and many other people on topics like recording your podcast, promoting your podcast, and making money with a podcast. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podertainment

                    Are Deadlines Ruining Your Podcast? [25:00]

                    A couple of weeks ago my Dad died on a Saturday. This is the day record and produce my shows. Obviously I passed on the podcasts that day, but returned on Sunday afternoon as a welcome distraction. I wasn't really prepared, but as I had not missed a show over the last 405 weeks I wanted to keep the streak alive. This is understandable, but stupid thinking. What would people say, "C'mon Dave - big deal you're Dad died the show must go on!"

                    I had a client who had decided to launch his show on a specific date. This is awesome. The bad news is you don't have 100% complete control over your podcast as its getting ready for episode 1. You may have someone who is doing the graphics, or recording an intro. Hopefully these people hit their benchmarks and delivery dates - but they may not. When I was involved much more with music marketing, I was amazed at bands who would plan their CD release party - when they didn't have the CD in hand (you can guess how that ended).

                    The Pros of Podcast Deadlines

                    It boosts your over all vision of how things will pan out. "This will be done on the 8th, then this will come in on the 10th, and then we finish on the 15th."

                    It allows you to put a pin in a date an work backwards to figure out where to start. If it takes four hours to produce an hour long show, and church starts at 6 pm  you better start before 2.

                    It lets you know if you are ahead of schedule so you can make informed decisions.

                    It creates a sense of urgency. It puts a fire under your butt. It adds a level of accountability.

                    The Cons of Podcast Deadlines

                    You can't predict how long it will take to be listed in iTunes. I would guess three days, but I've seen it take 24 hours, and I've seen it take 2 weeks.

                    You don't have complete control over ever piece (as I mentioned, graphics, intros and outros).

                    Not everyone thinks good under pressure

                    The difference between good and great is often that little bit of icing on the top that gets lost if you're in a hurry.

                     

                    The Typical Podcast Launch Needs To:
                    1. Choose a topic
                    2. Choose host(s)
                    3. Choose a name
                    4. Choose a URL
                    5. Purchase web hosting
                    6. Purchase recording equipment
                    7. Purchase and/or learn production (software)
                    8. Order artwork
                    9. Order intro/outro - find music
                    10. Record a test show
                    11. Record another test show
                    12. Pick a format
                    13. Mix down your recordings into...]]>

                        Andrew Ferebee stated that his Knowledge for men podcast launched November 2013 and surpassed the 400,000 download mark this week.

                        Podcast Spotlight The Small Business IT Show [2:49]

                        Dexter was a student in my Podcasting in Six Weeks Class, and we take a listen to his Small Business IT Show (smallbusinessitshow.com). Find it in iTunes.

                        Last 5 in 5 [6:10]

                        Today we get the last five podcasts that Chris from Voices of Candaian Leadership vocl.ca

                        Nurition Diva

                        Get it Done Guy

                        I M Talk

                        Phedippidations

                        Your Website Engineer (hear my interview with Dustin )

                        Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                         

                        You Audience Feels Giddy When You Put them On Your Show [12:00]

                        I've mentioned that you should always reply to every email and comment, and when appropriate put them on your show. Well last we I played a "Because of my podcast" story from Craig, and as Craig puts it, "I almost fell off the treadmill." That also points out that people listen to podcasts everywhere. 

                        Fining Places to Network [16:20]

                        If there are other podcasters who do similar podcasts, you might try searching for their name in iTunes. See if they have been interviewed on other podcasts. If they have, DO NOT go over and say, "I should be on your show." Instead take the time to listen to their show, or leave a VALUABLE comment on their blog as a way to break the ice. 

                        New Issue of Podertainment Magazine is Out [21:00]

                        In the new episode of Podertainment magazine, we have more great content from people like Rob Walch, Todd Cochran, Daniel J. Lewis, Jeffery Powers, and many other people on topics like recording your podcast, promoting your podcast, and making money with a podcast. For more information go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podertainment

                        Are Deadlines Ruining Your Podcast? [25:00]

                        A couple of weeks ago my Dad died on a Saturday. This is the day record and produce my shows. Obviously I passed on the podcasts that day, but returned on Sunday afternoon as a welcome distraction. I wasn't really prepared, but as I had not missed a show over the last 405 weeks I wanted to keep the streak alive. This is understandable, but stupid thinking. What would people say, "C'mon Dave - big deal you're Dad died the show must go on!"

                        I had a client who had decided to launch his show on a specific date. This is awesome. The bad news is you don't have 100% complete control over your podcast as its getting ready for episode 1. You may have someone who is doing the graphics, or recording an intro. Hopefully these people hit their benchmarks and delivery dates - but they may not. When I was involved much more with music marketing, I was amazed at bands who would plan their CD release party - when they didn't have the CD in hand (you can guess how that ended).

                        The Pros of Podcast Deadlines

                        It boosts your over all vision of how things will pan out. "This will be done on the 8th, then this will come in on the 10th, and then we finish on the 15th."

                        It allows you to put a pin in a date an work backwards to figure out where to start. If it takes four hours to produce an hour long show, and church starts at 6 pm  you better start before 2.

                        It lets you know if you are ahead of schedule so you can make informed decisions.

                        It creates a sense of urgency. It puts a fire under your butt. It adds a level of accountability.

                        The Cons of Podcast Deadlines

                        You can't predict how long it will take to be listed in iTunes. I would guess three days, but I've seen it take 24 hours, and I've seen it take 2 weeks.

                        You don't have complete control over ever piece (as I mentioned, graphics, intros and outros).

                        Not everyone thinks good under pressure

                        The difference between good and great is often that little bit of icing on the top that gets lost if you're in a hurry.

                         

                        The Typical Podcast Launch Needs To:
                        1. Choose a topic
                        2. Choose host(s)
                        3. Choose a name
                        4. Choose a URL
                        5. Purchase web hosting
                        6. Purchase recording equipment
                        7. Purchase and/or learn production (software)
                        8. Order artwork
                        9. Order intro/outro - find music
                        10. Record a test show
                        11. Record another test show
                        12. Pick a format
                        13. Mix down your recordings into one mp3 file
                        14. Get feedback from someone not named Mom.
                        15. Choose a schedule
                        16. Tag your media files
                        17. Order media hosting
                        18. Upload them to your media host
                        19. Write a blog post and attach your media from step 16
                        20. Validate your feed
                        21. Write a description that inspires people to listen
                        22. Submit it to iTunes, Stitcher, and all the other podcast directories.
                        
                        

                        Deadlines help take your idea from a dream to a reality, but be sure to set realistic deadlines so they don't put too much pressure on you. 

                        Get Your Podcast Reviewed [39:50]

                        If you are looking for some unbiased feedback on your podcast head over to www.podcastreviewshow.com/reviewme

                         Podcast Questions Answered [40:45]

                        Where can I find a link to my podcast in the Microsoft directory?

                        There isn't a microsoft directory. They have an app for Windows 8, and it also appears in the Xbox. There are plenty of places you can list your podcast. Check the podcast411 website's Directory of directories?

                        How do I Have a Link That Just Shows Podcasts on my Website?

                        Add a category to your post in Wordpress. Then later under appearance go to men us and you will see where you can add a link to your menu that goes to all the posts with certain categories. 

                        ]]>ef2577308e1acce9644b5dccf4b89a8bSun, 20 Apr 2014 17:05:14 -040051:58falsefull405405What Your Podcast Can Learn from Chipotle and Joel OsteenMy last podcast spoke about identifying what makes your unique. You have something that allows you to talk about a subject using a persepctive, attitude, or delivery different than anybody else. That perspective is shaped by experience. That attitude is shaped by life and learning. That delivery is shaped by your confidence. You may be thinking about starting a podcast. You may be thinking that there are, "So many podcasts out there already, why should you add to the pile?" Well let's see what we can learn from other industries.
                        Because of My Podcast

                        Crag from Mansion Ingles lives in spain and was recognized on the other side of the planet. He explained that he helps people learn english, and someone recognized his voice from his podcast. Craig is helping people learn english. When you get to meet someone, and they had a need, and you filled it, it's a great feeling.

                        Podcasting Guru Scoptt Herzog - Inside the Studio of the Podcaster

                        Last week we talked about embracing what you bring the the microphone. That you can bring an unique value and perspective. We talk about the many different ways you can look at a topic. Today we interview Scott Herzog about his new "Inside the Podcaster's Studio" show that will primarily focus on podcasting gear. 

                        Restaurants Still Open

                        How many different ways can you kill and cook a cow? I mean really? Throw a burger on a bun, slap some ketchup on it, isn't it the same thing as McBurger down the street? No it's not. This one is flame broiled. This one is square. This one has butter on the bun. They are all variations of the same thing. Aren't french fries just deep fried potatoes? Don't get me started (to me there is only ONE type of French fry and it comes in a red box with Golden Arches on it - there is no room for discussion on this).

                        Several years ago, researchers at Cornell University and Michigan State University conducted a study of restaurants in three local markets over a 10-year period. They concluded the following: After the first year 27% of restaurant startups failed; after three years, 50% of those restaurants were no longer in business; and after five years 60% had gone south. At the end of 10 years, 70% of the restaurants that had opened for business a decade before had failed. (source) Chef Rocco DiSpirito says that 90% restaurants close in their first year (this has been debunked)

                        The reason people open restaurants is because more people are using them. a 2009 study showed the industry expanded by .5 percent, consumer spending on restaurant dining rose 1 percent in the past year (source). Yes these are small percentages, but its a $632 BILLION dollar industry. So while thousands of restaurants close every year (even though people are still eating, and in the US they are eating a LOT), people still open up new restaurants every year.

                        Special thanks to Mike Howard of www.jpeg2raw.com to making this point on the Ask the Podcast Coach Show

                        Chipotle - Take an Idea and Mix it with Integrity

                        What happens if you take the assembly line of Subway (one of the fastest growing chains), mix in some spicy protein, add a dash of conscience (as their pigs and chickens are raised on farms), and a FOCUSED menu? You get a restaurant called Chipotle. The one by my day job as people lining out the door at lunch time. The funny thing is, that line moves faster than the one at the burger joint (even counting the time to get out of your car).

                        What Podcasters Can Learn From Chipotle

                        Niche down: Their menu has a few items. You don't have to stare long to see what's available. Ordering is easy.

                        Consistent Content: They obviously have a well oiled machine behind the scenes. You see one person cooking, one person chopping, and three to four people up front scooping it up and giving it to you. No matter which location I go to, crispy chicken tacos taste the same. I can rely on them. I don't worry about wasting my lunch hour if I'm headed for a Chipotle restaurant.

                        They Get to the Point: There is no idle chit chat in line. When you get close enough to order, the person behind the counter asks, "What can I get you.? Then they ask about the toppings. They don't ask about me, and I don't care. I'm hungry. They are giving me what I need: food.

                        They Embrace Their Differences: Instead of looking at the competition and trying to be like them, they stood up for what they believed and pointed out that their pork and chicken is raised different. Now their brand means more than cheap, spicy, fast food, it is a statement. It ties in with a lifestyle. You wear a Chiptle shirt, weather you want to or not your clothes say "I care about treatment of animals."

                        What Podcasters Can Learn From Ned Flanders

                        Think about Christianity. Every single church and every single Christian has the EXACT SAME "product." (oh someone is going to get upset with this terminology, but bare with me). They are delivering the story of Jesus Christ. The majority of them say he was the son of God, born of a virgin, died on a cross, and rose from the dead three days later.

                        Q: Why do more and more churches open every year? 

                        A: Because man does not live by bread alone (source)

                        Q: Why Do So Many Churches Lose Their Members - Especially College Age?

                        A: Because of their delivery.Ned Flanders is a fictional character on the Simpsons. He is the uber Christian that more than likely would turn down a piece of Devil's Food Cake just because of the name. Then there is the Church "Well isn't that special" Lady from Saturday Night Live. She lived to walk around and remind people that they are all fornicators and that they were going to Hell. In the same way that most people that you say "Man you're in a bad mood today," don't miraculously change into a good mood, telling people they're going to Hell doesn't seem to make them immediately repent.

                        Now I'm not saying we need to alter our story. Think of the movie Gone with the Wind. This story has been seen on the big screen as well as on VHS, DVD, and now Blu-ray. It's the same message, but different packaging.

                        My last podcast spoke about identifying what makes your unique. You have something that allows you to talk about a subject using a persepctive, attitude, or delivery different than anybody else. That perspective is shaped by experience. That attitude is shaped by life and learning. That delivery is shaped by your confidence. You may be thinking about starting a podcast. You may be thinking that there are, "So many podcasts out there already, why should you add to the pile?" Well let's see what we can learn from other industries.

                        Because of My Podcast

                        Crag from Mansion Ingles lives in spain and was recognized on the other side of the planet. He explained that he helps people learn english, and someone recognized his voice from his podcast. Craig is helping people learn english. When you get to meet someone, and they had a need, and you filled it, it's a great feeling.

                        Podcasting Guru Scoptt Herzog - Inside the Studio of the Podcaster

                        Last week we talked about embracing what you bring the the microphone. That you can bring an unique value and perspective. We talk about the many different ways you can look at a topic. Today we interview Scott Herzog about his new "Inside the Podcaster's Studio" show that will primarily focus on podcasting gear. 

                        Restaurants Still Open

                        How many different ways can you kill and cook a cow? I mean really? Throw a burger on a bun, slap some ketchup on it, isn't it the same thing as McBurger down the street? No it's not. This one is flame broiled. This one is square. This one has butter on the bun. They are all variations of the same thing. Aren't french fries just deep fried potatoes? Don't get me started (to me there is only ONE type of French fry and it comes in a red box with Golden Arches on it - there is no room for discussion on this).

                        Several years ago, researchers at Cornell University and Michigan State University conducted a study of restaurants in three local markets over a 10-year period. They concluded the following: After the first year 27% of restaurant startups failed; after three years, 50% of those restaurants were no longer in business; and after five years 60% had gone south. At the end of 10 years, 70% of the restaurants that had opened for business a decade before had failed. (source) Chef Rocco DiSpirito says that 90% restaurants close in their first year (this has been debunked)

                        The reason people open restaurants is because more people are using them. a 2009 study showed the industry expanded by .5 percent, consumer spending on restaurant dining rose 1 percent in the past year (source). Yes these are small percentages, but its a $632 BILLION dollar industry. So while thousands of restaurants close every year (even though people are still eating, and in the US they are eating a LOT), people still open up new restaurants every year.

                        Special thanks to Mike Howard of www.jpeg2raw.com to making this point on the Ask the Podcast Coach Show

                        Chipotle - Take an Idea and Mix it with Integrity

                        What happens if you take the assembly line of Subway (one of the fastest growing chains), mix in some spicy protein, add a dash of conscience (as their pigs and chickens are raised on farms), and a FOCUSED menu? You get a restaurant called Chipotle. The one by my day job as people lining out the door at lunch time. The funny thing is, that line moves faster than the one at the burger joint (even counting the time to get out of your car).

                        What Podcasters Can Learn From Chipotle

                        Niche down: Their menu has a few items. You don't have to stare long to see what's available. Ordering is easy.

                        Consistent Content: They obviously have a well oiled machine behind the scenes. You see one person cooking, one person chopping, and three to four people up front scooping it up and giving it to you. No matter which location I go to, crispy chicken tacos taste the same. I can rely on them. I don't worry about wasting my lunch hour if I'm headed for a Chipotle restaurant.

                        They Get to the Point: There is no idle chit chat in line. When you get close enough to order, the person behind the counter asks, "What can I get you.? Then they ask about the toppings. They don't ask about me, and I don't care. I'm hungry. They are giving me what I need: food.

                        They Embrace Their Differences: Instead of looking at the competition and trying to be like them, they stood up for what they believed and pointed out that their pork and chicken is raised different. Now their brand means more than cheap, spicy, fast food, it is a statement. It ties in with a lifestyle. You wear a Chiptle shirt, weather you want to or not your clothes say "I care about treatment of animals."

                        What Podcasters Can Learn From Ned Flanders

                        Think about Christianity. Every single church and every single Christian has the EXACT SAME "product." (oh someone is going to get upset with this terminology, but bare with me). They are delivering the story of Jesus Christ. The majority of them say he was the son of God, born of a virgin, died on a cross, and rose from the dead three days later.

                        Q: Why do more and more churches open every year? 

                        A: Because man does not live by bread alone (source)

                        Q: Why Do So Many Churches Lose Their Members - Especially College Age?

                        A: Because of their delivery.Ned Flanders is a fictional character on the Simpsons. He is the uber Christian that more than likely would turn down a piece of Devil's Food Cake just because of the name. Then there is the Church "Well isn't that special" Lady from Saturday Night Live. She lived to walk around and remind people that they are all fornicators and that they were going to Hell. In the same way that most people that you say "Man you're in a bad mood today," don't miraculously change into a good mood, telling people they're going to Hell doesn't seem to make them immediately repent.

                        Now I'm not saying we need to alter our story. Think of the movie Gone with the Wind. This story has been seen on the big screen as well as on VHS, DVD, and now Blu-ray. It's the same message, but different packaging.

                        The church I attend provides ear plugs for those who don't like their anthems to ROCK! We clap our hands. We have smoke machines (no joke) and cool lights. You know who loves our service? College Age Kids. 

                        Joel Osteen - The Happy Jesus Man

                        Let's look at Joel Osteen (or as I call him "Happy Jesus Man"). He opens his sermons with a joke. A joke? Yes, he tells a joke. People laugh in church. Really? It's true. Then he has them hold up their bible and state how they believe it to be true (this sets the stage - people know what they are going to get).

                        Joel Osteen Niches Down:There are all sort of stories in the bible where God's wrath is shown. There are all sorts of verses about Satan, and Hell. Joel got to know his community, and found them to be poor in spirit. They lack self esteem. They may lack skills on getting along with their family. Joel talks a lot about how God's Favor is waiting to be poured out on you.

                        Is it working? His "Church" meets in an old Arena used by an NBA team. I think it's safe to say it is.

                        I'm not hear to argue if Joel Osteen is a good pastor, or to pick apart his choice of scriptures or his statements on same sex marriage. I'm just pointing out that he has the same story as every other church. His delivery, and his ability to influence have allowed to connect with an audience and allow him to grow his church and further his story.

                        More at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/404

                         

                        ]]>f96969932908e12879f3219b565a4c42Sat, 12 Apr 2014 19:34:36 -040058:18falsefull404404Identifying and Embracing Your UniquenessToday we hear some clips on how you can market your business with podcasting, some podcasting pet peeves, and we talk about how to identify and embrace your uniqueness.

                         

                        Because of My Podcast [1:50] I'm Getting Paid to Podcast on Another Show

                        Jonathan Downham of criticalcarepractitioner.co.uk has four episodes into his own podcast when another company approached him to create a podcast for THEM (and for that he is getting paid). 

                        Dave's Latest Appearances [3:24]

                        Podcasts Roundtable Episode 27 "Pet Peaves II"

                        Online Marketing and Communications with Job Buscall talking how to use Podcasting as a Marketing Tool

                        Engaging Life and Leadership with Darren Dake and Anita Brooks

                        Podcast Review Show now featuring "Podcast Talent Coach" Erik K Johnson

                        Embracing Your Uniqueness [12:53]

                        I've spoken about John Lee Doomis before, and this week we are talking about creating your own style and embracing what YOU bring to the table. Here are some examples in the "Podcasts about podcasting" realm.

                        Ray Ortega has extensive video knowledge, and he produces a podcast for a living.

                        Podcaster's Roundtable is purposely designed to NOT BE a "how to" podcast but instead focus on the issues around podcasting. 

                        Daniel J Lewis has a background in web design and graphic arts. He is very detail oriented. We love to poke fun at Daniel's lists, but those lists are well thought out and create great content. This is why Daniel is the one podcast in the "podcasts about podcasting" world that can see he has WON (not just nominated) a podcast award. 

                        For me, I have been helping people understand technology for over 20 years. I have a teaching background. I bill myself as someone who can help you understand technology without getting into geek speak. I've also been doing this since 2005 (and not many people can say that). 

                        Cliff Ravenscraft has an hour long show that goes outside the scope of podcasting and talks a lot about social media, and what is going on in Cliff's life. 

                        Podcast Help Desk is from Mike Dell. Mike brings his tech support experience to the microphone to identify common problems. 

                        Scott Hertzdog is focusing on podcast gear (and only podcast gear). 

                        Can You start Your Own Niche?

                        What if you are a dental hygienist, and you want to do a podcast about social media. Why not start a podcast about using social media for dentists?

                        Kathy Kelly does the special mouse podcast. Her son has autism so her podcasts focuses on going to Disney Parks with a person who has special needs. 

                        Steph at Capturing Magic takes her love of Disney and Scrapbooking and puts them together. 

                        Some Questions To Think About

                        What are you talking about all the time? That you just can't seem to stop talking about? This is more than likely you passion.

                        What do you bring to the table? You age, perspective, history, experience?

                        What to Do When Someone Steals Your Content 

                        Many bands tried to be the Beatles when they arrived on the scene. If you are being "copied" be flattered. Someone thinks your good enough to steal borrow from. Keep doing what you do well. It comes naturally to you. For someone who is trying to be you it won't come as easy. Remember LOTS of people "podfade" because of the work involved. You find it easy to be you, and it will be a chore for them. 

                        ]]>Today we hear some clips on how you can market your business with podcasting, some podcasting pet peeves, and we talk about how to identify and embrace your uniqueness.

                         

                        Because of My Podcast [1:50] I'm Getting Paid to Podcast on Another Show

                        Jonathan Downham of criticalcarepractitioner.co.uk has four episodes into his own podcast when another company approached him to create a podcast for THEM (and for that he is getting paid). 

                        Dave's Latest Appearances [3:24]

                        Podcasts Roundtable Episode 27 "Pet Peaves II"

                        Online Marketing and Communications with Job Buscall talking how to use Podcasting as a Marketing Tool

                        Engaging Life and Leadership with Darren Dake and Anita Brooks

                        Podcast Review Show now featuring "Podcast Talent Coach" Erik K Johnson

                        Embracing Your Uniqueness [12:53]

                        I've spoken about John Lee Doomis before, and this week we are talking about creating your own style and embracing what YOU bring to the table. Here are some examples in the "Podcasts about podcasting" realm.

                        Ray Ortega has extensive video knowledge, and he produces a podcast for a living.

                        Podcaster's Roundtable is purposely designed to NOT BE a "how to" podcast but instead focus on the issues around podcasting. 

                        Daniel J Lewis has a background in web design and graphic arts. He is very detail oriented. We love to poke fun at Daniel's lists, but those lists are well thought out and create great content. This is why Daniel is the one podcast in the "podcasts about podcasting" world that can see he has WON (not just nominated) a podcast award. 

                        For me, I have been helping people understand technology for over 20 years. I have a teaching background. I bill myself as someone who can help you understand technology without getting into geek speak. I've also been doing this since 2005 (and not many people can say that). 

                        Cliff Ravenscraft has an hour long show that goes outside the scope of podcasting and talks a lot about social media, and what is going on in Cliff's life. 

                        Podcast Help Desk is from Mike Dell. Mike brings his tech support experience to the microphone to identify common problems. 

                        Scott Hertzdog is focusing on podcast gear (and only podcast gear). 

                        Can You start Your Own Niche?

                        What if you are a dental hygienist, and you want to do a podcast about social media. Why not start a podcast about using social media for dentists?

                        Kathy Kelly does the special mouse podcast. Her son has autism so her podcasts focuses on going to Disney Parks with a person who has special needs. 

                        Steph at Capturing Magic takes her love of Disney and Scrapbooking and puts them together. 

                        Some Questions To Think About

                        What are you talking about all the time? That you just can't seem to stop talking about? This is more than likely you passion.

                        What do you bring to the table? You age, perspective, history, experience?

                        What to Do When Someone Steals Your Content 

                        Many bands tried to be the Beatles when they arrived on the scene. If you are being "copied" be flattered. Someone thinks your good enough to steal borrow from. Keep doing what you do well. It comes naturally to you. For someone who is trying to be you it won't come as easy. Remember LOTS of people "podfade" because of the work involved. You find it easy to be you, and it will be a chore for them. 

                        ]]>72c90fd6b1cee1b8e7b814093e7f96c0Sun, 06 Apr 2014 18:18:55 -040059:37falsefull403403Jordan Harbinger Left His Law Career to Do Podcasting Full TimeToday in episode 402 we interview Jordan Harbinger who is the co-creator of the Art of Charm podcast. Jordan has used his podcast to build a seven figure podcast. In this 45 minute conversation we he decided to leave his career as a lawyer and do podcasting full time. We also see how he prepares for each episode, how he protects his integrity, and how he accidentally created a business that new brings in seven figures a year. You can check out their website at www.theartofcharm.com

                         

                        Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/402

                        ]]>Today in episode 402 we interview Jordan Harbinger who is the co-creator of the Art of Charm podcast. Jordan has used his podcast to build a seven figure podcast. In this 45 minute conversation we he decided to leave his career as a lawyer and do podcasting full time. We also see how he prepares for each episode, how he protects his integrity, and how he accidentally created a business that new brings in seven figures a year. You can check out their website at www.theartofcharm.com

                         

                        Full show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/402

                        ]]>d19af3ddc0805035628a761b0d31b15aSun, 30 Mar 2014 22:15:14 -040001:08:59falsefull402402Lessons From the Zoo - April Fools Podcast Promotion Today we talk about marketing lessons we can learn from a small Zoo I visited this week. We also hear about how families are starting to podcast together. With April 1st right around the corner, Steve Stewart is having fun reaching out to new audiences. We also talk about when and how to bring in additional content. 
                        Because of my Podcast: I'm Spenind More Time With My Family [2:20]

                        Mark Dowing enjoys doing a podcast with his family. They do a podcast on Geo Caching. He gets to hang out with his kids, and his kids are starting to take over some of the technical aspects. They've met other people in the geocaching communities and podcasting communities. They are also being asked to appear on other podcasts. The family that podcasts together lasts forever. 

                        Member Spotlight: Quality Living Made Simple [6:34]

                        Today we spotlight Joshua Rivers and the Quality Living Made Simple podcast where he helps you to create and maintain a better quality of live with simplicity.

                        April Fools Podcast Promotion[7:44]

                        Steve Stewart from Money Plan SOS podcast and www.yesyoucanpodcasttoo.com is switching podcasts with other podcasts. It's similar to guest posting on a blog, it sounds like the regular podcast but then some other host comes on board. So the audience will get the same type of information from a different host. Steve reached out via twitter and facebook, and only a few people responded. Like always the people that you have established relationships that aid in having someone trust you enough to let you spend time in front of their audience. To find out more about this you check it out on Steve's blog at www.yesyoucanpodcasttoo.com/aprilfools (on April 1st). 

                        Are Entrepreneur Podcasts A Podcasting Fad?[14:32]

                        We have spoken about the John Lee Doomis Effect (based on a post by Steve, and later  we did a Podcaster's Roundtable), and we have seen a fair amount of "on fire" type podcasts come on board (as I had predicted they would). We have seen a wave of tech shows, then the comedians, and now we have the entrepreneurs. While podcasting is a fad, I worry that in about three months when people aren't making the kind of money that John Lee Doomis is, they will declare "Podcasting is Dead" and explain how it doesn't work (probably because they don't have the one thing John has - talent and personality). 

                        One of the key points about John Lee Doomis is when John's show came out he was doing a DAILY show. THIS WAS NEW back then. Now when people do that, it may not be quite as big a deal. You can read the transcript to the John Lee Doomis effect.

                        How My Trip to the Zoo Can Improve Your Podcast [25:50]

                        When I was growing up in Akron Ohio I went to the local "Akron Zoo." Later when it fell upon harder times it was known as the "Akron Children's Zoo" (because it was a glorified petting zoo). This week I did a bunch of computer training there and they have really turned it around? Well they've could've gone, "The Cleveland Zoo is only an hour away, and it's so big you have to ride a tram to other parts of the park." The didn't. While there are many reasons for Zoos to exist (education, and species survival), the instead thought about what people want from a zoo. What do visitors want from a zoo. The answer is somewhat obvious when you think about it.

                        Visitors from the Zoo pay money to get content they can't get any place else. You get to see animals that you can't see at the local dog park.

                        But then they took it further. Sure they could've been happy with getting a Grizzly Bear, and a Tiger, a Jaguar. But isn't that what all Zoos have? So again, they thought the the eyes of their audience.

                        What do Zoo members want?

                        They want to get close to the animals. So when they began rebuilding the Zoo, the made exhibits with one thing in mind. Make a great habitat for the animal, and design it so the animal will be close the the visitors. I explained how it was so bizarre as the one day I had lunch with the Grizzly bear. The only thing separating me and the bear was some very thick glass. It was cool. He was big. When I told someone about it and how he was taking a bath, they explained that is why we put the pool there next to the window.  They put all of the animals favorite items (like food) next to the places where people stand to view them. If it's an animal that sleeps alot (like a Lion) they put their beds in a place where everyone can see. They always think through the eyes of their audience, and try to give them an experience they will be talking about (just like I am right now).

                        They Renamed The Zoo

                        They went from being "Akron Children’s Zoo"in the 1950's to "Akron Zoological Park" in 1979.

                        They "Niched Down"

                        The theme of North and South American Animals was adopted giving the zoo a stable base for our education and conservation goals. For many years, all exhibits and educational materials centered around this theme.

                        They Go To Where Their Target Audience is, and Make it Easy to Consume Their Content

                        There are two types of people that enjoy the Zoo. I mean that scream with joy and laughter at the Zoo. One are small children. The other is the people who are laughing at the small children who are screaming at the Penguins. They offer discounts for groups of 15 or more (like elementary school classes) as well as discounts for Grandparents.

                        They Are Not Afraid to Try New Things

                        They also try a lot of things. They put up Christmas lights at the Zoo for a few years. It was beautiful, but in the end it didn't go over. They should be proud that they tried something new. Then they looked at their facilities and realized that some people are looking for something different and they opened their Zoo for after hour parties. You can hold your wedding in their beautiful gardens.

                        The More Niche the Content - The Greater the Value

                        You can get a behind the scenes tour of certain exhibits. You can tour all five facilities for a gift of $500 or choose three facilities for $350 or one facility for $200. The picture on their website shows someone touching one of the  giant tortoise.

                        Should I Add More Episodes To My Podcast Per  Week[42:50]

                        Jackie Ulmer wants to know if she should start a new podcast to house additional episodes. For me, I start to fragment my content into More Podcast Money and the Power of Podcasting. Then my audience said, "Why are you making it hard for me to find your content?" So I brought all that content into this podcast. As all...]]> Today we talk about marketing lessons we can learn from a small Zoo I visited this week. We also hear about how families are starting to podcast together. With April 1st right around the corner, Steve Stewart is having fun reaching out to new audiences. We also talk about when and how to bring in additional content. 

                        Because of my Podcast: I'm Spenind More Time With My Family [2:20]

                        Mark Dowing enjoys doing a podcast with his family. They do a podcast on Geo Caching. He gets to hang out with his kids, and his kids are starting to take over some of the technical aspects. They've met other people in the geocaching communities and podcasting communities. They are also being asked to appear on other podcasts. The family that podcasts together lasts forever. 

                        Member Spotlight: Quality Living Made Simple [6:34]

                        Today we spotlight Joshua Rivers and the Quality Living Made Simple podcast where he helps you to create and maintain a better quality of live with simplicity.

                        April Fools Podcast Promotion[7:44]

                        Steve Stewart from Money Plan SOS podcast and www.yesyoucanpodcasttoo.com is switching podcasts with other podcasts. It's similar to guest posting on a blog, it sounds like the regular podcast but then some other host comes on board. So the audience will get the same type of information from a different host. Steve reached out via twitter and facebook, and only a few people responded. Like always the people that you have established relationships that aid in having someone trust you enough to let you spend time in front of their audience. To find out more about this you check it out on Steve's blog at www.yesyoucanpodcasttoo.com/aprilfools (on April 1st). 

                        Are Entrepreneur Podcasts A Podcasting Fad?[14:32]

                        We have spoken about the John Lee Doomis Effect (based on a post by Steve, and later  we did a Podcaster's Roundtable), and we have seen a fair amount of "on fire" type podcasts come on board (as I had predicted they would). We have seen a wave of tech shows, then the comedians, and now we have the entrepreneurs. While podcasting is a fad, I worry that in about three months when people aren't making the kind of money that John Lee Doomis is, they will declare "Podcasting is Dead" and explain how it doesn't work (probably because they don't have the one thing John has - talent and personality). 

                        One of the key points about John Lee Doomis is when John's show came out he was doing a DAILY show. THIS WAS NEW back then. Now when people do that, it may not be quite as big a deal. You can read the transcript to the John Lee Doomis effect.

                        How My Trip to the Zoo Can Improve Your Podcast [25:50]

                        When I was growing up in Akron Ohio I went to the local "Akron Zoo." Later when it fell upon harder times it was known as the "Akron Children's Zoo" (because it was a glorified petting zoo). This week I did a bunch of computer training there and they have really turned it around? Well they've could've gone, "The Cleveland Zoo is only an hour away, and it's so big you have to ride a tram to other parts of the park." The didn't. While there are many reasons for Zoos to exist (education, and species survival), the instead thought about what people want from a zoo. What do visitors want from a zoo. The answer is somewhat obvious when you think about it.

                        Visitors from the Zoo pay money to get content they can't get any place else. You get to see animals that you can't see at the local dog park.

                        But then they took it further. Sure they could've been happy with getting a Grizzly Bear, and a Tiger, a Jaguar. But isn't that what all Zoos have? So again, they thought the the eyes of their audience.

                        What do Zoo members want?

                        They want to get close to the animals. So when they began rebuilding the Zoo, the made exhibits with one thing in mind. Make a great habitat for the animal, and design it so the animal will be close the the visitors. I explained how it was so bizarre as the one day I had lunch with the Grizzly bear. The only thing separating me and the bear was some very thick glass. It was cool. He was big. When I told someone about it and how he was taking a bath, they explained that is why we put the pool there next to the window.  They put all of the animals favorite items (like food) next to the places where people stand to view them. If it's an animal that sleeps alot (like a Lion) they put their beds in a place where everyone can see. They always think through the eyes of their audience, and try to give them an experience they will be talking about (just like I am right now).

                        They Renamed The Zoo

                        They went from being "Akron Children’s Zoo"in the 1950's to "Akron Zoological Park" in 1979.

                        They "Niched Down"

                        The theme of North and South American Animals was adopted giving the zoo a stable base for our education and conservation goals. For many years, all exhibits and educational materials centered around this theme.

                        They Go To Where Their Target Audience is, and Make it Easy to Consume Their Content

                        There are two types of people that enjoy the Zoo. I mean that scream with joy and laughter at the Zoo. One are small children. The other is the people who are laughing at the small children who are screaming at the Penguins. They offer discounts for groups of 15 or more (like elementary school classes) as well as discounts for Grandparents.

                        They Are Not Afraid to Try New Things

                        They also try a lot of things. They put up Christmas lights at the Zoo for a few years. It was beautiful, but in the end it didn't go over. They should be proud that they tried something new. Then they looked at their facilities and realized that some people are looking for something different and they opened their Zoo for after hour parties. You can hold your wedding in their beautiful gardens.

                        The More Niche the Content - The Greater the Value

                        You can get a behind the scenes tour of certain exhibits. You can tour all five facilities for a gift of $500 or choose three facilities for $350 or one facility for $200. The picture on their website shows someone touching one of the  giant tortoise.

                        Should I Add More Episodes To My Podcast Per  Week[42:50]

                        Jackie Ulmer wants to know if she should start a new podcast to house additional episodes. For me, I start to fragment my content into More Podcast Money and the Power of Podcasting. Then my audience said, "Why are you making it hard for me to find your content?" So I brought all that content into this podcast. As all of that content is related (podcasting) it fit. I wouldn't do my weight loss content here, so I made a separate podcast. If you're not sure, use a free tool like Poll Daddy (Owned by Wordpress) and ask them. 

                        Take the Survey

                        I'm trying to find out more about you and what you need so I can give you what you need to move your podcast into a larger audience. Please take a quick second to answer a quick podcasting survey. This is going to help me come up with materials that you need to expand your podcast audience, avoid more technical headaches, and create the best sounding content for the least amount of money. It's only 10 questions, so if you could please help me help you

                        ]]>eeafe33f2ea06d918e31533f4343ca5aMon, 24 Mar 2014 00:37:16 -040001:00:05falsefull401401Defining Your Mission - Episode 400 Celebration - Theater of the MindToday we take a look back at 400 episodes (you'll hear all the old intro voice overs and the progressions I've gone through), and we talk about when it's ok to tweak your format. We have a discussion with Erik K Johnson the Podcast Talent coach on structuring your show, and writing a mission statement for your podcast.
                        Because of this Podcast - Rev. Kenn Blanchard [5:50]

                        Rev. Kenn Blanchard from Black Man with a Gun called in to let me know that he thanks THIS podcast for helping HIS podcast touch people. You can find Kenn's podcasts at blackmanwithagun.com and the unnamedchurch.org

                        Student Testimonial from Gale [9:04]

                        Thank you for your School of Podcasting. I wish I had found it sooner I would've save myself thousands of dollars. I bought equipment and took a much more expensive class that was helpful, but I could've done it a lot cheaper with you. You taught me some finer points that I didn't learn in that other class. Some of the way things are done would've been better if I had followed your advice. Thank you f or answering my email. I know I've sent you a couple emails and we've gone back and forth, and you're always there and I appreciate it. If I know anyone who wants to podcast I direct them to you. Gale - youcanhomestead.com

                        Managing Your Content Flow [11:30]

                        Erik K Johnson of podcasttalentcoach.com comes on to talk about when it's ok to tweak your format. Dave remembers some occasions at churches when they've bent the format. Erik talks about creating a mission statement for your show. This helps you define what content you will (and will not) cover. If you use different resources, perspectives, and resources to cover your topic. As long as you continue to stay on topic. Should you put your "main" topic at the beginning or end of the episode? Eric feels that if we follow the format of entertainment shows, the big guests come on last. They are the finale of the show. People will wait to hear the big names. If you're worried about people not making it to the end of the show, then you need to redo the content at the front of your show. If you're doing an hour long show, you should probably be preparing for an hour before turning on the microphone. Make sure your content is on topic. Chit chat is ok, as long as it ties in with the mission of your show. Revealing yourself to your audience is critical, but if it's not on topic (like Dave's music today) then it should be left out.

                        Erik K Johnson Joins the Podcast Review Show [31:00]

                        Erik will be joining the Podcast Review Show along with my wife. If you are looking to have your show reviewed, this could be a great coaching session. Here is the flow: You pick an episode for us to review. We listen to it, and take notes. We get you online live and play our favorite clips, and part we think need tweaked, with you LIVE. It turns out being more of a coaching call then the previous review. Because we get that interaction with you, we hope to provide better feedback. Check out Erik's show planning worksheets.

                        The Abduction [38:39]

                        Dave's show is hijacked by a crazy morning zoo crew "Binky and the Whiz". Yes Corn Nuts is a real product. [41:20] Remember your show is global and try to keep your audience in mind.

                        The 911 Call [43:08]

                        Dave tries to get help from a slightly inquisitive 911 operate.

                        School of Podcasting The Musical [45:25]

                        For the fans of the television show "Glee," it's School of Podcasting "The Musical." Featuring the hit songs: My Feed is Not Valid Today Mr. iTunes I'm on Fire with John Lee Doomis Libsyn Rocks You'll laugh, you'll cry, it's better than Cats.

                        The Rescue [46:35]

                        You should always talk to your audience like you are speaking to ONE person.

                        The Conclusion [47:39]

                        You can use sound effects to boost the Theater of the mind. You can bring your stories to life. Dave's plays a clip of a 6 year old David Jackson playing radio. Thank you so much for listening, reviewing the show, for joining the conversation.

                        Dave Plays the Guitar [ 56:45]

                        If I was going to play some old music of mine, I wanted to play something that tied to podcasting. I picked the Song "Take Your Pain," as I want to help you avoid the headaches from spending too much money on equipment, and creating content that won't engage with you  audience. If you're looking to join the School of Podcasting, you can do so by clicking here. There is a 30 day money back guarantee.

                        ]]>Today we take a look back at 400 episodes (you'll hear all the old intro voice overs and the progressions I've gone through), and we talk about when it's ok to tweak your format. We have a discussion with Erik K Johnson the Podcast Talent coach on structuring your show, and writing a mission statement for your podcast.
                        Because of this Podcast - Rev. Kenn Blanchard [5:50]

                        Rev. Kenn Blanchard from Black Man with a Gun called in to let me know that he thanks THIS podcast for helping HIS podcast touch people. You can find Kenn's podcasts at blackmanwithagun.com and the unnamedchurch.org

                        Student Testimonial from Gale [9:04]

                        Thank you for your School of Podcasting. I wish I had found it sooner I would've save myself thousands of dollars. I bought equipment and took a much more expensive class that was helpful, but I could've done it a lot cheaper with you. You taught me some finer points that I didn't learn in that other class. Some of the way things are done would've been better if I had followed your advice. Thank you f or answering my email. I know I've sent you a couple emails and we've gone back and forth, and you're always there and I appreciate it. If I know anyone who wants to podcast I direct them to you. Gale - youcanhomestead.com

                        Managing Your Content Flow [11:30]

                        Erik K Johnson of podcasttalentcoach.com comes on to talk about when it's ok to tweak your format. Dave remembers some occasions at churches when they've bent the format. Erik talks about creating a mission statement for your show. This helps you define what content you will (and will not) cover. If you use different resources, perspectives, and resources to cover your topic. As long as you continue to stay on topic. Should you put your "main" topic at the beginning or end of the episode? Eric feels that if we follow the format of entertainment shows, the big guests come on last. They are the finale of the show. People will wait to hear the big names. If you're worried about people not making it to the end of the show, then you need to redo the content at the front of your show. If you're doing an hour long show, you should probably be preparing for an hour before turning on the microphone. Make sure your content is on topic. Chit chat is ok, as long as it ties in with the mission of your show. Revealing yourself to your audience is critical, but if it's not on topic (like Dave's music today) then it should be left out.

                        Erik K Johnson Joins the Podcast Review Show [31:00]

                        Erik will be joining the Podcast Review Show along with my wife. If you are looking to have your show reviewed, this could be a great coaching session. Here is the flow: You pick an episode for us to review. We listen to it, and take notes. We get you online live and play our favorite clips, and part we think need tweaked, with you LIVE. It turns out being more of a coaching call then the previous review. Because we get that interaction with you, we hope to provide better feedback. Check out Erik's show planning worksheets.

                        The Abduction [38:39]

                        Dave's show is hijacked by a crazy morning zoo crew "Binky and the Whiz". Yes Corn Nuts is a real product. [41:20] Remember your show is global and try to keep your audience in mind.

                        The 911 Call [43:08]

                        Dave tries to get help from a slightly inquisitive 911 operate.

                        School of Podcasting The Musical [45:25]

                        For the fans of the television show "Glee," it's School of Podcasting "The Musical." Featuring the hit songs: My Feed is Not Valid Today Mr. iTunes I'm on Fire with John Lee Doomis Libsyn Rocks You'll laugh, you'll cry, it's better than Cats.

                        The Rescue [46:35]

                        You should always talk to your audience like you are speaking to ONE person.

                        The Conclusion [47:39]

                        You can use sound effects to boost the Theater of the mind. You can bring your stories to life. Dave's plays a clip of a 6 year old David Jackson playing radio. Thank you so much for listening, reviewing the show, for joining the conversation.

                        Dave Plays the Guitar [ 56:45]

                        If I was going to play some old music of mine, I wanted to play something that tied to podcasting. I picked the Song "Take Your Pain," as I want to help you avoid the headaches from spending too much money on equipment, and creating content that won't engage with you  audience. If you're looking to join the School of Podcasting, you can do so by clicking here. There is a 30 day money back guarantee.

                        ]]>108b85de35edc78890dfbf178304350bSun, 16 Mar 2014 15:21:08 -040001:00:36falsefull400400Patreon Helps Podcasters Get Paid - New Podcast Stats - Dealing with NegativityToday on episode 399 we hear how people are getting press credentials with their podcast, we have an interview with Tony from Patreon which is a service that
                        Because of my Podcast - I have Press Credentials [2:34]

                        Today Corey from Ivy Envy podcast explains how his show on the Chicago Cubs has allowed him to get press credentials from some of the minor league teams, which allowed him to interview the Owner of the Chicago cubs (how cool is that?) Tom Rickets. This is a great example of "scaling/niching down" your content. Instead of doing a podcast on Baseball, do it on the Major leagues. Not just the major league, but a certain division. Not just a certain division, but a specific team. Not only the team, but the minor league team, the PA announcer, and all the behind the scenes information that someone who is truly passionate about that team would love. Corey is going to explain how in the future he got a major league rule changed. COOL. Check him out at www.ivyenvy.com or subscribe in iTunes.

                        Patreon Helps Content Creators get Paid and Build Community [6:35]

                        Anthony Privitelli is the head of Creator Relations at Patreon. Patreon is similar to a crowd funding tool like Kickstarter, except its ongoing. You can have it set up to have your patrons (your supporters) pay you a monthly contribution. This may have you feeling the pressure to produce content (when you're not feeling creative). This monthly option may be a good fit for those who produce a lot of content and don't want to charge their patrons numerous times per month. The other options is to get paid per post. Your patron can set a limit if they want (so if you put out 30 posts in a month they can cap their support at 5). You post can be audio, video, or anything downloadable. They do not host the media. Tom Merrit (formerly of this week in tech) is making around $9000 a month. He has over 3000 patrons The D6 Generation is making $232 per episode with 74 patrons The Angry Chicken is making $176 per month with 43 patrons. Mike Falzone is making $371 per podcast with 49 patrons (side note he uses podomatic is in a world of hurt as his audience is too big - see I told you Podomatic is the Devil).

                        Typical Video Strategy

                        You can create a video and post it on YouTube (free) and mark the video as "unlisted" so that only people with the link to that video can see it (so you give the link to the video to patreon and it displays on your Patreon page - and you specify its for patrons only.

                        Hot Spot for Amounts?

                        The average pledge is $7. The hot spot is between $1 and $5 per post.

                        Anthony Privitelli Video Interview

                        Here is the Hangout On Air that I did with Tony, and you will see a little behind the scenes of my account. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5A7z_tX4oMc&feature=share

                        My Amazon Account Has Been Banned For Life[31:18]

                        I wrote about this earlier in the week. My advice would be to NOT redirect your audience to Amazon through any kind of special link. In listening to some of the "bigger" podcasts, they all tell people to go to their website and click the banner. Its not as easy, but they are still associates and I'm not. You can read more about this here I still have affiliate programs through BSW, Same Day Music, and BNH so I will be updating my site.

                        How to Avoid Podfading - Dealing with Negativity[42:14]

                        When you put yourself out there, not everyone will like you. That can be a hard pill to swallow. Here are some tips to help you with negative comments. 1. You can't please everyone. 2. Label any positive responses you get via email. Print these out and make a folder. You could hang these on the wall. 3. Remember you are in control of the podcast. In some cases the person may have a point. HOWEVER if they want you to steer your podcast into a direction that you don't want to go, it's YOUR podcast. If they leave, that's OK. 4. George Hrab shared on his podcast how one of his listeners explained how his day was going horrible, and he listened to George's show and his show cheered him up. That's huge.

                        New Edison Research on Podcasting Stats

                        Pandora is top dog for online streaming radio. iHeart Radio is making a dent. Most people still listen to the radio in the car, but portable media (phones, mp3 players) are still growing in this area). 500% increase of Smart Phone ownership 78% of people 12-24 own a smart phone. 68-78% of people have a smart phone. More and more people are listening on portable devices and NOT on their computer. The computer went from 64% down to 46% while smart phone consumption went through the roof. 39 million Americans listen to podcasts a month. That's just Americans. The average podcast listener listens to 6 a week. Podcast continues to grow every single year.

                        ]]>Today on episode 399 we hear how people are getting press credentials with their podcast, we have an interview with Tony from Patreon which is a service that
                        Because of my Podcast - I have Press Credentials [2:34]

                        Today Corey from Ivy Envy podcast explains how his show on the Chicago Cubs has allowed him to get press credentials from some of the minor league teams, which allowed him to interview the Owner of the Chicago cubs (how cool is that?) Tom Rickets. This is a great example of "scaling/niching down" your content. Instead of doing a podcast on Baseball, do it on the Major leagues. Not just the major league, but a certain division. Not just a certain division, but a specific team. Not only the team, but the minor league team, the PA announcer, and all the behind the scenes information that someone who is truly passionate about that team would love. Corey is going to explain how in the future he got a major league rule changed. COOL. Check him out at www.ivyenvy.com or subscribe in iTunes.

                        Patreon Helps Content Creators get Paid and Build Community [6:35]

                        Anthony Privitelli is the head of Creator Relations at Patreon. Patreon is similar to a crowd funding tool like Kickstarter, except its ongoing. You can have it set up to have your patrons (your supporters) pay you a monthly contribution. This may have you feeling the pressure to produce content (when you're not feeling creative). This monthly option may be a good fit for those who produce a lot of content and don't want to charge their patrons numerous times per month. The other options is to get paid per post. Your patron can set a limit if they want (so if you put out 30 posts in a month they can cap their support at 5). You post can be audio, video, or anything downloadable. They do not host the media. Tom Merrit (formerly of this week in tech) is making around $9000 a month. He has over 3000 patrons The D6 Generation is making $232 per episode with 74 patrons The Angry Chicken is making $176 per month with 43 patrons. Mike Falzone is making $371 per podcast with 49 patrons (side note he uses podomatic is in a world of hurt as his audience is too big - see I told you Podomatic is the Devil).

                        Typical Video Strategy

                        You can create a video and post it on YouTube (free) and mark the video as "unlisted" so that only people with the link to that video can see it (so you give the link to the video to patreon and it displays on your Patreon page - and you specify its for patrons only.

                        Hot Spot for Amounts?

                        The average pledge is $7. The hot spot is between $1 and $5 per post.

                        Anthony Privitelli Video Interview

                        Here is the Hangout On Air that I did with Tony, and you will see a little behind the scenes of my account. http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5A7z_tX4oMc&feature=share

                        My Amazon Account Has Been Banned For Life[31:18]

                        I wrote about this earlier in the week. My advice would be to NOT redirect your audience to Amazon through any kind of special link. In listening to some of the "bigger" podcasts, they all tell people to go to their website and click the banner. Its not as easy, but they are still associates and I'm not. You can read more about this here I still have affiliate programs through BSW, Same Day Music, and BNH so I will be updating my site.

                        How to Avoid Podfading - Dealing with Negativity[42:14]

                        When you put yourself out there, not everyone will like you. That can be a hard pill to swallow. Here are some tips to help you with negative comments. 1. You can't please everyone. 2. Label any positive responses you get via email. Print these out and make a folder. You could hang these on the wall. 3. Remember you are in control of the podcast. In some cases the person may have a point. HOWEVER if they want you to steer your podcast into a direction that you don't want to go, it's YOUR podcast. If they leave, that's OK. 4. George Hrab shared on his podcast how one of his listeners explained how his day was going horrible, and he listened to George's show and his show cheered him up. That's huge.

                        New Edison Research on Podcasting Stats

                        Pandora is top dog for online streaming radio. iHeart Radio is making a dent. Most people still listen to the radio in the car, but portable media (phones, mp3 players) are still growing in this area). 500% increase of Smart Phone ownership 78% of people 12-24 own a smart phone. 68-78% of people have a smart phone. More and more people are listening on portable devices and NOT on their computer. The computer went from 64% down to 46% while smart phone consumption went through the roof. 39 million Americans listen to podcasts a month. That's just Americans. The average podcast listener listens to 6 a week. Podcast continues to grow every single year.

                        ]]>58bb1195fbc9542e368a3fd0f2ee911eSun, 09 Mar 2014 18:01:30 -040001:04:09falsefull399399Blogger Bridge - Accents - Interview Chunking - We're MovingToday in this episode we continue our discussion with Chris Christiansen of amateurtravelor.com as he is the developer behind Bloggerbridge.com which is a great way for businesses and potential guests to find podcasters/bloggers. You can find it at www.bloggerbridge.com
                        Because of my podcast [3:13]

                        Jeff from the Once Upon a Time podcast is now doing a podcast with his wife on the Television show Once Upon a Time. He has had actors from the show call in, and he went to watch a shooting of the show where he got to meet the actors and have lunch with them. He is now having an adventure with his wife.

                        Do You Break Up Interviews into Two Parts? [10:15]

                        If you have a long interview should you break it into two parts? For me there is no such thing as too long, only too boring. If the interview can be broken into two complete segments I think that's ok. I hate when I'm in the middle of a great conversation and the break in and say I have to wait until the next episode to hear the rest. As my interview with Chris went long last week, I cut this portion about blogger bridge from the interview and I'm using it today.

                        Blogger Bridge Helps Connect Podcasters With Businesses[11:55]

                        Blogger Bridge is a website that helps connect companies with relevant bloggers, writers, podcasters, videographers and other content creators. Some people should not work together. Find the right match of skills, approach, content and style for your brand. For more information go to www.bloggerbridge.com

                        Podertainment Magazine is Live

                        You can order your subscription by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podertainment (affiliate link). It's $12 a year or $2.99 per issue.

                        Should I podcast if I have a Accent? [19:05]

                        Lode of http://sotospeakshow.blogspot.com asks, "If English is a second language, should I podcast in English?" This will be completely subjective based on each person, but for me your accent is fine. I would recommend buying a domain and pointing it at your blogspot site.

                        What About Using Libsyn as a Website [24:55]

                        Bill from the ywam podcast (www.ywampodcast.com) asks about using Libsyn.com as a media host and website like Rob Walch does on tii.libsyn.com ?

                        This would be a way to save $7 a month that you would normally pay to a company like HostGator. Its a basic looking website, and you will need to know html to be able to edit it. I would use libsyn for hosting, and something like tumblr.com (IF YOU MUST GO FREE) for your website and submit the libsyn feed (not the Feedburner feed) to iTunes (and get feedburner out of the picture). I spoke about this back in 2008.  You can get a free month at libsyn.com using the coupon code " sopfree."

                        Phone System Checks [33:25]

                        I'm not testing a magic jack as I have tested Uberconference (I said ubercast on the show), and it works fine on its own. It drops callers left and right (as does Blog Talk Radio and Callinstudio.com) . So we will see.

                        Patreon Helps Content Creators Get Paid [37:15]

                        This is a system that like a kickstart.com campaign that is on going, or you can set it up to be paid every time you release an episode. I will have a representative from Patreon on the show next week. You can see my example at http://www.patreon.com/podcastcoach and support the show.

                        Start Podcasting in Six Weeks is Postponed [38:11]

                        I'm moving the School of Podcasting to a VPS server to make it faster. Basically I'm getting more traffic than my current shared hosting can handle. I'm moving to Host Dime ($60 a month). It's not going to be fun, and it  will be time consuming. In general, I need the next few Saturdays to get things moved and in place so I can put future plans in place for the School of Podcasting. We still have the self paced tutorials running, but you can go to www.howtopodcast.com and sign up for the email list to be notified.

                          Mentioned in this Show

                         Same Day Music - No tax, and you can pay for things in split payments

                        Podcasters Rountable Live Streaming Episode

                        Mixlr.com live streaming

                        Kenn Blanchard - Black Man with a Gun

                        Ivy Envy

                        ]]>Today in this episode we continue our discussion with Chris Christiansen of amateurtravelor.com as he is the developer behind Bloggerbridge.com which is a great way for businesses and potential guests to find podcasters/bloggers. You can find it at www.bloggerbridge.com
                        Because of my podcast [3:13]

                        Jeff from the Once Upon a Time podcast is now doing a podcast with his wife on the Television show Once Upon a Time. He has had actors from the show call in, and he went to watch a shooting of the show where he got to meet the actors and have lunch with them. He is now having an adventure with his wife.

                        Do You Break Up Interviews into Two Parts? [10:15]

                        If you have a long interview should you break it into two parts? For me there is no such thing as too long, only too boring. If the interview can be broken into two complete segments I think that's ok. I hate when I'm in the middle of a great conversation and the break in and say I have to wait until the next episode to hear the rest. As my interview with Chris went long last week, I cut this portion about blogger bridge from the interview and I'm using it today.

                        Blogger Bridge Helps Connect Podcasters With Businesses[11:55]

                        Blogger Bridge is a website that helps connect companies with relevant bloggers, writers, podcasters, videographers and other content creators. Some people should not work together. Find the right match of skills, approach, content and style for your brand. For more information go to www.bloggerbridge.com

                        Podertainment Magazine is Live

                        You can order your subscription by going to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/podertainment (affiliate link). It's $12 a year or $2.99 per issue.

                        Should I podcast if I have a Accent? [19:05]

                        Lode of http://sotospeakshow.blogspot.com asks, "If English is a second language, should I podcast in English?" This will be completely subjective based on each person, but for me your accent is fine. I would recommend buying a domain and pointing it at your blogspot site.

                        What About Using Libsyn as a Website [24:55]

                        Bill from the ywam podcast (www.ywampodcast.com) asks about using Libsyn.com as a media host and website like Rob Walch does on tii.libsyn.com ?

                        This would be a way to save $7 a month that you would normally pay to a company like HostGator. Its a basic looking website, and you will need to know html to be able to edit it. I would use libsyn for hosting, and something like tumblr.com (IF YOU MUST GO FREE) for your website and submit the libsyn feed (not the Feedburner feed) to iTunes (and get feedburner out of the picture). I spoke about this back in 2008.  You can get a free month at libsyn.com using the coupon code " sopfree."

                        Phone System Checks [33:25]

                        I'm not testing a magic jack as I have tested Uberconference (I said ubercast on the show), and it works fine on its own. It drops callers left and right (as does Blog Talk Radio and Callinstudio.com) . So we will see.

                        Patreon Helps Content Creators Get Paid [37:15]

                        This is a system that like a kickstart.com campaign that is on going, or you can set it up to be paid every time you release an episode. I will have a representative from Patreon on the show next week. You can see my example at http://www.patreon.com/podcastcoach and support the show.

                        Start Podcasting in Six Weeks is Postponed [38:11]

                        I'm moving the School of Podcasting to a VPS server to make it faster. Basically I'm getting more traffic than my current shared hosting can handle. I'm moving to Host Dime ($60 a month). It's not going to be fun, and it  will be time consuming. In general, I need the next few Saturdays to get things moved and in place so I can put future plans in place for the School of Podcasting. We still have the self paced tutorials running, but you can go to www.howtopodcast.com and sign up for the email list to be notified.

                          Mentioned in this Show

                         Same Day Music - No tax, and you can pay for things in split payments

                        Podcasters Rountable Live Streaming Episode

                        Mixlr.com live streaming

                        Kenn Blanchard - Black Man with a Gun

                        Ivy Envy

                        ]]>52c2da285c580b5ce52eb6c51ea03e61Sun, 02 Mar 2014 18:31:05 -040048:08falsefull398398Chris Christensen from Amateur Traveler - Serious HobbiesToday we interview Chris Christensen  of the  Amateur Traveler podcast. He has been doing since 2005, and has won awards for his podcast(s) and been featured in national magazine's and newspapers. You can see all the places he's visited by viewing his episode map on his website. He is also the developer of Blogger Bridge which helps bloggers and podcasters get guests (more on that next week).
                        In Today's Interview You Learn:

                        Chris uses Linkedin to find guests and places to promote his show

                        Chris started in one direction and changed later. So don't feel bad if you change your format. Your podcast can often be a work in progress.

                        Chris networks with other people in his niche (traveler podcasts) and they often appear on each other's shows

                        He has a clearly defined audience profile that he uses to determine what will (and will not ) make it on his podcast.

                        His podcast is used to help people learn English

                        Chris takes action to find sponsors. In the beginning they didn't come to him

                        Dave's Tour of Duty [42:45]

                        Scott Johnson from the Computer Tutor Show sent in a comment after listening to the Podcast Review Show on the One Word Go Show. You can hear this example of a podcast Dave does not connect with at podcastreviewshow.com/29

                        In general great content does not happen by accident. Keith and the Girl explain how they have always taken their podcast serious. They take four hours to produce a one hour show. In my interview with Keith and the Girl, Keith said that even though they were podcasting in a spare bedroom, they planned out their show, and didn't treat it like "just a podcast."

                        The Serious Hobbiest

                        I did some research and if I joined a bowling league in Rocky River Ohio, my local alley would charge me $4 a game. If we bowled 4 games a week that would be $64 a month. It would cost $184 to by a ball, shoes, bag, cleaning rag, etc. It costs me $20 for media hosting, $9 for website hosting, and $1 a month for my podcast. That means it cost me $30 a month. This is HALF of what it would cost to be on a bowling league. I can spend $50 on an ATR 2100 microphone and be good to go using free podcasting software like Audacity and Garage band.

                         

                        If You Must Podcast For Free (Please, Please, Please Don't)

                        Scott Boyd wants to know how to podcast on the super cheap. Here is his website. He uses Absolute RSS Editor ($30) to edit his RSS.  He uses Filezilla to upload your files.

                        You can build your website using a site like Tumblr, or Blogger. You can use Archive.org as a media host. You can use blubrry.com for stats. Then you would have to use Feedburner (a really bad idea in my book) to add your iTunes information. We hope that Archive.org doesn't slow down your downloads TOO MUCH when you get busy. We hope that feedburner is still around if you have to move your feed (when you finally decide to "do it for real).

                        So why don't I promote podcasting for free? Because I don't believe in it. I think anything worth doing is worth doing well. If you are so strapped for cash that $30 a month is too much money, then go to Moneyplansos.com and listen to Steve Stewart tell you how to manage your finances. I'm pretty sure just cutting out soft drinks, coffee, or your TV cable would give you enough money to pay for your podcast.

                        When I was younger I moved from a small apartment to a bigger one. Then later I moved to a house. If I had to do it all again, I would've stayed in the smaller apartment and saved my money and moved to a house sooner (and without the hassle of moving three times instead of twice). I have come up with the least expensive way to do a serious podcast. I don't recommend places that want to charge you $70 for a domain. I recommend Name Cheap and Godaddy for your domains (around $10 a year). I don't recommend web hosting that's $30 a month. I choose Host Gator for $9 a month. You can get 25% off using coupon " podcastcoach " .  I show you how you can podcast in mono and save 50% on your media hosting bill. All these tools allow you to grow. They are a solid basement to build your house on. Free websites, hosting, and other tools are not. They are good for that person who isn't sure if they want to podcast. They want to record one episode and see how hard it is.

                        Keep in mind, you spend more than $30 if you take your wife to the movies and you get popcorn - and that's for one night. Podcasting is $30 for a MONTH of activity. 

                        See my previous episode on Podcasting for Free.

                        Start Podcasting in Six Weeks Start 3-29

                        If you are looking for some personalized training we meet every Saturday from Noon to 2 EST for six weeks.

                        ]]>Today we interview Chris Christensen  of the  Amateur Traveler podcast. He has been doing since 2005, and has won awards for his podcast(s) and been featured in national magazine's and newspapers. You can see all the places he's visited by viewing his episode map on his website. He is also the developer of Blogger Bridge which helps bloggers and podcasters get guests (more on that next week).
                        In Today's Interview You Learn:

                        Chris uses Linkedin to find guests and places to promote his show

                        Chris started in one direction and changed later. So don't feel bad if you change your format. Your podcast can often be a work in progress.

                        Chris networks with other people in his niche (traveler podcasts) and they often appear on each other's shows

                        He has a clearly defined audience profile that he uses to determine what will (and will not ) make it on his podcast.

                        His podcast is used to help people learn English

                        Chris takes action to find sponsors. In the beginning they didn't come to him

                        Dave's Tour of Duty [42:45]

                        Scott Johnson from the Computer Tutor Show sent in a comment after listening to the Podcast Review Show on the One Word Go Show. You can hear this example of a podcast Dave does not connect with at podcastreviewshow.com/29

                        In general great content does not happen by accident. Keith and the Girl explain how they have always taken their podcast serious. They take four hours to produce a one hour show. In my interview with Keith and the Girl, Keith said that even though they were podcasting in a spare bedroom, they planned out their show, and didn't treat it like "just a podcast."

                        The Serious Hobbiest

                        I did some research and if I joined a bowling league in Rocky River Ohio, my local alley would charge me $4 a game. If we bowled 4 games a week that would be $64 a month. It would cost $184 to by a ball, shoes, bag, cleaning rag, etc. It costs me $20 for media hosting, $9 for website hosting, and $1 a month for my podcast. That means it cost me $30 a month. This is HALF of what it would cost to be on a bowling league. I can spend $50 on an ATR 2100 microphone and be good to go using free podcasting software like Audacity and Garage band.

                         

                        If You Must Podcast For Free (Please, Please, Please Don't)

                        Scott Boyd wants to know how to podcast on the super cheap. Here is his website. He uses Absolute RSS Editor ($30) to edit his RSS.  He uses Filezilla to upload your files.

                        You can build your website using a site like Tumblr, or Blogger. You can use Archive.org as a media host. You can use blubrry.com for stats. Then you would have to use Feedburner (a really bad idea in my book) to add your iTunes information. We hope that Archive.org doesn't slow down your downloads TOO MUCH when you get busy. We hope that feedburner is still around if you have to move your feed (when you finally decide to "do it for real).

                        So why don't I promote podcasting for free? Because I don't believe in it. I think anything worth doing is worth doing well. If you are so strapped for cash that $30 a month is too much money, then go to Moneyplansos.com and listen to Steve Stewart tell you how to manage your finances. I'm pretty sure just cutting out soft drinks, coffee, or your TV cable would give you enough money to pay for your podcast.

                        When I was younger I moved from a small apartment to a bigger one. Then later I moved to a house. If I had to do it all again, I would've stayed in the smaller apartment and saved my money and moved to a house sooner (and without the hassle of moving three times instead of twice). I have come up with the least expensive way to do a serious podcast. I don't recommend places that want to charge you $70 for a domain. I recommend Name Cheap and Godaddy for your domains (around $10 a year). I don't recommend web hosting that's $30 a month. I choose Host Gator for $9 a month. You can get 25% off using coupon " podcastcoach " .  I show you how you can podcast in mono and save 50% on your media hosting bill. All these tools allow you to grow. They are a solid basement to build your house on. Free websites, hosting, and other tools are not. They are good for that person who isn't sure if they want to podcast. They want to record one episode and see how hard it is.

                        Keep in mind, you spend more than $30 if you take your wife to the movies and you get popcorn - and that's for one night. Podcasting is $30 for a MONTH of activity. 

                        See my previous episode on Podcasting for Free.

                        Start Podcasting in Six Weeks Start 3-29

                        If you are looking for some personalized training we meet every Saturday from Noon to 2 EST for six weeks.

                        ]]>a9813981a1d64d016ac0b180a25ebbe2Sun, 23 Feb 2014 18:55:08 -040001:04:49falsefull397397Podcast Promos 101 - Podcasting StatsIn today's show I talk about "back in the day" when people use to create promos (a short 30, or 60 second spot) that helped spread the word about their show. You often would "swap" promos with other similar podcasts. I'm not sure why (fear maybe that people would leave your show) this kind of went by the wayside. As word of mouth is the BEST form of promotion, I still like the idea of a podcast promo. This was inspired by a recent episode of the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about the Podcast Promotion Police.

                        Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/396 for more information

                        ]]>In today's show I talk about "back in the day" when people use to create promos (a short 30, or 60 second spot) that helped spread the word about their show. You often would "swap" promos with other similar podcasts. I'm not sure why (fear maybe that people would leave your show) this kind of went by the wayside. As word of mouth is the BEST form of promotion, I still like the idea of a podcast promo. This was inspired by a recent episode of the Podcaster's Roundtable where we talked about the Podcast Promotion Police.

                        Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/396 for more information

                        ]]>e59446d20e4e73715f3b19cc21883632Sun, 16 Feb 2014 19:48:43 -040055:29falsefull396396Keith and the Girl Share Ultimate Podcasting TipsBe the first to comment... Related Posts:
                        • Why Did You Unsubscribe From That Podcast?
                        • Libsyn Pro Explained
                        • If Content is King, What is Queen?
                        • Should I Read My Podcast?
                        • Common Podcast Mistakes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>Be the first to comment... Related Posts:
                        • Why Did You Unsubscribe From That Podcast?
                        • Libsyn Pro Explained
                        • If Content is King, What is Queen?
                        • Should I Read My Podcast?
                        • Common Podcast Mistakes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5471Mon, 10 Feb 2014 05:00:59 -040055:45falsefull394394Common Podcasting Mistakes That Are Easy to Fix – Creating And Selling A Book4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Internal Business Podcasts – Finding Topics For Episodes
                        • Keith and the Girl Share Ultimate Podcasting Tips
                        • Common Podcast Mistakes
                        • Common Validation Errors
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Internal Business Podcasts – Finding Topics For Episodes
                        • Keith and the Girl Share Ultimate Podcasting Tips
                        • Common Podcast Mistakes
                        • Common Validation Errors
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5455Mon, 03 Feb 2014 05:00:24 -040001:03:33falsefull393393Podcasting Boost Your Business – Podcast Media Host Checklist – Find the Money To Podcast5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • The $30 Microphone Experiment
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        • Podcasting Can Boost Your Business – I’ve Got Proof
                        • Podcast Listener Loyalty
                        • April Income Statement $1778
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • The $30 Microphone Experiment
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        • Podcasting Can Boost Your Business – I’ve Got Proof
                        • Podcast Listener Loyalty
                        • April Income Statement $1778
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5440Mon, 27 Jan 2014 05:00:01 -040001:06:56falsefull392392George Hrab Takes Advantage of Every Opportunity Podcasting Provides1 Comment - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Producing Your Podcast From Segments with George Hrab
                        • Troubleshooting Your iTunes Podcast Listing
                        • Podcast Listener Loyalty
                        • Never Podcast on 4 Hours Sleep
                        • Taking Your Podcast Portable
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>1 Comment - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Producing Your Podcast From Segments with George Hrab
                        • Troubleshooting Your iTunes Podcast Listing
                        • Podcast Listener Loyalty
                        • Never Podcast on 4 Hours Sleep
                        • Taking Your Podcast Portable
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5396Mon, 20 Jan 2014 05:00:02 -040054:03falsefull391391iHeart Radio Stats – Mignon Fogarty “Grammar Girl” and 2014 Predictions9 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Evergreen Content Help Build You Audience
                        • Growing Your Audience From 100s to 1000s
                        • George Hrab Takes Advantage of Every Opportunity Podcasting Provides
                        • Jason Hartman Attributes 10 Million in Sales to His Podcast
                        • The Perfect Podcast Launch? – Podcast Chat – Say Thank You!
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>9 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Evergreen Content Help Build You Audience
                        • Growing Your Audience From 100s to 1000s
                        • George Hrab Takes Advantage of Every Opportunity Podcasting Provides
                        • Jason Hartman Attributes 10 Million in Sales to His Podcast
                        • The Perfect Podcast Launch? – Podcast Chat – Say Thank You!
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5378Sun, 12 Jan 2014 05:00:42 -040052:48falsefull390390The Podcast Success Formula – Names Not Numbers4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Bloggers Would You Spend $50 to Grow Your Audience by 20%?
                        • Looking Forward to Checking Podcast Statistic Projections Against Reality
                        • Donations
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        • Making Your Podcast Better
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Bloggers Would You Spend $50 to Grow Your Audience by 20%?
                        • Looking Forward to Checking Podcast Statistic Projections Against Reality
                        • Donations
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        • Making Your Podcast Better
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5369Thu, 09 Jan 2014 05:30:13 -040033:06falsefull389389Best Podcast Ever10 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>10 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5213Mon, 30 Dec 2013 16:47:27 -040001:19:00falsefull388388Preparing Your Guests – Removing the Noise From Your Life and Podcast2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Getting Your Podcast Media Right – Removing Noise From Your Podcast
                        • Preparing to Use Skype
                        • Taking Action Against The Trolls – Podcasting Resources – Podcasting Saved Their Marriage
                        • Battling Computer Fan Noise
                        • Time Shift the Gold
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Getting Your Podcast Media Right – Removing Noise From Your Podcast
                        • Preparing to Use Skype
                        • Taking Action Against The Trolls – Podcasting Resources – Podcasting Saved Their Marriage
                        • Battling Computer Fan Noise
                        • Time Shift the Gold
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5325Mon, 23 Dec 2013 05:00:29 -040049:36falsefull387387What Does HOLY COW! Sound Like? – The Proper Podcast Launch Speed – RepostBe the first to comment... Related Posts:
                        • What Do I Podcast About?
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        • How Much Media Hosting Do I Need
                        • Preparing Your Guests – Removing the Noise From Your Life and Podcast
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>Be the first to comment... Related Posts:
                        • What Do I Podcast About?
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        • How Much Media Hosting Do I Need
                        • Preparing Your Guests – Removing the Noise From Your Life and Podcast
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5294Mon, 16 Dec 2013 06:00:34 -040042:43falsefull386386Andrew Zarian Podcasting as a Career1 Comment - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • From Picking Produce to Picking a Career
                        • Engaging Content With Podcast Talent Coach Erik K Johnson
                        • Podcasting Year in Review
                        • Podcast Success: One Thing Leads To Another – Premium Podcast Tools – Auphonic Web Based Audio Tool
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>1 Comment - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • From Picking Produce to Picking a Career
                        • Engaging Content With Podcast Talent Coach Erik K Johnson
                        • Podcasting Year in Review
                        • Podcast Success: One Thing Leads To Another – Premium Podcast Tools – Auphonic Web Based Audio Tool
                        • Convention Tips – Personal Podcast Promotion – Podcast Equipment Questions
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5234Mon, 09 Dec 2013 05:00:45 -040001:04:36falsefull385385What Is Your Absolute Favorite Podcast?5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • File Management
                        • Podcast Promototion: Is Your Cart Before the Horse?
                        • The Last 5 in 5
                        • You Can’t Please Everybody
                        • Flipping the Podcast Promotion Switch
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • File Management
                        • Podcast Promototion: Is Your Cart Before the Horse?
                        • The Last 5 in 5
                        • You Can’t Please Everybody
                        • Flipping the Podcast Promotion Switch
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5203Sun, 01 Dec 2013 05:00:11 -040050:21falsefull384384Podcasting Boosts Influence and Community3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Boosts Business – with Connie and Sheila
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        • Get More Traffic to Your Podcast with SEO Expert Marcus Couch
                        • Troubleshooting Your iTunes Podcast Listing
                        • Electrovoice RE320 Microphone Vs Sure SM58
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Boosts Business – with Connie and Sheila
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        • Get More Traffic to Your Podcast with SEO Expert Marcus Couch
                        • Troubleshooting Your iTunes Podcast Listing
                        • Electrovoice RE320 Microphone Vs Sure SM58
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5166Mon, 25 Nov 2013 05:00:29 -040001:05:09falsefull383383How Many Downloads Do Podcasters Average?11 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Feedburner Says My Feed is Too Big
                        • Building a Podcast Network
                        • Passion Lessons From Seinfeld – Podcast Evangelism with Jim Collison
                        • Pricless Podcast Success – 192 Million Downloads A Week – Linking Your Podcast to iTunes
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>11 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Feedburner Says My Feed is Too Big
                        • Building a Podcast Network
                        • Passion Lessons From Seinfeld – Podcast Evangelism with Jim Collison
                        • Pricless Podcast Success – 192 Million Downloads A Week – Linking Your Podcast to iTunes
                        • Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5100Mon, 18 Nov 2013 05:00:37 -040058:43falsefull382382Who Wants a Successful Business Podcast?3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Boosts Business – with Connie and Sheila
                        • Looking Deeper Into Podcast Promotion
                        • Creating an Elevator Pitch for the Expo
                        • Producing More Podcast Episodes in Less Time
                        • Podcasting For Free- Good Idea?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Boosts Business – with Connie and Sheila
                        • Looking Deeper Into Podcast Promotion
                        • Creating an Elevator Pitch for the Expo
                        • Producing More Podcast Episodes in Less Time
                        • Podcasting For Free- Good Idea?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5125Mon, 11 Nov 2013 05:00:09 -040001:05:55falsefull381381You Have Something To Say – ATR2100 Shock Mount – Lessons From Podcast Awards6 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        • Is the Heil PR40 Microphone Really That Good?
                        • Podcast Equipment Recommendations
                        • Your Motivation to Podcast – the Big Why
                        • Podcasting Can Boost Your Business – I’ve Got Proof
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>6 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        • Is the Heil PR40 Microphone Really That Good?
                        • Podcast Equipment Recommendations
                        • Your Motivation to Podcast – the Big Why
                        • Podcasting Can Boost Your Business – I’ve Got Proof
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5101Mon, 04 Nov 2013 05:00:03 -040052:52falsefull380380The Perfect Podcast Launch? – Podcast Chat – Say Thank You!2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Live Podcasting Pros and Cons
                        • Group Chat
                        • Scaling Back Your Content
                        • ChatWing Questions, Understanding Media Hosting,
                        • Your First Podcast Always Stinks
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Live Podcasting Pros and Cons
                        • Group Chat
                        • Scaling Back Your Content
                        • ChatWing Questions, Understanding Media Hosting,
                        • Your First Podcast Always Stinks
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5082Mon, 28 Oct 2013 04:00:38 -040001:00:09falsefull379379Gaining Trust Through Podcasting – Saving Your Voice3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Affordable Podcast Consulting – 22 Cents an Hour
                        • The EASY Way to Record A Skype Call
                        • You Don’t Need a “DJ” Voice To Podcast
                        • The Bad Side of Podcasting
                        • I’ve Got To Be Me – Tales From The Expo 2
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Affordable Podcast Consulting – 22 Cents an Hour
                        • The EASY Way to Record A Skype Call
                        • You Don’t Need a “DJ” Voice To Podcast
                        • The Bad Side of Podcasting
                        • I’ve Got To Be Me – Tales From The Expo 2
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5027Mon, 21 Oct 2013 04:00:02 -040059:41falsefull378378Joan Stewart the Queen of Free Publicity – Why Experts Can Save Your Sanity8 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Growing Your Podcast Audience By Getting on Radio
                        • Marketing 101 With Allen Stewart of the Marketer’s Podcast
                        • If Content is King, What is Queen?
                        • Audio Technica 20/20 – and The iRiver T30 Fooled Me
                        • Is Content Really King?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>8 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Growing Your Podcast Audience By Getting on Radio
                        • Marketing 101 With Allen Stewart of the Marketer’s Podcast
                        • If Content is King, What is Queen?
                        • Audio Technica 20/20 – and The iRiver T30 Fooled Me
                        • Is Content Really King?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=5010Mon, 14 Oct 2013 04:00:27 -040059:46falsefull377377New And Noteworthy in Three Days – Free Royalty Free Music4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • “Free” Holiday Production Music For Your Podcast
                        • Finding Music For Your Podcast
                        • Affordable WordPress Hosting
                        • Free Podcast Production Music
                        • I’ve Got My Podcast Idea – Now What?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • “Free” Holiday Production Music For Your Podcast
                        • Finding Music For Your Podcast
                        • Affordable WordPress Hosting
                        • Free Podcast Production Music
                        • I’ve Got My Podcast Idea – Now What?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4923Mon, 07 Oct 2013 04:00:55 -040051:41falsefull376376Podcast Tools Shootout – Stitcher Continues to Grow2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcast Promotion The Biblical Way
                        • Get to Know Stitcher
                        • Preparing Your Guests – Removing the Noise From Your Life and Podcast
                        • Podcasting Statistics From Todd Cochran – Stitchers News
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcast Promotion The Biblical Way
                        • Get to Know Stitcher
                        • Preparing Your Guests – Removing the Noise From Your Life and Podcast
                        • Podcasting Statistics From Todd Cochran – Stitchers News
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4913Mon, 30 Sep 2013 04:00:11 -040052:36falsefull375375Identifying and Embracing Your Differences2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Embracing Your Audience
                        • Record Your Interviews in Stereo
                        • Embracing the Sight Impaired Audience
                        • 108 Benefiting From Podcamps and Expos
                        • I’ve Got My Podcast Idea – Now What?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Embracing Your Audience
                        • Record Your Interviews in Stereo
                        • Embracing the Sight Impaired Audience
                        • 108 Benefiting From Podcamps and Expos
                        • I’ve Got My Podcast Idea – Now What?
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4902Mon, 23 Sep 2013 04:00:09 -040001:02:12falsefull374374Jason Hartman Attributes 10 Million in Sales to His Podcast3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Is Super Hot in 2013
                        • You Have Something To Say – ATR2100 Shock Mount – Lessons From Podcast Awards
                        • Joel Osteen Serving 5 Million Podcasts A MONTH
                        • If You Have To Spell it – You can smell it..
                        • Pricless Podcast Success – 192 Million Downloads A Week – Linking Your Podcast to iTunes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>3 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Podcasting Is Super Hot in 2013
                        • You Have Something To Say – ATR2100 Shock Mount – Lessons From Podcast Awards
                        • Joel Osteen Serving 5 Million Podcasts A MONTH
                        • If You Have To Spell it – You can smell it..
                        • Pricless Podcast Success – 192 Million Downloads A Week – Linking Your Podcast to iTunes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4888Sun, 15 Sep 2013 04:00:02 -040058:42falsefull373373Blog Talk Radio Killer – Mommycast InterviewIn this episode we hear about a podcaster who is interviewing his basketball heroes, I have a tool to allow you to take live phone calls, and we have an interview with Paul Vogelzang of the Mommycast who back in 2004 received a six figure sponsorship deal for their Mommycast podcast.  Because of My Podcast – […]

                        4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post...Related Posts:

                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • His Podcast Brought Him a Sponsor
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        • Time Shift the Gold
                        • My Definition of Bad Audio Quality
                        
                        

                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back

                        ]]>In this episode we hear about a podcaster who is interviewing his basketball heroes, I have a tool to allow you to take live phone calls, and we have an interview with Paul Vogelzang of the Mommycast who back in 2004 received a six figure sponsorship deal for their Mommycast podcast.  Because of My Podcast – […]

                        4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post...Related Posts:

                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • His Podcast Brought Him a Sponsor
                        • My Co-Host is a Jerk
                        • Time Shift the Gold
                        • My Definition of Bad Audio Quality
                        
                        

                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4851Mon, 09 Sep 2013 04:00:00 -040001:00:45falsefull372372Seismic Audio Slider Mixers Reviewed – Fair Use Revisited2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Seismic Audio Slider 4 & 7 Investigation
                        • Blog Talk Radio Killer – Mommycast Interview -
                        • The Importance of Test Shows
                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • Hey DJ – Get To The Point!
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Seismic Audio Slider 4 & 7 Investigation
                        • Blog Talk Radio Killer – Mommycast Interview -
                        • The Importance of Test Shows
                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • Hey DJ – Get To The Point!
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4839Mon, 02 Sep 2013 05:00:32 -040043:10falsefull371371The Podcaster Attitude – Your Biggest Tool For Success5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Follow Conversations on Twitter
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        • Free MP3 Tool – Focus on Recording
                        • You Can’t Please Everybody
                        • 2008 Podcasting Likes and Dislikes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>5 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Follow Conversations on Twitter
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        • Free MP3 Tool – Focus on Recording
                        • You Can’t Please Everybody
                        • 2008 Podcasting Likes and Dislikes
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4823Mon, 26 Aug 2013 05:00:09 -040001:00:31falsefull370370My Podcast Workflow, Podcast Artwork Slicer ReviewedIn today’s episode we hear about a suspenseful event taking place as the studio as Dave is forced to do his show without any notes. His computer will not reboot. We also hear about how he assembles a podcast, and his opinion after playing with Podcast Artwork Slicer for an hour or so. Podcasts Out […]

                        The post My Podcast Workflow, Podcast Artwork Slicer Reviewed appeared first on School of Podcasting - Learn "How To Podcast" with Podcast Coach Dave Jackson.

                        2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Aphex Project Channel Review – The Warmth of Community
                        • Blubrry PowerPress Reviewed
                        • Record Your Interviews in Stereo
                        • Zoom H2 Reviewed and Back To School Special
                        • The Importance of Test Shows
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>In today’s episode we hear about a suspenseful event taking place as the studio as Dave is forced to do his show without any notes. His computer will not reboot. We also hear about how he assembles a podcast, and his opinion after playing with Podcast Artwork Slicer for an hour or so. Podcasts Out […]

                        The post My Podcast Workflow, Podcast Artwork Slicer Reviewed appeared first on School of Podcasting - Learn "How To Podcast" with Podcast Coach Dave Jackson.

                        2 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Aphex Project Channel Review – The Warmth of Community
                        • Blubrry PowerPress Reviewed
                        • Record Your Interviews in Stereo
                        • Zoom H2 Reviewed and Back To School Special
                        • The Importance of Test Shows
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4802Mon, 19 Aug 2013 05:00:09 -040056:58falsefull369369Aphex Project Channel Review – The Warmth of CommunityToday we talk about the freedom that podcasting provides, we hear about a pothole with Microsoft Word we should avoid, we hear the wonderful tones produced by the Aphex Project Channel, a resource for $10 Podcast Album Artwork, and we talk about the joy of community. Because of my Podcast… I Get to Share What […]

                        The post Aphex Project Channel Review – The Warmth of Community appeared first on School of Podcasting - Learn "How To Podcast" with Podcast Coach Dave Jackson.

                        6 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Expo Toy Roundup Part I
                        • PowerPress Channel Casting
                        • Taking Your Podcast Portable
                        • Spending Your Tax Return
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>Today we talk about the freedom that podcasting provides, we hear about a pothole with Microsoft Word we should avoid, we hear the wonderful tones produced by the Aphex Project Channel, a resource for $10 Podcast Album Artwork, and we talk about the joy of community. Because of my Podcast… I Get to Share What […]

                        The post Aphex Project Channel Review – The Warmth of Community appeared first on School of Podcasting - Learn "How To Podcast" with Podcast Coach Dave Jackson.

                        6 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Expo Toy Roundup Part I
                        • PowerPress Channel Casting
                        • Taking Your Podcast Portable
                        • Spending Your Tax Return
                        • A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4786Mon, 12 Aug 2013 05:00:59 -040048:57falsefull368368Podcast Media Kits7 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Make Your Podcast a “MUST HEAR”
                        • Is Opening Chit Chat Bad? – Spreaker and BTR – Nick Seuberling from Start Talking and Recording Today
                        • Adding ID3 tags to your Media
                        • Which Media Host Blulbrry Vs Libsyn Overview
                        • Mr Media Bob Andelman
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>7 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Make Your Podcast a “MUST HEAR”
                        • Is Opening Chit Chat Bad? – Spreaker and BTR – Nick Seuberling from Start Talking and Recording Today
                        • Adding ID3 tags to your Media
                        • Which Media Host Blulbrry Vs Libsyn Overview
                        • Mr Media Bob Andelman
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4749Mon, 05 Aug 2013 05:00:40 -040056:33falsefull367367Yamaha MG102C Mixer Reviewed – Broadcasting (not podcasting) ToolsIn today's podcast I'm playing with all sorts of tools . I recently purchased the Yamaha MG102C mixer and I really like it. It's very flexible, and comes in right under $100. I'm also playing with Radioboss software that allows me to mix in music, jingles, etc and broadcast LIVE to a service like listen2myradio.com. I'm also sharing new from iTunes, Spreaker, iHeartradio, and more.

                        Because of My Podcast.. a New Co-Host [1:55]

                        This week we reconnect with Wayne Henderson of mediavoiceovers.com shares how his podcast not only got him great sears a Green Bay Packers game, but it also introduced him to a person who is now his co-host of his new podcast about the television show under the dome. Check it out at http://underthedomeradio.com/

                        Yamaha MG102c Mixer Review [5:51]

                        One of the reasons I love the Audio Technica 2100 is its ability to grow with the podcaster. Other usb only microphones turn into a paperweight if you buy a mixer (i.e. blue snowball, blue yeti - usb only). I love Behringer mixers and they fit into most people's budgets. I saw the Yamaha MG102C mixer at Guitar Center which has four XLR inputs, and two of those have a built-in compressor, and "inserts" which makes adding additional effects like a noise gate super easy (you don't need inserts to add effects, but it is easier with them).

                        With this in mind if you want to add effects via an insert jack, you have two. You also have additional channels if you want to grow (plug your phone into the mixer, your ipad, or other sound creating devices). The Behringer mixer I was using (Xenyx 802 ) is perfect for one or two people, but it doesn't have any inserts or compression (or an on/off button). If I later purchased something like a noise gate, I would plug my mic into the noise gate and the noise gate into the mixer.

                        If you have the extra $40 and you are just starting out, this mixer is a great podcasting mixer and it's (as I write this) $99 at amazon.com

                        The new model is the MG10

                        iTunes Has One Billion Podcast Subscribers [17:22]

                        When you opened iTunes this week you saw a banner stating that they now had one BILLION people subscribing to podcasts. Sometimes stats come in and out the ears without a lot of thought. I was teaching at a facility this week that probably had 18 rooms on the floor I was on. Each room had 30 people. That means there were 540 people on that floor if it was full. If we took all the people from iTunes who subscribe to podcasts and put them in that building it would be 1,851,858 stories tall.

                        So not only are people listening to podcasts, they are subscribing to podcasts. Not sure how to subscribe? Check out www.learntosubscribe.com

                        Podcast Spotlight Let's Reverse Obesity [21:09]

                        I like to spotlight members of the SOP. This week we are spotlighting Let's Reverse Obesity. This is a great podcast filled with inspiring words of encouragement, frontline tactics, personal insights, and brutally honest stories. John is admittedly obese, and you are along for his journey as he shares his progress, and talks about great articles and stories that he has found on the web. Check it out at www.letsreverseobesity.com

                        IHeartRadio App adds Talk, and Spreaker Holds the Key [24:37]

                        iHeartradio which has an estimated 30 million registered members has added talk to their app and website. Spreaker has a way to submit your podcast to be listed on this app. According to an interview with a Spreaker executive on the Music Radio Creative podcast this is the "only way" to get into iHeart radio. In looking at the iheart.com site see plenty of podcasts in their talk section that are NOT listed on Spreaker (many of these people i.e. are already famous). None the less, spreaker is holding the door for us, and you can submit your podcast for inclusion. I have yet to read their terms of service, but I'm sure it's interesting.

                        The bottom line is podcasting has another platform that gives it a chance to reach a larger audience. I believe in the future podcasting will be the "minor leagues" of media. For more information go to spreaker.com

                        Tools For Podcasters to be Broadcasters [31:20]

                        • 
                          
                        
                        

                        You do NOT need to do this when you start a podcast. This is for the podcaster who wants to broadcast their show LIVE over the internet. It takes more setup time, and adds technical hoops that you must jump through.

                        There are tools (free) that will allow people to steam your current (and past) back catalog. Site like podtrac, blubrry.com and libsyn.com all have players. You can design your own with a tool called the Wimpy Player. You can also cut and paste all the direct links to your audio and paste them into a text file and name it with something that ends in .m3u (not .txt). Then upload the text file and put a link to it.

                        Lisen2MyRadio and SchoolofPodcasting.fm

                        This service starts at $5 a month. It doesn't limit how long you can broadcast, only the number of people who can listen simultaneously. You can see how many listeners you have (and where they came from, how long they listen) in your control panel. What I have done at schoolofpodcasting.fm is uploaded a bunch of answer to frequently asked questions for those people who are brand new to podcasting. These files rotate 24/7. I also have some testimonials that are played every third track. I also mix in every fifth track a "you're listening to School of Podcasting Radio".

                        Broadcasting Live Using Listen2MyRadio

                        When I want to "cut into" my live stream I can use a software call Radio Caster that will tie into my Listen2myradio account. I can talk as long as I want. If I have a mixer, I can mix in my music, my microphone, my co-host, and send everything from my mixer into the microphone input of my computer. I then can tell the Radio Caster to broadcast whatever is coming into the computer. The price for Radio Caster is $39.

                        If you want to be able to mix in music, jingles, etc as you podcast all in one place they also produce a software title call Radio Boss. You simply enter your listen2myradio information, your DJ information (you set yourself up as a dj on listen2myradio), and when you connect your stream switches to your live feed. When you disconnect it goes back to your original playlist - automatically.

                        Listen2myradio also provides html5 players so people can listen on their ipads, iphones, and other devices that don't like flash players.

                        My listen2myradio account costs me $12.50 which is currently cheaper then spreaker. Spreaker is also a media host (which you can store files on your account up to 2G) but its not really meant for podcasting. I would recommend using the service for streaming and a service like Libsyn.com or blubrry.com for media hosting.

                        
                        

                        
                        

                        You can send one output of your broadcast into your computer (Radio Caster or Radio boss) and then the headphone out of this into your portable recorder.

                        As I said, this is not needed (or recommended) for most people. When I mentioned schoolofpodcasting.fm last week a number of people asked me how I was pulling it off. Now you know.

                        If you order choose the Shoutcast 2 option, then choose how many potential listeners you want. You can start with 10 ($5 a month) and go from there.

                        RadioBoss Review [41:05]

                        Radioboss might a bit overkill for the average podcaster. While listentomyradio allows you to create playlists online, this allows you to control everything from your PC. You can set certain files to play at certain times. You can create unlimited playlists, cart walls, and much more. You can have playlists created automatically. Be very careful when thinking of streaming mainstream music (as its illegal).

                        I like the easy of use for the creating of lists and carts (lots of dragging and dropping). It was very easy to configure to tap into my live broadcasting and now I can mix in music, sound effects and such and do everything live. Again, this is NOT podcasting - its BROADCASTING. Radioboss has different levels and starts around $199.

                        Pricing

                        Listen2MyRadio starts at $10 a month (UPDATE: I prefer In today's podcast I'm playing with all sorts of tools . I recently purchased the Yamaha MG102C mixer and I really like it. It's very flexible, and comes in right under $100. I'm also playing with Radioboss software that allows me to mix in music, jingles, etc and broadcast LIVE to a service like listen2myradio.com. I'm also sharing new from iTunes, Spreaker, iHeartradio, and more.

                        Because of My Podcast.. a New Co-Host [1:55]

                        This week we reconnect with Wayne Henderson of mediavoiceovers.com shares how his podcast not only got him great sears a Green Bay Packers game, but it also introduced him to a person who is now his co-host of his new podcast about the television show under the dome. Check it out at http://underthedomeradio.com/

                        Yamaha MG102c Mixer Review [5:51]

                        One of the reasons I love the Audio Technica 2100 is its ability to grow with the podcaster. Other usb only microphones turn into a paperweight if you buy a mixer (i.e. blue snowball, blue yeti - usb only). I love Behringer mixers and they fit into most people's budgets. I saw the Yamaha MG102C mixer at Guitar Center which has four XLR inputs, and two of those have a built-in compressor, and "inserts" which makes adding additional effects like a noise gate super easy (you don't need inserts to add effects, but it is easier with them).

                        With this in mind if you want to add effects via an insert jack, you have two. You also have additional channels if you want to grow (plug your phone into the mixer, your ipad, or other sound creating devices). The Behringer mixer I was using (Xenyx 802 ) is perfect for one or two people, but it doesn't have any inserts or compression (or an on/off button). If I later purchased something like a noise gate, I would plug my mic into the noise gate and the noise gate into the mixer.

                        If you have the extra $40 and you are just starting out, this mixer is a great podcasting mixer and it's (as I write this) $99 at amazon.com

                        The new model is the MG10

                        iTunes Has One Billion Podcast Subscribers [17:22]

                        When you opened iTunes this week you saw a banner stating that they now had one BILLION people subscribing to podcasts. Sometimes stats come in and out the ears without a lot of thought. I was teaching at a facility this week that probably had 18 rooms on the floor I was on. Each room had 30 people. That means there were 540 people on that floor if it was full. If we took all the people from iTunes who subscribe to podcasts and put them in that building it would be 1,851,858 stories tall.

                        So not only are people listening to podcasts, they are subscribing to podcasts. Not sure how to subscribe? Check out www.learntosubscribe.com

                        Podcast Spotlight Let's Reverse Obesity [21:09]

                        I like to spotlight members of the SOP. This week we are spotlighting Let's Reverse Obesity. This is a great podcast filled with inspiring words of encouragement, frontline tactics, personal insights, and brutally honest stories. John is admittedly obese, and you are along for his journey as he shares his progress, and talks about great articles and stories that he has found on the web. Check it out at www.letsreverseobesity.com

                        IHeartRadio App adds Talk, and Spreaker Holds the Key [24:37]

                        iHeartradio which has an estimated 30 million registered members has added talk to their app and website. Spreaker has a way to submit your podcast to be listed on this app. According to an interview with a Spreaker executive on the Music Radio Creative podcast this is the "only way" to get into iHeart radio. In looking at the iheart.com site see plenty of podcasts in their talk section that are NOT listed on Spreaker (many of these people i.e. are already famous). None the less, spreaker is holding the door for us, and you can submit your podcast for inclusion. I have yet to read their terms of service, but I'm sure it's interesting.

                        The bottom line is podcasting has another platform that gives it a chance to reach a larger audience. I believe in the future podcasting will be the "minor leagues" of media. For more information go to spreaker.com

                        Tools For Podcasters to be Broadcasters [31:20]

                        • 
                          
                        
                        

                        You do NOT need to do this when you start a podcast. This is for the podcaster who wants to broadcast their show LIVE over the internet. It takes more setup time, and adds technical hoops that you must jump through.

                        There are tools (free) that will allow people to steam your current (and past) back catalog. Site like podtrac, blubrry.com and libsyn.com all have players. You can design your own with a tool called the Wimpy Player. You can also cut and paste all the direct links to your audio and paste them into a text file and name it with something that ends in .m3u (not .txt). Then upload the text file and put a link to it.

                        Lisen2MyRadio and SchoolofPodcasting.fm

                        This service starts at $5 a month. It doesn't limit how long you can broadcast, only the number of people who can listen simultaneously. You can see how many listeners you have (and where they came from, how long they listen) in your control panel. What I have done at schoolofpodcasting.fm is uploaded a bunch of answer to frequently asked questions for those people who are brand new to podcasting. These files rotate 24/7. I also have some testimonials that are played every third track. I also mix in every fifth track a "you're listening to School of Podcasting Radio".

                        Broadcasting Live Using Listen2MyRadio

                        When I want to "cut into" my live stream I can use a software call Radio Caster that will tie into my Listen2myradio account. I can talk as long as I want. If I have a mixer, I can mix in my music, my microphone, my co-host, and send everything from my mixer into the microphone input of my computer. I then can tell the Radio Caster to broadcast whatever is coming into the computer. The price for Radio Caster is $39.

                        If you want to be able to mix in music, jingles, etc as you podcast all in one place they also produce a software title call Radio Boss. You simply enter your listen2myradio information, your DJ information (you set yourself up as a dj on listen2myradio), and when you connect your stream switches to your live feed. When you disconnect it goes back to your original playlist - automatically.

                        Listen2myradio also provides html5 players so people can listen on their ipads, iphones, and other devices that don't like flash players.

                        My listen2myradio account costs me $12.50 which is currently cheaper then spreaker. Spreaker is also a media host (which you can store files on your account up to 2G) but its not really meant for podcasting. I would recommend using the service for streaming and a service like Libsyn.com or blubrry.com for media hosting.

                        
                        

                        
                        

                        You can send one output of your broadcast into your computer (Radio Caster or Radio boss) and then the headphone out of this into your portable recorder.

                        As I said, this is not needed (or recommended) for most people. When I mentioned schoolofpodcasting.fm last week a number of people asked me how I was pulling it off. Now you know.

                        If you order choose the Shoutcast 2 option, then choose how many potential listeners you want. You can start with 10 ($5 a month) and go from there.

                        RadioBoss Review [41:05]

                        Radioboss might a bit overkill for the average podcaster. While listentomyradio allows you to create playlists online, this allows you to control everything from your PC. You can set certain files to play at certain times. You can create unlimited playlists, cart walls, and much more. You can have playlists created automatically. Be very careful when thinking of streaming mainstream music (as its illegal).

                        I like the easy of use for the creating of lists and carts (lots of dragging and dropping). It was very easy to configure to tap into my live broadcasting and now I can mix in music, sound effects and such and do everything live. Again, this is NOT podcasting - its BROADCASTING. Radioboss has different levels and starts around $199.

                        Pricing

                        Listen2MyRadio starts at $10 a month (UPDATE: I prefer Abovecast 1/26/18

                        Radio Caster Sotware $39

                        Radio Boss Standard $199

                         

                        Dave Jackson Interviews

                        I was interviewed on Kenn Blanchard's Black Man with a Gun Heart and Soul, and Scott Moore's Mastermind Podcast.

                        Mentioned On This Podcast

                        Stitcher Radio

                        The Feed new podcast from Libsyn.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4723Mon, 29 Jul 2013 05:00:00 -040057:18falsefull366366Engaging Content With Podcast Talent Coach Erik K Johnson7 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Creating Great Interviews
                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • Gaining Trust Through Podcasting – Saving Your Voice
                        • Embracing Your Audience
                        • Podcasting Delivers High Quality Visitors
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>7 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Creating Great Interviews
                        • Identifying and Embracing Your Differences
                        • Gaining Trust Through Podcasting – Saving Your Voice
                        • Embracing Your Audience
                        • Podcasting Delivers High Quality Visitors
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4691Mon, 22 Jul 2013 05:00:21 -040050:47falsefull365365Passion Lessons From Seinfeld – Podcast Evangelism with Jim Collison4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Mixlr Beta Feedback, Is Dave a Jerk, Moving From Feedburner
                        • Scaling Back Your Content
                        • Your Motivation to Podcast – the Big Why
                        • Andrew Zarian Podcasting as a Career
                        • Five to Ten New Leads Per Episode
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>4 Comments - Read what others are saying about this post... Related Posts:
                        • Mixlr Beta Feedback, Is Dave a Jerk, Moving From Feedburner
                        • Scaling Back Your Content
                        • Your Motivation to Podcast – the Big Why
                        • Andrew Zarian Podcasting as a Career
                        • Five to Ten New Leads Per Episode
                        
                        RSS Feed Powered by MaxBlogPress Bring My Blog Visitors Back]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=4667Mon, 15 Jul 2013 05:06:42 -040001:04:00falsefull364364A Strategy For Building Your Podcast Audience16243dbbf64b7693ed751a545d8b57fbMon, 08 Jul 2013 04:23:00 -040036:15falsefull363363How John Lee Dumas Earns $18,000 a Month with His PodcastJohn Lee Dumas started his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast in June of 2012 (about a year ago). Fast forward and John now has a podcast that is in the top 5 of business podcasts in iTunes. He is making 18,000 a month, reaching HUNDRED of THOUSANDS of people each month in over 145 countries. He did it using the organizational tools and courage he learned in the Armed forces (he served 13 months in Iraq) and with passion that is infectious. He was consuming a large about of podcasts in the car, but he needed more content. What did he do? He filled his own void by creating the podcast he wanted to listen to.
                        Your Podcasts Downloads Stats All In One Place - Stitcher News [3:00]

                        Stitcher announced that they will "pinging" your media host. In a memo that was sent out they outlined the changes as follows:

                        You should begin to see a change in your stats via your hosting provider dashboard when our iOS update is live in the App Store within the next few days.

                        The magnitude of the change will vary based on the specific show but should be noticeable immediately via your hosting provider’s metrics dashboard.

                        We are also updating the Stitcher Partner Portal to reflect this change. We will keep you posted on timing but anticipate seeing this new Download number included in you Stitcher metrics within the next few weeks.

                        The old Downloads stat, which was measuring actual listens, will still be in the partner portal but relabeled “Listens”

                        This means that we no longer have to login to (for example) Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com (two of the top media hosting companies) and then later also check into Stitcher. This will make is easier to quote numbers to potential sponsors.

                        Congratulations Marcus Couch [7:21]

                        If you are a regular listener of the School of Podcasting then you know Marcus Couch and I go way back to the early days of Podcasting with companies like Mevio, Juice Software, and iRiver recorders. Marcus is an SEO expert and a Wordpress Guru. He wanted to get more traction in the Wordpress World. His goal was to get on to the dashboard of every Wordpress user and this month he landed there. How? By doing what Marcus preaches - creating good content. He has his music show the Scene Zine, and recently became a co-host of Wordpress Plugins A to Z (one of my favorite podcasts). You an now read him on the official Wordpress Tavern blog. Congrats to Marcus.

                        John Dumas of the Entrepreneur on Fire Podcast - Light Up the Sky! [9:02]

                        John Dumas is the passionate podcaster behind the microphone on Entrepreneur On Fire. He is also the author of the Book Podcast Launch, and is now rolling out an inner circle mastermind group call Fire Nation Elite. In today's interview you will get inside the mind of John and see his commitment to his audience. You will see where his drive is to inspire his audience to take action. You will hear how he is building his audience through dedication, commitment, and a determination to build his audience (called "The Fire Nation") one person at a time.

                        John shares what lessons he learned during his 13 months in IRAQ. "It's better to make a good decision now then make a great decision later."

                        John spent $3,000 to hire a personal mentor (Jaime Tardy) and says if you don't have that much to invest in your podcast start up that you could check out master mind or online groups (I'm a big fan of some of the groups on Google+, LinkedIn). A One on one coach can be helpful because of the personalized approach. Mastermind groups (which you might find at meetup.com) may get you in contact with other people and become a networking opportunity.

                        [23:55]Entrepreneur on Fire had 267,000 unique downloads in May of 2013 and June should go over 300,000.

                        [25:25] My favorite part of the interview is when John goes to tell me some new news from Apple. He doesn't say, "This is something my audience doesn't even know yet." He doesn't say "This is something the fire nation isn't aware of." He says "I haven't even told fire nation," and to me it shows how John thinks of his audience as ONE person. John talks about the importance of having an "avatar" of your audience (picture your audience member), and then talk to that person.

                        John asks the same questions to every guest on his show. This accomplishes two things. You know what's coming, and you never know what you're going to get (because each guest answers them differently).

                        John has got some great guests like Seth Godin, Tim Ferriss on his show. How? He caught them when they had books available and were on publicity tours.

                        [35:40]Industry Standard Podcast CPM

                        Sponsors came to John when was seen in the top rankings of iTunes.

                        According to John the industry standard is:

                        $18 cpm (per thousand downloads) for a 15 second preroll at the beginning of your podcast.

                        $25 cpm for a 60 second spot in the middle of your podcast.

                        John in the second quarter of 2013 was getting 8,000 downloads per episode. This calculates to $300 per episode - per sponsor.

                        John had two sponsors per show. This means he was making $600 per episode.

                        John does 30 episodes a month, so he made $18,000 a month.

                        His sponsors are signing up for the third quarter (which shows that podcast sponsorship works).

                        John has his mastermind group that you can join at firenationelite.com

                        John released a book Podcast Launch which is spreading his brand.

                        John is using a Private Facebook group to manage his membership/mastermind group.

                        John's Weekly Schedule

                        Mondays - He had 8 straight interviews on every single Monday. He was up to midnight editing.

                        Tuesday - Wide open.

                        Wednesday - Wide open. Dinner with friends.

                        Thursday - Interviews on other podcasts.

                        Friday - Fire nation elite members.

                        Saturday - Fire nation elite interviews before going to visit family

                        Sunday - Splicing entrepreneur on fire interviews.

                         Mentioned On This Show

                        Podtrac.com

                        The Mid Roll Advertising

                        Blubrry.com and Libsyn.com (get a free month at Libsyn using the cod e sopfree)

                        Jim Collison

                        Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                        Stitcher App

                        ]]>John Lee Dumas started his Entrepreneur on Fire podcast in June of 2012 (about a year ago). Fast forward and John now has a podcast that is in the top 5 of business podcasts in iTunes. He is making 18,000 a month, reaching HUNDRED of THOUSANDS of people each month in over 145 countries. He did it using the organizational tools and courage he learned in the Armed forces (he served 13 months in Iraq) and with passion that is infectious. He was consuming a large about of podcasts in the car, but he needed more content. What did he do? He filled his own void by creating the podcast he wanted to listen to.
                        Your Podcasts Downloads Stats All In One Place - Stitcher News [3:00]

                        Stitcher announced that they will "pinging" your media host. In a memo that was sent out they outlined the changes as follows:

                        You should begin to see a change in your stats via your hosting provider dashboard when our iOS update is live in the App Store within the next few days.

                        The magnitude of the change will vary based on the specific show but should be noticeable immediately via your hosting provider’s metrics dashboard.

                        We are also updating the Stitcher Partner Portal to reflect this change. We will keep you posted on timing but anticipate seeing this new Download number included in you Stitcher metrics within the next few weeks.

                        The old Downloads stat, which was measuring actual listens, will still be in the partner portal but relabeled “Listens”

                        This means that we no longer have to login to (for example) Libsyn.com or Blubrry.com (two of the top media hosting companies) and then later also check into Stitcher. This will make is easier to quote numbers to potential sponsors.

                        Congratulations Marcus Couch [7:21]

                        If you are a regular listener of the School of Podcasting then you know Marcus Couch and I go way back to the early days of Podcasting with companies like Mevio, Juice Software, and iRiver recorders. Marcus is an SEO expert and a Wordpress Guru. He wanted to get more traction in the Wordpress World. His goal was to get on to the dashboard of every Wordpress user and this month he landed there. How? By doing what Marcus preaches - creating good content. He has his music show the Scene Zine, and recently became a co-host of Wordpress Plugins A to Z (one of my favorite podcasts). You an now read him on the official Wordpress Tavern blog. Congrats to Marcus.

                        John Dumas of the Entrepreneur on Fire Podcast - Light Up the Sky! [9:02]

                        John Dumas is the passionate podcaster behind the microphone on Entrepreneur On Fire. He is also the author of the Book Podcast Launch, and is now rolling out an inner circle mastermind group call Fire Nation Elite. In today's interview you will get inside the mind of John and see his commitment to his audience. You will see where his drive is to inspire his audience to take action. You will hear how he is building his audience through dedication, commitment, and a determination to build his audience (called "The Fire Nation") one person at a time.

                        John shares what lessons he learned during his 13 months in IRAQ. "It's better to make a good decision now then make a great decision later."

                        John spent $3,000 to hire a personal mentor (Jaime Tardy) and says if you don't have that much to invest in your podcast start up that you could check out master mind or online groups (I'm a big fan of some of the groups on Google+, LinkedIn). A One on one coach can be helpful because of the personalized approach. Mastermind groups (which you might find at meetup.com) may get you in contact with other people and become a networking opportunity.

                        [23:55]Entrepreneur on Fire had 267,000 unique downloads in May of 2013 and June should go over 300,000.

                        [25:25] My favorite part of the interview is when John goes to tell me some new news from Apple. He doesn't say, "This is something my audience doesn't even know yet." He doesn't say "This is something the fire nation isn't aware of." He says "I haven't even told fire nation," and to me it shows how John thinks of his audience as ONE person. John talks about the importance of having an "avatar" of your audience (picture your audience member), and then talk to that person.

                        John asks the same questions to every guest on his show. This accomplishes two things. You know what's coming, and you never know what you're going to get (because each guest answers them differently).

                        John has got some great guests like Seth Godin, Tim Ferriss on his show. How? He caught them when they had books available and were on publicity tours.

                        [35:40]Industry Standard Podcast CPM

                        Sponsors came to John when was seen in the top rankings of iTunes.

                        According to John the industry standard is:

                        $18 cpm (per thousand downloads) for a 15 second preroll at the beginning of your podcast.

                        $25 cpm for a 60 second spot in the middle of your podcast.

                        John in the second quarter of 2013 was getting 8,000 downloads per episode. This calculates to $300 per episode - per sponsor.

                        John had two sponsors per show. This means he was making $600 per episode.

                        John does 30 episodes a month, so he made $18,000 a month.

                        His sponsors are signing up for the third quarter (which shows that podcast sponsorship works).

                        John has his mastermind group that you can join at firenationelite.com

                        John released a book Podcast Launch which is spreading his brand.

                        John is using a Private Facebook group to manage his membership/mastermind group.

                        John's Weekly Schedule

                        Mondays - He had 8 straight interviews on every single Monday. He was up to midnight editing.

                        Tuesday - Wide open.

                        Wednesday - Wide open. Dinner with friends.

                        Thursday - Interviews on other podcasts.

                        Friday - Fire nation elite members.

                        Saturday - Fire nation elite interviews before going to visit family

                        Sunday - Splicing entrepreneur on fire interviews.

                         Mentioned On This Show

                        Podtrac.com

                        The Mid Roll Advertising

                        Blubrry.com and Libsyn.com (get a free month at Libsyn using the cod e sopfree)

                        Jim Collison

                        Wordpress Plugins A to Z

                        Stitcher App

                        ]]>517cd9c3180ddc9d8b98d7c590370470Sun, 30 Jun 2013 14:56:20 -040001:02:16falsefull362362Scheduling Smooth Podcast InterviewsIn the last week I've been interviewed and conducted interviews. One of those podcasts was Entrepreneur on Fire  (iTunes)and the other was Urbanism Speakeasy (itunes)Podcast. In today's show I share tips and insights from both sides of the interview.
                        Podcast Clip of the Week - Your Audience Is Excited When They Find Your Content [3:28]

                        In episode 5 of the "My Digital Life with Rob Greenlee" podcast (website, iTunes), host Rob Greenlee (who has been on the show before), talks with Nicole Simon, Author, Social Media and Podcast Consultant at nicole-simon.eu from Berlin, Germany about the global aspects of podcasting. In the clip you hear how Nicole felt the first time she discovered podcasting.

                        Member Spotlight - Cool People Podcast [5:23]

                        If you're tired of hearing the same people being interviewed over and over, check out the Cool People Podcast hosted by Robert Chazz Chute. Rober has interviewed some "outside of the box" people. These include: a judge at a marijuana competition actors authors an erotica author who was a judge feminist porn they talk drugs in America, Middle East politics, if your a cool person you might like it. Check it out at coolpeoplepodcast.com (itunes).

                        Tips for Doing a Podcast Interview - Being the Host [9:42]

                        I was Entrepreneur on Fire podcast with John Lee Dumas. John does a DAILY podcast. That is a lot of work. These are all interviews. That is a TON of work. With this in mind, John needs to run an efficient ship, and when I was asked to be on his show I was really impressed with his work flow.

                         John invited me to be on his show two months in advance for a show that will air one month after it was recorded.

                        By inviting people months in advance, you have a smaller chance of people being "booked."

                        John's Invitation Was Straight and To the Point

                        John's invitation was short, respectful, explained what his podcast was, explained why I was a good fit for the show. It also explained the "tone" of the show (it's all about inspirational stories). It provided statistics of his audience (about 225,000 downloads a month), and provided information to show John as a credible source.

                        John also let me know how long the interview was, so

                        John Sent Me a List of Some of the Questions that He Would be Using

                        By sending me the questions ahead of time it let me be prepared so the interview had great content. It turns out these were not ALL the questions, but it gave me an idea of what type of content fits his podcast.

                        I previously worried that providing the questions ahead of time would leave me with an over prepared guest who had memorized their answers. I have changed my mind. Provide some of the questions ahead of time. This leaves you room for an honest conversation later during the interview. After all, you don't want the interview to be ruined because you guest is somewhat slow on their feet. For some people this is a nerve wracking situation, and allowing them to be prepared is going to result in better content.

                        Automate the Scheduling Process

                        If you want to take some of the hassle of scheduling interviews, there are services that allow potential guests to pick the time that suits them best (again stress the time zone you are in so they know ahead of time). Some examples of these include:

                        Vcita.com

                        timetrade.com

                        John uses meetme.so to automate his schedule (I use Vcita  (affiliate link)- which has a Wordpress Plugin). While you can send requests and such via Google Calendar, this tool really takes the headaches out of the scheduling piece.

                        Send A Reminder

                        If you're scheduling months in advance, there is that chance that your guest forgot to put it on their calendar. John's system automatically reminded me, and John sent a personal email making sure we are still on (very cool). IN that reminder, be sure to touch base on the time zone that you are using for the interview. Most scheduling systems have this automated.

                        Times Zones Will Come Back To Haunt You

                        When you are setting up the interview time, times zones can come back to haunt you. Be sure to let your guest know what time - and time zone - the interview will be .

                        Provide Multiple Ways to Contact You

                        In the future when I do Interviews I'm going to provide my phone number. This way if someone is going to be late they can tell me). If all they have is email, they may not be able to get to a computer to say "I'm going to be late" (not everyone has a smart phone).

                        Ask the Guest For Clearance

                        When you setup the interview, before you hit record establish anything the guest does NOT want to talk about. This avoids editing out segments later. Then either do it at the end of the interview (for a verbal version), or have some sort of form for them to sign that states you have the rights to use this content in any fashion you so choose. This will also be the time when you establish if your podcast is explicit or not (do people use "naughty" words).

                        Edit With Your Audience In Mind

                        As you can't see your guest (I turn off my video when recording to lesson the load on my computer), you may have a guest "over answer" your question. This is where they answer your question, but since there is a pause they provide additional information that is really not needed.

                        Leave Giant Blanks if There is a Mistake

                        If there is an "Edit point" where someone wants to do something over, pause for 10 seconds (it seems like forever) but this can GREATLY reduce your editing time as its OBVIOUS where the edit points are.

                        Provide a Review Copy if Possible

                        If possible, provide a copy of the interview before it goes live to your guest. It's not mandatory (unless they ask for one), but its a nice gesture.

                        Have A Backup Recording Of the Interview

                        I use PowerGrammo (PC) you can also use Call Recorder (Mac) to record Skype calls. I also have a backup of the recording by using a portable recorder. I plug an 1/8 to 1/8 cable from my headphones out of my computer into the line in on my portable recorder. I then plug my headphones into the portable recorder and when I press record I hear everything. There is nothing worse than having to call someone back and ask to do the interview again.

                        Listen You are bringing someone on to your show because they have something you don't (why else would they be on your show). While it's a conversation, in the end your guest should do the majority of the talking. It's not always about you.

                        Be Nice

                        People have their own networks. Their may be other potential guests that your guest might know who would enjoy being interviewed. Mess up this interview, and they won't be singing your praises to anyone.

                        Develop a Relationship

                        Now that you've cracked the door and had a conversation with this person, be sure to check in and stay in touch. It never hurts to have a ton of friends.

                        Tips For Being Interviewed on a Podcast [29:01]

                        Know Their Audience - Sample Their Podcast

                        Everything you do should be done with the audience in mind. If you are not familiar with the podcast, go listen to a few episodes to understand the tone of the podcast.

                        Make it Easy To Contact You I didn't mention this one in the show, but make sure your contact information is on your website. Make sure you are checking any email that you are providing as a contact source.

                        Touch Base Before the Interview

                        If you haven't received a reminder from the host, be sure to touch base with them before the interview (a week, or a day before) and make sure everyone is on the same page.

                        Be Prepared - But Not Over Prepared

                        Yes you want to sound good, professional, and intelligent. However, if you memorize...]]>In the last week I've been interviewed and conducted interviews. One of those podcasts was Entrepreneur on Fire  (iTunes)and the other was Urbanism Speakeasy (itunes)Podcast. In today's show I share tips and insights from both sides of the interview.

                        Podcast Clip of the Week - Your Audience Is Excited When They Find Your Content [3:28]

                        In episode 5 of the "My Digital Life with Rob Greenlee" podcast (website, iTunes), host Rob Greenlee (who has been on the show before), talks with Nicole Simon, Author, Social Media and Podcast Consultant at nicole-simon.eu from Berlin, Germany about the global aspects of podcasting. In the clip you hear how Nicole felt the first time she discovered podcasting.

                        Member Spotlight - Cool People Podcast [5:23]

                        If you're tired of hearing the same people being interviewed over and over, check out the Cool People Podcast hosted by Robert Chazz Chute. Rober has interviewed some "outside of the box" people. These include: a judge at a marijuana competition actors authors an erotica author who was a judge feminist porn they talk drugs in America, Middle East politics, if your a cool person you might like it. Check it out at coolpeoplepodcast.com (itunes).

                        Tips for Doing a Podcast Interview - Being the Host [9:42]

                        I was Entrepreneur on Fire podcast with John Lee Dumas. John does a DAILY podcast. That is a lot of work. These are all interviews. That is a TON of work. With this in mind, John needs to run an efficient ship, and when I was asked to be on his show I was really impressed with his work flow.

                         John invited me to be on his show two months in advance for a show that will air one month after it was recorded.

                        By inviting people months in advance, you have a smaller chance of people being "booked."

                        John's Invitation Was Straight and To the Point

                        John's invitation was short, respectful, explained what his podcast was, explained why I was a good fit for the show. It also explained the "tone" of the show (it's all about inspirational stories). It provided statistics of his audience (about 225,000 downloads a month), and provided information to show John as a credible source.

                        John also let me know how long the interview was, so

                        John Sent Me a List of Some of the Questions that He Would be Using

                        By sending me the questions ahead of time it let me be prepared so the interview had great content. It turns out these were not ALL the questions, but it gave me an idea of what type of content fits his podcast.

                        I previously worried that providing the questions ahead of time would leave me with an over prepared guest who had memorized their answers. I have changed my mind. Provide some of the questions ahead of time. This leaves you room for an honest conversation later during the interview. After all, you don't want the interview to be ruined because you guest is somewhat slow on their feet. For some people this is a nerve wracking situation, and allowing them to be prepared is going to result in better content.

                        Automate the Scheduling Process

                        If you want to take some of the hassle of scheduling interviews, there are services that allow potential guests to pick the time that suits them best (again stress the time zone you are in so they know ahead of time). Some examples of these include:

                        Vcita.com

                        timetrade.com

                        John uses meetme.so to automate his schedule (I use Vcita  (affiliate link)- which has a Wordpress Plugin). While you can send requests and such via Google Calendar, this tool really takes the headaches out of the scheduling piece.

                        Send A Reminder

                        If you're scheduling months in advance, there is that chance that your guest forgot to put it on their calendar. John's system automatically reminded me, and John sent a personal email making sure we are still on (very cool). IN that reminder, be sure to touch base on the time zone that you are using for the interview. Most scheduling systems have this automated.

                        Times Zones Will Come Back To Haunt You

                        When you are setting up the interview time, times zones can come back to haunt you. Be sure to let your guest know what time - and time zone - the interview will be .

                        Provide Multiple Ways to Contact You

                        In the future when I do Interviews I'm going to provide my phone number. This way if someone is going to be late they can tell me). If all they have is email, they may not be able to get to a computer to say "I'm going to be late" (not everyone has a smart phone).

                        Ask the Guest For Clearance

                        When you setup the interview, before you hit record establish anything the guest does NOT want to talk about. This avoids editing out segments later. Then either do it at the end of the interview (for a verbal version), or have some sort of form for them to sign that states you have the rights to use this content in any fashion you so choose. This will also be the time when you establish if your podcast is explicit or not (do people use "naughty" words).

                        Edit With Your Audience In Mind

                        As you can't see your guest (I turn off my video when recording to lesson the load on my computer), you may have a guest "over answer" your question. This is where they answer your question, but since there is a pause they provide additional information that is really not needed.

                        Leave Giant Blanks if There is a Mistake

                        If there is an "Edit point" where someone wants to do something over, pause for 10 seconds (it seems like forever) but this can GREATLY reduce your editing time as its OBVIOUS where the edit points are.

                        Provide a Review Copy if Possible

                        If possible, provide a copy of the interview before it goes live to your guest. It's not mandatory (unless they ask for one), but its a nice gesture.

                        Have A Backup Recording Of the Interview

                        I use PowerGrammo (PC) you can also use Call Recorder (Mac) to record Skype calls. I also have a backup of the recording by using a portable recorder. I plug an 1/8 to 1/8 cable from my headphones out of my computer into the line in on my portable recorder. I then plug my headphones into the portable recorder and when I press record I hear everything. There is nothing worse than having to call someone back and ask to do the interview again.

                        Listen You are bringing someone on to your show because they have something you don't (why else would they be on your show). While it's a conversation, in the end your guest should do the majority of the talking. It's not always about you.

                        Be Nice

                        People have their own networks. Their may be other potential guests that your guest might know who would enjoy being interviewed. Mess up this interview, and they won't be singing your praises to anyone.

                        Develop a Relationship

                        Now that you've cracked the door and had a conversation with this person, be sure to check in and stay in touch. It never hurts to have a ton of friends.

                        Tips For Being Interviewed on a Podcast [29:01]

                        Know Their Audience - Sample Their Podcast

                        Everything you do should be done with the audience in mind. If you are not familiar with the podcast, go listen to a few episodes to understand the tone of the podcast.

                        Make it Easy To Contact You I didn't mention this one in the show, but make sure your contact information is on your website. Make sure you are checking any email that you are providing as a contact source.

                        Touch Base Before the Interview

                        If you haven't received a reminder from the host, be sure to touch base with them before the interview (a week, or a day before) and make sure everyone is on the same page.

                        Be Prepared - But Not Over Prepared

                        Yes you want to sound good, professional, and intelligent. However, if you memorize your answers it will be obvious. You may sound like a robot. Think about the audience you are speaking to, and what information will resonate with them. You may want to practice your answers to make sure they come out of your mouth smoothly (again, NOT memorizing, just practicing)

                        Help Promote Your Appearance

                        If someone has put you in front of their audience the leas you can do is mention it to your audience. This can be a blog post, a mention in a podcast, twitter, Facebook, or all of the above.

                        If You Have To Cancel - Cancel Quickly

                        If life happens, be sure to let your host know immediately that you can't make the interview. This gives them the maximum amount of time to find a guest for your time slot.

                        Be Nice

                        People have their own networks. Their may be other podcasts that the host might know who would enjoy having you on their show. Mess up this interview, and they won't be singing your praises to anyone.

                         

                        Mentioned On this Show

                        Average Guy Podcast Network

                        Podcast Roundtable Episode 14 Podcasting in a Niche

                        Entrepreneur on Fire 

                        Urbanism Speakeasy

                         

                        ]]>7bbe399f6699d90f357d8c4c776c4dbdSun, 23 Jun 2013 15:55:50 -040054:24falsefull361361Podcasting Delivers High Quality Visitorsb0e36cdecd867ab6951960ee35367bbdSun, 16 Jun 2013 00:34:23 -040045:02falsefull360360Podcasting Without Using Wordpress170f9a3ab70572b5168df0dd5e4eba20Sun, 09 Jun 2013 15:45:06 -040043:51falsefull359359Starting Your Own Podcast Network72e6f71def002f9547e4c8c0f5f66f6eFri, 31 May 2013 20:54:00 -040057:00falsefull358358Creating an Award Winning PodcastToday we have some great podcast success stories. If you are looking to start a podcast, click the join now button and join the School of Podcasting - you're audience awaits.
                        Because of My Podcast I Had No Problem Getting a Book Deal [3:30]

                        In our podcast success story we hear from heather of the Craft Lit podcast. She combines niches of knitting with literature. She later "spun off" a "just books" option for those who loved the literature but weren't too keen on the knitting part. As a teacher, Heather loved the ability to enhance people's understanding of literature and help create a community that was talking about great books. Later she took the relationship she created with her audience and offered premium content for those looking for more literature information. She also easily found a publisher for her book What Would Madame Defarge Knit?

                        This is a great story of embracing a niche, listening to your audience, and moving them with your content. In her case she is helping people understand the books, giving insights, facilitating discussions, and enhancing the overall consumption of literature. You can find her at:

                        CraftLit.com - Just the Books • Knitting Blog: MamaOKnits.com• What Would Madame Defarge Knit? Books 1&2 Available now: WWMDfK.com

                        Harnessing the Power of Influence with Award Winning Podcaster Daniel J. Lewis [20:15]

                        Today we hear part one of my interview with Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to podcast. In today's interview you will learn where Daniel grew up, and how his early hobbies turned into his day job. Daniel is a very talented designer and does web design, as well as presentation designs.

                        Daniel decided to start podcasting after he realized that he had something to say. The podcasters he was listening to were using skype and other tools that Daniel had worked with, and he thought, "I could do that."

                        He started out by writing out the entire podcast, but quit doing that after the first 9 episode as it just took forever to produce a show. He still does the Ramen Noodle Clean Comedy Podcast, the Audacity to Podcast and the Once Podcast. You can find them all at www.noodle.mx

                        He recently released his first wordpress plugin that makes it super easy to add icons for sharing and subscribing to your podcast. You can find it at subscribeandshare.com

                        Winning a Podcast AwardIn the interview Daniel explains the steps he took to rally his audience into nominating (and eventually wining) a podcast award in the "Technology" category. By directing his audience through specific steps, Daniel was able to sharpen their effectiveness and maximize their potential.

                        Daniel did this via video that showed them exactly what to do, and reminded them regularly to help out and vote. He then promoted across all of the podcasts. His Ramen Noodle podcast was the ONLY clean podcast in the category. By doing this he avoided being disqualified by being nominated in too many categories.

                        Through his networking efforts he was able to have other podcasters tell their audience to vote for Daniel.

                        Connecting With Your Audience

                        Daniels says to be in those network where it makes sense. If you can be on a site like facebook or twitter and be able to engage your audience on that platform then be there. If you can't do it well, don't do it. Different audiences will engage in different ways.

                        Delivering Great Content

                        Daniel purposely makes an effort to NOT turn his podcast into a giant commercial for his services.

                        Subscribe and Follow Podcast [44:47]Daniel explains what inspired him to build his first plugin as well as all the features of the subscribe and share wordpress plugin.

                        Mentioned in this Episode

                        Nick Seuberling of Start Talking and Recording Today

                        CraftLit.com - Just the Books

                        Knitting Blog: MamaOKnits.com

                        What Would Madame Defarge Knit? Books 1&2 Available now: WWMDfK.com

                        subscribe and share wordpress plugin

                        Ramen Noodle Clean Comedy

                        Audacity to Podcast

                        Once Podcast

                        ]]>Today we have some great podcast success stories. If you are looking to start a podcast, click the join now button and join the School of Podcasting - you're audience awaits.
                        Because of My Podcast I Had No Problem Getting a Book Deal [3:30]

                        In our podcast success story we hear from heather of the Craft Lit podcast. She combines niches of knitting with literature. She later "spun off" a "just books" option for those who loved the literature but weren't too keen on the knitting part. As a teacher, Heather loved the ability to enhance people's understanding of literature and help create a community that was talking about great books. Later she took the relationship she created with her audience and offered premium content for those looking for more literature information. She also easily found a publisher for her book What Would Madame Defarge Knit?

                        This is a great story of embracing a niche, listening to your audience, and moving them with your content. In her case she is helping people understand the books, giving insights, facilitating discussions, and enhancing the overall consumption of literature. You can find her at:

                        CraftLit.com - Just the Books • Knitting Blog: MamaOKnits.com• What Would Madame Defarge Knit? Books 1&2 Available now: WWMDfK.com

                        Harnessing the Power of Influence with Award Winning Podcaster Daniel J. Lewis [20:15]

                        Today we hear part one of my interview with Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to podcast. In today's interview you will learn where Daniel grew up, and how his early hobbies turned into his day job. Daniel is a very talented designer and does web design, as well as presentation designs.

                        Daniel decided to start podcasting after he realized that he had something to say. The podcasters he was listening to were using skype and other tools that Daniel had worked with, and he thought, "I could do that."

                        He started out by writing out the entire podcast, but quit doing that after the first 9 episode as it just took forever to produce a show. He still does the Ramen Noodle Clean Comedy Podcast, the Audacity to Podcast and the Once Podcast. You can find them all at www.noodle.mx

                        He recently released his first wordpress plugin that makes it super easy to add icons for sharing and subscribing to your podcast. You can find it at subscribeandshare.com

                        Winning a Podcast AwardIn the interview Daniel explains the steps he took to rally his audience into nominating (and eventually wining) a podcast award in the "Technology" category. By directing his audience through specific steps, Daniel was able to sharpen their effectiveness and maximize their potential.

                        Daniel did this via video that showed them exactly what to do, and reminded them regularly to help out and vote. He then promoted across all of the podcasts. His Ramen Noodle podcast was the ONLY clean podcast in the category. By doing this he avoided being disqualified by being nominated in too many categories.

                        Through his networking efforts he was able to have other podcasters tell their audience to vote for Daniel.

                        Connecting With Your Audience

                        Daniels says to be in those network where it makes sense. If you can be on a site like facebook or twitter and be able to engage your audience on that platform then be there. If you can't do it well, don't do it. Different audiences will engage in different ways.

                        Delivering Great Content

                        Daniel purposely makes an effort to NOT turn his podcast into a giant commercial for his services.

                        Subscribe and Follow Podcast [44:47]Daniel explains what inspired him to build his first plugin as well as all the features of the subscribe and share wordpress plugin.

                        Mentioned in this Episode

                        Nick Seuberling of Start Talking and Recording Today

                        CraftLit.com - Just the Books

                        Knitting Blog: MamaOKnits.com

                        What Would Madame Defarge Knit? Books 1&2 Available now: WWMDfK.com

                        subscribe and share wordpress plugin

                        Ramen Noodle Clean Comedy

                        Audacity to Podcast

                        Once Podcast

                        ]]>1f7bed4daac6563ece7a959c6ea83283Sun, 26 May 2013 18:23:48 -040054:46falsefull357357Podcasting Reaches a Global AudienceIn today's show we hear about some of the subtle items Americans (or other people) can do that may not translate well in other countries. I share with you the insane number of countries that consume this podcast. It is amazing to think that I'm in a room near Cleveland, Ohio and I'm reaching hundreds of people in China, Canada, Germany, and many, many, many other countries.
                        Pinterest Podcaster Lands Television Spot [2:00]

                        Cynthia Sanchez of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast has been podcasting for a little over a year, and was recently asked to appear on local television to (see the clip). This is another example of podcasting helping someone be seen as an expert.

                        New Subscribe and Follow Plugin [4:10]

                        My friend Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to Podcast has authored a plugin that makes sharing and subscribing to your podcast super easy. You can easily go in and input the links to sites like iTunes, stitcher, miro, and more then customize your colors, and if you want to feature one network over another you can do that as well (for example make the iTunes button bigger than the others). Best of all these will look great at any resolution. Check it out at subscribeandfollow.com Through the end of may Daniel has it on sale for $27 ($10 off the regular price) so hurry. I cam currently using it on my Weekly Web Toolssite and will be using it on this site shortly...

                        How Podcasting Can Boost Your Business [6:30]

                        I appear on the Photo Biz Expose Podcast talking about how podcasting can boost your wedding or portrait photography business. Listen to it here. Special thanks to Andrew for having me on the show.

                        Reach a Global Audience with Podcasting [7:23]

                        Today I bring an interview that was conducted on the floor of the New Media Expo last year. I interview Karin Høgh of podconsult.dk She mentions that we need to remember that there are holidays, products, etc that don't always "translate" well to a global audience. For example, while you can make $15 for every new audible subscriber on your podcast (details here), Audible is a very "American/Canadian" type of offer. She also mentions the Yender Law which is an unwritten law that promotes everyone being equal. Think of it as an "Un-ego" law, and that we should think twice before touting our accomplishments, or openly "selling" a product. In looking at my stats, 85% of my audience is from the US, with the second option being "other" at 7% followed by China at 4% and Canada at 2.5%. It is interesting as I look at my Libsyn.com stats that there are very few counties on the planet (Iceland being one) that I do not get at least 1 download (get a free month at libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree). The reach of podcasting is amazing.

                        Clip of the Week [19:13]

                        This weeks clip of the week is from the New Media Show featuring Paul Colligan. Paul mentions how his young daughter was a little confused when her Dad said, "I guess we'll have to listen to the radio." He response? "What's that?"

                        Using More Than One Blue Snowball Microphone

                        A listener asked, "Can I use more than one Blue Snowball Microphone?" and the quick answer is "No." At least not easily. Blue snowball microphones are USB ONLY, and do not work with standard mixers. They are also condensor microphones which means they pick up more room noise. A better choice is the Audio Technica 2100 microphone. It is USB (so you get the plug and play) and it also works with mixers (XLR jack), and it sounds great and is only (as of May 2013) $34. Check it out at Amazon.com

                        A Historical Look at the School of Podcasting [28:30]

                        May 2006 Reading Feedburner stats May 2007 Losing your free voicemail number, your podcast name, and making podcast flyers, and pacing yourself. May 2008 Time shifted Interviews May 2009 Is your site accessible to those who blind? Taking Your Podcast Portable. May 2010 Review of the Go Mic from Sampson, You Can't Please Everyone May 2011 Podcamp Beginner Questions, Why You should NOT host your media on your website, putting a sock on it, and the bad side of podcasting. May 2012Feedburner, Flattr, Podcast Promotion the Biblical Way, The Best Time to Live Podcast, and Membership Sites.

                        This Show's Length [33:00]

                        I've been thinking (since the last New Media Expo) about doing two shorter shows a week instead of one long show with multiple topics. I wanted to get your opinion. [polldaddy poll=7114138]

                        New Group Podcast Coaching Coming

                        I will be launching live podcast classes that will meet for a few weeks where you will be attending live (and if you can't you'll receive the recording) and we will go through the entire podcasting process. In just a few short weeks, you will be podcasting. To find out more, go to howtopodcasting.com

                        Podcast 411 Backblaze online backup tool Fix My Podcast Podcast (podfaded after a month) ElectroVoice RE320 Microphone

                        ]]>In today's show we hear about some of the subtle items Americans (or other people) can do that may not translate well in other countries. I share with you the insane number of countries that consume this podcast. It is amazing to think that I'm in a room near Cleveland, Ohio and I'm reaching hundreds of people in China, Canada, Germany, and many, many, many other countries.
                        Pinterest Podcaster Lands Television Spot [2:00]

                        Cynthia Sanchez of the Oh So Pinteresting Podcast has been podcasting for a little over a year, and was recently asked to appear on local television to (see the clip). This is another example of podcasting helping someone be seen as an expert.

                        New Subscribe and Follow Plugin [4:10]

                        My friend Daniel J. Lewis of the Audacity to Podcast has authored a plugin that makes sharing and subscribing to your podcast super easy. You can easily go in and input the links to sites like iTunes, stitcher, miro, and more then customize your colors, and if you want to feature one network over another you can do that as well (for example make the iTunes button bigger than the others). Best of all these will look great at any resolution. Check it out at subscribeandfollow.com Through the end of may Daniel has it on sale for $27 ($10 off the regular price) so hurry. I cam currently using it on my Weekly Web Toolssite and will be using it on this site shortly...

                        How Podcasting Can Boost Your Business [6:30]

                        I appear on the Photo Biz Expose Podcast talking about how podcasting can boost your wedding or portrait photography business. Listen to it here. Special thanks to Andrew for having me on the show.

                        Reach a Global Audience with Podcasting [7:23]

                        Today I bring an interview that was conducted on the floor of the New Media Expo last year. I interview Karin Høgh of podconsult.dk She mentions that we need to remember that there are holidays, products, etc that don't always "translate" well to a global audience. For example, while you can make $15 for every new audible subscriber on your podcast (details here), Audible is a very "American/Canadian" type of offer. She also mentions the Yender Law which is an unwritten law that promotes everyone being equal. Think of it as an "Un-ego" law, and that we should think twice before touting our accomplishments, or openly "selling" a product. In looking at my stats, 85% of my audience is from the US, with the second option being "other" at 7% followed by China at 4% and Canada at 2.5%. It is interesting as I look at my Libsyn.com stats that there are very few counties on the planet (Iceland being one) that I do not get at least 1 download (get a free month at libsyn.com using the coupon code sopfree). The reach of podcasting is amazing.

                        Clip of the Week [19:13]

                        This weeks clip of the week is from the New Media Show featuring Paul Colligan. Paul mentions how his young daughter was a little confused when her Dad said, "I guess we'll have to listen to the radio." He response? "What's that?"

                        Using More Than One Blue Snowball Microphone

                        A listener asked, "Can I use more than one Blue Snowball Microphone?" and the quick answer is "No." At least not easily. Blue snowball microphones are USB ONLY, and do not work with standard mixers. They are also condensor microphones which means they pick up more room noise. A better choice is the Audio Technica 2100 microphone. It is USB (so you get the plug and play) and it also works with mixers (XLR jack), and it sounds great and is only (as of May 2013) $34. Check it out at Amazon.com

                        A Historical Look at the School of Podcasting [28:30]

                        May 2006 Reading Feedburner stats May 2007 Losing your free voicemail number, your podcast name, and making podcast flyers, and pacing yourself. May 2008 Time shifted Interviews May 2009 Is your site accessible to those who blind? Taking Your Podcast Portable. May 2010 Review of the Go Mic from Sampson, You Can't Please Everyone May 2011 Podcamp Beginner Questions, Why You should NOT host your media on your website, putting a sock on it, and the bad side of podcasting. May 2012Feedburner, Flattr, Podcast Promotion the Biblical Way, The Best Time to Live Podcast, and Membership Sites.

                        This Show's Length [33:00]

                        I've been thinking (since the last New Media Expo) about doing two shorter shows a week instead of one long show with multiple topics. I wanted to get your opinion. [polldaddy poll=7114138]

                        New Group Podcast Coaching Coming

                        I will be launching live podcast classes that will meet for a few weeks where you will be attending live (and if you can't you'll receive the recording) and we will go through the entire podcasting process. In just a few short weeks, you will be podcasting. To find out more, go to howtopodcasting.com

                        Podcast 411 Backblaze online backup tool Fix My Podcast Podcast (podfaded after a month) ElectroVoice RE320 Microphone

                        ]]>9ff71af6893364e5f2d36aa79440363bSun, 19 May 2013 16:21:07 -040038:24falsefull356356Broadcast Live with Spreaker2d7040d396bb35f853bd192a2d0abc6dTue, 14 May 2013 00:42:54 -040039:54falsefull355355Podcast Statistics, Lead Pages, and Mobile Themes2a7381c2bcc2669be068ae5d8fbfa3c2Tue, 07 May 2013 03:18:56 -040049:19falsefull354354Producing More Podcast Episodes in Less Time2765154aaffe12368d063a52ae5489f9Sat, 27 Apr 2013 17:05:46 -040038:30falsefull353353Podcasting is HOT! - Grab Some Oven MitsI've been saying podcasting will change the world since 2005, and this week I had a spike in people starting podcasts. Why? Because a very popular Internet Marketing Conference with the typical players stated over and over how podcasting is THE THING that everyone should be doing. Then I heard it on another podcast, and another podcast. So today I'm saying, if you don't believe me, believe these other people: Michaels Stelzner of the Social Media Examiner (who gets 20,000 downloads per episode) that podcast is the hottest thing in 2013. Pat Flynn (who grew his audience by 20% in 2012) said that everyone at the Social Media Marketing Summt was "buzzing" about podcasting. Naresh Vissa on the speaking of wealth show said a podcast subscriber was worth around $25 while an email subscriber was worth $6 due to the action it takes it takes to subscribe. It's not as easy, and a podcast subscriber truly wants your content. Jason Harmanof the Hartman Media group said in 1999 when he wrote his first book he was telling people to drop everything and build a website. Now he is telling everyone to stop and get a podcast.
                        Podcast Success: Ray Ortega

                        Not only has ray Ortega landed a full time job podcasting, but this job recently sent Ray to the UK to spotlight an event on the podcast. While he was there Ray met up with Mike Russell of Music Radio Creative.

                        Podcaster's Roundtable 11" Podcasting Pruchases

                        Find out what experienced podcasters +Daniel J. Lewis, +Jeffrey Bradbury, Ray Ortega and myself would purchase if we were starting our first show and had the knowledge we now possess after years of producing podcasts. Based on experience in podcast production, we’ll take a mock budget and spend it on what we think are the most valuable items for starting a podcast.

                        Dave Jackson Interviewed on the Audacity to Podcast

                        The Audacity to Podcast Episode 122 titled "Niche podcasting for 100s of episodes, with Dave Jackson" where Daniel interviews me about being the first podcast about podcasting and how things have changed since then. We also talk about gear, and you get some tips on how I gather information for each episode.

                        Mentioned on This Episode

                        Episode 351 Podcast Answer Man More Podcast Money Building a Better Dave podcast Bacon Rant

                        ]]>I've been saying podcasting will change the world since 2005, and this week I had a spike in people starting podcasts. Why? Because a very popular Internet Marketing Conference with the typical players stated over and over how podcasting is THE THING that everyone should be doing. Then I heard it on another podcast, and another podcast. So today I'm saying, if you don't believe me, believe these other people: Michaels Stelzner of the Social Media Examiner (who gets 20,000 downloads per episode) that podcast is the hottest thing in 2013. Pat Flynn (who grew his audience by 20% in 2012) said that everyone at the Social Media Marketing Summt was "buzzing" about podcasting. Naresh Vissa on the speaking of wealth show said a podcast subscriber was worth around $25 while an email subscriber was worth $6 due to the action it takes it takes to subscribe. It's not as easy, and a podcast subscriber truly wants your content. Jason Harmanof the Hartman Media group said in 1999 when he wrote his first book he was telling people to drop everything and build a website. Now he is telling everyone to stop and get a podcast.
                        Podcast Success: Ray Ortega

                        Not only has ray Ortega landed a full time job podcasting, but this job recently sent Ray to the UK to spotlight an event on the podcast. While he was there Ray met up with Mike Russell of Music Radio Creative.

                        Podcaster's Roundtable 11" Podcasting Pruchases

                        Find out what experienced podcasters +Daniel J. Lewis, +Jeffrey Bradbury, Ray Ortega and myself would purchase if we were starting our first show and had the knowledge we now possess after years of producing podcasts. Based on experience in podcast production, we’ll take a mock budget and spend it on what we think are the most valuable items for starting a podcast.

                        Dave Jackson Interviewed on the Audacity to Podcast

                        The Audacity to Podcast Episode 122 titled "Niche podcasting for 100s of episodes, with Dave Jackson" where Daniel interviews me about being the first podcast about podcasting and how things have changed since then. We also talk about gear, and you get some tips on how I gather information for each episode.

                        Mentioned on This Episode

                        Episode 351 Podcast Answer Man More Podcast Money Building a Better Dave podcast Bacon Rant

                        ]]>0ef6da54837091687f36df0a6d96581eSun, 21 Apr 2013 16:20:29 -040039:51falsefull352352Is Opening Chit Chat Bad? and Nick Sueberling from Start Talking and Recording Todayaea0c3fd1ff60de572ba70f7407ae069Sat, 13 Apr 2013 21:13:00 -040044:24falsefull351351Priceless Podcast Success - New Podcasting Stats4e9ab0ad4b1f02e04750e37b4941ecc2Tue, 09 Apr 2013 03:25:05 -040034:46falsefull350350Podcast Success: Nikola Danaylov's Podcast Paid For School21524dae67a2a331843bbe605166b6b3Tue, 02 Apr 2013 01:35:46 -040044:45falsefull349349Is Audio Marketing Better Than Video? - Getting To Know Your Audience438b6788ec1332cc80d86b2e11e98105Tue, 26 Mar 2013 02:49:53 -040036:15falsefull348348What is your favorite podcast episode ever, and why?b5d1bbc8000034f0778146d20b859252Mon, 18 Mar 2013 23:49:47 -040053:20falsefull34734711 Reasons to NOT Use Blog Talk Radio (again...)c5d2813a0d057ea9a648152a4347cd78Sat, 09 Mar 2013 20:30:00 -040050:19falsefull346346Taking Action Against The Trolls - Podcasting Resources - Podcasting Saved Their Marriage19223639085833e6c07a5920d849fbd5Tue, 05 Mar 2013 01:27:49 -040039:52falsefull345345Saving Money on Podcast Hosting, Evaluating Your Podcast, Lots of Questions Answered9c131f29bdc4d53aa69a23316010cc5bTue, 26 Feb 2013 04:15:53 -040001:08:23falsefull344344Podcast Success: One Thing Leads To Another - Premium Podcast Tools - Auphonic Web Based Audio ToolToday we talk about setting up a premium podcast feed, what tools that I've used, (Thanks to Andrew for the question), in our interview segment we talk with Scott Eiland who start the baseball experience a little over a year ago. That podcast lead to him creating the "This week in wrestling" podcast. That platform lead him to now getting paid to produce another sports based show. It didn't happen over night, and there were some lessons learned along the way. Scott Eiland understands the power of podcasting.
                        Auphonic Web Based Levelator

                        I've talked about the Levelator software before. It's good for leveling out audio where there are slight differences in volume between a podcast host and guest. It works on both Mac and PC. I learned about Auphonic at the New Media Expo. It's a pretty cool FREE tool, and that is web based and performs many of the same tasks that the levelator software does (and more). You can process a wav file or an mp3 (or other files) and that goes to output as well. It will add ID3 tags to your files and if you are trying to create chapters in an mp3 file it can do that as well. Check it out at www.auphonic.com

                        More Podcast Money #3 Book on Podcasting in Amazon

                        Thanks to everyone who has purchased the book More Podcast Money. I had a blast writing it and I'm glad people are finding it helpful. If you search books for "podcast" it is currently ranked #3. For more information go to www.morepodcastmoney.com

                        Premium Podcast Tools

                        Andrew  asked about creating a premium podcast where one part would be free, and the other (deeper) episode would be premium. In regards to protecting the files, I have used Wishlist in the past, but when I wanted to "Drip" content, there is nothing that beats the features and support of Digital Access Pass. It's not the cheapest tool on the planet, but its always getting better, and has TOP NOTCH support.  I liked the community around wishlist, but for me I wanted the dripping feature. I've also used Magic Members which wasn't bad (dripping) but not as easy as Digital Access Pass.

                        The other thing to think about is if you are breaking up an interview into parts, make sure each part can stand alone. I use to listen to a podcast that would just fade out the interview in the middle and ask you to subscribe. I found this just frustrated me. Also when you first start out you won't have an audience. Thus, you may be creating content for an audience that doesn't exist yet. With a tool like Digital Access Pass you can these in advance and have years worth of content ready to "Drip" when the audience does show up.

                        Dave on the Interview Circuit

                        Want to not only hear Dave Jackson but SEE him (with "Saturday hair!" ) check out this interview with Jim Collison on The Average Guy Network.

                        Dave comes back for a second episode on Music Radio Creative Podcast with Mike Russle where they talk about the future of podcasting.

                        Last 5 in 5

                        Smart Passive Income

                        Start Taking and Recording Today

                        Jay Mohr "Mohr Stories"

                        Mark Gungor

                        Adam Corolla

                        Mentioned On this Show

                        Daniel J Lewis of the Audacity to podcast

                        Nick Suberling of Start Taking and Recording Today

                        Cable to connect Audio Technica 2100 to your Roland R-05 see it here

                        Robert Chazz Chute of "All that Chazz"

                        ]]>Today we talk about setting up a premium podcast feed, what tools that I've used, (Thanks to Andrew for the question), in our interview segment we talk with Scott Eiland who start the baseball experience a little over a year ago. That podcast lead to him creating the "This week in wrestling" podcast. That platform lead him to now getting paid to produce another sports based show. It didn't happen over night, and there were some lessons learned along the way. Scott Eiland understands the power of podcasting.
                        Auphonic Web Based Levelator

                        I've talked about the Levelator software before. It's good for leveling out audio where there are slight differences in volume between a podcast host and guest. It works on both Mac and PC. I learned about Auphonic at the New Media Expo. It's a pretty cool FREE tool, and that is web based and performs many of the same tasks that the levelator software does (and more). You can process a wav file or an mp3 (or other files) and that goes to output as well. It will add ID3 tags to your files and if you are trying to create chapters in an mp3 file it can do that as well. Check it out at www.auphonic.com

                        More Podcast Money #3 Book on Podcasting in Amazon

                        Thanks to everyone who has purchased the book More Podcast Money. I had a blast writing it and I'm glad people are finding it helpful. If you search books for "podcast" it is currently ranked #3. For more information go to www.morepodcastmoney.com

                        Premium Podcast Tools

                        Andrew  asked about creating a premium podcast where one part would be free, and the other (deeper) episode would be premium. In regards to protecting the files, I have used Wishlist in the past, but when I wanted to "Drip" content, there is nothing that beats the features and support of Digital Access Pass. It's not the cheapest tool on the planet, but its always getting better, and has TOP NOTCH support.  I liked the community around wishlist, but for me I wanted the dripping feature. I've also used Magic Members which wasn't bad (dripping) but not as easy as Digital Access Pass.

                        The other thing to think about is if you are breaking up an interview into parts, make sure each part can stand alone. I use to listen to a podcast that would just fade out the interview in the middle and ask you to subscribe. I found this just frustrated me. Also when you first start out you won't have an audience. Thus, you may be creating content for an audience that doesn't exist yet. With a tool like Digital Access Pass you can these in advance and have years worth of content ready to "Drip" when the audience does show up.

                        Dave on the Interview Circuit

                        Want to not only hear Dave Jackson but SEE him (with "Saturday hair!" ) check out this interview with Jim Collison on The Average Guy Network.

                        Dave comes back for a second episode on Music Radio Creative Podcast with Mike Russle where they talk about the future of podcasting.

                        Last 5 in 5

                        Smart Passive Income

                        Start Taking and Recording Today

                        Jay Mohr "Mohr Stories"

                        Mark Gungor

                        Adam Corolla

                        Mentioned On this Show

                        Daniel J Lewis of the Audacity to podcast

                        Nick Suberling of Start Taking and Recording Today

                        Cable to connect Audio Technica 2100 to your Roland R-05 see it here

                        Robert Chazz Chute of "All that Chazz"

                        ]]>00293dcbb514bbcd8b8001cb793a47e4Wed, 20 Feb 2013 02:10:28 -040052:15falsefull343343Troubleshooting Your iTunes Podcast Listing4451b1721376077f729f52e3c133d349Mon, 11 Feb 2013 00:45:01 -040032:10falsefull342342Podcast Promotion TipsIn today’s show we talk about the power of podcasting, as I talk about a person who purchased a fitness program after listening to one of my podcasts (and how integrity comes into play). I talk about some cool WordPress themes and some great insights into podcast promotion from Max Flight.
                        Podcast Success Story

                        I have been doing the Logical Weight Loss podcast for three years. I did some podcast consulting for David Greenwalt who turned out to be a fitness guru. He was nice enough to let me check out his Lifestyle University and  I liked what he was doing. He just launched his once a year class Lifestyle 180, and I decide to join and have Dave on my show. It wasn’t a giant commercial, but instead we just provided some facts and let the audience decide if they wanted to join me. The good news is a listener heard my podcast, and immediately signed up (and I earned $56 commission).

                        Cool WordPress Themes (One if Free)

                        In the past, I’ve used Thesis until they updated to version 2 (and I feel they ruined it). I purchased iThemes Builder (which I used in the past) only to find their “Style Manager” had a problem. So I went in search of a drag and drop WordPress theme and I found Pagelines. This at is a free WordPress theme that is free (do a search in your WordPress install for pagelines). The free version has a ton of easy to customize features. The pro version is $139.

                        The Builder Theme is $80 and it allows you to customize the colors, fonts, etc in their Style Manager. Then you can drag and drop your layout. It makes it super easy to design your website. Their are TONS of “Child Themes” that you can get access to and add to your website (A Child Theme is a premade layout and style that can save you time).

                        Max Flight on Podcast Promotion

                        Max flight produces the Airplane Geeks and Podcasting Passion podcasts. Today we talk about how new podcasters learn that creating the podcast is only part of the process. You need to get the word out about your podcast. Everyone always says, “Great Content” is the best tool for growing your audience. I always have said that you need to figure out who your audience is, figure out where they are, and go there and make friends. Then tell them about your podcast. Today Max provides some tips on how you can get your audience involved with helping to spread the word.

                        We hear how he is using Facebook, Questions, and regular segments from his audience into his Airplane Geeks. Max also produces the Podcasting Passion podcast

                        Speaking of podcast promotion, booktourradio.com and refocuspodcast.com to the podcastclicks.com website (a banner exchange program for podcasts only). We had over 14,837,913 impressions last year and we delivered 182,923 clicks to their websites.

                        We ask the question “What is a better use of your time, creating great content or going out and telling people about your show?” Leave your answer in a comment]]>In today’s show we talk about the power of podcasting, as I talk about a person who purchased a fitness program after listening to one of my podcasts (and how integrity comes into play). I talk about some cool WordPress themes and some great insights into podcast promotion from Max Flight.
                        Podcast Success Story

                        I have been doing the Logical Weight Loss podcast for three years. I did some podcast consulting for David Greenwalt who turned out to be a fitness guru. He was nice enough to let me check out his Lifestyle University and  I liked what he was doing. He just launched his once a year class Lifestyle 180, and I decide to join and have Dave on my show. It wasn’t a giant commercial, but instead we just provided some facts and let the audience decide if they wanted to join me. The good news is a listener heard my podcast, and immediately signed up (and I earned $56 commission).

                        Cool WordPress Themes (One if Free)

                        In the past, I’ve used Thesis until they updated to version 2 (and I feel they ruined it). I purchased iThemes Builder (which I used in the past) only to find their “Style Manager” had a problem. So I went in search of a drag and drop WordPress theme and I found Pagelines. This at is a free WordPress theme that is free (do a search in your WordPress install for pagelines). The free version has a ton of easy to customize features. The pro version is $139.

                        The Builder Theme is $80 and it allows you to customize the colors, fonts, etc in their Style Manager. Then you can drag and drop your layout. It makes it super easy to design your website. Their are TONS of “Child Themes” that you can get access to and add to your website (A Child Theme is a premade layout and style that can save you time).

                        Max Flight on Podcast Promotion

                        Max flight produces the Airplane Geeks and Podcasting Passion podcasts. Today we talk about how new podcasters learn that creating the podcast is only part of the process. You need to get the word out about your podcast. Everyone always says, “Great Content” is the best tool for growing your audience. I always have said that you need to figure out who your audience is, figure out where they are, and go there and make friends. Then tell them about your podcast. Today Max provides some tips on how you can get your audience involved with helping to spread the word.

                        We hear how he is using Facebook, Questions, and regular segments from his audience into his Airplane Geeks. Max also produces the Podcasting Passion podcast

                        Speaking of podcast promotion, booktourradio.com and refocuspodcast.com to the podcastclicks.com website (a banner exchange program for podcasts only). We had over 14,837,913 impressions last year and we delivered 182,923 clicks to their websites.

                        We ask the question “What is a better use of your time, creating great content or going out and telling people about your show?” Leave your answer in a comment]]>31ad273f6dd39e87029b0d4aca48a980Mon, 04 Feb 2013 01:52:00 -040054:53falsefull341341Keeping Your Website Safe9f45b5b35abdda071a08a5296188ec1cMon, 28 Jan 2013 05:51:04 -040032:28falsefull340340I've Got to Be Me - Tales From The Expo 2ebec7b2a0fd7c9d342f2148c61d13013Tue, 22 Jan 2013 04:01:44 -040048:50falsefull3393393 Days To Becoming One of the Media5ede3302177c7b9d25294779ecd20e3fMon, 14 Jan 2013 03:35:07 -040051:30falsefull338338Why You Should Be Podcasting6d76e7bb96513fef196fa8ac67a92ebcMon, 31 Dec 2012 19:29:19 -040056:06falsefull337337Podcast Gear - Soundboard Software - Podbean Stats - Podcast Competitionc0802a47bd9387149a6b23c007f44f60Sun, 23 Dec 2012 05:00:00 -040041:56falsefull336336New Media Expo Tips - PERSONAL - Podcast Gear - Podcasting For Business3292b2e12ca9818c6cf93cd6616108a2Fri, 14 Dec 2012 20:24:46 -040001:01:08falsefull335335Get More Traffic to Your Podcast with SEO Expert Marcus CouchToday we have a little NMX news, podcast statistics are UP, and we have a conversation with SEO Expert Marcus Couch of wppluginsatoz.com
                        ]]>Today we have a little NMX news, podcast statistics are UP, and we have a conversation with SEO Expert Marcus Couch of wppluginsatoz.com
                        ]]>8ea2391961462351abfa3e4c4537132bMon, 10 Dec 2012 05:00:00 -040001:02:06falsefull332332Before You Hit Record - Podcast Cross Promotion - Have One in the Canc06e546d0490ce7f126ce83043ead0c1Mon, 03 Dec 2012 18:49:49 -040050:49falsefull334334Making Your Podcast Better213bde4f443fbf94369b927e02ffdcc4Sat, 24 Nov 2012 20:42:54 -040001:01:10falsefull333333Google Hangouts as a Podcasting Solution - Ray OrtegaToday we talk with Ray Ortega of podcastersroundtable.com about using Google Hangouts On Air and using that as a podcast. We also talk about why your audience WILL LISTEN to you even if there are other similar podcasts.
                        ]]>Today we talk with Ray Ortega of podcastersroundtable.com about using Google Hangouts On Air and using that as a podcast. We also talk about why your audience WILL LISTEN to you even if there are other similar podcasts.
                        ]]>5a01002c30a75d2312c9c549c60df483Sat, 10 Nov 2012 15:46:00 -040047:23falsefull331331Podcasting Statistics From Todd Cochran - Stitchers Newsca6a1cf42163456f5a1510e9485b9e24Sun, 04 Nov 2012 21:58:11 -040057:12falsefull330330Podcast Promotion and Marketing Ideas - Podcast Goddess52baf6a7e5bf149a7f61bf1b7cc6c007Sat, 27 Oct 2012 15:35:46 -040053:07falsefull329329Podcast Promotion in Bulk and Dustin Hartzler of YourWebsiteEngineer.com56e5ea812360b7904eb2a39f064e5f29Sun, 21 Oct 2012 23:45:42 -040046:04falsefull328328Cutting Your Editing Time by 70%8e6b1262fd9796c39138d77d1a481ae4Mon, 15 Oct 2012 02:03:04 -040032:06falsefull327327My Co-Host is a Jerk6595c7e62c0fa70a4678393e06a484e6Mon, 08 Oct 2012 01:28:01 -040037:45falsefull326326Should I Read My Podcast?541380392372a3100e61bb2198198991Mon, 01 Oct 2012 15:15:56 -040040:07falsefull325325The Correct Way to Launch Your Podcastfd668d9525d8c74d1b977c58af8c719dMon, 24 Sep 2012 19:36:24 -040045:46falsefull324324Self Proclaimed "Non Techie" Build His Empire With His Podcast5da4d21c9213b1ad4a9c9ac46bc08ce7Fri, 14 Sep 2012 22:57:14 -040001:02:38falsefull323323Podcasting Helps You Be Seen as an Expert1bc322cebd55360ec38965e41a215bf1Sun, 09 Sep 2012 17:12:19 -040048:09falsefull322322How Much Money Can You Make Podcasting?7467c1647dc33f2bf98801074f1a2c08Sat, 01 Sep 2012 19:11:11 -040040:18falsefull321321Donovan Adkisson Podcasting Year One - PowerPress Tip - Making it Easy To Consume Your Podcast311535b29e0c03dfd6a3653a77521695Sun, 26 Aug 2012 03:59:00 -040045:42falsefull320320Illegal Music in Podcasting - Missing RSS Buttons - Mark and Lynda Podcast.e351f6287970dc754525f14e73d8df2aMon, 20 Aug 2012 02:46:07 -040019:27falsefull319319Podcasting Boost Business - with Connie and Sheilae8529655edd63a479f71d1b04534a2e7Mon, 13 Aug 2012 02:57:53 -040059:34falsefull318318Three Things All Podcasters Start With0f09d405b5a0a99b08d6fc2b930620c8Sun, 05 Aug 2012 20:59:07 -040040:59falsefull317317Pepsi Money Comes to Podcasting - PodPress is Still a Bad Choice6a26feb23ebcd76cce6da4a96ba6d3dbSun, 29 Jul 2012 18:50:13 -040029:36falsefull316316Music Podcasters Have Musicians Contact You - Podcast Equipment Recommendations46ae9fa461d2b477ad6c6c03060670a0Sat, 21 Jul 2012 18:42:17 -040022:04falsefull315315The Wrong Way To Grow Your Audience6ccee2bfb2e3f0907523cb6bb9773067Sun, 15 Jul 2012 19:24:43 -040029:06falsefull314314How NOT to Start a Podcast - The Dates From Hell Story98ca6cbbee8599f642eaf9d4bb266bc9Fri, 06 Jul 2012 20:13:00 -040024:21falsefull313313An Affordable Podcast Microphone That Solves All Podcast Issues Audio Technica 2005 Reviewedac26a3de1b7921018806f069d337f7feSun, 01 Jul 2012 20:28:36 -040025:14falsefull312312His Podcast Brought Him a Sponsoraa8a5ea8a526bd08b01430c85d28fa79Fri, 15 Jun 2012 21:00:16 -040027:45falsefull310310How Podcasters Can Overcome Talking To Themselves and Not Feel Weirdbeb89bea9643f4c2bc393b0309cde6c3Sun, 10 Jun 2012 17:57:11 -040032:08falsefull309309The One With a Little More Davee640715f303f7150d6b206fe928a00c1Sun, 03 Jun 2012 21:39:48 -040018:07falsefull308308Feedburner, iTunes, and Trying Something Newcfcd8ea2d43151f682f59af4c8b5fd1bSun, 27 May 2012 21:52:14 -040027:39falsefull307307A New Way For Podcasters to Get Paid - How to Get Kicked Out of iTunes4ce04b459929aba7ea8fa7f96912ffd3Sun, 20 May 2012 21:18:48 -040024:26falsefull306306Podcast Promotion The Biblical Way914b6fc97346237b3a079649968c61a5Sat, 12 May 2012 18:13:44 -040032:11falsefull305305Blogworld Schedule - Membership Media Hosting - Best Time for Live Podcasting44b0276fb93d8b1071b597108c20e2a8Sat, 05 May 2012 03:31:39 -040029:53falsefull304304Connecting Podcast Equipment - Recording Skype Softwarede1021e0fe6ee8d1f0181d91d49815b9Mon, 30 Apr 2012 02:36:43 -040012:46falsefull303303Free Music For Your Podcast12f05b667a775c1c82c47528d726a406Sun, 22 Apr 2012 00:37:01 -040025:36falsefull302302Do You Need to be An Egomaniac to Start a Podcast?40345795234d574a9d4770d35ab225e1Mon, 16 Apr 2012 15:47:29 -040032:19falsefull301301Top Shelf Podcasting Tips - Episode 3008a9cea22829e51eb473a629e894f7866Sat, 07 Apr 2012 21:36:07 -040045:57falsefull300300The $30 Microphone Experiment72f3b6417d9738b3dd08027426bae168Sun, 01 Apr 2012 19:03:03 -040024:00falsefull299299Another Bad Media Host - You Are Your Audience3275b65ce8c152da0a58615fd0a0e3c2Sat, 24 Mar 2012 17:04:59 -040031:08falsefull298298Building Your Virtual Family - Rankings in iTunesd6d2c9c8cad407600c02979acbadb452Mon, 19 Mar 2012 00:59:48 -040034:56falsefull297297Getting Your Podcast Media Right - Removing Noise From Your Podcast9391f9fd15186a5c12de23b3dfaf7795Sat, 10 Mar 2012 00:13:47 -040019:46falsefull296296How To Podcast For Free12bfd76ebc98eef2b0f7376386439ecdSat, 25 Feb 2012 17:00:49 -040028:03falsefull295295Feedburner Vs PowerPress0a84987bd10df268c3559db6542b777bSat, 11 Feb 2012 17:08:40 -040041:18falsefull293293Free Listener Feedback Tool & Business Podcasting Tipsa570210bffd63586297f952fdc1c3517Sun, 05 Feb 2012 19:02:47 -040029:26falsefull292292Can Podcasting Make Your Dreams Come True? YES!d1d6078b172967bf4ac14724280ff73cMon, 30 Jan 2012 05:18:24 -040016:06falsefull291291Troublehsooting Your Podcastb4dd24dbce7260a3075c18bc6b81ba69Mon, 23 Jan 2012 03:57:28 -040018:55falsefull290290Looking Deeper Into Podcast Promotion140c04be7509df7ceb4c266b8d14c35fSun, 15 Jan 2012 15:21:39 -040034:48falsefull289289Finding Topics To Podcast - ASK!87de76650aae769c9ca1256c8509362bSun, 08 Jan 2012 01:10:04 -040036:15falsefull288288Behind the Scenes of Radio - Podcasting Questions8a72c17143d0980e2037352fc19387a1Mon, 02 Jan 2012 21:12:37 -040041:00falsefull287287Podcasting Year In Reviewef93278372f965122d2251698e9b9608Fri, 23 Dec 2011 21:51:02 -040030:57falsefull286286've Got My Podcast Idea - Now What?abf6fb850283b9e1c1614ac70a759c9dSun, 18 Dec 2011 00:02:56 -040020:37falsefull285285Behind The Scenes of a Podcasting Membership Site23e5d4e8eefc23aca5ccb5671422ee1fSat, 10 Dec 2011 21:28:11 -040023:29falsefull284284Keeping To Your Publishing Schedule & Podcast Numbers8229dbad16779e798bc8f70b4d658414Sun, 27 Nov 2011 04:19:18 -040028:10falsefull283283How Much Media Hosting Do I Need5d4ffad872b8e2cffd112f1f3fbffd63Sat, 19 Nov 2011 20:04:08 -040031:03falsefull282282Is the Heil PR40 Really That Good?fbd3687156fc0a1fe9fa27e479d6d9c4Sat, 12 Nov 2011 21:06:19 -040025:57falsefull281281The 27 Steps To Get Your Podcast Into iTunesfd846616d6ba1e01c4a3baed74536f99Sat, 05 Nov 2011 16:57:54 -040025:11falsefull280280My Podcamp Cincy Talk on More Podcast Money0c77a3af6010f1332b003938b9a7f418Mon, 31 Oct 2011 20:52:10 -040001:00:47falsefull279279Picking a Podcast Name - Making Money with Audibleb286fb2fea735cf2ee73ae5372ce00b5Fri, 14 Oct 2011 21:46:17 -040025:08falsefull278278Goodbye Steve, iTunes Webinar, Website Hostingc625b97aa3e7ec2fad504dd043003529Thu, 06 Oct 2011 21:04:00 -040023:27falsefull277277Say YES to Podcast Promotionb841d9ecf8bd62d0f7be946fa9685ac9Mon, 03 Oct 2011 02:40:15 -040025:18falsefull276276Everything You Wanted to Know About iTunes, Hosting, Libsyn Vs Blubrry3a28f80227f01def31df94e97e5b9ab6Sun, 25 Sep 2011 19:04:18 -040035:27falsefull275275Live Podcast Awakeningc894ac2ee6fdce9b198616f64c1b8ad1Mon, 19 Sep 2011 20:19:41 -040029:13falsefull274274Are USB Devices Really Quieter?06438c894523673ad55cabff812e9694Sat, 10 Sep 2011 02:15:38 -040020:59falsefull273273Podcasting Insights From Ray Ortegab1757e5cd3196368e0830ea2de780bd4Mon, 05 Sep 2011 16:23:44 -040029:13falsefull272272Great Software For Interview Editingc35a6ecd586ae237aa451a56d6f8228fMon, 29 Aug 2011 18:49:52 -040016:55falsefull271271Mr Media Talks Interviewing Tips775232fe52dea036c07bdb0528e36f18Sat, 20 Aug 2011 19:47:39 -040028:33falsefull270270Your Future Podcast is Awesome.5ec769b026322b41e9c1ca0bfa400466Sat, 13 Aug 2011 07:22:27 -040019:23falsefull269269Trying to Understand Fair Use and Using Music in Podcastsa9f36f0d6458338a2396aa6d27d90c04Tue, 09 Aug 2011 14:57:24 -040014:29falsefull268268Enough Content For Your Episode35a2e915635e3311758752a041a7fee5Sun, 31 Jul 2011 19:11:18 -040012:35falsefull267267Evergreen Content7814830be96b1e77d38b303b3edbe38aSun, 24 Jul 2011 18:14:49 -040018:54falsefull266266Finding Time To Podcastf2d4e2886a6cb9bef7499556322db9fdSat, 16 Jul 2011 16:58:15 -040029:04falsefull265265Affordable Podcast Geara14ca9d5430ea3a60390dd6fa2c2704eSat, 09 Jul 2011 14:54:12 -040015:01falsefull264264Recording Interviews in Stereoff0040b779f0b645b52b1d20fb99222fThu, 07 Jul 2011 02:51:47 -040029:03falsefull263263Get To Know Stitcher8f0e6eeb346ca4e9b4028cbfb2752990Sat, 25 Jun 2011 23:25:47 -040022:13falsefull262262Electrovoice RE320 Microphone Vs Sure SM58d93680e03bcf9cd6395c9288b67ea6f3Thu, 16 Jun 2011 03:42:00 -040018:29falsefull261261Podcasting Changes Lives9930484b9e865dd3a938cefa9e92cccaTue, 14 Jun 2011 02:58:53 -040015:37falsefull260260Podcasting Questions Answered162f5b39bdb4fc6b8fbe68c2a4e4121bSat, 04 Jun 2011 17:29:30 -040019:57falsefull259259Starting Small But Starting0cc491d3cf829b9805247ab61096931cSat, 28 May 2011 15:47:27 -040022:10falsefull258258The Bad Side of Podcasting37fd13d094cdb3313ec5b153ba20ecbeSun, 22 May 2011 18:49:50 -040017:15falsefull257257Put a Sock On it0fcc8bc8ba1d73e3ad23b728c5702885Sun, 15 May 2011 19:32:06 -040018:23falsefull256256Why Not Host My Media Where I Host My Website?d8f192cc215976c8704678a57f34d77dSun, 08 May 2011 19:00:26 -040020:35falsefull255255Top 5 Questions From Podcamp Clevelandd5882a1f7e9f2405187608965780af28Mon, 02 May 2011 03:53:54 -040019:16falsefull254254Do I Really Need A Portable Recorderf6fe01bdac632e9fe7148b8f174e4443Sat, 23 Apr 2011 21:51:18 -040018:21falsefull253253The Cost of Starting A Low Budget Video Podcastdff35e8798720083415558d00eab4d8aSat, 16 Apr 2011 16:30:47 -040014:08falsefull253253Thirteen Thousand Listeners Per Week7a0d6b0c3d5f28a1db9d58a4984de6baSun, 03 Apr 2011 15:14:43 -040014:48falsefull252252Wizzard Media Launches Web Based Premium Podcast Subscription Service40d7e111d542cdf5baafaf77ecf35b8bSun, 20 Mar 2011 14:54:40 -040021:37falsefull251251Podcasting Live - Taking Phone Calls88541f580e68a667839c5dc52d9e9b6dSun, 13 Mar 2011 16:11:48 -040010:42falsefull250250Voicing Your Opinioncd6405870bee2aec80a3bf7eb4b97220Sun, 06 Mar 2011 22:44:00 -040012:18falsefull249249Spending Your Tax Return0542d1a05cedb3aabda1f86c68f9b205Sat, 26 Feb 2011 19:40:12 -040012:05falsefull248248Getting More Podcast Subscribers2dc7e3ddc5e7127d23af2a9fc44d781eSat, 19 Feb 2011 20:16:20 -040014:01falsefull2472471.64 Billion Downloads3acc22f7dbc13ccc97c0f7900e557504Sun, 13 Feb 2011 15:48:50 -040018:09falsefull246246To Cuss or Not to Cuss77fa912a34dd63ac0a677191620b3d92Mon, 07 Feb 2011 02:43:07 -040015:44falsefull245245Topping the Charts From the Basementhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=836Sun, 23 Jan 2011 22:44:21 -040009:27falsefull244244Time Shift the Goldhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=826Mon, 17 Jan 2011 02:22:10 -040007:20falsefull243243Podcasting Still Making Headlineshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=820Sun, 02 Jan 2011 20:08:38 -040009:08falsefull242242Why Do You Podcast?http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=816Thu, 23 Dec 2010 17:57:20 -040010:19falsefull241241USB Headset Testhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=810Sun, 12 Dec 2010 19:12:56 -040016:49falsefull240240Calling Your Audience to Actionhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=801Mon, 06 Dec 2010 01:14:09 -040015:11falsefull296296Taking Another Look at Podcastinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=790Sat, 27 Nov 2010 17:11:21 -040013:44falsefull238238Creating Intriguing Contenthttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=785Sat, 06 Nov 2010 19:11:40 -040011:57falsefull237237Live Podcasting Pros and Conshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=778Sat, 09 Oct 2010 23:44:17 -040012:03falsefull235235Radio Appears to Be 38 Percent Commercialshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=743Sun, 03 Oct 2010 17:47:45 -040015:52falsefull234234Headline Animator – Truth in Advertisinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=721Sat, 25 Sep 2010 23:58:07 -040016:10falsefull233233When is it Time to Podfade?http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=709Mon, 20 Sep 2010 03:29:49 -040011:54falsefull232232The Return of Podcast Promo Swappinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=702Mon, 13 Sep 2010 01:28:12 -040019:56falsefull231231The Importance of the About Page3ec94e08e2ec050f8670c0c9fbce6b0dSat, 04 Sep 2010 18:50:36 -040013:47falsefull229229New Podcast Directorieshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=669Mon, 23 Aug 2010 04:30:37 -040016:15falsefull230230The EASY Way to Record A Skype Callhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=671Sun, 15 Aug 2010 23:06:46 -040003:54falsefull229229Why WordPress is the Besthttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=662Sat, 07 Aug 2010 21:51:11 -040013:55falsefull228228Over-Editing Your Soundhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=643Mon, 02 Aug 2010 14:00:38 -040015:03falsefull227227Who, What, Why, When, Where, and How of Podcastinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=633Sun, 25 Jul 2010 05:00:35 -040009:23falsefull226226From H2 to ESPNhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=623Sun, 18 Jul 2010 05:00:22 -040012:19falsefull225225The Pros and Cons of Starting a Forumhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=610Sat, 10 Jul 2010 20:45:07 -040021:01falsefull224224Freemium Resourceshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=600Sun, 04 Jul 2010 16:29:57 -040013:31falsefull223223Automated Backup For Your WordPress Installationhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=588Mon, 28 Jun 2010 05:00:31 -040016:25falsefull222222WordPress 3.0 Initial Reactionshttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=571Sun, 20 Jun 2010 03:28:00 -040016:00falsefull221221Podcast Voicemail Call Buttonhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=563Mon, 14 Jun 2010 04:16:59 -040011:56falsefull220220A Free Software Program That Won’t Crashhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=546Sun, 06 Jun 2010 06:00:25 -040016:36falsefull219219You Can’t Please Everybodyhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=539Mon, 31 May 2010 06:56:28 -040013:25falsefull219219Garbage in Garbage OutYou can't polish a turd
                        ]]>You can't polish a turd
                        ]]>e441e5cd76497f9cec62a99ce64debaaFri, 21 May 2010 03:54:18 -040009:04falsefull218218Proof Content is Kinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=531Mon, 10 May 2010 23:32:54 -040011:29falsefull217217Samson Go Mic Reviewedhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=528Mon, 03 May 2010 05:00:48 -040009:10falsefull216216Great Resource For Great Podcast Content For Freehttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=524Tue, 20 Apr 2010 00:44:58 -040029:55falsefull215215If I Had To Do it All Again…http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=519Fri, 02 Apr 2010 03:57:46 -040016:08falsefull214214WordPress Tags Are Google Food – REPOSTWhen you create a wordpress post for your podcast, are you using the "Tags"feature in WordPress? You should be. The image to the left show how many hits (visitors) I received based on tags that I have put into this podcast. Now this is just a SMALL amount of the tags that have generated traffic [...]
                        ]]>When you create a wordpress post for your podcast, are you using the "Tags"feature in WordPress? You should be. The image to the left show how many hits (visitors) I received based on tags that I have put into this podcast. Now this is just a SMALL amount of the tags that have generated traffic [...]
                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=510Tue, 23 Mar 2010 05:01:37 -040017:18falsefullYour Competition May Be DeadYou can research similar podcasts when starting your own podcast. You can go to www.itunes.com and download the software (click on podcast, then podcast directory in the bottom right hand corner, then search in the upper right hand corner). You can also check out sites like www.podcastalley.com and www.podcastpickle.com

                        I started a new podcast at www.datesfromhellshow.com and subscribed to other podcasts on online dating. I was surprised as time went on that most of my “competition” wasn't putting out new episodes. So if I had seen a large number of similar podcasts and decided “there is no room for me” I would've been wrong. While there may be numerous podcasts similar to yours, they may not be putting out any new content.

                        ]]>You can research similar podcasts when starting your own podcast. You can go to www.itunes.com and download the software (click on podcast, then podcast directory in the bottom right hand corner, then search in the upper right hand corner). You can also check out sites like www.podcastalley.com and www.podcastpickle.com

                        I started a new podcast at www.datesfromhellshow.com and subscribed to other podcasts on online dating. I was surprised as time went on that most of my “competition” wasn't putting out new episodes. So if I had seen a large number of similar podcasts and decided “there is no room for me” I would've been wrong. While there may be numerous podcasts similar to yours, they may not be putting out any new content.

                        ]]>8c2b4c0b28e0f40ac38bd106d0451d3aThu, 18 Mar 2010 19:46:30 -040006:37falsefull168168Podcasting's Hardest Question To AnswerHow are you getting your audience back to your website
                        ]]>How are you getting your audience back to your website
                        ]]>e0293cb2e1578c9157d86f149211e26dThu, 18 Mar 2010 19:45:06 -040015:12falsefull161161Free Podcast Theme MusicToday I thought I would look into the Podsfafe Music Network. I’ve always known that you could find great music there, however in looking over the paperwork I was surprised that its not required to mention the musician (only the podsafe music network). As a musician I urge everyone using the resource to mention the musician. You can find it at www.podsafemusicnetwork.com
                        New Wizzard Media Player

                        We also get a report from Fred Castenda of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com who interviews Dave from Wizzard media about the new wizard media. It’s very simple. Enter in your RSS feed, answer a confirmation email (stating that you are the owner of the feed). Wizzard will populate your player, and you are off to go.

                        The player is completely customizable via skins. It also checks to see if you have a high-speed connection, and then either feeds you the mv4 file or the flash file. They also have a partnership with TubeMogul where your video will get blasted into all sorts of different video portals. Check it out at http://www.wizzard.tv/blog/producers/producers_wizzard_player/ or to sign up go to http://tools.wizzard.tv

                        Back to School Special

                        Get 20% off in the month of September by using the coupon code " bts "

                        Other Sites Mentioned

                        Tim Sullivan's Selling Geek at www.sellinggeek.com

                        I also mention www.jimmiebratcher.com and his song "lord make us Funky."

                        ]]>Today I thought I would look into the Podsfafe Music Network. I’ve always known that you could find great music there, however in looking over the paperwork I was surprised that its not required to mention the musician (only the podsafe music network). As a musician I urge everyone using the resource to mention the musician. You can find it at www.podsafemusicnetwork.com
                        New Wizzard Media Player

                        We also get a report from Fred Castenda of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com who interviews Dave from Wizzard media about the new wizard media. It’s very simple. Enter in your RSS feed, answer a confirmation email (stating that you are the owner of the feed). Wizzard will populate your player, and you are off to go.

                        The player is completely customizable via skins. It also checks to see if you have a high-speed connection, and then either feeds you the mv4 file or the flash file. They also have a partnership with TubeMogul where your video will get blasted into all sorts of different video portals. Check it out at http://www.wizzard.tv/blog/producers/producers_wizzard_player/ or to sign up go to http://tools.wizzard.tv

                        Back to School Special

                        Get 20% off in the month of September by using the coupon code " bts "

                        Other Sites Mentioned

                        Tim Sullivan's Selling Geek at www.sellinggeek.com

                        I also mention www.jimmiebratcher.com and his song "lord make us Funky."

                        ]]>30787681174cd253cf6e28e67604168fThu, 18 Mar 2010 19:44:03 -040027:32falsefull154154Audio Techinca USB 2020 Vs Zune H2Today we compare the USB 2020 Vs Zune H2
                        ]]>Today we compare the USB 2020 Vs Zune H2
                        ]]>7079109bbd755a377dd53e744a133922Thu, 18 Mar 2010 19:42:01 -040022:34falsefull148148Podcast Questions From OSUToday you hear me get interviewed By Doug Dangler who is the Associate Director of the Center for the Study and Teaching of Writing and Ohio University.

                        This interviewed was done via Skype and Doug's class.

                        Topics include:

                        Will Podcasting replace any other media forms? What Podcast do I listen to? Do you get paid on each download? How many listeners make a successful audience? Are Bloggers the same as Media?

                        Doug's Podcast is at http://cstw.osu.edu/podcasts/

                        Other Podcasts Mentioned: www.thescenezine.com www.strugllingentrepreneur.com www.sleddogpodcast.com www.llmlive.com

                        ]]>Today you hear me get interviewed By Doug Dangler who is the Associate Director of the Center for the Study and Teaching of Writing and Ohio University.

                        This interviewed was done via Skype and Doug's class.

                        Topics include:

                        Will Podcasting replace any other media forms? What Podcast do I listen to? Do you get paid on each download? How many listeners make a successful audience? Are Bloggers the same as Media?

                        Doug's Podcast is at http://cstw.osu.edu/podcasts/

                        Other Podcasts Mentioned: www.thescenezine.com www.strugllingentrepreneur.com www.sleddogpodcast.com www.llmlive.com

                        ]]>59f0cfbe2f6d224ecc6e9065283cdf52Thu, 18 Mar 2010 19:41:50 -040024:55falsefull147147Gigavox: A Podcast that never goes out of dateNOTE: This technology was sold to Podango after this episode. Go to http://cms.podango.net however for the most part its been broken ever since.

                        The great thing about podcasting is its getting big enough for companies to start building tools for podcasters. Today we look at the Audio Lite system from Gigavox (the makers of the Levelator). www.gigavox.com

                        You can record your podcast in segements. Then (if needed) you can update certain segments (like an advertiser spot) in the current AND PAST podcasts. I'm using this not for advertisers, but for a non-profit (my church). Instead of having advertising spots rotate in and out, we use it for our calendar, and prayer concerns (items that chance from week to week). This way people are up to date with the latest news (no matter what episode they listen to). In reality your podcast can be evergreen. The information can be updated in past shows. The good news is its free to use. Take some time to think about it and how you want your podcast to go from section to section. I love it. Oh yeah. IT's FREE.

                        The “bad” news is it doesn't work with Libsyn (it does with the more expensive Libsyn Pro). So I looked at some different web hosts that had unlimited bandwidth (like Midphase.com ) and ended up with Dreamhost.com (as they increase your storage and bandwidth the longer you stay on their system). I will keep you in the loop as we move forward.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Tim Dewey of the Sled Dog Podcastwww.sleddogpodcast.com

                        For Immediate Release http://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        School of Podcasting Students Only

                        Sales Roundup Podcast http://www.salesroundup.com/

                        Cold Calling Podcast http://coldcallingpodcast.com/

                        The Hunt Cast http://huntcast.blogspot.com

                        Other Sites Mentioned Paul Colligan www.paulcolligan.com www.121Podcasting.com (sell your podcast, do audio books and more). Weekly Web Tools www.weeklywebtools.com Community Baptist Church www.cbcot.com

                        School of Podcasting. Learn how to podcast RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>NOTE: This technology was sold to Podango after this episode. Go to http://cms.podango.net however for the most part its been broken ever since.

                        The great thing about podcasting is its getting big enough for companies to start building tools for podcasters. Today we look at the Audio Lite system from Gigavox (the makers of the Levelator). www.gigavox.com

                        You can record your podcast in segements. Then (if needed) you can update certain segments (like an advertiser spot) in the current AND PAST podcasts. I'm using this not for advertisers, but for a non-profit (my church). Instead of having advertising spots rotate in and out, we use it for our calendar, and prayer concerns (items that chance from week to week). This way people are up to date with the latest news (no matter what episode they listen to). In reality your podcast can be evergreen. The information can be updated in past shows. The good news is its free to use. Take some time to think about it and how you want your podcast to go from section to section. I love it. Oh yeah. IT's FREE.

                        The “bad” news is it doesn't work with Libsyn (it does with the more expensive Libsyn Pro). So I looked at some different web hosts that had unlimited bandwidth (like Midphase.com ) and ended up with Dreamhost.com (as they increase your storage and bandwidth the longer you stay on their system). I will keep you in the loop as we move forward.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Tim Dewey of the Sled Dog Podcastwww.sleddogpodcast.com

                        For Immediate Release http://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        School of Podcasting Students Only

                        Sales Roundup Podcast http://www.salesroundup.com/

                        Cold Calling Podcast http://coldcallingpodcast.com/

                        The Hunt Cast http://huntcast.blogspot.com

                        Other Sites Mentioned Paul Colligan www.paulcolligan.com www.121Podcasting.com (sell your podcast, do audio books and more). Weekly Web Tools www.weeklywebtools.com Community Baptist Church www.cbcot.com

                        School of Podcasting. Learn how to podcast RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>86091a453cfcdf634ba9792312acd3deThu, 18 Mar 2010 19:36:58 -040016:56falsefull127127More Ways to Monetize Your Podcasthttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=503Mon, 15 Mar 2010 23:25:58 -040015:11falsefull212212Can You Make it on Donations?http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=506Mon, 08 Mar 2010 23:45:01 -040013:51falsefull211211Podcast Listener LoyaltyInterviewing a Very Loyal Listener Today we talk with "Carie P" who is a mega fan of the Geologic Podcast (www.geologicpodcast.com ) hosted by creative genius George Hrab. How funny is George? He's an atheist and I (a lifelong Christian) am a regular listener. Carie got together a bunch of fans of the show to create a podcast for the host (both on his 50th episode and 100th episode). In addition to being a fan, Carie has also purchased every one of George's products. Podcast Secrets 2009 Podcast secrets has a TON of information this year, and it has a "Faculty" of podcast consultants (including ME) that will be contributing. Paul Colligan and Alex Mandossian always bring quality information that it would take months to find (let alone figure out how to use). To find out about the Preview call on April 9th click here. To sign up for the seminar go to www.secretswithdave.com Listener Feedback Daniel Johnson Jr of www.journeyinsidemymind.com answers the question, "Why did you unsubscribe to that podcast?" He says: 1. Lost his closeness with the host. 2. If the shows are too long he can't keep up. 3. Finding alternative methods (like pandora.com)

                        New BONUS For Members of the School of Podcasting

                        Now when you sign up at the School of Podcasting you get copy of the Ultimate Footer Ad FOR FREE as a bonus gift for signing up. Boost your podcast subscriptions with this great tool. ($47 value).

                        ]]>Interviewing a Very Loyal Listener Today we talk with "Carie P" who is a mega fan of the Geologic Podcast (www.geologicpodcast.com ) hosted by creative genius George Hrab. How funny is George? He's an atheist and I (a lifelong Christian) am a regular listener. Carie got together a bunch of fans of the show to create a podcast for the host (both on his 50th episode and 100th episode). In addition to being a fan, Carie has also purchased every one of George's products. Podcast Secrets 2009 Podcast secrets has a TON of information this year, and it has a "Faculty" of podcast consultants (including ME) that will be contributing. Paul Colligan and Alex Mandossian always bring quality information that it would take months to find (let alone figure out how to use). To find out about the Preview call on April 9th click here. To sign up for the seminar go to www.secretswithdave.com Listener Feedback Daniel Johnson Jr of www.journeyinsidemymind.com answers the question, "Why did you unsubscribe to that podcast?" He says: 1. Lost his closeness with the host. 2. If the shows are too long he can't keep up. 3. Finding alternative methods (like pandora.com)

                        New BONUS For Members of the School of Podcasting

                        Now when you sign up at the School of Podcasting you get copy of the Ultimate Footer Ad FOR FREE as a bonus gift for signing up. Boost your podcast subscriptions with this great tool. ($47 value).

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=449745#Mon, 08 Mar 2010 17:00:00 -040021:24falsefullRecording A Phone Call With No Budgethttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=497Mon, 22 Feb 2010 01:26:58 -040011:57falsefull210210Troubleshooting Your Wordpress Bloghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=494Sun, 14 Feb 2010 22:39:02 -040008:50falsefull209209Is Your Podcast Blocked From Google?http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=479Sun, 07 Feb 2010 15:05:56 -040010:42falsefull208208The Hardest Part of Podcastinghttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=470Mon, 01 Feb 2010 12:05:58 -040016:58falsefull207207My Definition of Bad Audio Qualityhttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=464Mon, 25 Jan 2010 05:23:42 -040019:54falsefull206206Sticking to Your Topichttp://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=456Mon, 18 Jan 2010 04:59:30 -040015:31falsefull205205Is Podcasting Worth the Work?http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=448Mon, 11 Jan 2010 18:35:20 -040015:09falsefull204204Plans for 2010http://schoolofpodcasting.com/?p=439Tue, 22 Dec 2009 01:06:43 -040010:37falsefull203203Is Podcasting For Free - Good Idea?Is podcasting for free a good idea?
                        ]]>Is podcasting for free a good idea?
                        ]]>91099432600ddb00315a5c60d68b05beMon, 30 Nov 2009 17:00:00 -040010:13falsefull201201Top Podcasting PluginsPeople always ask me “What is the best plugin for Podcasting.” Originally I said Podpress, but the develop got too busy (and probably tired of working for pennies) and abandoned the plugin. I love the 1pixle player as you can change the color of the player to match the theme of your wordpress blog.

                        I've been a fan of Powerpress when it first came out, as they added more functionality (to tie it in with the blubrry.com network) I kind winced a bit (I loved it simplicity). However, recently updates to the powerpress plugin have made it my official plugin of choice. They added the 1 pixel player (and four others) to the mix, so customization is at your fingertips (and without a huge learning curve to figure out how). To me, this makes Powerpress, THE podcasting plugin. I still use Feedburner for my iTunes stuff, but I love the ability to have different players, and the ability to offer a download link, a streaming link, and a “Play in new window” link.

                        I don't use Blubrry.com for hosting (nothing against it), but they do have some great tools to make things simpler. Todd Cochrane, Angelo Mandato and the crew at blubrry deserve a round of applause for listening to their audience and over delivering on what we wanted. Check it out at http://www.blubrry.com/powerpress/

                        Other Plugins I Use

                        WordPress Automatic Upgrade is a great plugin. I know this is part of WordPress out of the box, but I like the plugin as it reminds me to back up my blog.

                        WordPress Autmatic Backup is a great plugin that e-mails me a backup of my blog on a weekly basis.

                        All in One Seo Pack is a tool that allows you to add additional meta tags, and customized titles to your blog. I like this plugin, it is easy to use, but it seems lately it needs upgraded about once a week. This is annoying. The upgrade simply takes you to the page in the plugin that asks for donations.

                        Tweet Meme is an interesting plugin that allows people to “retweet” your blog post. They click the button, enter their twitter information and boom, they've retweetted and put a link back to your blog (through bit.ly if you want so you can keep track).

                        ]]>People always ask me “What is the best plugin for Podcasting.” Originally I said Podpress, but the develop got too busy (and probably tired of working for pennies) and abandoned the plugin. I love the 1pixle player as you can change the color of the player to match the theme of your wordpress blog.

                        I've been a fan of Powerpress when it first came out, as they added more functionality (to tie it in with the blubrry.com network) I kind winced a bit (I loved it simplicity). However, recently updates to the powerpress plugin have made it my official plugin of choice. They added the 1 pixel player (and four others) to the mix, so customization is at your fingertips (and without a huge learning curve to figure out how). To me, this makes Powerpress, THE podcasting plugin. I still use Feedburner for my iTunes stuff, but I love the ability to have different players, and the ability to offer a download link, a streaming link, and a “Play in new window” link.

                        I don't use Blubrry.com for hosting (nothing against it), but they do have some great tools to make things simpler. Todd Cochrane, Angelo Mandato and the crew at blubrry deserve a round of applause for listening to their audience and over delivering on what we wanted. Check it out at http://www.blubrry.com/powerpress/

                        Other Plugins I Use

                        WordPress Automatic Upgrade is a great plugin. I know this is part of WordPress out of the box, but I like the plugin as it reminds me to back up my blog.

                        WordPress Autmatic Backup is a great plugin that e-mails me a backup of my blog on a weekly basis.

                        All in One Seo Pack is a tool that allows you to add additional meta tags, and customized titles to your blog. I like this plugin, it is easy to use, but it seems lately it needs upgraded about once a week. This is annoying. The upgrade simply takes you to the page in the plugin that asks for donations.

                        Tweet Meme is an interesting plugin that allows people to “retweet” your blog post. They click the button, enter their twitter information and boom, they've retweetted and put a link back to your blog (through bit.ly if you want so you can keep track).

                        ]]>aac99cd46ced967f340583caec1de927Mon, 19 Oct 2009 16:00:00 -040015:22falsefull198198If You Spell it - You Can Smell itOn today's brief show, I explain how I took the name “Podcast Fast Pass” (say that out loud) from the “Fast Pass” idea at Disney Land (where you can legally cut in line). Well after a year or so, I finally changed the name as I had to over-pronounce the name every time I used it.

                        My consulting service is not under Podcast Mechanic at www.podcastmechanic.com Which makes more sense to people. Everyone understands what a mechanic can do for cars, etc. and that's what I do for podcasts.

                        I also revisit the “podcasting is dead” discussion. I do not have a feud with Leo Laporte. I just hate it when anyone says podcasting is dead as potential podcasters may change their mind about starting a podcast.

                        Here are some new Podcasting Statistics

                        On 9/24/04 a search for the word “podcasts” resulted in 24 hits. Now it returns 60,700,000 results. To bad Leo Laporte thinks podcasting is dead. I’m sure he’ll say it again at the blog world expo in a few weeks.

                        Well a new report from Wizzard Media shows that podcast listeners are up from 15 million to 18 million. Here are some samples of that report:

                        Wizzard Media (NYSE Amex: WZE), the world’s largest podcasting network, today announced that for the third quarter of 2009 the Wizzard Media Network saw total podcast download requests of 332 million vs. 287 million in the third quarter of 2008, an increase of 45 million.

                        The number of podcast shows on the Wizzard Media Network grew from 11,600 at the end of the second quarter of 2009 to 12,281 shows at the end of the third quarter of 2009. Podcasters pay Wizzard Media to use its publishing platform and work with Wizzard to monetize their show through brand advertising and more recently, content sales (Apps).

                        Adam Corolla got fired from radio (After replacing Howard Stern) started a podcast and never skipped a beat. To bad podcasting is dead. Oh wait, the same company that fired him is now co-producing his podcast and will help sell sponsorships. Carolla is averaging 130,000 listeners.

                        In the third quarter of 2009 Wizzard delivered over 12.7 million podcast advertisements, its second-highest quarterly total on record and an increase of 130% from 5.5 million ads in the third quarter of 2008.

                        ]]>On today's brief show, I explain how I took the name “Podcast Fast Pass” (say that out loud) from the “Fast Pass” idea at Disney Land (where you can legally cut in line). Well after a year or so, I finally changed the name as I had to over-pronounce the name every time I used it.

                        My consulting service is not under Podcast Mechanic at www.podcastmechanic.com Which makes more sense to people. Everyone understands what a mechanic can do for cars, etc. and that's what I do for podcasts.

                        I also revisit the “podcasting is dead” discussion. I do not have a feud with Leo Laporte. I just hate it when anyone says podcasting is dead as potential podcasters may change their mind about starting a podcast.

                        Here are some new Podcasting Statistics

                        On 9/24/04 a search for the word “podcasts” resulted in 24 hits. Now it returns 60,700,000 results. To bad Leo Laporte thinks podcasting is dead. I’m sure he’ll say it again at the blog world expo in a few weeks.

                        Well a new report from Wizzard Media shows that podcast listeners are up from 15 million to 18 million. Here are some samples of that report:

                        Wizzard Media (NYSE Amex: WZE), the world’s largest podcasting network, today announced that for the third quarter of 2009 the Wizzard Media Network saw total podcast download requests of 332 million vs. 287 million in the third quarter of 2008, an increase of 45 million.

                        The number of podcast shows on the Wizzard Media Network grew from 11,600 at the end of the second quarter of 2009 to 12,281 shows at the end of the third quarter of 2009. Podcasters pay Wizzard Media to use its publishing platform and work with Wizzard to monetize their show through brand advertising and more recently, content sales (Apps).

                        Adam Corolla got fired from radio (After replacing Howard Stern) started a podcast and never skipped a beat. To bad podcasting is dead. Oh wait, the same company that fired him is now co-producing his podcast and will help sell sponsorships. Carolla is averaging 130,000 listeners.

                        In the third quarter of 2009 Wizzard delivered over 12.7 million podcast advertisements, its second-highest quarterly total on record and an increase of 130% from 5.5 million ads in the third quarter of 2008.

                        ]]>b418acb00e372e7764987ba9a4078ec2Mon, 12 Oct 2009 16:00:00 -040011:34falsefull197197Podcasting is Dead - AgainHow do you generate lots of traffic, and get people talking about you? You state in a conference from a podium that “Podcasting is Dead,” or you make a blog post that “Podcasting is Over” etc. Then all the podcasters get bent out of shape (and I count myself in that category) and we all stand up and say “NO IT's NOT.” So here I am saying “No it's not.”

                        The interesting thing is Leo Laporte stated he was getting $70 CPM on this week in tech. Hello? Can you show a better example of how valuable podcasting is in selling to a niche? Radio is getting $15 – $40 cpm.

                        -

                        ]]>How do you generate lots of traffic, and get people talking about you? You state in a conference from a podium that “Podcasting is Dead,” or you make a blog post that “Podcasting is Over” etc. Then all the podcasters get bent out of shape (and I count myself in that category) and we all stand up and say “NO IT's NOT.” So here I am saying “No it's not.”

                        The interesting thing is Leo Laporte stated he was getting $70 CPM on this week in tech. Hello? Can you show a better example of how valuable podcasting is in selling to a niche? Radio is getting $15 – $40 cpm.

                        -

                        ]]>78a86df1dabf1079bef48e758ad707dbMon, 05 Oct 2009 16:00:00 -040013:07falsefull196196Are You Missing the Podcast BoatSome people wonder, “Should I start a podcast?” and they wonder if they have the material. I am always amazed at the number of people who give away a free newsletter, but don’t turn that exact same material, record it as audio, and turn it into a podcast?

                        As most of you know I recently got married and have three wonderful step-children. As I have never had children before I decided to read up on the subject and was advised to read “The Successful Stepfamily” by Ron Deal. So far I am very impressed with the book, and may actually lead a study of the subject at my church next year.

                        I went to his website at successfulstepfamily.com and was surprised that while Ron had books, he was a speaker at conferences, he offered personal coaching, he did not have a podcast. Was it that he didn’t need the publicity? I typed “Stepfamily resources” into Google and did not find him on the first, second, or third page (so I stopped looking). While podcasting will not boost your Google rankings, it will boost your exposure to people who may link to your website which may boost your Google ranking.

                        I contacted his company, and after some thought they decided not to go in that direction. What a shame they have great content.

                        If you have a newsletter, and you have content that is worth people reading, that should be a podast. All you do is read the newsletter into a microphone (be sure to add some inflection so it doesn’t sound like you’re reading), write a quick blog post, upload and attach the audio to the post. Yes, it’s that easy.

                        How much does it cost to start a Podcast? Most of my recommendations at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/equipment but if it’s just you recording its going to cost around $250. If you’re on a tight budget, about $125 to start, and an ongoing fee of $5-12 a month.  Meanwhile a membership at aweber.com (a popular email client) is about $200 a year.

                        Why people think e-mail is better?

                        The nice thing about email is you can get your reader one click away from buying your product (if your email promotes a product). The bad news about email is people get so much email. I can’t remember the last time I purchased something from an email. Don’t get me wrong, email is still the top way to communicate for a business. I just know more and more I’m going to my inbox, highlighting a number of emails, and pressing delete (before I even read them). But that’s just me.  In terms of getting your potential customer 1 click away, email does that splendidly.

                        Give Your Content in the Format That People Want

                        Movies are delivered on the big screen, then movies on TV, then VHS, DVD, now blue-ray and movies available for download. Why? Because good content is good content, but some people want to see it on a big screen, some people want to watch it at home; some people want to watch it on the go, etc. So instead of forcing your potential customers into a channel they don’t want, why not give the content in a format they will enjoy.

                        What podcasting has over e-mail

                        The first podcast I created was and is  for Musicians. Before it was a podcast it was a newsletter delivered via email. At one point that newsletter had about 1200 subscribers. I turned it into a podcast and it has around 800 downloads per episode (some higher some lower). However, as a newsletter only I think I sold about 2 copies of my book in a year. As a podcast I sell about 1 a month. Why? Because it has a tone of voice, and has made me more human. The podcast has enabled me to build a relationship with my listeners. If I travel I know of different cities where I have open invitations to stay at people’s houses, get tours of cities, etc as these listeners are more friends than potential customers.

                        Am I going to retire on my 1 sale a month? Absolutely not, but I don’t do the podcast to sell books, I do it because I love the subject (and make more money via sponsorship of the podcast). However, don’t over look the fact that marketing via podcasting is more effective (from my chair).

                        The Best of Both Worlds

                        The good news is you can do both. You can use free services such as feedburner, and have people that sign up for your email list be notifed when you do a new post (with or without a podcast). Now you have your product one click away, and they have the ability to listen (or watch) you talk about the topic.

                        The Bottom Line

                        Podcasting allows you to reach a global audience that wants to listen/watch (not read) content. If you have content already (articles, newsletters, etc) that you give away for free you can distribute that for next to nothing and build a relationship with your readers. If I was Ron Deal I would promote my email list in your podcast (along with your speaking engagements, and how the new book was coming), and in the email newsletter I would promote the podcast. You can always offer exclusive content that is only available in that format to get them to sign up for both.

                        Spoof Testimonial

                        Thanks for Chris from www.fillupuripod.com for taking the voice over I sent him and turning it into a “spoof” testimonial. Hillarious.

                        ]]>Some people wonder, “Should I start a podcast?” and they wonder if they have the material. I am always amazed at the number of people who give away a free newsletter, but don’t turn that exact same material, record it as audio, and turn it into a podcast?

                        As most of you know I recently got married and have three wonderful step-children. As I have never had children before I decided to read up on the subject and was advised to read “The Successful Stepfamily” by Ron Deal. So far I am very impressed with the book, and may actually lead a study of the subject at my church next year.

                        I went to his website at successfulstepfamily.com and was surprised that while Ron had books, he was a speaker at conferences, he offered personal coaching, he did not have a podcast. Was it that he didn’t need the publicity? I typed “Stepfamily resources” into Google and did not find him on the first, second, or third page (so I stopped looking). While podcasting will not boost your Google rankings, it will boost your exposure to people who may link to your website which may boost your Google ranking.

                        I contacted his company, and after some thought they decided not to go in that direction. What a shame they have great content.

                        If you have a newsletter, and you have content that is worth people reading, that should be a podast. All you do is read the newsletter into a microphone (be sure to add some inflection so it doesn’t sound like you’re reading), write a quick blog post, upload and attach the audio to the post. Yes, it’s that easy.

                        How much does it cost to start a Podcast? Most of my recommendations at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/equipment but if it’s just you recording its going to cost around $250. If you’re on a tight budget, about $125 to start, and an ongoing fee of $5-12 a month.  Meanwhile a membership at aweber.com (a popular email client) is about $200 a year.

                        Why people think e-mail is better?

                        The nice thing about email is you can get your reader one click away from buying your product (if your email promotes a product). The bad news about email is people get so much email. I can’t remember the last time I purchased something from an email. Don’t get me wrong, email is still the top way to communicate for a business. I just know more and more I’m going to my inbox, highlighting a number of emails, and pressing delete (before I even read them). But that’s just me.  In terms of getting your potential customer 1 click away, email does that splendidly.

                        Give Your Content in the Format That People Want

                        Movies are delivered on the big screen, then movies on TV, then VHS, DVD, now blue-ray and movies available for download. Why? Because good content is good content, but some people want to see it on a big screen, some people want to watch it at home; some people want to watch it on the go, etc. So instead of forcing your potential customers into a channel they don’t want, why not give the content in a format they will enjoy.

                        What podcasting has over e-mail

                        The first podcast I created was and is  for Musicians. Before it was a podcast it was a newsletter delivered via email. At one point that newsletter had about 1200 subscribers. I turned it into a podcast and it has around 800 downloads per episode (some higher some lower). However, as a newsletter only I think I sold about 2 copies of my book in a year. As a podcast I sell about 1 a month. Why? Because it has a tone of voice, and has made me more human. The podcast has enabled me to build a relationship with my listeners. If I travel I know of different cities where I have open invitations to stay at people’s houses, get tours of cities, etc as these listeners are more friends than potential customers.

                        Am I going to retire on my 1 sale a month? Absolutely not, but I don’t do the podcast to sell books, I do it because I love the subject (and make more money via sponsorship of the podcast). However, don’t over look the fact that marketing via podcasting is more effective (from my chair).

                        The Best of Both Worlds

                        The good news is you can do both. You can use free services such as feedburner, and have people that sign up for your email list be notifed when you do a new post (with or without a podcast). Now you have your product one click away, and they have the ability to listen (or watch) you talk about the topic.

                        The Bottom Line

                        Podcasting allows you to reach a global audience that wants to listen/watch (not read) content. If you have content already (articles, newsletters, etc) that you give away for free you can distribute that for next to nothing and build a relationship with your readers. If I was Ron Deal I would promote my email list in your podcast (along with your speaking engagements, and how the new book was coming), and in the email newsletter I would promote the podcast. You can always offer exclusive content that is only available in that format to get them to sign up for both.

                        Spoof Testimonial

                        Thanks for Chris from www.fillupuripod.com for taking the voice over I sent him and turning it into a “spoof” testimonial. Hillarious.

                        ]]>b4642168bb832d2d4a22659338df305cThu, 01 Jan 2009 17:00:00 -040015:13falsefull1991992008 Podcasting Likes and DislikesHere are my likes and dislikes of 2008

                        In 2008 I was glad to see the enhancements of great tools for podcasters. Wizzard put out their new player, and Paul Colligan and crew continue to add more features to premiumcast.

                        I like the fact that in 2008 whenever I spoke to a group and ask "Who has ever heard of podcasting" almost all hands were raised, and almost as many when I would ask "How many have actually listened to a podcast?" That trend is continuing.

                        I disliked that in 2008 my audience didn't seem to grow as fast as it did in 2007. It was a slower, gradually climb as apposed to 2007 which had more spikes. On the other hand I'm doing less to promote my shows.

                        In 2008 Podshow changed their name to Mevio, and changed their payment plan to me. I can't discuss the details, but as I'm listing it as a dislike you can figure out how it affectd me financially. What I do like about Mevio is they have given me the potential to earn more money using their sponsors and my own in the future and I now own 100% of my show. So there is a mixed bag that will hopefully blossom.

                        In 2008 I am sad to see and hear podcasters selling out for much less than they are worth. In many cases an advertisement will be in your show for life. I had one company offer to pay me 7 dollars for a link on my site. A link that had to be permanent, and more insane things that totally devalued my listeners and visitors to my website. While I have made decent money using affiliate marketing and podcasting, I am bummed that so many people want to use the CPM method which only works if you have mammoth audiences. Which leads to me one of my biggest disappointments

                        In April I was told that Podango was working on fixing their show builder lite software that helps you create your podcast on the fly. Then if you get a new sponsor, the new sponsor is inserted into the back catalog. This is HUGE for people trying to sell advertising . While their system is easy, and if you have the time to republish all your old shows  - it work, but I'm frustrated that their system (which from what I understand was much more fragile than expected when they purchased it from Gigavox). I'm even more frustrated that no company has developed a competitor for the podcaster with a few hundred listeners, and would love to have a dynamic version of their podcast.

                        I like that the uber-hype of podcasting has crescendo'ed to a bit and people are realizating that in the same way that VCR's didn't kill the movie business, Podcasting is not killing radio. People are starting to understand that Podcasting is a phenomenal channel (just like email, fax, and print) to get your message out to the world. It also is probably one of the most effective and cheapest.

                        I disliked that when the economy took a hit that I had members of the School of Podcasting left. However, I did like that in the midst of the panic, more companies hired me as a podcast consultant to just "do it for them." While I don't own an iPhone, I am very happy people can download a podcast without even being near a computer. This is HUGE.

                        My biggest dislike was having three websites hacked, and one gmail account hacked (that for the record I've know been without for 14 days)

                        My biggest like was emailing, communicating, tweeting, with great people like you, and the members of the School of Podcasting.

                        I recently updated all of our wordpres tutorials to show version 2.7 and in the process streamlined much of the learning curve at the School of Podcasting. If you've been thinking of signing up, now would be a great time. Don't forget about that coupon code SANTA to save 25% now through the end of the year. There will be no extension.

                        I want to thank each and everyone of you for listening, and contributing over this year. I would deeply appreciate your feedback at dave "at" schoolofpodcasitng.com or call in your comments at 888-563-3228 or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact for the many other ways of chiming in with the podcast. I would love to hear your thoughts on 2008. Comment out at the blog, and let me know.

                        Speaking of that, I will be taking next week off and I will be switching my feed from one website to another. Now the good news is 99% of you have subscribed to my feedburner feed and shouldn't notice any change. All I'm doing is switching the original RSS feed (which came from Libsyn) and substituting my RSS feed from the School of Podcasting. I've migrated all of my old posts and when you go to shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com you will now go to the School of Podcasting instead of the old Libsyn site. In doing this I've already seen an increase in traffic to my site. Hopefully it won't cause any issues with you my loyal subscribers.

                        Thanks to all. Have a safe and happy Chrsitmas season, and have a blessed new year. Please start living a life worth podcasting about, and until 2009 - class dismissed. 

                        ]]>Here are my likes and dislikes of 2008

                        In 2008 I was glad to see the enhancements of great tools for podcasters. Wizzard put out their new player, and Paul Colligan and crew continue to add more features to premiumcast.

                        I like the fact that in 2008 whenever I spoke to a group and ask "Who has ever heard of podcasting" almost all hands were raised, and almost as many when I would ask "How many have actually listened to a podcast?" That trend is continuing.

                        I disliked that in 2008 my audience didn't seem to grow as fast as it did in 2007. It was a slower, gradually climb as apposed to 2007 which had more spikes. On the other hand I'm doing less to promote my shows.

                        In 2008 Podshow changed their name to Mevio, and changed their payment plan to me. I can't discuss the details, but as I'm listing it as a dislike you can figure out how it affectd me financially. What I do like about Mevio is they have given me the potential to earn more money using their sponsors and my own in the future and I now own 100% of my show. So there is a mixed bag that will hopefully blossom.

                        In 2008 I am sad to see and hear podcasters selling out for much less than they are worth. In many cases an advertisement will be in your show for life. I had one company offer to pay me 7 dollars for a link on my site. A link that had to be permanent, and more insane things that totally devalued my listeners and visitors to my website. While I have made decent money using affiliate marketing and podcasting, I am bummed that so many people want to use the CPM method which only works if you have mammoth audiences. Which leads to me one of my biggest disappointments

                        In April I was told that Podango was working on fixing their show builder lite software that helps you create your podcast on the fly. Then if you get a new sponsor, the new sponsor is inserted into the back catalog. This is HUGE for people trying to sell advertising . While their system is easy, and if you have the time to republish all your old shows  - it work, but I'm frustrated that their system (which from what I understand was much more fragile than expected when they purchased it from Gigavox). I'm even more frustrated that no company has developed a competitor for the podcaster with a few hundred listeners, and would love to have a dynamic version of their podcast.

                        I like that the uber-hype of podcasting has crescendo'ed to a bit and people are realizating that in the same way that VCR's didn't kill the movie business, Podcasting is not killing radio. People are starting to understand that Podcasting is a phenomenal channel (just like email, fax, and print) to get your message out to the world. It also is probably one of the most effective and cheapest.

                        I disliked that when the economy took a hit that I had members of the School of Podcasting left. However, I did like that in the midst of the panic, more companies hired me as a podcast consultant to just "do it for them." While I don't own an iPhone, I am very happy people can download a podcast without even being near a computer. This is HUGE.

                        My biggest dislike was having three websites hacked, and one gmail account hacked (that for the record I've know been without for 14 days)

                        My biggest like was emailing, communicating, tweeting, with great people like you, and the members of the School of Podcasting.

                        I recently updated all of our wordpres tutorials to show version 2.7 and in the process streamlined much of the learning curve at the School of Podcasting. If you've been thinking of signing up, now would be a great time. Don't forget about that coupon code SANTA to save 25% now through the end of the year. There will be no extension.

                        I want to thank each and everyone of you for listening, and contributing over this year. I would deeply appreciate your feedback at dave "at" schoolofpodcasitng.com or call in your comments at 888-563-3228 or go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contact for the many other ways of chiming in with the podcast. I would love to hear your thoughts on 2008. Comment out at the blog, and let me know.

                        Speaking of that, I will be taking next week off and I will be switching my feed from one website to another. Now the good news is 99% of you have subscribed to my feedburner feed and shouldn't notice any change. All I'm doing is switching the original RSS feed (which came from Libsyn) and substituting my RSS feed from the School of Podcasting. I've migrated all of my old posts and when you go to shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com you will now go to the School of Podcasting instead of the old Libsyn site. In doing this I've already seen an increase in traffic to my site. Hopefully it won't cause any issues with you my loyal subscribers.

                        Thanks to all. Have a safe and happy Chrsitmas season, and have a blessed new year. Please start living a life worth podcasting about, and until 2009 - class dismissed. 

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=415966#Wed, 24 Dec 2008 05:36:00 -040018:39falsefull167167My Gmail Has Been HijackedThis show originated from www.schoolofpodcasting.com where you can save 25% off using the coupon code "SANTA" now through the end of the year. My Gmail Account Was Hijacked.I was very surprised when I couldn't login to my gmail account that I've had for two+ years. Confused, I went through the hassle of having my password sent to me. The problem was when I went through this step it sent my password to an email address that wasn't mine. Huh? That's right I had lost control of my gmail account. Now when I go through the procedures to have my account returned, I get this message from Google, "Thank you for your report. For account security, we limit the number of requests that can be processed about the same account. Please wait a few days and try filling out the form again. " I loved the Gmail service, but sometimes you get what you pay for. Thanks google can you be a little more vague? In the meantime I've set up a new email (connected to my website) and a feature where people can upload audio comments.  See it all at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contactWordpress TipIf you have a large archive, go into your widget and have it displayed as a drop down menu. This tip came from Dave Moyer of the Wordcast Podcast at www.wordcastpodcast.comNew Listener Surveyhttp://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
                        ]]>This show originated from www.schoolofpodcasting.com where you can save 25% off using the coupon code "SANTA" now through the end of the year. My Gmail Account Was Hijacked.I was very surprised when I couldn't login to my gmail account that I've had for two+ years. Confused, I went through the hassle of having my password sent to me. The problem was when I went through this step it sent my password to an email address that wasn't mine. Huh? That's right I had lost control of my gmail account. Now when I go through the procedures to have my account returned, I get this message from Google, "Thank you for your report. For account security, we limit the number of requests that can be processed about the same account. Please wait a few days and try filling out the form again. " I loved the Gmail service, but sometimes you get what you pay for. Thanks google can you be a little more vague? In the meantime I've set up a new email (connected to my website) and a feature where people can upload audio comments.  See it all at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/contactWordpress TipIf you have a large archive, go into your widget and have it displayed as a drop down menu. This tip came from Dave Moyer of the Wordcast Podcast at www.wordcastpodcast.comNew Listener Surveyhttp://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/survey
                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=413051#Mon, 15 Dec 2008 02:55:00 -040011:31falsefull6666DBX 286A Reviewedwww.schoolofpodcasting.com This is show number 146Today I play with my new DBX 286A compressor/deesser/enahncer/noise gate that I bought from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/bsw I really like it (its around 200, I got it for $150).Previously I was using a Behringer Composer Pro XL which I got for $99I typically by my gear from Same Day Music as there is often free shipping, and (unless in New Jersey) no tax. If I can't find the product there I go to BSW When playing with new gear don't be afraid to twist knobs and see what sounds better. Likewise don't always judge what you hear live, but listen back through your stereo (so you can pay attention to listening only and not talking). I'm really happy with the unit except its mono, and there is no on/off switch (no big deal). LAST 5 IN 5 From Dan Lewis at http://www.theramennoodle.com/ and www.djoseophdesign.com 1. Podcast Answer Man - www.podcastanswerman.com2. Sci Fi Show www.scifishow.com 3. Woot www.woot.com 4. The Onion Radio News Network - http://www.theonion.com/content/radionews5. Journey Inside my Mind - http://jimmpodcast.blogspot.com/If you are ready to start your own podcast, come and visit us at www.schoolofpodcasting.com ]]>www.schoolofpodcasting.com This is show number 146Today I play with my new DBX 286A compressor/deesser/enahncer/noise gate that I bought from www.schoolofpodcasting.com/bsw I really like it (its around 200, I got it for $150).Previously I was using a Behringer Composer Pro XL which I got for $99I typically by my gear from Same Day Music as there is often free shipping, and (unless in New Jersey) no tax. If I can't find the product there I go to BSW When playing with new gear don't be afraid to twist knobs and see what sounds better. Likewise don't always judge what you hear live, but listen back through your stereo (so you can pay attention to listening only and not talking). I'm really happy with the unit except its mono, and there is no on/off switch (no big deal). LAST 5 IN 5 From Dan Lewis at http://www.theramennoodle.com/ and www.djoseophdesign.com 1. Podcast Answer Man - www.podcastanswerman.com2. Sci Fi Show www.scifishow.com 3. Woot www.woot.com 4. The Onion Radio News Network - http://www.theonion.com/content/radionews5. Journey Inside my Mind - http://jimmpodcast.blogspot.com/If you are ready to start your own podcast, come and visit us at www.schoolofpodcasting.com ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=363362#Mon, 28 Jul 2008 21:09:00 -040013:09falsefull146146Flip Video Camera ReviewedToday I dip my toe into the Video Podcasting pool. I was lucky enough to secure one of the new Flip Video Cameras.

                        This camera takes great video no matter what lighting you put it in (if you have extreme back lighting it may be a little dark, but let's be realistic..). I took video at dusk and it looked much brighter than it actually was in real life.

                        The great thing is you can take up to 60 minutes of video. It has a rewing and fast forward on the camera for reviewing the video. You can easily delete video that you don't want to keep. It also has a built in 2X zoom. It runs on a rechargable battery that gets charged when you plug the camera into your USB port. The USB interface pops out when you flip a switch. It also has the ability to be put on a tripod. The microphone pics up audio great from the front, and while it's not as clear from the back its still easily understood if you are commenting from behind the camera while shooting video.

                        If I had used my old camera I would record to super 8, then have to transfer the video to my computer. So if I shot 60 minutes of video it would take (roughly) 60 minutes of time to transfer to my computer.

                        With the Flip camera, I plug the camera into my computer, and I can drag and drop the files into my favorite editing program. This took about 3 minutes instead of 60 with my old camera.  If you don't have editing software, there are some basic video editing software that comes with the camera that allows you to pick where the video starts and stops as well as you can put background music to the video.

                        It also has some features that make uploading video to you tube uber easy.

                        So what would I change? I like that you can plug it into a video source (like a TV) to watch the video. I do wish I could plug it in and use the TV as a monitor. You can't do this. When you record, the video is only display on the display on the back of the camera. The other thing I would change is to put a retractable lens cover. The camera comes with a "nifty" puch to carry the camera, but I would rather have a lense cover. My last thing (and this is kind of outside the scope of the product) would be to have the ability to use it as a web cam. That's not really a fair criticism. It's more of a "add to the dream list."

                        It retails for around $139. For me, if you're looking to get into video podcasting, and you want to be mobile, you're looking to do something fast and quick, it's a no brainer. I know I will be doing all sorts of "Dave around town" types of videos. If you're are going to want to mix in music, or plug a microphone directly into it, then you will need to look for another camera, and hit a bank machine, on the way to Best Buy.

                        Check it the Flip Mino Video Camera at Amazon.com

                        ]]>Today I dip my toe into the Video Podcasting pool. I was lucky enough to secure one of the new Flip Video Cameras.

                        This camera takes great video no matter what lighting you put it in (if you have extreme back lighting it may be a little dark, but let's be realistic..). I took video at dusk and it looked much brighter than it actually was in real life.

                        The great thing is you can take up to 60 minutes of video. It has a rewing and fast forward on the camera for reviewing the video. You can easily delete video that you don't want to keep. It also has a built in 2X zoom. It runs on a rechargable battery that gets charged when you plug the camera into your USB port. The USB interface pops out when you flip a switch. It also has the ability to be put on a tripod. The microphone pics up audio great from the front, and while it's not as clear from the back its still easily understood if you are commenting from behind the camera while shooting video.

                        If I had used my old camera I would record to super 8, then have to transfer the video to my computer. So if I shot 60 minutes of video it would take (roughly) 60 minutes of time to transfer to my computer.

                        With the Flip camera, I plug the camera into my computer, and I can drag and drop the files into my favorite editing program. This took about 3 minutes instead of 60 with my old camera.  If you don't have editing software, there are some basic video editing software that comes with the camera that allows you to pick where the video starts and stops as well as you can put background music to the video.

                        It also has some features that make uploading video to you tube uber easy.

                        So what would I change? I like that you can plug it into a video source (like a TV) to watch the video. I do wish I could plug it in and use the TV as a monitor. You can't do this. When you record, the video is only display on the display on the back of the camera. The other thing I would change is to put a retractable lens cover. The camera comes with a "nifty" puch to carry the camera, but I would rather have a lense cover. My last thing (and this is kind of outside the scope of the product) would be to have the ability to use it as a web cam. That's not really a fair criticism. It's more of a "add to the dream list."

                        It retails for around $139. For me, if you're looking to get into video podcasting, and you want to be mobile, you're looking to do something fast and quick, it's a no brainer. I know I will be doing all sorts of "Dave around town" types of videos. If you're are going to want to mix in music, or plug a microphone directly into it, then you will need to look for another camera, and hit a bank machine, on the way to Best Buy.

                        Check it the Flip Mino Video Camera at Amazon.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=360470#Tue, 22 Jul 2008 02:58:00 -040006:30falsefull145145Podcast Promotion - What are YOU Doing?Paul Colligan has a great post about building a podcast audience. So many people "If I build it they will come." Not so. Get ready for relentless marketing.

                        Today I talk about www.prweb.com and other ways to build that audience. It amounts to this:

                        1. Find out who your audience is (put a form on your website).

                        2. Find out where they go, read, eat, sleep, shop, etc

                        3. Go there and tell them about it.

                        HOW ARE YOU PROMOTING YOUR PODCAST?

                        Ready to jump in the Podcast Pool? Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com and start podcasting today. We have step by step tutorials, live help, and great resources.

                        ]]>Paul Colligan has a great post about building a podcast audience. So many people "If I build it they will come." Not so. Get ready for relentless marketing.

                        Today I talk about www.prweb.com and other ways to build that audience. It amounts to this:

                        1. Find out who your audience is (put a form on your website).

                        2. Find out where they go, read, eat, sleep, shop, etc

                        3. Go there and tell them about it.

                        HOW ARE YOU PROMOTING YOUR PODCAST?

                        Ready to jump in the Podcast Pool? Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com and start podcasting today. We have step by step tutorials, live help, and great resources.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=358806#Mon, 14 Jul 2008 19:01:00 -040018:09falsefull144144Podcaster Wins 10,000 Prizeblog how Terry Fallis won 10,000. He previously couldn't get an agent (which he now has). Congrats Terry. I mentioned today that Todd Cochrane had said a typical podcast episode is "done" after 72 hours. I miss spoke, while this is true in most  cases it is not in all cases (especially if you material is not timed based). But if your podcast is (for example) news related, people may not want to listen to 6 month old news stories. You can hear Todd's presentation at Podcamp by going to  http://www.coefficientmedia.com/podcampohio/ Thanks to George from www.oneminutehowto.com for reminding me of this point. The CEO of Wizzard Media is predicting 1.5 - 1.8 billion downloads, and double to four times the ad spending of the past year for 2008. (source: podcastnews.com )How Do You Record a Skype Interview?In the past I've said "get it off your computer" and use a portable recorder. This still  is the safest way. However, I've been using voiceemotion.com and many people at the School of Podcasting are using Power Gramo which you can download for a free trial. The nice thing about Power Gramo Professional is it splits the interviewer and interviewee into separate channels (which makes editing the interview easier). I then use Skype (using Skype Out) to call people's phones. It's better if they have a skype account, but not 100% mecessary Skype is Not Always an OptionIn some areas there is no cable modem connection to the Internet. What do you do in that case is get some sort of "JK Audio" product. You can find these at BSW. These can be expensive. For microphones and such I like samedaymusic.com as they do not charge tax (unless you are in NJ). Podcasting Time Saving TipOne of the most time consuming parts of podcasting is organizing and posting your show notes. Did you know that you can put your show notes in Wordpress (or Libsyn.com) and save them without publishing them to the public. Then when the show is finished, you can take out any part of your notes that don't fit, and BOOM! instant show notes. The key to this is to NOT click the publish button, but to click the SAVE button. Then when you are rady (and your audio/video is link to the post) click the publish button. ]]>blog how Terry Fallis won 10,000. He previously couldn't get an agent (which he now has). Congrats Terry. I mentioned today that Todd Cochrane had said a typical podcast episode is "done" after 72 hours. I miss spoke, while this is true in most  cases it is not in all cases (especially if you material is not timed based). But if your podcast is (for example) news related, people may not want to listen to 6 month old news stories. You can hear Todd's presentation at Podcamp by going to  http://www.coefficientmedia.com/podcampohio/ Thanks to George from www.oneminutehowto.com for reminding me of this point. The CEO of Wizzard Media is predicting 1.5 - 1.8 billion downloads, and double to four times the ad spending of the past year for 2008. (source: podcastnews.com )How Do You Record a Skype Interview?In the past I've said "get it off your computer" and use a portable recorder. This still  is the safest way. However, I've been using voiceemotion.com and many people at the School of Podcasting are using Power Gramo which you can download for a free trial. The nice thing about Power Gramo Professional is it splits the interviewer and interviewee into separate channels (which makes editing the interview easier). I then use Skype (using Skype Out) to call people's phones. It's better if they have a skype account, but not 100% mecessary Skype is Not Always an OptionIn some areas there is no cable modem connection to the Internet. What do you do in that case is get some sort of "JK Audio" product. You can find these at BSW. These can be expensive. For microphones and such I like samedaymusic.com as they do not charge tax (unless you are in NJ). Podcasting Time Saving TipOne of the most time consuming parts of podcasting is organizing and posting your show notes. Did you know that you can put your show notes in Wordpress (or Libsyn.com) and save them without publishing them to the public. Then when the show is finished, you can take out any part of your notes that don't fit, and BOOM! instant show notes. The key to this is to NOT click the publish button, but to click the SAVE button. Then when you are rady (and your audio/video is link to the post) click the publish button. ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=356667#Mon, 07 Jul 2008 21:07:00 -040018:31falsefull143143Podcamp Ohio Relections and Membership Siteswww.premiumcast.com and after watching his presentation I was able to set up a membership site in about 5 minutes. The great thing is some membership scripts allow you to make a "roped off" area, and others allow you to create premium RSS feeds, and premium cast allows you to do either or both. Check it out at premiumcast.com ]]>www.premiumcast.com and after watching his presentation I was able to set up a membership site in about 5 minutes. The great thing is some membership scripts allow you to make a "roped off" area, and others allow you to create premium RSS feeds, and premium cast allows you to do either or both. Check it out at premiumcast.com ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=354543#Tue, 01 Jul 2008 00:42:00 -040013:44falsefull142142Listening To Podcast Still GrowingToday I've got a BAD cold, and my throat is killing me. I share some stats from the latest report on Podcast consumers.

                        Podcast Listening is up 5 % both video and Audio30% of regular Internet Users have downloaded a podcastVideo is catching audio podcasts with a 1 % lead going to Audio

                        What is the age of the podcast listener?53% Male 47% female25 to 34 (21%) 35-44 (21%), 45 to 54 (20%) 12 to 17 (15%) 18 to 24 (13%) 55+ (10%)

                        Last 5 in 5 from Dan at www.jimmpodcast.com

                        School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements (this podcast)Marketing Over Coffee ( http://www.marketingovercoffee.com/ )Eds Mixed Bag (www.edsmixedbag.com )Media Bullseye (www.mediabullseye.com )Six Pixels of Separatation (http://www.twistimage.com/blog/ )

                        ]]>Today I've got a BAD cold, and my throat is killing me. I share some stats from the latest report on Podcast consumers.

                        Podcast Listening is up 5 % both video and Audio30% of regular Internet Users have downloaded a podcastVideo is catching audio podcasts with a 1 % lead going to Audio

                        What is the age of the podcast listener?53% Male 47% female25 to 34 (21%) 35-44 (21%), 45 to 54 (20%) 12 to 17 (15%) 18 to 24 (13%) 55+ (10%)

                        Last 5 in 5 from Dan at www.jimmpodcast.com

                        School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements (this podcast)Marketing Over Coffee ( http://www.marketingovercoffee.com/ )Eds Mixed Bag (www.edsmixedbag.com )Media Bullseye (www.mediabullseye.com )Six Pixels of Separatation (http://www.twistimage.com/blog/ )

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=350014#Mon, 16 Jun 2008 13:33:00 -040009:56falsefull141141Using Google Analytics to Obtain Wordpress StatsThis show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        PODCAST CRASHINGIf you are using a live podcast system like talkshoe.com you need to be prepared to keep your show on track. I've listened to a few live podcasts, and someone will come in and "Crash" your podcast and start talking about their podcast which is completely unrelated. YOUR LISTENER  doesn't want to hear about their podcast. I've heard podcasts that get completely derailed. Don't forget to keep yoru listener in mind, and be assertive, and point out that the "Crasher" is off topic.

                        Testimonial from J.R. Stanley of www.llmlive.com

                        Meet the MembersToday we meet one of the members of the School of Podcasting. It's Mark Wade of the www.a1artistspotlight.com Mark is using the Alesis Multimix 8 USB mixer (but he doesn't use the USB feature). He is also using an Audio Techniica 2020 and the free Levelator software.

                        Using Google Analytics to Obtain Wordpress Stats

                        Today we are talking about Google Analytics which you can find at

                        http://www.google.com/analytics/ and a great plugin for Worpdress that makes it very easy to install Google Analytics code into your blog.

                        http://wordpress.org/extend/plugins/wp-google-analytics/

                        When you sign up for Google Analytics, you end up with a piece of code that you would normally put on every page of yrou website. With the wordpress plugin, you place it into the plugin and the plugin puts it on every page of your site. I will be producing a video on how to set this up for members of the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                         

                        ]]>This show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        PODCAST CRASHINGIf you are using a live podcast system like talkshoe.com you need to be prepared to keep your show on track. I've listened to a few live podcasts, and someone will come in and "Crash" your podcast and start talking about their podcast which is completely unrelated. YOUR LISTENER  doesn't want to hear about their podcast. I've heard podcasts that get completely derailed. Don't forget to keep yoru listener in mind, and be assertive, and point out that the "Crasher" is off topic.

                        Testimonial from J.R. Stanley of www.llmlive.com

                        Meet the MembersToday we meet one of the members of the School of Podcasting. It's Mark Wade of the www.a1artistspotlight.com Mark is using the Alesis Multimix 8 USB mixer (but he doesn't use the USB feature). He is also using an Audio Techniica 2020 and the free Levelator software.

                        Using Google Analytics to Obtain Wordpress Stats

                        Today we are talking about Google Analytics which you can find at

                        http://www.google.com/analytics/ and a great plugin for Worpdress that makes it very easy to install Google Analytics code into your blog.

                        http://wordpress.org/extend/plugins/wp-google-analytics/

                        When you sign up for Google Analytics, you end up with a piece of code that you would normally put on every page of yrou website. With the wordpress plugin, you place it into the plugin and the plugin puts it on every page of your site. I will be producing a video on how to set this up for members of the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=347887#Mon, 09 Jun 2008 12:34:00 -040017:29falsefull140140My Podcast Downloads up 98%This show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I look at my stats from the first episode of 2007 vs the first episode of 2008. To make things fair, the first show published in 2007 has had 517 days to download so I divded the 2007 by 517. The numbers for 2008 were divided by 152 (as this is June 1).

                        School of Podcasting 2007 1400 Downloads (2.7 a day)School of Podcasting 2008 801 Downloads (5.3 a day)

                        Musicians Cooler 2007 1689 Downloads (3.3 a day)Musicians Cooler 2008 1032 Downloads (6.8 a day)

                        Building a Better Dave 2007 1617 Downloads (3.1 a day)Building a Better Dave 2008 915 Downloads (6.0 a day)

                        This averages to an increase of 98% from 2007 to 2008

                         

                        I also looked at my stats from the now podfaded Podcast Promo Show.

                        It seemed that Libsyn numbers were higher by about 29% than Feedburner numbers. Here are some examplesFeedburner showed 29 downloads to Libsyn's 34Feedburner showed 27 downloads to Libsyn's 37Feedburner showed 30 downloads to Libsyn's 47

                        So the range of my 57 shows was from 13% - 57%

                        My conclusion? Pick one and go with it. I use Libsyn cause in theory "Everything comes back to the host." I like their stats, and I can get stats without involving another redirect to my mp3 file.

                         

                        If you are looking for more informatoin about visitors to your blog check out the Google Analytics Plugin for Wordpress .

                         

                        If you're interested in participating in our weekly roundtables check out www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                         

                        ]]>This show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I look at my stats from the first episode of 2007 vs the first episode of 2008. To make things fair, the first show published in 2007 has had 517 days to download so I divded the 2007 by 517. The numbers for 2008 were divided by 152 (as this is June 1).

                        School of Podcasting 2007 1400 Downloads (2.7 a day)School of Podcasting 2008 801 Downloads (5.3 a day)

                        Musicians Cooler 2007 1689 Downloads (3.3 a day)Musicians Cooler 2008 1032 Downloads (6.8 a day)

                        Building a Better Dave 2007 1617 Downloads (3.1 a day)Building a Better Dave 2008 915 Downloads (6.0 a day)

                        This averages to an increase of 98% from 2007 to 2008

                         

                        I also looked at my stats from the now podfaded Podcast Promo Show.

                        It seemed that Libsyn numbers were higher by about 29% than Feedburner numbers. Here are some examplesFeedburner showed 29 downloads to Libsyn's 34Feedburner showed 27 downloads to Libsyn's 37Feedburner showed 30 downloads to Libsyn's 47

                        So the range of my 57 shows was from 13% - 57%

                        My conclusion? Pick one and go with it. I use Libsyn cause in theory "Everything comes back to the host." I like their stats, and I can get stats without involving another redirect to my mp3 file.

                         

                        If you are looking for more informatoin about visitors to your blog check out the Google Analytics Plugin for Wordpress .

                         

                        If you're interested in participating in our weekly roundtables check out www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=345295#Sun, 01 Jun 2008 19:27:00 -040014:16falsefull139139Add to Any Promotional PluginToday I give thanks for all who have paid for my freedom, and we get some emails from folks like 

                        Emails from

                        ://OneMinuteHowTo.comhttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://DRiPInvesting.orghttp://GLSmyth.com - blog: http://GLSmyth.WordPress.com

                        and

                        Jeff Roneyhttp://www.roneyzone.comTwitter: twitter.com/roneyzone

                        Check out our new Video and More Show,Magical Definition TV Episode 2http://mdtv2.roneyzone.com

                        New World Army, a futuristic audio thrillerhttp://nwarmy.roneyzone.com

                        Our Lost TV On-Location Videoshttp://lost.roneyzone.com

                        I also talk about some widgets that are pretty cool for your blog. You can find them at www.addtoany.com Jeff is using https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/1730 to post to multiple blogs at the same time.

                        ]]>Today I give thanks for all who have paid for my freedom, and we get some emails from folks like 

                        Emails from

                        ://OneMinuteHowTo.comhttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://DRiPInvesting.orghttp://GLSmyth.com - blog: http://GLSmyth.WordPress.com

                        and

                        Jeff Roneyhttp://www.roneyzone.comTwitter: twitter.com/roneyzone

                        Check out our new Video and More Show,Magical Definition TV Episode 2http://mdtv2.roneyzone.com

                        New World Army, a futuristic audio thrillerhttp://nwarmy.roneyzone.com

                        Our Lost TV On-Location Videoshttp://lost.roneyzone.com

                        I also talk about some widgets that are pretty cool for your blog. You can find them at www.addtoany.com Jeff is using https://addons.mozilla.org/en-US/firefox/addon/1730 to post to multiple blogs at the same time.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=342527#Fri, 23 May 2008 20:29:00 -040010:12falsefull138138Time Shifted InterviewsAre you just getting started? Are you ready to launch a successful podcast? Check out our new Quick Start Package at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/quickstart

                        You get:6 month subscription $1201 year blog hosting at www.coolerwebsites.com  $24Wordpress Blog Set up and cusomitzation - $160Intro/Outro Recording $80

                        All this for $299 Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/quickstart

                        Back Catalog - Is Anybody Listening To Old Shows?My first Show "First Podcasts Always Stink" that were recorded back in October of 2005 have been downloaded 106 times in May of 08, 159 in April of 08, 154 in March of 08, 131 in February of 08. (That episode has been dowloaded 2947 total).

                        Meet the MembersBrian from www.dimacast.com suggested we get to know the members of the School of Podcasting, so today we meet J.R. Stanley of www.lordliftedme.com and the podcast www.lmllive.com

                        J.R. is using a Sure KSM27 Microphone and an Edirol UA4FX USB Interface which he likes for the tube emulation.

                        The Interview We Did Today with J.R. was actually "Time Shifted Interview" where I send a question, he records an answer. We repeat to fill in a quick "Meet The Members" section.

                         

                        ]]>Are you just getting started? Are you ready to launch a successful podcast? Check out our new Quick Start Package at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/quickstart

                        You get:6 month subscription $1201 year blog hosting at www.coolerwebsites.com  $24Wordpress Blog Set up and cusomitzation - $160Intro/Outro Recording $80

                        All this for $299 Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/quickstart

                        Back Catalog - Is Anybody Listening To Old Shows?My first Show "First Podcasts Always Stink" that were recorded back in October of 2005 have been downloaded 106 times in May of 08, 159 in April of 08, 154 in March of 08, 131 in February of 08. (That episode has been dowloaded 2947 total).

                        Meet the MembersBrian from www.dimacast.com suggested we get to know the members of the School of Podcasting, so today we meet J.R. Stanley of www.lordliftedme.com and the podcast www.lmllive.com

                        J.R. is using a Sure KSM27 Microphone and an Edirol UA4FX USB Interface which he likes for the tube emulation.

                        The Interview We Did Today with J.R. was actually "Time Shifted Interview" where I send a question, he records an answer. We repeat to fill in a quick "Meet The Members" section.

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=341070#Mon, 19 May 2008 20:13:00 -040011:19falsefull137137Free Wordpress TipsToday’s episode comes from our weekly meetings that we have at the School of Podcasting. The question is what is the difference between a post and a page in Wordpress?

                         A post will be at the top of your blog until you enter another post. A page is something you enter and it can only be viewed if you link to it. (There is a way to have it show up on the front age by going to settings > reading and choosing to have the page be “static” on the front page.

                         Why Wordpress? It creates an RSS feed for you, and IT’S FREE. If you need an inexpensive host for Wordpress check out www.coolerwebsites.com

                         LISTENER FEEDBACK – NO AGE LIMIT TO PODCASTINGFred from http://www.strugglingentrepreneur.com/ aggrees that there is no age limit to podcasting. He is 59, and he encourages all “baby boomers” to get involved with podcasting. Fred uses my www.podcastfastpass.com service to set up his blogs at www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com  (and more projects coming).

                        ]]>Today’s episode comes from our weekly meetings that we have at the School of Podcasting. The question is what is the difference between a post and a page in Wordpress?

                         A post will be at the top of your blog until you enter another post. A page is something you enter and it can only be viewed if you link to it. (There is a way to have it show up on the front age by going to settings > reading and choosing to have the page be “static” on the front page.

                         Why Wordpress? It creates an RSS feed for you, and IT’S FREE. If you need an inexpensive host for Wordpress check out www.coolerwebsites.com

                         LISTENER FEEDBACK – NO AGE LIMIT TO PODCASTINGFred from http://www.strugglingentrepreneur.com/ aggrees that there is no age limit to podcasting. He is 59, and he encourages all “baby boomers” to get involved with podcasting. Fred uses my www.podcastfastpass.com service to set up his blogs at www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com  (and more projects coming).

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=338389#Mon, 12 May 2008 05:56:00 -040012:55falsefull136136Wordpress 2.5 BugsThis show (download show) was originally recorded last week 4/25. In the hussle and bustle, I never published it. You can read about my "Passing out" at BetterDave.com

                        Audience FeedbackVince from  www.bmoviecast.com agrees that you are never too old to podcast (as he is a baby boomer).

                        Audacity Feedback?Steve from www.djideasharing.com does not use Audacity, but ubercaster (for the mac) had him losing an episode.

                        Blog Views and Blues www.blogsviewsandblues.comThis is a new podcast from Rich Palmer (www.richpalmer.com ) and he turned me on to www.springwidgets.com

                        Wordpress 2.5 BugsIn working with the bugs, I can seem to get the image media manager to work. If i'm lucky enough to get an image to upload without error, I can't get to a screen to where I can insert it into the post. I did find I was able to to do this if I stopped using Internet Explorer and switched to Firefox and it worked. So if you are a big IE fan, then you may not want to update just yet. I've been using the Image Manager plugin.

                        More Fun Toolswww.twirl.org is a desktop Twitter tool. It works on both Mac and PC.

                        From www.celticmythpodcast.com an easy to customize wordpress theme at http://wpthemepark.com/themes/paalam/ It makes it very easy to turn on or off the text on yruo header (as well as upload a custom header. It's widget ready, and if know a little html, its easy to tweak the colors. If you need help with the "technical stuff" please see me at www.podcastfastpass.com

                        ]]>This show (download show) was originally recorded last week 4/25. In the hussle and bustle, I never published it. You can read about my "Passing out" at BetterDave.com

                        Audience FeedbackVince from  www.bmoviecast.com agrees that you are never too old to podcast (as he is a baby boomer).

                        Audacity Feedback?Steve from www.djideasharing.com does not use Audacity, but ubercaster (for the mac) had him losing an episode.

                        Blog Views and Blues www.blogsviewsandblues.comThis is a new podcast from Rich Palmer (www.richpalmer.com ) and he turned me on to www.springwidgets.com

                        Wordpress 2.5 BugsIn working with the bugs, I can seem to get the image media manager to work. If i'm lucky enough to get an image to upload without error, I can't get to a screen to where I can insert it into the post. I did find I was able to to do this if I stopped using Internet Explorer and switched to Firefox and it worked. So if you are a big IE fan, then you may not want to update just yet. I've been using the Image Manager plugin.

                        More Fun Toolswww.twirl.org is a desktop Twitter tool. It works on both Mac and PC.

                        From www.celticmythpodcast.com an easy to customize wordpress theme at http://wpthemepark.com/themes/paalam/ It makes it very easy to turn on or off the text on yruo header (as well as upload a custom header. It's widget ready, and if know a little html, its easy to tweak the colors. If you need help with the "technical stuff" please see me at www.podcastfastpass.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=335744#Sun, 04 May 2008 22:56:00 -040016:30falsefull135135Producing Video Podcasts AuthorsToday we talk with Richard Harrington and Mark Weiser authors of the book Producing Video Podcasts: A Guide for Media Professionals.

                        If you are a audio podcaster looking to get into video, it can help those looking to do it on a shoe string budget or the person looking to invest some big time equipment.

                        For more information about the Authors and the book go to www.vidpodcaster.com

                        The book is available at Amazon.com

                         

                        ]]>Today we talk with Richard Harrington and Mark Weiser authors of the book Producing Video Podcasts: A Guide for Media Professionals.

                        If you are a audio podcaster looking to get into video, it can help those looking to do it on a shoe string budget or the person looking to invest some big time equipment.

                        For more information about the Authors and the book go to www.vidpodcaster.com

                        The book is available at Amazon.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=330803#Mon, 21 Apr 2008 04:43:00 -040001:00:23falsefull134134Scott Sigler and Podcasting For AuthorsToday we talk with Scott Sigler who was the first person to have a Podcast only novel. People became addicted to it as the only way to get it was through his podcast. Later he published this book (Earthcore) and a second book (which went to #2 at Amazon.com) and he continues to write and release books (giving the ENTIRE BOOK away in a podcast with each release). His latest book Infected was given away as a pdf prior to its release? Did it effect sales? Nope. Once again Scott was at the top of his genre.

                        In this interview Scott talks about how he got the word out about his novel/podcast, why it makes sense to give it your book away, and how you can use podcasting to start your own word of mouth campaign.

                        For more information about Scott go to www.scottsigler.com You can buy his latest book inftected at amazon.com

                        You can see how he is utilizing social media like MySpace, Facebook, and YouTube below.

                        To join the school of Podcasting go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Today we talk with Scott Sigler who was the first person to have a Podcast only novel. People became addicted to it as the only way to get it was through his podcast. Later he published this book (Earthcore) and a second book (which went to #2 at Amazon.com) and he continues to write and release books (giving the ENTIRE BOOK away in a podcast with each release). His latest book Infected was given away as a pdf prior to its release? Did it effect sales? Nope. Once again Scott was at the top of his genre.

                        In this interview Scott talks about how he got the word out about his novel/podcast, why it makes sense to give it your book away, and how you can use podcasting to start your own word of mouth campaign.

                        For more information about Scott go to www.scottsigler.com You can buy his latest book inftected at amazon.com

                        You can see how he is utilizing social media like MySpace, Facebook, and YouTube below.

                        To join the school of Podcasting go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=328251#Mon, 14 Apr 2008 01:18:00 -040027:35falsefull133133Too Old to Podcast? POPPYCOCK!Today I talk about some of my reflections from speaking at the Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop. I also play a promo for www.blogsviewsandblues.com 

                        TOO OLD TO PODCAST?There is no age limit on Podcasting. I know of an 8 year old who has a podcast, and I know someone who is in their 60s who is doing a podcast. So if you are saying to yourself, "I'm too old to podcast" you are robbing yourself of a great way to share your wisdom.

                        UNDERSTANDING BANDWIDTHTo understand bandwidth think of your kids or grandchildren. They may have a phone plan that covers X amount of text messages. When they go over the limit they are charged for each text message over the limit. When you have a website you are given a set amount of bandwidth measured in either megabytes or gigabytes. If you go over your limit your host will charge your, and in some cases they may shut your site down. This is why I recommend Libsyn.com www.uselibsyn.com or if you need free go to www.podshow.com

                        UNDERSTANDING STORAGEStorage for your media files is also limited. Think of storage like a filing cabinet. You can stuff more and more files in your cabinet, but eventually it will get full.

                        PODCAMP OHIOPodcamp Ohio is 6/28/08 for more information go to www.podcampohio.com

                        WHERE ARE YOUR LISTENERS?I have been talking about podcasting at podcast conventions. This really doesn't make sense if I'm trying to find people who need to learn how to podcast as most of the audience is already podcasting. I need to find people who need publicity. While I can keep up with technology at the New Media Expo, and meet all of my friends, if I want to find people interested in learning how to start  a podcast, then the New Media Expo may not be the most efficient use of my publicity dollars.

                        ]]>Today I talk about some of my reflections from speaking at the Erma Bombeck Writers Workshop. I also play a promo for www.blogsviewsandblues.com 

                        TOO OLD TO PODCAST?There is no age limit on Podcasting. I know of an 8 year old who has a podcast, and I know someone who is in their 60s who is doing a podcast. So if you are saying to yourself, "I'm too old to podcast" you are robbing yourself of a great way to share your wisdom.

                        UNDERSTANDING BANDWIDTHTo understand bandwidth think of your kids or grandchildren. They may have a phone plan that covers X amount of text messages. When they go over the limit they are charged for each text message over the limit. When you have a website you are given a set amount of bandwidth measured in either megabytes or gigabytes. If you go over your limit your host will charge your, and in some cases they may shut your site down. This is why I recommend Libsyn.com www.uselibsyn.com or if you need free go to www.podshow.com

                        UNDERSTANDING STORAGEStorage for your media files is also limited. Think of storage like a filing cabinet. You can stuff more and more files in your cabinet, but eventually it will get full.

                        PODCAMP OHIOPodcamp Ohio is 6/28/08 for more information go to www.podcampohio.com

                        WHERE ARE YOUR LISTENERS?I have been talking about podcasting at podcast conventions. This really doesn't make sense if I'm trying to find people who need to learn how to podcast as most of the audience is already podcasting. I need to find people who need publicity. While I can keep up with technology at the New Media Expo, and meet all of my friends, if I want to find people interested in learning how to start  a podcast, then the New Media Expo may not be the most efficient use of my publicity dollars.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=326091#Mon, 07 Apr 2008 16:15:00 -040023:45falsefull132132Podcast Secrets 2008 - Six Figure Incomes with PodcastingToday I explain why you had an episode show up a few days early. I also explain that I'm not going to be speaker at the Expo in Las Vegas (but will be going to Podcamp Ohio www.podcampohio.com ).

                        I also talk about post dating Podcasts and the easy mistake you can make that will have things going out immediately (oops).

                        Dave Sholes got a free month at the School of Podcasting by sigining up for the Podcast Secrets preview call at www.secretswithdave.com

                        I also share some of the tips from out weekley roundtable at the School of Podcasting (www.schoolofpodcasting.com )

                        ]]>Today I explain why you had an episode show up a few days early. I also explain that I'm not going to be speaker at the Expo in Las Vegas (but will be going to Podcamp Ohio www.podcampohio.com ).

                        I also talk about post dating Podcasts and the easy mistake you can make that will have things going out immediately (oops).

                        Dave Sholes got a free month at the School of Podcasting by sigining up for the Podcast Secrets preview call at www.secretswithdave.com

                        I also share some of the tips from out weekley roundtable at the School of Podcasting (www.schoolofpodcasting.com )

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=323055#Mon, 31 Mar 2008 01:17:00 -040010:48falsefull131131Podcast Secrets 2008 - Six Figure Incomes with PodcastingToday my friend Paul Colligan from Podcast Secrets is on the show. Paul is a full time podcast consultant and Internet Marketing guru. While we are all at work, Paul is out testing new technologies, new strategies, talking with other successful podcasters, and taking lots and lots of notes. Then once a year he offers a class (available at my partner link at www.secretswithdave.com ) where he reveals what he has learned.

                        Not sure if this call is for you? Then go to www.secretswithdave.com and find out about the call happening April 2nd (after April 2nd you can find out about the class) that gives you a preview of the information that they will be covering. This way you can decide if this class is for you. You see, Paul doesn't want you if you're not serious. This is for people looking to make a six figure income from Podcasting. He is going to be telling you how people ARE DOING THIS now (not how this might work, or this should be tired, this is how people are doing this in 2008).

                        So if you're interested sign up for the call at www.secretswithdave.com and send me confirmation and I wil lgive you a free month at the School of Podcasting. If you sign up for the class, I will give you a free year at the School of Podcasting.

                        ]]>Today my friend Paul Colligan from Podcast Secrets is on the show. Paul is a full time podcast consultant and Internet Marketing guru. While we are all at work, Paul is out testing new technologies, new strategies, talking with other successful podcasters, and taking lots and lots of notes. Then once a year he offers a class (available at my partner link at www.secretswithdave.com ) where he reveals what he has learned.

                        Not sure if this call is for you? Then go to www.secretswithdave.com and find out about the call happening April 2nd (after April 2nd you can find out about the class) that gives you a preview of the information that they will be covering. This way you can decide if this class is for you. You see, Paul doesn't want you if you're not serious. This is for people looking to make a six figure income from Podcasting. He is going to be telling you how people ARE DOING THIS now (not how this might work, or this should be tired, this is how people are doing this in 2008).

                        So if you're interested sign up for the call at www.secretswithdave.com and send me confirmation and I wil lgive you a free month at the School of Podcasting. If you sign up for the class, I will give you a free year at the School of Podcasting.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=319886#Mon, 24 Mar 2008 04:00:00 -040037:15falsefull130130USB and Audacity ReviewsShow #129 originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we get the answers from last week's poll about USB interfaces and using Audacity.

                        Thanks to:

                        Joe from www.onthepodcast.netAnthony from www.diabeticincandyland.com Mike from www.mikeshotdish.com Warren from http://pewpodcast.podomatic.comTerry from http://quiettimepodcast.com/wp and http://oldcootcast.comLarry from http://goinglinux.comSally from http://www.podcastasylum.comDaryl from http://www.poddog.ca/suburbia Jay from www.jayjennings.com creator of Cloak and Tracker

                        75% use a USB interface75% use Audacity.

                        Most feel Audacity is stable, and people using USB microphones seemed to lve them while people using USB interfaces seem to find them a bit of a hassle (especially if this is on your main unit). Items mentioned:

                        Blue Snowball USB mic $99Samson CO1 USB Mic $90Alesis MultiMix 8 USB Mixer $149Alesis Podcast Mic (comes with mic, heaphones, software) $99Behringer UCA202 USB Interface (connect from your mixers tape out) $30Zoom H2 Portable Recorder $199Behringer USB Podcast Kit (includes mic, headphones, mixer, usb interface, software) $100Rode Dynamic USB Podcaster Mic $230

                        NEXT WEEKRich Harrington and Mike Weiser authors of the book "Producing Video Podcasts." Buy it at amazon.com

                        ]]>Show #129 originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we get the answers from last week's poll about USB interfaces and using Audacity.

                        Thanks to:

                        Joe from www.onthepodcast.netAnthony from www.diabeticincandyland.com Mike from www.mikeshotdish.com Warren from http://pewpodcast.podomatic.comTerry from http://quiettimepodcast.com/wp and http://oldcootcast.comLarry from http://goinglinux.comSally from http://www.podcastasylum.comDaryl from http://www.poddog.ca/suburbia Jay from www.jayjennings.com creator of Cloak and Tracker

                        75% use a USB interface75% use Audacity.

                        Most feel Audacity is stable, and people using USB microphones seemed to lve them while people using USB interfaces seem to find them a bit of a hassle (especially if this is on your main unit). Items mentioned:

                        Blue Snowball USB mic $99Samson CO1 USB Mic $90Alesis MultiMix 8 USB Mixer $149Alesis Podcast Mic (comes with mic, heaphones, software) $99Behringer UCA202 USB Interface (connect from your mixers tape out) $30Zoom H2 Portable Recorder $199Behringer USB Podcast Kit (includes mic, headphones, mixer, usb interface, software) $100Rode Dynamic USB Podcaster Mic $230

                        NEXT WEEKRich Harrington and Mike Weiser authors of the book "Producing Video Podcasts." Buy it at amazon.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=318053#Mon, 17 Mar 2008 04:00:00 -040019:17falsefull129129Do You Have an "Audacity WuFooed Me" Story?In a recent "Roundtable" at the School of Podcasting where members from the School of Podcasting get together and share tips and insights into all things podcasting we go to talking about using USB interfaces. People loved their USB microphones, but it seemed to be a trend of people getting USB interfaces, and then not use them.

                        Also, back in 2005 people that used Audacity often had an "Audacity crashed" story. That was a while ago, and Audacity has been upgraded and I'm looking to see if it is indeed more stable (as I haven't heard a story about Audacity in a while).

                        Please CLICK HERE to take the quick survey (using wufoo.com ) and let us know about your experience with USB devices and Audacity.

                        Also we are running low on Podcast Promos at www.podcastpromoshow.com

                        Thanks in advance and next week I'll tell you what I learn.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcastvoicemail.com

                        www.wufoo.com www.sleddogpodcast.com www.a1artistspotlight.com

                        ]]>In a recent "Roundtable" at the School of Podcasting where members from the School of Podcasting get together and share tips and insights into all things podcasting we go to talking about using USB interfaces. People loved their USB microphones, but it seemed to be a trend of people getting USB interfaces, and then not use them.

                        Also, back in 2005 people that used Audacity often had an "Audacity crashed" story. That was a while ago, and Audacity has been upgraded and I'm looking to see if it is indeed more stable (as I haven't heard a story about Audacity in a while).

                        Please CLICK HERE to take the quick survey (using wufoo.com ) and let us know about your experience with USB devices and Audacity.

                        Also we are running low on Podcast Promos at www.podcastpromoshow.com

                        Thanks in advance and next week I'll tell you what I learn.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcastvoicemail.com

                        www.wufoo.com www.sleddogpodcast.com www.a1artistspotlight.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=315834#Mon, 10 Mar 2008 04:50:00 -040011:40falsefull128128Sponsorship Vs Premium ContentThis show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        If you want to have a sponsor for your show, you need to be a SALES PERSON. New to sales? Check out Zig Ziglar or Tom Hopkins but you need to have a system in place to PROVE to the advertiser that YOU brought them traffic, and that your listeners bought their products. So you should:

                        1. Have some sort of stats system. I use Libysn stats, or in the case of some podcasts I use stats from podtrac.com

                        2. Have them create a "landing page (this could look like their home page, but its' just a different address). So it could be www.theadvertiserssite.com/podcast" now they can go into their stats and see how many visitors came from your show.

                        3. Have them offer a deal. This could be a coupon, a discount, SOMETHING that ONLY YOUR LISTENERS get.

                        4. Track the number of links from your site to their site. This is easy with a tool like Jay Jenning's Cloak and Tracker software (and very, VERY, easy to setup).

                        So now no matter what happens, if a person goes to their site (After hearing it on your podcast), if they purchase something (using the coupon), or if they click on an image from your site (which should be a bargaining tool) to go to their site - you can track the traffic, and hopefully prove the results.

                        The advantage of sponsors that you find on your own is you get all the money. You don't have to split it with people. The potential bad news is you might feel yourself editing yourself so you do offend any potential sponsors. This is why some people are turning to the Premium Podcast Solution.

                        I call this the "Chic Fil-A" way to podcast. Chic Fil-A in the states often gives out a sample piece of chicken so that you go buy a whole sandwich. Podcast pioneer Dan Klass of the Bitterest Pill has just adopted this model. After podcasting for two years he will produce one free episode (the sample chicken) and four episodes a month of "premium" content (the whole chicken). He is using Premiumcast.com for this (A great system).

                         

                        Watch Dave's Video on Carbonite that allows you to back up ALL of your files for $50 a month.

                         

                        Are you looking for a Podcast Expert? Looking to get into Podcasting on a budget? I've got step by step tutorials that will show you how to podcast at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>This show originates at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        If you want to have a sponsor for your show, you need to be a SALES PERSON. New to sales? Check out Zig Ziglar or Tom Hopkins but you need to have a system in place to PROVE to the advertiser that YOU brought them traffic, and that your listeners bought their products. So you should:

                        1. Have some sort of stats system. I use Libysn stats, or in the case of some podcasts I use stats from podtrac.com

                        2. Have them create a "landing page (this could look like their home page, but its' just a different address). So it could be www.theadvertiserssite.com/podcast" now they can go into their stats and see how many visitors came from your show.

                        3. Have them offer a deal. This could be a coupon, a discount, SOMETHING that ONLY YOUR LISTENERS get.

                        4. Track the number of links from your site to their site. This is easy with a tool like Jay Jenning's Cloak and Tracker software (and very, VERY, easy to setup).

                        So now no matter what happens, if a person goes to their site (After hearing it on your podcast), if they purchase something (using the coupon), or if they click on an image from your site (which should be a bargaining tool) to go to their site - you can track the traffic, and hopefully prove the results.

                        The advantage of sponsors that you find on your own is you get all the money. You don't have to split it with people. The potential bad news is you might feel yourself editing yourself so you do offend any potential sponsors. This is why some people are turning to the Premium Podcast Solution.

                        I call this the "Chic Fil-A" way to podcast. Chic Fil-A in the states often gives out a sample piece of chicken so that you go buy a whole sandwich. Podcast pioneer Dan Klass of the Bitterest Pill has just adopted this model. After podcasting for two years he will produce one free episode (the sample chicken) and four episodes a month of "premium" content (the whole chicken). He is using Premiumcast.com for this (A great system).

                         

                        Watch Dave's Video on Carbonite that allows you to back up ALL of your files for $50 a month.

                         

                        Are you looking for a Podcast Expert? Looking to get into Podcasting on a budget? I've got step by step tutorials that will show you how to podcast at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=310572#Mon, 25 Feb 2008 03:09:00 -040019:32falsefull126126Wizzard Media - Technnology for PodcastersThis show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        The NEW School of Podcasting site (created with www.wordpresstool.com ) is now live.

                        Today we talk with Rob Walch from Wizzard Media. (www.wizzard.tv) as well as www.podcast411.com and co-author of Tricks of the Podcasting Masters he also is a co-host of Today in Podcasting www.todayinpodcasting.com

                        Wizzard has technology to let you GEOGRAPHICALLY target your audience. They also have tools to allow you to get demographic information so in the end an advertiser could ask Wizzard, "I want to put get my product or service in front of males 18-25 years old in the Dallas Texas area." Keep in mind the more detailed they get, the more you can charge. This involves being hosted at Libsyn (www.uselibsyn.com )

                        If you are looking to learn how to podcast, check out the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>This show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        The NEW School of Podcasting site (created with www.wordpresstool.com ) is now live.

                        Today we talk with Rob Walch from Wizzard Media. (www.wizzard.tv) as well as www.podcast411.com and co-author of Tricks of the Podcasting Masters he also is a co-host of Today in Podcasting www.todayinpodcasting.com

                        Wizzard has technology to let you GEOGRAPHICALLY target your audience. They also have tools to allow you to get demographic information so in the end an advertiser could ask Wizzard, "I want to put get my product or service in front of males 18-25 years old in the Dallas Texas area." Keep in mind the more detailed they get, the more you can charge. This involves being hosted at Libsyn (www.uselibsyn.com )

                        If you are looking to learn how to podcast, check out the School of Podcasting at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=308450#Mon, 18 Feb 2008 04:05:00 -040022:25falsefull125125But Wait There's MORE!Show #124 originating from http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today's show is has a fair amount of news. It does make the show come off like a giant SOP commercial, but you should know how the School of Podcasting can benefit you. If this is not your cup of tea, come back next week when Rob Walch of www.podcast411.com and Wizzard Media will be talking about the technology has available.

                        Is Podcast Promo Swapping Dead? We asked and the following podcasters respondedAnthony from www.BetterGolfwithFitnessPodcast.com  and www.strengthcoachpodcast.com who said its not quantity but QUALITY of promo swapping. Mike from www.mikeshotdish.com is discouraged when other pdocasters won't play his promo.

                        NEW REWARDS AT SCHOOL OF PODCASTING MEMBERS25% off from Mad Town Aces Audio Production www.madtownaces.com

                        REWARDS FOR THE MORNING ANNOUNCEMENTS LISTENERSGain Control of your Day Course only $129 using the coupon code SOPURDAY (normally $249)

                        LAST 5 in 5

                        Our last 5 in 5 comes from Ray the Produce Picker (www.producepicker.com )

                        He listened towww.TotallyRadShow.com (fun show)www.diggnation.com (lasted news from Digg.com )http://www.vidpodcaster.com/ (Producing a Video Podcast)www.geekbrief.tv (Happy Shiny Tech News)www.StugglingEntrepreneur.com (Starting your own business?)

                        Don't forget that www.Podcastclicks.com is holding their grand reopening with some videos to help prove its effective. Only $10 a year (going up to $20 soon).

                        Dave Jackson

                        www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Show #124 originating from http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today's show is has a fair amount of news. It does make the show come off like a giant SOP commercial, but you should know how the School of Podcasting can benefit you. If this is not your cup of tea, come back next week when Rob Walch of www.podcast411.com and Wizzard Media will be talking about the technology has available.

                        Is Podcast Promo Swapping Dead? We asked and the following podcasters respondedAnthony from www.BetterGolfwithFitnessPodcast.com  and www.strengthcoachpodcast.com who said its not quantity but QUALITY of promo swapping. Mike from www.mikeshotdish.com is discouraged when other pdocasters won't play his promo.

                        NEW REWARDS AT SCHOOL OF PODCASTING MEMBERS25% off from Mad Town Aces Audio Production www.madtownaces.com

                        REWARDS FOR THE MORNING ANNOUNCEMENTS LISTENERSGain Control of your Day Course only $129 using the coupon code SOPURDAY (normally $249)

                        LAST 5 in 5

                        Our last 5 in 5 comes from Ray the Produce Picker (www.producepicker.com )

                        He listened towww.TotallyRadShow.com (fun show)www.diggnation.com (lasted news from Digg.com )http://www.vidpodcaster.com/ (Producing a Video Podcast)www.geekbrief.tv (Happy Shiny Tech News)www.StugglingEntrepreneur.com (Starting your own business?)

                        Don't forget that www.Podcastclicks.com is holding their grand reopening with some videos to help prove its effective. Only $10 a year (going up to $20 soon).

                        Dave Jackson

                        www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=306386#Tue, 12 Feb 2008 02:27:00 -040019:59falsefull124124Is Podcast Promo Swapping Dead?Show #123 Originating at http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we talk about Promo Swapping. Is it dead? Is it useful? We also talk about making a great promo. We play some promos and ask, "Does this make you want to know more about this show?"

                        We also get some listener voicemail from Alex the Podcast junky UK www.podcastjunky.co.uk and I'm sorry Alex. You are a DUDE. Check out his blog (some great insights from an avid Podcast Listener).

                        Promos www.KidsCast.co.uk www.podcastpromoshow.com

                        15 Tips for Better Podcast Promos

                        1. Get a domain name (no blogspot, no typepad, etc). Use the Godaddy promotional code cooelr3 and get it for 6.95  at www.godaddy.com2. Put on your marketing hat3. What is it?4. Don't Get too Cute5. Make the First Sentence Count6. Repeat your pdocast name in a natural tone.7. Make it Sound Great8. Let Somone else Hear it9. Include a Call to Action10. The Last Impression Shold Be Your Website11. Save your promo in a quality format12. Name the File so Podcasters Know What It Is13.  Test Your Link14. Pos it On Your Blog15. Ask

                        Read the Whole Article

                        ]]>Show #123 Originating at http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we talk about Promo Swapping. Is it dead? Is it useful? We also talk about making a great promo. We play some promos and ask, "Does this make you want to know more about this show?"

                        We also get some listener voicemail from Alex the Podcast junky UK www.podcastjunky.co.uk and I'm sorry Alex. You are a DUDE. Check out his blog (some great insights from an avid Podcast Listener).

                        Promos www.KidsCast.co.uk www.podcastpromoshow.com

                        15 Tips for Better Podcast Promos

                        1. Get a domain name (no blogspot, no typepad, etc). Use the Godaddy promotional code cooelr3 and get it for 6.95  at www.godaddy.com2. Put on your marketing hat3. What is it?4. Don't Get too Cute5. Make the First Sentence Count6. Repeat your pdocast name in a natural tone.7. Make it Sound Great8. Let Somone else Hear it9. Include a Call to Action10. The Last Impression Shold Be Your Website11. Save your promo in a quality format12. Name the File so Podcasters Know What It Is13.  Test Your Link14. Pos it On Your Blog15. Ask

                        Read the Whole Article

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=301731#Mon, 04 Feb 2008 05:00:00 -040021:29falsefull123123Evo Terra Author of Expert Podcasting Practices#122 This podcast originates at http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we have an interview with Evo Terra who is the Author of Expert Podcasting for Dummies (as well as Podcasting For Dummies) and one of the master minds behind Podiobooks.com (Please note a new updated version of Podcasting for Dummies is coming out this fall).

                        In today's show we talk about what to expect from Expert Podcasting For Dummies (you are read the Table of Contents at Amazon.com ).

                        We also hear how Authors are giving away their ENTIRE book and still making money. (some very interesting numbers on the number of books sold, and how podcasting is leading to being publsihed).

                        Find out "All things Evo" at his site www.funanymore.com

                         

                        Evo mentioned buying a domain. You can buy a .com domain name for $6.95 a year using the Godaddy Promotional Code "cooler3" at www.godaddy.com

                         

                        I first heard a great interview with Evo and Fred Castenda at The Struggling Entrepreneur at http://strugglingentrepreneur.com/2008/01/19/evo-terra-author-and-wwwpodiobookscom/

                         

                        Have a show promo? Submit your podcast to the Podcast Promo Show coming 2/14/08 at www.podcastpromoshow.com I also have an article "15 Tips For Better Podcast Promos" avaial at the Podcast Promo Show Website

                         

                        If you are looking to start a podcast, or take your podcast ot the next level in record time check out our website www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                        ]]>#122 This podcast originates at http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we have an interview with Evo Terra who is the Author of Expert Podcasting for Dummies (as well as Podcasting For Dummies) and one of the master minds behind Podiobooks.com (Please note a new updated version of Podcasting for Dummies is coming out this fall).

                        In today's show we talk about what to expect from Expert Podcasting For Dummies (you are read the Table of Contents at Amazon.com ).

                        We also hear how Authors are giving away their ENTIRE book and still making money. (some very interesting numbers on the number of books sold, and how podcasting is leading to being publsihed).

                        Find out "All things Evo" at his site www.funanymore.com

                         

                        Evo mentioned buying a domain. You can buy a .com domain name for $6.95 a year using the Godaddy Promotional Code "cooler3" at www.godaddy.com

                         

                        I first heard a great interview with Evo and Fred Castenda at The Struggling Entrepreneur at http://strugglingentrepreneur.com/2008/01/19/evo-terra-author-and-wwwpodiobookscom/

                         

                        Have a show promo? Submit your podcast to the Podcast Promo Show coming 2/14/08 at www.podcastpromoshow.com I also have an article "15 Tips For Better Podcast Promos" avaial at the Podcast Promo Show Website

                         

                        If you are looking to start a podcast, or take your podcast ot the next level in record time check out our website www.schoolofpodcasitng.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=300907#Mon, 28 Jan 2008 05:00:00 -040026:53falsefull122122Battling Fan Noise in Your Podcast StudioThis show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I explain how I received my second microphone arm (the one that cost $39 on ebay and it works better than the one I got for $29). However, now with my computer closer to my microphone I've decided to put some foam around the computer (leaving it room to "breathe") to cut back on the noise. The lesson learned?

                        A) I'm listening through the ears of a podcaster. Listen through the ears of a LISTENER. Your noise may be unoticable to most people. B) Sound Soap From Biad ($80) does a good job removing it (but does take some tweaking. Buy it from Amazon for $79

                        LAST 5 IN % from Fred Castaneda of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com

                        Tech 5 Infor World Daily Weekly Web Tools The Morning Annoucnements Logical Weight Loss

                        Stereo Junkies

                        Fred interviews the US Podcast Junky www.podcastjunky.com in episode #21 and we got some tips on "Cyber clutter" (a previous episode) from the UK Podcast Junky.  http://www.podcastjunky.co.uk

                        Looking to keep your site simple, check out these resourceshttp://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/how-to-make-minimalistic-design/

                        http://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/minimalistic-web-design/

                        http://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/minimalistic-web-designs/

                        Thanks to Podcast Junky UKNews, Views, Tips And Reviews Of Podcasts, Podcasting, Gadgets For Your MP3 Player And A Bit More Besides.www.podcastjunky.co.uk

                        www.PodcastClicks.com is 50% off now through 3/1/08 see how this system delivered close to 27,000 clicks to podcasters in the last two years.

                        Got a promo for your podcast? Send a LINK to your promo to podcastpromoshow "at" gmail "dot" com (a new show coming from Dave Jackson)

                        Looking for some custom Podcast Production? Check out www.podcastfastpass.com and leave all the "technical stuff" to someone else while you focus on the content of your show.

                        ]]>This show originates from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I explain how I received my second microphone arm (the one that cost $39 on ebay and it works better than the one I got for $29). However, now with my computer closer to my microphone I've decided to put some foam around the computer (leaving it room to "breathe") to cut back on the noise. The lesson learned?

                        A) I'm listening through the ears of a podcaster. Listen through the ears of a LISTENER. Your noise may be unoticable to most people. B) Sound Soap From Biad ($80) does a good job removing it (but does take some tweaking. Buy it from Amazon for $79

                        LAST 5 IN % from Fred Castaneda of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com

                        Tech 5 Infor World Daily Weekly Web Tools The Morning Annoucnements Logical Weight Loss

                        Stereo Junkies

                        Fred interviews the US Podcast Junky www.podcastjunky.com in episode #21 and we got some tips on "Cyber clutter" (a previous episode) from the UK Podcast Junky.  http://www.podcastjunky.co.uk

                        Looking to keep your site simple, check out these resourceshttp://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/how-to-make-minimalistic-design/

                        http://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/minimalistic-web-design/

                        http://vandelaydesign.com/blog/design/minimalistic-web-designs/

                        Thanks to Podcast Junky UKNews, Views, Tips And Reviews Of Podcasts, Podcasting, Gadgets For Your MP3 Player And A Bit More Besides.www.podcastjunky.co.uk

                        www.PodcastClicks.com is 50% off now through 3/1/08 see how this system delivered close to 27,000 clicks to podcasters in the last two years.

                        Got a promo for your podcast? Send a LINK to your promo to podcastpromoshow "at" gmail "dot" com (a new show coming from Dave Jackson)

                        Looking for some custom Podcast Production? Check out www.podcastfastpass.com and leave all the "technical stuff" to someone else while you focus on the content of your show.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=298550#Sun, 20 Jan 2008 21:00:00 -040020:51falsefull121121Podcasting Can Boost Your Business - I've Got ProofThis podcast episdoe #120 originates at http://www.shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        One of the benefits of being a member of the School of Podcasting is our weekly roundtable / live Question and anser sessions (typical 60 - 120 minutes long). In the last session one of the members talk about how his business is growing due to podcasting. Podcasting is:

                        Enabling him to reach a global marketHelping qualify his leadsEnabling him to reach customers in a "no pressure" formatEnabling customer to "try before they buy."

                        Also in this podcast I talk about how you can save money buying a collapsable microphone (sometimes called "Scissors, or Broadcast") boom stand

                        To See Rich's business in action go to www.dearaddie.com

                        Other podcasters involved in the roundtable snippet Tim from www.sleddogpodcast.com )

                        The Rode PSA1 Swivel Mount Arm Microphone costs $90 (and the cool thing about Same Day Music is there is no tax most of the time)

                        The Heil Sound PL-2T Overhead Broadcast Boom goes for about $125 bucks.

                        If you look on ebay. You can find "microphone arms" for $29 CLICK HEREFor now at

                        or one with three bases for $39. at CLICK HERE

                        I currently have the $29 model and I love not having a stand next to my desk and the ability to move my microphone out of the way. I did have some issues as the stand holds the microphone in place, but when I first added a pop filter, the stand couldn't handle the weight. After really, really tightening the screws it seems to be working. I will get the $39 model later in the week and let you know how it goes.

                        If you would like to participate in the Podcaster Roundtables go sign up at the School of Podcastint www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>This podcast episdoe #120 originates at http://www.shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        One of the benefits of being a member of the School of Podcasting is our weekly roundtable / live Question and anser sessions (typical 60 - 120 minutes long). In the last session one of the members talk about how his business is growing due to podcasting. Podcasting is:

                        Enabling him to reach a global marketHelping qualify his leadsEnabling him to reach customers in a "no pressure" formatEnabling customer to "try before they buy."

                        Also in this podcast I talk about how you can save money buying a collapsable microphone (sometimes called "Scissors, or Broadcast") boom stand

                        To See Rich's business in action go to www.dearaddie.com

                        Other podcasters involved in the roundtable snippet Tim from www.sleddogpodcast.com )

                        The Rode PSA1 Swivel Mount Arm Microphone costs $90 (and the cool thing about Same Day Music is there is no tax most of the time)

                        The Heil Sound PL-2T Overhead Broadcast Boom goes for about $125 bucks.

                        If you look on ebay. You can find "microphone arms" for $29 CLICK HEREFor now at

                        or one with three bases for $39. at CLICK HERE

                        I currently have the $29 model and I love not having a stand next to my desk and the ability to move my microphone out of the way. I did have some issues as the stand holds the microphone in place, but when I first added a pop filter, the stand couldn't handle the weight. After really, really tightening the screws it seems to be working. I will get the $39 model later in the week and let you know how it goes.

                        If you would like to participate in the Podcaster Roundtables go sign up at the School of Podcastint www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=296312#Mon, 14 Jan 2008 01:50:00 -040014:45falsefull120120Cyber Clutter and Podcastclicks.com RelaunchedShow #119 originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I talk about how having a clean website at www.logicalloss.com lead to me getting a new advertiser.

                        I've relaunched Podcastclicks.com and from now through the end of February you can use the Podcast Clicks Promotional System for $10 a year (Price goes to $20 a year on 3/1/07).

                        We also talk about moving a site from blogger.com to using a hosted Wordpress site to run your podcast.

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        A1 Artist Spotlight www.a1artistspotlight.com Jewish Teen Podcast www.jewishteen.net Audio Gumshoe www.audiogumshoe.com

                        ]]>Show #119 originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today I talk about how having a clean website at www.logicalloss.com lead to me getting a new advertiser.

                        I've relaunched Podcastclicks.com and from now through the end of February you can use the Podcast Clicks Promotional System for $10 a year (Price goes to $20 a year on 3/1/07).

                        We also talk about moving a site from blogger.com to using a hosted Wordpress site to run your podcast.

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        A1 Artist Spotlight www.a1artistspotlight.com Jewish Teen Podcast www.jewishteen.net Audio Gumshoe www.audiogumshoe.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=294104#Mon, 07 Jan 2008 04:55:00 -040020:27falsefull119119You Should Not Be PodcastingEpisode #118

                        Today I talk about some of the lovely podcasts I've run across that I feel are awful. It seems people are falling into certain areas:

                        The person who thinks they are going to make thousands of dollars next week.

                        The person who gets into podcast becuase they hear its cool, but have nothing to say. Ask them what their podcast is going to be about and they will say, "I don't know."

                        I've heard no less than four podcasts stating "how to make money in podcasting" and it turns out to be nothing but 40 minutes of talkshoe.com spewing. (nothing against talkshoe.com, but I've heard that podcast enough).

                        If you have a recording from a buinses meeting back in 1992 and think it would be a great podcast (that is if you can hear the speaker over the air conditioning) - you don't need to podcast that. You CAN, but the question is should you.

                        If you got into podcasting because you heard you can do it for free - you don't need to podcast. There are singers who sing for free. You can hear them at karaokee bars offending ears every Thursday. Spend a few bucks and take your podcast to the next level.

                        Thinking of starting a podcast in 2008? Remember that not only do you need the time to record the podcast, but you need the time to promote the podcast. Currently I have seven podcasts (www.podcastcoach.com ) and I don't spend enough time promoting my podcasts as I did when I had 2. Consequently, my numbers are growing slower than when I had a few podcasts.

                        If you are looking to start a Podcast, if you are looking to learn how to podcast, then please let me be your personal podcast coach by joining me at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                         

                         

                        ]]>Episode #118

                        Today I talk about some of the lovely podcasts I've run across that I feel are awful. It seems people are falling into certain areas:

                        The person who thinks they are going to make thousands of dollars next week.

                        The person who gets into podcast becuase they hear its cool, but have nothing to say. Ask them what their podcast is going to be about and they will say, "I don't know."

                        I've heard no less than four podcasts stating "how to make money in podcasting" and it turns out to be nothing but 40 minutes of talkshoe.com spewing. (nothing against talkshoe.com, but I've heard that podcast enough).

                        If you have a recording from a buinses meeting back in 1992 and think it would be a great podcast (that is if you can hear the speaker over the air conditioning) - you don't need to podcast that. You CAN, but the question is should you.

                        If you got into podcasting because you heard you can do it for free - you don't need to podcast. There are singers who sing for free. You can hear them at karaokee bars offending ears every Thursday. Spend a few bucks and take your podcast to the next level.

                        Thinking of starting a podcast in 2008? Remember that not only do you need the time to record the podcast, but you need the time to promote the podcast. Currently I have seven podcasts (www.podcastcoach.com ) and I don't spend enough time promoting my podcasts as I did when I had 2. Consequently, my numbers are growing slower than when I had a few podcasts.

                        If you are looking to start a Podcast, if you are looking to learn how to podcast, then please let me be your personal podcast coach by joining me at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                         

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=291940#Mon, 31 Dec 2007 05:00:00 -040017:12falsefull118118Common Confusion ClearedToday I talk about some of the items I see that confuse new podcasters.

                        1. The Podcast and Episode Delemna. There is a "Podcast" name (Think "Friends"), and there is an "Episode" name (think "Monica and Chandler's Wedding). So while you may put in all sorts of iTunes information into your Wordpress settings (either via Podpress, or Feedburner) those apply to the "Show/Podcast." So if you have a show come into your aggregator (like iTunes) and there is no album art its because each EPISODE has "tags" for each mp3 file (or video file). In the example I was working with, the mp3 didn't have any album art. (Even though the SHOW did, so again the EPISODE didn't have album art).

                        2. RSS Feeds. Most podcasters use Wordpress.com to maintain a blog (typically on their server like www.coolerwebsites.com ) that has a "side effect" of outputting an RSS feed. So when you update your blog, you update your RSS feed. So how do I update my RSS? I update my blog. Its that easy.

                        However! You may be using Feedburner (www.feedburner.com) which will look at Wordpress (to watch the RSS feed). This is what people call "Your Feedburner Feed." Then to list your podcast in iTunes you ay submit your "Feedburner feed." So now when iTunes starts it checks for new episodes. It woudl sound like this:

                        iTunes: Hey are there any new episodes? (Its asks Feedburner)Feedburner: Hey Wordpress any new episodes?Wordpress: Yeah, there have been two episodes put out since the last time you checked. The mp3 files are right over there...Feedburner: Thanks. Hey iTunes the mp3 files are right over there..iTunes: Got it. I'm downloading them now.

                        So when you update your Wordpress, you (through some handshaking) update iTunes.

                        Don't forget that you can get 25% off your membership fee at the School of Podcasting using th coupon code " santa " when you subscribe now through December 25, 2007.

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        www.wordpress.orgwww.feedburner.comwww.itunes.comwww.schoolofpodcasting.com www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>Today I talk about some of the items I see that confuse new podcasters.

                        1. The Podcast and Episode Delemna. There is a "Podcast" name (Think "Friends"), and there is an "Episode" name (think "Monica and Chandler's Wedding). So while you may put in all sorts of iTunes information into your Wordpress settings (either via Podpress, or Feedburner) those apply to the "Show/Podcast." So if you have a show come into your aggregator (like iTunes) and there is no album art its because each EPISODE has "tags" for each mp3 file (or video file). In the example I was working with, the mp3 didn't have any album art. (Even though the SHOW did, so again the EPISODE didn't have album art).

                        2. RSS Feeds. Most podcasters use Wordpress.com to maintain a blog (typically on their server like www.coolerwebsites.com ) that has a "side effect" of outputting an RSS feed. So when you update your blog, you update your RSS feed. So how do I update my RSS? I update my blog. Its that easy.

                        However! You may be using Feedburner (www.feedburner.com) which will look at Wordpress (to watch the RSS feed). This is what people call "Your Feedburner Feed." Then to list your podcast in iTunes you ay submit your "Feedburner feed." So now when iTunes starts it checks for new episodes. It woudl sound like this:

                        iTunes: Hey are there any new episodes? (Its asks Feedburner)Feedburner: Hey Wordpress any new episodes?Wordpress: Yeah, there have been two episodes put out since the last time you checked. The mp3 files are right over there...Feedburner: Thanks. Hey iTunes the mp3 files are right over there..iTunes: Got it. I'm downloading them now.

                        So when you update your Wordpress, you (through some handshaking) update iTunes.

                        Don't forget that you can get 25% off your membership fee at the School of Podcasting using th coupon code " santa " when you subscribe now through December 25, 2007.

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        www.wordpress.orgwww.feedburner.comwww.itunes.comwww.schoolofpodcasting.com www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=289544#Mon, 24 Dec 2007 00:52:00 -040012:56falsefull117117Wordpress Tool - Customized Wordpress ThemesPodcast #116 of the School of Podcasting Morning Announcements originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.net

                        Today I talk about a tool that will take the power of Wordpress and turn it into a Giant GOOGLE MAGNET. You can find it at www.wordpresstool.com  It is a boosted version of wordpress (it installs OVER your current wordpress install that you could purchase from www.coolerwebsites.com ) it has all sorts of meta, tags, site maps and more to drive traffic to your wordpress install. It is $297 but you can use it on ALL of your blogs/podcasts.

                        I've used it in the past, and wasn't sold on it. However, with the new version they have added LOTS of documentation, and the ability to drag and drop almost EVERY aspect of your blog layout (very, very cool).

                        The down side? You need to know a bit of CSS to get the colors and look of your site the way you want it. While Denis (the owner) is a great guy and very supportive, if he gets hit by a bus.......

                        The great news? You can change the layout with the drag and drop interface and the colors and style of your website stay the same (very cool). If Wordpress updates - your website will look the same. All the plugins have been tested to work together.

                        For more information about semiologic, go to www.wordpresstool.com

                        Question for the group? Do you feel that producers who have been around for a while can drop to a "not so regular" schedule without losing listeners?

                        CHRISTMAS SALEGet 25% off your membership fee by using the coupon code " santa " when you check out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com Try it risk free for 30 days. If you don't like the great information, cancel your subscription for a complete refund. (Now through December 25th, 2007).

                        SHOWS / SITES MENTIONEDwww.newmediamettersshow.com www.thebitterestpill.comwww.digitalflotsam.orgwww.internetbusinessmastery.com www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>Podcast #116 of the School of Podcasting Morning Announcements originating from www.schoolofpodcasting.net

                        Today I talk about a tool that will take the power of Wordpress and turn it into a Giant GOOGLE MAGNET. You can find it at www.wordpresstool.com  It is a boosted version of wordpress (it installs OVER your current wordpress install that you could purchase from www.coolerwebsites.com ) it has all sorts of meta, tags, site maps and more to drive traffic to your wordpress install. It is $297 but you can use it on ALL of your blogs/podcasts.

                        I've used it in the past, and wasn't sold on it. However, with the new version they have added LOTS of documentation, and the ability to drag and drop almost EVERY aspect of your blog layout (very, very cool).

                        The down side? You need to know a bit of CSS to get the colors and look of your site the way you want it. While Denis (the owner) is a great guy and very supportive, if he gets hit by a bus.......

                        The great news? You can change the layout with the drag and drop interface and the colors and style of your website stay the same (very cool). If Wordpress updates - your website will look the same. All the plugins have been tested to work together.

                        For more information about semiologic, go to www.wordpresstool.com

                        Question for the group? Do you feel that producers who have been around for a while can drop to a "not so regular" schedule without losing listeners?

                        CHRISTMAS SALEGet 25% off your membership fee by using the coupon code " santa " when you check out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com Try it risk free for 30 days. If you don't like the great information, cancel your subscription for a complete refund. (Now through December 25th, 2007).

                        SHOWS / SITES MENTIONEDwww.newmediamettersshow.com www.thebitterestpill.comwww.digitalflotsam.orgwww.internetbusinessmastery.com www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=288215#Mon, 17 Dec 2007 01:31:00 -040022:14falsefull116116More Traffic = More ListenersGet 25% off your membership fee using the coupon code santa now through December 25, 2007.

                        Today I show how you can find out who is linking to your competitors using google. Then you can see if these same people might want to link to you. When a whole bunch of sites link to you Google may give you a higher ranking (and thus place you higher on a search).

                        To see who is linking to you simply type link:http://www.yourcompetitors.com 

                        So to see who is linking to the schoolofpodcasting.com it would be link:http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Your listeners may want to link to your website. So you go into whatever program you're using (wordpress, front page, dream weaver) and you make a link to your website (either graphic aor text). You view the source code and when you past that into your website, it may  not display. Instead it will simply show the graphic/link and NOT the text that you want people to copy and paste.

                        (Now here I was able to simple coy and paste the code, this won't work with all systems, it WILL work for most people using Wordpress).

                        so to fix this, you need to replace the "" so substitute the following:

                        < = < (lt for less than) " = " (quot for quotes) > = > (gt for greater than)

                         so

                        <a href="http://www.schoolofpodcasting">School of Podcasting </a>  will show up like this

                        School of Podcasting

                        If you're not sure how to make a link, I have a detailed answer in the Frequently Asked Question section of the school of podcasting

                        ]]>Get 25% off your membership fee using the coupon code santa now through December 25, 2007.

                        Today I show how you can find out who is linking to your competitors using google. Then you can see if these same people might want to link to you. When a whole bunch of sites link to you Google may give you a higher ranking (and thus place you higher on a search).

                        To see who is linking to you simply type link:http://www.yourcompetitors.com 

                        So to see who is linking to the schoolofpodcasting.com it would be link:http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Your listeners may want to link to your website. So you go into whatever program you're using (wordpress, front page, dream weaver) and you make a link to your website (either graphic aor text). You view the source code and when you past that into your website, it may  not display. Instead it will simply show the graphic/link and NOT the text that you want people to copy and paste.

                        (Now here I was able to simple coy and paste the code, this won't work with all systems, it WILL work for most people using Wordpress).

                        so to fix this, you need to replace the "" so substitute the following:

                        < = < (lt for less than) " = " (quot for quotes) > = > (gt for greater than)

                         so

                        <a href="http://www.schoolofpodcasting">School of Podcasting </a>  will show up like this

                        School of Podcasting

                        If you're not sure how to make a link, I have a detailed answer in the Frequently Asked Question section of the school of podcasting

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=283672#Sun, 02 Dec 2007 21:09:00 -040015:10falsefull115115Frequently Asked Podcasting QuestionsThanks to Becky of Podcastdesigns.com for putting together another great piece of Album Art for my latest Podcast "Logical Weight Loss Podcast." www.logicalloss.com (as a member of the School of Podcasting you get 50% the price at Podcast Designs ).

                        Show number #114

                        Today I answer some questions from the School of Podcasting's Frequently Asked Podcasting Questions Area at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/help

                        How do I contact someone for an interview?

                        Most of my episodes are NOT showing up in iTunes?

                        How do I make an RSS feed for Each Category? (Full Answer Here - New Window).

                        Thanks to Danika from http://www.tribshow.net/ and Mark from www.a1artistspotlight.com for the questions.

                        Are you looking to start your own podcast? Come check out our step by step tutorials RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Thanks to Becky of Podcastdesigns.com for putting together another great piece of Album Art for my latest Podcast "Logical Weight Loss Podcast." www.logicalloss.com (as a member of the School of Podcasting you get 50% the price at Podcast Designs ).

                        Show number #114

                        Today I answer some questions from the School of Podcasting's Frequently Asked Podcasting Questions Area at www.schoolofpodcasting.com/help

                        How do I contact someone for an interview?

                        Most of my episodes are NOT showing up in iTunes?

                        How do I make an RSS feed for Each Category? (Full Answer Here - New Window).

                        Thanks to Danika from http://www.tribshow.net/ and Mark from www.a1artistspotlight.com for the questions.

                        Are you looking to start your own podcast? Come check out our step by step tutorials RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=281361#Sun, 25 Nov 2007 23:07:00 -040012:56falsefull114114Dealing with Negative Comments - Spam Free PhpbbIn this episode I have input from a listener on how to stop robots ("bots" ) from spamming your phpbb forum for your listeners.

                        We also have an open in invite from George of the oneminutehowto.com for anyone looing for exposure for your podcast.

                        I also talk about dealing with negative comments (and how not to lose your mind).

                        Simon has a forum at http://homedad.org.uk/forum/ where he was getting hit by a spambot about every 20 minutes 24/7 Yikes.

                        Heard about this site "Projeckt Spambot" at http://www.beehave.de/forum/viewtopic.php?t=1400 which is a site that will spam you and then tell you how to set up your forum so that it can't.

                        Simon inplemented an "Anti Bot Question" which you can find out at http://phpbb.mwegner.de/english/phpbb2/mods/anti-bot-question-mod/index.html This is where you iplementa question that a human would find easy, but a bot would have no clue.

                        He hasn't had any spam since.

                        Check out Simon Windisch of Shed Music at http://www.shedmusicuk.com/songs.htm

                        George from www.oneminutehowto.com is always looking for a co-host. 1,600 listeners a day!

                        When dealing with negative comments, remember that the worst, and the best, reviews are typically not accurate. Look for the comments in the middle.

                        If you would like to start your own podcast head over to www.schoolofpodcasting.com or if you'd like me to "get you up and going fast" check out www.podcastfastpas.com

                        PROMO: Logical Weight Loss Podcast at www.logicalloss.com - A no-nonsense appraoch to weight loss.

                         

                        ]]>In this episode I have input from a listener on how to stop robots ("bots" ) from spamming your phpbb forum for your listeners.

                        We also have an open in invite from George of the oneminutehowto.com for anyone looing for exposure for your podcast.

                        I also talk about dealing with negative comments (and how not to lose your mind).

                        Simon has a forum at http://homedad.org.uk/forum/ where he was getting hit by a spambot about every 20 minutes 24/7 Yikes.

                        Heard about this site "Projeckt Spambot" at http://www.beehave.de/forum/viewtopic.php?t=1400 which is a site that will spam you and then tell you how to set up your forum so that it can't.

                        Simon inplemented an "Anti Bot Question" which you can find out at http://phpbb.mwegner.de/english/phpbb2/mods/anti-bot-question-mod/index.html This is where you iplementa question that a human would find easy, but a bot would have no clue.

                        He hasn't had any spam since.

                        Check out Simon Windisch of Shed Music at http://www.shedmusicuk.com/songs.htm

                        George from www.oneminutehowto.com is always looking for a co-host. 1,600 listeners a day!

                        When dealing with negative comments, remember that the worst, and the best, reviews are typically not accurate. Look for the comments in the middle.

                        If you would like to start your own podcast head over to www.schoolofpodcasting.com or if you'd like me to "get you up and going fast" check out www.podcastfastpas.com

                        PROMO: Logical Weight Loss Podcast at www.logicalloss.com - A no-nonsense appraoch to weight loss.

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=279705#Mon, 19 Nov 2007 18:05:00 -040016:35falsefull113113Coaxing Advertisers To Your PodcastToday in show #112 I provide some insights into getting sponsors that I have found on my own.

                        1. Find an advertiser that fits your niche. In my case I found two products that I like and I use. There is no "stretch." These advertisers fit like a glove.

                        2. I did not lead with the word "podcast." I called it an Internet Radio Show.

                        3. I provided a sample report from podtrac.com for one of my podcasts.

                        4. There are many things you can use in negotiation. These include adding a banner on your site, having them generate coupons (to track sales), track the number of clicks to their site (to help calculate ROI); they could set up their product under a different paypal option to track sales. (I use a program called "Cloak and Tracker")

                        The bad news is when I did a google search for "Podcast CPM" I saw number from $30 - $50 (that’s per 1,000 downloads).

                        Let's go "best case scenario" if you had 20,000 downloads per show. If you charged $50 CPM, that is $4,000 per month (if you produced 4 shows per month). 

                        Another Way to Make Money with Your Podcast 1. You could have a premium (no advertising version) using a tool such as www.121podcasting.com

                        2. You can have a membership area with additional shows, behind the scenes, forum boards and more. Some membership software scripts include:

                        Interlogy Profile Manager (new window) is an interesting program. Very easy to install. You can use it for free, but if you want to charge for memberships, its $200. (One time fee).

                        Easy Member Pro (New Window) Is a very easy to use membership program. It has flexible programs (pricing for 3 months, 6 months, a year, etc).

                        Download Guard (new window) Is a program that is initially designed to protect digital products that you sell, but also can be used for membership sites.

                        AmemberAmember is the tool I use to manage the School of Podcasting. While I've seen prettier interfaces, this works.

                         

                         

                         Sign up for the School of Podcasting today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Today in show #112 I provide some insights into getting sponsors that I have found on my own.

                        1. Find an advertiser that fits your niche. In my case I found two products that I like and I use. There is no "stretch." These advertisers fit like a glove.

                        2. I did not lead with the word "podcast." I called it an Internet Radio Show.

                        3. I provided a sample report from podtrac.com for one of my podcasts.

                        4. There are many things you can use in negotiation. These include adding a banner on your site, having them generate coupons (to track sales), track the number of clicks to their site (to help calculate ROI); they could set up their product under a different paypal option to track sales. (I use a program called "Cloak and Tracker")

                        The bad news is when I did a google search for "Podcast CPM" I saw number from $30 - $50 (that’s per 1,000 downloads).

                        Let's go "best case scenario" if you had 20,000 downloads per show. If you charged $50 CPM, that is $4,000 per month (if you produced 4 shows per month). 

                        Another Way to Make Money with Your Podcast 1. You could have a premium (no advertising version) using a tool such as www.121podcasting.com

                        2. You can have a membership area with additional shows, behind the scenes, forum boards and more. Some membership software scripts include:

                        Interlogy Profile Manager (new window) is an interesting program. Very easy to install. You can use it for free, but if you want to charge for memberships, its $200. (One time fee).

                        Easy Member Pro (New Window) Is a very easy to use membership program. It has flexible programs (pricing for 3 months, 6 months, a year, etc).

                        Download Guard (new window) Is a program that is initially designed to protect digital products that you sell, but also can be used for membership sites.

                        AmemberAmember is the tool I use to manage the School of Podcasting. While I've seen prettier interfaces, this works.

                         

                         

                         Sign up for the School of Podcasting today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=276928#Sun, 11 Nov 2007 20:25:00 -040024:02falsefull112112Podcasting for Profit Author Leesa BarnesOK, today I'm a little loopy. I spent the night in the emergency room (with ym girlfriend -she's fine), and in today's interview with Lessa Barnes I'm loopy as it was the end of Day 3 of the New Media Expo (and we were sleep deprived). We giggle our way through the interview (with some edits due to background noise). The bottom line is this seems like a really good book. The more I read the more I like.

                        Buy the book at Amazon.com or for more information and to read Leesa's blog about Podcasting (and free samples of the book) check out lessabarnes.com (new window). Her site features free chatpers, as well as links to all her blogs and more.

                         

                        ]]>OK, today I'm a little loopy. I spent the night in the emergency room (with ym girlfriend -she's fine), and in today's interview with Lessa Barnes I'm loopy as it was the end of Day 3 of the New Media Expo (and we were sleep deprived). We giggle our way through the interview (with some edits due to background noise). The bottom line is this seems like a really good book. The more I read the more I like.

                        Buy the book at Amazon.com or for more information and to read Leesa's blog about Podcasting (and free samples of the book) check out lessabarnes.com (new window). Her site features free chatpers, as well as links to all her blogs and more.

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=274498#Sun, 04 Nov 2007 19:58:00 -040035:06falsefull111111Selling Your Back Catalogue - History According to BobBIG NEWS School of Podcasting Subscribers will now get a month in the USATDOAY.com's Blogger and Podcaster guide (a $49 savings) for FREE. If you want to stay in the online version (or the printed version that will be published once a week) you can get 20% (online) and 25% off (printed) version of the guide.

                        Yes you can save $50 by spending $20. Keep in mind that you can sign up and cancel your subscription anytime.

                        ON TODAY'S SHOWBob Packet from "History According to Bob" (www.hostoryaccordingtobob.com ) who has taken his passion for history, and his now profitting from his podcast by selling his old back catalogue as single episodes, as CDs, as CD sets. He is using a shopping cart www.mals-e.com

                        For more information go to www.historyaccordingtobob.com

                        ]]>BIG NEWS School of Podcasting Subscribers will now get a month in the USATDOAY.com's Blogger and Podcaster guide (a $49 savings) for FREE. If you want to stay in the online version (or the printed version that will be published once a week) you can get 20% (online) and 25% off (printed) version of the guide.

                        Yes you can save $50 by spending $20. Keep in mind that you can sign up and cancel your subscription anytime.

                        ON TODAY'S SHOWBob Packet from "History According to Bob" (www.hostoryaccordingtobob.com ) who has taken his passion for history, and his now profitting from his podcast by selling his old back catalogue as single episodes, as CDs, as CD sets. He is using a shopping cart www.mals-e.com

                        For more information go to www.historyaccordingtobob.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=271883#Mon, 29 Oct 2007 00:51:00 -040024:25falsefull110110Finding Time to PodcastAre you arguing with your significant other about your podcasting habbits? Ever wonder how Dave has 8 podcasts? Is it true that he just has no life? NO. It revolves around careful planning, and involving your family and friends to help plan your podcasting schedule around THEM (not the other way around).

                        Then you need to take advantage of the time when you can get some time in front of the mic.

                        SITES and ITEMS Mentioned

                        Zoom H2 Portable Recorder ($199)

                        "All things Dave" www.personalpodcastcoach.com Podcast Consultant Service www.podcastfastpass.com

                        I'm the Media www.imthemedia.com

                        ]]>Are you arguing with your significant other about your podcasting habbits? Ever wonder how Dave has 8 podcasts? Is it true that he just has no life? NO. It revolves around careful planning, and involving your family and friends to help plan your podcasting schedule around THEM (not the other way around).

                        Then you need to take advantage of the time when you can get some time in front of the mic.

                        SITES and ITEMS Mentioned

                        Zoom H2 Portable Recorder ($199)

                        "All things Dave" www.personalpodcastcoach.com Podcast Consultant Service www.podcastfastpass.com

                        I'm the Media www.imthemedia.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=268486#Mon, 22 Oct 2007 04:00:00 -040021:19falsefull109109Benefiting From Podcamps and ExposToday I talk with Fred Castenada of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com about the differences between Podcamp and The New Media Expo (Fred has been to both). We also learn about his two Podcasts and how he is promoting them.

                        Fred talks about how easy it is to share your information and get great information at Podcamps.

                        This interview was recorded using a Zoom H2.

                        Other Items MentionedPersony Meeting Software www.trypersony.com Rob Walch Interviews a Podcast Listener "Show 200" Podcast Secrets"All Things Dave" www.personalpodcastcoach.com

                         

                        ]]>Today I talk with Fred Castenada of www.strugglingentrepreneur.com and www.gaincontrolofyourday.com about the differences between Podcamp and The New Media Expo (Fred has been to both). We also learn about his two Podcasts and how he is promoting them.

                        Fred talks about how easy it is to share your information and get great information at Podcamps.

                        This interview was recorded using a Zoom H2.

                        Other Items MentionedPersony Meeting Software www.trypersony.com Rob Walch Interviews a Podcast Listener "Show 200" Podcast Secrets"All Things Dave" www.personalpodcastcoach.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=266986#Mon, 15 Oct 2007 19:40:00 -040021:22falsefull108108Expo ReflectionsI give me insights into the expo. We give away the Behringer Podcast Studio Podcasting Package to Arthur Vanderbuilt (congrats and thanks for being a member).

                        Reflections from the ExpoNicest guy I've never met before goes to Dave from www.twoboobsandababy.com

                        Coolest Piece of Technology (for Schools at least)www.boxpopuli.com (in a booth)Zoom H2 (most popular recorder)

                        Best Night Out on the Town Fred Castenadawww.strugglingentrepreneur.com/www.gaincontrolofyourday.com

                        LAST 5 in 5Courtesy of Dan Klass www.thebitterestpill.com 1. The Twisted Pickle www.twistedpickle.com 2. Norm Augistine www.normaugustinus.com3. Coverville www.coverville.com 4. Cush Things I say www.cushrocks.com 5. The Hollywood Podcast http://hollywoodpodcast.com/6. Verge of the Fringe http://vergeofthefringe.blogspot.com/

                        According to the Podcastjunky UK I am the 9th most recognizable voice in Podcasting. I talk about this in my blog at http://davidjackson.org/2007/10/04/im-the-9th-most-recognized-voice-in-podcasting/

                        ]]>I give me insights into the expo. We give away the Behringer Podcast Studio Podcasting Package to Arthur Vanderbuilt (congrats and thanks for being a member).

                        Reflections from the ExpoNicest guy I've never met before goes to Dave from www.twoboobsandababy.com

                        Coolest Piece of Technology (for Schools at least)www.boxpopuli.com (in a booth)Zoom H2 (most popular recorder)

                        Best Night Out on the Town Fred Castenadawww.strugglingentrepreneur.com/www.gaincontrolofyourday.com

                        LAST 5 in 5Courtesy of Dan Klass www.thebitterestpill.com 1. The Twisted Pickle www.twistedpickle.com 2. Norm Augistine www.normaugustinus.com3. Coverville www.coverville.com 4. Cush Things I say www.cushrocks.com 5. The Hollywood Podcast http://hollywoodpodcast.com/6. Verge of the Fringe http://vergeofthefringe.blogspot.com/

                        According to the Podcastjunky UK I am the 9th most recognizable voice in Podcasting. I talk about this in my blog at http://davidjackson.org/2007/10/04/im-the-9th-most-recognized-voice-in-podcasting/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=263498#Sun, 07 Oct 2007 23:00:00 -040017:38falsefull107107Creating an Elevator Pitch for the ExpoAre you going to the New Media Expo this week? I am. You can meet me outside ballroom A on Friday at 4:30ish.

                        Here are some Tips for the Expo1.  Have your business cards with you at all times.2.  Have your elevatory pitch ready (www.15secondpitch.com )3.  Pace yourselves. If you come out of the gate too fast, you wil have nothing on Friday.4.  Bring some "instant food" (granola bars, power bars, Pop Tarts). Some of the parties ran out of food, and the cafeteria is expensive and extremley "OK." 5. Don't be afraid to talk to people. Just introduce yourselves, and the conversation wil start to flow. Don't com home with a giant list of regrest. 6. Keep moving. If you've set up a follow up appointment with someone, then move on to a new person. 7. Write on the back of the business card what you talked about, and email them when you get home.

                        8. Write on the business cards who you have an have not contacted.

                        BACK TO SCHOOL SPECIAL.

                        Get 20% off at the School of Podcasting by using the coupon code " bts " when you sign up now through October 8th.

                        Sites Mentioned:http://www.15secondpitch.com/new/

                        Support This Showwww.supporthisshow.com

                         

                        ]]>Are you going to the New Media Expo this week? I am. You can meet me outside ballroom A on Friday at 4:30ish.

                        Here are some Tips for the Expo1.  Have your business cards with you at all times.2.  Have your elevatory pitch ready (www.15secondpitch.com )3.  Pace yourselves. If you come out of the gate too fast, you wil have nothing on Friday.4.  Bring some "instant food" (granola bars, power bars, Pop Tarts). Some of the parties ran out of food, and the cafeteria is expensive and extremley "OK." 5. Don't be afraid to talk to people. Just introduce yourselves, and the conversation wil start to flow. Don't com home with a giant list of regrest. 6. Keep moving. If you've set up a follow up appointment with someone, then move on to a new person. 7. Write on the back of the business card what you talked about, and email them when you get home.

                        8. Write on the business cards who you have an have not contacted.

                        BACK TO SCHOOL SPECIAL.

                        Get 20% off at the School of Podcasting by using the coupon code " bts " when you sign up now through October 8th.

                        Sites Mentioned:http://www.15secondpitch.com/new/

                        Support This Showwww.supporthisshow.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=258963#Sun, 23 Sep 2007 23:42:00 -040019:44falsefull106106Producing Your Podcast From Segments with George HrabGet 20% off your membership at the School of Podcasting using the coupon code bts when you sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we interview George Hrab from www.geologicpodcast.com a very creative podcast. George produces 15 different types of segments that he then uses to assemble his podcast. While you may not be able to pull off as many voices as George, this "pieces parts" approach to podcasting may make creating your podcast easier.

                        Meet me at the Expo at Friday at 4:15ish in front of Ballroom A

                        We are giving away a Podcast Studio USB from Behringer to a member in October.

                        Sites Mentioned:Geologic Podcast www.geologicpodcast.com George's Book "Non Coloring Book" www.lulu.com/georgehrab Podcast Fast Pass www.podcastfastpass.com New Media Expo http://www.newmediaexpo.com/incoming.php?linkid=1759

                        ]]>Get 20% off your membership at the School of Podcasting using the coupon code bts when you sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Today we interview George Hrab from www.geologicpodcast.com a very creative podcast. George produces 15 different types of segments that he then uses to assemble his podcast. While you may not be able to pull off as many voices as George, this "pieces parts" approach to podcasting may make creating your podcast easier.

                        Meet me at the Expo at Friday at 4:15ish in front of Ballroom A

                        We are giving away a Podcast Studio USB from Behringer to a member in October.

                        Sites Mentioned:Geologic Podcast www.geologicpodcast.com George's Book "Non Coloring Book" www.lulu.com/georgehrab Podcast Fast Pass www.podcastfastpass.com New Media Expo http://www.newmediaexpo.com/incoming.php?linkid=1759

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=256572#Mon, 17 Sep 2007 03:49:00 -040037:45falsefull105105Zoom H2 Reviewed and Back To School SpecialIt's Back to School of and you can save 20% off your membership at the School of Podcasting (thorugh 10/1) when you use the coupon " bts " (short for back to school). Membership has its privledges as we will give away a Podcast Studio USB from Behringer to a member in October.

                        Special thanks for Dave Gardner of www.ratcastradio.com and www.inlinehockeypodcast.com for the review of the Zoom H2 ($199 at Same Day Music and no TAX). Dave gives it 5 hockey pucks out of 5.

                        Also Members of the School of Podcasting we are having some great times at our roundtables. Recently Fred from www.strugglingentrepreneur.com interviewed Tim from www.sleddogpodcast.com so we are doing more than just Q&A.

                        ]]>It's Back to School of and you can save 20% off your membership at the School of Podcasting (thorugh 10/1) when you use the coupon " bts " (short for back to school). Membership has its privledges as we will give away a Podcast Studio USB from Behringer to a member in October.

                        Special thanks for Dave Gardner of www.ratcastradio.com and www.inlinehockeypodcast.com for the review of the Zoom H2 ($199 at Same Day Music and no TAX). Dave gives it 5 hockey pucks out of 5.

                        Also Members of the School of Podcasting we are having some great times at our roundtables. Recently Fred from www.strugglingentrepreneur.com interviewed Tim from www.sleddogpodcast.com so we are doing more than just Q&A.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=254563#Mon, 10 Sep 2007 21:38:00 -040016:26falsefull104104Zoom H4 Reviewed - Your Portable Sound BoothIn today's show I play around a bit with the Zoom H4 recorder. I mention that there are 3 setting for volume. You can adjust many increments in addition to those three. I mention that if you have an issue with finding a quiet area, you already do. It's called YOUR CAR.

                        I like the Zoom H4, I like its size, its battery, and the ability to record from XLR and 1/4." It has built in compressors and automatic recording level. I compare it to the Marantz MD660. The Zoom H4 doubles as a portable recorder AND a USB interface for recording. It also has a built in 4track recorder (great for musicians working on songs).

                        The Zoom H4 is roughly $300. The Marantz MD660 is closer to $600

                        Last 5 in 5 From Brian and www.dimacast.com

                        Blowing Smoke (google could not find this pdcast)

                        Accidental Creativehttp://www.samedaymusic.com/mc--518373

                        Today in iPhonewww.todayiniphone.com

                        The Rogues Galleryhttp://www.thedividingline.com/rg

                        Podholes http://www.podholes.com/

                        Intro from Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com one of my favroite podcasts.

                        Other sites MentionedQuiet Study Area www.quietstudyarea.com

                        ]]>In today's show I play around a bit with the Zoom H4 recorder. I mention that there are 3 setting for volume. You can adjust many increments in addition to those three. I mention that if you have an issue with finding a quiet area, you already do. It's called YOUR CAR.

                        I like the Zoom H4, I like its size, its battery, and the ability to record from XLR and 1/4." It has built in compressors and automatic recording level. I compare it to the Marantz MD660. The Zoom H4 doubles as a portable recorder AND a USB interface for recording. It also has a built in 4track recorder (great for musicians working on songs).

                        The Zoom H4 is roughly $300. The Marantz MD660 is closer to $600

                        Last 5 in 5 From Brian and www.dimacast.com

                        Blowing Smoke (google could not find this pdcast)

                        Accidental Creativehttp://www.samedaymusic.com/mc--518373

                        Today in iPhonewww.todayiniphone.com

                        The Rogues Galleryhttp://www.thedividingline.com/rg

                        Podholes http://www.podholes.com/

                        Intro from Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com one of my favroite podcasts.

                        Other sites MentionedQuiet Study Area www.quietstudyarea.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=252143#Tue, 04 Sep 2007 03:29:00 -040020:43falsefull103103Reviewing the Behringer USB Podcast StudioToday I am looking at the Behringer USB Podcast Studio. This retails for $100 and it comes with everything you need to start podcasting (cables, mic, software, etc).

                        This is geared towards the (in my opinion) single podcaster. You can connect more than one microphone to this, but there is only one XLR input (so you will need quarter inch cable converters, etc for mic number 2 - if you have more than one person "in studio").

                        Here is what I liked about it:The box comes with a handle making it every easy and convienient to take with you. It's small and doesn't take up your entire desk. The USB interface connected to both my computers without a hitch. I didn't even need to touch the driver CD. The manual is in a bunch of languages.The Price. If you purchased these separately you would be put out $158.

                        What I wish would change about the product.Add an ON/OFF switch.

                        Other Things to Consider:If you want to use a condensor microphone late, you will need to purchase a separate phantom powerWith ANY USB device you may need to switch back and forth in the control panel to set the input to USB. (However if this is the only itme you use as an input, you won't have to change this).

                        Bottom Line on Unit:As expected, a dynamic microphone is not quiet as clear as a condensor microphone (but it still osudns fine). However, the slight lack of high end could be compensated with a tweak of the EQ. If you're in a hurry, these items produce audio that is just as good (if not better) than many of the podcasts out there.

                        Check out the Podcaststudio an SAME DAY MUSIC or they have a Firewire version (built a bit more for two people, and has a condensor microphone).

                        If you are interested in what I'm using check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/tools

                        Brian Mundy from www.dimacast.com asked if Dave is rady for the Expo. (I'm not, but I do have my business cards ready). He mentioned how people "Podpause" and this can annoy listeners. Why not make a show that says "I'm working on it" to keep people involved. I've sent an email to Geoff Smith saying he should write a song saying "I'll be back" and we all could play it when we need to podpause. If you're involved with marketing and/or digital imaging check out www.dimacast.com

                        ]]>Today I am looking at the Behringer USB Podcast Studio. This retails for $100 and it comes with everything you need to start podcasting (cables, mic, software, etc).

                        This is geared towards the (in my opinion) single podcaster. You can connect more than one microphone to this, but there is only one XLR input (so you will need quarter inch cable converters, etc for mic number 2 - if you have more than one person "in studio").

                        Here is what I liked about it:The box comes with a handle making it every easy and convienient to take with you. It's small and doesn't take up your entire desk. The USB interface connected to both my computers without a hitch. I didn't even need to touch the driver CD. The manual is in a bunch of languages.The Price. If you purchased these separately you would be put out $158.

                        What I wish would change about the product.Add an ON/OFF switch.

                        Other Things to Consider:If you want to use a condensor microphone late, you will need to purchase a separate phantom powerWith ANY USB device you may need to switch back and forth in the control panel to set the input to USB. (However if this is the only itme you use as an input, you won't have to change this).

                        Bottom Line on Unit:As expected, a dynamic microphone is not quiet as clear as a condensor microphone (but it still osudns fine). However, the slight lack of high end could be compensated with a tweak of the EQ. If you're in a hurry, these items produce audio that is just as good (if not better) than many of the podcasts out there.

                        Check out the Podcaststudio an SAME DAY MUSIC or they have a Firewire version (built a bit more for two people, and has a condensor microphone).

                        If you are interested in what I'm using check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com/tools

                        Brian Mundy from www.dimacast.com asked if Dave is rady for the Expo. (I'm not, but I do have my business cards ready). He mentioned how people "Podpause" and this can annoy listeners. Why not make a show that says "I'm working on it" to keep people involved. I've sent an email to Geoff Smith saying he should write a song saying "I'll be back" and we all could play it when we need to podpause. If you're involved with marketing and/or digital imaging check out www.dimacast.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=249341#Sun, 26 Aug 2007 18:52:00 -040027:32falsefull102102Recording Phone Calls Without SkypeToday I exposure my mistake using voiceemotion.com to record Kevin Bromber from Nowlive.com so instead of embarrassing myself, (and the fact that Skype broke down), I used my "recount" of the interview with Kevin. We also get a last 5 in 5, and I announce some future shows.

                        Opening From Gary of www.podcastpickle.com

                        LAST 5 IN 5 Courtesy of Fred Castaneda http://folkloricomusicdance.blogspot.com

                        www.strugglingentrepreneur.com

                        1. The Morning Announcements2. Marketing Online Live www.marketingonlinelive.com3. Podcast Tools www.podcastools.com 4. Podcasting Underground www.podcastingunderground.com 5. Podcast Secrets (Premium). (check out www.secretswithdave.com )

                        Dave Talks About his conversation with Kevin Bromber The CEO and founder of www.nowlive.com (this was lost due to operator error). A new service that you can use that (as a Marquee user ) you can get high quality phone calls recorded (pricing on a case by case basis).

                        Of course, I could avoid all of this by using (you guessed it www.nowlive.com )

                        Other Sites MentionedBrian Dima and the Dima Cast www.dimacast.com Voice Emotion Software www.voiceemotion.com Nowlive.com www.nowlive.com

                        Coming in Future Shows:"Podpausing'Review of the Behringer Podcast KitReview of a Zoom H4.

                        ]]>Today I exposure my mistake using voiceemotion.com to record Kevin Bromber from Nowlive.com so instead of embarrassing myself, (and the fact that Skype broke down), I used my "recount" of the interview with Kevin. We also get a last 5 in 5, and I announce some future shows.

                        Opening From Gary of www.podcastpickle.com

                        LAST 5 IN 5 Courtesy of Fred Castaneda http://folkloricomusicdance.blogspot.com

                        www.strugglingentrepreneur.com

                        1. The Morning Announcements2. Marketing Online Live www.marketingonlinelive.com3. Podcast Tools www.podcastools.com 4. Podcasting Underground www.podcastingunderground.com 5. Podcast Secrets (Premium). (check out www.secretswithdave.com )

                        Dave Talks About his conversation with Kevin Bromber The CEO and founder of www.nowlive.com (this was lost due to operator error). A new service that you can use that (as a Marquee user ) you can get high quality phone calls recorded (pricing on a case by case basis).

                        Of course, I could avoid all of this by using (you guessed it www.nowlive.com )

                        Other Sites MentionedBrian Dima and the Dima Cast www.dimacast.com Voice Emotion Software www.voiceemotion.com Nowlive.com www.nowlive.com

                        Coming in Future Shows:"Podpausing'Review of the Behringer Podcast KitReview of a Zoom H4.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=246912#Mon, 20 Aug 2007 03:31:00 -040021:46falsefull101101Reflections on 100 SHows of Podcasting TipsToday I talk about any regrets I have after doing 100 shows. I have one thing I've changed (as of today). We also get some great feedback on organizing your podcast content. We also get a last 5 in 5.

                        (11:15) Organizing Your Podcast InputMike Wills from www.nextgenerationofradio.com uses docs.google.com Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com uses http://www.backpackit.com/  

                        Last 5 in 5Ken Blanchard the Urban Shooter Armed Citizen www.armedcitizenpodcast.com Girl 600 http://girl600.libsyn.com/ Gun Rights Advocates Podcast www.gunrights.us Old Time Radio Thrillers www.oldtimeradiofans.com School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.net (this site).

                        Other Sites Mentionedwww.betterdave.com www.musicnewspodcast.netwww.sleddogpodcast.com www.weeklywebtools.com www.banditsigns.com

                        ]]>Today I talk about any regrets I have after doing 100 shows. I have one thing I've changed (as of today). We also get some great feedback on organizing your podcast content. We also get a last 5 in 5.

                        (11:15) Organizing Your Podcast InputMike Wills from www.nextgenerationofradio.com uses docs.google.com Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com uses http://www.backpackit.com/  

                        Last 5 in 5Ken Blanchard the Urban Shooter Armed Citizen www.armedcitizenpodcast.com Girl 600 http://girl600.libsyn.com/ Gun Rights Advocates Podcast www.gunrights.us Old Time Radio Thrillers www.oldtimeradiofans.com School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.net (this site).

                        Other Sites Mentionedwww.betterdave.com www.musicnewspodcast.netwww.sleddogpodcast.com www.weeklywebtools.com www.banditsigns.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=243343#Mon, 13 Aug 2007 23:09:00 -040020:47falsefull100100Organzing Podcast ContentWe have a ton of studd on the show today. We give away Sound Pack 3 from soundgods.com Congrats to Paul Clifford of the Tech, No bable Show

                        You can earn money at Podcast Picke For Reviewing Podcasts

                        We talk about how to keep things organzied so you don't let content slip through your fingers (and miss making it on to your podcast).

                        We hear a promo for www.bestoftheworstpodcast.com

                        I also talk about how easy it is to use www.polldaddy.com

                        We then get a DUO of Last 5 in 5's (what were the last 5 podcasts you listened to, and tell us in less than 5 minutes).

                        Dan from Journey Inside My Mind www.jimmpodcast.com had these:Morning Stories www.gbh.org/morningstoriesCoverville www.coverville.com Anji Bee Chill Cast http://chillcast.podshow.com Lifespring weekend Music http://weekendmusic.lifespringonline.com/Friday Night Dance Party http://www.fridaynightdanceparty.com/

                        Rich from www.audiogumshoe.com had these:

                        Amp New Music Weekly http://amped.libsyn.com/Seventh Son  http://www.jchutchins.net/7thSonPodcast.xmlFIR For Immediate release http://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com Kids Wife Work Life http://www.kidswifeworklife.com/

                         

                        ]]>We have a ton of studd on the show today. We give away Sound Pack 3 from soundgods.com Congrats to Paul Clifford of the Tech, No bable Show

                        You can earn money at Podcast Picke For Reviewing Podcasts

                        We talk about how to keep things organzied so you don't let content slip through your fingers (and miss making it on to your podcast).

                        We hear a promo for www.bestoftheworstpodcast.com

                        I also talk about how easy it is to use www.polldaddy.com

                        We then get a DUO of Last 5 in 5's (what were the last 5 podcasts you listened to, and tell us in less than 5 minutes).

                        Dan from Journey Inside My Mind www.jimmpodcast.com had these:Morning Stories www.gbh.org/morningstoriesCoverville www.coverville.com Anji Bee Chill Cast http://chillcast.podshow.com Lifespring weekend Music http://weekendmusic.lifespringonline.com/Friday Night Dance Party http://www.fridaynightdanceparty.com/

                        Rich from www.audiogumshoe.com had these:

                        Amp New Music Weekly http://amped.libsyn.com/Seventh Son  http://www.jchutchins.net/7thSonPodcast.xmlFIR For Immediate release http://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com Kids Wife Work Life http://www.kidswifeworklife.com/

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=242644#Mon, 06 Aug 2007 18:23:00 -040019:14falsefull9999 A Podcast That Never ExpiresThe great thing about podcasting is its getting big enough for companies to start building tools for podcasters. Today we look at the Audio Lite system from Gigavox (the makers of the Levelator). www.gigavox.com

                        You can record your podcast in segements. Then (if needed) you can update certain segments (like an advertiser spot) in the current AND PAST podcasts. I'm using this not for advertisers, but for a non-profit (my church). Instead of having advertising spots rotate in and out, we use it for our calendar, and prayer concerns (items that chance from week to week). This way people are up to date with the latest news (no matter what episode they listen to). In reality your podcast can be evergreen. The information can be updated in past shows. The good news is its free to use. Take some time to think about it and how you want your podcast to go from section to section. I love it. Oh yeah. IT's FREE.

                        The "bad" news is it doesn't work with Libsyn (it does with the more expensive Libsyn Pro). So I looked at some different web hosts that had unlimited bandwidth (like Midphase.com ) and ended up with Dreamhost.com (as they increase your storage and bandwidth the longer you stay on their system). I will keep you in the loop as we move forward.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Tim Dewey of the Sled Dog Podcastwww.sleddogpodcast.com

                        For Immediate Releasehttp://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        School of Podcasting Students Only

                        Sales Roundup Podcasthttp://www.salesroundup.com/

                        Cold Calling Podcasthttp://coldcallingpodcast.com/

                        The Hunt Casthttp://huntcast.blogspot.com

                        Other Sites MentionedPaul Colligan www.paulcolligan.com www.121Podcasting.com  (sell your podcast, do audio books and more).Weekly Web Tools www.weeklywebtools.com Community Baptist Church www.cbcot.com

                        School of Podcasting. Learn how to podcast RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>The great thing about podcasting is its getting big enough for companies to start building tools for podcasters. Today we look at the Audio Lite system from Gigavox (the makers of the Levelator). www.gigavox.com

                        You can record your podcast in segements. Then (if needed) you can update certain segments (like an advertiser spot) in the current AND PAST podcasts. I'm using this not for advertisers, but for a non-profit (my church). Instead of having advertising spots rotate in and out, we use it for our calendar, and prayer concerns (items that chance from week to week). This way people are up to date with the latest news (no matter what episode they listen to). In reality your podcast can be evergreen. The information can be updated in past shows. The good news is its free to use. Take some time to think about it and how you want your podcast to go from section to section. I love it. Oh yeah. IT's FREE.

                        The "bad" news is it doesn't work with Libsyn (it does with the more expensive Libsyn Pro). So I looked at some different web hosts that had unlimited bandwidth (like Midphase.com ) and ended up with Dreamhost.com (as they increase your storage and bandwidth the longer you stay on their system). I will keep you in the loop as we move forward.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Tim Dewey of the Sled Dog Podcastwww.sleddogpodcast.com

                        For Immediate Releasehttp://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        School of Podcasting Students Only

                        Sales Roundup Podcasthttp://www.salesroundup.com/

                        Cold Calling Podcasthttp://coldcallingpodcast.com/

                        The Hunt Casthttp://huntcast.blogspot.com

                        Other Sites MentionedPaul Colligan www.paulcolligan.com www.121Podcasting.com  (sell your podcast, do audio books and more).Weekly Web Tools www.weeklywebtools.com Community Baptist Church www.cbcot.com

                        School of Podcasting. Learn how to podcast RISK FREE at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=240035#Sun, 29 Jul 2007 21:45:00 -040016:30falsefull9898Free Sound Effects and Running the NumbersToday I went and looked at some numbers regarding people using phones to listen to the School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements. I use voiceindigo.com and I had anywhere from 15 to 47 downloads a month. I also looked at how many people used the link shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com and since April 100 people have used that link (which typically is not in print like today, but only heard in the podcast). So people ARE going to links they listen to.

                        Sending Your Podcast to a Phonewww.voiceindigo.com Chris Penn's iPhone Kit http://www.financialaidpodcast.com/2007/06/30/financial-aid-podcast-podcaster-iphone-kit/

                         

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Dan Johnson of www.jimmpodcast.com Morning Announcements (this podcast - SUCK UP :) )Total Picture www.totalpicture.com (business leaders)Chill Cast www.anjibee.com (chill out with Anji)www.lynnparsons.net/redlightzone (A late night vibe podcast)www.jimmpodcast.com (An insight into Dan's mind)

                        Other Sites Mentioned:www.soundsnap.com www.projectstudionetwork.com

                        ]]>Today I went and looked at some numbers regarding people using phones to listen to the School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements. I use voiceindigo.com and I had anywhere from 15 to 47 downloads a month. I also looked at how many people used the link shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com and since April 100 people have used that link (which typically is not in print like today, but only heard in the podcast). So people ARE going to links they listen to.

                        Sending Your Podcast to a Phonewww.voiceindigo.com Chris Penn's iPhone Kit http://www.financialaidpodcast.com/2007/06/30/financial-aid-podcast-podcaster-iphone-kit/

                         

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From Dan Johnson of www.jimmpodcast.com Morning Announcements (this podcast - SUCK UP :) )Total Picture www.totalpicture.com (business leaders)Chill Cast www.anjibee.com (chill out with Anji)www.lynnparsons.net/redlightzone (A late night vibe podcast)www.jimmpodcast.com (An insight into Dan's mind)

                        Other Sites Mentioned:www.soundsnap.com www.projectstudionetwork.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=237710#Sun, 22 Jul 2007 19:43:00 -040015:36falsefull9797Understanding Double EndersToday we talk about what a double ender is, and some tips on recording them. We also talk about the newdirectory I've added at
                        Also mentioned: www.box.net]]>Today we talk about what a double ender is, and some tips on recording them. We also talk about the newdirectory I've added at
                        Also mentioned: www.box.net]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=235538#Sun, 15 Jul 2007 23:32:00 -040015:00falsefull9696One to One Podcasting with Paul ColliganIn the episode we interview Paul Colligan of www.paulcolligan.com who has created a new Premium Podcast Solution that you can find at www.onetoonepodcasting.com

                        This solution has three difference levels (including free), that allows you to have a private podcast, sell your podcast, sell a digital product, have an affilaite program, and and and .. (it does everything). It lets you podcast differently. I've had people ask how do to do certain things in podcasting in the past and there wasn't a solution - now there is.

                        You can save 15% off  FOR LIFE using the coupon code sop121 if you want the pro version. You need to sign up by August 1st, 2007.

                        You can save 15% off  FOR LIFE using the coupon code sop121v if you want the viral version. You need to sign up by August 1st, 2007. (So don't be tardy).

                        If you want to see www.onetoonepodcasting.com in action check out www.askpaulcolligan.com

                        Dave mentions that we wil have a drawing at the end of the month for School of Podcasting members, and listeners who had added The Morning Announcements to their favorites at Podcast Pickle.

                        Winners receive "Dog pack 3" from www.sounddogs.com

                        Lastly, Dave recently launched a new graphic based directory at www.learntosubscribe.com/podcast (you can use a free video at www.learntosubscribe.com/linktous.htm ) members of the School of Podcasting get 20 free clicks. For a complete list of bonus for members of the School of Podcasting click here

                        ]]>In the episode we interview Paul Colligan of www.paulcolligan.com who has created a new Premium Podcast Solution that you can find at www.onetoonepodcasting.com

                        This solution has three difference levels (including free), that allows you to have a private podcast, sell your podcast, sell a digital product, have an affilaite program, and and and .. (it does everything). It lets you podcast differently. I've had people ask how do to do certain things in podcasting in the past and there wasn't a solution - now there is.

                        You can save 15% off  FOR LIFE using the coupon code sop121 if you want the pro version. You need to sign up by August 1st, 2007.

                        You can save 15% off  FOR LIFE using the coupon code sop121v if you want the viral version. You need to sign up by August 1st, 2007. (So don't be tardy).

                        If you want to see www.onetoonepodcasting.com in action check out www.askpaulcolligan.com

                        Dave mentions that we wil have a drawing at the end of the month for School of Podcasting members, and listeners who had added The Morning Announcements to their favorites at Podcast Pickle.

                        Winners receive "Dog pack 3" from www.sounddogs.com

                        Lastly, Dave recently launched a new graphic based directory at www.learntosubscribe.com/podcast (you can use a free video at www.learntosubscribe.com/linktous.htm ) members of the School of Podcasting get 20 free clicks. For a complete list of bonus for members of the School of Podcasting click here

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=232790#Tue, 10 Jul 2007 04:01:00 -040039:27falsefull9494Flipping the Podcast Promotion SwitchIs there ONE thing that you can do to bring a giant number of listeners? Probably not, but the key values are the same - find out where your listeners hang out and get some information to them. "You need to move to where the food is..."

                        We are giving away "Dog Pack #3" from www.sounddogs.com to a School of Podcasting Listener who puts the School of Podcasting as a favorite at www.podcastpickle.com (members are already entered).

                        Voicemail from Daniel Johnson of www.jimmpodcast.com Email from George at:http://OneMinuteHowTo.comhttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://DRiPInvesting.orghttp://GLSmyth.com - Blog: http://GLSmyth.WordPress.com

                        Getting Ready For the Expo

                        Time to get your business cards, and decide how you will network at the expo.

                        Don't Forget About the Bonuses for Being a Member of the School of Podcasting

                        Sponsor: Coolerwebsites.com www.coolerwebsites.com Quit paying for heb hosting space you'll never use!

                        ]]>Is there ONE thing that you can do to bring a giant number of listeners? Probably not, but the key values are the same - find out where your listeners hang out and get some information to them. "You need to move to where the food is..."

                        We are giving away "Dog Pack #3" from www.sounddogs.com to a School of Podcasting Listener who puts the School of Podcasting as a favorite at www.podcastpickle.com (members are already entered).

                        Voicemail from Daniel Johnson of www.jimmpodcast.com Email from George at:http://OneMinuteHowTo.comhttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://DRiPInvesting.orghttp://GLSmyth.com - Blog: http://GLSmyth.WordPress.com

                        Getting Ready For the Expo

                        Time to get your business cards, and decide how you will network at the expo.

                        Don't Forget About the Bonuses for Being a Member of the School of Podcasting

                        Sponsor: Coolerwebsites.com www.coolerwebsites.com Quit paying for heb hosting space you'll never use!

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=230901#Mon, 02 Jul 2007 05:09:00 -040024:19falsefull9393Affordable Wordpress HostingI've started my own hosting company at www.coolerwebsites.com and have created some packages geared towards podcasters who are looking to host their files at Libsyn, and have a Wordpress Blog on their own site. Are you ready? It's only $1.99 a month and you have more than enough space to host your blog.

                        BUT WAIT THERE IS MORE.

                        School of Podcasting Members can get an additional 20% off (login to get coupon).

                        Affordable Royalty Free Jazz MusicMike Stewart and his musical writing partner have put out a royalty free CD of jazz music. It's about $150 worth of music for $9.99 FOr more information CLICK HERE (School of Podcasting Members can get a $2 discount)

                        Podcast Pickle FavoritesGary from Podcast Pickle has started a blog at http://pdillys.com/2007/06/08/understanding-our-favorites-system-at-podcast-pickle/ and I mention his blog item about Podcast Pickle Favorites. You may not be begging for Podcast Alley Votes again.

                        Copy CatsDaniel Johnson from Journey Inside My Mind (www.jimmpodcast.com ) mentioned that he had dound my podcast on another "generic" blog. It turns out that there is software that people can put on a website to "copy" your blog, (as well as other podcasters/bloggers) posts. He had heard about this from Paul Colligan and the interesting thing is if you don't put your website address in your show readers may not know where the information came from. With that in mind, you are reading items from

                        http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>I've started my own hosting company at www.coolerwebsites.com and have created some packages geared towards podcasters who are looking to host their files at Libsyn, and have a Wordpress Blog on their own site. Are you ready? It's only $1.99 a month and you have more than enough space to host your blog.

                        BUT WAIT THERE IS MORE.

                        School of Podcasting Members can get an additional 20% off (login to get coupon).

                        Affordable Royalty Free Jazz MusicMike Stewart and his musical writing partner have put out a royalty free CD of jazz music. It's about $150 worth of music for $9.99 FOr more information CLICK HERE (School of Podcasting Members can get a $2 discount)

                        Podcast Pickle FavoritesGary from Podcast Pickle has started a blog at http://pdillys.com/2007/06/08/understanding-our-favorites-system-at-podcast-pickle/ and I mention his blog item about Podcast Pickle Favorites. You may not be begging for Podcast Alley Votes again.

                        Copy CatsDaniel Johnson from Journey Inside My Mind (www.jimmpodcast.com ) mentioned that he had dound my podcast on another "generic" blog. It turns out that there is software that people can put on a website to "copy" your blog, (as well as other podcasters/bloggers) posts. He had heard about this from Paul Colligan and the interesting thing is if you don't put your website address in your show readers may not know where the information came from. With that in mind, you are reading items from

                        http://shownotes.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=227965#Mon, 25 Jun 2007 02:05:00 -040020:00falsefull9292When Your Podcast ExplodesMembers of the School of Podcasting have another discount to take advantage of from studiocutz.com on their Podcaster Toolkit DVD. Members get 15% (25 bucks!) off using a coupon code found inside the members area (and yes you could sign up for a one day pass (5 bucks) get the coupon code and come out 20 bucks ahead of the game. The sales runs through mid July.

                        Opening by Steve from www.geekcred.net

                        Recommended Product www.trykall8.com Never Worry About Losing Your Voicemail Number due to lack of calls.

                        Johnathan Waltz had his podcast mentioned in a Blog about his powerscripting podcast (http://powerscripting.wordpress.com/ ). Realize that your podcast could be mentioned by anyone and your audience could explode. This is why you need a host for your podcast that offers unlimited bandwidth. That way no matter how popular your podcast is, you NEVER have to worry about bandwidth. I suggest www.uselibsyn.com (the service I use for the SOP).

                        Vince from the B Movie Podcast (www.bmoviecast.com ) answers the question "I'm sure glad I started podcasting because I enjoy talking about the thing I love which is B-movies and cult movies. I like sharing with and finding like minding people to talk to on the subject. I have met a lot of cool people by listening to similar Podcasts on the subject. I met two guys from the Mondo Movie podcast by interacting acting with there podcast. We went on a vacation to Europe in May and I got to meet them in London at a pub and talk for hours. How cool is that. It doesn't get much better than that." - Vincewww.bmoviecast.com

                        People may be "mashing" your RSS feed in the future so be sure to keep announcing what your podcast is, where they can find more, and how to contact you. Podshow has channels, and Yahoo has Pipes (http://pipes.yahoo.com/pipes/ ) These allow multiple RSS feeds to be combined into one.

                        ]]>Members of the School of Podcasting have another discount to take advantage of from studiocutz.com on their Podcaster Toolkit DVD. Members get 15% (25 bucks!) off using a coupon code found inside the members area (and yes you could sign up for a one day pass (5 bucks) get the coupon code and come out 20 bucks ahead of the game. The sales runs through mid July.

                        Opening by Steve from www.geekcred.net

                        Recommended Product www.trykall8.com Never Worry About Losing Your Voicemail Number due to lack of calls.

                        Johnathan Waltz had his podcast mentioned in a Blog about his powerscripting podcast (http://powerscripting.wordpress.com/ ). Realize that your podcast could be mentioned by anyone and your audience could explode. This is why you need a host for your podcast that offers unlimited bandwidth. That way no matter how popular your podcast is, you NEVER have to worry about bandwidth. I suggest www.uselibsyn.com (the service I use for the SOP).

                        Vince from the B Movie Podcast (www.bmoviecast.com ) answers the question "I'm sure glad I started podcasting because I enjoy talking about the thing I love which is B-movies and cult movies. I like sharing with and finding like minding people to talk to on the subject. I have met a lot of cool people by listening to similar Podcasts on the subject. I met two guys from the Mondo Movie podcast by interacting acting with there podcast. We went on a vacation to Europe in May and I got to meet them in London at a pub and talk for hours. How cool is that. It doesn't get much better than that." - Vincewww.bmoviecast.com

                        People may be "mashing" your RSS feed in the future so be sure to keep announcing what your podcast is, where they can find more, and how to contact you. Podshow has channels, and Yahoo has Pipes (http://pipes.yahoo.com/pipes/ ) These allow multiple RSS feeds to be combined into one.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=226610#Mon, 18 Jun 2007 12:54:00 -040015:57falsefull9191Podcast Contest SecretsJoin us as we interview "Ringmaster Greg" from the Dancing With Elephants Podcast (http://www.dwithe.com ) about the contest that involved cross promotion with other podcasters to help give away an ipod shuffle. In the end their listener numbers went up, but was it worth it? Listen an find out.

                        Last 5 in 5dinkycast.http://dinkycast.com/

                        car talk NPRhttp://www.npr.org/rss/podcast.php?id=510097

                        Mac Casthttp://maccast.com/

                        Daily Giz WIzhttp://twit.tv/

                        Dr Floydhttp://www.doctorfloyd.com/

                        Get your domain name for $6.95 using the coupon code cooler3 when you check out at www.godaddy.com

                        Need a host for your blog? Check out www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>Join us as we interview "Ringmaster Greg" from the Dancing With Elephants Podcast (http://www.dwithe.com ) about the contest that involved cross promotion with other podcasters to help give away an ipod shuffle. In the end their listener numbers went up, but was it worth it? Listen an find out.

                        Last 5 in 5dinkycast.http://dinkycast.com/

                        car talk NPRhttp://www.npr.org/rss/podcast.php?id=510097

                        Mac Casthttp://maccast.com/

                        Daily Giz WIzhttp://twit.tv/

                        Dr Floydhttp://www.doctorfloyd.com/

                        Get your domain name for $6.95 using the coupon code cooler3 when you check out at www.godaddy.com

                        Need a host for your blog? Check out www.coolerwebsites.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=224085#Mon, 11 Jun 2007 01:51:00 -040026:52falsefull9090Never Have an Outdated Podcast AgainI am looking for answers to the question:

                        I couldn't have done ___ if it was for podcasting.

                        Or

                        I sure am glad I started podcasting because _______

                         

                        I talk with Ram Krishnan of www.castmetrix.com which is a company that allows you to gnerate dynamic content. For example I will be at he expo this year. I could put a segment into the system, and then after the expo, I could change that segment to talk about where people can download my presentation. The castmetrix.com system generates the file based on criteria that you set.

                        For more information go to www.castmetrix.com

                        Check out the new "Step by step" Podcast tutorials at www.schoolofpdocasting.com

                         

                        ]]>I am looking for answers to the question:

                        I couldn't have done ___ if it was for podcasting.

                        Or

                        I sure am glad I started podcasting because _______

                         

                        I talk with Ram Krishnan of www.castmetrix.com which is a company that allows you to gnerate dynamic content. For example I will be at he expo this year. I could put a segment into the system, and then after the expo, I could change that segment to talk about where people can download my presentation. The castmetrix.com system generates the file based on criteria that you set.

                        For more information go to www.castmetrix.com

                        Check out the new "Step by step" Podcast tutorials at www.schoolofpdocasting.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=221685#Mon, 04 Jun 2007 02:19:00 -040019:37falsefull8989You Don't Need a "DJ" Voice To PodcastToday we talk about using a "Radio Voice" to be a podcaster. I talk about Dr Dave from www.shrinkwrapradio.com who was worried that he didn't have a "DJ" voice. He's doing fine, and remember that many people do NOT want to hear a "DJ" voice.

                        We talk about forum spam. One way to cut down on spam is to require approval of all new members. George from the www.oneminutehowto.com podcast explains he finally wrote a program to stop spam on his website.

                        I also mention how I've started a "Step by Step" section at the School of Podcasting with my recommended software program, hosting solutions, etc. If you are looking for a quick way to start podcasting, the School of Podcasting is a great solution. www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Dave explains that Mixcraft from Acoustica is his recommended "Multi-track" podcasting software.

                        ]]>Today we talk about using a "Radio Voice" to be a podcaster. I talk about Dr Dave from www.shrinkwrapradio.com who was worried that he didn't have a "DJ" voice. He's doing fine, and remember that many people do NOT want to hear a "DJ" voice.

                        We talk about forum spam. One way to cut down on spam is to require approval of all new members. George from the www.oneminutehowto.com podcast explains he finally wrote a program to stop spam on his website.

                        I also mention how I've started a "Step by Step" section at the School of Podcasting with my recommended software program, hosting solutions, etc. If you are looking for a quick way to start podcasting, the School of Podcasting is a great solution. www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Dave explains that Mixcraft from Acoustica is his recommended "Multi-track" podcasting software.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=219034#Mon, 28 May 2007 04:01:00 -040015:17falsefull8888 Pacing Yourself as a PodcasterI talk about pacing yourself (your conent) when you hit the jackpot. We also talk about bulletin boards (forums), and how to fight spam. Wew also talk about doing an "Anniversary show."

                        We also throw out the question, "Does anyone know a WYSIWYG theme editor for worpdress?"

                        Affiliate link of the Month: www.trykall8.com Don't lose sleep worring if your voicemail number will be lost, it's only 2 bucks a month and .06 a minute and you never have to worry about losing your podcast vociemail number again.

                        Sites and products mentioned:

                        Cooler Websites www.coolerwebsites.com PhpBB http://www.phpbb.com/ Simple Machines Forum http://www.simplemachines.org/ 

                        Start your podcast today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>I talk about pacing yourself (your conent) when you hit the jackpot. We also talk about bulletin boards (forums), and how to fight spam. Wew also talk about doing an "Anniversary show."

                        We also throw out the question, "Does anyone know a WYSIWYG theme editor for worpdress?"

                        Affiliate link of the Month: www.trykall8.com Don't lose sleep worring if your voicemail number will be lost, it's only 2 bucks a month and .06 a minute and you never have to worry about losing your podcast vociemail number again.

                        Sites and products mentioned:

                        Cooler Websites www.coolerwebsites.com PhpBB http://www.phpbb.com/ Simple Machines Forum http://www.simplemachines.org/ 

                        Start your podcast today at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=216772#Sun, 20 May 2007 22:28:00 -040019:11falsefull8787Podcast Flyer Tips and Revisting Your Episode NameToday I talk about some experiments I've done promoting my podcast. I also talk about some of the results I've done by finding a tool thats fits your listeners - in my case it was bookmarks promoting m podcast to college students - and how effective it can be.

                        HOWEVER, I think that one of the reasons I have seen a rise in my listeners is due to my episdoe headlines. If you just put "your podcast name #12 " that doesn't entice people to listen. Make it easier for your listener by giving them a clue as to what is in your latest show.

                        Today's affilaite link is www.trykall8.com get your own toll free number for $2 a month and only .06 a minute. Make it easy for your listeners to call, and never woory about losing your voicemail number again.

                        If you would like to start your own podcast, check us out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Today I talk about some experiments I've done promoting my podcast. I also talk about some of the results I've done by finding a tool thats fits your listeners - in my case it was bookmarks promoting m podcast to college students - and how effective it can be.

                        HOWEVER, I think that one of the reasons I have seen a rise in my listeners is due to my episdoe headlines. If you just put "your podcast name #12 " that doesn't entice people to listen. Make it easier for your listener by giving them a clue as to what is in your latest show.

                        Today's affilaite link is www.trykall8.com get your own toll free number for $2 a month and only .06 a minute. Make it easy for your listeners to call, and never woory about losing your voicemail number again.

                        If you would like to start your own podcast, check us out at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=214355#Mon, 14 May 2007 03:23:00 -040010:52falsefull8686 Never Lose Your Voicemail NumberDid you know that if you don't use your k7.net phone number in 30 days it will go away? Well here is a way to never worry about losing your voicemail. Check out www.trykall8.com where you can get a toll free number for $2 a month (plus .06 a call for each minute). No matter if people call or not, you will not lose your phone number.

                        Always looking for shw intros "This is __ from the ___ and you're listneing to the School of Podcasting's morning announcements.

                        Looking for a cheap hosting? Check out http://www.coolerwebpages.com/ (SOP members get %25 off the already low price).

                        Dave talks about a poll he was doing on another non-podcast related site. The results:

                        Have you listened to a Podcast? Yes 27 percentNo 61 PercentWhat is a podcast? 12 percent

                        Comments from Laura of www.mbaworkinggirl.com really liked the tutorial at www.learntosubscribe.com (You can link to this at this page http://www.learntosubscribe.com/linktous.htm )

                        Podcast Reviews WebsitesPodcast Fanatichttp://podcastfanatic.wordpress.com/Podcast Reviewshttp://podcastreviews.net/  Audio Addictshttp://societyfans.blogspot.com/ For Further Reviewhttp://www.furtherreview.net/Podcast Reviewshttp://www.podcastrev.com/

                        New Portable Recorder Coming the Zoom H2 Check it out at Same Day Music $199

                        Other Sites MentionedToday in iPhone www.todayiniphone.com  Dancing With Elephants www.dwith3.com

                        ]]>Did you know that if you don't use your k7.net phone number in 30 days it will go away? Well here is a way to never worry about losing your voicemail. Check out www.trykall8.com where you can get a toll free number for $2 a month (plus .06 a call for each minute). No matter if people call or not, you will not lose your phone number.

                        Always looking for shw intros "This is __ from the ___ and you're listneing to the School of Podcasting's morning announcements.

                        Looking for a cheap hosting? Check out http://www.coolerwebpages.com/ (SOP members get %25 off the already low price).

                        Dave talks about a poll he was doing on another non-podcast related site. The results:

                        Have you listened to a Podcast? Yes 27 percentNo 61 PercentWhat is a podcast? 12 percent

                        Comments from Laura of www.mbaworkinggirl.com really liked the tutorial at www.learntosubscribe.com (You can link to this at this page http://www.learntosubscribe.com/linktous.htm )

                        Podcast Reviews WebsitesPodcast Fanatichttp://podcastfanatic.wordpress.com/Podcast Reviewshttp://podcastreviews.net/  Audio Addictshttp://societyfans.blogspot.com/ For Further Reviewhttp://www.furtherreview.net/Podcast Reviewshttp://www.podcastrev.com/

                        New Portable Recorder Coming the Zoom H2 Check it out at Same Day Music $199

                        Other Sites MentionedToday in iPhone www.todayiniphone.com  Dancing With Elephants www.dwith3.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=211744#Mon, 07 May 2007 02:56:00 -040017:58falsefull8585Getting More Podcast SubscribersIn this podcast we throw out some podcast promotion tips, why "hard sell" podcasts are stupid, and some new free services for podcasters.

                        TIMELINE:

                        1:30 Feedback from Taylor Marek about a promtion that was being run by Dancing With Elephants (www.dwithe.com ) full details about promotion can be found HERE 

                        4:48 Giving away an ipod Shuffle.

                        will cost you about 80 bucks.

                        5:50 Feedback on the "Graffitti tip" from Mark Anderson

                        9:50 Other Podcast Promotion Ideas. Book Mentioned: Tricks of the Podcasting Masters 

                        10:25 Find your podcast in the iTune directory and play with "also subscribe to this podcast."

                         

                        12:19 www.trypersony.com a great way to collaborate online and NO SOFTWARE TO LOAD, NO monthly fees, NO huge sticker price. Try it for free at www.trypersony.com

                         

                        13:55 Free Services For PodcastersPodcastlcicks.com www.podcastclicks.com Learntosubscribe.com www.learntosubscribe.com (link to this site)

                        Want to start your own podcast? Check out our main stie at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>In this podcast we throw out some podcast promotion tips, why "hard sell" podcasts are stupid, and some new free services for podcasters.

                        TIMELINE:

                        1:30 Feedback from Taylor Marek about a promtion that was being run by Dancing With Elephants (www.dwithe.com ) full details about promotion can be found HERE 

                        4:48 Giving away an ipod Shuffle.

                        will cost you about 80 bucks.

                        5:50 Feedback on the "Graffitti tip" from Mark Anderson

                        9:50 Other Podcast Promotion Ideas. Book Mentioned: Tricks of the Podcasting Masters 

                        10:25 Find your podcast in the iTune directory and play with "also subscribe to this podcast."

                         

                        12:19 www.trypersony.com a great way to collaborate online and NO SOFTWARE TO LOAD, NO monthly fees, NO huge sticker price. Try it for free at www.trypersony.com

                         

                        13:55 Free Services For PodcastersPodcastlcicks.com www.podcastclicks.com Learntosubscribe.com www.learntosubscribe.com (link to this site)

                        Want to start your own podcast? Check out our main stie at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=209073#Sun, 29 Apr 2007 19:05:00 -040018:01falsefull8484Chalk Up Another Podcast Promotion IdeaDave gets some listener feedback from Chris at amateurtraveler.com and Paul from technobabelshow.com

                        I was reading a book about marketing a musical group and it mentioned using chalk to promote your band. Would this work for podcasters? Find where your taget market goes and write your website in front of the entrance? Is this a great first impression?

                        Get your own domain name for 6.95 a years using the coupon code cooler3 or 10% off using cooler1 I give a brief update on bookmarks as a promotional tool.

                        SPONSORwww.trypersony.com Costt Effective Web Meetings. Try it for free. No Sign up needed.

                        Last 5 in 5 from Mark at podsquod.com MAC OSG http://podcast.macosg.com/ Palm OSC http://palmosc.com/test/Apple News Now http://www.applenewsnow.com/ Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com Desparate Husbands http://www.desperatehusbands.net

                        Other sites mentionedwww.todayinpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Dave gets some listener feedback from Chris at amateurtraveler.com and Paul from technobabelshow.com

                        I was reading a book about marketing a musical group and it mentioned using chalk to promote your band. Would this work for podcasters? Find where your taget market goes and write your website in front of the entrance? Is this a great first impression?

                        Get your own domain name for 6.95 a years using the coupon code cooler3 or 10% off using cooler1 I give a brief update on bookmarks as a promotional tool.

                        SPONSORwww.trypersony.com Costt Effective Web Meetings. Try it for free. No Sign up needed.

                        Last 5 in 5 from Mark at podsquod.com MAC OSG http://podcast.macosg.com/ Palm OSC http://palmosc.com/test/Apple News Now http://www.applenewsnow.com/ Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com Desparate Husbands http://www.desperatehusbands.net

                        Other sites mentionedwww.todayinpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=206598#Mon, 23 Apr 2007 01:24:00 -040015:07falsefull8383Creating Same Page PodcastingPeople have asked me "Should I write down what to say on a podcast?" When they ask this they mean every word. This is NOT the way to go. I talk about a podcast that is the EXACT content I'm looking for and I CAN'T LISTEN as the podcaster is reading a book.

                        Most podcasts are one side of a two-way, time-shifted, conversation. Do you read what you are going to say when you call your Mom?

                        Instead, map out your ideas on note cards, or use software like Microsoft Word, or notepad, to make bullet points. This enables you to create the free flowing, natural sounding conversation based on the bullet point.

                        If you are looking for more interaction with your podcast, check out Six Pixels of the Separation podcast at http://www.twistimage.com/blog/

                        LAST 5 IN 5 Featuring Michael Butler of the Rock and Roll Geek Show

                        Evel Genious Chronicles www.evilgeniuschronicles.orgAdam Currys's Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com Madge Weinsteins Yeast Radio www.yeastradio.com Plan Nine Rock Show http://plannineprint.com/podcast.html Musicians Cooler http://www.musicianscooler.com

                        Check out Michael Butler's Rock and Roll Geek show at www.rockandrollgeek.com

                        Persony Has taken the bite out of online meetings. Harness the power of online meetings WITHOUT the monthly fees. Try it free at www.trypersony.com

                        Check out our 100s of resources and hours of tutorials to help you launch your podcast (along with Dave as your personal Podcast coach) at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>People have asked me "Should I write down what to say on a podcast?" When they ask this they mean every word. This is NOT the way to go. I talk about a podcast that is the EXACT content I'm looking for and I CAN'T LISTEN as the podcaster is reading a book.

                        Most podcasts are one side of a two-way, time-shifted, conversation. Do you read what you are going to say when you call your Mom?

                        Instead, map out your ideas on note cards, or use software like Microsoft Word, or notepad, to make bullet points. This enables you to create the free flowing, natural sounding conversation based on the bullet point.

                        If you are looking for more interaction with your podcast, check out Six Pixels of the Separation podcast at http://www.twistimage.com/blog/

                        LAST 5 IN 5 Featuring Michael Butler of the Rock and Roll Geek Show

                        Evel Genious Chronicles www.evilgeniuschronicles.orgAdam Currys's Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com Madge Weinsteins Yeast Radio www.yeastradio.com Plan Nine Rock Show http://plannineprint.com/podcast.html Musicians Cooler http://www.musicianscooler.com

                        Check out Michael Butler's Rock and Roll Geek show at www.rockandrollgeek.com

                        Persony Has taken the bite out of online meetings. Harness the power of online meetings WITHOUT the monthly fees. Try it free at www.trypersony.com

                        Check out our 100s of resources and hours of tutorials to help you launch your podcast (along with Dave as your personal Podcast coach) at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=201464#Mon, 09 Apr 2007 01:47:00 -040015:16falsefull8282Icing on the Cake - Presentation TipsNEW SPONSOR: www.trypersony.com The power of online meetings without the monthly fees.

                        Today I'm talking about some tips for presentation, as well we WHY you should be doing some osrt of introduction for your podcast. This includes:

                        Doing Transistions Between Topics:Enable the listener to fast forward through topics they may not want ot listen to, and makes the whole flow of the podcast better.

                        When you just stop music, it jars the listener. You want the transition to signal something new is now on board.

                        If you are looking for theme music check out http://music.podshow.com and do a search for the word themes, beats, etc

                        Get a pop filter for your podcast. Popping P's are annoying. They are about 20 bucks, and can boost your presentation immensly.

                        Dave explains the jibberish issue when it comes to looking at an XML file.

                        The reason you should do some sort of introduction to your pdocast is for the Apple iPod Shuffle users. Even if you don't care about shuffle users, its beneficial for the lsitener. Its all about the listener.

                        Special thanks to Laura Adam of the MBA Working Girl podcast at www.mbaworkinggirl.com

                         Music from the Podsafe Music Network

                        ]]>NEW SPONSOR: www.trypersony.com The power of online meetings without the monthly fees.

                        Today I'm talking about some tips for presentation, as well we WHY you should be doing some osrt of introduction for your podcast. This includes:

                        Doing Transistions Between Topics:Enable the listener to fast forward through topics they may not want ot listen to, and makes the whole flow of the podcast better.

                        When you just stop music, it jars the listener. You want the transition to signal something new is now on board.

                        If you are looking for theme music check out http://music.podshow.com and do a search for the word themes, beats, etc

                        Get a pop filter for your podcast. Popping P's are annoying. They are about 20 bucks, and can boost your presentation immensly.

                        Dave explains the jibberish issue when it comes to looking at an XML file.

                        The reason you should do some sort of introduction to your pdocast is for the Apple iPod Shuffle users. Even if you don't care about shuffle users, its beneficial for the lsitener. Its all about the listener.

                        Special thanks to Laura Adam of the MBA Working Girl podcast at www.mbaworkinggirl.com

                         Music from the Podsafe Music Network

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=199075#Mon, 02 Apr 2007 03:24:00 -040016:30falsefull8181Changing Your Feed in ITunesIn this episode I talk about a couple of nightmares I've run across including:

                        My RSS feed in iTunes somehow got changed to http://s (podpress maybe? I'm not sure...). I had to change my RSS feed in iTunes

                        To change this you need to (accorsing to Apple's Forums):Podcasters occasionally need to move their feed from one location to another. In this case, you should not remove your feed. If possible, you should set your web server to return a 301 error and redirect when receiving a request for the old feed. Doing so will cause both the iTunes Music Store and the iTunes clients that have subscribed to your podcast to pick up the new feed URL. Be sure to maintain the redirect for at least two weeks to ensure that most subscribers have attempted to download your most recent episode and have thereby received the new URL.

                        If you don’t know how to return an HTTP 301, you can use the tag described in the iTunes RSS Tags section below. The tag will cause the iTunes music store to be updated with the new feed URL, but it will not inform iTunes clients of the new location. You may choose to include an audio note in your podcast, informing your subscribers that your podcast has changed locations. After adding the tag, be sure to keep your feed running at the old URL for at least 48 hours.

                        Then later I did a somewhat time sensitive announcement only to have feedburner fail to update my feed.

                        Lesson Learned: Never fail to occasionally go back and experience your podcast through the eyes (and mouse) of a new subscriber. Double check your feed(s).

                        LAST 5 IN 5 from Canis Lupus of http://bandtrax.podshow.com/

                        Ask a Ninja http://www.askaninja.com/Hope is Emo http://www.hopeisemo.com/Accident hash http://www.accidenthash.com Mac Break Video Podcast http://www.twit.tv/MBYuzzy's Weekend Dancefloor  http://ywdp.blogspot.com/

                        Other Sites Mentioned:

                        Podcast Secrets www.secretswithdave.com  Coupon PC916Big Break Podcast www.thebigbreakpodcast.com

                        Sponsor: Go to MeetingOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Promo:Quiet Study Area Knowledge for Your Brain - Music For Your Soulwww.quietstudyarea.com

                        ]]>In this episode I talk about a couple of nightmares I've run across including:

                        My RSS feed in iTunes somehow got changed to http://s (podpress maybe? I'm not sure...). I had to change my RSS feed in iTunes

                        To change this you need to (accorsing to Apple's Forums):Podcasters occasionally need to move their feed from one location to another. In this case, you should not remove your feed. If possible, you should set your web server to return a 301 error and redirect when receiving a request for the old feed. Doing so will cause both the iTunes Music Store and the iTunes clients that have subscribed to your podcast to pick up the new feed URL. Be sure to maintain the redirect for at least two weeks to ensure that most subscribers have attempted to download your most recent episode and have thereby received the new URL.

                        If you don’t know how to return an HTTP 301, you can use the tag described in the iTunes RSS Tags section below. The tag will cause the iTunes music store to be updated with the new feed URL, but it will not inform iTunes clients of the new location. You may choose to include an audio note in your podcast, informing your subscribers that your podcast has changed locations. After adding the tag, be sure to keep your feed running at the old URL for at least 48 hours.

                        Then later I did a somewhat time sensitive announcement only to have feedburner fail to update my feed.

                        Lesson Learned: Never fail to occasionally go back and experience your podcast through the eyes (and mouse) of a new subscriber. Double check your feed(s).

                        LAST 5 IN 5 from Canis Lupus of http://bandtrax.podshow.com/

                        Ask a Ninja http://www.askaninja.com/Hope is Emo http://www.hopeisemo.com/Accident hash http://www.accidenthash.com Mac Break Video Podcast http://www.twit.tv/MBYuzzy's Weekend Dancefloor  http://ywdp.blogspot.com/

                        Other Sites Mentioned:

                        Podcast Secrets www.secretswithdave.com  Coupon PC916Big Break Podcast www.thebigbreakpodcast.com

                        Sponsor: Go to MeetingOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Promo:Quiet Study Area Knowledge for Your Brain - Music For Your Soulwww.quietstudyarea.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=196445#Mon, 26 Mar 2007 03:50:00 -040017:17falsefull8080Podcast Secrets with Paul ColliganDave talks with Paul Colligan of www.paulcolligan.com about the upper level class starting MARCH 20th! about monetizing your podcast.  Here are some thing they will be teaching you:

                        * Exactly 8 reasons why Podcasting brings them, and can bring you, a critical business (and profit) advantage.

                        * 7 secrets to producing profitable Podcasting content in the fastest possible time.

                        * 9 marketing channels for the Podcasters ... and how to leverage each one.

                        * The 6-Step Podcast Monetization Roadmap

                        * How to part-the-curtain on the listening habits of your audience, and leverage that knowledge to produce profitable audience action.

                        * At least 5 things, you can implement today that will integrate your Podcast content into your business structure ... and how to see results almost instantly.

                        * 7 steps to getting your Podcast audience to take the very actions you want them to take.

                        For more information see www.secretswithdave.com and use the coupon code PC916 to get 79 OFF the price. If you can't attend, you will receive the call via podcast the next day.

                        BONUS QUESTION - DOWNLOAD IT HERE

                         

                        Sponsor www.gotomeeting.com

                        Online Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Pauls Other Podcastswww.podcasttools.com www.megapodcastlive.com www.affiliateguypodcast.comfor more see www.paulcolligan.com

                        ]]>Dave talks with Paul Colligan of www.paulcolligan.com about the upper level class starting MARCH 20th! about monetizing your podcast.  Here are some thing they will be teaching you:

                        * Exactly 8 reasons why Podcasting brings them, and can bring you, a critical business (and profit) advantage.

                        * 7 secrets to producing profitable Podcasting content in the fastest possible time.

                        * 9 marketing channels for the Podcasters ... and how to leverage each one.

                        * The 6-Step Podcast Monetization Roadmap

                        * How to part-the-curtain on the listening habits of your audience, and leverage that knowledge to produce profitable audience action.

                        * At least 5 things, you can implement today that will integrate your Podcast content into your business structure ... and how to see results almost instantly.

                        * 7 steps to getting your Podcast audience to take the very actions you want them to take.

                        For more information see www.secretswithdave.com and use the coupon code PC916 to get 79 OFF the price. If you can't attend, you will receive the call via podcast the next day.

                        BONUS QUESTION - DOWNLOAD IT HERE

                         

                        Sponsor www.gotomeeting.com

                        Online Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Pauls Other Podcastswww.podcasttools.com www.megapodcastlive.com www.affiliateguypodcast.comfor more see www.paulcolligan.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=193969#Mon, 19 Mar 2007 05:30:00 -040024:18falsefull7979Three Sides to Every PodcastWARNING - This show contains clips of Keith and the Girl (and are NOT worksafe).

                        Dave continues his talk that was started by people passing information about Podshow.com that was false. This week will be the final word from me on this.

                        Some people still don't understand the concept of specifics reasons by throwing out inuendo and hearsay. Here are some of the things we've learned:

                        When you are making a point, credability can be ruined with one wrong word.

                        Some people thing Podshow is elitest because of their bumper. While I do not personally find this an elitest action - some listeners brought this up. Comunication has always been very subjective.

                        One person was upset becuase he couldn't get a return phone call. Again, I can see where this person was upset.

                        Keith And The Girl Had These Issues1. Adam Curry kept messing up their name. This was annoying to KATG. 2. Keith didn't accept Adam Curry's explanation of the Podshow's messing up the RSS feed. 3. Keith didn't understand the reoccrung advertisements that Adam was speaking of in his blog, and called it shady. I explained this is the new product placement marketing. 4. Dave explains that downloads are important, but there is a value to the niche podcast as well. 5. Keith said that Godaddy adds make no money. I know for a fact that this is not true. 6. Keith reads the terms of service and has a serious problem with the fact that Podshow can do anything with your show - forever - even if you leave the network. Dave admits that many people have a problem with this clause in the contract. He throws out some points such as the Mommy Cast, The Roadhouse, Tartan Podcast all have left the network and none of their content is being sold. Admittedly this has potential to be a horrible contract, but it also has cabaility to further promote your show. 7. Chemda brought up a good point that people are doing this with different perspecitves. For example people who are doing it for fun may have an extremely different persepctive on podcasting, and moentizing your podcast. Dave points out that if you are a contracted podshow producer your contract (like any contract on the planet) is up for negotiation.8. Keith points out that their show can be listened to on podshow.com and he feels that podshow is using their downloads as part of the total downloads they are reporting. Dave points out that Keith said that if Podshow hates Keith and the Girl so much, they should pull them off their network. Dave flips this and asks, "If Keith and the Girl hate podshow so much, why don't they ask to be pulled off of the network?" If they did, and podshow failed to do so that would be a story.

                        Some lessons learned:

                        Don't podcast angry as you may say things you regret later. If you are making a serious point, make some note cards and save your crediability.

                        Dave apologizes for slighting the other podcasting networks. It's true, I can admit when I'm wrong.

                        Dave explains whe he thinks happens when you use the podshow player. It does work, although it may be slow.

                         

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                         

                        ]]>WARNING - This show contains clips of Keith and the Girl (and are NOT worksafe).

                        Dave continues his talk that was started by people passing information about Podshow.com that was false. This week will be the final word from me on this.

                        Some people still don't understand the concept of specifics reasons by throwing out inuendo and hearsay. Here are some of the things we've learned:

                        When you are making a point, credability can be ruined with one wrong word.

                        Some people thing Podshow is elitest because of their bumper. While I do not personally find this an elitest action - some listeners brought this up. Comunication has always been very subjective.

                        One person was upset becuase he couldn't get a return phone call. Again, I can see where this person was upset.

                        Keith And The Girl Had These Issues1. Adam Curry kept messing up their name. This was annoying to KATG. 2. Keith didn't accept Adam Curry's explanation of the Podshow's messing up the RSS feed. 3. Keith didn't understand the reoccrung advertisements that Adam was speaking of in his blog, and called it shady. I explained this is the new product placement marketing. 4. Dave explains that downloads are important, but there is a value to the niche podcast as well. 5. Keith said that Godaddy adds make no money. I know for a fact that this is not true. 6. Keith reads the terms of service and has a serious problem with the fact that Podshow can do anything with your show - forever - even if you leave the network. Dave admits that many people have a problem with this clause in the contract. He throws out some points such as the Mommy Cast, The Roadhouse, Tartan Podcast all have left the network and none of their content is being sold. Admittedly this has potential to be a horrible contract, but it also has cabaility to further promote your show. 7. Chemda brought up a good point that people are doing this with different perspecitves. For example people who are doing it for fun may have an extremely different persepctive on podcasting, and moentizing your podcast. Dave points out that if you are a contracted podshow producer your contract (like any contract on the planet) is up for negotiation.8. Keith points out that their show can be listened to on podshow.com and he feels that podshow is using their downloads as part of the total downloads they are reporting. Dave points out that Keith said that if Podshow hates Keith and the Girl so much, they should pull them off their network. Dave flips this and asks, "If Keith and the Girl hate podshow so much, why don't they ask to be pulled off of the network?" If they did, and podshow failed to do so that would be a story.

                        Some lessons learned:

                        Don't podcast angry as you may say things you regret later. If you are making a serious point, make some note cards and save your crediability.

                        Dave apologizes for slighting the other podcasting networks. It's true, I can admit when I'm wrong.

                        Dave explains whe he thinks happens when you use the podshow player. It does work, although it may be slow.

                         

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=191222#Mon, 12 Mar 2007 00:56:00 -040020:03truefull7878Why do YOU hate Podshow?I change format today because I have a serious point to make. If we are the NEW MEDIA, we have the RESPONSIBILITY to RECOGNIZE that the Microphone has POWER. Here are some key points from my rant.

                        BIG MEDIA wants us to fight amongst ourselves. Podcasting has enough competition from other meida sources, so why make one of our competitors "other podcasters."

                        You can say negative things about other people in the community, but you better be willing to explain why and prove it. As a reporter, as part of the NEW media, it is still YOUR responsibility to present the FACTS.

                        I use the example of recent accusations thrown at Podshow. As I have a show on in the Podshow network (this one is not by MY choice), I wanted to dispell some of the rumors about Podshow.

                        YOU THE MEDIA (from Paul Coligan's Book "the Business Podcasting Bible). If we are going to accept that role, we need to also accept that responsibility.

                        Shame on you Keith.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ]]>I change format today because I have a serious point to make. If we are the NEW MEDIA, we have the RESPONSIBILITY to RECOGNIZE that the Microphone has POWER. Here are some key points from my rant.

                        BIG MEDIA wants us to fight amongst ourselves. Podcasting has enough competition from other meida sources, so why make one of our competitors "other podcasters."

                        You can say negative things about other people in the community, but you better be willing to explain why and prove it. As a reporter, as part of the NEW media, it is still YOUR responsibility to present the FACTS.

                        I use the example of recent accusations thrown at Podshow. As I have a show on in the Podshow network (this one is not by MY choice), I wanted to dispell some of the rumors about Podshow.

                        YOU THE MEDIA (from Paul Coligan's Book "the Business Podcasting Bible). If we are going to accept that role, we need to also accept that responsibility.

                        Shame on you Keith.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=188732#Mon, 05 Mar 2007 00:53:00 -040017:37truefull7777Free Podcast Promotion ToolsDave follows up on last week's show with some tips from Don Lewis of http://www.thebigbreakpodcast.com/ and Sallie from www.author-izer.com as we try to remove hum from a non-skype call. Dave is using a Ground-Loop Isolator
                        Dave got a free subscription to Website Magazine. They have some interesting articles on blogging for money, website promotion and more. The best thing is you can read it online, or have it deleivered free to your door. To get your subscription go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/websitemagazine

                         One of the resources I found in the above magazine is Traffic Swarm. While I'm not crazy about sites like these, I will say I have received a small bump in traffic to my site. So if I have to put up with an annoying start page, I can deal with that.

                         Dave also talk about the closing of www.podcastcharts.com a podcast directory he started a while ago, but it had been hacked, and had multiple issues over the years. He now has www.podcastclicks.com as a cross promotion tool for podcasters only.

                         OUR POLL:Should podcasters put their contact information at the begining of their show (and possible make their first minute of their podcast bland - while getting their contact information out), or put it at the end of their podcast (thinking that only fie hard lsiteners would make it this far, and its only die hard listeners who contact the podcaster anyway..)

                        VOICE YOUR OPINION: TAKE THE POLL

                        OUR SPONSOROnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ]]>Dave follows up on last week's show with some tips from Don Lewis of http://www.thebigbreakpodcast.com/ and Sallie from www.author-izer.com as we try to remove hum from a non-skype call. Dave is using a Ground-Loop Isolator
                        Dave got a free subscription to Website Magazine. They have some interesting articles on blogging for money, website promotion and more. The best thing is you can read it online, or have it deleivered free to your door. To get your subscription go to www.schoolofpodcasting.com/websitemagazine

                         One of the resources I found in the above magazine is Traffic Swarm. While I'm not crazy about sites like these, I will say I have received a small bump in traffic to my site. So if I have to put up with an annoying start page, I can deal with that.

                         Dave also talk about the closing of www.podcastcharts.com a podcast directory he started a while ago, but it had been hacked, and had multiple issues over the years. He now has www.podcastclicks.com as a cross promotion tool for podcasters only.

                         OUR POLL:Should podcasters put their contact information at the begining of their show (and possible make their first minute of their podcast bland - while getting their contact information out), or put it at the end of their podcast (thinking that only fie hard lsiteners would make it this far, and its only die hard listeners who contact the podcaster anyway..)

                        VOICE YOUR OPINION: TAKE THE POLL

                        OUR SPONSOROnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=186206#Mon, 26 Feb 2007 02:24:00 -040015:54falsefull7676Skype Vs Inline Patch by JK AudioDave talks about the $270 he spent on an Inline Patch from JK Audio a few years ago has not produced better results than the $25 a year he pays for SkypeOut .

                        Dave also has tried 2 FM transmitters for either the iPod or a portable player. The Griffin transmitter for the iPod had no volume control, and it was really quiet. This results in your cranking up your volume in your car. In the end, it was noisey, and not a great solution.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Pod QuizIf you saw someone who would obviously enjoy your podcast, do you have a business card, a sample CD, etc available RIGHT NOW to hand this potential listener?

                        ]]>Dave talks about the $270 he spent on an Inline Patch from JK Audio a few years ago has not produced better results than the $25 a year he pays for SkypeOut .

                        Dave also has tried 2 FM transmitters for either the iPod or a portable player. The Griffin transmitter for the iPod had no volume control, and it was really quiet. This results in your cranking up your volume in your car. In the end, it was noisey, and not a great solution.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast 

                        Pod QuizIf you saw someone who would obviously enjoy your podcast, do you have a business card, a sample CD, etc available RIGHT NOW to hand this potential listener?

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=183526#Mon, 19 Feb 2007 03:57:00 -040013:57falsefull7575 More Podcasting MistakesDave continues on with a few other mistakes that Podcasters may be making:

                        1. SHOW ME THE MONEY- The person who doesn't even have a podcast topic, but knows he can sell it. Get your audience first, then monetize it. Paul Colligan has a great book  - The Business Podcasting Bible - about it.

                        2. Not reporting their music to the Podsage Music Network. I have a brand new show I'm testing. I've told one other person, and the musician that I played. I ended up with 5 listens. Keep in mind that a musician may alert their fan list that they are being played (and send their listeners to your podcast). However, if you don't report it they won't know to alert their fans.

                        3. Failure to Cross Promote. Sometimes we get nervous networking with people that are too much like our podcast. We fear that they may steal our audience. Keep in mind if you are putting out great content, their audience should like you. Also keep in mind there are seven days in a week. This leaves lots of time for the listener to listen to their podcast and yours.

                        4. Miss networking opportunites. I use www.technorati.com after reading the book by Jason Van Orden Promoting Your Podcast I put some code from technorati and now I can see who is linking or bloggin about me.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code PodcastPromo Played  "The Why and How of Podcasting"Go visit my new friend JD at http://www.thewhyandhowofpodcasting.com/

                        Other Sites Mentioned:

                        Open Stacks Promoting information access and literacy for all. http://openstacks.net/os/ 

                        Anna Farmery at www.podcastfreq.com 

                        Disciples with Microphoneshttp://www.discipleswithmicrophones.org/blog/ 

                        Who is linking to this blog? Find out Here

                        ]]>Dave continues on with a few other mistakes that Podcasters may be making:

                        1. SHOW ME THE MONEY- The person who doesn't even have a podcast topic, but knows he can sell it. Get your audience first, then monetize it. Paul Colligan has a great book  - The Business Podcasting Bible - about it.

                        2. Not reporting their music to the Podsage Music Network. I have a brand new show I'm testing. I've told one other person, and the musician that I played. I ended up with 5 listens. Keep in mind that a musician may alert their fan list that they are being played (and send their listeners to your podcast). However, if you don't report it they won't know to alert their fans.

                        3. Failure to Cross Promote. Sometimes we get nervous networking with people that are too much like our podcast. We fear that they may steal our audience. Keep in mind if you are putting out great content, their audience should like you. Also keep in mind there are seven days in a week. This leaves lots of time for the listener to listen to their podcast and yours.

                        4. Miss networking opportunites. I use www.technorati.com after reading the book by Jason Van Orden Promoting Your Podcast I put some code from technorati and now I can see who is linking or bloggin about me.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code PodcastPromo Played  "The Why and How of Podcasting"Go visit my new friend JD at http://www.thewhyandhowofpodcasting.com/

                        Other Sites Mentioned:

                        Open Stacks Promoting information access and literacy for all. http://openstacks.net/os/ 

                        Anna Farmery at www.podcastfreq.com 

                        Disciples with Microphoneshttp://www.discipleswithmicrophones.org/blog/ 

                        Who is linking to this blog? Find out Here

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=181418#Tue, 13 Feb 2007 01:57:00 -040015:33falsefull7575Common Podcast MistakesDave talks about some common podcasting mistakes these include:

                        Making your first impression by apologizing for not putting out a show. Remember there are lots of new listeners on the way (so why not do this at the end if you need to).

                        People assume that people have heard Part 1 of an interview so they (literally) start the podcast with some opening music, and then (with no setup) go right back to the interview (so a new listener has no clue what they've walked in on).

                        Volume on conference calls seems to be an issue. I realzie that you have no control over this when you are on the call, but you do have some control over the volume of the podcast. Check out the Levelator at www.gigavox.com

                         

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        LAST 5 in 5 with Wendy from www.gabberjaw.com

                         

                        Keith and the Girl www.keithandthegirl.comTwisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.comUhh Yeah Dude http://uhhyeahdude.com/Public Nuisance Radio www.publicnuisanceradio.comTwit http://www.twit.tv/

                        ]]>Dave talks about some common podcasting mistakes these include:

                        Making your first impression by apologizing for not putting out a show. Remember there are lots of new listeners on the way (so why not do this at the end if you need to).

                        People assume that people have heard Part 1 of an interview so they (literally) start the podcast with some opening music, and then (with no setup) go right back to the interview (so a new listener has no clue what they've walked in on).

                        Volume on conference calls seems to be an issue. I realzie that you have no control over this when you are on the call, but you do have some control over the volume of the podcast. Check out the Levelator at www.gigavox.com

                         

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        LAST 5 in 5 with Wendy from www.gabberjaw.com

                         

                        Keith and the Girl www.keithandthegirl.comTwisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.comUhh Yeah Dude http://uhhyeahdude.com/Public Nuisance Radio www.publicnuisanceradio.comTwit http://www.twit.tv/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=179288#Wed, 07 Feb 2007 05:16:00 -040013:01falsefull7373Understanding RSS and XMLIn this podcast I answer one of the most frequently asked quesitons. "What is RSS, and why do I get jibberish when I click this orange thing?"

                        Dave also assigns some "homework."

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From John of The M Show (www.themshow.com )

                        Barack Obama Us Senator for Illinoishttp://obama.senate.gov/podcast/

                        Rumor Girlshttp://www.rumorgirls.com/

                        Accident Hashhttp://www.accidenthash.com

                        Radio Adventures of Dr Floydhttp://www.doctorfloyd.com/

                        Kamakaze Comic Book Podcast (Fanboy?)http://fanboyradio.libsyn.com

                         Don't forget the Podcast Pickle contest starts February 1st!

                        ]]>In this podcast I answer one of the most frequently asked quesitons. "What is RSS, and why do I get jibberish when I click this orange thing?"

                        Dave also assigns some "homework."

                        LAST 5 IN 5 From John of The M Show (www.themshow.com )

                        Barack Obama Us Senator for Illinoishttp://obama.senate.gov/podcast/

                        Rumor Girlshttp://www.rumorgirls.com/

                        Accident Hashhttp://www.accidenthash.com

                        Radio Adventures of Dr Floydhttp://www.doctorfloyd.com/

                        Kamakaze Comic Book Podcast (Fanboy?)http://fanboyradio.libsyn.com

                         Don't forget the Podcast Pickle contest starts February 1st!

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=175812#Mon, 29 Jan 2007 01:40:00 -040014:57falsefull7272Repeat Exposure For a DimeDave went back to colllege this week (but is still completely available to help new podcasters). He had a very difficult time getting bookmarks for his books. When he found one, he was amazed at how many times a day he viewed this bookmark. He did some research and found that you can have full color bookmarks create 500 bookmarks for 60.00 (see psprint.com ) or 1000 bookmarks for 94.00 (see brochures.com ) and if your target audience is college students - then I feel this is a decent form of promotion.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Steve at www.lifespringpodcast.com

                        Griddlecakes Radio www.griddlecakes.com The M Show www.themshow.com Happy Tree Friends http://podcast.happytreefriends.com Geekbrief TV www.geekbrief.tvYour Wedding Your Way http://yourwedding.lifespringonline.com/ 

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        School of Podcasting www.scholofpodcasting.com The Scene Zine www.thescenezine.com brochures.com (1000 bookmarks )psprint.com (500 bookmarks )Today in Podcasting www.todayinpodcasting.comPodcast Pickle www.podcastpickle.com All Things Dave www.thepodcastfreak.com

                        ]]>Dave went back to colllege this week (but is still completely available to help new podcasters). He had a very difficult time getting bookmarks for his books. When he found one, he was amazed at how many times a day he viewed this bookmark. He did some research and found that you can have full color bookmarks create 500 bookmarks for 60.00 (see psprint.com ) or 1000 bookmarks for 94.00 (see brochures.com ) and if your target audience is college students - then I feel this is a decent form of promotion.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with www.gotomeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Steve at www.lifespringpodcast.com

                        Griddlecakes Radio www.griddlecakes.com The M Show www.themshow.com Happy Tree Friends http://podcast.happytreefriends.com Geekbrief TV www.geekbrief.tvYour Wedding Your Way http://yourwedding.lifespringonline.com/ 

                        Sites Mentioned:

                        School of Podcasting www.scholofpodcasting.com The Scene Zine www.thescenezine.com brochures.com (1000 bookmarks )psprint.com (500 bookmarks )Today in Podcasting www.todayinpodcasting.comPodcast Pickle www.podcastpickle.com All Things Dave www.thepodcastfreak.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=173347#Mon, 22 Jan 2007 00:32:00 -040013:43falsefull7171How to Record A Skype CallDave talks about cross promotion, different samplg rates, and how he records a skype call.

                        Special thanks to Jeff Lamb of www.buffalodick.tv for the awesome promo and testimonial.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        ]]>Dave talks about cross promotion, different samplg rates, and how he records a skype call.

                        Special thanks to Jeff Lamb of www.buffalodick.tv for the awesome promo and testimonial.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=170925#Mon, 15 Jan 2007 05:16:00 -040010:47falsefull7070Cross Promoting Your PodcastDave talks about how easy it is (and free) to cross promote your podcast. This is helped by networking with other podcasters who have similar podcasts. I play a quick promo I did for the Daily Source Code, I then turned around and used the same set up and ending and substituted a personalized greeting for each podcaster. It worked. While cross promotion may not get you 100 listeners overnight, it will help with your branding online.

                        Thanks to Heather Vale of Success Unwrapped for our intro. Check her out at http://www.successunwrapped.com

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 Couresty of the Bucket Podcast (www.bucketpodcast.com )

                        1. The Godess and Banana www.bgaffair.com 2. Diggnamtion www.diggnation.com 3. Dawn and Drew www.dawnanddrew.com 4. Ask a Ninja www.askaninja.com 5. Daily Source Code. www.dailysourcecode.com 6. Griddlecakes Radio www.griddlecakes.com

                        ITEMS MENTIONEDAudio Technica 2020 Microphone MORE INFO -no tax - free shippingMarantz MD660 Portable Recorder MORE INFO -no tax - free shipping

                        ]]>Dave talks about how easy it is (and free) to cross promote your podcast. This is helped by networking with other podcasters who have similar podcasts. I play a quick promo I did for the Daily Source Code, I then turned around and used the same set up and ending and substituted a personalized greeting for each podcaster. It worked. While cross promotion may not get you 100 listeners overnight, it will help with your branding online.

                        Thanks to Heather Vale of Success Unwrapped for our intro. Check her out at http://www.successunwrapped.com

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 Couresty of the Bucket Podcast (www.bucketpodcast.com )

                        1. The Godess and Banana www.bgaffair.com 2. Diggnamtion www.diggnation.com 3. Dawn and Drew www.dawnanddrew.com 4. Ask a Ninja www.askaninja.com 5. Daily Source Code. www.dailysourcecode.com 6. Griddlecakes Radio www.griddlecakes.com

                        ITEMS MENTIONEDAudio Technica 2020 Microphone MORE INFO -no tax - free shippingMarantz MD660 Portable Recorder MORE INFO -no tax - free shipping

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=168879#Mon, 08 Jan 2007 23:55:00 -040012:02falsefull6969Using Libsyn and PodpressDave gets some more feedback on shaping your image with a podcast (as some feel www.betterdave.com is not the right image for Dave), and he answers a question about using podpress (www.mightyseek.com/podpress ) with Libsyn and how to get the URL into WordPress.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        P.S. I realize this episode breaks format a bit. I am away from my typical system, and do not have access (but I think this episode is fine anyway - even if it doesn't let you know its episode 68)

                        ]]>Dave gets some more feedback on shaping your image with a podcast (as some feel www.betterdave.com is not the right image for Dave), and he answers a question about using podpress (www.mightyseek.com/podpress ) with Libsyn and how to get the URL into WordPress.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        P.S. I realize this episode breaks format a bit. I am away from my typical system, and do not have access (but I think this episode is fine anyway - even if it doesn't let you know its episode 68)

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=166662#Tue, 02 Jan 2007 07:29:00 -040013:07falsefull6868Did You Really Say That? - Storytelling PodcastsIn this episode Dave talks about the potential pitfalls of a diary - storytelling podcast. He started a new podcast Building a Better Dave. Keep in mind that EVERYONE can hear your podcast. You also never know when people will Google you. He mentions a few of his favorite storytelling podcasts including The Bitterest Pill and Digital Flotsam

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Mike Wills of http://newmusictoday.net1.Geek News Central http://geeknewscentral.com2. New Music Today (one of my podcasts on Podcasternews) http://newmusictoday.net - I always listen to my own shows to make sure they keep sounding good.3. Security Now (http://Twit.tv)4. UC Radio Podshow ( ucradio.podshow.com)5. Podholes (http://www.podholes.com/)

                        Other Sites MentionedPodcast411 autor of Tricks of the Podcasting Masters

                        School of Podcasting End of Year BonanzaUse the coupon code santa when you check out the get 50% off your first month.

                        ]]>In this episode Dave talks about the potential pitfalls of a diary - storytelling podcast. He started a new podcast Building a Better Dave. Keep in mind that EVERYONE can hear your podcast. You also never know when people will Google you. He mentions a few of his favorite storytelling podcasts including The Bitterest Pill and Digital Flotsam

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Mike Wills of http://newmusictoday.net1.Geek News Central http://geeknewscentral.com2. New Music Today (one of my podcasts on Podcasternews) http://newmusictoday.net - I always listen to my own shows to make sure they keep sounding good.3. Security Now (http://Twit.tv)4. UC Radio Podshow ( ucradio.podshow.com)5. Podholes (http://www.podholes.com/)

                        Other Sites MentionedPodcast411 autor of Tricks of the Podcasting Masters

                        School of Podcasting End of Year BonanzaUse the coupon code santa when you check out the get 50% off your first month.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=165043#Tue, 26 Dec 2006 14:29:00 -040011:38truefull6767Common Validation ErrorsDave talks about common mistakes that you can make that willcause errors inyour RSS feed.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        This was inspired by the Podcast Brothers www.podcastbrothers.com show where they talked about a feed reader having issues with their feed.

                        You can see a table of code to put display characters without causing errors. http://www.w3schools.com/tags/ref_entities.aspYou can check your feed validation at www.feedvalidator.org

                        Dave also reminds all podcasters to report their songs at the Podsafe Music Network When looking at your playlist, click the "show playlist history" option at the bottom of the list. Be sure to report your songs. The musicians will thank you for it.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 by Cali Lewis of www.geekbrif.tv 1. Dawn and Drew Show www.dawnanddrew.com 2. Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com 3. Mo Buzz Tv www.mobuzztv.com 4. Accident Hash www.accidenthash.com 5. Rocketboom. www.rocketboom.com

                        Check out the School of Podcasting with its hundreds of resources and hours of tutorials. www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Dave's favorite Podcast Host is Libsyn

                        ]]>Dave talks about common mistakes that you can make that willcause errors inyour RSS feed.

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        This was inspired by the Podcast Brothers www.podcastbrothers.com show where they talked about a feed reader having issues with their feed.

                        You can see a table of code to put display characters without causing errors. http://www.w3schools.com/tags/ref_entities.aspYou can check your feed validation at www.feedvalidator.org

                        Dave also reminds all podcasters to report their songs at the Podsafe Music Network When looking at your playlist, click the "show playlist history" option at the bottom of the list. Be sure to report your songs. The musicians will thank you for it.

                        LAST 5 IN 5 by Cali Lewis of www.geekbrif.tv 1. Dawn and Drew Show www.dawnanddrew.com 2. Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com 3. Mo Buzz Tv www.mobuzztv.com 4. Accident Hash www.accidenthash.com 5. Rocketboom. www.rocketboom.com

                        Check out the School of Podcasting with its hundreds of resources and hours of tutorials. www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        Dave's favorite Podcast Host is Libsyn

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=162947#Tue, 19 Dec 2006 04:04:00 -040010:36falsefull6666The Results are In! - Promotional Postcard ToolDave provides the results from last week's poll, a promtional Post Card Tool along with a podcasting idea.

                        The One Minute How To PodcastA quick, fun way to cross promote your podcast. Check it out at http://www.oneminutehowto.com

                        Dead Science Podcasthttp://www.deadscience.com

                        Voice Over Work From Scott Fletcherhttp://www.caraworks.com

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy withGoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ;

                         

                        Vertical Response - Postcard Creation tool. Only pay for those cards you sell, no contracts, etc.

                        Survey Results - Dave had a whole 6 people respond to last week's sruvey. Many people listen in the car on their portable media device. The audience is all male. (At this point) take the survey. HERELane www.missingalert.com podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Rob of the Dead Science Podcast1. The Morning Announcements (this podcast)2. Podcast 411 www.podcast411.com 3. The Paracast. www.theparacast.net4. Haunted New Jersey Podcast www.hauntednewjersey.com5. Building a Better Dave www.betterdave.com

                        People say what they want for Christmas The Zoon H4 Handy Recorder

                        ]]>Dave provides the results from last week's poll, a promtional Post Card Tool along with a podcasting idea.

                        The One Minute How To PodcastA quick, fun way to cross promote your podcast. Check it out at http://www.oneminutehowto.com

                        Dead Science Podcasthttp://www.deadscience.com

                        Voice Over Work From Scott Fletcherhttp://www.caraworks.com

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy withGoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast ;

                         

                        Vertical Response - Postcard Creation tool. Only pay for those cards you sell, no contracts, etc.

                        Survey Results - Dave had a whole 6 people respond to last week's sruvey. Many people listen in the car on their portable media device. The audience is all male. (At this point) take the survey. HERELane www.missingalert.com podcast

                        Last 5 in 5 From Rob of the Dead Science Podcast1. The Morning Announcements (this podcast)2. Podcast 411 www.podcast411.com 3. The Paracast. www.theparacast.net4. Haunted New Jersey Podcast www.hauntednewjersey.com5. Building a Better Dave www.betterdave.com

                        People say what they want for Christmas The Zoon H4 Handy Recorder

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=160381#Mon, 11 Dec 2006 23:36:00 -040016:39falsefull6565Surveying Your Listeners For Free - And Podcasting ReportDave talks about a new Podcasting Reporthttp://www.pewinternet.org/pdfs/PIP_Podcasting.pdfDave mentions how you can find out information fromyour audience using www.surveymonkey.com TAKE THE SURVEY (10 quick questions)To take Dave's Survey  click the image to the above or click HEREDave will read the answers in next week's show. ALSO MENTIONEDDave also mentioned the Dead Science Podcast at www.deadscience.com Kiptronic (http://www.kiptronic.com ) for survey listenersPodtrac (http://www.podtrac.com ) for surveying listeners

                        Call 888-563-3228 with your comments

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy withGoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        ]]>Dave talks about a new Podcasting Reporthttp://www.pewinternet.org/pdfs/PIP_Podcasting.pdfDave mentions how you can find out information fromyour audience using www.surveymonkey.com TAKE THE SURVEY (10 quick questions)To take Dave's Survey  click the image to the above or click HEREDave will read the answers in next week's show. ALSO MENTIONEDDave also mentioned the Dead Science Podcast at www.deadscience.com Kiptronic (http://www.kiptronic.com ) for survey listenersPodtrac (http://www.podtrac.com ) for surveying listeners

                        Call 888-563-3228 with your comments

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy withGoToMeeting.com Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=157958#Mon, 04 Dec 2006 17:39:00 -040015:25falsefull6464Podcaster ToolkitIn this episode Dave talks about a new service that allows you to use Paypal and raise money towards a goal (might be great around expo time when you're raising money for plane tickets). The service is www.chipin.com and Dave used it to make www.schoolofpodcasting.com/donate

                        Dave plays some samples from the Podcaster Toolkit CD that has 1000 mp3 files on it. Dave has been using this CD over the last few weeks it has 770 sound effects, 41 one minute music tracks, 189 Transition Elements. Dave bought this at the Expo in California and has worked with Gary at Sound Ideas to come up with a great deal where you can save 30.00 and get free shipping when you go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/toolkit

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 with Father Roderick of the Daily Breakfast Podcast Dave Ramsey Show (Financial ) http://www.daveramsey.com Daily Source Code (Adam Curry) http://www.dailysourcecode.com Rosary Army http://www.rosaryarmy.com Busted Halo http://www.bustedhalo.com The Lost Podcast http://www.jayandjack.com/

                        Other Podcast URLSPodcast Click (Free Podcast Promotio) http://www.podcastclicks.com Podcaster Toolbar http://www.podcastertoolbar.com All of Dave's Shows http://www.thepodcastfreak.com

                        ]]>In this episode Dave talks about a new service that allows you to use Paypal and raise money towards a goal (might be great around expo time when you're raising money for plane tickets). The service is www.chipin.com and Dave used it to make www.schoolofpodcasting.com/donate

                        Dave plays some samples from the Podcaster Toolkit CD that has 1000 mp3 files on it. Dave has been using this CD over the last few weeks it has 770 sound effects, 41 one minute music tracks, 189 Transition Elements. Dave bought this at the Expo in California and has worked with Gary at Sound Ideas to come up with a great deal where you can save 30.00 and get free shipping when you go to http://www.schoolofpodcasting.com/toolkit

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 with Father Roderick of the Daily Breakfast Podcast Dave Ramsey Show (Financial ) http://www.daveramsey.com Daily Source Code (Adam Curry) http://www.dailysourcecode.com Rosary Army http://www.rosaryarmy.com Busted Halo http://www.bustedhalo.com The Lost Podcast http://www.jayandjack.com/

                        Other Podcast URLSPodcast Click (Free Podcast Promotio) http://www.podcastclicks.com Podcaster Toolbar http://www.podcastertoolbar.com All of Dave's Shows http://www.thepodcastfreak.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=155848#Tue, 28 Nov 2006 02:22:00 -040012:39falsefull6363Pre Interview TacticsDave talks about how to conduct a PRE interview, we get a last 5 in 5 from Larry of daily-journal.com and Dave also points out that Google has a great tool for collaboration.
                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 Courtesy of Larry from www.daily-journal.com HDTV Podcast http://www.htguys.com/Podcast 411 www.podcast411.com The Winecast http://winecast.net/Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com Accident Hash www.accidenthash.com

                        Dave mentions a  free Google tool that you can use for note taking for podcasters. He also welcomes Coach Rob of www.spintexfitness.com as a new member to the School of Podcasting.

                        Thanks to everyone as we approach "Thanksgiving" here in the states.

                        ]]>Dave talks about how to conduct a PRE interview, we get a last 5 in 5 from Larry of daily-journal.com and Dave also points out that Google has a great tool for collaboration.
                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 Courtesy of Larry from www.daily-journal.com HDTV Podcast http://www.htguys.com/Podcast 411 www.podcast411.com The Winecast http://winecast.net/Daily Source Code www.dailysourcecode.com Accident Hash www.accidenthash.com

                        Dave mentions a  free Google tool that you can use for note taking for podcasters. He also welcomes Coach Rob of www.spintexfitness.com as a new member to the School of Podcasting.

                        Thanks to everyone as we approach "Thanksgiving" here in the states.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=153710#Tue, 21 Nov 2006 01:32:00 -040011:11falsefull6262Libsyn Pro ExplainedDave explains his abscence last week, comments on some comments, and we get a "last 5 in 5" from Corey of the Twisted Pickle.

                        If you are looking for custom bookmarks check out PsPrint (1000 bookmarks for 100.00)

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 from The Twisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.com

                        Keith and the Girl - www.keithandthegirl.com The Bitterest Pill - http://www.thebitterestpill.com/Verge of the Fringe - http://www.vergeofthefringe.com/ Public Nuisance Radio - http://publicnuisanceradio.blogspot.com/ Chit Chat Moms http://www.chitchatmoms.com/

                        ]]>Dave explains his abscence last week, comments on some comments, and we get a "last 5 in 5" from Corey of the Twisted Pickle.

                        If you are looking for custom bookmarks check out PsPrint (1000 bookmarks for 100.00)

                        SponsorOnline Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 from The Twisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.com

                        Keith and the Girl - www.keithandthegirl.com The Bitterest Pill - http://www.thebitterestpill.com/Verge of the Fringe - http://www.vergeofthefringe.com/ Public Nuisance Radio - http://publicnuisanceradio.blogspot.com/ Chit Chat Moms http://www.chitchatmoms.com/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=151541#Tue, 14 Nov 2006 13:08:00 -040012:46falsefull6161The Cons of Post Dating Podcasts - Library Podcast PromotionDave talks about finding your target listener at the library and leaving them a path back to your podcast. We also get a "last 5 in 5" from Sallie at http://www.podcastasylum.com  

                        Sponsor

                         

                         

                         Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "   Building a Better Dave - Because Life is too important to be taken Seriously. www.betterdave.com

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 From Sallie Goetsch of the Podcast Aslyum (www.podcastasylum.com )

                        The Engaging Brand Podcasthttp://theengagingbrand.typepad.com/

                        For Immediate Releasehttp://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        Podcast For Dummieshttp://www.dummies.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-291804.html

                        A Way with Words Podcasthttp://www.npr.org/rss/podcast.php?id=510028

                        Slate Podcasthttp://www.slate.com/id/2119317/

                        ]]>Dave talks about finding your target listener at the library and leaving them a path back to your podcast. We also get a "last 5 in 5" from Sallie at http://www.podcastasylum.com  

                        Sponsor

                         

                         

                         Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code " Podcast  "   Building a Better Dave - Because Life is too important to be taken Seriously. www.betterdave.com

                         

                        Last 5 in 5 From Sallie Goetsch of the Podcast Aslyum (www.podcastasylum.com )

                        The Engaging Brand Podcasthttp://theengagingbrand.typepad.com/

                        For Immediate Releasehttp://www.forimmediaterelease.biz/

                        Podcast For Dummieshttp://www.dummies.com/WileyCDA/Section/id-291804.html

                        A Way with Words Podcasthttp://www.npr.org/rss/podcast.php?id=510028

                        Slate Podcasthttp://www.slate.com/id/2119317/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=146180#Mon, 30 Oct 2006 05:05:00 -040014:00falsefull6060Podcasting Around the Holidays Without Missing a BeatThe holidays can be such a rush. Shopping, school events, travel, etc make the "Tour of Christmas 06" something that can make you tired jsut thinking about it. How are you going to find time to podcast? Dave explains some quick settings in Wordpress and Libsyn that allow you to prerecord some shows and release them in the future.

                        Sponsor:“Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast‿

                        The last 5 in 5 will be back next week. Thanks to everyone.

                        ]]>The holidays can be such a rush. Shopping, school events, travel, etc make the "Tour of Christmas 06" something that can make you tired jsut thinking about it. How are you going to find time to podcast? Dave explains some quick settings in Wordpress and Libsyn that allow you to prerecord some shows and release them in the future.

                        Sponsor:“Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast‿

                        The last 5 in 5 will be back next week. Thanks to everyone.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=144017#Tue, 24 Oct 2006 03:59:00 -040008:30falsefull5959International Podcasting Expo - Attend in Your JammiesDave talks about all the cool stuff they've added to the International Podcasting Expo including a life time liscense to Pamela (Skype Plugin).
                        “Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast‿

                        We hear a promo for a show Dave is set to release this week (Building a Better Dave www.betterdave.com ) and we get a last 5 in 5 from Kevin Crossman from www.fratpackpodcast.com

                        LAST 5 in 5Film SPotting Podcast http://www.filmspotting.net/This Week in Tech http:/www.twit.comThe Mac Observers Weekly Roundup http://www.macobserver.com/roundup/The Daily Source Codewww.dailysourcecode.comThe Five Honey By Midnight (original Las Vegas Podcast)http://www.fivehundybymidnight.com/fhbm/

                        ]]>Dave talks about all the cool stuff they've added to the International Podcasting Expo including a life time liscense to Pamela (Skype Plugin).
                        “Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast‿

                        We hear a promo for a show Dave is set to release this week (Building a Better Dave www.betterdave.com ) and we get a last 5 in 5 from Kevin Crossman from www.fratpackpodcast.com

                        LAST 5 in 5Film SPotting Podcast http://www.filmspotting.net/This Week in Tech http:/www.twit.comThe Mac Observers Weekly Roundup http://www.macobserver.com/roundup/The Daily Source Codewww.dailysourcecode.comThe Five Honey By Midnight (original Las Vegas Podcast)http://www.fivehundybymidnight.com/fhbm/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=141045#Mon, 16 Oct 2006 01:26:00 -040013:38truefull5858Reviewing the Levelator SoftwareDave reviews the new Free software "The Levelator" software (free for both PC and Mac). He uses a quick snippet from the Entrepreneurs Journey at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/ I heard Yaro saying he was happy with the audio, so I ran a snippet through the Levelator. WOW. You got to hear this. Dave was listening to this episode at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/492/podcast-michael-cheney-product-launch/

                        Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Get the Levelator at http://www.gigavox.com/levelator

                        Last 5 in 5 with Paul Coligan www.paulcolligan.com and The Business Podcasting Bible www.podcast411.com www.schoolofpodcasting.net www.podcastingunderground.com/www.twit.comwww.dailysourcecode.com

                        LAST MINUTE NOTE: The Levelator does NOT work on mp3 files (AIFF files and WAV files).

                        SPONSOR: Try Gotomeeting.com for FREE for 45 minutes today. Sign up and use the promo code PODCAST

                        ]]>Dave reviews the new Free software "The Levelator" software (free for both PC and Mac). He uses a quick snippet from the Entrepreneurs Journey at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/ I heard Yaro saying he was happy with the audio, so I ran a snippet through the Levelator. WOW. You got to hear this. Dave was listening to this episode at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/492/podcast-michael-cheney-product-launch/

                        Online Meetings Made Easy with GoToMeeting Try it Free for 45 days use Promo Code Podcast

                        Get the Levelator at http://www.gigavox.com/levelator

                        Last 5 in 5 with Paul Coligan www.paulcolligan.com and The Business Podcasting Bible www.podcast411.com www.schoolofpodcasting.net www.podcastingunderground.com/www.twit.comwww.dailysourcecode.com

                        LAST MINUTE NOTE: The Levelator does NOT work on mp3 files (AIFF files and WAV files).

                        SPONSOR: Try Gotomeeting.com for FREE for 45 minutes today. Sign up and use the promo code PODCAST

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=138571#Mon, 09 Oct 2006 02:43:00 -040010:35falsefull5757Expo Toy Roundup Part IDave crawls back to the microphone after a fun week in California. Some folks I mentioned Jason Van Orden (http://www.podcastingunderground.com/ ) and Paul Colligan (http://www.paulcolligan.com/ ). Paolo from www.italyfromtheinside.com

                         

                        NEW TOYS FROM THE EXPOBoth of these tools allow you to update your pdocast from anywhere.www.imorphoisis.com The "Coffe Warmer" podcast updating toolhttp://www.podcastready.com/ Turn your USB device into a podcatcher.

                        Sweet Piece of Hardware (Thanks for the Demo Mark)

                        Aphex 230 Master Voice Channel Tube Mic Pre

                        (Get discounts in the BSW Podcast Gear Store )

                        (11:00) Last 5 in 5 from Mark Jenson of www.podsqod.com MAC OSG http://podcast.macosg.com/ Palm OSC http://palmosc.com/test/Apple News Now http://www.applenewsnow.com/ Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com (yes, I know that's only four...)

                        Other Sites Mentioned: www.schoolofpodcasting.com/expo06

                         

                        ]]>Dave crawls back to the microphone after a fun week in California. Some folks I mentioned Jason Van Orden (http://www.podcastingunderground.com/ ) and Paul Colligan (http://www.paulcolligan.com/ ). Paolo from www.italyfromtheinside.com

                         

                        NEW TOYS FROM THE EXPOBoth of these tools allow you to update your pdocast from anywhere.www.imorphoisis.com The "Coffe Warmer" podcast updating toolhttp://www.podcastready.com/ Turn your USB device into a podcatcher.

                        Sweet Piece of Hardware (Thanks for the Demo Mark)

                        Aphex 230 Master Voice Channel Tube Mic Pre

                        (Get discounts in the BSW Podcast Gear Store )

                        (11:00) Last 5 in 5 from Mark Jenson of www.podsqod.com MAC OSG http://podcast.macosg.com/ Palm OSC http://palmosc.com/test/Apple News Now http://www.applenewsnow.com/ Project Studio Network www.projectstudionetwork.com (yes, I know that's only four...)

                        Other Sites Mentioned: www.schoolofpodcasting.com/expo06

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=136576#Tue, 03 Oct 2006 02:11:00 -040014:38falsefull5656Never Podcast on 4 Hours SleepDave talks the upcoming expo in Ontario California and why should be ready to take advantage of the opportunity. It's humour cast as Dave is really, really tired.

                        We also talk about getting feedback from friends on your podcast.

                        We also have a "Last 5 in 5" from Paul at the Technobabel Podcasthttp://www.technobabelshow.com/  his last 5 in are:

                        School of Podcasting (this site - thank you...)Cranky Geeks ( www.crankygeeks.com )DLTV with Patrick Norton ( www.dl.tv )Geeks on God (www.geeksongod.com )Media Moment (Salvation Army at www.mediamoment.blogspot.com )

                        Dave explains how to call a regular phone with Skype. Other sites Dave is involved withwww.todayinpodcast.com (With Gary and Rob)www.musicnewspodcast.net (Real People, Real News, Real Sarcasm)www.podcastclicks.com (banner exhcange program - free promotion)www.musicianscooler.com (Music Marketing For Bands)www.podcastingshirts.com

                        ]]>Dave talks the upcoming expo in Ontario California and why should be ready to take advantage of the opportunity. It's humour cast as Dave is really, really tired.

                        We also talk about getting feedback from friends on your podcast.

                        We also have a "Last 5 in 5" from Paul at the Technobabel Podcasthttp://www.technobabelshow.com/  his last 5 in are:

                        School of Podcasting (this site - thank you...)Cranky Geeks ( www.crankygeeks.com )DLTV with Patrick Norton ( www.dl.tv )Geeks on God (www.geeksongod.com )Media Moment (Salvation Army at www.mediamoment.blogspot.com )

                        Dave explains how to call a regular phone with Skype. Other sites Dave is involved withwww.todayinpodcast.com (With Gary and Rob)www.musicnewspodcast.net (Real People, Real News, Real Sarcasm)www.podcastclicks.com (banner exhcange program - free promotion)www.musicianscooler.com (Music Marketing For Bands)www.podcastingshirts.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=133772#Mon, 25 Sep 2006 02:19:00 -040011:36falsefull5555Hey! Let's Start ANOTHER Podcast! - THINK FIRSTDave has been track EXCATLY how long it takes to make a podcast. This includes:

                        Researching storiesOrganzing show notes for recordingRecorind the PodcastEditing mp3 tagsUploading the mp3Creating the Show notes

                        It turns out that based on my last 7 podcasts, you spend 4 minutes for every 1 minute of podcast. For example this podcast is about 10 minutes in length. As I type these show notes I'm at the 34 minute mark.

                        OK BIG DEAL?

                        Well, sometimes we get caught up in how fun podcasting is and we want to start another one before realizing that if we do a 15 minute podcast 4 times a week, that 4 HOURS of show production required. In some cases, you end up skimping on preparing good quality content, and then ALL your shows suffer.

                        Just Dave's way of saying, "Maybe you should think about it before starting another podcast."

                        See you at the Expo

                         

                        ]]>Dave has been track EXCATLY how long it takes to make a podcast. This includes:

                        Researching storiesOrganzing show notes for recordingRecorind the PodcastEditing mp3 tagsUploading the mp3Creating the Show notes

                        It turns out that based on my last 7 podcasts, you spend 4 minutes for every 1 minute of podcast. For example this podcast is about 10 minutes in length. As I type these show notes I'm at the 34 minute mark.

                        OK BIG DEAL?

                        Well, sometimes we get caught up in how fun podcasting is and we want to start another one before realizing that if we do a 15 minute podcast 4 times a week, that 4 HOURS of show production required. In some cases, you end up skimping on preparing good quality content, and then ALL your shows suffer.

                        Just Dave's way of saying, "Maybe you should think about it before starting another podcast."

                        See you at the Expo

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=131375#Mon, 18 Sep 2006 00:32:00 -040009:58falsefull5353Cross Promotion For Music PodcastsDave reminds people about Podshow Music Rewind. It's very easy to cross promote your pdocast in front of other music lovers. Check out their submission form RIGHT HERE

                        Last 5 In 5 from Alan Lew of Travelography (www.podcasternews.com )Amateur Travler Podcast (http://amateurtraveler.com/ )Smart City (http://www.smartcityradio.com/ )Ken Radio (???)Slashdot Review (http://slashdotreview.com/ )Slate Magazine (http://www.slate.com/id/2119317/ )Talkshoe.com a Discussion From "Today in Podcasting" (www.todayinpodcasting.com )

                        Dave's BOO YAH tip from Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com

                        ]]>Dave reminds people about Podshow Music Rewind. It's very easy to cross promote your pdocast in front of other music lovers. Check out their submission form RIGHT HERE

                        Last 5 In 5 from Alan Lew of Travelography (www.podcasternews.com )Amateur Travler Podcast (http://amateurtraveler.com/ )Smart City (http://www.smartcityradio.com/ )Ken Radio (???)Slashdot Review (http://slashdotreview.com/ )Slate Magazine (http://www.slate.com/id/2119317/ )Talkshoe.com a Discussion From "Today in Podcasting" (www.todayinpodcasting.com )

                        Dave's BOO YAH tip from Big Al Wagner of www.projectstudionetwork.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=129021#Mon, 11 Sep 2006 01:06:00 -040015:05falsefull5353Priming the Listener PumpDave talks about supporting listeners comments from a Customer Service stand point. He also points out a hidden trick that "regular" radio uses to get people to call in.

                        Enjoy your holiday (the last 5 in 5 will return next week).

                         

                        ]]>Dave talks about supporting listeners comments from a Customer Service stand point. He also points out a hidden trick that "regular" radio uses to get people to call in.

                        Enjoy your holiday (the last 5 in 5 will return next week).

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=126954#Mon, 04 Sep 2006 22:38:00 -040009:41falsefull5252This Headset Sounds Like AssDave is using an Altec Lansing AHS302i Headset Microphone and is not really impressed.

                        We also talk about the proper sequence of recording a "post production" show and why.

                         

                        LAST 5 in 5 Courtest of Chris Christensen of Amateur Traveler Podcast (http://AmateurTraveler.com ) The Onion Radio Newshttp://www.theonion.com/content/radionews

                        Buzz Out Loud from Cnethttp://reviews.cnet.com/4520-11455_7-6333605-1.html?tag=cnetfd.dir

                        The Word Nerdshttp://thewordnerds.org/

                        Covervillehttp://coverville.com/

                        Geek Brief TVhttp://www.geekbrief.tv

                        Questions from Rob at  www.robcasting.com "How do you afford this stuff?"

                        ]]>Dave is using an Altec Lansing AHS302i Headset Microphone and is not really impressed.

                        We also talk about the proper sequence of recording a "post production" show and why.

                         

                        LAST 5 in 5 Courtest of Chris Christensen of Amateur Traveler Podcast (http://AmateurTraveler.com ) The Onion Radio Newshttp://www.theonion.com/content/radionews

                        Buzz Out Loud from Cnethttp://reviews.cnet.com/4520-11455_7-6333605-1.html?tag=cnetfd.dir

                        The Word Nerdshttp://thewordnerds.org/

                        Covervillehttp://coverville.com/

                        Geek Brief TVhttp://www.geekbrief.tv

                        Questions from Rob at  www.robcasting.com "How do you afford this stuff?"

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=124306#Mon, 28 Aug 2006 02:52:00 -040015:34truefull5151Enhancing Your Content with Music and Sound Effects -050Used appropriately, music and sound effects can really enhance your CONTENT.

                        Dave shares his feelings as he has quit listening to some podcasts as they play "whacky" sound effects over and over (and they don't even tie in with the content). What do you think? Does this bug you?  

                        On the other hand, Music and sound effects can create a mood, and a theater of the mind experience when used properly.

                        Last 5 in 5 by Judson Voss of the Get Real Podcast (Learn about Real Estate Investing with a husband and wife investing duo). Check out Judson and Lynn at http://www.getrealrei.com/

                        Startup Nation http://www.startupnation.comPodsqod Morning Edition  http://www.podsqod.com/Inside Home Recording www.insidehomerecording.comProject Studio Network http://ProjectStudioNetwork.com/School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements (this site)

                         

                        ]]>Used appropriately, music and sound effects can really enhance your CONTENT.

                        Dave shares his feelings as he has quit listening to some podcasts as they play "whacky" sound effects over and over (and they don't even tie in with the content). What do you think? Does this bug you?  

                        On the other hand, Music and sound effects can create a mood, and a theater of the mind experience when used properly.

                        Last 5 in 5 by Judson Voss of the Get Real Podcast (Learn about Real Estate Investing with a husband and wife investing duo). Check out Judson and Lynn at http://www.getrealrei.com/

                        Startup Nation http://www.startupnation.comPodsqod Morning Edition  http://www.podsqod.com/Inside Home Recording www.insidehomerecording.comProject Studio Network http://ProjectStudioNetwork.com/School of Podcasting's Morning Announcements (this site)

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=121927#Sun, 20 Aug 2006 23:20:00 -040013:20falsefull5050New Podsafe Music Resource, Marantz MD 600 Review -049Dave talks about www.sellmusicdirect.com a new podsafe music resource. It's takes a CD from manufacturing all the way through distribution and its embracing podcasting. (look for the Podcaster sign up in the lower left hand corner).

                        Dave also recently purchased a Marantz MD 660 portable recorder he discusses his decision and other decent (less expensive) models such as:

                        Edirol R-09 (not the E9 that I mentioned)Sony MZ100 Minisc Recorder ($299)Other Minidisc Recorders at Sound Professionals Also, http://www.samedaymusic.com does not charge tax (except in NJ).

                        Last 5 in 5 Courest of Mignon of the Absolute Science Podcast (www.welltopia.com )5. http://www.israelisms.com/ 4. Teknikal diffikulties 3. Matt's Today in History 2. Armchair President 1. The Big Show

                        Other Sites Mentioned:CC Chapman (using an Edirol Unit) http://www.managingthegray.com/

                        ]]>Dave talks about www.sellmusicdirect.com a new podsafe music resource. It's takes a CD from manufacturing all the way through distribution and its embracing podcasting. (look for the Podcaster sign up in the lower left hand corner).

                        Dave also recently purchased a Marantz MD 660 portable recorder he discusses his decision and other decent (less expensive) models such as:

                        Edirol R-09 (not the E9 that I mentioned)Sony MZ100 Minisc Recorder ($299)Other Minidisc Recorders at Sound Professionals Also, http://www.samedaymusic.com does not charge tax (except in NJ).

                        Last 5 in 5 Courest of Mignon of the Absolute Science Podcast (www.welltopia.com )5. http://www.israelisms.com/ 4. Teknikal diffikulties 3. Matt's Today in History 2. Armchair President 1. The Big Show

                        Other Sites Mentioned:CC Chapman (using an Edirol Unit) http://www.managingthegray.com/

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=119888#Mon, 14 Aug 2006 03:36:00 -040016:52falsefull4949It's Summer Let's Go Toobin' -048Dave interviews Charter Harkins one of the creators of of Innertoob.com a cool tool for Podcasters to boost communication, increase search engine searchability and send links via email to a certain time in the mp3 file.

                        Check out this show at innertoob.com

                        Carters Last 5 in 5Inside the Net http://www.twit.tv/ITNThis week in Tech http://www.twit.tvPottercast www.pottercast.com Ask a Ninja www.askaninja.com Rocketboom www.rocketboom.com

                        ]]>Dave interviews Charter Harkins one of the creators of of Innertoob.com a cool tool for Podcasters to boost communication, increase search engine searchability and send links via email to a certain time in the mp3 file.

                        Check out this show at innertoob.com

                        Carters Last 5 in 5Inside the Net http://www.twit.tv/ITNThis week in Tech http://www.twit.tvPottercast www.pottercast.com Ask a Ninja www.askaninja.com Rocketboom www.rocketboom.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=117607#Mon, 07 Aug 2006 02:31:00 -040021:41falsefull4848Quickly Making Audio Comments Podcast Ready -047I walk the listener through adjusting a voicemail comment from a scratchy, noisey sound bite to a smoother sounding clip ready to use. Dave explains some features that are in Sony Sound Forge (Free shipping at Same Day Music ) also Dave is using Castblaster in this issue.

                        I also talks about cleaning up those listener calls from k7.net and Kall8 he exaplains how make two quick passes with a noise gate and EQ you can get these sounding smoother for your podcast.Last 5 in 5 Courtesy of Rich Palmer of Audio Gumshoe (www.audiogumshoe.com )1. The One Minute How tohttp://oneminutehowto.com/ - learn anything about anything2.Bucket Podcasthttp://bucketpodcast.blogspot.com - Couple Cast By Newlyweds3. Out of Order Powww.oooshow.com - Out of order things in the world4. Managing the Grey - Makreting Tipswww.managingthegrey.com5. Perfect Head PW Fenton's new Podcast.www.prefecthead.com

                        P.S. I notice an above normal amount of his when I turn on my mic...

                        ]]>I walk the listener through adjusting a voicemail comment from a scratchy, noisey sound bite to a smoother sounding clip ready to use. Dave explains some features that are in Sony Sound Forge (Free shipping at Same Day Music ) also Dave is using Castblaster in this issue.

                        I also talks about cleaning up those listener calls from k7.net and Kall8 he exaplains how make two quick passes with a noise gate and EQ you can get these sounding smoother for your podcast.Last 5 in 5 Courtesy of Rich Palmer of Audio Gumshoe (www.audiogumshoe.com )1. The One Minute How tohttp://oneminutehowto.com/ - learn anything about anything2.Bucket Podcasthttp://bucketpodcast.blogspot.com - Couple Cast By Newlyweds3. Out of Order Powww.oooshow.com - Out of order things in the world4. Managing the Grey - Makreting Tipswww.managingthegrey.com5. Perfect Head PW Fenton's new Podcast.www.prefecthead.com

                        P.S. I notice an above normal amount of his when I turn on my mic...

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=115203#Mon, 31 Jul 2006 02:11:00 -040014:29falsefull4747My Feed Was Hijacked - Interactive Podcasts -046Dave explains that after going on someone's show, THEIR podcast was inserted into his Musicians Cooler feed. They re-wrote (hijacked) his RSS file. He exaplains how he fixed it, and reminds everyone to pick good passwords, and to change them often.

                        Last 5 in 5Dan from Journey Inside My Mind Podcast provides his last 5 in 5Check out Dan at www.jimmpodcast.blogspot.com www.daveslounge.com (Music to Chill to)www.denverpost.com (Today in Music History)www.manlygeek.com www.americanpublicmedia.publicmedia.orgwww.dailysourcecode.com (Adam Curry)

                        Feedburner added some technology that is not working with Juice (formerly ipodder software). To fix this:Log into your Feedburner feedClick on 'Standard Stats' under the "SERVICES" area on the left side.Take the check mark off "Item enclosure downloads (podcast downloads)"SAVE your changes.Thanks to: Georgehttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://OneMinuteHowTo.comRichwww.audiogumshoe.comand JTwww.freemusicianlist.com  for the heads up on this. To read more about this in the Feedburner support area go to Here 

                        Interactive Podcasts. Dave gets some insights from Greg of the 5 Questions Podcast. Check it out at www.5questions.net

                        Dave used Podproducer to Make this Show

                        ]]>Dave explains that after going on someone's show, THEIR podcast was inserted into his Musicians Cooler feed. They re-wrote (hijacked) his RSS file. He exaplains how he fixed it, and reminds everyone to pick good passwords, and to change them often.

                        Last 5 in 5Dan from Journey Inside My Mind Podcast provides his last 5 in 5Check out Dan at www.jimmpodcast.blogspot.com www.daveslounge.com (Music to Chill to)www.denverpost.com (Today in Music History)www.manlygeek.com www.americanpublicmedia.publicmedia.orgwww.dailysourcecode.com (Adam Curry)

                        Feedburner added some technology that is not working with Juice (formerly ipodder software). To fix this:Log into your Feedburner feedClick on 'Standard Stats' under the "SERVICES" area on the left side.Take the check mark off "Item enclosure downloads (podcast downloads)"SAVE your changes.Thanks to: Georgehttp://EclecticMix.comhttp://OneMinuteHowTo.comRichwww.audiogumshoe.comand JTwww.freemusicianlist.com  for the heads up on this. To read more about this in the Feedburner support area go to Here 

                        Interactive Podcasts. Dave gets some insights from Greg of the 5 Questions Podcast. Check it out at www.5questions.net

                        Dave used Podproducer to Make this Show

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=113294#Mon, 24 Jul 2006 23:29:00 -040019:01falsefull4646Dave Goes Dingy - Podcast Promotion Ideas -045Dave has some fun playing with Jason Robertshaw of www.cephalopodcast.com and trys to find a new opening.

                        Dave discusses an idea that came about in today's School of Podcasting Roundtable (available to members of the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.com ) using promotional drink coasters from WWW.BRANDERS.COM where you can get your logo put on a coaster. (couretesy of Johnathon of www.HollywoodComediansRadio.com

                        Last 5 in 5 courtest of Twilight of www.twilightandthebes.com 1. Nate and Di www.nateandi.com  "The Nate and Di Show is a podcast intended for Mature Audiences Only. We are blasphemous and have potty mouths!"

                        2. Punk Radio www.punkyradio.com Half an hour of X-rated music and mayhem from The Heart of Sherwood Forest featuring tracks you've never heard before, expressions you've never heard before and jokes you'll never want to hear again.

                        3. The Twisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.com The Twisted Pickle Show is a guy in Omaha sharing humor and stories meant to help you not take anything in life serious. Personal, sometimes funny stories, all told without his wife knowing the show exists.....so far....

                        4. The Bitterest Pill http://www.thebitterestpill.com/Comedy, Commentary, and Music from a stay home Dad/Shut In

                        5. Best of the Left Podcast www.bestoftheleftpodcast.com/A Podcast where we play the best of talk radio on the left side of the dial. Real radio, real liberal. Condensed into neat, commute sized, chunks.

                        ]]>Dave has some fun playing with Jason Robertshaw of www.cephalopodcast.com and trys to find a new opening.

                        Dave discusses an idea that came about in today's School of Podcasting Roundtable (available to members of the School of Podcasting www.schoolofpodcasting.com ) using promotional drink coasters from WWW.BRANDERS.COM where you can get your logo put on a coaster. (couretesy of Johnathon of www.HollywoodComediansRadio.com

                        Last 5 in 5 courtest of Twilight of www.twilightandthebes.com 1. Nate and Di www.nateandi.com  "The Nate and Di Show is a podcast intended for Mature Audiences Only. We are blasphemous and have potty mouths!"

                        2. Punk Radio www.punkyradio.com Half an hour of X-rated music and mayhem from The Heart of Sherwood Forest featuring tracks you've never heard before, expressions you've never heard before and jokes you'll never want to hear again.

                        3. The Twisted Pickle www.thetwistedpickle.com The Twisted Pickle Show is a guy in Omaha sharing humor and stories meant to help you not take anything in life serious. Personal, sometimes funny stories, all told without his wife knowing the show exists.....so far....

                        4. The Bitterest Pill http://www.thebitterestpill.com/Comedy, Commentary, and Music from a stay home Dad/Shut In

                        5. Best of the Left Podcast www.bestoftheleftpodcast.com/A Podcast where we play the best of talk radio on the left side of the dial. Real radio, real liberal. Condensed into neat, commute sized, chunks.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=110878#Mon, 17 Jul 2006 01:47:00 -040015:40falsefull4545Interview CEO of Voiceindigo John Mayerhofer -044Dave interviews  John Mayerhofer the CEO of www.Voiceindigo.com a service that will help deliver your podcast to phones.

                        Dave mentions a new segment "5 in 5" inspired by Joe of www.salesroundup.com This is where you tell us (not so much your favorites but) what were the last 5 podcasts you listened to (do NOT include this one). If you want to say if you liked it or not, feel free but try to keep your comments under 5 minutes (hence 5 in 5).  Call it in a 888-563-3228 (if possible use a land line - better yet record it and send us the mp3 file).

                        Dave's "Last 5 in 5"www.musicproshow.com www.musicbusinessradio.com www.podcast411.com www.thebitterestpill.com www.themarketerspodcast.com

                        For more information about Voiceindigo go to

                        http://www.voiceindigo.com/podcasters

                        See you at the Expo

                         

                        ]]>Dave interviews  John Mayerhofer the CEO of www.Voiceindigo.com a service that will help deliver your podcast to phones.

                        Dave mentions a new segment "5 in 5" inspired by Joe of www.salesroundup.com This is where you tell us (not so much your favorites but) what were the last 5 podcasts you listened to (do NOT include this one). If you want to say if you liked it or not, feel free but try to keep your comments under 5 minutes (hence 5 in 5).  Call it in a 888-563-3228 (if possible use a land line - better yet record it and send us the mp3 file).

                        Dave's "Last 5 in 5"www.musicproshow.com www.musicbusinessradio.com www.podcast411.com www.thebitterestpill.com www.themarketerspodcast.com

                        For more information about Voiceindigo go to

                        http://www.voiceindigo.com/podcasters

                        See you at the Expo

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=108697#Mon, 10 Jul 2006 02:47:00 -040019:17falsefull4444 Podcast Awards - Is Your RSS Validated? SURPRISE! -043

                        Dave gets notified about the Podcaster Awards and in checking eligibility discovers his RSS feed is NOT 100% valid. As the deadline is 7/15 you may want to get cracking on validating your feed, and alerting your listeners (that is if you care about these types of things - it might attract more sponsors if you were people's choice 2006).

                        Specials thanks to Curt from http://www.digitalslobpod.com for opening the show.

                        To check your feed go to www.feedvalidator.org

                        See everyone in California.

                        UPDATE: I sent an email to Todd Cochrane and he explained the RSS stipulation was to make sure a submission IS a podcast as some submit items that have NO RSS feed at all. Other sites such as clickcaster.com can only be viewed in itunes. Minor issues that can't be helped would be (more than likely) overlooked (I'm paraphrasing what Todd said).

                        ]]>

                        Dave gets notified about the Podcaster Awards and in checking eligibility discovers his RSS feed is NOT 100% valid. As the deadline is 7/15 you may want to get cracking on validating your feed, and alerting your listeners (that is if you care about these types of things - it might attract more sponsors if you were people's choice 2006).

                        Specials thanks to Curt from http://www.digitalslobpod.com for opening the show.

                        To check your feed go to www.feedvalidator.org

                        See everyone in California.

                        UPDATE: I sent an email to Todd Cochrane and he explained the RSS stipulation was to make sure a submission IS a podcast as some submit items that have NO RSS feed at all. Other sites such as clickcaster.com can only be viewed in itunes. Minor issues that can't be helped would be (more than likely) overlooked (I'm paraphrasing what Todd said).

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=107481#Thu, 06 Jul 2006 01:45:00 -040010:56falsefull4343Tricks of the Podcasting Masters: Rob Walch Interview -042Dave interviews Rob of www.podcast411.com about the Book that he co-authored with Murr Lafferty (www.ishouldbewriting.com ) and other podcasts). Rob discusses "behind the scenes" of how the book "Tricks of the Podcasting Masters" came about, and Dave provides his opinion on the book. (Available at http://www.amazon.com  

                        Students Only Podcast: Dave talks about blurbrry.com and the Podshow Delivery Network roll out. Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        View the School of Podcasting Page at blubrry.com

                        ]]>Dave interviews Rob of www.podcast411.com about the Book that he co-authored with Murr Lafferty (www.ishouldbewriting.com ) and other podcasts). Rob discusses "behind the scenes" of how the book "Tricks of the Podcasting Masters" came about, and Dave provides his opinion on the book. (Available at http://www.amazon.com  

                        Students Only Podcast: Dave talks about blurbrry.com and the Podshow Delivery Network roll out. Sign up at www.schoolofpodcasting.com

                        View the School of Podcasting Page at blubrry.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=106512#Sun, 02 Jul 2006 23:35:00 -040018:53falsefull4242The Art of the Interview - Martin Perlich Interview -041Dave interviews Martin Perlich a 40+ year veteran of many forms of media. He is the author of the book "The Art of the Interview - a step by step guide to insightful interviewng from Empty Press

                        Dave interviews Martin on his book tour for his new book "Wild Times" and Dave's choice of microphones was great (um, if I wanted to pick up all the ambience of Borders). Martin "Schools me" on interviewing skills.

                        If this is the first time you're heard this show, the audio is typically not this bad. I tried to edit this, but I needed to keep both the left and right channels.

                        Dave points out his own "Crap questions" and explains why they are crap (things like his history, experience should be listed before the interview - as a set up - not something your intervewee needs to answer for the 100th time).

                        Martin's book has lots of good tips (how to prepare, listen, how and when to use a hard hitting question), and is filled with fun stories as you get to read how he approached different interviews.

                        I recommend the book for anyone who does interviews on their podcast. You're opening questions (along with the questions that follow) will definitely improve. Your audience will thank you.

                        ]]>Dave interviews Martin Perlich a 40+ year veteran of many forms of media. He is the author of the book "The Art of the Interview - a step by step guide to insightful interviewng from Empty Press

                        Dave interviews Martin on his book tour for his new book "Wild Times" and Dave's choice of microphones was great (um, if I wanted to pick up all the ambience of Borders). Martin "Schools me" on interviewing skills.

                        If this is the first time you're heard this show, the audio is typically not this bad. I tried to edit this, but I needed to keep both the left and right channels.

                        Dave points out his own "Crap questions" and explains why they are crap (things like his history, experience should be listed before the interview - as a set up - not something your intervewee needs to answer for the 100th time).

                        Martin's book has lots of good tips (how to prepare, listen, how and when to use a hard hitting question), and is filled with fun stories as you get to read how he approached different interviews.

                        I recommend the book for anyone who does interviews on their podcast. You're opening questions (along with the questions that follow) will definitely improve. Your audience will thank you.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=104217#Sun, 25 Jun 2006 20:58:00 -040021:35falsefull4141 Is Content Really King? Allen Stewart Part II -040In part 2 of my interview with Allen Stewart of www.themarketerspodcast.com Allen talks about his Podcasting has boosted his business, and the question "How can I make money from a podcast?" man not mean "advertising and sponsorship. We discuss viral marketing, and making a connection with your listeners.

                        See me at the Expo!Just a reminder that the Podcasting Expo is right around the corner.

                        Coming in the future, how to conduct interviews with the MArtin Perlich, Author of the Book "The Art of the Interview - a step by step guide to insightful interviewing."

                        ]]>In part 2 of my interview with Allen Stewart of www.themarketerspodcast.com Allen talks about his Podcasting has boosted his business, and the question "How can I make money from a podcast?" man not mean "advertising and sponsorship. We discuss viral marketing, and making a connection with your listeners.

                        See me at the Expo!Just a reminder that the Podcasting Expo is right around the corner.

                        Coming in the future, how to conduct interviews with the MArtin Perlich, Author of the Book "The Art of the Interview - a step by step guide to insightful interviewing."

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=101825#Mon, 19 Jun 2006 04:00:00 -040024:20falsefull4040Marketing 101 With Allen Stewart of the Marketer's Podcast - 039Get your own domain name for $6.95 at GoDaddy.com by using the coupon code " cooler3 "

                        This is part one of my interview with Allen Stewart of the marketer's podcast (www.themarketerspodcast.com ) Allen is a great guy, and every conversation with Allen always ends with me full of ideas. I LOVE people who make me think.

                        I realize that many of us do not have a marketing baground so I asked Allen to do a "Marketing 101." For those that are looking to monetize their podcast this is right up your alley. However, if you're not you can still get a TON out of this interview. Simply substitute the word "Customer" with the word "Subscriber."

                        I also answer some listener email from Cornelius Fichtner of the Project Management Podcast (http://pmpodcast.blogspot.com ) Who asks about selling, or having a "Premium" podcast. I use Premium Podcasting and recently created a tutorial for those who want a glimpse on how I set up m site to use this tool. (note: use the coupon code " expo " and get 50% off your first month). You can also get a 4 day free trial of Premium Podcasting for $1. For more information go to their site. www.premiumpodcasting.com

                        ]]>Get your own domain name for $6.95 at GoDaddy.com by using the coupon code " cooler3 "

                        This is part one of my interview with Allen Stewart of the marketer's podcast (www.themarketerspodcast.com ) Allen is a great guy, and every conversation with Allen always ends with me full of ideas. I LOVE people who make me think.

                        I realize that many of us do not have a marketing baground so I asked Allen to do a "Marketing 101." For those that are looking to monetize their podcast this is right up your alley. However, if you're not you can still get a TON out of this interview. Simply substitute the word "Customer" with the word "Subscriber."

                        I also answer some listener email from Cornelius Fichtner of the Project Management Podcast (http://pmpodcast.blogspot.com ) Who asks about selling, or having a "Premium" podcast. I use Premium Podcasting and recently created a tutorial for those who want a glimpse on how I set up m site to use this tool. (note: use the coupon code " expo " and get 50% off your first month). You can also get a 4 day free trial of Premium Podcasting for $1. For more information go to their site. www.premiumpodcasting.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=99794#Mon, 12 Jun 2006 00:47:00 -040023:49falsefull3939Can Podcasters Make Money with Affiliate Links? Audio Technica 2020 Review -038A slightly longer than usual show as Dave packs in an an interview with Heather Vale as well as shows off some different microphones

                        Microphone Review:I really like the sound of the Audio Technica 2020. It's very clear, and while the 3035 handles the bottom end, and has some additional features, if you're on a budget, the 2020 is a great microphone.

                        Microphone #1 Audio Technica 2020 (get the mic, and free windscreen for $99 )Microphone #2 Audio Technica 3035  (get the mic, and free windscreen for $199 )Micropphone #3 MXL 67 ($100)

                         Interview with Heather Vale

                        We talk about her book Clickbank Affiliate Confessions. Heather answers questions like, "Do you need an email list, how do podcasters get their listeners back to their website?" and more. Get the Book "Clickbank Affiliate Confessions" for more information check out Heather at www.heathervale.com and her podcasts:

                        http://TodaysSuccessMinute.com http://www.SuccessUnwrappedRadio.comToday's Success Minute (at PCN)

                        Hear Dave Jackson interview at Entrepreneures JourneyDave was interviewed at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/464/audio-interview-with-dave-jackson-from-schoolofpodcastingcom/ The Entrepeneurs Journey has lots of articles and podcast for anyone looking to start and run their own business.

                         

                        ]]>A slightly longer than usual show as Dave packs in an an interview with Heather Vale as well as shows off some different microphones

                        Microphone Review:I really like the sound of the Audio Technica 2020. It's very clear, and while the 3035 handles the bottom end, and has some additional features, if you're on a budget, the 2020 is a great microphone.

                        Microphone #1 Audio Technica 2020 (get the mic, and free windscreen for $99 )Microphone #2 Audio Technica 3035  (get the mic, and free windscreen for $199 )Micropphone #3 MXL 67 ($100)

                         Interview with Heather Vale

                        We talk about her book Clickbank Affiliate Confessions. Heather answers questions like, "Do you need an email list, how do podcasters get their listeners back to their website?" and more. Get the Book "Clickbank Affiliate Confessions" for more information check out Heather at www.heathervale.com and her podcasts:

                        http://TodaysSuccessMinute.com http://www.SuccessUnwrappedRadio.comToday's Success Minute (at PCN)

                        Hear Dave Jackson interview at Entrepreneures JourneyDave was interviewed at http://www.entrepreneurs-journey.com/464/audio-interview-with-dave-jackson-from-schoolofpodcastingcom/ The Entrepeneurs Journey has lots of articles and podcast for anyone looking to start and run their own business.

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=97589#Mon, 05 Jun 2006 02:15:00 -040021:43falsefull3838Avoiding Cease and Desist Letters with Rich Palmer Dave asks the question, "What are you using to stay organized?" as he had accidentally missplaced his interview with Rich Palmer of www.audiogumshoe.com the show is 19 minutes long (a little long, but an interesting story).

                        Random Link http://ccmixter.org/

                        
                        

                        Please note the audio review of the Audio Technica 2020 microphone will be in the future (I really needed to get  Rich's story out to the public).

                        ]]>Dave asks the question, "What are you using to stay organized?" as he had accidentally missplaced his interview with Rich Palmer of www.audiogumshoe.com the show is 19 minutes long (a little long, but an interesting story).

                        Random Link http://ccmixter.org/

                        
                        

                        Please note the audio review of the Audio Technica 2020 microphone will be in the future (I really needed to get  Rich's story out to the public).

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=95217#Sun, 28 May 2006 19:15:00 -040019:07falsefull3737Audio Technica 20/20 - and The iRiver T30 Fooled Me -036Thanks to everyone who commmented about the last show. Well I found out the hard way that the T30 DOES NOT allows you to plug in a microphone to the LINE IN. The line is for plugging in a CD player (or any other line device). Dave's answer was to go to www.ebay.com and buy a refurbished iRiver 899 (total cost 95.11 )

                        If you're not looking to spend the giant bucks on a Marantz 660 ($500), Roland-Edirol has the new R-09 coming out later this month ($400). Allan Stewart from the Marketers Podcast let me know that new models of Minidisc recorders have the ability to download to a PC. I checked into this an sony has a model MZM100 and it does connect via USB (Click the link and buy a new MZ-M100 from us and receive a free pair of Sony MDR-7506 headphones ($99 value) with your order. While supplies last! at samedaymusic.com).

                        Keep in mind that line in does NOT equal mic in.

                        Thanks to:Peter from www.carbuyingscams.com Alan Stewart www.themarketerspodcast.com Eric http://www.naughtiusmaximus.com/Russ www.razinggiants.com

                        ]]>Thanks to everyone who commmented about the last show. Well I found out the hard way that the T30 DOES NOT allows you to plug in a microphone to the LINE IN. The line is for plugging in a CD player (or any other line device). Dave's answer was to go to www.ebay.com and buy a refurbished iRiver 899 (total cost 95.11 )

                        If you're not looking to spend the giant bucks on a Marantz 660 ($500), Roland-Edirol has the new R-09 coming out later this month ($400). Allan Stewart from the Marketers Podcast let me know that new models of Minidisc recorders have the ability to download to a PC. I checked into this an sony has a model MZM100 and it does connect via USB (Click the link and buy a new MZ-M100 from us and receive a free pair of Sony MDR-7506 headphones ($99 value) with your order. While supplies last! at samedaymusic.com).

                        Keep in mind that line in does NOT equal mic in.

                        Thanks to:Peter from www.carbuyingscams.com Alan Stewart www.themarketerspodcast.com Eric http://www.naughtiusmaximus.com/Russ www.razinggiants.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=92395#Sat, 20 May 2006 13:36:00 -040017:35falsefull3636iRiver T30 Vs 899 Comparison -035Dave talks about his old iRiver 899 and his new iRiver T30 he also talks about Mobile Entertainment magazine, and the mystery of www.cobyusa.com and their uint the MP-C941

                        Also attention Students don't miss the "Podcaster Roundtable" Next Sunday (details are at the top of the screen when you login).

                        Notice: The price of a subscription is going up June 1st. Anyone signing up before June 1 will not have their fees increase.

                        ]]>Dave talks about his old iRiver 899 and his new iRiver T30 he also talks about Mobile Entertainment magazine, and the mystery of www.cobyusa.com and their uint the MP-C941

                        Also attention Students don't miss the "Podcaster Roundtable" Next Sunday (details are at the top of the screen when you login).

                        Notice: The price of a subscription is going up June 1st. Anyone signing up before June 1 will not have their fees increase.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=90487#Mon, 15 May 2006 00:29:00 -040013:22falsefull3535Saving 60 Bucks a Year with Podcaster News Network -034Dave answers some listener about the Podcaster News Network a (He does a podcast called Sloppy Seconds making fun of the Music Buisiness on that site).

                        He also mentioned Kiptronic for a way to exhcnage promos (which is his preferred method).

                        Link of the week: www.podcastpromos.com

                        Lastly Dave talks about a new Virtual Expo thats coming out and this time the booths will be open to the public for FREE. Also if you sign up by may, you get a CD of the conference for free.

                        ]]>Dave answers some listener about the Podcaster News Network a (He does a podcast called Sloppy Seconds making fun of the Music Buisiness on that site).

                        He also mentioned Kiptronic for a way to exhcnage promos (which is his preferred method).

                        Link of the week: www.podcastpromos.com

                        Lastly Dave talks about a new Virtual Expo thats coming out and this time the booths will be open to the public for FREE. Also if you sign up by may, you get a CD of the conference for free.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=88207#Mon, 08 May 2006 10:58:00 -040017:43falsefull3434Understanding Feedburner Stats, and Other Great Promotional Tools -033Dave interviews John Zeratsky of www.feedburner.com and John explains the recent stats upgrade, some of the great tools (like pingshot), and the new email service.

                        Brian had asked what service I was using. I use Kall8 (and if you use the link below I get a "finders fee). It's easy and its only a couple of bucks a month.

                        Have you checked out their email signature headline animator? Cool!

                        ]]>Dave interviews John Zeratsky of www.feedburner.com and John explains the recent stats upgrade, some of the great tools (like pingshot), and the new email service.

                        Brian had asked what service I was using. I use Kall8 (and if you use the link below I get a "finders fee). It's easy and its only a couple of bucks a month.

                        Have you checked out their email signature headline animator? Cool!

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=85736#Mon, 01 May 2006 03:10:00 -040019:25falsefull3333 iPodcomments and Expo Reflections -032Length 20 Minutes (I'm SORRY!)

                        Live shows are fun (starting with Dave calling this show #31 when its 32).

                        Dave shares some comments from the audience about their iPod, and shares his insights into the Expo this weekend. If you hear bad reviews as the reviewer what time they attended.

                        Thank to all the commenters

                        Farrel from http://www.talkingcommunications.com/George from http://eclecticmix.com/Chris from http://amateurtraveler.com/ (sorry for the mail noises)

                        Expo Organizerswww.co-opworld.com www.1stpod.com

                        Saw this at the expowww.logoyouraudio.com (get your own mp3 player)http://www.iamplify.com/ (Sell your podcast)

                        ]]>Length 20 Minutes (I'm SORRY!)

                        Live shows are fun (starting with Dave calling this show #31 when its 32).

                        Dave shares some comments from the audience about their iPod, and shares his insights into the Expo this weekend. If you hear bad reviews as the reviewer what time they attended.

                        Thank to all the commenters

                        Farrel from http://www.talkingcommunications.com/George from http://eclecticmix.com/Chris from http://amateurtraveler.com/ (sorry for the mail noises)

                        Expo Organizerswww.co-opworld.com www.1stpod.com

                        Saw this at the expowww.logoyouraudio.com (get your own mp3 player)http://www.iamplify.com/ (Sell your podcast)

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=83229#Mon, 24 Apr 2006 00:44:00 -040020:20falsefull3232Contest Tips - Win a Free Subscription - See You at the Expo - 031Length 15 Minutes

                        Dave talks about some tips he has discovered in doing contests (like people may not even hear your show for DAYS after you announce your contest).

                         Sign up today to attend the Expo ($11)

                        Check out the School of Podcasting Booth

                        ]]>Length 15 Minutes

                        Dave talks about some tips he has discovered in doing contests (like people may not even hear your show for DAYS after you announce your contest).

                         Sign up today to attend the Expo ($11)

                        Check out the School of Podcasting Booth

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=82438#Fri, 21 Apr 2006 09:22:00 -040014:18falsefull3131Should I buy an iPod? - Getting Along in the Community -030In this 19 Minute show Dave talks the pros and cons of buying an ipod (as he bought one). He compares his 60G iPod to his Rio Carbon, and iRiver 899. You can check out Dave's iPod model HERE (amazon)

                        iPod Pros:Lots of room Very easy to updateAccessoriesSmart Play lists

                        Cons:Only one play back speedCan't delete a file of the ipod (delete on computer and sync)Can't easily mark a file as "played."Price

                        Dave answers some listener email about http://podcastgen.sourceforge.net and what to do with the XML file. (Thanks Kevin)

                        Lastly if you're going to the Ineternational Podcasting Expo (online) order your tickets here to help support the school of podcasting.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcheck.com

                         

                        ]]>In this 19 Minute show Dave talks the pros and cons of buying an ipod (as he bought one). He compares his 60G iPod to his Rio Carbon, and iRiver 899. You can check out Dave's iPod model HERE (amazon)

                        iPod Pros:Lots of room Very easy to updateAccessoriesSmart Play lists

                        Cons:Only one play back speedCan't delete a file of the ipod (delete on computer and sync)Can't easily mark a file as "played."Price

                        Dave answers some listener email about http://podcastgen.sourceforge.net and what to do with the XML file. (Thanks Kevin)

                        Lastly if you're going to the Ineternational Podcasting Expo (online) order your tickets here to help support the school of podcasting.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcheck.com

                         

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=81648#Wed, 19 Apr 2006 03:18:00 -040019:08falsefull3030Quick Updates - New Podcasting Magazines -029Heloo everyone.This show is quick as I was taking care of my family this week (My brother and sister in law were in an accident - they're fine, but were out of commission most of the weekend).

                        Podcast User Magazine Issue 3 

                        Podcast Central Issue #1 (zipped) 

                        Check out this cool box (you might have to scroll down to see it (and you can hear a sample)

                        Congrats to Doug on winning a free month's subscription!

                        ]]>Heloo everyone.This show is quick as I was taking care of my family this week (My brother and sister in law were in an accident - they're fine, but were out of commission most of the weekend).

                        Podcast User Magazine Issue 3 

                        Podcast Central Issue #1 (zipped) 

                        Check out this cool box (you might have to scroll down to see it (and you can hear a sample)

                        Congrats to Doug on winning a free month's subscription!

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=78654#Mon, 10 Apr 2006 12:21:00 -040035:34truefull2929Interview with Dan Kuykendall of PodPress -028This show features an interview with the maker of PodPress a really powerful (and easy to install) plugin for Wordpress.

                        Check out this free video tutorial to see PodPress in action

                         

                         

                        Win a Month Subscription to the School of Podcasting simply by adding the Morning Announcements to your favorites at Podcast Pickle

                         Dave was recently Interviewed on The Marketers Podcast a great podcast to help you market yourself to the world. Check out their chicklet page

                        Other sites mentioned:

                         www.karmyntyler.com

                        at times Skype was cutting out, so my apologies for the occasional cutting out of audio.

                        ]]>This show features an interview with the maker of PodPress a really powerful (and easy to install) plugin for Wordpress.

                        Check out this free video tutorial to see PodPress in action

                         

                         

                        Win a Month Subscription to the School of Podcasting simply by adding the Morning Announcements to your favorites at Podcast Pickle

                         Dave was recently Interviewed on The Marketers Podcast a great podcast to help you market yourself to the world. Check out their chicklet page

                        Other sites mentioned:

                         www.karmyntyler.com

                        at times Skype was cutting out, so my apologies for the occasional cutting out of audio.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=76153#Mon, 03 Apr 2006 05:57:00 -040035:34falsefull2828Live Vs Post Production Sam Wealer Triyo.com (formerly PhpFM) -027www.triyo.com where we talk about Triyofeed Kick off from Jeff at www.jrdonline.com Email from Bob www.JapanConsidered.org Brent www.podshowradio.com Other Sites Mentioned Podcastclicks www.podcastclicks.com Announcer www.jeffradio.com Mixcraft Software www.acoustica.com]]>www.triyo.com where we talk about Triyofeed Kick off from Jeff at www.jrdonline.com Email from Bob www.JapanConsidered.org Brent www.podshowradio.com Other Sites Mentioned Podcastclicks www.podcastclicks.com Announcer www.jeffradio.com Mixcraft Software www.acoustica.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=73904#Tue, 28 Mar 2006 02:10:00 -040024:47falsefull2727Promote Your Podcast with Feedblitz -026Length 24 Minutes

                        Today's Podcasting tip includes some insights into those who thnk they can't podcast becuase they don't have a DJ Voice. RUBISH

                        We also interview Phil Hollows of www.feedblitz.com Here is whattheir chicklet looks like:

                        You can also see your feedblitz stats in your Feedburner Stats As of March 6, 3,4611 Feeds are using Feedblitz. Its a great way for those who don't subscribe to be reminded that a new show is available.]]>Length 24 Minutes

                        Today's Podcasting tip includes some insights into those who thnk they can't podcast becuase they don't have a DJ Voice. RUBISH

                        We also interview Phil Hollows of www.feedblitz.com Here is whattheir chicklet looks like:

                        You can also see your feedblitz stats in your Feedburner Stats As of March 6, 3,4611 Feeds are using Feedblitz. Its a great way for those who don't subscribe to be reminded that a new show is available.]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=70697#Mon, 20 Mar 2006 00:00:00 -040023:55falsefull2626ID3 Tags It's All About The Listener -025Length 18 Minutes

                        Intro: www.urbankook.com

                        Promo review www.womengrow.org

                        Random Linkhttp://www.softpointer.com/AudioShell.htm

                        More information Tutorial at Podcast 411]]>Length 18 Minutes

                        Intro: www.urbankook.com

                        Promo review www.womengrow.org

                        Random Linkhttp://www.softpointer.com/AudioShell.htm

                        More information Tutorial at Podcast 411]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=68789#Mon, 13 Mar 2006 14:05:00 -040017:45falsefull2525Recording Tips From a Sound Engineer -024Mastering Service for podcasters

                        Check out his shows at www.audio2u.com

                        Email From Brent at www.podshowradio.com Erika from www.womengrow.org

                        Random Link PodPress]]>Mastering Service for podcasters

                        Check out his shows at www.audio2u.com

                        Email From Brent at www.podshowradio.com Erika from www.womengrow.org

                        Random Link PodPress]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=66021#Mon, 06 Mar 2006 05:13:00 -040025:33falsefull2424Podcastertoolbar and Podcast Pickle Update -023Length 22 MinutesAdd me To your favorites at the Podcast Pickle Podcast Pickle Community

                        Dave introduces a new resource for Podcasters at www.podcastertoolbar.com

                        Dave catches up with Gary Leland (better known as P. Dilly) of the Podcast Pickle online community for Podcasts and Vidcast. He also helps host other podcasts.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcastpickle.comToday in PodcastingPodcast Pickle ShowWomen Grow Podcast

                        ]]>Length 22 MinutesAdd me To your favorites at the Podcast Pickle Podcast Pickle Community

                        Dave introduces a new resource for Podcasters at www.podcastertoolbar.com

                        Dave catches up with Gary Leland (better known as P. Dilly) of the Podcast Pickle online community for Podcasts and Vidcast. He also helps host other podcasts.

                        Sites Mentionedwww.podcastpickle.comToday in PodcastingPodcast Pickle ShowWomen Grow Podcast

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=63253#Mon, 27 Feb 2006 06:19:00 -040022:03falsefull2323Building Your Audience With Interviews -022Sites Mentioned: My Interview on the Contingency Plan Podcast Miami Valley Musicast

                        Random Link Learn Out Loud Podcast Directory]]>Sites Mentioned: My Interview on the Contingency Plan Podcast Miami Valley Musicast

                        Random Link Learn Out Loud Podcast Directory]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=60729#Mon, 20 Feb 2006 21:12:00 -040014:10falsefull2222Poo Poo on Podcasting? 2006 is Still Kicking Ass -021Length 9:30 Sites Mentioned: www.podcastingnews.com Before you say, "Podcasting is losing its steam, you better check your facts."]]>Length 9:30 Sites Mentioned: www.podcastingnews.com Before you say, "Podcasting is losing its steam, you better check your facts."]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=58437#Tue, 14 Feb 2006 03:24:00 -040009:31falsefull2121Making an Attention Grabbing Podcast Promo =-20Length 17 Minutes

                        We look at some advertising theory and how it applies to a podcast promo. Do you have a promo? Have you made any of the common mistakes? Are you going to make a promo? Here are some tips to keep in mind.

                        Advertisementwww.switchpod.com

                        Promos Played

                        www.nursingstudio.netwww.themshow.comwww.jazzstage.us

                        Promos Can Be Found atwww.podcastpromos.comwww.promos.podshow.comwww.kiptronic.com

                        ]]>Length 17 Minutes

                        We look at some advertising theory and how it applies to a podcast promo. Do you have a promo? Have you made any of the common mistakes? Are you going to make a promo? Here are some tips to keep in mind.

                        Advertisementwww.switchpod.com

                        Promos Played

                        www.nursingstudio.netwww.themshow.comwww.jazzstage.us

                        Promos Can Be Found atwww.podcastpromos.comwww.promos.podshow.comwww.kiptronic.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=55514#Mon, 06 Feb 2006 11:47:00 -040017:03falsefull2020Beware of Pod Oil Salesmen - You Can Make Money With Podcasting! 019Random Linkwww.loopwise.com

                        Book MentionedPodcast Solutions

                        Trusted MarketersThe Marketers Podcast (Alan is a great guy).Red Hot CopyJim Edwards

                        ]]>Random Linkwww.loopwise.com

                        Book MentionedPodcast Solutions

                        Trusted MarketersThe Marketers Podcast (Alan is a great guy).Red Hot CopyJim Edwards

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=52854#Mon, 30 Jan 2006 04:56:00 -040013:37falsefull1919 Audio Merge and Groups and Mics -017www.audiomerge.com
                        ]]>www.audiomerge.com
                        ]]>d562ded00e8d3d14df0b1fb9842319aeThu, 26 Jan 2006 17:00:00 -040006:56falsefull1717Kiptronic and Libsyn Sitting in a Tree -018www.kiptronic.com

                        Now the easiest way to use this technology is to have a Libsyn account. (You're looking at one right now).

                        Click Here to sign up at Libsyn.

                        Click Here to sign up at Kiptronic.com.

                        Want to see the kiptonic survey? Click the "take the 5 second survey" near the top of the page.]]>www.kiptronic.com

                        Now the easiest way to use this technology is to have a Libsyn account. (You're looking at one right now).

                        Click Here to sign up at Libsyn.

                        Click Here to sign up at Kiptronic.com.

                        Want to see the kiptonic survey? Click the "take the 5 second survey" near the top of the page.]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=50964#Tue, 24 Jan 2006 03:10:00 -040030:02falsefull1717Developing Relationships to Promote Your Podcast -016Sites MentionedMy New MY SPACE Pagefeedplayer.com

                        Free Business Cards

                        Juice Website

                        ]]>Sites MentionedMy New MY SPACE Pagefeedplayer.com

                        Free Business Cards

                        Juice Website

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=48448#Tue, 17 Jan 2006 03:09:00 -040009:11falsefull1616(Podcast) Survey Says! Podcast and Listener Survey Results -015 Take Podcaster Survey

                        Take Listener Survey]]> Take Podcaster Survey

                        Take Listener Survey]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=45876#Fri, 06 Jan 2006 04:03:00 -040010:31falsefull1515What Makes a Good Podcast -014Length 10 Minutes People ask all the time, Is this a good podcast? this is defined by the listener.

                        Sites Mentioned The Marketer's Podcast (I heard a n interview with Lorrie Morgan FerraroNationwide CD (inexpensive Postcards)Vista Print 

                        Or if you want an egg cooker check out the Toastmaster 6506

                        ]]>Length 10 Minutes People ask all the time, Is this a good podcast? this is defined by the listener.

                        Sites Mentioned The Marketer's Podcast (I heard a n interview with Lorrie Morgan FerraroNationwide CD (inexpensive Postcards)Vista Print 

                        Or if you want an egg cooker check out the Toastmaster 6506

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=43636#Tue, 27 Dec 2005 02:54:00 -040010:00falsefull1414PODSHOW is NOT the Devil -013Length 12 Minutes Show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com Get 50% off your first month with coupon of "santa"

                        Sites Mentioned www.podcastingnews.com www.podcastoptimization.com www.podcastoptimization.com www.podshow.com]]>Length 12 Minutes Show notes at www.schoolofpodcasting.com Get 50% off your first month with coupon of "santa"

                        Sites Mentioned www.podcastingnews.com www.podcastoptimization.com www.podcastoptimization.com www.podshow.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=41890#Mon, 19 Dec 2005 05:41:00 -040011:34falsefull1313Music in Podcasts - P.W. Fenton Insights -012Length: 20 Minutes Opening by Sean Rogers of the Business Intelligence Network

                        Digital Flotsam can be found at www.digitalflotsam.org

                        Random Link http://clickandbuy.com/US/en/

                        Adobe Audition at Amazon or for more information go to www.adobe.com]]>Length: 20 Minutes Opening by Sean Rogers of the Business Intelligence Network

                        Digital Flotsam can be found at www.digitalflotsam.org

                        Random Link http://clickandbuy.com/US/en/

                        Adobe Audition at Amazon or for more information go to www.adobe.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=40167#Mon, 12 Dec 2005 03:57:00 -040020:22falsefull1212You Don't Have to Be Old to Be Wise -011www.teenpodcasters.com and the producer of The Commoner's View of the World . He talks about the advantages of joining a network, and how building a community can help help all involved.

                        Some examples of of Podcasting Networks including: www.podshow.com www.techpodcasts.com/ http://podsafemusicnetwork.com

                        RANDOM LINK http://themes.wordpress.net]]>www.teenpodcasters.com and the producer of The Commoner's View of the World . He talks about the advantages of joining a network, and how building a community can help help all involved.

                        Some examples of of Podcasting Networks including: www.podshow.com www.techpodcasts.com/ http://podsafemusicnetwork.com

                        RANDOM LINK http://themes.wordpress.net]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=38120#Mon, 05 Dec 2005 03:57:00 -040019:45falsefull1111Podcast Promotion: Is Your Cart Before the Horse? -010Topics Book Review "The Absolute Beginners Guide to Podcasting"

                        Switchpod Interview (web hosting company)

                        Podcast Promotion: Do you have the cart before the horse?

                        Sign up for the additional features at www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>Topics Book Review "The Absolute Beginners Guide to Podcasting"

                        Switchpod Interview (web hosting company)

                        Podcast Promotion: Do you have the cart before the horse?

                        Sign up for the additional features at www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=36697#Mon, 28 Nov 2005 01:42:00 -040016:23falsefull1010How Long Should a Podcast Be? -009KFC from the Podchick Podcast

                        Sites Mentioned: www.taldia.com Get the Newspaper read to you. The David Lawrence Show Premium Podcasting (Sell Your Podcast) Keith and the Girl PK and J Show Podcast 411 Podcast Tools Tips Alway listen to your podcast before posting Learn to Podcast at www.schoolofpodcasting.com also make $$$ referring friends to the School of Podcasting (click the sign up button on the site).]]>KFC from the Podchick Podcast

                        Sites Mentioned: www.taldia.com Get the Newspaper read to you. The David Lawrence Show Premium Podcasting (Sell Your Podcast) Keith and the Girl PK and J Show Podcast 411 Podcast Tools Tips Alway listen to your podcast before posting Learn to Podcast at www.schoolofpodcasting.com also make $$$ referring friends to the School of Podcasting (click the sign up button on the site).]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=35255#Mon, 21 Nov 2005 04:28:00 -040014:24falsefull99Feedburner Booth Interview -008www.richpalmer.com/podcasts

                        Interview with John Zeratsky live from the floor of the Podcasting Expo. I attempt to clean the the background up with sound soap from www.bias-inc.com Also mentioned www.n-track.com multi-track recording software.

                        ]]>www.richpalmer.com/podcasts

                        Interview with John Zeratsky live from the floor of the Podcasting Expo. I attempt to clean the the background up with sound soap from www.bias-inc.com Also mentioned www.n-track.com multi-track recording software.

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=34533#Fri, 18 Nov 2005 03:38:00 -040011:18falsefull88Podcasting Will Change the World-007Length: 15 Minutes

                        Dave talks about some reflections of some of the more frequently asked questions that he heard at the Podcast Expo.

                        Intro: www.typicalpcuser.com Other Sites Mentioned: Digital Flotsam Podcast 411 Podsqod.com Feed Player GCast Podtrac 5 Questions Podcast

                        Tips: Microphone Placement iRiver Speed Control]]>Length: 15 Minutes

                        Dave talks about some reflections of some of the more frequently asked questions that he heard at the Podcast Expo.

                        Intro: www.typicalpcuser.com Other Sites Mentioned: Digital Flotsam Podcast 411 Podsqod.com Feed Player GCast Podtrac 5 Questions Podcast

                        Tips: Microphone Placement iRiver Speed Control]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=33773#Tue, 15 Nov 2005 03:41:00 -040015:26falsefull77Look Mom - I CAN PEE STANDING UP -006Length 7 MinutesDave discusses a different point of view on the RIAA becoming more nervous about Podcasting. Resouces Mentionedwww.beats365.comBlue Snowball USB Microphone

                        Griffin Technology iMic USB Audio Interface

                        
                        

                        Let's kick things off with a little rant about the music industry, shall we? So, picture this: Adam Curry is sweating bullets over being sued for playing licensed music on his podcast. And guess what? The podcasting world is buzzing with complaints about those big, bad record companies. Can you believe it? As a musician, I've got my own beef with the record industry. They're like that one friend who borrows money but never pays you back. But hey, let's be real—playing licensed music and just giving it away? That's a recipe for disaster, my friends. It's like throwing a party and not inviting anyone. The record labels are totally missing the boat here, though. They're not seeing podcasting as a golden opportunity for promo and distribution. Seriously, it's like they think if they ignore it, it’ll just disappear. But guess what? Podcasting is growing, and it’s about time the record labels woke up and smelled the coffee.

                        
                        

                        Now, let's dive into the fun part. Remember when you were a kid, pulling on your mom's leg while she was having a serious phone call? Yeah, that's what podcasting has been doing to the RIAA. We’ve been gnawing at their ankles, and they're finally noticing. We’re like that kid who just learned to stand and pee. And let me tell you, we've got the right to be here now. So instead of whining about those mean record companies, let's celebrate the fact that they're finally paying attention to us. Thank you, record labels, for being so clueless. Your stupidity just opened up a world of opportunities for us podcasters. So, raise your glasses, folks, because we’re not crawling anymore—we’re walking, and it feels good!

                        Takeaways:

                        • Podcasting is finally getting the attention of big record labels, which is wild.
                        • We should celebrate the chaos of record companies freaking out over podcasting.
                        • Remember the good old days when our moms ignored us? Podcasting is now grown up.
                        • The industry is finally realizing that ignoring podcasting won't make it disappear, hello!
                        • The Pentagon is jumping on the podcast train, and we should all be concerned.
                        • Can you believe there’s an MP3 playing toilet seat in Japan? Talk about luxury.
                        
                        ]]>Length 7 MinutesDave discusses a different point of view on the RIAA becoming more nervous about Podcasting. Resouces Mentionedwww.beats365.comBlue Snowball USB Microphone

                        Griffin Technology iMic USB Audio Interface

                        
                        

                        Let's kick things off with a little rant about the music industry, shall we? So, picture this: Adam Curry is sweating bullets over being sued for playing licensed music on his podcast. And guess what? The podcasting world is buzzing with complaints about those big, bad record companies. Can you believe it? As a musician, I've got my own beef with the record industry. They're like that one friend who borrows money but never pays you back. But hey, let's be real—playing licensed music and just giving it away? That's a recipe for disaster, my friends. It's like throwing a party and not inviting anyone. The record labels are totally missing the boat here, though. They're not seeing podcasting as a golden opportunity for promo and distribution. Seriously, it's like they think if they ignore it, it’ll just disappear. But guess what? Podcasting is growing, and it’s about time the record labels woke up and smelled the coffee.

                        
                        

                        Now, let's dive into the fun part. Remember when you were a kid, pulling on your mom's leg while she was having a serious phone call? Yeah, that's what podcasting has been doing to the RIAA. We’ve been gnawing at their ankles, and they're finally noticing. We’re like that kid who just learned to stand and pee. And let me tell you, we've got the right to be here now. So instead of whining about those mean record companies, let's celebrate the fact that they're finally paying attention to us. Thank you, record labels, for being so clueless. Your stupidity just opened up a world of opportunities for us podcasters. So, raise your glasses, folks, because we’re not crawling anymore—we’re walking, and it feels good!

                        Takeaways:

                        • Podcasting is finally getting the attention of big record labels, which is wild.
                        • We should celebrate the chaos of record companies freaking out over podcasting.
                        • Remember the good old days when our moms ignored us? Podcasting is now grown up.
                        • The industry is finally realizing that ignoring podcasting won't make it disappear, hello!
                        • The Pentagon is jumping on the podcast train, and we should all be concerned.
                        • Can you believe there’s an MP3 playing toilet seat in Japan? Talk about luxury.
                        
                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=32519#Wed, 09 Nov 2005 04:44:00 -040007:12falsefull66Free MP3 Tool - Focus on Recording - 005School of Podcasting

                        In this issue we deliver some tips on how you can make your your podcast is "Skip free" as well as a free tool from Zortam to help you manage your MP3 files (there is a tutorial on how to use this software on the site.]]>School of Podcasting

                        In this issue we deliver some tips on how you can make your your podcast is "Skip free" as well as a free tool from Zortam to help you manage your MP3 files (there is a tutorial on how to use this software on the site.]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=32264#Tue, 08 Nov 2005 04:15:00 -040006:38falsefull55Recording Techniques - Mixcraft Insights -004Misxcraft to record a podcast.

                        There is a 13 minute video available at the www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>Misxcraft to record a podcast.

                        There is a 13 minute video available at the www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=30428#Mon, 31 Oct 2005 04:52:00 -040006:15falsefull44How Strong Is Your Bladder (Stupid Human Trick) -003Tip: "Broadcast Using Your Morning Voice" Resources Mentioned Crank City Music Resources added to "The School of Podcasting" More Directories added Tutorial on Troubleshooting Your RSS New Web Host company feared toward Podcasters Podcasting Graphics. Still in Beta! Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>Tip: "Broadcast Using Your Morning Voice" Resources Mentioned Crank City Music Resources added to "The School of Podcasting" More Directories added Tutorial on Troubleshooting Your RSS New Web Host company feared toward Podcasters Podcasting Graphics. Still in Beta! Check out www.schoolofpodcasting.com]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=29001#Mon, 24 Oct 2005 02:11:00 -040010:35falsefull33Make Your Podcast a "MUST HEAR"Look at your podcast from the listener's point of view. "r=Reverse Marketing." We also talk about FAB. Sites Mentioned www.switchpod.com (no longer exists)

                        Podcasting Kits are now available as well. (again no longer)

                        Submit a Press Release to www.prweb.com

                        ]]>Look at your podcast from the listener's point of view. "r=Reverse Marketing." We also talk about FAB. Sites Mentioned www.switchpod.com (no longer exists)

                        Podcasting Kits are now available as well. (again no longer)

                        Submit a Press Release to www.prweb.com

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=28011#Wed, 19 Oct 2005 04:10:00 -040010:35falsefull22First Podcasts Always Stink -001This is our first Podcast, and Dave explains a little about what to expect from the Official Podcast of the School of Podcasting the "Morning Announcements."

                        Mentioned in this episode:

                        Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

                        Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

                        School of Podcasting

                        ]]>This is our first Podcast, and Dave explains a little about what to expect from the Official Podcast of the School of Podcasting the "Morning Announcements."

                        Mentioned in this episode:

                        Join the #1 Podcast Education Site - The School of Podcasting

                        Adam Curry is the co-founder of Podcasting (and the co-host of the No Agenda Show). When asked about learning how to podcast Adam said, "The place to go with the guy who has taught more people how to podcast than anybody I know - Dave Jackson, School of Podcasting.com"

                        School of Podcasting

                        ]]>http://schoolofpodcasting.libsyn.com/index.php?post_id=26755#Wed, 12 Oct 2005 16:00:00 -040007:41falsefull11